^LIBRARY OF THE U N IVER.SITY Of 1LLI NOIS Oie.9173 Un3lg cop. A S.L. HIST. SURVEf Digitized by the Internet Archive in 2011 with funding from University of Illinois Urbana-Champaign http://www.archive.org/details/guidetostudyofunOOillibr A GUIDE TO THE STUDY OF The United States of America Representative Books Reflecting the Development of American Life and Thought Prepared under the Direction of Roy P. Basler J. By Donald H. Mugridge and Blanche P. McCrum ( • ■tr * GENERAL REFERENCE AND BIBLIOGRAPHY DIVISION . REFERENCE DEPARTMENT LIBRARY OF CONGRESS • Washington: i960 UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE WASHINGTON : i960 FOR SALE BY THE SUPERINTENDENT OF DOCUMENTS, WASHINGTON 25, D.C. PRICE $7 O/C Contents Page Introduction IX Acknowledgments Key to Symbols XIII XV Item Nos. CHAPTER I Literature (i6oy-ig^) A. The Thirteen Colonies (1607 -1763) 1-95 B. The Revolution and the New Nation (1764-1819) 96-185 C. Nationalism, Sectionalism, and Schism ( 1 820-1 870) 186-682 D. The Gilded Age and After 1914) - E. The First World War and the (1871- 683-1152 : Great Depression (1915-1939) 1 153-1906 F. The Second World War and the Atomic Age (1 940-1 955) 1907-2235 \l c HAPTER II Language A. Dictionaries 2236-2241 B. Grammars and General Studies 2242-2252 C. Dialects, Regionalisms, and Foreign Languages in America 2253-2271 D. Miscellaneous 2272-2275 CHAPTER III Literary History and Criticism A. Anthologies and Series B. History and Criticism C. Periodicals 2276-2370 2371-2550 2551-2577 Item Nos. Biography and Autobiography 2578-2844 CHAPTER IV CHAPTER V Periodicals and Journalism A. Newspapers: General B. Newspapers: Periods, Regions, Topics C. Individual Newspapers D. Newspapermen E. Foreign Language Periodicals F. The Practice of Journalism G. Magazines: General H. Individual Magazines I. The Press and Society CHAPTER VI Geography A. General and Physical Geography B. Geology and Soil C. Climate and Weather D. Plants and Animals E. Historical Geography and Atlases F. Polar Exploration CHAPTER VII The American Indian A. General Works B. Archaeology and Prehistory C. Tribes and Tribal Groups D. Religion, Art, and Folklore E. The White Advance F. The Twentieth Century and 2845-2850 2851-2865 2866-2876 2877-2894 2895-2899 2900-2912 2913-2919 2920-2926 2927-2932 2933- 2 94i 2942-2947 2948-2953 2954-2966 2967-2976 2977-2981 2982-2989 2990-2997 2998-3014 3015-3021 3022-3037 3038-3043 III IV / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES hem Nos. CHAPTER VIII General History A. Historiography B. General Works C. The New World D. The Thirteen Colonies E. The American Revolution F. Federal America (1783-18 15) G. The "Middle Period" (1815-60) H. Slavery, the Civil War, and Recon struction (to 1877) I. Grant to McKinley (1869-1901) J. Theodore Roosevelt to Wilson (1901-21) K. Since 1920 3044-3069 3070-3152 3153-3175 3176-3236 3237-3272 3273-33" 33I2-335 8 3359-3417 34 1 8-345 1 345 2 -3474 3475-35oob CHAPTER IX Diplomatic History and Foreign Relations A. Diplomatic History Ai. General Works Aii. Period Studies Aiii. Personal Records Aiv. The British Empire Av. Russia Avi. Other European Nations Avii. Latin America: General Aviii. Latin America: Individual Nations Aix. Asia B. Foreign Relations Bi. Administration Bii. Democratic Control Biii. Policies Biv. Economic Policy 3501-3526 3527-3542 3543-3549 355°"3559 3560-3568 3569-3573 3574-3579 3580-3587 3588-3597 3598-3608 3609-3616 3617-3635 3636-3642 CHAPTER X Military History and the Armed Forces A. General Works B. The Army 3643-3652 3653-3665 Item Nos. C. The Navy 3666-3677 D. Wars of the United States Di. The Revolution 3678-3684 Dii. 1798-1848 3685-3689 Diii. The Civil War 3690-3706 Div. The Spanish-American War 3707-3708 Dv. World War I 37°9 _ 37 I 6 Dvi. World War II 37 I 7~37 2 7 CHAPTER XI Intellectual History A. General Works 3728-3737 B. Periods 3738-3749 C. Topics 3750-3762 D. Localities 3763-3767 E. International Influences: General 3768-3772 F. International Influences: By Country 3773-3780 CHAPTER XII Local History: Regions, States, Cities A. General Works, including series 3781-4025 B. New England: General 4026-4031 C. New England: Local 4032-4042 D. The Middle Atlantic States 4043-4065 E. The South: General 4066-4084 F. The South Adantic States: Local 4085-4096 G. The Old Southwest: General 4097-4098 The Old Southwest: Local 4099-4108 The Old Northwest: General 4 109-4 117 The Old Northwest: Local 41 18-4144 The Far West 4145-4150 L. The Great Plains: General 4151-4164 M. The Great Plains: Local 4165-4171 N. The Rocky Mountain Region: General 4172-4177 O. The Rocky Mountain Region: Local 4178-4185 P. The Far Southwest: General 4186-4191 Q. The Far Southwest: Local 4 192-4 199 R. California 4200-421 1 S. The Pacific Northwest: General 4212-4214 T. The Pacific Northwest: Local U. Overseas Possessions CHAPTER XIII Travel and Travelers A. General Works 4223-4230 B. Anthologies 4231-4235 C. 50 Selected Travelers, 1 743-1 894 (chronologically arranged by the date of their travels) 4236-4389 CHAPTER XIV Population, Immigration, and Minorities A. Population 4390-4403 B. Immigration: General 4404-4417 C. Immigration: Policy 4418-4425 D. Minorities 4426-4435 E. Negroes 4436-4451 F. Jews 4452-4462 G. Orientals 4463-4469 H. North Americans 4470-4476 I. Germans 4477-4481 J. Scandinavians 4482-4487 K. Other Stocks 4488-4498 CHAPTER XV Society A. Some General Views 4499-4513 B. Social History: Periods 4514-4522 C. Social History: Topics 4523-4534 D. Social Thought 4535—4545 E. General Sociology; Social Psychology 4546-4558 F. The Family 4559~4573 G. Communities: General 4574-4578 H. Communities: Rural 4579—4585 I. Communities: Urban 4586-4599 J. City Planning; Housing 4600-4613 K. Social Problems; Social Work 4614-4627 L. Dependency; Social Security 4628-4638 M. Delinquency and Correction 4639-4660 CONTENTS / V hem Nos. hem Nos. 42 1 5-42 1 7 CHAPTER XVI 4218-4222 Communications A. The Post Office; Express Companies 4661-4671 B. Telegraph, Cable, Telephone 4672-4681 C. Radio, Television: Broadcasting 4682-4698 D. Radio, Television: The Audience 4699-4705 E. Government Regulation 4706-47 11 CHAPTER XVII Science and Technology A. General Works B. Particular Sciences C. Individual Scientists D. Science and Government E. Invention F. Engineering CHAPTER XVIII Medicine and Public Health A. Medicine in General B. Physicians and Surgeons C. Psychiatry D. Other Specialties E. Hospitals and Nursing F. Medical Education G. Public Health H. Medical Economics CHAPTER XIX Entertainment 4712-4730 4731-4741 4742-4760 4761-4779 4780-4792 4793-4803 4804-4817 4818-4832 4833-4840 4841-4844 4845-4854 4855-4861 4862-4881 4882-4891 4892-4896 A. General Works B. The American Stage Bi. History 4897-4906 Bii. Criticism 4907-4912 Biii. Particular Stage Groups, Theaters, Movements, etc. 4913-4926 Biv. Biography: Actors and Actresses 4927-4939 Bv. Biography: Directors, Producers, etc. 4940-4943 VI / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Item Nos. C. Motion Pictures Ci. History 4944-4946 Cii. Special Aspects and Analyses 4947-4951 Ciii. Biography: Actors and Actresses 4952-4956 Civ. Biography: Directors, Producers, etc. 4957-4963 D. Other Forms of Entertainment Di. Radio and Television 4964-4966 Dii. The Dance in America 4967-4972 Diii. Vaudeville and Burlesque 4973-4976 Div. Showboats, Circuses, etc. 4977-4982 CHAPTER xx Sports and Recreation A. General B. Community and Scholastic Activities C. Particular Sports and Recreations Ci. Auto-Racing and Motoring Cii. Baseball Ciii. Boating Civ. Boxing Cv. Football Cvi. Golf and Tennis Cvii. Horse-Racing Cviii. Miscellaneous D. General Field Sports 4983-4996 4997-5000 5001-5007 5008-5015 5016-5022 5023-5033 5034-5045 5046-5053 5054-5057 5058-5064 5065-5097 CHAPTER XXI Education A. General Works Ai. Historical and Descriptive Aii. Philosophical and Theoretical B. Primary and Secondary Schools Bi. General and Historical Works Bii. Preschool and Primary Grades Biii. Secondary Schools C. Colleges and Universities Ci. General and Historical Works Cii. Individual Institutions D. Education of Special Groups E. Teachers and Teaching F. Methods and Techniques G. Contemporary Problems and Controversies H. Periodicals and Yearbooks Item Nos. 5232-5239 5240-5249 CHAPTER XXII Philosophy and Psychology A. Philosophy: General Works B. Representative Philosophers C. Psychology CHAPTER XXIII Religion A. General Works B. Period Histories C. Church and State D. Religious Thought; Theology E. Religious Bodies F. Representative Leaders G. Church and Society H. The Negro's Church 5250-5264 5265-5387 5388-5393 5394-5404 5405-5417 5418-5422 5423-5438 5439-5473 5474-5483 5484-5497 5498-5502 CHAPTER XXIV Folklore, Fol\ Music, Fol^ Art A. Legends and Tales: General 55°3 - 55 I 9 B. Legends and Tales: Local 5520-5548 C. Folksongs and Ballads: General 5549-5564 D. Folksongs and Ballads: Local 5565-5584 E. Games and Dances 5585—5592 F. Folk Art and Crafts 5593-5604 5098-5 1 14 51 15-5130 CHAPTER XXV 5131-5146 Music 5147-5151 5152-5159 A. General Histories and Reference Works 5605-5614 5 1 60-5 1 90 B. Contemporary Surveys and Special 5 191-5204 Topics 5615-5625 5205-5212 C. Localities 5626-5630 5213-5223 D. Religious Music 5631-5634 5224-5231 E. Popular Music 5635-5640 CONTENTS / VII F. Jazz G. Orchestras and Bands H. Opera I. Choirs J. Music Education K. Individual Musicians Item Nos. 5641-5646 5647-5654 5655-5663 5664-5667 5668-5672 5673-5687 I. Finance: General J. Finance: Special K. Business: General L. Business: Special M. Labor: General N. Labor: Special Item Nos. 5965-5975 5976-6002 6003-6010 601 1-6030 6031-6042 6043-6058 CHAPTER XXVI Art and Architecture A. The Arts 5688-5697 B. Architecture: General 5698-5703 C. Architecture: Special 5704-5725 D. Interiors 5726-5732 E. Sculpture 5733 _ 574° F. Painting 574 r "5759 G. Painting: Individual Artists 5760-5776 H. Prints and Photographs 5777 — 57^3 I. Decorative Arts 5784—5793 }. Museums 5794-5800 K. Art and History 5801-5807 CHAPTER XXIX Constitution and Government A. Political Thought 6059-6072 B. Constitutional History 6073-6089 C. Constitutional Law 6090-6105 D. Civil Liberties and Rights 6106-6130 E. Government: General 6131-6139 F. The Presidency 6140-6149 G. Congress 61 50-6 169 H. Administration: General 6170-6180 I. Administration: Special 6181-6194 J. State Government 6195-6206 K. Local Government 6207-6218 CHAPTER XXVII hand and Agriculture A. Land 5808-5818 B. Agriculture: History 5819-5838 C. Agriculture: Practice 5839-5850 D. Agriculture: Government Policies 5851-5861 E. Forests, National Parks 5862-5866 F. Animal Husbandry 5867-5874 CHAPTER XXVIII Economic Life A. General Works: Histories 5875-5883 B. Other General Works 5884-5900 C. Industry: General 5901-5906 D. Industry: Special 59°7 _ 59 I 9 E. Transportation: General 5920-5925 F. Transportation: Special 5926—5943 G. Commerce: General 5944 - 595° H. Commerce: Special 595 1— 59^4 CHAPTER XXX Law and Justice A. History: General 6219-6236 B. History: The Supreme Court 6237-6260 C. General Views 6261-6270 D. Digests of American Law 6271-6279 E. Courts and Judges 6280-6293 F. The Judicial Process 6294-6309 G. Administrative Law 63 10-63 16 H. Lawyers and the Legal Profession 6317-6332 CHAPTER XXXI Politics, Parties, Elections A. Politics: General 6333-6340 B. Politics: Special 6341-6346 C. Political Parties 6347-6373 D. Local Studies 6374-6383 E. Machines and Bosses 6384-6391 F. Pressures 6392-6399 VIII / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Item Nos. G. Elections: Machinery 6400-64 1 1 H. Elections: Results 6412-6423 I. Reform 6424-6434 CHAPTER XXXII Boo\s and Libraries A. Printing and Publishing: General 6435-6448 B. Individual Publishers 6449-6453 C. Book Production: Technology and Art 6454-6459 D. Book Selling and Collecting E. Libraries F. Librarianship and Library Use Item Nos. 6460-6465 6466-6475 6476-6487 Appendix: Selected Readings in American Studies Index Page 1081 1091 Introduction FOR ALMOST a century and a half, since the purchase of Thomas Jefferson's library in 1815, materials that reflect the development of the United States have been accumulating at an accelerating rate in the Library of Congress. By copyright de- posit, by acquisition of special collections, and with the help of generous benefactors, the Library has become the home of the largest collection of Ameri- cana in the world. Even if it has not realized the dream of a former Librarian of Congress by as- sembling within its own walls "the complete prod- uct of the American mind in every department of science and literature," it nevertheless has reached such proportions that it justly may be called a mir- ror of the national culture. Generations of scholars, research workers, students, and readers have employed it, not only to see new facts and relationships that have extended their knowledge, but also to gain a clearer vision of the tradition, meaning, and character of civilization in these United States. To further such aims the Library has consistently bent its efforts through the years. It was not, however, until the beginning of the decade just past that a marked increase was ob- served in the number and complexity of questions addressed to the Library about practically all phases of life in the United States. Numerically, of course, the largest number of requests for infor- mation came from individuals and institutions in this country; but the most comprehensive questions frequently were posed by national and public in- stitutions located in the four corners of the world. The reply to one of the second class of inquiries in- volved assembling a bibliography composed of 1,800 Library of Congress printed catalog cards. A com- parable request led to the publication in 1950 of American History and Civilization: A List of Guides and Annotated or Selective Bibliographies. The continuing interest in this bibliographical ap- proach to American affairs, past and present, was made evident by demands that exhausted the first edition and required the publication, in 1951, of a second and revised edition. Many of the movements and events that inspired this growing interest are actively at work in the contemporary world. They include: the place as- 4.-.ILM11 c,n 2 sumed by the United States in the society of nations after World War II; the scientific achievements that have made communication relatively easy and breached international barriers resulting from dis- tance; the increasing cultural maturity of the United States, made evident by growing self-exami- nation and self-expression; the idea current among American educators that general education from childhood to maturity, in all phases of the Ameri- can heritage, will help to increase national unity by basing it on a solid foundation of shared knowledge and understanding; the emergence in higher educa- tion, on both undergraduate and graduate levels, of programs in American studies developed through the interrelation of different disciplines; the estab- lishment in countries as far apart as Germany and Japan of centers for American studies; the plan for exchange professorships put into effect through the Department of State in the interest of international education and mutual understanding between countries; and the work of the American Studies Association, the national society for the interdis- ciplinary study of American civilization. With these and other influences operating in what is virtually a new international age, it has become more and more apparent that the Library of the Congress of the United States must anticipate even greater demands upon its reference and biblio- graphical services to mobilize American materials for increasing usefulness and use. This was the situation in the autumn of 1952, when the Library explored the feasibility of gathering together in one publication a series of bibliographical studies of civilization in the United States to which inquirers might refer. Clearly, if such a project could be carried through successfully it would enable the Library to accomplish two objectives at the same time: that of contributing to a wider diffusion of knowledge about this country throughout the world; and that of preventing wasteful duplication of work resulting from repeated attempts to give individual attention to questions that might be more satisfac- torily answered within the compass of one carefully prepared reference book. The Guide contained in the following pages is the result. The 6 years that then elapsed after the study was IX X / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES launched may be divided roughly into three periods: 1953-1954, the beginning stage, when members o£ the staff, while carrying on their regular assign- ments, studied the problems, planned the scope, put the work in train, and selected basic collections o£ books for various chapters; 1955-1956, when first two and later three persons devoted substantial but varying portions of their time to further selection of materials, as well as to their description and organi- zation; and 1957-1958, when four or five bibliog- raphers were working, as time could be spared from their other duties. During all these years the group at work suffered the usual dislocations from resig- nations, leaves of absence, new appointments, and transfers to other assignments. Thus it may be said that a skeleton staff produced the 32 chapters that compose the volume, which includes about 6,500 main entries and half again as many more references found in annotations and headnotes. The work began and has continued under my general direction, and has been supervised by Henry J. Dubester, Chief of the General Reference and Bibliography Division. Under our instructions, Donald H. Mugridge planned the general scope of the study, personally selected the references included in 24 chapters, and gave editorial revision to work done on them by other bibliographers. The anno- tations in Chapters VI, VII, X, XI, XIII, and XV, and in portions of several other chapters, also are his work. Blanche P. McCrum and Allan G. Anderson are responsible for the eight additional chapters, the most substantial of which is Chapter I, Literature. Other contributors and associates, and specialists in and outside the Library, who have generously helped us with their advice, are named in the section of Acknowledgments which follows this introduction. The paragraphs that follow immediately are de- signed to clarify a few points for the convenience of readers. Selection of Material. References have been selected to meet the requirements of serious readers, students seeking orientation, and librarians engaged in developing collections of books about the United States. It is hoped, however, that the advanced specialist also may find the volume a useful desk reference book, particularly for subjects outside the range of his expert knowledge; and that, although no section on bibliographies as such is included, both he and the less advanced student will be served by the valuable bibliographies regularly noted when these appear in books for which main entries are provided. The broad plan of selection has been to bring to- gether between the covers of one volume materials relating to subjects as divergent as Art and Public Health, and thus to spread before readers a pano- rama of life in the United States, past and present. The basis of selection throughout has been the value of each book as an expression of life in the United States, not necessarily because it has the reputation of being a classic, or because it is a learned mono- graph primarily of interest to the specialist. No book has been chosen for inclusion, however, unless it has seemed significant in the light of our purpose. By the very definition of that purpose many of the selections necessarily embody the thought and learn- ing of the best minds found in this country from its beginning until today. Timeliness, too, has been considered as of the essence; therefore, except in the chapter on Literature, contemporary and revised editions, more readily available through publishers' lists and in libraries, have been preferred to the first publication of a text unless that has remained the best. To arrive at any but a hypothetical date of publi- cation, it was decided to set 1955 as the terminal date for selecting material and to prepare each sec- tion for the printer as it was completed. Parts of the work concluded in or shortly after 1955 conform to these rules. As the work progressed and was expanded, however, publication was necessarily de- layed, and it was possible to include in various other chapters books published as late as 1958. The timeliness of sections is therefore somewhat uneven, something particularly to be regretted in the chap- ters devoted to Literature, Intellectual History, So- ciety, Education, Sports and Recreation, and Entertainment, all of which might have been en- riched by a number of significant recent references if work on them could have been reopened. A policy of extremely rigorous selection has been maintained. The Guide is an introduction to rep- resentative books that reflect the development of life and thought in the United States. In no sense is it a source of information about every conceivable facet of that life; nor has it any completeness as a catalog or compilation of Americana. Probably other bib- liographers would not have made identical choices; and specialists in the various subjects will doubtless regret omissions quite as keenly as do the bibliog- raphers responsible for them. The fact remains that time and cost are hard masters that must be obeyed. It is equally true that a study of this kind can be elaborated to the point where it ceases to be selective and its complexity defeats its own purpose. We have endeavored to keep within limits properly imposed by all these considerations. Main Entries and Bibliographical Style. The aim in preparing the entries has been to give references that may be readily identified in the Library of Con- gress catalogs and consequently in those of hundreds of other institutions where the same cards are used or where the Library's published catalogs are avail- able. Call numbers have been included as addi- INTRODUCTION / XI tional safeguards for exact identification. A small minority of entries record tides or editions that are not in the collections of the Library of Congress. In each case some other major library which does have the book is referred to by means of the appropriate symbol used in the National Union Catalog {see Key to Symbols). Concerning the prevailing bibliographical style followed, it may be said in general diat we have at- tempted to give an author's name in the form pre- ferred by him, if that can be determined. When, however, he habitually uses the initial of his first name, we have spelled it out if possible for purposes of identification and have supplied a middle initial when known, even if that is regularly missing from his name on the title pages of his books. In the chapter concerned with Literature, on the contrary, the fullest known form of the names of principal authors has usually been preferred as a matter of literary history. Long titles, particularly of books published in the seventeenth and early eighteenth centuries, occasionally have been shortened by the omissions of repetitious endings and wordy sub- titles. To conserve space, names of publishers have been shortened to the briefest form that can be readily identified. In these and other questions of bibliographical form we have striven for consistency throughout; but some differences inevitably appear in a work from various hands, and in which in- dividuality is reflected from time to time in differences of concept and of style. When no con- fusion results from these human tendencies to be different, we have frequently preferred to spend time on matters of substance rather than on revi- sions to secure meticulous conformity of style. Main entries in chapters are grouped according to classification schemes outlined in the introduction that precedes each chapter and explains its individ- ual purpose and method. Subordinate arrangement of entries within the various schemes tends to be alphabetical by author's name, as in Literature, for which a period division is supplied by the plan of the classification itself. When arrangement of entries by date, place, or subject more effectively brings together related references, in part or all of a chapter, these variations have been made without hesitation. Annotations and Headnotes. Annotations have been written primarily to aid the reader in judging what the book contributes to an understanding of the United States and in determining, more specifi- cally, what bearing it has on the aspect of that sub- ject in which he is particularly interested. These notes or annotations are not written as reviews, or literary essays, or dissertations on an author's thesis; quite simply they are meant to be aids which readers may use to eliminate materials irrelevant to their purpose and guideposts to lead them as quickly as possible to the heart of what concerns them. The length of an annotation must not be taken as evi- dence of the importance of the book annotated. The nature of a famous book may be nearly self-evident from the name of the author and the tide, while a less conspicuous book may require more detailed description to place it properly in relation to the subject or subjects with which it deals. Upon oc- casions two or more books have been annotated together, with the annotation normally following the last entry in the group. For reasons of brevity and readability ellipses normally have not been used to mark the omission of initial or terminal connec- tives in quotations that appear in the annotations and headnotes, but of course no words and, we trust, no thoughts have been changed. Both annotations and headnotes have been freely used to provide additional documentation by means of brief refer- ences to books not described in main entries. Such additional citations are identified sometimes only by date of publication, if that suffices; but in general both imprint and number of pages are given. The usual practice of annotating individual titles has been varied in some sections by the substitution of one headnote under the author's name, without additional annotations for his individual works unless the range of these was too great to be covered in a headnote. Interest has thus been focused on the total contribution of the writer, and reiteration of statements applicable to all or nearly all his books has been eliminated. Chapters that illustrate this method of approach are those on Literature and Biography and Autobiography, while the largest sections of the chapters on Travel and Travelers and Philosophy and Psychology have been treated in the same way. A similar device has been employed in some cases when the use of a headnote following the title of a long series of books has made it un- necessary to annotate the separate publications that make up the series, as in the cases of "Original Narratives of Early American History" and the readings selected by the Department of American Studies of Amherst College, "Problems in American Civilization." Appendix: Selected Readings in American Studies. At a meeting of the Council at the Ameri- can Studies Association held at the Library of Con- gress in June 1954, announcement was made that work on our bibliography was in progress and sug- gestions concerning it were solicited. A number of the members present favored the inclusion of a separate section containing those tides which have a synthetic approach, bridge the various academic and scholarly disciplines, and are therefore of special significance to teachers or students pursuing courses in American studies. As a result, a tentative list of XII / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES ioo such titles was submitted to various members of with reference numbers added to guide the user to the Association, who examined it and made sug- the full description of each book in the main body gestions for additions and deletions. The Appendix of the bibliography. It remains a sample listing of contains a revision of this original list, enlarged references, which, if fully expanded, would consti- somewhat by the inclusion of new titles located as tute a new bibliographical enterprise outside our our study progressed. Entries are in brief form, scope. Acknowledgments MEMBERS or former members of the General Ref- erence and Bibliography Division who have con- tributed one or more chapters of this book are Allan G. Anderson, Ann Duncan Brown, Helen F. Conover, Peter Draz, and Jane Kline. The fol- lowing, who were attached to the Division for periods of varying length, lent valuable assistance to the work of the editors or the contributors: Nelson R. Burr, Edith H. Leeds, James S. Sweet, Burdette S. Wright, Jr., and Marko Zlatich. Colleagues in various divisions of the Library of Congress have assisted us in a number of ways and greatly to the benefit of our study. The staff of the Music Division assumed responsibility for extending and annotating Chapter XXIV, Folklore, Folk Music, Folk Art and Chapter XXV, Music. Donald L. Leavitt took charge of the work on the first of these chapters and a similar labor of love for the chapter on Music was shared by Richard S. Hill, William J. Lichtenwanger, and Donald W. Krum- mel, in association with Frank C. Campbell, Darius Thieme, and Carroll Wade. Reviews of chapters, criticisms, and suggestions for additions and deletions were sought and ob- tained from other members of the Library staff who have special knowledge of the subjects dealt with, as follows: David Baumgardt, former Consultant in Philosophy, now of Columbia University, Chapter XXII, Philosophy and Psychology; Edgar Breiten- bach, Chief, Prints and Photographs Division, Chap- ter XXVI, Art and Architecture; Arch C. Gerlach, Chief, Map Division, Chapter VI, Geography; William H. Gilbert, Jr., Analyst, Indian Affairs, Legislative Reference Service (LRS), Chapter VII, The American Indian; Halford L. Hoskins, Senior Specialist, International Relations, LRS, Chapter IX, Diplomatic History and Foreign Relations; Helen A. Miller, Analyst, Education, LRS, Chapter XXI, Education; John K. Rose, Senior Specialist, Con- servation, LRS, Chapter XXVII, Land and Agri- culture; Willard Webb, Chief, Stack and Reader Division, Chapter X, Military History and the Armed Forces; Walter H. Zeydel, Assistant Chief, American-British Law Division, Law Library, Chapter XXX, Law and Justice; and Raymund L. Zwemer, former Chief, Science and Technology Division, Chapter XVI, Communications, and Chap- ter XVII, Science and Technology. From outside the Library's own walls we also received generous help from specialists in several subjects. Irene B. Taeuber, Research Associate, Office of Population Research, Princeton University, twice reviewed the section on Population, made sug- gestions, and permitted us to use her own bibliog- raphy; Dorothy M. Schullian, History of Medicine Division, National Library of Medicine, studied the chapter on Medicine and Public Health in detail and made comments and suggestions. Joy E. Morgan, in 1955 Director of the Publications Division, Na- tional Education Association, and Ruth C. Litde, then Assistant Director, examined the chapter on Education, commented upon it, and suggested cer- tain additions. Our debt to these specialists and those with whom we are associated in the Library is a very real one, which we acknowledge with pleasure and pride. It would ill requite them for their help, however, to lay any of our own biblio- graphical faults and failings at their doors. The working staff, not the specialists, are responsible for judgments implied or expressed and for the final form and content of the volume. Finally, acknowledgment must be made of the contribution of two participants in the work who, although their names are not attached to any chap- ter, have nevertheless left their impress on most of the pages in the book. They are: Grace Hadley Fuller, Head of the Bibliography and Reference Correspondence Section of the General Reference and Bibliography Division, and Helen Dudenbostel Jones, Assistant Head, who reviewed and edited the whole manuscript with respect to its technical bib- liographical details and supervised the preparation of the voluminous index which is a distinct feature of the work. Roy P. Basler, Director, Reference Department. XIII Key to Symbols CLU-C CSmH CtMW CtW CtY DA DCU ICU IU IaU MB MB At MH MWiW-C MdBJ MeB MeWC MiU MiU-C MnU NN University of California at Los Angeles, William Andrews Clark Memorial Library. Henry E. Huntington Library, San Marino, Calif. See CtW. Wesleyan University, Middletown, Conn. Yale University, New Haven, Conn. U.S. Department of Agriculture Li- brary, Washington, D.C. Catholic University of America Li- brary, Washington, D.C. University of Chicago, Chicago, 111. University of Illinois, Urbana. State University of Iowa, Iowa City. Boston Public Library, Boston, Mass. Boston Athenaeum, Boston. Harvard University, Cambridge, Mass. Williams College, Chapin Library, Williamstown, Mass. Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, Md. Bowdoin College, Brunswick, Maine. Colby College, Waterville, Maine. University of Michigan, Ann Arbor. — William L. Clements Library. University of Minnesota, Minneapolis. New York Public Library. NNC Columbia University, New York. NNU New York University Libraries, New York. NRU University of Rochester, Rochester, N.Y. NcD Duke University, Durham, N.C. NjP Princeton University, Princeton, N.J. OCU University of Cincinnati, Cincinnati, Ohio. OC1 Cleveland Public Library, Cleveland, Ohio. OO Oberlin College, Oberlin, Ohio. OOxM Miami University, Oxford, Ohio. PHi Historical Society of Pennsylvania, Philadelphia. PPD Drexel Institute of Technology, Phila- delphia. PPLas La Salle College, Philadelphia. PPT Temple University, Philadelphia. PPTU SeeVPT. PSt Pennsylvania State University, Uni- versity Park. PU University of Pennsylvania, Phila- delphia. RPB Brown University, Providence, R.I. RPJCB John Carter Brown Library, Provi- dence. ViHal Hampton Institute, Hampton, Va. ViU University of Virginia, Charlottesville. XV Literature (1607— 1955) A. The Thirteen Colonies (1607-1763) 1- 95 B. The Revolution and the New Nation (1764-1819) 96- 185 C. Nationalism, Sectionalism, and Schism (1820-1870) 186-682 D. The Gilded Age and After (1871-1914) 683-1152 E. The First World War and the Great Depression (191 5-1939) 1 153-1906 F. The Second World War and the Atomic Age (1940-1955) 1907-2235 9 1IFE in America, from small beginnings in 1607 to vastness in 1955, is the medium in which j our writers have worked creatively. In the pages of the books that have resulted we relive the physical, intellectual, emotional, and spiritual experiences of the men and women who have shaped and been shaped by this nation. Through the processes of imagination and esthetic ex- pression characters having "forms more real than living man" speak to us in the contemporary accents of each period. Personal narratives, journals, letters, and especially poems, plays, novels, short stories, and essays reveal the mind and spirit of America as it has developed during 350 years. Writ large in this body of material, originally designed possibly for edification, information, persuasion, excitement, amusement, or even only for the sake of self-expression, are found firsthand impressions of our culture nowhere else preserved. The books so written supplement, even illumine, those substantial works of research and scholarship that have their place in other chapters of this bibliography. In these other chapters, notably those devoted to General History, Biography and Auto- biography, and Philosophy, also will be found many references to books excellent for their literary qual- ity, but too valuable on the score of content to be placed outside their subject category. Not "mere literature," however, but literature that preserves a record of American life is the specific concern of this chapter. A few paragraphs about the selection, description, and arrangement of the materials with which the chapter deals may serve to facilitate its use by the audience to which it is addressed. Selection of Authors. Pre-eminence in the selec- tion of authors inevitably has been given to acknowl- edged literary artists, because in general they not only write more powerfully but also about more important phases of American experience. Not every one of these, however, has found a place within the limits of what is, after all, an introduction and a guide, not a catalog. Obviously, to include every example of a genre or a movement would con- fuse a landscape more clearly viewed if uncluttered by too many figures. On the other hand, popular and less distinguished writers have not been auto- matically excluded. While no author has been selected unless some genuine literary interest attaches to him, the relation may not always be as immedi- ately apparent as in the case of writers that have deservedly received much greater critical acclaim. In some cases these minor writers have been selected because they have perceptibly influenced taste, or il- lustrated manners and customs, or kept a region or a class from literary oblivion. Their importance de- rives from their historical and social significance — possibly also because they are good examples of "Americana" — and not from the unusual literary excellence of their accomplishment. Whether the selection that has been practiced has brought in major or minor figures, the touchstone of choice has been the relevance of the writer's work to the under- standing of American civilization. Description of Authors. In this chapter descrip- tive annotations generally are attached only to names of authors, rather than to titles of individual books, as in most other chapters. Such a variation in 2 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES practice has been determined by a variety of con- siderations. Chief among these is the purpose to focus attention at once upon the total emphasis of the author's contribution, even if the scope of the chapter permits the inclusion of only a token repre- sentation of his complete work. It has seemed de- sirable also to facilitate the use of the guide by epitomizing the author's significance in a headnote, rather than by leaving that significance to be derived from the examination of numerous annotations of tides. Other reasons for using this device are: avoidance of boring repetitions resulting from an- notations of numerous books by one author, all having similar characteristics; and economy of de- tail that makes it somewhat easier to see the literary forest in spite of its numerous bibliographical trees. In individual instances, however, when the headnote defies attempts to make it sufficiently explicit with- out becoming unduly wordy, supplementary annota- tions are incorporated with entries for titles of books. To avoid repetition of information already fully supplied in standard histories and other studies of American literature, biographical and critical com- ments and citations usually have been omitted unless required for clarification or documentation. Guid- ance with respect to these aspects of a writer's work is provided in Chapter III, Literary History and Criticism, where entries will be found for such in- clusive works as Literary History of the United States (no. 2460) and The Literature of the Ameri- can People (no. 2496). References are given in the same chapter for numerous monographic studies of special aspects of American literature, and for anthologies that cover a wide range of topics dealing with writers and the books they have written. Obviously, significant biographical and critical studies of authors have been published after the closing dates for inclusion of new material in the standard histories of literature. The bibliographical treatment given to a selection of these, in this study, is described in number 5 of the following para- graph. The reader is reminded, however, that for directions to the older, and in some cases the more important studies, he must turn to books of history and criticism such as those mentioned in the fore- going paragraph. Arrangement under Author's Name. Sections A through D, representing American literature from the beginning to 191 4, have identical arrangements. Following the headnote under the name of the author, full bibliographical entries are inserted for titles of books selected to represent his work. Ordinarily these entries are arranged chronologically by date of publication, and in the following sequence: 1. First or earliest identifiable edition of each title, chronologically arranged by date of publica- tion. 2. (a) New editions and (b) reprints, entered un- der each title in the order indicated. 3. Collected works, followed first by new edi- tions, and second by reprints. 4. Selected works, new editions, and reprints, in the sequence designated in (2) and (3). 5. Selected biographical and critical studies of the author, not already mentioned in the headnote, and not represented in standard texts because they ap- peared after the publication of such texts. In gen- eral these entries are for books issued between 1949 and the end of 1955, with rare entries for works hav- ing 1956 imprints. They are arranged alphabeti- cally by the name of the author of the biography or criticism. Sections E and F, concerned with modern and contemporary literature, have required two types of arrangement on account of the extremely large amount of material involved: (a) the plan used in sections A-D, when the author's work is represented by relatively few titles; and (b) a new scheme when representation involves a large number of tides. In the latter case, separate entries for individual titles are not supplied, if these tides are adequately cov- ered in collections or selections for which entries are being given. Under this scheme, entries for collected, selected, and individual works are inter- filed by date of publication. However, attention may be called to individual titles by mention either in the headnote or in annotations of the more com- prehensive volumes. In these two sections it has seemed unnecessary to cite reprints, either because the original edition is still available and is to be preferred, or because re- prints may be anticipated after the publication of this bibliography. To keep abreast of such future reprints, reliance must be placed on standard guides to new books that appear periodically. In the interest of clarity it may be well to amplify the foregoing statements. For instance, if a first edition perished in its entirety and is not at the present time susceptible of accurate bibliographical description, the next earliest edition usually has been selected for description. Another variation oc- casionally has resulted when the author himself has indicated that a later edition has replaced the first, or when a collected edition preserves the text of several first editions that have been scattered and lost. It may also be in order to repeat the emphasis given earlier in connection with the selection of authors to be represented by saying that the same degree of selectivity has been applied to the choice of titles, editions, and reprints. The aim has been LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 3 to show the author's value by citing those of his books that are most significant to the reader inter- ested in American civilization. No effort has been made to give a complete panorama of the writer's achievements. Such a limitation of choice, necessi- tated by the purpose of this study, has forced the compilers to make many painful deletions, with which specialists understandably may disagree. Again, the reader is referred to Literary History of the United States, volume 3, "Bibliography" (no. 2460). Repetition of work already well and fully done would have been supererogation, even if it had been possible. A final word of explanation must be given con- cerning the meaning of the words "edition" and "reprint" as used in this chapter. "Edition" im- plies one of the successive forms in which a text has been issued, either by the author or by an editor. "Reprint" has been taken to mean reproduction of material previously printed, but not necessarily by the use of the same type or plates. It is applied also to republications, perhaps in inexpensive format, and frequently with notes and comments designed to assist the reader. Organization of the Chapter. The work of some 340 authors, and its representation in 2,235 num- bered items, make up the substance of this chapter. It has, therefore, been necessary to impose some sort of formal order on such a mass of material, not only for the convenience of readers but also to relate it as logically as possible to other chapters of the bibliography. The method of organization finally selected has resulted in arrangement according to six periods of time between 1607, when the first permanent col- onists came to Jamestown, and 1955, the closing date assigned to the gathering of material. Authors are placed within each period alphabetically by their names, for ease of identification. There are certain objections to this division by periods; these are freely admitted. One difficulty is that authors are exceedingly unaccommodating about living and dying within the exact limits of designated periods. Moreover, arrangement by period, rather than by form, or style, or trend, brings together very strange literary bedfellows indeed. In spite of these diffi- culties, division of American literature into periods comparable to the large divisions of general Ameri- can history has advantages for our purpose that out- weigh objections. Such division has the merit of indicating the way in which literature marches with the political, social, religious, economic, and other developments of American civilization from the beginning of permanent colonization to the mid- dle of the 20th century. The idea of this relation is basic to a correct understanding of literature itself; hence an arrangement that emphasizes the connec- tion has been favored above others considered. For the same reason the six selected periods, named at the beginning of the chapter, have been characterized in historical rather than literary terms, to show the link between this chapter and other chapters of the bibliography. A. The Thirteen Colonies (i 607-1 763) The mixed company of adventurers, saints, sin- ners, and plain people who conquered the wilderness and made possible the settlement of 13 colonies in America were not given to thinking about writing as art for art's sake. Only two writers in the whole period, Anne Bradstrect and Edward Taylor, may be said to have carried on the tradition of belles- lettres in any accepted meaning of the term. Colo- nial Americans, however, believed profoundly in using the written word to put themselves and their affairs on record. It is, therefore, to annals, diaries, histories, sermons, theological treatises, and personal narratives that we must loo\ for the most significant literary beginnings in America. Nineteen authors selected to represent the period in this bibliography reflect a wide range of interests and illustrate a variety of literary styles in their writings. John Smith, flamboyant chronicler of the settlement at Jamestown, shines through his own history as an embodiment of many qualities of courage and hardihood that animated English ex- plorers in the 16th and iyth centuries. At the opposite extreme, the plain, even prosaic William Bradford undertook to justify the ways of God to man on the blea\ New England coast, while faith- fully setting down priceless details of the cold, hunger, hardships, troubles with the Indians, and loneliness that daily beset his Pilgrims. Cotton Mather, much later on the literary scene, gave evi- dence of the far-reaching interests of a Harvard graduate and early New England Brahmin by treat- ing of the church, science, history, biography, and witchcraft in his voluminous writings. Jonathan Edwards, Yale-trained and a younger contemporary of Mather, is credited with one of the finest intellects that has left a mar\ on American civilization. 4 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Without his great theological-philosophical treatises, ideas of sin, salvation, destiny, and freedom of the will would not have sifted down, as they have done, with powerful effect on literary artists wording in later periods. Not all writers considered in the bibliography were, however, intellectuals, nor were all concerned with large questions related to this world and the next. At least two of the diaries described in the bibliography are replete with down-to-earth details of domestic manners and customs. A collection of Puritan love-letters is cited, and the narrative of a terrifying captivity among the Indians is used to illustrate a theme that has been developed in a variety of ways by an indefinite number of later writers. A fortunate life of wealth and security, lived on a fine Virginia plantation by a man of large affairs, is also given a place in the record to indicate the enrichment of culture that had taken place towards the end of the colonial period. Apart from the choicest boo\s and parts of boo\s written in this country before the Revolution, much of the literary heritage of the period is today of interest chiefly to the specialist. The Puritan cast of thought in the more substantial part of it, its prevailing sobriety, emphasis placed on beliefs and opinions long ago abandoned, and in some cases the use of crabbed, outmoded styles of writing, all im- pose barriers between certain colonial writers and 20th-century readers. Nevertheless, the student of American civilization must turn bac\ again and again to these authentic sources, from which have come ideas and influences formative in the country's destiny, and to which literature in the United States owes a continuing debt. i. WILLIAM BRADFORD, 1 590-1657 Governor of the colony at Plymouth for 30 years between 1621 and 1656, Bradford became the an- nalist of the beginning of New England. In his history he portrayed the piety of the Pilgrim Fathers who setded there, gave their English and European backgrounds in the Separatist movement, and told of their earlier wanderings for conscience's sake. The relations they established with the Indians and the courage they found for enduring hardships while making a home in the wilderness are also recorded with convincing contemporary detail. The vigor of the author's style when at its best and the quality of his thought have made the history highly influential in subsequent literary treatment of New England themes. 2. History of Plymouth Plantation. Now first printed from the original manuscript. Boston, Massachusetts Historical Society, 1856. xix, 476 p. (Massachusetts Historical Society. Collections, 4th ser., v. 3) in 9-889 F61.M41, 4th ser., v. 3 Edited by Charles Deane. 3- Now reproduced in facsimile from the original manuscript, with an introd. by John A. Doyle. London, Ward & Downey; Boston, Hough- ton Mifflin, 1896. 17 p., facsim. (535 p.) 1-16539 F68.B78 RBD No. 168. Edited by William T. Davis. New York, Scribner, 1908. xv, 437 p. (Original narratives of early American history) 8-7375 F68.B802 E187.O7B7 Recently published by Barnes & Noble, New York. Edited by Worthington C. Ford. Bos- ton, Published for the Massachusetts Historical Society by Houghton Mifflin, 1912. 2 v. illus. 12-29493 F68.B805 6. The complete text, with notes and introd. by Samuel Eliot Morison. New ed. New York, Knopf, 1952. xliii, 448 p. 51-13222 F68.B8073 Modern text, under title, Of Plymouth Plantation, rearranged for easier reading, with documentation relegated to appendices. 7. ANNE (DUDLEY) BRADSTREET, 1612?- 1672 Mrs. Bradstreet, daughter of one governor of the Massachusetts Bay Colony and wife of another, had enjoyed a life of privilege and some leisure in Eng- land before she was subjected to pioneer conditions in the New World. The scope of her reading, her familiarity with the works of Edmund Spenser and Sir Philip Sidney, and particularly with translations of the poems of Guillaume du Bartas, influenced her style, which is characterized also by the typical metaphors and conceits of English poetry during her period. "Contemplations," her most famous piece, prose meditations, and various poems added to the edition of 1678 make use of themes drawn from admiration of the New England landscape, love of husband and children, and experiences of family life. These mitigate the sameness of her prevailing tone of Puritan piety. Mrs. Bradstreet is frequendy called the first authentic poet writing in America. 8. The tenth muse lately sprung up in Amer- ica .. . With divers other pleasant and serious LITERATURE (1607-1955) / 5 poems . . . London, S. Bowtell, 1650. 207 p. 6-31257 PS711.A1 1650 RRD A second edition, revised by the author, was post- humously published under the title, Several Poems . . . By a Gentlewoman of New England (1678). 9. Works in prose and verse. Edited by John Harvard Ellis. Charlestown, Mass., A. E. Cut- ter, 1867. Ixxvi, 434 p. illus. 12-30892 PS711.A1 1867 The Poems are reprinted from the second edition. Cf. p. [78]. 10. New York, P. Smith, 1932. Ixxvi, 432 p. illus. 32-26751 PS711.A1 1932 A reprint of the edition of 1867. 11. Poems . . . together with . . . prose remains. With an introd. by Charles Eliot Norton. [New York] The Duodecimos, 1897. xliv, 347 p. illus. 32-6990 PS711.A1 1897 Editor's note signed: Frank E. Hopkins. 12. WILLIAM BYRD, 1674-1744 The holder of various public offices of trust, Byrd traveled extensively over the outlying sections of Virginia, observing physical aspects for the bene- fit of his fellow members of the Royal Society in London, and looking at social conditions on an ex- panding frontier from the point of view of a man of large affairs. The commentaries and diaries which preserve his reflections on conditions in the colony when its age had passed the century-mark were written in a style typical of a gentleman edu- cated in the English 18th-century manner. For that reason, as well as for their contents, they have been useful literary sources for later writers on the place and the period. 13. The Westover manuscripts . . . written from 1728 to 1736, and now first published. Edited by Edmund Ruffin. Petersburg, Va., E. & C. J. Ruffin, 1841. 143 p. Rc-2772 F229.B963 Includes The History of the Dividing Line Be- twixt Virginia and North Carolina; A Journey to the Land of Eden, A. D. 1J33; and A Progress to the Mines. Reprinted as A Journey to the Land of Eden and Other Papers, edited by Mark Van Doren (New York, Macy-Masius, 1928. 367 p. An American bookshelf, no. 4). 14. Writings. Edited by John Spencer Bassett. New York, Doubleday, Page, 1901. lxxxviii, 461 p. illus. 2-1 125 F229.B96 One of an edition of 500 copies. Includes also miscellaneous papers, e. g., letters and a catalog of some 4,000 volumes in Byrd's library at Westover. 15. The secret diary of William Byrd of Westover, 1709-1712. Edited by Louis B. Wright and Marion Tinling. Richmond, Dietz Press, 1941. xxviii, 622 p. 41-21807 F229.B9715 A transcription from the original shorthand of the first part of Byrd's diary now in the Henry E. Hunt- ington Library. 1 6. Another Secret diary of William Byrd of West- over, lyi^-ij^i, with letters & literary exer- cises, 1 696-1 726. Edited by Maude H. Woodfin, translated and collated by Marion Tinling. Rich- mond, Dietz Press, 1942. xlv, 490 p. 43-1881 F229.B9717 Reproduced at the Henry E. Huntington Library from shorthand and holograph manuscripts owned by the University of North Carolina. Bibliographical footnotes. Both secret diaries supply details of daily life on a large plantation as lived by the ruling class in colonial Virginia. Louis B. Wright's The First Gentlemen of Virginia (San Marino, Calif., The Huntington Library, 1940. 373 p.) throws light upon the intellectual qualities and activities of Byrd and his predecessors. 17. JOHN COTTON, 1584-1652 John Cotton, once dean of Emmanuel College, Cambridge University, and a notable pulpit orator, incurred the wrath of Archbishop Laud on the score of his Puritanism. Fearing for his life and liberty, he chose to join his friends and fellow Puritans in Massachusetts Bay Colony, where he arrived in his 49th year. There his talents and his earnestness soon made him the leading clergyman of the infant colony. According to Puritan practice, this spiritual office carried with it civil influence as well, so much so that it has been said opinions uttered by Cotton in the pulpit soon were embodied in the laws of Massachusetts. In the remote outpost of civiliza- tion in which he found himself, the former uni- versity official continued his industry as a scholar and a voluminous writer. His catechism Mil\ for Babes (1646) became a standard text for the moral education of New England children. Among his other works are found books about prayer, collec- tions of sermons, pamphlets on controversial sub- jects, and treatises on theological subjects, particu- larly in relation to the conduct of the Congregational Church in New England. They were written to warn, reprove, edify, and instruct his fellow Puri- tans, and to combat errors he found in ideas difler- ent from his own. Their value today to the student 6 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES of American civilization is found chiefly in the light they throw on Puritanism and Calvinism as influ- ences in the making of New England culture from which, some 200 years after Cotton's day, American literature flowered in the American Renaissance. No collected edition of Cotton's works has appeared. 18. God's promise to His plantation. London, J. Bellamy, 1630. 20 p. 49-56418 F67.C83 RBD Example of Puritan plain style used in sermons; preached for John Winthrop and his party immedi- ately before their departure from England for the Bay Colony in Massachusetts. Reprinted in 1896 in Old South leaflets, general series, v. 3, no. 53. 19. The way of the churches of Christ in New Eng- land. London, M. Simmons, 1645. 116 p. RBD Treatise on the theory of government under which the New England church functioned; to- gether with Cotton's The Keys of the Kingdom of Heaven (London, H. Overton, 1644. 59 p.) it em- bodies the author's undemocratic and authoritarian philosophy of the relation of church and state. 20. The bloudy tenent washed and made white in the bloud of the Lambe . . . Whereunto is added a reply to Mr. Williams' answer to Mr. Cot- ton's letter. London, H. Allen, 1647. 194, 144 p. 49-38592 BV741.W58C RBD Polemic against religious toleration as advocated by Roger Williams in his The Bloudy Tenent, of Persecution, for Cause of Conscience (q. v.). 2i. JONATHAN EDWARDS, 1703-1758 Edwards shared with Cotton Mather the ex- perience of trying to uphold Puritan orthodoxy when it was declining in New England. Theo- logian and fiery preacher though he was, Edwards was not, however, concerned solely with the dam- nation of sinful men. Scientific, metaphysical, and mystical elements in existence, or "being," were reflected in important sections of his voluminous works. These legacies from his intellectual and spiritual life entered into the thought of America through his writings and bore fruit in succeeding generations of authors, particularly in New Eng- land. Emerson's theory of nature, in relation to his Transcendentalism, Hawthorne's preoccupation with the consequences of sin, and Melville's aware- ness of the powers of darkness in conflict with human souls — all these and many other ideas found in American literature have been influenced by the fact that Edwards thought and wrote as the philos- opher he was. Substantial contributions to the understanding of Edwards' works and to an appre- ciation of his rightful place in American life and letters may be gained from Perry Miller's Jonathan Edwards (New York, Sloane, 1949. 348 p. Ameri- can men of letters series). See also Professor Miller's edition of Edwards' notes having the tide Images or Shadows of Divine Things (New Haven, Yale University Press, 1948. 151 p.), which empha- sizes the empirical character of the writer's thought. 22. A faithful narrative of the surprising work of God in the conversion of many hundred souls in Northampton, and the neighbouring towns and villages of New Hampshire in New England. Lon- don, J. Oswald, 1737. 132 p. BR520.E4 1737 RBD 23. 3d ed. Boston, D. Henchman, 1738. viii, 79 p. 21-18452 BR520.E4 1738 RBD Fullest contemporary account of the revival launched by Edwards in 1735, a forerunner of the Great Awakening which began in 1740; an early work on phenomena observed in revival meetings. 24. Sinners in the hands of an angry God. Boston, S. Kneeland, 1741. 25 p. MBAt Sermon preached at Enfield, Massachusetts, July 8, 1741, during the Great Awakening; extreme ex- ample of Edwards' belief in appeal to the emotions to secure religious conversion. 25. A treatise concerning religious affections . . . Boston, S. Kneeland & T. Green, 1746. 343 p. 1 1-2602 BX7230.E4 1746 RBD Pioneer American contribution in the field of religious psychology. 26. A careful and strict enquiry into the modern prevailing notions of that freedom of will which is supposed to be essential to moral agency, virtue and vice, reward and punishment, praise and blame. Boston, S. Kneeland, 1754. 294 p. 28-7122 BT810.E25 1754 RBD Written to clarify and establish Edwards' posi- tion concerning the Calvinistic doctrines of free will and determinism, the work is the cornerstone of the writer's fame as one of the foremost thinkers and philosophical theologians produced in America. 27. Works. Edited by Edward Williams and Ed- ward Parsons. Leeds, Eng., Baines, 1 806-11. 8 v. IaU "Reprinted in 18 17, and again in 1847, with two 'Supplementary Volumes'." — Literary History of the United States, v. 3, p. 482. LITERATURE (1607-I955) / J 28. Worcester, Mass., Isaiah Thomas, Jr., 1808-09. 8 v. 8-32280 BX7117.E3 1808 Edited by Samuel Austin. A reprint of the edition, with additions, was issued as an 8th edition (New York, Leavitt & Allen, 1851-52. 8 v.). 29. With a memoir of his life. New York, G. & C. & H. Carvill, 1830. 10 v. illus. 25-23341 BX7117.E3 1830 Edited by Sereno E. Dwight. 30. Representative selections, with introd., bibli- ography, and notes by Clarence H. Faust and Thomas H. Johnson. New York, American Book Co., 1935. cxlii, 434 p. (American writers series) 35-30040 BX7117.E33F3 1935 Part of the introduction was issued as C. H. Faust's thesis (Ph. D.) University of Chicago, under the title: Jonathan Edwards's View of Human Nature. Brief selections are given in full; longer works are represented by excerpts. A bibliography, chiefly of critical works about Edwards and his writings, appears on p. cxix-cxlii. 31. Puritan sage; collected writings of Jonathan Edwards. Edited by Virgilius Ferm. New York, Library Publishers, 1953. xxvii, 640 p. 53-3143 BX7117.E3 1953 Anthology of partial or complete selections, drawn chiefly from the Wor\s (1830) edited by Sereno E. Dwight. 32. THOMAS HOOKER, 1586-1647 Hooker's background and experience before he came to America in 1633 closely paralleled those of his friend, John Cotton. Each was trained at Emmanuel College, Cambridge University, a strong- hold of Puritanism in England. Both so per- suasively preached doctrines unacceptable to the established Church of England that emigration was their refuge from prosecution on the charge of non- conformity. In Massachusetts Bay Colony, a des- tination they reached in the same boat, each began a career that was instrumental in promoting the influence of the Congregational church and Puritan ideologies in the developing life of the colony. Their extant sermons and theological treatises pre- served for posterity the beliefs that shaped the early culture of New England, and that were influential in all parts of the country where Calvinists were found. In 1636 Hooker and his congregation left Massachusetts to found a new colony at Hartford and surrounding points in Connecticut. There, it is said, Hooker's enunciation of the principle that "the foundation of authority is laid, firstly, in the free consent of the people" contributed to the adoption of the Connecticut Fundamental Orders of 1639, an early and remarkable declaration of American democracy. Hooker's works have not been pub- lished in a collected edition; full reprints of separate works also are lacking. 33. The soules preparation for Christ . . . Lon- don, R. Dowlman, 1632. 242 p. NN Sermons widely known and discussed; influential in forming literary taste according to the Puritan plain style, without metaphysical complexities or ornate quotations, but characterized by pointed al- lusions and imagery drawn from homely situations. 34. A survey of the summe of church discipline. London, J. Bellamy, 1648. 18, [16], 139, 185- 296, 90, 46, 59 p. 22-6482 BX7240.H7 RBD Has been called the most important exposition of Congregational church polity; also includes discus- sion of philosophical theories affecting the develop- ment of New England law and politics. 35. The covenant of grace opened . . . Being sev- eral sermons preached at Hartford in New- England. London, G. Dawson, 1649. 85 p. 21-9106 BX7233.H6C7 RBD Bases salvation on a contract between God and man, a legalistic concept also present in the Puritans' attitudes towards political and social relations. 36. SARAH (KEMBLE) KNIGHT, 1666-1727 Madam Knight, a lively, intelligent woman of substantial position in Boston, occupied herself by keeping a writing school, where, according to legend, Benjamin Franklin was a pupil. She also acted as an official recorder of public documents, a capacity in which she gained sufficient knowledge of court procedures to be employed from time to time in the settlement of estates. Having been called to New York to undertake such a piece of work, she made the unprecedented decision to go there on horseback without formal escort, except such as could be found on the way. The diary she kept during pauses on the hazardous journey to New York and back to Boston is marked by gusto, good humor, earthiness, and the evidence of keen ob- servation. It is replete with apt, sometimes witty, comments on the manners of the people she en- countered, the lack of suitable accommodations, and the physical aspects of the country traversed. Since the diary is neither pretentious nor self-conscious, it provides an unusually valuable picture of people and conditions along the New England shore at the beginning of the 18th century. 8 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 37. The private journal kept by Madam Knight on a journey from Boston to New York in the year 1704. In The journals of Madam Knight and Rev. Mr. Buckingham from the original manuscripts written in 1704 and 1710. New York, Wilder & Campbell, 1825. p. 9-70. 1-13318 F7.K71 RBD 38. The journal of Madam Knight. With an in- troductory note by George Parker Winship. Boston, Small, Maynard, 1920. xiv, 72 p. 21-10698 F7.K723 RBD 39. New York, P. Smith, 1935. xiv, 72 p. 35-12871 F7.K724 RBD Facsimile reprint of the 1920 edition. 40. COTTON MATHER, 1663-1728 A member of the second generation of his family to be born and reared in America, Cotton Mather was descended on his maternal side from the apostolic John Cotton (q. v.). By paternal an- cestry he belonged to the "Mather dynasty," com- posed of leaders in the church, in education, and in matters of state during the better part of a hundred years. He graduated from Harvard at the age of fifteen, then took his M. A., and became associated with his father in the Second Church of Boston. In 1685 he was ordained as one of its two ministers and served the same Congregational church for the remainder of his life. Mather was essentially a religious conservative in a time of transition to more liberal theology, and his lot was not always a happy one. Some of his many scien- tific interests also were viewed with suspicion by his contemporaries. For example, when popular opinion was inflamed against inoculation for small- pox, he was a persistent advocate of the new method. His various medical ideas and the pro- gressiveness of his thought in this field recently have been analyzed by Otho T. Beall and Richard H. Shyrock in their Cotton Mather, First Significant Figure in American Medicine (Baltimore, Johns Hopkins Press, 1954. 2 4 r P*)* Also akin to his interest in scientific observation was his continued investigation of alleged witches; but these activities may have contributed to the fanaticism that cul- minated in the Salem trials whose later odium Mather shared. His intellectual curiosity operated in many fields besides science. He made good use of a personal library, said to rival in size that of the second William Byrd at Westover. In the course of his busy life as a clergyman he found time to write some 450 books and pamphlets. In writ- ing these he consciously experimented with various literary styles. However heavy and archaic some of his work may now appear, all of it is not in this vein. Moreover, it must be remembered that he formulated one of the first theories of literary com- position enunciated in America. Although pri- marily a preacher and a Calvinist theologian, Mather has a place in the literature of America, as well as in its theology and religious history. How- ever, no collected edition of his works has appeared. 41. The wonders of the invisible world. Boston, S. Phillips, 1693. 16, 1, 151 (1), 8, 17-32 p. NN Concerning the witchcraft trials in Salem, Mass., in 1692. The text was republished in volume 1 of Samuel G. Drake's compilation entitled The Witchcraft Delusion in Netu England (Roxbury, Mass., E. Woodward, 1866. Woodward's historical series, no. 5), p. [i]-247. Selections appear in Narratives of the Witchcraft Cases, 1648-1J06, edited by George L. Burr (New York, Scribner, 1914. Origi- nal narratives of early American history t currendy published by Barnes & Noble, New York]), p. 203-251. 42. On witchcraft, being The wonders of the invisible world. Mount Vernon, N. Y., Peter Pauper Press [ 1950? ] 172 p. 50-9778 BF1575.M54 1950 43. Magnalia Christi Americana; or, The ecclesi- astical history of New-England. London, T. Parkhurst, 1702. 7 pts. in 1 v. 1-24698 F7.M41 RBD Covers the years 1620-98 and includes numerous biographies of notable Puritans, stories of marvels, histories of Congregational churches, etc. Written in the author's "Massy" style, based on "fantastic" English prose of the 17th century, and characterized by conceits and other artificialities. 44. With an introd. and occasional notes by the Rev. Thomas Robbins ... To which is added a memoir of Cotton Mather by Samuel G. Drake. Hartford, Conn., S. Andrus, 1855, 1853. 2 v. 3-4343 BR520.M4 45. Bonifacius. Boston, S. Gerrish, 1710. 206 p. 38-12900 BV4500.M35 1710 RBD A guide for ordinary men, simply written in the "Plain" style congenial to Puritan taste, to be used in organizing charitable impulses so that they con- stitute a workable system which contributes to maxi- mum benefits. Benjamin Franklin loved the book and ascribed to its influence his own interest in being useful as a citizen. Later editions were pub- lished as Essays To Do Good. LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 9 46. The Christian philosopher . . . London, E. Matthews, 1721. 304 p. 45-45057 BL180.M4 1721 RBD Represents the author's interest in natural phe- nomena and science, in which he was a precursor of Benjamin Franklin and Thomas Jefferson. 47. Manuductio ad ministerium. Boston, T. Han- cock, 1726. 149 p. RBD A manual for pastors, belonging to a well-devel- oped 17th-century literary type; includes an im- portant statement of the author's theory of literary style. 48. tion Reproduced from the original edi- . with a bibliographical note by Thomas J. Holmes and Kenneth B. Murdock. New York, Published for the Facsimile Text Society by Columbia University, 1938. xix, 151 p. (Facsimile Text Society. Publication no. 42.) 38-8438 BV4009.M35 1726a 49. Diary, 1681-1724. Boston, Massachusetts His- torical Society, 191 1-1 2. 2 v. (Massachusetts Historical Society. Collections, ser. 7, v. 7-8) n-14733 F61.M41, ser. 7, v. 7-8 50. Selections from Cotton Mather. Edited with an introd. and notes by Kenneth B. Murdock. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1926. lxiii, 377 p. (American authors series, general editor, S. T. Williams) 26-12606 BX7117.M25 "Selected reading list": p. lxi-lxiii. 51. THOMAS MORTON, fl. 1622-1646 Attracted to New England by a desire to make money, the adventurer Morton traded guns and liquor to the Indians in order to secure furs for sale. He was twice expelled from the country by the Pil- grims of Plymouth for these offenses and also on account of the convivial life carried on at his trading post, Ma-re-Mount. In retaliation, he wrote and published a satire against the colonists which is un- usual in the annals of early American literature for its expressions of enjoyment derived from the primi- tive environment, for the levity of its tone, and for its ridicule of fanaticism in the Pilgrims' way of life. For all these reasons the book has been used as a source of later literary treatment of the same themes, the best known of which is probably Haw- thorne's sketch, "The May-Pole of Merrymount," in Twice-Told Tales (q. v.). 52. New English Canaan or New Canaan. Am- sterdam, }. F. Stam, 1637. 188 p. 1-12043 F67.M88 Reprint. With introductory matter and notes by Charles Francis Adams, Jr. Boston, Prince Society, 1883. vi, 381 p. (Prince Society, Boston. Publications [v. 14]) 1-16032 E186.P85, v. 14 F67.M895 53. MARY (WHITE) ROWLANDSON, ca. 1635-ca. 1678 Lancaster, Mass., experienced an Indian raid in February 1676, while King Philip's War was in progress. As a result, Mrs. Rowlandson and her three children were carried into captivity by the Indians. The youngest child soon died, a victim of the hardships and exposure to which the pris- oners were subjected. Finally, however, the mother and her remaining children were ransomed and restored to their friends. Mrs. Rowlandson's ac- count of their terrible experience, expressed in the tone of resignation and religious piety typical of Puritan writing at the time, was nevertheless a forth- right and realistic portrayal of one of the grimmest aspects of colonization and frontier life in America. Personal narratives of Indian captivities, of which this is an outstanding -example, created a body of literature that attained great popularity among read- ers. As such, it is responsible in part for the hatred of Indians that developed in the country, and also must be considered in connection with the romantic revolution from that hatred on the part of James Fenimore Cooper and other novelists who created idealized Indian characters. 54. The soveraignty & goodness of God . . . being a narrative of the captivity and restoration of Mrs. Mary Rowlandson. 2d addition [!] corr. and amended. Cambridge, Mass., S. Green, 1682. 6, 73 p. MP, An earlier edition, supposed to have been pub- lished in the same year, is no longer extant. 55. 2d ed. [i. e., 3d ed.?] Carefully corr. and purged from abundance of errors which escaped in the former impression. Boston, S. Phillips, 1720. 80 p. 8-33637 E87.R862 RBD Reprints having the title, The Narratire of the Captivity and Restoration of Mrs. Mary Rowland- son include the following: (a) a facsimile reprint edited by Henry S. Nourse and John E. Thayer (Lancaster, Mass. [Cambridge, Mass., ]. Wilson] 1903. vii, 158 p.); and (b) another reprint edited by Charles H. Lincoln, in his Narratives of the Indian Wars, i6j^-i6^() (New York, Scrihncr, 1913. Original narratives of early American his- tory [recently published by Barnes & Noble, New York]), p. [ 1071-1(7. 10 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 56. SAMUEL SEW ALL, 1 652-1730 Sewall's success while a student at Harvard College led to his appointment as a resident fel- low. Although he had considered entering the ministry, his final decision was in favor of a career in public life. Among prominent positions held by Sewall was that of chief justice of the Superior Court of Massachusetts. One of his unfortunate ap- pointments was to membership in the special com- mission set up to hear the Salem witchcraft cases of 1692. His part in the trial and condemnation of various defendants weighed so heavily upon him that he repudiated his judgment and announced his penitence in a public confession made in 1697. His humanitarian sympathies were also manifest in The Selling of Joseph (1700); reprinted in the Diary, v. [2] p. 16-20. This pamphlet, one of the first documents against slavery written in America, contains the famous dictum: "It is most certain that all men, as they are sons of Adam, are coheirs; and have equal right to liberty, and all other outward comforts of life." With ample means, strong com- mon sense, and considerable wit, this layman was qualified to portray in his diary and letters a view of colonial life in New England quite different from that presented in the prevailing clerical writings of the place and period. 57. Diary. 1674-1729. Boston, Massachusetts Historical Society, 1878-82. 3 v. (Massa- chusetts Historical Society. Collections, ser. 5, v. 5-7) 10-12994 F61.M41, ser. 5, v. 5-7 F67.S45 A Puritan Pepysian chronicle that includes trivia, financial records, intimate domestic details, shrewd comments on important men and events, and ex- pressions of sincere religious belief. Abridgment. Edited by Mark Van Doren. New York, Macy-Masius, 1927. 272 p. (An American bookshelf [1]) 27-23367 F67.S515 58. Letter-book. [1685-1729] Boston, Massachu- setts Historical Society, 1886-88. 2 v. (Mas- sachusetts Historical Society. Collections, ser. 6, v. 1-2) 10-12993 F61.M41, ser. 6, v. 1-2 59. THOMAS SHEPARD, 1605-1649 In 1635 Shepard followed John Cotton and Thomas Hooker to New England, there to constitute with them a triumvirate of highly educated Congre- gational clergymen who greatly influenced the cul- tural development of the young colony. In com- mon with his two friends he had been driven out of England by Archbishop Laud because of his non- conformity. Although he was a Puritan of the dis- senting Calvinistic type, his sermons and theological writings included emotional and mystical elements that gave them unusually wide appeal, when de- livered with the eloquence at his command. In spite of the fact that he was frequently unable to revise the rough drafts of his sermons and other writings before they were published, his works reached a large audience and attained the dignity of a collected edition in 1853. According to the biography by John Albro (Wor\s, v. 1, p. clxxxix) Jonathan Edwards' A Treatise Concerning Religi- ous Affections includes some 75 quotations from Shepard's The Parable of the Ten Virgins (1660). It has been suggested that Shepard's reputation for godliness and scholarship was influential in the choice of his parish at Cambridge, Massachusetts, for the location of Harvard College. 60. The sincere convert. London, H. Blunden, 1640. [271] p. NN 61. The sound believer. London, R. Dawlman, 1645. 352 p. 52-46573 BV4914.S55 1645 RBD 62. The clear sun-shine of the gospel breaking forth upon the Indians in New England. London, J. Bellamy, 1648. 38 p. 6-43056 E78.M4E35 Reprint. In Massachusetts Historical Society. Collections, ser. 3, v. 4. Cambridge, C. Folsom, 1832. p. 25-67. 9-889 F6r.M4i, 3d ser., v. 4 63. Autobiography. With additional notices of his [Shepard's] life and character by Nehemiah Adams. Boston, Pierce & Parker, 1832. 129 p. 3&-16665 BX7260.S53A3 64. Autobiography. In Colonial Society of Mas- sachusetts, Boston. Publications [including] transactions, 1927-1930. v. 27; 1932. Boston, p. [343]-400. 1-280 F61.C71, v. 27 Based on a fresh study of the original manu- script first published in the edition by Nehemiah Adams described in the foregoing reference. A bibliography is supplied, p. 347-351. 65. Works. Boston, Doctrinal Tract and Book Society, 1853. 3 v. 39-M93 BX7117.S5 Contains a life of Shepard, by John A. Albro, v. 1, p. [vii]-cxcii. Volume 3 is wanting in the Library of Congress set. LITERATURE (1607-I955) / II 66. JOHN SMITH, 1579/80-163 1 Smith's right to be called one of the fathers of American literature may be defended on several counts and in spite of certain reservations that are in order. If he is thought of as a chronicler of his firsthand observations, it must be admitted that he was frequendy hasty, careless, repetitious, boastful, and confused. His reputation for veracity, viewed more leniendy by contemporary scholars than by those of an earlier time, must still sustain the charge that he told taller tales than the facts warranted. Nevertheless, interest in him as a man of letters has not suffered from the lack of exactitude in his writings. His Pocahontas story, whether true or apocryphal, soon became a legend. As such it in- spired a literature of its own, which includes James Nelson Barker's drama, The Indian Princess (1808), and John Esten Cooke's novel, My Lady Pocahontas (1885). What Smith stood for in his own person has, perhaps, had the strongest literary influence. Coming to America as Elizabethan ex- plorers went to strange places, he shared a heroic enterprise as a colonist, in the best tradition of an English gentleman adventurer. He was to succeed- ing generations of Americans the typically intrepid pioneer, frontiersman, and strong man whom they elevated into a national hero. His writings are, therefore, not only source materials for understand- ing early colonial life in Virginia, but also sources of inspiration for various themes that in different periods and with different emphasis have been used by writers in America. The most recent study of Smith's life, which favors the case for his reliability, is Bradford Smith's Captain John Smith, His Life & Legend (Philadelphia, Lippincott, 1953. 373 p.). 67. A true relation of such occurrences ... as hath hapned in Virginia since the first plant- ing of that collony . . . London, J. Tappe, 1608. 22 1. NN First account of the first permanent English colony established in America. 68. A map of Virginia. Oxford, Eng., J. Barnes, 1612. 39, no p. fold. map. Rc-2805 F229.S69 RBD Includes a detailed account of the physical aspects of Virginia and of the Indian way of life observed there. 69. A description of New-England . . . London, R. Clerke, 1616. 61 p. 7-15406 F7.S63 RBD Favorable description of the natural resources of New England, designed to attract settlers; part of Smith's campaign to promote colonization in that region, an enterprise in which he was interested for some 20 years after leaving Virginia in 1609. 70. The generall historie of Virginia, New-Eng- land, and the Summer Isles . . . London, M. Sparkes, 1624. 248 p. illus. Rc-2796 F229.S61 RBD Repeats and enlarges upon various earlier writ- ings; first appearance of the story of his rescue by Pocahontas. 71. Travels and works. Edited by Edward Arber. New ed., with a biographical and critical introd. by A. G. Bradley. Edinburgh, J. Grant, 1910. 2 v. (984 p.) illus. Wn-io F229.S655 Bibliographies: v. 1, p. xxvii-xxx, [cxxx]- cxxxvi. Reprints of Smith's shorter narratives about Vir- ginia, and of Book IV of his General History of Virginia are contained in Narratives of Early Vir- ginia, 1606-162$ (1907), p. [25J-204; [289J-407, a collection edited by Lyon G. Tyler, for the Scrib- ner series, Original narratives of early American history, recently published by Barnes & Noble. 72. EDWARD TAYLOR, 1 642-1 729 Taylor was a devout Puritan clergyman who lived and wrote in Massachusetts during the late 17th and early 18th century. Nothing considerable was known of his poetical work until a representa- tive selection of it was made from a manuscript belonging to Yale University. The result was pub- lished in 1939. His disinclination to permit his poetry to reach a contemporary audience may have stemmed from a fear that it revealed emotions too strong, in imagery too worldly, to be compatible with strict Puritan orthodoxy. Upon the appear- ance in print of the poetical works, a new name was therefore added to the short roster of colonial American poets, and a new light was cast on the deeper esthetic and emotional elements in Puritan religious thought. In structure, Taylor's verse be- longs to the tradition of religious poetry represented by John Donne, George Herbert, and other English metaphysical poets of the 17th century. In con- tent and style it combines, however, two personal departures from more typical Puritan poetry that give it unusual variety and interest: its piety is expressed by means of imagery derived from rich colors, sweet odors, and other delights perceived by the senses; and its reality is increased by con- trasting imagery based on everyday experiences of ordinary Puritans, expressed in their own colloquial language. Taylor has been called "The greatest poet of New England before the nineteenth cen- 12 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES tury" {Literary History of the United States, v. i, p. 65). 73. Poetical works. Edited with an introd. and notes by Thomas H. Johnson. New York, Rockland Editions, 1939. 231 p. 39-34182 PS850.T2 1939 RBD Notes to the edition are supplied on p. 189-199; Taylor's library is described and the contents listed, p. 201-220; the manuscript of Poetical Worlds is discussed, p. 221-228; a bibliography of Taylor's manuscripts, printed works, and sources for the study of his life and achievements are found on p. 229-231. 74. Princeton, Princeton University Press, 1943. 231 p. A45-4662 DCU 75. NATHANIEL WARD, ca. 1578-1652 Another Cambridge University graduate driven out of England by Archbishop Laud, Ward in 1634 brought to New England his exceptional attain- ments in the law and in the Puritan ministry, his second profession. Wide experience of the world, not only in England but on the Continent, increased his stature. Although Ward was anything but a democrat in the modern understanding of the term, he was well-versed in the rights of the individual under British law. For that reason, his draft of the first code of laws for Massachusetts, adopted with some revisions in 1641, contained certain pro- visions for safeguarding such rights. Thus, even within the stronghold of authoritarian Puritanism, the heritage of British justice was preserved and its concepts made a part of American civilization. Ward's other contribution to early American let- ters (cited below) was a true 17th-century pam- phleteering satire, directed against the sins of the times. In it the writer employed Puritan plain style mixed with other elements derived from Eliza- bethan and Jacobean literature, in which he was apparendy steeped. 76. The simple cobler of Aggawam in America ... By Theodore de la Guard [pseud.] Lon- don, S. Bowtell, 1647. 80 p. MiU-C NN 77. Edited by Lawrence C. Wroth. New York, Scholars' Facsimiles & Reprints, 1937. 80 p. 38-18217 PS858.W2S5 1647a RBD 78. [The body of liberties] A coppie of The liberties of the Massachusetts Collonie in New England. In Massachusetts Historical Society. Collections, ser. 3, v. 8. Boston, Litde, Brown, 1843. p. [2i6]-237. 9-889 F61.M41, ser. 3, v. 8 First printed edition of the document of 1641. Cf. p. [191]. 79. MICHAEL WIGGLESWORTH, 1631-1705 A Puritan clergyman in Maiden, Massachu- setts, Wigglesworth apparently wrote his famous long poem, The Day of Doom, in ballad measures to attract unlearned readers and so to instruct them, for the salvation of their souls, in the dogmas of Calvinism. The poem immediately became a best seller, by virtue of its appeal to the emotions, beliefs, and literary taste prevailing at the time. Said to have been distributed not only as a book, but also in the form of broadsides, the work so far surpassed Mrs. Bradstreet's poems in public favor that the first edition was literally read to pieces and has entirely disappeared. The writer's potential poetic powers were also sacrificed to purposes of edification in two other poetical works: God's Controversy with New-England, written in 1662 but first printed in Proceedings, Jan. 1871-Mar. 1873, published by the Massachusetts Historical Society, v. 12, 1873, p. 83-93; and Meat Out of the Eater (1670). 80. The day of doom; or, A description of the great and last judgment. London, J. Sims, 1673. 92 p. RPJCB The Literary History of the United States, v. 3, p. 773, and the Dictionary of American Biography, v. 20, p. 195, refer to an edition of 1662. The fore- going reference is to the earliest edition currently described in the National Union Catalog at the Library of Congress; successive references illustrate the vitality of the work and the range of time repre- sented in the publication of various editions. 81. Newcastle-upon-Tyne, Eng., J. White, 171 1. 72 p. PS871.D3 1711 RBD With other poems. Also a memoir of the author, autobiography, and sketch of his funeral sermon by Rev. Cotton Mather . . . From the 6th ed., 1715. New York, American News Co., 1867. 119 p. 26-5364 PS871.D3 1867 RBD Edited by John W. Dean and William H. Burr. 83. With other poems. Edited with an introd. by Kenneth B. Murdock. New York, Spiral Press, 1929. xi, 94 p. illus. 30-11066 PS871.D3 1929 84. ROGER WILLIAMS, ca. 1 603-1 683 When Williams became a Separatist and as an ordained clergyman emigrated to New England in LITERATURE (1607-1955) / 13 1631, he sought a country in which to live accord- ing to Christ's teachings, as he read them in the Bible. However, according to orthodox Puritan- ism, his interpretations, being wrong, led him into various heretical beliefs. These included his con- viction that the individual had a right to freedom of conscience without interference from civil magis- trates, and that it was necessary to make the church democratic. He also held that the appropriation of land from the Indians without paying for it was a violation of human rights and therefore a sin. By virtue of unceasing and vociferous efforts to imple- ment these convictions until they became the basis of action in Massachusetts, he finally came to be considered a disturber of the peace and was banished from the colony into the outlying wilderness. Go- ing south to a section still occupied by Indians, whose lifelong friend he was, Williams became the founder of the Rhode Island colony. The writings in which he expressed his ideas were theological for the most part, involved, and long-winded; for that reason they have been difficult to read and have be- come so rare as to have been sometimes forgotten. But the elevation of his thought, the realism of his language, and the spaciousness of his ideas concern- ing freedom and authority caused his pioneer testi- mony on behalf of liberalism to pass into the stream of American democratic thought, from which, more than a century after he died, emerged the principles embodied in the Constitution of the United States. The significance of Williams for the American tradition is discussed by Perry Miller in his Roger Williams (Indianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill, 1953. 273 p.), a work that includes numerous extracts from Williams' writings, provided in a modern text for ease of reading, particularly with respect to spell- ing, capitalization, punctuation, and abbreviations. 85. A key into the language of America . . . London, G. Dexter, 1643. 197 p. RBD Comments on various aspects of Indian life, ac- companied by vocabularies suited to each aspect. Reprint. In Rhode Island Historical Society. Collections, v. 1. Providence, 1827. p. 17-163. Rc-2948 F76.R47, v. 1 Reprint. 5th ed. Introd. by Howard M. Chapin. Providence, Rhode Island and Providence Plantation Tercentenary Committee, 1936. 205 p. 37-5003 E99.N16W7 PM2003.Z5W4 1936 86. The bloudy tenent, of persecution, for cause of conscience . . . [London?] 1644. 247 p. 10-12684 BV741.W58 1644 RBD This polemic was attacked by John Cotton in his The Bloudy Tenent Washed and Made White in the Bloud of the Lambe (q. v.), to which Williams replied in The Bloody Tenent Yet More Bloody (London, C. Calvert, 1652. 320 p.). 87. Experiments of spiritual life and health. London, 1652. 59 p. OO Edited with a historical introd. by Winthrop S. Hudson. Philadelphia, West- minster Press, 1951. 103 p. 51-7794 BV4500.W6 195 1 Devotional book which is a directory of that spiritual life in which the Puritan "acquired a sturdiness of character and inner serenity . . . [and] became the creator of a culture . . . that was destined to place its stamp upon the Western world for three centuries to come." Introduction, p. 23-24. 89. Works. In Narrangansett Club, Providence. Publications. (First series) v. 1-6. Provi- dence [Providence Press Co., printers] 1866-74. 6 v. 3-20323 F76.N21 Subscribers' edition. Chiefly reprints of the original editions of the works of Roger Williams. No more published. Contents. — v. 1. Biographical Introduction, by R. A. Guild. A key into the language of America, edited by J. H. Trumbull. Letter of John Cotton and Roger Williams' reply, edited by R. A. Guild. 1866. — v. 2. John Cotton's answer to Roger Wil- liams, edited by J. L. Diman. Queries, of highest consideration, edited by R. A. Guild. 1867. — v. 3. The bloudy tenent of persecution, edited by S. L. Caldwell. 1867. — v. 4. The bloody tenent yet more bloody, edited by S. L. Caldwell. 1870. — v. 5. George Fox digg'd out of his burrovves, edited by J. L. Diman. 1872. — v. 6. The letters of Roger Williams, 1632-1682. Now first collected. Edited by J. R. Bardett. 1874. 90. JOHN WINTHROP, 1588-1649 Winthrop, many times governor of the Massa- chusetts Bay Colony, began his journal by chroni- cling the events of the voyage to America. Once the destination had been reached, the journal became a record of public and private affairs in die colony during the remainder of his life. As such, it added to American letters a contemporary view oi the New England character and conscience under Puritan domination, twin themes treated ever since by some of the best writers produced in the United Stale v Winthrop's other individual pieces include . / Model of Christian Charity (In Massachusetts Historical Society. Collections, ser. 3, v. 7; iS^S. Boston, y- 14 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 31-48), written about 1630 as a guide to the colonists in their attempt to live together in a cooperative society according to Biblical principles. His speech to the General Court, made after he was vindicated of a charge against him, contains his famous defini- tion of liberty under authority; it may be found in Hosmer's edition of the Journal, v. 2, p. 237-239. An extraordinary correspondence with Margaret Tyndal, his third wife, reflects a particularly happy marriage of two strong Puritan personalities. These letters have been collected in Some Old Puritan Love Letters, edited by Joseph H. Twichell (New York, Dodd, Mead, 1893, 1894. 187 p.). Various love letters, official documents, family correspondence, and business communications are available in two additional sources: Robert C. Winthrop's Life and Letters of John Winthrop, 2d ed. (Boston, Little, Brown, 1869. 2 v.); and the Winthrop Papers (Boston, Massachusetts Historical Society, 1929-47. 5 v.). The last is frequently called an unsurpassed collection of colonial papers. 91. [Journal] A history of New England from 1630 to 1649. [Edited] by James Savage. New ed. with additions and corrections. Boston, Little, Brown, 1853. 2 v. 1-12052 F67.W783 A first edition of part of the text appeared as A Journal of the Transactions and Occurrences in the Settlement of Massachusetts and the Other New England Colonies . . . (Hartford, Conn., E. Bab- cock, 1790. 364 p.). James K. Hosmer also edited the text, calling it Winthrop's Journal, "History of New England" (New York, Scribner, 1908. 2 v. Original narratives of early American history [re- cently distributed by Barnes & Noble, New York]). 92. JOHN WISE, 1652-1725 A Harvard graduate who served several par- ishes in Massachusetts as pastor, Wise opposed In- crease and Cotton Mather's plan for a central church government with authority over individual Congre- gational churches in New England. The earlier of his two works described below is a biting satire directed against the Mather proposals; the second treatise is a more formal and systematic presentation of his belief that in church as in state good govern- ment must be grounded in natural law, reason, and virtuous democratic practices. These were early expressions of views that became more and more prominent in American political theory until they were finally embodied in the Declaration of Inde- pendence. The first full-length study of Wise was made by George A. Cook in his John Wise, Early American Democrat (New York, King's Crown Press, 1952. 246 p.). It includes a bibliography of the author's writings and of primary and secondary sources for the study of his life and thought, as well as extensive documentation in the form of notes. Modern reprints of Wise's works are not available at this time. 93. The churches quarrel espoused . . . New York, W. Bradford, 1713. 116 p. PHi 94. A vindication of the government of New Eng- land churches. Boston, N. Boone, 1717. 105, 12 p. MH 95. Boston, J. Boyles, 1772. 271, [12] p. 23-5885 BX7136.W6 1772a RBD Includes The Churches Quarrel Espoused (p. [ 75 ]-i8o). B. The Revolution and the New Nation (i 764-1820) The many crises of the Revolutionary era in America had a strong impact on its literature. The conflicts of ideas and interests, which finally cul- minated in a long war, had a disruptive effect on society, of which literature is the voice. Neighbors disagreed with neighbors; the economic balance was disturbed; education suffered; and uncer- tainty about survival itself troubled the minds of the people. All this anxiety and confusion did not contribute to that slate of "emotion recollected in tranquillity" which is most favorable to creative writing; nor was it to be expected that a large audience under such circumstances would support the publication of wor\s having literary rather than political interest. The prevailing mood of the colonists, however, inspired much of such literary effort as was made. Poets became ballad-makers in praise of feats of arms. Satires and political allegories directed against the British were well received. The author- ship of one war song might be a surer way to con- temporary fame than the publication of several sustained but unexciting worlds from the same hand. At least one literary stylist and propagandist of genius produced political pamphlets that were avidly read. Much of the best writing of the period, LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 15 indeed, was political in character. The remarkable men who were first the architects of the new Na- tion and later its statesmen and diplomats left a whole library of official and personal papers to en- rich American letters. In their various assignments they wrote innumerable documents, engaged in extensive correspondence, delivered addresses, and drafted declarations expressed in clear, sound Eng- lish prose that sometimes rose to heights of genuine literary style. For descriptions of some of these important expressions of the American spirit, even if not in a strict sense part of its literature, the reader is referred to Chapter VIII, General History. How- ever, a few of the shorter pieces from these hands are included in the references that follow, by virtue of having attained the status of American classics. The spirit that had helped to create a new nation finally passed over also into its literature, there to develop a new trend: nationalism. Writers began to raise their voices in praise of themes drawn from American life and experience. The advancing frontier, destined to excite authors of belles-lettres for generations, began to emerge as the setting for a few novels. Americans were encouraged, at least upon one occasion, to loo\ to their own people to produce writers of the future that would equal in greatness any that belonged to England's past. A battery of American "firsts" appeared: the first tragedy by an American acted on the professional stage in America; the first American professional novelist at wor\; and the first social comedy intro- ducing a Yankee character written and staged. In the midst of these innovations, the use in America of the Addisonian essay, the novel of Gothic horror or picaresque design, the play with a classical locale, and poetry written in rhymed couplets and poetic diction still pointed to continued reliance upon Eng- lish and European models. But the transition from imported to native themes, forms, and styles was at last beginning to be made. This was a seedtime for American literature; the abundant harvest was to come later. 9 6. ABIGAIL (SMITH) ADAMS, 1744-1818 A notable letter-writer in her own or any gen- eration, Mrs. Adams' life and fortunes placed her in a strategic position to observe and comment upon the social, political, and domestic scenes in America during the Revolutionary War and the early Na- tional period. Her residence in France and in Brit- ain during her husband's diplomatic service in those countries resulted in correspondence describing manners and customs abroad, a type of writing that became increasingly popular in later periods of American literature. When John Adams was elected the first Vice President, and later the second President of the United States, Abigail was by his side, observing and recording in intimate letters her impressions of places, persons, and events. Her correspondence, therefore, provides an example of the art of letter-writing as practiced by an unusual 1 8th century New England woman; even more, it constitutes a documentary record of the civilization Mrs. Adams saw in the making during a fateful half-century of American life. 97. Letters. With an introductory memoir by her grandson, Charles Francis Adams [1807- 1886] Boston, C. C. Little & J. Brown, 1840. lxiii, 447 p. 16-3756 E322.1.A3 RBD 98. 4th ed., rev. and enl. Boston, Wil- kins, Carter, 1848. lxi, 472 p. 16-5357 E322.1.A32 Includes letters bearing dates from 1761 to 18 16. 99. Familiar letters of John Adams and his wife, Abigail Adams, during the Revolution. With a memoir of Mrs. Adams by Charles Francis Adams [1807-1886] New York, Hurd & Houghton, 1876. xxxii, 424 p. 4-16982 E322.A518 100. New letters, 1788-1801. Edited with an in- trod. by Stewart Mitchell. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1947. xiii, 281 p. 47-11763 E322.1.A37 Letters to Mrs. Adams' sister, Mary (Smith) Cranch; reprinted with a revised introduction from the Proceedings of the American Antiquarian So- ciety, Apr. 18, 1945-Oct. 17, 1945, new ser., v. 55, I 947,P- [95]~ 2 3 2 > [2991-444- 101. JOEL BARLOW, 1754-1812 Born in rural Connecticut and educated at Yale, Barlow was to become a citizen of the world. His first important connection as a writer was with the Connecticut (or Hartford) Wits, or Yale Poets, as the informal group has been variously called. These men from the Hartford area were animated not only by a love of literature but also by their post- Revolutionary patriotism to initiate a truly national literature that would reflect American principles and accomplishments. It was this stimulus that led to the composition of Barlow's American epic. His prose works, chiefly political in character, were written in praise of democratic institutions support- ing the cause of human rights throughout the world. During a residence of 17 years abroad, chiefly in Europe, he engaged in diplomatic assignments from the United States and also amassed a fortune from his commercial transactions. Fortified by his wealth, he built near Washington his estate, Kalo- rama, where he provided a sort of salon for the dis- l6 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES cussion of arts, letters, and the good of mankind. Included in the last of these categories was a cause that he promoted earnestly but unsuccessfully: that of an American national university, endowed by Congress, and dedicated to the discovery as well as the diffusion of knowledge. Important selections from Barlow's correspondence with his wife and others are found in Charles B. Todd's Life and Letters of Joel Barlow (New York, Putnam, 1886. 306 p.). 102. Hasty pudding: a poem. In three cantos. Written at Chambery, in Savoy, January 1793 . . . [New Haven, Conn., 1796] 12 p. RPB Whimsical mock-epic, spontaneously written in praise of a familiar American dish known as hasty pudding, or cornmeal mush. 103. Political writings. New ed. corr. New York, Mott& Lyon, 1796. xvi, 258 p. 9-28922 JC211.B27 RBD Contents. — Advice to the privileged orders in the several states of Europe [1792-1793]. — A letter to the National Convention of France [1792]. — A letter addressed to the people of Piedmont, on the advantages of the French Revolution [1795].— The conspiracy of kings; a poem addressed to the in- habitants of Europe from another quarter of the world [1792]. 104. The Columbiad, a poem. Philadelphia, C. & A. Conrad; Baltimore, Conrad Lucas, 1807. 454 p. 2-25640 E120.B255 RBD Epic in Miltonic style, based on the life of Christo- pher Columbus and portraying not only the future glories of America but also a vision of the coming together of nations into a league for the common good; an amplification of the author's The Vision of Columbus (Hartford, Conn., Hudson & Good- win, 1787, 258 p.). 105. HUGH HENRY BRACKENRIDGE, 1748-1816 Brackenridge graduated from the C°^ e g e oi New Jersey (afterwards Princeton University), when the American Revolution was brewing and a spirit of nationalism was beginning to develop. Two early dramas, The Battle of Bunkers-Hill (1776) and The Death of General Montgomery (1777), were patriotic in their inspiration. It was after he became a lawyer and a judge, with head- quarters in Pittsburgh on the Western frontier, that he wrote the novel for which he is best known. Avoiding the models provided by sentimental, di- dactic, and Gothic novels that were the fashion in fiction at that time, Brackenridge took Don Quixote for his prototype. His long, picaresque narrative, arranged in episodes, portrays backwoods and frontier scenes and conditions with humor and irony. It was also used by the author to express his own anxieties and certain disillusionment con- cerning the trend of nationalism in the country. His satire was directed chiefly against excesses com- mitted in the name of democracy, office-seekers un- qualified to hold office, political incapacity, and social insecurity in a country so recently victorious in war. As a stylist, Brackenridge has been com- pared favorably with contemporary writers in England. 106. Modern chivalry: containing the adventures of Captain John Farrago and Teague O'Re- gan, his servant. Philadelphia, J. M'Culloch, 1792. 2 v. in 1. NN First edition of the first part of the novel. 107. Philadelphia, Johnson & Warner, 1815. 4 v. 6-15211 PS708.B5M6 1815 RBD Final revised version of installments originally issued in 1792-93, 1797, 1804, 1805, and a fourth volume made up of new material. Edited with introd., chronology, and bibliography, by Claude M. Newlin. New York, American Book Co., 1937. xliv, 808 p. (American fiction series; general editor, Harry H. Clark) 37-27219 PS708.M5M6 1937 109. CHARLES BROCKDEN BROWN, 1771- 1810 Brown was the first native-born author to make a profession of novel-writing in America. Because of his connections with the periodicals of the period, both editorially and as a contributor, he has been called also the father of literary criticism in the United States. His work is particularly significant in the history of national literary development be- cause in it he applied his theory that American lit- erature should profit by and develop springs of action and interest that differed essentially from those of Europe. Although the themes used to carry out this idea were chosen for their qualities of Gothic horror, they were developed realistically. Didactic elements were added for moral instruction, but each of the novels written in 1799-1800 was infused with essentially romantic intensity and emo- tional appeal. So designed, the books satisfied the taste of the age and were read with approval in Eng- land and on the Continent, although interest in American writing was not widespread abroad at that time. Selections from Brown's diaries, letters, and LITERATURE (1607-I955) / VJ the "rarest of his printed works" are included in his Life, undertaken by Paul Allen and completed by William Dunlap (Philadelphia, J. P. Parke, 1815. 2 v.). Recent biographical and critical studies are: The Sources and Influence of the Novels of Charles Brockden Brown, by Lulu R. Wiley (New York, Vantage Press, 1950. [387] p.); and David L. Clark's Charles Broc\den Brown, Pioneer Voice of America (Durham, N. C, Duke University Press, 1952. 363 p.). For the latter book, unpublished papers of the Brown family constitute an important source. 1 10. Wieland; or, The transformation. New York, H. Caritat, 1798. 298 p. 9-2504 PZ3.B814W RBD Based in part on an actual murder committed by a New York farmer while under the influence of hallucinations. in. Together with Memoirs of Car win the Biloquist, a fragment. Edited with an introd. by Fred Lewis Pattee. New York, Har- court, Brace, 1926. xlix, 351 p. (American au- thors series; general editor, Stanley T. Williams) 26-3794 PZ3.B814W9 112. Ormond; or, The secret witness. New York, H. Caritat, 1799. iv, 338 p. A31-1124 CSmH 113. Edited with introd., chronology, and bibliography, by Ernest Marchand. New York, American Book Co., 1937. li, 242 p. (Ameri- can fiction series; general editor, Harry H. Clark) 37-4089 PZ3.B814O13 114. Edgar Hundey; or, Memoirs of a sleep- walker. Philadelphia, H. Maxwell, 1799. 3 v. 5-41074 PZ3.B814E RBD Illustrates an early use of material drawn from frontier life, with its dangers from savage Indians and wild animals. 115. Edited with an introd. by David Lee Clark. New York, Macmillan, 1928. xxiii, 308 p. (Modern readers' series) 28-13915 PZ3.B814E12 1 16. Arthur Mervyn; or, Memoirs of the year 1793. Philadelphia, H. Maxwell, 1799. 2 v. 6-18972 PZ3.B814A RBD Volume 2 has imprint: New-York, Printed and sold by G. F. Hopkins, 1800. A novel describing Philadelphia during the yellow fever epidemic in 1793. 4.! 1240— 60 3 117. Novels. Philadelphia, McKay, 1887. 6 v. 17-13039 to 17-13043 PZ3.B814 Contents. — v. 1. Memoir. Wieland. — v. 2-3. Arthur Mervyn. — v. 4. Edgar Huntley. — v. 5. Jane Talbot. — v. 6. Ormond. Clara Howard. 118. TIMOTHY DWIGHT, 1752-1817 Dwight's interest in literature, first as a stu- dent and later a tutor at Yale College, led to a con- nection that encouraged his efforts to write. This association was with the Connecticut Wits, whose members tried to promote belletristic writing dur- ing the social and political upheavals of the Revolu- tionary period. Under that inspiration he eventu- ally produced three poetical works: a very long epic showing the influences of Alexander Pope and John Milton, in which Biblical events and characters were presented with American characteristics; a laborious satire directed against the ideas of Voltaire, David Hume, and other skeptical thinkers of the 18th century; and a meditative, descriptive poem praising life in his own parish of Greenfield. Dwight's eminence as a clergyman and his outstanding con- tributions to education as a teacher and as president of Yale College tend to outweigh his poetic work, which is now chiefly of historical interest. In the literature of his country he is best remembered, perhaps, by two somewhat less ambitious pieces of writing: "Columbia," a war song written while he was a chaplain in the American army; and Travels in New England and New Yor\ (1821-1822), de- scribed in the section treating of Travel and Travelers. 119. The conquest of Canaan; a poem, in eleven books. Hartford [Conn.] E. Babcock, 1785. 304 p. 45-52941 PS739.C7 1785 RBD Epic celebrating the Old Testament story of Joshua's conquest of Canaan. 120. The triumph of infidelity: a poem. Printed in the world [n. p.] 1788. 40 p. AC901.H3, v. 56 RBD Volume 56, no. 7, of the Hazard pamphlet collection. 121. Greenfield Hill: a poem, in seven parts. I. The prospect. II. The flourishing village. III. The burning of Fairfield. IV. The destruction of the Pequods. V. The clergyman's advice to the villagers. VI. The farmer's advice to the villagers. VII. The vision; or, Prospect of the future happi- ness of America. New York, Childs & Swaine, 1794. 183 p. 18-23749 AC901.D8, v. 48 RBD AC901.M5, v. 314, no. 1 RBD l8 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES [Duane pamphlets, v. 48, no. 1; Miscellaneous pamphlets, v. 314, no. 1.] 122. BENJAMIN FRANKLIN, 1706-1790 Printer, publisher, scientist, diplomat as popu- lar abroad as at home, and statesman, Franklin made his chief contributions to American letters outside the limits of literary art as an end in itself. For that reason his collected works are entered with those of his peers under General History, and ref- erence is made to his educational and scientific writings under those topics. In this section devoted to literature are described only his Memoirs (now called his Autobiography), a collection of family letters, and certain witty pieces that indicate his place among humorists. The style of these less for- mal works preserves the flavor of the 18th century English essayists — Addison and Steele among others — who were his masters in the art of writing. Taken in conjunction with Poor Richard's Alma- nac^, with which Franklin was associated from 1732 to 1758, they reveal the author's clarity of thought and expression, his proverbial wisdom, and his ability to record for posterity basic ideas influ- ential in establishing American civilization as it was at the beginning of the National period. Recent studies of Franklin's relation to the American heritage include: Verner W. Crane's Benjamin Franklin and a Rising People (Boston, Litde, Brown, 1954. 219 p.) and I. Bernard Cohen's Ben- jamin Franklin: His Contribution to the American Tradition (Indianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill, 1953. 320 p.). The latter publication belongs to the Makers of the American tradition series and consists of a collection of pertinent selections from Franklin's writings, accompanied by Professor Cohen's com- mentaries and an extensive introduction. 123. [Autobiography] Memoires de la vie privee de Benjamin Franklin, ecrits par lui-meme, et adresses a son fils . . . Paris, Buisson, 1791. [207] p. 7-7839 E802.6.F7F1 RBD First edition of the Autobiography, to the year 173 1, with additional material translated from [James Jones?] Wilmer's Memoirs of the Late Dr. Benjamin Frankjin (London, A. Grant, 1790. 94 p.). Cf. Paul L. Ford's Franklin Bibliography (Brooklyn, 1889. 467 p.), no. 383. 124. Memoirs of the life and writings of Benjamin Franklin . . . written by himself to a late period, and continued to the time of his death, by his grandson, William Temple Franklin . . . and a selection from his political, philosophical, and miscellaneous works. London, H. Colburn, 1818. 3 v. 19-14887 E302.F82 1818 RBD The Autobiography, in incomplete form but with various additions by W. T. Franklin, appears in volume one. 125. Edited from his manuscript, with notes and an introd., by John Bigelow. Phila- delphia, Lippincott, 1868. 409 p. 14-14054 E302.6.F7A2 1868 RBD The first appearance of the work from Franklin's own copy, the first publication in English of the four parts, and the first publication of the "oudine" prepared by Franklin as a guide to be used when writing his own life. See Ford's Franklin Bibli- ography, no. 423. 126. Memoirs. Parallel text ed., com- prising the texts of Franklin's original manu- script, the French translation by Louis Guillaume le Veillard, the French translation published by Buis- son, and the version edited by William Temple Franklin, his grandson. Edited with an introd. and explanatory notes, by Max Farrand. Published in cooperation with the Huntington Library. Berke- ley, University of California Press, 1949. xxxix, 422 p. 49-8616 E302.6.F7A2 1949a "Mr. Farrand's Introduction is a reprint, with a few minor revisions, of his article, 'Benjamin Franklin's Memoirs,' which appeared in the Hunt- ington Library Bulletin, No. 10, October 1936." The essay includes a detailed statement of the dif- ficulties surrounding the effort to establish a true text of Franklin's own composition, without changes and emendations by other hands. Column one of this edition is based on the manuscript in Franklin's own handwriting, now in the Huntington Library. Comparison with versions in the other three col- umns, and the faithfulness of the original manu- script to Franklin's style of writing, provide the stu- dent with the standard version as it exists today. Now printed for the first time from the manuscript as Franklin wrote it, and in- cluding his preliminary outline; with an introd. by Carl Van Doren and drawings by William Sharp. New York, Heritage Press, 1951. xix, 233 p. 51-4833 E302.6.F7A2 195 1 128. Satires & bagatelles. [Compiled by Paul Mc- Pharlin.] Detroit, Fine Book Circle, 1937. 139 p. 37-16487 PS745.A3M25 129. The letters of Benjamin Franklin & Jane Mecom, edited with an introd. by Carl Van Doren. Princeton, Published for the American Philosophical Society by Princeton University Press, LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 19 1950. xx, 380 p. (Memoirs of the American Philosophical Society, v. 27.) 50-10857 E302.6.F75A185 Q11.P612, v. 27 130. Franklin's wit & folly: The bagatelles. Richard E. Amacher [editor] New Bruns- wick, N. J., Rutgers University Press, 1953. xiv, 188 p. 53-11052 PS750.B3 1953 Bibliography: p. 177-184. A collection based on a partial list of Franklin's imprints from his private press at Passy; includes several serious pieces but omits a few of the humor- ous pieces, or bagatelles, among them some of the best known. Important for critical and textual commentaries. 131. Representative selections, with introd. bibli- ography, and notes, by Frank Luther Mott and Chester E. Jorgenson. New York, American Book Co., 1936. clxxxviii, 544 p. (American writ- ers series) 36-10175 PS745.A3M7 Includes an exact facsimile of Poor Richard Im- proved, 1753 (p. 225-260), a volume of a serial later published as Poor Richard's Almanac\, a title by which the whole set is commonly known. For selected bibliography of works by and about Frank- lin see p. cli-clxxxviii. 132. A Benjamin Franklin reader. Edited by Nathan G. Goodman. New York, Crowell, 1945. xxi, 818 p. 45-10550 PS745.A3G5 Contains the Autobiography in the John Bigelow text. Additional selections include: expressions of Franklin's religious beliefs; papers reflecting his in- terests as an editor and publisher; selections from Poor Richard's Almanac^; essays and humorous pieces; family papers; and miscellaneous letters and documents. 133. Autobiographical writings; selected and edited by Carl Van Doren. New York, Vi- king Press, 1945. xvi, 810 p. 45-9128 E302.6.F7A2 1945 A selection in large part brought together from various existing collected editions of Franklin's works, but includes also: 50 letters and other papers omitted by the most recent collected edition known to Van Doren; and 50 pieces not previously printed in full. Notes accompanying the selections indicate the sources used in preparing the texts. 134. PHILIP MORIN FRENEAU, 1 752-1 832 Journalist, editor, sea captain, farmer, and "poet of the American Revolution," Freneau was completely devoted to America and its way of life, an allegiance most significandy made manifest in his poetical works. These he wrote in two veins: lyrical, imaginative, and reflective poems concerned with nature and human destiny; and patriotic or political verses for the times, characterized by the vigor of their satire. In the first category the poems were early documents of the romantic movement in American literature, which reached its height in the next century. The second group was characterized by poems celebrating America and her struggle for independence and democracy, or castigating enemies of these ideals, whether in Britain or at home. "Literary Importations," a poem apparently written in 1786, gives characteristic expression to his zeal for an American culture entirely divorced from English influence. Critics have said that Freneau had the finest poetic talent produced in America after Ed- ward Taylor and before William Cullen Bryant — an endowment sacrified in part to the making of propaganda verses. The poet's religious and philo- sophical speculations are considered in Nelson F. Adkins' Philip Freneau and the Cosmic Enigma (New York, New York University Press, 1949. 84 p.). 135. Poems written chiefly during the late war. Philadelphia, F. Bailey. 1786. 407 p. PS755.A1 1786 RBD 136. Poems written and published during the American Revolutionary War, and now re- published from the original manuscripts; inter- spersed with translations from the ancients, and other pieces not heretofore in print. 3d ed. Phila- delphia, L. R. Bailey, 1809. 2 v. 30-20889 PS755.A2 1809 RBD 137. A collection of poems on American affairs, and a variety of other subjects chiefly moral and political; written between the year 1797 and the present time. New York, D. Longworth, 1815. 2 v. PS755.A2 1815 RBD 138. The poems of Philip Freneau, poet of the American Revolution. Edited for the Prince- ton Historical Association by Fred Lewis Pattee. Princeton, N. J., The University Library, 1902-07. 3 v. 3-9603 PS755.A2 1902 "Bibliography of the poetry of Philip Freneau": v. 3, p. 407-417. The editor explains (v. 1, p. vi-vii) that the edi- tion includes the most significant of Freneau's poems arranged in order of their first printing and in some cases, particularly those of the poetical pamphlets dealing with the American Revolution, in their original form, not as cut down later by Freneau. 20 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES The editions of 1786, 1788, 1795, 1809, and 1815 constitute the chief sources used by the editor. 139. Poems. Edited with a critical introd. by Harry Hayden Clark. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1929. lxiii, 425 p. (American authors series; general editor, Stanley T. Williams) 29-21609 PS755.A5C6 "Selected reading list": p. lxi-lxiii. 140. Miscellaneous works containing his essays, and additional poems. Philadelphia, F. Bailey, 1788. xii, 429 p. 32-15552 PS755.A1 1788 RBD 141. Letters on various interesting and im- portant subjects; many of which have ap- peared in the Aurora. Corr. and much enl. by Robert Slender, O. S. M. [pseud.] Philadelphia, Printed for the author, from the press of D. Hogan, 1799. viii, 142 p. 19-2090 AC901.T5, v. 7 RBD PS757.L4 1799 RBD [Thorndike pamphlets, v. 7, no. 14.] 142. With an introd. and a bibliographi- cal note by Harry Hayden Clark. New York, Scholars' Facsimiles & Reprints, 1943. vi p., facsim.: 142 p. 43-6720 PS757.L4 1799a "Bibliographical note": p. vi. 143. Prose. Selected and edited by Philip M. Marsh. New Brunswick, N. J., Scarecrow Press, 1955. xii, 596 p. 55-14358 PS755.A5M3 144. THOMAS GODFREY, 1736-1763 Before the social and political upheavals of the Revolutionary period had begun to change a group of colonies into a nation, British models fre- quently were used by the few Americans writing in the belletristic tradition. Godfrey's literary out- put, small as it was, showed this influence. Debts to the Cavalier poets are apparent in his love songs, while The Court of Fancy (1762) was, according to his own statement, imitative of Chaucer and Pope. All the poems, however, showed a promise that might have been realized but for the writer's un- timely death. His one play, a romantic drama located in Parthia at the beginning of the Christian era, is obviously in the Elizabethan manner, al- though its individual merits include sound construc- tion and effective use of blank verse. It is inter- esting to note that his play was a genuine "first": the first tragedy written in America by an American that was acted on the professional stage in America. Members of the Philadelphia group of creative artists who were Godfrey's friends and associates in- cluded Benjamin West, the painter, and Francis Hopkinson, the poet and composer. Together they took part in laying foundations for American art, music, and literature upon which later generations were able to build. 145. Juvenile poems on various subjects. With The Prince of Parthia . . . To which is pre- fixed Some account of the author and his writings. Philadelphia, Printed by H. Miller, 1765. xxvi, 223 p. 34-35375 PS761.A1 1765 RBD Posthumously published through the efforts of the author's mentor and admirer, William Smith, provost of the College of Philadelphia, and of his friend, Nathaniel Evans. Reprints of The Prince of Parthia include the following: one edited with commentary by Archibald Henderson (Boston, Litde, Brown, 19 17. 189 p.) and a second in Mont- rose J. Moses' Representative Plays by American Dramatists (no. 2347). 146. FRANCIS HOPKINSON, 1737-1791 Pennsylvania and New Jersey were the scenes of Hopkinson's multiple activities as merchant, law- yer, citizen, musician, writer, and cultivated amateur of science and art. While he received assignments of such importance as membership in the Conti- nental Congress, in which he voted for the Declara- tion of Independence and became one of its signers, he continued to write. Songs, poems, essays, and ballads constitute characteristic examples of the forms in which he expressed his artistic, literary, and political interests. Since only a partial collec- tion of his writings has been made, George E. Has- tings' The Life and Wor\s of Francis Hopkinson (Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1926. [517] p.) has value not only for its critical comments but also for numerous excerpts from the writings, and for the bibliography it provides. Hopkinson's ar- dent patriotism and his use of native themes are evidence of a growing national spirit as the country emerged from colonial status to independent power. 147. A pretty story ... By Peter Grievous, es- quire, A. B. C. D. E. [pseud.] Williams- burg, [Va.], J. Pinkney, 1774. 16 p. 19-4136 E187.C72, v. 12 RBD [Colonial pamphlets, v. 12, no. 9.] A political satire on the administration of the British colonies in North America, and the causes of the Revolution. First and 2d editions have imprint: Philadelphia, Printed and sold by John Dunlap, 1774. LITERATURE (1607-1955) / 21 Reprinted in 1857 and 1864 with tide: The Old Farm and the New Farm: A Political Allegory. 148. Miscellaneous essays and occasional writings. Philadelphia, T. Dobson, 1792. 3 v. 5-30697 PS775.A1 1792 RBD See v. 2, p. 146-160, for "A Letter on Whitewash- ing" [1785] and v. 3, p. 169-173, for "The Battle of the Kegs" [1779]. The former is an Addisonian essay satirizing American methods of house clean- ing; the latter is a ballad on the American attempt to use kegs of gunpowder as floating mines against the British. 149. THOMAS JEFFERSON, 1743-1826 Jefferson's rank with the foremost statesmen of the United States automatically places the main body of his writings in the section of this bibli- ography devoted to the general history of the Na- tion. The one book described here consists of es- says written in response to a series of questions that originated in an undertaking by the French Govern- ment to collect information about the several American states. The questions relating to Vir- ginia were referred to Jefferson, and his answers constitute his Notes on the State of Virginia. The vigor and distinction of expression that characterized the book, its notable descriptions of the physical as- pect of the state, the range and interest of its scientific observations, the views expressed on philos- ophy and morality, and the enlightenment evident in the writer's opinions about slavery and the In- dians are among the elements that have established the book in its place with American literary classics. 150. Notes on the State of Virginia; written in the year 1781, somewhat corr. and enl. in the winter of 1782, for the use of a foreigner of distinc- tion, in answer to certain queries proposed by him . . . 1782. [Paris, 1785] 391 p. 1-2904 F230.J40 RBD First edition: 200 copies printed for private distribution. 151. Notes on the State of Virginia. Philadelphia, Prichard & Hall, 1788. 244 p. Rc-2820 F230.J42 RBD First American edition. 152. In The writings of Thomas Jeffer- son. Collected and edited by Paul Leicester Ford. v. 3. New York, Putnam, 1892-99. p. 68-295. 2-5666 E302.J466, v. 3 153. Edited with an introd. and notes by William Peden. Chapel Hill, Published for the Institute of Early American History and Cul- ture, Williamsburg, Va., by the University of North Carolina Press, 1955 ["1954] xxv, 315 p. maps. 55-14659 F230.J5102 1955 154. THOMAS PAINE, 1737-1809 At heart a radical and a reformer, Paine had never been successful in earning a living in his native country, England. Having won an introduction from Benjamin Franklin, who was impressed by his abilities, he sought new opportunities in Amer- ica. There he rapidly made connections that resulted in his becoming a journalist and a pam- phleteer whose writings exerted a "prodigious" influence in the formation of public opinion favor- able to the American Revolution. As an inter- nationalist willing to participate always in the cause of human freedom from oppression, he was later associated with the moderate republicans in France, taking part with them in developing the French Revolution until it was taken over by violent ele- ments and became the Terror. Returning to America, Paine found his earlier contributions frowned on by certain conservative leaders in the new republic. Since that time his character and his thought have been subjects of recurring, often un- informed, controversy. His reputation as a propa- gandist of genius is assured, however; and he takes his place among American men of letters on the basis of his accomplishments as a literary stylist. Thomas Jefferson, commenting on this aspect of Paine's work, wrote: "No writer has exceeded Paine in ease and familiarity of style, in perspicuity of expression, happiness of elucidation, and in simple and unassuming language." 155. Writings collected and edited by Moncure Conway. New York, Putnam, 1894-96. 4 v. 4- x 93 6 JCi77-A3 1894 Partial Contents. — v. 1, p. 67-120, Common sense [1776]; p. 168-380, The American crisis [1776-83]. — v. 2, p. 258-389, The rights of man [1791]; p. 390-583, The rights of man, part second [1792]. — v. 4, p. 1-84, The age of reason [1794]; p. 85-195, The age of reason, part second [1795]. 156. The complete writings of Thomas Paine, col- lected and edited by Philip S. Foner, Ph. D., with a biographical essay, and notes and introduc- tions presenting the historical background of Paine's writings. New York, Citadel Press, 1945. 2 v. 45-2289 JC177.A3 1945 157. Selections. Edited with an introd. by Arthur Wallace Peach. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 11 I K GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 1928. liii, 378 p. (American authors series; gen- eral editor, Stanley T. Williams) 28-22448 JC177.A5 1928 Reading list: p. li — liii. 158. Representative selections, with introd., bibli- ography, and notes, by Henry Hayden Clark. New York, American Book Co., 1944. cli, 436 p. (American writers series) 44-3959 JC177.A5 1944 "Selected bibliography": p. cxxv-cli. 159. Selected work of Tom Paine. Edited by Howard Fast. New York, Duell, Sloan & Pearce, 1945. xiii, 338 p. 45-2364 JC177.A5 1945 160. Common sense, and other political writings. Edited with an introd. by Nelson F. Adkins. New York, Liberal Arts Press, 1953. liii, 184 p. (American heritage series, no. 5) 53-11326 JC177.A5 1953 Bibliography: p. 1-liii. 161. SUSANNA (HASWELL) ROWSON, 1 762-1 824 During the Revolutionary period, writing in America reached its greatest distinction in the works of its statesmen, rather than in the sphere of belles- lettres. The art of fiction, particularly, lagged in its transit to the New World, where the battle for survival absorbed the energies of the people and where the Puritan tradition was against books that were not predominantly serious and edifying. As the 1 8th century wore on, however, an increasing appetite for imported fiction became apparent, with the result that sentimental and didactic novels began to be written in America for this waiting audience, composed chiefly of women. Among early books of this type, Mrs. Rowson's Charlotte Temple in its long history has achieved the status of one of the country's all-time best sellers. Born in England but permanently setded in America for the last 30 years of her life, the author produced a novel highly moral in tone, straightforward in narrative interest, and abundantly supplied with details of an exciting seduction. According to R. W. G. Vail's Susanna Haswell Rowson (Worcester, Mass., American Anti- quarian Society, 1933. 116 p.), the book has gone through more than 200 editions and has been read possibly by half a million individuals. The vogue of novel-reading was deplored by the Nation's in- tellectuals, while the books were being devoured by their wives and mothers and daughters. In the case of Mrs. Rowson's most characteristic works, light is cast on 18th-century standards of morality for the two sexes, on the circumscribed lives and interests of average American women, and on the details of daily domestic life at the time. 162. Charlotte; a tale of truth. Philadelphia, M. Carey, 1794. 2 v. in 1. (87, 83 p.) 6-4924 PS2736.R3C5 RBD First American edition, from the first edition published in London, 1790; later editions have tide: Charlotte Temple. 163. Charlotte Temple; a tale of truth . . . With an historical and biographical introd., bibli- ography, etc., by Francis W. Halsey. New York, Funk & Wagnalls, 1905. cix, 131, 150 p. illus. 5-39587 PZ3.R799C30 RBD "The best of all editions, including a long and valuable historical introduction, a bibliographical checklist of editions which, however, contains many errors and duplications, numerous footnotes, and seventeen illustrations." — Vail, p. 81. 164. Reuben and Rachel; or, Tales of old times. Boston, D. West, 1798. 2 v. in 1 (364 p.) 8-945 PZ3.R799Reu RBD Historical and sentimental romance beginning with the life of Christopher Columbus and ending in 1 8th century America. An early example of an American novel introducing idealized Indian characters. 165. JOHN TRUMBULL, 1750-1831 Trumbull has been called the most gifted of the Connecticut Wits, with whom he was associated in efforts to improve education provided by Yale College and to promote a taste for literature in America. Since his own taste was for satire, his style was greatly influenced by such English writers as Samuel Butler and Jonathan Swift; but the con- tent of what he wrote was American throughout. Although he wrote two series of prose essays satiriz- ing the errors he observed in Connecticut dignitaries and the culture they were attempting to create, his principal medium was poetry. At the Yale com- mencement of 1770, he recited a poem attacking the existing curriculum and making a plea for replac- ing the heavy concentrations in mathematics, meta- physics, and logic by courses in the fine arts, particularly in "polite literature." In the section of the poem devoted to the future of American liter- ature he prophesied that in his native land writers, born and nurtured there, would be the equals of England's Addison, Swift, and Shakespeare. The Progress of Dullness, a trilogy in verse, also satirized existing methods of education and emphasized the folly of contributing to the vanity and light-minded- LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 23 ness of women by depriving them of higher educa- tion. Trumbull's principal literary achievement, however, was the mock-epic, M'Fingal, a political satire against the British and in praise of American Whigs in relation to the Revolution. This work was enormously popular, being hawked about, as the author said, by peddlers and petty chapmen. Not only did it delight contemporary audiences, but it was also preserved for later generations in various mediums such as school readers. Thus, over an extended period of time, it was a poem not often surpassed in favor until Longfellow's poems became household words. 166. An essay on the use and advantages of the fine arts. Delivered at the public commence- ment in New Haven, Sept. 12, 1770. New Haven, Conn., T. & S. Green [ 1770] 16 p. AC901.W8, v. 20 RBD Wolcott pamphlets, v. 20, no. 5. 167. Poetical works. Containing M'Fingal [1782], a modern epic poem, rev. and corr., with copious explanatory notes; The progress of dullness [ 1 772-1 773]; and a collection of poems on various subjects, written before and during the Revolutionary War. Hartford, Conn., S. G. Good- rich, 1820. 2 v. 30-20909 PS852.A1 1820 RBD A Memoir of the Author, said to be Trumbull's own autobiography, appears in volume one. Reprint. In The Colonnade, v. 14, 19 19-1922, pt. 2. New York, Andiron Club of New York City, 1922. p. [287J-538. AP2.C662, v. 14 The reprint was edited by Arthur H. Nason. character, "Jonathan," whose combination of New England sturdiness and provincial simplicity was influential in establishing a "type" character por- trayed in later popular "Yankee plays." The Con- trast also has the merit of contributing to an under- standing of the social history of New York towards the end of the 18th century, by detailed treatment of conversation, manners, dress, and atmosphere. Tyler was a prolific and witty contributor of essays and poems to the periodical press of the time. He has also to his credit several plays less important than The Contrast; a novel, The Algerine Captive (1797), based on the captivity of a member of his family enslaved by the Algerians; and Yankee in London (1809), a series of fictional letters accepted as authentic at the time. 169. The contrast, a comedy in five acts. Written by a citizen of the United States; performed with applause at the theatres in New-York, Phila- delphia, and Maryland. Philadelphia, Prichard & Hall, 1790. 79 p. 7-27486 PS855.T7C6 1790 RBD Produced in 1787. 170. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1920. xxxviii, 120 p. facsims. 21-824 PS855.T7C6 1920 RBD Reprints may be located in various collections described in the section on Anthologies, as follows: Montrose J. Moses' Representative Plays by Ameri- can Dramatists (no. 2347); Allan G. Halline's American Plays (no. 2337); and Arthur H. Quinn's Representative American Plays, 7th ed. (New York, Appleton-Century-Crofts, 1953). 168. ROY ALL TYLER, 1757-1826 A lawyer who attained the dignity of becom- ing chief justice of the Supreme Court of Vermont, Tyler takes his place in the annals of American lit- erature chiefly because he was the author of the first social comedy written and staged in the United States, for and about Americans. While it follows the design of Richard Brinsley Sheridan's The School for Scandal, seen by Tyler in its New York production, the prologue of his own play specifically states his purpose to provide a drama that Ameri- cans might call their own. The "contrast" from which the piece takes its tide is between American character and society, portrayed as fundamentally simple and marked by "probity, virtue, and honor," and other characters and societies in which Euro- pean polish is assumed to have produced a combina- tion of sophistication, foppishness, and falseness. Born in Boston and educated at Harvard, Tyler was particularly well equipped to create his Yankee 171. MASON LOCKE WEEMS, 1759-1825 One of the talents attributed to the eccentric "Parson" Weems is that of making facts perform antics according to his will. This gift was em- ployed to the full in developing his Actionized biographies. While he wrote lives of William Penn and Benjamin Franklin, Weems exercised his imagi- nation with particular expansiveness when dealing with the personalities and exploits of two Revolu- tionary generals: George Washington and Francis Marion. His "life" of Washington, issued as a small pamphlet the year after Washington's death, was later published in enlarged form and under several titles. It is said that the various editions of the work were represented by at least 84 print- ings within 30 years. The spread of these recurring publications throughout the United States con- tributed to creating in the public mind an idea of Washington the hero that became a mythical symbol of the greatness of America. Weems was an or- 24 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES dained clergyman whose greatest passion was for reading "good and improving books," and for 31 years his principal occupation was that of an itiner- ant bookseller. Traveling up and down the Adantic seaboard and westward towards Pennsylvania, he distributed books that helped to keep reading alive among the scattered farms and towns of a country devoid of adequate means of communication. The letters written during his wanderings, particularly those addressed to Mathew Carey, the Philadelphia publisher, are significant documents in the history of American literary taste and of the spread of culture in the United States. 172. A history, of the life and death, virtues, and exploits, of General George Washington; dedicated to Mrs. Washington . . . George-Town [D. C] Printed for the Rev. M. L. Weems by Green & English [1800] 80 p. NN 173. A history of the life and death, virtues, and exploits of General George Washington. Faithfully taken from authentic documents, and, now, in a 2d ed. improved . . . Philadelphia, Re- printed by John Bioren, for the author [ 1800] 82 p. 15-10673 E312.W347 RBD 174. The life of Washington the Great, enriched with a number of very curious anecdotes . . . 5th ed. Augusta, Reprinted by Geo. F. Randolph, 1806. 80 p. NN Text rewritten; the story of the hatchet and the cherry tree appears here for the first time. 175. The life of George Washington; with curious anecdotes, equally honorable to himself and exemplary to his young countrymen. 10th ed., gready improved. Philadelphia, M. Carey, 18 10. 228 p. illus. 15-3829 E312.W372 176. A history of the life and death, virtues & ex- ploits of General George Washington. [New York] Macy-Masius, 1927. 374 p. (An American bookshelf [2]) 27-27804 E312.W3894 "The present text is taken from one of the later editions . . ." — Editor's note signed: M. V. D. [i. e. Mark Van Doren]. 177. Mason Locke Weems, his works and ways. In three volumes. [1] A bibliography left unfinished by Paul Leicester Ford. [2-3. Letters 1784-1825] Edited by Emily E. F. Skeel. New York, 1829. 3 v. illus. 29-3631 Z8962.S62 Most of the letters are addressed to Mathew Carey. Sources consulted: v. 1, p. 345-385. 178. JOHN WOOLMAN, 1720-1772 Nearly 20 years before the signing of the Declaration of Independence, Woolman had al- ready declared his belief that liberty was the natural right of all men equally. To the realization of that conviction he devoted his life, as a sort of itinerant apostle of a righteous social gospel for his country and the world. His was the strongest American voice raised in his time against Negro slavery; after he was dead his written words still spoke power- fully in support of the antislavery movement. The increase of greed leading to a materialistic philoso- phy of life, the employment of workers in dangerous trades, the conduct of schools — these and other prob- lems in American society he sought to solve with wisdom in advance of his time. Written by this Quaker mystic who earned his bread by tailoring, the journal and essays he contributed to American literature give evidence of the impact of the Friends on the civilization of the country. Critics agree, moreover, that the journal is a classic of the inner life, as Franklin's almost contemporary autobiog- raphy is a classic record of a man at home in the 1 8th century world. No mention of Woolman as a writer, however brief, would be complete with- out the often-repeated advice from Charles Lamb to the Reader: "Get the writings of John Woolman by heart." 179. Journal. With an introd. by John G. Whit- tier. Boston, J. R. Osgood, 1871. viii, 315 p. BX7795.W7A3 1 87 1 RBD 180. New century ed. London, Head- ley, 1900. ix, 336 p. 1-25 198 BX7795.W7A3 Includes A Word of Remembrance and Caution to the Rich, other addenda, and a bibliography (p. 301-325). 181. New York, Dutton, 1922. xix, 250 p. (Everyman's library, edited by Ernest Rhys. Biography [no. 402]) 36-37445 AC1.E8, no. 402 Text based on the edition by John Greenleaf Whittier, with a few omissions; includes several additional pieces by Woolman. Introduction by Vida D. Scudder. List of the works of John Woolman: p. xix. 182. Edited by Janet Whitney. Chicago, H. Regnery, 1950. [xv] 233 p. 50-10962 BX7795.W7A3 1950 LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 25 183. Edited and with introd. by Thomas S. Kepler. Cleveland, World Pub. Co., 1954. xx, 235 p. (World devotional classics) 54-5339 BX7795.W7A3 1954 184. Works. In two Crukshank, 1774. 36-21088 parts. Philadelphia, J. xiv, 436 p. BX7617.W6 1774 RBD The Journal constitutes part one; miscellaneous writings are contained in part two. 185. Journal and essays. Edited from the original manuscripts with a biographical introd. by Amelia Mott Gummere. New York, Macmillan, 1922. xxii, 643 p. 22-24117 BX7795.W7A3 1922 C. Nationalism, Sectionalism, and Schism (i 820-1 870) Literature in America between 1820 and 1870 was the mirror of a society in which tremendous energy was at wor\. A surge of migration west- ward pushed the frontier past the fertile Middle West to the grainlands of the Middle Border and beyond. In 1848 the discovery of gold in California caused a rush to the Pacific Coast. Immigrants from Britain and Europe, attracted by the vision of a land of opportunity, came to America in great numbers, frequently to find themselves forced to sell their labor cheaply. But the availability of west- ern lands and the rapidly expanding economy of the Nation as a whole enabled them to prosper and to remain, thus adding rich new elements to the culture of the United States. In the expanding economy transportation became a prime necessity. Horses and vehicles, long the only means of con- veyance even for great distances, were replaced. Steamboats that plied the natural waterways and great canals built to float them then became the pre- ferred carriers, only to be superseded in their turn by railroads that began to reach farther and farther across the continent. New and old sections of the country were conscious of the importance of their regions and of their mission to prosper even at the expense of other sections. Tensions grew between sections, particularly be- tween the industrial North and the agrarian South, with its rich plantation economy based on slave labor. While jealousies and conflicts of interests increased, slavery and its expansion into new states and territories became an issue upon which the public mind was inflamed. In 1851-52 Harriet Beecher Stowe wrote her powerful antislavery novel, Uncle Tom's Cabin, thereby helping to "loose the fateful lightning" that led to the conflagration of the Civil War. By 1865 sectional differences had been settled by force of arms. The South was in ruins; but slavery was gone; and Abraham Lincoln's persuasive plea for "a new birth of freedom" was being answered, slowly and with suffering, while the reconstruction of the South progressed. 531240—60 4 During and after the years that saw such cata- clysmic forces at wor\ in American civilization, literature emerged into a phase of growing national- ism, fames Fenimore Cooper's historical novels of bygone days in America, and Washington Irving's familiar essays, sketches, and fol/{ tales of old New Yor\ State attracted delighted attention abroad as well as at home. Another development that was popular outside as well as within the United States was the emergence in literature of humor native to America. Such writings were often associated with the frontier and with the oddly assorted characters who gravitated there, uttering homely philosophies of life in strange dialects. The Puritan heritage of solemnity was thus mitigated. Another Puritan and Calvinistic concept, that of "sinners in the hands of an angry God," also was changed by the Unitarian doctrines convincingly enunciated by William Ellery Channing, in which were set forth man's innate innocence and goodness and the love of God for humanity. The same trend of thought led to the optimism, self-reliance , uto- pianism, democracy , and belief in the Over-Soul as- sociated with Ralph Waldo Emerson and his circle of Transcendentalists. The group under these in- fluences included Nathaniel Hawthorne, Henry D. Thoreau, Herman Melville, and Walt Whitman. Their novels, short stories, essays, poems, and mis- cellaneous prose were of such excellence as to win for the period of their publication the term "Ameri- can Renaissance!' A gradually widening diffusion of education, ever the accompaniment of a renaissance of culture, enlarged the audience of readers to whom a native literature appealed. Literary periodicals therefore increased in number, bringing in their train editors, critics, and contributors who formed groups of "literati." While not always individually impor- tant, these circles by their wor\ provided mediums of publication for better writers and thus contributed to raising the level of reading interest. In formal education, Harvard, oldest of the Nation's universi- 26 J A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES ties, gathered into its faculties men of learning who were also writers of distinction. On the roster of such names Henry Wadsworth Longfellow, James Russell Lowell, and Oliver Wendell Holmes stand high. Even if time and space availed to assess more de- velopments in American literature during these 50 years, the record would always be incomplete with- out recognition of the romanticism, more easily felt than defined, that pervaded much of the writing of the period. Cooper's noble Red Man, Longfellow's idealization of themes drawn from American his- tory, the Transcendentalism of Emerson, Edgar Al- lan Foe's mystery and other worldliness, Melville's exotic South Pacific islanders, Whitman's chants of democracy and individualism, John Greenleaf Whittier's celebration of simple people and natural beauty, and the doctrine of "progressive improve- ment" which suffused the thought and attitudes of so many minor, and not a few major, writers, all reflect the romantic impulse simultaneously at ivor\ in Britain, Europe, and America. Thus out of colonialism, provincialism, and small beginnings, American literature entered the stream of world literature to enrich it permanently. 186. AMOS BRONSON ALCOTT, 1799-1888 The enormous mass of Alcott's journals con- stitutes the best part of his literary lifework. Pub- lished selections from these document the thoughts expressed in his lectures and his ideas about edu- cational reform, philosophy, religion, and com- munal living at Fruitlands - . A member of the Con- cord group and an intimate associate of Emerson and Thoreau, he was a mystic and a Transcendental- ist of the most idealistic type. His place in Ameri- can life and thought is treated in his biography, Pedlar's Progress, by Odell Shepard (Boston, Little, Brown, 1937. 546 p.). 187. Journals. Selected and edited by Odell Shepard. Boston, Little, Brown, 1938. 559 p. 38-27766 PS 1 013. A4 1938 188. LOUISA MAY ALCOTT, 1832-1888 Miss Alcott's books for children are the dis- tillation of experiences shared by Amos Bronson Alcott's four daughters, of whom Louisa May was the second. The father's extreme Transcendental- ism resulted in economic hardships for his family. These are chronicled as part of life in New England during and after the Civil War. Told with senti- ment, humor, pathos, and realism the stories have been dear to every generation of American children and parents since they were written. A recent study of this author is Madeleine B. Stern's Louisa May Alcott (Norman, University of Oklahoma Press, 1950. 424 p.), in which see particularly the bibliog- raphy of sources consulted, p. 361-407. 189. Little women; or, Meg, Jo, Beth and Amy. Boston, Roberts, 1868-69. 2 v. ViU Frequently reprinted in modern editions, as in the Modern Library of the world's best books series (New York, Modern Library, 1950. 596 p.). 190. TIMOTHY SHAY ARTHUR, 1809-1885 Full of the reforming spirit and devotion to good causes characteristic of the mid-nineteenth cen- tury in America, Arthur became a prolific writer of moralizing tales, particularly in support of the temperance movement. These were widely read and approved, as were the magazines he edited and published. Among the latter Arthur's Home Maga- zine and The Children's Hour were particularly successful. 191. Ten nights in a bar-room, and what I saw there. Philadelphia, J. W. Bradley, 1854. 240 p. MH 192. GEORGE WILLIAM BAGBY, 1 828-1 883 Bagby's lectures, sketches, and familiar essays frequently appeared first as letters and editorials in newspapers and periodicals with which the writer was connected as a journalist or as an editor. His work was done between 1854 and 1882 and much of it appeared as ephemera that is now rare or lost. The residue, best seen in a modern collected edition, is of three types: idealized portrayals of plantation life in Bagby's native state, Virginia, before the Civil War; realistic and humorous sketches in "country" dialect represented by the type of misspelling considered amusing at the time; and humorous, affectionate representations of the psy- chology and speech of Negro slaves. 193. The Old Virginia gentleman, and other sketches. Edited and arr. by his daughter, Ellen M. Bagby. [5th ed.] Richmond, Dietz Press, 1948. xxvii, 318 p. 48-11917 F230.B14 1948 Bibliography: p. [3151-318. 194. JOSEPH GLOVER BALDWIN, 1815-1864 Baldwin's sketches preserve impressions of his life as a lawyer during a practice of some 18 years in Mississippi and Alabama when both states were on the old southwestern frontier. The back LITERATURE (1607-1955) / T] woods lawyers, wildcat speculators, gamblers, brag- garts, and brave men who were typical of the time and place are treated with satiric humor and realism in what has been called a minor American classic. 195. The flush times of Alabama and Mississippi. New York, Appleton, 1853. 330 p. 16-9738 F327.B18 RBD 196. 2d ed. New York, Appleton, 1854. x, 330 p. n-3 2 574 F327.B182 197. Americus, Ga., Americus Book Co., 1908. vii, 330 p. 16-11135 F327.B189 198. JAMES NELSON BARKER, 1784-1858 Barker's contribution to the development of American drama apparendy was inspired by a belief in the art of theater as part of the cultural life of a nation. His was one of the first voices raised in praise of the use of national themes and against Americans remaining "mental colonists" of Great Britain. Applying his own theories, he wrote a play based on the Pocahontas story, a pioneer work in the long tradition of romanticizing that legend in particular and the Red Man in general. Barker's most substantial play, a tragedy in blank verse, also derived its plot from American colonial history, this time weaving together "superstitious" fears of witchcraft in Massachusetts and conflicts with Indians in the same area. The work illus- trates an early treatment of themes derived from Puritan ideology that reappeared repeatedly in Amer- ican literature. Tears and Smiles (produced 1807, published 1808) used the technique of a comedy of manners to satirize social life and customs in Philadelphia. The text of the original edition, not previously reprinted, is included in James Nelson Bar\er, 1784-18 58 (Philadelphia, University of Pennsylvania Press, 1929) p. 138-207, a study by Paul H. Musser. 199. The Indian princess; or, La belle sauvage. Philadelphia, G. E. Blake, 1808. 74 p. 1-2075 PS1065.B83I6 1808 RBD A musical play called "an operatic melodrame." The music by John Bray is not included in this edition. For a reprint see Representative Plays by American Dramatists, edited by Montrose J. Moses (no. 2347). 200. The tragedy of Superstition. Carefully cor- rected from the prompt books of the Phila- delphia theatre. By M. Lopez, prompter. (Phila- delphia] A. R. Poole [1826] 68 p. (Lopez & Wemyss' edition. Acting American theatre | no. ; | ) 27-23186 PS1065.B83T7 1826 For reprints see American Plays, selected and edited by Allan G. Halline (no. 2337), and the sev- enth edition of Arthur H. Quinn's Representative American Plays. 201. ROBERT MONTGOMERY BIRD, 1806- i854 Author of blank verse dramas on classical themes, or inspired by Spanish colonial life in the New World, which were produced with marked success by Edwin Forrest, Bird is perhaps most frequendy mentioned as a historical novelist of frontier life about the close of the Revolution. Written in the romantic tradition of good story telling, Nic\ of the Woods represents a deliberate effort to provide the correction of idealizations of "the noble savage" by giving realistic portrayals of uncivilized and cruel Indians and by emphasizing the contributions made by white pioneers to the westward transit of civilization in America. The book also records the exploits of a lawless frontiersman, "Roaring Ralph Stackpole." 202. Nick of the woods; or, The Jibbenainosay. A tale of Kentucky, by the author of Calavar. Philadelphia, Carey, Lea & Blanchard, 1837. 2 v. 6-13129 PZ3.B532N RBD 203. New ed., rev. by author. New York, Redfield, 1853. xi, 391 p. 8-34324 PZ3.B532N4 204. Edited, with an introd., chronology, and bibliography, by Cecil B. Williams. New York, American Book Co., 1939. Ixxv, 408 p. (American fiction series; general editor, H. H. Clark) 39-15203 PZ3.B532N15 "Selected bibliography": p. lxvi-lxxv. The text is that of the edition of 1853. Cf. Preface, p. v. 205. Dramatic works. In Foust, Clement E. The life and dramatic works of Robert Montgomery Bird. New York, Knickerbocker Press, 1919. p. 169-722. 21-733 PS1099.B5Z72 Thesis (Ph. D.) — University of Pennsylvania. Bibliography: p. 161-167. "Of the four plays in this volume, Pelopidas, The Gladiator, and Oralloossa appear in print for the first time. The Broker of Bogota was first pub- lished in Prof. A. H. Quinn's recent volume, Repre- sentative American Plays [1917] • • •" Preface, p. vi. 28 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 206. GEORGE HENRY BOKER, 1 823-1 890 Boker was an American dramatist who turned to the history and literature of England, Spain, and Italy for inspiration. His noteworthy Francesca da Rimini, first produced in 1855, was revived with success as late as 1901. As a poet he is remembered not only for his posthumous Sonnets (1929) edited by Sculley Bradley, but also for Poems of the War (1864) composed chiefly as patriotic verses for pub- lication in newspapers during the Civil War. "Our Heroic Themes," a poem read before the Phi Beta Kappa Society of Harvard University on July 20, 1865, contains an eloquent tribute to Lincoln. 207. Plays and poems. Boston, Ticknor & Fields, 1856. 2 v. CtY Contents. — v. 1. Plays: Calaynos; Anne Boleyn; Leonor de Guzman; Francesca da Rimini. — v. 2. Plays: The betrothal; The widow's marriage. — Poems. 208. 2d ed. Boston, Ticknor & Fields, 1857. 2 v. 20-17126 PS1105.A1 1857 Francesca da Rimini is included in American Plays, edited by Allan G. Halline (no. 2337), and in Representative American Plays, 7th ed., edited by Arthur H. Quinn. 209. CHARLES FARRAR BROWNE ("ARTE- MUS WARD"), 1834-1867 The lectures, newspaper columns, and books produced by Browne under his pseudonym of "Artemus Ward" became enormously popular and helped to contribute to the establishment of a tra- dition of native American humor which came to full fruition in Mark Twain's writings. Browne, through the pages of Punch, as well as on the lecture platform, also won sustained applause in England. His backwoods philosophers and Down East char- acters, whose sayings were enriched by absurd mis- spellings, were used by their creator to satirize sham and hypocrisy wherever discovered. Browne's hu- mor was particularly admired by Abraham Lincoln. 210. Artemus Ward, his book. New York, Carle- ton, 1862. x, [17-262] p. 36-29489 PN6161.B735 1862 RBD 21 1. Artemus Ward; his travels. With comic illus. by Mullen. New York, Carleton, 1865. 231 p. 3-25798 PN6161.B737 1865 RBD Contents. — pt. 1. Miscellaneous. — pt. 2. Among the Mormans. 212. Complete works of Artemus Ward [pseud.] With a biographical sketch (by Melville D. Landon, "Eli Perkins") [Complete ed.] New York, Carleton, 1879. 347 p. CSmH 213. Rev. ed. New York, G. W. Dill- ingham, 1898. 449 p. illus. 98-564 PN6161.B73 1898 214. Artemus Ward's best stories. Edited by Clif- ton Johnson; with an introd. by W. D. Howells. Illustrated by Frank A. Nankivell. New York, Flarper, 191 2. xv, 274 p. 12-22824 PN6161.B739 215. Selected works of Artemus Ward [pseud.] Edited with an introd. by Albert Jay Nock. New York, Boni, 1924. 295 p. 25-2376 PS 1 14 1. N6 216. WILLIAM CULLEN BRYANT, 1794-1878 During the early years of the 19th century the poets widely read in the United States were predominantly British. Scott, Burns, and Byron particularly appealed to the current taste for ro- mance, sentiment, minstrelsy, and adventure. Not until the 1830's, after the publication of poems by the New Englander, Bryant, did American critics concede the arrival of a major national poet. Bryant's work is preeminently that of a poet who thought abstractly and reflectively about nature and man in relation one to the other, and whose expres- sion has a classical quality. Interwoven in his poems are the universal themes of human freedom, suf- fering, death, faith, and immortality. His Lectures on Poetry, delivered in 1825, contains an eloquent and explicit statement of his poetic principles, which invites comparison with Poe's The Poetic Principle (1850). Bryant's influence on public opinion in America, literary and otherwise, was extended by his long career as a journalist, particularly during his editorship of the New Yor\ Evening Post, from 1829 to 1878. Throughout his life he was con- sistently a champion of the liberal position on na- tional problems, such as slavery, free trade, and free speech. 217. Poems. Cambridge, Mass., Hilliard & Met- calf, 1821. 44 p. 21-13044 PS1150.E21 RBD Contents. — The ages. — To a waterfowl. — Trans- lation of a fragment of Simonides. — Inscription for the entrance into a wood. — The yellow violet. — Song. — Green river. — Thanatopsis. New-York, E. Bliss, 1832. 240 p. 6-7137 PS1150.E32 RBD LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 29 Includes the eight poems published in 1821, and 81 others, most of which had appeared in different periodicals. 219. Edited by Washington Irving. Lon- don, J. Andrews, 1832. xii, 235 p. 16-4995 PSii5o.E32a RBD First London edition, dedicated to Samuel Rogers, by Irving, and containing the same poems as the New York edition of the same date. 220. Collected and arr. by the author. New York, Appleton [1876] 501 p. illus. 21-13049 PS1150.E76 Last edition which passed through Bryant's hands; includes final text of poems. 221. Selected and edited with a com- mentary by Louis Untermeyer, and illustrated with engravings by Thomas W. Nason. New York, Limited Editions Club, 1947. xix, 298 p. 47-3186 PS1151.U5 RBD 222. Letters of a traveller; or, Notes of things seen in Europe and America. New York, Put- nam, 1850. 442 p. 26-21283 G470.B8 1850 RBD 223. The life and works of William Cullen Bryant. New York, Appleton, 1883-84. 6 v. 17-16129 PS1150.E83 Edited by Parke Godwin. Contents. — 1-2. A biography of William Cullen Bryant, with extracts from his private correspond- ence. — 3-4. The poetical works writings. ;-6. Prose 224. Poetical works. Roslyn ed.; with chronologies of Bryant's life and poems, and bibliography of his writings by Henry C. Sturges, and a memoir of his life by Richard Henry Stoddard. New York, Appleton, 1903. cxxx, 418 p. 3-22094 PS1150.F03 225. Representative selections, with introd., bibli- ography, and notes, by Tremaine McDowell, New York, American Book Co., 1935. lxxxii, 426 p. (American writers series) 35-8651 PS1153.M25 "Selected bibliography": p. lxxiii-lxxxii. 226. WILLIAM ALEXANDER CARUTHERS, 1800 (ca.)-i846 Caruthers was one of several Southern writers of the period who turned to local history for the sources of novels. Two romances celebrate the past history of his native state, Virginia, through the use of such famous episodes as Bacon's Rebellion (1676) and Governor Alexander Spotswood's exploration in 1 716 of what was then the western wilderness, now the Shenandoah Valley of Virginia. His first novel, The Kentuckjan in New Yor\ (1834) is an epistolary work of contemporary sentiment and manners in which interests of the North and South are mingled. A recent biographical and bibliog- raphical study of Caruthers has been made by Curtis C. Davis in his Chronicler of the Cavaliers (Rich- mond, Dietz Press, 1953. 570 p.). 227. The cavaliers of Virginia; or, The recluse of Jamestown. New York, Harper, 1834-35. 2 v. in 1. (228, 246 p.) 41-32194 PZ3.253Cav2 41-32194 PZ3.C253Cav2 228. The knights of the horseshoe. Wetumpka, Ala., C. Yancey, 1845. 248 p. PU 229. — — — New York, A. L. Burt [1928] 431 p. (Burt's library of the world's best books) 28-24158 PZ3.C253Kn8 230. WILLIAM ELLERY CHANNING, 1780- 1842 Channing's place in American literature is discussed at length by Robert E. Spiller in "A Case for W. E. Channing," The New England Quarterly, v. 3, Jan. 1930, p. 55-81. Briefly, it may be said that Channing in his "The Importance and Means of a National Literature," The Christian Examiner, 1830, advocated intellectual self-reliance in America seven years before Emerson's The American Scholar (1837) gave classic expression to the same idea. In his discourses, sermons, and essays he expressed his revolt from Calvinism, his interest in but quali- fied rejection of idealism, and his firm conviction of the loving-kindness of God and the inherent nobility of man. Thus he was instrumental in pre- paring the way for the Transcendentalism of the Concord circle, with which he was affiliated. As a writer, Channing was one of the few Americans of his time to win enthusiastic recognition in England. To avoid lengthy descriptions of pamphlets on a wide variety of subjects, reference is made below to his collected works. In these the student of religion in America will find essential material. Robert L. Patterson's The Philosophy of William Ellery Channing (New York, Bookman Associates, [952. 298 p.) contributes to an understanding of his in- tellectual quality. David P. Edgcll's William Ellery Channing (Boston, Beacon Press, 1955. 264 p.) has a twofold purpose: to reintroduce Channing as a man of his times in America; and to present an 30 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES intellectual portrait of him which shows the nature of his thought and its significance, past and present. He has been called the aposde of Unitarianism in America. 231. Discourses, reviews, and miscellanies. Bos- ton, Carter & Hendee, 1830. 603 p. 32-6508 BX9815.C45 RBD Includes: "Remarks on the Character and Writ- ings of John Milton," published in The Christian Examiner (1826); "Remarks on the Life and Char- acter of Napoleon Bonaparte," pt. 1-2, The Chris- tian Examiner (1827, 1828); and "The Moral Argument Against Calvinism," from The Christian Disciple (1820). 232. Slavery. Boston, J. Munroe, 1835. 167 p. 11-6662 E449.C454 RBD 233. Self-culture. An address introductory to the Franklin lectures, delivered at Boston, Sep- tember, 1838. Boston, Dutton & Wentworth, 1838. 81 p. 5-42801 LC31.C5 RBD 234. Lecture on war. Boston, Dutton & Went- worth, 1839. ix, 50 p. 10-19810 RBD Waterman pamphlets, v. 94, no. 13. 235. Lectures on the elevation of the labouring portion of the community. Boston, Ticknor, 1840. vi, 81 p. E9-1910 HD6961.C36 236. Works. 1 st complete American ed. With an introd. [by the author] Boston, J. Munroe, 1841-43. 6 v. 33 -I 567 BX9815.C4 1841 237. Boston, American Unitarian Associ- ation, 1903. 6 v. MeWC 238. New and complete ed., rearranged, to which is added The perfect life. Boston, American Unitarian Association, 1903. 1060 p. 4-10382 BX9815.C4 1903 239. LYDIA MARIA (FRANCIS) CHILD, 1 802-1 880 Mrs. Child, who was born in Medford, Massa- chusetts, became part of a Boston and Cambridge group of Unitarians and Transcendentalists. Her novels, written at an early age, are didactic, senti- mental tales emphasizing American patriotism in colonial and Revolutionary times; one of them celebrates the "noble savage" Hobomok. She wrote a variety of books designed for women and to explore their special interests. To various stories and books for children she added a periodical which she edited, The Juvenile Miscellany (1826-1834). For more than 30 years she was one of the most vocal champions of the abolition of slavery. As a re- former Mrs. Child designed her writings also as propaganda against social injustices and various evils she found in American society, notably capital pun- ishment and unfair wage scales. A Biography of Lydia Maria Child by Bernice G. Lambert (College Park, Md., 1953) was submitted to the University of Maryland as a doctoral dissertation. It comprises a typescript of 182 leaves, of which leaves 173-182 are devoted to a bibliography of Mrs. Child's writ- ings classified by type. 240. An appeal in favor of that class of Americans called Africans. Boston, Allen & Ticknor, 1833. 232 p. 11-4047 E449.C53 RBD 241. Hobomok, a tale of early times. By an American. Boston, Cummings, Hilliard, 1824. 188 p. 6-20980 PZ3.C437H RBD 242. Letters from New- York. New York, C. S. Francis, 1843. ix, 276 p. 19-6724 F128.44.C53 243. Second series. New York, C. S. Francis, 1845. [ix]— xii, 287 p. 28-559 F128.44.C534 First edition, published 1844. 244. Letters. With a biographical introd. by John G. Whittier and an appendix by Wendell Phillips. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1883. xxv, 280 p. 21-21 177 PS1293.Z8 1883 Collected and arranged by Harriet Winslow Sewall. Bibliography: p. 272-274. 245. JOHN ESTEN COOKE, 1 830-1 886 The plantation tradition in Virginia, the Civil War, and idealization of the South are themes that dominate the romantic historical novels of John Esten Cooke. He was also one of the biographers who contributed to the growth of the Robert E. Lee and "Stonewall" Jackson legends and was the author of various pieces of historical writing that glorified Virginia. 246. The Virginia comedians; or, Old day in the Old Dominion. New York, Appleton, 1854. 2 v. 12-19565 PZ3.C775Vi RBD 247. Surry of Eagle's-Nest; or, The memoirs of a staff-officer serving in Virginia. New York, Bunce & Huntington, 1866. viii, 484 p. 34-4938 PS1382.S8 1866 RBD Includes four illustrations by Winslow Homer. LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 31 248. New York, M. A. Donohue [1937? ] 484 p. 38-1585 PZ3.C775S118 249. Mohun; or, The last days of Lee and his paladins. New York, F. J. Huntington, 1869. 509 p. UCLi 8-3023 ViU 250. Charlottesville, Va., Historical Pub. Co., 1936. 376 p. 36-25555 PZ3.C775M09 251. My Lady Pokahontas. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1885. 190 p. 6-27178 PS1382.M9 1885 RBD 252. JAMES FENIMORE COOPER, 1789-1851 Cooper was one of the first professional lit- erary men produced in the United States. With Irving and Channing he won enthusiastic accept- ance in England and on the Continent, where his books were translated into numerous European lan- guages. From his early home in Cooperstovvn, New York, he had observed the migration westward towards new frontiers. This firsthand knowledge enabled him to give historical realism to his other- wise romantic novels of hunters, trappers, woods- men, Indians, frontier life, and the American Revo- lution. His service as a youth in a merchant ship and also in the United States Navy equipped him to write The History of the Navy of the United States of America (1839) and to impart to his numerous novels about life at sea an authentic feeling of ships and men in action. After he moved to New York and had experienced its club life and the more so- phisticated atmosphere of the growing city, Cooper felt an urge to know England and the Continent of Europe also. During a residence of seven years abroad, he wrote and spoke as an interpreter of America. Upon his return to the United States he published several travel books which stimulated American interest in the Old World. Writing as he did at a time when the United States had suffi- ciently come of age to begin some self-examination of its own culture, his penetrating, often critical books on social and political questions were and are significant in relation to the temper of his age. While Cooper has been best remembered for his contribution to the romantic tradition in historical fiction, of which Sir Walter Scott was the great English exponent at the time, critics now tend to emphasize the importance of the American writer's books that reflect conservative social and political opinions in his country at midpoint of the 19th cen- tury. The latter aspects of his work are most com- prehensively treated in Robert E. Spiller's Venimore Cooper, Critic of His Times (New York, Minton, Balch, 1 93 1. 337 p.). For a more recent critique of his writings and a general biographical study see James Grossman's James Fenimore Cooper (New York, Sloane, 1949. 273 p. American men of letters series). 253. The spy; a tale of the neutral ground. New York, Wiley & Halstead, 1821. 2 v. CtY Relations between Loyalists and patriots during the American Revolution provide the background for this, the author's second novel and first literary success. 254. Rev., corr., and with a new in- trod., notes, etc., by the author. London, R. Bentley, 1849. x '> 4 10 P- (Standard novels, 3) 6-32152 PZ3.C786SPH 255. With an introd. by Tremaine Mc- Dowell . . . New York, Scribner, 1931. xivii, 508 p. (Modern student's library) 31-32070 PZ3.C786SP55 Brief bibliography: p. [viii] 256. The pilot; a tale of the sea. New York, C. Wiley, 1823. 2 v. 6-29865 PZ3.C786Pi RBD *57- With the latest revision and correc- tions of the author. New York, Stringer & Townsend, 1856. x, 486 p. (Choice works of Cooper. Revised and corrected series, v. 7) 26-24687 PZ3.C786Pi9 258. The pioneers; or, The sources of the Susque- hanna. New York, C. Wiley, 1823. 2 v. NN First of the "Leatherstocking Tales." In order of composition followed by The Last of the Mo- hicans (1826); The Prairie (1827); The Pathfinder (1840); and The Deer slayer (1841). Frontier novels usually thought to contain the author's most unforgettable characters, whites and Indians. In reading sequence The Deerslayer should come first and be followed by The Last of the Mohicans. 259. Rev., corr. and . . . with a new introd., notes, etc. by the author. London, H. Colburn & R. Bentley, 1832. xi, 460 p. (Stand- ard novels, no. 14) 6-29701 PZ3.C786Pio5 260. New York, Dutton, 1920. xv, 444 p. (Everyman's library, edited by Ernest Rhys. Fiction [no. 171]) 36-37033 AC1.E8, no. 171 First published in this edition, 1907; re- printed . . . 1929. Bibliography: p. viii-ix. 32 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 261. Notions of the Americans: picked up by a travelling bachelor. Philadelphia, Carey, Lea & Carey, 1828. 2 v. 1-26767 E165.C77 RBD 262. A letter to his countrymen. New York, J. Wiley, 1834. 116 p. 10-8765 E381.C76 RBD 263. Gleanings in Europe: England, by an Ameri- can. Philadelphia, Carey, Lea Sc Blanchard, 1837. 2 v. in 1 (270, 260 p.) 2-30337 DA625.C777 RBD English edition issued the same year under title: England. With Sketches of Society in the Metrop- olis. Published, also in the same year, in Paris as Recollections of Europe. 264. Gleanings in Europe. Edited by Robert E. Spiller. New York, Oxford University Press, 1928-30. 2 v. 28-18308 D919.C8 Contents. — 1. France. — 2. England. 265. The American democrat; or, Hints on the social and civic relations of the United States of America. Cooperstown, N. Y., H. & E. Phinney, 1838. 192 p. 9-21770 JK216.C72 RBD 266. Edited with an introd. by H. L. Mencken. New York, Knopf, 193 1. xx, 184 p. (Americana deserta) 31-25625 JK216.C72 1931 267. With an introd. by H. L. Mencken, and an introductory note by Robert E. Spiller. New York, Vintage Books, 1956. xxviii, 190 p. (A Vintage book, K26) 56-13687 JK216.C72 1956 268. Satanstoe; or, The Littlepage manuscripts. New York, Burgess, Stringer, 1845. 2 v. 6-29679 PZ3.C786S RBD First novel in the Littlepage manuscripts trilogy, continued in The Chainbearer (1845) and The Red- skins (1846), works treating of the antirent troubles between wealthy landlords and tenants or squatters in New York; valuable also for its treatment of New York society and customs of the period. 269. Edited, with introd., chronology, and bibliography, by Robert E. Spiller and Joseph D. Coppock . . . New York, American Book Co., 1937. xli, 424 p. (American fiction series; general editor, H. H. Clark) 37-4084 PZ3.C786S18 Selected bibliography: p. xxxiii-xli. 270. Correspondence. Edited by his grandson, James Fenimore Cooper . . . New Haven, Yale University Press, 1922. 2 v. (776 p.) 22-21436 PS1431.A3 Partial collection of the author's letters, to which have been added numerous letters to him. 271. Cooper's novels. New York, W. A. Town- send, 1859-61. 32 v. Volume 1 published 1861. NN Illustrated from drawings by F. O. C. Darley. Represents the first effort to make a definitive edition; influenced the preparation of various later editions and remains an important text; lacks only Ned Myers among the full-length novels, but omits certain other prose pieces and short stories. Cf. Literary History of the United States (no. 2460). 272. Works. [Mohawk ed.] New York, Put- nam, 1912. 32 v. 12-31598 PS1400.F12 273. Representative selections, with introd., bibli- ography, and notes, by Robert E. Spiller. New York, American Book Co., 1936. cii, 350 p. (American writers series) 36-10603 PS1403.S6 "Selected bibliography": p. lxxxix-cii. 274. RICHARD HENRY DANA, 1815-1882 Dana, while a Harvard undergraduate, had trouble with his eyes and was sent to sea on a mer- chant ship as part of his cure. Ten years after his return to his normal environment, he used the jour- nal kept when he was "before the mast" to produce an American classic in which the hardships of a seaman's life in the 1830's were recounted with such power that the book was influential in reforming some of the more brutal punishments to which sailors were subjected at the time. It may be read for a comparison to Herman Melville's White- Jacket (1850). 275. Two years before the mast. New York, Harper, 1840. 483 p. (Harper's family library, no. 106) 5-22627 G540.D2 1840 RBD Frequently reprinted at popular prices, as in Everyman's library edition (New York, Dutton, 1930. 338 p.). Also published in conjunction with a biographical sketch of the author by his grandson, H. W. L. Dana (New York, Dodd, Mead, 1948. 338 p. Great illustrated classics series). 276. An autobiographical sketch (1815-1842). Edited by Robert F. Metzdorf, with an introd. by Norman Holmes Pearson. Hamden, Conn., Shoe String Press, 1953. x, 119 p. 53-13472 E415.9.D15A15 LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 33 First publication in its entirety of a sketch written by Dana in 1842. ". . . the great mass of the material [Dana's papers] still lies fallow in the collections of the Massachusetts Historical Society. That the papers of Dana will someday be printed in extenso seems inevitable; he is the Boswell of Boston, in a sense, and his journal, letters, and speeches provide a key to the social, literary, and political history of Massa- chusetts in the mid-nineteenth century." — Preface, p. ix. 277. JOHN WILLIAM DE FOREST, 1 826-1906 The rise of realism in the American novel after the middle of the 19th century, usually associ- ated with the work of William Dean Howells, was anticipated in the novels of a Connecticut officer in the Union Army, J. W. De Forest. He wrote vigorously and factually of life in the South, with- out romantic overtones, and dealt honestly with the mistakes and miseries of the Civil War. Later his Honest John Vane (1875) and Playing the Mischief (1875) exposed the political corruption following the war. His personal reminiscences of life in the army, originally issued serially in the 1860's, have been republished by the Yale University Press as: A Volunteer's Adventures (1946); and A Union Of- ficer in the Reconstruction (1948). 278. Miss Ravenel's conversion from secession to loyalty. New York, Harper, 1867. 521 p. 42-43995 PS1525.D5M5 1867 RBD 279. New York, Harper, 1939. xvi, 466 p. 39-19903 PZ3-D363Mi See particularly the Introduction by Gordon S. Haight (p. xvi) in which is quoted William D. Howell's opinion that De Forest deserves to be "lastingly recognized as one of the masters of American fiction." 280. RALPH WALDO EMERSON, 1 803-1 882 Emerson reached maturity in the full tide of 19th-century romanticism, material prosperity, and westward expansion in the United States. He came from New England roots planted in America about fourteen years after the first settlement in Massa- chusetts. His background derived from some an- cestors who were Puritan clergymen and from others who were shrewd Yankees engaged in trade; his education was obtained at the Boston Latin School, Harvard College, and the Harvard Divinity School. Following his graduation from the last of these institutions he passed into the Unitarian ministry, but resigned in less than four years because of doc- trinal differences. Before he was 32 years of age he setded permanently in Concord. From that quiet village his intellectual interests ranged far. He be- came a philosopher in his own right, a Platonist with keen interests in the sacred books of the East, and in the literature of German idealism. Mon- taigne and Shakespeare were his lifelong enthusi- asms. Poetic form and substance held his continued interest. During his travels in Europe he formed a lasting friendship with Carlyle and a not uncritical admiration for England. At home he was the center of the Transcendentalist circle in Concord. In that capacity he influenced writers as dissimilar as H. D. Thoreau, Jones Very, Nathaniel Haw- thorne, and Walt Whitman. Although he avoided the extreme views of some of his circle and took no part in the communal settlements of Brook Farm and Fruitlands, he contributed to and edited the Transcendentalist organ, The Dial (1840-1844). Throughout his career he proclaimed to America and the world his philosophy of idealism, optimism, individualism, self-reliance, moral intuition, and the Over-Soul. His message was given by means of public lectures, in essays, and in poems. On the basis of all these he became a leading citizen and a formative force not only in American life but also in the creation of a national literature for the United States. 281. Nature. Boston, J. Munroe, 1836. 95 p. 34-25488 PS1613.A1 1836 RBD Published anonymously, this first of Emerson's books contained the essence of the Transcendental philosophy that he elaborated in later works. 282. 74 P- New ed. Boston, J. Munroe, 1849. 34-25487 PS1613.A1 1849 RBD 283. [The American scholar] An oration de- livered before the Phi Beta Kappa Society . . . [of Harvard College] Boston, J. Munroe, 1837. 26 p. 24-24542 PS1623.O7 1837 RBD Frequently called the declaration of independence of American intellectual life. 284. An address delivered before the senior class in Divinity College, Cambridge, Sunday eve- ning, 15 July, 1838. Boston, J. Munroe, 1838. }i p. 4-36592 BX9842.E55 1838 RBD AC901.W3, v. 4 RBD Republished as The Divinity School Address ami issued in its filth printing by the American Uni- tarian Association in Boston, 1928. 285. Essays: [first series] Boston, J. Munroe, 1841. 303 p. 22-17721 PS1608.A2 1841 RBD 34 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Contents. — History. — Self-reliance. — Compensa- tion. — Spiritual laws. — Love. — Friendship. — Pru- dence. — Heroism. — The Over-Soul. — Circles. — In- tellect. — Art. 286. Essays: second series. Boston, J. Munroe, 1844. 313 p. 9-27870 PS1608.A3 1844 RBD Contents. — The poet. — Experience. — Charac- ter. — Manners. — Gifts. — Nature. — Politics. — Nomi- nalist and realist. — New England reformers; lec- ture at Amory Hall. 287. Essays, first and second series; with introd. by Irwin Edman. New York, Crowell, 1951. 438 p. 51-7280 PS1608.A1 1951 288. Poems. Boston, J. Munroe, 1847. 251 p. 1-582 PS1624.A1 1847 RBD First American edition; first English edition published slightly earlier in the same year (London, Chapman, 1847. 199 p. PS1624.A1 1847a). Household ed. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1892. vi, 324 p. (Household edi- tion of the poets) 48-43255 PS1624.A1 1892 "Contains nearly all the pieces included in the Poems and May-Day of former editions . . . Also, some pieces never before published are here given in an Appendix." First published in 1883 as v. 9 of the Riverside edition of Emerson's Complete Wor\s. 290. Selected and edited with a commen- tary, by Louis Untermeyer; illustrated with water-colors by Richard & Doris Beer. New York, Heritage Press, 1945. xvi, 238 p. (American poets, edited by Louis Untermeyer) 45-6422 PS1624.A17 1945 RBD 291. English traits. Boston, Phillips, Sampson, 1856. 312 p. 3-2575 DA625.E54 1856 RBD Shows the reaction to the character and quality of the English people, by an American living at the middle of the 19th century. 292. The conduct of life. Boston, Ticknor & Fields, i860. 288 p. 36-15513 PS1606.A1 i860 RBD Contents. — Fate. — Power. — Wealth. — Culture. — Behavior. — Worship. — Considerations by the way. — Beauty. — Illusions. 293. The conduct of life, Nature, and other essays. New York, Dutton, 1927. xi, 308 p. (Every- man's library, edited by Ernest Rhys. Essays and belles lettres, no. 322) 36-37199 AC1.E8, no. 322 294. Journals of Ralph Waldo Emerson, with an- notations, edited by Edward Waldo Emerson and Waldo Emerson Forbes. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1909-14. 10 v. 9-29980 PS 1 63 1. A3 1909 Contents. — 1. 1820-1824. — 2. 1824-1832. — 3. 1833-1835.— 4. 1836-1838.— 5. 1838-1841.— 6. 1841- 1844 — 7. 1845-1948. — 8. 1849-1855. — 9. 1856- 1863.— 10. 1864-1876. 295. The heart of Emerson's journals, edited by Bliss Perry. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1926. 1X > 357 P- 26-15215 PS1631.A3 1916 296. Letters; edited by Ralph L. Rusk. New York, Columbia University Press, 1939. 6 v. 39-12289 PS 1 63 1. A3 1939 297. Complete works. Centenary ed. With a biographical introd. and notes by Edward Waldo Emerson, and a general index. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1903. 12 v. NcD The set in the Library of Congress has imprint dates c i903~2i (33-21674 PSi6oo.F03a). 298. English traits, Representative men & other essays. New York, Dutton, 1932. ix, 374 p. (Everyman's library, edited by Ernest Rhys. Es- says and belles lettres, no. 279) 36-37246 AC1.E8, no. 279 299. Representative selections, with introd., bibli- ography, and notes, by Frederic I. Carpenter. New York, American Book Co., 1934. lvii, 456 p. (American writers series) 34-7266 PS1602.C3 "The text of Emerson's prose and verse included in the present volume is that of the Centenary edi- tion, which incorporates the author's final revi- sions." — Preface. "Selected bibliography": p. xlix-lvi. 300. Complete essays and other writings, edited, with a biographical introd., by Brooks At- kinson. Foreword by Tremaine McDowell. New York, Modern Library, 1950. xxvii, 930 p. (Mod- ern Library college editions, T14) 50-12215 PS1600.F50 Bibliography: p. xxvii. 301. Basic selections from Emerson; essays, poems & apothegms. Edited by Eduard C. Linde- man. New York, New American Library, 1954. 215 p. (A Mentor book, M 102) 54-6005 PS1603.L5 LITERATURE (1607-1955) / 35 Another recent collection in inexpensive format was edited by Robert E. Spiller and announced for publication in 1957, by Appleton-Century-Crofts in that firm's classics series. Recent contributions to the voluminous critical studies of Emerson's life and thought include: 302. Carpenter, Frederic I. Emerson handbook. New York, Hendricks House, 1953. xiv, 268 p. (Handbooks of American literature) 53-2274 PS1631.C34 303. Hopkins, Vivian C. Spires of form; a study of Emerson's aesthetic theory. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1951. x, 276 p. 51-9713 PS1642.A3H6 Bibliography: p. [252]-256. 304. Paul, Sherman. Emerson's angle of vision; man and nature in American experience. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1952. viii, 268 p. 52-5039 PS1638.P3 Bibliographical references included in "Notes": P- [233]~ 2 58. 305. Rusk, Ralph L. The life of Ralph Waldo Emerson. New York, Scribner, 1949. ix, 592 p. 49-9006 PS1631.R78 "Index and bibliography": p. 553-592. 306. Whicher, Stephen E. Freedom and fate; an inner life of Ralph Waldo Emerson. Phila- delphia, University of Pennsylvania Press, 1953. 203 p. 53-9552 PS1631.W5 Includes bibliography. 307. TIMOTHY FLINT, 1 780-1 840 Traveler, clergyman, editor, and novelist, Flint was born in Massachusetts and educated at Harvard. He brought to his missionary journeys and other expeditions, in the Mississippi Valley and beyond, the same intellectual enthusiasm for the wilderness and for advancing the frontier that in- spired other men of his period to carry civilization westward. His Recollections make available a con- temporary source for learning the reactions of an educated, idealistic man of the time to the rigors as well as excitements of pioneering, thus contributing to an understanding of an important phase in the social and economic development of the United States. His novels entitle him to be classed with the founders of Western fiction in America. 308. Recollections of the last ten years. Boston, Cummings, Hilliard, 1826. 395 p. 1-8704 F353.F63 309. Edited, with an introd., by C. Hart- ley Grattan. New York, Knopf, 1932. xix, 380 p. (Americana deserta) 32-26991 F353.F632 310. Biographical memoir of Daniel Boone, the first settler of Kentucky. Interspersed with incidents in the early annals of the country. Cin- cinnati, N. & G. Guilford, 1833. viii, 267 p. illus. 7-1044 1 F454.B744 311. Francis Berrian; or, The Mexican patriot. Boston, Cummings, Hilliard, 1826. 2 v. CtY Romance portraying a New Englander in Mexico during the revolutionary years of the 1820's. 312. The Shoshonee Valley. Cincinnati, E. H. Flint, 1830. 2 v. 6-39999 PZ3.F649S RBD Novel introducing Rocky Mountain trappers and fur traders, or "mountain men." 313. (SARAH) MARGARET FULLER (MAR- CHESA D'OSSOLI), 18 10-1850 A New England child prodigy, who later be- came a legend because of her melodramatic life, Margaret Fuller was an American pioneer of her period — a journalist, traveler in Europe and Amer- ica, critic, lecturer, feminist, Transcendentalist, and social reformer — in whose work the awakening literary and social conscience of the time had a sig- nificant manifestation. During her brief editorship (1840-42) of The Dial (1840-44) she developed it as a liberal literary review and secured for it contri- butions from some of the best writers of the coun- try. As part of her work with Horace Greeley on the New Yorf^ Tribune she criticized the leading authors of England and America, not always kindly, but with ability. Her translations, particularly from the German, reached the small audience prepared for this material. Her "conversations," or informal lectures on ideas and events, were influential in developing opinions among the intelligentsia. Be- fore her untimely death she became a citizen of the world, at home in foreign literary circles and an adherent of Mazzini in the Roman Revolution. Although severely bowdlerized by her distinguished editors, R. W. Emerson, W. H. Channing, and J. F. Clarke, her Memoirs (Boston, Phillips, Sampson, 1852, 2 v.) still provide a useful source for the study of intellectual America in the mid-nineteenth century. 36 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 314. Summer on the lakes, in 1843. Boston, C. C. Little & J. Brown, 1844. 256 p. Rc-1714 F551.O84RBD Account of a trip through the Middle West and Great Lakes country and of the "unfolding, nohle energies" anticipated by the writer in the United States, as migrations from the East to the West and back again were continued. 315. Woman in the nineteenth century. New York, Greeley & McElrath, 1845. 201 p. 28-22266 HQ1154.O8 1845 RBD "A reproduction, modified and expanded, of an article published in The Dial, Boston, July 1843, under the title of 'The Great Lawsuit. Man versus Men: Woman versus Women'." — Preface. A pioneer work, which reached an audience in England as well as in America, and which was in- strumental in forwarding the woman's movement. 316. Edited by her brother, Arthur B. Fuller. New and complete ed., with introd. by Horace Greeley. Boston, Roberts, 1874. 420 p. 7-36542 HQ1154.O86 317. Papers on literature and art. New York, Wiley & Putnam, 1846. 2 v. in 1. (Wiley and Putnam's library of American books, [no. 19-20]) 24-11830 PS2504.P3 "American Literature: Its Position in the Present Time, and Prospects for the Future," appears in pt. 2, p. [l22]-l65. 318. Writings. Selected and edited by Mason Wade. New York, Viking Press, 1941. 608 p. 41-6756 PS2501.W3 "Bibliography of published writings of Margaret Fuller": p. [593]-6oo. 319. JAMES HALL, 1 793-1 868 Hall, a Philadelphian who migrated west- ward in 1820, became active as a lawyer (later a judge), financier, editor, and writer in a region be- tween the Ohio and Mississippi Rivers. His sketches, legends, stories, and historical miscellanies portray with realism colored by romance the Indi- ans and whites, manners and customs, and daily events of life when that section of country was part of the American frontier. He was also coauthor with Thomas L. McKenney of the History of the Indian Tribes of North America (Philadelphia, E. C. Biddle, 1836-44. 3 v.). 320. Letters from the West. London, H. Col- burn, 1828. 385 p. 13-23470 F353.H16 RBD Includes descriptions of scenery, manners, and customs associated with life in the Mississippi Val- ley, and gives various anecdotes of frontier life in the same region. 321. Sketches of history, life, and manners in the West. Cincinnati, Hubbard & Edmands, 1834. 263 p. 1-8652 F351.H17 RBD Of this edition apparently only volume 1 was published. It was reissued in a 2-volume edition in 1835. Deals with the valleys of the Mississippi and Ohio Rivers. 322. Legends of the West. [Author's rev. ed.] New York, Putnam, 1853. 435 p. 35-33761 PS1779.H16L4 1853 Chiefly a collection of short tales and sketches, of which the first edition was published in 1832. Includes a novel, The Harpe's Head (1833), pub- lished also under the title, Kentucky. 323. FITZ-GREENE HALLECK, 1790-1867 Halleck, a Connecticut minor poet long iden- tified with New York literary circles, perpetuated in America the romantic tradition of which Byron, Campbell, and Scott were representative in Britain. In the 1830's he was second only to Bryant in popular favor in the United States. His "Croacker Poems," written in collaboration with Joseph Rodman Drake, to satirize local writers, artists, scientists, and politicians, made him famous overnight. His shorter poems, some of which were written in en- thusiasm for European affairs engendered by a trip abroad, are his most lasting achievements. Among these, "Burns" and "Marco Bozzaris" are typical. "On the Death Of Joseph Rodman Drake" is re- membered as a poet's devoted tribute to another poet who was his friend. Halleck's poems on native American themes include "The Field of the Grounded Arms," celebrating the American vic- tory at Saratoga during the Revolutionary War, and "Red Jacket," a eulogy of an Indian chief of the Tuscaroras. 324. Alnwick Castle, with other poems. New York, G. & C. Carvill, 1827. 64 p. 17-11659 PS1782.A5 1827 RBD 325- New-York, Harper, 1845. 104 p. 26-854 PS1782.A51845 RBD 326. Poetical works. Now first collected. New York, Appleton, 1847. 280 p. illus. 26-6565 PS1780.A2 1847 3 2 7- New York, Appleton, 1859. 238 p. 26-6570 PS1780.A2 1859 LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 37 328. The poetical writings of Fitz-Greene Halleck, with extracts from those of Joseph Rodman Drake. Edited by James Grant Wilson. New York, Appleton, 1869. xviii, 389 p. 15-18389 PS1780.A2 1869 329. Life and letters. By James Grant Wilson. New York, Appleton, 1869. 607 p. 26-6572 PS1783.W5 330. GEORGE WASHINGTON HARRIS ("SUT LOVINGOOD"), 1814-1869 Harris' humorous sketches and tall tales cele- brate the practical jokes and exploits of a hero, Sut Lovingood, from the mountains of East Tennessee. Written in the local dialect, they draw their inspi- ration from the manners and customs of the region in the middle of the 19th century. 331. Sut Lovingood. Yarns spun by a "nat'ral born durn'd fool." New York, Dick & Fitz- gerald, 1867. xv, 299 p. 41-19505 PN6161.H3235 RBD 332. Edited with an introd. by Brom Weber. New York, Grove Press, 1954. [xxxiv] 262 p. 54-10739 PS1799.H87S8 This edition comprises stories selected from the foregoing collection of 1867 and also the text of the author's "Sut Lovingood Travels with Old Abe Lin- coln." The latter sketches were originally published in the Nashville Union and American, Feb. 28, Mar. 2 and 5, 1861. 333. NATHANIEL HAWTHORNE, 1804-1864 Hawthorne was a descendant of one of the stern judges of witchcraft in Salem, Massachusetts, in the 17th century. In that same town Hawthorne was born, spent most of his youth, and developed as a writer. Later, he was associated particularly with Concord, where he was a cool and detached observer of the Transcendentalist group of which Emerson was the center. In fact he repented early of his own "Transcendental wild oats," an experi- ence that led to the writing of The Blithedale Ro- mance (1852). Revolting from what he felt to be the easy optimism and naive otherworldlincss of the Transcendentalists, he turned for the themes of his novels and tales to early times in New England, when life was dominated by Puritanism and par- ticularly by Calvinistic theology. These matters were dealt with by Hawthorne not as a historical novelist, but as a writer on timeless and universal themes having to do with the presence of evil in the world, the inevitable consequences of sin, the cruelty of dogmatism, and the necessity of morality. His work was accomplished under the stimulus of a powerful imagination, and in his longer books resulted in what he called romances, rather than novels. However, the adventures of which he wrote, frequently using symbolism and allegory, were pri- marily those of the human soul and were not in celebration of experiences necessarily particular to any given time or place. His reactions to a residence of more than five years in England, part of the time as consul at Liverpool, were given in his English notebooks. A shorter stay in Italy led to the choice of Rome as the setting for his romance, The Marble Faun (i860), in which the plot traces the after- effects of a crime and the dawn of conscience in a child of nature. The author's own mind and life may be studied profitably in his posthumously pub- lished notebooks. His contemporary critics included Herman Melville, upon whom the impact of Haw- thorne's masterpiece, The Scarlet Letter, was con- tributory to the writing of Moby Dic\, and Edgar Allan Poe, whose review of the second series of Twice-Told Tales, published in Graham's Maga- zine, v. 20, Apr.-May, 1842, p. 254, 298-300, not only discussed the technique of Hawthorne's short stories and sketches, but included also a formula- tion of Poe's own theories of the short story as a form of literary art. 334. Twice-told tales. Boston, American Station- ers Co., 1837. 334 p. 9-2689 PS1870.A1 1837 RBD First edition of the first series. 335. Boston, J. Munroe, 1842. 2 v. MH Second edition of the first series; first edition of the second series. 336. A new ed. Boston, Ticknor, Reed, & Fields, 1 85 1. 2 v. 7-3872 PS 1 870. A 1 1 85 1 RBD 337. New- York, Dutton, 1932. xvi, 357 p. (Everyman's library, edited by Ernest Rhys. Fiction [no. 531]) 36-37338 AC1.E8, no. 531 338. Mosses from an old manse. New York, Wiley & Putnam, 1846. 2 v. in 1. (207, 211 p.) (Wiley and Putnam's library of American books, no. 17-18) 7-3870 PS 1 863. A i 1846 RBD 339. New ed., carefully rev. by the author. Boston, Ticknor & Fields, 1854. 2 v. 6-15467 PS 1 863. A 1 1854 RBD 38 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 340. Salem ed. With an introd. by George Parsons Lathrop. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1893 [ c i882]277p. 54-50422 PS1863.A1 1893 A contemporary Houghton Mifflin edition is an- nounced for publication in July 1956. 341. The scarlet letter, a romance. Boston, Tick- nor, Reed, & Fields, 1850. 322 p. 7-3785 PS1868.A1 1850 RBD 342. Introd. by Austin Warren. New York, Rinehart, 1947. xiii, 251 p. (Rine- hart editions, 1 ) 48-1188 PZ3.H318SC 82 343. With an introd. by Newton Arvin. New York, Harper, 1950. xiii, 278 p. (Harper's modern classics) 50-6269 PZ3.H318SC 86 344. Introd. by John C. Gerber. New York, Modern Library, 1950. xxxiv, 300 p. (Modern Library college editions, T21) 50-12245 PZ3.H318SC 87 Bibliography: p. xxxiii-xxxiv. 345. The house of the seven gables, a romance. Boston, Ticknor, Reed, & Fields, 1851. vi, 344 p. 7-3868 PS1861.A1 1851 RBD For Hawthorne's distinction between a romance and a novel, see p. [iii]-iv. 346. New York, Dutton, 1930. xv, 310 p. (Everyman's library, edited by Ernest Rhys [no. 176]) 36~37 2 3 2 AC1.E8, no. 176 347. With illus. reproducing drawings for early editions . . . [and] an introductory biographical sketch of the author and anecdotal cap- tions by Basil Davenport. New York, Dodd, Mead, 1950. xiii, 335 p. (Great illustrated clas- sics) 50-6979 PZ3.H318H0 68 348. The heart of Hawthorne's journals. Edited by Newton Arvin. Boston, Houghton Mif- flin, 1929. xiv, 345 p. 29-10491 PS1881.A25 349. The American notebooks, based upon the original manuscripts in the Pierpont Morgan Library, and edited by Randall Stewart. New Haven, Yale University Press, 1932. xcvi, 350 p. 32-28143 PS1865.A1 1932 "Originally prepared as a doctoral dissertation at Yale University [1930]" — Preface, p. ix. Includes the passages omitted in the edition edited by Mrs. Hawthorne and published under title: Passages from the American Note-Boo\s of Nathaniel Hawthorne. 350. The English notebooks, based upon the original manuscripts in the Pierpont Morgan Library and edited by Randall Stewart. New York, Modern Language Association of America, 1 94 1. xliv, 667 p. (The Modern Language As- sociation of America. General series, 13) 41-21963 PS1881.A43 Includes the passages omitted in the edition edited by Mrs. Hawthorne and published under title: Pas- sages from the English Note-BooJ^s of Nathaniel Hawthorne. "Continues the work which was begun with . . . [the editor's] edition of The American Notebooks (Yale University Press, 1932) and which will be completed with an edition of The Italian Note- books, now being prepared by Mr. Norman Holmes Pearson." — Preface. "Published with the cooperation of Brown University." Bibliographical references included in "Notes" (p. [6231-654). 351. Complete works, with introductory notes by George Parsons Lathrop and illustrated with etchings by Blum, Church, Dielman, Gifford, Shir- law, and Turner. [Riverside ed. Cambridge, Mass., Printed at the Riverside Press, 1883] 12 v. illus. PPTu 3^2. [Riverside ed. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1887-88] 12 v. illus. 42-26389 PS1850.E87 353. Complete writings. [Old Manse ed. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1900] 22 v. illus. NcD ^54. Autographed ed. [Boston, Hough- ton Mifflin, 1900] 22 v. illus. 13-21420 PS1850.F00 355. Representative selections, with introd., bibli- ography, and notes, by Austin Warren. New York, American Book Co., 1934. xci, 368 p. (American writers series) 34-10889 PS1852W3 1934 "Selected bibliography": p. lxxv-lxxxix. 356. Complete novels and selected tales. Edited, with an introd. by Norman Holmes Pearson. New York, Modern Library, 1937. 1223 p. (Modern Library of the world's best books) 37-28752 PZ3.H3i8Com 357. The portable Hawthorne. Edited with an in- trod. and notes, by Malcolm Cowley. New York, Viking Press, 1948. vi, 634 p. (The Viking portable library, 38) 48-7869 PS1852.C6 "A very short bibliography": p. 633-634. LITERATURE (1607-1955) / 39 358. The best of Hawthorne. Edited with introd. and notes by Mark Van Doren. New York, Ronald Press, 1951. v. 436 p. 51-9259 PS1852.V3 Bibliography: p. 435-436. 359. Selected tales and sketches. Introd. by Hyatt H. Waggoner. New York, Rinehart, 1950. xxx, 410 p. (Rinehart editions, 33) 50-14223 PS1852.W25 "A bibliographical note": p. xxvii-xxviii. During the past several years students of Haw- thorne have made available new light on his work. These studies include: 360. Davidson, Edward H. Hawthorne's last phase. New Haven, Yale University Press, 1949. xiv, 174 p. (Yale studies in English, v. Ill) 49-1858 PS1882.D37 PR 13.Y3, v. Ill Bibliography: p. [163]-! 68. 361. Fogle, Richard H. Hawthorne's fiction: the light & the dark. Norman, University of Oklahoma Press, 1952. ix, 219 p. 52-4268 PS1888.F6 Bibliography: p. 207-214. 362. Stein, William B. Hawthorne's Faust, a study of the Devil archetype. Gainesville, University of Florida Press, 1953. vii, 172 p. 53-9337 PS1892.D4S75 Bibliography: p. 167-168. 363. Van Doren, Mark. Nathaniel Hawthorne. New York, Sloane, 1949. xiii, 285 p. (American men of letters series) 49-8394 PS 1 88 1. V3 Bibliographical note: p. 269-273. 364. Waggoner, Hyatt H. Hawthorne, a critical study. Cambridge, Mass., Belknap Press of Harvard University Press, 1955. 268 p. 54-9778 PS 1 888. W3 365. CHARLES FENNO HOFFMAN, 1806- 18S4 Hoffman, a New York editor, novelist, and writer of musical verses, whose personality Poe admired, was one of the cultivated easterners who traveled in what was then the far western part of the United States. By the publication of his observations and impressions of places, events, and characteristic types among the population, he contributed to a growing interest in the frontier. His novel Greyslaer (1840) celebrated the famous Beauchamp murder case, known also as the Kentucky Tragedy, and was successfully produced as a play in the year of its publication. Hoffman's Poems were collected and edited by his nephew, Edward Fenno Hoffman (Philadelphia, Porter & Coates, 1873. 238 p.). 366. A winter in the West. By a New Yorker. New York, Harper, 1835. 2 v. 1-16856 F484.3.H68 RBD Narrative of a journey through Pennsylvania, the Old Northwest, Missouri, Kentucky, Tennessee, and Virginia. 367. Wild scenes in the forest and prairie. Lon- don, R. Bentley, 1839. 2 v. 7-6147 PZ3.H674W 368. OLIVER WENDELL HOLMES, 1 809-1 894 A Boston Brahmin who counted Mrs. Anne Bradstreet among his ancestors, Holmes found in his native city a satisfying hub of the universe. His familiar essays, full of revelations of the writer's life and personality, were a characteristic and popular feature of The Atlantic Monthly, for which Holmes supplied the name when the journal was founded. As a poet he dealt with historic and patriotic themes, as in "Old Ironsides," and with spiritual and imaginative ideas, characteristically expressed in "The Chambered Nautilus." He also exercised a talent for writing light verse, of which "The Deacon's Masterpiece" is an example. Character- ized by humor interspersed with pathos, common sense, moral uprightness, and love of his country and his region, his literary work preserves the flavor of the time and place in which he lived. As a physician for many years on the medical faculty of Harvard University he attacked ignorance and prejudice in matters of health and became the author of medical essays and monographs which show that he made at least one important contribution to the improvement of medical science. His few novels dealt with psychopathological themes, which antici- pate later theories of psychoanalysis and psychiatry. 369. Poems. Boston, Otis, Broaders, 1836. xiv, 163 p. 26-858 PS1955.A1 1836 RBD 370. Complete poetical works. Cambridge ed. [edited by Horace E. Scudder] Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1895. xxi, 352 p. 4-13823 PS1955.A1 1895 371. The autocrat of the breakfast-table. Boston, Phillips, Sampson, 1858. 373 p. 17-4959 PS1964.A1 1858 RBD 40 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 372. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1895. xxiv, 321 p. (The Riverside literature series, [no. 81]) 17-4960 PS1964.A1 1895 Has subtitle: Everyman his own Bos well; includes a biographical sketch. 373. Edited with an introd. by Franklin T. Baker. New York, Macmillan, 1928. xxv, 369 p. (The modern readers' series) 28-26745 PS1964.A1 1928 374- New York, Dutton, 1931. x, 300 p. (Everyman's library, edited by Ernest Rhys. Essays, [no. 66]) 36-37070 AC 1.E8, no. 66 375. Elsie Venner; a romance of destiny. Boston, Ticknor & Fields, 1861. 2 v. 7-5180 PS1960.A1 1861 RBD First published under title The Professor's Story in The Atlantic Monthly, Jan. 1860-Apr. 1861, not December 1859 as stated in [publishers'] preface; the novel in which Holmes denned his concept of a Brahmin caste in New England. In order to isolate the medical and psychiatric elements in Elsie Venner and Holmes' other novels, The Guardian Angel and A Mortal Antipathy, Clarence P. Oberndorf has brought together abridg- ments and annotations of each book under the title, The Psychiatric Novels of Oliver Wendell Holmes (New York, Columbia University Press, 1943. 268 p.). Houghton Mifflin (Boston) has recently an- nounced that the firm has in preparation a republi- cation of Elsie Venner. 376. Writings. [Riverside ed. Boston, Hough- ton Mifflin, 1891-95] 13 v. 4-16396 PS1950.E93 377. Works. [Standard library ed.] Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1892-96. 15 v. NjP Contents of v. 1-13 correspond to contents of Riverside edition. Life and Letters, by John T. Morse constitute v. 14-15. The student of Holmes' work will wish also to consult Thomas F. Currier's A Bibliography of Oliver Wendell Holmes (New York, New York University Press, 1953. 707 p.), which was edited for the Bibliographical Society of America by Eleanor M. Tilton. 378. Representative selections, with introduction, bibliography, and notes by S. I. Hayakawa and Howard Mumford Jones. New York, Ameri- can Book Co., 1939. cxxix, 472 p. (American writers series) 39-21102 PS1953.H4 "Selected bibliography": p. cxvii-cxxix. 379. JOHNSON JONES HOOPER, 1815-1862 "Simon Suggs," a Southern frontier type of gambler and rogue, was created by Hooper for use in the Alabama newspapers with which he was connected as journalist and editor. The deeds and sayings of this fictitious sharper, through which the author expressed his own humor and irony, were widely popular. Some of the adventures were re- printed as far afield as New York, in the Spirit of the Times (1831-1861). The life and times of Hooper are discussed, and an extensive bibliography is supplied in William S. Hoole's Alias Simon Suggs (University, Ala., University of Alabama Press, 1952. xxii, 283 p.). 380. Some adventures of Captain Simon Suggs, late of the Tallapoosa Volunteers; together with "Taking the Census," and other Alabama sketches. By a country editor. With a portrait from life, and other illus., by Darley. Philadelphia, Carey & Hart, 1846. 201 p. 7-5263 PZ3.H7664S0 First edition published in 1845. Cf. Hoole, p. 58. Simon Suggs' Adventures is the title of a later edi- tion (Philadelphia, T. B. Peterson, 1881. 217 p.). 381. WASHINGTON IRVING, 1783-1859 Irving, a cosmopolitan and man of fashion, had his beginnings in New York when the city was developing as a financial and cultural center. His early work satirized New York society and his- tory with a burlesque touch. As his style developed it was characterized by elegance and gentle humor which have endeared it to admirers of such English essayists as Addison, Steele, and Lamb. However, his taste for sentiment, legends, and landscape, all frequently infused with melancholy, brought him into the romantic tradition. Many years spent abroad as a businessman, traveler, and diplomat enlarged his circle of literary friends and admirers, which included Scott, Coleridge, and Byron, among others. The Europeanization of his outlook influ- enced him to bring into the bounds of American literature such contributions as his The Life and Voyages of Columbus (1828) and his book of ro- mantic Spanish legends and sketches, The Alham- bra (1832). After one of his returns to the United States he contributed to the literature developing from the exploration of the western frontier A Tour of the Prairies, included in The Crayon Miscellany (1835). His Life of George Washing- ton in 5 volumes (1855-59) portrays his subject as the central figure in the beginning of the Nation. Irving has been called the first American literary man to win genuine recognition abroad and the LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 4 1 writer who, in such pieces as "Rip Van Winkle" and "The Legend of Sleepy Hollow," fathered the American short story, which Hawthorne, Poe, and their successors developed. 382. A history of New York from the beginning of the world to the end of the Dutch dynasty. By Diedrich Knickerbocker [pseud.] New York, Inskeep & Bradford, 1809. 2 v. 4-18970 F122.170 RBD 383. Diedrich Knickerbocker's A history of New Yor\. Edited with a critical introd. by Stanley Williams and Tremaine McDowell. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1927. lxxvii, 475 p. (American authors series; general editor, S. T. Williams) 27-2639 F122.1.I834 384. The sketch book of Geoffrey Crayon, gent, [pseud.] New York, C. S. Van Winkle, 1819-20. 7 pts. CtY This is the work that includes his celebrated story, "Rip Van Winkle." 385. 2d ed. New York, C. S. Van Winkle, 1819-20. 7 pts. in 2 v. 7-9492 PS2066A1 1819a RBD 386. New York, Dutton, 1936. x, 368 p. (Everyman's library, edited by Ernest Rhys [no. 117]) 36-37106 AC1.E8, no. 117 Bibliography: p. viii. 387- Introd. and descriptive captions by Harry Hansen. New York, Dodd, Mead, 1954. 391 p. illus. (Great illustrated classics) 54-3604 PS2066.A1 1954 388. Bracebridge Hall; or, The humourists. A medley, by Geoffrey Crayon, gent, [pseud.] New York, C. S. Van Winkle, 1822. 2 v. 4-34448 PS2057.A1 1822 RBD 389. Handy volume ed. New York, Put- nam, 1910. 2 v. in 1. IU 390. Tales of a traveller. London, J. Murray, 1824. 2 v. 1-1258 PS2070.A1 1824 RBD First American edition published also in 1824, by C. S. Van Winkle. 391. Astoria; or, Anecdotes of an enterprise beyond the Rocky Mountains. Philadelphia, Carey, Lea & Blanchard, 1836. 2 v. Rc-371 F880.I71 RBD Belongs to the literature of overland journeys to the Northwest, the fur trade in Oregon, and the Pacific Fur Company. Available (1954) from Binfords & Mort, 124 N. W. 9th Avenue, Portland, Oregon, publishers of books of interest in connection with the Pacific Northwest. 392. Letters to Henry Brevoort. Edited, with an introd., by George S. Hellman. New York, Putnam, 1915. 2 v. 15-22260 PS2081.A4 1915 Republished in 191 8 in one volume (462 p.). 393. The journals of Washington Irving (hitherto unpublished) Edited by William P. Trent and George S. Hellman. Boston, Bibliophile So- ciety, 1919. 3 v. 20-1680 PS2081.A3 1919 Covers the years from July 1815 to July 1842. Stanley T. Williams has edited the following vol- umes of journals: Journal of Washington Irving, 1823-1824. (Cambridge, Mass., Harvard University Press, 1931. 278 p.) Journal, 1803, by Washington Irving (London and New York, Oxford University Press, 1934. 48 p.) Journal of Washington Irving, 1828, and miscel- laneous notes on Moorish legend and history. (New York, American Book Co., 1937. 80 p.) 394. Works. New ed. rev. New York, Putnam, 1848-51. 15 v. I_I2 39 PS2050.E49 Vols. 1-11, 14: "New edition revised"; v. 1-10, 15: "Author's revised edition." 395. Kinderhook ed. New York, Put- nam [ c i850-i88o] 10 v. 16-16979 PS205o.E5oa 396. Hudson ed. New York, Putnam [ c i856]-8 9 . 27 V. CtY 397. Author's rev. ed. New York, Put- nam, 1863-66. 21 v. MH 398. Knickerbocker ed. New York, Put- nam, 1891-97. 40 v. OCU Dates of publication found in the foregoing en- tries have been transcribed from cards in the Na- tional Union Catalog and the Main Catalog of the Library of Congress and do not necessarily repre- sent the first publication of each edition described. For original publication dates see Stanley T. Wil- liams and Mary E. Edge's A Bibliography of the Writings of Washington Irving (New York, Ox- ford University Press, 1936. p. 2-4). 42 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 399. Representative selections, with introductions, bibliography, and notes, by Henry A. Poch- mann. New York, American Book Co., 1934. cxiv, 380 p. (American writers series) 34-2935 2 PS2053.P6 "Selected bibliography": p. xciii-cx. 400. Selected writings. Edited, with an introd., by Saxe Commins. New York, Modern Library, 1945. xix, 669 p. (Modern Library of the world's best books [240]) 45-37 86 3 PS2052.C6 401. Selected prose. Edited with an introd. by Stanley T. Williams. New York, Rinehart, 1950. xxiv, 423 p. (Rinehart editions, 41) 50-10714 PS2052.W5 "Biographical and bibliographical note": p. xxi- xxii. 402. SYLVESTER JUDD, 1813-1853 Lowell, in A Fable for Critics, called Judd's Margaret "the first Yankee book with the soul of Down East in it." This authentic local flavor was derived from the author's experiences when, re- moving from Massachusetts where he was reared, he settled in Augusta, Maine, as clergyman of a Unitarian church. His local interests were reflected not only in a few historical and genealogical works, but also particularly in his regional romances of rural New England. These he used to record de- scriptions of the landscapes he loved and as a medium for expressing his religious Transcendental, and social views. His writings also include Richard Edney (1850), a novel, and Philo, an Evangeliad (1850), a didactic poem. 403. Margaret; a tale of the real and ideal. Bos- ton, Jordan & Wiley, 1845. 460 p. 7-3525 PZ3J885M RBD 404. Rev. ed. Boston, Phillips, Sampson, 1851. 2 v. 3-22366 PZ3J885M3 405. JOHN PENDLETON KENNEDY, 1795- 1870 Of combined Maryland and Virginia ances- try, Kennedy had a cosmopolitan circle of acquaint- ances in the North and in Europe, and took part in public life both locally and nationally. He was a pioneer writer about plantation life in Old Virginia, which he presented in Swallow Barn, a series of urbane sketches reminiscent of the writings of his friend, Washington Irving. His historical novels of frontier life in Maryland, Virginia, and the Caro- linas in the colonial and Revolutionary periods are factually true but thoroughly representative of the tide of romanticism rising in his time. It is said that he advised Thackeray, whom he met on his travels, concerning local color for The Virginians. He was also instrumental in securing recognition for Edgar Allan Poe. 406. Swallow Barn; or, A sojourn in the Old Dominion [by Mark Littleton, pseud.] Phil- adelphia, Carey & Lea, 1832. 2 v. 7-3061 PZ3.K383S RBD 407. Rev. ed., with twenty illus. by Strother. New York, Putnam, 185 1. 506 p. 3-28156 PZ3.K383S2 408. Edited with an introd. by Jay B. Hubbell. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1929. xxxiv, 422 p. (American authors series; general editor, S. T. Williams) 29-9094 PZ3.K383S9 "The text followed is that of the second edition, revised by Kennedy ... in 1851." — Note on text. Selected reading list: p. xxxiii-xxxiv. 409. Horse-Shoe Robinson; a tale of the Tory as- cendency, by . . . [Mark Littleton, pseud.] Philadelphia, Carey, Lea, & Blanchard, 1835. 2 v. 3-16071 PZ3.K383H RBD 410. — Rev. ed. New York, Putnam, 1852. xiv, 598 p. 2>~i95 l 7 PZ3.K383H3 411. Edited, with introd., chronology, and bibliography, by Ernest E. Leisy. New York, American Book Co., 1937. xxxii, 550 p. (American fiction series; general editor, H. H. Clark) 37-4088 PZ3.K383H26 Selected bibliography: p. xxix-xxxii. 412. Rob of the Bowl; a legend of St. Inigoe's. By the author of "Swallow barn." Philadelphia, Lea & Blanchard, 1838. 2 v. 7-12839 PS2162.R6 1838 RBD 413. Rev. ed. Philadelphia, Lippincott, i860. 432 p. 7-10956 PZ3.K383R2 414. At home and abroad; a series of essays: with a journal in Europe in 1867-8. [New York] Putnam, 1872. 415 p. 3-30553 PS2162.A7 1872 415. CAROLINE MATILDA (STANSBURY) KIRKLAND, 1 801-1864 Edgar Allan Poe, in the section devoted to Mrs. Kirkland in his "The Literati of New York LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 43 City" (1846) said: "Unquestionably she is one of our best writers, has a province of her own, and in that province has few equals." Her province was that of portraying community types, manners and customs, misfortunes, and virtues observed by a cultivated New York woman during three years spent in sharing with others the making of a frontier settlement at Pinckney, Michigan. Writing with candor and realism unusual at the time, with tart- ness, but with humanity, Mrs. Kirkland recorded a phase of American civilization which was soon to pass. Her fictional sketches are also an early land- mark in the use of the small town as a recurring theme in the national literature. 416. A new home — who'll follow? or, Glimpses of western life. By Mrs. Mary Clavers [pseud.] New York, C. S. Francis, 1839. 3 17 p. 13-9373 PZ3.K635N3 RBD Reissued as Our New Home in the West (New York, Miller, 1872. 298 p.). -; or Life in the clearings. Edited and 417. - with an introd. by John Nerber. New York, Putnam, 1953. 308 p. 53-12508 PZ3.K635N8 "This editing of A New Home, and those portions of Forest Life [1842] which by substance belong to the earlier narrative ... is designed only as an introduction for the modern reader to a delightful and nearly forgotten classic of another day." — Introduction, p. 16. 418. Forest life. By the author of A new home. New York, C. S. Francis, 1844. 2 v. 7-13208 PZ3.K635F RBD First edition published 1842. 419. ABRAHAM LINCOLN, 1 809-1 865 Lincoln's place in the American heritage is with the Nation's statesmen. His collected writings are therefore entered in the section of this bibliog- raphy devoted to references on General History, where they stand beside the works of Washington, Jefferson, Franklin, and their successors. In this section on Literature it has been considered sufficient to suggest only briefer collections, in which Lincoln, the literary artist, may be observed at work, varying his style from the homely and simple to the stately and rhetorical, and throughout clearly revealing the mind and heart of mid-nineteenth century Amer- ica at its best. 420. Abraham Lincoln, his speeches and writings. Edited with critical and analytical notes by Roy P. Basler. Pref. by Carl Sandburg. New York, World Pub. Co., 1946. xxx, 843 p. 53-28573 E457.92 1946 "Lincoln's Development as a Writer," p. 1-49, contains the editor's analysis of Lincoln's literary craftsmanship and accomplishments. Sources and bibliography: p. 807-822. Generally the most accurate text available aside from the Collected Worlds (1953). 421. The life and writings of Abraham Lincoln. Edited, and with a biographical essay, by Philip Van D. Stern; with an introd., "Lincoln in his writings," by Allan Nevins. New York, Modern Library, 1942. xxvi, 863 p. (Modern Library of the world's best books. [Modern Library giants]) 43-16859 E457.92 A useful collection in spite of the fact that the text follows the sometimes unreliable Nicolay and Hay Complete Wor\s. 422. DAVID ROSS LOCKE ("PETROLEUM V. NASBY"), 1833-1888 Locke, a humorist in the tradition of Charles Farrar Browne, wrote under the pseudonym of "Petroleum V. Nasby." Many of his pieces were issued individually in Ohio newspapers with which he was connected as a journalist or editor. Various collections were later published in book form. For some of his work Thomas Nast, the famous car- toonist, supplied illustrations. Locke's satires, marked by ridiculous spelling, gross distortions of grammar, puns, horseplay, and jokes of all kinds were useful war propaganda and political cam- paign literature in the North during and after the Civil War. They were eagerly read by a large audi- ence, which included President Lincoln. His post- humous novel, The Demagogue (1891), castigated political corruption in Ohio. 423. The Nasby papers . . . [by] Petroleum V. Nasby [pseud.] Indianapolis, C. O. Perrine, 1864. 64 p. 5-40609 E647.L75 RBD 424. "Swingin round the cirkle." By Petroleum V. Nasby [pseud.] Illustrated by Thomas Nast. Boston, Lea & Shepard, 1867. 299 p. 8-1248 PN6161.L638 1867 RBD A briefer work having the same title was pub- lished by the American News Company, New York, 1866, 38 p. 425. The struggles (social, financial and political) of Petroleum V. Nasby [pseud.] . . . With an introd. by Hon. Charles Sumner. Illustrated by Thomas Nast. Boston, I. N. Richardson, i^ - :. 720 p. 12-6202 PN6161.L637 RBD Sumner's introduction emphasizes Lincoln's en- thusiasm for Locke's work. 44 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 426. Nasby in exile. Toledo, Ohio, Locke Pub. Co., 1882. xv, 672 p. 3-15519 D919.L81 Comments shrewdly on manners and customs ob- served during six months of travel in the British Isles, France, Germany, Switzerland, and Belgium. Originally published from week to week in the Toledo Blade. 427. HENRY WADSWORTH LONGFEL- LOW, 1 807-1 882 New Englander of Pilgrim descent, student and traveler in Europe, Harvard professor of modern languages and belles-lettres, but most of all a poet, Longfellow in his work displayed technical skill in versification, ability to tell a story, simplicity, sweetness, and emphasis on morality. A romantic poet, he derived inspiration from America's his- toric past, particularly from Indian lore and colonial history, from European folklore, and from the quiet tenor of everyday life. His narrative poems, some of the longest in American literature, have a vigor- ous sweep; his ballads are stirring; and his sonnets are thought by some critics to be among his best achievements. Longfellow is a national poet be- cause he gave America the poetry it was ready and able to appreciate, so that his poems entered into the minds of the people and became household words even to schoolchildren. Through his work, which was widely translated abroad, Europe became in- creasingly aware of American literature, while Americans profited by the influences of older cul- tures transmitted in his poems. A recent and highly favorable study of Longfellow's place in American literature is found in Edward C. Wagen- knecht's Longfellow; a Full-Length Portrait (New York, Longmans, Green, 1955. 370 p.). 428. Ballads and other poems. Cambridge, Mass., J. Owen, 1842. 132 p. 8-26999 PS2255.A1 1842 RBD First edition issued December 1841. 429. Evangeline, a tale of Acadie. Boston, Tick- nor, 1847. 163 p. 10-5566 PS2263.A1 1847 RBD 430. Kavanagh, a tale. Boston, Ticknor, Reed, & Fields, 1849. 188 p. 7-14788 PS2273.K3 1849 RBD Includes (chapter 20) an expression of Long- fellow's sense of the debt owed by American writers to their intellectual inheritance from Europe; also sets forth his belief in the importance of interna- tional and universal interests to a growing national literature; a short novel frequently autobiographical. 431. The seaside and the fireside. Boston, Tick- nor, Reed, & Fields, 1850. 141 p. 6-46541 PS2266.A1 1850 RBD First edition published December 1849. 432. The song of Hiawatha. Boston, Ticknor & Fields, 1855. 316 p. 6-46545 PS2267.A1 1855 RBD 433. The courtship of Miles Standish, and other poems. Boston, Ticknor & Fields, 1858. 215 p. 6-46552 PS2262.A1 1858 RBD "Birds of Passage": p. [n7]-209. 434. Tales of a wayside inn. Boston, Ticknor & Fields, 1863. 225 p. 6-46546 PS2269.A1 1863 RBD 435. The masque of Pandora, and other poems. Boston, J. R. Osgood, 1875. 146 p. 6-46553 PS2271.M3 1875 RBD 436. Complete works. Rev. ed. Boston, Tick- nor & Fields, 1866. 7 v. 8-22190 PS2250.E66 RBD 437. Complete poetical and prose works. River- side ed. [Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1886-93.] n v. Contents: Prose works, with bibliographical and critical notes. [1886] 2 v. 28-14051 PS2272.A1 1886 Poetical works, with bibliographical and critical notes. [1886] 6 v. 28-11440 PS225o.E86a The Divine comedy of Dante Alighieri, translated by Henry Wadsworth Longfellow. [1892-93] 3 V. 30-3804 PQ4315.L7 1892 Published originally in 1886. 438. Works, with bibliographical and critical notes and his life, with extracts from his journals and correspondence; edited by Samuel Longfellow. [Standard library ed.] Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1886-91. 14 v. MdBJ 439. Complete writings. Craigie ed. Boston, Houghton Mifflin [1932?] 11 v. 33-35334 PS225o.F 3 2a Includes illustrations by T. S. Sargent, J. La Farge, E. W. Longfellow, and others. First published in 1904. 440. Complete poetical works. Boston, Houghton Mifflin [1893?] 689 p. (Cambridge edition of the poets; edited by H. E. Scudder) OO LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 45 441. Cambridge ed. Boston, Houghton Mifflin [ c i903] xxi, 689 p. (Cambridge edi- tion of the poets; edited by H. E. Scudder) 40-22245 PS2250.FO3a "Biographical Sketch" signed: H. E. S. [i. e., Horace Elisha Scudder]. 442. Representative selections, with introd., bibli- ography, and notes, by Odell Shepard. New York, American Book Co., 1934. lxiv, 371 p. (American writers series) 34-13240 PS2252.S37 "Selected bibliography": p. lvii-lxii. 443. The poems of Henry Wadsworth Longfellow, selected, and edited with a commentary, by Louis Untermeyer. New York, Heritage Press, 1943. xxiii, 444 p. illus. (The American poets; edited by Louis Untermeyer) 43-12592 PS2252.U5 444. Favorite poems; with an introd. by Henry Seidel Canby. Garden City, N. Y., Double- day, 1947. xx, 395 p. illus. 47-11080 PS2252.C3 445. AUGUSTUS BALDWIN LONGSTREET, 1790-1870 Realism and humor are joined in Longstreet's robust newspaper sketches of country and back- woods life in Georgia while the state was still part of the frontier. They provide an early example of earthy humor, frequently expressed in local dialect, which appealed to American taste and set a fashion that culminated in the work of humorists of the West after the Civil War, notably in that of Mark Twain. 446. Georgia scenes, characters, incidents, &c, in the first half century of the Republic. By a native Georgian. Augusta, Ga. Printed at the S. R. Sentinel Office, 1835. 235 p. 17-6124 PZ3.L866G2 RBD 447. 2d ed. With original illus. New York, Harper, 1850. 214 p. 18-17312 PZ3.L866G10 RBD 448. New ed., from new plates, with the original illus. New York, Harper, 1897. 297 p. 8-26638 PZ3.L866G20 449. JAMES RUSSELL LOWELL, 1819-1891 Lowell, one of the famous group of literary men in New England which included Holmes and Longfellow among others, was notable for his ver- satility. As a man of the world he was a traveler, at home in England and on the Continent, and as a diplomat at the Spanish and British courts. In these capacities he was noticeably successful in interpreting American democratic ideals to other countries and in bringing back to the United States reflections of the cultural heritage of older nations. He was erudite in humanistic disci- plines, so that he was a logical choice to succeed Longfellow in the professorship of modern languages and belles-lettres at Harvard. When The Atlantic Monthly was founded in 1857 he was appointed editor, an office he held until 1861, when the importance of that literary journal was already established. He was also for some years joint editor of The North American Review and was a volumi- nous contributor to the periodical press of the coun- try. As a writer he was a poet skilled in the techniques of versification, a critic, a humorist, a master of letter-writing and the familiar essay. His ardent interest in public affairs was expressed in his work for the abolition of slavery. Because of his many-sided interests, he is regarded by some critics as the representative American writer of his period. A detailed study of Lowell's early literary career and his literary output, "within the human context of its origins," is found in Leon Howard's Victorian Knight-Errant (Berkeley, University of California Press, 1952. 388 p.). 450. Poems. Cambridge, Mass., J. Owen, 1844 [1843] 279 p. PS2305.A1 1844 RBD 451. Cambridge, Mass., J. Owen, 1844. 7-2790 PS2305.A1 1844a RBD 279 p. Reissue of first edition of the same date. 452. Second series. Cambridge, Mass., G. Nichols, 1848 [1847] viii, 184 p. 6-18395 PS2305.A1 1847 RBD 453. Complete poetical works [edited by Horace E. Scudder] Cambridge ed. Boston, Hough- ton Mifflin, 1896. xvii, 492 p. 4-13831 PS2305.A1 1896 454. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1917. xvii, 492 p. (Cambridge edition of the poets) 4°~37^7 2 PS2300.F17 455. The vision of Sir Launfal. Cambridge, Mass., G. Nichols, 1848. 27 p. 24-17590 PS2312.A1 1848 RBD Characterized by interpretations of nature ob- served in the New England countryside, by moral teachings concerning the brotherhood of man, and by some of Lowell's most skillful versification; the work that established his reputation as a poet. 46 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 456. The Biglow papers [first series] ... by Homer Wilbur, A. M., pastor of the First Church in Jaalam . . . Cambridge, Mass., G. Nichols, 1848. xxxii, 163 p. 6-7135 PS2306.A1 1848 RBD At head of title: Meliboeus-Hipponax. 45; Second series. Boston, Ticknor & Fields, 1867. lxxx, 258 p. 23-16620 PS2306.A1 1867 RBD At head of title: Meliboeus-Hipponax. Satiric pieces, predominantly in verse written in Yankee dialect, called forth by the writer's strong reactions to national problems such as the War with Mexico, the annexation of Texas, slavery, and the preservation of the Union. 458. [A fable for critics] Reader! walk up at once (it will soon be too late) and buy at a perfectly ruinous rate A fable for critics . . . [New York] Putnam [1848] 78 p. 8-26997 PS2300.A1 1848 RBD Rhymed criticisms of contemporary American authors, somewhat in the manner of Lord Byron's English Bards and Scotch Reviewers (1809). 459. Ode recited at the commemoration of the liv- ing and dead soldiers of Harvard University, July 21, 1865. Cambridge, Mass., Priv. print., 1865. 25 p. 50-53826 PS2314.O3 RBD "Fifty copies printed. No. 22." Immediately after the poem was read Lowell added to it a tribute to Abraham Lincoln as a sym- bol of democracy and "the first American." 460. Democracy, and other addresses. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1887. 245 p. 23-16635 PS2322.D4 1887 RBD The address on democracy, delivered in Birming- ham, England, in 1884, is an example of the way in which Lowell became a spokesman for American life and institutions to other countries; also included is his "Harvard Anniversary" address (1886) which sets forth his views on the functions of education in a democracy. 461. American ideas for English readers, with introd. by Henry Stone. Boston, J. G. Cupples, c 1 892. xv, 94 p. 33-37837 PS2322.A5 1892 RBD Eleven addresses delivered in England from No- vember 6, 1880, to December 23, 1888. 462. Letters. Edited by Charles Eliot Norton. New York, Harper, 1894. 2 v. 4-1 71 67 PS2331.A3N6 Norton later edited an enlarged collection of the Letters, which was included as volumes 14-16 in both the Elmwood and the de luxe editions of Lowell's Complete Writings. More recently M. A. De Wolfe Howe edited New Letters of James Russell Lowell (New York, Harper, 1932. 364 p.). 463. Anti-slavery papers. Boston, Houghton Mif- flin, 1902. 2 v. 2-27437 E449.L91 More than 50 articles published in newspapers between 1844 and 1850; edited from the manuscripts by W. B. Parker but not included in the collected works cited below. 464. Uncollected poems; edited by Thelma M. Smith. Philadelphia, University of Pennsyl- vania Press, 1950. xxv, 291 p. 50-10335 PS2305.S5 Bibliography: p. [281] -283. Poems rejected by Lowell from his early volumes are not included; but the editor has attempted to collect other printed poems omitted from the Elm- wood edition, of which there were a substantial number. No claim is made that these are among the poet's best. It is believed by the editor, how- ever, that the student of Lowell and of American life in the 19th century will find ideas of genuine interest in them. Cf. Preface, p. vii, and Intro- duction, p. ix. 465. Writings. [Large paper ed.] [Cambridge, Riverside Press, 1890-92] 12 v. 23-16621 PS2300.E90 Originally in 10 vols., revised by author; v. [11- 12] not numbered, added later by C. E. Norton. Contents. — v. 1-4. Literary essays. — v. 5. Politi- cal essays. — v. 6. Literary and political addresses. — v. 7-10. Poems. — [v. 11 ] Latest literary essays and addresses. 1891. — [v. 12] The old English dram- atists. 1892. 466. Complete writings [Elmwood ed.] Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1904. 16 v. OCi Includes Horace E. Scudder's Life of James Rus- sell Lowell, 2 v., and Lowell's Letters, edited by C. E. Norton, 3 v. 467. Ed. de luxe. [Cambridge, Printed at the Riverside Press, 1904] 16 v. 4-22260 PS2300FO4 Volumes 8, 14-16, edited by C. E. Norton. Contents. — v. 1. Fireside travels. — v. 2. My study windows. — v. 3-5. Among my books. — v. 6. Political essays. — v. 7. Literary and political ad- dresses. — v. 8. Latest literary essays. The old Eng- lish dramatists. — v. 9-13. The poetical works. — v. 14-16. Letters, ed. by C. E. Norton. 468. Representative selections, with introd., bib- liography, and notes, by Harry Hayden Clark and Norman Foerster. New York, American Book Co., 1947. clxvi, 498 p. (American writers series) 47-671 PS2302.C5 Bibliography: p. cxliii-clxvi. 469. Essays, poems and letters. Selected and edited by William Smith Clark II. New York, Odyssey Press, 1948. liv, 424 p. (Odyssey series in literature) 48-9571 PS2302.C53 Selected bibliography: p. 1-liv. 470. HERMAN MELVILLE, 1819-1891 When Melville was a young boy without financial prospects he went to sea to mend his for- tunes, being in turn cabin boy, whaler, and enlisted man on a United States frigate. His experiences during this period constituted his higher education and gave him a wealth of material utilized during his career as a writer. The kindness and simplicity of native life in the South Pacific Islands impressed him greatly, as did the arrogance and cruelty of various Americans encountered in his seafaring years. Finally he became a democrat of the most thoroughgoing kind, a strong individualist, a pas- sionate advocate of social justice, a hater of shams and of the evils inherent in slavery, imperialism, and the "divine rights" theory of property. The ferment of these ideas and the impact of his friendship with Hawthorne contributed to the writing of his masterpiece, Moby-Die^. This classic of adventures encountered in the pursuit of whales by New Eng- land whalemen is also a metaphysical and symbolic portrayal of the forces of evil that lie in wait for human souls. As such it reflects the climate of thought represented by the work of Emerson, Haw- thorne, Thoreau, and Whitman. 471. Typee: a peep at Polynesian life. During a four months' residence in a valley of the Marquesas. New York, Wiley & Putnam, 1846. 2 pts. in 1 v. (325 p.) (Wiley & Putnam's library of American books [no. 13]) 3-27253 PS2384.T8 1846b RBD Sequel: Otnoo. Romantic fictional narrative of the simple, happy life enjoyed by the cannibal natives and of the hero's exotic adventures among them. 472. London, New York, H. Milford, 1924. xvi, 338 p. (The World's classics, 274) 25-26583 PZ3.M498T24 LITERATURE (1607-1955) / 47 474. With an introd. by Raymond M. Weaver and illus. by Miguel Covarrubias. New York, Limited Editions Club, 1935. xxviii, 409 p. 35 -I 6595 PS2384.T8 1935 RBD 475. Illustrated by Mead Schaeffer. New York, Dodd, Mead, 1951. viii, 289 p. 51-5640 PZ3.M498T35 "Sequel containing The Story of Toby": p. 270- 283. 476. Omoo: a narrative of adventures in the South Seas. New York, Harper, 1847. xv, [17]- 389 p. 42-33235 PS2384.O6 1847a RBD Sequel to Typee. 477. New York, Dutton, 1925. xiv, 328 p. (Everyman's library, edited by Ernest Rhys. Fiction [no. 297]) 36-37148 AC1.E8, no. 297 Bibliography: p. vii. 478. Mardi: and a voyage thither. New York, Harper, 1849. 2 v. 7-17954 PS2384.M3 1849 RBD Allegorical romance located in an imaginary world somewhere in Polynesia, in which the writer gives expression to the social, religious, political, and philosophical questions with which he was con- cerned; these were later much more powerfully de- veloped in Moby-Die^. It is the subject of Merrell R. Davis' monograph, Melville's Mardi, a Chartless Voyage (New Haven, Yale University Press, 1952. 240 p. Yale studies in English, v. 119). 479. White-jacket; or, The world in a man-of-war. New York, Harper, 1850. vii, [91-465 p. 42-30911 PS2384.W5 RBD Fictional account of the writer's service on the U. S. man-of-war, United States, and of the abuses, particularly flogging, to which the seamen were subjected; may be contrasted with R. H. Dana's Two Years Before the Mast (1840). 480. With an introd. by Carl Van Doren. 473. New York, Dutton, 1930. x, 286 p. (Everyman's library, edited by Ernest Rhys. Fiction, no. 180) 36-37236 AC1.E8, no. 180 London, Oxford University Press, 1929. xx, 380 p. (World's classics, 253) 33-22938 PZ3.M498W36 481. Moby-Dick; or, The whale. New York, Harper, 1851. xxiii, 634 p. 7-17953 PS2384.M6 1851RBD An annotated edition of the text of the American first edition has been prepared by Willard Thorp (New York, Oxford University Press, 1947. 532 p.); another edition has an introduction by Newton Arvin (New York, Rinehart, 1948. 566 p.). 48 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Arvin is also the author of Melville's critical bi- ography in the American men of letters series (New York, Sloane, 1950. 316 p.). The Trying-Out of Moby-Dic\, by Howard P. Vincent, joint editor of the novel in the Complete Wor\s of Melville, was published by Houghton Mifflin (1949. 400 p.); it "combines a study of the whaling sources of Moby- Dick, with an account of its composition, and suggestions concerning its interpretation and mean- ing." Milton O. Percival's A Reading of Moby- Dic\ (Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1950. [136] p.) provides an analysis of the text as an allegory of the problem of good and evil. Among convenient editions of the novel in re- print series may be mentioned the following: 482. Introd. by Leon Howard. New York, Modern Library, 1950. xxxi, 565 p. (Modern Library college editions, T20) 50-1 1914 PZ3.M498M061 Bibliographical note: p. xxvii. 483- Introd. by Sherman Paul. New York, Dutton, 1950. xxxv, 664 p. (Every- man's library, 179A. Fiction) 50-58247 PZ3.M498M062 An introductory bibliography of Melville's works appears on p. [666-667]. 484. The piazza tales. New York, Dix & Ed- wards, 1856. 431 p. 7-17952 PS2384.P4 1856 RBD Contents. — The piazza. — Bartleby. — Benito Ce- reno. — The lightning-rod man. — The Encantadas; or, Enchanted islands. — The bell-tower. For a new edition see entry under Complete Wor\s. 485. The confidence-man: his masquerade. New York, Dix, Edwards, 1857. vi, 394 p. 7-17956 PS2384.C6 1857 RBD For a new edition see entry under Complete Wor\s. 486. Battle-pieces and aspects of the war. New York, Harper, 1866. x, 272 p. A18-98 PS2384.B3 1866 RBD Poems that commemorate events of the Civil War from Manassas to the victory of the Union forces; includes a supplement in prose dealing with the existing political situation. 487. Billy Budd, and other prose pieces. Edited by Raymond [M.] Weaver. London, Con- stable, 1924. 399 p. (The works of Herman Mel- ville. Standard edition, v. 13) 24-29693 PS2380.F22, v. 13 RBD First publication of the novel that was written shortly before the author's death; a story of valor and tragedy in the life of an American sailor. The complete text of the work, with variant readings based on Melville manuscripts, was edited by F. Barron Freeman ([Cambridge, Mass.] Harvard University Press, 1948. 381 p.). An opera in four acts by Benjamin Britten was inspired by the novel, as was a play in three acts by Louis O. Coxe and Robert Chapman (Princeton, Princeton Uni- versity Press, 195 1. 56 p.). The volume includes also Melville's long, enthu- siastic essay on Hawthorne's work, entitled "Haw- thorne and His Mosses," in which he compared Hawthorne to Shakespeare and made the famous statements: "Men, not very much inferior to Shakespeare, are this day being born on the banks of the Ohio . . . Let America, then, prize and cherish her writers; yea, let her glorify them. . . . And while she has good kith and kin of her own, to take to her bosom, let her not lavish her embraces upon the household of an alien." 488. Poems, containing Battle-pieces and aspects of the war, John Marr and other sailors, Timoleon, etc., and Miscellaneous poems. London, Constable, 1924. xii, 434 p. (The works of Her- man Melville. Standard edition, v. 16) 25-16079 PS2380.F22, v. 16 RBD For a new edition see entry under Complete Wor\s. 489. Journal of a visit to Europe and the Levant, October 11, 1856-May 6, 1857. Edited by Howard C. Horsford. Princeton, N. J., Princeton University Press, 1955. xiv, 299 p. (Princeton studies in English, no. 35) 54-5005 D919.M58 1955 Bibliography: p. xiii-xiv. An earlier and very limited edition of Melville's journal for this period is found in Journal Up the Straits, edited by Raymond M. Weaver (New York, The Colophon, 1935. 182 p.). The first publication of two original notebooks, edited by Eleanor M. Metcalf, appeared as Journal of a Visit to London and the Continent, 1849-1850 (Cambridge, Mass., Harvard University Press, 1948. 189 p.). 490. Works. Standard ed. London, Constable, 1922-24. 16 v. PS2380.F22 RBD 491. [Complete works] New York, Hendricks House, 1947. Note changes of publisher in contents de- scribed below: LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 49 Collected poems. Edited by Howard P. Vincent. Chicago, Packard, 1947. 548 p. (Complete works, 14) 47-4470 PS2382.V5 Piazza tales. Edited by Egbert S. Oliver. New York, Hendricks House, 1948. 256 p. (Com- plete works, 9) 48-9243 PS2384.P4 1948 Pierre; or, The ambiguities. Edited by Henry A. Murray. New York, Hendricks House, 1949. 514 p. (Complete works, 7) 49-3233 PZ3.M498P13 Moby-Dick; or, The whale. Edited by Luther S. Mansfield and Howard P. Vincent. New York, Hendricks House, 1952. 851 p. (Complete works) 52-6994 PZ3.M498M064 Bibliographical references included in the "Index" (p. 833-851). The confidence-man: his masquerade. Edited by Elizabeth S. Foster. New York, Hendricks House, 1954. xcv, 392 p. 55-188 PZ3.M498CP3 Includes an introduction with footnotes; explana- tory notes (p. 287-367) based chiefly on the editor's doctoral dissertation on the origin and meaning of the work (Yale, 1942); textual notes (p. 367-371); and an Appendix (p. 372-392). Volume number, series note, and blue buckram binding, characteristic details usually found in volumes constituting Com- plete Wor\s, are absent in the copy described above. It is, therefore, possibly designed to serve as a trade edition having minor variations from the more elaborate set of Complete Worlds. 492. Representative selections, with introd., bib- liography, and notes, by Willard Thorp. New York, American Book Co., 1938. clxi, 437 p. (American writers series) 38-18635 PS2382.T5 "Selected bibliography": p. cxxxiii-clxi. 493. Complete stories. Edited with an introd. and notes, by Jay Leyda. New York, Random House, 1949. xxxiv, 472 p. 49-8911 PZ3.M498C0 Includes the short stories in The Piazza Tales and all Melville's known short fiction, the product of his writing in the mid-1850's. Cf. Introduction, p. xxix. 494. Selected tales and poems. Edited with an introd. by Richard Chase. New York, Rine- hart, 1950. xxiv, 417 p. (Rinehart editions, 36) Bibliography: p. [xxi~ 51-244 PS2382.C4 495. The portable Melville. Edited, and with an introd., by Jay Leyda. New York, Viking Press, 1952. xxii, 746 p. (The Viking portable library [58]) 52-6308 PS2382.L4 ". . . this collection has . . . strung the work selected along the thread of the life that produced 431240—60 5 it . . . Thus ordered, even the portion of his work included here shows unity of purpose and con- sistency of imagery, though these did not govern the selection." — Introduction, p. xiv. 496. Selected writings: complete short stories, Typee [and] Billy Budd, joretopman. New York, Modern Library, 1952. 903 p. (Modern Li- brary of the world's best books) 51-14537 PS2382.M6 A voluminous literature has been inspired by Melville and his writings. Contributions made to these studies within recent years include the fol- lowing: 497. Chase, Richard V. Herman Melville, a criti- cal study. New York, Macmillan, 1949. xiii, 305 p. 49-1 134 1 PS2386.C5 Work addressed to scholars, having as its thesis Melville's use of myth and symbol; also emphasized his use of American folklore and background. 498. Oilman, William H. Melville's early life and Redburn. New York, New York University Press, 1951. ix, 378 p. 51-12126 PS2386.G46 Bibliographical references included in "Notes" (p. [289B68). 499. Hillway, Tyrus, ed. Moby-Dick centennial essays. Edited for the Melville Society, with an introd. by Tyrus Hillway and Luther S. Mans- field. Dallas, Southern Methodist University Press, 1953. xiv, 182 p. 53-12917 PS2384.M62H4 500. Howard, Leon. Herman Melville, a biog- raphy. Berkeley, University of California Press, 1 95 1. xi, 354 p. 51-62667 PS2386.H6 501. Leyda, Jay, ed. The Melville log; a docu- mentary life of Herman Melville, 1819-1891. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1951. 2 v. (xxxiv, 899 p.) 5 I_I 3799 PS2386.L4 "The sources": v. 2, p. 841-858. 502. Metcalf, Eleanor M., ed. Herman Melville, cycle and epicycle. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1953. xvii, 311 p. 52-9393 PS2386.M46 "Letters by, to, and about Melville . . . with . . . commentary by Melville's granddaughter." — Dust jacket. 503. Rosenberry, Edward H. Melville and the comic spirit. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1955. x, 211 p. 55-10976 PS238;.1\(>4 Bibliography: p. [20i]-205. 50 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 504. Stone, Geoffrey. Melville. New York, Sheed & Ward, 1949. ix, 336 p. (Great writers of the world [4]) 49-48538 PS2386.S8 Bibliography: p. 320-326. Presents the Roman Catholic point of view. 505. Wright, Nathalia. Melville's use of the Bible. Durham, N. C, Duke University Press, 1949. 203 p. (Duke University publications) 49-9775 PS2388.B5W7 506. DONALD GRANT MITCHELL ("IK MARVEL"), 1822-1908 A frequent contributor to literary periodicals, a traveler, and a consul abroad, Mitchell conveyed his impressions of Europe and America to American readers in articles and books. He developed a type of fictional essay of sentiment and reflection that en- joyed marked popularity at the mid-century point and later. His most substantial literary work, how- ever, resulted from his passion for nature, landscape gardening, and farming. His experiences in these connections resulted in several books about life at his country home. 507. Reveries of a bachelor; or, A book of the heart. By Ik Marvel [pseud.] New York, Baker & Scribner, 1850. 298 p. 4-8631 PZ3.M692 RBD 508. Illus. by C. B. Falls. New York, Holborn House, 1931. 222 p. 32-2038 PS2404.R4 1931 509. My farm of Edgewood: a country book. By the author of Reveries of a bachelor. New York, Scribner, 1863. x, 319 p. 22-15237 S521.M65 1863 510. Works. [Edgewood ed.] New York, Scrib- ner, 1907. 15 v. illus. 7-31247 PS2400.A2 1907 511. JAMES KIRKE PAULDING, 1778-1860 A collaborator of William and Washington Irving in writing Salmagundi (first series, 1807-8), Paulding's favorite genre, like that of his contem- porary, Cooper, was the historical novel of colonial, Revolutionary, and frontier life. Most successful as a novelist of the Dutch in New York, he was also an essayist, poet, dramatist, and humorist of the "tall-tale" school. Since his politics were those of a liberal democrat, and because he was a strong advocate of an agrarian civilization, he was natu- rally sympathetic toward the South. His position on the issue of slavery was moderate but without approval. An ardent patriot, whose family for- tunes had been ruined in the Revolutionary War, he was engaged from time to time in writing sarcastic replies to criticisms by British travelers in the United States. He was an advocate of a "National Litera- ture," true to nature and reality in America, not marred by the addition of "high-seasoned dishes of foreign cookery." 512. The United States and England. New York, A. H. Inskeep, 1815. 115 p. 9-24530 E164.I48 RBD AC901.B3, v. 57 RBD One of a series of controversial, sometimes satiric, works in which the author answers British critics of America; includes also material on politics, govern- ment, social life, and customs in the United States. 513. Letters from the South. New York, J. East- burn, 1817. 2 v. Rc-2430 F230.P32 RBD 514. The Dutchman's fireside. A tale. New York, Harper, 1831. 2 v. (Harper's stereo- type ed.) 7-34069 PZ3.P282DU RBD 515. New York, University Pub. Co., 1900. 128 p. (Standard literature series [no. 44]) 0-5518 PZ3.P282DU12 516. Westward Ho! A tale. New-York, J. & J. Harper, 1832. 2 v. 7-33782 PZ3.P282W RBD Novel on the theme of Virginians pioneering in Kentucky. 517. American comedies. By J. K. Paulding and William Irving Paulding. Philadelphia, Carey & Hart, 1847. 295 p. 28-14875 PS2527.A5 1847 RBD The first only is by J. K. Paulding. Contents. — The Bucktails; or, Americans in England. — The noble exile. — Madmen all; or, The cure of love. — Antipathies; or, The enthusiasts by the ears. 518. The lion of the West. Edited and with an introd. by James N. Tidwell. Stanford, Calif., Stanford University Press, 1954. 64 p. 54-12970 PS2527.L5 1954 First publication of a play which won the prize offered by James H. Hackett, an actor-producer, for "an original comedy whereof an American should be the leading character." First revised by John A. Stone, and later by William B. Bernard, who changed the tide to The Kentuchjan; or, A Trip to New Yor\, the play was acted successfully from LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 5 1 time to time for some 20 years. The manuscript disappeared from view and only now, after nearly a hundred years, it has been located and reproduced from two texts identified as A and B. Said to be the first American comedy to use an uncouth frontiersman as its central character. Cf. Intro- duction, p. 7-1 1. 519. Works. [New York, Harper, 1834-37] 14 v. in 7. MiU 520. EDGAR ALLAN POE, 1 809-1849 In Poe's tragic life the center of interest was not political, social, or philosophical. His art of literary composition and the tales and poems he wrote brought into the mainstream of American romanticism his own love of beauty, mysticism, in- tensity, and preoccupation with death. In all these absorptions he was influenced by Byron, Shelley, and Coleridge. He is known for his major con- tribution to the development of the short story as a form of literary art. Modern mystery and horror stories, and often science fiction and even detective stories, owe much to his beginnings, though often unworthily. His lyric poetry is known throughout the civilized world and particularly in Europe, where his work has been repeatedly translated and where he has long been acclaimed a genius of the first order. As a frequent contributor to periodi- cals and himself the editor of several, he was instru- mental in the rise of literary criticism in America, particularly by his "The Philosophy of Composi- tion" (1846), "The Rationale of Verse" (1843, 1848), "The Poetic Principle" (1850), and by mis- cellaneous reviews, essays, and studies, a number of which are gathered in his The Literati (1850). Not by any definition a writer concerned with pur- veying peculiarly "American" themes for a demo- cratic American audience, he nevertheless attained a high position in the national literature by values in his work that are universal. Among the indi- viduals and groups that bear his impress are Am- brose Bierce, Hart Crane, Robert Louis Stevenson, and many of the late 19th- and 20th-century French poets, including Charles Baudelaire. Baudelaire on Poe, critical papers translated and edited by Lois and Francis E. Hyslop (State College, Pa., Bald Eagle Press, 1952. 175 p.), brings together in con- venient form the essays which, together with Bau- delaire's translations of Poe, contributed much to the latter's reputation abroad. 521. Tamerlane and other poems, by a Bostonian. Boston, C. F. S. Thomas, 1827. 40 p. PU 522. Reproduced in facsimile from the ed. of 1827, with an introd. by Thomas Ollive Mabbott. New York, Published for The Facsimile Text Society by Columbia University Press, 1941. lxvi p., facsim.: 2 p. 1., [iii]-iv, [5J~40 p. (The Facsimile Text Society. Publication no. 51) 41-5881 PS2610.T3 1827b 523. Al Aaraaf, Tamerlane, and minor poems. Baltimore, Hatch & Dunning, 1829. 71 p. 54-50784 PS2610.A6 1829 RBD 524. Reproduced from the ed. of 1829, with a bibliographical note by Thomas Ollive Mabbott. New York, Published for The Facsimile Text Society by Columbia University Press, 1933. facsim.: 71 p. (The Facsimile Text Society, ser. 1: Language and literature, v. 9) 33-3804 PS2610.A6 1829b RBD 525. Poems. 2d ed. New York, E. Bliss, 1831. 124 p. 55-46240 PS2605.A1 1 83 1 RBD Poe called this a second edition because he con- sidered it a revision of Al Aaraaf (1829). The inclusion of new material, however, has caused critics to consider it the first edition of a separate work. 526. Reproduced from the ed. of 183 1, with a bibliographical note by Killis Camp- bell. New York, Published for The Facsimile Text Society by Columbia University Press, 1936. fac- sim.: 124 p. (The Facsimile Text Society. Publi- cation no. 35) 36-8568 PS2605.A1 1831a Reproduced from the copy in the Harvard Col- lege Library. Contents. — Dedication. — Letter to Mr. . — Introduction. — To Helen. — Israfel. — The doomed city. — Fairyland. — Irene. — A pjean. — The valley Nis. — Al Aaraaf. — Tamerlane. 527. Edited by Killis Campbell. Boston, Ginn, 1917. lxvi, 332 p. 17-24169 PS2605.A1 1917a 528 Tales of the grotesque and arabesque. Phila- delphia, Lea & Blanchard, 1840. 2 v. 7-35802 PS2612.A1 1840 RBD 529 Tales. New York, Wiley & Putnam, 1845. 228 p. 45-41682 PS2612.A1 1845 Contents. — The gold-bug. — The black cat. — Mesmeric revelation. — Lionizing. — The fall of the house of Usher. — A descent into the maelstrom. — The colloquy of Monos and Una. — The conversa- tion of Eiros and Charmion. — The murders in the Rue Morgue. — The mystery of Marie Roget. — The purloined letter. — The man in the crowd. UNIVERSITY OF ILLINOIS aRY 52 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 530. The raven and other poems. New York, Wiley & Putnam, 1845. 91 p. (Wiley and Putnam library of American books [no. 8]) 18-13432 PS2609.A1 1845a RBD "The Raven" was first published in the Evening Mirror (New York) v. 1, no. 97, Jan. 29, 1845, p. [4]. The present collection contains nearly all of the poetry written by Poe up to this time. 531. Eureka: a prose poem. New York, Putnam, 1848. 143 p. 18-11047 PS2620.A1 1848 RBD Elaboration of his lecture on the "Cosmogony of the Universe," delivered in the New York Society Library, Feb. 3, 1848. 532. Letters. Edited by John Ward Ostrom. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1948. 2 v. (xxviii, 664 p.) 48-9083 PS2631.A374 "A continuation and an expansion of the editor's A Chec\ List of Letters to and from Poe, published as no. 4 in the Bibliographical series ... of the University of Virginia." "Bibliography and list of manuscript collections": P- [547]-557- 533. Complete works. Edited by James A. Har- rison. [Virginia ed.] New York, Crowell, 1902. 17 v. 2-20043 PS2601.H3 RBD "Bibliography of the writings of Edgar A. Poe": v. 16, p. [355H79- Contents. — v. 1. Biography [by James A. Harri- son] — v. 2-6. Tales. — v. 7. Poems. — v. 8-13. Literary criticism. — v. 14. Essays and miscella- nies. — v. 15. Literati. Autography. — v. 16. Mar- ginalia. Eureka. — v. 17. Poe and his friends. Letters relating to Poe. 534. Representative selections, with introductions, bibliography, and notes; begun by Margaret Alterton and completed by Hardin Craig. New York, American Book Co., 1935. cxxxvi, 563 p. (American writers series) 35-11900 PS2603.A6 "Selected bibliography": p. cxix-cxxxiii. 535. Edgar Allan Poe, selected and edited, with an introd. and notes, by Philip Van Doren Stern. New York, Viking Press, 1945. xxxviii, 664 p. (The Viking portable library) 45-8508 PS2602.S75 536. Complete poems and stories, with selections from his critical writings. With an introd. and explanatory notes by Arthur Hobson Quinn; texts established, with bibliographical notes, by Ed- ward H. O'Neill. Illustrated by E. McKnight KaufTer. New York, Knopf, 1946. 2 v. (542, 543-1092 p.) 46-7971 PS2601.Q5 "Bibliographical and textual notes": v. 2, p. [io55]-io87. Bibliography: v. 2, p. [io89]-io92. 537. Selected prose and poetry. Edited, with an introd. by W. H. Auden. New York, Rine- hart, 1950. xxvi, 528 p. (Rinehart editions, 42) 51-2058 PS2602.A8 "Textual and bibliographical note": p. xxi-xxiii. 538. Selected poetry and prose. Edited with an introd. by T. O. Mabbott. New York, Modern Library, 1951. xix, 428 p. (Modern Library college editions, T58) 51-5396 PS2602.M3 Bibliography: p. xv-xvi. Text based chiefly on Harrison's Virginia edition of Poe's works. Includes among the prose pieces the following: Instinct vs Reason — A Blac\ Cat [recently discovered]; The Philosophy of Com- position [1846]; Tale-Writing — Twice-Told Tales [etc.] by Nathaniel Hawthorne [1842]; and The Poetic Principle, a lecture frequently delivered by Poe but not published until 1850. Among recent historical and critical studies that contribute to an understanding of Poe's place in American literature are the following: 539. Braddy, Haldeen. Glorious incense; the ful- fillment of Edgar Allan Poe. Washington, Scarecrow Press, 1953. 234 p. 53-7181 PS2631.B7 Includes bibliography. Designed as a survey of critical writing about Poe, ca. 1 850-1950, and an evaluation of the sur- vival value of his work. For John Ostrom's criticism see American Literature, v. 25, Jan. 1954, p. 508-509. 540. Chivers, Thomas Holley. Life of Poe; edited with an introd. by Richard Beale Davis, from the mss. in the Henry E. Huntington Library, San Marino, Calif. New York, Dutton, 1952. 127 p. 52-5295 PS2631.C53 Bibliographical references included in "Explana- tory notes" (p. 101-121). 541. Fagin, Nathan B. The histrionic Mr. Poe. Baltimore, Johns Hopkins Press, 1949. xiii, 289 p. 49-9270 PS2631.F3 Bibliography: p. 241-254. 542. HENRY WHEELER SHAW ("JOSH BIL- LINGS"), 1818-1885 Shaw's aphorisms and stories, published under the pseudonym of "Josh Billings," were part of the LITERATURE (1607-1955) / 53 humorous literature that rose in popularity in the mid-nineteenth century, to which Lincoln and other notables were devoted. Born in Massachusetts, Shaw traveled and worked as a steamboat captain in what was then the West, and finally settled in New York. These varied experiences gave him wide familiarity with the sayings, jokes, and folk speech of different regions. They formed the back- ground from which his social satire developed, and for the dialects and outlandish spellings that gave delight to his readers. His popularity was such that for 10 years he was able to maintain Josh Billings' Farmer's Allminax (1870-80) as a repository for his proverbial wit and wisdom. He was also much in demand as a lecturer, thus foreshadowing Mark Twain's later success with spoken humor. 543. Josh Billings, hiz sayings. With comic illus. New York, Carleton, 1866. 232 p. 12-10995 PN6161.S535 RBD Not the first publication of the sayings, but issued after his adoption of unusual spelling had increased the popularity of his work. 544. Complete works. With one hundred illus. by Thomas Nast and others, and a biog- raphical introd. Rev. ed. Chicago, M. A. Donohue, 1919. xxxii, 504 p. 36-345!5 PN6161.S5317 1919 545. Uncle Sam's Uncle Josh: or, Josh Billings on practically everything, distilled from Josh's rum-and-tansy New England wit by Donald Day. Boston, Little, Brown, 1953. 243 p. 53-5263 PS2806.D3 546. WILLIAM GILMORE SIMMS, 1 806-1 870 It has been suggested that Simms might be called the Cooper of the South, because he achieved recognition second only to Cooper's when writing in the same genre. Using Georgia, Mississippi, and Kentucky, but principally his native South Carolina, as the settings for his romantic novels, he treated three subjects derived from American history: the frontier; Indian warfare; and the Revolutionary War. Concerning the last subject his work is most fully sustained, although his frontier criminals are powerfully if sensationally portrayed, and his treat- ment of Indian character is informed and dramatic. His minor and comic characters, particularly the well-known Lieutenant Porgy, are counted among his best achievements. Simms' place in literature is that of a novelist; but in the additional capacities of editor, commentator on society and politics, biographer, and poet he became known to contem- porary northern "literati." His theory of American writing emphasized the development of a literature culturally emancipated from that of England and devoted chiefly to themes native to the United States. 547. The partisan; a tale of the Revolution. New York, Harper, 1835. 2 v. 8-13055 PS2848.P2 1835 RBD First of a trilogy on the South Carolina campaigns in the Revolutionary War; continued in Melli- champe (New York, Harper, 1836. 2 v.), which in turn was followed by Katharine Walton (Phila- delphia, A. Hart, 185 1. 2 v.). 548. The Yemassee. A romance of Carolina. New York, Harper, 1835. 2 v. 8-8999 PS2848.Y5 1835 RBD 549. Edited, with introd., chronology, and bibliography, by Alexander Cowie. New York, American Book Co., 1937. xliv, 406 p. (American fiction series; general editor, H. H. Clark) 37-4083 PZ3.S592Y34 Indian warfare in South Carolina provides the theme. In Cowie's edition the text is that of the 1853 edition, which was slightly corrected by the author. 550. Beauchampe; or, The Kentucky tragedy. Philadelphia, Lea & Blanchard, 1842. 2 v. 29-25298 PZ3.S592B2 RBD Plot is based on the same murder case that was the inspiration of C. F. Hoffman's Greyslaer (1840) ; later Simms wrote Charlemont (New York, Red- field, 1856. 447 p.) for which Beauchampe serves as a sequel. Both are frontier or border novels. 551. Views and reviews in American literature, history and fiction. 1st [and 2d] series. New York, Wiley & Putnam, 1845. 2 v. in 1. (238, 184 p.) (Wiley and Putnam's library of American books [no. 9]) 30-17221 PS2850.V5 1845 RBD 552. The forayers; or, The raid of the dog-days. New York, Redfield, 1855. 560 p. 8-13063 PS2848.F6 1855 RBD This book and its sequel V.utaw (New York, Red- field, 1856. 582 p.) are novels of the American Revo- lution. The action takes place in South Carolina. 553- New and rev. ed. New York, J. W. Lovell, 1885. 560 p. (Lovell's library, v. 1^, no. 697) 10-1290 PS2848.F6 1885 RRD 554. Letters; collected and edited by Mary C. Simms Oliphant, Altred Taylor Odcll [and] T. C. Duncan Eaves. Introd. by Donald Davidson. Biograpical sketch by Alexander S. Sallcy. Col um- 54 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES bia, University of South Carolina Press, 1952-55. 4 v. 52-2352 PS2853.A4 1952 Bibliographical footnotes. Contents. — v. 1. 1830-1844. — v. 2. 1845-1849. — v. 3. 1850-1857. — v. 4. 1858-1866. To be completed with the publication of volume 5. 555. Works. Uniform ed. Illustrated by Dar- ley. New York, W. J. Widdleton, 1853-66. 20 v. NRU Volumes 8-13 have half title: Border novels and romances of the South, v. 1-6. Incomplete collection, omitting particularly bio- graphical, historical, critical, and miscellaneous writings. 556. CHARLES HENRY SMITH ("BILL ARP"), 1 826-1903 Smith, a Georgia lawyer, politician, and planter, was a Confederate officer in the Civil War, and was for many years a contributor to the Atlanta Consti- tution. He wrote partly in the illiterate dialect of a "Cracker," and partly in more literary style as a rustic philosopher and satirist whom he called "Bill Arp." His sketches and stories, however humorous, give an insight into Southern problems and attitudes during the war and Reconstruction and into the racial and agrarian questions that troubled his re- gion. Tolerance, narrative skill, good feeling, and some clever delineations of character have contrib- uted to the preservation of his reputation as a hu- morist of a type exemplified in the 20th century by Will Rogers (1879-1935). Autobiographical ele- ments are present in Smith's Bill Arp: From the Uncivil War to Date (1930). The Farm and the Fireside (1891) contains "sketches of domestic life in war and peace." 557. Bill Arp, so called. A side show of the south- ern side of the war. Illustrated by M. A. Sul- livan. New York, Metropolitan Record Office, 1866. 204 p. 12-14838 PN6161.S653 RBD Parts of the book are written in the form of letters addressed to Abraham Lincoln, "Artemus Ward," and others. 558. SEBA SMITH ("MAJOR JACK DOWN- ING"), 1792-1868 A true Yankee from the state of Maine, Smith used his invention, a homely country character named Jack Downing, as the mouthpiece for his own humorous but shrewd judgments of faults in contemporary politics and life during the era of Jacksonian democracy. Characterized by portrayals of peculiarities in the speech and manners of rural New England, Smith's work captured the attention of a large audience and was instrumental in estab- lishing a genre used by his immediate successors as well as by such more recent humorists as Finley Peter Dunne and Will Rogers. 559. The life and writings of Major Jack Down- ing [pseud.] of Downingville, away Down East in the State of Maine. Boston, Lilly, Wait, Colman & Holden, 1833. xii, 260 p. 12-5647 PS2876.L68 1833 RBD Comprises material originally published in the Portland Daily Courier, a newspaper founded by Smith. 560. 3d ed. Boston, Lilly, Wait, Col- man & Holden, 1834. xvi, 2S8 p. 30-29693 PS2876.L68 1834 RBD 561. Way Down East; or, Portraitures of Yankee life. By Seba Smith, the original Major Jack Downing. New York, J. C. Derby, 1854. 384 p. 3-24500 PS2876.W3 1854 RBD Tales having New England local color interest. Smith had numerous imitators who even borrowed the name of Major Downing as their own pseudo- nym; hence the claim to original authorship in the foregoing entry. 562. HARRIET (BEECHER) STOWE, 1811- 1896 To the crusade for the abolition of slavery in America one of the most effective contributions was Mrs. Stowe's novel, Uncle Tom's Cabin. Melo- dramatic and sentimental, it nevertheless possessed the power to appeal to the conscience of the world and thus became a highly significant document of the controversy over slavery. The book has been many times dramatized and has had a phenomenal record as a best seller in England, on the Continent, and in the United States, long after the abuses it was written to uncover had ceased to exist. Mrs. Stowe was a tireless and voluminous writer of miscellane- ous works. These include regional novels, sketches, and stories, sometimes expressed in New England dialect, and having as their local particularly Maine, Massachusetts, and Connecticut. Numerous auto- biographical and biographical elements in them re- flect Calvinistic influences in the writer's back- ground. The books are also characterized by real- ism concerning village and seafaring life prevalent in New England in the 18th century, a period that the author believed to be seminal in the life of the region and America. Charles H. Foster in The Rungless Ladder: Harriet Beecher Stowe and New England Puritanism (Durham, N. C, Duke Uni- LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 55 versity Press, 1954. 278 p.) concludes that Mrs. Stowe's most important achievement was her ability to give readers a clear sense of New England Puri- tanism, while arousing sympathy based on under- standing of its causes and results. 563. Uncle Tom's cabin; or, Life among the lowly. Boston, J. P. Jewett, 1852. 2 v. 12-15048 PZ3.S8c.Un RBD First published in the National Era at Washing- ton from June 1851 to April 1852. 564. Thirtieth thousand. Boston, J. P. Jewett, 1852. 2 v. 18-16942 PS2954.U5 1852c RBD 565. New ed. With an introductory ac- count of the work by the author. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1887 [ c 1879 J xlii, 500 p. 51-48701 PZ3.S89Un3o 566. With an introd. by Raymond [M.] Weaver. New York, Limited Editions Club, 1938. xv, 294 p. 39-14273 PS2954.U5 1938 RBD Illustrated by Miguel Covarrubias. 567. With introductory remarks and cap- tions by Langston Hughes. New York, Dodd, Mead, 1952. 442 p. illus. (Great illus- trated classics) 52-12396 PZ3.S89Un77 568. The minister's wooing. New York, Derby & Jackson, 1859. 578 p. 8-16122 PS2954.M5 1859 RBD 569. 24th ed. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1887. 578 p. 12-37862 PZ 3 .S8 9 Mi8 570. The pearl of Orr's Island: a story of the coast of Maine. Boston, Ticknor & Fields, 1862. 437 P- 8-16118 PZ3.S89P 571- 30th ed. Boston, Houghton Mif- 572. Oldtown folks. Boston, Fields, Osgood, 1869. viii, 608 p. 8-16119 PZ3.S890 573- 25th ed. Boston, Houghton Mif- flin, 1883. viii, 608 p. 42-27103 PZ3.S8903 574. Sam Lawson's Oldtown fireside stories. Boston, J. R. Osgood, 1872. 216 p. 8-16114 PZ3.S89S 575. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1899. 287 p. 0-701 PZ3.S89S4 Includes four additional pieces. 576. Poganuc people: their loves and lives. New York, Fords, Howard, & Hulbert [1878] 375 p. 8-16115 PZ3.S89P0 577. Life of Harriet Beecher Stowe, compiled from her letters and journals by her son, Charles Edward Stowe. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1889. xii, 530 p. illus. 16-7887 PS2956.A3 1889 See also Life and Letters of Harriet Beecher Stowe, edited by Annie Fields (Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1897. 406 p. 4-17386 PS2956.F5 1897). 578. Writings, with biographical introductions . . . [Cambridge, Mass., Riverside Press, 1896] 16 v. illus. 28-5720 PS295o.E96a RBD 579. DANIEL PIERCE THOMPSON, 1795- 1868 A devoted citizen of Vermont, with strong anti- quarian interests, Thompson wrote some half-dozen historical novels on themes such as frontier life in the state and on patriotism in Vermont during the American Revolution. His work belongs to the tradition inaugurated in America by Cooper and illustrates the spread of interest in historical "ro- mances" concerned with different parts of the country. 580. The Green Mountain Boys. Montpelier, Vt., E. P. Walton, 1839. 2 v. CtY Ethan Allen's capture of Fort Ticonderoga is featured in the work, which is said to have gone through 50 editions before i860; for many years it was considered a classic American historical novel for boys. 581. New York, J. W. Lovell [1882] 2 v. in 1 (360 p.) (Lovell's library, v. 1, no. 21) CA10-1621 PZ3-T3725Gr7 flin, 1890. 437 p. 8-16U7 PZ3.S89P30 582 New York, T. Nelson, 1927. 485 p. illus. 27-27787 PZ3.T3725Gr2o 583. Locke Amsden; or, The schoolmaster, a talc. Boston, B. B. Mussey, 1847. 231 p. 49-32096 PZ3T3725L0 Regional novel influenced by the author's earlv struggles to secure an education and by his boyhood experiences of life and labor on a remote Vermont farm under pioneer conditions. 584. 231 p. Boston, Hall & Whiting, 1881. MB 56 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 585. HENRY DAVID THOREAU, 1817-1862 Thoreau, a natural "solitary" and member of Emerson's Concord circle of Transcendentalists, in his own experience realized many of the ideals of his associates in the group. In view of that fact, the 39 notebooks containing his journal, which came to light after his death, constitute not only his own spiritual autobiography but also a highly individual record of literary thought in New England at the time of the American Renaissance. Fruidands and Brook Farm failed as Transcendentalist experi- ments in communal living; but Thoreau's individual venture at Walden Pond enabled him to push the doctrine of simplification to its limits and to add a classic to the literature of his region. Nature, with which he was perhaps more intimate than with any human being, provided him, as Emerson thought it should, with the enjoyment of "an original relation to the universe." From that relation he derived the inspiration for his most sustained literary work. The results are preserved in several volumes of prose showing the discipline of wide reading, par- ticularly in English literature of the 17th century. As a political thinker and a social philosopher he expressed his belief in freedom and individualism, even when the search for these objectives of the good life involved civil disobedience. Like Emer- son, Thoreau was a poet, whose poems, according to his own dictum, are "a piece of very private his- tory, which unostentatiously lets us into the secret of a man's life." For his contributions to The Dial and other journals, and for his longer publications in their earlier appearances, Thoreau received qualified approval, chiefly from the Concord circle. Writing shordy after his death Lowell mixed praise with blame for his oddities, in almost equal proportions. But time has reversed the earlier verdicts. On the basis of his notable additions to an authentic Ameri- can literary tradition his reputation has grown steadily among the reputations of world figures in literature. 586. [Civil disobedience] Resistance to civil gov- ernment; a lecture delivered in 1847. In Aesthetic papers, edited by Elizabeth P. Peabody. New York, Putnam, 1849. p. 189-213. 5-3424 AP2.A27 RBD For useful reprints of this essay, see the last entry under Walden below, and volumes of selections listed by Bode, Canby, Cargill, and Crawford. 587. A week on the Concord and Merrimack Rivers. Boston, J. Munroe; New York, Put- nam, 1849. 413 p. 8-14408 F72.C5T4 RBD 588. Edited with an introd. by Odell Shepard. New York, Scribner, 1921. xxviii, 292 p. (Modern student's library [edited by W. D. Howe]) 21-9999 F72.C5T56 589. Walden; or, Life in the woods. Boston, Ticknor & Fields, 1854. 357 p. *5- 2 573 PS3048.A1 1854 RBD A Centennial Chec\-Ust of the Editions of Henry David Thoreau's Walden has been prepared by Walter R. Harding (Charlottesville, Va., University of Virginia Press, 1954. 32 p.). 590. With an introd. by Joseph Wood Krutch. New York, Harper, 1950. xii, 440 p. (Harper's modern classics) 50-6285 PS3048.A1 1950a 591. Walden and other writings. Edited with an introd. by Brooks Atkinson. New York, Modern Library, 1937. xx, 732 p. (Modern Library of the world's best books) 37-28676 PS3042.A7 Issued 1950 as T35 in Modern Library college editions. 592. Walden, and selected essays. Introd. by George F. Whicher. Chicago, Packard, 1947. xxii, 483 p. (University classics) 47-7258 PS3042.W5 593. Walden; or, Life in the woods. On the duty of civil disobedience. Introd. by Norman Holmes Pearson. New York, Rinehart, 1948. xii, 304 p. (Rinehart editions, 8) 48-8445 PS3048.A1 1948 594. The Maine woods. Boston, Ticknor & Fields, 1864. 328 p. 1-8882 F27.P5T43 RBD Edited by Sophia Thoreau and William E. Chan- ning. The first of the papers was published in the Union Magazine, New York, in 1848; the second in The Atlantic Monthly in 1858; and the last is here first printed. Contents. — Ktaadn.— Chesuncook. — The Alle- gash and east branch. 595. With an introd. by Annie Russell Marble. New York, Crowell, 1906. xv, 359 p. (Handy volume classics) 6-23057 F24.T494 596. Cape Cod. Boston, Ticknor & Fields, 1865. 252 p. 3-21052 F72.C3T37 RBD Edited by Sophia Thoreau and William Ellery Channing; first four chapters published in Putnam's Magazine in 1855; the fifth and eighth chapters appeared in The Atlantic Monthly in October and December 1864. LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 57 597. With an introd. by Annie Russell Marble. New York, Crowell, 1907. xiii, 263 p. (Astor prose series) 7-37720 F72.C3T42 598. Collected poems. Edited by Carl Bode. Chicago, Packard, 1943. xxi, 385 p. 43-12271 PS3041.B6 1943a First critical edition. 599. Writings. With bibliographical introduc- tions and full indexes. In ten volumes. [Riverside ed.] [Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1894- 95] 11 v. 4-!3 8 75 PS3040.E94 Volumes 5-8 edited by Harrison G. O. Blake. First collected edition; introductory notes by Horace E. Scudder. The Familiar Letters (1894) edited by Franklin B. Sanborn, were added as an 1 ith volume. Cf. Francis H. Allen, A Bibliography of Henry David Thoreau (Boston, Houghton Mif- flin, 1908). 600. [Manuscript ed.] Boston, Hough- ton Mifflin, 1906. 20 v. 6-4618 PS3040.F06 Volume [6] includes Familiar Letters edited by Franklin B. Sanborn, enl. ed.; volumes [7-20] con- tain Thoreau's Journal, edited by Bradford Torrey. 601. [Walden ed.] Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1906. 20 v. MH The standard Walden edition was printed from the plates of the Manuscript edition. Cf. Literary History of the United States (no. 2460). 602. [New Riverside ed.] With biblio- graphical introd. and full indexes. Boston, Houghton Mifflin [ 1932? ] 1 1 v. 33-16767 PS3040.F32 603. The heart of Thoreau's journals, edited by Odell Shepard. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1927. xiii, 348 p. 27-23170 PS3053.A25 1927 604. Henry David Thoreau; representative selec- tions, with introd., bibliography, and notes, by Bartholow V. Crawford. New York, American Book Co., c i934. lxxii, 379 p. (American writers sc "es) 34-23823 PS3042.C7 "Selected bibliography": p. lix-lxix. 605. Works. Cambridge ed. Selected and edited by Henry S. Canby. Boston, Houghton Mif- flin, 1937. xviii, 848 p. 37-28734 PS3042.C3 1937 "Selected bibliography": p. [847J-848. 4:si24<> <;o 606. Works. With a biographical sketch by Ralph Waldo Emerson. New York, Crowell, 1940. 31, [2], 440, 319, [2], 492, 423 p. 40-27855 PS3040.F40 Contents. — Biographical sketch, by R. W. Emer- son. — Walden. — Cape Cod. — A week on the Con- cord and Merrimack Rivers. — The Maine woods. 607. The portable Thoreau. Edited, and with an introd., by Carl Bode. New York, Viking Press, 1947. viii, 696 p. (The Viking portable library) 47-1945 PS3042.B65 Bibliography: p. 695-696. 608. Selected writings on nature and liberty; edited with an introd., by Oscar Cargill. New York, Liberal Arts Press [1953, c i952] xx, 163 p. (The American heritage series, no. 3) 53-942 PS3042.C34 "A reader's vocabulary, edited by Dr. Fritz A. H. Leuchs" published as supplement (28 p.) and in- serted at end. Bibliography: p. xix-xx. Recent studies that document contemporary criti- cal opinion concerning Thoreau include: 609. Cook, Reginald L. Passage to Walden. Bos- ton, Houghton Mifflin, 1949. xvi, 238 p. 49-8084 PS3057.N3C6 Essays aiming to "penetrate the essential quality and evoke the richness of his correspondence with nature." 610. Harding, Walter R., ed. Thoreau: a cen- tury of criticism. Dallas, Southern Methodist University Press, 1954. 205 p. 55-116 PS3054.H3 Twenty-four essays by such varied writers as J. R. Lowell, R. W. Emerson, R. L. Stevenson, Henry Miller, and Alfred Kazin. 611. Seybold, Ethel. Thoreau; the quest and the classics. New Haven, Yale University Press, 1951. x, 148 p. (Yale studies in English, v. 116) 51-1771 PS3057.L55S4 PRi3.Y3,v. 116 Bibliographical footnotes. Begun as a dissertation with the aim of investi- gating Thoreau's classicism, the work is also de- signed as an inquiry into the essential meaning of his life and thought. See also Appendixes as iol- lows: "Classical Books Used by Thoreau," p. 102; "Classical Quotations in Thoreau," p. [103]- 123; and "Index of Classical Quotations, References, and Allusions," p. [i24]-i4i. 58 A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 612. THOMAS BANGS THORPE, 1815-1878 Born and educated in Massachusetts, Thorpe for reasons of health spent nearly 20 years of his life in Louisiana. During that time he formed a deep affection for the South and for the whole southwestern frontier, over which he traveled widely. An artist and portrait painter patronized by distinguished people, an informed student of politics, a historian of sorts, and an editor and promoter of newspapers, Thorpe brought unusual powers of observation and understanding to bear on what he saw about him. The prairies, forests, animals, country people, speech, manners, and folk- lore of the region fascinated him. The stories and sketches that preserve his firsthand impressions are characterized by romance, realism, and robust humor. 613. The hive of "the bee-hunter," a repository of sketches, including peculiar American charac- ter, scenery, and rural sports. New York, Apple- ton, 1854. 312 p. illus. 15-11538 F396.T5 RBD Includes "Tom Owen, the Bee-Hunter," p. [47]- 53; and Thorpe's most admired tale, "The Big Bear of Arkansas," p. [72]~93, which was first written for and published in the Spirit of the Times (New York, 1831-61), v. 9, Mar. 27, 1841, p. 43-44. 6r 4 . HENRY TIMROD, 1828-1867 Timrod was a member of a literary group in Charleston, South Carolina, where he was associ- ated with Simms and Hayne. His "Theory of Poetry" (1863-64), first published in The Atlantic Monthly, v. 96, Sept. 1905, p. 313-326, sets forth ob- jections to Poe's definitions of poetry and indicates the serious interest in poetics felt by the southern group before the Civil War. Timrod's one volume of verse published in those years reveals his charac- teristically sensitive response to nature. Later, animated by intense love of the South, he became the poet of the Confederacy. His odes and other poems of the war years express the powerful emo- tions of the Southern people, in verse forms in- fluenced by English romantic poetry of the 19th century. 615. Poems. Boston, Ticknor & Fields, i860. 130 p. 39-13915 PS3070.A2 i860 RBD 616. The poems of Henry Timrod. Edited, with a sketch of the poet's life, by Paul H. Hayne. New York, E. J. Hale, 1873. 205 p. 8-24837 PS3070.A2 1873 RBD 617. Memorial ed. With memoir and portrait. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1899. xxxviii, 193 p. 99-1766 PS3070.A2 1899 618. Essays. Edited with an introd. by Edd Win- field Parks. Athens, University of Georgia Press, 1942. vi, 184 p. 42-18682 PS3071.P3 Deals with literature in the South, and particu- larly with theories of poetical form and composition. 619. WALT WHITMAN, 1819-1892 English, Dutch, and Quaker strains con- verged in Whitman's heredity. The son of a New York farmer turned carpenter, he was formally educated only through the elementary grades. He was in turn office boy, printer, itinerant country school teacher, and journalist. At the age of thirty- six he put on sale the first edition of his poems, Leaves of Grass. In this and successive editions, it is clear that Whitman saw nature "with every leaf a miracle," and human beings, including the lowly and the common, as the very stuff of which poetry could be made "to define America, her athletic de- mocracy." He took inspiration from the Concord circle and from the general, liberal romanticism of the first half of the 19th century; but by natural bent he became a forerunner of the realism that began to characterize American literature after 1870. The poetic technique he developed also had old derivations and new foreshadowings. A source of the cadences heard in his poetry is found in the majestic lines of the King James Bible; his loose rhythmic form was the fountainhead of the "free verse" of the 1920's. Language as used in America fascinated him, and the "barbaric yawp" of which he boasted included slang, oddly worded catalogs of things, strained invocations, mongrel words, and tags from foreign languages. At the other extreme, however, his diction often approaches classic purity. In a mixture of both modes, he chanted the glory of democracy, the beauty of love and comradeship, the life of the American people, and the infinite variety of the country. The result was shocking to most American readers of the period, who equated it with vulgarity. His pungent vocabulary, forceful style, bathos joined to beauty, egotism, license, and bois- terous optimism for a long time offended the refined and elegant members of society. Some of his poems dealing with sex were so startlingly direct that to Thoreau they sounded "as if the beasts spoke." On the other hand, the middle classes, whose spokesman Whitman desired to be, were puzzled and put off by his mysticism and Transcendentalism. In spite of the contradictory elements in his work, time has accorded him a high place in American letters, as well as among the greatest spokesmen for democ- racy. His force was such that it has been felt around the world. 620. Leaves of grass. Brooklyn, 1855. 95 p. 3-23679 PS3201 1855 RBD First edition. Includes the famous first preface, omitted in the same form from later editions. In it Whitman glorifies the United States as being in themselves the greatest poem, extols the poet as a seer, and calls the highest poetic art that which is simplest and most natural. From 1855 to 1881 when the poet made the final revision of the text, Leaves of Grass grew in suc- ceeding editions from its original slender dimensions to a work of 438 pages. For the history and sig- nificance of this evolution see Gay W. Allen's Walt Whitman Handbook (Chicago, Packard, 1946), p. 104-235, and Oscar L. Trigg's "The Growth of 'Leaves of Grass'," found in The Complete Writ- ings of Walt Whitman, book-lover's Camden edi- tion, "Prose Works," v. 7, i.e. v. [10] of The Complete Writings, p. 99-134. 621. Brooklyn, 1856. 384 p. 3-23702 PS3201 1856 RBD Second edition. Published by Fowler and Wells, New York, with- out publisher's statement on the title page; sale was later abandoned by the firm on account of criticism. Adds 20 new poems to 12 in the first edition and has lettered on the backstrip: "I greet you at the beginning of a great career, R. W. Emerson." This unauthorized quotation was taken from a letter written by Emerson to acknowledge a complimen- tary copy of the first edition. 622. Boston, Thayer & Eldridge, Year 85 of the States. (1860-61), 456 p. 3-23678 PS3201 i860 RBD Third edition. Includes 124 new poems, with revisions of those found in the two earlier editions. 623. 338, 72, 24, 36 p. 3-23703 PS3201 1867 RBD Fourth edition. Includes Drum-Taps (1865; Sequel to Drum- Taps (1865-66); and Songs Before Parting. The Sequel to Drum-Taps contains the elegiacs on Lin- coln, notably "When Lilacs Last in the Door- Yard Bloom'd" and "O Captain! My Captain!". 624. Washington [New York, J. S. Red- field J 1 87 1. 384 p. 14-7865 PS3201 1871 RBD Fifth edition. LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 59 Includes Drum-Taps; Marches Now the War Is Over; and Songs of Parting. 625. 382 p. Author's ed. Camden, N. J., 1882. 43-36897 PS3201 1882b RBD Issued from the plates of the "suppressed edition" (Boston, J. R. Osgood, 1881-82). Edition which received the poet's last textual revisions and in which final titles and the order of arrangement were as- signed to the poems. 626. Leaves of grass; including Sands at seventy, 1st annex, Good-bye my fancy, 2nd annex. "A backward glance o'er travel'd roads" . . . Phila- delphia, McKay, 1891-92. 438 p. 3-15387 PS3201.1891 RBD Last edition that received the author's personal supervision; known as the "Deathbed edition." 627. Leaves of grass. Edited by Emory Holloway, from the text of the ed. authorized and editorially supervised by his literary executors, Rich- ard Maurice Bucke, Thomas B. Harned, and Horace L. Traubel. Inclusive ed. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1954 [ c i926] xx, 682 p. 54-4961 PS3201 1954a Includes Whitman's discarded poems, chiefly from the Putnam edition of The Complete Writings (1902), and his significant prefaces, i. e., those of 1855, 1872, 1876, and "A Backward Glance O'er Travel'd Roads" preface to November Boughs (1888). 628. Leaves of grass, and selected prose. Edited with an introd. by Sculley Bradley. New York, Rinehart, 1949. xxx, 568 p. (Rinehart editions, 28) 49-49650 PS3200.F49a 629. Leaves of grass. With an introd. by Oscar Cargill. New York, Harper, 1950. xxxi, 537 p. (Harper's modern classics) 50-6167 PS3201 1950 New York [W. E. Chapin] 1867. 630. With an introd. by Sculley Bradley, New York, New American Library, 1954. 430 p. (A Mentor book, Ms 117) 54-10986 PS3201 1954 631. Democratic vistas. Washington, 1871. 84 p. 12-12831 E168.W61 RBD At head of title: Memoranda. On cover: New York, J. S. Redficld, publisher. Copyrighted 1870, by Walt Whitman. Prose work essential to an understanding of the poet's theories concerning literature, democracy, and "personalism," or individualism. 60 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 632. With an introd. by John Valente. New York, Liberal Arts Press, 1949. xvii, 69 p. (Little library of liberal arts, no. 9) 49-3309 PS3213.A2V3 "Selected bibliography": p. xvii. Mr. Valente is Executive Secretary of the Walt Whitman Project of Brooklyn College. 633. Specimen days & Collect. Philadelphia, R. Welsh, 1882-83. 374 p. CA12-1030 PS3220.A1 1882 RBD A revised edition published on London, 1887, under title: Specimen Days in America. Cf. Caro- lyn Wells, A Concise Bibliography of Walt Whit- man (Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1922). For the most part comprises four types of prose descriptions: (1) genealogical and autobiographical information; (2) realistic memoranda taken from notebooks kept by Whitman during his experiences in camps and hospitals during the Civil War (1862- 65); (3) idyllic expressions of delight in nature ob- served on the banks of Timber Creek while recover- ing from a paralytic stroke suffered in 1873; and (4) recollections of people, places, and literary figures and friends, such as Carlyle, Poe, Longfel- low, and Emerson. 634. Specimen days in America. London, H. Mil- ford, Oxford University Press, 1932. xiv, 317 p. (The World's Classics, no. 371) 32-28186 PS3220.A1 1932 635. Specimen days, Democratic vistas, and other prose, edited by Louise Pound. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, Doran, 1935. liii, 370 p. (Doubleday-Doran series in literature) j; 35-8359 PS3202 1935 "Selected bibliography": p. xlvii-lii. 636. Complete poems & prose of Walt Whitman, 1855— 1888; authenticated & personal book (handled by W. W.) Portraits from life, auto- graph. [Philadelphia, Ferguson, 1888] 382, 374, 140, 2 p. 43-36870 PS3200.E88 RBD "Edition: Six hundred. Number one hundred forty." — Ms. note on verso of 2d preliminary leaf. 637. The complete writings of Walt Whitman. Issued under the editorial supervision of his literary executors, Richard Maurice Bucke, Thomas B. Harned, and Horace L. Traubel; with additional bibliographical and critical material prepared by Oscar Lovell Triggs, Ph.D. New York, Putnam [1902] 10 v. illus. 2-25501 PS3200.F02 RBD "The book-lover's Camden edition." Limited edition of 500 signed and numbered sets. This set not numbered. Bibliography of Walt Whitman, compiled by O. L. Triggs: v. [10], p. 135-233. Contents. — v. [1-3] Leaves of grass. — v. [4-10] The complete prose works. 638. Complete prose works. Philadelphia, Mc- Kay, 1892. viii, 522 p. 22-22228 PS3202 1892 RBD Contents. — Specimen day s. — Collect. — Novem- ber boughs. — Good-bye, my fancy. — Some lag- gards yet. — Memoranda. 639. Complete poetry & selected prose and letters, edited by Emory Holloway. London, None- such Press, 1938. xxxix, 11 16 p. 38-27614 PS3200.F38 "Biographical and bibliographical chronology": p. xxxi-xxxix. Published also in New York by Random House (1938). 640. Walt Whitman; representative selections, with introd. bibliography, and notes by Floyd Stov- all. Rev. ed. New York, American Book Co., c i939- lxvi, 480 p. (American writers series) 40-1 1 12 PS3204.S8 1939 "Selected bibliography": p. liii-lxiii. 641. Walt Whitman, selected and with notes by Mark Van Doren. New York, Viking Press, 1945. 698 p. (The Viking portable library) 45-6887 PS3203.V3 642. The complete poetry and prose of Walt Whit- man, as prepared by him for the Deathbed edition. With an introd. by Malcolm Cowley. New York, Pellegrini & Cudahy, 1948. 2 v. (The American classics series. New York) 48-10006 PS3200.F48 Reprint. Garden City, N. Y., Garden City Books, 1954, '1948. 482, 538 p. (World fam- ous classics) 54 - 7937 643. Faint clews & indirections; manuscripts of Walt Whitman and his family. Edited by Clarence Gohdes and Rollo G. Silver. Durham, Duke University Press, 1949. x, 250 p. 49-10012 PS3200.F49 "Contains the previously unpublished manu- scripts of Walt Whitman and a selection from the Whitman family letters now in the Trent Collection in the Library of Duke University." 644. The best of Whitman, edited with an introd. and notes by Harold W. Blodgett. New York, Ronald Press Co., 1953. x, 478 p. 52-12519 PS3203.B6 Bibliography: p. 467-471. LITERATURE (1607-1955) / 6 1 645. Poems; selections with critical aids. Edited by Gay Wilson Allen and Charles T. Davis. New York, New York University Press, 1955. x, 280 p. 55-8234 PS3203.A5 Bibliography: p. 273-276. 646. The Whitman reader. Edited, with an in- trod., by Maxwell Geismar. New York, Pocket Books, 1955. 507 p. (Cardinal edition, GC-25) 55- 2 353 6 PS3203.G4 Includes bibliography. The centenary of the publication of Leaves of Giass in 1955, and the years immediately preceding that date, were marked by the appearance of a large number of critical and biographical studies of Whitman. Among these are found the following: 647. Allen, Gay W. The solitary singer; a critical biography of Walt Whitman. New York, Macmillan, 1955. xii, 616 p. illus. 55-114 PS3231.A69 Bibliographical references included in "Notes" (P- 545-594)- 648. Allen, Gay W., ed. Walt Whitman abroad; critical essays from Germany, France, Scan- dinavia, Russia, Italy, Spain, and Latin America, Israel, Japan, and India. Syracuse, N. Y., Syra- cuse University Press, 1955. xii, 290 p. 55-5511 PS3238.A75 Essays are given in English translations; British essays are omitted, reference being made to Harold Blodgett's Walt Whitman in England (Ithaca, N. Y., Cornell University Press, 1934. 244 p.). Includes bibliographical references. 649. Beaver, Joseph. Walt Whitman, poet of science. New York, King's Crown Press, 1951. xv, 178 p. 51-288 PS3242.S3B4 Bibliography: p. J 171 ]— 174. 650. Briggs, Arthur E. Walt Whitman: thinker and artist. New York, Philosophical Library, 1952. 489 p. 52-13025 PS3231.B7 651. Chase, Richard V. Walt Whitman reconsid- ered. New York, Sloane, 1955. 191 p. 55-6326 PS3231.C47 652. Clark, Leadie M. Walt Whitman's concept of the American common man. New York, Philosophical Library, 1955. 178 p. 55-14638 PS3242.A5C62 Thesis — University of Illinois. 653. Eby, Edwin H. A concordance of Walt Whitman's Leaves of grass and selected prose writings. Seattle, University of Washington Press, 1949-54. 5 v. A5o-9002rev PS3245.E2 654. Faner, Robert D. Walt Whitman & opera. Philadelphia, University of Pennsylvania Press, 1 95 1. xi, 249 p. 51-7724 PS3242.M8F3 Bibliography: p. 237-244. 655. Freedman, Florence B., ed. Walt Whitman looks at the schools. New York, King's Crown Press, 1950. xii, 278 p. 51-9067 PS3204.F7 The editor's thesis — Columbia University. Includes articles on schools and the education of youth that appeared in the Brooklyn Evening Star and the Brooklyn Daily Eagle. Bibliography: p. [26i]-2j2. 656. Hindus, Milton, ed. Leaves of grass one hundred years after; new essays. Stanford, Calif., Stanford University Press, 1955. 149 p. 54-11783 PS3231.H5 Among the contributors are: William Carlos Williams, Richard Chase, Leslie Fiedler, Kenneth Burke, David Daiches, and J. Middleton Murry. 657. Rubin, Joseph J., and Charles H. Brown, eds. Walt Whitman of the New Yor\ Aurora, editor at twenty-two. A collection of recently dis- covered writings. State College, Pa., Bald Eagle Press, 1950. viii, 147 p. 50-14220 PS3203.R8 658. Traubel, Horace. With Walt Whitman in Camden. Boston, Small, Maynard, 1906-53. 4 v. illus. 8-5603 PS3232.T7 Volume 2 has imprint: New York, D. Appleton; volume 3, New York, M. Kennerley; volume 4, Philadelphia, University of Pennsylvania Press. 659. U. S. Library of Congress. Reference Dept. Walt Whitman; a catalog based upon the collections of the Library of Congress. With Notes on Whitman collections and collectors [by Charles E. Feinberg] Washington, 1955. xviii, 147 p. 55-60006 Z8971.5.U62 Z663.2.W3 660. U. S. Library of Congress. Reference Dept. Walt Whitman: man, poet, philosopher; three lectures presented under the auspices of the Gertrude Clarke Whittall Poetry and Literature Fund. Washington, 1955. 53 p. 55-60021 PS ^23 1. U5 2 Z663.2.W32 Contents. — The man, by G. W. Allen. — The poet, by M. Van Doren. — The philosopher, by D. Daiches. 62 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 661. Willard, Charles B. Whitman's American fame, the growth of his reputation in Amer- ica after 1892. Providence, Brown University, 1950. 269 p. (Brown University studies, v. 12. Ameri- cana series, no. 3) 50~5345rev PS3238.W55 Thesis — Brown University. Bibliography: p. [253]-257. 662. JOHN GREENLEAF WHITTIER, 1807- 1892 Whittier, in the poems for which he is valued today, preserved in the medium of his simple style the natural beauties peculiar to New England land- scapes and the idyllic elements he found to be charac- teristic of simple lives in the same countryside. The historic past of his native state, Massachusetts, where his family had lived continuously since 1638, also provided themes congenial to him. A Quaker, he produced some of America's best religious poetry. A few of the choicest hymns in use today are by him. His early romantic inspiration came in part from his admiration of Robert Burns' poems, an influence that persisted, since The Cotter's Satur- day Night finds a sort of American analogue in Whittier's narrative poem, Snow-Bound (1866). During his long life Whittier wrote in many forms. He contributed to newspapers and periodicals, be- came an editor, wrote miscellaneous prose, and to the detriment of his own literary career became for a time a propagandist in verse and prose for the abolition of slavery. His literary work, how- ever, which again predominated from the 1860's forward, brought him various honors and attracted to him numerous visitors and friends. A carefully documented study of Whittier's life and accom- plishments is provided by John A. Pollard's John Greenleaf Whittier, Friend of Man (Boston, Hough- ton Mifflin, 1949. 615 p.). 663. Justice and expediency; or, Slavery considered with a view to its rightful and effectual remedy, abolition. Haverhill, Mass., C. P. Thayer, 1833. 23 p. 7-22881 E449.W61 RBD A pamphlet in prose. 664. Voices of freedom. 7th and complete ed. Philadelphia, T. S. Cavender; Boston, Waite, Pierce, 1846. vi, 192 p. 40-1460 PS3269.V6 1846 RBD 665. Leaves from Margaret Smith's journal. Boston, Ticknor, Reed, & Fields, 1849. 224 p. 7-22150 PS3272.L4 1849 RBD Early history of Massachusetts woven into a fictitious diary of an English visitor purporting to spend part of two years in the Colony. 666. In war time, and other poems. Boston, Tick- nor & Fields, 1864. vi, 152 p. 7-21853 PS3259.I5 1864 RBD First edition published in November 1863. 667. Snow-bound. A winter idyl. Boston, Tick- nor & Fields, 1866. 51 p. 7-21855 PS3266.A1 1866 RBD 668. The tent on the beach, and other poems. Boston, Ticknor & Fields, 1867. 172 p. 7-21865 PS3268.A1 1867 RBD 669. Among the hills, and other poems. Boston, Fields, Osgood, 1869. 100 p. 7-21844 PS3255.A4 1869 RBD 670. Writings. Riverside ed. [Boston, Hough- ton Mifflin, 1888-89] 7 v. 7-22147 PS3250.E88 ". . . the later (1894) issue is the standard library edition . . ." Literary History of the United States (no. 2460). 671. Complete poetical works. Cambridge ed. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1894. xxii, 542 p. (Cambridge edition of the poets) 47-39698 PS325o.E94a Edited with biographical sketch, by Horace E. Scudder. 672. Life and letters, by Samuel T. Pickard. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1894. 2 v - (802 p.) 4-17396 PS3281.P5 1894a Bibliography: v. 2, p. 787-790. Based on material assembled by Whittier for the use of a possible biographer; includes a large col- lection of letters, representing nearly every year of the poet's life. Cf. Preface, p. [iii]. Other col- lections of Whittier's letters have also been made; among the more substantial of these are Whittier's Correspondence from the Oa1{ Knoll Collection, edited by John Albree (Salem, Mass., Essex Book and Print Club, 191 1. 295 p.); and Whittier's Un- known Romance; Letters to Elizabeth Lloyd, with an introduction by Marie V. Denervaud (Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1922. 72 p.). 673. Poems. Selected and edited with a com- mentary by Louis Untermeyer, and illustrated with pencil drawings by R. J. Holden. New York, Limited Editions Club, 1945. xx, 333 p. 46-1204 PS3252.U5 LITERATURE (1607-1955) / 63 674. NATHANIEL PARKER WILLIS, 1806- 1867 Willis was a prolific writer. As journalist, edi- tor, and professional man of letters he worked in such varied literary forms as poetry, sketches, short stories, familiar essays, novels, and dramas. He was in turn romantic, sentimental, chatty, urbane, discursive, and extravagant in his writing. His long residence abroad as a foreign correspondent for American journals and his cordial reception in fashionable and literary circles in England and on the Continent enabled him to become an unofficial cultural representative from the New World to the Old, and vice versa. It has been said that after the works of Irving and Cooper his most nearly re- sponded to the taste of American readers in the 1830's and 1840's. 675. A l'abri; or, The tent pitch'd. New York, S. Colman, 1839. 172 p. 14-3402 F127.T6W7 RBD Written in the form of a series of letters from the Valley of the Susquehannah River, New York, to embody impressions of that region where the writer's home, Glenmary, was located. Later re- published in a volume of prose and poetry entitled Letters from Under a Bridge (London, G. Virtue, 1840. 333 p.). 676. Tortesa, the usurer. New York, S. Colman, 1839. 149 p. (Colman's dramatic library) PS 33 2 4 .T6 1839 Play dealing with medieval Florence; romantic comedy in blank verse successfully produced in the United States and in England. 677. Pencillings by the way. 1st complete ed. New York, Morris & Willis, 1844. 216 p. (The mirror library, no. 27) 5-6529 AP2.N651 RBD Originally published in The New-Yorl^ Mirror, Feb. 13, 1832-Jan. 14, 1836, as a series of reports on residence and travel abroad, in Europe, England, and Asia Minor. 678. London, T. W. Laurie, 1942. 522 p. (Live books resurrected, edited by L. S. Jast) 43-16544 D919.W738 1942 679. Poems of early and after years. Illus. by E. Leutze. Philadelphia, Carey & Hart, 1848. 410 p. 49-35 2 03 ps 33 2 4- p 4 l8 4 8 Revised and corrected by the author. Cf. Preface, p. i. 680. Poems, sacred, passionate, and humorous. Complete ed. New York, Clark & Maynard, 1869. xvi, 380 p. 12-40407 PS3324.P6 1869 Biographical sketch: p. [iii]-xii. 681. Poems. London and New York, G. Rout- ledge, 1891. xvi, 304 p. 2-8744 PS3324.P3 1 89 1 Includes a brief memoir of the author and poems grouped under the following headings: "Scriptual," "Religious," "College Poems," "City Poems," and "Miscellaneous Poems." 682. Prose writings. Selected by Henry A. Beers. New York, Scribner, 1885. xvi, 365 p. 12-40465 PS3322.B4 D. The Gilded Age and After (1871-1914) The boom times that came after the Civil War, marked by vulgarity and moral laxity, formed an era named and satirized by Samuel Langhorne Clemens and Charles Dudley Warner in their boo\, The Gilded Age (1873). A "war to waste" ended and was followed by "a peace to corrupt." In these years and many that came after them politics reeled of scandals resulting from graft and the spoils sys- tem. Speculation, particularly in connection with railroad building, was wild and ruthless. With the extension of railroads and the increased business made possible by the new means of transportation cities grew greatly in size. In the large industrial centers that resulted the mansions of the rich looked down on slums in which were housed the poor, whose labor made possible the wealth of their em- ployers. A new aristocracy of money arose in the land, having "robber barons" of industry for its nobility. Even the passage of time and the im- provement in public morals after the Gilded Age did not bring about thoroughgoing reforms. Soon after the turn of the century "muckjakers" uncov- ered so much corruption in great corporations and in all levels of government that they launched a movement to better conditions by creating a litera ture of articles and booths exposing what they had found. Industrial expansion and commercial develop- ment were only two of the forces operating to change American civilization after the Civil War. 64 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Among other powerful influences that played upon the United States at this time must be counted the long-continued migration westward, to which atten- tion was called in the preceding section. In the period currently considered this movement of the people brought about, more and more completely , the settlement of the Far West and the Southwest, until no farther frontier was left to beckon. The courage and endurance that conquered mountains and deserts were reflected in the character of the cul- ture developed in the western regions. The United States, so long oriented to Britain and Europe by virtue of being centered on the Atlantic seaboard, now encompassed within its own borders an area and a variety of conditions — climatic, geographic, economic, social — with which the Nation as a whole, willy-nilly, found it necessary to reckon. The old order had burst at the seams; a new order, larger, cruder, more heterogeneous, richer, more promising, was being put together. Henry Adams, whose intellectual autobiography is one of the important documents of the period, complained bitterly of the disunity and confusion he found in his time, attributing these faults to the multiplicity of stresses under which American civilization labored. He thought his centenary might come {in 1938) before one might hope to "find a world that sensitive and timid natures could regard without a shudder." Justifiable as Mr. Adams' shudders may have been, American litera- ture in his period reached a new level of productivity. Many more people became professional writers; more aspects of life in the United States were repre- sented in literature; a few new literary forms were exploited; and several new trends were originated which have been influential ever since. With respect to literary forms, the short story now came into new prominence. Developed earlier chiefly by Irving, Hawthorne, and Poe, it was now a favored medium used by nearly half of the writers selected to represent the period. One of the strid- ing innovations in these stories was the increased emphasis on portrayal of characteristics peculiar to a number of different places and regions. Local color was provided through details of dress, food, manners, customs, and dialects of various sections. Cowboys on the trial with their herds, housewives in hamlets on the Maine coast, mountaineers in their backwoods isolation, Creole folk^ on the bayous of Louisiana, and miners in western camps were only a few of the many American groups allowed to spea\ in their own idiom through these stories. Likewise, poets and versema\ers turned to dialect and vernacular writing to sing of unlettered dwellers on the frontier, of simple country people, old- fashioned Negroes on plantations "before the war," and smalltown life in general. Humorous writing and lecturing, so much in vogue around the time of the Civil War, were still popular and were also identified with the school of local color and vernacular writing. This trend was sustained in part by journalists who were fore- runners of today's columnists. By means of news- paper articles and miscellanies, which were collected later and published as boo\s, the journalists told tall tales, made jo\es, and commented on the passing scene after the manner of crac\erbox philosophers who spo\e colloquially or in dialect. Some of these pieces were designed chiefly to amuse; some, while retaining their humorous character, were used to convey penetrating criticisms of human nature, society, national problems, and foreign relations. Prominent among the best wor\s of the period are the voluminous writings of Mar\ Twain, humorist, novelist, and exponent of the American spirit to the world. In even the briefest comment on literature pro- duced in America between i8ji and 1914, it is es- sential to notice one trend so marked that it is men- tioned frequently as characterizing the whole period: the trend toward realism. As the term is used, however, realism is a semantic house of many mansions. Its first enthusiastic proponent, William Dean Howells, thought that conditions of American life at the time invited the artist (includ- ing the writer) to the study and appreciation of what was common rather than exclusive. The arts, he contended, must become democratic, and the artist must continually asf( himself, "Is it true?" when evaluating his material. Novels (excluding Haw- thorne's) that were primarily romantic, or those hav- ing a strong sentimental cast, he would eliminate from categories of importance, on the score that they were good reading only when the reader was sicl^ or when he was silly, fiction as an art, Howells believed, must be concerned with what is actual, observable, and true to facts, though not necessarily, or even properly perhaps, grim or unpleasant facts. Grimness, however, crept into the wor\ of one of Howells' disciples, Hamlin Garland, who called his literary theory "veritism." Henry fames, by con- fining his search for realism to the minds and spirits of expatriated Americans and members of good so- ciety in the Eastern United States, was able to han- dle, on the level of psychological realism, a number of themes which were beyond the pale of either the realism of Howells or the veritism of Garland. Various other novelists of the time looked about them — at city life, at industry, at poverty, at a com- petitive society — and found in these and other ele- ments of American life much that was ugly, shock- ing, and violent. . Such conditions they exploited in their novels and stories, sometimes realistically , sometimes with Zolaesque exaggeration. From LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 65 this type of realism, fed by a growing consciousness of social problems, it was only a step to the deter- ministic naturalism of Theodore Dreiser and other writers belonging to the next period. 683. ANDY ADAMS, 1 859-1935 Adams' semi-autobiographical fiction deals chiefly with what he calls "the Old Trail days," of the 1880's, when hundreds of herds of cattle were driven on trails extending from Texas as far north as Montana. The heroes of these migrations were cowboys whom Adams knew at firsthand because he was one of them. The still undeveloped country through which their way often led, the speech and manner of the special breed of men attracted to the life of a cowboy, the attitude of these men to the horses they rode and the cattle they drove, and the stories they told each other when the day's work ended are portrayed by the author less as a literary expression than as an authentic record of personal experience. Sympathy, affection, and humorous realism characterize his books, which derive their chief value from the fact that they retain the flavor of a bygone phase of American life, changed forever by the extension of railroads and the social and eco- nomic development of what had long been western frontier country. 684. The log of a cowboy. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1903. 387 p. 3-12817 PZ3.A21L 685. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1927. 324 p. (Riverside bookshelf) 27-20251 PZ3.A21L5 "In preparing this classic of frontier literature for The Riverside Bookshelf the number of chapters has been reduced by three." — Publisher's note, pre- ceding table of contents. 686. The outlet. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1905. x, 371 p. 5-8678 PZ3.A21O A work that complements The Log of a Cowboy by introducing the same kinds of characters and events, with the addition of elements connected with sharp practices of railway promoters and builders. 687. Cattle brands; a collection of western camp- fire stories. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1906. 316 p. 6-9625 PZ3.A21C Includes "The Story of a Poker Steer," considered a classic by J. Frank Dobie, writing on Adams in the Southwest Review, v. 11, Jan. 1926, p. 92-101, 96. 688. HENRY ADAMS, 1838-1918 Henry Adams came of distinguished Massa- chusetts ancestry, which included a grandfather and a great-grandfather who were Presidents of the United States, and a father, Charles Francis Adams, whose secretary Henry was while the father served as minister to Great Britain during the Civil War. A traveler, scholar, editor of the North American Review, historian of the United States, teacher at Harvard, and associate of many notable contem- poraries, Adams contributed to the literature of his country by means of novels, essays, a book of travel, familiar letters, and particularly through The Edu- cation of Henry Adams. An appreciative evalua- tion of Adams and his writings, accompanied by quotations from and summaries of most of his works, has been addressed to the general reader by Robert A. Hume in his Runaway Star (Ithaca, N. Y., Cornell University Press, 1951. 270 p.). The most recent and extensive biography is Elizabeth Stevenson's Henry Adams; a Biography (New York, Macmillan, 1955. 425 p.). 689. Democracy, an American novel. New York, Holt, 1880. 374 p. (Leisure-hour series, no. 112) 7-12165 PS1004.A4D4 1880 RBD Variously attributed by different authorities to Henry Adams, John Hay, and Clarence King. Cf. William R. Thayer, Life and Letters of John Hay (Boston, Houghton Mifflin [1915]) v. 2, p. 58-59. The authorship of Adams is affirmed by the pub- lisher Henry Holt in the Unpartizan Review, no. 29, Jan.-Mar., 1921, p. 156; and Literary Review, Dec. 24, 1920. An anonymous satiric novel on political corrup- tion in Washington and on the state of society there after the Civil War. 690. 1952. New York, Farrar, Straus & Young, 246 p. 52-3211 PZ3.A2137D12 "An attractive new edition; without editorial apparatus." — American Literature, v. 24, Jan. 1953, P- 575- 691. Esther, a novel, by Frances Snow Compton I pseud.] New York, Holt, 1884. 302 p. (American novel series, no. 3) 6-30382 PS1004.A4E8 1884 RBD New York society, the influences of art, and of religion in the contemporary life of the period arc themes developed in this novel. 692. With an introd. by Robert E. Spiller. New York, Scholars' Facsimiles & Reprints, 1938. xxv p., facsim.: 302 p. 38-18393 PZ3.A2137E8 66 J A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Facsimile of the original (1884) edition. Bibliographical note: p. xxiii-xxv. 693. Mont Saint Michel and Chartres. Washing- ton, 1904. vi, 355 p. 5-1469 DC20.A2 RBD First result of the author's plan to study forces operating in history and to relate them at two periods of time. The hundred years from 1150 to 1250 and the achievements of this century are pre- sented as an epoch when "man held the highest idea of himself as a unit in a unified universe" and when faith in the Virgin Mary operated as the greatest force felt in the Western world. 694. With an introd. by Ralph Adams Cram. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1936. xiv, 397 p. illus. 36-27246 DC20.A2 1936 A popular edition is described in Houghton Mif- flin's A Complete Catalog of Publications (Cam- bridge, Mass., 1955. p. [1]). 695. The education of Henry Adams. Washing- ton, 1907. 453 p. E175.5.A17 RBD Correlative study to Mont Saint Michel and Chartres. In it Adams' philosophy of history is developed through the device of writing an autobiography that is a commentary on the multi- plicity of forces operating in the late 19th century to bring disunity and confusion, instead of unity, in intellectual, political, social, and general cultural aspects of American life. The work shows the in- fluence on Adams of Darwin's theory of evolution and reflects his pessimism in the face of increased materialism that followed the rapid spread of in- dustrialism in the United States. 696. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1918. x, 519 p. 18-18517 E175.5.A172 "This volume, written in 1905 . . . was privately printed ... in 1906 . . . The Massachusetts His- torical Society now publishes the 'Education' as it was printed in 1907, with only such marginal cor- rections as the author made." — Editor's preface, signed: Henry Cabot Lodge. 697. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1930. 517 p. (The Riverside library) 32-23054 E175.5.A17423 698. Introd. by James Truslow Adams. New York, Modern Library, 1931. x, 517 p. (Modern Library of the world's best books) 31-30066 E175.5.A17424 699. Letters. Edited by Worthington Chauncey Ford. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1930-38. 2 v. 30-25080 E175.5.A1743 700. Selected letters. Edited with an introd. by Newton Arvin. New York, Farrar, Straus & Young, 1951. xxxiv, 279 p. (Great letters series) 51-7883 E175.5.A17433 701. GEORGE ADE, 1 866-1944 Reared in rural Indiana and later a columnist on the Chicago Record, Ade brought to his career as a writer an intimate knowledge of country life, small towns, plain citizens, and city magnates of the Middle West. His humorous fables, essays, and stories "of the streets and of the town" preserve his shrewd, realistic judgments of midwestern life at the turn of the 19th century. The use of slang and local vernacular in his writing imparts a special flavor to the social scene depicted in his work. Ade's book for the comic opera, The Sultan of Sulu, produced in 1902 and published in 1903, and a play, The College Widow, first acted in 1904 and published in 1924, were among his most successful contributions to the stage. 702. Fables in slang. Chicago, H. S. Stone, 1900. 201 p. illus. 45-26353 PS1006.A6F27 1900 RBD 703. More fables. Chicago, H. S. Stone, 1900. 218 p. illus. 0-6497 PZ3.A228MRBD 704. Stories of the streets and of the town, from the Chicago Record, 1893-1900. Edited with an introd. by Franklin J. Meine. Chicago, Caxton Club, 1941. xxx, 278 p. illus. 41-24958 PS1006.A6S7 1941 Bibliography: p. 277-278. 705. The permanent Ade; the living writings of George Ade. Edited by Fred C. Kelly. Indianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill, 1947. 347 p. 47-30391 PS1006.A6A6 1947 Includes selections from the author's fables, stories, and essays, together with Marse Covington ( c i9i8), a one-act play, and The Sultan of Sulu. 706. THOMAS BAILEY ALDRICH, 1836-1907 Aldrich wrote a classic account of New Eng- land boyhood in The Story of a Bad Boy, a humor- ous, fictional autobiography of his own youth in Portsmouth, New Hampshire. In his maturity he found an ideally congenial environment when he settled in Boston, where be became a protege of the literary group of which Longfellow was the center. There, in 1 881, he succeeded William Dean Howells as editor of The Atlantic Monthly. Although Aid- rich wrote polished verse as well as several novels and plays, his best medium was the short story. LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 67 707. The story of a bad boy. Boston, Fields, Osgood, 1870. 261 p. illus. 48-32255 PZ7.A37Su>3 RBD 708. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1923. 279 p. (Riverside bookshelf) 23-15255 PZ3.A365Stoi4 709. With an introd. by Vfictor] L. O. Chittick. New York, Macmillan, 1930. xxii, 238 p. (Modern readers' series) 30-14665 PZ7.A37Stor.4 710. New York, Pantheon Books, 1951. 232 p. illus. 51-13435 PZ7-A37Sto40 711. Marjorie Daw, and other people. Boston, J. R. Osgood, 1873. 272 p. 6-499 PZ3-A365Ma3 Contents. — Marjorie Daw. — A Rivermouth ro- mance. — Quite so. — A young desperado. — Miss Mehetabel's son. — A struggle for life. — The friend of my youth. — Mademoiselle Olympe Zabriski. — Pere Antoine's date-palm. 712. Marjorie Daw. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1908. 123 p. 8-29734 PZ3.A365Maio 713. From Ponkapog to Pesth. Boston, Hough- ton Mifflin, 1883. 267 p. 3-15938 D919.A36 A contribution to the literature of European travel that responded to America's growing in- terest in its European origins. 714. A book of songs and sonnets selected from the poems of Thomas Bailey Aldrich. [Cam- bridge] Riverside Press, 1906. 113 p. 6-17863 PS1022.R5 1906 RBD The writer's final selection of what he considered his best poems. 715. Writings. [Ponkapog ed.] Boston, Hough- ton Mifflin, 1907. 9 v. illus. 7-41488 PS1020.F07 716. JAMES LANE ALLEN, 1849-1925 Allen's works ranged from romantic sketches, short stories, and sentimental fiction to problem novels dealing with religious fundamentalism, the impact of Darwin's theory of evolution, farm life, and the confusion in social conventions and stand- ards after the Civil War. The author's belief in the intimacy of man's relation with nature pervades his writing, for which Kentucky provides the setting. His place in American literature is fully discussed in Grant C. Knight's James Lane Allen and the Genteel Tradition (Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina Press, 1935. 313 p.). 717. The blue-grass region of Kentucky, and other Kentucky articles. New York, Harper, 1892. 322 p. iRc-2635 F457.B6A4 RBD 718. The reign of law; a tale of the Kentucky hemp fields. New York, Macmillan, 1900. 385 p. illus. °~33 11 PZ3.A427R 719. The mettle of the pasture. New York, Mac- millan, 1903. 448 p. 3-15441 PS1034.M4 1903 RBD 720. New York, Grosset & Dunlap, 1912. 448 p. (Macmillan's standard library) 38-35068 PZ3.A4 721. GERTRUDE FRANKLIN (HORN) ATHERTON, 1857-1948 The history of California, including the Spanish influence on its culture, inspired Mrs. Atherton's most enduring work. Her popular novels of Amer- ican life in other localities and periods were fre- quendy sensational but also contained elements of the realism that began to develop as a trend in the fiction of the early 1900's. Adventures of a Novelist (1932) is her autobiography. 722. Senator North. New York, J. Lane, 1900. 367 p. 6-4520 PS1042.S4 1900 RBD A novel of political life in Washington and of ten- sions in relations between Negroes and whites. 723. The conqueror. New York, Macmillan, 1902. xiv, 546 p. 2-8 1 17 PZ3.A869C0 Biographical novel of which Alexander Hamilton is the hero. Currently published by J. P. Lippincott, East Washington Square, Philadelphia, Pa. 724. The conqueror; a dramatized biography of Alexander Hamilton. New York, Stokes ['1916] xii, 536 p. 18-13115 PZ3.869C05 "Twenty-fourth edition (from new plates with revisions)." 725. The splendid idle forties; stories of old Cali- fornia. New York, Macmillan, 1902. 389 p. 2-24242 PZ3.A869SP A revised and enlarged edition of a volume issued in 1894 under the title: Before the Gringo Came. 68 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 726. EDWARD BELLAMY, 1 850-1 898 Bellamy began his career as a writer when the United States was feeling the full impact of increas- ing industrialization after the Civil War. The social and economic conflicts of the period stimu- lated the thinking reflected in his novels and finally led him to imagine a remedy for inequalities among the people by postulating a state of society in which all citizens would be as free and equal in their material and cultural lives as in the political sphere where their rights were protected by the American form of government. He gave literary expression to these ideas in his Utopian romance, Looking Backward. This novel, purporting to portray a co- operative economic and social life enjoyed in Boston, Massachusetts, in the year 2000, A. D., is said to have sold nearly a million copies in the ten years follow- ing its publication. It contributed to the temporary spread of a socialist doctrine advocating the na- tionalization of all industry. In support of his ideas Bellamy became a publicist and a propa- gandist. He was also the founder and editor of a reforming journal, The New Nation (1891-94). His Selected Writings on Religion and Society has been announced as published by the Liberal Arts Press, 153 West 72d Street, New York, N. Y., in its American heritage series. 727. Dr. HeidenhofT's process. New York, Apple- ton, 1880. 140 p. (Appleton's new handy- volume series, 54) 6-1 1697 PZ3.B417D0 Early novel of the psychiatric type in which Bel- lamy introduced a fantasy that foreshadowed modern "shock" therapy currently used in some psychological disorders. 728. Looking backward, 2000-1887. Boston, Ticknor, 1888. 470 p. 6-11710 HX811 1887.B2 The sequel, Equality (1897), is considered more of a tract than a novel. 729. Boston, Houghton Mifflin [1931?] xxi, 337 p. (Riverside library) 34-10625 HX811 1887.B32 Introduction by Heywood Broun. 730. Introd. by Frederic R. White. Chicago, Packard, 1946. xxxviii, 233 p. (University classics) 46-4182 H-811 1887.B327 Selected bibliography: p. xxxvii-xxxviii. 732. AMBROSE (GWINNETT) BIERCE, 1842- 1914? After the Civil War, in which Bierce served with distinction, he settled in California. There, as a journalist writing for various weeklies, he achieved a reputation as arbiter of literary fashion on the Pacific Coast. Later, as a contributor to the San Francisco Sunday Examiner, his witty, satirical column justified the title, "Bitter Bierce." He was a devotee of the bohemian life and an apostle of a pessimism verging on nihilism. Bierce's most en- during work is found in his realistic short stories about war and in his tales of the supernatural and the horrible. These show certain kinship with the stories of Poe and Bret Harte. Paul Fatout's Ambrose Bierce, the Devil's Lexicographer (Nor- man, University of Oklahoma Press, 1951. 349 p.) supplies new details for an understanding of the author. These were derived from study of manu- scripts and other source materials. Fatout main- tains the thesis that Bierce's social satires and criti- cisms constitute his most important work. These were collected and published in book form in The Cynic's Word Boo\ (1906) and republished in 191 1 as The Devil's Dictionary. 733. Can such things be? New York, Cassell [ c i8 9 3] 320 p. 6-13103 PZ3.B479C RBD Short stories chiefly of the Civil War and the California frontier. 734. Washington, Neale Pub. Co., 1903. 320 p. 3-9331 PZ3.B479C2 735. In the midst of life; tales of soldiers and civilians. New York, Putnam, 1898. vi, 362 p. 6-13102 PZ3.B479I First published under title: Tales of Soldiers and Civilians (1891). 736. New York, Boni & Liveright, 19 18. 403 p. 35-33432 PZ3.B479I6 737. Introd. by George Sterling. New 731. With an introd. by Robert L. Shur- ter. New York, Modern Library, 195 1. xxvi, 276 p. (Modern Library college editions, T42) 51-2252 HX811 1887.B33 Bibliography: p. xxii-xxiii. York, Modern Library 1^1927] xvi, 403 p. (Modern Library of the world's best books) 27-19196 PZ3.B479I10 738. Letters. Edited by Bertha Clark Pope. With a memoir by George Sterling. San Francisco, Book Club of California, 1922. xlvii, 204 p. 23-7856 PS1097.Z5A3 1922a 739. Collected writings. With an introd. by Clif- ton Fadiman. New York, Citadel Press, 1946. xix, 810 p. 47-30068 PS1097.A1 1946 LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 69 Contents. — Ambrose Bierce: portrait of a mis- anthrope, by Clifton Fadiman. — In the midst of life, tales of soldiers and civilians. — The devil's diction- ary. — Can such things be? — Fantastic fables. — The monk and the hangman's daughter. — Negligible tales. — The parenticide club. 740. JOHN BURROUGHS, 1837-1921 Burroughs, a student of Emerson, Thoreau, and Whitman, derived from these writers ideas that influenced his own interest in the natural world. Surrounded by the beauties of the Catskill region in New York, where he lived for many years, he cultivated the habit of close observation of out-of- door life, recording his impressions in literary essays on natural history. These had a decided vogue in the United States for a number of years. Literary Values (1902) is Burroughs' contribution to critical theory respecting literature in America. It includes his essay, "Democracy in Literature." His life and achievements may be further explored through works described in the section on Biography. 741. Locusts and wild honey. Boston, Houghton, Osgood, 1879. 253 p. 5-2474 QH81.B94 1879 Contents. — The pastoral bees. — Sharp eyes. — Strawberries. — Is it going to rain? — Speckled trout. — Birds and birds. — A bed of boughs. — Birds'- nesting. — The halcyon in Canada. 742. Boston, Houghton Mifflin [ r i907J 235 p. 7-1956 QH81.B94 1907 743. Writings. [Riverby ed.J Boston, Houghton Mifflin [ c i904]-22. 23 v. NNU 744. John Burroughs' America; selections from the writings of the Hudson River naturalist. Ed- ited with an introd. by Farida A. Wiley. Foreword by Julian Burroughs. New York, Devin-Adair, 1951. 304 p. illus. 51-13897 QH81.B963 1951 745. GEORGE WASHINGTON CABLE, 1844- 1925 Cable's antiquarian knowledge of his native New Orleans supplied the source upon which he drew when in 1879-80 he brought into the literature of the South a new romantic regional element in his portrayal of Creoles in Louisiana before the Civil War. A special flavor is imparted to his early work by the use of Creole dialect. Among his less suc- cessful later writings were novels such as Dr. Sevier (1885), a story of hardships and struggles experi- enced in New Orleans during and after the Civil War, and Bonaventure (1888), which introduces descendants of the Acadians. The tragic deporta- tion of these unfortunate people from Nova Scotia to Louisiana and elsewhere previously had been celebrated by Longlellow in his Evangeline. A recent work, Twins of Genius, by Guy A. Cardwell (East Lansing, Michigan State College Press, 1953. 134 p.), compares the literary influence of Cable and Clemens, discusses their joint lecturing tour in the 1880's and reviews the association of the two writers. Letters of Mark Twain, Cable, and others are found on p. f 79 ]— 1 12. 746. Old Creole days. New York, Scribner, 1879. 229 p. 6-22271 PZ3.C11O 747. With an introd. by Lucy Leffingwell Cable Bikle. New York, Scribner, 1937. xv, 303 p. 37-10499 PZ3.C11O18 Madame Delphine (1880), added to the collection of stories in an edition of 1883, is found also in this new edition which followed eight earlier editions. Cf. Introduction, p. v. 748. Together with The scenes of Cable's romances, by Lafcadio Hearn; a prologue by Edward Larocque Tinker and illus. in color by John O'Hara Cosgrave II. New York, Limited Editions Club, 1943. xxxi, 224 p. 43-17083 PS1244.O6 1943 RBD Contents. — Jean-ah Poquelin. — 'Tite Poulette. — "Posson Jone'." — Pere Raphael. — Madame Del- phine. — Belles Demoiselles plantation. — Madame Delicieuse. — Cafe des exiles. — 'Sieur George. 749. The Grandissimes, a story of Creole life. New York, Scribner, 1880. 448 p. 43-17083 PS1244.O6 1943 RBD One section of the novel is entitled "The Story of Bras-Coupe," which is a revision of an earlier story of that title. It has been called a stronger indictment of slavery than can be found in Uncle Tom's Cabin. 750. New York, Scribner, 1916. ix, 448 p. 16-16158 PZ3.CuGno 751. George W. Cable; his life and letters, by his daughter, Lucy Leffingwell ('able Biklc. New York, Scribner, 1928. xvi, 306 p. illus. 28-24S45 PS1246.B5 Bibliography: p. 303-306. 752. Turner, A r! in. George W. Cable, a bi- ography. Durham, N. C, Duke University Press, 1956. 391 p. 46-9165 PS1246.T8 70 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 753. WILL CARLETON, 1845-1912 Carleton began writing for the periodical press when there was a vogue for sentimental vers- ifying about plain people, particularly those living on farms or in rural communities. His pieces, written in language designed to be thought colloquial, were addressed to an audience interested in folk ballads. "Over the Hills to the Poor House" is a typical example of his style. Ten or more collections of his work, issued between 1871 and 1908, won for him the reputation of being the "people's laureate" of his region in the Middle West. These volumes, including Farm Legends (1875) and City Ballads (1885), sold on a wave of popularity that lasted into the 20th century. 754. Farm ballads. New York, Harper, 1873. 108 p. 13-15969 PS1257.F3 1873 RBD 755. New ed. from new plates. New York, Harper, 1901. viii, 147 p. 1-30460 PS1257.F3 1 90 1 756. CHARLES WADDELL CHESNUTT, 1858-1932 A Negro writer best known for his short stor- ies in dialect about his race in America before and after the Civil War, Chesnutt was also the author of several novels, among them The House Behind the Cedars (1900) and The Marrow of Tradition ( 1901), works that sought to deal frankly and fairly with the problems of Negroes in contemporary society in the United States. An intimate view of the author's struggles and achievements, interspersed with his correspondence, has been supplied by his daughter, Helen M. Chesnutt, in her Charles Wad- dell Chesnutt, Pioneer of the Color Line (Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina Press, 1952. 324 p.). 757. The conjure woman. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1899. 229 p. 4-15426 PZ3.C4253C ' 'The Conjurer's Revenge' is reprinted from the Overland Monthly." Contents. — The goophered grapevine. — Po' Sandy. — Mars Jeems's nightmare. — The conjurer's revenge. — Sis' Becky's pickaninny. — The gray wolf's ha'nt. — Hot-foot Hannibal. 758. The wife of his youth, and other stories of the color line. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1899. 323 p. illus. 0-113 PZ3.C4253W 759. KATE (O'FLAHERTY) CHOPIN, 1851- 1904 Mrs. Chopin belonged to the local color school. Her themes were drawn from dramatic events re- sulting from the relations of Creoles, Negroes, and Cajuns (the last reputed to be of Acadian French descent) in remote sections of Louisiana. From long residence among these people, she knew the cadence of their speech, the landscape through which they moved, and the humor, pathos, and tragedy implicit in their daily lives. Much of Mrs. Chopin's work is said to remain uncollected, but the two volumes of short stories that exist are enough to establish her quality. A biographical, critical, and biblio- graphical study of the author is provided by Daniel S. Rankin in his Kate Chopin and Her Creole Stories (Philadelphia, University of Pennsylvania Press, 1932. 313 p.). This book was issued also as a doctoral dissertation submitted at the University of Pennsylvania. It includes reprints of selected short stories and numerous excerpts from Mrs. Chopin's miscellaneous writings. 760. Bayou folk. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1894. 313 p. 4-15082 PZ3.C456B Twenty-three short stories, including "Desiree's Baby"; "Madame Celestin's Divorce"; and "A Gen- tleman of Bayou Teche." 761. A night in Acadie. Chicago, Way & Wil- liams, 1897. 416 p. 6-20969 PS1294.C63A7 RBD Short stories. 762. WINSTON CHURCHILL, 1871-1947 Written at a time when the rise of realism was a dominant mood in American literature, Churchill's romantic historical novels glorifying the Nation's past illustrated a countercurrent to the pre- vailing trend. In his later work, however, Church- ill chose contemporary political, industrial, and re- ligious themes for his novels, as in The Inside of the Cup (1913) and The Dwelling Place of Light (1917). These failed to win the popular success achieved by his earlier books. 763. The crisis. New York, Macmillan, 1901. 522 p. illus. 1-31838 PS1297.C7 1901 RBD Concerns results of the conflict of Northern and Southern sympathies in St. Louis, Missouri, during the Civil War, and the final outcome of the struggle in the whole country. Abraham Lincoln, one of the historical characters introduced, is effectively por- trayed. LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 71 764. New York, Macmillan, 1914. ix, 522 p. illus. 16-6481 PZ3.C474Cr6 765. Edited by Walter Barnes; rev. by H[arold] Y. Moffett. New York, Macmil- lan, 1930. xxii, 750 p. illus. (New pocket classics) 30-13104 PZ}.C474Cri5 A dramatization of the novel was published earlier (New York, French, c i927. 96 p.). 766. The crossing. New York, Macmillan, 1904. 598 p. illus. 4-1 1 535 PZ3.C474CS Deals with pioneer life on the frontier in Ken- tucky and the significance of that section in relation to the Revolutionary War. 767. New York, Macmillan, 191 2. vii, 598 p. illus. 16-6482 PZ3.C474CS6 768. SAMUEL LANGHORNE CLEMENS ("MARK TWAIN"), 1835-1910 Mark Twain, without formal education after his 13th year, was first a frontier boy on the banks of the Mississippi River, then a printer's apprentice, and later a journeyman printer in the Middle West, New York, and Philadelphia. Next he became an expert pilot of steamboats plying the Mississippi. Then came an unsuccessful interlude as a prospector and speculator in Nevada, an impasse from which he escaped by becoming a journalist, first in Nevada and later in California. From these beginnings he emerged as a public lecturer of immense popularity at home and abroad, a commentator from firsthand knowledge on life in Europe and the Orient, a humorist on the grand scale, and one of the most important of the country's novelists. He lived an American saga in which provincialism and sophisti- cation, poverty and riches, failure and success were mingled. From the experiences gained in such a life he drew the substance of books that have been read scarcely less avidly in Europe and Latin America than in the United States. He used a literary style compounded of simple words, vigor- ous expressions, and colloquial language having the rhythm of speech used in what was then the Ameri- can West; and he frequently employed many local- color details, particularly those of life along the Mississippi. There was also in his work an ele- ment of sentimental romanticism, a quality which found probably its most open expression in the fictional biography, Personal Recollections of Joan of Arc (1896). In his more characteristic writing wit, irony, fun, and satire were used consciously for purposes of entertainment, and may from time to time have obscured his serious reflections on the civilization of which he was a part. He hated hypocrisy and meanness; suffering inflicted on the bodies or minds of helpless people enraged him; and the sorrowful and tragic aspects of life overwhelmed him. In the end the man usually considered the greatest exponent of the comic spirit in American literature finished his career in a mood of pessimistic naturalism. 769. The innocents abroad. Hartford, Conn., American Pub. Co., 1869. xviii, 651 p. illus. 4-28129 PS1312.A1 1869 RBD A mock-serious autobiographical account of a pilgrimage to Europe and the Holy Land; fre- quently satirizes the Old World, while proclaiming the superiority of America. A work that belongs to the author's beginning period as a writer of humorous books. 770. New York, Harper, c 1 91 1. 2V.ini. (377, 446 p.) 15-22628 PS1312.A1 191 1 Biographical criticism by Brander Matthews, p. v-xxxiii. 771. With an introd. by Albert Bigelow Paine. New York, Macmillan, 1927. xvi, 537 p. (Modern readers' series) 27-12406 PS1312.A1 1927 772. Roughing it. Hartford, Conn., American Pub. Co.; Chicago, F. G. Gilman, 1872. xviii, 591 p. illus. 6-21353 PS1318.A1 1872 RBD Saga of boom towns, silver rushes, land-grabbing, and boisterous living on the Western frontier in the early 1860's. 773. New York, Harper, 1913. 2 v. in 1. ([287, 330] p.) 28-1234 PS1318.A1 1913 774. Introd. by Rodman W. Paul. New York, Rinehart, 1953. xviii, 333 p. (Rine- hart editions, 61) 52-13058 PS1318.A1 1953 "This text is a verbatim reprint of the first sixty- one chapters of the first edition, as originally pub- lished at Hartford in 1872 . . . the present edition thus breaks off at the end of Mark Twain's western adventures . . ." Introduction, p. xvi, xvii. 775. The gilded age; a tale of to-day, by Mirk Twain (Samuel L. Clemens) and Charles Dudley Warner. Hartford, Conn., American Pub. Co., 1873. 574 p. illus. NN Satiric novel which gave the title to the period after the Civil War when political corruption and economic exploitation were recurring elements in American experience. 72 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 7 7 6. 777- Hartford, Conn., American Pub. Co., 786. 1874. 574 p. illus. 17-61 1 1 PZ3.C59G2 RBD New York, Harper, 1915. 2 v. in 1. ([320, 337] P-) 28-1683 PZ3.C59G16 With an introd. by Dixon Wecter. 778. The adventures of Tom Sawyer. Hartford, Conn., American Pub. Co.; San Francisco, A. Roman, 1876. xvi, 274 p. 34-25476 PS1306.A1 1876 RBD Classic representation of youth in the Mississippi River country during the mid-nineteenth century; the first work of the author's second and major period. 779. New York, Harper, 1903. xiii, 328 p. 4-22487 PZ3.C59Ad5 780. With an introd. by Dr. Percy Boyn- ton. New York, Harper, 1920. xxiv, 290 p. (Harper's modern classics) 20-3262 PZ3.C59Adi6 781. The text edited and with an introd. by Bernard De Voto, with a prologue, "Boy's manuscript," printed for the first time. Illustrated with drawings by Thomas Hart Benton. Cam- bridge, Mass., Printed for members of the Limited Editions Club at the University Press, 1939. xxx, 340 p. 40-5879 PS1306.A1 1939 RBD 782. The adventures of Tom Sawyer and The ad- ventures of Huckleberry Finn. New York, Modern Library, 1940. x, 591 p. (Modern Library of the world's best books) 41-5104 PZ3.C59Adv 783. The adventures of Tom Sawyer and Adven- tures of Huckleberry Finn. Introd. by Wil- liam Donahey. Chicago, Spencer Press, 1953. 191, 254 p. illus. 53—1325 PZ3.C59Ad63 Said to be an exact reprint of the first edition of each work. 784. Life on the Mississippi. Boston, J. R. Os- good, 1883. 624 p. illus. 3-25501 F353.C63RBD Reminiscences and descriptions, realistic, ironic, and romantic, of the author's experiences as a river pilot. 785. New York, Harper, 1899. Biograph- ical ed. xii, 465 p. 99-5381 F353.C636 New York, Harper, 1950. xvi, 526 p. (Harper's modern classics) 50-6261 F353.C6456 1950 787. The adventures of Huckleberry Finn (Tom Sawyer's comrade) London, Chatto & Windus, 1884. xvi, 438 p. illus. 35-20965 PS1305.A1 1884 RBD Sequel to The Adventures of Tom Sawyer; pic- aresque story of boy life in the Mississippi River region; also reflects the author's revolt from the injustice and abuse of human rights evident in race relations and class distinctions at the time. Fre- quently cited as Mark Twain's most notable book. 788. 789. 790. New York, C. L. Webster, 1885. 366 p. illus. 3 I_ 35 2 3° PZ3.C59A RBD New ed. from new plates. New York, Harper, 1896. xi, 338 p. 3-19534 PZ3.C59A4 Edited, with an introd., by Bernard De Voto. Illustrated by Thomas Hart Ben- ton. New York, Limited Editions Club, 1942. lxxvi, 396 p. 42-17247 PS1305.A1 1942 RBD 791. With introductions by Brander Mat- thews and Dixon Wecter. New York, Harper, 1948. xxv, 404 p. (Harper's modern classics) 48-2019 PZ3.C59A51 792. ■ Introd. by Lionel Trilling. New York, Rinehart, 1948. xxii, 293 p. (Rine- hart editions, n) 48-8523 PZ3.C59A52 793. Descriptive captions and introduc- tory remarks by Stanley T. Williams. New York, Dodd, Mead, 1953. vi, 312 p. illus. (Great illustrated classics) 53-9538 PZ3.C59A57 794. A Connecticut Yankee in King Arthur's court. New York, C. L. Webster, 1889. xv, 575 p. illus. 3-19531 PS1308.A1 1889 RBD The feudal society of King Arthur's Britain pro- vides the setting for the writer's portrayal of the knightly virtues of the age contrasted with its miseries. In spite of constant humorous overtones, the book embodies a serious social satire designed to show the merits of a democratic society and the defects of one based on outmoded ideas of rank and privilege in a country where class differences are emphasized. 795- New York, Harper [1925?] ix, 25-27463 PZ3.C59C08 449 P- Carried in Harper's current list. LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 73 796. — With an introd. by Carl Van Doren. 806. Illustrated by Honore Guilbeau. New York, Heritage Press, 1948. vii, 269 p. 49-1558 PS1308.A1 1948 797. New York, Modern Library [ 1949, c i9i7] vi, 450 p. (Modern Library of the world's best books) 49-9037 PZ3.C59C017 798. The man that corrupted Hadleyburg, and other stories and essays. New York, Harper [1900] 398 p. 13-9365 PS1322.M25 1900 RBD Contents. — The man that corrupted Hadley- burg. — My debut as a literary person. — From the "London Times" of 1904. — At the appetite-cure. — My first lie, and how I got out of it. — Is he living or is he dead? — The Esquimau maiden's romance. — How to tell a story. — About play-acting. — Concern- ing the Jews. — Stirring them in Austria. — The Aus- trian Edison keeping school again. — Travelling with a reformer. — Private history of the "Jumping frog" story. — My boyhood dreams. The story that gives the name to the collection is a typical expression of the author's last, or natural- istic, period. 799- New York, Harper, 19 17. 364 p. 28-1680 PZ3.C59M9 800. Mark Twain's letters, arr. with comment, by Albert Bigelow Paine. New York, Harper, 1917. 2 v. ([856] p.) illus. 17-30756 PS 1 33 1. A3 1 917 801. The love letters of Mark Twain. Edited and with an introd. by Dixon Wecter. New York, Harper, 1949. 374 p. 49-1 171 1 PS1331.A3C6 Letters to Olivia Langdon Clemens, written be- tween 1868 and 1904. 802. Mark Twain to Mrs. Fairbanks. Edited by Dixon Wecter. San Marino, Calif., Hunting- ton Library, 1949. xxx, 286 p. (Huntington Library publications) 49-9860 PS1331.A3F3 Bibliographical footnotes are supplied with the letters. 803. Writings. Author's national ed. New York, Harper, 1869-1909. 25 v. Aio-453 OCi 804. Autograph ed. Hartford, Conn., American Pub. Co. [1899-1900] 22 v. 0-2689 PS1300.E99 805. [Author's national ed.] New York, Harper, 1899-1910. 25 v. NN 807. [Underwood ed.] Hartford, Conn., American Pub. Co. [1901-07] 25 v. 8-20712 PZ3.C592 [Author's national cd. New York, Harper, 1907-18] 25 v.* 20-19321 PZ3.C596 808. New York, G. Wells, 1922-25. 37 v. CtY Definitive edition. Introductions signed: Albert Bigelow Paine. 809. Mark Twain's works. New York, Harper, 1933. 29 v. in 23. MiU 810. Representative selections, with introd. and bibliography by Fred Lewis Pattee. New York, American Book Co., 1935. lxiii, 459 p. (American writers series) 35-9143 PS1303.P35 Selected bibliography: p. liii-lxi. 811. The favorite works of Mark Twain. Deluxe ed. [rev.] New York, Garden City Pub. Co., 1939. xxiv, 1 1 78 p. 39-27117 PS1302.G3 Includes complete texts of Life on the Mississippi, The Adventures of Tom Sawyer, The Adventures of Huckleberry Finn, and A Connecticut Yankee at King Arthur's Court. Various excerpts are added from other works. The text is specially edited from The Family Mar\ Twain, published by Harper. 812. The portable Mark Twain. Edited by Bernard De Voto. New York, Viking Press. 1946. vii, 786 p. (Viking portable library) 46-6686 PS1302.D4 Continuing interest in Mark Twain's contribution to American literature has been made evident in recent years by studies that include the following: 813. Allen, Jerry. The adventures of Mark Twain. Boston, Little, Brown, 1954. 359 p. illus. 54^° 8 73 PS1331.A7 [954 Designed as a biographical introduction for the general reader; includes some fictional treatment of factual material. 814. Andrews, Kenneth R. Nook Farm, M.irk Twain's Hartford circle. Cambridge, Har- vard University Press, 1950. xii, 288 p. illus. 50-9751 PS 1 334. A6 Bibliography: p. [27i]-28o. 74 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 815. Bellamy, Gladys C. Mark Twain as a lit- erary artist. Norman, University of Okla- homa Press, 1950. xiii, 396 p. illus. 50-4775 PS1338.B4 Bibliography: p. 377-382. 816. Branch, Edgar M. The literary apprentice- ship of Mark Twain, with selections from his apprentice writing. Urbana, University of Illinois Press, 1950. xiv, 325 p. 50-7851 PS1332.B7 Bibliographical references included in "Notes" (p. 271-302). 817. Canby, Henry Seidel. Turn west, turn east: Mark Twain and Henry James. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1951. xii, 318 p. 51-14000 PS1331.C25 Bibliography: p. 301-303. 818. De Voto, Bernard. Mark Twain's America. Cambridge, Houghton Mifflin, 1951 [ c i932] xvi, 351 p. illus. 51-6160 PS1331.D4 1951 Bibliography: p. [323H39. Republication of a work that, in treating of Mark Twain's environment before he came East, also pro- vides a view of the frontier as a primary element in American cultural history. 819. Scott, Arthur L., ed. Mark Twain, selected criticism. Edited with an introd. Dallas, Southern Methodist University Press [1955] xii, 289 p. 55-12080 PS1331.S3 "Guide to Mark Twain bibliographies": p. 286- 289. Bibliographical footnotes. Includes thirty-four critical articles published in English between 1867 and 1951. For articles in foreign languages the reader is referred to Roger As- selineau's The Literary Reputation of Mar\ Twain from igio to 1950 (Paris, Librairie Marcel Didier, 1954. 242 p.). 820. Wecter, Dixon. Sam Clemens of Hannibal. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1952. ix, 335 p. 52-5258 PS1332.W4 Bibliography: p. 317-322. Posthumous publication of the completed portion of a biography planned to be definitive; written by the third editor of the Mark Twain Estate. Covers ancestry, early family life, and youth up to age eighteen in Hannibal, Missouri; hence deals with the places and the period from which Clemens later drew the inspiration for his best work. 821. STEPHEN CRANE, 1871-1900 In a period when gentility and the happy ending were particularly popular among American readers, Crane was decidedly an innovator when he wrote a short novel having a prostitute as the heroine. However, not until the publication of his Civil War novel, The Red Badge of Courage, which portrayed the realities of the battlefield as faithfully in words as Mathew B. Brady did in photographs, was his reputation established as an initiator of realism in American literature. He was a prolific and uneven writer of short stories as well as novels and of poems that in the absence of conventional rhymes may be called free verse. Irony and naturalism were present in his best work, and his themes frequently dealt with suffering, mutilation, terror, and death. Various writers in America whom he is said to have influenced include Willa Cather, Ernest Hemingway, Theodore Dreiser, and F. Scott Fitzgerald. A recent biographical and critical study of Crane is provided by John Berry- man's Stephen Crane (New York, Sloane, 1950, xv, 347 p. American men of letters series). 822. Maggie, a girl of the streets, by Johnston Smith [pseud.] [New York, Priv. print., 1893] 163 p. CtY 823. New York, Appleton, 1896. vi, 158 p. 6-30866 PZ3.C852M RBD Second edition revised by the author. 824. Together with George's mother [1896] and "The blue hotel" [1899] w "h an introd. by Henry Hazlitt. New York, Knopf, 1931. xi, 218 p. 31-28140 PZ3.C852Mag 825. The red badge of courage; an episode of the American Civil War. New York, Appleton, 1895 [ c i8 94 ] 233 p. 49-36615 PS1449.C85R3 1895 RBD 826. New ed., with port, and pref. New York, Appleton, 1900. x, 233 p. 0-3652 PZ3.C852R2 Preface contains biographical notice. 827. Illustrated by John Steuart Curry, with an introd. by Carl Van Doren. New York, Heritage Press, 1944. xiii, 170 p. 44-6216 PS1449.C85R3 828. Introd. by Robert Wooster Stallman. New York, Modern Library, 195 1. xlv, 266 p. (Modern Library college editions, T45) 51-2278 PZ3.C852R12 Bibliography: p. xlii-xlv. 829. Edited and introduced by John T. Winterich. With Civil War photographs LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 75 [taken by Mathew B. Brady] London, Folio So- ciety [1951] 159 p. 52-2542 PZ3.C852R14 "The present edition of The Red Badge of Cour- age contains material from the original manuscript which has never appeared in print before." — "A Note on this Edition," p. 21. 830. The open boat, and other tales of adventure. New York, Doubleday & McClure, 1889. 336 p. 6-30865 PZ3.C8520 RBD 831. War is kind. Drawings by W. Bradley. New York, Stokes, 1899. 96 p. 99-1667 PS1449.C85 Poems. 832. Works. Edited by Wilson Follett. New York, Knopf ['1925-26] 12 v. 25-25565 PS1449.C85 1925 RBD Introductions by Amy Lowell, Willa Cather, Henry L. Mencken, Sherwood Anderson, and others. 833. Collected poems. Edited by Wilson Follett. New York, Knopf, 1930. 132 p. 30-9605 PS1449.C85A17 1930 834. Twenty stories. Selected, with an introd., by Carl Van Doren. New York, Knopf, 1940. xvii, 507 p. 40-30097 PZ3.C852TW Notes: p. 501-507. 835. Selected prose and poetry. Edited with an introd. by William M. Gibson. New York, Rinehart, 1950. xix, 230 p. (Rinehart editions, 47) 50-1071 1 PS1449.C85A6 1950 "Textual and bibliographical note": p. xvii. Includes among other selections Maggie, "The Bride Comes to Yellow Sky" (1898), "The Mon- ster" (1899), and poems from The Blacf^ Riders (1895), War Is Kind (1899), and "Three Poems" from Collected Poems (1930). Another Rinehart collection is announced for fu- ture publication: The Red Badge of Courage and Selected Prose and Poetry. 836. Stephen Crane: an omnibus. Edited, with introd. and notes, by Robert Wooster Stall- man. New York, Knopf, 1952. xlv, 703 p. 52-6416 PS1449.C85A6 1952 Bibliography: p. 697-703. Brings together texts of the novels, Maggie, George's Mother, and The Red Badge of Courage; ten short stories; sixteen poems; and fifty-seven new letters accompanied by reprints of various letters pre- viously published. Crane's contribution to journal- ism is represented by four articles. Cf. Editor's Foreword, p. vii. 837. Stories and tales. Edited by Robert Wooster Stallman. New York, Vintage Books, 1955. xxxii, 350 p. (A Vintage book, K-10) 55-159 PZ3.C852St Bibliography: p. 347-350. Includes Maggie and George's Mother in addition to selected short stories. 838. EMILY DICKINSON, 1830-1886 Emily Dickinson lived out her 56 years of life in the college town of Amherst, Massachusetts, where she grew to maturity under the domination of a father who came from a New England family of Calvinistic convictions. By the age of 36 Miss Dickinson had achieved a withdrawal from the world that culminated in a life of complete retire- ment within the family home and grounds. In this seclusion of her physical person her mind and imagination were extremely active, with the result that hundreds of brief lyrics on love, death, nature, and God, as well as many letters, poured from her pen. These reveal an intense inner life that con- tinues to challenge interest and arouse speculation on the part of numerous critics. Her poems are highly original, often cryptic, sometimes gay, and frequently witty. In them economy in the use of words is carried to the point of frugality. They are characterized by a strong metaphysical interest, daring metaphors, imagery, conceits, and by much irregularity in meter and rhyme. Hers was a poetic voice as new when her poems began to be published posthumously as Whitman's had been when Leaves of Grass appeared in 1855. 839. Poems [first series] Edited by two of her friends, Mabel Loomis Todd and T. W. Higginson. Boston, Roberts, 1890. xii. 152 p. 3-18785 PS1541.P6 1890 RBD 840. Poems, second series. Edited by two of her friends, T. W. Higginson and Mabel Loomis Todd. Boston, Roberts, 1 891. 230 p. 3-18788 PS1541.P62 1891 RBD 841. Poems, third series. Edited by Mabel Loomis Todd. Boston, Roberts, 1896. vii, 200 p. 3-18787 PS1541.P63 1896 RBD 842. Poems. Edited by Martha Dickinson Bianchi and Alfred Leete Hampson; introd. by Alfred Leete Hampson. Boston, Little, Brown, 1937. x '> 484 p. 37- 2 949 PS1541.A1 1937 "In the present edition all the poems of the pre- ceding collections of poems are included in a single volume." — Introduction, p. x. j6 J A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 843. Bolts of melody; new poems. Edited by Mabel Loomis Todd and Millicent Todd Bingham. New York, Harper, 1945. xxix, 352 p. 45-35045 PS1541.A137 844. Selected poems. With an introd. by Conrad Aiken. New York, Modern Library, 1948. xvi, 231 p. (Modern Library of the world's best books [25]) 48-9350 PS1541.A6 1948a Selected Poems, edited by Conrad Aiken, was published in London by J. Cape, 1924, in 272 p. 845. Poems. Selected and edited with a com- mentary by Louis Untermeyer. Illustrated by Helen Sewell. New York, Heritage Press, 1952. xxviii, 284 p. (American poets) 53-1806 PS1541.A6 1952a Based on the Limited Editions Club edition of the same year. 846. Poems; including variant readings critically compared with all known manuscripts. Edited by Thomas H. Johnson. Cambridge, Bel- knap Press of Harvard University Press, 1955. 3 v. (lxviii, 1266 p.) facsims. 54-8631 PS1541.A1 1955 Inclusive scholars' edition of the poet's complete poetical work. In an extensive introduction the editor discusses historical and stylistic developments found in the poems. Editions of the poems before Bolts of Melody failed to set accuracy of the text as a primary consideration. 847. Letters. Edited by Mabel Loomis Todd. Boston, Roberts, 1894. 2 v. illus. 24-22101 PS1541.Z5A3 Includes 102 additional poems or parts of poems. 848. New and enl. ed. Edited by Mabel Loomis Todd. New York, Harper, 1931. xxxi, 457 p. illus. 31-32229. PS 1 54 1. Z5 A3 1 93 1 ten years by the availability of various new critical and biographical studies, which include the following: 851. Bingham, Millicent (Todd). Ancestors' bro- cades; the literary debut of Emily Dickinson, New York, Harper, 1945. xiii, 464 p. illus. 45~35°4 2 PS1541.Z5B53 "Early Reviews of Books by Emily Dickinson, 1890-1896": p. 406-411. "Books by Emily Dickin- son, a Partial List of Editions of Books Brought Out by Mabel Loomis Todd and Thomas Went- worth Higginson": p. 412-415. Includes an im- portant analysis of difficulties to be faced in pre- paring a definitive edition of the poems. 852. Bingham, Millicent (Todd). Emily Dickin- son, a revelation. New York, Harper, 1954. 109 p. illus. 54-12227 PS1541.Z5B54 Includes some unpublished letters, and some late poems by Emily Dickinson. On the basis of this material, supplemented by extensive research, the writer identifies the last great love of Emily's life as her father's friend, Otis Phillips Lord, a prominent judge in Massachusetts. 853. Bingham, Millicent (Todd). Emily Dickin son's home; letters of Edward Dickinson [Emily's father] and his family. With documenta- tion and comment by Millicent Todd Bingham. New York, Harper, 1955. xvii, 600 p. illus. 55-6573 PS1541.Z5B543 Includes bibliographies. 854. Chase, Richard V. Emily Dickinson. New York, Sloane, 1951. xii, 328 p. (The Amer- ican men of letters series) 51-14929 PS1541.Z5C5 "Bibliographical note": p. 313-317. 855. Johnson, Thomas H. Emily Dickinson: an interpretive biography. Cambridge, Belknap Press of Harvard University Press, 1955. 276 p, illus. 55-9439 PS1541.Z5J6 849. — an introd. by Mark Van Doren. Cleveland World Pub. Co., 1951. xxiv, 389 p. illus. 51-9898 PS1541.Z5A3 1951 850. Letters to Dr. and Mrs. Josiah Gilbert Hol- land. Edited by their granddaughter, Theo- dora Van Wagenen Ward. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1951. vii, 252 p. illus. 51-10236 PS1541.Z5A36 Understanding of Emily Dickinson's life and art has been greatly broadened in the past Edited by Mabel Loomis Todd, with 856. PAUL LAURENCE DUNBAR, 1872-1906 Dunbar, born in Ohio to parents who had formerly been slaves, owes his significance in Ameri- can literature chiefly to his poems and short stories in Negro dialect. In the majority of these he memorialized the humor and also the pathos of the old-fashioned plantation Negro, giving his themes the idealization used by various other writers, and particularly by Thomas Nelson Page. Dunbar also wrote traditional romantic poems in conventional English and novels, such as The Sport of the Gods (1902). LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 77 857. Lyrics of lowly life. With an introd. by W. D. Howells. New York, Dodd, Mead, 1896. xx, 208 p. 4-13820 PS1556.L6 1896 858. Lyrics of the hearthside. New York, Dodd, Mead, 1899. x, 227 p. 99-1025 PS1556.L7 1899 859. Life and works; containing his complete poetical works, his best short stories, numer- ous anecdotes, and a complete biography of the famous poet. By Lida Keck Wiggins, and an introd. by William Dean Howells. Naperville, 111., Memphis, Tenn., J. L. Nichols ['1907] 430 p. illus. 7-13414 PS1557.W5 860. Best stories. Selected and edited with an introd. by Benjamin Brawley. New York, Dodd, Mead, 1938. xvii, 258 p. 38-5603 PZ3.D9iiBe Selections are taken from the following collections of short stories: Folt^s from Dixie (1898); The Strength of Gideon (1900); In Old Plantation Days ( 1903) ; and The Heart of Happy Hollow ( 1904). 861. Complete poems. With the introd. to Lyrics of lowly life by W. D. Howells. New York, Dodd, Mead, 1940. xxxii, 289 p. 40-34708 PS1556.A1 1940 Previously issued in 1913. 862. FINLEY PETER DUNNE ("MR. DOOLEY"), 1867-1936 Dunne, a Chicago newspaper reporter and later an editor, created a crackerbox philosopher, "Mr. Dooley," who, speaking in the brogue of Irish im- migrants, became the author's medium for express- ing his own serious views on social, political, and foreign affairs. The essays were enormously popu- lar, first as newspaper columns and later in the form of books. "Josh Billings," "Artemus Ward," and Will Rogers are representative figures in the tradi- tion of American writing to which Dunne belonged. 863. Mr. Dooley in peace and in war. Boston, Small, Maynard, 1898. xviii, 260 p. 98-1501 PN6161.D82 1898 864. Mr. Dooley in the hearts of his countrymen. Boston, Small, Maynard, 1899. xi, 285 p. 99-5065 PN6161.D825 865. Mr. Dooley at his best. Edited by Elmer Ellis; with foreword by Franklin P. Adams. New York, Scrfibner, 1938. xxvi, 291 p. 38-27991 PN6161.D818 866. Mr. Dooley: now and forever, created by Fin- ley Peter Dunne. Selected, with commentary and introd. by Louis Filler. Stanford, Calif., Aca- demic Reprints, 1954. xv, 298 p. (American cul- ture and economics series, no. 4) 54-12399 PN6161.D817 Includes material from the 1898, 1899 publications cited above, and also from What Dooley Says (1898); Mr. Dooley s Philosophy (1900); Mr. Dooley' s Opinions (1901); Observations by Mr. Dooley (1902); Dissertations by Mr. Dooley (1906); and Mr. Dooley Says (1910). 867. EDWARD EGGLESTON, 1837-1902 Eggleston, largely a self-educated man, was a Methodist clergyman, an editor, and a historian as well as a novelist. He was inspired to apply to the writing of fiction the idea that a good artist paints subjects chosen from his own environment. His birth and early years in the Middle West had made him familiar with Southern Ohio, Indiana, and Illinois, and with the "Hoosier" dialect used there in the early part of the 19th century; conse- quently it was to this part of the country that he turned for his material. His novels and stories, once popular, suffer from melodramatic plots, poor characterization, forced humor, and sentimentality. Historically, however, they give early evidence of the trends in American literature after the Civil War towards increasing interest in the speech and social conditions of common men, in realistic rather than romantic themes, and in the local color of regions remote from the older centers of culture in the East. 868. The Hoosier schoolmaster. New York, Orange Judd [ c i87i] 226 p. 3-19544 PS1582.H62 1871 RBD Title varies: The Hoosier Schoolmaster; a Novel; The Hoosier Schoolmaster; a Story of Backwoods Life in Indiana. 869. New and rev. ed. New York, Orange Judd, 1893. 218 p. illus. 3-19546 PZ3.E29H8 870. Rev. with an introd. and notes . . . by the author. New York, Grosset & Dun- lap ['1913] 281 p. 40-152 PZ3.E29H8 871 With an introd. by Emory Hollo- way. New York, Macmillan, 1928. xxviii, 203 p. (Modern readers' series) 28-25351 PZ3.E29H15 J$ / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 872. The circuit rider. New York, J. B. Ford, 1874. 332 p. 6-37566 PZ3.E29C 873. New York, Scribner, 1902. 332 p. 2-1 1 134 PZ3.E29C7 874. Roxy. New York, Scribner, 1878. viii, 432 p. 4-22067 PZ3.E29R 875. New York, Scribner, 1906. viii, 432 p. 6-27714 PZ3.E29R2 876. The Graysons; a story of Illinois. New York, Century [1888] 362 p. illus. 4-15098 PS1582.G7 1888 RBD Includes a courtroom scene in which Abraham Lincoln, as counsel for the defense, plays a leading part. 877. The Graysons; a story of Abraham Lincoln. New York, Century, 19 18 ["1915] 362 p. illus. 53-49456 PS1582.G7 1918 RBD Published also under title: The Graysons; a Story of Illinois. 878. EUGENE FIELD, 1850-1895 From 1883 to 1895 Field pioneered in a new type of newspaper column, which he called "Sharps and Flats." It appeared regularly in the Chicago Morning News (afterwards called the Chicago Rec- ord). Sometimes written in real or manufactured dialect and slang, the column was a melange of jokes, gossip about persons or events, idealistic short stories, lullabies, parodies, familiar verses particu- larly for or about children, political sarcasm, and miscellaneous humorous pieces. It is said that most of what he published in book form, as for example A Little Boo^ of Western Verse (1889) and A Little Boo\ of Profitable Tales (1889), had appeared first in his column. He is remembered particularly for his innovations in journalistic literature and for the appeal his verses had to the taste of his period, a time when James Whitcomb Riley also attracted a large audience. 879. Poems. Complete ed. New York, Scribner, 1915. xii, 553 p. 16-6502 PS1665.A2 1915 880. Writings in prose and verse. New York, Scribner, 1898-1901. 12 v. illus. 32-2826 PS1665.A2 1898 "Eugene Field; a Memory," by Roswell Martin Field, v. 1, p. ix-xlvii. Vols. 1-10, 1898; v. 11-12, 1901. Introductions by Joel Chandler Harris, Edward Everett Hale, and others. Reissued by Scribner in 191 1. 881. MARY E. (WILKINS) FREEMAN, 1852- 1930 The name of Mrs. Freeman, a writer whose early and most successful short stories are set in rural New England, is frequently linked with the names of Harriet Beecher Stowe and Sarah Orne Jewett as belonging to the school of local color writing about that region. However, her own objectivity, econ- omy, and force applied to the delineation of her characters, their environment, and the society of which they were a part constitute her individual con- tribution to the realistic American dialect story of the late 19th century. Mrs. Freeman's stories, con- cerned chiefly with frustration and repression in provincial Massachusetts circles, forcefully convey her own view of life as essentially tragic. 882. A humble romance, and other stories. New York, Harper, 1887. iv, 436 p. 1-2478 PZ3.F88HU Twenty-eight short stories. 883. A New England nun, and other stories. New York, Harper, 1891. iv, 468 p. 4-15 108 PZ3.F88N Twenty-four short stories. 884. With an introd. by Professor Fred Lewis Pattee. New York, Harper [ c i92o] xxvi, 468 p. (Harper's modern classics) 20-18608 PZ3.F88N6 885. Edgewater people. New York, Harper [ c i9i8] 314 p. 18-21528 PZ3.F88Ed PS1712.E4 Includes twelve short stories. 886. Best stories. Selected and with an introd. by Henry Wysham Lanier. New York, Har- per, 1927. xi, 465 p. 27-5840 PZ3.F88Be 887. HENRY BLAKE FULLER, 1857-1929 A Chicago banker, journalist, and novelist, Fuller wrote at a time when Chicago was going through a period of rapid social change, marked by expansion, material wealth, social ambition, and municipal corruption. Fuller knew this life so in- timately that it naturally provided the material for his novels and short stories. These were written in the tradition of realism associated with the work of William Dean Howells, lacking as they did the LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 79 naturalistic view of American society later de- veloped by Theodore Dreiser. In another and dif- ferent mood Fuller reacted to a number of trips abroad by writing various volumes that record his enjoyment of Europe, among them The Chevalier oj Pensieri-Vani (1890), a gently humorous book, half fact, half fancy, about experiences in Italy. 888. The cliff-dwellers, a novel. New York, Harper, 1893. 324 p. illus. 6-44578 PZ3.F957CI 889. With the procession, a novel. New York, Harper, 1895. 33^ P- 6-44576 PZ3.F957Wi 890. HAMLIN GARLAND, i860- 1940 After a boyhood devoted to a man's labor on family farms in Wisconsin, Iowa, and Dakota Ter- ritory, Garland went as a young man to Boston. There he came under the influence of William Dean Howells and imbibed the latter's theories of literary realism. Garland, however, soon went beyond his preceptor's position by evolving his own literary theory. This he called "veritism." Its principal tenets included: a national American literature purged of imitations of older literatures; realism faithful not merely to facts but to the writer's im- pressions of truth underlying the facts; themes drawn from the author's own experiences, whether agreeable or not; and local color dependent upon intimate knowledge of the place or region depicted. In the best of Garland's work he remained true to these principles. His short stories of farm life in the Middle West, often grim but also powerful, con- tributed to the marked success of the short story as a literary form at the end of the 19th century. A series of autobiographical works, dealing with the Middle Border in relation to his own family, chronicles the influence of the frontier on three gen- erations of middle-class Americans. 891. Main-traveled roads; six Mississippi Valley stories. Boston, Arena Pub. Co., i8qi. 260 p. 17-26999 PS1732.M3 1891 RBD 892. New ed., with additional stories. New York, Macmillan, 1899. ix, 299 p. 99-4062 PZ3.G18M4 893. Sunset ed. New York, Harper [1909?] 299 p. ^-5047 PZ3.G18M5 Contents. — Introduction by W. D. Howells. — A branch road. — Up the coolly. — Among the corn- rows. — The return of a private. — Under the lion's paw. — The creamery man. — A day's pleasure. — Mrs. Ripley's trip.— Uncle Ethan Ripley. 894. With illus. by Constance Garland. New York, Harper, 1930. 406 p. 30-28187 PZ3.G18M10 Includes six additional stories. 895. Edited with an introd. by Thomas A. Bledsoe. New York, Rinehart, 1954. 185 p. (Rinehart editions, 66) 54-5867 PZ3.G18M13 896. Crumbling idols; twelve essays on art, deal- ing chiefly with literature, painting and the drama. Chicago, Stone & Kimball, 1894. ix, 192 p. 27-20780 PS1732.C7 1894 Contents. — Provincialism. — New fields. — The question of success. — Literary prophecy. — Local color in art. — The local novel. — The drift of the drama. — The influence of Ibsen. — Impressionism. — Literary centres. — Literary masters. — A recapitula- tory afterword. 897. With an introd. by Robert E. Spiller. Gainesville, Fla., Scholars' Facsimiles & Re- prints, 1952. viii, 192 p. 52-9716 PS1732.C7 1952 898. A son of the Middle Border. New York, Macmillan, 1917. 467 p. illus. 17-22272 PS1733.A4 Second in a series, in point of chronology, the first being The Trail-Makers oj the Middle Border ( 1926) ; the third, A Daughter oj the Middle Border (1921, Pulitzer Prize, 1922); and the fourth Back^- Trailers from the Middle Border (1928). Currendy reprinted by the same publisher. 899. New York, Grosset & Dunlap, 1928, c i9i7. v, 466 p. 48-3577 8 PS1733.A47 1928 900. EDWARD EVERETT HALE, 1 822-1 909 Hale was a Unitarian clergyman of distin- guished New England ancestry and connections, whose long life was spent in or near Boston. His voluminous writings, which included essays, ad- dresses, short stories, novels, sermons, books of travel, and other literary forms, reveal his cathol it- interest in miscellaneous fields — literature, history, antiquities, government, the opening of the Middle West, European culture, and practical ethics, anion'; others. His works arc now significant chiefly as records of the mind and character of a man widely known and appreciated in his time and place. 901. The man without a country. Boston, Tick nor & Fields, 1865. 23 p. 15-3174 PS1772.M3 1865 RBD 80 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Published first in The Atlantic Monthly, Dec. 1863, to combat Northern or "Copperhead" sym- pathy with the Confederacy during the Civil War and to inspire patriotism in a united nation, the story has been republished frequently, both sepa- rately and in short story collections. 902. [Limited ed.] Boston, J. S. Smith [ c i8q7] xx, 59 p. 6-46184 PZ3.H13M6 Includes author's account of the background and circumstances of the writing and publication of the story, and of its subsequent history. 9°3- New ed. With an introd. in the year of the war with Spain. Boston, Little, Brown, 1898. xxxii, 59 p. 98-238 PZ3.H13M7 904. New ed., with an introd. in the year of the war with Spain. Boston, Little, Brown, 1923. xxxii, 59 p. 27-7343 PZ3.H13M30 905. With an introd. by Carl Van Doren and illus. by Edward A. Wilson. New York, Limited Editions Club, 1936. x, 55 p. 36-18845 PS1772.M3 1936 RBD 906. A New England boyhood. New York, Cas- sell [1893] xxv, 267 p. illus. 4-16961 F73.44.H15 Describes a Boston boyhood before the middle of the 19th century, giving details of a happy home life, social and religious experiences, the reading of the New England children at the time, and student life at Harvard. 907. A new ed. With foreword by Edwin D. Mead. Boston, Little, Brown, 1927. xxxii, 208 p. illus. 27-19168 PS1773.A2 1927 908. Works. Library ed. [Boston, Litde, Brown, 1898-1901] 10 v. 99-5408 PS1770.A2 1898 909. The man without a country, and other stories. Edited with introd. and notes by Samuel Marion Tucker. New York, Macmillan, 1910. xxviii, 200 p. ([Macmillan's pocket Amer- ican and English classics]) 10-22723 PZ3.H13M25 910. JOEL CHANDLER HARRIS, 1848-1908 Harris' position as an author derives from his contribution to Negro folk literature in America, typified by the Uncle Remus stories and rhymes first published in the Atlanta Constitution, a news- paper with which Harris was associated from 1876 to 1900. The first collected edition was received enthusiastically, not only in the South but also in the North, where it gave evidence of the vitality of Southern literature after limitations imposed on it by the Civil War. This and successive collections made their appeal through their modern treatment of animal mythology as well as through their gentle humor, plantation Negro dialect, and popular phi- losophy. The stories Harris wrote about moun- taineers, freed Negroes, and poor whites in his native Georgia, while less well-known than the Uncle Remus stories, have an authentic local color and a democratic realism that differ sharply and with salu- tary effect from Thomas Nelson Page and George William Bagby's romantic glorification of Southern plantation life before the Civil War. For useful data on Harris' life and contributions see Stella Brewer Brooke's Joel Chandler Harris, Volhlorist ( Athens, University of Georgia Press, 1950. 1 82 p.) . 911. Uncle Remus, his songs and his sayings. New York, Appleton, 1881. 231 p. illus. 7-2896 PZ3.H2 4 2Un3 Described as "the folk-lore of the old plantation." First published in 1880. Contents. — Legends of the old plantation. — Plantation proverbs. — His songs. — A story of the war. — His sayings. 912. New and rev. ed., with one hundred and twelve illust. by A. B. Frost. New York, Appleton, 1895. xxi, 265 p. 7-2897 PZ3.H242Un3 913. New and rev. ed., with 112 illus. by A. B. Frost. New York, Appleton-Century, 1947. xxi, 270 p. 47-5732 PZ7.H242Un40 Based on the author's revision of 1895. 914. Nights with Uncle Remus. Boston, J. R. Osgood, 1883. xxxvi, 416 p. illus. 8-23921 PZ3.H242N Subtitle: Myths and legends of the old plantation. 915. 22d ed. Boston, Houghton Mifflin ["1883] xxxvi, 416 p. illus. 42-26420 PZ3.H242N2 916. With illus. by Milo Winter. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1917. viii, 338 p. 17-25512 PZ3.H242N4 917. Mingo, and other sketches in black and white. Boston, J. R. Osgood, 1884. 273 p. 12-32982 PZ3.H242M1 Contents. — Mingo: a sketch of life in middle Georgia. — At Teague Poteet's: a sketch of the Hog Mountain range. — Blue Dave. — A piece of land. LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 8l 918. 919. 7th ed. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1898. 273 p. OOxM New York, Mckinlay, Stone & Mac- kenzie ['1912] 273 p. (The booklovers ed.) ViU 920. Free Joe, and other Georgia sketches. New York, Scribner, 1887. 236 p. 7-3663 PZ3.H242F Contents. — Free Joe. — Little Compton. — Aunt Fountain's prisoner. — Trouble on Lost Mountain. — Azalia. 921. New York, Scribner, 1906. 236 p. NN 922. Uncle Remus and his friends; old plantation stories, songs, and ballads, with sketches of Negro character. Illustrated by A. B. Frost. Bos- ton, Houghton Mifflin, 1892. xv, 357 p. 7-2895 PZ7.H242Unh3 923. Joel Chandler Harris: editor and essayist. Edited by Julia Collier Harris. Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina Press, 1931. 429 p. 31-31655 PS 1 80 1. H3 Comprises miscellaneous literary, political, and social writings. 924. The favorite Uncle Remus. Illustrated by A. B. Frost. Selected, arr. & edited by George Van Santvoord and Archibald C. Coolidge. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1948. viii, 310 p. 48-1944 PZ7.H242Fav Published in celebration of the centenary of the author's birth. This is one of many reprints of selections made available from time to time. 925. The complete tales of Uncle Remus. Com- piled by Richard Chase. With illus. by Arthur Burdette Frost [and others] Boston, Hough- ton Mifflin, 1955. xxxii, 875 p. 54-12233 PZ7.H242C0 "The tales in this edition have been left as Mr. Harris wrote them. Our concern has been with the folktales only, and not with the songs, rhymed versions of the tales, proverbs, and character sketches . . ." Foreword, p. xiii. 926. (FRANCIS) BRET HARTE, 1 836-1902 Journalist, parodist, poet, literary critic, and finally literary hack, Harte has been called the father of the local color movement in American literature and the originator of a new genre in short story writing, whose influence may be traced in the 431240—60 7 work of such dissimilar writers as Mark Twain, Ambrose Bierce, and O. Henry. Departing from the genteel tradition so long dominant in the litera- ture produced in New England, he took as his province the rough life of the frontier after it had advanced to California under the impetus provided by the discovery of gold in that region in 1848. His characters were for the most part miners, gam- blers, rascals, and adventurers of all kinds. These men and women he brought to life with a certain romantic, sentimental glow for sophisticated audi- ences in the East and abroad, who immediately made his work the literary fashion of the 1870*5. While he remained a good craftsman, his repeated use of his original themes dulled the appetite for the work he continued to turn out until he died. 927. The Luck of Roaring Camp, and other sketches. Boston, Houghton Mifflin [1869] 256 p. (The Riverside library) NcD 928. 929. Boston, Fields, Osgood, 1870. 239 p. PS1827.A1 1870 RBD Boston, J. R. Osgood, 1871. 256 p. 25-28034 PS1827.A1 1871 RBD 930. The Luck of Roaring Camp, and other stories. [3d ed.] Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1886. 279 p. (The Riverside Aldine series) 3-26184 PZ3.H252L13 Contents. — The luck of Roaring Camp. — M'liss. — The outcasts of Poker Flat. — Miggles. — Tennessee's partner. — The idyll of Red Gulch. — How Santa Claus came to Simpson's Bar. — The fool of Five Forks. — The romance of Madrono Hollow. — The Princess Bob and her friends. 931. The Luck of Roaring Camp, and selected stories and poems. Edited with an introd. by George R. Stewart, Jr. New York, Macmillan, 1928. xx, 188 p. (The modern readers' series) 28-7034 PZ3.H252L25 932. The Luck of Roaring Camp, and other sketches. Chicago, Fountain Press, 1949. viii, 309 p. illus. (World's greatest literature) 50-5573 PZ3.H252L40 933. Poems. Boston, Fields, Osgood, 1871. vi, 152 p. 24-6284 PS1830 1871 RBD Includes a group of dialect poems (p. 49-88). Among them is "Plain Language from Truthful James," which became the rage after its initial pub- lication in the Overland Monthly, Sept. 1870; re- published at times under the title, "The Heathen Chinee," it has been called "the most spectacular 82 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES poem in the Pike language." See annotation under the name of John (Milton) Hay for comment on this form of vernacular verse. 934- Household ed. Boston, Houghton Mifflin [ 1 902 ] x, 32 1 p. 3-463 PS1830 1902 935. Works. Riverside ed. Collected and rev. by the author. [Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1 894-1900] 6 v. PPLas 936. The writings of Bret Harte. Standard li- brary ed. Boston, Houghton Mifflin [ c i896- 1903] 19 v. illus. A13-1720 PSi820.E96a A Riverside edition was published by Houghton Mifflin in 20 v., c i890- c i9i4, of which v. 20 has the title: Stories and Prose and Other Uncollected Writings. 937. Bret Harte's stories of the old West. Se- lected by Wilhelmina Harper and Aimee M. Peters; illus. by Paul Brown. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1940. 322 p. 40-34192 PZ3.H242Stc Contents. — The Luck of Roaring Camp. — The outcasts of Poker Flat. — Tennessee's partner. — How Santa Claus came to Simpson's Bar. — Highwater mark. — M'liss. — An ingenue of the Sierras. — A ward of Colonel Starbotde's. — Miggles. — A knight- errant of the foothills. — Dick Boyle's business card. — Plain language from truthful James. 938. Bret Harte; representative selections, with introd., bibliography, and notes, by Joseph B. Harrison. New York, American Book Co., 1941. cxxviii, 416 p. (American writers series) 41-11710 PS1822.H3 "Selected bibliography": p. cxiii-cxxviii. 939. Selected stories of Bret Harte: The huc\ of Roaring Camp, The outcasts of Vo\er Flat, Tennessee's partner, M'liss, and other tales. New York, Caxton House, 1946. ix, 306 p. (Caxton li- brary of the world's greatest literature) 46-1319 PZ3-H252Se 940. Best short stories. Edited, and with an in- trod. by Robert N. Linscott. New York, Modern Library, 1947. x, 517 p. (Modern Library of the world's best books [250]) 47-30278 PZ3-H252Bg 941. JOHN (MILTON) HAY, 1838-1905 Hay and Bret Harte were pioneers in writing humorous or sentimental vernacular poetry glori- fying people or events on the frontier. In these verses their aim was to reproduce the speech and sketch the characteristics of unlettered residents of the Middle West, identified during the California Gold Rush as "Pikes" or "Pikers" because so many of them migrated from the counties of Pike in Illi- nois, Missouri, Arkansas, and other states. Hay, who was eventually Secretary of State, a cosmopoli- tan, and a member of Henry Adams' circle in Wash- ington, later discounted the importance of his few ballads in Pike dialect. However, they were so constantly read and recited that they attained the status of folk poems. As such they contributed to setting a pattern in verse that was used over and over again, notably by James Whitcomb Riley. Hay also wrote numerous conventional poems on ro- mantic themes. His prose works included: Castilian Days (1871), travel sketches of European experi- ences written for Americans interested in the Old World; The Bread-Winners (1884), a novel reflect- ing conservative upper-class ideas concerning labor unions and private enterprise; and Abraham Lin- coln (1890), a monumental biographical work writ- ten jointly with John G. Nicolay. 942. Pike County ballads and other pieces. Bos- ton, J. R. Osgood, 1871. 167 p. 25-15310 PS1902.P5 1871 RBD Includes "Jim Bludso" and "Little Breeches," both published originally in the New Yorl^ Tribune, a newspaper with which Hay was connected for some years in an editorial capacity. 943. 15th ed. Boston, Houghton Mif- flin, 1882 ["1871] 167 p. 50-47091 PS1902.P5 1882 944. Complete poetical works, including many poems now first collected, with an introd. by Clarence L. Hay. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1916. xiii, 271 p. 16-22653 PS1900A2 1916 Large-paper edition. "The Pike County Ballads": p. $-[25]. 945. LAFCADIO HEARN, 1 850-1904 Hearn was born on the Greek island of Leukas and died in Japan a naturalized citizen of that country. The middle period of his life, how- ever, was spent as a journalist in the United States. There he was set apart from the more conventional writers of the period by his prevailing interest in perfecting a polished but ornate literary style and in developing an impressionistic method of treat- ing themes that were often exotic. His sketches, essays, stories, and novels of life and society in New Orleans and the West Indies are contribu- tions to the local color literature of these places. LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 83 Numerous other volumes record his observations of Japanese manners and customs. These were de- signed to interpret his adopted country to the West- ern world. 946. Chita; a memory of Last Island. New York, Harper, 1889. 204 p. 7-5049 PZ3.H351C RBD Short novel centering around the story of a Creole child carried away by a tidal wave that overwhelmed one of the coastal islands south of Louisiana. 947- 948. New York, Harper [ c i9i7] 204 p. ViU New York, Harper [1938] MH 949. Youma; the story of a West-Indian slave. New York, Harper, 1890. 193 p. 7-5043 PZ3.H351Y RBD The heroism and death of a Negro slave, for the sake of the white Creole child in her care, provide the plot of the novel; said to be based on an actual occurrence in the slave insurrection of 1848 on the island of Martinique. 950. New York, Harper [1915] MH 951. Writings. Large-paper ed. [Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1922] 16 v. illus. 23-7259 PS1915.A2 1922 RBD Introduction by Ferris Greenslet: v. 1, p. xiii- [xxx]. Partial Contents. — 1. Leaves from the diary of an impressionist, Creole sketches and Some Chinese ghosts. — 2. Stray leaves from strange literature and Fantastics and other fancies. — 3. Two years in the French West Indies, v. 1. Appendix: Some Creole melodies. — 4. Two years in the French West Indies, v. 2. Chita and Youma. — 5-6. Glimpses of un- familiar Japan. — 9. Exotics and retrospectives and In ghosdy Japan. — n. Kotto and Kwaidan. — 12. Japan, an attempt at interpretation. 952. [Koizumi ed. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1923] 16 v. illus. NN Contents comparable to those of the large-paper edition, with slight variations in statements of a few tides. 953. The life and letters of Lafcadio Hearn, by Elizabeth (Bisland) [Wetmore] Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1906. 2 v. illus. 6-44374 PS1918.W4 The work is made up chiefly of Hearn's letters, preceded by a brief biography. His letters are found also in v. 13-16 of his Writings. Japanese Letters, also edited by Elizabeth Bisland Wetmore, comprises v. 16. 954. Creole sketches. Edited by Charles Wood- ward Hutson, with illus. by the author. Bos- ton, Houghton Mifflin, 1924. xxv, 201 p. 24-10002 F380.C9H3 955. Selected writings. Edited by Henry Good- man, with an introd. by Malcolm Cowley. New York, Citadel Press, 1949. viii, 566 p. 49-11635 PS1916.G6 Contents. — Lafcadio Hearn, by Malcolm Cow- ley. — Editor's introduction. — Kwaidan. — Some Chi- nese ghosts. — Chita. — American sketches [from Cin- cinnati, New Orleans, and the Caribbean]. — Japan: Stories of Japanese life; Travel; Folk culture; Essays; Weird tales. — Sources. — Bibliography [books and articles about Hearn] p. 564-566. 956. ROBERT HERRICK, 1868-1938 Herrick, for 30 years a professor of English at the University of Chicago, observed around him the advent of increased industrialization, expand- ing business, and accelerated economic competition. Results of the operation of these forces, found in the ethical and social character of middle class life in the capital city of the Middle West, were the themes he developed in a succession of realistic novels. His novel Together (1908) reflects his re- action to the changing relations of men and women in such a society. Sometimes (1933), a satirical Utopian novel, postulates a remote future in which the characters, freed from acquisitiveness, might de- velop creative personalities and a good life. Her- rick was a humanist and an intellectual, rather than a self-conscious reformer. That fact perhaps ac- counts for the analytical, sometimes undramatic, quality of his work and for its neglect by general readers. 957. The memoirs of an American citizen. New York, Macmillan, 1905. xi, 351 p. 5-23023 PZ3.H435Me First published in The Saturday Evening Post (1905), the novel provides a realistic portrait of a self-made capitalist, antedating Dreiser's The Fin- ancier by seven years. 958. Clark's field. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1914. 477 p. 14-11043 PZ3.H435CI 959. EDGAR WATSON HOWE, 1853-1937 Owner and editor of the Daily Globe of Atchi- son, Kansas, from 1877 to 191 1, and afterwards of 84 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES E. IV. Howe's Monthly, Howe enjoyed a national reputation on account of the brief paragraphs and aphorisms contributed by him in his editorial ca- pacity. He was also the author of a novel in which the treatment of smalltown life constituted a pioneer work of unrelieved realism. It forecast the trend towards naturalistic writing on the same theme culminating in Sherwood Anderson's Winesburg, Ohio (1919) and its successors in the 1920's. Howe's autobiography, Plain People (New York, Dodd, Mead, 1929. 317 P-)> also is a contnb , U j 1 ,°, n to the realistic regional literature of the Middle West. 960. The story of a country town. Atchison, Kans., Howe, 1883. 226 p. 45-45006 PZ3.H8364S Privately printed by the author after being re- jected by several publishers. o6 r . With an appreciation by William Dean Howells. New York, Harper [1917] 413 p. illus. MB 9 6 2 . New York, A. & C. Boni, 1926. 412 p. (The American library) 26-26999 PZ3.H8364S8 Q 6 3 New York, Dodd, Mead, 1927. xiii, 361 p. illus. 28-2241 PZ3.H8364S9 Includes a Foreword which gives a history of the original and subsequent publications of the book, its reception by critics, and the author's comments about the background of his novel. 9 6 4 . WILLIAM DEAN HOWELLS, 1 837-1 920 Formal education ended for Howells when he left elementary school to set type for his father's smalltown newspaper in Hamilton, Ohio. Before his death at the age of eighty-three he had refused professorships at Johns Hopkins and Harvard, had received honorary degrees from Columbia, Yale, Oxford, and Princeton, and was familiarly known as the "Dean" of American writers. A partial list of the many experiences by which his education was extended includes: journalism in Ohio; a United States consulship in Venice, where he became an unofficial reporter on European life for newspapers and periodicals at home; a ten-year term as editor- in-chief of The Atlantic Monthly; and a long con- nection with Harper's Magazine, as an editorial writer and critic. For many of these years he was the friend of the leading writers of his period, as well as the mentor of those who showed promise in his chosen field. Having formulated what was probably the first well-defined theory of literary realism enunciated in the United States, he applied it in a variety of literary forms. These included autobiographical works having Ohio and New Eng- land regional interest, critical essays, travel sketches addressed to the contemporary American interest in European culture, and many novels. Naturalistic elements were excluded from the realism of his fiction, which emphasized the commonplace and avoided sordid incidents or a pessimistic philosophy of life. The novels tended, rather, to be decorous if shrewd expressions of the author's reactions to the middle-class life he knew at first hand. Dif- ferent themes were conspicuous in his novels at dif- ferent stages in his development. These included courtship and marriage, the impress of Italian civili- zation on Americans visiting or living in that country, the impact of different social classes on each other in a city such as Boston, and the need of social change in the United States along socialistic lines. Howells' books have been called documents of the cultural and social history of his time. 065. A modern instance. Boston, J. R. Osgood, 1882. 514 p. 4-8624 PZ3.H24M0 A study of married life, and the result of degen- eration of the husband's character. 966. 26th ed. Boston, Houghton Mifflin [189-?] 514 p. 4-!5 I2 l PZ3.H84M026 Fourteenth edition published 1887. Currendy published by Houghton Mifflin in the Riverside college classics series. 967. The rise of Silas Lapham. Boston, Houghton Mifflin [ c i884] 515 p. 47-35488 PS2025.R5 1885 RBD Concerned with Boston society and the relation of a group of the nouveaux riches to certain impover- ished aristocrats; popularly considered Howells' best social novel. 968 Centenary ed. With introd. by Booth Tarkington. Boston, Houghton Mif- flin, 1937. xiv, 380 p. 37~9 2 54 PZ3.H84R129 969. Introd. by George [Warren] Arms. New York, Rinehart, 1949. xviii, 394 p. (Rinehart editions, 19) 49~4 8 7 T PZ3.H84R135 Introd. by Harry Hayden Clark. 970. New York, Modern Library, 1951. xxii, 324 n (Modern Library college editions, T56) V V 51-5402 PZ3.H84R137 07 1 Indian summer. Boston, Ticknor, 1886. 395 ^ p . 7-5771 PZ 3 .H8 4 In An international novel portraying American char- LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 85 acters living abroad, a theme used also in many of the novels by Henry James. James L. Woodress in his Howells & Italy (Durham, N. C, Duke Uni- versity Press, 1952. 223 p.) studies the influence on Howells of his life in Italy. 972. New introd. by William M. Gibson. New York, Dutton, 195 1. xxii, 317 p. (Ev- eryman's library 654A. Fiction) p< 5 J -7375 PZ3.H84lni5 Bibliography: p. xxi-xxii. 973. A hazard of new fortunes. New York, Har- per [1889] 2 v. MH An economic novel that introduces the clash in New York between capitalistic interests of indus- trialists and the interests of workers on various lev- els; illustrates the author's growing belief in social- ism, a development influenced by his study of Tolstoy and other Russian writers. 974. Edinburgh, D. Douglas, 1889. 2 v. 42-32100 PZ3.H84Haic 975. Introd. by Alexander Harvey. New York, Boni & Liveright, 1917. 2 v. in 1. (Modern Library of the world's best books) 19-9539 PZ3.H84Ha6 976. New introd. by George Warren New York, Dutton, 1952. 552 p. Arms. (Everyman's library, 646A. Fiction) 52-5309 PZ3.H84Haio 977. Criticism and fiction. New York, Harper, 1891. 188 p. 18-1642 PN81.H6 Gives Howells' defense of realism in imaginative writing. Everett Carter's Howells and the Age of Realism (Philadelphia, Lippincott, 1954. 307 p.) is a current estimate of realism in the author's work. 978. A traveler from Altruria. New York, Harper, 1894. 318 p. 7-5756 PZ3.H84Tr With its sequel, Through the Eye of the Needle (1907), this "romance" illustrates the author's con- cern over paradoxes in American society produced by inequalities of wealth and opportunity. Possible solutions are indicated by comparison with the fic- titious Utopian republic of Altruria. 979. Literary friends and acquaintance; a personal retrospect of American authorship. New York, Harper, 1900. viii, 287 p. 0-6798 PS2033.A6 1900 Contents. — My first visit to New England. — First impressions of literary New York. — Round- about to Boston. — Literary Boston as I knew it. — Oliver Wendell Holmes. — The white Mr. Longfel- low. — Studies of Lowell. — Cambridge neighbors. 980. The Leatherwood god. New York, Cen- tury, 1916. 236 p. illus. 16-22401 PZ3.H84Le Regional novel of Ohio before the middle of the 19th century, and the impact on a pioneer com- munity of a man who proclaims himself a god; based on a historical incident. 981. Life in letters. Edited by Mildred Howells. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, Doran, 1928. 2 v. illus. 28-28879 PS2033.A67 1928 A bibliography of the works of William Dean Howells: v. 2, p. 403-409. 982. Selected writings. Edited, with an introd. by Henry Steele Commager. New York, Ran- dom House, 1950. xvii, 946 p. 50-9450 PS2022.C6 1950 Contents. — The rise of Silas Lapham (1885). — A modern instance (1882). — A boy's town ( 1 890) . — My Mark Twain ( 1 9 1 0) . 983. Representative selections. Introd., bibliog- raphy, and notes, by Clara Marburg Kirk and Rudolf Kirk. New York, American Book Co., 1950. ccv, 394 p. (American writers series). 50-13680 PS2022.K5 Includes a particularly detailed introduction, a bibliography of biographical and critical writings about Howells, and a chronological table of his life and works. 984. HELEN MARIA (FISKE) HUNT JACK- SON ("H. H."), 1831-1885 Mrs. Jackson, one of the numerous "literary ladies" active in the 1870's and 1880's, wrote books for children and contributed her "bits" as she called them to the growing literature of travel in Europe and the Far West that was greatly in demand dur- ing this period. Her poetry also was admired by her contemporaries, among whom Emerson must be included. She is best remembered now, however, for the writing she did under the impetus of her moral indignation caused by injustices in the treat- ment of Indians by the United States Government. Some literary interest and curiosity also attach to her connection with Emily Dickinson, and the locale of Amherst, Massachusetts, where both of them were reared and where Mrs. [acksoa placed the setting of her novel, Mercy Vhilhricl(s Choice (1876). A short story, "Esther Wynn's Love* Letters." published in the first series of a collection called Saxe Holm's Stories (1874-1878) includes in 86 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES its plot various incidents that resemble character- istic features of Miss Dickinson's experience. 985. Ramona; a story. Boston, Roberts, 1884. 490 p. 171275 PZ3-Ji43 R Romance that reveals the conflicts of interest be- tween old Spanish and new American elements in California as a result of westward migrations during the middle decades of the 19th century; also elo- quently champions California Indians mistreated by Americans. The latter theme was factually de- veloped in the author's historical study, A Century of Dishonor (1881, 1885). 986. HENRY JAMES, 1843-1916 The senior Henry James' "progressive" ideas of education made the son a cosmopolitan in his boyhood, with the result that the younger Henry settled permanendy in England while still in his early thirties. By expatriating himself in this way he found an environment more favorable for per- fecting his art of writing. The theories he developed and the techniques of writing that he evolved are described in his critical works. These include the early essay, The Art of Fiction (1884), and the pref- aces he wrote in 1907-8 for the New York edition of his novels and stories. At one stage of his career he believed drama should be his chosen form of expression. His plays, however, were not successful "theatre," consequendy fiction remained his chief medium. The "international" novels and short stories, his most distinctive contribution to American literature, portray Americans of James' own class exposed to tensions resulting from alien standards encountered when they seek for a higher level of social and cultural life in the Old World than that provided by their own country. The author's an- alysis of motives and actions observed under these conditions was that of an artist who was also pro- foundly concerned with the ethical and moral issues involved in human relationships. As his friend, William Dean Howells, is called a realist of the commonplace, so James is frequendy described as a psychological realist. He also repeatedly treated American characters on their native ground. The latter novels and stories open vistas for viewing the social, intellectual, and ethical qualities he found in life on the eastern seaboard of the United States, notably in New York, Boston, and Newport. In spite of his American origins and interests, James' roots in English life had grown deep during his long residence in England. In 1915, less than a year before his death, he made an act of devotion to the Allied cause in the First World War and to his adopted country by becoming a naturalized British subject. 987. The American. Boston, J. R. Osgood, 1877. 473 P- 7-7560 PS2116.A6 1877 RBD International novel in which an American's wealth does not enable him to overcome the op- position of a conventional French family to his marriage to a daughter of the house. 988. Introd. by Joseph Warren Beach. New York, Rinehart, 1949. 360 p. (Rine- hart editions, 16) 49-10371 PZ3.j234Ame3 989. The portrait of a lady. London, Macmillan, 1881. 3 V. 23-319 PS2116.P6 1881RBD Appeared originally in Macmillan 's Magazine, Oct. 1880-Nov. 1881, and in The Atlantic Monthly, Nov. 1880-Dec. 1881. Considered the chief novel in James' earlier and more direct manner, the book provides an intellec- tual and moral representation of an American woman unhappily married to an American ex- patriate in Europe. While the action takes place abroad, the character of the "lady," rather than the international aspect of the setting, is central in the plot. 990. 1 8th ed. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1897. 529 p. 5-i5 I2 7 PZ3J234P05 Leon Edel is the editor of a new edition (1956) designed for inclusion in Houghton Mifflin's River- side classics series. 991. Introd. by Fred B. Millett. New York, Modern Library, 195 1. 2 v. in 1. (Modern Library college editions, T47) 51-2261 PZ3.J234P035 Bibliography: p. xxxvi-xxxvii. 992. The Bostonians. London, Macmillan, 1886. 3 v. 23-165 PS2116.B6 1886 RBD Originally appeared in the Century Magazine from Feb. 1885 to Feb. 1886; satirical representation of the American passion for good causes, in this case that of women's rights, and the hysterical in- fatuation of a grown woman for a young girl under her influence; a realistic novel of Boston life in the 1880's, and the author's longest narrative in which the locale and characters are uniformly American. 993. London and New York, Macmillan, 1886. 449 p. 4-15126 PS2116.B6 1886a RBD 994. [Introd. by Philip Rahv] New York, Dial Press, 1945. ix, 378 p. .45-9737 PZ3.J234B010 Included also in American Novels and Stories, edited by F. O. Matthiessen (no. 1008). LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 87 995. Introd. by Irving Howe. New York, Modern Library, 1956. xxviii, 464 p. (Mod- ern Library of the world's best books [16]) 56-5414 PZ3.J234B015 996. The wings of the dove. New York, Scrib- ner, 1902. 2 v. 2-20827 PS2116.W5 1902 RBD International novel in which the designs of an English couple are made of no effect by the nobility of the mortally ill American heroine; frequendy called the author's greatest book; written in his noted final style characterized by intricate ideas, delicate perceptions, and implied impressions conveyed through an arrangement of words and sentences that calls for attentive participation from the reader. 997. New York, Scribner, 1945. xxx, 329, 439 P- 45-9835 PZ3.j2 34 Wiio Published also as number 244 in the Modern Li- brary of the world's best books. 998. The ambassadors. New York, Harper, 1903. 431 p. 3-28287 PS2116.A5 1903 RBD A novel that was originally published in the North American Review, Jan.-Dec. 1903. The "ambassa- dors" are portrayed as emissaries of a wealthy wom- an in Massachusetts, who prevails upon them to undertake a mission to Europe in the hope of per- suading a young American to break the ties he has formed with a fascinating French woman, in order to return to manage the family business in America. With The Wings of the Dove and The Golden Bowl this novel forms what has been called a spiritual trilogy in James' last phase. 999. With an introd. by Martin W. Samp- son. New York, Harper ['1930] xv, 431 p. (Harper's modern classics) 30-34411 PZ3-j234Amb4 Currently published also in Harper's college edi- tion. 1000. The golden bowl. New York, Scribner, 1904. 2 v. 4-32321 PZ3.J234G0 James' last long novel, in which an international marriage between a fabulously rich American girl and an impoverished Italian nobleman resulted in grievous suffering for all the principal characters. 1001. Introd. by R. P. Blackmur. New York, Grove Press, 1952 ['1932! xxi, 412, 377 P- 5 2 -933 1 PZ3.J234G06 1002. The American scene. New York, Harper, 1907. vi, 442 p. 7-5704 F106.J27 RBD Contents. — New England: an autumn impres- sion. — New York revisited. — New York and the Hudson: a spring impression. — New York: social notes. — The Bowery and thereabouts. — The sense of Newport. — Boston. — Concord and Salem. — Phil- adelphia. — Baltimore. — Washington. — Richmond. — Charleston. — Florida. 1003. Edited, with an introd., by W. H. Auden. New York, Scribner, 1946. xxx, 501 p. illus. 46-25289 F106.J273 "Saratoga," "Newport," and "Niagara," taken from Portraits of Places, are added to the contents of this edition. 1004. Novels and tales. New York ed. [New York, Scribner, 1907-17] 26 V. 7-41582 PS2110.F07 Includes numerous revisions of texts and provides a series of prefaces to volumes 1-24. These con- tain important critical material concerning the structural technique of fiction. The prefaces were afterwards republished in a group, with an introduc- tion by Richard P. Blackmur, as The Art of the Novel (New York, Scribner, 1934. xli, 348 p.). Volume 25, The Ivory Tower, and volume 26, The Sense of the Past, were left unfinished when the author died. They were edited for publication by Percy Lubbock. Volume 26 is lacking in the Library of Congress. 1005. Letters. Selected and edited by Percy Lub- bock. New York, Scribner, 1920. 2 v. illus. 20-6773 PS2123.A5 1920 1006. Selected letters. Edited with an introd. by Leon Edel. New York, Farrar, Straus & Cudahy [1955] xxxiv, 235 p. (Great letters series) 55-1 1 183 PS2123.A43 1007. Great short novels. Edited with an introd. & comments by Philip Rahv. New York, Dial Press, 1944. xiii, 799 p. 44-47807 PZ3.j234Gr Contents. — Madame de Mauves. — Daisy Miller. — An international episode. — The siege of Lon- don. — Lady Barberina. — The author of Beltraffio. — The Aspern papers. — The pupil. — The turn of the screw. — The beast in the jungle. 1008. American novels and stories. Edited, and with an introd., by F. O. Matthiesscn. New York, Knopf, 1947. xxvi, 993 p. 47-1392 PZ3.J234A1] Contents. — The story of a year. — The Euro- peans. — Washington Square. — The point of view. — A New England winter. — Pandora. — The B< • tonians. — "Europe." — Julia Bride. — The jolly cor- 88 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES ner. — Crapy Cornelia. — A round of visits. — The ivory tower. 1009. Notebooks. Edited by F. O. Matthiessen and Kenneth B. Murdock. New York, Ox- ford University Press, 1947. xxviii, 425 p. 47-1 1461 PS2123.A4 Contents. — Chronological list of James' chief publications. — Notebook 1-9. — The 'B. B.' case and 'Mrs. Max.' — Preliminary sketch for The sense of the past. — Project for The ambassadors. 1010. The art of fiction, and other essays; with an introd. by Morris Roberts. New York, Ox- ford University Press, 1948. xxiv, 240 p. 48-6136 PN3499.J25 Partial Contents. — The art of fiction. — The new novel. — Criticism. — Emerson. ion. Short stories. Selected and edited, with an introd. by Clifton Fadiman. New York, Modern Library, 1948. xx, 644 p. (Modern Li- brary of the world's best books. Modern Library giants) 48-9351 PZ3.j234Sh4 1012. Ghosdy tales. Edited with an introd. by Leon Edel. New Brunswick, Rutgers Uni- versity Press, 1948 [i. e. 1949] xxxiv, 765 p. 49-7759 PZ3.j23 4 Gh Contents. — The romance of certain old clothes. — De Grey: a romance. — The last of the Valerii. — The ghostly rental. — Sir Edmund Orme. — Nona Vin- cent. — The private life. — Sir Dominick Ferrand. — Owen Wingrave. — The altar of the dead. — The friends of the friends. — The turn of the screw. — The real right thing. — The great good place. — Maud-Evelyn. — The third person. — The beast in the jungle. — The jolly corner. 1013. Complete plays. Edited by Leon Edel. Philadelphia, Lippincott, 1949. 846 p. illus. 49-10769 PS2111.E4 First collected edition of the complete plays, to- gether with an unfinished scenario and various notes and prefaces. Cf. Foreword, p. 9. 1014. Selected fiction. Edited with an introd. and notes by Leon Edel. New York, Dutton, 1953. xxiv, 609 p. (Everyman's library, 649A. Fiction) 53-8253 PZ3 .j23 4 Sb Bibliography: p. xxi-xxiv. Includes Daisy Miller, Washington Square, The Aspern Papers, The Pupil, The Beast in the Jungle, The Jolly Corner, and The Art of Fiction, as well as prefaces and additional commentary by James. 1015. Autobiography. Edited with an introd. by Frederick W. Dupee. New York, Criterion Books, 1956. 622 p. illus. 56-6211 PS2123.A3 Brings together James' three autobiographical works: A Small Boy and Others (1913); Notes of a Son and Brother (1914); and The Middle Years, edited by Percy Lubbock ( 19 17) — a collection which greatly enriches the student's understanding of the author, his American beginnings, and the 19th century civilization he portrayed in his novels and other prose writings. Recent critical works that continue to indicate the important place occupied by James in American literature include the following: 1016. Beach, Joseph Warren. The method of Henry James. [Enl. ed., with corrections] Philadelphia, A. Saifer, 1954. 299 p. 55-1809 PS2124.B4 1954 Consists of the original text of the first edition (19 1 8) but adds a lengthy introduction that reviews recent critical discussions of James' work by Ezra Pound, Van Wyck Brooks, Edmund Wilson, Leon Edel, and others. 1017. Canby, Henry Seidel. Turn west, turn east: Mark Twain and Henry James. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1951. xii, 318 p. 51-14000 PS1331.C25 Bibliography: p. 301-303. 1018. Dupee, Frederick W. Henry James. New York, Sloane, 1951. xiii, 301 p. (The American men of letters series) 51-2012 PS2123.D8 1019. 2d ed., rev. and enl. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1956. 265 p. (Doubleday anchor books, A68) 56-5971 PS2123.D8 1956 1020. Edel, Leon J. Henry James, [v. 1] The untried years, 1 843-1 870. Philadelphia, Lip- pincott [1953] 350 p. 53-5421 PS2123.E33 Bibliographical references included in "Notes": [v.i] p. 345-351. This is the first part of a study planned for com- pletion in three volumes. 1 02 1. Le Clair, Robert C. Young Henry James, 1 843-1 870. New York, Bookman Asso- ciates, 1955. 469 p. 55-3467 PS2123.L4 1022. Stevenson, Elizabeth. The crooked corridor; a study of Henry James. New York, Mac- millan, 1949. 172 p. 49-11903 PS2123.S8 "Bibliographical note": p. 164-166. Deals with James' fiction. LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 89 1023. SARAH ORNE JEWETT, 1849-1909 Mrs. Stowe in her local color sketches and stories of New England sought to preserve the qual- ities of the region that she believed constituted its greatness and justified its influence in America and "on the civilized world." Writing in the same genre a generation later, Miss Jewett found her inspiration in the coastal countryside of Maine and in the cour- age, even nobility, of the people living there after the great shipping trade was dead and industries in the towns, or westward migrations, had drawn off many of the most vigorous young people. Miss Jewett's art included the ability to use the beauty of the landscape as a background for the underlying drama in apparently commonplace lives. This ef- fect she achieved with classic economy and restraint. Clara C. Weber and Carl J. Weber have compiled A Bibliography of the Published Writings of Sarah Orne Jewett (Waterville, Me., Colby College Press, 1949. xi, 105 p. Colby College monographs, no. 18). 1024. Deephaven. Boston, J. R. Osgood, 1877. 2 55 P' 34-25494 PS2132.D4 1877 RBD A collection of local color stories published earlier in The Atlantic Monthly. 1025. 14th ed. Boston, Houghton Mif- flin, 1885. 255 p. 44-10710 PZ3.J55De2 1026. Boston, Houghton Mifflin [1905] 255 p. 5-1 1 85 PZ 3 .J55De 7 1027. The country of the pointed firs. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1896. 213 p. 7-9931 PZ3.J55C0 I02C — — — Boston, Houghton Mifflin f c i9io] 269 p. 10-23633 PZ3.J55C05 1029. The country of the pointed firs, and other stories. Selected and arr. with a pref. by Willa Cather. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1954. 320 p. (Doubleday anchor books, A26) 54-3594 PZ3.J55C07 Reprinted in full by arrangement with Houghton Mifflin from The Best Stories of Sarah Orne Jewett (q- v.). 1030. Stories and tales. Boston, Houghton Mif- flin [1910] 7 v. An-1493 PU 1031. The best stories of Sarah Orne Jewett. Se- lected and arr. with a pref. by Willa Cather. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1925. 2 v. 25-13439 PS2130.A2 1925 At head of title: The Mayflower edition. 4:: 1240—60 8 1032. GRACE ELIZABETH KING, 1851 or 1852-1932 The complex culture of New Orleans and its sur- rounding plantations, in which American, French, and Negro elements and dialects were mingled, pro- vided the local color of Miss King's short stories, novels, and histories. These exploited the same material used earlier by G. W. Cable and ministered to the appreciation of Southern regional writing that developed after the Reconstruction period, fol- lowing the Civil War. 1033. Tales of a time and place. New York, Harper, 1892. 303 p. 4-15133 PZ3.K583T Contents. — Bayou l'Ombre. — Bonne Maman. — Madrilene; or The festival of the dead. — The Christmas story of a little church. 1034. Balcony stories. New York, Century, 1893. 245 p. illus. 7-12167 PZ3.K583B 1035. New York, Macmillan, 1925. 296 p. illus. 25-19107 PZ3.K583B6 New edition with new stories. Contents. — The balcony. — A drama of three. — La grande demoiselle. — Mimi's marriage. — The miracle chapel. — The story of a day. — Anne Marie and Jeanne Marie. — A crippled hope. — "One of us." — The little convent girl. — Grandmother's grandmother. — The old lady's restoration. — A deli- cate affair. — Pupasse. — Grandmamma. — Joe. 1036. New Orleans; the place and the people. New York, Macmillan, 1895. xxi, 404 p. illus. I_ 8773 F379.N5K5 1037. Memories of a southern woman of letters. New York, Macmillan, 1932, 398 p. 32-29668 PS2178.A4 1932 1038. SIDNEY LANIER, 1842-1881 Lanier was a musician as well as a poet. Since he believed that the laws governing the two arts were in effect identical, he constancy experi- mented when writing poetry in an effort to sub- stantiate his thesis. While he is known best for "The Marshes of Glynn," "The Song of the Chatta- hoochee," and other regional poems celebrating the landscape of his native state, Georgia, his writing also reveals his strong social consciousness. Poems having the latter interest include "Corn," in part a tribute to the dignity of work on the land, and "The Symphony," a protest against over-commercialism in America, with its attendant economic ami social evils. In collaboration with his brother lie also QO / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES pioneered in the field of folk poetry written in Negro dialect and in the "Cracker" dialect used by poor whites in Georgia. Although Lanier was a Con- federate veteran, who ardently loved the South and whose untimely death may be attributed to hard- ships suffered during the Civil War and the Recon- struction period, his ultimate loyalty was to the nation as a whole. He did not glorify the old planta- tion tradition of his native region, but rather, as in his essay "The New South" (1880), he acclaimed the rise of the independent small farmer. 1039. Poems. Philadelphia, Lippincott, 1877. 94 p. 4-31 102 PS2205.E77 Made up for the most part of poems previously published in Lippincott 's Magazine. 1040. Edited by his wife [Mary (Day) Lanier] with a memorial by William Hayes Ward. New York, Scribner, 1884. 252 p. CtY New ed. New York, Scribner, 1891. xli, 260 p. 4-13827 PS2205.E91 New ed. New York, Scribner, 1916. xli, 262 p. 17-1199 PS2205.F16 New ed. New York, Scribner, 1041. 1042. 1043. 1920. xlii, 262 p. 35-33093 PS2205.F20 Bibliography: p. [xlii]. 1044. The science of English verse. New York, Scribner, 1880. xxii, 315 p. 6-24737 PE1505.L2 1880 Exposition of Lanier's theory of prosody and an expression of the 19th century interest in the inter- relation of the arts. 1045. ■ New York, Scribner ["1922] xxii, 315 p. illus. (music) 40-23579 PE1505.L2 1922 1046. The centennial edition of the works of Sid- ney Lanier. [Baltimore, Johns Hopkins Press, 1945] 10 v. illus. (inch music), facsims. (inch music) A46-2793 PS220.F45 General editor: Charles R. Anderson. Bibliography, compiled by Philip Graham and Frieda C. Thies: v. 6, p. [377]-4i2. Partial Contents. — 1. Poems and Poem outlines, edited by C. R. Anderson. — 2. The science of Eng- lish verse and Essays on music, edited by P. F. Baum. — 4. The English novel and Essays on litera- ture, edited by Clarence Gohdes and Kemp Ma- lone. — 5. Tiger-lilies and Southern prose, edited by Garland Greever, assisted by Cecil Abernethy. — 6. Florida and miscellaneous prose, edited by Philip Graham. — 7-10. Letters, edited by Charles R. An- derson and Aubrey H. Starke. First uniform collection of Lanier's poetry and prose; a scholar's edition that includes much pre- viously unpublished or uncollected material. 1047. Selected poems. With a pref. by Stark Young. New York, Scribner, 1947. xvii, 146 p. 47-11957 PS2205.F47 1048. JACK (JOHN GRIFFITH) LONDON, 1876-1916 Jack London read widely, if uncritically, in the works of Karl Marx, Herbert Spencer, and Friedrich Nietzsche. From his reading he derived and recon- ciled various conflicting doctrines concerning social revolution, biological determinism, and the super- man. His Marxist ideas he preached as radical remedies for the social and economic injustice of the time, which the Progressive Movement of the same general period was seeking to remedy by legislation. London's varied experiences in California and else- where — among other activities were those of an oys- ter pirate in San Francisco Bay, a sailor, a mill worker, a seeker for gold in the Klondike, a hobo, and a war correspondent — gave him rich sources for the plots and subjects of some 50 books written in 16 years. The Alaskan frontier in particular pro- vided the locale for some of his most successful short stories. The spectacular success of his fiction resulted from the taste of the time, which demanded romantic adventure stories that he was admirably equipped to write. Naturalism, however, was also an element in his work. It is found in the violence and brutal- ity of his supermen, the struggles of Alaskan Indians and white adventurers to conquer the Northern wilderness, and the grim details which abound in a number of his books. His socialistic tracts, among them War of the Classes (1905) and Revolution and Other Essays (1910) explain his conversion to so- cialism and illustrate his contribution to it as a cause. These polemical works, as well as his novels and short stories, have been translated into numer- ous foreign languages and widely read outside the United States. 1049. The son of the wolf. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1900. 251 p. 0-2266. PZ3.L846S0 Tales of courage, hardship, and brutality in the Far North, which won recognition for the author. 1050. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1930. 31-26194 PZ3.L846S04 Currently published by Houghton Mifflin in the Riverside library series. 251 p. LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 91 105 1. The call of the wild. New York, Macmillan, 1903. 231 p. illus. 3-16822 PZ3.L846C2 Story of a dog's return to the joys of freedom and wildness as leader of a wolf pack, recounted with poetic intensity. It is estimated that a million and a half copies were sold before 1945, something that puts the book fairly high among American best- sellers. Currently available from Macmillan, and from Pocket Books, Rockefeller Center, New York, as Pocket Book 593. 1052. The call of the wild and other stories. With an introd. by Frank Luther Mott. New York, Macmillan, 1935. xxxv p., 268 p. illus. (Modern readers' series) 35-27143 PZ3.L846C33 Contents. — The call of the wild. — To build a fire. — The heathen. — The strength of the strong. 1053. The people of the abyss. New York, Mac- millan, 1903. xiii, 319 p. illus. 3-26616 HV4088.L8L8 1903a Issued by the same publisher in 1903 without illustrations. A brief visit to England gave London the ma- terial for attacking the evils of poverty suffered by underprivileged residents of the city of London; a book of propaganda for social betterment. 1054. The sea-wolf. New York, Macmillan, 1904. vii, 366 p. 4~3°593 PZ3-L846Se2 The life, brutalities, and miserable end of a sea captain who represents London's interest in primi- tive "supermen" are mingled in this book with adventure and romance. Macmillan announces a contemporary edition in the company's catalog for 1954; available also as number 325 from Pocket Books, Rockefeller Cen- ter, New York. 1055. The iron heel. New York, Macmillan, 1907. xiv, 354 p. 7-3084 PS3523.J46I7 1907 RBD Novel describing a hypothetical future organiza- tion of capitalistic monopolies in the United States into a fascistic government, its final overthrow by the socialists, and the halcyon period of collectivism that would result. 1056. Martin Eden. New York, Macmillan, 1909. 411 p. 9-22752 PZ3.L846M Autobiographical novel revealing the torments and struggles experienced by a writer in conflict with conventional social and political standards, particu- larly with reference to money as the criterion of success. The ultimate suicide of the hero intensifies the effect of grimness and tragedy in the book. 1057. New York, Penguin Books, 1946. 346 p. (Penguin books, 587) 46-8611 PZ3.L846Mar4 1058. Lost Face. New York, Macmillan, 1910. vii, 240 p. 10-6488 PZ3.L846L0 Contents. — Lost Face. — Trust. — To build a fire. — That Spot. — Flush of Gold. — The passing of Marcus O'Brien. — The wit of Porportuk. 1059. [Novels and tales] New York, Macmillan, 1925-29. 21 v. NNC On cover: Sonoma edition. 1060. Best short stories. Garden City, N. Y., Sun Dial Press, 1945. 3 1 1 p. 45~393° PZ3-L846Be 1061. EDWIN MARKHAM, 1852-1940 A California shepherd and farm laborer who acquired sufficient education to become a school teacher, Markham awoke to find himself famous upon the publication of his "The Man with the Hoe," a poem in blank verse inspired by Jean Francois Millet's painting "L'Homme a la Houe." As a pro- test against the exploitation of the landless laborer, the poem became a sort of focus for humanitarian impulses and the stirrings of social unrest felt in the United States at the turn of the 19th century. It was also widely distributed abroad. The tide poem of Markham's Lincoln and Other Poems (New York, McClure, Phillips, 1901. 125 p.) eulo- gizes Abraham Lincoln as the common man cast in heroic mold. 1062. The man with the hoe, and other poems. New York, Doubleday & McClure, 1899. 134 p. 99-2566 PS2362.M3 1899 1063. Poems, selected and arr. by Charles L. Wallis. New York, Harper, 1950. xviii, 198 p. 50-7489 PS2360.A5W3 1064. JOAQUIN MILLER (CINCINNATUS HINER MILLER), 1839? or i8 4 i?-i 9 i3 Miller, a flamboyant American with a Bail for the spectacular, went to the Far West in his teens and therefore knew, more intimately than most of his contemporaries, the life of the Pacific Coast in the heyday of its development after 1849. For nearly 40 years he was a prolific miscellaneous writer; but poetry was his chosen form of expression. Songs of the Sierras (1N71) includes many of his best poems. His significance comes less Irom the quality of his writing than because he pioneered as a Q2 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES poet in giving literary expression to the characteris- tic landscape of a region and to the life of the people who had pioneered in its development. A readable narrative that presents Miller's unusual personality effectively is M. Marion Marberry's biography of the writer, entitled Splendid Poseur (New York, Crowell, 1953. 310 p.). 1065. Life amongst the Modocs: unwritten history. London, R. Bentley, 1873. viii, 400 p. A22-655 E99.M7M59 Also published under titles: Unwritten History: Life Amongst the Modocs, Hartford, 1874; Paquita, the Indian Heroine, Hartford, 1881; My Own Story, Chicago, 1890; My Life Among the Indians, Chicago, 1892; and Joaquin Miller's Romantic Life Amongst the Red Indians, London, 1898. 1066. Joaquin Miller's poems. [Bear ed.] San Francisco, Whitaker & Ray, 1909-10. 6 v. 9-9533 PS2395.A2 1909 Contents. — v. 1. An introduction, etc. — v. 2. Songs of the Sierras. — v. 3. Songs of the sunlands. — v. 4. Songs of Italy and others. — v. 5. Songs of the American seas. — v. 6. Poetic plays. 1067. Poetical works. Edited with an introd. and notes by Stuart P. Sherman. New York, Putnam, 1923. xii, 587 p. 23-7262 PS2395.A2 1923 Selections. 1068. Overland in a covered wagon; an autobiog- raphy. Edited by Sidney G. Firman, illus. by Esther M. Mattson. New York, Appleton, 1930. 129 p. 30-31468 PS2398.A2 1930 Appeared originally as the introduction to the Bear edition of his poems (q. v.). Has been called the most accurate record he left of his life and work; has also been called "useful but untrustworthy." 1069. WILLIAM VAUGHN MOODY, 1869- 1910 A humanist and a university teacher of English, Moody in some of his poems reacted against social, economic, and political faults in American life to which his patriotism made him particularly sen- sitive. Among these poems "An Ode in Time of Hesitation" and "On a Soldier Fallen in the Philip- pines" reveal his opposition to imperialism in for- eign policy. Two prose plays, The Great Divide (1909) and The Faith Healer (1909) are essentially dramas of revolt against the Puritan cast of thought surviving in America and the subservience of the people to what he considered worn-out social laws and customs. In the first play the West is made the symbol of freedom and happiness, the East that of repression. An unfinished trilogy of symbolic plays in verse, of which The Fire-Bringer (1904) was de- signed as the first part, and The Masque of Judg- ment (1900) as the second, explores the relation of the soul to God and the ultimate meaning of human life. 1070. Poems and plays. With an introd. by John M. Manly. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1912. 2 v. 12-26319 PS2425.A2 1912 Contents. — 1. Poems and poetic dramas. — 2. Prose plays. For reprints of selected poems see the entry that follows immediately. The Great Divide is reprinted in Thomas H. Dickinson's Chief Contemporary Dramatists, istser. (Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1915, 1922), p. 283-315. The Faith Healer appears in Arthur H. Quinn's Representative American Plays, 7th ed. 1 07 1. Selected poems. Edited by Robert Morss Lovett. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, c i93i. xcii, 243 p. (Riverside college classics) 31-8586 PS2426.L6 1072. JOHN MUIR, 1838-1914 Muir, who was born in Scodand, became a naturalist, whose predominant interests centered about the geology and botany of America. As a child he was brought to Wisconsin, where he spent a laborious youth on his father's farm. Poverty and hardship, however, did not stifle his increasing joy in nature. This joy developed into the passion that inspired his lifework — that of studying and de- scribing the beauties and wonders of the visible world, particularly the glaciers, mountains, and forests of the Far West. It has been said that, like Robinson Jeffers at a later time, Muir looked at California and knew he had come home. However, he traversed other great areas of the United States on foot, gaining firsthand experiences that he trans- mitted through books that became popular among substantial sections of the American people. His writings concerning the goodly natural heritage of the country thus became a factor in the growth of a movement for the conservation of forests and the development of national parks. In this movement Muir played a formative part. 1073. The mountains of California. New York, Century, 1894. xiii, 381 p. illus. Rc-874 F866.M95 LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 93 Illustrated by preliminary sketches 1084. 1074. and photographs furnished by the author. New and enl. ed. New York, Century, 191 1. xiv, 389 p. 11-12846 F866.M96 1075. Our national parks. Boston, Houghton Mif- flin, 1901. 370 p. illus. 1-26282 E160.M95 1076. New and enl. ed. Boston, Hough- ton Mifflin, 1909. x, 382 p. illus. 9-284 1 1 E160.M954 1077. The Yosemite. New York, Century, 1912. x, 284 p. illus. 12-11005 F868.Y6M9 1078. The story of my boyhood and youth. With illus. from sketches by the author. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1913. 293 p. 13-5573 QH31.M9A35 Deals with the writer's experience of frontier and pioneer life in Wisconsin. 1079. A thousand-mile walk to the Gulf. Large- paper ed. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1916. xxvi, 219 p. illus. 16-23580 F215.M95 Posthumously published journal kept while mak- ing a tour on foot from Indiana to the Gulf of Mexico; includes details of flora, forests, physical geography, and inhabitants of the sections through which he passed. Edited by William F. Bade. 1080. John of the mountains; the unpublished journals of John Muir. Edited by Linnie Marsh Wolfe. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1938. xxii, 459 p. illus. 38-27397 QH105.C2M8 108 1. Writings. Sierra ed. [Boston, Houghton, Mifflin, c i9i5-24] 10 v. illus. CtY Edited by William Frederic Bade, whose Life and Letters of John Muir comprise v. 9-10 of this edition and also of the Manuscript edition. 1082. Manuscript ed. Boston, Hough- ton Mifflin, 1916-24. 10 v. illus. NcD Edited by William Frederic Bade. 1083. The wilderness world of John Muir. With an introd. and interpretive comments by Edwin Way Teale; illustrated by Henry B. Kane. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1954. x\, 533 p. 54-9040 QH31.M9A37 Selections from Muir's writings. MARY NOAILLES MURFREE. ("CHARLES EGBERT CRADDOCK"), 1850-1922 Originally published in Lippincott's Magazine and The Atlantic Monthly, Miss Murfree's early local color stories of life in the Cumberland and Great Smoky Mountains of Tennessee won an enthusiastic audience on the score of their original- ity. These and other stories, subsequently made available in collections, are characterized by metic- ulous details of dress, food, and manners, by elaborate descriptions of scenery, and by compli- cated spelling used to reproduce the sound of local dialect. The hardships and loneliness of the seg- ment of the American people known as moun- taineers are emphasized. 1085. In the Tennessee mountains, by Charles Egbert Craddock [pseud.] Boston, Hough- ton Mifflin, 1884. 322 p. 7-4450 PZ3.M943lt 1086. 13th ed. Boston, Houghton Mif- flin, 1886. 322 p. 34-37791 PZ 3 .M 9 43lti3 1087. The prophet of the Great Smoky Mountains, by Charles Egbert Craddock [pseud.] Bos- ton, Houghton Mifflin, 1885. 308 p. 4-15 142 PZ3.M943Pr 1088. Boston, Houghton Mifflin [ c i9i3] 308 p. 16-25045 PZ3.M943Pr4 1089. (BENJAMIN) FRANK(LIN) NORRIS 1870-1902 One of the younger novelists encouraged by Howells, Norris was influenced by reading Zola and turned away from realism according to How- ells' definitions to evolve his own theories, which led him to pioneer in naturalistic writing. He in- sisted, however, that only by what he called "romantic" imagination and insight could the novel- ist penetrate to depths below surface appearances, with which realism, he believed, was concerned. Since the depths included many violent, sordid, and unlovely elements, he asserted that these also were fit subjects for "romantic" writing — a doctrine followed in his own principal works perhaps with undue fidelity. The author's favorite locale was California and his favorite period was the contem- porary. Historically it is interesting to note that Norris' endorsement of Drciscr*s Sister Carrie won a publisher for that novel some 12 years before tin- demand for gentility in fiction declined sufficient!] to make the book acceptable. 94 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 1090. McTeague. New York, Doubleday & Mc- Clure, 1899. 442 p. 99-1053 PZ3.N792Ma RBD Called by the author "a story of San Francisco." The novel portrays the disintegration of character under influence of financial greed. 1091. Introd. by Henry S. Pancoast. New York, Boni & Liveright, 19 18. xiv, 442 p. (Modern Library of the world's best books) 23-7733 PZ3.N792Ma3 1092. Edited with an introd. by Carvel Collins. New York, Rinehart, 1950. xix, 324 p. (Rinehart editions, 40) 50-12507 PZ3.N792Ma8 Bibliography: p. xix. 1093. The octopus. 1901. 652 p. [1]) . i-3 Deals with the war California and the rai mercy of forces in continued in The Pit, and Company, 1947. New York, Doubleday, Page, (His The epic of the wheat 1483 PS2472.03 1901 RBD between the wheat grower in Iroad trust; shows man at the society beyond his control; Latest reissue by Doubleday 1094. The pit. New York, Doubleday, Page, 1903. 421 p. (His The epic of the wheat [2]) 3-1580 PZ3.N792P Special presentation edition. Has as its theme the financial ruin of a Chicago speculator when the natural law of growth operates to produce a surplus of wheat. The Wolf, planned as a third volume in the trilogy but never written, was to have centered in the export of wheat for food in famine areas abroad. 1095. New York, Modern Library, 1934. 403 p. (Modern Library of the world's best books) 34- 2 84 2 5 PZ3.N792P10 1096. The responsibilities of the novelist, and other literary essays. New York, Doubleday, Page, 1903. 311 p. 3" 2 34 ir PN3324.N6 Includes expositions of Norris' theories of novel writing. 1097. Complete works. New York, Doubleday, Page, 1903. 7 v. 15-22323 PS2470.A2 1903 RBD Golden Gate edition. 1098. The Argonaut manuscript limited ed. of Frank Norris's works. [Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, Doran, 1928] 10 v. illus. 29-5199 PS2470.A2 1928 RBD 1099. THOMAS NELSON PAGE, 1 853-1922 A phenomenon in American life at the close of the Reconstruction period following the Civil War was the shift from an attitude of condemnation of the South, represented in writings by abolitionists, to sentimentality concerning Southern life and its typical institutions. Thomas Nelson Page, Ameri- can ambassador to Italy and biographer of Robert E. Lee, in his novels, short stories, and essays, roman- ticized plantation life and the contentment of Negro slaves under the old regime in Virginia. His artis- tic ability made his works popular in the North as well as in the South, even though his purpose evidendy was to leave on record a favorable por- trayal of the economic and social order permanently destroyed by the war and its aftermath. 1 100. In Ole Virginia. New York, Scribner, 1887. 230 p. 7 _ 35797 PZ3.Pi54ln Subtitle: Marse Chan and other stories. Contents. — Marse Chan. — "Unc' Edinburgh drowndin'." — Meh Lady. — Ole 'stracted. — "No haid pawn." — Polly. 1101. Illustrated by W. T. Smedley, B. W. Clinedinst, C. S. Reinhart, A. B. Frost, How- ard Pyle, and A. Castaigne. New York, Scribner, 1896. xi, 275 p. 4-15 145 PZ3.Pi45ln3 1 102. New York, Scribner, 19 10. 230 p. 12-31300 PZ3.Pi45ln6 1 103. The Old South; essays social and political. New York, Scribner, 1892. ix, 344 p. 3-31223 F206.P13 Contents. — The Old South. — Authorship in the South before the war. — Glimpse of life in colonial Virginia. — Social life in old Virginia before the war. — Two old colonial places. — The old Virginia lawyer. — The want of a history of the southern people. — The Negro question. 1 104. With a new pref., by [the author] Chautauqua, N. Y., Chautauqua Press, 1919. viii, 344 p. (Chautauqua home reading series) 19-13150 F206.P135 1 105. Red Rock; a chronicle of Reconstruction. New York, Scribner, 1898. xv, 584 p. 98-1252 PZ3.Pi45Re 1 106. Novels, stories, sketches and poems. [Plan- tation ed.] New York, Scribner, 1906-18. 18 v. illus. 6-39735 PS2510.F06 LITERATURE (1607-1955) / 95 1 107. DAVID GRAHAM PHILLIPS, 1867-1911 For more than a decade Phillips had been a successful journalist, first with the New Yor1{ Sun, then with the New Yor\ World, when free-lance work placed him among the "muckrakers." This term was applied to various writers who were seek- ing to arouse the country to economic, political, and social abuses that had crept into American life with the spread of industrialism and the growing power of financial tycoons. Between 1901 and 191 1, Phillips wrote more than 20 novels. The Deluge (1905) dealt with the manipulation of the stock market by Wall Street magnates; The Plum Tree (1905) had as its theme the machinations of poli- ticians; and Susan Lennox: Her Fall and Rise, posthumously published in 1917, revealed the au- thor's concern about marital problems and the relations of the sexes in American society. Since all of his novels were written to expose and reform wrongs, rather than as literature, they are significant chiefly because they are documents of the social movements of his period. 1 108. The great god Success, a novel by J. Graham [pseud.] New York, Stokes, 1901, 299 p. 1-24902 PZ3.P543Gre Has as its theme the gradual corruption of an honest and able journalist by ambition for power and money. 1 109. The second generation. New York, Apple- ton, 1907. 334 p. 7-4160 PZ3.P543Se Advances the idea that a rich man's children de- generate under the expectation of their inheritance, but may be restored if forced to earn their own living. 1110. New York, Appleton, 19 19. 334 p. 20-16461 PZ3-P543Se9 mi. WILLIAM SYDNEY PORTER ("O. HENRY"), 1862-1910 An author said to have written as many as 65 short stories in one year, O. Henry's mild irony, sentiment, pathos, and humor were expressed in simple vernacular language, frequently interlarded with the slang of the day. He achieved the effects for which he is best known by applying a few formulas to produce unexpected, or trick, endings of human-interest stories dealing with characters as diverse as adventurers in Latin America, Texas ranches, and (preferably) clerks occupying back bedrooms in New York lodging houses. As a raconteur might tell a story in passing, he wrote of comic or tragic episodes in the lives of these other- wise ordinary people. At a time when enthusiasm for the short story was at its height in America, his work was enormously popular. Afterwards, the estimates of his characterizations and thought de- clined under the rigorous methods of criticism developed in the contemporary period. A recent study of his life and work is E. Hudson Long's O. Henry (Philadelphia, University of Pennsylvania Press, 1949. 158 p.). 1 1 12. Cabbages and kings, by O. Henry [pseud.] New York, McClure, Phillips, 1904. 344 p. 4-32750 PZ3.P835C First published collection of the author's stories. These are concerned with Latin America. 1 1 13. New York, Penguin Books, 1946. 184 p. (Penguin books, 595) 47-18969 PZ3.P835C15 1 1 14. The four million. New York, McClure, Phillips, 1906. 261 p. 6-12856 PZ3.P835F A collection of the New York stories that in- cludes two of the best known of all the author's stories: "The Gift of the Magi"; and "The Fur- nished Room." 1 1 15. With a note by Burges Johnson. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, Page, 1925. xix, 215 p. 25-21919 PZ3.P835F14 At head of tide: O. Henry biographical edition. 1 1 16. The voice of the city; further stories of the four million. New York, McClure, 1908. 243 p. 8-17555 PZ3.P835V Republished from the New Yorf{ World and Ainslee's Magazine. 1 1 17. With a note by Archibald Sessions. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, Paqe, 1925. xii, 222 p. 25-21593 PZ3.P835V11 At head of tide: O. Henry biographical edition. 1 1 18. The voice of the city and other stories. A selection, with an introd., by Clifton Fadi- man; with illus. by George Grosz. New York, Limited Editions Club, 1935. xi, 220 p. 35-1 1910 PS2649.P5V6 1935 RBD 1 1 19. Options. New York, Harper, 1909. 323 p. 9-27747 PZ3.P735OP 1 120. With a note by Maximilian Foster. Garden City, N. Y., Doublcdnv, Page, i>)?s. ix, 259 p. 25-23723 PZ3.P835OPIO At head of title: O. Henry biographical edition. g6 J A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 1 121. Complete writings. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, Page, 1917. 14 v. illus. 17-31460 PS2649.P5 1917 Edition de luxe. 1 122. Complete works. Foreword by Harry Han- sen. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1953. 2 v. (xiii, 1692 p.) 53-6098 PS2649.P5 1953 1 123. Selected stories. Edited by C. Alphonso Smith. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, Page, 1922. xvi, 225 p. 22-11515 PZ3.P835Sel 1 124. Best short stories. Selected, and with an introd., by Bennett A. Cerf and Van H. Cartmell. New York, Modern Library, 1945. x, 338 p. (Modern Library of the world's best books) 45-35106 PZ3.P835Be2 1 125. The pocket book of O. Henry [pseud.] thirty short stories, edited and with an introd. by Harry Hansen. New York, Pocket Books [1948] xii, 291 p. (Pocket book 510) 48-9815 PZ3.P835P0 1 126. JAMES WHITCOMB RILEY, 1 849-1 91 6 After "Pike" speech was reproduced effec- tively by John Hay and Bret Harte in their folk ballads, dialect verses attained a distinct vogue in the United States. The most popular writer in this genre was Riley, whose The Old Swimmin '-Hole and 'Leven More Poems (1883) included pieces first published in the Indianapolis Journal while the writer was on the staff of that newspaper. Not all of his poems were written in dialect, but the most distinctive ones are expressed in an accurate repro- duction of the Hoosier speech of his native Indiana. They are poems of sentiment, humor, and pathos that celebrate simple themes drawn from childhood, nature, farm life, and neighborliness among plain people in the Middle West. "When the Frost is on the Punkin," "Little Orphant Annie," and "The Old Man and Jim" are typical of individual poems immediately beloved by a large public, for whom they had the appeal of folk ballads. Riley's reputa- tion was enhanced by his frequent appearance as a reader of his own poems with the humorous lec- turer, "Bill" Nye. During the latter part of the 19th century sophisticated as well as less critical audiences delighted in this form of entertainment, which Mark Twain elevated to an art. 1 127. Poems and prose sketches. [Homestead ed.] New York, Scribner, 1897-1914. 16 v. (The works of James Whitcomb Riley) 4-13835 PS2700.E97 Among the volumes reissued in this edition those most popular since their first publication include the following: Ajterwhiles (1887); Rhymes of Childhood (1890); and Poems Here at Home (1893). 1 128. Complete works, in which the poems, includ- ing a number heretofore unpublished, are arr. in the order in which they were written, together with photographs, bibliographic notes and a life sketch of the author. Collected and edited by Edmund Henry Eitel. Biographical ed. Indian- apolis, Bobbs-Merrill, 1913. 6 v. 13-26127 PS2701.E5 Bibliography: v. 6, p. [4091-466. 1 129. Complete works, including poems and prose sketches, many of which have not hereto- fore been published . . . [Memorial ed.] Indian- apolis, Bobbs-Merrill, 1916. 10 v. (2801 p.) illus. 16-25215 PS2700.F16 1 130. Complete poetical works. Pref. by Donald Culross Peattie. Indianapolis, Bobbs-Mer- rill, 1937. xxix, 886 p. 38-8805 PS2700.F37 Reprint of a reissue of the Biographical edition. 1 13 1. De luxe ed. New York, Garden City Pub. Co., 1941. xxix, 886 p. 4 1-5 1 66 1 PS2700.F41 Music: p. 656-657. A contemporary survey of Riley's place in Ameri- can literature is provided in the reference that follows. 1 132. Nolan, Jeannette (Covert), Horace Gregory, and James T. Farrell. Poet of the people; an evaluation of James Whitcomb Riley. Bloom- ington, Indiana University Press, 195 1. 106 p. 51-3048 PS2706.N6 Contents. — Riley as a children's poet, by J. C. Nolan. — James Whitcomb Riley, a Victorian Amer- ican, by H. Gregory. — The frontier and James Whit- comb Riley, by J. T. Farrell. Essays presented originally as a symposium at Indiana University, in 1949, during the centennial celebration of Riley's birth. Without forgetting the significance in the American scene of ballads and folk poetry and Riley's place in that connection, the essayists were asked to separate the traditions and sentiments surrounding the man from the merits of his work as a poet. 1 133. IRWIN RUSSELL, 1853-1879 A minor but authentic poet born in Missis- sippi, Russell is known for his early use for literary LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 97 purposes of Negro themes and dialect, through which he showed a sympathetic awareness of Negro character and speech. 1 134. Poems. New-York, Century [ c i888] xi, 109 p. 1 1— 18675 PS2740.A2 1888 Introduction by Joel Chandler Harris. Lacks some nine poems included in the collection described in the following entry. 1 135. Christmas-night in the quarters, and other poems. With an introd. by Joel Chandler Harris, and an historical sketch by Maurice Gar- land Fulton. New York, Century, 1917. xxxiv, 182 p. illus. 17-29251 PS2740.A2 1917 1 136. CHARLES DUDLEY WARNER, 1829- 1900 Warner has been called a transitional figure in American literature. When he wrote of his boy- hood, or about his travels in Europe, the Orient, and the United States, or described in familiar essays the joys of nature and a garden, his style was reminiscent of Washington Irving's mellowness and grace. Over the years, however, as the hard-working editor of the Hartford Courant, he developed for other types of writing a vigorous, natural journalistic style suited to the spirit of the late 19th century. His literary criticism, advocating a distinctly American approach, was collected in such volumes as The Relation of Literature to Life (1896) and Fashions in Literature (1902). He expressed a conservative Northern view; nevertheless he used his connection with Harper's Magazine to find a medium of pub- lication for minor Southern authors, such as Grace King. Social criticism in his work is confined chiefly to his novels. One of these, The Gilded Age (1873), was written in collaboration with S. L. Clemens (q. v.). Warner made a genuine contri- bution to the history of American literature through his general editorship of the first series entitled "American Men of Letters," for which he wrote the volume on Washington Irving, and to literary appre- ciation in general through his editorial work on the first edition of the Library of the World's Best Literature (New York, Peale & Hill [ c i89<5- c 97] 30 v.). 1 137. My summer in a garden. Boston, Fields, Osgood, 1 87 1. xii, 183 p. 22-10088 PS3152.M6 1871 Includes an introductory letter by Henry Ward Beecher. 1 139. Being a boy. Boston, J. R. Osgood, 1878. vi, 244P. illus. CA12-1071 PS3152.B4 1878 1 140. vi, 244 p. illus. Boston, Houghton Mifflin [ c i905] 5-33975 PS3152.B4 1905 1141. 1 138. With illus. by F. O. C. Darley. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1898. 212 p. 98-1695 PS3152.M6 1898 Boston, Houghton Mifflin [ c i9i9] 186 p. (The Riverside literature series) 38-29713 PS3152.B4 1919 This edition is without the illustrations by Clifton Johnson. 1 142. A little journey in the world. New York, Harper, 1889. 396 p. 8-33715 PZ 3 .W2 43 L Originally published in Harper's Monthly, as a serial, in 1888; first of a trilogy of novels that in- cludes also The Golden House (1895) and That Fortune (1899), all of which deal with the temp- tations and difficulties attendant upon the acqui- sition, possession, and loss of wealth. 1 143. New York, Harper, 1894. 396 p. (Harper's Franklin Square library, no. 747) 13-12913 PZ3.W243L2 1 144. Complete writings. [Backlog ed. Edited by- Thomas R. Lounsbury] Hartford, Conn., American Pub. Co., 1904. 15 v. illus. 4-32205 PS3150.A2 1904 1 145. OWEN WISTER, 1860-1938 A Pennsylvania-born graduate of Harvard University, Wister utilized several trips West in search of health to provide him with material for his stories of cowpunchers, combined in Lin McLean (1898), and also used for his later successful novel, The Virginian. Both books illustrated the repeated return of American writers to themes drawn from pioneer or rugged life in the West, and also capital- ized on an interest in the strenuous life that was abroad in the land during the presidency of Theo- dore Roosevelt. Mr. Wister's strong, plain heroes and their refined brides of the 1870's and 1880's, surrounded by dangers and inevitable adventures in the great open spaces of the Wyoming cattle coun- try of that time, appealed to the American taste of the period for novels of action that were at the same time highly romantic. A survival of this int< resl may be seen in the contemporary popularity of the "western." Lady Baltimore (1906), a novel of so- ciety in Charleston, South Carolina, about the turn of the 19th century, is treated with a light touch and sympathetic delicacy. 98 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 1 146. The Virginian; a horseman of the plains. New York, Macmillan, 1902. xiii, 504 p. 2-1443 1 PZ3.W768V 1 147. New ed. With . . . drawings from western scenes by Frederic Remington. New York, Macmillan, 191 1. xv, 506 p. 1 1-264 1 2 PZ3.W768V10 1 148. With an introd. by Struthers Burt and illus. by William Meyers. Los Angeles, Printed for members of the Limited Editions Club by the Plantin Press, 1951. xix, 437 p. 5 I ~37m PS3345- V 5 . J 95i RED For a current publication of The Virginian see the New pocket classics series, issued by Macmillan. 1 149. CONSTANCE FENIMORE WOOLSON, 1 840-1 894 Following the pattern set by her great-uncle, James Fenimore Cooper, Miss Woolson called her shorter pieces "sketches." They are, in fact, early and exceptionally realistic local color stories, chiefly about life around the Great Lakes (in Ohio and Michigan) and in the South, where the writer be- came familiar with characteristic localities in Florida, the Carolinas, and Virginia. Her work was welcomed by editors of the best periodicals at the time that Bret Harte's stories were in vogue. It won sufficient recognition to be republished later in collections and has given her a secure place among regional writers of the 1870's and 1880's. Several novels, written after she left the United States to live in Italy, are increasingly concerned with psychological problems resulting from the interplay of character and circumstance, an interest that Miss Woolson may have developed from her mentor, Henry James. 1 150. Castle Nowhere: lake-country sketches. Boston, J. R. Osgood, 1875. 386 p. 8-37232 PZ3.W888C 1 151. Rodman the keeper: southern sketches. New York, Appleton, 1880. 339 p. 8-37226 PZ3.W888R Originally published in The Atlantic Monthly, Appletons' Journal, and other periodicals; stories of the South under Reconstruction. Written with sympathy but also objectivity by a Northerner, they are said to have influenced the development in the North of interest in Southern literature. 1 152. Constance Fenimore Woolson; arr. and edited by Clare Benedict. London, Ellis, 1932. xvi, 560 p. illus 32-22803 PS3360.A5B4 Bibliography begun by the author and completed by the editor: p. 550-553. A reprint of volume 2 of Clare Benedict's larger work, Five Generations (London, Ellis [1930?] 3 v.). Includes part of an article dealing with Miss Woolson, taken from Henry James' Partial Portraits (1888), together with extracts from her correspond- ence, articles, and miscellaneous writings. In Ap- pendix A, p. 413-549, is found a selection of her poems and stories. E. The First World War and the Great Depression (1915-1939) Between April 191J and November 1918, some two million soldiers went to Europe to ta\e their country's part in a world war. The aftermath of that war was a decade of inflated prosperity lead- ing to an orgy of speculation on the stoc\ market, which in turn was followed by a depression so severe as to create an army of unemployed that num- bered, according to various estimates, between 12 and 15 million former workers. It is not surprising that war and financial collapse, twin pea\s of dis- aster, should mar\ the period as one in which frustration, disillusionment, pessimism, and cyni- cism colored American attitudes. No more sur- prising is the fact that each crisis colored the period in its own way, so that, except for purposes of convenience, it might be regarded legitimately as two periods. First, with the rapidly accelerating tempo of life in the twenties, a decade became an age, the "Jazz Age," filled with speed, excitement, and self-expression. These characteristic manifes- tations of the spirit of the time inevitably were reflected in literature. But later when the depres- sion struc\, American writing too\ on an increas- ingly serious tone and many writers accepted the theory that all literature should have a message for a world that was in sore trouble. Seriousness and social reform became the watchwords. Although the messages to be found in much of the best writing done in the 19th century in the United States were still applicable, and were in fact rediscovered and reiterated by the not always origi- nal moderns, the "genteel" boo\ was vigorously LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 99 rejected on the score of prudery and hypocrisy. A generation, in which emotions of fear and uncer- tainty engendered by war had been fostered by eco- nomic misfortune, found little that was congenial in the Puritan heritage of respectability and gentility founded on solid prosperity. Observation of crass materialism and injustices to minority or under- privileged groups gave rise to strong social indigna- tion. A climate of liberal opinion arose that was favorable to social and economic reforms instituted within the period. During the same span of time the country also felt an impact from the acceleration of other forces already operating to change its way of life. Science and invention had replaced horses with horsepower, and registered automobiles in the United States rose to a number nearly equal to one for every five Amer- icans. The populace, so far as it was able, toof^ to the roads. These roads in turn were extended and improved to carry the constantly increasing volume of traffic to which the restlessness of the "Jazz Age" contributed. When distances were too great to mal{e motoring feasible, communication across state and national boundaries was made possible by a growing system of telephones. Radio programs broadcast identical information and entertainment over wide areas. The powerful motion picture in- dustry, offering its wares in local theaters from one end of the country to another, created a \md of mass sophistication that had its own effects on manners, morals, and customs, as did the inexpensive maga- zines sold across the land. By the end of the period, travel by airplane had become as common as travel by automobile had been at its beginning. All these facilities for mobility and easy communication of ideas contributed greatly to a modification of the sec- tionalism that had up to this time been present in American culture. Provincialism also decreased with the emergence of the United States as a great power among the nations of the world. Reciprocity of esthetic and philosophical ideas between Europe and America increased, with notable effects on American literature. The growing complexity of American life at this time had its counterpart in the literature produced in the years between the coming of the First ]['orld War and the end of the country's worst depression. The ever-present struggle of man with his environ- ment and his dissatisfaction with the state of being "a stranger and afraid, in a world I never made" found their most complete expression in fiction. Realism, so characteristic of novels and stories writ- ten in the preceding period, continued as a prevail- ing trend, which, however, tended to shade into pessimistic, behavioristic naturalism, exemplified by the wor\ of Theodore Dreiser and fames T. Far- rell, or the more complex, "Freudian" naturalism of Sherwood Anderson or William Faulkner. Social criticism as a factor in literature became a prime force in the thirties, when almost all literature was for a while -judged in terms of its message and social value. All this is not to say, however, that writing according to an older and more conventional pattern did not win wide approval during the period. Regionalism, with new social and spiritual over- tones, was present in the novels of Ellen Glasgow and Willa Cather. Historical novels portraying America's past continued to attract enthusiastic audi- ences and became, with the trend toward more and more realism, frequently the product of research as careful as that traditionally lavished only on defini- tive history. Among the most startling literary developments of a period in which so many men were ill at ease was the rebirth of interest in the art of poetry, despite its decline in market sales. Here again, as in the case of fiction, experimentation and to some ex- tent realism were at the heart of the revival; but experimentation as well as realism took many forms and progressed through various degrees: Edwin Arlington Robinson and Robert Frost, using conserv- ative poetic forms for freshly realistic and occasion- ally hardbitten portraits and utterances, which assumed, particularly in the wor\ of Frost, symbolic dimensions; Carl Sandburg, Vachel Lindsay, and Edgar Lee Masters, each with a new rhythm and a different slant on "the American Dream"; Ezra Pound, T. S. Eliot, Wallace Stevens, E. E. Cunt- mings, and William Carlos Williams, in each of whom experimentalism reached a highly personal poetic style in an effort to express the individual hu- man condition in its universal proportions and sig- nificance. This experimental movement, with its numerous cross-currents of schools, fostered by a suc- cession of "little magazines" which frequently repre- sented also new philosophical, social, and economic views, developed a surprising number of poets. These joined the novelists in making themselves felt as social critics no less than as creative artists. I! 'hat- ever value time may place eventually on the work of poets writing in this era, the fact remains that it constitutes a second renaissance of poetry in the development of American literature. Emphasis inevitably has been placed on prose fic- tion and poetry, in which much of the best work of the period was done. However, Eugene O'Neill, America's leading playwright, wrote all but a very few of his plays during these years, and a number of other playwrights produced workj of literary as well as theatrical distinction. Outstanding work in other forms also was produced, notably in h\ the general essay, and criticism, which now i the field as literature in its own right. Criticism has not been represented in this section, except when 100 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES the author has been included for his other wor\, but critical writings have received detailed treat- ment in the chapter devoted to Literary History and Criticism. 1 153. LEONIE ADAMS, 1899- As a lyric poet Miss Adams has won im- mediate and continuing recognition from critics for her mastery of technical poetic forms, new and old; for her sensitive response to nature; and for the mystical quality in her perceptions. 1 154. Poems: a selection. New York, Funk & Wagnalls, 1954. 128 p. 54-6356 PS3501.D285A6 1954 Part II of this volume (p. 52-124) includes poems previously published in the poet's earlier works: Those Not Elect (1925) and High Falcon (1929). 1 155. SAMUEL HOPKINS ADAMS, 1871- Adams is probably best known for his fiction, much of which depicts 19th-century life in the Erie Canal area of New York State. Conservative and "victorian" in approach, as in the novel Siege ( 1924), he has often tried to infuse a degree of modernism in his work, as in Plunder (1948), a fictional- political commentary which is a satirical account, in a highly conversadonal style, about a crude, star- spangled-American demagogue who almost becomes dictator. He has also written short stories, as in From a Bench in Our Square (1922), which deals with New York City, where he was for some time a journalist. He has also published a number of biographies, works of history, commentary, and juvenile books. He was early associated with the muckraking movement and wrote The Great American Fraud (1906, 1905), an influential revela- tion of medical quackery at the turn of the century. His later work tends to be pervaded by a gentle humor. 1 156. Revelry. New York, Boni & Liveright, 1926. 318 p. 26-21303 PZ3.A217R.e2 A novel about the political corruption in Wash- ington during the Harding administration. 1 157. Canal town. New York, Random House, 1944. 465 p. 44-40112 PZ3-A2i7Can A novel evoking Palmyra, N. Y., in 1820. 1 158. Banner by the wayside. New York, Ran- dom House, 1947. 442 p. 47-1795 PZ3.A2i7Ban A novel centering about a group of entertainers touring the Erie Canal area in the mid-nineteenth century. 1 159. Sunrise to sunset. New York, Random House, 1950. 373 p. 50-7919 PZ3.A217SV A novel using a setting in and around the cotton mills of Troy, New York, in the 1830's. 1 160. Grandfather stories. New York, Random House, 1955. 312 p. 55-6657 PZ3.A2i7Gr A retelling of memories of the Erie Canal coun- try as told to the author by his grandfathers; depicts early 19th-century New York State. 1 161. CONRAD POTTER AIKEN, 1889- Poet, novelist, short story writer, and critic. Conrad Aiken's work has been influenced by Freud- ian concepts, the writings of James Joyce, and the stream-of-consciousness technique in general. His novels in particular illustrate these influences. His poetry is characterized by a melodic quality indic- ative of his interest in the relation between poetry and music. In 1930 he received the Pulitzer prize for poetry for his Selected Poems (1929). 1 162. Blue voyage. New York, Scribner, 1927. 318 p. 27-15974 PZ3.A2912BI Using the stream-of-consciousness technique, Aiken has in this novel produced a study of life as presented to the mind of a writer on a transatlantic liner. 1 163. Great circle. New York, Scribner, 1933. 335 p. 33- I2 °47 PZ3.A2 9 i 2 Gr A psychological novel centering about a man whose wife has been having a love affair with his friend. Meetings with a psychoanalyst are intro- duced to trace the origin of the main character's present situation. 1 164. Short stories. New York, Duell, Sloan & Pearce, 1950. 416 p. 50-9750 PZ3.A29i2Sh 1 1 65. Ushant, an essay. New York, Duell, Sloan & Pearce, 1952. 365 p. 52-9071 PS3501.I5Z53 A psychoanalytic autobiography of the poet, re- constructed in a series of flashbacks. 1 166. Collected poems. New York, Oxford Uni- versity Press, 1953. 895 p. 53-9180 PS4501.I5A17 1953 LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 101 This collection contains those poems which Aiken wished to preserve. They are arranged approxi- mately in order of composition, rather than of pub- lication. The poems selected are from previous volumes such as Turns and Movies (1916), Punch: The Immortal Liar (1921), John Deth, a Meta- physical Legend ( 1930), The Coming Forth by Day of Osiris Jones (1931), Preludes for Memnon (1931), Landscape West of Eden (1934), Time in the Roc\ (1936), And in the Human Heart (1940), Brownstone Eclogues (1942), The Soldier (1944), The Kid (1947), and The Divine Pilgrim (1949). 1 167. HERVEY ALLEN, 1 889-1949 Diarist and fiction writer of World War I, and a leader among those who fostered a rebirth of interest in the art of poetry in the South, Mr. Allen was also the author of the scholarly biography, lsrafel; the Life and Times of Edgar Allan Poe (1926). He is better known, however, for his in- fluence in advancing the vogue of the historical novel in America. 1 1 68. Carolina chansons; legends of the low country, by Du Bose Heyward and Hervey Allen. New York, Macmillan, 1922. 131 p. 22-24847 PS3515.E98C3 1922 1 169. Anthony Adverse; decorations by Alia Mc- Nab. New York, Farrar & Rinehart, 1933. 1224 p. 33—27189 PZ3-A4264An Picaresque novel which spans the life of the hero in Europe, Africa, and America, from 1775 to 1825; some two million copies have been sold. 1 170. Toward the flame; a war diary. New York, Farrar & Rinehart, 1934. 282 p. 34-4704 D570.9.A53 1934 1 171. The forest and the fort. New York, Farrar & Rinehart, 1943. 344 p. 43—4731 PZ3.A4264F0 First of three parts of a historical novel planned in five parts. The series, left incomplete by the author's death, was, with a fragment of the fourth part, edited by Julie Eidesheim and published as The City in the Dawn (1950). Its theme is 18th- century pioneer life on the American frontier. 1 1 72. MAXWELL ANDERSON, 1888- This dramatist's interests vary from satiriz- ing political corruption in the United States, as in Both Your Houses (1933), which won the Pulitzer prize, to recreating for American audiences epi- sodes in their British and European heritage, as in Elizabeth the Queen (1930), Mary of Scotland (1933), and Joan of Lorraine (1946; rev. ed. 1947). One of the more important influences of some thirty-odd plays he has written in as many years is the interest they have created in the use of poetry as a dramatic medium on the stage. 1 173. Winterset; a play in three acts. Washington, Anderson House, 1935. 134 p. 35-27431 PS3501.N256W5 1935a Deals with the problem of justice and reflects a more universal aspect of his earlier interest in the Sacco-Vanzetti case, which inspired his Gods of the Lightning (1928). 1 174. Eleven verse plays, 1929-1939. [New York] Harcourt, Brace, 1940. [1321] p. 40-27679 PS3501.N256 1940 Contents. — Elizabeth the queen. — Night over Taos. — Mary of Scotland. — Valley Forge. — Winter- set. — The Wingless victory. — High Tor. — The masque of kings. — The feast of ortolans. — Second overture. — Key Largo. 1 175. Off Broadway. New York, Sloane, 1947. 91 p. 47-30369 PN2021.A54 Collection of critical essays and lectures; see par- ticularly "Poetry in the Theater," p. 47-54, and "The Uses of Poetry," p. 87-91, for Mr. Anderson's theories concerning the place of poetry in the con- temporary theater. 1 176. Barefoot in Athens. New York, Sloane, 1951. 101 p. 51-13750 PS3501.N256B27 Freedom of opinion in relation to democracy, the theme of the play, gives timeliness to this dramatic presentation of the life and death of Socrates at the end of the fifth century, B. C, in Athens. 1 177. Bad seed; a play in two acts. The drama- tization of William March's novel, The bad seed. New York, Dodd, Mead, 1955. 96 p. 55-7822 PS3505.A53157B36 William March is the pseudonym of William Ed- ward March Campbell (1893-1954), an Alabama author of short stories and novels. 1 178. SHERWOOD ANDERSON, 1 876-1 941 Short stories, novels, and autobiographical works, most successful when dealing with small- town life in Ohio, ca. 1880-1910, were used by the author to express his pessimism concerning the fate of simple people, adjusted to primitive conditions derived from the pioneer period in rural America, who arc defeated or frustrated by forces at work in a society rapidly becoming industrialized. Ander 102 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES son's work is characterized by frankness of expres- sion in advance of his time, by a mystical faith in the life force in man, and by introspection almost psychoanalytical in quality. 1 179. Winesburg, Ohio. New York, Huebsch, 1919. 303 p. 19-17477 PZ3.A55Win Short stories. 1180. Poor white; a novel. New York, Huebsch, 1920. 371 p. 20-27471 PZ3.A55P0 PS3501.N4P6 1181. The triumph of the egg; a book of impres- sions from American life in tales and poems. New York, Huebsch, 1921. 269 p. 21-21097 PZ3.A55Tr 1 1 82. A story teller's story; the tale of an Ameri- can writer's journey through his own imaginative world and through the world of facts, with many of his experiences and impressions among other writers — told in many notes — in four books — and an epilogue. New York, Huebsch, 1924. 442 p. 24-27699 PS3501.N4Z5 1 1 83. Dark laughter. New York, Boni & Live- right, 1925. 319 p. 25-20829 PZ3.A55Da The tide refers to the vital laughter of the un- repressed Negroes in the background of this novel about sterility and frustration in the machine age. This story of the Midwest is written with a stream- of-consciousness technique. 1 184. Tar, a Midwest childhood. New York, Boni & Liveright, 1926. 346 p. 26-22222 PS3501.N4Z52 1 1 85. The portable Sherwood Anderson, edited, and with an introd., by Horace Gregory. New York, Viking Press, 1949. 631 p. (The Viking portable library) 49-856 PS3501.N4A6 1949 Includes among numerous selections Death in the Woods (1933), p. 532-548, considered by the editor of this collection the masterpiece among Anderson's short stones. 1 1 86. Sherwood Anderson's memoirs. [New York] Harcourt, Brace, 1942. 507 p. 42-11377 PS3501.N4Z49 1 1 87. Letters; selected and edited with an introd. and notes by Howard Mumford Jones, in association with Walter B. Rideout. Boston, Little, Brown, 1953. 479 p. 52-12649 PS3501.N4Z54 1 1 88. Howe, Irving. Sherwood Anderson. New York, Sloane, 1951. xiii, 271 p. (The American men of letters series) 51-9927 PS3501.N4Z65 "Bibliography": p. 257-260. 1 1 89. Schevill, James Erwin. Sherwood Ander- son, his life and work. [Denver] University of Denver Press, 195 1, xvi, 360 p. illus. 51-10225 PS3501.N4Z8 Bibliography: p. 356-357. 1 190. SHALOM ASCH, 1880- Asch is a Polish-born commentator on Jewish life and problems. His cycle of novels on Biblical themes — The Nazarene (1939), The Apostle (1943), Mary (1949), and The Prophet (1955)— has enjoyed wide circulation in the United States, where the author, although long a naturalized citizen, continues to write in Yiddish and to have his books translated for the American audience. One of his recurring themes, illustrated by the titles below, is the adjustment of Jewish immigrants to the new environment encountered in the United States, usually in an urban setting such as New York City. The author has also dealt with prob- lems of Jewish life abroad, as in Three Cities (1933)* a trilogy dealing with Jews in Russia. 1 191. The mother; authorized translations by Elsa Krauch. New York, Putnam, 1937. 295 p. 37-28739 PZ3.A798M06 An earlier version was published in 1930 in a translation by Nathan Ausiibel. 1 192. Three novels: Uncle Moses, Chaitn Led- erer's return, Judge not — ; translation by Elsa Krauch. New York, Putnam, 1938. 176, 116, 127 p. 38-29527 PZ3.A798Thr Written originally between 1916 and 1923. 1 193. East River, a novel. Translation by A. H. Gross. New York, Putnam, 1946. 438 p. 46-7365 PZ3-A798Eas 1 194. A passage in the night. New York, Put- nam, 1953. 367 p. 53-8146 PZ3.A798Pas 1 195. Lieberman, Herman. The Christianity of Sholem Asch, an appraisal from the Jewish viewpoint. [From the Yiddish, by Abraham Bur- stein] New York, Philosophical Library, 1953. 276 p. 53-H659 PJ5129.A8Z783 LITERATURE (1607-I955) / IO3 1 196. MARY (HUNTER) AUSTIN, 1 868-1934 A writer with a strong local interest in the Indian culture of the Southwest, particularly in California and New Mexico, Mrs. Austin left an autobiographical record of her varied literary career in Earth Horizon (1932). The American Rhythm (1923, enl. ed., 1930) expounds her idea that the American environment and way of life determine the verse forms suited to poems written in the United States. It includes also an anthology of her "re-expressions" of native Indian verse. 1 197. The land of little rain. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1903. 280 p. 3-26358 F786.A93 Short stories. 1 198. One-smoke stories. Boston, Houghton Mif- flin, 1934. 294 p. 34-27071 PZ3A93730n 1 199. PHILIP BARRY, 1896-1949 While Barry's recognized genre was that of the social comedy, in which he had numerous suc- cesses on the stage, his plays also provide penetrating studies of marriage as an institution, the relation of parents to children, and other important aspects of American family life. Hotel Universe (1930), a symbolic play on the mystic power of goodness in a man considered by the world to be insane, is one of his most serious dramatic works. 1200. Holiday, a comedy in three acts. New York, S. French, 1929. 205 p. 29-7881 PS3503.A648H6 1929 1201. The animal kingdom, a comedy. New York, S. French, 1932. 198 p. 32-17483 PS3503.A648A8 1932 1202. The Philadelphia story; a comedy in three acts. New York, Coward-McCann, 1939. 206 p. 40-1 1 146 PS3503.A648P5 1939a 1203. Second threshold; with revisions and a pref. by Robert E. Sherwood. New York, Harper, 1951. 132 p. 51-10938 PS3503.A648S4 1951 A play. 1204. SAMUEL NATHANIEL BEHRMAN, 1893- Behrman began by writing "pure" comedy. Faced by the turmoil of the thirties, he began in his plays to explore the possibility of comedy in our time and produced comedies reflecting the more serious issues of the period. In recent years he has adapted a number of foreign plays, written rem- iniscences of his childhood in Worcester, Massa- chusetts, and he has also published a humorous, perceptive biography of an art dealer: Duveen (1952). 1205. Biography, a comedy. New York, Farrar & Rinehart, 1933. 241 p. 33-4065 PS3503.E37B5 1933 1206. Three plays: Seiena Blandish, Meteor, The second man. New York, Farrar & Rinehart, 1934- 355 P- 34-6 70 PS3503-E37 T 5 *934 1207. Rain from heaven, a play in three acts. New York, Random House, 1935. 250 p. 35-2998 PS3503.E37R3 1935 1208. End of summer. New York, Random House, 1936. 256 p. 36-7652 PS3503.E37E6 1936 1209. No time for comedy. New York, Random House, 1939. 216 p. 39-14726 PS3503.E37N6 1939 1210. The Talley method, a play in three acts. New York, Random House, 1941. 197 p. 41-8550 PS3503.E37T3 1 94 1 121 1. The pirate. New York, Random House, 1943. xii, 209 p. plate. 43-5 1 1 14 PS3503.E37P5 A play. 1212. Jane. New York, Random House, 1952. 195 p. 5 2 -8279 PS3503.E37J3 1213. The Worcester account. New York, Ran- dom House, 1954. 239 p. 53-5014 PS3503.E37Z53 Reminiscences. 1214. ROBERT CHARLES BENCHLEY, 1889- 1945 A successful journalist and drama critic, Bench- ley achieved his greatest prominence as a comedian working through short films and radio nppi. fi- ances, as well as through his numerous humorous articles, which were originally written m.iinl periodicals, anil Liter collected in volumes such as Of All Things (1921), Love Conquers All (1922), Finely and Luc\ (1925), The Early Worm (1927), The Treasurer's Report, and ' Aspects of Community Singing (i<)}<>), and From Bed to Worse; or, Comforting Thoughts about the 104 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Bison (1934). The titles themselves reflect the literate, verbal nonsense which was his specialty. His gentle satire (of which he himself was the main target) encompassed a broad range of topics, chiefly concerned with everyday affairs such as pigeon persecution, music interpretation, and the menace of buttered toast. Selections from earlier volumes appeared in Inside Benchley (1942), Benchley — Or Else! (1947), and The Benchley Roundup (1954). An additional element of humor was given the Benchley books by the many illustrations supplied by Gluyas Williams. 1215. 20,000 leagues under the sea; or, David Copperfield. New York, Holt, 1928. 233 p. illus. 28-31 1 16 PS3503.E49T8 1928 1216. No poems; or, Around the world backwards and sideways. New York, Harper, 1932. 330 p. illus. 32-34924 PS3503.E49N6 1932 1217. My ten years in a quandary, and how they grew. New York, Harper, 1936. 361 p. illus. 36-9634 PS3503.E49M9 1936 1 218. After 1903 — what? New York, Harper, 1938. 271 p. illus. 38-2530 PS3503.E49A7 1938 1219. Benchley beside himself. New York, Harper, 1943. 304 p. illus. 43-8712 PS3503.E49B4 1220. Chips off the old Benchley. New York, Harper, 1949. 273 p. illus. 49-10872 PS3503.E49C5 1221. Benchley, Nathaniel. Robert Benchley, a biography. New York, McGraw-Hill, 1955. 258 p. illus. 55-10402 PS3503.E49Z6 1222. STEPHEN VINCENT BENET, 1898-1943 As a poet, novelist, and short story writer, Benet made use of themes drawn from American history and folklore. In his poetry he often adapted forms from folk ballads, a device he used also in the varying metrics of his Civil War epic, John Brown's Body ( 1928), which was awarded a Pulitzer prize and which has been called the most popular long poem of the century. His posthumous West- ern Star (1943), celebrating the English settlements at Jamestown and Plymouth, constitutes book one of an incomplete narrative poem about the western migration of peoples. As a short-story writer Benet is probably best known for The Devil and Daniel Webster (1937), which has practically become a part of New Hampshire folklore, and which was made into a successful movie and also used to produce a libretto for an opera by Douglas Moore (b. 1893). Benet's first two novels, The Beginning of Wisdom (1921) and Young People's Pride (1922), were stories of de- veloping young authors, and they showed the in- fluence of F. Scott Fitzgerald. The third novel of his youthful period was ]ean Huguenot (1923), which dealt with the problem of a woman's values in life. Spanish Bayonet (1926), which is probably his best-known novel, is a story of the development of Florida, with the Revolutionary War period for temporal background. In America (1944) Benet produced a short, popular history of this country from its founding to Pearl Harbor. Also published posthumously was The Last Circle (1946), in which his wife, Rosemary Carr Benet (b. 1900), collected stories and poems not appearing in previous volumes and for the most part written in the last few years of the author's life. 1223. James Shore's daughter. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, Doran, 1934. 277 p. 34-15494 PZ3.B4292jam A novel in which the main attempt is to recreate the spirit of the times of the late 19th and the open- ing decades of the 20th centuries in America. 1224. Selected works. New York, Farrar & Rine- hart, 1942. 2 v. 42-15523 PS3503.E5325A6 1942 The first volume is devoted to Benet's poetry. In addition to the epic poem John Brown's Body (1928), it includes material from the author's earlier volumes, Young Adventure (1918), Heavens and Earth (1920), Tiger Joy (1925), Ballads and Poems, 1915-1930 (1931), and Burning City (1936). The second volume is devoted to his prose; in addition to the complete novel, Spanish Bayonet (1926), it includes short stories under the three headings of "Stories of American History," "Tales of Our Time," and "Fantasies and Prophecies." Benet's earlier collections of short stories were Thirteen 0'Cloc\ (1937) and Tales Before Midnight (1939). 1225. JOHN PEALE BISHOP, 1 892-1944 Bishop's poetry, criticism, general essays, re- views of poetry, and miscellaneous articles, pub- lished posthumously in collected editions, contribute to an understanding of forces that impinged upon American society between two world wars and that were reflected in the literature of the period. He wrote in a style formed by his taste for classic re- straint, substantial values, decorum, and elegance. William Butler Yeats and T. S. Eliot were forma- tive influences in the development of his poetical LITERATURE (1607-I955) / IO5 work. Bishop also produced some distinguished fiction: notably, Many Thousands Gone (New York, Scribner, 1931. 282 p.), a volume of short stories dealing with the South during the Civil War period, and Act of Darkness (New York, Scribner, 1935. 368 p.), a novel which reflects life in a West Virginia town early in the 20th century. 1226. Collected essays. Edited with an introd. by Edmund Wilson. New York, Scribner, 1948. 508 p. 48-8528 PS3503.I79A16 1948 This volume is divided into ten sections: "Es- says," "Painters," "Moving Pictures," "Novelists of the Twenties," "Novelists of the South," "Poetry Reviews," "Miscellaneous Articles," "Aphorisms and Notes," "Portraits of Places," and "Stories." The last section does not constitute a collection of his short stories, for none of those in Many Thousands Gone (vide supra) are included. 1227. Collected poems. Edited with a pref. and a personal memoir by Allen Tate. New York, Scribner, 1948. 277 p. 48-4117 PS3503.I79A17 1948 This volume contains many poems previously unpublished or published only outside the earlier volumes of the author's poetry, as well as reprint- ing the contents of Green Fruit (1917), Now with His Love ( 1933), Minute Particulars ( 1935), and the new material in Selected Poems (1941). 1228. RICHARD PALMER BLACKMUR, 1904- By his own experience as a poet Blackmur is exceptionally well-qualified to analyze, interpret, and criticize the language and accomplishments of poets such as Emily Dickinson, Ezra Pound, T. S. Eliot, Wallace Stevens, Marianne Moore, and E. E. Cummings. An insight into his critical methods and purposes may be gained from "A Critic's Job of Work," an essay found in The Double Agent and also in Language as Gesture. 1229. The double agent; essays in craft and elucida- tion. New York, Arrow Editions, 1935. 302 p. 35-31958 PS324.B6 1230. From Jordan's delight [poems] New York, Arrow Editions, 1937. I0 5 P- 37-4180 PS3503.L266F7 1937 1231. The expense of greatness. New York, Ar- row Editions, 1940. 305 p. 40-34148 PR473.B56 Partial Contents. — The craft of Herman Mel- ville: a putative statement. — A note of Yvor Win- ters. — The composition in nine poets: 1937. — Nine poets: 1939. — The letters of Marian Adams. — The expense of greatness: three emphases on Henry Adams. 1232. The second world [poems] Cummington, Mass., Cummington Press, 1942. 29 p. 42-17666 PS3505.L266S4 1233. Language as gesture; essays in poetry. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1952. 440 p. • 52-6451 PN1055.B55 1234. The lion and the honeycomb; essays in solici- tude and critique. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1955. 309 p. 55—5638 PS121.B59 1235. Anni mirabiles, 1921-1925: reason in the madness of letters; four lectures presented under the auspices of the Gertrude Clarke Whittall Poetry and Literature Fund. Washington, Ref- erence Dept., Library of Congress, 1956. 55 p. 56-60048 PN771.B56 A discussion of European and American litera- ture of the twenties. 1236. LOUISE BOG AN, 1897- Throughout Louise Bogan's career critics have ascribed to her poetry excellence of form, traditional lyric quality, originality, and sustained power. Her scholarship in literary criticism, par- ticularly with reference to poetry, is evidenced in frequent contributions to journals and in her Achievement in American Poetry, 1900-1950 095 1 )- 1237. Collected poems, 1923-1953. New York, Noonday Press, 1954. 126 p. 54-9946 PS3503.O195A17 1954 The material in this volume is mostly derived from the author's earlier books of poetry: Body of This Death (1923), Dar\ Summer (1929), The Sleeping Fury (1937), and Poems and New Poems (1941). 1238. Selected criticism: prose, poetry. New York, Noonday Press, 1955. 404 p. 55-8230 PN511.B54 A selection of critical articles and reviews (mostly of new poetry) which Louise Bogan prepared for various periodicals over a period of thirty years. 1239. JAMES BOYD, 1888-1944 James Boyd first gained prominence by novels with a Southern setting dealing with the Revolutionary and Civil Wars. These were followed I06 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES by Long Hunt (1930), which dealt with the opening of the frontier from North Carolina to the Missis- sippi, and Bitter Cree\ (1939), which reflected life in the high plains country of the Rocky Mountains during die second half of the 19th century. Roll River (1935) was a story of four generations of a Pennsylvania family. A posthumous volume, Old Pines, and Other Stories (1952) was a selection of stories set in his home state of North Carolina. 1240. Drums. New York, Scribner, 1925. 490 p. 25-8792 PZ3.69375Dr A Revolutionary War novel that has become a "high school classic." 1 24 1. Marching on. New York, Scribner, 1927. 426 p. 27-1 1031 PS3503.O885M3 1927 PZ3.B69375Ma This book, whose story centers about a Confed- erate soldier during the Civil War, presents char- acters who are descendants of those in Drums. 1242. KAY BOYLE, 1903- Kay Boyle has passed much of her life as an expatriate, a fact which is reflected in her fiction dealing with one or two Americans in Europe, often in France. As a result her theme often becomes one of contrasting individuals or cultures. Occasionally she has drifted from portraying "normal" conflicts to portraying sexual perversions and writing moral "horror" stories, such as Gentlemen, I Address You Privately (1933) and Monday Night (1938). An experimentalist who has been praised for her style and for her evocation of places and things more than for her character presentation, her objectivity or noninvolvement in her stories lends an appearance of realism, despite linguistically mannered prose. Her work is usually more sustained in her short stories and novelettes than in her longer works, and many have regarded her as one of the best of modern short-story writers. 1243. Plagued by the nightingale. New York, Cape & Smith, 1931. 334 p. 31-6593 PZ3.B69796PI An American girl and her French husband face the problem of the need to have a child in order to obtain money from his relatives, and the conflicting desire to avoid passing on a hereditary ailment. 1244. Year before last. New York, H. Smith, x 93 2 - 373 P- 3 2 - I 75 I 4 PZ3-B69796Ye A young man on the Riviera struggles between love of a woman and love of a magazine (financed, conditionally, by his aunt). 1245. Death of a man. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1936. 321 p. 36-22179 PZ3.B69796De A Nazi sympathizer, an American woman, and her English husband meet in the Austrian moun- tains. The book ends with Dollfuss' assassination. 1246. The crazy hunter; three short novels. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1940. 295 p. 40-6737 PZ3.B69796Cr Contents. — The crazy hunter. — The bride- groom's body. — Big Fiddle. 1247. Primer for combat. [New York] Simon & Schuster, 1942. 320 p. 42-36354 PZ3.B69796Pr Centering about an American woman, her hus- band, and their three children, this diary-form novel reflects life in a German-controlled French village during the summer of 1940. 1248. Thirty stories. New York, Simon & Schus- ter, 1946. 362 p. 46-11845 PZ3.B69796Th A selection from stories published in the preced- ing twenty years. 1249. His human majesty. New York, Whitde- sey House, 1949. 295 p. 49-8270 PZ3.B69796Hi A novel about ski troops training in the Colorado mountains in the winter of 1944. They are made up of emigres representing all countries overrun by the Nazis. 1250. The smoking mountain; stories of post war Germany. New York, McGraw-Hill, 1951. 273 p. 51-10197 PZ3.B69796S1T1 1251. The seagull on the step. New York, Knopf, 1955. 247 p. 55-5604 PZ3.B69796Se A concern over Franco-American relations is re- vealed in this novel about an American girl who comes to understand a French village. 1252. PEARL (SYDENSTRICKER) BUCK, 1892- As the daughter of American missionaries in China, Pearl Buck acquired the deep appreciation of the Chinese people which motivates her best-known works of fiction. Her portrayal of American mis- sionaries in China and the blending of Chinese and Western humanism in her own philosophy of life are of particular significance to the student of American civilization. She has furthered her role of interpreter of the East to the West through her LITERATURE (1607-1955) / IO7 translations and nonfictional writings. In 1932 she was awarded a Pulitzer prize and in 1938 a Nobel prize. In 1958 Mrs. Buck revealed that she had published novels with an American setting under the pen name of "John Sedges." 1253. The good earth. New York, John Day, 1931. 375 p. 31-26625 PZ3.B8555G0 1254. Sons. New York, John Day, 1932. 467 p. 32-27061 PZ3.B8555S0 1255. The mother. New York, John Day, 1934. 302 p. PZ3.B8555M0 34-807 PS3503.P198M6 1256. A house divided. New York, Reynal & Hitchcock, 1935. 353 p. 35-1591 PZ3.B8555H0 1257. The exile. New York, Reynal & Hitchcock, 1936. 315 p. 36-3511 BV3427.S852B8 1258. Fighting angel; portrait of a soul. New York, Reynal & Hitchcock, 1936. 302 p. 37-27009 BV3427.S85B8 1936 Fighting Angel, the biography of the author's father, is a companion volume to The Exile, which is a biography of her mother. Together they form a work to be entitled The Spirit and the Flesh. Cf. 1 st preliminary leaf. 1259. Dragon seed. New York, John Day, 1942. 37 8 P- 41-27318 PZ3.B8555Dr 1260. My several worlds, a personal record. New York, John Day, 1954. 407 p. 54-10460 PS3503.U198Z5 1261. JAMES BRANCH CABELL, 1897- Cabell expressed his ironic-satirical com- ments on mankind in general and Virginians in particular in a highly mannered but distinguished prose. Books such as The Cream of the Jest (1917) and Something About Eve ( 1927) were among those that stood out in his disconnected series of novels which had his mythical, somewhat medieval king- dom of Poictesme for setting. His most famous book, Jurgen (1919), aroused considerable publicity and controversy upon being banned at the time of its publication. Cabell writes symbolically in a style and context that tends to restrict his audience to those with a taste for preciosity. Always con- cerned with the esthetics of literature, he has con- tinued over the years to produce his own rather special type of book, and has over fifty volumes to his credit. 1262. Works. [Storisende ed.] New York, Mc- Bride, 1927-30. 18 v. PS3505.A153A1 1927 Contents. — 1. Beyond life. — 2. Figures of earth. — 3. The silver stallion. — 4. Domnei. The music from behind the moon. — 5. Chivalry. — 6. Jurgen. — 7. The line of love. — 8. The high place. — 9. Gal- lantry. — 10. Something about Eve. — 11. The certain hour. — 12. The cords of vanity. — 13. From the hidden way. The jewel merchants. — 14. The rivet in grandfather's neck. — 15. The eagle's shadow. — 16. The cream of the jest. The lineage of Lich- field. — 17. Straws and prayer-books. — 18. Town- send of Lichfield. 1263. Ladies and gendemen: a parcel of reconsid- erations. New York, McBride, 1934. 304 p. 34-34569 PS3505.A153L3 1934 Twenty letters addressed to famous personalities, real and fictitious, reassessing their reputations and characters. 1264. Smirt; an urbane nightmare. New York, McBride, 1934. xxi, 309 p. [The night- mare has triplets, v. 1] 34-6047 PZ3.Ci07Sm 1265. Smith; a sylvan interlude. New York, Mc- Bride, 1935. ix, 313 p. [The nightmare has triplets, v. 2] 35-22390 PZ3.Cio7Smi 1266. Smire; an acceptance in the third person. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, Doran, 1937. 311 p. [The nightmare has triplets, v. 3] 37-6125 PZ3.C107SI 1267. Let me lie, being in the main an ethnological account of the remarkable Commonwealth of Virginia and the making of its history. New York, Farrar, Straus, 1947. 286 p. 47-30215 F227.C213 Contents. — Quiet along the Potomac. — The first Virginian. — Myths of die Old Dominion. — Colonel Esmond of Virginia. — Concerns heirs and assigns. — Mr. Ritchie's Richmond. — Almost touch- ing the Confederacy. — General Lee of Virginia. — Is of Southern ladies. — "Published in Richmond, Virginia." — Miss Glasgow of Virginia. — As to our life and letters. 1268. Quiet, please. Gainesville, University of Florida Press, 1952. 105 p. 52-7061 PS3505.A153Q5 Autobiographical notes and commentary. 1269. As I remember it; some epilogues in recol- lection. New York, McBride, 1955. 243 p. 55-11765 PS3505.A153Z52 108 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 1270. ERSKINE CALDWELL, 1903- Caldwell's regional novels and short stories deal chiefly with Georgian poor whites. Although relieved by humor and concern, depravity and de- generacy are characteristic aspects of the people and situations with which his books are concerned. He has been variously regarded as an extreme realist and as an extreme romanticist of the horrible. 1271. Tobacco road. New York, Scribner, 1932. 241 p. 32-5023 PZ3.C12734T0 Dramatized by Jack Kirkland in 1933, the play had a phenomenal continuous Broadway run of over 3,000 performances. 1272. God's little acre. New York, Viking Press, IQ 33- 3°3P- 33~3 2QI PZ3.C12734G0 1273. Trouble in July. New York, Duell, Sloan & Pearce, 1940. 241 p. 40-27204 PZ3-Ci2734Tr 1274. Tragic ground. New York, Duell, Sloan & Pearce, 1944. 237 p. 45-1137 PZ 3 .Ci273 4 Tq 1275. Complete stories. New York, Duell, Sloan & Pearce, 1953. 664 p. 53-10243 PZ3.Ci2734Cn 1276. WILLA SIBERT CATHER, 1873-1947 Willa Cather studied in her novels the strug- gle between the spirit and the world. Her strong point was probably the stylistic purity of her de- piction of her native Nebraska and the Southwest. The sympathy she was able to feel for these re- gions dominates O Pioneers! (1913), The Song of the Lar\ (1915), My Antonia (1918, rev. 1926), A Lost Lady (1923), and Death Comes for the Archbishop (1927). Her novels, to a large extent either directly or symbolically autobiographical, tend more to chronicle form than to plot structure. 1277. The novels and stories. Library ed. [Bos- ton, Houghton Mifflin] 1937-41. 13 v. illus. A43-1040 DCU Each volume has special t. p. Contents. — 1. O Pioneers! — 2. The song of the lark. — 3. Alexander's bridge & April twilights. — 4. My Antonia. — 5. One of ours. — 6. Youth and the bright Medusa. — 7. A lost lady. — 8. The professor's house. — 9. Death comes for the archbishop. — 10. Shadows on the rock. — n. Lucy Gayheart & My mortal enemy. — 12. Obscure destinies & Literary encounters. — 13. Sapphira and the slave girl. 1278. On writing; critical studies on writing as an art, with a foreword by Stephen Tennant. New York, Knopf, 1949. 126 p. 49-10534 PS3505.A87048 1949 Contents. — Four letters: On Death comes for the Archbishop. On Shadows on the rock. Escapism. On The professor's house. — The novel demeuble. — Four prefaces: The best stories of Sarah Orne Jew- ett. Gertrude Hall's The Wagnerian romances. Stephen Crane's Wounds in the rain and other im- pressions of war. Defoe's The fortunate mistress. — My first novels (there were two). — On the art of fiction. — Katherine Mansfield. — Light on adobe walls (an unpublished fragment). 1279. Bennett, Mildred R. The world of Willa Cather. New York, Dodd, Mead, 195 1. xviii, 226 p. illus. 51—9633 PS3505.A87Z58 1280. Brown, Edward Killoran. Willa Cather, a < critical biography fby] E. K. Brown; com- pleted by Leon Edel. New York, Knopf, 1953. 1 351 p. 52-12204 PS3505.A87Z584 ; "Bibliographical note": p. [346]— 351. 1281. Daiches, David. Willa Cather, a critical in- troduction. Ithaca, Cornell University Press, 1951. 193 p. 51-9710 PS3505.A87Z62 • 1282. Lewis, Edith. Willa Cather living; a per- j sonal record. New York, Knopf, 1953. , 197 p. 52-12190 PS3505.A87Z72 1283. Sergeant, Elizabeth Shepley. Willa Cather, a memoir. Philadelphia, Lippincott, 1953. 288 p. illus. 52-13732 PS3505.A87Z83 1284. MARY ELLEN CHASE, 1887- Mary Ellen Chase writes primarily of Maine coast characters and the sea in her novels and novelettes. She has also written a number of auto- biographical works: A Goodly Heritage (1932) and A Goodly Fellowship (1939) reflect her Maine background and her life as an English teacher, chiefly at Smith College. The White Gate; Adven- tures in the Imagination of a Child (1954) portrays three years of her Maine childhood. 1285. Mary Peters. New York, Macmillan, 1934. 377 p. 34-27262 PZ3.C90iMar The heroine passes her youth on her father's ship, but later returns to setde in the Maine coastal vil- lage of her ancestors. 1286. Silas Crockett. New York, Macmillan, 1935. i 404 p. 35-253 8 7 PZ3- c 39 0lSi LITERATURE (1607-I955) / IO9 A novel which depicts maritime life along the coast for one hundred years through the story of four generations of a New England family. 1287. Dawn in Lyonesse. New York, Macmillan, 1938. 115 p. 38-27053 PZ3.C39oiDaw The Tristan and Isolde story reworked in a modern tale cf Cornwall. 1288. Windswept. New York, Macmillan, 1941. 440 p. 41-21397 PZ3.C39oiWi Story of a Maine coastal family and their friends, from the 1880's to 1939. 1289. The plum tree. New York, Macmillan, 1949. 98 p. 49-11252 PZ3.C3901PI A novelette of a day in a home for aged women. 1290. ROBERT PETER TRISTRAM COFFIN, 1892-1955 Coffin is a Maine poet best known for his realistic, pastoral lyrics, verses which express a degree of sentimentality and a rural "wholesomeness" in a retrained, conventional manner; he was awarded the Pulitzer prize for poetry for Strange Holiness (1935). A prolific author, he has written in a num- ber of forms besides poetry, though usually and best about his native Maine. He has written novels, such as Red S^y In the Morning (1935) and John Dawn (1936); biography, represented by Captain Abby and Captain John (1939), the story of two Maine sea captains; and history as in Kennebec, Cradle of Americans (1937), the first volume in the Rivers of America series (q. v.). The recurring theme of Maine life, manners, and history may be found in these and most of his other works, includ- ing books such as Yankee Coast (1947) and Maine Doings (1950). In these works he pictures a part of rural America, past and present, at times using characterizations that verge on folklore in their presentation of basic aspects of American character, personality, and dreams. 1291. Portrait of an American. New York, Mac- millan, 193 1. 182 p. illus. 31-31494 PS3505.O234P6 1 93 1 Biography of the author's father. 1292. Lost paradise; a boyhood on a Maine coast farm. New York, Macmillan, 1934. 284 p. 34-35147 PS3505.O234Z5 1934 Autobiography. 1293. Thomas-Thomas- Ancil-T h o m a s. New York, Macmillan, 1941. 342 p. 41-6046 PZ3.C654iTh A novel in poetic prose on the theme of the con- tinuity of life from father to son through the genera- tions; the contemporary heir is a Maine farmer. 1294. Book of uncles. New York, Macmillan, 1942. 151 p. 42-22252 PS3505.O234B6 Fifteen sketches, each about a different uncle. 1295. Collected poems. New and enl. ed. New York, Macmillan, 1948. 446 p. 48-2263 PS3505.O234A17 1948 Much of Coffin's poetry had previously appeared in such volumes as his Christchurch (1924), Dew and Bronze (1927), Golden Falcon (1929), The Yo\e of Thunder (1932), Ballads of Square-Toed Americans (1933), Saltwater Farm (1937), Maine Ballads (1938), There Will Be Bread and Love (1942), Primer jor America (1943), Poems for a Son with Wings (1945), and People Behave li\e Ballads (1946). 1296. Apples by ocean. [ Poems] New York, Mac- millan, 1950. 128 p. 50-10425 PS3505.O234A7 1297. Selected poems. New York, Macmillan, 1955. 112 p. 55-14775 PS3505.O234A6 1955 1298. JAMES GOULD COZZENS, 1903- Cozzens is a realistic novelist who writes about a variety of topics. Employing a carefully practiced style within traditional limits, he presents objective, rounded pictures of individuals and situa- tions. 1299. The last Adam. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1933. 301 p. 33-1357 PZ 3 .C8398 3 Las London edition (Longmans, Green & Co.) has title: A Cure of Flesh. A smalltown doctor's story which presents life in a Connecticut community. 1300. Men and brethren. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1936. 282 p. 36-755 PZ 3 .C8 3 983Me A study of a clergyman in contemporary New York City. 1301. The just and the unjust. New York, Har- court, Brace, 1942. 434 p. 42-17992 PZ3.C83983JU Presents liic in a small Connecticut village dur- ing a murder trial. 110 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 1302. Guard of honor. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1948. 631 p. 48-8544 PZ3.C83983G11 Story of three days at an air training base in Florida in 1943; it reflects the problems of civilians adjusting to military life. 1303. HART CRANE, 1899-1932 Hart Crane experienced many literary in- fluences, such as the Elizabethans, some late 19th- century French poets, and Dante; he also highly admired and drew inspiration from Whitman, but his work was closer in spirit and technique to Poe. Although Crane published only two books during his life, he is generally considered one of the fore- most poets of his era. Through his belief in the "logic of metaphor," applying to it his emotional and intellectual force, and employing tonal adroit- ness, he created a poetry of eloquence and sonorous, compelling rhetoric. When on occasion his work fails to be the integrated entity he desired, it suc- ceeds as fragments, verbally intense and sensitive. His most ambitious work was The Bridge, an at- tempt to create a meaningful, affirmative integration of modern American life. 1304. The collected poems; edited with an introd. by Waldo Frank. New York, Liveright, 1933- 179 P- front, (port.) 33-271 1 1 PS3505.R272 1933 This collection includes the poems from White Buildings (1926) and The Bridge (1930). It also contains a section entitled Key West: An Island Sheaf, a group of publications which Crane had prepared for separate volume publication. In addi- tion there is a group of "Uncollected Poems" and an essay on "Modern Poetry." 1305. Letters, 1916-1932; edited by Brom Weber. New York, Hermitage House, 1952. 426 p. 52-12760 PS3505.R272Z54 1306. Weber, Brom. Hart Crane, a biographical and critical study. New York, Bodley Press, 1948. 452 p. ports., facsims. 48-6081 PS3505.R272Z8 Includes an appendix of Hart Crane's uncollected poetry and prose and the worksheets of Atlantis. "Selected bibliography": p. 441-443. 1307. COUNTEE CULLEN, 1903- 1946 Cullen was a Negro poet who wrote conserva- tive, formal lyrics. Although he expressed little of the racial consciousness or Negro rhythms found in the verse of men such as Langston Flughes and James Weldon Johnson, his greater verbal and metrical fluency gained him more popularity. 1308. On these I stand; an anthology of the best poems of Countee Cullen. Selected by him- self and including six new poems never before published. New York, Harper, 1947. 197 p. 47-30109 PS3505.U287A6 1947 1309. EDWARD ESTLIN CUMMINGS, 1894- Since his first book of poetry, Tulips and Chimneys, the poetry of E. E. Cummings has been romantic and typographically unusual. Although he occasionally employs other moods, his most char- acteristic poems are romantic lyrics with a surrealis- tic touch, marked by considerable verbal experi- mentation. Far less known for his prose, he has nevertheless produced several distinguished volumes in that medium. 13 10. The enormous room. New York, Boni & Liveright, 1922. 271 p. 22-9403 D570.9.C82 An account of his imprisonment by mistake in a French military prison during the First World War. 13 1 1. Eimi. New York, Covici, Friede, 1933. 432 p. 33-8819 PS3505.U334E5 1933a The record of a trip through Soviet Russia, with an account of the author's protests against conditions there. 13 12. I; six nonlectures. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1953. 118 p. (The Charles Eliot Norton lectures, 1952-1953) 53-10472 PS3505.U334Z5 Contains a statement of his position as a writer; some autobiographical material is included. 1313. Poems, 1923-1954. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1954. 468 p. 54-9724 PS3505.U334 1954 Contents. — Tulips and chimneys (1923). — & (1925). — XLI poems (1925). — Is 5 (1926). — W (1931). — No thanks (1935). — New poems [from Collected poems] (1938). — 50 poems (1940). — 1 x 1 (i 944 ).-XAIPE (1950). 1314. HAROLD LENOIR DAVIS, 1896- H. L. Davis is an Oregon author who regu- larly writes about his home area. Best known for his fiction, which includes Beulah Land (1949), a story of the frontier, and Winds of Morning (1952), a novel of the Columbia River Valley country that LITERATURE (1607-I955) / III has been called an "intellectual western," Davis has also produced a volume of regional poetry, Proud Riders (1942). 1315. Honey in the horn. New York, Harper, 1935. 380 p. 35-16787 PZ3.D29355H0 A novel about homesteading in Oregon early in the 20th century; the book was awarded a Pulitzer prize in 1936. 1316. Team bells woke me, and other stories. New York, Morrow, 1953. 300 p. 53-5338 PZ3.D2 9 35 5 Te 13 1 7. CLARENCE DAY, 1874- 1935 Day was a humorous essayist who was best known for his autobiographical works portraying family life, the most popular of which was Life with Father (1935), which in play form (by Howard Lindsay and Russel Crouse, 1940) was a great Broadway success. Some critics consider Day's somewhat cynical, satirical This Simian World ( 1920) his best work. 1318. The best of Clarence Day, including God and my father, Life with father, Life with mother, This simian world, and selections from Thoughts without words. New York, Knopf, 1948. 451 p. illus. 48-6580 PS3507.A585B4 i3 IQ - HILDA DOOLITTLE, 1886- H. D., as she preferred to sign herself, was in a sense the main poet of the Imagist group, for she was the one who abided most consistently by its doctrines. Her work, which has often been called "classic," does not attempt either to interpret or to present the problems of modern life; rather, it is a frugal, evocative presentation of something seen in nature. 1320. Collected poems of H. D. New York, Boni & Liveright, 1925. 306 p. 2 5-9543 PS35oi-L373 Al 7 *9 2 5 This volume was reissued in 1940. Earlier books of poetry by Hilda Doolitde include Sea Garden (1916), Hymen (1921), and Heliodora, and Other Poems (1924). 1321. Red roses for bronze, by H. D. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 193 1. 147 p. 32-26042 PS3501.L373R4 1931 1322. The walls do not fall, by H. D. London, New York, Oxford University Press, 1944. 48 p. 44-7016 PS3501.L373W3 1323. Tribute to the angels, by H. D. London, New York, Oxford University Press, 1945. 42 p. 45-10399 PS3501.L373T7 1324. The flowering of the rod, by H. D. London, New York, Cumberlege, Oxford University Press, 1946. 50 p. 47-59 1 PS3501.L373F5 1325. JOHN RODERIGO DOS PASSOS, 1896- John Dos Passos started as a leftist novelist. He is probably best known for his triology entitled U. S. A., originally published as 42nd Parallel (1930), 1919 (1932), and The Big Money (1936), a work of realistic fiction with many stylistic innova- tions; a heavy emphasis on fact and a detailing of the background give the work value as a commentary on a period in this country's history. As Dos Passos later turned from his leftist views, he turned in- creasingly to nonfiction: observational books of fic- tion, biographical works, etc. Part of his work now appears dated because of its journalistic nature; much survives, however, as fiction or reportage of more than momentary interest. 1326. Three soldiers. New York, G. H. Doran, 1921. 433 p. 21-26886 PZ3.D74Th Depicts the effects of World War I on three "typi- cal" American privates. 1327. Manhattan transfer. New York, Harper, 1925. 404 p. 25-23116 PZ3.D74Ma The lives of more than a dozen individuals are presented in numerous fictional episodes meant to mirror the complex pattern of life in modern New York City. 1328. U. S. A. 1. The 42nd parallel. 2. Nineteen nineteen. 3. The big money. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1937. [ 1471 ] p. 38-27019 PZ3.D74US Various pagings. 1329. The ground we stand on; some examples from the history of a political creed. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1941. 420 p. 41-16286 E183.D7 The development of the American creed of liberty is traced through biographical studies of individuals who influenced the conception. 1330. State of the Nation. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1944. 333 p. plates. 44-6169 E169.D68 An account of a trip through the United States during the Second World War. 112 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 133 1. Chosen country. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 195 1. 485 p. 51-7856 PZ3.D74Ch 1848-1930 in America reflected through numerous episodic sections, after the manner of the author's U. S. A. 1332. District of Columbia. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1952. 342, 248, 446 p. 52-7617 PZ3.D74Di Also published as three separate volumes: Adven- tures of a Young Man; Number One; and The Grand Design. Reflects American life in the twenties, thirties, and early forties. 1333. THEODORE DREISER, 1871-1945 Dreiser's works played a major role in the breakdown of the "genteel" tradition in American literature and in the development of fiction as a medium for serious treatment of social and eco- nomic abuses. His novels are, in general, deter- ministic, portraying as they do human beings acted upon by their biological drives and by external forces in society and their environment. However unworthy Dreiser's characters may be, he presents them with sympathy, pity, and without condemna- tion. Important sources for a study of Dreiser's increasing disillusionment and pessimism, induced by life in Chicago, New York, and Philadelphia, are found in his numerous autobiographical works. 1334. Sister Carrie. New York, Doubleday, Page, 1900. 557 p. 1-29034 PZ3.D814S This edition was said to have been withheld from circulation because of the book's supposed "immo- rality." A new edition was given general release in 1912. The story, set mainly in Chicago and New York, is about a smalltown girl who rises from mistress to successful actress, while her erstwhile beloved sinks from successful businessman to beg- gardom and suicide. 1335. Jennie Gerhardt, a novel. New York, Harper, 191 1. 432 p. 11-26603 PZ3.D814J Set largely in Cleveland and New York, this is the story of a woman who gives up a man, whose mistress she has become, in order that he may in- herit a legacy and assume a less controversial position in society. 1336. The financier. New York, Harper, 1912. 779 p. (A trilogy of desire, v. 1) 12-24487 PZ3.D8i4Fi A character study of a rising big businessman in Philadelphia during the 1860's and early 1870's. A revised version appeared in 1927. 1337. The Titan. New York, John Lane, 1914. 551 p. (A trilogy of desire, v. 2) 14-9767 PZ3.D814T The great capitalist of The Financier has estab- lished himself in Chicago and prospers even more. Commercial and public utilities financial deals are shown against a background of the period's social standards and cultural views. In The Stoic (1947) the hero's further career was traced to London, where he undertook the building of that city's subway system. 1338. An American tragedy. New York, Boni & Liveright, 1925. 2 v. 26-141 PZ3.D8i4Am Based on an actual New York State murder case, this book presents the author's naturalistic and essen- tially tragic view of life in America. Contrasting standards and manners of various social strata are portrayed. 1339. The "genius." New York, John Lane, ^S- 736 p- 15-20143 PZ3.D814G3 RBD The story of a small-town Illinois artist's adjust- ment to society as his life develops in Chicago and New York and he finds his true vocation as a realistic painter. 1340. A Hoosier holiday. New York, John Lane, 1916. 513 p. illus. 16-23068 E169.D77 E168.D77 An automobile trip from New York City to Indiana. 1 34 1. Free, and other stories. New York, Boni & Liveright, 191 8. 369 p. 18-26757 PZ3.D8i4Fr 1342. Twelve men. New York, Boni & Liveright, 1919. 360 p. 19-6139 PS3507.R55T9 1919 Short stories. 1343. The bulwark. Garden City, N. Y., Double- day, 1946. 337 p. 46-25076 PZ3.D814BU A book of religious probing, it presents the life of a Quaker in a Quaker community near Philadelphia. 1344. A book about myself. New York, Boni & Liveright, 1922. 502 p. 22-25344 PS3507.R55Z5 1922 Republished in 1931 in two volumes bearing the titles: Dawn and Newspaper Days. 1345- The best short stories of Theodore Dreiser, edited with an introd. by Howard Fast. Cleveland, World Pub. Co., 1947. 349 p. 47-3829 PZ3.D8i 4 Be 1346. Dreiser, Helen (Patges) My life with Dreiser. Cleveland, World Pub. Co., 1951. 328 p. illus. 5 I ~ I 0332 PS3507.R55Z58 1347. Elias, Robert H. Theodore Dreiser, apostle of nature. New York, Knopf, 1949. xii, 354, xxi p. illus. 49-7227 PS3507.R55Z63 1348. Kazin, Alfred, and Charles Shapiro, eds. The stature of Theodore Dreiser; a critical survey of the man and his work. With an introd. by Alfred Kazin. Bloomington, Indiana University Press, 1955. 303 p. 55-8446 PS3507.R55Z64 1349. Matthiessen, Francis Otto. Theodore Dreiser. New York, Sloane, 195 1. 267 p. (The American men of letters series) 51-1734 PS3507.R55Z7 1350. RICHARD EBERHART, 1904- Although he apparently writes in large part by inspiration, Eberhart's poetry is known for its intellectual and philosophical aspects. His search is for the nature of man, and the position of man in time (and the meaning of time) and the universe. 135 1. Selected poems. London, Chatto & Windus, 1951. 86 p. , 5i-3i53 PS3509.B456A6 1951 tberhart s earlier volumes of poetry are A Bravery of Earth (1930), Reading the Spirit (1936), Song and Idea (1940), Poems, New and Selected (1944), and Burr Oa\s (1947). 1352. Undercliff: poems, 1946-1953. New York, Oxford University Press, 1953. 127 p. 53-13069 PS3509.B456U6 1353- WALTER DUMAUX EDMONDS, 1903- Edmonds is a popular historical novelist who concerns himself mainly with the New York State area, his best-known works being set in the Mohawk Valley and along the Erie Canal. 1354. Rome haul. Boston, Little, Brown, 1929. _ 347 P- 29-5703 PZ3.E242R0 Portrays Erie Canal life in the 1850's. 1355- Drums along the Mohawk. Boston, Little, Brown, 1936. 592 p. 36-16924 PZ3.E2 4 2Dr 431240—60 9 LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 1 13 A story of the Revolutionary War and its influ- ence on the farmers of the Mohawk Valley. 1356. Erie water. Boston, Litde, Brown, 1933. 506 p. 33-3217 PZ3.E2 42 Er A story of the building of the Erie Canal and life along the route from 1817 to 1825. 1357. THOMAS STEARNS ELIOT, 1888- T. S. Eliot, an American who became a British subject, wrote early poetry of frustration, disillusion, and despair expressive of the spiritual aridity and insecurity of a generation. His The Waste Land (1922) came to epitomize the feelings of the West's, and to some extent of the world's, cultured youth after the First World War. A sub- sequent turning to a highly religious poetry, as in Ash Wednesday (1930), reflected his acceptance of Anglican Catholic dogma and conservatism in po- litical and social views. Hence his essays have come to show an authoritarian assessment of literature and society. In recent years he has concentrated on verse drama, continuing experiments in verse forms, and leaning towards social satire and comedy. All his work has evidenced an extensive assimilation of modern psychological theories. Eliot has been one of the most influential of modern poets, his poetry having transcended national and linguistic bound- aries, and having provoked a formidable mass of critical and exegetical studies, not to mention in- numerable imitations. His receipt in 1948 of the Nobel prize for literature is partial indication of the entrenchment of his work in modern literature. 1358. Selected essays. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1950. 460 p. 50-10103 PN511.E443 1950 1359. Complete poems and plays. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1952. 392 p. — . . 52-"345 PS3509.L43 1952 Ihis volume contains the poetry published in earlier volumes, such as Prufroc\ (1917), Poems (1920), The Waste Land (1922), The Hollow Men O925), and Ash Wednesday (1930), as well as the "Ariel Poems," the "Minor Poems," and other verse as originally brought together in the author's Collected Poems, 1909-1935 (1936). It also con- tains the subsequent poems from Four Quartets ( IQ 43)> Old Possum's Boo{ of Practical Cats~( 1939), and the plays Murder in the Cathedral (1935), The Family Reunion (1939), and The Cocktail Party (1950). 1360. The confidential clerk, a play. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1954. '59 P- 54-5253 PS3509.L43C69 114 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 136 1. Drew, Elizabeth A. T. S. Eliot, the design of his poetry. New York, Scribner, 1949. 216 p. 49-1640 PS3509.L43Z67 1362. Gallup, Donald Clifford. T. S. Eliot; a bib- liography, including contributions to peri- odicals and foreign translations. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1953. 177 p. 53-5644 Z8260.5.G16 1953 A revision and extension of the author's A Bib- liographical Checklist of the Writings of T. S. Eliot, published in 1947. 1363. Gardner, Helen Louise. The art of T. S. Eliot. New York, Dutton, 1950. 185 p. 50-9034 PS3509.L43Z675 1950 1364. March, Richard, and M. J. Tambimuttu, eds. T. S. Eliot; a symposium from Conrad Aiken [and others] Compiled by Richard March and Tambimuttu. Chicago, Regnery, 1949. 259 p. illus. 49-48864 PS3509.L43Z73 1949 "A tribute to T. S. Eliot, on his sixtieth birthday, from his friends." 1365. Maxwell, Desmond Ernest Stewart. The poetry of T. S. Eliot. London, Routledge & Paul [1952] 223 p. 52-4500 PS3509.L43Z78 1952 1366. On the Four quartets of T. S. Eliot. Anon. With a foreword by Roy Campbell. Lon- don, Stuart, 1953. 64 p. 54-3457 PS3509.L43F668 1367. Rajan, Balachandra, ed. T. S. Eliot; a study of his writings by several hands. New York, Funk & Wagnalls, 1948. 153 p. 49-7235 PS3509.L43Z82 1948 Contents. — The waste land: an analysis, by Cleanth Brooks. — Ash Wednesday, by E. E. Duncan Jones. — Four quartets: a commentary, by H. L. Gardner. — The unity of the quartets, by B. Rajan. — Eliot's philosophical themes, by Philip Wheel- wright. — A question of speech, by Anne Ridler. — Eliot's critical method, by M. C. Bradbrook. — Notes on 'Gerontion,' by Wolf Mankowitz. — A check of T. S. Eliot's published writings (p. 139- 153)- 1368. Robbins, Rossell Hope. The T. S. Eliot myth. New York, Schuman, 1951. 226 p. 51-14190 PS3509.L43Z825 1369. Smidt, Kristian. Poetry and belief in the work of T. S. Eliot. Oslo, Dybwad, 1949. 228 p. (Skrifter utg. av det Norske videnskaps- akademi i Oslo. II. Hist.-filos. klasse, 1949, no. 1) 52-17717 PS3509.L43Z866 1370. Unger, Leonard, ed. T. S. Eliot: a selected critique. New York, Rinehart, 1948. xix, 478 p. 48-7063 PS3509.L43Z383 1371. Williamson, George. A reader's guide to T. S. Eliot; a poem-by-poem analysis. New York, Noonday Press, 1953. 248 p. 53~75 8 4 PS3509.L43Z898 1372. JAMES THOMAS FARRELL, 1904- James Farrell is best known for his novels, although he has also written short stories and non- fiction, the latter largely literary commentary. The locale for much of his fiction is that part of Chicago in which he grew up, a declining middle- and lower- class area whose inhabitants were for the most part Irish Catholics. Farrell, a liberal, wrote in the tradition of naturalistic realism, with as many sociological as philosophic or poetic overtones, so that his work is an indictment of a section of society and its frequendy despiritualizing effects. The dual moral standards of this group result in the ruin of Studs Lonigan (the hero of the early trilogy which is usually considered Farrell's most forceful work), while Danny O'Neill (the hero of a second, con- trasting series) survives and rises to a mature view of life. A somewhat comparable series tells the story of Bernard Clare (renamed Bernard Carr after the first volume); Clare (Carr) is presented as a Chicago-born writer whose career centers in New York, where much of his attention focuses on the problem of the leftist political position in the thirties. 1373. Studs Lonigan. New York, Vanguard Press, 1935. 201, 412, 465 p. 36-214 PZ3.F2465St PS3511.A738S7 1935 Contents. — Young Lonigan. — The young man- hood of Studs Lonigan. — Judgment day. 1374. A world I never made. New York, Van- guard Press, 1936. 508 p. 36-24944 PZ3.F2465W0 The story of Danny O'Neill is continued in No Star Is Lost (1938. 38-17566 PZ3.F2465N0); Father and Son (1940. 40-32291 PZ3-F2465Fat) ; My Days of Anger (1943. 43-16086 PZ3.F2465 My); and The Face of Time (1953. 53-10805 PZ3.F2 4 65Fac). 1375- The league of frightened Philistines, and other papers. New York, Vanguard Press, 1945. xiv, 210 p. 45-35125 PS3511.A738A16 1945 "Selected from ... [the author's] critical and non-fictional writing of the past fifteen years." — Preface. 1376. Bernard Clare. New York, Vanguard Press, 1946. 367 p. 46-3585 PZ3.F2465Be Continued in: The Road Between (1949. 49- 8444 PZ3.F2465R0) and Yet Other Waters (1952. 52-11116 PZ3.F2465Yg). 1377. Literature and morality. [New York] Van- guard Press, 1947. xv, 304 p. 47-4577 PN49.F3 1378. Reflections at fifty, and other essays. New York, Vanguard Press, 1954. 223 p. 54-11517 PS3511.A738R4 1379. WILLIAM FAULKNER, 1897- Faulkner, who was awarded the Nobel prize for literature in 1950, has been considered by some critics, in this country as well as abroad, to be the greatest of living novelists. Much of his writing has been experimental, utilizing techniques of stream-of-consciousness, interior monologues, and multiple personal narratives to portray events with psychological realism. Patterns of symbolic myth woven on the universal theme of human fate have been discovered by critics in many of his stories. The paradox of passion and compassion, violence and beatitude, pathos and comedy, realism and idealism, mammonism and mysticism are seldom separated very far in any of his work. Seeking moral purpose, he presents the past alive in the present — a historic deep South pervading a modern South. His stories usually take place in a fictional Mississippi county, a counterpart to his own home area, where morality and immorality take a large battlefield in a rural locale. While each volume is an individual unit, no character can take curtain bows with full assurance he will not be called upon to play a part in some subsequent drama. In this way Faulkner has presented a "human comedy" of a Southern community. Although he most char- acteristically presents a vision of life, rather than a concept of it, he allows philosophy to dominate in his latest novel A Fable, which was awarded the Pulitzer prize in 1955. Faulkner has also been one of the most influential of modern short-story writers, with volumes such as These 13 (1931) and Co Down, Moses (1942), which form an integral part of his work. He has also published some poetry: LITERATURE (1607-1955) / 115 The Marble Faun (1924) and A Green Bough (1933). He has on occasion spelled his name as "Falkner." 1380. Soldiers' pay. New York, Boni & Live- right, 1926. 319 p. 26-6911 PZ3.F272S0 Story of an American in the British air force dur- ing World War I who is seriously wounded and returns to his home in Georgia to die. 1381. Mosquitoes. New York, Boni & Liveright, 1927. 349 p. 27-10732 PZ3.F272M0 A satire with a New Orleans locale. 1382. Sartoris. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1929. 3 8o P- 2973496 PZ3.F272Sar Faulkner's first novel, portraying life in the South, traces the degeneracy of a prominent family in the course of three generations, from the Civil War to World War I. 1383. The sound and the fury. New York, Cape & Smith, 1929. 401 p. 29-20977 PZ3.F272S0U An experimental novel about a degenerate South- ern family, written, for most of the book, from the narrative point of view of the family's idiot boy. 1384. As I lay dying. New York, Cape & Smith, 1930. 254 p. 30-27682 PZ3.F272AS A somewhat acridly humorous portrait of the irrational behavior of human beings as seen by vari- ous individual characters in the story. 1385. Sanctuary. New York, Cape & Smith, 193 1. , 38° P- 3 I ~4 I 82 PZ3.F272San This, "the most horrific tale" of sex, cruelty, and violence which the author could imagine was suc- cessfully aimed at the popular market which his more serious works had failed to attain. 1386. Light in August. [New York] Smith & Haas, 1932. 480 p. 32-25588 PZ 3 .F2 7 2Li The story of a pregnant girl's search for her lover. 1387. Pylon. New York, Smith & Haas, 1935. 3*5 P- , 35-4415 PZ3.F272PV A story of airplane racing contestants during a carnival in a Southern city, this book, reflecting; Faulkner's dislike of cities, is outside the main cur- rent of his studies of a Southern community. 1388. Absalom, Absalom! New York, Random House, 1936. 384 p. 36-24678 PZ3.F27-\b; A tour de force of technical dexterity which traces Il6 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES the story of a Southern planter's family in the 19th century, as it has become known to a young college student in the 20th century. The several threads of narrative, each limited to that version of events which filters through the mind and personality of the character who narrates it, evoke a sense of the relativity of human history and an awareness of the symbolic significance of human character and hu- man motives in the past, as they are known in the present. 1389. The unvanquished. New York, Random House, 1938. 293 p. 38-7091 PS3511.A86U5 1938 Seven short stories forming a continuous novel which traces the life of the Sartoris family during the Civil War and the Reconstruction period. 1390. The wild palms. New York, Random House, 1939. 339 p. 39-1750 PZ3.F272W1 Two interwoven novelettes which develop con- trapuntal treatments of the theme of escape. One is the story of a New Orleans doctor who seeks with his beloved to escape from society but winds up in prison after the woman's death from an abortion. The other is the story {Old Man) of a convict who escapes from a chain gang during a flood on the Mississippi, and in the unavoidable performance of an act of heroism in saving the lives of a woman and her newborn baby becomes so trammeled in respon- sibility that he welcomes his return to prison. 1391. The hamlet. New York, Random House, 1940. 421 p. 40-7215 PS3511.A86H3 1940 A large family of lower-class whites batten upon a Southern community through cunning exploita- tion of Southern honor and integrity. 1392. Intruder in the dust. New York, Random House, 1948. 247 p. 48-8519 PZ3-F272ln Two boys, one Negro and one white, and an aristocratic old maid accumulate the evidence to prove the innocence and prevent the lynching of a Negro accused of murder. 1393. Knight's gambit. New York, Random House, 1949. 246 p. 49-11472 PZ3-F272Kn Six stories centering about a county attorney. 1394. Collected stories. New York, Random House, 1950. 900 p. 50-9187 PZ3.F272C0 1395. Requiem for a nun. New York, Random House, 1951. 286 p. 51-12731 PS3511.A86R4 1951 The story of the "heroine" of Sanctuary eight years later. 1396. A fable. [New York] Random House, 1954. 437 p. 54-6651 PZ3.F272Fab Set against the batdegrounds of Europe in World War I, this is the story of Christ in modern guise. 1397. Campbell, Harry M., and Ruel E. Foster. William Faulkner, a critical appraisal. Nor- man, University of Oklahoma Press, 1951. 183 p. 51-12064 PS3511.A86Z75 1398. Coughlan, Robert. The private world of William Faulkner. New York, Harper, 1954. 151 p. illus. 54-8943 PS3511.A86Z76 1399. Hoffman, Frederick J., and Olga W. Vick- ery, eds. William Faulkner: two decades of criticism. [East Lansing] Michigan State College Press, 1951. vii, 280 p. 51-13066 PS3511.A86Z8 I 1400. Howe, Irving. William Faulkner, a critical study. New York, Random House, 1952. xiii, 203 p. 52-5147 PS3511.A86Z84 1401. Miner, Ward L. The world of William Faulkner. Durham, N. C, Duke Univer- sity Press, 1952. 170 p. 52-14931 PS3511.A86Z9 1402. O'Connor, William Van. The tangled fire of William Faulkner. Minneapolis, Univer- sity of Minnesota Press, 1954. 182 p. 54-5657 PS3511.A86Z93 1403. EDNA FERBER, 1887- Edna Ferber has been successively a news- paper reporter, a writer of short stories, a novelist, and a playwright collaborating chiefly with George S. Kaufman. Her sympathies, reflected in her choice of themes, are as wide as the variations in the American scene she portrays. She has written now of the trials and triumphs of a middle-class business- woman or a farm wife, now of pioneering in Okla- homa, or again of life on a floating 19th-century theater set up in a showboat on the Mississippi River. Humor, rapid-paced narrative, love of life, and devo- tion to the United States infuse her books with quali- ties that have given them an extensive popular appeal. Her autobiography, A Peculiar Treasure (1939), is a document of the American experiment that touches the life of the Nation at many points. LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 117 1404. So-Big. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, Page, 1924. 360 p. 24-26188 PZ3.F380S0 Story of a farm wife's work for her son. Awarded the Pulitzer prize in 1925. 1405. Show boat. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, Page, 1926. 398 p. 26-15187 PZ3.F38oSh 1406. Cimarron. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, Doran, 1930. 388 p. 30-8609 PZ3.F38oCi Depicts the 1889 land rush in Oklahoma and the later development of the area. 1407. Saratoga trunk. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, Doran, 194 1. 352 p. 41-24504 PS3511.E46S3 1941 A Creole adventuress and a cowboy gambler at a 19th-century New York spa became involved in a struggle for control of a train trunk line. 1408. One basket; thirty-one short stories. New York, Simon & Schuster, 1947. 581 p. 47-30149 PZ3.F380n A collection that throws light on the develop- ment of the author's style. 1409. THOMAS HORNSBY FERRIL, 1896- Ferril, who lives in Denver, is a regional poet. However, in terms of his own region he is concerned with all time and all places. He watches mountains wearing away, cities coming and going, the passing of nations and the generations of man. In / Hate Thursday (1946), a collection of articles most of which were written for a weekly news- paper, the Roc\y Mountain Herald, he comments, with a less regional emphasis than in his poetry, on a great variety of specific topics. 14 10. New and selected poems. New York, Harper, 1952. 169 p. 52-8470 PS3511.E7245N4 Ferril's earlier volumes of poetry were High Passage (1926), Westering (1934), and Trial by Time (1944). 141 1. DOROTHEA FRANCES (CANFIELD) FISHER, 1879- Dorothy Canfield Fisher, whose New England regional novels and stories of American domestic life reveal the author's insight into the drama of lives that on the surface seem uneventful, published many of her early works under the name Dorothy Canfield. Her great love for France and French life is woven into her books as a theme second only to that of the devotion she feels for her permanent locale in rural Vermont. She writes in what has come to be called the conventional manner: that is, she designs a plot, develops her characters, tells a story, and tends to resolve conflicts idealistically. 1412. The bent twig. New York, Holt, 1915. 480 p. 15-26659 PZ3.F53B The development and maturing of a Middle West university professor's daughter. 14 13. Home fires in France. New York, Holt, 1918. 306 p. 18-26756 PZ3.F53H0 Short stories based on the author's experiences in France during World War I. 1414. The brimming cup. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1921. 409 p. 21-4168 PZ3.F53Br Problems of modern life studied in terms of Ver- mont characters. 14 15. Rough-hewn. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1922. 504 p. 22-19057 PZ3.F53R0 May be regarded as a "preface" to The Brimming Cup. It presents the childhood and youth of two of the main characters, taking them to the point where the earlier published book begins. 1416. The deepening stream. New York, Har- court, Brace, 1930. 393 p. 30-28175 PZ3.F33De Childhood through early married life of a woman born in the Middle West and spending some time in France. 1417. Seasoned timber. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1939. 485 p. 39-27079 PZ3.F53Se A Vermont study which centers about a poor, rural academy and a problem of democratic principles. 14 1 8. Four-square. [Short stories] New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1949. 236 p. 49-11288 PZ3.F53F0 14 19. Vermont tradition; the biography of an outlook on life. Boston, Little, Brown, 1953. 488 p. ^ 53-10226 F49.F57 A "spiritual" history of the author's adopted State. 1420. VARDIS ALVERO FISHER, 1895- Vardis Fisher is a prolific novelist whose early novels, in part autobiographical, realistically emphasize the hardships of life and the primitive conditions encountered on farms and in frontier Il8 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES locations in Idaho, Utah, and adjacent regions in the Far West. In various historical novels Mr. Fisher has developed additional themes drawn from the lit- erature of westward migrations in America. Among these are the discovery and final decline of the fabulous Comstock Lode, at Virginia City, Nevada, and the tragic suffering of the Donner Party during their trek from Illinois to California in 1846-47. In 1952 The Island of the Innocent appeared, being the seventh novel in a twelve-volume series entitled The Testament of Man, designed to trace the his- tory of mankind from prehistoric to modern times. This constitutes the author's most ambitious effort to portray man's struggle and attainments under dif- ferent civilizations. 1421. Toilers of the hills. Boston, Houghton Mif- flin, 1928. 361 p. 28-23667 PZ3.F539T0 Deals with life on a dry farm in Idaho. 1422. Dark Bridwell. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1931. 376 p. _ 3 I ~ I 44 I 9 P z 3-T539 Dar Elemental passions in the lives of a family on a remote mountain farm in Idaho comprise the ma- terials of the plot which this novel develops. 1423. In tragic life. Caldwell, Idaho, Caxton Printers, 1932. 464 p. 32-35789 PZ3.F 5 3 9 In Tetralogy concerned with the long search of the Western hero, Vridar Hunter, for the meaning of life. Succeeding volumes in their order of publi- cation are: Passions Spin the Plot (1934); We Are Betrayed (1935); and No Villain Need Be (1936). 1424. Children of God. New York, Harper, 1939. 769 p. 39- 2 7 6 49 PZ3-F539Ch A historical novel that treats as an American epic the beginnings of Mormonism, the persecution of the Mormons, and their long migration from the Middle West to Utah. 1425. FRANCIS SCOTT KEY FITZGERALD, 1 896-1940 F. Scott Fitzgerald was one of the leading recorders of the "jazz-age" or "frivolous twenties." His most successful novel, The Great Gatsby, like most of his work, dealt with millionaires, parvenus, and the general stridency of the period, this time mainly with a Long Island, New York, setting. Fitzgerald's later career as a Hollywood writer is the basis for Budd Schulberg's novel, The Disenchanted (New York, Random House, 1950. 338 p.). 1426. This side of paradise. New York, Scribner, 1920. 305 p. 20-6430 PZ3.F5754TI1 1427. The beautiful and damned. New York, Scribner, 1922. 449 p. 22-4437 PZ3.C575 4 Be 1428. The great Gatsby. New York, Scribner, 1925. 218 p. 25-10468 PZ3.F5754Gr 1429. The portable F. Scott Fitzgerald, selected by Dorothy Parker. Introd. by John O'Hara. New York, Viking Press, 1945. 835 p. (The Vik- ing portable library) 45-8464 PZ3.F5754P0 Contents. — Novels: The great Gatsby. Tender is the night. — Stories: Absolution. The baby party. The rich boy. May day. The cut-glass bowl. The offshore pirate. The freshest boy. Crazy Sunday. Babylon revisited. 1430. Kazin, Alfred, ed. F. Scott Fitzgerald: the man and his work. Cleveland, World Pub. Co., 1 95 1. 219 p. 51-10640 PS3511.I9Z67 1431. Mizener, Arthur. The far side of paradise; a biography of F. Scott Fitzgerald. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1951. xx, 362 p. ports. 51-9185 PS3511.I9Z7 "Fitzgerald's published work": p. 350-356. 1432. JOHN GOULD FLETCHER, 1886-1950 Living as an expatriated American in Eng- land, Fletcher early wrote poetry associated with the Imagist movement of 1907-17. In company with Amy Lowell he also experimented with the use of polyphonic prose. When he returned to live in his native State, Arkansas, he wrote of that region and on other themes native to the United States in a vein of mysticism colored by romance. His auto- biography, Life Is My Song (1937), indicates his intimate association with the course of American poetry throughout a period of significant develop ment. 1433. Selected poems. New York, Farrar & Rine- hart, 1938. 237 p. 38-14768 PS3511.L457A6 1938 On the basis of this volume Fletcher was awarded the Pulitzer prize for poetry in 1939. The selec- tions are from his earlier volumes: Irradiations, Sand and Spray (1915), Goblins and Pagodas (1916), The Tree of Life (1918), Breakers and Granite (1921), The Blac\ Roc\ (1928), and XXIV Elegies (1935). Preludes and Symphonies (1922) was a reissue of Irradiations, Sand and Spray, and Gob- lins and Pagodas. 1434. South star. New York, Macmillan, 194 1. 117 p. 41-6401 PS3511.L457S6 1941 LITERATURE (1607-I955) / II9 Includes a long poem in four parts, "The Story of Arkansas," accompanied by lyrics on various Southern themes. 1435. The burning mountain [poems] New York, Dutton, 1946. 96 p. 46-4558 PS3511.L457B8 1436. Simon, Charlie May (Hogue) Johnswood. New York, Dutton, 1953. 249 p. 53-6090 PS3537.I64Z5 Mrs. Fletcher's reminiscences of the home in Arkansas and the life she shared with her husband. 1437. ESTHER FORBES, 1894?- Esther Forbes is known for the accuracy of her evocative historical novels depicting New Eng- land. She conveys not only local color, but also character. She has also written some nonfktion, such as Paul Revere & the World He Lived In (1942), which was awarded a Pulitzer prize for his- tory, and The Boston Boo\ (1947), a book of photo- graphs by Arthur Griffin for which she wrote the text. 1438. O genteel lady! Boston, Houghton Mif- flin, 1926. 296 p. 26-9023 PZ3.F7418O The Massachusetts-bred heroine confronts the conventions and the intellectual life of the Vic- torian period. 1439. A mirror for witches in which is reflected the life, machinations, and death of famous Doll Bilby, who, with a more than feminine per- versity, preferred a demon to a mortal lover. Here is also told how and why a righteous and most awful judgment befell her, destroying both cor- poreal body and immortal soul. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1928. 213 p. illus. 28-12074 PZ3.F74i8Mi The story of a witch in 17th-century Salem, Massachusetts. 1440. Miss Marvel. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1935. 304 p. 35-14885 PZ3.F4i8Mis A New England mill manager's daughter achieves spinsterhood in the hope of romantic love. 1441. Paradise. New York, Harcourt, Brace, IQ 37- 556 P- 37- 2 7'°4 PZ3.F74i8Par A story of colonial pioneering in early 17th-cen- tury New England, through the beginning of King Phillip's War. 1442. The general's lady. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1938. 394 p. 38-27638 PZ3.F74i8Ge Love and life, with the last years of the American Revolution for setting. 1443. The running of the tide. Boston, Hough- ton Mifflin, 1948. 632 p. 48-4573 PZ3.F7418RU Life in later 18th- and early 19th-century Salem, then at its height as a shipping city. 1444. Rainbow on the road. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1954. 343 p. 53-9248 PZ3.F74i8Rai A picaresque novel about an itinerant portrait painter in New England in the 1830's. 1445. WALDO DAVID FRANK, 1889- Waldo Frank is the author of numerous works, both fiction and nonaction. His greatest reputation has been in Latin America, where, through his lectures and writings, he has helped gain an audience for other American authors. This interest has been a reciprocal affair, reflected in books such as his biography of Bolivar, Birth of a World (195 1 ), and South American Journey (1943). He has also written on Spanish culture in Virgin Spain, rev. ed. (1942). In The Jew in Our Day (1944) he discussed some of the problems of his fel- low Jews. He has also written books on more gen- eral aspects of American society and development, such as Our America (1919), The Re-discovery of America ( 1929), and In the American Jungle \ 1925- 1936] (1937), a collection of essays on industrial America. His better-known novels, often dealing with life in America, tend to portray social groups or areas. They have been criticized for lack of "char- acter" development, which is probably in part a result of his belief that the individual is a product of environment. In his early work Frank was a leftist, but he turned against the Communists in the thirties. There remains in his writings something of a mysti- cal, prophetic quality which either permeates or dominates his realistic work. 1446. Rahab. New York, Boni & Liveright, 1922. 250 p. 22-4977 PZ3.F8498Ra Set in New York, this is the story of a girl who, in purity of spirit, discovers God, while socially lapsing into prostitution. 1447. The death and birth of David Markand, an American story. New York, Scrihncr, 111^4. 542 p. 34-33666 PZ3.F8498De A New York businessman leaves home and fam- ily in search of life, and finds a new (radical) faith after four years of wandering about America. 120 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 1448. The bridegroom cometh. New York, Doubleday, Doran, 1939. 628 p. 39-13360 PZ3.F8498Br2 A novel that reflects American life between 1914 and 1924. The story is that of an inhibited girl, raised puritanically, who finds herself in social work and communism. 1449. Island in the Atlantic, a novel. New York, Duell, Sloan & Pearce, 1946. 503 p. 46-6710 PZ3.F8498IS A novel that reflects social changes in America, as three generations on Manhattan Island are traced from the Civil War to 1912. 1450. Not heaven; a novel in the form of prelude, variations, and theme. New York, Hermit- age House, 1953. 287 p. 53-8718 PZ3.F8498N0 This is an attempt to extend the limits of the novel; separate incidents are united by theme rather than traditional unities of time, place, or action. The theme might be said to be the situation of the modern human being. 1451. ROBERT FROST, 1874- A pastoral poet, Frost has been called a mod- ern Theocritus. His poems are descriptive of rural New England, mainly Vermont and New Hamp- shire, but they take incident and environment at a crucial, symbolic moment, which projects his idylls into the realm of the metaphysical lyric. His poetry has increasingly passed from an earlier relative em- phasis on environment and setting to a more recent elaboration of philosophical speculation. His verse has been cast primarily in the form of lyrics or dramatic monologues, or dialogues — with all forms having a prominent dramatic element. This is even further reflected in his language, which is an adaptation of conversational style to poetic form. Although in the main stream of modern thought, Frost has held aloof from the urban currents and eddies of "modern" literary convention, and re- mains authentically representative of the indigenous culture which absorbs but does not succumb to the machine age. 1452. Complete poems of Robert Frost, 1949. New York, Holt, 1949. 642 p. 49-9497 PS3511.R94 1949 This is the most recent, generally available edition of Frost's collected writings, although there have been many editions of his collected and selected poetry. His earlier volumes include A Boy's Will (1913), North of Boston (1914), Mountain Interval (1916), New Hampshire (1923), West-Running Broo\ (1928), A Further Range (1936), A Witness Tree (1942), A Masque of Reason (1945), A Masque of Mercy (1947), and Steeple Bush (1947). Frost's many other volumes are mainly single poems published in individual booklets. 1453. ZONA GALE, 1874-1938 Zona Gale wrote mainly novels and short stories which, whatever the name used, had her home town, Portage, Wisconsin, for setting. Her early books were sentimental, regional works, such as the popular Friendship Village (1909); however, she soon turned from sentimental tales to realistic works, and then, increasingly, a strain of mysticism and a concern for social conditions infused her work. 1454. Birth. New York, Macmillan, 1918. 402 p. 18-20940 PZ3.G1319B 1455. Miss Lulu Bett. New York, Appleton, 1920. 264 p. 20-4218 PZ3.Gi3i9Mi 1456. Faint perfume. New York, Appleton, 1923. 217 p. 23-6139 PZ3.Gi3i9Fa 1457. Preface to life. New York, Appleton, 1926. 345 p. 26-18625 PZ3.Gi3i9Pr 1458. Yellow gentians and blue. New York, Appleton, 1927. 188 p. 27-20431 PZ3-Gi3i9Ye 1459. Papa La Fleur. New York, Appleton, 1933. 154 p. 33-5483 PZ3.Gi 3 i 9 Pap 1460. ELLEN ANDERSON GHOLSON GLAS- GOW, 1 874- 1 945 Ellen Glasgow was a Virginian who depicted her State in realistic novels that may to some extent be regarded as social histories. Her idealism, her belief in the triumph of morality over futility, always restrains and directs her literary craftsman- ship. The worldly cause may at times be lost or obscure, but there is always a spiritual victory. She attempts to deal truthfully with a post-Civil War South, presenting settings and situations that are often grim, but relieved by her humor and affection. Although many of her numerous books have been acclaimed, Barren Ground (1925), Vein of Iron (1935), and The Romantic Comedians (1926) seem generally to be the most highly regarded. 1461. [Works] Virginia ed. New York, Scribner, 1938. 12 v. fronts. 38-24704 PS3513.L34 1938 Contents. — 1. Barren ground. — 2. The miller of Old Church. — 3. Vein of iron. — 4. The sheltered LITERATURE (1607-1955) / 121 life. — 5. The romantic comedians. — 6. They stooped to folly. — 7. The battle ground. — 8. The deliver- ance. — 9. Virginia. — 10. The voice of the people. — 11. Romance of a plain man. — 12. Life and Gabriella. 1462. In this our life. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1941. 467 p. 41-51629 PZ3.G464in 1463. The woman within. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1954. 307 p. illus. 54-11329 PS3513.L34Z5 Autobiography. "The works of Ellen Glasgow": p. 302. 1464. CAROLINE GORDON, 1895- Caroline Gordon, wife of Allen Tate, writes novels and short stories dealing with the South, especially the Kentucky-Tennessee region, and re- flecting the philosophy of the agrarians. 1465. Penhally. New York, Scribner, 1931. 282 p. 31-25046 PZ3.C6525Pe A story of a Kentucky family and their estate, Penhally, from 1826 into the 20th century. 1466. Aleck Maury, sportsman. New York, Scrib- ner, 1934. 287 p. 34-37083 PZ3.G6525A1 A character novel that takes the form of an auto- biography of a Virginia hunting and fishing enthusiast. 1467. The garden of Adonis. New York, Scrib- ner, 1937. 299 p. 37-339°3 PZ3.G652 5 Gar Conflicts of various social groups are presented in this novel set against a background of present-day plantation life in the South. 1468. None shall look back. New York, Scribner, J 937- 378 p. 37-27189 PZ3.G6525N0 Civil War story centering on the exploits of Con- federate Major General Nathan Forrest and the part played in the war by a Kentucky-Tennessee border family. 1469. Green centuries. New York, Scribner, 194 1. 469 p. 41-22068 PZ3-G6525Gr A novel of the westward movement from Virginia into Kentucky in the years before the Revolution. 1470. The women on the porch. New York, Scribner, 1944. 316 p. 44-4503 PZ3.G6525W0 431240—60 10 A psychological novel in which a woman leaves her New York husband and returns to her family home in Tennessee, where most of the story takes place. 1 47 1. The forest of the South. New York, Scrib- ner, 1945. 245 p. 45-9169 PZ3.G6525F0 Short stories. 1472. The strange children. New York, Scribner, I95 1 - 3°3P- 5!- I2 447 PZ3.G6525& A novel about a group of restless, roodess intel- lectuals in Tennessee. 1 473. PAUL ELIOT GREEN, 1 894- Paul Green is known primarily for his plays. He has been called a folk dramatist, and most of his work, including his novels and short stories, depicts life in the South, especially in North Carolina. In 1927 his In Abraham's Bosom was awarded the Pulitzer prize for drama. 1474. This body the earth. New York, Harper, 1935. 422 p. 35-19876 PZ3.G8248Th A story which reflects the folkways and social conditions of the poor tenant-farmer class of North Carolina. 1475. Out of the South, the life of a people in dramatic form. New York, Harper, 1939. 577 P- 39- 2 73!7 PS35i3-R45 2 ° 8 *939 Contents. — The house of Connelly. — The no 'count boy. — Saturday night. — The field god. — Quare medicine. — The hot iron. — In Abraham's bosom. — Unto such glory. — Supper for the dead. — Potter's field. — The man who died at twelve o'clock. — White dresses. — Johnny Johnson. — Hymn to the rising sun. — The lost colony. 1476. Salvation on a string, and other tales of the South. New York, 1946. 278 p. 46-6956 PZ3.G82 4 8Sal Short stories about the people of a small North Carolina farm town. 1477. The common glory, a symphonic drama of American history, with music, commentary, English folksong and dance. Chapel Hill, Univer- sity of North Carolina Press, 1948. 273 p. 48-11307 PS3513.R452C6 A spectacle drama about Virginia's contribution to the establishment of a democratic government in America; with Thomas Jefferson as the main character. 122 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES I 47 8. 1949. 1479. Dog on the sun, a volume of stories. Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina Press, 178 p. 49-11774 PZ3.G8248D0 PS3513.R452D6 Adams, Agatha B. Paul Green of Chapel Hill; edited by Richard Walser. Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina Library, 1951. vii, 116 p. (The University of North Carolina. Library extension publication, v. 16, no. 2) 51-62187 PS3513.R452Z58 1480. SAMUEL BERNARD GREENBERG, 1893-1917 Samuel Greenberg was a Viennese Jewish im- migrant who lived in poverty in New York. He left school at seventh grade to work. He early became ill with tuberculosis, and it was while in hospitals that he found time to do almost all of his writing. Untrained formally, and in isolation, he wrote a highly modernistic, mystic verse which has since come to be recognized as an extraordinary pre- cursor of the modern school. Drawing much of his inspiration from Emerson and Thoreau, Green- berg himself was to have a profound influence on Hart Crane, who read his work in manuscript. 148 1. Poems. A selection from the manuscripts, edited with an introd. by Harold Holden and Jack McManis; pref. by Allen Tate. New York, Holt, 1947. 117 p. 47-4715 PS3513.R4582P6 Includes autobiographical sketch. 1482. HORACE VICTOR GREGORY, 1898- Horace Gregory writes urbane poetry in a dramatic tone. In addition to his poetry and some critical work, he is known for his translation of poems by Catullus (1931) and a History of Ameri- can Poetry, 1900-1940 (1946), which he wrote with his wife, Marya Zaturenska (q. v.). 1483. Selected poems. New York, Viking Press, 1951. 143 p. 51-11788 PS3513.R558A6 1951 Earlier volumes of poetry by Gregory include Chelsea Rooming House (1930), No Retreat (1933), Chorus for Survival (1935), and Poems, 10.30-10,40 (1941). 1484. ZANE GREY, 1872-1939 Zane Grey was an Eastern dentist who be- came a highly successful author of westerns. How- ever, critics considered his writing stilted, his char- acters wooden, his situations unrealistic, and his plots melodramatic. Despite this, he has probably been the prime factor in crystallizing the European, and to some extent even the American, "conception" of early Western life. After becoming rich on the income from his novels, Grey passed much of his time in outdoor activities, especially fishing. This resulted in a number of autobiographical books (dis- cussed in the Sports and Recreation section of this bibliography), which were more favorably received by many critics, although less well received by the general public. His books are still popular in cheap editions. 1485. Riders of the purple sage. New York, Harper, 1912. 334 p. 12-1131 PZ3.G87R1 This has probably been the most popular of the more than fifty novels by Zane Grey. Because his plots were almost all constructed on one basic formula, this book may be used to exemplify that aspect of his work which has had such a wide non- literary influence. i486. The Zane Grey omnibus, edited by Ruth G. Gentles. New York, Harper, 1943. xvii, 409 p. 43-43 M PZ3.G87Zan Contents. — Zane Grey: a biographical sketch. — Zane Grey: an interpretation. — "The ringer." — Wild Horse mesa, a novel. — Don, the story of a lion dog. — Tales of fishes. — Down an unknown jungle river. — Exercises. 1487. Karr, Jean. Zane Grey, man of the West. New York, Greenberg, 1949. 229 p. 49-"953 )) P s 35 I 3- R6 545 z 7 *949 "The books of Zane Grey": p. 215-229. 1488. ALFRED BERTRAM GUTHRIE, 1901- Guthrie's novels of American migrations in the middle of the 19th century recreate for the reader the opening of the wilderness on the now vanished western frontier. He writes in a poetic prose of the pioneers' love of the new land and the open sky. 1489. The big sky [by] A. B. Guthrie, Jr. New York, Sloane, 1947. 386 p. 47-3316 PZ3.G95876B1 1490. The way west. New York, Sloane, 1949. 340 p. 49-1 1 198 PZ3.G95876Way 1 49 1. MOSS HART, 1904- Moss Hart, a New York dramatist, did much of his earlier work in collaboration with George S. Kaufman (q. v.), including such comedies as You LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 123 Can't Ta\e it With You (1937) and The Man Who Came To Dinner ( 1939). In addition to collaborat- ing on such plays, he acted in the capacity of libret- tist for some musical comedies. Subsequently he has, in addition to adaptations, undertaken some more ambitious work in dramas which reflect on contemporary life, such as Winged Victory (1943), a World War II play about the air force. 1492. Light up the sky, a play. New York, Ran- dom House, 1949. 120 p. 49-8200 PS3515.A7943L5 1493. The climate of Eden, a play; based on Edgar Mittelholzer's novel, Shadows move among them. New York, Random House, 1953. 177 p. 53-5528 PS3515.A7943C6 1494. ERNEST HEMINGWAY, 1898- Hemingway as a novelist and short-story writer evolved the journalistic style to its artistic ultimate; from this has developed one of the most prolific schools of modern fiction. A novelist of pain and suffering, whose characters lose much and gain little (though some would claim an occasional spiritual victory, it is usually won in a lost cause), he emphasizes conversational realism and objective presentation, but frequently achieves the effect of symbolic fable. His stories are usually of Ameri- cans, but seldom of America, since they often have a foreign setting. He was awarded the Nobel prize for literature in 1954. 1495. The sun also rises. New York, Scribner, 1926. 259 p. 26-19106 PZ3.H3736SU Members of the British and American element in European society wander about the continent (largely France and Spain) indulging in drinking, loving, and general aimless merriment — all realis- tically indicative of the ineffectuality of their lives. 1496. A farewell to arms. New York, Scribner, 1929. 355 p. 29-20658 PZ3.H3736Fa A story of an American in the Italian ambulance service and his love affair with an English nurse in Italy during World War I. 1497. For whom the bell tolls. New York, Scrib- ner, 1940. 471 p. 40-27732 PZ3.H3736F0 PS3515.E37F6 1940 A novel about an American in the Loyalist army during the Spanish Civil War. 1498. The short stories: the first forty-nine stories and the play The fifth column. New York, Modern Library, 1942. 597 p. (The Modern Li- brary of the world's best books) 42-36273 PS3515.E37A15 1942 1499. Across the river and into the trees. New York, Scribner, 1950. 308 p. 50-9370 PZ3.H3736AC A novel about an American Army officer's return visit to Italy, after having been there during World Wars I and II. 1500. The old man and the sea. New York, Scribner, 1952. 140 p. 52-11935 PZ3.H3736OI A philosophic and symbolic novelette with the moral that man is not meant for defeat (though he may be destroyed), this is the story of an old man from a Cuban fishing village and his protracted struggle with a giant fish. 1501. Atkins, John A. The art of Ernest Hem- ingway; his work and personality. London, Nevill, 1952. 245 p. 53-26230 PS3515.E37Z57 1502. Baker, Carlos H. Hemingway; the writer as artist. Princeton, Princeton University Press, 1952. xix, 322 p. 52-8759 PS3515.E37Z58 Bibliographical footnotes. "A working check-list of Hemingway's prose, poetry, and journalism": p. [299H10. 1503. Fenton, Charles A. The apprenticeship of Ernest Hemingway: the early years. New York, Farrar, Straus & Young, 1954. xi, 302 p. 54-7968 PS3515.E37Z59 1504. McCaffery, John K. M., ed. Ernest Hem- ingway, the man and his work. Cleveland, World Pub. Co., 1950. 351 p. 50-10036 PS3515.E37Z7 1505. Young, Philip. Ernest Hemingway. New York, Rinehart, 1952. 244 p. (Rinehart critical studies) 52-5603 PS3515.E37Z96 1506. JOSEPH HERGESHEIMER, 1880-1954 Hergesheimer's earlier, more widely ac- claimed work was mainly in the form of novels with realistic historical backgrounds. Based on much research, these depicted aspects of the American past, analyzed character, and presented the "atmos- phere" of his settings. Into such evocations of places in the past he projected his imaginative stories. 124 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 1507. The three black Pennys. New York, Knopf, 1917. 408 p. 17-25287 PZ3.H422Th Against a background of the Pennsylvania iron fields, this novel depicts the rise and decline of a family through the story of three alternate genera- tions, starting from the late colonial period. 1508. Java Head. New York, Knopf, 1919. 255 p. 19-579 PZ3-H422ja The story of a New England merchant vessel cap- tain who married a Chinese wife and brought her home to Salem, Massachusetts, when that port was experiencing its most flourishing period. 1509. Linda Condon. New York, Knopf, 191 9. 304 p. 19-27595 PZ3.H42zLi A character study of a woman who in social terms is emotionally unresponsive. She lives for beauty, in the form of personal adornment, until she per- ceives a beauty that transcends mortality in the work of a sculptor who has been inspired by her. 1510. Quiet cities. New York, Knopf, 1928. 354 p. 28-13911 PZ3.H422QU Nine short stories depicting different American cities at various points in the past, from colonial times to the pre-Civil War period. 15 1 1. The limestone tree. New York, Knopf, 1931. 386 p. 31-2676 PZ3.H422Le A novel with 18th- and 19th-century Kentucky for background. 15 12. DU BOSE HEYWARD, 1 885-1 940 Heyward first gained attention as a poet, notably with Carolina Chansons (1922), which he wrote with Hervey Allen (q. v.). However, his most prominent book was Porgy, a novel depicting Negroes in Charleston, S. C, a work which was the source of George Gershwin's opera Porgy and Bess. Another novel on the Southern Negro was Mamba's Daughters (1929). 15 13. Porgy. New York, Doran, 1925. 196 p. 25-17940 PZ3.H15S6P0 15 14. Durham, Frank. Du Bose Heyward, the man who wrote Porgy. Columbia, Univer- sity of South Carolina Press, 1954. 152 p. illus. 54-10111 PS3515.E98Z6 "An informal version of a dissertation . . . for the Ph. D. degree at Columbia University." 15 15. ROBERT SILLIMAN HILLYER, 1895- Robert Hillyer writes polished, conventional poetry in the 19th-century tradition, but with a modern temper. In his lyrics his themes tend to be general and unlocalized; he has also written poems for specific occasions, such as the Phi Beta Kappa poems, two of which are included in A Letter to Robert Frost and Others (1937), and another, "In Time of Mistrust," is included in Pattern of a Day (1940). Hillyer has also published two novels: Riverhead (1932) and My Heart for Hostage (1942). 15 16. Poems for music, 1917-1947. New York, Knopf, 1947. 83 p. 47-5283 PS3515.I69P6 The author's selection of his seventy best lyrics. An earlier selection of the author's poetry is his Col- lected Verse (1933), which brings together material from Sonnets and Other Lyrics (1917), The Five Booths of Youth (1920), The Hills Give Promise (1922), The Halt in the Garden (1925), The Seventh Hill (1928) and The Gates of the Compass (1930). Hillyer was awarded a Pulitzer prize for poetry for this earlier collection. 1 5 17. The suburb by the sea, new poems. New York, Knopf, 1952. 71 p. 52-5738 PS3515.I69S9 1518. SIDNEY COE HOWARD, 1891-1939 Sidney Howard was a dramatist whose plays bear, or were borne by, a "message," so that much of his work has been dated by the passing of time and the specific cause which motivates them, al- though a few survive as examples of the "newer" realism. He was awarded the Pulitzer prize for drama for They Knew What They Wanted, a mari- tal comedy set in California. 15 1 9. The silver cord; a comedy in three acts. New York, Scribner, 1927. 204 p. (The Theatre guild library) 27-5629 PS3515.O847S5 1927 A drama of a widowed mother's pathological love for her two sons. 1520. Yellow jack, a history by Sidney Howard, in collaboration with Paul De Kruif. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1934. 152 p. plates. 34-18182 PS3515.O847Y4 1934 "Based on the dramatic 'Walter Reed' chapter of Paul de Kruif's 'Microbe hunters' . . . this play deals with man's struggle against and final victory over the dread yellow fever." — Publisher's announce- ment. 1 3 2 1. LANGSTON HUGHES, 1902- Hughes is a Negro writer who first gained attention for his verse in such books as The Weary Blues (1926) and Fine Clothing to the few (1927); these were in part derived in form and mood from Negro blues and jazz. More recently his prose has received greater attention, in part because of its presentation of Harlem Negroes. A leftist and somewhat anti-white in the thirties, he has in recent years written with less bias and a sense of humor. 1522. The big sea, an autobiography. New York, Knopf, 1940. 335 p. 40-30931 PS3515.U274Z5 1940 1523. Simple speaks his mind. [New York] Simon & Schuster, 1950. 231 p. 50-7299 PS3515.U274S53 Short stories centering about Simple, a Negro who expresses opinions on a variety of subjects. 1524. Laughing to keep from crying. New York, Holt, 1952. 206 p. 52-7952 PZ3.H8 7 3i 3 Lau Twenty-four short stories about Negroes. 1525. Simple takes a wife. [New York] Simon & Schuster, 1953. 240 p. _ . , , 53-1553 PS35*5-U274S57 .Further humorous short stories centering about Simple; occasionally there are still bitter undertones. 1526. ZORA NEALE HURSTON, 1903- Zora Neale Hurston is a Negro who usually writes of Negro people in Florida. She has been commended for her recording of the folklore and dialect of the area. 1527. Jonah's gourd vine. Philadelphia, Lippin- cott, 1934. 316 p. 34-7611 PZ3.H9457J0 1528. Their eyes were watching God; a novel. Philadelphia, Lippincott, 1937. 2 ^6 p. 37-18658 PZ3.H 9 45 7 Th 1 1529. Seraph on the Suwanee, a novel. New York, Scribner, 1948. 311 p. 48-8745 PZ 3 .H9457Se : 1530- FEDERICO SCHARMEL IRIS, 1889- Scharmel Iris was born in Italy; as a youth he came to America and settled in Chicago, where J he began to write poetry in English. His short, ' taut lyrics are little known, despite the fact that they LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 125 have been brilliantly praised by a number of prominent authors, including William Butler Yeats, who wrote: "Of poets writing today there is no greater!" Iris' first volume, Lyrics of a Lad, ap- peared in 1914; there followed a period of disap- pearing manuscripts, so that it was not until 1953 that a second volume appeared, reprinting some of the work in the earlier book. Much of his work has been published in periodicals under various pseudonyms. 1 53 1. Bread out of stone. [Poems] Chicago, Regnery, 1953. 62 p. 53-8795 PS3517.R5B7 1532. ROBINSON JEFFERS, 1887- Isolated in his "inevitable place" on the spec- tacular California coast near Carmel, Jeffers has looked at America and the world, where he has seen evil, decadence, and tragedy as inevitable accom- paniments of human, particularly of family, rela- tions. So extreme is his vision of sin that it attains some of the characteristics of romanticism, although of an inverted kind. His long narrative poems deal with murder, incest, and horrors equal to them; his short poems also express what he calls a philosophic mood of "Inhumanness." These startling, if un- convincing, revelations of total depravity are set forth powerfully in poems marked by technical pro- ficiency and imaginative use of themes drawn in part from classical and Biblical sources, and from the folklore of California. In recent years Jeffers has increasingly devoted his talents to making free adaptations of classical Greek tragedy. His most recent work of this kind is The Cretan Woman, first performed in 1954. 1533. The women at Point Sur. New York, Boni &Liveright ['1927] 175 p. 44-35263 PS3519.E27W6 1927a 1534. Selected poetry. New York, Random House, 1938. 622 p. 38-28958 PS3519.E27A6 1938 Presents some new poems and about one half of the poet's previously published work; includes selec- tions from Tamar and Other Poems (1924), Roan Stallion (1925), Cawdor (1928), Dear fudas (1929), Thurso's Landing (1932), Give Your Heart to the llaw\s (1933), Solstice (1935), and Such Counsels You Gave to Me ( 1937). 1535. Medea, freely adapted from the Medea of Euripides by Robinson JefTcrs. New York, Random House, 1946. 107 p. 46-25159 PA3975.M4J4 126 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 1536. Hungerfield, and other poems. New York, Random House, 1954. 115 p. 53-9714 PS3519.E27H9 Includes The Cretan Woman. 1537. JAMES WELDON JOHNSON, 1 871-1938 Johnson was a Negro author of diversified interests who was probably best known for some of his poetry. His versified Negro sermons are imag- inative interpretations, in the idiom of primitive religion, of the character and quality of his race. Although he strove for objectivity on the matter, race consciousness is a strong element in his work. 1538. God's trombones; seven Negro sermons in verse. New York, Viking Press, 1927. 56 p. 27-12269 PS3519.O2625G6 1927 1539. Along this way; the autobiography of James Weldon Johnson. New York, Viking Press, 1933. 418 p. 33-29 189 E185.97.J69 1540. Saint Peter relates an incident, selected poems. New York, Viking Press, 1935. 105 p. 35-22368 PS3519.O2625A6 1935 1 54 1. MACKINLAY KANTOR, 1904- Kantor is a Midwestern author whose many works cover a wide range. In The Voice of Bugle Ann (1935) and its sequel The Daughter of Bugle Ann (1952) he presented two widely read foxhound stories which represent the rural-life animal-story genre in popular American fiction. Typical of the patriotic and sentimental strains in much of his work is God and My Country (1954), a novelette in praise of the Roy Scouts. Author's Choice (1944) is a selection of forty of his short stories. While he has written in such forms as adventure and mystery stories, and poetry, much of his more serious work has gone into historical fiction dealing with the Civil War. 1542. Long remember. New York, Coward-Mc- Cann, 1934. 411 p. 34-27082 PZ3.K142L0 A novel dealing with the Battle of Gettysburg. 1543. But look, the morn. New York, Coward- McCann, 1947. 308 p. 47-30121 PS3521.A47Z5 The story of the author's childhood in a small Iowa town. 1544. Andersonville. Cleveland, World Pub. Co., 1955. 767 p. 55-8257 PZ3.Ki42An A novel, presenting by implication the entire Civil War, but dealing specifically with a notorious prisoner-of-war camp in Georgia. 1545. GEORGE SIMON KAUFMAN, 1889- George S. Kaufman is a New Yorker who has been a journalist and director as well as a play- wright. He has worked on many popular, humor- ous plays. For most of these he acted as a collaborator, commonly with authors such as Moss Hart, Marc Connelly, Edna Ferber, Morris Ryskind, and Ring Lardner. His work, much of which takes the form of satire on aspects of American life, is noted for its "wise-crack" element. 1546. Merton of the movies, in four acts, a dramatization of Harry Leon Wilson's story of the same name, by George S. Kaufman and Marc Connelly. New York, French, 1925. 112 p. illus. (French's standard library edition) 25-9428 PS3521.A727M4 1925 1547. Stage door, a play in three acts, by Edna Ferber and George S. Kaufman. New York, Dramatists Play Service, 1938. 165 p. illus. 38-25234 PS3511.E46S8 1938 1548. Six plays by Kaufman and Hart, with an introd. by Brooks Atkinson. New York, Modern Library [ c i942] xxxii, 586 p. (The Modern Library of the world's best books) 44-8784 PS3521.A727S5 1942a Contents. — Men at work, by Moss Hart. — Forked lightning, by G. S. Kaufman. — Once in a lifetime. — Merrily we roll along. — You can't take it with you. — The American way. — The man who came to dinner. — George Washington slept here. 1549. The late George Apley, a play by John P. Marquand and George S. Kaufman, based on Mr. Marquand's novel. [New York] Drama- tists Play Service, 1946. 72 p. 46-20312 PS3525.A6695L3 1946 1550. The solid gold Cadillac; a comedy, by Howard Teichmann and George S. Kauf- man. New York, Random House, 1954. 151 p. illus. 54-8795 PS3539.E24S6 155 1. OLIVER LA FARGE, 1901- La Farge is an anthropologist, ethnologist, and archaeologist whose writings deal in large part with American Indians; his main interest is in the Navajos. His first novel, Laughing Boy, was awarded the Pulitzer prize for fiction and remains, LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 127 in the opinion of many, his most successful work. He dealt with the Navajos again in The Enemy Gods (1937), a thesis novel which depicts the Indi- an's inability to adapt to the white man's way of life. Less directly concerned with Indians were books such as the autobiography Raw Material (1945), and Eagle In the Egg (1949), the official history of the Air Transport Command. 1552. Laughing Boy. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1929. 302 p. 29-23247 PZ3.Li29Lau 1553. All the young men; stories. Boston, Hough- ton Mifflin, 1935. 272 p. 35-13561 PZ3.L129AI Contents. — Hard winter. — All the young men. — Haunted ground. — A family matter. — North is black. — Higher education. — The goddess was mor- tal. — Dangerous man. — Love charm. — Women at Yellow wells. — Camping on my trail. — No more Bohemia. 1554. RING WILMER LARDNER, 1 885-1933 In a slangy, conversational style Ring Lard- ner wrote mordant, humorous stories, most popu- larly and prominently about baseball figures. His own most acclaimed collections were How To Write Short Stories (1924) and The Love Nest, and Other Stories (1926). 1555. The portable Ring Lardner. Edited, and with an introd. by Gilbert Seldes. New York, Viking Press, 1946. 756 p. (The Viking portable library) 46-7398 PS3523.A7A6 1946 1556. WILLIAM ELLERY CHANNING LEONARD, 1 876-1 944 Leonard, for many years a professor in the Eng- lish Department at the University of Wisconsin, wrote imaginatively on psychological aspects of his personal experience; his scholarly work was done largely in the field of translations of epical works in different languages. The personal works range through the autobiographical poetry of Two Lives (1923) and his psychoanalytic autobiography to his posthumously published volume of sonnets, A Man Against Time, an Heroic Dream (1945). His in- tense poetic feeling, expressed in academic and traditional form, is thought by some critics to have found more enduring expression in his metrical translations of Beowulf, Gilgamesh, the De Rerum Natura of Lucretius, and the fragments of Empe- docles. He also made a notable contribution to regional drama with Red Bird (1923), a play based on a story of Wisconsin pioneer days. 1557. The locomotive-god. New York, Century, 1927. 434 p. 27-20232 PS3523.E62Z5 The author's autobiography in which, by psycho- analysis, he traces the origin of certain mental maladies. 1558. A son of earth, collected poems. New York, Viking Press, 1928. x, 235 p. 28-23943 PS3523.E62S5 1928 1559. SINCLAIR LEWIS, 1885-195 1 Lewis rose to prominence through his ro- mantically realistic novels of middle class life in the Midwest. Most of his work is satiric; his charac- ters are usually types (businessman, preacher, social worker, etc.) rather than individuals; and his novels verge on being (and sometimes openly are) social tracts. As the first American to be awarded the Nobel prize for literature (1930), his reputation and influence have been extensive. The novels with which he first gained fame are usually considered his best. 1560. Main Street, the story of Carol Kennicott. New York, Harcourt, Brace & Howe, 1920. 451 p. 20-18934 PZ3.L5884Ma The story of a well-educated but limited young woman who tries to introduce culture and taste into a small, unimaginative, Minnesota town. 1561. Babbitt. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1922. 401 p. 22-14419 PZ3.L5884Ba Babbitt is the stereotyped businessman hero in this satirical novel of a Midwestern urban society with generally restricted views and values. 1562. Arrowsmith. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1925. 448 p. 25-6078 PZ3-L5884Ar The story of a doctor's career, this novel was awarded a Pulitzer prize for literature in 1926, but Lewis declined it. 1563. Elmer Gantry. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1927. 432 p. 27-4761 PZ3.L5884E1 A novel satirizing religious hypocrisy. 1564. Dodsworth, a novel. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1929. 337 p. 29-26270 PZ3.L5884D0 The story of an American businessman from a Midwestern city who, after retirement, travels to Europe in search of culture. Dodsworth is Bab- bitt's alterego. 128 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 1565. Ann Vickers. Garden City, N. Y., Double- day, Doran, 1933. 562 p. 33-27006 PZ3.L,5884An PS3523.E94A67 A study of a woman social worker and the ques- tion of a woman's place in American society. 1566. It can't happen here; a novel. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, Doran, 1935. 458 p. 35-19689 PZ3.L5884lt An imaginary story of the establishment of a dic- tatorial, fascistic government in America. 1567. Gideon Planish, a novel. New York, Ran- dom House, 1943. 438 p. 43-51122 PZ3.L5884Gi A satire exposing the racket of organized philan- thropy. 1568. Cass Timberlane, a novel of husbands and wives. New York, Random House, 1945. 390 p. 45-4918 PZ3.L5884Cas A novel about a respected, middle-aged judge in a Minnesota town who takes a young, second wife; the book presents many standard American senti- mental and cynical observations on marriage. 1569. Kingsblood royal. New York, Random House, 1947. 348 p. 47-2064 PZ3.L5884Ki A social document novel on the Negro problem. 1570. From Main Street to Stockholm; letters of Sinclair Lewis, 1919-1930. New York, Har- court, Brace, 1952. 307 p. 52-6449 PS3523.E94Z53 157 1. LUDWIG LEWISOHN, 1882- Lewisohn is probably best known for his novels, which are largely propagandist^ works giving his views on recurrent subjects such as sex, marriage, divorce, and the positions of Jews in society. Rival- ing the best of these in popularity, and by some the most esteemed of his productions, have been his autobiographical works. He has also gained prom- inence through other forms, such as his book on the American spirit revealed in literature, Expres- sion in America (1932; a postscript was added to the 1939 edition, which bore the later title: The Story of American Literature); his dramatic articles from The Nation, reprinted in The Drama and the Stage (1922); his lay philosophical work, such as The Permanent Horizon; A New Search for Old Truths (1934); and, among his nonfiction books dealing specifically with Jews, The American few, Character and Destiny (1950). It has been claimed that Lewisohn's work is usually too largely polem- ical or pamphleteering to be literature; but most critics have admired his lucid, expressive style, his penetration; his realistic post-Freudian presenta- tions, and the spirit with which he works in behalf of his beliefs, have also won praise. 1572. Up stream; an American chronicle. New York, Boni & Liveright, 1922. 248 p. 22-5315 PS3523.E96Z5 1922 Autobiography. Continued in Mid-Channel. 1573. The case of Mr. Crump. Paris, E. W. Titus, 1926. 435 p. NN Story of a young musician from South Carolina who goes to New York, where he is seduced by an older woman. The bulk of the book is a bitter expose of 12 years of miserable marriage, acridly presenting one of the most unpleasant women in world literature. The book was for some time banned from the mails. A paperback edition appeared in 1947 under the title The Tyranny of Sex. 1574. The island within. New York, Harper, 1928. 350 p. 28-6770 PZ3.L591IS The story of a Jewish Polish family that immi- grates to America, but maintains its essential Jewishness. '575- Mid-channel; an American chronicle. New York, Harper, 1929. 310 p. 29-9655 PS3523.E96Z55 Autobiography: a continuation of the author's Up Stream. 1576. Stephen Escott. New York, Harper, 1930. 315 p. 30-7110 PZ3.L59iSt A sociological novel discussing the problem of sex and marriage. 1577. The golden vase. New York, Harper, 1931. 141 p. 31-28151 PZ3.L591G0 A philosophical novelette on the theme of love renounced because of age and lack of courage. 1578. Renegade. New York, Dial Press, 1942. 333 p. 42-6285 PZ3-L59iRe A historical novel set in France at the time of Louis XIV, this is the story of a wealthy Jew who leaves his religion for love, but after a period of adversity discovers how deep is his religious connection. LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 129 1579. Anniversary. [New York] Farrar, Straus, 1948, c i946. 304 p. 48-5114 PZ3.L,59iAn A stream-of-consciousness novel set in a small New England city, and with sex, love, marriage, divorce, and middle-class morality for themes. 1580. NICHOLAS VACHEL LINDSAY, 1879- 193 1 Vachel Lindsay, a regional poet intimately asso- ciated with the Middle West, was one of the "new" poets who came into prominence during the First World War. His chief claims to being an innovator lie in the derivation of his verse forms from ballads and folk songs, and in his use of American themes, frequently unconventional, originating in his own experiences of camp meetings and revivals, in his friendship with hobos and laborers, and from tales of folk heroes, real and imaginary. He conceived of poetry as an oral art, comparable to a "higher vaudeville" in which the arts of music and poetry were to be blended in a result that was to be chanted rather than read. Devotion to his own idealized and romanticized dream of democracy in America was a dominant influence in his work. 1581. Collected poems. Rev. and illustrated ed. New York, Macmillan, 1925. 464 p. 25-10046 PS3523.I58A17 1925 Lindsay's early poetry was first printed in pam- phlets meant to be traded for food and shelter dur- ing his wanderings about the country; perhaps the most famous of these early works is Rhymes to Be Traded for Bread (1912?). As he emerged from his formative period, he produced a series of books on which his fame mainly rests: General William Booth Enters into Heaven, and Other Poems (19 13), The Congo, and Other Poems (1914), and The Chinese Nightingale, and Other Poems (1917). Thereafter Lindsay continued to be prolific, but the quality of his work declined. The later volumes include The Daniel Jazz, and Other Poems (1920), Going-to-the-Sttn (1923), Going-to-the-Stars (1926), The Candle in the Cabin (1926), and Every Soul Is a Circus (1929). A volume of Selected Poems was published in 1931. 1582. Harris, Mark. City of discontent; an in- terpretative biography of Vachel Lindsay, being also the story of Springfield, Illinois, USA, and of the love of the poet for that city, that State and that Nation. Indianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill, 1952. 403 p. 52-5806 PS3523.I58Z6 1583. AMY LOWELL, 1874-1925 Amy Lowell was a New Englander of great strength and will who resolved to be a poet. With her second book, Sword Blades and Poppy Seed, she started the experimentation which in large measure was to make her name. Using a technique of free verse in "polyphonic prose," she practiced her theory of imagism, — meanwhile largely taking over the Imagist movement and shaping it to her own ends. Mainly a poet of the visual, she at times projected moods and emotional overtones into her imagery, thus reflecting her personality. In her later work the influence of Chinese poetry, particularly its imagery, reinforced the already established emphasis on the visual in her work. Vitality and experi- mentation applied to the Imagist theory were the factors by which this determined woman achieved for herself a position as a poet. These qualities were well represented in Men, Women, and Ghosts, which some have considered her best book, in Legends, and in What's OCloc\, a posthumous volume which was awarded the Pulitzer prize. 1584. Complete poetical works. With an introd. by Louis Untermeyer. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1955. xxix, 607 p. 55-6949 PS3523.O88 1955 In addition to some "new" poems, this volume contains the work previously published in A Dome of Many-Coloured Glass (1912), Sword Blades and Poppy Seed (1914), Men, Women, and Ghosts (1916), Can Grande's Castle (1918), Pictures of the Floating World (1919), Legends (1921), Fir -Flower Tablets (1922), A Critical Fable (1922), What's 0'Cloc\ (1925), East Wind (1926), and Ballads for Sale (1927). 1585. ARCHIBALD MacLEISH, 1892- Although influenced by many poets, Mao- Leish has evolved his own individual poetic style and statement. His great skill in handling poetic forms has been employed in a large body of work. Increasingly over the years he had tended to con- ceive of the poet as social force, a role in which he has expounded views on national and international questions of much moment, using prose as well as poetry as a medium for this purpose, e. g., in his selected addresses, A Time to Act (1943). At his best in the short lyric, MacLeish nevertheless achieved a tour de force, which some have regarded as his masterpiece, in Conquistador (1932), a story of the conquest of Mexico, written in terza rima. He has also gone far in developing some outstand- ing radio scripts in dramatic-narrative verse. 1586. Collected poems, 1917-1952. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1952. 407 p. 52-6083 PS3525.A27A17 [952 In addition to a group of new poems, this volume 130 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES contains material from earlier books and booklets such as The Happy Marriage (1924), The Pot of Earth (1925), Streets in the Moon (1926), The Hamlet of A. MacLeish (1928), Einstein (1929), New Found Land (1930), Conquistador, Frescoes for Mr. Rockefeller's City (1933), Poems, 1924- I 933 ( I 933)> Public Speech (1936), America Was Promises (1939), and Actfive, and Other Poems (1948). 1587. This music crept by me upon the waters. [A play] Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1953. 38 p. (The Poets' theatre series, 1) 54-5428 PS3525.A27T47 1588. Songs for Eve. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1954. 58 p. 54-9118 PS3525.A27S72 1589. JOHN PHILLIPS MARQUAND, 1893- John P. Marquand writes popularly success- ful novels which usually depict society in New Eng- land, frequently in Massachusetts. Often his char- acters are from the upper classes and are trying to live in accord with values which are no longer valid or are at least debatable. A strain of humor, frequently satire, runs through a large part of his work. 1590. The late George Apley; a novel in the form of a memoir. Boston, Little, Brown, 1937. 354 p. 37-646 PZ3.M34466Lat2 1591. Wickford Point. Boston, Little, Brown, I 939- 458 p- 39-27145 PZ3.M34466Wi 1592. H. M. Pulham, Esquire. Boston, Little, Brown, 194 1. 431 p. 41-51574 PZ3.M34466H2 A serial version of this story appeared in McCall's under the title of "Gone Tomorrow." 1593. So little time. Boston, Little, Brown, 1943. 594 P- 43~ I2I 44 PZ3-M34466 1594. Repent in haste. Boston, Little, Brown, 1945. 152 p. 45-9462 PZ3.M34466Re 1595. Melville Goodwin, USA. Boston, Litde, Brown, 195 1. 596 p. 51-12737 PZ3.M34466Me 1596. Point of no return. Boston, Little, Brown, J 949- 559 P- 49-7556 PZ3.M34466P0 1597. Sincerely, Willis Wayde. Boston, Little, Brown, 1955. 511 p. 55-5534 PZ3.M 344 66Si 1598. Hamburger, Philip P. J. P. Marquand, Es- quire, a portrait in the form of a novel. Bos- ton, Houghton Mifflin, 1952. 114 p. 52-9587 PS3525.A6695Z7 A biographical study written in a style imitating Marquand's novels. 1599. EDGAR LEE MASTERS, 1868-1950 Masters' one great popular success was the Spoon River Anthology, a collection of free verse poems inspired by the Gree\ Anthology and meant to represent truthful epitaphs spoken in death by residents of the Spoon River cemetery. In this way a small Midwestern community is "brought to life." Most of Masters' other work was imitation of better known 19th-century poets. Across Spoon River ( 1936) is his autobiography. 1600. Spoon River anthology. New York, Mac- millan, 1915. 248 p. 15-8027 PS3525.A83S5 1915 1601. Selected poems. New York, Macmillan, 1925. 411 p. 25-18498 PS3525.A83A6 1925 This volume contains selections from Spoon River Anthology (1915), Songs and Satires (1916), The Great Valley (1917), Toward the Gulf (1918), Starved Roc\ (1919), Domesday Boo^ (1920), The Open Sea (1921), and The New Spoon River (1924). Because the selection was made to repre- sent all his work, less than a tenth of his major volume has been included. 1602. HENRY LOUIS MENCKEN, 1880-1956 In his period of greatest activity and fame H. L. Mencken was primarily a journalist with a flair for attacking "established nonsense" (some liked to call him an iconoclast); his views found expression through periodicals such as The Smart Set, The American Mercury, and the Baltimore Sun. Since most of his work dealt with matters of current interest, it now seems in large part to be dated. His studies of the American language and the auto- biographical "Days," which reflected life in Balti- more, are of more significance to the student of American civilization. 1603. The American language; an inquiry into the development of English in the United States. [4th ed., corr., enl., and rewritten] New York, Knopf, 1936. 769 p. 36-27236 PE2808.M4 1936 Includes bibliographies. Supplements I and II appeared in 1945 and 1948. LITERATURE (1607-I955) / I3I 1604. The days of H. L. Mencken: Happy days, Newspaper days, Heathen days. New York, Knopf, 1947. L958J p. 47-1 1 23 1 PS3525.E43D34 Each part has special t. p. and is paged separately. 1605. A Mencken chrestomathy, edited and an- notated by the author. New York, Knopf, 1949. 627 p. 49~3 8 94 PS3525.E34A6 1949 1606. Kemler, Edgar. The irreverent Mr. Menc- ken. Boston, Litde, Brown, 1950. x, 317 p. illus. 5°-Ti l l PS 35 2 5- E 43 Z 59 i95° Bibliographical references included in "Notes" (p. [295J-303). "Chronology of . . . [H. L. Mencken's] books": p. [3041-306. 1607. Manchester, William R. Disturber of the peace; the life of H. L. Mencken. New York, Harper, 195 1. xiv, 336 p. ports. 51-9028 PS3525.E43Z67 "Bibliographical note": p. 317-322. 1608. EDNA ST. VINCENT MILLAY, 1892- 1950 Miss Millay was a very popular poet who was most renowned for her highly romantic lyrics, es- pecially some of her sonnets expressing passionate love of life and beauty. Although her main achieve- ment was in shorter works, her one-act play Aria da Capo (1921) successfully satirized war and war- makers. This play was included with Two Slatterns and a King (1921) and The Lamp and the Bell (1921) in the volume Three Plays (1926). Perhaps her best-known play is The King's Henchman (1927), which with slight modifications was used as the libretto for an opera by Deems Taylor (b. 1885). In the thirties Miss Millay cultivated, with- out great poetic success, the "social consciousness" required by the period; this culminated in The Murder of Lidice (1942), a narrative poem about one of the atrocities of the early years of World War II. Her posthumous Letters (1952) reflect aspects of her life and personality not always clear in her poetry itself. 1609. Collected poems. New York, Harper, 1956. 738 p. 56-8756 PS3525.I495A17 1956 Other volumes of poetry by Millay include Renas- cence (1917), A Few Figs from Thistles (1921), Second April (1921), TheBuc\in the Snow (1928), Fatal Interview (1931), Wine from These Crapes (1934), Conversation at Midnight (1937), Hunts- man, What Quarry? (1939), and Ma\e Bright the Arrows (1940). Mine the Harvest (1954) was a posthumous collection of her poems which had not previously appeared in volume form. Collected Sonnets (1941) and Collected Lyrics (1943) present most of her poetry arranged by type; this same di- vision is to some extent retained in the Collected Poems. 1610. Sheean, Vincent. The indigo bunting; a memoir of Edna St. Vincent Millay. New York, Harper, 1951. 131 p. 51-13495 PS3525.I495Z8 1 6 1 1 . HENRY MILLER, 1 89 1- Miller has striven to express imaginatively in his fiction and books of travel his concepts of reality. He has on occasion treated the theme of the Ameri- can expatriate in Europe between 1928 and 1939. The frankness with which details of physical experi- ence are presented in some of his novels aroused of- ficial disapproval in America and made it impossible to publish in this country books such as his Tropic of Cancer (1935), which is an autobiographical story of an American expatriate in Paris, and Blacl{ Spring (1936), which pictures bums, cafe habitues, etc., in Paris. The esthetic merits and/or social justification or desirability cf Miller's works, which are largely autobiographical and inclined to be radi- cal, have brought forth sharply conflicting views from the critics, some of whom consider him a major author to be praised for his extraordinary vigor and realism, while others deliver an equally strong denunciation. 1 6 12. Tropic of Capricorn. Paris, Obelisk Press [1939] 367 p. 39-13888 PS352 5 .I 5 45 4 T8 1939 RBD A vivid, if revolting, account of the life of an absolute dissident who despises, or pretends to des- pise, megalopolitan humanity as represented by life in New York City during the first quarter ol the 20th century, but who relishes every detail of his personal existence, particularly the physiological ones. 1613. The air-conditioned nightmare. New York, New Directions, 1945-47. 2 v - 45-11390 E169.M0 Based on his travels about the United States, this book reflects the author's critical reaction to. and emotional rejection of the country. His antipathy is intense, and he finds himself most comfortable with people in Indian reservations or tin distinc tively foreign (especially it poorer) sections of the cities. The second volume bore the title Remember to Remember. 132 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 1614. MARY BRITTON MILLER ("ISABEL BOLTON"), 1883- Mary Miller's career as an author started with poetry, but she first gained general acclaim with the publication in 1943 of her first novel, In the Days of Youth, a story set in New England in the late 19th century. In the forties she began to write under the pseudonym "Isabel Bolton." The short novels with New York City settings which she published under this name have been highly regarded for their style and a lyric quality in precise phrasing and in situation. 1615. Do I wake or sleep, by Isabel Bolton [pseud.] New York, Scribner, 1946. 202 p. 47-1265 PZ3.M61573D0 1616. The Christmas tree, by Isabel Bolton [pseud.] New York, Scribner, 1949. 212 p. 49-7858 PZ3.M6i573Ch 1617. Many mansions [by] Isabel Bolton [pseud.] New York, Scribner, 1952. 215 p. 52-12830 PZ3.M6i573Man 1618. MARGARET MITCHELL, 1900-1949 Margaret Mitchell's one book was a historical novel of Georgia during the Civil War and the Re- construction. In publication terms it is said to have been the most successful publication of the century, having sold unprecedented numbers of copies on an international scale; it is still selling well. It was also the source of a highly popular motion picture. 1619. Gone with the wind. New York, Macmil- lan, 1936. 1037 p. 36-27334 PZ3.M69484G0 1620. MARIANNE MOORE, 1887- Marianne Moore's poetry, based on mathe- matical syllabic patterns, is precise in word usage, at times exotic in either its subject matter or its attitudes, and often of abstract philosophical back- ground. She is an objectivist who devotes much attention to fauna such as the jerboa. She believes poems should be ". . . imaginary gardens with real toads in them." 162 1. Collected poems. New York, Macmillan, 1951. 180 p. 51-14374 PS3525.O5616A6 1951a This collection includes poems from the author's earlier volumes Selected Poems (1935), What Are Years (1941), and Nevertheless (1944), as well as a group of poems which had not previously been brought together in book form. 1622. Predilections. New York, Viking Press, 1955. 171 p. 55-737 6 PS3525.O5616P7 A volume of literary criticism made up of articles, essays, and reviews. 1623. MERRILL MOORE, 1903- It has been estimated that Dr. Moore has already written some 100,000 sonnets. While he writes in a nominally traditional form, he is modern- istic in his free treatment of it, and often also in his subject matter. Many of his sonnets are auto- biographical, often reflecting his Southern back- ground or his experiences as a psychiatrist. 1624. M; one thousand autobiographical sonnets. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1938. 1000 p. 39-537 PS3525.O563M2 1938 1625. Clinical sonnets. New York, Twayne, 1949. 72 p. [The Twayne library of modern poetry, 6] 49-50118 PS3525.O563C6 1626. Illegitimate sonnets. New York, Twayne, 1950. 125 p. 5!- 22 5 p S35 2 5-0563U 1627. More clinical sonnets. New York, Twayne, 1953. 72 p. 53-"7 2 PS3525.O563M6 1628. Wells, Henry W. Poet and psychiatrist: Merrill Moore, M. D.; a critical portrait with an appraisal of two hundred of his poems. New York, Twayne, 1955. 325 p. 55-3466 PS3525.O563Z94 1629. OGDEN NASH, 1902- Nash, who is noted for the tortured rhymes and irregular rhythms of his light verse, in which he expresses gently ironic commentaries on life, is commonly considered America's best modern humorous poet. 1630. I'm a stranger here myself. Boston, Little, Brown, 1938. 283 p. 3 &-2 74 68 PS3527.A637I5 1938 1 63 1. Good intentions. Boston, Little, Brown, 1942. 180 p. 42-25547 PS3527.A637G6 1632. Many long years ago. Boston, Little, Brown, 1945. xvii, 333 p. 45-8449 PS3527.A637M3 LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 133 1633. Versus. Boston, Little, Brown, 1949. 169 p. 49-7579 P s 35 2 7- A6 37 v 4 1634. The private dining room, and other new verses. Boston, Little, Brown, 1953. 169 p. 52-12647 PS3527.A637P73 1635. ROBERT GRUNTAL NATHAN, 1 894- Robert Nathan's first critical acclaim came for his book Autumn (1921), a Vermont pastoral characteristic of most of his work. His books are usually very short imaginative novelettes of fantasy written in a style that has often been called poetic and delicate, and which are pervaded by a tenderness that eliminates almost any astringent effects from the irony and satire of his humor. His books range from The Puppet Master (1923), wherein dolls con- verse, through Journey of Tapiola (1938), the ad- ventures of a terrier in New York, to Road of Ages (1935), the story of a caravan of Jews wending their way to a new home, and But Gently Day (1943), a tale of a young airman, killed in the war, who in the moment before dying joins his ancestors of the Civil War period and has a love affair with his grandmother. Children, animals, toys, and dreams recur in Nathan's stories, but he considers them to be as real as famine, floods, share-croppers, produc- tion lines, and slums, and so defends himself from charges of irreality and irrelevance. Nathan has also written several volumes of formal, conservative verse; The Green Leaf (1950) was a volume of col- lected poems. 1636. One more spring. New York, Knopf, 1933. 212 p. 33-3086 PZ3.Ni950n A novelette in which some characters take refuge, during a depression winter, in a shed in New York's Central Park. 1637. The Barly fields, a collection of five novels. New York, Knopf, 1938. xiv, 523 p. 38-27469 PZ3.Ni95Bar Contents.— The fidler in Barly.— The wood- cutter's house. — The bishop's wife. — The orchid. — There is another heaven. 1638. Winter in April. New York, Knopf, 1938. 228 p. 38-27028 PZ3.Ni95Wi A novel, without much of the usual fantasy, in which youth and age fall in love. 1639. Portrait of Jennie. New York, Knopf, 1940. 212 p. 40-27011 PZ3.N195P0 A fantasy in time which seems to imply a mystical belief in the immortality of the soul. 1640. Journal for Josephine. New York, Knopf, 1943. 142 p. 43-2244 PS3527.A74J6 A picture of Cape Cod during the summer of 1942; to some extent it may be generalized to a picture of the home front during World War II. 1641. The married look. New York, Knopf, 1950. 195 p. 50-13123 PZ3-Ni95Mar Another romantic fantasy in time. 1642. The innocent Eve. New York, Knopf, 195 1. 184 p. 51-10299 PZ3.Ni95ln Lucifer visits New York with his secretary. 1643. Sir Henry. New York, Knopf, 1955, '1954. 187 p. 54-12039 PZ7.Ni95Si A satirical fantasy. 1644. JOHN GNEISENAU NEIHARDT, 1881- Neihardt's major undertaking was a series of epics depicting the trans-Missouri country in the 19th century, particularly the 1880's. In iambic pentameter rhymed couplets he wrote of the pioneers and the Indians. His prose, dealing with much the same theme and setting, is linguistically less artificial. 1645. A cycle of the West: The song of three friends [1919], The song of Hugh Glass [1915], The song of fed Smith [1941], The song of the Indian Wars [1925], The song of the Messiah [1935]. New York, Macmillan, 1949. 254, 113, 179, no p. 49-8578 PS3527.E35C8 1646. When the tree flowered; an authentic tale of the old Sioux world. New York, Macmil- lan, 1 95 1. 248 p. 51-6974 PZ3.N3i6Wh 1647. EUGENE GLADSTONE O'NEILL, 188S- *953 Eugene O'Neill emerged, through the experi- mentalist little theater movement in general and the Provincetown Playhouse in particular, as Amer- ica's first major dramatist; in doing this he set aside a dramatic tradition of theater as craft alone, and established one of theater as art. O'Neill's plays are a search for the nature of tragedy in modern times. Life must be meaningfully expressed in a relation- ship between the individual (frequently through Freudian theories) and forces, internal or external, which are beyond his control, rather than one between man and God. This concept may be clearly seen in Mourning Becomes Klcctra, a Trilogy, wherein the ancient Greek tragedy, or tragedies, of Agamemnon, Orestes, Electra, el al., is transformed and transferred to New England of the period fol 134 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES lowing the Civil War. Also regularly recurrent is the character's struggle to find his place in the world and with regard to himself: either finding it, as in Lazarus Laughed; or losing himself successfully in a world of fantasy, as in the philosophical The Ice- man Cometh; or losing himself unsuccessfully in despair, as in The Hairy Ape. While normally a romantic realist, seeking a rational ideal, he turned occasionally to a more visionary type of drama, which reached its peak in the affirmative vision of Lazarus Laughed, which some consider his greatest play. Others prefer the psychological-sociological probing in plays such as the mammoth Strange In- terlude. A few prefer his early, less ambitious sea plays, e. g., The Moon of the Caribbees, and Six Other Plays of the Sea. Meanwhile the lyrical, nostalgic comedy Ah, Wilderness! remains one of his most popular full-length works, particularly with small theater groups. In 1936 O'Neill was awarded the Nobel prize for literature. 1648. Plays. New York, Random House, 1951. 3 v. (The Random House lifetime library) 51-9684 PS3529.N5 1951 Contents. — 1. Strange interlude (1928). Desire under the elms (1925). Lazarus laughed (1927). The fountain (1926). The moon of the Caribbees (1919). Bound east for Cardiff (1916). The long voyage home (1919). In the zone (1919). He (1919). Where the cross is made (1919). The rope (1919). The dreamy kid (1922). Before breakfast (1916). — 2. Mourning becomes Electra (1931). Ah, wilderness! (1933). All God's chillun got wings (1924). Marco millions (1927). Welded (1924). Diff'rent (1921). The first man (1922). Gold (1920). — 3. "Anna Christie" (1922). Beyond the horizon (1920). The Emperor Jones (1921). The hairy ape (1922). The great god Brown (1922). The straw (1921). Dynamo (1929). Days without end (1934). The iceman cometh (1946). 1649. A moon for the misbegotten. New York, Random House, 1952. 177 p. 52-6668 PS3529.N5M68 1952 1650. Engel, Edwin A. The haunted heroes of Eugene O'Neill. Cambridge, Harvard Uni- versity Press, 1953. 310 p. 53-5068 PS3529.N5Z63 1651. DOROTHY (ROTHSCHILD) PARKER, 1893- Dorothy Parker is a New York wit who gained fame for her light (and often barbed) verse and her satirical short stories. Her collected poems ap- peared in Not So Deep as a Well (1936), and her collected stories in Here Lies (1939). She has also written for stage and film. 1652. Dorothy Parker, with an introd. by W. Som- erset Maugham. New York, Viking Press, 1944. 544 p. (The Viking portable library) 44-4169 PS3531.A5855A6 1944 A collection of poems and stories. 1653. JULIA MOOD PETERKIN, 1880- Julia Peterkin described in her fiction the life of isolated plantation Negroes in South Caro- lina. Her local color stories were characterized not only by an evocation of the setting, but also by an attempt to reproduce the dialect. The novels have been considered among the best about Negroes. In Roll, Jordan, Roll (1933) she undertook a non- fictional presentation of the Negroes in her tales; the book was extensively illustrated with photographs by Doris Ulmann. 1654. Black April. Indianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill, 1927. 315 p. 27-5080 PZ3.P436BI 1655. Scarlet sister Mary. Indianapolis, Bobbs- Merrill, 1928. 345 p. 28-24477 PZ3.P436SC Awarded the Pulitzer prize for literature in 1929. 1656. ERNEST POOLE, 1880-1950. Ernest Poole was a novelist concerned with social problems. He commonly wrote with the point of view of a socialist of the early part of the century. His first novel, The Voice of the Street (1906), which depicts poverty in New York's East Side, in a way set the pace for his works, which often deal with American problems, frequently with a New York particularization. However, there are exceptions, such as With Western Eyes (1926), in which a Russian scientist views America; The Nancy Flyer, a Stagecoach Epic (1949), a recon- struction of stagecoach history in Poole's adopted state of New Hampshire; and Blind: A Story Of These Times (1920), which in part portrays tene- ment life in New York, but also deals with Europe and the Russian Revolution. The Bridge, an auto- biography, was published in 1940. 1657. The harbor. New York, Macmillan, 1915. 387 p. _ 15-2844 PZ3.P785H Usually considered Poole's best book, this has been called the outstanding American proletarian novel. 1658. His family. New York, Macmillan, 1917. 320 p. 17-13623 PZ3-P785Hi LITERATURE (1607-I955) / I35 A New York family as typifying changes in modern life; the book was awarded a Pulitzer prize in 1918. 1659. KATHERINE ANNE PORTER, 1S94- Katherine Anne Porter, who writes short stories on a wide range of topics, has been generally acclaimed for her perfection on a small scale, the pre- cision of her English, her restraint, and the poetic element in her style. Born and reared in Texas and Louisiana, her experience has also included several years in Mexico and Europe; from each of these areas she has drawn settings for her stories. Al- though her work is small in bulk, and in some re- spects in scope, almost all of it has been highly praised. Outside the short-story form her work in- cludes the writing of Mae Franking's anonymously published My Chinese Marriage (1921), which Miss Porter disclaims on the grounds that she was merely setting down another person's story, and The Days Before (1952), a collection of essays and articles, most of which were written to meet specific editorial demand at various times throughout her career. 1660. Flowering Judas. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1930. 145 p. 30-25819 PS3531.O752F55 1930 PZ3.P8315FI Contents. — Maria Concepcion. — Magic. — Rope. — Ke. — The jilting of Granny Weatherall. — Flowering Judas. Theft, That Tree, The cracked looking-glass, and Hacienda were added in the 1935 edition. 1661. Pale horse, pale rider; three short novels. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1939. 264 p. 39-27273 PZ 3 .P8 3 i 5 Pal PS35 3 i.0 7 52Pe Contents. — Old morality. — Noon wine. — Pale horse, pale rider. 1662. The leaning tower, and other stories. New York, Flarcourt, Brace, 1944. 246 p. 44-7946 PZ3.P83i5Le 1663. Schwartz, Edward. Katherine Anne Por- ter; a critical bibliography. New York, New York Public Library, 1953. 42 p. 53-2504 Z87057.S35 Reprinted from the Bulletin of the New Yor\ Public Library of May 1953. 1664. EZRA LOOMIS POUND, 1885- In his early literary essays, poetry, and trans- lations, as well as personally, Pound exerted a con- siderable effect on American literature, influencing and "discovering" poets such as Hart Crane, Wil- liam Carlos Williams, Robert Frost, T. S. Eliot, Archibald MacLeish, Carl Sandburg, Amy Lowell, and others. The supreme greatness or hopelessly ob- fuscated cacophony of his later work is still being debated: partly in nonliterary terms, for Pound rests in political disrepute, largely based on the economic and political views which led him to side with Mussolini during World War II. Always concerned with literary theory and technique (when not ob- sessed by economic matters), even his Letters, 1907- 1941 (1950) as edited by D. D. Paige are presenta- tions of literary views, rather than reflections of a personal life. Pound's translations and adaptations of poems from Chinese and Provencal, among oth- ers, have not only done much to make such literature known to Americans, but the creativeness applied to some of them has given the work the seminal effect of forceful original poetry. Considered by some an outstanding achievement in modern verse drama is his translation of Sophocles' Women of Trachis, which appeared in 1954 in the winter issue of The Hudson Review. 1665. The cantos. [New York] New Directions, 1948. 149, 56, 46, 167, 118 p. 48-4633 PS3531.O82C28 Contents. — A draft of XXX cantos. — Eleven new cantos, XXXI-XLI. — The fifth decade of cantos. — Cantos LII-LXXI. — The Pisan cantos. 1666. Personae; the collected poems. [New York] New Directions [1950? c 1926] 273 p. 50-13308 PS3531.O82P4 1950 Personae was first used by Pound as a tide for a 1909 volume of poetry; the title was used again for a collection of poetry published in 1926. This collection also included material from Exulta- tions (1909), Ripostes (1912), Lustra (19 16), Hugh Selwyn Mauberley (1920), and Homage to Sextus Proper tins, which was first published independently in 1934, although it dates from 1917. The present edition of the Personae is meant to include all Pound's poems other than the Cantos. Pound's other independent volumes of poetry have included Canzoni (iqii), Cathay (1915), Quia Pauper Amavi (1919), Umbra (1920), Poems, 1918-21 (1921), Indiscretions (1923), and Alfred Venison's Poems (1935). 1667. The translations of Ezra Pound. [New York] New Directions [1953?] 408 p. 53-11965 PN6020.P6 1668. Literary ess.ivs. F.dited with an introd. by T. S. Eliot. ] Norfolk, Conn.] New Direc- tions, 1954. xv, 464 p. 54 _ 79°5 PN511.P625 136 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 1669. Edwards, John H. A preliminary checklist of the writings of Ezra Pound, especially his contributions to periodicals. New Haven, Kirgo- Books, 1953. viii, 73 p. 52-12855 Z8709.3.E3 1670. Espey, John J. Ezra Pound's Mauberley; a study in composition. Berkeley, University of California Press, 1955. 139 p. 54-6474 PS3531.O82H842 1955 1671. Kenner, Hugh. The poetry of Ezra Pound. Norfolk, Conn., New Directions, 195 1. 342 p. 51-12356 PS3531.O82Z7 1672. Leary, Lewis G., ed. Motive and method in The cantos of Ezra Pound. New York, Co- lumbia University Press, 1954. viii, 135 p. (Eng- lish Institute. Essays, 1953) 54-11609 PE1010.E5 1953 1673. Russell, Peter, ed. An examination of Ezra Pound; a collection of essays. [Norfolk, Conn.] New Directions, 1950. 268 p. 50-10415 PS3531.O82Z8 1950a London ed. (P. Nevili) has tide: Ezra Pound. 1674. Watts, Harold H. Ezra Pound and The cantos. Chicago, Regnery, 1952. 132 p. 53-1720 PS3531.O82C29 1952a 1675. JOHN CROWE RANSOM, 1888- Ransom's poetry is distinguished by verbal elegance and precision, and permeated by gentle, intellectual irony. His first book, Poems About God (1919), bore the promise that has been ful- filled in the small quantity of verse he has since pub- lished. Not only an accomplished poet, Ransom is also prominent as a literary critic and as editor of the literary quarterly. The Kenyon Review (v. 1 + winter 1939+ Gambier, Ohio, Kenyon College). 1676. Chills and fever, poems. New York, Knopf, 1924. 95 p. 24-21606 PS3535.A635C5 1924 1677. Two gentlemen in bonds. New York, Knopf, 1927. 87 p. 27-2199 PS3535.A635T8 1927 Verse. 1678. The world's body. New York, Scribner, 1938. 350 p. 38-27471 PN1136.R3 Contents. — A poem nearly anonymous. — Forms and citizens. — Poets without laurels. — The poet as woman. — Poetry: a note in ontology. — A psychol- ogist looks at poetry. — A cathedralist looks at mur- der. — The cathartic principle. — The mimetic prin- ciple. — Sentimental exercise. — The tense of poetry. — Contemporaneous not contemporary. — Shakespeare at sonnets. — Art and Mr. Santayana. — Criticism, inc. 1679. Poems and essays. New York, Vintage Books, 1955. 185 p. (A Vintage book, K-24) 55-3 8 i3 PS3535-A635A6 1955 The poems in this volume are, with two additions, the same as those which appeared in Ransom's Selected Poems (1945). The essays are from pe- riodicals, and had not previously had publication in volume form. 1680. MARJORIE (KINNAN) RAWLINGS, 1896-1954 Mrs. Rawlings' books have dealt with the iso- lated and somewhat primitive hammock district of Florida, with the exception of The Sojourner (1952), which was set in New York State. Best known for her novels, she has also published a volume of short stories and an autobiographical book describing her Florida neighbors as much as her own life. Her work, which has much local color detail and description, is realistic in manner, at times inclined to be sentimental, and with a frank love of the country and its people. An impression of their dialect is conveyed more in wording than spelling. 1 68 1. South moon under. New York, Scribner, 1933- 334 P- 33-54 8 5 PZ3.R1969S0 A novel depicting the life of a hunter in the Florida backwoods. 1682. Golden apples. New York, Scribner, 1935. 352 p. 35-18688 PZ3.R1969G0 A story, with some culture conflict, of farming in the Florida back country. 1683. The yearling. New York, Scribner, 1938. 428 p. 38-27280 PZ3.Ri969Ye The author was awarded a Pulitzer prize for this novel about an adolescent in the Florida back country and his love for a pet fawn. 1684. When the whippoorwill — New York, Scribner, 1940. 275 p. 40-27409 PZ3.R1969WI1 Contents. — A crop of beans. — Benny and the bird dogs. — Jacob's ladder. — The pardon. — Var- mints. — The enemy. — Gal young 'un. — Alliga- tors. — A plumb dare conscience. — A mother in Mannville. — Cocks must crow. LITERATURE (1607-1955) / 1 37 1685. Cross Creek. New York, Scribner, 1942. 368 p. 42-36118 PS3535.A845C7 Autobiographical work descriptive of the author's home area in Florida. 1686. EUGENE MANLOVE RHODES, 1869- 1934 A cowboy and a writer in New Mexico, Rhodes wrote regional novels and short stories which are considered among the most literary of westerns. He truthfully depicted the background and social attitudes (which he shared) of the cowboy society of the late 19th century on the cattle ranges. One of his most esteemed novels, Paso por Aqui (1927) was widely distributed as the movie Four Faces West. May Davison Rhodes, his wife, shordy after his death wrote a biography of him: The Hired Man on Horseback (Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1938. 263 p.). 1687. Best novels and stories. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1949. xxii, 551 p. 49-11703 PZ3.R3443Bd Novels and novelettes included: Paso por aqui. — Good men and true. — Bransford of Rainbow Range. — The trusty knaves. — The desire of the moth. — Hit the line hard. 1688. ELMER L. RICE, 1892- Elmer Rice, born Elmer Reizenstein, is a New York dramatist who first attracted attention with realistic plays which commonly carried some leftist moral. A withdrawal from his leftist posi- tion was effected in his later work. Probably his most famous play is Street Scene, which reflects life in a New York slum tenement block. He tried to give the same treatment to New York as a whole in his novel, Imperial City (1937). His earlier novel, A Voyage to Purilia (1930) was a satire on the movie industry; his later novel, The Show Must Go On (1949) was a more serious study of theater life. 1689. Seven plays. New York, Viking Press, 1950. x, 524 p. 50-10796 PS3535.I224S45 Contents. — On trial (1914). — The adding ma- chine (1923). — Street scene (1929). — Counsellor-at- ! law (1931). — Judgment day (1934). — Two on an island (1940). — Dream girl (1946). 1690. The winner, a play in four scenes. New York, Dramatists Play Service, 1954. 127 p. 54-11654 PS3535.I224W5 1691. CONRAD MICHAEL RICHTER, 1890- Conrad Richter writes historical novels and short stories which give his impressions of life in America. His setting is often the American South- west, to which he himself moved, or the region about Ohio and Pennsylvania, where he was born. His lucid style, depiction of local color, and record- ing of historical details are characteristics of his work. He has also written nonfiction, such as The Mountain on the Desert (1955), which expresses his philosophic and mystic view of life. 1692. Early Americana and other stories. New York, Knopf, 1936. 322 p. 36-2101 1 PZ3-R4i7Ear Contents. — Early Americana. — Smoke over the prairie. — New home. — Long drouth. — Frontier woman. — As it was in the beginning. — Buckskin vacation. — The square piano. — Early marriage. 1693. The sea of grass. New York, Knopf, 1937. 149 p. 37-27107 PZ3.R4i7Se2 A refined heroine leaves her husband and children and their large cattle ranch to return to the city, after 20 years she returns and is accepted back by her husband. 1694. The trees. New York, Knopf, 1940. 302 p. 40-27179 PZ3.R4i7Tr The first volume of a trilogy, this is the story of a Pennsylvania pioneer family's immigration to Ohio near the end of the 18th century. It was followed in 1946 by The Fields (PZ3.R417F1 46- 2155), which is the story of the next generation opening up the frontier community. In 1950 ap- peared The Town (PZ3.R417T0 50-6331), in which the family moves from a cabin to a mansion, and the community becomes a town, while the frontier has moved further West. 1695. The free man. New York, Knopf, 1943. 147 p. 43- JI 545 PZ3.R417F1 The story of a German who arrives in America as an indentured servant; fights in the Revolutionary War against the British; and lives with the Penn- sylvania Dutch as a free man. 1696. The light in the forest. New York, Knopf, 1953. 179 p. 52-12207 PZ3.R417L1 A story of the conflict of white and Indian views of life. It centers about the rescue of a boy after 11 years with the Delaware Indians who had cap- tured him, of the boy's attempt to rejoin the Indians, and the results. I38 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 1697. ELIZABETH MADOX ROBERTS, 1886- 194 1 Elizabeth Madox Roberts wrote novels and short stories of life in rural Kentucky at various social levels and at different periods, among which the 20th century predominates. Artistry of style and lyric- ism are characteristics of her best work. In the field of poetry the author wrote first for children and later for adults, introducing certain aspects of the folk song into this portion of her work. Her last volume of poems was Song in the Meadow (1940). In almost all of her writing she made some use of the English spoken in the Kentucky hills. The dialect added freshness and vitality to her work, except when the form was extreme or when its presence constituted an impediment for readers unfamiliar with the speech of the locality. 1698. The time of man. New York, Viking Press, 1926. 382 p. 26-15401 PZ3.R54145T1 The author's first novel and the one most fre- quently read and reprinted. It is a story of poor whites in rural Kentucky. 1699. My heart and my flesh ... a novel. New York, Viking Press, 1927. 300 p. 27-22999 PZ3.R54i45My Against a Kentucky setting this book unfolds a psychological story of a young woman, of aristo- cratic family, who survives near-insanity and pro- tracted illness to find happiness. 1700. Jingling in the wind. New York, Viking Press, 1928. 256 p. 28-22353 PZ3.R5 4 i45Ji A humorous fantasy about a rural rainmaker and his trip to the metropolis to attend a convention of rainmakers. 1 70 1. The great meadow. New York, Viking Press, 1930. 338 p. 30-7676 PZ3.R54i45Gr A story of pioneer life in Kentucky and conflict with the Indians. 1702. A buried treasure. New York, Viking Press, 193 1. 296 p. 31-28312 PZ3.R54i4Bur A humorous narrative about a farmer and his wife who discover a buried treasure, and the celebration party they hold. 1703. The haunted mirror. New York, Viking Press, 1932. 288 p. 32-32267 PZ3.R54i45Hau A volume of short stories. 1704. He sent forth a raven. New York, Viking Press, 1935. 255 p. 35-27098 PZ3.R54i45He A poetic and somewhat mystic story about a farmer who, after his wife's death, vowed not to set foot on earth again, and then spent the rest of his life directing the farm work from his porch. 1705. Black is my truelove's hair. New York, Viking Press, 1938. 281 p. 38-27966 PZ3.R54145BI A lyrical novel of a Kentucky village girl who eventually finds true love; the story is written in a simple prose reflecting the native speech of the region. 1706. Not by strange gods; stories. New York, Viking Press, 1941. 244 p. 41-5 1 14 PZ3.R54145N0 Contents. — The haunted palace. — I love my bonny bride. — Swing low, sweet chariot. — Holy morning. — The betrothed. — Love by the highway. 1707. KENNETH LEWIS ROBERTS, 1885- Kenneth Roberts is a historical novelist who usually sets his stories in early America (from the pre-Revolutionary period through the War of 18 12). Maine, the state in which he lives, or characters from Maine, are often prominent in his books. 1708. Arundel, being the recollections of Steven Nason of Arundel, in the province of Maine, attached to the secret expedition led by Colonel Bene- dict Arnold against Quebec and later a captain in the Continental Army serving at Valcour Island, Bemis Heights, and Yorktown. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, Doran, 1930. 618 p. 30-3872 PZ3.R54263Ar Sequels: Rabble in Arms and Captain Caution. 1709. Rabble in arms; a chronicle of Arundel and the Burgoyne invasion. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, Doran, 1933. 870 p. 33-33263 PZ3.R54263Rab Sequel: Captain Caution (1934). Preceded by: Arundel. 1 710. Northwest passage. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, Doran, 1937. 2 v. 37-27401 PS3535.O176N6 1937 The first part recounts the campaigns of Robert Rogers and Rogers' Rangers against the Indians; the second part is largely the story of Rogers' search for a northwest passage. LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 1 39 171 1. Oliver Wiswell. New York, Doubleday, Doran, 1940. 2 v. 40-36023 PS3535.O176O5 1940 A novel of the American Revolution as seen by a colonial loyalist. 1712. Boon Island. Garden City, N. Y., Double- day, 1956, c 1955. 275 p. 56-5443 PZ3.R54263B0 The story of a shipwreck, which occurred in the winter of 1710 on a rocky island oil the New Hamp- shire coast, and of the endurance of the survivors who underwent extreme hardships. 1713. EDWIN ARLINGTON ROBINSON, 1869-1935 Robinson's poetry is basically a searching for ultimate moral values. This quest is often pre- sented through dramatic sketches of individuals, many of whom are associated with Tilbury, the fictitious name he assigned to Gardiner, Maine, the town in which he was reared. Although his con- tent was novel, he employed conservative verse forms. He started writing near the beginning — and was himself part — of the revolt against the effete sunsets-and-nightingales poetry that quantitatively dominated late 19th-century poetic production. At his best in his dramatic sketches and lyrics, Robin- son also wrote a number of long narrative poems which attracted considerable attention when they were first published. Initially he struggled in iso- lation for recognition, so that he became a somewhat embittered author; but his subsequendy acknowl- edged position as an important poet and his tran- sitional modernity have led various schools to claim him as a member, or at least as a precursor. The struggle for achievement, recognition, and even sur- vival is reflected more direcdy in his letters than in his poetry. 1714. New York, Macmillan, 1Q 37 Pub- Collected poems. 1937. xii, 1498 p. 37-27280 PS3535.O25A17 "Complete edition with additional poems, lished April 1937." Contenis. — The man against the sky (1916). — The children of the night (1 890-1 897). —Captain Craig, etc. (1902). — Merlin (1917). — The town down the river (1910). — Lancelot (1920). — The three taverns (1920). — Avon's harvest, etc. (1921) — Tristram (1927). — Roman Bartholow (1923). — Dionysus in doubt (1925). — The man who died twice (1924). — Cavcnder's house (1929). — The glory of the nightingales (1930). — Matthias at the door (1931). — Nicodemus (1932). — Talifer ( ! 933)- — Amaranth (1934). — King Jasper (1935). 1715. Selected letters. New York, Macmillan, 1940. x, 191 p. 40-27180 PS3535.O25Z5J 1 71 6. Untriangulated stars; letters of Edwin Ar- lington Robinson to Harry de Forest Smith, 1 890-1 905. Edited by Denham Sutcliffe. Cam- bridge, Harvard University Press, 1947. xxvii, 348 p. 47-1 1410 PS3535.O25Z54 1717. Barnard, Ellsworth. Edwin Arlington Rob- inson, a critical study. New York, Mac- millan, 1952. xii, 318 p. 52-7104 PS3535.O25Z555 1718. Fussell, Edwin S. Edwin Arlington Robin- son; the literary background of a traditional poet. Berkeley, University of California Press, 1954. 211 p. 54-8017 PS3535.O25Z60 1719. Neff, Emery E. Edwin Arlington Robin- son. [New York] Sloane, 1948. xviii, 286 p. (The American men of letters series) 48-8640 PS3535.O25Z74 1720. OLE EDVART R0LVAAG, 1 876-1 931 R0lvaag came to America from Norway in 1896. He attended St. Olaf College in Minnesota, where from 1907 to 1931 he was professor of Nor- wegian; in that language all his books were originally written. The first novel of the trilogy which was his major work is usually regarded as his best; in it he realistically depicts the life of Norwegian emi- grants in South Dakota when it was part of the Northwestern frontier. The two subsequent novels follow the family history after the initial pioneer period had passed. 1721. Giants in the earth; a saga of the prairie. New York, Harper, 1927. 465 p. 27-12513 PZ3-R6275Gi Translated by the author from / De Dage, pub- lished by Aschehoug, 1924-25. 1722. Peder Victorious, a novel. Translated from the Norwegian, English text by Nora O. Solum . . . and the author. New York, Harper, 1929. 350 p. 29-1081 PZ3.R6285Pe Translation of Pcder Seicr. 1723. Their fathers' God, a novel. Translated from the Norwegian by Trygve M. Ager. New York, Harper, 1931. 338 p. 31-29967 PZ3.R6.75Th Translation of Den Signcde Dag. 140 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 1724. ARCHIBALD HAMILTON RUTLEDGE, 1883- Archibald Rutledge comes from a low country area, formerly a rice plantation, in South Carolina; this he usually uses as a setting for his writings. Some of his best work is that of a nature-lover and hunter describing his hunting experiences and the woods and swamplands, with much attention given to the animals inhabiting them; such books include Children of Swamp and Wood (1927), An Ameri- can Hunter (1937), and Hunter's Choice (1946). Further aspects of life on his plantation are treated in the short stories of Old Plantation Days (1921) and the somewhat sentimental Peace in the Heart (1930). In addition to the short stories and the nature and hunting sketches, Rutledge has also written much conservative poetry, a recent volume of selections being Brimming Tide and Other Poems (1954). 1725. Wild life of the South. New York, Stokes, 1935. 253 p. illus. 35-17191 QH81.R9783 1726. Home by the river. Indianapolis, New York, Bobbs-Merrill, 1941. 167 p. plates, ports. 41-4127 F279.H25R8 A book of Rudedge's experiences and observations at, as well as some historical background of, the family plantation at Hampton, S. C. 1727. CARL SANDBURG, 1878- Sandburg first gained prominence as a real- istic poet of America in general and of Chicago and the Midwest in particular. He has adapted Whitman's form and idiom with much success to evoke urban industrial America, the small town, and rural America. Although a 1950 volume of his collected poetry was awarded a Pulitzer prize for poetry, his free verse has tended in recent years to be overshadowed by his prose: his biographical work on Lincoln, his autobiography, and the long historical novel, Remembrance Roc\. 1728. Abraham Lincoln, the prairie years. With 105 illus. from photographs, and many car- toons, sketches, maps, and letters. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1926. 2 v. 26-38885-E457.3.S22 1729. Abraham Lincoln, the war years. With 414 half-tones of photographs and 249 cuts of cartoons, letters, documents. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1939. 4 v. 39-27998 E457.4.S36 1730. Remembrance Rock. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1948. 1067 p. 48-8509 PZ3.S2i3Re A patriotic novel attempting to convey the "American Dream." The book attempts this through picturing the people and times at three critical stages: the Puritan period, the time of the Revolutionary War, and the pre-Civil War and Civil War period. 1731. Complete poems. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1950. 676 p. 50-11502 PS3537.A618 1950 Among earlier volumes of Sandburg's poetry are In Reckless Ecstasy (1904), Chicago Poems (1916), Cornhuskers (1918), Smo1{e and Steel (1920), Slabs of the Sunburnt West (1922), Good Morning, America (1928), and The People, Yes (1936). 1732. Always the young strangers. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1952. 527 1. 53-9843 PS3537.A618Z5 1952 Autobiographical. 1733. GEORGE SANTAYANA, 1 863-1952 Santayana was born in Spain of a Spanish father and a New England mother; he came to America as a child, but after some forty years re- turned to Europe, where he passed the rest of his life. He has been praised for his poetry, despite its limited bulk; his one novel achieved considerable renown; and he wrote an outstanding autobiog- raphy. However, it is as a philosopher of literary merit that he is best known, and his philosophical works are treated under the Philosophy section of this bibliography. In all his work Santayana has been a stylist of conservative tendencies and with a consciousness of word connotations. 1734. Poems. New York, Scribner, 1923. 140 p. 23-5779 PS2770.A4 1923 1735. The genteel tradition at bay. New York, Scribner, 1931. 74 p. 31-26894 B821.S17 Three essays on the old and the new humanism. 1736. The last Puritan; a memoir in the form of a novel. London, Constable, 1935. 721 p. 35-31979 PZ3.S2284Las A study of the New England character, bleakly bowed beneath the weight of moral duty. 1737. Persons and places. New York, Scribner, 1944-53- 3 v - 43-5 1363 B 945-S24A3 Autobiography. Contents. — [v. 1] The background of my life. — v. 2. The middle span. — v. 3. My host the world. LITERATURE (1607-1955) / I4I 1738. Dialogues in limbo, with 3 new dialogues. New York , Scribner, 1948. 248 p. 48-10294 B945.S23D5 1948 First issued in 1925. 1739. Dominations and powers; reflections on lib- erty, society, and government. New York, Scribner, 1951. 481 p. 51-10642 JC251.S33 1740. The poet's testament: poems and two plays. New York, Scribner, 1953. 216 p. 53-11773 PS2772.P6 The two plays are The Marriage of Venus and Philosophers at Court. 1741. Letters. Edited, with an introd. and com- mentary, by Daniel Cory. New York, Scribner, 1955. xxxi, 451 p. 55-9677 B945.S24A4 1742. Duron, Jacques. La pensee de George San- tayana; Santayana en Amerique. Paris, Nizet [1950] viii, 556 p. 51-22923 B945.S24D8 1743. EVELYN SCOTT, 1893- Evelyn Scott is a novelist who has been con- cerned with establishing basic motivations and at- titudes behind human actions. Her exposure of hypocrisies and shams, expressed with seriousness of purpose and resultant common lack of humor, have resulted in subjects and views to which con- servatives have objected. Her usually long, fic- tional accounts of life in America are written in a realistic, neo-naturalistic style and with a wealth of accurately observed detail expressive of her impres- sionistic rather than interpretational approach. Some of her books are episodic in character, rather than adhering to rigid plot structure. This may be seen in works such as Breathe Upon These Slain (1934), a novel which recreates the lives of former inhabitants of a rented English farmhouse, evolving the story from the evidence of what they have left behind. At the same time she shared with Waldo Frank a milder (i. e., less communistic) liberalism and a tendency to see characters as part of a group or setting, rather than as individuals; early influ- enced by the writings of Karl Marx, in the thirties she turned from what she considered a perversion of his principles, and started to evolve her own course of liberalism. In addition to her fiction, she has written some poetry and two volumes of auto- biography: Escapade (1923) and Background In Tennessee (1937), which is as much a study of her background as of any part of her life. 1744. The narrow house. New York, Boni & Liveright, 1921. 221 p. 21-5273 PZ3-S245Na A novel of drab lives pressed together in a narrow house. 1745. The wave. New York, Cape & Smith, 1929. 624 p. 29-14106 PZ3.S4245Wav A loosely structured novel of narratives of the Civil War. 1746. A calendar of sin, American melodramas. New York, Cape & Smith, 1931. 2 v. 31-28134 PZ3.S4245Cal A novel evolving from the stories of five genera- tions of a family. 1747. Eva Gay, a romantic novel. New York, Smith & Haas, 1933. 799 p. 33-27102 PZ3.S4245EV A story with the world for stage; on the plot level it is concerned with a woman and her two loves. 1748. The shadow of the hawk. New York, Scrib- ner, 1941. 494 p. 41-7659 PZ3.S4245Sh The story of a boy who grows up with the knowl- edge that his father, convicted of murder, was innocent. 1749. ROBERT EMMET SHERWOOD, 1896- IQ 55 Robert Sherwood distinguished himself in several fields, but is probably best known for his dramatic work. His early plays, such as The Road to Rome (1927) and Reunion in Vienna (1932), tended to be comedies displaying Shavian influence. With The Petrified Forest he began to show a more personal style in serious drama. After this his work was pre- dominantly serious. Related to his work in drama is his writing for films. Sherwood was also the author of Roosevelt and Hopkins, an Intimate His- tory (1948, rev. 1950), for which he was awarded the Pulitzer prize for biography. He also three times received the Pulitzer award for drama. 1750. The petrified forest. New York, Scribner, 1935. 176 p. 35-5154 PS3537.H825P4 1935 1 75 1. Idiot's delight. [A play] New York, Scribner, 1936. 100 p. 36-8866 PS3537.H825I4 1936 1752. Abe Lincoln in Illinois, a play in twelve scenes. New York, Scribner, 1939. 250 p. 39-27098 PS3537.H825A63 1939 I42 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 1753. There shall be no night. New York, Scrib- ner, 1940. 178 p. 40-27741 PS3537.H825T45 i94« a 1 754 . UPTON BEALL SINCLAIR, 1878- Upton Sinclair is an extremely prolific author with a sift for presenting action in a journalistic manner. His usually realistic work has been largely propagandist* and, in his early years, almost en- tirely ^'proletarian" in emphasis. The Jungle, his first successful publication, was an expose of con- ditions in the meat industry in Chicago; it was in- fluential in starting a crusade for pure food in the Theodore Roosevelt era, and has been called the most powerful novel of the muckraking movement. Later he turned to writing pamphlets, trom 1 he Profits of Religion (1918) through Mammonart (1925) and Money Writes (1927); in this series he produced one of the most thorough, if unbalanced, Marxian interpretations of American culture. Alter a few years he again turned from proletarian novels in order to write in aid of his campaign for the governorship of California, to which he was nearly elected in 1934. In i94<> he started publication of a series of novels centering about Lanny Budd, a hero whose mobility enabled the author to comment about numerous contemporary affairs. The series depicts the situation, national and international, from the beginning of World War I through the period following World War II. In 1943 the third volume, Dragon's Teeth, was awarded a Pulitzer prize The series was announced as complete with the publication in 1949 of volume ten- however it was resumed in 1953- Although Sinclair has also produced a few dramatic works, it is his novels which are well known. It has been claimed that in some foreign countries he is the most widely read of American authors and that he has been trans- lated more often into more foreign languages than any other modern author. In 1925 he was officially declared a Soviet classic, an act which evidenced his great popularity in Russia. i<7« The iuncle. New York, Doubleday, Page, 7D5 ' X906. 1 4*3 P. ^ 626 4 PZ 3- S6l6 > 1756. Oil! A novel. New York, Boni, 1927. 27-7669 PZ 3 .S6i60i A story derived from scandals during President Harding's administration, especially the Teapot Dome scandal. 1757. American outpost; a book of reminiscences. New York, Farrar & Rinehart, 1932. 280 p. 32-26373 PS3537.I85Z5 1932 1758. Lanny Budd series. New York, Viking Press, 1940-53. 11 v. Contents.— v. 1. World's end (PZ3.S616W0 40-7472). — v. 2. Between two worlds (PZ3-S6i6Be 41-4373).— v. 3. Dragon's teeth (PZ3-S6i6Dr 42- i 6)._v. 4. Wide is the gate (PZ3-S6i6Wi 43- I 6 2 ).— v. 5. Presidential agent (PZ3.S616PI 44- 4916).— v. 6. Dragon harvest (PZ3.S616DP 45- 35107). — v. 7. A world to win (PZ3-S6i6Wn 46-3965). — v. 8. Presidential mission (PZ3.S6i6?o 47-30286).— v. 9. One clear call (PZ3.S6i60m 48-8056).— v. 10. O shepherd, speak! (PZ3.S616O 49-9981).— v. 11. The return of Lanny Budd (PZ3.S6i6Re 53-5202). 1759. LILLIAN EUGENIA SMITH, 1897- Born and reared in the South and coeditor from 1936 to 1945 of South Today, Miss Smith's novel, Strange Fruit, was the expression of a South- erner's soul searching on account of evils resulting from racial discrimination in her native ^ section. The purpose of the novel to expose the ultimate of these evils necessitates tragedy and violence in the action of the book; but these are expressed with literary artistry as well as power. The author's position with regard to a love affair between mem- bers of different races, and her fidelity to language natural to uneducated characters but not in ordinary use, made the book a controversial one. Partly for that reason it reached a large audience. It has also been translated into French, Italian, Spanish, and other languages. 1760. Strange fruit, a novel. New York, Reynal & Hitchcock, 1944. 371 p. 44-40028 PZ3.S6536St 1761. The journey. Cleveland, World Pub. Co., 1954. 256 p. 53-° 6 43 PZ3-S6536Jo Spiritual autobiography of the author's journey thus far through life. 1762. WILBUR DANIEL STEELE, 1886- Although he has written several novels, Steele is best known for his short stories; these are frequently set in places such as New England, South Carolina, and Arizona. Ingenuity of plot presenta- tion and sustained action have led some reviewers to regard him as the best of conventional short-story writers. He has also done some dramatic work, such as Terrible Woman, and Other One Act Plays (1925); these were written for the Provincetown Players. In some cases he has collaborated with other authors in the writing of plays. LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 1 43 1763. That girl from Memphis. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, Doran, 1945. 470 p. 45-5456 PZ3.S8i4oTh A novel of the early West, in which a young man falls in love with a prostitute. 1764. The best stories of Wilbur Daniel Steele. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1946. 469 p. 46-5578 PZ3.S8i 4 9Be 1765. Full cargo; more stories. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1951. 369 p. 51-14516 PZ3.S8149 Fu 1766. GERTRUDE STEIN, 1874-1946 Gertrude Stein lived most of her life in France, where she created her experimental writ- ings on essentially American subjects, based on her memories of her native land or on encounters with Americans abroad. Much of her work was con- structed on a principle of verbal repetition with slight modification, so as to arrive at and establish with precision some nuance of meaning. Thus in her attempts for clarity she evolved in her prose not only a tendency to occasionally complex syn- tax, but also to a frequent heavy abstraction, char- acterized in part by an emphasis on verbs and a deemphasis on nouns (a procedure reversed in much of her poetry), — with the result that most readers find her more experimental books "difficult." Nev- ertheless, her works have been highly admired by a few and influential on a number of prominent writ- ers, such as Hemingway, Sherwood Anderson, and Louis Bromfield. Her reputation for difficulty has to some extent kept from her a wide audience such as might seem consonant with her wide influence; consequently a number of authors, who have derived stylistic elements from her works, have themselves been far more popular. In her more conservative books the speech rhythms on which she based the bulk of her work become obvious, and a few might be viewed as largely lucid conversational report- age — a factor which draws her considerably closer to some of the authors who have found her writings seminal. 1767. Three lives; stories of the good Anna, Mel- anctha, and the gentle Lena. New York, Grafton Press, 1909. 279 p. 9-20912 PS3537.T323T5 1909 1768. The making of Americans, being a history of a family's progress, written . . . 1906-1908. [Paris, Contact Editions] 1925. 925 p. 44-10190 PS3537.T323M3 1925 1769. Wars I have seen. New York, Random House, 1945. 259 p. 45-2075 PS3537.T323W3 1770. Brewsie and Willie. New York, Random House, 1946. 114 p. 46-5457 PS3537.T323B7 A conversational-styled book reflecting the per- sonal problems of American soldiers in France dur- ing World War II. 1771. Selected writings. Edited, with an introd. and notes, by Carl Van Vechten. New York, Random House, 1946. 622 p. 46-11965 PS3537.T323A6 1946 In addition to selections from the books listed above, this volume contains material from Geogra- phy and Plays (1922), and some miscellaneous pieces, as well as the complete texts of Tender Buttons (1914), Miss Stein's autobiographical The Autobiography of Alice B. Tobias (1933), and Four Saints in Three Acts (1934), which was used by Virgil Thomson as the libretto for his opera of the same name. Miss Stein's fiction is represented by short stories, rather than by selections from her novels Lucy Church Amiably (1930) and Ida (1941). 1772. The Yale edition of the unpublished writ- ings of Gertrude Stein. New Haven, Yale University Press, 195 1. 51-6628 PS3537.T323A6 1773. Rogers, William Garland. When this you see remember me; Gertrude Stein in person. New York, Rinehart, 1948. 247 p. 48-7376 PS3537.T323Z8 1774. Sutherland, Donald. Gertrude Stein, a biog- raphy of her work. New Haven, Yale Uni- versity Press, 1 95 1. 218 p. 51-12323 PS3537.T323Z83 1775. JOHN STEINBECK, 1902- Steinbeck is a realistic and naturalistic novelist from California who commonly uses his home area as a setting for his fiction. His sympathy is with the inarticulate masses who are unable to speak for themselves. He pictures with understand- ing the lowest classes, the brute, the animalistic, the moronic, and the less intelligent social outcasts. Grapes of Wrath, a social document of the problems and life of the migratory farmers of the Southwest during the dustbowl period of the depression years, has probably been his most influential and widely read novel of social criticism. 144 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 1776. The long valley. New York, Viking Press, 1938. 303 p. 38-27754 PZ3.S8195L02 Short stories. 1777. The grapes of wrath. New York, Viking Press, 1940. 619 p. 40-6133 PZ3.S8i95Grn "First published in April 1939 . . . eleventh print- ing February 1940." 1778. The wayward bus. New York, Viking Press, 1947. 312 p. 47-30085 PZ3.S8i95Way PS3537.T3234W3 1779. East of Eden. New York, Viking Press, 1952. 602 p. 52-4118 PZ3.S8i95Eas 1780. Short novels: Tortilla Flat [1935]; The red pony [1937]; Of mice and men [1937]; The moon is down [1942]; Cannery Row [1945]; The pearl [1947]. With an introd. by Joseph Henry Jackson. New York, Viking Press, 1953. xiii, 407 p. 53-9196 PZ3.S8i95Sh PS3537.T3234A6 1953 1781. Sweet Thursday. New York, Viking Press, 1954- 2 73 P- 54-79 8 3 PZ3.S8195SW 1782. WALLACE STEVENS, 1879-1955 The name of Stevens has been ranked with that of T. S. Eliot as first in impressiveness among poets belonging to the modern movement of poetry in English. However, he worked in relative solitude and constituted his own school for studying the mind and its perceptions. His first published book, Harmonium (1923), appeared when he was 44 years of age and at once revealed the eloquence and elegance for which this Connecticut poet was to become known. On the other hand a heavy rich- ness, which might be called "gaudiness," also char- acterized the part of his work that has verbal and metrical flamboyance. Using a style and selecting subjects frequendy exotic, his universal theme is the role of the human imagination. The philo- sophical bent informing his technical virtuosity re- sulted in an impressive body of constantly maturing poetry. 1783. The necessary angel; essays on reality and the imagination. New York, Knopf, 1951. 176 p. 51-12072 PN1055.S68 A collection of essays, lectures, etc., which ex- presses the author's theory of poetry. 1784. Collected poems. New York, Knopf, 1954. . 534 P-. 54-i 1750 PS3537.T4753 1954 This collection, which was awarded a Pulitzer prize, includes the poems of earlier volumes such as Harmonium (1923), Ideas of Order (1935), The Man with the Blue Guitar (1937), Parts of a World (1942), Transport to Summer (1947), and The Auroras of Autumn (1950). 1785. O'Connor, William Van. The shaping spirit, a study of Wallace Stevens. Chicago, Regnery, 1950. ix, 146 p. 50-7455 PS3537.T4753Z7 1786. JAMES HOWELL STREET, 1903-1954 James Street's career included professional specialization as a Baptist clergyman, a journalist, a novelist, and a writer of short stories. Born in Mis- sissippi, he imparted to the majority of his books a strong regional interest in the South, although the time and place represented may vary from 18th- century wars with the Indians on the frontier of the Old Southwest to essentially contemporary condi- tions on a cotton farm in Mississippi. However, he was at home also in the Middle West, the locale of his sequel novels about a clergyman's life in a small town. His sympathetic and perceptive short stories about children and adolescents, their animals, games, and adventures appeared in The Saturday Evening Post and other popular periodicals before a repre- sentative collection appeared in 1945. Whether in stirring historical romances or in novels written about the lives and in the colloquial speech of plain people, Mr. Street expressed his consciousness of the epic story of America's development, and his faith in its future. 1787. Oh, promised land. New York, Dial Press, 1940. 816 p. 40-27414 PZ3.S91557OI1 1788. In my father's house. New York, Dial Press, 1941. 348 p. 41-5679 PZ3.S9i557ln 1789. The gaundet. Garden City, N. Y., Double- day, Doran, 1945. 311 p. 45-9403 PZ3.S9i557Gau Sequel: High Calling (1951). 1790. Short stories. New York, Dial Press, 1945. 314 p. ^ 45-5601 PZ3.S9i557Sh Contents. — The golden key. — In full glory re- flected. — The old Gordon place. — Weep no more, my lady. — Please come home, my lady. — Buck and fo' bits. — The crusaders. — Pud'n and Tayme. — They know how. — The road to Gettysburg. — All out with LITERATURE (1607-I955) / I45 Sherman. — Set the wild echoes flying. — The bis- cuit eater. — The house. 1791. James Street's South. Edited by James Street, Jr. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1955. 282 p. 55-7652 F210.S76 "Essays on the South and its cities." 1792. THOMAS SIGISMUND STRIBLING, 1881- T. S. Stribling's better-known novels usually re- flect the Tennessee and Alabama districts with which he was familiar. Although not distinguished by stylistic merits, his works display a gift for nar- rative and a recording of colloquial conversation. This aptitude was probably developed in the popular and pulp fiction which he wrote in his early years. While the characteristic embedding of realistic de- tails in his presentation of Southern life appeared in early work such as Birthright (1922), his narrative abilities came to the fore with such novels as Fom- bombo (1923) and Red Sand (1924), which depict American "businessmen" in Venezuela, and derive from Stribling's stay in that country. These ele- ments were brought together in his later work, for which he returned to the rural South as a setting. In 1933 he was awarded a Pulitzer prize for the second volume of a trilogy which has been con- sidered by some to be his main work. Another transition was made with The Sound Wagon ( I 935)> m which his satirical tendencies became dominant. With These Bars of Flesh (1938), he continued in this vein, satirizing contemporary poli- tics and education; the setting in this work was "Megapolis" in the North. 1793. The forge. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, Doran, 1931. 525 p. 31-6082 PZ3.S9i66For Volume one of a trilogy. 1794. The store. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, Doran, 1932. 571 p. 32-26671 PZ3.S9i66Sr2 Volume two of the same trilogy. 1795. Unfinished cathedral. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, Doran, 1934. 383 p. 34-27137 PZ3.S9i66Un Volume three of the trilogy. 1796. RUTH SUCKOW, 1892- Ruth Suckow's first novel, Country People (1924), dealt with three generations of a German- American family from the time of their arrival in 431240—60 11 Iowa in the middle of the 19th century. Since then she has quite consistently used Iowa as the locale for her fiction. Probably best known for her novels, she has also been praised for her short stories, of which a number of collections have been published, such as Children and Older People (1931). In both forms her merit has consisted of a "homey" but psychologically and physically accurate depic- tion of common people in everyday circumstances. It has been commented that this results in her work being basically character sketches rather than stories. 1797. Iowa interiors. New York, Knopf, 1926. 283 p. 26-27442 PZ3.S942I0 Contents. — A start in life. — A home-coming. — The daughter. — The top of the ladder. — Mame. — Uprooted. — Renters. — Retired. — A pilgrim and a stranger. — A rural community. — Just him and her. — The resurrection. — Wanderers. — An investment for the future. — Four generations. — Golden wedding. 1798. The Bonney family. New York, Knopf, 1928. 296 p. 2 8-3333 PZ3.S942B0 1799. The folks. New York, Farrar & Rinehart, 1934- 7 2 7 P- 34-3 22 M PZ3.S942F0 1800. New Hope. New York, Farrar & Rinehart, 1942. 342 p. 42-3175 PZ3.S 94 2Ne 1801. Some others and myself; seven stories and a memoir. New York, Rinehart, 1952. 281 p. 51-14899 PZ3.S942S0 1802. NEWTON BOOTH TARKINGTON, 1 869-1 946. Booth Tarkington was a highly prolific Mid- western novelist who achieved prominence in two fields of fiction. He is probably best known for his humorous stories of childhood and adolescence, such as Penrod and Sam (1916). He also wrote a num- ber of serious novels, usually studies of Middle Western life; these include The Gentleman from Indiana (1899), The Conquest of Canaan (1905), and The Heritage of Hatcher Ide (1941). He was twice awarded a Pulitzer prize: for The Magnificent Ambersons (1918), the first volume of a trilogy, and in 1922 for Alice Adams, which has often been adjudged his best book. He attained a mastery of novel technique and an easy style, through which he expressed his often humorous and at times senti- mental, "realist-romantic" tales. While he main- tained a wide popular following, many of his works hue been criticized for lack of psychological pene- tration and perception of sociological situations. Much of his work, particularly that of the first quarter of the centurv, remains generally popular. I46 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 1803. Penrod. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, Page, 1914. 345 p. 14-5820 PZ3.Ti75Pe 1804. Seventeen; a tale of youth and summer time and the Baxter family, especially William. New York, Harper, 1916. 328 p. 16-6604 PZ3.Ti75Se 1805. Alice Adams. Garden City, N. Y., Double- day, Page, 1921. 434 p. 21-26561 PZ3.T175AI 1806. Growth. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, Page, 1927. 887 p. 27-27696 PZ3-Ti75Gr Contents. — The magnificent Ambersons. — The turmoil. — National avenue. 1807. Russo, Dorothy Ritter, and Thelma L. Sul- livan. A bibliography of Booth Tarkington, 1 869-1 946. Indianapolis, Indiana Historical So- ciety, 1949. xix, 303 p. illus. 49-50289 Z8858.9.R8 1808. Woodress, James L. Booth Tarkington, gentleman from Indiana. Philadelphia, Lip- pincott, 1955. 350 p. 55-63 7 PS2973.W6 1809. ALLEN TATE, 1899- Tate was an early and leading member of the Nashville, Tennessee, group of authors known as Fugitives, because of their periodical The Fugi- tive (1922-25); this group developed, with changes in membership, into the Agrarians and the general movement known as Regionalism, which remained basically a Southern movement opposing the indus- trialization of the South. The Fugitives also in- cluded Robert Penn Warren, John Crowe Ransom, and Merrill Moore (qq. v.); the Agrarian-Region- alists added such names as Cleanth Brooks and John Gould Fletcher (qq. v.), with such authors as Wil- liam Faulkner, Eudora Welty, and the more north- erly Ruth Suckow (qq. v.) loosely associated with the Regionalist movement. The Regionalists voiced themselves through such prominent periodicals as the Southern Review (1935-42), The Kenyon Re- view (i939+),and The Sewanee Review (1892 + ), of which Tate assumed the editorship from 1944 to 1946. However, Tate's work, and that of many fellow Regionalists, is beyond narrow Regionalism. Tate is known for his intellectuality, concern with form, and restraint of emotion, both as a critic and as a poet. He has also written biographies of Stone- wall Jackson (1928) and Jefferson Davis (1929). 1810. On the limits of poetry, selected essays: 1928- 1948. New York, Swallow Press, 1948. 379 p. 48-8822 PN1031.T3 Selected from the author's previously published works: Reactionary Essays on Poetry and Ideas (1936), Reason in Madness (1941), and The Hover- ing Fly (1949). 181 1. Poems, 1 922- 1 947. New York, Scribner, 1948. 208 p. 48-5674 PS3539.A74P58 Earlier books of poetry by Allen Tate include Mr. Pope, and Other Poems ( 1928), Ode to the Con- federate Dead . . . (1930), Poems, 1928-1931 (1932), Selected Poems (1937), and The Winter Sea (1945). 1812. Arnold, Willard B. The social ideas of Allen Tate. Boston, Bruce Humphries, 1955. 64 p. 54-959 1 PS3539.A74Z6 1813. SARA TEASDALE, 1884-1933 Sara Teasdale's better poems, mainly lyrics of love and muted emotions, are handled with deli- cate control, and infused with quiet sincerity and simplicity. In subject and style her work is remi- niscent of the later 19th century, although a few elements reveal the influence of the free verse and Imagist movements. 1 8 14. The collected poems. New York, Macmil- lan, 1937. 311 p. 37-28625 PS3539.E15 1937 Contents. — Sonnets to Duse and other poems (1907). — Helen of Troy and other poems (1911).' Rivers to the sea (1915). — Love songs (1917). Flame and shadow (1920). — Dark of the moon (1926). — Stars to-night (1930). — Strange victory (i933)- 1 8 15. JAMES GROVER THURBER, 1894- James Thurber is a humorist in love with life and fantasy. His whimsical realism sometimes conceals a mordant satire, but his tone is usually gentle, for he finds more folly than depravity in the world. The illustrations he produces for his own work complement his prose, and are thought by some to be masterpieces of line drawing. Though a realistic appearance usually dominates, his work is occasionally somewhat eerie, and nightmares run loose in midday streets or Victorian drawing-rooms. 18 1 6. Is sex necessary? or, Why you feel the way you do, by James Thurber and E. B. White. New York, Harper, 1929. 197 p. 29-27938 PN6161.T56 LITERATURE (1607-I955) / I47 1817. Cream of Thurber, skimmed from the fol- lowing writings and drawings of James Thurber: My life and hard times, The owl in the attic, The middle-aged man on the flying trapeze, Let your mind alone! London, Hamilton [1939] 250 p. illus. 40-6648 PS3539.H94A6 1939 18 18. The Thurber carnival. New York, Harper, 1945. 369 p. illus. 45-1366 PS3539.H94T5 1 8 19. The Thurber album; a new collection of pieces about people. New York, Simon & Schuster, 1952. 346 p. illus. 52-10216 PS3539.H94T46 1820. Thurber country; a new collection of pieces about males and females, mainly of our own species. New York, Simon & Schuster, 1953. 276 p. illus. 53-97°° PS 3539- H 94 T 53 1 82 1. FREDERIC RIDGELY TORRENCE, 1875-1950 Ridgely Torrence produced a restrained, con- servative type of poetry. Although the volume of his work is very slim, he wrote what has been called flawless verse. His lyricism reached matur- ity in Hesperides (1925). He also experimented with Negro drama, preparing the way for others. As a poetry editor of The New Republic during the twenties, he gave encouragement to a number of younger poets. 1822. Poems. New ed., with new poems. New York, Macmillan, 1952. 127 p. 52-3721 PS3539.O63P6 1952 1823. MARK ALBERT VAN DOREN, 1894- Poet, editor, critic, lecturer, and professor of English at Columbia University, Van Doren for a number of years has been instrumental in the de- velopment of literary interest and taste in the United States. He is an exceedingly prolific poet, whose work expresses, sometimes symbolically, his sensi- tive response to life in America and to nature seen and enjoyed in rural areas. In 1940 his Collected Poems, 1922-1938 (1939) won the Pulitzer prize. He has written prose that is also poetical, as in a novel, Windless Cabins ( 1940), and much distinctive criticism. 1824. Jonathan Gentry. New York, Boni, 1931. 205 p. illus. 31-7761 PS3543.A557J6 193 1 An epic poem of America, in three parts: "Ohio River (1800)"; "Civil War"; and "Foreclosure." 1825. The Mayfield deer. New York, Holt, 1941. 271 p. illus. 41-12993 PS3543.A557M3 1941 Narrative poem based on an incident re-recorded in an Illinois county history, but told also as an episode of the Wisconsin frontier. 1826. Mortal summer. Iowa City, Prairie Press, 1953. 63 p. 54-18137 PS3543.A557M6 Poem. 1827. Selected poems. New York, Holt, 1954. ix, . 238 p._ 54-9660 PS3543.A557A17 1954 This selection includes poems from the author's Spring Thunder, and Other Poems (1924), 7 P. A/., and Other Poems (1926), Now the S\y, and Other Poems (1928), A Winter Diary, and Other Poems (1935), The Last Loo\, and Other Poems (1937), Collected Poems (1939), The Seven Sleepers, and Other Poems (1944), New Poems (1948), and Spring Birth, and Other Poems (1953). It does not include the long works: Jonathan Gentry, The May- field Deer, and Mortal Summer, which are entered above. 1828. CARL VAN VECHTEN, 1880- Van Vechten has been noted as an interpre- ter of jazz society life in New York City during the 1920's. His first prominence came as a music critic, from which he branched off to essays in other fields. Essays from his early volumes were selected for Red: Papers on Musical Subjects (1925) and Exca- vations: A Boo\ of Advocacies (1926). The "ear- lier" Tiger in the House (1920) was a book on cats in history, folklore, and the arts. With Peter Whif- fle (1922) Van Vechten turned to fiction, the form in which he became most famous; this was a humor- ous, "sparkling," "civilized" book about Bohemian life in New York before World War I. His last novel, Parties (1930) brought the record of frivolous life in New York City up to the depression. In 1932 he published a series of autobiographical essays in Sacred and Profane Memories. As the mode of life with which he is associated became a thing of the past, Van Vechten ceased to write extended works. Since then he has appeared primarily as an editor or as the author of introductions; much of his time has been devoted to photography. 1829. The blind bow-boy. New York, Knopf, 1923. 261 p. 23-11805 PZ3.V368BI A novel about fashionable life in New York in the 1920's. 148 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 1830. The tattooed countess; a romantic novel with a happy ending. New York, Knopf, 1924. 286 p. 24-21077 PZ3.V 3 68Ta A commentary on the culture of a small Iowa town, to which the heroine returns on a visit to her sister. The time is the late 19th century. 1831. Firecrackers; a realistic novel. New York, Knopf, 1925. 246 p. 25-16657 PZ3.V 3 68Fi A story of New York in the mid 1920's. 1832. Nigger heaven. New York, Knopf, 1926. 286 p. 26-15403 PZ3.V368Ni A novel depicting Negro life and customs in Harlem. 1833. Spider boy; a scenario for a moving picture. New York, Knopf, 1928. 297 p. 28-19963 PZ3.V368SP A humorous novel on Hollywood. 1834. Jonas, Klaus W. Carl Van Vechten, a bibliography. New York, Knopf, 1955. xii, 82 p. 55-79" Z8926.J6 1835. Lueders, Edward G. Carl Van Vechten and the twenties. [Albuquerque] University of New Mexico Press, 1955. 150 p. 55-5451 PS3543.A653Z8 1836. HOWELL HUBERT VINES, 1899- The local-color novels of Howell Vines reflect the Warrior rivers country of northern Alabama. Although they do not have a strong plot line, and are not outstanding as works of characterization (with the region itself contending for the position of main character), they do have a position among works of regional literature. The author's style shows a sensitivity to the English spoken in the area, though more in its cadences and vocabulary than in the use of phonetic spellings of pronuncia- tional variations, and his total effect is nearer to the experience of those who know the South at first hand than that of better-known writers. 1837. A river goes with heaven. Boston, Little, Brown, 1930. 290 p. 30-29555 PZ3.V7 49 Ri 1838. This green thicket world. Boston, Little, Brown, 1934. 375 p. 34-9619 PZ3.V749Th 1839. GLENWAY WESCOTT, 1901- With the publication of his first novel, The Apple of the Eye (1924), Wescott began to use regional themes drawn from aspects of life observed in his native state, Wisconsin. These include: the influence on a boy's developing instincts of life in a rural district of the state; a young man's nostalgic rediscovery of his ancestors, all the way back to pioneer days, from stories suggested by pictures in an old family album; and short stories descriptive of landscapes and localities, with overtones of social criticism. Before writing his later books the au- thor was almost continually abroad for 9 years, on the Riveria and in Paris. From these expatriate years came influences that doubdess contributed to the writing of his short novel, The Pilgrim Haw\ (1940), which introduces international elements, and to that of his war novel, Apartment in Athens (1945), concerned with the effects of the German occupation of Greece during World War II on a native family. 1840. The grandmothers; a family portrait. New York, Harper, 1927. 338 p. 27-26866 PZ3.W5i2Gr The story of a pioneer family in the Middle West. 1 84 1. Good-bye Wisconsin. New York, Harper, 1938. 362 p. 28-21484 PZ3.W512G0 Short stories. 1842. NATHANAEL WEST, 1902-1940 West wrote bitter satiric-comedy novels in a , somewhat surrealistic manner. His stories range, from that of a man who is editor of a New York newspaper advice-to-the-lovelorn column to a report on Hollywood as he saw it while he was a film writer there. 1843. Miss Lonelyhearts. New York, Liveright, 1933. 213 p. 33-i4 x 39 PZ3-W5i952Mi 1844. The day of the locust. New York, Random House, 1939. 238 p. 39-12578 PZ3.W5i952Day 1845. EDITH NEWBOLD (JONES) WHARTON, 1 862-1937 Edith Wharton in her novels chronicled New York's decaying aristocracy of the late 19th century. Her writings involve a degree of satire and irony directed at the faults of this small group, of which she herself was a part. A careful craftsman who had little direct influence on serious literature, she probably contributed much to raising the standards LITERATURE (1607-I955) / I49 of popular fiction. Artistically she survives as a careful author of manners and as a regionalist. She depicted one segment of society without implying or perceiving aspects of the nature and direction of American society as a whole. One of her more deliberate attempts to depict the group she knew so well was her series entitled Old New Yorf^, which appeared in 1924 in four volumes which may be read as separate works; the individual titles under which they appeared were False Dawn {The 'Forties), The Old Maid (The 'Fifties), The Spar\ {The 'Sixties), and New Year's Day (The 'Seventies). In a few instances Edith Wharton departed from portraying New York society by employing a New England or Middle West background, or by han- dling the theme of Americans in Europe. 1846. The valley of decision. New York, Scrib- ner, 1902. 2 v. 2-6076 PZ3.W555V 1847. The house of mirth. London, New York, Macmillan, 1905. 516 p. 44-44937 PZ3.W555H02 1848. Ethan Frome. New York, Scribner, 191 1. 195 p. 11-25015 PZ3.W555Et 1849. The reef. New York, Appleton, 1912. 366 p. 12-25996 PZ3.W555Re 1850. The custom of the country. New York, Scribner, 19 13. 594 p. 13-22207 PZ3.W555CU PS3545.H16C8 1 85 1. Xingu, and other stories. New York, Scrib- ner, 1916. 436 p. 16-21972 PZ3.W555X Contents. — Xingu. — C o m i n g home. — Autre temps . . . — Kerfol. — The long run. — The triumph of night. — The choice. — Bunner sisters. 1852. The age of innocence. New York, Appleton, 1920. 364 p. 20-18615 PZ3.W555Ag 1853. The mother's recompense. New York, Ap- pleton, 1925. 341 p. 25-8793 PZ3.W555M0 1854. Hudson River bracketed. New York, Ap- pleton, 1929. 559 p. 29-24077 PZ3.W555HU Sequel: The Gods Arrive (New York, Appleton, *93 2 - 43 1 P-)- 1855. An Edith Wharton treasury; edited and with an introd. by Arthur Hobson Quinn. New York, Appleton-Century-Crofts, 1950. xxxi, 581 p. 50-2775 PZ3.W 555 Ed Contents. — The age of innocence. — The old maid. — After Holbein. — A bottle of Perrier. — The lady's maid's bell. — Roman fever. — The other two. — Madame De Treymes. — The moving finger. — Xingu. — Autre temps. — Bunner sisters. 1856. Nevius, Blake. Edith Wharton, a study of her fiction. Berkeley, University of Cali- fornia Press, 1953. xi, 271 p. 53-10439 PS3545.H16Z75 "The writings of Edith Wharton": p. 260-263. Bibliography: p. 264-265. 1857. JOHN HALL WHEELOCK, 1886- Wheelock is a poet who began with rather exuberant poems, but before long turned to philo- sophic lyrics of moderated tone. Writing always in a traditional manner (in large part derived from Henley, Whitman, and the Romantics), his early verse at times reflected, as a background to his themes, life in New York; his later verse has usually been generalized insofar as any "setting" is con- cerned, but deals with love, loneliness, longing, and an awareness that "That too has passed away." 1858. Poems old and new. New York, Scribner, 1956. 203 p. 56-9881 PS3545.H33A6 1956 Wheelock's earlier volumes of poetry include The Human Fantasy (1911), The Beloved Adventure (1912), Love and Liberation (1913), Dust and Light (1919), The Blac\ Panther (1922), The Bright Doom (1927), and Poems, 1911-1936 (1936). 1859. ELWYN BROOKS WHITE, 1899- Long associated editorially with The New Yorker, E. B. White writes familiar essays with touches of sophisticated humor which have been called the best now being written in English. Com- monly commenting on and reflecting life in urban (and suburban) America, usually in articles first written for The New Yorker, he also has a taste for rural life, as evinced in the essays he wrote for Harper's during the years in which he lived on a Maine farm. The serious undercurrent in his work has come to the fore in productions such as The Wild Flag (1946), which argued the cause for fed- eral world government, and the booklet essay, Here Is New Yor/( (1949), which some have adjudged the best such literary description of the city that has been written. In addition to his prose, he has writ- ten light verse, as in The Lady Is Cold (1929) and The Fox of Peapac\, and Other Poems (1938). 150 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES i860. Everyday is Saturday. New York, Harper, 1934. 242 p. 34-33063 PS3545.H5187E8 1934 "The paragraphs that make this book appeared first in the New Yorker." 1 86 1. Quo vadimus? or, The case for the bicycle. New York, Harper, 1939. 219 p. 39-4681 PS3545.H5187Q6 1939 1862. One man's meat. New York, Harper, 1942. 346 p. 42-16753 PS3545.H5187O5 All but three of the essays are from the monthly department "One man's meat" in Harper's Magazine. 1863. The second tree from the corner. New York, Harper, 1954. 253 p. 53-11864 PS3545.H5187S4 Prose and poetry. 1864. THORNTON NIVEN WILDER, 1897- As an author Thornton Wilder cannot readily be regarded as being in the main currents of modern fiction. He tends to write in a concise, expressive, and almost classical manner. In this he reveals his scholarly background, as also at times in his subject matter. Thus, The Woman of Andros (1930) is a novel based on Terence's Andria. Wilder started as a novelist with The Cabala ( 1926) ; however, in 1928 appeared his third book, a collec- tion of short plays entitled The Angel that Troubled the Waters, and Other Plays, and since then he has gained considerable stature as a dramatist. In both fields his work has been experimental and lyrical; these aspects, combined with his frequent subdety, his sparseness of detail, and a humor tending to gentle satire or irony, have at times perhaps obscured the omnipresent philosophical attitude: the concern with the nature of man and the problems of ideal- ism, which are illumined by the mystical impulse which impregnates his writing. 1865. Our town, a play in three acts. New York, McCann, 1938. 128 p. 38-27331 PS3545.I345O9 1938a This play, which was awarded a Pulitzer prize for drama, is meant to depict life in the early 20th century in a New Hampshire town, intended to typify American communities of the period. 1866. Heaven's my destination. New York, Longmans, Green, 1934. 244 p. 35-4227 PZ3.W6468He An overtly realistic novel about a salesman who has undergone a religious conversion; though with tragic implications, the book is a comedy in which some Midwestern and Southern beliefs are examined. 1867. The bridge of San Luis Rey. New York, Boni, 1927. 235 p. 27-23452 PS3545.I345B7 1927 This novel, which received a Pulitzer prize, is about a group of people who were killed as the result of the collapse of a bridge in Peru. The stories are presented as derived from a book written by a Franciscan who had set out to establish that the deaths were the result of divine providence. 1868. The skin of our teeth, play in three acts. New York, Harper, 1942. 142 p. 42-36421 PS3545.I345S5 This unconventional comedy, which was awarded a Pulitzer prize for drama, attempts to present the history of civilized man through the story of a family living in Excelsior, New Jersey. 1869. The ides of March. New York, Harper, 1948. 246 p. 48-647 PZ3.W6468Id An epistolary novel, or "fantasia," centering about the life of Julius Caesar. 1870. OSCAR WILLIAMS, 1900- Williams had an early start as a poet, but soon turned to the lucrative world of advertising. Then, after a fairly long period, he returned to poetry, and soon established a reputation as a poet of the city, expressed in an obviously "modern" verse that is heavily studded with figures of speech. An even greater reputation was established by Williams as anthologist of poetry. His anthologies, which have been widely praised for their receptivity to new and little-known poets, include A Little Treasury of Modern Poetry, English and American (1946; rev. ed., 1950), A Little Treasury of Great Poetry, English and American (1947), A Little Treasury of American Poetry (1948), and The New Pocket Anthology of American Verse (1955). 1871. Selected poems. New York, Scribner, 1947. .H3P- 47-3°7 6 ° p S3545-l5337 A6 IQ 47 Earlier volumes of poetry by Williams are The Golden Darkness (1921), Adam & Eve & the City (1936), The Man Coming Toward You (1940), and That's All That Matters (1945). 1872. WILLIAM CARLOS WILLIAMS, 1883- Williams was early a member of, but soon broke with, the Imagist school; however, he has always been a visual poet concerned with form and sound patterns as organic reinforcement of what LITERATURE (1607-I955) / I5I he has to say. His poems reveal a humanitarian poet of social mores, ethics, and environment, who strives to establish a unique personal form and idiom. The cadences of speech pervade both his poetry and his prose. In both prose and poetry Williams is concerned with the question of what is "American," especially the localistic aspects as seen in terms of his home area in New Jersey. This may be seen in the short stories of volumes such as The Knife of the Times, and Other Stories (1932) and Life Along the Passaic River (1938). A Voyage to Pagany (1928) is a novel about a smalltown doc- tor who goes to Europe with some ambition to write. 1873. In the American grain. New York, P.oni, 1925. 235 p. 25-23403 E169.1.W52 Contents. — Red Eric. — The discovery of the In- dies; Christopher Columbus. — The destruction of Tenochtitlan; Cortez and Montezuma. — The foun- tain of eternal youth; Juan Ponce de Leon. — De Soto and the New world. — Sir Walter Raleigh. — Voyage of the "Mayflower." — The founding of Quebec; Samuel de Champlain. — The Maypole at Merry- mount; Thomas Morton. — Cotton Mather's Won- ders of the invisible world: 1. Enchantments en- countered. 2. The trial of Bridget Bishop at Salem. The trial of Susanna Martin. 3. Curiosities. — Pere Sebastian Rasles. — The discovery of Kentucky; Dan- iel Boone. — George Washington. — Poor Richard; Benjamin Franklin. — Battle between the Bon Homme Richard and the Serapis; John Paul Jones. — Jacataqua. — The virtue of history; Aaron Burr. — Advent of the slaves. — Edgar Allan Poe. — Abraham Lincoln. 1874. White mule. Norfolk, Conn., New Di- rections, 1937. 293 p. 37-11249 PZ3.W67667WI1 PS3545.I544W5 This novel was designed as the first part of a trilogy reflecting American manners; however, all three volumes can stand as individual works. The subsequent volumes were entitled In the Money and The Build-Up (vide infra). 1875. In the money. Norfolk, Conn., New Di- rections, 1940. 382 p. 40-35170 PZ3.W67667ln The second volume of a trilogy which began with White Mule (q. v.). 1876. Paterson. New York, New Directions, 1946-51. 4 v. 46-5910 PS3545.I544P3 A fifth and concluding volume of this verse work was scheduled for publication in 1958. 1877. A dream of love; a play in three acts and eight scenes. [New York, New Directions] 1948. 107 p. (Direction, 6) 48-8451 AP2.D583, no. 6 1878. Collected later poems. [New York, New Directions] 1950. 240 p. 50-11028 PS3545.I544A17 1950 This is a collection of the poems Williams wrote during the 1940's, with the exception of the long poem on the author's New Jersey home town, Paterson (vide supra). Individual volumes of poetry which appeared in the period covered in- clude The Broken Span (1941), The Wedge (1944), The Clouds, Aigeltinger, Russia, &c. (1948), and The Pinl{ Church (1949). During this period there also appeared in the New classics series of New Directions a volume of the Selected Poems (1949) of Williams. 1879. Make light of it; collected stories. New York, Random House, 1950. 342 p. 50-10847 PZ3.W6;667Mak PS3545.I544A6 1950 1880. Autobiography. New York, Random House, 195 1. 402 p. 51-12522 PS3545.I544Z5 1881. Collected earlier poems. [New York, New Directions] 1951. 482 p. 51-8849 PS3545.I544A17 1951 Earlier volumes of poetry by Williams include Poems (1909), The Tempers ( I 9 I 3)» d Boo\ of Poems, Al Que Quierel (1917), Kora in Hell (1920), Sour Grapes (1921), Spring and All (1923), and An Early Martyr, and Other Poems (1935). An inclusive collection covering most of this period is The Complete Collected Poems . . . 1906-1938 (1938). 1882. The build-up, a novel. New York, Random Llouse, 1952. 335 p. 52-5166 PZ3.W67667BU The final volume of a trilogy which began with White Mule and In the Money (qq. v.). 1883. The desert music, and other poems. New York, Random House, 1954. 90 p. 54-5667 PS3545.I544D4 1884. Selected essays. New York, Random House, 1954. 342 p. 54-7815 PS3545.I544A16 1954 1885. Journey to love. New York, Random House, 1955. 87 p. Poems. 55" 8l 73 PS 3545- I 544J 6 152 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 1886. Koch, Vivienne. William Carlos Williams. Norfolk, Conn., New Directions, 1950. x, 278 p. (The Makers of modern literature) 50-697 PS3545.I544Z6 Bibliography: p. 267-273. 1887. THOMAS WOLFE, 1900-1938 Thomas Wolfe, the son of a stonecutter and his wife who kept a boarding-house, was born in Asheville, North Carolina, a hill city in a state proud of its mountains and the people who live among them. Educated at the University of North Carolina and at Harvard, he became a teacher in New York. Later, he was able to extend his ex- perience by travel and observation of European civilization at first hand. The impact of these changing environments, and the combination of rags and riches about him before and during the great depression that began in 1929, influenced the de- velopment of ideas he poured forth in a spate, through the medium of his four massive novels. Sometimes mystically rhapsodic, at other times as naturalistic as those of Theodore Dreiser, these books are intensely autobiographical, as well as full of details of his family's experiences. Using an adapta- tion of the stream-of-consciousness technique, prob- ably derived from his study of James Joyce, they reveal the author's unsuccessful search for perma- nent solutions for intellectual, philosophical, social, and economic problems observed in a world in flux. Because of their form as well as their meaning these novels are examples of a new direction still to be observed in American fiction. 1888. Look homeward, angel, a story of the buried life. New York, Scribner, 1929. 626 p. 29-22336 PZ3.W8314L0 A biographical novel of Wolfe's youth, it traces the hero's youth through his attendance at the State University. 1889. Of time and the river; a legend of man's hunger in his youth. New York, Scribner, 1935. 912 p. 35" 2 7°95 PZ3.W83i40f A sequel to hoo\ Homeward, Angel, this volume traces the hero's career through graduate work in playwriting at Harvard, teaching in New York City, and a European tour. 1890. The web and the rock. New York, Llarper, 1939. 695 p. 39-27574 PZ3.W83i4We2 In some ways a sequel to Of Time and the River; however, the hero's name has been changed, and there is a recapitulation of his youth. The story then continues with his writing novels in New York, and having a love affair with a rich stage-designer. The book concludes with a trip to Germany. 1 89 1. You can't go home again. New York, Har- per, 1940. 743 p. 40-27633 PZ3.W8314Y0 A sequel to The Web and the Roc\. The hero discovers that the home town he knew is lost in the past, and that the Germany he loved has been destroyed by Naziism. Much of the book reflects the pre-depression optimism and financial specula- tion in the twenties. 1892. The hills beyond. New York, Harper, 194 1. 386 p. 41-21548 PZ3.W83i4Hi Contents. — The lost boy. — No cure for it. — Gen- tlemen of the press. — A kinsman of his blood. — Chickamauga. — The return of the prodigal. — On leprechauns. — Portrait of a literary critic. — The lion at morning. — God's lonely man. — The hills be- yond. — A note on Thomas Wolfe, by E. C. Aswell. 1893. Thomas Wolfe's letters to his mother, Julia Elizabeth Wolfe. Edited with an introd. by John Skally Terry. New York, Scribner, 1943. xxxv, 368 p. 43-6520 PS3545.O337Z55 1894. Letters. Collected and edited, with an in- trod. and explanatory text, by Elizabeth Nowell. New York, Scribner, 1956. xviii, 797 p. 56-9880 PS3545.O337Z54 1895. Adams, Agatha B. Thomas Wolfe, Carolina student; a brief biography. Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina Library, 1950. 91 p. (The University of North Carolina. Library ex- tension publication, v. 15, no. 2) 50-63183 PS3545.O337Z6 1896. Johnson, Pamela H. Hungry Gulliver; an English critical appraisal of Thomas Wolfe. New York, Scribner, 1948. 170 p. 48-5174 PS3545.O337Z75 1948 London edition published under title: Thomas Wolfe. 1897. Muller, Herbert J. Thomas Wolfe. Nor- folk, Conn., New Directions Books, 1947. 196 p. (The Makers of modern literature) 47-11790 PS3545.O337Z8 1898. Pollock, Thomas C, and Oscar Cargill, eds. Thomas Wolfe at Washington Square. New York, New York University Press, 1954. xiii, 163 p. illus. 54-5275 PS3545.O337Z83 Contents. — Thomas Wolfe at Washington Square, by O. Cargill. — Memorabilia. His students LITERATURE (1607-1955) / 153 remember: Drunk with words, by A. G. Doyle. Overloaded black briefcase, by B. W. Kofsky. Thomas Wolfe, a reminiscence, by J. Mandel. His colleagues remember: and gladly teche ... by R. Dow. Tom Wolfe: penance no more, by H. T. Volkening. My experiences with Thomas Wolfe, by V. Fisher. Replacing Tom Wolfe, by R. Krauss. — Bibliography (p. 153-163). 1899. Rubin, Louis D. Thomas Wolfe; the weather of his youth. Baton Rouge, Loui- siana State University Press, 1955. 183 p. illus. 55-7364 PS3545.O337Z85 1900. Walser, Richard G., ed. The enigma of Thomas Wolfe; biographical and critical se- lections. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, IQ 53- xi, 313P. 52-13698 PS3545.O337Z9 1901. Watkins, Floyd C. Thomas Wolfe's char- acters, portraits from life. Norman, Uni- versity of Oklahoma Press, 1957. 194 p. 57-7335 PS3545.O337Z94 1902. ELINOR (HOYT) WYLIE, 1887-1928 Although she wrote several novels, Elinor Wylie is better known for her poetry, which has been praised for clarity, brilliancy, delicateness, britde- ness, and a mastery of technique. Influenced by Donne and the metaphysicals, she was not of them. Her verse is limited in range, but displays great artistic integrity. 1903. Collected poems. [Edited by William Rose Benet] New York, Knopf, 1932. 311 p. 32-26577 PS3545.Y45 1932 "The contents of this book embody the contents of Elinor Wylie's four books of poems, Nets to Catch the Wind (1921), Blac\ Armour (1923), Trivial Breath (1928), and Angels and Earthly Creatures (1929), in the exact sequence and order in which they were originally published. Added to these is a section of poems hitherto uncollected in book form, some of which have been previously published in periodicals." — Foreword. 1904. Collected prose. New York, Knopf, 1933. 879 P- 33- 2 7444 PS3545.Y45A16 1933 Contexts. — Jennifer Lorn, with a preface by C. Van Vechten. — The Venetian glass nephew, with a preface by C. Van Doren. — The orphan angel, with a preface by S. V. Benet. — Mr. Hodge and Mr. Hazard, with a preface by Isabel Paterson. — Fugi- tive prose, with a preface by W. R. Benet. 1905. MARYA ZATURENSKA, 1902- Although Marya Zaturenska was born in Russia, whence she came to America as a child, she has written distinguished poetry in English, and has found for herself a place in modern American poetry. Her subde, lyrical verse won for her a Pulitzer prize for poetry, for her volume Cold Morning Sfy. In addition to poetry she has, with her husband Horace Gregory (q. v.), produced a history of modern American poetry; by herself she has written a biog- raphy of Christina Rossetti (1949), whom she in some ways resembles. 1906. Selected poems. [New York] Grove Press, 1954. 130 p. 54-81 1 1 PS3549.A77A6 1954 In addition to new poems, this volume contains selections from the earlier books Threshold and Hearth (1934), Cold Morning S/^y (1937), The Listening Landscape (1941), and The Golden Mirror ( 1944). F. The Second World War and the Atomic Age (1940- 195 5) // should be candidly admitted that this final section of "Literature" was split off from the pre- ceding one largely as a matter of convenience. Hence, the logic of listing a dozen or more writers in this, rather than in the preceding, section is tenuous at best and cannot be completely sustained by argument. The more important writers belong to both periods and have contributed to most of the trends observable in both. That a new period is in the making, however, seems clear. The years KJ40-1955 were among the most mo- 1U240 — 60 12 mentous in recorded history. In them the atomic bomb was brought into production and used as a means for winning the most destructive war the world has seen. Within the decade after the first bomb was dropped in K)4$ tensions accompanying the progress of the atomic age spread over countries and continents until the whole world was, and is, affected. During these years American authors and their readers began living in a new international age. This era of international preoccupations teas brought into being, not by a comnwn Lsnguage of 154 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES scholarship and a common form of religion, as in the; Middle Ages, but by an uneasy peace and a shared uncertainty concerning the future of human beings in a world brought together, for good or ill, by scientific discoveries which have annihilated dis- tances that formerly contributed to a sense of safety within national boundaries. The final effects of these forces with which mod- ern man is at grips are hidden in the future. So far as their impact on American literature is con- cerned only a much longer historical perspective than that now available can contribute to a reliable verdict. It is, however, already a matter of literary history that William Faulkner, Eugene O'Neill, T. S. Eliot, and other contemporary writers whose worlds have been described in the preceding section have contributed to a second American renaissance, oc- curring roughly between 1920 and 1940. They have established their reputations, their places at the bar of contemporary criticism, and given to the "one world" of the atomic age an expression of American culture at its present state of maturity. For the purposes of this final section devoted to literature, attention is therefore focused on younger authors writing at mid-century, from whose wor\ must be derived such evidence as exists of the new literary directions currently being ta\en. One obvious point of departure for assessing trends in current literature is provided by writers' use of war as a theme. It will be remembered that the First World War was reflected in literature pro- duced by a "lost generation" of disillusioned authors. Their pessimism after the failure of America's cru- sade to "ma\e the world safe for democracy" con- tributed to the philosophy of deterministic natural- ism that pervaded much of their writing. The writers who participated in or observed the Second World War never hoped that their struggle would end war or bring peace all over the earth. They had fewer illusions to lose than had their seniors; hence, the trend of their writing about the last war is away from the deterministic "closed system" va- riety of naturalism and toward an "open ended" relativistic naturalism, with symbolic overtones, but occasionally owing much to the reportorial style developed by numerous correspondents whose wor\, it has been said, made this the most fully reported war in history. Another characteristic of contemporary creative writing, including poetry, is its frequent use of lan- guage formerly considered, in general, too crude or unpleasant to be used in "polite society" and hence seldom or never embodied in literary expres- sion. This uncommon "language of common men" is sometimes employed with such fidelity as to shoc\ the segment of the reading public that has been educated in classic American literature char- acterized by decorous, even elegant, language, as so much of the best igth-century writing was. Some critics feel that this shoc\ treatment, used deliber- ately, not only achieves realism for characters to whom the language used would be natural, but also awa\ens complacent readers to awareness of con- ditions about which they may prefer to remain ignorant. It is doubtless true, also, that contempo- rary writing reflects one of the recurring changes in taste and manners that literature has mirrored down the ages. Not merely the language used but also the sub- jects popularly treated by contemporary writers have undergone further change. Uncovering hidden abnormalities and compulsions in the lives of deviate individuals, or even in lives that on the surface appear commonplace, if not normal, has also had a part in this further brea\ with the genteel tradition after its disruption by Theodore Dreiser and others in preceding periods. Not all the novels, short stor- ies, and plays that feature this interest are grim. Irony, humor, fantasy, symbolism, Gothic horror, and the use of native American themes drawn from the historical past all lend variety and interest to much of this type of wor\. Even the bitterness, satire, and cynicism with which the dar\er aspects of contemporary life are frequently portrayed by young writers are, according to some critics, an indirect revelation of the moral indignation of the authors against private and public indifference to such con- ditions, as well as society's backwardness in coping with them. These authors are not reformers on a national scale, however, as were many earlier American writers who concerned themselves with large social and economic problems in the United States. It appears that literary artists today thinly of the spiritual and social problems of man in the contemporary world primarily in clinical and sec- ondarily in sociological or anthropological frames of reference, rather than in the religious, political, socio- economic frames of the past. Literary criticism continues to flourish. It has been justly said that the creative-writer-critic and par- ticularly the poet-critic constitute one of the most striding phenomena present in American literature today. It is also interesting to note that at a time when the United States is called the strongest de- fender of Western civilization such a volume of critical exposition is available for the understanding of America's own civilization, so far as it is reflected in literature. Long before literary historians could possibly complete their wor\ of review and synthesis current studies by highly competent critics have been carried to interested national and international audi- ences by means of journals of literary opinion pub- LITERATURE (1607-I955) / I55 lished both by university and commercial presses. Whether or not contemporary writing and the criti- cism of that writing reveal the American mind and spirit "in the round," the revelation that has been made is \nown jar beyond the bounds of the United States. Writers, therefore, assume an increasing re- sponsibility as representatives of their country in the world. With respect to developments in American poetry, the critics emphasize: a departure from the use of experimental forms developed by the poets' fore- runners; a return to lyricism; and a trend toward neo-classicism. Some commentators have under- taken to defend poets from charges of wilful com- plexity and obscurity leveled against them, some- times by their peers. The champions of the "dif- ficult" poets point out that the times reflected in poetry also are complex, hence not susceptible to treatment in simple, obvious terms; and that, more- over, good poetry has never been easy poetry. The reader's intelligence has its own part to play in reaching the poet's true meaning. Finally, two striding and related aspects of litera- ture during this fifteen-year fragment of a period are its extent and its accessibility. Men of letters, who constituted such a small fraction of American pro- fessional society in the early years of the country's history, now play a role enhanced in importance by their growing numbers and by their productivity. New avenues also tend to open out more widely to accommodate the distribution of their wor\. One of these is provided by the great increase in num- bers of students receiving education at the college level. While stringent critics of education have been heard to deny that college education implies more than a minimum literacy for the student, the fact remains that the general effects of a national literary tradition are much more widespread than ever before. Even without formal higher educa- tion the citizen of today is constantly besieged by claims on his attention of ideas gleaned from his radio, his television, the motion picture theater he attends, and the reprints of boo\s purchased cheaply at his local drugstore. The heterogeneous audience created by this interplay of education, en- tertainment, and information is not universally dis- criminating; consequently much of the writing designed to attract it is commercially inspired to win popular approval and to increase profits. How- ever, one of the hopeful signs of the literary times is the dissemination of serious literary wor\ by modern mass media of communication. At home and abroad the opportunities — and responsibilities — of American writers are greater than in any earlier period. 1907. JAMES AGEE, 1909-1955 Agee's serious and fastidious writing is marked by moral indignation at the faults of con- temporary society and by his power to express his judgments with poetic intensity, in a highly in- dividualistic vocabulary. His prose works include Let Us Now Praise Famous Men ( 1941), a documen- tary text to photographs by Walker Evans, a book which is a biting arraignment of the system of farm tenantry in Alabama cotton production; and The Morning Watch (1951), a long short story of a twelve-year-old boy's inner conflicts and adjustments. 1908. Permit me voyage [poems] With a fore- ward by Archibald MacLeish. New Haven, Yale University Press, 1934. 59 p. (The Yale series of younger poets, edited by S. V. Benet) 34-38156 PS3501.G35P4 1934 1909. LOUIS AUCHINCLOSS, 1917- Auchincloss is a novelist of manners dealing with well-to-do elements of New York City society, somewhat in the tradition of Edith Wharton and Henry James (qq. v.). His first book, The In- different Children (1947) was published under the pseudonym of Andrew Lee. 1910. The injustice collectors. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1950. 248 p. 50-14014 PZ3.A898IP Short stories. 191 1. Sybil. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1952 [i. e. 195 1 ] 284 p. 51-8774 PZ3.A898Sy 1912. A law for the lion. [Cambridge, Mass.] Houghton Mifflin, 1953. 279 p. 53-5728 PZ3.A898Law 1913. The romantic egoists. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1954. 210 p. 54-5984 PZ3.A898R0 Short stories. 1914. JAMES BALDWIN, 1924- Baldwin in his first novel tells the story of a young Harlem Negro's spiritual problems and orthodox "salvation." The flashback technique is used to present the family background and to give the work wider scope for its oblique comment on morality and mores. 1915. Co tell it on the mountain. New York, Knopf, 1953. 303 p. 52-12199 PZ4.B18G0 156 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 1916. SHIRLEY FRANCES BARKER, 1911- Shirley Barker first appeared before the pub- lic as a poetess. Her The Darf( Hills Under (1933) was published in The Yale series of younger poets. This volume presaged her interest in New England in general and her native New Hampshire in par- ticular. To this setting she has regularly returned, most notably as a historical novelist dealing with the colonial period. However, in Fire and the Ham- mer (1953) she deals with Pennsylvania and New Jersey at the time of the Revolutionary War. 1 91 7. Peace, my daughters. New York, Crown, 1949. 248 p. 49-1164 PZ3.B2457Pe A novel about the Salem witchcraft trials. 1918. Rivers parting. New York, Crown, 1950. 311 p. 50-14406 PZ3.B2457Ri A novel set in 17th century England and New Hampshire. 1919. A land and a people; a book of poems. New York, Crown, 1952. 78p. 52-5683 PS3503.A5684L3 1920. Tomorrow the new moon. Indianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill, 1955. 354 p. 55-6820 PZ3.B2457T0 A novel reflecting life in New England during the period of Cotton Mather. 1921. SAUL BELLOW, 1915- With his third novel, The Adventures of Augie March, Bellow received wide, though not unanimous literary acclaim. A picaresque styled narrative about a Chicago Jew, it is a somewhat humorous, but not highly introspective fictional statement of the view that life is worth living. 1922. The adventures of Augie March. New York, Viking Press, 1953. 536 p. 53-7953 PZ3.B 4 i937Ad 1923. JOHN BERRYMAN, 19 14- Berryman practices a highly crafted verse somewhat in the tradition of Wallace Stevens. His quiet, philosophic poems have been appearing in leading literary periodicals since the early thirties. Prominent mainly as an example of the modern trend in poetry, Berryman has also written an im- portant study of Stephen Crane, and has done much critical work. 1924. The dispossessed. [Poems] New York, Sloane, 1948. 103 p. 48-6929 PS3503.E744D5 1925. ELIZABETH BISHOP, 191 1- Elizabeth Bishop's New England birth and rearing set against her visits to Key West have in part resulted in a poetry fusing a northern conserv- atism and a tropical luxuriance. Her work has been commended for metrical skill, ironic humor, incisive imagery, and keen powers of observation. Like most modern American poets, her work tends to appear first in periodicals. The first volume of this not very prolific poetess was North & South (1946). 1926. Poems: North & south. A cold spring. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1955. 95 p. 55-7003 PS3503.I785P6 1927. PAUL FREDERIC BOWLES, 19 10- Bowles has been regarded by some critics as one of the most forceful of the younger writers of fiction. His work is usually a picture of the modern sterility of spirit followed by a disintegration of personality; the stories are commonly evolved in terms of the civilized in contact with the primitive, frequendy with an African setting. Thus Bowles projects and personifies some of the more strident overtones of modern life; this results in what might be called horror stories, but the horror is derived more from the psychological implications than from the gruesome physical facts. These qualities have placed him to the fore among authors of the modern Gothic tale. It could be said that Bowles presents a pessimistic waste land in prose fiction. He has also acquired a considerable reputation as a composer. 1928. The sheltering sky. [New York] New Di- rections, 1949. 318 p. 49-11888 PZ3.B682Sh 1929. The delicate prey, and other stories. [New York] Random House, 1950. 307 p. 50-10899 PZ3.B6826De Contents. — At Paso Rojo. — Pastor Dowe at Tacate. — Call at Corazon. — Under the sky. — Sefior Ong and Sefior Ha. — The circular valley. — The echo. — The scorpion. — The fourth day out from Santa Cruz. — Pages from Cold Point. — You are not I. — How many midnights? — A thousand days to Mokhtar. — Tea on the mountain. — By the water. — The delicate prey. — A distance episode. 1930. Let it come down. New York, Random House, 1952. 311 p. 52-5141 PZ3.B6826LC LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 157 193 1. The spider's house. New York, Random House, 1955. 406 p. 55-8169 PZ3.B6826SP 1932. RAY BRADBURY, 1920- Bradbury, one of the more popular science- fiction authors, represents a rapidly growing field of American writing. Although the field has usually been dismissed as pulp fiction, the quality of Bradbury's work has attracted the attention of many literary critics. His tales, often touched with humor, are usually works of fantasy or horror. Al- though commonly set in the future, they often in- directly comment on present-day society; so much so that his novel, Fahrenheit 451 (1953), becomes in part a social tract in its portrayal of a regimented society in which books are banned. 1933. Dark carnival. Sauk City, Wis., Arkham House, 1947. 313 p. 47-24598 PZ3.B72453Dar Short stories. 1934. The Martian chronicles. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1950. 222 p. 50-7660 PZ3-B72453Mar 1935. The illustrated man. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1951. 251 p. 51-1140 PZ3.B72453I1 Short stories. 1936. The golden apples of the sun. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1953. 250 p. illus. 52-13569 PZ3.B72453G0 Short stories. 1937. GWENDOLYN BROOKS, 1917- Gwendolyn Brooks is a Negro author who was born in Kansas and later moved to Chicago, which is reflected in much of her writing. Her first volume of poetry, A Street in Bronzeville (1945), was generally well received as expressing Negro urban life; in 1950 for her second book she was awarded a Pulitzer prize for poetry. . 1938. Annie Allen. New York, Harper, 1949. 60 p. 49-10072 PS3503.R7244A7 1939. Maud Martha. New York, Harper, 1953. 180 p. 53-77 2 6 PZ4.B872.Mau A novelette, with a Chicago setting, about a ' young Negro woman and her love. 1940. JOHN HORNE BURNS, 1916- The first book by Burns was a war novel, The Gallery, which depicted the great sympathy, and with what some have thought sentimentality, the Italians during the American occupation. His second book, Lucifer With a BooI{, was an attack on aspects of the private school system in America. A Cry of Children is the story of an unsatisfactory love affair which crosses social lines, but includes vignettes of the modern American city and presents on several levels the conflicts of a changing morality. Burns' books are written in a realistic, "non-literary" manner, and they have been said to evidence an "inverted puritanism." 194 1. The gallery. New York, Harper, 1947. 342 p. 47-4090 PZ3.B93702Gal 1942. Lucifer with a book, a novel. New York, Harper, 1949. 340 p. 49-8269 PZ3.B93702LU 1943. A cry of children. New York, Harper, 1952. 276 p. 52-9547 PZ3-B93702Cr 1944. TRUMAN CAPOTE, 1924- Mr. Capote's style has been characterized as rich, eloquent, and simple, with a remarkable suggestive power. Others say that he is precocious and exotic, or even decadent. Some say his stories with Southern settings have a folktale quality which bespeaks the humor and tenderness with which he approaches his characters and presents life as essen- tially sad, but redeemed by humor and tenderness. Others find his subject matter reprehensible. He is sympathetic toward and understanding of children and deviate individuals. 1945. Other voices, other rooms. New York, Ran- dom House, 1948. 231 p. 48-5135 PZ3.Ci72 4 Ot A novel in which a lonely youth confronts abnor- mality and eccentricity in a relatively isolated and rundown Louisiana mansion. 1946. A tree of night, and other stories. New York, Random House, 1949. 209 p. 49-7722 PZ3.Ci724Tr Modern Gothic stories with psychological or su- pernatural settings wherein abnormal individuals abound. 1947. The grass harp. [New York] Random House, 1951. 181 p. 51—13101 PZ3-Ci724Gr A symbolistic book of fantasy and the grotesque, in which the unimaginative life of conformity i>- I58 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES attacked. Three leading characters take up resi- dence in a tree to provide the central episode about which the story revolves. The work also appeared as a stage play. 1948. JOHN CIARDI, 1916- Ciardi is a poet who has often used World War II as theme, or as a source of imagery for his nonwar poems. Besides the war, his themes are commonly America, love, and death. He has writ- ten both descriptive and symbolic poetry, usually with a highly concrete form of presentation. In addition to writing poetry, he has produced an an- thology of the work of young American poets: Mid- Century American Poets (1950). 1949. Homeward to America. New York, Holt, 1940. 62 p. 40-3997 PS3505.I27H6 1940 1950. Other skies. [Poems] Boston, Little, Brown, 1947. 83 p. 47-31468 PS3505.I27O8 195 1. Live another day; poems. New York, Twayne, 1949. 88 p. 49-10624 PS3505.I27L5 1952. From time to time. [Poems] New York, Twayne, 1 95 1. 84 p. (The Twayne library of modern poetry) 51-8821 PS3505.I27F7 1953. As if; poems new and selected. New Brunswick, N. J., Rutgers University Press, IQ 55- M3P- 55-9956 PS35°5-I 2 7 A 75 1954. WALTER VAN TILBURG CLARK, 1909- Clark is a novelist who depicts the West and, more particularly, Nevada. His first book revolved about an erroneous lynching; his second portrayed a Reno youth who wished to be a composer; and his third was the story of a hunt for a mountain lion. His works demonstrate a psychological aware- ness and a tendency to infuse symbolic overtones into his realistic presentations. 1955. The Ox-Bow incident. New York, Random House, 1940. 309 p. 40-33213 PZ3.C5483OX 1956. The city of trembling leaves. New York, Random House, 1945. 690 p. 45-35081 PZ3.C5483Ci 1957. The track of the cat, a novel. New York, Random House, 1949. 404 p. 49-9031 PZ3.C5483Tr 1958. The watchful gods, and other stories. New York, Random House, 1950. 306 p. 50-9687 PS3505.L376W3 Contents. — Hook. — The wind and the snow of winter. — The rapids. — The anonymous. — The buck in the hills. — Why don't you look where you're going? — The Indian well. — The fish who could close his eyes. — The portable phonograph. — The watchful gods. 1959. AUGUST WILLIAM DERLETH, 1909- August Derleth is a prolific author of books on Wisconsin. His most prominent works, his historical novels, are sometimes criticized for their slow pacing. Selected Poems (1944) contained a representative group of his largely regional poems. Wisconsin Earth, A Sac Prairie Sampler (1948) re- published in one volume Shadow of Night, Place of Haw\s, and Village Year: A Sac Prairie Journal. In addition he has written a number of mystery stories and edited anthologies in that field. He has also edited a number of science-fiction anthologies, such as Strange Ports of Call (1948), Beachheads in Space (1952), Time to Come (1954), and Portals of Tomorrow (1954). i960. Wind over Wisconsin. New York, Scrib- ner, 1938. 391 p. 38-27410 PZ3.D445Wi This second volume of the Sac Prairie Saga takes place in the 1830's, the last years of the Indian wars. 1 96 1. Restless is the river. New York, Scribner, 1939. 514 p. 39" 2 7 8 5 6 PZ3-D445Re Pioneer life from 1839 to 1850 in the Sac Prairie country. 1962. Bright journey. New York, Scribner, 1940. 424 p. ^ 4°-33 102 PZ3-D445Br Frontier Wisconsin from 1812 to 1840 is reflected in this novel about fur trade in the Northwest Territory. 1963. Country growth. New York, Scribner, 1940. 322 p. 40-11748 PZ3.D4447C0 Short stories. 1964. Evening in spring. Sauk City, Wis., Stan- ton & Lee, 1945. 308 p. 46-781 PZ3.D445EV2 A novel of adolescence in a Wisconsin village. LITERATURE (1607-I955) / I59 1965. illus. 1966. Village daybook: a Sac Prairie journal. Chicago, Pellegrini & Cudahy, 1947. 306 p. 47-3074 PS3507.E69V4 RALPH ELLISON, 1914- The first novel of this Negro novelist traces the life of a Negro from his adolescence in the South to maturity in New York. The prose is at times surrealistic. 1967. Invisible man. New York, Random House, 1952. 439 p. 5 2 -5 r 59 PZ4-E47 In 1968. PAUL HAMILTON ENGLE, 1908- Paul Engle is an Iowa poet and teacher who has incorporated much of his knowledge of the land and his love of America in his verses. These in their usual affirmativeness have been accredited to the Whitman tradition, although echoes of Mac- Leish and other modern authors may be heard in Engle's writings. Also, his poetic craftsmanship has in recent years become both more formal and more accomplished. His first book of poems was Worn Earth (1932), which was included in The Yale series of younger poets. This was followed by American Song (1934) and Brea\ the Heart's Anger (1936), which contain poems reflecting his life abroad as a Rhodes scholar, and also his increasing awareness of the social issues and attitudes of the period. Corn (1939) is something of a transition book, for it reflects his return to America and his taking as theme the Iowan farmer and the domi- nating virtues of America. His work since then has reflected his position as an Iowan, a professor, a father, and a native citizen of America. His position as a scholar is indicated by Reading Modern Poetry (1955), an anthology with commentary which he produced with Warren Carrier. 1969. Always the land. New York, Random House, 194 1. 326 p. 41-3535 PZ3.E576AI A poetic novel of Iowan farm life. 1970. West of midnight. New York, Random House, 1 94 1. 96 p. 42-269 PS3509.N44W4 194 1 Poems. 1971. The word of love. [Poems] New York, Random House, 195 1. 39 p. 51-10256 PS3509.N44W55 1972. American child; sonnets for my daughters, with thirty-six new poems. New York, Dial Press, 1956. 102 p. 56-9509 PS3509.N44A68 1956 The first part of this was first collected in book form under the title American Child, a Sonnet Sequence (1945). 1973. HOWARD MELVIN FAST, 1914- Mr. Fast is a leftist novelist of much tech- nical skill. Most of his work is in the form of the historical novel. In the main, these read extremely well. However, he slants his material obviously to influence readers rather than to render a com- prehensive, objective view of his subject. Fast's most recent book, Silas Timberman (1954), the story of a quiet, conservative professor who ends up in jail because of his opposition to views of edu- cationalists and members of Congress, who regard him as a Communist, is obvious propaganda. 1974. Conceived in liberty; a novel of Valley Forge. New York, Simon & Schuster, 1939. 389 p. 39-27589 PZ3.F265C0 A novel based on the experiences of the American Army during the winter months at Valley Forge during the American Revolutionary War. 1975. The last frontier. New York, Duell, Sloan & Pearce, 1941. 307 p. 41-13229 PZ3.F265Las A story of Cheyenne Indians leaving an Oklahoma reservation in 1878 in a last striving for dignified survival. 1976. The unvanquished. New York, Duell, Sloan & Pearce, 1942. 316 p. 42-16612 PZ3.F265Un A novel based on the life of George Washington during the Revolution. 1977. Citizen Tom Paine. New York, Duell, Sloan & Pearce, 1943. 341 p. 43-51139 PZ^F^Ci A fictionalized account of Tom Paine's life in both Europe and America, with some emphasis on the Revolutionary period. 1978. The American, a Middle Western legend. New York, Duell, Sloan & Pearce, 1946. 337 p. 46-25220 PZ3.F265Am A novel based on the life of John Peter Altgeld, a liberal Illinois politician and Governor of that State in the late 19th century. l60 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 1979. My glorious brothers. Boston, Little, Brown, 1948. 280 p. 48-8762 PZ 3 .F265My The story of the freeing of Israel from Syrian- Greek rulers 100 years before Christ. 1980. The passion of Sacco and Vanzetti, a New England legend. New York, Blue Heron Press, 1953. 254 p. 53-3420 PZ3.F265Pas A view of the events behind the execution of Nicola Sacco and Bartolomeo Vanzetti in 1927. 1981. JEAN GARRIGUE, 1912- Jean Garrigue is a subjective poetess of minor scope who presents her emotions in a word-conscious verse that is reminiscent of Wallace Stevens. 1982. The ego and the centaur. [Poems. New York, New Directions] 1947. 126 p. 47-30700 PS3513.A7217E4 1983. The monument rose, poems. New York, Noonday Press, 1953. 58 p. 53-10701 PS3513.A7217M6 1984. WILLIAM GOYEN, 1915- Goyen is a young Texas author who writes a highly "literary," poetic prose which he has so far used more for a lyric evocation of a time and place than as a means of telling a story. 1985. The house of breath. New York, Random House, 1950. 181 p. 50-9448 PZ3.G7484H0 An emotional mood picture of Charity, Texas, apparently based largely on childhood recollections. 1986. Ghost and flesh; stories and tales. New York, Random House, 1952. 183 p. 52-5143 PZ3.G7484GI1 1987. In a farther country; a romance. New York, Random House, 1955. 182 p. 55-8143 PZ3.G7484I11 A surrealistic novel about a Texas girl inhabiting a New York City "casde in Spain," where she is queen. 1988. LILLIAN FLORENCE HELLMAN, 1905- Lillian Hellman, possibly the most success- ful of modern American women dramatists, writes plays with a "message" — often related to current events. 1989. Four plays: The children's hour; Days to come; The little foxes; Watch on the Rhine. New York, Random House, 1942. 330 p. 42-7559 PS3515.E343F6 1990. Another part of the forest, a play in three acts. New York, Viking Press, 1947. 134 p. 47-30238 PS3515.E343A8 1991. The autumn garden; a play in three acts. Boston, Little, Brown, 195 1. 139 p. 51-10951 PS3515.E343A85 1992. JOHN RICHARD HERSEY, 1914- John Hersey is known mainly for his rep- ortorial work on World War II. His first book, Men on Bataan (1942), told the story of General MacArthur and the fall of the Philippines. In 1946 an entire issue of The New Yorker was devoted to Hiroshima, Hersey's account of the effects of the atomic bomb on that city; it was issued the same year as a book. His second novel, The Wall (1950), told of the Polish Jews under the Nazi occupation. His most recent novel, The Marmot Drive (1953), is a symbolic story which ostensibly reports a small New England town's attempts to overcome an invasion of woodchucks. Except for the last novel, he has regularly presented his material in a simple, realistic manner, as a reporter. 1993. Into the valley; a skirmish of the marines. New York, Knopf, 1943. 138 p. illus. 43-1318 D767.98.H4 1994. A bell for Adano. New York, Knopf, 1944. 269 p. 44-164 PZ3.H4385Be A novel about the American occupation of a Sicilian village during World War II. 1995. WILLIAM MOTTER INGE, 1913- William Inge, who was born in Kansas, is representative of some of the newer dramatists. His work, which is in the realist tradition, has met with considerable popular and critical acclaim both on the stage and in film. 1996. Come back, little Sheba. New York, Ran- dom House, 1950. 119 p. 50-8371 PS3517.N265C6 1950 An alcoholic, middle-aged chiropractor and his wife experience an unromantic family life. 1997. Picnic, a summer romance in three acts. New York, Random House, 1953. 168 p. (A Random House play) 53-8342 PS3517.N265P5 LITERATURE (1607-I955) / l6l Set in a small Kansas town, this is a play about the effect of a good-looking vagrant on the women of the community. 1998. Bus stop. New York, Random House, 1955. 154 p. (A Random House play) 55-9043 PS3517.N265B8 A group of characters are brought together in a roadside restaurant when the bus is snowbound. 1999. RANDALL JARRELL, 19 14- Jarrell has developed a reputation as an oc- casionally coruscating critic of profound insight, as well as a sympathetic poet of musical and tech- nical virtuosity. Many of his poems have been products of the war; these have appeared in volumes such as Little Friend, Little Friend (1945), Losses (1948), and The Seven-League Crutches (1951). 2000. Poetry and the age. New York, Knopf, 1953. 271 p. 52-12173 PN1271J3 2001. Pictures from an institution, a comedy. New York, Knopf, 1954. 277 p. 54-5973 PZ4-J37 pi A satirical novel about life at a small college. 2002. Selected poems. New York, Knopf, 1955. 20 5 P- 55—5613 PS3519.A86A6 1955 2003. JAMES JONES, 1921- Jones' first novel was a realistic story of Army life in Hawaii, starting a few months before the Pearl Harbor attack and concluding shortly after it. A highly popular book, it was the source of an equally popular screen adaptation. 2004. From here to eternity. New York, Scrib- ner, 1951. 861 p. 51-9228 PZ4.J77Fr 2005. ROSS FRANKLIN LOCKRIDGE, 1914- 1948 Lockridge wrote only one book, a somewhat prolix novel which dealt with the day of July 4, 1892, in a small Indiana town, but which used the flashback technique to cover half a century of American life. The book rapidly became a best- seller and was widely acclaimed by critics, although a few clergymen objected to some passages. The author committed suicide about three months after publication of his book. 2006. Raintree County . . . which had no bound- aries in time and space, where lurked musical and strange names and mythical and lost peoples, and which was itself only a name musical and strange. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1948. 1066 p. maps. 48-245 PZ3.L8ii46Rai 2007. ROBERT LOWELL, 1917- Robert Lowell has been one of the most widely acclaimed of the younger poets. He has considerable linguistic and technical skill at his command as he sets out to explain the moral polarity of the world. His poetry, which often uses New England as a setting, is subde, sincere, intense, and at times involved; it is also representative of the re- turn to "classical" forms, or formalism, though with a very modern astringency. In 1947 he was awarded a Pulitzer prize for Lord Weary s Castle. 2008. Land of unlikeness; introd. by Allen Tate. Cummington [Mass.] Cummington Press, IQ 44- [43] P- 45-237 PS3523.O89L3 2009. Lord Weary 's casde. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1946. 69 p. 46-7958 PS3523.O89L6 2010. The mills of the Kavanaughs. [Poems] New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1951. 55 p. 51-10214 PS3523.O89M5 201 1. ROBERT JAMES COLLAS LOWRY, 1919- Robert Lowry is the author of realistic novels and short stories, most of which derive in subject mat- ter from World War II. These antimilitaristic and sometimes bitter works have been deplored by some for their "manner" and lack of restraint; the author has also been accused of sentimentality. However, his careful writing and the impression of truthful- ness in his writings have won him many adherents. His most recent novel, The Violent Wedding (1953), is about a love affair between a white girl and a Negro prizefighter. 2012. Casualty. ,Ncw York, New Directions, 1946. 153 p. 4 6 -7 2 7 » PZ3.L956 4 Cas 2013. Find me in fire. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1948. 280 p. 48-7932 PZ3.L9564F1 2014. The big cage. Garden City, N. Y., Double- day, 1949. 342 p. 4911454 PZ3.L9 5 64Bi 2015. The wolf that fed us. Garden City, N. Y.. Doubleday, 1949. 220 p. 49-796.: PZ3.L9564W0 l6l I A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Contents. — The toy balloon. — The church. — Layover in El Paso. — The war poet. — The wolf that fed us. — Visitors to the castle. — The terror in the streets. — The gold button. 2016. Happy New Year, kameradesl n stories. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1954. 256 p. 54-6783 PZ3.L9564Hap 2017. MARY THERESE McCARTHY, 1912- Mary McCarthy started her literary career as a book reviewer and as a columnist dealing with New York stage productions; this latter aspect of her work may be seen in the essays selected for Sights and Spectacles, ig^y-ig^6 (1956), which, pardy because of the freedom allowed her by The Partisan Review, for which she wrote, is far from a full picture of the stage productions of the period. In recent years she has become famous as a novelist of biting satires. Her technique, however, is more one of close dissection of a neurotic character viewed narrowly than it is a caricaturing on a broad scale. Her characters are usually drawn from the literary and academic world in which she moves. 2018. The company she keeps. [New York] Simon & Schuster, 1942. 304 p. 42-13269 PZ3.M1272C0 A portrait of a neurotic, pseudo-intellectual, liberal girl as a product of the thirties. 2019. The oasis. New York, Random House, 1949. 181 p. 49-10152 PZ3.Mi2720as The story of a group of intellectuals who attempt to establish a Utopia on a New England mountain. 2020. Cast a cold eye. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1950. 212 p. 50-9761 PZ3.Mi272Cas A group of short stories distinguished by the author's famous stylistic abilities. 2021. The groves of Academe. New York, Har- court, Brace, 1952. 302 p. 52-7255 PZ3.Mi272Gr A novel, with a small Pennsylvania college setting, against which a neurotic-intellectual professor of literature is closely pictured with all his unpleas- antnesses. 2022. A charmed life. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1955. 313 p. 55-10153 PZ3.M1272CI1 A novel picturing life in a colony set up to en- courage the creativity of writers and artists. 2023. CARSON (SMITH) McCULLERS, 191 7- Carson McCullers is a Southern novelist who usually writes subtle and original works set in her home area. She commonly presents understanding, sympathetic accounts of her characters' inner com- pulsions; this aspect is heightened by her emphasis on the factors of personality motivation and the differences in even the "well-adjusted" characters. She is a realist and tends to be symbolistic, with re- sults that have been called metaphysical. Her Re- flections in a Golden Eye (1941) is a bizarre but brilliant story of a group of abnormal individuals whose fates intertwine at a prewar Southern Army post. The Member of the Wedding (1946) is an evocative novel which depicts the yearning of a young girl to escape her environment; it appeared also in both stage and screen adaptations. 2024. The ballad of the sad cafe; the novels and stories of Carson McCullers. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1951. 791 p. 51-10969 PZ3.Mi388 4 Bal Contents. — The ballad of the sad cafe. — Wunder- kind. — The jockey. — Madame Zilensky and the King of Finland. — The sojourner. — A domestic dilemma. — A tree, a rock, a cloud. — The heart is a lonely hunter. — Reflections in a golden eye. — The member of the wedding. 2025. NORMAN MAILER, 1923- Mailer's first novel was a best seller that dealt with the war in the Pacific; it was noted for its realism and its accurate recording of the speech of the soldiers, as well as for passages of poetic intensity. His second book, a thesis novel which dealt with political ideologies and was set in postwar New York, and also his third, which portrays the denizens of the motion picture and entertainment world in California, were not so highly regarded by many reviewers. 2026. The naked and the dead. New York, Rine- hart, 1948. 721 p. 48-6633 PZ 3 .M28i 5 Nak 2027. Barbary shore. New York, Rinehart, 1951. 312 p. 51-10764 PZ3.M28i5Bar 2028. The deer park. New York, Putnam, 1955. 375 p. 55 -I00 93 PZ3.M28i5De 2029. WILLIAM KEEPERS MAXWELL, 1908- William Maxwell was born in Illinois, and his life there is a source for much of the background in his writings. He was for a time an editor of The New Yorker. LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 163 2030. Bright center of heaven. New York, Harper, 1934. 315 p. 34-28619 PZ3.M45i8Br Events of a day on a Wisconsin farm. 2031. They came like swallows. New York, Harper, 1937. 267 p. 37-6382 PZ3.M45i8Th A story of commonplace events in the lives of members of an American family in 19 18. 2032. The folded leaf. New York, Harper, 1945. 310 p. 45-3288 PZ3.M4518F0 A story of the friendship of two boys, one an introvert and the other an extrovert. 2033. Time will darken it. New York, Harper, 1948. 302 p. 48-8331 PZ3.M4518T1 Set in a small Illinois town in 1912, this story mirrors life in America at that period. 2034. THOMAS MERTON, 19 15- Thomas Merton is a Catholic convert who became a Trappist monk. This story he tells in his popular autobiographical book, The Seven Storey Mountain. He initially received most attention as a Catholic poet writing in a surrealistic style. Of late he has been writing religious prose; meditations, biographical works, etc. 2035. A man in the divided sea. [Norfolk, Conn., New Directions] 1946. 155 p. 46-7485 PS3525.E7174M3 A collection of poems including those which ap- peared in Thirty Poems (1944). 2036. The seven storey mountain. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1948. 429 p. 48-8645 BX4705.M542A3 Autobiography. 2037. Figures for an apocalypse. [Poems] Nor- folk, Conn., New Directions [1948] "1947. in p. 48-2906 PS3525.E7174F5 2038. Seeds of contemplation. [Norfolk, Conn.] New Directions, 1949. 201 p. 49-1562 BX2350.M54 A mystic work of meditation on the spiritual life. 2039. The tears of the blind lions, f Poems. New York] New Directions, 1949. 32 p. 49-49074 PS3525.E7174T4 2040. The waters of Siloe. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1949. 377 p. illus. 49-10495 BX4102.M4 This volume is something of a philosophy of mon- asticism and a history of the Cistercians, with an emphasis on Cistercian activities in the United States. 2041. The sign of Jonas. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1953. 362 p. 52-9857 BX4705.M542A32 "A collection of personal notes and meditations set down during about five years ... in the mon- astery of Gethsemani." 2042. No man is an island. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1955. 264 p. 55-7420 BX2350.M535 This volume of reflections on the inner life serves as a sequel to Seeds of Contemplation (q. v.). 2043. ARTHUR MILLER, 1915- With his third book, the play All My Sons, Miller rose to prominence as an author, and started the work that was to establish him as one of the leading dramatists of his generation. His style is one of flat realism, so that it is from what he says and the way he organizes his material, rather than from any purely literary expression, that he achieves his effect. 2044. Situation normal. New York, Reynal & Hitchcock, 1944. 179 p. 44-47726 U766.M48 An account, in the form of notes to a film pro- ducer, of civilians training to be soldiers as the author had observed them during a special tour. 2045. Focus. New York, Reynal 8c Hitchcock, 1945. 217 p. 45-9586 PZ3.M61224F0 A novel on the theme of anti-Semitism. 2046. All my sons, a play in three acts. New York, Reynal & Hitchcock, 1947. 83 p. 47-30156 PS3525.I5156A7 A tragedy dealing with the social effects of an industrial war crime. 2047. Death of a salesman; certain private conver- sations in two acts and a requiem. New York, Viking Press, 1949. 139 p. 49-8817 PS3525.I5156D4 A tragedy reflecting the life of a salesman, and presenting the problem of values in modern society. This book was awarded a Pulitzer prize for drama, and it was the first play to be distributed by the Book-of-the-Month Club. 164 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 2048. The crucible, a play in four acts. New York, Viking Press, 1953. 145 p. 53-6724 PS3525.I5156C7 _ 1953 A play dealing with the Salem witchcraft trials. 2049. A view from the bridge; two one-act plays. New York, Viking Press, 1955. 160 p. 55-10474 PS3525.I5156V5 A View from the Bridge is the story of two Ital- ians who illegally entered the United States, and who are seeking jobs as longshoremen. The second play, A Memory of Two Mondays, presents a view of life in a New York warehouse as reflecting the outside world. 2050. BUCKLINMOON, 1911- Moon is a Southern Negro author who in his works has attempted to present his view of race prejudice and relationships between whites and Negroes, especially as they exist in the South. 2051. Without magnolias. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1949. 274 p. 49-8390 PZ3.M777i7"Wi A tract novel depicting a Negro community in Florida. 2053. Man and boy. New York, Knopf, 1951. 212 p. 51-2263 PZ3.M8346Mam A satire on a selfish mother about to christen a boat in honor of her hero-son who was killed al Guadalcanal. 2054. The works of love. New York, Knopf, 1952, c i95i. 269 p. 51-11978 PZ3.M8346W11 A study of the personality of a Midwesterner from his isolated boyhood in a rural community, through his successful career in the poultry business, to his isolated old age in Chicago, where he suddenly dies while employed as a store Santa Claus. 2055. The deep sleep. New York, Scribner, 1953. 312 p. 53-11783 PZ3.M8346De A novel told through the minds of five people brought together in a Philadelphia suburb by the death of a judge who had deeply influenced each of them. 2056. The huge season. New York, Viking Press, 1954. 306 p. 54-10858 PZ3.M8346HU The main character visualizes the present-day (1952) situation in terms of the influences on him and his friends during their youth in the Jazz Age. 2052. WRIGHT MORRIS, 1910- Morris' novels, which often use a Midwest setting, are written in the plain prose characteristic of much modern fiction. A professional photog- rapher, Morris reflects an aptitude for recording visual details of commonplace things and acts as in- direct indexes of character and personal relation- ships. This is further emphasized in some of his work by the joint use of photographs and text, as in The Home Place (1948), the story of a New York family on a visit to a Nebraska farm, which he con- tinued, without pictures, in The World in the Attic (1949). His first book, My Uncle Dudley (1942), captured much of this photographic sense in a pic- aresque novel about the trip of some "bums" from Los Angeles to Chicago, basically humorous but with serious overtones. In The Man Who Was There (1945), a novel about the effects on others of a man missing in war action, Morris started to ex- plore the geography of personality, the mystery of private human feelings, the interinfluence of char- acters, and the sorrow of individual loneliness and non-communication which have become dominant ingredients in his latest books. Throughout his work there is an attempt to find out and understand what an "American" is. 2057. EDWARD NEWHOUSE, 191 1- Newhouse, because of the frequent appear- ance of his short stories in that periodical, is some- times known as a New Yorker author. His work deals mainly with the New York scene, including the suburbs; however, most of the stories in The Iron Chain (1946) are concerned with World War II. 2058. Many are called; forty-two short stories. New York, Sloane, 1951. 384 p. 51-12159 PZ3.N458Man 2059. The temptation of Roger Heriott. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1954. 241 p. 54-10198 PZ3.N458Te A novel about the demands of integrity in a moderately well-to-do suburbanite who works in New York for a private foundation that awards fellowships to young musicians. 2060. JOHN FREDERICK NIMS, 1913- Nims writes a polished poetry which usually employs urban themes, often those of the small city. While his work thus reflects aspects of modern American life, it also reflects his own life as a scholar. LITERATURE (1607-1955) / 165 2061. The iron pastoral. New York, Sloane, 1947. 86 p. 47-4500 PS3527.I863I7 Poems. 2062. A fountain in Kentucky, and other poems. New York, Sloane, 1950. 72 p. 50-6019 PS3527.I863F6 1950 2063. CLIFFORD ODETS, 1906- Odets rose to prominence as a playwright concerned with conveying a meaningful view of life, especially the life of urban middle-class society. Raised in New York in a middle-class family, he portrays this background in many of his plays. Realism and forceful dialogue have been character- istic of much of his work. An experimentalist in subject matter and attitude, he rapidly became one of the leaders of the "new" drama of the thirties. 2064. Six plays. With a pref. by the author. New York, Modern Library, 1939. 433 p. (The Modern Library of the word's best books) 39-27816 PS3529.D46S5 1939 Contents. — Waiting for Lefty. — Awake and sing! — Till the day I die. — Paradise lost. — Golden boy. — Rocket to the moon. 2065. Night music; a comedy in twelve scenes. New York, Random House, 1940. 237 p. 40-7217 PS3529.D46N5 1940 2066. Clash by night. New York, Random House, 1942. 242 p. 42-7560 PS3529.D46C5 2067. The big knife. New York, Random House, 1949. 147 p. 49-5900 PS3529.D46B5 1949 2068 The country girl, a play in three acts. New York, Viking Press, 1951. 124 p. 51-1860 PS3529.D46C6 2069. JOHN HENRY O'HARA, 1905- John O'Hara, whose first novel is still con- sidered by some to be his best work, writes often of common (in the pejorative sense) people. He is realistic in style and, to many, shockingly frank. His settings vary widely, though Hollywood, New York, and rural Pennsylvania do recur; a large per- centage of his characters are modern urbanites. 2070. Appointment in Samarra, a novel. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1934. 301 p. 34-25527 PZ3.O3677AP Three days of sex, alcohol, and gangsters in a Pennsylvania town in 1930 climax in the hero's suicide. 2071. The doctor's son and other stories. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1935. 294 p. 35-3041 PZ3.O3677D0 2072. Files on parade. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1939. 277 p. 39-23749 PZ3.036 77 Fi Short stories. 2073. Pipe night. New York, Duell, Sloan & Pearce, 1945. 205 p. 45-3002 PZ3.03677Pi Short stories. 2074. Here's O'Hara; three novels and twenty short stories. New York, Duell, Sloan & Pearce, 1946. 440 p. 46-4951 PZ3.03677He The novels are Butterfield 8 (1935), which is based on a New York murder case, and which in- volves mainly the fringe elements of nightclub life; Hope of Heaven (1938), which presents the un- happy love affair of a Hollywood scenario writer and a bookstore clerk; and Pal Joey (1940), which takes the form of letters of a nightclub entertainer. 2075. Hellbox. New York, Random House, 1947. 210 p. 47-30414 PZ3.O3677HC Short stories. 2076. A rage to live. New York, Random House, 1949. 590 p. 49- I0 3 6 3 PZ3.03677Rag A somewhat panoramic novel of social and sexual life in a Pennsylvania community, starting a few years before World War I. 2077. The Farmers Hotel, a novel. New York, Random House, 195 1. 153 p. 51-14121 PZ3.03677Far The story of people snowbound in a Pennsylvania hotel. 2078. Ten North Frederick. New York, Random House, 1955. 408 p. 55-8167 PZ3.0367;Te A novel of manners set in O'Hara's home area in Pennsylvania. 2079. KENNETH PATCHEN, 1911- Patchen's poetry is often sentimental in con- tent, but normally modernistic in form. His themes have been: protest against social and economic in- justices and follies, love of humanity and the uni- l66 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES verse, hatred of mankind and the world, sex, and religion. His poetry has been extremely uneven, and the range of its critical laudation and denuncia- tion has been equally great. He has also written several volumes of prose, which were largely sur- realistic and with many of the qualities and much of the subject matter of his poetry. His most recent venture, Glory Never Guesses (1955), is a limited edition, silk-screen process volume worked origi- nally by hand, in an attempt to produce a book as an integral work of art, somewhat in the tradition of some of Blake's work. 2080. First will & testament. Norfolk, Conn., New Directions, 1939. 181 p. 40-1 1 14 PS3531.A764F5 1939 Poems. 2081. The journal of Albion Moonlight. [Mount Vernon, N. Y., Walpole Printing Office] 1941. 313 p. 41-19128 PS3531.A764J6 1941 A novel in surrealistic and often poetic prose; the work, written in the form of a journal, relies strongly on symbolism to convey its author's com- mentaries about life, society, and the individual. 2082. The memoirs of a shy pornographer. [New York, New Directions] 1945. 242 p. 45-8438 PZ3.P27i4Me An experimental, satirical novel about a naive young man whose novel becomes a pornographic best-seller as a result of the publisher's large-scale substitution of asterisks for otherwise innocuous words. 2083. The selected poems. [Norfolk, Conn.] New Directions, 1946. 86 p. (The New classics series) A48-7811 PS3531.A764A6 1946 2084. Sleepers awake. [New York, Padell] 1946. 389 p. 46-21856 PS3531.A764S5 A surrealistic novel attacking many of the follies of contemporary man; man's inhumanity to man is the basic theme for excoriation. The book incor- porates an unusual amount of typographical experi- mentation. 2085. See you in the morning. New York, Padell, 1948, e i947. 256 p. 48-17796 PZ3.P27i4Se In a sense Patchen's first novel, this is a short, con- ventional, poetic story about a young couple who accept life and love in the face of imminent death. 2086. Red wine & yellow hair. [Poems] New York, New Directions, 1949. 64 p. 49-7607 PS3531.A764R4 2087. FREDERIC PROKOSCH, 1908- Prokosch has spent much of his life abroad, a fact which is revealed in his poetry and novels. His settings and most of his characters are usually foreign, although some, if not all, of the central characters tend to be American. He is a careful, lyric writer who presents, often in a poetic prose of philosophic detachment, meditative reveries on the problems of the modern world. However, in A Tale for Midnight (1955) he goes back several cen- turies for the story of the Cenci. Prokosch has also translated poetry from several languages. 2088. The Asiatics. New York, Harper, 1935. 423 p. 35- J 9872 PZ3.P9424AS Travels of an American through Asia. 2089. The seven who fled. New York, Harper, J 937- 479 P; 37-18251 PZ3.P 9 42 4 Se Seven Russian exiles have terrifying experiences wandering through Central Asia. 2090. Night of the poor. New York, Harper, r 939- 359 P- 39- 2 4 22 3 PZ3.P9424N1 A novel that reflects aspects of America, especi- ally the poor whites of the South, as seen by a boy hitchhiking from Wisconsin to Texas. 2091. The skies of Europe. New York, Harper, 1941. 500 p. 41-14057 PZ3.P9424Sk A novel about Europe in the two years prior to World War II, as seen through the eyes of an American reporter who travels about the continent. 2092. The conspirators. New York, Harper, I 943- 33 8 P- 43-"4 2 PZ3.P9424C0 Refugees and espionage agents against a Lisbon setting during World War II. 2093. Age of thunder. New York, Harper, 1945. 311 p. 45-2642 PZ3-P9424Ag A philosophically inclined narrative of a search along the French-Swiss border for traitors. 2094. The idols of the cave. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1946. 373 p. 46-7545 PZ3.P9424H A novel that presents, in an almost disinterested manner, unusual, sideline characters in New York during the war. 2095. Chosen poems. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1947. 81 p. 47-2987 PS3531.R78C45 1947 LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 167 2096. Storm and echo. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1948. 274 p. 48-8302 PZ3.P9 4 24St PS3531.R78S7 A novel which presents the fearfulness and im- penetrability of man's inner life as discovered by a journey into the African jungle. 2097. Nine days to Mukalla. New York, Viking Press, 1953. 249 p. 52-14033 PZ3P9424NIC A group of westerners, including some Americans, experience a plane crash on an isolated Arabic island in the Indian Ocean, and thereafter undergo unpleasant and exhausting adventures in their at- tempt to return to civilization. 2098. KENNETH REXROTH, 1905- Rexroth is a California poet who has by some critics been adjudged best in his nature and descriptive poetry, but who himself seems to place greater value on the philosophic parts of his work. His direct philosophic impulse led him to abandon the syntactical experimentation found in his early poems, In What Hour (1940), for a neo- classic syllabic verse form which would allow him more readily to communicate his message. The earlier experimentalism reappeared in another vol- ume, The Art of Worldly Wisdom (1953), a col- lection of early work which had not previously been published in book form. While in many as- pects his work is derived from modern French, American, and English poetry, Rexroth's work also shows classical influences, both East and West. De- tectable in his lyrics, they become decisive in the lyric plays published in Beyond the Mountains. 2099. The phoenix and the tortoise. Norfolk, Conn., New Directions, 1944. 100 p. 44-9924 PS3535.E923P5 Poems. 2100. The signature of all things; poems, songs, elegies, translations, and epigrams. New York, New Directions, 1950. 89 p. 50-5683 PS3535.E923S5 2101. Beyond the mountains. [Plays. New York, New Directions] 1951. 190 p. (Direc- tion, 20) 51-9631 PS3535.E923B4 Contents. — Phaedra. — Iphigenia. — Hermaios. — Berenike. 2102. The dragon and the unicorn. Norfolk, Conn., New Directions, 1952. 171 p. 52-14902 PS3535.E923D7 "Large parts of . . . [this poem] were previously published ... in the New Directions annuals for 1950 and 195 1." 2103. THEODORE ROETHKE, 1908- Roethke is a poet of quiet tone and a modest though well-controlled range. A large percentage of his themes stems from his childhood experiences in a greenhouse. He is one of the younger poets to have achieved recognition. In 1954 he received the Pulitzer prize for The Waging, a selection which adequately represents his production to date. 2104. The waking; poems, 1933-1953. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1953. 120 p. 53-9125 PS3535.O39W3 2105. MURIEL RUKEYSER, 19 13- Born and bred in New York City, Rukeyser became an urban poet in the neo-metaphysical mould. Her leftist tendencies have repeatedly led in her work to a probing of social problems and injustices. Miss Rukeyser has occasionally ventured into other fields of writing, as in The Life of Poetry (1949), a study of the role of poetry in life, and in Willard Gibbs (1942), a scientist discussed at length under no. 4751. 2106. Selected poems. [New York, New Direc- tions] 1951. in p. (The New classics series) 51-12264 PS3535.U4A6 1951 Earlier volumes of poetry by Rukeyser include Theory of Flight (1935), U. S. 1 (1938), A Turning Wind (1939), Wa\e Island (1942), The Beast in View (1944), The Green Wave (1948), and Elegies (1949). 2107. JEROME DAVID SALINGER, 1919- Salinger rose to prominence in 1951 with a novel about a neurotic adolescent who is expelled from preparatory school and wanders about New York for a few days before going home. The story is told in the form of an interior monologue written in nonliterary conversational prose. 2108. The catcher in the rye. Boston, Litde, Brown, 1951. 277 p. 51-4713 PZ4.Si65Cat 2109. Nine stories. Boston, Little, Brown, 1953. 302 p. 52-12626 PZ4-Si65Ni l68 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 21 io. WILLIAM SAROYAN, 1908- Saroyan is a highly prolific Armenian-Amer- ican Californian who usually writes in somewhat amorphous form about California, although occa- sionally dealing with New York or some other place. His work is often highly imaginative reporting of the world as he sees it. Personality, fantasy, and humor inform his world of sweetness and light wherein wander all (and almost only) the beauti- ful people. However, a few of his later books have accepted the possibility of unpleasantness in life. Saroyan's first book was The Daring Young Man on the Flying Trapeze, and Other Stories (1934), which almost immediately established his popu- larity. While his numerous short stories and sketches continue to maintain for him a reputation as a short-story writer, he has also received con- siderable attention as a dramatist. My Heart's in the Highlands (1939) is usually considered his best play, but it was The Time of Your Life (1939), which was awarded the 1940 Pulitzer prize for drama, which the author refused. He has also written a number of novels and autobiographical works. The latter is in some respects a formal dis- tinction, for it has been claimed that he writes some fictional autobiography, and that the rest of his work is highly autobiographical fiction. 21 11. My name is Aram. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1940. 220 p. 40-34075 PZ3-S246My 21 12. Three plays: My heart's in the Highlands, The time of your life, Love's old sweet song. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1940. 121, 200, 146 p. 40-30799 PS3537.A826T47 1940 21 13. Three plays by William Saroyan: The beau- tiful people, Sweeney in the trees, and Across the board on Tomorrow Morning. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1941. 275 p. 41-22847 PS3537.A826T43 1941 21 14. Razzle dazzle. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1942. 505 p. 42-12443 PS3537.A826R35 "Frontispiece" (added t. p. on two leaves, illus- trated in color): Razzle-dazzle; or, The human bal- let, opera and circus; or, There's something I got to tell you: being many kinds of short plays as well as the story of the writing of them. 21 15. The human comedy. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1943. 291 p. 43-51036 PZ3.S246HU 21 16. The Saroyan special, selected short stories. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1948. 368 p. 48-9565 PZ3.S246Sar 21 17. Don't go away mad, and two other plays: Sam Ego's house [and] A decent birth, a happy funeral. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1949. 238 p. 49-1 1921 PS3537.A826D6 21 18. The Assyrian, and other stories. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1950. 276 p. 50-5197 PZ3.S246AS 21 19. The twin adventures: The adventures of William Saroyan, a diary. The adventures of Wesley ]ac\son, a novel. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1950. 225, 285 p. 50-6550 PZ3.S246TW "An hour-to-hour chronicle of a writer at work on the writing of a novel, and the novel itself." The novel was published separately in 1946. 2120. Tracy's tiger. Garden City, N. Y., Double- day, 195 1. 143 p. 5 l - l 3>9^5 PZ3.S246TP 2121. The bicycle rider in Beverly Hills. New York, Scribner, 1952. 178 p. 52-12748 PS3537.A826Z52 Autobiographical. 2122. The laughing matter, a novel. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1953. 254 p. 52-13557 PZ3-S246Lau 2123. MAY SARTON, 1912- May Sarton was born in Belgium, but came to America within a few years, after her family fled the country because of the German invasion. In her early years she had expected to make the theater her career; one of the products of this interest is the play, The Underground River (1947). She soon turned, however, from the theater to a career as a poet and novelist. As a poet she established a con- siderable reputation as a formal lyricist through works published in periodicals and in her small early collections, Encounter in April (1937) and Inner Landscape (1939)- Her novels have reflected her European background and interests, for they have usually had European characters and settings. Thus works such as The Single Hound (1938), The Bridge of Years (1946), and Shadow of a Man (1950) have served to present Americans with pic- tures of life in Europe. 2124. The lion and the rose, poems. New York, Rinehart, 1948. 104 p. 48-5806 PS3537.A832L5 LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 1 69 2125. A shower of summer days. New York, Rinehart, 1952. 244 p. 52-9599 PZ3.S249Shc A novel in which an American girl matures in the course of a summer visit to the estate of relatives in Ireland. 2126. The land of silence, and other poems. New York, Rinehart, 1953. 99 p. 53-7721 PS3537.A832L3 2127. Faithful are the wounds. New York, Rine- hart, 1955. 281 p. 55-5304 PZ3.S249Fai This is May Sarton's first novel with an American setting. Its story is that of a Harvard professor who commits suicide. It has been claimed that the story is based on the life and death of F. O. Matthiessen (q. v.). 2128. MARK SCHORER, 1908- Mark Schorer has written a number of real- istic novels and short stories which have been praised for their psychological insight as well as for their style and structure. In 1946 he published William Bla\e; the Politics of Vision, which is more an at- tempt to explain the poet's system of thought than it is a critical or historical work. 2129. A house too old, a novel. New York, Rey- nal & Hitchcock, 1935. 305 p. 35-15150 PZ3.S375H0 A novel about settlers in a Wisconsin town, with the story of the growth of the community over the subsequent century. 2130. The hermit place, a novel. New York, Random House, 1941. 313 p. 41-7658 PZ3.S375He A psychological novel about two sisters who were in love with a man who died a year before the time of the story. 213 1. The state of mind, thirty-two stories. Bos- ton, Houghton Mifflin, 1947. 34^ P* 47-2350 PZ 3 .S37 5 St 2132. The wars of love, a novel. New York, Mc- Graw-Hill, 1954. 174 p. 53-7878 PZ3.S375\Var A story of some children together at an upstate New York resort, and how that summer works out when they come together as adults in New York City. 2133. DELMORE SCHWARTZ, 1913- Delmore Schwartz is a New York poet whose work commonly reflects his native city and is usually philosophical in tenor. He has also pub- lished some short stories and dramatic work, as well as a number of distinguished critical reviews. His critical work has appeared in periodicals such as Partisan Review, of which he was editor, from 1943 to 1946, and subsequently associate editor. 2134. In dreams begin responsibilities. Norfolk, Conn., New Directions, 1938. 171 p. 39-8052 PS3537.C79I5 1938 Contents. — "In dreams begin responsibilities," a story. — Coriolanus and his mother: the dream of one performance, a narrative poem. — Poems of experi- ment and imitation. — Dr. Bergen's belief, a play in prose and verse. 2135. Shenandoah. Norfolk, Conn., New Direc- tions, 194 1. 28 p. (The Poet of the month [8]) 41-28270 PS3537.C79S5 1 94 1 Poetic drama. 2136. Genesis . . . [New York, New Directions] 1943+ 43-8710 PS3537.C79G4 A story, in prose and poetry, of the making of an American. 2137. The world is a wedding. [Short stories. Norfolk, Conn.] New Directions, 1948 196 p. 48-7957 PZ3.S405W0 Contents. — The world is a wedding. — New Year's Eve. — A bitter farce. — America! — The stat- ues. — The child is the meaning of this life. — In dreams begin responsibilities. 2138. Vaudeville for a princess, and other poems. [New York] New Directions, 1950. 106 p. 50-9969 PS3537.C79V3 2139. KARL JAY SHAPIRO, 1913- Although Karl Shapiro was a soldier when his first volumes appeared during the Second World War, he has developed into more than a war poet. His poetry usually deals with the implications of the poet's position, or evolves out ot his immediate environment. His relatively formal verse thus re- flects his life in America and in the Pacific. He edited Poetry: A Magazine of Verse from 1950 to 1955- 2140. Person, place and thing. [New York] Rcy- nal & Hitchcock, 1942. 88 p. 42-51003 PS3537.H27P4 170 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 2141. V-letter, and other poems. New York, Reynal & Hitchcock, 1944. 63 p. 44-6977 PS3537.H27V18 2142. Essay on rime. New York, Reynal & Hitch- cock, 1945. 72 p. 45-9654 PS3537.H27E8 Verse. 2143. Trial of a poet, and other poems. New York, Reynal & Hitchcock, 1947. 81 p. 47-11585 PS3537.H27T7 2144. Poems, 1940-1953. New York, Random House, 1953. 161 p. 53-6928 PS3537.H27A17 1953 A short selection from the author's earlier volumes, with a few new poems added. 2145. IRWIN SHAW, 1913- Shaw, who has written for films and radio, first attracted general public attention as a dramatist; among his plays are Bury the Dead (1936) and Sons and Soldiers (1944). Shortly after being ac- claimed as a dramatist, he emerged as a prominent short-story writer. Here, as in all his writings, a clarity of expression and a driving moral purpose were evident. Writing usually of Americans in general, and often of New Yorkers in particular, Shaw has almost always directly or indirectly pre- sented some social issue. 2146. The young lions. New York, Random House, 1948. 689 p. 48-8508 PZ3.S5357Y0 Starting in a Bavarian forest in 1938, this novel traces the story of three men and their part in World War II through 1945. 2147. Mixed company; collected short stories. [New York, Random House] 1950. 480 p. 50-10065 PZ3.S5357Mi 2148. The troubled air. New York, Random House, 1951. 418 p. 51-11045 PZ 3 .S5357Tr The story of an attempt to clear some people in the radio industry after they are subjected to unsub- stantiated charges of communism. This is a political novel dealing with the problem of communism in America in the late forties; the emphasis is on the then prevalent attitude. Since it is a book with a message, few have reacted to it on any purely es- thetic level, with the result that it has received mixed reviews. 2149. HARRY ALLEN SMITH, 1907- In loosely autobiographical narratives and novels H. Allen Smith offers his humorous com- mentary on American life and customs. Coming from the Midwest to New York City, Smith began his writing career as a journalist; much of his early work reflects interview assignments with unusual people. In time he settled in Mt. Kisco, a New York suburb which he uses as a point of departure for a number of his writings. 2150. 3 Smiths in the wind: Low man on a totem pole. Life in a putty \ni]e factory. Lost in the horse latitudes. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1946. 205, 218, 223 p. 46-7219 PN4874.S56A35 215 1. Lo, the former Egyptian! Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1947. 212 p. 47-11538 PN6161.S6574 Autobiographical reminiscences pertaining to his youth in that part of Illinois known as Egypt. 2152. Larks in the popcorn. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1948. 256 p. 48-9385 PN6161.S65734 An account of life in the New York suburbs. 2153. We went thataway. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1949. 256 p. 49-1 1513 PZ3.S648o3We An account of a trip through the West to report to Mt. Kisco on the "western menace." 2154. Mister Zip. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1952. 252 p. 52-5112 PZ3.S648o3Mk A satire, in novel form, on Hollywood westerns. 2155. The world, the flesh, and H. Allen Smith. Garden City, N. Y., Hanover House, 1954. 301 p. 54-89 2 3 PN4874.S56A38 Selections made largely from Smith's London Journal (1952) and Low Man on a Totem Pole (1941). 2156. JEAN STAFFORD, 1915- Jean Stafford is a New England novelist who has been much praised for her stylistic virtuosity as well as for psychological penetration. Her am- bitious stories are more than well-written plots, for they attempt to comment on life and life values and on the position of good and evil in the world. Much of her work derives in mood and setting from her native New England. LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 171 2157. Boston adventure. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1944. 496 p. 44-40176 PZ3.S7783B0 2158. The mountain lion. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1947. 231 p. 47-1963 PZ3.S7783M0 2159. The Catherine wheel, a novel. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1952. 281 p. 52-6161 PZ3.S7783Cat 2160. Children are bored on Sunday. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1953. 252 p. 52-13766 PZ3.S7783Ch Short stories. 2161. WALLACE EARLE STEGNER, 1909- Wallace Stegner regularly uses a setting in the Northwest and northern Midwest. In addition to his fiction, which began with short stories and his novelette Remembering Laughter (1937) a hout life on an Iowa farm, Stegner has written Mormon Country (1942), which is a history of the Mormons and, to a large extent, of Utah; One Nation (1945; with the editors of Loof(), a report on foreign population elements in the United States; and Be- yond the Hundredth Meridian: John Wesley Powell and the Second Opening of the West (1954), a dis- tinguished biographical-historical study. 2162. The Big Rock Candy mountain. New York, Duell, Sloan & Pearce, 1943. 515 p. 43-51281 PZ3.S8i8Bi Life of a wandering family in the far West, Alaska, and Canada. 2163. Second growth. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1947. 2 40 P- 47-4398 PZ3.S8i8Se A story with a small New Hampshire town setting, reflecting the conflict of views between the regular inhabitants and the summer residents, who were largely educators. 2164. The preacher and the slave. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1950. 403 p. 50-8708 PZ3.S8i8Pr A biographical novel about the last decade of the life of Joseph Hillstrom (1882-1914), a leader of thel.W.W. 2165. The women on the wall. [Short stories] Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1950. 277 p. 40-50344 PZ3.S818W0 2166. JESSE STUART, 1907- Stuart first achieved recognition with his poems in Man With a Bull-Tongue Plow (1934), which depicted life in his native Kentucky hills. This folk-tale, local-color aspect dominates his rustic, regional works, which are written in a language reflecting the local dialect. His direct relationship to this area is unsophisticatedly present in his auto- biographical works: Beyond Dar\ Hills (1938) and The Thread That Runs So True (1949), the latter covering his life through the time he left teaching to become a farmer so that he could afford to get married. It is not his nature to labor his work artistically, with the result that his plots are at times unconvincing, passing only as excuses for regional- istic prose emphasizing setting and character. While Stuart has been criticized for his excessive "cult of the primitive" and limited range, many enjoy his direct, down-to-earth stories. 2167. Head o' W-Hollow. New York, Dutton, 1936. 342 p. 36-8773 PZ3.S93o6He Short stories. 2168. Men of the mountains. New York, Dutton, 194 1. 349 p. 41-4022 PZ3.S93o6Men Short stories. 2169. Taps for Private Tussie. New York, Books, Inc., Distributed by E. P. Dutton, 1943. 303 p. illus. 43-17838 PZ3.S93o6Tap2 2170. Tales from the Plum Grove hills. New York, Dutton, 1946. 256 p. 46-7101 PZ3.S93o6Tal 2 1 71. Clearing in the sky, & other stories. New York, McGraw-Hill, 1950. 262 p. 50-10491 PZ3.S9306CI 2172. Kentucky is my land. [Poems] New York, Dutton, 1952. 95 p. 52-1 1461 PS3537.T92516K4 2173. The good spirit of Laurel Ridge. New York, McGraw-Hill, 1953. 263 p. 53-10630 PZ3.S9306G0 2174. WILLIAM STYRON, 1925- Styron is a young author who has assimi- lated the influences of stream-of-consciousncss novel- ists such as Faulkner and Joyce. His first novel dealt with the degeneracy of a Southern family. 2175. Lie down in darkness, a novel. Indianap- olis, Bobbs-Mcrrill, 195 1. 400 p. 51-12286 PZ4.S938L1 172 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 2176. PETER HILLSMAN TAYLOR, 1917- Taylor is a Tennessee-born author whose stories reflect life in the upper South. He has been praised for his prose style, in which he quietly and simply presents complex psychological situa- tions and character relationships and evokes the Southern setting. The continuing influence of the past in the present is a recurring factor in his work. 2177. A long Fourth, and other stories. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1948. 166 p. 48-1781 PZ3.T21767L0 2178. A woman of means. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1950. 160 p. 50—7597 PZ3.T21767W0 2179. The widows of Thornton. [Short stories] New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1954. 310 p. 53-7839 PZ3.T2i 7 6 7 Wi 2180. GORE VIDAL, 1925- Vidal is a skilled story-teller who in recent books has shown a tendency toward satire and irony. In one book, The City and the Pillar, he became almost a social tractarian, writing in a some- what journalistic style on the problem of homo- sexuality. 2181. Williwaw. New York, Dutton, 1946. 222 p. 46-4254 PZ 3 .V6668Wi An "obscure corner of the war" novel which shows the experiences of three days on a freighter in the Aleutian waters while a williwaw is in progress. 2182. In a yellow wood. New York, Dutton, 1947. 216 p. 47-1967 PZ3.V6668In A young veteran in a brokerage office roams through routine urban life confronted with the prob- lem of possible alternative ways of life, but decides against a change. 2183. The city and the pillar. New York, Dutton, 1948. 314 p. 47-12503 PZ3.V6668Ci 2184. The season of comfort. New York, Dutton, 1949. 253 p. 49-7028 PZ3.V6668Se A young artist reaches spiritual and social ma- turity against a (Washington and national) back- ground of a political family in the period between two world wars; the theme of the domineering mother is prominent. 2185. Dark green, bright red. New York, Dutton, 1950. 307 p. 50-9879 PZ3.V6668Dar A story of a Central American revolution, with an American for leading character. 2186. A search for the King, a 12th-century legend. New York, Dutton, 1950. 255 p. 49-50412 PZ3.V67Se Based on the story of Blondel de Nesle's search for Richard Coeur de Lion. 2187. The judgment of Paris. New York, Dut- ton, 1952. 375 p. 52-5296 PZ3.V6668JU A young American goes to Europe to find himself, and finds self-discovery in love for his solution. The characters belong mainly to the international set or, at least, the international wanderers. 2188. Messiah. New York, Dutton, 1954. 254 p. 54-5053 PZ3.V6668Me Somewhat in the tendency of science fiction, this is a story of the establishment, through modern ad- vertising techniques and media, of a new messiah. 2189. PETER ROBERT EDWIN VIERECK, 1916- Peter Viereck is a satiric lyric poet who strives, in poetry that tends to be formal, for clarity and a con- formity with what he considers the basic ethical implications of our civilization. He has also written several historico-philosophical works, such as Con- servatism Revisited: The Revolt Against Revolt, 181 5-1949 (1949) and Shame and Glory of the In- tellectuals (1953), which more directly express the views and values with which he concerns himself. 2190. Terror and decorum; poems, 1940-1948. New York, Scribner, 1948. nop. 48-8754 PS3543.I325T4 2 19 1. Strike through the mask! New lyrical poems. New York, Scribner, 1950. 70 p. 50-6348 PS3543.I325S8 "The essay in the appendix, 'The poet in the machine age,' appeared in the Journal of the his- tory of ideas, N. Y., 1949." 2192. The first morning, new poems. New York, Scribner, 1952. 120 p. 52-12815 PS3543.I325F5 2193. ROBERT PENN WARREN, 1905- Warren is distinguished both as a poet and as a novelist, with an increasing mastery of form and technique. His early poetry was marked by its intellectualism and the influence of the metaphys- ical poets; his later work shows an assimilation of influences and a tendency to greater simplicity, along with the use of narrative and regional themes. While his work is not regional in the narrow sense of the word, he does use Southern material, with an emphasis on his native State, Kentucky. 2194. Night rider. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1939. 460 p. 39-5848 PZ3.W 2 549Ni A novel of the tobacco war between growers and manufacturers in Kentucky in the early 1900's. 2195. At heaven's gate. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1943. 39 1 P- 43-13163 PZ 3 .W2549At A modern "horror" novel in which sympathy aroused by a Southern girl's suicide saves her un- scrupulous financier father. 2196. Selected poems, 1923-1943. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1944. 102 P- 44-3743 PS3545.A748S4 2197. All the king's men. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1946. 464 p. 46-6144 PZ3.W2549AI Reflecting to some extent the career of Huey Long in Louisiana, this is a story of a Southern dema- gogue who attains political control of his State. 2198. The circus in the attic, and other stories. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1947. 2 7^ p. 48-5123 PZ 3 .W2549Ci 2199. World enough and time, a romantic novel. New York, Random House, 1950. 512 p. 50-7242 PZ3.W2549W0 PS3545.A748W6 1950 Presenting a reconstruction of a 19th-century Kentucky murder case, the book mirrors the place and period of the story, as well as presenting some aspects of the author's search for the meaning of life and an assessment of man's values. 2200. Brother to dragons, a tale in verse and voices. [New York] Random House, 1953. 230 p. 53-5009 PS3545.A748B7 The story of an 181 1 Kentucky frontier murder of a slave by the two sons of a sister of Thomas Jefferson. 2201. Band of angels. New York, Random House, 1955. 375 p. 55-5814 PZ3.W 2 5 49 Ban A somewhat melodramatic novel of the Civil War era, slavery, and miscegenation. LITERATURE (1607-1955) / 173 2202. EUDORA WELTY, 1909- Eudora Welty has been acclaimed as one of the best modern American short-story writers, with frequent mention made of her sensitivity, subtlety, and technical skill. She is a Southern writer who • ■cpicts much the same locale as does Faulkner. Her range of tone is considerable: nostalgic, fanci- ful, grotesque, humorous, etc. However, each book tends to be dominated by one tone. Her style and descriptions are the important elements, for she offers relatively little plot. 2203. A curtain of green. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, Doran, 1941. 285 p. 41-52028 PZ3.W4696CU 2204. The robber bridgegroom. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, Doran, 1942. 185 p. 42-23596 PZ3.W4696R0 2205. The wide net, and other stories. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1943. 214 p. 44-1666 PZ3.W 4 696Wi 2206. Delta wedding, a novel. New York, Har- court, Brace, 1946. 247 p. 46-3217 PZ3.W 4 6 9 6De 2207. The golden apples. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1949. 244 p. 49-10054 PZ3.W4696G0 2208. The Ponder heart. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1954. 156 p. illus. 54-5248 PZ3.W4696P0 A novelette. 2209. The bride of the Innisfallen, and other stories. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1955. 20 7 P- 55-5248 PZ 3 .W46 9 6Br 2210. JESSAMYNWEST Jessamyn West is a novelist and short-story writer whose work ranges from realistic pictures of Indiana farm life through stories in the modern Gothic manner. She received notice also for her opera libretto A Mirror for the Sl(y (1948), which presents the life of John Audubon (q. v.). 221 1. The friendly persuasion. New York, Har- court, Brace, 1945. 214 p. .,:.'! l'Z.-.V."siu<,;lr Sketches of the life of Quakers in Indiana during the second half of the 19th century. 174 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 2212. The witch diggers. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1951. 441 p. 51-9108 PZj.W^ic^Wi A symbolic and somewhat Gothic novel depicting life on a poor farm in Southern Indiana in 1899. 2213. Cress Delahanty. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1953. 311 p. 53—5654 PZ3.W5i903Cr An adult's somewhat humorous view of the life of an adolescent girl on a California ranch. 2214. Love, death, and the ladies' drill team. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1955. 248 p. 55-10809 PZ3.W51903L0 Short stories. 2215. RICHARD PURDY WILBUR, 1921- Richard Wilbur's poetry is a leading example of the modern neo-classic formal verse that has be- come prominent in the work of the younger poets. Lyrical and precise in observation, with life imagi- natively perceived, some of his work is humorous, but normally far from the category of "light verse." 2216. The beautiful changes, and other poems. New York, Reynal & Hitchcock, 1947. 55 p. 47-11597 PS3545.I32165B4 2217. Ceremony, and other poems. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1950. 55 p. 50-10749 PS3545.I32165C4 2218. TENNESSEE WILLIAMS, 1914- The plays of Tennessee Williams (whose original name was Thomas Lanier Williams) fre- quendy draw on the Mississippi Delta region for setting and characters. With sympathy and under- standing he presents, in a poetic and sometimes symbolistic style, characters so weighed down by the past that their incorrect adaptation to current life leads them to frustration and breakup. 2219. The glass menagerie. New York, Random House, 1945. 124 p. 45-7913 PS3545.I5365G5 This work, which was successful as a play and in its motion-picture adaptation, is the story of the remnants of a Southern family with pretensions to gentility; the plot centers about the crippled daughter who lives in her dream world with a symbolic collection of fragile glass pieces, which stands in contrast with the family's St. Louis slum apartment. 2220. 27 wagons full of cotton, and other one-act plays. Norfolk, Conn., New Directions, 1946. 207 p. 46-2373 PS3545.I5365T9 The motion picture Baby Doll (1956) is based on a film script which Williams produced by rework- ing the story of the title play in this collection. A small part of the film's plot was also drawn from the one-act play, The Long Slay Cut Short (1946). The two source plays are included in the version of the screen play published by New Directions. 2221. A streetcar named Desire. New York, New Directions, 1947. 171 p. 48-5556 PS3545.I5365S8 This play, which was awarded a Pulitzer prize for drama, and which was widely acclaimed both as a play and then as a movie, presents against a New Orleans background the story of a neurotic, sexually frustrated woman, a descendant of a once prominent family, who is in conflict with the "vul- gar" society of the slums, and unable to resolve for herself the problems of modern life. 2222. One arm, and other stories. [New York] New Directions, 1948. 210 p. 49-1337 PS3545.I5365O5 1 Contents. — One arm. — The malediction. — The poet. — Chronicle of a demise. — Desire and the black masseur. — Portrait of a girl in glass. — The impor- tant thing. — The angel in the alcove. — The field of blue children. — The night of the iguana. — The yel- low bird. 2223. Summer and smoke. New York, New Di- rections, 1948. 130 p. 48-11697 PS3545.I5365S85 • Set in a small Mississippi town, this play presents the story of a young woman who is unable to re- solve satisfactorily the problems of her emotional { life. 2224. The Roman spring of Mrs. Stone. [New York] New Directions, 1950. 148 p. 50-9067 PZ3.W67655R0 This tautly wrought novelette is the story of a widowed actress who has retired to Rome, where she is confronted with the problem of trying to achieve a satisfactory love life. 2225. The rose tattoo. New York [New Direc- tions] 1951. 144 p. 51-11004 PS3545.I5365R6 1951 This play, which also had a successful screen adap- tation, is unusual among Williams' usually sombre works in that with a touch of humor it relates the story of a widow finding love in a Gulf-coast com- munity. LITERATURE (1607-1955) / 175 2226. Camino Real. [Norfolk, Conn.] New Direc- tions, 1953. 161 p. 53-12831 PS3545.I5365C3 This text is a version, revised for publication, of a symbolistic and surrealistic play which in its tech- nique was a new departure for Williams. 2227. Hard candy, a book of stories. [New York] New Directions, 1954. 220 p. 54-4797 PZ3.W67655Har 2228. Cat on a hot tin roof. [Play. New York] New Directions, 1955. 197 p. 55-3093 PS3545.I5365C37 This play, which received a Pulitzer prize for drama, is set on a Mississippi Delta plantation; its story is in large part that of a wife trying to re- establish sexual relations with her husband, who is suspected of being a homosexual. 2229. HERMAN WOUK, 19 15- The setting of Wouk's writings has been New York City, in which he was raised, and the Navy, in which he served during World War II. His first book, Aurora Dawn (1947), is a satirical novel about the New York business world. His next work, The City Boy (1948), was a best-selling novel about an urban childhood. After that he turned briefly to drama with The Traitor (1949), a play about an American Communist. His work since then has grown in complexity and bulk, so that it appears at infrequent intervals. Through all his writings he has remained in the realist tradition, presenting life as it may be seen. With the best-selling status and impressiveness of his recent work, and the reissuance of his earlier novels, some now regard him as one of the more promising of the younger novelists. 2230. The Caine mutiny, a novel of World War II. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1951. 494 P- 5 I- 9977 PZ3.W923Cai A novel about a Navy mutiny during World War II. It is a fictional incident in a historical setting, and it reflects Navy life of the period. The work was used as the source for a successful stage play and for a much praised movie. 2231. Marjorie Morningstar. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1955. 565 p. 5S-6485 PZ3.W923Mar A novel reflecting life in a Jewish family in New York City. 2232. RICHARD NATHANIEL WRIGHT, 1908- Richard Wright has been considered Amer- ica's foremost Negro novelist, although his most re- cent novel, The Outsider, was generally reviewed unfavorably. He was raised among lower-class Southern Negroes and later moved to Chicago; it is this background that is reflected in his stories, espe- cially in the autobiographical Blac\ Boy ( 1945). Al- though his work inclines to the melodramatic, it is stylistically in the tradition of realism. In the thir- ties Wright became interested in communism and some of his work exhibits an awareness of leftist doctrines and attitudes. 2233. Native son. New York, Harper, 1940. 359 P- 40-4862 PZ3.W9352Nat A somewhat melodramatic tale of the life and criminal acts of a Negro youth in the Chicago slums. 2234. Uncle Tom's children, five long stories. New York, Harper, [1940] xxx, 384 p. 40-29877 PZ3.W9352Un2 First published 1938 without the autobiographical introduction and without the fifth story. Contents. — The ethics of living Jim Crow; an autobiographical sketch. — 1. Big boy leaves home. — 2. Down by the riverside. — 3. Long black son. — 4. Fire and cloud. — 5. Bright and morning star. 2235. The outsider. New York, Harper, 1953. 405 p. 53-53 8 3 PZ3.W9352OU A melodramatic thesis novel with first a Chicago and then a New York setting. The story is that of a Negro whose mentality leads him to ruin through problems of alcohol, women, money, and communism. The book is meant to be a commen- tary on the emotional strains of life in our times. II Language ti? A. Dictionaries 2236-2241 B. Grammars and General Studies 2242-2252 C. Dialects, Regionalisms, and Foreign Languages in America 2253-2271 D. Miscellaneous 2272-2275 IT HAS frequently been said that there is no American language, but that each individual speaks his own language. To some extent this is true of any language, but that is more a problem for semantics (discussed under Philosophy, q. v.) than it is for linguistics. For there is obviously a basic language and a central core of usage. It is this central core of usage in the United States that is our main concern here, with some attention paid to aspects that are peripheral to it. At the same time there is no intention at this point to enter into the question of a separate Ameri- can language. It is simply noted that American English diverges from British English at a number of points, and to these differences attention is di- rected. As a result of this approach, some major works such as Otto Jespersen's A Modern English Grammar on Historical Principles; Completed . . . by Niels Haislund (Copenhagen, Munksgaard, 1949. 7 v.) have been omitted; for while they are highly useful for determining the language's his- torical background, they are mainly oriented to- wards British English. We have, however, con- sidered for inclusion general works which were oriented towards American English, or which spe- cifically studied the divergences that have developed between the two forms of the language. Since dialects have played a role in the develop- ment of the language, and since they are a part of the general language picture in this country, a few books on dialect have been selected for their com- prehensive coverage, or because they deal with major dialect groups. No attempt was made to cover all dialects and their variations; the compromise being the usual one of presenting representative tides. The same is largely true for the few books on foreign languages in America, which were selected to represent some of the historically more important language groups of the many that have played so large a part in the life and in the developing English of an amalgamating people. Since a certain amount of slang enters the more formal language with the passage of time, and since so much American literature has used slang in dialogue passages, a few guides to slang terms have been included. New information on the changing language, as well as much on aspects of its past development, may be obtained from periodicals such as Language, the Linguistic Society of America's journal, and in American Speech; a Quarterly of Linguistic Usage. ■ A. Dictionaries 2236. Craigie, Sir William A., and James H. Hul- bert, eds. A dictionary of American English on historical principles, compiled at the University 176 of Chicago. Chicago, University of Chicago Press [1938-44] 4 v. _ 39-8203 PE2835.C72 Paged continuously; bibliography: p. 2529-2552. This book attempts to present words that are either clearly or seemingly of American origin, as well as those more used in or associated with Amer- ica. The terminal date for admission was 1900, although some illustrations have been chosen from later writing; also, slang words were included only if of early origin or of special prominence. With these limitations, the dictionary is not one for the language written or spoken in America, but rather one for those elements which have originated or developed in America, adding to or modifying the English-language stock. A broader, though less de- tailed, coverage of the language may be found in works such as Webster's New International Dic- tionary of the English Language, 2d ed., unabridged (Springfield, Mass., Merriam, 1945. cxii, 3210 p.), which has developed out of the original efforts of Noah Webster, whose biography is included in the Education section of this bibliography. Another long-established American dictionary which covers the language on a very broad basis is Fun{ & Wag- nails New "Standard" Dictionary of the English Language . . . (New York, Funk & Wagnalls, 1952. xx, 2815 p.). 2237. Horwill, Herbert W. A dictionary of modern American usage. 2d ed. Oxford, Clarendon Press, 1944. xxxi, 360 p. A46-686 PE2835.H6 1946 First published in 1935, this work presents in a hctionary arrangement a discussion of American vord usage as it differs from traditional British isage. The work does not cover slang, and it is lot designed to serve as a complete dictionary of Americanisms." 238. Kenyon, John Samuel, and Thomas Albert Knott, eds. A pronouncing dictionary of American English. Springfield, Mass., Merriam 953- 484 P- 53-i4i6 PEii 37 .K37 A record of the colloquial speech forms of edu- ated Americans throughout the country; there is o attempt to provide for dialectal variations. The 'ork covers the words in common usage in Amer- a, with special attention given to proper names. Tie work differs from, and so supplements, other ictionaries such as Webster's New International dictionary, 2d ed., in that the latter records the pro- Jnciation of formal platform speech. The Kenyon id Knott book contains no definitions. Dr. Knott as general editor of the New International Dic- 431240— CO 13 LANGUAGE / 177 tionary, and Dr. Kenyon served as consulting editor in pronunciation. 2239. Mathews, Mitford M., ed. A dictionary of Americanisms on historical principles. Chi- cago, University of Chicago Press, 195 1. 2 v (xvi I9 i 6 P;) . 5I-I957 PE2835.D5 bibliography: p. 1913-1946. This work is devoted exclusively to words which either originated in America or took on a new mean- ing here. In this respect it is more limited than Craigies Dictionary of American English, above. However, within its limitations it is more complete, pardy in inclusiveness, but mainly because it is more up-to-date. A discussion of the history and relative merits of leading types of dictionaries of the lan- guage may be found in James Root Hulbert's Dic- tionaries, British and American (London, A. Deutsch, 1955. 107 p.). 2240. Thornton, Richard H. An American glos- sary, being an attempt to illustrate certain Americanisms upon historical principles. Philadel- phia, Lippincott, 1912. 2 v. 30-25356 PE2835.T6 1912a . ™ Volume III, edited by Louise Han- ley. Madison, Wis., American Dialect Society 1939- xiv, 452 p. {In Dialect notes . . . New Haven, Conn., 1931-39. v. 6, pt. 3-18) „. , 30-25356 PE28oi.D 5) v. 6 A biographical sketch of Richard Hopwood Thornton, LL. D., by the Reverend E. H. Clark": p. v-viii. The first two volumes of the glossary constitute an historically important contribution to the subject, although they have in large part been superseded by Craigie's and Mathews' volumes cited above. How- ever the third volume, which was published in parts in the periodical Dialect Notes, has not been super- seded, and it remains one of the most important reference works on the vocabulary of American dialects. 2241. Wentworth, Harold. American dialect dic- tionary. New York, Crowell, 1944. 747 p . . .. . 44-6209 PE2835.W4 inis is a dictionary which presents American local and regional terms, and those which verge on being colloquial. It supplies examples of early usage. 178 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES B. Grammars and General Studies 2242. Curme, George O. Parts of speech and acci- dence. Boston, Heath, 1935. 370 p. (A Grammar of the English language ... v. 2) 35-17513 PE1105.G7, v. 2 2243. Curme, George O. Syntax. Boston, Heath, 1931. 616 p. (A Grammar of the English language ... v. 3) 31-19900 PE1105.G7, v. 3 The two volumes of A Grammar of the English Language which have so far appeared approach the problem as that of one language; however, where- ever necessary the differences between American and British English are discussed in detail. The first volume, History of the English Language, Sounds and Spellings, Word-Formation, by Hans Kurath, has not yet appeared, although it is still listed in the publisher's 1956 catalog. 2244. Fries, Charles C. American English gram- mar; the grammatical structure of present- day American English with especial reference to social differences or class dialects. The report of an investigation financed by the National Council of Teachers of English and supported by the Modern Language Association and the Linguistic Society of America. New York, Appleton-Century, 1940. 313 p. (National Council of Teachers of English. English monographs, no. 10) 41-347 PE2811.F7 A report on the grammar of "standard" American English. The author recognizes that there may be a number of acceptable forms, rather than one "cor- rect" form. Most of the distinctions made in the book are between "standard" and "vulgar" Ameri- can English, with an attempt to record their frequency, extent, and divergencies. 2245. Galinsky, Hans. Die Sprache des Ameri- kaners; eine Einfuhrung in die Hauptunter- schiede zwischen amerikanischem und britischem Englisch der Gegenwart. Heidelberg, F. H. Kerle, 1951-52. 2 v. 5 2 737439 PE2813.G3 A detailed study and analysis of the American language as contrasted with British English. The emphasis is on the present-day situation, and not on the historical development, nor is it on dialectical variations. The first volume is divided into two sections on "Das Klangbild" and "Die Schreibung"; the second volume covers "Wortschatz und Wort- bildung" and "Syntax und Flexion." Both volumes contain an extensive selective bibliography. 2246. Krapp, George P. The English language in America. New York, Century, for the Modern Language Association of America, 1925. 2 v. 2 5 -I 9533 PE2808.K7 Bibliography: v. 2, p. 273-284. Krapp (1872-1934) was a professor of English at Columbia University, and a leading student of the language of America. The first volume of his major work in this field has seven essays on "The Mother Tongue," "Vocabulary," "Proper Names," "Literary Dialects," "Style," "American Spelling," and "American Dictionaries." The second volume is devoted to pronunciation. Another work by him on the latter aspect is The Pronunciation of Stand- ard English in America (New York, Oxford Uni- versity Press, American Branch, 1919. 235 p.). 2247. Mathews, Mitford M., ed. The beginnings of American English; essays and comments. Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1931. 181 p. 31-28142 PE2805.M3 A useful collection of material made up mainly of quotations from 18th- and early 19th-century writers on the English language in America. A word index is supplied. 2248. Mencken, Henry L. The American lan- guage; an inquiry into the development of English in the United States. 4th ed., cor., enl., and rewritten. New York, Knopf, 1936. 769 p. 36-27236 PE2808.M4 1936 "Proper names in America": p. 474-554. Supplement I — II . . . New York, Knopf, 1945-48. 2 v. PE2808.M4 1936 Suppl. Includes bibliographies. Mencken, who is included in the Literature sec- tion (q. v.), was a journalist rather than a linguist; nevertheless, he compiled one of the outstanding works on the history and nature of the American language. In addition to the Americana of "good" American English and place-names, he studied ex- tensively American slang and dialects. The work does not attempt to rival the dictionaries in the field (compiled well after the first edition of his work in 1919), but is largely in the form of dis- cursive text and essays. However, an extensive index in the main volume and its supplements does enable it to serve also as a lexicon of much linguis- tic esoterica. The supplements are aligned chapter by chapter with the main work. LANGUAGE / 1 79 2249. Myers, Louis M. Guide to American Eng- lish. New York, Prentice-Hall, 1955. 433 p. 55-8367 PEi 1 1 1 .M954 A grammar aimed at students, this work pre- sents American English without emphasizing Brit- ish differences or using traditional approaches and terminology which the author regards as obsolete. The interest is in written English, rather than in the spoken language. Parts of the book have been drawn from the author's earlier American English; a Twentieth-Century Guide (New York, Prentice- Hall, 1952. 237 p.). 2250. Pyles, Thomas. Words and ways of Amer- ican English. New York, Random House, 1952. 310 p. 52-5156 PE2808.P9 "The present book ... is an attempt to provide for the lay reader a brief yet adequate treatment of the English language as it has been and is spoken and written by Americans." — Preface. A general introductory book to the topic is Richard D. Mallery's Our American Language (Garden City, N. Y., Halcyon House, 1947. 276 p.). 2251. Robertson, Stuart. The development of modern English. 2d ed., rev. by Frederic G. Cassidy. New York, Prentice-Hall, 1954. 469 p. 53-1301 1 PE1075.R57 1954 A study of the history and nature of English, with the emphasis placed on picturing modern American English in its context within the English language as an entity. Individual chapters are fol- lowed by references for further reading. The origi- nal version of the work first appeared in 1934. 2252. Scheie de Vere, Maximilian. Americanisms; the English of the New World. New York, Scribner, 1872. 685 p. 10-26369 PE2835.S4 A work which in individual chapters studies special sources of Americanisms. There are chap- ters on the American Indian, immigrants, the West, politics, etc. The work is not meant to be ex- haustive, but rather to track down the unusual Americanisms that at the period were to be found in good American English. C. Dialects, Regionalisms, and Foreign Languages in America 2253. Adams, Ramon F. Western words; a dic- tionary of the range, cow camp and trail. Norman, University of Oklahoma Press, 1944. 82 p. 44-40294 PE3727.C6A4 The concern in this dictionary is with the erminology of the range country of the West, not vith pronunciation or local dialect variations. Bruce Grant's The Cowboy Encyclopedia (Chicago, ^and McNally, 1951. 160 p.) has a smaller, if •ccasionally different, selection of words; but it also >rovides fairly extensive sketch illustrations. 254. American Dialect Society. Publication. v. 1+ 1944+ Gainesville, Fla. I The Publications were preceded by a similar series, dialect notes, published by the Society from 1890 1939. Issues of the present series now appear ice a year; some representative titles from this ries follow: !255- Nixon, Phyllis J. A glossary of Virginia words. The secretary's report. 1946. 46 . (no. 5) 46-8431 PE3101.V8N5 256. Woodard, Clement M. A word-list from Virginia and North Carolina. 1946. 46 p. io. 6) 47-23449 PE3101.V8W6 "Words from A glossary of Virginia words [ by Phyllis J. Nixon] current in Maine, by B. J. Whit- ing": p. 44-46. 2257. Figh, Margaret Gillis. A word-list from "Bill Arp" [pseud.] and "Rufus Sanders" f pseud.] Comments on word-lists in PADS, by James Nathan Tidwell. A word-list from southern Kentucky, by A. P. Dal ton. The secretary's report. 1950. 27 p. (no. 13) 51-8421 PE2926.F5 2258. Bradley, Francis W. A word-list from South Carolina. Expressions from rural Florida, by Lucille Ayers and others. Minorca!) dialect words in St. Augustine, Florida, by Lillian Friedman. 1950. 81 p. (no. 14) 51-8422 PE2927.S6B7 2259. Maurer, David W. The argot of the race- track. 1951. 70 p. (no. 16) 52-8820 SF333.M34 2260. Reed, David W. Eastern dialed weirds in California. Supplementary list of South Carolina words and phrases, by F. W. Bradley. The secretary's report. 1954. 49 p. (no. 21) 54-3363 PE3101.C3R4 l80 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 2261. Ives, Sumner. The phonology of the Uncle Remus stories. 1954. 59 p. (no. 22) 55-99 PS1818.I85 2262. Maurer, David W. Whiz mob; a correla- tion of the technical argot of pickpockets, with their behavior pattern. 1955- *99 P- ( no - 24) 56-!443 PE3726.M3 2263. Atwood, E. Bagby. A survey of verb forms in the eastern United States. [Ann Arbor] University of Michigan Press, 1953. viii, 53 p. 31 maps. (Studies in American English, 2) 53-7458 PE1273.A89 A study, with map illustrations, of the distribu- tion along the Atlantic seaboard of American re- gional variants in verbal inflections and verb vocab- ulary. A leading result is the demonstration that the "vulgate" is not one, but many, and largely regional. 2264. Bendey, Harold W. A dictionary of Span- ish terms in English, with special reference to the American Southwest. New York, Columbia University Press, 1932. 243 p. (Columbia Univer- sity studies in English and comparative literature) 33-2210 PE1582.S7B4 1932a A study of the influence of Spanish on English, especially in the American Southwest, where the two languages early came into contact. More than half the book is devoted to a dictionary presentation of Spanish terms and phrases used in English; there is also an appendix of American proper names which have their source in Spanish. 2265. Broussard, James F. Louisiana Creole dia- lect. Baton Rouge, Louisiana State Uni- versity Press, 1942. 134 p. 43-52792 PM7854.L6B7 Contents. — Preface. — Phonetics. — Grammar. — Idioms.— Folklore: Proverbs and dit-ons. Medical prescriptions. Superstitions. Poetry. Tales.— La Fontaine's fables in translation.— Glossary.— Bibli- ography (p. 130-134)- A presentation of the dialect of French which started with the Negro slaves of white French own- ers. While fairly widely used in Louisiana, this is neither the Acadian French dialect found among many French groups in the state, nor is it the more urban French found among the descendants of the aristocracy. Both of these are much closer to the language as spoken in France. 2266. Buffington, Albert F., and Preston A. Barba. A Pennsylvania German grammar. Allen- town, Pa., Schlechter, 1954. 167 p. 54-24782 PF 5 934-B8 Pennsylvania German (also known as Pennsyl- vania Dutch) is a dialect of German that is rep- resented by several hundred thousand native speak- ers, most of whom live in Pennsylvania, although a scattering of others may be located in New Jersey, Delaware, Maryland, North Carolina, and else- where. A fairly complete early phonetic dictionary of the dialect's distinctive words may be found in A. R. Home's Pennsylvania German Manual, 3d ed. (Allentown, Pa., T. K. Home, 1905. 146 p.). Ed- win R. Danner's Pennsylvania Dutch Dictionary (York, Pa., Dispatch Pub. Co., 1951. 178 p.) ap- proaches the language through English. This dia- lect has accumulated a sizable literature. It is discussed in Earl F. Robacker's Pennsylvania Ger- man Literature: Changing Trends from 1683 to 1942 (Philadelphia, University of Pennsylvania Press, 1943. 217 p.), which includes an extensive bib- liography on p. 189-202. 2267. Haugen, Einar. The Norwegian language in America; a study in bilingual behavior. Philadelphia, University of Pennsylvania Press, 1953. 2 v. (xiv, 695 p.) maps, diagrs., tables. (Publications of the American Institute, University of Oslo in cooperation with the Department of American Civilization, Graduate School of Arts and Sciences, University of Pennsylvania) 53-1 1316 PD2615.H3 Contents.— v. 1. The bilingual community.— v. 2. The American dialects of Norwegian. The Norwegian immigrants settled predomi- nantly in Minnesota, North and South Dakota, Wis- consin, Montana, Iowa, Idaho, Illinois, Washington, and Oregon. The first volume of this work studies the historical and sociological aspects behind the, linguistic problems of the Norwegian-American, communities. The second volume studies the more purely linguistic problems, such as the inter-influ- ence of Norwegian and English. 2268. Kurath, Hans, ed. Linguistic atlas of New England, by Hans Kurath, director and editor [with the collaboration of] Miles L. Hanley, associate director; Bernard Bloch, assistant editor. Guy S. Lowman, Jr., principal field investigator, Marcus L. Hansen, historian . . . sponsored by the American Council of Learned Societies and assisted by universities and colleges in New England. Provi- dence, R. L, Brown University, 1939-43- 3 v - ir 6. double maps, and handbook: xii, 240 p. maps (Linguistic atlas of the United States and Canada) 39-32451 PE2845.L5KS The Handbook has also special t. p.: Handbook of the linguistic geography of New England, b) Hans Kurath, with the collaboration of Marcus L Hansen, Julia Bloch [and] Bernard Bloch. "Bibliography of linguistic geography": Hand- book, p. 54-61; "Bibliography of New England history": Handbook, p. 105-121. The six very large volumes of the main part of this work present a linguistic analysis of the New England area mainly through the medium of folded maps marked to indicate the different areas of usage of a given form. The smaller handbook, which appeared in a larger edition, to some ex- tent summarizes the material and presents an analysis of the historical background. The set was designed as the first part of a linguistic atlas of the United States and Canada, but no subsequent parts have yet appeared. 2269. Kurath, Hans. A word geography of the Eastern United States. [Ann Arbor] Uni- versity of Michigan Press, 1949. x, 88 p. 163 (i. e. 164) maps. (Studies in American English, 1) 49-50233 PE2970.E2K87 Based on material collected for a linguistic atlas for the Eastern States, begun in 1931 under the auspices of the American Council of Learned Societies. Considers the dissemination of localized words, and provides historical interpretation for such dis- LANGUAGE / l8l tribution, as well as for the development and sub- division of speech areas. The text is followed by diagrammatic maps illustrating the distribution of the words discussed and oudining the speech areas. 2270. Randolph, Vance, and George P. Wilson. Down in the holler; a gallery of Ozark folk speech. Norman, University of Oklahoma Press, J 953- 320 p. 53-548o PE2970.O9R3 Bibliography: p. 303-314. A study, based largely on many years of personal observation, of the Ozark dialect. In addition to a dictionary approach to unusual words and word usage, there are chapters on other matters, such as general pronunciation, old English words which have survived in the dialect, folk sayings, figures of speech, etc. 2271. Turner, Lorenzo Dow. Africanisms in the Gullah dialect. Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1949. 317 p. 49-10175 PM7875.G8T8 Bibliography: p. 293-299. A study of the Gullah dialect (which is spoken by Negroes of the South Carolina and Georgia coastal area) with emphasis on the African influence. D. Miscellaneous 2272. Berrey, Lester V., and Melvin Van den Bark. The American thesaurus of slang; a com- plete reference book of colloquial speech. 2d ed. New York, Crowell, 1953. xxxv, 1272 p. 52-10837 PE3729.A5B4 1953 The bulk of this work is arranged by subject, with a complete index provided at the end. A shorter work is Joseph A. Weingarten's An Ameri- can Dictionary of Slang and Colloquial Speech (New York, 1954. 390 p.), which arranges the words themselves alphabetically; the attempt was to include all general American slang and colloquial- isms, and to indicate the earliest known usage for any given meaning. A much larger work also on historical principles is Eric Partridge's A Dictionary of Slang and Unconventional English (New York, Macmillan, 195 1. 1230 p.); however, the emphasis m this work is upon Britishisms. 2273. Kenyon, John S. American pronunciation. 10th ed. Ann Arbor, Mich., Wahr Pub. Co., 1950. 265 p. 51-5688 PE1135JC4 1950 This book is designed primarily as an advanced textbook of the pronunciation of American English. 2274. Partridge, Eric. A dictionary of the under- world, British & American, being the vo- cabularies of crooks, criminals, racketeers, beggars and tramps, convicts, the commercial underworld, the drug traffic, the white slave traffic, spivs. New York, Macmillan, 1950. 804 p. 50-8598 PE3726.P3 Since this is a dictionary compiled on historical principles, and supplied with numerous examples and indications of period and milieu, there has been little attempt to be up to date. However, as the author points out, the conservatism of underworld slang leaves much of it still current. A less scholarly and non-historical work thai may be used for sup- plementary purposes is the Dictionary of American Underworld Lingo (New York, Twayne Publishers, 1950. 327 p.), edited by Hyman E. Goldin, Frank O'Leary, and Morris Lipsius; this work was com- piled in prisons by prisoners and reflects the current situation, but without indication of either tin on gin or the evolution of the terms. A similar work 1 82 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES by an amateur linguist is Criminal Slang; the Ver- Michigan Press, 1945. 200 p. (University of Michi- nacular of the Underworld Lingo (Boston, Chris- gan publications. Linguistics, v. 1) topher Pub. House, 1949. 292 p.), by Vincent }. A45-4529 P25.M47, v. 1 Monteleone, who compiled it through his experi- Bibliography: p. 191-200. ences as a law enforcement officer. "This present study is ... a statement of the structure of the English intonation system as such, 2275. Pike, Kenneth L. The intonation of Ameri- in relation to the structural systems of stress, pause can English. Ann Arbor, University of and rhythm . . ." — Preface. Ill Literary History and Criticism A. Anthologies and Series 2276-2370 B. History and Criticism 2371-2550 C. Periodicals 2551-2577 THIS section seeks to provide material for an approach to, and a clarification of, many views of American literature: as a general field, and as a field for more specialized study in terms of genre, period, area, sociological implications, historical background, etc. It also provides for the study of criticism as a field in itself, and it opens up some paths of literature not explored within the Literature section (such as the detective story), and it presents, through prominent placing in critical works and in series, authors not included elsewhere. Thus this section not only seeks to serve for the analysis and clarification of literary materials presented elsewhere, but to lead to materials not otherwise presented. An alphabetic arrangement has been adopted in each subsection in preference to a subject arrange- ment for several reasons. One is that the subject matter of many of the works listed is so various as to justify inclusion of each particular work under any one of several topics. Another is that a number of the literary critics and historians are of interest in their own right, so that it was deemed unadvisable to scatter their works on a subject basis. Not only would the placing of a book in one of several pos- sible subject subdivisions be disputable, but on any- level the tides so assembled would be incomplete, for much of the material on the same subject is else- where in the bibliography: e. g., all works of literary history and criticism, by writers having author en- tries under Literature, have been discussed along with the other works by those authors. This means that much important historical and critical work (by Blackmur, Eliot, Poe, Pound, Tate, etc.) is not to be found here, but under Literature. Also, much material on drama is to be found under Entertain- ment. Accordingly, the index must be rather ex- tensively used to locate all relevant items. Because of the large mass of material suitable for consideration for inclusion in this section, many works have had to be excluded by arbitrary limita- tions. Except in the case of works in a series, which as a whole might be regarded as general studies or anthologies, no work has been included here which deals with a single author. Highly specialized studies along other lines have also been excluded. For the rest, works were excluded if they were seriously out of date or if they too closely over- lapped the material of other volumes; a few excep- tions were made for works important in the history of criticism or as examples of literature in their own right. Most cases of special pleading, such as Cal- verton's Marxist approach to literature, have also been eliminated. Much of the excluded material may readily be identified through the bibliography volume of the Spiller, Thorp, Johnson, and Canby Literary History of the United States, which is listed below. This listing of anthologies and series has been highly selective, except for the rather liberal repre- sentation given to textbook anthologies designed for use on the college level. If justification is sought for this exception, it may be found in the fact that these general anthologies of American literature present on the whole a uniformly high quality of editorial apparatus together with selec- tions carefully chosen for the purpose at hand. It may be noted further that they present all too fre- quently the most available text, in part or in whole, of works listed individually in the literature section. An obvious additional factor is that they arc excel- lent introductions to a large field. The main limit.t- 183 184 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES tions imposed on selection of such anthologies is that no out-of-print works, however excellent, have been included. Since the entire field of literary history and criti- cism, along with literature itself, is constantly and rapidly expanding, and since so much in both cate- gories is often long available only in periodicals, there has been included a group of periodicals which are important for their role in the propagation of serious literature, literary history, and criticism. A. Anthologies and Series 2276. American literature: a period anthology. Oscar-Cargill, general editor. [Rev. ed.] New York, Macmillan, 1949. 4 v. 49-48760 PS504.A62 Contents. — [v. 1.] The roots of national culture, American literature to 1830, edited by Robert E. Spiller and Harold W. Blodgett (49-9906). — [v. 2] The romantic triumph; American literature from 1830 to i860, edited by Tremaine McDowell (49- 11990). — [v. 3] The rise of realism; American literature from i860 to 1900, edited by Louis Wann (49-4119). — [v. 4] Contemporary trends; Amer- ican literature since 1900, edited by John H. Nelson and Oscar Cargill (49-11262). Edited by scholars in American literature, these generous selections illuminate the life and thought of the country as expressed in its literature. Critical comments concerning authors and bibliographical notes also are supplied. 2277. American men of letters. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1881-1909. 22 v. This series, issued under the general editorship of Charles Dudley Warner (q. v.), comprises bio- graphical and critical studies of a selected group of American writers, written by leading critics. Authors represented in this series who are discussed at length elsewhere in this bibliography are Bryant, Whittier, Holmes, J. R. Lowell, Aldrich, Longfel- low, Emerson, Cooper, Franklin, Lanier, Prescott, Whitman, Thoreau, N. Webster, N. P. Willis, Simms, Irving, and Poe (qq. v.). Other books in the series are: 2278. Cary, Edward. George William Curtis. 1894. 343 p. 1-205 PS1493.C3 Curtis (1824-1892) was in his own day one of the most influential and esteemed of American authors. As a young man he spent some time at Brook Farm, and was closely associated with members of the Concord group. He first attained public notice with several Near East travel books. These were followed by Lotus Eating; a Summer P>oo\ (New York, Harper, 1852. 206 p.), a collection of articles on various resorts, mostly American. Then came his famous fictional works: Potiphar Papers (New York, Putnam, 1853. 2 5 I P-) an( ^ ^ rue an ^ I (New York, Dix, Edwards, 1856. 214 p.); these are largely periodical essays with a vague story thread. Trumps (New York, Harper, 1861. 502 p.) is a novel of Washington politics and New York social life. With these the first main phase of his literary career came to an end. In 1854 he began to write the essays for the Easy Chair editor's section of Harper's Magazine; these increasingly occupied his time until his death in 1892. In his editorial work he became more concerned with political and social affairs, and his editorial essays give a valuable picture of American life at that period; a large selection of them was published in From the Easy Chair (New York, Harper, 1892-94. 3 v.). A recent study of Curtis is Gordon Milne's George William Curtis & the Genteel Tradition (Bloomington, Indiana Uni- versity Press, 1956. 294 p.). 2279. Frothingham, Octavius Brooks. George Ripley. 1882. 321 p. 7-8 PS2713.F6 Ripley (1802-1880), a practicing Unitarian min- ister from 1826 to 1 84 1, was a prominent religious writer and editor of periodicals and a number of influential foreign books, in which capacities he had an important influence on the Transcendentalist movement, of which he was a leader. He helped found The Dial (q. v.) and to organize Brook Farm (q. v.). His biographer, Frothingham (1822- 1895), was also a Unitarian minister and a Tran- scendentalist. Among his other books are Theo- dore Parser (Boston, Osgood, 1874. 588 p.), a leading abolitionist, Unitarian clergyman, and Transcendentalist; a history of Transcendentalism in New England (q. v.); a life of the philanthropist, statesman, abolitionist, reformer, Gerrit Smith (New York, Putnam, 1878. 381 p.); a Memoir of William Henry Channing (New York, Houghton Mifflin, 1886. 491 p.), a Unitarian clergyman, Transcendentalist, and editor, and the nephew of W. E. Channing (q. v.); and the autobiographical Recollections and Impressions, 1822-1890 (New York, Putnam, 1891. 305 p.). LITERARY HISTORY AND CRITICISM / 185 2280. Higginson, Thomas Wentworth. Margaret Fuller Ossoli. 1884. 323 p. 4-17996 PS2506.H5 Margaret Fuller was a leader in the Trans- cendentalist movement; the literature section of this bibliography contains a discussion of her work. Higginson, her biographer, was one of the most esteemed men of letters of his day. Autobiographi- cal works such as Old Cambridge (New York, Macmillan, 1899. 203 p.) and Part of a Man's Life (Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1905. 311 p.) con- stitute a valuable source for studying prominent contemporaries, especially those of the literary world and the Transcendentalist movement. Valuable both as literature and as a historical record is Army Life in a Blac\ Regiment (Boston, Fields, Osgood, 1870. 296 p.), which recounts his experiences dur- ing the Civil War as the leader of the first Negro unit in the Army. Higginson also wrote biog- raphies of Longfellow and Whittier, and a series of biographical sketches in Contemporaries (Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1899. 379 p.), which discusses people such as Emerson, A. B. Alcott, T. Parker, Whittier, Whitman, Lanier, L. M. Child, John Holmes, Thaddeus W. Harris, W. L. Garrison, Wendell Phillips, C. Sumner, and U. S. Grant. 2281. Sedgwick, Henry Dwight. Francis Park- man. 1904. 345 p. 4-13318 E175.5P24 Parkman (1823-1893) is one of America's lead- ing 19th-century historians who also attained a posi- tion in literature; his works are discussed in the Gen- eral History section of this bibliography. A recent volume of selections for the general reader is The Parkman Reader (Boston, Little, Brown, 1955. 533 p.). His biographer, Sedgwick (b. 1861), dis- tinguished himself in this literary form, but mosdy on non-American subjects such as in his Dante (1918), Marcus Aurelius (1921), Ignatius Loyola (1923), Henry of Navarre (1930), Marie Recamier (1940), Horace (1947), and others; his autobiog- raphy, Memoirs of an Epicurean, appeared in 1942. 2282. Smyth, Albert H. Bayard Taylor. 1896. 320 p. 4-17191 PS2993.S5 1896 Taylor ( 1825-1878) was one of the foremost au- thors in his generation. He achieved a large part of his initial fame through his travel books, of which the most famous is probably Eldorado (q. v.). Most of his travel writings were about foreign lands ' (Asia, Africa, and Europe). Almost all his work ' was exotic, and at the same time endowed with the "polish" that was so essential an ingredient for the successful, refined literary production of the 1 period. This was also true of his poetry, which ; advanced his purely literary reputation, although he is now usually classed as merely a good minor poet 4.:i-jni en it with the ambiguously kind title of "laureate of the gilded age." His posthumous Poetical Worlds ( Bos- ton, Houghton, Osgood, 1880. 341 p.) remained in print well into the 20th century. He was also a minor dramatist of some contemporary note; his Dramatic Worlds (Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1880. 345 p.) includes "The Prophet," "The Masque of the Gods," and "Prince Deukalion." Taylor also wrote a number of fictional works. His first novel was Hannah Thurston: A Story of American Life (New York, Putnam, 1863. 464 p.), which utilized a conventional love story plot as a framework for pic- turing American life and opinions in upstate New York. John Godfrey's Fortunes (New York, Put- nam, 1864. 511 p.) pictured literary activities in New York. Both The Story of Kennett (New York, Putnam; Hurd and Houghton, 1866. 418 p.) and Joseph and His Friend (New York, Putnam, 1870. 361 p.) portrayed rural life in Pennsylvania. How- ever, it was at the end of his life that Taylor under- took the work that brought him a degree of lasting fame; this was his translation of Goethe's Faust (Boston, Fields, Osgood, 1870-71. 2 v.), which has since gone through innumerable editions, and is still in print in several standard collections. Apart from this, his interest and importance nowadays are largely historical. 2283. The American men of letters series. New York, Sloane, 1948 + Second series issued under this title; in general designed to carry on in the contemporary period bio- graphical and critical studies of authors not covered by Houghton Mifflin's earlier series (v. supra) of the same name. Since all the authors so far in- cluded in this new series are presented in the Litera- ture section of the bibliography, reference to the most recent volumes is made there under the names of the individual authors treated. Earlier volumes include: 2284. Arvin, Newton. Herman Melville. 1950. 316 p. 50-7584 PS2386.A7 1950 2285. Beiryman, John. Stephen Crane. 1950. 347 p. 50-1 iH/q PS1499.C85Z56 2286. Grossman, James. James Fenimore Cooper. 1949. 286 p. 49-50106 PS1431.G77 1949 2287. Krutch, Joseph Wood. Henry David Tho- rcau. 194S. 298 p. 4S-S4K} PS3053.K7 2288. Miller, Perry. Jonathan Edwards. }.)S p. 49-50164 BX7260.I JM5 1949 1 86 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 2289. Neff, Emery Edward. Edwin Arlington Robinson. 1948. 286 p. 48-8640 PS3535.O25Z74 2290. American writers series. New York, Amer- ican Book Co., 1934 + The American writers series provides in each vol- ume a representative selection from the writings of some author or group; in addition there is regularly an extensive and scholarly introduction, a chrono- logical table, and an annotated bibliography. The series, most of whose parts have been kept in print, has appeared under the general editorship of Harry H. Clark. Authors represented in the series include Emerson, Hawthorne, Irving, Longfellow, Thoreau, Whitman, Bryant, Jonathan Edwards, Mark Twain, Poe, Cooper, Franklin, Melville, Holmes, Parkman, Harte, Henry James, Paine, J. R. Lowell, and Howells (qq. v.). Many of the volumes in this series have been cited elsewhere in this bibliography under the individual authors. Other volumes are: 2291. Alexander Hamilton and Thomas Jefferson; representative selections, with introd., bibli- ography, and notes by Frederick G. Prescott. 1934. lxxxi, 422 p. 34-21830 E302.H257 Both Hamilton and Jefferson were prominent leaders in the early years of the Republic, and they both possessed a writing ability and cogency of thought which place their documents among the more important literary works of the period. Both these men are treated extensively under the General History section of this bibliography; Jefferson is also included in the section on the literature of the Revo- lutionary and Federal periods. This selection from the writings of the two men assumes that the reader has ready access to one of the many editions of The Federalist (q. v.). 2292. Southern poets; representative selections, with introd., bibliography, and notes by Edd Winfield Parks. 1936. cxlviii, 419 p. 36-7131 PS551.P27 A companion volume to the Southern Prose Writers below, this work has a wider range in that it also includes work readily available elsewhere. The object of the work is "to present the best poems by Southerners . . . regardless of subject." 2293. John Lothrop Motley; representative se- lections, with introd., bibliography, and notes by Chester Penn Higby and B. T. Schantz. 1939. clxi, 482 p. 40-1040 PS2435.A4H5 1939 Motley (1814-1877) is one of those historians whose work has achieved a position in belles-lettres. His three major works are The Rise of the Dutch Republic (1856); History of the United Nether- lands, from the Death of William the Silent, to the Twelve Years' Truce, 1609 (1860-67); an ^ The Life and Death of John Barneveld (1874). He also wrote two novels: the autobiographical Morton's Hope; or, The Memoirs of a Provincial (1839), and Merry-Mount: A Romance of the Massachusetts Colony (1849). 2294. William Hickling Prescott; representative selections, with introd., bibliography, and notes by William Charvat and Michael Kraus. 1943. cxlii, 466 p. 43-1590 PS2656.A4 1943 . Prescott (1796-1859) is another of America's "literary" historians. His masterpiece is History of the Conquest of Mexico (1843). That and the History of the Conquest of Peru ( 1847) are his most frequently reprinted works. His other main his- tories are History of Ferdinand and Isabella (1838) and History of the Reign of Philip the Second ( 1855—58), of which the latter work was left in- complete at the time of his death. A 22-volume edition of his works (including the standard biog- raphy by Ticknor) was published in Philadelphia by Lippincott in 1904. In addition to his historical work, Prescott also had a considerable interest in literature, as may be seen in his Biographical and Critical Miscellanies (1845) which, except for the opening biographical study of Charles Brockton Brown (q. v.), was a collection of articles which first appeared in the North American Review. Some of these articles, as well as others which Pres- cott published only in periodicals, are included in the present selection, giving the volume the added merit of showing him as a literary critic as well as a historian. It is true that Prescott's subject matter is largely foreign, but, as stated on p. cxxviii of the introduction to this work, "... a true evaluation of American culture of the past must embrace writ- ers like Prescott who, in getting out of their age, carried American ideals and traditions with them. His work adds to the mounting evidence that the main line of American thought has been anything but narrowly nationalistic . . ." 2295. Minor Knickerbockers; representative selec- tions, with introd., bibliography, and notes, by Kendall B. Taft. 1947. cxlviii, 410 p. 47-2234 PS549.N5T2 "Selected bibliography": p. cxi-cxlviii. "Knickerbockers" is a term loosely applied to a group of early 19th-century New York City writers. The name came from Washington Irving's Diedrich Knickerbocker's History of New Yoi\ (q. v.), and Irving himself is usually regarded as the leader of this cosmopolitan group. The Knickerbockers gained temporary dominance of the nation's litera- LITERARY HISTORY AND CRITICISM / 187 ture, and in doing so became increasingly nationalis- tic. Authors represented in the present selection include James Kirke Paulding, Samuel Woodworth, Fitz-Greene Halleck, John Howard Payne, Joseph Rodman Drake, Robert Charles Sands, William Leggett, George Pope Morris, William Cox, Nathaniel Willis, Charles Fenno Hoffman, Theodore Sedgwick Fay, Lewis Gaylord Clark, Park Benjamin, and Cornelius Matthews; a number of these are discussed elsewhere in the bibliography, especially in the Literature section for this period. 2296. Southern prose writers; representative selec- tions, with introd., bibliography, and notes by Gregory Paine. 1947. cxiv, 392 p. 47-679 PS551.P23 "The purpose . . . has been to make available to students of American literature southern literary materials not readily available in convenient form elsewhere and to present these materials in units suf- ficiendy large to be genuinely representative of the authors chosen." — Preface. The authors included are: William Byrd, Jefferson, W. Wirt, John Taylor, Calhoun, H. S. Legare, J. P. Kennedy, J. G. Bald- win, Longstreet, Crockett, Simms, J. E. Cooke, G. W. Cable, G. E. King, M. N. Murfree, J. C. Harris, S. Bonner, Lanier, T. N. Page, W. H. Page, J. L. Allen, W. S. Porter, and Woodrow Wilson. Most of these authors are represented more fully elsewhere in this bibliography. 2297. America's lost plays. Princeton, Princeton University Press, 1940-42. 20 v. PS623.A1A6 A series presenting generally forgotten and un- available plays which were once popular, and which remain an integral part of the historical picture of the development of the American drama. Almost all of them date from the 19th century. A few of the authors represented have been included in the Literature section of the bibliography. 2298. Vol. 1. Forbidden fruit & other plays, by Dion Boucicault. 1940. viii, 313 p. 40-31677 PR4161.B2A13 Contents. — Forbidden fruit. — Louis XI. — Dot. — Flying scud. — Mercy Dodd. — Robert Emmet. 2299. Vol. 2. False shame and Thirty years, two plays by William Dunlap. 1940. xiv, 106 p. 40-31678 PS1560.F2 1940 Translation and adaptation of Falsche Scham by August von Kotzebue and Trente ans, ou La vie d'un joueur, by Victor Ducange and Prosper Goubaux. 2300. Vol. 3. Glaucus, & other plays, by George Henry Boker. xiv, 228 p. 1940. 40-32028 PS1105.G6 Contents. — The world a mask. — The bank- rupt. — Glaucus. 2301. Vol. 4. Davy Crockett, & other plays, by Leonard Grover, Frank Murdock [!] Lester Wallack, G. H. Jessop, J. J. McCloskey. 1940. xxv, 231 p. 40-35497 PS625.G6 Contents. — Rosedale; or, The rifle ball, by Lester Wallack. — Across the continent; or, Scenes from New York life and the Pacific railroad, by J. J. Mc- Closkey. — Davy Crockett; or, Be sure you're right, then go ahead, by Frank Murdock [!] — Sam'l of Posen; or, The commercial drummer, by G. H. Jessop. — Our boarding house, by Leonard Grover. 2302. Vol. 5. Trial without jury, & other plays, by John Howard Payne. 1940. xvii, 264 p. 40-32715 PS2530.A5H5 Contents. — Trial without jury; or, The magpie and the maid. — Mount Savage. — The boarding schools; or, Life among the little folks. — The two sons-in-law. — Mazeppa; or, The wild horse of Tar- tary. — The Spanish husband; or, First and last love. 2303. Vol. 6. The last duel in Spain, & other plays by John Howard Payne. 1940. 265 p. 4°-35574 PS2530.A5H46 Contents. — The last duel in Spain. — Woman's revenge. — The Italian bride. — Romulus, the shep- herd king. — The black man; or, The spleen. 2304. Vol. 7. The early plays of James A. Heme, with act IV of Griffith Davenport. 1940. x, 160 p. 41-3201 PS1919.H75A1 5 Contents. — Introduction. — Within an inch of his life. — "The minute men" of 1774-1775. — Drifting apart. — The Reverend Griffith Davenport. — Bib- liography (p. [161]). 2305. Vol. 8. The great diamond robbery, & other recent melodramas, by Edward M. Alfriend & A. C. Wheeler, Clarence Bennett [and others] . . . 1940. xv, 255 p. 41-3202 PS625.L4 Contents. — A royal slave, by Clarence Bennett. — The great diamond robbery, by Edward M. Altriend and A. C. Wheeler. — From rags to riches, by Charles A. Taylor. — No mother to guide her, by Lillian Mortimer. — Billy the kid, by Walter Woods. 2306. Vol. 9. Five plays by Charles H. Hoyt. 194 r. xv, 240 p. 41-^203 PS2039.H47 Contents. — A bunch of keys. — A midnight bell. — A trip to Chinatown. — A temperance town. — A milk white flag. l88 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 2307. Vol. 10. The banker's daughter, & other plays, by Bronson Howard. 1941. xiv, 306 p. 41-6275 PS2014.H12B3 1941 Contents. — Bronson Crocker Howard. — Survey of Howard's plays. — Hurricanes. — Old love let- ters. — The banker's daughter. — Baron Rudolph. — Knave and queen. — One of our girls. — Bibliography (p. 299-306). 2308. Vol. n. An arrant knave, & other plays, by Steele MacKaye. 1941. xvii, 234 p. 41-10637 PS2359.M42A8 1941 Contents. — Rose Michel. — Won at last. — In spite of all. — An arrant knave. 2309. Vol. 12. The cowled lover, & other plays, by Robert Montgomery Bird. 1941. x, 221 p. 41-10638 PS1099.B5C6 1941 Contents. — The cowled lover. — Caridorf ; or, The avenger. — News of the night; or A trip to Niag- ara. — 'Twas all for the best; or, 'Tis all a notion. 2310. Vol. 13. The sentinels, & other plays, by Richard Penn Smith. 1941. x, 171 p. 41-10639 PS2869.S7S4 1941 Contents. — -Checklist of the plays of Richard Penn Smith (p. [ix]-x). — The sentinels; or, The two sergeants. — The bombardment of Algiers. — William Penn. — Shakespeare in love. — A wife at a venture. — The last man; or, the cock of the village. 2311. Vol. 14. Metamora, & other plays, by John Augustus Stone [and others] 1941. vi, 399 p. 41-18466 PS632.P3 Contents. — Metamora; or, The last of the Wam- panoags, by }. A. Stone. — Tancred, king of Sicily; or, The archives of Palermo, by J. A. Stone. — The spy, a tale of the neutral ground, by C. B. Clinch. — The batde of Stillwater; or, The maniac, by H. J. Conway (?) — The usurper; or, Americans in Trip- oli, by J. S. Jones. — The crock of gold; or, The toiler's trials, by S. S. Steele. — Job and his children, by J. M. Field. — Signor Marc, by J. H. Wilkins. — The duke's motto; or, I am here! By John Brougham. 2312. Vol. 15. Four plays by Royall Tyler. 1941. viii, 120 p. 41-28105 PS855.T7A13 Contents. — The island of Barrataria. — The origin of the feast of Purim; or, The destinies of Haman & Mordecai. — Joseph and his brethren. — The judgment of Solomon. 2313. Vol. 16. Monte Cristo, by Charles Fechter, as played by James O'Neill, & other plays by Julia Ward Howe, George C. Hazelton, Langdon Mitchell [and] William C.DeMille. 1941. 360 p. 41-24720 PS625.R8 Contents. — Monte Cristo, by Charles Fechter. — Hippolytus, by J. W. Howe — Mistress Nell, by G. C. Hazelton. — Becky Sharp, by Langdon Mitchell. — The Warrens of Virginia, by W. C. De Mille. 2314. Vol. 17. The plays of Henry C. De Mille, written in collaboration with David Belasco. 1941+ xxv, 342 p. 41-24493 PS1534.D2A12 Contents. — Introductory essay. — A complete list of the plays by H. C. De Mille (1 p. following p. xxv). — The main line, by H. C. De Mille and Charles Barnard. — The wife, by David Belasco and H. C. De Mille.— Lord Chumley, by H. C. De Mille and David Belasco. — The charity ball, by David Belasco and H. C. De Mille. — Men and women, by H. C. De Mille and David Belasco. 2315. Vol. 18. The heart of Maryland, & other plays, by David Belasco. 194 1. xii, 319 p. 41-28106 PS1085.B23H4 1941 Contents. — La Belle Russe. — The stranglers of Paris. — The girl I left behind me, by David Belasco and Franklin Fyles. — The heart of Maryland. — Naughty Anthony. 2316. Vol. 19. The white slave, & other plays, by Bartley Campbell. 1941. lxxxi, 248 p. 42-4434 PS1252.C25A19 1941 Contents. — Biographical sketch. — Alphabetical list of the plays of Bardey Campbell (p. [xv]- lxxxi). — The Virginian. — My partner. — The galley slave. — Fairfax. — The white slave. 2317. Vol. 20. Man and wife, & other plays, by Augustin Daly. 1942. xxi, 407 p. 42-15353 PS1499.D85M35 1942 Contents. — List of Daly's plays (p. [xi]-xxi). — Man and wife. — Divorce. — The big bonanza. — Pique. — Needles and pins. 2318. Anthology of best original short-shorts. 1953+ Ocean City, N. J., Oberfirst Publi- cations, 1954+ annual. Oberfirst's short-short fiction library) 54-33676 PZ1.A63 Editor: 1954+ R. Oberfirst. The "short-short" is a refinement of the short story, and portrays a single action in one to five pages. Usually it poses a surprise or twist ending, in the tradition of O. Henry (q. v.). The 1953 volume above is not the first collection by Oberfirst, but it is apparently the first of a series, of which three have so far appeared. LITERARY HISTORY AND CRITICISM / 189 2319. Badger, Kingsbury M. American literature for colleges. Harrisburg, Pa., Stackpole Co. [1952-54] 2 v. 52-2996 PS507.B32 A college textbook anthology of American litera- ture which is meant to trace the development of the American heritage. The result is a chronological development in terms of subject matter (pre-colo- nials, colonials, early nationalists, etc.), but not of material presented. In each section, the selections include not only work by people taking part in the period, movement, and activities discussed, but also subsequent people who wrote about it. The result also includes a far different representation of authors than is usual: the Amerindians receive considerable attention, and so do non-English colonists; also, many nonfiction authors infrequendy regarded as part of "Literature" have been included, and, as an aspect of this, the usual authors included in literary anthologies have tended to have more than a usual proportion of space given over to their non-fictional writings. The second volume carries the work through the late 19th century and "Romanticism, Realism, and the Frontier." 2320. Beatty, Richmond Croom, Floyd C. Wat- kins, and Thomas Daniel Young, eds. The literature of the South. Randall Stewart, general editor. Chicago, Scott, Foresman, 1952. 1106 p. 52-2548 PS261.B43 An anthology reflecting the Southern experience in its many aspects through its more literary writers. The contemporary flourishing of belles-lettres in the South is reflected in some 40 percent of the book being devoted to the 20th century. 2321. Benet, William Rose, and Norman Holmes Pearson, eds. The Oxford anthology of American literature. New York, Oxford University Press, 1938. xxx, 1705 p. 38-34361 PS507.O9 Unlike most anthologies of American literature, this work is not aimed primarily at the textbook market; also, it approaches the selecting problem as a purely literary one. While the editors claim no attempt to be all-inclusive, some 150 writers are represented by selections. Because of the emphasis on literary merit, major writers regularly receive far more space than do minor authors. The relative importance of modern literature is recognized by devoting about half the volume to this period. Commentary is not provided with the selections, but biographical sketches of the authors are found on p. 1 577-1683, with short author bibliographies. A "background" bibliography is presented on p. 1685- ! 1688. 2322. The Best American short stories . . . and the Yearbook of the American short story . . . 1915+ Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 19 16 + 16-11387 PZ1.B446235 Title varies: 19 15-41, The Best Short Stories. 1942+ The Best American Short Stories. Editor: 1915-41, E. }. O'Brien. — 1942+ Martha Foley. Imprint varies: 1915-25, Boston, Small, Maynard & Company. — 1926-32, New York, Dodd, Mead and Company. — 1933+ Boston, Houghton Mifflin Company. An annual survey of and selection from the short stories published in America during the preceding year. The present editor, Martha Foley, has also produced a number of more selective anthologies, including The Best of the Best American Short Stories, 191 5-10.50 (Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1952. 369 p.) and, with Abraham Rothberg, U. S. Stories; Regional Stories from the Forty-Eight States (New York, Hendricks House-Farrar Straus, 1949. xix, 683 p.). 2323. Blair, Walter, Theodore Hornberger, and Randall Stewart, eds. The literature of the United States, an anthology and a history. Rev. ed. Chicago, Scott, Foresman, 1953. 2 v. 53-2382 PS507.B527 Although the emphasis is on the more important authors, this anthology presents a fair range of selec- tions from lesser authors. Arranged along histori- cal lines, the literary selections also reflect the de- velopment of ideas. Each section has an extensive introduction on the period, and individual authors and selections are commented upon. As with most such college texts, guides to further reading are supplied. 2324. Bradley, E. Sculley, and others, eds. The American tradition in literature. Edited by Sculley Bradley, Richmond Croom Beatty [and] E. Hudson Long. New York, Norton, 1956. 2 v. 56-1312 PS507.B74 A college textbook anthology which has an emphasis on major writers, whom it attempts to present in their full variety and stature. The final criterion for all selections has been literary, but the critical apparatus has been designed to relate them to America's history and intellectual development. 2325. Burrell, John Angus, and Bennett A. Ccrf, eds. An anthology of famous American stories. Edited by Angus Burrell and Bennett Cerf. New York, Modern Library, 1053. M4° P- (The Modern Library of the world's best books. [A Modern Library giant, (177 ] ) 53-9916 PZ1.B04 An I90 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES A chronologically arranged collection of 73 short stories which the editors consider outstanding. This book is a revision of a work originally published in 1936 under the tide The Bedside BooJ^ of Famous American Stories. As in the original work, the primary intent is still to provide stories for pleasur- able reading, and only secondarily to provide a survey, so that nothing is included purely for his- torical purposes. 2326. Cady, Edwin Harrison, Frederick J. Hoff- man, and Roy Harvey Pearce, eds. The growth of American literature; a critical and his- torical survey. New York, American Book Co., 1956. 2 v. (American literature series) 56-1720 PS507.C19 A college textbook for the study of American literature as it reflects the country's cultural develop- ment. Major writers are given a liberal representa- tion among approximately one hundred authors pre- sented. Introductions, chronologies, and highly selective bibliographies are supplied to guide the student. 2327. Cerf, Bennett A., and Van H. Cartmell, eds. Sixteen famous American plays. New York, Garden City Pub. Co., 1941. 1049 p. 41-51686 PS634.C42 Contents. — They knew what they wanted, by Sidney Howard. — The front page, by Ben Hecht and Charles MacArthur. — The green pastures, by Marc Connelly. — Biography, by S. N. Behrman. — Ah, wilderness! by Eugene O'Neill. — The petrified forest, by Robert Sherwood. — Waiting for Lefty, by Clifford Odets. — Dead end, by Sidney Kingsley. — Boy meets girl, by Bella and Samuel Spewack. — The women, by Claire Boothe. — "Having wonderful time," by Arthur Kober. — Our town, by Thornton Wilder. — The little foxes, by Lillian Hellman. — The man who came to dinner, by Moss Hart and George S. Kaufman. — The time of your life, by William Saroyan. — Life with father, by Howard Lindsay and Russel Crouse. This work, which has also been published by Random House in a Modern Library reprint, offers a selection of plays produced between 1924 and 1939. Because of its terminal date, the work might be supplemented by Jack Gaver's Critics' Choice . . . (no. 2336), which covers the 1935-55 period. 2328. Cooke, George Willis, ed. The poets of Transcendentalism, an anthology. With in- troductory essay and biographical notes. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1903. xvi, 341 p. 3-6145 PS607.C7 An anthology of poetry influenced by the Trans- cendental movement in New England. Since the aim is "to give specimens of the poetical output of that movement," much of the book is devoted to work by minor and usually neglected poets. 2329. Davis, Joe Lee, John T. Frederick, and Frank Luther Mott, eds. American literature, an anthology and critical survey. New York, Scribner, 1948-49. 2 v. 48-9141 PS507.D3 A college textbook anthology that aims to pro- vide a comprehensive collection of basic writings; essays on the periods and on the major authors are included, while the lesser authors are covered by headnotes. The work has been arranged chrono- logically, with the intention of presenting the Amer- ican experience. The same work has been reissued under the title A Treasury of American Literature (Chicago, Spencer Press, 1955 [i. e., 1956]). 2330. Ellis, Harold Milton, and others, eds... A college book of American literature. Edited by Milton Ellis, Louise Pound [and] George Weida Spohn. New York, American Book Co., 1939-40. 2 v. (American literature series; H. H. Clark, general editor) 39-22474 PS507.E65 "General bibliography": v. 1, p. 1003-1012; v. 2, p. 1077-1082. A voluminous anthology, arranged chronologi- cally. While most attention is given to major authors, many lesser ones are included, with nearly two hundred represented. The editorial intention is to present the significant statements of each pe- riod's spokesmen; the quantitative emphasis is on post-colonial writings. There are biographical sketches and bibliographies for each author. With , the additional editorial assistance of Frederick J Hoffman, there has appeared a one-volume abridged version of the work, intended for one-semester courses: A College Boo\ of American Literature; Briefer Course, 2d ed. (New York, American Book Co., 1954. 1 107 p.). 2331. Foerster, Norman, ed. American poetry and prose. 3d ed. Boston, Houghton Mif- flin, 1947. 1610 p. 47-4469 PS507.F6 1947 "Under the general editorship of Robert Morss Lovett." "American civilization: a reading list": p. 1595— 1604. A college textbook anthology of American writing from 1 61 2 to the present. The emphasis is on major writers, with some minor authors represented. The purpose of the work is to register the progress of the United States in literature, and to present the growth of literature as a principal feature of Amer- ican civilization. Brief biographical, bibliographi- cal, and critical comments accompany the selections. For shorter courses William Charvat has prepared LITERARY HISTORY AND CRITICISM / IQI an abridged version (Boston, Houghton, Mifflin, 1952. 924 p.) of this work. 2332. Gassner, John, ed. Twenty-five best plays of the modern American theatre. Early series. New York, Crown, 1949. xxviii, 756 p. 49-9571 PS634.G32 Contents. — "The hairy ape," by Eugene O'Neill. — Desire under the elms, by Eugene O'Neill. — What price glory? By Laurence Stall- ings and Maxwell Anderson. — They knew what they wanted, by Sidney Howard. — Beggar on horse- back, by George S. Kaufman and Marc Connelly. — Craig's wife, by George Kelly. — Broadway, by Philip Dunning and George Abbott. — Paris bound, by Philip Barry. — The road to Rome, by Robert E. Sherwood. — The second man, by S. N. Behrman. — Saturday's children, by Maxwell Anderson. — Porgy, by Dorothy and Du Bose Heyward. — The front page, by Ben Hecht and Charles MacArthur. — Machinal, by Sophie Treadwell. — Gods of the lightning, by Maxwell Anderson and Harold Hick- erson. — Street scene, by Elmer Rice. — Strictly dis- honorable, by Preston Sturges. — Berkeley Square, by J. L. Balderston. — The clod, by Lewis Beach. — Trifles, by Susan Glaspell. — He, by Eugene O'Neill. — Aria da capo, by Edna St. Vincent Millay. — Poor Aubrey, by George Kelly. — White dresses, by Paul Green. — Minnie Field, by E. P. Conkle. — Supplementary list of plays (p. 754— 755)— Bibliography (p. 756). A ". . . record of the period between 19 19 and 1929, when our theatre arrived at maturity, and of the stirrings in the direction of modernity a few years earlier, as expressed by the Little Theatre movement . . ." This work is a "belated effort" to cover the integral first period for the series that follows. Gassner has done much writing and anthologizing in the field of the drama, both for- eign and domestic. His The Theatre in Our Times; a Survey of the Men, Materials, and Movements in the Modern Theatre (New York, Crown Publish- ers, 1954. 609 p.) discusses world drama, but from the vantage point of the New York theatergoer, so that the work may be used as a commentary on modern drama in America. With Dudley Nichols he edited Twenty Best Film Plays (New York, Crown, 1943. xl, n 12 p.). 2333. Gassner, John, ed. Twenty best plays of the modern American theatre. New York, Crown, 1939. xxii, 874 p. 39-32159 PS634.G3 Contents. — Winterset, by Maxwell Anderson. — High Tor, by Maxwell Anderson. — Idiot's deliuht, by Robert E. Sherwood. — Johnny Johnson, by Paul Green. — Green pastures, by Marc Connelly. — You can't take it with you, by George S. Kaufman and Moss Hart. — End of summer, by S. N. Behrman. — The animal kingdom, by Philip Barry. — Boy meets girl, by Bella and Samuel Spewack. — The women, by Clare Boothe. — Yes, my darling daughter, by Mark Reed. — Three men on a horse, by George Abbott and John Cecil Holm. — The children's hour, by Lillian Hellman. — Tobacco road, by Jack Kirk- land and Erskine Caldwell. — Of mice and men, by John Steinbeck. — Dead end, by Sidney Kingsley. — Bury the dead, by Irwin Shaw. — The fall of the city, by Archibald MacLeish. — Golden boy, by Clifford Odets. — Stage door, by Edna Ferber and George S. Kaufman. — Plays by authors represented (p. 869- 871). — Plays by other authors, 1930-1940 (p. 871- 872). — Bibliography (p. 873-874). This is the first of an indefinite series of collec- tions of modern American plays; volumes are issued to represent newly elapsed periods. Each volume, in addition to the texts of leading plays, contains a concise introduction on the theater situation during the years covered. 2334. Gassner, John, ed. Best plays of the modern American theatre, second series. New York, Crown, 1947. xxx, 776 p. 47-30270 PS634.G28 Contents. — The glass menagerie, by Tennessee Williams. — The time of your life, by William Saro- yan. — I remember mama, by John Van Druten. — Life with father, by Howard Lindsay and Russel Crouse. — Born yesterday, by Garson Kanin. — The voice of the turtle, by John Van Druten. — The male animal, by James Thurber and Elliott Nu- gent. — The man who came to dinner, by George S. Kaufman and Moss Hart. — Dream girl, by Elmer Rice. — The Philadelphia story, by Philip Barry. — Arsenic and old lace, by Joseph Kesselring. — The hasty heart, by John Patrick. — Home of the brave, by Arthur Laurents. — Tomorrow the world, by James Gow and Arnaud d'Usseau. — Watch on the Rhine, by Lillian Hellman. — The patriots, by Sidney Kingsley. — Abe Lincoln in Illinois, by Robert E. Sherwood. — Bibliography (p. 775-776). 2335. Gassner, John, ed. Best American plays; third series, 1945-1951. New York, Crown, 1952. xxviii, 707 p. ^-5690 PS634.G277 Contents. — Introduction: The mid-century the- atre, a reprise with variations, by John Gassner. — Death of a salesman, by Arthur Miller. — A streetcar named desire, by Tennessee Williams. — The iceman cometh, by Eugene O'Neill. — The member of the wedding, by Carson McCullers. — The autumn gar- den, by Lillian Hellman. — Come back, little Sheba, by William Inge. — All my sons, by Arthur Miller. — Detective story, by Sidney Kingsley. — Billy Budd, by Louis O. Coxe and Robert Chapman. Medea, bj Robinson JclTers. -Mister Roberts, by Thomas He! 192 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES fen and Joshua Logan. — State of the Union, by Howard Lindsay and Russel Crouse. — Darkness at noon, by Sidney Kingsley. — Anne of the thousand days, by Maxwell Anderson. — Bell, book, and can- dle, by John Van Druten. — The moon is blue, by F. Hugh Herbert. — Summer and smoke, by Tennessee Williams. — Supplementary list of American non- musical plays (p. 703-705). — American musical plays of the period (p. 705). — Bibliography (p. 706- 7°7)- 2336. Gaver, Jack, ed. Critics' choice; New York Drama Critics' Circle prize plays, 1935-55. New York, Hawthorn Books, 1955. 661 p. 55-101 13 PS634.G35 A collection of the plays which since the 1935-36 season have received the New York Drama Critics' Circle awards for best play of the season. With Cerf and Cartmell's Sixteen Famous American Plays (q. v.) this work anthologizes the modern theater movement in America. The award plays are: Maxwell Anderson's "Winterset" and "High Tor"; John Steinbeck's "Of Mice and Men"; William Saroyan's "The Time of Your Life"; Lillian Hell- man's "Watch on the Rhine"; Sidney Kingsley 's "The Patriots" and "Darkness at Noon"; Tennessee Williams' "The Glass Menagerie," "A Streetcar Named Desire," and "Cat on a Hot Tin Roof"; Arthur Miller's "All My Sons" and "Death of a Salesman"; Carson McCullers' "The Member of the Wedding"; John Van Druten's "I Am a Camera"; William Inge's "Picnic"; and John Patrick's "The Teahouse of the August Moon." 2337. Halline, Allan Gates, ed. American plays, selected and edited, with critical introduc- tions and bibliographies. New York, American Book Co., 1935. 787 p. (American literature series; H. H. Clark, general editor) 35-5220 PS623.H3 "Bibliographies": p. 751-776. Contents. — The contrast, by Royall Tyler. — Andre, by William Dunlap. — The bucktails; or. Americans in England, by James Kirke Paulding. — Superstition, by James Nelson Barker. — The gladi- ator, by Robert Montgomery Bird. — Bianca Vis- conti, by Nathaniel Parker Willis. — Fashion, by Anna Cora Mowatt. — Francesca da Rimini, by George Henry Boker. — Horizon, by Augustin Daly. — The Danites in the Sierras, by Joaquin Mil- ler. — The Henrietta, by Bronson Howard. — The New York idea, by Langdon Mitchell. — Madame Sand, by Philip Moeller. — You and I, by Philip Barry. — Icebound, by Owen Davis. — The great god Brown, by Eugene O'Neill. — The field god, by Paul Green. This book aims to present a picture of the chron- ological development of the American drama. Each play is introduced by a discussion of the play itself and its philosophical and literary relationships, as well as the dramatist's other work. A longer work with the same purpose, but with the emphasis on the pre-modern period, is Arthur H. Quinn's Rep- resentative American Plays, from ij6j to the Present Day, 7th ed., rev. and enl. (New York, Appleton- Century-Crofts, 1953. 1248 p.), which includes the following: Thomas Godfrey's "The Prince of Parthia" (1767); Royall Tyler's "The Contrast" (1787); William Dunlap's "Andre" (1798); James Nelson Barker's "Superstition" (1824); John Howard Payne and Washington Irving's "Charles the Second" (1824); George Washington Parke Custis' "Pocahontas, or The Settlers of Virginia" (1830); Robert Montgomery Bird's "The Broker of Bogota" (1834); Nathaniel Parker Willis' "Tortesa the Usurer" (1839); Anna Cora Mowatt Ritchie's "Fashion" (1845); George Henry Boker 's "Fran- cesca da Rimini" (1855); Dion Boucicault's "The Octoroon, or Life in Louisiana" (1859); Joseph Jef- ferson's "Rip Van Winkle" (1865); Steele Mac- Kaye's "Hazel Kirke" (1880); Bronson Howard's "Shenandoah" (1889); James A. Heme's "Margaret Fleming" (1890); William Gillette's "Secret Serv- ice" (1896); David Belasco and John Luther Long's "Madame Butterfly" (1900); Clyde Fitch's "The Girl With the Green Eyes" (1902); Langdon Mitch- ell's "The New York Idea" (1906); Augustus Thomas' "The Witching Hour" (1907); William Vaughn Moody's "The Faith Healer" (1909); Percy MacKaye's "The Scarecrow" (1910); Edward Shel- don's "The Boss" (1911); Rachel Crothers' "He and She" (1911); Eugene O'Neill's "Beyond the Horizon" (1920); Lula Vollmer's "Sun-Up" (1923); Sidney Howard's "The Silver Cord" (1926); Philip Barry's "Paris Bound" (1927); Maxwell Anderson's "Winterset" (1935); William Wister Haines' "Com- mand Decision" (1947); and Richard Rodgers, Oscar Hammerstein II, and Joshua Logan's "South Pacific" (1949). 2338. Hart, James D., and Clarence Gohdes, eds. America's literature. New York, Dryden Press, 1955. 958 p. 55 _I 4399 PS507.H24 An anthology designed for a first-year college course in American literature. Some 250 selections from the writings of 46 authors have been included. Long introductions relating literature to general culture have been provided for the four major edi- torial sections of the volume; also, each author has his own introduction. 2339. Howard, Leon, Louis B. Wright, and Carl Bode, eds. American heritage; an anthology and interpretive survey of our literature. Boston, Heath, 1955, 2 v. 54-9510 PS507.H6 LITERARY HISTORY AND CRITICISM / 193 A college textbook which seeks to present the "American heritage of ideas, emotions, and points of view which are revealed in literature and which reveal the nature of America today." There are brief introductions to the nearly 200 authors from whose writings selections have been made. 2340. Hubbell, Jay B., ed. American life in lit- erature. Rev. ed. New York, Harper, 1949. 2v. 49" 2 37 2 PS507.H8 1949 Bibliography: v. 1, p. 955-967; repeated in v. 2, p. 931-943. A college textbook anthology in which the em- phasis is on American literature as an expression of American life and thought. Major writers are well represented, and selections included from a fairly large number of lesser figures; a total of about 140 authors being represented. In addition, about two dozen British writers are included for passages re- flecting their view of America. Extensive historical interchapters and individual author biographies, with special detail for major authors, are designed to relate the work to American history and life in more than its literary aspects. An abridged edition prepared for a one-semester course appeared in one volume under the same title; the most recent revision was in 1951. 2341. Jones, Howard Mumford, Ernest E. Leisy, and Richard M. Ludwig, eds. Major American writers. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1952. 1930 p. 52-406 PS507.J6 1952 An anthology textbook designed for college in- troductory courses in American literature. Major authors of the 18th and 19th centuries are presented, along with representative authors of the 17th and 20th centuries. Scholarly apparatus has been pro- vided for the selections, but there are no period or movement survey essays. On the theory that too much is covered in most such anthologies and the courses for which they are designed, the editors have limited their selections, and only 42 authors are represented. 2342. Kreymborg, Alfred, ed. An anthology of American poetry; lyric America, 1630-1941. I, New York, Tudor Pub. Co., 1941. xl, 675 p. 41-10 1 30 PS586.K7 [941 Originally published under title: Lyric America, an Anthology of American Poetry (1630-1930). The main interest in this work is its rcprcscnta- , tion of nearly three hundred major and minor poets. The anthology was designed as a companion volume, .which could be used independently, tor the author's I historical critical work: Our Singing Strength, an [Outline of American Poetry (/620-/9J0) (New York, Coward-McCann, 1929. 643 p.). Kreym- borg (b. 1883) is a playwright, novelist, and an- thologist; but his favorite medium is poetry, of which he has been a prolific writer. His publica- tions since Selected Poems, 19 12- 1944 (New York, Dutton, 1945. 319 p.) include Man and Shadow, an Allegory (New York, Dutton, 1946. 256 p.), a long poem on modern man as seen through his representatives on a visit to Central Park in New York City, and No More War, and Other Poems (New York, Bookman Associates, 1950. 127 p.). Throughout his career Kreymborg has been active in the cause of advancing "modern" American poetry, serving the cause both as editor and as anthologist. 2343. McDowell, Tremaine, ed. America in literature. New York, Crofts, 1944. 540 p. 44-5256 PS509.U5M2 A college textbook anthology, "collected both for individual readers and for students of composition, of American literature, and of our national life," this volume is not a survey of the development of Ameri- can literature, but rather of the regions of America and the ideas which have influenced American life, as they have been presented by writers of varying literary stature. It is particularly adaptable for use as background reading for general courses in American civilization. 2344. Matthiessen, Francis O., ed. The Oxford book of American verse. New York, Oxford University Press, 1950. lvi, 1132 p. 50-9826 PS583.O82 Bibliography: p. 1107-1115. A purely literary anthology on historical princi- ples, this work emphasizes the work of the more important poets. Nothing is included for purely historical reasons; also, many of the quite minor poets are not represented, as they are in many an- thologies (e. g., cf. Kreymborg supra). Other readily available anthologies of American poetry include A Comprehensive Anthology of American Poetry (New York, Modern Library, 1944. 490 p.), edited by Conrad Aiken (q. v.), and The New Pocket Anthology of American Verse (Cleveland, World Pub. Co., 1955. 670 p.), edited by Osc.ir Williams (q. v.). The latter work is arranged alphabetically and places an unusually heavy em- phasis on modern poetry, so that it might almost be regarded as a 20th-century poetry anthology. Wil liams has done a number of other popular poetry anthologies, such as A Little Treasury of American Poetry (New York, Seribncr, 1948. xxxvi, 876 p.). J 94 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 2345. Miller, Perry, and Thomas H. Johnson, eds. The Puritans. New York, American Book Co., 1938. 846 p. (American literature series; H. H. Clark, general editor) 38-34986 PS530.M5 Bibliographies: p. 785-834. An extensive anthology of colonial Puritan writ- ings; the lengthy general introduction includes sec- tions on "The Puritan Way of Life" and "The Puri- tans as Literary Artists." A recent but shorter an- thology of the period which Miller has edited is The American Puritans, Their Prose and Poetry, which appeared in an Anchor books paperback edi- tion in 1956. Another good and current paperback anthology in this field is Colonial American Writing (New York, Rinehart, 1950. 581 p.), edited by Roy H. Pearce. An older work in the field is Colo- nial Prose and Poetry (New York, Crowell, 1901), edited by William P. Trent and Benjamin W. Wells, and published in three very small, compact volumes. Another book of interest here is America Begins (New York, Pantheon, 1950. 438 p.), edited by Richard M. Dorson, who presents selections from 17th century writings depicting the Atlantic coastal communities. 2346. Miller, Perry, ed. The Transcendentalists, an anthology. Cambridge, Harvard Uni- versity Press, 1950. xvii, 521 p. 50-7360 B905.M5 Bibliography: p. [503]-5io. "This book exists primarily on the level of what the Transcendentalists called the understand- ing ... It aims to make available articles and books that by now can be found only in a few special libraries. I have endeavored to arrange the selec- tions so that they tell the story of themselves . . . this volume . . . [omits Emerson and Thoreau, since their works] are readily accessible, at least in an- thologies. . . . Considering both the spatial limits and modern impatience, I have assumed the right to throw out irrelevancies and arid passages. I have tried to preserve only the hard core and the basic themes. ... in order that this anthology might represent the group as they actually figured in history, I have limited the selection to what appeared at the time as public record . . ." — Introduction. 2347. Moses, Montrose J., ed. Representative plays by American dramatists; edited, with an introd. to each play, by Montrose J. Moses. New York, Dutton, i9i8-[25] 3 v. illus. 18-5466 PS623.M7 Bibliographies: v. 1, p. [n]-i8; v. 2, p. 3-8; v - 3> P- UH4- Contents. — I. 1765-1819. The Prince of Par- thia, by Thomas Godfrey, Jr. 1765. — Ponteach; or, The savages of America, by Robert Rogers. 1766. — The group; a farce, by Mrs. Mercy Warren. 1775. — The Batde of Bunkers-Hill, by Hugh Henry Brackenridge. 1776. — The fall of British tyranny; or, American liberty, by John Leacock. 1776. — The politician out-witted, by Samuel Low. 1789. — The contrast, by Royall Tyler. 1790. — Andre, by Wil- liam Dunlap. 1798. — The Indian princess; or, La belle sauvage, by James Nelson Barker. 1808. — She would be a soldier; or, The Plains of Chippewa, by Mordecai Manuel Noah. 1819. — II. 1815-1858. Fashionable follies, by Joseph Hutton. 1815. — Brutus; or, The fall of Tarquin, by John Howard Payne. 18 18. — Sertorius; or, The Roman patriot, by David Paul Brown. 1830. — Tortesa, the usurer, by Nathaniel Parker Willis. 1839. — The people's lawyer, by Joseph Stevens Jones. 1839. — Jack Cade, by Robert T. Conrad. 1841. — Fashion, by Mrs. Anna Cora Mowatt. 1850. — Uncle Tom's cabin, dramatized by George L. Aiken. 1852. — Self, by Mrs. Sidney F. Bateman, 1856. — Horseshoe Rob- , inson, by Clifton W. Tayleure. 1858. — III. 1856- 191 1. Rip Van Winkle: a legend of the Catskills; a comparative arrangement with the Kerr version, by Charles Burke. 1850. — Francesca da Rimini, by George Henry Boker. 1855. — Love in '76; an in- , cident of the revolution, by Oliver Bell Bunce. 1 1857. — Paul Kauvar; or, Anarchy, by Steele Mac- ; kaye. 1887. — Shenandoah, by Bronson Howard. 1888. — In Mizzoura, by Augustus Thomas. 1893. — The moth and the flame, by Clyde Fitch. 1898. — j The New York idea, by Langdon Mitchell. 1906. — The easiest way, by Eugene Walter. 1909. — The return of Peter Grimm, by David Belasco. 191 1. 2348. Moses, Montrose J., ed. Representative American dramas, national and local; edited, with introductions, by Montrose J. Moses, rev. and brought up to date by Joseph Wood Krutch. Stu- dent's ed. Boston, Little, Brown, 194 1. xvi, 1041 p. 41-26062 PS634.M6 1941 Contents. — 1894. A Texas steer, by Charles H. Hoyte. — 1905. The girl of the golden West, by David Belasco. — 1907. The witching hour, by Augustus Thomas. — 1910. The city, by Clyde Fitch. — 1910. The scarecrow, by Percy Mac- Kaye. — 19 10. The piper, by Josephine Preston Pea- body. — 191 1. Mrs. Bumpstead-Leigh, by Harry James Smith. — 1914. It pays to advertise, by Roi Cooper Megrue and Walter Hackett. — 1919. The famous Mrs. Fair, by James Forbes. — 1920. The Emperor Jones, by Eugene O'Neill. — 1921. Nice people, by Rachel Crothers. — 1921. The detour, by Owen Davis. — 1921. Dulcy, by George S. Kauf- man and Marc Connelly. — 1923. The adding ma- chine, by Elmer L. Rice. — 1925. The show-off, by George Kelly. — 1925. Lucky Sam McCarver, by LITERARY HISTORY AND CRITICISM / I95 Sidney Howard. — 1927. The second man, by S. N. Behrman. — 1928. Holiday, by Philip Barry. — 1930. The green pastures, by Marc Connelly. — 1935. Awake and sing, by Clifford Odets. — 1936. The petrified forest, by Robert Emmet Sherwood. — 1937. The masque of kings, by Maxwell Ander- son. — Bibliographies, General references (p. 1013- 1014). 2349. Pochmann, Henry A., and Gay Wilson Allen, eds. Masters of American literature. New York, Macmillan, 1949. 2 v. 49-6433 PS507.P6 A college textbook anthology which aims at pre- senting major authors and their outstanding works, as an introduction to American literature. The work accordingly presents copious selections from about 30 authors. Introductory essays, bibliog- raphies, and footnotes are included to assist the student. 2350. Poets of today. New York, Scribner, 1954 + 54-10439 PS614.P64 Contents. — f 1 ] Poems and translations, by Harry Duncan. Samurai and serpent poems, by Murray Noss. Another animal, poems by May Swenson. — 2. The hatch, poems, by Norma Farber. The irony of joy, poems by Robert Pack. Good news of death and other poems by Louis Simpson. — 3. The floating world and other poems, by Lee Anderson. My father's business and other poems, by Spenser Brown. The green town: poems, by John Langland. A series which, for purposes of publishing econ- omies, incorporates in each volume the poems for a first volume by each of several young poets. The series is edited by John Hall Wheelock, who has written discriminating introductory essays for the volumes. 2351. Prize stories. The O. Henry awards. 1919+ Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday. 21-9372 PZ1.O11 Title varies: 1919-46, O. Henry Memorial Award Prize Stories. Stories for 1919-27 were "chosen by the Society of Arts and Sciences." Editors: 1919-32, B. C. Williams. — 1933-40, Harry Hansen. — 1941— Herschel Brickell (with Muriel Fuller, 19 -46). An annual selection of leading American short stories of the preceding year. The 1956 volume was the 36th in the series. The series was interrupted in 1952 and 1953 as a result of the editor's death. Although this series and The Best American Short Stories . . . annuals (q. v.) both attempt to pick the best short stories published in American peri- odicals, there is little duplication in the stories in- cluded. Also, this series tends toward shorter volumes, partly because it does not offer an annual survey and bibliography of short stories. Both col- lections, however, maintain high standards of merit. 2352. Richardson, Lyon, N., George H. Orians, and Herbert R. Brown, eds. The heritage of American literature. Boston, Ginn, 195 1. z v. 51-3922 PS507.R5 A college textbook which emphasizes major au- thors but gives some attention to minor figures; about one hundred and forty authors are repre- sented. Sections, authors, and selections receive introductions designed to prepare students for class- room lectures; each author has a relatively extensive bibliography supplied. 2353. Short, Raymond W., and Wilbur S. Scott, eds. The main lines of American literature. New York, Holt, 1954. 648 p. 54-6620 PS507.S49 This college textbook anthology provides section and author introductions with some bibliographical information. The selections are designed to supple- ment full volume assignments of nine major authors who are not represented in this work. Available re- prints of works by these omitted authors are listed in a pamphlet available to teachers from the pub- lisher; the pamphlet also includes course syllabi. 2354. Tate, Allen, and John Peale Bishop, eds. American harvest; twenty years of creative writing in the United States. Garden City, N. Y., Garden City Pub. Co., 1943. 544 p. 45-216} PS536.T3 1943 An anthology of literary works (mainly short stories and poems) produced in the United States during the twenties and thirties. 2355. Thorp, Willard, Merle Curti, and Carlos Baker, eds. American issues. Rev. and enl. Philadelphia, Lippincott, 1954-55 [v. 1, 1955] 2 v. 55-5334 PS507.T53 Contents. — v. 1. The social record. — v. 2. The literary record. A college textbook anthology (in reality two an- thologies), this is obviously more than a literary guide. The second volume, meant to be purely literary in the material presented, includes work from about seventy-five authors. The work of major authors is emphasized, while that of minor authors is included fur n presentation of a type of writing. The first volume, on the other hand, is designed to present the records of the issues at work in American society during its history; nearly 200 authors (many of whom arc included in volume two for other work) have selections presented in a man- ner designed to augment the purely belletri tic ap- I96 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES proach to American literature. The usual scholarly apparatus is provided. 2356. Twentieth-century literature in America. Chicago, Regnery, 1951-52. 6 v. 2357. Bogan, Louise. Achievement in American poetry, 1900-1950. 1951. 157 p- 51-8384 PS221.B56 2358. Brodbeck, May, James Gray, and Walter Metzger. American non-fiction, 1 900-1 950. 1952. 198 p. 52-12468 PS379.B7 2359. Downer, Alan S. Fifty years of American drama, 1900-1950. 1951. 158 p. 51-13185 PS351.D6 2360. Hoffman, Frederick John. The modern novel in America, 1900-1950. 1951. 216 p. 51-13723 PS379.H6 2361. O'Connor, William Van. An age of criti- cism: 1900-1950. 1952. 182 p. 52-12476 PN99.U52O3 2362. West, Ray Benedict. The short story in America, 1 900-1 950. 1952. 147 p. 52-3551 PS374.S5M4 2363. Untermeyer, Louis, ed. Modern American poetry. Mid-century [i. e. 7th] ed. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1950. xxii, 709 p. 50-5229 PS611.U6 1950 A distinguished anthology of modern American poetry; the first edition appeared in 1919. Since then poets have been dropped and new ones added with each succeeding edition. The work attempts to represent the leading modern poets through a. moderately large selection of their work; each poet's work is introduced by a concise half-page to eight pages of biographical information and critical dis- cussion. Whitman and Dickinson (qq. v.) are in- cluded as precursors, and the cited 1950 edition includes recent work such as the poetry of Randall Jarrell, Peter Viereck, and Robert Lowell (qq. v.). The work has frequendy been published with Un- termeyer's comparable anthology of modern British poetry. The 1955 edition, Modern American & Modern British Poetry (New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1955- 6 97 P-)» which was edited with the assistance of Karl Shapiro and Richard Wilbur (qq. v.), is a much shorter work, and stripped of the biographical and critical introductions; however, it is still a good, if more restricted, work, and of value for its repre- sentation of very recent poets. With the many edi- tions of this work, and with many other anthologies, such as An Anthology oj the New England Poets from Colonial Times to the Present Day (New York, Random House, 1948. xx, 636 p.), Untermeyer (b. 1885) has come to be one of the best-known of American anthologists. His Early American Poets (New York, Library Publishers, 1952. 334 p.) covers American poetry to the point where his Modern American Poetry begins, but lacks similar individual introductions. Untermeyer also has a literary reputation in other fields, most notably in poetry. His Selected Poems and Parodies was pub- lished in 1935. 2364. Uppsala. Universitet. Amerikanska Semi- naries Essays and studies on American language and literature. Upsala, Lundequistska Bokhandeln; Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1945 + "The present series of Essays and Studies will be devoted to American philology in the wider sense. Occasionally, other subjects connected with Ameri- can Humanities will be included. The series is intended to treat specialized as well as more com- prehensive problems." — Publisher's statement on cover of number five. Most of the volumes in the series to date have been published in both Sweden and the United States. In addition to the titles cited in full below, other works which have appeared in the series, or are said to be in preparation, include: R. C. Barton's The Change in Race Consciousness in American Negro Literature after 1930; F. Book's Romantic Elements in Henry Thoreau; E. Ekwall's American and Brit- ish Pronunciation; H. Elovson's The U. S. A. As a Symbol of Liberty in Swedish Literature in the Middle of the 19th Century; R. Englander's Edward McDowell and Scandinavian Musical Tradition; G. Friden's James Fenimore Cooper and Ossian; N. M. Holmer's The Character of the lroquoian Languages and Indian Place Names in North America; S. Liljeblad's The Northern Shoshoni Indians; S. B. Liljegren's The Quality and Function of Anti- Intellectualism in American Romanticism and The Subject-Matter of American Literary Realism; and K. E. Lindblad's Noah Webster's Pronunciation and Modern New England Speech, a Comparison. 2365. Ahnebrink, Lars. The beginnings of nat- uralism in American fiction; a study of the works of Hamlin Garland, Stephen Crane, and Frank Norris, with special reference to some Euro- pean influences, 1891-1903. 1950. 505 p. ([no.] 9) 50-8924 PS371.A2 Includes bibliographies. LITERARY HISTORY AND CRITICISM / 197 2366. Ekstrom, Kjell. George Washington Cable, a study of his early life and work. 1950. 197 p. ([no.] 10) 51-6309 US1246.E4 Bibliography: p. [185]— 193. 2367. Liljegren, Sten B. The revolt against ro- manticism in American literature as evi- denced in the works of S. L. Clemens. 1945. 60 p. ([no.] 1) 47-24197 PS1342.R6L5 Bibliographical references included in "Notes" (p. 53-60). 2368. Lundblad, Jane. Nathaniel Hawthorne and European literary tradition. 1947. 196 p. ([no.] 6) 48-3460 PS1886.L8 "Hawthorne and the Tradition of Gothic Ro- mance" (p. [8i]-i49) issued also separately, with slight variations, under title: Nathaniel Hawthorne and the Tradition of Gothic Romance (no. 4 in this series). Bibliography: p. [i9i]-i96. 2369. Warfel, Harry R., and George Harrison Orians, eds. American local-color stories. New York, American Book Co., 1941. xxiv, 846 p. 41-17552 PZi.W23Am A survey through short-story selections of the local color literary movement that flourished in the United States in the 19th century. This school placed pri- mary emphasis on a local area, rather than on tell- ing a story (although there usually was one), analyzing a person or situation, or presenting a thesis. The school relied heavily on dialect, land- scape description, character types, etc. Most of the stories in this anthology were written after 1870, and the most recent in 1907. An attempt has been made to represent the various sections of the coun- try in the 63 stories by 38 authors. 2370. White, Elvvyn B., and Katharine S. White, eds. A subtreasury of American humor. New York, Coward-McCann, 1941. xxxii, 814 p. 41-52004 PN6161.W5223 This is a personal rather than a historical an- thology of American humor. Within that limita- tion, its large quantity offers much variety, although mainly from modern authors. The work is avail- able in a Modern Library reprint. Another such selection, but which shows a greater tendency to excise passages from longer works, is An Encyclo- pedia of Modern American Humor (Garden City, N. Y., Hanover House, Doubleday, 1954. 688 p.), edited by Bennett Cerf. A highly personal an- thology with a tendency to rather long selections is H. Allen Smith's Desert Island Decameron (Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, Doran, 1945. 406 p.). A humor anthology intended to serve historical pur- poses as well as general reading pleasures is Edwin Seaver's Pageant of American Humor (Cleveland, World Pub. Co., 1948. 607 p.), which was com- piled by means of responses to a questionnaire sent to several hundred writers. A collection that is more one of "jokes" than of the more general, and usually more literate, "humor" is Leewin B. Wil- liams' Encyclopedia of Wit, Humor, and Wisdom (Nashville, Tenn., Abingdon-Cokesbury Press, 1949. 576 p.), which is an extensive, double-columned work arranged on a subject basis. B. History and Criticism 2371. Aldridge, John W. After the lost genera- tion; a critical study of the writers of two wars. New York, McGraw-Hill, 1951. xv, 263 p. 51-10588 PS379.A5 The author attempts to trace the change that has ! occurred between the novelists produced in the at- mosphere of the First World War and those who developed in the shadow of World War II. In the first third of the book he discusses those authors I (Hemingway, Fitzgerald, and Dos Passos) whom 1 he considers to be "most illustrative of the artistic preoccupations of their age and whose work has had the most lasting influence on the young writers of today." The rest of the book is devoted to a study ot the novelists who appeared in the forties: Vance Bourjaily, Norman Mailer, John Home Burns, Irwin Shaw, Merle Miller, Gore Vidal, Paul Bowles, Truman Capote, Frederick Bucchner, and others. 2372. Aldridge, John W., ed. Critiques and essays on modern fiction, 1920-1951, representing the achievement of modern American anil Punish critics. New York, Ronald Press, 1952. \x, 610 p. 52-6180 PN3355A8 "This book has been designed for use as a pri- mary text in courses in the criticism of modern fie tion, and as a collateral text in courses in the survey of modern fiction. . . . the governing intention of the book is that it should meet the needs ... of serious students who arc interested in fiction 1 1 - an art rather than as a model, and who may be expected I98 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES to be concerned with the element which most clearly distinguishes it as an art, its technique or form." — Introduction. A considerable portion of the book is either criti- cism by Americans, or criticism about Americans. Authors discussed at some length include Faulkner, R. P. Warren, K. A. Porter, S. Crane, F. S. Fitz- gerald, S. Anderson, T. Wolfe, T. Dreiser, J. T. Farrell, E. Hemingway, and E. Welty. There is added on p. 553-610 a sizable selective bibliography of criticism of modern fiction. 2373. Aldridge, John W. In search of heresy; American literature in an age of conformity. New York, McGraw-Hill, 1956. 208 p. 56-8166 PS221.A64 A discussion of American literature (fiction) after World War II. A heavy emphasis is laid on what the author regards as the pernicious influence of the universities — leading to conformity, camaraderie, and a limited, bland production. 2374. Arms, George W. The fields were green: a new view of Bryant, Whittier, Holmes, Lowell, and Longfellow; with a selection of their poems. Stanford, Stanford University Press, 1953. 246 p. 53-6445 PS541.A8 Bibliography: p. 238-241. Each poet is discussed in terms of his value for the present-day reader. The selections included are usually not the standard anthology poems. 2375. Babbitt, Irving. Rousseau and romanticism. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1919. xxiii, 426 p. 19-26569 PN603.B3 Bibliography: p. [399]~4i9- Babbitt ( 1 865-1933) was one of the leaders of the neo-humanist movement. While his work was largely in comparative literature, his theories had influence in general American literary criticism. In this respect Rousseau and Romanticism was prob- ably at once his most influential and his most im- portant book. His other work includes Literature and the American College; Essays in Defense of the Humanities (Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1908. 262 p.); The New hao\oon; an Essay on the Confusion of the Arts (Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1910. 258 p.); Democracy and Leadership (Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1924. 349 p.); and On Being Creative, and Other Essays (Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1932. 265 p.). Irving Babbitt, Man and Teacher (New York, Putnam, 1941. 337 p.), edited by Frederick Manchester and Odell Shepard, is a collection of reminiscences about Babbitt by some 30 people who knew him. Louis J. A. Mercier's The Challenge of Humanism (New York, Oxford University Press, 1933. 288 p.) has much on the neo-humanist move- ment in general, and on both Babbitt and Paul Elmer More (q. v.) in particular. Of similar scope is Folke Leander's Humanism and Naturalism; a Comparative Study of Ernest Seilliere, Irving Babbitt and Paul Elmer More (Goteborg, Elanders Bok- tryckeri Aktiebolag, 1937. 227 p.). The Critique of Humanism, a Symposium (New York, Brewer & Warren, 1930. 359 p.), edited by C. Hardey Grat- tan, is a collection of articles which demonstrate the position of humanism and the influence on Ameri- can critics of both Babbitt and More. A general study is G. R. Elliott's Humanism and Imagination (Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina Press, 1938. 253 p.), the first section of which focuses on Babbitt and More, and the second on Emerson, with the two types of humanism shown in contrast. 2376. Beach, Joseph Warren. American fiction, 1920-1940. New York, Macmillan, 1941. 371 p. 41-6464 PS379.B38 Critical essays on John Dos Passos, Ernest Hem- ingway, William Faulkner, Thomas Wolfe, Erskine Caldwell, James T. Farrell, John P. Marquand, and John Steinbeck. Beach (b. 1880) is best known as a critic; in addi- tion to material in periodicals and the work cited above, he has published a study of Henry James (q. v.) and The Twentieth Century Novel; Studies in Technique (New York, Century, 1932. 569 p.), which devotes much space to American fiction. He is also known for his poetry; in this field his most recent volume is Involuntary Witness (New York, Macmillan, 1950. 97 p.). In 1930 he published a novel, Glass Mountain (Philadelphia, Macrae Smith Co. 330 p.) about American expatriates in France. Forms of Modern Fiction (Minneapolis, University of Minnesota Press, 1948. 305 p.), edited by William Van O'Connor, is a collection of essays in honor of Beach. 2377. Bretnor, Reginald, ed. Modern science fiction, its meaning and its future [by] John W. Campbell, Jr. [and others] New York, Coward- McCann, 1953. 294 p. 52-1 1714 PN3383.S4B7 A group of essays on the causes, meanings, and position of science fiction in the field of literature. A history of this form, which has in recent years undergone a phenomenal growth, may be found in James O. Bailey's Pilgrims through Space and Time; Trends and Patterns in Scientific and Utopian Fiction (New York, Argus Books, 1947. 341 p.). A book dealing with the audience for and the pro- duction of science fiction is Sam Moskowitz' The Immortal Storm; a History of Science Fiction Fan- dom (Adanta, Atlanta Science Fiction Organization Press, 1954. 269 p.). LITERARY HISTORY AND CRITICISM / 199 2378. Brooks, Cleanth. Modern poetry and the tradition. Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina Press, 1939. 253 p. 39-22007 PN 1 1 36.B75 Contents. — Metaphor and the tradition. — Wit and high seriousness. — Metaphysical poetry and propaganda art. — Symbolist poetry and the ivory tower. — The modern poet and the tradition. — Frost, MacLeish, and Auden. — The waste land: critique of the myth. — Yeats: the poet as myth-maker. — A note on the death of Elizabethan tragedy. — Notes for a revised history of English poetry. Brooks (b. 1906) has been one of the leaders in the "New Criticism" movement. His work, pri- marily in the field of poetry, is characterized by careful textual explication and structural analysis. In addition to his importance as a critic, he has had considerable influence on the teaching of literature through his college texts, such as Understanding Poetry (1938), Understanding Fiction (1943), and Modern Rhetoric (1949), works which he wrote in collaboration with Robert Pcnn Warren, and Under- standing Drama ( 1945, 1948), which he co-authored with Robert B. Heilman. 2379. Brooks, Cleanth. The well wrought urn; studies in the structure of poetry. New York, Reynal & Hitchcock, 1947. 270 p. 47-3M3 PR502.B7 Reissued in 1956 in the Harvest books paperback series by Harcourt, Brace and Co. 2380. Brooks, Van Wyck. America's coming-of- age. New York, B. W. Huebsch, 1915. 183 p. 15-27963 E168.B8835 Contents. — "Highbrow" and "lowbrow." — "Our poets." — The precipitant. — Apotheosis of the "low- brow." — The Sargasso sea. Brooks (b. 1886) has been one of the most widely read literary critics of the first half of the 20th century, outside the formal schools. He has done much work as a translator (from French) and as an editor, but is best known for the many books he has written, which include: Emerson a>id Others (New York, Dutton, 1927. 250 p.), the first half of which is on Emerson, the rest a series of essays on R. Bourne, A. Bierce, H. Melville, U. Sinclair, etc.; The Life of Emerson (New York, Dutton, 1932. 215 p.); Sketches in Criticism (New York, Dutton, 1932. 306 p.); The Ordeal of Mar\ Twain , (New and rev. cd. New York, Dutton, 1933. 325 p.); Three Essays on America (New York, Dut- ton, 19^4. 216 p.), the essays being "America's Coming ot Age," "Letters and Leadership," and "The Literary Life in America"; Opinions of Oliver Allston (New York, Dutton, 194 1. 309 p.), which indirectly expresses Brook's views on criticism; .7 Chilmarl^ Miscellany (New York, Dutton, 1948. 315 p.), a selection from the author's other books; Scenes and Portraits; Memories of Childhood and Youth (New York, Dutton, 1954. 243 p.); and John Sloan, a Painter's Life (New York, Dutton, 1955. 246 p.). 2381. Brooks, Van Wyck. Makers and finders; a history of the writer in America, 1800- 1915. New York, Dutton, 1936-52 [v. 1, 1944] 5 v - Contents. — v. 1. The world of Washington Irving [1800-1840] (PS208.B7 44-7345). — v. 2. The flowering of New England, 1 815-1865 (PS243.B7 1936 36-27376). — v. 3. The times of Melville and Whitman [ca. 1847-1885] (PS201.B7 47-11390). — v. 4. New England: Indian summer, 1865-1915 (PS243.B72 1940 40-30493). — v. 5. The confident years: 1885-1915 (PS214.B7 51- I4833)- The volumes in this series have been republished in Everyman's library. 2382. Brooks, Van Wyck. The writer in America. New York, Dutton, 1953. 203 p. 52-12957 PS31.B83 2383. Brown, Clarence A., comp. The achieve- ment of American criticism; representative selections from three hundred years of American criticism. New York, Ronald Press, 1954. 724 p. 54-6962 PN99.U5B7 The selections, many in full, are assembled in categories such as the origins of American critical theory; neoclassicism, transition to romanticism; and realism and arstheticism. An anthology which attempts to present a cross section of the critical ideas and methods of various prominent and repre- sentative critics in the 20th century is Charles I. Glicksberg's American Literary Criticism, 1900- 1950 (New York, Hendricks House, 1952. 574 p.). Another book king "to make accessible the contemporary achievement in criticism." both Amer- ican and British, is Robert Wooster Stallman's an- thology: Critiques and Essays in Criticism, 1920- 1948 (New York, Ronald Press, 1949. xxii. ^~\ p.). 2384. Brown, Herbert R. The sentimental novel in America, 1789-1860. Durham. \. (".. Duke University Press, 1940. 417 p. (Duke Uni- versity publications) 4'-'sS PS377.B7 Issued aKo as thesis ( 'Ph. D.) Columbia Univer- sity. Bibliography: p. ,71-380. A study of the popular novel in America up to the Civil War. showing the role it played in A ican life. 200 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 2385. Brownell, William Crary. American prose masters: Cooper — Hawthorne — Emerson — Poe — Lowell — Henry James. New York, Scribner, 1909. 400 p. 9-28257 PS362.B7 W. C. Brownell (1851-1928) was, with Wood- berry and Stedman (qq. v.), considered one of the leading literary critics within the Genteel Tradition. However, he has also been viewed as a precursor of the New Humanism. 2386. Brownell, William Crary. William Crary Brownell, an anthology of his writings to- gether with biographical notes and impressions of the later years, by Gertrude Hall Brownell. New York, Scribner, 1933. 383 p. 33-30961 PS1145.B6A6 1933 2387. Burke, Kenneth. Counter-statement. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1931. 268 p. 31-29768 PN511.B79 A group of statements of principles of literary aesthetics which counter prevailing views. Works such as The White Oxen, and Other Stor- ies (New York, Boni, 1924. 298 p.), Towards a Better Life (New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1932. 219 p.), an experimental "novel," and Boo\ of Moments; Poems, 1915-1954 (Los Altos, Calif., Hermes Publications, 1955. 96 p.) have given Ken- neth Duva Burke (b. 1897) something of a reputa- tion as an author of fiction and poetry. However, he is probably best known for his work as a literary critic. This has been heavily influenced by his inter- est in the modern semantics movement, as have been his probably less well known philosophical works such as Permanence and Change, an Anatomy of Purpose (New York, New Republic, 1935. 351 p.) and Attitudes Toward History (New York, New Republic, 1937. 2 v.). 2388. Burke, Kenneth. The philosophy of literary form; studies in symbolic action. Baton Rouge, Louisiana State University Press, 1941. 455 P- 41-11084 PN511.B795 A collection of articles, all of which have been previously published, except the first: "The Philoso- phy of Literary Form" (p. 1-137). Cf. Foreword. The problem of semantics is given considerable attention in this volume. 2389. Burke, Kenneth. A grammar of motives. New York, Prentice-Hall, 1945. xxiii, 53° P- 45-10249 B945.B773G7 This book is important for literary criticism, but its philosophical overtones and linguistic analyses render it important in other fields as well. It is the first volume of a trilogy on "motives" (vide infra). 2390. Burke, Kenneth. A rhetoric of motives. New York, Prentice-Hall, 1950. xv, 340 p. 50-5208 B840.B8 This, the second volume of an as yet uncom- pleted trilogy, analyzes literature and the human situation in terms of general semantics. Volume three is to have the title A Symbolic of Motives. 2391. Burke, William J., and Will D. Howe. American authors and books, 1640-1940. New York, Gramercy Pub. Co., 1943. 858 p. 43-1255 Z1224.B87 1943 "Facts about the writing, illustrating, editing, publishing, reviewing, collecting, selling, and pres- ervation of American books . . . The material has been arranged in dictionary form, with cross-refer- ence to related subjects. Bibliographical references for further study are given throughout the hand- book." — Preface. 2392. Cady, Edwin H. The gendeman in Amer- ica; a literary study in American culture. Syracuse, N. Y., Syracuse University Press, 1949. 232 p. 49-10671 BJ1601.C2 "What is attempted here is a study of the fate in America of the cluster of concepts, values, attitudes, and cultural forms implied by the word 'gentleman' as it is reflected in American literature. With that goes the effort to show how accurate criticism of certain interesting American authors depends upon a full reading of books which cannot be understood without a clear grasp of the gentlemanly configu- ration. Finally, it is hoped that something is here contributed toward a better understanding of the working relations among ideas, culture, and litera- ture in America." — Introduction. 2393. The Cambridge history of American litera- ture, edited by William Peterfield Trent, John Erskine, Stuart P. Sherman [and] Carl Van Doren. New York, Macmillan, 1931. 4 v. 38-36456 PS88.C3 1 93 1 A pioneer comprehensive history of the subject. Special features are: The inclusive scale, expanded to cover subjects frequendy neglected; monographic chapters contributed by scholars specializing in the topic being presented; the extensive bibliographies supplied (arranged by chapters, at the end of vol- umes 1, 2, and 4); and the emphasis on a relation between the life of the American people and their literature. 2394. Canby, Henry Seidel. Definitions; essays in contemporary criticism. New York, Har- court, Brace, 1922. 303 p. 22-16901 PS78.C3, 1st ser. In his long career as English professor and editor, LITERARY HISTORY AND CRITICISM / 201 Canby (b. 1878) has produced much literary criti- cism with a wide popularity. Like Van Wyck Brooks (q. v.), he flourished before the New Criticism became dominant, and has remained out- side that movement. His many works include biographies of Whitman and Thoreau; a history of the Brandywine in the Rivers of America series (q. v.); and his autobiographical American Memoir (Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1947. 433 p.) the first two parts of which, previously published inde- pendently as "The Age of Confidence," deal with his childhood in Wilmington, Delaware, while the third part, "Alma Mater," is a commentary on college life. 2395. Canby, Henry Seidel. Definitions; essays in contemporary criticism. (Second series) New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1924. 308 p. 24-22299 PS78.C3, 2d ser. 2396. Canby, Henry Seidel. American estimates. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1929. 287 p. 29-7862 PN511.C34 An informal continuation of the "definitions" series above. 2397. Canby, Henry Seidel. Classic Americans; a study of eminent American writers from Irving to Whitman, with an introductory survey of the colonial background of our national literature. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1931. 371 p. 31-25290 PS88.C35 "A selective bibliography": p. 353-360. Contents. — The colonial background. — Wash- ington Irving. — James Fenimore Cooper. — Ralph Waldo Emerson. — Henry David Thoreau. — Haw- thorne and Melville. — Edgar Allan Poe. — Walt Whitman. 2398. Canby, Henry Seidel. Seven years' harvest; notes on contemporary literature. New York, Farrar & Rinehart, 1936. 310 p. 36-28731 PN771.C3 All but one of these essays were published origi- nally in the Saturday Review of Literature, a weekly periodical which Canby edited from 1924 to 1936. 2399. Cargill, Oscar. Intellectual America; ideas on the march. New York, Macmillan, 1941. xxi, 777 p. 41-21084 PS88.C37 Critical survey that undertakes to trace the effect of various European ideas on writers in America; ■ concentrates chiefly on the period in American litera- ture between 1 890-1 940. 2400. Carpenter, Frederic Ives. American litera- ture and the dream. New York, Philosophi- cal Library, 1955. 220 p. 56-193 PS88.C38 "This book began as a series of essays in interpre- tation of the major American authors. But in the process of writing, an idea crystallized: American literature has differed from English because of the constant and omnipresent influence of the American dream upon it. But this influence has usually been indirect and unconscious, because the dream has re- mained vague and undefined. . . . But the vague idea has influenced the plotting of our fiction and the imagining of our poetry. Almost by inad- vertence our literature has accomplished a symbolic and experimental projection of it." — Introduction. 2401. Clark, Harry Hayden, ed. Transitions in American literary history; edited ... for the American Literature Group of the Modern Language Association. Durham, N. C, Duke Uni- versity Press, 1953 [i. e. 1954] 479 p. 53-8269 PS88.C6 Contents. — Introduction, by Harry Hayden Clark. — The decline of Puritanism, by Clarence H. Faust. — The late eighteenth century: an age of con- tradictions, by Leon Howard. — The decline of neo- classicism, 1801-1848, by M. F. Heiser. — The rise of romanticism, 1805-1855, by G. H. Orians. — The rise of Transcendentalism, 1815-1860, by Alex- ander Kern. — The decline of romantic idealism, 1855—1871, by Floyd Stovall. — The rise of realism. 1871-1891, by Robert Falk. 2402. Coan, Otis W., and Richard G. Lilian!. America in fiction, an annotated list of novels that interpret aspects of life in the United States. 4th ed. Stanford, Stanford University Press, 1956. 200 p. 56-7269 Z1361.C6C6 1956 Includes best sellers as well as standard works. It is useful for its subject approach to aspects of American life as treated in novels. The emphasis is largely on realism rather than on literary merit. 2403. Coffman, Stanley K. Imagism, a chapter for the history of modern poetry. Norman, Uni- versity of Oklahoma Press, 195 r . xi, 2^ \\ 51-9592 PS310.I5C6 Following a chronology of the fmagist movement in England and the United States, the book sketches the contributions of various important figures in the movement and also provides material on the sources of modern poetic forms. 2404. Conner. Frederick W. Cosmic optimism; a study of the interpretation ot evolution by American poets Erom Emerson to Robinson. Gainesville, University ol Florida Press, i .; . xiv, 45S p. 49-9861 PS310J Bibliography: p. 4 53 442. 202 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 2405. Cowie, Alexander. The rise of the Ameri- can novel. New York, American Book Co., 1951. xii, 877 p. (American literature series) 51-2714 PS371.C73 1951 Bibliography: p. 861-862. Critical history of the novel from the beginning through the work of Henry James, with a final chap- ter on "new directions," 1 890-1940. 2406. Cowley, Malcolm, ed. After the genteel tra- dition; American writers since 1910. New York, Norton, 1937. 270 p. 37-27387 PS221.C645 Contents. — Foreword: The revolt against gen- tility. — Theodore Dreiser, by John Chamberlain. — Upton Sinclair, by Robert Cantwell. — Willa Gather, by Lionel Trilling. — Van Wyck Brooks, by Bernard Smith. — Carl Sandburg, by Newton Arvin. — Sher- wood Anderson, by R. M. Lovett. — H. L. Mencken, by Louis Kronenberger. — Sinclair Lewis, by Robert Cantwell. — Eugene O'Neill, by Lionel Trilling. — The James Branch Cabell period, by P. M. Jack. — Two poets: Jeffers and Millay, by Hildegarde Flan- ner. — Dos Passos: poet against the world, by Mal- colm Cowley. — Homage to Hemingway, by J. P. Bishop. — Thomas Wolfe, by Hamilton Basso. — Postscript: Twenty years of American literature. — A literary calendar: 1911-1930. — Biographies in brief. — Index of names. Cowley (b. 1898) is in his own right a creative writer, but he is best known as a critic closely asso- ciated with the expatriate writers of the "lost genera- tion." He has also done considerable work as an editor, including the volumes of writings by Faulk- ner, Hawthorne, and Hemingway in the Viking portable library series and The Complete Poetry and Prose of Walt Whitman for the American classics 2407. Cowley, Malcolm, ed. Books that changed our minds; edited by Malcolm Cowley & Bernard Smith. New York, Doubleday, Doran, 1939. 285 p. 39- 2 9439 Z1003.C87 Contents. — A foreword on the books that changed our minds. — Freud and "The interpreta- tion of dreams," by George Soule. — "The education of Henry Adams," by Louis Kronenberger. — Tur- ner's "The frontier in American history," by C. A. Beard. — Sumner's "Folkways," by John Chamber- lain. — Veblen and "Business enterprise," by R. G. Tugwell. — Dewey and his "Studies in logical the- ory," by C. E. Ayres. — Boas and "The mind of primi- tive man," by Paul Radin. — Beard's "Economic interpretation of the Constitution," by Max Lerner. — Richard's "The principles of literary criti- cism," by David Daiches. — Parrington's "Main cur- rents in American thought," by Bernard Smith. — Lenin's "The state and revolution," by Max Lerner. — Spengler's "The decline of the West," by Lewis Mumford. — An afterword on the modern mind. 2408. Cowley, Malcolm. Exile's return; a literary odyssey of the 1920's. New York, Viking Press, 1 95 1. 322 p. 51-4022 PS221.C65 1951 A revised and enlarged version of a book that first appeared in 1934. The book deals with mem- bers of the "lost generation," particularly the ex- patriate authors. 2409. Cowley, Malcolm. The literary situation. New York, Viking Press, 1954. 259 p. 54-7984 PS221.C67 A discussion of the present-day situation of au- thors in America, and of the "new" fiction. 2410. Crane, Ronald S., ed. Critics and criticism, ancient and modern, by R. S. Crane [and others] Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1952. 647 p. 52-7330 PN81.C8 A collection of essays on critics which expresses the neo-Aristotelian views of the "Chicago school" of criticism. 2411. Criticism in America, its functions and status; essays by Irving Babbitt, Van Wyck Brooks, W. C. Brownell, Ernest Boyd, T. S. Eliot, H. L. Mencken, Stuart P. Sherman, J. E. Spingarn, and George E. Woodberry. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1924. 330 p. 24-3993 PS78.C7 "The first essay dates from 1910, the last from 1923, and virtually every critical point of view is given a hearing." — Prefatory note. 2412. Denny, Margaret, and William H. Gilman, eds. The American writer and the European tradition. Minneapolis, Published for the University of Rochester by the University of Minnesota Press, 1950. 192 p. 50-13091 PS157.D4 Contents. — The Renaissance tradition in Amer- ica, by Louis B. Wright. — The Enlightenment and the American dream, by Theodore Hornberger. — Benjamin Franklin, promoter of useful knowledge, by Robert E. Spiller. — Cosmopolitanism in Ameri- can literature before 1880, by Stanley T. Williams. — Origins of a native American literary tradition, by Henry Nash Smith. — Americanization of the Euro- pean heritage, by Leon Howard. — American writers as critics of nineteenth-century society, by Willard Thorp. — The reception of some nineteenth-century American authors in Europe, by Clarence Gohdes. — American naturalism; reflections from another era, by Alfred Kazin. — Contemporary American litera- ture in its relation to ideas, by Lionel Trilling. — LITERARY HISTORY AND CRITICISM / 203 The American poet in relation to science, by Nor- man Holmes Pearson. — Some European views of contemporary American literature, by Harry Levin. 2413. Deutsch, Babette. This modern poetry. New York, Norton, 1935. 284 p. 35-18099 PR601.D4 Babette Deutsch (b. 1895) has done much critical work on modern poetry, with articles appearing in a number of periodicals, and is the author of Walt Whitman, Builder for America (New York, Mess- ner, 1941. 278 p.). In addition she has distin- guished herself as a poet with volumes such as Banners (New York, Doran, 191 9. 104 p.), Honey Out of the Rock^ (New York, Appleton, 1925. 129 p.), Fire for the Night (New York, Cape & Smith, 1930. 77 p.), Epistle to Prometheus (New York, Cape & Smith, 1931. 95 p.), One Part Love (New York, Oxford University Press, 1939. 86 p.), Ta\c Them, Stranger (New York, Holt, 1944. 72 p.), and Animal, Vegetable, Mineral (New York, Dutton, 1954. 59 p.). Another aspect of her work in poetry is the large number of translations she has made from foreign poetry, principally from German and Russian and usually in collaboration with her husband, Avrahm Yarmolinsky. She has also pub- lished four novels: A Brittle Heaven (New York, Greenberg, 1926. 326 p.), which pictures a young woman's life in America, and in the character of Mark Gideon presents a view of Randolph Bourne (q. v.); In Such a Night (New York, Day, 1927. 260 p.), which depicts the guests at a housewarm- ing party; Mas\ of Silenus, a Novel about Socrates (New York, Simon & Schuster, 1933. 249 p.); and Rogue's Legacy, a Novel about Francois Villon (New York, Coward-McCann, 1942. 392 p.). 2414. Deutsch, Babette. Poetry in our time. New York, Holt, 1952. 411 p. 52-6624 PR601.D43 A discussion of modern American and British poetry. 2415. De Voto, Bernard A. Forays and rebuttals. Boston, Little, Brown, 1936. 403 p. 36-28727 PS3507.E867F6 1936 A collection of magazine articles, some of which are literary criticism, but many of which reveal Dc Voto's more general journalistic activities. Similar in nature are Minority Report (Boston, Little, Brown, 1940. 346 p.) and The F.asy Chair (Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1955. 356 p.). De Voto (1897-1956) is probably best known for his historical works (discussed elsewhere in this bibliography), but his widest audience was for his articles in periodicals, principally Harper's Maga- zine and, earlier. The Saturday Review of Litera- ture. His first prominent literary role was that of a novelist, starring with The Crooked Mile (New York, Minton, Balch, 1924. 432 p.), which pic- tures life in a small western city. His next novel was The Chariot of Fire, an American Novel (New York, Macmillan, 1926. 356 p.), which presents a view of frenzied religion in a pioneering frontier community. His other novels include The House of Sun-Goes-Down (New York, Macmillan, 1928. 408 p.), which has for setting the opening of the West, but without the usual melodramatics and staging of "westerns"; We Accept With Pleasure (Boston, Little, Brown, 1934. 471 p.), which is about a group of Bostonian intellectuals in the post World War I period; and Mountain Time (Boston, Little, Brown, 1947. 357 p.), a psychological novel about a New York surgeon and an author's wife who find happiness and escape from neuroses in a city in the mountain west. In addition De Voto wrote mystery and espionage novels under the pseu- donym of John August. The Hour (Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1951. 84 p.) discusses, with a touch of humor, alcoholic beverages and the Ameri- can tradition. 2416. De Voto, Bernard A. Mark Twain's Amer- ica. Boston, Little, Brown, 1932. 353 p. 32-26989 PS1331.D4 Bibliography: p. [3231-334; "Newspaper humor of the Southwestern frontier": p. [335]— 339. A study of the contribution of frontier America to Mark Twain's writings. The work is by impli- cation a discussion of a major series of factors in American literature. More specifically concerned with Mark Twain as creative artist is Mm { Twain at Wor\ (Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1942. 144 p.). 2417. De Voto, Bernard A. The literary fallacy. Boston, Litde, Brown, 1944. 175 p. 44-3169 PS221.D4 A discussion of an aspect of the literature of the "lost generation" and the twenties; in particular, it is an attack on some of the criticism of Van Wyck Brooks (q. v.) and its influence on some of the lead- ing writers of the period. 2418. De Voto, Bernard A. The world of fiction. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1950. 299 p. 50-6694 PN3331.n1 A book on the production of fiction and the rela- tionship between works of fiction and the reader. 2419. Duffey, Bernard I. The Chicago renais- sance in American letters; a critical history. [East Lansing] Michigan State College Press, 1954. 285 p. 54-11828 PS285.C47D8 204 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Deals principally with such authors as Henry Fuller, Hamlin Garland, Joseph Kirkland, Robert Herrick, Edgar Lee Masters, Sherwood Anderson, Carl Sandburg, and Vachel Lindsay. "By an in- evitable if inexact usage, the continuous wave of lit- erary activity in Chicago, beginning in the last decade of the nineteenth century and continuing through the first two decades of the twentieth, has come to be known as the Chicago renaissance. It was, of course, not a re-birth but the working out within the city of creative forces common to the nation at that time." — p. 6. 2420. Feidelson, Charles N. Symbolism and American literature. Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1953. 355 p. 53-6890 PS201.F4 Bibliography: p. 220-227. Discusses the theory and use of symbolism in American literature from the 17th centurv to the end of the 19th; emphasizes the works of Haw- thorne, Whitman, Melville, and Poe, whom the author assesses as leading American symbolists. 2421. Fishman, Solomon. The disinherited of art; writer and background. Berkeley, Uni- versity of California Press, 1953. xii, 178 p. (Per- spectives in criticism, 2) 53—5797 PN85.F5 Written in the form of a series of related essays, the work is concerned with the ideas of American critics about the influence on American literature of the culture that produced it; considers major critical movements and conflicts in the United States since the time of the First World War; topics dealt with include literary nationalism, Marxism, agrarianism, and the "New Criticism." Wayne Shumaker's Elements of Critical Theory (Berkeley, University of California Press, 1952. 131 p.), the first volume in the Perspectives in criticism series, is a more general book dealing with the theory of criticism. 2422. Foerster, Norman. Nature in American lit- erature; studies in the modern view of na- ture. New York, Macmillan, 1923. 324 p. 23-5206 PS163.F6 A study of the observations of nature reflected in the work of writers during the 19th and early 20th centuries. It includes material on Bryant, Whittier, Emerson, Thoreau, Lowell, Whitman, Lanier, Muir, and Burroughs. Foerster (b. 1887) is one of the leading neo- humanists. He has done much original and edi- torial work in the fields of literature and education in the humanities. 2423. Foerster, Norman. American criticism; a study in literary theory from Poe to the present. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1928. xvi, 273 p. 28-13812 PS62.F6 Contents. — Poe. — Emerson. — Lowell. — Whit- man. — The twentieth century: conclusion. 2424. Foerster, Norman, ed. The reinterpreta- tion of American literature; some contribu- tions toward the understanding of its historical development, edited . . . for the American Litera- ture Group of the Modern Language Association. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1928. 271 p. 28-25395 PS88.F6 Contents. — A call for a literary historian, by Fred Lewis Pattee. — Factors in American literary his- tory, by Norman Foerster. — The frontier, by Jay B. Hubbell. — The European background, by Howard Mumford Jones. — The Puritan tradition, by Kenneth B. Murdock. — The romantic move- ment, by Paul Kaufman. — The development of realism, by Vernon Louis Parrington. — American history and American literary history, by A. M. Schlesinger. — American literary history and Amer- ican literature, by Harry Hayden Clark. — Appendix A. Select bibliography, by Gregory Paine (p. 217- 236). — Appendix B. List of dissertations and articles, and of Americana in libraries, by Ernest E. Leisy (p. 237-271). 2425. Foerster, Norman, ed. Humanism and America; essays on the outlook of modern civilisation. New York, Farrar & Rinehart, 1930. xvii, 294 p. 30-6560 B821.F6 "A list of books": p. 291-294. Contents. — Preface, by Norman Foerster. — The pretensions of science, by Louis Trenchard More. — Humanism: an essay at definition, by Irving Bab- bitt. — The humility of common sense, by Paul Elmer More. — The pride of modernity, by G. R. Elliott. — Religion without humanism, by T. S. Eliot. — The plight of our arts, by Frank Jewett Mather, Jr. — The dilemma of modern tragedy, by Alan Reynolds Thompson. — An American tragedy, by Robert Sha- fer. — Pandora's box in American fiction, by Harry Hayden Clark. — Dionysus in dismay, by Stanley P. Chase. — Our critical spokesmen, by Gorham B. Munson. — Behaviour and continuity, by Bernard Bandler II. — The well of discipline, by Sherlock B. Gass. — Courage and education, by Richard Lindley Brown. 2426. Frankenberg, Lloyd. Pleasure dome: on reading modern poetry. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1949. 372 p. 49-50103 PS324.F7 The author's purpose is "to give clues to the rela- tionships between sound and meaning in the poems of living poets," with major attention to T. S. Eliot, Marianne Moore, E. E. Cummings, and Wallace LITERARY HISTORY AN T D CRITICISM / 205 Stevens to illustrate the variety of modern poetry, and with short statements on Ezra Pound, W. C. Williams, Ogden Nash, W. H. Auden, Robert Low- ell, and Elizabeth Bishop. 2427. Frohock, Wilbur M. The novel of violence in America, 1920-1950. Dallas, Southern Methodist University, 1950. 216 p. 50-8028 PS379.F7 The thesis is that during the period under discus- sion the stream of American fiction bifurcated into two major streams, one carrying the theme of the passing of time, and the other that of violence. From this point of view the author discusses Dos Passos, T. Wolfe, Farrell, Cain, Faulkner, Caldwell, Steinbeck, and Hemingway. 2428. Geismar, Maxwell D. Writers in crisis; the American novel between two wars. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1942. 299 p. [His The novel in America] 42-15988 PS379.G4 Contents. — Ring Lardner. — Ernest Heming- way. — John Dos Passos. — William Faulkner. — Thomas Wolfe. — John Steinbeck. This is the first volume of a series entitled The novel in America. 2429. Geismar, Maxwell D. The last of the pro- vincials; the American novel, 1915-1925. H. L. Mencken, Sinclair Lewis, Willa Cather, Sher- wood Anderson, F. Scott Fitzgerald. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1947. 404 p. [His The novel in America] 47-11777 PS379.G36 2430. Geismar, Maxwell D. Rebels and ancestors; the American novel, 1890-1915: Frank Mor- ris, Stephen Crane, Jack London, Ellen Glasgow [and] Theodore Dreiser. Boston, Houghton Mif- flin, 1953. 435 p. [His The novel in America] 53-5 73« PS379.G38 2431. Gelfant, Blanche H. The American city novel. Norman, University of Oklahoma Press, 1954. 289 p. 54-593 6 PS374.C5G4 A study of the metropolis in 20th-century Ameri- can fiction. 2432. Gohdes, Clarence L. F. American literature in nineteenth-century England. New York, Columbia University Press, 1944. 191 p. A44-1777 PS201.G6 Using illustrations from the post-1832 period, the author has written with the purpose of demonstrat- ing that the English people displayed a wide interest in American literature during the 19th century. The author has also written The Periodicals of /Inierican Transcendentalism (Durham, N. C, Duke Univer- sity Press, 1931. 264 p.). 2433. Hart, James D. The Oxford companion to American literature. 3d ed. [rev. and enl.] New York, Oxford University Press, 1956. 890 p. 56-6557 PS21.H3 1956 A reference work in dictionary form. It con- tains entries on all types of matters pertaining to the written word in America. Entries may be found for authors, titles, movements, magazines, awards, groups, and individuals mentioned in literature, etc. 2434. Hart, James D. The popular book; a his- tory of America's literary taste. New York, Oxford University Press, 1950. 351 p. 50-9417 Z1003.H328 "This study . . . examines the tastes that have guided Americans in selecting their popular read- ing over the past three centuries. Dealing with taste in relation to social compulsions, this inquiry is concerned with the connection between popular books read for pleasure by adult Americans and the times in which those books were read." — Postscript. 2435. Haycraft, Howard, ed. The art of the mystery story; a collection of critical essays, edited, and with a commentary, by Howard Hay- craft. New York, Simon & Schuster, 1946. 545 p. 47-30017 PN3448.D4H28 "Putting crime on the shelf; for bibliophiles, bib- liographers, and — readers": p. [45i]~507. 2436. Haycraft, Howard. Murder for pleasure; the life and times of the detective story. New York, Appleton-Century, 1941. 409 p. 41-16907 PN3448.D4H3 "Who's who in detection': p. 340-386. "Some reading about the detective story": p. 279- 297. "A detective story bookshelf": p. 298-511. A history of the detective story, starting with Edgar Allan Poe. This form of popular fiction originated and flourished in America, whence it spread to many other parts of the world. A his- tory in the form of a bibliography with commentary is Queen's (Jtiorum; a History of the Detective- Crime Short Story as Revealed by the 106 Most Im- portant Booths Published in This Field since 1845 (Boston, Little, Brown, 1951. 132 p.) by "Ellexy Queen," the pseudonym ol a pair of mystery writers who have published much ol the highly popular work in this field. An analysis of the form and content basic to this type <>i fiction may be found in Marie 1'. Rodell's Mystery Fiction: T/ic<>>: Technique < New York, Hermitage House, 1952. 230 p.), which was written as a handbook for w riters in this held. 206 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 2437. Hazard, Lucy Lockvvood. The frontier in American literature. New York, Crowell, 1927. xx, 308 p. 27-2200 PS169.F7H3 "General bibliography": p. 301-304; bibliography at end of each chapter. Based on F. J. Turner's thesis in The Significance of the Frontier in American History (q. v.), this work undertakes to trace the influence on American literature as conceived in a very broad sense. The first chapter is "The Puritan Frontier," and the last is "The Coming Age of Spiritual Pioneering." 2438. Herron, Ima Honaker. The small town in American literature. Durham, N. C, Duke University Press, 1939. 477 p. 39-11443 PS169.S5H4 1935 "Check-list for the town in early literature": p. [433] — 434- "Selected bibliography": p. [439] -468. 2439. Hicks, Granville. The great tradition; an interpretation of American literature since the Civil War. Rev. ed. New York, Macmillan, 1935. xv, 341 p. 36-27042 PS214.H5 1935 Bibliography: p. 331-336. Marxian standards applied to 19th- and 20th-cen- tury literature in America. The first edition (1933) was later enlarged by a chapter on new proletarian writers. Since then the author has modified his extreme views. The work retains historical im- portance, however, both because of its influence and because it reflects the views of a once sizable trend in literary study. 2440. Hoffman, Frederick J. The twenties; Amer- ican writing in the postwar decade. New York, Viking Press, 1955. 466 p. 55-7379 PS221.H58 Bibliography: p. 431-434. Preoccupations, modes of thought, and attitudes in the United States, viewed from the perspective provided by American literature, roughly from 1918 to 1932, for the purpose of realizing the major issues of the times. Hoffman is also the author of Freudianism and the Literary Mind (Baton Rouge, Louisiana State University Press, 1945. 346 p.), which does not limit its scope to American authors, but which does discuss a movement of major im- portance for contemporary American literature. 2441. Horton, Rod W., and Herbert W. Edwards. Backgrounds of American literary thought. New York, Appleton-Century-Crofts, 1952. 425 p. (Appleton-Century handbooks of literature) 52-12730 PS88.H6 A book which discusses American literature in terms of the milieu in which it was produced. The authors attempt to show that "Idealism and Oppor- tunity have constantly been the principal dynamics of American civilization." Because of its condensed nature, few authors are discussed in detail; the or- ganization is in terms of movements, such as Puri- tanism, Expansionism, Freudianism, Marxism, etc. 2442. Hubbell, Jay Broadus. The South in Amer- ican literature, 1607-1900. Durham, N. C, Duke University Press, 1954. xix, 987 p. 54-9434 PS261.M78 In scope and detail by far the most comprehensive work on the subject, being based on nearly 20 years of research. In his Foreword the author emphasizes the following objectives of the work: It aims to integrate the literature of the Southern states with that of the rest of the Nation; discusses Southern life as it is represented by writers from other sec- tions; suggests the pattern of literary culture in the South and the books read by Southerners; de- votes proportionately more space to narrative and exposition, particularly in connection with bio- graphical information, than to criticism. A special i feature is the critical bibliographical essay (p. 88 1- 974), which also includes bibliographical references to facilitate the study of individual authors. A sym- posium of 29 essays dealing with modern Southern literature is Southern Renaissance: The Literature of the Modern South (Baltimore, Johns Hopkins Press, 1953. 450 p.), edited by Louis D. Rubin and Robert D. Jacobs; most of the essays appeared originally in The hlophins Review. 2443. Hyman, Stanley Edgar. The armed vision; a study in the methods of modern literary criticism. New York, Knopf, 1948. 417 p. 48-6970 PN94.H9 A study of modern critical methods as exemplified by a selected group of literary critics. The sources of the techniques are also studied, and possibilities for an integrative system of the best aspects ex- amined. Critics studied include Edmund Wilson, Yvor Winters, T. S. Eliot, Van Wyck Brooks, Con- stance Rourke, R. P. Blackmur, and Kenneth Burke. 2444. Johannsen, Albert. The House of Beadle and Adams and its dime and nickel novels; the story of a vanished literature. With a foreword by John T. Mclntyre. Norman, University of Okla- homa Press, 1950. 2 v. illus. 50-8158 Z1231.F4J68 Bibliography: v. 2, p. 328-338. Contents. — v. 1. A history of the firm. Numeri- cal lists of the various series of Beadle novels. — v. 2. The authors and their novels. Appendix. LITERARY HISTORY AND CRITICISM / 207 2445. Jones, Howard Mumford. Ideas in Amer- ica. Cambridge, Mass., Harvard University Press, 1944. 304 p. A44-1981 PS121.J6 A study of the historical role of ideas in America, particularly in the field of literature. Prof. Jones (b. 1892) is a leading scholar in the field of Ameri- can intellectual history and literature. He has writ- ten and edited a number of books in these fields, notably his America and French Culture, 1750-1848 (q. v.). 2446. Jones, Howard Mumford. The theory of American literature. Ithaca, Cornell Uni- versity Press, 1948. 208 p. (Cornell University. Messenger lectures on the evolution of civilization, 1947) 48-11948 PS31.J6 A survey of historical and critical attitudes toward American literature in the 19th and 20th centuries. 2447. Jones, Howard Mumford. Guide to Amer- ican literature and its backgrounds since 1890. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1953. 151 p. 53-9 39 Z1225.J65 Part I comprises a list of monographic studies and of critical journals, designed to enable the student better to understand the social and economic back- grounds of literature. Part II includes a classified guide to works in American literature that are thought to have contributed to shaping the Ameri- can mind. 2448. Kazin, Alfred. On native grounds, an in- terpretation of modern American prose liter- ature. New York, Reynal & Hitchcock, 1942. 541 p. 42-24811 PS379.K3 Believing that "Our modern literature in America is at bottom only the expression of our modern life in America," the author seeks to establish that rela- tionship historically in three periods: 1890-1917. 1918-1929, and 1930-1940. In 1956 a somewhat abridged version with an appendix covering post- 1940 writing was published in the Doubleday Anchor books series. 2449. Kazin, Alfred. The inmost leaf; a selection of essays. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1955. 273 p. 55-10810 PN511.K25 A group of 28 essays on literary figures and sub- jects. While there is a wide range of European and American topics, the emphasis is on the 19th century. 2450. Knight, Grant C. The critical period in American literature. Chapel Hill, Uni- versity of North Carolina Press, 1951. xi, 208 p. 51-13564 PS214.K6 Bibliography: p. 177-194. 2451. Knight, Grant C. The strenuous age in American literature. Chapel Hill, Univer- sity of North Carolina Press, 1954. xi, 270 p. 54-13124 PS221.K6 Bibliography: p. [23i]-253. The first of the books described in the two fore- going references covers 1890 to 1900; the second, its sequel, continues the examination through the years 1900-1910. The same approach is used in each, by giving literature a position in the social panorama and attempting to integrate literature with the social history of the time, in order that glimpses may be caught of other art forms, of politics, of philosophy, and of science. Cf. Foreword of The Strenuous Age, p. viii. 2452. Krieger, Murray. The new apologists for poetry. Minneapolis, University of Minne- sota Press, 1956. 225 p. 56-7811 PN1031.K7 A discussion of some of the new critics as they throw light on some of the problems of poetry. The three main sections of the book are "The Creative Process," "The Aesthetic Object," and "The Func- tion of Poetry." 2453. Krutch, Joseph Wood. Experience and art; some aspects of the aesthetics of literature. New York, Smith & Haas, 1932. 222 p. 32-32159 PN45.K7 Krutch (b. 1893) has become prominent as a writer in a number of fields. His books on Ameri- can literature include Edgar Allan Poe, a Study in Genius (New York, Knopf, 1926. 244 p.) and Henry David Thoreau (New York, Sioane, 1948. 298 p.). In a more philosophical vein arc The Modern Temper; a Study and a Confession ( New York, Flarcourt, Brace, 1929. 249 p.) and The Measure of Man: On Freedom, Human Values, Sur- vival, and the Modern Temper (Indianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill, 1954. 261 p.). Krutch has also dis- tinguished himself in the field of nature writing: The Best of Two Worlds (New York, Sioane, 1953. 171 p.) is an autobiographical work on his life as an urbanite who can spend most of his time in the country; The Desert Year (New York, Sioane, 270 p.) and The Voice of the Desert, a Naturalist's Interpretation (New York, Sioane. ic- — Old friends with new faces. — Invention and imagination.— Poe and the detective-story.— Mark I wain. The modern novel and the modern play. — The literary merit of our latter daj dr.im.i. — The art of the stage-manager. 210 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 2469. Matthews, Brander. The American of the future, and other essays. New York, Scrib- ner, 1909. 355 p. 9-26987 PS2372.A4 1909 Contents. — The American of the future. — Amer- ican character. — The Americans and the British. — "Blood is thicker than water." — The scream of the spread-eagle. — American manners. — American hu- mor. — The speech of the people. — English as a world-language. — Simplified spelling and "fonetic reform." — The question of the theater. — Persuasion and controversy. — Reform and reformers. — "Those literary fellows." — Standards of success. 2470. Matthews, Brander. A study of the drama. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1910. 320 p. illus. 10-7803 PN1661.M3 2471. Matthews, Brander. Gateways to literature, and other essays. New York, Scribner, 1912. 296 p. 12-21990 PR99.M33 Contents. — Gateways to literature. — The eco- nomic interpretation of literary history. — In behalf of the general reader. — The duty of imitation. — The Devil's advocate. — Literary criticism and book- reviewing. — Familiar verse. — French poets and Eng- lish readers. — A note on Anatole France. — Poe's cos- mopolitan fame. — Fenimore Cooper. — Bronson Howard. 2472. Matthews, Brander. A book about the theater. New York, Scribner, 1916. 334 p. illus. 16-21742 PN2037.M35 Contents. — The show business. — The limitations of the stage. — A moral from a toy theater. — Why five acts? — Dramatic collaboration. — The dramatiza- tion of novels and the novelization of plays. — Woman dramatists. — The evolution of scene-paint- ing. — The book of the opera. — The poetry of the dance. — The principles of pantomime. — The ideal of the acrobat. — The decline and fall of the Negro- minstrelsy. — The utility of the variety-show. — The method of modern magic. — The lamentable tragedy of Punch and Judy. — The puppet-play, past and present. — Shadow-pantomime, with all the modern improvements. — The problem of dramatic criticism. 2473. Matthews, Brander. These many years, recollections of a New Yorker. New York, Scribner, 1917. 463 p. 17-25853 PS2373.A45 1917 An autobiographical work that reveals much of the literary world of the period, particularly drama. It is also useful for its picture of the life of a cul- tured, urban American. 2474. Matthews, Brander. The tocsin of revolt, and other essays. New York, Scribner, 1922. 295 p. 22-18663 PS2372.T6 1922 Contents. — The tocsin of revolt. — The duty of the intellectuals. — The dwelling of a day-dream. — What is American literature? — The centenary of a question. — American aphorisms. — A plea for the platitude. — On the length of Cleopatra's nose. — Concerning conversation. — The gende art of re- partee. — Cosmopolitan cookery. — On working too much and working too fast. — The modernity of Moliere. — Theodore Roosevelt as a man of letters. — Memories of Mark Twain. 2475. Matthews, Brander. Rip Van Winkle goes to the play, and other essays on plays and players. New York, Scribner, 1926. 256 p. 26-16526 PN1655.M25 Contents. — Rip Van Winkle goes to the play. — Uncle Sam, exporter of plays. — What is a "well- made" play? — The question of the soliloquy. — On the right of an author to repeat himself. — Second- hand situations. — Claptrap. — The scene is laid. — The development of scenic devices. — Memories of actresses. — The art of acting. 2476. Matthiessen, Francis O. American renais- sance; art and expression in the age of Emer- son and Whitman. New York, Oxford University Press, 1941. xxiv, 678 p. 41-9633 PS201.M3 A philosophical interpretation of intellectual and literary elements in the American tradition as exem- plified by Emerson, Thoreau, Hawthorne, Melville, Whitman, and their associates. F. O. Matthiessen (1902-1950) early established himself as one of the leading commentators on American literature with such works as Sarah Orne Jewett (Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1929. 159 p.), The Achievement of T. S. Eliot; an Essay on the Nature of Poetry (Boston, Houghton Mif- flin, 1935. 159 p.), Henry James, the Major Phase (New York, Oxford University Press, 1944. 190 p.), The fames Family, Including Selections from the Writings of Henry James, Senior, William, Henry & Alice James (New York, Knopf, 1947. 706 p.), and Theodore Dreiser (New York, Sloane, 1951. 267 p.). 2477. Matthiessen, Francis O. The responsibilities of the critic; essays and reviews. Selected by John Rackliffe. New York, Oxford University Press, 1952. xvi, 282 p. 52-12569 PS121.M3 A posthumous selection of fifty of his articles, originally published in various periodicals. The arrangement is more by subject (in broad categories such as modern poetry and literary critics and his- torians), rather than chronological. LITERARY HISTORY AND CRITICISM / 211 2478. Miller, Perry. The raven and the whale; the war of words and wits in the era of Poe and Melville. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1956. 370 p. 56-6659 PS74.M5 A presentation of the conflict between die na- tionalists and the cosmopolitanites that centered in New York's literary circles during the middle of the 19th century. 2479. More, Paul Elmer. Shelburne essays. 1st series. New York, Putnam, 1904. 253 p. 4-22974 PR99.M7, v. 1 "All but one of these essays were written for magazines or for the daily press." Partial Contents. — A hermit's notes on Tho- reau. — The solitude of Nathaniel Hawthorne. — The origins of Hawthorne and Poe. — The influence of Emerson. — The science of English verse. — The re- ligious ground of humanitarianism. Paul Elmer More (1864-1937) was with Irving Babbitt (q. v.) one of the leaders of the new hu- manists. Between 1904 and 1921 he published eleven series ot "Shelburne essays." These revealed his international interests and his university studies in the classics. Among the discussions of More is Robert Shafer's Paul Elmer More and American Criticism (New Haven, Yale University Press, 1935. 3 2 5P-)- 2480. More, Paul Elmer. A New England group and others; Shelburne essays, nth series. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1921. 295 p. 21-5556 PR99.M7, v. 11 Contents. — The spirit and poetry of early New England. — Jonathan Edwards. — Emerson. — Charles Eliot Norton. — Henry Adams. — Evolution and the other world. Samuel Buder of Erewhon. — Viscount Morley. — Economic ideals. — Oxford, women, and God. — Index to Shelburne essays. 2481. More. Paul Elmer. Selected Shelburne es- says. New York, Oxford University Press, 1935. xiii, 297 p. (The World's classics, 434) 35-20684 PR99.M75 "The material here reprinted is selected from the eleven volumes of 'Shelburne essays' published be- tween 1904-1921 . . . With the exception of the study of Criticism the essays follow the chronologi- cal order of publication, and, save for a few minor corrections, the original text is reproduced ex- actly." — Preface. Contents. — Criticism. — Lafcadio Hearn. — Chris- tina Rossetti. — The Greek anthology. — George Gis- sing. — Thoreau's journal. — Chesterfield. — Sir Thomas Browne. — Shelley. — Thomas Henry Hux- ley. — Jonathan Edwards. — Viscount Morley. — Ox- ford, women, and God. 2482. Mott, Frank Luther. Golden multitudes; the story of best sellers in the United States. New York, Macmillan, 1947. 357 p. 47-11742 Zio33.1>^N!6 Other works on best sellers include James David Hart's The Popular Bool^; a History of America's Literary Taste (New York, Oxford University Press, ^S * 35 1 P-) an d Alice Payne Hackett's Fifty Years of Best Sellers, 1895- 1945 (New York, Bow- ker, 1945. 140 p.), a bibliographical work which was followed by a supplement: Seven Years of Best Sellers, 1945-1951 (New York, Bowker, 1952, 23 p.). A new edition of the Hackett work, with the title Sixty Years of Best Sellers, is scheduled for publi- cation in the second half of 1956. 2483. Murdock, Kenneth B. Literature & the- ology in colonial New England. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1949. 235 p. 49-10048 PS195.R4M8 Murdock is a prominent scholar of American lit- erature who has done most of his work in the field of colonial New England studies. This is exempli- fied by his biography Increase Mather, the Foremost American Puritan (Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1925. 472 p.). He has also done consider- able editorial work, notably in compilations such as Handkerchiefs from Paul, Being Pious and Con- solatory Verses of Puritan Massachusetts . . . (Cain- bridge, Harvard University Press, 1927. lxxiii, 134 P-)- 2484. O'Connor, William Van. Sense and sensi- bility in modern poetry. Chicago, Univer- sity of Chicago Press, 1948. 278 p. 48-9231 PS324.O3 1948a The chapters of the book are "The Dissociation of Sensibility," "The Employment of Myths," "The Break with Verism," "The Compromise with Prose," "The Influence of the Metaphysicals," "The Influence of the Pre-Modcrn Americans," "The Imagistic Symbol," "The Quality of Irony," "Ten- sion and the Structure of Poetry," "The Isolation of the Poet," "Forms of Epigonism," "Tradition and Regionalism," "Forms of Dchumanization," "Forms of Obscurity," and "The Political Emphasis." 2485. Parrington, Vernon Louis. Main currents in American thought; an interpretation of American literature from the beginnings to New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1927-30. 3 v. 27-8440 PS88.P3 Each volume has special t. p. Bibliography at end of each volume. Contents. — 1. The colonial mind, 1620-1800. — 2. The romantic revolution in America, r > 212 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES i860. — 3. The beginnings of critical realism in America, 1860-1920; completed to 1900 only. "I have undertaken to give some account of the genesis and development in American letters of certain germinal ideas that have come to be reckoned traditionally American — how they came into being here, how they were opposed, and what influence they have exerted in determining the form and scope of our characteristic ideals and institutions. In pur- suing such a task, I have chosen to follow the broad path of our political, economic, and social develop- ment, rather than the narrower belletristic; and the main divisions of the study have been fixed by forces that are anterior to literary schools and move- ments, creating the body of ideas from which literary culture eventually springs." — Introduction, v. 1. Parrington (1871-1929), in investigating the so- cial, economic, and political backgrounds of Ameri- can literature from the position of a Jeffersonian liberal, produced a leading and seminal work in American literary history. These volumes in- fluenced a large scale re-evaluation by many literary critics, and characterized an entire critical move- ment. The first two volumes were awarded the Pulitzer prize; the third volume was left incom- plete at the author's death. 2486. Pattee, Fred Lewis. Sidelights on American literature. New York, Century, 1922. 342 p. 22-17738 PS121.P3 Contents. — The age of O. Henry. — A critic in C major [H. L. Mencken]. — The prophet of the last frontier [Jack London]. — The epic of New Eng- land. — On the terminal moraine of New England Puritanism [Mary E. Wilkins Freeman]. — The shadow of Longfellow. — The modernness of Philip Freneau. — The centenary of Bryant's poetry. — Poe's "Ulalume." 2487. Pattee, Fred Lewis. The development of the American short story; an historical sur- vey. New York, Harper, 1923. 388 p. 23-4306 PS374.S5P3 1923 A discussion of the history of the short story in America. It is presented largely in terms of indi- vidual authors. The development of the technique of the short story is not discussed at any length. 2488. Pattee, Fred Lewis. The first century of American literature, 1770- 1870. New York, Appleton-Century, 1935. 613 p. 35-8357 PS88.P35 2489. Pattee, Fred Lewis. The feminine fifties. New York, Appleton-Century, 1940. 339 p. 40-8776 PS211.P3 A combination literary and social study of the decade of the 1850's. 2490. Pattee, Fred Lewis. Penn State Yankee . . . autobiography. State College, Pennsylvania State College, 1953. 384 p. illus. 53-63206 PS3531.A8Z5 Pattee (1863-1950) was a New Hampshire farm boy who grew up to be the first regularly appointed professor of American literature, in which capacity he passed much of his life at Pennsylvania State College. He was a literary historian, anthologist, editor, and minor creative writer (of poetry and fiction) in his own right. His extensive, if conserva- tive, interest in "new" literature can be seen in books such as A History of American Literature since i8yo (New York, Century, 1915. 449 p.) and The New American Literature, 1890-1930 (New York, Cen- tury, 1930. 507 p.). 2491. Perry, Bliss. The American spirit in litera- ture; a chronicle of great interpreters. New Haven, Yale University Press, 1918. 281 p. (The chronicles of America series, Allen Johnson, editor, v. 34) 18-16732 PS88.P4 Perry (1 860-1 954) was a noted editor and educa- tor. His autobiography, And Gladly Teach (in- cluded in the Education section of this bibliography) tells the story of his work in the field of American literature. He has also written general studies such as A Study of Prose Fiction (Boston, Houghton Mif- flin, 1920. 406 p.), which first appeared in 1902, and A Study of Poetry (Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1920. 396 p.). He had written biographical studies of figures such as Dana, Whitman, and Whittier. He also published volumes of essays on predominantly literary subjects, as in The Amateur Spirit (Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1904. 164 d.) and Par\-Street Papers (Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1908. 276 p.). His The American Mind (1912) is included in the Intellectual History section. 2492. Perry, Bliss. The praise of folly, and other papers. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1923. 230 p. 23-15166 PS2545.P4A16 1923 Contents. — The praise of folly. — The written word. — Poetry and progress. — Dana's magical chance. — John Burroughs. — The Colonel's qual- ity. — Emerson's most famous speech. — Emerson's savings bank. — James Russell Lowell. — Woodrow Wilson as a man of letters. — Literary criticism in American periodicals. 2493. Piercy, Josephine K. Studies in literary types in seventeenth century America (1607- 1710) In two parts. New Haven, Yale University Press, 1939. 360 p. (Yale studies in English, v. 91) 40-32466 PS186.P5 Contents. — pt. i. Literary types: "The times opinionists." "The latest newes." The almanac. The scientific essay. Personal essay. Personal records. Dedications, prefaces, introductions. Sat- ire and invective. Meditations. The sermon and religious discourse. The beginnings of biography. Cotton Mather. — pt. 2. Influences: Literary forms. Seventeenth century prose style. The classical in- heritance. "The times opinionists" answered. — Appendix A: Almanacs (in chronological order). Appendix B: S. Danforth, An astronomical descrip- tion of the late comet (1665). Appendix C: Cotton Mather, Of poetry and of style. Samuel Sewall, On slavery. Thomas Thacher, A brief rule against small pocks. 2494. Pritchard, John Paul. Criticism in Amer- ica; an account of the development of criti- cal techniques from the early period of the Republic to the middle years of the twentieth century. Nor- man, University of Oklahoma Press, 1956. 325 p. 56-5992 PN99.U5P69 I hrough a presentation of significant and repre- sentative figures, this book gives an account of the development of literary principles in the United States. Pritchard's Return to the Fountains (Dur- ham, N. C, Duke University Press, 1942. 271 p.) discusses classical sources of influential American criticism prior to the contemporary period. 2495. Quinn, Arthur H. American fiction; an historical and critical survey. New York, Appleton-Century, 1936. xxiii, 805 p. 36-30036 PS371.Q5 bibliography: p. 725-772. A historical and critical study of both the novel and the short story in America. Authors who began to publish after 1920 are not included. Also omitted are "juvenile fiction and . . . such interest- ing social developments as the dime novel or the detective story." 2496. Quinn, Arthur H., ed. The literature of the American people, an historical and criti- cal survey. New York, Appleton-Century-Crofts, 195 1. 1172 p. 51-10789 PS88.Q5 Bibliography: p. [985]-! 107. Contents. — The colonial and revolutionary period, by Kenneth B. Murdock.— The establish- ment of national literature, by Arthur H. Quinn. — The late nineteenth century, by Clarence Gohdes — The twentieth century, by George F. Whichcr. A history of American literature composed of monographic studies by scholars who are specialists in the literature of various periods. The bibliog- raphy has been made stricdy selective to provide LITERARY HISTORY AND CRITICISM / 213 guidance of a positive character to standard works without including references to fugitive and deriva- tive writings. 2497. Quinn, Bernetta. The metamorphic tradi- tion in modern poetry; essays on the work of Ezra Pound, Wallace Stevens, William Carlos Wil- liams, T. S. Eliot, Hart Crane, Randall Jarrell, and William Butler Yeats. New Brunswick, N. J., Rutgers University Press, 1955. 263 p. .. . , 55-9957 PS324-Q5 Aims to give a sense of direction in the study of contemporary poetry by isolating the special theme of metamorphosis, and also to facilitate understand- ing the work of those believed to have made the present century distinctive in poetry. 2498. Rahv, Philip. Image and idea; fourteen es- says on literary themes. New York, New Directions, 1949. 164 p. 49-8967 PN511.R27 Partial Contents. — Paleface and redskin.— The cult of experience in American writing. — The dark lady of Salem. — The heiress of all the ages. — Atti- tudes toward Henry James. — Notes on the decline of naturalism. — Sketches in criticism. Henry Miller. Dr. Williams in his short stories. DeVoto and Kulturbolschewismus. Rahv (b. 1908) is probably best known as an editor of Partisan Review, which post he assumed in 1934. He has also edited works of a number of authors and has compiled the anthology Discovery of Europe: the Story of American Experiences in the Old World (Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1947. 743 p.), which in the form of extracts from diaries, journals, novels, etc., presents, with commentary, an account of the reactions of Americans visiting Europe. 2499. Raiziss, Sona. The metaphysical passion; seven modern American poets and the seven- teenth-century tradition. Philadelphia, University of Pennsylvania Press, 1952. 327 p. 52-9025 PS324.R3 An examination of modern American poetry in terms of the criticism of the last few decades. The seven poets analyzed are T. S. Eliot, J. C. Ransom, A. Tate, R. P. Warren, A. MacLeish, E. Wylie, and H. Crane (qq. v.). "In the present work a study is proposed of the character of metaphysical expres- sion and the nature of the conditions that stimulated it, both in the seventeenth and the twentieth cen- turies." — Introduction. 2500. Rosenbach, Ahr.1h.1m S. Early American children's hooks, by A. S. W. Rosenbach, with bibliographical descriptions of the books m his 214 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES private collection. Portland, Me., Southworth Press, 1933. lix, 354 p. illus. 33-33064 Z1037.A1R8 1933a Arranged chronologically, 1 682-1 836, with author and title and printers and publishers indexes. This work is largely a collector's guide to an unusually extensive collection of children's litera- ture. However, the annotations and the lengthy introduction make the book something of a history of the subject. The volume will serve as an intro- duction or a guide for those who wish to familiarize themselves with this relatively obscure bypath of American literature. 2501. Rourke, Constance M. American humor; a study of the national character. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 193 1. 324 p. 31-7953 PS430.R6 A study treating of traditional types on which American humor has focused, such as the Yankee, the frontiersman, and the Negro. The work was reissued in 1953 as part of the Doubleday Anchor books series. 2502. Rusk, Ralph Leslie. The literature of the middle western frontier. New York, Co- lumbia University Press, 1925. 2 v. (Columbia University studies in English and comparative litera- ture) 25-11215 PS273.R8 Published also as thesis (Ph. D.) Columbia Uni- versity, 1925. Bibliographies: v. 2, p. 39-364. A detailed study which stops arbitrarily at 1840. Prof. Rusk later became a leading authority on, and editor of Emerson. 2503. Sherman, Stuart Pratt. Americans. New York, Scribner, 1922. 336 p. 23-224 PS121.S5 Contents. — Mr. Mencken, the jeune fille and the new spirit in letters. — Tradition. — Franklin and the age of enlightenment. — The Emersonian libera- tion. — Hawthorne: a Puritan critic of Puritanism. — Walt Whitman. — Joaquin Miller: poetical conquis- tador of the West. — A note on Carl Sandburg. — Andrew Carnegie. — Roosevelt and the national psy- chology. — Evolution in the Adams family. — An imaginary conversation with Mr. P. E. More. Sherman (1881-1926) was for some time (1907- 24) a professor of English at the University of Illinois; in his last years he became editor of the literary supplement of the New Yor^ Herald Trib- une. He early came under the influence of Babbitt and More (qq. v.) and the New Humanism, thus reinforcing his conservative tendencies. This led to his opposition to such commentators for the new generation as Mencken (q. v.). However, towards the end of his career, Sherman's writings took on a somewhat more "liberal" tone. As a spokesman for the highly conservative, he produced volumes such as The Genius of America; Studies in Behalf of the Younger Generation (New York, Scribner, 1923. 269 p.); The Main Stream (New York, Scribner, 1927. 239 p.), an attempt "to understand the entire 'conspiracy' of forces involved in the taste of his day"; The Emotional Discovery of America, and Other Essays (New York, Farrar & Rinehart, 1932. 276 p.), a posthumous collection of previously pub- lished articles; and On Contemporary Literature (New York, P. Smith, 1931. 312 p.), which was first published in 1917 from articles originally ap- pearing in The Nation. Jacob Zeitlin and Homer Woodbridge produced a two-volume study: Life and Letters of Stuart P. Sherman (New York, Farrar & Rinehart, 1929). 2504. Sherman, Stuart Pratt. Points of view. New York, Scribner, 1924. 363 p. 24-27630 PS121.S54 Contents. — Towards an American type. — Forty and upwards. — Unprintable. — For the higher study of American literature. — W. C. Brownell. — On fall- ing in hate. — On falling in love. — American style. — An apology for essayists of the press. — The signifi- cance of Sinclair Lewis. — Where there are no Rotarians. — Mr. Tarkington on the midland per- sonality. — Oscar S. Straus. — Brander Matthews and the Mohawks. — A note on Gertrude Stein. — Samuel Butler: Diogenes of the Victorians. — The Disraelian irony. — George Sand and Gustave Flaubert. 2505. Sherman, Stuart Pratt. Critical woodcuts. New York, Scribner, 1926. 348 p. 26-8769 PN761.S5 "The essays in this volume were all printed in 'Books,' the literary supplement of the Herald Tribune, in 1924 and 1925." 2506. Sievers, Wieder David. Freud on Broad- way. New York, Hermitage House, 1955. 479 P. 55-7 8 73 PS351.S5 Bibliography: p. 455-461. The work is a historical review of various Ameri- can dramas from the end of the 19th century to the present; it was undertaken to discover the impact of Freudian concepts on the work of playwrights of the 20th century. 2507. Smith, Bernard. Forces in American criti- cism; a study in the history of American literary thought. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1939. 401 p. 39-27825 PS88.S55 An interesting book, "Marxist" in tendency. Its thesis is that science is advancing while romanticism LITERARY HISTORY AND CRITICISM / 215 and the old genteel forces are in retreat. Most of the book presents social influences, but this becomes intrusive only towards the end. 2508. Smith, Thelma M., and Ward L. Miner. Transadantic migration; the contemporary American novel in France. [Durham, N. C] Duke University Press, 1955. 264 p. 55-6530 PS161.F7S6 Bibliography: p. 193-245. Through focusing on the American novelists Faulkner, Hemingway, Steinbeck, Dos Passos, and Caldwell, the authors present a picture of the recep- tion of American fiction in France. The extensive bibliography lists books, articles, and reviews pro- duced in France about American novels. 2509. Snell, George D. The shapers of American fiction, 1798-1947. New York, Dutton, 1947. 316 p. 47-307 1 PS371.S5 A study of leading American fiction writers from J. F. Cooper and C. B. Brown to Hemingway, Far- rell, Dos Passos, Dreiser, and their contemporaries. 2510. Spiller, Robert E. The cycle of American literature; an essay in historical criticism. New York, Macmillan, 1955. 318 p. 55-3833 PS88.S6 A brief, concise view of American literary cul- ture, presented according to a theory of a cycle in literature. "When applied to the story of Ameri- can literature as a whole, the cyclic theory discloses not only a single organic movement, but at least two secondary cycles as well: the literary movement which developed from the Eastern seaboard as a center, and culminated with the great romantic writ- ers of the mid-nineteenth century; and that which grew out of the conquest of the continent and is now rounding its full cycle in the twentieth cen- tury." — Preface. 2511. Spingarn, Joel Elias. Creative criticism and other essays. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 193 1. 221 p. 31-24167 PN81.S6 Contents. — pt. 1. Creative criticism: The new criticism. Prose and verse. Dramatic criticism and the theatre. Creative connoisseurship. — pt. 2. Other essays: The younger generation: a new mani- festo. The American critic. The American scholar. The growth of a literary myth. — Appen- dix: Non credo. Notes on the new humanism (1913-14). A note on French scholarship. The seven arts and the seven confusions. This is a revision of a book first published in 1917. Spingarn (1875-1939) was one of the more controversial critics of his generation. I lis other literary writings include some poetry and .7 History of Literary Criticism in the Renaissance (New York, Published for the Columbia University Press by Macmillan, 1899. 330 p.). 2512. Stauffer, Donald A., ed. The intent of the critic, by Edmund Wilson, Norman Foerster, John Crowe Ransom [and J W. H. Auden. Prince- ton, Princeton University Press, 1941. 147 p. [Princeton books in the humanities] 41-20238 PN81.S7 Contents. — Introduction: The intent of the critic, by D. A. Stauffer. — The historical interpretation of literature, by Edmund Wilson. — The esthetic judg- ment and the ethical judgment, by Norman Foers- ter. — Criticism as pure speculation, by J. C. Ransom. — Criticism in a mass society, by W. H. Auden. 2513. Stedman, Edmund Clarence. Poets of America. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1885. 516 p. 18-13421 PS303.S7 1885 Co.vtlnts. — Early and recent conditions. — Growth of the American school. — William Cullen Bryant. — John Greenleaf Whittier. — Ralph Waldo Emerson. — Henry Wadsworth Longfellow. — Edgar Allan Poe. — Oliver Wendell Holmes. — James Rus- sell Lowell. — Walt Whitman. — Bayard Taylor. — The outlook. — Index. Stedman (1833-190S) was one of the leading representatives of the genteel tradition in literature. His An American Anthology, iySy-iqoo (Cam- bridge, Mass., Riverside Press, 1900. 2 v.) repre- sents this taste in poetry; he gave much insight into the theory of the genteel tradition in The Nature and Elements of Poetry (Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1892. 3^8 p.); while it is exemplified in his own Poems (Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1908. 475 p.), which went through many editions and stages dur- ing his own lifetime and after. His Life and Let- ters (New York, Moffat, Yard, 1910. 2 v.) was produced by Laura Stedman and George M. Gould. Other critics associated with Stedman were W. C. Browncll and George Woodberry (qq. v.). 2514. Stovall, Floyd. American idealism. Nor- man, University of Oklahoma Press, 1943. 235 p. 43-4567 PS169.I3S8 The author believes that the philosophy of democ- racy and of America is basically idealistic, and in this hook he traces the progress of idealism in this country as it is revealed in its literature. 2515. Stovall, Floyd, ed. The development of American literary criticism, by 1 l.irrv 1 1. Clark [and others | Chapel I Iil!, ( Fniversit] 1 : \i rih Carolina Press, 1955. 262 p. 55-1459 PN99.U5S75 2l6 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES bibliography: p. 247-253. A series of articles which are arranged so as to form something of a connected history and criticism of American criticism, particularly its flowering in the 20th century. 2516. Straumann, Heinrich. American literature in the twentieth century. London, New York, Hutchinson's University Library, 1951. 189 p. (Hutchinson's University Library: English literature) 52-664 PS221.S8 "The aim of this book is to give an outline of Twentieth-Century American Thought and Letters. It is not meant to be a history of modern literature in the usual sense of the word, and does not aim at anything like completeness. . . . The book is intended to be a study in attitudes. It attempts to describe the basic conceptions of life underlying the works of some of the outstanding writers of the cen- tury, and the values they believe in. Above all, it tries to establish the links between what novelists, dramatists, and poets, have expressed, and the views of some essayists and especially of the leading philos- ophers who, in fact, provide the natural framework of the whole." — Introduction. 2517. Taylor, Walter Fuller. The economic novel in America. Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina Press, 1942. 378 p. 42-36211 PS374.S7T35 Contents. — The environment. — The lesser novel- ists. — Mark Twain. — Hamlin Garland. — Edward Bellamy. — William Dean Howells. — Frank Nor- ris. — Summary and conclusions. — Bibliography (p. 34 I ~365)- Taylor has also written a history of American literature, The Story of American Letters, Rev. ed. (Chicago, Regnery, 1956. 504 p.); the approach used is very largely one of essay studies of individual authors, with occasional survey chapters. 2518. Thompson, Ralph. American literary an- nuals & gift books, 1 825-1 865. New York, Wilson, 1936. 183 p. 37-14847 AY10.T5 1936 Thesis (Ph. D.) — Columbia University, 1936. "A catalog": p. [i02]-i63; "Foreign gift books": p. [i65]-i66. "Between 1825 and 1865 more than a thousand such miscellanies appeared in the United States; the number in other countries was probably even greater. My aim has been to explain the origin and char- acter of the American examples and to make avail- able an annotated catalog." — Preface. 2519. Trilling, Lionel. The liberal imagination; essays on literature and society. New York, Viking Press, 1950. 303 p. 50-6914 PS3539.R56L5 1950 Trilling (b. 1905) is best known as a perceptive liberal critic who publishes frequendy in periodicals. He is also a creative writer of some note, who has received praise for his novel, The Middle of the Journey (New York, Viking Press, 1947. 310 p.), which attempts to deal with the problems of modern Americans and modern man. 2520. Trilling, Lionel. The opposing self; nine essays in criticism. New York, Viking Press, 1955. 232 p. 55-5871 PN511.T76 Books largely from the 19th century are used as perspectives on the 20th century. Although inter- national in its literary perspectives, the book includes "William Dean Howells and the Roots of Modern Taste" and "The Bostonians." 2521. Tyler, Moses Coit. A history of American literature, 1607-1765. Ithaca, Cornell Uni- versity Press, 1949. 551 p . 49-11766 PS185.T8 1949 "In this reissue . . . the preface and the text of the first edition of 1878 have been strictly followed except in the numbering of the footnotes Changes made in the printings and editions of 1879, 1 88 1, and 1897 are added in bracketed notes in the present edition, as are likewise most of the marginal notes that Tyler put in his correction set of the two volumes of the first edition." — p. ix. The Life of Moses Coit Tyler (Ann Arbor, Uni- versity of Michigan Press, 1933. 354 p.), by How- ard Mumford Jones, relates the story of this famous scholar of early American literature. 2522. Tyler, Moses Coit. The literary history of, the American revolution, 1763- 1783. New York, Published for Facsimile Library, by Barnes & Noble, 1 94 1. 2 v. 41-6271 PS185.T82 1941 Bibliography: v. 2, p. 429-483. Contents. — v. 1. 1763-1776. — v. 2. 1776-1783. 2523. Van Doren, Carl C. The American novel, 1789-1939. Rev. and enl. ed. New York, Macmillan, 1940. 406 p. 40-4354 PS371.V3 1940 Bibliography: p. 367-382. Van Doren (1885-1950) distinguished himself as a scholar of the American scene in works such as his essays in Many Minds (New York, Knopf, 1924. 242 p.); his anthology Modern American Prose (New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1934. 939 p.); his general study What is American Literature? (New York, Morrow, 1935. 128 p.); his distinguished biography, Benjamin Franklin (New York, Viking Press, 1938. 845 p.); and many other historical and literary works, some of which are included else- where in this bibliography. His career is presented LITERARY HISTORY AND CRITICISM / 217 in his autobiography, Three Worlds (New York, Harper, 1936. 317 p.), which also reflects many as- pects of life in America. 2524. Van Doren, Carl C. Carl Van Doren, selected by himself. New York, Viking Press, 1945- 628 p. (The Viking portable library) 45-35066 PS3543.A555A6 1945 A selection from his own numerous writings. 2525. Vestal, Stanley. The book lover's South- west; a guide to good reading, by Walter S. Campbell (Stanley Vestal). Norman, University of Oklahoma Press, 1955. xii, 287 p. 55-6367 Z1251.S8V4 A guide to literature about the Southwest and by authors from that region. The work covers all as- pects of the region's "literature," from dictionaries to novels. 2526. Wagenknecht, Edward Charles. Cavalcade of the American novel, from the birth of the Nation to the middle of the twentieth century. New York, Holt, 1952. 575 p. 52-7022 PS371.W3 A standard work on the American novel. Major authors are discussed at length in full essays; lesser authors are covered by brief notes. 2527. Waggoner, Hyatt H. The heel of Elohim, science and values in modern American poetry. Norman, University of Oklahoma Press, 1950. xx, 235 p. 50-9322 PS324.W3 Contents. — Poets, test tubes, and the heel of Elohim. — E. A. Robinson: the cosmic chill. — Robert Frost: the strategic retreat. — T. S. Eliot: at the still point. — Robinson Jeffers: here is reality. — Archibald MacLeish: the undigested mystery. — Hart Crane: beyond all sesames of science. Science and poetry: conclusions. 2528. Warfel, Harry R. American novelists of today. New York, American P>ook Co., 1951. 478 p. ports. 51-10144 PS379.W} Made up of sketches of the life and writings of 575 contemporary American novelists, with em- phasis on the decade of the 1940's. The work is inclusive rather than selective. 2529. Wcllck, Rene, and Austin Warren. Theory of literature. New York, Harcourt. Brace, 1949. 403 p. 49-1007 PN45.W36 Bibliographical references included in "Notes" (p. 299-346). Bibliography: p. 347 A scholarly discussion of literary theory, evalua- I tion, research, and historiography. The literary work is viewed in its own right, not as a facet of 181240 CO 16 some social or political movement, nor as an ex- emplar of the laws of economic determinism. In this respect the book shows a spreading method of approach to literature in the graduate schools. Wel- lek is at work on a four-volume History of Modern Criticism: jj 50-1950, of which the Yale University Press has so far published two volumes. Warren is the author of The Elder Henry fames (New York, Macmillan, 1934. 269 p.) and Rage for Order; Essays in Criticism (Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1948. 164 p.). 2530. Wells, Henry W. The American way of poetry. New York, Columbia University Press, 1943. 246 p. (Columbia studies in American culture, no. 13) 43-12056 PS303.W4 A study of American literary nationalism and the relation of American letters to English, European, and international traditions; special reference is made to the works of 16 major American poets who flourished from the time of the American Revolu- tion to 1940. 2531. West, Ray B., e d. Essays in modern literary criticism. New York, Rinehart, 1952. 611 p. 52-5602 PXS5.W4 A volume of essays in which leading literary crit- ics discourse on aspects of modern literary criticism. 2532. Williams, Stanley Thomas. The American spirit in letters. New Haven, Yale Univer- sity Press, 1926. 329 p. (The Pageant of America [v. 11]) 26-12988 E178.5.P2, v. 11 The author has in this volume produced an exten- sively illustrated history of American literature which is founded on his theory that a nation's life is reflected in its literature. Williams (b. 1888), a professor of American literature at Yale University, has also written a Life of Washington Irving ( New- York, Oxford University Press, 1935. 2 v.) and other works. 2533. Williams, Stanley Thomas. The beginnings of American poetry, 1 620-1 855. Uppsala, 1951. 148 p. (The Gottesman lectures, 1) 54-4634 PS303.W4:; Bibliographical references included in "Notes" (p. [1241-148). 2534. Williams, Stanley Thomas. The Spanish background of American literature. New Haven, Yal University Press, 1 ■ »s s- - v. PSi59i A contribution toward placing European influ- ences on American literature in ritical per- spective. The second volume is de> Oted in larg to individual studies of Washington Ir\ing. William 2l8 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Cullen Bryant, Henry Wadsworth Longfellow, James Russell Lowell, George Ticknor, Bret Harte, William Dean Howells, and William Prescott. 2535. Wilson, Edmund. Axel's casde; a study in the imaginative literature of 1870-1930. New York, Scribner, 1931. 319 p. 31-26550 PN771.W55 Partial Contents. — Symbolism. — T. S. Eliot. — Gertrude Stein. The work of Edmund Wilson (b. 1895) as a forceful expository writer has gained him a large audience and following in a number of fields, most notably in literary criticism. As a creative writer he has produced Discordant Encounters; Plays and Dialogues (New York, Boni, 1926. 297 p.); the novel, / Thought of Daisy (New York, Scribner, 1929. 311 p.); a controversial volume of short stories, Memoirs of Hecate County (Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1946. 338 p.); and Five Plays (New York, Farrar, Straus & Young, 1954. 541 p.), dramas of ideas, within the experimental theater movement, which reflect life among New York in- tellectuals. He has also been accorded considerable attention for such volumes as Travels in Two De- mocracies (New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1936. 325 p.), a report on Russia and the United States; To the Finland Station; a Study in the Writing and Acting of History (New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1940. 509 p.), which traces modern revolutionary thought in Europe; Europe without Baedeker; Sketches among the Ruins of Italy, Greece & Eng- land (Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1947. 427 p.); The Scrolls from the Dead Sea (New York, Oxford University Press, 1955. 121 p.), a best- selling report on a major discovery in the field of religion; and Red, Blacky, Blond, and Olive; Studies in Four Civilizations: Zuni, Haiti, Soviet Russia, Israel (New York, Oxford University Press, 1956. 500 p.). 2536. Wilson, Edmund. The boys in the back room; notes on California novelists. San Francisco, Colt Press, 1941. 72 p. 41-5 1 881 PS379.W5 Contents. — The playwright in paradise. — James M. Cain. — John O'Hara. — William Saroyan. — Hans Otto Storm. — John Steinbeck. — Facing the Pacific. — Postscript. 2537. Wilson, Edmund. The wound and the bow; seven studies in literature. Boston, Hough- ton Mifflin, 194 1. 295 p. 41-14343 PN511.W633 Partial Contents. — Justice to Edith Wharton. — Hemingway: gauge of morale. — Philoctetes: The wound and the bow. 2538. Wilson, Edmund, ed. The shock of recog- nition; the development of literature in the United States recorded by the men who made it. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, Doran, 1943. 1290 p. 43-9895 PS55.W5 Reissued in 1955 by Farrar, Straus & Cudahy, New York. A collection of articles about important American authors written by their contemporaries during nearly a century, starting with 1845. The anthology is not only a collection of critical writings, it is also a contribution to the study of the development of American literature. A critical introduction has been provided for each selection. 2539. Wilson, Edmund. The triple thinkers; twelve essays on literary subjects. [Rev. and enl. ed.] New York, Oxford University Press, 1948. 270 p. 48-9262 PN511.W63 1948 First published in 1938 by Harcourt, Brace with the subtitle: "Ten Essays on Literature." The re- vised edition includes the essays "Mr. More and the Mithraic Bull," "Is Verse a Dying Technique?", "The Ambiguity of Henry James," "John Jay Chap- man," "Marxism and Literature," and "The Histor- ical Interpretation of Literature." 2540. Wilson, Edmund. Classics and commer- cials; a literary chronicle of the forties. New York, Farrar, Straus, 1950. 534 p. 50-10620 PS221.W55 "A selection of . . . literary articles written dur- ing the nineteen forties." 2541. Wilson, Edmund. The shores of light; a literary chronicle of the twenties and thirties. New York, Farrar, Straus & Young, 1952. 814 p. 52-13935 PS221.W56 2542. Wilson, Edmund. Eight essays. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1954. 238 p. (Doubleday Anchor books. A37) 54-7733 PS3545.I6245E5 Partial Contents. — Hemingway: gauge of mo- rale. — Abraham Lincoln: the Union as religious mysticism. — The pre -presidential T. R. — The Holmes-Laski correspondence. 2543. Wilson, Edmund. A piece of my mind; re- flections at sixty. New York, Farrar, Straus & Cudahy, 1956. 239 p. 57-5302 PS3545.I6245Z53 A volume of autobiographical reflections and critical summation. 2544. Winters, Yvor. In defense of reason. Prim- itivism and decadence: a study of American experimental poetry. Maule's curse: seven studies LITERARY HISTORY AND CRITICISM / 210. in the history of American obscurantism. The anatomy of nonsense. The significance of The bridge by Hart Crane, or What are we to think of Professor X? New York, Swallow Press & W. Morrow, 1947. 611 p. 47-2236 PS121.W53 Primitivism and Decadence was first published independendy in 1937; Maule's Curse, which in- cludes essays on Cooper, Melville, Jones Very, Emerson, and Dickinson, first appeared in 1938; The Anatomy of Nonsense, which has essays on H. Adams, W. Stevens, T. S. Eliot, and J. C. Ran- som, was published in 1943. The volumes have not all been completely reproduced in this collection, although all the indicated essays have been included and represent nearly the whole of the earlier work. The subjects and theorizing of Winters (b. 1900) are derived primarily from American literature. He is also well known for his poetry, which may be associated with the neo-classical school. Collected Poems (Denver, Swallow, 1952. 143 p.) is actually a selection of those poems which he most wishes to preserve. He is also the author of a prominent study of Edwin Arlington Robinson (Norfolk, Conn., New Directions Books, 1946. 162 p.). 2545. Woodberry, George Edward. Makers of literature; being essays on Shelley, Landor, Browning, Byron, Arnold, Coleridge, Lowell, Whittier, and others. New York, Macmillan, 1900. 440 p. 0-2177 PR403.W7 Woodberry (1855-1930) was a critic and poet associated with Stedman (q. v.) and others in the "Genteel Tradition." As a professor of compara- tive literature at Columbia University, and as one of the more widely read and admired critics of his day, he had a great influence on literary studies at the end of the 19th and the beginning of the 20th centuries. Besides his literary studies, his poetry, and some travel writing, he produced a number of important biographies of literary figures: Poe (1885, revised 1909), Hawthorne (1902), and Emerson (1907). 2546. Woodberry, George Edward. Heart of man, and other papers. New York, Har- court, Brace 6c Howe, 1920. 323 p. 20-20978 PS3351.H5 1920 Contents. — Heart of man. — The praise of Eng- lish books. — Two phases of criticism. — Wendell Phillips; the faith of an American. 2547. Woodberry, George Edward. Studies of a literature. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1921. 328 p. 21-7433 PR99.W75 1921 "The author has collected in this volume besides articles that were contained in his earlier books some papers of later years." — Note. 2548. Woodberry, George Edward. Appreciation of literature, and America in literature. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 192 1. 306 p. 21-7434 PN45.W62 1921 2549. Wright, Thomas Goddard. Literary cul- ture in early New England, 1620-1730, by Thomas Goddard Wright . . . ed. by his wife. New Haven, Yale University Press, 1920. 322 p. 21-571 F7.W05 Bibliography: p. 295-304. "The pages which follow will not attempt to weigh colonial literature, either to condemn or de- fend it . . . but rather will attempt to determine that which lies back of any literature, the culture of the people themselves, and to study the relation be- tween their culture and the literature which they produced. In the attempt to determine the culture of the people of New England the writer has made a study of their education, their libraries, their ability to obtain books, their use and appreciation of books, their relations with political and literary life in England, and their literature." — Introduction. 2550. Zabel, Morton D., ed. Literary opinion in America; essays illustrating the status, methods, and problems of criticism in the United States in the twentieth century. Rev. ed. New York, Harper, 1951. xxv, 890 p. 51-2935 PN771.Z2 1951 Appendixes (p. [791 5-890) : 1. Recent works of American criticism. — 2. Collections of contemporary American criticism. — 3. American magazines pub- lishing criticism. — 4. Notes on contributors. — 5. A supplementary list of essays in criticism: 1900- 1950. — 6. A note on contemporary English criticism. C. Periodicals 2551. Accent; a quarterly of new literature, v. 1+ autumn 1940+ Urbana, 111. 46-37972 AP2.A243 Since its inception Accent has included not only literary criticism and reviews, but llso much fiction and poetry. It has held out against "commercial- 220 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES ism," and it has been very receptive to younger, un- known writers, although it does include work by established authors. Its principal editors, Kerker Quinn and Charles Shattuck, included in Accent Anthology; Selections from Accent, a Quarterly of New Literature, 10.40-1945 (New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1946. 687 p.) about 40 percent of the mate- rial that appeared in the first 5 volumes of the periodical. 2552. American literature; a journal of literary his- tory, criticism, and bibliography, v. 1 + Mar. 1929+ Durham, N. C, Duke University Press. 30-20216 PS1.A6 Published quarterly by the Duke University Press with the cooperation of the American Literature Group of the Modern Language Association of America. Beginning with volume 1, number 3, there has regularly appeared a list of "Articles on American Literature Appearing in Current Periodi- cals"; this has been one of the principal sources of Lewis G. Leary's Articles on American Literature, 1900-1950 (q. v.). The magazine has had a com- bined index of subjects, articles, and authors com- piled by Thomas F. Marshall as An Analytical Index to American Literature, v. 1-20, Mar. 1929-Jan. 1949 (Durham, N. C, Duke University Press, 1954. 154 p.). 2553. American quarterly, v. 1 + spring 1949 + Philadelphia. 50-4992 AP2. A3985 Published by the University of Pennsylvania and the American Studies Association. Though the periodical is interested in all aspects of studies relating to American culture, considerable attention is devoted to literature. In the summer of 1955 appeared the first of a scheduled annual series of bibliographies listing "Articles in American Studies." More than 200 periodicals were searched for material, and roughly half the citations resulting from this could be considered of direct literary interest, although frequently correlated with other fields. 2554. The Antioch review, v. 1 + spring 1941 + Yellow Springs, Ohio. 44-660 AP2.A562 A quarterly published at Antioch College, this is one of the many such periodicals published at col- leges and universities throughout the country. While it contains fiction, poetry, and book reviews, as well as essays of literary criticism, it also devotes a fair amount of space to articles on non-literary mat- ters. An anthology based on it, and edited by Paul Bixler, is The Antioch Review Anthology; Essays, Fiction, Poetry, and Reviews from the Antioch Review (Cleveland, World Pub. Co., 1953. 470 p.). 2555. The Atlantic monthly, a magazine of litera- ture, science, art, and politics, v. 1 + Nov. 1857+ Boston. 4-12666 AP2.A8 From Nov. 1857 to Sept. 1865 title reads: The Atlantic Monthly, a Magazine of Literature, Art and Politics. As a purveyor of creative literature, The Atlantic Monthly was more important in its early decades than it has been in recent years. However, it still reflects (largely through essays and reviews) the lit- erary tastes of a large section of the better educated part of the public, as well as their interests in other fields. 2556. Chicago review, v. 1+ winter 1946 + [Chicago, University of Chicago Press] 55-35686 AP2.C5152 A literary quarterly published at the University. 2557. Harper's magazine, v. 1+ June 1850 + New York. 4-12670 AP2.H3 Title varies: June 1850-Nov. 1900, Harper's New Monthly Magazine. — Dec. 1900-May 1939, Harper's Monthly Magazine (cover title: Harper's magazine). A monthly magazine which includes some poetry, short stories, and literary essays, often by "name" authors, as well as articles on matters of general in- terest. An anthology based on it is Harper Essays (New York, Harper, 1927. 314 p.), edited by H. S. Canby. A recent paperback selection more fully representing the magazine's scope is Harper's Maga- zine Reader: A Selection of Articles, Stories and Poems . . . (New York, Bantam Books, 1953. 37 2 P-)- 2558. The Hudson review, v. 1+ spring 1948 + [New York] 50-2532 AP2.H886 A distinguished literary quarterly that includes poetry and fiction, as well as a considerable amount of literary criticism. 2559. The Kenyon review, v. 1 + winter 1939 + [Gambier, Ohio] Kenyon College. 42-51147 AP2.K426 A leading literary quarterly which has published a significant amount of important poetry and fiction, but which is most important for its literary criticism. Under the editorship of John Crowe Ransom (q. v.), it became a leading organ of the new critics, and especially of their leading representatives in the Southern agrarian movement. This aspect of the periodical is reflected in the anthology The Kenyon Critics; Studies in Modern Literature from the Ken- yon Review (Cleveland, World Pub. Co., 1951. 342 p.), edited by Ransom. LITERARY HISTORY AND CRITICISM / 221 2560. New directions in prose & poetry, no. 1 + 1936+ New York, New Directions. 37-1751 PS536.N37 Title varies. Intended as an annual, the publication of this work has been somewhat irregular. It is edited by James Laughlin, who heads the New Directions press. The volumes contain experimental modern writing of many types and from many sources. The emphasis is American though the scope is inter- national. Much of the material is published in these volumes for the first time, although some of it is republished from other, not readily available sources. 2561. The New England quarterly; an historical review of New England life and letters . . . v. 1 4- Jan. 1928+ [Orono, Me., The University Press] 29-23850 F1.N62 Imprint varies. 2562. The New Mexico quarterly review, v. 1 + Feb. 1931+ [Albuquerque, University of New Mexico] 35-9607 AP2.N6168 Title varies: 1931-40, The New Mexico Quarterly. A literary quarterly which includes some general articles and which emphasizes the Southwest. 2563. New world writing. ist+ Apr. 1952 + [New York] New American Library. (N. A. L. Mentor books) 52-1806 PN6014.N457 Issued irregularly and in paperback format at popular prices, the publication is designed to make available to a large audience essays, short stories, and poetry relatively esoteric and experimental in their literary quality, in many ways corresponding to the contents of "little magazines" having limited circulation. 2564. The New York times book review, v. 1 + 1896+ New York. AP2.N657 The weekly book review section, which now ap- pears as a supplement to the Sunday edition, of The New Yorl{ Times is probably by itself the most widely disseminated book review periodical in America. Its extensive coverage and its wide dis- tribution render it one of the most important of such publications. 2565. The New Yorker, v. 1 + Feb. 21, 1925 + New York. 28-5329 AP2.N6763 The New Yorker is a sophisticated, humorous weekly without the "serious" approach to high literature that may be detected in most literary periodicals. However, it has managed to main- tain a hi^h level of writing, and many of the coun- trv's prominent authors have come to be regarded as part of the "New Yorker school." The short stories which they have published are represented in books such as Short Stories jrom the New Yorker (New York, Simon & Schuster, 1945. 440 p.), which se- lects 68 stories from the periodical's beginning through September 1940, and in 55 Short Stories from the New Yorker (New York, Simon & Schuster, 1949. 480 p.), which covers the preced- ing 10 years. Their poetry is represented in The New Yorker Boo\ of Verse; Anthology of Poems First Published in the New Yorker, 1925-1935 (New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1935. 311 p.). The mag- azine has also become famous for a new approach to short biography, a style represented in the an- thology Profiles from the New Yorker (New York, Knopf, 1938. 400 p.). Among the most widely known and admired aspects of the magazine are its cartoons. These have appeared in a number of "New Yorker albums"; six of these were published by Doubleday Doran from 1928 to 1939. A broad survey of the form may be seen in The New Yor\er Twenty-Fifth Anniversary Album, 1925-1950 (New York, Harper, 1951. unpaged), which has been supplemented by The New Yorker 1950-1955 Album (New York, Harper, 1955 unpaged). These are considered by some to be among leading examples of modern American humor in the car- toon form. A book by an outsider about The New Yorker and its editor is Dale Kramer's Ross and the New Yorker (Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1951. 306 p.). 2566. Partisan review, v. 1+ Feb./Mar. 1934 + New York. 42-20197 HX1.P3 Bimonthly, Feb. 1934-Nov. 1935; irregular, Feb. 1936-Dec. 1937; monthly, Jan.-Sept. 1938; quarterly, fall 1938-fall 1939; bimonthly, Jan. 1940 + Volume numbers irregular; v. 1-2 called no. 1-9. Publication suspended from Nov. 1936 to Nov. 1937, inclusive. Tide varies: Feb./Mar. i934-Oct./Nov. 1935, Partisan Review. Feb.-June 1936, Partisan Review &■ Anvil. Editors: Feb./Mar. 1934+ Philip Rahv and others. The Partisan Review has since its inception be- come one of the most distinguished ol literary re- views. It publishes material from both well estab- lished and new authors in the fields ol poetry, fic- tion, and critical essays. It also contains articles on current cultural problems, an 1 it has a distin- guished book review section. Some of its best material has been anthologized in Reader; Ten Years of Partisan Review, 1 (New York, Dial Press, 1946. 688 p.) and The New Partisan Reader, 1945-1953 I New York. I Iar- court, Brace, 1953. 621 p.), both edited by William Phillips and Philip Rahv. Short stories from the 222 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES magazine have been anthologized in the paperback volumes Stories in the Modern Manner (New York, Avon Publications, 1953. 282 p.) and More Stories in the Modern Manner (New York, Avon Publica- tions, 1954. 252 p.). 2567. Poetry. A magazine of verse, v. 1 + Oct. 1912+ Chicago. 14-13059 PS301.P6 Under the editorship of Harriet Monroe (q. v.) Poetry became one of the leading mediums in Amer- ica for the publication of modern poetry, and many of the leading poets of the first half of the 20th cen- tury first achieved wide notice through appearing in this periodical. Subsequent editors have shown a similar receptivity to new poetry, and they have maintained the reputation of the periodical as the best one in America devoted to poetry. Appearing monthly, the magazine also includes reviews of books in the field. 2568. Quarterly review of literature, v. 1 + autumn 1943+ Annandale-on-Hudson, N. Y. 45-10088 AP2.Q29 The Quarterly Review of Literature has several times shifted its place of publication; for some years now it has been published at Bard College. It presents primarily creative literature (poetry, short stories, novelettes, drama) rather than criticism. It does not, however, exclude critical essays. About once a year an entire issue is devoted to one im- portant modern author. 2569. Saturday review, v. 1+ Aug. 2, 1924 + [New York] 27-5407 Z1219.S25 Title varies: 1924-51, Saturday Review of Litera- ture. Aside from works such as The New Yorf{ Times Boo\ Review, this weekly is probably the most widely distributed literary periodical in America. Its emphasis is on book reviews and general essays on the literary scene, although it also carries some poetry, a fair number of articles and editorials on the overall cultural scene, and a sizable number of re- views of long playing records. An early anthology, compiled while the magazine was almost exclusively literary in nature, is Designed for Reading; an An- thology Drawn from the Saturday Review of Lit- erature, i<)24-t<)34 (New York, Macmillan, 1934. 614 p.). Also based on the periodical is a recent paperback series of anthologies entitled Saturday Review Reader (New York, Bantam Books, 195 1 + ), of which three issues have so far appeared. 2570. The Sewanee review, quarterly, v. 1 + Nov. 1892+ Sewanee, Tenn., The Uni- versity Press. 9~33 I 3 I AP2.S5 Published at the University of the Soudi, this is one of the leading literary periodicals in America, as well as the oldest in continuous publication. 2571. The South Atlantic quarterly, v. 1+ Jan. 1902+ Durham, N.C. 8-84 AP2.S75 The South Atlantic Quarterly is one of the oldest of the still functioning general and literary periodi- cals. In both aspects it has been a leading medium for the expression of Southern culture. An an- thology from the magazine is Fifty Years of the South Atlantic Quarterly (Durham, N. C, Duke University Press, 1952. 397 p.), edited by William Baskerville Hamilton. 2572. Southwest review, v. 1+ June 1915 + Dallas, Tex. 17-4968 AP2.S883 Tide varies: v. 1-9 (June 1915-July 1924) The Texas Review. Published at the University of Texas, Austin, June 1915-July 1924; published at Southern Meth- odist University, Dallas, Oct. 1924 + While this quarterly is general in nature, it in- cludes some material of literary interest, and it pub- lishes an annual literary number. 2573. The University of Kansas City review, v. 1+ winter 1934+ [Kansas City] 48-27919 AP2.U735 Vol. 1, no. 1-4 called v. 4, no. 1-4 in continuation of the numbering of the university's University Bulletin. A general literary quarterly. 2574. The Virginia quarterly review, a national journal of literature & discussion, v. 1 + Apr. 1925+ [Charlottesville, University of Virginia] 30-14637 AP2.V76 A quarterly which devotes considerable space to poetry and short stories, but which also includes articles on matters of general interest. 2575. The Western humanities review, v. 1 + Jan. 1947+ [Salt Lake City, Utah Humani- ties Research Foundation] 48-27220 AP2.W426 Title varies: 1947-48, Utah Humanities Review. A quarterly of general discussion which includes literary articles and creative writing. 2576. The Western review, v. [1]+ 1937 + Iowa City, State University of Iowa. 51-1705 1 AP2.W524 Titles varies: Rocl(y Mountain Review. Editors: R. B. West and others. The Western Review is a literary quarterly which provides a space emphasis on young writers. LITERARY HISTORY AND CRITICISM / 223 2577. Yale review, v. 1-19, May 1392-Feb. 1911; Preceded by the New Englander and Yale Re- new ser., v. 1+ Oct. 1911+ New Haven, view (1843-92). 1893+ 8-8158 AP2.Y2 The Yale Review is a general quarterly reflecting Tide varies: May 1892-Feb. 1911, The Yale Re- many aspects of American intellectual life and in- view; a Quarterly Journal for the Scientific Discus- terests. It includes some literary material and a sion of Economic, Political and Social Questions. section of intellectual book reviews. (Subtitle varies slightly.) IV Biography and Autobiography «fiv Nos. 2578-2844 X Jp 2579. Laughing in the jungle; the autobiography of an immigrant in America. New York, Harpers, 1932. 335 p. 32-8633 E169.5.A18 THIS section is primarily a supplement to the other sections; its purpose is to include bio- graphical works, useful for the study of American history and culture, which would other- wise have been omitted. As in the other sections, we have striven towards some degree of balance, so that in a crowded field (e. g., Civil War diaries and journals) a good work may be left out in favor of another depicting a less well-represented aspect of American life. The ma- terial in this section is not meant to represent fully, in any respect, the field of American biography and autobiography. Any biography or autobiography pertaining directly to the subject field of another section of the bibliography has been left for possible inclusion in that section (e. g., a biography of an actress would appear, if at all, in the Entertainment section). The exceptions to this occur when a work does not easily or fully fall into one of our categories, or when it has particular sig- nificance in the development of American biography and autobiography, in which case, if it has not been selected for another section, it is included here. In shon, while this section covers American biography and autobiography on the basis of its value as Americana, as literature, and as history, it does not cover any of these aspects thoroughly, but merely supplements the rest of the bibliography, which must be used through the index for any fuller view of the subject. 2578. LOUIS ADAMIC, 1899-1951 Adamic came to America from Yugoslavia in 19x3 at the age of 14. Most of his writings con- cern the Americanization of immigrants; this in- cludes such works as his novel, Grandsons (1935); My America, 1928-1938 (1938), a journalistic series of impressions; and From Many Lands (1940), a somewhat fictionalized series of biographical studies of some immigrants. The Native's Return (1934) is a report of a visit to the land of his birth. His writings form a link in the social literature of the period, especially with regard to the foreign born and laboring classes in which he was so interested. 224 2580. CHARLES FRANCIS ADAMS, 1835-1915 Adams was a historian and a railroad execu- tive, and both fields led to some of his writings: such as Three Episodes of Massachusetts History (1892), Studies Military and Diplomatic, IJJ5-1865 (1911), I Lee at Appomattox, and Other Papers (1902), and Railroads: Their Origin and Problems (1878). His interest in literature was evidenced by his distin- , guished biography, Richard Henry Dana (1890. 2 v.). Civil War letters exchanged between C. F. Adams, his father, and Henry Adams may be found in Worthington Chauncey Ford's two volume A Cycle of Adams Letters, 1861-1865 (Boston, Hough- ton Mifflin, 1920). 2581. Charles Francis Adams, by his son, Charles Francis Adams. Boston, Houghton Mif- flin, 1900. 426 p. illus. (American statesmen, v. 29) 0-1689 E467.1.A2A2 E176.A54, v. 29 A life of a son of John Quincy Adams. C. F. Adams, Sr., was a statesman and a diplomat, though possibly best remembered as the father of Henry and Brooks Adams. 2582. Charles Francis Adams, 1835-1915; an autobiography; with a Memorial address de- BIOGRAPHY AND AUTOBIOGRAPHY / 225 livered November 17, 1915, by Henry Cabot Lodge. Boston, Houghton Mirllin, 1916. lx, 224 p. 16-6471 E664.A19A2 2583. MARY ANDERSON, 1872- Mary Anderson was a Swedish emigrant who began in this country as a maid in Michigan, was later a factory worker, and then rose to be the second director of the Women's Bureau of the United States Department of Labor. Her auto- biography reflects the position of employed women, particularly in industry, over a period of nearly a half century, hence depicting many of the advances made in this period in woman's situation in society. 2584. Woman at work, the autobiography of Mary Anderson as told to Mary N. Winslow. Minneapolis, University of Minnesota Press. 1951. 266 p. 51-14305 HD6095.A668 MARY ANTIN, 1 881-1949 2585. The promised land. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 19 12. 373 p. illus. 12-10316 E169.5.A66 1912 An immigrant's autobiographical account of the situation of Jews in Europe as contrasted with that of those in America. 2586. HERBERT ASBURY, 1891- Hcrbert Asbury was a descendant of Francis Asbury (1745-1816), who brought organized Methodism to America; this story Herbert Asbury tells in A Methodist Saint, the Life of Bishop Asbury (1927), a somewhat iconoclastic biography. Having broken with the fundamentalist views by which he was raised, Asbury turned to writing relatively lib- eral "informal" histories. One group dealt with the underworld of various cities: The Gangs of New Yo:^ (1928), The Barbary Coast (1933) for San Francisco, The French Quarter (1936) for New Orleans, and The Gem of the Prairie (1940) for Chicago. Other works include Sucker's Progress, an Informal History of Gambling in America ( 1938) and The Golden Flood, an Informal History of America's First Oil Field (1942). 2587. Up from Methodism. New York, Knopf, 1926. 174 p. 26-17134 BX8334.A65 Autobiography. 2588. Carry Nation. New York, Knopf, 1929. xxii, 307 p. illus. 29-21266 HV5232.\'}.\7 Carry Nation (1846-1911) was a well-known champion of women's rights, prohibitionism, and general moral uplifting of all mankind, for which she worked assiduously and dramatically, leaving in the popular mind the image of a middle-aged woman chopping up the bars of the nation. 2589. GERALD AVERILL, 1896-194- Averill was a Maine woodsman who died shortly after completing his reminiscences of the forests and those who live there. 2590. Ridge runner; the story of a Maine woods- man. Philadelphia, Lippincott, 1948. 217 p. 48-5365 F25.A8 2591. RAY STANNARD BAKER, 1870-1946 Baker is probably best known for his biog- raphy of Woodrow Wilson (q. v.); however, he also achieved considerable renown for the autobiogra- phical books he wrote under the pseudonym of David Grayson. These largely took the form of familiar essays in praise of rural life. 2592. Adventures in understanding, by David Grayson [pseud.] Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, Page, 1925. 273 p. 25-20632 PS3503.A7:'- 2593. Adventures of David Grayson [pseud.] Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, Page, 1925. 249, 232, 342, 208 p. 26-457 PS3505.A75 1925 Contents. — Adventures in contentment. — Ad- ventures in friendship. — The friendly road. — Great possessions. 2594. Adventures in solitude, by David Grayson [pseud.] Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, Doran, 1931. 180 p. 31-28301 PS3503.A5448A7 1931 2595. Native American; the book of my youth. New York, Scribner, 1941. 330 p. 41-51934 CT275.B313A3 2596. American chronicle. New York. Scribner, 1945- 53 1 P- 45- 2 44 » PN T 4874- B2 5 A 3 Autobiography. 2597. ALBEN WILLIAM BARKLEY, 1877-1956 Albcn Barkley was a prominent elder statesman politician irom Kentucky who achieved fame not only tor his nation. ll services, but also for his humor. 1 lis autobiography gives a good sample of American political humor. 226 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 2598. That reminds me. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1954. 288 p. 54-10775 E748.B318A3 2599. WILLIAM BENTLEY, 1759-18 19 Rev. Bendey, a Unitarian minister, was known to his contemporaries as a prominent intellectual clergyman. His subsequently published diary for 1784— 1819 is now his main claim to be remembered. A mine of detail for historians, the work pictures not only the author, but more so life in a New England seaport at that period. 2600. The diary of William Bentley, D. D., pastor of the East Church, Salem, Massachusetts. Salem, Mass., Essex Institute, 1905-14. 4 v. illus. 6-10941 F74.S1B46 ARTHUR F. BERING AUSE, 1919- 2601. Brooks Adams; a biography. New York, Knopf, 1955. 404 p. 55-8357 D15.A3B4 Bibliography: p. [392]-404. Brooks Adams (1 848-1 927), brother of Henry Adams (q. v.), was a distinguished thinker and historian. Most of his influence was behind the scenes or indirect, as that upon Theodore Roosevelt. In The Law of Civilization and Decay (1895) he presented an interpretation of history which was not only the first such theoretical work by an American, but also in its own rights a contribution to American and Western intellectual history. 2602. LAUNCELOT MINOR BLACKFORD, 1894- Blackford, an Atlanta, Georgia, doctor, is a de- scendant of Mary Blackford. His life of her, while depicting a woman of character who was far from the clinging vine of historical romances, shows some cf the way of life in Virginia and a sample of the anti-slavery sentiment that existed in the South during the Civil War and pre-Civil War period. 2603. Mine eyes have seen the glory; the story of a Virginia lady, Mary Berkeley Minor Black- ford, 1 802- 1 896, who taught her sons to hate slavery and to love the Union. Cambridge, Harvard Uni- versity Press, 1954. 293 p. 54-5018 F230.B65B6 2605. The Americanization of Edward Bok; the autobiography of a Dutch boy fifty years after. New York, Scribner, 1920. 461 p. illus. 20-17333 PN4874.B62A4 2606. CATHERINE (DRINKER) BOWEN, 1897- Mrs. Bowen is one of the most popular of the practitioners of fictionalized biography. Basing her books on much research, she imaginatively extrap- olates unwitnessed events, and then proceeds to pre- sent such scenes as biographical facts. 2607. Yankee from Olympus; Justice Holmes and his family. Boston, Little, Brown, 1944. xvii, 475 p. illus. 44-3384 E664.H773B6 "Material and sources": p. [433]— 451. Oliver Wendell Holmes, Jr., was noted not only as a distinguished jurist, but also as one carrying on a notable American tradition; consequently, both his grandfather, a clergyman, and his father, the distinguished author-doctor (q. v.), are treated at some length in this book. Another view of the man may be gathered from the Holmes-Pollock Letters, the Correspondence of Mr. Justice Holmes and Sir Frederic^ Polloc{, iSy 4-1932 (Cambridge, Mass., Harvard LTniversity Press, 194 1. 2 v.), edited by Mark De Wolfe Howe. 2608. John Adams and the American Revolution. Boston, Little, Brown, 1950. xvii, 699 p. illus. 50-8182 E322.B68 Bibliography: p. 646-676. A fictional biography of the younger years of a leading revolutionist who was to become the second President of the United States. 2609. HENRY MARIE BRACKENRIDGE, 1786—1871 Brackenridge, a Pennsylvania-Scotch lawyer, had a long career in law, politics, and diplomacy. His travels were the basis of several books of his- torical importance. 2610. Recollections of persons and places in the West. Philadelphia, Kay [1834] 244 p. 3-20912 F518.B78 One of the first descriptions of the pioneer West, meaning, at this time, in large part the Ohio Valley. 2604. EDWARD WILLIAM BOK, 1863-1930 Bok was an American editor who as a child came to America from the Netherlands. His autobiog- raphy was awarded the Pulitzer price in 1921. 2611. GAMALIEL BRADFORD, 1863-1932 Bradford was a Massachusetts recluse of ill health who devoted most of his life to writing. He orig- inated the "psychograph," a method of short biog- BIOGRAPHY AND AUTOBIOGRAPHY / 227 raphy by means of which he attempted to extract the essentially vital aspects of a person's life, and through them to give a "soul picture." Although influenced by psychology, he aimed at an artistic product. His studies were highly popular, and they initiated a whole new school of American biography. 2612. Lee the American. Boston, Houghton Mif- flin, 1912. 324 p. illus. 12-7039 E467.1.L4B77 A study of Robert E. Lee (see also entries in index), the Confederate general. 2613. Confederate portraits. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1914. xviii, 291 p. 8 port. 14-7092 E467.B78 Contents. — Joseph E. Johnston. — J. E. B. Sruart. — James Longstreet— P. G. T. Beauregard. — Judah P. Benjamin. — Alexander H. Stephens. — Robert Toombs. — Raphael Semmes. — The batde of Gettysburg. — Notes. 2614. Union portraits. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 19 1 6. 330 p. 4 port. 16-11059 E467.B782 Contents. — George Brinton McClellan. — Joseph Hooker. — George Gordon Meade. — George Henry Thomas. — William Tecumseh Sherman. — Edwin McMasters Stanton. — William Henry Seward. — Charles Sumner. — Samuel Bowles. — Titles of books most frequendy cited (p. [2971-298). — Notes. 2615. Portraits of American women. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1919. 276 p. ports. 19-18303 E176.B82 Contents. — Abigail Adams. — Sarah Alden Rip- ley. — Mary Lyon. — Harriet Beecher Stowe. — Mar- garet Fuller Ossoli. — Louisa May Alcott. — Frances Elizabeth Willard. — Emily Dickinson. 2616. American portraits, 1 875-1900. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1922. 248 p. ports. 22-4659 CT219.B7 Contents. — Mark Twain. — Henry Adams. — Sid- ney Lanier. — James McNeill Whistler. — James Gil- lespie Blaine. — Grover Cleveland. — Henry James. — Joseph Jefferson. 2617. Damaged souls. Boston, Houghton Mif- flin, 1923. 284 p. ports. 23-9082 E176.B8 Contents. — Damaged souls. — Benedict Arnold. — Thomas Paine. — Aaron Burr. — John Randolph of Roanoke. — John Brown. — Phineas Taylor Bar- num. — Benjamin Franklin Butler. 2618. The journal of Gamaliel Bradford, 1883- 1932, edited by Van Wyck Brooks. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1933. 560 p. 33-27386 PS3503.R2Z5 1933 2619. The letters of Gamaliel Bradford, 1918- 1931, edited by Van Wyck Brooks. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1934. 377 p. 34-33655 PS3503.R2Z53 1934 2620. WILLIAM CABELL BRUCE, 1860-1946 Bruce was a lawyer and a United States Senator who achieved considerable fame as a bi- ographer. He was awarded a Pulitzer prize for his biography Benjamin Franklin, Self-Revealed ( 1917), which relied mainly en presenting the subject through extracts from his own writings, with transi- tional passages supplied by Bruce. 2621. John Randolph of Roanoke, 1773— 1833; a biography based largely on new material. 2d ed., rev. New York, Putnam, 1939. xv, 661, 803 p. illus. 39 _2 559° E302.6.R2B9 1939 First published in 1922 in 2 volumes. John Randolph was a Virginia statesman of great force who, however, almost made a habit of opposi- tion. An earlier (1882) biography by Henry Adams (q. v.) is well written, but considered by some critics to be prejudiced. Russel Kirk's Randolph of Roanoke, a Study in Conservative Thought (1951) outlines Randolph's ideas and their influence; the book was meant to be something of a supplement to Bruce's study. 2622. EDWARD McNALL BURNS, 1897- Burns is a historian whose earlier works in- clude a study (1938) of Madison's political and con- stitutional thought. 2623. David Starr Jordan: prophet of freedom. Stanford, Calif., Stanford University Press, 1953* 2 43 P- 53-5525 LD3025 1891.B87 Jordan was a famous ichthyologist and the first president of Stanford University; howe\er, this biography is less concerned with his Ichthyological and educational career than with his thought and crusades, so that the work becomes a chapter in the history of American thought. 2624. JOHN BURROUGHS. 1837-1921 Burroughs through his writings as a natural- ist achieved a position in American literature ( q. v.) He also wrote a number of autobiographical and biographical works, such as John /.. • 228 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES (1902) and Walt Whitman, a Study (1896). His biographer, Clara Barrus, produced a two-volume Life and Letters of John Burroughs (1925). 2625. Camping & tramping with Roosevelt. Bos- ton, Houghton Mifflin, 1907. no p. 7-3 1 1 86 E757.B97 Describes a trip in Yellowstone Park with Theodore Roosevelt in 1903, with an added section on a visit to Roosevelt at his home at Oyster Bay. 2626. The heart of Burroughs's journals. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1928. xvii, 361 p. 28-23950 PS1226.A52 2627. John Burroughs talks, his reminiscences and comments as reported by Clifton Johnson. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1922. xvi, 358 p. illus. 22-18205 PS1226.A54 2628. My boyhood, by John Burroughs, with a con- clusion by his son, Julian Burroughs. Gar- den City, N. Y., Doubleday, Page, 1922. 247 p. illus. 22-7305 PS 1 226. A5 2629. NICHOLAS MURRAY BUTLER, 1862- 1947 Buder, who was a national and international statesman, is probably best remembered for his work during his long incumbency in the presidency of Columbia University. 2630. Across the busy years: recollections and re- flections. New York, Scribner, 1939-40. 2 v. illus. 39 _2 7^5o LD1245 1902.A3 2631. HODDING CARTER Carter, who does not usually use his first name, William, is a liberal, smalltown newspaper- man from the Mississippi delta area. His writings present Southern problems from a Southern per- spective. In addition to his non-fiction, he has written some novels, notably The Winds of Fear (1944), a polemical study of relations between Negroes and whites. 2632. Where Main Street meets the river. New York, Rinehart, 1953. 339 p. 53-6133 PN4874.C27A3 1953 An account, with opinions on many issues, which traces the author's career since he started a small newspaper in 1932. 2633. PETER CARTWRIGHT, 1785-1872 Cartwright was a clergyman who was long a Kentucky circuit rider, and then brought religion to frontier Illinois. Mrs. Helen Hardie Grant's Peter Cartwright, Pioneer (New York, Abingdon Press, 1 951) presents a 20th century view of this once influential Methodist. 2634. Autobiography of Peter Cartwright, the backwoods preacher. Edited by W. P. Strickland. New-York, Carlton & Porter, 1857. 525 p. _ 12-3515 F545.C31 Supplemented by his later Fifty Years as a Presid- ing Elder (1872). A "centennial edition" of the autobiography was published in 1956 by the Abingdon Press in Nashville, Tenn. CHARLES EDWARD CAUTHEN, ed. 2635. Family letters of the three Wade Hamptons, 1782-190 1. Columbia, University of South Carolina Press, 1953. xix, 181 p. illus. (South Caroliniana; sesquicentennial series, no. 4) 54-7181 CS71.H23 1953 Letters of three Wade Hamptons (1754-1835, 1791-1858, 1818-1902), which illuminate major events in the South during a period of more than a century. 2636. MARY BOYKIN (MILLER) CHESNUT, 1823-1886 Mary Chesnut was a South Carolinian belle, wife of a U. S. Senator who later became a brigadier- general in the Confederate Army. She was ac- quainted with a large percentage of the great and near-great of the Confederate States. 2637. A diary from Dixie. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1949. 572 p. 49-11694 E487.C52 1949 This diary of the Civil War period was first pub- lished in 1905. The 1949 edition has more mate- rial; it was edited by the historical novelist Ben Ames Williams ( 1 889-1 953), who used it as a source model for Linda Dewain in House Divided (1947). 2638. SAMUEL CHOTZINOFF, 1889- Chotzinoff is a musician and critic who was born in Russia of Jewish parents. His autobiography traces the family's coming to America and the years from his life in the slums of New York to his adult success. His biography of Arturo Toscanini, the orchestral conductor, Toscanini: An Intimate Por- trait, was published in 1956 (New York, Knopf. 148 p.). BIOGRAPHY AND AUTOBIOGRAPHY / 229 2639. A lost paradise; early reminiscences. New York, Knopf, 1955. 373 p. 54-7202 ML423.C564A3 2640. LOUISE AMELIA KNAPP (SMITH) CLAPPE, 1819-1906 Louise Smith Clappe was a doctor's wife who in her letters gave a detailed description of life in a California gold-mining community. 2641. The Shirley letters from the California mines, 1 851-1852; with an introd. and notes by Carl I. Wheat. New York, Knopf, 1949. xxix, 216 p. illus. 49-11095 F865.C58 1949 Twenty-three letters written by the author to her sister, Mary Jane, in Massachusetts. They were originally published serially, under the pseudonym of Dame Shirley, in The Pioneer; or, California Monthly Magazine, Jan. 1854-Dec. 1855. 2642. IRVIN SHREWSBURY COBB, 1876-1944 Irvin S. Cobb was born in Kentucky. He later became a New York journalist, a World War I war correspondent, and a humorous columnist. While he wrote some serious fiction, he is better known for his works of humor in general and his autobiography in particular, which exemplifies much of the American attitude towards life in its comical aspects. 2643. Exit laughing. Garden City, N. Y., Garden City Pub. Co., 1942. 572 p. 42-36270,PS3505.Oi4Z5 1942 Autobiography. 2644. CYRENUS COLE, 1863-1939 Cole was born in Iowa and had a career as a newspaperman before he became a Congressman. In addition to an autobiography, he wrote a num- ber of books which in large part deal with Iowa. 2645. I am a man; the Indian Black Hawk, a book . . . marking the one hundredth anni- versary of the passing of Ma-ka-tai-me-she-kia-kiak. Iowa City, State Historical Society of Iowa, 1938. 3'2 P- 38-28006 E83.83.B638 Black Hawk (1767-1838) was a famous Sauk Indian chid who composed his own autobiography, Life of Ma-ka-tai-me-she-hja-kia\ . . . (Cincinnati, I ^33), by means of dictation and translation, in order to explain his side of the Indian wars in which he had a prominent part; a new edition appeared in ' '955- 2646. MONCURE DANIEL CONWAY, 1832- 1907 Conway, one of the most prominent figures of his day, was a leading clergyman, author, and liberal. Because of his stand against slavery, he was forced to leave his native Virginia. His many writings include a life of Thomas Paine which is generally considered one of the outstanding biographies of 19th-century America. A biography, Moncure Conway (New Brunswick, Rutgers University Press, 1952) was written by Mary Elizabeth Burtis. 2647. The life of Thomas Paine: with a history of his literary, political and religious career in America, France, and England. To which is added a sketch of Paine by William Cobbett (hitherto un- published) New York, Putnam, 1892. 2 v. illus. 4-16014 JC178.Y2C7 2648. Autobiography. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1904. 2 v. illus. 4-29207 BX9869.C8A3 1904 2649. DAVID CROCKETT, 1 786-1 836 Davy Crockett, frontiersman and politician, was a fable in his own lifetime. The tall tales told about him became a part of American folklore. A recent revival of the myth, with retouchings, has further removed him from even that degree of truth, robustness, and reality which is to be found in his autobiography (the authorship of which has been disputed). An attempt to identify "the Crockett God made" is James Atkins Shackford's David Crockett, the Man and the Legend no. 3353. 2650. Davy Crockett's own story as written by him- self; the autobiography of America's great folk hero. New York, Citadel Press, 1955. 377 p. illus. 51-10010 F436.C9 "Consists of . . . A narrative of the life of David Crockett . . . written by himself, published in 1834; An account of Col. Crockett's tour to the North and down East, published in 1 8 34, and Col. Crockett's exploits and adventures in Texas, published post- humously in 1836." "Col. Crockett's exploits and adventures in Tt is a pseudo-autobiography generally ascribed to Richard Penn Smith. 2651. WILBUR LUCIUS CROSS, i8(. Wilbur Cross had a distinguished career as an English professor and Dean of the School of Graduate Studies at Vale University. In the course of his academic career he wrote Life and Times of 23O / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Laurence Sterne (1909, rev. ed. 1925) and History of Henry Fielding (1918), both definitive works, and considered by some to be among the best biog- raphies in the English language. After retiring from his scholarly career, he was four times elected Governor of his native State of Connecticut. His autobiography reflects not only New England life, but also American academic and political life. 2652. Connecticut Yankee; an autobiography. New Haven, Yale University Press, 1943. 428 p. illus. A43-2896 F100.C7A3 2653. HOMER CROY, 1883- Croy started life as a Missouri farm boy. After working in journalism, he became a novelist. He is probably best-known, however, for his auto- biographical and biographical works. 2654. Country cured. New York, Harper, 1943. 282 p. 43-14871 PS3505.R9554C6 Autobiography. 2655. Wonderful neighbor. New York, Harper, 1945. 204 p. 45^878 PS3505.R9554Z53 A book of autobiographical sketches depicting life in a Midwestern farm community during the au- thor's youth. 2656. He hanged them high; an authentic account of the fanatical judge who hanged eighty- eight men. New York, Duell, Sloan & Pearce, 1952. 278 p. illus. 52-6782Law A biography of Isaac Charles Parker (1838-96), who for three decades was sole U. S. judge over a large frontier area. 2657. Our Will Rogers. New York, Duell, Sloan & Pearce, 1953. 377 p. 53-10229 PN2287.R74C7 A life of the cowboy-comedian-philosopher who achieved much of his fame as a journalist and as a motion-picture actor. His Autobiography (Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1949) is actually a selection by Donald Day from the various newspaper columns, letters, etc., which Rogers wrote. 2658. JULIAN DANA, 1907- Dana is a California biographer whose name originally was Morgan Mercer. Lost Springtime, the Chronicle of a Journey Far Away and Long Ago (1938) is an account of a camping trip in the Sierras, during which the author manages to re- count much early Californian history. 2659. Sutter of California. New York, Press of the Pioneers, 1934. 423 p. illus. 35-27048 F865.S948 Bibliography: p. 397-401. One of several biographies of John Sutter (1803- 1880), on whose land gold was first discovered in California, this book was reissued by Macmillan in 1936. Another distinguished biography of Sutter is James Zollinger's Sutter, the Man and His Em~ pire (New York, Oxford University Press, 1939). 2660. The man who built San Francisco; a study of Ralston's journey with banners. New York, Macmillan, 1936. 397 p. illus. 36-29826 F869.S3R155 William Chapman Ralston (1826-1875) was a capitalist whose career was much entwined with the early history of San Francisco, which receives con- siderable attention in this biography. EUGENE DAVENPORT, 1 856-1 941 2661. Timberland times. Urbana, University of Illinois Press, 1950. 274 p. 50-6384 F572.G46D3 An autobiographical account of his youth, this book is also a record of how pioneer people lived and thought in the period when the Michigan timberlands were being cleared and turned into farms. 2662. PIERRE JEAN DE SMET, 1 801-1873 Father de Smet was an early Jesuit missionary in the American Northwest. His published books include several on his journeys and his work. He also wrote knowingly on the Indians of the area. 2663. Life, letters and travels of Father Pierre- Jean de Smet, S. J., 1801-1873; missionary labors and adventures among the wild tribes of the North American Indians . . . edited from the origi- nal unpublished manuscript journals and letter books and from his printed works, with historical, geographical, ethnological and other notes; also a life of Father de Smet ... by Hiram Martin Chit- tenden and Alfred Talbot Richardson. New York, Harper, 1905 [ c i904] 4 v. illus. 4-33581 F591.S63 2664. WILLIAM ORVILLE DOUGLAS, 1898- While mainly known for his work in the legal profession, Supreme Court Justice Douglas in his autobiography depicted little of his court activi- ties, presenting instead a regional book about mountain-climbing and fishing in the Northwest. BIOGRAPHY AND AUTOBIOGRAPHY / 23 1 2665. Of men and mountains. New York, Harper, 1950. xiv, 338 p. 50-7078 F851.7.D68 2666. DANIEL DRAKE, 1785-1852 Drake was a leading pioneer doctor who established his fame in frontier Kentucky and Ohio. 2667. Pioneer life in Kentucky, 1785-1800. Edited from the original manuscript, with introduc- tory comments and a biographical sketch, by Emmet Field Horine. New York, Schuman, 1948. xxix, 257 p. illus. 48-7439 F451.D76 1948 A restoration of the original text of a work which first appeared in 1870. 2668. MARGARET L. (O'NEALE) TIMBER- LAKE EATON, i799?-i879 Mrs. Eaton's autobiography, written in 1873, is a crude but vivid defense of her reputation and an account of her activities in Washington social and political life during the administration of Andrew Jackson. Queena Pollack's biography Peggy Eaton, Democracy's Mistress (New York, Minton, Balch, 193 1 ) offers further material for the sociologist and political historian. An impressive account is Samuel Hopkins Adams' fictional biography, The Gorgeous Hussy (Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1934). 2669. 2670. The autobiography of Peggy Eaton. New York, Scribner, 1932. 216 p. 32-7318 E381E15 CHARLES WILLIAM ELIOT, 1834-1926 Charles W. Eliot was long a president of Harvard University. His writings are mainly scholarly, educational, or public-spirited in nature. However, he also wrote a distinguished short mem- oir of a guide who had been his friend to the time of his death. 2671. 1904. 2672. John Gilley, Maine farmer and fisherman. Boston, American Unitarian Association, 72 p. 4-27134 F29.S85E4 PHILIP VICKERS FITHIAN, 174 7-1 776 Fithian was a schoolmaster, clergyman, and finally army chaplain. In his journal and letters he clearly recorded the reactions of the sections of the country he knew on the eve of the Revolution. 2673. Philip Vickers Fithian, journal and letters. Princeton, University Library, 1900-34. 2 v. illus. 1-30673 E163.F54 Volume 1, covering the years 1767-74, has the subtitle: "Student at Princeton College, 1770-72, Tutor at Nomini Hall in Virginia, 1773-74." Vol- ume 2 covers the period 1775-76 and has the tide continued as "Written on the Virginia-Pennsylvania Frontier and in the Army." A revised edition covering the section for 1773-74 was published in 1943 at Williamsburg, Va., by Colonial Williamsburg, Inc. 2674. CLAUDE MOORE FUESS, 1885- While rising to a position as headmaster of a private New England school, Fuess wrote a num- ber of scholarly, biographical, and historical works, many of them reflecting his academic connections, such as: An Old New England School (1917), Men of Andover (1928), Amherst (1935), and Stanley King of Amherst (1955). His 1930 biography Daniel Webster (q. v.) is considered by many to be his masterpiece. 2675. Life of Caleb Cushing. New York, Har- court, Brace, 1923. 2 v. 23-12975 E415.9.C98F9 Cushing (1800-79) had an important judicial and diplomatic career, as well as serving some time as a Member of Congress. 2676. Rufus Choate, the wizard of the law. New York, Minton, Balch, 1928. 278 p. illus. 28-8613 E340.C4F9 Choate (1799-1859) was a leading 19th-century lawyer and orator. 2677. Carl Schurz, reformer (1 829-1 906) New York, Dodd, Mead, 1932. xv, 421 p. illus. (American political leaders) 32-26442 E664.S39F92 "Selected bibliography": p. 395-401. Schurz was a German-American liberal who led an active diplomatic, political, and military career; his life is to some extent a history of political ideas of the period. 2678. Joseph B. Eastman, servant of the people. New York, Columbia University Press, 1952. 363 p. illus. 52-8268 HE2754.E3F8 Eastman (1882-1944) was a government career man whose career centered mainly about transpor- tation; accordingly, this book is in some measure a review of the activities of the Interstate Commerce Commission during most of his lifetime. 2679. FERRIS GREENSLET, 1875- Grc< nslct was successively an editor for The Atlantic Monthly, a literary adviser for 1 [ougfaton 232 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Mifflin, and then the occupant of several adminis- trative positions in that publishing firm. His early work includes much literary criticism (largely book reviews), and several biographies of literary per- sonages. 2680. Under the bridge, an autobiography. Bos- ton, Houghton Mifflin, 1943. 237 p. 43-16298 PS3513.R4876Z5 2681. The Lowells and their seven worlds. Bos- ton, Houghton Mifflin, 1946. xi, 442 p. illus. 46-25260 CS71.L915 1946 A multiple biography of ten generations (includ- ing James Russell and Amy Lowell) of a well-to-do Massachusetts family, this book reflects much of New England's history. 2682. HERMANN HAGEDORN, 1882- Hagedorn, a longtime admirer and student of Theodore Roosevelt (q. v.), has used this lifelong interest as a topic source for many of his books, which frequendy employ the biographical medium. These range from studies of aspects or portions of his life, through the editing of the Memorial Edition of Roosevelt's works, to The Rough Rider (1927), a novel dealing with the Spanish-American War activities of the president-to-be. However, Hage- dorn has on occasion turned to other subjects, as in Edwin Arlington Robinson (1938), a life of the poet (q. v.); Prophet in the Wilderness (1947, rev. 1954), a life of Albert Schweitzer; and The Mag- nate William Boyce Thompson and His Time [1869-1930] (1935), an authorized biography. He ventured into collective biography in Americans (1946), a book of 17 biographical sketches designed originally to introduce foreigners to prominent Americans. In addition Hagedorn has written some conventional poetry and drama; his greatest popular success in poetry may have been The Bomb that Fell on America (1946, rev. 1950), a statement on the moral implications of the atomic bomb, stated in a loose Whitman-Sandburg free verse. 2683. Roosevelt in the Bad Lands. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1921. xxvi, 491 p. illus. (Publications of the Roosevelt Memorial Associa- tion, 1) 21-19415 E757.H142 A story of Roosevelt in Dakota that is also a story of frontier life. 2684. Leonard Wood, a biography. New York, Harper, 193 1. 2 v. illus. 31-24003 E181.W83 Gen. Wood (1860-1927) was a friend of Theodore Roosevelt, a member of the "Rough Rid- ers," a prominent candidate for a presidential nomination, and an administrator in Cuba and the Philippines. "Authorities": v. 1, p. 430-436; v. 2, p. 496-503. 2685. Brookings; a biography. New York, Mac- millan, 1936. 334 p. illus. 36-32578 CT275.B7554H3 Robert S. Brookings (1850-1932) was a merchant who, having made a fortune, became a philan- thropist. "Authorities": p. 317-324; "Publications of Robert S. Brookings": p. 325-326. 2686. The Roosevelt family of Sagamore Hill. New York, Macmillan, 1954. 435 p. illus. 54-11834 E757.3.H3 A view of the Roosevelt family in their home at Oyster Bay, New York. The book follows Theodore Roosevelt to Washington during his years in the presidency. 2687. FRANCIS JOHN HALFORD, 1902-1953 Halford was a medical doctor who practiced in the Hawaiian Islands. 2688. 9 doctors & God. Honolulu, University of Hawaii, 1954. 322 p. illus. 54-10046 R722.H23 The story of the first 9 missionary doctors sent from the United States to the Hawaiian Islands in the 19th century. RALPH VOLNEY HARLOW, 1884- 2689. Gerrit Smith, philanthropist and reformer. New York, Holt, 1939. 501 p. 39-4639 HV28.S63H3 Gerrit Smith (1797-1874) was a wealthy re- former, philanthropist, and statesman. He was long active in the anti-slavery movement, among others. His life story almost constitutes a history of American philanthropic activities in that period. 2690. RACKHAM HOLT, 1899- George Washington Carver, an American biography. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, Doran, 1943. 342 p. illus. 43-51106 S417.C3H6 Carver was a Negro scientist who became famous for his work in the development of byproducts of the peanut. His biography in a way reflects the progress of the Negro in America. 2691. PHILIP HONE, 1780-1851 Hone, at one time mayor of New York, was a member of the city's social and literary circles. BIOGRAPHY AND AUTOBIOGRAPHY / 233 His diary indicates the attitudes of the Whig "aris- tocracy," and it gives a comprehensive picture cf life in New York City at that time. It was first published in 1889 as edited by Bayard Tuckermann. The text cited below was edited by Allan Nevins, an American historian and biographer whose works are listed under various subjects in this bibliography. 2692. The diary of Philip Hone, 1828-1851. New York, Dodd, Mead, 1927. 2 v. illus. 28-26080 F128.44.H78 2693. MARK ANTONY DE WOLFE HOWE, 1864- M. A. De Wolfe Howe was born in Rhode Island, but has become entrenched as the dean of Boston writers. His writings are based on much research, and are usually biographical in form, at times through the arranging and connecting of the sub- ject's own writings. Howe has commonly written about Boston and New England figures in general, and people he himself has known in particular. While many of his books have been about less spec- tacular personages of history, he did in Holmes of the Breakfast Table (1939) produce a distinguished short biography of the prominent New England doctor-author (q. v.). 2694. Barrett Wendell and his letters. Boston, Adantic Monthly Press, 1924. 350 p. illus. 24-24596 PS3158.W7Z53 Wendell (1855-1921) was for 40 years a teacher of English literature at Harvard University, as well as the author of considerable literary criticism and history. This biography, composed largely of ex- tracts from his letters, was awarded a Pulitzer prize for biography in 1925. 2695. James Ford Rhodes, American historian. New York, Appleton, 1929. 375 p. illus. 29-9826 E175.5.R44 2696. Portrait of an independent, Moorfield Storey, 1845-1929. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1932. 383 p. illus. 32-1 1810 E664.S883II7 Includes numerous letters written by Moorefield Storey. A book written to illustrate the position of the independent in American life. 2697. John Jay Chapman and his letters. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1937. 498 p. illus. 37-28704 PS1292.C3ZS? A life of Chapman (1862-193}) composed largely of selected and arranged letters, with connecting statements, which combine to reveal the personality of this New York critic, essayist, translator, and commentator on religious and educational matters. Chapman himself produced some lightly autobi- ographical work in Memories and Milestones ( 1915), which is more a commentary on those he has known. 2698. A venture in remembrance. Boston, Little, Brown, 1941. 3 19 p. 41-16365 PS3515.O858Z5 1941 Autobiography. 2699. WILL JAMES, 1892-1942 James, whose full name is William Roderick James, became an author and artist after a career as a cowboy. His various stories were quite widely read, but it is probably his autobiography, written in the "cowboy vernacular," which has continued to be most widely read, possibly because of its able picturing of the cowboy's life. 2700. Lone cowboy; my life story. New York, Scribner, 1930. 431 p. illus. 30-20657 F596.J287 2701. ALVIN SAUNDERS JOHNSON, 1874- Alvin Johnson was born on a Nebraska farm, but went on to become an educator prominent in the fields of economics and social science. He founded the New School for Social Research and was the associate editor of the Encyclopedia of the Social Sciences (1930-35). 2702. Pioneer's progress, an autobiography. New York, Viking Press, 1952. 413 p. 52-12704 H59.J6A3 2703. ALFRED KAZIN, 191 5- Kazin is probably most generally known for his literary criticism (q. v.), but he has also pub- lished an autobiographical volume that is a lyrical evocation of his childhood in Brooklyn, N. V., and which gives a view of city tenement life. 2704. A walker in the city. New Yoik, I l.ircourt, Brace, 1951. 176 p. illus. 51-13797 PN75.K3A3 2705. HELEN ADAMS KELLER, 1880- I [elen Keller was a blind and deaf, and hence mute, person who was educated to speak, read (Braille), and take .1 useful place in society. She has become a leading example oi how successfully a handicapped child may overcome its difficulties. Miss Keller, in Teacher: Anne Sullivan A/... y 234 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES (1955), has written a biography of the dedicated woman who led her out of the deaf and blind child's world of isolation. 2706. The story of my life, by Helen Keller with her letters (1887-1901) and a supplementary account of her education, including passages from the reports and letters of her teacher, Anne Mans- field Sullivan, by John Albert Macy. New York, Doubleday, Page, 1903. 441 p. illus. 3-7188 HV1624.K4A15 2707. The world I live in. New York, Century, 1908. 195 p. 8-30582 HV1624.K4A2 "These essays and the poem in this book appeared originally in the Century magazine." — Preface. 2708. Midstream; my later life. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, Doran, 1929. xxiii, 362 p. illus. 29-23705 HV1624.K4A17 1929 2709. Helen Keller's journal, 1936-1937. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, Doran, 1938. 313 p. 38-27235 HV1624.K4A26 2710. ERASMUS DARWIN KEYES, 1810-1895 Keyes graduated from West Point in 1832. His memoirs trace his career after this, from his position on the staff of Gen. Winfield Scott (who is discussed in detail), through his activity in Indian warfare, to his initial participation as a general in the Civil War. 271 1. Fifty years' observations of men and events, civil and military. New York, Schribner, 1884. 515 p. 11-23243 E181.K44 2712. RICHARD WILLIAM LEOPOLD Leopold is a professor of American history at Northwestern University. His most recent bio- graphical work is Elihu Root and the Conservative Tradition (1954). 2713. Robert Dale Owen. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1940. 470 p. illus. (Har- vard historical studies . . . v. 45) 40-34930 HX696.O9L56 This biography of Owen (1801-1877) illustrates the important influence of one minor figure on the development of his period. Owen was active in many lines: socialism, politics, etc. "A list of the writings of Robert Dale Owen": p. [4i9]~428. Bibliography: p. [429P440. 2714. CHARLES AUGUSTUS LINDBERGH, 1902- In 1927 Lindbergh became a popular hero when he flew across the Atlantic from New York to Paris. This pioneering effort still stands out in a lifetime devoted to aviation. His autobiography, which centers about this episode, is a closeup view of American aviation during the first third of the century. 2715. The Spirit of St. Louis. New York, Scrib- ner, 1953. 562 p. illus. 53-11546 TL540.L5A85 Autobiography. 2716. ROBERT MITCHELL LINDNER, 1914- 1956 Lindner, a psychoanalyst of literary skill who practiced in Baltimore, had been a criminal psycho- analyst, and had a strong interest in criminals and their causes (as distinct from the traditional ap- proach of their symptoms). This is revealed in books such as Stone Walls and Men (1946) and Prescription jor Rebellion (1952). 2717. Rebel without a cause; the hypnoanalysis of a criminal psychopath. New York, Grune & Stratton, 1944. 296 p. SG44-211 RC602.L513 A case history of an actual, but atypical, Polish- American youth. The book, which depicts a slum childhood and the forming of a criminal, has been regarded as a fascinating, though tragic, major sociological document. At the same time, the novel means employed for obtaining the information, and the resultant unwilled and unmodified veracity, give this an unusual and almost unique position in the field of biography and autobiography. 2718. The fifty-minute hour: a collection of true psychoanalytic tales. New York, Rinehart, i955» c i954- 2 93 P- 54~9 86 3 . RC501.L5 True "short stories" about abnormal individuals; each comprises something of a case history, and hence is also something of a picture of abnormal types and the societal processes behind them. The stories have been praised for informative as well as literary qualities. 2719. CARL J. LOMEN Lomen went to Alaska at the age of 19 to look for gold; he stayed to go into a successful deer- raising industry. Besides the reindeer industry, his book pictures the Alaskan Eskimo and the Klondike gold rush. BIOGRAPHY AND AUTOBIOGRAPHY / 235 2720. Fifty years in Alaska. New York, McKay, 1954. 302 p. 54~ I 33 1 3 Fa°9- L86 KATHARINE DU PRE LUMPKIN, 1897- 2721. The making of a Southerner. New York, Knopf, 1947. 247 p. 47-312 F215.L85 The autobiography of a sociologist who does much to explain Southern social conditions. She has achieved some of her objectivity towards the is- sue by her education and residence in the North. 2722. ALICE LEE MARRIOTT, 1910- Alice Marriott is an ethnologist who has written a number of books depicting the customs of Indian groups in the Southwest. Even in her autobiographical works, the main interest is in the Indians she observes. 2723. Maria, the potter of San Ildefonso. Nor- man, University of Oklahoma Press, 1948. 294 p. illus. (The Civilization of the American Indian [series]) 48-2101 E98.P8M28 A biography of Maria Montoya Martinez, a New Mexican Indian who became famous for her pottery. 2724. The valley below. Norman, University of Oklahoma Press, 1949. 243 p. illus. 49-7779 F797- M 35 An ethnologist's story of life in a predominantly Spanish American and Indian community in New >' Mexico. 2725. Greener fields; experiences among the Amer- ican Indians. New York, Crowell, 1953. 274 p. 53-8436 E98.C9M3 2726. KATHRYN HARROD MASON Mason was a descendant of James Harrod (1746-1793?), founder of the first settlement in Kentucky; she wrote his biography in an attempt to rescue him from what she felt to be an unjust ob- scurity. In the course of the book she produces an excellent picture of frontier life. 2727. James Harrod of Kentucky. Baton Rouge, Louisiana State University Press, 1951. xxii, 266 p. illus. (Southern biography series) 51-10080 F454.H3M3 Bibliography: p. [245J-254. 2728. JOHN JOSEPH MATHEWS Mathews is an Osage Indian who has been very well educated in the white man's tradition. 2729. Wah'kon-tah; the Osage and the white man's road. Norman, University of Oklahoma Press, 1932. 359 p. illus. ([The Civilization of the American Indian series]) 32-28153 E99.O8M3 A story of the Osage Indians and their country; based on the journal of Major Laban J. Miles ( 1844— 1 931), who in 1878 became an Osage agent and lived with them thereafter. 2730. Talking to the moon. Chicago, University of Chicago Press. 1945. 243 p. illus. A45-3207 CT275.M4644A3 A detailed observational story of a nature-lover living alone for 10 years on a Kansas prairie. 2731. Life and death of an oilman; the career of E. W. Marland. Norman, University of Oklahoma Press, 195 1. 259 p. illus. 51-13242 HD9570.M3M3 A study of an age and place through the study of the rise and decline of one of the last of the big- business tycoons, Ernest Whitworth Marland ( 1874— 1941), an Oklahoma oilman. 2732. ROBERT MAUDSLAY, 1855-1939 Maudslay was an Englishman who settled in Texas in 1882 and engaged in sheep raising. 2733. Texas sheepman; the reminiscences of Rob- ert Maudslay. Austin, University of Texas Press, 1 95 1. 138 p. 51-13259 F391.M46 Letters to a niece which informally describe fron- tier life and the rapidly growing sheep industry. 2734. WILLIAM HENRY MAULDIN, 192 1- Bill Mauldin achieved fame as a war car- toonist, then as an author. Most of his books combine the two media. 2735. Up front. New York, Holt, 1945. 228 p. illus. 45-34 8 4 I>745- 2 - M 34 A story of the regular soldier, based largely on the author's experiences in the European theater of World War II. In large part the text was written around his cartoons. 2736. Back home. New York, Sloane, 1947. 315 p. illus. 47-11625 E169.M426 Copiously illustrated with the author's cartoons, this book reflects his experience as a returning vet- eran after World War II. The book genci enough to be a statement on the position of most veterans. 236 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 2737. A sort of a saga. New York, Sloane, 1949. 301 p. illus. 49-11455 NC1429.M428 1949 The story of the author's childhood in New Mexico and Arizona. 2738. Bill Mauldin in Korea. New York, Norton, 1952. 171 p. illus. 52-12878 DS918.M34 2739. DAVID JOHN MAYS, 1896- Mays is a lawyer with an extensive knowl- edge of American history. He has written a number of legal works. 2740. Edmund Pendleton, 1721-1803; a biography. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1952. 2 v. illus. 52-5036 F230.P425 A scholarly, thorough, and detailed study of a con- servative-revolutionary jurist. The book also deals with Virginia and Revolutionary War politics. 2741. ELLIOTT TUCKER MERRICK, 1905- Elliott Merrick is the author of several books, fictional and non-fictional, dealing with Labrador and Vermont. 2742. Green Mountain farm. New York, Mac- millan, 1948. 209 p. 48-10795 _ PS3525.E6394G7 A story of how, in order to simplify life during the depression, he purchased a farm in Vermont, and his subsequent experiences and observations there. 2743. GEORGE MIDDLETON, 1880- In his autobiography Middleton, a play- wright, presents a view of the theatrical world dur- ing the 45 years in which he was active in it. Middleton, married to a daughter of Robert M. LaFollette, also knew many people prominent in the world of politics. 2744. These things are mine; the autobiography of a journeyman playwright. New York, Macmillan, 1947. 448 p. illus. 47-30341 PS3525.I27Z5 LEE GRAHAM MILLER, 1902- 2745. The story of Ernie Pyle. New York, Viking Press, 1950. 439 p. 50-8918 PN4874.P86M53 1950 Ernie Pyle (1900-1945) became famous during World War II for his work as a war correspondent. A large mass market was reached with his books Here Is Your War (1943), Brave Men (1944), and the posthumous, postwar Last Chapter (1946). Pyle was killed in the Pacific theater of the war shortly before its close. His Home Country (1947) was a selection of articles published from 1935 to 1940, and it reflected the author's travels about America. 2746. MAX CARLTON MILLER, 1901- Max Miller writes autobiographical-repor- torial books in a clear, modern journalistic style that reveals his quiet humor, unpretentiousness, mod- erate philosophizing, frustration in a complex world, his defeat, and his identity with the common man and underdog. His books are mainly anecdotes and sketches of various persons, places, and events with which he has been connected; sometimes they approximate essays, and sometimes they approxi- mate the short-story form. A number of these have reflected his service with the Navy, such as Day- break for Our Carrier (1944), describing life on an airplane carrier; The Far Shore (1945), the Nor- mandy and Southern France invasions as seen by naval officer Miller; I'm Sure We've Met Before (1951), which presents what he saw of the Korean War; and Always the Mediterranean ( 1952), a story of his experiences with the American Sixth Fleet. Other books include The Man on the Barge (1935), a view of humanity and the meek as seen by a bargeman; A Stranger Came to Port ( 1938), a novel about a businessman who escapes to a houseboat, a story which enables the author to give a good picture of the tuna industry and other harbor mari- time activities; Harbor of the Sun (1940), a history of San Diego, California; Reno (1941), a pictur- esque-anecdotal story of Reno, Nevada; The Town with the Funny Name (1948), the author's non- guidebook view of La Jolla, California; The Cruise of the Cow (195 1 ), a story of a cruise in the Gulf of California; and Speal^ to the Earth (1955), which deals with the petroleum industry. 2747. I cover the waterfront. New York, Dutton, 1932. 204 p. 32-26658 PS3525.I554I2 1932 A San Diego newspaperman's humorous account in sketch form of life along the waterfront; the work has become a reportorial classic. 2748. The beginning of a mortal. New York, Dutton, 1933. 253 p. illus. 33-33492 PS3525- T 554Z5 *933 Chiidhood and youth in a Washington State lum- ber town, on a Montana homestead, and in the small California town where he began as a cub reporter. BIOGRAPHY AND AUTOBIOGRAPHY / 237 2749. He went away for a while. New York, Dut- ton, 1933. 248 p. 33-6648 PS3525.I554H4 1933c A story of the author's withdrawal to a coastal shack for purposes of meditation, interspersed with the thoughts resulting therefrom. 2750. The second house from the corner. New York, Dutton, 1934. 254 p. 34-25695 PS3525.I554S4 1934 Autobiographical story of a householder in the San Diego suburbs, told mainly in terms of the people he meets and observes. 2751. Fog and men on Bering Sea. New York, Dutton, 1936. 271 p. illus. 36-4911 F951.M56 A personal picture of the Alaskan coast and the Bering Sea. 2752. For the sake of shadows. New York, Dut- ton, 1936. 200 p. 36-21 171 PS3525.I554F6 1936a An account of the author's experiences as a script- writer in Hollywood. 2753. Land where time stands still. New York, Dodd, Mead, 1943. 236 p. illus. 43-4562 F1246.M7 The record of a trip from San Diego, through the desert country, to Cape San Lucas at the tip of Lower California, with a view of the passive life of the Indian natives. 2754. No matter what happens. New York, Dut- ton, 1949. 249 p. illus. 49-5277 PS3525.I554Z52 I An informal, rambling autobiography. 755. JOSEPH MITCHELL, 1908- Mitchell's career has been largely as a New fork City reporter and as a New Yorker author. -Jis humorous, descriptive works offer a vivid im- >ression of his observations of New York City. rhis appears not only in his reportorial writing, but lso in his semi-fiction, such as McSorley's Wonder- ul Saloon (1943) and Old Mr. Flood (1948). 756. My ears are bent. New York, Sheridan House, 1938. 284 p. 38-4768 PS3525.I9714M9 1938 L757. JAMES MONAGHAN, 1891- James Monaghan, who often signs himself ly Monaghan, is a historian long concerned with linois history. His scholarly, well-written works iclude Diplomat in Carpet Slippers: Abraham Lincoln Deals With Foreign Affairs (1945) and Civil War on the Western Border (1955). He has also produced a two volume Lincoln Bibliography, 1839-1939 ( 1943-45) and a pictorial work, This is Illinois (1949). 2758. Last of the bad men, by Jay Monaghan. Indianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill, 1946. 293 p. illus. 46-4731 F595.H8M6 At head of tide: The legend of Tom Horn. "List of sources": p. 275-284. The life of Tom Horn (1860-1903), a Wyoming professional assassin who worked for a fee. 2759. The Great Rascal; the life and adventures of Ned Buntline. Boston, Little, Brown, 1952, c i95i. 353 p. illus. 52-5003 PS2156.J2Z75 A biography of Edward Zane Carroll Judson (1823-1886), a low quality, dime-novel literary hack and general rogue of great popularity during the 19th century. Bibliography: p. 312-333. 2760. HARRIET MONROE, 1860-1936 Harriet Monroe was a minor Chicago poet who established a reputation for herself by founding in 1912 and editing Poetry: A Magazine of Verse. Through this she "discovered" many of the more important American poets of the period and helped to find an audience for them. Her autobiography thus becomes a reflection of the literary life of the period. 2761. A poet's life; seventy years in a changing world. New York, Macmillan, 1938. 488 p. illus. 38-27186 PS2423.A4 1938 2762. ANNA MARY (ROBERTSON) MOSES, 1860- Familiarly known as "Grandma Moses," Anna Moses is an upstate New York country woman who took up painting at 80, and thus as an artist began one of America's phenomenal success stories. 2763. Grandma Moses: my life's history. Edited by Otto Kaliir. New York, Harper, 1952. 140 p. illus. 51-11940 ND237.M; S \ 3 JOSEPH NELSON 2764. Backwoods teacher. Philadelphia, Lippin- cott, 1949. 288 p. 49-10524 PZ^.N^^sH.u- The experiences ot .1 t; a< her during his : rsi yeai in an Ozark hillbilly community in Missouri. 238 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 2765. GEORGE HERBERT PALMER, 1842- 1933 For more than 40 years Palmer taught philosophy at Harvard, working with men such as Roycc, James, and Santayana. While he wrote a number of philosophical, literary, and educational works, he is remembered most for his two "personal" books. 2766. The life of Alice Freeman Palmer. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1908. 354 p. illus. 8-12560 LD7212.7 1882.P2 A life of the author's wife, who died in 1902. The book devotes much attention to her years as president of Wellesley College and her work to build it up. It is also a record of the personal relationship between two individuals with separate careers. 2767. The autobiography of a philosopher. Bos- ton, Houghton Mifflin, 1930. 137 p. 30-23585 B945.P24A3 1930 A somewhat poetic work which not only shows how the author came to his beliefs, but which also depicts a method of education and the principles by which a major university department of philosophy was built up. 2768. WILLIAM BELMONT PARKER, 1871- 1934 Most extensively engaged in his lifetime in Hispanic activities (including the editing of a com- prehensive series of Latin American biographies), Parker also produced some American biography. This included The Life and Public Services of Jus- tin Smith Morrill (1944); Morrill (1810-1898) was a New Englander iong known as the "father of the Senate" and familiar with many of the famous of his day. 2769. Edward Rowland Sill; his life and work. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1915. 307 p. illus. 15-4670 PS2838.P3 Sill (1841-1887) was a very unprolific poet from Windsor, Conn., who wrote in an Emersonian- Tennysonian tradition, producing some good minor poetry and light essays. Much of his life was passed in Ohio and California. This biography is made up largely of his letters, with Parker supplying con- necting passages. Parker also edited The Poetical Worths (Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1917) of Sill. 2770. JAMES PARTON, 1822-1891 Parton was the first professional biographer in America, and he has been called the father of American biography. With The Life of Horace Greeley (1855), he established himself as a literary force and one of the best paid (and more prolific) authors of his period in America. His lively, real- istic, well-written, and well-organized volumes still hold a position in literature, but some also remain major sources. His first work in particular, and his life work in general form a historical landmark in this country's literature. While he ventured into other fields, his work was mainly biographical, oc- casionally collective. He usually wrote about Amer- icans, although his life of Voltaire (1881, 2 v.) was a major work. 2771. Life and times of Aaron Burr . . . New York, Mason, 1858. 696 p. 7-14130 E302.6.B9P27 2772. Life of Andrew Jackson. New York, Mason, i860. 3 v. 11-16615 E382.P27 2773. Life and times of Benjamin Franklin. New York, Mason, 1864. 2 v. 10-5354 E302.6.F8P27 2774. Famous Americans of recent times. Boston, ' Ticknor & Fields, 1867. 473 p. 6-1407 E339.P27 2775. Life of Thomas Jefferson, third President oL the United States. Boston, Osgood, 1874. 764 p. 11-22428 E332.P27, 2776. Flower, Milton Embick. James Parton, the father of modern biography. Durham, Duke University Press, 1951. 253 p. illus. (Duke Uni- versity publications) 51-14735 E175.5.P3F6' Bibliography: p. [203J-2H. ANGELO M. PELLEGRINI 2777. Immigrant's return. New York, Macmillan, 1951. 269 p. 51-7138 E184.I8P4 Autobiography of a college professor who emi- grated from Italy, as a member of a peasant family, to Washington State at the age of nine in 1913. The book includes an account of the author's return to Italy on a Guggenheim fellowship, and of his search for a definition of "Americanism." 2778. WILLIAM ALEXANDER PERCY, 1885- 1942 Percy came from a prominent upper-class family and was well aware of his social responsibilities During his life he was best known for his poetry which was conservative in tenor; a volume of Collected Poems appeared in 1943. BIOGRAPHY AND AUTOBIOGRAPHY / 239 2779. Lanterns on the levee; recollections of a planter's son. New York, Knopf, 1941. 347 P- 4 I "457° .PS353!- E6 5 Z 5 x 94* An autobiography that depicts life in the Missis- sippi delta, and reflects the Southern "aristocrat's" view of life. 2780. LIZETTE WOODWORTH REESE, 1856- 1935 As a minor poetess of considerable quality Lizette Woodworth Reese was well known through much of her long and relatively placid career for her short neo-Victorian lyrics. A volume of Selected Poems appeared in 1926, to be followed by poetry in vol- umes such as White April (1930), Pastures (1933), and The Old House in the Country (1936). 2781. A Victorian village. New York, Farrar & Rinehart, 1929. 285 p. 29-20040 PS2693.V5 1929 Reminiscences of the author's childhood in Mary- land, her teaching career in Waverly (near Balti- more), and her career as a writer. The town of Waverly again figures prominently in her somewhat autobiographical The Yor\ Road (1931), a volume of essays, sketches, and poems on the village. 2782. JOHN ANDREW RICE, 1888- Rice was raised in a South Carolina environ- ment that still lived in the past. As an adult he be- came a liberal educator, finally cooperating in the founding of an experimental college. While much of his autobiography deals with the academic world of the twentieth century as he knew it, a very large part of it is devoted to his "eighteenth century" back- ground. 2783. I came out of the eighteenth century. New York, Harper, 1942. 341 p. 42-36390 LA2 3 i7.R 4 :A} Autobiography. 2784. JACOB AUGUST RIIS, 1849-1914 Riis was a Danish-American journalist with a strong interest in social reform, particularly as it pertained to the worse aspects of urban life. In be- half of his interests he wrote a number of books de- scribing such things as city slums. 2785. The making of an American. Now York, Macmillan, 1901. xiii, 44 ^ p. illus. 1-26930 CT275.R6A3 1901 Autobiography. 2786. MARY (ROBERTS) RINEHART, 1876- Mary Roberts Rinehart is a very popular and prolific, and hence very well paid, novelist who has written to entertain, rather than to create literature. 2787. My story; a new edition and seventeen new years. New York, Rinehart, 1948. 570 p. illus. 4 8 -93 J 3 PS 3535- I 73 Z 5 x 94 8 First edition: 1931. 2788. ANDREW DENNY RODGERS, 1900- Andrew Denny Rodgers III, has, as an author, specialized in biographies of people con- cerned with the botanical sciences. His scholarly works regularly include much related material on the special field of the biographee. He has also written some poetry, such as Rocf^s Before the Man- sion (1940), a long poem which reflects the history of Ohio. 2789. John Merle Coulter, missionary in science. Princeton, Princeton University Press, 1944. 321 p. A44-2293 QK.31.C87R6 Coulter (1851-1928) was a botanist who was president of Indiana University and of Lake Forest College before he became a professor at the Uni- versity of Chicago in 1885, where he remained to the time of his death. 2790. Liberty Hyde Bailey; a story of American plant sciences. Princeton, Princeton Uni- versity Press, 1949. 506 p. 49-1927 SB63.B3R6 Bailey (1858-1955) was a Michigan botanist and horticulturist. In 1888 he became professor of horticulture at Cornell University, becoming dean and director of the College of Agriculture of Cor- nell in 1903, from which he retired in 1913. He continued his scientific writings and remained gen- erally active in his field long after his retirement The book reflects much of agricultural research, conservation, and the development of agricultural colleges. 2791. Bernhard Eduard Fernow, a story of North American forestry. Princeton, Princeton University Press, 195 1. 623 p. Agr5i~5i7 SD129.F4R6 Fernow (1851-1923) was the wrs' professional forester in North Ann rica. 2792. I'.rwin Frink Smith; a story of North Ameri- can plant pathology. Philadelphia, Ameri- can Philosophical Society, 1952. 675 p. (Memoirs of the American Philosophical Society, v. }i) 52-11937 QK31.S58R63 Ql I.Pol .\ V. }! 240 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Smith (1854-1927) was a New York plant pathologist who for much of his career was em- ployed by the National Government. 2793. THEODORE ROOSEVELT, 1858-1919 Theodore Roosevelt, President of the United States from 1901 to 1909, was born in New York City, but is mainly associated with the open country. A great sportsman and exponent of the outdoor life, he expressed his philosophy through the essays in American Ideals (1897) and The Strenuous Life (1900), as well as his numerous autobiographical writings. His more intellectual side may be seen in his biographies, such as The Life of Thomas Hart Benton (1887); his literary and general essays, as in A Boo\-Lover's Holidays in the Open (1916); and other writings. A "Memorial Edition" of his works appeared in 1923-26 in 24 volumes, and a "National Edition" in 20 volumes appeared in 1926. 2794. Hunting trips of a ranchman; sketches of sport on the northern cattle plains. New York, Putnam, 1885. 318 p. illus. 31-32858 SK45.R6 1885 An early volume recording some of his big-game hunting in the Midwest. Subsequent volumes of his hunting adventures include The Wilderness Hunter (1893), Ranch Life and the Hunting Trail (1902), African Game Trails (1910), and Through the Bra- zilian Wilderness (1914). Donald Day has edited a selection of these writings in The Hunting and Exploring Adventures of Theodore Roosevelt (New York, Dial Press, 1955. 431 p.). Most of these works reveal not only his activities as a sportsman, but also his interests as a naturalist. 2795. Theodore Roosevelt; an autobiography. New York, Macmillan, 1913. 647 p. illus. 13-24840 E757.R79 2796. CONSTANCE MAYFIELD ROURKE, 1885-1941 Constance M. Rourke wrote a number of bio- graphical and historical works interpreting the American scene. While most of these are pre- dominantly biographical, American Humor (1931) is a historical study of the national character as revealed through its humor. Some of her work, such as Davy Crockett (1934), was aimed mainly at a youthful audience, although a scholarly note at the end discusses sources and the validity of various parts of the myth. 2797. Trumpets of jubilee: Henry Ward Beecher, Harriet Beecher Stowe, Lyman Beecher, Horace Greeley, P. T. Barnum. New York, Har- court, Brace, 1927. 445 p. 27-9542 E176.R85 Many aspects of American life in the early and middle 19th century are shown in this study of some of its leaders. 2798. Troupers of the Gold Coast; or, The rise of Lotta Crabtree. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1928. 262 p. illus. 28-22487 PN2287.L65R6 The history of the early California theater is given through this biographical study of a leading enter- tainer. 2799. MARI SUSETTE SANDOZ, 1907- Mari Sandoz was the daughter of a Nebraska immigrant farmer who had been a Swiss medical student. Most of her writings vividly portray the frontier life she early knew. These include novels such as Slogum House (1937) and Miss Morissa, Doctor of the Gold Trail (1955), which have a bio- graphical basis in history; and her more historical writings such as Cheyenne Autumn (1953), the tragic, slightly fictionalized history of the flight back to their native grounds of some Cheyenne Indians whom the American Army had sent to Indian Ter- ritory, and The Buffalo Hunters (1954), a story of the disappearing bison and the concomitant disap- pearance of the Plains Indians. 2800. Old Jules. Boston, Little, Brown, 1935. 424 p. illus. 35-27361 F666.S34 A biography of the author's father, Jules Ami Sandoz (i857?-i928). 2801. Crazy Horse, the strange man of the Oglalas. New York, Knopf, 1942. 428 p. 42-5340 E90.C94S3 Bibliography: p. 417-422. A biography of Crazy Horse (ca. 1 842-1 877), a famous Oglala Sioux Indian chief. 2802. HENRY ROWE SCHOOLCRAFT, 1793- 1864 Henry R. Schoolcraft took part in a number of exploratory trips through the Mississippi Valley area while it was still largely a frontier wilderness. His reports on these and his extensive books on Ameri- can Indians constituted a major contribution to the knowledge of the frontier and of the Indians. Longfellow and many other authors were influenced by and made use of these writings. In 1851 School- craft published a volume of Personal Memoirs of a Residence of Thirty Years with the Indian Tribes, BIOGRAPHY AND AUTOBIOGRAPHY / 24I which took a rough diary form and thus supplied a near-autobiography of this scholar-frontiersman. 2803. Narrative journal of travels through the northwestern regions of the United States, extending from Detroit through the great chain of American lakes to the sources of the Mississippi River, in the year 1820. East Lansing, Michigan State College Press, 1953. 520 p. 53-1985 F484.3.S37 1953 Included in the appendixes are letters, journals, newspaper accounts, official reports, and other materials relating to the expedition. First edition: 1821. 2804. CHARLES COLEMAN SELLERS, 1903- Sellers has written on such diverse biograph- ical subjects as Charles Willson Peale ( 1947) and Benedict Arnold (1930). 2805. Lorenzo Dow, the bearer of the Word. New York, Minton, Balch, 1928. 275 p. illus. 28-24263 BX8495.D57S4 Lorenzo Dow (1777-1834) was a Methodist min- ister who toured America and labored long and rigidly in behalf of his God. His once-popular writings have a confused history in alterations of text and titles, but of most interest is History of Cosmopolite, or The Dealings of God, Man, and the Devil, probably the two best-known titles under which his autobiographical work may be identified. Supplementing these is Vicissitudes Exemplified: Or the Journey of Life (1814), by his "Rib," Peggy Dow. 2808. CORNELIA OTIS SKINNER, 1901- Cornelia Otis Skinner is a stage actress who has produced a number of humorous autobiographi- cal books. These are light nonfiction, often in the form of sketches in series, designed to entertain, rather than seriously to reflect any aspect of society, or to be instructional in any other way. However, they nevertheless do to some extent reflect upper- income society and the entertainment world. 2809. Our hearts were young and gay, by Cornelia Otis Skinner and Emily Kimbrough. New York, Dodd, Mead, 1942. 247 p. 42-36388 PS3537.K533O8 2810. Family circle. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1948. 310 p. 48-8306 PN2287.S4A3 281 1. MONICA (ITOI) SONE, 1919- Mrs. Sone was raised in Seattle, Washing- ton; her parents, who were Japanese, ran a small hotel in a poor district. Mrs. Sone's autobiography reveals much of the West Coast conflict of cultures and races that occurred between whites and Orien- tals, climaxing in the family's incarceration in a temporary camp in Idaho during World War II. The book is also a record of the Americanization of a group highly divergent culturally from the basically European group that dominates, with its variations, in this country. 2812. Nisei daughter. 1953- 238 p. Autobiography. Boston, Litde, Brown, 52-12618 E184.J3S6 2806. VINCENT SHEEAN, 1899- Vincent Sheean established the journalistic type of book wherein the author's life is the nexus for observations of world events by a news reporter. Considered as one of the best such writers, Sheean has also written straight biography and much fic- tion, such as the novels Bird of the Wilderness (1941), Rage of the Soul (1952), and Lily (1954). 2807. Personal history. Garden City, N. Y., Doublcday, Doran, 1935. 403 p. 35-27062 PN4874.S46A3 London edition (H. Hamilton) has tide: In Search of History. Other volumes employing this personal-narrative technique include Between the Thunder and the Sun (1943) and This House Against This House (1946), both of which deal with problems of World War II. 431240—00 17 2813. BERT STILES, 1920 or 21-1944 Stiles was an American bomber pilot in Europe during the Second World War, in the course of which he was killed at the age of 23. His book is not only an account of war in the air, but is also the record of a youth's hopes and fears for the world, revealing a personality combination of idealism, unusual sensitivity, and occasional asperity. 2814. Serenade to the big bird. New York, Nor- ton [1952, c i947J 216 p. 52-239 D790.S9 1952 First published in London in 1947. 2815. IRVING STONE, 1903- Stone gave up a teaching career in economics to become a writer, primarily of plavs and short stories. For a while he wrote pulp fiction in order 242 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES to finance his career. With Lust for Life (1934), a fictionalized life of Van Gogh, he emerged as a biographer. This was followed by Sailor on Horse- back (1938), a biography of novelist Jack London (q. v.). His goal was now to write biography that was interesting and vital as a novel. This led to an increasing fictional element in his otherwise carefully researched works, but also to greater ac- claim and fame. While his biographies rapidly put him to the fore among fictional biographers, and were praised as novels, his straight novels in gen- eral received less attention. 2816. Clarence Darrow for the defense, a biog- raphy. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, Doran, 1941. xi, 570 p. 4i-20757Law Darrow ( 1857-1938) was a liberal agnostic lawyer who took part in some of the more famous trials of his period. His autobiography, The Story of My Life, appeared in 1932. 2817. They also ran ; the story of the men who were defeated for the presidency. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, Doran, 1943. 389 p. ports. 43-8018 E176.S87 2818. Immortal wife, the biographical novel of Jessie Benton Fremont. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, Doran, 1944. 456 p. 44-8140 PZ3.S87872I1T1 Jessie Fremont (1 824-1902) was the wife of the American explorer and geographer, John Fremont. 2819. Adversary in the house. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1947. 432 p. 47-31015 PZ3.S87872Ad A fictional biography of Eugene Victor Debs (1855-1926), a leading Socialist who was five times a candidate for the presidency. 2820. The President's lady; a novel about Rachel and Andrew Jackson. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1951. 338 p. 51-6885 PZ3.S87872Pr 2821. Love is eternal; a novel about Mary Todd Lincoln and Abraham Lincoln. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1954. 468 p. 54-9678 PZ3.S87872L0 2822. GEORGE TEMPLETON STRONG, 1820- 1875 Strong started a diary while at Columbia College and continued it through most of the rest of his life. One of the classic American diaries, it reflects life in New York City at that period, especially as seen by a member of the upper classes. Except for a brief overlapping period, it follows and supple- ments Philip Hone's Diary (q. v.). 2823. Diary; edited by Allan Nevins and Milton Halsey Thomas. New York, Macmillan, 1952. 4 v. illus. 52-11147 E415.9.S86A3 Contents. — 1. Young man in New York, 1835— 1849. — 2. The turbulent fifties, 1850-1859. — 3. The Civil War, 1860-1865. — 4. Post-war years, 1865- 1875. 2824. IDA MINERVA TARBELL, 1 857-1 944 Ida M. Tarbell began her auctorial career in association with the muckrakers, producing, in addi- tion to her journalistic work, a two-volume History of the Standard Oil Company (1904); this reflected what was to remain a basic concern with industry. Because of her interests, her autobiography showed much of the social issues of the day. Her late bi- ographies were inclined to present in a favorable light and with praise the subjects, who supplied her with information. In addition to industry and social problems, she retained a lifelong interest in Lincoln, revealed in formerly popular books such as The Life of Abraham Lincoln (1900. 2 v.) and In the Foot- steps of the Lin coins ( 1924). 2825. The life of Elbert H. Gary; the story of steel. New York, Appleton, 1925. xii, 361 p. illus. 25-22357 HD9520.G3T3 2826. Owen D. Young, a new type of industrial leader. New York, Macmillan, 1932. xiv, 353 p. 32-26673 E748.Y74T3 2827. All in the day's work; an autobiography. New York, Macmillan, 1939. 412 p. illus. 39-27284 PS3539.A58Z5 1939 2828. RICHARD TAYLOR, 1826-1879 Taylor's memoirs of the Civil War and the Reconstruction period form one of the classics of the South's numerous Civil War books. Prejudiced and bitter in his account of the Reconstruction era, Taylor is noted for his account of the Valley cam- paign of 1862. 2829. Destruction and reconstuction: personal ex- periences of the late war. New York, Ap- pleton, 1879. 274 p. 2-22621 E470.T24 2830. Edited by Richard B. Harwell. New York, Longmans, Green, 1955. xxxii, 380 p. 55-5755 E47°- T2 4 J 955 BIOGRAPHY AND AUTOBIOGRAPHY / 243 2831. STANLEY VESTAL, 1887- Vestal is the pseudonym of Walter Stanley Campbell. An educator in Oklahoma, he has used his real name for a number of textbooks and scholarly works. His pseudonym is used for books about the West, particularly the old Southwest. These include many biographical works about the pioneers, explorers, trappers, Indian chiefs, etc., in- cluding books such as Kit Carson, the Happy War- rior of the Old West (1928), Warpath; the True Story of the Fighting Sioux Told in a Biography of Chief White Bull (1934), King of the Fur Traders, the Deeds and Deviltry of Pierre Esprit Radisson (1940), Bigfoot Wallace (1942), and Jim Bridger, Mountain Man (1946). 2332. Sitting Bull, champion of the Sioux, a biog- raphy. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1932. xvi, 350 p. illus. 32-25143 E99.D1S627 2833. Joe Meek; the merry mountain man, a biog- raphy. Caldwell, Idaho, Caxton Printers, 1952. 336 p. illus. 52-5211 F880.M513 depicts his childhood in New Jersey, life in the North Woods, his home in Boston, people he has known, and in general the life of a conservative-liberal American. 2838. The open heart. Boston, Little, Brown, 1955. 236 p. 55-10760 PN4874.W369Z5 2839. WALTER FRANCIS WHITE, 1893- White has achieved fame as general secre- tary of the National Association for the Advance- ment of Colored People and as a Negro white enough to pass as a white, who has nevertheless chosen to be a Negro and to work actively in behalf of other Negroes. His autobiography is accordingly a pres- entation of his view of race relations in America since the early part of the century. He has written a number of other books on the general subject, including How Far the Promised Land? (1955). 2840. A man called White, the autobiography of Walter White. New York, Viking Press, 1948. 382 p. 48-8621 E185.97.W6A3 2834. ANTHONY F. C. WALLACE, 1923- Wallace as a biographer uses psychological and anthropological knowledge in an attempt to understand his characters and their situations. 2835. King of the Delawares: Teedyuscung, 1700- 1763. Philadelphia, University of Pennsyl- vania Press, 1949. 305 p. maps. 49-49266 E99.D2T4 Teedyuscung was a Delaware chief who tried to harmonize the differences between the whites and the Indians. CHARLES WASHBURN 2836. Come into my parlor; a biography of the aris- tocratic Everleigh sisters of Chicago. New York, National Library Press, 1936. 255 p. 37-76 HQ146.C4W3 A study of a case of prostitution in Chicago. 2837. EDWARD AUGUSTUS WEEKS, 1898- Edward Weeks has long been known as 1 editor of The Atlantic Monthly. His autobiography at times takes the form of familiar essays; in it he REBECCA (YANCEY) WILLIAMS, 1899- 2841. The vanishing Virginian. New York, Dut- ton, 1940. 277 p. 40-32286 F231.Y35 Sketches of the author's father, reflecting life in Virginia early in the 20th century. 2842. Carry me back. New York, Dutton, 1942. 320 p. 42-21571 PS3545 .J5343Z5 Autobiographical book about the author's child- hood in Lynchburg, Virginia. 2843. HANS ZINSSER, 1 878-1940 Zinsser was a doctor, later a bacteriologist, who did much work abroad as well as in America. His first book, Rats, Lice, and History (1935), is an unusually well-written and witty "biography" of typhus which uses Sterne's Tristram Shandy for a model. 2844. As I remember him. Boston, Little, Brown, 1940. 443 p. 4°" 2 753 6 Ri54- 7 oM An autobiographical pseudo-biography of "R. S.," this book reflects an American scientific hu- manist's outlook on life, and it also gives much on the progress of medicine. V Periodicals and Journalism «« & A. Newspapers: General 2845-2850 B. Newspapers: Periods, Regions, and Topics 2851-2865 C. Individual Newspapers 2866-2876 D. Newspapermen 2877-2894 E. Foreign Language Periodicals 2895-2899 F. The Practice of Journalism 2900-2912 G. Magazines: General 2913-2919 H. Individual Magazines 2920-2926 I. The Press and Society 2927-2932 4» IN A COUNTRY which aims at a government of the people, by the people, and for the people, an intelligent and informed public opinion is necessary, if the system is to function properly. From our colonial beginnings the task of informing the people has in large measure been carried on by periodicals, and, insofar as current events and public issues are concerned, principally by newspapers. This has placed on journalism a heavy responsibility, which has been met with varying degrees of success. The books listed in this chapter cover aspects of the development of journalism in this country; be- cause of the prominent role individual editors and other journalists have played in this field, a pro- portionately large number of biographies and auto- biographies have been included. There are also a number of works dealing with or reflecting problems of press responsibility. Other phases of the history of the press which figure in this chapter are the provision of entertain- ment and the diffusion of culture. Both of these have often been closely connected, especially in the belletristic writing which has historically constituted a large proportion of American periodical publica- tion. Because this field has been covered less ex- tensively in books than have newspapers and news- paper journalism, the history, nature, and influence of non-newspaper journalism and its practitioners are represented by fewer entries here than we could have wished. However, since much of this material overlaps with literature, journalistic editors and authors and periodicals appear at many other points in the bibliography, notably throughout Chapter I on Literature and in the list of periodicals at the end of Chapter III, Literary History and Criticism. To a less extent this is also true of newspapermen — and the autobiographical work of journalists such as H. L. Mencken (especially his Newspaper Days, no. 1604) and Theodore Dreiser should be considered as being as important to this chapter as to that section in which they appear. Much of this additional material may be located through the index. A. Newspapers: General 2845. Emery, Edwin, and Henry Ladd Smith. The press and America. New York, Pren- tice-Hall, 1954. 794 p. alius. (Prentice-Hall jour- nalism series) 54-10508 PN4855.E6 244 A history of American journalism for the college student. The first 14 chapters, primarily the work of Professor Smith, consider "The Heritage of the American Press" and cover the years 1 704-1 865. PERIODICALS AND JOURNALISM / 245 They are concerned less with details than with the principles upon which the profession was founded in this country. The remaining 15 chapters, chiefly the work of Professor Emery, "examine modern journalism — including newspapers, radio, television, magazines, and news-gathering organizations — and its role in an increasingly complex society." This function is seen mainly as "the continuing efforts by men and women to break down the barriers erected to prevent the flow of information and ideas upon which public opinion is so largely dependent." Throughout the book, the evolution of our mass media and the development of a tradition in Ameri- can journalism are correlated to political, social, and economic trends. A valuable feature of the book is that at the end of each chapter there is provided a fairly extensive annotated bibliography of books, periodical articles, and monographs for further readings. 2846. Jones, Robert W. Journalism in the United States. New York, Dutton, 1947. xv '» 728 p. illus. 47-4147 PN4801.J6 Bibliography: p. [705] -7 16. This history of American newspapers, their pub- lishers and editors, emphasizes the evolution of poli- cies and practices. The author discusses the 17th- and early 18th-century origins of the doctrine of freedom of the press and the growth of such tradi- tions as the interpretation of news and the advocacy of causes, as well as the post-Revolution assertion of political leadership in passing upon the merits of 1 candidates, criticizing local and national administra- • tions, and generally speaking with authority. He points out that the editor, in colonial days "merely a printer who issued a publication to which others contributed the ideas," became after the Revolution a civic as well as a political leader; and his paper, previously a sideline made up in the main of extracts from English newspapers together with a column or so of advertisements of the "classified want ad" type, thereafter supported him financially through "pressure of advertising" and, in taking sides on all public questions, not infrequendy abused its privilege of freedom. Throughout the history of American journalism, however, many editors have striven for the ideals of accuracy and the public good. 2847. Mott, Frank Luther. American journalism; a history of newspapers in the United States through 260 years: 1690 to 1950. Rev. ed. New York, Macmillan, 1950. xiv, 835 p. illus. 50-7326 PN4855.M63 1950 "Bibliographical notes" at end of chapters. Designed especially for use as a teaching aid, this book combines certain attributes of a reference tool with a comprehensive and authoritative history of American journalism, principally newspapers. Ar- rangement is chronological by chapter within 10 sections, each marked off by events which ushered in a new period. Besides providing brief histories of individual newspapers and their makers, the author deals with: format and materials; concepts, coverage, and content of news; commentary on public affairs; provision of entertainment; advertis- ing; and the relations between the press and the government, and the press and the public. Dean Mott also describes such trends of development as: the change in the status of editor from combined printer and entrepreneur to full-time professional; the rise in journalistic prestige during the Revolu- tion; the emergence of the daily paper and the edi- torial in the early Republic; the advent of the penny press, sensational journalism, and the reporting of sports and society events in the 1830's; and, in the 1860's and 70's, the final triumph of news over edi- torials as the primary function of American news- papers. An almost equally massive textbook, Alfred McClung Lee's The Daily Newspaper in America (New York, Macmillan, 1937. xiv, 797 p.), which has unfortunately not been brought up to date in a revised edition, approaches the subject from the sociological point of view. "Significant developments in the manufacture of newspapers, in their advertising and publishing departments, and in society at large are here related to trends in editorial policy." 2848. Stewart, Kenneth, and John Tebbel. Makers of modern journalism. New York, Prentice- Hall, 1952. 514 p. (Prentice-Hall journalism series) 52-8617 PN4871.S7 The authors state in their foreword: "This book is a history of American journalism told in terms of men and motives. It is a biographical history, in- tended to encompass the story of newspapers in America (and a few of the significant magazine, radio, and television leaders) by means of the inter- connected lives and times of the men who have made, and are making, the free press of this coun- try." After a brief survey of the colonial press and the early years of the Republic, the book devotes six chapters to late 19th- and early 20th-century figures such as the Bennetts, Greeley, Dana, Pulitzer, Hearst, and Raymond. There follow chapters on the development of journalism outside the North- east. The more recently established chains and prominent editors throughout the Nation arc next considered. In the closing chapters some editors of 246 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES magazines, columnists, and radio-television journal- ists are discussed. 2849. Villard, Oswald Garrison. The disap- pearing daily; chapters in American news- paper evolution. New York, Knopf, 1944. 285 p. 44-4038 PN4855.V47 This anecdotal report on the American press brings up to 1944 Mr. Villard's earlier work, Some Newspapers and Newspaper-Men, new and rev. ed. (New York, Knopf, 1926. 335 p.), and illuminates trends in "what was once a profession but is now a business." The noted editor and journalist finds these mainly negative: an "alarming mortality" among the dailies, with an accompanying tendency toward monopoly; the "appalling" loss of journal- istic influence and prestige caused by the "reac- tionary and selfish character of much of the press"; and "marked deterioration" in the character and ac- curacy of reporting and editorials. The author ex- presses candid opinions of the press associations and of various newspapers, their publishers, editors, reporters, columnists, and correspondents. The recent lack of great editors he ascribes to the "com- mercialization of the press and its domination by the owners for whom the editors are but hired men." 2850. Wolseley, Roland E. The journalist's book- shelf; an annotated and selected bibliography of United States journalism. 6th ed. Chicago, Quill & Scroll Foundation, 1955. 212 p. 55-10927 Z6940.W86 1955 First published in 1939. A comprehensive list of the principal books per- taining to American journalism, intended as "a general guide for lay readers in journalism, work- ing journalists, and scholars wishing to know of the major books published up to, but not including 1955." The books, each provided with a brief descriptive or evaluative note, are entered within 26 sections. Twenty-three correspond to the usual divisions of the field, such as business journalism or editorial writing; one lists biographies and auto- biographies of journalists; one includes fiction and other creative writing about journalism both for adults and children; and the last is a miscellany. Cross references are provided, but the entries are not numbered. An introductory essay deplores the poverty of the literature, both as to quantity (only about 2500 titles in all) and quality, and suggests that journalism offers a challenge as a subject to American novelists, historians, biographers, and technical writers. B. Newspapers: Periods, Regions, and Topics 2851. Andrews, J. Cutler. The North reports the Civil War. [Pittsburgh] University of Pitts- burgh Press, 1955. 813 p. illus. 55-6873 E609.A6 Bibliography: p. 761-780. Based upon manuscript as well as published sources, this is a massive yet lively and anecdotal chronicle of the Northern "special correspondents" of the Civil War and their reporting. The author notes the journalistic revolution caused by abnormal wartime conditions: an immense increase in news- paper circulation and consequent improvement in printing and makeup, a widespread introduction of Sunday and afternoon editions, and a realization that the prime requisite of a newspaper is prompt and adequately reported news. The newspapers' eagerness to outdo each other in news enterprise induced considerable rivalry among the Washington correspondents, whom Professor Andrews char- acterizes as preponderandy honest reporters circum- scribed by "capricious censorship" and surrounded by a "fog of misinformation." The more than 300 roving field reporters who accompanied the North- ern forces he calls "a heterogeneous lot," who, in many instances, endeavored to ingratiate themselves with the officers; their shortcomings are ascribed to the irresponsibility of their editors. The volume reprints numerous extracts illustrating how the major campaigns of the war appeared to the re- porters accompanying the Union armies. Bernard A. Weisberger's Reporters for the Union (Boston, Litde, Brown, 1953. 316 p.), a briefer and less systematic treatment, emphasizes rather the news- papers' point of view, contrasting the appearance of the war in the pages of Horace Greeley's New Yor\ Tribune and other Republican papers, with its ap- pearance in James Gordon Bennett's New Yor\ Herald and other Democratic papers. A contem- porary biography of one of the leading Civil War correspondents is William Elliot Griffis' Charles Carleton Coffin, War Correspondent, Traveller, Author, and Statesman (Boston, Estes & Lauriat, 1898. 357 p.). As a result of his wartime experi- ence, Coffin (1823-1896) became one of the most popular American historians of the period. 2852. Brigham, Clarence S. Journals and journey- men; a contribution to the history of early American newspapers. Philadelphia, University of Pennsylvania Press, 1950. xiv, 114 p. 50-10321 PN4858.B7 The A. S. W. Rosenbach Fellowship in Bibliography. Concerned with certain aspects of early American newspaper history, this collection of 15 informal lectures is an outgrowth of the author's History and Bibliography of American Newspapers, 1690-1820 (Worcester, Mass., American Antiquarian Society, 1947. 2 v.). He discusses late 18th- and early 19th-century efforts to record newspaper history and goes on to such matters as the similarity between early and modern newspaper tides, financial diffi- culties of the early publishers, time lag in the news, scurrility and political partisanship, and the careers of the 32 women who served as newspaper pub- lishers in the years 1739-1820. Mr. Brigham re- marks upon the historical value of the infinitely varied advertisements, the biographical and genea- logical importance of the marriage and death records, and the political and social insights afforded by the Carriers' Addresses or New Year's Verses; and he indicates both scholarly accomplishments and lacunae in the field. 2853. Clark, Thomas D. The southern country editor. Indianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill, 1948. 365 p. facsims. 48-8524 PN4893.C5 Bibliography: p. 339-346. The rural press has been an important factor throughout the country, but through much of the South it was long the dominant and almost the only journalistic expression to be found, for the region was until recendy overwhelmingly rural and agrarian. This makes a study of country editors more important for this area than for others, where metropolitan papers served a larger immediate group, and competed in many cases with rural pa- pers through distant distribution. The South also has social problems, such as race relations and a one- party system, which differentiate it from the rest of the country. The handling of these problems in the Southern rural press is discussed in some detail in this book, which gives its general history from the post-Civil War period to the near-present. It offers little in the way of statistics, which are unavailable in complete form, but is more concerned to study particular cases and representative situations. Al- though the author is sympathetic toward his editors, he has not hesitated to criticize the failings of South- ern rural journalism. Professor Clark has also pub- lished three lectures on the part their rural news- papers play in the lives of the Southern people, in The Rural Press and the New South (Baton Rouge, Louisiana State University Press, 1948. m p.). 12854. Cook, Elizabeth Christine. Literary in- fluences in colonial newspapers 1 704-1750. New York [Columbia University Press] 1912. 279 PERIODICALS AND JOURNALISM / 247 p. (Columbia University studies in English and comparative literature) 13-2143 PN4861.C72 Thesis (Ph. D.) — Columbia University, 1912. Bibliography: p. 266-272. "An attempt to describe the most typical literary efforts, and to analyze the most typical literary in- fluences" in nine 18th-century American weekly newspapers: The New England Courant, The New England Weekly Journal, The American Mercury (Philadelphia), The Pennsylvania Gazette, The New Yor\ Gazette, The New Yor^ Weekly Journal, The Maryland Gazette, The Virginia Gazette, and The South Carolina Gazette. The author demon- strates that the colonial paper, cut off from news by irregular communications and from politics by of- ficial attitudes, became "a definite type of literary weekly." The editor relied upon reprints from The Spectator and other English works, as well as upon imitations of the Addisonian essay, and gave space to such traditional subjects as philosophical specula- tion, anecdote, reminiscence, and connected narra- tive. Miss Cook discovers in colonial diction "the very tricks and manners of Addison and Steele," Pope's manner of polite formal compliment, the vein of Butler's Hudibras, grim Swiftian humor, and the forthright democratic spirit of The British Cato of Gordon and Trenchard. 2855. Emery, Edwin. History of the American Newspaper Publishers Association. Min- neapolis, University of Minnesota Press, 1950. 263 P- 50-6013 Z479.E6 Bibliography: p. 251-254. A scholarly and detailed history of the contro- versial American Newspaper Publishers Association which leaves the reader to draw most of his own inferences. Chapters I-IV and IX trace the growth of this national trade association of daily newspapers from 1887, when it was organized "primarily to further the business interests of its members," to 1949. The author, himself a professor of journal- ism, finds as continuing trends of activity the promo- tion of "group actions in the fields of advertising, mechanical development, labor relations, newsprint supply, circulation, and copyright and libel law." The 10 remaining chapters ileal with matters that have at times become special issues, such as postal rates and regulations, radio competition for news and advertising, development of effective and economi- cal methods of production and transportation, and government actions affecting the publishing busi- ness. 2856. Griffith, Louis Turner, and John Frwin Tal- madgc. Georgia journalism, 1763-1950. Athens, University of Georgia Press, 1951. 413 p. iilus. 51-8385 PN4897.G6G7 248 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES While the large papers and chains dominate the journalistic scene by their mere bulk, the greater part of American journalism has been carried on in relatively small and obscure papers, which have had the problem not only of bringing national and foreign news to their readers, but, more important in some respects, of presenting local news and views. Perhaps no one state may be said to have had a "typical" journalistic development; however, that of Georgia is in many ways representative of develop- ments on a state level. This study of Georgia jour- nalism, sponsored by the Georgia Press Association, opens with a survey, by Mr. Talmadge, of the de- velopment of Georgia newspapers from 1763 to 1950. An expansion of Mr. Griffith's master's thesis, Part II is a history, based upon the official minutes, of the Georgia Press Association which was founded in 1887 to advance the business interests of the pro- fession. Part III, an annotated directory of Georgia newspapers current in 1950, is a master's thesis by Mildred Lois Miscally, revised and enlarged by Mr. Griffith. James Johnston, editor of the first news- paper, The Georgia Gazette, in 1763, is character- ized as "the one important figure in early Georgia journalism," who "more than anyone else 'established and sustained' the newspaper as an institution on Georgia soil." Henry W. Grady, editor of The Atlanta Constitution during the 1870's and 8o's, apostle of the "New South" and of the "New jour- nalism" of Joseph Pulitzer, is considered the single most important publicist. 2857. Hooper, Osman Casde. History of Ohio journalism, 1793-1933. Columbus, Ohio, Spahr & Glenn, 1933. 190 p. illus. 34-667 PN4897.O33H6 A pioneering history of Ohio journalism from its beginnings. The author distinguishes four periods: Jeffersonian-Federalist (1793-1815), during which the dominant idea of the territorial newcomers was freedom, statehood was won, and the Federalist papers fought a losing political battle; Jacksonian- Whig (1816-1856), when newspapers were estab- lished to promote the cause of John Quincy Adams, Clay, and Harrison against Jackson; Transition (1857-1900), which saw the formation of the Re- publican Party and the rise of the Republican reform press, the development of newspaper service to the community, and the appearance of evening papers; and the Present (1901-1933), in which the party organ per se has virtually disappeared, and com- munity or city service is increasingly emphasized. Very briefly, Professor Hooper outlines the achieve- ments of such notable figures as Charles Hammond of the Cincinnati Gazette, Edward W. Scripps of the Cleveland Penny Press, J. W. Gray and Charles F. Browne (Artemus Ward) of the Cleveland Plain Dealer, and D. R. Locke (Petroleum V. Nasby) of the Toledo Blade. 2858. Nevins, Allan. American press opinion, Washington to Coolidge; a documentary rec- ord of editorial leadership and criticism, 1785-1927. Boston, Heath, 1928. xxv, 598 p. illus. 28-24815 E173.N52 A collection of editorials from American news- papers selected according to Professor Nevins' theory "that specimens of the best work of Greeley, Dana, and Godkin are of immediate present-day interest to journalists, students, and many general readers; that some outstanding American editorials possess qualities entitling them to permanent preser- vation in easily accessible form; above all, that a wide variety of typical editorials from representative journals, chronologically arranged, will furnish a valuable record of the history of public opinion." Each of the four parts is introduced by a historical essay devoted to major trends and accomplishments of the press during its period. In the editor's opinion, no other American newspaper has equalled the long record of distinction maintained by The New Yor\ Evening Post under William Coleman, William Cullen Bryant, Carl Schurz, Edwin L. Godkin, Rollo Ogden, and Simeon Strunsky. Pro- fessor Nevins considers Horace Greeley preeminent among editors for the vigor, terseness, and persua- siveness of his writing in The New Yor\ Tribune and for his development of the modern American editorial page. 2859. Nevins, Allan, and Frank Weitenkampf. A century of political cartoons; caricature in the United States from 1800 to 1900. With 100 reproductions of cartoons. New York, Scribner, 1944. 190 p. 44-3029 E178.4.N47 In this volume a professor of American history at Columbia University, and the former curator of prints at the New York Public Library, have com- bined to produce a work illustrating the develop- ment of the 19th-century political cartoon in the United States. Each page of text faces a page re- producing the cartoon (in a few cases two) on which the text is based. Many of the cartoons are an- notated in terms of their relation to the development of the art, as well as to the political situation with which they deal. While the cartoons at first ap- peared as separately published prints, with improved graphic methods they found a home in the illus- trated journals of the day, and eventually in the daily newspapers. This attractive volume affords a piquant record of the political currents of the cen- tury, and of course exhibits the evolution of styles in cartooning, but Professor Nevins, well-informed PERIODICALS AND JOURNALISM / 249 as he is, does not always succeed in explaining the more baffling aspects of these cartoons. 2860. Rosewater, Victor. History of cooperative news-gathering in the United States. New York, Appleton, 1930. xiv, 430 p. 30-10687 PN4855.R6 Bibliography: p. 411-416. The book begins with a discussion of early "systematic news-gathering." There follow chap- ters on the early means of disseminating news, such as horse express, railway express, transadantic steamer, or telegraph. Subsequent chapters take up the problem of the forming of a news association in the 19th century, with attention concentrated on the Associated Press. The book concludes with a series of chapters on the major cooperative news- gathering agencies: the Associated Press, the United Press, and the International News Service. The author is mainly interested in presenting the story of the development of these agencies, and pays little attention to cooperative work within newspaper chains. The scope of the work does not permit any serious analysis of the social consequences of so great an increase in the freshness and quantity of the news, nor of the new problems of choice and bal- anced presentation confronting the editors of indi- vidual papers. Deadline Every Minute; the Story of The United Press, by Joe Alex Morris (New York, Doubleday, 1957. 356 p.), published to mark the completion of the Association's first half-century, is based in large part on interviews and information from past and present staff members, and, along with multitudinous anecdotes of spectacular coups, reveals much concerning the development of news techniques. 2861. Rosten, Leo C. The Washington corre- spondents. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1937. xx, 436 p. 37-37583 PN4899.W3C68 Bibliography: p. 393-421. This book was written on a predoctoral fellow- ship, and was designed as an analysis of Washington press correspondents and their work. Because Washington as the Nation's capital is the source of a great pordon of the Nation's news, an unusually large number of correspondents cover it for the Na- tion's newspapers, news syndicates, and other media. The first part of the book covers the historical de- velopment and methods of Washington reporting; it opens with a review of presidential press relations, and proceeds to other news sources (government agencies, sub rosa gossip, story plants, etc.). The second part of the book is based largely on two ques- tionnaires, and studies the backgrounds, views, and working situations of the correspondents. The third part attempts to discover to what degree the (".1240—60 18 backgrounds and prejudices of the correspondents, and such news sources as government releases and formal conferences, affect the news which is pub- lished. A series of appendixes tabulate the results of the questionnaires. The author is better known for his humorous writings published under the name of Leonard Q. Ross. 2862. Tebbel, John W. An American dynasty. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1947. 363 p. illus. 47-30087 PN4899.C4T83 This highly informative book opens with a de- tailed study of Joseph Medill and the Chicago Tribune, in which he acquired a partnership in 1855. In 1874 he assumed full control and directed it undl his death in 1899. Medill was one of the founders of the Republican Party, and a basic Re- publicanism has continued in the paper and the family to this day. Medill built his paper into a major influence in the Midwest, and the Tribune continues to have the largest and widest circulation in the area, although the extent of its influence has been disputed, since a majority of its readers seem often to vote Democratic. After Medill's death in 1899, the Tribune was controlled until 1914 not by a monarch, but by an editorial board consisting of Robert W. Patterson, Medill McCormick, and James Keeley. In 1914 control was assumed by Robert Rutherford McCormick, who followed his grand- father's personalized journalism, to which he added an isolationism which at times seemed to regard the Eastern United States as an extension of Europe. A third part of the book is devoted to Joseph Patterson, another grandson of Joseph Medill; Patterson ob- tained control of the New Yor\ Daily News in 1919 and under his operation it became the most conspicu- ous tabloid in the country. Upon his death in 1946 control of the paper passed to a board headed by his sister, Eleanor ("Cissy") Patterson. Miss Patterson came into journalistic prominence when she became editor, working for the Hearst chain, of the Wash- ington Herald in 1930; in 1937 she leased the Wash- ington Times, so as to have an organ in which to express herself when she disagreed with Hearst. She purchased both these papers in 1939, combining them as the Washington Times-Herald, which paper she alined in the family tradition of slanted news, comics, personalities, and mass circulation. Some time after her death in 1948 the paper was sold to the liberal, independent Washington Post. The other papers, despite the death of the leading charac- ters in An American Dynasty, continue to be edited as before. Their importance in American jour- nalistic history resides in the fact that their combined circulation was surpassed only by that of the Hearst chain, though both groups on many leading issues ran counter to prevailing American beliefs. 25O / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 2863. Turnbull, George S. History of Oregon newspapers. Portland, Or., Binfords & Mort, 1939. 560 p. illus. 40-1256 PN4897.O73T8 A record of the progress of Oregon journalism, 1846-1939, from the founding of the pioneer Oregon Spectator at Oregon City, the first newspaper issued west of the Missouri River, to the operations of the modern metropolitan press. Parts I — II are devoted to the metropolitan newspapers, most of them dailies. The more important journals are accorded separate chapters, the lesser, paragraphs or even a sentence or two. Parts III— IX are devoted to special aspects of the subject: journalism by counties, arranged in chronological order of the founding of their first papers; reporting; society writing; Sunday features; sports writing; trade and class publications; and the growth of the newspaper business. Professor Turn- bull emphasizes the political bent and personal jour- nalism of the early papers, as well as the emergence in the i88o's and 90's of the doctrine that news gathering and writing are the primary functions of the newspaper. He considers Harvey Whitefield Scott, editor of the Republican Oregonian, 1865- 1872, 1877-1910, and C. S. Jackson, editor of the Democratic Oregon Journal, 1902-1919, as perhaps the most distinguished Oregon publicists. 2864. Watson, Elmo Scott. A history of news- paper syndicates in the United States, 1865— 1935. Chicago, 1936. 98 p. illus. 36-18471 PN4888.S9W3 1936 Bibliography: p. 86-89. "A directory of newspaper syndicates in the United States": p. 90-94. A history of American newspaper syndicates, orig- inating in a thesis for the degree of master of sci- ence in journalism at Northwestern University. Chapters I — 1 1 describe the experiments of the 1840's and 50's; the development in 1861 of an auxiliary service of Civil War news, miscellaneous matter, and advertising for five Wisconsin weeklies by The Wisconsin State Journal; and the establishment in 1865, exclusively for country papers, of the first independent newspaper syndicate by Ansel Nash Kellogg ( 1 832-1 886). Chapters III-VIII and X trace the expansion of syndicate operations among city dailies as well as country weeklies in every part of the country, the rise in numbers to some 130 businesses by 1935, and the elaboration of ma- terial offered into more than 1,600 separate features providing entertainment or enlightenment. Sunday magazines and the weekday use of syndicated fic- tion, special articles, and departmental matter have been important factors, the author believes, in re- ducing newspaper production costs and in stimulat- ing circulation. The progress in mechanical means of reproducing syndicated features is incidentally described. Chapter IX is devoted to the cooperative press associations and the news agencies. 2865. Waugh, Coulton. The comics. New York, Macmillan, 1947. 360 p. illus. 47-12339 NC1426.W3 An informal and enthusiastic but detailed history of American comic strips, "largely put together from study of the actual comics as they have appeared in newspapers — both old and new." The author, him- self a practitioner, surveys the field from its rather crude, sensational, and sadistic beginnings during the 1890's in the hands of James Swinnerton, Rich- ard Felton Outcault, and Rudolph Dirks, to the lit- erally illustrated, war-preoccupied strips of the early 1940's, and the reemergence of the earlier funny type in 1946. The comic, a sequence of pictures with a continuing character, aims to build newspaper cir- culation and to provide informal entertainment for the masses. "The comic sells the paper; the paper gives the comic-strip character his chance to invade millions of homes and impress his personality on millions of hearts." A nationwide phenomenon since the development of feature syndication in 1915, the strip normally appeals to basic human instincts and interests, and avoids racial, political, and other controversial matter. C. Individual Newspapers 2866. Acheson, Sam Hanna. 35,000 days in Texas; a history of The Dallas News and its forbears. New York, Macmillan, 1938. 337 p. illus. 38-27540 PN4899.D34N4 A history of The Dallas Morning News, founded in 1885, and of its parent journal, the Galveston News, founded in the Republic of Texas in 1842 as "a struggling hope housed in a flimsy shack," but which had become by 1938 "the oldest business in- stitution in Texas." Beside the presentation of news, both papers have been outspokenly concerned with state and national politics, particularly Democratic, and other public issues as well as local matters. Since the author quotes liberally from their pages, PERIODICALS AND JOURNALISM / 25 1 his book does not merely chronicle a pioneer pub- lishing venture but reflects much of the political and social history of Texas. The first third of the volume traces the fortunes of the Galveston News to 1885, by which time it had been for 30 years "the most widely circulated, the wealthiest and the most in- fluential paper in Texas"; the remainder is devoted mainly to The Dallas Morning News, originally almost a facsimile of its elder, and the first example of American chain journalism. 2867. Ashton, Wendell J. Voice in the West; biography of a pioneer newspaper. New York, Duell, Sloan & Pearce, 1950. xv, 424 p. illus. 50-7381 PN4899.S385D4 A history of the Salt Lake City Deseret News, which still bears the name of "the land of the honey- bee" applied by the pioneer Mormons to Utah and the adjacent territories where they settled. Founded by them in 1850, the News is now one of the oldest in continuous circulation in the West, and remains a major organ of the Mormon Church, for which it does much job printing, including books, other periodicals, and forms. Mr. Ashton's narrative is concise, sticks to facts, relates the paper's history to the general development of the intermountain West, and avoids the controversial issues involved in religious strife and the Mormons' relations with the outside world. He does, however, depict the early tribulations of the paper, and reports its fail- ings along with its struggle to maintain the freedom of the press. There is a good bibliography (p. [400^404) and an extensive index. 2868. Baehr, Harry W. The New Yor^ Tribune since the Civil War. New York, Dodd, Mead, 1936. 420 p. illus. 36-34595 PN4899.N42T73 "Note on sources": p. 397-401. Although the New Yoi\ Tribune was first issued in 1841, this detailed history, a Ph. D. thesis, begins with 1865, the year of "its real beginnings as a modern newspaper," and continues the chronicle to 1936. Chapters I-VI deal with the editorship of Horace Greeley, the founder; Chapters VII-XIX with those of Whitelaw Reid (from 1872), and his son and successor, Ogdcn Mills Reid (from 1912). The author attributes the position of the paper in 1865 as the "greatest organ of public opinion in the United States" to Greeley's opposition to slavery, the force and unrivaled eloquence of his editorials, his zeal for news gathering and political reporting, and his promotion of such fields as book reviews and scientific reports. Yet even then, Mr. Baehr considers, Greeley was a "man who had outlived his time." Whitelaw Reid "strove with great suc- cess to achieve the ideal of a paper of brains." Believing firmly in rugged individualism, the au- thority of law, and the widest freedom of individual initiative, he "voiced the underlying philosophy of the Tribune from the death of Greeley [1872] down to the present [1936]." In 1924 the New Yor^ Tribune purchased the New Yot\ Herald , and as- sumed the name New Yor\ Herald-Tribune. It is regarded by many as the leading Republican news- paper in the country. 2869. Berger, Meyer. The story of The New Yorf( Times, 1851-1951. New York, Simon & Schuster, 1951. xiv, 589 p. illus. 51-6775 PN4899.N42T53 This centennial history of the Times is in a way an official biography, and it maintains much of the objectivity which has been so prominent a part of the paper's policy. The Times was founded in 1 85 1 by Henry Jarvis Raymond (1 820-1 869), whose goal was a conservative, objective news coverage. Raymond's career as a leading journalist and as a prominent Republican politician is studied in Ernest Francis Brown's Raymond of the Times (New York, Norton, 1951. 345 p.). Shortly after Raymond's death George Jones (1811-1891) took over as head and for a time continued the paper's conservative policy. He did almost no writing him- self, but is important as the "first great businessman publisher." Under him the Times did some out- standing crusading, as in uncovering the Tweed Ring-Tammany Hall corruption. Under Jones there also occurred a notable policy shift; the Times, Republican since its inception, in 1872 opposed Blaine and supported Cleveland. Cleveland won the election, but the Times lost Republican adver- tising and went into a slump. After Jones' death, the paper was taken over by a group of employees. It was heavily in debt and its end seemed near when Adolf S. Ochs (1858-1935) took control in 1896. The bulk of this book is devoted to the story of the Times under Ochs, whose career is even more fully studied in Gerald W. Johnson's An Honorable Titan (New York, Harper, 1946. 313 p.). Ochs set out to restore the Times as a conservative, independent newspaper, with a policy of acting as "a forum for the consideration of all questions of public im- portance." He undertook to provide coverage of the "neglected non-sensational" news fields, such as financial and other commercial news, government affairs, books, education, and the like. The paper acquired a reputation as a bible for businessmen, rapidly built up advertising, and prospered in its nonscnsational way. Many view it as America's foremost paper, and as usually having the most com- plete and accurate reports of worldwide general news, with major speeches and reports printed in full, elaborate studies of sociological problems, up-to- 252 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES date reports for the layman on scientific advances, a wide coverage of commercial news, a leading book review section (see no. 2564), extensive reports on and criticism of the fine and popular arts, etc. After the death of Ochs in 1935, his policies were con- tinued by his son-in-law, Arthur Hays Sulzberger (b. 1891). It has continued to grow in size, circu- lation, and other aspects. Berger's book concludes with a list of the many Pulitzer prizes won by the paper and members of its staff, to which many more could now be added. 2870. Chamberlin, Joseph Edgar. The Boston Transcript, a history of its first hundred vears. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1930. 241 p. illus. 30-14830 PN4899.B6E8 A review of the first century of The Boston Tran- script (1830-1930), based upon its files, and told chiefly in terms of the personalities and achieve- ments of its successive editors, who usually "rep- resented conservative prosperity" in a conservatively prosperous New England city. The author, a staff member of the Transcript at the time of writing, devotes only 6 of his 21 chapters to the 20th century. At its beginning, he notes, "the Transcript was in- deed very welcome to the conservative classes as a reaction from the 'black journalism' of the time"; it soon espoused the arts, and eschewed sensational- ism and the personal attack. Mr. Chamberlin clearly takes pride in the "respectable and intelligent char- acter," the "recognized quality" of this Republican paper's readers, and does not question a policy that "has doubled the volume of the paper's advertising and trebled the rate in recent years, with no cor- responding increase in the paper's circulation." The Transcript ceased publication in 1941. 2871. Dabney, Thomas Ewing. One hundred great years; the story of The Times-Picayune from its founding to 1940. Baton Rouge, Louisiana State University Press, 1944. 552 p. 44-5 2 53 PN4899.N32T63 A composite history of The Times-Picayune, founded in 1837 and issued until April 6, 1914, as The Daily Picayune, and of 100 years in the life of New Orleans, its sponsoring city. The author, a former staff member, attributes its initial success to its relative cheapness, to its "broader interpreta- tion of news values, to the brevity of its stories, to its humorous slant, and to the freedom of the pub- lishers from political entanglements, as well as their fearlessness and the good nature of their criticisms." During the War with Mexico (1846-48), George Wilkins Kendall, a founder of the Picayune, "cre- ated the tradition of the war correspondent who followed the troops into battle to get the news." By 1904, Mr. Dabney notes, the growing population of the city and the expanding operations of the paper forced "the retreat of the editor's personality," and the Picayune became "impersonal and objective, a factual medium, a means of marshaling data from which the public could draw conclusions, without the guidance of those it knew and trusted." 2872. Laney, Al. Paris Herald, the incredible newspaper. New York, Appleton-Century, 1947. 334 p. 47-1 100 1 PN4899.N42H44 In 1887 the younger James Gordon Bennett (q. v.) decided to start a paper in France; in its first few decades the paper, named the Paris Herald after Bennett's New Yor}{ Herald, reflected the owner's views of what it should be. In time it was trans- formed from not much more than a social column to a genuine newspaper catering primarily to Amer- icans in Europe. It became a leading news source, and it continued to appear until the Germans occu- pied Paris in 1940. It resumed publication as the European edition of the New Yor\ Herald-Tribune , almost immediately after the American liberation of Paris. Mr. Laney's account is primarily his per- sonal view of the paper as an editor there during the 1920's and 30's, with a brief glance at its earlier and later history. The book reflects a relatively unusual activity of American journalism and also gives a picture of the work of foreign correspondents, many of whom began at, worked through, or cooperated with the Paris Herald. It also reflects the extensive activities of the surprisingly large number of Ameri- cans in Paris during Mr. Laney's sojourn. 2873. Nevins, Allan. The Evening Post; a cen- tury of journalism. New York, Boni & Liveright, 1922. 590 p. illus. 22-22717 PN4899.N42P7 A history to the year 1922 of the New Yoi\ Evening Post, established as a Federalist journal in 1801 by Alexander Hamilton and a group of his fol- lowers. Aiming to avoid a "mere office-history" at the one extreme and the whole panorama of 19th- century America at the other, the author has selected "the most important, interesting, and illuminating aspects and episodes of the newspaper's history." More than half of the book is devoted to the 50-year editorship (1829-78) of William Cullen Bryant, who by 1850 was firmly established as New York's foremost citizen. His editorial greatness is here at- tributed to the rhetoric of his grand style, his sound- ness of judgment and unwavering courage in main- taining it, and his consistent adherence to the prin- ciples of freedom and democracy. Other editors of the Post, among them Bryant's son-in-law, Parke Godwin, Carl Schurz, E. L. Godkin, and Rollo Ogden, are more summarily dealt with. PERIODICALS AND JOURNALISM / 253 2874. O'Brien, Frank M. The story of The Sun, New York: 1833- 1928. New ed. New York, Appleton, 1928. xviii, 305 p. illus. 28-2925 PN4899.N442S8 1928 A history of the New York Sun, founded in 1833 as a popular penny newspaper by Benjamin H. Day, who overcame the lack of facilities for the transmis- sion of news "by the simple method of using what news was nearest at hand — the incidental happen- ings of New York life," and who brought the paper to the people by instituting the first newsboy carrier system. A reason for The Sun's popularity in the 1850's and 6o's, when it lacked real news guidance, spirited editorials, or political prestige, was the light fiction introduced by Moses S. Beach, proprietor of the paper from 1852 to 1868. Charles A. Dana, in his "reign" from 1868-97, "revived American jour- nalism from that trance in which it had forgotten that everybody is human and that the English language is alive and fluid." Chiefly to him and to his great editorial writer, Edward Page Mitchell, who retired in 1920, the author attributes the qual- ity and renown of The Sun's editorial page. At the time of writing Mr. O'Brien was himself editor of The Sun. 2875. Smith, James Eugene. One hundred years of Hartford's Courant, from colonial times through the Civil War. New Haven, Yale Univer- sity Press, 1949. 342 p. 49-11937 PN4899.H35C6 Bibliography: p. [328]~329. A report on the first century, 1764-1865, of the Hartford Courant. "Embellished news reprints, rumors, lamentations, predictions," and other tid- ings from England, the West Indies, and port towns along the Atlantic filled this provincial journal until well into the Revolution, "all suggesting the deep- running disapproval of an imperial meddling with the prosperity of trading." Strongly Federalist, the paper and its editors were "complacent and con- tented," Mr. Smith believes, during the first years of the Washington administration, but by 1800 were viewing Jefferson's presidency as "catastrophic," and saw Jackson's behavior in 1830 as a demonstra- tion of an "unquenchable thirst for power." Van Buren was regarded as a mere henchman of Jackson and a plunderer of the public domain. In the 1850's, the Courant "drifted into the Republican party, supporting Lincoln's administration during the Civil War." 2876. The Sunpapers of Baltimore, by Gerald W. Johnson, Frank R. Kent, H. L. Mencken [and] Hamilton Owens. New York, Knopf, 1937. xii, 430, xvi p. illus. 37-91 11 PN4899.B3S76 A centennial history of The Sun and The Evening Sun of Baltimore, which together are affectionately known as the "Sunpapers." In Chapters I-VI, Mr. Johnson deals with the era of personal journalism and brings the narrative to the death of A. S. Abell, "the Founder," who, impressed by the financial success of Benjamin H. Day's The Sun, New York, invaded the realm of the penny press for the people in 1837, and who established the policy "that the first business of a newspaper is to furnish its readers with the news in which they are interested, whether or not it conforms to the editor's prejudices." Mr. Kent, in Chapters VII-X, describes the papers' bat- tles against the Democratic state machine in the 1880's and 9o's. Mr. Mencken, in Chapters XI- XVIII, considers the partnership of the founder's sons and the subsequent formation of a corporation. Author of the three concluding chapters, Mr. Owens describes efforts of the directors to build up the news and editorial departments of their journals. All four writers have been closely connected with the "Sunpapers." D. Newspapermen 2877. [Bennett] Carlson, Oliver. The man who made news, James Cordon Bennett. New York, Duell, Sloan & Pearce, 1942. 440 p. 42-24810 PN4874.B4C3 Bibliography: p. 423-428. James Gordon Bennett (1795-1872) was a Scot- tish immigrant whose early employment in this country was in jobs mainly connected with news- papers; in this connection he is said to have been "the first real Washington correspondent." In 1835 he founded the New Yorf( Herald and rapidly built it up to the newspaper of largest circulation in New York; in time it became the best known American paper in the world. This was due to Bennett's many innovations as a journalist. When he started the Herald, newspapers were organs of particular groups, usually political, Bennett conceived of the newspaper as an organ for the dissemination of news without partisan coloration. This radical view led to a far greater variety of material being included 254 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES than had previously been considered suitable. This led to charges of sensationalism, and the bruising of many tender sensibilities. Denunciations of Ben- nett and the sales of his paper increased in a direct ratio. In adding topics to the categories of what might be considered news, and in consciously seek- ing information for full presentation, Bennett revolu- tionized journalism, so that most papers at the end of his career were far different from what they had been at its outset. Shortly after the Civil War Ben- nett turned the editorship of his paper over to his son of the same name (1841-1918) who also played an important role in the history of journalism. Both are studied in Don C. Seitz's The James Gordon Bennetts, Father and Son, Proprietors of the New Yor\ Herald (Indianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill, 1928. 405 p.). 2878. [Bonfils and Tammen] Fowler, Gene. Timber line; a story of Bonfils and Tammen. Garden City, N. Y., Garden City Books, 1951, c i933« 480 p. 52-2466 PN4874.B623F6 195 1 A study of Frederick Gilmer Bonfils ( 1 860-1 933) and Harry Heye Tammen (1 856-1924) and of 38 years of their newspaper; they became partners in 1895 and took over The Denver Post. The paper was a phenomenally successful example of yellow journalism, having set out to out-Hearst Hearst. In tracing its history, the author recounts so many di- gressive anecdotes that his work is as much a lively history of early Denver as it is a biography or study of the paper. Although an entertaining work that provides a good idea of the nature of the paper and the background against which it was produced, it undertakes no journalistic analysis. The author began his writing career as a reporter for the Post. The book itself is written in a lively journalistic style. Mr. Fowler's own autobiography, A Solo in Tom-toms (New York, Viking Press, 1946. 390 p.), which has some warm admirers, is largely taken up by his boyhood, and only the last hundred- odd pages describe his beginnings in journalism. 2879. [Bowles] Merriam, George S. The life and times of Samuel Bowles. New York, Century Co., 1885. 2 v. 7-12040 E66r.B78 PN4874.B63M4 Bowles ( 1 826-1 878) in his teens went to work for his father's paper, the Springfield Republican. In the mid-1840's the son was instrumental in changing the paper to a daily, and he assumed a rapidly in- creasing share of the writing and policy burden. Springfield, Massachusetts, was then a provincial town, but Bowles made his paper into one of the most important in the Nation. He thus became one of the first small-town editors to secure a na- tional audience. Merriam's biography details much of his journalistic activity, which became increasingly tied in with the national events of the period, and prints copious extracts from his letters. From 1855 Bowles was one of the leaders of the new Republi- can Party, and his biography is an important source for its history during the next two decades. 2880. [Bradford] De Armond, Anna Janney. Andrew Bradford, colonial journalist. New- ark, University of Delaware Press, 1949. 272 p. facsims. 50-3419 PN4874.B66D4 1949a Bibliography: p. 247-251. Andrew Bradford (1686-1742) was one of the pioneers of printing in the middle colonies. The American Weekly Mercury, which he founded in Philadelphia in 1719, was the first newspaper in Pennsylvania and the third in the Thirteen Colonies. Since little is known about Bradford's apparently uneventful life, this University of Pennsylvania dis- sertation is mainly a study of the newspaper. Under Bradford it maintained itself as one of the best and most widely read newspapers in the Colonies. It is important not only as one of the better examples of colonial journalism, but also for the principles of the freedom of the press which Bradford expressed in it, thus providing Andrew Hamilton with many of the arguments used in the trial of John Peter Zenger (no. 2931), the point usually taken to mark establishment of the freedom of the press in this country. After her husband's death in 1742, Cor- nelia Bradford continued to publish the paper into 1746. 2881. [Dana] Stone, Candace. Dana and the Sun. New York, Dodd, Mead, 1938. 431 p. 39-1 1931 PN4874.D3S8 1938 The early career of Charles Anderson Dana (1819-1897) included residence at Brook Farm and partial adherence to the Transcendentalist move- ment, editorial work under Greeley on the Tribune, and service as "foreign correspondent" in Europe observing the revolutions of 1848-1849. His letters from Europe appeared in five papers and have been called the first "syndicated" column in American journalism. During the Civil War Dana disagreed with Greeley on editorial policy and resigned. Soon after he took an active part in the war as adviser and observer working with Lincoln, Stanton, and Grant. After the war, in 1868, he was able to pur- chase the New York Sun, which he continued to edit until his death in 1897. In these three decades he made the paper one of the foremost in American journalism. He made it a vehicle for news as such, but he also made it a personal organ noted for its style, vigor, and independence, so that it was read by many who disagreed with its somewhat erratic policies. Stone's biography, a Columbia University PERIODICALS AND JOURNALISM / 255 dissertation, emphasizes Dana's career with the Sun and is in large part an analysis of the editorial policies revealed in the paper. A more general biography is James Harrison Wilson's The Life of Charles A. Dana (New York, Harper, 1907. 544 p.). A history of the paper itself is by Frank O'Brien (no. 2874). 2882. Godkin, Edwin Lawrence. Life and letters; edited by Rollo Ogden. New York, Mac- millan, 1907. 2 v. 7-12877 PN4874.G5O3 Godkin (1831-1902) was born in Ireland, edu- cated for the law, and became a practicing journalist. In 1856 he came to America where, after touring the South as a correspondent, he founded the Nation (also treated in no. 2921). To this he applied his wide learning and considerable writing ability, mak- ing of it a periodical with whose views thinking contemporaries had to reckon, even when they dis- agreed. Its circulation was never large, but its in- fluence on other journals was from the beginning extensive. In 1881 the Nation and the New York Evening Post effected a merger of sorts, whereby the weekly printed the editorial matter appearing during the week in the daily paper. Carl Schurz (q. v.) was editor-in-chief of both periodicals, with Godkin under him. In 1883 Schurz left, and God- kin became editor-in-chief, continuing in this posi- tion until his retirement, because of declining health, in 1900. In both the daily and the weekly paper he maintained his liberal position, never giving in to personal favoritism, waging batde for many worthy causes, and establishing an impressive record as an independent editor. The present work is made up largely of excerpts from the numerous writings of Godkin, especially from his letters. Volume 2 provides an incomplete bibliography (p. 260-268) of Godkin's books and articles. 2883. [Greeley] Van Deusen, Glyndon G. Horace Greeley, nineteenth-century crusader. Philadelphia, University of Pennsylvania Press, 1953. 445 P- iHus. 53-9554 E415.9.G8V3 Bibliography: p. [4311-437. Greeley (1811-1872) began newspaper work as an apprentice printer at the age of fifteen. He undertook a succession of printing ventures fol- lowed by publishing and editing ones, including literary and political periodicals. In 1841 he estab- lished the New Yorl^ Tribune, and as its editor became one of America's leading journalists. Gree- ley was important as an idealistic crusader who fought for many reforms, some of them quite radical in his own day. He was of further sig- nificance in making his paper an organ for the vigorous expression of varying views on crucial issues; many of the leading writers and thinkers of his day were represented in the columns and on the staff of the Tribune. His career ended in anticlimax with his defeat in the 1872 presidential election, when he ran as the Democratic candidate against Grant. Greeley's vigorous and complex per- sonality has inspired many biographies, from James Parton's early The Life of Horace Greeley (New York, Mason Bros., 1855. 442 p.) to William Har- lan Hale's Horace Greeley, Voice of the People (New York, Harper, 1950. 377 p.). His autobi- ography remains a valuable book for understanding Greeley: Recollections of a Busy Life (New York, Ford, 1868. 624 p.). 2884. [Hearst] Tebbel, John W. The life and good times of William Randolph Hearst. New York, Dutton, 1952. 386 p. 52-8258 PN4874.H4T4 It is generally agreed that Hearst ( 1863-195 1) was one of the greatest forces in American journal- ism; there is radical disagreement as to what he was a force for. Part of Hearst's vision was derived from the popularization techniques of Pulitzer (no. 2889). A man of extremes, boundless energy, and great inherited wealth (his father was a multimil- lionaire), Hearst set out to surpass Pulitzer. In the course of pursuing this ambition he created a news- paper empire across the country, attracted a phe- nomenal mass readership for his periodicals, entered on a grand scale into allied fields such as magazine publishing and radio broadcasting, and brought yel- low journalism to its peak. However, it was not merely his sensationalism which aroused his op- ponents, but also the "causes" for which he fought in front page editorials, slanted news coverage, etc. With his tendency to extreme stands he managed, it has been said, to achieve the almost unique position of having at some time or other offended every per- son or group exposed to his papers. He also had large political ambitions, first as a candidate and then as a picker of candidates, and as a swayer of public opinion at the polls. Because of his certitude of Tightness on so many occasions, and because of the mass communications power with which he backed up his convictions, Hearst usually aroused strong emotions in those exposed to him. For that reason the problem of writing a definitive biography is often regarded as insurmountable, at least for some time to come. Tebbcl's account is an attempt to be objective, but for that very reason the many with extreme views of Hearst find it pallid and in- adequate. An earlier and somewhat more colorful biography, which approximated a middle view, is Hearst, Lord of San Simeon (New York, Viking Press, 1936. 33a p.), by Oliver Carlson and Prncst Sutherland Bates. A more critical work which ap- peared in the same year is Ferdinand Lundbcrg's 256 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Imperial Hearst, a Social Biography (New York, Equinox Cooperative Press, 1936. 406 p.), which was issued in 1937 in a Modern Library edition. Also published in the same year, and contrasting with these, was Mrs. Fremont Older's William Ran- dolph Hearst, American (New York, Appleton- Century, 1936. 581 p.), a semiofficial and extremely favorable presentation of the "most misunderstood man in America." A recent favorable study, but one of greater moderation, is John K. Winkler's William Randolph Hearst, a New Appraisal (New York, Hastings House, 1955. 325 p.), a revision of the author's W. R. Hearst, an American Phenom- enon (New York, Simon & Schuster, 1928. 354 p.). Of special interest is William Randolph Hearst, a Portrait in His Own Words (New York, Simon & Schuster, 1952. 309 p.), which, with the approval of Hearst, was compiled from his letters and other writings by Edmond D. Coblentz, who started working for Hearst in 1900. 2885. Howe, Edgar W. Plain people. New York, Dodd, Mead, 1929. 317 p. 29-7426 PS2014.H5Z5 1929 E. W. Howe ( 1 854-1937) spent most of his life as a small-town newspaper man. As editor of the Atchison, Kansas, Globe he achieved a modest na- tional prominence for his philosophical paragraphs, and it has been said that for a while his paper was one of the most frequendy quoted in the country. This autobiography therefore provides a good back- ground for successful small-town journalism. Howe was also a literary figure of some note, and his work is discussed in the Literature chapter of this bibli- ography (nos. 959-963). 2886. McRae, Milton A. Forty years in newspaper- dom; the autobiography of a newspaper man. New York, Brentano's, 1924. xviii, 496 p. illus. 24-25208 PN4874.M47A3 McRae (1858-1930) established or bought con- trol of many newspapers throughout the United States. Much of his work was done with E. W. Scripps (no. 2890), and their joint chain was known as the Scripps-McRae League, since transformed into the Scripps-Howard newspapers. McRae's loosely written autobiography reveals his acquaintanceship with many of the nation's leading newspapermen, and gives insight into much of the journalistic his- tory of forty years. The remainder of the book is devoted to his wide travels and to general observa- tions. 2887. [Nelson] Johnson, IcieF. William Rockhill Nelson and the Kansas City Star; their rela- tion to the development of the beauty and culture of Kansas City and the Middle West. Introd. by Wil- liam Allen White. Kansas City, Mo., Burton Pub. Co., 1935. 208 p. 36-19204 PN4874.N3J6 Nelson (1841-1915) and a partner founded the Star in 1880. Shortly afterwards Nelson took over full control, maintaining the paper as a highly per- sonal journal until his death. The paper was always "independent politically, . . . [but] by no means . . . neutral." It was conceived as a low-priced family journal, with emphasis on local affairs and general reading matter. With this policy it rapidly built up an extremely large circulation, and became quite influential throughout a large part of the Mid- west. However, its greatest importance was as a crusading city paper. The Star was instrumental, through its campaigns, in advancing many programs for civil improvements: better roads, parks, public transportation, etc. While Nelson himself did not write for the paper, he maintained close personal control even when it became a large metropolitan publication. This biography is written in a spirit of admiration, but has no footnotes, no index, and no bibliography. The source even of direct quota- tions is often left in doubt. An earlier book is Wil- liam Rockhill Nelson; the Story of a Man, a News- paper, and a City (Cambridge, Riverside Press, 1915. 274 p.), a memorial volume written "by members of the staff of the Kansas City Star." 2888. Older, Fremont. My own story. New York, Macmillan, 1926. xx, 340 p. 26-19123 F869.S3O43 Older (1856-1935) begins his book at the time when he became editor of the San Francisco Bulletin in 1895; he subsequendy published a narrative of his earlier life: Growing Up (San Francisco, San' Francisco Call-Bulletin, 1931. 168 p.). The first part of his story is largely that of the newspaper's involvements in politics and his fight against cor- ruption in the local government during the Schmitz- Ruef regime (1901-08). In the latter part of the book he presents his attempts to understand the criminal personality and his code of social respon- sibility in the sphere of crime. The author's frank- ness and questioning of motives make the book a good and characteristic report on journalistic activity during a corrupt administration. The same frank- ness made it injudicious for him to publish his "con- fession" while he was still editor of the paper; he resigned, rather than drop the Mooney case, in 1917. My Own Story was first published, in a briefer form, at San Francisco in 1919 and again at Oakland, California, in 1925. 2889. [Pulitzer] Barrett, James Wyman. Joseph Pulitzer and his World. New York, Van- guard Press, 1 94 1 . xvi, 449 p. 41-21082 PN4874.P8B3 PERIODICALS AND JOURNALISM / 257 Joseph Pulitzer (1847-1911) was a Hungarian immigrant who began his journalistic career under Carl Schurz (q. v.) on the Westliche Post. After he learned English, he transferred to the St. Louis Post-Dispatch and rose rapidly in the journalistic world. In 1883 he went to New York, where he acquired ownership of the World, and soon built it into one of the most popular and influential of news- papers — partly from a talent for judging what was of popular interest, pardy from a flair for uncover- ing and even creating sensational news. While Pulitzer introduced "yellow journalism," he also held a firm belief in the responsibility of the press. It was this motive that made him a major figure; this, with his batdes for the liberty of the press, and his demand that newspapers present the facts of each case, helped raise the press to its latter-day level. He also founded the country's first school of journal- ism, at Columbia University. At the end of his career he established funds for annual awards in fields such as journalism, literature, and history. These were to go to books, articles, or cartoons presenting the atmosphere of American life, exem- plifying good manners, promoting the public good, etc. The annual awarding of the Pulitzer prizes remains a major event, despite occasional contro- versy, and the prizes have distinguished some of the more important American work in the fields con- cerned. Barrett (who was city editor for the New York World when it came to an end 20 years after Pulitzer's death) regards Pulitzer as a great Ameri- can and the greatest of journalists, and the paper itself as having been a major public institution. However, Barrett employs a sentimental, loosely anecdotal approach expressed in a staccato journalese that is inadequate to its theme. He is able to give a first hand account of much of the later history of the paper, and he does outline its earlier history, but leaves room for a more scholarly treatment. 2890. Scripps, Edward W. Damned old crank, a self-portrait of E. W. Scripps drawn from his unpublished writings; edited by Charles R. Mc- Cabe. New York, Harper, 1951. xvii, 259 p. 51-10365 PN4874.S37A3 Scripps (1854-1926) was a midwestern journalist who achieved the distinction of establishing the first newspaper chain in this country; in the end he controlled newspapers in 15 states. He also estab- lished a news service, the United Press, which even- tually supplied hundreds of newspapers. Much of his work was done with his brothers, James and George, and with Milton A. McRae (no. 2886). The Newspaper Enterprise Association was founded in 1001 for the purpose of supplying syndicated mn- teri.il. Scripps insisted that all his newspapers be independent, while they strongly championed the working man. The book is a striking self-portrait of this man who worked vigorously for a full and honest presentation of the news, and who spoke for the workers of the country while most newspapers were speaking for the corporations; it is largely de- rived from the manuscripts produced by Scripps in his two attempts at autobiography. A study in some respects more detailed is Negley D. Cochran's E. W. Scripps (New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1933. 315 p.). A slightly earlier life is Gilson Gardner's Lusty Scripps (New York, Vanguard Press, 1932. 274 p.). 2891. Sullivan, Mark. The education of an Amer- ican. New York, Doubleday, Doran, 1938. 320 p. illus. 38-28922 PN4874.S78A3 While Sullivan (1874-1952) was one of the lead- ing political columnists of his day, and was busy to the day of his death in recording and comment- ing upon the contemporary scene, his autobiography has little to say of direct bearing on his journalistic career. Its primary value lies in its picture of the shaping of an American journalist, with its glimpse of his life on the family's Pennsylvania farm, and his approach to journalism. The picture of farm life is by itself an important piece of Americana. Through it the author brings out those elements which shaped his personality and his career. The volume closes with the Wilson administration, when Sullivan had been closely connected with Collier's for about a decade, but before he had become famous as a political commentator. 2892. [Watterson] Wall, Joseph Frazier. Henry Watterson, reconstructed rebel. With an introd. by Alben W. Barkley. New York, Oxford University Press, 1956. 362 p. 56-5672 PN4874.W3W3 1956 Watterson (1 840-1921) was a Kentucky journal- ist who has been called the "last great personal editor"; his career spanned the years in which the old personal and largely political journalism gave way to the large mechanized, news-service news- paper. He began his career in 1858 as a reporter for The New Yort{ Times; there followed a variety of activities, largely connected with journalism, even while in the Confederate Army. In 1868 he became editor of the Louisville Daily Journal, which was soon merged with the Courier to become the Journal- Courier, and retained it until he sold control in He is credited with having been a major factor for the reunification of North and South during the years of strain after the Civil W.ir. 1 le was a major influence in his region, where his edi- torials were considered news, and as such were repeated by newspapers throughout the country. His style gave special force to his views, and for a period he may well have been "the most widely 258 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES quoted" man in America. An earlier study of this leading editor is Isaac F. Marcosson's "Marse Henry" (New York, Dodd, Mead, 1951. 269 p.). An im- portant primary source which, however, runs to anecdote and general comment, is his own "Marse Henry"; an Autobiography (New York, Doran, 1919. 2 v.). 2893. White, William Allen. The autobiography of William Allen White. New York, Mac- millan, 1946. 669 p. illus. 46-1656 PN4874.W52A3 White (1868-1944) was editor of the Emporia, Kansas, Gazette from 1895 until his death. As edi- tor of a small-town newspaper, he built up a position of national influence. He was not only an oracle in state and national politics, but, more important, he came to be regarded throughout the Nation as a spokesman for midwestern middle-class society. His editorials were reprinted or quoted in numerous papers, so that he was followed by millions, though he sold only a few thousand copies of his own paper. His autobiography, which at the time of his death had only reached 1923, was published posthumously, and in 1947 it was awarded a Pulitzer prize. It re- flects not only the work of a leading journalist, but also the situation of a large part of American society for a period of nearly half a century. The story of White's entire life is told in Walter Johnson's Wil- liam Allen White's America (New York, Holt, 1947. 621 p.). Mr. Johnson also edited Selected Letters of William Allen White, 1899-1943 (New York, Holt, 1947. 460 p.). 2894. [Winchell] McKelway, St. Clair. Gossip; the life and times of Walter Winchell. New York, Viking Press, 1940. 150 p. 40-32480 PN4874.W67M25 Walter Winchell (b. 1897) started his career as a gossip columnist in the twenties. Scandalmonger- ing and ordinary gossiping were new and natural additions to yellow journalism, and Winchell rose rapidly to national prominence. While his work appeared in the New York Mirror and other papers of the Hearst chain, a number of imitators arose to spread the latest rumors of divorce, adultery, romance, incompetence, larceny, etc., among the prominent. Winchell, however, was the one who rode the crest of the wave, and he achieved a vast following for his syndicated column, while millions tuned in on his radio (and later television) broad- casts. In the thirties Winchell became a great enemy of fascism, and the broad field of rumored subversion was added to his repertoire. While he had begun by making public the private life of entertainers and then added the social elite, he now broadened his activities, and is credited with the early demise of many a political and business career. His eminence was such that on occasion both the F. B. I. and prominent gangsters provided him with bodyguard protection. Because Winchell has scrupulously published the most embarrassing secrets of both his friends and his enemies, the latter group has tended to increase with the passing of the years. One result is that most studies of the man do not find his serv- ices to have been an unmixed blessing. McKelway's study was the first on Winchell to be published in book form; it was originally published in part in the New Yorker, and remains one of the more readable and objective studies; it deserves to be brought up to date. Lyle Stuart's The Secret Life of Walter Win- chell ([n. p.] Boar's Head Books, 1953. 253 p.) is a hostile expose. A friendly study which also fol- lows Winchell's career past its peak of prestige is Edward Weiner's Let's Go to Press (New York, Put- nam, 1955. 270 p.). E. Foreign Language Periodicals 2895. Backlund, Jonas Oscar. A century of the Swedish American press. Chicago, Swedish American Newspaper Co., 1952. 132 p. illus. 53-17283 PN4885.S8B3 A brief review of the 100-year history (1851- 1951) of the Swedish language press in the United States, which omits the more ephemeral or insignifi- cant papers. Although the first publication, S\andi- naven (New York, 1851-53), was a news sheet, most papers of the first decade were denominational organs, and none survived infancy. Of the Swedish- American newspapers of general circulation estab- lished in the 1870's, the author finds most notable the still surviving Svens\a Ameri\anaren Tribunen of Chicago and Nordstjernan of New York; less suc- cessful has been the Swedish-American journalism of the West. Only one percent of the 1500 Swedish papers that have commenced publication still appear. Mr. Backlund concludes with brief mention of the personalities of the profession and of the organs of special interests: religious, political, fraternal, and literary. PERIODICALS AND JOURNALISM / 259 2896. Kolehmainen, John I. Sow the golden seed. Fitchburg, Mass., Raivaaja Pub. Co., 1955. 150 p. illus. 55-32553 PN4885.F5R35 A history of the first 50 years of Raivaaja, a Fin- nish-language newspaper founded in 1905 in Fitch- burg, Mass., to meet the needs of Finnish immi- grants, as well as to propagandize for socialism. Although it remained socialist, it early turned against communism. The paper has achieved a national circulation, and even reaches the Finnish areas in Canada. It is of value not only as a study of an individual foreign-language newspaper, but also as an example of the "radical" press of the late 19th and early 20th centuries in America. The book opens with a discussion of the circumstances which led to the founding of the paper. Since the paper also ran a publishing company, this too is discussed, and a bibliography of the paper's publications is supplied at the end of the book. It might be noted that while the Raivaaja Publishing Company is the publisher, the book is not "official," but was com- piled through private initiative. However, it is a favorable study which seeks to present the func- tioning of a foreign-language paper and its services to its community. 2897. Park, Robert E. The immigrant press and its control. New York, Harper, 1922. xix, 487 p. tables, diagrs. (Americanization studies) 22-2469 PN4884.P3 A history and analysis of the immigrant press in America, which opens with a study of the factors leading to the establishment of foreign language presses. It continues with an analysis of the typical contents of foreign language newspapers, followed by a brief history of the immigrant press, and con- cludes with a section on the various means such as advertising and censorship, which have been used or suggested for the purpose of controlling these. Be- cause of their topicality at the time of publication, much attention is given to World War I and its postwar issues as they were handled in such papers. Unfortunately, no more recent or inclusive history of the immigrant press as a whole has appeared. However, some of the language and nationality groups involved have received individual treatment in other books, a few of which are listed in this section. A brief study of the current situation of the immigrant press may be found in Brown and Roucek's One America (no. 4426). 2898. Sokes, Mordecai. The Yiddish press, an Americanizing agency. New York, Teach- ers College, Columbia University, 1950. xvi, 242 p. illus. 50-13966 PN4885.Y5S6 1950 Bibliography: p. [223] -230. This work, written as a dissertation at Columbia University, was first published in 1924. The new "Foreword" offers something of a survey of more recent events, but the original text is unchanged. While the work is really a study of the Yiddish press in New York City, it reflects the Yiddish press throughout the United States, since the New York papers were national in influence and tended to pro- vide a model for such papers elsewhere. The open- ing section of the book discusses the origin, develop- ment, and nature of the Yiddish press in New York. There follows a study of the readers of the news- papers. The author then turns to his main subject, the scope, frequency, and nature of the editorial materials presented. He concludes with some gen- eralizations about the Yiddish press and its Ameri- canizing efforts. While no up-to-date book in Eng- lish has appeared on the subject, there is a more recent study in Yiddish, covering the Yiddish press in America from its founding in 1870 to the anni- versary year of 1945, Joseph Chaikin's Yidishe Bleter in Ameri\e (New York, 1946. 424 p.). 2899. Wittke, Carl F. The German-language press in America. [Lexington] University of Kentucky Press, 1957. 311 p. 57-5832 PN4885.G3W5 A history of the American German-language press from its beginning in 1732 through 1956. Since this group was once the largest of the foreign language presses, and there have been hundreds of German- language newspapers, the author has not under- taken a tabulation of all of them, although he has studied a few in some detail. His study is pri- marily an attempt to discover the importance these publications have had in the Americanization of the immigrants, and the difficulties attending such publication ventures. Dean Wittke's "emphasis has been primarily upon the role which the Ger- man press and its readers played in American social, political, and economic history." The development of the press is traced for the most part in chrono- logical order. Because the German press has been much reduced since World War I, the great bulk of the book is devoted to the press prior to the 1920's, although some attention is given it in its present diminished state. 260 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES F. The Practice of Journalism 2900. Allen, John Edward. Newspaper design- ing. New York, Harper, 1947. 478 p. illus. 47-31234 PN4775.A64 The first part of Mr. Allen's book is in large part a presentation of the historical background of news- paper designing in America; however, since the author's main interest is in current good practice, much of his material is an explanation of various practices and how they evolved, rather than a gen- eral chronological study of newspaper designing as a whole. The second part of the book is a study of the present-day application of these practices. Litde attention is given to the technical problems behind the design, and the book concentrates on such topics as the esthetics and the readability of various types, layouts, etc. 2901. Brown, Charles H. News editing and dis- play. New York, Harper, 1952. 457 p. illus. 52-10826 PN4784.C75B7 This textbook for journalism students has been designed as a codification of the rules and prac- tices of newspaper production in so far as they enter into the "desk man's job." It is emphasized that these are not final and unalterable procedures, but rather those generally accepted among news- paper staffs. In the preface the author thus outlines his book: "The first chapters explain the routine procedures of preparing copy for the printers. These are followed by chapters on headline writing and make-up. Then come chapters on fundamental policies and problems. . . . Descriptions of the jobs of departmental editors comprise the final chap- ters." While the author has sought to distinguish between large and small newspapers, he notes his own bias in favor of the small ones, since they are the type for which the majority of journalism stu- dents will go to work. 2902. Elfenbein, Julien. Business journalism, its function and future. Rev. ed. New York, Harper, 1947. xxii, 359 p. illus., forms, diagrs. 47-4246 PN4784.C7E4 1947 This book was designed primarily as a textbook for students of business journalism. It can also be used as something of a guide to the history and pres- ent state of the thousands of American business newspapers. House organs and noncommercial journals, sometimes included in this classification, are passed by. Using his more restricted definition, the author in his first part discusses the service these papers perform for the business world and for the community; this is followed by a brief his- tory of the business press in America. Of special interest to the prospective business journalist is the second part of the book, a guide to the functions and methods of various staff members (publisher, editor, advertising sales manager, etc.) of a busi- ness paper. The appendixes include a chronological list of American business papers before 1900 (p. 293-304), and a brief dictionary of trade termi- nology. 2903. Herzberg, Joseph G. Late city edition, by Joseph G. Herzberg and members of the New Yor\ Herald Tribune staff. New York, Holt, 1947. 282 p. 47-31261 PN4775.H37 In 29 essays as many members of the Herald Tribune staff here discuss the activities involved in the preparation of a daily paper. While the point of departure is their own paper, the symposium is meant to present the general problems of any American large metropolitan daily. The emphasis of the book is on reportorial work in its many categories, but background rewriting, editing, ar- ranging, etc., are not neglected. Each contributor speaks of his own specialty; thus Geoffrey Parsons, chief editorial writer, does the chapter on "The Editorial Page." 2904. Liebling, Abbott J. The wayward press- man. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1947. 284 p. 47-11624 PN4867.L5 Mr. Liebling (b. 1904) in the first part of this book presents a narrative of his career as a news- paperman in Providence and New York. In a humorous and anecdotal style the author presents a good picture of the development of a journalist, including his departure from newspaper reporting. The burden of his tale is the arbitrariness of news- paper owners, the precariousness of newspaper em- ployment, and the dubious professional status of journalism. In his case the transfer was to The New Yorker, in which a large part of the book's material first appeared. In that magazine Liebling published a series of articles under the general tide "The Wayward Press." These were perceptive analyses of sins of commission and omission by the press, particularly in New York City. This critical commentary, in addition to covering aspects of the journalistic world not usually dwelt upon by jour- nalists in their how-to-do it books, also reveals in- PERIODICALS AND JOURNALISM / 261 directly much of the inner workings of newspapers. Liebling's Min\ and Red Herring, the Wayward Pressman's Casebook (Garden City, N. Y., Double- day, 1949. 251 p.) is made up entirely of articles from The New Yorker, and in it he continues to underline the errors, carelessness, stagnancy, debat- able publishing ethics, etc., found in a number of city newspapers. 2905. MacDougall, Curtis D. Newsroom prob- lems and policies. New York, Macmillan, 1 94 1. 592 p. 4 I ~?34 I PN4731.M27 This book is designed as an integrative textbook for the journalism student, and is meant to be "of value to the young person about to begin a news- paper career," especially "in forming a philosophy about the job." It focuses upon the problems of the newsroom employee, and the business and mechanical aspects of newspaper work enter only as they affect decisions on matters such as what should be printed and in what manner it should be presented. "How," for instance, "should news- papers handle news related to sex?" "What is libel and how can the newspapers avoid committing it?" The large number of "case studies" showing the actual handling of such problems in various papers enables the book to reflect much of the policy prac- tices prevailing in the American press. The author's own views take account (as of 194 1) of what exists, what is ideally desirable, and what steps in that direction are presendy practicable. A book which discusses the techniques and policies of reporting is Victor J. Danilov's Public Affairs Reporting (New York, Macmillan, 1955. 487 p.), which "attempts to acquaint the embryo reporter with the various types of public affairs news, to point out where to look for it, and to show how to cover it." Of especial value is its detailed study of the structure and functioning of American governmental units, from the local to the national level. 2906. MacNeil, Neil. Without fear or favor. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1940. 414 p. 40-27336 PN4855.M3 When Mr. MacNeil wrote this book he had been assistant managing editor of The New Yorf^ Times for about a decade. In it he describes the process of producing a newspaper, from gathering the news to committing it to the presses. The bulk of the book is made up of chapters on reporting and edit- ing various types of news: politics, finance, sports, features, local news, etc. There are also a number of "policy" chapters such as "Without Fear or Favor," "Libel, Ethics, Principles," "Freedom of the Press," and "The Devil's Advocate," which last is a review of propaganda and slanted news releases. It is the American press, he believes, which "has made the United States the most successful de- mocracy in history." 2907. Mott, Frank Luther. The news in America. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1952. 236 p. (The Library of Congress series in Amer- ican civilization) 52-8218 PN4855.M65 "In this essay I have attempted to define and describe news in the United States, and the way it is assembled, edited, and disseminated." While his primary aim is thus expository, he carries it out in a critical manner throughout, and in the light of a major distinction: "the editor works under a double standard: he has to decide what news he will print, on the one hand, because his readers demand it for the easy reading which brings im- mediate responses, and what he will select, on the other hand, because he thinks it may, in the long run, affect the lives and fortunes of his readers." However, publishers, news-gatherers, and especially the readers themselves must divide with the editors the responsibility for the present state of things. "The chief fault and failure of American journalism today — and this applies to all media of informa- tion — is the disproportionate space and emphasis given to the obviously interesting news of immediate reward ('soft news') at the expense of the signifi- cantly important news of situations and events which have not yet reached the stage of being exciting for the casual reader ('hard news')." A second major distinction is developed in Chapter 8, "Ob- jective News vs. Qualified Report." Among the complexities of 20th-century life, reporting no more than the overt event which catches the eyes is seldom enough; it is essential rather, in the words of Kent Cooper of the Associated Press, to have "reporting that digs below the surface and tells the true story" in its deeper significances. But such qualification of the apparent manifestly can lead to editorial tam- pering with the truth. Dean Mott, while he criti- cally assesses such forms as the weekly news-maga- zine style of report and the weekly summaries of news which appear in Sunday or Saturday issues of newspapers, judges in conclusion that, "day in and day out, American reporters and editors gen- erally do an honest and tremendously painstaking job." 2908. Rothstein, Arthur. Photojournalism: pic- tures for magazines and newspaper] s.] New York, American Photographic Book Pub. Co., 1956. 197 p. 56-11558 PN4784JP5R6 This study of photojournalism begins with a brief history of the subject, but .is a whole is more con- cerned with the current esthetics of journalistic photography and tbe technical problems <>t proces- sing and layout. The numerous photographs re- 262 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES produced are in part specimens of journalistic ex- cellence, and in part illustrations of graphic work in progress in newspaper offices. A final chapter, "Privileges and Restrictions," discusses the still fluid subjects of the ethics and the law of photojournalism. An earlier study of one aspect of the field is Daniel D. Mich and Edwin Eberman's The Technique of the Picture Story (New York, McGraw-Hill, 1945. 239 p.); the authors were part of the staff of Loo\, and their material largely reflects the usages of that magazine. A study which uses the technique of Life magazine as its norm is Wilson Hicks' Words and Pictures, an Introduction to Photojournalism (New York, Harper, 1952. 171 p.). An idea of the life of at least one type of photojournalist may be obtained from Jimmy Hare, News Photographer (New York, Macmillan, 1940. 304 p.) by Cecil Carnes; this is a study of the career of James H. Hare (1856-1946), an Anglo-American war-correspond- ent photographer whose half-century of activity all over the globe earned him fame as the greatest of news photographers. 2909. Rucker, Frank W., and Herbert Lee Wil- liams. Newspaper organization and man- agement. Ames, Iowa State College Press, 1955. 547 p. illus. 55-9003 PN4775.R8 In the preface the authors state their two purposes in writing this book: the first, "to outline and de- scribe for those now active in newspaper work the best methods and practices used in producing and promoting newspapers," and the second, "to provide for journalism students a textbook revealing im- portant details of newspaper organization and management, the challenging issues and problems that publishers must face, and the qualifications needed for success in directing and managing news- papers." They analyze problems in fields such as newspaper organization, types of newspaper plant equipment, obtaining profitable advertising and public good will, reliable financial and accounting procedures, and maintaining satisfactory interstaff relationships. 2910. Sutton, Albert Alton. Education for jour- nalism in the United States from its begin- ning to 1940. Evanston, 111., Northwestern University, 1945. 148 p. (Northwestern Univer- sity studies in the humanities, no. 10 [i. e. 14]) A45-4968 PN4788.S8 Bibliography: p. 125-126. This book opens with a historical survey of its subject, from the first program of education for journalism proposed by President Robert E. Lee at what is now Washington and Lee University, and the establishment of the first accredited school of journalism at the University of Missouri in 1908, through 1940, when the study was begun. Dr. Sutton next analyzes in detail the distribution of the schools teaching journalism and the nature of their courses. Of the 542 schools found to be offer- ing one or more courses in journalism, only 32 were schools accredited by the American Association of Schools and Departments of Journalism, while 384 offered neither a major nor a minor in the subject. Attention is also given to the student body, job placements, and curriculum trends. The data ac- cumulated has been brought together in a series of tables which appear both in the text and in the appendix. The information was obtained from questionnaires circulated to the institutions, nearly all of which responded. The story of one journalism school has been told in some detail in one of the volumes comprising the Bicentennial history of Co- lumbia University: Richard Terrill Baker's A His- tory of the Graduate School of Journalism, Colum- bia University (New York, Columbia University Press, 1954. 144 p.). 291 1. Thayer, Frank. Newspaper business man- agement. New York, Prentice-Hall, 1954. 438 p. illus. (Prentice-Hall journalism series) • 53~ I2 347 PN4775.T5 1954; This volume was designed as a textbook covering the major factors in the field of newspaper manage- ment, and many minor ones as well. While it is partly theoretical, it also includes much in the way of description of actual situations. The chapters cover such aspects as staff organization, circulation, advertising rates, promotion, accounting, and financ- ing. An earlier book on much the same subject was James E. Pollard's Principles of Newspaper Management (New York, McGraw-Hill, 1937. 462 p.). 2912. Wolseley, Roland E., and Laurence R. Camp- bell. Exploring journalism; with emphasis on its social and professional aspects. 3d ed. En- glewood Cliffs, N. J., Prentice-Hall, 1957. 636 p. illus. (Prentice-Hall journalism series) 57-9143 _ PN4775.W65 1957 This textbook attempts to investigate those mass media which involve journalism in its broader mean- ing. Thus magazines, books, radio, and television are discussed as well as newspapers. In large part it discusses the requirements of the various media, standard operating techniques in each, and the pro- fessional responsibilities imposed by their social implications. This is carried from the problems of gathering straight news, writing it, front page make- up, etc., through those of interpretation and cover- age. Each of the chapters concludes with a list ol PERIODICALS AND JOURNALISM / 263 books that may be consulted for further information on the subject. The book originally appeared in 1943; for this edition it has been considerably re- vised and its coverage expanded. G. Magazines: General 2913. Britt, George. Forty years — forty millions; the career of Frank A. Munsey. New York, Farrar & Rinehart, 1935. 309 p. illus. 35-20872 PN4874.M8B7 Munsey (1854-1925) was a big businessman whose major field of operation was publishing. His principal venture was probably Munsey's Maga- zine, which was evolved in 1891 from Munsey's Weekly, an imitation of the humorous Life. In 1893 Munsey reduced the price from 25 to 10 cents, thus reaching a mass market with his magazine, which was both cheaper and of poorer quality, though having more illustrations than its main competitors. It rapidly achieved the widest circu- lation of any magazine in America. Munsey in general worked for sales and did not hesitate to kill off any publication that failed to make him a profit. His various magazines were distinguished by a low grade of fiction, often staff-produced; non-crusading and politically conservative articles; an absence of sensationalism; and low prices. In time Munsey ex- tended his activities to the newspaper field, never bringing creative ideas to journalism, but always an important factor in its financial affairs. He also wandered outside the field of journalism finance by such activities as becoming owner of the Mohigan grocery store chain. His positive contribution was that he got magazines into multitudes of low-income homes. Britt's biography is based on interviews and previously published accounts. While Britt did not have access to Munsey's private papers, his book remains a revealing and readable biography of this pioneering capitalist. 2914. Hoffman, Frederick J., Charles Allen, and Carolyn F. Ulrich. The little magazine; a history and a bibliography. Princeton, Princeton University Press, 1946. 440 p. illus. A46-17 PX4836.H6 "List of references": p. [3991-403. The term "little magazine" refers not to physical size, but to smallness of circulation, usually, how- ever, one of relatively high education and sophisti- cation; further, the term is limited to primarily literary periodicals. Most of these appear quarterly, hut a few appear monthly or at other intervals. By virtue of their small circulations, their price is usually relatively high, and their life expectancy is quite low. This type of periodical has existed in various guises for a long time, but it began its full flowering and became of major importance after 1910. Accordingly, this book is a study of the little magazine in the 20th century. It includes general chapters on the history of these periodicals by decades, as well as chapters on various types and subjects, such as poetry, regionalism, political di- rections, the use of psychoanalytic themes, and criticism. The main importance of the little maga- zines is that they have served as vehicles for new and experimental writers. Many modern American authors of literary importance have had their repu- tation established in such magazines before they were accepted by more remunerative publishers. Further, much literature of importance even by established writers appears in these periodicals long before it is published in book form. In addition to the history and analysis this study includes a bibli- ography (p. 233-398) of all little magazines, ar- ranged chronologically by the year of the initial appearance of each, and each entry is supplied with a brief history and description. 2915. Mott, Frank Luther. A history of American magazines. Cambridge, Mass., Harvard University Press, 1938-57. 4 v. illus. 39-2823 PN4877.M63 1938 "Chronological list of magazines" at end of each volume. Contents. — [v. 1] 1741-1850. — v. 2. 1850- 1865. — v. 3. 1865-1885. — v. 4. 1885-1905. Frank Luther Mott (b. 18S6) in his continuing history of American magazines has presented the world with an outstanding scholarly and readable work which indirectly reflects much of American culture while it serves directly as an enlightened guide to one area of that culture. He attempts "to illustrate the main currents of the thought and feeling of the American people by some analysis of the contents of the magazines and by carefully chosen quotations from periodicals in order to give a proper idea of the integration of magazines with social movements." For the purposes of this his- tory a magazine has been defined as any Don news- paper periodical appearing more often than semi- annually. Each of the lour volumes opens with extensive accounts of the principal events and charac- teristics of a period, and the main line of develop- ment in the magazines of that period. There 264 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES follow individual chapters on the leading maga- zines. The periodicals individually treated are not necessarily all the leading ones begun in the period; for, when a periodical reaches its greatest importance in a later period, its history is given in full in the volume on the later period. Further, all these chap- ters on individual periodicals trace their history beyond the formal time limit of the volume to the date either of the periodical's end or of the writing of the volume in which it is discussed. While Dean Mott's work is remarkably detailed, it is not meant to serve as an exhaustive checklist, that function being left to Winifred Gregory's Union List of Serials (New York, Wilson, 1943. 3065 p.). For the first 70 years a more detailed list including information on personnel is now available: A Register of Editors, Printers, and Publishers of American Magazines, 1741-1810, by Benjamin M. Lewis (New York, New York Public Library, 1957. 40 p.). The first 50 years have received mono- graphic treatment, in greater detail than Dean Mott's and with a different presentation and em- phasis, in Lyon N. Richardson's A History of Early American Magazines, 1741-1789 (New York, T. Nelson, 1931. 414 p.). 2916. Noel, Mary. Villains galore; the heyday of the popular story weekly. New York, Mac- millan, 1954. 320 p. illus. 54-9474 PN4877.N6 In the 19th century periodicals first began to reach a true mass market, and it was soon discovered that literacy did not necessarily prove either a desire or an ability to cope with large intellectual and esthetic matters. To the dismay of many, and the delight of millions, a "popular literature" was rapidly de- veloped for this new "literate" market. In addition to cheap novels and newspapers, fiction magazines became purveyors of literary fare for the masses. Many of these periodicals were weeklies with most of their stories stolen from one another or written by members of the staff. They provided much of the popular entertainment of the time, serving the same function as movies, radio, and television in the 20th century. Mary Noel's study of this phe- nomenon opens with an account of about 40 of the more popular story weeklies. There follows a group of chapters with more general comments on and analyses of the contents of such magazines, tracing from their earliest beginnings to the present era the various transformations of the theme of sweetness and violence which formed the substance of most such tales. 2917. Paine, Albert Bigelow. Th. Nast, his period and his pictures. New York, Harper, 1904. xxi, 583, xx p. illus. 26-22753 NC1429.N3P3 1904a Thomas Nast (1840- 1902) is remembered as one of the Nation's first and greatest cartoonists. Most of his work appeared in Harper's Weekly, where he advocated one political reform after another; his main achievements included uncovering the corrup- tion of the Tweed Ring and helping to elect Grover Cleveland to the presidency. While it was a pic- torial form in which he expressed himself, he may be regarded as one of the more important journalistic figures of the period. Paine's biography is not so much a study of Nast's personality as a record of Nast's work and influence. The book is therefore a valuable commentary on many aspects of the his- tory of the period. 2918. Peterson, Theodore B. Magazines in the twentieth century. Urbana, University of Illinois Press, 1956. 457 p. 56-5683 PN4877.P4 Bibliography: p. [397J-4H. This book reviews the "modern magazine" from its inception in the late 19th century to the present. It is regarded as having arisen out of the transforma- tion from an agrarian to an industrial society, and the need for advertising goods that must be sold. Crucial dates in its evolution were the establishment of favorable postage rates (1879), the introduction of low-priced magazines (1893), and the conscious catering to popular taste, entered upon by The Satur- day Evening Post under Lorimer from 1899. For this study the author has limited his attention mainly "to commercial magazines edited for the lay public." In attempting to cover so wide a field, Dr. Peterson first presents chapters on topics such as advertising in the modern popular magazine and the financial structure of its production. The magazines them- selves are studied in groups, under categories such as journals now defunct and those still popular. Some attention is devoted to magazines intended for minorities. However, such periodicals as house organs, and scholarly and professional journals, are omitted from consideration. Magazines in the New York, Ronald 2919. Wood, James Playsted. United States. 2d ed. Press Co., 1956. 390 p. illus. 56-10175 PN4877.W6 1956 The author states his purpose in the preface: "This book attempts to show, from general magazines that were important in their time and from im- portant nationally circulated magazines of today, what magazines are and in what directions they exert their social and economic influence. It traces and gauges the force of periodicals from Benjamin Franklin's General Magazine to the weeklies and monthlies of the present. It shows how magazines have both reflected and helped to mould American tastes, habits, manners, interests, and beliefs; how PERIODICALS AND JOURNALISM / 265 they have shaped opinion on public questions; how they have crusaded effectively for social and political reforms; and how magazine advertising, as well as magazine editorial content, has affected the American home and standard of living." The book, originally published in 1949, is thus more of a social study than a detailed history. Most of the chapters analyze intermagazine trends or develop- ments, such as the handling of the slavery question and of political corruption, magazines during World War II, changes in and expansion of coverage, etc. Some chapters are studies of groups or types of magazines, such as the farm and grocery-store maga- zines. A few are primarily devoted to particular magazines, such as The Saturday Evening Post, The Reader's Digest, and The New Yorker. A selected bibliography appears on p. 379-383. A book writ- ten less for the magazine reader and more for the worker inside the magazine field is Roland E. Wolseley's The Magazine World; an Introduction to Magazine Journalism (New York, Prentice-Hall, 1951. 427 p.), which aims to present a picture of the work that goes into the production and distribu- tion of American magazines. H. Individual Magazines 2920. Bainbridge, John. Little wonder; or, The Reader's Digest and how it grew. New York, Reynal & Hitchcock, 1946. 177 p. 46-4584 PN4900.R3B3 The Reader's Digest was founded in 1922 by De- Witt Wallace (b. 1889). It started out as an at- tempt to present in short form the best articles currently appearing in other periodicals. In time it developed to a point where most of its articles originated in its own editorial offices, but were ordi- narily "planted" in other periodicals which received inducements of various kinds. With a strong under- tone of conservatism and religious orthodoxy the Digest presents folksy stories and informative ar- ticles on current issues, with all complexities of language, problems, and thought removed for the benefit of the common reader. This has brought it the largest circulation of any magazine in the world; it also sets records in a number of foreign language editions, and appears in Braille and on phono-discs. Its multimillion circulation has made of it a major social force. Bainbrid a °d its greatest external ones in 1917-19 and 1941-45. Beginning with Section C, there are few titles which could not plausibly have been placed in one or another of our topical chapters, just as there are many tides in those chapters which could just as plausibly appear here. In some cases, we are well aware, our dis- positions have been quite arbitrary, and in a few they are recognized errors of judgment which the circumstances of publication do not permit us to rectify. Section A on Historiography represents a new self-consciousness of the historical profession which is even now being gradually and somewhat pain- fully achieved. It is not an easy subject to study, for it is considerably more difficult to extract the ideas and attitudes of an historian from his work than it is those of a philosopher. There remain much detailed work to be done, and definitive sur- veys to produce. We have included here some titles on the collection and organization of historical ma- terials in archives, historical societies, and museums, some manuals of historical research and editing which illustrate American practice, and some works on the teaching of American history. Section B contains a great variety of general works on the whole course of American history, although some take their departure from 1776 or 1789 rather than from an earlier date. There are a number of reference books, but of a kind in which one may profitably or even pleasantly browse, if no one is likely to read them through. A number of collec- tions of historical "documents" and other primary source materials are included; most of them are intended for use in college courses, and the more recent ones seek to present "problems" which will induce the student to reason as well as to remember. Other books produced for classroom use are the general surveys, in one volume or in two, with one author or more, and here the problem was the usual one of selecting a few titles from many whose re- semblances are more remarkable than their differ- ences. There are a number of guides to American biography and autobiography, of which the Diction- ary of American Biography (no. 3080) is fticile princcps; writings of individual biographers, supple- mentary to the biographies which appear in the topical chapters of this Guide, will be found in Chapter IV. The numerous biographies in the succeeding sections of this chapter arc intended to be limited to figures who took .1 significant or .it least a highly representative p.irt in the main current of national development. And, finally, there are in Section B a number oi titles which treat the west ward movement of the American people as a major and continuing theme oi American history, from 302 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES the first settlements until the close of the 19th century. Books which consider the subject rather from the viewpoint of the successive Wests to be occupied will be found in Chapter XII on Local History, but we do not expect everyone to agree in detail with our distribution. Section C is chiefly concerned with the overture to American history: the revelation of the Western Hemisphere to European man from the great ven- ture of Christopher Columbus until that point, some three centuries later, when the major outlines of the New World were clearly understood. Here have also been placed a limited number of tides on the two European empires in America which preceded or accompanied the British colonization, which con- ditioned its development, and which have given a distinctive character to large parts of the Americas. Too often neglected are the West Indies (no. 3168), which since the 17th century have been the most cosmopolitan part of the New World, and which, during the first three centuries after their discovery, played a far more important role than they have since. The remaining sections constitute in the main a straightforward chronological progression, but with two important qualifications: works concerned with the assertion of colonial rights against the imperial government, which went on for nearly 12 years before the actual outbreak of hostilities, are placed in Section E rather than D. Similarly, works on slavery as a system and an interest, and the dispute which it engendered for three decades before seces- sion, have been collected in Section H, and the story prolonged to the withdrawal of the Federal troops from the South in 1877. In the case of either war, and of the other national wars, books concerned with the more technically military aspects, the conduct of campaigns, the administration of the armed forces, and the lives of the principal commanders — if they did not become Presidents — will be found in Chapter X on Military History. Concerning Section F it may be said that the best books on the most im- portant event within it, the making of the Federal Constitution, will be found in Chapter XXX on Constitution and Government. As for Section G, it was dubbed the "Middle Period" when the post- Civil War perspective was far shorter than it is today, but since no better term has appeared to indicate the years of strenuous nationalism and democracy be- tween the Peace of Ghent and the election of i860, we have retained it with the addition of quotation marks. Many of the most significant develop- ments for Section I, covering the age in which American industry so spectacularly mushroomed and achieved its dominant position, are best de- scribed in Chapter XXIX on Economic Life. The breaks at 1901 and 1921 are chiefly for convenience, and represent no endorsement of the "Presidential synthesis" — but who can deny that the three periods thereby set off have each a tone and temper of its own? A. Historiography 3044. Adams, Herbert B. Historical scholarship in the United States, 1876-1901: as revealed in the correspondence of Herbert B. Adams. Edited by W. Stull Holt. Baltimore, Johns Hopkins Press, 1938. 314 p. (The Johns Hopkins University studies in historical and political science, ser. 56, no. 4) 39-1218 H31.J6, ser. 56, no. 4 E175.5.A1797 3045. Jameson, John Franklin. An historian's world; selections from the correspondence of John Franklin Jameson. Edited by Elizabeth Donnan and Leo F. Stock. Philadelphia, American Philosophical Society, 1956. 382 p. (Memoirs of the American Philosophical Society, v. 42) 56-6729 Q11.P612, v. 42 D15.J27A4 Adams (1 850-1 901) built up the first successful American department of graduate study in history, at Johns Hopkins University (from 1876), initiated the publication of the Johns Hopkins studies (1882), led in the organization of the American Historical Association (1884), and served as its first secretary. Jameson (1 859-1937) received the first Ph. D. in history from Johns Hopkins (1882), edited the American Historical Review (1895-1901, 1905-28), headed the Bureau of Historical Research at the Carnegie Institution of Washington (1905-28) and the Manuscript Division of the Library of Congress (1928-37), and was the prime mover in bringing about the establishment of the National Archives (1934). Each man exerted a wide and salutary influence among the new and growing "guild" of academic historians, although his own published work remained relatively limited in quantity. These two collections of their correspondence, principally with other American historians, give much the best picture available of the first six decades of the new professional history in the United States. GENERAL HISTORY / 303 3046. Beale, Howard K., ed. Charles A Beard: an appraisal. [Lexington] University of Kentucky Press, 1954. 312 p. 53-55 x 7 E175.5.B37 "Bibliography of Beard's writings [by] Jack Frooman [and] Edmund David Cronon": p. [ 2 65]-286. Charles A. Beard (1874-1948) was a unique figure among American historians, whose writings ranged over a wide variety of subjects, whose belief in democracy and the freedom of thought was basic and practical, and who followed his ideas wherever they led him, into economic determinism, into his- torical relativism, or into a narrow isolationist corner. His violent attacks on the foreign policy of President F. D. Roosevelt lost him much of the esteem in which he had been held and delayed the appearance of the present symposium, from which several of the original contributors withdrew, until after his death. Twelve friends and admirers con- tribute 13 essays on Beard as a historian, a historical critic, a political theorist, an interpreter of the Con- stitution, a teacher, and a public man, as well as in other lights and relationships. Professor Robert E. Brown of Michigan State University devotes a small volume, Charles Beard and the Constitution (Princeton, Princeton University Press, 1956. 219 p.), to a critical analysis of Beard's best-known and most controversial book, An Economic Interpreta- tion of the Constitution of the United States (New York, Macmillan, 1913. 330 p.). He is led to deny "that the Constitution was put over undemo- cratically in an undemocratic society" by a per- sonalty-interests group, and to affirm that it was, so far as conditions permitted, created by the whole people in their own best interests. Volumes by single hands on other historians who span the two centuries are Eric F. Goldman's John Bach McMas- ter, American Historian (Philadelphia, University of Pennsylvania Press, 1943. 194 p.), on the author of the famous History of the People of the United States (1883-1927. 9 v.), which is more original in plan than in execution; and Abraham S. Eisen- stadt's Charles McLean Andrews, A Study in American Historical Writing (New York, Colum- bia University Press, 1956. 273 p.), on the "his- torical science" of the Yale professor who did most to place the Thirteen Colonies in their contemporary setting as part of a great empire with its center at Whitehall. 3047. Carter, Clarence E. Historical editing. [Washington, U. S. Govt. Print. Off.] 1952. 51 p. (National Archives publication no. 53-4. Bul- letins of the National Archives, no. 7) A52-9688 D13.2.C3 Dr. Carter, since 193 1 editor of the Territorial Papers of the United States, has drawn upon his long experience and the best recent practice in this general discussion of the problems that regularly arise in historical editing, especially for the benefit of staff members of the National Archives and of participants in the program of the National Histori- cal Publications Commission. In its analysis of selection, transcription, and annotation, and in its emphasis upon responsibility "to furnish the ma- terial in its full and unaltered shape," it exemplifies the editorial standards of the historical profession in the United States. 3048. Caughey, John W. Hubert Howe Bancroft, historian of the West. Berkeley, University of California Press, 1946. 422 p. A47-18 E175.5.B199 A leading Pacific Coast historian writes a well- proportioned biography of his most conspicuous predecessor, H. H. Bancroft (1832-1918), based on the latter's voluminous writings supplemented by his papers in the Bancroft Library and by contempo- rary newspapers. The house of H. H. Bancroft & Co., Booksellers and Stationers, set up in San Fran- cisco in 1856, prospered beyond anticipation, ena- bling its proprietor to assemble an extraordinary col- lection of imprints, manuscripts, and transcripts concerning the history of the United States west of the Rockies, and to employ a group of assistants to digest these sources for a large-scale history of the region, with Bancroft providing plans, editorial supervision, and a substantial share of the actual writing. Believing that Bancroft's early critics had seized upon some of his defects, so that "it came to be the fashion to disparage him not only for these shortcomings but in all that he had done," Professor Caughey emphasizes the great achievements in- volved in the 39 large volumes of the Native Races and the History of the Pacific States, and in the Bancroft Library of the University of California. 3049. Coleman, Laurence Vail. The museum in America; a critical study. Washington, American Association of Museums, 1939. 3 v. (73° P-) 39- 2 77 J 9 AM11.C6 Museums, even of natural history, constitute a concentration of nonlitcrary materials for history and may be regarded as a primary stage of the historio- graphical process. The first museum in the United States — the Charleston Museum, which originated in 1773 as a natural history collection of the Library Society of Charles-Town — antedated the Revolution, and by the end of 1938 the number of Americao museums had reached 2,489, nearly four-fifths of which had been established during the previous 3°4 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES quarter-century. The author, who has been director of the American Association of Museums since 1927, calls his work "a commentary on the condition, the strengths and weaknesses, and the limitations and opportunities of museums." Volume 1 reviews the whole development as a social movement and points to the rise of historic house and trailside museums as consequences of the automobile. It classifies existing institutions into museums of science, his- tory, art, and industry; discusses their relations to locality, State, and Nation; surveys sources of mu- seum income, which is never quite adequate; and describes the museum building of yesterday and today. Volume 2 is an analysis of museum work, the central function of which is display, necessitat- ing a dual arrangement of materials into an exhibi- tion and a reserve, or study, collection. Museum work, he concludes, "is capable of being a profes- sion," and its personnel has achieved varying de- grees of professionalism. Volume 3 classifies and lists museums by field ("General Museums," p. 487— 492), by control, and by location, and concludes with ten statistical tables (p. 663-678) and two chronological lists, of museums established before 1850, including those which have ceased to exist, and of all buildings constructed for use as museums since 1814, when Peale's Museum was built in Balti- more. Dr. Coleman has since published, under the same imprint, works on College and University Mu- seums (1942. 73 p.) and Company Museums (no. 4716), and the first volume of a treatise on Museum Buildings (1950). 3050. Committee on American History in Schools and Colleges. American history in schools and colleges; the report of the Committee on Ameri- can History in Schools and Colleges of the American Historical Association, the Mississippi Valley His- torical Association, the National Council for the Social Studies. Edgar B. Wesley, director of the committee. New York, Macmillan, 1944. xiv, 148 p. 44-611 E175.8.C6 A reexamination of the purpose, extent, and qual- ity of instruction in American history provoked by World War II, sponsored by three learned societies, financed by the Rockefeller Foundation, and con- ducted from June through September 1943. The committee concluded that while the number of courses offered in American history was sufficient, there was too much overlapping in subject matter between them, too few college students took them, and improvement in the quality of curriculum and teaching was the major concern. Colleges were cautioned not to stress research at the expense of good teaching, and teachers urged to aim at signifi- cance in a limited number of topics rather than the meaningless enumeration of details. The Report offers a model organization for American history courses through the grades and an "Item Analysis of the Test of Understanding of United States History" (p. [i25]-i44) which revealed so much ignorance of the subject among diverse groups of testees. 3051. Craven, Wesley Frank. The legend of the Founding Fathers. New York, New York University Press, 1956. 191 p. (New York Uni- versity. Stokes Foundation. Anson G. Phelps lectureship on early American history) 56-8593 E175.C7 "For better or for worse, the American community has consistently looked to its origins for an explana- tion of its distinctive qualities and thus for an ex- planation of what its future should hold." There was, however, a founding of the body social in 1607 and 1620, and a founding of the body politic in 1776 and 1787. Professor Craven devotes these explora- tory lectures to the relative emphasis given to each founding, both in the historiography of various eras and in the ceremonial observances of successive anniversaries, and seeks as well the sources of the "debunking" impulse which has provided a counter- current during the present century. 3052. Dunlap, Leslie W. American historical societies, 1 790-1860. Madison, Wis., Priv. Print. [Cantwell Print. Co.] 1944. 238 p. 44-7046 E172.D8 Societies organized primarily to collect, preserve, and make available materials for history arose in Europe from the first decade of the 18th century, and spread to the United States by its last. In Part 2 (p. 137-219) of this study, Dr. Dunlap sketches briefly the careers of the 65 local societies which arose in the United States between 1791, when the efforts of Rev. Jeremy Belknap brought about the organi- zation of the Massachusetts Historical Society, and 1859, when the Historical Society of New Mexico was founded at Santa Fe. Part 1 discusses the move- ment as a whole, such general features as member- ship, finances, collections, and publications, and the value of these societies to our early writers, especially of state and local history. 3053. Hesseltine, William B. Pioneer's mission; the story of Lyman Copeland Draper. Madi- son, State Historical Society of Wisconsin, 1954. 384 p. _ 54-7271 El 75-5-D763 "Materials for a biography": p. 357-359. Draper (1815-1891) spent much of his time from his 24th year in journeys, largely made on foot, through the older Middle West, collecting or tran- scribing manuscripts, and taking down the oral testimony of the oldest inhabitants, especially con- cerning the warfare which harassed the earliest GENERAL HISTORY / 305 settlements. As the founder and long-time secretary of the State Historical Society of Wisconsin ( 1854— 1886), he was a pioneer in the collection and publi- cation of historical source material, and in the or- ganization of historical activities, in this part of the United States. The author unfortunately takes a rather dim view of Draper's character and of his failure to write the large-scale history he had planned, but he bases a very concrete and absorbing biography upon a thorough assimilation of the abundant personal materials in the Draper Collec- tion at Madison. 3054. Hockett, Homer C. The critical method in historical research and writing. New York, Macmillan, 1955. 330 p. 55-13664 E175.7.H6446 "A rewritten and expanded edition of the author's Introduction to Research in American History [1931]/' Bibliography: p. 265-295. An introduction to method for graduate students in American history, which illustrates the time- honored canons of historical criticism from exclu- sively American examples, gives concrete biblio- graphical and procedural instructions for preparing a master's thesis, and proceeds to more general con- siderations on the past and present state of historical bibliography, research, and writing. A very typical product of American graduate schools of history, which throws much light upon the profession's understanding of its own tasks. 3055. Jordy, William H. Henry Adams: scientific historian. New Haven, Yale University Press, 1952. xv, 327 p. (Yale historical publica- tions. Studies, 16) 52-5362 E175.5.A1755 Bibliography: p. 291-317. Adams as a man of letters is considered under Literature (no. 688-700). Dr. Jordy's concern is with Adams' conception of "scientific history" as practiced in his History of the United States (nos. 3274-3275) and later formulated in his Letter to American Teachers of History (1910). Its pursuit, however, involves a widespread exploration of Adams' studies, thought, and character. The "master key" to the History is found in the positive philosophy of Auguste Comte. In the Letter's theory of inevitable degradation, Dr. Jordy thinks, the "erstwhile Comtist . . . ended his writing career by turning Comte upside down." In The Mind and Art of Henry Adams (Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1957. 430 p.) Jacob C. Levenson is concerned with Adams as man of letters, artist, and thinker, but urges that the only sound approach to these aspects is through a detailed study of "the first modern historical scholar in America." Adams' work after 1891 was all stamped by his earlier practice of "the 4.H240— 60 21 craft of history, as the one technical discipline to which Adams ever fully submitted." The continu- ity of Adams' second literary career with his first, and of Mont-Saint-Michel and Chartres and The Education of Henry Adams with the History of the United States is not easy to demonstrate, but the author does his sophisticated best. 3056. Kraus, Michael. A history of American history. New York, Farrar & Rinehart, 1937. 607 p. 37- 20 447 EI75-K-73 3057. Kraus, Michael. The writing of American history. Norman, University of Oklahoma Press, 1953. 387 p. 53-8S15 E175.K75 These two tides are actually successive editions of the same book. The later, according to its preface, "has been rewritten and expanded to carry the study to date," but the rewriting is relatively minor and the expansion in the nature of patchwork. On the other hand, there has been a general reduction of the original text, and much information concerning the earlier historians has simply been dropped. The 1937 volume is therefore still useful as the most comprehensive survey of American historiography hitherto made. The author's method, ideas, and style are sufficiendy pedestrian, and there is rather more quotation from the histories themselves than is necessary for the purpose, but there is more basic information concerning the authors and their books than in any other single work. Old as it is, John Franklin Jameson's The History of Historical Writ- ing in America (Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1891. 160 p.) contains still pertinent observations, and affords an introduction as pleasant as it is brief to the earlier historians. John Spencer Bassett's The Middle Group of American Historians (New York, Macmillan, 1917. 324 p.) contains, along with brief treatments of lesser writers, objective if somewhat condescending descriptions of the life and work of Jeremy Belknap, George Bancroft, Jared Sparks, and Peter Force, regarded as the major figures of "the old school [that] came to its end with the advent of the critical spirit." Wendell Holmes Stephen- son's The South Lives in History (Baton Rouge, Louisiana State University Press, 1955. 163 p.) includes a general review of historical scholarship concerned with the region, detailed studies of William E. Dodd, Ulrich B. Phillips, and Walter Lynwood Fleming, and an exceptionally thorough and valuable "Essay on Authorities." 3058. The Marcus W. Jerncgan essays in American historiography, by his former students at the University of Chicago. Edited by William T. Hutchinson. Chicago, University of Chicago Press, '937- 4'7 P- 3 8 " 2 7 Ei7vvM;: 306 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Contents. — George Bancroft, by Watt Stewart. — Richard Hildreth, by A. H. Kelly. — Francis Park- man, by J. P. Smith. — Hermann Eduard von Hoist, by C. R. Wilson. — James Schouler, by L. E. Ellis. — Woodrow Wilson, by L. M. Sears. — John Bach Mc- Master, by W. T. Hutchinson. — John Fiske, by J. B. Sanders. — James Ford Rhodes, by R. C. Miller. — Henry Adams, by H. S. Commager. — Alfred Thayer Mahan, by J. W. Pratt. — Theodore Roosevelt, by H. J. Thornton. — Frederick Jackson Turner, by Avery Craven. — Herbert Levi Osgood, by E. C. O. Beatty. — Edward Channing, by R. R. Fahrney. — George Louis Beer, by A. P. Scott. — Clarence Walworth Alvord, by Marion Dargan, jr. — Claude Halstead Van Tyne, by P. G. David- son. — Ulrich Bonnell Phillips, by Wood Gray. — Albert J. Beveridge, by T. E. Strevey. — Vernon Louis Parrington, by W. T. Utter. Professor Jernegan was one of the first to offer a graduate seminar in American historiography. His pupils have shown their appreciation in these in- formative and documented essays, from 10 to 27 pages in length, concerning 21 American historians whose work is finished, and who were mainly con- cerned with United States history prior to 1865. Another four studies, including Charles Hirschfeld's "Edward Eggleston, Pioneer in Social History," ap- pear in Historiography and Urbanization; Essays in American History in Honor of W. Stull Holt, edited by Eric F. Goldman (Baltimore, Johns Hopkins Press, 1941. 220 p.). 3059. National Council for the Social Studies. The study and teaching of American history. Richard E. Thursfield, editor. Washington, 1947. xviii, 442 p. (Its Yearbook, 17th, 1946) 31-6192 H62.A1N3, no. 17 The National Council, the department of social studies of the National Education Association, offers this symposium primarily to secondary-school but also to elementary-school and college teachers, in order to improve the teaching and study of Ameri- can history "as the essential core of any program for intelligent American citizenship in this interde- pendent world." Section 2 has chapters by six historians on the "Newer Interpretations and Em- phases in American History," while Section 3 dis- cusses the relations of American history to the other social studies and other school subjects. The four concluding sections are more directly concerned with pedagogical techniques: the articulation of American history with the several school grades, teaching methods and materials, "evaluation" and tests, and teacher training. 3060. Nye, Russel B. George Bancroft, Brahmin rebel. New York, Knopf, 1944. x, 340, xii p. 44-6406 E175.5.B196 Bibliography: p. [j24]-340. George Bancroft (1800-1891) published the 12 volumes of his History of the United States, from the discovery of America to the establishment of govern- ment under the Constitution, through 5 eventful decades of the Republic (1834-82). Written in an exuberant style, and pervaded by a robust faith in the Providential mission of the United States as the embodiment of liberty, democracy, and civilized progress, it brought its author immediate fame at home and abroad. Prof. Nye's life of the historian, which won a Pulitzer prize in biography, is based on the two main collections of Bancroft's manu- scripts as well as his published writings, and empha- sizes as much as his history his political and diplo- matic career, and his influence as the thinker who, perhaps, "caught the spirit of his age best." 3061. Parker, Donald Dean. Local history; how to gather it, write it, and publish it. Rev. and edited by Bertha E. Josephson for the Commit- tee on Guide for Study of Local History of the Social Science Research Council, [n. p.] 1944. xiv, 186 p. A45-1091 E175.7.P3 Bibliography: p. 179-186. The tide page's authorship statement does duty for a rather more complex origin: the Committee discovered that Dr. Parker of the South Dakota College of Agriculture had already prepared an appropriate manuscript, which they proceeded to adapt and expand into harmony with their own purposes, with Rodney Loeher and Richard H. Shryock as well as Miss Josephson supplying some writing or rewriting. The objective of the Council is to stimulate the writing of sound local history, as supplying essential materials for social science, and, since professionally trained historians are likely to be absorbed by larger themes, to supply laymen with a body of practical rules and suggestions for recording the significant past of their own communities. The three parts are concerned with gathering materials, from books in libraries to inscriptions on grave- stones, with the processes of taking and organizing notes and of writing and documenting a text, and with various means of publishing and of obtaining community cooperation. Chapter 8, largely the work of Dr. Shryock, is "A Model [i. e., exhaustive] Outline for a Local History." 3062. Saveth, Edward N., ed. Understanding the American past; American history and its interpretation. Boston, Little, Brown, 1954. 613 p. 53-7320 E178.6.S3 1954 GENERAL HISTORY / 307 A carefully organized essay on the periods and types of American historiography precedes 30 selec- tions from recent writers which the editor regards as outstanding interpretations of some topic or figure. To each of these he contributes an introduction indi- cating its place in the professional discussion of the subject. The result is an anthology affording an unusually clear perspective of its field. The Maying of American History, edited by Donald H. Sheehan, 2d ed. enl. (New York, Dryden Press, 1954. 2 v. (912 p.)) presents rather longer extracts from 34 historians from Parton and Parkman to Henry K. David and C. Vann Woodward, but has less of a positive contribution on the part of the compiler. 3063. Schellenberg, Theodore R. Modern archives: principles and techniques. [Chicago] University of Chicago Press, 1956. 247 p. 56-58525 CD950.S3 In the United States the archival profession has achieved self-consciousness and influence only since the establishment of the National Archives in 1934, followed by the organization of the Society of Ameri- can Archivists in 1937 and the inauguration of its quarterly organ, The American Archivist, in the next year. During 1954 Dr. Schellenberg, Director of Archival Management at the National Archives, served as Fulbright lecturer in Australia, and there became concerned with the differences between American and foreign archival practices. His book is an outgrowth of his lectures, which he expanded to fill in a "well-rounded and well-considered state- ment on the basic principles and techniques of managing" modern public records — the first sys- tematic American book on the subject. An intro- ductory part considers the nature and relationships of archives and archival institutions. Part 2 is con- cerned with record management — the production, organization, and control of public records in the agency where they originate, as well as the policies that govern the disposal of noncurrent records. Part 3 expounds archival management, first in its essential conditions, and then in the principles governing its several functions: appraisal of poten- tial accessions, physical preservation, arrangement of record groups and of the items within groups, finding aids and other descriptions, publications, and reference services to Government and public. 3064. Scott, Franklin D., and Elaine Teigler, eds. Guide to the American Historical Review, 1895-1945; a subject-classified explanatory bibliog- raphy of the articles, notes and suggestions, and documents. With a foreword by Guy Stanton Ford. In American Historical Association. Annual report. 1944; v. 1. Washington, 1945. p. 65-292. 46-25831 E172.A60 1944, v. 1 The American Historical Review was established in 1895 by an ad hoc meeting held in New York City, and was at first controlled by a coopting Board of Editors and financed by an Association of Guaran- tors. Two years later it entered into a contractual relationship with the American Historical Associa- tion, which did not acquire ownership until 1916. It has, nevertheless, since its foundation been the major periodical of the historical profession in the United States, and it has from the first issue aimed at the widest possible representation of all ages, areas, and aspects of human history. In the present Guide, American history occupies 82 pages, Euro- pean and Near Eastern history 76 pages, and all other areas and varieties 50 pages. Nearly every American historical scholar of any eminence has contributed at least one article to its pages, and it supplies a reliable indication of changes in the pre- vailing subjects, ideas, and techniques among aca- demic historians. The present Guide to the first half-century of the Review, prepared over a period of years by Professor Scott of Northwestern Uni- versity and his assistant, is arranged in subject sec- tions, and in an order "roughly chronological by content" within each, so that the Review's contribu- tion to any period or topic is easily discerned. The entries for articles are provided with abstracts "in- tended to guide readers to the articles they wish to consult, not to compress the entire content," and there is a 7-page index of authors. The early history of the journal is charmingly narrated by its first and greatest editor, John Franklin Jameson, in an article contributed to the Review for its 25th anniversary: "The American Historical Review, 1895-1920," v. 26, Oct. 1920, p. 1— 17. 3065. Social Science Research Council. Committee on Historiography. Theory and practice in historical study: a report of the Committee on Historiography. New York, Social Science Research Council, 1946. 177 p. ([Social Science Research Council] Bulletin 54, 1946) 46-3597 D13.S6 Contents. — Foreword, by Merle Curti. — Grounds for a reconsideration of historiography, by C. A. Beard. — Controlling assumptions in the practice of American historians, by J. H. Randall, Jr., and George Haines, IV. — What historians have said about the causes of the Civil War, by H. K. Beale. Bibliography (p. 93-102). — Problems of termin- ology in historical writing: Note on the need for greater precision in the use of historical terms, by C. A. Beard. Illustrations, by Sidney Hook. — Propositions. — Selective reading list on historiog- raphy and the philosophy of history, by Ronald Thompson. 308 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES This report is the result of conferences and corre- spondence by a representative group of American historians seeking to arrive at agreement on the nature of their discipline as revealed by its relations with other fields in the social science area. The 21 "Propositions" (p. 133-140) were originally drafted by Charles A. Beard, but have been modified to meet the criticism of other historians; with the sup- porting essays they provide a recent example of co- operative and systematic thought on the part of the historical profession in the United States seeking to clarify its basic ideas and assumptions. 3066. U. S. National Archives. Guide to the rec- ords in the National Archives. Washington, U. S. Govt. Print. Off., 1948. xvi, 684 p. {Its Publication no. 49-13) A49-10088 CD3023.A46 1948 3067. U. S. National Archives. Your Govern- ment's records in the National Archives. [Rev. by Bess Glenn under the direction of Philip M. Hamer and G. Philip Bauer. Washington, U. S. Govt. Print. Off.] 1950. viii, 102 p. [Its Publica- tion no. 51-4] A51-9171 CD3023.A46 1950 The Federal Government has been accumulating records since 1774, but during its first 160 years these were scattered, inadequately described, and under varying conditions of access or nonaccess. The crea- tion of a unified National Archives, administering a coherent policy concerning the preservation and management of Federal records, was primarily the achievement of the American Historical Association and, more than any other individual, of John Frank- lin Jameson (no. 3045), but it required over a quarter-century of promotion before the first records were transferred to the new Archives building at the end of 1935. The present is the third general Guide to the records administered by the National Archives, its predecessors having been issued in 1937 (as part of the Archivist's Third Annual Report) and in 1940, but it is now seriously out of date. It describes over 813,000 cubic feet of records arranged by "Record Groups" in their numerical order; since this is, in general, the order of their acquisition by the Archives, it does not make for convenient use. Your Government's Records, of which a first and smaller edition appeared in 1946, seeks to "put the National Archives and its vast store of records in a nutshell," and is particularly useful in that it ar- ranges the record groups by branch and department. Records transferred to the Archives since June 30, 1947, are described in National Archives Accessions, a periodical supplement to the Guide which at first was a quarterly, but now appears at irregular inter- vals. 3068. U. S. National Historical Publications Com- mission. A national program for the publi- cation of historical documents; a report to the Presi- dent. Washington, 1954. 106 p. 54-60038 E175.4.A417 "A selective list of documentary historical publi- cations of the United States Government": p. 98-106. The publication of volume 1 of The Papers of Thomas Jefferson (no. 3292) on May 17, 1950, was marked by President Truman's announcement that he had instructed the National Historical Publica- tions Commission to report on the possibility of further enterprises of like thoroughness and scholar- ship. This document, prepared by the Executive Director of the Commission, Dr. Philip M. Hamer, presents the results of nearly four years of consulta- tion and planning, and reflects the tremendous stimulus given to documentary publications by Dr. Julian P. Boyd's example and President Truman's initiative. As a result of the Commission's recom- mendations, major editions of the complete papers of Franklin, J. and J. Q. Adams, Madison, and Hamilton have been handsomely endowed. The Commission's plans for its own documentary histo- ries of the ratification of the Constitution and the Bill of Rights, and of the First Congress of the United States (1789-91), are here set forth. 3069. Wade, Mason. Francis Parkman, heroic historian. New York, Viking Press, 1942. 466 p. 42-25856 E175.5.P28 "Bibliographical note": p. 453-456. Parkman's prose epic of the French Empire in North America is no. 3171 below; this biography emphasizes "the heroic virtues: courage, self-reliance, perseverance, austerity, modesty," which went into its making, as its author struggled against the physical breakdown brought on by overdriving him- self in his youth. Before his nervous and visual collapse in 1847, Parkman ( 1823-1893) had roughed it in the woods of New England and New York, toured Western Europe, and made two journeys into the American West, the second of which in- cluded his famous sojourn in a Sioux village (no. 3348). Mr. Wade quotes extensively from Park- man's own travel records here, and has presented them at length in his edition of The Journals of Francis Par\man (New York, Harper, 1947. 2 v. (xxv, 718 p.)). The remainder of the book tells how Parkman lost and regained the power to work, and then turned his handicaps into assets: having to digest his materials in his mind, he achieved a tighter organization of his narrative; and, employing his sleepless nights in mental composition, he arrived at a style at once economical, fluent, and muscular. GENERAL HISTORY / 309 B. General Works 3070. Aaron, Daniel, ed. America in crisis; four- teen crucial episodes in American history. New York, Knopf, 1952. 363 p. 51-13214 E178.6.A17 Probably 14 other episodes equally "crucial" could be selected, but these were the examples chosen at Bennington College in 1949-50 "for an experimental course designed to bring out the role and operation of values in American history." Each is a concise but serious attempt at interpretation of a striking event, from the Great Awakening of the 1740's to the Nazi-Soviet Pact of 1939, by an authority in the field. 3071. Adams, James Truslow, ed. Dictionary of American history; James Truslow Adams, editor in chief; R. V. Coleman, managing editor. 2d ed. rev. New York, Scribner, 1942. 5 v. 44-1876 E174.A43 1942 Index. New York, Scribner, 1942. 258 p. E174.A43 1942 Index 3072. Morris, Richard B., ed. Encyclopedia of American history. New York, Harper, 1953. xv, 776 p. maps, diagrs. 53-5384 E174.5.M847 The Scribner Dictionary was begun in 1936 and first published in 1940; it bears the name of J. T. Adams, a historical popularizer of the interwar decades, but was largely the work of Roy V. Cole- man and his staff, as well as "more than a thousand historians" to whom the 6,000 articles were farmed out. After 17 years it remains an indispensable work of reference, and the easiest first approach to many or most topics in the history of the United States from the discoveries down to the eve of World War II. It has the advantage of ready reference conferred by the alphabetical arrangement of its articles, and the inconveniences of such an arrange- ment applied to a subject matter which orders itself according to geography and chronology. The arti- cles vary in length from four or five lines ("Assini- boine, Fort") to three or four pages ("Civil War"), and nearly all have from one to six references at the end. A number of serious errors remain uncorrected even in the second edition. The valuable Atlas supplementary to this Dictionary has been separately listed in Chapter VI (no. 2967). Professor Morris' Encyclopedia is not greatly less comprehensive, and is an object-lesson in the quantity of information that may be crammed within a single pair of covers by intelligent organization, condensation, and book design. Here the material is arranged into a basic chronological section — the mainstream of national history — and six topical chronologies covering Ex- pansion, Population and Immigration, the Constitu- tion, the Economy, Science and Invention, and Thought and Culture. Three hundred brief biog- raphies are alphabetically arranged, and there is a 40-page index with three columns to the page. 3073. Beard, Charles A., and Mary R. Beard. The rise of American civilization. New York, Macmillan, 1927. 2 v. 27-9541 E169.1.B32 These thick volumes by one of the best-known Americans and his accomplished wife, Mary Ritter Beard (b. 1876), are a conscious attempt to return to the history of civilization, albeit within a single nation, as it was understood by Voltaire in the 18th century and by Henry Thomas Buckle in the 19th. Ever since its publication The Rise of American Civilization has won the highest encomiums from professional historians and laymen alike; critics of the highest qualifications have used such phrases as "the high-water mark of modern historic presenta- tion in America," and "the most brilliant historical survey of the American scene." Certainly few read- able works have ever been so successful in incorpo- rating so much economic, social, and intellectual detail into a coherent general narrative. It remains true that the presentation is uncommonly fluid and formless, rendering the book relatively unserviceable for systematic students or classroom use. Written at a time when Dr. Beard had abandoned the ex- tremer tenets of his economic interpretation, it takes a moderate view of the movement eventuating in the Constitution, but it gives a strong economic color- ing to its account of the Civil War. Volume I is "The Agricultural Era" and Volume II "The In- dustrial Era," and the transition between them is effected by "The Second American Revolution" of 1861-65. This is viewed as the irrepressible conflict between two phases of society which overthrew the custodians of the old order, as the Southern planter aristocracy had constituted themselves, and effected a permanent shift of the center of political gravity in American society. The discussion of military matters is always jejune, :in which dis- cusses not only Franklin's activities in France, but more especially the French reaction to this sage from the American wilderness; for this purpose a large part of the book is devoted to presenting and discussing references to Franklin in contemporary French writings. 3188. Gipson, Lawrence Henry. The British Em- pire before the American Revolution: pro- vincial characteristics and sectional tendencies in the era preceding the American crisis. Caldwell, Idaho, Caxton Printers, 1936-56. 9 v. maps. 36-20870 DA500.G5 GENERAL HISTORY / 33 1 Volumes 4-9, issued without subtitle, have im- print: New York, A. A. Knopf. Contents. — 1. Great Britain and Ireland. — 2. The Southern plantations. — 3. The Northern plan- tations. — 4. Zones of international friction; North America, south of the Great Lakes region, 1748- 1754. — 5. Zones of international friction; the Great Lakes frontier, Canada, the West Indies, India, 1748-1754. — 6. The great war for the Empire: The years of defeat, 1754-1757. — 7. The great war for the Empire: The victorious years, 1758-1760. — 8. The great war for the Empire: The culmination, 1760-1763. — 9. The triumphant Empire: new re- sponsibilities within the enlarged Empire, 1763— 1766. Dr. Gipson (b. 1880) was a graduate of the Uni- versity of Idaho when a Rhodes scholarship took him to Oxford for 3 years; from 1924 to 1952 he was professor of history at Lehigh University (Bethlehem, Pa.). Soon after his establishment there he embarked upon his investigations on this subject, which have been continuously subsidized by that university and several foundations, and which have grown into the largest and most impos- ing American historical work written in our day by a single hand. The author's purpose has been to produce a large-scale study of the British Empire between the Peace of Aix la-Chapelle (1748) and the outbreak of the American Revolution, so as to provide a more adequate basis for the interpretation of the latter event than has hitherto been available. The first three volumes provide "a view of the old Empire in a state of tranquillity and equilibrium for the last time in its history." The next two con- centrate upon "the problems involved in the ex- panding frontiers of the Empire," which were brought about by neither the central nor the colonial governments, but "primarily as the result of the restless activity of individuals or groups, with or without legal warrant." Volumes 6-8 narrate the conclusive struggle with France, as well as the Euro- pean war into which it merged; this war is viewed as brought on by French aggression, taken up by the home government for the protection of vital colonial interests, and won by the energy and re- sources of Britain. The latest volume to appear offers "a detailed analysis of developments within the new acquisitions" of the Empire in the years immediately following the peace which brought them, and extends to the trans-Appalachian region, Nova Scotia, Canada, East and West Florida, four new West Indian islands, and Bengal. The work employs a thorough analysis of successive situations, proceeds at an unhurried pace, and is written in clear and straightforward prose. 3189. Graham, Gerald S. Empire of the North Atlantic; the maritime struggle for North America. Toronto, University of Toronto Press, 1950. xvii, 338 p. maps. 50-14296 E45.G7 A narrative of the rise and supremacy of British sea power, with particular reference to its role in making Britain the principal colonial power in North America. Introductory chapters oudine the long period of Spanish supremacy and the bases of French sea power, and sketch the rise of British sea power in the second half of the 17th century. The long duel between Britain and France, from the outbreak of the War of the League of Augsburg (1689) to the conquest of Canada (1760), is then narrated at some length, with a unity of treatment deriving from the author's emphasis upon the mari- time factors involved. There follow outlines of the War of the American Revolution and of the War of 1812, as well as of the troubled period be- tween them, useful as concise presentations from a British point of view. The author pursues the theme of British supremacy in the Atlantic into the age of iron and steam, when it was extended to all the oceans of the world, and then to its remarkably sudden disappearance as a consequence of the con- struction of the German High Seas Fleet in the first decade of the 20th century. The author, a Canadian who has become Rhodes Professor of Im- perial History at the University of London, has also published two more detailed studies of portions of his story: British Policy and Canada, IJJ4-1791; a Study in 18th Century Trade Policy (London, New York, Longmans, Green, 1930. 161 p. Imperial studies, no. 4), and Sea Power and British North America, 1783-1820; a study in British Colonial Policy (Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1941. 302 p. Harvard historical studies, v. 46). 3190. Greene, Evarts Boutell. The foundation of American nationality. Rev. ed. New York, American Book Co., 1935. xii, 614, xiii-xl p. illus. 35-19098 E178.G752 Published in 1922 as volume 1 of A Short History of the American People. In this book Greene purposes to give the layman and the college student a view "of our early devel- opment as it appears in the light of . . . recent re- search and discussion." This is because, as he notes, the recent work of men such as Andrews, Osgood, and Turner has "made necessary the modification or abandonment of time-honored traditions.'' The study recognizes American colonial history as part of a much larger picture, but the emphasis is on the development of the Thirteen Colonies; the story is carried to the adoption of the Federal Constitution in 1789. The bibliographies at the end ol each chap- ter are designed to assist the general reaJer to lur- 332 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES ther material, and are not intended to indicate scholarly sources. 3191. Greene, Evarts Boutell. Provincial America, 1690-1740. New York, Harper, 1905. 356 p. 7 maps. (The American Nation; a history, v. 6) 5-19070 E178.A54 "Critical essay on authorities": p. 325-340. The period covered by this book was one in which the English colonies were rapidly expanding, and for that reason first giving evidences of unity, as the gaps between them were lessened or elim- inated. At the same time it was a period in which the British colonial system was evolving, and in the process uncovering conflicts between the home gov- ernment and the colonies. This evolution of colo- nial administration, along with the impact of the wars with the French and their Indian allies, fills a large part of this book. The narrative, which limits itself to the Colonies later to become part of the United States, and devotes little attention to the European background events, also covers other aspects of colonial history, including the commerce and culture of the period. 3192. Greene, Evarts Boutell. The provincial governor in the English colonies of North America. New York, Longmans, Green, 1898. 292 p. (Harvard historical studies, v. 7) 98-1530 JK66.G8 Appendix C. "List of authorities cited": p. 271- Before 1688 British colonial administration was confused by a diversity of origins and franchises, by an unformed and shifting policy, and by a rudimen- tary development of organization. After 1763 the heightened tone of policy, and the contrary reaction which it provoked in the Colonies, produced a quite altered set of administrative circumstances. The long and relatively stable intervening period there- fore provides the best opportunity of "presenting a simple view of the normal working of the provin- cial constitution," and Professor Greene further provides for the homogeneity of his subject matter by excluding from consideration Connecticut and Rhode Island, where the survival of older charters preserved an elective governorship. Within these limits, this is a clear and well-rounded study of the more formal aspects of the office which was consid- erably the most important in royal and proprietary provinces alike: the governor commissioned and instructed by the British Crown. After two intro- ductory chapters which trace the complex anteced- ents of the stabilized system after the Glorious Revo- lution, the book proceeds analytically, considering in turn the governor's appointment, tenure, and emoluments, his council, his executive powers, and his relations with the provincial judiciary. Last and most important are his relations with his chief rival, the popularly elected assembly, to which complex situation three chapters are devoted. In the latter half of the period, it is concluded, the assemblies everywhere encroached upon his executive func- tions, and "in some of the provinces the governor's power had been reduced within very narrow limits." A final chapter deals with the governor's legal and political accountability both to the home govern- ment and to the people of his province. 3193. Harper, Lawrence A. The English naviga- tion laws; a seventeenth-century experiment in social engineering. New York, Columbia Uni- versity Press, 1939. xiv, 503 p. 40-244 HE587.G7H3 "Table of statutes cited": p. [449]~46o. Bibliography: p. [417P447. _ In this study of what Americans usually call the Acts of Trade, the author states that his chief pur- pose "is to analyze the process of social engineering, as exemplified by the Navigation Acts." His study concentrates on the second half of the 17th century. The first part of the book deals with the origin of the laws, the second with their enforcement in Eng- land, and the third with their enforcement in the Colonies. The fourth part is a study of the results of the acts; for this purpose the time covered has been pushed both forward and backward so as to extend from the days of the Spanish Armada to the Victorian period. Since the acts were English in origin, designed to build up the English merchant marine and further mercantilist ideas of national prosperity, the subject has been approached from an English point of view. The author has treated the specifically American consequences of these acts in an essay, "The Effect of the Navigation Acts on the Thirteen Colonies," contributed to The Era of the American Revolution: Studies Inscribed to Evarts Boutell Greene, edited by Richard B. Morris (New York, Columbia University Press, 1939), p. 3-39- 3194. Keys, Alice Mapelsden. Cadwallader Col- den; a representative eighteenth century of- ficial. New York, Columbia University Press, 1906. xiv, 375 p. 6-40257 F122.C69 Colden (1688-1776) was of Scotch ancestry and came to America as a physician in 1710. In 1720 he embarked on his long career of public service when appointed surveyor-general of New York. The fol- lowing year he was appointed to the governor's council, and he still held that position when in 1761 he became lieutenant governor, an office he held until his death, although its powers had largely dis- appeared with the outbreak of the Revolution. His GENERAL HISTORY / 333 long support of the royal authority, and his exten- sive activities in other fields, have enabled his biog- rapher to write not merely his life, but also a political and social history of the province of New York in his time. His activities as a progressive scientist, especially in physics, botany, and medicine, as a philosopher, and as a historian of the Iroquois In- dians, are reflected here, as they are on a larger scale in Colden's Letters and Papers, iju-fiyj^] (New York, Printed for the New York Historical Society, 1918-37. 9 v.). 3195. Labaree, Leonard Woods. Royal govern- ment in America; a study of the British colonial system before 1783. New Haven, Yale University Press, 1930. 491 p. (Yale historical publications. Studies, 6) 30-25475 JK54.L3 "Bibliographical notes": p. [449]~468. This book undertakes to depict the system of royal government as a whole in the American Col- onies prior to the end of the Revolution. On the ground that before 1675 the details of the political system "were so varied and the attitude of the Eng- lish officials toward them so unsettled that the early years contribute little to the later story," the author begins his study with the situation in the last quarter of the 17th century. In his preface he says that he has "tried to explain what the instruments were by which royal authority was exercised in America, what the machinery of royal government was and how it operated, what the governmental policies of the British officials were and what influences caused them to be adopted, and how the colonists reacted to these policies when the royal governors tried to apply them. Above all, I have concerned myself with that great contest between the assemblies and the crown over the royal prerogative, which is the central theme of the constitutional history of the colonies." Professor Labaree has collected the most important class of source materials for his study in his edition of Royal Instructions to British Colonial Governors, 1670-1776 (New York, Appleton-Cen- tury, 1935. 2 v.). He is also the author of Con- servatism in Early American History (New York, New York University Press, 1948. 182 p.), a scries of lectures in which he traces the bases and influence of conservatism in the later colonial period. 3196. Miller, Perry. Roger Williams: his contri- bution to the American tradition. Indian- apolis, Bobbs-Mcrrill, 1953. 273 p. (Makers of the American tradition series) 53-8874 F82.W788 3197. Winslow, Ola Elizabeth. Master Roger Williams, a biography. New York, Mac- millan, 1957. 328 p. 57-10016 F82.W692 Includes bibliography. Williams (ca. 1603-1683), the vigorous opponent of the Massachusetts theocracy and the founder of Rhode Island, is discussed as a writer in Chapter I on Literature (nos. 84-89). Professor Miller's vol- ume is in part a selection from the writings there listed, with useful editorial notes (p. 261-266), and in part a discriminating attempt to relate his thought both to the theological controversies of the 17th century and to the subsequent tradition of American liberalism, which has hailed him as a forerunner, at times with more enthusiasm than understanding. Miss Winslow's study of Williams is the most re- cent full-length scholarly biography of him; in it the author attempts to balance out the early "harsh" judgments and more modern tendencies to make of the man a glorious myth. She remarks that our relative ignorance of Williams combined with the complexities of his personality guarantee that future biographies will vary in the interpretation. Another recent biography of note is Samuel Hugh Brocku- nier's The Irrepressible Democrat, Roger Williams (New York, Ronald Press, 1940. 305 p.), in which Williams is viewed as a great man, although some earlier assumptions are called into question; Miller views this work as a "sad example of the misrepre- sentation that comes when Williams is presented too easily in the language of twentieth-century thought." A somewhat less critical and more favor- able study, which has the same "twentieth-century thought" aspect as Brockunier, is James E. Ernst's Roger Williams, New England Firebrand (New York, Macmillan, 1932. 538 p.); while highly par- tial to his subject, the author does take some account of the traditional controversy. 3198. Morison, Samuel Eliot. Builders of the Bay Colony. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1930. xiv, 365 p. A30-1055 NN Bibliography: p. [347]~355- The copies in the Library of Congress arc of a limited edition on finer paper, bearing the tide Massachusettensis de conditoribus (F67.M86). A series of biographical sketches of individuals representing the various aspects of life in the col- ony — "adventurous and artistic, political and eco- nomic, literary and scientific, legal, educational, and evangelical." The first four individuals dis- cussed — Richard Haklmt, Captain John Smith. Thomas Morton, and John White — prepared the way for the settlers of 1650. The others include John Winthrop, Thomas Shepard, John I lull, 1 Icnrv Dunster, Nathaniel Ward, Robert Child, John Win throp, Jr., John Eliot, and Anne Bradstreet This book is distinguished not only .is an outstanding ex ample of literary historical writing, but also .is one of the few books conveying the nature, significance, 334 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES and purpose of the Puritans with understanding and respect, thus enabling the modern reader better to appreciate and understand this group from which most Americans feel alienated, and towards which many feel hostile. The well-chosen illustrations on 45 plates add considerably to the merit of the book. 3199. Murdock, Kenneth Ballard. Increase Mather, the foremost American Puritan. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1925. xv, 442 p. illus. 25-21276 F67.M477 "Appendix C. List of books referred to": p. [407]~4i5. "Appendix D. Checklist of Mather's writings": p. [4i6]~422. Increase Mather (1 639-1 723) was born in Dorchester, Mass., where his father was a leading and strict Puritan minister. In time the son him- self became the foremost New England Puritan of his generation. In 1664 he became teacher at the Boston Second Church. Sometime later he became president of Harvard College, a position he held for nearly two decades. In 1688 he represented Massa- chusetts in England; his relative success, however, came when William III displaced James II toward the end of 1688. Mather obtained a new charter for Massachusetts, and at the same time the unusual political privilege of being allowed to nominate the new officers for its government. He returned to Massachusetts, where he defended his diplomatic and political activities, but as before gave his main attention to the church. In the course of his career he also established himself not only as the most prolific author of his generation (political tracts, histories, sermons, etc.), but also one of the best in more strictly literary terms. Professor Murdock 's biography of Mather shows him to have been an intelligent and unusually liberal person for his age. The book also attempts to depict that age to some extent; for Mather was not only involved in most of the public affairs of his day, but was also in many ways representative of his society; the book is thus as much general history as it is biography. An earlier life of Increase Mather was that by his famous son, Cotton Mather (q. v.): Parentator (Boston, B. Green for N. Belknap, 1724. 239 p.), an outstand- ing example of colonial biography. Increase Math- er's own autobiography has not yet appeared in book form. 3200. Nissenson, Samuel G. The patroon's do- main. New York, Columbia University Press, 1937. 416 p. (New York State Historical Association series; D. R. Fox, editor; no. 5) 37-20744 F122.1.N58 Bibliography: p. [3891-397. According to the preface, "This attempt to de- scribe the origin, the economic background and the political development and disintegration of the 'patroon system' as embodied in Rensselaerswyck, its one exemplar in New York, while complete within itself, serves also as an introduction to the history of the town and county institutions which for a time paralleled and ultimately supplanted the patroon's administrative organization." The book opens with a brief account of the founding and de- velopment of the Dutch West Indies Company, and its early commercial attitude towards New Nether- land, later New York. There follows a history of the development during the 17th century of Rensselaerswyck, the large manorial grant on both sides of the Hudson River just south of Albany, and the patroonship's relationship to the home country and the company, as well as, in the later stages, to the new English system of laws, as the English took over. In large part the work is thus a special study of the 17th-century development in New York of laws affecting land tenure. 3201. Original narratives of early American his- tory, reproduced under the auspices of the American Historical Association; general editor: Jfohn] Franklin Jameson. New York, Scribner, 1906-17. 19 v. 7-6642 E187.O7 (A-Z) Dr. Jameson, the editor of this series, states in a "General Preface to the Original Narratives of Early American History," which appears only in The Northmen, Columbus and Cabot, 985-1503 (no. 3215), that the plan of the series was approved by the American Historical Association at its annual meeting of December 1902, and that its purpose was to provide "a comprehensive and well-rounded col- lection of those classical narratives on which the early history of the United States is founded, or of those narratives which, if not precisely classical, hold the most important place as sources of American history anterior to 1700." Many of these, he noted, had become so scarce and expensive that no ordinary library could hope to possess a complete set. The series was to publish not extracts, but whole works or distinct parts of works. Works in English were to be reprinted from the earliest or best editions, and works in foreign languages from the best trans- lations available, or in new translations if no satis- factory ones were obtainable. A few works were to be published from manuscript for the first time. The special editors were to supply introductions concerning the author and the value of his work as a source, as well as brief notes enabling the reader "to understand and estimate rightly the statements of the text." Each volume is supplied with fac- similes of title pages and of maps contemporary with the narratives and serving to illustrate them. "No subsequent sources," said Dr. Jameson, "can have quite the intellectual interest, none quite the senti- GENERAL HISTORY / 335 mental value, which attaches to these early narra- tions, springing direct from the brains and hearts of the nation's founders." The series has proved quite as useful as its distinguished planner hoped, and most of its volumes are currently available in reprint editions from Barnes and Noble, New York. 3202. Andrews, Charles McLean. Narratives of the insurrections, 1675-1690. 1915. 414 p. 15-4852 E187.A563 E187.O7A6 3203. Bolton, Herbert E., ed. Spanish exploration in the Southwest, 1542-1706. 1916. 487 p. 16-6066 F799.B69 3204. Bradford, William. History of Plymouth Plantation, 1606-1646; edited by William T. Davis. 1908. xv, 437 p. 8-7375 F68.B802 E187.O7B7 See entry nos. 1-6. 3205. Burr, George Lincoln, ed. Narratives of the witchcraft cases, 1648-1706. 1914. xviii, 467 p. M-9773 BF1573.A2B8 See entry no. 41. 3206. Burrage, Henry S., ed. Early English and French voyages, chiefly from Hakluyt, 1534— 1608. 1906. xxii, 451 p. 6-44365 E127.B96 3207. Champlain, Samuel de. Voyages, 1604- 1618; edited by W[illiam] L. Grant. 1907. 377 p. 7-22899 F1030.1.C494 See entry no. 3156. 3208. Danckaerts, Jasper. Journal, 1679-1680; edited by Bardett Burleigh James and J[ohn] Frank Jameson. 1913. xxxi, 3 13 p. 13-13556 E162.D18 E187.O7D3 "The present translation is substantially that of Mr. Henry C. Murphy, as presented in his edition of 1867," under title: Journal of a Voyage to New Yorl{ and a Tour in Several of the American Col- onies in i6yor-8o, by Jasper Dankers and Peter Sluy- tcr. 3209. Hall, Clayton Colman, ed. Narratives of early Maryland, 1633— 1684. 1910. 460 p. 10-23763 F184.H19 3210. Jameson, John Franklin, ed. Narratives of New Ncderland, 1609-1664. 1909. 478 p. 9-24463 F122.1.J31 E187.O7J3 321 1. Johnson, Edward. Wonder-working provi- dence, 1628-1651; edited by J[ohn] Frank- lin Jameson. 1910. 285 p. 10-9809 F67J675 3212. Kellogg, Louise Phelps, ed. Early narratives of the Northwest, 1634-1699. 1917. xiv, 382 p. 17-6235 F482.K29 3213. Lincoln, Charles H., ed. Narratives of the Indian wars, 1675-1699. 1913. 316 p. 13-24819 E82.L73 E187.O7L5 3214. Myers, Albert Cook, ed. Narratives of early Pennsylvania, West New Jersey and Dela- ware, 1630- 1707. 1912. xiv, 476 p. 12-461 1 F106.M98 3215. The Northmen, Columbus and Cabot, 985— 1503: The voyages of the Northmen, ed- ited by Julius E. Olson. The voyages of Columbus and of John Cabot, edited by Edward Gaylord Bourne. 1906. xv, 443 p. 6-36882 E101.N87 3216. Salley, Alexander S., ed. Narratives of early Carolina, 1650-1708. 191 1. 388 p. 11-9548 F272.S16 E187.O7S3 3217. Spanish explorers in the Southern United States, 1528-1543: The narrative of Alvar Nunez Cabega de Vaca, edited by Frederick W. Hodge. The narrative of the expedition of Her- nando de Soto by the gentleman of Elvas, edited by Theodore H. Lewis. The narrative of the expedi- tion of Coronado, by Pedro de Castaneda, edited by Frederick W. Hodge. 1907. xx, 411 p. 7-10607 E123.S75 E187.O7S7 3218. Tyler, Lyon Gardiner, ed. Narratives of early Virginia, 1606-1625. 1907. xv, 478 p. 7-33220 F229.T994 3219. Winthrop, John. Journal, "History of New England," 1630-1649; edited by James Ken- dall Hosmcr. 1908. 2 v. 8-17771 F67.W785 See entry nos. 90-91. 3220. Osgood, Herbert L. The American Col- onies in the seventeenth century. New York, Columbia University press, 1930. 3 v. 30-26656 E191.O83 3221. Osgood, Herbert L. The American Col- onics in the eighteenth century. New York, Columbia University Press, 1924. 4 v. 24-3889 E195O82 33^ / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES The American Colonies in the Seventeenth Cen- tury, which first appeared during 1904, is a study of the political and administrative aspects of the devel- opment of the English continental colonies in the 17th century; it is thus also in part a study of the development of political institutions in this area. Social and economic aspects of colonial life are not discussed, except in so far as they play a role in the more political aspects of colonial history. The first two volumes of the work discuss the situation in the chartered and proprietary Colonies; the third volume studies the situation in the royal Colonies, in which category the British Government soon tried to place all the Colonies, in order more efficiently to administer them for what was considered the gen- eral welfare of the homeland. Because of the ex- tent and thoroughness of Osgood's pioneering study, his work remains an authoritative exposition of the early development of American political institutions. The American Colonies in the Eighteenth Century is a continuation left by Professor Osgood ( 1855— 1918) of Columbia University in a state somewhat short of completion at his death. It was readied for and seen through the press by his pupil, Dixon Ryan Fox, who also produced a short biography: Herbert Levi Osgood, an American Scholar (New York, Columbia University Press, 1924. 167 p.). Taking up where the earlier work left off, in 1690, these four volumes continue the political and institu- tional aspects of colonial history through the British conquest of Canada. Much attention is given to the four "Intercolonial Wars," as Osgood preferred to call them in lieu of their traditional names, and the longer administrations of individual governors in the larger provinces are given individual treat- ment. The creation of British agencies of colonial administration, and the origin and development of specific British policies are separately described. The position of the Church of England in the Col- onies, and the effects of immigration and the tend- ency to westward expansion are considered. The political narrative conveys the impression that what- ever the type of colonial government, colonial griev- ances and disaffection continued to increase in the face of British policy and administration. 3222. Peare, Catherine O. William Penn; a biog- raphy. Philadelphia, Lippincott, 1957. 448 p. 56-10810 F152.2.P34 Bibliography: p. 427-444. The most important event in the life of William Penn (1644-1718), without which he would prob- ably have had small historical importance, took place at Cork, Ireland, on a summer's day in 1666, when he was reduced to tears, and converted to the doctrine of God as the Inner Light, by the testimony of the Quaker Thomas Loe. Miss Peare's biography is uncommonly penetrating in that it gives Penn's Quakerism its proper place at the center of his life, his character, and his influence upon the life of his day, and so upon all succeeding times. It is based upon prolonged research in the manuscript collec- tions of the Historical Society of Pennsylvania and, secondarily, of Friends House, London, and al- though footnotes are dispensed with, documenta- tion is provided by a series of page references at the end (p. 415-426). The founding of Pennsylvania is placed against its contemporary English back- ground of the Tory and High Anglican reaction that took hold in 1681, and led Penn to see no real solution for the Friends save an American refuge. "As Proprietor of Pennsylvania Penn had received almost absolute power from his monarch"; his greatness was evidenced by his immediate renuncia- tion of this power for himself and his successors, "that the will of one man may not hinder the good of an whole country." On the other hand, William I. Hull's William Penn, a Topical Biography (Lon- don, New York, Oxford University Press, 1937. 362 p.) emphasizes the peripheral many-sidedness of Penn's career, concerning which it assembles much out-of-the-way information. William Wistar Comfort's William Penn, 1644-1718, a Tercenten- ary Estimate (Philadelphia, University of Pennsyl- vania Press, 1944. 185 p.) is a widely esteemed interpretative sketch which views Penn's career as an attempt to implement Quaker ideals. 3223. Quinn, David B. Raleigh and the British Empire. New York, Macmillan, 1949. 284 p. (Teach yourself history library) 49-10375 DA86.22.R2Q5 1949 A clear outline of English dealings with the New World in the later years of Elizabeth I and the first decade of James I, organized around the colorful if not wholly admirable personality of Sir Walter Raleigh (ca. 1552-1618), whom the author is care- ful not to overrate. However, Raleigh "advanced from the concept of a military settlement of hired men to the view that only a real community of men, women and children, having personal incentives to setde and prosper, could hope to succeed." This success, denied to Raleigh under Elizabeth, was made possible under James by "the slow quantitative development of English capitalism," permitting effort on a larger scale. Professor Quinn has also edited two extremely valuable documentary col- lections, one concerning Raleigh's half-brother and predecessor: The Voyages and Colonising Enter- prises of Sir Humphrey Gilbert (London, Hakluyt Society, 1940. 2 v.) and the other concerning Raleigh's setdements in North Carolina:. The Roanokje Voyages, 1584-1590; Documents to Illus- trate the English Voyages to North America under GENERAL HISTORY / 337 the Patent Granted to Walter Raleigh in 1584 (Lon- don, Hakluyt Society, 1955. 2 v.). 3224. Raesly, Ellis Lawrence. Portrait of New Netherland. New York, Columbia Uni- versity Press, 1945. 370 p. (Columbia University studies in English and comparative literature, no. 161) A 45-1615 F122.1.R15 Bibliography: p. J345H54. This Columbia dissertation is an attempt to pre- sent the "pattern and philosophy of life" of the Dutch colonists of New Netherland. The author studies such matters as the church in the New World, the political and social views of the colonists, the cultural interchanges between the Dutch and the Indians, and the early literary efforts of the Dutch in New Netherland. In the course of this he presents considerable information on the general history of the colony, and especially governmental affairs in so far as they affected the colony's cultural life. 3225. Root, Winfred Trexler. The relations of Pennsylvania with the British Government, 1696-1765. [Philadelphia] University of Pennsyl- vania, 1912. 422 p. ( [Publications of the University of Pennsylvania. History]) 12-5677 F152.R78 "Bibliographical notes": p. 397-407. In origin a University of Pennsylvania disserta- tion, this work studies in some detail the relations between the chartered and proprietary province of Pennsylvania and the British agencies of colonial administration, from the reorganization of the latter in 1696 to the second reorganization which followed the French and Indian War. While the author aims to throw light upon colonial administration in general, he is aware that the special circumstances of Pennsylvania differentiated it from other provinces: its establishment under Quaker auspices led in the earlier years of the period to much friction with Anglicans in the province and at home over the judicial oath and other issues, and in the later years to a succession of crises over provincial and imperial defense, to which the pacifist Quakers contributed litde and that with reluctance. Furthermore, the Penns and their governors had none of the dignities of a king, and so fared worse in their struggle with the provincial assembly than did the royal governors elsewhere, so that by 1765 "within its sphere the legislature was scarcely less powerful than the British Parliament." But in its chapters on the administra- tion of the acts of trade, the court of vice-admiralty, and the royal disallowance, this study exhibits in concrete example the same sort of situation that obtained in the colonies generally. While British control of the colonies in this age was not harsh or 18 1240— 60 23 oppressive, Dr. Root concludes, the central fact of the imperial relation was the conflict of interest be- tween a theory of empire primarily economic, and colonial views of religious and political separatism, individualism, and liberty. 3226. Rutledge, Joseph L. Century of conflict; the struggle between the French and British in colonial America. Garden City, N. Y., Double- day, 1956. 530 p. maps. (Canadian history series, v. 2) 56-954 1 F1030.R93 Mr. Rutledge, a Canadian magazine writer and editor, here presents the story of the French and English conflict for North America. The story, which tends to focus on personalities, opens with Governor Frontenac's arrival in Quebec in 1672, and closes with the English victories at Quebec and Montreal some 90 years later, establishing English dominance on the continent. While events through- out North America are considered, the author's main interest is in the activities in and about Can- ada. The history itself, which covers much the same ground as Parkman (q. v.), but with details from more recent studies, is "an attempt to make charac- ters and events move out of the stiff formalities of history, to find flesh and blood and a sense of imme- diacy in the crowding events." 3227. Sachse, William L. The colonial American in Britain. Madison, University of Wiscon- sin Press, 1956. 290 p. 56-5887 DA125.A6S3 Dealing with persons who had setded in or been born in the thirteen mainland Colonies, and who later went to England prior to 1776, Sachse here attempts to study their motives for going to England and their activities and attitudes once there. Many went on business, a large proportion went to study, some retired to England after a successful career, a fair number returned because on economic or legal missions, official or semiofficial, and some held "diplomatic" positions in England. Almost none traveled to England purely for pleasure, since the trip was so strenuous and expensive. Nevertheless, there was a strong drive to visit the homeland, and business reasons were often found. Most of the Americans visiting England came from the more populous and prosperous Colonies, such as Virginia, Massachusetts, South Carolina, and Maryland. Mr. Sachse pays some attention to English influences on the visitors, and their influences on England, but that difficult topic is not his main concern. The material for the study is in large part gleaned from diaries, journals, and letters, many still in manu- script. The work reflects much of colonial life and standards, while focusing on an important aspect of them. 338 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 3228. Starkey, Marion L. The Devil in Massa- chusetts, a modern inquiry into the Salem witch trials. New York, Knopf, 1949. xviii, 310, vii p. 49-10395 BF1576.S8 1949 "Selected bibliography": p. 301-310. The Salem witch trials have already been men- tioned under Burr's Narratives of the Witchcraft Cases (no. 3205), and they are also dealt with in several works appearing in the Literature section of this bibliography. Miss Starkey 's account of the mass hysteria of 1692 in Salem is deliberately de- signed to have overtones for a later age. However, it is basically a straightforward and lively narrative of the trials and the events surrounding them, as well as some of the events that followed from them in later years. The work may also be considered a psychological study, for the author attempts to understand the mental functionings of those in- volved, and through psychology does make some of their strange behavior more comprehensible to a latter-day audience. 3229. Tolles, Frederick B. James Logan and the culture of provincial America. Boston, Litde, Brown, 1957. 228 p. (The Library of American biography) 57—6439 F152.L85 Logan (1674-1751) was of Scottish descent, though born in Ireland. His father had been con- verted to Quakerism in 1671, and the family under- went numerous difficulties because of their religion. In 1699 James Logan became secretary to William Penn, and the same year sailed with him to Penn- sylvania. There he rose rapidly in political service, and for the rest of his life was a major factor in provincial affairs. He came as a scholar, and main- tained wide interests throughout his life; he was also one of the leading American scientists of the period. However, he was best known as a leading spokesman for the conservative proprietary interest. In addition, he was for many years the leading peacemaker between the Whites and the Indians in the middle Colonies. Tolles' study traces this career in its many aspects of scholar, trader, diplomat, statesman, etc., and at the same time relates it to colonial life and government. 3230. Wallace, Paul A. W. Conrad Weiser, 1696- 1760, friend of colonist and Mohawk. Phil- adelphia, University of Pennsylvania Press, 1945. xiv, 648 p. illus. ' 45-8858 F152.W4286 At the age of 13 Conrad Weiser was brought by his father from Wurttemberg in Germany to the New York frontier, and four years later he spent the winter with a Mohawk chief, acquiring the foundation of his unrivaled knowledge of Indian languages and customs. After 10 years spent on his own farm in an Indian village, he transferred in 1729 to the Pennsylvania frontier, where his Iro- quois connections gave him an exceptional influ- ence in the Indian affairs of the province and made him, for two decades, the principal mediator be- tween red man and white in the region. He is usually credited with the largest part in keeping the Iroquois Confederacy faithful to the English alli- ance. He shortly became a leading figure among the Pennsylvania Germans, furthering their efforts to retain their own culture by means of a German- language press. He also took a prominent part in German religious developments, deserting the Lu- theran Church in which he was born for various Pietist departures, but ultimately returning to the Lutheran fold. During his last two decades he held a succession of appointments as magistrate and military officer under the provincial government, being almost the only German to do so. Mr. Wal- lace narrates his unique career in great detail, basing himself upon such primary sources as Weiser's own journals, in which many of his expeditions into the wilderness are recorded. Arthur D. Graeff's Con- rad Weiser, Pennsylvania Peacemaker, published in 1945 as volume 8 of the publications of the Pennsylvania German Folklore Society, is on a somewhat smaller scale (406 p.), but equally based on original research. 3231. Wallace, Paul A. W. The Muhlenbergs of Pennsylvania. Philadelphia, University of Pennsylvania Press, 1950. 358 p. illus. 50-5892 CS71.M95 1950 This book is a study of Henry Melchior Muhlen- berg (1711-1787) and his three sons. The father came to America in 1742 as a Lutheran teacher and minister. The Lutheran religion continued to play a prominent role in the family history, as Muhlen- berg, by regularizing lax procedures and developing a synodal organization, established an American center for the church. The father quickly estab- lished himself in America, and before long was head of one of the leading colonial families. In this respect, the book reflects not only life in Pennsyl- vania at that time, but the process of rapid Amer- icanization, and even much of what lay behind the Revolutionary War. In that war one of the sons, Peter, left the pulpit to become a major general. Another son, Frederick Augustus, had a distin- guished political career, and was the first speaker of the U. S. House of Representatives. The third brother, Henry, devoted himself to religion, but was also famous as president of Franklin (later Franklin and Marshall) College and as one of the leading botanists of the day. Thus the Muhlenbergs played a major part in the transition of America from colo- nialism to independence. GENERAL HISTORY / 339 3232. Wertenbaker, Thomas Jefferson. The founding of American civilization; the mid- dle Colonies. New York, Scribner, 1938. 367 p. illus. 38-27360 E169.1.W37 This history of the middle Colonies (New York, New Jersey, and Pennsylvania) preceded the author's volumes on the South and on Massachu- setts, and had a considerably less worked-over sub- ject matter. Here he describes the early settlements and their development. Much attention is devoted to architecture, while political matters are relatively slighted. Religious concerns, such as the affairs of Puritans in New Jersey and Quakers in Pennsyl- vania, are considered in so far as they influenced the establishment and development of communities. In this area diversity of language also played a prom- inent role and is well studied. The net effect is a close picturing of the everyday life in the middle Colonies, without much of the "grand stage" acting usually found in histories more concerned with political and military matters. 3233. Wertenbaker, Thomas Jefferson. The Old South; the founding of American civiliza- tion. New York, Scribner, 1942. xiv, 364 p. illus. 42-12383 F212.W5 This volume is a "study of Maryland, Virginia, North Carolina and South Carolina, for the most part during the colonial and early national periods," with the major emphasis on Virginia and Mary- land. Topics such as "political history, church his- tory, the plantation system, [and] slavery" have been neglected because of previous extensive studies of them. The book concentrates on the evolution of Southern society and the factors which went into its formation. To a large extent this is studied through the architecture of the period, "because it serves so admirably to illustrate the forces which created our civilization." Attention is also given to agricultural developments and to the tools and prod- ucts of various classes of artisans. 3234. Wertenbaker, Thomas Jefferson. The plant- ers of colonial Virginia. Princeton, Prince- ton University Press, 1922. 260 p. . 2 3-354 2 F229.W493 This history of colonial Virginia studies its eco- nomic foundations in such matters as the spread of population in relation to the cultivation of to- bacco and transportation problems. Considerable attention is devoted to land grants, indentured servants, and the effects of slavery on types of to- bacco grown, farming methods used, and the Eng- lish home market. Extensive statistics are cited, and quit-rent rolls for the counties of Virginia in 1704-5 (p. 183-247) are printed in full. Thus the author impressively interprets Virginia as a to- bacco colony, whose development was first geared to the production of tobacco by white farmers; how- ever, with the relatively late establishment of slavery in the colony, production shifted to low-grade to- bacco mass-produced, the small farmer could no longer compete, and even the indentured servant became unprofitable to his master. In this way came about the splitting of Virginia society into an aristocracy and its slaves, the intermediate groups having fled the colony. Two earlier works of Dr. Wertenbaker, Patrician and Plebeian in Virginia, originally published in 1910, and Virginia under the Stuarts, 1607-1688, originally published in 1914, have recently been reprinted, along with this one, under the general title, The Shaping of Colonial Virginia (New York, Russell & Russell, 1958. 239, 260, 271 p.). 3235. Wertenbaker, Thomas Jefferson. The Puri- tan oligarchy; the founding of American civilization. New York, Scribner, 1947. 359 p. illus. 47-30879 F67.W4 This is a study of Massachusetts under Puritan government. Professor Wertenbaker refers to this regime as an oligarchy "since from its inception it was the government of the many by the few, a government by the comparatively small body of Church members." After reviewing the forces and events leading to the migration of the Puritans to Massachusetts, the author goes on to consider de- tails of the establishment of the new governing communities. Matters such as the English manor prototypes for New England town designs are dis- cussed, followed by a consideration of the new fac- tors which inevitably transformed these prototypes in their practical application. While considerable attention is given to the activities of the clergy, the author also devotes space to such matters as archi- tecture and literature. He closes with a discussion of the decline of Puritan power, which he sees as starting after the witchcraft trials, when the clergy had so disastrously lost their battle against rationalism. 3236. Wright, Louis B. The cultural life of the American Colonies, 1607-1763. New York, Harper, 1957. xiv, 292 p. illus. (The New American Nation series) 56-11090 E162.W89 Bibliography: p. 253-274. In carrying out his aim "to provide a brief in- sight into the cultural developments of the thirteen British colonies which later became the United States," the author derives these developments from two main areas of colonial society: the agrarian aristocracies of Virginia, Maryland, South Caro- lina, and New York; and the aristocracy of trade which emerged in New England, New York City, 340 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES and Philadelphia, and which owed its position to a widespread acceptance of "the gospel of work." The several elements of culture are topically and separately handled, from religion and education to science and the press, a treatment which has the disadvantage of blurring the considerable distinc- tions between the conditions of the 17th century and those of the 18th. The volume makes skillful use of the now huge body of monographic literature, much of it confined to the development of a single element in a single colony, and itemizes this in the considerable bibliography. E. The American Revolution 3237. Abernethy, Thomas Perkins. Western lands and the American Revolution. New York, Appleton-Century for the Institute for Research in the Social Sciences, University of Virginia, 1937. xv, 413 p. maps. ([The University of Virginia Institute for Research in the Social Sciences. In- stitute monograph no. 25]) 37-20445 E210.A15 Bibliography: p. 370-392. A narrative account of the development of the trans-Appalachian West from the mid- 1 8th century to the end of the Confederation period. The causal relationship of the Western land question to the American Revolution is held by the author to be not specific. The colonists' renunciation of British rule was the occasion of a rush to the West; while there is some discussion of the various land com- panies involved in the trans-Appalachian "land grab," this narrative is primarily concerned with the political consequences of the westward movement and with the policies of the Colonies, the Continental Congress, the several states, and the British Govern- ment which affected the acquisition of land in the West. Much of the discussion is devoted to the con- flict of interests between the Virginians, with whom the author's sympathies appear to lie, and the North- ern promoters, chiefly Franklin, Joseph Galloway, and other Pennsylvanians. 3238. Alden, John R. The American Revolution, 1 775- 1 783. New York, Harper, 1954. 294 p. (The New American Nation series) 53-11826 E208.A35 Includes bibliography. Though not entirely neglected, the description of the colonial home front is somewhat compressed, while the narrative of maneuver and battle, taking up more than half of the book, is set forth concisely and clearly. In addition to the military aspects of the Revolution, the British and European situations are more fully discussed than is customary in books on this scale. It is contended that British blunder- ing in the years following 1763 brought on the revolt of the American Colonies, a revolt the colonials could probably have sustained alone, but which was hastened to a successful conclusion by European money and munitions, and finally by the avowed entrance of France and of Spain into the struggle. It is suggested that Trenton marked a turning point more significant than the British capitulation at Saratoga, or Howe's failure to crush the rebellion in Pennsylvania. The American Revolution, the author concludes, "inspired and continues to in- spire colonials of all colors to seek freedom from European domination." 3239. Bakeless, John E. Background to glory; the life of George Rogers Clark. Phila- delphia, Lippincott, 1957. 386 p. 56-11684 E207.C5B15 George Rogers Clark (1752-1818) was an heroic but tragic figure, who won the Old Northwest for the United States during the Revolution but died an embittered alcoholic, physically and mentally broken. In 1772 he made his first journey down the Ohio to the land which he later conquered with a few picked frontiersmen. His campaign, made in difficult terrain against heavy odds in favor of the British and their Indian allies, relied upon tactics of surprise. Clark held this territory for the United States for the duration of the War, but neither he nor his men received pay or supplies from the Con- tinental Congress or from Virginia; his personal fortune and those of several other devoted patriots were expended in the effort, and Clark was saddled with a mass of debts which Virginia refused to assume. More or less desperate, after the Revolu- tion he accepted a French commission to attack the Spanish territories west of the Mississippi, but nothing came of this plan. His subsequent attempts to obtain compensation or even relief were all futile, and Clark's personality deteriorated rapidly after 1805. James Alton James' edition of the George Rogers Clar\ Papers, IJJI-IJ84 in the Virginia State Library (Springfield, Illinois State Historical Library, 1912-26. 2 v. Collections of the Illinois State Historical Library, v. 8, 19. Virginia series, v. 3-4) provides the basic documentation for Mr. Bakeless' biography as well as for his own Life of GENERAL HISTORY / 341 George Rogers Clar\ (Chicago, University of Chi- cago Press, 1928. 534 p.), a somewhat impersonal narrative which emphasizes the background of in- ternational relations and intrigue. 3240. Bakeless, John E. Daniel Boone. New York, Morrow, 1939. 480 p. 39-27625 F454.B724 At head of title: Master of the wilderness. "Bibliography and notes": p. [423]~465. Daniel Boone (1734-1820) before his death had become to many the prototype of the American frontiersman. At the age of 12 or 13 years Boone was presented with a rifle by his father; thus began a career during which Boone was to be a hunter, Indian fighter, surveyor, militia officer, sheriff, magistrate, and legislator. Boone's life began on his father's farm in Pennsylvania and ended in Missouri, but it is Kentucky which hails him as its hero. Mr. Bakeless has made Boone the subject of a documented biography based on scattered original sources. Details of purely local interest have been largely disregarded. The Boone legend is subjected to a critical examination, but the Boone who emerges still bears the qualities which made him famous: courage, fortitude, endurance, and the ability to "think Indian." 3241. Brown, Robert Eldon. Middle-class democ- racy and the Revolution in Massachusetts, 1691-1780. Ithaca, Published for the American Historical Association [by] Cornell University Press, 1955. 458 p. 56-13503 F67.B86 Bibliography: p. 409-438. The author believes that in Massachusetts the American Revolution was not what it has latterly been called: a dual struggle for independence from Britain and for a dissemination of democratic rights at home. It was a revolt against British control, but it was also a revolution intended to preserve a social order rather than to change it. Economics, politics, the educational system, religious organiza- tion, and the organization and political influence of the militia are all marshaled as evidence of the exist- ence of an effective middle-class democracy in colonial Massachusetts. To a people thus ac- customed to political, economic, and social democ- racy the danger in British imperial policies during the pre-Revolutionary period was soon apparent. The collision of this Massachusetts middle-class de- mocracy and those policies, Mr. Brown asserts, explains the events of the years following 1760 in Massachusetts. It is suggested that the situation in Massachusetts was not fundamentally different from that in the other Colonies during the s.nne period. A divergent view appears in Elisha P. Douglass' Rebels and Democrats; the Struggle for Equal Po- litical Rights and Majority Rule during the Ameri- can Revolution (Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina [Press] 1955. 368 p.) which has rather a misleading tide, since it is actually concerned with "the first democratic movement in America from its beginnings in the sporadic protests against the aristo- cratic domination of provincial governments up to its emergence as a political force during the forma- tion of the first state constitutions" (1776), and closes with a brief explanation of why democracy made so little progress in the Nation as a whole during the Revolution. 3242. Burnett, Edmund Cody. The Continental Congress. New York, Macmillan, 1941. xvii, 757 p. 41-20697 E303.B93 Bibliographical references included in Preface. First assembled in September 1774 as a consul- tative body of delegates from the Thirteen Colonies, the Continental Congress soon became the central government of the Revolutionary movement, and eventually of the union of free states it had called into being. Its provisional character lasted until 1781; the Articles of Confederation ratified in that year gave it a permanent basis but quite failed to endow it with adequate powers. This book is a study of the principal activities of the Continental Congress from its inception to its supersession by the government under the Constitution in 1789. The Continental Congress is depicted as being at the very center of the Revolutionary scene, and the chronological arrangement of the narrative im- presses on the mind the day-to-day problems with which the Congress was faced in that position. In apparent clumsiness and ineffectuality these prob- lems were solved, merely debated, or ignored; how- ever, the Continental Congress did bequeath to its successor a body of constructive legislation, princi- ples, and practices built up during its precarious 15 years' existence. The basic source for the narrative was Letters of Members of the Continental Con- gress, edited by Dr. Burnett (Washington, Car- negie Institution of Washington, 1921-36. 8 v.), and it consists, in large part, of the extensive pref- aces to those volumes reprinted or expanded. 3243. Dickcrson, Oliver Morton. The navigation acts and the American Revolution. Phila- delphia, University of Pennsylvania Press, 1951. xv, 544 p. 51-13206 E215.1.D53 Bibliography: p. ^02-335. A discussion of representative American and British attitudes toward the Acts of Trade and Navigation, the provisions of those acts and their operation, and the role of the antitrade policy adopted by the British ministry after 1764 in the destruction of imperial unity. The author con- 342 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES eludes that although in the span of a century a great and loyal colonial empire had been developed through the wise administration of the trade and navigation laws, that empire was destroyed within a decade when regulation for the sake of revenue rather than regulation for the sake of development became the object of British colonial trade policy. The resentment and disaffection caused by this shift to taxation and exploitation in the interest of an English political faction varied in different areas. Those in which the operation of the old practices was little disturbed by the new revenue program tended to remain loyal to their British allegiance; but in those trading centers in which the heavy taxation, excessive fees, and frequent seizures dic- tated by the new policy were concentrated, the move- ment for resistance and eventually for revolution took shape. 3244. Dorson, Richard M., ed. America rebels; narratives of the patriots. [New York] Pantheon, 1953. 347 p. 53-6131 E275.A2D6 Fourteen selections, high spots "from the avail- able abundance of Revolutionary narratives, mem- oirs, and journals." These Revolutionary chron- icles, the compiler thinks, "form a true people's literature, rude and sturdy, marking the departure of American from English prose." The extracts include captivities with the British and the Indians, the misadventures of Loyalists, and social life in wartime Philadelphia, as well as glimpses of Lex- ington, Saratoga, Vincennes, and Yorktown. The bibliography lists 37 narratives as particularly worth the reader's attention. Rebels and Redcoats, by George F. Scheer and Hugh F. Rankin (Cleveland, World Pub. Co., 1957. 572 p.), draws upon a much larger body of personal sources from either side, but presents it, as a rule, in mere snippets embedded in a none-too-critical narrative provided by the authors. 3245. Frothingham, Richard. The rise of the Re- public of the United States. 10th ed. Bos- ton, Little, Brown, 1910. xxii, 640 p. 11-9466 E210.F96 A work first published in 1872, and frequently reprinted without change during the next four decades, which retains value, notwithstanding the immense amount of subsequent research, because of its clearly defined purpose and logical construc- tion. The author had the single "object of tracing the development of the national life; a theme sep- arate from the ordinary course of civil and military transactions, and requiring events to be selected from their relation to principles, and to be traced to their causes." The ideas of local self-government and of national union are followed from the forma- tion of the New England Confederation in 1643 to the inauguration of President Washington in 1789. The work is solidly documented by quotations from and references to the printed sources available in 1872. The author (1812-1880) was a worthy citizen of Charlestown, Mass., and was led to his- tory by compiling its annals; he also wrote an ex- tremely solid History of the Siege of Boston, 4th ed. (Boston, Litde, Brown, 1873. 422 p.) and a Life and Times of Joseph Warren (Boston, Litde, Brown, 1865. xix, 558 p.) which has not been replaced. 3246. Gipson, Lawrence H. The coming of the Revolution, 1763-1775. New York, Harper, 1954. xiv, 287 p. illus. (The New American Na- tion series) 54-8952 E209.G5 Bibliography: p. 235-278. Concerning himself with British-colonial relation- ships during the period of political maneuver which followed the "Great War for the Empire" (1754- 63), the author's thesis is that the American Revolu- tion stemmed from the efforts of the British Gov- ernment to administer more efficiently the much enlarged Empire, and from coincidental effort on the part of the American colonists, with the threat of hostile forces removed from their borders, to obtain a greater autonomy. The colonists found their field of political action restricted by a home government intent upon carrying out stricter poli- cies. This, in turn, brought on a transformation of the colonial attitude from one of acquiescence in the traditional order of things to a demand for change. The conviction grew in the minds of the colonists that there were more disadvantages than advantages in their continuing to accept a subordinate position within the Empire. The growth of federalism and nationalism inevitably ended the period of political maneuver and brought on that of armed conflict. 3247. Gottschalk, Louis R. Lafayette comes to America. Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1935. 184 p. 35-15130 DC146.L2G6 Bibliography at end of each chapter. 3248. Gottschalk, Louis R. Lafayette joins the American Army. Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1937. xv, 364 p. 37-3884 E207.L2G7 "Bibliographical notes" at end of each chapter. 3249. Gottschalk, Louis R. Lafayette and the close of the American Revolution. Chicago, Uni- versity of Chicago Press, 1942. 458 p. maps. 42-12337 E207.L2G68 "Bibliographical notes" at end of each chapter. GENERAL HISTORY / 343 3250. Gottschalk, Louis R. Lafayette between the American and the French Revolution ( 1783— 1789) Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1950. 461 p. 50-5286 DC146.L2G59 "Bibliographical notes" at end of each chapter. Born in 1757, Marie Joseph Paul Yves Roch Gil- bert du Motier, Marquis de Lafayette, grew up in a family which fortune and wise marriages had begun to favor. In 1774, through his marriage to Marie Adrienne Franchise de Noailles, Lafayette be- came a protege of the influential Noailles family. In 1777 he came to Philadelphia and was prompdy commissioned major general by the Continental Congress. Thus began a career which made Lafayette during his lifetime and since a symbol of Franco-American cooperation and of liberalism. The first of Professor Gottschalk's volumes covers the pre-American years of Lafayette's life; the second is an account of the year and a half following his first landing in America and concludes with his return to France in 1779; the remainder of Lafay- ette's American career is dealt with in the third volume; and the period 1783-89, when Lafayette held a unique intermediary position between France and America, is the subject of the fourth and latest volume of this biography to be published. Etienne Charavay's Le General La Fayette, ij 57-1834 (Paris, Societe de l'Histoire de la Revolution Franchise, 1898. 653 p.) contains an account of Lafayette's sub- sequent career, not altogether a prosperous or happy one, in which he took an active part in two French revolutions, and also made a second triumphant tour of the United States in 1824. The Lafayette myth has been scrutinized by Mr. Gottschalk, and his results indicate that Lafayette came to America in 1777 motivated less by liberal idealism than by a sense of frustration and dissatisfaction with affairs at home, by a desire for glory, and by the traditional French hatred of the English adversary. The sym- bol of Lafayette, the French noble enamored of American ideals of liberty, was the product of others who sought advantage in having Lafayette accepted as such, but once Lafayette became the symbol, he lived the role to such an extent that the symbol be- came the reality, and in later years, Lafayette de- served his reputation of being the outstanding lib- eral of his day. It is with this character development that Mr. Gottschalk's work is chiefly concerned. Other personal and idealistic links between the American and French Revolutions are discussed in this author's The Place of the American Revolution in the Causal Pattern of the French Revolution (Easton, Pa., American Friends of Lafayette, 1948. 22 p.). Another European who came to America to join with the colonists in their Revolution and later participated in a revolution in his native land, Poland, is studied in two volumes by Miecislaus Hai- man: Kosciuszkp in the American Revolution (New York, Polish Institute of Arts and Sciences in America, 1943. 198 p.) and Kosciuszkfi, Leader and Exile (New York, Polish Institute of Arts and Sciences in America, 1946. 183 p.). 3251. Hendrick, Burton J. The Lees of Virginia; biography of a family. Boston, Little, Brown, 1935. 455 p. illus. 35-18228 E467.1.L4H35 In 1640 Richard Lee emigrated from England to Virginia. In the colony he achieved in rapid suc- cession the offices of clerk of the court, attorney general, sheriff of York County, secretary of state, and councillor. From Richard and his wife, Ann, descended a line whose members, not unlike the other families who comprised Virginia's oligarchy, looked upon public service as a birthright and a family responsibility. The author feels that the Lees illustrate that Virginia system at its most benef- icent. The emphasis of the narrative is upon the activities of the members of the Lee family during the latter half of the 18th century, their epic stage. With the fall of the Southern Confederacy the in- fluence of the family ebbed, and the narrative ends here, with the observation that the work of the Lees survives in the State and Nation they did so much to build. 3252. Jameson, John Franklin. The American Revolution considered as a social movement. Princeton, Princeton University Press, 1926. 157 p. 26-10868 E209.J33 "Lectures delivered in November 1925 on the Louis Clark Vanuxem Foundation." The Revolutionary era is considered as a period of political and social reorganization tending in the direction of democracy. The author does not go into a recital of detail, but rather sketches in broad outline the changes which the American Revolution brought about in the social system of America with an emphasis on causes and effects. A wide variety of subjects are touched upon in these lectures: the status of persons, the land, industry and commerce, religion, and philosophy. Dr. Jameson believed that one cannot obtain a satisfactory view of any particular activity of men in the same country dur- ing the same period without examining their coex- istent activities, for all such activities bear an inti- mate relationship one to another. 3253. Jensen, Merrill. The Articles of Confcdrr.i tion; an interpretation of the social-consti- tutional history of the American Revolution, 1774- 1781. [Madison] University of Wisconsin Press, 1948, c i94o. xv, 284 p. 48-1595 Jki^i.l) 1948 344 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES An account of the writing and ratification of the first Constitution of the United States, the Articles of Confederation, which regards the Articles as a constitutional expression of the philosophy of the Declaration of Independence, and a natural prod- uct of the Revolutionary movement within the American Colonies. The author emphasizes the conflicts arising out of the concrete issues which faced Americans during the Revolutionary period, and centered on group interests, social cleavages, and the relationships among the several states. The basic conflict, however, was that between radical and conservative elements, a struggle which unified the Revolutionary movements throughout the Col- onies. Professor Jensen concludes that the fact that the Articles of Confederation were supplanted by another constitution is not proof of their failure; and that the failure of the Confederation govern- ment was brought about not by its inadequacy, but rather by the failure of the radicals to maintain the organization they had created to bring about the Revolution and the Confederation. The goal of self-government attained, the radicals "disinte- grated with success," and the balance of political power shifted through the action of an aggressive conservatism which had learned not a little from its radical antagonists. A sequel is no. 3302. 3254. Miller, Helen Day (Hill). George Mason, constitutionalist, by Helen Hill. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1938. xxii, 300 p. illus. 38-4827 E302.6.M45M5 "Sources": p. [259J-262. A member of Virginia's tidewater planter aris- tocracy, George Mason (1725-1792), like others of his class, administered his plantation and served his parish and county and the neighboring town, in various official capacities, for most of his life. He served briefly in the Virginia House of Burgesses in 1759, and in the Virginia Assembly in 1786. He was a member of the Virginia Conventions of 1775 and 1776, and of the Federal Constitutional Con- vention in 1787. He strongly opposed the ratifica- tion of the Constitution in the Virginia Convention of 1788, among his objections being the absence of a declaration of rights, and the incorporation of the compromise between New England and the South- ern States on the tariff and the slave trade. Mason's opposition to slavery was one of the constants of his long career. Though he appeared in the political arena, by nature he was retiring, and his great con- tribution as a constitutionalist was made in the role of an adviser, a political theoretician, and draftsman of important state papers, especially the Fairfax Re- solves of 1774 and the Virginia Declaration of Rights of 1776. The author portrays George Mason as epitomizing "the American Enlightenment as expressed through the democratic movement in Virginia." 3255. Miller, John C. Triumph of freedom, 1775— 1783. With maps by Van H. English. Boston, Litde, Brown, 1948. xviii, 718 p. 48-6755 E208.M5 1948 Bibliography: p. [689J-705. A comprehensive history of the Revolution which points out the continuity of American military ex- perience. The author has placed an emphasis on military history, but he has not neglected the diplo- matic, economic, political, and idealistic facets of the story; even propaganda is the subject of a chapter. Professor Miller's history is not entirely a tale of heroism and self-sacrifice, for there was much in- difference and lethargy, as well as a morale which had been all but pulverized under the hammer of wartime inflation. Despite all of this, steadfast spirits, many of whom were in the Army, brought the Revolution to a successful conclusion. Aside from the victory attained, the value of the struggle of the "virtuous few" was, in the eyes of the author, the endowment of Americans with the principles and ideals which, however imperfecdy realized, re- main the goal of their collective endeavors. This volume is a sequel to the author's Origins of the American Revolution (Boston, Little, Brown, 1943. 519 p.), which puts heavy emphasis on the opposed oudooks of the conservative and radical wings of the Whig Party, and interprets the Declaration of Independence as a victory for the latter. 3256. Morgan, Edmund S. The birth of the Re- public, 1763-89. [Chicago] University of Chicago Press, 1956. 176 p. (The Chicago history of American civilization) 56-11003 E208.M85 "Bibliographical note": p. 158-166. A remarkably concise presentation of the political and constitutional essentials of the crucial quarter- century from the Peace of Paris to the ratification of the Constitution, which confines the war and diplo- macy of the Revolution to one 10-page chapter be- cause a separate volume on these aspects is in prepa- ration for this very promising series. The ante- cedents of the Revolution are interpreted as the colonists' search for principles of government which would ensure the continuance of their real and present freedom. The "Critical Period," if less dark than once painted, was yet an exposure of the inadequacy of the Confederation to conduct foreign affairs, to regulate its finances, or even to maintain order. The constitutional movement was no con- spiratorial reaction of the rich and well-born, but the work of a group of sincere libertarians, who com- promised their disagreements over means in order to raise "a bulwark to protect what they had gained," as well as a base for further exploration of the principles of free government. 3257. Morgan, Edmund S., and Helen M. Morgan. The Stamp Act crisis; prologue to revolution. Chapel Hill, Published for the Institute of Early American History and Culture at Williamsburg, Va., by the University of North Carolina Press, 1953. 310 p. 53-10190 E215.2.M58 In an effort to insure contributions toward co- lonial defense from the American Colonies, the Grenville ministry in 1765 carried through Parlia- ment the Stamp Act. Within a year the Act was repealed after a storm of protest had risen to meet attempts to enforce its provisions. The brief Declar- atory Act which replaced the Stamp Act was no more acceptable to the Americans once they realized its meaning. This work aims to set forth the general issues which engendered and resulted from the passage of the Stamp Act. The method em- ployed is that of viewing the situation through the eyes of Francis Bernard, the royal governor of Massa- chusetts, John Robinson, the royal customs collector in Narragansett Bay, Daniel Dulany, Maryland pamphleteer, Thomas Hutchinson, Massachusetts' lieutenant governor, and Jared Ingersoll and John Hughes, distributors of stamps for Connecticut and Pennsylvania, respectively. The significance of the Stamp Act crisis is held to be "the emergence, not of leaders and methods and organizations, but of well- defined constitutional principles. The resolutions of the colonial and intercolonial assemblies in 1765 laid down the line on which the Americans stood until they cut the connection with England. Con- sistendy from 1765 to 1776 they denied the authority of Parliament to tax them externally or internally; consistently they affirmed their willingness to sub- mit to whatever legislation Parliament should enact for the supervision of the empire as a whole." 3258. Mullett, Charles F. Fundamental law and the American Revolution, 1760-1776. New York, Columbia University Press, 1933. 21 & P- (Columbia University. Faculty of Political Science. Studies in history, economics and public law, no. 385) 33-3 6 7" H31.C7.no. 385 E210.M954 Issued also as thesis (Ph. D.) Columbia L Di- versity. Bibliography: p. 198-21 1. During the decade and a half which preceded the American Revolution the colonists invoked the con- cept of "fundamental law" in their resistance to parliamentary authority in the realm of taxation and personal rights, and of internal legislation, and, finally, in any realm. The ideas advanced by the colonists to justify their position were not original; 181240 80 -24 GENERAL HISTORY / 345 intellectual ammunition furnished by authorities from Sophocles to Blackstone was used by the col- onists in their struggle to withstand British efforts to reduce their practical autonomy. This study aims to analyze the idea of fundamental law as it was employed by the American revolutionists. The first two chapters sketch the concepts held by those authors whom the leaders of colonial opinion quoted or referred to in their writings. The remainder of the work contains an examination of the ideas of fundamental law current in the Colonies. Dr. Mullett had previously reprinted, with an intro- duction, five pamphlets by one of the earliest men to give the Patriot cause a theoretical basis, in Some Political Writings of James Otis (Columbia, Univer- sity of Missouri, 1929. 2 v.). 3259. Nevins, Allan. The American States dur- ing and after the Revolution, 1775-1789. New York, Macmillan, 1924. xviii, 728 p. 24-23941 E303.N52 Bibliography: p. 679-691. A conspectus of State history from the beginning of the Revolution until 1789 which covers a wide range of topics: the Thirteen Colonies and their governments, the origin and early growth of the independent State governments, the development and revision of State constitutions, State politics, financial and social developments, the relation of the States to one another and to the central govern- ment, and the early setdement of the West. Pro- fessor Nevins finds that the States served a purpose even more important than that of providing a basis for the United States' system of dual government: they exercised a conservative function. They were the repositories of the political and institutional experience of the colonists. At the same time, new theories applied to old practices at the State level often resulted in fruitful experimentation. The success of the American people in forming and con- trolling their State governments gave them an in- creasing measure of self-confidence in their ability to control their political destiny. A full index in- creases the usefulness of this volume. 3260. Niles, Hezekiah. Principles and acts of the Revolution in America: or, An attempt to collect and preserve some of the speeches, orations, & proceedings, with sketches and remarks on men and things, and other fugitive or neglected pieces, belonging to the Revolutionary period in the United Suites. Baltimore, Printed and published lor the editor, by W. O. Niles, 1822. 495 p. 2-19341 E203.N69 The compiler, Hezekiah Niles ( 1777 |S V'). was the editor and publisher of Nile/ Weekly Rt in which such a collection w.is hrst suggested in 346 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES November 18 16, and contributions solicited. It was proposed to present "an acceptable gift to the Amer- ican people, by rescuing from oblivion a great variety of fleeting, scattered articles," belonging to the history of the Revolution, "whilst its feelings were fresh upon the heart and understanding of our heroes and sages." The result is a miscellany of quite various materials, which gives a vivid view of the Patriot cause as it appeared to its supporters and to their immediate descendants. Here are the ideas by which the Revolution was justified, and the rhetoric in which they were habitually clad. Since Niles set his materials up in print as they came in, his book is a frightful jumble which a preliminary Index is quite inadequate to control. Anticipating the centennial of the Revolution, Hezekiah's grandson, Samuel V. Niles, obtained recommendations from a surprising number of the "prominent statesmen and jurists" of the Gilded Age, and brought out a new edition: Centennial Offering. Republication of the Principles and Acts of the American Revolution (New York, A. S. Barnes, 1876. 522 p.). Since the contents have been rearranged, in chronological order under each colony or other heading, and the print and paper are much superior, it is considerably more con- venient to use than the original edition. 3261. Robson, Eric. The American Revolution in its political and military aspects, 1763-1783. London, Batchworth Press, 1955. 254 p. 55-14712 E208.R6 An inquiry into the causes of the American Revo- lution and of the British failure to subdue the colo- nial rebellion, by an English scholar whose death in 1954 at the age of 36 caused widespread regret. Heightened by the failure of the British Government to understand or adjust to the American position, a conflict of political ideas, not "tea and taxes," is held to be the basic cause of the Revolution. By 1775 Great Britain and the Colonies had become so di- vergent in their notions of their proper relationship to each other that only separation or conquest re- mained as possible solutions of the colonial problem. A lengthy discussion of the British military per- formance in the Revolutionary War points out that a failure to adjust to strategical circumstances, a lack of determination, and low morale all tipped the scales against the mother country. A further handicap was the cumbersome operation of the gov- ernment of 18th-century Britain. Nevertheless the dominating factor in Britain's defeat was her po- litical isolation resulting from the peace settlement of 1763. 3262. Schlesinger, Arthur Meier. The colonial merchants and the American Revolution, 1 763-1776. New York, Facsimile Library, 1939. 647 p. 39- I20 39 HF3025.S3 1939. Bibliography: p. 614-629. Seeking a relaxation of commercial restrictions imposed by the parliamentary legislation of 1764-65, the merchants of the North American commercial provinces, Professor Schlesinger maintains in this very influential book, originally published in 1918, were the instigators of the first discontents in the Colonies. The events of the years 1767-70 brought the mercantile interests to an even sharper realiza- tion than before of the growing power of the radical elements of colonial society; however, their with- drawal to conservatism was delayed while they al- lied themselves with the radicals to defeat the pur- poses of the East India Company. The outcome convinced the merchants, as a class, that their future welfare depended upon the maintenance of British authority. Some of them, hoping to control the situation from within, remained within the radical movement. With the meeting of the First Con- tinental Congress, others threw aside the cloak of radicalism, and some of these became active Loyal- ists. With the outbreak of hostilities, economic in- terest caused many merchants to follow the line of least resistance and profess adherence to the colonial cause; others, anticipating a British victory, openly cast their lot with Great Britain. Following the Revolution, however, the mercantile interests once more closed their ranks and became a potent factor in the conservative counter-revolution which led to the adoption of the Constitution. 3263. Tyler, Moses Coit. Patrick Henry. Bos- ton, Houghton, Mifflin, 1887. 398 p. (American statesmen, edited by J. T. Morse, Jr. [v. 3]) 10-11969 E176.A53, v.3 "List of printed documents": p. 424-429. After an unpromising start in life Henry (1736- 1799) turned to the law and won immediate success practicing in upcountry courts; his fame spread to the whole province of Virginia when his legal elo- quence won the "Parson's Cause" from the estab- lished church in 1763. Two years later he entered the House of Burgesses from Hanover County and at once won equal fame as political orator by a famous speech opposing the Stamp Act. His con- temporaries regarded his rhetorical powers with awe, admiring or grudging, and his fame as the foremost orator of the American Revolution is secure. As a spokesman for upcountry interests and as a leader who took an uncompromising line against British claims, Henry won an unrivaled popularity with the electorate, and was chosen first Governor of the State of Virginia. Neither his stubborn opposition to the adoption of the Federal Constitution, which GENERAL HISTORY / 347 he painted as a new engine of despotism, nor his adhesion to the Federalist Party in the course of the next decade, succeeded in diminishing his prestige with the people of his State. Tyler's life, one of the few volumes in the American statesmen series which has not been overshadowed by the productions of latter-day scholarship, is a sterling piece of research, organization, and writing, perhaps too favorable to some of Henry's later tergiversations. Robert Douthat Meade's Patric\ Henry: Patriot in the Maying (Philadelphia, Lippincott, 1957. 431 p.) is based on an enormous amount of research in scattered primary sources, especially in Virginia courthouses, and it is not his fault if they make no great additions to the story. It carries the nar- rative to 1775, and is to be followed by a second and concluding volume. 3264. Van Doren, Carl C. Secret history of the American Revolution. New York, Viking Press, 194 1. xiv, 534 p. 41-24478 E77.V23 1 94 1 "General bibliography": p. [4961-499. A detailed narrative, based largely on the Clinton papers in the Clements Library, of British attempts to subvert loyalty to the Revolutionary cause and to draw adherents of all ranks into service as secret agents of the Crown. British exploitation of the doubts, hardships of service, defeatism, and per- sonal ambition, which plagued many Americans during this time, did succeed in many instances, but failed in quite as many. The chief instance of success was the Arnold-Andre plot, and the maneu- vers and negotiations necessary to tempt Arnold to treason are reconstructed in great detail. Other cases of treason are treated proportionately to the gravity of their effect upon the Revolution. Counterespionage by the revolutionists and the un- swerving loyalty of many men served to defeat the British "fifth column." The postwar fates of some of the traitors are traced. Quotations from letters, memoirs, and courtroom testimony are employed by the author to convey the type of thinking and per- sonality which led Americans either to oppose or support the Revolution. Another work by Mr. Van Doren which throws light on a significant inci- dent of the Revolution is Mutiny in January (New York, Viking Press, 1943. 288 p.). The unsuc- cessful mutinies of the Pennsylvania and New Jersey Line in January 178 1 are narrated in this well- documented study of administrative neglect and British intrigue aimed at inducing the mutineers to desert. 3265. Van Tyne, Claude H. The causes of the War of Independence, being the first volume of a history of the founding of the American Re- public. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1922. 499 p. 22-16374 E210.V27 Ei78.V28,v. 1 3266. Van Tyne, Claude H. The War of Inde- pendence; American phase, being the second volume of a history of the founding of the American Republic. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1929. 518 p. 29-23482 E178.V28, v. 2 E208.V28 The first title is a consideration of the growth of the spirit of independence which made Americans discontented with their subordinate position in the British Empire. Factors in this growth, political, economic, social, and religious, are discussed. What political liberty the American colonists enjoyed was inherited, to a great extent, from the mother country. Furthermore, conditions of life on this frontier of the British Empire tended to encourage democratic views and to resist any backward political step of the more conservative homeland. Further, just as British political progress outstripped that of other European nations, so had the American Colonies advanced politically beyond England. The nar- rative ends with the outbreak of hostilities at Lex- ington and is continued in The War of Independ- ence; American Phase. Until Burgoyne's surrender at Saratoga, and the subsequent conclusion of the alliance with France, the Revolution had been, out- wardly at least, a family affair for the most part localized along the Atlantic seaboard of North America. With the entry of France the complexion of the struggle was transformed. The earlier limited struggle is all the author was able to describe before his death in 1930. He had previously contributed a one-volume narrative to the American Nation series: The American Revolution, 1776-1783 (New York, Harper, 1 905. xix, 369 p) . 3267. Van Tyne, Claude H. The Loyalists in the American Revolution. New York, P. Smith, 1929. 360 p. 30-4956 E277.V242 First published in 1902. The case for the Loyalists, or Tories, is sympa- thetically advanced in this documented account of those Americans whose rooted conservatism im- pelled them to resist the movement for American independence. To the author, loyalty to King and homeland was the "normal condition - ' in the Colo- nies, and the Tories, largely made up of landed gentry, merchants, Church ot England clergy, local officials, and professional men, had no recourse but to preserve the status quo which had given them, rather than the WhigS, prosperity and royal favor. Contemporary journals and memoirs are used to create a clear picture of the "just and natural" Stand of the Tories, as they initially protested against the 348 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Revolution on their home grounds, and then became underground agents, or served in the armies of the Crown, or fled to New York City or to England under the pressure of mobs or of laws designed to deprive them of civil rights. The life of the exiles in New York is treated at length, and may be com- pared with the lot of those who took refuge in England as described in Lewis Einstein's Divided Loyalties: Americans in England during the War of Independence (Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1933. xvi,46op.). 3268. Washington, George. Basic writings of George Washington, edited with an introd. and notes, by Saxe Commins. New York, Random House, 1948. xvii, 697 p. 48-7853 E312.72 1948 3269. Freeman, Douglas Southall. George Wash- ington, a biography. New York, Scribner, 1948-57. 7 v. illus. 48-8880 E312.F82 Contents. — v. 1-2. Young Washington. — v. 3. Planter and patriot. — v. 4. Leader of the Revolu- tion. — v. 5. Victory with the help of France. — v. 6. Patriot and President. — v. 7. First in peace. 3270. Litde, Shelby (Melton). George Washing- ton. New York, Minton, Balch, 1929. 481 p. 29-18687 E312.L78 Bibliography: p. 465-473. 3271. Stephenson, Nathaniel Wright, and Waldo Hilary Dunn. George Washington. New York, Oxford University Press, 1940. 2 v. illus. 40-27358 E312.S82 After the death of Dr. Stephenson in 1935 the incomplete work was revised, and the last seven chapters written by W. H. Dunn. Contents. — v. 1. 1732-1777. — v. 2. 1778-1799. Dr. Freeman's biography of Washington (1732- 1799), the seventh volume of which was produced after his death by his assistants, John Alexander Carroll and Mary Wells Ashworth, is a large-scale treatment of the commander-in-chief of the Con- tinental Army and the first President of the United States. More than a detailed account of the life of a Virginia planter, a full record of a public man, and a military biography, these seven volumes in- clude a thorough examination and discerning ap- praisal of the Washington legend. The result is a biography which takes into account every phase and feature of Washington including his back- ground, his behavior, and his development in pri- vate and public life. Above all, this is a study of the growth of a personality, not an account of the static existence of a paragon born. For those not wishing to cope with the mass of detail which Freeman includes in his work, shorter narratives are those of Shelby Little in one volume and of Nathaniel Wright Stephenson in two. Basic Writ- ings of George Washington, edited by Saxe Com- mins, is an effort to convey the main events of the period from 1753 to 1796 as perceived at the time by Washington. The 242 items contained in this collection were derived from The Writings of George Washington from the Original Manuscript Sources, 1745-1799 (Washington, U. S. Govt. Print. Off., 1931-44. 39 v.). Prepared under the direc- tion of the George Washington Bicentennial Com- mission and edited by John C. Fitzpatrick, this col- lection of approximately 17,000 items includes every Washington writing known up to the time that the last volume went to press, with one important ex- ception: The Diaries of George Washington, 1748- 1799 (Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1925. 4 v.), also edited by Dr. Fitzpatrick. This concise and un- introspective record was not kept during the Revolu- tion, and, unfortunately, is quite irregular during the Presidency. Two examples of studies of specific aspects of Washington's life are Samuel Eliot Mori- son's The Young Man Washington (Cambridge, Mass., Harvard University Press, 1932. 43 p.), and Charles Henry Ambler's George Washington and the West (Chapel Hill, University of North Caro- lina Press, 1936. 270 p.); the latter work is a discussion in some detail of the more important aspects, political, economic, and military, of Wash- ington's interests and activities in the trans-Ap- palachian West, which he was almost the only statesman of his day to visit. The evolution of Mount Vernon, the home of Washington, from family seat to national shrine, including many de- tails of the day-to-day activities of the United States' first first family, is described in Paul Wilstach's Mount Vernon, Washington's Home and the Na- tion's Shrine (Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, Page, 1916. xvi, 301 p.). 3272. Wrong, George M. Canada and the Ameri- can Revolution; the disruption of the first British Empire. New York, Macmillan, 1935. 497 p. 35-1792 E263.C2W6 "Authorities": p. 479-489. The period under consideration extends from 1763 to the close of the American Revolution. Discussed are French Canada and its people, the military op- erations of the Revolution, the demands of the Amer- ican peace commissioners as they affected Canada, and the problems of the American Loyalists. In addition, political, economic, and social conditions in Britain and the Colonies are subjected to a critical analysis. This Canadian scholar attributes much GENERAL HISTORY / 349 of the responsibility for the Revolution to British "stupidity and arrogance." Emphasis is placed upon the French culture of the Canadians, and, aside from provincial tacdessness on the part of the Ameri- cans who invaded Canada in 1775, the reason as- signed for the failure of the Americans to woo successfully their northern neighbors is the Cana- dians' ingrained respect for authority, "derived less from loyalty to George III than from monarchical France and Catholic Rome." F. Federal America (1783-18 15) 3273. Abernethy, Thomas Perkins. The Burr conspiracy. New York, Oxford University Press, 1954. 301 p. 54-6907 E334.A6 Bibliography: p. 276-284. Set against the background of the period of un- rest following the formation of the Union is this detailed account of a conspiracy hatched by the pre- tentious ambition of Aaron Burr (1756-1836), Rev- olutionary soldier, lawyer, United States Senator, and third Vice President of the United States. Burr envisioned himself as being at the head of an em- pire vaster than that which he had lost by a single vote in 1801. From 1804 Burr's major objective was the separation of the Western States from the Union, with New Orleans as the capital and the Alleghenies as the eastern boundary of the new political unit. Also involved were filibustering expeditions into the Floridas and Mexico, and the settlement of the Bastrop lands. Ever an opportunist, Burr presented to anyone who would listen to his scheme only such portions of it as would appeal to him as a prospective conspirator. The success of the conspiracy, which, Professor Abernethy asserts, next to the Confederate War "posed the greatest threat of dismemberment which the American Union has ever faced," de- pended upon disaffection in the West, the intrigues of certain Eastern Federalists, the adherence of vari- ous land speculators, soldiers of fortune, and office seekers, a war between the United States and Spain, and help from Great Britain. The basic patriotism and common sense of the frontiersmen, along with the defection of Burr's fellow conspirator, James Wilkinson, doomed Burr's plot, which ended in the farcical treason trial of 1807 at Richmond. 3274. Adams, Henry. History of the United States of America during the administration of Thomas Jefferson. With introd. by Henry Steele Commager. New York, A. & C. Boni, 1930. 2 v. maps. ([His History of the United States of America, v. 1-2]) 30-10226 E302.1.A24, v. 1-2 Contents. — 1. 1 801-1805. — 2 - 1 805-1 809. 3275. Adams, Henry. History of the United States of America during the administration of James Madison. New York, A. & C. Boni, 1930. 2 v. ( [His History of the United States of Amer- ica, v. 3-4]) 30-10227 E302.1.A24, v. 3-4 Contents. — 3. 1809-1813. — 4. 1813-1817. Adams (1838-1918), who is also discussed under Literature (nos. 688-700) and in the preceding sec- tion on Historiography (no. 3055), was in 1870 more or less drafted by Harvard College to teach medieval history, of which he knew nothing. Dur- ing the academic year of 1874-75 Professor Adams added a course in American history, and found the periods in which his own grandfather and great- grandfather were major figures so absorbing that after two more terms he abandoned pedagogy for historical research and writing. The first fruit of his new interest was his edition of Documents Re- lating to New-England Federalism, 1800-1815 (Boston, Little, Brown, 1877. 437 p.). He had already begun searching and procuring transcrip- tions from national archives, and his History of the United States was evidendy conceived by this time. It was, however, delayed, first by Adams' concen- trated work on the Gallatin papers begun in 1877 (see no. 331 1) and by the shattering effect upon him of his wife's breakdown and suicide in 1885. Pulling himself together after a long trip to Japan, he worked intensively at the History, which was published, in three installments amounting to nine volumes, during 1889-91. A completely individual work in oudook, style, and organization, it has fascinated three generations of students. The famous first six chapters, which survey the state of American society in 1800, were doubdess inspired by the equally famous third chapter of Macaulay's History of England; the concluding four chapters, which view the social changes of the intervening 16 years in a balancing assessment and an agnostic temper, had no such model. The detailed narrative which intervenes is largely concerned with political, diplomatic, and military events; but those who com- plain of its deficiency in economic matters overlook the author's special competence in the realm of finance. The chapters on foreign relations arc writ- ten on a genuinely international level, for Adams had thoroughly familiarized himself with N.ipo 350 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES leonic Europe. His sympathies, it has been pointed out, lie with the Northern Democrats; the Southern wing is ironically treated, while the Federalists are castigated. The essence of the History may be said to lie in its contrasting of the requirements of Amer- ican nationhood with Jefferson's ideal of weak gov- ernment, and in underlining the confusion to which the latter inevitably worked out in practice. "Al- ready in 1817 the difference between Europe and America was decided." "American character was formed, if not fixed," but circumstances and not national policy had brought about this result. 3276. Adams, John. Works. With a life of the author, notes, and illus., by his grandson, Charles Francis Adams. Boston, Little, Brown, 1850-56 [v. 1, 1856] 10 v. 8-19755 E302.A26 3277. Adams, John. Familiar letters of John Adams and his wife Abigail Adams, during the Revolution. With a memoir of Mrs. Adams. By Charles Francis Adams. New York, Hurd & Houghton, 1876. xxxii, 424 p. 4-16982 E322.A518 3278. Chinard, Gilbert. Honest John Adams. Boston, Little, Brown, 1933. 359 p. illus. 33-32200 E322.C47 3279. Haraszti, Zoltan. John Adams & the prophets of progress. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1952. 362 p. facsims. 52-5030 E322.H3 Born on a Braintree, Massachusetts, farm, John Adams (1735-1826), after attending Harvard and casting aside aspirations to a career in the Christian ministry, served for a short while as a Worcester schoolmaster, and then turned to the practice of the law. Despite his social conservatism and his avoid- ance of any step which would tend to compromise his position as a legal practitioner, Adams became a leader of the Patriots and was sent to Philadelphia as a member of Massachusetts' delegation to the First Continental Congress. In the Second he soon became a wheelhorse of the Revolution, which took him out of his provincial surroundings and made him a national figure. Before retiring from public life in 1801, Adams served as a diplomatic repre- sentative of the United States in Paris, The Hague, and London, and then as first Vice-President and second President of the new Nation. In Honest John Adams, Dr. Chinard focuses his attention not on Adams' politics, but on the personality and be- liefs of the self-made New England aristocrat, John Adams. Adams' defense of Captain Preston fol- lowing the Boston Massacre was inspired by his fear of ochlocracy, but he was no less critical of rule by the few. He eventually incurred the enmity of both the radicals and their antagonists, and was eliminated from active politics. The author regards Adams as "the most realistic statesman of his age." A recent penetrating study is Stephen Kurtz' The Presidency of John Adams; the Collapse of Federal- ism, 1J95-1800 (Philadelphia, University of Pennsyl- vania Press, 1957. 448 p.). The author does not view the Adams administration as the kind of nega- tive hiatus which it is usually made to appear. He concludes that Jefferson's elevation to the Presidency "promised that political liberty might be assured of a healthy environment within which to grow, but it did not end the threat to liberty in America of that era. John Adams must be credited with having destroyed the instrument of repression and the in- fluence of its champions [the Provisional Army and the Hamiltonian Federalists] months before the election took place. His struggle for independence in 1799 and 1800 was no less significant or remark- able than that in which he had taken a leading part during 1775 and 1776. In a very real sense, Adams' bold conduct allowed Jefferson to say with plausi- bility, 'We are all republicans — we are all federal- ists.' " John Adams' library, originally presented to the town of Quincy, has been deposited in the Boston Public Library since 1893. More than a hundred of its volumes contain Adams' marginal notes, and these marginalia are the main substance of Mr. Haraszti's John Adams & the Prophets of Progress. Excerpts from the texts upon which Adams commented are so arranged as to render the whole a running dialogue between him and the individual authors. The product is a rebuttal of the philosophes and a review of the age of the French Revolution and Napoleon. Mr. Haraszti has added accounts of the works upon which Adams com- mented, and upon their authors, ranging from Bolingbroke to Condorcet. In addition, there are chapters on Adams as a book collector and as a po- litical theorist. In conclusion the author calls for a more general acceptance of Adams as a great po- litical thinker. A new edition of the Adams papers is in prospect, but the standard one remains The Worlds of John Adams in ten volumes, edited by his grandson, Charles Francis Adams, over a century ago. Included in it are Adams' diary, sections of his autobiography, his longer essays, official papers, and personal letters. An indispensable supplement is the same editor's Familiar Letters of John Adams and His Wife Abigail Adams, during the Revolu- tion, a rich commentary on family and Revolution- ary affairs. There are some recent abridgments: George A. Peek's convenient edition, The Political Writings of John Adams: Representative Selections (New York, Liberal Arts Press, 1954. 223 p.), GENERAL HISTORY / 35 1 reprints the more cogent portions of Adams' rather diffuse theoretical writings on politics, with an intro- ductory essay emphasizing his basic conservatism. The Selected Writings of John and John Quincy Adams, edited by Adrienne Koch and William Peden (New York, Knopf, 1946. xxix, 413, xxix p.), are taken from diaries, autobiographies, public papers, and letters; many of the selections are pref- aced by notes explaining their contents and the circumstances which produced them, and there is an introductory biographical essay. 3280. Baldwin, Leland D. Whiskey rebels; the story of a frontier uprising. Decorations by Ward Hunter. [Pittsburgh] University of Pittsburgh Press, 1939. 326 p. 39-11763 E315.B52 "This book is one of a series relating western Pennsylvania history, written under the direction of the Western Pennsylvania Historical Survey sponsored jointly by the Buhl Foundation, the Historical Society of Western Pennsylvania and the University of Pittsburgh." Bibliography: p. [303]~3i6. Taxes on alcoholic beverages have been a regular resort of American public finance, but the excise act which Hamilton induced the Congress to pass in 1791 bore with uncommon hardship upon the small farmers of western Pennsylvania. They had no marketable commodity save the product of their own small stills, and their differences with the local collectors of excise could be settled only by judicial process in the Federal court at distant Philadelphia. Three years of strenuous agitation succeeded in producing a relaxation of the latter rule, but last- minute prosecutions under the old rule touched off a crisis and some violence at midsummer of 1794. Hugh H. Brackenridge and Albert Gallatin suc- ceeded in persuading the potential rebels to disperse and adopt peaceful means. While there was no rebellion, there was also little submission, and the President mobilized a little army of 13,000 militia from four states, which marched to Pittsburgh and occupied the western counties for a few weeks while conspicuous offenders were rounded up — to be later acquitted by the courts. Professor Bald- win's spirited narrative of this revealing episode is wholly in sympathy with the westerners, and he goes so far as to suggest that the whole affair was engineered by Hamilton in order to strengthen and perpetuate the Federalist regime. 3281. Bowers, Claude G. Jefferson and Hamilton; the struggle for democracy in America. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1933. xvii, 531 p. illus. 35-23547 E311.B6592 Bibliography: p. [513]— 518. A vivid description of what the author, a devoted Jeffersonian, defines as the struggle between the forces of democracy and aristocracy, which marked the first 12 years of the existence of the United States. Hamilton and Jefferson were the titans of the struggle, but behind them were others not neglected by Mr. Bowers. American society, with its drawing rooms, coffeeshops, and taverns, to- gether with the more patently political arenas of the halls of the Congress, mass meetings, and public dinners, was the wellspring of this battle of funda- mentals. To explain and give meaning to the controversy over the shaping of the Republic it is described complete with its prejudices and passions. To be sure, Federalist blackness is usually Stygian, and Democratic whiteness dazzling, and all the dramatic elements of the situation are much ex- aggerated. The work, originally published in 1925, is based upon printed sources, but gains color from its numerous quotations from contemporary news- papers. 3282. Brant, Irving. James Madison. Indian- apolis, Bobbs-Merrill, 1941-57. 5 v. 41-19279 E342.B7 Contents. — [v. 1] The Virginia revolutionist. — [v. 2] The nationalist, 1780-1787. — [v. 3] Father of the Constitution, 1787-1800. — [v. 4] Secretary of State, 1800-1809. — [v. 5] The President, 1809-1812. 3283. Hunt, Gaillard. The life of James Madison. New York, Doubleday, Page, 1902. 402 p. 3-421 1 E342.H943 On his retirement from the Senate of the United States, William Cabell Rives (1793-1868), who had been a protege of Jefferson, embarked upon a large- scale life of James Madison (1 751-1836). Rives' work on his History of the Life and Times of James Madison was interrupted by his second mission to France and by the secession crisis, but before his death he completed three large volumes (Boston, Lit- tle, Brown, 1859-68) which reached 1797. Madi- son's papers were purchased from Dolley Madison by the Government in several installments, leading to two official publications from them, in 3 volumes in 1840 and 4 in 1865; a more recent edition which does not, however, include everything in the older ones, is that of Gaillard Hunt: The Writings of James Madison (New York, Putnam, 1900-10. 9 v.). Hunt published The Life of fames Madison while this edition was in progress; it is a lucid and balanced treatment of its subject down to 1801, but has less than a hundred page* on Madison in Wash- ington. Edward McXall Burns' Janus Madison, Philosopher of the Constitution (New Brunswick, N. J., Rutgers University Press, 1938. 212 p.) is a concise formulation of Madison's political views, 352 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES setting his contributions to the Constitution against his theories of the State and of democracy, and in- dicating his relationship to other 18th-century theo- rists. Rives' project of a large-scale life has been revived in our day by Mr. Irving Brant, a Middle- Western newspaperman who was led to constitu- tional questions and thence to Madison by President Franklin Roosevelt's plan to change the Supreme Court. Five volumes published over a 16-year pe- riod have reached the Declaration of War in 1812. Their reception has been mixed: some critics are obviously delighted with the author's trenchant espousal of the Democratic-Republican position; others find the work wearying in its incessant accu- mulation of detail, and the two latest volumes, which justify Madison's diplomacy on all occasions, have met with some incredulity. All regard the work as based on vast research in primary sources, and as providing the only detailed analysis of Madison's career after 1787. 3284. Cresson, William P. James Monroe. Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina Press, 1946. xiv, 577 p. illus. 47-652 E372.C7 "List of references": p. 549-559. James Monroe (1758-1831) was the last and least endowed of the "Virginia dynasty," but by no means the least successful. Following his service as an officer in the Revolution, Monroe, impelled by financial necessity and fortunate in his gifts of hon- esty, ambition, influential sponsorship, and the ability to work hard and make friends, entered upon a career of public service which led him into a wide variety of offices, state and national, legislative and executive, at home and abroad. Though he was not particularly fortunate in his diplomatic missions, circumstance was not consistendy favorable to suc- cess. When the Presidency was bestowed upon him in 1817, his industry and judgment, the advice of such friends as Jefferson and Madison, and a strong Cabinet all combined to launch a most successful administration. Though his career in public office was lengthy and varied, the fifth President of the United States is perhaps best remembered for the "doctrine" of foreign policy which bears his name. This biography, which was published 14 years after Dr. Cresson's death, and received its final revision from other hands, grants to Monroe the genius of apprehending the opportune moment for the formal enunciation of a principle which previously had been simply a matter of American public opinion and aspiration. 3285. Dauer, Manning J. The Adams Federalists. Baltimore, Johns Hopkins Press, 1953. xxiii, 381 p. maps. 53-11171 E321.D23 Bibliography: p. 35 1-373. This study of the supporters of John Adams within the Federalist Party is a detailed account of political circumstances and events. Professor Dauer's extensive geographical analysis of votes on major issues in the House of Representatives from March 1796 to May 1802 supports his main thesis: the Federalist majorities which put through the Constitution and established the Federal Govern- ment depended upon an alliance between commer- cial districts and agricultural ones — especially those which produced cash crops for the international market. Through the manipulation of Hamilton and the "High-Federalists," Federal policy became increasingly the servant of commercial interests. During the French crisis of 1798-99, expensive armaments were put on foot which could have been justified by war, but without it could only cost the Federalist Party the support of overtaxed agrarians. The war which the Hamiltonians desired was avoid- able, and Adams, who had wanted neither the reg- iments nor the taxes, made peace with France. Between Adams' lack of political finesse and Ham- ilton's apparent lack of common honesty, the Fed- eralist Party went to the wall, and Jefferson led a united agrarian majority. 3286. Dodd, William E. The life of Nathaniel Macon. Raleigh, N. C, Edwards & Brough- ton, 1903. xvi, 443 p. 4-4560 E302.6.M17D6 "Sources of information": p. xvi. Macon ( 1758—1837), after serving an apprentice- ship in North Carolina politics as an adherent of the upcountry democracy led by Willie Jones, and fighting the adoption of the Constitution, sat con- tinuously for nearly 38 years in the Congress of the United States — in the House from 1791 to 1815, and in the Senate until his voluntary retirement from public life at the close of 1828. From the time that party divisions became discernible, he was among the most influential of the Democratic-Republicans, and he was considerably more representative of the Southern rank and file, and of the opinions which came to prevail in the party as a whole, than was its leader, Thomas Jefferson. To Macon strict con- struction of the Constitution became a kind of fetish. The interests of agriculture he regarded as para- mount, and those of commerce as so antipathetic to them that no navy need be maintained to protect American merchantmen. Macon was one of the earliest to seize upon slavery as an essential interest of Southern agriculture, and to assert its constitu- tional immunity from national control; he was a forerunner of John Randolph and of Calhoun. The author hardly makes the most of Macon's completely negative conception of the role of the Federal Gov- ernment, and his passion to restrict its appropria- tions. Macon was himself completely disinterested GENERAL HISTORY / 353 and devoid of personal malice, and retained his great popularity in his State and section through changing times. 3287. Driver, Carl S. John Sevier, pioneer of the Old Southwest. Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina Press, 1932. 240 p. 32-30370 E302.6.S45D8 Bibliography: p. [2ia]-225. Sevier (1745-1815), frontiersman, Indian fighter, land speculator, state senator, Congressman, only Governor of the State of Franklin, and the first Governor of Tennessee, moved into the West with the frontier and participated in the various activities of the border. His whole life was connected with the development of the West, and he died in its service. The author, in Sevier's behalf, points out that Andrew Jackson, Sevier's antagonist, who be- came the representative of the West in the eyes of the Nation, reflected the ideals and aspirations of the West after its civilization had been firmly estab- lished. Sevier, a more provincial figure, overshad- owed by Jackson, the national figure, was the true representative of the old West, the ideal of the man who struggled and fought for the acquisition of the soil. 3288. Hamilton, Alexander. Alexander Hamil- ton and the founding of the Nation. Edited by Richard B. Morris. New York, Dial Press, 1957. xxi, 617 p. 56-12132 E302.H2573 3289. Hamilton, Alexander. Papers on public credit, commerce and finance. Edited by Samuel McKee, Jr. New York, Columbia Univer- sity Press, 1934. xxiv, 303 p. 34-18967 HC105.H18 3290. Schachner, Nathan. Alexander Hamilton. New York, Appleton-Century, 1946. 488 p. 46-3861 E302.6.H2S25 Bibliography: p. 473-481. 3291. Mitchell, Broadus. Alexander Hamilton. v. 1. Youth to maturity, 1755-1788. New York, Macmillan, 1957. 675 p. 57-5506 E302.6.H2M6 Bibliography: p. 647-666. Hamilton (1755-1804) was the Founding Father who was different. Born on the West Indian island of Nevis, he was ineligible for the Presidency of the United States. Technically illegitimate and self- supporting from the age of 12, he was even more completely a self-made man than Franklin. He was the only member of the Constitutional Con- vention to disapprove of republican government and to propose an elective monarchy; but this did not prevent him from joining with Madison to present the most effective apology for a new frame of gov- ernment that has ever been penned {The Federalist, q. v.). Whether his military abilities were so transcendent as he and his warmer admirers sup- posed must remain unknown, since he never held an independent command; but his past mastery of finance and of the techniques of public administra- tion was placed beyond question during his service as first Secretary of the Treasury of the United States (1789-95). Total estimates of Hamilton will probably differ as much in the future as they have in the past, according to the estimator's value of his concrete services as against what Henry Adams apdy termed "the adventurer in him." Both of the older editions of Hamilton's writings took strange liberties with their texts; the new one undertaken at Columbia University has not reached the stage of publication. Professor Morris' volume of selections is arranged in chapters, the progression of which is partly chronological and pardy topical; there is a general introduction and much interspersed ex- planatory matter by the editor. The Secretary of the Treasury's epoch-making reports to Congress on the public credit (1790 and 1795), on a national bank (1790), and on manufactures (1791), together with his letter to President Washington which, in justifying the constitutionality of the bank, develops his doctrine of implied powers, are separately pub- lished by Dr. McKee in a volume of attractive for- mat. Mr. Schachner 's biography is well propor- tioned and solidly researched, using manuscripts to supplement printed sources. It takes a middle-of- the-road position, and certainly does not gloss over its protagonist's errors of judgment or temper. Pro- fessor Mitchell is more enthusiastic in his admira- tion of Hamilton's genius; his first volume, which reaches the ratification of the Constitution, is based on an exhaustive searching of the sources, but once more it is true that the fresh material turned up makes no great alteration in the old picture. For the period after 1788, The Intimate Life of Alexander Hamilton by his grandson, Allan McLane Hamilton (New York, Scribner, 1910. 483 p.), contains valuable material not to be found elsewhere. 3292. Jefferson, Thomas. Papers. Julian P. Boyd, editor. Princeton, Princeton University Press, 1950-56. 13 v. 50-7486 E302.J4O} Associate editors: v. 1-5, Lyman H. Butterfield and Mina R. Bryan; v. 6-8, Mina R. Bryan and Elizabeth L. Hutter; v. 9, Mina R. Bryan; v. 10-12, Mina R. Bryan and Fredrick Aandahl; v. 13, Mina R. Bryan. Contents. — v. 1. 1760-1776. — v. 2. January 1777 to June 1779. — v. 3. June 1779 to September 1780. — v. 4. 1 October 1780 to 24 February 1781. — 354 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES v. 5. 25 February 1781 to 20 May 1781. — v. 6. 21 May 178 1 to 1 March 1784. — v. 7. 2 March 1784 to 25 February 1785. — v. 8. 25 February to 31 October 1785. — v. 9. 1 November 1785 to 22 June 1786. — v. 10. 22 June to 31 December 1786. — v. n. 1 January to 6 August 1787. — v. 12. 7 August 1787 to 31 March 1788. — v. 13. March to 7 October 1788. Index, volumes 1-6. Compiled by Elizabeth J. Sherwood and Ida T. Hopper. Princeton, Princeton University Press, 1954. 229 p. E302.J463 Index 3293. Jefferson, Thomas. Writings. Collected and edited by Paul Leicester Ford. New York, Putnam, 1892-99. 10 v. 2-5666 E302.J466 Contents. — v. 1. 1760-1775. — v. 2. 1776- 1781. — v. 3. 1781-1784. — v. 4. 1784-1787. — v. 5. 1788-1792. — v. 6. 1792-1794. — v. 7. 1795-1801. — v. 8. 1801-1806. — v. 9. 1807-1815. — v. 10. 1816- 1826. 3294. Jefferson, Thomas. Jefferson himself, the personal narrative of a many-sided Ameri- can. Edited by Bernard Mayo. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1942. xv, 384 p. illus. 42-50339 E332.J464 3295. Malone, Dumas. Jefferson and his time. Boston, Litde, Brown, 1948-51. 2 v. illus. 48-5972 E332.M25 "Select critical bibliography": v. 1, p. [457]~47o; v- 2, p. [4941-504. Contents. — v. 1. Jefferson the Virginian. — v. 2. Jefferson and the rights of man. 3296. Randall, Henry S. The life of Thomas Jef- ferson. Philadelphia, Lippincott, 1888. 3 v. 9-28978 E332.R19 First published in 1857. 3297. Nock, Albert Jay. Jefferson. New York, Harcourt, Brace, "1^26. 340 p. 26-13 10 1 E332.N75 Jefferson (1 743-1 826) was the author of the Dec- laration of Independence, the second Governor of the State of Virginia, the second Minister from the United States to France, the first Secretary of State of the United States, the second Vice President and third President of the United States, and the founder of the University of Virginia. Among the Found- ing Fathers, only Franklin was his peer in uni- versality of mind, and his writings of every descrip- tion, but particularly the voluminous correspondence which he maintained until a few weeks before his death, constitute an incomparable mirror of the general and especially the intellectual history of his age. The complete edition of The Papers of Thomas Jefferson planned and initiated by Dr. Boyd of Princeton University, with its careful inventorying of all surviving manuscripts and its abundance of elucidation in introductions and notes, naturally supersedes all previous editions as far as it has gone. But volume 13, the latest to appear, only reaches October 7, 1788, and the announced rate of publica- tion has evidently slackened. It is still necessary, therefore, to resort to one of the older editions for the remainder of Jefferson's career; that of P. L. Ford is listed above as being the easiest to use. Professor Mayo's Jefferson Himself is a collection of extracts from Jefferson's brief autobiography, his letters, and his other writings, arranged in a chrono- logical sequence so as to make a reasonably continu- ous narrative of his career in his own words. Dr. Malone is engaged upon a full-scale biography of Jefferson, incorporating recent scholarship and working out many problems hitherto unsolved or unapproached. He can perhaps at times be re- proached with putting Jefferson's lack of straight- forwardness in too favorable a light. Unfortunately his second volume, the latest to appear, only reaches the close of 1792. For a detailed narrative from that point one may turn to the older work of Randall, which has the endorsement of Dr. Malone; it has not, he jusdy says, enjoyed the reputation it de- served because its author, a convinced Democrat, had the misfortune of publishing on the eve of an age of Republican domination, especially of the journals of literary opinion. Among a variety of briefer biographies, that of the late A. J. Nock has had warm admirers through three decades for its selection of material, charm of style, intuitive insight, and delicate characterization. Special studies are legion, and may readily be located through the bibliographies in Malone and else- where. 3298. Lewis, Meriwether, and William Clark. The journals of Lewis and Clark. Edited by Bernard De Voto. Maps by Ervvin Raisz. Bos- ton, Houghton Mifflin, 1953. Hi, 504 p. 53-9 2 44 F59 2 -4 ^953 3299. Bakeless, John E. Lewis & Clark, partners in discovery. New York, Morrow, 1947. 498 p. illus. 47-12243 F592.7.B3 The Lewis and Clark expedition of 1804-6, from St. Louis to the mouth of the Columbia River and back, is one of the high points in the exploration of the North American Continent and in the ex- pansion of the United States; it is also one of the most fascinating of adventure stories. Planned by President Jefferson in order to make known the GENERAL HISTORY / 355 northern part of the Louisiana Territory purchased the year before, it was entrusted to a young man who enjoyed his personal confidence and was serv- ing as his private secretary. Meriwether Lewis (1774-1809) chose as his colleague William Clark (1770-1838), under whom he had served in the regular army. Under their harmonious leadership, the expedition enjoyed an exceptional blend of good management and good fortune, and was successful in all its objectives. The reader has here a choice between a selection from the original journals of the expedition, chiefly those kept by the two leaders, and a joint biography which includes a narrative of the expedition emphasizing its day-to-day incidents. Mr. De Voto's narrative, written from a rather broader geographical viewpoint, forms the conclud- ing portion of his The Course of Empire (no. 3161 ). His selection from the journals comes from the 7-volume set edited by Reuben Gold Thwaites in 1904-5: Original Journals of the Lewis and Clar\ Expedition (New York, Dodd, Mead), and includes about half of the text available there, with a gen- eral introduction, some interspersed expository mat- ter in italics, and brief footnotes. Dr. Bakeless devotes nearly three-fifths of his volume to his anec- dotal narrative of the expedition, including a chapter on "Aboriginal Amours," and the rest to the earlier careers of his protagonists, to the brief later life and tragic end of Meriwether Lewis, and to the long pub- lic service and honorable old age of Governor Clark. For both the early and the late phases he has turned up much new information from scattered documents in archives and manuscript collections. 3300. Link, Eugene Perry. Democratic-Republi- can societies, 1790-1800. New York, Co- lumbia University Press, 1942. 256 p. (Columbia studies in American culture, no. 9) 42-5915 E310.L6 1942a Issued also as thesis (Ph. D.) Columbia Univer- sity. Bibliography: p. [2i3]-242. A detailed study of the popular societies which were a prominent feature of the last decade of the 18th century, which President Washington sought to stigmatize as "self-created," and which indeed spread into most States of the Union in an apparently spontaneous manner. Dr. Link has identified 42 such societies organized between 1793 and 1798, of which 9 were in Pennsylvania and 5 each in Ver- mont, Virginia, and South Carolina. He has ana- lyzed their membership in the few cases in which this is possible, and finds that it came from a rather wide range of society, with merchants, manu- facturers, lawyers, doctors, and public officials the fellows of craftsmen and artisans of all descriptions. He finds that their membership was perceptibly continuous with the Sons of Liberty and other groups which advanced the American Revolution, and that they were conscious of their kinship with comparable organizations in England and on the Continent. After reviewing their activities he con- cludes that, although they were not without ele- ments seeking political or economic self-aggrandize- ment, on the whole these societies aimed at the free and enlightened discussion of public issues, and were active in the promotion of schools and libraries as agencies of democratic education. 3301. McLaughlin, Andrew Cunningham. The Confederation and the Constitution, 1783— 1789. New York, Harper, 1905. xix, 348 p. maps. (The American Nation: a history, edited by A. B. Hart, v. 10) 5-30250 E178.A54, v. 10 "Critical essays on authorities": p. 318-336. 3302. Jensen, Merrill. The New Nation; a his- tory of the United States during the Con- federation, 1781-1789. New York, Knopf, 1950. xvii, 433, xi p. 5°-9344 E 3°3-J45 x 95° "Essay on the sources": p. 429-432. The late Professor McLaughlin's volume remains, after half a century, a concise and lucid narrative of the events of greatest national concern from the peace negotiations which terminated the Revolution through the ratification of the new Constitution. He thus states his central theme: "The political task that confronted the people when independence from Great Britain was declared was in its essence the same that had confronted the British ministry ten years before — the task of imperial organization." He regards the Articles of Confederation as "an advance on previous instruments of like kind in the world's history"; they were chiefly defective in withholding from the central authority the powers of raising money and of regulating commerce. At- tempts to make the best of the Articles were quite played out by the end of 1786, when a deep gloom had settled upon conservative men, which gave energy to their efforts toward a radical change in the following year. None of this gloom is to be found in the pages of Professor Jensen's volume, which is a sequel to his Articles of Confederation (no. 3253). A spirit of optimism reigned in the new Nation, and is evident in the beginnings of a national literature. Society was in a state of vigorous health, and the grievances left over from the old order were under sharp attack from an active humanitarian movement. The economic prostration which follows protracted \v;ir \v.i\ being alleviated by a remarkable outburst of commercial expansion and business enterprise. liven on the part of the central government there was sub- stantial achievement: the domestic debt created by 35^ / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES the Revolution was reduced, a national domain created, and a responsible staff of civil servants built up. The change initiated in 1787 was carried through by men who feared democracy and who wanted a national instead of a federal government. The book provides a more detailed account of many aspects of this period than is available in any other general work, but it resolutely turns a blind eye on the impotence, impecuniosity, and defenselessness of the Confederation. 3303. Malone, Dumas. The public life of Thomas Cooper, 1 783-1 839. New Haven, Yale University Press, 1926. xv, 432 p. (Yale historical publications. Miscellany, 16) 26-15381 E302.6.C7M2 Thesis (Ph. D.) — Yale University, 1923. "Bibliographical note": p. [402]~4i6. Cooper (1759-1839) was an Englishman, a scien- tific amateur, a religious and political radical, and a friend of Joseph Priestley, whom he accompanied to America in 1794. His American career was re- markable for its versatility, its vicissitudes, and its progress from a radical to an extremely conserva- tive position in politics. As a Jeffersonian pam- phleteer he was sentenced to fine and six months' imprisonment for seditious libel against President Adams. He was appointed to office by the victor- ious Pennsylvania Republicans, but his independent course as a district judge cost him the favor of the more radical democrats, and in 181 1 he was re- moved from the bench in consequence of an address by both houses of the legislature. Cooper then served as professor of chemistry in two Pennsyl- vania colleges, and soon after transferring to South Carolina College, in 1820, was chosen its president. Here he became the oracle of the state rights phi- losophy, repudiating the protective tariff, and de- fending slavery and nullification. Cooper's own papers were destroyed in their entirety, and Dr. Malone's volume is a fine work of reconstruction, illuminating the career of a man who, if not an original thinker, was a powerful agitator and con- troversialist, uncommonly influential in the political and intellectual developments of his time. 3304. Monaghan, Frank. John Jay, defender of liberty against kings & peoples, author of the Constitution & Governor of New York, Presi- dent of the Continental Congress, co-author of the Federalist, negotiator of the Peace of 1783 & the Jay Treaty of 1794, first Chief Justice of the United States. Indianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill, 1935. 497 p. illus. 35-18227 E302.6.J4M6 "The sources": p. [465]— 474. A sympathetic narrative rich in the detail of the life and character of an aristocratic New Yorker who prided himself on the rectitude of his motives and his devotion to public duty. The author seeks to restore Jay (1745-1829) to public esteem, a task not facilitated by the fact that Jay, ever conscious of his dignity, wrote with the feeling that posterity was peering over his shoulder. In addition to the portrait of a moderate who felt that the British colonies were prompted and impelled to independ- ence by necessity and not by choice, many details of the society of Jay's era, such as an entertaining section describing the rigors of life on the judicial circuit, are provided. 3305. Morison, Samuel Eliot. The life and letters of Harrison Gray Otis, Federalist, 1765— 1848. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1913. 2 v. illus. 13-23631 E340.O8M8 Bibliography: v. 2, p. [3ii]~3i7. Orator, and attorney of the first rank, Harrison Gray Otis entered politics during Washington's second administration. He was a leader in the movement of resistance to "Mr. Madison's War" which culminated in the Hartford Convention in 1814, a movement in which this native Bostonian exerted his greatest influence. Having succeeded in keeping the convention's action within the bounds of moderation and well short of even a hint of secession, Otis continued to justify the con- vention and its work during the remainder of his life, often to the detriment of his political career. In spite of the dying out of the Federalist Party, he continued to be elected to office by Massachusetts or Boston into the Jacksonian era. If no great statesman, Otis was an attractive figure who repre- sented the best of the political and social organiza- tion which was the Federalist Party. The author has endeavored, in addition to setting forth the events of Otis' life, to describe critically Otis' ideas, feelings, and prejudices, and to discover the motives which guided his actions in the political crises of his day, whether they centered upon nationalism, sectionalism, or abolitionism. These volumes con- tain a wealth of information about the later and somewhat depressing years of the Federalist Party. 3306. Pratt, Julius W. Expansionists of 1812. New York, P. Smith, 1949, c i925- 309 p. 49-9879 E357.P9 1949 Bibliography: p. 275-289. A scholarly study, solidly based on contemporary manuscripts and newspapers, of aspects of public opinion, diplomacy, and strategy before and dur- ing the War of 1 812. It shows that a general senti- ment in the Northwest in favor of the acquisition of Canada, which had existed since the Revolution, became strongly activated when Tecumseh was supplied with British arms; that the South was GENERAL HISTORY / 357 eager to annex the Floridas, and East Florida was in part occupied before the declaration of war; that Northern sentiment compelled the Madison admin- istration to withdraw from Florida, while the ad- ministration and Southern congressmen lacked enthusiasm for the Canada campaign; and that the idea of Manifest Destiny made its first general ap- pearance at this time. At the time of its appearance Professor Pratt's book was hailed with enthusiasm, and has been often taken to show that the "real cause" of the War of 181 2 was not maritime griev- ances but Western land hunger. This conclusion the author had been very careful to disclaim: with- out those grievances, he declared, "it is safe to say, there would have been no war." To bring about the War of 18 12, both sets of causes were probably essential. 3307. Roosevelt, Theodore. The winning of the West. New York, Putnam, 1889-96. 4 v. fold. maps. 1-8663 F35 J -R79 Contexts. — 1. From the Alleghanies to the Mis- sissippi, 1769-1776. — 2. From the Alleghanies to the Mississippi, 1777-1783. — 3. The founding of the trans- Alleghany commonwealths, 1 784-1 790. — 4. Louisiana and the Northwest, 1791-1807. Theodore Roosevelt was of the belief that the development of the Western country was such as to make the West peculiarly the exponent of all that is most vigorously American in the life of the United States. This vigorous study of the acquisition and setdement of the trans-Allegheny region from 1769 to 1807 concerns itself with the dramatic and pic- turesque. Of institutional or economic develop- ment one finds little information, but Indian war- fare, intrigues involving the Westerners, French and Spaniards, and relations between the United States, Britain, and Spain concerning the Western country find places of prominence in a work which is clearly stamped with the emphatic personality of its author. 3308. Smith, James Morton. Freedom's fetters; the Alien and Sedition laws and American civil liberties. Ithaca, Cornell University Press, 1956. 464 p. (Cornell studies in civil liberty) 56-2434 E327.S59 Passed in 1798, the Alien and Sedition laws were ostensibly designed to protect the United States during time of war, but in that era, when there was a strong link between foreign influence and domestic faction, these laws could also be used by their spon- sors, the Federalists, as an instrument for the repres- sion of political opposition. In this first of two projected volumes the author, pursuing an investi- gation of the relationship between liberty and author- ity in a popular form of government, "concentrates as exclusively as possible on the enactment and enforcement of the Federalist measures of 1798 and attempts to assess their influence in shaping the development of the political process of republican- ism, with its goals of majority rule and individual rights." 3309. Starkey, Marion Lena. A little rebellion. New York, Knopf, 1955. 258 p. 55-9292 F69.S85 The "little rebellion" named after Captain Daniel Shays, of Pelham, Massachusetts, had few killings and no hangings, but great consequences in that it supplied power to the movement for a more per- fect union. Miss Starkey retells this rather ex- ternally known episode of 1786-87 in the terms of human experience and achieves a dramatic presen- tation without ascribing wickedness to either side. 3310. Walters, Raymond. Albert Gallatin: Jef- fersonian financier and diplomat. New York, Macmillan, 1957. 461 p. 57-8267 E302.6.G16W3 Bibliography: p. 435-446. 331 1. Adams, Henry. The life of Albert Galla- tin. New York, P. Smith, 1943. 697 p. A 44-322 NNC "Reprinted under the auspices of the Out-of- Print Books Committee of the American Library Association." Gallatin (1761-1849), a native of the Republic of Geneva, came to the United States at the age of 19, and, largely because of a Rousseauist enthusiasm for wild nature, settled in the far southwestern cor- ner of Pennsylvania. The locale proved a disap- pointment, but Gallatin's uncommon abilities im- proved by an excellent education led almost at once to a political career among his frontiersman neigh- bors, and both in the Pennsylvania legislature and in the Congress of the United States his mastery of fiscal policy made him indispensable to the agrarian Republicans with whom he had allied himself. The same reason, together with a general capacity for policy, administration, and hard work of any kind, made him a prime reliance of Presidents Jefferson and Madison, but after nearly 12 years' service as Secretary of the Treasury he was forced out by the factious opposition of Southern party leaders in Congress. The remainder of his public career was employed in a succession of foreign missions, and his eighth and ninth decades were actively spent in private finance, enlightened publicism, and ethno- logical studies. Dr. Walters complains of his "rel- ative obscurity today," but this is surely a conse- quence of the circumstances that I lenry Adams did so solid a piece of work in his Life, originally pub- 358 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES lished in 1879, and that the Gallatin family kept the papers closed to investigators for the next 60 years. Dr. Walters' volume, which is guided by the wider interests of present-day historians and takes a deeper interest in Gallatin's personality, supple- ments rather than replaces the earlier work. G. The "Middle Period" (1815-60) 3312. Adams, John Quincy. Memoirs comprising portions of his diary from 1795 to 1848. Edited by Charles Francis Adams. Philadelphia, Lippincott, 1874-77. I2 v * 4-20138 E377.A19 3313. Bemis, Samuel Flagg. John Quincy Adams and the Union. New York, Knopf, 1956. xix, 546 p. illus. 55-9271 E377.B46 When John Quincy Adams (1767-1848) became President in 1825, he had already had a long career in American foreign affairs, which is covered in Professor Bemis' John Quincy Adams and the Foundations of American Foreign Policy (no. 3529). John Quincy Adams and the Union opens with the campaign of 1824 and the election of Adams by the House of Representatives after a four-way race, in which Andrew Jackson received the largest popular and electoral vote. As a minor- ity President Adams struggled, without much suc- cess, for his program of national expansion and Federal development of the Nation's resources. In the 1828 election he was defeated by Jackson, and for a time retired to private life. However, in 1831 he was elected to the House of Representatives by his home district, and was repeatedly reelected by large majorities until his death. As a Congressman he continued his independent career, acting in be- half of the Nation, rather than of his constituency or party, and fought for the cause of liberty. He alienated the Southerners, since he spoke and acted vigorously against slavery, and the Northern aboli- tionists, since as a constitutionalist he would not fully support their views. He frequently fought the Southern-dominated Congress to a standstill, often by himself, for most Northerners in Congress regarded Southern support as necessary for their political ambitions. While a source of constant irritation to the House of Representatives, he achieved the respect and admiration of most as the leading parliamentarian of his day, and as an amaz- ingly well-informed elder statesman. In this period he came to be known as the Old Man Eloquent. As an independent, a representative of the old elite, and a champion of unpopular views, he never had a large popular following, but he nonetheless man- aged to play a major, shaping role in the Nation's destiny. Much of this is revealed in his Memoirs, which are usually regarded as factually accurate, however colored by his own views and prejudices; they remain a major source for information on the public affairs of the period. This very large work has been abridged for the layman and general stu- dent by Allan Nevins: The Diary of John Quincy Adams, 1794-1845; American Diplomacy and Po- litical, Social, and Intellectual Life from Washing- ton to Pol\ (New York, Scribner, 1951. xxxv, 586 p.). The Writings of John Quincy Adams (New York, Macmillan, 1913-17. 7 v.) were edited by Worthington Chauncy Ford, but the unfinished set stops with 1823. A selective edition of Adams papers, to be published by Harvard University through the Belknap Press, is in preparation under the editorship of Lyman H. Butterfield; meanwhile a microfilm edition of the papers has been made available by the Massachusetts Historical Society. 3314. Barker, Eugene C. The life of Stephen F. Austin, founder of Texas, 1793-1836; a chapter in the westward movement of the Anglo- American people. Nashville, Cokesbury Press, 1925. xv, 551 p. illus. 26-9002 F389.A936 Bibliography: p. 525-534. Stephen Fuller Austin was born in Virginia at the site of the lead mines of his father, Moses Austin (1761-1821). The father soon moved westward, controlling lead mines in Missouri, but had his son educated in the East. After Stephen's return he served in the Missouri legislature from 1814 to 1820, and afterward went to New Orleans to study law. In 1820 his father obtained a permit from the Mexi- can Government for settling families in Texas, then a part of Mexico. Moses Austin died before acting on this, but his son took it up. In January 1822 Stephen Austin settled the first American colony in Texas. In the next dozen years he displayed an extraordinary ability in maintaining smooth rela- tions with the Mexican political factions, obtaining many concessions from the government, and keep- ing the state open to American colonization. He is deservedly called "the father of Texas," for he was the dominant factor in all activities and decisions to the time of the Texan revolt and declaration of in- dependence in 1835. While until near the very end Austin had been loyal to Mexico, and though the GENERAL HISTORY / 359 future of Texas seemed to him more promising in association with that country than with the United States, his activities had brought about the Ameri- canization of Texas, and led directly to American expansion across the Southwest to the Pacific. Dr. Barker also edited The Austin Papers (v. 1-2. Washington, Govt. Print. Off., 1924-28. 2 v. in 3; v. 3. Austin, University of Texas, 1927. xxxv, 494 p.), which include the official and private writ- ings of both Moses and Stephen Austin. 3315. Bassett, John Spencer. The life of Andrew Jackson. New ed. New York, Macmillan, 1931. 2 v. in 1. illus. 31-23245 E382.B35 Paged continuously. First published in 19 11. 3316. James, Marquis. Andrew Jackson, the border captain. Indianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill, 1933. 461 p. illus. 33-7933 E382.J26 This volume ends with the presidential campaign of 1824. Bibliography: p. [4i7]~424. 3317. James, Marquis. Andrew Jackson, portrait of a President. Indianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill, 1937. 627 p. illus. 37-28638 E382.J27 From 1824 to the end of Jackson's life. Bibliography: p. [569]— 578. 3318. Syrett, Harold C. Andrew Jackson: his con- tribution to the American tradition. Indian- apolis, Bobbs-Merrill, 1953. 298 p. (Makers of the American tradition series) 53-8875 E382.S97 Jackson (1767-1845) was born in a backwoods settlement in the Carolinas, where he early expe- rienced many of the shocks and difficulties of frontier life. At the age of 13 he fought in the Revolu- tionary War, but was soon taken prisoner. After the war he went to Tennessee, where he practiced law, and helped draft the State constitution. After serving briefly in each House of the U. S. Congress, he sat upon the supreme bench of Tennessee for 6 years (1798-1804), but resigned and lived as a gentleman planter at The Hermitage near Nash- ville for nearly a decade. He had, however, retained his commission as commander of the Tennessee militia, and when the Creek Indians rose in 1813, Jackson took the field against them. He overcame logistic difficulties, campaigned vigorously, and won hard-fought and complete victories. Rewarded with a major-generalship in the United States Army, he foiled a British descent on Mobile and concluded the war with a one-sided slaughter of the army at- tacking New Orleans (Jan. 8, 1815). He was at once established as the great popular hero of the war and a presidential possibility, and his further service on the Florida frontier and in the Senate was very much in the public eye. In 1824 he ran for President; while he received a plurality (in a field of four) of the electoral vote, the election by the House of Representatives went to J. Q. Adams. In 1828 and 1832 he was elected by large margins, and thus crystallized a political revolution which has been discussed in other books in this section (particularly Blau, no. 3319; Bowers, no. 3320; and Schlesinger, no. 3352). The introduction into na- tional politics of government by the "common man" is also a major theme of Dr. Syrett's volume; like other books in its series, it is made up of extensive quotations from Jackson's writings (in fact mostly state papers penned by his lieutenants), supple- mented by connective and explanatory expositions. After Jackson left the Presidency, he lived in semi- retirement at The Hermitage, but remained a fac- tor in national government. His career was long and intensively studied by Bassett, whose scholarly life remains a highly reliable guide. The two- volume biography by Marquis James is also based on much research, including materials unknown to Bassett. However, James is not a historian's historian in his presentation of the development of the problems Jackson faced; but his work has con- siderable literary merit, and allows a convincing, living image of Jackson to emerge from its pages. A selective edition of Jackson's Correspondence (Washington, Carnegie Institution of Washington, 1926-35. 7 v. Publication no. 371. Papers of the Department of Historical Research) was edited by John Spencer Bassett; for the ordinary reader it is heavy going, since Jackson's extraordinary personal magnetism never penetrated his writing. 3319. Blau, Joseph L., ed. Social theories of Jack- sonian democracy; representative writings of the period 1825-1850. New York, Liberal Arts Press, 1954. 383 p. (American heritage series, no. 1) 55~ l6 9 E338.B55 1954 Includes bibliography. In this volume Mr. Blau has brought together a group of writings expressive of the views held by the supporters of Andrew Jackson. After an in- troduction by the editor on the Jacksonian move- ment, his selections are classified in three parts: "The Ideal of Self Government," "Economic Themes," and "Social Criticism." The movement arose with a popular hero alter the choice of the President had been won by the people; it won national following while creating a feeling ol na- tional unity at a time when the former leading groups were splitting up into pro- and anti-slavery factions; but, as the editor points out, the basic source of unity for the national movement was a widespread lower-middle-class opposition to eco- 360 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES nomic control from Boston, New York, and Phila- delphia. The movement itself was an alliance of diverse groups who presented a variety of positive programs, often in conflict with one another. The various facets of this movement, rather than the program which Jackson and his advisers forged, provide the material for this book. Another book which aims to present the varying and at times con- flicting elements that made up Jacksonianism is The ]ac\sonian Persuasion; Politics and Belief (Stanford, Stanford University Press, 1957. 231 p.), by Marvin Meyers; in addition to a number of gen- eral chapters on causes, and a detailed analysis of particular groups of problems, the book devotes much space to the individual versions of Jacksonian- ism held by a number of contemporaries. 3320. Bowers, Claude G. The party battles of the Jackson period. Anniversary ed. Boston, Houghton Mifflin [pref. 1928] c i922. xix, 506 p. front., ports. 38-20418 E381.B792 "Books, papers, and manuscripts cited and con- sulted": p. [481 ]— 487. In 1828 the Nation held its first Presidential elec- tion wherein the choice was in most States decided by the electorate rather than by the State politicians. The result was the election of the popular Jackson over the entrenched administration party. It also meant that for the first time political parties began to function on the vote-getting level that has since been familiar. This study of the 8 years of the Jackson administration opens with a survey of the physical and social scene in Washington at the time, and then turns to the narrative proper. While Jackson is something of a focal point, more attention is given to other leaders, such as the opposition Sen- ators Henry Clay, John C. Calhoun, and Daniel Webster, and pro-Jackson politicians such as Martin Van Buren, Edward Livingston, Amos Kendall, Roger Taney, and John Forsyth. The story itself tends to be centered about individuals as much as about issues, and the examination of motives leads the author to a rather extensive revaluation of the traditional reputations of some of the leading figures. Most of the leaders emerge as something less than the pure heroes of legend, while a few, such as John Tyler, are elevated above their common reputation. 3321. Chambers, William Nisbet. Old Bullion Benton, Senator from the new West: Thomas Hart Benton, 1782-1858. Boston, Little, Brown, 1956. 517 p. 56-9067 E340.B4C5 3322. Smith, Elbert B. Magnificent Missourian; the life of Thomas Hart Benton. Phila- delphia, Lippincott, 1958, "1957. 351 p- 57-12384 E340.B4S56 Benton was elected Senator from Missouri in 1820, and he continued in that office for three decades. In this period he became a leading spokesman, not only of men of the western frontier, but also of the common man. As such he became the leading "Jacksonian" Senator, and by his contemporaries was thought to be as important as Clay, Calhoun, or Webster. An early achievement was his leadership in the fight against the Bank of the United States. He also contributed to the country's financial history by his work on the currency; he was instrumental in establishing the revised bimetallism standards which lasted for many years. His advocacy of hard cur- rency and his opposition to paper money earned for him the nickname of "Old Bullion." Benton also did much to secure Federal backing of the movement for westward expansion. In this matter one of his noteworthy stands was that opposing the extension of slavery to new states; this caused him some po- litical difficulty, since he represented a slave-holding state. The politics of the period and his role in them are depicted in his voluminous Thirty Years' View (New York, Appleton, 1854-56. 2 v.), which has often been regarded as autobiography, although it is rather a slightly personalized political history. As such it is an outstanding example of its form, and a major item for understanding the political background of the period. 3323. Chitwood, Oliver Perry. John Tyler, champion of the Old South. New York, Appleton-Century, 1939. xv, 496 p. 39-22996 E397.C48 "This volume is published from a fund contrib- uted to the American Historical Association by the Carnegie Corporation of New York." 3324. Morgan, Robert J. A Whig embattled; the Presidency under John Tyler. Lincoln, Uni- versity of Nebraska Press, 1954. 199 p. 54-8442 E396.M6 Bibliography: p. 191-195. Tyler (1790-1862) was born and educated in Virginia, where he served in the State Legislature as a young man. Subsequently he served in the U. S. House of Representatives (1817-21). From 1825 to 1827 he was Governor of Virginia; this post he left to become U. S. Senator (1827-36). He resigned from the Senate when, on a matter of constitutional interpretation, he found he could not in conscience follow the instructions of the State Legislature. In the 1840 election "Tyler too" was Harrison's vice-presidential running-mate. He became President when Harrison died one month after taking office. Tyler's presidential term was marked by much discord, as he broke from his party because of his insistence on a strict interpretation of GENERAL HISTORY / 36 1 the Constitution. Despite the opposition from both parties, Tyler did accomplish a few important meas- ures during his administration. He retired from political life at the end of his term, and did not reappear on the national scene until 1861, when he headed the Washington Peace Conference, an un- successful attempt to reconcile North and South. Shordy afterwards he died in full support of the Confederacy. Because Tyler managed to antagon- ize both political parties of his period, he received considerable denunciation from all sides. This in turn influenced most historians, and he has usually been regarded as one of the minor Presidents. Chit- wood's book is an attempt to rectify this situation and establish Tyler as a man of many qualities and more than minor importance. The book traces his entire career, but is more a political than a gen- eral biography. Mr. Morgan's book is also an at- tempt to improve Tyler's historical reputation, in- dicating Tyler's work in elevating the status of the Presidency, as well as the extent of his influence upon the political developments of the time. 3325. Cleaves, Freeman. Old Tippecanoe; Wil- liam Henry Harrison and his time. New York, Scribner, 1939. 422 p. illus. 39-32515 E392.C64 Bibliography: p. 392-401. 3326. Green, James A. William Henry Harrison, his life and times. Richmond, Garrett & Massie, 194 1. 536 p. illus. 41-25076 E392.G8 Bibliography: p. 493-529. Appendix I, The Harrison Literature: p. 447-483. Harrison (1 773-1 841) was sprung from the first families of Virginia, and was the son of a signer of the Declaration of Independence. He entered the Regular Army in 1791, and for the next 23 years served with great credit in both military and civil posts in the Northwest Territory. He was Gov- ernor of Indiana Territory from 1800 to 18 13, carried out the administration's self-contradictory Indian policy as well as could be expected, and won striking victories at Tippecanoe (1811) and the River Thames ( 1813). But after resigning from his com- mand in 18 14 Harrison's career was for long anti- climactic: his personal finances went from bad to worse; he served in the national House of Repre- sentatives (18 16-19) an ^ Senate (1825-28) without making much of an impression; and during his brief tenure as Minister to Colombia succeeded in making himself distinctly unacceptable to the government of President Bolivar. During the 1830's he lived quietly and struggled with his debts, but he con- tinued to be regarded by the Whigs as a presidential possibility. In 1840 the Whig managers settled upon him in preference to Clay and Webster, and entered upon a campaign of ballyhoo in which he was oddly identified with a log cabin and hard cider, and his victories of 25 years back were thrust in front of the actual issues of the day. Harrison won by a landslide, but contracted pneumonia in Washington and died in his 69th year after a month in office. The antics of the campaign are described in Robert Gray Gunderson's The Log-Cabin Campaign ([Lexington] University of Kentucky Press, 1957. 292 p.). Dorothy Burne Goebel's William Henry Harrison, a Political Biography (Indianapolis, His- torical Bureau of the Indiana Library and Historical Department, 1926. 456 p.) is at various points of political interest fuller than the two lives entered above. Of these Mr. Green's is somewhat adula- tory, but is based on the author's collection of 1,600 items of Harrisoniana, and is worth consulting for the illustrations alone. 3327. Coit, Margaret L. John C. Calhoun, Ameri- can portrait. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1950. 593 p. illus. 5 -5234 E340.C15C63 Bibliography: p. [573]— 581. 3328. Wiltse, Charles M. John C. Calhoun. In- dianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill, 1944-51. 3 v. illus. 44-8938 E340.C15W5 Bibliography at end of each volume. Contents. — [v. 1] Nationalist, 1782-1828. — [v. 2] Nullifier, 1 829-1 839. — [v. 3] Sectionalist, 1840-1850. John Caldwell Calhoun (1782-1850) was in 1808 elected to the legislature of South Carolina, his native State. In 1810 he was chosen for the U. S. House of Representatives, where he played a leading role before and during the War of 18 12. His inter- est in military affairs and his nationalist outlook led Monroe to appoint him Secretary of War (1817-25). Subsequently he was twice elected Vice-President, under both John Quincy Adams and Andrew Jack- son. As the sectional discord between North and South increased, Calhoun increasingly favored the South, and was soon formulating his doctrine of nullification. In 1832 he resigned from the vice- presidency to take a seat in the Senate, where he could speak more forcefully for South Carolina in particular and the South in general, while at the same time he eliminated his chance for the Presi- dency, as he shifted from national to sectional lead- ership. In the years that followed he became not only the spokesman and political philosopher of the South, but also a dominating figure in the Senate. As he fought against measures such as t.irilTs ; fiting Northern manufacturers, and attempts to keep slavery out of the territories, he became more and more concerned with the declining minority position of the South. Ills cure lor the situation 362 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES through a government of "concurrent majorities" he presented in two treatises, A Disquisition on Government and A Discourse on the Constitution and Government of the United States, which first appeared posthumously in his collected Worlds (New York, Appleton, 1851-55. 6 v.). The set also includes his speeches and public papers and reports. To the end of his life he strove in the Senate to maintain the Union, if that could be done in terms acceptable to the South, but recognized that separation would probably occur. His argu- ments for nullification and the right of a state to withdraw from the Union bore fruit a decade after his death. Miss Coit's biography is a respectful attempt to understand and make vivid Calhoun and the events amid which he functioned. Professor Wiltse's three-volume work is a scholarly presen- tation of the details of Calhoun's life, but the very thoroughness of the study tends to obscure Cal- houn's function in and meaning for his own period. 3329. Dangerfield, George. The era of good feel- ings. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1952. 525 p. 51-14815 E371.D3 Bibliography: p. [4931-512. An account of the personalities and circumstances behind the Treaty of Ghent (Dec. 24, 1814) intro- duces the subsequent events that led into "the Era of Good Feeling." This term is usually applied to the period of Monroe's presidency (1817-25), but the author extends it through 1829, so as to cover the administration of John Quincy Adams, which he regards as concluding a period of transition in American history. In 18 17 America had recently emerged "victorious" from the War of 18 12, and a feeling of nationalism and general well-being pre- vailed from 1817 through most of 1821, while the JefTersonian Republicans enjoyed almost universal support as a result of the self-discrediting actions of the Federalists during the war. In late 1821 the "good feeling," if not the "era," came to an end with an economic depression. In the years that followed there came to the fore questions such as national finances, slavery, and Western expansion, and with these arose a new party — the Democrats. The disputed election of J. Q. Adams presaged the transition from the concept of a non-interfering, limited central government to a centralized govern- ment that might on occasion interfere in behalf of oppressed minorities. The story ends with the ele- vation to the Presidency in 1829 of Andrew Jack- son, "the voice of the people," and the first post- Washington President not groomed for the position by "the administradon." 3330. De Voto, Bernard A. Across the wide Mis- souri. Illustrated with paintings by Alfred Jacob Miller, Charles Bodmer, and George Cadin. With an account of the discovery of the Miller col- lection by Mae Reed Porter. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1947. xxvii, 483 p. 48-3175 F592.D36 1947a Bibliography: p. 457-468. The author states in his preface that in this book he has, for the period 1832-38, "tried to describe the [Rocky] mountain fur trade as a business and as a way of life; what its characterisdc experiences were, what conditions governed them, how it helped to shape our heritage, what its relation was to the westward expansion of the United States, most of all how the mountain men lived." The book is lib- erally illustrated with contemporary pictures, espe- cially those of Alfred Jacob Miller (1810-1874), who in 1833-38 accompanied William Drummond Stewart throughout the area. Since the volume was originally conceived as text for Miller's pictures, the story is still centered around the Stewart expedition, although it includes a full attempt to depict the fur trade of the Rockies during these years, when it was already moving into its decline. The book re- ceived the Pulitzer prize in history for 1948. While the author is probably best known for historical work such as this, he also produced much literary and critical work (nos. 2415-18). 3331. De Voto, Bernard A. The year of decision, 1846. Boston, Little, Brown, 1943. xv, 538 p. illus. 43-4191 F592.D38 "Statement on bibliography": p. [523J-527- The preface states that the purpose of this book "is a literary purpose: to realize the pre-Civil War, Far Western frontier as personal experience." The year 1846 was chosen because it "best dramatizes personal experience as national experience." The work is thus at once both a literary and a historical, and even to some extent a social, document. It focuses on the national events which arose from, were furthered by, or brought about the events on the Western frontier in 1846, with some tracing of the carry-over into 1847. The most obvious event of 1846 for standard history was doubtless the out- break of the Mexican War. This, with Fremont's exploring activities which brought California into the Union, extended the United States to the Pa- cific. This was the year when America and Great Britain setded the boundaries of the Pacific North- west. It was also the year in which migration along the Oregon Trail reached a high point, and Francis Parkman rode over much of the trail. In 1846 the Mormons began their two-year mass exodus to Utah. In addition to following these actions and their in- teracting aspects, De Voto frequently devotes at- tention to lesser individuals within the mainstream, such as the traders, trappers, and guides, and even GENERAL HISTORY / 363 presents the gruesome story of the Donner party, a group of California-bound emigrants who were stranded in the Sierras. Their story is more fully told in George R. Stewart's Ordeal by Hunger (New York, Holt, 1936. 328 p.). 3332. Dyer, Brainerd. Zachary Taylor. Baton Rouge, Louisiana State University Press, 1946. 455 p. illus. (Southern biography series) 47-142 E422.D995 "Critical essay on authorities": p. [42o]~433. 3333. Hamilton, Holman. Zachary Taylor. In- dianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill, 194 1-5 1. 2 v. illus. 41-2781 E422.H3 Includes bibliographies. Contents. — f 1 ] Soldier of the Republic. — [2] Soldier in the White House. Zachary Taylor (1784-1850) was born in Virginia and raised in Kentucky. Before becoming Presi- dent, he served for 40 years in the Regular Army, and it is doubtless as a soldier that he made his great- est contribution to the Nation. In his early career he was active in those operations which made the Midwest from Indiana through Missouri safe for settlement. In the Mexican War he demonstrated a considerable generalship, and the ability to inspire confidence among his followers, thus leading to the defeat of enemy forces several times the size of his own. His victories brought him great popularity, which induced influential Whigs to back him for the Presidency. He was elected in 1848, assumed office in 1849, and died in 1850. During his brief term he accomplished little, but the little did in- clude the preliminary organization of the recent annexations, and, in international affairs, the Clay- ton-Bulwer Treaty. In his acts he soon showed him- self a nationalist rather than a sectionalist, which rapidly lost him the support of the Southern Whigs, who thought they had elected one of their own. Dyer's work is a scholarly study of Taylor's life and importance. Hamilton's two-volume biography is much more detailed in its attempt to present a full picture of Taylor's historical role, and his importance as a leader in the opening of the West. 3334. Fremont, John Charles. Narratives of ex- ploration and adventure; edited by Allan Nevins. New York, Longmans, Green, 1956. 532 p. maps. 56-7867 F592.F8647 3335. Nevins, Allan. Fremont, pathmarker of the West. [New ed.] New York, Longmans, Green, 1955. 689 p. illus. 55-1552 E415.9.F8N46 1955 "Bibliographical note": p. 671-673. While Fremont (1813-1890) had a long, varied, and adventurous life as army general, Senator from California, mining magnate, railroad president, Republican presidential candidate in 1856, territor- ial governor of Arizona, etc., the most important part of his career for its contribution to the devel- opment of America occurred in 1842-46. In these years he led several expeditions exploring the West. His accurate and extensive scientific reports and his maps established him as one of the world's leading scientist-explorers. In 1842 Fremont explored the Oregon Trail into the Rocky Mountains; his 1843 expedition took him to Oregon, Nevada, and into California. Upon his return East he wrote another vivid report of his expedition; it was published with the first as Report of the Exploring Expedition to the Roc/^y Mountains in the Year 1842, and to Oregon and North California in the Years 1843-44 (Washington, Blair & Rives, 1845. 583 p. [U. S. 28th Cong., 2d sess. House. Executive] Doc- ument no. 166). In the years that followed, this volume was widely reprinted, and stirred up much enthusiasm for the West and national expansion. In 1845 Fremont set out on another expedition, again working his way into California, where he was instrumental in bringing about its separation from Mexico. While acting as civil Governor of California, Fremont came into conflict with Gen- eral S. W. Kearny, and was convicted of mutiny by a court martial. Although he emerged from the affair as a popular hero, Fremont's exploring career for the Government was over. His subsequent career was one of greater prominence than signifi- cance, since he was cut off from the field of work in which his main talents lay. Toward the end of his life Fremont began to write his autobiography, but died before completing it. A first volume, all that was ever published, appeared as Memoirs of My Life (Chicago, Bedford, Clarke, 1887. 655 p.); this skips over his early years to concentrate on his Western expeditions; unfortunately, it adds little of value to his reports, and the biography by Pro- fessor Nevins gives a fuller picture of the man. The volume of Narratives of Exploration and Ad- venture contains selections from Fremont's Memoirs and his many reports; it is chronologically arranged, and contains material on pre-1842 expeditions in which Fremont took part, though not as leader. 3336. Fuess, Claude Moore. Daniel Webster. Boston, Little, Brown, 1930. 2 v. illus. 30-29651 E340.W4F95 Bibliography: v. 2, p. [419J-430. Contents. — 1. 1782-1830. — 2. 1830-1852. Webster (1782-1852) was an outstanding states- man-politician, anil one of the most inllucnti.il Northerners of his period. In the House of Rcpre- 364 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES sentatives (1813-17, 1823-27) and in the Senate (1827-41, 1845-50) he expressed the views of New England conservatism, as well as the related views of the businessmen of the increasingly industrial North. However, Webster was also a strong con- stitutionalist with the outlook of a unionist, so that on occasion he moderated his position out of con- sideration for other sectional (usually Southern) in- terests and the national welfare — most notably in his support of the Compromise of 1850 put forth by Henry Clay (nos. 3342-3344). This led many Northerners to view him as a "fallen God," and published denunciations were numerous. Webster was also an important Secretary of State under three Presidents (Harrison and Tyler, 1841-43, and Fill- more, 1850-52). He argued a number of leading constitutional questions before the Supreme Court, and many regarded him as the outstanding con- stitutional lawyer of the period. His many speeches in Congress, on public occasions and in court, earned for him, in an age of oratory, a reputation as one of the Nation's foremost orators. Most of these have been brought together in his Writings and Speeches, national ed. (Boston, Little, Brown, 1903. 18 v.), which unfortunately is incomplete for Web- ster's scattered correspondence. While Fuess' biog- raphy of Webster remains the most thorough study, and is usually regarded as a leading example of political biography, Richard N. Current's Daniel Webster and the Rise of National Conservatism (Boston, Little, Brown, 1955. 215 p.) in the Library of American biography series does bring out more clearly Webster's part in shaping a conservative political tradition in America. 3337. Garrison, George Pierce. Westward exten- sion, 1841-1850. New York, Harper, 1906. 366 p. (The American Nation: a history, edited by A. B. Hart, v. 17.) 6-46358 E178.A54, v. 17 An older work which still provides a clear out- line of a crowded decade. The author states in his preface that it has been his "principal aim to de- scribe the expansion of the United States westward from the Louisiana Purchase to the Pacific Ocean, in such a way as to indicate the real forces which gave it impulse, and how they actually worked; and especially to show how it was affected by, and how it reacted upon, the contemporaneous section- alizing movement which finally ended in the Civil War." Thus, while a heavy emphasis has been placed on expansion, the book is in large measure a history of the United States for the period covered. It gives a continuous narrative of relations with Mexico in chapters 13-15. The expansion problem is centered upon Texas, Oregon, and California, with some attention to Maine, the initial planning of a Panama Canal, and related problems. The political consequences of expansion are developed in chapters on the Wilmot Proviso and the Com- promise of 1850. Despite the predominance of ex- pansion, the author finds space for the party strug- gle and for the domestic problems of the Tyler and Polk administrations. The author used Polk's diary in manuscript before it became widely known, and was one of the first to emphasize "the stern integrity and strength of his character." 3338. Ghent, William J. The road to Oregon, a chronicle of the great emigrant trail. New York, Longmans, Green, 1929. xvi, 274 p. illus. 29-9318 F592.G45 This book opens with a discussion of the early explorers who established the Oregon Trail, largely following in the footsteps of animals and Indians. Next came the early missionaries and caravans, who followed the trail from its beginning in Independ- ence, Missouri, to various points along its way or its branches, or to its end in Oregon. The author con- tinues with the story of the heavy migration over the trail in the 1840's. Chapter seven is an attempt to establish the route of the trail. Ghent follows this with an account of the development of traffic over the trail in the 1850's, and concludes by de- scribing the decline in the use of the trail, as a result of the construction in the 1860's of a railroad line to the Pacific. While this book is useful for its historical accuracy, and for its extended view of the implications of the use of the trail, a more vivid view of the trail itself may be gathered from Francis Parkman's The Oregon Trail (no. 3348). 3339. Going, Charles Buxton. David Wilmot, free-soiler; a biography of the great advocate of the Wilmot Proviso. New York, Appleton, 1924. xvii, 787 p. 24-21082 E340W65G6 David Wilmot (1814-1868) was born and raised in Pennsylvania, and from 1834 to the end of his life was active in state and national politics. In 1845 he was elected to Congress as a Democrat, and for a while he showed himself to be a regular party man. However, he came to have increasing doubts about the entrenched power position of the South; these doubts found expression when in 1846 President Polk asked for an appropriation of $2,000,000 for acquiring territory in consequence of the Mexican War. Wilmot proposed an amendment barring slavery from any territory to be acquired with the money. This became famous as the Wilmot Pro- viso; and, while it was not adopted, it was import- ant as a precipitating factor in the North-South cleavage. On this principle Wilmot took an active part in the "Free Soil" campaign of 1848. As a re- sult of his stand, he left the Democratic Party, and was later instrumental in the founding and develop- GENERAL HISTORY / 365 ing of the Republican Party. While this one cause dominated Wilmot's life, so that Going's large biography is in large part the detailed story of the issue, Wilmot's extensive connections give his life story an importance for the endre period. 3340. Graebner, Norman A. Empire on the Pa- cific; a study in American continental ex- pansion. New York, Ronald Press Co., 1955. 278 p. 55-10664 E179.5.G7 "Bibliographical essay": p. 258-265. This account of the extension of America to the Pacific in the 1840's covers both the expansion from Texas through California as a result of the Mexican War, and the more northerly expansion through establishment of the southern half of the Oregon Territory as American, as a result of negotiations with Great Britain. The author contends that the interest in acquiring these large tracts of land was relatively minor, and that even the emotional force of the doctrine of Manifest Desdny was far from being the major causadve force it has usually been considered to be. He presents a strong argument to prove that acquisition of these territories resulted rather from the growing American desire for the major Pacific ports of San Francisco and San Diego in California, and for control of Juan de Fuca Strait, giving access to Puget Sound in the North- west. Behind this he perceives the driving force of the Eastern States, whose merchants desired Pacific oudets in order to control the developing trade with Asia. 3341. James, Marquis. The Raven; a biography of Sam Houston. Indianapolis, Bobbs- Merrill, 1929. 489 p. 39-2503 F390.H8483 "Sources and acknowledgments": p. [4655-470. Sam Houston (1793-1863) was born in Virginia, but raised in Tennessee. In 1823, after a varied military and legal career, Houston was elected to Congress, and in 1827 he was chosen Governor of Tennessee. In 1829 Houston's bride suddenly left him, without stating the cause. Rumors multiplied, and Houston resigned from the governorship, but never offered an explanation of what had taken place. Houston then went beyond the Mississippi and soon held a position of leadership among the Cherokees, who knew him as the Raven. In 1835 he entered into the Texan struggle for independence from Mexico, and thus began the career for which he is remembered, and because of which he has been awarded a high seat in the pantheon of Amer- ican folklore. In 1836 Houston was appointed com- mander-in-chief of the little Texan army, and on April 21 surprised Santa Anna and destroyed the van of his army at San Jacinto. Houston was promptly elected the first president of the new and victorious republic. For most of the remainder of his life Houston served his commonwealth as pres- ident of the Republic of Texas, as Senator from the new State of Texas, and as Governor of the State. He was Governor when the South seceded; Houston tried to keep Texas from seceding, and then tried to keep it from joining the Confederacy. He failed in both, and his governmental career was at an end. He lived long enough to see his prophecies of doom beginning to be fulfilled. James' biography, which is both scholarly and literary, was awarded a Pulitzer prize in 1930. 3342. Mayo, Bernard. Henry Clay, spokesman of the New West. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1937. 570 p. illus. 37-28554 E340.C6M2 Bibliography: p. [5271-548. 3343. Van Deusen, Glyndon G. The life of Henry Clay. Boston, Litde, Brown, 1937. 448 p. illus. 37-24249 E340.C6V3 Bibliography: p. [4271-437. 3344. Poage, George Rawlings. Henry Clay and the Whig Party. Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina Press, 1936. 295 p. 36-18979 E340.C6P6 Bibliography: p. [2795-283. Clay (1777-1852) was born in Virginia, but after he had been admitted to the bar moved in 1797 to Kentucky. Here he practiced law, but was soon diverting most of his energy to politics. Elected to the State Legislature in 1803, he was twice chosen by it to complete unexpired terms in the United States Senate. Sent to the national House of Repre- sentatives in 181 1, he was at once chosen Speaker, and first gave to that position much of the impor- tance it still holds. A candidate for the Presidency or for nomination to it in each election from 1824 to 1848, he always had an enthusiastic following, and may be said to have had extremely bad luck in miss- ing the grand ambition of his life. After throwing his support to J. Q. Adams in 1824, he served as his Secretary of State, and was afterwards elected to the Senate, where in that body's greatest days he shared its leadership with Calhoun, Webster, and Benton. First conspicuous as a spokesman of the New West, he was later best known as the protagonist of "the American system" of Federal support for internal improvements and domestic manufactures, but his posthumous fame has been principally that of the Great Compromiser, who led in the passage of the Missouri Compromise in 1^:0, introduced the com- promise tariff of 1833, aru ' originated the Compro- mise of 1850. Professor Mayo'a biography was announced as a trilogy, but nothing has appeared save the first volume, which remains the most 366 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES thorough study of Clay's early years down to the War of 1 812. Dr. Van Deusen's biography is the most complete modern account; a briefer one is pro- vided by Clement Eaton: Henry Clay and the Art of American Politics (Boston, Little, Brown, 1957. 209 p.), a volume of the Library of American bi- ography series. Mr. Poage studies Clay as the most conspicuous leader of the Whig Party from the election of 1840 through the Compromise of 1850. For Clay's own writings, the world is still depend- ent upon the work of the Reverend Calvin Colton, who edited The Private Correspondence of Henry Clay (New York, A. S. Barnes, 1855. 642 p.) and The Speeches of Henry Clay (New York, A. S. Barnes, 1857. 2 v.). The Wor^s of Henry Clay, published in 6 volumes by A. S. Barnes and Burr in 1857, and several times reprinted, consists of these together with a 3-volume life of Clay by Colton, which is ponderous and prosaic. A complete edi- tion of Clay's papers is in preparation at the Univer- sity of Kentucky, under the editorship of James F. Hopkins. 3345. Monaghan, James. The Overland Trail. Indianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill, 1947. 431 p. illus. (The American trails series) 47-11789 F591.M78 "Bibliographical note": p. 415-423. The term "Overland Trail" is used here to desig- nate the north central route used by emigrants heading westwards in the 19th century before the construction of the cross-continental railroad. The route was by most of its users known as the Oregon Trail, but the author has not used that name because "parts of it were traveled by many more Mormons and Argonauts than by Oregon-bound pioneers." Mr. Monaghan's history is in large part told in terms of the adventures of various individuals and groups. Roughly the first third of the book is devoted to the period of early discovery and exploration, and tells the stories of Lewis and Clark, John Jacob Astor, Nathaniel Wyeth, and others. The book continues with the popularizing of one particular trail by John C. Fremont, and the subsequent mass migration of the 1840's. Episodes such as the Donner party, and the journey of Francis Parkman which led to his writing The Oregon Trail (no. 3348), are also narrated. These are followed by accounts of the migration of the Forty-niners, the brief flourishing of the Pony Express, and the advent of the railroad. Among other stories included is Mark Twain's journey over the trail by stagecoach. 3346. Moore, Glover. The Missouri controversy, 1819-1821. [Lexington] University of Kentucky Press, 1953. 383 p. 53-5518 E373.M77 Bibliography: p. [3531-375. This study opens with a discussion of the historical background for the North-South sectionalism that by 1 8 19 had become a serious divisive factor in the Union, and then takes up the controversy that arose when statehood was proposed for Missouri. This first focused national attention on the new sectional- ism, and the problems inherent in it. The eventual Missouri Compromise provided that Missouri be ad- mitted as a slave state, and Maine be admitted as a free state, while it was also agreed that in the future states admitted from north of 36°3o' should be free, and those from south of the line should be slave. This compromise set for several decades the pattern used to preserve a balance in the North-South con- flict. Moore also studies public opinion in the various states, the economic factors behind sectional- ism, and the political implications. An earlier work presenting less of the national bearings of the controversy, but offering more of a picture of Mis- souri itself, is Floyd Calvin Shoemaker's Missouri's Struggle for Statehood, 1804-1821 (Jefferson City, Mo., Hugh Stephens Printing Co., 19 16. 383 p.). 3347. Nichols, Roy Franklin. Franklin Pierce, Young Hickory of the Granite hills. Phila- delphia, University of Pennsylvania Press, 1931. xvii, 615 p. 3 2 -3i5 E432.N63 Bibliography: p. 571-584. Franklin Pierce (1804-1869) was born in New Hampshire, and early (1829-33) served in the State Legislature. In 1833 he was elected to the national House of Representatives, where he re- mained until he went to the Senate (1837-42). In both Houses he showed himself a loyal follower of the Jacksonians. After 1842 he practiced law in New Hampshire, while continuing to manage local Democratic campaigns, and served without distinc- tion as a brigadier-general in the Mexican War. In 1852 he received the Democratic presidential nomination as a dark horse compromise candidate. He made no campaign speeches, but won the elec- tion in an electoral landslide which overwhelmed Whigs and Free Soil Democrats alike. As Presi- dent he tried to satisfy all elements in his party, and so satisfied practically none. He was a nation- alist who tried to reconcile the North-South conflict, but with little success. In foreign affairs he worked for "manifest destiny" on a number of fronts, but failed in practically all. Having failed to obtain renomination from the Democrats, he retired to private life in New Flampshire. With the advent of the Civil War, Pierce became hated for his op- position to abolitionism, his advocacy of a compro- mise with the South, and his opposition to the war. Professor Nichols' book is an attempt not only to write the President's biography, but also to under- GENERAL HISTORY / 367 stand Pierce and others like him who worked un- remittingly for compromise, but achieved only obloquy from a nation torn by intense emotions. 3348. Parkman, Francis. The Oregon Trail; sketches of prairie and Rocky-Mountain life. With an introd. by Henry Steele Commager. New York, Modern Library, 1949. xix, 366 p. 49-49101 F592.P284 Parkman has already been discussed a number of times in this bibliography (nos. 2281, 3069, and 3171). The Oregon Trail resulted from a journey he took along part of the trail in 1846, while the first mass migrations westward were in progress. The book first appeared serially in Knickerbocker shortly after he had returned from his travels. It is still considered one of the leading books provid- ing insight into Indian character and ways of life. It shows vividly what the West was like as white men first appeared on the scene in numbers. It is currendy fashionable to lament the fact that Park- man did not appreciate the significance of the mi- gration then taking place, and thus did not produce a book on the lines of Ghent's (no. 3338). Had he done so, we might now have a quite good book on the migrations; as it is, we have a superb work fo- cusing on the Indian and wildlife background, and serving as an introduction to Parkman's later his- torical work. The Oregon Trail is available in many editions and can be read merely as an ad- venture story. 3349. Polk, James Knox. The diary of James K. Polk during his Presidency, 1845 to 1849, now first printed from the original manuscript in the collections of the Chicago Historical Society. Edited and annotated by Milo Milton Quaife with an introd. by Andrew Cunningham McLaughlin. Chicago, McClurg, 19 10. 4 V. 10-15650 F548.1.C4, v. 6-9 E416.P76 "This work forms volumes VI-IX of the Chicago Historical Society's collection, a special issue of 500 copies being printed for the purposes of that society." 3350. McCormac, Eugene Irving. James K. Polk, a political biography. Berkeley, University of California Press, 1922. 746 p. A22-821 E417.M12 Bibliography: p. [726]~73i. 3351. Sellers, Charles Grier. James K. Polk, Jacksonian, 1795-1843. Princeton, Prince- ton University Press, 1957. 526 p. 57-5457 E417.S4 "Sources": p. 493-509. Shortly after Polk ( 1795-1849) was born in North Carolina, his family moved to Tennessee, where he was raised. He studied for the law, early entered State politics, and went on to the U. S. House of Representatives, where he served from 1825 to 1839. In this period he established himself as a leader of the Jacksonian forces in Congress, and a popular politician of integrity with an unusual talent for stump speaking. In 1839 he followed his party's call and ran for Governor of Tennessee to save the State for the Democrats; he won this election, but lost in two subsequent tries. In 1844 Polk was being considered for the Democratic vice-presiden- tial nomination, when the deadlock of the Van Buren and Calhoun forces led to his becoming the compromise candidate for the Presidency. Shortly after his inauguration in 1845, he declared that the four main measures of his administration would be: "one, a reduction of the tariff; another, the inde- pendent treasury; a third, the settlement of the Oregon boundary question; and lastly, the acquisi- tion of California." With single-minded purpose and untiring activity, Polk achieved all these meas- ures in his one term in office, and refused a renomi- nation. In his unremitting attention to his duties, Polk had worn himself out, and died a few months after leaving office. The biography by McCormac concentrates heavily on the presidential years, with a long section on the Mexican War. Mr. Sellers' study is meant to show Polk not merely in his po- litical role, but as a human figure in his era; it stops short of the presidential years. A close view of Polk's White House activities may be found in his remarkable Diary; a selection from it was made by Allan Nevins and published as Pol\: The Diary of a President, 1845-1849 (New York, Longmans, Green, 1952. 412 p.). 3352. Schlesinger, Arthur M., Jr. The age of Jackson. Boston, Little, Brown, 1945. 577 p. 45-8340 E381.S38 Bibliography: p. [529]— 559. This volume, which really deserves the over- worked adjective "stimulating," does not attempt to offer a detailed narrative of Andrew Jackson's two administrations (1829-37), but ' s rat her an in- terpretation of three decades of American history in the light of the renewal of the democratic im- pulse effected by Jackson and his lieutenants. The author seeks to show how the Jacksonian movement grew out of Jeffersonian democracy, as a changing social order required a peaceable revolution to pre- serve the reality of democracy in a changed context. The younger Schlesinger studies the intellectual, po- litical, and economic forces at work, and reaches the conclusion that the Jacksonian revolution was not the triumph of Western radicalism over Eastern 368 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES capitalism, as is usually thought; but, rather, that it was the triumph of the non-capitalists (farmers, factory workers, etc.) in all sections over the en- trenched capitalistic groups. The author also shows most of the leading intellectuals of the day supporting the movement, and giving it a solid core of ideas. The ramifications of the movement are traced in the law, industrialism, religion, Utopian socialism, and literature. The dilution and disin- tegration of the impulse, under leaders less deter- mined and less able than Jackson, are followed to the Civil War and even into the administration of An- drew Johnson. The "whole moral of the Jack- sonian experience," the author suggests, was that "only a strong people's government could break up the power of concentrated wealth." The wide range of the book, and the forceful style with which the author has brought together the strands of his extensive scholarship, give it a vital quality in pic- turing the era and the forces that molded it. 3353. Shackford, James Atkins. David Crockett, the man and the legend. Edited by John B. Shackford. Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina Press, 1956. 338 p. 56-13913 F436.C9594 Bibliography: p. 317-324. Davy Crockett is well known to most Americans as a folklore figure whose incredible adventures have been presented through almanacs, comic books, movies, television programs, children's tee-shirts, etc. The original of these stories was David Crockett (1786-1836), a politician who throughout his life welcomed the retelling of tall tales about himself. He was born in Tennessee to the poverty usual among frontier families. However, he rose through military and judicial positions to represent his frontiersman neighbors in Congress. He served well the interests of these poor setders, but lost office after breaking with the Jacksonians, largely because of their land policy. He returned to the advancing frontier, then in Texas, and was killed at the Alamo in the Texan war for independence. It is this historical person whose life is traced in Shackford's book, which is based on extensive re- search among previously neglected primary sources. The author also tries to rehabilitate as a piece of frontier literature, humor, and some truth the 1834 autobiography (nos. 2649-50). Here Crockett emerges as an archetypal frontiersman of great strength, courage, and determination, if on a some- what diminished scale from the glories of folklore. 3354. Smith, Justin H. The annexation of Texas. Corrected ed. New York, Barnes & Noble, 1941. 496 p. A42-899 F390.S647 1941 "Account of the sources": p. 471-476. When the United States purchased the Louisiana Territory it acquired some claims to Texas, but waived them in 1821, in exchange for Florida. However, neither Spain nor Mexico, after acquir- ing independence, succeeded in settling Texas. Set- tlement was largely by Americans, led first by Stephen Austin (no. 3314). Since the Mexican Government was highly unstable, Texas never de- veloped any attachment to it. In 1835, after the Mexican Government had become a military dicta- torship, Texas declared its independence, and man- aged to maintain it under the leadership of Sam Houston (no. 3341), but sought to become a state of the American Union. Throughout the following decade the pros and cons for annexing Texas were loudly disputed in the United States. The main stumbling block was the issue of slavery. West- erners wanted Texas at any price, southerners wanted an extension of slave areas, and northerners opposed the idea of more slave-voting states. After much argument Texas was finally admitted to the Union, and conflicting views over its western boundary soon led to the Mexican War (no. 3689). It is the background to this phase of American expansion and North-South sectionalism that is ex- amined in this book, originally published in 191 1. It was the first thorough study of this historical problem, and research for it was done in archives throughout the world, so that it is based almost exclusively on primary sources. In his thorough- ness the author has also considered the attitudes and actions of foreign governments insofar as they con- cerned the transition of Texas from Mexican Prov- ince to independent republic and to American State. 3355. Stephenson, Nathaniel W. Texas and the Mexican War; a chronicle of the winning of the Southwest. New Haven, Yale University Press, 1921. 273 p. illus. (The Chronicles of America series, Allen Johnson, editor, v. 24) 21-14809 E173.C55, v. 24 F389.S92 This is a concise account of Texas, from its begin- nings through the stabilization of its boundaries at the end of the Mexican War. The book opens with a brief account of early American claims to Texas, the settlement of that area by Americans, and the relationship of those Americans to the central Mex- ican Government. It continues with an account of the growing friction between the government and the American settlers, the attempts of the United States to acquire the area by negotiation, and the final revolt of the colonists against Mexico, leading to the establishment of the Texan Republic. The author then reviews the actions which led to the annexation of Texas by the United States, and the conflicting boundary claims and territorial desires GENERAL HISTORY / 369 which resulted in the Mexican War. The course of the war is then traced, and the book concludes with the ratification of the treaty which resulted in Amer- ica's acquisition of the Southwest (1848). The "Bibliographical Note" (p. 259-261) at the end is now considerably out of date. The book itself, however, remains essentially valid, for subsequent research has added much detail, but has little altered the main oudine of the story which is the substance of this volume. 3356. Turner, Frederick Jackson. Rise of the New West, 1819-1829. New York, Harper, 1906. xviii, 366 p. 9 maps. (The American Na- tion: a history, edited by A. B. Hart, v. 14) 6-13695 E178.A54, v. 14 "Critical essay on authorities": p. [333]~352. This volume, the only substantial narrative his- tory completed by the celebrated formulator of the "frontier hypothesis" (no. 3147), is a general view of the United States from the panic of 18 19 to the election of Andrew Jackson. The author finds the significance of the decade in the weakening of the nationalism which had flared out toward the end of the War of 18 12 and had dominated the first years of the peace, and in the resurgence of sectional in- terests. However, national feeling, and the sense of alienation from Europe, remained powerful enough to allow the enunciation and general accept- ance of the Monroe Doctrine in 1823. The author surveys the situation in each of the three older sections, and then describes developments in the new one, the trans-Appalachian West, at some length, since it was the progress of civilization here which brought a completely new factor into the na- tional composite. The domestic politics of the pe- riod, involving such issues as the Missouri Compro- mise, internal improvements, and the tariff, are in- terpreted in terms of the interests, the balance, and the alliances of sections. In progress at the same time but, the author confesses, not easy to depict, was "the formation of the self-conscious American democracy, strongest in the west and middle region, but running across all sections and tending to divide the people on the lines of social classes." 3357. Turner, Frederick Jackson. The United States, 1 830- 1 850; the Nation and its sec- tions. With an introd. by Avery Craven. New York, Holt, 1935. xiv, 602 p. maps. 35-5282 E338.T92 The author's incomplete manuscript was edited by M. H. Crissey, Max Farrand, and Avery Craven. "Chapter XIII [Taylor administration and the com- promise of 1850] . . . was never written." J :: 1 Li-40 CO 25 In this history of the period from 1830 to 1850, which is in some degree a continuation of his Rise of the New West (supra), Turner pursues his theories of sectionalism and its influence on the de- velopment of the country. The bulk of the book consists in studies of the various sections (New Eng- land, Middle Adantic States, South Atlantic States, South Central States, North Central States, and Texas and the Far West) throughout this period. There follow a series of chapters on the presidential administrations from Jackson through Polk. Chap- ters at the beginning and end bring this material together to some extent. Unfortunately, while Pro- fessor Turner spent 15 years in writing the book, he died without completing it, which fact is doubt- less responsible for a lack of unity in the volume. Furthermore, only a limited amount of editorial work has been done upon it. Nonetheless, the work remains important for the questions it raises, its influence on subsequent historians, and its pro- Western, pro-frontier view of national development. 3358. Woodford, Frank B. Lewis Cass, the last Jeffersonian. New Brunswick, Rutgers University Press, 1950. 380 p. 50-9741 E340.C3W66 Bibliography: p. 357-369. Lewis Cass (1782-1866) was born in New Hamp- shire. As a young man he moved to Ohio, where he entered into law practice in 1802. He had served in the Ohio State Legislature, and he had taken part in the War of 18 12 on the frontier, when at the end of 1 8 13 he was appointed Governor of Michigan Territory, a position he held for 18 years. He was then appointed Secretary of War in Jackson's Cabinet, where he remained until 1836. Subse- quently he served as American Minister to France; in this position his anti-British maneuverings brought him great popularity at home. In 1844 he came near obtaining the Democratic nomination for the Presidency, but was passed over for Polk. Cass then entered the Senate, where he continued his work as a conservative nationalist until 1848, when he received the presidential nomination. However, he lost to Taylor in a close election, pardy because of a split in his own party, and partly be- cause he was too conservative in a period of intense partisanship over such matters as slavery, territorial expansion, and internal improvements. He was then reelected to the Senate, where he remained until he became Buchanan's Secretary of State. He re- signed from this position when Buchanan refused to strengthen Fort Sumter, with the Civil War but a few months away. Mr. Woodford's scholarly biography relates Cass' varied and influential career to the progress of the Nation's development. 370 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES H. Slavery, the Civil War, and Reconstruction (to 1877) 3359. Bancroft, Frederic. The life of William H. Seward. New York, Harper, 1900. 2 v. 0-1693 E415.9.S4B3 A critical but sympathetic biography of Seward (1801-1872) whose aim in life, not entirely achieved, "was to be supremely great both in his generation and in history." Seward began his active political career in 1830 as an Antimason, joined the Whig Party in 1834, and served in the United States Senate from 1848 until his appointment as Lincoln's Secretary of State. His opposition to slavery in the Senate was partially motivated by the increasing power of the antislavery movement in the North, which led him to enter the Republican Party in 1854. Although an acknowledged party leader, he failed of nomination to the Presidency in both 1856 and i860. As Secretary of State from 1861 to 1869, Seward became, in the author's opinion, a diplomat- ist and statesman of the first rank. He was the first Secretary to publish diplomatic dispatches, a part of his campaign to mold public opinion in favor of the policies of the Government. His great tri- umph was his skillful checking of the interventionist aims of Great Britain and France in the Civil War, and the reduction of their unofficial interference by manipulating the sympathies of the European op- ponents of slavery. In the postwar years Seward supported Andrew Johnson's policy of moderation toward the South, forced France to withdraw from Mexico, and purchased Alaska from Russia in 1867. Personally amiable and without malice, Seward is here characterized as "pre-eminently a man of theo- ries and expedients, but he also had settled con- victions and sound judgment." 3360. Barnes, Gilbert Hobbs. The antislavery im- pulse, 1 830-1844. New York, Appleton- Century, 1933. 298 p. 33-38695 E449.B264 "This volume is published from a fund contrib- uted to the American Historical Association by the Carnegie Corporation of New York." "Works consulted": p. 199-202. This influential work traces the main current of antislavery agitation and organization in the United States to the great evangelical revival which reached its peak in 1830, and in particular to the preaching of Charles Grandison Finney (1792-1875), a success- ful lawyer transformed into an itinerant Presbyte- rian revivalist of extraordinary fervor and persua- sion. At Utica, N. Y., Finney not merely converted but gathered into his Holy Band a student at Hamil- ton College, Theodore Dwight Weld, and his older friend and mentor, Charles Stuart, a retired captain of the British Army. Finney's mission in New York City brought into line the wealthy and phil- anthropic merchants, Arthur and Lewis Tappan. In 1833, on learning of the British measure for abolishing West Indian slavery, the New York group proceeded to organize the American Anti- Slavery Society, which in the following year began its nationwide agitation for immediate abolition. In 1837 pamphleteering was subordinated to evangelism, as The Seventy were recruited and sent out to work in the rural counties. In the same year their efforts produced the flood of antislavery petitions to Congress, where they were "stowed away in the antechambers by waggon loads." Anti- slavery at once became a live political issue, and the first supporter of the petitions, J. Q. Adams, was soon joined by allies on the floors of Congress. "From first to last, throughout the antislavery host the cause continued to be a moral issue and not an economic one." The book is very largely based on original and previously unexploited sources such as the Weld, Lewis Tappan, J. R. Giddings, and J. G. Birney papers, and nearly one-third (p. 203-291) consists of notes containing extensive extracts from them. 3361. Beale, Howard K. The critical year; a study of Andrew Johnson and Reconstruction. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1930. 454 p. 30-14060 E668.B354 Bibliography: p. 407-435. The election year of 1866 is here critically ex- amined through contemporary newspapers, private correspondence, local campaign speeches, and po- litical sermons, in order to determine the true mo- tives behind the campaigns of Andrew Johnson and the Radical Republicans. In the author's analysis, the election issue was not merely one of deciding the policy to be followed in dealing with the con- quered South, but was also the decisive test of power between the rising industries and businesses of the Northeast, represented by the Radical Republicans, and the agrarian South and West, championed by Johnson. The victory of the Radical Republicans and the economic interests allied with them was achieved by adroit propaganda, appealing to the sectionalism and war-bred hatred of the electorate, rather than presenting any actual issues upon which they could express their preference. GENERAL HISTORY / 37 1 3362. Bowers, Claude G. The tragic era; the revo- lution after Lincoln. New York, Blue Rib- bon Books [193-] xxii, 567 p. 37-10370 E668.B7793 Reprinted from the original edition (copyrighted 1929). "Manuscripts, books, and newspapers consulted and cited": p. [541 ]- 547» The late Ambassador Bowers (1879— 1957) quoted with approval Hilaire Belloc's dictum that "readable history is melodrama," and of his three principal dramatizations of American history (cf. nos. 3281 & 3320) The Tragic Era is the most melodramatic. Anyone who wants to approach Reconstruction and the Gilded Age in Washington through a crowded and stirring narrative in which the whites are daz- zling and the blacks Stygian will find this to his taste. For such history there must be dramatis personae, and Andrew Johnson and Thaddeus Stevens, cast respectively as Gabriel and Satan, have each a portrait-chapter to himself. There must be a backdrop, provided by a brilliant chapter on "Wash- ington: the Social Background." Comic relief is provided by "The Great American Farce," as the impeachment trial of President Johnson is denom- inated. Peripeteia in the action are indicated by such chapter headings as "Military Satraps and Rev- olution," "The Falling of Rotten Fruit," and "The Red Shirts Ride." For all this, the volume is based upon a thorough knowledge of memoirs and biog- raphies, supplemented from a few manuscript collections and a wide use of contemporary news- paper files. Mr. Bowers was neither an unlearned nor a careless historian, and his vigorous partisan- ship is harmless because it is so honestly avowed. 3363. Buck, Paul H. The road to reunion, 1865— 1900. Boston, Litde, Brown, 1937. 320 p. 37-4978 E661.B84 The morrow of Appomattox saw a North arro- gant in victory, and a South "spent and exhausted, yet ready to offer stolid resistance" to aggression. During the 12 Reconstruction years, while the North was building its policy upon force, sectional division was perhaps intensified. But before as well as after 1877, "the sturdy barriers of sectional antipathy and distrust crumbled one by one." With- in a generation of Appomattox "an American nationalism existed which derived its elements in- discriminately from both the erstwhile foes." As the author states, virtually every activity of the American people during the period had some bear- ing upon sectional reconciliation, and he traces its progress in a variety of spheres: economic de- velopment and integration, the rise of a new genera- tion in the South, the appearance of a new Southern literature hospitably received in the North, and the fraternizing of veterans' organizations. Perhaps the decisive element which permitted the "new patriotism" of 1898 was the acquiescence of leaders of Northern opinion in the disfranchisement of the Southern Negro. 3364. Cate, Wirt Armistead. Lucius Q. C. La- mar, secession and reunion. Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina Press, 1935. 594 p. illus. 35-9410 E664.L2C37 Bibliography: p. 555-563. Lamar (1825-1893), the nephew of Mirabeau Buonaparte Lamar and the son-in-law of Augustus B. Longstreet, was a Georgian by birth. He repre- sented Mississippi in the two Congresses before the Civil War, drafted the Mississippi ordinance of secession, held a commission in the Confederate Army, and went to Europe as a Confederate com- missioner. His real eminence, however, began in 1872, when he succeeded in winning election to the U. S. House of Representatives, and soon thereafter led in the elimination of carpetbag rule from Mis- sissippi. His distinguished and conciliatory service in the U.S. Senate culminated in his appointment by President Cleveland, first as Secretary of the Interior in 1885, and then to the Supreme Court in 1888, in both of which positions the ex-Confed- erate became a living symbol of restored national harmony. Mr. Cate's biography is extremely lauda- tory, but has much reason for being so. 3365. Coulter, Ellis M. Travels in the Confederate States, a bibliography. Norman, University of Oklahoma Press, 1948. xiv, 289 p. (American exploration and travel [n]) 48-7183 Z1251.S7C68 Travel, in the ordinary sense, is a rarity if not an impossibility in wartime, and this annotated bibli- ography, which derives its title from the series of which it forms a part, is somewhat misleadingly named. Most of the 492 titles which arc here de- scribed in considerable detail are the personal nar- ratives, letters, or diaries of soldiers. S0mewh.1t unexpectedly, Southern soldier-writers are in a de- cided minority; many who did write wrote late and from memory, and Dr. Coulter has excluded most of their publications as "almost worthless" for his purpose. Many of the Northerners, however, are here reproached with being prejudiced witnesses. A considerable proportion of the titles arc Northern regimental histories, selected whenever the author was a member of the unit and included descripthe detail. The entries list the illustrations in each work, and the annotations give "some estimate of the na- ture of its content, its reliability, and the itinerary of the author." In addition to the book's ez] 372 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES purpose of showing what the South was like in war- time, it is a valuable guide to personal materials on the campaigns in Southern territory. 3366. Craven, Avery O. The coming of the Civil War. [2d ed. Chicago] University of Chi- cago Press, 1957. 491 p. 57-8572 E338.C92 1957 The second edition of this work differs little from the first of 1942, but adds a preface in which the author tells that it arose out of an attempt to write a history of American democracy. He soon realized that the democratic process in the United States had "completely failed in the critical period that culmi- nated in the Civil War," and this book was the result of his effort to find out why. He finds it necessary to go as far back as 1800 to provide an adequate background, and he approaches the situation from the angle of the South, "since that section's ways and institutions were under fire." Southern argu- ments in favor of slavery are represented as a re- action to an aggressive attack upon the institution within as well as outside the South. Rising emo- tionalism in the Nordi engendered by decades of abolitionist propaganda is given the major blame for placing the two sections in irreconcilable frames of mind which left no alternative save secession and war. Despite the divisions which rendered the Dem- ocratic Party ineffectual in its efforts for compromise, the author believes that if the Republican movement had been less intransigent, slavery would ultimately have eliminated itself without any breach of the Union. Professor Craven nevertheless asserts that his conclusions "point out the tragedy of being human rather than of being either Southern or Northern." 3367. Craven, Avery O. Edmund RufEn, South- erner; a study in secession. New York, Appleton, 1932. 283 p. 32-8631 F230.R94 "Notes," containing bibliography: p. 261- [271]. A native of Prince George's County, Virginia, Edmund Ruffin (1794-1865) was one of the South's most noted agriculturalists and became one of its earliest and most emphatic and fanatical secession- ists. His writings on slavery and Southern rights vied in quantity with his writings on agriculture. As the founder of the League of United Southern- ers, Ruffin was allowed to fire the first shot from Morris Island against Fort Sumter. He never held a civil or military commission from the Confeder- acy, but nevertheless committed suicide when it collapsed. Mr. Craven has written a penetrating study of this man who, however interesting, is less important as an individual than as a repre- sentative of the tone and temper of his section and class. 3368. Current, Richard Nelson. Old Thad Stevens, a story of ambition. Madison, University of Wisconsin Press, 1942. 344 p. 43-52549 E415.9.S84C8 Bibliography: p. 323-328. Stevens (1792-1868) was a Vermonter by birth but became a lawyer and an iron manufacturer in central Pennsylvania. From 1831 he was a leading politician in the Andmasonic, Whig, Free-Soil, and Republican Parties, and always showed himself a zealous advocate of democratic measures and an in- transigent foe of any form of aristocratic privilege. In the Pennsylvania Legislature in the 1830's he did much to extend the system of free schools to the entire state. In the U. S. House of Representa- tives, from 1849 to 1853 and again from 1859 until his death, he was a vociferous opponent of slavery and the Southern slaveowners. During the Civil War he continued to assail Lincoln's adminis- tration for its allegedly slack conduct of the war, and on its close he became the most influential House member of the Joint Committee on Reconstruc- tion. He led in the measures which wrecked Lincoln's plan of Reconstrucdon, hobbled the Johnson administration, and culminated in the im- peachment and trial of President Johnson. He died soon after the latter's acquittal. This harsh and enigmatic figure has attracted a succession of biographers, none of whom can be said to have read the riddle and produced a definitive life, for which sufficient material probably does not exist. Mr. Current's life is based on solid research, but goes rather far in reducing Stevens' avowed passion for equality to a politician's love of power and a de- sire to make his party "a vehicle for industrialists like himself." The older work by James A. Wood- burn, The Life of Thaddeus Stevens (Indianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill, 1913. 620 p.), is still worth con- sultadon, though it is not a biography in the modern manner. 3369. Dodd, William E. Jefferson Davis. Phila- delphia, G. W. Jacobs, 1907. 396 p. (Amer- ican crisis biographies) 8-820 E467.1.D26D8 Bibliography: p. [3841-385. A sympathetic and relatively brief narrative of the tragic life of Jefferson Davis (1808-1889), sol- dier, planter, United States Senator, and President of the Confederate States of America. Davis is shown to have derived a love of order and discipline from his West Point training; he was also a man of deep affection for his family. His most salient characteristic, clearly manifested in public office, was his loyalty to his friends, whom he loaded with fa- vors and defended at all dmes. Attention is given to his leadership of the Southern rights forces in GENERAL HISTORY / 373 the Senate. As Chief Executive of the Confederacy he was not as effective as his wishes and abilities permitted, because of the jealousy of the seceded states for their sovereignty. Much attention is also given to his decisions affecting the operations of the Southern armies. Having spent two years in a Federal prison after the collapse of the Confed- eracy, Davis retired to private life, promoting the rebuilding of the Southern economy, but only oc- casionally appearing to make a speech. A more detailed but as yet incomplete biography is Hudson Strode's Jefferson Davis, [v. 1] American Patriot, 1808-1861 (New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1955. xx, 460 p.) 3370. Dumond, Dwight Lowell. Antislavery origins of the Civil War in the United States. Ann Arbor, University of Michigan Press, 1939. 143 p. 39-21 131 E449.D87 "List of additional readings": p. 131-134. "Se- lected bibliography of proslavery and antislavery publications": p. 135—139. Lectures delivered on the Commonwealth Foun- dation at University College, London, which analyze "the abolition indictment of slavery and trace the steps by which the defense of the institution forced men to proceed from a general discussion of the subject to a war against it." The antislavery move- ment is divided into three periods: The first (1787- 1833) centered about the activities of the racist American Colonization Society for promoting the deportation of free Negroes to Liberia. The second (1833-39) was marked by the rise of the American Anti-Slavery Society and a clarification of the prin- ciples of antislavery doctrine. Slavery's loss of na- tional approval, the rallying of the South to its defense, and the flight of abolitionists from slave to free states all made slavery a sectional issue. In the third (1839-61) manumission became a political question with the formation of the Liberty Party by the antislavery forces, and the major parties be- came sectional parties vying for control of the Fed- eral Government. The South 's refusal to permit outside influence to set in motion economic and social forces in favor of constitutional abolition is regarded as the decisive factor in bringing about secession and war. 3371. Dumond, Dwight Lowell. The secession movement, 1860-1861. New York, Mac- millan, 1931. 294 p. 31-30548 E440.5.D88 Bibliography: p. 273-286. This is one of those historical studies which de- rive their value from carefully delimiting the field of investigation, and confining their attention to what lies within it. In this University of Michi- gan dissertation Professor Dumond aimed "to state the premises upon which the several groups of Southerners justified resistance to the Federal Government, and to trace the process of secession." He is aware that slavery was the bone of conten- tion, and that vast economic and social interests were involved, but he is concerned with the ex- pression of these in a Federal system of govern- ment under a written constitution. "The Republi- cans affirmed the right and duty of Congress to exclude slavery from the territories. The Southern- rights men denied it to Congress, to the territorial legislatures, and to the people of a territory until they framed an organic law preparatory to admis- sion as a state." This was the issue which split the Democratic convention, brought about the election of a Republican President, kept the Southern leaders from acquiescence in this result, and frustrated the various attempts to work out a compromise. The author extracts the constitutional interpretations implicit in the course of events from April i860 to April 1 86 1 with great penetration. 3372. Dunning, William Archibald. Reconstruc- tion, political and economic, 1 865-1 877. New York, Harper, 1907. xvi, 378 p. (The Amer- ican Nation: a history, v. 22) 7-24164 E178.A54, v. 22 "Critical essays on authorities": p. [324J-357. The Reconstruction era is here seen not merely as a time when the victorious North imposed its will upon the defeated South, but as a time marked by a realignment of national powers and a re- adjustment of political forces which accompanied recovery from the wounds of civil war. It is this national, rather than Southern, transformation which occupies Professor Dunning here. The rival policies of the President and Congress in regard to Reconstruction and national administration are discussed in the light of their effect upon the South- ern state governments and their colored and white populations. While social, economic, and political conditions in the country as a whole left much to be desired, public attention came to be focused upon the irresponsible exploitation of Negro suffrage in the South, and on the spread of corruption in the Federal Government which political adversaries called "Grantism." The final chapters deal with the resurgence of the South, the nullification of Negro suffrage, the exposure of scandals through- out the administration, and the questionable elec- tion of 1876 and its aftermath. Professor Dun- ning's seven Essays on the Civil War and Recon- struction and Related Topics (New York, P. Smith, 1931. 397 p.) deal principally with the constitu- tional and governmental aspects of Reconstruction. 374 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 3373. Eaton, Clement. A history of the Southern Confederacy. New York, Macmillan, 1954. 35i p. > 54- 8 77 2 E487.E15 Mr. Eaton's purpose is to "delineate the changes which occurred in the society of the Old South under the impact of war." The secession movement was a conservative revolt, "in that the South would not accept the 19th century," and all segments of society were of necessity deeply affected by the progress and fortunes of the war. Attention is focused upon the morale of the army and of the civilian popula- tion, and the eventual decline of the will to resist. The role of women, the attrition of cultural institu- tions, the attitude of Negroes, and the personalities of civil and military leaders are described, and there are summaries of Confederate strategy and logistics. Mr. Eaton has drawn upon letters, diaries, and other personal narratives in his effort to illustrate the "human drama" of the Confederacy. Similar in scope, treatment, and thesis, and even more detailed, is E. Merton Coulter's The Confederate States of America (no. 4076). 3374. Fite, Emerson David. Social and industrial conditions in the North during the Civil War. New York, P. Smith, 1930. 318 p. 30-26614 HC105.6.F6 1930 First published in 19 10. The considerable literature on civil society in the Confederacy is matched by a surprising dearth of titles for the situation north of the battle lines. The present volume, originally published over 45 years ago, is largely concerned with the wartime economic boom, in which agriculture, transportation, manu- facturing, and commerce all participated, and in which capital and labor both shared. It also con- tains chapters on the progress, notwithstanding heavy Federal taxation, in municipal improvements, on the continuing foundation and endowment of colleges in spite of reduced attendance in them and in the high schools, on the prevalence of luxurious consumption and entertainment as usual which so outraged many an editorialist, and on the huge effort of organized charities to relieve the miseries, hardships, and dislocations caused by the war. 3375. Fladeland, Betty L. James Gillespie Birney: slaveholder to abolitionist. Ithaca, Cornell University Press, 1955. 323 p. 55-13997 E340.B6F55 Bibliography: p. 295-315. Birney (1792-1857) was the son of a wealthy slaveowner of Danville, Kentucky, and in 1818 moved to Huntsville, Alabama, where he established a successful law practice, acquired a nearby planta- tion, and entered state politics. In the course of the next decade he was converted to Presbyterianism and acquired a strong conviction of the evil of slavery and the duty of acting to end it. In 1830 he joined the American Colonization Society, and two years later became one of its agents. By 1834 he was ready to emancipate his own slaves and ally himself with the American Anti-Slavery Society. His at- tempts to publish an antislavery journal in Ken- tucky led to the usual menaces, and his withdrawal to Ohio. He served as corresponding secretary of the Anti-Slavery Society and was the candidate of the Liberty Party for President, passively in 1840 and actively in 1844, when he received 62,300 popu- lar votes. An accident followed by a stroke elim- inated him from public life in the following year. What an Alabama newspaper called his "retrograde progression" from slaveholder to colonizationist to abolitionist makes him one of the most interesting of the antislavery leaders. Miss Fladeland empha- sizes the religious motives of his later career, and the sacrifices which he willingly incurred in their behalf. 3376. Fleming, Walter L., ed. Documentary his- tory of Reconstruction, political, military, social, religious, educational & industrial, 1865 to the present time. Cleveland, A. H. Clark, 1906-7. 2 v. 6-39739 E668.F58 Walter Lynwood Fleming (1874-1932), an Ala- baman by birth, was probably the best known of William A. Dunning's pupils at Columbia Univer- sity, where he took his Ph. D. in 1904. He taught history at West Virginia University, Louisiana State University, where he is commemorated by an annual lectureship in Southern history, and from 1917 at Vanderbilt University in Nashville. The present compilation, with nearly 950 pages of text, has been regarded as a first-rate authority since its initial publication; a micro-offset reproduction was issued by Peter Smith in 1950. Volume I is chiefly con- cerned with the evolution of the Reconstruction policies of the Federal Government, and volume II with their concrete working out in the South, "with special reference to race relations, political morality, and economic, educational and religious matters." The phrase "to the present time" in the title means that materials on later conditions traced to Recon- struction policies, or on later reversals of such poli- cies, are included in some chapters. The documents, most of which are extracts and relatively brief, in- clude state constitutions, Federal and state laws, Congressional documents, a wide range of contem- porary publications including Southern newspapers, personal statements from a variety of sources, and previously unpublished pieces from the papers of President Johnson and the records of the War De- partment. The chapters are largely topical, and GENERAL HISTORY / 375 each opens with a brief introduction by the editor. Impressive as the compilation is, it is only reasonable to suppose that Dr. Fleming's conviction that Re- construction was an abomination vindictively im- posed upon the white people of the South had some influence in his selection of materials. 3377. Fleming, Walter L. The sequel of Appo- mattox; a chronicle of the reunion of the States. New Haven, Yale University Press, 1921. 332 p. (The Chronicles of America series, v. 32) 22-12154 E173.C56, v. 32 E668.F62 "Bibliographical note": p. 305-307. An economical and closely knit narrative of the Radical Republicans' triumph and the decade during which their system of white disfranchisement was imposed upon the South by military rule. The moral and intellectual results were more permanent than the material ones of debt and impoverishment: "the pleasantest side of Southern life came to an end," and "there was a marked change in Southern temperament toward the severe." The restoration of home rule brought in a long period of political stagnation, the result of fear "lest a developing democracy make trouble with the settlement of 1877." 3378. Freeman, Douglas Southall. The South to posterity; an introduction to the writings of Confederate history. New York, Scribner, 1939. 235 p. 39-28978 Z1242.5.F85 Bibliographical references in "Notes" (p. 205- 216); "A Confederate book shelf": p. 217-221. Dr. Freeman's attempts to satisfy readers of Gone with the Wind (no. 1619) and other Civil War novels of the 1930's who desired to go on to more serious fare, led to the present "brief history of Confederate history." Letters and diaries written during the war, the memoirs of participants both military and civil, noteworthy controversies in which the war was refought by the surviving leaders, the "matchless splendor" of the Official Records of the Rebellion (no. 3697) together with a few supplemental documentary publications, and the interpretations of European historians are re- viewed. Its depth of knowledge and finish of style, which must make this one of the most readable and rewarding works of bibliography ever written, have made many a convert to the glamor of the Lost Cause. 3379. [Garrison, Wendell Phillips, and Francis Jackson Garrison] William Lloyd Garri- son, 1805-1879; the story of his life told by his chil- dren. New York, Century Co., 1885-89. 4 v. 1 1— 14856 E449.G2546 3380. Nye, Russel B. William Lloyd Garrison and the humanitarian reformers. Boston, Little, Brown [1955] 215 p. (The Library of American biography) 55-747° E449.G2558 The comprehensive study of Garrison by his sons, providing a month-by-month account of his life through reprints of the majority of his letters, articles, and speeches, has been the primary source for all subsequent Garrison biographies, such as Lindsay Swift's William Lloyd Garrison (Phila- delphia, G. W. Jacobs, 191 1. 412 p.). The sons' sympathetic biography describes Garrison's im- poverished youth in Newburyport, Massachusetts, where he was apprenticed to a local newspaper edi- tor and himself entered the craft as the editor of the local Free Press in 1826. In 1828 he took up, among other crusades, the cause of the immediate and complete manumission of the South's slaves. After a period which included lecture tours and a stay in jail, Garrison in 1830 founded the Liberator, the foremost emancipation journal. His advocacy of pacifism and nonresistance did not prevent his being mobbed during several speaking engage- ments. By 1 86 1 he was generally regarded as the leader of the abolitionists, and he hailed secession, which he thought would teach the South a lesson, but not the war. On the ratification of the 13th amendment Garrison refused a 23d term as presi- dent of the American Anti-Slavery Society and ceased publishing the Liberator. During his re- maining years he turned his reformist energies to writing and preaching on behalf of free trade, women's rights, and other causes. Dr. Nye's brief volume makes Garrison's religious faith the cent- ral fact in his career, and likens his role to a guilty conscience of the North. 3381. Hart, Albert Bushnell. Slavery and aboli- tion, 1831-1841. New York, Harper, 1906. xv, 360 p. (The American Nation: a history, v. 16) 6-24128 E178.A54 "Critical essay on authorities": p. [3241-343. This contribution to the American Nation series by its editor has of late several times been described as obsolete or outmoded. It is listed here because, while more recent studies have done much to broaden our knowledge of the genesis and bases of abolitionism, and the details of plantation slavery, none has the same broad scope and balanced treat- ment. Here, in one modest-sized volume, is a description of slavery as an economic system and a way of life; the late attempt of the slave interest to find a theoretical justification for it; the ideas and activities of the abolitionists; and the impingement of abolitionism upon national politics and interna- tional relations through 1840. Hart lias been said to overemphasize the importance of W. L Garrison, 376 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES but in chapter XXI he offers evidence "which most conclusively shows how little Garrison is entitled to be taken as the typical or the chief abolitionist." He observes that down to 1840 the abolitionists had achieved practically nothing of a tangible kind, but that they had nevertheless "laid hold of a principle without which the republic could not exist — the principle, namely, that free discussion is the breath of liberty; and that any institution which could not bear the light of inquiry, argument, and denuncia- tion was a weak and a dangerous institution." 3382. Hendrick, Burton J. Lincoln's war Cabinet. Boston, Litde, Brown, 1946. 482 p. illus. 46-7733 E456.H4 A popular but substantial account of the activities and personalities of Lincoln's principal Civil War aides. The author credits Lincoln with genius in his appointing to Cabinet rank all his chief rivals for the Republican nomination. Each Cabinet mem- ber is described as to personality, political sympa- thies, contribution to the work of the Cabinet and the progress of the war, attitude toward Lincoln, role in party and national politics, and relations with fellow Cabinet members. Emphasis falls upon the efforts of Secretary of State Seward to control the Cabinet, the struggle for power between mod- erate and radical Republicans manifest in the debates over emancipation and McClellan's restoration to command, the relations of the Senate with the Cab- inet, and the personal antagonism between Salmon Portland Chase and Montgomery Blair, which even- tually weakened the cohesiveness of the original Cabinet, and led to the replacement of several of its members. 3383. Hendrick, Burton J. Statesmen of the lost cause; Jefferson Davis and his Cabinet. Bos- ton, Little, Brown, 1939. xvii, 452 p. illus. 39-28981 E487.H47 Bibliography: p. [433 H39. 3384. Patrick, Rembert W. Jefferson Davis and his Cabinet. Baton Rouge, Louisiana State University Press, 1944. 401 p. 44-9637 E487.P3 Bibliography: p. [3691-387. Mr. Hendrick studies the statesmanship and diplo- macy of the ruling circle of the Confederacy through an analysis of the lives and personalities of its civilian leaders. While most of the South's gen- erals were members of the aristocracy, the Cabinet posts and important diplomatic missions were largely filled by men of humbler origin. In show- ing how each Cabinet member failed to achieve his official goal, with the exception of the Postmaster General, Mr. Hendrick asserts that the statesman- ship of the South was inadequate for the situation at hand. Dr. Patrick, in his volume which orig- inated as a dissertation at the University of North Carolina, provides biographies of even the least distinguished members of the Cabinet and seeks to assess their contributions and their deficiencies in relation to the Confederate war effort. 3385. Henry, Robert Selph. The story of Re- construction. Indianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill, 1938. 633 p. 38-6264 E668.H516 Bibliography included in "Acknowledgments": P- 5957597- During Reconstruction there was something going on every minute, and Mr. Henry succeeds in getting an extraordinary proportion of it into his crowded pages. Like its predecessor, The Story of the Confederacy (no. 3698), "it is not so much an attempt to enlarge the knowledge of the period treated as to organize and present it in direct narrative form." The author's sympathies are clearly with the ex-Confederates, but his exemplary objectivity of tone allows the course of events to speak for itself. The 5 1 chapters are organized into 3 books: "Restoration," down to the passage of the Act of March 2, 1867, which, Congressman Gar- field said, put "the bayonet at the breast of every rebel in the South"; "Reconstruction," down to the admission of reconstructed Georgia in mid-July, 1870; and "Redemption," concerning which Mr. Henry says: "The story of the last six years of the period of Reconstruction is one of counter-revolu- tion — a counter-revolution effected under the forms of law where that was possible; effected by secrecy and by guile, where that would serve; effected openly, regardless of the forms of law, with violence or the threat of violence, where that had to be. But the counter-revolution was effected, at a cost to the South and its future incalculably great, justified only by the still greater cost of not effecting it." 3386. Horn, Stanley F. Invisible empire; the story of the Ku Klux Klan, 1 866-1 871. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1939. 434 p. 39-8103 E668.H78 "References": p. [4211-422. Extensive documentary evidence employed by the author shows that the Klan had innocuous begin- nings as a social club in Pulaski, Tennessee, in De- cember 1865, but rapidly grew into a powerful political league with the avowed purpose of protect- ing the South's white population at a time when they seemed to be without governmental support and in danger of subjection by their former slaves. Mr. Horn sets forth many details of the organization and methods of the Klan as it steadily increased in scope and in the violence of its attempts to restore the prewar position of the Southern whites. Mr. GENERAL HISTORY / 377 Horn believes in the essential honesty of the Klan's members, who realized the inherent dangers of such an extralegal agency, and "ceased its use as soon as it had served their purpose, their original objectives fairly well attained." Most of the book is devoted to a state-by-state examination of the Klan's activities and their effects upon Southern Negroes and whites, the Federal Government, and the local civil and military administration. 3387. Hyman, Harold Melvin. Era of the oath; Northern loyalty tests during the Civil War and Reconstruction. Philadelphia, University of Pennsylvania Press, 1954. 229 p. 54-7108 E458.8.H9 Bibliography: p. [2o8]-222. 3388. Dorris, Jonathan Truman. Pardon and am- nesty under Lincoln and Johnson; the restor- ation of the Confederates to their rights and priv- ileges, 1 861-1898. Introd. by J. G. Randall. Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina Press, 1953. xxi, 459 P- 53-13363 E668.D713 Bibliography: p. [4231-437. Dr. Hyman's "era of the oath" extends from April 1 86 1, when, on the motion of Attorney General Bates, all employees of the Departments were re- quired to take the oath of allegiance anew, to May 1884, when Representative S. S. Cox of New York finally succeeded in his campaign to bring about the repeal of the surviving test oaths from the Civil War. During this time they had been imposed for a di- versity of purposes, but, the author thinks, had in- creasingly become a mere means for the Radical Republicans in Congress to identify and reward their own partisans. The book is written with the loyalty oaths applied to academic personnel after World War II in mind, and heaps up evidence to show that the oaths of 1861-84 failed as a means of deter- mining loyalty, and that they operated to keep the honorable and conscientious out of office or fran- chise, and let the unscrupulous in. With this ani- mus, it is hardly fair to the oath of future loyalty as used by President Lincoln, and, after his initial period of vindictiveness, by President Johnson in restoring the states of the Confederacy to the Union with their old ruling class still in charge. Four blood-stained years of civil war were to be forgotten in exchange for a simple pledge of future good be- havior — conciliation could hardly go much further. This salient fact is also obscured in Dr. Dorris' Pardon and Amnesty, because of his somewhat naive conviction that "the authorities at Washington" had no warrant for giving the seceders "the odious ap- pellations of 'rebels' and 'traitors.' " The real pro- scription came when the congressional majority succeeded in writing their "ironclad test oath" into the 14th Amendment, and, by substituting a retro- spective for a prospective oath, excluded the former Confederates from franchise and office. Dr. Dorris' volume puts in order for the first time the complex facts concerning the status of the active Confederates, in the eyes of the Federal Government, from the initial secessions to the final repeal of disability under the 14th Amendment on June 8, 1898. There are special treatments of the cases of Robert E. Lee and Jefferson Davis, and the general course of events in North Carolina. 3389. Jenkins, William Sumner. Proslavery thought in the Old South. Chapel Hill, Uni- versity of North Carolina Press, 1935. 381 p. ( [The University of North Carolina. Social study se- ries]) 35-i5 2 59 E441.J46 Bibliography: p. 309-358. Soon after the Missouri crisis of 1820 the Old South began to produce a voluminous body of theo- retical and polemical writing in defense of slavery, which by 1835 had acquired the status of orthodoxy within the section, and which continued to accumu- late even after the outbreak of war in 1861, and down to the collapse of the Confederacy. In the present volume Professor Jenkins aims "to indicate the vari- ous thought trends, to evaluate their significance, and to estimate their weight in the enure body of pro- slavery thought." He considers in turn theories of the nature, origin, and legal basis of slavery; of slavery's relation to the State, the Constitution, and republican government; of the moral and re- ligious justification of slavery; of the racial basis of slavery (including the "plural origin" doctrine, which made the Negro a separate and not neces- sarily human species); and of slavery as an order- ing of social classes and economic production. He finds that the defense of slavery was so elaborated in the thought of antiquity and the Middle Ages that the theorists of the Old South could draw upon these sources at length, and actually contrib- uted little that was original. "The misfortune to the South was that its mental power was taken out of other fields of endeavor at a time when it could have been most fruitful in the development of a higher civilization." 3390. Lincoln, Abraham. Collected works. The Abraham Lincoln Association, Springfield, Illinois. Roy P. Basler, editor; Marion Dolores Pratt and Lloyd A. Dunlap, assistant editors. New Brunswick, N. J., Rutgers University Press, 1953— 55. 9 v. illus. 53-6293 E457-9I 1953 Contents. — 1. 1 S24-1S48. — 2. 1848-1858. — 3. 1858-1860.— 4. 1860-1861.— 5. 1861-1862. — 6. 1862-1863.— 7. 1863-1864.— 8. 1864-1865. — Index. 181240— 60- 28 378 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 3391. Angle, Paul M., ed. The Lincoln reader. New Brunswick, N. J., Rutgers University Press, 1947. 564 p. illus. 47-30067 E457.A58 Bibliography: p. [544H47. 3392. Thomas, Benjamin P. Abraham Lincoln, a biography. New York, Knopf, 1952. xiv, 548, xii p. illus. 52-6425 E457.T427 1952. Bibliography: p. [523 ]— 548. 3393. Sandburg, Carl. Abraham Lincoln; the war years. With 414 halftones of photo- graphs and 249 cuts of cartoons, letters, documents . . . New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1939. 4 v. 39-27998 E457.4.S36 3394. Randall, James G. Lincoln, the President. New York, Dodd, Mead, 1945-55. 4 v. illus. (American political leaders) 45-10041 E457.R2 Includes bibliographies. Contents. — v. 1-2. Springfield to Gettysburg. — v. 3. Midstream. — v. 4. Last full measure. 3395. Basler, Roy P. The Lincoln legend; a study in changing conceptions. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1935. 335 p. illus. 35-13765 E457.B35 Z8505.B31 Thesis (Ph. D.) — Duke University, 1931. "A classified bibliography of poetry, fiction, and drama dealing with Lincoln": p. 309-I327]. In 1857 Lincoln (1809-1865) was a fairly success- ful attorney of Springfield, Illinois, whose most profitable client was the Illinois Central Railroad. He had only recently returned to politics as a Re- publican after a retirement of some years; his earlier Whig career had included four terms in the Illinois Legislature and one in the U. S. House of Repre- sentatives (1847-49). In 1858 he contested S. A. Douglas' seat in the U. S. Senate, and won national celebrity if not the election from the set debates in which they engaged throughout the State. He was still a minor candidate when the Republican Con- vention met at Chicago in i860, but the more famous leaders eliminated each other, and Lincoln as the Republican candidate carried the electoral college against a Democratic Party now split into fragments. Eleven of the fifteen slave states made his election the occasion for secession, and the retiring admin- istration allowed them to organize their military re- sources without the least molestation. Resorting to arms to maintain the Union under such handicaps, Lincoln had to conduct a four years' war, of which the first two were largely frustration; and when vic- tory was at last secure, he was assassinated by a mad actor. Lincoln's failure to domineer or engage in histrionics led most of his contemporaries to realize his greatness only in retrospect, but the popular in- stinct which has picked him out as one of the two greatest Americans, and has made him the lay saint of the democratic faith, is as sound as it is persistent. The foundation work, both in collecting Lincoln's writings and in writing his life and times, was per- formed in the last century by his secretaries, John G. Nicolay and John Hay. The first task has been recendy completed in a quite definitive manner, in the Collected Wor\s edited by Dr. Basler under the auspices of the Abraham Lincoln Association. Sup- plementary in some degree is David C. Mearns' The Lincoln Papers: the Story of the Collection, with Selections to July 4, 1861 (Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1948. 2 v. (xvii, 681 p.)), but unfor- tunately Lincoln had accumulated very little down to i860. Paul M. Angle's A Shelf of Lincoln Boo\s: A Critical, Selective Bibliography of Lincolniana (New Brunswick, N. J., Rutgers University Press, 1946. xvii, 142 p.) is a uniquely helpful guide to Lincoln literature down to its date, but of course cannot serve for the enormous output of the last dozen years. Dr. Angle's Lincoln Reader is an anthology of biographical materials concerning Lin- coln, including both contemporaries and later writ- ers, skillfully pieced together with some connective matter by the compiler. The late Benjamin P. Thomas, in Portrait for Posterity: Lincoln and His Biographers (New Brunswick, N. J., Rutgers Uni- versity Press, 1947. xvii, 329 p.), offers penetrating estimates of attitudes and outlooks, especially of Lincoln's earlier biographers. Mr. Thomas went on to write his own biography, entered above; since its appearance it has been generally acclaimed as the best-balanced and most thoroughly informed one-volume life; but it is sometimes not very appar- ent that the subject was a great man. Mr. Sand- burg's War Years is a vivid and tremendous panorama of Lincoln's Washington, but both it and his earlier Abraham Lincoln, The Prairie Years (New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1926. 2 v.) are for readers with leisure and patience. There is now a one-volume condensation of both: Abraham Lincoln, the Prairie Years and the War Years (New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1954. xiv, 762 p.). The late Professor Randall's Lincoln, the President is a work of immense scholarship, and probably treats its sub- ject as objectively as anyone could whose sympathies were wholly with the aristocracy of the Old South. Professor Richard N. Current, who completed Dr. Randall's fourth volume, has also made a one-volume condensation, chiefly from those parts "which deal primarily with Lincoln the man and with his per- sonal relationships": Mr. Lincoln (New York, Dodd, Mead, 1957. 392 p.). Dr. Basler's The Lincoln Legend aims "to show how poets, writers of fiction, dramatists, and occasionally biographers have, with GENERAL HISTORY / 379 the help of the folk-mind, created about Lincoln a national legend or myth which in conception is much like the hero-myths of other nations." Other biographies, documentary publications, special studies, and monographs are so numerous that space equal to the whole of this section could readily be filled with them. 3396. Meade, Robert Douthat. Judah P. Benja- min, Confederate statesman. New York, Oxford University Press, 1943. 432 p. 43-1 1218 E467.1.B4M4 "Select bibliography": p. 415-417. Born in the British West Indies of Jewish parents, Benjamin (1811-1884) had three distinguished careers in one lifetime. After growing up in South Carolina, he setded in New Orleans and com- menced his career as a leader of the American bar and as a legislator. His natural conservatism led him to join the Whigs, who in 1852 sent him to the U. S. Senate, where he worked for national expansion to increase the South's strength. After 1856 he became a Democrat and joined in the de- fense of Southern rights, and was among the first to advocate secession. His friendship with Jeffer- son Davis brought about his appointment as At- torney General of the Confederacy, and then as Secretary of War in September 1861. His career as Confederate statesman was his least fortunate, since he never had the confidence of the masses and was made a scapegoat for Confederate military failures. In 1862 he transferred to the Department of State, directing the Confederacy's desperate but vain efforts to obtain diplomatic recognition from the European powers. His third career began in 1866, following the Confederacy's collapse, when he fled to England and rapidly became a brilliant and successful barrister, limiting himself to cases before the House of Lords and the Judicial Com- mittee of the Privy Council. 3397. Milton, George Fort. The eve of conflict; Stephen A. Douglas and the needless war. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1934. 608 p. illus. 34-36084 E415.9.D73M5 Bibliography: p. [57i]~58o. A sympathetic study which in two chapters passes over the youth and early career of Douglas (1813-1861) so as to concentrate upon his service as Democratic Senator from Illinois in years of al- most unintermitted sectional crisis (1847-61). Douglas, his private utterances show, regarded slavery as "a curse beyond computation," but as one shielded by the Constitution from political in- terference. The Kansas-Nebraska Act of 1854, which unleashed the later stages of the crisis and for which Douglas accepted full responsibility, was introduced primarily because Chicago and the Northwest needed a railroad to the Pacific, and could not get one before the political organization of the vast Platte country, which by the 1850's was long overdue. Southern Congressmen insisted upon equal rights for slaveowners in Kansas and Nebraska up to their admission as states, and Douglas, needing Southern votes and regarding the establishment of slavery in them as an economic impossibility, acquiesced. Thereafter he defended the measure as a genuinely democratic settlement, and strove to preserve the Union in spite of the extremists of either side, his unremitting efforts leading to his premature breakdown and death. At the close of 1857 Douglas, by denouncing the proslavery Lecompton Constitution for Kansas, broke with the Buchanan administration, thereby becoming increasingly estranged from the Southern rights leaders. Milton agreed with Alexander H. Stephens (no. 3415) that "if the extremists of the South had not prevented, Douglas would have pre- vailed; the Civil War would not have occurred." 3398. Nevins, Allan. Ordeal of the Union. New York, Scribner, 1947. 2 v. illus. 47-11072 E415.7.N4 Contents. — v. 1. Fruits of manifest destiny, 1847— 1852. A note on sources (p. 561-562). — v. 2. A house dividing, 1 852-1 857. 3399. Nevins, Allan. The emergence of Lincoln. New York, Scribner, 1950. 2 v. illus. 50-9920 E415.7.N38 Contents. — v. 1. Douglas, Buchanan, and party chaos, 1857-1859. — v. 2. Prologue to civil war, 1859-1861. Bibliography (p. 491-506). The first two installments of what is designed to be a large-scale history of the Civil War era. Pro- fessor Nevins believes that the Civil War could have been avoided had the people and their leaders acted together in solving the problems of slavery, sectional irritation, and the correct relations between the races. The conflict between the North and the South is viewed as essentially one between the rising force of national homogeneity and the declining influence of regionalism, and is shown to have gotten out of hand as it progressively preoccupied the passions rather than the reason of all Americans. Cultural and economic as well as political developments are traced to convey a complete picture of the America of the times when sectionalism took such a firm grip on men's tempers that civil war had to deter- mine the future position of the Negro race in America. As the author shows, the Presidency, under Taylor, Fillmore, Pierce, and Buchanan, was never more devoid of initiative and leadership — at a time when such qualities were indispensable. On 380 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES one point the author is emphatic: "of all the mon- istic explanations for the drift to war, that posited upon supposed economic causes is the flimsiest." Professor Nevins has used contemporary sources throughout in the form of speeches, diaries, letters, and periodicals. 3400. Nichols, Roy F. The disruption of Ameri- can Democracy. New York, Macmillan, 1948. xviii, 612 p. illus. 48-4344 E436.N56 Bibliography: p. 565-589. Describes the progressive debilitation of the Dem- ocratic Party, called the "American Democracy" in the 19th century, during the years 1856-61. The author treats at length the party conventions of 1856 and i860, the personal quarrels of leading politicians, the influence of sectional sentiments upon their ac- tions, the splinter parties breaking off from the Democracy, and the relationship of the Democracy to Congress and to the opposition parties. The party itself is examined in the relations of its voters, machines, and leaders both on national and state levels. The Democracy is credited with working to establish cooperative government; however, "deeply affected by the shocks of the collisions oc- curring within the society in which it operated and of which it was a part, the party failed to overcome the divisive attitudes and was shattered." War came as a result of this failure. The book continues into a more critical period the study of the party which served as the author's doctoral dissertation at Co- lumbia University: The Democratic Machine, 1850- 1854 (New York, Columbia University, 1923. 248 p.). 3401. Nye, Russel B. Fettered freedom; civil liberties and the slavery controversy, 1830- 1860. East Lansing, Michigan State College Press, 1949. 273 p. illus. 5 49-3 6 5 6 JC599.U5N9 "Bibliography of sources": p. 253-269. Analyzes the controversy between the North and South arising from divergent interpretations of the degree to which men may enjoy their natural and constitutional rights by tracing the history of the attempts to suppress the abolitionist movement. During their agitation to arouse the Nation against slavery, the abolitionists were subjected to mob violence, censorship, unconstitutional interpreta- tions of the laws, discrimination in regard to em- ployment, and other curtailments of civil rights — "the freedoms belonging to the citizen as an indi- vidual and as a member of society." From evidence in the form of contemporary newspaper accounts, court and police records, and diaries, the author shows that the deprivation of the abolitionists' civil rights won for them a large body of supporters "who thought less of the wrongs of the slave than of the rights of the white man." The abolitionists were able to point out that the true issue of the sectional struggle was the extent to which civil rights may be curtailed in the interests of the majority. 3402. Phillips, Ulrich Bonnell. American Negro slavery; a survey of the supply, employment and control of Negro labor as determined by the plantation regime. New York, Appleton, 191 8. 529 p. 18-11187 E441.P549 3403. Stampp, Kenneth M. The peculiar insti- tution: slavery in the ante bellum South. New York, Knopf, 1956. 435, xiii p. 56-5800 E441.S8 "Manuscripts consulted, and their locations": p. 43 r ~[436]. Professor Phillips' book is concerned with the rise, nature, and influence of slavery in the planta- tion system, which it supported and to which it owed its existence. The Negro is pictured by Dr. Phillips as a child-like being culturally and intel- lectually inferior to the white man. This work was usually considered as a definitive treatment until the publication of Professor Stampp's new synthesis from the same or similar sources to those employed by Dr. Phillips. Dr. Stampp assumes that "innately Negroes are only white men with black skins," and produces a history of slavery be- tween 1830 and i860 which incorporates the point of view of the slaves themselves, and shows in de- tail how the good intentions of humane masters were normally frustrated by the essential inhu- manity of the system. Both refer to contemporary periodicals, letters, plantation journals, and items pertaining to the foreign and domestic slave trade; however, Dr. Phillips finds that slavery was essen- tial to the rise of the cotton industry and beneficial, as a whole, compared with Negro life in Africa, while Dr. Stampp can find no philosophical justi- fication for the "peculiar institution" except that it paid the master class. And it paid in the older slave states only because they raised a surplus of Negroes for sale and transportation to the newer states, from Alabama to Texas. 3404. Phillips, Ulrich Bonnell. The course of the South to secession; an interpretation. Edited by E. Merton Coulter. New York, Appleton- Century, 1939. 176 p. 40-2173 F213.P65 "Prepared and published under the direction of the American Historical Association from the in- come of the Albert J. Beveridge memorial fund." Lectures delivered at Northwestern University in 1932 and originally published in the Georgia His- torical Quarterly are here reprinted with the author's GENERAL HISTORY / 38 1 article, "The Central Theme of Southern History," prepared for the 1928 meeting of the American His- torical Association. The lectures provide a historical rationale for the establishment of the Confederacy, while the theme of the article is that the South has always been and always will be the land of white supremacy. With this premise in mind, Professor Phillips' lectures assert that the United States from its colonization had no sectional interests or senti- ments which could drive them apart. It was not until the 1820's that slavery became an issue, and then it took the form of legislation and other activ- ities to prevent slave revolts. Professor Phillips lays the main blame for secession at the door of the aboli- tionists, whose efforts to force the Federal Govern- ment and the Congress to intervene in Southern affairs eventually caused violent measures on the part of Southern "fire-eaters." This danger to slavery, Professor Phillips concludes, set in motion the Southern independence movement — "a program so much in keeping with American precedent and the gospel of self-government, so legitimated by state sovereignty, so long considered, and now supported by such a multitude of conservative citizens." 3405. Phillips, Ulrich Bonnell. The life of Robert Toombs. New York, Macmillan, 1913. 281 p. 13-17129 E415.9.T6P5 Toombs (1810-1885) was a planter, lawyer, and political leader of ante bellum Georgia, in the State Legislature from 1837 and in the U. S. Congress after 1844. A conservative Whig, he was ordinarily a moderate advocate of Southern rights, but at the peak of the crisis of 1850 he came out strongly in favor of the equal claim of the slave states to the territories in a series of speeches which established his fame. When the compromise was effected, he organized a Constitutional Union Party to defend it, and entered the Democratic fold only when the movement failed to spread beyond Georgia. Again he exerted a moderating influence until the crisis of i860, when he took his stand on the Crittenden com- promise measures and, on their rejection by the Re- publicans, came out for immediate secession. Failing to obtain election to the Presidency of the Confederate States, he was too unruly an individu- alist to succeed either as Secretary of State or as a brigadier-general, and was out of public life after 1862. He did not return until Reconstruction was over, but in 1877 and for a few years thereafter, until the failure of his health, was prominent in the reorganization of Georgia. 3406. Pierce, Edward L. Memoir and letters of Charles Sumner. Boston, Roberts Bros., 1877-93. 4 v - ' uus - 13-19830 E415.9.S9P6 Contents. — 1. 1811-1838. — 2. 1838-1845. — 3. 1 845-1 860. — 4. 1 860-1 874. Born in Boston and prepared for the bar at Harvard, Sumner (1811-1874) entered politics at the top when elected to the Senate in 1851 by a coalition of Democrats and Free-Soilers. Previously he had practiced law, traveled extensively in Europe, and delivered striking public addresses advocating world peace and equal rights for all races. He helped found the Republican Party and, after a vituperative speech on "The Crime against Kansas," was brutally assaulted on the floor of the Senate in 1856 by a South Carolina Representative whose uncle was a Senator from the same State. Sumner was absent from the Senate for the three and a half years required for his recovery. He was made chairman of the Senate Foreign Relations Committee in 1861 and advised the Cabinet throughout the war in matters relating to interna- tional law. Although he had been a staunch sup- porter of Lincoln, Sumner broke with Andrew Johnson over Reconstruction policy and led the Senate in the impeachment proceedings of 1867. During the Grant administration he defeated the President's plan to annex Santo Domingo, and was removed from his committee chairmanship for fear that he might harm the Alabama Claims negotia- tions then being conducted with Great Britain. He was still an erratic but powerful moral force when his heart gave out after a session of the Senate in March 1874. This biography by a devoted friend and admirer is old-fashioned and at times over-detailed, but is yet to be replaced. 3407. Pressly, Thomas J. Americans interpret their Civil War. Princeton, Princeton Uni- versity Press, 1954. xvi, 347 p. 52-13166 E468.5.P7 Viewing the Civil War as "the classic example of a major event in the history of the United States which has been explained and interpreted in a wide variety of quite different ways," the author treats it "as a specific case history which illuminates to some extent the problems of [historical] relativism and causation." Since the war "has seemed to in- volve vital issues of lasting significance, it has en- listed not only the interest of successive generations but also their loyalties and their emotions," and even recent utterances have been, in the phrase of the younger O. W. Holmes, "touched with fire." The survey is carried from the reactions of Motley, Bancroft, and Prescott to the attack on Fort Sum- ter, down to the present "confusion of voices." 3408. Randall, James G. The Civil War and Re- construction; with supplementary bibliog 382 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES raphy. [27. 3516. Wolff, Robert L. The Balkans in our time. 1956. xxi, 618 p. maps, tables. (Russian Research Center studies [23]) 56-6529 DR48.5.W6 "Useful works in Western languages": p. [ 588]— 596. Says the editor of the series, Donald C. McKay, in his Introduction: "The present volume on The Balkans in Our Time is a joint publication of The American Foreign Policy Library and the Russian Research Center Studies. The plan and focus of the volume follow very closely those of others in the Foreign Policy Library, but the much greater length and more detailed treatment reflect the interests of the Russian Research Center. The compromise be- tween these two purposes is evident in the 'out- sized' format in which the volume has been issued." It might be added that there is less material on American relations and interests than in most of the other volumes. 3517. Bailey, Thomas A. A diplomatic history of the American people. 5th ed. New York, Appleton-Century-Crofts, 1955. xxviii, 969, xxxix p. (Crofts American history series) 55-7869 JX1407.B24 1955 A college textbook covering its subject from 1775 to the present day, which was originally published in 1940 and has grown steadily thicker as the narra- tive of recent events has been added to successive editions. The principal emphasis is placed upon the role of public opinion, and the cartoons of successive periods are drawn upon for illustrations. There are 52 chapters in the latest edition, and the half- way point falls at the Venezuela crisis of 1893. Lewis Ethan Ellis' A Short History of American Diplomacy (New York, Harper, 195 1. 604 p.) is an alternative textbook for those who would prefer a briefer treatment. 3518. Bardett, Ruhl J., ed. The record of Ameri- can diplomacy; documents and readings in the history of American foreign relations. 3d ed., rev. and enl. New York, Knopf, 1954. xxi, 790, xvi p. 54-2821 E183.7.B35 1954 Bibliography: p. 789-790. This work is designed to make available to college classes in American diplomatic history a collection of documents which will enable students "to compare policies adopted at different times regarding the same area or subject, trace the evolution of major policies, and examine the reasoning used to defend or advance American foreign interests." Intended to supplement general accounts of diplomatic his- tory, the documents, both public and private and for the most part drawn from printed sources, are grouped in topical chapters which follow a general chronological progression but sometimes overlap. They begin with the colonial era and end with the Korean War. Short passages by the editor intro- duce each chapter. An alternative documentary textbook in American diplomatic history is edited by William Appleman Williams: The Shaping of American Diplomacy; Readings and Documents in American Foreign Relations, iy 50-1955 (Chicago, Rand McNally, 1956. 1 130 p.). It includes a selec- tion of writings on each period of our diplomatic history by present-day historians, along with a selec- tion of contemporary documents which, in some instances, duplicate those in Mr. Bartlett's collection. 3519. Bemis, Samuel Flagg, ed. The American secretaries of state and their diplomacy. J. Franklin Jameson, H. Barrett Learned, James Brown Scott, advisory board. New York, Knopf [1927-29] 10 v. 27-8473 E183.7.B46 Volume 1 is devoted to a historical introduction by J. B. Scott on the diplomacy of the Revolution, and studies of the Confederation's two secretaries for foreign affairs, Robert R. Livingston and John Jay. In the subsequent volumes each secretary of state from Thomas Jefferson (1789-94) to Charles Evans Hughes (1921-25) is the subject of a study by an expert on the period or the subject. The essays vary in length, according to the length of the individual's term and the importance of his historical contribu- tions. A bibliographical note for each secretary is appended. The set provides a valuable means of approach to the particular transactions of American diplomacy in detail. The Department of State has recently published an attractive short volume en- tided The Secretaries of State, Portraits and Bio- graphic Sketches (Washington, 1956. 124 p.) which includes all the secretaries to John Foster Dulles (from 1953). 414 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 3520. Bemis, Samuel Flagg. A diplomatic history of the United States. 4th ed. New York, Holt, 1955. 1018 p. 55-5982 E183.7.B4682 1955 This has been a standard textbook in the field since it was originally published in 1936. The suc- cessive editions have made minor alterations in the original text, but have brought the book current with the momentous developments in recent interna- tional affairs. After a preliminary discussion of the role of America in European conflicts between 1492 and 1775, the author sketches the foundations of American foreign policy as established between 1775 and 1823; the diplomacy of continental expansion, 1823-99; an d since 1899, the United States as a world power. This last phase now fills over half of the volume. The author deals with the rise and significance of such historic doctrines as the free- dom of the seas, the Monroe Doctrine, avoidance of entanglement in European conflicts, Manifest Destiny, the self-determination of peoples, and inter- national arbitration. 3521. Bemis, Samuel Flagg, and Grace Gardner Griffin. Guide to the diplomatic history of the United States, 1775-1921. Washington, U. S. Govt. Print. Off., 1935. New York, P. Smith, 1951. reprint: xvii, 979 p. 52-6052 Z6465.U5B4 195 1 The first and larger part of this monumental Guide is an annotated bibliography arranged under the headings of a minutely chronological review of American diplomacy, and under each heading the materials are classified as bibliographic aids, special works, printed sources, manuscripts, and maps. Chapter 23, long enough to stand as a separate part (p. 685-789), lists "General Works, Historical Pub- lications and Aids." Part II consists of a 150-page essay on the sources for American diplomatic his- tory, including printed state papers both American and foreign, and archival collections in the United States and abroad. The continuing demand for this indispensable guide led to its reproduction, through photographic process, by a commercial publisher 16 years after its appearance as a government document. 3522. Hill, Charles E. Leading American treaties. New York, Macmillan, 1931. 399 p. 33-i3 2 94 JX1407.H5 1931 This work, first published in 1922, is not a com- pilation of documents, but an approach to the his- tory of American foreign relations through "the historical setting and the chief provisions of the leading American treaties," or arrangements in- volving groups of treaties. The setdements in- cluded are: the French alliance of 1778; the treaty of independence, 1783; Jay's treaty, 1794; the con- vention with France, 1800; the Louisiana purchase, 1803; the peace treaty of Ghent, 1814; the conven- tion with Great Britain, 1818; the Florida purchase, 1 819; the Webster- Ashburton treaty, 1842; the peace treaty of Guadalupe Hidalgo, 1848; the treaties with Japan, 1854 and 1858; the Alaska purchase, 1867; the treaty of Washington, 1871 ; the peace treaty with Spain, 1898; and the Panama Canal treaties from 1850 to 1902. A brief bibliography follows each chapter. 3523. Perkins, Dexter. The American approach to foreign policy. Cambridge, Harvard Uni- versity Press, 1952. 203 p. (The Gottesman lec- tures, Uppsala University) 53-3288 E183.7.P46 1952 Bibliography: p. [i93]-i95- A series of lectures delivered in 1949, explaining the factors influencing the formulation and imple- mentation of American foreign policy. After a brief general summary of our foreign relations to 1945, Mr. Perkins deals with each factor separately. The drive to achieve and maintain hemispheric solidarity must not be confused with imperialism, nor should our economic system be held exclusively responsible for policy decisions. An overdeveloped sense of morality has led to the sacrifice of our na- tional interests while militarism and pacificism al- ternately affect our emotions. A final chapter views ' the antagonism of the Soviet Union and the United States as "the largest and most significant fact in the contemporary world of politics," and assesses the relative advantages of each side, with only the sober conclusion that "the capacity of a great self-govern- ing people to deal with a continuing world crisis , will be tested in the years ahead as it has never been . tested before." 3524. Savage, Carlton. Policy of the United States toward maritime commerce in war. Wash- ington, U. S. Govt. Print. Off., 1934-36. 2 v. (U. S. Dept. of State. Publication no. 331, 835) 34-28033 JX5207.S3 1934 Contents. — v. 1. 1776-1914. — v. 2. 1914-1918. A narrative and documentary history of the United States' contributions to the law of naval war- fare. Consistendy enunciated in numerous treaties, civil and admiralty court decisions, naval codes and governmental declarations, and carried out as normal procedures by American maritime officials, Amer- ican doctrines concerning the immunities of neutral goods on enemy ships, and of enemy goods on neu- tral ships, continuous voyage, the validity of block- ade, immunity of private property at sea, and contraband of war were adopted by most major maritime powers between 1783 and the beginning of World War I. Unrestricted submarine warfare, in violation of these rules of law, was a major cause of American participation in that war. Six hundred DIPLOMATIC HISTORY AND FOREIGN RELATIONS / 415 documents are appended, 431 of which concern World War I. 3525. Tate, Merze. The United States and arma- ments. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1948. 312 p. 48-5607 JX1974.T32 "Much of the material of Part I ... is in [the author's] The Disarmament Illusion." "Selective bibliography": p. 278-286. A documented history of American participation in disarmament conferences and negotiations from 1794 to 1947. It discusses the agreements effecting disarmament on the Great Lakes, the Hague Con- ferences of 1899 and 1907, our role in the Con- ference for the Reduction and Limitation of Armaments sponsored by the League of Nations in 1934, our interwar policy regarding naval disarma- ment, the program for disarming Germany and Japan following World War II, and our advocacy of the international control of atomic energy. Miss Tate concludes that as long as a nation must defend its own security, and international disunity and mistrust persist, there can be little hope for the achievement of true disarmament. 3526. Wilson, Robert Renbert. The international law standard in treaties of the United States. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1953. 321 p. 53-5063 JX1406.W5 Bibliography: p. [2913-3 10. Of special value to advanced students of inter- national law and foreign affairs, this book shows that America's foreign relations, as expressed by U. S. treaty practice, have been influenced by our tradi- tional respect for the rule of law in domestic affairs. This survey of perfected international agreements which the United States has ratified from 1778 to 1950 records the number and variety of specific treaty references to international law or the law of nations. Much of the work is devoted to the analysis of treaties dealing with the pacific settlement of disputes, commerce and navigation, the inde- pendence and jurisdiction of states, and war and neutrality. A basis for comparison is provided in an appendix containing summaries of the treaty practices of Great Britain, France, Russia, Germany, Italy, and Japan. Aii. PERIOD STUDIES 3527. Beale, Howard K. Theodore Roosevelt and the rise of America to world power. Balti- more, Johns Hopkins Press, 1956. 600 p. (The Albert Shaw lectures on diplomatic history, 1953) 56-10255 E757.B4 A study of the effect of one man upon America's role in world politics, this book is a personalized review of the revolution in American foreign policy which began in 1889 and ended in 1909, and which placed America in the position of a great power. Beginning with his entrance into public life, Theo- dore Roosevelt worked ceaselessly for America's overseas expansion. He was convinced that this was the only way to achieve the necessary power to sup- port our messianic role, shared with Great Britain, of civilizing the world. As President, T. R. carried on U. S. foreign relations by means of personal and secret contacts with the heads of state of the great powers, and maintained American ability to take action whenever these negotiations were of no avail. Extracts from private and public correspond- ence, as well as speeches, articles, and interviews have been used to illustrate aspects of Roosevelt's character, such as his peculiar brand of racism, and their relation to his insights and conclusions on foreign policy, arrived at both as a private citizen and as a public servant. 3528. Bemis, Samuel Flagg. The diplomacy of the American Revolution. New York, Ap- pleton-Century, 1935. 293 p. 5 fold. maps. 35-8172 E183.7.B48, v. 1 E249.B44 "This volume is published from a fund contrib- uted to the American Historical Association by the Carnegie Corporation of New York." "Bibliographical note": p. 265-273. As director of the European Mission of the Library of Congress from 1927-29, Dr. Bemis initiated the mass photocopying of materials for American history in European archives and libraries. These sources he combined with American ones and printed materials in order to present, he believed for the first time, "a balanced and somewhat condensed nar- rative of the diplomacy of American independence," in which "details have been subordinated to the sig- nificant factors and the broad movements." Four chapters are devoted to relations with France, three to Spain, three to the Netherlands, one to the Armed Neutrality, and five to the peace negotiations. To the author the essence of the story resides in the progressive entanglement of the United States in European diplomacy through the French alliance, and the bold stroke of Franklin, Jay, and Adams in 17S2. when they "broke their instructions and cut loose from French advice and control." The work's continuing value is confirmed by a 1957 reprinting in the series of Midland books issued by the Indiana University Press. 416 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 3529. Bemis, Samuel Flagg. John Quincy Adams and the foundations of American foreign policy. New York, Knopf, 1949. xix, 588, xv p. 49-10664 E377.B45 1949 John Quincy Adams (1767-1848) served as United States Minister to the Netherlands, Prussia, Russia, and Britain, was concerned with important questions of foreign policy in the Senate of the United States, and assisted in concluding the Treaty of Ghent, before embarking upon his memorable term as Monroe's Secretary of State (1817-25). Ac- cepting the claim that Adams was America's greatest diplomatist, the author states, "more than any other man of his time he was privileged to gather together, formulate, and practice the fundamentals of Ameri- can foreign policy — self-determination, independ- ence, noncolonization, nonintervention, nonen- tanglement in European politics, Freedom of the Seas, freedom of commerce — and to set them deep in the soil of the Western Hemisphere." Adams is treated as a highly skilled statesman who took ad- vantage of European wars and revolutions to ad- vance the position of the United States as the predominant continental American power. The last 23 years of Adams' long life, as President of the United States and in the House of Representatives, are the subject of the author's John Quincy Adams and the Union (no. 3300), which has much of in- terest for diplomatic history although less exclusively concerned with it. 3530. Benton, Elbert J. International law and diplomacy of the Spanish-American War. Baltimore, Johns Hopkins Press, 1908. 300 p. (The Albert Shaw lectures on diplomatic history, 1907) 8-9495 E723.B47 After 17 years of quiet, in 1895 an insurrection, largely organized by exiled leaders in New York City, broke out in Cuba in protest against arbitrary Spanish rule and heavy taxation, very little of which was spent for Cuba's benefit. Spain reacted with drastic measures of repression, and for two and a half years the United States Government wrestled with the problem of maintaining an official neu- trality while the sympathies of a majority of its citizens were warmly and sometimes actively on the side of the insurgents. Of the 71 expeditions in aid of the Cubans fitted out during this period, 33 were halted by Federal authorities. Both Spain and the United States were sufficiendy exasperated when the destruction of the Maine in Havana harbor led to immediate intervention and war in an area where many neutrals had important interests. The au- thor is scrupulously fair to the Spanish authorities, and is largely concerned with a critical review of American neutrality, warmaking, and treatment of neutrals in the light of the international law of the day. The two final chapters are concerned with the conclusion and implementation of the treaty of peace. 3531. Darling, Arthur Burr. Our rising empire, 1763-1803. New Haven, Yale University Press, 1940. 595 p. 40-9340 E301.D23 Bibliography: p. [5551-565. In spite of the dates on the title page, this book really begins with independence in 1776, and con- stitutes a history of the most critical quarter-century in American foreign relations. Based on primary sources throughout, it is a work of the highest con- centration and condensation, and incorporates few facts which it does not seek to interpret. The major, although not the exclusive theme, is the destiny of the Mississippi Valley, for the possession of which the new nation had as many as three rivals: Spain, France, and Great Britain. The detailed narrative is largely confined to our relations with those three powers. The culmination of the period, and con- clusion of the book, is the "Achievement of Empire" with the Louisiana Purchase of 1803. In it "the long quest of America's statesmen from Franklin to Jefferson, of Jay, Washington, Hamilton, Livings- ton, even John Adams, had come to achievement." 3532. Dulles, Foster Rhea. America's rise to world power, 1898—1954. New York, Harper, 1955. 314 p. (The New American nation series) 55-6575 E744.D8 Bibliography: p. 283-301. "How, notwithstanding history, tradition, and emotion, Americans found themselves involved first with the fragments of the Spanish Empire in Amer- ica, then in Pacific and Asiatic adventures, and finally in Europe, and how, through advance and retreat and advance they responded, is the central theme" of this book. In providing the historical background for the policies and decisions of the last half-century, the author, a professor at Ohio State University, is concerned only with those develop- ments in foreign policy which marked the gradual and halting emergence of the United States as the leading world power. 3533. Dulles, Foster Rhea. The imperial years. New York, Crowell, 1956. 340 p. 56-7790 E183.7.D78 "Bibliographical notes": p. 314-325. Of interest to the general reader rather than to the advanced student of American foreign relations, this book recreates the spirit, through quotations from contemporary speeches, newspapers, letters, memoirs, and documents, of the years between 1885 and 1910. This age, characterized by the author as that of America's adolescence, began during the tradition- DIPLOMATIC HISTORY AND FOREIGN RELATIONS / 417 ally isolationist administration of Grover Cleveland, rose to its climax during the Spanish- American War, and declined with the end of Theodore Roosevelt's second administration. This decline was the result of the failure of Theodore Roosevelt and his con- temporaries to realize that America's new position as a world power meant the abandonment of the tradi- tional foreign policy of noninvolvement, and the formulation of a "coherent global policy." 3534. Fleming, Denna Frank. The United States and world organization, 1 920-1933. New York, Columbia University Press, 1938. xiv, 569 p. 38-30813 JX1975.5.U5F6 Professor Fleming of Vanderbilt University de- votes this large volume, well documented, organized, and illustrated, to the years during which the United States, having decisively rejected the League of Nations and defeated the party which had sponsored it, maintained an official isolation from the Old World. He has small difficulty in demonstrating that this isolation was nominal rather than real, for after World War I the world had in fact be- come an economic and political unit. The conse- quence of its great withdrawal, therefore, was that the United States became involved in a succession of ad hoc negotiations, conferences, and cooperations, and brought forward a number of substitute means for guaranteeing the continuance of peace, instead of strengthening the central organs of international action to the point of real effectiveness. Well before 1933 world-wide economic depression and the re- appearance of unchecked aggression in Manchuria pointed to the failure of these half-way measures. This work continues the author's earlier study, The United States and the League of Nations 1918-10.20 (New York, Putnam, 1932. 559 p.), and has for a companion volume his The United States and the World Court (Garden City, N. Y. Doubleday, Doran, 1945. 206 p.). A briefer account of the same period from much the same viewpoint is Allan Nevins' The United States in a Chaotic World; A Chronicle of International Affairs, 1918- *933 (New Haven, Yale University Press, 1950. 252 p. The Chronicles of America series, v. 55). 3535. Hyneman, Charles S. The first American neutrality, a study of the American under- standing of neutral obligations during the years 1792 to 1815. [Urbana] University of Illinois, 1934. 178 p. ([Illinois. University] Illinois studies in the social sciences, v. xx, no. 1-2) 35-27650 H31.I4, v. 20, no. 1-2 [X1412.H9 On cover: University of Illinois bulletin, vol. xxxii, no. 13. Bibliography: p. 1 67-171. A study of the legal relation of the United States toward belligerents during the wars of the French Revolution and Napoleon. This period of American neutrality marked "the transition from the era of benevolent or limited neutrality to the modern era of impartial conduct," and as such, the author believes, deserves study as a guide to the neutral obligations of the United States in any future war. The topics treated include aid to belligerent vessels, hostilities and seizures in American waters, the recruitment of American citizens, contraband trade, and the machinery for the enforcement of neutrality. The author's source material consists of diplomatic cor- respondence, court decisions, contemporary periodi- cals, and international law texts. 3536. Jordan, Donaldson, and Edwin J. Pratt. Europe and the American Civil War. With an introduction by Samuel Eliot Morison. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1 93 1 . 299 p. 31-5313 E469.8.J75 Bibliography: p. [269-290] Part I, "England," is rewritten from a doctoral dissertation which Mr. Jordan submitted to Harvard University, and Part II, "The Continent," from a dissertation which Mr. Pratt submitted to Oxford; Prof. Morison read both and suggested their com- bination into a single work for the general reader. They jointly assess the part which public opinion played in determining the action of the English, French, and Spanish governments toward the American struggle. During the first two years opinion was sharply divided, and intervention was a real danger. But most pro-southerners did not want actual war, and therefore "Secretary Seward's policy of carrying a chip on his shoulder was entirely suc- cessful." Not long after the Emancipation Procla- mation, liberal opinion in England, France, and Spain came out sharply on the side of the Union, and carried the indifferent majorities with it. The reintegration of the United States gave a "vast im- petus" to European liberalism: it was the Parliament elected in 1865 which passed the Reform Bill of 1867 so crucial for British democracy. 3537. Langer, William L., and Sarell Everett Gleason. The challenge to isolation, 1937- 1940. New York, Published for the Council on Foreign Relations by Harper, 1952. xv, 794 p. (Their The world crisis and American foreign policy) 5I-H93 2 E744-L3 3538. Langer, William L., and S.irell Everett (ileason. The undeclared war, 1040 1941. New York, Published for the Council on Foreign 418 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Relations by Harper, 1953. xvi, 963 p. {Their The world crisis and American foreign policy) 53-7738 D748.L3 Well documented and abundant in detail, these companion volumes furnish a standard narrative of the international and diplomatic developments which preceded and precipitated United States entry into World War II. Beginning with President Roosevelt's "quarantine" speech of 1937, The Chal- lenge to Isolation is a study of official American reactions and policies in the face of heightened Axis aggression and the stiffening resistance of Great Britain and France. The questions of Soviet align- ment, Hemispheric defense, the character of American neutrality, and efforts toward a peaceful setdement occupy this volume, which closes with a consideration of the destroyers-for-bases deal with the British. The Undeclared War, 1940-1941 nar- rates the Axis conquest of Europe and onslaught on Russia. The United States' moves in favor of the Allies such as lend-lease are considered along with our negotiations with Japan to achieve agreement in the Pacific. In both volumes, the personal efforts of President Roosevelt to draw the United States closer to the Allies, and particularly to Great Britain, receive close attention, and he is represented as overimpressed by Congressional opposition to his foreign policy, and as lagging behind general American sentiment in his support of Great Britain and France during the first year of the war. The authors achieve a balanced presentation of Ameri- can relations with all areas of the world, as well as of the political and military events which drew us into World War II. 3539. Owsley, Frank Lawrence. King Cotton diplomacy; foreign relations of the Con- federate States of America. Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 193 1. 617 p. 31-16342 E488.O85 Bibliography: p. 579-591. The Confederacy hoped that the European need for raw cotton might be used as a means for in- ducing diplomatic recognition and aid during the Civil War. European intervention was regarded as a guarantee of Confederate success. England and France, being the principal maritime countries and dependent on cotton, were the chief fields of Con- federate activity. The Federal blockade produced a cotton famine in Europe as early as 1862. How- ever, Dr. Owsley maintains, the British cotton processors did not desire more cotton imports be- cause the shortage made it possible to sell their existing stocks at a large profit. The wool, linen, munitions, steel, and shipping enjoyed a war boom. The unemployed cotton workers found work else- where. Britain refused to intervene, and Napoleon III was afraid to act alone. 3540. Reeves, Jesse S. American diplomacy under Tyler and Polk. Baltimore, Johns Hopkins Press, 1907. 335 p. (The Albert Shaw lectures on diplomatic history, 1906) 7-39215 E396.R33 Dr. Reeves was a specialist in international law who taught for 20 years at the University of Michi- gan. Here he treats the years 1841-49 as a distinct diplomatic epoch in which was accomplished the final settlement of the three major boundary ques- tions which had been outstanding since 18 15 or even since 1783. The northeastern boundary, a puzzle for over half a century because of the imperfect geographical knowledge incorporated in the peace treaty of 1783, was settled by compromise in the Webster-Ashburton Treaty of 1842. The north- western boundary question, postponed rather than settled by the joint occupation of 1818, was concluded in the Oregon Treaty of 1846, again by a compromise line. The southwestern boundary, on the other hand, was settled by conquest, the results of which were embodied in the Treaty of Guadalupe Hidalgo, the last great step in the expansion of the United States. This book was one of the first to place a proper emphasis on the magnitude of President Polk's achievement. 3541. Seymour, Charles. American diplomacy during the World War. Baltimore, Johns Hopkins Press, 1934. 417 p. (The Albert Shaw lectures on diplomatic history, 1933. The Walter Hines Page School of International Relations) 34-1 164 1 D619.S43 "Bibliographical note": p. 401-408. Restricted to a study of American policy toward the European belligerents, this work centers around President Wilson who determined that policy in all its main aspects. The author, now president emeritus of Yale, asserts that Wilson held the United States apart from embatded Europe as long as prac- ticable, but was "forced by the intolerable conditions of neutrality to bring America into the war and to promote a plan of international organization for peace." The ideals and the personal appeal of Wilson are viewed as determinative of the peace settlement of Versailles and of the League of Na- tions. His personal contacts with diplomats and other leaders on both sides make up the core of the work. Comments of men such as Colonel House, Count BernstorfT, and others who negotiated for or with Wilson, are used to substantiate the well documented text. 3542. Updyke, Frank A. The diplomacy of the War of 1812. Baltimore, Johns Hopkins Press, 1915. 494 p. (The Albert Shaw lectures on diplomatic history, 1914) 15-10499 E358.U66 Very formal diplomatic history, of which less than DIPLOMATIC HISTORY AND FOREIGN RELATIONS / 419 a quarter is devoted to the antecedents of the war, and more than three quarters to the efforts at peace- making. The causes of the war are located in the British practice of impressing seamen from Ameri- can vessels, and the British interference with Amer- ican vessels trading to the Continent of Europe; on the second score French policy was equally high- handed, but America's "suffering at the hands of Great Britain was so much greater that she was warranted in declaring war upon that country alone." The negotiations at Ghent, which went on for the better part of four months, are narrated in great detail. Final chapters are on the complica- tions which arose in executing some of the treaty's provisions, and on the Convention of 1818 and other acts in setdement of questions left open by the treaty; the question of the Newfoundland fisheries, indeed, is pursued as late as 1912. Aiii. PERSONAL RECORDS 3543. Acheson, Dean G. The pattern of responsi- bility; edited by McGeorge Bundy from the record of Secretary of State Dean Acheson. Bos- ton, Houghton Mifflin, 1952. xxi, 309 p. 51-8864 E744.A217 A collection of speeches and statements (1949-51) selected by Professor (now Dean) McGeorge Bundy of Harvard University. The purpose was to pro- vide an objective basis upon which to judge Mr. Acheson's performance as Secretary of State. "I am bound to say that I think it very hard indeed to square the record of man and policy with most of the charges that have been made," Dean Bundy states. 3544. Byrnes, James Francis. Speaking frankly. New York, Harper, 1947. 324 p. 47-1175 D815.B9 A discussion of the Yalta and Potsdam Confer- ences, at which he was present, and of various con- ferences of foreign ministers during his term as President Truman's first Secretary of State, 1945-47. The author believes that the details of postwar nego- tiations should be public property. He reproduces various high-level conversations at Yalta from his shorthand notes. Mr. Byrnes believes that Russian expansionist aims have been virtually the same since the Nazi-Soviet pact of 1939. 3545. Grew, Joseph Clark. Turbulent era; a dip- lomatic record of forty years, 1904- 1945. Edited by Walter Johnson, assisted by Nancy Harvi- son Hooker. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1952. 2 v. (xxvi, 1560 p.) 52-5262 E748.G835A3 The earlier parts of this work are principally com- posed of excerpts from the author's manuscript diary. The first volume chronicles Mr. Grew's diplomatic career from 1904 to the completion of his first term as Under Secretary of State in 1927. The second volume is concerned with his service as Ambassador to Turkey (1927-32) and Japan (1932-41); and as Under Secretary of State again (1944-45). Since the diary notes were used as the basis of his Ten Years in Japan, a more formal narrative of his mis- sion, written by him in 1941, has been used here. The final sections are based on documents and reminiscences. 3546. Hull, Cordell. The memoirs of Cordell Hull. New York, Macmillan, 1948. 2 v. (1804 p.) 48-6761 E748.H93A3 The author was President Roosevelt's Secretary of State from 1933 to 1944. The book was written with the assistance of Andrew H. Berding, cur- rently Assistant Director of the U. S. Information Agency, from the author's dictated remarks. After a brief relation of his early life in Tennessee and 23 years in Congress, the author concentrates on his term as Secretary of State. Topics treated include the recognition of the U. S. S. R., the reciprocal trade agreements policy, South American relations, American attitudes toward international organiza- tion, and Japanese and German aggression. Most of the second volume is devoted to World War II. 3547. Stimson, Henry L., and McGeorge Bundy. On active service in peace and war. New York, Harper, 1948. xxii, 698 p. 48-6427 E748.S883A3 McGeorge Bundy, while still a Junior Fellow of Harvard University, prepared this book, which is in the third person, from Mr. Stimson's diary and other papers, and in constant contact with Mr. Stim- son. Stimson (1867-1950) was Secretary of War from 191 1 to 1913 and again from 1940 to 1945, Governor General of the Philippines from 1928 to 1929, and Secretary of State from 1929 to 1933. Of greatest interest to the student of international affairs are his service as Secretary of State, when his deter- mined opposition to Japanese claim on Manchuria marked him as one of the earliest advocates of collec- tive action against aggression, and his second term as Secretary of War. During the latter, Mr. Stimson assisted in the making of many military decisions, including the opening up of the second front and the use of the atomic bomb, which profoundlv af- fected wartime and postwar relations with our allies, and observed, at first hand, the conduct of our foreign affairs by virtue of his high and r office. 3548. Vandenberg, Arthur H. The private papers of Senator Vandenberg, edited by Arthur I \. 420 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Vandenberg, Jr., with the collaboration of Joe Alex Morris. Boston, Houghton MifBin, 1952. xxii, 599 p. 52-5248 E813.V3 A biographical narrative based upon liberal quo- tation from the Senator's diary, letters, and speeches covering the years from 1939 to 1951, with major emphasis on the period following 1941. The main theme is the Senator's conversion from isolationism to Congressional leadership of the movement to in- crease United States participation in international organizations and politics. A long-time Republican member of the Senate Foreign Relations Committee, Senator Vandenberg (1 884-1 951) played a major role in effecting the passage of such foreign policy legislation as the ratification of the Charter of the United Nations, the Marshall Plan, and American participation in NATO. An advocate of bipartisan support of administration foreign policy, he was a delegate to the San Francisco Conference of 1945, the first and second sessions of the United Nations General Assembly, and the 1946 Paris Conference of Foreign Ministers. 3549. Welles, Sumner. Seven decisions that shaped history. New York, Harper, 1951. xviii, 236 p. 51-10044 D748.W4 Sumner Welles, a specialist in Latin-American affairs who served as Assistant Secretary of State from 1933 to 1937 and as Undersecretary from 1937 to 1943, bere defends the foreign policy of Franklin D. Roosevelt, as well as his knowledge and skill in international affairs and the sincerity of his demo- cratic purposes, against their numerous postwar critics. He incidentally justifies his own role on several occasions, particularly at the Rio Conference of 1942, when, in order to avert a breach with Ar- gentina and Chile, he appealed to the President over the head of Secretary Hull, who cuts a poor figure in this volume. Two major errors of Roose- velt's administration, the failure to declare against Hitler and to "quarantine" Japan, were forced upon Roosevelt against his best judgment. However, the failure to force Stalin to agree to a postwar setde- ment while Russia was heavily depending upon American assistance was Roosevelt's own, and is here attributed to his distrust of career Foreign Service men. There is also criticism of various foreign policies of the Truman administration, espe- cially the abandonment of Chiang Kai-Shek. Aiv. THE BRITISH EMPIRE 3550. Adams, Ephraim Douglass. Great Britain and the American Civil War. London, New York, Longmans, Green, 1925. 2 v. 25-11786 E469.A25 "Primarily a study in British history in the belief that the American drama had a world significance, and peculiarly a British one." The unresolved strug- gle in England for democratic institutions is seen as influencing the attitude of the British territorial aristocracy toward the egalitarian tendencies of the North. The British ruling classes doubted whether the American Government could long endure, but the British people sympathized with its aims. For the latter, America was "fighting the battle of democracy." 3551. Allen, Harry C. Great Britain and the United States; a history of Anglo-American relations (1783-1952) New York, St. Martin's Press, 1955. 1024 p. maps. 55-7753 E183.8.G7A47 Bibliography: p. 984-998. After a two-hundred page discussion of the eco- nomic, social, political, cultural, emotional, and diplomatic relations of the British and American peoples, the history of the relationship is analyzed in detail in three periods: 1775-1821, 1821-98, and 1898-1952. The final period is regarded as that in which the United States, emerging as a world power, became aware of a common interest with Britain. The whole period of American national history, however, is seen as one of persistent prog- ress from mistrust to cordiality, and also of increas- ing American preponderance. The author, a Fellow of Lincoln College, Oxford, disclaims having writ- ten a work of original research, but as a believer in "the necessity for cordial Anglo-American rela- tions," has thoroughly digested the large literature of printed sources and secondary works. 3552. Brebner, John Bardet. North Adantic tri- angle; the interplay of Canada, the United States and Great Britain. New Haven, Yale Uni- versity Press for the Carnegie Endowment for In- ternational Peace, Division of Economics and His- tory, 1945. xxii, 385 p. maps. ([The relations of Canada and the United States; a series of studies prepared under the direction of the Carnegie En- dowment for International Peace, Division of Eco- nomics and History.]) A45-1973 E183.8.C2B74 "Appendix: bibliographical notes": p. [329]~34i. The 25th and final volume in this very important series, which was published from 1936 to 1945, and covers relations in the realms of population, set- tlement, the several spheres of economics, interna- tional law, and public opinion as well as in di- plomacy. Prof. Brcbner's book, although the most general in scope, "is not a summary of the volumes in the Series in which it appears. During the past ten years its main outlines have been used as a par- tial framework, or blueprint, for that Series." Like the series, it traces the relationship from the days DIPLOMATIC HISTORY AND FOREIGN RELATIONS / 42 1 of Samuel de Champlain on the levels of physiog- raphy, population movements, economic develop- ment, and politics and diplomacy. Its central theme is Canadian nationhood, which the Dominion has successfully asserted against the Empire of which it remains a part, and against the Republic which is its overshadowing neighbor. But, as the author shows, these and all related developments can be understood only within the larger picture of Anglo- American relations, in which Canadian interests have only too frequently been relegated to a poor third place. 3553. Burt, Alfred L. The United States, Great Britain and British North America from the Revolution to the establishment of peace after the War of 1 812. New Haven, Yale University Press, 1940. 448 p. maps. (The relations of Canada and the United States [a series of studies prepared under the direction of the Carnegie Endowment for In- ternational Peace, Division of Economics and His- tory]) 40-29766 E183.8.G7B9 This trenchandy written volume covers the period of conflict on the northern frontier of the United States against the background of general Anglo- American relations, in abundant but not excessive detail. The points at issue in each of the major disputes that arose, and especially in boundary dis- putes, are isolated with a rare clarity. John Jay is given a double credit for the treaty of 1794 which destroyed his popularity: not only did it put off further conflict for two decades, but it "inaugurated the modern use of the judicial process in interna- tional affairs." Professor Burt deliberately chal- lenges the theory that the land-hunger of the New West was the major cause of the War of 18 12; he finds it rather in the cumulative exasperation of the American Government at the British refusal to come to any accommodation, even of a face-saving kind, on American maritime rights; save for the utter military unpreparedness, war would probably have come a year earlier. The Treaty of Ghent was only the initial step in a series of negotiations in which "the strong will to peace that prevailed in Washing- ton and London made itself felt," and transformed "what was little more than a truce into a lasting peace." 3554. Dunning, William Archibald. The British Empire and the United States; a review of their relations during the century of peace following the Treaty of Ghent. With an introd. by the Right Honourable Viscount Bryce, O. M., and a pref. by Nicholas Murray Butler. New York, Scribncr, 1914. xl, 381 p. 14-18567 E183.8.G7D9 A thoroughly digested review of relations between the United States, Great Britain, and Canada. Specific topics treated include Canadian boundary disputes, Newfoundland fisheries, the right of search and African anti-slave patrol, British commentators on the United States, British policy concerning Texas, the Mexican War, the Civil War, and the Spanish-American War, British and American Latin-American policy, Alaska, Canadian internal affairs, the Venezuela dispute of 1895, and Irish home rule. 3555. Keenleyside, Hugh Llewellyn, and Gerald S. Brown. Canada and the United States; some aspects of their historical relations. Rev. and enl. ed. New York, Knopf, 1952. xxvi, 406, xii p. 51-13225 E183.8.C2K3 1952 The original edition of 1929 "was the first pub- lished attempt at a comprehensive review of the history of the contacts between these two North American neighbors," and was much esteemed as a lucid narrative of essentials for the general reader. The new edition not only adds the events of the 1930's and 40's, but incorporates the new informa- tion on earlier periods made available by the series on the relations of Canada and the United States (nos. 3552, 3553) as well as in the writings of in- dividual scholars. The turbulent period of the Revolution and the War of 18 12 has been followed by over 140 years of peace on an unfortified frontier, but the authors' chapters following the Peace of Ghent are entitled "Moments of Crisis," "Major Boundary Disputes," "Minor Boundary Disputes," and "The Fisheries Controversy." They are con- cerned to make the point, in view of these and the persistence of annexationist sentiment in the United States, that the maintenance of peace since 18 15 has not been an easy or automatic matter, but a true achievement of good sense in the conduct of inter- national affairs by the two peoples. 3556. Levi, Werner. American-Australian rela- tions. Minneapolis, University of Minne- sota Press, 1947. 184 p. 47-1789 E183.8.A8L4 Bibliography: p. 174-180. Early commerce, American whaling and sealing in the South Pacific, the California and Australian gold rushes, 19th-century imperialism, and the two world wars are treated. The rise of the United States as a predominant power in the Pacific was paralleled by the rise of Australia as another Pacific power, with major and sometimes conflicting interests. 3557. Roberts, Henry L., and Paul A. Wilson. Britain and the United States: problems in cooperation, a joint report prepared by Henry L. Roberts, rapporteur, a study group. Council on Foreign Relations, New York, and Paul A. Wilson, 422 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES rapporteur, study group, Royal Institute of Inter- national Affairs, London. New York, Published for the Council on Foreign Relations by Harper, 1953. xvii, 253 p. 53-9066 E183.8.G7R68 A consideration of problems of most concern to the two nations during the period January 195 1 to June 1952, as discussed by a joint study group of the Council on Foreign Relations and the Royal Institute of International Affairs. Topics considered are: relations with the Soviet bloc, the United Na- tions and collective security, economic policy, re- armament, global military problems, the political, economic, and military organization of Western Europe, and strategic problems in the Mediterra- nean, Middle East, and Far East. 3558. Soulsby, Hugh G. The right of search and the slave trade in Anglo-American relations, 1814-1862. Baltimore, Johns Hopkins Press, 1933. 185 p. (The Johns Hopkins University studies in historical and political science, ser. LI, no. 2) 33-29624 H31.J6, ser. 51, no. 2 JX5268.S6 1933 Bibliography: p. 177-181. The African slave trade, which had been declared illegal by both the United States and Great Britain, was prolonged far into the 19th century because of diplomatic disagreement over the freedom of the seas, and because southerners regarded agreement on an antislave patrol as a preliminary to assault on slavery in the United States. By declaring the trade in slaves to be piracy, the two governments overcame the issue of freedom of the seas, but it was not until the Civil War that an effective patrol could be set up. 3559. Williams, Mary Wilhelmine. Anglo-Amer- ican Isthmian diplomacy, 1815-1915. [Bal- timore, The Lord Baltimore Press, 1916] 356 p. (Prize essays of the American Historical Associa- tion, 1914) 16-14677 JX1398W5 1916a Thesis (Ph.D. — Leland Stanford Junior Univer- sity, 1914) Bibliography: p. 33 J -345- Unravels the protracted Anglo-American disputes over the British occupation of parts of British Hon- duras, the Bay Islands, and the Mosquito Coast of Honduras and Nicaragua, and over a projected Isthmian canal connecting the Caribbean with the Pacific. The various settlements made in the Clay- ton-Bulwer Treaty of 1850 and the Hay-Pauncefote Treaty of 1901 are discussed. As cordiality between the two countries increased, the British ceased their efforts to counter American influence in Central America. Av. RUSSIA 3560. Bailey, Thomas A. America faces Russia; Russian-American relations from early times to our day. Ithaca, Cornell University Press, 1950. 375 p. 50-10009 E183.8.R9B3 Bibliography: p. 357-368. The author offers "a broad survey of Russian- American relations from earliest contacts to recent times," emphasizing American public opinion and diplomatic attitudes. Common distrust of England, he thinks, lay behind the 19th-century "friendship" of Russia and the United States. About half the book is devoted to the present century. Attitudes toward Russian claims on the Pacific Northwest, the visit of the Russian fleet to America during the Polish crisis of 1863, the anti-Jewish pogroms of the late 19th and early 20th centuries, the Russo-Japanese War, the Russian revolutions of 1905 and 1917, and the Soviet regime are discussed. 3561. Barghoorn, Frederick Charles. The Soviet image of the United States; a study in dis- tortion. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1950. xviii, 297 p. 50-10897 DK69.B3 Half title: Institute of International Studies, Yale University. The author served as press attache in the Ameri- can Embassy in Moscow, 1942-47. He regards Soviet propaganda against the United States as a major instrument of Russia's "aggressive foreign policy." His work studies the doctrine, opinions, and attitudes of the Soviet leadership as manifested in propaganda reaching the Russian people in the form of speeches, journalism, and literature, in which postwar American foreign and atomic policy, attitudes on war and peace, and the American domestic scene are interpreted. During his residence in the Soviet Union, the United States was first pic- tured as an ally, for whom there was only limited sympathy, and then as a rival not to be feared. In the Soviet propaganda image since the war, Amer- icans become the slaves of capitalist exploitation, and American foreign policy essentially deceitful and aggressive. One chapter discusses the author's per- sonal contacts with Soviet citizens and concludes that there is still a reservoir of good feeling toward the United States. 3562. Dennett, Raymond, and Joseph E. Johnson, eds. Negotiating with the Russians. [Bos- ton] World Peace Foundation, 1951. 310 p. 51-8287 DK69.D4 Contents. — Negotiating on military assistance, 1943-1945, by J. R. Deane. — Negotiating under lend-lease, 1942-1945, by J. N. Hazard. — Negotiat- DIPLOMATIC HISTORY AND FOREIGN RELATIONS / 423 ing the Nuremberg trial agreements, 1945, by S. S. Alderman. — Negotiating at Bretton Woods, 1944, by R. F. Mikesell. — Negotiating to establish the Far Eastern Commission, 1945, by G. H. Blakeslee. — Negotiating on refugees and displaced persons, 1946, by E. F. Penrose. — Negotiating on the Balkans, 1945-1947, by M. Ethridge and C. E. Black. — Nego- tiating on atomic energy, 1946-1947, by F. Osborn. — Negotiating on cultural exchange, 1947, by E. J. Simmons. — Some Soviet techniques of negotiation, by P. E. Mosely. Ten experts discuss their experiences in negotia- tions with Russia during the war years and after. Although each presents his own point of view, the common experience was that the Soviet negotiators were uniformly suspicious, even during periods of supposed cooperation, and without authority to de- part from previously chosen positions. However, this did not preclude sudden changes in Russian policy, which were defended with equal tenacity although sometimes contradicting previous positions. 3563. Dulles, Foster Rhea. The road to Teheran; the story of Russia and America, 1781-1943. Princeton, Princeton University Press, 1944. 279 p. A44-531 E183.8.R9D8 "Bibliographical notes": p. 263-268. The author is a professor of history at Ohio State University. Despite periods of marked friction, Russian-American relations were generally friendly throughout the whole period 1 781-1943. Common rivalry with Great Britain in the 19th century, the challenge of Germany and Japan in the 20th, and a love of peace are seen as factors drawing the two peoples together, and ideological antagonism as a contrary influence. The isolationism of the United States and Russia is represented as a precipitating cause of World War II. The Axis attack drew them together once more. 3564. Laserson, Max M. The American impact on Russia, diplomatic and ideological, 1784— 1917. New York, Macmillan, 1950. 441 p. 50-12185 E183.8.R9L35 About half the book is devoted to the period up to the American Civil War. American influence is discovered in the writings of Radishchev, the rela- tions of Alexander I with Jefferson and J. Q. Adams, the Decembrist revolt of 1825, and Turgenev's anti- slavery attitude. The unfriendly attitude of Pal- merston and Napoleon III toward the two countries tended to draw them together during the Civil War period. The writings of Herzen and Cherny- shevski are examined for American allusions, and the influence of the writings of Henry George and George Kennan is discussed. 3565. Smith, Walter Bedell. My three years in Moscow. Philadelphia, Lippincott, 1950. 346 p. 49-50332 E183.8.R9S6 The author, our Ambassador to Russia during 1946-49, offers a personal narrative, stressing his im- pressions and experiences with Russians on both a high and low level. After discussing Molotov, Stalin, and their entourage, General Smith com- ments on Soviet diplomats, police state methods, eco- nomics, and propaganda; Titoism; the 1947 Mos- cow Conference; the Berlin blockade of 1948; and Russian religion and culture. He found the Soviet Union a land overshadowed by tyranny and poverty, the Soviet Government bent on world domination, and the American legation a conscientious group carrying on under serious difficulties. 3566. Sorokin, Pitirim A. Russia and the United States. 2d ed. London, Stevens, 1950. 213 p. (The Library of world affairs, no. 15) 52-1631 E183.8.R9S7 1950 "Published under the auspices of the London In- stitute of World Affairs." The author is professor of sociology at Harvard University. After an academic, journalistic, and political career in Russia, he was condemned to death by the Soviet Government, but was allowed to emigrate to the United States in 1923. Like other commentators, he remarks on the unique period of unbroken peace between the United States and Rus- sia. The vital interests of the two countries, he holds, have never conflicted. The continental posi- tion of both nations, their frontier experiences, and their ethnic diversity are seen as similar factors in development. The author believes that an "essen- tial sociocultural similarity or congeniality" exists, and "presages still closer co-operation in the future." 3567. Stettinius, Edward R. Roosevelt and the Russians; the Yalta Conference; edited by Walter Johnson. Garden City, N. Y., Doublcday, 1949. xvi, 367 p. 49-10915 D734.C7S8 A defense of the Roosevelt policy at the Yalta Conference of February 1945. The author was Sec- retary of State during Roosevelt's last months, 1944- 45. Mr. Stettinius, who died just as this book was being published, denied that vital interests of the United States and the free world were sacrificed at Yalta. "It is not Yalta that is the trouble with the world today, but subsequent failures to adhere to the policies Yalta stood for and to carry out agree- ments that were reached there." Yalta, he main- tained, represented not appeasement but an attempt to set the world on the road to lasting peace. 3568. Tompkins, Pauline. American-Russian re- lations in the Far East. New York, Mac 424 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES millan, 1949. xiv, 426 p. 49-48919 DS518.T62 "Undertaken initially in fulfillment of a require- ment for the degree of doctor of philosophy [Fletcher School of Law and Diplomacy, 1948]." Bibliography: p. 398-413. The emphasis here is upon relations since 1917. American participation in the allied intervention in Siberia, 1918-20, is regarded as an act of political expediency, directed primarily at Japan. Other topics treated are the Washington Conference of 1921-22, the Japanese attack on China, and Ameri- can policy toward Japan and Korea during World War II, as it affected Soviet relations. The author states that the 19th-century "friendship"' of America and Russia was a byproduct of practical politics. With American intervention in the Pacific and growing cooperation with Great Britain, antagonism has increased. Dr. Tompkins regards the balance of power theory of world politics as certain to bring disaster at a time when the alternative is to unite or perish. Avi. OTHER EUROPEAN NATIONS 3569. Chadwick, French Ensor. The relations of the United States and Spain, diplomacy. New York, Scribner, 1909. 610 p. 9-31968 E183.8.S7C4 The author sees the Spanish-American War as the culmination of a long racial and cultural con- flict. The deterioration of Spanish rule in Cuba is ascribed to Spain's failure to establish democratic institutions in the homeland. About half of the book is devoted to the diplomacy of the American Revolution, boundary problems, and the American attitude toward the independence movement in Latin America; the second half to the Cuban ques- tion in American politics and diplomacy. 3570. Clay, Lucius D. Decision in Germany. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1950. xiv, 522 p. 5°"5 8l 3 DD257.C55 General Clay served as Deputy Military Governor, 1945-47, ar, d as Military Governor, 1947-49; his book is rather impersonal and official in manner. The period was characterized by disagreement with Russia over German policy, culminating in the at- tempt of the Russians to drive the allies out of Berlin and the decision to establish a West German federal government. The author regards the unity of Germany as essential to European peace, for "no lasting stability may be expected as long as 65,000,000 persons in the heart of Europe are divided against their will." 3571. Fogdall, Soren J. M. P. Danish-American diplomacy, 1 776-1 920. Iowa City, The Uni- versity, 1922. 171 p. (University of Iowa studies in the social sciences, v. 8, no. 2) 22-27280 H3 1 .18, v. 8, no. 2 JX1428.S3F6 Bibliography: p. 159-165. Principal emphasis is placed on maritime rights, such as the rights of American men of war in the Revolution, and the right to be free of dues for transit of the Sound into the Baltic, which Denmark con- tinued to collect until 1857. The failure to buy the Danish West Indies in 1867, and their subsequent purchase in 1916 are discussed. 3572. Hayes, Carlton J. H. The United States and Spain: an interpretation. New York, Sheed & Ward, 1951. 198 p. 51—13793 E183.8.S7H3 "Select bibliography": p. 193-198. The author, professor emeritus of history at Co- lumbia University, served as Ambassador to Spain during 1942-45, and related his experiences in War- time Mission in Spain, 1 942-1 945 (New York, Macmillan, 1945. 313 p.). This book is based on a series of lectures delivered at the College of the Holy Cross, Worcester, Mass. Old misunderstand- ings and prejudices are represented as having dis- rupted after the early 1890's the good feeling which generally prevailed through the 19th century. The author discusses misconceptions about Spain, con- trasting political traditions, the Spanish Republic of 1 93 1, the Civil War of 1936-39, and relations with Spain since 1939. General Franco, he is convinced, was never taken in by Hider and was never a catspaw for the Axis. He maintains that Spain and Hispanic America are essential to the Atlantic community. 3573. Reitzel, William. The Mediterranean: its role in America's foreign policy. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1948. 195 p. 48-7273 D843.R4 Issued by Yale Institute of International Studies. "References": p. [187]— 189. American official interest in the Mediterranean is here interpreted as principally a byproduct of World War II. In the author's judgment, "the key aim of an American policy for the Mediterranean will be to maintain its internal stability in order to be free to use it as a strategic unit." British interest in the area, it is pointed out, is more closely related to imperial interests, causing a basic divergence in point of view. Avii. LATIN AMERICA: GENERAL 3574. Bemis, Samuel Flagg. The Latin American policy of the United States, an historical in- DIPLOMATIC HISTORY AND FOREIGN RELATIONS / 425 terpretation. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1943. xiv, 470 p. 43-51167 F1418.B4 Half-title: Institute of International Studies, Yale University. Aims to provide in one volume a historical in- terpretation of Latin American policy since the be- ginning of the Republic. American policy, it is asserted, has been based upon the Nation's inde- pendence under a republican government, its con- tinental expansion, and the security requirements of the resultant continental republic. "These funda- mentals naturally favored independence for the whole New World, republican self-government for the new states, opposition to European intervention in their affairs . . . and political solidarity of the nations of the New World." The last part of the book is devoted to the "good neighbor" policy of Franklin D. Roosevelt, which the author regards as an attempt to base United States policy on the con- cept of hemisphere security rather than the security of the United States alone. The narrative is brought down to the Rio de Janeiro Conference of January 1942. 3575. Gantenbein, James W., ed. The evolution of our Latin-American policy, a documentary record. New York, Columbia University Press, 1950. xxvii, 979 p. 49-50406 F1418.G2 A collection of documents, largely drawn from U. S. Government publications, which go back as far as 1796 but mostly belong to the 20th century. They are arranged under six principal headings: "General Principles," "The Monroe Doctrine," "Independence of Cuba," "The Panama Canal Con- cession," "Certain Controversies with Mexico," and "Interventions in Nicaragua, Haiti, and the Domini- can Republic." Appendixes are concerned with selected documents of successive Pan American con- ferences and with other international agreements, in all but one of which the United States partici- pated. 3576. Guerrant, Edward O. Roosevelt's good neighbor policy. Albuquerque, University of New Mexico Press, 1950. 235 p. (Publication of the School of Inter-American Affairs, the Univer- sity of New Mexico. Inter-American studies, 5) 50-5678 F1418.G93 Bibliography: p. 215-225. In the estimation of Professor Guerrant, "the United States has never had a foreign policy toward any area that was more successful than the Good Neighbor Policy was from 1933 to 1945." That policy is here analyzed in five topical chapters: "Abandonment of Intervention," "Recognition of New Government," "Quest for Law," "Expanding Commerce," and "Cultural and Scientific Rela- tions." Two concluding chapters narrate relevant events during the crisis years of 1939-41, and during World War II. Non-intervention, the author sug- gests, has been "criticized by liberal elements in those nations which were oppressed by tyrannical govern- ments." After the death of President Roosevelt the efforts of the American Government to cultivate the good will of Latin America rather suddenly slackened. 3577. Perkins, Dexter. A history of the Monroe doctrine. [Rev. ed.] Boston, Little, Brown, 1955. xiv, 462 p. 55-10752 JX1425.P384 1955 Bibliography: p. [42o]~435. This work was originally published in 1941 under the title Hands Off, and continued as well as sum- marized the author's detailed studies contained in three works of distinguished scholarship: The Mon- roe Doctrine, 182 3-1 826 (Cambridge, Harvard Uni- versity Press, 1932. 280 p.); The Monroe Doctrine, 1826-186'] (Baltimore, Johns Hopkins Press, 1933. 580 p.); and The Monroe Doctrine, i86j-ig.oj (Bal- timore, Johns Hopkins Press, 1937. 480 p.). "In the field of politics," the author believed, "there are few more unqualified faiths than the faith of the American people in the Monroe Doctrine . . . There are few subjects, too, with regard to which it has been necessary to clear away so many misap- prehensions." To this end he produced, for the general reader, his one-volume history of the Doc- trine. While the background of this "prohibition on the part of the United States against the extension of European influence and power to the New World" included the conception of the two spheres, the separation of the New World from the Old, it never was intended to bar the way "to American diplomatic or physical action in other parts of the globe." British and French diplomacy in Texas, French intervention in Mexico, the Spanish reoc- cupation of Santo Domingo, the Venezuela-British Guiana boundary dispute, Isthmian Canal diplo- macy, and American intervention in the Caribbean are among the episodes described. The new edition covers developments from 194 1 to 1954, aru '> against those who regard the Doctrine as outmoded, con- tends that "the physical integrity of the cisatlantic area, and its protection against subversion, will con- tinue to be a matter of concern." 3578. Stuart, Graham II. Latin America and the United St. ucs. ^th ed. New York, Apple- ton-Century-Crofts, 1955. 493 p. 55-5020 F1418.S933 1955 "Supplementary readings" at end of chapters. This textbook, whose lust edition goes back to . aims "to give a brief and accurate sur\ the diplomatic and commercial relations between 426 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES the United States and those Latin-American coun- tries with which our interests have been most closely related." After four preliminary chapters on Pan Americanism, the development of cooperation by conference, and the Monroe Doctrine, the course of United States interests and negotiations is traced in successive areas: Panama, Mexico, Cuba, the Carib- bean, Central America, Argentina, Chile, and Brazil. This 5th edition seeks to indicate the changes brought about by the Good Neighbor policy, which inaugurated a new era in the Latin American rela- tions of the United States. "The Western Hemi- sphere has set up the Golden Rule as its goal for the relations between states. Justice and fair deal- ing no longer end at the national frontiers." 3579. Whitaker, Arthur Preston. The United States and the independence of Latin Amer- ica, 1 800-1 830. Baltimore, Johns Hopkins Press, 1941. xx, 632 p. (The Albert Shaw lectures on diplomatic history, 1938. The Walter Hines Page School of International Relations) 41-18981 F1418.W6 "Bibliographical note": p. 603-612. These lectures analyze in considerable detail United States policy as affected by Napoleon's vic- tory in Spain in 1808, the attitude of the despotic powers in Europe after 18 15, and the British policy toward Latin America. The "Black Legend" of Spanish cruelty, despotism, and duplicity had cre- ated a widespread prejudice which included the Latin Americans. Nevertheless, for both commer- cial and ideological reasons, the United States favored the establishment of independent republican regimes. In issuing the Monroe Doctrine, President Monroe "counted upon his very threat of war to forestall actual war," and to bluff the French "government into abandoning any plan it might have for inter- vening in America." Its novelty and its continuing importance both lay in the fact that it gave official sanction to "a special policy towards Latin America which was based on different principles from the policy of the United States toward the rest of the world." Aviii. LATIN AMERICA: INDIVIDUAL NATIONS 3580. Evans, Henry Clay. Chile and its relations with the United States. Durham, N. C, Duke University Press, 1927. 243 p. 27-9852 E183.8.C4E93 Bibliography: p. [22i]-2^. A Columbia University dissertation which re- views the relations of the United States with Chile from 1 8 12 through the close of 1926. Conspicuous episodes are the Spanish seizure of the Chincha Islands in 1864; the 10-year War of the Pacific, in which the United States prevented any European mediation but failed in its own; the attack on the Baltimore's crewmen in Valparaiso in 1891, pro- ducing "the nearest approach to a war that the United States has ever had with a South American nation"; Chile's refusal to break with Germany during World War I; and the failure of American arbitration during the earlier stages of the Tacna- Arica dispute. "Possibly no better field could be chosen to illustrate the difficulties that beset the path of American diplomats when they attempt to assert a leadership for their own country in its relations with the sensitive and proud people of smaller nations." 3581. Fitzgibbon, Russell H. Cuba and the United States, 1900-1935. Menasha, Wis., Banta Pub. Co., 1935. 311 p. 35-9 34 F1787.F56 Bibliography: p. [278]. The appointment of General Leonard Wood as Governor in 1900 is taken as the starting point. The establishment of the Cuban Republic, the inter- vention of 1906-9, the Gomez, Menocal, Zayas, and Machado regimes, Cuban sugar and American tariff policy, American subscriptions to Cuban loans, and the abrogation of the Piatt Amendment are among the subjects discussed. The author aims neither to defend nor attack American interventionism, but merely to present a "unified, objective, and scientific study." 3582. Hill, Lawrence F. Diplomatic relations be- tween the United States and Brazil. Dur- ham, N. C, Duke University Press, 1932. 322 p. 32-18335 E183.8.B7H56 Bibliography: p. 306-316. A historical narrative covering the period 1807- 1930, with emphasis upon the 19th century. At- tention is focused on the degree of neutrality prac- ticed by each nation in the course of the interna- tional and civil wars and insurrections in which each was involved from the War of 1812 to World War I. Mr. Hill also examines commercial re- lations, the consequences of the abolition of the slave trade, the emigration of Confederate exiles following the Civil War, and Brazil's change from empire to republic in 1889. 3583. McCain, William D. The United States and the Republic of Panama. Durham, N. C, Duke University Press, 1937. xv, 278 p. 37-2897 F1566.M24 Bibliography: p. 255-267. A study of the intervention of the United States in Panama and its subsequent effect upon diplo- DIPLOMATIC HISTORY AND FOREIGN RELATIONS / 427 matic relations with the Panamanian Republic. The author narrates in detail various disputes with the United States over the government of the Canal Zone and the internal affairs of Panama, involving such problems as the threat of revolution, the rela- tions of American soldiers with local residents, ex- propriation of Panama territory for Canal purposes, interference in Panama road and railroad construc- tion, and the renegotiation of treaty arrangements in the administrations of Coolidge and Franklin Roosevelt. 3584. Montague, Ludwell Lee. Haiti and the United States, 1714-1938. Durham, N. C, Duke University Press, 1940. xiv, 308 p. 40-11470 E183.8.H2M6 Thesis (Ph. D.) — Duke University, 1935. "Bibliography of works cited": p. 293-302. It is maintained that since 1800 the United States has recognized that it has a vital strategic interest in the Caribbean and has not hesitated to defend it, on occasion even by military intervention in Haiti and the Dominican Republic. The book surveys the course of relations since the establishment of Haitian independence, discussing the American fear of a slave revolt, projects to colonize freed American slaves in Haiti, the recognition of Haiti by Lincoln, annexationist sentiment, American desire for a naval base, commercial penetration, the interventionist "corollary" of Theodore Roosevelt to the Monroe Doctrine, dollar diplomacy, Marine occupation, and the Good Neighbor policy. 3585. Parks, E. Taylor. Colombia and the United States, 1765-1934. Durham, N. C, Duke University Press, 1935. xx, 554 p. 35-25823 E183.8.C7P37 Bibliography: p. 492-529. This substantial volume opens by narrating the early history of Colombia, which originally included Ecuador, Venezuela, and Panama. The United States recognized Colombian independence in 1822, but relations were not put on a solid footing until the treaty of 1846, negotiated at Bogota by Benjamin A. Bidlack. It guaranteed Colombian sovereignty in the Isthmus of Panama and remained an im- portant factor in the Canal question down to the Panama Revolution of 1903. Dr. Parks subjects some of the arguments whereby President Theodore Roosevelt justified his support of that revolution to severe criticism. The Wilson administration's at- tempt to indemnify Colombia with 25 million dol- lars went unratified by the Senate until 1921, when the desire of American business interests to develop Colombian oil and other natural resources power- fully reinforced the desire for a rapprochement with the disgruntled Republic. 3586. Rippy, James Fred. The United States and Mexico. Rev. ed. New York, Crofts, 1931. 423 p. 31-18162 E183.8.M6R7 1931 Bibliography: p. 387-396. Two-thirds of the book is devoted to the period before 1900, with especial attention to the diplomacy of the Mexican War period and after. The expan- sionist program of President Buchanan in 1857 and French intervention in Mexico during the Civil War are discussed. The Pershing expedition against Villa and the diplomacy of Dwight W. Morrow are covered. American policy is represented as moti- vated by varying sentiments, sometimes aggressive, sometimes idealistic. 3587. Tansill, Charles Callan. The United States and Santo Domingo, 1798-1873; a chapter in Caribbean diplomacy. Baltimore, Johns Hopkins Press, 1938. 487 p. 38-32982 E183.8.D6T3 At head of title: The Walter Hines Page School of International Relations, the Johns Hopkins University. The subject is relations with both Haiti and the Republic of Santo Domingo in the period covered, with principal emphasis on the latter. The southern fear of a slave revolt in imitation of the events of 1791, war between Haiti and the Dominican Repub- lic, and the expansionist policy of President Grant are considered, as well as various efforts to obtain naval bases on the island or to forestall their estab- lishment by other nations. The author is professor of diplomatic history at Georgetown University, Washington, D. C. Aix. ASIA 3588. Agwani, Mohammed Shafi. The United States and the Arab world, 1945-1952. Aligarh, Institute of Islamic Studies, Muslim Uni- versity, 1955. 184, ix p. 57-15226 DS63.2.U5A65 1955 This thesis submitted to the University of Ut- recht offers a detailed critique of America's conduct toward the Arab States since the war. The author believes that American prestige, laboriously built up over the years by the efforts of American mis- sionaries and educators, and confirmed by Wil sonian idealism, has recently been shattered by the United States' support of Zionism and of Israel, of reactionary nati mucins, and of the interests of British and French imperialism. 3589. Ballantine, Joseph W. Formosa, a problem for United States foreign policy. Washing- ton, Brookings Institution, 1952. Zl8 p. 53-5824 DS89; 428 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES After a brief discussion of Formosa under Chinese and Japanese rule, post-World War II developments and the problems posed for American foreign policy in Formosa are examined. Topics covered are: the neutralization of Formosa by the United States fleet, American economic and military aid, Formosa as a stake in the international struggle for power, and the Japanese peace treaty of 1952. Formosa having been kept in friendly hands, the problems now are how far the claims of the Nationalist government to rule the mainland should be countenanced, whether the Communist government should be recognized, and to what extent the United States may count on its allies for support in its Formosan policy. The stated purpose of the book is not so much to find answers as to assemble and arrange the facts neces- sary for decision. The author was Director of the Office of Far Eastern Affairs of the Department of State, 1944-45. 3590. Battistini, Lawrence H. Japan and America, from earliest times to the present. With 5 maps. New York, J. Day, 1954. 198 p. (An Asia book) 54-5881 E183.8.J3B3 1954 A rapid survey of diplomatic relations which re- serves the greater part of its space for the war of 194 1 and its causes, and the occupation and rehabilitation of Japan. The reaction in American occupation policy as the Communist menace became apparent and the necessity of restoring Japan to full economic self-sufficiency are stressed. A more analytical treatment of current problems will be found in a symposium sponsored by the Institute of Pacific Re- lations of Hawaii, ] apart and America Today (Stan- ford, Calif., Stanford University Press, 1953. 166 p.). 3591. Battistini, Lawrence H. The United States and Asia. New York, Praeger, 1955. 370 p. maps. (Books that matter) 55-11534 DS518.8.B35 1955a Bibliography: p. 345—351. Introduces the lay reader and the student to the development of our relations with the Pacific area as well as with Asia. From 1784 to the Spanish- American War (1898) our interest in Asia and the Pacific was essentially commercial, and accordingly United States policy in the area supported equality of trading rights and the maintenance of the sover- eignty of Japan and China. The establishment of America as a Pacific power in 1898 forced the United States into active military and political par- ticipation in the Far East at a time when we main- tained our isolation from the affairs of Europe. Re- lations with China were always friendly, but it was not until World War II that this interest manifested itself in the form of aid and advice to stop first the Japanese, and then the Chinese Communists. The author shows how the United States originally en- couraged the rise of Japan, but after 1907 worked to contain that Japanese expansion, which at last chal- lenged our Pacific position in the 1940's, to its own undoing. After summarizing our relations with Asian nationalism and the new Southeast Asian na- tions, the author concludes that we should assume the permanence of their nationhood, and afford them an example of the highest political morality in order to encourage them to resist Communist encroach- ment. 3592. Dulles, Foster Rhea. China and America; the story of their relations since 1784. Princeton, N. J., Princeton University Press, 1946. 277 p. A46-14 E183.8.C5D8 Bibliography: p. 263-267. A survey for the general reader, half of which is concerned with Chinese-American relations before 1900. Mr. Dulles stresses the American dream of China as a vast market for American exports. He demonstrates that while the United States has always talked of friendship with China, in times of crisis, such as the Manchurian affair of 1931, it has merely sent diplomatic protests in order to protect our commercial interests, and then stood aside while events have taken their course. The Taiping re- bellion, our Chinese exclusion laws, the Boxer rebellion, World War I, the Washington Confer- ence of 1921, Chinese nationalism, the spread of Japanese aggression, and World War II are con- sidered in their effect on our relations with China. The apathy and ignorance of the American public, and their failure to support government leaders who are better informed, are blamed by Mr. Dulles for our failure to act constructively in behalf of China throughout the history of our mutual relations. 3593. Feis, Herbert. The China tangle; the American effort in China from Pearl Harbor to the Marshall mission. Princeton, Princeton Uni- versity Press, 1953. 445 p. maps. 53-10142 E183.8.C5F4 An uncontroversial attempt to clarify the policy of the United States toward China during the period of hostilities with Japan and immediately after. The author regards our China policy as a "tale of crumpled hopes and plans that went awry," the reason being that the war in the Pacific ended abruptly before our effort in behalf of China reached its planned fullness. The military demobilization at the end of 1945 revealed a desire to renounce the burdens thrust upon us. The narrative is built about the rivalry of the Chinese Communists and Nationalists in the face of Japanese aggression, the Chinese-Russian agreement of 1945, the Hurley DIPLOMATIC HISTORY AND FOREIGN RELATIONS / 429 mission, and the Russian and Chinese Communist occupation of Manchuria. 3594. Griswold, Alfred Whitney. The Far East- ern policy of the United States. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1938. 530 p. 38-29014 DS518.8.G75 At head of half-tide: Institute of International Studies, Yale University. Bibliography: p. 503-517. Various events in the period 1898- 1938 are dis- cussed as they reflected American policy: the annex- ation of the Philippines, the "Open Door" notes of John Hay, the failure of "dollar diplomacy," recog- nition of a special Japanese interest in China in the ambiguous Lansing-Ishii agreement of 1917, the question of the German Pacific Islands after World War I, the consolidation of the status quo in the Washington treaties, Oriental exclusion as a diplo- matic and political issue, the efforts of Secretary of State Stimson to apply sanctions against Japan, and the Roosevelt policy toward Japanese aggression in China. 3595. Grunder, Garel A., and William E. Livezey. The Philippines and the United States. Nor- man, University of Oklahoma Press, 1951. 315 p. 51-6997 DS685.G75 Bibliography: p. 286-305. A study in the origin and evolution of United States policy toward the Philippines during the past half century. Special attention is given to economic relationships, the evolution of political institutions, and the independence question. The defeat of the Spanish fleet in Manila Bay, 1898, annexation and pacification, tariff problems, the problem of ecclesi- astical lands, the Moros, the Jones Act of 1916, Governor-Generals Leonard Wood and Henry L. Stimson, the Commonwealth period, Japanese oc- cupation, and reconstruction and independence are discussed. The importance of the islands as collab- orators in the Far Eastern policy of the United States is stressed. 3596. Latourette, Kenneth S. The American rec- ord in the Far East, 1945-195 1. New York, Macmillan, 1952. 208 p. 52-12394 DS518.8.L26 "Issued under the auspices of the American Insti- tute of Pacific Relations." The author's theme is the "ever deepening en- tanglement" of the United States in the affairs of the region, which he explains as the result of the his- toric westward movement of the American people. Despite the confusion of American aims in Asia, he maintains that an American policy exists, namely: sympathy for the attempt of the peoples of Asia to achieve their goals and ambitions; containment of Communism, by force if necessary, but also by finan- cial, technical, and educational aid; support of the United Nations; maintenance of military bases; and subordination of Asiatic to European affairs in over- all foreign policy. The American policy in China, where the Communists gained the principal benefit of the American defeat of Japan, was a failure; its success in other areas is only tentative. The author, who has a missionary background, regards the true struggle as ideological. Although he does not be- lieve that democracy in the American sense is now possible in China, he condemns Chinese Commu- nism as a perversion of the Western Christian tra- dition and a totalitarian creed. 3597. Oliver, Robert T. Why war came in Korea. New York, Fordham University Press; D. X. McMullen Co., distributors, 1950. xxvi, 260 p. 50-9923 DS917.O4 The strategic importance of Korea, the military buildup of North Korea, the military weakness of South Korea, the withdrawal of American troops, the inference that the United States would not de- fend Korea, and the danger to Soviet propaganda of a successful democratic regime in South Korea art- adduced as reasons why war came. The author has been an adviser of Syngman Rhee. B. Foreign Relations Bi. ADMINISTRATION 3598. Brookings Institution, Washington, D. C. International Studies Group. The admin- istration of foreign affairs and overseas operation; a report prepared for the Bureau of the Budget, Executive Office of the President. Washington, 1951. xxv, 380 p. 51-61182 JX1705.B7 The study is intended to supplement the re- searches of the Commission on Organization of the Executive Branch (Hoover Commission). New problems in the postwar world are considered: the administration of foreign economic aid, military considerations affecting foreign affairs, the need for program coordination in the conduct of foreign affairs, and problems of personnel management. Is 430 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES sues are objectively stated, the arguments on both sides presented, and possible solutions suggested. 3599. Childs, James Rives. American foreign service; with a foreword by Joseph C. Grew. New York, Holt, 1948. 261 p. 48-5092 JX1705.C45 3600. U. S. Dept. of State. Secretary of State's Public Committee on Personnel. Toward a stronger Foreign Service; report. [Washington, U. S. Govt. Print. Off.] 1954. 70 p. ([U. S.] Dept. of State Publication 5458. Department and Foreign Service series, 36) SD54-7 JK851.A435 The first title is an introduction by a career diplo- mat to the organization and work of the Foreign Service as governed by the sweeping Foreign Serv- ice Act of 1946, which is printed as Appendix A (p. 157-21 1 ). Initial chapters trace the evolution of the Service since 1789, and describe its career aspects, including the qualifications it demands. Its relations to other parts of the Department of State, and to other agencies of the U. S. Govern- ment, are considered. The Paris Embassy, the "showcase of the Diplomatic Service" with its 600 staff members (30 times the number in 1912), is then chosen for a case study and exhibited in operation at various levels: the ambassador, the administrative units, and the four main sections: political, consular, economic, and information and cultural relations. Appendix B offers comparative data on the British and French foreign services. Toward a Stronger Foreign Service is the work of a committee of prominent educators and business men which recommended integrating the Foreign Service with Department personnel and liberalizing and expand- ing recruitment policies, so that American repre- sentation abroad would be more adequate to our leading role in world affairs. Tables and charts sup- plement the background information of this study of the Foreign Service and its personnel. The Com- mittee chairman, Henry M. Wriston, in his Di- plomacy in a Democracy (New York, Harper, 1956. 115 p.), stresses the importance of a Foreign Service composed of experts, whose pivotal role is preserv- ing peace by maintaining the American alliance system and containing the aggressions of potential enemies. 3601. Hunt, Gaillard. The Department of State of the United States; its history and func- tions. New Haven, Yale University Press, 1914. 459 p. 14-14205 JK853.H8 "Bibliographical note": p. [438]~439. 3602. Stuart, Graham H. The Department of State; a history of its organization, procedure, and personnel. New York, Macmillan, 1949. 517 p. 49-11378 JK853.S84 These two works are both administrative histories of the Department of State; they supplement each other admirably, and the older of the two is by no means obsolete. Gaillard Hunt (1 862-1924) served for many years in responsible posts in the Depart- ment and produced the first version of his work for use at the Chicago World's Fair of 1893. It is par- ticularly useful for the antecedents of the Depart- ment, the Continental Congress' Committee for Foreign Affairs, and the Confederation's Depart- ment of Foreign Affairs, and for the multiple func- tions, in addition to the conduct of foreign relations, which were imposed upon the Department of State after its organization in 1789. At various times the State Department had competence in a variety of domestic concerns, such as patents, copyrights, census returns, the territories of the United States, the cus- tody of historic documents, etc., which are now handled by specialized agencies; this book is the most convenient source of information for such ac- tivities. Professor Stuart, on the other hand, is almost exclusively concerned with the foreign affairs function, as the Department itself has been in the more recent period. He traces the organization, pro- cedures, and personnel concerned in this function in a chronological treatment of the terms of successive secretaries of state from Thomas Jefferson (1790-93) to George C. Marshall (1947-40); his midway point falls in the administration of William Jennings Bryan (1913-15). "Policy problems are discussed only where they are vitally connected with, or illus- trative of, the methods employed by the Depart- 1 ment officials in the performance of their duties." 3603. Kent, Sherman. Strategic intelligence for . American world policy. Princeton, Prince- ton University Press, 1949. 226 p. 49-8503 JF1525.T6K4 The author, formerly professor of history at Yale University, has been associated with the Office of Strategic Services, the State Department, the Na- tional War College, and the Central Intelligence Agency. He defines intelligence as "the knowledge which our highly placed civilian and militarv men must have to safeguard the national welfare." He analyzes it into knowledge of three main kinds: basic descriptive, current reportorial, and specula- tive-evaluative. It takes an organization to produce such knowledge, and Part II deals with the organ- izational and administrative problems of central and departmental intelligence. Part III considers the activities required to produce intelligence, such as surveillance and research. The author is convinced that the integrity and objectivity of intelligence can be preserved only if the producers are kept adminis- DIPLOMATIC HISTORY AND FOREIGN RELATIONS / 43 1 tratively separate from the consumers. Roger Hils- man's Strategic Intelligence and National Decisions (Glencoe, 111., Free Press, 1956. 187 p.) is an at- tempt to ascertain the doctrines concerning their functions and responsibilities that prevail inside and out of the national intelligence agencies, and to com- pare and criticize them in the interest of a greater interpenetration of knowledge and action. The re- search agencies, he believes, should "be thinking in terms of real problems and of the alternatives to meet these problems." 3604. McCamy, James L. The administration of American foreign affairs. New York, Knopf, 1950. xiii, 364, x p. 50-8595 JK853.M28 1950 The United States is here seen as lagging in the efficient organization of its foreign affairs agencies. The Department of State is criticized for its diffusion of activities, with "consequent confusion of total policy" and inadequate staff. The foreign affairs responsibilities of the President are not effectively coordinated, outside the work of the Bureau of the Budget, the National Security Council, and various other advisory bodies. The organization and use of information are criticized. Congress is seen as unable to fulfill its responsibility of devoting the necessary time and thought to the formulation of policy, and as failing to appropriate sufficient funds for the conduct of foreign relations. 3605. Snyder, Richard C, and Edgar S. Furniss. American foreign policy: formulation, principles, and programs. New York, Rinehart, 1954. 864 p. 54-9560 JX1416.S55 "Selected bibliography" at end of chapters. A systematic introduction to the problems en- countered by American foreign policy in our day, which are of so altered a character since 1939 that the authors speak of "the revolution in American foreign policy." The historical introduction takes its departure from 1898. The bulk of the text is in two parts, one on structure and processes of policy making, and the other on postwar politics in various spheres and areas. Attention is called to the multi- plicity of agencies and voices in the American "decision-making process." Economic and ideolo- gical foreign policy receive separate treatment. In both Europe and the Far East, the "falsity of American wartime estimates" of capacities and in- tentions receives much of the blame for subsequent difficulties. 3606. Stuart, Graham H. American diplomatic and consular practice. 2d ed. New York, Appleton-Century-Crofts, 1952. 477 p. 52-13689 JX1705.S75 1952 Bibliography: p. 453-460. A historical and functional study of the admin- istrative practices of the Department of State and the United States Foreign Service. The organization of the Department, the Foreign Service, diplomatic duties, rights, and immunities, consular organization and pracdces, and a history of a representative em- bassy and consulate abroad (Paris) are among the subjects included. Lists of former secretaries of state and diplomatic representatives at various im- portant posts are appended. 3607. Thomson, Charles A. H. Overseas infor- mation service of the United States Govern- ment. Washington, Brookings Institution, 1948. 397 P- . 48-28231 E744.T5 An administrative history of various official serv- ices of the United States Government, 1941-48. The wartime operations of the Office of War Information are covered in detail. Since the Smith-Mundt Act, under which most of the Government's later infor- mation activities have been carried on, was not passed until 1948, the book is of slight value for the period since its publication. The final fourth of the book is devoted to a discussion of Government informa- tion policies. 3608. Woodrow Wilson Foundation. Study Group, 1950-51. United States foreign policy: its organization and control; report. Wil- liam Yandell Elliott, chairman. Pref. by Harry D. Gideonse. New York, Columbia University Press, 1952. xviii, 288 p. 52-14095 JX1416.W63 1950/51 The report of a study group whose object was to stimulate academic interest in the theory and practice of United States foreign policy, and to select general problems of theoretical and practical signifi- cance for future study. The American system of politics by pressure and adjustment, it is main- tained, has come under a new influence: its effect on foreign relations. Naivete about human nature, the problem of national survival, the overemphasis on economic factors, and the necessity of combining morality with power are among the subjects dis- cussed. The effect of the constitutional separation of powers on foreign policy is analyzed, and some changes making for greater efficiency are proposed. Bii. DEMOCRATIC CONTROL 3609. Almond, Gabriel A. The American people and foreign policy. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1950. 269 p. 5o-<>. , s .1 E744A47 Half title: Institute of International Studies, Yale University. 432 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES An attempt to place American foreign policy in its psychological and sociological context. The au- thor considers complex questions of foreign policy as being frequently beyond the comprehension of non- specialists, and states that the function of the public under a democratic regime is to set up certain policy criteria in the form of widely held values and ex- pectations and judge the results of foreign policy thereby. What is needed, he concludes, is to inform and moderate the views of the leadership of the various interest groups which influence public opin- ion. Mr. Almond thinks that our professional ideal- ism is particularly out of touch with moral and his- torical realities, and that it is unduly influential upon the attitudes of women and young people. 3610. Cheever, Daniel S., and Henry Field Havi- land. American foreign policy and the separation of powers. Cambridge, Harvard Uni- versity Press, 1952. 244 p. 52-5390 JK570.C45 The authors regard the relationship between the executive and legislative branches of government as the weakest and most critical link in the process of making our foreign policy. The present period is one of unprecedented difficulty, requiring extra- ordinary presidential powers, a consistency difficult to attain when our institutions encourage conflict be- tween the President and Congress over foreign policy, and rapid decision. The book consists prin- cipally of a historical survey of relations between Congress and the President in the realm of foreign affairs, with special attention to the larger prob- lems that have arisen since World War II. Various means of establishing cooperation through improved administrative techniques are suggested. Organiza- tional adjustments must be accompanied by "a far stronger spirit of mutual trust between the two branches." Failure to achieve this, it is maintained, will be at the expense of American interests and prestige. 361 1. Dahl, Robert A. Congress and foreign policy. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1950. 305 p. 50-8588 JK1081.D32 Half title: Institute of International Studies, Yale University. According to Mr. Dahl, the traditional role of Congress in the process of foreign policy formula- tion, that of mediator between the preferences of the citizenry and the realities of international affairs as interpreted by executive proposals, is now made ob- solete by the need for quick decisions. He discusses alternate solutions to the problem, which a democracy must solve in order to survive. An in- creased competence of the electorate in international affairs is desirable, but neither readily obtainable nor able to assert itself without adequate policy- making processes. The President's responsibility could go on expanding until it excluded Congress from any concern with foreign policy. The level of Congressional competence should be raised through more and better use of experts on committee staffs, and by establishing some agency to advise and assist Congress on policy alternatives. Col- laboration between the executive and Congressional foreign policy specialists requires Congressional con- fidence in executive policy decisions, as is the case in Great Britain. Volume 289 of The Annals of the American Academy of Political and Social Science is entitled Congress and Foreign Relations (Phila- delphia, 1953. 245 p.) and provides, in a group of informed articles, basic information on the processes of Congressional foreign policy functions and legis- lative-executive relations. 3612. Dangerfield, Roy den J. In defense of the Senate; a study in treaty making. Norman, University of Oklahoma Press, 1933. xvii, 365 p. diagrs. (1 fold.) 33~3594 JK1170.D3 Bibliography: p. [353H57. The effect of the constitutional requirement that treaties obtain a two-thirds majority in the U. S. Senate is discussed on the basis of 832 treaties signed before 1928. The treaties which have led to violent controversy have been relatively few but of great importance. The history of the treaty-making power, the development of the Senate Committee on Foreign Relations, and cases of the amendment or obstruction of treaties are considered. The treaties studied are tabulated and classified in the appendix. 3613. Graebner, Norman A. The new isolation- ism; a study in politics and foreign policy since 1950. New York, Ronald Press, 1956. 289 p. 56-11573 E835.G7 The "new isolationists," in the author's view, con- tinue an unrealistic attitude toward foreign policy which grew up in the 19th century when America's swift successes were made possible by the British Navy and the European balance of power. The con- tinuing illusion of American invincibility has led, in recent foreign relations, to an attitude rather than a policy of "unilateral action aimed at Utopian moral goals." Soon after the election of 1948 the isolation- ists asserted themselves in and out of Congress and blamed the frustrations of our foreign policy upon "incompetence and even betrayal by successive ad- ministrations." The Truman and Eisenhower ad- ministrations have both come to terms with their critics by relying less upon negotiation, and more upon an inflexible attitude based upon military force, almost to the exclusion of diplomacy. The rest of the Free World has no stomach for a policy of liber- ation which must keep all on the brink of war, and DIPLOMATIC HISTORY AND FOREIGN RELATIONS / 433 would like to meet the altered Russian attitude since the death of Stalin with genuine negotiation, especi- ally in the economic sphere. The author calls for "a flexible and imaginative [American] policy geared to a world that can find no alternative to coexist- ence. 3614. Kirk, Grayson L. The study of interna- tional relations in American colleges and universities. New York, Council on Foreign Re- lations, 1947. 113 p. 47-5856 JX1293.U6K5 The author, at the time of publication professor of international relations, is now president of Columbia University. The book represents his re- actions to a series of six regional conferences on teaching and research in international relations sponsored by the Council on Foreign Relations in 1946. The question of whether international rela- tions should remain a subdivision of political science or become a separate discipline is taken up. Prob- lems in undergraduate, graduate, and postdoctoral training and research are surveyed, and constructive suggestions made. Chapter 3 on graduate training reviews the types of professional career to which it may lead, and urges the rigorous selection of candi- dates by the universities which provide it. 3615. Markel, Lester. Public opinion and foreign policy, by Lester Markel and [others.] New York, Published for the Council on Foreign Relations by Harper, 1949. 227 p. 49-1714 E744.M355 Contents. — Introduction: Opinion, a neglected instrument, by Lester Markel. — Foreign policy and opinion at home: Dark areas of ignorance, by Martin Kriesberg. The number one voice, by James Reston. The mirror called Congress, by Cabell Phillips. When the big guns speak, by H. W. Baldwin. More than diplomacy, by W. P. Davi- son. — Foreign policy and opinions abroad: Chart of the cold war, by Shepard Stone. Voices of America, by W. P. Davison. Assignment for the press, by C. D. Jackson. Two vital case histories, by Arnaldo Cortesi and "Observer." — Conclusion: Opportunity or disaster? By Lester Markel. A cooperative project of the Council on Foreign Relations which had for chairman the Sunday editor of The New Yor^ Times. It is held that Americans have failed to give public opinion "the emphasis and direction it must have if it is to be the vital instrument we need." As a result, it is alleged, American foreign policy is understood neither at home nor abroad. Prejudice and lack of interest are presented as among the reasons why many Ameri- cans view foreign affairs with indifference. In their effort to present American policies and motives in a fair light, our agencies of information have to 431240—60 29 contend, not only with an unscrupulous Communist counter-propaganda, but with European stereotypes of American luxury and cultural vacuity. 3616. Westerfield, Bradford. Foreign policy and party politics: Pearl Harbor to Korea, by Holt Bradford Westerfield. New Haven, Yale Uni- versity Press, 1955. 448 p. 55-5990 E806.W455 Bibliography: p. 429-435. Congressional reaction to administration foreign policy is examined statistically through its voting record, descriptively by party organization for for- eign policy control and historically as manifested by the role of the parties in American foreign relations from World War II to the outbreak of the Korean War. The author contends that the problem of adequate democratic control of foreign policy may be resolved through partisanship, bipartisanship, or extrapartisanship. In the latter, a term coined by the author, the administration seeks to remove im- portant foreign policy decisions from the presi- dential election by securing support outside party lines from influential opposition leaders, and by relying upon party discipline within its own party. Biii. POLICIES 3617. American Foundation for Political Educa- tion. Readings in American foreign policy, edited by Robert A. Goldwin. 4th ed. Chicago, 1955. 3 v. maps. 55-4447 E183.7.A55 1955 Contents. — v. 1. Foreign Affairs in the American democracy. Growth and expansion. The United States and Europe. The United States and Latin America. — v. 2. The United States and the Far East. Some war aims in World War II. From "contain- ment" to "retaliation." — v. 3. Present problems of American foreign policy. Some alternatives to pres- ent foreign policy. What principles guide American policy? These volumes are intended to accompany a dis- cussion program in American foreign policy spon- sored by this Foundation for promoting "a more rational approach to politics." The selections, from contemporary books, articles, speeches, and public documents, are chosen to present alternative view- points on problems of foreign policy, and to provide the reader with a framework of facts sufficient to enable him to form his own judgment on past and present policies. 3618. Baldwin, Hanson W. The price of power. New York, Published for the Council on Foreign Relations by Harper, 1948. 361 p. 48-6182 E744.B2 Bibliography: p. 329-333. 434 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES An attempt to discover the effect of the technical and political revolution growing out of World War II on the strategic position of the United States. The possible effect upon American democracy of the necessity to protect the American continent from attack is regarded as a key problem. The author considers a prodemocratic attitude more important to American defense than mere fear of Russia. Foreign policy must rest on aroused public opinion, not on predominance of the military in American counsels. Military, economic, strategic, intelligence, research, and human problems are discussed. 3619. Barber, Hollis W. Foreign policies of the United States. New York, Dryden Press, 1953. 614 p. 53-8259 _ E183.7.B34 The outstanding problems of American foreign policy in 1953 are outlined historically in this college textbook. After a definition of American foreign policy as determined by Congress and the admin- istration, and as executed by the Department of State and the Foreign Service, the Cold War is treated in a discussion of American political and economic relations with the USSR and Western Europe. Secondly, attention is focused upon hemi- spheric relations within the Inter-American system and upon our relations with each nation in that system. There follows a summary of American re- lations with China and Japan. Finally there is a lengthy oudine of America's role in the United Nations. 3620. Burnham, James. Containment or libera- tion? An inquiry into the aims of United States foreign policy. New York, J. Day, 1953. 256 p. 52-12682 E744.B858 The author criticizes the policy enunciated by George Kennan in 1947, which he identifies as a policy of containment of Soviet Russia, as (1) ignor- ing Marxist ideology predicting an inevitable con- flict between socialism and capitalism; (2) placing the United States at a disadvantage by adopting a purely defensive policy; (3) ignoring the fact that communism cannot be sealed off behind a definable border; (4) leaving vanquished peoples at the mercy of Communists; (5) lacking in moral appeal. He maintains that by consolidating the victories they have already obtained, the Communists will have won world domination. The author does not con- sider ideological considerations important, but never- theless advocates an ideological campaign against communism. An extreme statement, which neglects ways and means, and is often unfair to the propo- nents of other views. 3621. Davis, Elmer Holmes. Two minutes till midnight. Indianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill, 1955. 207 p. 55-6823 E835.D38 The author, wartime Director of the Office of War Information, is a news analyst of long standing. In this work he considers the threat of mass destruc- tion in the form of the hydrogen bomb and its fall- out to the world as a whole and to the United States in particular. Time, he is convinced, is rapidly run- ning out for the United States as the leading power in weapons of mass destruction. Although, at the time of the author's writing, the United States was gaining the upper hand in Europe, the Soviet Union was winning out in Asia, and this, the author thought, was the beginning of a course of victories which would ultimately compel the United States to wage war upon the Soviet Union and its growing body of satellites. 3622. Dulles, John Foster. War or peace. New York, Macmillan, 1950. 274 p. 50-7251 E744.D85 The author was an originator of the bipartisan foreign policy, and has been since 1953 Secretary of State. Here he regards an eventual war as prob- able, unless by "positive and well-directed efforts" it is fended off. The author frequently quotes from Stalin's Problems of Leninism, which he considers an authoritative guide to Soviet intentions. He puts his faith in the moral and religious sense of human- ity, world organization, and constant vigilance. He declines to rely on materialism or militarism. 3623. Finletter, Thomas K. Power and policy; U. S. foreign policy and military power in the hydrogen age. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1954. 408 p. 54-11328 E835.F5 A powerfully argued view of the consequences of the twin menaces, atomic fission and Russian ag- gression, for American foreign policy. Since the possibility of a devastating sneak attack will always be present, the primary aim of military policy must be decisive air-atomic superiority, and that of for- eign policy a state of enforced universal peace and disarmament, as the only tolerable way out of pres- ent dangers. Recent American policies in both spheres are criticized as inconsistent half-measures. 3624. Fischer, John. Master plan U. S. A., an in- formal report on America's foreign policy and the men who make it. New York, Harper, 1951. 253 p. 5 I 7 I 35 2 5 E744- F 55 An exposition of the foreign policy of the Truman administration, which is treated as consistently formulated and comparatively stable. As developed by the National Security Council, it is regarded as an attempt to "contain" Russia, through building up DIPLOMATIC HISTORY AND FOREIGN RELATIONS / 435 situations of strength in Europe and other potential danger points, and as aimed at the preservation of peace by making the consequences of aggression un- attractive. China is not regarded as permanendy hostile as long as the chance of "Titoism" exists. Technical assistance is regarded as a means of bring- ing about revolutionary changes favorable to the West. 3625. Kennan, George F. American diplomacy, 1900-1950. Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1 95 1. 146 p. (Charles R. Walgreen Founda- tion lectures) 51-12883 E744.K3 The author was the first director of the Policy Planning Staff of the State Department, 1947, a member of the Institute for Advanced Study, Prince- ton University, 1950-1952, and Ambassador to Rus- sia, 1952-1953. These Walgreen lectures, dealing with the relation of American diplomacy to two world wars, are followed by two articles on Soviet- American relations originally printed in Foreign Affairs. The fifty years under consideration saw the United States move from a detached neutrality to leadership in international affairs. Mr. Kennan shows that during that period American foreign policy has normally been guided by a "legalistic- moralistic" approach to international relations. However, involvement in two global wars and in a cold war with the Soviet Union indicates that the conduct of other nations cannot usefully be judged as good or bad, nor as subject to the Anglo-Saxon con- cept of individual law. Our recent experiences with the Soviet Union have shown that American policy must be flexible enough to engage in war or political attrition, while continuing to build up the world's confidence in our spiritual and moral integrity. 3626. Morgenthau, Hans J. In defense of the na- tional interest; a critical examination of American foreign policy. New York, Knopf, 1951. xii, 283, viii p. 51-11217 E744.M68 An enlarged version of the author's Walgreen Foundation lectures delivered at the University of Chicago in the spring of 1950. American foreign policy, he maintains, can have only one aim: the preservation of the national security at all costs. However, we have been guilty of confusing the na- tional interest with moral principles too often un- related to political realities, even though the prin- ciples themselves are above reproach. Foreign rela- tions must be conducted according to Hobbes' dictum that there is no law or morality outside of the state, and the national interest must be considered solely in terms of advantages to be gained and risks to be avoided. The morality of foreign policy decisions must not be debated, but only their efficacy in pre- serving our security. At the time of publication, the author believed that the vital objective of Ameri- can foreign policy in Europe and Asia was the restoration, by means short of war, of the immediate post-World War II balance of power, i. e., the dis- lodgement of the Soviet Union from the areas it had brought under control since 1945. 3627. Mowrer, Edgar A. The nightmare of Amer- ican foreign policy. New York, Knopf, 1948. viii, 283, xxii p. 48-9096 E744.M75 The author, a journalist of wide experience, be- lieves that President Roosevelt's policy of repre- senting Soviet Russia as a democracy and failing to publicize Soviet diplomatic demands was an error. He does not believe that the USSR can be contained by the present system of sovereign states or by the United Nations as presently organized. He favors a grand alliance supplemented by regional Atlantic, Middle Eastern, Far Eastern, and European alliances. 3628. Osgood, Robert Endicott. Ideals and self- interest in America's foreign relations; the great transformation of the twentieth century. [ Chi- cago] University of Chicago Press, 1953. 491 p. 53-10532 E744.O77 A revision of the author's thesis, Harvard University. The author argues that from the time of the Spanish-American War to World War II the United States failed to make a mature adjustment to its international environment, because it let ideals pre- dominate and "failed, as a whole, to understand or act upon a realistic view of international relations." Alfred T. Mahan and Theodore Roosevelt are treated as realists whose imperialistic opinions discredited realism and encouraged isolationism following the American commitment in world affairs. A realistic balance between ideals and national self interest is advocated as essential. The disillusionment of the 1920's and the insecurity of the 30's and 40's are regarded as having been favorable to a realistic approach, although they were not realism itself. 3629. Reinhardt, George C. American strategy in the atomic age. Norman, University of Oklahoma Press, 1955. 236 p. 55-6363 UA23.R44 This book is a sequel to Atomic Weapons in Land Combat (Harrisburg, Pa., Military Service Pub. Co., io~}. 182 p.) written by Col. Reinhardt with Lt. Col. William R. Kintner. Col. Reinhardt, a fol- lower of Sir Halford Mackinder's doctrine of geo- politics, finds the policy of containment an inade- quate safeguard of American security. The openly conducted aggression of the Soviet Union must be opposed by a new policy which will exert direct 436 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES pressure upon the aggressor. The United States must mass an overwhelmingly strong military force overseas which will directly threaten the Soviet Heartland. Once this is established, the United States must mobilize the non-Communist world in a coalition guided by the specific ideology of "co- operation — activity shared for mutual benefit" — whose purpose is to defeat Soviet communism rather than merely to counter it. 3630. Reitzel, William, Morton A. Kaplan, and Constance G. Coblenz. United States for- eign policy, 1945— 1955. Washington, Brookings Institution, 1956. 535 p. maps, diagrs. 56-11440 E813.R4 Bibliography: p. 485-511. This survey, by members of the staff of the Brookings Institution, examines the position of the United States in the light of recent foreign policy decisions. In analyzing the effect of taking one course of action rather than another, the authors have divided the work into four parts. Part I re- views foreign policy goals determined during 1946-47. Part II assesses key decisions made as United States policy toward Russia developed from 1947 to 1950. Part III discusses the decision to meet aggression with collective force, which has shaped United States policy since 1950. Part IV discusses the effect of this decision on the position of the United States in the international system of 1956, suggests methods for review of current foreign policy, and outlines action which may be taken in the future. The annotated bibliography is of value to students of international affairs. 3631. Summers, Robert E., ed. The United States and international organizations. New York, Wilson, 1952. 194 p. (The Reference shelf, v. 24, no. 5) 52-10267 JX1417.S8 Like the other volumes in this series, this small reference work is designed to provide a factual and analytical, though not exhaustive, background for the high school debater. Approximately 50 articles, speeches, and extracts from documents have been assembled on the general question of what type of international organization the United States should support. The articles are grouped under such topics as the United Nations and its strengths and weak- nesses, NATO, the problem of regional security, the United States and European integration, world federation, American foreign policy in 1952, and the role of the United States in international affairs. Each section is preceded by an introduction written by the editor. A bibliography is included, mainly of works not utilized in the text. 3632. Tannenbaum, Frank. The American tradi- tion in foreign policy. Norman, University of Oklahoma Press, 1955. 178 p. 55-6364 E183.7.T35 An uncompromising reassertion of the democratic and moral bases of American foreign policy, in the light of "the doctrine of the co-ordinate state." Just as Rhode Island is of equal importance with Texas in the Union, so all states are of equal dignity in international relations, which must therefore be guided into an institutional and federal pattern. The importance of the ideal of the co-ordinate state is traced in our relationships with Latin America, the Far East, and the League of Nations. The author rejects the doctrine of Real-politi\ urged by Morgenthau and Kennan, and abhors the idea of dividing the world into Russian and American spheres of interest. 3633. U. S. President. U. S. participation in the U N; report by the President to the Congress for the year 1955. [Washington, U. S. Govt. Print. Off.] 1956. 277 p. ([U.S.] Dept. of State. Pub- lication 6318. International organization and con- ference series, III, 115) 47-32785 JX1977.2.U5A32 1955 The United Nations Participation Act of 1945 calls upon the President to transmit to Congress an annual report on United States participation in United Nations activities. These reports have regu- larly been prepared and published by the Depart- ment of State; variant titles were used before the present one was settled upon. The present report is the tenth, and begins with a brief account of the meeting of the United Nations held in San Fran- cisco in June 1955 to commemorate the tenth an- niversary of the signing of the Charter there. Presi- dent Eisenhower's letter of transmittal affirms that the United Nations in its second decade "is increas- ingly vital and effective." The work of the Special- ized Agencies such as the Food and Agricultural Organization and the International Monetary Fund is also included in this report. The report is organ- ized under the following headings: "Maintenance of Peace and Security," "Economic and Social Co- operation and Human Rights," "Dependent Terri- tories," "Legal and Constitutional Developments," and "Budgetary, Financial, and Administrative Mat- ters." Appendixes outline the United Nations Sys- tem and other organizational and statistical infor- mation; a list of all United States representatives within the System during 1955 occupies p. 271-274. 3634. The United States in world affairs, 1954. By Richard P. Stebbins and the research staff of the Council on Foreign Relations. New York, Published for the Council on Foreign Relations by DIPLOMATIC HISTORY AND FOREIGN RELATIONS / 437 Harper, 1956. 498 p. 32-26065 E744.U66 1954 This annual review of the foreign relations of the United States has covered years since 1931, with the exception of the war years 1941-44, for which no volumes were issued. Double volumes were issued for 1934-35 ^d for 1945-47. The original compil- ers were Walter Lippmann and William O. Scroggs; Whitney H. Shepardson replaced Mr. Lippmann with the 1934-35 volume; John C. Campbell pre- pared the first three volumes after the war; and Mr. Stebbins has been in charge since the 1949 volume. The present volume for 1954 is the first to omit a formal bibliography, which is replaced "by a more copious use of bibliographical footnotes at appro- priate points in the text," but the classified "Chro- nology of World Events" (p. 465-487) is retained. After introductory chapters on the salient develop- ments of the year, and on the political, military, and economic aspects of American foreign policy, the course of events is traced in four major areas, and a concluding chapter deals with "Disarmament and the United Nations." A companion series under the same imprint, Documents on American Foreign Relations, began with a volume for 1952, has reached that for 1955, and has frequendy changed editors. A comparable series produced and published by the Brookings Institution of Wash- ington, D. C, Major Problems of United States Foreign Policy, reached a sixth volume for 1952-53, published in 1952, but unfortunately none have ap- peared since. These annual volumes were more ab- stract in their approach, and were intended "to illustrate a technique for the study of the foreign relations of the United States closely approximating that used by Government officials in the formulation of foreign policies." 3635. Wilcox, Francis O., and Thorsten V. Kali- jarvi, eds. Recent American foreign policy; basic documents 1941-1951. New York, Appleton- Century-Crofts, 1952. xviii, 927 p. maps. 52-1546 JX1416.W5 Originally issued in 1950 as A Decade of Ameri- can Foreign Policy ( 1st sess. 81st Cong., Senate docu- ment no. 123), this collection of the "more important documents and official statements bearing upon the foreign policy of the United States in the period fol- lowing our entrance into World War II" was revised to include additional materials for the period 1950- 51. Topics covered arc: wartime pronouncements regarding the postwar settlement; postwar confer- ences; the United Nations; the inter-American regional system; defeated and occupied areas; other areas of special interest; and current international '■ issues. A brief commentary accompanies each item, a feature lacking in the original publication. The editors are members of the research staff of the Senate Committee on Foreign Relations. Biv. ECONOMIC POLICY 3636. Brown, William Adams, and Redvers Opie. American foreign assistance. Washington, Brookings Institution, 1953. 615 p. 53-1 1921 HC60.B7 Bibliography: p. [587]-5 9 8. A detailed description of all forms of American assistance to foreign nations from the inauguration of Lend-Lease in March 1941 through the Mutual Security Program implemented in October 195 1. The authors emphasize that assistance for economic reconstruction, if less popular and more difficult to grasp, is no less important to ultimate security than military assistance. 3637. Ellis, Howard S. The economics of free- dom; the progress and future of aid to Europe. By Howard S. Ellis assisted by the research staff of the Council on Foreign Relations. With an introd. by Dvvight D. Eisenhower. New York, Published for the Council on Foreign Relations by Harper, 1950. xviii, 549 p. 50-9247 HC240.E43 A progress report on the Marshall Plan and its consequences by the staff of ten experts headed by Dr. Ellis, who was on leave from the University of California for the purpose. During two years the United States furnished between four and five bil- lion dollars worth of aid, and European production rose by about 30 billion dollars in each year. "In comparison with the progress achieved after World War I toward reconstruction, rehabilitation and in- ternal economic stability, Europe has scored a phenomenal success." Descriptive chapters are de- voted to the objectives and methods of the program, to its financial complications, and to its implementa- tion in the United Kingdom, Western Germany, France, and Italy. 3638. Harris, Seymour E., ed. Foreign economic policy for the United States. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1948. 490 p. 48-4988 HF1455.H3 The work of 24 experts, most of them practicing economists. After individual discussions of our economic relations with Great Britain, Germany, Japan, Canada, Latin America, the U. S. S. R., and China, attention is focused on international economic agencies and tariff agreements, the European Re- covery Program, and problems of international ceo- 438 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES nomic equilibrium. The editor states that the Inter- national Trade Organization, the International Monetary Fund, and the International Bank for Reconstruction and Development represent "a bit of sovereignty sloughed off the sovereign states and grafted on to the international agencies operating in behalf of all countries." 3639. Mikesell, Raymond F. United States eco- nomic policy and international relations. New York, McGraw-Hill, 1952. 341 p. (Eco- nomics handbook series) 51-12630 HF1455.M53 A comprehensive survey of American foreign economic policy. The first fourth of the book is devoted to the years 1919-39; the balance to the period since 1939, with major emphasis on the period since World War II. Monetary, investment, and defense policy are the leading topics discussed, with separate chapters on the Truman Doctrine, the Marshall Plan, and American objectives in Western Europe. The Truman Doctrine is regarded as mark- ing the acceptance of international responsibility, the New Deal economic program having accustomed the American people to governmental action in eco- nomic affairs. 3640. Price, Harry Bayard. The Marshall plan and its meaning. Ithaca, N. Y., Cornell University Press, 1955. xvi, 424 p. 55-14635 HC60.P7 "Published under the auspices of the Govern- mental Affairs Institute, Washington, D. C." Born of the effects of World War II upon the economies of Europe, Asia, and Africa, the Mar- shall Plan was intended to ensure long-term recovery rather than to provide temporary relief. Analysis of 300 interviews with participating ERP officials, and of industrial, agricultural, and monetary sta- tistics forms the basis of this evaluation, which shows that the Marshall Plan did place Europe in a posi- tion of economic stability. This survey covers all countries which received aid under the European Recovery Program as well as Asiatic countries which were granted aid by the other agencies of the Eco- nomic Cooperation Administration. 3641. U. S. Dept. of State. Point four, coopera- tive program for aid in the development of economically underdeveloped areas [prepared with assistance of an Interdepartmental Advisory Com- mittee on Technical Assistance and of the staff of the National Advisory Council. Rev. Jan. 1950. Washington, 1950] 167 p. map, diagrs. (Its Pub- lication 3719. Economic cooperation series, 24) 50-60118 HC59.A3U52 1950 Issued also without series title. The official program of American technical assist- ance to underdeveloped areas, e. g., Asia, Africa, and Latin America, first proposed by President Truman in his 1949 inaugural address, is oudined. The en- couragement of capital investment, both domestic and foreign, is proposed as a second means of stimu- lating the economic improvement and democrati- zation of these regions. After a consideration of the problem, its financial aspects are explored. 3642. Woodrow Wilson Foundation. The politi- cal economy of American foreign policy; its concepts, strategy, and limits; report of a study group sponsored by the Woodrow Wilson Founda- tion and the National Planning Association. [William Y. Elliott, chairman] New York, Holt, 1955. xv, 414 p. 55-6125 HF1455.W6 An inquiry by a study group of nine prominent experts, who find the central objective of American foreign economic policy to be "the construction of a better integrated and more effectively functioning international economic system." Under present-day conditions, international economic re-integration can be brought about only through "a deliberate co- ordination of national economic policies either by cooperation among national governments or — more effectively and reliably — by supranational author- ities." Means for increasing the effectiveness of such existing grouping as the European Payments Union are considered, as well as for opening up the domestic market of the United States to a greater flow of imports from Europe. The role of the United States in increasing and regularizing the flow of capital and technology to the underdeveloped countries is oudined. X Military History and the Armed Forces A A. General Worlds 3643-3652 B. The Army 3653-3665 C. The Navy 3666-3677 D. Wars of the United States Di. The Revolution 3678-3684 & Dii. 1798-1848 3685-3689 1 Diii. The Civil War 3690-3706 Div. The Spanish-American War 3707-3708 Dv. World War 1 3709-3716 Dvi. World War 11 3717-3727 THE United States has been, until very recent times, a quite unmilitary nation with a very small standing army. Here the English tradition of distrust of armed forces, and control of military by civilian authorities, has continued or been strengthened, inasmuch as there has been no general agreement on the necessity of a large navy. Nevertheless, the nation was born in war, and has fought six considerable wars since, not to mention lesser conflicts such as the innumerable ones with Indian tribes on its western frontier. Each large war has demanded a sudden and severe effort of rearmament, and a corresponding one of organization which has usually proved the more difficult. Three of these wars have absorbed during their time nearly the whole of the national energies. Such being the case, the litera- ture which is sampled in this chapter is an indis- pensable part of the national record, but it must not be taken to imply any predominance of the military element in American life, thought, or character. There have been Generals in the White House, but only three of them professional soldiers, and only one of these had spent his adult life in uninterrupted military service. This relative unconcern for the military side of life is reflected in the literature. The United States has never undertaken any large-scale publication of the military records of the Revolution, the War of 1812, the Mexican War, or of World War I. Mili- tary history was for the most part a neglected sub- ject in the graduate schools of American universities from their establishment, and especially from 1919- 1939. The selections that follow contain only three works of academic origin earlier than World War II: those of Hatch (no. 3681), Smith (3689), and Shannon (3702), and the second of these is a general history which might well have been placed in Chap- ter VIII. Nor, if we except the Civil War, was there any considerable output of such literature on the part of professional soldiers and sailors. Admiral Mahan (no. 3688) is the great exception, but the unfinished magnum opus of General Emory Upton (no. 3651) had to wait over 20 years for publica- tion. Some valuable work has been contributed by leisured amateurs such as Gardner W. Allen and Hoffman Nickerson. In consequence of all this, there is no adequate general history of the U. S. Army, or general history of the Revolutionary War, or operational history of World War I. Since the last war, of course, the picture is entirely changed: the armed forces have their own large staffs of pro- fessional historians, and the universities are in- creasingly giving the subject its due emphasis. The arrangement by sections that follows is self- explanatory, save that Section A, General Works, 439 440 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES is necessarily a melange, including books on the civil-military relation, on national military policy, on veterans' problems and organizations, and on conscientious objectors, and a biography of a prophet of air power. There is no separate section on the Air Force simply because its independent status is too recent, whence the state of the literature does not warrant it. A. General Works 3643. Bernardo, C. Joseph, and Eugene H. Bacon. American military policy, its development since 1775. Harrisburg, Pa., Military Service Pub. Co., 1955. 512 p. 55775 2 9 UA23.B43 A routine textbook which provides the only gen- eral survey of American military policy from the Revolution through the Korean War. Naval policy is included, but in subordinate and inadequate em- phasis. The size of the Army receives chief atten- tion, and questions of organization, training, staff, mobilization, and economic resources follow in im- portance. Public opinion is rather mechanically presented through brief extracts from newspapers and magazines. The authors regularly discount "the specter of militarism." 3643a. Brophy, Arnold. The Air Force; a pano- rama of the Nation's youngest service. Foreword by Robert L. Scott, Jr. [New York] Gil- bert Press; distributed by Messner, 1956. 362 p. 56-6784 UG633.B76 This is the only comprehensive history of the United States Air Force in a single volume. The function, organizational structure, and type and number of equipment and personnel of Air Force staff, combat, operational, technical, transport, sup- ply, and training commands are summarized as each comes into operation to repel a hypothetical attack on North America. Such branches as the Strategic Air Command, the Air University, the Military Air Transport Service, and the Air Materiel Command are described along with a short history of Ameri- can military aviation from its formation as a unit in the Army Signal Corps in 1907 until the present (1955). Industry's contribution is acknowledged by the inclusion of short histories of the principal industries now under contract with the Air Force. Tables of casualty, personnel, aircraft, and fiscal sta- tistics help the average reader to realize the scope of the Nation's youngest service. 3644. Davies, Wallace Evan. Patriotism on pa- rade; the story of veterans' and hereditary organizations in America, 1783-1900. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1955. xiv, 388 p. (Har- vard historical studies, v. 66) 55-1 195 1 E172.7.D3 "Bibliographical essay": p. [3591-367. Although the Society of the Cincinnati was founded in 1783, it remained "a poorly organized and ineffective affair," of negligible influence upon American life. The pattern for patriotic societies was really set by the survivors of the Civil War in the Grand Army of the Republic, and its extraordi- nary success led to a mushrooming of other groups of veterans and of veterans' relatives. This led, in the 1890's, to a rash of societies open only to persons of requisite pedigree, of which the Daugh- ters of the American Revolution is the most con- spicuous. This study traces their influence and in- terest in such varied subjects as veterans' pref- erence, pensions, the teaching of history, immigra- tion policy, labor disturbances, etc. 3644a. Dupuy, Richard Ernest, and Trevor N. Dupuy. Military heritage of America. New York, McGraw-Hill, 1956. 794 p. (McGraw- Hill series in history) 55-11169 E181.D8 Bibliography: p. 729-752. Written by a father-and-son team, both of whom hold the rank of colonel in the U. S. Army, this work, in a preliminary form, has been used by the Harvard Department of Military Science and Tac- tics since 1954 and is the only up-to-date survey of American "military history presented from the American point of view." In order to acquaint the general reading public with the art of war as prac- ticed by Americans, all prominent batdes and cam- paigns of the eight major wars participated in by the United States from the Revolution (1775-83) to the Korean War (1950-53) are outlined along with short accounts of Indian wars and police actions involving American forces. The nonmilitary reader is aided in following the operational accounts by numerous batde plans and maps in the text, clear definitions of the principles and terms of military strategy and tactics, and a brief account of world military history since the Battle of Marathon (490 B. C). It is the authors' belief that the general rules of strategy and tactics have not changed and must be followed by United States forces in the future as they have been followed in the past. MILITARY HISTORY AND THE ARMED FORCES / 44 1 3645. Jones, Richard Seelye. A history of the American Legion. Indianapolis, Bobbs- Merrill, 1946. 393 p. 46-7962 D570.A1J6 Not an official history of the largest and most influential organization of World War I veterans, but written with full access to the Legion's quite complete official records. The author gives atten- tion to organization and finances, and provides an objective treatment of such controversial issues as the bonus, education, and un-Americanism. 3646. Kerwin, Jerome G., ed. Civil-military re- lationships in American life. Chicago, Uni- versity of Chicago Press, 1948. 181 p. (Chicago University. Charles R. Walgreen Foundation lectures) 48-7342 UA23.K415 A series of eight lectures by Hanson W. Baldwin, Charles E. Merriam, T. V. Smith, Adlai Stevenson, and others. Their purpose "is to identify the change in conditions which has caused a much greater pervasiveness of the military in American life and at the same time to raise the question of how our cherished freedoms can be preserved by the safeguarding of the predominancy of civilian power." 3647. Levine, Isaac Don. Mitchell, pioneer of air power. New York, Duell, Sloan, & Pearce, 1943. 420 p. 43-5 I0 5 I UG633.M45L4 "Mitchell's own writings": p. 401-405. A biography based on Mitchell's own papers and sharing the strenuous partisanship of its subject. After his court-martial in 1925, William Mitchell resigned from the Army and devoted himself to propaganda on behalf of the major development of air power. He died in 1936 at the age of 56, worn out by his struggle to convert a reluctant military hierarchy. In 1945 he was posthumously awarded the Medal of Honor and the rank of major general. 3648. Palmer, John McAuley. America in arms; the experience of the United States with military organization. New Haven, Yale Univer- sity Press, 1941. 207 p. 41-9795 UA25.P27 Far slighter than Upton's massive work (no. 3651), it pursues throughout our military history the single theme of a "well-organized militia" on the Swiss model, as recommended by General Wash- ington in his "Sentiments on a Peace Establishment" of 1783. Our military ills are traced to its absence, and to the "ill-organized militia" and the "expansible standing army" which came to be substituted. 3649. Sibley, Mulford Q\> and Philip E. Jacob. Conscription of conscience; the American state and the conscientious objector, 1940-1947. 431240—60 30 Ithaca, Cornell University Press, 1952. 580 p. (Cor- nell studies in civil liberty) 52-12673 UB342.U5S52 "Selected and annotated bibliography": p. 549- 566. Because of inadequate records the treatment of the conscientious objector by draft boards and the armed services is sketchily presented, but the 12,000 inmates of Civilian Public Service Camps are thoroughly studied. The authors conclude that, largely because of the violent hostility of special groups channeled through veterans' organizations, only a very limited degree of tolerance was achieved. 3650. Smith, Louis. American democracy and military power; a study of civil control of the military power in the United States. Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1951. xv, 370 p. (Studies in public administration) 51-13393 JK558.S5 A comprehensive analysis of a problem which has been present from the foundation of the Republic, but has become increasingly urgent with total war and continuing crisis. The book combines theo- retical and historical considerations with administra- tive practice, in describing the control of national armed forces by the President, executive depart- ments, Congress and its committees, and the judiciary. 3651. Upton, Emory. The military policy of the United States. 4th impression. Washing- ton, Govt. Print. Off., 1917. xxiii, 495 p. War 18-9 UA23.U75 1917 War Department document no. 290. Edited by Joseph P. Sanger, assisted by William D. Beach and Charles D. Rhodes, of the Military Information Division of the General Staff. The classic indictment of the early failures of American democracy in maintaining an army of trained officers and men, and in providing for its effective organization and command. General Upton had covered the campaigns of 1862 when his death in 1881 left the manuscript unfinished; it was rediscovered and published by Secretary Elihu Root in 1904. 3652. Wecter, Dixon. When Johnny comes marching home. [Boston] Houghton Mif- flin, 1944. 588 p. (A Life-in-America prize book) 44-7507 E181.W43 Bibliographical references included in "Notes" (P- [559]-577>- A review of demobilization and veterans' prob- lems after our first three major wars: the Resolution, Civil War, and World War I, with some appraisal of prospects from the viewpoint of 1944. Ncces- 442 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES sarily incomplete, it is based to a remarkable degree on veterans' own narratives and other primary sources. It emphasizes the common soldier's own attitudes, his adjustment during his first five years of civilian life, and the reaction that follows the high endeavor of war. Over the period covered, the na- tion's sense of responsibility toward the soldier sub- stantially widened. B. The Army 3653. Carter, William G. Harding. Creation of the American General Staff. Personal nar- rative of the General Staff system of the American Army. Washington, Govt. Print. Off., 1924. 65 p. ([U.S.] 68th Cong., 1st sess. Senate. Document 119) 24-26546 UB223.C3 The Army entered the 20th century without any effective agency of planning or higher command. During the next few years Elihu Root, Secretary of War, and W. H. Carter, Assistant Adjutant General, collaborated first to draft and secure the passage of the Act of Feb. 14, 1903, establishing a General Staff Corps, and then to organize the staff so authorized. General Carter's personal narrative must be sought in a Congressional document printed 20 years later. 3654. Carter, William G. Harding. The life of Lieutenant General Chaffee. Chicago, Uni- versity of Chicago Press, 191 7. 296 p. 18-32 E181.C43 AdnaRomanza Chaffee (1842-1914) was an Ohio farm boy who enlisted in the Regular Army the day after Bull Run, and retired in 1906 as lieutenant general and chief of staff. His army career included a maximum of active service, as a cavalry officer un- der Sheridan, as an Indian fighter under Crook, in the Santiago campaign of 1898, in command of the relief expedition to Pekin, and in pacifying the Philippines. General Carter tells a very plain tale, but the indomitable spirit of this hard-bitten old campaigner shows through. 3655. Elliott, Charles Winslow. Winfield Scott, the soldier and the man. New York, Mac- millan, 1937. xviii, 817 p. 37-18570 E403.1.S4E6 Bibliography: p. 769-781. Scott ( 1 786-1 866) entered the Regular Army in 1808, made his reputation and achieved general rank in the hardest fighting on the Niagara frontier (1813-14), succeeded as commander-in-chief in 1841, conducted one of the most brilliant campaigns in history against Mexico City in 1847, ran for Presi- dent in 1852, and did all he could to hold the Union cause together at the outset of the Civil War. Major Elliott aimed to write a definitive biography, and quotes at length from a great variety of original sources to produce a work of great detail, but no more so than the subject deserves. Scott's own Memoirs (New York, Sheldon, 1864, 653 p.) are rather naive and full of special pleading. There are reminiscences of value in the memoirs of his sometime aide, Erasmus D. Keyes (no. 2711). 3656. Forman, Sidney. West Point; a history of the United States Military Academy. New York, Columbia University Press, 1950. 255 p. 50-8255 U410.L1F6 Thesis — Columbia University. Bibliography: p. \in^\~iip.. The national Military Academy was founded in 1802, enlarged in 1812, and given its characteristic impress during the superintendency of Sylvanus Thayer in 1817-33. Formed on French models, it has always emphasized a scientific curriculum, phys- ical training, and rigid discipline, and has been the recurrent target of civilian criticism. This concise historical sketch emphasizes its success in training leaders. 3657. Ganoe, William Addleman. The history of the United States Army. Rev. ed. New York, Appleton-Century, 1942. 640 p. 42-20792 E181.G17 1942 "Selected bibliography": p. 557—593. Those wishing to read a general narrative may be referred to Spaulding below (no. 3664), but the strictly chronological treatment and the marginal dating of every incident render this volume very useful for reference consultation. It provides in- deed well-nigh the only peacetime annals of the Army in any printed work. There are no maps, but some serviceable appendices. 3658. Gillie, Mildred H. Forging the thunder- bolt, a history of the development of the Armored Force. Harrisburg, Pa., Military Service Pub. Co., 1947. 330 p. 47-6050 UA30.G5 In Algeria early in 1943, American tanks proved that they could stand up to Rommel's armored veterans. The development which made this result possible is here described, beginning with the estab- lishment of a permanent mechanized force in 1930. MILITARY HISTORY AND THE ARMED FORCES / 443 The central figure is the younger Adna R. Chaffee (1884-1941), who wore himself out while hasten- ing the organization and training of the Armored Force. 3659. Herr, John K., and Edward S. Wallace. The story of the U. S. Cavalry, 1775-1942. Bos- ton, Litde, Brown, 1953. 275 p. 53-7319 UE23.H4 An appreciative sketch of the achievements of the mounted forces in the wars of the United States, copiously illustrated with prints and photographs well reproduced. General Herr was the last Chief of Cavalry of the United States Army. Nostalgic in tone, the book concludes with a plea for a limited retention of mounted troops in the establishment. 3660. Jacobs, James Ripley. The beginning of the U. S. Army, 1783-1812. Princeton, Prince- ton University Press, 1947. 419 p. 47-5140 E181.J2 Bibliography: p. [387]— 397. This narrative treatment of the three post-Revolu- tionary decades emphasizes the Indian fighting which secured the settlements of the Old North- west, the extraordinary intrigues of James Wilkin- son, commander-in-chief after 1796, and the occupa- tion, exploration, and policing of the Louisiana Purchase. The author condemns the "cheese- paring" of the Democratic administrations after 1 80 1, and pronounces Secretaries Dearborn and Eustis unequal to their tasks of organization. 3661. Kreidberg, Marvin A., and Merton G. Henry. History of military mobilization in the United States Army, 1775-1945. [Washing- ton] Dept. of the Army, 1955. 721 p. illus. ([U. S.] Dept. of the Army. Pamphlet no. 20- 212) 56-60717 U15.U64, no. 20-212 A preliminary draft of parts 1-2 was issued in 1953- , Bibliography: p. 698-705. A study intended to provide staff officers, students at Army schools, and others with detailed infor- mation on past mobilizations — "the assembling and organizing of troops, materiel, and equipment for active military service in time of war or other emergency" — and their lessons. Brief accounts of the mobilizations of 1775, 1812, 1846, 1861, and 1898 precede comprehensive descriptions of the planning and preparations for United States par- ticipation in two world wars. The new and un- exampled scale of operations in 1917—18, and the need for economic mobilization caused nearly as much confusion and improvisation as in earlier wars, despite a degree of preplanning. The lessons learned from this experience were only pardy uti- lized in the interwar period, since planning was based upon mobilization following rather than pre- ceding the outbreak of war, and partial mobilization was already in progress by December 7, 1941. Integrated military, industrial, and agricultural mobilization plans must be made prior to any future wars, and must be flexible enough to meet limited as well as total war. 3662. Matthews, William, and Dixon Wecter. Our soldiers speak, 1775-1918. Boston, Little, Brown, 1943. 365 p. 43-4305 E181.M34 "Bibliography and acknowledgments": p. 360- "The purpose of this book is to let the common soldier, private or noncom, tell the story of his share in America's wars." An anthology of extracts from soldiers' diaries and letters, rather hastily put to- gether during World War II, it concentrates on ma- terial bearing on important operations. 3663. Prucha, Francis Paul. Broadax and bayonet; the role of the United States Army in the development of the Northwest, 1815-1860. [Madi- son] State Historical Society of Wisconsin, 1953. 263 p. _ 53-65" F597- p 7 A work of original research which stands almost alone in relating the Army's work to the peaceful processes of territorial expansion and social develop- ment. Studying the 13 army posts established in Wisconsin, Iowa, Minnesota, and northern Illinois, the author demonstrates their importance for Indian and land policy administration, as cash markets for the early settlers, and as centers of exploration, road- building, and cultural development. 3664. Spaulding, Oliver Lyman. The United States Army in war and peace. New York, Putnam, 1937. 541 p. 37-4575 E181.S78 Bibliography: p. 501-513. The author aims "to trace the development of the Army, its physical and spiritual growth," rather than to concentrate upon military operations, but his book is nevertheless largely a concise narrative of campaigns from the Colonial Period through World War I. There are, in addition, occasional summaries concerning weapons and several chap- ters on the peacetime activities of the Army. 3665. U. S. Dept. of the Army. Office of Military History. The personnel replacement system in the United States Army, by Leonard L. Lerwill, lieutenant colonel, Infantry, United States Army. [Washington] 1952-53. 2 v. 53-60151 UB323.A54 444 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Bibliography: v. 2, p. 457-468. Contents. — v. 1. Colonial period-World War I.— v. 2. World War II. Replacement being the current official name for the process historically known as recruitment, this constitutes a history of the raising of the armies of the United States during its successive wars. De- signed for use in the Army school system, it is severely factual, but the first unitary treatment of a subject of special importance in a democracy. C. The Navy 3666. Chapelle, Howard I. The history of the American sailing Navy; the ships and their development. New York, Norton, 1949. xxiii, 558 p. 49-48709 VA56.C5 Naval history from the standpoint of marine architecture, extending from colonial shipbuilding to the close of the era of sail about 1855. Based on surviving ship-plans in the National Archives, the text is illustrated by 32 folding plans and 155 figures. The technical material is skillfully inte- grated with national affairs, naval policy, and naval administration. 3667. Knox, Dudley W. A history of the United States Navy. Rev. ed. New York, Putnam, 1948. xxiii, 704 p. 48-2547 E182.K77 1948 A concise, balanced, and accurate historical sketch of the Navy in action through World War II, with adequate emphasis on the strategic situations basic to the achievements of fleets or single vessels. There are numerous maps and diagrams, largely drawn from earlier publications. It contains little on the development of ships, weapons, administration, edu- cation, or bluejacket life. 3668. Metcalf, Clyde H. A history of the United States Marine Corps. New York, Putnam, 1939. 584 p. 39-6652 VE23.M45 Marines were authorized by the Continental Con- gress in November 1775, and the present Marine Corps has been in existence since July 1798. Orig- inally adjuncts to the old type of ship-to-ship fight- ing, since the Mexican War marines have had their major employment in establishing overseas beach- heads. During the first three decades of the 20th century they were a primary instrument of the United States' policy in the Caribbean. Col. Metcalf describes their active operations down to 1938 in great detail, with incidental passages on their or- ganization and administration. Jeter A. Isely and Philip A. Crowl's The U. S. Marines and Amphibi- ous War; Its Theory and Its Practice in the Pacific (Princeton, Princeton University Press, 195 1. 636 p.) provides a comparable chronicle for World War II. 3669. Mitchell, Donald W. History of the mod- ern American Navy, from 1883 through Pearl Harbor. New York, Knopf, 1946. xiv, 477, xxv p. 46-4382 E182.M65 Bibliography: p. 455-477. "An interpretative and comprehensive general his- tory" since the revival of 1883, based entirely on printed materials and intended for the lay reader. Its balance of policy, materiel, organization, admin- istration, and operations is superior to that of any previous history, and it incorporates such "previ- ously underemphasized subjects" as naval aid in diplomacy and polar exploration, and naval aspects of the munitions problem. The author is critical both of the Navy's performance and of its personnel policies, particularly its failure to promote according to ability. 3670. Peck, Taylor. Round-shot to rockets; a his- tory of the Washington Navy Yard and U. S. Naval Gun Factory. Annapolis, United States Naval Institute, 1949. xx, 267 p. 49-1 1615 VA70.W3P4 The only full-length study of a Government navy yard, and one which effectively combines local cir- cumstances, the current of national history, tech- nological developments, and administrative changes. The Washington Yard, established with the city in 1800, began specializing in ordnance in 1847, and during the two World Wars became exclusively oc- cupied with this function. 3671. Potter, Elmer B., ed. The United States and world sea power. Englewood Cliffs [N. J.] Prentice-Hall, 1955. 963 p. 55-9323 E182.P8 Bibliography: p. 923-938. A monster textbook which presents the naval his- tory of Western Civilization since the Graeco-Persian Wars, but gives special attention to the place of the United States in that development. Since the emphasis is on major fleets and strategy, the Ameri- can story down to 1861 is treated as the small-scale affair that it was, but the Civil and subsequent wars receive the detailed treatment accorded to major MILITARY HISTORY AND THE ARMED FORCES / 445 conflicts. Despite the multiple authorship, a co- herent point of view, and a balanced emphasis on both technological progress and fighting doctrine, contribute to a unitary impression. 3672. Puleston, William D. Mahan; the life and work of Captain Alfred Thayer Mahan. New Haven, Yale University Press, 1939. 380 p. 39-10963 E182.M256 List of Mahan's writings: p. [3591-364. Mahan (1840-1914) saw service in the blockading squadrons of the Civil War and sat on the three- man War Board which directed the naval oper- ations of the Spanish-American War. In the inter- val, and largely as a result of his appointment to the presidency of the Naval War College in 1886, he had become a world-famous historian and the great theorist of the place of seapower in international relations. Captain Puleston uses Mahan's corre- spondence to elucidate the development of his .characteristic outlook and doctrines, and to illustrate his remarkable influence abroad. Mahan's own From Sail to Steam; Recollections of Naval Life (New York, Harper, 1907. 325 p.) is more rewarding for its picture of the post-Civil War Navy than for any revelation of the man. 3673. Sprout, Harold H., and Margaret Sprout. The rise of American naval power, 1776- 19 1 8. Rev. ed. Princeton, Princeton University Press, 1942. 404 p. NNC 3674. Sprout, Harold H., and Margaret Sprout. Toward a new order of sea power; American naval policy and the world scene, 1918-1922. 2d ed. Princeton, Princeton University Press, 1943. 336 p. A43-2765 E182.S79 1943 The first tide is an indispensable work which breaks new ground in reviewing the outlook of na- tional authorities upon seapower from the outbreak of the Revolution, and the consequences in warships, trained personnel, and organization for combat. It formulates the lessons of America's successive naval wars and indicates the extent to which they have been heeded in subsequent policy. The sequel describes, on a much larger scale, the post- Versailles situation in world seapower, the revolt against "navalism" in America, and the partial limitation of naval armaments by the Washington Conference of 1922. 3675. Taylor, Albert H. The first twenty-five years of the Naval Research Laboratory. Washington, Navy Dept., 1948. 75 p. 48-46752 V394.B4T3 "Navexos P-549." A concise account, by one of its original staff members, of the scientific organ of the Navy De- partment, which was first planned in 1916 but not brought into being until 1923. In spite of a lean budget, the Laboratory succeeded in developing radar and a host of other devices which profoundly affected marine warfare during 1942-45. 3676. Turnbull, Archibald D., and Clifford L. Lord. History of United States naval avia- tion. New Haven, Yale University Press, 1949. 345 p. 49-1 1 81 8 VG93.T8 "Sources": p. [3241-331. Not an official history, but prepared by two Navy historians with complete access to official records. It carries the story from 1910, when the Navy De- partment first assigned an officer to watch aviation developments, through World War I bombing, the first transatlantic flights, the first carriers, and the experimental bombings and controversies of the 1920's, to the outbreak of World War II. 3677. U. S. Office of the Comptroller of the Navy. The naval establishment, its growth and necessity for expansion, 1930-1950. [Washington] 195 1. 178 p. 52-63190 YA53.A74 "NavEvox-P-1038." A document which seeks to explain and justify the increasing expense of the naval establishment over two decades. Apart from the element of in- flation, the essential facts are that in 1950 there were 456,000 officers and men as against 116,000 in 1930, 645 vessels as against 317, and 14,030 aircraft as against 989. Many organizational charts and data are included. D. Wars of the United States Di. WARS: THE REVOLUTION 3678. Allen, Gardner W. A naval history of the American Revolution. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1913. 2 v. (752 p.) 1 3-9743 E271.A42 "Sources of information": v. 2, p. [671 ]-686. Utilizes British and American archival and other manuscript sources, as well as all primary records in print, to produce a very full narrative of all opera- tions of warships under Continental commission, in which many extracts from first-hand authorities arc 446 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES incorporated. Within its sphere it is very nearly definitive, but it has only incidental treatment of the State navies, the privateers which so grievously harried British commerce, and of marine admin- istration, which last receives thorough analysis in Charles O. Paullin's The Navy of the American Revolution (Chicago [Burrows] 1906. 549 p.). Nor does it enter into the fateful large-scale opera- tions of the French, Spanish, and British navies from 1779, which may be followed in Sir William M. James' The British Navy in Adversity (London, Longmans, Green, 1926. 459 p.). 3679. Bolton, Charles Knowles. The private soldier under Washington. New York, Scribner, 1902. 258 p. 2-23616 E255.B69 Old as it is, this remains the only rounded treat- ment of the soldiers who made up the armies that won American independence. It is based upon a wide exploration of original materials, many of which are reproduced as illustrations. Among the subjects handled are firearms, the officer-private re- lationship, camp organization, diversions, hospitals, and transport. 3680. Frothingham, Thomas G. Washington, Commander in Chief. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1930. 404 p. 30-24708 HE312.25.F94 Covers Washington's education, prior military ex- perience, and appointment, but is primarily a mili- tary history of the Revolutionary War, including both the operations conducted by Washington, and the others as seen from headquarters of the com- mander-in-chief of the Continental Army. It is based on the older editions of Washington's writ- ings, but remains a clear and reliable outline. 3681. Hatch, Louis Clinton. The administration of the American Revolutionary Army. New York, Longmans, Green, 1904. 229 p. (Harvard historical studies, v. 10) 4 _I 599 E255.H36 "List of authorities cited": p. 210-215. The American colonists, if sturdy material, "knew litde of military training or military subordination." The Continental Congress and their commander-in- chief had therefore the task of creating an effective military organization nearly from scratch, and this volume tells how they performed it and what major problems arose in its course. A major aim was the creation of a corps of officers, and questions of rank had to be settled, native officers given proper rights against a flood of foreign claimants, and reasonable incentives provided. The several outbreaks of in- subordination toward the war's end are analyzed. A solid dissertation, which half a century of scholar- ship has failed to replace. 3682. Nickerson, Hoffman. The turning point of the Revolution; or, Burgoyne in America. Boston, Houghton Mitflin, 1928. 500 p. 28-10475 E233.N63 Bibliography: p. [481 ]— 486. A leisurely narrative of the campaign of Saratoga (1778) by a philosophical student of the art of war, with exceptional knowledge of the armies and cam- paigns of 18th-century Europe. Howe and Ger- maine spoiled the decisive blow which would have cut the Union in two, the General by planning the diversionary attack on Philadelphia, and the Min- ister by failing to veto it. Burgoyne himself ruined his remaining prospects by relaxing after his easy capture of Ticonderoga. His surrender brought France in, and "Yorktovvn was the child of Sara- toga." 3683. Ward, Christopher. The War of the Revo- lution; edited by John Richard Alden. New York, Macmillan, 1952. 2 v. (989 p.) 5 2 -M 2 33 E230.W34 Bibliography: v. 2, p. 943-954. Mr. Ward published his detailed battle history of The Delaware Continentals, IJJ6-IJ83 in 1941 (Wilmington, Del., The Historical Society of Dela- ware, 620 p.) and before his death two years later had expanded it into a nearly complete narrative of the military operations on land. Prof. Alden had only to add a chapter on G. R. Clark's campaign in the West, correct some slips, and add a few cita- tions. The result has a minimum of background materials, as well as of strategic summaries and con- clusions, but excels in the presentation of detailed and accurate battle reports. The narrative first dis- poses of "The War in the North," and then, a third of the way through volume 2, returns to 1775 and begins "The War in the South," concluding with Yorktown. Willard M. Wallace's Appeal to Arms (New York, Harper, 1951. 308 p.) gets a well- documented military narrative into briefer compass, with considerably less tactical detail but more stra- tegic commentary. 3684. Wildes, Harry Emerson. Anthony Wayne, trouble shooter of the American Revolution. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1 94 1 . 5 1 4 p. 41-18202 E207.W35W5 Bibliography: p. 489-501. Wayne, a prosperous farmer-tanner of Chester County, Pa., without military training or experience, was a rather flamboyant and convivial individual, who was yet a born leader of men, a close student of the military classics, and a commander who com- bined careful planning with great vigor of execution. This biography, which makes full use of Wayne's own papers as well as much supplementary research, MILITARY HISTORY AND THE ARMED FORCES / 447 is spirited enough, and indeed the first "to put the warrior-statesman in his proper social, economic, political, and military setting," but is considerably less successful in elucidating military operations. Dii. WARS: 1 798-1 848 3685. Allen, Gardner W. Our naval war with France. Boston, Houghton Mifflin [192-] 323 p. 30-18792 E323.A422 "Sources of information": p. [283J-290. First published in 1909. 3686. Allen, Gardner W. Our navy and the Barbary corsairs. Boston, Houghton Mif- flin, 1905. 354 p. 26-9008 E335.A422 "Sources of information": p. [305]~3ii. Although the U. S. Office of Naval Records and Library has since published extensive collections of Naval Documents on the quasi-war with France (7 v -> 1935—38) and the Barbary wars (6 v., 1939- 44), Mr. Allen's careful, documented, and un- exciting volumes remain the most useful mono- graphs for the earliest exploits of the restored Navy. For the diplomatic side of the second tide, Ray W. Irwin's The Diplomatic Relations of the United States with the Barbary Powers (Chapel Hill, Uni- versity of North Carolina Press, 1931. 225 p.) is somewhat, if not greatly, to be preferred. 3687. Beirne, Francis F. The War of 18 12. New York, Dutton, 1949. 410 p. 48-9712 E354.B44 Bibliography: p. 393-395. For a detailed and documentary general history of the War of 1812, the student must still resort to Henry Adams' famous History of the United States, 1801-1817 (q. v.). Mr. Beirne, a Baltimore journal- ist, readily admits his primary indebtedness to Adams and to the topographical Pictorial Field-Boo\ of Benson J. Lossing (New York, Harper, 1868. 1084 p.), but he has digested these and other largely secondary authorities to good effect. His book is a dear, well-balanced, and critical outline, and a gen- erally serviceable introduction to this exasperating conflict. 3688. Mahan, Alfred T. Sea power in its relations to the War of 181 2. Boston, Little, Brown, 1905. 2 v. 5-33220 E354.M21 "The present work concludes the series of 'The influence of sea power upon history.' " — Pref. A classic of naval history which begins by explor- ing the maritime antecedents of the war in Britain's conduct of her commercial policies and naval power after 1783. By regularly defining the strategic situ- ation and the strategic aspect of operations, Admiral Mahan vividly reveals the naval War of 1812, not as a spectacular series of single-ship actions, but as a progressive strangulation of American economic life. 3689. Smith, Justin H. The War with Mexico. New York, Macmillan, 19 19. 2 v. 19-19605 E404.S66 "Appendix — The sources": v. 2, p. 517-562. A monumental narrative of the remoter and more immediate causes, the campaigns, the peace setde- ment, and the consequences of the comparatively brief war of 1 846-1848. The author estimated that he had examined over 100,000 manuscripts, 1200 books and pamphlets, and the files of 200 periodicals, and that nine-tenths of his material was new. He has eased the reader's task by removing scholarship, controversy, and references to a massive series of notes at the end of each volume, and presenting his results in a vigorous and colorful narrative. Criti- cism of the work has been aimed largely at its rather whole-hearted justification of the case of the United States concerning responsibility for the war. One chapter (30 in vol. 2) is devoted to the relatively un- important naval operations. Readers preferring a briefer treatment will find a competent and balanced one in Robert Selph Henry's The Story of the Mexi- can War (Indianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill, 1950. 424 p.). Diii. WARS: THE CIVIL WAR 3690. Catton, Bruce. Mr. Lincoln's army. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 195 1. 372 p. 51-9468 E470.2.C37 Bibliography: p. 341-347. 3691. Catton, Bruce. Glory Road; the bloody route from Fredericksburg to Gettysburg. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1952. 416 p. 52-5538 E470.2.C36 Bibliography: p. 363-370. 3692. Catton, Bruce. A stillness at Appomattox. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1053. 438 p. 53-99 82 . E470.2.C39 Mr. Catton's trilogy constitutes a history of the Army of the Potomac for the general reader which does not attempt a detailed narrative of operations, but concentrates on the personalities of the lenders, the criticism of generalship, and especially the combat experience of the common soldier. For the latter purpose he has drawn more upon regimental histories than other recent writers, and emphasizes the effects of heavy losses in individu.il units. He is at all times concerned with the clfcctivcncss of 448 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES supply and the state of morale. Few military his- tories have so vividly realized the feeling of war from the viewpoint of the individual participant. 3693. De Forest, John William. A volunteer's ad- ventures; a Union captain's record of the Civil War. Edited, with notes, by James H. Crou- shore. With an introd. by Stanley T. Williams. New Haven, Yale University Press, 1946. xviii, 237 p. A4 6-3486 E601.D3 Personal narratives of the Civil War are legion; that of De Forest (1 826-1906) may be chosen to represent the others because of its author's skill as a novelist and man of letters. His manuscript, given its final revision about 1890, was put together from wartime letters to his wife, and from articles pub- lished in Harper's New Monthly Magazine and The Galaxy during or shortly after the war. The first part, which describes the author's experience as a line officer of a Connecticut regiment serving on the lower Mississippi, has a first-hand intensity which does not recur in his narrative of Sheridan's valley campaign from the viewpoint of a staff officer at army corps headquarters. 3694. Freeman, Douglas Southall. R. E. Lee, a biography. New York, Scribner, 1934-35. 4 v. 34 - 3366o E467.1.L4F83 Bibliography: v 2, p. 591-595; v. 4, p. 543-569. 3695. Freeman, Douglas Southall. Lee's lieu- tenants, a study in command. New York, Scribner, 1946. 4 v. 46-3415 E470.2.F7 1946 "Select critical bibliography": v. 4, p. 799-825. Contents. — v. 1. Manassas to Malvern Hill. — v. 2. Cedar Mountain to Chancellorsville. — v. 3-4. Gettysburg to Appomattox. Dr. Freeman was engaged for 19 years upon the biography, which at once took its place as a classic. As a study of Lee's generalship, its originality lies in its systematically taking account of the "fog of war," and of the primary function of military intel- ligence in every commander's strategy. Save in one or two instances, "the reader remains at Confederate G. H. Q. throughout the war and receives the intelli- gence reports only as they arrive." The massive accumulation of detail regularly strengthens the evidence for Lee's military and personal greatness. Lee's Lieutenants, six years in the making, was undertaken as a supplement to the earlier work, in order to do justice to the other leaders there over- shadowed by Lee. It assumed the form of "a review of the command of the Army of Northern Vir- ginia," during the 14 months before Lee was placed at its head, and on the subordinate levels thencefor- ward. "Where familiar batdes again were de- scribed, the viewpoint would not be that of Lee but that of the men executing his orders or making decisions for themselves." 3696. Grant, Ulysses S. Personal memoirs. Edited with notes and an introd. by E. B. Long. Cleveland, World Pub. Co., 1952. xxv, 608 p. 52-5191 E672.F7617 First published in 1885-86. The famous book was undertaken by the ex-Presi- dent in order to provide an estate for his family, otherwise unprovided for, and completed, after eleven months of work, a week before he died of cancer of the throat. The first sixth is largely con- cerned with Grant's experiences in the Mexican War, the remainder with his campaigns during 1861-63, an d with the campaigns of 1864-65 in general. Seldom has a narrative of great events by the leading participant been so utterly free of pre- tension and fanfare. Grant speaks plainly of his superiors' mistakes in the early years, and as plainly admits his own: "I have always regretted that the last assault at Cold Harbor was ever made." Mr. Long's unobtrusive editing consists largely in sup- plying full names in brackets, and adding a num- ber of corrective footnotes. Lloyd Lewis lived to complete only the first installment of what was to have been a large-scale modern biography: Captain Sam Grant (Boston, Litde, Brown, 1950. 512 p.). It is to be continued from June 1861 by Bruce Cat- ton, who has already contributed a graceful inter- pretative sketch: U. S. Grant and the American Military Tradition (Boston, Little, Brown, 1954. 201 p.). 3697. Henderson, George F. Stonewall Jackson and the American Civil War. With an in- trod. by Field-Marshal the late Right Hon. Viscount Wolseley. Authorized American ed. London, New York, Longmans, Green, 1937. xxiv, 737 p. 38-30209 E467.1.J15H55 1937 First published in two volumes, 1898. Thanks to the unprecedented documentary pub- lication of the U. S. War Department, The War of the Rebellion: A Compilation of the Official Records of the Union and Confederate Armies (Washing- ton, 1880-1901. 130 v.), usually referred to as the Official Records of the Rebellion, it has been nearly as easy to study the Civil War in detail in Europe as in America. One of the earliest and most influ- ential results of such study was the work of Col. Henderson, Professor of Military Art and History at the British Staff College. It is a brilliant presen- tation of Jackson (1824-1863) as a selfless Christian knight and a supreme master of the art of war com- parable to Napoleon and to Wellington at their best. His death at Chancellorsville from the fire of his own men was a fatal loss to the Confederacy; Lee MILITARY HISTORY AND THE ARMED FORCES / 449 was left with no one "to whom he could entrust the execution of those daring and delicate manoeuvres his inferior numbers rendered necessary." 3698. Henry, Robert Selph. The story of the Con- federacy. New and rev. ed. New York, New Home Library, 1943. 514 p. 43-18537 E487.H544 1943 First published in 1931. An oudine of the war from the viewpoint of the Confederate armies, based on the principle that "the preponderance of power on the part of the North was so great that nothing short of perfect perform- ance by Southern statecraft and Southern command could have reversed the result." In consequence, missed opportunities by Southern commanders are heavily emphasized. Mr. Henry, an experienced railroad executive, makes of it a very dramatic story, much admired by the late Douglas S. Freeman who, in 1936, called it "at present the book with which to begin one's study of the period it covers and the book to which to return when everything else on the subject has been read." 3699. Lewis, Lloyd. Sherman, fighting prophet. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1932. 690 p. 32-33980 E467.1.S55L48 Bibliography: p. 655-669. William Tecumseh Sherman (1 820-1 891) was an Ohio West Pointer with extensive Southern con- nections, who remained inflexibly loyal to the Union and the Constitution, but foresaw from the outset the magnitude of the effort that would be required to defeat the Confederacy. Of nervous tempera- ment, habitually outspoken, and a trenchant pen- man, he had frequent clashes with politicians and the press, which delayed his recognition as an out- standing commander. Lewis' volume, studded with extracts from Sherman's own letters, builds up a portrait of this complex character in convincing de- tail. Basil H. Liddell Hart's Sherman; Soldier, Realist, American (New York, Dodd, Mead, 1930. 456 p.) is somewhat better for operations, but Lewis' is a rounded presentation of an exceptional American. 3700. The Navy in the Civil War. New York, Scribner, 1883. 3 v. 5—19351 E591.N32 Contents. — v. 1. Soley, James Russell. The blockade and the cruisers. — v. 2. Ammen, Daniel. The Adantic Coast. — v. 3. Mahan, Alfred T. The Gulf and inland waters. Identical in format with the same publisher's scries of volumes on the Campaigns of the Civil War. But whereas the latter, although still worth occasional consultation, have been replaced in detail and as a whole, The Navy in the Civil War remains the only large-scale survey of its subject, and this in spite of the 30-volume publication of the U. S. Navy De- partment, Official Records of the Union and Con- federate Navies (Washington, 1894- 1922). Writ- ten by two naval officers and a professor at the Naval Academy, they are sound and sober narratives, but that of Commander Mahan, as he then was, lacks the philosophical depth of his later and greater writings. 3701. O'Connor, Richard. Sheridan, the inevit- able. Indianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill, 1953. 400 p. ^ 53-5847 E467.1.S54O3 "Notes on sources": p. 361-391. Philip H. Sheridan (1831-1888), the son of an Irish Catholic immigrant who settled in Somerset, Ohio, made his way against social and personal dif- ficulties to graduate from West Point in 1853. In the course of hard-fighting service as brigade and division commander in the West, he impressed him- self on Grant, who brought him East to command the cavalry of the Army of the Potomac early in 1864. Here he crushed Stuart at Yellow Tavern, and Early in the Shenandoah Valley, and increas- ingly became Grant's reliance as his agent for of- fensive operations. He struck the hammer-blows of March-April 1865 which forced Lee to surrender. Mr. O'Connor's vigorous narrative goes on to de- scribe his later service, in charge of the final years of Indian warfare, and as commander-in-chief, but naturally emphasizes the great year in Virginia when Sheridan established himself as one of the great captains. 3702. Shannon, Fred Albert. The organization and administration of the Union Army, 1861-1865. Cleveland, Clark, 1928. 2 v. 28-15871 E491.S52 Bibliography: v. 2, p. [285]-294. Since the Civil War soon called for unprecedented numbers of men under arms, the problem of raising and organizing this host naturally overstrained exist- ing facilities, and involved much improvisation and sheer confusion. Prof. Shannon dwells so ex- clusively upon the mistakes as nearly to lose sight of the achievement, and he puts excessive blame upon what he terms "the state-rights fetish." His volumes nevertheless contain by far the most in- formation assembled concerning the respective shares of Federal and State authorities in raising troops; the methods employed in procuring food, clothing, and munitions; the adoption and enforce- ment of the draft; the policies of paid substitutes for those who could afford them, and of bounties for volunteers, and their consequences; and the treat- ment of slackers and conscientious objectors. An- other view of the administrative crisis after Sumter 450 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES is contained in Alexander Howard Meneely's The War Department, 1861 (New York, Columbia Uni- versity Press, 1928. 400 p.). 3703. Thomason, John W. Jeb Stuart. New York, Scribner, 1930. 512 p. 30-28932 E467.1.S9T46 "Jeb Stuart was a symbol, gonfalon that went be- fore the swift, lean columns of the Confederacy." Captain Thomason of the Marine Corps tells us that he attempted, "not a history of a war, but a portrait of a splendid human soul, expressed through the profession of arms." The result, embellished with his own skillful drawings, glows with his enthusiasm, affection, and pride in the great Con- federate cavalryman (1 833-1 864), and tells a great deal about the cavalry operations of the Eastern campaigns as well. 3704. Wiley, Bell Irvin. The life of Johnny Reb, the common soldier of the Confederacy. Indianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill, 1943. 444 p. 43-3 2 53 E607.W5 Bibliography: p. [4i9]~426. 3705. Wiley, Bell Irvin. The life of Billy Yank, the common soldier of the Union. Indian- apolis, Bobbs-Merrill, 1952. 454 p. 52-5809 E491.W69 "Bibliographical notes": p. 438-446. The citizen armies of the Civil War wrote home innumerable letters and kept an extraordinary num- ber of diaries. Prof. Wiley has spent years in tracking down and digesting these materials, which he has combined with the Official Records of the Rebellion and other printed sources to reconstruct with complete fidelity the daily life of the soldier in either camp. There are chapters on drunkenness and other vices, heroism and cowardice, rations and ersatz rations, clothing, religion in camp, discipline and punishments, morale, etc. On completing the second work the author wrote: "The two were so much alike that the task of giving this book a flavor and character distinct from The Life of Johnny Reb has at times been a difficult one." 3706. Williams, Kenneth P. Lincoln finds a gen- eral; a military study of the Civil War. With maps by Clark Ray. New York, Macmillan, 1949-52. 3v._ 49- IX 530 E470.W765 Includes bibliographies. The author is a professor of mathematics at Indiana University, but there is nothing amateurish about his close analyses of Civil War generalship from the evidence supplied in the Official Records of the Rebellion. He believes that when President Lincoln said, a few weeks after appointing him to the supreme command, "Grant is the first General I have had," he spoke the plain truth. Grant he describes as "the embodiment of the offensive spirit that leaves the enemy no rest," and "the most profit- able and the most inspiring of all generals to study." The first two volumes describe the failures of gen- eralship in the successive commanders of the Army of the Potomac, and the third follows Grant's West- ern campaign through June 1862. Two or more additional volumes will be required to complete the work. Div. WARS: THE SPANISH-AMERICAN WAR 3707. Chadwick, French Ensor. The relations of the United States and Spain: the Spanish- American War. New York, Scribner, 191 1. 2 v. 11-23013 E715.C43 Bibliography: v. 2, p. 475-478. Chadwick was Admiral Sampson's flag-captain during the blockade and battle of Santiago de Cuba. His narrative of the war, by far the most thorough and detailed that has been written, is "intended in the main as a documentary history," printing in whole or part all important orders, telegrams, and reports, including those on the Spanish side in translation. These have been pieced together with such skill as to provide a narrative of true conti- nuity, clarity, and suspense. Admiral Chadwick makes no attempt to conceal the disparity of force, and he resolutely keeps the Sampson-Schley contro- versy out of his book. The land campaigns, in Cuba, Porto Rico, and the Philippines, fall entirely within volume 2. 3708. Wilson, Herbert W. The downfall of Spain; naval history of the Spanish-American War. London, Low, Marston, 1900. 451 p. 1-27847 E727.W74 "Authorities": p. 442-444. H. W. Wilson of London was the author of the standard Ironclads in Action (London, S. Low, Marston, 1896. 2 v.) which, 30 years later, he would revise and expand into Battleships in Action (Boston, Little, Brown, 1926. 2 v.). Admiral Chadwick in 191 1 called this "the best naval history of the war," and drew upon it for authoritative com- ments at several points. Although published so soon after the war's end, it remains a remarkable ex- ample of what can be done when a Government publishes its documents fully and promptly, as did the United States, and a genuine expert analyzes them thoroughly. On one point Wilson revised his opinion by 1926: a number of instances of spon- taneous combustion in warship magazines between MILITARY HISTORY AND THE ARMED FORCES / 45 1 1898 and 19 14 led him to doubt that an external mine had destroyed the Maine. Dv. WARS: WORLD WAR I 3709. Dickinson, John. The building of an army; a detailed account of legislation, adminis- tration and opinion in the United States, 1915-1920. New York, Century, 1922. 398 p. 22-12553 UA25.D5 On April 1, 19 17, the United States, a completely unmilitary nation, had 127,000 men under arms. Nineteen months later the American Army con- sisted of 3,665,000 men, of whom nearly two million were in Europe. This book supplies a thoughtful narrative of how the Selective Service Acts of 1917 were utilized to achieve this result. 3710. Harbord, James G. The American Army in France, 1917-1919. Boston, Little, Brown, 1936. xviii, 632 p. 36-6451 D570.H275 General Harbord 's experience was one of the most varied in World War I. During the first year of the A. E. F. he was Pershing's chief of staff; he com- manded the Marine Brigade at Belleau Wood (May 1918) and the 2nd Division in the Soissons offensive (July); at its conclusion he took over the Services of Supply for the duration of the war. For each of these phases General Harbord provides a clear, di- rect, and critical narrative worthy of the intelligent and incisive administrator that he was. A more perfunctory oudine covers the aspects of the A. E. F. with which he was not personally concerned. 371 1. Holley, Irving B. Ideas and weapons; ex- ploitation of the aerial weapon by the United States during World War I; a study in the relation- ship of technological advance, military doctrine, and the development of weapons. New Haven, Yale University Press, 1953. 222 p. (Yale historical pub- lications. Miscellany, 57) 52-13971 UG633.H6 "Bibliographical note": p. fi79]-209. One of the Air Force historians of World War II here applies his experience to explaining the aerial failure of 1917-18. He tracks it down in the spheres of doctrine, equipment, and organization. The men in charge failed to develop any clear ideas concerning the purposes and composition of an American air force. They failed to recognize the fluidity of the technological factor, necessitating constant improve- ments in airplane design. They failed to create effi- cient agencies for decision, information, and re- search. As a result of their emphasis on quantity rather than quality of production, American-made planes proved obsolete by the time they began to reach the front in quantity, and the American air force had to be equipped with aircraft of allied manufacture. 3712. March, Peyton C. The nation at war. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, Doran, 1932. 407 p. 3> 2 -^ l 51 D570.M35 1932a General March (1864—1955) was the original selec- tion for commander of the A. E. F.'s artillery and held that post, occupied in organizing and training, until Jan. 1918, when Secretary Baker recalled him to head the General Staff. His volume, from that early point, is in large part polemic, to justify the Staff against the criticisms, real or supposed, in Gen- eral Pershing's reminiscences (no. 3715). March put the staff on 24-hour duty, reorganized it accord- ing to function, reduced paper work, and drove it hard. "Raising the men; putting them in camps; clothing them; equipping them; training them; ship- ping them to France; sending ammunition, rifles, and supplies to France to make the A. E. F. a going concern: all that was done by the vast military hier- archy at home, working under me as Chief of Staff of the Army." 3713. Palmer, Frederick. Newton D. Baker; America at war. New York, Dodd, Mead, 1931. 2 v. 31-28311 D570.P32 Baker (1 871-1937) was an Ohio Progressive with pacifist convictions whose selection for the War De- partment provoked some derision, but who proved an exceptionally able mediator between the military organization and civilian groups and interests. Palmer, an experienced war correspondent, used Baker's own papers as well as official war agency records to relate in detail Baker's distinguished serv- ices in coordinating the American war effort and facilitating the task of the soldiers at home and in France. Baker was made a special target by assail- ants of the Wilson administration, but the military leaders are well-nigh unanimous in testifying that his genuine concern for civil liberties did not in the least get in the way of his effective mastery of the gigantic administrative problems of his office. 3714. Palmer, Frederick. John J. Pershing, Gen- eral of the Armies, a biography. Harrisburg, Pa., Military Service Pub. Co., 1948. 380 p. 48-8289 E181.P512 Palmer, a friend and admirer of "J. J. P.," com- pleted this biographical sketch in 1940, and added the two final chapters after Pershing's death in 1948. It is without references and contains little on IV r- shing's career before 1917, and less on his life after 1919. However, it adds color to Pershing's own narrative (no. 3715) of his war experiences, and it emphasizes, as Pershing does not, the magnitude of his achievement in maintaining the integrity of 452 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES the A. E. F. against the insistent pressure of the allied commands that American men and materiel be employed to fill the gaps in their own organizations. 3715. Pershing, John J. My experiences in the World War. New York, Stokes, 193 1. 2 v. 31-10662 D570.P44 1931 Pershing (1860-1948) was in his 57th year, the junior major general of the U. S. Army, and in charge of the Southern Department when, in May 1 917, he was chosen to head the American Expedi- tionary Force. He took over a decade in the careful preparation of these memoirs. They are strung upon entries in his official diary and mirror very faithfully the oudook from American G. H. Q. They are for the greater part concerned, as was Pershing, with problems of planning, organization, training, supply, and inter-allied relations in every sphere. Operations are encountered only in volume 2, and are somewhat formally described. 3716. Sims, William Sowden. The victory at sea. In collaboration with Burton J. Hendrick. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, Page, 1920. 410 p. 20-18578 D589.U6S6 American warships played a vital part in winning World War I, for if our dreadnoughts never saw action, our cruisers and destroyers were numerous enough to permit the adoption of the convoy system, which finally shook off the German submarines' stranglehold upon British commerce. With the help of a veteran journalist, the commander of the American fleet in European waters tells the fasci- nating story in untechnical language. Dvi. WARS: WORLD WAR II 3717. Arnold, Henry H. Global mission. New York, Harper, 1949. 626 p. 49-10894 D790.A9 The memoirs of a West Pointer of the class of 1907 who was assigned to military aviation in 191 1 and succeeded to the command of the Air Corps the day before Munich (1938). The narrative of subsequent events, if somewhat cluttered and gos- sipy, is a unique depiction of the coming of age of the Air Force as a third arm of national defense. 3718. Bradley, Omar N. A soldier's story. New York, Holt, 1 95 1. xix, 618 p. 51-11294 D756.B7 A personal narrative of the Algerian, Sicilian, and Normandy campaigns which, although more chatty and anecdotal, closely parallels Eisenhower's (no. 3719) but affords instructive comparisons by giving the viewpoint of our most successful army- group commander rather than that of SHAEF. A list of principal persons and a glossary are helpful in following the narrative. 3719. Eisenhower, Dwight D., Pres. U. S. Cru- sade in Europe. Garden City, N. Y., Garden City Books, 1952. 573 p. 52-2207 D743.E35 1952 First published in 1948. The personal narrative of the Supreme Com- mander, Allied Expeditionary Forces, from his de- parture from the Philippines at the end of 1940 to the postwar occupation of Germany. It illuminates the processes of planning and coordinating, at the high- est level, such gigantic combined operations as the African, Italian, and Normandy invasions. 3720. Merriam, Robert E. Dark December; the full account of the Battle of the Bulge. Chicago, Ziff-Davis Pub. Co., 1947. 234 p. 47-4797 . D756.5.A7M4 One of the Army's field historians, who was present during the fighting of Dec. 16, 1944-Jan. 16, 1945, interviewed many of the participants, and helped prepare the still unreleased official narrative, presents his own dramatic and critical interpretation. The primary blame for von Rundstedt's Ardennes breakthrough is placed upon the excessive optimism of American intelligence officers. The effort, how- ever, quite exhausted Nazi offensive power. 3721. Morison, Samuel Eliot. History of United States naval operations in World War II. Boston, Little, Brown, 1947+ 47-1571 D773.M6 Large-scale naval history on an unusual plan: the author has enjoyed all the facilities for writing official history, including participation in a number of the campaigns, but has taken personal responsibility for all statements of fact and opinion. The result has been generally acclaimed as contemporary history of rare authority, unity, and power, as interesting to the layman as the professional sailor. With the 10th volume the huge work is approaching its conclusion. 3722. Pratt, Fletcher. War for the world; a chronicle of our fighting forces in World War II. New Haven, Yale University Press, 1950. 364 p. (The Chronicles of America series, v. 30) , 5 2 "435 8 E173.C58, v. 30 "Bibliographical note": p. [351 ]— 353. A concise narrative of the two great wars which America conducted in 1 941-1945, with neither the Pacific nor the European theater slighted. It pre- sents the logistic basis of our expanding operations, and stresses the technological developments which, after one grim year of containment, gave superiority MILITARY HISTORY AND THE ARMED FORCES / 453 by land, sea, and air, and made offensive warfare and victory possible. The textbook edition of this noteworthy feat of condensation can be obtained separately from the series. 3723. Stilwell, Joseph W. The Stilwell papers, arr. and edited by Theodore H. White. New York, Sloane, 1948. xvi, 357 p. 48-6966 D811.S83 Excerpts from General Stilwell's command jour- nal, memoranda to self, and letters to his wife are interspersed with background passages by the editor to form the most completely personal record of any pivotal figure in World War II. While "Vinegar Joe" was hardly the ideal personality for liaison with an oriental power, his version of his struggle with what he regarded as Kuomintang laxity, deceit, and corruption has few counterparts. 3724. Studies in social psychology in World War II. Prepared and edited under the auspices of a special committee of the Social Science Research Council. [Princeton, Princeton University Press, 1949-50] 4 v. 49-2480 U22.S8 Contents. — v. 1. The American soldier: adjust- ment during Army life, by S. A. Stouffer and others. — v. 2. The American soldier: combat and its aftermath, by S. A. Stouffer and others. — v. 3. Ex- periments on mass communication, by C. I. Hov- land, A. A. Lumsdaine and F. D. Sheffield. — v. 4. Measurement and prediction, by S. A. Stouffer and others. These massive volumes constitute the end product of the war-time activity of the Research Branch of the War Department's Information and Education Division. A study of soldiers' attitudes, it is based on 243 separate surveys by questionnaire, some in- volving as many as 25,000 men. The first two volumes are deeply revealing reflections of the states of mind prevalent in a vast citizen army; the last two are chiefly of interest to professional psycholo- gists. The series is discussed from the latter point of view in Studies in the Scope and Method of "The American Soldier," edited by Robert K. Merton and Paul F. Lazarsfeld (Glencoe, 111., Free Press, 1950. 255 p. Continuities in Social Research). 3725. U. S. Bureau of the Budget. The United States at war; development and administra- tion of the war program by the Federal Govern- ment. Prepared under the auspices of the Com- mittee of Records of War Administration by the War Records Section, Bureau of the Budget. Wash- ington, U. S. Govt. Print. Off., 1946. xv, 555 p. ([United States. Historical reports on war admin- istration, Bureau of the Budget, no. 1 ]) 47-32819 D769.A55 1946 More than any previous war of the United States, World War II produced an enormous increase in governmental controls, and in the number and size of the agencies which exerted them. This is an administrative history of the Government's war effort, organized by essential functions rather than by the several agencies, merely to list which requires a 15-page appendix (p. 521-535). 3726. U. S. Dept. of the Army. Office of Military History. United States Army in World War II. Washington, 1947+ 47-46404 D769.A533 This monumental enterprise, to which only the Official Records of the Rebellion can be compared, was authorized by the Chief of Staff in 1946. Be- hind it, says General Albert C. Smith, "lies the greatest mass of records and recollections ever pro- duced — 17,200 tons of records created by the U. S. Army alone." More than 85 volumes are planned, of which 27 have appeared as this chapter is com- pleted. The work is arranged in a number of sub- series: The War Department, of which 3 vols, have appeared; The Army Ground Forces, 2 vols.; The Army Service Forces and the Technical Services, 5 vols.; The War in Europe, 4 vols.; The War in the Pacific, 6 vols.; China-Burma-India, 1 vol.; Middle East, 1 vol.; Special Studies, 2 vols.; and Pictorial Records, 3 vols. The Chief Historian of the office, Kent Roberts Greenfield, is the general editor of the series, and also one of the authors in The Army Ground Forces subseries. He has also prepared a Master Index; Reader's Guide (1955. 81 p.) to the volumes thus far issued, in which the content of each volume is summarized, and its importance for the study of modern warfare analyzed. Dr. Greenfield has also discussed the general problems of writing contemporary military history in The Historian and the Army (New Brunswick, Rutgers University Press, 1954. 93 p.). The series is on a grander scale than many users of this Guide will require, but since it will be years before it is completed and its results digested in works of lesser scope, it must be listed as the most authoritative source within its field. 3727. U. S. Office of Air Force History. The Army Air Forces in World War II. Pre- pared under the editorship of Wesley Frank Craven [and] James Lea Cate. Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1948-55. 6 v. 48-3657 D790.A47 A cooperative official history, with sections or chapters by various hands under the general editor- ship of two professional historians. Volume i opens with a review of military aeronautics from 1917- 1939. Volumes 2 and 3 cover the war in Europe, 4 and 5 the war in the Pacific. Volume 6 'Meals with the Zone of the Interior — with the development of 454 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES an effective air organization, with the forging and an abundance of detail, at times more than could be distribution of weapons, with the recruiting and useful to anyone but the professional student of mili- training of airmen." The series as a whole presents tary aeronautics. XI Intellectual History M A. General Worlds 3728-3737 B. Periods 373^-3749 C. Topics 375°-3762 D. Localities 3763-3767 E. International Influences: General 3768-3772 F. International Influences: By Country 3773~378o ALTHOUGH intellectual history is the latest of the historical specialties to attain some - measure of separatenass and autonomy, the present selection may seem scanty in com- parison with the huge bibliography appended to Curd (no. 3729). Closer examination will show that the great majority of those titles fall within a single one of the humanities, arts, or sciences, and, insofar as they have proved suitable for inclusion here, appear in the appropriate section elsewhere. The titles which follow are those, as yet comparatively few, which take a general view of American intellectual life, or deal with "culture" or "civilization" conceived primarily as an activity of mind, or attempt to arrive at the "national character," or include a certain span of the humanities, arts, and sciences, or deal with the two- way international commerce in ideas, or handle some specific topic in so large and generalized a way as to display it in a wide context of thought and so to lift it out of the more specialized discipline to which it might at first seem to be confined. Thus Davies (no. 3752) deals with phrenology as a current in American reformist ideology and popular culture rather than as a dead end in the development of scientific psychology, and Egbert and Persons (nos. 3753 and 3758) expound socialism and evolution as large trends in general American thought rather than as special doctrines of economics or biology. There can be no clear-cut dividing line in such groupings; there is much here that social, political, or literary historians should not miss, while anyone interested in the intellectual history of the United States will find many other titles to his purpose elsewhere in this Guide, and particularly in Sections VIII A and B (Historiography and General His- tories), XV B, C, and D (Social History and Thought), XVII (Science), XXII (Philosophy and Psychology), XXIII C (Religious Thought and Theology), XXVIII A and B (Economic Thought), XXIX A (Political Thought), etc. A. General Works 3728. Cohen, Morris R. American thought; a critical sketch. Edited and with a foreword by Felix S. Cohen. Glencoe, 111., Free Press, 1954. 360 p. 54-10667 B851.C6 Cohen had for years aspired to write a major and systematic work on American thought — "not on technical philosophy but rather on the general ideas which are taken for granted in various fields" — and made a beginning in a course of lectures de- livered at Chicago the year after his retirement, 1939. The notes for these lectures were in part expanded into written expositions down to 1946, the 455 45^ / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES year before his death. His son and literary executor, Felix S. Cohen, put the completed or nearly com- pleted portions into form for publication, but died before he could read the proofs. The sections on psychology, sociology, ethics, education, and litera- ture, and a final summing-up had to be omitted. The volume as published contains substantial treat- ments of legal thought and general philosophy, lesser ones of economic and religious thought, and sketches of historical, scientific, economic, political, and aesthetic thought. An introductory chapter on the American tradition deals with such matters as the nature of intellectual leadership, the demo- cratic dilution of education, and the prevalence of standardization and intolerance. Fragmentary as it is, the book is the only attempt of the kind by an original mind, and is crowded with illuminating perceptions and penetrating criticisms. 3729. Curd, Merle E. The growth of American thought. 2d ed. New York, Harper, 1951. xviii, 910 p. 51-1238 E169.1.C87 1951 Bibliography: p. 801-876. The most complete survey of American intellec- tual history, which includes organized knowledge, speculation organized or traditional, as well as values, and pays special attention to related institu- tions such as schools and the press. All of these are so related to the whole social milieu as to con- stitute a social history of American thought. Gen- eral tendencies rather than individual thinkers are emphasized here. The work is organized in chrono- logical periods characterized by their leading ideas; the first third of the 19th century, for instance, is taken to have been marked by patrician leadership in thought. 3730. Fox, Dixon Ryan. Ideas in motion. New York, Appleton-Century, 1935. 126 p. 35—34879 E169.1.F76 Contents. — Civilization in transit. — Culture in knapsacks. — A synthetic principle in American social history. — Refuse ideas and their disposal. Four essays principally concerned with the dif- fusion of ideas throughout the United States. "Civilization in transit" distinguishes four stages in the development of professional life in a new coun- try, from total dependence on foreign practitioners to final autonomy. 3731. Mumford, Lewis. The golden day; a study in American literature and culture. New York, Norton [1934?] 283 p. 34-27096 E169.1.M943 Published in 1926 under tide: The Golden Day; a Study in American Experience and Culture. An interpretive historical sketch of American cul- ture, which becomes almost a diagnosis by a healer anxious to prescribe, and which ha had a combining influence on later interpreters. The tide derives from the author's characterization of the years 1830-60, when "the old culture of the seaboard settle- ment had its Golden Day in the mind." "This period nourished men, as no other has done in America before or since. Up to that time, the American communities were provincial; when it was over, they had lost their base." 3732. Perry, Bliss. The American mind. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1912. 248 p. 12-24430 PS31.P4 Contents. — Race, nation, and book. — The Amer- ican mind. — American idealism. — Romance and re- action. — Humor and satire. — Individualism and fellowship. A common-sense examination of American litera- ture as a mirror of American national character. Both are dominated by American idealism, which in literature most commonly manifests itself as sentimentalism. Romance and the reaction against it, and American humor and satire, are illustrated from both literature and life. The conclusion calls for "fellowship based upon individualism, and in- dividualism ever leading to fellowship." 3733. Perry, Ralph Barton. Puritanism and de- mocracy. New York, Vanguard Press, 1944. 688 p. 44-41893 E169.1.P47 Identifies the two main formative elements in the American national tradition as the Puritanism em- bodied in the New England theocracy, and the democracy of the Enlightenment given classic ex- pression in the Declaration of Independence. Each is analyzed as a system of ideals, and the link be- tween them found in the individualism which gave allegiance to ideas rather than to persons and insti- tutions. Each is appraised, and found to have a large measure of validity for our day — they "rein- force one another's truths and aggregate one an- other's errors," but "also serve to correct and com- plement one another's limitations." The whole book is an unusual synthesis of historical and philosophical interpretation. In a lesser work, Characteristically American (New York, Knopf, 1949. 162 p.), Prof. Perry uses similar ideas in attempting the "teasing and baffling task" of de- fining national characteristics and devotes one lecture to William James as the classic exponent of American individualism. 3734. Potter, David M. People of plenty; eco- nomic abundance and the American charac- ter. Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1954. INTELLECTUAL HISTORY / 457 xxvii, 219 p. (Charles R. Walgreen Foundation lectures) 54-12797 E169.1.P6 In publishing his lectures at the University of Chicago (1950), the writer widens his original theme to include a discussion of national character and the respective contributions of historians and "behavioral scientists" to the concept. Economic abundance is then advanced as a kind of case study for American national character, and pursued through a sequence of relationships. It has, for instance, "given to the concept of 'democracy' a distinctive meaning in America which sets it apart from democracy in other parts of the world." 3735. Quinn, Arthur Hobson. The soul of Amer- ica, yesterday and today. Philadelphia, Uni- versity of Pennsylvania Press, 1932. 261 p. 32-12287 E175.9.Q56 Combines a brief interpretive sketch of the main stream of American history with a presentation of "the American soul" as manifested in its seven characteristic qualities of democracy, efficiency, liberality, provincialism, individuality, humor, and vision. Reflects the outlook of a sensible and well- informed, if somewhat discursive, conservative. 3736. Rourke, Constance M. The roots of Ameri- can culture and other essays. Edited, with a preface, by Van Wyck Brooks. New York, Har- court, Brace, 1942. 305 p. 42-19827 E169.1.R78 Eight studies collected the year after the author's death, including "The Rise of Theatricals," "Early American Music," and "The Shakers." "Her work," says Mr. Brooks, "was mainly exploratory," but her delicate and sensitive approach to her sub- jects, and a type of statement at once cautious and precise, give it far more than a tentative value. Few writers on the arts have been so perceptively aware of the social milieu in which they exist, or have been able to deal so effectively with either side of the relationship. 3737. Wright, Louis B. Culture on the moving frontier. Bloomington, Indiana University Press, 1955. 273 p. 54-6207 E169.1.W82 "Lectures delivered on the Patten Foundation at Indiana University in the spring of 1953." Six lectures which deal with the transmission and diffusion of the Anglo-Saxon tradition — "the tradi- tion of English law, the English language, English literature, and British religion and customs" — in the United States. After a general treatment of the colonial period, the author concentrates upon this process in the Kentucky borderland, in the North- west Territory, and in California during the Gold Rush age. Two concluding lectures describe the "instruments of civilization," both spiritual and secular. The latter includes English belles-lettres, historical and legal books, textbooks, academies and colleges, women's clubs, lectures and lyceums, and country newspapers. B. Periods 3738. Commager, Henry Steele. The American mind; an interpretation of American thought and character since the 1880's. New Haven, Yale University Press, 1950. 476 p. 50-6338 E169.1.C673 Bibliography: p. [445H67. The author searches the writing of the last 70 years for "ideas that illuminate the American mind and ways of using ideas that illustrate the American character," drawing at will upon philosophy, re- ligion, literature, politics, and the social sciences, but not seeking to present formal histories of any of them. His major theme is the transition from the traditional and self-confident America of the 19th century, by way of the "watershed of the'90's," to the fast-changing and troubled America of the 20th. The mass of material surveyed is not too successfully assimilated. 3739. Curti, Merle E., ed. American scholarship in the twentieth century. Cambridge, Har- vard University Press, 1953. 252 p. (The Library of Congress series in American civilization) 53-5699 AZ505.CS The editor offers an essay on "The Setting and the Problems," seeking to relate the development of the social sciences and the humanities to national and world history and viewing the present situation as a schism between absolutists and instrumental- ists. Louis Wirth interprets the social sciences as a conquest of more and more ground for quantita- tive methods, although many areas of social life remain subject to the artist and the humanistic scholar. Historical, literary, classical, and philo- sophical scholarship are presented by W. Stull Holt, Rene Wellck, Walter R. Agard, and Arthur F. Murphy, in essays which terminate on a note of qualified optimism. 458 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 3740. Eggleston, Edward. The transit of civiliza- tion from England to America in the seven- teenth century. New York, Peter Smith, 1933. 344 P- , A34-396 E162.E283 First published in 190 1. Contents. — Mental outfit of the early colonists. — Digression concerning medical notions at the period of setdement. — Mother English, folk-speech, folk- lore, and literature. — Weights and measures of con- duct. — The tradition of education. — Land and labor in the early colonies. Although this pioneer work has often been spoken of with condescension by latter-day scholars, it re- mains a remarkably concrete and intimate treatment of the popular mind in England and during the first two generations of settlement in America. It was an extraordinary achievement for the turn of the century, both in breadth of outlook and in the exploitation of a wide range of sources for a spe- cialized purpose. 3741. Gabriel, Ralph Henry. The course of American democratic thought. 2d ed. New York, Ronald Press, 1956. xiv, 508 p. 56-6263 E169.1.G23 1956 An eternal moral order, the free individual, and the national mission of America were the three es- sential doctrines of American democratic faith, uni- versally assumed after 1815. Mr. Gabriel analyzes them and sets them against the social and intellectual background of the "Middle Period," conducts them safely through the fires of sectional controversy, sees them modified and developed so as to harmonize with the evolutionary naturalism and industrial revo- lution which followed 1865, and leaves them facing rival systems of social belief in the post-Versailles age of disillusionment and insecurity. A diversity of thinkers have given their testimony by the way in what has been called an exceptionally perceptive attempt "to identify the central intellectual tradi- tion of the United States." 3742. Miller, Perry. The New England mind; the seventeenth century. New York, Mac- millan, 1939. 528 p. 39-22760 F7.M56 3743. Miller, Perry. The New England mind: from colony to province. Cambridge, Har- vard University Press, 1953. 513 p. 53-5072 F7.M54 In the first of these volumes, the labors of a single scholar have restored the intellectual framework of a vanished, in this aspect forgotten, and much mis- understood age. To an exceptional degree, Massa- chusetts in 1630 was founded on the basis of a coherent system of thought, and this volume fur- nished the hitherto missing key to the comprehen- sion of a whole society and its orthodoxy. The essential character of the New England mind derives from the circumstances that the founders were simul- taneously Ramists in logic, Congregationalists in church policy, and "federalists" in theology — that is, they adhered to the doctrine of the Covenant of Grace worked out by William Perkins, William Ames, and John Preston, which was the only orig- inal contribution of Puritanism to its own system of ideas. From Colony to Province follows the for- tunes of this orthodoxy in Church and State during the seven decades which followed the restoration of the Stuarts (1660-1730), and eraces the effect of the progress of events upon that "dictatorship of the visible elect" which was the practical consequence of the Covenant theology. It is seen as a process of accelerating disruption, but one in which a very specialized, archaic, and rigid system died amaz- ingly hard. 3744. Miller, Perry, ed. American thought: Civil War to World War I. New York, Rinehart, 1954. 345 p. (Rinehart editions, 70) 54-7243 PS682.M5 A compact and exceptionally unified anthology, presenting extracts from thirteen thinkers of the era which opened "when the mind of America was aroused and challenged by the twin invasions of Hegel and Darwin." The editor, who contributes a substantial introduction, has aimed to provide at least one explicit statement of "each of the control- ling conceptions," and believes that his selections "do expound the crucial points of view by which Americans between 1865 and 1917 were ruled." 3745. Morison, Samuel Eliot. The intellectual life of colonial New England. [2d ed.] New York, New York University Press, 1956. 288 p. 56-8487 F7.M82 1956 First published in 1936 under title: The Puritan Pronaos. "Primitive New England is a puritan pronaos to the American mind of the 19th Century, and of today" — not because of the books or new ideas pro- duced there, but because the settlers of the 1630's took steps to avoid the intellectual degeneracy which leads to spiritual decay, and made great sacrifices to import the apparatus of civilized life and learning. These lectures describe from contemporary sources Harvard College, elementary and public grammar schools, printing and bookselling, private and public libraries, pulpit literature, histories and political pamphlets, verse, and the beginnings of science. INTELLECTUAL HISTORY / 459 3746. Morris, Lloyd R. Postscript to yesterday; America: the last fifty years. New York, Random House, 1947. xxvi, 475 p. 47-11260 E741.M65 Bibliography: p. 451-465. Aims to present the attitudes of the American people to the principal social changes that took place between 1896 and 1946, and so "to tell the story of the American mind and heart during the past 50 years." This is done, however, by a succession of highly-wrought sketches of individual figures — literary men, journalists, philosophers, jurists, and social thinkers. The main theme is the widening breach, approaching "absolute polarity," "between two sets of standards; those by which American cul- ture judged American society, and those which gov- erned American life as it was actually being lived." 3747. Savelle, Max. Seeds of liberty; the genesis of the American mind. New York, Knopf, 1948. xix, 587, xxxi p. illus. 48-6861 E169.1.S27 1948 "Chapter nine . . . entitled 'Of music, and of America singing,' was written by Mr. Cyclone Covey." The author has "attempted to find every im- portant figure who flourished in the period between 1740 and 1760 and to find out what he was thinking, and where possible, why he thought as he did." He thus surveys the whole intellectual and cultural out- put of the colonies during these two decades, dealing in succession with religion, Newtonian science, philosophy, economic, social, and political thought, literary expression, painting, architecture, and music. At times he strains the facts in order to find liberty and a conscious nationalism burgeoning in every sphere. 3748. Wertenbaker, Thomas Jefferson. The golden age of colonial culture. [2d ed.] New York, New York University Press, 1949. 171 p. (New York University. Stokes Founda- tion. Anson G. Phelps lectureship on early Ameri- can history) 49-4583 E162.W48 1949 Regarding the decades just preceding the Ameri- can Revolution as the full development of colonial culture, characterized by elegance, good taste, and charm in its chief centers, the author emphasizes the diverse origins and patterns to be found in these. This view is developed in brief but well-balanced sketches of the cultural life of Boston, New York, Philadelphia, Annapolis, Williamsburg, and Charles- ton. Each sketch presents the civic background, and the local achievements in literature, architecture, music, the artistic crafts, the theater, and natural science. 3749. Wright, Louis B. The first gendemen of Virginia; intellectual qualities of the early colonial ruling class. San Marino, Calif., Hunting- ton Library, 1940. 373 p. 40-8029 F229.W965 While Provincial Virginia produced very little in the way of a literature, its large landowners are here presented as "an aristocracy not only of wealth and position but of intelligence and learning." Al- though their concern for education produced only a somewhat haphazard system of private tutoring, they owned considerable libraries, which can often be reconstructed on the basis of surviving inven- tories. Supplementing these with other evidence, the author has worked out detailed case-studies of the literary culture of such figures of the first two generations as William Fitzhugh, Ralph Wormeley II, Richard Lee II, Robert Beverley II, the Carters, and the Byrds. C. Topics 3750. Beard, Charles A., and Mary R. Beard. The American spirit, a study of the idea of civili- zation in the United States. New York, Macmillan, 1942. 696 p. 42-50003 E169.1.B285 Bibliography: p. 675-683. Formally a 4th volume of The Rise of American Civilization, this differs so radically from its prede- cessors as to warrant separate listing. Selected authors from Jefferson, Paine, and Adams to Irwin Edman and W. T. Stace are analyzed in order to elicit a composite formulation of the American idea of civilization. This embraces a conception of his- tory as a struggle of human beings for individual and social perfection, a social principle which views all the agencies in the process of civilization as social products, and a respect for life, for "the utmost liberty compatible with the social principle," and "for the rule of universal participation in the work and benefits of society." 3751. Boas, George, ed. Romanticism in America; papers contributed to a symposium held at the Baltimore Museum of Art, May 13, 14, 15, 1940. Baltimore, Johns Hopkins Press, 1940. 202 p. 40-32317 PS201.B6 Contents. — Democratic bifocal ism, by E. F. Goldman. — New patterns of greatness, by Eleanor 460 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES P. Spencer. — Thomas Cole and the romantic land- scape, by W. L. Nathan. — The romantic lady, by R. P. Boas. — Books for the lady reader, by Ola E. Winslow. — The romantic interior, by Roger Gil- man. — Early American Gothic, by Agnes Addi- son. — The Beethovens of America, by Lubov Keefer. — Romantic philosophy in America, by George Boas. Five of the articles in this symposium deal with the arts — painting, architecture, and music — but there are also contributions on literature, philosophy, and general ideas. To Romanticism, the editor be- lieves, we owe our sense of toleration for individual- ism, our interest in primitive man, and our love of rural nature. It was therefore, he concludes, a philosophy much more useful to America, with its medley of races and religions, than the traditional classicism. 3752. Davies, John D. Phrenology: fad and sci- ence; a 19th-century American crusade. New Haven, Yale University Press, 1955. 203 p. (Yale historical publications. Miscellany 62) 55-9438 BF868.D3 By treating phrenology from the inside and sym- pathetically, instead of from the outside and con- temptuously, Dr. Davies is able to reveal the logic of its development and its interrelations with other aspects of American culture. To its originator, Franz Joseph Gall, his studies sought the physio- logical basis of physiological phenomena, but his disciples, Johann Gaspar Spurzheim and George Combe, turned it into an optimistic secular phi- losophy of social progress. In this form, it won a vogue in the course of the 1820's among upper- class discussion groups in the eastern cities; it was "phrenology made practical" by Orson and Lorenzo Fowler, in the form of craniometrical character readings and aptitude diagnoses, that swept Ameri- can society like wildfire, and survived into the pres- ent century. This lucidly organized monograph deals with both levels of phrenology, and their ef- fects in American education, psychiatry, penology, hygiene, literature, medicine, and religion. 3753. Egbert, Donald Drew, and Stow Persons, eds. Socialism and American life. Prince- ton, N. J., Princeton University Press, 1952. 2 v. (Princeton studies in American civilization, no. 4) 51-5828 HX83.E45 Volume 2 has special title: Bibliography, Descrip- tive and Critical. Bibliographer: T. D. Seymour Bassett. In one of the most elaborate contributions to American intellectual history thus far made, various hands present the European background, Christian communitarianism, secular Utopianism, the de- velopment of American Marxism, and the relations of American socialism to philosophy, economics, political theory, sociology, psychology, literature, and art. The bibliography, which runs to 510 pages, is interlarded with so elaborate a commentary as to constitute an independent work in its own right. 3754. Ekirch, Arthur A. The idea of progress in America, 1815-1860. New York, Columbia University Press, 1944. 305 p. (Columbia Univer- sity. Faculty of Political Science. Studies in his- tory, economics and public law, no. 511) H31.C7, no. 511 A44-5611 E338.E35 1944a Contemporary magazines and academic addresses have been ransacked in order to portray the general American faith in progress during this important period, and to analyze the idea in terms of the inter- ests and groups which it served or promised to serve, such as the early labor movement, or "the rising class of industrial capitalists." Attention is also given to the defenders of social stability, who argued that an inevitable steady progress should not be jeopardized by rash attempts to speed its course. The South constituted a special problem to believers in progress, whether sympathetic or hostile to slavery. Pro- grams for social renovation, and systematic exposi- tions of the idea of progress receive separate chapters. 3755. Hofstadter, Richard. Social Darwinism in American thought, 1 860-1 915. Philadel- phia, University of Pennsylvania Press, 1944. 191 p. 44-8078 HM22.U5H6 "Prepared and published under the direction of the American Historical Association from the in- come of the Albert J. Beveridge memorial fund." Bibliography: p. 177-186. An incisive exposition, from a harshly critical viewpoint, of the reception of the doctrine of natural selection in America, its application to social phenomena, and its use during three decades to jus- tify "a vision of competition as a thing good in it- self." It was not until the mid-90's that "the Ameri- can middle class shrank from the principle it had glorified," and listened to the critics who were destroying the "flimsy logical structure" of Herbert Spencer's sociology. But Social Darwinism had its second flowering in a nationalist or racist form, and down to World War I was used to support overseas expansion. 3756. Jones, Howard Mumford. The pursuit of happiness. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1953. 168 p. (The William W. Cook Foundation lectures, 7) 52-12265 BJ1481.J65 A most unusual book which might be called a case-study in American semantics. The well-known INTELLECTUAL HISTORY / 461 phrase of the Declaration of Independence is traced to its origin in the mind of George Mason and the Virginia Bill of Rights, and then pursued to a mul- titude of inferences and consequences in American life and thought since 1776. It is "the pursuing and securing of happiness and safety as a fundamental constitutional element in our society" which is in question, and the appearance of the idea in a se- quence of judicial decisions is noted. The book closes with the 20th-century preoccupation with the "techniques of happiness"; in the shift of meanings "happiness becomes a problem in expertise." $J5J. Parry, Albert. Garrets and pretenders; a history of bohemianism in America. New York, Covici, Friede, 1933. 383 p. 33-27114 PS138.P3 Bibliography: p. 359-369. Henri Murger's vision of the aesthetic life in Paris has received the compliment of imitation in nearly every civilized nation, although "the French light- headedness became somewhat rough and uncivilized in some of its American imitations." Mr. Parry follows the American phenomena from Pfaff 's saloon on Broadway in 1854, to the Bohemian Club of San Francisco, and back to Greenwich Village. There is no way, he warns, of isolating the poseurs from the sincere "gypsies of art." 3758. Persons, Stow, cd. Evolutionary thought in America. [Edited for the special program in American civilization at Princeton University] New Haven, Yale University Press, 1950. 462 p. 50-10345 B818.P4 Contents. — The theory of evolution: The rise and impact of evolutionary ideas, by R. Scoon. Evo- lution in its relation to the philosophy of nature and the philosophy of culture, by F. S. C. Northrop. The genetic nature of differences among men, by T. Dobzhansky. Evolutionary thought in Amer- ica: Evolution and American sociology, by R. E. L. Faris. The impact of the idea of evolution on the American political and constitutional tradition, by E. S. Corwin. Evolutionism inAmerican economics, 1800-1946, by J. J. Spengler. The influence of evo- lutionary theory upon American psychological thought, by E. G. Boring. Naturalism in American literature, by M. Cowley. The idea of organic ex- pression and American architecture, by D. D. Eg- bert. Evolution and moral theory in America, by W. F. Quillian, Jr. Evolution and theology in America, by S. Persons. The second published symposium to originate from the Princeton Program of Study in American Civilization, and organized as a continuation of the first (no. 3768) in that it presents an intellectual stimulus from Western Europe, the context in which the new ideas asserted themselves, and the com- promises and adjustments which resulted. The first three chapters are intended to provide the general background for the specifically American material which follows. 3759. Smith, Henry Nash. Virgin land; the American West as symbol and myth. Cam- bridge, Harvard University Press, 1950. 305 p. 50-6230 F591.S65 1950 The idea of the pull of a vacant continent beyond the frontier, drawing population westward and thereby giving American civilization its character- istic stamp, is to be found in Benjamin Franklin, and assumed a multitude of forms in literature and social thought before it received its classic statement from Frederick J. Turner in 1893. The author pursues the theme even into the dime novels which flourished after i860, but concludes by criticizing it as the persistence of an agrarian tradition which took no account of the industrial revolution, and which, in the light of World War I, even Turner found inadequate. 3760. Weinberg, Albert K. Manifest destiny; a study of nationalist expansionism in Ameri- can history. Baltimore, Johns Hopkins Press, 1935. 559 P- . 35-9403 Ei?9-5- w 45 "American expansionism is viewed here as an 'ism' or ideology, exemplified but by no means ex- hausted by the ideas of manifest destiny. The ideol- ogy of American expansion is its motley body of jus- tificatory doctrines . . . Taking the liberties necessary to an analytic history of ideas, this work considers separately the leading expansionist doctrines in the order in which successive annexationist movements brought each into focus, and with special reference to the issue or period in which it figured as chief, even if by no means sole, ideological determinant." The content extends from Thomas Paine's "natural right" to Woodrow Wilson's "world leadership." 3761. White, Edward A. Science and religion in American thought; the impact of naturalism. Stanford, Stanford University Press, 1952. 117 p. (Stanford University publications. University ser. History, economics, and political science, v. 8) 52-5982 BL245.W63 AS36.L54, v. 8 The relationship of science and religion as viewed by representative thinkers "during the two genera- tions in which naturalistic presuppositions were dominant in American thought." The author's viewpoint is that of Christian philosophy, but is im- plicit rather than explicit in his critic. il passages. The thinkers considered arc John W. Draper, An- 462 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES drew S. White, John Fiske, William James, David Starr Jordan, and John Dewey, and there is a con- cluding section on the fundamentalist controversy of the 1920's. 3762. Wyllie, Irvin G. The self-made man in America; the myth of rags to riches. New Brunswick, N. J., Rutgers University Press, 1954. 210 p. 54-10602 E169.1.W93 "A note on sources": p. 197-205. Concerned "not with business history but intel- lectual history, and specifically with the realm of ideas about self-help under American conditions of opportunity," this book supplies a long-needed analy- sis of the American gospel of success conceived as money-making. Although anticipations may be found from early colonial times, the gospel attained its fullest development and influence in the period after 1865, and although much battered in the years before 1917, enjoyed a noteworthy rejuvenation dur- ing the prosperous 1920's. The author has no dif- ficulty in showing that it has always been a matter of simple faith, since the great majority of men at the top have always started a long way from the bottom. D. Localities 3763. Bowes, Frederick P. The culture of early Charleston. Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina Press, 1942. 156 p. A43-857 F279.C4B6 Revision of thesis (Ph.D.) — Princeton University, 1941. Bibliography: p. [i37]-i45. A Princeton dissertation which covers the first century of Charleston, from its foundation in 1670 to the Revolution. Religious life, education, books, libraries and publications, science, and literature and the arts are successively examined. This was the brightest period of the city's culture, for after the Revolution, "without the fertilizing contact of Eng- lish culture, the intellectual life of Charleston became increasingly insular," absorbed in politics and the law. 3764. Bridenbaugh, Carl, and Jessica Bridenbaugh. Rebels and gentlemen; Philadelphia in the age of Franklin. New York, Reynal & Hitchcock, 1942. 393 p. 42-22812 F158.4.B6 "Bibliographical note": p. 373-379. Presents 18th-century Philadelphia as the Ameri- can port of entry for the Enlightenment — secular, humanistic, and bearing democratic and individualis- tic implications. Philadelphia, while becoming the second city of the British empire, became also the first example in the Western World of a culture resting on a broadly popular base. Much social his- tory is presented, but the emphasis is on education, printing and authorship, the fine arts and the art of living, the professions, and the rise of a scientific outlook. 3765. Davenport, Francis Garvin. Cultural life in Nashville on the eve of the Civil War. Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina Press, 1941. 232 p. 41-11227 F444.N2D33 Bibliography: p. 211-224. During the quarter-century preceding 1850, "the influence of the frontier mind as a negative force" lay heavy upon Nashville, but the missionary work of Philip Lindsley, president of the university, and his professor of sciences, the South-born Gerard Troost, was preparing for a far-reaching change. Its manifestation in the pre-Civil War decade, in edu- cation, medicine, religion, music and the theater, libraries and publishing, and in architecture, forms the subject of this book. By i860, the author thinks, Nashville had earned its tide, "the Athens of the South." 3766. Eaton, Clement. Freedom of thought in the old South. Durham, N. C, Duke Uni- versity Press, 1940. 343 p. 40-5232 F209.E15 "This study of the cultural history of the South between 1790 and i860, in which freedom of thought and speech is the central theme, is offered as a case history in the record of human liberty and intoler- ance." The liberal culture of the older Southern aristocracy disintegrated soon after the death of Jef- ferson in 1826. A thorough-going conservative reaction took its place, and set up taboos which put slavery and religious orthodoxy beyond the reach of criticism. There resulted an intellectual cordon sanitaire which sealed the South from North- ern "isms." 3767. Miller, James M. The genesis of western culture, the upper Ohio Valley, 1 800-1 825. Columbus, Ohio State Archaeological and Histori- cal Society, 1938. 194 p. ([Ohio State Archaeo- logical and Historical Society] Ohio historical collections, v. 9) 39-715 F518.M55 F486.O526, v. 9 Bibliography: p. 165-176. INTELLECTUAL HISTORY / 463 Covers the period of stable settlement, "during which the permanent centers of population were established and a permanent culture began to assert itself," and concentrates upon the principal towns: Pittsburgh, Marietta, Cincinnati, and Lexington. The activity of the several professions — ministers, lawyers, physicians, teachers, and journalists — is em- phasized. "Backwoods ignorance contests with the forces of education far superior to the demands of frontier life, and the utter rout of the muscular powers of darkness can be explained only by the tremendous vitality of the frail forces of light." E. International Influences: General 3768. Bowers, David F., cd. Foreign influences in American life; essays and critical bibliograph- ies. Edited for the Princeton Program of Study in American Civilization. Princeton, N. J., Princeton University Press, 1944. 254 p. [Princeton studies in American civilization] A44-4627 E169.1.B782 "Critical bibliographies": p. [1731-254. A considerably more heterogeneous and uneven collection than the subsequent products of the Princeton Program of Study in American Civiliza- tion, but containing some material not easily found elsewhere. The editor, whose early death was a loss to American studies, contributed a theoretical discussion of "social and cultural impact," and a study of the effect of Hegel and Darwin upon the American tradition. Donald D. Egbert and R. P. Blackmur take large views, respectively, of foreign influences in American fine art, and of the American literary expatriates. The critical bibliographies are extensive, partially so because some individual titles are frequently repeated. 3769. Koht, Halvdan. The American spirit in Europe, a survey of transatlantic influences. Philadelphia, University of Pennsylvania Press, 1949. 289 p. (Publications of the American In- stitute, University of Oslo, in cooperation with the Dept. of American Civilization, Graduate School of Arts and Sciences, University of Pennsylvania) 49-8752 E183.7.K.64 "Selected bibliography": p. 279-280. Offered as an avowedly incomplete picture, in the hope that a preliminary survey of the whole field will prove useful and provoke further studies. To- gether with the European repercussions of the Amer- ican Revolution and the Civil War, and the emer- gence of America as a world power, Dr. Koht treats a variety of nonpolitical influences: the reform move- ments of the earlier 19th century (peace, temper- ance, penology, etc.), invention, economic organiza- tion, technology, scientific cooperation, etc. The European vision of America also receives attention: the land of opportunity, and of the strange contrast between American idealism and the commercial spirit. 3770. Kraus, Michael. The Adantic civilization: eighteenth-century origins. Ithaca, Cornell University Press, 1949. 334 p. 49-50435. CB411.K7 "Published for the American Historical Associa- tion." Bibliography: p. 315-325. In this formidable array of cultural data, based on a mass of monographic material as well as origi- nal sources both published and in manuscript, the author is concerned to stress the mutuality of the process: if America was the recipient in medicine and kindred fields, she was also giving greater sub- stance to such concepts as political and religious freedom, economic opportunity, and humanitarian ideals, and hurrying the Western World to the realization of them. If Europe is still the biggest fact in North America, "North America has long been the biggest fact in Europe." 3771. Spoerri, William T. The old world and the new; a synopsis of current European views on American civilization. Zurich und Leip- zig, M. Niehan, 1937. 236 p. (Schweizer anglis- tische Arbeiten; Swiss studies in English, 3. bd.) 39-11768 E169.1.S75 Issued also as an inaugural dissertation, Zurich. Bibliography: p. 233-236. This Swiss writer had spent five years in the United States working his way throvigh college and teaching, but, as he says, had been back in Europe long enough to de-Americanize himself without relapsing into the anti-American attitude common among intellectuals. He reviews the English, French, and German literature on America, 1918- 36, in an effort to explain the reactions, usually both adverse and violent, of some eminent observers. His own contribution consists largely of a clarifi- cation — scientific investigators, reports, prophets of 464 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES doom, literary critics, contrast critics, social re- formers, and satirists — and of summaries with ex- tracts of individual writers; but in a brief conclusion he asserts that a horror of reality and hunger for romance constitute the key to the American character. 3772. Visson, Andre. As others see us. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1948. 252 p. 48-9390 E169.1.V53 A French intellectual who has become an Amer- ican citizen is able to present, because he formerly entertained them, the attitudes toward the United States of the intellectuals of western Europe. They arise, he is convinced, out of profound misunder- standings, most of them the result of ignorance, prejudice, envy, or fear. At the bottom of these he finds the "Athenian complex," insisting upon a cultural and intellectual superiority when political and economic leadership have been lost, and upon a privileged social position for the intellectuals themselves. F. International Influences: By Country France 3773. Fay, Bernard. The revolutionary spirit in France and America; a study of moral and intellectual relations between France and the United States at the end of the eighteenth century. Trans- lated by Ramon Guthrie. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1927. 613 p. 27-23830 DC138.F32 Bibliography: p. 575-600. Originally a dissertation based on a very thorough study of all French publications concerning America during the last three decades of the 18th century, this work is considerably more successful as a presentation of authors and books than as an inter- pretation of national states of mind. The author believes that "from 1775 to 1800 there reigned an impassioned intellectual union between" France and America, symbolized by the reception of James Monroe by the National Convention in 1794, and that it was brought to an end only by the military dictatorship of Bonaparte. The critical bibliog- raphy is available only in the original French edi- tion: Bibliographic critique des ouvrages francais relatifs aux Etats-Unis, ijyo-1800 (Paris, Champion, 1925. 108 p.). 3774. Jones, Howard Mumford. America and French culture, 1 750-1 848. Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina Press, 1927. 615 p. 28-2551 E183.8.F8J7 Bibliography: p. 573-602. An ambitious pioneer study which tries to arrive at "the general American attitude toward things French" during an important century, as a pro- legomenon to a survey of the American reception of French literature. The author first offers an analysis of American culture, which he sums up in the cosmopolitan spirit, the spirit of the frontier, and the middle class spirit — together with the urban spirit which was just emerging in 1848. He deals successively with French migration, the French lan- guage, French art, religion, and philosophical and educational influences. "On the whole," he con- \ eludes, "it is in the departments of manners and f fashions that the French have exerted their most notable influences in shaping American culture. In intellectual matters they have had vogue rather than influence." 3775. White, Elizabeth Brett. American opinion of France from Lafayette to Poincare. New York, Knopf, 1927. 346 p. 27-12393 E183.8.F8W5 In spite of the subtide, the text begins with the War of 1 8 12, and reaches the discussion of the French debt question in 1926. The emphasis is upon public affairs, the successive regimes which have governed France, and phases of French policy. American opinion is derived from diplomatic cor- respondence, congressional debates, the utterances of prominent Americans, magazine articles, and espe- cially newspaper editorials. Chapter 8, "Signs and Portents," is concerned with educational, literary, and other intellectual interrelations. Germany 3776. Long, Orie William. Literary pioneers; early American explorers of European cul- ture. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1935. 267 p. 35-18097 PS201.L6 Essays on six New Englanders — George Ticknor, Edward Everett, Joseph G. Cogswell, George Ban- croft, H. W. Longfellow, and J. L. Motley — who studied in Germany between 1815 and 1835. Most of them matriculated at the University of Gottingen, and the earlier arrivals sought out the venerable INTELLECTUAL HISTORY / 465 Goethe. The author's commentary is somewhat naive, but the abundant extracts from his subjects' own letters and other writings make this a useful source for German-American intellectual relations. Great Britain 3777. Heindel, Richard Heathcote. The Ameri- can impact on Great Britain, 1898-1914; a study of the United States in world history. Phila- delphia, University of Pennsylvania Press, 1940. 439 p. 40-31371 E183.8.G7H5 By "impact" the author means British knowledge of or interest in the United States, opinions and at- titudes about it, and the imitation or modification of the American example. The year 1898, when the United States suddenly became an imperial power, was the annus mirabilis in which it was dem- onstrated that America had become an important factor in British life. Anglo-American intellectual relationships are examined in the fields of diplo- macy, business, education, literature, entertainment, and social phenomena. 3778. Lillibridge, George D. Beacon of freedom; the impact of American democracy upon Great Britain, 1830-1870. [Philadelphia] Univer- sity of Pennsylvania Press, 1954, "1955. 159 p. 54-1 1541 E183.8.G7L54 "Bibliographical note": p. 151-157. This dissertation by a pupil of Merle E. Curti ex- amines the part played by the idea of American democracy in the strenuous class struggle in which the whole of British society was involved during the central four decades of the 19th century. Radical opinion is gleaned from newspapers, and middle- class liberal and conservative opinion from books, and from reviews such as the Westminster and the Quarterly. In the latter part of the period, radicals accepted the liberal leadership of John Bright and Richard Cobden, frequently called by their oppo- nents "the two members for the United States." The author draws the moral that a nation's democratic idea is more readily exportable than its "Democratic movement," conceived as "attitudes, behaviors, institutions, and techniques." Italy 3779. Torrielli, Andrew J. Italian opinion on America as revealed by Italian travelers, 1 850-1 900. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1941. 330 p. (Harvard studies in Romance lan- guages, v. 15) A4 1-3270 E169.1.T66 1 94 1 Based on thesis (Ph. D.) — Harvard University, I 94°- Exploits a considerable, and otherwise practically unused, body of publications, in order to present "not merely another work on American social his- tory, but rather an examination of average Italian sentiment on problems of continuous moment." These problems, as illustrated by the American ex- ample, are the Negro question, democracy, educa- tion, the press, and the status of women, and of the arts. The author does very little summarizing, but gives his opinion that the Italian travelers in Amer- ica had fewer axes to grind than many others. Japan 3780. Schwantes, Robert S. Japanese and Ameri- cans; a century of cultural relations. New York, Published for the Council on Foreign Rela- tions by Harper, 1955. 380 p. 55-7220 E183.8.J3S35 "Bibliographical essay": p. 333-372. By culture, Mr. Schwantes means "the whole pat- tern of life," and by cultural relations "all the ways in which peoples learn about each other." Those here described have been "unbalanced": "Americans have played a much greater part in the changes that have occurred in Japan over the past century than Japanese have in the equally great changes here. Japanese have been, on the whole, more interested in America than Americans have been in them." This largely one-way influence is traced in Japanese economic development, in political institutions and thought, and in education. Channels of communi- cation are identified in the exchange of teachers, stu- dents, and cultural materials, and in the influence of American missionaries. Since the author is seeking lessons of value for present-day American foreign policy, broadly conceived, he naturally emphasizes the most recent period. 431240—60 XII Local History: Regions, States, and Cities A. General Wor^s, including series B. New England: General C. New England: Local D. The Middle Atlantic States E. The South: General F. The South Atlantic States: Local G. The Old Southwest: General H. The Old Southwest: Local I. The Old Northwest: General J. The Old Northwest: Local K. The Far West L. The Great Plains: General M. The Great Plains: Local N. The Roct{y Mountain Region: General O. The Rocfy Mountain Region: Local P. The Far Southwest: General Q. The Far Southwest: Local R. California S. The Pacific Northwest: General T. The Pacific Northwest: Local U. Overseas Possessions 3781-4025 4026-4031 4032-4042 4043-4065 4066-4084 4085-4096 4097-4098 4099-4108 4109-4117 41 18-4144 4145-4150 4151-4164 4165-4171 4172-4177 4178-4185 4186-4191 4 1 92-4 1 99 4200-42 1 1 4212-4214 42 15-42 1 7 4218-4222 J^ THE concern of the present Guide is American civilization of today and the three and a half centuries of history which have led to it. From such a work local history and de- scription, the literature concerned with the lesser units into which the nation is divided, and most of which preserve a degree of autonomy and spontaneity within it, could hardly be ex- cluded. But obviously the problem of selecting, from a local literature which has been multi- plying along with its subject matter, some 440 titles as best representative of the whole for the generalized purpose of the Guide, presents special difficulties. The result is a compromise which may please few, but, we trust, will not offend many. The subtitle of the chapter indicates the three principal types of book which compose it, and points to two large classes deliberately excluded. County histories are legion and were an article of systematic manufacture in the last decades of the 19th century. But the county is in origin an artificial unit, and while it bulked large in the older, rural America, 466 it has receded in importance to the average Ameri- can of today. There are, furthermore, no fewer than 3,049 counties in the United States, and the choice of a handful could easily seem invidious. Town histories are equally missing, save for one of a New England community both unique and rep- resentative, Concord (no. 4037), and for the same reasons of multiplicity and diminishing significance. On the other hand, we have included individual local history: regions, states, and cities / 467 treatments of some national parks and monuments which nearly everybody wants to visit, and very many do. The subdivision of the chapter in the above table takes account of historical as well as geographical factors, and is merely for convenience in the ar- rangement of titles. States are placed following the region to which they are assigned, in a geographi- cal order, and cities or other units are placed fol- lowing their states, in an alphabetical order. Some states are variously allied, and we have assigned them to regions quite arbitrarily and without preju- dice — Oklahoma to the Great Plains rather than to the Far Southwest, Idaho to the Pacific Northwest rather than to the Mountain States, and so forth. Here is one anomaly: the regional books in Section E, The South, usually span Sections F, G, H, and part of P and Q, where we have put Texas. We have meant to slight no region, state, or city. However, very few writers have dealt with the Mid- dle Adantic States as a past or present unity, and the one small volume below that does so, appears principally for the reason that it does. Nor do we have 48 state histories to match the 48 states, or a volume for each of the Nation's largest cities. This is because we have been looking for books which will have significance, not merely for the local patriot or antiquary, or for the historian looking for raw material, but for people who want to fit the area into their general picture of the United States, and are interested both in what gives it its distinctive character, and in what it has contributed to the character of the Nation as a whole. The older state and local histories were usually guided by an antiquarian interest which led to large enumerations of persons, sites, and discrete events. They tended to concentrate upon origins and crucial episodes, and passed up the problem of representing latter-day complexities of development. With some distinguished exceptions, our selections are works of comparatively recent date. Many of them are works of original research by professional historians, who have learned that sound local history requires just as great an intellectual effort as do other varieties, and aim to make their work significant by disclosing the larger historical currents as they assume a concrete shape in a par- ticular community. Some states emphasize their own history in their schools and universities, which may result in compact and well-ordered textbooks whose usefulness is not limited to the classroom. Many of our titles, however, are of non-academic origin and consist of attempts to arrive at the genius loci by general writers or journalists. Some are products of the wave of "regional writing" which began rolling in the 1930's. They may lack the pre- cision of scholarly history and geography, and some of their materials may require to be taken with a grain of salt, but when honestly done they make a distinct contribution which the others usually do not attempt, and they are regularly written to be read, while the academic product sometimes seems to be meant to discourage readers. Areas differ conspicu- ously in their productivity of modern works of either type. Why, for example, should Oklahoma be a veritable cornucopia of books of State and regional interest, while Missouri, immediately to the north- west, turns out practically nothing? The greatest tide in recent America, which has run for over a century but seems only to grow in strength, is the tide of urbanization. It can hardly be said that historians and geographers, as distinct from the sociologists who view it as material for ab- stractions, have kept abreast of it. In America there are many great urban universities whose graduate schools produce learned monographs on ancient Greek pottery or the foreign policy of Bismarck, but never dream of searching for order and significance in the prodigious developments which have been go- ing on under their noses. And there are many great cities unrepresented here by any history or even any title, because there is no up-to-date and comprehen- sive history to be had. General works on the Westward movement and the frontier are contained in Chapter VIII, General History, and the more local ones on our successive Wests in this one, but the separation cannot be en- tirely clear-cut. The same kind of separation has been attempted between works on the slavery sys- tem and the crisis of 1854-1876, assigned to Chapter VIII, and works on the South as a region, assigned here, but again it cannot be effected with completely satisfactory results. A. General Works, Including Series 3781. Davidson, Donald. The attack on leviathan; regionalism and nationalism in the United States. Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina Press, 1938. 368 p. 38-9614 E169.1.D34 A collection of essays and studies, many of which appeared in periodicals from 1932 to i<)^, reviewing 468 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES the development of regionalism or sectionalism in the United States as interpreted by various authors. The greatest hindrance to regionalism, the author thinks, is increasingly powerful national govern- ment, the leviathan that attempts to impose a uni- form pattern on the regions. The main thesis is dis- cussed from the standpoints of history, geography, politics, culture, economics, and social conditions. Although Mr. Davidson defends the South as a re- gion, upholding its interests and tradition, he recog- nizes that the hope of a democratic America lies in the fusion of regionalism with nationalism. "The recognition of sectional diversity," he says, "is the true safeguard of national unity. The danger to national unity comes when diversity is ignorantly or willfully put aside as a thing of no importance, or when it is assumed that no diversity exists." 3782. Look. Look at the U. S. A., by the editors of Loo\. With regional introductions by Mary Ellen Chase t and others] Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1955. 522 p. 55-8101 E169.L842 An abridged and reworked version of a pictorial guide to the regions of the United States originally published in 9 volumes in 1946-48. The photo- graphs, most of which occupy an entire page, are original, significant, and handsomely reproduced. The regional introductions are by well-known writers: Mary Ellen Chase on New England, Paul Horgan on the Southwest, Frederick L. Allen on New York City, Gerald W. Johnson on the Central Northeast, Louis Bromfield on the Midwest, David L. Cohn on the South, Wallace Stegner on the Central Northwest, and Joseph Henry Jackson. Many more fine photographs and vasdy more de- tailed local information will be found in the original 9-volume edition, the sectional arrangement of which is the same as here. 3783. Odum, Howard W., and Harry Estill Moore. American regionalism; a cultural historical approach to national integration. New York, Holt, 1938. 693 p. illus. 38-15648 E179.5.O43 In contrast to sectionalism (see Turner below), "regionalism assumes ... a great national unity and integrated culture in which each region exists . . . solely as a component unit in the whole." In Part I, the authors consider our natural regions, our cultural regions, and our service regions (gov- ernmental and non-governmental); in Part II, the historical and theoretical aspects of regionalism as they have been explored by social scientists, and in Part III the development of the six major regions— the Middle States, the Northeast, the Southeast, the Far West, the Northwest and the Southwest— into a great nation, "in whose continuity and unity of development, through a fine balance of historical, cultural, and geographic factors, must be found the hope of American democracy and, according to many observers, Western civilization." The au- thors support their thesis with quotations from numerous sources. 3784. Turner, Frederick Jackson. The signifi- cance of sections in American history; with an introd. by Max Farrand. New York, Holt, 1932. 347 p. 33-1864 E178.T96 Avery O. Craven and Max Farrand collected and edited these twelve scattered essays by the late Pro- fessor Turner relating to the sections of the United States: New England, the Middle States, the South- east, the Southwest, the Middle West, the Great Plains, the Mountain States, and the Pacific Coast. He ascribes the individual characteristics of the sections to variations in physiography, the pressure of population, political attitudes towards industrial interests, and the economic, social, and religious aspirations of the people. He points out the neces- sity of shaping national action to "the fact of a vast and varied Union of unlike sections." "We have furnished to Europe," Professor Turner says, "the example of a continental federation of sections oyer an area equal to Europe itself, and by substituting discussion and concession and compromised legis- lation for force, we have shown the possibility of international political parties, international legis- lative bodies, and international peace." 3785. Wisconsin. University. Regionalism in America. Edited by Merrill Jensen; with a foreword by Felix Frankfurter. Madison, Univer- sity of Wisconsin Press, 195 1. xvi,425p. 51-6901 E179.5.W56 Includes bibliographies. The papers in this volume were delivered at a symposium on American regionalism sponsored by the Committee on the Study of American Civiliza- tion of the University of Wisconsin and held in April 1949. Men from various academic fields and from public life, all interested in regionalism as a field of research or of administration, give their concepts of regions and regionalism. Merrill Jen- sen, Rupert B. Vance, William B. Hesseltine, John F. Kienitz, John M. Gaus, Merle Curti, and other distinguished scholars and administrators have con- tributed papers to discussions of the development of regionalism since the 18th century, three historic regions of the United States, the place of regional- ism in American culture, and regionalism as a practical concept in the development and admin- istration of Federal Government programs. How- ard W. Odum says in the final paper: "It was in the regional quantity and quality of this continent local history: regions, states, and cities / 469 that the first plantings and the later fruits of American democracy set the incidence of the American way of life as distinctive from that which had gone before." AMERICAN GUIDE SERIES 3786. American guide series. [Compiled and written by the Federal Writers' Project and the Writers' Program] 1936-43. 153 v . New editions and reprints, 1939-56. The American Guide Series has been described as "our first real series of handbooks for the nation." It was begun soon after the organization of the Federal Writers' Project in the Works Progress Administration (later changed to Works Projects Administration) in the summer of 1935, to provide work-relief for several thousand writers throughout the 48 states. In the summer of 1939 the Federal Writers' Project was superseded by the Writers' Program with the initiative placed in the hands of public sponsoring bodies in each of the states. The following entries represent the latest available edi- tions of each of the state, territorial, and town guides, with the date of the earliest edition and the latest printing given in a note whenever they differ from the imprint date of the latest issue for which a printed card is available. Each of the state guides is arranged according to the major highways, and contains descriptions of towns, waterways, recrea- tional areas, and points of historical interest. All are illustrated with photographs and maps. The new editions, in most instances, bring up to date the maps and tours, population figures, college enrollment, and other developments in the states' economic and cultural progress. The Assistant Commissioner of the WPA in 194 1 said that "the publication of the Writers Program constitutes a unique example of cooperation between the community and the Nation with the aim of preserving the story of our American heritage in such form that it may become part of the consciousness of the widest possible number of Americans." The guides to several travel routes that cut across regional boundaries have been listed first. The series is here arranged by geographical regions, with the state guide first, and the city, town, or other area guides of that state following alpha- betically, by locality. TRAVEL ROUTES 3787- The Intracoastal Waterway, Norfolk to Key West. Washington, U. S. Govt. Print. Off., x 937- 143 P. 37-26563 TC623.4.F4 3788. The Ocean Highway; New Brunswick, New Jersey to Jacksonville, Florida. New York, Modern Age Books, 1938. xxix, 244 p. 38-12399 F106.F44 3789. The Oregon Trail; the Missouri River to the Pacific Ocean. New York, Hastings House, 1939. 244 p. 39-27221 F880.F28 Bibliography: p. 228-230. 3790. U. S. One, Maine to Florida. New York, Modern Age Books, 1938. xxvii, 344 p. 38-27179 F106.F45 GV1024.F32 NEW ENGLAND 3791. Here's New England! A guide to vacation- land. Sponsored by the New England Coun- cil, Boston. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1939. 122 p. 39-15700 F9.F44 3792. Maine, a guide 'down east.' Sponsored by the Maine Development Commission. Bos- ton, Houghton Mifflin, 1937. xxvi, 476 p. illus. 3 8 ~3 F25.F44 Selected reading list": p. [454]~458. 3793. Augusta-Hallowell on the Kennebec. Spon- sored by the Augusta-Hallowell Chamber of Commerce. [Augusta] Kennebec Journal Print Sn °P' 1 94o. 123 p. 4J-5 2 359 F29.A9W8 Bibliography: p. [108] 3794. Maine's capitol. Sponsored by the Depart- ment of Education of the State of Maine. Augusta, Kennebec Journal Print Shop, 1939. 60 p. 43-547 1 F29A9F4 3795. Portland city guide. Sponsored by the city of Pordand. [Pordand] Forest City Print. Co., 1940. xiv, 337 p. 40-30610 F29.P9W8 "Selected reading list": p. [3i7]-3i8. 379 6 - New Hampshire, a guide to the Granite State. Francis P. Murphy, Governor of New Hampshire, co-operating sponsor. Boston, Hough- ton Mifflin, 1938. xxix, 559 p. illus. 36-6192 F39.F43 Selected reading list": p. 539-540. 3797. Vermont; a guide to the Green Mountain State. Sponsored by the Vermont State Plan- ning Board. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1937. xxi, 392 P- 37-28648 F54.F45 Bibliography: p. [372]-3 79 . 470 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 3798. Massachusetts; a guide to its places and people. Frederick W. Cook, secretary of the Commonwealth, cooperating sponsor. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1937. xxxvi, 675 p. 37-28502 F70.F295 "Fifty books about Massachusetts": p. [637]— 638. 3799. The Berkshire hills. Sponsored by the Berk- shire Hills Conference. New York, Funk & Wagnalls, 1939. xiv, 368 p. 39-27644 F72.B5F37 "Berkshire sports, winter and summer": p. [277]- 360. 3800. Boston looks seaward, the story of the port, 1630-1940. Sponsored by Boston Port Au- thority. Boston, B. Humphries, 1941. 316 p. 42-9007 F73.63.W8 3801. Cape Cod pilot, by Jeremiah Digges [pseud, of Josef Berger] Sponsored by Poor Richard Associates. Provincetown, Mass., Modern Pilgrim Press, 1937. 403 p. 37- I2 55° F72.C3B39 Bibliography: p. 390-391. 3802. Springfield, Massachusetts. Springfield [Mass.] 1941. 84 p. 41-8764 F74.S8W975 3803. State forests and parks of Massachusetts, a recreation guide. Boston, Dept. of Con- servation, 1941. 58 p. 42-36810 SD428.A2M47 3804. Rhode Island, a guide to the smallest State. Sponsored by Louis W. Cappelli, secretary of state. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1937. xxvi, 500 p. 37-28463 F79.F38 Bibliography: p. [4751-479. 3805. Connecticut; a guide to its roads, lore, and people. Sponsored by Wilbur L. Cross. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1938. xxxiii, 593 p. 38-27339 F100.F45 "Selected reading list": p. [562J-565- MIDDLE ATLANTIC STATES 3806. New York; a guide to the Empire State. Sponsored by New York State Historical Association. New York, Oxford University Press, 1946. xxxi, 782 (i. e. 798) p. 46^5765 F124.W89 1946 First published in 1940. Second printing, with corrections, 1946. Fourth printing, 1949. Bibliography: p. 729-739. 3807. Albany — past 1938?] 27 p. and present. [Albany? 38-26487 F129.A3F43 3808. New York City guide. [Rev. ed.] New York, Random House, c i939- xx, 680 p. 56-51521 F128.5.F376 1939b First published in 1939. Companion volume to New Yor\ Panorama. "Books about New York": p. 627-635. 3809. New York panorama; a comprehensive view of the metropolis, presented in a series of articles. New York, Random House, 1938. 526 p. 38-27618 F128.5.F38 "The present volume, although complete in itself . . . constitutes in effect the general introduction to the New Yor\ City Guide." 3810. Rochester and Monroe County. Rochester, N. Y., Scrantom's, 1937. 460 p. 38-1950 F129.R7F43 Half-tide: A history and guide. Bibliography: p. 443-447. 381 1. New Jersey, a guide to its present and past. Sponsored by the Public Library of Newark and the New Jersey Guild Associates. New York, Viking Press, 1939. xxxii, 735 p. 39-20654 F139.F45 Bibliography: p. 697-704. 3812. The story of Dunellen. [Dunellen, N. J., Art Color Print. Co.] 1937. 11 1 p. 38-26489 F144.D9F4 Bibliography: p. 108. 3813. Livingston; the story of a community. [Caldwell, N. J., Printed by the Progress Pub. Co.] 1939. 166 p. 41-2862 F144.L5W7 3814. Entertaining a nation; the career of Long Branch. [Bayonne, N. J., Jersey Print. Co.] 1940. xiv, 21 1 p. 40-27599 F144.L847 Bibliography: p. 198-200. 3815. Monroe Township, Middlesex County, New Jersey, 1838-1938. [New Brunswick, N. J.] 1938. 140 p. 39-16121 F144.M68F4 Bibliography: p. 134-135. 3816. Pennsylvania: a guide to the Keystone State. Co-sponsored by the Pennsylvania Historical Commission and the University of Pennsylvania. New York, Oxford University Press, 1940. xxxii, 660 p. 40-28760 F154.W94 Fourth printing, 1950. "A guide to further reading": p. 623-629. local history: regions, states, and cities / 471 3817. Story of old Allegheny city, sponsored by Hon. Cornelius D. Scully. Pittsburgh, Pa., Allegheny Centennial Committee, 1941. xviii, 236 p. 41-16289 F159.A4W7 Bibliography: p. 227. Has no map. 3818. Erie; a guide to the city and county. Spon- sored by Charlie R. Barber, mayor of Erie. [Philadelphia] William Penn Association of Phila- delphia, 1938. 133 p. 39-1898 F157.E6F4 Bibliography: p. 128. 3819. The Harmony Society in Pennsylvania. [Philadelphia] William Penn Association of Philadelphia, 1937. 38 p. 38-4970 HX656.N5F4 This is the "most complete and authentic" history to date of a practical experiment in communal living for a small group of people who setded in Butler County, Pennsylvania, 25 miles northwest of Pitts- burgh, in 1804. 3820. The Horse-Shoe Trail, sponsored by Henry N. Woolman, president, Horse-Shoe Trail Club, Philadelphia, Pa. 2d ed. [Philadelphia] William Penn Association of Philadelphia, 1939. 32 p. 4°"3 6l 7 F!54- F 45 J 939 First published in 1938. 3821. Philadelphia, a guide to the Nation's birth- place. Sponsored by the Pennsylvania His- torical Commission. [Philadelphia] William Penn Association of Philadelphia, 1937. xxxii, 704 p. 38-23204 F158.5.F35 Bibliography: p. 690-691. 3822. Delaware, a guide to the first State. New and rev. ed. by Jeannette Eckman; edited by Henry G. Alsberg. New York, Hastings House, 1955. xxvi, 562 p. 55-H794 F164.F45 1955 First published in 1938. Bibliography: p. [530]~538. 3823. New Casde on the Delaware. 2d ed. Spon- sored and published by the New Castle His- torical Society. [Wilmington, Del., Press of W. N. Cannj 1937. 142 p. 39-5465 F174.N5F42 First published in 1936. Bibliography: p. 139-142. 3824. Maryland, a guide to the old line State. Sponsored by Herbert R. O'Conor, Governor of Maryland. New York, Oxford University Press, 1940. xxviii, 561 p. 40-13919 F181.W75 Fifth printing, 1948. Bibliography: p. 535-543. 3825. A guide to the United States Naval Academy. Sponsored by the United States Naval Academy. New York, Devin-Adair Co., 1941. 158 p. 41-14204 V415.L1W7 "Superintendents of the Academy": p. 53-74; "Outstanding graduates of the Academy": p. 75-92. 3826. Washington, D. C, a guide to the Nation's capital. Sponsored by the George Washing- ton University. New York, Hastings House, 1942. xl, 528 p. 42-19931 F199.F38 1942 A revision and condensation of Washington: City and Capital, compiled by the Federal Writers' Proj- ect, 1937. "Selected reading list": p. 505-512. 42-19931 F199.F38 1942 THE SOUTH ATLANTIC STATES 3827. Virginia; a guide to the Old Dominion. Sponsored by James H. Price, Governor of Virginia. New York, Oxford University Press, 1946. xxix, 710 p. 46-5684 F231.W88 1946 First published in 1940. Third printing with corrections, 1946. 1952 reprint listed in The Cumu- lative Boo\ Index. Bibliography: p. 647-667. 3828. Jefferson's Albemarle, a guide to Albemarle County and the city of Charlottesville, Virginia. Sponsored by the Charlottesville and Al- bemarle County Chamber of Commerce. [Char- lottesville, Jarman's] 1941. 157 p. 42-1913 F232.A3W87 3829. Alexandria. Sponsored by the Young Women's Club of Alexandria. [Alexandria, Va., Williams Print. Co.] 1939. 27 p. 40-3986 F234.A3W8 3830. West Virginia, a guide to the Mountain State. Sponsored by the Conservation Commission of West Virginia. New York, Oxford University Press, 1948. 559 p. 53 _2 34°5 F241.W85 1948 First published in 1941. Bibliography: p. 533-541. 3831. The North Carolina guide; edited by Black- well P. Robinson. Sponsored by the North Carolina Department of Conservation and Develop- ment. [New ed.] Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina Press, 1955. xxi, 649 p. 55-2216 F259.F44 1955 First published in 1939. 472 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 3832. Charlotte, a guide to the Queen City of North Carolina. Sponsored by Hornet's Nest Post, no. 9, American Legion. [Charlotte] News Print. House, 1939. 74 p. 40-13106 F264.C4W7 Bibliography: p. 68-69. 3833. Raleigh, capital of North Carolina. Spon- sored by the Raleigh Sesquicentennial Com- mission. [New Bern, N. C, Printed by Owen G. Dunn Co., 1942] 170 p. 42-36985 F264.R1W7 "Books about Raleigh and North Carolina": p. [157 H58. 3834. South Carolina; a guide to the Palmetto State. Sponsored by Burnet R. Maybank, Governor of South Carolina. New York, Oxford University Press, 1941. xxvii, 514 p. 41-52304 F269.W7 Fourth printing, 1949. Bibliography: p. 479-486. 3835. Beaufort and the Sea Islands. Sponsored and published by the Clover Club. Savan- nah, Ga., Review Print. Co., 1938. 47 p. 39-30829 F279.B3F44 3836. South Carolina State parks. Sponsored by the South Carolina State Commission of Forestry. [Columbia, South Carolina State Forest Service] 1940. 43 p. 41-52550 SB482.S6W7 1940 3837. Georgia, a guide to its towns and country- side. Rev. and extended by George G. Leckie. Atlanta, Tupper & Love, 1954. xxii, 457 p. 54-10344 F291.W94 1954 First published in 1940. Bibliography: p. 439-440. 3838. Atlanta, capital of the South, edited by Paul W. Miller. New York, O. Durrell, 1949. xiv, 318 p. 49-10579 F294.A8W8 1949 First published in 1942 under title: Atlanta, a City of the Modern South. Bibliography: p. 298-301. 3839. Augusta. Sponsored by City Council of Augusta. Augusta, Ga., Tidwell Print. Supply Co., 1938. 218 p. 38-15849 F294.A9F4 Bibliography: p. 205-208. 3840. The Macon guide and Ocmulgee National Monument. Sponsored by Macon Junior Chamber of Commerce. Macon, Ga., J. W. Burke, 1939. 127 p. 40-26510 F294.M2W75 Bibliography: p. 1 19-120. 3841. Savannah. Sponsored by Chamber of Com- merce, Savannah. Savannah, Review Print. Co., 1937. xiv, 208 p. 37-36384 F294.S2F4 Bibliography: p. 196-199. 3842. The story of Washington-Wilkes. Sponsored by the Washington City Council. Athens, University of Georgia Press, 1941. xiv, 136 p. 41-7353 F294.W27W7 Bibliography: p. 127-129. Has no map. 3843. Florida; a guide to the southernmost State. Sponsored by State of Florida Department of Public Instruction. New York, Oxford Univer- sity Press, 1944. xxiv, 600 p. 45-2317 F316.F44 1944 First published in 1939. Third printing, 1944. Fifth printing, 1947. Bibliography: p. 553-565. 3844. Seeing Fernandina; a guide to the city and its industries. Co-sponsored by the City Commission, Fernandina. [Fernandina] Fernan- dina News Pub. Co., 1940. 84 p. 41-52476 F319.F4W7 "Citations": p. 77-80. 3845. A guide to Key West. Sponsored by the Florida State Planning Board. Rev., 2d ed. New York, Hastings House, 1949. 122 p. 50-1226 F319.K4W7 1949 First published in 1941. Bibliography: p. 113-116. 3846. Planning your vacation in Florida: Miami and Dade County, including Miami Beach and Coral Gables. Sponsored by the Florida State Planning Board. Northport, N. Y., Bacon, Percy & Daggett, 1 94 1. xx, 202 p. 42-36652 F319.M6W7 Bibliography: p. 184-188. 3847. Seeing St. Augustine. Sponsored by City Commission of St. Augustine. [St. Augus- tine] The Record Co., 1937. 73 p. 38-12409 F319.S2F4 "Selected bibliography": p. 70-73. OLD SOUTHWEST 3848. Alabama; a guide to the Deep South. Spon- sored by the Alabama State Planning Com- mission. New York, Hastings House, 1949. xxii, 442 p. 5 2 -37" F326.W7 1949 First published in 1941. Bibliography: p. 413-423. local history: regions, states, and cities / 473 3849. Mississippi; a guide to the Magnolia State. Sponsored by the Mississippi Agricultural and Industrial Board. New York, Hastings House, 1949. xxiv, 545 p. 49-5823 F341.F45 1949 First published in 1938. Bibliography: p. [523]~530. 3850. Mississippi gulf coast, yesterday and today, 1 699-1939. Sponsored by Woman's Club of Gulfport. Gulfport, Miss., Gulfport Print. Co., 1939. 162 p. 39-I755 2 F347-G9F5 3851. Louisiana; a guide to the State. Sponsored by the Louisiana Library Commission at Baton Rouge. New York, Hastings House, 1941. xxx, 746 p. 41-52389 F375.W8 Fifth printing, 1949. Bibliography: p. 704-716. 3852. New Orleans city guide. Rev. by Robert Tallant. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1952. be, 416 p. 52-14722 F379.N5F34 1952 First published in 1938. Bibliography: p. [397]~40i. 3853. Arkansas; a guide to the State. Sponsored by C. G. Hall, secretary of state, Arkansas. New York, Hastings House, 1941. xxvii, 447 p. 41-52931 F411.W8 Second printing, 1948. Bibliography: p. 397-407. 3854. Guide to North Little Rock, industrial cen- ter of Arkansas. [North Little Rock, Ark., Times Print. & Pub. Co.] 1936. 20 p. 40-26499 F419.N67F45 3855. Tennessee; a guide to the State. Sponsored by Department of Conservation, Division of Information. New York, Hastings House, 1949. xxiv, 558 p. 49-5822 F436.F45 1949 First published in 1939. "Selected bibliography": p. 529-535. 3856. Kentucky; a guide to the Bluegrass State. Sponsored by the University of Kentucky. [Rev. ed.] New York, Hastings House, 1954. xxix, 492 p. 54-1591 F456.F44 1954 First published in 1939. Bibliography: p. 462-470. 3857. Old capitol and Frankfort guide. Spon- sored by the Kentucky State Historical So- ciety, Frankfort, Kentucky. [Frankfort, Ky.] H. McChesney, 1939. 98 p. 39-26382 F459.F8F45 431240— GO 32 3858. Henderson; a guide to Audubon's home town in Kentucky. Sponsored by Susan Starling Towles, librarian, Public Library, Hender- son, Kentucky. Northport, Bacon, Percy & Daggett, 1941. 120 p. 42-12802 F459.H49W7 3859. Lexington and the Bluegrass country. Sponsored by the city of Lexington. Lex- ington [Ky.] E. M. Glass, 1938. 149 p. 39-8854 F459.L6F4 3860. Louisville; a guide to the Falls city. Spon- sored by the University of Kentucky; co- operating sponsor, the Louisville Automobile Club. New York, M. Barrows, 1940. xv, 1 12 p. 40-9812 F459.L8W8 3861. Missouri, a guide to the "Show me" State. [Rev. ed.] Sponsored by the Missouri State Highway Dept. New York, Hastings House, 1954. 654 p. 55-3657 F466.W85 1954 First published in 1941. Bibliography: p. 596-611. OLD NORTHWEST 3862. The Ohio guide. Sponsored by the Ohio State Archaeological and Historical Society. New York, Oxford University Press, 1946. xxxi, 634 (i. e. 650) p. 46-5681 F496.W96 1946 First published in 1940. Third printing, with corrections, 1946. Sixth printing, 1952. "Selected bibliography": p. 611-613. 3863. Bryan and Williams County. Sponsored by the city of Bryan. [Gallipolis, Ohio, Down- tain Print. Co., 1941] 117 p. 43-2703 F497.W7W7 Bibliography: p. 116-117. 3864. Chillicothe and Ross County. Sponsored by the Ross County Territory Committee, 1938. [Columbus, Ohio, Heer Print. Co., 1938] 91 p. 39-19297 F499.C4F5 Bibliography: p. 88. 3865. Cincinnati; a guide to the queen city and its neighbors. Sponsored by the city of Cin- cinnati, Ohio. Cincinnati, Wicsen-Hart Press, 1943. xxiii, 570 p. ^ 43-17162 F499.C5W93 "Selected bibliography": p. 547-549. 3866. Findlay and Hancock County. Reproduced in cooperation with Findlay College. | Find- lay, Ohio, 1937? J 52 p. A40-1949 F499JF4F4 Bibliography: p. 51. 474 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 3867. Fremont and Sandusky County. Sponsored by the Ohio State Archaeological & Historical Society, Columbus. Co-sponsored by C. A. Hoc- henedel, safety-service director, city of Fremont. [Fremont? Ohio, 1940] 115 p. 40-10659 F499.F9W75 "For reference" : p. 115. 3868. Lake Erie, vacationland in Ohio; a guide to the Sandusky Bay region. Sponsored by the city of Sandusky in cooperation with Ohio's Lake Erie Vacationland, Inc. . . . Sandusky, Ohio, Stephens Print. Co., 1941. 129 p. 41-18975 F497.E6W7 "References": p. 129. 3869. A guide to Lima and Allen County, Ohio. Sponsored by Lima Better Business Bureau, Inc. [Lima? Ohio, 1938] 64 p. 39-8859 F499.L73F4 Bibliography: p. 61. 3870. Springfield and Clark County, Ohio. Spon- sored by the Springfield Chamber of Com- merce. [Springfield] Printed by the Springfield Tribune Print. Co., 1941. 136 p. 41-26044 F499.S7W7 "References": p. 130-131. 3871. Urbana and Champaign County. Spon- sored by the Urbana Lions Club. Urbana, Ohio, Gaumer Pub. Co., 1942. 147 p. 42-16468 F499.U7W7 "Selected bibliography": p. 144. 3872. Warren and Trumbull County. Sesqui- centennial ed. Sponsored by Western Re- serve Historical Celebration Committee. [Warren? Ohio] 1938. 60 p. 40-10660 F499.W2F45 Bibliography: p. 60. 3873. Zanesville and Muskingum County. Re- produced in cooperation with Zanesville Chamber of Commerce. [Zanesville? Ohio, 1937] 38 p. 40-10661 F499.Z2F45 Bibliography: p. 36. 3874. Indiana, a guide to the Hoosier State. Spon- sored by the Department of Public Relations of Indiana State Teachers College. New York, Oxford University Press, 1945. xxvi, 548 (i. e. 564) p. 46-5683 F526.W93 1945 First published in 194 1. Second printing, with corrections, 1945. Third printing, 1947. Bibliography: p. 509-523. 3875. Illinois; a descriptive and historical guide. Rev., with addition, in 1946. Chicago, A. C. McClurg, 1947. xxii, 707 p. 47-30173 F546.F45 1947 First published in 1939. "Fifty books about Illinois": p. 653-656. 3876. Cairo guide. Sponsored by Cairo Public Library. [Nappanee, Ind., E. V. Pub. House] 1938. 62 p. 39—33966 F549.C2F4 Bibliography: p. 61-62. 3877. Galena guide. Sponsored by the city of Galena. [Chicago?] 1937. 79 p. 39-8109 F549.G14F5 "Galena bibliography": p. 78-79. 3878. Hillsboro guide. [Hillsboro] Printed by the Montgomery News, 1940. 92 p. 43-4563 F549.H67W7 Bibliography: p. 92. 3879. Nauvoo guide. Sponsored by the Unity Club of Nauvoo. Chicago, A. C. McClurg, 1939. 49 p. 39-27124 F549.N37F5 3880. Princeton guide. Sponsored by the city of Princeton. [Princeton, 111., Republican Print. Co.] 1939. 48 p. 40-32949 F549.P93F5 3881. Rockford. Sponsored by the city of Rock- ford, Illinois. Rockford, 111., Graphic Arts Corp., 1941. 144 p. 42-18201 F549.R7W7 Has no map. 3882. Michigan, a guide to the Wolverine State. Sponsored by the Michigan State Adminis- trative Board. New York, Oxford University Press, 1946. xxxvi, 696 (i. e. 712) p. 46-5682 F566.W9 1946 First published in 1941. Third printing, with corrections, 1946. Fifth printing, 1949. Bibliography: p. 645-653. 3883. Wisconsin; a guide to the Badger State. Sponsored by the Wisconsin Library Asso- ciation. New York, Hastings House, 1954. 651 p. 55-3162 F586.W97 1954 First published in 194 1. Bibliography: p. 578-590. 3884. Portage. Sponsored by Portage Chamber of Commerce. [Portage? Wis.] 1938. 85 p. 40-4748 F589.P76F45 Bibliography: p. 83-85. local history: regions, states, and cities / 475 3885. Shorewood [a residential suburb of Milwau- kee] Sponsored by Village Board of Shore- wood. [Shorewood, Wis., 1939] 109 p. 40-7055 F589.S58F5 Has no map. 3886. Minnesota, a State guide. Sponsored by the Executive Council, State of Minnesota. [Rev. ed.] New York, Hastings House, 1954. xxx, 545 P- , , 54-589 F606.F44 1954 First published in 1938. Bibliography: p. [498J-511. 3887. The Minnesota arrowhead country. Spon- sored by the Minnesota Arrowhead Associa- tion. Chicago, 111., A. Whitman, 1941. xxi, 231 p. 41-52030 F606.W93 Bibliography: p. 21 1-2 16. 3888. St. Cloud guide. St. Cloud, Minn., Greater St. Cloud Committee of the Chamber of Commerce, 1936. 63 p. 39-29347 F614.S25F45 3889. Iowa, a guide to the Hawkeye State. Spon- sored by the State Historical Society of Iowa. New York, Hastings House, 1949. xxviii, 583 p. 49-5480 F621.F45 1949 First published in 1938. Bibliography: p. [5571-564. 3890. A guide to Burlington, Iowa. 2d ed. (rev.) Sponsored by Burlington City Council. Bur- lington, Iowa, Acres-Blackmar Co., 1939. 80 p. 43-8144 F629.B9F45 1939 First published in 1938. 3891. Guide to Cedar Rapids and northeast Iowa, sponsored by the Cedar Rapids Chamber of Commerce. Cedar Rapids, Iowa, Laurance Press, »937- . 79 P- 38-26504 F629.C3F5 Bibliography: p. 79. 3892. A guide to Dubuque. Sponsored by the city of Dubuque and the Dubuque Chamber of Commerce. Dubuque, Iowa, Hoermann Press, 1937. 32 p. 38-26488 F629.D8F4 3893. A guide to Estherville, Iowa, Emmet County, and Iowa great lakes region. Sponsored by the Chamber of Commerce, Estherville [Estherville, Iowa.] Estherville Enterprise Print, 1939. 36 p. 40-10663 F629.E7F45 3894. A guide to McGregor. Sponsored by the McGregor Service Club. McGregor, Iowa, J. F. Widman, 1940. 16 p. 40-10732 F629.M14W7 First published in 1938. GREAT PLAINS 3895. North Dakota, a guide to the northern prairie State. Sponsored by the State Historical Society of North Dakota. [2d ed.] New York, Oxford University Press, 1950. xix, 352 p. 50-9076 F636.F45 1950 First published in 1938. Bibliography: p. 327-340. 3896. South Dakota, a guide to the State. Spon- sored by the State of South Dakota. 2d ed. completely rev. by M. Lisle Reese. New York, Hastings House, 1952. xxvii, 421 p. 52-7601 F656.F45 1952 First published in 1938 under title: South Dakota Guide. Bibliography: p. 383-393. 3897. Aberdeen, a middle border city. University of South Dakota, official sponsor; Friends of Aberdeen Committee, co-operating sponsor. [Aberdeen? S.D., Prairie League Workshop, 1940] 94 p. 40-28669 F659.A14W7 Bibliography: p. [9i]~94. Has no map of Aberdeen. 3898. A vacation guide to Custer State Park in the Black Hills of South Dakota. Sponsored by the Custer State Park Board. [Pierre, S. D., State Pub. Co.] 1938. 32 p. 39-29346 F657.C92F4 3899. Mitchell, South Dakota; an industrial and recreational guide. Sponsored by the Mitchell Chamber of Commerce. [Mitchell? S. D.] 1938. 32 p. 4°-5435 F659.M68F5 3900. Guide to Pierre, the capital city and its vicinity. Sponsored by the Pierre Chamber of Commerce and the city of Pierre. [Pierre, S. D., State Pub. Co., 1937] 20 p. 40-5436 F659.P6F45 3901. Nebraska, a guide to the Cornhusker State. Sponsored by the Nebraska State Historical Society. New York, Hastings House, 1947. xiii, 424 p. 48-1227 F666.F46 1947 First published in 1939. Bibliography: p. 407-412. 3902. Old Bellevue. Sponsored by the Sarpy County Historical Society. Papillion, Neb., Papillion Times, 1937. 3 2 P- 39-8853 F6 7 4.B 4 F^ "Selected references": p. 30. 476 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 3903. Lincoln city guide. Sponsored by the Ne- braska State Historical Society. Lincoln, Neb., Woodruff Print. Co., 1937. 87 p. 37-5002 F674.L7F4 Bibliography: p. 79-81. 3904. Kansas; a guide to the Sunflower State. Sponsored by the State Department of Edu- cation. New York, Hastings House, 1949. xviii, 538 p. 49-5 821 F686.F45 1949 First published in 1939. Bibliography: p. 523-529. 3905. The Larned city guide. Lamed, Kan., Chamber of Commerce, 1938. 34 p. 39-8855 F689.L34F4 Bibliography: p. 34. 3906. A guide to Leavenworth, Kansas. Leaven- worth, Kan., Leavenworth Chronicle, 1940. 67 p. 43-9 I0 7 F689.L5W7 Bibliography: p. 67. 3907. A guide to Salina, Kansas. Sponsored by Salina Public Library Association. Salina, Kan., Advertiser-Sun, 1939. 55 p. 40-10664 F689.S2F45 Bibliography: p. 54—55- 3908. Oklahoma, a guide to the Sooner State. Sponsored by the University of Oklahoma. [2d ed.] Norman, University of Oklahoma Press, 1947. xxvi, 445 p. 47-6373 F694.W85 1947 First published in 1941. "Selected reading list": p. 422-427. 3909. Tulsa, a guide to the oil capital. Sponsored by the Tulsa Federation of Women's Clubs. Tulsa, Okla., Mid-West Print. Co., 1938. 79 p. 38-26703 F704.T92F5 Bibliography: p. 75. ROCKY MOUNTAIN REGION 3910. Montana, a State guide book. Sponsored by Department of Agriculture, Labor and In- dustry, State of Montana. New York, Hastings House, 1949. xxiii, 430 p. 49-5522 F731.F44 1949 First published in 1939. Bibliography: p. 425-429. 391 1. Wyoming; a guide to its history, highways, and people. Sponsored by Dr. Lester C. Hunt, secretary of state. New York, Oxford Uni- versity Press, 1 94 1. xxvii, 490 p. 41-52444 F761.W58 Third printing, 1948. Bibliography: p. 449-458. 3912. Colorado; a guide to the highest State. Sponsored by the Colorado State Planning Commission. New York, Hastings House, 1941. xxxiii, 511 p. 4!-5 2 3 12 F781.W9 Sixth printing, 1951. "Selective reading list": p. 473~479- 3913. Ghost towns of Colorado. Sponsored by Ralph L. Carr, Governor of Colorado. New York, Hastings House, 1947. 1 14 p. 47-3230 F776.W7 3914. Utah; a guide to the State. Co-sponsored by the Utah State Institute of Fine Arts and the Salt Lake County Commission. New York, Hastings House, 1954. xxvi, 595 p. 54-1817 F826.W75 1954 First published in 1941. Bibliography: p. 538-551. 3915. Provo, pioneer Mormon city. Sponsored by the Utah State Institute of Fine Arts. Co- sponsored by the Provo City Commission. Port- land, Or., Binfords & Mort, 1942. 223 p. 43-1606 F834.P8W7 Bibliography: p. [202]-2o8. 3916. Nevada; a guide to the Silver State. Spon- sored by Dr. Jeanne Elizabeth Wier, Nevada State Historical Society. Portland, Oreg., Binfords & Mort, 1940. xviii, 315 p. 41-71 F841.W77 "Supplementary reading list of Nevada books": p. 297-304. FAR SOUTHWEST 3917. Texas; a guide to the Lone Star State. Spon- sored by the Texas State Highway Commis- sion. New York, Hastings House, 1940. xxxiii, 718 p. 40-27629 F391.W95 Fifth printing, 1949. "A selected reading list of Texas books": p. 677— 682. 3918. Beaumont; a guide to the city and its en- virons. Sponsored by Beaumont Post 1806, Veterans of Foreign Wars of U. S., Houston, Tex., Anson Jones Press, 1939. xiv, 167 p. 40-4250 F394.B3F4 3919. Corpus Christi, a history and guide. Spon- sored by the Corpus Christi Chamber of Commerce. Corpus Christi, Corpus Christi Caller- Times, 1942. 245 p. 42-15129 F394.C78W7 "A selected reading list of books for Corpus Christi": p. 233-239. 3920. The Denison guide. Denison Chamber of Commerce, cooperating sponsor. Denison, Tex., Denison Chamber of Commerce, 1939. 29 p. 40-10658 F394.D3F45 3921. Houston, a history and guide. Sponsored by the Harris County Historical Society, Inc. Houston, Tex., Anson Jones Press, 1942. 363 p. 42-16471 F394.H8W7 3922. Port Arthur. Sponsored by Hamilton Smith Post No. 797, Inc., Veterans of Foreign Wars of U. S., Port Arthur. Houston, Tex., Anson Jones Press, 1940. xvii, 164 p. 41-12325 F394.P83W7 3923. San Antonio, a history and guide. Spon- sored by the San Antonio Conservation Society. San Antonio, Clegg Co., 1941. m p . 42-6788 F394.S2W964 1941 First published in 1938. 3924- New Mexico; a guide to the colorful State. Sponsored by the Coronado Cuarto Centen- nial Commission and the University of New Mexico New and rev. ed. by Joseph Miller; edited by Henry G. Alsberg. New York, Hastings House, 1953 ™M7'P ; 53-13543 F801.W76 1953 bust published in 1940. Bibliography: p. 436-440. 3925- Arizona, the Grand Canyon State; a State guide. Sponsored by the Arizona State Col- lege at Flagstaff. Completely rev. by Joseph Miller- edited by Henry G. Alsberg. New York, Hastings House, 1956. xxv, 532 p. p. ,,., , 56-446 F811.W87 1956 r-irst published in 1940 under title: Arizona; a State Guide. Bibliography: p. 503-513. 3926. Mission San Xavier del Bac, Arizona; a de- scnptive and historical guide. Sponsored by Arizona Pioneers' Historical Society. New York Hastings House, 1940. 57 p. DM,. , 40-27588 NA5235.S25W7 Bibliography: p. 33-34. CALIFORNIA 3927- California, a guide to the Golden State. Sponsored by Mabel R. Gillis, California state hbrar.an. [Rev. cd.] New York, Hastings House, 1954. xxxi, 716 p. local history: regions, states, and cities / 477 55-4472 F866.2.E4 1954 First published in 1939. Bibliography: p. 694-698. 3928. Death Valley; a guide. Sponsored by the Bret Harte Associa tes. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1939 xv, 75 p. 39-2776 F868.D2F4 bibliography: p. [71J 3929. Los Angeles; a guide to the city and its environs. Sponsored by the Los Angeles County Board of Supervisors. Completely rev 2d ed. New York, Hastings House, 195 1. li v , 44I p r- u.- , , • 5i-"827 F869.L8W85 1951 rirst published in 1941. Bibliography: p. 421-427. 3930. Monterey Peninsula. Sponsored by Cali- forma State Department of Education. Stanford University, Calif, J. L. Delkin, 194 1. 2 °7P- . 41-51883 F869.M7W75 Bibliography: p. 194-198. 393i- San Diego, a California city. Sponsored and published by the San Diego Historical Society. [San Diego, 1937] 13 8 p. p .,,. , 38-27088 F869.S22F4 Bibliography: p. 127-130. 3932. Balboa Park, San Diego, California; a com- prehensive guide to the city's cultural and recreational center. Sponsored and published by the Association of Balboa Park Institutions. [San Lhego, Neyenesch Printers] 1941. 83 p. 41-9477 F869.S22W7 3933- San Francisco, the Bay and its cities. Spon- sored by the City and County of San Fran- cisco. [Rev. 2 ded.] New York, Hastings House 1947- xvii,53i P- 47-11536 F869.S 3 W 95 I947 First published in 1940. ' "A selected reading list": p. 501-504. 3934- Santa Barbara; a guide to the Channel city and its environs. Sponsored by Santa Bar- bara State College. New York, Hastings House, I9 t l \ , XVU ' 2 ,° 6 p - 4i-46i 10 F869.S45W86 Bibliography: p. 194-197. PACIFIC NORTHWEST 3935. Idaho, a guide in word and picture. Spon- sored by the secretary of state of Idaho. [->d ed. rev.] New York, Oxford University Press, 1950 ^300 P- 50-13175 F746.F453 rirst published in 1937. Bibliography: p. 287-289. 478 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 3936. Tours in eastern Idaho. [Boise? 1939?] 36 p. 39-26296 F745.F47 3937. Oregon, end of the trail. Sponsored by the Oregon State Board of Control. Rev. ed. with added material, by Howard McKinley Corn- ing. Portland, Oreg., Binfords & Mort, 1951. xxxu, 549 p. 52-"474 F881.W76 1951 First published in 1940. Bibliography: p. 5 2 9~535- 3938. Mount Hood; a guide. Sponsored by the Oregon State Board of Control; cooperating sponsor, the Mount Hood Development Association. [New Yorkl Duell, Sloan & Pearce, 1940. xxvii, I32 p. 40-27505 F882.H85W7 Bibliography: p. 125. 3939. The new Washington; a guide to the Ever- green State. Sponsored by the Washington State Historical Society. Rev. ed. with added ma- terial, by Howard McKinley Corning. Portland, Or., Binfords & Mort, 1950. xxx, 687 p. 51-3893 F891.W9 1950 First published in 194 1 under tide: Washington, a Guide to the Evergreen State. Bibliography: p. [6441-653. OVERSEAS POSSESSIONS 3940. A guide to Alaska, last American frontier, by Merle Colby. New York, Macmillan, 1939. lxv, 427 p. 39-27616 F909.F45 "Books about Alaska": p. 405-410. 3941. U. S. Puerto Rico Reconstruction Adminis- tration. Puerto Rico; a guide to the island of Boriquen, compiled and written by the Puerto Rico Reconstruction Administration in cooperation with the Writers' Program of the Work Projects Administration. Sponsored by the Puerto Rico De- partment of Education. New York, University Society, 1940. xli, 409 p. 40-35620 F1958.U55 "Books about Puerto Rico": p. 392-402. AMERICAN FOLKWAYS SERIES 3942. American folkways, edited by Erskine Cald- well. New York, Duell, Sloan & Pearce, 1941-55. 26 v. _ , • , J The American Guide Series created in the minds of many Americans a new consciousness of our his- tory, historic sites, recreational spots, and folklore, and the literature of regionalism had been aborning since Frederick J. Turner discovered the place of sections in American history. In the summer of 1 94 1, Duell, Sloan and Pearce, New York, began publication of the American Folkways Series, "designed to reflect the living features, the atmosphere and background of the various Ameri- can regions — those qualities which have inspired the great American novels and are not to be found in histories or in textbooks." The series is under the general editorship of Erskine Caldwell, whose intimate knowledge of the region and people he por- trays in his novels fits him to guide such a project. The authors, from Edwin Corle whose Desert Country (1941) launched the series, to Oscar Lewis whose High Sierra Country (1955) is the most re- cent, are by birth, adoption, or, at least, admiration for the manners and customs of the people, "natives" of the regions about which they write with instinc- tive feeling and knowledge. The tides of some of the volumes need geographical clarification, and we have borrowed freely from the authors' own descriptions. 3943- 1945. Atherton, Gertrude Franklin (Horn) Golden Gate country, by Gertrude Atherton. 256 p. 45-2766 F861.A87 3944. Bracke, William B. Wheat country. 1950. 309 p. 5 - 6 934 F591.B78 "If one were to describe a large circle with a radius of roughly two hundred miles from the center of Kansas ... he would have put a perimeter around the Wheat Country." The area extends to the east and west boundaries of Kansas, to the south central section of the State, and in an arc into southern Nebraska. 3945. Callahan, North. Smoky Mountain coun- try. 1952. 257 p. 52-6783 F443.G7C3 The "Smoky Mountain country" extends from the Kentucky and Virginia State lines southward through East Tennessee and western North Caro- lina to Georgia. 3946. Carter, Hodding, and Anthony Ragusin. Gulf Coast country. 1951. 247 p. 51-10125 F296.C3 The "Gulf Coast" extends about one hundred fifty miles from east to west along the Gulf of Mexico and penetrates no more than five miles in- land from the sea. "The Coast is still a nation in itself, bearing no resemblance to the interior of Mississippi or Alabama along whose southern borders it skirts." 2Q47. Corle, Edwin. Desert country. 1 941. 357 p. 3 ™ 41-51799 F786.C8 1941 This is a book about the arid regions of the local history: regions, states, and cities / 479 American Southwest — the area between the Pacific Coast Range and the Rocky Mountains which in- cludes such deserts as the Mojave, the Colorado, the Amargosa, and Arizona's western slope. 3948. Croy, Homer. Corn country. 1947. 325 p. 47-3772 F595.C963 The "Corn country," in the center of the United States, stretches from western Ohio to the eastern part of Kansas, and from the southern part of Minnesota to central Missouri, and includes at least parts of Indiana, Illinois, Iowa, Nebraska, Wis- consin, and South Dakota. 3949. Day, Donald. Big country: Texas. 1947. 326 p. 47-4831 F386.D3 3950. Graham, Lloyd. Niagara country. 1949. 321 p. 49-9928 F127.N6G7 To Canadians, Bostonians, New Yorkers, and Americans in general, the "Niagara Country" means different things. "If you pinpoint Niagara Falls and draw a circle with a radius of fifty miles and the Falls as the center, you will probably have the most common concept of Niagara Country." 3951. [Henry, Ralph Chester] High border coun- try, by Eric Thane [pseud.] 1942. 335 p. 42-36241 F597.H4 Montana, Wyoming, the Dakotas, and the north- ern tongue of Idaho form the "High Border Coun- try," which takes its name from the high plains and the high mountains, and forms the northern bound- ary of the United States, as opposed to the "low border" fronting Mexico. 3952. Kane, Harnett T. Deep Delta country. 1944. xx, 283 p. 44-40211 F377.D4K3 "Selected bibliography": p. 273-280. The hundred and fifteen miles or so from New Orleans to the Gulf of Mexico forms the Deep Delta of the Mississippi River, "a region in some ways like no other in the world." 3953. Kennedy, Stetson. Palmetto country. 1942. 340 p. 42-36426 F316.K38 The Palmetto country lies in the deepest South — Florida and the southern portions of Georgia and Alabama. The word palmetto is derived from the Spanish palmito, a diminutive palm tree. 3954. Le Sueur, Meridel. North Star country. 1945. 327 p. 45-37888 F606.L56 "The North Star Country, with Minnesota as its center, occupies almost the exact geographical center of North America and has three great drainage systems flowing in divergent directions through wide valleys of glacial loess." Here the Mississippi Valley "extends north to south through the elbow of the Minnesota River, a rich basin left by glacial invasion and occupied before the white man's coming by the great Sioux nation. The surface then tilts down northward, to the beaches of the dead Lake Agassiz whose dry basin makes the Red River Valley, the winter wheat area of North Dakota." 3955. Lewis, Oscar. High Sierra country. 1955. 291 p. 55-9834 F868.S5L64 The Sierra Nevada range in east central Cali- fornia, with some attention to the Nevada towns just beyond it. 3956. Long, Haniel. Pinon country. 1941. 327 p. 41-51810 F786.L8 The land of the dwarf pinon trees which produce the pinon nut, an important food of the natives, embraces New Mexico, northern Arizona, southern Utah and Colorado, west Texas, and northern Mexico. 3957. McWilliams, Carey. Southern California country, an island on the land. 1946. 387 p. 46-25084 F867.M25 Southern California is a coastal strip of land where the mountain ranges, the ocean, and the semi- desert terrain meet. It includes part of Santa Bar- bara County, all of Ventura, Los Angeles, and Orange Counties, and those portions of San Ber- nadino, Riverside, and San Diego Counties "west of the mountains." The offshore Channel Islands are a part of the region although traditionally de- tached from its social life. 3958. Nixon, Herman C. Lower Piedmont coun- try. 1946. xxiii, 244 p. 46-83330 F210.N5 Book notes: p. 234-238. "This country is borderland between mountains and lowland plains, between mountaineers and cot- ton planters. It is land where the Appalachians, in their southwestward extension, fade away into small ridges and rolling hills. As the mountains disappear, the Piedmont Plateau on the east joins the Great Appalachian Valley, or series of valleys, on the west around the end of the Blue Ridge." 3959. Powers, Alfred. Redwood country; the lava region and the redwoods. 1949. x\ iii, 202 p. 49-5224 F861.P69 "Altogether, the volume's immense locale extends south and north along the [Pacific] coast — from Russian River [in California] to the Siuslaw River [in Oregon]." It is continued in the interior \al- 480 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES leys, and east of the Sierras and Cascades it includes large areas of Nevada, Oregon, and Idaho. 3960. Rayburn, Otto Ernest. Ozark country. 1941. 351 p. 4 I -5 20 73 F417.O9R3 "The Ozark Country is an egg-shaped uplift sprawling in the mammoth bed of the Mississippi Valley." Unlike some geographers, the author re- stricts the region to the southern half of Missouri, the northwestern part of Arkansas, and a few coun- ties in eastern Oklahoma. 3961. Mormon country. 42-22811 F826.S75 Stegner, Wallace 1942. 362 p. The Mormon country includes all of Utah, most of southern Idaho, the southwestern corner of Wyo- ming, a strip of western Colorado, the northwestern corner of New Mexico, much of northern and cen- tral Arizona, and the eastern third of Nevada; however, Utah is the center of its religious and cultural life. 3962. Swetnam, George. Pittsylvania country. 1951. 315 p. 51-9280 F159.P6S85 The "Pittsylvania Country" is an irregular area centering about Pittsburgh, extending up the Alle- gheny and Monongahela Rivers and down the Ohio for some seventy-five miles or more. "It is bounded on the east by the middle ridges of the Allegheny Mountains and the Pennsylvania Dutch Country, on the north by the Erie Country, on the west by the flat Buckeye Country beyond the Steubenville Hills, and on the south by the Hill Country of West Virginia." 3963. Thomas, Jeannette (Bell) Blue Ridge country, by Jean Thomas. 1942. 338 p. 42-36174 F217.B6T5 The Blue Ridge country here described comprises the southern portion of the Appalachian Moun- tain range that runs from West Virginia through portions of Virginia, Kentucky, Tennessee, North and South Carolina to Georgia and Alabama. 3964. Vestal, Stanley. Short grass country. 1941. 304 p. 41-52003 F591.V48 "From the Saskatchewan River in Canada south- ward for 1,500 miles, a strip of country averaging some 500 miles in width extends almost to Old Mexico — country once covered with an unbroken mat of buffalo grass, grama, mesquite ... all short grasses — rarely even six inches high." By the "Short Grass Country" the author means only the southern section of this region, the High Plains. It includes the western half of Oklahoma and Kansas, North- west Texas, and the plains of eastern New Mexico and Colorado. 3965. Webster, Clarence M. Town meeting coun- try. 1945. 246 p. 45-2984 F4.W4 Mr. Webster's "Town Meeting Country" is an area of some 3,000 square miles in southern New England, comprising most of Connecticut east of the Connecticut River, a slice of south central Massa- chusetts, and most of Rhode Island west of Narra- gansett Bay. Here the small mill cities are still dominated by the annual or semi-annual Town Meeting. 3966. White, William Chapman. Adirondack country. 1954. 315 p. 52-12652 F127.A2W5 1954 Northeastern New York State, and particularly Adirondack State Park established in 1892 — the largest of our state parks, with over two million acres in public ownership. 3967. Williams, Albert N. Rocky Mountain coun- try. 1950. xxv, 289 p. 50-6038 F721.W68 Neither the residents nor topographers agree about the area described as the Rocky Mountain country. The author advises the reader to ignore the adas, and believe this: Rocky Mountain country is mostly the mountains in Colorado, plus the fringe along the southern border of Wyoming and the few fingers that jut down into New Mexico. 3968. Williamson, Thames R. Far north country. 1944. 236 p. 44-4015 F904W68 THE RIVERS OF AMERICA SERIES 3969. The Rivers of America, as planned and started by Constance Lindsay Skinner [vari- ous editors] New York, Rinehart, 1937-56. 50 v. The idea of telling the American saga through the story of its rivers originated with Canadian-born Constance Lindsay Skinner ( 1882-1939) who began her career as a teen-age newspaper correspondent and rose to distinction as a novelist, poet, and his- torian of America. About 1935 Miss Skinner se- lected the rivers and oudined the special folk stories for the original 24 volumes to be written by "nov- elists and poets," and published by Farrar and Rine- hart (now Rinehart and Company, Inc.) New York. At the time of her death four years later six of the seven volumes which Miss Skinner edited had already appeared. In successive years the series has been gready expanded, and edited, except for a brief period, by Carl Carmer, the well-known re- gional writer and collector of American folk songs, legends, and ballads, in collaboration, until their deaths, with the distinguished authors Stephen Vin- local history: regions, states, and cities / 481 cent Benet and Hervey Allen. The stories of the lives of the people who held "civil rights, God, and the primer ... in honor on the banks of the rivers," their industries and architectural fads, and the "char- acteristic expression of the Folk mind" in religion, arts, crafts, and folklore, make up these volumes. The most recent, Henry Savage's River of the Caro- linas: The Santee (1956), appropriately reminds us that our rivers will continue to witness future changes in our civilization, which will be as varied as the scenes they remember from time long past. 3970. SKINNER, CONSTANCE LINDSAY, ed. All of the volumes originally edited by Miss Skinner, except Coffin's, contain her essay "Rivers and American Folk," in 13 pages at the end. It has been omitted from the revised editions of Havig- hurst and Niles, and from the reprint of Matschat's. 3971. Burt, Maxwell Struthers. Powder River; let'er buck; illustrated by Ross Santee. 1938. 389 p. 38-28939 F767.P6B8 Bibliography: p. 377-380. 3972. Carmer, Carl L. The Hudson; illustrated by Stow Wengenroth. 1939. 434 p. 39-27579 F127.H8C3 Bibliography: p. 408-421. 3973. Coffin, Robert P. Tristram. Kennebec, cradle of Americans; illustrated by Maitland de Gogorza. 1937. 292 p. 37-27396 F27.K32C6 3974. Dana, Julian. The Sacramento, river of gold; illustrated by J. O'H. Cosgrave II. 1939. 294 p. 39-27898 F868.S13D27 3975. Havighurst, Walter. Upper Mississippi: a wilderness saga; illustrated by David and Lolitha Granahan. 1937. 258 p. 37-37568 F597.H 35 "Source streams": p. 245-250. A revised edition, including only an account of the river itself, and omitting materials on the Scandi- navian settlement and lumber industry of the upper Mississippi Valley, was edited by Stephen Vincent Benet and Carl Carmer, and published in 1944 (F597.H352). 3976. Matschat, Cecile (Hulse). Suwannee River; strange green land; illustrated by Alexander Key. 1938. 296 p. 38-19573 F317.S8M3 Bibliography: p. 283-288. Reprinted: London, W. Hodge, 1951. 256 p. F317.S8M3 3977. Niles, Blair. The James; illustrated by Ed- ward Shenton. 1939. 359>[i3]P> 39-27044 F232.J2N5 "Sources": p. 343-349. A revised and enlarged edition was edited by Hervey Allen, and published in 1945 under the tide: "The fames from Iron Gate to the Sea (335 p. F232.J2N5 1945). 3978. BENET, STEPHEN VINCENT, and CARL L. CARMER, eds. 3979. Beston, Henry. The St. Lawrence; illus- trated by A. Y. Jackson. 1942. 274 p. 42-24091 F1050.B47 3980. Cabell, James Branch, and Alfred J. Hanna. The St. Johns, a parade of diversities; illus- trated by Doris Lee. 1943. 324 p. 43-1 15 1 1 F317.S2C3 Bibliography: p. 309-318. 3981. Canby, Henry Seidel. The Brandy wine; illustrated by Andrew Wyeth. 1941. 285 p. 41-5328 F157.C4C23 "A selected bibliography": p. 269-271. 3982. Carter, Hodding. Lower Mississippi; illus- trated by John McCrady. 1942. 467 p. 42-23785 F396.C3 "Selected bibliography": p. 443-451. 3983. Clark, Thomas D. The Kentucky; illus- trated by John A. Spelman, III. 1942. 431 p. 4 2 -3 6o 5 2 F457.K3C6 Bibliography: p. 411-420. 3984. Davis, Clyde Brion. The Arkansas; illus- trated by Donald McKay. 1940. 340 p. 40-27483 F417.A7D37 "Acknowledgements": p. 328-330. 3985. Derleth, August W. The Wisconsin, river of a thousand isles; illustrated by John Steuart Curry. 1942. 366 p. 42-23237 F587.W8D4 Bibliography: p. 339-345. 3986. Gray, James. The Illinois; illustrated by Aaron Bohrod. 1940. 355 p. 40-34654 F547.I2G7 Bibliography: p. 337-344. 3987. Hansen, Harry. The Chicago; illustrated by Harry Timmins. 1942. 362 p. 42-25855 F547.C45H3 "Sources": p. 349-354. 482 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 3988. Masters, Edgar Lee. The Sangamon; illus- trated by Lynd Ward. 1942. 258 p. 42-15541 F547.S3M3 3989. Morgan, Dale L. The Humboldt, highroad of the West; illustrated by Arnold Blanch. 1943- 374 P- 43-7564 F847.H85M6 Bibliography: p. 355-365. 3990. Streeter, Floyd Benjamin. The Kaw, the heart of a nation; illustrated by Isabel Bate and Harold Black. 1941. 371 p. 41-3357 F681.S8 Bibliography: p. 353-359. 3991. Tourtellot, Arthur Bernon. The Charles; illustrated by Ernest J. Donnelly. 1941. 356 p. 41-52052 F72.C46T7 Bibliography: p. 343-348. 3992. Way, Frederick. The Allegheny; illustrated by Henry Pkz. 1942. 280 p. 42-15895 _ F157.A5W3 Bibliographical references included in "Acknowl- edgements": p. 219-222. 3993. Wildes, Harry Emerson. The Delaware; illustrated by Irwin D. Hoffman. 1940. 398 p. 40-14246 F106.W65 "Acknowledgments and bibliography": p. 369- 381. 3994. Wildes, Harry Emerson. Twin rivers, the Raritan and the Passaic; illustrated by Angelo di Benedetto. 1943. 390 p. 43-2434 F142.R2W5 Bibliography: p. 371-383. 3995. Wilson, William E. The Wabash; illus- trated by John De Martelly. 1940. 339 p. 40-27193 F532.W2W6 Bibliography: p. 325-332. 3996. ALLEN, HERVEY, ed. 3997. Davis, Julia. The Shenandoah; illustrated by Frederic Taubes. 1945. 374 p. 45-8434 F232.S5D3 Bibliography: p. 363-369. 3998. Fisher, Anne (Benson) The Salinas, upside- down river; illustrated by Walter K. Fisher. 1945. xviii, 316 p. 45-1095 F868.S133F5 Bibliography: p. 305-308. 3999. Footner, Hulbert. Rivers of the Eastern Shore, seventeen Maryland rivers; illustrated by Aaron Sopher. 1944. 375 p. 44-8257 F187.F2F6 "Sources": p. 362-368. 4000. Smith, Chard Powers. The Housatonic, Puritan river; illustrated by Armin Landeck. 1946. 532 p. 46-4413 F102.H7S5 Bibliography: p. 515-522. 4001. Vestal, Stanley. The Missouri; illustrated by Getlar Smith, maps by George Annand. 1945. 368 p. 44-5 1595 F598.V47 Bibliography: p. 349-354. 4002. ALLEN, HERVEY, and CARL L. CARMER, eds. 4003. Banta, Richard E. The Ohio; illustrated by Edward Shenton. 1949. 592 p. 49-1 1 1 15 F516.B18 Bibliography: p. 561-577. 4004. Campbell, Marjorie E. The Saskatchewan; illustrated by Illingworth H. Kerr. 1950. 400 p. 50-6401 F1076.C18 Bibliography: p. 375-380. 4005. Corle, Edwin. The Gila, river of the South- west; illustrated by Ross Santee. 1951. 402 p. 51-6152 F817.G52C6 Bibliography: p. 377-386. 4006. Davidson, Donald. The Tennessee; illus- trated by Theresa Sherrer Davidson. 1946- 48. 2 v. 46-1 190 1 F217.T3D3 "A selected bibliography": v. 1, p. 327-333; v. 2, p. 364-370. Contents. — v. 1. The old river, frontier to seces- sion. — v. 2. The new river, Civil War to TV A. 4007. Douglas, Marjory (Stoneman). The Ever- glades, river of grass; illustrated by Robert Fink. 1947. 406 p. 47-11064 F317.E9D6 Bibliography: p. 391-398. 4008. Gutheim, Frederick A. The Potomac; illus- trated by Mitchell Jamieson. 1949. 436 p. 49-11856 F187.P8G8 "Bibliographical notes": p. 399-413. 4009. Hard, Walter R. The Connecticut; illus- trated by Douglas W. Gorsline. 1947. 310 p. 47-3553 F12.C7H3 Bibliography: p. 299-301. 4010. Hill, Ralph Nading. The Winooski, heart- way of Vermont; illustrated by George Daly. 1949. 304 p. 49~ 88 44 F57.W63H55 Bibliography: p. 283-293. local history: regions, states, and cities / 483 401 1. Hislop, Codman. The Mohawk; illustrated by Letterio Calapai. 1948. xv, 367 p. 48-9184 F127.M55H57 Bibliography: p. 339-350. 4012. Howe, Henry F. Salt rivers of the Massa- chusetts shore; illustrated by John O'Hara Cosgrace II. xiv, 370 p. 51-14004 F64.H70 Bibliography: p. 351-358. 4013. Hutchison, Bruce. The Fraser; illustrated by Richard Bennett. 1950. 368 p. 50-10549 F1089.F7H8 Bibliography: p. 351-355. 4014. Minter, John Easter. The Chagres, river of westward passage; illustrated by William Wellons. 1948. xiv, 418 p. 48-7786 F1569.C4M5 Bibliography: p. 393-403. 4015. Roberts, Leslie. The Mackenzie; illustrated by Thoreau MacDonald. 1949. 276 p. 49-8302 F1060.9.M26R6 Bibliography: p. 255-256. 4016. Stokes, Thomas L. The Savannah; illus- trated by Lamar Dodd. 1951. 401 p. 51-9387 F277.S3S8 Bibliography: p. 382-388. 4017. Waters, Frank. The Colorado; illustrated by Nicolai Fechin, maps by George Annand. 1946. 400 p. 46-6192 F788.W3 Bibliography: p. 389-393. 4018. CARMER, CARL L., ed. 4019. Bissell, Richard P. The Monongahela; illus- trated by John O'Hara Cosgrave II. 1952. 239 p. 52-5562 F157.M58B5 Bibliography: p. 231-233. 4020. Carmer, Carl L. The Susquehanna; illus- trated by Stow Wengenroth. 1955. 493 p. 53-8227 F157.S8C3 Bibliography: p. 457-465. 4021. Dykeman, Wilma. The French Broad; il- lustrated by Douglas Gorsline. 1955. 371 p. 54-9349 F443F8D9 Bibliography: p. 349-356. 4022. Holbrook, Stewart H. The Columbia; il- lustrated by Ernest Richardson. 1956. 393 P- 55-!°527 F853.H6 4023. Savage, Henry. River of the Carolinas, the Santee; illustrated by Lamar Dodd. 1956. 435 p. 56-6469 F277.S28S3 Bibliography: p. 411-415. 4024. Smith, Frank E. The Yazoo River; illus- trated by Janet E. Turner. 1954. 362 p. 53-9242 F347.Y3S6 1954 "Acknowledgments and bibliography": p. 347— 350- 4025. Songs of the rivers of America; music ar- ranged by Dr. Albert Sirmay. 1942. xi, 196 p. 43-2356 M1629.S225S6 To accompany the series The Rivers of America. B. New England: General 4026. Brewer, Daniel Chauncey. The conquest of New England by the immigrant. New York, Putnam, 1926. 369 p. 26-12327 F9.B83 With all the fervor of his Puritan ancestry, the author laments the expansion of industrialism that brought increasing numbers of non-English speak- ing immigrants to New England after 1880. His book, however, supplies a view, hardly to be found elsewhere, of the replacement of the old New Englanders by a foreign-born population. The author, however, did not "despair of the Yankee as a potent force in the community," although he wrote too soon to record how completely the new- comers have absorbed the old New England ideals of education, industriousness, and sobriety. 4027. Fox, Dixon Ryan. Yankees and Yorkers. New York, University Press, 1940. 237 p. (Anson G. Phelps lectureship on early American history, New York University) 40-13441 F122.F78 The occupation of New York lands by the people of New England during the colonial period and the "Great Migration" following the Revolution is the theme of these lectures, in which the similarities and differences of the Yankees and the "Yorkers" are brought out. Special attention is given to the clash of the two elements in the border area of un- certain ownership which became Vermont, and there is a very original chapter characterizing "Yankee Culture in New York." The author con- 484 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES eludes: "There are characteristic differences which are creditable to each section, and each has found a benefit in the neighborly presence of the other." 4028. Holbrook, Stewart H. The Yankee exodus, an account of migration from New England. New York, Macmillan, 1950. xii, 398 p. 50-7972 E179.5.H65 Bibliography: p. 364-371. This book pursues in an episodic and anecdotal manner the thesis explored by Mrs. Rosenberry (q. v.). The author follows his emigrants west of the Mississippi, and, in diminishing degree, the fortunes of their communities as far as the close of the 19th century. 4029. Mussey, June Barrows, ed. Yankee life by those who lived it, by Barrows Mussey. [1st Borzoi ed., rev.] New York, Knopf, 1947. 543 P- . 47-"79i F3.M87 1947 First published in 1937 under title: We Were New England. In order to check as well as supplement the image of New England gathered from histories and novels, the author has "taken from the autobiographies of New Englanders those passages which show what it felt like to live in the cradle of the nation." Ex- tracts from 48 writers, ranging from the famous to the humble and obscure, and arranged under 19 topical headings, cover the three centuries before the Civil War. An alphabetical list of the persons who have been selected and their pertinent writings, with brief biographical comment, is brought to- gether in "Yankee Lives:" p. 535-543. 4030. Rosenberry, Lois (Kimball) Mathews. The expansion of New England; the spread of New England setdement and institutions to the Mississippi River, 1620-1865, by Lois Kimball Mathews. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1909. xiv, 303 p. 9-29148 F4.R81 "Bibliographical notes" at end of each chapter ex- cept 1 and 10. Mrs. Rosenberry 's enlargement of her Radcliffe College dissertation first traces the history of the New England frontier from the settlement to the Revolution, describes the institutions by which its advance was effected, and estimates the effect upon it of warfare with the Indians, later joined and supported by the French in Canada. The second half of the book is concerned with the "Great Migrations from New England toward the West" which began immediately after Yorktown and con- tinued more or less steadily until the Civil War, creating a belt centering along the 43rd parallel and extending west to the Mississippi. From 1787 "a second New England" was built up in Ohio, around Marietta and in the Western Reserve, and through- out the belt these "State builders" took with them their moral and intellectual ideals and institutions. "The history of New England," according to Mrs. Rosenberry, "is not confined to six states; it is con- tained in a greater and broader New England wherever the children of the Puritans are found." 4031. Wilson, Harold Fisher. The hill country of northern New England; its social and eco- nomic history, 1790-1930. New York, Colum- bia University Press, 1936. xiv, 455 p. (Columbia University studies in the history of American agri- culture, 3) 37-755 HD1773.A2W5 Bibliography: p. [403H37. The region which the writer has singled out for study comprises most of Maine, New Hampshire, and Vermont, an area of scant population dependent upon farming. The author describes the impact of economic changes in the United States as a whole on northern New England: they terminated its self- sufficiency as early as 1830, and precipitated a com- plete readjustment of its economic and social life. The author describes the transition from a "meat- wool-grain region" to "a dairy-fruit-potato-poultry- and-garden-truck crop territory," with closer con- tacts with the outside world, and a developing summer recreation trade. "This wide-spread ad- justment in the agriculture of the hill country, with its accompanying abandonment of sub-marginal farms, was called 'a triumph of selection, increased efficiency, and specialization,' in a report issued by the Department of Commerce in 1930." By that date the "deserted farm, instead of being thought wantonly abandoned, was regarded as the inevitable result of a readjustment to modern conditions." C. New England: Local NEW HAMPSHIRE 4032. Bowles, Ella (Shannon) Let me show you New Hampshire. New York, Knopf, 1938. 368 p. illus. 38-27408 F34.B69 A native of New Hampshire, the author has long been identified with its cultural life. This book is a series of Mrs. Bowles' "impressions, supplemented by personal research in historical background, by information furnished by certain state departments," local history: regions, states, and cities / 485 and other sources. The result is an unsystematic volume of pleasant and unpretentious topical sketches, all informed by a quiet but sincere love of the State. VERMONT 4033. Newton, Earle W. The Vermont story; a history of the people of the Green Mountain State, 1749-1949. With a foreword by Allan Nevins and an introduction by Dorothy Canfield Fisher. Montpelier, Vermont Historical Society, 1949. x, 281 p. (The American States) 49-9803 F49.N49 Bibliography: p. 272-274. The director of the Vermont Historical Society has written, according to Dorothy Canfield Fisher, a "well-balanced, accurate and detailed account" of Vermont since its beginning. An initial chapter describes the land and the natural resources which have determined the development of the Green Mountain State. Part II chronicles events from the Bennington charter in 1749 to 1849, when frustra- tions from a lag in industrial growth, poor trans- portation, and a discouraging outiook for agriculture made migration to the West attractive. Part III deals with economic progress, cultural growth, and local government during the century 1849 to 1949. The book fills an immediate need for a readable one- volume history of the State and is lavishly provided with illustrations, many of them in color. MASSACHUSETTS 4034. Hart, Albert Bushnell, ed. Commonwealth history of Massachusetts, Colony, Province and State; edited by Albert Bushnell Hart, with the cooperation of an advisory board of forty-two learned bodies. New York, States History Co., 1927-30. 5 v. 27-18867 F64.H32 Bibliography at end of each chapter. Contents. — v. 1. Colony of Massachusetts Bay, 1 605-1 689. — v. 2. Province of Massachusetts, 1689— 1775. — v. 3. Commonwealth of Massachusetts, 1775- 1820. — v. 4. Nineteenth century Massachusetts, 1820- 1889. — v. 5. Twentieth century Massachusetts, 1889-1930. Veteran American historian, Albert Bushnell Hart ( 1 854-1943) performed a labor of love in bringing together the group of scholars who pro- duced, in many instances from unpublished sources, this cooperative history of Massachusetts, and who maintained, under his experienced direction, a cer- tain uniformity of style and treatment. All phases of public and private life — social, economic, cultural, religious, and political — have been treated in the successive epochs of the State's history from 1605 to the time of publication. In each volume the biog- raphy of a representative man of his community is presented to illustrate the character and ambitions of his fellow citizens: the elder John Winthrop, Cotton Mather, John Adams, Daniel Webster, and Charles William Eliot are the men thus singled out. The Commonwealth History has set the pattern for some, but unfortunately only a few, cooperative and schol- arly histories of other states. 4035. Amory, Cleveland. The proper Bostonians. New York, Dutton, 1947. 381 p. ([Society in America series]) 47-1 1061 F73.37.A5 "Acknowledgments and bibliography": p. 361- 367- "Manufactured from interviews with Bostonians," this is a collective profile of the family-conscious, provincial, cultured, charitable, and yet frugal men and women who make up "the First Family Society of the Proper Bostonian." Far smaller than the Boston Social Register's 8,000 listees, it has yet "set its stamp on the country's fifth largest city [1940] so indelibly that when an outsider thinks of a Bos- tonian he thinks only of the Proper Bostonian." It is narrated in an informal, anecdotal style, with a sympathetic understanding of these sheltered bene- ficiaries of the great family trusts, and at the same time with a prying humor that penetrates rock- bound custom for a glimpse of modernity. 4036. Winsor, Justin, ed. The memorial history of Boston, including Suffolk County, Massachu- setts. 1630-1880. Issued under the business super- intendence of the projector, Clarence F. Jewett. Bos- ton, J. R. Osgood, 1880-81. 4 v. 1-12246 F73.3.W76 Contents. — v. 1. The early and colonial periods. — v. 2. The provincial period. — v. 3. The revolutionary period. The last hundred years, pt. i. — v. 4. The last hundred years, pt. 2. Special topics. The plan of this history originated with Clarence F. Jewett, "projector" of a number of large -scale cooperative histories during the 1870's and 8o's, who in December 1879 turned over its development to the distinguished Harvard historian and librarian, Justin Winsor. The subjects of the chapters were assigned to more than sixty writers competent in their special fields, and the editor added notes only as needed "to give coherency to the plan." The contributors included such notables as Charles Francis Adams, Jr., Henry M. Dexter, Francis S. Drake, George C. Ellis, Asa Gray, Edward Everett Hale, Thomas Wentworth Higginson, Henry Cabot Lodge, John Davis Long, Horace E. Scudder, Nathaniel S. Shaler, John Greenleaf Whittier (an 8-page poem), and Robert C. Winthrop. It has remained a classic among American city histories, 486 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES and fifty years later "the fifth volume to this en- during quartet" was published by the Boston Tercentenary Committee: Fifty Years of Boston, a Memorial Volume Issued in Commemoration of the Tercentenary of 1930, Elisabeth M. Herlihy, chair- man and editor (Boston, 1932. 799 p.). John T. Morse, Jr., a nonagenarian and the only surviving contributor to the Memorial History, contributed a review of it as a "Greeting" in this "fifth" volume. 4037. Scudder, Townsend. Concord: American town. Boston, Little, Brown, 1947. 421 p. 47-2755 F74.C8S35 "Bibliographical notes and acknowledgments": P- 39 x -395- The site of the Massachusetts Provincial Congress in 1774-75, a battleground during the American Revolution, a community ruled by all its citizens in town meeting through three centuries, and the home of Emerson, Hawthorne, Alcott, and Thoreau, Con- cord has been chosen by the author as a typical American town in whose life the larger story of America is reflected. From its first settlement in 1635 through World War II the narrative unfolds in the lives, actions, and words of its people, resur- rected by the author from minutes of town meetings, which sometimes report debates, church records, journals, and newspapers (since 1817), and placed in their regional and national setting through standard works of history and reference. 4038. Blanchard, Dorothy C. A. Nantucket land- fall. New York, Dodd, Mead, 1956. 241 p. 56-6648 F72.N2B55 Nantucket is situated about 25 miles south of the Cape Cod peninsula across Nantucket Sound, and its island history has been shaped since the early 17th century by the wind and the sea. Its isolation offered refuge to liberty-loving settlers, its waters made it a famous whaling port, and its winds now fill the sails of a popular summer resort. The bibliography (p. 236-241) indicates the numerous sources drawn upon by the author to tell the story of the island's transformation from a sheep-raising colony, its unique part in the American Revolution and the War of 1812, the partial destruction of the town by fire in 1846, the California Gold Rush which drained its young men, the discovery of "coal-oil" which brought an end to whaling, and the summer-resort "boom" which brought the railroad and ultimately the automobile and airplane. The Indians, the Quakers, the men of action — Mayhews, Folgers, Macys, Coffins — and the tales of mutiny and ship- wreck, are all part of the history of Nantucket, where a few handsome mansions, an old candle fac- tory that houses whaling relics, and a Quaker meet- ing house turned museum, are reminders of its unique and colorful past. RHODE ISLAND 4039. Richman, Irving Berdine. Rhode Island, a study in separatism. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1905. 395 p. (American common- wealths) 5—34187 F79.R53 Bibliography: P.J353H85. The author's principal object is "to point out the influence of Separatism in determining the course of events in Rhode Island during the 18th and 19th centuries." Part I, covering 1636-1689, sum- marizes the author's earlier and fuller work Rhode Island, Its Maying and Its Meaning (New York, Putnam, 1902. 2 v.). The greater part of the volume is concerned with the century from 1690 to Rhode Island's ratification of the Constitution in 1790 (p. [65]-257). There is a substantial chapter on "The Son Rebellion" of 1842 (p. [285I-307) which finally brought Jacksonian Democracy to Rhode Island. 4040. Elliott, Maud (Howe) This was my New- port. Cambridge, Mass., Mythology Co., A. M. Jones, 1944. xxiv, 279 p. 44-9074 F89.N5E4 This daughter of Julia Ward Howe won a Pulitzer prize, with Laura E. Richards, for the biography of her mother published in 1917. Here she reminisces about the Newport which has been the home of her people from the beginning, and which "has been called, not without reason, the nation's social capital." The mecca of Southerners after the Amer- ican Revolution, it became the gathering place of Boston intellectuals and New York socialites follow- ing the Civil War. Mrs. Elliott quotes freely from family letters to illustrate the growth of literary and artistic traditions, and the social life and sports of the personalities that made up Newport society. In the concluding "Part Five — Naval and Military," the author gathers together "both personal memories, and recollections which have been handed down from preceding generations, of distinguished officers who . . . have been connected with this little town where so much of our naval history has been made." CONNECTICUT 4041. Shepard, Odell. Connecticut, past and pres- ent. New York, Knopf, 1939. xix, 316, xi p. 39-27511 F94.S48 local history: regions, states, and cities / 487 With the enthusiasm of a "native son," and the impartiality of one "foreign-born" (Illinois in this instance), a professor of English at Trinity College, Hartford (1917-46), who is an author of note and a Pulitzer prize winner, sets down his interpretation of Connecticut. He describes the land and the land- scape, significant historical episodes, old graveyards, farm and town life, and the trend of recent changes, and he discriminates the individuality of communi- ties that, to a casual observer, look just alike. Dr. Shepard's observations are based on 20 years of trav- eling the highways and byways, and talking with the men, women, and children — Yankee born or im- migrant — who make up the State. Those who still crave a heavier ration of historical and topographical fact he refers to Florence S. M. Crofut's Guide to the History and the Historic Sites of Connecticut (New Haven, Yale University Press, 1937. 2 v.). 4042. Osterweis, Rollin G. Three centuries of New Haven, 1638-1938. New Haven, Yale University Press, 1953. xv, 541 p. 52-12064 F104.N6O83 Provided with funds left by the New Haven Ter- centenary Committee of 1938, the New Haven Col- ony Historical Society commissioned the author "to prepare a history of New Haven, which will be of interest to the general reader and of value to the historical scholar." This official Tercentenary His- tory of the town from the landing at Quinnipiack on April 24, 1638, to 1938 is the result. It exemplifies the best canons of present-day social history by trac- ing in all aspects of community life the evolution of a semi-rural college town into a diversified modern city with a large immigrant population. The exten- sive bibliography (p. 437-479), chronology, and glossary at the end are of special interest to the scholar. D. The Middle Atlantic States 4043. Thompson, Daniel G. Brinton. Gateway to a nation; the Middle Adantic States and their influence on the development of the Nation. Rindge, N. H., R. R. Smith, 1956. 274 p. 55-1 1 153 F106.T42 Bibliography: p. 252-260. Unlike New England, the South, and the South- west, the Middle Adantic area "has seldom been re- garded as a unit," so that this book is "in a sense an adventure in sectional history." Recognizing the similarities in spite of the different customs and cul- tures among the inhabitants of New York, Pennsyl- vania, New Jersey, and Delaware, the author has explored the influence of the region on the political, industrial, and cultural growth of the Nation, especi- ally during the colonial and early republican periods. The prevailing thought of the section has been "cos- mopolitan and sophisticated," and no other has "maintained over the years such strong financial, commercial, and personal ties with all sections." The result is only a sketch, but the author hopes to stimulate others to study more intensely these states, that "have always been the nation's Adantic gateway and have always been aware of our close ties to Western Europe." NEW YORK 4044. New York State Historical Association. History of the State of New York. New York, Columbia University Press, 1933-37. I0 v - 33-11644 F119.N65 "Select bibliography" at end of most of the chapters. Contents. — v. 1. Wigwam and bouwerie. — v. 2. Under duke and king. — v. 3. Whig and Tory. — v. 4. The new State. — v. 5. Conquering the wilderness. — v. 6. The age of reform. — v. 7. Modern party batdes. — v. 8. Wealth and commonwealth. — v. 9. Mind and spirit. — v. 10. The Empire State. The New York State Historical Association under- took the preparation and publication of this history at the suggestion of the State Executive Committee on the One Hundred and Fiftieth Anniversary of the American Revolution in 1925, which had been en- dorsed by the Regents of the University of the State of New York. The cooperative product of the "best qualified specialists" under the direction of a single editor, Alexander C. Flick, State Historian, it is similar in concept to the Commonwealth His- tory of Massachusetts (q. v.). This is the first his- tory of New York to cover the whole stretch of time from its geological beginnings, and at the same time "the whole range of human interests." 4045. Kouwenhoven, John Adee. The Columbia historical portrait of New York; an essay in graphic history in honor of the tricentennial of New York City and the bicentennial of Columbia Uni- versity. With a foreword by Grayson L. Kirk. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1953. 550 p. 53-8181 F128.3.K6 Partial Contents. — Plans and prospects, 1614- 1800. — The people get in the picture, 1800-1845. — 488 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Mid-century panorama, 1 845-1 855. — Documents of change, 1 855-1 870. — The city in motion, 1870- 1890. — Transit to the Greater City, 1 890-1 910. — "The Shapes Arise," 1910-1953. Dating from 1626 to 1953, the 900 reproductions of maps, drawings, prints, vvatercolors, paintings, and photographs that have been selected for this book are arranged in seven groups "representing successive phases in the evolution of the city and of man's consciousness of it." Brief essays and sepa- rate captions describe the pictures, and make of them an intelligible sequence unfolding the greatest urban development of the New World. 4046. Weld, Ralph Foster. Brooklyn is America. New York, Columbia University Press, 1950. 266 p. illus. 50-8082 F129.B7W42 1950 Bibliography: p. [249J-254. Brooklyn has been a familiar subject to the author since his doctoral dissertation (Brooklyn Village, 1816-1834) appeared in 1938. This is a revision and expansion of a series of feature articles which he contributed to the Brooklyn Eagle in 1948. It deals sympathetically with all the ethnic groups that have entered into the city's population from the Dutch pioneers of the 17th century to the Puerto Ricans of the 20th century. The Dutch, English, Irish, Germans, Negroes, Jews, Italians, Scandi- navians, and lesser groups have all contributed characteristics to the American society which is Brooklyn. The city not only illustrates the neces- sity for practical cooperation and tolerance but practices them sufficiently to make them work — which is a hint, perhaps, that "Brooklyn can pass on to the apprehensive peoples of the world." 4047. Nevins, Allan, and John A. Krout, eds. The greater city: New York, 1898-1948. New York, Columbia University Press, 1948. 260 p. 48-8678 F128.5.N4 Contents. — Past, present and future, by Allan Nevins. — Framing the Charter, by J. A. Krout. — From Van Wyck to O'Dwyer, by Carl Carmer. — The city's business, by Thomas C. Cochran. — The social and cultural scene, by Margaret Clapp. The distinguished editors join with three other contributors to portray the progress of Greater New York since the consolidation of the five boroughs of Manhattan, Brooklyn, the Bronx, Queens, and Richmond in 1898. During that eventful half- century the metropolis has achieved a real unity, originally lacking but now felt by its citizens amid all their diversity; it has controlled its growth and that of its region by zoning and other plans; it has created, or gready strengthened, a group of out- standing institutions of higher culture; it has given women an unprecedented place in civic affairs; and it has adopted an entirely new social oudook giving rise to practical institutions and measures of social justice and social welfare. 4048. Still, Bayrd. Mirror for Gotham: New York as seen by contemporaries from Dutch days to the present. New York, University Press, 1956. 417 p. illus. 56-11979 F128.3.S85 From books, articles, letters, and diaries the author has brought together contemporary commentaries on the New York scene, from the Florentine Gio- vanni da Verrazano's observations concerning his visit to New York Harbor in 1524, to Beverly Nichols impressions of the "international flavor of the metropolis" in the late 1940's. These com- mentaries by Americans, British, French, Italians, Germans, and Austrians describe the physical ap- pearance of the city, its commercial activities, "the standard of living, attitudes, and day-to-day be- havior of its varied population; and the ways in which the city exerted its ever widening influence in the national life." The extensive "Notes" (p. 341- 372) and "Bibliography" (p. 373-399) indicate the research that underlies the selection of the excerpts as well as the introductory passages to each selection, and the more general descriptions with which the author opens each of his ten chronological chapters. A social history of New York from 1850 to 1950, Lloyd Morris' Incredible New Yor\, High Life and Low Life of the Last Hundred Years (New York, Random House, 1951. 370 p.), emphasizes the city's habitually spectacular modes of enjoying it- self, by day and by night, indoors and out. 4049. Wilson, James Grant, ed. The memorial history of the City of New York, from its first settlement to the year 1892. [New York] New- York History Co., 1892-93. 4 v. illus., maps (part fold.), facsims. (part fold.) 1-14318 F128.3.W74 The editor of this history is widely known for his more extensive work: Appleton's Cyclopedia of American Biography, publication of which was com- pleted in 1889. In 1888 the venerable George Ban- croft suggested to the editor that he prepare "an equally trustworthy history of the city of New- York of the same character as the one that has recendy appeared concerning Boston" (no. 4036). Four years later the first volume of this comprehensive four volume history appeared. It is composed of contributions by well-known writers including, in addition to the editor, Marcus L. Benjamin, Moncure D. Conway, Berthold Fernow, Charles R. Hilde- burn, Henry Phelps Johnston, John Austin Stevens, and William L. Stone. The chronological sequence begins with the "Exploration of the North American Coast Previous to the Voyage of Henry Hudson," local history: regions, states, and cities / 489 and ends in the third volume with a review of the "Constitutional and Legal History of New- York in the Nineteenth Century." The fourth volume con- sists of chapters on special topics such as suburban areas, authors, libraries, newspapers and magazines, music, churches, statues and monuments, medicine, science, etc. 4050. McKelvey, Blake. Rochester, the water- power city, 1812-1854. Cambridge, Mass., Harvard University Press, 1945. xvi, 383 p. A45-4785 F129.R7M24 4051. McKelvey, Blake. Rochester, the flower city, 1855-1890. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1949. xvii, 407 p. 49-10783 F129.R7M23 4052. McKelvey, Blake. Rochester: the quest for quality, 1890-1925. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1956. xiv, 432 p. 56-11284 F129.R7M238 Bibliography: p. [395L-404. Written by the city historian, and supported by the municipal Kate Gleason Fund in the Rochester Public Library, these volumes represent a striking civic achievement. Each volume deals with a dis- tinct period in Rochester's history. Its initial growth was the result of its location on the Genesee River, which early supplied the water power for the milling industry and served as an important local trade route. Its proximity to Lake Ontario encouraged commerce with Canada, and the open- ing of the Erie Canal in 1825 so increased economic activity that Rochester became within a few years "the boom town in America." With the poten- tialities of water power exploited by the mid-fifties, the citizens of the "Flower City" manifested an awakening civic and cultural pride. The emergence of individual and institutional leadership led to a period of growing civic achievement in the 70's and 8o's, and culminated in "The Quest for Qual- ity" from 1890 to 1925. The history of Rochester in those 35 years is typical of many other communi- ties, and the author says that this volume "may be read as a case history of urban advance in the period of American history which saw the most intense campaigns for civic reform, the most conscientious application of Christianity to social problems, the most rapid consolidation of corporate enterprise, and the weaving of old-American and immigrant social and cultural traditions into the fabric which still underlies contemporary American civilization." 4053. NEW JERSEY Cunningham, John T. This is New Jersey, from High Point to Cape May. Maps by William M. Canfield. New Brunswick, N. J., Rut- gers University Press, 1953. 229 p. 53-11051 F134.C87 Most of the material in these pages appeared originally in The Newar\ News, which has been cited by the State of New Jersey and the Ameri- can Association for State and Local History for successive series of articles which have aroused renewed interest, both in New Jersey's history and in its contemporary scene. The 166 miles from High Point to Cape May include mountains, cities, farms, and beaches, and the author has appropriately grouped the 21 county sketches that comprise this book into sections on "The Hill Country," "The City Belt," "The Garden Spot," and "The Jersey Shore." There are brief lists of references at the end of each of the sketches. There is a pictorial map of the State and of each county by a News staff artist, and the numerous fine photographs are well reproduced. PENNSYLVANIA 4054. Buck, Solon J., and Elizabeth Hawthorn Buck. The planting of civilization in west- ern Pennsylvania. Illustrated from the drawings of Clarence McWilliams & from photographs, contem- porary pictures, & maps. [Pittsburgh] University of Pittsburgh Press, 1939. xiv, 565 p. 39-25307 F149.B83 This book is one of a series relating western Penn- sylvania history, written under the direction of the Western Pennsylvania Historical Survey sponsored by the Buhl Foundation, the Historical Society of Western Pennsylvania and the University of Pittsburgh. The authors, an outstanding archivist and his wife, survey the history of western Pennsylvania in all aspects from the coming of the setders to the War of 1 8 12 — the economy, agriculture, and indus- try, social and intellectual life, and religion and politics. They analyze the natural environment, Indian culture, the French and British colonial systems, and the European background of the setders in order to assess their impact on the civili- zation that developed on this new frontier, and laid the foundations for a vast industrial develop- ment. The book is written for the general reader, but "The Bibliographical Essay" (p. 496-537), in- dicating the large body of material which the authors have consulted, will particularly interest the scholar. 4055. Dunaway, Wayland F. A history of Penn- sylvania. 2d ed. New York, Prentice-Hall, 1948. xviii, 724 p. (Prentice-Hall history series) 48-5945 F149.D85 1948 Dr. Dunaway, professor emeritus of American 49° / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES history in the Pennsylvania State College, originally published this college textbook in 1935, and in the second edition added a chapter on events through World War II and revised the chapters on the eco- nomic and social history of the later period to incorporate recent developments. The volume is in two parts breaking at 1790; in each the earlier chapters form a chronological sequence largely con- cerned with political events, and the later ones deal first with economic topics and then with social ones such as religion and education. A chapter in Part I on "Social Life and Customs" has no counterpart in Part II, and a chapter in Part II on "Mineral In- dustries" has no predecessor in Part I. The author's method consists largely in the piling up of details, which makes some of the economic chapters in particular somewhat forbidding, but the volume covers its subject in a conscientious if rather un- imaginative fashion, and the selected bibliographies at the end of each chapter afford a guide to the very extensive literature of Pennsylvania history. 4056. Martin, Asa Earl, and Hiram Herr Shenk, eds. Pennsylvania history told by contem- poraries. New York, Macmillan, 1925. xxi, 621 p. 25-4695 F149.M37 241 extracts from carefully selected sources in Pennsylvania history have been brought together and arranged under 15 topical headings, "to illus- trate Pennsylvania's relation to all the important na- tional events. Thus the book is designed as a supplementary text, to be used in connection with any standard history of the United States in order to coordinate the history of Pennsylvania with that of the country as a whole." 4057. Stevens, Sylvester K., Ralph W. Cordier, and Florence O. Benjamin. Exploring Pennsyl- vania: its geography, history, and government. Maps by Harold Faye. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1957. 624 p. 57~ I 473 F149.S76 1957 The Pennsylvania state historian collaborates with two educators in this textbook for secondary schools, which is so comprehensive and so attractively pro- duced as to be considerably more suitable for the general reader than most publications of its kind. In addition to a geographical first chapter, a con- siderable historical survey which covers all aspects of life in Province and State, and descriptions of local, State, and national government at work, there are substantial treatments of conservation, community development, and of "How Pennsylvanians Make a Living." Besides other "teaching aids" which the general reader will probably ignore, there are lists of books and pamphlets, emphasizing State docu- ments, and of audio-visual aids when available, at the end of each chapter. 4058. Rice, Charles S., and Rollin C. Steinmetz. The Amish year. New Brunswick, N. J., Rutgers University Press, 1956. 224 p. illus. 56-10989 BX8117.P4R45 This book contains an unusual body of photo- graphs, for the Amish disapprove of "today's hasty civilization" which includes cameras, radios, and television sets along with vehicles run by gasoline and motors run by electricity. It aims to tell how the Amish of Lancaster County, Pennsylvania, really live. The chapters are arranged by months, illus- trating their characteristic activities from farm sales in January to the "simple and unadorned" Christ- mas celebration in December. The simplicity of Amish clothes, the tradition of barn-raising, the cul- tivation and curing of tobacco, the making of car- riages, the "rare dignity" of their funerals and weddings, and the occasional unchaperoned barn dance and rodeo of the young are described in de- tail, so to "bring them back in focus as people in- stead of dolls on a gift-shop shelf or stylized figures on wall-paper." The Amish are typical of various groups in the United States who maintain a tradi- tional way of life in the midst of 20th-century change. 4059. American Philosophical Society, Philadel- phia. Historic Philadelphia, from the founding until the early nineteenth century; papers dealing with its people and buildings. Philadelphia, 1953. 331 p. (Its Transactions, new ser., v. 43, pt. 1) 53 - 754° Q11.P6, n. s., v. 43, pt. 1 "Part of old Philadelphia, a map showing his- toric buildings & sites from the founding until the early nineteenth century, compiled by Grant Miles Simon," fold., in pocket. In this volume the oldest learned and scientific society in America displays the interest of its mem- bers and that of other civic and patriotic organiza- tions in the buildings of Philadelphia that have be- come a part of our national heritage. Luther P. Eisenhart, the editor of the Transactions of the American Philosophical Society, with the assistance of William E. Lingelbach, librarian of the Society, and two members of the National Park Service staff, chose the subjects and the authors of the papers. Philadelphia was the most community- minded of our colonial cities, embodying civic in- stitutions in architectural forms, and it became the early capital of the United States, culturally as well as politically. This volume, copiously illustrated with plans and halftones, describes the surviving buildings and reconstructs the destroyed ones, either prominent in themselves, like Independence Hall or the First Bank of the United States or representa- tive of the days when the Quaker City was the natural center of national life. local history: regions, states, and cities / 491 4060. Pennell, Elizabeth (Robins) Our Philadel- phia; illustrated with one hundred & five lithographs by Joseph Pennell. Philadelphia, Lip- pincott, 1914. xiv, 552 p. 14-20572 F158.5.P372 Returning to their native Philadelphia after an absence of a quarter of a century, Mr. and Mrs. Pennell produced this superb volume made up of Elizabeth's memories of her youth and the social scene in which it was passed, and of Joseph's mas- terly drawings with the lithographic crayon — "his record of the old Philadelphia that has passed and the new Philadelphia that is passing." Mrs. Pen- nell found the new city altered in appearance, pop- ulation, and culture, chaotic and distasteful, and utterly "unlike my old Philadelphia, the beautiful, peaceful town where roses bloomed in the sunny back-yards and people lived in dignity behind the plain red brick fronts of the long narrow streets." 4061. Baldwin, Leland D. Pittsburgh; the story of a city. Illustrations by Ward Hunter. Pittsburgh, University of Pittsburgh Press, 1937. xiii, 387 p. 37-21620 F159.P6B2 This book is another in a series relating western Pennsylvania history written under the direction of the Western Pennsylvania Historical Survey sponsored joindy by the Buhl Foundation, the His- torical Society of Western Pennsylvania, and the University of Pittsburgh. "An impressionistic picture of the city's develop- ment" which covers the whole span of Pittsburgh's history but deals preponderantly with the more colorful period prior to the Civil War. The indus- trial and cultural development of the city since that time is confined to three chapters at the end. By i860 "The Gateway to the West" had become an important manufacturing center and, with its 16 foundries and 25 rolling mills, was already spe- cializing in iron and steel, but "the great age of the monopolies was still in the future." The cultural, social, and political accompaniments of this basic development, resulting in a "city of quaint and amusing contrasts," are concisely sketched. MARYLAND 4062. Beirne, Francis F. The amiable Balti- moreans. New York, Dutton, 1951. 400 p. (Society in America series) 51-7387 F189.B1B543 Bibliography: p. 380-382. Distinguished for its port, monuments, medical center, row houses, and its "Belles and Beauties," Baltimore is portrayed in its social life, personalties, and institutions against a background of history since it was chartered in 1729. The author's de- scription of religious customs, the sports, the Cotillion, the Assembly, and the Supper Club con- tribute to build up a picture of Baltimore high society, which is "informal" and "at the same time both subtle and complex." Other chapters deal with Baltimore's Germans, Jews, and Negroes, and one of "Gastronomical Reflections" describes the flourishing and the latter-day decline of the famous Maryland cuisine. DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA 4063. Brown, George Rothwell. Washington, a not too serious history. Baltimore, Norman Pub. Co., 1930. 481 p. 31-3698 F194.B87 Bibliography: p. [4461-450. A well-known newspaper columnist, and writer on political, labor, economic, and governmental questions, has written an entertaining history of Washington, which reveals more of its social life than can be derived from any other single volume. He gives much attention to the rise and fall of news- papers, to racetracks, lotteries, and the slave trade, to the rending effects of the Peggy Eaton affair, and to the sociable gathering places which have since vanished from Pennsylvania Avenue. The leisured way of life which prevailed in central Washington before 19 17, and which is here described with nostalgic charm, has vanished beyond recall. 4064. Bryan, Wilhelmus Bogart. A history of the National Capital from its foundation through the period of the adoption of the organic act. New York, Macmillan, 1914-16. 2 v. 14-7093 F194.B9 Contents. — 1. 1790-1814. — 2. 1815-1878. Based mainly on original sources, this is a detailed history of Washington from the selection of the site, in 1790-91, to the adoption, in 1878, of the commis- sion form of government which has been in opera- tion ever since. Although old-fashioned in approach, and often desultory in exposition, it is honest, careful, and thorough, and still remains the principal authority for Washington history during the period which it embraces. 4065. Kiplinger, Willard M. Washington is like that. [6th ed.] New York, Harper, 1942. 522 p. 51-4631 F196.K5 1942a Bibliography: p. 493-499. A staff of newsgatherers, magazine writers, and authors of books helped the author, who as a journalist had been cognizant of the Washington scene since 1916, to write a handbook on the "basic phases of Washington in the transition from war to peace and in the first stages of war." Since that 492 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES time the men and details have changed, but the "machine as a whole runs on." It describes the workings of the Federal Government, and the func- tioning of the city which is host to the Nation and at the same time has "the earmarks of the average municipality of its size." It spells out the advan- tages and disadvantages of government service and living in Washington. Chapters on minority groups, the press, politics and lobbying, women's influence, and the "society swirl" with a yardstick for the social climbers, round out a comprehensive guide to the Nation's capital. While much of its information is now obsolete, no more comprehensive and realistic view has appeared since. E. The South: General 4066. Cash, Wilbur J. The mind of the South. New York, Knopf, 1941. vii-xi, 429, xv p. 41-1848 F209.C3 The facts of history are analyzed to show that they fail to support the popular conception of civilization in the Old South as being divided be- tween a ruling class of aristocracy and a "vague race" of poor whites. The author points to the emergence from frontier conditions of a "simple rustic figure," of intense individualism, romanticism, and puritan- ism, as the basic Southerner or "man at the center." The development of Southern society from the ante- bellum period to the late 1930's, and the psychologi- cal adjustments of Southerners to the economic, political, and social changes during those years, are traced to demonstrate that there is in the region as a whole "a complex of established relationships and habits of thought, sentiment, prejudices, standards and values, and association of ideas, which, if it is not common strictly to every group of white people in the South, is still common ... to all but rela- tively negligible ones." A paperback reprint ap- peared in 1955 (Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday. 444 p. Doubleday anchor book, A27) . 4067. Cotterill, Robert S. The Old South; the geographic, economic, social, political, and cultural expansion, institutions, and nationalism of the ante-bellum South. 2d ed., rev. Glendale, Calif., Arthur H. Clark, 1939. 354 p. 39-12977 F213.C72 1939 Bibliography: p. [333H44- An attempt to summarize the work of the genera- tion of writers who followed Ulrich B. Phillips (q. v.) and produce a pioneer synthesis of Southern history, with the development of Southern national- ism providing as much of a central theme as the story affords. Before 1820 the South expanded rap- idly, especially during the Great Migration of 1815-19, into the cotton lands of Alabama and Mississippi, but it remained a heterogeneous mass, divided by a multitude of conflicting interests. Southern nationalism, based on sentiment rather than interest, was suddenly crystallized by the Mis- souri controversy of 1820, after which Southerners felt themselves to be a separate people, and all other Americans to be aliens. The basic cause of secession "was a love for the South so intense that it may be called patriotism"; the Civil War was lost through State rights, which kept the Confederate armies undermanned and undersupplied, but the Southern people were further unified and their spirit of nationalism intensified. The bibliography (p. [333J-344) is limited to the titles which the author has found most useful in teaching the subject. 4068. Couch, William T., ed. Culture in the South. Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina Press, 1934. xiv, 711 p. 34-1154 F215.C84 The director of the University of North Carolina Press (1932-45) brought together in this sympo- sium the varying viewpoints of 31 contributors, who, as observers or participants, had long been familiar with the history of Southern culture broadly conceived, the political patterns, agrarian and industrial problems, and social conditions. This is no nostalgic retrospect of plantation aris- tocracy, slavery, and the Confederacy, but a "pic- ture of the more important aspects of life in the present South and their historic background," which takes soundings as "the broad stream of southern life, muddy and turbulent and torrential at times and places, goes on its way." The contrib- utors include, in addition to the editor, Benjamin A. Botkin, Donald Davidson, Jay B. Hubbell, George Fort Milton, Broadus Mitchell, Herman Clarence Nixon, Edd Winfield Parks, Josephine Pinckney, Charles W. Ramsdell, Rupert B. Vance, and John Donald Wade. 4069. Dodd, William E. The Old South; strug- gles for democracy. New York, Macmillan, 1937. 312 p. 37-31240 F212.D6 Only one of the projected four-volume history of the Old South by the distinguished historian and local history: regions, states, and cities / 493 educator, William E. Dodd (1869-1940), was com- pleted. The leading subjects of this volume are the "free homesteads, freedom of religion, self govern- ment and free trade" that attracted Europeans to Virginia, Maryland, and the Carolinas in the 17th century, and the struggles to maintain those free- doms, particularly against the agents of "Stuart economic nationalism," that laid the foundations of democratic government in the Old South. 4070. Eaton, Clement. A history of the Old South. New York, Macmillan, 1949. 636 p. 49-50281 F213.E2 Bibliography: p. 595-619. A general history of the section down to i860, which selects its details so as to focus attention on the way of life of the people, and emphasizes "those characteristics which are peculiarly 'Southern' and the historic processes which produce them." Its integrating theme is "the emergence of a regional culture, created by all classes of Southern society rather than by an elite, aristocratic group." The author's realistic outlook, in which sympathy and criticism are nicely balanced, is particularly in evi- dence in the three chapters (XIX-XXI) which sur- vey Southern society during the ante-bellum decade: "The Social Pyramid, in 1850-60," "Molding the Southern Mind," and "The Chrysalis Stage of Southern Culture." The "citations" at the end of each chapter include articles in periodicals, which do not appear in the bibliography. 4071. Hesseltine, William B. The South in Amer- ican history. New York, Prentice-Hall, 1943. xiv, 691 p. (Prentice-Hall history series, edited by Carl Wittke) 43-4910 F209.H48 1943 "Selected bibliography" at end of each chapter. This revision of the author's A History of the South (1936) is a college textbook which extends chronologically from the founding of Jamestown to the domestic and foreign problems of the late 1930's. It presents the main current of political developments, and other aspects of history in strict subordination to this, in a detached, impartial, and unemotional if also somewhat colorless, manner. Its thesis, according to the author, "is that the South is American: its problems have been the nation's," and its "history is a vital part of the American story." Therefore, the book's "viewpoint is national rather than Southern, and it makes no attempt to meet the oft-uttered plea for 'the truth of history from the Southern standpoint.' " 4072. A History of the South. Baton Rouge, Louisiana State University Press, 1947-53. 6v. Major George Washington Littlefield, C. S. A. (1842-1920), an "empire-building cattleman" and banker of Austin, Texas, who had a deep interest in the welfare of the South, and was convinced that no available histories adequately portrayed the Confederacy, established the Littlefield Fund for Southern History at the University of Texas in 1914. Preparations for writing a ten-volume history of the South took shape in 1937. Meanwhile a similar project had been conceived at Louisiana State Uni- versity, and the planning groups united to sponsor joindy A History of the South in ten volumes, to be edited by Wendell Holmes Stephenson and E. Merton Coulter. Four volumes are still unpub- lished, but as presendy projected they are: Vol. 2, The Southern Colonies in the Eighteenth Century, 1689-1J63, by Clarence Ver Steeg; Vol. 3, The Revolution in the South, 1763-1789, by John Rich- ard Alden; Vol. 4, The South in the New Nation, 1789-1819, by Thomas P. Abernethy; and Vol. 10, The Present South, 1913-1946, by George Tindall. 4073. (Vol. 1) Craven, Wesley Frank. The Southern colonies in the seventeenth century, 1607-1689. 1949. xv, 451 p. 49-3595 F212.C7 "Critical essay on authorities": p. 417-433. The influence of England on the economic and political development of Virginia, Maryland, and Carolina is emphasized as the author traces the be- ginnings of the "peculiar qualities" which charac- terize Southern society. 4074. (Vol. 5) Sydnor, Charles S. The develop- ment of Southern sectionalism, 181 9-1848. 1948. 400 p. 48-7627 F213.S92 "Critical essay on authorities": p. 346-381. The course of events that changed the South "from a position of great power in national affairs to the position of a conscious minority" is traced here. 4075. (Vol. 6) Craven, Avery O. The growth of Southern nationalism, 1848-1861. 1953. 433 P-. . . . 53-"47 F213.C75 "Critical essay on authorities": p. 402-419. The story of the breach that developed between the North and the South "as seen through the evolu- tion of Southern attitudes towards national events." It is "an effort to explain how the American states drifted into civil war through the breakdown of the democratic process in government." 4076. (Vol. 7) Coulter, Ellis Merton. The Con- federate States of America, 1861-1865. 1950. 644 p. 50-6319 E487.C83 "Critical essay on authorities": p. 569-612. Unlike most histories of this period, this volume does not center attention on the campaigns of the Civil War, but on secession and the problems faced 494 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES by the Confederacy in maintaining a government and supplying an army, on the reactions of Southern society to the increasing stress of war, and on the internal dissensions of the Confederacy and its at- tempts to arrive at a negotiated peace. 4077. (Vol.8) Coulter, Ellis Merton. The South during reconstruction, 1865-1877. 1947. xii, 426 p. 48-5161 F216.C6 "Critical essay on authorities": p. 392-407. This, the first volume of the series to be published, pictures the South as it was at the end of the Civil War with its economy disrupted and its government carried on by an army of occupation. The author describes "the ordinary activities of the people, as they sowed and reaped, went to church, visited their neighbors, sang their songs, and sought in a thousand ways to amuse themselves. The point of view ... is the South during Reconstruction — not Reconstruction in the South." Many direct quota- tions have been used to describe Southern reactions and desires during the period. The withdrawal of Federal troops in 1877 left the South, "within reasonable limits," to reconstruct itself. 4078. (Vol. 9) Woodward, Comer Vann. Ori- gins of the new South, 1877-19 13. 1951. 542 p. 51-14582 F215.W85 "Critical essay on authorities": p. 482-515. Against a background of the social conditions that prevailed in the South after reconstruction, the author describes the South's progress on the road back to the political prestige which it had enjoyed during the ante bellum days. 4079. Odum, Howard W. Southern regions of the United States. Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina Press, 1936. 664 p. illus. (maps) tables, diagrs. 36-10075 F215.O28 Bibliography and source materials: p. 605-620. As part of a general regional survey under the sponsorship of the Southern Regional Committee of the Social Research Council, Dr. Odum's study is limited "primarily to the eleven Southeastern States corresponding more nearly to the 'Old South,' beginning with Virginia and comprising the five pairs of states: North and South Carolina, Ken- tucky and Tennessee, Georgia and Florida, Ala- bama and Mississippi, Louisiana and Arkansas." It analyzes the natural resources, the technological development, the agricultural and industrial econ- omy, and the institutions and folkways of these regions in terms of accomplishments and potentiali- ties, and, graphically illustrating comparisons with other regions, indicates the adjustments necessary for "more effective reintegration of the southern regions into the national picture and thereby toward a larger regional contribution to national culture and unity." Eleven years later, in his The Way of the South; Toward the Regional Balance of America (New York, Macmillan, 1947. 350 p.), Dr. Odum has "tried to continue the spirit, methods, and pur- poses of the Southern Regional Study." The South, he is convinced, "affords the best testing ground for regional planning in the United States," since "re- gional imbalance is more marked" there than else- where. "The South lacks balance between agricul- ture and industry, as well as in agriculture . . . Particularly, the South is out of balance in its ratio of Negro to white and in its power to give equal opportunity to both." 4080. Osterweis, Rollin G. Romanticism and nationalism in the Old South. New Haven, Yale University Press, 1949. 275 p. (Yale histori- cal publications. Miscellany, 49) 49-7620 F213.O8 "Bibliographical note": p. [2405-260. The "cult of chivalry" was a major element in the romanticism which characterized the Southern States and contributed to differentiate them from the other regions of the United States. The author traces the origin, nature, accompaniments and sig- nificance of that cult as it was manifested in such centers as Richmond, Charleston, New Orleans, and the Southwest between the War of 1812 and 1861. "It provided the very essence" of Southern national- ism, which brought on the Civil War, and surviving slavery and the plantation system is today "the sur- viving atavism of antebellum civilization." 4081. Owsley, Frank Lawrence. Plain folk of the Old South. [Baton Rouge] Louisiana State University Press, 1949. xxi, 235 p. (The Walter Lynwood Fleming lectures in Southern his- tory, Louisiana State University) 49-11743 F213.O94 Church and county records, unpublished census reports and population schedules, the older town and county histories, and the biographies, autobi- ographies, and recollections of locally prominent citizens have been analyzed to recreate this picture of the plain country folk of the South who were neither rich planters nor poor whites. The group includes the small slave-holding farmers, the non- slaveholders who owned land which they cultivated, the herdsmen on the frontier, pine barrens, and mountains, and the tenant families whose agricul- tural production indicated thrift, energy, and self- respect. In addition to maps of six precincts in the Alabama black belt, the book contains 91 tables which illustrate the author's "sampling method" in arriving at his conclusion that these "Southern folk" were a closely knit people whose balanced economy local history: regions, states, and cities / 495 helped to sustain the South during the Civil War and reconstruction, and who contributed leadership in local politics, and a large number of individuals to the professions. They were a "vital element of the social and economic structure of the Old South." 4082. Simkins, Francis Buder. A history of the South. [2d ed., rev., enl.] New York, Knopf, 1953. xiii, 655, xxiii p. 52-8516 F209.S5 1953 Bibliography: p. 617-655. The first edition of this book was published in 1947 under the title: The South Old and New; a History, 1820-1947; the new edition is consider- ably expanded, but remains, like the first, a frank presentation of the Southern conservative's outlook on the past. It contains five new chapters (II-VI) covering the colonial period and the Revolution, which depart from the view put forward in the original edition that the region did not acquire its true sectional character until about 1820, when the Negro question first appeared as a political issue. More than half of the book deals with the period relatively neglected in general treatments — the New South from the Civil War to 1952. Although the South has made remarkable strides since World War II, the author points out that it has still not caught up with industrial and economic advances in the Nation as a whole, and retains many characteris- tics from the past which make it a region apart. 4083. Thorp, Willard, ed. A Southern reader. New York, Knopf, 1955. 760 p. illus. 53-9473. F209.T48 An upstate New Yorker, who since childhood has found the South to be "the most exotic and exciting region in America," has brought together selections from the writings of more than a hundred Southern- ers or visitors to the South and arranged them in sections concerned with the land, the rivers, the people, agriculture, education, sports and pastimes, military achievements, the Negro, violence, politics, religion, cities and towns, business and industry, and the arts. There is an essay at the beginning of each section and a commentary upon the author or his work at the head of each extract. The Preface con- cludes with a table of cross-references between sec- tions (p. ix-x). An index of the authors drawn upon, with the publications from which their selec- tions have been taken, appears at the end. 4084. Vance, Rupert B. Human geography of the South; a study in regional resources and human adequacy. 2d ed. Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina Press, 1935. xviii, 596 p. (The University of North Carolina social study series) A g r 3 6 -577 HC107.A13V3 1935 Bibliography: p. 512-579. "This volume attempts to give a synthetic treat- ment of the interaction of men and nature in the American South." It deals with the physical and cultural backgrounds of the region; with soils, forests, livestock, cotton and other staple crops, and industry; with the highland, delta, and piedmont sections as special cases; and with the influence of climate and diet on health, energy, and human adequacy. The analysis of statistical indexes of wealth, education, cultural achievement, health, law, and order gives the Southern states the lowest rank- ings in die Nation. The author pointed to regional planning as the means of reconstructing the South and bringing it up to the national level. In 1949 Dr. Vance and others connected with the Division of Research Interpretation of the Institute for Re- search in Social Science of the University of North Carolina prepared, for the Committee on Southern Regional Studies and Education of the American Council on Education, a volume for the use of secondary schools: Exploring the South (Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina Press, 1949. 404 p.) which reviews the natural and industrial resources of the South, in a much simpler manner, and recommends the development of resources through planning and cooperation on the part of communities large and small. F. The South Atlantic States: Local VIRGINIA 4085. Gottmann, Jean. Virginia at mid-century. New York, Holt, 1955. 584 p. 55-8141 F231.2.G6 Bibliographical footnotes. "Bibliographical sug- gestions and acknowledgments": p. 562-570. A French geographer, attached to the Institute for Advanced Study at Princeton, began 18 months of fieldwork in July 1953, and visited every county and city in the State. The result is this volume, copiously illustrated with photographs, maps, and graphs, "which attempts to describe the Common- wealth of Virginia as it is today and to examine 496 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES objectively its resources, its problems, and its po- tentialities." The first part deals with demography, historical development, and regional divisions. The second analyzes the use of forests, farmland, and "the underground," manufacturing, and the phenomena of location. The third part presents the problems of metropolitan growth and its effects in migrations, highways, and schools in a tone of qualified optimism. There is a final assessment of "the personality of Virginia." The whole consti- tutes the most systematic, thorough-going, and up-to- date survey of any state of the Union. 4086. Kocher, Alfred Lawrence, and Howard Dearstyne. Shadows in silver; a record of Virginia, 1850-1900, in contemporary photographs taken by George and Huestis Cook, with additions from the Cook collection. New York, Scribner, 1954. xxiv, 264 p. 54-59 J 7 F231.K75 The major part of the photographs used here were made in Virginia between 1865 and 1900 by George S. Cook, "the dean of Virginia cameramen," and his younger son Huestis, but some are by other Virginia photographers whose plates were pur- chased by the Cooks. The compilers have grouped the photographs to illustrate the towns, taverns, and the country store; the plantation and countryside; and the social life of the people of Virginia during the last half of the 19th century. Each group of photographs is provided with an introductory essay, and each photograph is accompanied by an identi- fying caption. The whole provides a remarkable graphic record of Virginia in an age of transition and readjustment. 4087. Rothery, Agnes Edwards. Virginia, the new dominion, illustrated by E. H. Suydam. New York, Appleton-Century, 1940. xiii, 368 p. 40-27455 F231.R85 A personal and impressionistic presentation, which combines a geographical with a topical ap- proach and passes lightly from past to present, find- ing much to approve in each. This smoothly writ- ten volume maintains a quiet dignity of tone and imparts a quantity of various information in pain- less manner. "The lordly quality of independence" developed by the old Virginia planter has been in- herited by the modern community — "there is no place in the United States where the people are more free from timorousness and arbitrary restrictions." The attractiveness of the volume is enhanced by Mr. Suydam's graceful drawings, although some should have been reproduced on a larger scale than they are here. 4088. Wertenbaker, Thomas J. Norfolk; historic southern port. Durham, N. C, Duke Uni- versity Press, 1931. 378 p. (Duke University pub- lications) 31-31634 F234.N8W4 The well-known Princeton professor of history wrote this volume under contract with the city gov- ernment of Norfolk. Emphasis is placed on the first two centuries of Norfolk's history, with the period from 1880 to 1930 treated in oudine, "more as a sequel to the main body of the story, than as an integral part of the history itself." Norfolk's failure to develop into a port of the first importance is ascribed to "the short-sighted policy of the Vir- ginia legislature" after 1835, which denied her ade- quate railway connections. WEST VIRGINIA 4089. Ambler, Charles Henry. West Virginia, the mountain state. New York, Prentice-Hall, 1940. xviii, 660 p. (Prentice-Hall books on his- tory, edited by C.Wittke) 40-5238 F241.A523 A History of West Virginia, published in 1933, is here rewritten to include supplementary data and new chapters on the Revolutionary and Civil War periods. Of its two parts, Part I deals with topog- raphy, early settlements, institutional beginnings, warfare, social conditions, education, and politics in western Virginia down to i860. The inhabitants of this area disapproved of Virginia's secession from the Union, and it was admitted as a separate State in 1862. West Virginia's political beginnings and in- dustrial, cultural, and economic development to 1940 are described in Part II. A "Roster of West Virginia State Elective Officers and her Senators and Representatives in Congress," and a list of "West Virginia Counties" appear in the appendixes. The author was a professor of history at West Virginia University from 191710 1947. NORTH CAROLINA 4090. Lefler, Hugh Talmage, and Albert Ray New- some. North Carolina; the history of a southern State. Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina Press, 1954. xii, 676 p. 54-7904 F254.L39 Bibliography: p. [6ri]-639. "This volume was designed to meet the require- ments of the general reader who desires a compre- hensive view of the state's history within reasonable compass," and "to serve as a text for college courses in North Carolina history." To fulfill that objec- tive the authors have presented a narrative that deals with developments and leaders in the fields of agri- culture, industry, transportation, trade, education, religion, literature, and social life, as well as with local history: regions, states, and cities / 497 military and political history. The last six chapters deal with progress during the 20th century, and the impact of outside forces such as two world wars, the depression of 1929, and the policies of the New Deal on the State's development. Lists of the "Chief Executives of North Carolina," "North Carolina Counties," and "Significant Dates," appear in the appendixes. Professor Newsome died in 1951 leav- ing approximately half of the manuscript completed. The task was finished by Dr. Lefler, who, in 1956, published the third edition of his North Carolina History Told by Contemporaries (Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina Press. 502 p.), a col- lection of contemporary accounts illustrating the political, social, and economic development of North Carolina from its colonial beginnings, to be used as a supplementary text for either high school or college courses. SOUTH CAROLINA 4091. Taylor, Rosser H. Ante-bellum South Car- olina: a social and cultural history. Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina Press, 1942. 201 p. (The James Sprunt studies in history and political science, v. 25, no. 2) 42-373 1 1 F25 1.J28, v. 25, no. 2 Bibliography: p. [i87]-i98. In this study subsidized by the Southern Regional Committee of the Social Science Research Council, the author has used manuscript diaries, letters, and other records of South Carolinians in both private and public libraries, as well as printed sources, to reconstruct a picture of society as it appeared in the decades preceding the Civil War. There are sub- stantial chapters on the life of women, medical practice, education, and religious life; but the au- thor's main emphasis is upon the determination of the majority to resist social change, and to maintain special safeguards for a social system based upon Negro slavery. 4092. Wallace, David Duncan. South Carolina, a short history, 1520-1948. Chapel Hill, Uni- versity of North Carolina Press, 1951. 753 p. 51-13847 F269.W26 Bibliography: p. [715] -721. The author, of Wofford College at Spartansburg, S. C, died after completing this reduction of his three-volume History of South Carolina, published by the American Historical Company in 1934, and the work of seeing it through the press was com- pleted by his son. Readers are referred to the larger work for citations of sources. Political de- velopments receive the greatest space, but from time to time separate chapters are allotted to economic, 431240—60 33 social, intellectual, legal, and ecclesiastical affairs. The writer strove with much success to be "an im- partial friend of the truth": "From 1832 to i860 South Carolina was in effect not so much a part of the country as a dissatisfied ally, for the last thirteen years of the period only awaiting a favor- able opportunity to dissolve the alliance." Less than a quarter of the book (p. 556-700) is devoted to the period since 1865. Among the appendixes are a list of the governors since 1669, population tables, by counties since 1790, and a list of existing counties with the dates of their creation. 4093. Molloy, Robert. Charleston, a gracious heritage; illus. by E. H. Suydam. New York, Appleton-Century, 1947. xiii, 311 p. plates. (Century city series) 47-11944 F279.C4M6 Bibliography: p. 293-297. With "its reputation for aristocratic appearances, punctilious manners, and an atmosphere of unfor- gettable individuality," and a history that goes back to the 1670's, the charm of Charleston as the center of culture and social life in South Carolina is evoked in this description of its old streets and homes, churches and historic sites, and the world-famous gardens of its environs. The author describes the leisurely life, the affability, and the characteristic speech of a people who have withstood wars, fires, and hurricanes to maintain, in the face of modernity, the distinction and personality that are Charleston. The effectiveness of the text is enhanced by the "rich and perceptive drawings" of the late Edward H. Suydam, who died seven years before the book appeared; the Century city series includes this and 13 other volumes which he illustrated. GEORGIA 4094. Coulter, Ellis Merton. Georgia, a short history. Rev. and enl. ed. of A Short His- tory of Georgia. Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina Press, 1947. 510 p. 47-2917 F286.C78 1947 "Select bibliography": p. [4561-474. A southerner by birth, the author has been a member of the history faculty of the University of Georgia since 1919 and has written many contribu- tions to Southern history. The first edition of this book appeared in 1933 to supply the need for a short history of the State. To the revised edition have been added "a great many short bits of informa- tion, and here and there longer passages, in addition to remaking the last chapter entirely, to bring the narrative up to the present." The volume covers 49§ / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES the whole span of Georgia's history from its founda- tion as an "experiment in philanthropy" to the revi- sion of the State constitution in 1945, but only a quarter of it is devoted to the years since 1865. 4095. Meadows, John C. Modern Georgia. Rev. Athens, University of Georgia Press, 1954. 352 p. _ 55-15747 F291.M4 1954 "Supplementary readings": p. 347. First published in 1946 following a request from the chancellor of the University of Georgia that "a volume be prepared describing the physical and human resources of the state," this book was also revised in 1948 and 1951. It includes much infor- mation about the composition of the population, the public schools and other educational facilities, the health and public welfare services, and the in- dustries and government of the State. Some com- parable data for the Southeast and for the United States have been given to illustrate Georgia's place in the region and in the Nation as a whole. The author, a professor of sociology at the University of Georgia, has written especially for college stu- dents, but believes that the book will interest the general reader who wants to know more about the problems of the State. FLORIDA 4096. Hanna, Kathryn T. (Abbey) Florida, land of change. [2d ed., rev. and enl.] Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina Press, 1948. 455 p. 4 8 "979 6 F311.H3 1948 Bibliography: p. 410-435. A colony first of Spain, of Britain from 1763 to 1784, and then of Spain again, Florida played an important part in the early "international maneuver- ings" of the United States. The author emphasizes the influences of foreign domination that have per- sisted in the history of Florida. The last quarter of the book deals with the period since 1865 and in- cludes a chapter on the Northern "developers" who gave Florida its modern character: Hamilton Dis- ston of Philadelphia, Henry B. Plant, and Henry M. Flagler of Cleveland. The first edition appeared in 194 1 ; this revision contains additional information on the development of the State in the 20th century. G. The Old Southwest: General 4097. Clark, Thomas D. The rampaging frontier; manners and humors of pioneer days in the South and the Middle West. Indianapolis, Bobbs- Merrill, 1939. 350 p. 39-101 15 E161.C57 Bibliography: p. [341 H50. The author, a native of Mississippi, has been head of the history department of the University of Ken- tucky since 1945. He has departed from conven- tional methodology and selected humorous stories to present a "well-rounded picture of the life of the common man," phrased, in part, in the vernacular of the backwoods frontier. The principal source for his stories is the general sporting magazine, the Spirit of the Times, edited by William T. Porter from 1835 until his death in 1858. The book covers the period from 1775 to 1850 and is confined gen- erally to the region "west of the Allegheny Moun- tains, and within the boundaries of Tennessee and south of the Yankee line in Ohio, Indiana, and Illinois ... as far west as the ends of Missouri and Arkansas." It is "highly flavored by the Kentucky influence, but so was frontier society." 4098. Dick, Everett N. The Dixie frontier, a so- cial history of the Southern frontier from the first transmontane beginnings to the Civil War. New York, Knopf, 1948. xix, 374, xxv p. 48-5379 F396.D5 Bibliography: p. 341-374. Not merely the Old Southwest and its trans- Mississippi extensions in Arkansas and Missouri, but also the southern two-fifths of Ohio, Indiana, and Illinois were setded by a great migration of the Southern people which began flowing into Ken- tucky about 1775, and did not end until the Civil War. In this whole vast area they created an essen- tially unitary, distinctively Southern frontier culture, which in many places persisted until and even after the Civil War. This culture Professor Dick of Union College, Lincoln, Neb., describes in a color- ful series of topical chapters, without attempting to discriminate regional variations or temporal suc- cessions. They include, among the more usual subjects, "The Slave as Pioneer," "Going to Mar- ket," "Good Times," "Sports," "The Frontier Town," "Professional Amusement," "The Great Revival," "Frontier Justice," "Frontier Manufac- tures," "The Frontier Woman," "Border Food," "Pioneer Dress," and "Frontier Speech." Two final chapters on "Frontier Characteristics" attempt to local history: regions, states, and cities / strike no balance between the prevailing qualities of self-reliance, versatility, native intelligence, and hospitality, on the one hand, and the evidences of 499 ferocity, shiftlessness, chicanery, and contempt for education which were inextricably mingled with them. H. The Old Southwest: Local ALABAMA 4099. Moore, Albert Burton. History of Alabama. University, Ala., University Supply Store, J 934- . 834 p. 36-5627 F326.M823 Bibliographies at end of most of the chapters. A topical history of Alabama, by a professor of history at the University of Alabama since 1923, this volume is a revision of the author's three-volume History of Alabama and Its People published in 1927. After a brief review of the local Indians and of the colonial regimes, the detailed narrative begins with "The Coming of American Pioneers" in the first decade of the 19th century, and continues to the election of 1934. The point of view is honesdy and vigorously "Dixiecrat." A final chapter sum- marizes 20th-century trends in political reform, local government, child welfare, education, prison reform, public health, and the conservation of natural resources. LOUISIANA 4100. Louisiana. Legislative Council. Louisiana; its history, people, government and economy. Baton Rouge, 1955. 285 p. {Its Research study no ;, 7) . 56-62531 JK4771.A32, no. 7 "This book presents information concerning the history, the people, the government, and the economy of Louisiana in brief, narrative form sup- plemented by valuable statistical data, thus making available in one place the highlights of the develop- ment of Louisiana." Originating in an idea of Senator Robert A. Ainsworth, chairman of the Leg- islative Council, and compiled by the Council staff under the direction of Emmett Asseff, it incor- porates information provided by twelve departments of the Louisiana Government. Among the subjects treated by the 23 chapters are "Elections," "Louisi- ana Local Government," "Fairs and Festivals," "Highways," and "State Revenues and Expendi- tures." The introduction notes seven specific State trends by comparing figures of 1939 with those of IQ 53- 4101. Tinker, Edward Larocque. Creole city: its past and its people. New York, Longmans, Green, 1953. 359 p . iU us . 53-5615 F379.N5T53 Born in New York City, the author, after his marriage to Frances McKee of New Orleans in 1916, became interested in his wife's hometown, took up writing as a career, and has become an outstanding collector and authority on the French period and the French language in Louisiana and old New Or- leans. Mr. Tinker has twice received the French Academy's Gold Medal for his writings in this field. In this book materials that have appeared in various periodicals are brought together to illustrate the amalgamation of the native population and the American influx which took place after 1803 and "the way in which each has modified the thoughts and habits of the other" so as to develop a new manner of life and to settle down into "a perfect union." With infectious enthusiasm for his sub- ject, the author describes the picturesque charac- ters of the port city— the French, the Cajuns, the free men and women of color — the succulence of Creole dishes, and the gaiety of the Mardi Gras in an informal history of "the City that care forgot." ARKANSAS 4102. Fletcher, John Gould. Arkansas. Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina Press, 1947. 421 p. 47-30331 F411.F5 "Acknowledgement": p. 403-405. In 1936 the author, a Pulitzer prize winning poet, was commissioned by the leading newspaper of Litde Rock to write The Epic of Arkansas in honor of the centenary of his native State. With a pas- sionate interest in the cultural development of his people, he wrote this book about Arkansas ten years later. In it he combines an anecdotal history with a description of the two distinct types of popula- tion, one found in the Ozark Mountain region of the northwestern half of the State, and the other in the lowlands of the southeastern half. He de- scribes the economic worlds of those types, moun- taineers and sharecroppers, and analyzes the combination of Southern and frontier characteristics which has produced the "Arkansawyer." He looks askance at the development of industry in the State by outside interests, and at the influence of Northern attitudes on racial relationships, and insists that any human progress in Arkansas must come from within. 500 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES TENNESSEE 4103. Abernethy, Thomas Perkins. From frontier to plantation in Tennessee; a study in fron- tier democracy. Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina Press, 1932. 392 p. 32-12393 F436.A17 Bibliography: p. [365 H76. Believing that the study of a single state with emphasis on its development as a community should throw new light on the growth of American de- mocracy, the author selected Tennessee which is unique as the first state to undergo the territorial status, and as the site of the earliest "organized transmontane setdements." He traces the State's growth from the Wautauga setdement in 1768 to the Civil War and throws new light on the con- flict between the interests of land speculators and the welfare of the people. "The first offspring of the West was not democracy but arrant opportun- ism." However, the popular interest finally tri- umphed under the leadership of such men as William Carroll, Governor from 1821-35, an d Andrew Johnson, Governor from 1853-57, wno "never erred from his purpose of improving the condition of the masses, politically, economically, and intellectually," and was, in fact, "the only true and outstanding democrat produced by the Old South." 4104. Govan, Gilbert E., and James W. Livingood. The Chattanooga country, 1 540-1 951: from tomahawks to TV A. New York, Dutton, 1952. 509 p. 5 2_ 53°7 F444.C4G6 Bibliography: p. [469J-488. From its domination by the Cherokee Indians, which lasted until 1838, to the development of its natural resources by the Tennessee Valley Authority, the economic and social life of the Chattanooga region is analyzed "in the light of local, state and national events ... to see how they were influenced by or contributed to the greater stream of history." The "Chattanooga country" is taken to include much of northern Georgia and Alabama and of western North Carolina as well as of southeastern Tennessee, and this work therefore escapes the cramping effects which artificial boundaries often exert upon local histories. Economic and social developments are given considerably more attention than political ones. 4105. Capers, Gerald M., Jr. The biography of a river town; Memphis: its heroic age. Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina Press, 1939. 292 p. 39-27481 F444.M5C3 "Bibliographical statement": p. [2695-279. This "comprehensive outline of the history of Memphis before 1900" was submitted to Yale Uni- versity in 1936 as a doctoral dissertadon. The author chose his subject because of his conviction that cities have been neglected as approaches to the study of regions, and "are often more representadve of fundamental economic interests than artificial political divisions like the state." Connected with the upper valley by the Mississippi River trade, and with the South by the local agriculture, Memphis was "born in 18 19 of the westward movement and of cotton" and had its boom years in the 1840's and 50's. "Figuratively and literally, the South met the West in Memphis." Memphis neglected public sanitation and so lost its relative position among American cities through the terrible yellow fever epidemics of the 1870's. KENTUCKY 4106. Clark, Thomas D. A history of Kentucky. New York, Prentice-Hall, 1937. xv, 702 p. (Prentice-Hall history series, C. Wittke, editor) 37-16054 F451.C63 Bibliography: p. 625-666. "Kentucky has been viewed as an important factor in the settlement of both the South and the trans-Mississippi West." Its history, from the con- flict between English and French for the control of the western lands which later became Kentucky to the middle 1930's, is traced in this college textbook, which attempts to set forth "the salient points of Kentucky's social, economic, and political growth." The Appendix includes a list of "The Governors of Kentucky." 4107. Davenport, Francis Garvin. Ante-bellum Kentucky, a social history, 1 800-1 860. Ox- ford, Ohio, Mississippi Valley Press, 1943. xviii, 238 p. (Annals of America, v. 5) 43-1754^ F455.D36 "Bibliography of manuscript sources": p. [227]- 228. The first sixty years of the 19th century witnessed a rapid development of education, medicine, science, religion, the arts, and literature in Kentucky — an important outpost of civilization. The author adds a caution that this cultural progress was not evenly distributed in an area which contained both rich and poor, the ignorant and the learned, the conserva- tive and the liberal, and the religious and the irre- ligious. He examines the elements of culture among the country folk, the townspeople, and in the colleges. In education he notes Kentucky's em- phasis on the fields of medicine, surgery, botany, geology, and chemistry, and the activity of distin- guished physicians, teachers, and naturalists. Social reform found expression in new legislation and local history: regions, states, and cities / 501 state-controlled institutions for the less fortunate members of society. Cultural progress became articulate in a small group of artists and a much larger number of essayists, poets, journalists, and historians. All gave distinction to this period in Kentucky history, which "resembled the life of the growing nation and was part of it." MISSOURI 4108. Gist, Noel P., and others, eds. Missouri, its resources, people, and institutions. Colum- bia, Curators of the University of Missouri, 1950. 605 p. 50-62749 F466.G4 Includes bibliographies. This book, prepared by the University of Mis- souri, "and presented to the people of Missouri as a public service," is the joint work of a number of specialists, writing in their respective fields of com- petence, to "describe and interpret Missouri's natu- ral and human resources, to indicate significant changes that are occurring in various fields, and to appraise realistically the trends and situations which should be of concern to the people of the State." Its 28 chapters deal with such topics as water resources, mines and minerals, population, cities and towns, agriculture, manufacturing, public utilities, courts and administrative tribunals, social services, librar- ies, and the arts. I. The Old Northwest: General 4109. Atherton, Lewis Eldon. Main Street on the Middle Border. Bloomington, Indiana Uni- versity Press, 1954. xix, 423 p. 54-7970 F354.A8 Recalling the social activities of the rural and vil- lage life to which he was born, and the stories, his- torical and otherwise, exchanged around the coun- try store stove, the author writes with affection a cultural and economic history of midwestern coun- try towns, limited for the most part to less than 5,000 population, during the years from 1865 to 1950. The Middle Border is defined as the region embrac- ing the states of Ohio, Indiana, Illinois, Missouri, Michigan, Minnesota, Wisconsin, and Iowa and the eastern farming fringe of Kansas, Nebraska, and the Dakotas. A professor of history at the University of Missouri since 1946, the author has drawn upon country newspapers, reminiscences, autobiographies, and some manuscript sources, as well as representa- tive fiction, to produce a solidly based regional syn- thesis. The prevalent sentiment of decline and decay, the author holds, is a consequence of false values and a materialistic doctrine of progress viewed as growth in numbers and real -estate prices; the amenities and possibilities of life in small, semi-rural communities have been allowed to lapse through dis- illusionment and lethargy. 41 10. Baldwin, Leland D. The keelboat age on western waters. With chapter decorations by Harvey B. Cushman. Pittsburgh, University of Pittsburgh Press, 1941. xiv, 268 p. 41-10342 F351.B18 Bibliography: p. [z^]-!^. One of a series from the Western Pennsylvania Historical Survey sponsored jointly by the Buhl Foundation, the Historical Society of Western Pennsylvania and the University of Pittsburgh, this book, in its original form, was a dissertation sub- mitted to the University of Michigan in 1932. It deals, for the most part, with the three decades be- fore the coming of the steamboat (1783-1815) when keelboats, barges, and other varieties of watercraft were used on the Mississippi, the Ohio, and their tributaries to transport goods from the Great Valley to eastern markets via New Orleans, and immigrants in their search for new homes. Chapters are de- voted to the "Art of Navigation" in shallow, wind- ing, and snag-infested waters, the "River Pirates" who were largely eliminated by 18 12, and "Ship- building" for oceanic commerce. The boatmen, a robust and colorful tribe, "brought from New Orleans and Pittsburgh to the crude villages of the West some of the comforts and fashions of life, as well as the necessities," and the old "Mrs. Sippi" with her thousand tentacles "bound the nation into an indissoluble union." 41 1 1. Bond, Beverley W. The civilization of the Old Northwest; a study of political, social, and economic development, 1788-1812. New York, Macmillan, 1934. 543 p. 34-1805 F479.B69 Following the American Revolution the neces- sity of attracting settlers to the area between the Ohio, the Mississippi, and the Great Lakes to pro- tect it from Indian and foreign depredation became apparent. Once the lands were ceded to the Nation by Virginia, Connecticut, New York, and Massa- chusetts, Congress recognized the opportunity to work out a policy of land distribution on a demo- 502 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES cratic basis with like terms to all applicants, and an ultimate "position of equality with the original states." The Land Ordinance of 1785 and the Gov- ernment Ordinance of 1787 implemented that policy, and the blending of setders from New England, the Middle States, and the South with other racial ele- ments created a "hard-headed, democratic, and aggressive population" in the Territory of the United States northwest of the Ohio. The central theme of this book is "the development, institutional, social, and economic, of the civilization of the Old North- west" in the period between 1788 and 1812, during which the Northwest Territory was divided into the state of Ohio, and the territories of Indiana, Michigan, and Illinois. 4112. Buley, Roscoe Carlyle. The Old Northwest; pioneer period, 1 815-1840. Bloomington, Indiana University Press, 1951 [ c i95o] 2 v. 52-6466 F484.3.B94 1 95 1 "Bibliographical essay": v. 2, p. [627] -646. Published by the Indiana Historical Society as a contribution to the Sesquicentennial of Indiana Ter- ritory in 1950, this history brought honor to the author, and to the society as "the first historical society ever to publish a Pulitzer Prize winner." A native of Indiana, steeped in its tradition and lore, the author has written a detailed and documented account of the quarter-century that witnessed the flow of settlers into the Old Northwest following the War of 1812, the admission of Indiana, Illinois, and Michigan to statehood, and the organization of the new Territory of Wisconsin. The progress of setdement, economic development, and politics is recorded in chronological chapters, while large topi- cal ones deal with pioneer life, medicine, transpor- tation, education, religion, and literature and science. The author has freely used the words of contemporaries and has employed colloquialisms and expressions of the period in his own text, in order "to capture something of the attitudes and beliefs, struggles and way of life of the time and place," in this "balanced summary of the record." 41 13. Garland, John H., ed. The North American Midwest, a regional geography. New York, Wiley, 1955. 252 p. 55-9 8 45 F 354- G 3 "Selected bibliography": 243-245. Fifteen topical and regional specialists have con- tributed to this enthusiastic book. The Midwest is described as an inner zone including the West- Central Lowland, the East-Central Lowland, the Eastern Lower Great Lakes, and the Upper Missis- sippi Valley, encircled by a periphery comprising the Upper and Lower Great Lakes, the Ohio Valley, the Ozark Upland, and the Lower and Upper Mis- souri Valley. The region is uniquely distinguished among continental interiors by its distance from the ocean, its diversity of transportation routes, its large metropolitan centers, its materials and mar- kets for manufacturing, the productive capacity of its soils, its abundance of coal, iron, and other min- erals, its unequaled water resources in the Great Lakes and the Mississippi, uniformly favorable climate for the production of high-yielding crops, and "the most optimistic people in the world." 41 14. Hatcher, Harlan H. The Great Lakes. New York, Oxford University Press, 1944. 384 p. 44-94 1 9 F551.H36 Bibliography: p. 371-374. A native Ohioan, the author rose from instructor to vice-president of the University of Ohio (1922- 51), and has written several books focused on the region of the Great Lakes. Forming the boundary between the United States and Canada, the Great Lakes are spanned by eight international bridges and a tunnel, which link the countries "in amity at the key points on the Lakes." The subject of this book is "the story of this mighty region — its formation, its discovery, the struggle for its posses- sion, its exploitation, the rise of its cities, the history and romance of its ships." Part I is concerned with the discoverers from Cartier to La Salle; Part II with international conflict from de la Mothe- Cadillac's foundation of Detroit to the Peace of Ghent; Part III with setdement and the spread of navigation; and Part IV with the rise of the mineral industries which have given the Lakes their modern economic character. 41 15. Hubbart, Henry Clyde. The older Middle West, 1 840-1 880, its social, economic and political life and sectional tendencies before, dur- ing and after the Civil War. New York, Appleton- Century, 1936. 305 p. 36-11022 F484.3.H885 Bibliography: p. 278-292. By the older Middle West the author means the southern portions of Ohio, Indiana, and Illinois, "the region of the river valleys," the setdement of which, primarily by upland southerners and second- arily by Pennsylvanians, was complete by 1840. Despite the book's comprehensive tide, there are only four chapters on the social, cultural, and eco- nomic characteristics of the area, and the main theme is the reaction of the "Progressive Western De- mocracy" of the region to the sectional struggle inaugurated by the Mexican cessions of 1848. "Here was the zone of doubtful states for whose control" the Southern masters of the Democratic Party contended with the new Republicanism which arose in the Lake Region; here arose "copper- headism," not a pro-Southern movement but one local history: regions, states, and cities / 503 in which "thwarted westerners showed their sec- tional discontent;" and here protests against tri- umphant Republicanism went on continuously throughout the Gilded Age. The volume was pub- lished from a fund contributed to the American Historical Association by the Carnegie Corporation of New York. 4 1 16. Hutton, David Graham. Midwest at noon. Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1946. xv, 350 p. A46-1352 F354.H8 Mr. Hutton, who was on an official mission in the United States during World War II, has pro- duced one of the few books by an Englishman on an American region. Fascinated by the Midwest and its people, and finding few books "that told all about the region, its history, and its way of life," he has set down his "own impressions of the Mid- west as it was, as it is, and as it yet may be." He leaves the reader to decide how much of what he records is peculiar to the region and how much is "just plain American." His exposition combines historical perspectives, economic analyses, personal observations, psychological characterizations, and social interpretations in about equal measure to make a rich and sympathetic volume which resists summary. So, the author finds, does the maturing Midwest itself: "its distinctive characteristics are those of its richly varied peoples, their neighbor- liness, their tolerance and conformity to one broad way of life, whatever they do for a living." 4 1 17. Power, Richard Lyle. Planning Corn Belt culture; the impress of the upland south- erner and Yankee in the Old Northwest. Indian- apolis, Indiana Historical Society, 1953. xvi, 196 p. (Indiana Historical Society, Publications, v. 17) 54-618 F484.3.P6 F521.I41, v. 17 An original interpretative study which regards the settlement of the Old Northwest as a kind of culture conflict between upland southerners and Yankees from New England and New York. "The Southerners got there first" — indeed, had a forty years start, but after 1830 came the "Yankee in- vasion" with its cultural imperialism mingling re- ligious, economic, and political motives. The author has drawn upon the papers of the American Home Missionary Society in the Chicago Theologi- cal Seminary, "a sort of Puritan equivalent of the Jesuit Relations," for interesting expressions of the viewpoint of the self-conscious New Englanders. Chapter IV assembles some of the consequences of "Living Side by Side," in farmways, shelter, cook- ery, language, and preaching. The author con- cludes that while by 1865 the Yankee felt that he had swept everything before him, and had indeed gained a tempered victory, in fact "neither strain won out by subordination of the other, but both were conquered as it were by the region itself, were taken in hand by a process of blending, in which the final outcome was neither Yankee nor Southern, but 'Western.' " J. The Old Northwest: Local OHIO 41 18. Hatcher, Harlan H. The Western Reserve; the story of New Connecticut in Ohio. In- dianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill, 1949. 365 p. 49-9476 F497.W5H27 "Acknowledgments and bibliographical note": P- 345-347- The author's subject is the part of northeastern Ohio on Lake Erie which was "reserved" by Con- necticut in 1786 when she ceded her other claims to western land, and retained until 1800 when, by agreement with the United States Government, ju- risdiction was transferred to the Nation. It com- prised some 5000 square miles. The author traces the history of the Western Reserve from its first settlement by a group from Connecticut under the leadership of Moses Cleaveland in 1796 to the mid- 20th century. He points out that the New England influence is still found in the architecture and in the names of the older towns and villages, although it has been tempered by the assimilation of a foreign population attracted by the growth of the great in- dustries which have given the region a strategic position at the heart of America. The publication of this volume coincided with the centennial of the Western Reserve Historical Society, which owns much of the source material used in its compilation. 41 19. Ohio. Development and Publicity Commis- sion. Ohio, an empire within an empire. 2d ed. Columbus, 1950. 214 p. 51-62008 F496.O35 1950 "References and additional sources of informa- tion:" p. 213-214. "The Ohio Development and Publicity Commis- sion was created to develop and to disseminate in- formation concerning the agricultural, historical, in- 504 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES dustrial and recreational advantages and attractions of the State of Ohio." This book, the first edition of which appeared in 1944, was sponsored by the Com- mission for those purposes. A group of specialists in their fields have contributed to the volume with Guy- Harold Smith, chairman of the Department of Geography at Ohio State University, as editor-in- chief. The full-page maps are used to illustrate dis- tribution among the counties of population, agricul- tural products, manufactures, natural resources, transportation, cultural institutions, and various public services. A final chapter summarizes the characteristics of Ohio that are representative of the Nation as a whole, and concludes that "every phase of the State's life displays a legacy or benefaction from other parts of the country and of the world." The end matter includes a list of "Museums and Historical Points" (p. 187-90) and an "Organiza- tion Chart, State Government." 4120. Roseboom, Eugene H., and Francis P. Weis- enburger. A history of Ohio. Edited and illustrated by James H. Rodabaugh. [New ed.] Columbus, Ohio State Archaeological and Histori- cal Society, 1953. 412 p. 54-265 F491.R76 1953 Bibliography: p. 385-402. The first edition of this history was published in 1934 in the Prentice-Hall history series, edited by Carl F. Wittke. Published for the Sesquicentennial of Ohio, this revision gives greater emphasis to social and cultural history, covers the period since 1934, and adds "to the knowledge of the State's intrinsic importance and of its significant role as one of the states of the American Union." The bibliographies have been expanded and the work provided with a remarkable body of illustrations — so many, in fact, that the new edition has been printed on slick paper and in larger format. 4 12 1. Wittke, Carl F., ed. The history of the state of Ohio. Published under the auspices of the Ohio State Archaeological and Historical So- ciety. Columbus, Ohio, 1941-44. 6 v. 41-7471 F491.W78 Contents. — 1. The foundations of Ohio, by Beverley W. Bond, Jr. 1941. — 2. The frontier state, 1 803-1 825, by William T. Utter. 1942. — 3. The passing of the frontier, 1825-1850, by Francis P. Weisenburger. 1941. — 4. The Civil War era, 1850- 1873, by Eugene H. Roseboom. 1944. — 5. Ohio comes of age, 1873-1900, by Philip D. Jordan. 1943. — 6. Ohio in the twentieth century, 1900-1938, planned and compiled by Harlow Lindley. 1942. This definitive history was published with the financial assistance of the General Assembly of Ohio, "in connection with Ohio's observance of the 150th anniversary of the organization of the North- west Territory and the establishment of civil gov- ernment within its limits under the Ordinance of 1787." It is the result of the cooperative efforts of a group of outstanding scholars under the editor- ship of the well-known head of the Department of History at Ohio State University (1925-37), later professor of history at Oberlin College (1937-48). "Attention has been given in each volume to the more or less familiar aspects of Ohio's political his- tory, but in addidon, a real effort has been made to stress the economic, social, cultural and intellectual progress of the State. Art, architecture, religion, journalism, amusements, the theater and other phases of cultural and intellectual activities have received their fair share of emphasis." In volume V, in fact, only four of the 13 chapters are concerned with politics, and of these two, on "Politics and Big Business" and "Bosses and Boodle," are concerned with its social-history connections. Volume VI comprises 17 chapters by 15 specialists, the last, appropriately enough, being one by Dr. Lindley on "The Sesquicentennial Celebration." Each volume is separately indexed, and, while there are footnote references, there are no bibliographies. 4122. Harlow, Alvin F. The serene Cincin- natians. New York, Dutton, 1950. 442 p. (Society in America series) 50-10456 F499.C5H35 Bibliography: p. 422-428. A city of firsts in many of its cultural achieve- ments and of superlatives in some of its public services and industrial performance, Cincinnati was known as the "Queen City of the West" by 1834. The author thinks that the serenity found in Cin- cinnati is born of "the experience and philosophical composure of age, informed by historical conscious- ness, and with a strong blend of German imper- turbability." Jolted occasionally by the discovery of graft and dishonesty in government and the slack- ening of public morals, Cincinnatians still face and solve their problems in a spirit of tranquility which, the author suggests, may become a casualty of the near future, since "poise is increasingly difficult to maintain in a global scientific arena." Much of the material for this book has been "garnered from Cincinnati newspapers of the past." INDIANA 4123. Esarey, Logan. A history of Indiana. In- dianapolis, B. F. Bowen, 1918. 2 v. (1148 p.) 19-1811 F526.E742 Contents. — 1. From its exploration to 1850. — 2. From 1850 to the present. A native of Indiana, Logan Esarey (1873-1942) local history: regions, states, and cities / 505 grew up in its southern hills at a period when many of the people who had contributed to the State's early history were still alive. As a teacher he was noted for his classes in Indiana and Middle West history, and for the outstanding collection of public documents, newspapers, diaries, letters, and other materials which he collected for the Indiana Uni- versity Library. This scholarly history (1st edition 1914) is based, for the most part, on primary sources, but the author complained that documen- tary material for Indiana had not been published by the State. No substantial changes were made in the second edition. From Chapter XI on, chapters of political narrative are interspersed with others on economic or social matters, and the organization of the book becomes rather desultory after 1865 is reached. Esarey's love for his native State found expression in a group of penetrating essays about pioneer life, five of which were published after his death, and have been much appreciated. Some ten years later another and very handsome edition of The Indiana Home ( Bloomington, Indiana Uni- versity Press, 1953. 121 p.) was designed and illustrated by Bruce Rogers. 4124. Martin, John Bardow. Indiana, an inter- pretation. New York, Knopf, 1947. xn » 300, xvii p. 47-1 1581 F526.M25 Bibliography: p. 291-300. A well-known crime reporter, whose first book was on the Upper Peninsula of Michigan, has set down here his interpretation of "the Hoosier char- acter, the Hoosier thought, the Hoosier way of living." His data are in part gleaned from inter- views with newspapermen, laborers, manufacturers, undertakers, retired madames, and a great variety of run-of-the-mill citizens, and his book, he says is journalism — but if so, it is assuredly journalism of a superior stamp. He opens with an original device: "Indiana, as a whole, viewed within the framework of a Hoosier institution, the State Fair." Three his- torical sections culminate in "The Golden Age" when, with James Whitcomb Riley, Booth Tarking- ton, and others, Indiana had a literature of its own. Recent tendencies are presented through the diverse personalities of four representative "Gendemen from Indiana." Indiana is found to be "a place where the American kind of capitalistic democracy grew up in its native form," while "America is a larger Indiana." 4125. Thornbrough, Gayle, and Dorothy Riker, comps. Readings in Indiana history. In- dianapolis, Indiana Historical Bureau, 1956. 625 p. (Indiana historical collections, v. 36) 57-62616 F521.T4 F521.I38, v. 36 431240—60 34 This anthology is based upon an earlier Readings in Indiana History compiled by a committee of the Historical Section of the Indiana State Teachers' Association and published by Indiana University in 1914. The selections are relatively short and in- clude extracts not only from original sources but also, in lesser part, from recent scholarly writings including magazine articles. The extracts are grouped in 32 chronological or topical chapters, and many of them are preceded by brief introductions. The compilers regret the lack of "a good one- volume history of Indiana which can be read in conjunction with the Readings." They also find a dearth of suitable material for the later history of the State, and have in fact only 40 very miscellaneous pages on the years since 1865. ILLINOIS 4126. Illinois. Centennial Commission. The cen- tennial history of Illinois, Clarence Wal- worth Alvord, editor-in-chief. Springfield, 111., 1917-20. 6 v. {Its Publications, Introductory vol. and vol. 1-5) F541.I25 Contents: 4127. (Introductory vol.) Illinois in 1818, by Solon Justus Buck. 1917. 362 p. 17-17320 F545.B92 412; 4129. 4130. 4131. (Vol. 1) The Illinois country, 1673-1818, by Clarence Walworth Alvord. 1920. 524 p. 20-27288 F541.A47 (Vol. 2) The frontier State, 18 18-1848, by Theodore Calvin Pease. 1918. 475 p. 19-27083 F545.P34 (Vol. 3) The era of the Civil War, 1848- 1870, by Arthur Charles Cole. 1919. 499 p. I9-733 2 F545.C68 (Vol. 4) The industrial State, 1870-1893, by Ernest Ludlow Bogart and Charles Man- fred Thompson. 1920. 553 p. 20-27316 HC107.I3B6 4132. (Vol. 5) The modern Commonwealth, 1 893-1 9 1 8, by Ernest Ludlow Bogart and John Mabry Mathews. 1920. 544 p. 20-27159 F546.B67 These volumes on the history of Illinois from the coming of the first Europeans to the close of World War I were published in observance of the one hundredth anniversary of the admission of Illinois into the Union. The authors, a distinguished group, 506 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES were all members of the faculty of the University of Illinois at the time the project was initiated. Dr. Buck's introductory volume presents a survey of the social, economic, and political life of Illinois at the close of the territorial period, followed by a detailed history of the process of admission. In the last two volumes the chapters of economic history and de- scription are written by Prof. Bogart, and the politi- cal ones by his collaborators. Each volume has a substantial bibliography, and the latter ones have appendixes with tables of economic statistics. This was the first of the cooperative and scholarly multi- volume state histories; the example of Illinois has since been followed by Massachusetts, New York, and Ohio, and, in a project as yet only very partially completed, by New Jersey. 4133. Pease, Theodore Calvin. The story of Il- linois. [Rev. ed.] Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1949. xviii, 284 p. 49-1 1 105 F541.P36 1949 "This volume is an attempt to present a short, readable history of the state of Illinois, embodying the results of the latest research." The first edition which appeared in 1925 was based "to a considerable extent on the five-volume Centennial History of Illinois." This new edition was published as a con- tribution to the golden anniversary of the founding of the Illinois State Historical Society of which the author, who died in 1948, was a director for many years and president from 1946-47. Additions in the fields of British and French relations with the Illinois country have been made in this revision and the final chapter, completed by Mrs. Pease, covers another quarter century in Illinois' development. 4134. Dedmon, Emmett. Fabulous Chicago. New York, Random House, 1953. 359 p. 53-6921 F548.5.D4 Based on source materials found in the Chicago Historical Society, and in the files of certain Chicago newspapers, this narrative of social life in Chicago from 1835 to 1930, with an "Epilogue" that sum- marizes to the date of publication, also contains in its acknowledgments the names of some of the city's first families. Here are lively descriptions of such matters as the social dictatorship of Mrs. Potter Palmer, invitations to whose New Year's Day recep- tions determined the makeup of high society; of the social accompaniments of the unforgettable World's Fair of 1893, when the Infanta Eulalia of Spain and 28 million others invaded the White City; and the low life along the Levee, where were to be found the Everleigh Club and, until they were transferred to the Coliseum, the First Ward Balls of Aldermen Coughlin and Kenna. Educated in Chicago, the author has been associated with Chicago newspapers since 1940 as columnist, critic, and editor, and he writes with an obvious zest for his subject. The many interesting illustrations are obtained from the Chicago Historical Society and the Newberry Library. 4135. Lewis, Lloyd, and Henry Justin Smith. Chicago, the history of its reputation. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1929. xii, 508 p. 29-17674 F548.3.L67 "Sources": p. 495-497. The lethal gangster wars of the 1920's gave Chi- cago a worldwide notoriety which troubled many of its more sensitive citizens, and which was evidendy responsible for the sub-title of this briskly anecdotal sketch of municipal history by two prominent local journalists. To them the city's vitality and joy in life, its absorption in the future, its incessant rebuild- ing of itself, and its herculean business enterprise are the essential Chicago, while political corruption and unpunished crime are only superficial and transient phenomena. "Four and a half million people, counting themselves part of metropolitan Chicago, were going somewhere and intended to get there." Mr. Lewis takes the story to the World's Fair of 1893, and Mr. Smith carries it on to the municipal election of 1928. 4136. Pierce, Bessie Louise. A history of Chicago. New York, Knopf, 1937-57. 3 v - 37-8801 F548.3.P54 Bibliography: v. 1, p. [4291-455; v. 2, p. 515-547; v- 3- P- [547J-575- This history is related to a wide range of studies in the sociology, economics, and politics of the Chicago metropolitan area conducted by the Social Science Research Committee of the University of Chicago, but only three of its projected four volumes have appeared. The author has served as a pro- fessor of American history at the University of Chicago since 1929. The first volume is the story of a frontier community from 1673 to 1848, and "typifies the life of the Middle West before 1850." The second begins with the construction of Chicago's first railroads and ends just before the Great Fire of 1871. The third proceeds from the fire, which resulted in a material loss estimated at $196,000,000, and the amazing rebuilding which followed it, to the World's Fair of 1893, which marked "a new epoch in the aesthetic growth not only of Chicago but of the nation." Each volume has valuable tabular appendixes. Focusing trends on national affairs as they affected Chicago, these volumes are also a well-documented contribution to the history of the United States. At the time of the Century of Progress Fair in Chicago, Professor Pierce edited a volume containing impressions of local history: regions, states, and cities / 507 Chicago by 47 travelers, foreign and domestic, from Pere Marquette to Morris Markey: As Others See Chicago, Impressions of Visitors, 1673-1933 (Chi- cago, University of Chicago Press, 1933. 540 p.). A brief sketch of the author precedes each selection. MICHIGAN 4137. Bald, Frederick Clever. Michigan in four centuries. New York, Harper, 1954. xiii, 498 p. 54-8934 F566.B2 "A selected list of books on Michigan history:" p. 477-481. Long the site of a fur trade between the Indians and the French or British, the territory that became the State of Michigan in 1837 was populated by settlers from New York, New England, and Europe. This book resulted from the interest of the son of a Swedish immigrant in the history of his State. Rising from poverty to the presidency of the State Normal College, and deploring the neglect of state history in the schools, Dr. John M. Munson left his estate for the publication of a history of Michigan, and a history of education there. Published under the direction of the Michigan Historical Commis- sion, this book incorporates 21 years of research by the author, a member of the Department of History at the University of Michigan. "An essential for good citizenship" in a state with so large a popu- lation born elsewhere, this history "is directed to the adult as well as to the youthful resident of the state." Six years prior to the publication of this book Dr. Milo Milton Quaife, described by Dr. Bald as the "dean of historians of Michigan and the Old North- west," cooperated with Dr. Sidney Glazer in writing "a comprehensive history of Michigan suited to the needs of class room students and of mature readers generally": Michigan: from Primitive Wilderness to Industrial Commonwealth (New York, Prentice- Hall, 1948. 374 p. Prentice-Hall history series). 4138. Pound, Arthur. Detroit, dynamic city; il- lustrated by E. H. Suydam. New York, Appleton-Century, 1940. 397 p. 40-27234 F574.D4P7 Bibliography: p. 373— [378J A native of Michigan, an experienced journalist, and the author of several studies of industrial Amer- ica, Mr. Pound was well-equipped to write this narrative sketch of the rise of Detroit from a fur- trading outpost in the early 18th century to the posi- tion of automobile capital of the world in the mid- 20th. The city has been fortunate in its location at a strategic point by Antoine de la Mothe Cadillac in 170 1, and in the leadership of men such as Judge Augustus B. Woodward, the "driving spirit" in rebuilding the city after the devastating fire of 1805; in the foresight of Governor Lewis Cass who "gave courage to the territory and tone to society;" and in Henry Ford's determination to supply "cheap highway transportation for the common man." The citizens, throughout the history of Detroit, have faced consuming disasters, economic depres- sions, and labor disturbances with the energy and effectiveness characteristic of a vigorous people. WISCONSIN 4139. Raney, William Francis. Wisconsin; a story of progress. New York, Prentice-Hall, 1940. xvii, 554 p. (Prentice-Hall books on his- tory, edited by Carl Wittke) 40-7607 F581.R32 "Selected bibliography" at end of each chapter. Long associated with education in Wisconsin, the author has been chairman of the Department of History and Government at Lawrence College, Appleton, since 1946. This history is designed "to provide a readable and up-to-date summary of the growth of Wisconsin from the arrival of the first European visitor in 1634 down to the present." After the organization of the Northwest Territory, nearly fifty years passed before settlers from the northern states, with a scattering from the South, reached the frontier that became the State of Wis- consin in 1848. The next fifty years witnessed the flow of immigrants into the State from Germany, Norway, Sweden, Ireland, and other countries, the building of a network of railroads, and the exploi- tation of the lumber resources. While wheat pro- duction declined after 1870, Wisconsin took the leadership of the Nation in dairying. Enlarging the functions of government in the interest of all its citizens, Wisconsin has become synonymous with progressive social experiments in government. The appendixes include a list of "Governors of Wiscon- sin," "Wisconsin Votes in Presidential Elections," and statistics of the "Population of Wisconsin" from 1830 to 1930. 4140. Still, Bayrd. Milwaukee, the history of a city. Madison, State Historical Society of Wisconsin, 1948. xvi, 638 p. 49-7868 F589.M6S8 "Bibliographical note": p. 601-610. The founder of Milwaukee was Solomon Juneau, a young French-Canadian fur-trader who began his residence there in 18 18, and turned town-promoter in 1833. Milwaukee was incorporated as a village in 1838, had grown into a town within a decade, and was a city by 1870. Situated some 80 miles north of Chicago on the shore of Lake Michigan, and famous for its breweries even before the Civil War, 508 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES it is now one of the chief ports on the Great Lakes and one of the world's leading centers for the manu- facture of heavy machinery. In 1837 the first issue of the Milwaukee Sentinel asserted that "rigid en- forcement of and prompt obedience to the popular will" was "the most vital principle of Representative Government." This philosophy has persisted and has made of Milwaukee, with its large foreign popu- lation, a laboratory for liberal social and political movements. Dr. Still, a professor of history at Wis- consin State College from 1932 to 1938, published in the State's centennial year this full-scale history covering all aspects of the city's development. Since monographic material was lacking, it represents a noteworthy work of compressing voluminous pri- mary sources. Milwaukee's century of city building, he concludes, "bore witness to the contribution of the sovereign citizen in underwriting urban growth." Population tables and a series of sketch maps illus- trating that growth appear in the Appendix. MINNESOTA 4141. Blegen, Theodore C. Building Minnesota. Boston, Heath, 1938. xii, 450, xvi p. illus. 38-29043 F606.B66 "Materials for further reading and study": p. i-iv at end. 4142. Blegen, Theodore C. The land lies open. Minneapolis, University of Minnesota Press, 1949. 246 p. 49-48266 F606.B674 Dr. Blegen, the historian of Norwegian immigra- tion (q. v.), has long been a professor of history at the University of Minnesota and was superintendent of the Minnesota Historical Society from 1931-39. Nearly 20 years ago he prepared Building Minnesota for use in the secondary schools of the State. Apart from its being written in rather simple sentences, from its chapters being grouped in "units" which are hardly different from other authors' "parts" or "books," and from the questions, problems, and projects added at the ends of chapters by Prof. Edgar B. Wesley, it differs little from a work for older students or readers. Half the volume is allotted to the period since the Civil War, and there are chap- ters on wheat raising, lumbering, flour milling, and iron mining. The Land Lies Open is a small vol- ume presenting episodes of Minnesota history so as to give significant place "to the changing and de- veloping life of the people at the grass roots of their existence." Six of the chapters have been rewritten from articles published in Minnesota His- tory and other periodicals. Part I, "Channels to the Land," is concerned with explorers from De Soto to Henry R. Schoolcraft; Part II, "People on the Land," with aspects of setdement and culture. All writers on Minnesota history acknowledge their indebtedness to William Watts Folwell (1833— 1929), first president of the University of Minnesota, who began to write his magnum opus after his re- tirement at the age of 74, and completed it before his death at 96! A History of Minnesota (St. Paul, Minnesota Historical Society, 1921-30. 4 v. [The Society issued v. 1 of a new edition in 1956]) is eminently thorough and fair-minded, but it treats episodes in the early history of the State at such length as to make it unsuitable for a main entry here. 4143. Blegen, Theodore C, and Philip D. Jordan, eds. With various voices, recordings of North Star life. Saint Paul, Itasca Press, 1949. xxiv, 380 p. 49-11623 F606.B675 A source book of Minnesota history from the days of the French explorers, Radisson and Hennepin, to the close of the 19th century. Its editors have aimed "to relate the history of the North Star State in the words of those who actually took part in the making of that history," to be both accurate and colorful, and to include the words "of explorers, schoolteachers, missionaries, and just plain common folks — the basic builders of the state," as well as public documents. The 54 extracts are arranged in eleven topical sec- tions and close with Governor John Lind's message to the legislature in 1899, "in reality an inventory of Minnesota life and problems at the turn of the century." IOWA 4144. Cole, Cyrenus. A history of the people of Iowa. Cedar Rapids, Iowa, Torch Press, 1921. xiv, 572 p. maps. 21-2103 F621.C68 Cyrenus Cole (1863-1939) was born on an Iowa farm and became a leading newspaperman of Cedar Rapids; in the year this book was published he began 12 years of service as a Republican in the U. S. House of Representatives. His book is of a description sur- prisingly rare: a one-volume state history, inspired by John Richard Green and written in a dignified Victorian prose, which is yet comprehensive, well- informed, and thoroughly digested. The writer was well acquainted with the leading Iowa political figures of his maturity, and perhaps gives more space to elections and officeholders than would a present- day historian of the people of Iowa; but he is never unmindful of developments in other spheres. His basic Republicanism does not lead him into any un- fairness to Populists or Democrats; he limits himself local history: regions, states, and cities / 509 to the opinion that, in the post-Civil War doldrums of Iowa, "Political doctors were not needed so much as industrial ones. But it took the people a long time to find this out." K. The Far West 4145. Baumhoff, Richard G. The dammed Mis- souri Valley, one sixth of our Nation. New York, Knopf, 1951. 291 p. illus. 51-11082 F598.B3 "The Missouri basin is a continental funnel drain- ing into the Mississippi River, a terrain that meas- ures 529,350 square miles. It is roughly 1,300 miles long, and has extreme width of about 700 miles." Its major problems have been irregular water sup- ply, floods, and erosion, and in 1945 the Missouri Basin Interagency Committee was set up to plan and administer a "federal program, with state co- operation, for protection, control, and development of the water and land resources." In the same year the St. Louis Post Dispatch which has con- sistently supported an eventual Missouri Valley Authority, assigned Mr. Baumhoff to cover the pro- gram and related topics. His book is, as he says, a journalistic report, but it presents the basic facts of geography and economics in an objective manner, and predicts that the outcome will be a Federal au- thority for the basin which will disappoint extrem- ists, and "will not be gready different in essence from an MVA shorn of some dubious elements," or a "Missouri Valley Anti-Authority Authority." 4146. Billington, Ray Allen. The Far Western frontier, 1 830-1 860. New York, Harper, 1956. 324 p. illus. (The New American nation series) 56-9665 F591.B55 Bibliography: p. 293-311. A well-informed, significantly selective, and skillfully organized general treatment of the three critical decades which saw the American occupation of the Far West prepared for, carried out, and con- solidated. The author limits himself to describing those aspects of diplomacy and war "which immedi- ately affected the settlement process." Professor Billington's volume is noteworthy for its objective presentation of the aspects of ruthlessness and de- civilization which marked this great wave of expan- sion, and for its emphasis on the variety of Wests, each with its distinguishable frontier characteristics, which was the initial result. Since the settlement pattern was shaped by the accidental location of mineral wealth, the frontier of farms and villages in the Mississippi Valley was separated by nearly 1,000 miles of prairie from the islands of settlement in the Inland Empire of the Pacific Northwest, the Great Salt Lake Country, Arizona, New Mexico, the Washoe region, California, and Oregon. The great work of the 1850's was that of the overland freight- ers and stage coachers, who linked this "galaxy of empires" with each other and with the East, and made possible the resumption of normal civilizing processes. 4147. Briggs, Harold E. Frontiers of the North- west; a history of the upper Missouri Valley. New York, Appleton-Century, 1940. xiv, 629 p. 40-12572 F598.B84 Bibliography: p. 595-612. The Upper Missouri Valley of this volume com- prises the Dakotas, Montana, and Wyoming, "over- lapping into Idaho and northern Colorado." Its history is here reconstructed, mostly within the three decades 1860-90, with an abundance of detail and documentation, and an academic dryness of manner which seldom ventures into commentary. The ar- rangement is largely topical, under six principal heads. "The Frontier of the Miner" is concerned with the strikes and rushes that went on at irregular intervals from 1859 to about 1877, and incidentally disposes of "The Myth of Calamity Jane" (Martha Jane Canary, 1852-1903), whose "only claim to fame was her absolute lack of respectability." "The Frontier of the Buffalo" is concerned with the fate of the northern herd, which survived the southern herd but not the coming of the Northern Pacific, and disappeared after the winter of 1883-84. "The Frontier of Settlement" describes the attempts of the territorial governments to encourage immigration, and the projects of group colonization organized in the East and in Europe. The frontiers of the catde rancher, of the sheepherder, and of agriculture are treated in comparable detail. Much the same area, but with Wyoming omitted, is handled in a radically different style in Bruce O. Nelson's Land of the Da- cotahs (Minneapolis, University of Minnesota Press, 1946. 354 p.). Resulting from a University of Min- nesota Fellowship in Regional Writing, it presents its material in a series of episodes whose dramatic as- pects are emphasized. Folklore is drawn upon, and two of the episodes are cast in semifictional form. The author continues to a more recent period, telling the story of Arthur Townley and the Nonpartisan 510 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES League, of Governor William Langer's moratorium upon farm foreclosures and evictions in 1933, and of the plans for flood control which led to the proposal of a Missouri Valley Authority. 4148. Chittenden, Hiram Martin. The American fur trade of the Far West; a history of the pioneer trading posts and early fur companies of the Missouri Valley and the Rocky Mountains and of the overland commerce with Santa Fe. Standard, Calif., Academic Reprints, 1954. 2 v. (xl, 1029 p.) (American culture and economics series, no. 1) 54-7095 HD9944.U45C5 1954 General Chittenden (1858-1917) was an Army engineer with a variety of practical achievements to his credit, such as laying out the roads of Yellow- stone National Park and planning the Lake Wash- ington Canal. He nevertheless found time to pub- lish four books on Western history between 1895 and 1905, all of which have stood the test of time to a remarkable degree, subsequent research having filled in detail rather than rendered their conceptions and structure obsolete. The present work was originally published in three volumes in 1902 and has remained the basic work covering its subject during the period 1807-43; ^ required only to be supplemented by a detailed account of the trade in the Southwest, eventually supplied by Robert G. Cleland (no. 4186). Mr. Stallo Vinton's contribution to his edition, originally published in 1935, chiefly consists of addi- tional notes which are added to most chapters after those of the author. General Chittenden divided his text into five parts, of which Part II, "Historical," is the longest and most essential. Its principal sub- jects are the Missouri Fur Company, Astoria, the Rocky Mountain Fur Company, the American Fur Company, and the Santa Fe Trade. Part I de- scribes the operations and characteristics of the fur trade; Parts III-V are concerned with contem- porary events in their relation to the trade, colorful incidents during its course, and a general geo- graphical description of the West, including the native tribes. Eight appendixes of original docu- ments run to nearly one hundred pages. General Chittenden was ahead of his time in making a thorough use of all business records of the fur companies that he was able to discover. 4149. Coman, Katharine. Economic beginnings of the Far West, how we won the land beyond the Mississippi. New York, Macmillan, 1925. 2 v. in 1. 27-3060 HC107.A17C7 1925 Bibliography at end of each volume. Contents. — 1. The Spanish occupation. Explo- ration and the fur trade. — 2. The advance of the settlers. The transcontinental migration. Free land and free labor. The general pattern of historiography has changed so greatly since 1912, when this work was originally issued (Miss Coman died in 1915, and the one- volume edition is an otherwise unaltered reprint) that what the author then described as an economic history would now be regarded as a general survey of Western history down to the Civil War, with perhaps less than average space allotted to diplo- matic and military factors. It was largely a pioneer undertaking, and while of course it takes no account of the mass of detailed studies which have appeared since, it remains a clear oudine of the essential developments in discovery, settlement, and trade from a clearly defined point of view. Miss Coman thought that the European colonial regimes stifled the normal development of the region, and were of necessity eliminated by the superior industrial effi- ciency of the advancing tide of American settlers. "The self-employed and self-supporting farmer took possession of the land in a sense not to be dis- puted." The outcome of the Civil War was only the concluding victory of "the ideal American type — the homestead farmer" in the long struggle between forced and free labor. 4150. Quiett, Glenn Chesney. They built the West; an epic of rails and cities. New York, Appleton-Century, 1934. xx, 569 p. 34-35461 F591.Q85 Bibliography: p. 543-549. The West lost its frontier isolation and began to acquire its mature characteristics with the com- ing of the transcontinental railroads, usually dated from May 10, 1869, when the Union Pacific and the Central Pacific joined their tracks at Promontory Point, Utah. The large government subsidies re- ceived by the western lines gave their backers a great advantage in schemes of western development demanding capital. "One important source of reve- nue that was open to the backers of the early West- ern railroads was the building of cities." In this imposing volume Mr. Quiett reexamines the stand- ard sources of railroad and municipal history for evi- dences of their interaction, and has no difficulty in demonstrating the importance of the railroads and their builders in the rise of Denver, San Francisco, Los Angeles, San Diego, Portland, Seattle, and Spokane. JTakoma, Washington, is labeled "a rail- road creation": the decision of the Northern Pacific in 1873 to locate its western terminus there in an instant "converted a raw sawmill village on the frontier of civilization into a potential city of im- portance." The author's favorite city-builder is evi- dently General William J. Palmer (1 836-1 909) of the unsubsidized Denver and Rio Grande. "No local history: regions, states, and cities / 511 one had a keener eye for the scenic and commercial possibilities of a site," and he built cities that were permanent, such as Colorado Springs, which he added to the map in 1871. L. The Great Plains: General 4 15 1. Brown, Mark H., and William R. Felton. The frontier years; L. A. Huffman, photog- rapher of the plains. New York, Holt, 1955. 272 p. 55-9876 F595.H87B7 Bibliography: p. 259-261. 4152. Brown, Mark H., and William R. Felton. Before barbed wire. L. A. Huffman, pho- tographer on horseback. New York, Holt, 1956. 256 p. 56-10507 F596.B87 Bibliography: p. 237-243. 4153. Smith, Erwin E. Life on the Texas range. Photographs by Erwin E. Smith; text by J. Evetts Haley. Austin, University of Texas Press, 1952. 112 p. 52-13181 SF85.S57 The two finest photographic records of the West of the Open Range seem to have been made at its northern and southern extremes. Laton A. Huff- man (1854-1931) learned photography in his father's shop in Iowa, and in 1878 came to Fort Keogh on the Yellowstone River in southeastern Montana to fill the unofficial position of post photog- rapher, the remuneration being what he could make out of it. Save for a six-year exodus caused by hard times, Huffman spent the rest of his life as a pro- fessional photographer in Montana, and after 1905 lived by the sale of prints from his early negatives. Mr. Felton, Huffman's son-in-law, has drawn upon the family collection of glass plates, letters, and memoranda, and in both volumes the documenta- tion of the photographs is careful and thorough. The Frontier Years illustrates the finale of buffalo hunting, the last Indian wars, Miles City and other frontier towns, and the transition from wagon train to railroad. Before Barbed Wire illustrates sheep as well as catde herding and has fine pictures of early cow camps and ranch houses. The authors very properly underline Huffman's achievement in his early pictures taken on horseback with a 50- pound, slow-shutter, wet-plate camera. Erwin E. Smith (1886-1947) was a later comer than Huff- man, and never established himself as a professional photographer. But he was a cowboy who knew the work and its problems thoroughly, and while the Open Range was gone by the time he began taking his pictures on Texas ranches in the early years of the present century, "he spent much of his time on the larger outfits because their work with cattle closely approximated that of the open range." The 80 photographs reproduced here were all chosen for permanent display in the Texas Memorial Mu- seum, are nearly all outstanding for composition and contrast, and have the further advantage of better reproduction than Huffman's. Mr. Haley contributes a 15-page introduction on Smith's sad- deningly unsuccessful life. The American West; the Pictorial Epic of a Continent, by Lucius M. Beebe and Charles Clegg (New York, Dutton, 1955. 511 p.), is a vast collectanea of pictures from private and public collections, which depict "as many as- pects of the West in the nineteenth century as its authors could come by." Many of them are wood engravings which appeared in the illustrated week- lies, and the presentation is sensational rather than systematic. 4154. Dale, Edward Everett. Cow country. Nor- man, University of Oklahoma Press, 1942. 265 p. 42-15483 F596.D25 Professor Dale was himself a cowboy and rancher in his youth at the turn of the century, partner in "our old ranching firm of Dale Brothers" with his brother George, to whom he dedicates this volume. In addition to his well-known study of The Range Cattle Industry (q. v.) he has contributed a number of related articles to periodicals, including the American Hereford Journal and the Cattleman as well as historical journals. These he has assembled here and eliminated repetitive matter so as to form "a fairly consecutive story of ranching in the Great Plains." There are chapters on the antipathy be- tween Texas trail-drivers and "Kansas Tayhawkers," on the contributions of Scots and Scottish capital to the range catde industry, on cowboy humor, on ranching in Indian reservations, and on "The Passing of the Cow Country" as a distinct entity and way of life. 4155. Dick, Everett N. Vanguards of the frontier, a social history of the northern plains and Rocky Mountains from the earliest white contacts to the coming of the homemaker. New York, Appleton-Century, 1941. xvi, 574 p. 41-6157 F591.D545 Bibliography: p. 519-545. 512 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 4156. Dick, Everett N. The sod-house frontier, 1 854-1890; a social history of the northern plains from the creation of Kansas & Nebraska to the admission of the Dakotas. New York, Apple- ton-Century, 1937. xviii, 550 p. 37-!9335 F591.D54 Bibliography: p. 519-528. Of these companion volumes the sequel appeared first by some four years. Vanguards of the Frontier covers much the same ground as a number of other works on the general history of the West, from the fur companies and the mountain men to the cattle ranchers of the Open Range and the migratory sheep herders of the northern Rockies. It obtains its special character from telling the story, so far as possible, from the viewpoint of the ordinary par- ticipant in these historic processes: the author is less concerned, for instance, with the organization and economics of the stage-coach companies, than with typical scenes and incidents encountered by stage-coach drivers and passengers. The Sod-House Frontier, on the other hand, was throughout a quite original synthesis, bringing for the first time within one pair of covers a view of the entire process of settlement which was more or less uniform through- out Kansas, Nebraska, and the Dakotas. Prof. Dick interviewed seven survivors from the days of settle- ment, and utilized reminiscences preserved in man- uscript by historical societies or printed in local newspapers. The author gives a symbolic quality to the sod house, the expedient devised by pioneer settlers to provide shelter in a largely treeless land. The prairie sod was cut with a spade into bricks about three feet long, which could be built into houses as large as 20 by 16 feet, which usually leaked and might collapse, but could not burn or blow down, and had an average life of six or seven years. The life of these homesteaders is sympa- thetically and realistically described in all its char- acteristic aspects, from the use of buffalo chips as fuel to the "play parties" held in communities where dancing was taboo, and there are chapters on the "Beginning of Machine Farming," "The Grange," and the coming of the railroad, regarded in each community as a cause for celebration and some- times "ardent wide-spread and all prevailing inebriety." 4157. Gard, Wayne, The Chisholm Trail. Nor- man, University of Oklahoma Press, 1954. 296 p. 54-6204 F596.G3 Bibliography: p. 265-280. 4158. Wellman, Paul I. The trampling herd. New York, Carrick & Evans, 1939. 433 p. 39-24712 F591.W42 At head of title: The story of the catde range in America. "Some books to read" : p. 4 1 7-4 1 9. The most conspicuous events of Open Range days were the great cattle drives, in which herds of thousands of steers were conducted north from Texas by the trail bosses and their cowhands, run- ning the hazards of Indians, rustlers, river crossings, and stampedes. The earliest recorded drive goes back to 1846, but after the Civil War the practice was resumed on a larger scale and received its charac- teristic organization in 1867, when Joseph G. McCoy, an Illinois cattle dealer, set up a stockyard at Abilene, Kansas, on the Union Pacific Railroad. The most important route followed by the drivers for a dozen years after 1867 got its name from an old Indian trader, Jesse Chisholm (1806-68), who had a post on the Arkansas River and made regular journeys south to the North Canadian — a rather small portion of the whole trail named after him. Mr. Wellman and Mr. Gard tell much the same story but in antithetical manners: the former speaks in general terms and offers a multitude of anecdotes; the latter is con- cerned to date and document every circumstance. But Mr. Wellman is not inaccurate, and Mr. Gard is anything but dull. Both describe the gunplay which went on in Abilene and the other northern centers of the trade, and which has acquired a whole litera- ture of its own. Dee Brown and Martin F. Schmitt's Trail Driving Days (New York, Scribner, 1952. xxii, 264 p.) is a picture book containing a good selection of contemporary photographs supple- mented by prints of various kinds; the reproductions are often much too dark, and the text is decidedly thin. 4159. Kraenzel, Carl Frederick. The Great Plains in transition. Norman, University of Okla- homa Press, 1955. xiv, 428 p. maps, diagrs., tables. 55-9628 F591.K7 Bibliography: p. 391-418. By the Great Plains Mr. Kraenzel means the semiarid belt from the 98th meridian to the Rockies, often referred to as the High Plains. His own emphasis is largely sociological, but since most people have at their disposal only fragmentary information about the region, he has attempted to fill in "all other operative factors affecting the Plains — geographical, psychological, economic, historical, technological, and social," in a book "written in the Plains, about them, by one who is a part of them." The region has long been an exploited hinterland, and its people, whether rural or urban, belong to one or another minority group, whose objectives cannot be realized and who exist in a state of chronic frustration and irritation. They must all "adapt or get out": the adaptation to conditions, which has gone some way local history: regions, states, and cities / 513 in agriculture, must be extended to all phases, of life. The only solution lies in a regionalism whereby "the area can become a unity once again," and its keys for survival are the development of three basic traits: "the creation of necessary reserves, the intro- duction of flexibility into certain social operations, and the acquisition of mobility in still other aspects of the social order." The author goes on to give more concrete meaning to these somewhat abstract conceptions in various realms of living. 4160. Rister, Carl Coke. Southern plainsmen. Norman, University of Oklahoma Press, 1938. xviii, 289 p. 38-32983 F596.R58 Bibliography: p. 263-279. As here defined, the Southern Plains are divided from the Northern by the South Platte River, which runs through northern Colorado and southern Ne- braska. They have a character of their own de- rived from their higher average temperature, longer growing season, and faster rate of evaporation. Prof. Rister here describes the life lived upon them from the early 19th century, when only a few white hunters ventured into this preserve of the Arapahoes, Cheyennes, Kiowas, and Comanches, down to the opening of the Oklahoma lands to settlement on April 22, 1889. He divides the subject into topical chapters and at times fails to make chronological progressions as clear as could be wished. His con- cern is with agricultural settlement rather than with grazing use, and he allots only one 15-page chapter to the "Life of the Range Rider," whom he finds neither romantic nor admirable. There are de- scriptions of the nocturnal raids of the Indians which went on until the mid-70's, of the great grass- hopper plagues of 1868-69 anc ^ x 874-75 a s well as of less spectacular hindrances to agriculture, and of the "breakdowns" or square dances in which the setders relaxed from their harsh toil. Many settlers became discouraged and inscribed "Back to God's Country" on their wagon covers, but the majority held on by patience, cheerfulness, and reserving a surplus in good years to tide them over the lean ones. 4161. Rollins, Philip Ashton. The cowboy; an unconventional history of civilization on the old-time cattle range. Rev. and enl. ed. New York, Scribner, 1936. 402 p. 36-27318 F596.R75 1936 4162. Frantz, Joe B., and Julian Ernest Choate. The American cowboy: the myth & the real- ity. Norman, University of Oklahoma Press, 1955. 232 p. 55-9 62 9 F596F75 Bibliography: p. 203-222. 4163. Sonnichsen, Charles L. Cowboys and cat- tle kings; life on the range today. Norman, University of Oklahoma Press, 1950. xviii, 316 p. 50-14081 F596.S72 Mr. Rollins spent some years on the Open Range, in the late 8o's and early 90's, and became a zealous collector of western Americana, eventually turning his collection over to Princeton University. His aim has been "to recount accurately the every-day life of the old-time Range," confining himself, with certain specified exceptions, to what he actually saw and heard. His book has been accused of taking too idealistic a view of cowboy character, but in matters of dress, equipment, and characteristic operations it receives the compliment of being fre- quently drawn upon by other writers on the subject. Messrs. Frantz and Choate are especially concerned with the vast proportions and wide range of the cow- boy myth in American popular literature, entertain- ment, folklore, and life in general, and are moved thereby to many a quip. This heroic figure they set against the average cowboy of 1867-85 — "merely a unique occupational type who was concerned with 'cow work' on the range, raising, rounding up, branding, trailing, haying, and mending." They are, however, compelled to concede that there is abundant historical basis for most of the standard ingredients of horse opera — with the exception of the marathon fist fights, for cowboys, untrained to use their fists, did their fighting with knife or revolvef. The concluding four chapters review cowboy literature, both fiction and nonfiction. Mr. Sonnichsen's volume was commissioned by the Rockefeller Committee at the University of Okla- homa in consequence of the debate which broke out in 1947 over the catdemen of today in relation to the conservation of natural resources. During the first half of 1949 the author "traveled from end to end of what was once the Cattle Kingdom and is still the heart of the cattle country, learning every- thing" he could. The result is a miscellaneous reportorial volume that mirrors the variety of enter- prise, personnel, and occupation which now charac- terizes the industry. He finds that "the all-round cowpunchers of the past are becoming victims of specialization," and that, "as the farm has merged with the ranch, the cowboy has merged with the hired man" — but a hired man who still wears the uniform of a horseman of the Plains and thinks of himself as one. 4164. Webb, Walter Prescott. The Great Plains. [Boston] Ginn, 1931. xv, 525 p. illus. 31-20202 F591.W35 Bibliography at end of each chapter except the first. An epoch-making work of synthesis and inter- 514 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES pretation which has been fundamental to practically all subsequent treatments of the region with which it deals. The Great Plains, and especially the High Plains from the 98th meridian to the Rockies, are a level and treeless region where the rainfall is in- sufficient for normal agriculture. These character- istics have affected all historic processes involving the human beings who have ventured into the area. The Plains Indians obtained horses from the Span- iards and, as soon as they had done so, became so formidable as raiders that no further expansion of Spanish colonization was possible. The Texans were more successful because they seized upon Sam- uel Colt's invention of the six-shooting revolver, which the rest of the country had rejected, and so became able to defeat the Indians from horseback. Once the Indian and the buffalo had been elim- inated, the High Plains became a cattle kingdom because the industrial revolution had not yet devised the means whereby the agricultural frontier could expand into them. In the mid-i87o's a satisfactory barbed-wire fence was invented in Illinois and speedily produced a revolution on the Plains, effect- ing the transition from the open range to enclosed ranches, and permitting the advent of the home- steaders. The survival of both ranch and farm was made possible by the introduction of the windmill, which gave access to ground water and alleviated if it did not cure the dearth of water. This chronic dearth has led, in the eight dryest states, to a de- parture from the common law of water rights in favor of the arid-region doctrine of appropriation, or the Colorado system. In 1940 the Social Science Research Council devoted its Bulletin 46 to an assault upon Prof. Webb's conclusions by Fred A. Shannon, which has had small influence. M. The Great Plains: Local NORTH DAKOTA 4165. Kazeck, Melvin E. North Dakota; a human and economic geography. Fargo, North Dakota Institute for Regional Studies, North Da- kota Agricultural College, 1956. 264 p. 56-13250 F636.K3 Includes bibliography. "Can such of our problems as an obvious lack of industry, a decreasing or stationary population, a need for water conservation, a need for state plan- ning, a need for better land use, and a lack of re- sources use be neglected and ignored any longer?" But North Dakota remains "one of the most ex- clusively agricultural States in the nation," and the three main chapters of this well-made geography deal with "The General Farming Area," a fringe along the eastern boundary, "The Cattle-Wheat Re- gion," the large southwestern corner, and "The Wheat Region," the remainder including 32 out of the 53 counties. Industries are limited to flour mill- ing, meat packing, potato processing, and some mineral use, especially since 1951, when oil was found in the west of the State, resulting in 601 pro- ducing wells by 1955. The industrial development so much wished for must depend upon conservation of resources and planning for their future use. NEBRASKA 4166. Olson, James C. History of Nebraska. Line drawings by Franz Altschuler. Lin- coln, University of Nebraska Press, 1955. 372 p. 54-8444 F666.O48 "Suggested reading" at end of each chapter. The author has sought to supply the long-standing "need for a one-volume general survey of the his- tory of Nebraska which might serve as an introduc- tion to the history of the state for the college student and the general reader." He apologizes for the result, particularly since "much of the basic research upon which sound synthesis must be based still re- mains to be done." In fact no State has any com- parable volume which is its superior in compre- hensiveness, selection of material, organization, modernity of outlook, and lucidity of writing. The author has at his disposal a gentle irony to which he treats Prof. Samuel Aughey and other learned proponents of the doctrine that "rainfalls follow the plough," which was used to attract homesteaders to central Nebraska in the early 1880's. Some sug- gestive chapter headings are "The Eighties — Whose Prosperity?" "The Fading Frontier," and "Adapt- ing Government to the Machine Age." There are excellent sketch maps for particular purposes, and occasional statistical tables highly pertinent to the argument. Mr. Altschuler's decorations are dis- tinguished, as is the volume's entire format. 4167. 4168. KANSAS Nichols, Alice. Bleeding Kansas. New York, Oxford University Press, 1954. 307 p. 54-5295 F685.N6 Howes, Charles C. This place called Kan- sas. Norman, University of Oklahoma Press, 1952. 236 p. 52-3380 F691.H68 local history: regions, states, and cities / 515 The history of Kansas is unique among the 48 states in that its first six or seven years were a period of continuous turmoil and of frequent violence and bloodshed, whereas the succeeding century has been one of prevailing tranquillity and peaceful develop- ment, in which significant trends and events are usually a part of large national or regional move- ments. Miss Nichols tells the story of the turbulent years between the Kansas-Nebraska Act of 1854 and the admission of Kansas to statehood in January 1861, in a highly dramatic narrative with a strong pro-Southern bias. Since she cheerfully admits this, and makes abolitionists instead of border ruffians the villains of her story, the reader may do his own discounting, or consult a work in the pro-Northern tradition such as Leverett Wilson Spring's volume in the American Commonwealths series, Kansas; the Prelude to the War for the Union, rev. ed. (Bos- ton, Houghton Mifflin, 1907. 340 p.). Mr. Howes' volume is "developed" from newspaper and maga- zine articles and notes left by his father, Cecil Howes, who for over 40 years was the Kansas City Star's statehouse correspondent in Topeka. The first two parts consist of brief chapters on standard historical topics; the last two, "The Stuff It's Made Of" and "Yesterday and Today," have chapters on folkways and episodes of social history, such as "From Saloons to Bootleggers to Bottle Stores," "The Water-Witch- ing Vogue," and "Traveling under Wind Power." OKLAHOMA 4169. McReynolds, Edwin C. Oklahoma; a his- tory of the Sooner State. Norman, Uni- versity of Oklahoma Press, 1954. 461 p. illus., maps. 54-10052 F694.M16 Bibliography: p. 434-445. 4170. Debo, Angie. Oklahoma, foot-loose and fancy-free. Norman, University of Okla- homa Press, 1949. 258 p. 49—48798 F700.D4 4171. Debo, Angie. Prairie City, the story of an American community. New York, Knopf, 1944. xiv, 245, viii p. illus. 44-4798 F694.D4 Mr. McReynolds has been a resident of Oklahoma since 1892, and his book is a sober and systematic presentation of the early history of the area, and of the more formal elements in its economic and political development since the Civil War. It may be described as derivative, but only in the sense that it draws upon the detailed studies of such Oklahoma scholars as Foreman, Dale, Debo, and Gittinger in order to construct a unified narrative, from Coro- nado's expedition of 1540 to the gubernatorial elec- tion of 1950. Six chapters of some 165 pages cover the Indian regime from the removal of the Five Civilized Tribes to about 1875. The years since the acquisition of statehood in 1907 are covered as successive gubernatorial administrations, with some economic summaries in the penultimate chapter, and a final one on "The Culture of Oklahoma." Miss Debo's Oklahoma, on the other hand, is con- cerned with Oklahoma life and character, and in- corporates only enough informal geography and history to serve as background for her social and psychological interpretations. The violence of Okla- homa politics is attributed to this basic cause: "a people agrarian in outlook and Jacksonian in politics had to cope with industrial problems developing with a speed never before attained in American his- tory." Oklahomans are individualists without strong group loyalties of any kind, which makes on the one hand for originality and initiative, and on the other for bad politics, economic instability, "and other collective failures." In Prairie City Miss Debo displays true Oklahoman originality, for who before ever chose "to write of a typical, rather than an actual, community, a composite of numerous Okla- homa settlements, of which some are still in exist- ence, and others have long been ghost towns"? The device was adopted for greater freedom of expression, but while the people are fictive, the chronology, statistics, and events are actual, and based upon the author's own home town of Marshall and its region; "even the conversations are recorded or remembered conversations." Readers may also compare the developments in Prairie City with those in Miss Debo's slender volume on Tulsa: From Cree\ Town to Oil Capital (Norman, University of Oklahoma Press, 1943. 123 p.). Three hundred years of American history — "Indian occupation, ranching, pioneering, industrial development, and finally disillusionment and the recasting of ob- jectives — have been telescoped within the single life-time of some of the older Tulsans." N. The Rocky Mountain Region: General 4172. Atwood, Wallace W. The Rocky Moun- tains. New York, Vanguard Press, 1945. 324 p. (American mountain series, edited by Roderick Peattie, v. 3) 45-11388 F721.A8 Bibliography: p. 311-315. Wallace W. Atwood (1872-1949), president of Clark University from 1920-46, was a field geologist as well as a professor of the subject in major universi- 516 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES ties, and was attached to the U. S. Geological Survey from 1 90 1. In 1909 he was assigned to make a model physiographic study of mountain erosion and sculpture, which took him into the high ranges from New Mexico to Alaska — "he has ridden with pack train the length of the sky-line trail," says Mr. Peat- tie in his introduction to his teacher's book. In this exceptional volume Dr. Atwood combined an oudine, in untechnical language, of the geological evolution and structure of the Rockies with a vivid evocation and appreciation of mountain scenery and the life of pack train and mountain camp. Three final sections summarize the gold-mining strikes in various areas, the life of "Indians, Ranchmen, Farm- ers, and Tourists," and the 14 national parks of the Rockies, seven of which are Canadian. A general map and eight cross-sections are supplied by Erwin Raisz. 4173. Garnsey, Morris E. America's new frontier, the Mountain West. New York, Knopf, 1950. xviii, 314, ix p. maps, diagrs. 50-7765 F721.G3 1950 Bibliography: p. 310-314. The eight states of the Mountain West are a new frontier, in the author's conception, only potentially, for their recent economic trends have exhibited small progress, and the present crucial stage must deter- mine whether they will instead become a back- water — "an underdeveloped and neglected region whose resources have been irreparably exploited and destroyed." At present, with only 4.8 persons per square mile, they are underpopulated, and their labor remains relatively unproductive and unremunerated because they are confined to raw materials which are manufactured elsewhere. The region's balance of payments has been kept in equilibrium only by sub- stantial Federal subsidies, which means that it is in effect a charge upon the other sections. The author offers the outline of a regional program based on the optimum utilization of Western resources of water and hydroelectric power, which could double the ir- rigated areas and increase power capacity so as to provide the basis for Western industrialization and minerals development. Such a program "will re- sult in population growth, greater stability in the regional economy, a rise in per capita income, and an increase in the region's contribution to the wealth and security of the American people." 4174. Lavender, David. The Big Divide. Gar- den City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1948. 321 p. 48-11660 F591.L39 Bibliography: p. [2991-307. Mr. Lavender, a resident of Colorado and an enthusiastic connoisseur of his mountainous region, here essays a presentation of life in "those sections of the Rockies which lie inside Colorado, Wyoming, eastern Utah, and northern New Mexico," from the days of the mountain men to the present. This he achieves in 17 episodic or topical chapters, each more or less complete in itself, but so disposed as to form a reasonably chronological sequence. The first gold rush, just before the Civil War, resulted in "poor man's diggings, placer beds that could be stripped to bedrock with no other resources than hard work, ordinary tools, and limited capital." Subsequent chapters deal with the Mountain Utes, the silver stampedes of the later 19th century, early transportation principally by mulepower, the narrow- gauge mountain railroads, labor violence in the Cripple Creek district, the development of stock ranching, the conservation and reclamation move- ments, the rise of the tourist trade, and the modern sports of climbing and skiing. Mr. Lavender's story of his own experiences in mining and cattle ranching appeared in 1943: One Man's West (Gar- den City, N. Y., Doubleday. 298 p.). 4175. Vestal, Stanley. Mountain men. Boston, Houghton Mifflin. 1937. 296 p. _ 37-8786 F591.V47 "Acknowledgments and bibliography": p. [293]- 296. In the spring of 1822 the Missouri partners, Wil- liam H. Ashley and Andrew Henry, adopted a new method of conducting the fur trade: they advertised for 100 enterprising young men to ascend the Mis- souri to its source and be employed there. These white trappers would meet at an annual rendez- vous in some mountain valley previously agreed upon, turn over their year's take of furs, and receive their wages and a new outfit. Such was the origin of the mountain men, so called because they lived the year round in the Rockies. Mr. Vestal tells their story through the Mexican War in a succession of dramatic episodes, involving such figures as Jim Bridger, Jedediah Smith, Thomas Fitzpatrick, Wil- liam Sublette, and Old Bill Williams. Some of his information is oral in origin, derived from his stepfather and from Indians of western Oklahoma. 4176. West, Ray B., ed. Rocky Mountain cities; with an introduction by Carey McWilliams. New York, Norton, 1949. 320 p. 49-1907 F591.W463 Contents. — Reno, the state city, by W. V. T. Clark. — The Coeur d'Alene, vulnerable valley, by J. K. Howard. — El Paso, big mountain town, by Duncan Aikman. — Cheyenne, cowman's capital, by Dee Linford. — Albuquerque, a place to live in, by Erna Fergusson. — Salt Lake City, city of the Saints, by D. L. Morgan. — Tucson, the folk industry, by June Caldwell. — Butte, the copper camp, by John local history: regions, states, and cities / 517 Stahlberg. — Santa Fe, city of many molds, by Haniel Long. — Denver, reluctant capital, by C. A. Graham and Robert Perkin. — Notes on the contributors. Sketches of life, the economic structure, and poli- tics in nine cities of the intermountain West, together with Burke, Kellogg, and Wallace, the three towns of the Coeur d'Alene valley in northern Idaho. Mr. McWilliams presents them as case studies which demonstrate that the West "suffers from the effects of a too rapid, one-sided, and improvident industrialization." 4177. Wolle, Muriel V. (Sibell) The bonanza trail; ghost towns and mining camps of the West. Illustrated by the author. Bloomington, In- diana University Press, 1953. xvi, 510 p. maps. 53-10019 F591.W853 "A Glossary of the Mining and Mineral Industry, by Albert H. Fay": p. 477-842. "Selected bibliography": p. 483-489. During 195 1 and 1952 Mrs. Wolle, professor of fine arts in the University of Colorado, traveled over 70,000 miles by motor car, largely on mountainous back roads, seeking out and sketching the ghost towns of the West. She covered the eleven western- most States of the Union, as well as the Black Hills of South Dakota, concentrating on the places where the earliest discoveries of precious metals were made, and those where the richest strikes were found. She includes not only the true ghost towns — "com- pletely deserted, although buildings still line their streets" — but the partials, where a portion of the town remains inhabited, or where mining has been supplanted by other pursuits. Mrs. Wolle's draw- ings have the same qualities of emphasis and clarity as her writing, and when possible she has enlivened her accounts of the old mining communities by ex- tracts from contemporary newspaper files. The ghost towns, to which her book forms so attractive a guide, she does not find depressing: "Behind the present ruins I see the once bustling cities whose teeming life made possible the West of today." O. The Rocky Mountain Region: Local MONTANA 4178. Howard, Joseph Kinsey. Montana; high, wide, and handsome. New Haven, Yale University Press, 1943. 347 p. _ A43-3702 F731.H86 "Acknowledgments and bibliography": p. [330]- 339- Howard (1906-1951) was a Montana journalist, editor of the Great Falls Leader, and his book, in spite of the unpropitious time at which it appeared, made a considerable stir and inaugurated a critical trend in the regional literature of the Mountain West. It is a vigorously written indictment of the elements of exploitation in successive phases of Mon- tana's economy, which made it "an object lesson in American domestic imperialism." "Montana's is a cashcrop agriculture, hitherto exploited to the limit while the soil remained"; minerals have been extracted in the same spirit; and the development of hydroelectric power has been artificially retarded. The root of the State's economic disasters in the 1920's and 1930's, the author suggests, was the cam- paign of James J. Hill and the Northern Pacific to attract homesteaders, which increased the State's wheat acreage twelvefold in the decade after 1909, only to lead to dust storms and foreclosures in periods of drouth. Mr. Howard also edited Montana Mar- gins, a State Anthology (New Haven, Yale Uni- versity Press, 1946. xviii, 527 p.), which has no such special emphasis, but aims only to picture life in the State "as it was and is." There are many magazine articles and newspaper extracts, poems, short stories, and episodes from novels in the 11 topical sections of this very representative selection. WYOMING 4179. Hafen, Le Roy R., and Francis Marion Young. Fort Laramie and the pageant of the West, 1834-1890. Glendale, Calif., A. H. Clark, 1938. 429 p. 38-7543 F761.H24 The Oregon Trail, a route well known to trappers from 1823, follows the North Platte River and crosses its tributary, the Laramie (so named as early as 1821, from an otherwise unknown trapper), in border country between the high plains and the mountains. At this natural point for trade between Indian and white, in 1834 William Sublette and Robert Campbell constructed a fort which, after its rebuilding in 1840 or 1841, was usually called Fort Laramie. From 1841 on it was a landmark for the emigrants in their trains of covered wagons, and in 1849 it was bought by the United States from the American Fur Company and received a garrison of three companies, the majority mounted riflemen. From its purchase until as late as 1876 it was of 518 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES importance in all the Indian affairs of the region. Near it, in the summer of 1854, Lieutenant Grattan and his company were massacred by the Brule Sioux who, in their turn, were massacred a year later by General Harney's command. By 1890 the Fort's usefulness was past, and it was abandoned by order of the War Department. The authors' unadorned narrative, made up in large part of extracts from the sources, indeed makes a striking pageant of the Old West as seen from a single strategic view- point. COLORADO 4180. Fritz, Percy Stanley. Colorado, the Cen- tennial State. New York, Prentice-Hall, 1941. 518 p. (Prentice-Hall books on history, edited by Carl Wittke) 41-1853 F776.F83 "Selected bibliography" at end of each chapter. A textbook of standard type by the then assistant professor of history at the University of Colorado. After an introducton on general Western history, some 90 pages are allotted to the pioneer period, 50 to the territorial (1861-76: "the Centennial State" refers to the fact that Colorado was admitted to the Union during the hundredth anniversary of the Declaration of Independence), and 250 to the period of statehood. In addition to the usual topics, the last part has chapters on "The Setdement of the Western Slope" since 1880, on "The Motor Age" since 1910, and on "Aesthetic and Cultural Attain- ments." 4181. Sprague, Marshall. Money mountain; the story of Cripple Creek gold. Boston, Little, Brown, 1953. xx, 342 p. illus. 52-12637 F784.C8S6 Bibliography: p. [321 1-327. Cripple Creek, in the mountains 18 miles west of Colorado Springs, became the world's greatest gold camp in 1891, boomed until 1902, maintained high production until 1917, and down to 1952 yielded 625 tons of gold valued at $432,000,000. The district's population rose from 15 to 50,111 at the turn of the century, and has since sunk to 1,980. This boom started not in a remote wilderness but in a ranching area, and was easily accessible, from 1895 by railroad. Mr. Sprague has used Cripple Creek and Colorado Springs newspapers, and has interviewed many survivors or descendants. He has been able to reconstruct the story through its leading personalities, and follows Bob Womack, the part-time cowboy who made the original strike on Oct. 20, 1890, to his death, as a penniless para- lytic, 19 years later. Of Cripple Creek's 28 mil- lionaires, the most attention goes to the richest, Winfield Scott Stratton, "a weary, defeated carpenter who had spent most of his forty-four years working for three dollars a day," who cared nothing for his money nor for Colorado Springs society, and who, after giving or throwing away millions, left an estate of $6,000,000 to establish a home for poor chil- dren and old people. There are detailed narratives of the miners' strikes of 1893-94 an d I 9°3 _ 4> and of the double fire which demolished the town in 1896. 4182. Chittenden, Hiram Martin. Yellowstone National Park, historical & descriptive. Rev. by Eleanor Chittenden Cress and Isabelle F. Story [5th ed.] Stanford, Calif., Stanford University Press, 1949. 286 p. plates, fold. map. 49-9516 F722.C54 1949 Yellowstone National Park in northwestern Wyo- ming, a natural wonderland containing the yellow walls of the Grand Canyon of the Yellowstone River, the upper and the lower Falls, fossil forests, and more geysers than are to be found in the rest of the globe, was not thoroughly explored until 1870, and has been a Federal reserve since 1872. General Chittenden (no. 4148), in the course of two official assignments there in the 1890's, gathered the materials for this comprehensive manual of the Park, which he revised a second time just before his death in 1917. It has since been kept up to date by the Stanford University Press, and provides full information on the discovery and early history of the region, its administration as a park by the Fed- eral Government, and its physical characteristics and wildlife. UTAH 4183. Hunter, Milton R. Utah, the story of her people, 1540-1947; a centennial history of Utah. Salt Lake City, Deseret News Press, 1946. xvi, 431 p. illus. 46-8266 F826.H85 1946 This revised edition of the author's Utah in Her Western Setting, 2d ed. (1943) was published in ob- servance of the centennial of the arrival in 1847 of the Mormon pioneers in the valley of the Great Salt Lake. Having searched across four-fifths of the continent for a place to establish their new faith, they contributed to opening up the vast resources of the West by planting settlements in a presumed desert and developing irrigation projects. Early chapters deal with the Spanish exploration cf the territory that became the State of Utah in 1896, the fur traders and trappers, and Government explora- tions prior to the arrival of the Mormons. Their migration under the leadership of Joseph Smith, the founder, from New York to Ohio, Missouri, and Illinois, where Smith was killed, and the trek to Utah under Brigham Young are described in sue- local history: regions, states, and cities / 519 ceeding chapters. The Mormon doctrine of plural marriage, and economic and political solidarity, led to conflicts between Mormons and non-Mormons, and in 1887 Congress passed more rigid laws against polygamy, which was discontinued in 1890 by a Manifesto issued by Wilford Woodruff, President of the Church. In the final chapter the author describes the impact of World War II on the de- velopment of Utah, and the economic and climatic advantages of Utah as a place to live. NEVADA 4184. Lillard, Richard G. Desert challenge, an in- terpretation of Nevada. New York, Knopf, 1942. viii, 388, ix p. plates, maps (1 fold.) 42-20630 F841.L5 Bibliographical references included in "Acknowl- edgments" (p. 385-388). Geology and climatology, history and sociology are combined with guidebook data in this interpre- tation of the influences that have created this region of contrasts — the sixth state in area but the last in population, although it became a state in 1864. Those influences, the author points out, came mostly from the outside. Nevada's fabulous mines early attracted attention, and the State suffered the con- sequences of the exploitation of its leading resource by a transient population. Chapters are devoted to the mining camps, and towns such as Virginia City and Goldfield, which have "lived on in contracted form," and the true ghost towns, which are re- minders of more affluent years but are also "a genu- ine American antiquity as meaningful and signifi- cant as the trench mounds of Valley Forge and the white church at Lexington." A final chapter describes the prosperity of Reno and Las Vegas as "cosmopolitan divorce capitals." The author, a na- tive of California, pursued advanced study at the universities of Montana, Harvard, and Iowa, and this book is part of his doctoral dissertation at the last. 4185. Lyman, George D. The saga of the Corn- stock Lode; boom days in Virginia City. New York, Scribner, 1947 [°i934] 407 p. 54-26534 F849.V8L92 1947 The Comstock Lode — named after Henry T. P. Comstock, a ne'er-do-well sheep-herder — was the West's richest strike (1859) and Virginia City — christened by a drunken prospector known only as "Old Virginny" — was its most feverish boom town. Dr. Lyman, a San Francisco physician who was born in Virginia City after its heyday was over, has sought out the facts of its origin and first boom in a variety of original sources, and has presented them in so gasping and breathless a style that few readers would suspect the book's solid foundations. This story of grinding labor, sudden wealth, perpet- ual litigation, recurrent bloodshed, and riotous relax- ations could well have endured a more sober and coherent narration, and so fact-filled a book deserved an index. It ends with the slump of 1865, which came about when the surface ore had been skimmed off — but only $45 million out of an eventual $900 million had been extracted, and the Comstock's greatest days still lay ahead. P. The Far Southwest: General 4186. Cleland, Robert Glass. This reckless breed of men; the trappers and fur traders of the Southwest. New York, Knopf, 1950. xv, 361, xx p. 50-6356 F592.C62 1950 Bibliography: p. 347-361. In this volume Dr. Cleland, one of the permanent research staff of the Huntington Library since 1943, has utilized widely scattered manuscript sources to supply both a neglected chapter in the history of the American fur trade and a connected account of the real pioneers of the American Southwest. These were the intrepid and indefatigable "mountain men," who pursued the vanishing beaver along the desert or semidesert rivers of the Southwest, endur- ing terrible hardships and carrying on a merciless feud with the Indians of the region. Their ex- peditions, in which 50 to 100 men might participate either as bands of independent trappers, or under the auspices of partnerships or companies, continued for some 20 years after 1820. The trade, however, was in decline after 1835, the fashion in men's hats having turned from beaver to silk, and by 1845 the mountain men were "a fast-disappearing race." Meanwhile such skillful and daring explorers as Jedediah Strong Smith, James Ohio Pattie, Ewing Young, and Joseph Reddeford Walker had blazed the trails of the Southwest for the benefit of traders, soldiers, Government officials, and settlers. 4187. Fergusson, Erna. Our Southwest; photo- graphs by Ruth Frank and others. New York, Knopf, 1940. 376 p. 40-7056 F786.F49 520 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES A granddaughter of Southwestern pioneers, the author was horn in Alhuquerque. As a teacher in the public schools, a dude wrangler, and lecturer, she early gained an insight into the history and traditions that produced the people of the Southwest and their characteristic manners and customs. Here she interprets the region in terms of the significance of such cities as Fort Worth, San Antonio, El Paso, Tucson, Phoenix, Prescott, Gallup, Albuquerque, Santa Fe, and Taos, and the people whose Indian and Spanish descent has colored the civilization of the region. "Fred Harvey, Civilizer," "the man who made the desert blossom with a beefsteak," and went on to become a propagandist of the regional arts and crafts, gets a chapter to himself. A final chapter on "The Interpreters," a running com- mentary on Southwestern books and authors, does service for a bibliography. 4188. Gregg, Josiah. Commerce of the prairies; edited by Max L. Moorhead. Norman, Uni- versity of Oklahoma Press, 1954. xxxviii, 469 p. (American exploration and travel [17]) 54-10055 F800.G83 1954 "Gregg's bibliography [reconstructed by the editor]": p. 445-447. "Editor's sources": p. 448- 454- Prompted by ill health to seek the curative air of the prairies, Josiah Gregg (1 806-1 850) set out with a merchant caravan from Independence, Mo., for Santa Fe in 1831, and by 1840 had crossed the Great Plains eight times. As a trader of Amer- ican goods for Mexican silver and mules, he had developed a "passion for Prairie life" which he did not expect to survive. An avid reader with a natural scientific bent, Gregg made notes on the animals, the plants, and the Indians of the prairies, on the mineral resources of New Mexico, and the manners and customs of its people, and on his journeys to Mexico and Texas. During those journeys he blazed new trails, some of which became favorites with later comers, and gathered material for what became in 1845 "the most complete and reliable map of the prairies then in existence." His observa- tions were published in 1844 as Commerce of the Prairies (New York, H. G. Langley. 2 v.), which "has been recognized for more than a hundred years as the classic description of the early southern plains and as the epic of the Santa Fe Trail." It has gone through "fourteen printings (seven during Gregg's own short lifetime) and came from the presses in England and Germany as well as the United States." Mr. Moorhead calls his volume the "first edition of Gregg's complete text, notes, and maps which also contains a biographical introduction, critical notes, and a list of the author's sources." 4189. Richardson, Rupert Norval, and Carl Coke Rister. The greater Southwest; the eco- nomic, social, and cultural development of Kansas, Oklahoma, Texas, Utah, Colorado, Nevada, New Mexico, Arizona, and California from the Spanish conquest to the twentieth century. Glendale, Calif., A. H. Clark, 1934. 506 p. 34-28934 F786.R524 "References for additional reading" at end of each chapter. "As used in this book the Southwest or the Greater Southwest includes the country of the United States west of the eastern border of the Great Plains . . . and south of the northern boundaries of the tier of states extending from Kansas to California." This well-proportioned textbook deals mainly with the foundations of civilization as they were planted in that region from the coming of the first white men to the close of the 19th century. The spirit of the settlers was molded by the climate, Indian and Spanish influences, and the rapidity with which the area developed after it was acquired from Mexico in 1848. A citizenry of "irrepressible optimism, social democracy, and resourcefulness" emerged. The discovery of gold in California, the develop- ment of the cattle and sheep industries, the building of railroads to the Pacific, and the establishment of thousands of farms and agricultural communities with their irrigation and reclamation projects, by the end of the century gave the Southwest a posi- tion of significance in the economic structure of the United States. 4190. Vestal, Stanley. The book lover's South- west; a guide to good reading, by Walter S. Campbell (Stanley Vestal) Norman, University of Oklahoma Press, 1955. xii, 287 p. 55-6367 Z1251.S8V4 Bibliography: p. 269-272. Professor Campbell of the University of Okla- homa English Department, after writing or editing 21 books on the Southwest under the pen name of Stanley Vestal, surveys its literature under his own. Arizona and the eastern halves of Oklahoma and Texas are excluded from consideration. The books considered are arranged by categories, with biog- raphy (16 subsections), description and interpreta- tion, and history receiving the greatest amount of attention, but with substantial sections for folklore, humor, juveniles, poetry, and fiction. No assess- ment is attempted, as being beyond the powers of a contemporary, but the writer frequently gives vent to his enthusiasm. He certainly makes his point that, considering the newness of the region as an area of Anglo-American setdement, the quantity, variety, and quality of the literary achievement is impressive. A companion to the course taught by local history: regions, states, and cities / 521 James Frank Dobie at the University of Texas, en- titled Guide to Life and Literature of the Southwest, rev. and enl. (Dallas, Southern Methodist University Press, 1952. 222 p.), is especially strong on Texas, cowboys, cattle, and folklore. 4 19 1. [Wertenbaker, Green Peyton] America's heartland, the Southwest, by Green Peyton [pseud.] Norman, University of Oklahoma Press, 1948. xvii, 285 p. 48-10982 F396.W4 Bibliographical references included in "Acknowl- edgments": p. 274-277. This is the introductory volume to a series of books about the culture of the Southwest projected by the University of Oklahoma with funds from the Rockefeller Foundation. As an experienced jour- nalist, the author describes the impressions which he has gathered from interviews and ten thousand miles of travel in the states of Arkansas, Louisiana, Texas, Oklahoma, and New Mexico. It is not of- fered as a scholarly study, but as a general survey and an impression to "explain why the Southwest is important to the life of our time, and how its people come to be the way they are." Q. The Far Southwest : Local TEXAS 4192. Goodwyn, Frank. Lone-Star Land; twen- tieth-century Texas in perspective. New York, Knopf, 1955. 352 p. 55-7850 F391.2.G6 "This book embraces the geology, geography, an- thropology, history, economics and culture of Texas. Selectivity is necessarily high, and all details are eschewed except those which delineate the essential peculiarities of the chosen area." The result is a genuine synthesis, presented in a clear and straight- forward exposition, and illustrated by excellendy chosen and reproduced photographs. The author is evidently fascinated by the personality of W. Lee O'Daniel, whose political career he treats at some length. 4193. Hogan, William Ransom. The Texas re- public; a social and economic history. Nor- man, University of Oklahoma Press, 1946. 338 p. 46-8214 F390.H6 Bibliography: p. 299-326. For ten years before being admitted to the Union in 1846, Texas was an independent republic. This volume describes everyday existence in that frontier democracy during those years. It is a record of "devout circuit riders, pioneer physicians and school teachers, unruly young lawyers, gun-bearing rowdies and duelists, town builders and land pirates, planters and farmers" who, at work and play, developed those characteristics which distinguish Texans from the citizens of other states. The author attributes much of Texas nationalism to its public-land system: here free land was obtained, not from a distant government in Washington, but from a national government that was close at hand, and that did what it could to discourage large-scale land specu- lation, especially by nonresidents. 4194. Richardson, Rupert Norval. Texas, the Lone Star State. New York, Prentice-Hall, 1943. xix, 590 p. [Prentice-Hall history series; Carl Wittke, editor] 43-2288 F386.R52 "Selected bibliography" at end of each chapter. A book intended both for college classes and the reading public, whose purpose "is to provide, as far as the limitations of a single volume will permit, a complete survey of the history of Texas." It gives equal attention to the romantic and colorful period of Texas history, and to more prosaic events such as the development of education and the fluctuations of economic conditions. Approximately half the book is devoted to "the extension of farming into the Great Plains, the growth of industries, the revolution in transportation, efforts to regulate business, the program of social security, the regulations of agri- culture, and the varied political history" of the years since 1876 — a period hitherto neglected by his- torians. Lists of "Governors of Texas" and "United States Senators from Texas" form an Appendix. 4195. McCarty, John L. Maverick town, the story of old Tascosa. With chapter decorations by Harold D. Bugbee. Norman, University of Oklahoma Press, 1946. 277 p. 46-6343 F394.T17M3 Bibliography: p. 261-266. Tascosa, high up in the Texas Panhandle, is typical of those communities in the West that once flourished, and then declined into ghost towns. For nearly a decade beginning in the late 1870's, Tascosa as an open-range trading center and the "legal capital of ten counties in a cattle empire," was the center of all affairs, public and private, law- ful and unlawful, as well as the home "of a group of great 'little' men both Mexican and Anglo-Ameri- can." But the railroad never came, and the great 522 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES flood of the Canadian River in 1893 merely hastened the death of an already moribund town. The author has based his narrative, made possible by a grant through the Texas State Historical Society from the Rockefeller Foundation, in large part on interviews with and letters from oldtimers, and on the unique file of The Tascosa Pioneer (1886-91). 4196. Haley, James Evetts. The XIT Ranch of Texas, and the early days of the Llano Estacado. [New ed.] Norman, University of Oklahoma Press, 1953. xiv, 258 p. 53-8818 F391.H16 1953 Bibliography: p. 247-252. The files of the XIT Ranch and its Chicago office, now in the archives of the Panhandle-Plains His- torical Society at Canyon, Texas, together with let- ters, personal interviews, newspapers, books, pamphlets, and periodical articles have been used as sources for this chronicle of "the most extensive Western range ever placed under one barbedwire fence." Established in the middle 8o's, the XIT Ranch included 3,050,000 acres of land in the Pan- handle of Texas, patented by the State to a Chicago firm in payment for constructing the Capitol at Austin. The first edition of this book, published in 1929, was printed by the Farwell family of Chicago "as a privately issued memorial to their people, their associates, and their cowboys." A log of an 1892 catde drive and the "General Rules of the XIT Ranch, January, 1888" are published as appendixes. 4197. Horgan, Paul. Great river: the Rio Grande in North American history. New York, Rinehart, 1954. 2 v. (1020 p.) 54-9867 F392.R5H65 1954 Bibliography: v. 2, p. 957-977. Mr. Horgan, a writer of novels and other fiction who has lived in New Mexico since 1915, spent 13 years in the preparation of this book. He wished "to produce a sense of historical experience, rather than a bare record" of this river, nearly 2,000 miles long, whose "historical course takes us through something over ten centuries of time and through the chronicles of three cultures." The result is a stately pageant of the Indian and the Spanish Rio Grande in volume I, and of the Mexican and "The United States Rio Grande" in volume II. The author's ability to penetrate the inwardness of van- ished cultures is evidenced in such chapters as "The Stuff of Life" in the Indian section, and "Collec- tive Memory" and "Hacienda and Village" in the Spanish. Save for a chapter on the border troubles leading to General Pershing's Punitive Expedition of 19 16-17, the detailed narrative ceases with the 1870's. "Finally all indigenous aspects of the river's three societies would be dissolved in the techno- logical uniformity of the national life in the twen- tieth century." The author's achievement was recognized with two annual prizes: the Bancroft prize and the Pulitzer prize in history. NEW MEXICO 4198. Fergusson, Erna. New Mexico; a pageant of three peoples. New York, Knopf, 1951. 408 p. 51-11094 F796.F35 "Books recommended for further reading": P- 395-4°4- Mrs. Fergusson describes the development of her native State under the influence of Indian, Spanish, and American civilizations, which are blended in this "land of enchantment." The backwardness of Spanish-speaking villagers is attributed to "the powerful in politics, government, and even educa- tion," who have failed to impart the mastery of English that could be had "within one school genera- tion, twelve years." Twentieth-century elements in New Mexico are described in chapters on "The Fed- eral Man" — atomic scientist or conservationist, "Water" — the new dams, and the "Artist Dis- coverers" who have centered in Taos. A final chapter points out to tourists the natural wonders and other places of interest. The selected bibli- ography at the end is aimed at the general reader, and is arranged according to the chapters of the book. There is also a glossary of Indian and Span- ish words and phrases characteristic of the region. ARIZONA 4199. Lockwood, Francis Cummins. Pioneer days in Arizona, from the Spanish occupation to statehood, by Frank C. Lockwood. New York, Macmillan, 1932. xiv, 387 p. 32-29213 F811.L75 Arizona, in which the Grand Canyon, the Painted Desert, and the Petrified Forest are located, was the last state to enter the Union. It is noted for its mild winter climate and sunshine which have made southern Arizona a winter vacation and health resort; for the development of the Colorado River for irrigation and power; for its Indian tribes with their handicraft trade; and for its mineral resources. The author, associated in various capacities with the University of Arizona from 1916 to 1930, wrote this book to fill the need, which he discovered when he moved to Arizona, for a book that traces the political, industrial, social, and cultural beginnings of the State. He has brought together from interviews with pioneers, early newspapers, letters, diaries, reminiscences, government documents, and other sources, the material which he uses "to narrate in local history: regions, states, and cities / 523 an orderly and graphic way the chief incidents that took place in Arizona from the coming of the Span- iards in 1539 to the achievement of Statehood in 1912." The literature of the State is described in a chapter on "Newspapers, Books, and Libraries" (p. 345-367)- R. California 4200. Caughey, John Walton. California. 2d ed. New York, Prentice-Hall, 1953. 666 p. il- lus. (Prentice-Hall history series) 53-9858 F861.C34 1953 "A commentary on Californiana": p. 595-634. Professor Caughey of the University of California at Los Angeles published the original edition of this very successful textbook for college classes in 1940. He allots a little over a third of the volume to the periods before American acquisition. California, first visited by the Spaniards in 1542, was not settled by them until 1769. The Mexican period, beginning in 1822, was brief and "self-consciously transitional." Catde raising was the prevailing economy until the Gold Rush transformed the north, and southern California remained predominantly pastoral until the boom of the 1880's. The growth of the State in population and wealth has been accelerated by sub- sequent booms, but has gone steadily on between them. California is its own region, and develop- ments there have proceeded in relative independence of the rest of the United States. The annotated bibliography furnishes guidance to a literature that has become enormous. In the second edition some of the earlier chapters are expanded, and the story is continued down to "The Scene at Midcentury." 4201. Caughey, John Walton. Gold is the corner- stone. Berkeley, University of California Press, 1948. xvi, 321 p. 48-10984 F865.C33 Bibliography: p. 301-314. 4202. Ellison, William Henry. A self-governing dominion: California, 1 849-1 860. Berkeley, University of California Press, 1950. 335 p. Bibliography: p. 315-322. 50-62714 F865.E5 The Chronicles of California, inaugurated by the University of California Press under the editorship of Professors Herbert E. Bolton and J. W. Caughey as a part of the State's centennial celebration, are a series of volumes on periods or topics of State his- tory. Of the pair here listed, the first is a balanced narrative of the Gold Rush, and an estimate of its importance in California history. On Jan. 24, 1848, James Wilson Marshall, a carpenter constructing a mill at Coloma on land belonging to John W. Sutter, found fragments of gold in the millrace. Before winter most of the able-bodied males in California had turned gold miners, and in the course of 1849 the influx of outsiders brought the number of pros- pectors and miners to some 45,000. The result was the stimulation of developments in California, the West at large, and the whole Pacific basin that would otherwise have taken a generation, or might not have occurred at all. One obvious consequence was that by Sept. 7, 1850, less than 32 months after the discovery of gold, California had become the 31st State of the Union. But for over a decade, be- cause of her isolation, and the assumption of her citizens that they were a people apart, California's ultimate destiny remained undetermined. Not until i860, Prof. Ellison believes, was a political contest first waged around national issues, and decided "by the rather general recognition that California could not stand as a self-governing dominion but only as an integral and dependent part of the United States." Other volumes published in the Chronicles of Cali- fornia have been Charles L. Camp's Earth Song: A Prologue to History (1952. 127 p.), Jeanne Skin- ner Van Nostrand and Edith M. Coulter's California Pictorial; a History in Contemporary Pictures, ij86 to 1859 (1948. 159 p.), William W. Robinson's Land in California (1948. 291 p.), George E. Mowry's The California Progressives (1951. 349 p.), and Franklin D. Walker's A Literary History of Southern California (1950. 282 p.). 4203. Cleland, Robert Glass. From wilderness to empire; a history of California, 1542-1900. New York, Knopf, 1944. xii, 388, xiv p. illus. 44-2422 F861.C6 4204. Cleland, Robert Glass. California in our time (1900-1940) New York, Knopf, 1947. viii, 320, xx p. 47-30606 F866.C62 Dr. Cleland came to California at the age of four in 1889, has visited all parts of the State, and has spent most of his life in studying its history. After 30 years in the service of Occidental College, he transferred to the research staff of the Huntington Library in 1943, and has since published a series of important works on California history, beginning with the present pair, and including a study of the fur trade in the Southwest (no. 4186). The above 524 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES titles were originally planned as a one-volume his- tory of the State, but were divided when the author became convinced that it would be impossible to do justice to the complex economic, political, and cul- tural developments of the 20th century in a few chapters. From Wilderness to Empire is largely narrative incorporating many extracts from original sources, and does not slight the colorful and romantic aspects of the subject, but also contains descriptive chapters such as "Missions and Ranchos" and "California of the Ranges." The sequel traces "the over-rapid transformation of an agrarian region into a highly industrialized society," and the over- taking of northern California by southern, with much awe and some criticism. The concluding chapters are concerned with the false hopes aroused by the Townsend movement, the difficulties of the Japanese, Mexican, and "Okie" minorities, Holly- wood as Bunyan's Vanity Fair magnified to huge proportions, and a review of California literature from its beginnings to John Steinbeck. 4205. Putnam, George Palmer. Death Valley and its country. New York, Duell, Sloan & Pearce, 1946. 231 p. 46-8329 F868.D2P8 Bibliography: p. 219-220. California's Death Valley, "the lowest, driest, and hottest place in America," is at the bottom of a volcanic trough on the eastern slope of the Sierra Nevada. Some 550 square miles of it are below sea level, and Badwater, 279.6 feet below, is the lowest land in North America — less than 80 miles from Mount Whitney, the highest peak in the United States. The Valley, which the author likens to an inferno in suspended animation, has been con- spicuous in the American imagination ever since a train of '49-ers came to grief there, and has been a National monument since 1933. Mr. Putnam describes its kangaroo rats, chuckwallas, vinega- roons, and other strange fauna, its exploitation for Twenty Mule Team Borax in the 1880's, and the legends of its eccentric prospectors, of whom Death Valley Scotty was much the best known. Some bibliographic sources include this volume in the American Folkways series (no. 3942), but the Library of Congress copies have no such indication. 4206. Mayo, Morrow. Los Angeles. New York, Knopf, 1933. x,337,xvip. 33-6581 F869.L8M2 "Bibliographical note": p. 331—337. 4207. Carr, Harry. Los Angeles, city of dreams. Illus. by E. H. Suydam. New York, Apple- ton-Century, 1935. 35—18559 F869.L8C3 A modern and scholarly treatment of the spectacu- lar rise of Los Angeles to a high rank among the world's great cities is badly needed; these volumes, over 20 years old and journalistic in manner, are inadequate substitutes. Mr. Mayo relates the more dramatic episodes in the annals of Los Angeles from 1781 to the 1920's, such as Collis P. Huntington's campaign to locate the artificial harbor at Santa Monica instead of San Pedro, and the Los Angeles Times dynamiting of 1910. This he does in a muscular style and with small sympathy, for he regards his subject as "an artificial city which has been pumped up under forced draught, inflated like a balloon, stuffed with rural humanity like a goose with corn." Harry Carr, who died the year after this book appeared, had been associated with the Los Angeles Times for nearly 40 years, and with the Hollywood studios in the days of their early celebrity. His topical chapters are more sympa- thetic in tone — to him, "Los Angeles is the ingredi- ents of a cocktail, not yet shaken" — and studded with the reminiscences of an oldtimer who has watched the great transformation happen. 4208. Camp, William Martin. San Francisco: port of gold. Garden City, N. Y., Double- day, 1947. xv, 518 p. 47-11836 F869.S3C25 4209. O'Brien, Robert. This is San Francisco; illus. by Antonio Sotomayor. New York, Whittlesey House, 1948. xv, 351 p. 48-10991 F869.S3O15 Mr. O'Brien came to San Francisco in 1939, and conducted a column, "Riptides," in the San Fran- cisco Chronicle from 1946. His columns, and other materials gathered in the course of preparing them, are here organized into a "portrait of an American city" which stresses its less-known aspects and per- sonalities. He divides the city into five main areas — "The Waterfront," "Old Town," "The Hills," "Main Stem," and "South of the Slot," and in each presents his material under particular streets and avenues. For each street the retrospective material is followed by an impression of the recent state of things. This organization certainly called for a better map than the very sketchy one which appears on the end papers. Mr. Camp explains that he has written "not a book about the City, but rather one about the Port, the water front of San Fran- cisco." He recounts a number of episodes from earlier periods, such as Asbury Harpending's plot to capture San Francisco and hand it over to the Confederacy, but gives major space and emphasis to the creation of the facilities and the organization of the modern port, to the failure of the laws to protect sailors against crimps, shanghaiers, and brutal captains, to the movement to organize mari- time workers which began in 1885, and to the fre- quent waterfront disturbances which have ensued. local history: regions, states, and cities / 525 4210. King, Clarence. Mountaineering in the Sierra Nevada. Edited and with a pref. by Francis P. Farquhar. New York, Norton, 1935. 320 p. 35-35677 F868.S5K53 "Bibliographical notes": p. 317-320. Clarence King (1842-1901) learned geology in the Sheffield Scientific School of Yale University, and soon after graduation joined the staff of the California State Geological Survey under Josiah Dwight Whitney and William H. Brewer. Much of the succeeding decade he spent in the geological exploration of the High Sierra, at first for the State Survey, and subsequendy for the Federal Survey of the 40th Parallel, which he had suggested and of which he was placed in charge. These famous sketches were first published as articles in The At- lantic Monthly in 1871, and appeared in book form the following year. They give vivid glimpses of the Yosemite and its region, and of Mounts Tyndall, Shasta, and Whitney (King's party named the highest peak in the United States after their chief) as they appeared to a pioneer of American moun- taineering — for King "was almost alone among Americans of his day in having the desire to climb remote and difficult peaks." 421 1. Russell, Carl Parcher. One hundred years in Yosemite; the story of a great park and its friends; with a foreword by Newton B. Drury. Berkeley, University of California Press, 1947. xviii, 226 p. illus., fold. map. 47-3 335 F868.Y6R8 1947 The Yosemite Valley, named after the local Indian tribe but formed by the north fork of the Merced River, was first visited in 1833, explored in 1851, turned over to California as a public trust in 1864, and restored to Federal ownership as part of a much larger Yosemite National Park in 1905. On the western slope of the Sierra Nevada about 150 miles due east of San Francisco, and containing some 1176 square miles, it is a natural wonderland of moun- tain valleys, sheer cliffs, towering peaks, waterfalls, giant sequoias, and abundant wildlife. Dr. Russell, who was Park Naturalist in 1923-29, brought out the first edition of this work in 193 1, and in the second has expanded the original text from manu- scripts contributed to the Yosemite Museum, and added the information called for by 16 years of de- velopment during which the Yosemite had eight million visitors. His volume is essentially a history, with chapters on the area's discoverers, pioneers, early tourists, mountain explorers, hotels, scientific interpreters, and administrators before and since the creation of the National Park Service in 1916. There is no systematic description of its natural features, but there is a substantial "Chronology, with Sources" (p. [i77]-i93) and a "Bibliography" (p. [1951-213) of titles of historical interest. S. The Pacific Northwest: General 4212. Freeman, Otis W. and Howard H. Martin, eds. The Pacific Northwest, an overall appreciation. 2d ed. New York, Wiley, 1954. xvi, 540 p. 54-9235 HC107.A19F7 1954 The Pacific Northwest includes Oregon, Wash- ington, Idaho, and the mountain counties of western Montana — a region that has an "identity differ- entiated from other areas of the United States," mainly by its topography. The first edition of this book (1942) was also the "first comprehensive study of the resources of the region which concerns itself with the geographic bases involved." Here it has been revised to take account of the many changes that have taken place in the region since that date. Thirty professors and technicians have contributed to the five parts on "Changing Human Adjust- ment," "Physical Environment," "Exploitation and Conservation of Various Resources," "Agriculture," and "Industry, Commerce, and Urban Develop- ment." The numerous sketch maps illustrate single factors. Most of the chapters conclude with a set of references. 4213. Fuller, George W. A history of the Pacific Northwest. New York, Knopf, 1931. xvi, 383, [16] p. 31-26862 F851.F96 Librarian of the Spokane Public Library (1911- 36) and secretary of the Eastern Washington State Historical Society (1916-35), the author received historical recognition for The Inland Empire of the Pacific Northwest, a History (Spokane, H. G. Linderman, 1928. 4 v.) and for this book, a notable one-volume contribution to the early history of the region. Its principal subjects are the Indian tribes, whose manners and customs were first ob- served by Lewis and Clark, and their uprisings; the explorers who converged on the Pacific Northwest from the sea and land; the great fur companies; and the missionary pioneers who planted the first American settlement in the region — the Methodists in the Willamette valley (1834). Less than half of the narrative is concerned with the beginnings of government, pioneer social life, and political and economic growth through the first quarter of the 526 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 20th century. A list of "Governors of the Terri- tories and States" appears at the end. 4214. Winther, Oscar Osburn. The Great North- west; a history. 2d ed., rev. and enl. New York, Knopf, 1950. xviii, 491, xxx p. (Western Americana) 50-12482 F852.W65 1950 Bibliography: p. 463-491. This historical survey of the Pacific Northwest from the period of exploration, through the fur trade era and the coming of the first missionaries and immigrants, to the present day was first published in 1947. In the revised edition the author has ex- panded Part II, "The Post-frontier Period, 1883— 1950," which begins with the completion of the Northern Pacific Railroad. He emphasizes the in- fluence of transportation, and especially of the rail- roads, on the development of the territory. There are chapters on the range cattle business, irrigation, husbandry, industry and commerce including the tourist business, hydroelectric power projects, politi- cal ferment, and social and cultural achievements. In the same year the author also published The Old Oregon Country; a History of Frontier Trade, Transportation and Travel (Stanford, Calif., Stan- ford University Press, 1950. 348 p.). It includes much of the data that appeared in the 1947 edition of The Great Northwest, but the author hopes that "the more extended and detailed treatment here, with accompanying documentation, will be of added value to the readers." In his Farthest Frontier, the Pacific Northwest (New York, Macmillan, 1949. 375 P')> which was supported by the Library of Congress Grants in Aid for Studies in the History of American Civilization, Sidney Warren acknowl- edges his appreciation to Professor Winther for his "helpful suggestions and comments." Mr. War- ren's book is a chronicle of the society created by the pioneers down to the year 1910, when "the region was well on the way to maturity." It describes their homes, schools, medical facilities, newspapers, recrea- tion, and cultural growth. T. The Pacific Northwest : Local WASHINGTON 4215. Meany, Edmond S. History of the State of Washington. New York, Macmillan, 1924. 412 p. illus. 24-9257 F891.M46 1924 Best known as an educator during his years of association with the University of Washington (1897-1935), the author had numerous business interests, served in the State House of Representa- tives (1891-93), and achieved recognition as the historian of his adopted State. Intended primarily for the general reader, but also usable as a textbook in high schools or colleges, this book was first pub- lished in 1909. It is a "compact record" of the history of Washington State from the discovery and exploration of the Pacific Northwest by the Span- ish, Russians, English, and, finally, the Americans under the leadership of such men as Robert Gray, Lewis and Clark, Charles Wilkes, and John Charles Fremont, to the year 1923. Separated from the Territory of Oregon in 1853, Washington Territory became a State in 1889, a late addition to the Union. The organization of the State, and its economic, political, and social development, occupy less than a fourth of the text. The last chapter is devoted to "Evidences of Recent Advance." Lists of coun- ties, Territorial and State officers, and of State insti- tutions form the appendixes. 4216. Morgan, Murray C. Skid Road; an informal portrait of Seattle. New York, Viking Press, 1951. 280 p. 51-14111 F899.S4M72 Seatde is located on the eastern shore of Puget Sound on Elliott Bay. The book's title was derived from the pioneer method of skidding logs by ox- teams along the route to Yesler's sawmill — the busi- ness which first made Seattle look like a real town. Saloon keepers, show people, and others followed the loggers on the route later known as Yesler Way, "the northern limit of what Seattleites called 'our great restricted district.' " It is the story "of some who tried and failed and of some who achieved suc- cess without becoming respectable, of the life that centered on the mills and on the wharves. That is Seattle from the bottom up." It is told in the activi- ties of such folk as Doc Maynard, "Seattle's first booster," who dreamed of making the city grow, and died before it reached maturity, the Mercer girls, imported for matrimony, and Mary Kenworthy, who challenged the Sinophobes. From more recent years, Mayor Ole Hanson and the general strike of 19 19, Dave Beck and the labor movement, Lt. Gov- ernor Vic Meyers, the local wit, and others are given their part in the growth of Seattle. It has become one of the largest cities of the Pacific Northwest, and was made possible "by every sort of American and almost every sort of people." local history: regions, states, and cities / 527 4217. Fargo, Lucile F. Spokane story. New York, Columbia University Press, 1950. 276 p. 50-10471 F899.S7F3 1950 Bibliography: p. [26i]-270. A leader in the development of school libraries, the author began her career in Oregon and Wash- ington. She spent 17 years as a librarian in Spokane, and had already written several books of fiction based on life in Dakota Territory and the Pacific Northwest, when she was invited by the Columbia University Press to write a book "pictur- ing the life and culture of Spokane during succes- sive phases of its development from fur trade days to the attainment of municipal adulthood in the early years of the twentieth century." She has ap- proached her subject through the lives of those "whose activities have become a part of local lore," such as Ross Cox, the Walker family, Spokane Garry, the Ashlocks, Jim Glover, the "Father of Spokane," May Hutton, and others. She has pro- duced an entertaining narrative for those who are "interested in the development of the so-called In- land Empire and its capital city." Tides which have been found useful as background material, be- cause of "their human interest, lively style, and portrayal of social life and customs," have been included in the bibliography. U. Overseas Possessions 4218. Pratt, Julius W. America's colonial experi- ment; how the United States gained, gov- erned, and in part gave away a colonial empire. New York, Prentice-Hall, 1950. 460 p. 50-11728 F970.P7 The author has brought together in one volume a narrative of the United States' acquisition and gov- ernment of Alaska and Hawaii; its administration of the Canal Zone and Panama Canal, the Virgin Islands, American Samoa, Wake and Midway Is- lands; its joint control, with Great Britain, of Canton and Enderbury Islands; and its interest in the Trust Territory of the Pacific Islands — the Marshalls, Carolines, and Marianas. The rise of our "Carib- bean sphere of influence" is traced through the first two decades of the century, and our "retreat from empire" dated from the beginning of President Harding's administration (1921). Economic condi- tions and causes of discontent, with "the remedies adopted or proposed, ranging from independence for the Philippines to proposed statehood for Alaska and Hawaii," are outlined. A summary of "United States-Philippines Relations after World War II" and of the "Government of the Trust Territory of the Pacific Islands" appears in the appendixes. The book describes the development in the overseas poli- cies of the United States during the decade since William H. Haas published his largely geographical description, The American Empire, a Study of the Outlying Territories of the United States (Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1940. 408 p.). ALASKA 4219. Gruening, Ernest Henry. The State of Alaska. New York, Random House, 1954. 606 p. 54-7799 F904.G7 As Governor of Alaska (1939-53) an d Director of the Division of Territories and Island Possessions in the Department of the Interior (1934-39), tne author gained an insight into Alaska's problems which enables him to analyze here, in a manner not previously attempted, the relations between the United States Government and the Territory, and the economic forces which have influenced the des- tiny of Alaska, especially in the period since 1912. Following a brief summary of the discovery of Alaska by Vitus Bering, its botanical exploration by Georg W. Steller (1709- 1746), who also gave the world the first account of the seal and other fur- bearing marine animals, and the purchase of Alaska from Russia in 1867, the author describes the neglect and indifference of the United States towards its new possession, and the struggle of the people of Alaska for more voice in the development of its resources and government. Almost half of the book is concerned with the period of the author's adminis- tration, during which World War II brought rec- ognition to Alaska as a strategic military outpost, increased American interest in its development, and gave impetus to Alaska's determination "to fight on to validate the most basic of American prin- ciples — government by consent of the governed." HAWAII 4220. Kuykendall, Ralph S., and Arthur Grove Day. Hawaii: a history, from Polynesian kingdom to American commonwealth. New York, Prentice-Hall, 1948. 331 p. 48-9650 DU625.K778 Bibliography: p. 301-308. Located in the eastern half of the North Pacific, closer to America than any other important body 528 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES o£ land, the Hawaiian Islands by reason of their strategic position have become, since their discovery by Captain James Cook in 1778, "the Crossroads of the Pacific." The native inhabitants are a part of the Polynesian family, and the Islands were first firmly united by Kamehameha I, who ruled from 1782 to 1 8 19 and established the foundations of the Hawaiian kingdom. It endured until 1893, giving place to a Republic which sought annexation to the United States, and obtained it in 1898. As pro- fessors at the University of Hawaii, the authors were well-equipped to write the "main narrative of Ha- waii's history, from the days of the ancient feather- cloaked warriors to the present time, when Hawaii's fight for statehood has made it an issue of national importance." A third of the book is devoted to the period since the annexation of the Hawaiian Islands to the United States. The book should in- terest residents of Hawaii, students of Pacific his- tory, and the visitors who have added an extensive tourist trade to the Islands' basic sugar, pineapple, livestock, and fishing industries. PANAMA CANAL 4221. Mack, Gersde. The land divided, a history of the Panama Canal and other isthmian canal projects. New York, Knopf, 1944. xv, 650, xxxiv p. 44-33 2 3 5> TC773.M25 "Notes on map and diagram sources": p. 592-597. Bibliography: p. 598-650. This is a comprehensive and scholarly, yet read- able, history of the movement for a transportation route between the Adantic and the Pacific from the discovery of the New World to 1943. The pro- longed controversies that preceded the selection of a route have led the author to describe in detail "all interoceanic canal projects throughout the length of the American continent from the Arctic Ocean to Cape Horn," with emphasis on a canal through Nicaragua, the most formidable rival of Panama. In addition to the location of the canal, the mode of construction, costs, tools, labor policies, treaties, con- cessions, and ownership became the subjects of end- less controversies. Here the author attempts to combine "the political, economic, strategic, hygienic, and engineering aspects of the canal problem into a general history of the entire field." He deals with the early interest of the Spanish who first proposed to construct a canal as early as 1534; the French project directed by Ferdinand de Lesseps in the 1880's; and finally the eradication of yellow fever from the Isthmus by William Crawford Gorgas (no. 4823), and the construction of the Panama Canal by George W. Goethals (no. 4796). It was completed in 19 14 on the eve of World War I, and improvements were in progress at the beginning of World War II. The land, says the author, had been divided, but the world was far from united. PUERTO RICO 4222. Hanson, Earl Parker. Transformation: the story of modern Puerto Rico. New York, Simon & Schuster, 1955. 416 p. 54-9797 F1958.H3 Puerto Rico is unique in its status as a free com- monwealth associated with the United States and at the same time fully self-governed at home. Its emergence from a backward, undeveloped society since 1940, and especially since 1948 when Luis Munoz Marin became the first Governor elected by the people, "stands as a symbol of progress" for other undeveloped lands in the world. A remark- able program of industrialization has been launched; strides have been made in the amount and distribu- tion of income; public health services, education, and employment have been expanded; and the com- monwealth has become a "social laboratory of world importance." At one time executive secretary of the Planning Division of the Puerto Rico Reconstruc- tion Administration, the author, in 1952, took a class of students from the University of Delaware to Puerto Rico to study its achievements. Here he tells the story of Puerto Rico's "anguish, explosion, and current effort . . . which should be better known than it is, if only because it reflects great credit and honor on the United States," and on the ingenuity and determination of a people. Rafael Pico, chairman of the Puerto Rico Planning Board since 1942, discusses the economic, physical, and human characteristics of the various regions of Puerto Rico in The Geographic Regions of Puerto Rico (Rio Piedras, P. R., University of Puerto Rico Press, 1950. 256 p.), an expansion of his doctoral dissertation submitted to Clark University, Wor- cester, Mass., in 1938. Published as a Social Science Research Center study of the College of Social Sciences, University of Puerto Rico, and edited by Julian H. Steward and others, The People of Puerto Rico; a Study in Social Anthropology (Urbana, Uni- versity of Illinois Press, 1956. 540 p.) was under- taken "to analyze the contemporary culture and to explain it in terms of the historical changes which have occurred on the island, especially those which followed the transition from Spanish sovereignty to United States sovereignty a half century ago." XIII Travel and Travelers A. General Wor\s 4223-4230 B. Anthologies 4231-4235 C. 50 Selected Travelers, IJ43-1894 (chronologically arranged by the date of their travels) 4236-4389 THE literature of travel in America, which begins with the Journals of Columbus, or, if one prefers, with the Vinland Sagas, and continues unabated through the publications of the current year, is enormous. Arbitrarily enough, the present selection omits the literature of exploration, examples of which will be found in chapters VIII and XII, and is largely confined to travels in areas of the present continental United States after or during the process of settlement. This literature of travel has evoked and forms the subject matter of a secondary literature in which it is inventoried, described, or interpreted, in whole or in part. Section A is de- voted to this secondary literature and includes a bibliography (no. 4229), works on the modes and mechanics of travel (nos. 4226, 4227), native reac- tions to the accounts of foreign visitors (nos. 4225, 4230), and dissertations dissecting a certain body of travel literature as to both information and interpre- tation (nos. 4223, 4224, 4228). The primary literature is here presented in two forms: a group of anthologies which present ex- tracts from it (or, in one case, a group of brief originals published for the first time: no. 4233) ap- propriately arranged, introduced, and commented upon, and a roster of 50 selected travelers, well assorted as to nationality, outlook, interests, and itinerary. While many substitutions could be readily made in this selection, we doubt whether much increase in all-round intrinsic quality would thereby be achieved. For each traveler we provide an identification, a concise statement of his route, and some indication of his separate personality. We have concentrated our travelers in the century and a quarter, 1740-1865, and have included only two men who fall after that period. While the litera- ture after 1865 is quite as voluminous and readable as before, it does not, as a rule, have the same plain informativeness; it is rivaled by alternative sources relatively more copious and often more precise, and 431240—60- -35 it has not proved of equal value as materials for social and cultural historians. For each of our travelers we have listed his original publication or publications (sometimes in the best rather than the first edition), and, whenever available, an English translation for works in foreign languages, an American edition for works first published in Britain, and recent reprints or scholarly editions. In no case have we tried to list all versions or edi- tions, although this has sometimes happened. Both before and after 1865 travelers' narratives may tend to assume the form of essays on American society. There is no absolute line between some works we have listed here, and some which appear in our Section XV A, Some General Views of American Society. Crevecoeur, Tocqueville, Bryce, and Siegfried were all travelers before they under- took their famous interpretations, and the works of Prince Murat, Mrs. Trollope, Miss Martineau, and Paul Bourget listed below may seem, in purpose and in form at least, to differ little from theirs. There is also a close relation between this chapter and Sec- tions XI E and F, International Influences in our Intellectual History. Such influences are in part borne by travelers, and such works as Spoerri (no. 3771) and Torielli (no. 3779) would not be out of place here. 529 530 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES A. General Works 4223. Athearn, Robert G. Westward the Briton. New York, Scribner, 1953. 208 p. 53-11215 F594.A85 A digest of the comments of British travelers in the Far West from 1865 to 1900, significant because "by and large, these people were literate, intelligent, well-traveled," and furnished with a basis of com- parison. They found, not the "Wild West" most of them had been led to expect, but "a frontier civilization trying desperately to look like the culture from which it sprang, and on the whole, ashamed of the few rowdies who had given it a bad name in its first hours." There is an annotated list of travelers alphabetically arranged (p. 187-202). 4224. Berger, Max. The British traveller in America, 1 836-1 860. New York, Columbia University Press, 1943. 239 p. (Columbia Univer- sity. Faculty of Political Science. Studies in his- tory, economics, and public law, no. 502) 43-16988 H31.G7, no. 502 E165.B48 1943a "Critical bibliography": p. 189-229. This and Mesick below (no. 4228) are Columbia dissertations which, although two decades apart and published in different University series, are in effect continuous. Each notices briefly the travelers as a group, their motives and typical journeys, and then proceeds to a synthetic treatment of the major sub- jects contained in their books: customs, slavery, re- ligion, education, etc. Mr. Berger has a chapter on democratic government to which there is no counter- part in the earlier volume. He attempts larger gen- eralizations, and has furnished his bibliography with substantial annotations. 4225. Brooks, John Graham. As others see us; a study of progress in the United States. New York, Macmillan, 1908. 365 p. 8-3 1 147 E168.B883 Brooks (1846-1938), a Unitarian clergyman turned labor economist and Progressive reformer, became fascinated with the literature of American travel, and determined to use it as a gauge for American social progress. His initial chapters offer a lively critique of our early critics, with much assessment of reliability by common sense methods. Bryce, Miinsterberg, and H. G. Wells receive ex- tended reviews. The whole literature, he concludes, testifies to a "slow rise in social sensitiveness, and in social purpose to free ourselves from industrial and political tyrannies." 4226. Dunbar, Seymour. A history of travel in America, being an outline of the develop- ment in modes of travel from archaic vehicles of colonial times to the completion of the first trans- continental railroad. New York, Tudor, 1937. 1530 p. 38-7081 HE203.D77 1937 First published, 1915. Bibliography: p. [i445]-[i48i]. A history of transportation and of internal mi- gration as well as a history of travel, with much miscellaneous social history thrown in for good measure, but quite haphazard in arrangement. It contains, however, a mass of detailed information on the means and conditions of travel, and actual incidents of traveling endured by our hardy fore- fathers. It is abundantly illustrated from contem- porary prints. 4227. Earle, Alice (Morse) Stage-coach and tav- ern days. New York, Macmillan, 1935. 449 p. 3 8 -34442 E162.E2 1935 First published, 1900. Mrs. Earle wrote her "social and domestic his- tories of colonial times" at a time when academic historians regarded such matters as beneath their notice. Her easy-going and gossipy volume on the oldtime taverns and the stagecoaches that ran be- tween them has not been replaced. She tells of tavern landlords and tavern fare, of kill-devil (rum) and small drink, of signboards and ghost stories. There are chapters on "the pains of stage-coach travel," and on stage drivers and highwaymen. As is usual in her books, the greater part of the material is drawn from New England. 4228. Mesick, Jane Louise. The English traveller in America, 1785-1835. New York, Co- lumbia University Press, 1922. 370 p. (Columbia University studies in English and comparative lit- erature) 22-16243 E165.M58 See Berger above (no. 4224). 4229. Monaghan, Frank. French travellers in the United States, 1765-1932; a bibliography. New York, New York Public Library, 1933. xxii, 114 p. 33-22177 Z1236.M73 "1806 tide entries," including the various editions of an item and the translations, arranged alpha- betically by authors, with a "Selected chronological list of French travellers" (p. 107-108) and an index of places, persons, and important subjects. "An attempt has been made to locate copies in two American libraries" (preferably the New York Public Library and the Library of Congress); 267 titles not yet located in America. "Reprinted with additions and revisions from the Bulletin of The New Yor{ Public Library of March- April & June-October 1932." This bibliography includes not merely books of travel, but works of description, analysis, or criti- cism by French authors based upon an actual visit to the United States, and forms the most complete record of its kind. There are frequent annotations, some fairly long, on books or writers, as well as an introduction in which some fabricated "travels" are discussed. A few unnumbered entries represent prominent visitors who failed to leave any record of their impressions. TRAVEL AND TRAVELERS / 531 4230. Tuckerman, Henry T. America and her commentators. With a critical sketch of travel in the United States. New York, Scribner, 1864. 460 p. 3-8368 E157.T89 Contents. — Introduction. — Early discoverers and explorers.— French missionary exploration.— French travellers and writers.— British travellers and writ- ers.— English abuse of America. — Northern Euro- pean writers.— Italian travellers.— American travel- lers and writers. A pioneer synthesis of American travel literature, by a literary gendeman of old New York City (1813-71). Tuckerman aimed at a guide to the sources, a general view of American "traits and transitions" as therein reflected, and, incidentally, a "discussion of the comparative value and interest of the principal critics of our civilization." One of his conclusions is that foreign visitors are deficient observers of regional and personal variations in American life and character. B. Anthologies 4231. Commager, Henry Steele, ed. America in perspective; the United States through for- eign eyes. New York, Random House, 1947. xxiv > 3 8 9 P- 47-6240 E169.1.C67 Bibliography: p. [387J-389. 4232. Handlin, Oscar, ed. This was America; true accounts of people and places, manners and customs, as recorded by European travelers to the western shore in the eighteenth, nineteenth, and twentieth centuries. Cambridge, Harvard Uni- versity Press, 1949. ix, 602 p. 49-7940 E161.H3 Two anthologies of foreign travelers in America which hardly overlap. Mr. Commager's 35 ex- tracts, from Crevecoeur in 1782 to Victor Vinde in 1945, comprise brief and, in the main, generalizing and interpretive passages: "God made America for the poor" (Edward Dicey, 1863); "Americans are boys" (de Madariaga, 1928). Mr. Handlin's 40 extracts, from Pehr Kalm in 1744 to Andre Maurois in 1939, are in the main penetrating descriptions, with some reflective or critical commentaries. Mr. Commager has one Asiatic (No Yong-Park), but Mr. Handlin has a greater variety of continental Europeans, and many of his selections are here trans- lated into English for the first time. 4233. Mereness, Newton D., ed. Travels in the American colonies, edited under the auspices of the National Society of the Colonial Dames of America. New York, Macmillan, 1916. 693 p. 16-9410 E162.M57 Eighteen journals written between 1690 and 1783 and published for the first time, some from the Moravian Church Archives in North Carolina and some from the Draper Collection in Wisconsin, but most from transcripts made for the Library of Con- gress in British and French archives. Most of them record official errands of one kind or another; there are several missions to the Creeks, Cherokees, and Choctaws, and one French captivity among the Cherokees. A miscellany by ordinary observers, in which the realities of wilderness travel stand out the more starkly for the absence of any literary intention. 4234. Nevins, Allan, ed. America through British eyes. f New ed. rev. and enl.j New York, Oxford University Press, 1948. 530 p. 48-7848 E169.1.N52 1948 First edition published 1923 under tide: American Social History as Recorded by British Travellers. "An annotated bibliography": p. 503-519. Substantial extracts from 30 British travelers, from Henry Wansey in 1794 to Graham Hutton who in- terpreted die Midwest in 1946. The compiler groups his travelers in periods, and provides each section with an introduction characterizing indi- vidual attitudes and insights as well as the general outlook. These periods receive the labels "Utili- tarian Inquiry" (to 1825), "Tory Condescension" (1840), "Unbiased Portraiture" (1870), "Analysis" (1922), and "Boom, Depression and War." 532 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 4235. Tryon, Warren S., ed. A mirror for Ameri- cans; life and manners in the United States, 1790-1870, as recorded by American travelers. Chi- cago, University of Chicago Press, 1952. 3 v. (xx, 793, v p.) 5 2 -i3949 E161.T78 Bibliography: v. 3, p. 783-791. Contents. — 1. Life in the East. — 2. The Cotton Kingdom. — 3. The frontier moves west. An anthology containing 43 extensive extracts from Americans who traveled in and observed their own country. The editor furnishes an introduction to each writer, as well as more general ones. The final volume is in two parts, "The Valley of Democ- racy," on the trans-Appalachian West, and "West- ward the Course of Empire," on the trans-Missis- sippi West. Passages have been deleted from, and words added to, the original texts without editorial indication. C. 50 Selected Travelers, 1 743-1 894 {chronologically arranged by the date of their travels) 4236. 1743. JOHN BARTRAM (1699-1777) The elder Bartram was the self-taught founder of American botany and the creator of the famous Botanic Garden a few miles from Philadel- phia. In July and August 1743, in company with Conrad Weiser and Lewis Evans, he went north through the wilderness to Oswego, where a prepara- tory conference with the Indians was held. Bar- tram's journal did not reach London until 1750, and was published without the author's knowledge "at the instance of several gentlemen" who thought that a better knowledge of the back country was desirable in view of increasing rivalry with France. The editor is rather apologetic for the lack of literary art in "this plain yet sensible piece," and for the jour- nalist's concentration on "the several plants, and the various qualities of the soil and climate." Bartram took a keen interest in Indian ways, especially food preparation, hospitality, ceremonies, and techniques, and appends some concluding reflections on the origin of the red race, and the declining state of the Six Nations. 4237. Observations on the inhabitants, climate, soil, rivers, productions, animals, and other mat- ters worthy of notice. Made by Mr. John Bartram, in his travels from Pensilvania to Onondago, Oswego, and the Lake Ontario, in Canada. Lon- don, J. Whiston & B. White, 175 1. 94 p. 1-16152 F122.B129 4238. 4239. [Geneva, N. Y., W. F. Humphrey] 1895. 94 p. 16-9745 F122.B133 1744. ALEXANDER HAMILTON (1712- 1756) Dr. Hamilton was a graduate of the University of Edinburgh Medical School practicing at Annap- olis, Md. Suffering from incipient tuberculosis, he set out on a leisurely journey for the benefit of his health, and covered 1624 miles in a little less than four months, venturing as far north as Albany, N. Y., and York, Me. He was a sharp and satirical observer, with a keen eye for oafish behavior, and his journal is unique for its glimpses of polite and convivial society in the colonial cities. The in- habitants, he concluded, were more civilized in the great towns, "especially at Boston." His editor ap- pends over 50 pages of notes which completely elucidate the text and practically constitute a guide- book to the Eastern Seaboard in 1744. 4240. Gendeman's progress; the Itinerarium of Dr. Alexander Hamilton, 1744; edited with an introduction by Carl Bridenbaugh. Chapel Hill, Published for the Institute of Early American His- tory and Culture at Williamsburg, Va., by the Uni- versity of North Carolina Press, 1948. xxxii, 267 p. 48-28157 E162.H21 1948 The Itinerarium was privately printed in 1907. 4241. 1748-1751. PEHR KALM (1716-1779) Pehr or Peter Kalm was a Swedish natural- ist, a pupil of the great Linnaeus, a member of the Swedish Royal Academy of Sciences, and professor at the University of Abo in Finland. He was in the American colonies for nearly two and a half years, making his headquarters at Raccoon, N. J. (the present Swedesboro) and thence striking out into the back country of Pennsylvania and New York, with a three months' journey into French Canada. While his primary concern was with the flora and fauna, and their economic uses and potentialities, he was an indefatigable observer of every kind of natural and social fact, and was at pains to record them with a rare lucidity and precision. A fourth volume of his Resa remained unpublished and the manuscript was burnt, but many of the rougher TRAVEL AND TRAVELERS / 533 notes upon which it was based were discovered and published by Elfving in 1929, and a translation of these is included in Benson's English version. Kalm thought that Pennsylvania "enjoys such liberties that a citizen here may, in a manner, be said to live in his house like a king." 4242. En resa til Norra America, pa Kongl. Swenska Wetenskaps Academiens befall- ning, och publici kostnad, forrattad af Pehr Kalm. Stockholm, Tryckt pa L. Salvii kostnad, 1753-61. 3 v. 2-5526 E162.K14 Volume 1 and part of volume 2 treat of the au- thor's travels in Norway and England. 4243. Pehr Kalms Resa till Norra Amerika, a nyo utgifven at Fredr. Elfving och Georg Schau- man. Helsingfors, Tidnings- & Tryckeri-aktiebo- lagets Tryckeri, 1904-15. 3 v. (Skrifter utg. af Svenska litteratursallskapet i Finland, v. 66, 93, 120) 40-34888 E162.K144 4244. Pehr Kalms Resa till Norra Amerika, utgiven av Fredr. Elfving och Georg Schauman. Tillaggsband sammanstallt av Fredr. Elfving. Helsingfors [Mercators Tryckeri Aktiebolag] 1929. 235 p. (Skrifter utg. av Svenska litteratursallskapet i Finland, v. 210) 40-34888 E162.K145 4245. Travels into North America; containing its natural history, and a circumstantial account of its plantations and agriculture in general, with the civil, ecclesiastical and commercial state of the country, the manners of the inhabitants, and several curious and important remarks on various subjects. Translated into English by John Reinhold Forster. London, The Editor, 1770-71. 3 v. 2-13568 E162.K16 Volume 1 published at Warrington, printed by W. Eyres. This translation omits a great number of details, and everything relating to England. 4246. The America of 1750; Peter Kalm's travels in North America; the English version of 1770, revised from the original Swedish and edited by Adolph B. Benson, with a translation of new mate- rial from Kalm's diary notes. New York, Wilson- Erickson, 1937. 2 v. (797 p.) 37-22242 E162.K165 "The part on Norway and England has been omitted . . . The hitherto untranslated portion . . . has been done into English by Miss Edith M. L. Carlborg . . . and the present editor. The re- mainder ... is based on Forster's translation." — p. xv. "A bibliography of Peter Kalm's writings on America": v. 2, p. 770-776. 4247. 1773-1778. WILLIAM BARTRAM (1739- 1823) William Bartram was a younger son of John Bartram by his second wife, but the one who fol- lowed most completely in his worthy father's foot- steps. Dr. John Fothergill, the English Quaker botanist, provided funds for him "to search the Floridas, and the western parts of Carolina and Georgia, for the discovery of rare and useful pro- ductions of nature, chiefly in the vegetable king- dom." He left Philadelphia for Charleston in April 1773 and did not get back until Jan. 1778, when his father was dead and the city occupied by a British army. From Charleston he made two major tours: the first in 1773-75, up the rivers of Georgia and East Florida, and the second in 1776-77, into the Cherokee towns of the Southern Appalachians, and thence via the Creek towns to Mobile and the Mississippi. His concern with plants did not hinder Bartram from making major observations of snakes and frogs, and the longest list of American birds hitherto compiled. To Bartram the Indian was a noble savage indeed, closely and appreciatively viewed. Writers of the new romantic generation in England and France found an important source of poetic ideas and images in his book. It closes with a brief but systematic account of the Creeks, Cherokees, and Choctaws. If available, the contemporary editions with the copper plates are much to be preferred to the 20th-century reprints. 4248. Travels through North & South Carolina, Georgia, East & West Florida, the Cherokee country, the extensive territories of the Muscogulges, or Creek confederacy, and the country of the Choc- taws; containing an account of the soil and natural productions of those regions, together with obser- vations on the manners of the Indians. Embellished with copper-plates. Philadelphia, James & Johnson, 1791. xxxiv, 522 p. Rc-2676 F213.B28 4249. The travels of William Bartram, edited by Mark Van Doren. New York, Macy-Masius, 1928. 414 p. (An American bookshelf) 28-3822 F213.B288 4250. With an introd. by John Livings- ton Lowes. New York, Facsimile Library, exclusive distributors: Barnes & Noble, 1940. 414 p. 40-11235 F213.B289 534 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 4251. 1780-1782. FRANQOIS JEAN, MAR- QUIS DE CHASTELLUX (1734-1788) Chastellux accompanied Rochambeau's army to America with the rank of major general and was a highly cultured nobleman, of literary bent, and tinged by the Enlightenment. He made three journeys as his military service permitted; on the first (Nov. 1780-Jan. 1781) he went by way of West Point and Washington's headquarters to Phila- delphia and Chester, and returned by way of Albany and Saratoga. In the spring of 1782, starting from Williamsburg he made an excursion through Vir- ginia to see the Natural Bridge. At the close of the same year he went from Hartford to Portsmouth, N. H., thence south to Boston, and eventually, by way of Washington's headquarters at Newburgh and Bethlehem, to Philadelphia. Chastellux was especially concerned to visit the earlier battlefields of the war then drawing to its close, and to narrate such of its incidents as came to his ears. He took a sympathetic interest in each home which he visited, and in its inhabitants, noting each "perfect beauty" that he encountered, and he turned a sharp eye on inns, innkeepers, and their accommodations. He describes the brilliant society of wartime Phila- delphia and the crude lodgings of the Virginia back- woods alike with imperturbable good humor. The English versions of his book are provided with ob- trusive annotations by the anonymous translator. 4252. Voyages de m. le marquis de Chastellux dans l'Amerique Septentrionale dans les annees 1780, 1781, & 1782. Paris, Prault, 1786. 2 v. 2-6014 E163.C50 4253. Travels in North-America in the years 1780, 1781, and 1782. Translated from the French by an English gentleman [George Grieve], who resided in America at that period. With notes by the translator. London, G. G. J. & J. Robinson, 1787. 2 v. 2-6666 E163.C54 4254. Also, a biographical sketch of the author; letters from Gen. Washington to the Marquis de Chastellux; and notes and corrections, by the American editor. New- York, White, Gal- laher, & White, 1827. 416 p. 18-18238 E163.C57 4255. 1783-1784. JOHANN DAVID SCHOPF (1752-1800) Dr. Schopf was a native of Bayreuth educated in science and medicine at the University of Erlangen, and had made scientific travels in central Europe before taking his degree. The next year he came to America as chief surgeon of the Ansbach mer- cenaries in the pay of Great Britain, and on the con- clusion of hostilities took the opportunity of travel- ing before returning to Europe. He went from New York to Philadelphia, thence across Penn- sylvania to Pittsburgh, back to Baltimore, and south to Charleston, where he took ship for East Florida. He is objective, equable, and indefatigable; min- erals and mining are his first interest, but he records social matters and recent history with the same par- ticularity. Morrison's translation has notes of iden- tification and some of comparison at the end of each volume. 4256. Reise durch einige der mitdern und siid- lichen Vereinigten Nordamerikanischen Staaten nach Ost-Florida und den Bahama-Inseln unternommen in den Jahren 1783 und 1784. Erlan- gen, J. J. Palm, 1788. 2 v. 5-13744 E164.S37 4257. Travels in the Confederation, 1783-1784. Translated and edited by Alfred J. Morrison. Philadelphia, W. J. Campbell, 191 1. 2 v. 11-12073 E164.S38 4258. 1788. JACQUES PIERRE BRISSOT DE WARVILLE (1754-1793) Brissot was an active propagandist for the French Revolution who came to America "to examine the effects of liberty on the character of man, of society, and of government." No more enthusiastic book on the United States has been written; he was elated in Boston and rapturous in Philadelphia. Physically, j he did not cover much ground; from Boston he went south as far as Mount Vernon, and north to Portsmouth just before he went home; but most of his stay was spent at Philadelphia, which he describes at some length. He admired the Quakers for the austerity of their worship, the serenity of their per- sonal characters, and the simplicity, economy, in- dustry, and perseverance of their way of life, to which he ascribed the prosperity of Pennsylvania. He gives special attention to the condition and character of the Negroes, free and slave, and to efforts toward their improvement, for the abolition of slavery and the slave trade, and for the recolonization of American Negroes in Africa. He spends much time abusing Chastellux, whom he regards as a courdy traducer of freemen! 4259. Nouveau voyage dans les Etats-Unis de l'Amerique Septentrionale, fait en 1788. Paris, Buisson, 1791. 3 v. 1-25369 E164.B89 Half-tide of v. 3: De la France et des Etats-Unis, ou De l'importance de la revolution de l'Amerique pour le bonheur de la France; des rapports de ce royaume et des Etats-Unis, des avantages recipro- ques qu'ils peuvent retirer de leurs liaisons de com- merce, par Etienne Claviere, et }. P. Brissot (War- ville). Nouvelle edition. 4260. New travels in the United States of America. Performed in 1788. Translated from the French. New York, Printed by T. & J. Swords for Berry & Rodgers, 1792. 264 p. 42-29553 E164.B8917 1792a Contains a translation of the first two volumes only, of the three in the original French edition. 4261. 1793. JOHN DRAYTON (1766-1822) Drayton, a member of one of the leading families of South Carolina, had completed his edu- cation in England, and was starting out in law and politics at Charleston when he undertook this tour of four and a half months in New York and New England in the latter part of 1793. The book has three plates engraved from Drayton's own rather simple sketches. He took small interest in the New England countryside but was quite absorbed by the municipal life of New York, Providence, Boston, Portsmouth, and New Haven. At Boston he accompanied the selectmen on their annual visita- tion of the public schools. For these and for the other educational institutions of New England Drayton felt the greatest admiration, which he turned into effective action during his first term as governor, when he took the lead in establishing the University of South Carolina. On the return jour- ney, the Connecticut Sabbath overtook him on the way to New Haven at Durham, where he had a triste sejour, and indignandy declined the landlord's invitation to attend meeting. Drayton was a senti- mental and at times a tearful traveler, but his work is full of a desire to learn, and is completely free of all sectional rancor. 4262. Letters written during a tour through the northern and eastern states of America. Charleston, S. C, Harrison & Bowen, 1794. 138 p. A17-1387 E164.D76 4263. 1 794-1 798. MEDERIC LOUIS ELIE MOREAU DE SAINT-MERY (1750- 1819) Moreau de St.-Mery was a Creole jurist who had collected the laws of the French West Indies. Resi- dent in Paris, he was a leader in the early stages of the French Revolution, but was eventually pro- scribed and narrowly escaped the guillotine. After TRAVEL AND TRAVELERS / 535 traveling from Norfolk to New York, he settled at Philadelphia, where he set up a bookstore and pub- lishing house that became a center for French emigres in America. His Voyage remained among his manuscripts in the Archives Coloniales until it was noted and put into print by Professor Mims. Mr. and Mrs. Roberts' translation of the Mims text is often loose and sometimes quite misleading. The Voyage is a composite manuscript: the basis is Moreau's journal, quite sketchy for his four years in Philadelphia, in which have been inserted a number of letters received, and descriptions of Amer- ican cities: Norfolk and Portsmouth, Baltimore, New York and Brooklyn, and, at considerable length, Philadelphia. It is in the last that occur his unique observations on intimate manners and low life, that require to be taken with more cau- tion than Mr. Roberts supposes. The Voyage is of course a principal source for emigre life in America during those years. 4264. Voyage aux Etats-Unis de 1'Amerique, 1793- 1798. Edited with an introd. and notes, by Stewart L. Mims. New Haven, Yale University Press, 19 13. xxxvi, 440 p. (Yale historical pub- lications; manuscripts and edited texts, 2) 14-1432 E164.M83 4265. Moreau de St. Mery's American journey, 1793-1798, translated and edited by Kenneth Roberts t and] Anna M. Roberts. Introd. by Stewart L. Mims. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1947. xxi, 394 p. 47-3941 E164.M832 4266. 1795-1797. FRANQOIS ALEXANDRE FREDERIC, DUC DE LA ROCHE- FOUCAULD LIANCOURT (1747- 1827) La Rochefoucauld-Liancourt was one of the most liberal of the French noblesse and active in many good works, but was nevertheless proscribed in the course of the Revolution, and became an exile in the United States. He traveled widely in order to dispel the ennui and melancholy that beset him, and he wrote voluminously concerning what he saw and what he was able to learn by interrogation. He did not cross the Alleghanies, and his intention of visiting the backcountry of Georgia and Carolina was frustrated by a fever which he contracted at Savannah, but he missed little else, and visited a number of towns more than once. His largest single journey, through the backcountry of Pennsylvania and New York into Canada, and back through New England to Philadelphia, occupied seven months of 1797. He modeled himself upon the tours of 53^ / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Arthur Young in France, and reports at length upon the processes of agriculture and the economic situation of particular farms. He includes essays on the government and laws of most of the States which he visited and concludes with general obser- vations on the Constitution, public finance, com- merce, and land system of the United States as a whole. 4267. Voyage dans les Etats-Unis d'Amerique, fait en 1795, 1796, et 1797. Paris, Du Pont, l'an VII de la Republique [ 1799] 8 v. 8-1030 E164.L3 4268. Travels through the United States of North America, the country of the Iroquois, and Upper Canada, in the years 1795, 1796, and 1797; with an authentic account of Lower Canada. Lon- don, R. Phillips, 1799. 2 v. 1-24772 E164.L33 Translated by H. Neuman. 4269. 1795-1797. ISAAC WELD (1774-1856) Isaac Weld, Jr., was barely of age when he came from Ireland to America to inquire whether it could furnish an eligible and agreeable place of refuge from the convulsions of Europe. He spent a year and two or three months here, but a good half of his book is devoted to an extended tour of Canada. It is provided with some very competent illustrations from his own pencil. While he did not enter New England, or go further South than the Great Dismal Swamp, he has faithful descriptions of travel in the back country of Virginia, Pennsylvania, and New York. He is not contemptuous or mali- cious, but he found the conditions of life harsh and manners crude, and he left this continent "without a sigh, and without entertaining the slightest wish to revisit it." His book went through four editions by 1800, was reprinted as late as 1807, and was trans- lated into French, Italian, Dutch, and German. 4270. Travels through the states of North America, and the provinces of Upper and Lower Canada, during the years 1795, 1796, and 1797. London, }. Stockdale, 1799. xxiv, 464 p. 5-20874 E164.W44 4271. 1796^1815. TIMOTHY DWIGHT (1752- 1817) Dwight, New England clergyman, theologian, and poet, was chosen president of Yale College in 1795. For the preservation of his health, he devoted the autumn vacations to a regular course of travel- ing, and began taking notes which he wrote up at considerable length on his return to New Haven, in order that those who lived eighty or a hundred years later might know what had been the appearance of their country. New York he included in his ob- servations as a majority of its inhabitants were de- rived from New England, and the rest intimately connected there by business, and other attachments. President Dwight was a most objective traveler, and a mighty purveyor of information; along with his topography, economic data, and descriptions of scenery, he gives many passages of local history and biographical sketches of local worthies. There are, he is careful to explain, no adventures, which "must be very rare in a country perfectly quiet, and orderly in its State of Society" — "I have not met with one." He continued his autumn tours through 18 15, after which they were suspended by the collapse of his health. His manuscripts were put through the press by his sons Timothy and William T. Dwight; to the travels proper, in volume 4, they have added a num- ber of dissertations, on the errors of European travel- ers, and on the language, learning, religion, manufactures, etc., of New England. 4272. Travels in New England and New York. New Haven, T. Dwight, 1821-22. 4 v. 1-7597 F8.D99 4273. 1799-1802. JOHN DAVIS (1774-1854) Davis had been a wanderer since the age of 11 when he came to America at 24, and led the life of an itinerant schoolmaster and tutor up and down the Eastern seaboard from New York to Charleston. Since he did much of his journeying on foot, and conversed with every sort and condition of person from Aaron Burr to the Negro slave Dick, and since impecuniousness never affected his good nature, his book is full of bright glimpses of everyday life from angles which other travelers rarely attained. He had the experience of being refused a job by Secretary Gallatin, and he presents the first romantic version of the Pocahontas legend. 4274. Travels of four years and a half in the United States of America; during 1798, 1799, 1800, 1801, and 1802. London, T. Ostell, 1803. 454 p. 1-24800 E164.D26 4275. With an introd. and notes by A. J. Morrison. New York, Holt, 1909. 429 p. 9-35909 E164.D28 4276. 1802. FRANgOIS ANDRE MICHAUX (1770-1855) Michaux was, like his father, a distinguished French botanist and came to the United States under the auspices of the Minister of the Interior, although apparently on a very limited budget. He was in this country for over 16 months, 1801-03, but the western journey which is the main theme of his book occu- pied less than four months in the summer of 1802. From Philadelphia he went by stage to Shippens- burg, Pa., and from there to Pittsburgh he shared a horse with an army officer. He went down the Ohio in a dug-out canoe, and overland to Lexington, Ky., on foot. For the rest of his journey, to Nash- ville, and back through the Carolinas to Charleston, he had his own horse. His primary concerns were useful plants and the state of agriculture, but he also noted stockbreeding, manufactures, wages, the economy in general, and any cultivation of scien- tific interests. He had not intended to write up his travels and lamented his failure to record innumer- able details which would have added to the interest of his narrative, which, however, is businesslike and informative. 4277. Voyage a l'ouest des Monts Alleghanys, dans les etats de l'Ohio, du Kentucky, et du Ten- nessee, et retour a Charleston par les Hautes-Caro- lines, entrepris pendent l'an X-1802, sous les auspices de son excellence, M. Chaptal, Ministre de l'interieur. Paris, Levrault, Schoell, 1804. 312 p. 1-24797 E164.M62 4278. Travels to the westward of the Allegany Mountains, in the states of the Ohio, Ken- tucky, and Tennessee, and return to Charlestown, through the upper Carolinas. Undertaken in the year x, 1802, under the auspices of His Excellency M. Chaptal, minister of the interior. Faithfully translated from the original French, by B. Lambert. London, J. Mawman, 1805. xvi, 350 p. 1-24798 E164.M63 4279. 1805-1812. SIR AUGUSTUS JOHN FOSTER, BART. (1780-1848) Foster, an English career diplomat with extensive connections in the aristocracy, spent three years in Washington as Secretary of Legation in 1805-08, and returned as Minister for a year's stay preceding the outbreak of the War of 1812. During the sum- mers he traveled into the valley of Virginia, and northward along the Atlantic seaboard. When Eng- lish books of American travel became abundant and controversial, Foster began to work up his old note- books into a book on the United States, but only a few excerpts were published during his lifetime. Foster's position gave him exceptional opportuni- ties for knowing and describing the society of the capital and of the larger planters in its neighbor- hood. While he found Pennsylvania democracy 431240—60- -36 TRAVEL AND TRAVELERS / 537 quite uncongenial, he was highly appreciative of the settled communities of Long Island and New England. Much of his effort is wasted in an attempt to demonstrate that the respectable part of the Amer- ican people is of English stock. 4280. Jeffersonian America: notes on the United States of America, collected in the years 1805-6-7 and n-12. Edited with an introd. by Richard Beale Davis. San Marino, Calif., Hunt- ington Library, 1954. xx, 356 p. 54-8926 E164.F76 1954 4281. 1807-1808. CHRISTIAN SCHULTZ Christian Schultz, Jr., was a young New Yorker who wished to visit Niagara and the great rivers of the West, and who, provoked at finding no information on record useful to would-be trav- elers, undertook to provide it himself. He there- fore became the most systematic of travelers, reck- oning the miles between towns and other landmarks, taking latitude and longitude at intervals, and com- piling this into a preliminary 6-page Table of Distances. He furnishes precise information on the mode of traveling, the price of freights and other expenses, the time required, and the risks and dan- gers of the road. He claimed for himself only the merits of minuteness and fidelity, but in fact he is a straightforward reporter whose method and scope improve as he proceeds and his work, far from being a mere guidebook, is a neglected classic of American travel. He presents a complete picture of the keelboat age in the West as it affected the uncommercial traveler. At Pittsburgh he pur- chased a completely equipped Kentucky boat for $130, and when this was destroyed by driftwood at the mouth of the Ohio, he had to pay $150 for a New Orleans boat, which would have cost only half as much at Pittsburgh— and it had a leaky roof. He advanced part of their wages to two of his boat- men, only to have each decamp at the first good opportunity. He gives one of the few glimpses of the society of the French settlements in Missouri, where he was compelled to winter by ice in the Mississippi, and where, he thought, eternal dancing and gambling absorbed the inhabitants. His pic- tures of boating life on the Mississippi and of the waterfront life of Natchez recall the later work of Mark Twain. 4282. Travels on an inland voyage through the States of New- York, Pennsylvania, Virginia, Ohio, Kentucky and Tennessee, and through the territories of Indiana, Louisiana, Mississippi, and 53§ / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES New-Orleans; performed in the years 1807 and 1808; including a tour of nearly six thousand miles. New- York, Isaac Riley, 1810. 2 v. in 1. 1-24789 E164.S39 4283. 1814-1819. HENRY COGSWELL KNIGHT (1788-1835) Knight was a New England minor poet, M. A. of Brown University, who spent some five years in the remoter regions of his own country, presumably being engaged as tutor by well-to-do planters. He summed up his experiences in six polished epistles to his brother, full of literary allusions and quaint turns of phrase, written from Philadelphia, Wash- ington, Virginia, Kentucky, New Orleans, and the packet ship making the return voyage through the Gulf of Mexico. Knight, if a conventional poet, was highly sensitive to sectional differences in land- scape, manners, speech, and artifacts, and his letters give vivid impressions of these contrasting locales. His New England viewpoint asserts itself from time to time, but not to any excessive or ill-natured de- gree; he occasionally deplores, but never denounces. 4284. Letters from the South and West; by Arthur Singleton, esq. [pseud.] Boston, Published by Richardson & Lord, J. H. A. Frost, printer, 1824. 159 p. 1-21522 E213.K69 4285. 1816-1817. FRANCIS HALL (d. 1833) Francis Hall was a lieutenant of the 14th Light Dragoons, who rose to the rank of colonel a few years later. From New York City he went north and made a tour of Canada before swinging back through backwoods New York and Pennsyl- vania to Philadelphia, and thence southward to Charleston, the whole journey filling almost one year. These objective and fact-filled pages are free of the least trace of bitterness from the war which had terminated barely a year earlier. Lieutenant Hall took a cheerful view of the minds, manners, morals, and prospects of ordinary Americans, and found the high point of his journey in his visit to the philosopher of Monticello. 4286. Travels in Canada and the United States, in 1816 and 1 817. London, Longman, Hurst, Rees, Orme, & Brown, 1818. 543 p. 1-26822 E165.H19 4288. 1816-1817. BARON DE MONTLEZUN This anonymous work is attributed to a Baron de Mondezun. The author represents him- self as a veteran of the American War of Inde- pendence, who saw Washington at the siege of Yorktown. There was a Barthelemi-Sernin du Moulin de Montlezun de la Barthelle (b. 1762) in the Regiment of Touraine which fought there. The author went from Norfolk to New York, with a visit to Montpelier and Monticello, sailed to New Orleans, where he remained over a month, and on his return from Cuba spent three weeks at Charles- ton. A French Royalist, he is utterly scornful of the United States and its government, its cities and their people. Oddly enough, this contemptuous attitude does not interfere with much sharp observa- tion and accurate description, or with an apprecia- tion of the American "gentlemen" whom he met along his way — although he insisted that they were a very small minority. 4289. Voyage fait dans les annees 1816 et 1817, de New Yorck a la Nouvelle-Orleans, et de l'Orenoque au Mississippi; par les Petites et les Grandes-Antilles, contenant des details absolument nouveaux sur ces contrees; des portraits de person- nages influant dans les Etats-Unis, et des anecdotes sur les refugies qui y sont etablis; par l'auteur des Souvenirs des Antilles. Paris, Gide fils, 181 8. 2 v. 2-368-M2 E165.M78 4290. 1818-1820. FRANCES (WRIGHT) DARUSMONT (1795-1852) The celebrated Fanny Wright on her first visit to America; she returned in 1824 and from 1829 lived in New York, and for two decades was a lec- turer on behalf of feminism and other reforms. Her route on this occasion was largely a circle to Niagara, through Canada and Vermont, and southward to Washington; she pens a general social commentary in her letters from New York City. In her early outlook, America is a land of liberty and repub- lican simplicity, a glowing contrast to the Old World. 4291. Views of society and manners in America; in a series of letters from that country to a friend in England, during the years 1818, 1819, and 1820. By an Englishwoman. London, Longman, Hurst, Rees, Orme, & Brown, 1821. 523 p. 2-9930 E165.D22 4287. Boston, Republished from the Lon- don ed. by Wells & Lilly, 1818. 332 p. 1-26824 E165.H191 4292. From the 1st London ed. with ad- ditions and corrections by the author. New York, E. Bliss & E. White, 1821. 387 p. 2-9929 E165.D23 TRAVEL AND TRAVELERS / 539 4293. 1 823-1 830. PRINCE ACHILLE MURAT (1801-1847) This nephew o£ Napoleon Bonaparte and some- time Prince Royal of the Two Sicilies lived in America from 1823-30, when he returned to Europe in the hope that the Bonapartist cause might profit from the revolutions of that year. Meanwhile he had married an American wife and acquired a plan- tation near Tallahassee. The first four of the let- ters to Count Thibeaudau [sic; the usual form of the name is Thibaudeau] which compose this vol- ume were written from Florida; they were pub- lished in 1830 as Lettres sur les Etats-Unis. The remaining six were written during his sojourn in Europe. Murat, a professed republican, presented American ways and institutions as models for Euro- pean imitation, defending slavery as a tolerable and inevitable condition. His third letter, "Description des nouveaux etablissemens," is a remarkable pano- rama of the successive stages of civilization in fron- tier areas. The story of Murat's life in America is reconstructed in Alfred J. Hanna's A Prince in Their Midst (Norman, University of Oklahoma Press, 1946. 275 p). 4294. Esquisse morale et politique des Etats-Unis de i'Amerique du Nord. Paris, Crochard, 1832. xxvii, 389 p. 2- 37° E165.M94 4295. A moral and political sketch cf the United States of North America. With a Note on Negro slavery, by Junius Redivivus [pseud, of W. B. Adams] London, E. Wilson, 1833. xxxix, 402 p. 3-18833 E165.M95 4296. America and the Americans. Translated from the French and edited by H. J. S. Brad- field. New York, W. H. Graham, 1849. 260 p. 2-371 E165.M952 4297. 1825-1826. BERNHARD KARL, DUKE OF SAXE-WEIMAR-EISENACH (1792- 1862) The Duke of Saxe-Weimar was in command of the Dutch army and obtained leave of absence from the King of the Netherlands in order to fulfill a desire of his youth when he came to America in the summer of 1825. He spent nearly eleven months in traversing the East from Boston to Charleston, and in making the great Southern circuit by New Orleans, St. Charles, Mo., and back by way of Pitts- burgh. He had traveled over 7,135 miles when he wrote: "To my great and sincere regret, the hour at length arrived when I was constrained to leave this happy and prosperous land, in which I had seen and learned so much, and in which much more still remained to be seen and learned: sed fata trahunt homineml" The Duke, of course, met the best people in all parts of the country, especially resident foreigners of distinction. 4298. Reise Sr. Hoheit des Herzogs Bernhard zu Sachsen-Weimar-Eisenach durch Nord- Amerika in den Jahren 1825 und 1826. Hrsg. von Heinrich Luden. Weimar, W. Hoffmann, 1828. 2 v. in 1. 1-28054 E165.B52 4299. Travels through North America, during the years 1825 and 1826. Philadelphia, Carey, Lea, & Carey, 1828. 2 v. in 1. 2-356 E165.B53 4300. 1 827-1 828. BASIL HALL (1788-1844) Captain Hall of Edinburgh was a retired naval officer, a veteran of the Napoleonic wars who had traveled widely after their conclusion. During more than 13 months in America, he made a con- siderable tour of Upper Canada, and went from Boston to Savannah, and thence overland to New Orleans. He wrote little concerning his return by way of the Mississippi and Ohio Rivers. Capt. Flail was the first Briton to arouse the ire of the Amer- icans as a betrayer of their hospitality, and sub- stantial replies to his book were penned by Richard Biddle and Calvin Colton. He is indeed consistently critical, but his criticism all springs from his con- viction that democracy is an inferior form of gov- ernment and society; he argues his case at some length and is quite free from the irritability and captiousness which mark many of his successors. The letters of his wife, Margaret Hunter Hall ( 1799- 1876), have been edited by Una Pope-Hennessy: The Aristocratic Journey; Being the Outspoken Let- ters of Mrs. Basil Hall Written during a Fourteen Months' Sojourn in America (New York, Putnam, 193 1. 308 p.) Forty drawings which Capt. Hall made with the "camera lucida" were etched and published separately. 4301. Travels in North America in the years 1827 and 1828. Edinburgh, Cadell; London, Simpkin & Marshall, 1829. 3 v. 1-26817 E165.H17 4302. Philadelphia, Carey, Lea, & Carey, 1829. 2 v. 1-26818 E165.H171 4303. 1827-1831. FRANCES (MILTON) TROLLOPE ( 1 780-1 863) Mrs. Trollope came from England via New Orleans in order to set up a store for imported 540 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES merchandise at Cincinnati and so recoup the family fortunes. She spent nearly four years in America, 1827-31, of which a little more than two were in Cincinnati. Cincinnati she would have liked much better if the people had not dealt so very largely in hogs, and the trouble with America was the want of refinement. Her strictures on their deportment suc- ceeded in making Americans angrier than any for- eign observer before or since, but Mark Twain thought that she was merely telling the truth. Mr. Smalley's introduction to his edition gives a complete and scholarly narrative of her American venture. 4304. Domestic manners of the Americans. Lon- don, Whittaker, Treacher, 1832. 2 v. 2-396 E165.T84 4305. London, Whittaker, Treacher; New York, Reprinted for the booksellers, 1832. 325 p. 16-25372 E165.T842 4306. Edited, with a history of Mrs. Trol- lope's adventures in America, by Donald A. Smalley. New York, Knopf, 1949. lxxxiii, 454, xix p. 49-11380 E165.T84 1949 Bibliography: p. [444J-454. 4310. 1833-1834. EDWARD STRUTT ABDY (1791-1846) This fellow of Jesus College, Cambridge, was an intensive rather than an extensive traveler, but he went southwestward into the valley of Virginia, and thence into Kentucky and to Cincinnati. He accompanied a British commissioner charged with investigating American prisons, and his earlier chap- ters have a strong "social science" interest: he re- ports very objectively on prisons, hospitals, orphan- ages and homes for juvenile offenders, schools, poorhouses, asylums for the insane and the deaf and dumb, and on wages, labor disputes, and strikes. However, his narrative soon develops an obsession with the Negro problem, and he heatedly assails, not merely slavery, but the "aristocracy of the skin" in general, so that he is equally condemnatory of the treatment of the free Negro in the North, and he tilts regularly against the American Colonization Society. 431 1. Journal of a residence and tour in the United States of North America, from April 1833 to October 1834. London, J. Murray, 1835. 3 v. 1-26738 E165.A13 4307. 1832-1834. MAXIMILIAN ALEXAN- DER PHILIPP, PRINZ VON WIED- NEUWIED ( 1 782-1 867) This German princeling had already traveled in South America when he essayed the North Ameri- can wilderness at the age of 50. He crossed the con- tinent from Boston to St. Louis and ascended the Missouri River to Fort Mackenzie, making consid- erable stays at Fort Union, and wintering at Fort Clarke. His interests are those of a naturalist and especially an anthropologist; he tells all he could learn of the way of life of the northwestern Indians and recreates the life of these outposts of the fur trade. He was accompanied by the artist Carl Bod- mer, whose 81 "elaborately colored plates" form one of the great attractions of the original publication. 4308. Reise in das innere Nord-America in den Jahren 1832 bis 1834. Coblenz, J. Hoel- scher, 1839-41. 2 v. and atlas. 2-5381 E165.W64 4309. Travels in the interior of North America. Translated from the German, by Hannibal Evans Lloyd. London, Ackermann, 1843. 520 p. 2-5382 E165.W65 The appendix on Indian languages and some matters of detail are omitted in the translation. 4312. 1833-1835. MICHEL CHEVALIER (1806-1879) Chevalier was one of the early French socialists and a publicist of great reputation in his own day. Sent by the French Ministry of the Interior to study American internal improvements, he spent nearly two years here. While most of his chapters are general discussions of aspects of society and public ■ affairs, he devotes separate descriptions to Lowell, Mass., and its factory girls, Pittsburgh, Cincinnati and its hog-slaughtering, and the watering-place of Bedford Springs, Pa. He is acute, philosophical, and critical without being hostile, and makes fre- quent comparisons of American with European society. A long chapter on intercommunications, surveying the canal and railroad systems built or in progress, reflects his original purpose. 4313. Lettres sur l'Amerique du Nord. 3. ed. rev., corr., augm. de plusiers chapitres et d'une table raisonnee des matieres. Paris, C. Gosselin, 1838. 2 v. n-22310 E165.C535 4314. Society, manners and politics in the United States; being a series of letters on North America. Translated from the 3d Paris ed. by Thomas Gamaliel Bradford. Boston, Weeks, Jor- dan, 1839. 467 p. 1-26758 E165.C54 TRAVEL AND TRAVELERS / 54 1 43!5- 1 834-1 836. HARRIET MARTINEAU (1802-1876) Miss Martineau was a frail English gentlewoman who had just emerged from impecunious obscurity and become a literary lioness, by means of her 9- volume Illustrations of Political Economy, an odd mixture of fiction and classical economic theory. She undertook to recuperate from her literary labors by travels in the United States, which lasted nearly two years, and included two western tours, one by way of New Orleans and one by way of the lake cities, with a winter in Boston between them. The first product of her visit, Society in America, is an extended moral assessment, topic by topic: politics and economics, the "idea of honour," women, chil- dren, sufferers, "utterance," and religion, with inci- dents from her travels introduced as illustrations under the appropriate heading. She concluded that "the civilization and the morals of the Americans fall below their own principles," as would any other subjected to so intense a spinsterly scrutiny. At the request of her publishers, she made further drafts upon her journals for her Retrospect of Western Travel, which aimed "to communicate more of my personal narrative, and of the lighter characteristics of men, and incidents of travel" than the first. It won a greater popular success, and should best be read before Society in America. 4316. Society in America. London, Saunders & Odey, 1837. 3 v. 1-27890 E165.M39 4317. New York, Saunders & Odey, 1837. 2 v. NNC 4318. Retrospect of western travel. London, Saun- ders & Odey, 1838. 3 v. 37-15429 E165.M379 43I9- London, Saunders & Otley; New York, Sold by Harper, 1838. 2 v. 1-27893 E165.M38 4320. 1835, 1859. 1865) RICHARD COBDEN (1804- Cobden made two visits to the United States, the first in 1835, before winning fame as the leader of the English radicals, and the second in 1859. On the first he went from New York to Pittsburgh and back to Boston; on the second he represented British investors in the Illinois Central Railroad and trav- eled extensively over its routes in private cars. Dur- ing the first journey he was impressed by American technological and industrial enterprise; on the sec- ond he described the life of settlers on the western prairie and, with enthusiasm, the new free public schools. 4321. American diaries; edited, with an introd. and notes, by Elizabeth Hoon Cawley. Princeton, Princeton University Press. 1952. xii, 233 p. 52-5850 E166.C6 The manuscripts of the two diaries are in the British Museum (Add. mss. 43807 and 43808). Bibliography: p. 221-224. 4322. 1836. EDMUND FLAGG (1815-1890) In the summer of 1836 this young Bowdoin graduate undertook a ramble over the prairies, "in the hope of renovating the energies of a shattered constitution." He sent in a series of travel sketches to the Louisville Journal and during the next year substantially reworked them for publication in book form. His "Far West" is not very far; he went by steamboat from Louisville to St. Louis, and thence up the Illinois River to Peoria. He transferred to horseback and rode in leisurely manner over the prairies of central Illinois as far as Decatur. He was of a literary and sentimental bent, and his style is often artificial and turgid. However, he rode with a mind open to the natural beauties and historical associations of the region, and so produced a very different kind of travel book from the majority of his contemporaries. 4323. The Far West: or, A tour beyond the moun- tains. Embracing oudines of western life and scenery; sketches of the prairies, rivers, ancient mounds, early setdements of the French, etc. New York, Harper, 1838. 2 v. 1-8701 F353.F57 4324. 1 837-1 838. FREDERICK MARRYAT (1792-1848) Captain Marryat, a British naval officer who had won sudden fame by his novels of seafaring life, came to America in May 1837 and traveled exten- sively in the Northeast and Northwest for about a year. He crossed Wisconsin from Green Bay, went up the Mississippi to Fort Snelling, and returned by the Ohio to the hot springs of Virginia. His object, he tells us, was "to ascertain what were the effects of a democratic form of government and climate upon a people which, with all its foreign admixture, may still be considered as English." These effects, it becomes evident after a few pages, were exclusively degenerative in nature: "The scum is uppermost . . . The prudent, the enlightened, the wise, and the good, have all retired into the shade, preferring to pass a life of quiet retirement, rather than submit to the insolence and dictation 542 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES of a mob." Marryat is the archetype of the irascible High Tory at large, resenting every intrusion upon his privacy, and ascribing every contretemps along his way to some sinister operation of the democratic principle. The diary comes to an end two-thirds of the way through the second volume of the first series, and the remaining volumes are filled with a series of topical essays on a variety of subjects. 4325. A diary in America, with remarks on its in- stitutions. London, Longman, Orme, Brown, Green, & Longmans, 1839. 3 v. 2-359 E165.M35 First series. 4326. 2 v. Philadelphia, Carey & Hart, 1839. 1-283 13 E165.M364 4327. A diary in America, with remarks on its in- stitutions. Part second. London, Long- man, Orme, Brown, Green, & Longmans, 1839. 3 v. 1-28044 E165.M37 4328. Second series of a diary in America, with re- marks on its institutions. Philadelphia, T. K. & P. G. Collins, 1 840. 300 p. 1-28045 E165.M375 An appendix, "Discourse on the Evidences of the American Indians Being the Descendants of the Lost Tribes of Israel," is omitted from the Ameri- can reprint. 4329. 1837-1840. JAMES SILK BUCKING- HAM (1786-1855) Buckingham was an English ex-seaman, journal- ist, M. P., temperance and miscellaneous reformer and lecturer, and professional traveler. His second and third tours in America were guaranteed by a considerable subscription list. The original publi- cation, America, covers the larger cities of the mid- dle eastern seaboard, with a trip to Niagara via Albany. On his southern journey he went overland from Charleston to New Orleans and returned by a more northerly route which took him to the Virginia hot springs. In the final tour he visited New Eng- land and then went to St. Louis by way of Cincin- nati, returning by the then novel route of the lake cities, Chicago, Milwaukee, Detroit, and Cleveland. Buckingham is the most indefatigable and encyclo- pedic of the English travelers, who aimed at produc- ing a strictly impartial account, and deliberately gave more history, topography, "productions," and statistics in order to balance the usual concentration on manners. Viscount Morpeth praised his first two series as "most useful and satisfactory Guides and Text-Books," and Buckingham prefixed his let- ter to the third series. 4330. America, historical, statistic, and descriptive. London, Fisher, 184 1. 3 v. 1-26750 E165.B92 4331. New York, Harper, 1 84 1. 2 v. 1-2675 1 E165.B93 4332. The eastern and western states of America. London, Fisher, 1842. 3 v. 1-26752 E165.B94 4333. The slave states of America. London, Fisher, 1842. 2 v. i-Rc-2421 F210.B92 4334. 1 839-1 846. THOMAS COLLEY GRATTAN (1 792-1 864) Grattan was an Irishman who resided on the Continent for over 20 years, during which he ac- quired some literary reputation and the favor of the King of the Belgians. The latter was at least in part responsible for his appointment as British Con- sul at Boston, where he resided from 1839-46. "Civilized America," it appears from the map in the first volume, consisted of the states of the eastern seaboard; the more westerly ones are divided into two degrees of rawness. The United States under its Constitution, Grattan thought, was "better adapted than any country on earth for securing the greatest amount of good to the greatest number of mankind," but far less so for the cultivation of the higher degrees of human excellence. In spite of his own considerable success as a public speaker, Grat- tan found life at Boston increasingly distasteful, and his topical chapters speedily turn into homilies on the deficiencies of American character and achieve- ment. They reflect, however, an acquaintance both wide and intimate with the public life and public men of the 1840's. 4335. Civilized America. London, Bradbury & Evans, 1859. 2 v. 2-2416 E166.G81 4336. 1 841-1846. SIR CHARLES LYELL ( 1 797-1 875) Lyell was the leading geologist of his day and a principal founder of the modern science. He traveled in the United States for over 10 months in 1841-42, and for over eight months in 1845-46. On both tours he traversed the Atlantic seaboard; on the first he went to Cincinnati and Cleveland; on the second he made the grand circuit through the lower South and up the Mississippi and the Ohio. Geology is, of course, his primary interest, and his books have much technical data and many diagrams. But his professional interests have wide TRAVEL AND TRAVELERS / 543 relationships: he analyzes such standard American showpieces as Niagara, the Great Dismal Swamp, and the Big Bone Lick; he meets American geol- ogists in various parts of the country; he delivers a series of Lowell lectures in Boston and later attends the third annual meeting of the Association of Amer- ican Geologists there; he describes coalfields and the manner of their exploitation, etc. He is, in general, a cool, intelligent, and scientifically detached ob- server. He observes that the English travelers, in general, compare the manners of a lower social class abroad with those of a higher one at home; and he perceives that slavery is a very complex problem, admitting of no simple, easy, or rapid solution. 4337. Travels in North America; with geological observations on the United States, Canada, and Nova Scotia. London, J. Murray, 1845. 2 v. 1-26862 E165.L97 4338. Travels in North America, in the years 1 84 1-2; with geological observations on the United States, Canada, and Nova Scotia. New York, Wiley & Putnam, 1845. 2 v. in 1. 1-26864 E165.L974 4339. A second visit to the United States of North America. London, J. Murray, 1849. 2 v. 1-26865 E165.L98 4340. New York, Harper; London, J. Murray, 1849. 2 v. 1-26866 E165.L982 4341. 1842. CHARLES DICKENS (1812-1870) Dickens celebrated his 30th birthday during the four and a half months he spent in America dur- ing the first half of 1842; he was already a novelist of the first fame, and his progress was a series of ovations. He traveled from Boston to Richmond, where he decided he had seen enough of slavery, and then went by canal boat to Pittsburgh and by steamboat to St. Louis, returning to New York via Niagara and Quebec. Dickens' emotional nature sees only black or white, and after glowing pictures of the philanthropic institutions of New England and the factory misses of Lowell, the scene prompdy becomes and remains black. His concluding re- marks lecture the Americans upon their attitude of suspicion, their tolerance of sharp practice, and that "monster of depravity," their press. Dickens' dis- taste for American life received further expression in the satire of Martin Chuzzlewh (1843). Many of his letters written during the tour are printed in the first volume of John Forster's biography (Lon- don, Chapman & Hall, 1872). 4342. American notes for general circulation. London, Chapman & Hall, 1842. 2 v. 22-22851 E165.D53 4343. American notes and Pictures from Italy. London, Dent; New York, Dutton, 1926. xxii, 430 p. (Everyman's library, ed. by Ernest Rhys [no. 29O]) 36-37248 AC1.E8, no. 290 "First issue of this edition, 1908; reprinted . . . 1926." Introduction by G. K. Chesterton. 4344. 1 846-1 847. ALEXANDER MACK AY (1806-1852) Alexander Mackay, a Scot who had lived in Canada, came to the United States in 1846 to report the Oregon crisis for the London Morning Chroni- cle, and supplemented his long residence at Wash- ington by a grand circuit tour via the Mississippi and Ohio Rivers. Of his three volumes, the first covers the East, the second the South, and the third the West, but each includes chapters on general topics suggested by the local circumstances. The whole is the most comprehensive report on the United States made by an Englishman before James Bryce. The tone, while critical on occasion, is eminently fair and discriminating; thus the author points out that the best of the South lies in its domestic, indoor life, quite unknown to those travelers who "were but depicting life as they saw it in the railway carriage, on the steamer, and in the bar-room." The book is dedicated to Richard Cobden, and America, Mackay says, "is the coun- try for the industrious and hard-working man." 4345. The western world; or, Travels in the United States in 1846-47: exhibiting them in their latest development, social, political, and industrial; including a chapter on California. 2d ed. London, R. Bentley, 1849. 3 v. 5-36861 E166.M15 4346- From the 2d London ed. Philadel- 2 v. phia, Lea & Blanchard, 1849. 8-2679 E166.M152 4347. 1847-1848. OLE MUNCH RvEDER (1815-1895) Ole M. Raider was a Norwegian lawyer and civil servant sent abroad to study foreign methods of legal procedure, who produced a massive report on the jury system in Britain and America. He was in the United States for over a year and spent much of it in the frontier settlements of Norwegian im- migrants in Wisconsin. His letters home are here collected from their original newspaper publica- 544 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES tion, or from unpublished manuscripts. His report on the frontier Norwegians, their situation as com- pared with what it had been at home, and their relations with their American neighbors, supply the central interest of a special type of traveler's narrative. 4348. America in the forties; the letters of Ole Munch Raeder, translated and edited by Gun- nar J. Malmin. Minneapolis, University of Minne- sota Press, 1929. xxi, 244 p. (Norwegian-American Historical Association. [Publications] Travel and description series, v. 3) 29-28792 E184.S2N83, v. 3 E166.R13 The Norwegian letters were originally published in Den Norske Rigstidende, a Christiania news- paper, in 25 installments from November 6, 1847, to July 3, 1848. 4349. 1848. JOHN LEWIS PEYTON (1824- 1896) Peyton was a young lawyer of Staunton, Va., who, after a severe illness, was advised by his physician to "take a few months' run across the Al- leghanies and among the northern lakes." This he did, from June 26-December 17, 1848, and went across Ohio to Sandusky, where he took a lake steamboat as far as Fond du Lac at the western end of Lake Superior. His narrative illuminates the hazards of western transportation at this period, for after a race his river steamboat blows up, and he gets to land by the help of a floating chair; his stagecoach breaks down in mid-Ohio, and he carries his trunk on his shoulder for 25 miles. A well-connected young Virginian, he is able to meet such notables of the region as Henry Clay, John C. Crittenden, Lewis Cass, and Edward Bates. From Fond du Lac he crosses the wilderness to St. Paul, and sees Indian life at first hand. Peyton prepared his journals for publication in Britain, where he had represented the State of North Carolina during the Civil War, and where he remained for eleven years after its close. 4350. Over the Alleghanies and across the prairies. Personal recollections of the Far West, one and twenty years ago. London, Simpkin, Marshall, 1869. xvi, 377 p. 1-8714 E166.P48 4351. 1849. BAYARD TAYLOR (1825-1878) Taylor, one of the most prominent literary figures of his generation, was still a journalist in the employ of the Netv Yorl^ Tribune when Horace Greeley sent him to report the California Gold Rush in June 1849. He went via the Isthmus of Panama to San Francisco, roamed at length among the diggings, attended the State Constitutional Con- vention at Monterey, and on his return made an ex- tremely hazardous crossing of Mexico from Mazat- lan to Vera Cruz. As Taylor says, "The condition of California during the latter half of the year 1849 was as transitory as it was marvellous; the records which were then made can never be made again." The fortunate chance which brought a writer of real descriptive power on the scene resulted in a book of immediate popularity, which has remained a minor classic. 4352. Eldorado, or, Adventures in the path of em- pire; comprising a voyage to California, via Panama, life in San Francisco and Monterey, pic- tures of the gold region, and experiences of Mexican travel. 2d ed. New York, Putnam, 1850. 2 v. in 1. i-Rc-822 F865.T23 4353. Introd. by Robert Glass Cleland. New York, Knopf, 1949. xxvii, 375 p. (Western Americana, planned in connection with California's centenary celebrations, 1946-50) 49-1 1 1 10 F865.T24 1949 4354. 1849-1851. FREDRIKA BREMER (1801- 1865) Fredricka Bremer was Sweden's first woman of letters and first prominent novelist, whose tales of domestic life, at once realistic and sentimental, won her an international reputation during the 1830's. She spent nearly two years in America, and went in the East from Boston to Savannah, and in the West from St. Paul to New Orleans, with long residences in several parts of the Union. Her title is justified: she saw many American homes from the inside, and her leisurely, kindly, and often long- winded book affords an exceptionally intimate and domestic view. Hawthorne thought her "worthy of being the maiden aunt of the whole human race." Benson supplies an informative introduction, but his selections by no means exhaust the interest of the complete book. 4355. Hemmen i den Nya Verlden. En dagbok i bref, skrifna under tvenne ars resor i Norra Amerika och pa Cuba. Stockholm, P. A. Norstedt, 1853-54. 3 V - 2-2878 E166.B83 4356. The homes of the New World; impressions of America. Translated by Mary Howitt. New York, Harper, 1853. 2 v. 2-2879 E166.B84 4357. America of the fifties: letters of Fredrika Bremer, selected and edited by Adolph B. TRAVEL AND TRAVELERS / 545 Benson. New York, The American-Scandinavian Foundation, 1924. xx, 344 p. (Scandinavian classics, v. 23) 25-26021 E166.B837 Selections from the preceding. 4358. 1 851-1852. JEAN JACQUES ANTOINE AMPERE ( 1 800-1 864) Professor Ampere of the College de France and the French Academy was the son of the famous scientist whose name is preserved in electrical ter- minology, and himself a distinguished classical and medieval scholar. He spent not quite five months in the United States and, in addition to covering the Atiantic seaboard, made a tour of the Northwest by steamboat and railway, marveling at such new, raw, and mushrooming communities as Buffalo and Chicago. In order to leave the country from New Orleans, he went by railroad from Charleston to Montgomery, and by steamboat down the Alabama to Mobile. He paused from time to time to pen little essays on American literature, the temperance movement, the Protestant denominations, etc. He came to America, he said, in order to see something entirely new, and his gracefully written Promenade is the work of an exceedingly intelligent, cultured, judicious, and even-tempered traveler. 4359 Promenade en Amerique; Etats-Unis — Cuba — Mexique. Nouv. ed., entierement rev. Paris, Michel Levy, 1856. 2 v. 20-3056 E166.A525 First edition, 1855. 4360. 1851-1852. FERENCZ AURELIUS PUL- SZKY (1814-1897); TEREZIA (WAL- DER) PULSZKY Pulszky and his wife shared the exile of Louis Kossuth, the leader of an unsuccessful attempt to win Hungarian independence, and accompanied him on the American tour to which he was invited by a joint resolution of Congress. They arrived in December 1851 and continued their triumphal prog- ress for six months, visiting all the larger cities of the Union, including Cleveland, St. Louis, and New Orleans. Madame Pulszky kept a diary of the tour, the extracts from which are considerably more in- teresting than her husband's interpolations. She took particular note of the Hungarians and Ger- mans whom they met on the way, and breaks out against "the race -mongers" — the Celts and Gauls, the Latin, Slavonic and Tartar races and nations, "which in Europe are decried as unripe for liberty, become across the Atlantic good republicans, thriv- ing under the freest institutions of the world." In Cincinnati, where Kossuth addressed a gathering of 30,000, the Pulszkys attended a spiritualist seance of the Fox sisters. 4361. White, red, black. Sketches of society in the United States during the visit of their guest [Louis Kossuth] By Francis and Theresa Pulszky. London, Triibner, 1853. 3 v. 2-22433 E166.P98 4362. White, red, black. Sketches of American society in the United States during the visit of their guests. By Francis and Theresa Pulszky. New York, Redfield, 1853. 2 v. MB 4363. 1852-1854. FREDERICK LAW OLMSTED ( 1 822-1903) Olmsted was at this time a practical and improv- ing farmer on Staten Island. Having a recurrent debate with one of his closest friends on the subject of slavery, he resolved to tour the South examining the institution as closely as possible, and arranged to report his experiences in letters to The New Yor\ Times. His first journey took three months (Dec. 1852-Mar. 1853); his second, from which the second and third publications on Texas and the back country derived, considerably longer (Nov. 1853-Aug. 1854). Olmsted then engaged in much historical, agricultural, and statistical research, and took his time in converting his journals and news- paper articles into the three solid travel books of 1856-60. The Cotton Kingdom was a condensation of the three, with a small proportion of additional material, commissioned by a British publishing house after the outbreak of the Civil War, and largely carried out by a journalist, Daniel R. Good- loe. Dr. Schlesinger's edition of this work includes a scholarly 50-page introduction which puts Olm- sted's works in perspective. Olmsted passed from plantation to plantation, obtaining lodgings, engag- ing in conversation, and making discreet inquiries. His cool, judicious tone and his fairness to indi- viduals strengthen the cumulative effect of this massive indictment of the slave system as a perpetua- tion of frontier backwardness. 4364. A journey in the seaboard slave states, with remarks on their economy. New York, Dix & Edwards, 1856. 723 p. 7~35°36 F213.O49 4365. A journey through Texas; or, A saddle-trip on the southwestern frontier; with a statisti- cal appendix. New York, Dix, Edwards, 1857. xxxiv, 516 p. Rc-2560 F391.O51 546 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 4366. A journey in the back country. New York, Mason Bros., i860, xvi, 492 p. 1-8724 F353.O51 4367. The cotton kingdom: a traveler's observa- tions on cotton and slavery in the American slave states. Based upon three former volumes of journeys and investigations. New York, Mason Bros., 1 86 1. 2 v. Rc-2428 F213.O53 4368. • Edited, with an introd., by Arthur M. Schlesinger. New York, Knopf, 1953. lxiii, 626, xvi p. 52-12193 F213.O53 1953 Bibliography: p. 623-626. 4369. 1857-1858. 1889) CHARLES MACKAY (1814- Charles Mackay was an English journalist and verse-writer who had won fame by the popularity of the songs for which he had provided lyrics. He came to the United States for a lecture tour that oc- cupied some six months and took him over the grand circuit in reverse: first to St. Louis, thence to New Orleans, and back through the lower South. An unusual feature of this travel book is the inclusion of several verses, such as "Down the Mississippi" in- spired by local circumstances and composed in order to relieve the tedium of long journeys. The author is interested in Americanisms and street nomen- clature, and includes a succession of sketches or set pieces on such topics as night life on Broadway, New York fires and fire-fighters, American hotel life, Nicholas Longworth's vineyards near Cincinnati, etc. The second half of volume 2 is devoted to Canada. 4370. Life and liberty in America; or, Sketches of a tour in the United States and Canada in 1857-8. London, Smith, Elder, 1859. 2 v. 2-22443 E166.M17 437i- New- York, Harper, 1859. 143 p. 9-15726 E166.M165 4372. 1859. HORACE GREELEY (1811-1872) The famous and influential editor of the New Yor}^ Tribune did not take his own advice and go west until he was 48. His route, after leaving the railroad, took him through Kansas, across the plains to Denver, and thence north to Salt Lake City. Crossing the mountains into California, he covered the mining and agricultural regions and went to San Francisco only when he was ready to return, nearly four months after leaving home. Greeley regarded his work as quite ephemeral, but it brought the outlook of a thorough-going democrat and egalitarian to this vast area, and was concerned to assess the spread of true civilization. The wildness of the West was distasteful but sure to be ephemeral; the pursuit of gold was little different from gam- bling. Mormonism was orderly and productive but oriental in its suppression of women; the Chinese in the West acquiesced in discrimination and op- pression; and California had a greater future in fruit than in gold. The first of the West's concerns was the completion of a transcontinental railroad. 4373. An overland journey, from New York to San Francisco, in the summer of 1859. New York, Saxton, Barker, i860. 386 p. Rc-1223 F593.G79 4374. 1861-1862. ANTHONY TROLLOPE (1815-1882) This major Victorian novelist was the son of Mrs. Frances Trollope [no. 4303] and quite conscious that he was following in her footsteps. His stay in the country (Sept. 1861-Mar. 1862) coincided with a comparatively quiet interval in the Civil War. He made two journeys into the West, as far as St. Paul the first time, and as Rolla, Mo., the second, visited several military encampments, and spent much time in Boston, New York, and Washington. While much of what he saw, especially in the West, got badly on Trollope's nerves, he made a conscien- tious effort to be fair, and to think of American society in its own terms. Messrs. Smalley and Booth have a scholarly introduction, notes, and appendices in their edition. 4375. North America. London, Chapman & Hall, 1862. 2 v. 2-4107 E167.T84 4376. New York, Harper, 1863. 623 p. 8-2680 E167.T842 4377. Edited, with an introd., notes, and new materials, by Donald Smalley and Brad- ford Allen Booth. New York, Knopf, 1951. xxxvii, 555 p. 51-11097 E167.T843 Bibliography: p. 548-554. 4378. 1861-1862; 1881. SIR WILLIAM HOW- ARD RUSSELL (1820-1907) This correspondent of the London Times had established his fame by reporting the Crimean War in dispatches from the front. He came to Washing- ton in March 1861 and, after several weeks of view- ing and interviewing, pushed on to Charleston, TRAVEL AND TRAVELERS / 547 Montgomery, and New Orleans, and returned by way of Chicago in time for the Battle of Bull Run. His report of the Federal rout, unvarnished truth as it was, aroused unwarranted indignation in the North, and led to the termination of his mission as the campaigns of 1862 were about to open. His sketches of and conversations with the leaders on both sides, his evocation of the universal tension and excitement, and his glimpses of the hectic prepara- tions for the great struggle have no counterpart, and have been heavily drawn upon by historians ever since their publication. By comparison, his travel notes of twenty years later, when he visited Ari- zona, California, and Colorado, are tame and tour- istic. Fletcher Pratt's edition is a drastic reduction which omits much of interest in the original. 4379. My diary North and South. London, Brad- bury & Evans, 1863. 2 v. 1-22502 E167.R96 4380. — Boston, T. O. H. P. Burnham, 1863. xxii, 602 p. 32-3321 E167.R963 4381. Edited and introduced by Fletcher Pratt. New York, Harper, 1954. xiii, 268 p. 54-6027 E167.R9635 4382. Hesperothen; notes from the West; a record of a ramble in the United States and Canada in the spring and summer of 1881. London, S. Low, Marston, Searle, & Rivington, 1882. 2 v. 2-4130 E168.R96 4383. 1865. SAMUEL BOWLES (1826-1878) Bowles was proprietor and editor of the Springfield Republican, and one of the most influen- tial journalists of the Republican Party. On the conclusion of the Civil War, he and two other newspapermen accompanied the Speaker of the House, Schuyler Colfax, on a transcontinental tour. From Atchison, Kan., they went by overland stage- coach to Denver, Salt Lake City, and Virginia City, Nev., and from San Francisco north to Victoria, B. C. In Utah Colfax debated polygamy with Brigham Young, and in San Francisco they dined with the Chinese tongs. Bowles describes western scenery with the facility of a veteran journalist, but his major interest lies in mining, irrigation, and all the other sources of potential wealth in the West, which required only the completion of the transcontinental railroad to inaugurate a fabulous national prosperity. 4384. Across the continent: a summer's journey to the Rocky Mountains, the Mormons, and the Pacific States, with Speaker Colfax. Springfield, Mass., S. Bowles, 1865. xx, 452 p. i-Rc-1502 F594.B76 4385. 1866-1867. JAMES FOWLER RUSLING (1834-1918) General Rusling was sent by the Quartermaster General of the United States Army on a tour of in- spection of its western posts, which occupied him for nearly eleven months before he took the home- ward steamer from San Francisco in June 1867. He departed from the route of Greeley and Bowles in that he made a large southward loop in the Rockies from Denver to Fort Garland, where he saw General Sherman conclude a treaty with the Utes, and from Salt Lake City he went northwest- ward through the mushroom town of Boise, not three years old, and via the Columbia River to Port- land. He also made a southern tour from Los Angeles to Tucson and Prescott, Arizona Territory, and found little there to please him. The military matters that took him west have no prominence in his narrative, which has a graphic power and a sparkle that would hardly have been anticipated from the circumstances of its origin. 4386. Across America: or, The great West and the Pacific coast. New York, Sheldon, 1874. 503 P- Rc-1535 F594.R94 4387. 1893-1894. PAUL CHARLES JOSEPH BOURGET(i852-i 935 ) Bourget, well-known as a French novelist and high-class journalist who specialized in psychologie contempovaire, sojourned in America during the year of the World's Fair. The itinerary form has completely disappeared, although there are chapters on life in Newport, the West, and the South; instead there are sections on women, business men, the lower orders, education, and American pleasures, including sport. The book drew a rather ill-natured rejoinder from Mark Twain, but after 60 years it seems a sympathetic and penetrating performance, in far closer touch with its subject than most of its many successors from French pens. M. Bourget found an invaluable lesson for France in the indi- vidualism upon which American democracy was founded, and which consisted "in multiplying in- definitely the centres of local activity, and conse- quently in continuously breaking up, by means of 54^ / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES localized action, the forces which, massed in groups, 4389. Outre-mer: impressions of America. New would be too powerful." York, Scribner, 1895. 425 p. 2-1497 E168.B77 4388. Outre mer (notes sur l'Amerique) Paris, This translation first appeared in the New Yor\ New York, A. Lemerre, 1895. 2 v. Herald. 25-12819 E166.B76 XIV Population, Immigration, and Minorities 41 A. Population 4390-4403 B. Immigration: General 4404-4417 C. Immigration: Policy 4418-4425 D. Minorities 4426-4435 E. Negroes 4436-4451 F. Jews 4452-4462 G. Orientals 4463-4469 H. North Americans 4470-4476 I. Germans 4477-4481 J. Scandinavians 4482-4487 K. Other Stocks 4488-4498 fff THE present chapter has proved exceptionally difficult to compile and to annotate, but the difficulty has been of different kinds in its several parts. With respect to "Population," it has not been easy to find enough suitable titles to make up a section adequate to its subject. The scientific study of population statistics, although no new idea, has only gradually revealed its possibilities, and these possibilities can only be realized when the statistics have been taken in such form and with such thoroughness as to make refined operations possible. Certain kinds of results, therefore, can be obtained only for 10, 20, or 30 years in the past; beyond that there is only conjecture. Another difficulty proceeds from the fact that no work on population can get too far away from its statistical tables, and such tables are not the favorite reading of anyone but a professional stadstician. The titles offered here as a rule have a text in which ideas are developed in close association with a quantitative framework, and should daunt no reader who aims at deeper understanding. With respect to "Immigration," we have a situa- tion where public policy has followed a fairly con- sistent line for over three decades, but for the same period most of the literature has criticized that policy to a greater or lesser extent, and with varying de- grees of harshness. It may well be that the policy is justifiable enough, but if its adherents do not write books to justify it, the defect cannot be supplied here. General works on ethnic or other minorities in the United States pose a special difficulty, for to a rare degree they all say the same thing, and in the main are as like as two peas. Yet the unanimity of the textbooks does not correspond to any like unanimity in the public mind, as can be learned from a glance at the daily newspaper. Here we have tried to select works with some degree of individuality. The works on individual stocks, six of which have literatures large enough to warrant sections of their own, while the others are grouped in an omni- bus section at the end, present another type of diffi- culty. Whether historical or contemporary, such a book must be written by one who is either a member of the group or an outsider. If an outsider, he may lack sympathy and special knowledge. If a mem- ber, he may find every virtue in his group and every fault outside it. We have tried to include the most fair-minded authors of each kind. Works on reli- gious Judaism, the major ingredient of Jewish na- tionality, will be found in Chapter XXIII, Religion, Section G; and works on the Negro's church, which segregation has made into a separate and special entity, are entered in Section K of the same chapter. 549 55° / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES In conclusion, while much first-class work has been done in recent years on the ethnic history of the American people, both in general and in the way of particular groups, it is obvious that much re- mains to be done and that many aspects and peoples are inadequately covered. In the present vigorous state of national feelings and of American studies, it is unlikely that they will long remain so. A. Population 4390. American Council of Learned Societies De- voted to Humanistic Studies. Committee on Linguistic and National Stocks in the Population of the United States. Report. Washington, U. S. Govt. Print. Off., 1932. p. 103-441. inch tables. 37-30356 E184.A1A6 Reprinted from the Annual Report of the Ameri- can Historical Association for 193 1. Bibliography: p. 325-359. Chapters X and XI of A Century of Population Growth (no. 4400) deal with "Surnames of the White Population in 1790" and "Nationality as In- dicated by Names of Heads of Families Reported at the First Census." They acquired an unanticipated importance in 1927 when the Quota Board made use of them in determining quotas of immigrants to be admitted under the "national origins" plan enacted three years earlier, and in 1927 the American Coun- cil of Learned Societies appointed a committee un- der the chairmanship of Walter F. Willcox to re- examine the problem. The present publication in- cludes, in addition to the concise report of the com- mittee, a long study by a genealogist, Howard F. Barker, on "National Stocks in the Population of the United States as Indicated by Surnames in the Census of 1790" (p. 126-359) an< ^ two briefer ones by Marcus L. Hansen, "The Minor Stocks in the American Population of 1790," and "The Popula- tion of the American Outlying Regions in 1790." The committee's revised classification table differed in the following respects from A Century of Popu- lation Growth: English stock, 60.1 percent instead of 82.1; Scotch, 8.1 instead of 7.0; Irish (including Ulster), 9.5 instead of 1.9; German, 8.6 instead of 5.6; Dutch, 3.1 instead of 2.5; and French, 2.3 in- stead of 0.6. 4391. Davis, Joseph S. The population upsurge in the United States. Stanford, Calif., Food Research Institute, Stanford University, 1949. 92 p. diagrs. (War-peace pamphlets, no. 12) 50-7898 HB3505.D38 A somewhat polemical pamphlet which was one of the earliest publications to emphasize the com- pletely altered demographic outlook since World War II. Earlier marriage, higher fertility rates, the reduction of maternity risk and infant mortality, longer life expectancy, and the persistence of immi- gration have all contributed to the accelerated pop- ulation increase of the 1940's. The author rejects the notion of a "definable upper limit to our popu- lation" and believes that, "barring calamity and egregious policy blunders," it may increase in- definitely at changing rates and the American economy may continue to expand with it. 4392. Durand, John D. The labor force in the United States, 1 890-1960. New York, So- cial Science Research Council, 1948. xviii, 284 p. 48-7397 HD5724.D8 Prepared under the auspices of the Committee on Labor Market Research of the Social Science Re- search Council. "References": p. 266-279. The 1940 census was the first to make a complete count of the labor force of the United States, defined as all persons who work or seek work for economic gain, and excluding homemakers, students, rentiers, the incapacitated, and the superannuated. Since 1940 the Bureau of the Census has issued monthly data on the labor force. The author has used the labor statistics contained in the censuses from 1890 to estimate its earlier size, and has projected post- war trends into estimates for as late as i960. Sepa- rate chapters consider demographic factors affecting the labor force, economic factors, changing customs relating to the employment of women, and the wartime expansion of the labor force (from 54 to 66 million) and its subsequent contraction. The major changes in its composition are the reduced number of boys in their teens and of older men, and the increased and increasing number of women, espe- cially married women. The final chapter asserts that a Federal labor force policy is indispensable. However, since an expanding labor force promotes national prosperity, the Government ought not, as a means cf combating unemployment, to place undue restrictions upon the employment of youths and women, and it should encourage the employment of older men. POPULATION, IMMIGRATION, AND MINORITIES / 55 1 4393. Hawley, Amos H. The changing shape of metropolitan America: deconcentration since 1920. Glencoe, 111., Free Press, 1956. 177 p. 55-11000 HB2175.H3 This volume of modest size enjoys a triple spon- sorship, shared by the Scripps Foundation, the Rockefeller Foundation, and the U. S. Housing and Home Finance Agency. It refines upon the con- clusions of Donald J. Bogue's Population Growth in Standard Metropolitan Areas, 1900-1950, with an Explanatory Analysis of Urbanized Areas (Wash- ington, Housing and Flome Finance Agency, 1953. 76 p.). The author analyzes the 168 metropolitan areas which in 1950 contained 56% of the popula- tion of the United States, dividing each into central cities and satellite areas. Whereas in 19 10 the satel- lite areas contained only 23.3% of the total metro- politan-area population, by 1950 they had risen to 41.6%, and during the same period approximately 25 to 30 miles were added to the average radius of metropolitan influence. A reversal of tendency took place about 1920: previously there had been a rapid growth of centers at the expense of satellite areas, while since there has been a centrifugal move- ment to satellite areas to the detriment of growth in central cities. This general tendency is meas- ured against such qualifying factors as the size of the central city, its average annual growth rate, the distance between such cities, the proportion of population employed in manufacturing, and re- gional location. 4394. Holbrook, Stewart H. The Yankee exodus, an account of migration from New England. New York, Macmillan, 1950. 398 p. maps. 50-7972 E179.5.H65 Bibliography: p. 364-371. The author, a native of Vermont, considers the dispersion of the New Englanders throughout the rest of the Union to be "the most influential migra- tion in all our history," but strangely ignored among the great movements that civilized the United States. Among the qualities which rendered the Yankee leaven exceptionally influential he singles out their fanatical respect for education, their shrewdness and great industry in business, and their powerful urge to impose their moral notions upon their new homes. The body of the book is largely a treatment of individual Yankees in particular com- munities from New York State to the Pacific coast. Mr. Holbrook cheerfully concedes that his book is "little more than a footnote to what is needed to tell the Yankee story in full." In spite of its be- wildering detail and low level of generalization, it is the only book which attempts to show how, through the migratory process, the standards and ideas of one section permeated all the others. 4395. Hutchinson, Edward P. Immigrants and their children, 1850-1950, by E. P. Hutchin- son for the Social Science Research Council in co- operation with the U.S. Dept. of Commerce, Bureau of the Census. New York, Wiley, 1956. xiv, 391 p. maps, tables. (Census monograph series) 56-5602 HB2595.H8 This volume continues and expands Niles Car- penter's 1920 Census monograph, Immigrants and Their Children, 1920 (Washington, Govt. Print. Off., 1927. xvi, 431 p.), by "describing changes in the size, composition, and geographical distribution of the foreign stock from 1920 to 1950," and by presenting occupational data for the foreign stock from 1870 to 1950. According to Mr. Hutchinson's interpretation of the figures, the drop in immigra- tion since 1920 has brought about as wide an occu- pational distribution among the foreign stock as among the native stock. For "each of the many different immigrant peoples contributed its own complement of native endowment and acquired skills to its adopted country; and, as the data show, each found its own place in the territory and labor force cf the United States." The 1950 Census mono- graph series is produced in cooperation with the Social Science Research Council and published by Wiley. Other volumes which have so far appeared, treating a variety of subjects on the basis of data gathered by the Bureau of the Census, are the fol- lowing: Social Characteristics of Urban and Rural Communities, K)$o, by Otis Dudley Duncan and Albert J. Reiss, Jr. (1956. xviii, 421 p.); Income of the American People, by Herman P. Miller ( 1955. xvi, 206 p.) ; and American Housing and Its Use; the Demand for Shelter Space, by Louis Winnick, with the assistance of Ned Shilling (1957. xiv, 143 p.). 4396. Kiser, Clyde V. Group differences in urban fertility, a study derived from the National Health Survey. Baltimore, Williams & Wilkins Co., 1942. xii, 284 p. tables, diagrs. 42-22364 HB891.K5 Bibliography: p. 274-277. The National Health Survey was an investigation conducted in 83 American cities by the U. S. Public Health Service during 1935-36. On the basis of its data, the author attempts to relate marital fertility rates to the occupational, educational, and income status of the parents. Fertility rates of rural groups are presented for comparison, and the incidence of pregnancy wastage is studied. Economically re- tarded groups, it is concluded, produce more than their numerical share of births, but, whether or not because of the spread of contraceptive practices, there is evidence that "group differences in fertility are tending to diminish rather than increase." 55 2 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 4397. Lively, Charles E., and Conrad Taeuber. Rural migration in the United States. Washington, U. S. Govt. Print. Off., 1939. xxi, 192 p. maps, tables, diagrs. ([U. S.] Works Progress Administration. Research monograph 19) 39-29056 HV85.A36, no. 19 HB2385.L5 Issued also by the U. S. Farm Security Adminis- tration as its Social Research report no. 17 under the title: Migration and Mobility of Rural Population in the United States. "Selected bibliography": p. 177-183. Because the data for detailed study of rural popu- lation movements before 1930 are quite inadequate, the authors have devoted only their first 25 pages to that era. Even though limited to the decade 1930-39, it remains the most substantial study of the internal migration of the United States. Concerned with the nature and characteristics of rural migra- tion, it gives particular attention to the relationship of migration, or failure to migrate, to destitution and economic opportunity. Migration is studied in selected areas, in its relation to rural reproduction, and in its effects upon rural and urban life. 4398. Sutherland, Stella H. Population distribu- tion in colonial America. New York, Columbia University Press, 1936. xxxii, 353 p. tables, fold. maps. 37-1006 HB1965.S84 Bibliography: p. [xvii] -xxxii. This somewhat misleadingly entitled book is in fact an attempt to reconstruct the population statis- tics of the Thirteen Colonies in 1775, on the verge of the Revolution, and to prepare a dot map, which here appears in three folded parts, with each dot representing 50 persons. The New England colo- nies all took censuses in 1774, 1775* or 1776, but elsewhere it has been necessary to estimate on the basis of earlier and later censuses, or to use tax lists as a substitute or, in the case of Georgia, the "head grants," a list of land and lot grantees from 1754 to 1775. In the cases of Maryland and Virginia, the author has been content with figures of 1782 and 1782-85 respectively. The estimated total is 2,507,180, ranging from Virginia with 504,264 to Georgia with 33,054. A considerable text discusses the growth of population in each colony in its rela- tion to immigration, settlement, and economic de- velopment, but does not attempt to arrive at detailed figures for successive epochs. An appendix repro- duces the official British detailed list of the colonies' imports and exports for 1771. Concerning her map the author remarks: "Away from the cities, with their tributary suburbs, there is little to relieve the monotonous level of rural density." 4399. Thompson, Warren S., and Pascal K. Whelpton. Population trends in the United States. New York, McGraw-Hill, 1933. 415 p. (Recent social trends monographs) 33-27203 HB3505.T5 One of the 13 monographs prepared under the direction of the President's Research Committee on Social Trends, named by Herbert Hoover in 1929 with Wesley S. Mitchell as chairman and William F. Ogburn as director of research. Investigation was carried on during 1930-32 through funds granted by the Rockefeller Foundation. For the present volume advance figures from the 1930 census were made available, and assistance was lent by the staff of the Scripps Foundation for Research in Popula- tion Problems at Miami University. The authors were limited to the analysis of objective data and sought to "give a more complete picture of popula- tion in the United States than has been available hitherto and to project past trends into the future." Chapters are concerned with population growth by race, region, and locality, the distribution of various stocks, the national origins of the white population, age and sex composition, marital condition, death and birth rates, and the effect of immigration upon population growth. Two final chapters discuss probable trends and "Population Policy." They are naturally colored by the Great Depression, in which a reduced rate of population growth is taken to be "a contributory factor," and they favor planning and strict control, including sterilization of the unfit as a means of improving the quality of population. In addition to the 88 tables and 36 graphs in the text, there is an appendix of 27 large tables (p. 339-408). 4400. U. S. Bureau of the Census. A century of population growth from the first census of the United States to the twelfth, 1 790-1 900. Wash- ington, Govt. Print. Off., 1909. 303 p. maps (part fold.) diagrs. 9-35728 HA195.A5 The first complete national census was that of Sweden in 1749, and the first United States census of 1790 has some claim to have been the second. The Bureau of the Census, however, did not become a permanent organization until 1902, soon after which it received custody of the surviving records of the first census, which had been published only in very summary form, and from which four States and two Territories had disappeared. This volume, compiled by the chief clerk of the Bureau, William S. Rossiter, resulted from the Bureau's decision to publish the returns in detail, and to present com- parisons with the corresponding figures from later censuses. Chapter III deals with the first census act and the methods by which the census of 1790 was carried out. Bases for comparisons are estab- lished in Chapter IV, which includes a series of POPULATION, IMMIGRATION, AND MINORITIES / 553 maps showing the counties of 1790 in comparison with the modern counties. Other subjects are the White vs. the Negro population, sex and age of the White population, the family and the proportion of White children, interstate migration, the foreign- born, slave statistics, and occupations and wealth. Pages 149-298 are occupied by 40 general tables, the first 28 of which contain census material from the Thirteen Colonies. The remainder present the data of 1790, Table 104 (p. 188-200) being "Population as Reported at the First Census, by Counties and Minor Civil Divisions." 4401. Vance, Rupert B. All these people; the nation's human resources in the South, by Rupert B. Vance in collaboration with Nadia Danilevsky. Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina Press, 1945. xxxiii, 503 p. maps, tables, diagrs. 4 6 "3393 HB3511.V3 "Bibliographic notes": p. 489-492. This study of population pressure in the Southern States, related to national manpower needs and local economic development, is the only large work on the population of an American region. The fact that "Southerners are doing more to replace them- selves in the next generation" than the inhabitants of any other area, and doing it on fewer resources, is presented as a continuing problem. The effects of population growth on Southern agriculture and in- dustry and the educational needs of the area are described. There are 146 tables and 281 figures. 4402. Whelpton, Pascal K. Cohort fertility; native white women in the United States. Prince- ton, Princeton University Press, 1954. xxv, 492 p. diagrs., tables. 52-5836 HB915.W47 A severely technical volume whose lithoprinted pages effect a new refinement in analyzing popula- tion developments in the United States during the years since 1920. The available statistics are inade- quate to a like treatment of any earlier period. Colored women have been excluded from the tables in part because the data for them are significantly less accurate, and foreign-born women because of their rapidly decreasing proportion to the whole. A "cohort" here means all native white women born in a single year, those born from July 1, 1899, to June 30, 1900, being the cohort of 1900. The cohorts considered extend from that of 1875, with births as late as 1922, to that of 1933, whose births began in 1949. The essential information is con- tained in Tables A-L (p. [283H386]). Annual fertility rates "had a U-shaped trend from 1920 to 1949," but the old high level and the recent rise are qualitatively different: more women now have one, two, or three children than formerly, but fewer have five or more children. The operative cause of fluctuations in fertility, the author is sure, is the practice of birth control measures. 4403. Willcox, Walter F. Studies in American demography. Ithaca, N. Y., Cornell Uni- versity Press, 1940. xxx, 556 p. tables, diagrs. 41-2109 HB3505.W5 "Bibliography of the more important writings of the author": p. 541-547. Dr. Willcox (b. 1861) is a pioneer and elder statesman of American demography, whose career has included 40 years as professor and dean at Cor- nell University and over 30 years' association with the U. S. Bureau of the Census, beginning with his service as chief statistician of the 12th census (1900). This volume collects the pieces which he had hoped would grow into an Introduction to American Demography but, because of the deficiencies of American vital statistics, did not. All are informed by the broad and humane oudook of 19th-cen- tury social studies, so often lacking from the work of latter-day specialists. The first part, "Studies in American Census Statistics," contains, along with papers on the urban and rural, sex, age, race, literacy, and marital characteristics of the American popula- tion, one on the "Development of the American Census and Its Methods." The second part, "Studies in American Registration Statistics," discusses the birth, death, and cancer rates and other aspects of these state-compiled figures, which did not become nationwide until 1933. A final miscellaneous part includes a paper on "Statistical Societies and their Cooperation with Statistical Bureaus," and bio- graphical sketches of Lemuel Shattuck and John Shaw Billings. B. Immigration: General 4404. Abbott, Edith. Immigration; select docu- ments and case records. Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1924. xxii, 809 p. 24-8650 JV6455A7 4405. Abbott, Edith. Historical aspects of the im- migration problem; select documents. Chi- cago, University of Chicago Press, 1926. xx, 881 p. 26-27485 JV6455.A68 554 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES These complementary volumes form a part of the University of Chicago social service series, and their compiler was for 18 years dean of that uni- versity's Graduate School of Social Service Admin- istration. The earlier volume opens with two his- torical sections, on "The Journey of the Immigrant" since 1751, and the "Admission of Immigrants under State Laws, 1788-1882." The remainder of the material dealing with the admission, exclusion, and expulsion of aliens consists largely of federal court decisions, 1892-1921, and of social case records drawn from the files of the Immigrants' Protective League of Chicago, 1912-23. The same files are drawn upon for the cases which illustrate "Domestic Immigration Problems" in Part III. The materials in Historical Aspects nearly all antedate 1882, the year in which the control of immigration was as- sumed by the Federal Government. They are ar- ranged within the following sections: "Causes of Immigration," "Economic Aspects of the Immi- gration Problem," "Early Problems of Assimila- tion," "Pauperism and Crime," and "Public Opinion and the Immigrant." No subsequently published volumes give as good an idea of the variety and char- acter of the sources for the study of immigration. 4406. Brunner, Edmund de S. Immigrant farm- ers and their children, with four studies of immigrant communities. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, Doran, 1929. xvii, 277 p. 29-11033 JV6606.A4B7 A study of the foreign-born farming population, undertaken by the Institute of Social and Religious Research (New York City) in 1926-27, and neces- sarily based on the census of 1920, which put the total at nearly one and a half million. Mr. Brunner concluded that the newcomers, judged by economic and technical standards, were making good on the soil; that their children were no more and no less intelligent than native children, whether judged by special tests or by their school records; that marriage outside the immigrant group increased substantially after World War I; that over two-thirds of the com- munities studied "were progressing more or less surely along a well-charted course leading toward complete assimilation into the life of rural America"; and that the younger generation were not deserting the church into which they were born, but were insisting "that their church shall be an American in- stitution." The concluding portion of the book consists of four case studies of immigrant villages by different hands: Castle Hayne, N. C. (various stocks); Askov, Minn. (Danes); Petersburg, Va. (Czechs); and Sunderland, Minn. (Poles). 4407. Committee for the Study of Recent Immigra- tion from Europe. Refugees in America, report of the Committee, by Maurice R. Davie with collaboration of Sarah W. Cohn, Betty Drury, Sam- uel Koenig [and others] New York, Harper, 1947. xxi, 453 p. 47-2565 D809.U5C6 A study of the immigration since 1933, taking refuge from Hitler and his allies, which is estimated at an approximate 275,000 persons, of whom nearly fourth-fifths are Jews by religion or race. Over half come from Germany and Austria, and most of the rest from Poland, Italy, Czechoslovakia, Russia, France, and Hungary. Unlike the earlier migra- tions, it is composed primarily of middle and upper- class persons, spearheaded by 12 Nobel prize win- ners in science and literature, and including many names since listed in Who's Who or American Men of Science or both. It is here studied in a sample of 11,233 re pbes to a questionnaire, from 638 com- munities in 43 states. The text, which makes skill- full use of excerpts from the individual replies, deals with the economic, occupational, social, and cultural adjustment of the refugees; the occupational ex- periences of businessmen and manufacturers, physi- cians, lawyers, teachers and scientists, artists and writers; and their opinion of America and Ameri- cans' opinion of them. "In general, the attitude of the American community toward the refugee has been preponderantly sympathetic and helpful," and the hopes of the vast majority, especially for their children, are now centered here. 4408. Erickson, Charlotte. American industry and the European immigrant, 1860-1885. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1957. 269 p. (Studies in economic history) 57-5485 HD8081.A5E7 A study of the efforts of organized labor to obtain legislation preventing contract labor from entering the United States. "The thesis of this book is that contract labor was rare in America during the years after the Civil War, and never reached the pro- portions claimed by the advocates of a law against its importation." The exclusionist movement, Miss Erickson demonstrates, originated with the craft unions. They feared the importation of skilled workers from Europe as strike breakers, and ma- nipulated the Knights of Labor and the American Federation of Labor until the passage of the Foran Act of 1885, which excluded contract labor of all types. The author describes the haphazard labor recruiting methods of American industries to show that they had little to do with this legislation, which, she contends, was actually racist in motivation. Methods of distributing unskilled labor are also treated and the fact emphasized that the industries depended upon a ready reservoir of cheap foreign labor and had no interest in excluding it. POPULATION, IMMIGRATION, AND MINORITIES / 555 4409. Ernst, Robert. Immigrant life in New York City, 1825-1863. New York, King's Crown Press, 1949. xvi, 331 p. 49-9759 F128.9.A1E7 1949 Bibliography: p. [297] -3 19. Between the opening of the Erie Canal and the draft riots of 1863 the foreign-born of Manhattan Island increased from less than 20,000, or about 11%, to 384,000, or 48% of the whole. Of the latter, over 200,000 came from Ireland, 120,000 from Germany, and 27,000 from England. The author details the miseries of tenement life in congested lower Manhattan, but points out that the younger immigrants and their children were able, through their earnings, to improve their status and move to cleaner, safer neighborhoods, making way for new- comers from abroad. One reason for this was the vigorous labor movement, which carried on four decades of struggle for better wages and working conditions, and in which, for the most part, natives and immigrants worked toward the same ends, al- though the Germans usually had labor organiza- tions of their own. The newcomers maintained a variety of military and social organizations, churches, and periodicals of their own, which con- tributed to New York's cosmopolitan appearance but did not prevent the assimilation of their chil- dren to American speech and habits. Once man- hood suffrage was adopted in 1827, Tammany Hall forestalled all opponents in the systematic cultiva- tion of the foreign vote and thereby kept the Demo- cratic Party in control during most of the period. 4410. Handlin, Oscar. Boston's immigrants, 1790- 1865; a study in acculturation. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1 94 1. xviii, 287 p. tables, diagrs. (Harvard historical studies, v. 50) A4 1-4664 F73.9.A1H3 Note on sources: p. [2515-268. An outstanding study, based upon a Harvard dis- sertation of 1940, of "the transformation of a neat, well managed city into a slum and disease ridden metropolis." Many immigrants entered the great commercial port of Boston, but few remained until the penniless Irish, fleeing from eviction and starva- tion at home, began arriving in quantity about 1835. By 1865 there were 72,000 of them in a total popula- tion of 331,000, more than double the number of all the other foreign-born. Without capital or train- ing, they were confined to the least desirable occupa- tions. They were crowded into the old mansions and disused warehouses of Fort Hill and the North End, without cleanliness, privacy, or proper ventila- tion, and epidemic diseases and tuberculosis rose to new levels. They remained the one element which took no part in Boston's thriving cultural life, and made fewer marriages out of their group than did Boston's Negroes. The i85o's were marked by jarring group conflicts and Know-Nothing racism, but the strong loyalty and excellent military record of the Boston Irish in the Civil War led to a re- markable relaxation of antagonisms and discrimina- tions, although it by no means ended their physical and cultural isolation. 441 1. Handlin, Oscar. The uprooted; the epic story of the great migrations that made the American people. Boston, Little, Brown, 1951. 310 p. 51-13013 E184.A1H27 Bibliography included in "Acknowledgments" (p. 308-310). An original book which attempts a generalized psychological history of the 35 million immigrants who came to America in the century after 1820, in terms of "alienation and its consequences." It was the collapse of the old village economy in central and eastern Europe which uprooted the peasant and started him on his way to the very different life of the New World. The native conservatism of these folk was increased by the harshness of their new cir- cumstances and led them to cling firmly to the churches of their old communions, which they re- constructed here in minute detail, and to reject political radicalism, leaving a fair field for the local party boss and his system of special favors. The book concludes with an affecting evocation of trans- planted peasants who had bogged down in the slums of the seaboard cities and become sweated, unskilled laborers; turned old folk, they still labored under "a consciousness that they would never be- long." As an overall picture, it gives small place to the migration from farm to farm, and underesti- mates the degree of prosperity and rapid accultura- tion, especially among those elements closest to the older American stocks. 4412. Hansen, Marcus Lee. The Atlantic migra- tion, 1 607-1 860; a history of the continuing settlement of the United States. Edited with a fore- word by Arthur M. Schlesinger. Cambridge, Har- vard University Press, 1940. xvii, 391 p. 40-6920 JV6451.H3 4413. Hansen, Marcus Lee. The immigrant in American history. Edited with a foreword by Arthur M. Schlesinger. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1940. 230 p. 40-35768 JV6451.H33 Professor Hansen (1892-1938) was the son of a Norwegian immigrant to Wisconsin. A graduate of the University of Iowa, his work for his Ph. D. at Harvard was interrupted by service in World War I. He was the first to master the 19th-century immi- gration to America as an immense but unitary his- 55^ / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES torical process, and to exhibit it at once in its roots, trunk, and branches. His death at 45 was a mis- fortune to American scholarship, but his published writings, and especially the two posthumous vol- umes listed here, were at once a solid achievement and a guide for all subsequent workers in the field. The Atlantic Migration was to have been the first volume of a three-volume work, with the others carrying the story from i860 to the 1920's. The re- currence of economic distress among the laboring classes of western Europe, rural and urban, in the years after 18 15, is emphasized, along with the common man's discovery of America, which, not- withstanding its hardships, "he did not hesitate to call a Utopia." Conditions on either side of the ocean responsible for the statistical fluctuations of the migration are clearly isolated. Five out of the nine essays of The Immigrant in American History are adapted from the course of eight public lectures which Hansen delivered at the University of London in 1935 on "The Influence of Nineteenth Century Immigration on American History," and discuss immigration in its relation to expansion, democracy, Puritanism, and American culture. All evidence the author's genius for solid generalization. "The Second Colonization of New England" puts into perspective the coming of the Irish after 1825 and the French Canadians after 1900. The serious stu- dent will find no more suggestive aid than "Immi- gration as a Field for Flistorical Research." 4414. Kent, Donald Peterson. The refugee intel- lectual; the Americanization of the immi- grants of 1933-1941. New York, Columbia Uni- versity Press, 1953. xx, 317 p. 53-7600 E184.A1K4 1953 Bibliography: p. [303 5-307. A study which continues, on a more minute scale, Refugees in America (no. 4407); it was undertaken in 1947 by the Oberlaender Trust in cooperation with the Carl Schurz Memorial Foundation. It is based upon 721 replies to questionnaires or inter- views with German and Austrian professional per- sons, estimated to represent nearly 10% of the total immigration of such persons during 1933-41. It was found that 520 of the 721 were able to follow their former pursuits in the United States. The author concludes that if the immigrant is under 40 and has children, he has a decided advantage to- ward integration, and identifies other facilitating or retarding factors. However, "fine personal quali- ties" permit adjustment even under unfavorable conditions. In sum, "probably no other large group of immigrants has ever surpassed them in the speed with which they have adjusted to American culture." 4415. Smith, William Carlson. Americans in the making; the natural history of the assimila- tion of immigrants. New York, Appleton-Cen- tury, 1939. xvii, 454 p. (The Century social science series) 39-22860 JV6465.S55 Bibliography: p. 432-439. "An endeavor to set forth the natural history of the assimilation of immigrants to America; it aims to present the more general aspects of the assimila- tive process which are common to all groups." Data have been largely selected from personal let- ters, as well as published and unpublished diaries, autobiographies, and life histories, to afford an understanding of immigrants and their children as persons, and of their problems in American society. To this end, the author presents the immigrants' point of view regarding the causes of immigra- tion; their reception and settlement; the processes, stages, factors, and agencies of assimilation; and the effects of their heritage upon their way of life in a new environment. The second generation is seen as belonging neither to the immigrant society nor to the society of those longer established, and is studied from the point of view of its reception by the Ameri- can social melange. The immigrants' contribution to America in all fields is treated separately. 4416. Stephenson, George M. A history of Ameri- can immigration, 1 820-1924. Boston, Ginn, 1926. 316 p. 26-4956 JV6455.S94 "Select bibliography": p. 283-302. A brief treatment of the great century of immi- gration to the United States, emphasizing "the part that immigration and the immigrants have played in the political history of the United States." Part I is introductory, reviewing the European background and characteristic settlement of seven major racial groups. Part II analyzes the American political reaction to the immigrants from the Know-Nothing movement through World War I, including the various schemes of restriction which came increas- ingly to the fore, the attitudes of immigrant groups to European conflicts, especially the war of 19 14, and the evolution of naturalization policy. A final part gives separate and very brief treatment to the con- dition and political vicissitudes of Oriental immi- gration. 4417. Wittke, Carl F. We who built America; the saga of the immigrant. New York, Prentice-Hall, 1939. xviii, 547 p. 40-137 JV6455.W55 A general survey of the history of immigration to the United States by ethnic groups, which is neces- sarily based on secondary works, but has some aug- POPULATION, IMMIGRATION, AND MINORITIES / 557 mentation from contemporary newspapers and pub- lic documents. The author, who is of German descent and has made distinguished contributions to the history of German immigration, was dean of Oberlin College when the book appeared, and has been dean of the Graduate School of Western Re- serve University since 1948. It is divided into three parts: "The Colonial Period," "The Old Immigra- tion," and "The New Immigration and Nativism." Some racial groups, such as the Welsh, Swedes, and Jews, are considered in each of the first two parts. There are also a few topical chapters: "The Immi- grant Traffic" in its general conditions, in each of the first two parts; "Immigrant Utopias" such as the Harmony Society and Amana, Iowa; "Culture in Immigrant Chests," largely a roll call of individual immigrants of outstanding achievement; and "Clos- ing the Gate," which reviews restricdonist action and sentiment from 1729 to the national -origins law of 1929. C. Immigration: Policy 4418. Bernard, William S., ed. American immi- gradon policy, a reappraisal. Edited by William S. Bernard; Carolyn Zeleny [and] Henry Miller, assistant editors. New York, Harper, 1950. xx, 341 p. diagrs. 50-120 JV6507.B4 Bibliography: p. 315-330. This "broad survey" of American policy, past, present, and future, is published under the spon- sorship of the National Committee on Immigration Policy, and consistendy maintains an internationalist point of view. The immigration policy of the United States which has prevailed since 1924 is criticized as anachronistic and reactionary in charac- ter, with discriminatory features which "have been increasingly conspicuous as contradictions of our democradc ideals and traditions." Chapter 2 dem- onstrates statisdcally that the preferred nadons do not use their quotas, and that the North American nations, Canada and Mexico, have become major sources of immigration since 1924. Pairs of chap- ters are devoted to pardy stadsdcal arguments that immigration stimulates the American economy and maintains a moderate rate of population growth, and that immigrant adjustment, as reflected by a variety of indexes, has always progressed steadily and in recent times has been speeded up. There are concluding recommendations that the present annual limit of 150,000 persons be increased, "pos- sibly doubled"; that the present system be operated with greater flexibility, especially in the case of quotas left unused; that small quotas be granted to Asiatic peoples; that the United States cooperate with the international organs concerned with im- migration; and that a Congressional commission work out an equitable alternative to the national origins system. 4419. Divine, Robert A. American immigration policy, 1 924- 1 95 2. New Haven, Yale Uni- versity Press, 1957. 220 p. (Yale historical pub- lications. Miscellany 66) 57-6336 JV6455.D5 "Bibliographical essay": p. 195-209. An objective and well-proportioned narrative which puts the recent history of opinion and legisla- tion concerning immigration into very clear per- spective. The restrictive policy established in 1924 has been repeatedly challenged but with small suc- cess, for on crucial occasions it has commanded a majority of both houses of Congress, and relaxa- tions have been partial and temporary. The appli- cation of the national origins system in 1927 led to two years of debate which did not alter the law but did increase minority group consciousness and stir up antagonisms among the various foreign ele- ments. Mexican immigration, heavily increased since 1921, was reduced after 1929 through admin- istrative action by the State Department without further legislation. The same device was used to cut off immigration during the depression, the total falling to 23,068 in 1933, the lowest figure in over a century. Congress refused to take action in favor of European refugees after 1933, but administrative action reduced the stringencies of the quota system and enabled an estimated 250,000 to enter. The Displaced Persons Act of 1948 was greatly watered down by the restricdonist bloc in Congress; it took a major effort to put through the 1950 measure which finally solved the problem. The old racialist views, the author finds, were common to the South- ern and Western members of Congress who passed the McCarran-Walter Act of 1952 over the veto of President Truman. 4420. Garis, Roy L. Immigration restriction; a study of the opposition to and regulation of immigration into the United States. New York, Macmillan, 1928. 376 p. 32-1946 JV6507.G3 1928 Bibliography: p. 355-371. Professor Garis of Vanderbilt University, writing in the turmoil of the immigration debate of the 1920's, was concerned to point out that it was no 55§ / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES new thing, for the opposition to immigration could be traced back to early colonial days. As early as 1639 Plymouth Colony required the removal of foreign paupers. While the background of opinion has been more thoroughly presented in Higham (no. 4422) and other books, this remains the most convenient description of actual legislation, colonial, state, and federal, through the Immigration Act of 1924. The debacle of the Alien and Sedition Acts at the close of the 18th century had led to doubt concerning the competence of the Federal Govern- ment in this sphere, and it was not until the 1870's and early 1880's that the Supreme Court definitely reestablished its right to supersede state enactments. Up to 1921, the author points out, restrictive laws were all qualitative, defining and excluding par- ticular types of undesirables. The act of 1921 was the first to apply a quantitative limitation in the form of an annual maximum figure. The utiliza- tion of the census figures of 1890 in the act of 1924 is expounded in detail. Oriental immigration is separately treated in two concluding chapters. The author was himself a believer in the case for re- striction, but was careful to keep it separate from his factual expositions. 4421. Hartmann, Edward George. The move- ment to Americanize the immigrant. New York, Columbia University Press, 1948. 333 p. (Columbia University. Faculty of Political Science. Studies in history, economics and public law, no. 545) 48-9245 H31.C7, no. 545 JK1758.H35 1948a Bibliography: p. 281-325. A Columbia dissertation which traces the course of an educative movement aiming at a rapid as- similation of the millions of immigrants who had come to America in the decades preceding World War I. It began with the organization of the North American Civic League for Immigrants in 1907, gained momentum as German-American rela- tions deteriorated, thrived during the war and its immediate aftermath, and died as the nation re- turned to "normalcy." Unlike other American social crusades, the Americanization drive was led by the intelligentsia, educators, and social workers and sup- ported by industrialists and business and civic groups. Neither restrictive nor repressive, the move- ment sought to solve the problem of the immigrant's social isolation through night classes and personal guidance intended to mold him "into a patriotic, loyal, and intelligent supporter of the great body of principles and practices which the leaders of the movement chose to consider America's priceless heritage.' " The author evaluates the results of the program as both negative and positive: negative in that it caused some immigrants to band more closely together and led to a revival of nativism, and posi- tive in that it brought native and foreign-born into closer contact and gave impetus to the budding adult education movement. 4422. Higham, John. Strangers in the land; pat- terns of American nativism, 1860-1925. New Brunswick, N. J., Rutgers University Press, 1955. xiv, 431 p. illus. 55-8601 E184.A1H5 "Bibliographical note": p. 399-411. A general history of the antiforeign spirit defined by the author as nativism and manifested in "the hostilities of American nationalists toward European immigrants." Its development is traced as it was affected by the successive impulses of American his- tory, and as it affected, in turn, every level of society and section of the country — politically, economically, socially, and intellectually. Nativism, which had waned during the Civil War, experienced a complete renaissance as South and East European immigra- tion increased in the 1880's and 90's. It ebbed and then flowed again following the turn of the century, reached its zenith with America's entry into World War I and the "100 per cent Americanism" move- ment, and died in the indifference of the Flapper Era, but not before it had achieved "the Nordic vic- tory" of 1924. According to the author, "nativism as a habit of mind has mirrored our national anx- ieties and marked out the bounds of our tolerance"; he therefore considers his book as a study of public opinion. 4423. Solomon, Barbara Miller. Ancestors and immigrants, a changing New England tradi- tion. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1956. 276 p. 56-10163 F4.S67 "A note on sources": p. [2ii]-22i. In this outgrowth of a Flarvard doctoral disserta- tion, prosperous and educated descendants of old New England families are denominated "Brah- mins," and the writings of such persons from about 1850 are examined for "the association of ideas which produced a rationale for immigration restric- tion." The crystallization was not effected until the 1880's; the Massachusetts Society for Promoting Good Citizenship was founded in 1889 and the Immigration Restriction League in 1894. A num- ber of "Teutonist academicians," such as Henry Adams, Barrett Wendell, and Herbert Baxter Adams, historians, and Francis A. Walker, Rich- mond Mayo Smith, and William Z. Ripley, social scientists, are castigated for their contributions to the creation of "the Anglo-Saxon complex." A few distinguished New England thinkers are individu- ally exonerated from participation in this "betrayal of the continuing faith in the potentialities of POPULATION, IMMIGRATION, AND MINORITIES / 559 America's democratic people," which still lingers in the immigration laws of the land. 4424. U. S. Congress. Senate. Committee on the Judiciary. The immigration and naturali- zation systems of the United States. Report pur- suant to S. Res. 137, 80th Cong., 1st sess., as amended, a resolution to make an investigation of the immigration system. Washington, U. S. Govt. Print. Off., 1950. xviii, 925, xxvi p. (81st Cong., 2d sess. Senate. Report no. 1515) 50-60699 JV6416.A39 i95od This, the first general Congressional investigation of its subject since that of 1 907-n, was carried on for nearly three years with the late Senator Patrick McCarran as chairman. Part 1, on "The Immi- gration System," has introductory chapters on the history of immigration and immigration policy, and the characteristics of the population of the United States. It then deals with "Enforcement Agencies," including the Immigration and Naturalization Service, the Board of Immigration Appeals, the Visa Division of the State Department, and the U. S. Public Health Service, and with "Excludable and Deportable Classes," "Admissible Aliens," including quota immigrants, nonquota immigrants, and non- immigrants, "Adjustment of Status," "Procedures," and "Territories and Possessions." Part 2, on "The Naturalization System," has historical and statistical chapters, and discusses citizens, noncitizen nationals, ineligibles for citizenship, becoming a citizen, and how citizenship may be lost and regained. A brief third part deals with "Subversives." Appendix II (p. 805-810) is a synopsis of the recommendations of the committee, which appear in greater detail at the conclusion of most of the chapters; a number of them were embodied in the McCarran-Walter Act of 1952. The remaining appendixes (p. 811- 925) are statistical tables. 4425. U. S. President's Commission on Immigra- tion and Naturalization. Whom we shall welcome; report [Washington, U. S. Govt. Print. Off., 1953] xv, 319 p. 53-60119 JV6415.A4 1953 The passage of the McCarran- Walter Act over President Truman's veto in June 1952 was followed by much criticism and, in September, by the estab- lishment of the President's Commission on Immi- gration and Naturalization with Philip B. Perlman as chairman and Harry N. Rosenfield as executive director. Instructed to report by January 1, during October it received testimony in n cities; these Hearings have been printed for the use of the House Committee on the Judiciary (Washington, U. S. Govt. Print. OfT., 1952. 2089 p.). This Report condemns the existing law as embodying xenophobia and racial discrimination, and calls for the annual admission of one-sixth of 1 percent of the popula- tion at the last census (or 251,162 as against 154,657, under the census of 1940). All relevant functions should be consolidated in a new agency under a commission on immigration and naturalization, which would distribute the annual figure on the basis of the right of asylum, the reunion of families, needs in the United States, special needs in the Free World, and "general immigration." Conditions of admission and grounds for deportation of aliens should "bear a reasonable relationship to the national welfare and security." D. Minorities 4426. Brown, Francis J., and Joseph S. Roucek, eds. One America; the history, contribu- tions and present problems of our racial and national minorities. 3d ed. New York, Prentice-Hall, 1952. xvi, 764 p. (Prentice-Hall education series) 52-1682 E184.A1B87 1952 The most comprehensive and informative single volume on the American minorities; its usefulness since the first publication in 1937 is attested by the second revised edition of 1945 as well as the present revision. There are 51 contributors including the two editors, and Part 2, the largest section of the book, contains concise presentations of the signifi- cant aspects and problems of 45 minority groups, down to Ukranian Americans, Estonian Americans, Hindu Americans, and Icelandic Americans. The majority of these are written by leaders in their own groups, and reflect the "very sense of group supe- riority that lies at the root of the problem." Part 3 describes certain activities of minority groups that influence cultural adjustment, such as the foreign- language press and radio. Part 4 analyzes various aspects of racial and cultural conflict. Part 5 ap- praises the role of government, the community, and especially of educational institutions in the de- velopment of intergroup understanding; its keynote can be gathered from the title of Maurice R. Davie's contribution: "Our Vanishing Minorities." The large bibliography (p. [703]~75o) was specially revised for this edition; it follows the organization of the book, and contains many brief annotations. 560 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 4427. Fairchild, Henry Pratt. Race and national- ity as factors in American life. New York, Ronald Press Co., 1947. 216 p. (Humanizing science series) 48-33 E184.A1F3 Dr. Fairchild (1880-1956), long a professor of sociology at New York University, continued in his later years to assert a viewpoint which had become academically unfashionable or worse. Racial think- ing and feeling, he maintained, were obstinate social realities which could not be exorcised by denying their existence or by alleging their unscientific char- acter, especially since most of the opposing dogmas were equally unproved. He did not believe that all faults were on the side of the much-abused majority, and pointed to the Catholic Church's progressive invasion of a number of social fields, and to Jewry's own sentiments of superiority, exclusion, and dis- crimination. Doctrinaire liberal tenets of equality, and attempts to eliminate racial antipathies by legis- lation, merely promoted social turbulence. The achievement of intergroup harmony and the elim- ination of friction must proceed, like all genuine progress, from the heart of the individual, and must rest on an essentially religious base, the abandon- ment of the sense of self-centered superiority. 4428. Gittler, Joseph B., ed. Understanding minority groups. New York, Wiley, 1956. 139 p. 56-11777 E184.A1G5 Contents. — The philosophical and ethical aspects of group relations, by Wayne A. R. Leys. — The American Catholic, by John LaFarge. — The United States Indian, by John Collier and Theodore H. Haas. — The American Jew, by Oscar Handlin. — The American Negro, by Ira De A. Reid. — The Japanese American, by Dorothy Swaine Thomas. — The Puerto Rican in the United States, by Clarence Senior. — Understanding minority groups, by Joseph B. Gitder. Eight papers originally presented at the Institute on Minority Groups in the United States sponsored by the University of Rochester in 1955 and edited by the chairman of its Department of Sociology. In his introduction President Cornelis W. de Kiewiet suggests that these lectures were themselves "part of the slow tide that is evening out the discrimina- tions of American life," since scholarship is the great emancipator preparing the way for the legislator and the jurist. The editor, in his summing up, says that the basic problem is not group diversity but the acceptance of such diversity, and the avoidance of those reactions of prejudice and discrimination which impose minority status. 4429. Handlin, Oscar. The American people in the twentieth century. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1954. 244 p. (The Library of Congress series in American civilization) 54-8626 E169.1.H265 Of narrower scope than its title suggests; the people in whom the author is principally interested are the immigrant hordes recendy arrived at the beginning of the century, and who kept coming for another decade, and the depressed Negro popula- tion still largely confined to the South in 1900. He traces the fortunes of these groups against the eco- nomic tides of the half-century, and especially under the impact of two world wars. World War I pro- duced a narrow restrictive nationalism and bitter conflicts; but World War II produced a nationalism which had lost its exclusive character, and left men to find new values in their ethnic affiliations and traditions. 4430. Handlin, Oscar. Race and nationality in American life. Boston, Litde, Brown, 1957. 300 p. 57-5827 E184.A1H25 "Notes and acknowledgments": p. [281 5-287. A number of Professor Handlin's articles and papers of the 1950's are here revised and amplified with additional essays in order to form an orderly analysis of "the horror" — racism and its conse- quences in totalitarianism and genocide. The book's point of departure is the origins of Negro chattel slavery in the 17th century, and the exclusion of Orientals, Negroes, and Indians from the ideal of national homogeneity in the 19th. Racism, how- ever rooted in emotion, expressed itself in a series of ideas which came to permeate much of 19th century science. The dubious science in the 19 10 report of the Immigration Commission and the 1923 Laughlin report is emphasized, and in particular the invalidity of the contrasts between the "new im- migration" and the "old." In the concluding por- tions of the book the author presents evidence that, particularly since World War II, inflexible isola- tionism, racial thinking, and racial antagonisms are all on the decline in this country. A nationalism free of restrictive and exclusive elements need not conflict with the traditional democratic mission of America. 4431. McDonagh, Edward C, and Eugene S. Richards. Ethnic relations in the United States. New York, Appleton-Century-Crofts [ 1953] xiv, 408 p. (Appleton-Century-Crofts sociology series) 52-13692 Er84.AiMi37 "Selected readings" at end of each chapter. 4432. Marden, Charles F. Minorities in American society. New York, American Book Co., 1952. 493 p. (American sociology series) 52-972 E184.A1M3 POPULATION, IMMIGRATION, AND MINORITIES / 561 "Suggested reading" at end of each chapter. Both tides are textbooks for college courses in sociology, and their general similarity in approach, materials, and point of view is more noticeable than their differences of detail. Professor Marden of Rutgers University calls attention to the originality of his book in taking "as its central unit, not minor- ities as such, but rather the relations, or the dynamic interaction, between the minority and its reciprocal," which he calls the dominant. The varieties into which he classifies these relations are four: "native"- foreigner, white-colored, ward-wardship, and reli- gious (Catholic-Protestant and Jewish-gentile). While, as the author believes, the ultimate prospect for all minorities is complete assimilation, "it is not certain whether or when white Americans are going to be able to eliminate their 'race-color' conscious- ness." This should not hinder believers in "the American creed" from oppportunistic activity to reduce discrimination, with the least arousal of antagonism, on various fronts. The first tide is un- usual in its "biracial authorship," for Professor Richards of Texas Southern University is a Negro. Its three major parts are concerned with under- standing, analyzing, and with improving ethnic relations. The authors point to the originality of the analytical part, which provides a common frame of reference in "the status system of the United States," and examines the social or interpersonal, the educational, the legal, and the economic status of seven major ethnic groups. Most of the chapters contain one or more extracts from articles in socio- logical periodicals. The authors conclude that the United States has probably made the greatest prog- ress of any modern nation "in testing the tradi- tional assumptions that ethnic differences and social inequality are inherendy linked." 4433. Rose, Arnold M., and Caroline Rose. America divided, minority group relations in the United States. New York, Knopf, 1948. xi, 342, ix p. 48-9862 E184.A1R68 1948 Bibliography: p. 329-342. 4434. Rose, Arnold M., ed. Race prejudice and discrimination: readings in intergroup rela- tions in the United States. New York, Knopf, 1951. xi, 605, vi p. 51-11305 E184.A1R7 The authors of America Divided, producing the first general survey of their subject in 16 years, hoped to pull together all recent scientific study and scholarly writing in their field, but were compelled by its voluminousness to confine themselves to the most important topics and salient facts. Minority problems are defined as distortions in the mind of the majority, and 12 minority groups comprising 431240—60 37 43 out of our 131 millions are identified. The positions of minorities are then discussed with re- spect to American economic life, law and justice, and political and social life. Descriptive chapters on group self-identification and the minority com- munity are followed by analytical ones which mini- mize race differences and note that present-day theories of race prejudice are inadequately grounded in empirical research. A concluding chapter on recent and future trends suggests that relations among nationality and racial groups are improving, but among religious groups are de- teriorating. The second title is an anthology made up principally of articles from scholarly periodicals, with a few extracts from books; the editor contri- butes introductions to each of the five parts and the 58 selections. The arrangement follows that of America Divided, save that Part V, "Proposed Techniques for Eliminating Minority Problems," with seven selections, has no counterpart there. The book brings within one pair of covers a quan- tity of scattered and quite valuable material. 4435. Warner, William Lloyd, and Leo Srole. The social systems of American ethnic groups. New Haven, Yale University Press, 1945. 318 p. tables, diagrs. (Yankee City series, v. 3) A45-3302 E184.A1W25 The third in this series of volumes on the social structure of an old New England community as it appears to a group of social anthropologists apply- ing the techniques developed in studying more primitive societies. The research was performed during 1930-35 by a staff of 25 field workers, ana- lysts, and writers, as a part of the larger investiga- tion. A part of the text written by Dr. Srole formed his doctoral dissertation submitted to the University of Chicago in 1940. The method varies, as in other volumes of the series, between mathematical tabu- lations of social distance, expressing intangibles in decimal points, and imaginatively fictive "case his- tories." The ethnic groups studied are the Irish, French Canadians, Jews, Italians, Armenians, Greeks, Poles, and Russians, with the Yankees at one pole as a positive absolute, and the Negroes at the other as a negative one. "Each group enters the city at the bottom of the social heap (lower-lower class) and through the several generations makes its desperate climb upward. The early arrivals, having had more time, have climbed farther up the ladder than the ethnic groups that followed them." The unassimilated portion of each ethnic group usually has a status structure of its own. Later chapters consider the ethnic groups in their bearing upon the family, the church, the school, and private associa- tions. 502 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES E. Negroes 4436. Crum, Mason. Gullah; Negro life in the Carolina Sea Islands. Durham, N. C, Duke University Press, 1940. xv, 351 p. 40-34941 E185.93.S7C85 Bibliography: p. [3451-351. Most of the titles in the present section are con- cerned with the interaction of Negro and white communities amid the increasing complexities of industrial civilization. This one differs in present- ing the life of an isolated Negro community where, at the time of writing, relatively few changes had "taken place in their mode of living and their outlook upon life since Emancipation." These Sea Islands of South Carolina, from Georgetown to Port Royal Sound, are cut off from the coastal plain by a belt of wide swamps infested by the ccttonmouth moccasin, and were little frequented from the fall of the slave regime at the end of 1861 until the construction of modern hard-surfaced roads. In IQ40 the sea island Negroes were largely tenant farmers, raising cotton and corn on exhausted land, living in poverty and chronic debt, and on a diet of cornbread, molasses, and fatback. Their speech is the Gullah dialect, incomprehensible to the out- sider, "perhaps the most peculiar of all American forms of speech." It is, nevertheless, almost wholly English, derived from the speech of indentured servants, with only a score of African words. The author has traced the Biblical lineage of the Gullah spirituals, in parallel passages which "show how deeply the slaves of the Carolina coast draw upon the dramatic episodes of the Old and New Testa- ments, and particularly the apocalyptic passages." The remainder of the book is a historical treatment of plantation days and the aftermath of Emancipa- tion, with frequent quotations from source mate- rials. 4437. Davie, Maurice R. Negroes in American society. New York, Whittlesey House, 1949. 542 p. 49-11574 E185.6.D3 "References" at end of chapters. A textbook by a Yale professor of sociology which aims to give a factual, scientific analysis and is ex- plicitly "eclectic in character" — i. e., is based on other sociological literature rather than on any personal experience or investigations of its author. This gives the book the relative advantage of being less exacerbated and hortatory in tone than many recent writings on the subject. Four historical chapters are followed by substantial analyses of the situation of the Negro in economic life, education, religion, family life, housing, crime, and suffrage. Interest- ing chapters on subjects not always so well covered in general works include "Negro Health and Vital- ity," "The Negro Question in Wartime," "Lynch- ing and Race Riots," and "Race Mixture and Inter- marriage." The controversies of the present and the recent past are reviewed in chapters on "Segre- gation and Discrimination," "The Doctrine of Racial Inferiority," "The Negro's Reaction to His Status," and "The Future of the Negro." The author be- lieves that the indirect approach to a change of attitudes on race relations is more effective than the direct one, and points out that "American Negroes now rate in education, health, economic status, and other measures of achievement far above the total population of all but a few very favored nations." 4438. Davis, Allison, Burleigh B. Gardner, and Mary R. Gardner. Deep South; a social anthropological study of caste and class. Directed by Wfilliam] Lloyd Warner. Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1941. xv, 558 p. tables. 41-23645 HN79.A2D3 An exploration of a Southern community's or- ganized system of sentiments and attitudes as ex- pressed in the social practices of whites and Negroes and in the beliefs they hold about themselves and about each other. A white man and his wife and a Negro and his wife, all trained in social anthro- pology at Harvard, were sent to live for two years in an unnamed city of the deep South. Over half of its 10,000 inhabitants were Negroes, and the adja- cent rural areas were over 80 percent Negro. They attempted to discover group attitudes less by formal interviews than by stimulating free discussions with members of both the white and Negro communities, as soon as these had come to accept the investi- gators as belonging to their own social groups. Southern society, they conclude, is rigorously di- vided into two racial castes; there are classes within each caste and cliques within each class. However, there is a relatively slight differentiation of class within the Negro caste, and both castes attempt to conceal their class feelings in deference to demo- cratic and Christian dogmas. On occasion force and intimidation may be used to maintain caste divisions. Caste and class have changed and are changing through time, but remain recognized and observable systems. Over half the book is devoted to the relation of caste and class to the cotton econ- POPULATION, IMMIGRATION, AND MINORITIES / 563 omy of the area, and a long final chapter to their relation to the white monopoly of local government. 4439. Drake, St. Clair, and Horace R. Cayton. Black metropolis; a study of Negro life in a northern city. With an introd. by Richard Wright. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1945. xxxiv, 809 p. maps, diagrs. 45-9257 F548.9.N3D68 "A list of selected books dealing with the Ameri- can Negro" : p. 793-796. This thick volume originated in a series of projects financed by the Works Projects Administration and directed by Professors Cayton and William Lloyd Warner of the University of Chicago. They grad- ually broadened from a study of juvenile delinquency in Chicago's South Side to that of "the description and analysis of the structure and organization of the Negro community, both internally, and in relation to the metropolis of which it is a part." The Negro ghetto was the Black Belt, a narrow tongue of land, seven miles in length and one and a half in width, in which, together with five smaller South-Side areas, 90 percent of Chicago's 337,000 Negroes were solidly packed. This work sketches the historical development of the Belt, analyzes the nature of the "color-line" in this Northern city and the move- ments across it, and describes the "job ceiling" which kept Negroes from competing as individuals for any type of job for which they were qualified, and concentrated them in semiskilled and unskilled occupations. Part III describes the ways of life of "Bronzeville" in a variety of spheres and on three class levels. In conclusion the authors stress the contradiction between the principle of fixed status and that of free competition, which prevails else- where in American urban society, and describe the problem as essentially a moral one. 4440. Franklin, John Hope. From slavery to free- dom; a history of American Negroes. 2d ed., rev. & enl. New York, Knopf, 1956. xv, 639, xlii p. 56-13200 E185.F825 1956 "Bibliographical notes": p. 605-639. Professor Franklin's volume, originally published in 1947, was at once recognized as the most success- ful of all attempts to tell the story of the American Negro in a single volume. In order to put his story in its proper perspective, the author has maintained "a continuous recognition of the main stream of American history and the relationship of the Negro to it," as well as "a discreet balance between recog- nizing the deeds of outstanding persons and depict- ing the fortunes of the great mass of Negroes." The close of the Civil War forms a halfway point in the volume. Negro beginnings are traced in chapters on "Early Negro States of Africa" and "The African Way of Life," and the introduction to America in chapters on "The Slave Trade" and the origins of the slave system in the Caribbean Islands. A chap- ter on "That Peculiar Institution" of the Old South is followed by one on the "Quasi-Free Negroes," North and South, of the years before i860. "Los- ing the Peace" is the author's description of the gradual overthrow of the Reconstruction setdement and the triumph of White Supremacy. Interesting chapters describe "A Harlem Renaissance" follow- ing World War I and the immense benefits which Negroes received from the New Deal. Separate chapters are devoted to the progress of the Negro in Latin America and in Canada. Rayford W. Logan's The Negro in the United States, A Brief History (Princeton, Van Nostrand, 1957. 191 p. An Anvil original, no. 19) is an inexpensive paper- back with only 14 pages on the years before 1865. However, it gives a concise oudine of the Negro's upward struggles since that year, together with 28 selected documents (p. 106-182) and a select bibliog- raphy (p. 183-185). Langston Hughes and Milton Meltzer, in A Pictorial History of the Negro in America (New York, Crown, 1956. 316 p.), pre- sent a very interesting and various body of illus- trations, most of them contemporary with their subject matter, and provided with an adequate text- ual commentary. 4441. Frazier, Edward Franklin. The Negro family in the United States. Rev. and abridged ed. New York, Dryden Press, 1948. xviii, 374 p. (The Dryden Press sociology publications) 48-7000 E185.86.F74 1948 Professor Frazier describes this edition as a popu- lar condensation, carried out by Mrs. Bonita Valien, of the first, published by the University of Chicago Press in 1939 (xxxii, 686 p.). Ernest W. Burgess, editor of the University of Chicago sociological series in which it appeared, described it as the most valu- able contribution to the literature of the family since the publication, 20 years earlier, of Thomas and Znaniecki's Polish Peasant in Europe and America (no. 4495). As he remarks, the transplantation of the Negro from Africa to America, the transition from slavery to freedom, and the migration from the plantation to the metropolis produced uniquely great and sudden dislocations in the family life of a people, and so exhibit "a social institution sub- jected to the severest stresses and strains of social change." The special value of the study lay in its combination of such precise statistics as could be ob- tained with a multitude of personal narratives col- lected by the author from Chicago and Harlem Negroes. Since the tables have disappeared and the documentary material has been considerably reduced in the abridgement, many students will prefer the original edition. The four successive 564 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES phases of the Negro family in America are defined by the author as primarily matriarchal, patriarchal, unstable, and equalitarian, but these abstractions give only a faint idea of the richness of his materials. 4442. Frazier, Edward Franklin. The Negro in the United States. Rev. ed. New York, Macmillan, 1957. xxxiii, 769 p. maps, diagrs., tables. 57-5224 E185.F833 1957 Bibliography: p. 707-752. A comprehensive sociological treatment of the Negro race in the United States, originally published in 1949. It approaches the subject historically and emphasizes "the emergence of the Negro as a minor- ity group and his gradual integration into American life." The Negro is regarded, not as an atomized individual, but "as a part of an organized (or dis- organized) social life which forms a more or less segregated segment of American society." Of the historical sections, Part 1 on the slave regime em- phasizes the Negro's role in the social organization of the plantation, in which role he was able to take over the culture of the whites. Part 2 dwells upon the racial conflict which developed during and fol- lowing Reconstruction, eventuating in the establish- ment of a quasi-caste system. Part 3 analyzes "The Negro Community and Its Institutions" with respect to population, rural and urban communities, social and economic stratification, the family, the church, fraternal organizations, and business enterprise. Part 4, on "Intellectual Life and Leadership," describes educational institutions, the press and literature, social movements, and the Negro intelli- gentsia. Part 5 deals with "Problems of Adjust- ment," including crime, delinquency, and race rela- tions. In conclusion, Dr. Frazier examines the "Prospects for Integration of the Negro into Ameri- can Society" and finds that they have been improved by all recent social changes. The permanence of these changes is guaranteed by the international situation, for upon America's treatment of the Negro at home depends her "bid for the support of the colored majority in the world." 4443. Johnson, Charles S. Into the main stream, a survey of best practices in race relations in the South, by Charles S. Johnson and associates, Elizabeth L. Allen, Horace M. Bond, Margaret Mc- Culloch [and] Alma Forrest Polk. Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina Press, 1947. xiv, 355 p. 47"3 02 99 E185.61.J624 Dr. Johnson has been associated with Fisk Univer- sity at Nashville since 1928 and its president since 1946. In this volume, however, he writes as Direc- tor of the Race Relations Division of the American Missionary Association, which conducted the survey upon which it is based. Seven hundred "respon- sible and informed" individuals in the South co- operated with the project, and Dr. Johnson credits "the main structure" of the volume to Miss McCul- loch, who analyzed their contributions. The book is more general in scope than a strict interpretation of its subtitle would imply; the subject matter actually extends to the improving condition of the Southern Negro in most of the spheres of life: citizenship (including the use of the ballot and ap- pointment to government service), employment, education (including college courses on the Negro or on race relations), the "moulding of attitudes" by a variety of media, public health, the churches, and the Y. M. and Y. W. C. A. In a number of sections the items of information follow no clear pattern of arrangement. In his Introduction Dr. Johnson points out the factors at present favorable to inter- racial harmony and concludes: "The totality of these incidents and programs undoubtedly suggests progress and a will to change, both of which have been accelerated by the war." 4444. Johnson, Charles S. Patterns of Negro seg- regation. New York, Harper, 1943. xxii, 332 p. 43-1802 E185.61.J625 Bibliographical footnotes. "A study of social behavior in interracial contact situations in selected areas of the United States," for which a field staff of five conducted interviews in three counties of the rural South and five South- ern cities, as well as in border and Northern cities. Part I is concerned with patterns of segregation and discrimination for, in the author's opinion, "there can be no group segregation without discrim- ination," and "in equity any segregation that is not mutual or voluntary is discrimination." The patterns are described for residential areas, educa- tional institutions, recreational facilities, law en- forcement, relief and welfare, public buildings, trans- portation, hospitals, hotels and restaurants, stores, places of amusement, professional services, and, at greater length, for occupations and industries. An important chapter describes "The Racial Etiquette in Public Contacts and Personal Relations," while an-' other on "The Ideology of the Color Line" is based upon statements by white persons most of whom justified segregation. Southern state legislation en- forcing segregation is analyzed, as well as the civil rights laws of several Northern states aimed against discrimination. Part II is concerned with the "Be- havioral Response" of Negroes to these patterns, the interview material being classified into "Accept- ance," "Avoidance," and "Hostility and Aggres- sion." Dr. Johnson thinks that urbanization and industrialization have been the principal agents in eroding the old customs, and that they will continue to operate in the same direction. Comer Vann POPULATION, IMMIGRATION, AND MINORITIES / 565 Woodward's The Strange Career of Jim Crow (new and rev. ed. New York, Oxford University Press, 1957. 183 p. A Galaxy book, GB6) originated in James W. Richard lectures delivered at the Uni- versity of Virginia in 1954. It convincingly demon- states that most of the patterns described by Dr. Johnson did not, as is generally supposed, originate at the time the South regained its autonomy in the 1870's, but nearly two decades later, as a weapon employed by the Bourbons to defeat the Populist movement of the i89o's, and that they were initiated in the western states of the South, and only gradually spread to the Atlantic seaboard. 4445. Logan, Rayford W. The Negro in Ameri- can life and thought: the nadir, 1877-1901. New York, Dial Press, 1954. 380 p. 54-6000 E185.61.L64 Professor Logan of Howard University assesses the status of the Negro and the opinion of the North- ern press concerning the Negro between the Com- promise of 1877, which withdrew Federal troops from the South, and the assassination of President McKinley. President Hayes had not meant to abandon the poor colored people of the South, but the "honorable and influential Southern whites" dishonored their side of the bargain and nullified the Reconstruction amendments. The nadir was reached with President McKinley 's "callous disre- gard for the protection of the constitutional rights of Negroes." By 1900 "what is now called second- class citizenship was accepted by presidents, the Supreme Court, Congress, organized labor, the Gen- eral Federation of Women's Clubs — indeed by the vast majority of Americans, North and South, and by the 'leader' of the Negro race [Booker T. Wash- ington]." Yet from 1865 to 1900, as the author him- self tells us, the Negro population doubled in numbers, increased in literacy from 18.6 percent to 55.5 percent, and began organizing its own banks (in 1888). The ideals of the Abolitionists and the Radical Republicans were obscured for the time being, but the record indicates slow and painful progress rather than any real nadir. 4446. Myrdal, Gunnar. An American dilemma; the Negro problem and modern democracy, by Gunnar Myrdal with the assistance of Richard Sterner and Arnold Rose. [9th ed.] New York, Harper, 1944. lix, 1483 p. 48-10226 E185.6.M95 1944 Bibliography: p. 1144-1180. The Carnegie Corporation of New York was con- vinced by the late Newton D. Baker that it needed more and better organized knowledge of the Ameri- | can Negro of today before it could intelligendy dis- \ burse its funds on his behalf. In 1938, therefore, it brought over an impartial Swedish social economist, Dr. Myrdal of the University of Stockholm and the Swedish Senate, as director of "a comprehensive study of the Negro in the United States, to be under- taken in a wholly objective and dispassionate way as a social phenomenon." Dr. Myrdal took much advice, and in 1939 engaged a staff of six, including Ralph J. Bunche and Dorothy S. Thomas, while some 70 other persons worked on special projects or as assistants to the principal investigators. In addition to the works by Johnson and Sterner listed in this section (nos. 4444 and 4448), two other of the resulting special studies were published by Harper: The Myth of the Negro Past, by Melville J. Herskovits (1941. xiv, 374 p.), and Character- istics of the American Negro, edited by Otto Kline- berg (1944. 409 p.). The unpublished manu- scripts of some 35 other studies were deposited in the Schomburgk Collection of the New York Public Library. The completion and publication of Dr. Myrdal's overall report were considerably delayed by the war, but since its appearance it has been gen- erally accepted as the principal authority in its field. Summary is impracticable, but the titles of the eleven parts into which the 1,024 P a ges of the main text are divided give an idea of its comprehensiveness and organization: "The Approach," "Race," "Popula- tion and Migration," "Economics," "Politics," "Justice," "Social Inequality," "Social Stratification," "Leadership and Concerted Action," "The Negro Community," and "An American Dilemma." Dr. Myrdal's conclusion is that the progress of "social engineering" now permits the redemption of Amer- ica's greatest failure and the realization of America's own innermost desire, the final integration of the Negro into modern democracy. The final quarter of the work consists of ten appendixes and over 250 pages of footnotes. Readers daunted by the mas- siveness of An American Dilemma may prefer the condensation prepared by one of Dr. Myrdal's assistants, Arnold M. Rose: The Negro in America (New York, Harper, 1948. xvii, 325 p.). 4447. Reid, Ira De A. The Negro immigrant, his background, characteristics and social adjust- ment, 1899-1937. New York, Columbia University Press, 1939. 261 p. (Studies in history, eco- nomics and public law, edited by the Faculty of Political Science of Columbia University, no. 449) 39-19999 H31.C7, no. 449 JV6895.NH4R4 1939a Bibliography: p. 253-258. A model study of the acculturation problems of a group of erstwhile members of a majority who must become members of a minority and find a place within the Negro class structure. At the time of writing, the Negro immigrants in the United States, 566 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES nearly all of Caribbean origin, numbered some 100,000 persons, 60 percent of whom lived in New York City. Dr. Reid based his report on personal histories, government documents, and his own ob- servations as a participant in the group life of these immigrants in New York City. His evidence shows that the members of the group tend to resent relega- tion to a minority status and adopt radical views with respect to increasing Negro rights in the United States. Native Negroes usually regard them with hostility as foreign competitors for jobs, and dub them "monkey-chasers." There are careful exposi- tions of the number, sources, and background of the Negro immigration, its population characteris- tics, and the degree, form, patterns, and trends of its interracial and intraracial adjustment. A separate chapter contains excerpts from life histories. 4448. Sterner, Richard M. E. The Negro's share; a study of income, consumption, housing and public assistance [by] Richard Sterner in col- laboration with Lenore A. Epstein, Ellen Winston, and others. New York, Harper, 1943. 433 p. inch tables. 43-8019 E185.8.S8 One of the supplementary volumes in the study of the American Negro sponsored by the Carnegie Corporation of New York and planned by Dr. Myrdal (no. 4446). Dr. Sterner, a specialist on social questions in the service of the Swedish Gov- ernment, came to the United States with Dr. Myrdal. The conditions reflected in this book are almost exclusively those of the 1930's, before the full em- ployment which was created by wartime conditions and has outlasted them. Part I, concerned with "Living Conditions," deals with the Negro's flight from agriculture, his employment and unemploy- ment, family incomes and expenditure, food con- sumption, and rural and urban housing. Part II, on "Social Welfare," endeavors to ascertain the Negro's share in various forms of public assistance. Dr. Sterner does not facilitate the reader's task by chap- ter summaries or general conclusions, and ordinarily one must go to his tables to discover the relative posi- tion of the Negro. Thus a sample group of South- ern Negro nonrelief families had median income ranging from $445 to $870; white nonrelief fam- ilies from the same areas ranged bewteen $1,133 an d $2,356. None of the Negro groups approached the "so-called maintenance level" of $1,261. An up-to- date survey, which would document the general improvement of the last 15 years, is much to be desired. 4449. Washington, Booker T. Up from slavery, an autobiography. With an introd. by Jonathan Daniels. London, Oxford University Press, 1945, c i9oi. 244 p. (The World's classics, 499) 49~"39°47 E185.97.W3162 4450. Mathews, Basil }. Booker T. Washington, educator and interracial interpreter. Cam- bridge, Harvard University Press, 1948. xvii, 350 p. 48-8652 Ei 85.97. W249 Washington (1856-1915), the son of a slave woman and a white father, was, from 1881 to his death, the first "Principal" of Tuskegee Institute, Tuskegee, Alabama, which he made into a leading Negro educational center. After early years as a laborer and handyman, his formal education began at Hampton Normal and Agricultural Institute in 1872. Washington's appointment to head the in- fant Tuskegee Institute was the pivot of his life since it enabled him to work for what he considered the most important goal of the newly freed Negroes: economic independence. Under Washington, Tuskegee became a training school where Negroes could learn practical agricultural and mechanical skills in a novel curriculum planned by him, with the students' work contributing to the upkeep of the school as well as to their own development. Outside the Institute he founded a number of asso- ciations for Negro professional men and women and raised large amounts of money for the Institute and other organizations benefiting the Negro. With his Atlanta speech of 1895 he won world-wide recognition as the spokesman and leader of the American Negro. His advocacy of the evolutionary betterment of Negro status won for him both praise and criticism from Negroes and whites alike. Much of his last 15 years was spent in travel, delivering lectures and organizing interracial conferences, both here and abroad. Up from Slavery is a classic auto- biography, but in concentrating upon certain aspects of its author's career and message hardly tells the whole story, even down to its date of publication (1901). A fuller narrative is provided by Mr. Mathews' admiring biography, and even by Samuel R. Spencer's concise life in The Library of American Biography series: Booker T. Washington and the Negro's Place in American Life (Boston, Little, Brown, 1955. 212 p.). 4451. Weaver, Robert C. The Negro ghetto. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1948. xviii, 404 p. maps. 48-7373 E185.89.H6W4 Bibliography: p. 371-375. The author confines his inquiries to the residential or spatial separation of the races in the North, which is the peculiar manifestation of Negro segregation in that part of the country. The concentration of migrated Negroes into segregated areas is of com- paratively recent origin, a result of the general POPULATION, IMMIGRATION, AND MINORITIES / 567 housing shortage during the depression of the 1930's. Mr. Weaver seeks to determine the economic and social patterns making for the solidification of Black Belt areas in Northern cities. Active opposition to the dispersal of Negroes in these cities, he shows, is led by building, real estate, and home-finance groups, and carried out by restrictive covenants and by inhospitable treatment and social ostracism on the part of white residents who fear an influx of Negroes into their neighborhoods. Mr. Weaver analyzes these fears, in which race prejudice and concern for property values are mingled, and ap- peals for the establishment of educational programs in interracial living and increases in the housing available to minorities. Much of the information is drawn from housing problems in Chicago. F. Jews 4452. Commentary. Commentary on the Ameri- can scene; portraits of Jewish life in America, edited by Elliot E. Cohen. Introd. by David Ries- man. New York, Knopf, 1953. 336 p. 52-6413 E184.J5C65 4453. Ribalow, Harold U., ed. Mid-century; an anthology of Jewish life and culture in our times. New York, Beechhurst Press, 1955. 598 p. 54-10691 E184.J5R5 Commentary has been published under the aus- pices of the American Jewish Committee since the close of 1945 and is generally regarded as the lead- ing American periodical for Jewish culture. In the first title its editor has drawn upon its department called "From the American Scene" for 20 pieces by 17 writers. Journalism in the best current Ameri- can manner, they give vivid glimpses of Jewish life in a variety of aspects, such as "The Jewish Delica- tessen" and "The Jewish College Student: New Model." The majority derive from the New York City area, but others describe San Francisco, Tulsa, a Chicago suburb, and an unnamed New England community. The editor of Mid-century has been editor of Congress Weekly and The American Zion- ist; his father, Menachem Ribalow, one of whose pieces is included, was until his death in 1953 "per- haps the most prominent Hebrew writer in the United States." It assembles 45 articles from 16 periodicals, including 7 from Commentary , 6 from Congress Weekly, and also 8 from non-Jewish peri- odicals, "by the most notable names in American- Jewish scholarship, theology, philosophy, culture, and journalism." They are grouped in four sec- tions: "First Person Singular," "Belonging and Sur- vival," "Culture," and "Zion." Some of the articles are concerned with Jewish problems in general, but the majority are in whole or part concerned with American Jewry. The volume closes with 9 pages of "Biographical Notes" on the 53 contributors. 4454. Edidin, Ben M. Jewish community life in America. New York, Hebrew Pub. Co., 1947. 282 p. 47-23471 E184.J5E27 "Selected bibliography": p. 273-277. A comprehensive description of Jewish group life in the United States, in its structure, agencies, func- tions, problems, and aspirations, which takes its de- parture from the average local Jewish community rather than from American Jewry as a whole, and treats each topic in its historical development. Simply written, it is intended for students, teachers, parents, and group leaders, and is suitable for junior and senior high school classes or adult study groups. Chapters on the development of American Jewish communities are followed by analytical ones on the school, the synagogue, and the community center, which, although relatively a newcomer, now ranks with the other two "as one of American Jewry's three chief communal institutions." There follow descriptions of cultural activity, such as that of the Histadruth Ivrith, of social service, occupations, the struggle against anti-Semitic discrimination, and aid for Zionism. Miscellaneous community organiza- tions, such as the B'nai B'rith, receive a long chapter, and the "year-round job" of raising funds another. American Jews still regard the community idea as essential to individual happiness, but "in every American Jewish community new ideas and methods are beim* tried." 4455. Flandlin, Oscar. Adventure in freedom: three hundred years of Jewish life in Amer- ica. New York, McGraw-Hill, 1954. 282 p. 54-10634 E184.J5H29 Written for the tercentenary of the first Jewish immigration to America, this is neither a complete history nor an assessment of "contributions," but an effort at interpretation of the main lines of de- velopment, particularly in their bearing upon the problems of the present. The flight of the Jews from Eastern Europe after 1870 rapidly altered the character of American Jewry and led to its bifurca- 568 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES tion into two separate communities, only gradually reintegrated after World War I. Among the factors which promoted the reintegration of the Jewish com- munity were "the free and fluid society of the United States," in which the rigid lines of social division tended to disappear, and the increasing virulence of anti-Semitism both in Europe and in America, where discrimination and exclusion in social life, education, and the professions were on the increase until World War II. The old anti- Semitism died in that war, and American Jews have become increasingly assimilated to the standards and tastes of American middle-class culture. 4456. Gordon, Albert I. Jews in transition. Min- neapolis, University of Minnesota Press, 1949. xviii, 331 p. 49-10489 F614.M5G67 The author served as a rabbi of Adath Jeshurun Synagogue during 1930-46 and used this oppor- tunity to apply the "participant-observer technique" of social anthropology to the Jewish community of Minneapolis. His main theme is "the changes that have occurred in the beliefs, practices, and institu- tions of the European Jews" who setded there, and made adaptations in their original cultural patterns. For ten years he recorded the conversations and comments that he heard, not stenographically but in recollection, and has combined these oral materials with written ones such as synagogue records and the files of the American Jewish World, a Minneapolis weekly. He obtained substantial personal histories from four of the oldest members of the community, born in the 1860's; these comprise Part III of the book. "There is," he finds, "a decreasing emphasis upon ritual and form in the religious life" of the community, and "the dietary laws are gradually disappearing," even from the home, but some cere- monies and holidays have been revived or elaborated. The Jews of Minneapolis, although completely loyal to the United States, go on living in two cultures, and seem likely to continue doing so. They com- prise only 4 percent of the city's total population, about the same proportion as the Jewish population of the whole United States. 4457. Janowsky, Oscar I., ed. The American Jew, a composite portrait. New York, Harper, 1942. xiv, 322 p. 42-23786 E184.J5J3 Partial Contents. — Historical background, by O. I. Janowsky. — Judaism and the synagogue, by D. de S. Pool. — Jewish education, achievements and needs, by I. B. Berkson. — The cultural scene: lit- erary expression, by Marie Syrkin. — Hebrew in Jew- ish culture, by A. S. Halkin. — Structure of the Jewish community, by A. G. Duker. — Economic trends, by Nathan Reich. — Anti-Semitism, by J. J. Weinstein. — Current philosophies of Jewish life, by Milton Steinberg. — Zionism in American Jewish life, by Sulamith Schwartz. — Evaluation of the por- trait of American Jewish living: The Jewish com- munity and the outside world, by G. N. Shuster. The national being and the Jewish community, by H. M. Kallen. — Selected bibliography (p. [287]- 298). 4458. Friedman, Theodore, and Robert Gordis, eds. Jewish life in America. New York, Horizon Press, 1955. 352 p. 55-11462 E184.J5F78 Partial Contents. — American Jewry: fourth cen- tury, by Robert Gordis. — Religion: American orthodoxy, retrospect and prospect, by Emanuel Rackman. — Jewish tradition in 20th century Amer- ica: the conservative approach, by Theodore Fried- man. — The temper of reconstruction, by H. M. Schulweis. — Reform Judaism in America, by S. S. Cohon. — Secularism and religion in the Jewish labor movement, by C. B. Sherman. — Culture: The East Side, matrix of the Jewish labor movement, by Abra- ham Menes. — American Jewish scholarship, by S. B. Freehof. — Hebrew culture and creativity in Amer- ica, by Jacob Kabakoff. — Jewish literature in Eng- lish, by Charles Angoff. — Yiddish literature in America, by N. B. MinkorT. — Jewish education in the United States, by W. B. Furie. — Jewish music in America, by H. D. Weisgall. — Visual arts in Ameri- can Jewish life, by S. S. Kayser. — The community: Interfaith relations in the United States, by M. N. Kertzer. — Impact of Zionism on American Jewish life, by A. G. Duker. — The American rabbi: his changing role, by B. J. Bamberger. — Notes on the authors. Of these two cooperative surveys of Jewish life in America, the earlier was begun as an educational project of Hadassah, the Women's Zionist Organiza- tion of America. The authors believed that a Jew- ish homeland in Palestine, where Jewish culture would not be ancillary to a majority culture, was indispensable under any circumstances; they were, nevertheless, according to Dr. Janowsky, "com- pletely identified with American culture and the American way of life." The second survey, pub- lished 13 years later, originated in a tercentenary is- sue of the magazine Judaism and was sponsored by the American Jewish Congress. It assumes "the permanent framework of all forms of Jewish activi- ties on the American locale," and the author who deals with Zionism believes that "it will have to fight for its place in the American Jewish community." The earlier survey is the more comprehensive; the later one is more detailed in its treatment of religion and culture, and offers, its editors think, "the kind of tempered appraisal of the mainstreams of Ameri- can Jewish creativity rarely to be found in contem- POPULATION, IMMIGRATION, AND MINORITIES / 5^9 porary writing." The voting record of Jews during the 1952 presidential election is analyzed in Lawrence H. Fuchs' The Political Behavior of American Jews (Glencoe, 111., Free Press, 1956. 220 p.) as part of an historical and sociopolitical study undertaken to determine why most American Jews are political liberals. 4459. The Jewish people, past and present, v. 4. 300 years of Jewish life in the United States. New York, Jewish Encyclopedic Handbooks, Cen- tral Yiddish Culture Organization (CYCO) 1955. 455 P : 46-7394 DS102.4.J4, v. 4 This large and handsomely produced volume re- sults from the collaboration of eleven contributors, eight editors, and five translators. The section on general history is conventional enough, and the sections on religious movements and communal life present material readily available elsewhere. Jacob Lestschinsky's section on economic and social de- velopment presents much demographic information, with special attention to occupations and social structure. Philip Friedman on political and social movements traces the development of American Zionism. Mark Wischnitzer, in charting the im- pact of American Jewry on Jewish life abroad, describes rebuilding after World War I, and during the Nazi persecutions, and the United Jewish appeal. Abraham Menes, in describing the Jewish labor movement, places its golden age between 1901 and 1918, culminating in the "great revolt" of 1909 — the strike of 60,000 cloakmakers. Samuel Niger deals with Yiddish culture, including the Yiddish theater of the 1880's, and Joshua Trachtenberg de- scribes American Jewish scholarship, which includes not only Talmudics and Rabbinics, but also his- torical, sociological, and cultural studies. There are frequent halftone cuts of persons and buildings. 4460. Joseph, Samuel. Jewish immigration to the United States from 1881 to 1910. New York, Columbia University, 1914. 209 p. (Co- lumbia University, Faculty of Political Science. Studies in history, economics and public law, v. 59, n. 4; whole no. 145) 14-15042 H31.C7, v. 59 JV6895.J6J6 Bibliography: p. 207-209. In 1880 more than half of the Jews in the world were located within the Eastern European Pale, the majority, in Poland and Western Russia, subjects of the Czar, and large minorities in Galicia, a province of Austria-Hungary, and Moldavia, a province of Rumania. Their condition, which had in many respects improved during the reign of the liberal Czar Alexander II, took a drastic turn for the worse after his assassination in 1881. New and harsh laws were decreed, and "that combination of murder, outrage, and pillage — the pogrom" was unleashed against them. During the three decades 1881-1910, 1,562,800 Jewish immigrants came to America, con- stituting 8.8 percent of the total immigration. 71 percent of these Jews came from Russia, and most of the remainder from Austria-Hungary. This workmanlike dissertation compares the immigra- tion from the three nations and describes the whole stream as essentially a family movement of per- manent settlers largely concentrating in the North Atlantic States. The text is supplemented by 69 statistical tables (p. 158-196). 4461 Levinger, Lee J. A history of the Jews in the United States. [4th rev. ed.] Cincin- nati, Union of American Hebrew Congregations, 1949. xxiii,6i6p. illus. (Commission on Jewish Education of the Union of American Hebrew Con- gregations and the Central Conference of American Rabbis. Union graded series) 49-49296 E184.J5L664 1949 Bibliographical references at end of chapters or sections. A textbook for classes of the high school level in Jewish schools, the first edition of which appeared in 1930. It is considerably more comprehensive and better balanced than a number of books on the sub- ject written for adult Jews, and its very simplicity and methodical procedure make it a useful guide for the gentile reader. Rabbi Levinger organizes his text around the three main waves of Jewish immigra- tion, the Sephardic Jews of Spain before 1840, the German Jews during most of the 19th century, and the Russian Jews after 1880. Emphasis is placed upon the development of Jewish religious, charitable, and educational institutions in the United States, and upon outstanding individuals from Judah Touro of Newport (1775-1854) to Governor Herbert H. Lehman. Bertram Wallace Korn's Eventful Years and Experiences (Cincinnati, American Jewish Archives, 1954. 249 p.) is an interesting collec- tion of eight studies in American Jewish history mostly during the central decades of the 19th cen- tury. One is on the Jewish refugees of 1848, another is a panorama of "American Jewish Life in 1849," and a third tells the story of Maimonides College of Philadelphia, the first Jewish theological seminary in America (1867-73). A summary of local Jewish history and a guide to and description of places of Jewish interest in each state, the District of Colum- bia, and New York City and its environs is contained in A Jewish Tourist's Guide to the U. S., by Bernard Postal and Lionel Koppman (Philadelphia, Jewish Publication Society of America, 1954. xxx, 705 p.). 431240 — 60- -38 570 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 4462. McWilliams, Carey. A mask for privilege: anti-Semitism in America. Boston, Little, Brown, 1948. 299 p. 48-6011 E184.J5M16 In the summer of 1877 Joseph Seligman, a New York banker, was refused accommodation at a Sara- toga Springs hotel — "one of the first major overt manifestations of anti-Semitism in the United States," which the author regards as proceeding from the triumph of a new generation of industrial tycoons and "the corrosion which the industrial revolution had brought about in the American scheme of values." Anti-Semitism in America dif- fers from its European counterpart in that limitations have been imposed, not by the state, but "by our 'private governments' — industry and trade, banks and insurance companies, real estate boards and neighborhood associations, clubs and societies, col- leges and universities." The book exhibits many personal views, elliptical arguments, and contro- versial acerbities, but it brings together a wide range of information on anti-Semitic utterances, "The System of Exclusion," the activities of "crackpot" agitators and associations, and recent anti-Semitic incidents. In Chapter 10, "No Ordinary Task," the author outlines a program of education, legislation, and other social action to eradicate this "most treacherous, deceptive, and tenacious of social preju- dices," the appearance of which is invariably "a symptom of social sickness, a manifestation of social disorganization." G. Orientals 4463. Cheng, Te-ch'ao. Acculturation of the Chinese in the United States; a Philadelphia study, by David Te-chao Cheng. Philadelphia, 1948. 280 p. tables. A50-1331 E184.C5C47 "Printed in China." Bibliography: p. [26i]-274. A University of Pennsylvania dissertation which studies the Race Street Chinatown of Philadelphia. The author is a Cantonese-speaking Chinese who worked there as a Christian missionary during 1940-44, and in 1942 undertook a study of its eco- nomic occupations, which was subsequently ex- panded to include its institutions as a whole, with emphasis upon culture contact and change. Nearly all its residents come from an area of 100 square miles along the southern coast of the province of Kwantung, and Part I describes the people of this part of China, their community life, and their philsophical oudook. Part II sketches the history of the Race Street Community, which dates from about 1870, and analyzes the occupations, the social organizations and customs, the education, and the family, religious, and recreational life of its mem- bers. In Part III the author draws up "A Balance Sheet of Acculturation" which indicates that, despite the ghetto-like segregation that has been the rule since 1894, the culture traits which the Phila- delphia Chinese "have adopted from the American culture are definitely more than the culture traits which they have transplanted from the Old World and retained." Dr. Cheng's research terminated in X944 and his preface is dated June 1946; his book reflects the wartime opening of "the door of racial and occupational discrimination," which he expected to be permanent. 4464. Coolidge, Mary (Roberts) Smith. Chinese immigration, by Mary Roberts Coolidge. New York, Holt, 1909. 531 p. tables. (Ameri- can public problems, edited by Ralph Curtis Ring- wait) 9-23245 JV6874.C7 "Selected bibliography": p. 505-517. This is an old book, but the Chinese immigration with which it deals had come to an end 27 years be- fore its publication, and it remains the only com- prehensive treatment of the subject. From the Gold Rush of 1849 until the opening of the transconti- nental railways 20 years later manual labor was in heavy demand in California, and from 1852 Chinese coolies were imported in numbers, averaging 16,000 a year for three decades. With the opening of the railroads, however, a flow of white workers came from the East to glut the labor market and to begin an exclusionist agitation which extended to oc- casional riot and massacre. Mrs. Coolidge described this movement in some detail and emphasized that the exclusionist enactments of 1882-92 were clear violations of the Treaty of 1880 with China. China's resentment of American discrimination was shown by her failure to renew the Treaty of 1894 and by a boycott of American goods. The book reviews the Chinese background of the immigrants, and their ways of life in America, and contends that they were more industrious, better behaved, and no less assimilable than many groups of European immigrants. 4465. Ichihashi, Yamato. Japanese in the United States; a critical study of the problems of the Japanese immigrants and their children. Stanford University, Calif., Stanford University Press, 1932. 426 p. 32-22696 E184.J314 POPULATION, IMMIGRATION, AND MINORITIES / 57 1 "Select bibliography": p. 409-417. The author was professor of Japanese history and government at Stanford, and his book remains, after 25 years, the most comprehensive account of Jap- anese immigration to the United Staffs. It is prefaced by an analysis of Japanese immigration in general, which was a drop in the bucket in com- parison with Japan's rapid population increase, and of Japanese immigration to Hawaii, where nearly as many went as to the continental United States. Japanese immigration to the United States was neg- ligible before 1890 and after 1908 was greatly re- duced by the Gendemen's Agreement. In the peak year, 1907, 9,948 Japanese entered, and the total Japanese population rose to 138,800 by 1930. The author describes the character, causes, and geo- graphical distribution of the immigration; the em- ployment of the Japanese in domestic service, city trades, and especially in agriculture; the movement toward and measures of exclusion; and the char- acteristics and problems of the American-born Jap- anese. They are taller, longer of limb, and heavier than Japanese children born and bred in Japan, and they are as intelligent and "as emotional as the av- erage American." Their difficulties under discrim- ination, especially in the realm of employment, are objectively and effectively discussed. 4466. La Violette, Forrest E. Americans of Japa- nese ancestry; a study of assimilation in the American community. Toronto, Canadian Insti- tute of International Affairs, 1946. 185 p. A46-5078 E184.J3L3 1946 "Unpublished material" [theses and disserta- tions]: p. 181-182. A University of Chicago dissertation based upon research in the Seattle, Portland, San Francisco, and Los Angeles areas begun in 1934, and continued at intervals until the evacuation of 1942. It empha- sizes "the social context of the term nisei [the American-born second generation, exclusive of the hjbei, sent back at an early age for education in Japan] as it has developed between the cessation of immigration in 1924 and Pearl Harbor in 1941, with the chief emphasis placed upon Japanese family and community life." It is through the family that the Nisei receive three sets of attitudes which link them most strongly to the ancestral culture: "sub- mission and recognition of authority and prestige of the parents, acceptance of family responsibilities and maintenance of inviolate integrity of family status within the community," but the level of con- formance is lower than is expected in Japan. The vocational problems of the Nisei, to whom only a limited variety of occupations and restricted oppor- | tunities within them have been available, and their 1 marriage problems, such as too costly wedding re- ceptions, are described. The author stresses die applicability of his studies to Canadian conditions, pointing out that Canada and the United States are the only two nations in the world concerned with assimilating so divergent a group, and that it is surprising "that the first generation of American- born children of Japanese parents have already pro- gressed so far in this movement requiring a number of generations." 4467. Leong, Gor Yun. Chinatown inside out, by Leong Gor Yun. New York, B. Mussey, 1936. 256 p. 36-22486 E184.C5L56 An inside view, journalistic in style but based on wide personal knowledge, of New York's China- town, taken as typical of these segregated communi- ties in a number of the larger American cities. Since the exclusion of Chinese immigration in the 1880's, these picturesque districts have remained static or dwindled, but their position as "the most exclusive of all the alien colonies in America" has altered little. The conditions described by Mr. Leong, however, are those of two decades ago, when he found that the ordinary residents of Chinatown, and especially the foreign-born, were exploited by the local "charitable and benevolent" association, a government within a government, and by the Tongs, some of which had turned into rackets. On the other hand, the average Chinese American received some assistance from his family associadon and from organizations for self-help, such as the Chinese Hand Laundry Association. Chinatown was a man's world, with a ratio of ten males to one female, and the most popular diversions, in order of favor, were gambling, resort to prostitutes, opium-smoking, and drinking. The author predicted the extinction of the old Chinatowns within a generation or two, but the process is as yet by no means complete. The volume is illustrated by excellent photographs, mostly taken for the purpose. 4468. Mears, Eliot Grinnell. Resident Orientals on the American Pacific coast; their legal and economic status. Chicago, University of Chi- cago Press, 1928. xvi, 545 p. tables, diagrs. 30-2364 E184.O6M33 "Select documents": p. [43i]~526. For practically as long as it has been occupied by the United States, "the Far West has sternly fought the coming of Oriental peoples to the American mainland." The present volume is concerned with the result as seen in the contrasting status of citizens, aliens eligible to citizenship, and aliens ineligible to citizenship in California, Oregon, and Washing- ton. The author calls his study "one of laws, regula- tions, and judicial decisions and their actual opera- 572 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES tion," but in fact there is quite as much about the state of mind which produced the laws, and the actual economic and social condition of the Pacific coast Chinese and Japanese, as about the purely legal aspects. There is a discussion of the degree to which their nationals here have been protected by our treaties with Japan and China, and by the guaranties of the United States Constitution and its amend- ments. No specific Act of Congress denied citizen- ship to Orientals, but the Federal courts have more or less consistently interpreted the naturalization laws, originating in 1790, to that effect. The Pacific States have passed laws forbidding intermarriage, alien ownership of land, the public employment of Orientals, and even hunting and fishing by them. The author believed that in 1928 the West Coast was displaying a more friendly attitude toward both races than it had in the recent past. 4469. Thomas, Dorothy Swaine, and Richard S. Nishimoto. Japanese American evacuation and resettlement. Berkeley, University of Cali- fornia Press, 1946-52. 2 v. A47-1448 D753.8.T4 Contents. — v. 1. The spoilage, by D. S. Thomas and R. S. Nishimoto. — v. 2. The salvage, by D. S. Thomas with the assistance of C. Kikuchi and J. Sakoda. The most spectacular displacement of population in the whole of American history was the removal of nearly 110,000 persons of Japanese birth or ancestry from the Pacific coast early in 1942, and the internment of nearly all of them in ten "reloca- tion centers," two of which were as far east as Arkansas. A group of social scientists at the Uni- versity of California at once perceived the possi- bilities of such an upheaval for an intensive study of social processes, and with the financial backing of the University and three foundations were able to keep on foot, if not on so elaborate a scale as they had originally planned, an Evacuation and Resettle- ment Study from February 1942 through December 1945, "by which time the program of resettlement was about completed." The majority of the staff observers were recruited from among the evacuees, and their major task was "to record and analyze the changes in behavior and attitudes and the pat- terns of social adjustments and interaction" among the interned. The three major "laboratories" of the Study were the Poston center in Arizona, the Minodoka center in Idaho, and especially the Tule Lake center in northern California, but spot obser- vations were made in five of the other seven centers, and from April 1943 the "associational life of the resetding evacuees" was studied from a Chicago office. Tule Lake forms the principal subject of The Spoilage; it soon came to be used for the segre- gation of persons classified as disloyal, in some cases on somewhat technical grounds, and it was here that the bulk of the complaints, strikes, threats, and murder and other violence took place, culminating in the renunciation of American citizenship by 70 percent of the citizens there interned. The Salvage consists of two parts, the first and briefer of which is "Patterns of Social and Demographic Change," wherein the consequences of the great upheaval are surveyed in the perspective of the whole history of the Japanese immigration to the United States. The net effect was "the dispersal beyond the bounds of segregated ethnocentered communities into areas of wider opportunity of the most highly assimi- lated segments of the Japanese American minority." Part II presents the life histories of fifteen persons who were resetded in the East or Middle West, selected for their representative character; Mrs. Thomas expresses her gratitude "for their willing- ness to relive, 'for the record,' the traumatic period following Pearl Harbor." Two other studies of the great evacuation have been published by the Uni- versity of California: Removal and Return; the Socio-economic Effects of the War on Japanese Americans, by Leonard Bloom and Ruth Riemer (1949. 259 p.), and The Managed Casualty; the Japanese- American Family in World War II, by Leonard Broom and John I. Kitsuse ( 1956. 226 p.), The origins of the evacuation policy are tracked down by Morton Grodzins in Americans Betrayed; Politics and the Japanese Evacuation (Chicago, Uni- versity of Chicago Press, 1949. xvii, 444 p.). H. North Americans 4470. Burma, John H. Spanish-speaking groups in the United States. [Durham, N. C] Duke University Press, 1954. 214 p. (Duke Uni- versity Press sociological series [no. 9]) 53-8273 E184.M5B8 Bibliography: p. [i99]-209. The Spanish-speaking is the one foreign-language group in the United States that has continued to in- crease since the Quota Act of 1921 and has now be- come the fourth largest in the country. Based upon a large monographic literature rather than personal investigation, this is the only work to treat the group as a whole and to consider its common cultural and religious core as well as the racial, historical, and POPULATION, IMMIGRATION, AND MINORITIES / 573 social diversity of its component groups. The His- panos, descendants of the Spanish colonists of New Mexico annexed in 1848, persist as inbred communi- ties whose customs and social structures look back to the 16th century. The largest group are the Mexi- can-Americans, more Indian than Spanish in race, who can be found throughout the United States, but in the Southwest constitute a minority subject to varying degrees of discrimination. The Filipinos are Malays in race; as the smallest and most dis- persed group, their minority problems resemble those of the Chinese. The Puerto Ricans as Ameri- can citizens are not subject to the quotas and other restrictions hindering the entry of Filipinos and Mexicans; their problems arise from the facts that about a third are negroid, and nearly all have con- centrated in the slums of New York City. They are the subject of a monograph by Charles Wright Mills, Clarence Senior, and Rose Kohn Goldsen: The Puerto Rican Journey; New York's Newest Immi- grants (New York, Harper, 1950. 238 p.). The Filipino element was studied at a time when it was numerically more important than it is today, under the auspices of the Institute of Pacific Relations, in Bruno Lasker's Filipino Immigration to Continental United States and to Hawaii (Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1931. xxii, 445 p.). 4471. Gamio, Manuel. Mexican immigration to the United States; a study of human migra- tion and adjustment. Chicago, University of Chi- cago Press, 1930. xviii, 262 p. 30-15640 JV6798.M6G3 Bibliography: p. 249-256. 4472. Gamio, Manuel, comp. The Mexican immi- grant, his life-story; autobiographic docu- ments collected by Manuel Gamio. Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1931. 288 p. 31-28581 JV6798.M6G28 Both volumes are the result of an investigation sponsored by the Social Science Research Council, with some assistance from the Mexican Government, during 1926-27. The author and his assistants vis- ited the states of Guanajuato, Jalisco, and Michoa- can in west central Mexico, from which the major- ity of the immigrants come, and the principal Mexi- can groups in the United States, in New York and the Middle West, especially Illinois and Indiana, as well as in California and the Southwest. The author found the official American statistics to be much inflated, since they failed to incorporate any adequate record of the large number of Mexicans who returned home. He viewed the whole trans- action as an economic phenomenon motivated by the continuing misery of the Mexican lower classes, which made American wages and the relatively low cost of manufactured articles in the United States outweigh the hazards of illegal entry and any amount of discrimination — economic and social. The majority of immigrants did not desire citizen- ship, and those who did secure it remained attached "to the local Mexican-American culture such as pre- vails in many communities in the Southwest." However, the author believed that the Mexican revo- lutionary movement had been stimulated by immi- grant contact with the standard of living in the United States. An unusual and revealing chapter presenting "The Songs of the Immigrant" affords a transition to Dr. Gamio's second volume, made up almost exclusively of 76 "guided interviews" and other personal statements by immigrants both male and female. They were translated into Eng- lish by Robert C. Jones, and have evidendy been classified into chapters each provided with a brief introduction by Robert Redfield of the University of Chicago. The headings include: "The Economic Adjustment," "Conflict and Race-consciousness," "The Leader and the Intellectual," "Assimilation," and "The Mexican-American." 4473. Hansen, Marcus Lee. The mingling of the Canadian and American peoples, v. 1. His- torical. Completed and prepared for publication by John Bardet Brebner. New Haven, Yale Uni- versity Press; for the Carnegie Endowment for In- ternational Peace, Division of Economics and His- tory, 1940. xviii, 274 p. maps (1 fold.) (The Relations of Canada and the United States [a series of studies prepared under the direction of the Car- negie Endowment for International Peace, Division of Economics and History]) 40-27389 E183.8.C2H27 4474. Truesdell, Leon E. The Canadian born in the United States; an analysis of the statis- tics of the Canadian element in the population of the United States, 1850 to 1930. New Haven, Yale University Press; for the Carnegie Endowment for International Peace, Division of Economics and History, 1943. xvi, 263 p. maps, tables, diagrs. (The Relations of Canada and the United States [a series of studies prepared under the direction of the Carnegie Endowment for International Peace, Division of Economics and History]) A43-1238 HB3015.C3T7 Because of Professor Hansen's untimely death in 1938, his work had to be completed by Professor Brebner of Columbia University. It is a narrative history of the exchange of populations between the regions which are now the United States and Can- ada, from its colonial beginnings down to 1939. This exchange is interpreted as part of an integrated North American Westward Movement, motivated 574 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES by the individual pioneer's land-hunger, and made possible by unrestricted mobility across the unforti- fied boundary. Significant shifts of population were brought about by the Revolutionary War, when Tories fled to Canada, the Canadian Insurrection of 1837, when Canadians sought political asylum in the United States, constant variations in economic conditions and land distribution, the availability of rich farm land at different times in the prairie states and provinces, the attraction of bounty money for enlistment in the Union Army during the Civil War, and the lure of high pay in the expanding industries of the United States. The companion volume, by a chief statistician of the U. S. Bureau of the Census, is built around 121 tables and 36 graphs. During the 80 years for which figures were available, the Canadian-born in the United States increased from 147,711, or 0.64 percent of the popu- lation, to 1,286,389, or 1.05 percent of the population. In 1930 they were concentrated in New England and New York City, about the Great Lakes, and in the cities of the Pacific coast. Some 77.3 per- cent, in fact, were living in urban areas. Nearly 30 percent were of French mother tongue, this being practically the same proportion as obtained in Can- ada itself. The increase since 1900 has been slower, "and the characteristics of the group as a whole have become those of a relatively static popula- tion." Another volume in the same series, The American-Born in Canada, by Robert H. Coats and Murdoch C. McLean (Toronto, Ryerson Press, 1943. xviii, 176 p.), offers a similar statistical analysis of a group which increased from 63,000, or 2.6 per- cent of the population, in 1851 to 344,574, or 3.3 percent of the population, in 193 1, and was much more evenly distributed over the whole settled area. 4475. McWilliams, Carey. North from Mexico, the Spanish-speaking people of the United States. Philadelphia, Lippincott, 1949. 324 p. (The Peoples of America series) 49-7084 F786.M215 This volume, which effectively synthesizes a mass of historical and sociological material, is primarily a presentation of racial and cultural conflict in the Southwest, inspired by the author's indignation on behalf of the underdog. He attacks what he describes as "The Fantasy Heritage," a sentimental emphasis upon the purely Spanish elements in the beginnings of the borderlands, at the expense of the living Mexican-Indian tradition, which is quite as important to the mixed cultural heritage of the Southwest. This attitude he regards as a part of the long-existing "determination to subordinate the Spanish-speaking minority in the Southwest," one of the means being "to drive a wedge between the native-born and the foreign-born and to cultivate the former at the expense of the latter." The only "Mexican Problem" which Mr. McWilliams recog- nizes is the stubbornness of the dominant Anglo- Saxons "in not recognizing the real character of the culture which prevails in the borderlands." 4476. Taylor, Paul Schuster. An American-Mexi- can frontier, Nueces County, Texas. Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina Press, IQ34. 337 p. illus. 34-39 8 77 F392.N8T3 The author climaxed a series of ten monographs on Mexican Labor in the United States (Berkeley, University of California Press, 1928-34. 3 v.) with this remarkably vivid and penetrating analysis of economic and social conditions in the Texas county which includes the city of Corpus Christi, upon which an army of cotton pickers converges each mid- summer, and which led the counties of the entire United States in cotton production in 1930. He saw it as "the locus of long historical contacts and conflicts of four peoples — Indians, European (or American) whites, Negroes, and Mexicans." Here Spanish settlement began soon after the middle of the 1 8th century, and the first Americans established themselves in 1839. By 1859 all the original grantees had sold out to Americans; but by 1929 there were 29 Mexican laborers who had risen through tenancy to the proprietorship of very small farms, and 879 Mexicans owned town lots, some having achieved middle-class status. The original cattle industry had been completely replaced by short staple cotton culture, with Mexicans providing nearly all the year-round laborers and the majority of the transients. Mexicans and Negroes were once on easy terms, but now the Mexicans, in order to raise their standing, had been impelled "toward ef- forts to present themselves in the eyes of the whites, as a group dissociated from, and superior to, the Negroes." The author has the art of exhibiting large issues in a small setting. I. Germans 4477. Faust, Albert Bernhardt. The German ele- ment in the United States with special refer- ence to its political, moral, social and educational influence. New York, Steuben Society of America, 1927. 2 v. in 1. illus. 27-25840 E184.G3F3 1927 POPULATION, IMMIGRATION, AND MINORITIES / 575 Bibliography: v. 2, p. [4771-562. This work on an encyclopedic scale by Professor Faust of Cornell University won a prize awarded by the Germanic Department of the University of Chicago in 1907 for the best book on the subject, was first published by Houghton Mifflin in 1909, was awarded the Loubat prize by the Prussian Academy of Sciences in 191 1, and was published in a German translation at Leipzig in 1912. The 1927 edition undertaken on the initiative of the Steuben Society is described as a complete revision, although most of the new material is incorporated in an Appendix (v. 2, p. [6o7]-73o). Old-fashioned as the work is in its approach, it remains the most comprehensive treatment and indispensable to any serious student of the subject. Volume 1 contains descriptions of all German setdements in the Thir- teen Colonies, beginning with the founding of Germantown, Pa., in 1683, and goes on to par- ticularize the part taken by Germans in the Revolu- tion, and in the Westward Movement through the setdement of California. Volume 2, after estimat- ing the number of persons of German blood in the United States at 27 1 / 2 percent of the total population, goes on to survey the achievement of individuals of German birth or descent in American agriculture, manufactures, politics, education, music, the fine arts, the theater, literature, and journalism. A con- cluding chapter on social and moral influence offers "the joy of living" and "care of the body" as Ger- manic benefactions, and identifies as Germanic traits law-abiding character, honesty, love of labor, sense of duty, etc. 4478. Hawgood, John A. The tragedy of Ger- man-America; the Germans in the United States of America during the nineteenth century — and after. New York, Putnam, 1940. xviii, 334 p. 40-35196 E184.G3H27 The author, who taught modern history at the University of Birmingham from 193 1, studied in both Germany and the United States, and carried out his research for the present volume on grants from the Rockefeller Foundation in 1928 and 1934. It is primarily a study of the significance of the hyphen in the term "German-American," with its implication of resistance to Americanizing tend- encies, which became so vexed an issue during World War I. After 1815 any concentration of German immigrants tended to retain a pride in their own culture and language, and to oppose "the strong Sabbatarianism and the growing temperance move- ment of the Yankee stock in the Middle-Western States," becoming distinctive "islands in a sea of Americanism." In addition there were concerted efforts by settlement societies or other agencies to plant communities wherein German civilization could remain independent of outside influences, and develop unhampered by the restrictions then ob- taining at home; Part II describes such ventures in Missouri, Illinois, Texas, and Wisconsin. A crystal- lization resulted from the Know-Nothing onslaught of the 1850's, drawing the whole German-speaking body together in self-defense. "Germans in America between 1855 and 19 15 lived not in the United States, but in German America, and lived and wrote for German America." It took World War I, "with its hatreds and its persecutions, its propaganda and its coercion," to bring this era and this mentality to an end. 4479. Wood, Ralph, ed. The Pennsylvania Ger- mans. Princeton, Princeton University Press, 1942. 299 p. 42-36243 F160.G3W66 Contents. — Pennsylvania, the colonial melting pot, by A. D. Graeff. — The Pennsylvania German farmer, by W. M. Kollmorgen. — The sects, aposdes of peace, by G. P. Musselman. — Lutheran and Re- formed, Pennsylvania German style, by Ralph Wood. — The Pennsylvania Germans and the school, by C. S. Stine. — Journalism among the Pennsylvania Germans, by Ralph Wood. — Pennsylvania German literature, by H. H. Reichard. — The Pennsylvania Germans as soldiers, by A. D. Graeff. — The Penn- sylvania Germans as seen by the historian, by R. H. Shryock. — Appendix: The Pennsylvania German dialect, by A. G. Buffington. 4480. Klees, Frederic. The Pennsylvania Dutch. New York, Macmillan, 1950. 451 p. 50-11837 F160.G3K5 Bibliography: p. 445-451. Mr. Wood's collection of ten papers by eight authors, some of whom are and some are not of Pennsylvania German descent, "tries to interpret the Pennsylvania Germans to their fellow Ameri- cans and to themselves." The editor remarks that "he was surprised to find that a common denom- inator developed spontaneously throughout all the chapters, namely, that the Pennsylvania German character was moulded by the fact that the Pennsyl- vania Germans were farmers practically and spirit- ually." Mr. Klees' volume is more detailed and more miscellaneous, but it is written with an evident af- fection for its subject which draws the reader on into the bypaths of Pennsylvania Dutch folkways and art. Mr. Klees, incidentally, regards "Dutch" as the traditionally correct term and enters a protest against the neologism, "Pennsylvania German." "Their strong concentration in a relatively small area enabled this people to stay Dutch," and "in preserving their own culture they succeeded in doing what no other non-English group in colonial Amer- ica was able to do." The basis of their culture, 576 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES however, he finds not in farming but in religion, with the three principal religious groups, "plain people" (Mennonites, Amish, Dunkards), "church people" (Lutherans, Reformed, United Brethren), and Moravians each forming a radically different cultural pattern of its own. Each chapter is headed by a neat pen-and-ink drawing by the author. The Maryland Germans, a History, by Dieter Cunz (Princeton, Princeton University Press, 1948. 476 p.) tells the story of a related group who remained less isolated, but put a strong stamp upon the com- munity in which they settled. 4481. Zucker, Adolf E., ed. The Forty-eighters, political refugees of the German Revolution of 1848. New York, Columbia University Press, 1950. xviii, 379 p. illus. 50-7743 E184.G3Z8 1950 Contents. — The European background, by C. }. Friedrich. — The American scene, by O. Handlin. — Adjustment to the United States, by H. B. John- son. — The Turner, by A. }. Prahl. — The Forty- eighters in politics, by L. S. Thompson and F. X. Braun. — The radicals, by E. W. Dobert. — The Forty- eighters in the Civil War, by E. Lonn. — Carl Schurz, by B. Q. Morgan. — Biographical dictionary of the Forty-eighters, by A. E. Zucker. A volume planned in commemoration of the cen- tenary of the Revolution, by "a number of us who had been working in this field," at the Philadelphia headquarters of the Carl Schurz Memorial Founda- tion in February 1948. A "Forty -eighter" is de- fined as "one who came to the United States from German-speaking territory as a result of his par- ticipation in the Revolution of 1848"; his actual ar- rival in the United States, of course, might be delayed until the latter 1850's. Their number can- not be precisely determined, since the great majority of German immigrants were coming for economic reasons, but was small — Dr. Zucker regards 4,000 as a conservative estimate. However, their influence was vastly greater than their numbers, and few im- migrant groups have had so large a proportion of persons of distinction. Dr. Zucker's "Biographical Dictionary" of over 300 names is a compilation of permanent value. The average reader will find these interpretive essays more serviceable than the detailed volume on the same subject from a single pen: Carl F. Wittke's Refugees of Revolution (Philadelphia, University of Pennsylvania Press, 1952. 384 p.). It is, however, a work of great learning, and has chapters with little or no counter- part in the symposium, such as "Non-German Forty- eighters," "The Politics of the Post-War Years," "The German Social Pattern," and "Learning and Letters." Dean Wittke has also written substantial biographies of two of the most remarkable per- sonalities among the Forty-eighters: Against the Current; the Life of Karl Heinzen (1809-80) (Chi- cago, University of Chicago Press, 1945. 342 p.) and The Utopian Communist; a Biography of Wil- helm Weitling, Nineteenth-Century Reformer (Baton Rouge, Louisiana State University Press, 1950. 327 p.). }. Scandinavians 4482. Babcock, Kendric Charles. The Scandi- navian element in the United States. Ur- bana, University of Illinois, 1914- 223 p. (University of Illinois studies in the social sciences, v. 3, no. 3) 15-8448 H31.I4, v. 3, no. 3 E184.S2B12 University of Illinois Bulletin, v. 12, no. 7. "Critical essay on materials and authorities": p. 183-204. A work, obviously outmoded in some respects, which retains value as one of the very few treatments of immigration from the three Scandinavian nations as a whole. In 1910-12, after a century of steady growth, the population of Sweden was only 5,600,000, of Norway 2,390,000, and of Denmark 2,775,000. The passage, therefore, of 2,200,000 Scandinavians to the United States between 1820 and 1912 was an extraordinary mass exodus. In none of the three were there the oppressive political, military, or social conditions to be found on the continent; the migration therefore was essentially an exchange of scanty economic resources and oppor- tunities for the richer ones offered by the fertile prairies of the Mississippi Valley. Some informa- tion is offered concerning the Danish immigration, which totaled 278,277 between 1820 and 1913, or only about two-fifths of the Norwegian figure dur- ing the same period. "The Danish element in America has always lacked unity and solidity," a fact which the author attributes to the weak influence of the schism-ridden Danish Lutheran Church. Dur- ing the same years 696,401 Norwegians entered the United States, as against 1,071,835 from more popu- lous Sweden. POPULATION, IMMIGRATION, AND MINORITIES / 577 4483. Benson, Adolph B., and Naboth Hedin. Americans from Sweden. Foreword by Carl Sandburg. Philadelphia, Lippincott, 1950. 448 p. (The Peoples of America series) 50-5150 E184.S23B328 Bibliography: p. [427J- 4 3 4 . This work is in large part based on, or continues, the symposium which the authors edited, as well as contributed to, on the occasion of the New Sweden Tercentenary: Swedes in America, 1638-1938 (New Haven, Yale University Press, 1938. xvi, 614 p.). Part I, "Historical Background," is a somewhat con- ventional chronological sketch of Swedish groups, individuals, and movements in the United States. Part II, "Religious Life," considers the Swedish par- ticipation in five other churches as well as the Luth- eran, including the Methodists and the Mission Friends, the pietistic wing of the Swedish state church. Part III, "Denominational Education" briefly reviews the history of seven institutions of Swedish origin, the largest of which is Augustana College, established at Rock Island, Illinois, in 1875 after a somewhat migratory existence since 1858. Part IV, "American Activities," calls the roll of a multitude of Swedish Americans of distinction in a variety of fields, such as architects and builders, health specialists, musicians and actors, aviators and airplane builders, and businessmen. Small pride seems to be taken in their major activity in America: agriculture. 4484. Blegen, Theodore C. Norwegian migration to America. Northfield, Minn., Norwegian- American Historical Association, 1931-40. 2 v. illus. (facsims.) maps, diagrs. 31-20308 E184.S2B6 4485. Blegen, Theodore C, ed. Land of their choice; the immigrants write home. [Min- neapolis] University of Minnesota Press, 1955. 463 p. 55—9368 E184.S2B55 The two-volume work originated in the author's doctoral dissertation at the University of Minnesota, but was greatly amplified through a large collection of documentary material which he made as a Gug- genheim Fellow in Norway during 1928-29. The whole is a vividly concrete social history of Nor- wegian immigration during the central decades of the 19th century. The first volume bears the limit- ing dates 1825-60; it "traces the genesis and early expansion of Norwegian immigration, explores the European backgrounds, and interprets the move- ment in a setting of international history." It describes two types of literature which had not previously received due emphasis: the "America books" and the "America letters." The first were handbooks of information for Norwegians on con- ditions in America; one of the earliest and most in- fluential examples, which broadened the geographi- cal scope of the movement in Norway, was Ole Rynning's True Account of America for the In- formation and Help of Peasant and Commoner, published at Christiana in 1838. "America letters" were written by immigrants to their relatives and friends at home, in increasing numbers from the mid-1830's, and were often published in the local press; "one gets the impression of a vast advertising movement." Land of Their Choice is an anthology of such letters in translations made by either Dean Blegen or his research assistant, Borge Madsen; many first appeared in the publications of the Nor- wegian-American Historical Association. Here they are arranged in groups of two kinds: letters from various individuals illustrating a particular topic, or series of letters from a single individual. The second volume of the larger work bears the subtitle The American Transition; it aims to present the dynamic process whereby the immigrant was merged into the life of the New World. The topical chapters into which it is organized pursue their subjects to various points in the later 19th century, but the bulk of the evidence presented falls before i860. After years of study the author continued to think that Ole E. R0lvaag (no. 1720-1723), in his masterpiece Giants in the Earth and his other novels, recorded and interpreted the American transition "with deeper insight and greater effectiveness than any other writer." 4486. Nelson, Helge. The Swedes and the Swed- ish settlements in North America. Lund, C. W. K. Gleerup; New York, A. Bonnier; 1943. 2 v. (Skrifter utg. av Kungl. humanistiska vetens- kapssamfundet i Lund, 37) 45-7045 E184.S23N35 Translated by Professor Nils Hammarstrand. Bibliography: v. 1, p. [4io]-4i8. Contents. — 1. Text. — 2. Adas (73 maps). The author of this unique work "took part in the great emigration investigation in Sweden during the first decade of the present century," and after be- coming professor of geography at the University of Lund undertook a large-scale study of Swedish colonization in Canada and the United States from the geographical point of view. Receiving subsidies from the Swedish Government, the Swedish-Amer- ican Foundation, and various Swedish learned bodies, he traveled widely in Canada and the United States in 1921, 1925, 1926, and 1933. The principal subject of his book is the changing geographical dis- tribution of the Swedish stock in the United States, and from 1890, the first Census which broke down the numbers of the foreign-born by counties, he has been able to present a series of statistical maps for 578 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES the states with the greatest Swedish concentration, and especially for Minnesota (19 maps). Other major concerns are the causes and conditions of settlement in particular areas and the economic oc- cupations of the setders. Of the 24 chapters, 13 are devoted to a geographical survey, region by re- gion, of the actual settlements, with numerous maps and photographs, many of them taken by the author on his tours. He does not neglect the large urban concentrations of Swedes in Worcester, Mass., New York City, Chicago, Minneapolis, and St. Paul, which are demographically treated. However, the Swedes have been less attracted by the cities than many other racial groups, and "the Swedish stock of the first and second generations alone no doubt owns more improved land in the United States than all the cultivated area of the Swedes at home." 4487. Qualey, Carlton C. Norwegian settlement in the United States. Northfield, Minn., Norwegian-American Historical Association, 1938. 285 p. illus., tables, diagr. (Publications of the Norwegian-American Historical Association) 38-6266 E184.S2Q8 Issued also as thesis (Ph. D.) Columbia University. Bibliography: p. [253J-272. A solidly documented narrative history of the dispersion and settlement of Norwegian immigrants in the Middle West from 1834 to about 1885, with some mention of settlement elsewhere and of earlier and later date. Separate chapters are devoted to Illinois, where the Fox River Settlement of 1835 constituted the first Norwegian community beyond the Appalachians; to Wisconsin, where Jefferson Prairie just across the Illinois line was setded in 1839; to Iowa, reached by Norwegians in the same year; to "the glorious new Scandinavia" which sprang up in Minnesota in the mid-^o's; to the Dakotas; and to Michigan. The three peaks of Norwegian immigration occurred in 1866-73, 1880- 93 — with 1882, when over 28,000 entered, as the peak year of all — and in 1900-19 11. Chapter IX considers "Islands" of Norwegian settlement in other parts of the United States. Dot maps show the concentration of Norwegians in the United States in 1930, and in individual states at earlier dates from 1870 to 1900. K. Other Stocks 4488. Berthoff, Rowland Tappan. British immi- grants in industrial America, 1790-1950. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1953. 296 p. maps, diagrs. 53-6028 E184.B7B4 Bibliography: p. [2I3J-275. Down to the 1850's immigration from Great Britain (as distinct from Ireland) to the United States was comparatively small, but from that decade through the 1920's a fluctuating but usually consid- erable stream crossed the Atlantic, reaching a peak of over 800,000 during the 1880's. Until the work of Mr. Berthoff, who is himself a Welshman, less was available to the ordinary reader on this than on any other major current of immigration, and his book illuminates a very important sector of our eth- nic history. Making use of trade journals, labor union publications, state documents, and other primary sources, he has been able to display this in- flux as in great part one of skilled laborers, bringing with them experience and techniques which secured them prompt employment at high wages in the great American industrial expansion which began before the Civil War but was much accelerated after its close. These English, Scotch, and Welsh craftsmen played an important part in the development of the American textile, mining, and iron and steel indus- tries, and one only quantitatively less important in our pottery, papermaking, quarrying, building, and maritime trades. In fact, "nearly the whole English silk industry migrated to America after the Civil War." These craftsmen also took their share in the organization of labor, and their relatively conserva- tive outlook was reflected in the American Federa- tion of Labor, a league of craft unions of skilled artisans. The immigrants themselves valued their national heritages and developed their own organiza- tions, periodicals, sports, and amusements, but the second generation, with no linguistic or other serious obstacle to assimilation, speedily became indistin- guishable from other Americans, and "the British- American community dwindled after the first World War." Wilbur S. Shepperson's British Emigration to North America: Projects and Opinions in the Early Victorian Period (Oxford, Blackwell, 1957. xvi, 302 p.) is based upon solid research in both British and American sources, but is limited to the period 1837-60, and is primarily concerned with organized efforts to promote emigration, and the discussions which they provoked at home. 4489. Ford, Henry Jones. The Scotch-Irish in America. New York, P. Smith, 1941. 607 p. 42-36197 E184.S4F9 1941 POPULATION, IMMIGRATION, AND MINORITIES / 579 4490. Dunaway, Wayland F. The Scotch-Irish of colonial Pennsylvania. Chapel Hill, Uni- versity of North Carolina Press, 1944. 273 p. 44-9454 F160.S4D8 Bibliography: p. 233-257. Professor Ford's volume, originally published in 191 5 by the Princeton University Press, was uncom- monly successful in putting into perspective the ex- traordinary story of the Scotch-Irish, and in under- lining their importance as a formative element in the development of the Thirteen Colonies. His starting-point is the Ulster Plantation of 1609, un- dertaken as a means of keeping Catholic Ireland in subjection, but largely filled up by an unanticipated migration, not of Englishmen, but of lowland Scots. In the 1 8th century Presbyterian Ireland shared the economic disabilities imposed by the London Par- liament upon Catholic Ireland, and in bad times Ulstermen sailed for America in large numbers. The first wave of 1717-18 came to New England, where Presbyterians and Congregationalists often failed to see eye to eye; subsequent waves, from 1727 to 1773, went rather to Pennsylvania. Profes- sor Dunaway is concerned with them there, but his book too has more than a merely provincial sig- nificance, for he considers the dispersion which took place from about 1735, when the Scotch-Irish advance reached the mountain barrier, and was de- flected southwestward into the valleys of Maryland and Virginia, and the piedmont region of the Caro- linas. Ford stresses the importance of the Scotch- Irish for American Presbyterianism and for Ameri- can educational institutions, both preparatory to the ministry and providing popular education. Dunaway adds substantial accounts of their eco- nomic activities and their social life and customs, and has a chapter on their position in the politics, law, and government of provincial Pennsylvania. Ford has a fuller treatment of the very important contribution of this stock, alienated from the Crown by British policy toward Ireland, to the revolution- ary movement. 4491. Graham, Ian Charles Cargill. Colonists from Scotland: emigration to North Amer- ica, 1707-1783. Ithaca, N. Y., Published for the American Historical Association [by] Cornell Uni- versity Press, 1956. 213 p. 56-58450 E184.S3G7 Bibliography: p. 191-206. The importance of the migration of Ulster Scots to the Thirteen Colonies has long been understood; this volume provides for the first time a documented study of the migration from Scotland itself. This movement was only made possible by the union of the Scottish and English Parliaments in 1707, and remained small and sporadic until 1768, when there suddenly began a much larger stream which went steadily on until halted by the Revolutionary War. In 12 years, the author estimates, about 25,000 per- sons left Scotland, "a far greater loss of people than the country had ever known before." The greater number came from the Highlands, where to the chronic poverty of the peasantry was now added the outright evictions made by improving landlords, but economic depression and unemployment brought a substantial group from the Lowlands. The greatest concentration, about 5,000, settled in North Carolina. Unlike the Ulstermen, the Scots of Scotland remained loyal to the Crown with a unanimity and stubbornness exasperating to the Patriots, and not a few of the immigrants of 1768-75 in the next decade removed to Canada, thencefor- ward the focus of Scots emigration. Chapter VI considers the Scottish-born merchants who resided in the coastal cities of the Colonies throughout the 1 8th century, and were of particular importance in the tobacco trade of the Chesapeake region. 4492. Halich, Wasyl. Ukrainians in the United States. Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1937. 174 p. 37-28719 E184.U5H3 Bibliography: p. 163-168. The Ukraine, the black-soil steppes north of the Black Sea drained by the Dniester and the Dnieper, is inhabited by millions of people who speak a separate Slavic language, and have in recent times aspired to a separate national status, although they have never enjoyed actual independence save for a brief period during 1919-20. American immi- gration statistics did not distinguish them from other Russian nationals until 1899, but from that year through 1914, when their numbers entering had reached a peak, about 250,000 came to the United States. By far the largest number went to Penn- sylvania, where the majority became coal miners, and other large groups settled in New Jersey, Ohio, and Illinois. The present volume is strongly colored by Ukrainian nationalism (there is, it seems, a "pro-Russian faction"), but gives a clear account of the Ukrainian participation in American industry, agriculture, business, and the professions, and de- scribes Ukrainian ethnic organizations, the Ukrain- ian Catholic (Uniate) Church, the Ukrainian press, and a variety of social activities in various parts of the United States. "Their social and economic im- provement, although a slow, hard climb, has been a steady one." 4493. Lucas, Henry S. Netherlander in America; Dutch immigration to the United States and Canada, 1789-1950. Ann Arbor, University of Michigan Press, 1955. xix, 744 p. (University of Michigan publications. History and political sci- ence, v. 21) 55-8647 E184.D9L8 580 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Between 1820 and 1949 265,539 Netherlander came to the United States and 70,000 to Canada. Mr. Lucas' purpose is to tell their story from their own point of view, since his lifelong interest in Dutch immigration has led him to accumulate pri- mary source material in the form of interviews with surviving pioneers, as well as other personal memorabilia relating to the Dutch setdements and their internal life and structure. The emphasis of the study is upon Dutch setdements in the Middle West and particularly in Michigan, where the author grew up. It was, in fact, the centenary in 1947 °^ the founding of Holland, Michigan, by the Seceders from the established Reformed Church of the Neth- erlands which embarked Professor Lucas, a grand- son of one of the setders of 1847, upon this volume. "Religion determined the pattern of Dutch settle- ment in America," and the Dutch communities re- mained self-contained cultural and ethnic islands until the 20th century, when Dutch immigration fell off sharply and the expansion of American cultural and economic activity began to impinge upon all isolated groups, with World War I, as usual, constituting a turning point. This definitive vol- ume provides information on every Dutch settle- ment in the country and, when possible, the reasons for its success or failure. Topical chapters deal with religion, education, and the press and politics of the Dutch communities. 4494. Pellegrini, Angelo M. Americans by choice. New York, Macmillan, 1956. 240 p. 56-1241 E184.I8P39 Dr. Pellegrini, whose Immigrant's Return (New York, Macmillan, 1951. 269 p.) presented his own life story as well as his impressions of an Italian jour- ney, here sketches the lives of six representative West Coast Italian-Americans of an older generation. La Bimbina, a peasant mother, who found life in Amer- ica no less toilsome, but rewarding instead of merely futile, and died at 70 "at the end of the day's labor," is the author's own mother, recalled in respect, grati- tude, and affection. The sketch of a "dean of winegrowers" in the Napa Valley conveys a variety of information on the conditions of viniculture on California soil. Other sketches concern the rise and fall of a big-town bootlegger; the mother of a family of winegrowers who had kept a first-class boarding house in her younger days and excelled in her Italian cuisine; an itinerant swindler from the petty bour- geoisie who had "done a little of everything — except work"; and a contracting ditchdigger — "at sixty- nine years of age he was still in the ditch eight hours a day," but he had established his sons when he dropped dead digging to clear his own vineyard. The mingled candor, strength, and tenderness which the author has put into this gallery of sketches pro- mote his purpose of mutual understanding. 4495. Thomas, William I., and Florian Znaniecki. The Polish peasant in Europe and America. [2d ed.] New York, Knopf, 1927. 2 v. (2250 p.) 27-25039 DK411.T5 1927 This famous work was first published during 1918-20 in five smaller volumes; this second edition has the same text, with a few errors corrected, but is rearranged and provided with a brief index. It owes its unique reputation and influence to its in- clusion, on an unprecedented scale, of social docu- mentary materials, usually translated from Polish into English. In volume 1 are no fewer than 50 series of peasant letters, each series provided with an introduction in which the circumstances of the correspondents are described and the persons men- tioned are identified. The series have been placed in three main groups, identified as between mem- bers of family-groups, between husbands and wives, or as exhibiting personal relations outside of mar- riage and the family. Volume 2 concludes with the largest single document in the work, the autobiog- raphy of Wladek Wiszniewski (p. 1915-2226), who progressed from Lubotyn in the Province of Kalisz to the Chicago stockyards, but did not much like them. Many chapters in the rest of the work con- sist in whole or part of translated documentary material. Serious readers have always received a powerful impression from this exceptional mirror into the minds of an immigrant group. The authors begin with a sketch of Polish social organization; in volume 2 they analyze social "Disorganization and Reorganization in Poland," and pass on to "Organization and Disorganization in America" (p. 1467-1827). This contains their epoch-making description of the Polish-American community and its "super-territorial" organization. It also contains a large section on the "Disorganization of the Immi- grant," in which the "decay of the personal life- organization of an individal member of a social group" is regarded as eventuating in the break of the conjugal relation, murder, the vagabondage and delinquency of boys, or the sexual immorality of girls, with abundant documentary evidence on each head. It must be remarked that at times the gap between the flesh and blood of the documents and the abstract theorizing of the professors is glaringly wide. 4496. Williams, Phyllis H. South Italian folkways in Europe and America; a handbook for social workers, visiting nurses, school teachers, and physicians. New Haven, Published for the Insti- tute of Human Relations by Yale University Press, 1938. xviii, 216 p. 38-16630 E184.I8W6 POPULATION, IMMIGRATION, AND MINORITIES / 58 1 4497. Federal Writers' Project. New Yor\ (City). The Italians of New York; a survey prepared by workers of the Federal Writers' Project, Works Progress Administration in the City of New York. Sponsored by the Guilds' Committee for Federal Writers' Publications. New York, Random House, 1938. xx, 241 p. (The American guide series) 38-27087 F128.9.I8F4 Bibliography: p. 227-230. In the absence of any solid and large-scale treat- ment of the great Italian immigration to the United States — some 4,650,000 persons in the century after 1820 — these two titles will do duty as concrete views of limited but representative aspects of the field. Miss Williams' book is based on her "contact for eleven years with over five hundred Italian and Italian-American families" resident in the metro- politan area of New Haven, Conn. Most of them came from Sicily or the five southernmost provinces of the Italian peninsula, and were peasants and fish- ing folk at home. She goes into most of the spheres of everyday life, such as housing, diet and household economy, recreation and hospitality, religion and superstition, and death and mortuary practices, and in each describes first the folkways that obtained in Italy, and next the modified ones that she has found in America. Her oudook is consistently that of a social worker, but of a well-informed and shrewd one, and she warns that superstitions and other "deep-seated customs, if swept aside at all, are dissipated gradually." The Italians of New Yor\ [City] is a slighter compilation, but it is well illus- trated with photographs taken for the Writers' Proj- ect group who produced it, and it passes in review the public aspects of one of the largest Italian- American communities. "Their Share in Building and Developing New York" describes the varieties of economic occupations which maintain them, and there are chapters on religious life, civic and social life, intellectual and cultural life, the professions, creative work in art and literature, and specifically Italian amusements and entertainments. 4498. Wittke, Carl F. The Irish in America. Baton Rouge, Louisiana State University Press, 1956. 319 p. 56-6199 E189.I6W5 Bibliography: p. 295-306. This work on the southern or Catholic Irish as distinct from the Ulstermen or Protestant Scotch- Irish is not offered as a definitive study, but aims to fill a gap in the literature of immigration history by applying proper standards of historical objectivity to "the major aspects of Irish immigration to the United States and with the repercussions from America upon Ireland in the long struggle for Irish independence from England." Some attention is given to the political exiles of 1798, but in the main the book takes its departure from the increased migration of the 1820's. Chapters are devoted to the Irish as canal-building and railroad-building laborers, as firemen and policemen, and as farmers. Their special relationship to the Catholic Church and to urban and national politics is described. "The Fenian Fiasco," Anglophobia, and Irish Na- tionalism culminating in the State of Eire are among the international aspects of the subject. "There are American Irish who have never escaped from the slums. . . . The majority, however, have attained middle-class respectability." XV Society «€ t A. Some General Views 4499-4513 B. Social History: Periods 4514-4522 C. Social History: Topics 4523-4534 D. Social Thought 4535—4545 E. General Sociology; Social Psychology 4546-4558 F. The Family 4559—4573 G. Communities: General 4574-4578 H. Communities: Rural 4579-4585 I. Communities: Urban 4586-4599 J. City Planning; Housing 4600-4613 K. Social Problems; Social Wor\ 4614-4627 L. Dependency; Social Security 4628-4638 M. Delinquency and Correction 4639-4660 THIS chapter lists works which deal with American society, and necessarily exhibits all the difficulties which go with that concept: it is in part an abstraction and in part a residue — what is left when political and economic phenomena have been removed. The titles below include much that is professional or academic sociology, and much that is not. The "General Views" of Section A are in part some famous perspectives of the past, and in part some more recent volumes which seemed not out of place standing beside them. The two social history sections may seem quite inadequate to represent a subject which has received so much recent emphasis, but here, as in Chapter XI, many of the titles which a social historian would unhesitatingly claim as his own are, for our purpose, subject to a more precise classification and appear elsewhere. There is of course nothing absolute about the divi- sion into "Periods" and "Topics"; it is merely a con- venient way of indicating that in the tides of the first group there is a wider coverage of social phenomena over a relatively limited period, and in those of the second a more limited coverage over a relatively longer period. Again our social histories cannot be sharply divided from a number of works in general history (Chapter VIII) and intellectual history (Chapter XI). Some users would perhaps prefer a single chronological arrangement for all of them, and for political and economic history as well; but in this alternative, periods would be found to overlap 582 as much as do categories, and the works on con- temporary situations in each realm would lack spe- cific background. The majority of works in Section D deal with academic sociology, and the remainder of the chap- ter, for the most part, consists of the writings of pro- fessional sociologists or social workers. In the main our arrangement follows the Library of Congress classification (HM-HV), but our Section J com- pletes the treatment of urban phenomena with works on city planning which the Library classifies under Fine Arts (NA) and on housing which it classifies under Economics (HD), as it does the works on social security in Section L. Concerning the technical literature written almost exclusively by the faculties of the departments of sociology in American universities, several points should be made in elucidation of our selections. The SOCIETY / 583 most frequent objective of this literature, it is fair to say, is to arrive at universal rules of social behavior. The bulk of this literature is great, but the greater part of it is concerned with man as man and not with man in the United States of America. Some books ostensibly universal in subject matter turn out on examination to be in fact wholly concerned with American examples, and such have been unhesitat- ingly selected if they meet our requirements in other respects. A large proportion of sociological literature con- sists of textbooks written for college courses which, like all such textbooks, are more remarkable for their similarities than for their differences. We can, of couse, give only an example or two of each type, and our selection never implies that any text has an absolute superiority over its numerous competitors. A recent tendency in academic sociology has been the identification of scientific method with measure- ment, the devising of means for measuring such things as attitudes, and the production of mono- graphs consisting very largely of figures. While far from disputing the interest of such studies for other professionals, or their importance in develop- ing knowledge about society, we have in most cases found that their limited scope and frequently tenta- tive conclusions have stood in the way of their selec- tion for a general guide of this kind. American sociology has from its beginnings been of rationalistic, diagnostic, and reformist if not re- constructionist temper or oudook. The core of the curriculum has normally been a course in American social problems wherein attention is concentrated upon areas of disorganization, maladjustment, and failure. This tendency is naturally reflected in the works available for selection in this chapter, and so inevitably in the works selected. In consequence, to some this chapter may seem to emphasize the negative aspects rather than the positive achieve- ments of American civilization, but this has not been because of any bias in this direction on the part of its compilers. A. Some General Views 4499. Bryce, James Bryce, viscount. The Ameri- can commonwealth. London and New York, Macmillan, 1888. 2 v. 9-13055 JK246.B9 1888 This classic surpassed in elaboration and pene- tration any studies which Americans had produced on their own government and politics, and at once became a standard text for courses in these subjects. Its author went on to a distinguished career in British politics, but succeeded in bringing out new editions in 1893 and (with the help of Charles A. Beard) in 1910. However, we list the original edition as the best worth reading. It inaugurated the serious study of American political parties. It is, nevertheless, a more comprehensive work, as appears from its Parts IV, V, and VI. Part IV is an elaborate treatment of public opinion, in both its failures and its successes. Part V is a miscellany including discussions of the supposed and true faults, and the strength of American democracy, as well as its availability for European imitation. Part VI deals with social institutions, and has chapters on the bar, railroads, Wall Street, the position of women, and the pleasantness of American life. Bryce 's American Commonwealth: Fiftieth Anni- versary, edited by Robert C. Brooks (New York, Macmillan, 1939. 245 p.), a symposium sponsored by the American Political Science Association, is naturally political in emphasis. 4500. [Crevecoeur, Michel Guillaume St. Jean de, called Saint John de Crevecoeur] Letters from an American farmer; describing certain pro- vincial situations, manners and customs . . . and conveying some idea of the late and present interior circumstances of the British colonies in North America. Written for the information of a friend in England, by J. Hector St. John. London, T. Davies, 1782. 318 p. 2-6756 E163.C82 4501. Crevecoeur, Michel Guillaume St. Jean de, called Saint John de Crevecoeur. Letters from an American farmer. Reprinted from the original ed. with a prefatory note by W. P. Trent and an introd. by Ludwig Lewisohn. New York, Boni, 1925. xxxvii, 355 p. 26-24569 E163.C827 After a wandering existence Crevecoeur settled on his farm, Pine Hill, in Orange County, N. Y., in 1769, and in the years before the Revolution is thought to have produced his vivid sketches of the husbandman's life. He is one of the first to view America "as the asylum of freedom, as the cradle of future nations, and the refuge of distressed Euro- peans," and an even greater pioneer in pointing out that altered conditions of life were producing a new man, the American. Some materials not used in the edition of 1782 were rediscovered and pub- 584 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES lished as Sketches of Eighteenth Century America (New Haven, Yale University Press, 1925. 342 p.). 4502. Croly, Herbert D. The promise of Ameri- can life. New York, Macmillan, 1909. 468 p. 9-28528 HN64.C89 The American nation "is committed to the realiza- tion of the democratic ideal; and if its promise is to be fulfilled, it must be prepared to follow whither- soever that ideal may lead." The essence of the American achievement is that its "economic, politi- cal, and social organization has given to its citizens the benefits of material prosperity, political liberty, and a wholesome natural equality." On these premises the author conducted a searching inquiry into the quality of American civilization, and worked out principles of reconstruction in the spirit of individual emancipation and constructive in- dividualism. Much of it is of present pertinence as well as of historical interest. 4503. Fortune. U. S. A., the permanent revolu- tion, by the editors of Fortune in collabora- tion with Russell W. Davenport. New York, Prentice-Hall, 1951. xvii, 267 p. 51-10804 E169.1.F75 "Originally published as the February, 1951, issue of Fortune magazine." A closely argued and somewhat overemphatic volume which seeks to demonstrate that the Ameri- can way of life is founded upon and generated by principles of universal application. The present- day working of this "American system" of liberty, equality, and constitutionalism is illustrated in the spheres of business, politics, labor, and local com- munity affairs. These conclusions can be generally applied to the problems of present day civilization, and used to dissolve the caricature of American life which prevails abroad, and to promote a positive American foreign policy. 4504. Nef, John U. The United States and civilization. Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1942. xviii, 421 p. ([Chicago. University] Charles R. Walgreen Foundation lectures) 42-1619 B57.N4 A diagnostic interpretation of American society in the light of the development of Western Civiliza- tion since the Middle Ages and its present material, moral, and intellectual crisis. The overemphasis of means, in the enormous expansion of science, tech- nology, industrialism, and economic life since about 1450, has led to the neglect and decay of the ends of civilization: humanism, religion, moral philosophy, and art. Among the expedients suggested are a re- turn to the humanities in education, the endowment of noneconomic institutions, and the strengthening of government within constitutional and democratic limits. 4505. Siegfried, Andre. Les Etats-Unis d'aujour- d'hui. Paris, Colin, 1927. 326 p. (Biblio- theque du musee social) 27-26676 E169.1.S56 4506. Siegfried, Andre. America comes of age, a French analysis. Translated from the French by Henry H. Hemming and Doris Hem- ming. New York, Harcourt, Brace. 1927. 358 p. 27-9637 E169.1.S57 4507. Siegfried, Andre. Tableau des Etats-Unis. Paris, Colin, 1954. 347 p. 54-34192 E169.1.S56813 4508. Siegfried, Andre. America at mid-century. Translated by Margaret Ledesert. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1955. 357 p. 55-7422 E169.1.S568 M. Siegfried's concise survey of American social, economic, and political life in the age of Coolidge was instantly acclaimed, by Europeans and Ameri- cans alike, for its interpretative virtuosity, its clear delineation of what "oft was thought but ne'er so well expressed." The translators' title, however, was singularly misleading, for maturity was quite lacking in the America Siegfried envisaged: a welter of races in the melting-pot, with the older strains rather desperately striving to keep America Prot- estant and "Anglo-Saxon." The second volume, issued 27 years later, is not a revision, "but a com- pletely new book." It lacks the clarity and concen- tration of the old, and while it contains many fine apercus, it has received no such general admiration. The underlying oudook of the two volumes re- mains the same: in 1927 the chief contrast between Europe and America was that "between industrial mass production which absorbs the individual for its material conquests, as against the individual con- sidered not merely as a means of production but as an independent ego." By 1954 there is no longer anything French intellectuals can do about it: "The classical tradition will survive, but the American will be a highly developed Homo faber rather than the Homo sapiens as conceived by Socrates." 4509. Tocqueville, Alexis C. H. M. C. de. De la democratic en Amerique. Paris, Gosselin, 1835. 2 v. MB 4510. Tocqueville, Alexis C. H. M. C. de. De- mocracy in America. Translated by Henry Reeve. London, Saunders & Odey, 1835-40. 4 v. 9-21576 JK216.T7 1835 SOCIETY / 585 451 1. Tocqueville, Alexis C. H. M. C. de. De- mocracy in America. Translated by Henry Reeve. Edited with notes, the translations rev. and in great part rewritten, and the additions made to the recent Paris editions now first translated by Francis Bowen. Cambridge, Mass., Sever & Francis, 1862. 2 v. 9-21574 JK216.T7 1862 4512. Tocqueville, Alexis C. H. M. C. de. De- mocracy in America. The Henry Reeve text as rev. by Francis Bowen, now further corr. and edited with introd., editorial notes, and bibli- ographies by Phillips Bradley; foreword by Harold J. Laski. New York, Knopf, 1945. 2 v. 45-3119 JK216.T7 1945 "Editions of Democracy in America": v. 2, p. 385—391. "A bibliography of items relating to De- mocracy in America and its author": v. 2, p. 392- 401. De Tocqueville traveled in the United States in 1831-32, studying American penitentiaries on behalf of Louis-Phillippe's Ministry of Justice. He used the opportunity to observe American democracy, not only as a system of government, but as the basic characteristic of an entire society, and so to forecast for Europeans the shape of things to come. Even the first part, which appeared in 1835, goes far be- yond a mere study of government; it discusses the advantages which American society derives from a democratic government, the consequences of the unlimited power of the majority, the causes which mitigate it, and the factors which tend to perpetuate democracy. The second part, which followed in 1840, is primarily a sociological inquiry into the implications of democracy, in the spheres of intel- lect, feeling, and manners. Here he raises, for the first time, such enduring topics as the addiction of Americans to practical rather than to theoretical science, the taste for physical well-being in America, and the creation of an industrial aristocracy. Much is abstract, and much obsolete, but few books of social observation have remained so obstinately con- temporary. Tocqueville's American visit is thor- oughly documented in George W. Pierson, Tocque- ville and Beaumont in America (New York, Oxford University Press, 1938. 852 p.). 4513. Years of the modern; an American appraisal. John W. Chase, ed. New York, Longmans, Green, 1949. 354 p. 49-11770 E169.1.Y4 Contents. — Portrait of the American, by H. S. Commager. — American freedom: a method, by A. Barth. — The genius of the radical, by W. Hamil- ton. — The faith of a skeptic, by A. Johnson. — The saving remnant: a study of character, by D. Ries- man. — The American economy: substance and myth, by J. K. Galbraith. — Education under cross- fire, by P. Miller. — Of science and man, by H. Brown. — Americans and the war of ideas, by E. D. Canham. — Our armed forces; threat or guarantee, by C. T. Lanham. — Peace: our greatest challenge, by S. Welles. — An adventure in ideals, by N. Cousins. A symposium of twelve interpretative essays, on selected but essential aspects of American life, each by an authority in his field chosen for his ability to relate it to the rest of life, and to phrase his convic- tions with clarity and force. "It might be called a creative inventory of our times." B. Social History: Periods 4514. Allen, Frederick Lewis. The big change: America transforms itself, 1900-1950. New York, Harper, 1952. 308 p. 52-8455 E169.1.A4717 An optimistic interpretation of American social evolution during the first half of the 20th century. At the turn of the century the gulf between wealth and poverty was immense. Fifty years later the gap had been effectively narrowed, and there had also been a narrowing of the gap in ways of living, and the emergence of an "all-American standard" for the whole population. Business had found a new frontier in the purchasing power of the poor, and new-style corporations were concerned with the social benefits of their policies. In short, the United States was evolving, not toward socialism but past socialism. 4515. Billington, Ray A. The Protestant Crusade, 1 800- 1 860; a study of the origins of Ameri- can nativism. New York, Rinehart, 1952, c i938. 514 p. 52-14020 BX1406.B5 1952 Bibliography: p. 445-504. Charts a popular upheaval through the 30 years of its violence, and traces its roots back to the Eng- lish Reformation and the defensive nationalism of the Elizabethan Age. Its manifestations are pur- sued in religious controversy and propaganda for mass consumption, and in overt violence; in political organization leading to the establishment of a separate party, the Know-Nothings; and in the transfer of hostility from the Catholic Church to the immigrants in general. Well-documented, it achieves a notable synthesis. 586 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 4516. Branch, Edward Douglas. The sentimental years, 1836-1860. New York, Appleton- Century, 1934. 432 p. 34-36082 E166.B82 A view of the various facets of a people's life dur- ing the quarter-century between Jackson and Lin- coln, which becomes, the author thinks, "a social discussion of the first generation of the American middle class." Sentimentalism, his key to the pe- riod, he regards as "the immature phase of the Romantic Movement" in which reality is neither recognized nor judged. A lively panorama of such developments as feminism, the temperance move- ment, phrenology, spiritualism, and Perfectionism is presented, with the author intent on making the worst of everything. 4517. Bridenbaugh, Carl. Myths and realities; societies of the colonial South. Baton Rouge, Louisiana State University Press, 1952. 208 p. (The Walter Lynwood Fleming lectures in southern history, Louisiana State University) 52-13024 F212.B75 "Bibliographical note": p. [i97]-200. In 1776 there was no South or Southerners, but three or even four distinct social patterns, if the North Carolina one which the author mentions but does not describe be included. He analyzes the Chesapeake Society of Virginia and Maryland, where the planters had consistently lived beyond their means but furnished a distinguished leader- ship in political and religious liberalism; the Caro- lina Society where a genuinely prosperous "planting plutocracy arose on the basis of fortunes amassed in rice and indigo or in trade and sought to trans- form itself into an aristocracy after the Old World pattern"; and the Back Settlements, a land of "amaz- ing antitheses" where conventions were thinner and a rough sort of equality was maintained, and which largely disappeared after the Revolution. 4518. Kraus, Michael. Intercolonial aspects of American culture on the eve of the revolu- tion, with special reference to the northern towns. New York, Columbia University Press, 1928. 251 p. (Columbia University. Faculty of Political Science. Studies in history, economics and public law, no. 302) H31.C7, no. 302 28-23641 E163.K9 "List of authorities": p. 227-244. A careful investigation of a field largely neglected or even denied existence in earlier histories: "the many influences, subtle or obvious, which were cre- ating for the colonists a common fund of experi- ence," and so preparing the intercolonial cooperation which took place after 1765. These factors, as ap- parent in Boston, New York, and Philadelphia, are traced in the spheres of business, social relationships, religion, printing, education, art, medicine, and sci- ence. The special interest does not prevent a faith- ful mirroring of colonial society in general. 4519. Morris, Lloyd R. Not so long ago. New York, Random House, 1949. xviii, 504 p. 49-11404 E169.1.M83 Three agencies, the motion pictures, the automo- bile, and the radio, in their essential development and their social effects since 1896. "Probably never before in human history have three instruments of such incalculable social power been developed in so short a time. All three were perfected in the United States, within the memory of a generation still active today. Yet, together, they have completely trans- formed our society, civilization and culture." The author is particularly concerned to trace the effects of these inventions on manners and morals. 4520. Riegel, Robert E. Young America, 1830- 1840. Norman, University of Oklahoma Press, 1949. 435 p. 49-50089 E338.R5 Aims to present a cross-view of civilization in a transitional decade, excluding only the well-known political events of the age of Jackson. The great majority of the references are to strictly contempo- rary sources. "The effort has been to present a com- prehensive view of how people earned their livings, how they amused themselves, and what were their thoughts and their ideals." There are chapters on business, the wage earner, woman, reformers, doc- tors, scientists, and sports. The United States, he concludes, was well embarked on the "revolution- ary project of developing an entire people rather than only a few selected groups." 4521. Stewart, George R. American ways of life. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1954. 310 p. 54-73 2 3 E169.1.S84 Realistic surveys of various aspects of American social life from 1607 to the present day, including such comparatively neglected topics as food, drink, clothing, sex, play, and holidays. "Personal names" is based on extensive research by the author in original records, and is a field which he has prac- tically to himself. Originally prepared for an Athenian audience, much of the matter will be quite as enlightening to the author's own countrymen. 4522. Tyler, Alice (Felt) Freedom's ferment; phases of American social history to i860. Minneapolis, University of Minnesota Press, 1944. 608 p. A44-463 BR516.T9 Bibliography and notes: p. 551-589. The religious and reform movements of the early Republic are here presented as twin manifestations SOCIETY / 587 of the desire to perfect human institutions. "The American reformer was the product of evangelical religion, which presented to every person the neces- sity for positive action to save his own soul, and dynamic frontier democracy, which was rooted deep in a belief in the worth of the individual. The re- sult was a period of social ferment, sometimes a little mad, a little confused about directions, but always full of optimism, of growth, and of positive affirma- tion." Within this framework are straightforward accounts of Transcendentalism and Mormonism, religious and secular Utopias, reform movements in education, penology, and welfare, and the tem- perance, peace, feminist, and anti-slavery crusades. C. Social History: Topics 4523. Asbury, Herbert. The great illusion; an in- formal history of prohibition. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1950. 344 p. 50-10358 HV5089.A74 Develops the antecedents of Prohibition at reason- able length, and finds the crucial decision in the elec- tions of 191 6, well before wartime conditions pre- vailed or "our boys" were off in Europe. "At most the war may have hastened ratification by a few years . . . The American people wanted prohibi- tion and were bound to try it; for more than a hun- dred years they had been indoctrinated with the idea that the destruction of the liquor traffic was the will of God and would provide the answers to most, if not all, of mankind's problems." Prohibition's fairest flower was an appalling moral collapse, the almost complete breakdown of law enforcement through- out the United States, and the taking over of the importation, manufacture, and distribution of illegal liquor by the underworld. An opinionated but well-documented record. 4524. Benson, Mary Sumner. Women in eight- eenth-century America; a study of opinion and social usage. New York, Columbia University Press, 1935. 343 p. (Columbia University. Faculty of Political Science. Studies in history, economics and public law, no. 405) H31.1. C7, no. 405 35-6356 HQ1416.B4 1935a "Bibliographical essay": p. 317-333. A study of the status of women during a crucial century, primarily as set forth by theorists both in Europe and America, but also "as reflected in legis- lation, in the activities of women themselves, and in the comments of prominent Americans and trav- ellers." Franklin and Rush were American inno- vators who wrote effectively in favor of wider opportunities and responsibilities for women, but the bulk of American writing reflected European ideas. In society itself, American conditions had modified the European tradition: upper class women had a greater part in economic activity; lower class women received better treatment. Definite advances were made during the century, but at its close the fear of radicalism was restricting further develop- ments. 4525. Bestor, Arthur E. Backwoods Utopias; the sectarian and Owenite phases of communi- tarian socialism in America, 1 663-1 829. Philadel- phia, University of Pennsylvania Press, 1950. 288 p. 50-6447 HX654.B4 At head of title: American Historical Association. "Bibliographical essay": p. 245-268. This work defines with a new precision the Com- munitarian point of view: it aimed to produce a small, voluntary, experimental community, which would accomplish an immediate root-and-branch re- form, and provoke general imitation in the great world outside. The "holy commonwealths" are inventoried, beginning with Plockhoy's established on the Delaware in 1663; there were 34 of them prior to 1825, and 130 before the Civil War. Robert Owen's communitarian proposals made a wider appeal than any predecessors, because free of all nar- row sectarian restrictions. But after Owen's com- plicated and expensive failure, the sectarian communities went prosperously on until the Civil War turned them into economic backwaters. 4526. Curti, Merle E. The roots of American loyalty. New York, Columbia University Press, 1946. 267 p. A46-2131 E169.1.C89 "Bibliographical note": p. [2495-256. An examination of the sources and nature of American patroitism, particularly during the forma- tive century which followed 1776. The subject is inseparable from the development of American nationalism, and the author emphasizes the manner in which particular groups, such as Negroes or immigrants from continental Europe, have devel- oped a sense of participation in the national life. A great variety of printed sources have been ran- sacked for evidence — including the usually ignored Fourth of July oration, which, "for all its bombast 588 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES and platitudes, epitomized the whole pattern of American patriotic thought and feeling." 4527. Habenstein, Robert W., and William M. Lamers. The history of American funeral directing. Milwaukee, Bulfin Printers, 1955. 636 p. 55-12014 GT3150.H3 This work, sponsored and copyrighted by the National Funeral Directors Association of the United States, devotes its first 200 pages to a de- scription of the pre-Christian, medieval, and early English background, and then embarks upon an analysis of American developments as objective as it is massive. No grim detail is slighted: the evolu- tion of the coffin (which became the casket in the course of the 1860's), of the hearse, and of the em- balmer's art are concretely charted. The authors pause at intervals to reconstruct the typical funeral of the period. The later chapters emphasize the rise of the professional spirit, the differentiation of the embalmer from the funeral director, and the development of national associations in the field. There are numerous illustrations from contem- porary sources, happily more often comic than grue- some. The volume is thoroughly documented. A related subject is presented in Charles L. Wallis' Stories on Stone; a Boo\ of American Epitaphs (New York, Oxford University Press, 1954. 272 p.), a classified anthology of inscribed tomb- stones of originality, character, and humor, con- scious or unconscious. 4528. Krout, John Allen. The origins of pro- hibition. New York, Knopf, 1925. 339 p. 25-16666 HV5089.K75 Bibliography: p. 305-328. A social history of the "temperance movement," largely impelled by the power of evangelical Prot- estantism, down to 185 1. The temperance societies which sprang up locally, and were federated in the American Society for the Promotion of Temperance in 1826, became racked by dissension over the con- sumption of wine and malt liquors. In the 1840's came the Washingtonian or total abstinence move- ment, but also a growing conviction that persuasion would never be adequate and must be replaced by legal coercion. The first result was the Maine Law of 1 85 1. Chapter 10 surveys the huge literary output of the temperance reformers. 4529. Langdon, William Chauncy. Everyday things in American life. New York, Scrib- ner, 1937-41. 2 v. 37-34608 E161.L32 Bibliography: v. [1], p. 335-340; v. [2], p. 383- 384. Contents. — v. 1. 1 607-1 776. — v. 2. 1776-1876. A simple and straightforward presentation of the development of material culture in America, with copious illustrations. The first volume, because of simpler subject matter, is a more unified production than the second. Transportation and manufacture, as well as domestic equipment, are included. 4530. Mann, Arthur. Yankee reformers in the urban age. Cambridge, Belknap Press of Harvard University Press, 1954. 314 p. 54-5020 HN80.B7M3 "Bibliographical note": p. [245]-248. Boston is utilized as a case study in urban social- reform thinking during the two seminal decades, 1880-1900. While the author emphasizes that the reformers were only an articulate minority, and the mass of the citizens remained indifferent or hostile to liberalism, the book leaves rather an impression of a multiplicity of workers engaged in intense activ- ity. Irish Catholic liberals, radical rabbis, Protestant social gospelers, academic dissidents, radical free- lance intellectuals, trade-union "collective individ- ualists," and feminists contributed their strands of criticism and vision. John Boyle O'Reilly, Frank K. Foster, Frank Parsons, and Vida D. Scudder are among the leaders who "rejuvenated the languishing spirit of reform to meet the problems of the modern, urban-industrial culture." 4531. Rawson, Marion (Nicholl) Of the earth earthy; how our fathers dwelt upon and wooed the earth. New York, Dutton, 1937. 414 p. 37-23647 E161.R285 Suggestive and nostalgic essays on vanished forms of our material culture, with pen-and-ink illustra- tions by the author. Here one finds the forms and functions of those mysterious entities so frequendy encountered in our early literature: the lime-kiln, the hop-yard, the malt-house, saltpetre beds, the shot-tower, the salt-yard, the seine loft and field, sail and rigging lofts, the ropewalk, the charcoal pits, the peat bog, and many others. The author has written a number of other books in similar vein, such as Forever the Farm (New York, Dutton, 1939. 380 p.), but none so original as this. 4532. Schlesinger, Arthur M. Learning how to behave, a historical study of American etiquette books. New York, Macmillan, 1946. 95 p. 46-8112 E161.S25 A. concise survey of a copious branch of American writing. Domestic manuals replaced imported ones with the advent of Jacksonian democracy, and pro- vided a means for social groups rising out of peasan- try or poverty to assimilate an old heritage of social refinement. After the Civil War, an etiquette of heightened formal convention provided a special form of display for the new rich and their imitators. SOCIETY / 589 This artificiality disappeared quite suddenly after World War I, leaving a vacuum which has been very imperfecdy filled. 4533. Wecter, Dixon. The hero in America, a chronicle of hero-worship. New York, Scribner, 1941. 530 p. 41-5177 E176.W4 Bibliography: p. 493-513. Aims "to look at a few of those great personalities in public life — Washington, Franklin, Jefferson, Jackson, Lincoln, Lee, Theodore Roosevelt — from whom we have hewn our symbols of government, our ideas of what is most prizeworthy as 'Ameri- can'." Equally significant as signposts of folk ap- proval are minor heroes and hero types — Johnny Appleseed, the Unknown Soldier, Lindbergh. The author notes the absence of women, artists, scholars, and saints, as well as physicians and lawyers, from the heroic register. 4534. Wecter, Dixon. The saga of American society; a record of social aspiration, 1607- 1937. New York, Scribner, 1937. 504 p. 37- J 5575 E161.W43 "A note on bibliography": p. 485-493. A lively panorama of Society with a capital S, defined as "the overt manifestation of caste," active, conspicuous, articulate, specialized. A chapter is devoted to the assimilation of plutocracy to aristoc- racy, a vital problem of society since the rise of the great industrial fortunes. The Blue Books, and other means of limiting and recognizing the socially elect, are analyzed. Other topics are the gentle- man's club, the predominance of women, the society page as a power and not merely a picture, and mar- riage with titled Europeans. The author is critical and often ironical, but never contemptuous or denunciatory. D. Social Thought 4535. Barker, Charles A. Henry George. New York, Oxford University Press, 1955. 696 p. 55-6251 HB119.G4B3 To Prof. Barker, George's Progress and Poverty (1879) is "a moral Mount Whitney in American protest." While the book is primarily "a devastat- ing attack on land monopoly," it is just as effective "against monopolism in any form, unless that monopolism be truly necessary in economics and truly public in administration." "No other book of the industrial age, dedicated to social recon- struction and conceived within the western traditions of Christianity and democracy, commanded so much attention." These convictions animate the author's immense researches in primary materials, and justify the extremely detailed narratives of the evolution of George's ideas, his participation in California and New York politics, and his cam- paigns of propagandism in the British Isles and at home. A final chapter deals with the "triple legacy of Georgism," in the single tax doctrine, in munici- pal reformism, .and in "moral and intellectual Georgism." Readers desiring a more concise pres- entation of George's life and thought will find it in Albert J. Nock's Henry George, an Essay (New York, Morrow, 1939. 224 p.), and a treatment largely limited to ideas in George R. Geiger's The Philosophy of Henry George (New York, Mac- millan, 1933. 581 p.). 4536. Bernard, Luther L., and Jessie Bernard. Origins of American sociology; the social science movement in the United States. New York, Crowell, 1943. 866 p. 43-10237 HM22.U5B4 The chief predecessor of the modern academic discipline, sociology, was the social science move- ment, originally transplanted to the United States as an ardent practical democratic idealism, but in the course of time losing most of its futile utopianism, acquiring greater logical and scientific discipline, and falling into line with respectable scientific method. The period covered is approximately 1840-90, and the major topics are the associationist phase, the influence of Comte, the systematizing phase (G. F. Holmes, James O'Donnell, R. S. Hamilton, and R. J. Wright), the nationalist or Carey School, the neo-classical school, and the American Social Science Association (1865-1909). "Social Science" itself is regarded as a transitional stage embodying residual theological and meta- physical elements. A cumbersome volume, but full of information for intellectual history. 4537. Chugerman, Samuel. Lester F. Ward, the American Aristotle; a summary and inter- pretation of his sociology. Durham, N. C, Duke University Press, 1939. 591 p. 39-22560 HM22.U6W22 Bibliography: p. 559-560. 59° / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Ward (1841-1913) worked out his doctrines of sociology during the 40 years he was a govern- ment official in Washington, laboring for 14 years on the production of his first book, Dynamic Soci- ology (1883). Only during the last seven years of his life did he profess the subject at Brown Uni- versity. Mr. Chugerman disposes of Ward's biog- raphy in one chapter, and devotes the rest of his book to a systematic presentation of Ward's ideas and his claims to greatness as a thinker. Ward was the Yankee Aristotle because, like the Greek thinker and also like Comte and Spencer in his own day, he worked out a massive synthesis of the sciences and the naturalistic philosophy of his age. To Ward evolution was the key to the cosmos, and sociology the crown of the sciences and the only sure instru- ment of progress through social reconstruction. American sociology has ever since retained the naturalistic and reformist stamp which Ward gave to it. 4538. Dorfman, Joseph. Thorstein Veblen and his America. New York, Viking Press, 1934. 556 p. 34-39873 HB119.V4D6 "Bibliography of Thorstein Veblen": p. 519-524. Veblen (1 857-1929), the son of Norwegian im- migrants, was an economist whose very original views soon led him to transcend the orthodox boundaries of his subject and make striking and controversial contributions to social theory. This detailed biography utilizes the lecture-notes taken by his students and includes summaries of his prin- cipal writings, among which The Theory of the Leisure Class (New York, Macmillan, 1899. 400 p.) and The Theory of Business Enterprise (New York, Scribner, 1904. 400 p.) are the best known. 4539. Jandy, Edward C. Charles Horton Cooley, his life and his social theory. New York, Dryden Press, 1942. 319 p. 42-22102 HM22.U6C65 Bibliography: p. 270-281. Cooley (1864-1929) was professor of sociology at the University of Michigan and one of the founders of American academic sociology, and in particular of social psychology. The author of this Michigan dissertation devotes his first two chapters to Cooky's life, and the remaining four to an exposition of his social theory. In summarizing, the author declares that while Cooley 's abstract and philosophical ap- proach, his tendency to generalize on the basis of scant data, and his "ethico-religionism" are things of the past, his view of "the interdependent nature of the individual and society," his emphasis on pub- lic opinion, and his analyses of social institutions pervade more recent literature, and assure him an enduring place in the history of sociology. 4540. Odum, Howard W., ed. American masters of social science; an approach to the study of the social sciences through a neglected field of biography. New York, Holt, 1927. 411 p. 27-8909 HM22U6O4 Contents. — Pioneers and masters of social sci- ence, by H. W. Odum. — John William Burgess, by W. R. Shepherd.— Lester Frank Ward, by J. Q. Dealey. — Herbert B. Adams, by J. M. Vincent. — William Archibald Dunning, by C. E. Merriam. — Albion Woodbury Small, by E. C. Hayes. — Frank- lin Henry Giddings, by J. L. Gillin. — Thorstein Veblen, by P. T. Homan. — Frederick Jackson Tur- ner, by C. Becker. — James Harvey Robinson, by H. E. Barnes. Sketches of nine "masters," who include political scientists, historians, and economists as well as soci- ologists, are presented primarily as "an approach to teaching and research in the social sciences." The sketches present the subject's outlook and ideas as well as the facts of his life. While the careers of these men coincided with the periods during which their disciplines achieved autonomy in American higher education, the editor emphasizes their ver- satility, enabling them to range "over a broad field of social interest" and social statecraft. 4541. Odum, Howard W. American sociology; the story of sociology in the United States through 1950. New York, Longmans, Green, 1951. 501 p. 51-12390 HM22.U5O4 1951 A presentation of the professional and organiza- tional aspects of its subject. The largest section is concerned with the careers and work of the suc- cessive presidents of the American Sociological So- ciety, from Lester F. Ward in 1906-07, to Leonard Cottrell, the 40th, in 1950. The next largest lists, with some commentary of a general kind, college texts in sociology since 1883, both general and spe- cial. Chapter 23 describes American sociological journals and their editors. The concluding chapters, "Toward inventory," discuss a few trends but at- tempt no large synthesis or judgment. Rather a compendium of serviceable information than a definitive history of its subject. 4542. Page, Charles Hunt. Class and American sociology; from Ward to Ross. New York, Dial Press, 1940. 319 p. 40-8685 HM22.U5P3 1940a Issued also as thesis (Ph. D.) Columbia Uni- versity. Contents. — The fathers and their times. — Lester Frank Ward. — William Graham Sumner. — Albion Woodbury Small. — Franklin Henry Giddings. — Charles Horton Cooley. — Edward Alsworth Ross. — SOCIETY / 59I Conclusion.— Notes and bibliography (p. [255]- 312). A study of the concept of class in the work of six of the "fathers" of American sociology. All were concerned with the role of class forces in American life; after their day American sociology turned to detailed empirical research in problem areas of nar- rower scope. The present concern with class, not merely as a socio-economic aggregate, but as a socio- psychological phenomenon rooted in personal atti- tudes, is a return to their viewpoint. But "they were all, in one way or another, impressed by the anti-class elements of American democracy," and by the emphasis of our middle class "upon the com- mon elements of a society and its negation of all separating barriers." 4543. Ross, Edward Alsworth. Seventy years of it; an autobiography. New York, Apple- ton-Century, 1936. 341 p. 36-27416 HM22.U6R6 Ross ( 1 866-1 951) after being expelled for his opinions from Stanford University in 1900, settled down to a long teaching career at the University of Wisconsin. He was one of the founders of our academic sociology, but little of his formal doctrine appears here; rather does it exhibit him in the role of stormy petrel. An uncompromising democrat, he fearlessly spoke out against all tendencies which might undermine the roots of American society in liberty and equality. His reminiscences are miscel- laneous, and often naively bumptious, but they re- flect his wide acquaintance with other societies, his indifference to fashionable currents of opinion, and his ability to penetrate to the essence of social tendencies. 4544. Starr, Harris E. William Graham Sumner. New York, Holt, 1925. 557 p. 25-11703 H59.S8S7 Sumner (1840-19 10), the most stalwardy inde- pendent of all American social scientists, had a re- markably varied career, in the course of which his views altered from orthodox Congregationalism through classical economic doctrine to ethnological relativism. At all stages his complete honesty, clear expression, and uncompromising assertion made him a formidable factor in current discussion at vari- ous levels. This admiring but objective biography quotes at length from his correspondence and digests his doctrines in their several subjects and stages. 4545. White, Morton G. Social thought in Amer- ica, the revolt against formalism. New York, Viking Press, 1949. 260 p. 49-48242 H53.U5W5 The subtitle defines the book's subject: the style of thinking which dominated America for almost half a century, an intellectual pattern compounded of pragmatism, institutionalism, behaviorism, legal realism, and economic determinism. Its major representatives were Justice O. W. Holmes, Thor- stein Ve'olen, John Dewey, James Harvey Robinson, and Charles A. Beard. Their common ground was the rejection of abstractionism in favor of historicism and cultural organicism, although their following came rather from their apparent contribution to the advent of a more rational society. The treatment is critical as well as expository, but the balance is favor- able: in spite of all their fuzziness and lack of logic, "their example should serve to encourage those social scientists who are more interested in achieving a good society than in measuring attitudes toward toothpaste." E. General Sociology; Social Psychology 4546. Barnett, James H. The American Christ- mas; a study in national culture. New York, Macmillan, 1954. 173 p. 54-12566 GT4985.B3 According to the author, this "is a pioneer effort in the sociological study of American holidays," which seeks "to show how the past and the present, the religious and the secular, are fused in the pat- tern of the national festival so that it draws vitality from many and varied sources." Historically, this one is a recent development, its legal recognition by all the states and territories taking place between 1836 and 1890. Its intensive commercial exploita- tion falls after 1920. The social role of Santa Claus and the social content of Christmas art are developed. Christmas "has become a diffuse, popular cult," "nourished by the tie of family life, by affection for children, by a willingness to aid the needy, and even by the profit-seeking activities of modern busi- ness." In it even the secular-minded can readily participate. 4547. Caplow, Theodore. The sociology of work. Minneapolis, University of Minnesota Press, 1954. 330 p. 54-8208 HM211.C3 The author defines his subject as "the study of those social roles which arise from the classification 592 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES of men by the work they do," and proceeds upon the assumption that a complex society like the United States "is maintained by the mutual dependence of highly specialized and differentiated occupational groups." While he aims at generalized conclusions, his exposition depends upon American subject mat- ter, with only an occasional introduction of foreign situations for contrast. His book, he says, is pri- marily an essay on the division of labor, and he has much to say concerning the measurement of occu- pational status, vertical and other kinds of mobility, occupational institutions, and occupational status. In the United States today, he observes, "poverty has come to mean the absence of status symbols rather than hunger and physical misery." This and many comparable insights add up to a penetrating exposi- tion of the nature of jobs and of job-holding in present-day America, viewed as social rather than merely economic facts. 4548. Chapin, Francis Stuart. Contemporary American institutions; a sociological analysis. New York, Harper, 1935. 423 p. 35-1 1 7 12 HN57.C5 Prof. Chapin 's analysis proceeds from the prin- ciple that "social institutions are essentially psycho- logical phenomena that consist of a configuration of segments of the behaviors of individuals." On this basis he describes the political and business insti- tutions of the local community, the family, the school, the Protestant church in an urban environ- ment, social welfare agencies, and even the New Deal. He gives many tables and diagrams illustra- tive of social situations. He concludes with various theories and projects of social measurement, typical of the direction sociological investigation was about to take, and indicating why his would be the last general survey of the kind. 4549. Cuber, John F., and William F. Kenkel. Social stratification in the United States. New York, Appleton-Century-Crofts, 1954. 359 p. 54-10606 HT609.C8 The authors attempt to supply a practical text- book for a field hitherto without one, although research output within it has been immense. "Part I is a semantic, theoretical, and methodological orientation to stratification literature." Part II con- sists of critical analyses of eight important field studies of social stratification in America, with spe- cial attention to the validity of the methods employed in each. Part III contains both theoretical and spe- cific conclusions; there are, for instance, varying stratification systems in various American commu- nities, rather than a single all-embracing system, and individuals have multiple statuses rather than a single well-defined one. In a final evaluation of the American stratification system, the authors discuss four often-heard negative judgments, and present four favorable factors, such as high vertical mobility, and rectification of some of the inequities in life- chances, but most of their conclusions remain quite tentative. 4550. Davis, Kingsley, ed. Modern American society; readings in the problems of order and change [by] Kingsley Davis, Harry C. Brede- meier [and] Marion J. Levy, Jr. New York, Rine- hart, 1949. 734 p. 49-5542 HN57.D3 "All the materials in the book are designed to help the student understand what gives order and dis- order, unity and disunity, to our society as a whole." The most convenient approach to this problem the editors find "in the relation between our system of values as it is expressed in the American ethos and as it is reflected in the actual functioning of our society." The selections from books and periodicals pursue those themes under the following headings: "The New Urban Environment", "The Economic Framework", "Our Class System", "Race Versus Democracy", "Education and Public Opinion", "The Separation of Church and Society", "Recrea- tion: Leisure and Escape", "Modern Marriage and the Family". 4551. Ebersole, Luke E. American society, an introductory analysis. New York, McGraw- Hill, 1955. 510 p. 55-7274 HN57.E2 Designed for courses in introductory sociology and general social science, this is a much simpler treatment than Williams' (no. 4558), with far less employment of technical jargon. "It is hoped that it will be useful also in courses in the field of American studies." The main divisions are "People," "Communities," "Classes," and "Institu- tions." The first deals with population, immigra- tion, and minorities. "Classes" discusses social stratification, identifying six social classes in the United States, and social mobility. Family, eco- nomic, governmental, educational, and religious institutions are described. A final chapter identi- fies ten processes which have been changing our society: invention, industrialization, urbanization, centralization, specialization, bureaucratization, stratification, mobility, secularization, and assimi- lation. 4552. Miller, Delbert C, and William H. Form. Industrial sociology; an introduction to the sociology of work relations. New York, Harper, 1951. 896 p. 51-9367 HD6961.M55 A large scale textbook which "seeks to introduce new research, integrate available materials, and pro- vide a frame of reference for the study of work rela- society / 593 tions." In the authors' view, industrial sociology is a relatively new discipline based upon the recent "rediscovery that working cannot be divorced from living. It is now known that production, profit, and industrial peace depend in large measure on the rec- ognition that industry is a complex of interacting groups and individuals." The largest sections of the book are devoted to the social organization of the work plant or factory, and the social adjustment of the worker through successive periods of his life, from the family to retirement. A final section is devoted to more general considerations on the interdependence of industry and community, and of industry and society. 4553. Mills, Charles Wright. White collar; the American middle classes. New York, Ox- ford University Press, 1951. xx, 378 p. 51-5298 HT690.U6M5 Bibliographical references included in "Acknowl- edgments and sources" (p. 355-363). The "new middle class," made up of managers, salaried professionals, salespeople, and office work- ers, has grown up beside the older middle class of farmers, businessmen, and free professionals, and now outnumbers it by a substantial margin. This untechnical and often rather arbitrary book has the field to itself in seeking to characterize the outlook and the dilemmas of its several worlds. The business managers have become cogs in a business machinery that has routinized greed. Bureaucracy and com- mercialization are spreading through the profes- sional world. In the great salesroom,"it is the sales- men who have put their personalities up for sale." In "the enormous file," the work has been "stand- ardized for interchangeable, quickly replaceable clerks." 4554. Odegard, Peter H. The American public mind. New York, Columbia University Press, 1930. 308 p. 30-27934 E169.1.O23 Bibliography: p. 280-291. "Why do we behave like Americans? Whence come our ideas and ideals?" A straightforward ac- count of American public opinion as of its date, as influenced by family, church and school, the press, political and special interest propaganda, and the popular arts. The author hardly answers his own questions, but presents a lively view of surface phenomena. 4555. Riesman, David. The lonely crowd; a study of the changing American character. In collaboration with Reuel Denney and Nathan Glazer. New Haven, Yale University Press, 1950. xvii, 386 p. (Studies in national policy, 3) 50-9967 BF755.A5R5 4556. Riesman, David. Faces in the crowd; indi- vidual studies in character and politics. In collaboration with Nathan Glazer. New Haven, Yale University Press, 1952. 751 p. (Studies in national policy, 4) 52—5357 BF818.R5 Highly original studies in American social psy- chology, which attempt to isolate and illustrate some recent changes of high significance. As the United States has passed from a growing population to a more stationary one with lower birth and death rates, the older patterns of individual character, tra- dition-directed or inner-directed, have increasingly yielded to the other-directed pattern. This type, whose conformity rests on "sensitive attention to the expectations of contemporaries," pursues a fluctuat- ing series of short-run goals and tends to live in a world largely made up of interpersonal relations. The habits of thought and action of the creators and brokers of prestige receive wide imitation. Varying attitudes in politics, work, and play are elaborated. The sequel presents 20 individual portraits, based on interviews some of which are presented in full. They seek to answer: "what sort of person is this, in terms of his character; how is his conformity secured, what is his political style — that is, how does he handle the political world as part of his total life- orientation?" 4557. Warner, William Lloyd. Democracy in Jonesville; a study in quality and inequality. New York, Harper, 1949. xviii, 313 p. 49-10212 HN57.W3 A study of social classes and social mobility in a small Illinois town [actually Morris, Grundy County] used as a laboratory for studying the social structure governing American capitalism. The em- phasis is on the factors determining the rise and fall of families in the social scale. These elements are studied against the varying backgrounds of child- hood, the mill, local associations and social clubs, the churches, the Norwegians as a distinct group, the high school, and party politics. The conclusion is that the American Dream is one thing, and the complexities of status another, but that without the Dream social mobility would stiffen into rigidity. 4558. Williams, Robin M. American society; a sociological interpretation. New York, Knopf, 195 1. xiii, 545 p. 51-11055 HN57.W=;5 A pioneer attempt to obtain a systematic view of the total American social structure, which applies the basic concepts and approaches of sociology to kinship and the family, to social stratification, and to economic, political, educational and religious in- stitutions. The results are cautiously and tentatively 431240—60- -39 594 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES rather than dogmatically stated. Among the gen- eral characteristics of social organization in the United States are these: a relatively slight develop- ment of stable groups of Gemeinschajt character, an enormous proliferation of formally organized special-interest associations, and an increasingly strategic position of large-scale centralized organiza- tions in the total structure. "Major value-orienta- tions in America" are spelled out at length, from " 'achievement' and 'success' " through "material comfort" to "racism and related group-superiority themes." F. The Family 4559. Bossard, James H. S. The sociology of child development. Rev. ed. New York, Harper, 1954. 788 p. _ 53-94 11 HQ781.B67 1954 The chief emphasis of this book, is upon "the social situations in which children live and grow from infancy to maturity." While the primary in- terest is in child behavior, the social context to which it is related is regularly American. There are chap- ters on interaction among the siblings, the bilingual child, the role of the guest, the child and the class structure, growing out of the family, and children who reject their parents. The final section presents the changing status of childhood: in America chil- dren "are viewed in terms of equality with other members of the family and recognized as coequal personalities in the emerging democracy of the family." 4560. Calhoun, Arthur W. A social history of the American family from colonial times to the present. New York, Barnes & Noble, 1945. 3 v. in 1. 45~393 6 HQ535.C23 "Copyright, I9i7[— 19] • • • Reprinted 1945." Bibliography at end of each volume. Contents. — 1. Colonial period. — 2. From inde- pendence through the Civil War. — 3. Since the Civil War. Remains, after four decades, considerably the most detailed historical presentation of sex and family life in the United States. In substance it consists of extracts from contemporary sources strung to- gether on a loose framework by a conventional and not too penetrating commentary. Since these sub- jects were discussed by our fathers in tones usually alarmist, and lapses from the writers' standards were noted rather than the contrary, the book is often a better guide to past opinion than to past fact. 4561. Cavan, Ruth (Shonle) The American fam- ily. New York, Crowell, 1953. 658 p. 53-5389 HQ535.C33 "Supersedes the author's . . . The Family [1942J." A college text written from the socio-psychologi- cal point of view, and including charts and other quantitative matter. Part I presents the general issues and considers the family in relation to rural life, migration, and urbanism. Part II studies the family in relation to social classes and social mobility. Part III contains a detailed psychological treatment from adolescence to old age, with special attention to dating, sex expression, adjustment in marriage, and divorce. The author concludes that the process of family disintegration has passed its climax, and that a new reintegration of the family with other institu- tions has begun to take place. 4562. Furnas, Joseph C. How America lives. New York, Holt, 1941. 372 p. 41—51597 HN57.F87 First published in the Ladies Home Journal. The patterns of life and the budgets of 16 Ameri- can families, ranging from wealthy industrialists to persons on relief or colored sharecroppers in Missis- sippi. The treatment is marked by journalistic slickness and some optimism, but is nevertheless a very concrete sampling of actual family life in its economic context just before World War II. There are review chapters on American housekeeping, diet, fashion, "beauty culture," housing, and home decoration. 4563. Groves, Ernest R. The American woman; the feminine side of a masculine civilization. Rev. and enl. ed. New York, Emerson Books, 1944. 465 p. 44-2372 HQ1410.G73 1944 Regarding woman, from the scant attention she gets in American historical writing, as the forgotten sex, the author traces woman's advance in status in a setting of masculine dominance. He aims to fol- low the general movement that brought the average woman closer to the privileges and resources of men, rather than to catalogue the noted women of the past. This has come about in two related currents: an increasing encroachment upon masculine special privileges, led by aggressive and gifted women lead- society / 595 ers, and the momentum of a material and intellectual progress that is making the equality of men and women more natural. 4564. Hollingshead, August de B. Elmtown's youth, the impact of social classes on adoles- cents. New York, Wiley, 1949. 480 p. 49-3279 HQ796.H65 "This study is one of a series made under the aus- pices of the Committee on Human Development of the University of Chicago." A study of 735 adolescent boys and girls in a Middle Western Corn Belt community, in order to analyze the way its social system organizes and con- trols the social behavior of young people reared in it. The social structure is graded into five classes, and the different attitudes and behavior which each class displays are traced in high school life, in cliques and dates, religion, jobs, and recreation. The "withdrawees" who have left school before completing its work, are separately studied. The conclusion indicates that our class system, which revolves about the gospel of success and escapes legal regulation because it is extra-legal, "is far more vital as a social force in our society than the American creed." 4665. Kinsey, Alfred C. Sexual behavior in the human male [by] Alfred C. Kinsey, Wardell B. Pomeroy [and] Clyde E. Martin. Philadelphia, Saunders, 1948. xv, 804 p. 48-5195 HQ18.U5K5 "Based on surveys made by members of the staff of Indiana University, and supported by the Na- tional Research Council's Committee for Research on Problems of Sex by means of funds contributed by the Medical Division of the Rockefeller Foundation." Bibliography: p. 766-787. 4566. Kinsey, Alfred C, and others. Sexual be- havior in the human female, by the staff of the Institute for Sex Research, Indiana University. Philadelphia, Saunders, 1953. xxx, 842 p. 53-11127 HQ18.U516 Bibliography: p. 763-810. Formally, Dr. Kinsey and his associates' statistical inquiry into the overt sexual activity of a sample of the whole American population is a study in human biology and so ineligible for this bibliog- raphy. Actually it furnishes much the largest body of concrete evidence concerning actual patterns of sex behavior at various social levels, in various en- vironments, and at different ages, and is therefore a contribution to the description of American society. 4567. Kyrk, Hazel. The family in the American economy. Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1953. xvii, 407 p. 53-12266 HQ535.K9 Bibliography: p. 395-398. The family is also an economic unit, and this book analyzes the economic position of American families in terms of incomes, prices, and standards of living. Families are regarded, not as fixed units, but as groups of individuals living through life-spans dur- ing which they will have differing economic char- acteristics. Among the subjects discussed are the components of family income, contributors and claimants to such income, amount and adequacy of family incomes, provision for the future through saving and insurance, the economic position of homekeeping women, the cost of living, and the standard of living. 4568. Landis, Paul H. Adolescence and youth; the process of maturing. 2d ed. New York, McGraw-Hill, 1952. 461 p. 52-6542 HQ796.L27 1952 A study of the gap between childhood and adult- hood which emphasizes "the infringement of the social processes on the developing organism" and treats adolescence "as a dynamic process which leads the growing organism through a molding series of social experiences," all in an American context. After more general considerations concerning the personality-forming process, the author analyzes what he takes to be the three critical phases of adjust- ment: attaining moral maturity, the transition to marital adulthood, and the struggle for economic adulthood. The concluding part studies the school as the major agency of social adjustment. The volume is liberally supplied with tables, graphs, and diagrams. The same author's Understanding Teen- Agers (New York, Appleton-Century-Crofts, 1955. 246 p.) presents much the same material in abbre- viated and more readable form. 4569. Lumpkin, Katharine Du Pre, and Dorothy (Wolff) Douglas. Child workers in Amer- ica. New York, McBride, 1937. 321 p. 37-27309 HD6250.U3L85 Bibliography: p. 307-313. The Fair Labor Standards Act of 1938 effected a major improvement in the field of child labor, and by the 1950's its worst abuses had largely disap- peared. The present work retains historical value as a summary of a problem of long standing just before the turn of the tide, when much effort ex- pended on reform seemed strangely futile. The nature of the constant pressures toward child exploi- tation, as well as the attitudes which made it pos- sible, are here rather bitterly described together 596 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES with efforts at amelioration through an entire century. 4570. Mudd, Emily (Hartshorne) The practice of marriage counseling. New York, Associa- tion Press, 1951. xix, 336 p. A5 1-7952 HQ728.M83 Bibliography: p. 231-249. Marriage counseling is a development of the last quarter-century which has enlisted a variety of pro- fessional skill channeled through a growing number of national and local organizations. The author, who has been director of the Marriage Council of Philadelphia since its establishment in 1932, dis- cusses the objectives of these services, and gives sample cases, including both those in which counsel- ing has helped and those in which it has failed. Appendix B is a series of reports from functioning services on their operations. 4571. Sirjamaki, John. The American family in the twentieth century. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1953. 227 p. (The Library of Congress series in American civilization) 53-6035 HQ535.S5 A condensed, integrated, and lucid essay which interprets the findings of social scientists for general readers. The present American family "is a small nuclear family centered largely upon its immediate members, settled in independent residence, disso- ciated from all but closely connected relatives, and lasting only through the adult years of its spouses and often not even so long." Its isolation from its larger kin group makes it more easily broken, but spouses work harder at their marriages because they know they have to. The concern for individualiza- tion of family members is large; wives have been brought near to legal parity, and children endowed with privileges. It is the family that best serves Americans' needs, and probably the one they want. 4572. Truxal, Andrew G., and Francis E. Merrill. Marriage and the family in American cul- ture. New York, Prentice-Hall, 1953. 587 p. 53-10245 HQ536.T68 A standard college text in which the presentation of the family from the biological, psychological, and social aspects is regularly related to American con- ditions of today. The present edition has been ex- tensively revised to include new materials derived from the scientific study of courtship and of per- sonality. The sixth and final part, "The Dynamics of the Family," is largely concerned with the disin- tegrative tendencies of recent years, against which positive measures to stabilize and reorganize the family, such as marriage counseling and family life agencies, have been relatively ineffective. 4573. Wattenberg, William W. The adolescent years. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1955. 510 p. 55-2109 HQ796.W32 A textbook which surveys the physical and psy- chological phenomena of adolescence in their social setting — ostensibly in that of Western Culture but practically in that of the United States. The author aims to help the reader "deal more understandingly with young people and with the adolescent in him- self and in every adult he knows." "Problem areas" isolated in the third section include sex, social rela- tionships, ideals, concepts of self, power and mastery, vocational choices, and personality troubles. It re- lies less on quantitative and more on case history materials than Landis (no. 4568). G. Communities: General 4574. Ferguson, Charles W. Fifty million broth- ers; a panorama of American lodges and clubs. New York, Farrar & Rinehart, 1937. 3^9 P- 37-1762 HS61.F4 "Selected list of sources": p. 361-380. Popular and very sketchy, but the only book which brings into one view such diverse associational phenomena as the Masons, college fraternities, the Knights of Pythias, women's clubs, the "Fascist shirts" of the 1930's, chambers of commerce, Negro lodges, the D. A. R., the Elks, the Eastern Star, and many others. The author believes that these clubs and secret orders "have grown and multiplied simply because they provided the only natural basis for normal group life in a country historically deprived of it." 4575. Hillman, Arthur. Community organiza- tion and planning. New York, Macmillan, 1950. xviii, 378 p. 50-5240 HV40.H62 "The methods by which communities deliberately change their structure and way of life is the theme of this book." The planning of communities should develop as a rational process and a conscious art. society / 597 The major goal of planning is to substitute orderly processes of problem-solving for the remnants of anarchy in modern societies. Organized action in community life may proceed through community centers and community councils. Functional areas in which community planning takes place include services to children and youth, social work, recrea- tion programs, and race-relations programs. The relationship between policymaking and administra- tion, and between national and local planning, are considered. 4576. Kinneman, John A. The community in American society. New York, Crofts, 1947. 450 p. 47-5625 HM131.K5 Aims to arrive at the common elements in both rural and urban communities, and to show their in- terrelations and interdependence. Special attention is given to the relatively unexplored field of small but independent metropolitan centers, of from 25,000 to 100,000 population. Community is regarded as essentially a socio-psychic phenomenon, an expres- sion of consciousness of kind or attachments to cer- tain basic interests, and provides the web of consciousness by which institutions function. As criteria of community relationships, newspaper cir- culation and hospitalization are given special consid- eration. Later chapters discuss leadership, change, conflict, and crises in the community. 4577. Lundberg, George A., Mirra Komarovsky, and Mary Alice Mclnerny. Leisure: a sub- urban study. New York, Columbia University Press, 1934. 396 p. 34-27255 HN79.N4L9 "Selected bibliography": p. [387]— 389. A study of the employment of leisure time in Westchester County, N. Y, a suburban area which enjoys "a higher plane of living than has hitherto [1934] been approached in any time or place." 2,460 individuals supplied diaries covering some 4,460 days, from which it appeared that the average leisure hours per diem for the entire group was 7.4. The exact time spent by various classes in various activities is worked out: the average was 108 minutes for eating, 90 for visiting, 57 for reading, etc. The authors do not find that suburbia makes a very con- structive use of recreation, and wish local govern- ment to provide facilities, opportunities, and leader- ship for more rewarding activities. 4578. Marden, Charles F. Rotary and its brothers; an analysis and interpretation of the men's service club. Princeton, Princeton University Press, 1935. 178 p. 35-22591 HF5001.A2M3 1935a This Columbia dissertation studies the luncheon clubs of business executives and professional men which call themselves service clubs and are joined in loose national or international federations — Rotary, Kiwanis, Lions' Clubs, etc. Their welfare activities are found to be of limited scope, and per- sonal and sporadic in nature, while little concrete evidence has appeared for their claim to be active in elevating the ethical level of business enterprise. The clubs are interpreted as new bases of associa- tion, sought after the decline of traditional ones, among the professional and business class, and espe- cially as a means of dignifying the dominant posi- tion of the business class. H. Communities: Rural 4579. Baker, Oliver E., Ralph Borsodi, and Mil- burn L. Wilson. Agriculture in modern life. New York, Harper, 1939. 303 p. 39-27962 HD1761.B25 Preface signed: Baker Brownell, supervising editor. This cooperative work grew out of a conference on distributive society and the possibilities of decen- tralization held at Northwestern University in 1938. Mr. Baker, whose section on "Our Rural People" is much the largest, is concerned with rural poverty, the drift of farm youth and wealth to the cities, and the difference between rural and urban birth rates. Mr. Borsodi offers "A Plan for Rural Life," and Mr. Wilson discusses "Science and Folklore in Rural Life." All are concerned with the salvage of the independent farm as a natural and self-sufficient way of life stable enough "to balance against the pressures of insecurity and dependency and statism and confusion that make this age so troubled." 4580. Burchfield, Laverne. Our rural communi- ties, a guidebook to published materials on rural problems. Chicago, Public Administration Service, 1947. 201 p. 47-3889 HT421.B78 "General publications on rural affairs": p. 199- 201. Aims to furnish those "interested in the problems of rural America with brief factual statements about major areas of rural life and annotated bibliographies 598 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES where they may gather additional information. Specialists will find somewhat elementary the state- ments in sections concerned with their own special- ties." Each chapter consists, after the initial "statement," of a summary of the literature under subtopics, followed by a list of precise references in alphabetical order. The main topics include schools, the Agricultural Extension Service, library service, the church, medical care and health services, welfare services, housing, recreation, and community organization. 4581. Kolb, John H., and Edmund de S. Brunner. A study of rural society. 4th ed. Boston, Houghton Mifflin [1952] 532 p. 52-10515 HT421.K62 1952 A textbook on contemporary American rural society woven about the theme of the growing inter- dependence in modern society — country and town, agriculture and industry, American and other societies. It is organized into four main parts, on population, the agrarian basis of rural society, group relations, and social institutions — established and recognized ways of getting things done. There are numerous tables, graphs, charts, and diagrams. Chapters are devoted to rural communities, rural interest groups and classes, and rural-urban relation- ships. Foreign instances are introduced for com- parison. 4582. Nelson, Lowry. American farm life. Cam- bridge, Harvard University Press, 1954. 192 p. (The Library of Congress series in Ameri- can civilization) 54~933 2 HN57.N46 A characterization of farm life in the United States for foreigners and city-dwellers, which em- phasizes the increasing approximation of rural to urban living, and the consequent interdependence of these unequal segments of society. "The tech- nological frontier" is the principal element of change: the permeation of farm life by machinery, agricultural research, and improved farm manage- ment, has profoundly affected rural life in its politi- cal, economic, and social aspects, and turned the "new farmer" into a kind of suburbanite. 4583. Rural life in the United States, by Carl C. Taylor [and others] New York, Knopf, 1949. xviii, 549, xii p. 49-7411 HT421.R8 Bibliography: p. 535-549. Eight members of the U. S. Bureau of Agricul- tural Economics have combined to write a textbook in general rural sociology which deals with all im- portant structural and functional aspects of rural society, all major geographic areas of the country, and all major problems of rural life. Part 2, on rural organization, has separate treatments of the home and family, education, religion, local govern- ment, health, welfare, and recreation and art. Part 3, on rural people, deals with population, occupa- tional patterns, standards of living, and the special problems of landowners, tenants, and laborers. "Part 4 is unique in a book on rural sociology be- cause it discusses seven different type-farming areas of the United States as if each were a cultural region," and "could well be considered a start toward the development of the cultural anthropology of American rural life." 4584. Smith, Thomas Lynn. The sociology of rural life. 3d ed. New York, Harper, 1953. 680 p. 53-5573 HT421.S55 1953 Attempts to assemble in a single volume, suitable for college sophomores, the essential facts and basic principles derived from the application of scientific method in the study of rural social relationships, with nearly all the subject matter drawn from the United States. The main topics are the rural popu- lation, rural social organization, and social processes in rural society. The processes analyzed and il- lustrated are competition and conflict, cooperation, accommodation, assimilation, acculturation, and social mobility. The most significant new factor is the improvement of communications by the tele- phone, telegraph, radio, television, automobile, and good roads, so that rural people are now in constant contact with one another and with townsfolk and city people, and the isolation and lagging change of rural communities are largely overcome. Abun- dandy illustrated with maps, photographs, charts, and tables. 4585. [Withers, Carl] Plainville, U. S. A. [by] James West [pseud.] New York, Columbia University Press, 1945. xv, 238 p. A45-1863 HN57.W58 A cultural-anthropology approach to the life of a small and very rural Missouri town, which pre- serves a real sense of the human beings dealt with, and avoids both condescension and partisanship. The prevailing background is the persistent poverty which haunts such communities. The author's major interest is in discriminating the social classes and working out their attitudes toward each other. A chapter, "From Cradle to Grave," works out the typical life pattern of average Plainville people. There is much attention to the changes brought about by urban industrialism, and its draining off of Plainville's young people. society / 599 I. Communities: Urban 4586. Carr, Lowell Juilliard, and James Edson Stermer. Willow Run; a study of indus- trialization and cultural inadequacy. New York, Harper, 1952. xxii, 406 p. 51-11892 HN80.W5C3 Bibliography: p. 395-399. In a mushrooming wartime community between Detroit and Ann Arbor the new Ford bomber plant produced 8,685 planes and an acute housing crisis. The authors seek to place responsibility for the latter, after thoroughly documenting the social conse- quences of deficient housing, and reject the devil theory, which blames the Ford Company, and the individual incompetence theory. Their solution blames gaps or blind spots in our industrial culture itself, such as the lack of any accepted method for defining a social community crisis, and of any ac- cepted procedures for "structuring overall coopera- tion" in such a crisis. In short, "we have not yet learned how to live with social change." 4587. Hallenbeck, Wilbur C. American urban communities. New York, Harper, 195 1. 617 p. 51-11920 HT123.H3 A rounded text on American urban sociology which has many quantitative illustrations but keeps them subordinate to the general exposition of the subject. It seeks to demonstrate that cities are the focal points in the dynamics of American society, and that rapid change demands a high degree of adaptability, which cities have failed to attain. Their hope lies in a more comprehensive planning, scientific and democratic in basis and purpose. "The Form and Structure of Cities," "Organized Life in Cities," and "Patterns of Urban Structure" form the major divisions of the text. 4588. Harrison, Shelby Millard. Social conditions in an American city; a summary of the find- ings of the Springfield survey. New York, Russell Sage Foundation, 1920. 439 p. 20-21201 HN80.S7S7 A condensation of one of the best-known ex- amples of the older type of social survey, that of the capital of Illinois conducted in 1914 under the direc- tion of the Department of Surveys and Exhibits, Russell Sage Foundation. Separate reports in nine fields — public schools, care of mental defectives, in- sane and alcoholics, recreation, housing, charities, industrial conditions, public health, the correctional system, and city and county administration — were published from 1914; these were eventually collected in two volumes, and with the present one as a third, published as The Springfield Survey (New York, Russell Sage Foundation, 1918-20. 3 v.). The age of the materials constitute them a suggestive guide to the spheres in which extraordinary improvement has taken place in the last four decades, and to those other spheres in which comparatively little progress can be assumed. 4589. Havighurst, Robert J., and Hugh Gerthon Morgan. The social history of a war-boom community. New York, Longmans, Green, 195 1. xix, 356 p. 51-11494 HN80.S545H3 The authors tell what happened to the people and institutions of Seneca, 111., a small town on the Illi- nois River, when it acquired a shipyard for LST vessels and saw its residents increase from 1,235 to 6,600 between 1942 and 1944. They hope thereby to study the adaptation of social institutions to rapid social change, the adaptation of people to new con- ditions of living, and the influence of a crisis on the long-time history of a community, and to record one significant bit of American life during wartime. Relations between old and new residents were kept to a minimum, temporary prosperity brought no change in the local business structure, and Seneca emerged from the war boom relatively unchanged, with the familiar basic characteristics of a mid- western rural town. 4590. Hayner, Norman S. Hotel life. Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina Press, 1936. 195 p. ) 36-754° TX911.H37 "Selected bibliography": p. [ 183]— 185. Concerned with hotel life in general, but the great majority of the examples are American. Problems of urban culture are found in an accentuated form in the hotel. Its population is an aggregation of displaced individual units. Contacts are usually anonymous and casual. "The detachment, free- dom, loneliness, and release from restraints that mark the hotel population are only to a lesser degree characteristic of modern life as a whole." 4591. Klein, Philip. A social study of Pittsburgh; community problems and services of Alle- gheny County, by Philip Klein and collaborators. New York, Published for the Social Study of Pitts- burgh and Allegheny County by Columbia Uni- versity Press, 1938. xxvi, 958 p. 38-3294 HN80.P6K5 600 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES A study made in 1934-36, under the auspices of the Citizens' Committee and financed by the Buhl Foundation of Pittsburgh, in order to render social services and agencies more effective. As the sub- title indicates, it is in two parts: the first (to page 347) describes social and economic conditions in city and county, building on the famous prior survey of 1907-8; while the second and larger investigates the state of social and health services. Their cost and support, planning and coordination, and personnel and facilities for training are studied. The services are then reviewed by type. The study made prac- tical recommendations in each sphere, some of which had been made effective by the time of publication. 4592. Lynd, Robert S., and Helen Merrell Lynd. Middletown, a study in contemporary American culture. Foreword by Clark Wissler. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1929. 550 p. 29-26177 HN57.L8 Issued also as thesis (Ph.D.) Columbia University. "The Institute of Social and Religious Research . . . financed the investigation." — Preface. 4593. Lynd, Robert S., and Helen Merrell Lynd. Middletown in transition; a study in cultural conflicts. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1937. xviii, 604 p. 37-27243 HN57.L84 The pioneer and classic "attempt to deal with a sample American community after the manner of social anthropology." A small middle western city of 35,000 population was chosen (it is now common knowledge that Middletown is Muncie, Indiana); in ten years it had increased to 50,000. The investiga- tion for the first volume was carried out in 1924-25, and that for the sequel in 1935-36. The Lynds ar- rived at a six-fold analysis of social data, the first, dominant and largely determinant of the others be- ing "Getting a Living." This was also found to be the field most subject to rapid change. The other heads are: "Making a Home," "Training the Young," "Using Leisure," "Engaging in Religious Practices," and "Engaging in Community Activi- ties." The second most obvious area of rapid change was leisure, where traditional recreations were much reduced by the automobile, cinema, and radio. Middletown in Transition reports on the effects of a decade of boom followed by depression. For the most part, these had but continued the trends clearly perceptible in 1925. The volume concludes with a reconstruction of "the Middletown Spirit" dominated by the business mentality, and a medita- tion on its ineffectiveness in grappling with the real problems of the community. 4594. Peterson, Elmer T., ed. Cities are abnormal. Norman, University of Oklahoma Press, 1946. xvi, 263 p. 46-4670 HT123.P45 Contents. — Cities are abnormal, by E. T. Peter- son. — The ecology of city and country, by P. B. Sears. — It was not always so, by W. S. Thompson. — What we are and what we may become, by P. L. Vogt. — Biological truths and public health, by Jona- than Forman. — An architect protests, by H. H. Kamphoefner. — Social man and his community, by J. J. Rhyne. — Economic verities by S. C. McConahey. — Government of the people, by H. C. Nixon. — To clear the dross, by Louis Bromfield. — A farm reporter looks ahead, by Ladd Haystead. — The atomic threat, by W. S. Thompson. — Moral and cultural aspects of decentralization, by R. L. Smith. — No blueprint for Utopia, by E. T. Peterson. From various angles and by various hands, the case for "an orderly decentralization under a diverse pattern" for America is presented. There is no vir- tue in bigness, or in efficiency when it damages the human mechanism, or in relying upon government for all positive action, or in increasing interde- pendence, which is simply "dependence multiplied by ten or ten thousand." The clinching argument is that an urban manpower surplus becomes para- sitical, while no such surplus develops on self- sufficient farms. 4595. Thorndike, Edward L. Your city. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1939. 204 p. 39-27415 HT123.T5 "Data and sources": p. 172-187. This unique book records the results of a three- year statistical study of 310 American cities. Many of the statistics used come from the census of 1930, a year of severe depression. Over a million separate items were handled in constructing a calculus for rating the general goodness of life in different cities. While the results heavily favor suburban cities such as Pasadena, Evanston, and Montclair, and equally disfavor Southern cities with their depressed Negro populations, there are yet significant differences when these classes are both excluded. "At least four- fifths of the difference of cities in goodness is caused by the personal qualities of the citizens and the amount of their incomes." 4596. Voss, Joseph Ellis. Summer resort: an eco- logical analysis of a satellite community. Philadelphia, 1941. 152 p. A4 1-4069 HN80.O3V6 Thesis (Ph. D.) — University of Pennsylvania, 1941. Bibliography: p. 140-144. Ocean City, N. J., was founded to serve as a Sum- mer Methodist Camp Meeting in 1880, went through SOCIETY / 60 1 a frenzied boom and crash during the 1920's and is now "a relatively conservative and efficient seaside re- sort community." "During the winter months, there are more than two dwellings for every indi- vidual in the community, while in the summer there are more than two persons for every room on the island." Mr. Voss studies the business of recrea- tion, "the family resort family," and the nature of government, education, and cultural relations in this hybrid urban-rural community dependent for its existence upon seasonal migrations from other communities. 4597. Waterman, Willoughby Cyrus. Prostitu- tion and its repression in New York City, 1900-1931. New York, Columbia University Press, 1932. 164 p. (Columbia University. Faculty of Political Science. Studies in history, economics and public law, no. 352) 32-18865 HQ146.N7W35 1932a H31.C7, no. 352 "Bibliography of sources quoted": p. 160-162. One of the very few objective and documented studies in this obscure field. It reviews the several measures strengthening the confusing and over- lapping laws applicable to prostitution. In survey- ing action by the police and the courts, attention is drawn to the creation of a headquarters Vice Squad in 1924, and improvements in the technique of in- vestigation. Privately organized groups, such as the Committee of Fifteen and of Fourteen, operated on public opinion throughout the period. The results are seen as a probable reduction in the overall quan- tity, the elimination of soliciting and "parlor houses," and a great shift in methods and loci. 4598. Whyte, William F. Street corner society; the social structure of an Italian slum. Enl. [2d] ed. Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1955. xxii, 366 p. . 55-5 J 5 2 HV6439.U5W5 1955 "Cornerville" in "Eastern City" has been an Italian neighborhood since 1915, and the younger generation of its "little guys" divide into corner boys, who center their social activities upon par- ticular street corners, with their adjoining barber- shops, lunchrooms, poolrooms, or clubrooms, and college boys, a small group of young men who have risen above corner-boy level through higher edu- cation. The author lived with Doc and his gang of Nortons, and with Chick and his Italian Com- munity Club, long and intimately enough to understand both groups from the inside, and he has traced the relationships of both groups to the gambling, racketeering, and the politics of the area. His appendix gives a lively picture of the investi- gator's experiences and dilemmas. 4599. Zorbaugh, Harvey Warren. Gold coast and slum; a sociological study of Chicago's Near North Side. Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1929. xv, 287 p. 29-12607 F548.5.Z89 A sociological analysis of Chicago's "Lower North Side" which presents urban contrasts, urban disintegration, and the pathology of urban life in singularly concentrated and dramatic form. In this area the physical distances and the social distances do not coincide: people who live side by side cannot become neighbors. The life of the apartment-dwell- ers of the Gold Coast is set against "the world of furnished rooms" which lies next to it. J. City Planning; Housing 4600. Abrams, Charles. The future of housing. New York, Harper, 1946. xix, 428 p. 46-8659 HD7293.A62 Bibliography: p. 415-419. A searching individual study of the housing prob- lem which finds the abuses of the home-building industry responsible for shoddy city planning, poor construction, inadequate repairs, recurrent housing shortages, and the slum problem. Neither wage increases nor shelter cost reduction will resolve the dilemma of the low-income family, which calls for public action. A detailed criticism is offered of Federal housing measures and administration, and ten aims set up for a national housing program, including a revitalized industry, urban redevelop- 431240—60 40 ment, adequate rental housing, a sound mortgage system, and stabilization of the real estate pattern. 4601. Bridenbaugh, Carl. Cities in the wilder- ness; the first century of urban life in Amer- ica, 1625-1742. [2d ed.] New York, Knopf, 1955. 500 p. 55-8593 E191.B75 1955 Bibliography: p. 483-486. 4602. Bridenbaugh, Carl. Cities in revolt; urban life in America, 1743-1776. New York, Knopf, 1955. xiii, 433, xxi p. 55-7399 E162.B85 "Bibliographical note": p. 427-^34 ]. Five representative towns — Boston, Newport, New York, Philadelphia, and Charleston — are se- 602 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES lected, and 1742 made the terminus "because in many respects it seems definitely to mark the end of an era in colonial town life." Colony records, and municipal records when available, are ransacked in order to present a detailed picture of development along four lines: physical aspects, economic life, urban problems, and social life. The author be- lieves that colonial cities, although never holding more than 10 percent of the total population, "exer- cised a far more important influence on the life of early America than historians have previously recognized." The sequel traces, through an eventful 33-year period, the "astonishing expansion" of the five cities in population and municipal services. In the same years, their inhabitants "discarded forever their 17th-century traditions and fatefully and irrevocably accepted the symbols and ways of modernity." He is not concerned to tell the story of the movement for independence, but rather to illustrate the enlight- enment of the public mind, through which "decades before independence the cities became the birthplace of American nationality." 4603. Burton, Hal. The city fights back; a nation- wide survey of what cities are doing to keep pace with traffic, zoning, shifting population, smoke, smog, and other problems. Narrated and edited by Hal Burton from material developed by the Central Business District Council of the Urban Land Insti- tute. New York, Citadel Press, 1954. 318 p. 54-9343 NA9030.B95 Bibliography: p. 313-318. The Central Business District Council of the Urban Land Institute has been organized to offer information and guidance to any community which seeks to rehabilitate its own central business district. This is one area where money and cooperation have been readily forthcoming to implement planning, and this book is able to present many successful pro- grams to eliminate congestion and decay. The prize example is Pittsburgh, where the 400 acres of the Golden Triangle "have been taken apart and put together again in the years just past." 4604. Churchill, Henry S. The city is the people. New York, Reynal & Hitchcock, 1945. 186 p. 45-6336 NA9090.C5 A condensed presentation of city development, the accumulation of urban disorder, and the case for city planning on the widest scale. America has been able to plan new towns, but has had no success in the re-planning of existing cities, for "slum clear- ance" programs disregard all collateral planning problems. Physical and economic planning have meaning only in reference to social objectives — "the end is a livable city, suited to modern technologies of living." 4605. Colean, Miles L. Renewing our cities. New York, Twentieth Century Fund, 1953. 181 p. 53-9616 NA9108.C6 A closely knit little book which organizes the problems of American city structure and planning under the concept of renewal. The essential prob- lem, of assuring a continuity of renewal, "can be solved only by devising means for preventing the ac- cumulation of worn-out-parts and avoiding stagna- tion within an otherwise dynamic urban structure." Renewal is a distinct problem, considerably larger than slum clearance, desirable as the latter may be. Current strivings toward renewal in various cities are described, and the essentials of an effective program outlined. 4606. Gallion, Arthur B. The urban pattern; city planning and design. In collaboration with Simon Eisner. New York, Van Nostrand, 1950. 446 p. 50-13672 NA9030.G26 1950 Bibliography: p. 419-433. "This book attempts a critical examination of the processes by which cities are planned and built, ap- praises some of the results, describes some of the de- fects, and poses a few suggestions . . ." The first part presents the evolution of the city pattern in western civilization, and some European innova- tions are described in the last part, but the central bulk of the book is concerned with the problems of city pattern and city planning in the United States. Hope lies in the formulation of a Master Plan, to provide a pattern for future development of each metropolitan area in the United States. A wealth of illustrations, diagrams as well as photographs, assist in understanding the factors involved. 4607. Lewis, Harold MacLean. Planning the modern city. New York, Wiley, 1949. 2 v. 49-7402 NA9030.L393 Based on The Planning of the Modern City, by Nelson P. Lewis, first published in 19 16 (New York, Wiley. 423 p.). The most comprehensive manual of planning for American cities, in which foreign instances are in- troduced when found useful. The six principal ele- ments of a city plan are identified as: (1) the trans- portation system in and out of the city; (2) the intra-urban transit system; (3) the street system; (4) park and recreation facilities; (5) the location of pub- lic buildings; (6) the pattern of land uses, effectuated primarily through comprehensive zoning. Part 5 in volume 2 considers such special problems as airports, parking, and planning for the urban region, and the SOCIETY / 603 final part is devoted to the legal, economic, and ad- ministrative aspects of physical planning. 4608. Straus, Nathan. Two-thirds of a nation; a housing program. New York, Knopf, 1952. xiii, 291, xvii p. 51-11991 HD7293.S77 Two-thirds of all the families in the United States have incomes of less than $80 a week. The hard core of the housing problem is the fact that "there is practically no new housing produced by private enterprise at a figure the average American family can afford." "In America, millions of well-paid, well-dressed families live in slums." This up-to-date discussion analyzes the elements of housing costs, criticizes FHA policies, and offers many construc- tive suggestions on the individual and the civic levels toward the reasonable goal of a comfortable home for every American family. 4609. Tunnard, Christopher, and Henry Hope Reed. American skyline; the growth and form of our cities and towns. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1955. 302 p. 55-6553 HT123.T85 The "American townscape" has at all times re- flected our people and history, and its patterns have been molded by economic, social, and political forces. The authors review this causal relationship through- out American history and distinguish seven eras of the American city pattern: colonial, to 1776; the Young Republic, to 1825; romantic, to 1850; the age of steam and iron, to 1880; the expanding city, to 1910; the city of towers, to 1933; and the re- gional city since 1933. There are numerous plans, sketches, and photographs. 4610. Twentieth Century Fund. Housing Com- mittee. American housing, problems and prospects. The factual findings by Miles L. Colean. The program by the Housing Committee. New York, The Twentieth Century Fund, 1944. xxii, 466 p. 44-4203 HD9715.U52T9 Bibliography: p. 441-455. Results of an over-all survey of the housing prob- lem in the United States, the first of its kind and still unreplaced. The survey found that while tra- ditional subdividing practices had created much waste and disorder, and while traditional forms of the house could receive simplified layout, composi- tion and structure, the crux of the problem lay elsewhere. "The disorganized and warring group of organisms known euphemistically as the building industry," and the intricate and disorganized nature of the market result in a situation where the benefits of mass production do not become available to the consumer. Government intervention has avoided basic solutions. "No halfhearted attack can clear away the traditional obstacles in the housing in- dustry." A detailed program of improvement on all fronts is suggested. 461 1. U. S. President's Advisory Committee on Government Housing Policies and Pro- grams. Recommendations on Government housing policies and programs, a report. Washington, 1953. 377 P : 53~ 6 3 2 7 2 HD7293.A587 This Committee was established by Executive Order on Sept. 12, 1953, divided its work among five subcommittees, and reported three months later. Its primary objective was to ensure "that every action taken by Government in respect to housing should be for the purpose of facilitating the operation of" a strong, free, competitive economy. The numerous specific recommendations have as their more general objectives: (1) to provide special aids to local com- munities and property owners in conserving and renewing decaying neighborhoods; (2) to maintain and improve the existing housing supply by loans for modernization or repair; (3) to encourage pri- vate building activity; (4) to facilitate the free operation of the mortgage market by creating a National Mortgage Marketing Corporation; (5) to provide housing for low-income families, especially those displaced by redevelopment programs; and (6) to improve the organization of Federal housing activities. 4612. Walker, Mabel L. Urban blight and slums; economic and legal factors in their origin, reclamation, and prevention. With special chapters by Henry Wright, Ira S. Robbins [and others] Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1938. xvi, 442 p. (Harvard city planning studies, no. 12) 38-9281 HD7293.W3 "References": p. [429] -44 2. The first major study of urban blight, the state of deterioration which attacks residential areas and leads to slums. Blighted areas are marked by high but falling land values, congested but decreasing population, obsolete and unfit housing on which improvements and repairs are no longer being made, a large proportion of abandoned buildings and rental vacancies, etc. Typical blight situations in American cities of various sizes are concretely analyzed. The writer thinks that project planning, zoning, and building regulation and taxing policies on the part of the local government can do much to help, but that the core of the problem is the creation and rationalization of a large-scale home- building industry which can produce houses which the lower-income third of the urban population can afford. 6c>4 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 4613. Woodbury, Coleman, ed. The future of cities and urban redevelopment. Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1953. xix, 764 p. 53—7679 NA9030.W64 This cooperative volume is one of the results of the Urban Redevelopment Study carried out in 1948-51 under the auspices of Public Administra- tion Clearing House and other organizations, and directed by Coleman Woodbury. Urban redevelop- ment is defined as "those policies, measures, and activities that would do away with the major forms of physical blight in cities and bring about changes in urban structure and institutions contributing to a favorable environment for a healthy civic, eco- nomic, and social life for all urban dwellers." In addition to more general materials, this volume con- tains substantial sections on the relation of urban redevelopment to industrial location, to the urbanite (including results of the Attitude Survey), and to local government organization in metropolitan areas. Mr. Woodbury warns that progress in the field calls for many more able leaders and a higher degree of community subgroup morale than are present today. A companion volume, Urban Redevelopment: Prob- lems and Practices (Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1953. 525 p.) is of a more technical nature, something of a manual for redevelopers. K. Social Problems ; Social Work 4614. Addams, Jane. Forty years at Hull-House; being "Twenty years at Hull-House" and "The second twenty years at Hull-House." With an afterword by Lillian D. Wald. New York, Mac- millan, 1935. 462, 459 p. 35-27460 HV4196.C4H73 A classic which combines autobiography, an ac- count of the establishment, operations, and growth of the largest and most famous settlement house in the United States, and the writer's concern with various reform movements, particularly feminism and pacifiism. In The Second Twenty Years, in- deed, the latter aspects have come to displace the settlement as the center of interest: Hull-House is but the seat of a woman of international fame who seeks to exert a national and an international in- fluence on behalf of her favorite causes. 4615. Andrews, Frank Emerson. Philanthropic giving. New York, Russell Sage Founda- tion, 1950. 318 p. 50-10963 HV91.A7 The large extension of government services to the less fortunate has not been paralleled by a corre- sponding decline in private giving. Philanthropic contributions fell to a low of $715,000 in 1933, but have since climbed steadily, reaching a record figure of over 4 billions in 1948. The present volume is the result of an extensive fact-finding inquiry and presents tabular and other information concerning the sources and the destination of these vast sums. Special attention is given to fund-raising enterprises, religious agencies, education and the arts, the financing of research, and the effect of tax laws. Practical advice is given in chapters on avoiding charity rackets, and on the interrelations of recipient and donor. 4616. Andrews, Frank Emerson. Corporation giving. New York, Russell Sage Founda- tion, 1952. 361 p. 52-11787 HV95.A76 Corporation giving is a new factor in American philanthropy, having risen to its recent level of more than 200 million dollars only in 1944. The motives are various, but that of tax savings is only one among many, while the corporation's sense of duty to its community is most frequently avowed. While only 5 percent of total philanthropic giving, corporation giving is "actually a very significant factor, and sometimes the chief reliance, in the areas in which corporations are accustomed to give." On a survey of 326 foundations, it was found that 44.3 percent of their gifts were to welfare agencies, 26.6 percent to health agencies, and 21.2 percent to education. A new development is the corporation foundation, nine of which were found in the survey sample. 4617. Barnes, Harry Elmer. Society in transition. 2d ed. New York, Prentice-Hall, 1952. 878 p. 52-7578 HN15.B23 1952 A textbook which surveys American social prob- lems within the frame of reference of "cultural lag," i. e., it regularly assumes that institutional develop- ment has fallen behind technological, and that whole- sale remodeling of social forms and habits is both possible and desirable. The author states that he has provided "the most complete survey of important social problems to be found in any book in the field," as well as "illuminating historical perspectives on each" of them. In a single volume he has assembled a very large body of facts and representative opinions in such problem areas as population, immi- gration, race contacts, health, marriage, housing, poverty, mental disease, and crime. SOCIETY / 605 4618. Bruno, Frank J. Trends in social work as reflected in the Proceedings of the National Conference of Social Work, 1 874-1 946. New York, Columbia University Press, 1948. xvi, 387 p. 48-2295 HV91.B75 In 1874 a handful of public charity officials from four states met in New York and organized the Na- tional Conference of Social Work; it has since grown to a body of 7,000 members. The original concerns were dependency, mental disease, delinquency, and problems of health; these have been widened to in- clude the whole field of the public and private social services. The emergence of new issues and the shifting of points of view are seen clearly in the sub- jects before the Conference, as it turns to the protec- tion of children, the organization of charity, or the problem of transiency, and the whole serves as a mirror of practical social thinking in the United States over a 75-year period. 4619. Cuber, John F., Robert A. Harper, and Wil- liam F. Kenkel. Problems of American so- ciety: values in conflict. 3d ed. New York, Holt, 1956. 510 p. 56-6080 HN57.C8 1956 Among the many college textbooks on American social problems, this one is unique in that it adopts a clear-cut frame of reference, and employs it with much consistency throughout. The authors adopt the principle which they attribute to the late Richard C. Fuller, "that social problems arise in a society because ends, objectives, or values fostered by various persons and groups run at cross-purposes." The sociologist thereby adopts the role of interpreter of values rather than that of value advocate. The op- posing values leading to opposing attitudes are iden- tified in 17 major fields, including mental health, crime, adolescence, social class, race, populations, etc. The authors question the value of the concept of social disorganization as currendy used by sociolo- gists, it being a value-judgment applied to social change. Inasmuch as the authors regularly approve "rational" as against traditional ("extra-logical") values, their attitudes are seldom as neutral as they imply. 4620. Dulles, Foster Rhea. The American Red Cross, a history. New York, Harper, 1950. 554 P- 50-8717 HV577.D8 "Bibliographical notes": p. 540-543. The new emphasis of the armed forces on cur- rent history led to the establishment of a Historical Division by the American Red Cross, and the pro- duction of a series of monographs available at its national headquarters. This work digests these monographs into a unitary history for the general reader, with special emphasis on the period since 1939. In origin an international organization for war relief, the American Red Cross has always been distinctive for the equal emphasis on relief of do- mestic disasters on a large scale. Notwithstanding its humanitarian purpose, the American Red Cross has had a somewhat stormy and controversial career, which aspect is not slighted here. 4621. Fink, Arthur E., Everett E. Wilson, and Merrill B. Conover. The field of social work. New York, Holt, 1955. 630 p. 55-6052 HV40.F5 1955 A comprehensive introduction to the subject. The first two chapters dispose of public welfare and social security, and the third presents a history of the private and voluntary agencies which engage in social work. The bulk of the book considers the major categories of social work: family social work, welfare services for children, school, psychiatric and medical social work, the correctional services, and social group work. Most of these chapters have spe- cially contributed case histories appended. Con- cluding chapters deal with methods of organizing communities for all-round service, and with social work as a profession with its own standards, organi- zations, training, and literature. 4622. Fosdick, Raymond B. The story of the Rockefeller Foundation. New York, Har- per, 1952. 336 p. 51-11913 HV97.R6F6 The president of the Foundation from 1936 to 1948 summarizes its principles and achievements in a history intended for laymen. Emphasis is placed on the role of Frederick T. Gates, the former Bap- tist Minister who served as the elder Rockefeller's adviser in philanthropy from 1892. A national char- ter was sought for the Foundation in 191 o, but a storm of obloquy broke out, and a New York incorporation was substituted in 1913. The four associated trusts spent nearly $822,000,000 through 1950. During the first 15 years public health and medical education were chiefly cultivated, but since 1928 a multitude of projects in the natural sciences, agriculture, social science, and the humanities have been subsidized. The personal philanthropies of the younger Rockefeller, which reflect an extraor- dinary range of cultivated interests in the spheres of art, archaeology, city development, education, and libraries, are modesdy but effectively described in Mr. Fosdick 's John D. Rockefeller, Jr., A Portrait (New York, Harper, 1956. 477 p.). 4623. Glenn, John M., Lilian Brandt, and F. Emerson Andrews. Russell Sage Founda- tion, 1907-1946. New York, Russell Sage Founda- tion. 1947. 2 v. 47-12385 HV97.R8G55 606 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Early in 1907 Mrs. Margaret Olivia Sage estab- lished the Russell Sage Foundation with a capital of $10,000,000, the income to be applied "to the im- provement of social and living conditions in the United States." Its first Director, John M. Glenn (1907-31), took a part largely advisory and super- visory in the preparation of these volumes. Dur- ing its first 41 years covered here, the Foundation spent $21,000,000, $9,000,000 in grants and $12,- 000,000 in research and other direct work of its own. The narrative covers the administrative development of the Foundation, and its activities at various pe- riods in such realms as recreation, child hygiene, charity organization, remedial loans, industrial studies, etc. Appendixes list all grants and all but minor publications. The result is a detailed picture of one of the most intelligently conducted and suc- cessful foundations for social purposes. 4624. Kennedy, Albert J., and others. Social set- tlements in New York City, their activities, policies, and administration, by Albert J. Kennedy, Kathryn Farra and associates. New York, Pub- lished for the Welfare Council of New York City by Columbia University Press, 1935. xix, 599 p. (Studies of the Research Bureau of the Welfare Council, no. 2) 35-3613 HV4196.N6K4 A survey begun in the winter of 1927-28 by the Research Bureau of the Welfare Council of New York City at the request of United Neighborhood Houses. It covers the 80 settlements which existed at the outset, although the number had been reduced to 73 by the time of publication. Of these 2 were in the Bronx, 15 in Brooklyn, and 63 in Manhattan, especially on the Lower East Side. Chapters by sev- eral hands cover types such as boys' or women's clubs, functions such as music or the teaching of English and citizenship, publications, membership, and administration. Considerably the most de- tailed body of information on this special form of social work. 4625. Merrill, Francis E. Social problems on the home front, a study of war-time influences. New York, Harper, 1948. 258 p. 48-1366 HN57.M37 "Sponsored by the Committee on War Studies of the Social Science Research Council." A study, based on stadstics whenever available, "of the role of World War II in initiating, intensi- fying, or modifying certain social problems in the United States." It is not found to be true that war merely intensifies the maladjustments of peacetime society; in bringing about virtually full employment and a high collective morale, the War had many unanticipated positive consequences, such as the rise in the marriage and birth rates, the decline in the number of suicides, and the decrease in prostitution. Social problems might be transformed: "Never be- fore were so many American families broken for so long," leading to modifications in family roles not easily assessed. "World War II had a differential effect upon social problems, intensifying some, al- leviating others, and creating still others in a society made more dynamic by the pressures of total war." 4626. Watson, Frank Dekker. The charity or- ganization movement in the United States, a study in American philanthropy. New York, Macmillan, 1922. 560 p. 22-25386 HV91.W38 Thesis (Ph. D.) — University of Pennsylvania, 1911. "Selected bibliography": p. 543-553. Charitable societies were formed in the cities dur- ing the second half of the 18th century, and one of modern type, the New York Society for the Preven- tion of Pauperism, appeared in 18 17. The panic of 1873 and the prolonged depression that followed revealed unemployment as a national problem, and demonstrated that the simple old ways of helping the needy were almost incredibly wasteful and in- efficient. Organizational experiments were made in Germantown and Boston, but the Buffalo Charity Organization Society launched at the end of 1877 was the first to achieve city-wide integration, and was widely copied. In 1905 came the Field De- partment of the Charity Organization Society of New York City, followed four years later by the Charity Organization Department of the Russell Sage Foundation, which offered technical guidance and training to all local societies. 4627. Weaver, William Wallace. Social problems. New York, Sloane, 1951. 791 p. 51-12929 HN15.W4 A textbook for college courses which gives less emphasis "to theoretical or systematic treatment of problem situations in general," but concentrates on the problems themselves in their American settings. These are grouped under the headings of personal crises (mental disorders, alcoholism, prostitution, etc.), family discord (including illegitimacy), group tensions, and insecurity (unemployment, old age, war, etc.). The conclusion on public policy is grave in oudook; in addition to the old obstacles to progress, the parsimony of nature, the limitations of human endowment, and cultural inertia, there are now world ferment and the insatible demands of modern war. SOCIETY / 607 L. Dependency; Social Security 4628. Best, Harry. Blindness and the blind in the United States. New York, Macmillan, 1934. xxii, 714 p. _ 34-1429 HV1795.B4 1934 "The present work is a revision and expansion of The Blind: Their Condition and the Wor\ Being Done for Them in the United States [1919]." — Foreword. A complete treatise on this class of the handi- capped, with abundant statistical tables. It covers the causes of blindness and the possibilities of pre- venting it; the general condition of the blind as to numbers (about 100,000 in 1930), education, eco- nomic condition, and legal treatment; the provision of education for blind children; intellectual and material provision for the adult blind; and interested organizations. For all his objective data, the author believes that "there is no such thing as a 'problem of the blind;' there are as many problems as there are blind persons to be dealt with." 4629. Best, Harry. Deafness and the deaf in the United States, considered primarily in rela- tion to those sometimes more or less erroneously known as "deaf-mutes." New York, Macmillan, 1943. xix, 675 p. 43~ I 7?57 HV2545.B42 1943 "A revision and expansion of The Deaf: Their Position in Society and the Provision for Their Edu- cation in the United States, published in 1914." — Foreword. The distinction in the subtide is made because a large proportion of the deaf can be taught more or less perfect articulation. The book is a treatise as comprehensive as its author's work on the blind. It deals with the nature and causes of deafness, the possibilities of its prevention, and the separate prob- lem of the hard of hearing. The numbers of the deaf (57,000 in 1930) and their economic condi- tion and legal treatment are described. Organiza- tions for and of the deaf are inventoried. The education of deaf children is studied at length, with chapters on the history and methods of such training. 4630. Brown, Josephine Chapin. Public relief, 1 929-1 939. New York, Holt, 1940. xvii, 524 p. 40-34168 HV9I.B7 Bibliography: p. 477-511. As a result of the depression of 1929, "a system of local poor relief which had remained practically un- changed for a century and a half was superseded not only by new methods but by a new philosophy of governmental responsibility for people in need." This work, based largely on Government docu- ments, reviews the old methods prevailing in 1929, their makeshift extension followed by complete breakdown in the years 1929-33, and their replace- ment by the vast administrative machinery of the Federal Emergency Relief Administration and, after 1935, the Works Progress Administration. 4631. Burns, Eveline M. The American social security system. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1949. xviii, 460 p. 49-5180 HD7125.B86 The Social security act amend- ments of 1950, an appendix. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1951. 447-481 p. HD7125.B86 Appx. A treatise concerned primarily with income security programs, which aim to assure a certain minimum of income to some or all, especially through cash payments. The Social Security Act of 1935, as amended in 1939, 1946, and 1950 (these last changes are described in the separately published Appendix) leaves much to local regulation, and ex- cludes three programs created by separate federal laws: Railroad Retirement, Railroad Unemploy- ment Insurance, and Veterans' Security. The treat- ment throughout is analytical, by type of insurance or beneficiary. The conclusion is concerned with suggestions toward a rational system; one has by no means been achieved as yet. 4632. Creech, Margaret. Three centuries of poor law administration; a study of legislation in Rhode Island. Introductory note by Edith Abbott. Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1936. xxii, 331 p. (Social service monographs, no. 24) 36-1 15 1 1 HV75.R43C7 1936 Issued also as thesis (Ph. D.) University of Chicago. Appendixes: 1. List of laws of Rhode Island relat- ing to the poor. — 2. List of judicial decisions under the poor law. — 3. Select documents relating to the history of poor relief in the colonial period and the late eighteenth century. — 4. Thirteen case histories, 1 644-1 724. — 5. Select documents relating to the his- tory of poor relief in the modern period. Chronologically the most extensive review of State action in alleviation of poverty and dependency. Rhode Island early took over the Elizabethan poor law and provided for the appointment of overseers of the poor. A major factor from the beginning was 608 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES the efforts of towns to prevent the settlement of per- sons who might become dependents, continued in later times by the enforcement of rigid residential requirements. As late as 1936 there remained "a poor law with general principles unchanged, ad- ministered by governmental units a few miles in area, with limited taxing power and without pro- visions for skilled service or for uniformity of standards." 4633. Gagliardo, Domenico. American social in- surance. Rev. ed. New York, Harper, 1955. 672 p. 55-6775 HD7125.G34 1955 Aims to give a reasonably full-length picture of the American social insurance movement, complex and undergoing change as it is. Describes what we have, how we got it, and what the results have been, in four major fields: old age, unemployment, occu- pational disability, and health. Imperfections in the system as it has evolved are pointed out. The au- thor, a professor of economics at the University of Kansas, includes 72 statistical tables. 4634. Gillin, John Lewis. Poverty and depend- ency; their relief and prevention. 3d ed. New York, Appleton-Century, 1937. 755 p. 37-2328 HV31.G4 1937 Bibliography: p. 679-735. Remains the most systematic general treatment of these related problems, which signify "lack of ad- justment between the people composing a popula- tion and the economic and social circumstances in which they live." The enormous extent and expense of the problems are estimated. The conditions, physical and socio-economic, are analyzed and pro- nounced removable. A historical section traces the institutions and methods of dealing with dependents, including Old World antecedents of American practices. The classes of dependents, from the aged to the unemployed, are separately considered. Finally, preventive agencies and methods are de- scribed, and a generally melioristic viewpoint and program outlined. 4635. Industrial Relations Research Association. The aged and society. Ed.: Milton Derber. Champaign, 111., 1950. 237 p. (Its Publication no. 5) 51-1473 HQ1060.I455 "The United States is experiencing the impact of greater life expectancies more than any other na- tion, for the typical life span of its population is the longest ... If greater length of life, so avidly de- sired by the individual, is not to become a curse to society, effective accommodations must be made to it." The fifteen papers in this "research sympo- sium" are concerned with the statistical bases of the problem, the older worker in industry, security in old age, and a variety of problems of psychology and adjustment, such as "The Politics of Age." 4636. Irwin, Robert B. As I saw it. New York, American Foundation for the Blind, 1955. 205 p. 55-2408 HV1792.I7A3 Dr. Irwin (1 883-1 951) lost his sight at the age of five, but went on to complete his education at Wash- ington and Harvard Universities, and devoted his life to bettering the condition of all handicapped like himself. After his retirement as director of the American Foundation for the Blind in 1949, he planned a history of work for the blind to be called Fifty Years of Progress. The portions completed at the time of his death are published in this hand- some memorial volume, and include concise ac- counts of such developments as libraries for the blind, the talking book, braille periodicals, and the American Foundation for the Blind. Of special interest, from the pen of this indomitably inde- pendent man, are "Earning a Living without Bene- fit of Sight" and "The Importance of Power to Move about at Will," an appreciation of the "seeing eye" dogs. 4637. Kessler, Henry H. Rehabilitation of the physically handicapped. Rev. t i. e. 2d] ed. New York, Columbia University Press, 1953. 275 p. 53-10047 HV3011.K42 1953 Rehabilitation, originally identified with the needs of the war disabled, has been extended to the larger requirements of the civilian, and has evolved from the idea of isolated and fragmentary assistance to "the modern concept of integrated and continuous service." The author, who has served in rehabilita- tion work since 19 19, reviews the types of disability, defines the principles of rehabilitation, including vocational guidance and training and selective placement, summarizes recent legislation, and out- lines a national program. The bibliography which appeared on p. [253J-26i of the first edition (1947) has been replaced in the second with a directory of "Major Centers and Agencies for the Handicapped" (p. [253]-258). A somewhat more journalistic ap- proach to the subject will be found in the work of two medical men attached to The New Yort^ Times: Howard A. Rusk and Eugene J. Taylor, New Hope for the Handicapped (New York, Harper, 1949. 231 p.). 4638. Riis, Jacob A. How the other half lives; studies among the tenements of New York. With illustrations chiefly from photographs taken by the author. New York, Scribner, 1890. xv, 304 p. 4-11775 HV4046.N6R55 A classic of social reporting, which so effectively thrust under genteel American noses the state of the SOCIETY / 609 tenements and the slum-dwellers of lower Manhat- tan that the issue could no longer be ignored. The human squalor and degradation which were the consequences of over half a century of unregulated industrialism, hitherto noted in statistical reports and official documents, were now set forth in vivid human terms. Several sequels from Riis' pen fol- lowed this: The Children of the Poor (1892), The Battle with the Slum (1902), and Children of the Tenements (1903). M. Delinquency and Correction 4639. Barnes, Harry Elmer, and Negley K. Tee- ters. New horizons in criminology. 2d ed. New York, Prentice-Hall, 1951. 887 p. 51-14541 HV6025.B3 1951 A comprehensive and detailed textbook in crimi- nology and penology which the authors describe as "an exercise in informed crusading for a more ra- tional, humane, and effective handling of the whole problem of crime." A section on factors favorable to criminality opens with a disclaimer of dogma- tism: the most unfavorable conditions will not in- evitably drive a given person to crime, or the most favorable ones absolutely insure him against it. Capital punishment is pronounced a barbarous sur- vival, and the cruelty and futility of the modern prison developed at length. The new edition em- phasizes the "revolution in crime" during the war decade: the development and political infiltrations of syndicated gambling and criminality, and the growth of rural and juvenile crime. Against this may be set progress in rehabilitative treatment inside and out of institutions. 4640. Bates, Sanford. Prisons and beyond. New York, Macmillan, 1936. 334 p. 36-32878 HV8665.B33 The author, after heading the Massachusetts De- partment of Correction for nine years, became the first chief of the new Federal Bureau of Prisons. He takes the average American county jail to be the antithesis of everything desirable in a reforma- tory institution. He argues that we can improve our prisons, with new and more adequate buildings, decent living conditions, improved diet, better qualified guards, and educational facilities, and yet deter the potential criminal. An adequate sys- tem must be "built around the concept that all its prisoners must be returned to society, and that society is not protected unless they are returned more efficient, more honest, and less criminal than when they went in." 4641. Clemmer, Donald. The prison community. Boston, Christopher Pub. House, 1940. 341 p. 40-14007 HV9466.C55 The result of a study of the inner life of a prison containing 2300 inmates carried out in 1931-34 by a sociologist of the Illinois Department of Public Welfare. He presents it as "the 'Middletown' of American prisons," with observations on social re- lations, social groups, leadership, leisure time, the sexual pattern, prison labor, etc. 4642. Deutsch, Albert. The trouble with cops. New York, Crown Publishers, 1955. 243 p. 55-7239 HV8138.D4 Mr. Deutsch is an experienced social scientist who from time to time undertakes journalistic in- quiries into specific problems, which he handles forcefully but not sensationally. The present vol- ume was expanded from a series of articles in Collier's and deals with the "police crisis" of 1952-54 evidenced in a nation-wide series of front-page scandals brought to light in one metropolitan force after another. There is much here concerning par- ticipation in rackets, brutality and other illegal treatment of suspects, blackmail and "entrapment" by vice squad members, and other prevalent abuses. The basic cause is found in the fact that "the gen- erality of America's 200,000 local police officers remain undertrained, underpaid, unappreciated, with meager chances for advancement." The de- velopment of training, standards, and incentives that will turn the "flatfoot" into a professional require a wiser attitude toward police problems on the part of our urban democracies. 4643. Dressier, David. Probation and parole. New York, Columbia University Press, 1951. 237 p. 51-10476 HV9278.D73 A director of the New York State Division of Parole seeks to articulate a rationale of probation and parole, and to provide in one volume a full- length statement on the philosophy, administration, and processes of each. He defines them as services designed to benefit society and the maladjusted individual in society, which must be recognized as casework functions with a law-enforcement orienta- tion and responsibility. The first and crucial factor is selection, which, if poorly done, can render all 6lO / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES subsequent supervision and treatment ineffectual. Mr. Dressier has provided anecdotes and lessons from his own professional career in his Parole Chief (New York, Viking Press, 195 1. 310 p.). 4644. Ellingston, John R. Protecting our children from criminal careers. New York, Prentice- Hall, 1948. 374 p. 48-3450 HV9069.E56 During 1938-40 the American Law Institute car- ried out the task of redesigning the pattern for the administration of criminal justice for youth, arriving at a model Youth Correction Authority Act. In 1 94 1 California set up its Youth Authority on this basis, and after six years was imitated by Minnesota, Wisconsin, and Massachusetts. Mr. Ellingston's book is a vigorous denunciation of traditional methods; jails, state schools, reformatories, and prisons are so many schools for crime and depravity. The schools and camps of the California Authority are praised as breaking the stagnant pattern of children's institutions. The State Authority is seen as a lever for effecting the reform of delinquency control at the community level. 4645. Glueck, Sheldon. Crime and justice. Cam- bridge, Mass., Harvard University Press, 1945- 349 P- . A 45-444 2 HV8665.G55 1945 "Based on eight lectures delivered to a lay audi- ence at the Lowell Institute, Boston, in the spring of 1935." — Pref. A comprehensive diagnosis of the entire American system of criminal justice, whose ills primary result from the fact that "society is attempting to enforce the laws and to control crime with instruments largely outworn." One major improvement could be effected by drafting "a more realistic criminal code to replace the existing tangle of legislative and judge-made law." There is also needed a unified, centrally directed system of justice, administered by a Department of Justice within each state. No re- form can become effective unless there is a greatly improved personnel of well-trained officials devoted to the public weal. Furthermore, "far-reaching and deep-probing attacks are necessary along the entire front of social pathology," but especially in the realm of family disintegration. 4646. Glueck, Sheldon, and Eleanor T. Glueck. 500 criminal careers. New York, Knopf, 1930. xxvii, 365, xvi p. 30-2673 HV6793.M4G5 4647. Glueck, Sheldon, and Eleanor T. Glueck. Later criminal careers. New York, The Commonwealth Fund, 1937. 403 p. 37-11838 HV6793.M4G52 4648. Glueck, Sheldon, and Eleanor T. Glueck. Criminal careers in retrospect. New York, The Commonwealth Fund, 1943. 380 p. (Har- vard Law School studies in criminology) 43-17001 HV6783.G5 These three volumes study the life histories of the 510 prisoners released from the Massachusetts Re- formatory whose sentences expired in 1921 and 1922, and follow them up at 5, 10, and 15 years after the original release. The first volume provides back- ground material on the reformatory movement and the Massachusetts reformatory and parole system. The second studies recidivism among the 454 sur- vivors and suggests that maturation is the underly- ing influence in reform. The third considers the response of offenders to peno-correctional treatment and explores the possibilities of predicting individual behavior. 4649. Glueck, Sheldon, and Eleanor T. Glueck. Five hundred delinquent women. With an introd. by Roscoe Pound. New York, Knopf, 1934. xxiv, 539 p. 34-34029 HV6046.G6 An investigation of 500 cases whose paroles from the Massachusetts Reformatory for Women at Fram- ingham expired between 1921 and 1924. It was undertaken at the instance of Mrs. Jessie S. Hodder, superintendent of the Reformatory for some two decades, who introduced many reforms and desired some evaluation of her years of effort. The authors offer eleven case-histories in detail and proceed to an analysis of pre-commitment data concerning family background, childhood and adolescence, sexual and marital life, and legal entanglements. The regime of the Reformatory and the circum- stances of parole and of behavior after release are examined. The methodology of the study is fully set forth in Appendix A. The whole remains con- siderably the largest body of concrete information concerning women offenders in the United States. 4650. Glueck, Sheldon, and Eleanor Glueck. Un- raveling juvenile delinquency. New York, Commonwealth Fund, 1950. xv, 399 p. (Harvard Law School studies in criminology) 50-10259 HV9069.G55 4651. Glueck, Sheldon and Eleanor Glueck. De- linquents in the making; paths to prevention. New York, Harper, 1952. 214 p. 51-11917 HV9069.G552 Of this pair of publications the first is a full sta- tistical and methodological account, and the second a summary of results for the general public, of a major ten-year study. A group of 500 delinquent boys were elaborately compared with a group of 500 non-delinquent boys, so chosen that matching in pairs could be carried out. As a group, the delin- quents proved to be "mesomorphic" in physique, SOCIETY / 6ll energetic and aggressive in temperament, hostile and suspicious in attitude, concrete and unmethodical in intellect, and reared in homes of little affection or stability. The authors have worked out a series of prognostic tables offered as usable at the point of school entrance. 4652. Hamilton, Charles, e d. Men of the under- world; the professional criminals' own story. New York, Macmillan, 1952. 336 p. 52-4275 HV6785.H3 There is a surprisingly large literature of personal narratives by American criminals of one kind or another, produced with varying degrees of assist- ance from another party or parties. This anthology gives a fair sampling, with sections on the "under- world," racketeering, prison life, and the road back from prison. Unfortunately the editor's commen- tary is journalistic in tone and his extracts are un- accompanied by proper dates and citations. How- ever, his sources are listed in his bibliography (p. 327-330). 4653. Lewis, Orlando F. The development of American prisons and prison customs, 1776- 1845, with special reference to early institutions in the State of New York. [Albany?] Prison Asso- ciation of New York [1922] 350 p. 23-5484 HV9466.L4 Bibliography: p. 347-350. 4654. McKelvey, Blake. American prisons; a study in American social history prior to 1915. Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1936. xiv, 242 p. (University of Chicago. School of Social Service Administration. Social service series) 37-1625 HV9466.M3 "Bibliographical note" at end of each chapter. Mr. Lewis went minutely through contemporary sources, especially state documents, in order to pre- sent a detailed picture of prisons and imprisonment during the first seven decades of the Republic. It is, of course, largely a record of horrors. Dr. McKel- vey, building on Lewis' presentation of "the insti- tutional side," is chiefly concerned with new theories of penology and movements of reform based upon them. He pauses, however, to review "the state of prisons in the nineties." The two works, taken together, provide a fairly rounded history of Ameri- can penological development down to World War I. 4655. Smith, Bruce. Police systems in the United States. Rev. and enl. New York, Harper, 1949- 35i P- 49-4 8 594 HV8138.S58 1949 There are about 40,000 separate and distinct public police agencies in the United States, and the coordi- nation of these into a united and effective front against crime is a complex business. This treatise, noteworthy for taking into account the varying view- points of the professional police officer, the civilian administrator, and the general public, places these systems against the two major problems of crime and traffic, and then discusses the systems by cate- gory: federal agencies, state forces, city police, etc. Separate chapters are given to State-Federal relation- ships, police control and leadership, principles and types of organization, and the central services de- veloped since 1893 by the International Association of Chiefs of Police. 4656. Tannenbaum, Frank. Crime and the com- munity. Boston, Ginn, 1938. 487 p. 38-13156 HV6025.T3 Bibliography at end of each chapter except chapter 20. A thoroughly social interpretation of crime in the United States which rejects all single-factor theories. "American criminal activity has persisted because it was called into being and perpetuated by those com- plex and overlapping social strains which have char- acterized the growth and development of American life. Not until the American community changes profoundly will the character and the amount of crime in it also change." Among the chapters in which criminal behavior is very realistically fitted into its social setting are "Education for Crime," "Organized Crime," "Politics and Crime," "Politics and Police," and "The Philosophy of the Professional Criminal." The two concluding parts of the book present well-documented and strongly critical ac- counts of the administration of criminal justice, and of "Punitive Processes." 4657. Teeters, Negley K., and John Otto Reine- mann. The challenge of delinquency; causa- tion, treatment, and prevention of juvenile delinquency. New York, Prentice-Hall, 1950. 819 p. 50-12402 HV9069.T375 Bibliography: p. [739H83. A professor of sociology and the probation of- ficer of a Philadelphia court unite to produce a college text which presents the history of its subject, an appraisal of theories of causation, and a descrip- tion and evaluation of the existing social machinery. No single theory of causation is found to be satis- factory; a "multiple causation" theory is considerably more cautious, although no given set of unfavorable conditions will necessarily produce delinquency, or their opposites necessarily prevent it. Under "Con- trol and Treatment," juvenile courts, probation, and various types of commitment are described. The final section discusses community programs of pre- vention, and an appendix presents 15 case histories. 6l2 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 4658. Thrasher, Frederic M. The gang; a study of 1,313 gangs in Chicago. 2d rev. ed. Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1936. xxi, 605 p. 36-35233 HV6439.U7C4 1936 "Selected bibliography": p. 554-580. The gang has grown considerably more lethal in the past two decades, but Dr. Thrasher's study of Chicago gangs carried out in the early 1920's re- mains the most thorough study of a regular urban phenomenon. The gang, a symptom of disorgani- zation in the larger social framework, offers a sub- stitute for what society fails to give, and provides relief from suppression and distasteful behavior. Various aspects of gang life such as its playgrounds, "junking," gang warfare, and sex, are illustrated. Gang structure, action, and leadership are analyzed, and the gang is considered in its relation to organ- ized crime and to politics. 4659. Vollmer, August. The police and modern society. Berkeley, University of California Press, 1936. 253 p. (Publications of the Bureau of Public Administration, University of California) 36-27477 HV8138.V65 Bibliography: p. 238-241. A review of police problems "as the policeman on patrol daily encounters them," by the long-time Chief of Police of Berkeley, Calif., also a distin- guished criminologist. These problems are con- sidered in four main groups: major crimes, vice, traffic, and general service. There is much room for improvement in the realm of personnel; by improved standards of selection and training, "police work can attain the full dignity of a profession." The author believes that our services have traveled as far toward crime control as they have been per- mitted to; but "the police are undermined, de- moralized, and unsupported by the very public that they are paid to protect." 4660. Wilson, Orlando W. Police administration. New York, McGraw-Hill, 1950. 540 p. 50-12455 HV7935.W48 A substantial textbook by the dean of the School of Criminology at the University of California, writ- ten for the critical student of police problems. It analyzes the organization structure, administrative practices, and operating procedures of police forces in this country. In view of widely divergent police patterns, it describes what the author regards as superior practices in all branches and at all levels of police service — "we do not progress so long as we sit on the fence." There are sections on patrol, traffic, records, buildings and equipment, person- nel, discipline, and public relations. An "admin- istrative check list" of 300 questions provides a ready-made inquiry into the efficiency of any police department (p. 513-528). XVI Communications ii A. The Post Office; Express Companies 4661-4671 B. Telegraph, Cable, Telephone 4672-4681 C. Radio, Television: Broadcasting 4682-4698 D. Radio, Television: The Audience 4699-4705 E. Government Regulation 4706-471 1 ¥ IN THIS chapter books have been selected which tell the story of telecommunication in the United States as various media have successively emerged to influence the economic, social, and intellectual development of the Nation. The expansion of the postal system from an inter- colonial service on the eastern seaboard into a medium for transcontinental communication followed the westward migration of settlers, and with the help of the short-lived Pony Express dispelled the notion of the Rocky Mountains and the deserts as impassable barriers between the two sections of the country. By the middle of the 19th century the postal service was rivaled by the growing network of telegraph wires, which in the two decades before 1852 reached 23,283 miles, and the merchant, banker, journalist, and men of other callings had discovered the value of the telegraph in their business ventures. Invented by Alexander Graham Bell, the telephone emerged as a big indus- try during the last quarter of the 19th century, as a potent modifier of everyday habits, and as an instru- ment of industrial and social expansion. In spite of the influence of these media of com- munication, there is a scarcity of literature, suitable for this bibliography, on the Post Office, the Express Companies, and the Telegraph, Cable, and Tele- phone (Sections A and B). This is by no means the case with the more recent arrivals, Radio and Tele- vision (Sections C and D). In the first two sections the items listed represent most of the historical litera- ture available in book form on those subjects, while the items in Sections C and D are merely typical of a much larger body of literature that reflects the de- velopment of broadcasting. Books have been selected for their illustration of the profound effect that both of these agencies of mass communication are exerting on the social, educational, and moral qualities of their audiences. Because of the rapid development of radio and television into time- consuming, ubiquitous influences in American life, as well as into big industries with associated careers, a few production handbooks that will probably be of interest to others as well as those who may consider such careers, have been included. The omission of any title is not to be considered as criticism, but may mean only that the selection had to be limited in order to maintain proportion and balance. A. The Post Office ; Express Companies 4661. Chapman, Arthur. The Pony Express; the record of a romantic adventure in business; illustrated with contemporary prints and photo- graphs. New York, Putnam, 1932. 319 p. 32-9124 HE6375.C4 Bibliography: p. 311-314. The Pony Express was a by-product of the con- troversy between the proponents of the southern and central routes for the overland mail to California. It was inaugurated on April 3, i860, by William H. Russell of the freighting firm of Russell, Majors and Waddell, to demonstrate the practicability of the central route for year-round travel. Only one trip was missed in its 18 months of weekly and semi- 613 614 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES weekly service. The excessive cost of operation, the failure to obtain an enlarged mail contract, and the joining of the telegraph lines from the East and West in October 1861 brought the Pony Express to an end. The writer, a newspaper reporter, maga- zine editor, and author of other books on the West, concludes that the Pony Express contributed to the development of the West by speeding up the news service to and from the Pacific, disproving the theory that the Rocky Mountains formed an impassable barrier in winter, and minimizing the terror of the desert. 4662. Chu, Pao Hsun. The Post Office of the United States. 2d ed. New York, 1932. 148 p. 33-29 6 5 HE6371.C55 1929 Thesis (Ph. D.) — Columbia University, 1929. Bibliography: p. 139-148. The footnote references and bibliography indicate the scholarly nature of this history of the Post Office. The author, a Chinese student who came to the United States on a government scholarship, regards the Post Office as an agency for the collection and dissemination of human thought and thereby one of the active contributors to the speed and solidarity that mark the growth of civilization. He traces the development of the English postal system as the forerunner of the American, the emergence of the modern Post Office in the 17th century, the origin of the Federal postal monopoly, and the reforms which have fundamentally changed the theory and practice of postal finance. 4663. Cushing, Marshall H. The story of our Post Office; the greatest Government department in all its phases. Boston, A. M. Thayer, 1893. 1034 p. 9-16667 HE6371.C98 The author utilized his experience as a journalist, congressional secretary, and private secretary to Post- master General John Wanamaker to give a detailed account of the complicated machinery that underlay the business of the Post Office Department. A de- scription of the buildings occupied by the Depart- ment, the duties of the Postmaster General, the various functions of his assistants, the publications of the Department, the establishment of routes and of- fices, the equipment, pay and work of clerks, money orders and supplies, free delivery, the Dead Letter Office, inspectors and smuggling, brief biographies of postmasters and other personalities as well as statistics and anecdotes have their places in this vivid picture of the Post Office as it was in the last decade of the 19th century. 4664. Fowler, Dorothy (Ganfield) The Cabinet politician; the Postmasters General, 1829- 1909. New York, Columbia University Press, 1943. 344 p. 43-10238 HE6499.F6 Manuscripts: p. [309]-3ii. Bibliography: p. [3I3J-323- The Postmaster General became a Cabinet officer in 1829. During the next 80 years the tradition was established whereby "this Cabinet position has been given to the foremost politican of the Party. He has usually been the manager of the new President's campaign for the nomination and election and has frequently been the chairman of the national com- mittee, for the Presidential nominee has, since 1896, selected that officer." Mrs. Fowler describes the Post Office as an agency of political patronage and reviews the political activities of its heads from Wil- liam T. Barry to George von Lengerke Meyer. 4665. Geddes, Virgil. Country postmaster. New York, Austin-Phelps, 1952. 230 p. 52-12228 HE6385.G4A3 This book by a litde-theater playwright presents the human interest side of the postal system. It re- lates in anecdotal style the experiences of the author as postmaster for ten years in a New England village. It pictures the life of the people as viewed from a post office window, the small town politics, the en- forcement of postal regulations, the illegal use of the mails, and the maintenance of rural routes. "Where else," asks the author, "could one, who constantly en- joys the study of humanity, have such a laboratory as the post office in a small town?" He concludes that, "what holds the great postal system together is not the postal laws and regulations, however im- portant they may be, but the spirit of democracy in both those who work within it and those who patron- ize it." 4666. Hafen, LeRoy R. The overland mail 1849- 1869; promoter of settlement, precursor of railroads. Cleveland, A. H. Clark, 1926. 361 p. 26-17618 HE6375.H3 "Bibliography of references cited": p. 333-341. The trek of the Mormons to Utah in 1847 and the discovery of gold in California in 1849 accelerated the demand for extension of the mail service over- land to the Pacific. The author tells the story of the transportation of the mails by stage coach and Pony Express on all available routes to the West during the 20 years that preceded the driving of the Golden Spike at Promontory Point on May 10, 1869. He relies on Government documents, contemporary newspapers, and the personal narratives of travelers and other participants in the events which have been described. 4667. Harlow, Alvin F. Old waybills; the ro- mance of the express companies. New York, Appleton-Century, 1934. 503 p 34-7001 HE5896.H3 COMMUNICATIONS / 615 Bibliography: p. 489-[497J. This is the author's third book in his series on American communication and transportation. The history of the Adams, American, Southern, and Wells, Fargo Express Companies, which reached their zenith in the early iScjo's and combined in 1918 to become the American Railway Express Com- pany, is interwoven with stories of the colonial expressmen, the rise and fall of smaller companies, the stage coach and Pony Express, and the impact of these modes of communication on society. 4668. Kelly, Melville Clyde. United States postal policy, by Clyde Kelley. New York, Apple- ton, 1931. 320 p. 31-22448 HE6371.K4 In this review of the development of the policies underlying the U. S. postal service, a member of the House of Representatives for 20 years, who had served on its Post Office Committee, describes the postal establishment as the "keystone in the arch of American unity." Through service it "helps to obliterate sectional lines and to neutralize class prejudice." 4669. Rich, Wesley E. The history of the United States Post Office to the year 1829. Cam- bridge, Harvard University Press, 1924. 190 p. (Harvard economic studies ... v. 27) 24-22903 HE6371.R5 Thesis (Ph. D.) — Harvard University, 1917. Bibliography: p. 175-181. This dissertation is a scholarly history of the be- ginnings of the postal service in the colonies under British rule, its unification under Benjamin Frank- lin as the first national Postmaster General (1775), and its extension from 1789 to 1829, the year in which the Postmaster General became a Cabinet officer. Chapters describe the Post Office as a pub- lic service and its internal organization, financial operations, and postal policies. A chapter traces the growing political importance of post office patronage. The appendixes contain biographical notes on the Postmasters General, and tables showing the growth, appropriations, receipts and expenditures of the Department from its inception until 1829. 4670. Roper, Daniel C. The United States Post Office, its past record, present condition, and potential relation to the new world era. New York, Funk & Wagnalls, 19 17. xvii, 382 p. 17-24056 HE6371.R6 Bibliography: p. 374-375. The author, who served as First Assistant Post- master General from 191 3 to 191 6, has written a general history of the U. S. Post Office, whose mis- sion he describes in its rural, urban, and interna- tional aspects as "social, commercial and intellec- tual." He tells the story of the postal service from its colonial beginnings to 1917 when, he says, World War I marked the "end of an old and the beginning of a new era." The American story is prefaced by a chapter on "Postal Service and Civilization." The Appendix contains a glossary, a list of officials of the Post Office Department, 1775-19 17, and a chronology of postal events. 4671. U. S. Commission on Organization of the Executive Branch of the Government (1947- 1949) The Post Office; a report to the Congress, February 1949. [Washington, U. S. Govt. Print. Off.] 1949. 21 p. 49-45781 HE6331 1949.A523 JK643G47A55, no. 4 Issued also as House document no. 76, 81st Cong., 1 st sess. Established by a law approved July 7, 1947, the Commission, through its Chairman, the Honorable Herbert Hoover, transmitted the report of its find- ings concerning the Post Office Department to the Congress less than two years later. As Appendix I to this Report, Robert Heller and Associates, Cleve- land, published the results of their study for the Commission under the title Management Organiza- tion and Administration of the Post Office Depart- ment ([Washington, U. S. Govt. Print. Off.] 1949. 74 p.). The basic diagnosis of the Commission: "Although the Post Office is a business-type estab- lishment, it lacks the freedom and flexibility essen- tial to good business operation." The Heller task force recommends legislation "to establish the Post Office Department as a revolving fund agency of the Executive Branch . . . accountable to the Congress but with methods more in accord with modern business practice." Greater flexibility in expendi- tures and reasonable freedom from restrictive laws and regulations are indicated changes. B. Telegraph, Cable, Telephone 4672. Barbash, Jack. Unions and telephones; the story of the Communications Workers of America. New York, Harper, 1952. 246 p. 52-8460 HD6515.T33B3 The Communications Workers of America were established as recently as 1939, and did not arrive at any great numbers or influence until World War II was over. Mr. Barbash, a Washington economist, 6l6 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES tells its story in order "to give CWA members a sense of pride in CWA traditions and history," as well as "to tell the general reader interested in the labor movement something about a union which reflects most of the main currents of union develop- ment in this generaiton." His book is included here for the incidental light which it frequently throws upon the organization and operations of the telephone industry, and for its Chapter 9, "Tele- phones and Corporations," which concisely presents the economics of the industry from the union point of view. 4673. Danielian, Noobar R. A. T. & T.; the story of industrial conquest. New York, Van- guard Press, 1939. 460 p. 39-29705 HE8846.A55D3 The results which may be achieved by the various systems of industrial control are emphasized by the author, sometime financial and utility expert for the Federal Communications Commission. The Bell Telephone System has been selected as typical of the industries which have experienced periods of uncon- trolled monopoly, competition without regulation, the protection of state regulation, Federal "owner- ship" during World War I, and regulated monopoly. The book is based, to a great extent, on the record of the Telephone Investigation authorized by Con- gress in 1935 and conducted by the Federal Com- munications Commission (no. 4710). 4674. Dilts, Marion May. The telephone in a changing world. New York, Longmans, Green, 1941. xiv, 219 p. 41-51774 HE8731.D5 1941 Bibliographical references in "Notes": p. 197— 210. Since the telephone was first successfully demon- strated in 1876, it has become a universal medium for the exchange of ideas between individuals. Communication between persons in neighboring cities had developed into transcontinental service by 1915, and transoceanic telephone service between New York and London was established in 1927. This nontechnical history, written by a former member of the technical staff of the Bell Labora- tories, traces the economic and social impact of that development on this and other countries. The book includes chapters on "Telephone Operators" and "Telephone Directories." 4675. Harlow, Alvin F. Old wires and new waves; the history of the telegraph, tele- phone, and wireless. New York, Appleton-Century, 1936. xiv, 548 p. 36-27399 TK5115.H3 Bibliography: p. 527-538. Although this is a history of the three great means of communication, more than two-thirds of the book is devoted to the development of the telegraph. It contains chapters on Samuel F. B. Morse, the in- ventor, Henry O'Reilly, who extended "the wires over a vaster field than any which promoters had yet dared to contemplate," and the first Atlantic cable. The evolution of the telephone and Alexander Gra- ham Bell's struggle over patents, and the story of wireless communication are traced up to the organi- zation of the big radio broadcasting chains. The author relates deeds of heroism accomplished by means of wire and wave during peace and war, which add human interest to the story. 4676. Mabee, Carleton. The American Leonardo, a life of Samuel F. B. Morse; with an introd. by Allan Nevins. New York, Knopf, 1943. xix, 420, xv p. 43-1967 TK5243.M7M3 Thesis (Ph. D.) — Columbia University, 1942. References: p. 381-420. A young scholar, who had access to a collection of Morse letters, diaries, photographs, and paintings, portrays his subject not only as the inventor of the telegraph, but also as an artist whose career in paint- ing began in his youth and continued with varying success until 1837 when he gave it up to devote his energies to the development of the telegraph. Allan Nevins, in the Introduction, says that "Morse was something better than a great inventor; he was one of the great representative Americans of his time, a leader in many activities, and a man who enriched the national culture in various ways." The theme of Morse as an artist has been further explored by Oliver W. Larkin in Samuel F. B. Morse and Ameri- can Democratic Art (Boston, Little, Brown, 1954. 215 p.). 4677. McDonald, Philip B. A saga of the seas; the story of Cyrus W. Field and the laying of the first Adantic cable; illustrated from contem- porary prints and portraits. New York, Wilson- Erickson, 1937. 288 p. 37-21616 TK5611.M3 Bibliography: p. 281-282. The story of life in the United States during the latter half of the 19th century has been interwoven with the biography of an enthusiastic, energetic promoter whose foresight and courage inspired capitalists and scientists on both sides of the Atlantic to use their money and talents to produce a material link between the Old World and New. The author describes the influence of the Atlantic cable on inter- national commerce, diplomacy, and news service; and the interest of Cyrus Field, in later years, in the transit system of New York, the laying of a Pacific cable, and other projects of public benefit. In the Preface, the author mentions the letters and auto- biographical notes printed in Cyrus W. Field, edited by his daughter, Isabella Field Judson (New York, Harper, 1896. 332 p.) as being "the best source of original documents." 4678. Mackenzie, Catherine D. Alexander Gra- ham Bell, the man who contracted space. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1928. 382 p. 28-28948 TK6143.B4M3 A narrative of the career of the versatile inventor of the telephone, who was also the oustanding genius of his generation in the education of the deaf, the financier of the Volta Bureau, the founder of the Aerial Experiment Association, and the guiding spirit in the establishment of the magazine Science. The author was for ten years Mr. Bell's secretary and the custodian of his papers. Out of that ex- perience and the many conversations of those years she tells with enthusiasm and directness the story of his life "in terms of the work he did and the way he did it." 4679. Rhodes, Frederick Leland. Beginnings of telephony. New York, Harper, 1929. xvii, 261 p. 29-22388 TK6015.R5 "Sources of information consulted": p. 239-244. Associated with the American Bell Telephone and the American Telephone and Telegraph Com- pany as an electrical engineer, the author is well known for important work in connection with stand- ardization of materials, apparatus, and practice in overhead and underground wire systems. In this book he makes available to students and workers interested in the early history of the telephone and in the field of electrical communications, the infor- mation which he has gathered from experience and original sources. The emphasis is on the origin and early development of such technical devices as the microphone transmitter, the telephone cable, and the switchboard. The Appendixes include a "List of the Most Important Law Suits Arising cut of the Infringement of Alexander Graham Bell's Tele- phone Patents, with a Brief Description of the Cir- cumstances of Each Suit;" "Early Uses of the Word Telephone;" and a "Numerical List of United States Patents Cited." COMMUNICATIONS / 617 4680. Thompson, Robert L. Wiring a continent, the history of the telegraph industry in the United States, 1 832-1 866. Princeton, Princeton University Press, 1947. xviii, 544 p. 47-12502 HE7775.T5 Thesis — Columbia University. Bibliography: p. [5i8]~526. The idea of an electromagnetic telegraph crystal- lized in the mind of Samuel F. B. Morse in 1832, and the Western Union Telegraph Company emerged in 1866 from a consolidation of all the individual companies that had sprung up during the years between. The author tells the story of men and events connected with those companies as he has found them in such sources as the John Dean Caton Papers, which he describes as "in- valuable for an insight into the telegraph wars of the 1850's and 1860's"; the Samuel F. B. Morse Papers, which deal with the inception of the tele- graph and patent controversies; and the Henry O'Reilly Papers, "the most important manuscript collection on the telegraph in existence." 4681. Ulriksson, Vidkunn. The telegraphers, their craft and their unions. Washington, Public Affairs Press, 1953. 218 p. 52-12861 HD6515.T325U5 Bibliography: p. 210-21 1. The author, now on the faculty of the University of Wisconsin, has been a member of the Order of Railroad Telegraphers since 1918, and writes out of the conviction that the labor movement "has been and will continue to be one of the main bulwarks of our democratic way of life." Following a brief chapter on "Early Telegraph History," the evolution of unionism in the industry is sympathetically traced from the organization of the National Telegraph Union in 1863 down to 195 1. A final chapter on "The Telegraph Fraternity" describes some of the interests and attitudes of a group who "have for the most part always regarded themselves as belong- ing in the professional category. C. Radio, Television : Broadcasting 4682. Abbot, Waldo, and Richard L. Rider. Hand- book of broadcasting; the fundamentals of radio and television. 4th ed. New York, McGraw- Hill, 1957. 531 p. illus. 56-9620 PN1991.5.A2 1957 "Glossary": p. 461-470. Bibliography: p. 516-520. Designed to give students "basic knowledge of every activity in a broadcasting station from an- nouncing to producing, from writing to the technical 6l8 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES operation," this Handbook has been used for twenty years as a textbook for elementary classes in the field of broadcasting. In this new edition Richard L. Rider, supervisor of television and motion pictures at the University of Illinois, has collaborated with the original author to expand the data on television. Those chapters and sections that deal with the funda- mentals basically the same for both media have been retained, with supplementary information concern- ing TV, so as "to create a combined text which would be valuable for . . . students of radio and television." In 1951 Edgar E. Willis undertook "to provide a foundation on which advanced courses in specific phases of radio and television can be based; and to serve as a general introduction to broadcasting for those students who will take no other courses in the field," in Foundations in Broadcasting: Radio and Television (New York, Oxford University Press, 195 1. 439 p.). 4683. Archer, Gleason L. Big business and radio. New York, American Historical Co., 1939. 503 p. 39-29972 TK6548.U6A82 An organizational history of the rise of the great broadcasting companies from 1922 to 1929, with the following decade much more sketchily treated. The author has been allowed access to the files of the Radio Corporation of America and the General Elec- tric Company, and so documents the struggle be- tween the "Radio Group" and the "Telephone Group" for the control of radio more thoroughly than is common for recent business history. The achievements of William S. Paley, "the magician who has built the great Columbia network," and of David Sarnoff, who completed the unification of R. C. A., are acclaimed. Subsequent chapters deal with the Government's antitrust suit against R. C. A. and the consent decree of Nov. 21, 1932, the effects of the depression on the industry, and the beginnings of television. 4684. Barnouw, Erik. Handbook of radio produc- tion; an oudine of studio techniques and pro- cedures in the United States. Illustrated by Victor Barnouw. Boston, Litde, Brown, 1949. 324 p. 49-612 TK6570.B7B29 The author, who is now (1956) Editor, Center for Mass Communication, Columbia University Press, points out that since the air is the property of the people to be used only with the consent of the Fed- eral Communications Commission and for public service, American radio is distinguished from other mass media by the wide participation of national and local groups in the production of programs. More than 60 percent of his handbook is devoted to the coordinated work of the production team. He describes the talents and techniques used by the actor, the sound man, the musician, the announcer and speaker, and the engineer and director. Ex- cerpts from various programs and a script, with pro- duction notes, are given to illustrate the problems of the team, with a "Production Directory" at the end. It is a companion volume to the author's Handbook of Radio Writing, rev. ed. (Boston, Litde, Brown, IQ 47- 336 P-)- 4685. Callahan, Jennie (Waugh) Television in school, college, and community. New York, McGraw-Hill, 1953. 339 p. illus. 53-8992 LB1044.7.C33 Bibliography: p. 295-322. During 1952-53 educators and other leading citizens filed petitions with the Federal Communica- tions Commission to reserve some 209 frequencies for noncommercial television stations with educa- tional purposes. This book has been written for those who have the responsibility for establishing educational TV stations, and writing and producing the programs. The list of sources includes mate- rials available from TV producing groups, listed by states, as well as from the Joint Committee on Edu- cational Television, the National Association of Edu- cational Broadcasters, and the U. S. Office of Educa- tion. For other books and serials on educational television, by Charles A. Siepmann and others, see Chapter XXI, Section F, on Methods and Tech- niques of Education. 4686. Chester, Giraud, and Garnet R. Garrison. Television and radio, an introduction. 2d ed. New York, Appleton-Century-Crofts, 1956. 652 p. illus. 56-7206 TK6550.C43 1956 "Glossary of studio terms": p. 619-625. Bibliography: p. 627-636. The authors, who have had experience in radio and television teaching and research as well as in broadcasting, have made important changes in this enlarged edition "to reflect the new facts and new interests" which have developed since the first edi- tion appeared in 1950 under the title Radio and Tele- vision. However, the basic intention of the authors is the same: "to provide a comprehensive, up-to-date textbook for introductory courses in broadcasting" which are offered in several hundred colleges and universities. Part I deals with the social aspects of radio and television, including "Educational Radio and Television" and "Standards of Criticism." Part II is devoted to studio practices and technique — station organization, talking on the air, types of programs, acting, directing, and "Broadcasting as a Career." Script excerpts are provided for practice so that the text may be used as a "working hand- book." COMMUNICATIONS / 619 4687. Commission on Freedom of the Press. The American radio, a report on the broadcast- ing industry in the United States, by Llewellyn White. Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1947. xxi, 259 p. 47-19380 HE8698.C67 "Note on sources": p. 252-255. One of a series of studies prepared by the Com- mission, which "was created to consider the free- dom, functions, and responsibilities of major agencies of mass communication in our time." The author, who served as the assistant director of the Commis- sion, points out the defections of the radio industry in fulfilling its obligations to the public, redefines the responsibilities of the industry within the frame- work of Federal regulation, and makes recommenda- tions to the broadcasters, the FCC, and the public. "Freedom and accountability," the Commission con- cludes, "must represent the joint achievement of the industry, of community groups, and of government, acting in proper relation to one another." 4688. Cumming, William K. This is educational television. [Ann Arbor? Mich.] 1954. 264 p. illus. 54-62768 LB1044.7.C85 Dr. Cumming of the Department of Journalism at Michigan State College, and more recendy Tele- vision Producer-Coordinator of its station WKAR- TV, believes that "television has the potential for becoming a highly significant tool in the total educa- tional process." As a guide to educators and public service leaders still in doubt as to their course, he has made this survey of the actual achievements of the leading colleges and universities in the educa- tional TV field, including, of course, his own, and has sought to describe and appraise their presenta- tions. "Material for the book was gathered, in large degree, from personal interviews conducted across the country and from observation and par- ticipation in television operations." Statistics show- ing the "Enrollments for Educational Television Programs that Teach" appear in the Appendix. Directories of "Colleges Offering Courses in Tele- vision," and "Technical Schools for Television," ap- pear in Edwin B. Broderick's Your Place in TV; Handy Guide for Young People (New York, Mc- Kay, 1954) p. 1 13-124. 4689. De Forest, Lee. Father of radio; the auto- biography of Lee De Forest. Chicago, Wilcox & Follett, 1950. 502 p. 50-9446 TK5739.D4A3 Radios in some 50 million homes in 1955 are the contribution which the inventive genius of Lee De Forest has made to civilization. He completed his new "grid Audion" in 1906; 41 years later Charles F. Kettering said, "The spectacular growth of electronics to an enormous industry employing over a million workers and benefiting untold millions of people in all parts of the world may be said to have begun with that event." Believing that he knows better than anyone else many circumstances of die early history of radio and television, Mr. De Forest describes for the first time many episodes in their development. He tells of his youth in Iowa and Alabama, his literary, musical, and scientific edu- cation, his early inventions, and his experiments with wireless preceding the Audion. His narrative covers the beginnings of radio broadcasting, of sound films, and of television. There is also much detail concerning the organization of his companies, and the litigation which followed. 4690. DeSoto, Clinton B. Two hundred meters and down; the story of amateur radio. West Hartford, Conn., American Radio Relay League, 1936. _ 184 p. 37-376 TK6547.D4 "This work is publication no. 13 of the Radio Amateur's Library, published by the League." — Verso of t.-p. By the year 1908 considerable numbers of ama- teurs were taking up wireless telegraphy as a hobby, and their interference with regular channels of communication led to the Radio Act of 1912, which confined them to wavelengths of 200 meters or less. Within this limit the "ham" flourished, and made the transition to radio, so that there were in 1936 "approximately 46,000 licensed amateur transmit- ting stations." The amateurs' organization into the American Radio Relay League and the International Amateur Radio Union, their contributions to the improvement of apparatus and communications, and their volunteer work in emergencies, are among the topics presented in this unusual volume, which certainly ought to be brought up to date. 4691. Ewbank, Henry L., and Sherman P. Lawton. Broadcasting: radio and television. New York, Harper, 1952. 528 p. 52-543 2 PN1991.5.E9 Selected bibliography: p. 504-515. The principal aim of the authors is "to describe our radio and television systems, consider the pub- lic service responsibilities of these important mass media, and suggest standards for evaluating broad- cast programs." Government and nongovernmental control of broadcasting; the preparation and direc- tion of various types of programs, including those for special audiences; methods of audience meas- urement; and the economic and social effects of lis- tening are presented in nontechnical language, especially for college students and for program staff members of radio and television stations. 620 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 4692. Hutchinson, Thomas H. Here is television, your window to the world. With ninety- four illus. [Completely rev. ed.] New York, Has- tings House, 1950. xvi, 368 p. 51-61 TK6630.H87 1950 Glossary: p. 365-368. The author taught what was perhaps the first college class in television programming in 1940 at the Washington Square Writing Center of New York University, and has had much practical ex- perience in producing and directing TV programs. In this textbook, originally published in 1946, he describes in detail "The Tools of Television" — the studio, the camera, sound, the control room, the projection booth, the transmitter, and the receiver — representative types of "Television Programs," and "The Commercial Aspect" — advertising programs and "spots," large and small-station operation, net- works, theater television, and jobs. The final chap- ter summarizes the progress of TV in England, Holland, Germany, France, and America. 4693. Maclaurin, William Rupert. Invention & innovation in the radio industry, by W. Rup- ert Maclaurin with the technical assistance of R. Joyce Harman. With a foreword by Karl T. Comp- ton. New York, Macmillan, 1949. xxi, 304 p. illus. (Massachusetts Institute of Technology. Studies of innovation) 49-8314 TK6547.M28 Bibliography: p. 292-298. The author has chosen the radio industry as the subject of the first in a projected series of books on the consequences of technological changes in a num- ber of industries. He traces the story of radio through the lives of the Europeans who did the fun- damental research, to the advance engineering tech- niques developed in the industrial laboratories of the United States and applied to the industry. Chap- ters are devoted to patent litigation, and to the rise of industrial research in the fields of television and frequency modulation. Dr. Maclaurin concludes that technological innovation has positive effects on our economy, and that the rational handling of in- dustrial research prepares the Nation not only to fight a war but to fight a depression. 4694. O'Meara, Carroll. Television program pro- duction. New York, Ronald Press, 1955. 361 p. illus. 55-6091 PN1992.5.O6 The author, a former producer-director for NBC- TV in Hollywood and New York, bases this book on notes gathered while he was being trained in television production by NBC. It is a practical manual for the TV producer, often technical but regularly concrete and clear, which deals both with his means — camera, tide devices, film and slides, lighting, etc. — and with standard types of programs in the studio and "remote telecasts" outside it, such as sports events. Concluding chapters introduce color TV and censorship problems. 4695. Phillips, David C, John M. Grogan, and Earl H. Ryan. Introduction to radio and television. New York, Ronald Press, 1954. 432 p. illus. 54-7650 PN1991.5.P5 A book for those who want a general under- standing of radio and television, as well as for those who plan careers in the two media and will pursue further specialized courses. It contains chapters on "Regulation of Radio and Television," "Films for Television," "Educational Television," and "Audi- ence Measurement." Appended are a "Glossary of Radio and Television Terms" and specimen "Radio and Television Scripts." 4696. Seehafer, Eugene F., and Jack W. Laemmar. Successful radio and television advertising. New York, McGraw-Hill, 195 1. 574 p. 51-2828 HF6146.R3S4 American business has practiced selling through the medium of the radio for over 30 years, and through TV since its large-scale introduction. In the course of this experience certain well-established principles have emerged, upon which "creative thinking" in broadcast advertising can proceed. This text, originally issued in mimeographed form in 1947, aims to formulate these principles, and to illustrate their operation throughout both media. The techniques of the retail advertising campaign, the problems of the national advertiser, and the art of selling time, are essentially the same, whether radio or TV is employed. The appendixes include a "Timing Table for Radio Commercials" and a glossary. 4697. Stasheff, Edward, and Rudy Bretz. The television program; its writing, direction, and production. [2d ed.j New York, Hill and Wang, 1956. 356 p. illus. 56-13991 PN1992.5.S8 1956 Although television is often regarded as being a new form of art, one of its principal functions has been the broadcasting of dramatic entertainments originally devised for media of longer standing. The essential differences between television and its forerunners — theater, films, and radio — are pointed out in order to emphasize how directors, writers, actors, and production personnel must adjust their techniques to the new medium. Technicalities are illustrated from original scripts, including a photo- graphic reproduction of one complete director's script for a [Dave] "Garroway at Large" program. The chapter on "Marketing the Script," as well as a book by Max Wylie, Radio and Television Writ- COMMUNICATIONS / 621 ing, rev. and enl. (New York, Rinehart, 1950. 635 p.), will interest those who would like to write for television. 4698. Waller, Judith C. Radio, the fifth estate. 2d ed. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1950. 482 p. illus. (Houghton Mifflin radio broadcast- ing series) 50-9766 HE8698.W3 1950 Bibliography: p. 455-468. The author is Director of Public Affairs and Edu- cation of the National Broadcasting Company's Central Division. Her book naturally stresses reli- gious, agricultural, children's, and other types of public service programs, as well as educational broadcasting. It is, however, a rounded treatment of the subject as a whole, and for the general reader is probably the most serviceable introduction to radio as it was at its peak. The original publication was in 1946, and this revision includes only a six-page section on television. D. Radio, Television: The Audience 4699. Bogart, Leo. The age of television; a study of viewing habits and the impact of television on American life. New York, Ungar Pub. Co., 1956. 348 p. 56-12046 HE8698.B6 Written for viewers who are interested in the ef- fect of television on people rather than with its tech- nical aspects, this book is based mosdy on studies "which have used the interview method of asking people what television has meant in their lives." Following chapters on the growth of TV and the nature of its audience appeal, the author explores the content of TV programming, and analyzes its effect on reading, the movies, spectator sports, advertising, politics, and juvenile audiences. "The Status of TV Research" is summarized in an appendix, which ob- serves that "remarkably little is known about the broadcasters themselves." 4700. Chappell, Matthew N., and Claude E. Hooper. Radio audience measurement. New York, Daye, 1944. xvi, 246 p. illus. 44-5827 HE9713.C5 The development of the radio as an advertising medium early impressed on the industry the need for measuring listening habits to determine the effec- tiveness of various types of programs on the buying habits of audiences. The data obtained from sampling measurements, made by major audience service organizations in 1929, 1934 and 1943, have been supplemented through surveys conducted by the major networks, by advertising agencies carry- ing radio accounts, and by other research groups. In this book the writers examine separately each method used in collecting such information, and the effectiveness of the method for the segment of the population chosen for study. 4701. Columbia University. Bureau of Applied Social Research. Radio listening in Amer- ica; the people look at radio — again. Report on a survey conducted by the National Opinion Research Center of the University of Chicago, Clyde Hart, director; analyzed and interpreted by Paul F. Lazarsfeld and Patricia L. Kendall. New York, Prentice-Hall, 1948. 178 p. 49-450 HE8698.C654 A second survey of listening habits sponsored by the National Association of Broadcasters to de- termine the public's attitude toward radio. The first study, conducted under the direction of Harry H. Field and Paul F. Lazarsfeld, was published by the University of North Carolina Press in 1946: The People Loo\ at Radio (158 p.). Seventy percent of the audience gave radio in general a rating of ex- cellent or good; serious criticism was confined to a relatively small minority. 4702. Parker, Everett C, David W. Barry, and Dallas W. Smythe. The television-radio audience and religion. New York, Harper, 1955. xxx, 464 p. diagrs., tables. (Studies in the mass media of communication) 55-8526 BV656.3.P3 "This volume has grown out of the first serious effort to understand the effects of religious programs broadcast over radio and television. But it is also far more than that: because it undertakes to trace effects within the setting of a concrete community and in the lives of particular individuals, this study reveals a great deal about the total impact of newer methods of communication on an American city and its inhabitants." Conducted by the Communications Research Project supervised by the Yale University Divinity School under the chairmanship of Liston Pope, it analyzes the "church relatedness" of fam- ilies in New Haven, Connecticut, and the attitudes of ministers towards broadcasting. It surveys tele- vision and radio set ownership and contrasts the personality traits of the audiences that listen with 622 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES those that do not listen to religious programs. The authors believe that its central and most important finding is "that in programming for religious use of the mass media, the ingenuity and flexibility of the planners must match the complexity of needs and circumstances of the potential audience." It will serve as a pilot study for those who desire to apply the techniques of the survey to a similar study of other communities. 4703. Siepmann, Charles A. Radio, television and society. New York. Oxford University Press, 1950. 410 p. 50-8505 HE8698.S529 Chapter bibliographies included in "Appendix VII": p. [3 8 9] -398. "The first purpose of this book is to bring the gen- eral reader the history of a cultural revolution and to show what has been discovered by research con- cerning the effects of radio and television upon our tastes, opinions, and values. The second purpose is to deal with broadcasting as a reflection of our time and to throw light upon the problems of free speech, propaganda, public education, our relations with the rest of the world, and upon the concept of democ- racy itself." The author emphasizes ascertained facts, and is cautious in generalization and criticism, but suggests that "the greatest threat to our culture results from the general underestimation, in mass communication, of the public's potentialities." Materials for further study of the effect of TV on family life, public life, and children; its role in ad- vertising and education; and the standards of Amer- ican broadcasting will be found in the collection of readings: Television and Radio in American Life, edited by Herbert L. Marx, Jr. (New York, Wil- son, 1953) and published as volume 25, no. 2, of The Reference Shelf series. It includes an extensive bibliography. 4704. Stewart, Raymond F. The social impact of television on Atlanta households. [Emory University, Ga.] 1952. 137 p. 52-41391 HE8698.S78 Bibliography: p. 135-137. This is representative of several studies based on interviews that have been made in widely separated areas of the United States on the influence of tele- vision on children and on family life in general. This study includes a survey of television owner- ship in Atlanta, the owners' "interaction with so- ciety," and the patterns of behavior within the television family. The owners reported that they went out less in the evening, went to bed later, and engaged in less family conversation. 4705. Wylie, Max. Clear channels; television and the American people, a report to set owners. New York, Funk & Wagnalls, 1955. 408 p. 54-9743 HE8694.W87 A book concerned with the place of television in American society, by an author who has been a radio and television producer, a college teacher, and an advertising agency executive. He criticizes the critics of television and defends its effects on educa- tion, adult reading habits, and the morals of children. He raises the controversial issues of televising sports and governmental functions; challenges educators to learn the techniques of TV broadcasting and to take advantage of the channels reserved by the FCC for cultural programs; and points to television as a medium for the improvement of public health in the United States. E. Government Regulation 4706. Edelman, Jacob M. The licensing of radio services in the United States, 1927 to 1947; a study in administrative formulation of policy. Ur- bana, University of Illinois Press, 1950. 229 p. (Illinois studies in the social sciences, v. 31, no. 4) 50-63485 HE8693.U6E4 H31.I4, v. 31, no. 4 Bibliography: p. 224-226. The development of the body of rules and deci- sions that has governed radio broadcasting since the organization of the Federal Radio Commission in 1927 is traced through its first two decades, with the leading policy developments of 1947-50 de- scribed in footnotes. The author thinks that, on the whole, regulation by independent commission has proved "an adequate device for maintaining a con- tinuing surveillance" over an area of rapid change and many controversial issues. Certain "striking departures from declared policy" by the Commis- sion, usually in the direction of greater profitability of broadcast operation, have resulted from the fact that at its hearings the industry is strongly repre- sented, while "groups that represent listeners are rare, and those that do arise become impotent with impressive regularity." Laurence F. Schmeckebier in The Federal Radio Commisison; Its History, Activities and Organization (Washington, Brook- ings Institution, 1932. 162 p. Institute for Gov- COMMUNICATIONS / 623 ernment Research. Service monographs of the United States Government, no. 65) describes in de- tail the regulatory functions of that body, which was superseded in 1934 by the Federal Communica- tions Commission. 4707. Herring, James M., and Gerald C. Gross. Telecommunications; economics and regu- lation. New York, McGraw-Hill, 1936. 544 p. illus. 36-23240 HE206.H4 The economic and public service aspects of the telegraph, including submarine telegraphy, tele- phone, and radio industries, are traced in this book from the beginnings of those industries to the pas- sage of the Communications Act of 1934. To this end chapters deal with revenue and expenditures, criteria for rate adjustments, concentration of own- ership, and State, National, and international regu- lation. The authors believe that the Act of 1934 laid the groundwork for the accomplishment of its central purpose: so to regulate communication by wire or radio as to make available to the people of the United States a rapid, efficient, nation-wide, and world-wide service with adequate facilities at reasonable charges. The book is now considerably out-of-date, but remains quite unreplaced. 4708. Rhyne, Charles S. Municipal regulations, taxation and use of radio and television. Washington, National Institute of Municipal Law Officers, 1955. 84 p. ([National Institute of Mu- nicipal Law Officers, Washington, D. C] Report no. 143) 55-24929 JS351.N3, no. 143 Most cities are themselves users of radio frequen- cies, regularly in their police and fire departments, and sometimes in municipal programs and stations. They are called upon to take regulatory action about such problems as interference with radio and tele- vision reception, the erection of transmitters and antennas, community television systems, the exam- ination and licensing of TV and radio repairmen, and even program content. They have also to secure some contribution from commercial radio and TV stations to the cost of municipal government. This handbook attempts to bring together information on the present state of municipal action in these fields and prints some typical ordinances and regulations in an appendix. 4709. Robinson, Thomas Porter. Radio networks and the Federal Government. New York, Columbia University Press, 1943. 278 p. A 43-2030 HE9711.U5R6 1943 Thesis (Ph. D.) — Columbia University, 1943. Bibliography: p. [265 1-267. Between 1937 and 1941 Congress and the Federal Communications Commission investigated the three great radio networks — the National Broadcasting Company and the Columbia and Mutual Broad- casting Systems — as a form of monopolistic control of individual stations. This dissertation draws upon the hearings of the Senate Interstate Commerce Committee and of the Commission to illustrate the operation of network control in such matters as artist contracts, station rates, and the rejection of programs, and emphasizes the relationship between the Commission and NBC. Convinced that net- work organization is economically inevitable, the author takes exception to a number of the new regu- lations which the Commission promulgated subse- quent to the investigations. 4710. U. S. Federal Communications Commission. Investigation of the telephone industry in the United States. Letter from the Chairman, Federal Communications Commission, transmitting a report of the Federal Communications Commission on the investigation of the telephone industry in the United States, as unanimously adopted by the Commis- sion . . . Washington, U. S. Govt. Print. Off., 1939. xxv, 661 p. illus., tables, diagrs. (76th Cong., 1st sess. House. Document 340) 39-26969 HE8803.A5 1939 Referred to the Committee on Interstate and Foreign Commerce and ordered printed with illus- trations June 14, 1939. This report resulted from a joint resolution of the Congress, approved by the President on March 15, 1935. The investigation took four years and naturally focused upon the American Telephone and Telegraph Company, whose officials exert "effective nation-wide control" over the Bell Tele- phone System, and of which the Western Electric Company is the manufacturing department. It covers such aspects of the industry as corporate and financial history; capital structure; intercompany relationships; service contracts; accounting methods; apportionment of investment, revenues, and expenses between state and interstate operations; methods of competition; the effect of monopolistic control upon telephone rates and charges; and the reasons for failure to reduce rates and charges during years of declining prices. The Commission concluded that this investigation had provided it "with basic data to serve as the foundation for the inauguration and development of continuous and efficient administra- tive processes in the highly technical field of tele- phone regulation." "During the course of the investigation, and as a result of the direct efforts of the investigatory staff, telephone-rate reductions now aggregating in excess of $30,000,000 were effected in the interest ... of the American telephone-using public." 624 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 471 1. U. S. President's Communications Policy Board. Telecommunications, a program for progress; a report. Washington, U. S. Govt. Print. Off., 195 1. 238 p. 51-60572 HE7763.A44 195 1 A summary of the information concerning the radio, telephone, and telegraph services gathered during a year's study by the President's Communi- cations Policy Board. The five problems examined are: policies and plans for reconciling the conflict- ing interests and needs of Government and private users of the spectrum space; management of the total telecommunications resources to meet the changing demands of national security; a national policy for international telecommunications agree- ments; maintaining a sound telecommunications in- dustry; and strengthening the Government's own organization to cope with those issues. Concern- ing the last problem, the principal recommendation of the Board was the establishment "in the Executive Office of the President a three-man Telecommunica- tions Advisory Board to advise and assist the Presi- dent in the execution of his responsibilities in the telecommunications field." XVII Science and Technology «f a 61 A. General Worlds 4712-4730 B. Particular Sciences 473 1-474 1 C. Individual Scientists 4742-4760 [ D. Science and Government 4761-4779 E. Invention 4780-4792 F. Engineering 4793-4803 J THE recognition of science as a determining factor in American economic and social progress has been furthered by its decisive influence on the political future of the United States as shaped by two world wars. A comparison of this chapter with others in this bibli- ography makes it clear that the history of the physical sciences and their application has been somewhat neglected by the historical profession. Several reasons have been advanced for this — the difficulty of sorting the purely American contributions from the larger framework of world science, neglect in preserving the letters and papers of scientists, the hesitation among his- torians to invade specialized fields, and the apparent indifference of scientists to interpreting the achieve- ments of science in relation to other aspects of Ameri- can life. The books in Section A by Hindle (no. 4718), Jaffe (nos. 4721, 4722), Johnson (no. 4723), and Struik (no. 4730) show that a start has been made toward the coverage of certain periods and geographical areas, although much remains to be done in the basic sciences to fill up the outline pro- vided by Oliver in his History of American Tech- nology (no. 4727). Section B indicates that certain sciences have received more attention than others, and that the complete history of mathematics, physics, and other branches remains to be writ- ten. To round out the picture, histories of representative scientific societies, and collective biographies of scientists in general, or of scien- tists working in a particular branch, have been added to the first two sections. Section C contains a selection of biographies of individual scientists, many of whom are great names reflecting major advances in their fields, while others are probably more representative than great. The publications in Section D describe the interrelations that have developed between science and government, espe- cially the Federal Government, in the service and defense of human welfare. It includes histories of major organizations such as the Smithsonian Insti- tution (no. 4775) and the National Science Founda- tion (no. 4778, annotation), and surveys of Federal aid to scientific research and resources in terms of manpower and materials, as well as treatments of certain Government agencies whose functions are primarily scientific. In Sections E and F histories of invention and engineering science, and biographies of inventors and engineers have been assembled to illustrate the application of science in technological achievements which fulfill human needs. How- ever, the technological aspects of medicine, agricul- ture, and the graphic arts will be covered in other chapters. A. General Works 1712. American men of science; a biographical directory. 9th ed. Edited by Jaques Cattell. Lancaster, Pa., Science Press., 1955-56. 3 v. 6-7326 Q141.A47 431240—60 41 American Men of Science originated as a manu- script reference list for the Carnegie Institution of Washington. The latest edition has been divided into three volumes to accommodate "a phenomenal 625 626 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES recent expansion in almost every field of science." The first volume, "Physical Sciences," includes biographical sketches of living scientists in the fields of the physical, mathematical, chemical, and geo- logical sciences. Volume II, "Biological Sciences," includes those in the fields of zoology, botany, medi- cal research, and affiliated areas. Volume III, "The Social & Behavioral Sciences," contains names and fields not previously found in American Men of Science. To the biographies of those in the fields of psychology, geography, and anthropology, which appeared in the earlier editions, have been added many names in other branches of the social sciences such as economics, sociology, and government. The three volumes form an outstanding reference tool in all fields of science. In 195 1 the U. S. Depart- ment of Labor published as its Bulletin no. 1027: Employment, Education, and Earnings of American Men of Science, by Theresa R. Shapiro and Helen Wood (Washington, U. S. Govt. Print. Off. 48 p.), which is a statistical analysis based upon a ques- tionnaire sent out to gather information for a "roster of key scientists for use by the National Research Council, the Department of Defense, and other agencies concerned with our supply of scientific per- sonnel, and to provide data for the 1949 edition of The Biographical Directory of American Men of Science." tfi-i,. Bates, Ralph S. Scientific societies in the United States. New York, Wiley, 1945. 246 p. 45-5801 Q11.A1B3 "A publication of the Technology Press, Massa- chusetts Institute of Technology." Bibliography: p. 193-220. As the first extensive history of the work of American scientific societies, this book fills "a gap in the literature dealing with the intellectual his- tory of our country." It traces their growth and influence from the organization of Benjamin Frank- lin's Junto in 1727, which laid the foundation of the American Philosophical Society, the oldest sci- entific society now in existence in America, to the year 1944. Recognized as "outstanding agencies for increasing and diffusing the world's store of knowledge," national, state, and local scientific bodies proliferated during the period of "National Growth, 1 800-1 865," which witnessed the founding cf the National Academy of Sciences to furnish tech- nical advice to the government in the prosecution of the Civil War. Specialization was the dominat- ing idea of the years 1866 to 1918, which saw the foundation of national societies in the various branches of science and technology. During the period 1919 to 1944 American scientists found their places in international scientific organizations; the National Research Council and other councils co- ordinated, directed, and initiated scientific projects; and American science reached a maturity that cre- ated interest in its own history. 4714. Bell, Whitfield J. Early American science, needs and opportunities for study. Wil- liamsburg, Va., Institute of Early American History and Culture, 1955. 85 p. 56-211 Q127.U6B35 Sponsored by the Institute of Early American His- tory and Culture, this is the first in a series of studies in several specialized fields that have been inade- quately investigated. Of its two parts, the first surveys, and documents with bibliographical foot- notes, the categories in which further study is needed. The second part is a bibliography, classified in sec- tions on "The General History of Science"; "History of Science in America (to about 1820)"; "Periodicals, Devoted to, or Often Publishing Contributions to, the History of Science"; and "Fifty Early American Scientists (to about 1820)." Titles cited in the first part are as a rule not repeated in the second. The author hopes that the study will suggest to students new subjects and materials that should be explored in every aspect of the history of early American science. To assist them, "the staff of the Institute will gladly provide, when it can, further specific sug- gestions for research on any of the topics mentioned here or on others like them." 4715. A Century of science in America, with special references to the American journal of science, 1818-1918. New Haven, Yale University Press, 1918. 458 p. (Yale University. Mrs. Hepsa Ely Silliman memorial lectures) 19-218 Q127.U6C3 Contains bibliographies. Fourteen scientists contribute chapters in the areas of their competence to this volume commemorating the centennial of the founding of the American Journal of Science, "the only scientific periodical in this country to maintain an uninterrupted existence since that early date." The chapters throw light on the scope of the papers published in the Journal, and the development of the particular branches of science as they emerged from 1818 to 1918. Four chapters on various phases of geology by Charles Schuchert, Herbert E. Gregory, Joseph Barrell, and George Otis Smith, reflect the prominent place which geological notes and papers have occupied in the Journal since its inception. Other chapters are devoted to Paleontology, by Richard Swann Lull; Petrology, by Louis V. Pirsson; Mineralogy, by William E. Ford; the Geophysical Laboratory of the Carnegie Insti- tution of Washington, by R. B. Sosman; Chemis- try, by Horace L. Wells and Harry W. Foote; Physics, by Leigh Page; Zoology, by Wesley R. Coe; and Botany, by George L. Goodale. The increase in the amount of periodical scientific literature during SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY / 627 the century under discussion indicates the growing place of scientific investigation in the intellectual life of the period. 4716. Coleman, Laurence V. Company museums. Washington, American Association of Mu- seums, 1943. 173 p. 43-51215 T179.C6 The director of the American Association of Museums points out that 80 business companies in the United States — manufacturing corporations, commercial houses, railroads, public utilities, news- papers, banks, and insurance companies — are known to have museums of their own. He gives a brief history of the museum movement in business, which had its beginning in the 19th century, and describes the usefulness of museums as builders of company morale, as reference tools, and as vehicles for good public relations. He discusses all phases of museum work — management, quarters, collecting, exhibition, and interpretation of the collection to visitors. The field work for this study was carried out in 1942 by Carl C. Curtiss, who also compiled the descriptive directory of "Company Museums in the United States" which appears in the Appendix. Organizers and managers of such museums will find this book a useful guide, and for the student of American tech- nological development it contains a wealth of sug- gestions and sources. 4717. Fairchild, Herman Le Roy. A history of the New York Academy of Sciences, for- merly the Lyceum of Natural History. New York, The Author, 1887. 190 p. 1-617 Q11.N67 Founded in 18 17 for the study of natural history, "particularly as it relates to the illustration of the physical character of the country we inhabit," the New York Academy of Sciences is the fourth oldest scientific society in the United States. In 1836 it opened its own Lyceum Building at 561-65 Broad- way, only to lose it 8 years later as a consequence of the financial panic of 1837. In 1876 it adopted its present name in order to accommodate "those working in all departments of science." Ten years later the Academy's recording secretary put to- gether this modest account of its first seven decades from its minutes and other records, and included chapters on its foundation, original members, offi- cers, collections, library, and publications, as well as biographical notices of its leading members. The Academy's second 70 years, even more productive than the first, remain unchronicled. 4718. Hindle, Brooke. The pursuit of science in Revolutionary America, 1735-1789. Chapel Hill, Published for the Institute of Early American History and Culture, Williamsburg, Va., by Uni- versity of North Carolina Press, 1956. 410 p. 56-4168 Q127.U6H5 "Bibliographical note": p. 387-392. The author's interest in this subject began with his doctoral dissertation, The Rise of the American Philosophical Society, ij66-ij8j (Philadelphia, 1949. 66 1.). Of the book's three parts, the first depicts the group in America, England, and on the Continent who studied the natural history of the colonies, and through correspondence and exchange of specimens created intercolonial and interna- tional bonds. The second period (1763-75) is characterized by the rise of scientific societies and the publication of astronomical observations which impressed Europeans with a new maturity in Amer- ican scientific thought. In the third period, the men, the institutions, and the interrelations that had sustained science were disrupted by the Revolution. However, such statesmen as Washington, Franklin, Jefferson, and Adams were determined that science should flourish in America, and that the spark which had been kindled should not die. The "unprece- dented richness of modern America is a monument to the faith of the Revolutionary generation in the power and beneficence of science, just as its form of government is a monument to their faith in man's capacity to govern himself." 4719. Hornberger, Theodore. Scientific thought in the American colleges, 1638-1800. Aus- tin, University of Texas Press, 1945. 108 p. A46-1632 Q181.H77 Published as Project no. 67 of the University Research Institute. Of the 27 colleges which existed in the United States prior to 1800, the author gives some informa- tion about 16, although only Harvard, Yale, William and Mary, Princeton, Columbia, Pennsylvania, Brown, and Dartmouth had enough of a history by that date to make it proper to speak of their cultural influence. From 1640 to 1690 geometry, physics, and astronomy held a very minor place in the curriculum. During the next 50 years "natural philosophy," botany, zoology, and chemistry emerged as regular subjects, and experimental dem- onstrations with "philosophical apparatus" in the classroom became the rule. An analysis of the at- titudes of representative alumni toward science leads the author to conclude that those of the first period shared an enthusiasm for the "new science" which, in the years 1690 to 1740, gave way to a growing sense of conflict between science and religion. How- ever, "by the end of the 18th century . . . 'science' had become a word to conjure with." A beautifully illustrated book by I. Bernard Cohen, Some Early 628 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Tools of American Science (Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1950. 201 p.), describes in detail the "philosophical apparatus" at Harvard University from 1764 to 1825 and, in certain aspects, is also a history of science as taught at Harvard during that period. 4720. Industrial research laboratories of the United States. 10th ed. Comp. by James F. Mauk. Washington, National Academy of Sciences, Na- tional Research Council, 1956. 560 p. (National Research Council Publication 379) 21-26022 T176.I65, no. 379 A directory of 4,834 nongovernmental research laboratories including those maintained by com- mercial firms and trade associations, independent commercial laboratories, and independent nonprofit laboratories. Testing and university laboratories are not included. The addresses, names of presi- dents, and, in some cases, of other executive officers are given, and the size, makeup, and activities of the research staff are described. The great increase in the number of laboratories listed since the first edition appeared in 1920 is an indication of the growing dependence of business and industry on research. 4721. Jaffe, Bernard. Men of science in America; the role of science in the growth of our coun- try. New York, Simon & Schuster, 1944. xl, 600 p. 44—5618 Q127.U6J27 "Sources and reference material": p. 555-571. Contents. — 1. Thomas Harriot (naturalist and mathematician), bringing the seeds of science to America. — 2. Benjamin Franklin (natural philoso- pher), the first fruit of American science. — 3. Benja- min Thompson (physicist), science faces the tumult of the American Revolution. — 4. Thomas Cooper (chemist), science advances slowly in the newborn Republic. — 5. Constantine Samuel Rafinesque (botanist), American science ventures out across new frontiers. — 6. Thomas Say (entomologist), science caught in the first uprush of an industrial revolution. — 7. William T. G. Morton (anesthetist), American makes medical history. — 8. Joseph Henry (physicist), the United States government estab- lishes a new incubator for science. — 9. Matthew Fontaine Maury (hydrographer), America con- tributes to the science of the sea. — 10. Louis J. R. Agassiz (biologist), the repercussions of Darwinism in the United States. — 11. James Dwight Dana (geologist), Federal and state surveys aid the ad- vances of science. — 12. Othniel Charles Marsh (paleontologist), dinosaurs and other fossils of our gilded age. — 13. J. Willard Gibbs (mathematical physicist), America in the new world of chemistry. — 14. Samuel Pierpont Langley (aeronautical engi- neer), American science gives men wings. — 15. Albert Abraham Michelson (physicist), America participates in the revolution of modern physics. — 16. Thomas Hunt Morgan (geneticist), American science come of age. — 17. Herbert McLean Evans (anatomist), American science pioneers in two new related fields. — 18. Edwin Powell Hubble (as- tronomer), giant instruments and huge foundations for American science. — 19. Ernest Orlando Lawrence (nuclear physicist), the turn of the tide in world science. — 20. Future of science in America. "With a view to finding possible relationships be- tween the kind of science which developed in Amer- ica and the type of civilization which has flourished here," the author bases his selection of 20 scientists on the significance of their contributions as pioneer research, with emphasis on the pure sciences and the workers' awareness of the social scene in which they worked. He thereby illustrates the interdependence between scientific progress and political and social history in the United States. 4722. Jaffe, Bernard. Outposts of science; a journey to the workshops of our leading men of research. New York, Simon & Schuster, 1935. xxvi, 547 p. 35-3I94 6 Q127.U6J3 "Sources and reference material": p. 517-529. Selecting 13 Americans eminent for scientific re- search in as many different fields, the author inter- viewed them, visited their laboratories, and studied their scientific papers. Seeking to "give the average reader some idea of the tremendous activity going on behind the doors of the laboratories of science," he outlines the development of their specialties and against this background presents the significance of their specific achievements. Separate chapters de- scribe and evaluate the work of Thomas Hunt Mor- gan in genetics, Ales Hrdlicka in anthropology. William H. Welch in bacteriology and immunology, Maud Slye in cancer research, John Jacob Abel in endocrinology, Adolf Meyer in psychiatry, Elmer V. McCollum in nutrition, Leland O. Howard in entomology, Robert A. Millikan in atomic physics, Arthur H. Compton in radiation, George Ellery Hale in astrophysics, Charles G. Abbot in meteor- ology, and Richard C. Tolman in astronomical cosmology. All of these scientists save Morgan, who died soon after his interview, reviewed and approved Jaffe's account of their work. The volume gives a vivid panorama of American scientific investigation two decades ago. 4723. Johnson, Thomas Cary. Scientific interests in the Old South. New York, Appleton- Century, for the Institute for Research in the Social Sciences, University of Virginia, 1936. 217 p. SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY / 629 (University of Virginia. Institute for Research in the Social Sciences. Institute monograph no. 23) 36-28317 Q127.U6J6 This is "a study of the attitude of the planters, politicians, and professional men of the Cotton King- dom and of their wives and daughters toward the natural sciences." The author analyzes the faculties, curriculum, and apparatus found in the colleges and "female academies" in order to illustrate the interests of teachers and students in scientific writing, socie- ties, and study. The appearance of articles on chem- istry, physics, astronomy, and botany in the news- papers and periodicals; the popularity of lectures on the natural sciences; attempts to establish museums; and the formation of circles bent on scientific inves- tigation witness to the South's awareness of the achievements of science. The author includes chap- ters on scientific developments in cities as wide apart, traditionally and culturally, as Charleston and New Orleans, and concludes that "the common as- sumption that the Old South was a gloomy region cut off from the scientific light of the Occidental world seems to be unsustained by the evidence." 4724. Jordan, David Starr, ed. Leading American men of science. New York, Holt, 19 10. 471 p. 17 port. (Biographies of leading Americans, edited by W. P. Trent) 10-26275 Q141.J7 Contents. — Benjamin Thompson, Count Rum- ford, physicist, by Edwin E. Slosson. — Alexander Wilson [and] John James Audubon, ornithologists, by Witmer Stone. — Benjamin Silliman, chemist, by Daniel Coit Gilman. — Joseph Henry, physicist, by Simon Newcomb. — Louis Agassiz, zoologist, by Charles Frederick Holder. — Jeffries Wyman, anat- omist, by Burt G. Wilder. — Asa Gray, botanist, by John M. Coulter. — James Dwight Dana, geologist, by William North Rice. — Spencer Fullerton Baird, zoologist, by C. F. Holder. — Othniel Charles Marsh, paleontologist, by George Bird Grinnell. — Edward Drinker Cope, paleontologist, by Marcus Benja- min. — Josiah Willard Gibbs, physicist, by Edwin E. Slosson. — Simon Newcomb, astronomer, by Marcus Benjamin. — George Brown Goode, zoologist, by D. S. Jordan. — Henry Augustus Rowland, physicist, by Ira Remsen. — William Keith Brooks, zoologist, by E. A. Andrews. "Short and sympathetic biographies of [17] lead- ers in American science, each one written by a man in some degree known as a disciple." Dr. Jordan chose the subjects and the authors, but was com- pelled to turn the remainder of the editorial work over to Dr. Slosson. Simon Newcomb, author of the sketch of Joseph Henry, died while the work was still in progress, and was promptly added to the list of subjects. American scientific progress for more than a century is largely summed up in the work of these men, whose lives span the years 1753 to 1909. 4725. Knapp, Robert H., and Hubert B. Goodrich. Origins of American scientists; a study made under the direction of a committee of the faculty of Wesleyan University. Chicago, University of Chi- cago Press for Wesleyan University, Middletown, Conn., 1952. xiv, 450 p. 52-1461 1 Q127.U6K55 This book may be considered, in part, an attempt to answer some of the questions raised by the Presi- dent's Scientific Research Board in its report (no. 4779) which indicated a shortage of scientific per- sonnel in relation to the probable requirements of the American nation. This study is the result of a statistical analysis of several hundred institutions in an attempt to establish their effectiveness in the edu- cation of scientists, and intensive case studies of 22 smaller colleges (Appendix, p. 299-431). It sets up criteria for the selection of students by colleges and recommends colleges of "broad intellectual em- phasis" to students. The information regarding types of institutions which have been most successful in training scientists should be helpful to all who plan a scientific education. The authors also evalu- ate comparable studies of scientific personnel, point- ing out the limitations of some. Special weight is given to Stephen S. Visher's Scientists Starred, 1903- 1943, in "American Men of Science" (Baltimore, Johns Hopkins Press, 1947. 556 p.), which studies the education, birthplace, distribution, background, and developmental factors of those regarded by their colleagues as outstanding scientists. 4726. A Memorial of George Brown Goode, to- gether with a selection of his papers on museums and on the history of science in America. Washington, Govt. Print. Off., 1901. 515 p. no port. (Annual report of the Board of Regents of the Smithsonian Institution . . . 1897. Report of the U. S. National Museum, pt. 2) 14-19898 Q11.U5 1897, pt. 2 The memorial meeting was held February 13, 1897, in the lecture room of the United States Na- tional Museum, under the auspices of the Joint Com- mission of the Scientific Societies, and in cooperation with the patriotic and historical societies of Washington. Report of the meeting held in commemoration of the life and services of George Brown Goode, with a memoir by Samuel P. Langley: p. 1-61. Papers by George Brown Goode (p. 63-477): Museum-history and museums of history. — The genesis of the United States National Museum. — The principles of museum administration. — The museums of the future. — The origin of the national scientific and educational institutions of the United 63O / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES States. — The beginnings of natural history in America. — The beginnings of American science. — The first national scientific congress (Washington, April, 1844) and its connection with the organiza- tion of the American Association. The published writings of George Brown Goode, 1869-1896. By R. I. Geare: p. 479-500. Dr. Goode, although cut off by pneumonia in his 46th year, accomplished more than most men during his life (1851-96). He was an authority on fishes, and co-author of the monumental Oceanic Ichthy- ology (Washington, Govt. Print. Off., 1895. 2 v.). Since 1887 he had been Assistant Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution, in charge of the National Museum, and was the outstanding museum admin- istrator of his day. Many of the papers collected here are still, after six decades or more, among the most valuable writings on their subjects. 4727. Oliver, John W. History of American tech- nology. New York, Ronald Press, 1956. 676 p. 56-6269 T21.O45 "The distinction of this volume is that it repre- sents the first comprehensive historical account of American technology and invention as a basic con- tribution to the nation's culture," says Guy Stanton Ford in a brief foreword. Largely a compilation from secondary authorities, it derives its value from its systematic inclusiveness, and from its regular emphasis on the technological foundations of eco- nomic developments which are in other respects well known. Even in the 17th century the American colonists designed new tools, and devised new meth- ods of cultivating the soil, tanning leather, and processing wool and flax: already "American tech- nology was born." "The 'homespun' age was on its way out during the second decade of the 19th cen- tury." In America's industrial revolution, unlike England's, the workers, farmer-mechanics trained in the workshops of New England, welcomed the machine. As early as 1798 Eli Whitney evolved "the system of interchangeable parts and thus paved the way for America's unique contribution to world technology — mass production." By 1850 America had become "a nation alert to science" as the prin- cipal agency of social progress. The author pursues his subject with unflagging enthusiasm through the age of steel and the electrical age, and concludes with an optimistic glance at the potential effects of automation. The footnote references at the end of each chapter are supplemented when necessary by a bibliographical note. 4728. Scientific and technical societies of the United States and Canada. 6th ed. Washington, National Academy of Sciences, National Research Council, 1955. 447 p. 27-21604 AS15.H3 This handbook appeared first in 1908, and further editions were published between 1927 and 1948. In this edition entries are limited to "membership group organizations," and other categories, such as trade associations with research activities, have been elimi- nated. The data on Canadian associations have been supplied by the National Research Council of Can- ada. In addition to the address, names of officers, and date of organization, the purpose, number of members, frequency of meetings, size of library, research funds, medals awarded, and publications of the societies are given. 4729. Special Libraries Association. Science-Tech- nology Division. Handbook of scientific and technical awards in the United States and Canada, 1900-1952. Edited by Margaret A. Firth. New York, Special Libraries Association, 1956. xxiv, 491 p. 56-7004 Q141.S63 A "selected listing of the most important awards presented by certain of the scientific and technical societies in the United States and Canada to indi- viduals in recognition of their meritorious achieve- ment in scientific fields." Awards granted by foundations, universities, publishers, and companies are not included. The separate listings for the United States and Canada are arranged alphabeti- cally under the names of the societies. The recip- ients are listed chronologically under the names of the societies. Personal name, award title, and sub- ject indexes permit of ready reference. Through 1928 only the names of recipients are supplied. Reference to published sources of information about their lives and the circumstances of the awards are cited from 1929. 4730. Struik, Dirk Jan. Yankee science in the making. Boston, Little, Brown, 1948. xiii, 430 p. 48-8195 Q127.U6S8 1948 Bibliography: p. [387]— 416. A professor of mathematics at the Massachusetts Institute of Technology investigates science and technology in the stable community of New Eng- land between 1780 and i860, on the premise that the history of science "must include its sociology." The colonial and revolutionary periods are briefly treated in two preliminary chapters. In 1780 New England had only a few scientists, with interests limited to astronomy, medicine, or agronomy, and this situation was not greatly altered during the Federalist period. Only with the Jacksonian period, opening about 1830, did there arise "a mass interest in science and technical questions." Major scien- tific institutions were founded, civil engineering be- came an influential profession, and technological advances permitted modern industries to assume their shapes. By 1863, when President Lincoln or- SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY / 6 3 I ganized the National Academy of Sciences, "New England science had grown into American science." Sketches of many significant figures in pure science and technology are incorporated in the narrative. B. Particular Sciences 4731. Browne, Charles Albert, and Mary Elvira Weeks. A history of the American Chemi- ical Society, seventy-five eventful years. Washing- ton, American Chemical Society, 1952. 526 p. 53-238 QD1.A58 Includes bibliographies. Partial contents. — Precursors. — Beginnings. — The secession period. — The new order. — The twenty-fifth anniversary, before and after. — Special- ization and dangers of disunion. — Strivings for con- solidation. — International relations, 1876-1914. — The American Chemical Society and the First World War. — The Society completes its first half century. — The start of the Society's second half century. — The American Chemical Society during the Second World War. — The postwar reorganiza- tion. — Growth and readjustment. — Increasing pro- fessional consciousness. — International relations, 1918-1951. — Contributions of the Divisions. — Pub- lications. — Awards, memorial lectures, and research foundations. — The diamond jubilee. Dr. Browne, historian of the American Chemical Society from 1945 until his death in 1947, com- pleted only nine chapters of this history. Dr. Weeks of the staff of the Kresge-Hooker Scientific Library at Wayne University completed the unfinished chap- ters and supplied the supplemental material. The Preface is, for the most part, a memorial to Dr. Browne. 4732. Chittenden, Russell H. The development of physiological chemistry in the United States. New York, Chemical Catalog Co., 1930. 427 p. (American Chemical Society. Monograph series, no. 54) 30-32722 QP514.C5 The American Chemical Society, by arrangement with the Interallied Conference of Pure and Applied Science (1919), undertook the production of a series of scientific and technological monographs of which this study is one. The author's association with the first laboratory of physiological chemistry in Amer- ica at the Sheffield Scientific School, Yale University, where he was professor of the subject from 1882 to 1922, has given him exceptional competence to write this history. He traces the development of physio- logical chemistry in the United States from 1870 to the late 1920's in the scientific laboratories and investigations, the personalities and writings, and the universities and experimental stations which have contributed to the "knowledge of the chemico- physiological processes of the animal body." 4733. Fairchild, Herman Le Roy. The Geological Society of America, 1888-1930. A chapter in earth science history. New York, The Society, 1932. xvii, 232 p. 32-24464 QE1.G218F3 At the request of the Council of the Geological Society of America, the secretary of the Society from 1891 to 1906, who also served as president in 1912, has written a history of the Society from its formal organization by himself and twelve Fellows, since deceased, on December 27, 1888, to 1930. The story of the Society and its offshoots — the Paleontological Society, the Mineralogical Society of America, and the Society of Economic Geologists — is preceded by an historical sketch of geological science from its Greco-Latin beginnings during the five centuries before Christ, to its development in Western Europe and America through the year 1888. While this history was in the press the Society was bequeathed some four and a quarter million dollars, which placed it among the wealthiest scientific societies in the United States. 4734- Geiser, Samuel W. Naturalists of the frontier. [2d. ed., rev. and enl.] Dallas, University Press, Southern Methodist University, 1948. 296 p. 48-7357 QH26.G42 1948 "Principal sources": p. 264-269. Contents. — The naturalist on the frontier. — Jacob Boll. — In defense of Jean Louis Berlandier. — Thomas Drummond. — Audubon in Texas. — Louis Cachand Ervenberg. — Ferdinand Jakob Lind- heimer. — Ferdinand Roemer, and his travels in Texas. — Charles Wright. — Gideon Lincecum. — Julien Reverchon. — Gustaf Wilhelm Belfrage. — Notes on scientists of the first frontier. The beginnings of science in the Southwest, espe- cially Texas, and the struggle for economic survival on the frontier are presented in the biographies of these early naturalists. The second edition con- tains one biography and a chapter on scientific study in the Old South prior to 1850 which did not appear in the first (1937). The author says that the men whose lives have been sketched here are but a hand- ful compared with the scores of workers "who dur- 632 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES ing the frontier period contributed to our cultural and scientific advance," and appends a "Partial List of Naturalists and Collectors in Texas" (p. 270- 284), which gives some biographical information and references to sources. Joseph A. Ewan suggests that his Roc\y Mountain Naturalists (Denver, University of Denver Press, 1950. 358 p.) may be used as a companion piece to Geiser's book. It contains biographical sketches of Edwin James, John C. Fre- mont, Charles C. Parry, Edward L. Greene, Thomas C. Porter, Harry N. Patterson, Marcus E. Jones, Eugene Penard, and Theodore D. A. Cockerell; a 200-page roster of Rocky Mountain naturalists (1682-1932); and bibliographical notes. 4735. Haynes, Williams. Chemical pioneers; the founders of the American chemical industry. New York, Van Nostrand, 1939. 288 p. 39-17461 TP139.H38 Originally published serially in Chemical Indus- tries, and projected as a two-volume work, the second volume of which apparently has not been pub- lished. After describing the pioneer efforts of John Winthrop, Jr., in 17th-century Massachusetts, the volume outlines the lives of 15 men born between 1 80 1 and 1865 whose activities extended from pure research to the development of practical processes and the organization of complex manufacturing en- terprises. The progress of a new technology and a new industry is illustrated in these sketches of George D. Rosengarten, Martin Kalbfleish, Alex- ander Cochrane, James Jay Mapes, Eugene R. Gras- selli, George T. Lewis, Lucien C. Warner, Edward Mallinckrodt, August Klipstein, Ernest C. Klipstein, Martin Dennis, Jacob Hasslacher, John F. Queeny, and Frank S. Washburn. 4736. Meisel, Max. A bibliography of American natural history; the pioneer century, 1769- 1865; the role played by the scientific societies; scien- tific journals; natural history museums and botanic gardens; state geological and natural history surveys; federal exploring expeditions in the rise and progress of American botany, geology, mineralogy, paleon- tology and zoology. Brooklyn, N. Y., Premier Pub. Co., 1924-29. 3 v. 24-30970 Z7408.U5M5 Contents. — v. 1. An annotated bibliography of the publications relating to the history, biography and bibliography of American natural history and to institutions, during colonial times and the pio- neer century, which have been published up to 1924; with a classified subject and geographic index; and a bibliography of biographies. — v. 2. The institutions which have contributed to the rise and progress of American natural history, which were founded or organized between 1769 and 1844. — v. 3. The in- stitutions founded or organized between 1845 and 1865. Bibliography of books. Chronological tables. Index to authors and institutions. Addenda to v. 1. This work presents in a convenient form so much information concerning the sciences, persons, and institutions with which it is concerned that it is far more than a bibliography. It traces "bibliographi- cally the rise and progress of natural history in the United States, from the formation of an active American Philosophical Society at Philadelphia in 1769, to the close of the Civil War in 1865," and is an invaluable guide for all those who are interested in the several branches of natural history which, otherwise, have very limited representation in this chapter. In volumes 2 and 3, the institutional bibli- ographies, arranged according to date of foundation, are each preceded by a brief history of the organiza- tion in question. 4737. Merrill, George P. The first one hundred years of American geology. New Haven, Yale University Press, 1924. xxi, 773 p. 24-21175 QE13.U6M6 The author was Head Curator of Geology, U. S. National Museum, from 1897 until his death in 1929. This was his third and most comprehensive \ book on the history of North American geology up to the end of the 19th century. Progress during that century, according to Merrill, was "due almost wholly to the accumulation of observed facts and the conclusions drawn therefrom," large deductive hypotheses and synthetic research being impossible until toward its close. Chapter I deals with a period dominated by the Scottish-born William Maclure who made the first geological map of the United \ States (1809, rev. 1817), described as "the first map ', of its scope in the history of geology." Chapter II . describes the influence of Amos Eaton, "the most prominent worker as well as the most profuse writer of the decade." Chapters III to VIII outline the work of State surveys during the five decades from 1830 to 1880, and the national surveys which cul- minated in the establishment of the U. S. Geological Survey in 1879. The former are documented in even greater detail in Merrill's Contributions to a History of American State Geological and Natural History Surveys (Washington, Govt. Print. Off., 1920. 549 p.). The book concludes with a dis- cussion of the age of the earth as variously estimated by a number of geologists and other scientists. 4738. Smallwood, William Martin. Natural his- tory and the American mind. In collabora- tion with Mabel Sarah Coon Smallwood. New York, Columbia University Press, 1941. xiii, 445 p. illus. (Columbia studies in American culture, no. 8) 41-16864 QH21.U5S5 Bibliography: p. [3551-424. SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY / 633 "Broadly speaking, natural history included all the concrete sciences," but usually in the form of composite observations without the application of rigorous deductive method. The authors trace this habit of mind in the writings of explorers and travelers in the new continent, and its occasional penetration into the curricula of the colonial colleges. In the course of the 18th century natural history be- came a serious avocation in Charleston, Philadelphia, New York, and Boston, where it stimulated the establishment of museums, societies, and scientific journals. One chapter deals with the part played by the microscope, and the last records the passing of the exploring naturalist, whose place was taken first by the classifying naturalist, and then by the scientific specialist. The authors have selected for inclusion in this book those individuals who seem typical of the "naturalist's period" (1725 to 1840 or 50). The extensive bibliography indicates the wide-spread research that has gone into this study which, like natural history itself, is miscellaneous and scattering, but contains many interesting glimpses of early American culture. 4739. Smith, David Eugene, and Jekuthiel Gins- burg. A history of mathematics in America before 1900. Chicago, Published by the Mathemati- cal Association of America with the cooperation of the Open Court Pub. Co., 1934. 209 p. (The Carus mathematical monographs, no. 5) 34-9605 QA27.U5S6 The monographs in this series are intended for teachers and students specializing in mathematics, for scientific workers in other fields, and for laymen who wish to increase their knowledge without pro- longed study. Here the authors are primarily in- terested in original research in higher mathematics. They consider the racial inheritance of the colonists, and their limited needs even for applied mathe- matics. The development of college work, the formation of scientific societies, and the publication of a few mathematical articles in journals still left "modern mathematics . . . substantially unknown in America in the 18th century." The third chapter surveys the work of the 19th century down to 1875, largely "a time of preparation for action." The final chapter, nearly half the book, covers the last quarter of the century, which "saw laid the founda- tions upon which the scholars of today have so suc- cessfully built." It points out the original work then accomplished in algebra, theory of functions, quantics or forms, transformations, calculus, differ- ential equations, theory of numbers, probability, geometry, and other branches. 431240—60— — 42 4740. Smith, Edgar F. Chemistry in America; chapters from the history of the science in the United States. New York, Appleton, 1914. xiii, 356 p. 14-5967 QD18.U6S6 By the end of the 18th century chemistry was already a part of the curriculum of the University of Pennsylvania and the American Philosophical Society (1743), although devoted to other subjects, did not exclude chemistry from its interests. "The earliest chemical contribution from this country, bearing the date September 10, 1768, appears on the pages of the Transactions of this Society" [in vol. 1, 1789]. From that beginning, the author has brought together a miscellany of original materials such as lectures, monographs, and letters, with brief biographies of Benjamin Silliman, Robert Hare, J. Lawrence Smith, M. Carey Lea, Oliver Walcott Gibbs, and others, illustrating the development of chemistry in America for more than a hundred years. Several quite long pieces, such as Thomas P. Smith's Sketch of the Revolutions in Chemistry (Philadelphia, 1798), are reprinted in full. The result is an unsystematic source book rather than "chapters of history." 4741. Welker, Robert Henry. Birds and men; American birds in science, art, literature, and conservation, 1 800-1 900. Cambridge, Belknap Press of Harvard University Press, 1955. 230 p. 55-11608 QL681.W4 Selected bibliography: p. [2I3J-220. The birds of North America have been described in the writings of explorers, naturalists, and literary men since Columbus, but modern ornithology in the United States began at the opening of the 19th century, when the pioneer specialist, Alexander Wil- son (1766-1813), made his tour of the eastern cities, the Ohio and Mississippi Valley frontier, and the Deep South in search of material for his American Ornithology (Philadelphia, 1808-14. 9 v.). Mr. Welker's book is a guide to our 19th-century ornitho- logical literature, and to its interrelations with Amer- ican belles-lettres, painting, and popular attitudes. In addition to chapters on Wilson and Audubon, the bird artist who was unknown until discovered by Wilson, there are discussions of the place of birds in the writings of Thoreau, Emerson, Whitman, Burroughs, and others. By the end of the century groups for the study and protection of birds had organized the fights against bird-destroying "boys, pot-hunters, women," in a movement for state and federal protection laws which became wide-spread early in the 20th century. A well selected series of plates illustrates the steady progress in drawing birds, and some instances in which Audubon helped himself to Wilson's sketches. 634 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES C. Individual Scientists 4742. [AgassizJ Marcou, Jules. Life, letters, and works of Louis Agassiz. New York, Mac- millan, 1895. 2 v. illus. 4-17043/2 QH31.A2M3 His reputation already established by his work on the classification of fishes, the geological distribution of fossil fish, and the glacial theory of the earth, Louis Agassiz (1807-1873) came to the United States in 1846 to deliver a series of Lowell Institute lectures, and remained to become a leader among American naturalists. The author was "the last survivor of the small band of European naturalists who came to America with him," and strove to temper admiration with justice. The quotations are limited to "letters of Agassiz, addressed to practical naturalists, his contemporaries, working on kindred subjects," but include none used by Mrs. Elizabeth Cary Agassiz in her life of her husband (1885). The first volume covers Agassiz' life from his birth in a village in French Switzerland to his arrival in Boston 39 years later. The second narrates his life in the United States — his professorship at Harvard, his association with scientific organizations and ex- peditions, and his relations to the intellectual society of the period. "By far the most important contri- bution of Agassiz to natural history during his life in America," Marcou thought, was the Essay on Classification published in 1857 as tne introduction to a massive work on the natural history of the United States which was left incomplete after four volumes had appeared. An annotated list of pub- lications concerning Agassiz and a catalog of his scientific writings appear in the Appendixes. Louis Agassiz, Scientist and Teacher, by James D. Teller (Columbus, Ohio State University Press, 1947. 145 p.) discusses "the effect that his per- sonality and vigorous method of attacking the un- known had on the development of teaching and research in America." 4743* [Audubon] Herrick, Francis H. Audubon the naturalist, a history of his life and time. 2d ed. New York, Appleton-Century, 1938. 2 v. in 1. illus. 38-27162 QL31.A9H4 1938 "Original documents": v. 2, p. [313]— 379- Bibliography: v. 2, p. 401-461. The son of a French planter in Santo Domingo, John James Audubon (1785-1851) left France in 1803 for his father's American estate, Mill Grove, located along Perkiomen Creek in Pennsylvania. It was there that he became interested in American bird life and carried out the first "banding" experi- ment, repeated a hundred years later by the Bird Banding Society, "in order to gather exact data upon the movements of individuals of all migratory species in every part of the continent." From about 1805 he was more or less constantly engaged in drawing or painting birds, which he continued after his removal to Kentucky in 1807, and even after financial disaster overtook him in 1819. He eventually found a London engraver and publisher for The Birds of America, which appeared in 87 numbers of 5 plates each during the years 1827-38. The 435 hand-colored copper-plate engravings were finally bound into four elephant folio volumes, at $1,000 the set. The venture was supported by 82 American and 79 European subscribers. Audubon's text explanatory of the engravings was separately published at Edinburgh as Ornithological Biography (1831-39. 5 v.). The present life, the first edition of which appeared in 1917, is crowded with bio- graphical detail, in part derived from a "unique and extraordinary collection of Audubonian records" which the author discovered in a small French town. Audubon has become the patron saint of American nature students and wildlife conservationists: the numerous State and local Audubon societies bear his name; Mill Grove has been made into a memorial and sanctuary; and 1951 was designated as the Audubon Centennial Year. 4744. [Baird] Dall, William Healey. Spencer Fullerton Baird; a biography, including selections from his correspondence with Audubon, Agassiz, Dana, and others. Philadelphia, Lippin- cott, 1915. xvi, 462 p. 15-11472 QL31.B25D2 Baird (1823-1887) was the second Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution (1878), who also became the first U. S. Commissioner of Fish and Fisheries, and organized the work of the Commission, the predeces- sor agency of the present Fish and Wildlife Service. This biography is based on data collected and ar- ranged by his daughter, Lucy Hunter Baird, Baird's original journal extending from 1838 to 1887, and a quantity of miscellaneous material collected by Herbert A. Gill, an associate in the Fish Commis- sion. The greater part of its text consists of letters written to or by other scientists, which afford an intimate and lively view of the scientific life in mid- century. As an officer of the Smithsonian Institu- tion from 1850, Baird developed and maintained the National Museum, and as Commissioner of Fisheries he won international recognition through his scien- SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY / 6 35 tific research into the maintenance of food-fish populations. 4745. [Bartram] Earnest, Ernest P. John and William Bartram, botanists and explorers, 1699-1777, 1739-1823. Philadelphia, University of Pennsylvania Press, 1940. 187 p. (Pennsylvania lives) 41-86 QK31.B3E3 Bibliographical note: p. 1 81-182. John Bartram, described by Linnaeus as the "greatest natural botanist in the world," established a botanical garden on his farm on the Schuylkill River as early as 1729 or 1730. He won a reputation before Franklin, whom he willingly joined in creat- ing a scientific and cultural center in Philadelphia. He became one of the nine founders of the Ameri- can Philosophical Society. By correspondence and exchange of plants, by traveling throughout the colonies and publishing their observations, John Bartram and his son William made the natural his- tory of America known to Europeans. Here the author attempts to clear up some problems that still remain concerning William, but deals more fully with John, "because of his pioneer work, his great originality, and the lack of any complete study of his life and work." See also nos. 4236-4238, 4247-4250. 4746. [Bowditch] Berry, Robert Elton. Yankee stargazer; the life of Nathaniel Bowditch. New York, McGraw-Hill, 1941. 234 p. 41-28345 QB36.B7B4 "Among the sources": p. 225-227. The author has used Nathaniel Bowditch's sea journals and notebooks, the memoirs of his sons and friends, and the diaries of contemporaries to pro- duce this biography of the New England astronomer and mathematician. Bowditch (1773-1838) had little formal schooling, but read scientific books dur- ing his years in a cooper shop and a ship chandlery. Life on the Salem water front aroused his interest in navigation, and his ability to make calculations impressed Captain John Gibaut, who offered him a chance to go to sea. Six of the twelve chapters describe Bowditch's experiences on the five voyages which he made between 1795 and 1803, and the observations which led to his publications on celes- tial navigation. The New American Practical Navi- gator (1802), known as "the seaman's bible," or more simply as "Bowditch," became the textbook in private schools of navigation, and standard equip- ment in most sea chests. Regularly reprinted, it has been published since 1868 by the U. S. Govern- ment. In later years Bowditch published his trans- lation of the Mecanique celeste, and "made an epoch in American science by bringing the great work of Laplace down to the reach of the best American students of his time." Bowditch modesdy dis- claimed comparison with seminal minds like La- place and Newton, but his works have been "the greatest single influence on United States naviga- tion and seamanship." 4747. [Compton] Compton, Arthur Holly. Atomic quest, a personal narrative. New York, Oxford University Press, 1956. 370 p. 56-1 1 1 14 QC773.A1C65 This book is at once a history of atomic energy and the personal narrative of one of the outstanding scientists responsible for initiating and carrying through the wartime atomic project in the United States. The author (b. 1892) describes the research that led to the release of atomic energy in useful amounts, the proposal of an atomic weapon to the government, the preparation of the atomic explo- sives, and the decisions which preceded their use in World War II. In view of the unprecedented destructiveness of atomic weapons, the author con- cludes that "we can see the powers that shape our destiny working with us toward the elimination of war." Dr. Compton's early life is briefly narrated in Chapter 3. From 1945 to 1953 he was chancellor of Washington University in St. Louis, where he sought to go beyond the traditional education pro- gram, and to create a "new vision of world affairs" and "an enduring civilization where men and women can rise to the best that is in them." George O. Robinson's And What of Tomorrow (New York, Comet Press Books, 1956. 178 p.) combines a nar- rative of "the atomic adventure" of the Manhattan Project with many human interest stories illustrat- ing the devotion of the scientists and other workers to their task. The names of universities and other organizations participating in long-term research programs for the adaptation of atomic energy to peacetime uses suggest the possibilities opening before us. 4748. [Cope] Osborn, Henry Fairfield. Cope: master naturalist; the life and letters of Ed- ward Drinker Cope, with a bibliography of his writ- ings classified by subject; a study of the pioneer and foundadon periods of vertebrate paleontology in America. With the co-operation of Helen Ann Warren. Illustrated with drawings, and restora- tions by Charles R. Knight under the direction of Professor Cope. Princeton, Princeton University Press, 1 93 1. xvi, 740 p. 31-11875 QH31.C8O72 Edward Drinker Cope (1 840-1 897) was the rival of Othniel C. Marsh in the field of vertebrate pale- ontology, and the controversy between the two con- tinued for 25 years. The appearance of this biog- raphy of Cope hastened the publication of Schu- chert's life of Marsh (no. 4754). The author has had access to the lifelong correspondence of Cope with 636 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES his family, which throws "new light on his per- sonality" and "forms a priceless picture of the United States in the Civil and post-Civil War period." The years of exploration and discovery (to 1880), the period of research, publication, and interpreta- tion (to 1889), and Cope's professorship in the Uni- versity of Pennsylvania are described in detail. Chapter 7 tells how Cope applied "his wonderful powers of generalization and induction" to shine "forth as a creative thinker alike in Herpetology, Ichthyology, Geology, Mammalogy," as well as in vertebrate paleontology, and so deserves the tide of "Master Naturalist." The classified bibliography of Cope's principal papers fills 150 pages (591-740). 4749. [Dana] Gilman, Daniel C. The life of James Dwight Dana, scientific explorer, mineralogist, geologist, zoologist, professor in Yale University. New York, Harper, 1899. 409 p. 99-5509 QE22.D26G4 Bibliography of Dana's writings: p. 385-394. Dr. Gilman, famous as the first president of Johns Hopkins University, had been a colleague of Dana at Yale, where he taught geography until 1872. He calls his life of Dana (1813-1895) "personal rather than scientific." However, Dana's "Scien- tific Correspondence" forms Part II of the book (p. 219 ff.) and more than a hundred pages are devoted to the U. S. Exploring Expedition under Captain Charles Wilkes (1838-42). It was his reports as the mineralogist and geologist of that expedition, published between 1846 and 1854, which established Dana's position in those fields at home and abroad. As editor of the American Journal of Science, as author of A System of Mineralogy (1837) and a Manual of Geology (1862) which went through numerous editions, and as the first Silliman Professor of Natural History (later changed to Ge- ology and Mineralogy) at Yale, he remained at the head of his profession, and received many academic honors and scientific medals. 4750. [Franklin] Franklin, Benjamin. Benjamin Franklin's Experiments; a new edition of Franklin's Experiments and observations on elec- tricity. Edited, with a critical and historical introd., by I. Bernard Cohen. Cambridge, Harvard Uni- versity Press, 1941. xxviii, 453 p. A41-4483 QC516.F85 1941 "Bibliographical table": p. 158-161. Benjamin Franklin (1706-1790) was able to de- vote only six or seven years to concentrated scientific inquiry, but they brought him enduring fame as the world's foremost "electrician." During the years 1747-49 "he laid the foundations of modern electrical science," and in his book he introduced much of its enduring terminology. In characteristic 18th- century style, Franklin put his scientific writings into the form of letters; those collected in his Experi- ments and Observations on Electricity were ad- dressed to Peter Collinson, Ebenezer Kinnersley, and others of scientific bent, and are supplemented by a number of letters to Franklin commenting upon his theories. Mr. Cohen's text is in part based upon Franklin's manuscript letters, which are fuller than the printed versions. His long and scholarly intro- duction deals with Franklin's scientific interests in general, electrical knowledge before Franklin, the nature and significance of Franklin's electrical dis- coveries, and the editions and translations of Experi- ments and Observations which appeared between 175 1 and 1774. 4751. [Gibbs] Wheeler, Lynde Phelps. Josiah Willard Gibbs; the history of a great mind. Rev. ed. New Haven, Yale University Press, 1952. 270 p. 52-14822 QA29.G5W5 1952 Bibliography: p. [25i]-256. The scion of an old Connecticut family, Willard Gibbs ( 1 839-1903) received the fifth doctorate con- ferred by Yale, the first American university to recog- nize graduate study, and was professor of mathe- matical physics there from 1871 until his death. The author, a former student of Gibbs, evaluates the work of his teacher as an exponent of thermodynamics, statistical mechanics, and optics, and describes him as a quiet, unassuming scholar completely devoid of the eccentricities usually ascribed to genius. But a genius he was, with "a mind which proceeded from ascertained facts to their utmost implications by such rigorous logic that not one of his conclusions has ever been found in error." Gibbs' influence was exerted almost entirely through his writings, which received early recognition and interpretation abroad. The publication (1876-78) of his paper "On the Equilib- rium of Heterogeneous Substances," which was something of an act of faith on the part of the Con- necticut Academy of Arts and Sciences, proved a landmark in the development of modern physics and in the spread of Gibbs' fame. The enduring im- portance of his work dealing with the relations of heat to other forms of energy was emphasized by Yale University on the 100th anniversary of his birth in a brochure prepared by the President's Committee on University Development: A Professor's Theory and Its Practical Uses: The Wor\ of /. Willard Gibbs and Some Applications to Industry. Its calls Gibbs "one of the great scientists of modern times, and one of the architects of the industry which is so important a part of our civilization." SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY / 637 4752. [Henry] Coulson, Thomas. Joseph Henry, his life and work. Princeton, Princeton University Press, 1950. 352 p. 50-7249 QC16.H37C6 Bibliography: p. 344-346. The director of museum research, Franklin Insti- tute of the State of Pennsylvania, has written the first full-length biography of this 19th-century physicist in order to establish his rightful place among America's great men of science. Henry (1797-1878) lost his own papers by fire in 1865, so the author has relied heavily on the letters found among the manuscript records of the Smithsonian Institution for glimpses into his life and work. The first half of the book is devoted, for the most part, to Henry's experiments during his tenure as pro- fessor at Albany Academy, and at Princeton. About 1830 he discovered the principles of electromagnetic induction which, with his ten other basic discoveries in the electrical realm, have been essential to practi- cally every commercial application of electricity, including the telegraph, telephone, and radio. The last half of the book describes Henry as the first director of the Smithsonian Institution (from 1846), and as a protagonist in the "telegraph controversy" with Samuel F. B. Morse, as to their respective shares in its invention. It summarizes his place in science as a discoverer, an organizer, and an ex- ponent of the value of collective research. 4753. [Jefferson] Martin, Edwin T. Thomas Jefferson: scientist. New York, Schuman, 1952. 289 p. 5 2 -7559 E33 2 - M 33 References: p. 261-283. Thomas Jefferson (1743-1826) "enjoyed a high contemporary repute both as a statesman of broad culture and as a scientist, who applied 'philosophy' for the good of his native country and the general human welfare." His correspondence reveals his dual devotion to science and to public service. This is the most extensive analysis to date of Jefferson's broad and insatiable interest in science. It is not only a study of the man — his scientific character- istics, attitudes, practices, and principles — but also a history of American scientific development during his age — inventions, the study of fossils, geology, meteorology, etc. Jefferson's eagerness to refute the misrepresentations of America made by Buffon, DePauw, Raynal, and other Europeans, led to the publication of his Notes on the State of Virginia (1781-82) (nos. 150-153). Chapter 9 on "Politics, Religion, and Science" quotes from contemporary sources to illustrate how Jefferson was assailed by his political opponents because of his concern for science. Dr. Charles A. Browne's study of the sources of some of Jefferson's scientific opinions: Thomas Jef- ferson and the Scientific Trends of His Time ( t Wal- tham, Mass., Chronica Botanica Co.] 1944. [3633— 423 p.), reprinted from volume 8, number 3 of the Chronica Botanica, is conveniendy brief. 4754. [Marsh] Schuchert, Charles, and Clara Mae LeVene. O. C. Marsh, pioneer in paleontology. New Haven, Yale University Press, 1940. xxi, 541 p. 40-14583 QE707.M4S32 Dr. Schuchert made the acquaintance of Marsh in 1892, and in 1904 succeeded to his chair of pale- ontology at Yale; Miss LeVene, as a staff member of Yale's Peabody Museum of Natural History, proc- essed the Marsh Papers. Othniel C. Marsh (1831- 1899) was a nephew of the eminent philanthropist George Peabody, who presented Yale with the Mu- seum in 1866. In the same year the Yale Corpora- tion established the first American chair of paleontology for the nephew, but attached no salary to it until 1896. Professor Marsh therefore felt free to put his major efforts into exploring the Far West for fossil remains, with results summed up in his two great monographs published by the U. S. Geo- logical Survey in 1896: The Dinosaurs of North America and Vertebrate Fossils [of the Denver Basin]. In 1882 he became the vertebrate paleon- tologist of the U. S. Geological Survey, which did compensate his services, and obtained much of his later collections. Marsh was the originator of the "authentic skeletal restorations" of the dinosaurs, which caught the public eye and brought him con- temporary fame. The volume concludes with a "List of Marsh Genera" (p. 495-501) and a chrono- logical list of some 300 titles written by Marsh (p. 503-526). 4755. [Millikan] Millikan, Robert A. Autobiog- raphy. New York, Prentice-Hall, 1950. xiv, 311 p. 50-7302 QC16.M58A3 To the names of the world-renowned physicists who have been awarded the Nobel prize, that of Robert A. Millikan (1868-1953) was added in 1923, "for his work on the uniform electric charge and the photo-electric effect." His fame was first estab- lished by his experimental measurements of the electric quantum of elements, which he succeeded in determining within one-thousandth of a degree of exactitude. Appointed professor of physics at the University of Chicago in 1902, Millikan served as director of the Norman Bridge Laboratory of Phys- ics and executive head of the California Institute of Technology from 192 1 until 1945. Written in a style "not beyond the comprehension of a twelfth- grade student who has had an elementary course in physics," Millikan's autobiography reflects the im- pact of the physical sciences on modern life. It nar- rates such episodes in his life as the experimental proof of the existence of the photon, the organiza- 638 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES tion of the National Research Council, the mobiliz- ing of science for both World War I and II, and the building of Caltech into a great research center for science and engineering. The reader is conscious throughout of Dr. Millikan's views on the relation- ship between science and religion, and on the re- sponsibility of the United States for the maintenance of world peace. 4756. [Newcomb] Newcomb, Simon. The remi- niscences of an astronomer. Boston, Hough- ton Mifflin, 1903. 424 p. 3-24278 QB36.N5 Simon Newcomb's (1835-1909) important in- vestigations in planetary and lunar motion brought him honorary membership in more than forty scien- tific organizations in some eighteen nations, and honorary degrees from at least seventeen universi- ties in ten nations. The results of his investigations have been adopted, more or less completely, by all nations for use in their nautical almanacs. A cen- tury after his birth he became the first astronomer to be elected to the American Hall of Fame. New- comb tells in a simple, direct fashion the story of his coming from Nova Scotia to the United States as a teacher, his chance meeting with Joseph Henry, his work as an astronomer and mathematician at the Naval Observatory, and his superintendence of the American Ephemeris and Nautical Almanac. He describes his interests in such diverse subjects as psychical research, education, and political economy. More than an autobiography, his Reminiscences portray the status of science and the work of scien- tists at home and abroad during the last half of the 19th century. 4757. [Powell] Darrah, William C. Powell of the Colorado. Princeton, Princeton Uni- versity Press, 195 1. 426 p. 51-11671 Q143.P8D25 Bibliography: p. [40i]~4i2. The author, a paleobotanist and engineer in- terested in the history of American science, spent ten years gathering the materials for this biography of a man who was both a distinguished geologist and a great public servant. It emphasizes his strug- gle to conserve the natural wealth of the West, to record the history of the American Indian, and to promote scientific research by the Government. After engaging in privately financed explorations in 1867-69, John Wesley Powell (1834-1902) made a thorough survey of the Colorado region on behalf of the Department of the Interior. In the report, Exploration of the Colorado River of the West and Its Tributaries, compiled by Powell for the Smith- sonian Institution, he pointed out that the formation of canyons is due to corrosive action of rivers on rocks, and coined phrases which have become part of every geologist's vocabulary. With his position as a geologist established, Powell took a leading part in the movement which in 1879 consolidated the overlapping government ventures into the U. S. Geological Survey. The Bureau of American Eth- nology was established at the same time; Powell was put at its head, and in the following year took over the Survey, administering both agencies until 1894, when ill health compelled him to relinquish the Survey. Other recent publications reflect a lively interest in "the Major": in 1954 appeared another full-length biography, by Wallace Earle Stegner (q. v.). Paul Meadows' John Wesley Powell: Frontiersman of Science is number 10 in the new series of University of Nebraska studies, July 1952 (106 p.). 4758. [Rittenhouse] Ford, Edward. David Rit- tenhouse, astronomer-patriot, 1 732-1 796. Philadelphia, University of Pennsylvania Press, 1946. 226 p. (Pennsylvania lives) 46-5428 QB36.R4F6 This is the first full-length biography of Ritten- house (1732-1796) since the Memoirs, by his nephew, William Barton, appeared in 18 13. Born near Germantown, Pa., of Mennonite stock, Ritten- house at 11 received an uncle's legacy of tools and books which aroused his interest in mathematics and mechanics. As a farmer, maker of clocks and mathematical instruments, he spent the first 35 years of his life at Norriton. During 1767-71 he built two brass orreries, working models of the solar system, which went to the Colleges of New Jersey and of Philadelphia, and were among the wonders of their day, greatly enhancing the reputation of their maker. He interrupted this labor in order to prepare for and make observations of the transit of Venus on June 3, 1769, with the aid of specially designed instruments, which earned him a place among the world's as- tronomers. After moving to Philadelphia in 1770, Rittenhouse began a daily record of weather data which he kept up until his death. He was fre- quently engaged on boundary and canal surveys during the colonial period. He served on the Com- mittee of Safety during the American Revolution, became a member of the General Assembly, state treasurer, and first Director of the U. S. Mint. 4759. [Silliman] Fulton, John F., and Elizabeth H. Thomson. Benjamin Silliman, 1779- 1864, pathfinder in American science. New York, Schuman, 1947. 294 p. (Life of science library) 47-11526 Q143.S56F8 Historical Library, Yale University School of Medicine, Publication no. 16. "Bibliography and sources": p. 279-284. Born in Fairfield, Connecticut, during the Ameri- SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY / 639 can Revolution, Benjamin Silliman reached maturity at a period when a widespread interest in chemistry was emerging. When only 23 he was elected to the newly created chair of chemistry and natural history at Yale, where he taught for more than half a cen- tury. Silliman made few original contributions to science, but won distinction as an "ambassador of science" through effective teaching, and by founding a medical school, a department for postgraduate study, and in 1847, the original chairs of the Sheffield Scientific School. His influence was extended out- side the University by his founding of the American Journal of Science (1818), which was "intended to embrace the circle of the physical sciences with their applications to the arts and to every other useful service," and, after 1833, by public lectures in cities as far away as Pittsburgh and New Orleans. This, the first comprehensive biography of Silliman since 1866, is based on family letters as well as on manu- script materials in Yale University and other repositories. 4760. [Torrey] Rodgers, Andrew Denny. John Torrey; a story of North American botany. Princeton, Princeton University Press, 1942. 352 p. 42-19817 QK31.T7R6 Bibliography: p. |ji6]-333. The history of American botany of the 19th cen- tury has been written by the author, a grandson of Sullivant, in this and two other books: "Noble Fellow," William Starling Sullivant (New York, Putnam, 1940. 361 p.), and American Botany, i8j3-i8gi: Decades of Transition (Princeton, Princeton University Press, 1944. 340 p.), which deals particularly with Asa Gray and his associates. The taxonomic work of John Torrey (1796-1873), botanist and chemist, influenced all those who fol- lowed him, although his reputation was eventually eclipsed by Asa Gray (1810-1888). Much of the information in this book derives from Torrey 's own correspondence, never before collected. Torrey spent most of his life in New York City, and some of his best known works are on the flora of his native state. He collaborated with Asa Gray in compiling the Flora of North America (New York, 1838-43), which describes all indigenous and naturalized plants growing north of Mexico, ar- ranged according to "the natural system." He pre- pared botanical catalogs for the United States Ex- ploring Expedition under Captain Wilkes, the Fre- mont Exploring Expedition to the Rocky Mountains, and others. D. Science and Government 4761. Baxter, James Phinney. Scientists against time. Boston, Little, Brown, 1946. 473 p. 46-7204 Q127.U6B3 The Office of Scientific Research and Develop- ment was created in 194 1 "for the purpose of assur- ing adequate provisions for research on scientific and medical problems relating to the national de- fense." In this official history of the OSRD, the president of Williams College tells the story of the transition in methods of warfare up to the use of the atomic bomb. He describes the race for supe- riority in new weapons in World War II, the new devices that were developed, the contributions of chemical research to the prosecution of the war, the discovery and use of new medicines for the treat- ment of military personnel, and the selection and training of scientists. A series of volumes, Science in World War II, covers in much greater detail the operations of OSRD. In that series Irvin Stewart's Organizing Scientific Research for War (Boston, Little, Brown, 1948. 358 p.), an administrative history of the Office, is of special interest for the relationship between government and science during a period of emergency. The OSRD was terminated by Executive Order in December 1947, and its liqui- dation entrusted to the National Military Establish- ment (now the Department of Defense). 4762. Brookings Institution, Washington, D. C. Institute for Government Research. Service monographs of the United States Government. Bal- timore, Johns Hopkins Press, 1919-28. 10 v. JK421.A1B6 The Institute for Government Research was estab- lished in 1916 as an "independent institution to con- sider the problems of public administration, and particularly those of the National Government, for the purposes of making known the most scientific practical principles and procedures that should ob- tain in the conduct of public affairs." Financed from the outset by the late Robert S. Brookings, in 1927 it was combined with two other such enter- prises to form the Brookings Institution. As the basis for a comprehensive study of the organization and operation of the National Government, the Insti- tute published this series of monographs describing the history, activities, and organization of some 55 United States Government agencies. Each mono- 64O / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES graph contains a bibliography which lists relevant Government documents and other sources. The following have been selected as being particularly pertinent to the interrelations of science and Gov- ernment. Numbers 1 and 9 were published by D. Appleton and Company, New York. 4763. 1. The U. S. Geological Survey . . . 1919. 163 p. 19-9267 QE76.B7 4764. 9. The Weather Bureau ... by Gustavus A. Weber. 1922. 87 p. 22-19464 Q875.U7W4 4765. 10. The Public Health Service ... by Laurence F. Schmeckebier. 1923. 298 p. 23-8224 RA11.B19S3 4766. 16. The Coast and Geodetic Survey . . . by Gustavus A. Weber. 1923. 107 p. 23-8296 QB296.U85 1923 4767. 31. The Patent Office ... by Gustavus A. Weber. 1924. 127 p. 24-4936 T223.P2W4 4768. 32. The Office of Experiment Stations . . . by Milton Conover. 1924. 178 p. 24-8456 S21.E9C6 4769. 35. The Bureau of Standards ... by Gus- tavus A. Weber. 1925. 299 p. 25-23707 QC100.U58 1925 4770. 39. The Naval Observatory ... by Gustavus A. Weber. 1926. 101 p. 26-9845 QB82.U85 4771. 42. The Hydrographic Office ... by Gus- tavus A. Weber. 1926. 112 p. 26-15570 VK597.U5W4 4772. 52. The Bureau of Chemistry and Soils . . . by Gustavus A. Weber. 1928. 218 p. 29-2042 S585.W4 4773. Gellhorn, Walter. Security, loyalty, and science. Ithaca, Cornell University Press, 1950. 300 p. (Cornell studies in civil liberty) 50-14649 UB270.G42 The contributions of science toward winning a war, and the expanding reliance of national defense on scientific developments have restricted, in some areas, the exchange of ideas between scientists whose individual freedoms have been curtailed in the na- tional interest. Made possible by a grant from the Rockefeller Foundation, this is one of Cornell's series of studies of "the impact upon our civil liberties of current governmental programs designed to ensure internal security and to expose and control disloyal or subversive conduct." It deals with the adminis- tration of security policies in "sensitive" areas of scientific research. Chapter 8 emphasizes the need for fair procedures, and the author's "Concluding Thoughts" warn that "the focus upon opinion as a measure of loyalty tends to discourage the holding of any opinion at all." 4774. National Academy of Sciences, Washington, D. C. A history of the first half-century of the National Academy of Sciences, 1863-1913. Edited by Frederick W. True. Washington, 1913. 399 P- .. 13-35434 Q11.N286 "To afford recognition to those men of science who had done original work of real importance and thereby to stimulate them and others to further en- deavors; and to aid the Government in the solution of technical scientific problems having a practical bearing on the conduct of public business," Con- gress chartered the National Academy of Sciences in 1863. The story of the Academy's accomplishments during its first 50 years includes a chapter on "The Academy as the Scientific Adviser of the Govern- ment." In that role its studies have shaped the cre- ation of various Government agencies such as the U. S. Forest Service and the Geological Survey. In addition to its many publications in the several sciences, the National Academy, since 1877, has pub- lished a series of Biographical memoirs which often contain information concerning American scientists not otherwise available. The National Research Council originated in 19 16, when the National Academy addressed President Wilson, offering to coordinate the non-governmental scientific and tech- nical resources of the country with the military and naval agencies of the Government in the interest of national security. The Council was reorganized on a permanent basis in 1919. A History of the Na- tional Research Council, /9/9-/95J (Washington, The Council, 1933. 61 p.) has been published as no. 106 of the Council's Reprint and circular series. 4775. Oehser, Paul H. Sons of science; the story of the Smithsonian Institution and its lead- ers. New York, Schuman, 1949. xvii, 220 p. (Life of science library) 49-526 Q11.S8O4 Selected bibliography: p. 205-208. A concise history by the chief of the Smithsonian's Editorial and Publications Division. Built and or- ganized with funds provided by the will of James Smithson (1765-1829), English scientist, "for the increase and diffusion of knowledge among men," the Smithsonian Institution was incorporated in 1846. It may well be thought of as the first Ameri- SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY / 64I can foundation of national scope, for "it enjoys the advantages of a privately endowed institution and at the same time is an establishment of the United States government." The history of the Institution is here organized around the careers of its secretaries, all of whom have been scientists: Joseph Henry, physicist (to 1878); Spencer Fullerton Baird, biolo- gist (to 1887); Samuel Pierpont Langley, physicist and astronomer (to 1907); Charles Doolittle Wal- cott, geologist (to 1928); Charles Greely Abbot, as- trophysicist (to 1945); and Alexander Wetmore, biologist (to 1952). The growth of the Institution is also traced in an increasing diversity of function and complexity of organization. The ten subordi- nate bureaus added from time to time include the National Museum, the Bureau of American Eth- nology, the International Exchange Service (for sci- entific publications), the Astrophysical Observatory, the National Zoological Park, the National Gallery of Art, and the National Air Museum. The author supplies a "Chronology of Principal Events," 1826- 1948 (p. 187-203) and 39 well-chosen illustrations in gravure. 4776. Price, Don K. Government and science, their dynamic relation in American democ- racy. New York, New York University Press, 1954. 203 p. (James Stokes lectureship on politics) 54-8164 Q127.U6P7 The author, after serving with several research organizations and government agencies, including the Research and Development Board of the Depart- ment of Defense, of which he was deputy chairman, became vice president of the Ford Foundation in 1954. He draws upon this varied experience for the present "series of essays," based upon lectures delivered at New York University in 1953. In them he suggests "that the activities of scientists, which had always been unusually influential in the public policies of the United States, were becoming respon- sible for significant changes in the nature of the American governmental system," and that "a whole series of most profound and most neglected prob- lems" were thereby created. He concludes that there is a necessity for "creating the kind of responsible political and administrative systems within which free science will have its fullest opportunity for public service." The only hope for such a system, according to Mr. Price, "is to build in part on the generalist with a background in general manage- ment and general public affairs, and in part on the man who has become a generalist after a thorough grounding in one of the specialized sciences or in its engineering or managerial application." Chapter II, "Freedom or Responsibility," deals with the or- ganization of the National Science Foundation, "the only general-purpose science agency in the govern- ment." 4777. U. S. National Resources Committee. Sci- ence Committee. Research — a national re- source. Washington, U. S. Govt. Print. Off., 1938-41. 3 v. 39-26187 Q180.U5U45 Volumes 2-3 prepared for the Science Committee of the National Resources Planning Board. Volume 1 issued also as House document 122, 76th Congress, 1st session. Contents. — 1. Relation of the Federal Govern- ment to research. Report of the Science Committee of the National Resources Committee. — 2. Indus- trial research. Report of the National Research Council. — 3. Business research. Report of an ad- visory committee of the Social Science Research Council. Proceeding on President Franklin Roosevelt's postulate that "research is one of the nation's very greatest resources," the Science Committee, com- posed of members designated by the National Academy of Sciences, the Social Science Research Council, and the American Council on Education, conducted this study of Federal aid to research, and of the place of research, including natural and social science, in the Federal Government. Each volume contains a summary of findings and recommenda- tions for improvements in the area covered by the volume. A number of these called for greater cooperation between Government and private research agencies. 4778. U. S. Office of Scientific Research and De- velopment. Science, the endless frontier. A report to the President by Vannevar Bush. July 1945. Washington, U. S. Govt. Print. Off., 1945. 184 p. 45~3 6 4 I 3 Q127.U6A53 1945 In 1944 President Roosevelt requested Dr. Van- nevar Bush, Director of the Office of Scientific Re- search and Development (1941-46), to recommend means of applying its wartime experience in times of peace, "for the improvement of the national health, the creation of new enterprises bringing new jobs, and the betterment of the national standard of living." Among Dr. Bush's recommendations was the creation of a national research foundation to develop a national policy for scientific research and scientific education. After five years of congres- sional debate, an act embodying compromises to satisfy divergent views was passed in 1950, creating the National Science Foundation. On March 17, 1954, President Eisenhower issued Executive Order 10521 concerning Government scientific research and the responsibilities of the National Science Foundation and other Federal agencies. The text of the order is given in Appendix V of the 642 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES National Science Foundation's Annual Report for 1954 (Washington, U. S. Govt. Print. Off.), which also outlines the "Current Aspects of American Science," and the "Program Activities of the Na- tional Science Foundation." 4779. U. S. President's Scientific Research Board. Science and public policy. A report to the President by John R. Steelman. Washington, U. S. Govt. Print. Off., 1947. 5 v. 47-46212 Q180.U5A47 "The administration of research; a selective bibliography": v. 3, p. 253-324. In an Executive order issued October 17, 1946, the Chairman of the President's Scientific Research Board, with the assistance of the Board, was in- structed "to investigate and report upon the entire scientific program of the Federal Government." Social science research was omitted from this study, as well as the content of the research programs of the War and Navy Departments. Volume I, "A Pro- gram for the Nation," sketches the country's posi- tion in scientific research, and makes recommenda- tions by which the Government can assure maximum benefits to the Nation. Volume II, "The Federal Research Program," reviews the details of the Gov- ernment's scientific work, agency by agency, and discusses typical projects. Volume III, "Adminis- tration for Research," analyzes the Government's administration of its own research programs, points out problems and policy issues, and makes recom- mendations for modernizing procedures. Volume IV, "Manpower for Research," deals with the short- age of scientists and teachers, and its threat to progress. Volume V, "The Nation's Medical Re- search," discusses progress in medical and allied sciences, outlines the Federal program, and makes recommendations for its administration. E. Invention 4780. Amdur, Leon H. Patent fundamentals. New York, Boardman, 1948. 305 p. illus. T223.T2A55 1948 First published in 1941. A main objective of this book "is to enable the lay- man and the student to attain a rapid, yet sound, un- derstanding of the U. S. Patent System." The author explains in simple language the nature of in- ventions that, according to law, can be patented, the legal protection afforded the patentee, and the prepa- ration and prosecution of an application for a patent. Concrete examples illustrate the procedures. The book includes the first "full and clear exposition" of the grant of patents on new and distinct varieties of plants, which became part of the patent law in 1930. A final chapter considers patents as transferable property, and briefly compares the patent system of the United States with those of foreign nations. George V. Woodling's Inventions and Their Protec- tion, 2d ed. (New York, Boardman, 1954. 496 p.) brings developments in the patent system up to date (i953)- 4781. Berle, Alf K., and Lyon Sprague De Camp. Inventions and their management. 3d ed. Scranton, International Textbook Co., 195 1. xxv, 742 p. 51-14958 T212.B43 1951 Bibliography: p. 671-673. Presents in one volume the principles and prac- tices that control the technical, legal, and business procedures of invention. The authors' purpose has been to keep their book, originally published in 1937, up to date by providing information of service to inventors and business men who are undertaking creative work in the field of inventions and their management. In addition to explaining the whole process of patents and patent law, the book contains chapters on trade-marks and copyrights, and legal cases illustrating more than half of the topics. Chap- ter 4 is a concise description of the organization and functions of the U. S. Patent Office. There is a substantial "Glossary" (p. 679-701) of legal terms and words used in a special sense in patenting. Floyd L. Vaughan explores the developments which have circumvented the original objectives of the patent law, and suggests remedies in his United States Patent System (Norman, University of Okla- homa Press, 1956. 355 p.). 4782. Bryan, George S. Edison, the man and his works. New York, Knopf, 1926. 350 p. 26-19839 TK140.E3B7 Bibliography: p. 331-337. "The Wizard of Menlo Park" became, for the American popular mind, the embodiment of Ameri- can inventive genius, and almost a figure of Amer- ican folklore, other men's inventions being readily attributed to him. Nevertheless, Edison's fame is not undeserved, for he has hardly a parallel in the duration, continuity, and multiplicity of his inventive activity. His first patent was applied for in 1868, in his 22d year, and he continued to invent, adapt, SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY / 643 and improve until the failure of his health a year or two before his death in 1931. His methods were peculiarly adapted to the expanding American economy of the post-1865 period, for he sought de- vices that could be converted to wide public use and manufactured in quantity. To Edison the act of invention was but the prelude to an industrial or- ganization for exploiting the result, and he was able to exploit other men's inventions as well as his own. Bryan's biography is a clear oudine by a whole- hearted admirer; one by Frank L. Dyer and Thomas C. Martin, Edison, His Life and Inventions (New York, Harper, 1929. 2 v.) was originally published in 1910, and was only partially revised when it was brought up to date 19 years later; but it is a great repository of information, much of it deriving from Edison himself. 4783. Burlingame, Roger. March of the iron men, a social history of union through invention. New York, Scribner, 1938. xvi, 500 p. illus. 38-27712 T21.B8 The author, a biographer, historian, and editor, traces the influence of invention on American so- ciety from the 17th century to the close of the Civil War. The early settlers were immersed in the neces- sities of building, agriculture, and communication, and the first American inventor was Benjamin Franklin. Inventions during the period of the American Revolution improved the materials of war — gunpowder, small arms, etc. Later inventions were geared to the growing industrial economy and produced the steamboat, cotton gin, power loom, electro-magnetic telegraph, reaper, vulcanized rub- ber, and many other products. It is the author's belief "that the instruments invented in this phase were the instruments of our eventual union and that . . . they made that union a fact before, po- litically, it was recognized." Engines of Democ- racy, Inventions and Society in Mature America (New York, Scribner, 1940. 606 p.) deals with the period after 1865, but not in chronological arrange- ment: "events did not follow one another in orderly sequence." In these books Mr. Burlingame has sought to present technical developments in com- mon terms intelligible to the layman. Each book contains a list of "Events and Inventions," and a bibliography. 4784. Flexner, James T. Steamboats come true; American inventors in action. New York, Viking Press, 1944. 406 p. 44-7758 VM615.F63 "Bibliography of principal sources": p. 379-381. This account of American inventors of the steam- boat is scholarly, yet written in a style appropriate for the layman. It deals primarily with John Fitch, the pioneer, his contemporary, James Rumsey, and Robert Fulton, the promoter, in their individual contributions to the application of the steam engine to water transportation, described as "the first Amer- ican invention of world-shaking importance." A brief survey of their forerunners is crowded into the first chapter. In the last it is pointed out that Robert Fulton's importance was not his originality but his ability to build a steamboat on principles evolved from the experiments of many who had tried unsuccessfully to produce finished and working products. In 19 12, when the centenary of the intro- duction of navigation by steam was being celebrated in Europe, Henry W. Dickinson, Assistant Keeper of the Science Museum, South Kensington, pro- duced from the archives of England and France and from original sources in the United States, a life of Robert Fulton, Engineer and Artist (London, New York, John Lane, 1913. 333 p.), one of the few examples of a biography of an American by an English writer. 4785. Holland, Maurice, and Henry F. Pringle. Industrial explorers. New York, Harper, x 93 8 - 347 P- 28-29154 T39.H6 1928 Maurice Holland, Director of Engineering and Industrial Research, National Research Council (1923 to 1942), and Henry F. Pringle, writer, co- operate to sketch the careers of 19 of the nation's leaders of industrial research. They outline Willis R. Whitney's research in the field of electrical engi- neering, William H. Miller's improvement of design theory and methods in aeronautical engineering, Samuel C. Prescott's experiments in the chemistry of the roasted coffee bean, John A. Mathew's de- velopment of high-speed and noncorrosive steels, E. C. Sullivan's tests in the glass laboratories that produced Pyrex, and George D. McLaughlin's im- proved methods of tanning. The biographies of these and 13 other scientists describe the research which has led to many products now commonplace in daily life. 4786. lies, George. Leading American inventors. New York, Holt, 1912. xv, 447 p. illus. (Biographies of leading Americans, edited by W. P. Trent) 12-27835 T39.I5 Contents. — John and Robert Livingston Ste- vens. — Robert Fulton. — Eli Whitney. — Thomas Blanchard. — Samuel Finley Breese Morse. — Charles Goodyear. — John Ericsson. — Cyrus Hall McCor- mick. — Christopher Latham Sholes. — Elias Howe. — Benjamin Chew Tilghman. — Ottmar Mergenthaler. Brief and eulogistic biographical sketches of 13 American inventors, who, within little more than a century, conceived and perfected inventions which have profoundly altered our ways of living. 644 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 4787. Kaempffert, Waldemar B., ed. A popular history of American invention . . . with over five hundred illus. New York, Scribner, 1924. 24-25794 T21.K5 2 v A group of editors of scientific journals, teachers, and scientists have contributed chapters to this his- tory of American invention through the first quarter of the 20th century. Volume I deals with the de- velopment of "Transportation" by railroad, inland waterway, electric car, automobile, and airplane; "Communication" through the printed word, tele- graph, telephone, radio, camera, motion picture, and phonography; and "Power" through steam and electricity. Volume II deals with devices and tech- niques for "Exploiting Material Resources," such as iron, steel, copper, oil, coal, and lumber, and with "Automatic Labor-Saving Devices." Written in a style that appeals to the layman as well as to the scientist, the work provides a standard account up to the date of its preparation, and needs only to be brought up to date by incorporating the develop- ments of the last three decades. 4788. Kelly, Fred C. The Wright brothers; a biography authorized by Orville Wright. New York, Farrar, Straus, & Young, 1951. 340 p. 51-11660 TL540.W7K4 1951 The author's aim in this life, first published in 1943, has been "to satisfy the curiosity of the average, non-technical reader regarding the work of the Wright brothers, and to do so as simply as possible." Wilbur (1867-1912) and Orville Wright (1871- 1948) interested themselves in aeronautics in 1896 and progressed steadily to the first successful pow- ered flight at Kitty Hawk, N. C, on December 17, 1903. The last two chapters include "Patent Suits," and an explanation of "Why the Wright Plane was Exiled." In 1951 the author edited a selection of letters from the Wright manuscripts deposited in the Library of Congress and not generally available until i960: Miracle at Kitty Haw\: The Letters of Wilbur and Orville Wright (New York, Farrar, Straus, & Young. 482 p.). Appealing again to the general reader, the book contains those letters which reveal the achievements and personalities of the Wright brothers, and omits those dealing with highly technical problems. More recently Oberlin Col- lege on the Wilbur-Orville Wright Memorial Fund sponsored the publication of The Papers of Wilbur and Orville Wright, Including the Chanute- Wright Letters and Other Papers of Octave Chanute, edited by Marvin W. McFarland (New York, McGraw-Hill, 1953. 2 v.), which was prepared for the press with notes, appen- dixes, and bibliography by the Aeronautics Divi- sion of the Library of Congress. These papers, ar- ranged chronologically, include the technical cor- respondence of the Wright brothers from 1899 to 1948. 4789. Mirsky, Jeannette, and Allan Nevins. The world of Eli Whitney. New York, Macmil- lan, 1952. xvi, 346 p. 52-4520 TS1570.W4M5 Bibliography: p. 317-337. This "first modern study of an American genius" is based primarily on the collection of Whitney's (1765-1825) papers in the Yale University Library, which fully document his business career but yield only fragmentary bits of information concerning his personal life. It describes the influence of the cotton gin on the agriculture of the South, where it re- vitalized the plantation system and slavery, and em- phasizes, more fully than has been done before, the impact of his manufacture of firearms on the eco- nomic and industrial life of the whole country. The authors quote from Whitney's letters to illustrate his concept of the processes of the machine tool industry which made him the "father of mass production" and "changed the social and economic growth of the North and gave it its industrial might." He wanted, he wrote, tools "similar to an engraving on copper plate from which may be taken a great number of impressions perceptibly alike." Constance Mc- Laughlin Green in her recently published Eli Whitney and the Birth of American Technology (Boston, Little, Brown, 1956. 215 p.), which pre- sents much the same story in concise form, and acknowledges its indebtedness to Miss Mirsky, describes Whitney as "the forerunner of the specialist of the business age," with "a completely single- track mind" and a "passion for efficiency" uncharac- teristic of his own day. 4790. Prout, Henry G. A life of George Westing- house. New York, Scribner, 1922. 375 p. 23-26510 T40.W4P7 1922 George Westinghouse (1 846-1914) left no private letters, journals or note-books. The material for this book has been gathered from business records, and from the memories and impressions of contempo- raries who were close to him, "some of them almost from the beginning of his active life." The author has had the aid of a committee of the American Society of Mechanical Engineers in digesting and coordinating this data. The diversity of Westing- house's inventions and business enterprises has de- termined the division of the book into chapters each dealing fully with one topic, with preliminary and concluding chapters describing Westinghouse's per- sonality and his influence on the development of America. The Appendix contains a list of more than 375 patents. Outstanding among them in social effect are the invention of the air brake and its SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY / 6 45 application to railroading, and the use of alternating current for electric power transmission. 4791. Pupin, Michael I. From immigrant to in- ventor. New York, Scribner, 1923. 396 p. 2 3-i3553 TP40.P8A3 Pupin (1858-1935), a peasant's son born in a Bosnian village, came to America at the age of 16, and became professor of electromechanics at Co- lumbia University and the inventor of many im- provements in telegraphy, telephony, and the x-ray. His autobiography, the kind of success story that can only happen here, was a best-seller in its day and received a Pulitzer prize. 4792. Thompson, Holland. The age of invention; a chronicle of mechanical conquest. New Haven, Yale University Press, 1921. 267 p. (The Chronicles of America series, Allen Johnson, edi- tor .. . v. 37) 21-15265 E173.C55, v. 37 T19.T5 Abraham Lincoln edition. Bibliographical note: p. 247-254. Sometime editor-in-chief of the Boo\ of Knowl- edge, and contributor to many encyclopedias and journals, Holland Thompson outlines the personali- ties of some of the outstanding American inventors from Benjamin Franklin to the Wright brothers, and points out the significance of their achievements in the development of the United States. However, he avoids giving undue importance to the work of individuals by grouping together the "Pioneers of the Machine Shop," "The Fathers of Electricity," and others whose progress was mutually interde- pendent. F. Engineering 4793. American Institute of Chemical Engineers. Twenty-five years of chemical engineering progress; silver anniversary volume, . . . edited by Sidney D. Kirkpatrick. New York, Published by the Institute and for sale by D. Van Nostrand Co., r 933- 373 P- 33' l6 7H TP20.A5 Contents. — Chemical engineering research. — Acids and heavy chemicals in retrospect. — Organic chemical industries. — Solvents. — Petroleum refin- ing. — Electrochemical industries. — Electrometallur- gical industries. — Pulp and paper manufacture. — Coal processing. — Sugar industries. — High pressure synthesis — basis of new chemical engineering indus- tries. — Soap and glycerine industries. — Chemical and engineering advances in the rubber industry. — Paints, varnishes and lacquers. — Modern plastics. — Vegetable oil production. — Lime industry. — Glass manufacture. — Fractional distillation. — Evaporation in the United States in theory and practice. — Bibliog- raphy of articles on evaporation (p. 277-279). — Continuous mechanical separations. — Purification of water for sanitary and industrial uses. — Stream pol- lution and waste disposal. — A statistical survey of the chemical engineering industries, 1 908-1 933. — Chemical engineering education. Advances in chemical engineering, between the founding of the American Institute of Chemical Engineers in 1908, and 1933, are described by "lead- ing authorities in the fields which they represent." World War I furnished the impetus which chemical engineering needed to make it a recognized pro- fession, and the statistical survey of the industries involved in Chapter 24 measures the progress made during the quarter-century. 4794. Anderson, Oscar E. Refrigeration in Amer- ica; a history of a new technology and its impact. [Princeton] Published for the University of Cincinnati by Princeton University Press, 1953. 344 P- , 5 2 ~ I 3 I 4 8 TP494.U5A7 "Bibliographical note": p. 321-325. The author describes his book as an introductory survey of the relation of refrigeration to our national development and points out the need for further detailed research. He records the main trends in technological progress, describes the uses of refrig- eration, explains resistance to its application, and gives some indication of its social and economic effects. The application of refrigeration to food supply and the manufacture of ice falls into three periods: the years prior to 1890, 1890 to 1917, and 1917 to 1950. Chapters are devoted to improve- ments in refrigerated transportation, the introduc- tion of frozen foods, and the wider use of locker plants and home freezers. In the last chapter the Tennessee Valley Authority is selected as an illus- tration of the potentialities of refrigeration in re- lieving the problems of large distressed rural areas. 4795. Bathe, Greville, and Dorothy Bathe. Oliver Evans; a chronicle of early American engi- neering. Philadelphia, The Historical Society of Pennsylvania, 1935. xviii, 362 p. illus., maps, facsims. 36-585 T40.E9B3 646 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES "Books and principal pamphlets, written and pub- lished by Oliver Evans between the years 1792 and 18 19": p. 344-345. The scattered and little-known facts concerning Oliver Evans (1755-1819) are here brought together and many of his letters and papers printed in full. Unbroken by chapters, this first full-length biog- raphy of a pioneer in the construction of high-pres- sure engines throws much light upon the function- ing of the early patent laws, and the primitive engineering equipment of the period. Born in Dela- ware, by 1793 Oliver Evans moved to Philadelphia, where in succeeding years he was a constructor of mills, a burr-millstone manufacturer, and a dealer in bolting cloth and plaster of Paris. For nearly 30 years he went on improving the mechanism of his engines and boilers. His correspondence with Tobias Lear, Robert Livingston, and Thomas Jef- ferson concerning his improvements in their mills indicates that he was better known in his own day than he has been since. As the authors point out, his life span fell just a few years too early for his talents to achieve their potential social effect. 4796. Bishop, Joseph Bucklin, and Farnham Bishop. Goethals, genius of the Panama Canal; a biography. New York, Harper, 1930. xiv, 493 p. 30-22571 TA140.G58B5 The elder Bishop, Secretary of the Isthmian Canal Commission from 1905 to 1914, died before finish- ing the fifth chapter of this authorized biography of his close friend, and his son completed the task. Graduating from the Military Academy in 1880, George Washington Goethals (1858-1928) served in the Engineer Corps in all grades from second lieutenant to colonel. In 1907 President Roosevelt appointed Goethals to construct the Panama Canal, and to assume all responsibilities for the government of the Canal Zone. Having opened the Panama Canal to world shipping in 1914, Goethals was made a major general and remained as governor of the Canal Zone until he retired late in 1916. Re- called to active duty in December 19 17, Goethals became director of purchase, storage, and traffic, in charge of the transport of supplies and the move- ment of all troops within the United States and over- seas. Returning to the retired list in 1919, Goethals served as consulting engineer on many important waterway projects. The tributes after his death praised his inflexible justice as strongly as his pro fessional and administrative abilities. 4797. Blake, Nelson M. Water for the cities; a history of the urban water supply problem in the United States. Syracuse, N. Y., Syracuse Uni- versity Press, 1956. 341 p. (Maxwell School series, 3) 5(>- l 1576 TD223.B5 This original study started out as an investigation of how New York, Philadelphia, Baltimore, and Boston came to recognize the vital importance of water supply to the health and functioning of those communities and took steps to provide it during the years 1790 to i860. It has been expanded to in- clude brief accounts of such developments in other cities, and, in the last two chapters, the accomplish- ments of water supply engineering from i860 to the present day. Progress in private and public control of urban water supply are traced from the time when American cities drew their water almost exclusively from springs, wells, and cisterns, to the building of great reservoirs such as those created by the Hoover and Parker dams across the Colorado River. In the background is the story of municipal growth and the political struggle that usually accompanies ex- pansion in public works. The references (p. 288- 331) indicate an extensive use of state and munici- pal documents supplemented by newspapers. 4798. Copley, Frank Barkley. Frederick W. Tay- lor, father of scientific management. New York, Harper, 1923. 2 v. 23-17530 T58.T42C6 An admiring and thoroughly documented life of Frederick W. Taylor (1856-1915), the first to apply scientific method to the manufacture of a given prod- uct from a certain amount of raw material with minimum waste and friction. In 1878 he entered the Midvale Steel Company as an apprentice, and rose from gang boss to foreman of the machine shop, to master mechanic, chief draftsman, and finally chief engineer within a period of six years. At Mid- vale he laid the foundation of his system of scientific management, and from 1898 gave it more concrete form at the Bethlehem Steel Company, which em- ployed him to analyze its operations. Taylor de- voted the latter years of his life to promoting scien- tific management or "Taylorism," as it became popularly known. His principal book, The Prin- ciples of Scientific Management (New York, Harper, 191 1. 144 p.), within two years was trans- lated into French, German, Dutch, Swedish, Rus- sian, Lettish, Italian, Spanish, and Japanese. He was also the inventor of a number of industrial machines and processes, such as the heat treatment of high-speed tool steel. 4799. Fraser, Chelsea C. The story of engineering in America. New York, Crowell, 1928. 471 p. 28-24165 TA23.F8 Bringing together in one volume historical land- marks and typical processes in the construction of roads, railroads, bridges, tunnels and subways, dams and reservoirs, canals, harbor improvements, light- houses, mines, and buildings, this book is aimed at the nontechnical reader interested in the accomplish- SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY / 647 ments of American engineering from colonial days through the first quarter of the 20th century. Writ- ten in a simple style, it contains many drawings of typical constructions. 4800. Hoover, Theodore Jesse, and John Charles Lounsbury Fish. The engineering profes- sion. 2d ed. Stanford, Stanford University Press, 1950. xv, 486 p. 50-12642 TA157.H56 1950 Includes bibliographies. Two outstanding educators and consultants in the fields of civil and mining engineering have prepared a vocational guide for those considering one of the branches of engineering as a profession, and a "progress report" to the experienced engineer on the characteristics of engineering. It describes the quali- fications and duties of civil, mining, mechanical, electrical, chemical, and other engineers. Changes in practice since the first edition appeared in 1941 have necessitated extensive revision, especially in the sections on municipal engineering and electronics. There are chapters on the education of an engineer and the new opportunities for participating in com- munity welfare, as well as tables showing salaries, and the functional, industrial, and geographic dis- tribution of engineers. The chapters on engineer- ing education and salaries in Esther L. Brown's The Professional Engineer (New York, Russell Sage Foundation, 1936. 86 p.) afford comparisons evi- dencing progress in training and in opportunities. The recent edition of Lowell O. Stewart's Careers in Engineering: Requirements, Opportunities, 3d ed. (Ames, Iowa State College Press, 1956. 105 p.), furnishes much practical information in brief compass. 4801. Steinman, David B. The builders of the bridge; the story of John Roebling and his son. 2d ed. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1950. 457 p. 50-8862 TA140.R7S8 1950 Bibliography: p. 421-445. The author is himself an experienced bridge engi- neer who, three years after the first edition of this book (1945), was put in charge of the reconstruc- tion of the Brooklyn Bridge. Its original builders were John August Roebling (1806-1869) and his son, Washington Augustus Roebling (1 837-1926). The father, educated as a civil engineer at Berlin, Prussia, came to America in 1831. In 1841 he intro- duced the first wire cable, and in 1845-46 at Pitts- burgh he constructed first a canal aqueduct and next a bridge, both on the suspension principle. The whole of Part 3 is devoted to the construction of the Brooklyn Bridge between 1867 and 1883. An un- lucky accident caused John Roebling's death while the survey was still under way in July 1869. His son carried it to completion, but in 1872 was para- lyzed by the caisson disease which had already killed three workmen, and thenceforward had to direct the work from his sickroom. The opening of the bridge on May 24, 1883, a landmark in civic and engineering history, was marked by a triumphal celebration. The book, as the author tells us, "has been a labor of love, in the truest sense, with no counting the cost." 4802. Turnbull, Archibald Douglas. John Ste- vens, an American record. New York, Cen- tury, 1928. xvii, 545 p. 28-12356 VM140.S7T8 Stevens (1749-1838) of Hoboken, N. J., an amaz- ingly versatile engineer and inventor best remem- bered for his improvements in steam transportation by sea and land, also designed tunnels, bridges, and projectiles. He was likewise a competent entre- preneur and the founder of a great fortune. This detailed biography is based on Stevens' own papers and incorporates many extended excerpts from them. 4803. Yost, Edna. Modern American Engineers. Philadelphia, Lippincott, 1952. 182 p. 52-5172 TA139.Y65 Contents. — Robert Ernest Doherty, engineering educator. — Ralph Edwards Flanders, mechanical engineer. — Arthur Ernest Morgan, civil engineer. — Vannevar Bush, electrical engineer. — Scott Turner, mining engineer. — J. Brownlee Davidson, agricul- tural engineer. — Harold Bright Maynard, indus- trial engineering consultant. — Ole Singstad, civil engineer — John Robert Suman, petroleum engi- neer. — Carl George Arthur Rosen, research engi- neer. — Stanwood Willston Sparrow, automotive engineer. — Harold Alden Wheeler, radio and tele- vision engineer. Each of the 12 men whose biographies make up this book was selected by the author, with help from the staffs of various national engineering societies and other authorities in the profession, "as an engi- neer recognized by his peers as a man of high achievement." Some of the engineering fields omitted in this book are covered in the author's Modern Americans in Science and Invention (Phila- delphia, Stokes, 1941. 270 p.). XVIII Medicine and Public Health «# yj t A. Medicine in General 4804-4817 B. Physicians and Surgeons 4818-4832 C. Psychiatry 4833-4840 D. Other Specialties 4841-4844 E. Hospitals and Nursing 4845-4854 F. Medical Education 4855-4861 G. Public Health 4862-4881 H. Medical Economics 4882-4891 u p SH THE literature of American medicine is of course enormous, but we are here concerned only with that fairly limited portion of it which is intelligible to the layman, and displays the subject in its historical development and its relationships to the larger social fabric. Section A includes a few general histories, and the later ones a number of more specialized historical treatments; but, in the main, it is fair to say that the historical exploration of the development of American medicine is only very imperfectly accomplished. Until the 19th century, that development is primarily of interest to the Ameri- can social historian, but in the course of that cen- tury the United States becomes one of the major sources of medical discovery, and begins to take the lead in medical organization. Behind all prog- ress, however, stands the individual physician, and medical biography and autobiography is a branch of the literature which has proliferated amazingly in the last two or three decades. The sampling presented in Section B could be indefinitely ex- panded, for every year sees a new crop of personal narratives, each with its own angle of vision, and seldom devoid of interest or instruction. The prominence given to psychiatry, which occu- pies Section C, follows almost inevitably from the prevalence of the subject in contemporary thought and writing. The entries could have been readily increased to three or four times their present num- ber, which is by no means the case with Section D, in which the other medical specialties are gathered. There remains to be done much research and writ- ing concerning the origin and development of these offshoots from the main trunk of American medi- 648 The two following sections reflect the remarkable development of two institutions, the hospital and the medical school, from their modest 18th-cen- tury beginnings. The increasing number, size, and complexity of both have brought their special prob- lems, discussions of which take their place beside more purely historical works in each section. Section G on public health includes some tides on the early American epidemics, the most potent stimulus to activity in the field, and on the problem of disease in general. Other works discuss the be- ginnings of the movement, its professional aspects, and the extent of the public health resources presently available to the American people. The increasing efficiency of medical care has con- currently increased its expense, so that the cost of treatment and hospitalization bears heavily or even crushingly upon the average family budget. This has led to various proposals for distributing the burden throughout the community, and these again to much controversy, reflected in a large and grow- ing body of publication, of which we can present only a sampling. MEDICINE AND PUBLIC HEALTH / 649 A. Medicine in General 4804. Burrage, Walter L. A history of the Massa- chusetts Medical Society, with brief biog- raphies of the founders and chief officers, 1781-1922. [Norwood, Mass.] Priv. Print., 1923. 505 p. 23-18826 R15.M5B8 Chartered by the Commonwealth of Massachu- setts in 178 1 "to promote medical and surgical knowledge ... as well as to make a just discrimi- nation between such as are duly educated . . . and those who may ignorantly and wickedly administer medicine," the Massachusetts Medical Society is the oldest medical society in the United States with a continuous record of its meetings from its founding to the present. The Secretary of the Society utilizes its manuscript records to tell the story from 1765, when efforts were first made to form a state medical society, to 1922. Notwithstanding the leadership exercised by Pennsylvania men of medicine, the Medical Society of the State of Pennsylvania was not organized until more than 75 years later. The story of that Society has been edited by Dr. Howard K. Petry: A Century of Medicine, 1848-1948; the History of the Medical Society of the State of Penn- sylvania ( [ Harrisburg ? ] 1952. 404 p.). 4805. Cannon, Ida M. On the social frontier of medicine; pioneering in medical social serv- ice. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1952. 273 p. 52-8215 HV687.5.U52M33 Notes and references: p. 261-266. Dr. Richard Clarke Cabot was one of the first to recognize the relationship between the social and economic background of patients and their medical problems. He made a great contribution to medical progress when he secured the appointment of a social worker in the Out-Patient Department of the Massachusetts General Hospital in 1905, and thereby laid the foundation for the growth of medical social service in the United States. The author, who for 31 years was the Chief of the Social Service Depart- ment of the Massachusetts General Hospital, traces the evolution of that service through the years of resistance on the part of the medical staff to its final, full acceptance and establishment as an official de- partment of the Hospital. She goes on to describe the spread of social service to other hospitals and public health services, and the advances in medical science during the first half of the 20th century which have changed the hospital care of patients. 4806. Fishbein, Morris. Fads and quackery in healing; an analysis of the foibles of the heal- ing cults, with essays on various other peculiar no- tions in the health field. New York, Covici, Friede, 1932. 384 p. 32-28086 R710.F55 The American Medical Association has long prose- cuted its war against certain methods of healing and has attacked them from time to time in the pages of its Journal. The long-time editor of that Journal (1924-1949) traces the evolution of medical fads from the earliest time in this series of essays, many of which had already appeared in his Medical Follies (1925. 223 p.) and New Medical Follies (1927. 235 p.), published by Boni & Liveright. Chapters are devoted to such subjects as homeopathy, eclec- ticism, mind healing, osteopathy, chiropractic, naturopathy, and food and drinking fads of the Americans. 4807. Fishbein, Morris. A history of the American Medical Association, 1847 to 1947; with the biographies of the presidents of the association, by Walter L. Bierring, M. D.; and with histories of the publications, councils, bureaus and other official bodies [by various authors] Philadelphia, Saunders, 1947. 1226 p. Med 47-46 R15.A55F5 The increase in the number of medical colleges during the first half of the 19th century gave rise to a demand for standardization of the curriculum. Through the efforts of Dr. Nathan Smith Davis of Binghamton, New York, delegates and members of the medical profession from different parts of the United States met in the Academy of Natural Sciences in Philadelphia in May 1847, and organized the national association "for cultivating and advanc- ing medical knowledge; for elevating the standard of medical education; for promoting the usefulness, honor, and interests of the medical profession; for enlightening and directing public opinion in regard to the duties, responsibilities, and requirements of medical men; for exciting and encouraging emula- tion and concert of action in the profession, and for facilitating and fostering friendly intercourse be- tween those engaged in it." Dr. Fishbein writes and edits a centennial history of the Association and its influence on medical progress in the United States during its first hundred years. 4808. New York Academy of Medicine. Com- mittee on Medicine and the Changing Order. 65O / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Medicine in the changing order. New York, Com- monwealth Fund, 1947. 240 p. (Its Studies) Med 47-1014 R723.5.N4 This Committee was appointed by the Council of the New York Academy of Medicine in Decem- ber 1942 to explore the effect of changes which are taking place in our economic and social life on medi- cine in its various aspects. In this report the Com- mittee makes recommendations concerning the improvement of medical care in both urban and rural areas through the extension of hospital serv- ices, and a wider distribution of public health and nursing services. The pros and cons of voluntary prepayment plans and compulsory insurance in a free society are canvassed. 4809. Packard, Francis R. History of medicine in the United States. New ed. New York, P. B. Hoeber, 1931. 2 v. 32-13 R151.P12 1931 Bibliography: v. 2, p. [I24i]-i266. The editor of the Annals of Medical History (1917-1942) tells the story of medicine in the United States to the closing years of the 19th century, ventur- ing into the 20th century in only a few cases. The incidence of epidemics in the colonies, the rise of medical legislation, the founding of hospitals, medi- cal schools and periodicals, and the development of medical practice are interwoven with the lives of the physicians, surgeons, and medical specialists who participated in and influenced those events. The chapters on "The Medical Department of the Army from the Close of the Revolution to the Close of the Spanish-American War," by Col. Percy M. Ashburn; and "The History of the Medical Department of the U. S. Navy," by Lt. Cmdr. Robert P. Parsons, are of special interest. In 1929 Col. Ashburn published a comprehensive History of the Medical Department of the United States Army (Boston, Houghton Mif- flin. 448 p.). 4810. Pickard, Madge E., and Roscoe Carlyle Buley. The Midwest pioneer, his ills, cures, & doctors. Crawfordsville, Ind., R. E. Banta, 1945. 339 P- . SG 45-165 R151.P5 "Bibliographical note": p. [3073-324. This is "a nontechnical account of pioneer medi- cine" in the Middle West prior to 1850. It describes the "afflictions" that had followed the settlers West, the home remedies, the bleeding, purging and blistering of the doctors, the growth of irregular medical sects, and the rise of the drug trade. Against this background of the pioneers' struggle to find relief from pain, the authors trace the develop- ment of medical schools, societies, literature, and legislation under the leadership of Daniel Drake, the Samuel Grosses and others. The bibliographi- cal note at the end is supplementary to the more important medical books which have been men- tioned in the text and the notes, and is "intended in part to round out a brief guide to the study of early mid-western medicine." 481 1. Reed, Louis S. The healing cults; a study of sectarian medical practice: its extent, causes, and control. Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1932. 134 p. (Publications of the Committee on the Costs of Medical Care, no. 16) 32-26695 R152.C65, no. 16 RM700.R38 "References" at end of each chapter. The Committee on the Costs of Medical Care was "organized to study the economic aspects of the prevention and care of sickness, including the ade- quacy, availability, and compensation of the persons and agencies concerned." This publication of the committee describes the evolution of osteopathy, chiropractic, naturopathy, Christian Science, and certain types of faith healing, as well as the number, geographical distribution, economic and legal status of the practitioners, in order to complete the picture of medical services available in the United States. 4812. Shafer, Henry Burnell. The American medical profession, 1783 to 1850. New York, Columbia University Press, 1936. 271 p. (Columbia University. Faculty of Political Science. Studies in history, economics and public law, no. 417) 36-20187 H31.C7, no. 417 R151.S45 1936a Bibliography: p. 250-257. A study of medical progress during more than half a century following the American Revolution, a period in which the foundation was being laid for the scientific growth of the medical profession which followed the discovery of anesthesia in the 1840's. The author, a historian rather than a mem- ber of the medical profession, describes in detail the status of American medicine at the close of the 1 8th century, the founding of medical colleges and societies, the increase in the publication of medical literature, the growing awareness of the varying value of the remedies and methods employed, and the development of a code of medical ethics during those years of "transition from medieval customs to modern methods." 4813. Shryock, Richard H. American medical re- search, past and present. New York, Com- monwealth Fund, 1947. 35° P- (New York Acad- emy of Medicine. Committee on Medicine and the Changing Order. Studies) Med 47-2507 R737.S48 Notes and References at end of chapters. MEDICINE AND PUBLIC HEALTH / 6 5 I Although medical practice, medical education, and hospitals had become a part of the American scene by the close of the 18th century, they depended on the medical sciences developed by the British, the French, and the Germans. The impetus given to medical research by William Henry Welch in his pathological laboratory in 1878 and later at the Johns Hopkins Medical School, was bearing fruit by 1895 when American medicine began to "emerge on a level of cultural independence." Dr. Shryock, a historian who has increasingly specialized in medi- cal history, traces the advances in medical research through the era of private support, the period of great philanthropies, and the gradual development of public-supported research programs. The last chapter summarizes the impact of World War II on medical research and some early post-war pro- grams. The integration of research, teaching, and practice is examined in Medical Research: A Mid- century Survey, published for the American Foun- dation (Boston, Little, Brown, 1955. 2 v.). 4814. Sigerist, Henry E. American medicine; translated by Hildegard Nagel. New York, Norton, 1934. 316 p. 34-40281 R151.S52 Bibliography: p. 289-304. The author, professor of medicine at the Univer- sity of Leipzig, and more recently the William H. Welch Professor of the History of Medicine at Johns Hopkins University, presents a historical sketch of American medicine from the colonial period to the early 1930's. It is based on four years of intensive study, and a tour through the United States during which he visited medical schools, laboratories, and hospitals, and observed the conditions of medical practice and public health service. Dr. Sigerist, with some misgivings concerning his American audience, portrays for Europeans the America which he foresees as the center of gravity of the medical sciences. His book has not been replaced as the most convenient brief introduction to its subject. 4815. Stern, Bernhard J. American medical prac- tice in the perspectives of a century. New York, Commonwealth Fund, 1945. 156 p. ( [New York Academy of Medicine. Committee on Medi- cine and the Changing Order. Studies] ) SG45-126 R723.5.S8 Bibliographical footnotes. The first in a series of studies made under the auspices of the Committee established by the Council of the New York Academy of Medicine. The au- thor, a teacher of sociology rather than a medical man, looks at medicine not as an isolated science, but as a segment of life which is affected by and contributes to the economic, social, and technological changes of the period. Chapters on the specialist and the general practitioner, the income of physi- cians, and the distribution of doctors and medical services, are illustrated by statistics and cases so as to show the effect on the profession and the general welfare. The study concludes with the thought that the "problems of medical practice that are agitating the public today are primarily concerned with the provision of a high quality of curative and pre- ventive medical service to all people," regardless of income, race or geographical location. 4816. Thatcher, Virginia S. History of anesthesia, with emphasis on the nurse specialist. Phil- adelphia, Lippincott, 1953. 289 p. 53-9092 RD79.T49 Research in the use of gases as anesthetics was begun in England before 1800, but successful experi- ments in the administration of ether were finally made in the United States in the 1840's. This was America's first great contribution to the medical profession — the means of painless surgery. The author, editor of American Association of Nurse Anesthetist Publications, says that her purpose is "to extend the knowledge of anesthetists about themselves beyond the framework of personal ref- erence and of already published histories." The place of the nurse as an anesthetist and the organiza- tion, history, and sphere of influence of the National Association of Nurse Anesthetists are described in detail. 4817. Truman, Stanley R. The doctor, his career, his business, his human relations. Balti- more, Williams & Wilkins, 1951. 151 p. 51-2566 R727.T7 The transition from medical student to practicing physician is a neglected phase of medical training, according to the author. He has written this book to interpret, within the framework of the "Principles of Medical Ethics of the American Medical Asso- ciation" (Appendix A), the professional problems as well as the patient-physician relations, public relations, and interprofessional situations which confront the young doctor. Selection of a com- munity in which to practice medicine, planning a functionally efficient office, selection of assistants, maintenance of records, and insurance and savings are discussed, and also summarized at the end in a "Check List of Things To Do When You Start in Practice." One part of the author's theme receives more detailed treatment in James E. Bryan's Public Relations in Medical Practice (Baltimore, Williams & Wilkins, 1954. 301 p.). 652 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES B. Physicians and Surgeons 4818. [Beaumont] Myer, Jesse S., com p. A new print of Life and letters of Dr. William Beau- mont. With an introd. by Sir William Osier. St. Louis, C. V. Mosby, 1939. xxxi, 327 p. 39-16649 R154.B35M8 1939 "Literature references and abstracts of cases of gastric fistulae prior to that of St. Martin": p. 308- 312; "Summary of literature consulted": p. 313-315. Born in Vermont in 1785, William Beaumont served his medical apprenticeship there until 18 12, when he left for Plattsburg, New York, and joined the army as surgeon's mate. Ten years later, Beau- mont was stationed at Fort Mackinac when he was called to treat a young French Canadian, Alexis St. Martin, who had been accidentally shot, leaving a cavity in his abdomen which would not heal. This afforded Beaumont the opportunity to observe the functioning of the digestive system, to conduct ex- periments with the gastric juices, and to gain pre- eminence in the advancement of physiology through the publication of his keen and methodical observa- tions. Dr. Myer's biography was first published in 1912 on the one hundredth anniversary of Beau- mont's entry into the pracice of medicine, and is based on a collection of manuscript memoranda, diaries, letters, etc., in possession of Beaumont's daughter, Mrs. Sarah Keim of St. Louis. This re- print contains several hitherto unpublished letters written by Alexis St. Martin, and a "Present-day Appreciation of Beaumont's Experiments on Alexis St. Martin," by Dr. Andrew C. Ivy, which does not appear in the earlier printing. At at meeting of the International Congress of Physiologists in 1929, William Beaumont was "figuratively canonized as the patron saint of American Physiology," and in 1953, one hundred years after his death, the Michi- gan State Medical Society issued the Beaumont Memorial Number of its Journal (February 1953) in which the projected Beaumont Memorial on Mackinac Island, where he carried out some of his first experiments, is described. 4819. [Billings] Garrison, Fielding H. John Shaw Billings; a memoir. New York, Put- nam, 19 15. 432 p. _i5-97 2 3 Ri54- B 59 G 3 "Bibliography of the writings of Dr. John S. Billings, by Miss Adelaide R. Hasse": p. 411-422. Billings (1838-1913) stands out in the world of medicine as the organizer of the tools of medical research. As a student at the Medical College of Ohio he became conscious of the need for a great medical library in the United States. His oppor- tunity came at the close of the Civil War when unused hospital funds were diverted to the Surgeon General's Library and he was placed in charge. The first volume of Dr. Billings' monumental work, the Index Catalogue, appeared in 1880. The first issues of its companion publication, Index Medicus, planned as a monthly guide to current medical lit- erature, had appeared in 1879. He represented American medicine at the meeting of the Interna- tional Medical Congress at London in 1881, where his address, Our Medical Literature, was received with enthusiasm. Dr. Billings' experiences as a medical officer during the Civil War, his part in the construction and organization of the Johns Hop- kins Hospital and Medical School and the New York Public Library, as well as his activities in the fields of hygiene and sanitary engineering, and vital and medical statistics, are also treated in this Memoir by the assistant librarian of the Surgeon General's Library (1 889-1922), a pioneer Ameri- can historian of medicine. 4820. [Blackwell] Ross, Ishbel. Child of destiny, the life story of the first woman doctor. New York, Harper, 1949. 309 p. 49-10905 R154.B623R6 Bibliography: p. 295-298. The education of women as physicians in the United States had its beginning in October 1847 when the Geneva Medical School of western New York accepted the application of the ambitious and tenacious but modest Elizabeth Blackwell (1821- 1910), who, in 1832, had emigrated from Britain to the United States with her parents. After grad- uating and pursuing her studies abroad, Elizabeth Blackwell returned to New York where she opened the New York Infirmary, for "providing and fur- nishing medicines and medical and surgical aid to such persons as may be in need thereof, and unable by reason of poverty to procure the same; also the training of an efficient body of nurses for the service of the community; and also the employment of medi- cal practitioners of either sex, it being the design of this Institution to secure the services of well qualified female practitioners of medicine for its patients." The New York Infirmary, rising ten stories high on Stuyvesant Square, is now a superb general hos- pital, which celebrated its 100 years of service in 1954. So influential was the example of Elizabeth Blackwell that by the turn of the century 7,387 MEDICINE AND PUBLIC HEALTH / 653 women were practicing medicine in the United States. 4821. [Cushing] Fulton, John F. Harvey Clash- ing, a biography. Springfield, 111., Thomas, 1946. 754 p. (Yale University. School of Medi- cine. Yale Medical Library. Historical Library. Publication no. 13) Med 46-151 R154.C96F8 Dr. John F. Fulton, Sterling Professor of the His- tory of Medicine at Yale University, and Harvey Cushing's literary executor, has interwoven the story of Cushing's life with selections from family papers, diaries, and case histories, with their caricatures and meticulous drawings, to produce a biography of the eminent brain surgeon which appeals to laymen as well as to medical students. As Resident in Sur- gery at Johns Hopkins Medical School in the late 1890's, Cushing (1869-1939) was surrounded by such men as William Henry Welch, William Osier, and William S. Halsted, Surgeon-in-Chief, who profoundly influenced his career as a surgeon. A paper on trigeminal neuralgia, which Cushing read before a joint meeting of the Philadelphia Neurologi- cal Society and the College of Physicians in April 1900, stands as an important landmark in the history of neurosurgery because of the unusual detail and illustrations. In this, and later writings, Cushing's illustrations set a standard which has left a mark on American surgery, and his methods established neurological surgery as a recognized specialty of prime importance to the medical profession through- out the world. In 1950, a less monumental but com- petent biography entitled Harvey Cushing: Surgeon, Author, Artist, by Elizabeth H. Thomson (New York, Schuman. 347 p.) was published as one of the books in The life of science library. 4822. Flexner, James Thomas. Doctors on horse- back; pioneers of American medicine. New York, Garden City Pub. Co., 1930. 370 p. 39-25572 R153.F5 1939 Contents. — Seer and Continental soldier: John Morgan, 1 735-1 789. — Saint or scourge: Benjamin Rush, 1745-1813. — A backwoods Galahad: Ephraim McDowell, 1771-1830. — Genius on the Ohio: Daniel Drake, 1 785-1 852. — Two men and destiny: William Beaumont, 1785-1853 [and Alexis St. Martin]. — The death of pain: Crawford W. Long, 1 815-1878; William T. G. Morton, 1819-1868.— Selected bibliographies (p. 355-359). The author, who collaborated with his distin- guished father in writing the biography of William Henry Welch (no. 4831), writes these six sketches for the general reader to show how "in the settle- ments of a new nation there appeared doctors of genius, explorers who, without laboratories or instru- ments of precision or even any formal training, made great discoveries that helped usher in the age of modern medical science." 4823. [Gorgas] Gibson, John M. Physician to the world; the life of General William C. Gorgas. Durham, N. C, Duke University Press, 1950. 315 p. (Duke University publications) 50-10881 RA424.5.G6G5 Bibliography: p. [295J-307. As a sanitarian Gorgas (1854-1920) applied the principles established by the Reed Commission to free Havana and the Panama Canal Zone of mos- quitoes and yellow fever, and as Surgeon General of the U. S. Army during World War I he safeguarded the health of the largest body of men ever to wear the American uniform up to that time. "His vision and his initiative translated the known scientific facts concerning yellow fever into practical accomplish- ment, thereby making possible the control of this scourge of the tropics and the building of the Panama Canal." Presenting an honorary degree from Johns Hopkins University, Dr. William Welch described Gorgas as a "physician and sanitarian of the highest eminence, who, by his conquests over pestilential diseases, has rendered signal service to his profession, to his country, and to the world." The author of this admiring biography is a journalist, a State health department official, and, like his sub- ject, an Alabamian. 4824. Gross, Samuel D. Autobiography of Samuel D. Gross, M. D. . . . emeritus professor of surgery in the Jefferson Medical College of Phila- delphia. With sketches of his contemporaries. Edited by his sons. Philadelphia, G. Barrie, 1887. 2 v. 15-9084 R154.G77A3 As a surgeon, teacher, and author, Samuel D. Gross (1805-1884) was one of the most influential physicians in 19th-century America, and one of the earliest to create American medical literature of im- portance. He writes the story of his life with the hope of stimulating the ambitious to work for the advancement of science and the amelioration of human suffering. Born in Pennsylvania, Gross graduated from Jefferson Medical College in Phila- delphia, to which he returned to occupy the chair of surgery between 1865 and 1882. Among his con- tributions were his surgical handbook entitled A System of Surgery; Pathological, Diagnostic, Thera- peutique, and Operative (Philadelphia, Blanchard & Lea, 1859. 2 v.) which went through many edi- tions, and the Lives of Eminent American Physicians and Surgeons (Philadelphia, Lindsay & Blakiston, 1 861. 836 p.) which he edited and published "to popularize the profession, and to place its services and claims more conspicuously, than has yet been 654 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES done, before the American people." The founding of the American Surgical Association by Dr. Gross in 1880, "to foster surgical art, science, education and literature," is typical of his continuing interest in the development of surgery in America. 4825. Hertzler, Arthur E. The horse and buggy doctor. New York, Harper, 1938. 322 p. 38-27572 R154.H39A3 Arthur Emanuel Hertzler (1870-1946), surgeon, teacher, founder of a hospital, and author, has taken time out from his scientific monographs on surgical pathology and other medical subjects, to record for posterity one phase in American life, which through the development of better communications, hos- pitals, and specialization, is fast becoming a tradition. Set in Kansas, and interspersed with human inci- dents, Dr. Hertzler's own story is typical of that which might be told by any doctor-surgeon who practiced his profession in a small community and its surrounding countryside during the latter part of the 19th century and the first quarter or more of the 20th. Dr. Hertzler pictures the difference be- tween the medical education available to him and to the students of the 1930's; the changes in modes of transportation from horse and buggy to automobile; the contrasts between the bedside doctor and the office physician, the kitchen operation and hospital surgery, and between the days of epidemics and those of immunity, and he summarizes the effects of such changes on medical care in the United States. 4826. [Mather] Beall, Otho T., and Richard H. Shryock. Cotton Mather, first significant figure in American medicine. Baltimore, Johns Hopkins Press, 1954. 241 p. (Johns Hopkins Uni- versity. Institute of the History of Medicine. Publications. 1st ser.: Monographs, v. 5) 54-8009 F67.M4218 Reprinted from volume 63 of the Proceedings of the American Antiquarian Society. The cultural significance of medical thought in the English colonies at the beginning of the 18th century is illustrated in the life of Cotton Mather (1663-1728), whose role in medical history is fully told for the first time. He recognized in medicine "an immediate opportunity to apply science to the welfare of mankind," and his activity during the smallpox epidemic of 1721 is his major contribution to medical practice. His use of inoculation "was the first positive achievement in preventive medicine." See also item no. 40. 4827. [Mayo] Clapesatde, Helen B. The Doc- tors Mayo. Minneapolis, University of Min- nesota Press, 1 94 1. xiv, 822 p. 41-52031 R154.M33C3 Bibliographical notes: p. 717-799. The Mayo Clinic is a living, world-renowned memorial to Dr. William W. Mayo (1819-1911) and his two sons, who molded it as deftly as their skills have shaped the techniques, the teaching, and the practice of surgery since the end of the 19th century. The author, editor of the University of Minnesota Press, has had access to correspondence and other manuscripts, newspaper clippings, and transcripts of interviews for the basis of her life of the Mayos, which is also the story of the Midwest as it emerged from pioneer days, and of medicine as it developed from the horse-and-buggy period to the age of clinicians. Her book was translated into several foreign languages, and reprinted in 1943 by the Garden City Publishing Company (Garden City, N. Y., 822 p.); a second edition, condensed for quick reading, was published in 1954. The Mayos' contribution to medicine began in surgery, but, in the words of the author, "their reputation rests upon the integrated, cooperative form of medi- cal practice and education they developed," which "is part of the heritage of all medicine and of every American." 4828. [Mitchell] Earnest, Ernest P. S. Weir Mitchell, novelist and physician. Phila- delphia, University of Pennsylvania Press, 1950. 279 p. 50-8063 R154.M66E3 The list of institutions and individuals who per- mitted Dr. Earnest to use their collections of Mitchell papers, and the "Notes" (p. 245-274) indicate the extensive research that has gone into this biography of Silas Weir Mitchell (1829-1914) of Philadelphia, who gained prominence in his own day for his work on injuries of the nerves, his "rest cure" for nervous diseases, his discovery of the nature of ratdesnake venom, and his writings, both scientific and fictional. Treating nerve wounds during the Civil War, Mitchell gave impetus to the infant science of ' neurology, and his critical address before the 50th annual meeting of the Medico-Psychological Asso- ciation, in 1894, stimulated the movement for im- proved institutions for the care of the mentally ill. Like Oliver Wendell Holmes, and more recendy Somerset Maugham and A. J. Cronin, Mitchell drew on his medical experiences in touch with the intimate lives of his patients to produce novels. In 1952 David M. Rein published a study of those novels: S. Weir Mitchell as a Psychiatric Novelist (New York, International Universities Press. 207 p.). Both Earnest and Rein agree that Mitch- ell's "accomplishments deserve to be recalled more widely and wrought into the tradition of American culture." MEDICINE AND PUBLIC HEALTH / 655 4829. [Osier] Cushing, Harvey W. The life of Sir William Osier. London, New York, Oxford University Press, 1940. xviii, 14 17 p. 40-27751 R489.O7C8 1940 "Originally published in 1925 in a two-volume edition." — Foreword. William Osier (1848-1919) was born in Canada and spent the last 15 years of his life in England, but the fruitful interlude of 21 years in the United States entitles him to a place among those who laid the foundations of modern American medicine. Becoming professor of clinical medicine at the Uni- versity of Pennsylvania in 1884, his bedside instruc- tion was an innovation in the Philadelphia school. Through the influence of William H. Welch, Osier was appointed Physician-in-Chief of the new Johns Hopkins Hospital in 1886, and was primarily re- sponsible for the organization of the clinic. During 16 years of assocation with the Johns Hopkins Hos- pital and Medical School, Osier published his mag- num opus, The Principles and Practice of Medicine, (which reached its 16th edition in 1947) and investi- gated the etiology of typhoid fever, malaria, pneu- monia, and other major diseases, so that his "greatest professional service was that of propagandist of pub- lic health measures." In 1926 Cushing received the Pulitzer prize for this Life, which is regarded as one of the great medical biographies. 4830. [Rush] Goodman, Nathan G. Benjamin Rush, physician and citizen, 1746-18 13. Philadelphia, University of Pennsylvania Press, 1934. 421 p. 34-333 l8 Ri54- R 9G65 Bibliography: p. [377]~4o6. This is the first full-length biography of one of the most versatile figures in 18th-century America. Becoming a professor in the first medical school in the colonies in 1769, Rush through his lectures and writings exerted an influence on the medical profes- sion that was still apparent at the close of the cen- tury. As a physician he started the practice of medi- cine among the underprivileged of Philadelphia, in whose welfare he always maintained a keen interest; introduced new theories concerning the cause and cure of diseases which antagonized some of his col- leagues; led the fight against epidemics, and cham- pioned the humane treatment of the mentally ill. Benjamin Rush threw his energies behind the cause of independence and became a member of the Con- tinental Congress, a signer of the Declaration of Independence, and an influence in the medical de- partment of the Continental Army during the Revolution. His published writings, which Mr. Goodman has listed in his bibliography, and the more recently published collection of the Letters of Benjamin Rush, edited by Lyman H. Butterfield, and published for the American Philosophical So- ciety as volume 30, parts 1-2, of its Memoirs (Prince- ton, N. J., Princeton University Press, 1951. 2 v.) show that he was a prolific writer, and fearless in expressing his opinions on any topic in which he was interested. 4831. [Welch] Flexner, Simon, and James Thomas Flexner. William Henry Welch and the heroic age of American medicine. New York, Vi- king Press, 1941. 539 p. 41-20339 R154.W32F6 "Source references" included in Appendix C; Notes to the text, p. 466-524. This biography is also the story of developments in medical sciences from the 1870's to the 1930's as shaped by William Henry Welch (1850-1934), who is often called the "Dean of American Medicine." He was born in Connecticut, the son and grandson of physicians; and educated at Yale, at the College of Physicians and Surgeons of Columbia University, and abroad. Impressed by the advances in histology, chemistry, physiology, and pathology which he observed in Germany, Dr. Welch founded Ameri- ca's first pathological laboratory at Bellvue Hos- pital Medical College in 1878, and pioneered in the growth of American medical research. As pro- fessor of pathology in Johns Hopkins University, he helped to organize the Hospital in 1889 and the Medical School in 1893 as great medical centers for teaching, research, and clinical medicine. Known at home and abroad for his experiments in pathology and bacteriology, his interest in public health and sanitation, and his association with the Rockefeller Institute of Medical Research and the Journal of Experimental Medicine, Dr. Welch was the recipi- ent of many honors and awards on both sides of the Atlantic. At the time of his 80th birthday, Dr. Welch took pride in his thought that "America is now paying the debt which she owed so long to the Old World by her own active and fruitful partici- pation in scientific discovery and the advancement of the science and art of medicine and sanitation." Donald H. Fleming in his recent brief biography, William H. Welch and the Rise of Modern Medi- cine (Boston, Little, Brown, 1954. 216 p.), places the work of the Flexners first on his list of "Ac- knowledgments." 4832. Young, Hugh H. Hugh Young, a surgeon's autobiography. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1940. 554 p. 4p-33"7 Rl 54-Y63A3 Dr. Young's story of his life (1870-1945) opens with his early years in Texas, and his education in Virginia and Maryland, and closes with a description of his civic activities, his travels, and his hobbies. The central portion reviews the development of urology as one of the early medical specialties in the United States, and the author's service at home as 656 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES director of the Brady Urological Institute of Balti- more, and overseas as director of the A. E. F.'s Di- vision of Urology. Dr. Young's researches in the field of his preeminence continued as long as he lived; he submitted an article for publication in the November 1945 issue of the Journal of Urology, just one month before his death. The book has numer- ous stories of cases, simply presented, and a series of remarkable technical drawings; it should appeal to both the layman and the physician. C. Psychiatry 4833. American Psychiatric Association. One hun- dred years of American psychiatry. New York, Published for the American Psychiatric As- sociation by Columbia University Press, 1944. xxiv, 649 p. A44-1921 RC435.A6 The publication of this volume commemorates the 100th birthday of the American Psychiatric Asso- ciation, which was founded in Philadelphia on October 16, 1844, by thirteen physicians, all of them superintendents of hospitals for the mentally ill. Thirteen authorities in the field have contributed chapters on the history of psychiatry, and of the Association; the story of mental hospitals, and of psychiatric research, literature, and therapies; the development of mental hygiene; military psychiatry; psychology in relation to American psychiatry; the growth of psychiatry as a specialty; its legal aspects; and its influence on anthropology in America. Psy- chiatry, according to Dr. Gregory Zilboorg, who writes the Foreword, "touches on every aspect of the psychological and sociological problems which make up our civilized living, healthy and diseased. This volume is therefore intended to represent a survey of psychiatry as a growing cultural force." It contains bibliographical footnotes, a list of "Some important books in American psychiatry published in the last twenty-five years": p. 1266^-269, and a list of American psychiatric periodicals": p. 269-271. 4834. Beers, Clifford Whittingham. A mind that found itself; an autobiography. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, Doran, 1935. 434 p. 35-6068 RC439.B4 1935 This is the "twenty-fifth anniversary edition" of Clifford Beers' autobiography, first published in 1908. Certain pages which have served their pur- pose have been deleted from this edition, but in- teresting letters and an account of important work that has grown out of the publication of the book have been appended. As a young business man Beers suffered a severe mental upset, and in his story he describes the condition and treatment of the mentally ill as he experienced them in several insti- tutions in which he was a patient. Its publication heralded the beginning of a new era in the manage- ment of the mentally ill, second only to that which Dorothea Dix had instigated in the middle of the 19th century. In 1909 Beers helped to found the National Committee for Mental Hygiene, which broadened its scope to include activities outside of hospitals, and guided mental-hygiene activities for forty years. The establishment of the Phipps Clinic for psychiatry at Johns Hopkins, through the in- fluence of Dr. William Welch and the philanthropist, Henry Phipps, illustrates the interest which the autobiography stimulated. The American Founda- tion for Mental Hygiene, founded by Beers in 1928 to raise funds for the National Committee, and for state and other agencies in the field, is a memorial to Beers' achievements. 4835. Bryan, William A. Administrative psy- chiatry. New York, Norton, 1936. 349 p. 37-27130 RC439.B885 Bibliography: p. 339-341. Dr. Bryan was for years superintendent of the State Hospital at Worcester, Mass., which was estab- lished in 1832, and has often led in new methods. In this book he describes the organization and prob- lems of a psychiatric hospital for those who wish to prepare for the specialty of administration. Chap- ters are devoted to building the staff, the nursing programs, the standards of care; medical, surgical, and psychiatric services; the social worker, the teach- ing program, and research; the clinic with its mental hygiene program as a factor in preventive medicine, and the relation of the administrator and staff to community groups. Under improved and skilled administration, the author foresees "the mental hos- pital of the future as a powerful and leading factor in the public health of the community." 4836. Deutsch, Albert. The mentally ill in Amer- ica; a history of their care and treatment from colonial times. 2d ed., rev. and enl. New York, Columbia University Press, 1949. xx, 555 p. 49-7527 RC443.D4 1949 Bibliography: p. [52o]-537. The first edition, published in 1937, was made possible by the American Foundation for Mental MEDICINE AND PUBLIC HEALTH / 657 Hygiene. In the second edition the author adds a review of recent trends toward prevention and bet- ter treatment of mental illness in the United States including the National Mental Health Act of 1946 authorizing the Federal Government to give substan- tial support to research, to training psychiatric per- sonnel, and to expansion of services for those who do not require hospitalization. The subject is ap- proached from the standpoint of the social historian, who illustrates how improvements in personnel, tech- niques, and institutions follow changes in social at- titudes. This is the story of another episode in American life illustrating the combined efforts of doctors, social workers, philanthropists, and gov- ernmental units to improve the well-being of a less fortunate segment of the population. 4837. Deutsch, Albert. The shame of the States. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1948. 188 p. 48-9247 RC443.D415 Believing that civilization in the United States will be judged, to a great extent, by the public's atti- tude toward the care and treatment of the mentally ill, Deutsch attempts to revitalize the crusade started by Dorothea Dix by publishing the results of his survey of existing conditions in certain psychiatric hospitals in selected areas. The author considers the action taken by the American Psychiatric Asso- ciation in 1946, in urging every state mental hospital superintendent to take the lead in exposing to public view any bad conditions within his knowledge, as a milestone toward attaining a higher level of insti- tutional care. The last chapter is devoted to Deutsch's idea of an "ideal state mental hospital," which he believes will become a reality through the efforts of an enlightened and aroused public. 4838. Greenblatt, Milton, and others. From cus- todial to therapeutic patient care in mental hospitals; explorations in social treatment. New York, Russell Sage Foundation, 1955. 497 p. 55-11724 RC439.G82 Bibliography, compiled by Frederic L. Wells: p. 431-484. This book is the result of a project sponsored by the Russell Sage Foundation to study patient care in mental hospitals, and to explore the utilization of the whole environment — the physical resources as well as the social interaction between doctors, nurses, aides, and patients — in the cure or improvement of the patient. Considered by the Foundation as among the "best of those teaching and research in- stitutions that are concerned with the advancement of psychiatric treatment," the Boston Psychopathic Hospital was selected to estabish cooperative rela- tions with the Bedford V. A. Hospital and the Metro- politan State Hospital in Waltham, "in order to test 431240—60 43 the applicability of principles and practices such as those used by it." Part I traces the evolution of practices developed at the Boston Psychopathic Hos- pital, and Parts II and III comprise the report on improvements achieved at the other two hospitals. William L. Russell in The New Yor\ Hospital; a History of the Psychiatric Service, ijji-1936 (New York, Columbia University Press, 1945. 556 p.) describes the progress of that institution's Blooming- dale Asylum and Payne Whitney Clinic. The theory of social structure is the basic thesis of Alfred H. Stanton and Morris S. Schwartz in The Mental Hospital, a Study of Institutional Participation in Psychiatric Illness and Treatment (New York, Basic Books, 1954. 492 p.). The indication is that a transition is rapidly being made from custodial re- straint of the insane in asylums to the curative treat- ment of the mentally ill, through improvement of the social environment, in hospitals. 4839. Marshall, Helen E. Dorothea Dix, for- gotten Samaritan. Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina Press, 1937. 298 p. 37-9815 HV28.D6M3 Bibliography: p. [2713-287. This scholarly dissertation on the life of Dorothea Dix, published 50 years after her death, tells the story of one of America's great pioneer social work- ers, which is also a chapter in the development of institutional treatment of the mentally ill in the United States. Following a survey of the county jails, almshouses, state penitentiaries, and other in- stitutions, Dorothea Dix presented memorials to the state legislatures, and to Congress in 1848, in which she represented the mentally ill as "wards of the nation" — a broadened concept of governmental re- sponsibility. Dorothea Dix erected her own monu- ment in service to her fellow man through the 32 hospitals which were established by her efforts in the United States, as well as several abroad. Her child- hood, and her work as Superintendent of Nurses during the Civil War, are other episodes of great interest. 4840. White, William Alanson. William Alanson White; the autobiography of a purpose. With an introd. by Ray Lyman Wilbur. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, Doran, 1938. xix, 293 p. 38-13677 RC439.W5 Bibliography: p. [275J-293. William Alanson White (1870-1937) was one of the founders of modern psychiatry. An exponent of what has been labeled the genetic concept in psy- chiatry, he emphasized the importance of environ- ment and adequate research into the problems of each individual patient as essential to treatment. He 658 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES turned to occupational therapy, hydrotherapy, and psychotherapy as methods of dispensing with re- straint. Advocating cooperation between the legal profession and psychiatry in dealing with criminals, his interest in forensic problems led in 1934 to the organization of a Section on Forensic Psychiatry of the American Psychiatric Association. Much of the Autobiography deals with his years in Wash- ington as administrator of Saint Elizabeths Hospital, which he helped to make one of the leading mental hospitals in the country. He broadened the area of his influence through courses in nervous and mental diseases and psychiatry at Georgetown and George Washington Universities. His book, Outlines of Psychiatry, first published in 1907, reached its four- teenth edition in 1935, and has been called a "classic, particularly from the pedagogic standpoint." The William Alanson White Psychiatric Foundation was created by a group of friends and associates in 1933 to perpetuate Dr. White's work. D. Other Specialties 4841. American Academy of Pediatrics. Commit- tee for the Study of Child Health Services. Child health services and pediatric education; report of the Committee for the Study of Child Health Services, the American Academy of Pediatrics, with the cooperation of the United States Public Health Service and the United States Children's Bureau. New York, Commonwealth Fund, 1949. xxv, 270 p. 49-2785 RJ42.U5A62 References: p. 257-258. Supplement: Methology and tabu- lations on services. New York, Common- wealth Fund, 1949. 1. v. (various pagings) RJ42.U5A62 Suppl. By the end of the 19th century the American Pediatric Society had been founded; the organ of the profession, Pediatrics, established; and a considerable literature on the diseases of childhood published in the United States. Pediatrics had taken its place among the early specialties of the medical world. The organization of the American Association for the Study and Prevention of Infant Mortality in 1909, the creation of the U. S. Children's Bureau in 1912, the White House Conferences of 1919, 1930, and 1940, the passage of the Social Security Act in 1935, and the inauguration of a nationwide study of child health services by the American Academy of Pediatrics in 1944, of which this volume is the report, are all milestones in the development of the child health movement. Part I of this study surveys the pediatric aspects of private practice, hospitals, and community health agencies, while Part II is an evalu- ation of facilities for training physicians who are re- sponsible for child health care. The study aims to promote the Academy's objective: "preventive, diag- nostic, and curative medical services of high quality, which, when used in cooperation with other services for children, will make this country an ideal place for children to grow into responsible citizens." 4842. Carr, Malcolm Wallace. Dentistry, an agency of health service. New York, Com- monwealth Fund, 1946. xxiv, 219 p. (New York Academy of Medicine. Committee on Medicine and the Changing Order. Studies) SG46-319 RK34.U6C3 "References" at end of most of the chapters. The development of dentistry as an autonomous profession is traced during more than a century of growth. The first 75 years were devoted to im- proving techniques through research and discovery, and to establishing an educational system, and a code of practice. More recendy, and especially since the passage of the Social Security Act in 1935 made funds available for dental divisions in state health departments, the American Dental Associa- tion has been directing the profession toward a place in the public health program and stimulating communities to concern themselves actively with their local dental problems. This proceeds from the profession's growing consciousness of its re- sponsibility in a changing society, and of its re- sponsibility for cooperation with community groups in improving the nation's health. The problem has also been explored by Alfred J. Asgis in Professional Dentistry in American Society; a Historical and Social Approach to Dental Progress (New York, Clinical Press, 1943. 260 p.). 4843. Horner, Harlan H. Dental education to- day. Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1947. 420 p. Med 47-610 RK91.H6 The author is secretary of the Council on Dental Education of the American Dental Association, and his study is based on a survey of dental schools in the United States conducted by the Council prin- cipally in 1942-43, with a view toward standardiza- tion and accreditation. The chapters deal with organization and plans, financial management and support, faculties, students, curriculum, teaching, MEDICINE AND PUBLIC HEALTH / 6 59 and auxiliary agencies. Pointing out defects and limitations as well as accomplishments, the author concludes that American dental schools have clearly won world leadership. In his words, "the great challenge of the future to all agencies of dentistry in common — schools, examining boards and prac- titioners — lies in the inescapable responsibility of carrying to humankind the fruits of the science and of the art the profession already possesses." 4844. Hubbell, Alvin A. The development of ophthalmology in America, 1800 to 1870; a contribution to ophthalmologic history and biogra- phy; an address delivered in abstract before the Sec- tion of Ophthalmology of the American Medical Association, June 4, 1907. Rev. and enl. Chicago, American Medical Association Press, 1908. 197 p. 8-8140 RE30.U6H9 George Rosen in his doctoral dissertation, The Specialization of Medicine with Particular Reference to Ophthalmology (New York, Froben Press, 1944. 94 p.), says that "ophthalmology and otology were among the very first specialties to appear ... As a result these fields of practice have an older tradi- tion as specialties and enjoy the prestige of estab- lished achievement." Dr. Hubbell, professor of clinical opthalmology in the University of Buffalo, describes the American contribution to that tradi- tion in brief sketches of institutions and the indi- viduals who, through research and clinical observa- tion, have developed ocular surgery and other tech- niques, and have disseminated their findings in pub- lications on the anatomy, physiology, and pathology of the eye. A chapter is devoted to the transition period during which the treatment of diseases of the eye passed from the general physician and surgeon to the ophthalmological specialist, whose position was well established by 1870. E. Hospitals and Nursing 4845. Chesney, Alan M. The Johns Hopkins Hos- pital and the Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine, a chronicle. Baltimore, Johns Hopkins Press, 1943. 318 p. SG44-2 R747.J62C5 With approximately 30 years of service at the Johns Hopkins Hospital and School of Medicine, where he progressed from student, instructor, and as- sociate professor to dean, Dr. Chesney has combined his years of experience with the official records of both institutions to write their history from the in- corporation of the University and the Hospital in 1867 to the opening of the School of Medicine in 1893. This first volume was published on the 50th anniversary of the opening of the School of Medicine, but the second volume, interrupted by the war years, has not appeared. Dr. Chesney tells the story of the unusual trust created by Johns Hopkins, and the careers of great figures of American medicine — John Shaw Billings, William H. Welch, William Osier, William S. Halsted, Franklin B. Mall, and others — as they assisted in the organization and development of a University unique in the medical annals of the United States. Richard H. Shryock in his brochure, The Unique Influence of the Johns Hopkins University on American Medicine (Copen- hagen, Munksgaard, 1953. 77 p.), tells how well the foundation had been laid for future growth in these words: "To Hopkins . . . the country was indebted after 1890 for a veritable revolution in the nature and status of medical sciences — with all that this implied for human welfare. This was a de- velopment of major importance in the social and cultural life of the nation, and the meaning of the Hopkins epic is missed if these wider relationships and consequences are ignored. Here is a tradition which should and will be maintained, no doubt in changing forms adapted to changing circumstances." The history of The Johns Hopkins School of Nurs- ing, 1889-1949, by Ethel Johns and Blanche Pfeffer- korn (Baltimore, Johns Hopkins Press, 1954. 416 p.), rounds out the story of this medical center. 4846. Columbia University. New Yor\ State Hos- pital Study. A pattern for hospital care; final report ... by Eli Ginzberg. New York, Columbia University Press, 1949. xxiv, 368 p. 49-50231 RA981.N7C6 1949 This study is a report by Columbia University to the Joint Survey and Planning Commission on the present and potential financial position of the vol- untary general hospital in New York State. Re- quests from leaders of voluntary hospital groups for State aid, and the responsibility of the Commis- sion "for developing a long-range construction pro- gram to provide facilities which would insure ade- quate hospital, clinic, and related services for all the people of the State," gave impetus to the study. It seeks to provide a basis for the allocation of Federal funds to construct, expand, or rebuild hospitals in designated areas. In addition to questions concern- ing the financial position of voluntary general hos- pitals, the study explores the major challenges which 660 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES confront those hospitals within the next few years, the role of municipal hospitals, and the problems of providing care for patients suffering from chronic diseases, tuberculosis, or mental diseases. It sug- gests action that can be taken on an individual, communal, and State level to improve the present system and to insure its sound development. In the last chapter the responsibilities of the various organi- zations in New York State for hospital care are out- lined and suggestions offered for an integrated program. 4847. Commission on Hospital Care. Hospital care in the United States; a study of the function of the general hospital, its role in the care of all types of illness, and the conduct of activities related to patient service, with recommendations for its extension and integration for more adequate care of the American public. New York, Common- wealth Fund, 1947. xxiv, 631 p. Med 47-56 RA981.A2C57 Includes bibliographies. In October 1944 the American Hospital Associa- tion organized its Commission on Hospital Care in order to make a comprehensive survey of hospitals and determine their part in the postwar life of America. Its report discusses the trends in admin- istration and organization that underlie the future development of hospital service, and describes the factors which affect the size and use of hospital facili- ties and the need for them. It analyzes the physical, service, and financial aspects of existing hospitals. From the pilot project set up in Michigan to serve as a pattern for study in other states, it derives sug- gestions for the integration of specialized services in the general hospital, and an estimate of additional facilities necessary to provide adequate service to the public. A final section presents methods of financing hospital care, the legal status of hospitals, and their interrelations with governmental and voluntary health agencies. The U. S. Public Health Service cooperated with the Commission in col- lecting the data for this survey: "The arrangement was unique in that it established a means whereby a voluntary and a governmental agency collaborated in the study and analysis of a public problem." As a sequel to this work the Commission on Financing of Hospital Care was established in November 1951, "to study the costs of providing adequate hospital services and to determine the best systems of pay- ment for such services." The results of that study were published as Financing Hospital Care in the United States (New York, Blakiston, 1954-55. 3 v ')- Volume 1 deals with "Factors Affecting the Costs of Hospital Care;" volume 2, "Prepayment and the Community;" volume 3, "Financing Hospital Care for Nonwage and Low-Income Groups." 4848. Corwin, Edward H. L. The American hos- pital. New York, Commonwealth Fund, 1946. 226 p. (New York Academy of Medicine. Committee on Medicine and the Changing Order. Studies.) SG 46-293 RA981.A2C6 "References" at the end of each chapter. The adaptation of anesthesia to operative pro- cedures in the 1840's, the development of new tech- niques and clinical laboratories, the concentration of population in cities and the popular acceptance of hospitalization insurance plans, and the accumu- lation and distribution of wealth have all stimulated the growth of general and specialized hospitals. From 178 in 1873, the year in which the first list of hospitals in the United States was published, the number had increased to 6,655 m I0 43> tne vear in which the Committee on Medicine and the Changing Order began its study. The author, who was executive secretary of the Committee on Public Health Relations of the New York Academy of Medicine, examines all phases of the American hospital — ownership, finance, geographical distri- bution, training of nurses and interns, organization of medical services including outpatient departments, and hospital architecture. The American hospital, he concludes, "has not adjusted itself adequately to the income levels of all groups of people or to the needs of all geographic areas. It has not uniformly reached the level of excellence it is potentially capable of achieving." In his final chapter he offers a whole series of practical suggestions calculated to promote these ends. 4849. McGibony, John R. Principles of hospital administration. New York, Putnam, 1952. 540 p. 52-11467 RA971.M247 The chief of the Division of Medical and Hospital Resources, U. S. Public Health Service (1949-53) describes, among other functions of hospital admin- istration, methods of measuring community needs for hospital services, and raising funds for construc- tion. The principles of functional hospital design and organization will be of special help to those interested in efficient operation. The book fills a need in hospital literature for trustees, administra- tors, doctors, nurses, and students. 4850. Morton, Thomas G. The history of the Pennsylvania Hospital, 1751-1895. Publi- cation authorized by the contributors at their annual meeting, May 1893, and directed by the Board of Managers. Philadelphia, Times Print. House, 1895. 575 p. 9-^1^1 RA982.P5P47 The Pennsylvania Hospital in Philadelphia, MEDICINE AND PUBLIC HEALTH / 66 1 founded in 175 1, is the oldest institution intended solely for the care of the sick and injured in the United States. The idea of establishing a hospital was conceived by Dr. Thomas Bond, who, with the assistance of Benjamin Franklin and others, raised funds among their fellow citizens for the support of the hospital. Compiled from original documents, the History contains a chapter on the treatment of the mentally ill whose cause was championed by Benjamin Rush. The maintenance of a community hospital by public subscription provided a pattern for the future development of hospitals in the United States. 4851. New York Academy of Medicine. Commit- tee on Public Health Relations. Infant and maternal care in New York City; a study of hospital facilities. Edward H. L. Corwin, general director of study. New York, Columbia University Press, 1952. xv, 188 p. 52-11549 RG962.N4N4 1952 This study illustrates the concern of a metropolitan community for the health and welfare of its children. A team consisting of an obstetrician, a pediatrically trained nurse, and a pediatrician visited 104 hospital maternity services in New York City. This report presents the facts which they obtained concerning every aspect of the lying-in and nursing services in the hospitals of the city. Specific shortcomings are summarized in the last chapter as a basis for the improvements to be desired. 4852. Roberts, Mary M. American nursing; his- tory and interpretation. New York, Mac- millan, 1954. 688 p. 54-12563 RT4.R6 Bibliographies at end of chapters. The author, editor emeritus of the American Jour- nal of Nursing, selects 1900, the year of the Journal's founding, and 1952, when the unification of several nursing associations was completed, as the termini of her history of American nursing. The first two chapters picture the American scene at and before the turn of the century and describe the influence of Florence Nightingale, and certain military and religious groups, on the profession in the United States. The transition from private duty to public health nurse, the growing recognition of the prac- tical nurse as part of the nursing profession, the genesis and growth of nursing schools and profes- sional organizations, and wartime duties and peace- time services are interpreted against changes in eco- nomic and social concepts, and scientific improve- ments. The part nurses play in the World Health Organization and international health programs is the subject of the last chapter. The author points out that the development of international nursing activities is a challenge to those nurses who believe that "anything that contributes to the exchange of creative ideas across boundary lines contributes to the welfare of mankind." 4853. Washburn, Frederic A. The Massachusetts General Hospital; its development, 1900- 1935. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1939. 643 p. 39-17718 RA982.B7M53 Officers of the Massachusetts General Hospital: p. 576-633. The director emeritus of the Massachusetts Gen- eral Hospital tells its story during the period of its greatest growth, relating events that occurred prior to 1900 only when they have not appeared in earlier histories, or have been found pertinent to develop- ments that followed the turn of the century. The General Hospital, which cared only for the poor in 1900, expanded its plant by the addition of the unique Baker Memorial for the benefit of people of moderate means, and the Phillips House for those well able to pay more than the cost of their care. By 1935, with its Out-Patient Department and its services for the mentally ill at McLean, the Hospital was caring for all groups in the community. Changes in administration which provided a more functional organization are described, with the con- sequent growth of research, the formation of spe- cial clinics, and the improvement of facilities for patients, for the investigation of disease, and for the teaching of medicine. Dr. Washburn has written not only an interesting account of the Hospital, but also a "vital chapter in the history of the progress of medical science and administration." 4854. Yost, Edna. American women of nursing. Rev. ed. Philadelphia, Lippincott, 1955. xxiii, 197 p. _ 55-32 16 RT34.Y7 1955 Contents. — M. Adelaide Nutting. — Lillian Wald. Annie M. Goodrich. — Isabel M. Stewart. — Sister M. Olivia Gowan. — Estelle Massey Osborne. — Florence G. Blake. — Anne Prochazka. — Theodora A. Floyd. — Lucile Petry Leone. Modern nursing in the United States was inspired by the services of Florence Nightingale in the Crimean War. Supported by the democratic action of a group of women in New York City who banded together and made a public appeal for funds, the first nurses' training school "to be based definitely on Miss Nightingale's uncompromising doctrine which insisted on the need for full authority for the matron or superintendent of the school who must be a nurse, not a physician or layman," was opened at Bellvue Hospital on May 1, 1873. The author has chosen for inclusion in this book the lives of interesting women whose stories tell something of the problems and struggles which have confronted the nursing profession. "They have done a good job, they are women of whom democracy may well be proud." 662 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES F. Medical Education 4855. Allen, Raymond B. Medical education and the changing order. New York, Common- wealth Fund, 1946. 142 p. (New York, Academy of Medicine. Committee on Medicine and the Changing Order. Studies) SG46-252 R735.A46 Bibliographical footnotes. The medical profession is increasingly focusing attention on man in his economic and social environ- ment which is constantly changed by technological advances. Medical education aims to produce phy- sicians who recognize the influence of emotional and mental reactions on the physical manifestations of disease. Dr. Allen, dean of the College of Dentistry, Medicine, and Pharmacy, University of Illinois, describes the development of the techniques of medical education, points out some of the de- ficiencies, and suggests some improvements. "Med- icine of the future," he says, "if it is to progress as a social as well as a biological science must broaden its oudook and adjust its educational program ac- cordingly. Medicine is coming of age as a social science in the service of society." The problems of medical education and recent progress in their solu- tion are also described by a group of medical edu- cators in a series of papers which appeared in the Journal of Medical Education and have been re- printed as Medical Education Today, Its Aims, Problems, and Trends (Chicago, Association of American Medical Colleges, 1953. 123 p.). Ex- periments in methods of teaching and in integrating certain related science courses, which are in progress at Harvard, Western Reserve, the University of Colorado, and other medical schools, are given as illustrations of the "attempt to restructure the teach- ing program to accommodate comprehensive medicine." 4856. Carson, Joseph. A history of the Medical Department of the University of Pennsyl- vania, from its foundation in 1765. With sketches of the lives of deceased professors. Philadelphia, Lindsay & Blakiston, 1869. 8-7557 R747.P42 1869 Through the influence of Dr. John Morgan and Dr. William Shippen, formal medical education in the American colonies began with the organization of the Medical Department of the College of Phila- delphia in 1765. This history is the expansion of a lecture delivered by the author on the occasion of its centenary. The growth of the school up to the American Revolution, its union with the University of Pennsylvania, and its progress through one hundred years, are told in the lives of the founders and professors, whose courses in the medical sci- ences, combined with clinical instruction in the Philadelphia Almshouse, did much to shape the pat- tern of medical education in the United States. 4857. Commission on Graduate Medical Educa- tion. Graduate medical education; report. Chicago [ University of Chicago Press ] 1940. 303 p. 40-33806 R737.C6 This report may be considered as a supplement to the Final Report of the Commission on Medical Education (no. 4858) which dealt only briefly with problems in the graduate field. It does not attempt to survey present practices, but to bring together the best medical and educational thought concerning the internship, the residency, postgraduate educa- tion, and specialty boards, with the hope of stimu- lating improvements in these areas which will lead to better-trained physicians and better medical care of the patient. To place internships and residencies in their proper perspective in the educational pro- gram, and to arouse a feeling of mutual responsi- bility between hospitals and interns for providing training in return for service, a study of the situa- tion in 77 hospitals in New York City was prepared by the New York Committee on the Study of Hos- pital Internships and Residencies: Internships and Residencies in New Yor\ City, 1934-1937, Their Place in Medical Education (New York, Common- wealth Fund, 1938. 492 p.). 4858. Commission on Medical Education. Final report. New York, Office of the Director of Study, 1932. 560 p. 33-1109 R745.C86 Regulations and specifications formulated by the American Medical Association, the Association of American Medical Colleges, and various state licen- sing boards, by 191 8, had transformed medical edu- cation from apprentice and commercial school train- ing to a university enterprise with precise standards applying to students, teaching staff, hospital facili- ties, premedical requirements, and curriculum. The elevated standards reduced the number of schools and of students, and increased the cost so that medi- cal education reached a static plateau. New discov- eries and points of view, and changing university aims and methods as well as social conditions, created the need of broadening the scope of medical education. The Commission on Medical Education MEDICINE AND PUBLIC HEALTH / 663 was organized as an independent body by the Asso- ciation of American Medical Colleges in 1925 to study existing conditions. Attention is focused on the training of the medical student to meet the health needs and to understand the social and economic conditions of the community in which he becomes a practicing physician, and as such, a leader in health and other community programs. To accomplish this objective the Commission divides the study into chapters on the relationship between the medical profession and the general public, the need of post- graduate education, specialization, internship and licensure, and the medical courses that form the basis of the training. "Emphasis," says the Com- mission, "must be kept constantly upon the fact that only through a sufficient number of properly trained physicians can a community expect to meet its responsibility for the care and prevention of ill- ness and the protection of health." 4859. Ebaugh, Franklin G., and Charles A. Rymer. Psychiatry in medical education. New York, Commonwealth Fund, 1942. xxiv, 619 p. 42-5906 RC607.E24 Bibliography at end of each chapter. Concerned with psychiatric education as a phase of medical training both for general practice and for specialization, this study is largely based on data collected during a survey of 66 psychiatric schools in the United States during 1932, and from follow- up questionnaires in 1934, 1938, and 1940. Train- ing of the staff, curriculum from preclinical through postgraduate years, and hospital and other clinical facilities are explored. The authors use the 4-year course in psychiatry at their own University of Colorado as an illustration of the essential features in psychiatric training. The section on postgraduate education considers the need of advanced training and opportunities in the field. In summing up, the authors recognized that psychiatry in the early 1940's had not completely succeeded in breaking through its isolation, and that to succeed, it "must permeate the curriculum . . . [and] graduates of medical schools must learn to treat the whole patient — a total person with a mind as well as a body." 4860. Norwood, William Frederick. Medical ed- ucation in the United States before the Civil War. Philadelphia, University of Pennsylvania Press, 1944. xvi, 487 p. SG44-196 R745.N6 Bibliography: p. 435-462. Prior to 1800 medical education passed through periods of apprenticeship to the few English or con- tinental-trained doctors found in the American colonies, study abroad, and training at the infant medical schools such as those founded at the College of Philadelphia (1765), King's College (1768), Har- vard (1783), or Darthmouth (1797). During the first half of the new century an increasing popula- tion and a continuous westward migration created a growing demand for doctors and so for medical schools. These sprang up without regulation, and often only for the financial gain of the promoters. Largely in order to improve the standards of the medical schools the American Medical Association was organized by leaders of the profession in 1847. The author surveys the development of the Ameri- can system up to i860 in this study of the medical schools of Pennsylvania, New York, New England, the Old South, and the country west of the Appa- lachian Mountains. In Part VIII he explores the financial support of medical schools, the cost of medical training, the curriculum, textbooks, teach- ing problems, and degrees and licensure. The pe- riod also witnessed the entrance of women into the medical profession, and the rise of sectarian groups such as the homeopaths and Thomsonians. "Medi- cal education in the United States ... in the cen- tury before the Civil War, constitutes a significant and unique chapter in the social history of the country." 4861. Survey of Medical Education. Medical schools in the United States at mid-century. [By] John E. Deitrick and Robert C. Berson. New York, McGraw-Hill, 1953. xxii, 380 p. 53-6041 R745.S85 A report on the Survey Committee's visits to 41 representative medical schools from September 1949 to May 1951, prepared by the director and asso- ciate director of study. The basic premises are stated in the Introduction in which the functions of medi- cal schools — education, research, service, finances, operation, curriculum and teaching methods, and ad- vanced education and training — are discussed. A Subcommittee on Preprofessional Education, under the chairmanship of Aura E. Severinghaus, also pre- pared a survey: Preparation for Medical Education in the Literal Arts College (New York, McGraw- Hill, 1953. 400 p.), which rounds out the picture of medical education at mid-century. In summing up the authors say: "The greatest need of medical schools today is clear, critical thought, by men who are sincerely interested in the education of students and who have an understanding of educational prin- ciples, a knowledge of science, and familiarity with social and economic trends. Such men must have courage and faith in the idea that the quality of medical education in the last analysis will deter- mine the future of medicine in the United States." 664 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES G. Public Health 4862. Bachman, George W. Health resources in the United States; personnel, facilities, and services. Washington, Brookings Institution, 1952. xvi, 344 p. 52-12128 RA407.3.B3 This is primarily a statistical review of the state of the Nation's health in 1950 as it has been affected by the advances in medical science, and the increase in medical facilities and the control of communicable diseases since 1900. Data collected by the Com- mittee on Costs of Medical Care (1928-31), the Pub- lic Health Service in the National Health Survey (1935-36), the Blue Cross Commission and other groups are analyzed. The examination of the prob- lem of personnel includes an inventory of physicians, dentists, professional nurses and auxiliary person- nel, and a special study of medical group practice of which the Mayo Clinic was one of the first ex- amples in the United States. An inventory of the hospital system as a whole with emphasis on the general hospital, and of facilities for special health problems and for certain classes such as the Armed Forces and the industrial workers, forms the third part of the survey. A study of the Nation's health was also prepared by the President's Commission on the Health Needs of the Nation: Building Amer- ica's Health ([Washington, U. S. Govt. Print. Off.] 1952-53. 5 v.). This, as well as the Brookings Institution's study, assumes the joint responsibility of both private and public agencies for public health in a democracy. 4863. Cavins, Harold M. National health agencies, a survey with especial reference to voluntary associations, including a detailed directory of major health organizations. [Washington] Pub- lic Affairs Press, 1945. 251 p. SG45-276 RA421.A1C3 "This study is concerned primarily with the rise of the national voluntary health agency as a social phenomenon of the early twentieth century, as a significant phase of public health history, as an im- portant agent of health education, and as a move- ment characteristically American." Against the background of economic, social, and scientific de- velopments, the author traces the origin and history of such major professional organizations as the American Psychiatric Association, and representa- tive agencies of the promotional or educational type like the National Tuberculosis Association. Bring- ing this information together in a single volume for the first time provides a useful source of informa- tion for the student of the public health movement. In the same year a book which, the authors say, "complements the present Study," was published under the auspices of the National Health Council: Voluntary Health Agencies by Selskar M. Gunn and Philip S. Piatt (New York, Ronald Press, 1945. 364 p.). 4864. Chicago-Cook County Health Survey. The Chicago-Cook County Health Survey con- ducted by the United States Public Health Service. New York, Columbia University Press, 1949. xlviii, 1317 p. 49-11489 RA448.C4C4 Aroused during World War II by the Selective Service reports on the health of the nation's young men, the citizens of the Chicago-Cook County area organized this survey in 1946. It "represents a land- mark in the evolution of co-operative community enterprises designed to bring the benefits of pre- ventive medical, sanitary engineering, and nursing services to every individual in the community." The findings and recommendations represent the corporate opinions of the U. S. Public Health Service and a group of recognized local experts, whose first purpose was "to make a fact-finding inventory of all the health forces in this field and to appraise the strength and weakness of their functional capacity," in order "to determine whether or not community public health resources are being used in such a way as to obtain a maximum of service for the money expended." The results are described in three parts. Part I deals with all phases of "Environmental Sani- tation" from water supplies and mosquito control to swimming pool sanitation and housing. Part II, "Preventive Medicine," details the activities of offi- cial and voluntary health agencies, from collecting public health statistics and control of communicable diseases to nutrition services and health education. Part III describes facilities and services for medical care available in the area. Dr. Thomas Parran, Sur- geon General of the United States from 1936 to 1948, thought that this undoubtedly would "establish a pattern for many similar surveys in other areas of the country." 4865. Cohn, Alfred E., and Claire Lingg. The burden of diseases in the United States. New York, Oxford University Press, 1950. 129 p. 51-1304 RA407.3.C57 References: p. 127-129. MEDICINE AND PUBLIC HEALTH / 66 5 Tables basic to figures in The burden of diseases. New York, Oxford Uni- versity Press, 1950. 69 1. RA407.3.C57 Tables Dealing for the most part with the period 1900 to 1940, two authorities in the field of medical sta- tistics have examined the mortality figures gathered by the U. S. Bureau of the Census, and the mor- bidity statistics collected during certain surveys by the U. S. Public Health Service, and other groups, to present a picture, through graphs, charts and interpretation, of the incidence of diseases upon various age groups, and the changes in the per- centage of deaths at specific ages. Such a study is important in any public health program because it demonstrates "how the results may effect shifts of emphasis in the study of disease, and in the pro- vision society must make for those who are ill, or for those who, having escaped fatal illness through the advances of modern medicine, become charges upon the community in other ways." Comparable events in other countries have been included for "the light that is shed on the state of the various medical cultures." 4866. Hiscock, Ira V. Community health organi- zation. 4th ed. New York, Commonwealth Fund, 1950. 278 p. 50-6043 RA425.H5 1950 This fourth edition of a manual designed for the use of health officers, public health nurses, and teach- ers, brings up to date the developments in com- munity health affairs which have affected their organization and administration during the past ten years. The author, who is chairman of the Department of Public Health, Yale University, de- fines the functions of the National Government, the State and the municipality in the public health pro- gram of the Nation, and details a plan for com- munity health organization that "contains the ele- ments of the best current practice in the country, considered in relation to a theoretical community of 100,000 population." 4867. Howard, William Travis. Public health ad- ministration and the natural history of dis- ease in Baltimore, Maryland, 1797-1920. Washing- ton, Carnegie Institution of Washington, 1924. 565 p. (Carnegie Institution of Washington. Publication no. 351) 24-24629 RA448.B3H6 Bibliography: p. 563-565. Two health ordinances, enacted soon after the organization of the new city government of Balti- more in 1797, and revised many times in the next 123 years, formed the basis of practically all subse- quent local public health legislation. The Baltimore Department of Health, in continuous operation since the Committee of Health was set up in 1793, is the oldest permanent municipal body devoted primarily 431240—60 44 to the public health. The evolution of the Health Department and the administration of the public health laws of Baltimore are traced by Dr. Howard, who laid the foundation for this study during four years of service as assistant commissioner of health in 1915-1919. The author presents such physical data as local topography, population, com- mercial expansion, and wealth, and such sociological factors as the prominence of medicine, medical men, and education in the development of the city, to illustrate their influence on the etiology and the con- trol of disease. Chapters are devoted to diseases common to the area, mortality statistics, and the part which various diseases have played in determining policies of public health administration in Baltimore. 4868. Jacobs, Philip P. The control of tuber- culosis in the United States. Rev. ed. New York, National Tuberculosis Association, 1940. 387 p. 4°-34 6l 5 RA644.T7J25 1940 "Selected references" at end of most of the chapters. Published posthumously, this revised edition is dedicated by the National Tuberculosis Association as a memorial to the author (1 879-1 940), who was director of personnel and publications of the Asso- ciation. Some historical aspects of the anti-tuber- culosis movement beginning with Drs. Hermann M. Biggs, Livingston Trudeau, and others who applied the scientific principles of Robert Koch, discoverer of the tubercle bacillus in 1881, are discussed in Part I. In Part II the methods that have contributed to the success of the movement are discussed, as well as the relationships between physicians and laymen, public and private officials, tuberculosis and other health agencies, and local, state, and national or- ganizations. Programs for the control of tuber- culosis, led by that of the National Tuberculosis Association, have been grouped together in Part III. The decline in the death rate from tuberculosis in the United States during the years 1900-1955 from 194.4 to 9-4 P er 100,000 population is the best evi- dence of the progress which has been made through the cooperation of individuals, private organizations, and public agencies. 4869. Mott, Frederick D., and Milton I. Roemer. Rural health and medical care. New York, McGraw-Hill, 1948. xvii, 608 p. (McGraw-Hill ser. in health science) 48-3784 RA427.M73 The authors, who are officials in state health organizations, have prepared a study of the health conditions and medical facilities available to one segment of the population which is increasingly a concern of the Nation. Former Surgeon General Thomas Parran in a foreword describes the book as "the essence of current knowledge on virtually 666 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES every aspect of rural health status and medical care . . . With broad social perspective it describes the economic and historical developments out of which arise present difficulties in rural medical services. It presents an integrated story of health conditions, medical resources and services, and organized ef- forts for health improvement in rural areas. In conclusion, it offers recommendations for future action which merit careful study." 4870. National Health Assembly, Washington, D. C, 1948. America's health; a report to the Nation. Official report. New York, Harper, x 949- 395 P- 49-4679 RA445.N28 1948 Organized by the Federal Security Administrator, the National Health Assembly met in Washington, D. C, in May 1948, to discuss all factors involved in preparing a 10-year plan for "expanding the health resources of this nation and raising the health standards of the entire population." The Assembly was divided into fourteen sections which conducted panel discussions, exploring and making recom- mendations concerning such problems as the Na- tion's need for more doctors and other medical personnel, more hospitals, and more health depart- ment units; the problems of chronic disease, ma- ternal and child health, and rural health; and medi- cal research and the cost of medical care. The suc- cess of a nation-wide health program depends not only on the determination of the citizens who spon- sor community and state participation, but also on the health of other nations. Encountering prob- lems of international character, the Assembly de- voted one evening to them. It was pointed out that the United States has accepted its responsibilities to other nations by joining the World Health Organi- zation. 4871. Pelton, Walter J., and Jacob M. Wisan, eds. Dentistry in public health. 2d ed., com- pletely rev. and rewritten. Philadelphia, Saunders, 1955. 282 p. 55"5 20 7 RK52.P4 1955 Includes bibliographies at end of chapters. Dental public health is service provided for com- munities and administered by departments of health at all levels — Federal, State, and local. The authors point out that surveys of health conditions in given areas are prerequisite to dental health programs and discuss the methodology of collecting and classifying data according to the dental needs of the American people, and the resources available for their treat- ment. Chapters describe the control of dental caries by fluoridation of water, the need of educating the public and plans available for payment of dental services. The second edition has been completely reorganized to include advances that have been made in dentistry since the first appeared in 1949. 4872. Powell, John H. Bring out your dead; the great plague of yellow fever in Philadelphia in 1793. Philadelphia, University of Pennsylvania Press, 1949. 304 p. 49-50068 RC211.P5P6 1949 Bibliographical references included in "Notes": p. 287-294. Recurring epidemics of smallpox and yellow fever were the worst health crises faced by the small but growing towns of the Colonial and Federal Periods. The most disastrous decade opened with the Philadelphia epidemic of 1793, which the author calls "one of the great tragic episodes in the human history of this land." It was the problem of the whole people, and the banding together of a group of citizens to function as an emergency committee, the setting up of an isolation hospital on Bush Hill, and the issuing of certain sanitary rules, temporary expedients though they were, bore the seeds of a community public health program. Much of the story centers around Dr. Benjamin Rush, "Phila- delphia's amazing citizen," who, like other phy- sicians of the day, described the disease accurately, and noted the presence of mosquitoes, but left it to Walter Reed and his associates to establish the causal relationship between the two in the early 1900's. Howard A. Kelly tells the story of the disease, and the investigations which led to its con- trol, in his Walter Reed and Yellow Fever, 3d ed. rev. (Baltimore, Norman, Remington, 1923. 355 p.). 4873. Sappington, Clarence O. Essentials of in- dustrial health. Philadelphia, Lippincott, 1943. 626 p. illus. 43-8345 RC963.S3 References: p. 604-610. Following the outbreak of war in 1941, the mobilization of all manpower, the expansion of in- dustries, the shifting of population with its related problems of transportation and nutrition, housing and sanitation, and the diminishing number of phy- sicians, focused attention on the increasing impor- tance of the health of industrial workers to the national economy. Medical schools quickly re- sponded to the need by emphasizing in their courses the fundamentals of industrial health. According to the author, a consulting industrial hygienist and editor of Industrial Medicine until his death in 1949, this book outlines a recently instituted course for undergraduates and represents the application of preventive medicine and public health to industry. It oudines the administration of a health program in industrial plants, the protection of workers from environmental hazards, the coordination of indus- trial and community health services, and the con- tribution of industrial medicine and traumatic surgery to the maintenance of the health of workers. More recently, twenty Authors have contributed to a book on Modern Occupational Medicine, edited by MEDICINE AND PUBLIC HEALTH / 66 7 Allan J. Fleming and Constance A. D'Alonzo (Phila- delphia, Lea & Febiger, 1954. 414 p.), which "rep- resents the combined experience of a group that has spent many years specializing in industrial medical practice." 4874. Smillie, Wilson G. Public health admin- istration in the United States. 3d ed. New York, Macmillan, 1947. 637 p. Med 48-888 RA445.S55 1947 Increased knowledge concerning epidemiology and environmental sanitation, the discovery of new antibiotics and techniques for the detection of car- riers of infection, interest in the economics of nutri- tion, and the health programs of communities, have contributed to the "idea that provision of compre- hensive medical care for all the people was a com- munity function, and that a communitywide plan . . . must encompass preventive service as well as curative and rehabilitation facilities." Against this background the author, who is professor of public health and preventive medicine, Cornell Uni- versity Medical College, describes the methods of controlling communicable diseases, the basic activi- ties of health agencies, and the organization of municipal, rural, and state public health programs. The evolution of a national health program is traced in the last chapter, and the Appendix contains the minimum qualifications that have been set up by the Committee on Professional Education of the Ameri- can Public Health Association for health officers, public health nurses and engineers, health educators, and school physicians. This third edition has been rewritten to reflect developments in the field, and changes in social attitudes brought about by eco- nomic depression and war, since the first appeared in 1935. 4875. Smillie, Wilson G. Public health: its prom- ise for the future; a chronicle of the develop- ment of public health in the United States, 1607- 1914. New York, Macmillan, 1955. 501 p. 55-4356 RA424.S58 The author's interest in the historical development of public health grew out of a request to select the outstanding men in the field, and the names selected appear in the Appendix. He divides his narrative into "The Colonial Period — 1600-1790"; "The Pioneer Period — 1790-1861"; and "The Period of Development — The Civil War to World War I." The terminus 19 14 has been selected as the end of a period in American life, as well as the beginning of Dr. Smillie's association with the public health field. From his study he concludes "that the advances in public health in America have been an accurate index of our advancing civilization in all its aspects and connotations. Thus, it becomes an axiom that the degree of the development of public health service, as a well-established and effective com- munity function, is a true measure of the stage of civilization of a nation." 4876. Tobey, James A. Public health law. 3d ed. New York, Commonwealth Fund, 1947. xxi, 419 p. Med 47-2428 RA445.T63 1947 Selected bibliography: p. [381J-383. New court decisions on various aspects of public health law, changes in governmental organization and administration, and important legislative trends have been added to this edition. Part I deals with "Public Health Law and Administration"; Part II with "Powers and Duties of Health Departments"; Part III with "Liability"; and Part IV with "Legis- lation and Law Enforcement." The book will be useful in interpreting for the layman, the social worker, the health officer, and the lawyer, the health functions of the Federal Government, the State, and the community, as they have developed within the framework of the Federal Constitution and acts of Congress, state constitutions and legislation, and municipal charters and regulations. 4877. Top, Franklin H., ed. The history of Amer- ican epidemiology, by C. E. A. Winslow [and others] St. Louis, Mosby, 1952. 190 p. 52-10820 RA650.5.T6 Includes bibliographies. Contents. — The colonial era and the first years of the Republic (1607-1799) the pestilence that walketh in darkness, by C. E. A. Winslow. — The period of great epidemics in the United States (1800-1875), by Wilson G. Smillie. — The bacterio- logical era (1876-1920), by James A. Doull. — The twentieth century — yesterday, today, and tomorrow (1920 ), by John E. Gordon. This symposium was originally presented at the 20th anniversary session of the Epidemiology Section of the American Public Health Association in 1949. Since public health services, both municipal and national, had their origin in measures to protect the people from contagious diseases, this study of Amer- ica's contribution to the control of epidemics, and of the shift in emphasis during the last fifty years to the mass problems provided by other diseases, is also the story of the primary function of the public health movement. The impact of contagious dis- eases on colonial society has been described at greater length by John Duffy, in his Epidemics in Colonial America (Baton Rouge, Louisiana State University Press, 1953. 275 p.). 4878. U. S. Public Health Service. Environment and health; problems of environmental health in the United States and the Public Health 668 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Service programs which aid States and communities in their efforts to solve such problems. [Washing- ton] 195 1. 152 p. (Its Publication no. 84) 51-61655 RA11.B18 1951a The Public Health Service "has the responsibility of carrying on, stimulating, and fostering research; of supporting the work of the State and local health agencies, which bear most of the burden of admin- istration." The share of the Service in the field of environmental sanitation, including radiological health, is described in this book. "The contribu- tion to date is a matter of public pride: its measure is the margin between prosperity and destitution, between civilization and barbarism." 4879. Whipple, George Chandler. State sanita- tion; a review of the work of the Massa- chusetts State Board of Health. Cambridge, Har- vard University Press, 1917. 2 v. 17-13246 RA84.D1W5 Said Lemuel Shattuck, who conducted a sanitary survey of Massachusetts as early as 1849: "It is the duty of the State to extend its guardian care, that those who cannot or will not protect themselves, may nevertheless be protected; and that those who can and desire to do it, may have the means of doing it more easily." In this spirit Massachusetts organized the first state health department in the United States in 1869, and thereby set up the pattern for similar departments throughout the Union. "The primary object of this book," according to the author, "is to set forth the past work of the Massachusetts State Board of Health so that it may be known by people of the present generation." The abstracts from the reports and scientific articles published by the State Board between 1870 and 1914 show "the evolution of thought in the realm of sanitation during nearly fifty years." A third volume of this work was planned, to include a guide to the annual reports and a series of biographical sketches, but it was evi- dently never published. 4880. Williams, Ralph C. The United States Public Health Service, 1798-1950. Wash- ington, Commissioned Officers Association of the United States Public Health Service, 1951. 890 p. 52-82 RA11.B19W5 Bibliography: p. 841-847. The origin of the U. S. Public Health Service is to be found in the Marine Hospital Service which came into being with the Act for the Relief of Sick and Disabled Seamen in 1798. The former Assistant Surgeon General of the Service tells the story of the various functions of the agency through 152 years of growth and concludes with a summary of its ex- tensive programs in 1950. They include grants to states for general public health and for hospital construction, operation of certain types of hospitals and outpatient clinics, and extensive research through the National Institute of Health, as well as staffing and directing teams of experts to carry out health projects under the Point Four Program and the Economic Cooperation Administration. In 1950 the United States continued to play an active part in the World Health Organization, which "is working all over the world toward its goal of win- ning for all people the highest possible level of health." 4881. Winslow, Charles E. A. The life of Her- mann M. Biggs, physician and statesman of the public health. Philadelphia, Lea & Febiger, 1929. 432 p. 29-11697 RA424.5.B5W5 Bibliography: p. [4132-420. "Broadly speaking, the fundamental significance of Biggs' work lay in the modernization of public health administration in conformity with the new knowledge concerning the origin, nature and spread of infectious diseases." At Bellevue Hospital Medi- cal College, Hermann Biggs progressed from lec- turer on pathology in 1886 to professor of the practice of medicine in 1912. He organized the department of pathology and bacteriology of the New York City Health Department in 1892 and became director of the first municipal bacteriological laboratory in the world. Outstanding among his contributions were the introduciton of diphtheria antitoxin into this country in 1894, and his life-long and vigorous fight against tuberculosis. His achieve- ments are of enduring value in the world of medi- cine, and to the general public, "which has begun to realize, however inadequately, the relation of per- sonal and public health to the other interests and the welfare of modern society and civilization." H. Medical Economics 4882. Bauer, Louis Hopewell. Private enter- prise or government in medicine. Spring- field, 111., C. C. Thomas, 1948. 201 p. Med 48-1133 RA411.B3 1948 Bibliography: p. 199-201. Dr. Bauer's experience as a member of national and state medical associations, an officer in the Medical Corps, U. S. Army, specializing in aviation MEDICINE AND PUBLIC HEALTH / 669 medicine, and a member of the New York State Public Health Council, has brought him in contact with many divergent views concerning health care and its insurance. In this book he describes the deficiencies in the medical system of the United States, pointing out, however, that health conditions in the United States are superior or equal to those in foreign countries in which health insurance is compulsory. He traces the growth of government in medicine by analyzing Federal legislation enacted especially since the recommendations of the Com- mittee on the Costs of Medical Care were published in 1932. He outlines the history of the voluntary insurance system in the United States, and the pro- grams of the American Medical Association which, he says, "has done more to improve the standards of medical care . . . than all other organizations put together." In his summary of ideals, Dr. Bauer suggests solutions to existing problems, emphasizing the need for voluntary health insurance, subsidized when necessary by funds provided by a government agency. "Finally," he says, "with a system of medi- cal care which is the best in the world, let us keep it in principle, revising it and improving it where necessary, but not discarding it for a system . . . which has never given as satisfactory results as our own." 4883. Committee on the Costs of Medical Care. The costs of medical care; a summary of investigations on the economic aspects of the pre- vention and care of illness, by Isidore S. Falk, C. Rufus Rorem [and] Martha D. Ring. Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1933. xviii, 623 p. (Its Publications, no. 27) 33-27129 R152.C65, no. 27 RA413.F3 In 1927, during a conference in Washington of representative physicians, health officers, social scientists, and others interested in the costs and dis- tribution of medical services, the nucleus of the Committee on the Costs of Medical Care was created. Composed of fifty members and financed through the generosity of eight private research foundations, the Committee published 28 books and pamphlets covering every aspect of medical care. This publi- cation is a summary of its five years of investigation. 4884. Committee on the Costs of Medical Care. Medical care for the American people; the final report. Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1932. 213 p. (Its Publications, no. 28) 32-28169 R152.C65, no. 28 RA413.C6 This publication summarizes the Committee's conclusions and recommendations, and in the words of the chairman, Ray Lyman Wilbur, "affords for the first time a scientific basis on which the people of every locality can attack the perplexing problem of providing adequate medical care for all persons at costs within their means. It is hoped that the report may thus aid materially in bringing greater health, efficiency, and happiness to all the people." 4885. Davis, Michael M. Medical care for tomor- row. New York, Harper, 1955. 497 p. 54-6444 RA410.D3 References: p. 447-487. Writing from the viewpoint of persons who re- ceive medical care, the author analyzes the economic, social, and intraprofessional forces which have changed medical practice and will change it further in the future. Of the four parts, Part I deals with "Basic Elements in Medical Services": need and demand for care, cost, organization, and personnel; Part II, "Evolution in Organizations," traces the development of the A. M. A., hospitals, clinics and group practice, and describes the distribution of pub- lic health services and Federal, State, and local funds for medical care; Part III, "Evolution in Economics," reviews the growth of health insurance from the con- sumer's point of view, and the increasing interest of government in medical care between 191 1 and 1952; and Part IV, "Programs and Outlook," dis- cusses the costs of medical care in relation to the national economy and personal finances, the choice of doctors and the various methods of paying them, and the controversy over proposals for national health insurance. The author says: "According to the scale of values developed in this book, we would do well to depend primarily on insurance in order to achieve organized and comprehensive medical services, unified professionally around the patient as a person, administered democratically, and available financially to all." 4886. Goldmann, Franz. Voluntary medical care insurance in the United States. New York, Columbia University Press, 1948. 228 p. 48-7044 RA413.G62 Dr. Goldmann, a professor in the Harvard Uni- versity School of Public Health and author of several books on financing medical care, describes the prin- ciples underlying medical care insurance, trends in development in the United States, and the attitudes of such voluntary organizations as the American Medical Association, the American Hospital Asso- ciation, the National Grange, and labor unions, toward voluntary hospitalization plans and group practice. He analyzes cash indemnity plans, non- profit hospital and physician service plans like the Blue Cross and Blue Shield, and individual and group practice plans, pointing out their limitations and potentialities, and raising the question of direct subsidy by taxes. The author says that the "chance 67O / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES for voluntary medical care insurance to make real progress within its natural limitations, to help tens of millions of self-supporting people develop the capacity and opportunity to lead personally satisfying and socially useful lives . . . lies in the combination of group prepayment and group practice . . . and in the inclusion of comprehensive professional serv- ices and hospitalization in one program." Emphasis on voluntary health insurance plans, such as the Blue Cross hospital plans and those sponsored by the medical societies, is the principal theme of Na- than Sinai, Odin W. Anderson, and Melvin L. Dollar in Health Insurance in the United States (New York, Commonwealth Fund, 1946. 115 p.) which appeared as one of the Studies of the New York Academy of Medicine Committee on Medicine and the Changing Order. 4887. Klem, Margaret C, and Margaret F. Mc- Kiever. Management and union health and medical programs. Washington, U. S. Dept. of Health, Education, and Welfare, Public Health Service, Division of Occupational Health, 1953. 276 p. ([U. S.] Public Health Service. Publication no. 329) 54-61546 HD7102.U4K55 Bibliography: p. 263-276. This is the third in a series of studies on health and medical facilities in industry prepared by these authors for the U. S. Public Health Service. It em- phasizes provisions for medical care outside the plant for workers, and sometimes their families, sponsored by employees' organizations, or man- agement, or both. Industrial Health and Medical Programs, in which Walter J. Lear collaborated (Washington, 1950. 397 p. Public Health Service publication no. 15), covers the broad field, and Small Plant Health and Medical Programs (Wash- ington, 1952. 213 p. Public Health Service publi- cation no. 215), deals with problems peculiar to small plants. The present volume traces the de- velopment of management and union programs, and discusses program characteristics, administra- tion, and financing under collective bargaining. Selected programs are classified by services, and the health services and welfare benefits of two industry- wide programs are described. 4888. Means, James H. Doctors, people, and gov- ernment. Boston, Little, Brown, 1953. 206 p. 53-10240 RA395.A3M4 Dr. Means, who has had years of association with the unique plant organizations, clinics, research pro- grams, and teaching staff of the Massachusetts Gen- eral Hospital, says in his Preface: "The American people are entided to the best medical service which science and art permit, and which they can afford to buy. They are entitled to get it at the lowest price consistent with high quality, or have it given them if they cannot pay." He points out that medi- cine will follow the economic, social, and political pattern of the country it serves; that doctors, in order to give adequate medical care, must have education, the benefits of research, medical facilities, and a fair remuneration in their practice; that the people, dissatisfied with the uneven distribution of medical care and its high cost, have aroused the interest of government in providing relief through legislation. He gives both sides of the controversy between con- servative organized medicine and the proponents of government control. Prepayment insurance plans, and certain comprehensive health plans, as well as group practice plans, that are being tested in certain communities and industries today, are out- lined. A plea is made for gradualism and experi- ment; for co-ordination of government, private, and nongovernmental community effort to achieve an integrated national health plan that will be a joint undertaking of public and private medicine. Sug- gestions for achieving that co-ordination in a coun- try of free enterprise are indicated in the last chap- ter and summed up by Dr. Means: "In brief then, if a teaching hospital like the Massachusetts Gen- eral were united with a medical care plan like HIP [Health Insurance Plan] in New York, together with an adequate Blue Cross, and if it found ways and means to pay the premiums of those who could not afford to do so themselves, placed all its doctors on salary and made all its patients available for teaching, it would be reaching the ideal which I have in mind." 4889. Rothenberg, Robert E., and Karl Pickard. Group medicine & health insurance in action. New York, Crown Publishers, 1949. xxviii, 278 p. 49-10662 RA413.R73 References: p. 46. The Health Insurance Plan of Greater New York, the first large-scale, community-wide prepayment plan sponsored and directed by community repre- sentatives, was incorporated in 1944 and began operation in 1947. Its objective was to assemble, through experience, reliable actuarial data on which to base the operation of a prepayment plan which would provide complete medical service for a fixed annual premium, and to collect dependable statistics as to the number of services, the amount of phy- sician's time, and total cost of the medical care required by a family, or a certain quota of popula- tion. The Central Medical Group of Brooklyn is one of the 26 groups organized to serve the persons insured by the Health Insurance Plan. Prepared by the chairman, the secretary, and the administrative counsel of the Group, this volume is the report of its experiences during the first two years. It outlines MEDICINE AND PUBLIC HEALTH / 671 the basic staff organization, space and facilities re- quired, and other information necessary to any medical group that organizes under the prepayment insurance plan. "The physicians of the Health In- surance Plan reaffirm their faith in voluntary, pre- paid, comprehensive health insurance for the low- income group as a means of bringing much needed medical care to a large segment of the population. They wish also to restate their belief that medical group practice offers a mechanism whereby that goal can be reached most advantageously." 4890. Serbein, Oscar N. Paying for medical care in the United States. New York, Columbia University Press, 1953. xxiv, 543 p. 53-12029 RA412.5.U6S4 Bibliography: p. [4973-524. Large-scale development of voluntary medical care insurance in this country started in the 1930's. At the end of 195 1 about 48,000,000 persons were eligible for hospital benefits, about 43,000,000 for surgical benefits, and about 12,000,000 for medical benefits. In February 195 1, Columbia University, under a grant from the Health Information Foun- dation, established the Medical Payments Project to study the methods used by people of the United States in paying for medical care. In Parts I and II the author discusses the sources and research meth- ods used in preparing this book, and the problems which people face in meeting the cost of illness. In other chapters he analyzes and evaluates the various prepayment plans such as commercial medical care insurance, Blue Cross, Blue Shield, and other indus- trial and governmental plans in a manner which should interest anyone who participates in prepaid medical insurance, or contemplates doing so. 4891. Tannenbaum, Samuel A., and Paul Maerker Branden. The patient's dilemma; a public trial of the medical profession. [New York] Coward-McCann, 1935. xiv, 278 p. 35-24870 R707.T3 A physician and a layman advance in this book what they describe as "the hideous truth about the commercial side of the practice of medicine." The findings of the Committee on the Costs of Medical Care are used to illustrate the uneven distribution of medical care, the exorbitant fees paid by certain segments of the population, and the imbalance of the earnings of average doctors. The authors urge physicians to take the methods of competitive busi- ness out of the profession, and advocate the estab- lishment of a tax-supported public health system to provide adequate service for the patient and ade- quate compensation for the physician. XIX Entertainment A. General Worlds B. The American Stage Bi. History Bii. Criticism Biii. Particular Stage Groups, Theaters, Movements, etc. Biv. Biography: Actors and Actresses Bv. Biography: Directors, Producers, etc. C. Motion Pictures Ci. History Cii. Special Aspects and Analyses Ciii. Biography: Actors and Actresses Civ. Biography: Directors, Producers, etc. D. Other Forms of Entertainment Di. Radio and Television Dii. The Dance in America Diii. Vaudeville and Burlesque Div. Showboats, Circuses, etc. 4892-4896 4897-4906 4907-4912 4913-4926 49 2 7-4939 4940-4943 4944-4946 4947-495 1 4952-4956 4957-4963 4964-4966 4967-4972 4973-4976 4977-4982 THE distinction in this bibliography between "Entertainment" and "Sports and Recreation" is explained in the prefatory note to the latter. Within this section, drama (through the media of the stage, motion pictures, radio, and television) bulks as most important. That is so much the case that die section might almost be defined as various means and aspects of presenting drama. The concern here is with its performance and its implications. The more literary aspects are to be found in the Literature section of the bibliography. It is to be regretted that so many of the books in these allied fields have been written in a popular fashion for a mass audience, while relatively few scholarly and reliable studies have appeared. Be- cause the entertainment field has been dominated by individual personalities, there has been a parallel emphasis in the publication of a large number of biographies and autobiographies and relatively few survey or integrating studies. This relationship is also reflected in the selection, which is more bio- graphical than for most other sections of this work. It might be noted that subsections here interlock more extensively than may be immediately apparent. Not only do the people concerned, especially the per- formers, move more readily and frequently from 672 one medium to another, but even much of the sub- ject matter is carried over. In this way books be- come plays, then motion pictures, radioscripts, and finally television plays in a common sequence of evo- lution. However, the process may crisscross in almost any manner. Despite this, each has its own individuality and significance. The books involv- ing overlapping subject matter have been arranged according to their dominant aspect, for most enter- tainers work predominantly (though not exclu- sively) through some one medium. Although it is closely related to this section, musi- cal entertainment has been left to the Music section, ENTERTAINMENT / 673 of which it is a more integral unit. By the same token, most books on radio and television appear under Communications. The few books on these subjects in this section are intended to represent the sizable entertainment, as distinct from the com- munication, aspects of these media. The emphasis throughout is on audience-directed activities, not activities with extensive audience participation. A. General Works 4892. Green, Abel, and Joe Laurie, Jr. Show biz, from vaude to video. New York, Holt, 1951. 613 p. 51-13791 PN1962.G7 This comprises a history of half a century of American entertainment business, although the book was not written for scholarly purposes. The style and language are that of the entertainment world dialect exhibited by trade organs such as Variety. There is also, as part of the style, a heavy cramming of information without much exposition or analysis. The result is more a reference book than a reading text. 4893. Hurlbut, Jesse Lyman. The story of Chau- tauqua. New York, Putnam, 1921. 429 p. illus. 21-14568 LC6301.C5H8 Chatauqua brought culture and education (and, not always incidentally, entertainment) through many media (opera, drama, lectures, etc.) to mil- lions. Hurlbut has here recorded Chatauqua his- tory, from its beginnings to its heights. We Called It Culture; the Story of Chautauqua (Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1948. 272 p.), by Victoria and Robert Ormond Case, tells the story with more per- spective, but also more superficiality. Marian Scott's Chautauqua Caravan (New York, Appleton-Cen- tury, 1939. 310 p.) gives a closeup through the story of one participant's view. 4894. Revett, Marion S. A minstrel town. New York, Pageant Press, 1955. 335 p. illus. 55-12267 ML3556.R4 A history of entertainment in Toledo, Ohio, from the 1840's to the end of the 19th century. The book takes its title from the dominance in entertainment of the traveling minstrels. The sections of the book are "Minstrels," "Theater," "Circus," and "Local Music." Because of the systematic booking of trav- eling entertainers, and because of the small amount of local-origin entertainment, this book is meant to depict the development of entertainment in general throughout the area "west of the Alleghanies and east of the Rockies." 4895. Seldes, Gilbert V. The great audience. New York, Viking Press, 1950. 299 p. 50-10499 PN1991.6.S4 Movies, radio, and television are analyzed with the actual and the potential audience in view, and with the pecuniary, esthetic, and moral implications scanned. 4896. Theatre arts. Theatre arts anthology, a rec- ord and a prophecy; edited by Rosamond Gilder [and others] New York, Theatre Arts Books, 1950. 687 p. 50-11079 PN2020.T55 One hundred and thirty-two carefully selected articles which comprehensively survey theatrical arts from 1916 to 1948. Criticism and commentary at a high level. B. The American Stage Bi. HISTORY 4897. The Best plays. 1894/99+ New York, Dodd, Mead, illus. 20-21432 PN6112.B45 Title has frequently varied through forms such as The Burns Mantle Best Plays and the Year Boo\ of the Drama in America and The Best Plays and the Year Boo\ of the Drama in America. Now edited by Louis Kronenberger (b. 1904). The work has been edited in the past by Garrison P. Sherwood, John A. Chapman (b. 1900), and Robert Burns Mantle (1873-1948). Indexes: 1899/1909-1949/50. 1 v. This work emphasizes the drama in New York giving a detailed record of performances there and regularly choosing the "best" plays from the New York productions of the previous theatrical season. 674 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES The plays are normally presented in an abridged form, so that these volumes may not be relied on for full texts. As drama in other American cities has been becoming increasingly important, the sec- tion on non-New York productions has in recent years been increased in size and scope. 4898. The Best short plays. 1937+ New York, Dodd, Mead. 38-8006 PN6120.A4B44 Title varies: 1937-195 1/52, The Best One-Act Plays. Editor: 1937+ M. Mayorga. An annual. 4899. Coad, Oral Sumner, and Edwin Mims, Jr. The American stage. New Haven, Yale University Press, 1929. 362 p. illus. (The Pageant of America [v. 14]) 29-22306 E178.5.P2, v. 14 An extensive and informative guide to the Ameri- can stage; the text is accompanied by a multitude of well-ordered illustrations. In contrast to this, and produced for the "popular" audience, is Daniel C. Blum's A Pictorial History of the American Theatre, rev. 3d ed. (New York, Greenberg, 1956. 319 p.), which is a book of illustrations with very little text. 4900. Gagey, Edmond M. Revolution in Ameri- can drama. New York, Columbia Univer- sity Press, 1947. 315 p. 47-11297 PS351.G3 A history and assessment of the revolution in manners, morals, and artistry that, beginning in 1917, transformed the professional theater of Broad- way. Joseph Wood Krutch's The American Drama Since 1918, an Informal History (New York, Random House, 1939. 325 p.) presents not so much a history of the period as incisive, evaluative essays on it. Ward Morehouse's Matinee Tomor- row, Fifty Years of Our Theater (New York, Whittlesey House, 1949. 340 p.) also covers the 20th-century drama, but more as a history of chang- ing tastes; it is not intended for the scholar, but it is an interesting account for the layman or the general student of American culture. 4901. Houghton, Norris. Advance from Broad- way, 19,000 miles of American theatre. New York, Harcourt, Brace, e i94i. 416 p. 41-22179 PN2266.H6 Little theaters, summer theaters, academic thea- ters, and almost all other any-distance-off-Broadway American theaters are examined in this concise and clear book, which resulted from a 19,000 mile trip made to examine the situation. Kenneth Mac- gowan's earlier Footlights Across America (New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1929. 398 p.) somewhat similarly traces the nature and implications of the noncommercial theater; Albert McCleery and Carl Glick's Curtains Going Up (New York, Pitman, 1939. 412 p.) surveys the little theater movement across the country with an examination of 184 community theaters. 4902. Hoyt, Harlowe R. Town Hall tonight. Englewood Cliffs, N. J., Prentice-Hall, 1955. 292 p. illus. 55-9886 PN2256.H6 "This is the story of the country theater in the eighties and nineties, and though it treats somewhat specifically with the visitors and people of a little Wisconsin town, it is the story of each of the Town Halls that spotted the nation during those twenty years. And in the main that story is identical . . . Each of them . . . played the same plays, met with the same misadventures, and made their amateur productions from scripts purchased from the same play agencies. Except for the amateurs, this was equally true of the show boats that played the Missis- sippi River towns. . . . The only difference was the producing company and the playing cast. . . . There was a strange uniformity in all of these shows, including make up, costuming and stage business." — Prologue. 4903. Morris, Lloyd R. Curtain time; the story of the American theater. New York, Ran- dom House, 1953. 380 p. illus. 53-6914 PN2221.M68 This warmly nostalgic narrative of the American theater since 1815 aims to revive for the general reader all the splendors of its romantic past. For the early theater the emphasis is on the performers, rather than the plays or theaters, recognizing that the individuals presenting early dramatic entertain- ment in America themselves constituted the out- standing ingredient. 4904. Quinn, Arthur Hobson. A history of the American drama, from the beginning to the Civil War. 2d ed. New York, Crofts, 1943. 530 p. 43-11974 PS332.Q5 1943 "First printing, November, 1923." "A list of American plays": p. [4231-497. Bibliography: p. [393]~42i. 4905. Quinn, Arthur Hobson. A history of the American drama from the Civil War to the present day. New York, Crofts, 1936. 296, 432 p. illus. 36-27316 PS332.Q55 1936 The text of the two volume edition of 1927, with an added chapter (The new decade, 1927-1936). The bibliography and play list have been completely revised and reset. Cf. Foreword to the revised edition. "General bibliography and list of American plays, 1860-1936": p. [303J-402. ENTERTAINMENT / 675 The two volumes together comprise an impressive, scholarly history of American drama; by virtue of style, it is approachable mainly as a reference book. A readable, concise, one-volume history is Glenn Hughes' A History of the American Theatre, iyoo- 1950 (New York, French, 1951. 562 p.). Valuable for its illustrations is the one-volume edition of The American Theatre, by John Ander- son, and The Motion Picture in America, by Rene Fiilop-Miller (New York, Dial Press, 1938. 430 p.) ; Anderson gives a good account of his sub- ject, but Fiilop-Miller's account suffers from age (it had appeared seven years earlier in German) and possibly from translation. The student of Amer- ican drama will also be interested in George O. Seil- hamer's History of the American Theatre (Phila- delphia, Globe Printing House, 1888-91. 3 v.), which meticulously traces American drama from 1749 to 1797. Of antiquarian interest is William Dunlap's A History of the American Theatre (New York, Harper, 1832. 420 p.), by the "father of American drama." 4906. The Theatre book of the year ... a record and an interpretation. 1942/43+ New York, Knopf, annual. 43-51298 PN2266.A2T4 1942/43+ by G. }. Nathan. Mosdy Mr. Nathan's personalized criticism, with small doses of data and no illustration. May with interest be compared to and supplemented by The- atre World, edited by Daniel C. Blum, 1944/45 + (New York, Theatre World), which offers no criti- cisms, a little data, and profuse illustration. George Jean Nathan has written numerous books of criti- cism expressive of his personality. Among these are Passing Judgments (New York, Knopf, 1935. 271 p.); The Morning After the First Night (New York, Knopf, 1938. 281 p.); Encyclopaedia of the Theatre (New York, Knopf, 1940. 449 p.); The Entertainment of a Nation (New York, Knopf, 1942. 290 p.); and The Theatre in the Fifties (New York, Knopf, 1953. 298 p.). Bii. CRITICISM 4907. Atkinson, Justin Brooks. Broadway scrap- book. New York, Theatre Arts, 1947. 312 p. illus. 47-12086 PN2277.N5A8 The influential drama critic of The New Yor\ Times collects 70 of his reviews from its Sunday drama section, beginning with The Petrified Forest (1935) and reaching Born Yesterday (1947). 4908. Bentley, Eric R. The dramatic event, an American chronicle. New York, Horizon Press, 1954. 278 p. 54-12279 PN2266.B45 A collection of dramatic essays from The New Republic, largely critical of plays produced in New York in the period 1952-54. There are included a chapter on "The American Drama (1944-1954)" and a section of the critic's "Afterthoughts." 4909. Brown, John Mason. Seeing things. New York, McGraw-Hill 1946. 341 p. 46-6335 PS3503.R81945S4 The critic presents selections from his wide-rang- ing "Seeing Things," a column which appears each week in the Saturday Review. Subsequent install- ments have been Seeing More Things (New York, Whittlesey House, 1948. 347 p.); Still Seeing Things (New York, McGraw-Hill, 1950. 335 p.); and As They Appear (New York, McGraw-Hill, 1952. 258 p.). Other critical works by him in- clude: Upstage, The American Theatre in Perform- ance (New York, Norton, 1930. 275 p.); Two on the Aisle; Ten Years of the American Theatre in Performance (New York, Norton, 1938. 321 p.); and Broadway in Review (New York, Norton, 1940. 295 p.). 4910. Isaacs, Edith (Rich) ed. Theatre, essays on the arts of the theatre. Edited by Edith J. R. Isaacs. Boston, Litde, Brown, 1927. 341 p. illus. 27-23981 PN2020.I8 The editor of Theatre Arts Monthly presents here a collection of 30 essays by various hands, on theater as art rather than as commercial venture. The editor contributes a general introduction and briefer ones to each of the eight sections. 491 1. Woollcott, Alexander. The portable Wooll- cott, selected by Joseph Hennessey. New York, Viking Press, 1946. 735 p. (The Viking portable library) 46-25135 PS3545.O77 1946 Woollcott ( 1 887-1 943) was a full-time drama critic only for the six years beginning in 1922, and this convenient anthology contains much of his ornate and highly mannered writing in other spheres; but it gives a good idea of his personality, which many found fascinating and others in- furiating. His critical writings include Shouts and Murmurs (New York, Century, 1922. 264 p.); Enchanted Aisles (New York, Putnam, 1924. 260 p.); and Going to Pieces (New York, Putnam, 1928. 256 p.). 4912. Young, Stark. Immortal shadows, a book of dramatic criticism. New York, Scribner, 1948. 290 p. 48-11512 PN2277.N5Y6 After about two decades as a theatrical critic, the author, upon retirement from the field, selected these critical articles from those published in various periodicals. The Pavilion: Of People and Times 676 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Remembered, of Stories and Places (New York, Scribner, 1951. 194 p.) is an autobiographical work which in part reflects Young's connection with the theater. The author also gained attention with novels, his most prominent one being the Civil War novel, So Red the Rose (New York, Scribner, 1934- 43 1 P-)- Biii. PARTICULAR STAGE GROUPS, THEATERS, MOVEMENTS, ETC. 4913. Carson, William G. The theatre on the frontier; the early years of the St. Louis stage. Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1932. 361 p. illus. 32-11827 PN2277.S2C3 Bibliography: p. 331-335. A scholarly, detailed history of the first quarter century (1815-1840) of the St. Louis stage. There is much social and literary interest, as well as dramatic. 4914. Clurman, Harold. The fervent years; the story of the Group Theatre and the thirties. New York, Knopf, 1945. 298 p. illus. 45-5287 PN2297.G7C5 The Group Theatre (1931-41), which attempted to bring art to the commercial stage, here has its story told from the personal point of view of one who attended at its birth and now delivers the funeral oration. 4915. Davis, Hallie (Ferguson) F. Arena, by Hallie Flanagan. New York, Duell, Sloan & Pearce [1940] 475 p. illus. 41-231 PN2266.D37 Bibliography: p. 439-447- In 1935, when there were some 25,000 unem- ployed theater people, Harry Hopkins put Mrs. Flanagan in charge of Federal Theater, a project of the Works Progress Administration. She gives an impressionistic view of its four years' work (a detailed production record and financial statement are appended) and discusses the Congressional dis- satisfaction which brought it to a sudden end on June 30, 1939. 4916. Deutsch, Helen, and Stella Hanau. The Provincetown; a story of the theatre. New York, Farrar & Rinehart, 1931. 313 p. illus. 31-30075 PN2297.P7D4 A somewhat naive narrative of the Provincetown Theater, which originated on Cape Cod but de- veloped an extension in Greenwich Village, New York City, from 1916 to 1929, with an analysis of its productions play by play. The Provincetown enjoyed the greatest prestige of any theater in America in its day, and introduced the early plays of Eugene O'Neill (q. v.). 4917. Dunn, Esther C. Shakespeare in America. New York, Macmillan, 1939. 210 p. 39-30566 PR3105.D8 Shakespeare in American culture from the Col- onial era through the 19th century: productions, in- cluding those on the Ohio and Mississippi frontier and in Gold-Rush California; Shakespeare in the schools and colleges and in the thought of some eminent 19th-century figures; and American Shake- speare scholarship — including the Baconian theory, which had its inception here. 4918. Gagey, Edmond McAdoo. The San Fran- cisco stage, a history. Based on annals com- piled by the Research Dept. of the San Francisco Federal Theatre. New York, Columbia University Press, 1950. 264 p. illus. 50-8015 PN2277.S4G3 1950 Bibliography: p. [2295-233. A detailed history, emphasizing the 19th century. The annals on which it was based were made available in mimeographed form as San Francisco T heatre Research (San Francisco, i938-42[?j) under the editorship of Lawrence Estavan. 4919. Gillmore, Margalo, and Patricia Collinge. The B. O. W. S. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1945. 173 p. illus. 45-35 2 39 PN2297.U5G5 An account of the American Theatre Wing's over- seas production for servicemen of The Barretts of Wimpole Street. Reflects an aspect of U. S. O. war- time activities. 4920. Houghton, Norris. But not forgotten; the adventure of the University Players. New York, Sloane, 1952, c i95i. 346 p. illus. 52-258 PN2297.U55H6 An informal history of the 1928-32 career of the University Players at Cape Cod and Baltimore. The story of an experimental, "progressive," theatrical group. 4921. Isaacs, Edith (Rich) The Negro in the American theatre. New York, Theatre Arts, 1947. 143 p. illus. 47-11394 PN2286.I8 While her subject goes back to 1821, when James Hewlett was playing Shakespeare with the African Company in New York City, Mrs. Isaacs dates her "foreground" from 1917 and Ridgeley Torrence's Three Plays for a Negro Theatre, and describes the individual stars and noteworthy all- or part-Negro productions of the following three decades. ENTERTAINMENT / 677 4922. Kendall, John S. The golden age of the New Orleans theater. Baton Rouge, Louisi- ana State University Press, 1952. 624 p. illus. 51-14615 PN2277.N4K4 Bibliography: p. [6o6]-6o8. The history of English-language drama in New Orleans during the first three-quarters of the 19th century. 4923. MacMinn, George R. The theater of the golden era in California. Caldwell, Idaho, Caxton Printers, 194 1. 529 p. plates, ports., facsims. 41-10018 PN2275.C3M3 Bibliography: p. [509]~5i5. A social history of the California theater dur- ing the gold rush decade. Many of the most popu- lar entertainers of the day came West to take their share of the new wealth; among them, the author singles out Lola Montez for special attention. 4924. Odell, George C. D. Annals of the New York stage. New York, Columbia Univer- sity Press, 1927-49. 15 v. 27-5965 PN2277.N5O4 By the time of his death in 1949 Odell had brought this highly detailed history of the New York stage to 1894. He noted each season's productions at all of the principal Manhattan theaters, from time to time giving complete casts, and devoted briefer chapters to dramatic events in Brooklyn, Williams- burgh, Greenpoint, Queens, Staten Island, etc. Each volume is lavishly illustrated. New York's centrality for the American stage lends this work an importance for drama throughout the Nation. The work is supplemented by The Best Plays of 1894-1899 (1955) and other volumes in The Best Plays series (q.v.). 4925. Schoberlin, Melvin, From candles to foot- lights; a biography of the Pike's Peak theatre, 1 859-1 876. Denver, F. A. Rosenstock, The Old West Pub. Co., 194 1. 322 p. illus. 41-12800 PN2275.C6S35 "List of Colorado theatres, 1859-1876": p. 265- 271. Bibliography: p. 293-300. A history of the theater in Colorado during its territorial period. The Pike's Peak gold rush began in May 1859 and the theater followed in September, when Apollo Hall was opened in Denver City. 4926. Sper, Felix. From native roots; a panorama of our regional drama. Caldwell, Idaho, Caxton Printers, 1948 341 p. illus. 49-1009 PS338.N3S6 Bibliography: p. [2791-334. Since he rejects "the sentimentality of the local- color school," Mr. Sper emphasizes the late emer- gence of genuine regional drama in the United States, but notes some early treatments of the Indian, the Negro, and the Yankee. He then surveys the existing drama area by area, from "Yankee Lust"(!) to "Pacific Panorama," noting Broadway plays con- cerned with regional themes as well as local productions of all type. Robert E. Gard's Grass- roots Theater; a Search for Regional Arts in Amer- ica (Madison, University of Wisconsin Press, 1955. 263 p.) is largely an autobiographical account of the author's searching out of regional material for pur- poses of turning it into regional, rural drama. Biv. BIOGRAPHY: ACTORS AND ACTRESSES 4927. Barnes, Eric W. The lady of fashion; the life and the theatre of Anna Cora Mowatt. New York, Scribner, 1954. 402 p. illus. 54-10366 PN2287.R54B3 1954 London edition (Seeker & Warburg) has tide: Anna Cora. Includes bibliography. Anna Cora (Ogden) Mowatt Ritchie (1819-1870) was a distinguished actress of the 1840's and 50's. Having come from the respectable element of New York society, she aided in raising the prestige of the then non-respectable profession of acting. The book is of value not merely as a record of theatrical operations in this period, but also for its depiction of the social scene. The work is in large part based on Mowatt 's Autobiography of an Actress (1854). 4928. Bankhead, Tallulah. Tallulah: my auto- biography. New York, Harper, 1952. 335 p. illus. 52-7278 PN2287.B17A3 This daughter of a famous Alabama family, a first-magnitude star since she took London by storm in 1923, gets into her story much of her famed flam- boyance and caustic wit. 4929. Barrymore, Ethel. Memories, an autobiog- raphy. New York, Harper, 1955. 310 p. illus. 55-6565 PN2287.B3A3 The Barrymore-Drew family has long held a dom- inant position in American acting. In this volume Ethel Barrymore (b. 1879), the "first lady of the American theater," presents the story of her life; because of her long and distinguished career and her family associations, it also has some general stage history. 678 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 4930. Binns, Archie. Mrs. Fiske and the Ameri- can theatre, by Archie Binns, in collabora- tion with Olive Kooken. New York, Crown Pub- lishers, 1955. 436 p. illus. 55-10173 PN2287.F5B5 "It is rudimentary to say that Mrs. Fiske [ 1865— 1932] was an American actress. She was the most purposefully American of them all; she discovered her own native playwrights; she took her produc- tions, the best of their time, to the farthest reaches of the continent and to Americans who never saw Broadway; and she battled for ideals far beyond the confines of the theatre. . . . [She was] one of the best minds of her time: the acknowledged leader of the American stage for a generation, a skilled and successful playwright, an actress who was rated with Duse and Bernhardt, a producer who was prob- ably the best outside Europe, the triumphal cham- pion of Ibsen in America, the discoverer of some of the best American playwrights of the early twen- tieth century." — Preface. 4931. Blum, Daniel C. Great stars of the Ameri- can stage, a pictorial record. New York, Greenberg, 1952. 1 v. 52-10871 PN2285.B6 Many portrait and on-stage photographs of limited quality in the reproductions; enthusiastic biograph- ical sketches accompany the pictures. Older stage stars are presented in somewhat dated, but more thorough treatment in William Winter's The Wallet of Time (New York, Moffat, Yard, 1913. 2 v.). Biographical profiles of more recent theatrical per- sonalities are presented in Margaret Case Harri- man's Ta\e Them Up Tenderly (New York, Knopf, 1944. 266 p.). A series of somewhat longer sketches on some prominent figures may be found in Maurice Zolotow's No People Li\e Show People (New York, Random House, 1951. 305 p.). 4932. Courtney, Marguerite (Taylor) Laurette. New York, Rinehart, 1955. 433 p. illus. 54-10448 PN2287.T25C6 A biography, by her daughter, of Laurette Taylor, who contributed 50 years of her life to the theater. This book is not merely a record of her stage tri- umphs, but also an analysis of her complex per- sonality. Since her whole life was given to the theater, while life "bored" her, this presents not only the "makings" of an actress, but also a con- siderable segment of stage history. 4933. Fowler, Gene. Good night, sweet prince. New York, Viking Press, 1944. 477 p. illus. 43-18571 PN2287.B35F6 The life of John Barrymore (1882-1942). John Barrymore himself wrote a much earlier autobio- graphical book, Confessions of an Actor (Indianapo- lis, Bobbs-Merrill, 1926. 138 p.). His brother, Lionel Barrymore, discusses the family, with em- phasis on Lionel, in his We Barrymores (New York, Appleton-Century-Crofts, 1951. 311 p.). See also (supra) Ethel Barrymore's autobiography. 4934. Jefferson, Joseph. "Rip Van Winkle": The autobiography of Joseph Jefferson. New York, Appleton-Century-Crofts, 1950. 375 p. illus. 50-7350 PN2287.J4A3 1950 Originally published in 1890. Joseph Jefferson (1 829-1905) was the son of an actor and began his stage career at the age of four; it continued for 71 years! He was a flexible actor, but it was his fortune to become identified with his most popular role, as this retided reprint attests. With wider scope, but somewhat dated and usually considered "less appealing," is William Winter's Life and Art of Joseph Jefferson, Together with Some Account of His Ancestry and of the Jef- ferson Family of Actors (New York, Macmillan, 1894. 319 p.), a revision of The Jeffersons, first pub- lished in 1 88 1. 4935. Kahn, Ely J. The merry partners; the age and stage of Harrigan and Hart. New York, Random House, 1955. 302 p. illus. 55-8149 ML429.H3K3 PN2287.H247K3 Edward Harrigan and Tony Hart were partners and leading comedian entertainers in musical comedy productions in New York during the 1870's and 1880's. Harrigan wrote the scripts which they performed. This joint biographical study gives an insight into musical comedy as an aspect of the stage- craft of the period and also the popular music of the time. 4936. Le Gallienne, Eva. With a quiet heart, an autobiography. New York, Viking Press, 1953. 311 p. illus. 53-5201 PN2287.L3A35 The autobiography of a prominent actress. The book covers the two decades subsequent to the period covered by her earlier autobiography, At jj (New York, Longmans, Green, 1934. 262 p.). 4937. Moses, Montrose J. The fabulous Forrest; the record of an American actor. Boston, Little, Brown, 1929. xxi, 369 p. illus. 29-27822 PN2287.F6M6 Bibliography: p. 345~355- Edwin Forrest (1806-1872) was America's first tragedian, and he has been called the most popular actor America has produced. This book attempts to present not only the actor, but the actor as a ENTERTAINMENT / 679 product of his times. The work is therefore of value as an analysis of the mid-nineteenth-century society. 4938. Ruggles, Eleanor. Prince of players: Edwin Booth. New York, Norton, 1953. 401 p. illus. 53-5986 PN2287.B5R9 "Notes on sources": p. 377-386. This life of the famous 19th-century actor largely supersedes William Winter's Life and Art of Edwin Booth (New York, Macmillan, 1893. 308 p.). Stanley P. Kimmel's The Mad Booths of Maryland (Indianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill, 1940. 400 p.) is more a psychological study of three famous actors than a story of dramatic achievement. 4939- Winter, William. Life and art of Richard Mansfield, with selections from his letters. New York, Moffat, Yard, 1910. 2 v. illus. 10-3307 PN2287.M4W6 Winter (1836-1917) was a leading New York drama critic and a prolific biographer of contem- porary actors. He here presents (in large part through personal letters) the life of Mansfield (1857-1907), a famous actor and close friend of the author. Not just a chronicle, this book seeks to reveal the man's character. Bv. BIOGRAPHY: DIRECTORS, PRODUCERS, ETC. 4940. Kinne, Wisner Payne. George Pierce Baker and the American theatre. Cambridge, Har- vard University Press, 1954. 348 p. illus. 54-8632 PN2287.B15K5 A biography of the first college professor, to teach practical playwriting and playproducing. Because of his work at Harvard from 1905 to 1924, and then at Yale until his retirement in 1933, he has been called "the father of modern American playwrights." 4941. Langner, Lawrence. The magic curtain; the story of a life in two fields, theatre and invention, by the founder of the Theatre Guild. New York, Dutton, 195 1. 498 p. illus. 51-13798 PN2295.T5L3 A leading patent attorney writes of the theatrical world in which he has figured so prominendy. Born in South Wales in 1890, Mr. Langner came to the United States in 1910, and 9 years later organized the Theater Guild, of which he has remained a principal director for 40 years. Its productions through 1950 are listed in Appendix VIII. 4942. Sobel, Bernard. Broadway heartbeat; mem- oirs of a press agent. New York, Hermitage House, 1953. 352 p. 53-12014 PN2287.S62A3 Mr. Sobel, now in charge of public relations for the Celanese Corporation of America, reviews his life between the two World Wars, when he was press agent for Earl Carroll, Florenz Ziegfeld, Jr., Metro-Goldwyn-Mayer, and a diversity of other clients. 4943. Timberlake, Craig. The Bishop of Broad- way: the life & work of David Belasco. New York, Library Publishers, 1954. 491 p. illus. 54-11646 PN2287.B4T5 Belasco (1 853-1 931) was a would-be playwright who attained fame and fortune as a stage manager and play producer. This book presents a picture of the Western frontier theater (Belasco started in San Francisco) and later New York City. Belasco, who made many stars, brought about lavish and popular productions. He was not notably original, but he did have an ability to perfect tendencies and gage the taste of his audience. A two-volume, some- what eulogistic Life of David Belasco (New York, Moffat, Yard, 1918) was undertaken by William Winter (1836-1917), and completed after his death by his son, Jefferson Winter. C. Motion Pictures Ci. HISTORY 4944. Jacobs, Lewis. The rise of the American film; a critical history. New York, Har- court, Brace, 1939. 585 p. illus. 39-32345 PN1993.5.U6J2 Bibliography: p. 541-564. Remains, after 20 years, the most detailed and best-documented history of its subject, with special emphasis upon the evolution of form and content, the work of the leading directors, and the organiza- tion of the industry. A famous early work is Terry Ramsaye's A Million and One Nights (New York, Simon & Schuster, 1926. 2 v.). A French view of the American film may be obtained from Robert Florey's Hollywood d'hier et d'au- jourd'hui (Paris, Editions Prisma, 1948. 381 p.). Another French view of it, as seen in the context of world production, may be found in llistoire du cinema, nouv. ed. definitive ([Givors] Martel, 1953- 680 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 54. 2 v.), by Maurice Bardeche and Robert Brasil- lach. Paul Rotha in The Film Till Now, rev. and enl. ed. (New York, Funk & Wagnalls, 1949. 755 p.) also presents it in world perspective. 4945. Seldes, Gilbert V. The movies come from America. New York, Scribner, 1937. 120 p. illus. 37-28.786 PN1993.5.U6S4 This work was published in London by Batsford under the title Movies for the Millions, and can be regarded as a clear and reasonably brief conspectus of the American cinema for British readers, with some instructive comparisons. The earlier chapters are historical, the later analytical; but all are con- structively critical, for Mr. Seldes believed that the movies were a big and good thing, but could easily be made better than they were. This quality allows a book, written when color film and TV were still looming on the horizon, to retain much of its original interest. 4946. Taylor, Deems, Marcelene Peterson, and Bryant Hale. A pictorial history of the mov- ies. Rev. and enl. New York, Simon & Schuster, 1950. 376 p. illus. 50-8567 PN1993.5.U6T3 1950 A chronologically arranged book consisting largely of pictures of stars and stills from motion pictures. A pictorial selection from the silent film alone is Daniel C. Blum's A Pictorial History of the Silent Screen (New York, Putnam, 1953. 334 p.). Blum also edits an annual, Daniel Blum's Screen World (v. 1+ 1949+ New York, Greenberg), each volume of which handles, through reproduced stills and some screen credits, American films pro- duced in the preceding year and some foreign films released here; there are an obituary section and an index at the end. Cii. SPECIAL ASPECTS AND ANALYSES 4947- Commission on Freedom of the Press. Free- dom of the movies; a report on self-regulation from the Commission . . . Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1947. 240 p. 47-30119 PN1994.A2C6 At head of title: By Ruth A. Inglis. "A note on sources": p. 220-224. The history and state of film censorship are con- sidered and the implications for film quality are discussed. 4948. Powdermaker, Hortense. Hollywood, the dream factory; an anthropologist looks at the movie-makers. Boston, Little, Brown, 1950. 342 p. 50-10280 PN1993.5.U65P6 This book is the result of a one-year sociological study of a famous Pacific coast community. An- other analysis of the community is found in Leo C. Rosten's Hollywood; the Movie Colony, the Movie Maimers (New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1941. 436 p.). 4949. Ross, Lillian. Picture. New York, Rine- hart, 1952. 258 p. 52-9607 PN1997.R38 In an attempt to obtain and present an insight into the American motion picture industry the author has reported on the production of the film The Red Badge of Courage from the stage of initial con- ferences through final release and publicity. The material originally appeared as a series of articles in The New Yorker. A similar work, Case History of a Movie (New York, Random House, 1950. 242 p.), by a person within the industry was done by Dore Schary for the film The Next Voice You Hear, which was produced with the assistance of Charles Palmer. 4950. Thorp, Margaret (Farrand). America at the movies. New Haven, Yale University Press, IQ 39- 3 X 3 P- illus - 39-3 I 3 2 5 PN1993.5.U6T5 Mrs. Thorp analyzes who goes to the movies and why, and discusses the influences of films. Leo A. Handel in Hollywood Loo\s at Its Audience; a Report of Film Audience Research (Urbana, Uni- versity of Illinois Press, 1950. 240 p.) shows how the film industry evaluates audience reaction. 4951. Wolfenstein, Martha, and Nathan Leites. Movies; a psychological study. Glencoe, 111., Free Press, 1950. 316 p. illus. 50-7374 PN1995.W63 A psychological-sociological study of the Ameri- can films (contrasted with those of England and France); the book probes the basic themes and patterns in films, which it regards as ready-made versions of the widespread and (nearly) universal daydreams of our culture. In this way it presents new insights into present-day America and Americans. Ciii. BIOGRAPHY: ACTORS AND ACTRESSES 4952. Bainbridge, John. Garbo. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1955. 256 p. illus. 55-5589 PN2778.G3B3 A biography of Swedish-born Greta Garbo (b. 1905), who has been called the screen's greatest act- ress. She came to America early in her career. Her last film was released in 194 1; since then she has been living in retirement. 4953. Huff, Theodore. Charlie Chaplin. New York, Schuman, 1951. 354 p- 51-10 1 04 PN2287.C5H8 Charlie was born Charles Spencer Chaplin at London in 1889; his parents were both in vaude- ville. Mr. Huff offers a minimal biography, but very full descriptions and appreciations of his films from the Keystone comedies of 1914 to Monsieur Verdoux (1947) and a wealth of illustrations. A complete chronological list of the films and "Biographical Sketches of the People Professionally Associated with Chaplin" are appended. Among other recent biographies of Chaplin are Pierre S. R. Payne's The Great God Pan (New York, Hermitage House, 1952. 301 p.), which is primarily a study of Chaplin's film work, and Peter Cotes and Theima Niklaus' The Little Fellow [rev. ed.] (London, Bodley Head, 1952. 160 p.), which is more recent, but shorter. 4954. Menjou, Adolphe, and Morris M. Mussel- man. It took nine tailors. New York, Whittlesey House, 1948. 238 p. illus. 48-5637 PN2287.M58A3 The life of Adolphe Menjou (b. 1890) is almost a history of the movies as he has lived it. It traces his career of 34 years in pictures, during which he had parts in 146 films. 4955. Pickford, Mary. Sunshine and shadow. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1955. 382 p. illus. 55-558o PN2287.P5A3 Mary Pickford (b. 1893) was one of the most popular film stars. She started as a child actress, and even as an adult she played child roles, and met with little success when portraying mature in- dividuals. Her extreme popularity, which brought her the nickname of "America's Sweetheart," makes this autobiography a useful document for interpret- ing mass culture, especially insofar as the silent films are concerned. The first part of the book has a place in the history of the film; the second part is largely personal. 4956. Taylor, Robert Lewis. W. C. Fields, his follies and fortunes. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1949. 340 p. ports. 49-1 1 132 PN2287.F45T3 A life of the vaudeville star turned film comedian ( 1 879-1946), which reflects much of the entertain- ment world of his period. A succession of very amusing anecdotes develop the view that Fields' whole life was pervaded by his highly original and sardonic comic spirit. ENTERTAINMENT / 68 1 Civ. BIOGRAPHY: DIRECTORS, PRODUCERS, ETC. 4957. Feild, Robert D. The art of Walt Disney. New York, Macmillan, 1942. 290 p. 42-36248 NC1765.F4 Walt Disney's work is presented as a technical and commercial problem; an attempt is made to establish criteria for judging it as art. It serves, to some extent, as a history of Disney's work; Disney was a pioneer in the field of the animated cartoon, in which he rapidly acquired a commanding lead. 4958. Griffith, Richard. The world of Robert Flaherty. New York, Duell, Sloan & Pearce, 1953. 165 p. illus. 51-10886 PN1998.A3F5 Flaherty (1884-1951) is called "the father of the documentary film," but it is less the fact of paternity than the beauty, dignity, and narrative power of his work that gives him enduring significance. Mr. Griffith documents the making of Tabu, Man of Aran, Louisiana Story, and the others with extracts from Flaherty's diaries and letters, and provides over 70 illustrations, mostly from the films. 4959. Mayer, Arthur. Merely colossal, the story of the movies from the long chase to the chaise longue. [New York] Simon & Schuster, 1953. 264 p. 53-573? PN1993.5.U6M3 The humorous as well as informative autobi- ography of a man who has spent much of his life in the business of films: distributing, showing, adver- tising, importing, etc. 4960. Noble, Peter. Hollywood scapegoat; the biography of Erich von Stroheim. London, Fortune Press, 1950. 246 p. illus. 52-21529 PN1998.A3V65 Bibliography: p. 171-184. This English life of von Stroheim (b. 1885), the Vienna-born actor-director, takes the line that "he was the one chosen to be sent out into the wilderness to perish, to atone in some measure for the sins and extravagances of Hollywood during the fantastic 1920's. He had directed at least six masterpieces, yet Hollywood banished him because he was feared by the money-men." He did not perish, but has been successful as a leading character actor. 4961. Smith, Albert E. Two reels and a crank, by Albert E. Smith in collaboration with Phil A. Koury. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1952. 285 p. illus., ports. 52-1 1617 TR849.S5A3 Albert E. Smith, in partnership with Jim Black- ton, conducted the Vitagraph Company from 1896 to 1925, when it was sold to the Warners for "a sizable fortune." Mr. Smith here reminisces of 682 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES the shoestring days of the industry, when a comedy could be produced for $3.50 plus the cost of the film at eight cents a foot. 4962 The cinema learned went to 51 film though as The Vidor, King W. A tree is a tree. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1953. 315 p. illus. 53-9221 PN1998.A3V5 autobiography, judiciously limited to his career, of King Vidor (b. 1895), who to direct movies in Galveston, Texas, and Hollywood in 1915. The Appendix lists the s he directed between 1918 and 1952. Al- they include such classics of the silent films Big Parade, The Crowd, and Hallelujah, Mr. Vidor seems most deeply impressed by his Duel in the Sun (1946), "one of the ten biggest box-office grossers of all time." 4963. Zukor, Adolph. The public is never wrong. New York, Putnam, 1953. 309 p. illus. 53-8164 PN1998.A3Z8 A businessman of the films tells his life story, largely in terms of film history as he has seen it and the people he has known. The book was written with the collaboration of Dale Kramer. An earlier biography of Zukor is William H. Irwin's The House that Shadows Built (Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, Doran, 1928. 293 p.). D. Other Forms of Entertainment Di. RADIO AND TELEVISION 4964. Allen, Fred. Treadmill to oblivion. Bos- ton, Little, Brown, 1954. 240 p. illus. 54-1 1 132 PN1991.4.A6A3 Fred Allen (1 894-1956; real name, John Flor- ence Sullivan) was a humorist of dry wit who for many years expressed in humor many aspects of American life. His career included stage, film, and some television, but the emphasis in this auto- biographical work is on his radio program. The book not only presents the problems of such enter- tainment (sponsors, script-writing, etc.), but it also presents material from the programs. The book closes with his last regular program in 1949. 4965. Gross, Ben. I looked and I listened; in- formal recollections of radio and TV. New York, Random House, 1954. 344 p. 54-7806 PN1991.5.G7 In 1925 Gross became radio editor of a New York daily newspaper. After having spent nearly three decades growing up with the radio, and sub- sequently the television industry, he presents in this autobiographical book its informal history — espe- cially in its entertainment aspects. 4966. Mackey, David R. Drama on the air. New York, Prentice-Hall, 1951. 468 p. illus. 51-6240 PN1991.7.M3 With an emphasis on radio acting and produc- tion, ". . . the purpose of this book is to describe the concepts and activities basic to the presentation of drama on the air, in the areas of script, acting, and production." There is a good bibliography on radio drama in particular and some radio history in general. Dii. THE DANCE IN AMERICA 4967. Amberg, George. Ballet in America, the emergence of an American art. New York, Duell, Sloan & Pearce, 1949. 244 p. illus. 49-1689 GV1787.A43 Also published by the New American Library with title: Ballet. A critical and historical study. The emphasis is heavily modern, in view of the author's statement: "While there has been some form of the ballet in America for more than a century and a half, the native American ballet is barely fifteen years old." — Preface. 4968. Armitage, Merle, ed. Martha Graham. Los Angeles, M. Armitage, 1937. 132 p. illus. 39-2400 GV1785.G7A7 Articles by John Martin, Lincoln Kirstein, Evange- line Stokowski, Stark Young, Wallingford Riegger, Edith J. R. Isaacs, Roy Hargrave, James Johnson Sweeney, George Antheil, Margaret Lloyd, Louis Danz, and Martha Graham. This book is a group of articles discussing or simply lauding Martha Graham, one of the leading exponents of the modern dance. Barbara B. Morgan's Martha Graham, Six- teen Dances in Photographs (New York, Duell, Sloan & Pearce, 1941. 160 p.) presents a photo- graphic study of the dancer. 4969. Chujoy, Anatole. The New York City Ballet. New York, Knopf, 1953. 382 p. illus. 52-6412 GV1786.N4C45 Although the New York City Ballet was not organized until 1948, Mr. Chujoy tells the story of its predecessor enterprises from "October 1933, when Lincoln Kirstein and his friend and Harvard ENTERTAINMENT / 683 classmate Edward M. M. Warburg brought George Balanchine and Vladimir Dimitriew from Europe to establish the School of American Ballet." The book acclaims the work of Messrs. Kirstein and Balanchine in creating, from Russian models, "an American institution to be proud of." 4970. De Mille, Agnes. Dance to the piper. Bos- ton, Litde, Brown, 1952. 342 p. illus. 52-119 GV1785.D36A3 1952 The autobiography of a rich girl who climbed the ladder to success as a dancer and choreographer. She was one of the revolutionaries in the establishing of an "American" dance. 4971. Magriel, Paul D., ed. Chronicles of the American dance. New York, Holt, 1948. 268 p. illus. 48-9068 GV1623.M33 "Notes and bibliographical data": p. 263-268. Written largely as a series of chronologically ar- ranged monographs by various authors on individ- uals and groups of dancers. Because of this manner of treatment, and because of its emphasis on theatri- cal dancing, the work is not a full history of dancing in America, although its range is wide. A work of wider scope, but for a shorter period, edited by Doris Hering for Dance Magazine, is 25 Years of Ameri- can Dance (1951), rev. and enl. ed. (New York, Orthwine, 1954. 236 p.), a heavily illustrated work which covers the entire field of the dance in modern America, from recreational and social dancing through dancing in plays, motion pictures, and on television. Theatrical dancing in America since 1900 is studied in Winthrop B. Palmer's Theatrical Dancing in America (New York, Ackerman, 1945. 159 p.), which has much material on ballet. A dancer's view of the problems and aesthetics of the modern theatrical dance is given in Elizabeth S. Selden's The Dancer's Quest (Berkeley, University of California Press, 1935. 215 p.). 4972. Magriel, Paul D., ed. Isadora Duncan. New York, Holt, 1947. 85 p. illus. 47-3097 GV1785.D8M3 "The material in this book is made up largely from issues of the periodical, Dance Index." Appendices: Chronology. Bibliography of Isa- dora Duncan (p. 73-78). Albums and books of drawings of Isadora Duncan (p. 79). A short book of essays (by John Martin, Carl Van Vechten, A. R. Macdougall, and Gordon Craig) on Isadora Duncan (1 878-1927), a pioneer of the modern dance. An illustrated memorial volume of essays by the dancer, with forewords by various people, is Duncan's The Art of the Dance, edited by Sheldon Cheney (New York, Theatre Arts, 1928. 147 p.). Diii. VAUDEVILLE AND BURLESQUE 4973. Dillon, William A. Life doubles in brass. Ithaca, N. Y., House of Nollid, 1944. 234 p. illus. 44-8823 PN1967.D47 Will Dillon, born in 1877 in upstate New York to an Irish family with theatrical inclinations, prog- ressed though traveling medicine shows, blackface minstrel shows, and repertory stock companies to Broadway vaudeville, as an "eccentric singing comedian." He was also an indefatigable writer of popular songs, and appends some sentimental specimens. 4974. Laurie, Joseph. Vaudeville: from the honky- tonks to the Palace. New York, Holt, 1953. 561 p. _ 53-959° PN1967.L3 The honky-tonks, gambling houses and saloons providing entertainment during the 1870's and 8o's, were the future vaudeville's cradle of talent. Mr. Laurie, however, is mainly concerned with the vaudeville of the 20th century down to the great collapse of 1932, when its disappearance from the Palace Theater on Broadway symbolized its final dispossession by the movies. He gives vivid, slang- filled sketches of the conditions of work, represent- ative acts, and leading managers. An earlier, less memoiristic and less animated history of vaudeville is Douglas Gilbert's American Vaudeville, Its Life and Times (New York, Whittlesey House, 1940. 428 p.). 4975. Marston, William Moulton, and John Henry Feller. F. F. Proctor, vaudeville pioneer. New York, R. R. Smith, 1943. 191 p. illus. 44-155 PN1967.M3 The life of Frederick Freeman Proctor (1851- 1929), a producer of vaudeville shows in New York City. 4976. Sobel, Bernard. Burleycue; an underground history of burlesque days. New York, Far- rar &Rinehart, 1931. 284 p. illus. 31-33512 PN1967.S6 Burlesque began as travesty of classical tragedy, but since about 1869 its essence and its prosperity have resided in its revelation of the female form, by tights or otherwise. Mr. Sobel skims over its prin- cipal aspects and persons from Lydia Thompson and the British Blondes — an obese lot by present- day standards — to Ann Corio, a more streamlined type. 684 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Div. SHOWBOATS, CIRCUSES, ETC. 4977. Barnum, Phineas T. Struggles and tri- umphs: or, The life of P. T. Barnum, writ- ten by himself. Edited, with an introd., by George S. Bryan. New York, Knopf, 1927. 2 v. illus. 27-13922 GV1811.B3A3 1927c "Based upon 'The life of P. T. Barnum written by himself (New York, 1855); the 1869 (Hartford) issue of 'Struggles and triumphs; or, Forty years' recollections of P. T. Barnum'; and the 1889 (Buf- falo) issue of the condensed version of 'Struggles and triumphs.' " Barnum kept adding and subtracting from his autobiography as it passed through its many edi- tions. Accordingly, there is no one complete, defini- tive text. Bryan has here edited a composite text. Morris R. Werner's Barnum (New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1923. 381 p.) is a biography based on the autobiography and outside materials. 4978. Graham, Philip. Showboats; the history of an American institution. Austin, University of Texas Press, 195 1. 224 p. illus. 51-14160 PN2293.S4G7 Bibliography: p. 203-210. Showboats, which first appeared on the Missis- sippi and its tributaries in 1831 and lasted for over a century, were long a major medium of entertain- ment from Pittsburgh to New Orleans. An autobiographical book recording this aspect of the dramatic art is Billy Bryant's Children of Old Man River; the Life and Times of a Showboat Trouper (New York, Furman, 1936. 303 p.). 4979. Havighurst, Walter. Annie Oakley of the Wild West. New York, Macmillan, 1954. 246 p. illus. 54-12424 GV1157.O3H3 Annie Oakley (1860-1926) was from childhood an incredibly accurate marksman with a shotgun or rifle. So uniform was her success with the most unlikely targets that for years she was able to travel widely and profitably as a popular entertainer. The peak of her career was perhaps her 17 successive years as a star of Buffalo Bill's Wild West show. 4980. Mannix, Daniel P. Step right up! New York, Harper, 1951. 270 p. 51-2123 GV1835.M3 Says Mr. Mannix, formerly The Great Zadma, of his venture into fire-eating and sword-swallowing: "I worked under canvas for the best part of three years and either performed or saw performed all the stunts I tell about in this book. . . . Except for combining the events of chronologically sepa- rated occasions into one summer, I've told the story of a travelling American carnival as I experienced it — only changing the names of the people with whom I worked." 4981. McPharlin, Paul. The puppet theatre in America, a history; with a list of puppeteers, 1 524-1 948. New York, Harper, 1949. 506 p. illus., facsims. 49-^939 PN1978.U6M22 A history of puppets in America, from the begin- ning to 1948, just before the television revival. The large amount of material and its ordering makes the book usable as a reference work. 4982. Robeson, Dave. Al G. Barnes, master show- man, by Dave Robeson, as told by Al G. Barnes. Caldwell, Idaho, Caxton Printers, 1935. 460 p. illus. 35-12032 GV1811.B27R6 The life story of a circus manager who specialized in wild, trained, and performing animals, and to whom Maud the mule and Nero the first riding lion were real individuals. XX Sports and Recreation A. General 4983-4996 B. Communi ty and Scholastic Activities 4997-5000 C. Particular Sports and Recreations Ci. Auto-Racing and Motoring 5001-5007 Cii. Baseball 5008-5015 1 Ciii. Boating 5016-5022 4 T f Civ. Boxing 5023-5033 Cv. Football 5034-5045 Cvi. Golf and Tennis 5046-5053 Cvii. Horse-Racing 5054-5057 Cviii. Miscellaneous 5058-5064 D. General Field Sports 5065-5097 ^ AS THE leisure time of the average American has rapidly increased, the ways in which 2jL this time is passed have become increasingly important factors in the life of the Nation. This is further accentuated by the fact that increased specialization and routinization of jobs has decreased the percentage of those who live for their work, and enormously increased the number of people who live by it, but for something else. Leisure activities have taken on many aspects. One of the main categories is sp ort and recreation. While many of the sports are so commercialized and non-participatory in na- ture that they might well be included under Enter- tainment (q. v.), not to mention commerce itself, and while much entertainment is attended primarily for purposes of recreation, we have chosen to use Entertainment in its more traditional sense (cover- ing spectacles such as drama, motion pictures, vaudeville, the circus, etc.), and to regard activities such as athletics as in a distinct category. To word it another way, the distinction is made in consid- eration of whether or not the activity is widely re- garded among its followers as a participation activity (Sports and Recreation) or as a generally and basically non-participation activity (Entertainment). Accordingly, this section covers such sports as football, baseball, tennis, sailing, horse-racing, and auto-racing, as well as the allied field sports, hunt- ing and fishing. Some activities of the kind are, however, not included because of a lack of suitable books: basketball, swimming, billiards, hockey, bi- cycling, etc.; while other important sports and recreations are merely touched on: hiking, camping, skiing, etc. For all these there is ample literature in the form of manuals and guides, but little in the way of books treating them as significant experience or placing them individually in the picture of life in America. For these the student will find some information in the general histories of sport and recreation. Just as the manuals have been excluded, so too the various handbooks, encyclopedias, and annuals of individual sports (notably baseball and football) have been left out. Usually these are mainly compendia of records (often statistical) and do little to indicate any significance in the game for American experience. As such they are of value primarily to the game's fans, and secondarily to the specialist, while their value to the general student of American history and culture is limited. 685 686 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES It has been found impossible to represent the sports strictly in proportion to their importance. In some fields such as baseball, there is a vast litera- ture, but mainly for young readers. In most fields the books are written for aficionados of the sport, and in a style with little appeal to the literate lay reader, and often with a wealth of statistical detail of in- terest chiefly to the fans. Also, many of the books are uncritically written with little concern for the distinction between truth and fable, and with much attention to the fame and glory of the moment. On the other hand, a few sports have had capable writers among their followers: notably hunting and fishing (which are probably the most widespread adult participation sports); yachting (which is certainly a minority sport); and also boxing (which in com- parison to other sports has been surprisingly well, though not extensively, written up). It should also be noted that these subjects are occasionally touched upon (directly or tangentially) in other sections of the bibliography. Books such as Lloyd Morris' Not So Long Ago under Society and the baseball literature of Ring Lardner in the Litera- ture section may well be of interest to the student. For such material the appropriate sections and the index should be used. A. General 4983. Cozens, Frederick W., and Florence Scovil Stumpf. Sports in American life. Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1953. 366 p. 53-12897 GV583.C68 Two University of California sociologists study the 20th-century penetration of American society on every level by the practice and the enthusiastic fan- ship of organized sports and physical recreations. They describe the latter-day importance of sports in labor and industry, the school, the church, journal- ism, broadcasting, and even in war. They find sport a vast and beneficent force for unification in American life, narrowing the gaps between social classes and ethnic groups. Unlike most commen- tators, they wholeheartedly approve of spectator sports, "the cement of democracy." "The bleachers are equally cordial to coal-miners, politicians, and bank presidents." 4984. Danzig, Allison, and Peter Brandwein, eds. The greatest sport stories from The New Yor\ Times; sport classics of a century. New York, Barnes, 195 1. 680 p. illus. 51-14836 GV191.N4 "From the files of The New Yor\ Times have been selected eyewitness accounts of the most celebrated events in the field of sports dating from the first year of publication of The Times, now celebrating its centennial anniversary." — Intro- duction. A similar volume, Wa\e Up the Echoes, edited by Bob Cooke and selected from the sports pages of the New Yorf( Herald Tribune was published in 1956 (Garden City, N. Y., Hanover House. 251 p.). 4985. Dulles, Foster Rhea. America learns to play; a history of popular recreation, 1607- 1940. New York, P. Smith, 1952, c i940. xvii, 441 p. illus. 52-9893 E161.D852 1952 Bibliography: p. 375-390. An attempt to present the main aspects of popu- lar recreation. "Recreation is considered in its popu- lar sense — the leisure-time activities that the Ameri- can people have pursued over three centuries for their own pleasure. At all periods of history men and women have probably spent the greater part of their leisure in informal talk, in visiting and enter- taining their friends, in casual walks and strolls, and sometimes in reading for their own amusement. But these more simple activities are hidden in the obscurity that shrouds private lives. Organized, public recreation has consciously been adopted as the basis for this record." — Preface. 4986. Durant, John, and Otto Bettmann. Pic- torial history of American sports, from colo- nial times to the present. New York, Barnes, 1952. 280 p. 52-8298 GV583.D85 With text as well as pictures on nearly every page, this overall narrative hits the high spots of five periods, moving from "Captain Smith to General Grant" in the first 45 pages. The remaining four are "The Gas-lit Era, 1 871-1898," "The Rise of Sports, 1900-1918," "The Golden Age, 1919-1930" ("an age of champions, of extraordinary events and superb performances, an age of public idolatry and fabulous purses"), and "Sports for Everybody, 1931-1952." 4987. Gallico, Paul. Farewell to sport. New York, Knopf, 1938. 346 p. 38-27340 GV53.G3 Mr. Gallico was for 13 years (1923-36) a sports writer for the New York Daily News, and has since become a prolific writer of fiction. This reflective book devotes individual chapters to three boxers (Jack Dempsey, Primo Camera, Gene Tunney) and to Tex Rickard, "the world's greatest prizefight SPORTS AND RECREATION / 687 promoter," Babe Ruth, the king of baseball, and Helen Wills Moody, the queen of tennis. The re- maining chapters discuss particular sports or special topics such as the Negro in sport. A recurrent theme is the national hypocrisy which insists that, in certain sports, professional athletes must main- tain, by various subterfuges, their "amateur" status. Mr. Gallico had one relapse into sports writing in 1942, when he published Golf Is a Friendly Game (New York, Knopf. 274 p.) and Lou Gehrig, Pride of the Yankees (New York, Grosset & Dunlap. 185 p.). 4988. Kieran, John. The American sporting scene, with pictures by Joseph W. Golinkin. New York, Macmillan, 1941. 211 p. illus. (part col.) 41-52016 GV583.K47 Anecdotes and reminiscences of the world of sports; the text is in a measure written about the paintings and sketches of Golinkin. The book catches some of the mood of sports, including the non-professional's role, although there is no attempt to attain either a historical or comprehensive con- temporary survey of the sporting world. 4989. Kirby, Gustavus T. I wonder why? New York, Coward-McCann, 1954. 180 p. illus. 54-10148 GV697.K5A3 Mr. Kirby, born in 1874, pursued careers as a New York lawyer and art dealer. Active in ath- letics at Columbia College in the '90's, he has been an official of the International Olympics since the second Games (1900), and has received six decora- tions from European governments. His autobiog- raphy is largely a procession of anecdotes, but ex- presses his conviction that "only through sport can there ever be a true democracy in this world." 4990. Krout, John Allen. Annals of American sport. New Haven, Yale University Press, 1929. 360 p. (The Pageant of America [v. 15]) 29-22307 GV53.K7 E178.5.P2, v. 15 Although conceived as a picture book, this is considerably the fullest and most dependable gen- eral history of American sports down to the mid- 1920's, and the one best related to other aspects of national history. Unfortunately the pictures, as always in this exasperating series, are as poorly reproduced as they are admirably selected from original sources. After a general review of outdoor diversions in the colonial era, Dr. Krout deals suc- cessively with the turf, yachting and rowing, fishing and hunting, baseball, football, and golf, and has chapters on "The Day of the Athletic Club" and "The Coming of the Gymnasium." The "General Bibliography" (p. 338-347) covers the whole 15- volume series; the list for sports is limited to page 347- 4991. Lardner, John. Strong cigars and lovely women. New York, Published for News- wee^ by Funk & Wagnalls, 1951. 127 p. 51-14397 PN6161.L3574 A selection from the author's columns which ap- peared in Newswee\, 1949 to 195 1. John Abbott Lardner, son of the famous Ring Lardner (q. v.), is a leading sports writer who is known for his style and the humor which he intro- duces into his articles. An earlier collection was It Beats Wording (Philadelphia, Lippincott, 1947. 253 p.), a selection of his articles that appeared in Neivswee\ from 1939 to 1945. He is also the author of White Hopes and Other Tigers (Philadelphia, Lippincott, 1951. 190 p.), a history of heavyweight boxing in the U. S. from 1910 to 1930. 4992. Manchester, Herbert. Four centuries of sport in America, 1490-1890. New York, Derrydale Press, 193 1. 245 p. illus. 32-2523 GV583.M3 "List of sources": p. [233J-245. A well-illustrated volume whose purpose is "to follow the history of sport in America from that of the Aztecs and Indians down through the sports of the white man to about a generation ago." The point of view is historical rather than technical, and the author seeks to give the story of each period with the high spots of each sport, rather than its minor details. A more detailed, but unillustrated work with a smaller range is Jennie Holliman's American Sports, 1785-1835 (Durham, N. C, See- man Press, 1931. 222 p.). 4993. Paulison, Walter M. The tale of the Wild- cats; a centennial history of Northwestern University athletics. [Evanston? 111.] N Men's Club, Northwestern University Club of Chicago, Northwestern University Alumni Association, 1951. xiv, 223 p. illus. 52-8032 GV691.N6P3 The centennial celebrated is the founding of Northwestern University, 1851-55; its football team, once the "Fighting Methodists," has been known as the Wildcats since 1924; this volume covers all college athletics but naturally gives most space to football (p. 17-63). Baseball was earlier, in unorganized form from the beginning, organ- ized from 1869, and intercollegiate from 1871. Football has been played since 1876, organized since 1879, and intercollegiate since 1882. Track, tennis, basketball, swimming, etc., are all narrated, with a complete roster of lettermen and intercollegiate 688 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES scores at the end, and many fine plates reproducing photographs of teams and individual stars. 4994. Rice, Grandand. The tumult and the shout- ting; my life in sport. New York, Barnes, 1954. 368 p. illus. 54-9173 GV697.A1R52 Henry Grandand Rice was for many years a lead- ing sports columnist. He was well known for his work on a long series of short sport films. His auto- biography, completed shortly before his death, is less his life story than a presentation of the world of sports as he saw it. Rice also wrote much popular sports and moral verse. 4995. Smith, Walter W. Views of sport [by] Red Smith. New York, Knopf, 1954. 293 p. 53-6862 GV191.S62 This is a second selection of articles from the author's column "Views of Sport," in the New Yorf^ Herald Tribune; the first was entitled Out of the Red (New York, Knopf, 1950. 294 p.). Smith (b. 1905) may write on any aspect of his field. His approach is usually anecdotal and frequently humorous. 4996. Zaharias, Mildred Babe (Didrikson), and Harry Paxton. This life I've led; my auto- biography, by Babe Didrikson Zaharias as told to Harry Paxton. New York, Barnes, 1955. 242 p. illus. 55-10217 GV964.Z3A3 Mrs. Zaharias has been called "the greatest woman athlete." Raised in an impoverished Texas family, she became a leading athlete in several fields, includ- ing golf, basketball, baseball, and track. B. Community and Scholastic Activities 4997. Buder, George D. Introduction to com- munity recreation, prepared for the National Recreation Association. 2d ed. New York, Mc- Graw-Hill, 1949. xiv, 568 p. 49-7982 GV171.B85 1949 "The term 'community recreation' is applied in this volume to recreation services that are provided for the benefit of all the people. Special consider- ation is given to those forms of recreation which require a considerable degree of organization and leadership and in which participation plays an im- portant role. Because governmental agencies pro- vide a large and increasing proportion of such services, this book is devoted primarily to the work of these agencies. It deals with recreation as a function of local government . . . Commercial recreation ... is not included . . ." ". . . Major consideration is given to prob- lems . . . related to the town and city rather than the rural community." — Preface. Bibliography: p. 533-548. 4998. Neumeyer, Martin H., and Esther S. Neu- meyer. Leisure and recreation; a study of leisure and recreation in their sociological aspects. Rev. ed. New York, Barnes, 1949. 411 p. 49-8054 GV14.N4 1949 The aim of the authors is "to present an informa- tive treatment of the place of recreation in modern society . . ." Their emphasis is on group activities. Something of a world view is presented, although basic orientation is to the United States. Chapter titles include: "Recreation Movement in the United States," "Conditioning Factors of Leisure and Rec- reation," "Leisure and Personality," "Preparing for Leisure," "Theories of Play and Recreation," "Rec- reation and Social Maladjustment," "Commercial Recreation," "Community Recreation: Public Agen- cies," "Community Recreation: Semipublic and Private Agencies," "Recreation Leadership," and "Methods of Recreation Research." 4999. Savage, Howard J., and others. American college athletics, by Howard }. Savage . . . and Harold W. Bentley, John T. McGovern, Dean F. Smiley, M. D., with a preface by Henry S. Pritch- ett . . . New York, Carnegie Foundation for the Advancement of Teaching, 1929. xxii, 383 p. (The Carnegie Foundation for the Advancement of Teaching. Bulletin no. 23) 29-23787 GV583.53 LB2334.C4, no. 23 A report on an investigation into the function of athletics in American higher education, as well as the financing of both athletics and the athletes. "The fundamental causes of the defects of American college athletics are two: commercialism," and a failure to develop the educational potentialities latent in the sports themselves. Litde has changed since 1929; for instance, our athletes and student managers are still "puppets pulled by older hands." 5000. Whitten, Charles W. Interscholastics; a dis- cussion of interscholastic contests. Chicago, Illinois High School Association, 1950. xv, 271 p. 50-14804 GV583.W5 "This book has been written to serve two pur- SPORTS AND RECREATION / 689 poses. It is a record of the growth and development of the Illinois High School Athletic Association and its successor, the present Illinois High School Asso- ciation. It is also a record of my own convictions as to the educational philosophy underlying the inter- scholastic activities carried on under the aegis of the association." — Foreword. Interscholastic athletic activities are the rule throughout the United States, but few of them have had published histories. This book may be taken as partially illustrating the systems that have been built up. The philosophy behind it is unusually conservative for a sports figure and probably comes closer to that of many humanists. C. Particular Sports and Recreations Ci. AUTO-RACING AND MOTORING 5001. Catlin, Russ. The life of Ted Horn, Amer- ican racing champion. Los Angeles, F. Clymer, 1949. 223 p. illus. 49-50131 GV1029.H56C3 Horn was a leading automobile racer. His biogra- phy is largely a history of major racing developments from 1931 to his death in 1948. 5002. Chase, Harold B. Auto-biography; recol- lections of a pioneer motorist, 1896 to 1911. New York, Pageant Press, 1955. 174 p. illus. 55-11223 GV1021.C5 Reminiscences of a motoring enthusiast who started while the recreation was new and still far from standard. 5003. Clymer, Joseph Floyd. Indianapolis 500 mile race history. Los Angeles, 1946. 320 p. illus. NNC A history of the leading automotive race in Amer- ica. An annual supplement, Indianapolis Race His- tory, has been published by Mr. Clymer since 1946. The author has written much on racing and has published many works by himself and others on this sport. A short popularized history of the race from its beginning in 1909 to 1955 is Brock W. Yates' The Indianapolis 500; the Story of the Motor Speed- way (New York, Harper, 1956. 147 p.). 5004. Lozier, Herbert. Auto racing, old and new. [Greenwich, Conn., Fawcett Publications] 1953. 144 p. illus. (A Fawcett book, no. 184) 53-29624 GV1029.L6 A history of automobile racing, especially in Amer- ica. The arrangement is by race, with chrono- logical subdivision. Most attention is given to the Indianapolis races. 5005. Partridge, Bellamy. Fill 'er up; the story of fifty years of motoring. New York, Mc- Graw-Hill, 1952. 235 p. illus. 52-10850 GV1021.P3 431240—60 45 "Chronology of the Motor Car:" p. 219-227. A rather loosely written chronicle of various aspects of the automobile's conquest of American life, especially in its earlier stages. Among its highlights are the first American automobile race, in Chicago on Thanksgiving day, 1895, when the winner averaged 5.05 miles per hour; the organiza- tion in New York City of the Automobile Club of America, followed by the first automobile parade ever seen in America (1899); the federating of the clubs into the American Automobile Association in 1902; and the Glidden Tours held under its auspices during each summer from 1905 to 1913. 5006. Shaw, Wilbur. Gentlemen, start your en- gines. New York, Coward-McCann, 1955. 320 p. illus. 55-8980 GV1029.S43 The personal narrative of an automobile racer, born in 1902, who began competing in 1921 and won the Indianapolis 500 (see no. 5003) in 1927 with his "little Jynx Special." He was still going strong in 1954, when his career was cut short by a fatal airplane crash. Another auto-racer's auto- biography is Peter De Paolo's Wall Smacker; the Saga of the Speedway (Cleveland, Ohio, Thompson Products, 1935. 271 p.). 5007. Wagner, Fred J. The saga of the roaring road, by Fred J. Wagner as told to John M. Mitchell. Los Angeles, F. Clymer, 1949. 189 p. illus. 49-5081 GV1029.W25 1949 "Fred Wagner was the dean of race starters, and during his career officiated at auto races at nearly every track and course in the United States." — Foreword. The book is more a group of reminiscences than an organized history; however, the scope of Wag- ner's activity makes it valuable for the early history. The book was first published in 1938. In this edition, the text is not altered, but photographic material has been added. 69O / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Cii. BASEBALL 5008. Barrow, Edward G., and James M. Kahn. My fifty years in baseball. New York, Coward-McCann, 1951. 216 p. ports. 51-10981 GV865.B3A3 Mr. Barrow, born in 1868, entered the business side of baseball in 1894, and got his first club (Pater- son, N.J.) to manage in 1896. He is proudest of having developed Hans Wagner, "the greatest ball player of all time," and of having "changed Babe Ruth from a left-handed pitcher into a full-time outfielder," with spectacular results. After two seasons with the Boston Red Sox, he became busi- ness manager of the New York Yankees in 1920, and succeeded Jacob Ruppert as their president in 1939, retiring in 1945 when the club was sold. His life story, taken down by Mr. Kahn, is objective, even-tempered, and most informative. 5009. Bartlett, Arthur C. Baseball and Mr. Spald- ing; the history and romance of baseball. New York, Farrar, Straus & Young, 195 1. 295 p. 51-9661 GV865.S7B3 The life of Albert G. Spalding (1850-1915), a sporting goods businessman who as a baseball executive turned the game into big business. 5010. Graham, Frank. Lou Gehrig, a quiet hero. New York, Putnam, 1942. 250 p. illus. 42-8657 GV865.G4G7 A sports journalist's biographical tribute to Henry Louis Gehrig (1903-1941), one of baseball's heroes and one of the outstanding modern professional players of the game. In 1939 he retired from the game because of a fairly rare and incurable form of infantile paralysis which was causing his muscles to wither. 501 1. McGillicuddy, Cornelius. My 66 years in the big leagues; the great story of America's national game, by Connie Mack (Cornelius Mc- Gillicuddy) Philadelphia, Winston, 1950. 246 p. illus. 50—7521 GV865.M27A3 Connie Mack (1862-1956) was a baseball execu- tive who came to be known as the "grand old man" of the game. He was best known as the manager of the Philadelphia Athletics. 5012. Ruth, George H., and Robert B. Considine. The Babe Ruth story as told to Bob Con- sidine. New York, Dutton, 1948. 250 p. illus. 48-6219 GV865.R8A3 George Herman Ruth, universally known as Babe Ruth (1894-1948), emerged from an "incorrigible" youth in Baltimore to enter professional baseball in 19 13, and to become its most spectacular and popu- lar star after joining the New York Yankees in 1920. In 1 92 1 he made his incredible record of 177 runs in 152 games, and during his 21-year period in the American League (1914-34) he made the record slugging percentage of .692. In 1930 his salary was raised from $70,000 to $80,000 a year. A swift physical decline forced his retirement in 1935, and this honest book does not conceal the despair of the star who can play no more, or the agonies of his final illness — in the course of which he succeeded in completing this autobiography and the Hollywood film, The Babe Ruth Story, which was its counterpart. 5013. Smith, Ira L., and H. Allen Smith. Low and inside; a book of baseball anecdotes, oddities, and curiosities. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1949. 243 p. 49-8968 GV873.S58 A collection of baseball anecdotes that appeared in print prior to 1918. This book was supplemented by the authors' Three Men on Third; a Second Boo\ of Baseball Anecdotes, Oddities, and Curiosities (Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1951. 250 p.), which brought the coverage up to the time of compilation. 5014. Smith, Robert Miller. Baseball; a histori- cal narrative of the game, the men who have played it, and its place in American life. New York, Simon & Schuster, 1947. xiv, 362 p. illus. 47-4836 GV863.S44 "BASEBALL is a private appreciation of a game I have played and watched as long as I can remem- ber. It is an investigation of the manner in which the game began in this country, and a partial ac- count of its place in the life of the nation for one hundred years. It is an attempt to bring to life a few of the great games and to revivify some of professional baseball's bygone heroes. It is an ama- teur effort to explain why baseball has meant so much to so many Americans." — Foreword. A more recent history of professional baseball is Frederick G. Lieb's The Baseball Story (New York, Putnam, 1950. 335 p.). 5015. Spink, J. G. Taylor. Judge Landis and twenty-five years of baseball. New York, Crowell, 1947. 306 p. ports. 47-3905 GV865.L3S6 A biography of Kenesaw Mountain Landis ( 1 866— 1944), who in 1920 was appointed the first baseball commissioner (frequently called the "Baseball Czar"), in which position he regulated organized baseball and did much to establish baseball "law." He held this position until his death in 1944; in 1945 "Happy" [Albert Benjamin] Chandler was elected the second baseball commissioner. SPORTS AND RECREATION / 69 1 Ciii. BOATING 5016. Barrett, J. Lee. Speed boat kings; 25 years of international speedboating. Detroit, Arnold-Powers, 1939. 143 p. illus. 40-27200 GV835.B3 Not a general history of motorboat racing in the United States, this book centers upon Gar Wood (Commodore Garfield A. Wood of Detroit), his mechanic Orlin Johnson, and the builders of his speedboats, Chris Smith and his son Jay of Algonac, Mich., and enthusiastically narrates their joint at- tempts to win the Harmsworth Trophy for America. Put in competition by the future Lord Northcliffe in 1903, it was first won by Wood in his Miss America I at Cowes in 1920, and successfully defended by him through 1933. 5017. Elder, George W. Forty years among the Stars. Port Washington, Wis., Schanen & Jacque, 1955. 352 p. illus. 55-57451 GV811.E4 A history of the Star (a small yacht), of the Star organization, and of Star racing. 5018. Gardiner, Frederic, M. Cruising North America. New York, Dodd, Mead, 1941. xii, 340 p. illus., maps. 41-14788 GV815.G3 This book was designed to be an introduction to the cruising areas, inland as well as coastal, of North America. It illustrates the local range of yachts- men. 5019. Hoyt, Charles Sherman. Sherman Hoyt's memoirs. New York, Van Nostrand, 1950. xii, 348 p. illus. (A Van Nostrand sporting book) 50-10884 GV815.H6 A book of reminiscences of changes in yachting over a period of 60 years; the author is mainly con- cerned with sail yachts. 5020. Kelley, Robert F. American rowing; its background and traditions. New York, Putnam, 1932. xiv, 271 p. illus. 32-26690 GV796.K4 A well-organized and clearly written history of competitive rowing in America, which is now chiefly a college sport but was by no means so in its origins. Amateur racing and rowing clubs began to flourish in the 1830's; professional crews and single scullers emerged in the 1850's. Edward Hanlan ( 1855— 1908), who was born in Toronto but dominated United States races from 1876 to 1884, is remem- bered as the greatest pro. Philadelphia's Schuylkill River Navy, organized in 1858, remains "the oldest governing body of sport in America." Harvard and Yale first raced in 1852, and have done so annually since 1876; multi-college regattas have been held since 1871, and the major one, the Poughkeepsie Regatta, since 1895. The colleges have kept up the old sport as mass interest has turned to speed. An appendix (p. 255-271) lists winners in various events. 5021. Klein, David, and Mary Louis Johnson. They took to the sea, including personal ac- counts of the voyages of Joshua Slocum, Jack Lon- don, Rockwell Kent and other small-boat voyagers. New Brunswick, N. J., Rutgers University Press, 1948. viii, 342 p. illus. 48-11442 GV811.K66 Annotated bibliography: p. [3331—339- Crossing the open sea in a small sailing ship is, to the compilers of this volume, "a contest of wood and canvas against wind and water which presents an unchanging challenge to man's courage, skill, and ingenuity." They provide two introductory chapters as well as connective matter between their topically arranged selections. Most of the 13 authors excerpted are, like the three named in the subtide, Americans, but they include two Frenchmen, and Englishman, and a Norwegian. The voyagers traversed the North and South Adantic, the South Pacific, the Indian Ocean, and the Mediterranean; the earliest was Joshua Slocum, who sailed around the globe between Apr. 24, 1895, and June 27, 1898. 5022. Loom is, Alfred F. Ocean racing; the great blue-water yacht races, 1 866-1935. New York, Morrow, 1936. xii, 295 p. illus. 36-14301 GV827.L6 1936 A history of open ocean yacht racing, starting witii the first transadantic race in 1866. As with most sports writing, the book is meant for aficionados of the sport, but the layman can easily sidestep much of the specialized discussion. Civ. BOXING 5023. Dempsey, Jack. Round by round, an auto- biography. Written in collaboration with Myron M. Stearns. New York, Whittlesey House, McGraw-Hill, 1940. 285 p. illus. 40-30806 GV1132.D4A3 Born in 1895 and originally named William Har- rison Dempsey, the author was a popular world heavyweight champion boxer from 1919 to 1926. 5024. Durant, John, and Edward Rice. Come out fighting. New York, Duell, Sloan & Pearce, 1946. 245 p. 46-25213 GV1121.D8 A pictorial history of boxing in America. 5025. Fleischer, Nathaniel S. Black dynamite, the story of the Negro in the prize ring from 1782 to 1938, by Nat Fleischer. New York, C. J. O'Brien, 1938-47. 5 v. illus. (Ring athletic library) 38-19731 GV1131.F65 692 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES A detailed history, largely in biographical form, of leading Negro boxers; according to the author, "About 60 per cent of the top flight boxers are of that race." Certainly they have played a very im- portant role in the sport, and the sport has played a prominent role in their national life. The first volume deals with American Negro fighters in the early years. Volume two has the individual title of "Joking Joe," the Amazing Story of Joe Louis and His Rise to World Heavyweight Title; "Homicide Han\',' the Sockjng Saga of Henry Armstrong. Volume three is entided: "The Three Colored Aces": George Dixon, "Little Choc- olate"; Joe Gans, "The Old Master"; Joe Walcott, "The Barbados Demon"; and Several Contem- poraries. The tide of the fourth volume is: "Fight- ing Furies," Story of the Golden Era of ]ac\ John- son, Sam Langford, and Their Contemporaries. The title of volume five is "Soccers in Sepia," a Continuation of the Drama of the Negro in Pugilistic Competition. 5026. Fleischer, Nathaniel S. The heavyweight championship; an informal history of heavy- weight boxing from 171 9 to the present day [by] Nat Fleischer. New York, Putnam, 1949. xv, 303 p. illus. 49-4955 GV1121.F6 This history of heavyweight boxing deals with the subject on an international level. However, because of the contemporary dominance of America in this field, all but the early portions are almost as though the scope had been exclusively American. 5027. Fleischer, Nathaniel S. John L. Sullivan, champion of champions, by Nat Fleischer. New York, Putnam, 195 1. xiii,242p. illus. 51-10380 GV1132.S95F63 A biography of John Lawrence Sullivan (1858- 1918), a leading American heavyweight pugilist, and one of the heroes and myths of his age. Earlier biographies include Roy F. Dibble's John L. Sulli- van, an Intimate Narrative (Boston, Little, Brown, 1925. 209 p.) and Donald Barr Chidsey's John the Great, the Times and Life of a Remarkable Ameri- can, John L. Sullivan (Garden City, N. Y., Double- day, Doran, 1942. 337 p.). 5028. Graziano, Rocky. Somebody up there likes me; the story of my life until today. Written with Rowland Barber. New York, Simon & Schuster, 1955. 375 p. illus. 54-12365 GV1132.G62A3 Graziano (born in 1921 and originally named Rocco Barbella) was middleweight champion in 1947-48. This book is written in the East Side New York and general hoodlum argot in which he was raised. In addition to depicting the business of boxing, the book has interesting sidelights on a slum childhood, juvenile delinquency, and "mod- ern" penology. 5029. Johnston, Alexander. Ten — and out! The complete story of the prize ring in America. 3d ed. rev. New York, Washburn, 1947. 401 p. illus. 47-31138 GV1125.J6 1947 A clearly planned and written narrative, for the most part, of the highlights of the heavyweight championship from the first decade of the 19th century, when Tom Molyneux, born a slave on a Virginia plantation, was known in New York City as Champion of America. Chapters 18-23 cover "The Lighter Divisions," from middleweights to flyweights. First published in 1927, the book was twice brought up to date by means of additional chapters. 5030. Louis, Joe. The Joe Louis story. [Writ- ten with the editorial aid of Chester L. Wash- ington and Haskell Cohen] New York, Grosset & Dunlap, 1953. 197 p. illus. 53-1 1991 GV1132.L6A3 1953 First edition published in 1947 under tide: My life story. Joseph Louis Barrow was born into a poor Negro farm family in Alabama in 1914. He rose to be- come world heavyweight champion and held the title from 1937 to 1949. 5031. Tunney, Gene. A man must fight. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1932. 288 p. illus. 32-29070 GV1132.T8A3 Autobiography of a champion heavyweight boxer who in 1928 retired undefeated. A second auto- biographical work by Tunney (b. 1898) is Arms for Living (New York, Funk, 194 1. 279 p.). A biography of him is Nat Fleischer's Gene Tunney, the Enigma of the Ring ( [New York, Hubner] 1931. 127 p.). 5032. Van Every, Edward. Muldoon, the solid man of sport; his amazing story as related for the first time by him to his friend, Edward Van Every. New York, Stokes, 1929. xiv, 364 p. illus. 29-19300 GV1132.M85V3 William Muldoon (1845-1933) became famous as a trainer of boxers, and came to be known as "the father of American boxing." 5033. Williams, Joseph P. TV Boxing book. New York, Van Nostrand, 1954. 186 p. illus. 54-1 1831 GV1133.W5 A "nationally known sports columnist" (who shares the profession's distaste for straightforward exposition in plain language) analyzes the depress- SPORTS AND RECREATION / 693 ing financial effect which, strangely enough, the transfer from ringside to fireside audiences has had on the boxing business, and goes on to expound the fine points of the sport, including its refereeing and judging, for members of "the Living Room Athletic Club." Cv. FOOTBALL 5034. Buchanan, Lamont. The story of football in text and pictures. New York, Vanguard Press, 1952. 256 p. 52-13438 GV940.B8 1952 Pictures of college (none of professional) football each with accompanying text, from the late 19th century through the season of 1951. There are some wood engravings from the illustrated weeklies, and some very spirited drawings by Frederick Rem- ington (p. 35-36), but mosdy photographs, in a dull sort of reproduction, of stars, coaches, and actual plays. The latter demonstrate, at any rate, the progress of photography: the earlier ones are almost invariably blurred, but the modern fast shutter makes nearly all the more recent ones crisp and clear. 5035. Cohane, Tim. The Yale football story. New York, Putnam, 195 1. 369 p. illus. 51-13447 GV958.Y3C6 Since, unlike baseball, football in America is largely a collegiate sport, this history of football at one of the oldest Eastern universities represents the dominant tradition of the game. In Gridiron Grena- diers (New York, Putnam, 1948. 320 p.) Cohane presented a similar history of football at West Point. 5036. Danzig, Allison. The history of American football: its great teams, players, and coaches. Englewood Cliffs, N. J., Prentice-Hall, 1956. 525 p. 56-9844 GV938.D35 The story of the evolution of the game of football in America. Much of the material was gathered in the course of the author's more than a quarter of a century reporting football for The New Yor\ Times. 5037. Grange, Harold E. The Red Grange story, the autobiography of Red Grange, as told to Ira Morton. New York, Putnam, 1953. 180 p. illus. [Putnams sports series] 53-8161 GV939.G7A3 Red Grange (b. 1903), the son of a Pennsylvania lumberjack, carried ice and played high school foot- ball at Wheaton, 111., and became the "Galloping Ghost" of the University of Illinois team during 1923-25, when he once made four long touchdown runs in 12 minutes. On graduating, he at once entered professional football, which enjoyed small repute in 1925 but has improved since, and was for another decade the mainstay of the Chicago Bears. He did not coach for long, but has since had great success as a radio and TV sportscaster. His old coach, Robert C. Zuppke of Illinois, calls him "the greatest name in football" and "nearer to being the perfect football player than anyone I have ever known." 5038. Heffelfinger, W. W. This was football, by W. W. "Pudge" Heffelfinger, as told to John McCallum. New York, Barnes, 1954. 192 p. illus. 54-11793 GV939.H37A3 Pudge Heffelfinger was one of the earliest, and is still considered by many to be one of the greatest, of football athletes. Active in the game over a period of 50 years, he know many of the personalities in the sport, and this book is in large part anecdotal rem- iniscences about others. 5039. Luckman, Sid. Luckman at quarterback; football as a sport and a career. Chicago, Ziff-Davis, 1949. xxi, 233 p. illus. 49-10297 GV939.L82 The autobiography (actually told to Norman Reissman of Chicago, who reads like a sports journalist) of the son of a Jewish immigrant from Germany. Mr. Luckman began playing football at Erasmus Hall High School in Brooklyn, starred for Columbia (class of 1939), and in the next 10 seasons gained 14,303 yards passing for a profes- sional team, the Chicago Bears. 5040. Roberts, Howard. The Big Nine; the story of football in the Western Conference. New York, Putnam, 1948. 259 p. illus. 48-8953 GV951.R53 A history of football in a Midwestern league which is one of the outstanding collegiate football associa- tions in America. Roberts is also the author of The Chicago Bears (New York, Putnam, 1947. 248 p.), the story of a professional football team. 5041. Rockne, Knute K. The autobiography of Knute K. Rockne, edited, with prefatory note, by Bonnie Skiles Rockne (Mrs. Knute K. Rockne) and with introd. and postscript by Father John Cavanaugh, C. S. C. Indianapolis, Bobbs- Merrill, 1931. 296 p. illus. 31-30240 GV939.R6A3 Knute Rockne (1888-1931) was Notre Dame's football coach; in this capacity he brought fame to the university and to himself. Considered by many to be the greatest of football coaches, he has prob- 694 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES ably had more books written about him than any other football personality. These include Huber William Hurt's memorial Goals, the Life of Knute Rocf{ne (New York, Murray Book Corp., 193 1. 271 p.), which is extensively illustrated, and Eugene [Scrapiron] Young's With Roc\ne at Notre Dame (New York, Putnam, 1951. 312 p.), a somewhat autobiographical work that tends toward being a biography of Rockne. 5042. Samuelsen, Rube. The Rose Bowl game. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1 95 1 . 299 p. illus. 51-12108 GV957.R6S3 Pasadena, California, has held its Tournament of Roses each New Year's Day since 1890, and ever since 19 16, when Brown met Washington State, its principal feature and financial prop has been a football game between the best-scoring Pacific Coast college team and a successful and prestigious team selected from elsewhere in the country. Mr. Sam- uelsen describes the first 36 games in great and anecdotal detail, and gives a statistical summary of each in an appendix (p. 265-299). 5043. Stagg, Amos Alonzo. Touchdown! As told by Coach Amos Alonzo Stagg to Wesley Winans Stout. New York, Longmans, Green, 1927. 352 p. illus. 27-19751 GV951.S8 Coach Stagg (b. 1862), the most durable man in the whole history of sport, played baseball and football for Yale in the '8o's, and began his service as director of physical education and football coach at the new-fledged University of Chicago in 1892, the year before the World's Fair. When he dic- tated this autobiography he had long been known as "the Old Man," but had six more years of service before retiring in 1933 with a total of 41 years. He at once began coaching for the College of the Pacific, and took on his latest assignment, with Stockton College, in his tenth decade! His book tells much about the early days of college football, including the "dirty work" that marred it, and about the shoe- string beginnings of athletics at Mr. Rockefeller's university. 5044. Wallace, Francis. The Notre Dame story. New York, Rinehart, 1949. 275 p. 49-10793 LD4113.W3 Notre Dame is an Indiana Catholic university that was made famous by its football team. This book tells the story of the school through the develop- ment of the story of its football and the life of Knute Rockne (q. v.), its great football coach. Wallace is a sportswriter who specializes in football and Notre Dame. In Dementia Pigs\in (New York, Rinehart, 195 1. 252 p.) he presented a general, non- sequential, and frequently humorous view of the world of the football fan. 5045. Ward, Archie. The Green Bay Packers, the story of professional football [by] Arch Ward. New York, Putnam, 1946. 240 p. illus. 47-751 GV956.G7W3 An enthusiast's history of a professional football team; the book also reflects much of the general history of professional football in America. Cvi. GOLF AND TENNIS 5046. Danzig, Allison. The racquet game. New York, Macmillan, 1930. 283 p. illus. 30-4629 GV1003.D3 A study of court tennis, rackets, squash rackets and squash tennis. The subjects are approached through a presentation of their origin, history in America, personalities of the games, and the method of play. 5047. Jacobs, Helen Hull. Beyond the game, an autobiography. Philadelphia, Lippincott, 1936. 274 p. illus. 36-14873 GV994.J3A3 Jacobs (b. 1908) was a leading tennis player who between 1923 and 1931 was seven times the U. S. woman champion. 5048. Keeler, Oscar B. The Bobby Jones story, from the writings of O. B. Keeler, by Grant- land Rice. Adanta, Tupper & Love, 1953. 304 p. illus. 53-13*59 GV964.J6K4 Jones, one of the greatest of golf players, retired from the game in 1948. This biography is made up from articles written by Keeler, a sportswriter and golf enthusiast who knew Jones throughout almost all of his career. Keeler died in 1950. 5049. Marble, Alice. The road to Wimbledon. New York, Scribner, 1946. 167 p. illus. 46-5902 GV994.M3A3 Autobiography of a Californian who became woman tennis champion four times between 1936 and 1940. 5050. Riggs, Robert L. Tennis is my racket, by Bobby Riggs. [New York] Simon & Schu- ster, 1949. xxii, 245 p. illus. 49-8951 GV994.R54A3 Riggs (b. 1918) has won a number of tennis championships. His autobiography presents not only his own career in the sport, but presents at some length sketches of prominent tennis players he has known. SPORTS AND RECREATION / 695 5051. Sarazen, Gene. Thirty years of champion- ship golf; the life and times of Gene Sarazen, by Gene Sarazen with Herbert Warren Wind. New York, Prentice-Hall, 1950. xi, 276 p. illus. 50-7427 GV964.S3A3 The life story of a professional golfer who won the National Open in 1922 and 1932, among other awards. His original last name was Saracini (b. 1901). 5052. Tilden, William T. My story, a champion's memoirs. New York, Hellman, Williams, 1948. 335 p. illus. 4 8 -3054 GV994.T5A33 Tilden (1 893-1953) has generally been adjudged the best tennis player of the first half of the 20th century. In his long amateur career he won many national and international awards. In 193 1 he be- came a professional, and subsequently won a num- ber of professional awards. An earlier version of his autobiography was Aces, Places and Faults (London, Hale, 1938. 304 p.). 5053. Wind, Herbert W. The story of American golf, its champions and its championships. New York, Simon & Schuster, 1956. 564 p. illus. 56-13439 GV981.W5 1956 A revised edition of a history of American golf which first appeared in 1948. It has the game start- ing in this country in 1888; the emphasis is on championship golf, amateur and professional. An earlier book which also starts from 1888 is Harry B. Martin's Fifty Years of American Golf (New York, Dodd, Mead, 1936. 423 p.). Cvii. HORSE-RACING 5054. Akers, Dwight. Drivers up; the story of American harness racing. [2d ed.] New York, Putnam, 1947. xv, 392 p. illus. Agr 47-373 SF339.A5 1947 Harness racing is a special type wherein the horse trots as fast as he can but must not break into a run; nowadays he draws a sulky and driver, but in the early days he might bear saddle and jockey. Mr. Akers, whose history was first published in 1938, reminds us that, before the motor age, trotting races were not confined to special tracks, but were every- day events on city avenues and country roads. The prehistoric age of American harness racing ended with the formation of the New York Trotting Club in 1825; a highlight of the '60 's was the long rivalry in trotters between Commodore Vanderbilt (no. 5935) and Robert Bonner of the New Yorf^ Ledger. Harness racing survives to lend variety to present-day racing; its recent status is surveyed in Frank A. Wrensch's Harness Horse Racing in the United States and Canada (New York, Van Nos- trand, 1951. 219 p.). 5055. Hervey, John. Racing in America: 1665- 1865 . . . written for the Jockey Club. New York, Priv. print, The Jockey Club, 1944. 2 v. illus. 44-6592 SF347.H4 A large, detailed, de luxe history of the early days of horse-racing in America. The work is supple- mented by Walter S. Vosburgh's Racing in Amer- ica, 1866-1921 (New York, The Jockey Club, 1922. 249 p.) and John Hervey's Racing in America: 1922- 1936 (New York, The Jockey Club, 1937. 293 p.). 5056. Parmer, Charles B. For gold and glory; the story of thoroughbred racing in America. New York, Carrick & Evans, 1939. 352 p. illus., tables. 39-30807 SF347.P3 The story of how 20th-century horse-racing in America developed out of early beginnings in Eng- land and then Virginia. 5057. Winn, Matt J. Down the stretch; the story of Colonel Matt J. Winn, as told to Frank G. Menke. New York, Smith & Durrell, 1944. xvi, 292 p. illus. 45-1614 SF336.W5A3 The autobiography of a leading horse-racing per- sonality. A brief history of the Kentucky Derby, with which he has most prominendy been asso- ciated, is included. Cviii. MISCELLANEOUS 5058. Bent, Newell. American polo. New York, Macmillan, 1929. xxix, 407 p. illus. 29-16932 GV1011.B4 Polo originated in medieval Persia, and was intro- duced into America, via British India and England, by the younger James Gordon Bennett in 1876. The leading club, the Meadow Brook Club of Nassau County, Long Island, was incorporated in 1881 by August Belmont, Jr., and others. Although it pene- trated the U.S. Army, and international matches with England have been played since 1886, it has remained a preserve of "Society" and of wealth, with a very limited popular following. Mr. Bent also tells how polo ponies are bred, gives hints for beginners, and calls the roll of leading American performers. 5059. Best, Katharine, and Katharine Hillyer. Las Vegas, playtovvn U. S. A. New York, Mc- Kay, 1955. 178 p. 56-1202 F849.L35B4 A study of Las Vegas, Nevada, the flashy gam- bling center of America. Since this "recreation" is 696 I A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES legal in Nevada, the state has become a focal point for many gambling activities which are prohibited in other states of the Union. 5060. Fleischer, Nathaniel S. From Milo to Londos; the story of wresding through the ages, by Nat Fleischer. New York, C. J. O'Brien, 1936. 330 p. illus. (The Ring athletic library, book no. 13) 37-910 GV1195.F5 The author gets from Milo of Croton to George Washington in one chapter, and a second takes him to William Muldoon (1845-1933), "the Solid Man" (as Ned Harrigan dubbed him in a popular song) and likewise "the Father of American Wresding." Thereafter we proceed match by match and play by play ("every time Gotch tried to turn he was brought back by the crotch") to Frank Gotch, to Frank Hackenschmidt, to Strangler Lewis (who perfected the head lock), to Stanislaus Zbyszko, to Jim Londos, and then to chaos. There is a wealth of terrifying illustrations. 5061. GrifSn, Marcus. Fall guys, the Barnums of bounce; the inside story of the wresding busi- ness, America's most profitable and best organized professional sport. Chicago, Reilly & Lee, 1937. 215 p. 37~5 8o 7 GV1195.G75 A journalistic narrative of wresding, "America's most popular and best organized sport," from the days of "the peerless champion," Frank Gotch, who won the tide in 1904 and retired undefeated in 1912, to the accession of Dean Dutton to a disputed championship in 1936. The author notes the scan- dals which increasingly cast shadows over the game and points out that, while wresders are very well paid ("raw-boned country bumpkins who are pos- sessed of incomes of from twenty-five to thirty thousand dollars yearly [1937]")* they run great risks and usually leave the ring with severe physical disabilities. The book of course does not reach the latter days of wrestling buffoonery on TV. 5062. Jay, John C. Skiing the Americas; with photographs by the author. New York, Macmillan, 1947. 257 p. illus. 48-5053 GV854.J35 Mr. Jay, skier, ski expert, ski cinematographer, ski lecturer, and ski enthusiast, answers the questions which his audiences had been putting to him for ten years past in this very informal but pleasant book, which describes the ski resorts of the East, the Midwest, the Rocky Mountain West, and the Pacific Northwest, and points out the skiing available during the several seasons of the year. The author credits the beginning of organized skiing in Amer- ica to a Dartmouth undergraduate, Fred Harris, who founded the Dartmouth Outing Club in 1910; but it was not until the Olympic Winter Games of 1932 at Lake Placid that the sport began to snowball here. An attractive chapter describes Mr. Jay's "dream trip" as escort for the Chilean Ski Team, visiting in two months every big ski resort in the United States. 5063. Lester, John A., ed. A century of Phila- delphia cricket. Philadelphia, University of Pennsylvania Press, 195 1. 397 p. illus. 51-12299 GV913.L4 Cricket was once a fairly popular game in some parts of America, but has gone into a period of decline. This book traces its rise and subsequent decline in a leading city where it has now ceased to be an important social force. 5064. Longstreth, Thomas Morris. The Catskills. New York, Century, 1918. 321 p. illus., map. 18-19146 F127.C3L8 T. Morris Longstreth in this record of a hiking and camping trip through the Catskills provides an example of a common American pastime (hiking and studying nature — in the backyard by the hour, or in the country by the day and week) and at the same time gives a good view of life in these moun- tains. A similar book is his The Adirondack (New York, Century, 1917. 370 p.). D. General Field Sports 5065. Brown, J. Hammond, ed. Outdoors unlim- ited; a collection of stories and ardcles which reflect the current American scene of the recreational outdoors. Sponsored by the Outdoor Writers Asso- ciation of America. New York, Barnes, 1947. xiv, 343 p. Agr 47-272 SK33.B85 The emphasis in this book is on the various aspects of hunting and fishing in present-day America. There are, however, a few stories which reflect the "recreational outdoors" as a communing with nature for its own sake. 5066. Buckingham, Nash. De shootinest gent'- man, and other tales. New York, Putnam [ c i934, 1943] 222 p. illus. 43-4482 SK33.B89 1943 SPORTS AND RECREATION / 697 Buckingham (b. 1880) is one of the foremost American authors in the field of hunting and fish- ing literature. A number of his works were first published during the 1930's in de luxe, limited edi- tions; trade editions of these appeared in the 1940's. His writings take the form of sketches, short stories, essays, and reminiscences, but they are regularly based on personal experiences. The setting is often Southern, and the period covered ranges as far back as the late 19th century. Some of his earlier books are probably among his best known. Later books include Ole Miss' (New York, Putnam, 1946. 178 p.), Blood Lines (New York, Putnam, 1947. 192 p.), and Hallowed Years (Harrisburg, Pa., Stackpole, 1953. 209 p.). Much of his work first appeared in field sports periodicals. 5067. Buckingham, Nash. Mark right! Tales of shooting and fishing. New York, Putnam [ c i936, 1944] 196 p. illus. 44-3008 SK33.B885 1944 5068. Buckingham, Nash. Tattered coat. New York, Putnam, 1944. xiv, 210 p. illus. 45-248 SK33.B893 5069. Buckingham, Nash. Game bag; tales of shooting and fishing. New York, Putnam, 1945. xv, 185 p. illus. Agr 46-152 SK33.B883 1945 5070. Cook, Beatrice G. Till fish us do part; the confessions of a fisherman's wife. New York, Morrow, 1949. 249 p. Agr 49-412 SH441.C598 1949 The wife of a doctor-fisherman reports experiences while fishing in coastal and inland waters of Wash- ington state. Her approach is humorous and per- sonal; but she does manage to convey not only an impression of fishing as a recreation, but also of life in an American family. A later book of the same type by her is More Fish to Fry (New York, Mor- row, 1951. 280 p.). 5071. Field and stream. Field & stream treasury; memorable articles and stories selected from the pages of America's number one sportsman's magazine. Edited by Hugh Grey and Ross Mc- Cluskey. Illustrated with original photographs, drawings, advertisements, and covers from the sixty- year file of the magazine. New York, Holt, 1955. 351 p. 55-10675 SK33.F383 A selection of material from a magazine whose history goes back to 1895. The work is meant to constitute "a sort of informal running history of hunting and fishing over the last 75 or 100 years." An earlier anthology from this periodical is The Field and Stream Game Bag (Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1948. 306 p.), edited by Robeson Bailey. 5072. Goodspeed, Charles Eliot. Angling in America; its early history and literature. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1939. xiii, 380 p. illus. 39-20033 SH463.G6 A well written and scholarly history of early American fishing, starting with the fishing practices of the Indians. A bibliographical checklist of Amer- ican fishing publications to 1900 is included. 5073. Grey, Zane. Tales of swordfish and tuna. New York, Harper, 1927. 203 p. illus. 27-20012 SH691.S8G7 Zane Grey was a most successful author of West- ern romances; this aspect of his writing is discussed in the Literature section (q. v.) of this bibliography. In later life he wrote a number of autobiographical works on his outdoor activities. Tales of Lonely Trails (New York, Harper, 1922. 394 p.) was largely an account of hunting, camping activities in Arizona. His books on fishing include Tales of Fishes (New York, Harper, 1919. 266 p.), Tales of Fishing Virgin Seas (New York, Harper, 1925. 216 p.), and Tales of Southern Rivers (New York, Harper, 1924. 249 p.). Most of these books were heavily illustrated with photographs taken by the author. An anthology selected from his fishing writings is Zane Grey's Adventures in Fishing (New York, Harper, 1952. 263 p.). 5074. Grey, Zane. Tales of fresh-water fishing. New York, Harper, 1928. 227 p. illus. 28-20833 SH441.G6 5075. Heilner, Van Campen. Salt water fishing. 2d ed., rev. New York, Knopf, 1953. xviii, 330, xxiv p. illus. (Borzoi books for sportsmen) 51-11997 SH457.H43 1953 Bibliography: p. 329-330. An earlier book of fishing experiences by Heilner is Adventures in Angling; a Boof{ of Salt Water Fishing (Cincinnati, Kidd, 1922. 233 p.). 5076. Herbert, Henry William. Frank Forester's Fish and fishing of the United States and British provinces of North America. Illustrated from nature, by Henry William Herbert. New ed., rev. and corr. with an ample supplement by the author, together with a treatise on Fly-fishing, by "Dinks" [pseud.] New York, Woodward, 1859. xxiv, [i7J-5i2 p. 17-20300 SH441.H53 1859 First published, for copyright advantage, in Lon- don in 1849; the first American edition appeared in 1850. 431240—60- -46 698 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Herbert (1807-1858) came to New York from England in 1831. In this country he embarked on a career as educator, editor, journalist, novelist, artist, historian, poet, translator, and naturalist. Of his "literary" accomplishments he was proud; but his less favored sports writing he published under the pseudonym of "Frank Forester." Today he is re- membered almost exclusively for these works, which, in their own category, have become classics. He has been called the Shakespeare of sports writing for his nostalgic picture of field sports (especially hunting) in his day, and for his sports novels, which also present a vivid picture of hunting as a recrea- tion in the middle of the 19th century. The War- wick Woodlands, or, Things as They Were There, Ten Years Ago (Philadelphia, Zieber, 1845. 168 p.) is his masterpiece and the work which has been most reprinted in the ensuing years; a recent edi- tion is cited below. A complete Life and Writings of Fran\ Forester (New York, Orange Judd, 1882) was undertaken, but was never carried beyond the second volume. 5077. Herbert, Henry William. Frank Forester's [pseud.] fugitive sporting sketches; being the miscellaneous articles upon sport and sporting, originally published in the early American maga- zines and periodicals. Edited with a memoir of Herbert, and numerous explanatory notes, by Will Wildwood [pseud, of Frederick E. Pond] Westfield, Wis., 1879. 147 p. 12-22887 SK33.H54 Herbert's early book on hunting and the game birds of North America was American Game in Its Seasons, rev. ed. (New York, Woodward, 1873. 343 p.)., which was first published in 1853. 5078. Herbert, Henry William. Frank Forester's horse and horsemanship of the United States and British provinces of North America. Rev., com, enl., and continued to 1871, by S. D. & B. G. Bruce. New York, Woodward, 1871. 2 v. illus. 12-15989 SF283.H54 Added title-pages, engraved: The horse of America . . . This work was first published in two volumes in 1857 by Stringer and Townsend in New York. 5079. Herbert, Henry William. Frank Forester [pseud.] on upland shooting; edited, and with supplementary chapters, by Arthur] R. Bever- ley-Giddings. New York, Morrow, 1951. 276 p. illus. 51-7267 SK324.U6H4 A selection of chapters from The Complete Man- ual for Young Sportsmen . . . (New York, Stringer & Townsend, 1856. 480 p.) and Fran\ Forester's Field Sports of the United States and British Prov- inces of North America, 8th ed. [rev.] (New York, Townsend, 1858. 2 v.), which was first published in Great Britain in 1848 and in the United States in 1849. 5080. Herbert, Henry William. [The sporting novels of Frank Forester [pseud.] The Hitch- cock ed.] New York, Derrydale Press, 1930. 4 v. CtY A modern, fine press reprint edition of 750 copies. This corresponds to the earlier, typographically and editorially poorer, "omnibus" edition of the same works in Fran\ Forester's Sporting Scenes and Characters (Philadelphia, Peterson, 1881. 2 v.). Contents. — v. 1. The Warwick Woodlands (1845). — v. 2. My Shooting Box (1843). — v. 3. The Quorndon Hounds (1852). — v. 4. The Deerstalkers (1843). Henry William Herbert, Frank Forester, by Harry Worcester Smith. 5081. Holder, Charles Frederick. Big game at sea. New York, Outing Pub. Co., 1908. xv, 352 p. illus. 8-9755 SH441.H73 The author discusses deep sea fishing, the game fish, and his personal experiences. The chapters originally appeared as articles in various periodicals. 5082. Holder, Charles Frederick. Life in the open; sport with rod, gun, horse, and hound in southern California. New York, Putnam, 1906. xv, 401 p. illus., 66 plates. 6-12862 SK55.H72 An account of some of the author's hunting and fishing experiences. 5083. Holder, Charles Frederick. The log of a sea angler; sport and adventures in many seas with spear and rod. Boston, Houghton Mif- flin, 1906. 385 p. 6-8761 SH441.H75 Considered by some to be one of the truly out- standing books in the literature of angling. The first 12 chapters are drawn from the author's "ex- periences during a continuous residence of five or six years, winter and summer, on the extreme southwestern portion of the Florida reef, where Loggerhead looks into the west." Later chapters describe fishing among the islands "strung along the coast of Southern California, a chalice of emer- alds in settings of silver," off Cape Cod, and for tarpon near the mouth of the Rio Grande. 5084. Holder, Charles Frederick. Recreations of a sportsman on the Pacific coast. New York, Putnam, 1910. 399 p. illus. 10-11406 SH473.H75 The author recounts deep-sea and inland fishing experiences. SPORTS AND RECREATION / 699 5085. Lytle, John Horace. "Point!" [by] Horace Lytle. Harrisburg, Pa., Stackpole, 1954. 232 p. illus. 54-12762 SK17.L9A3 An autobiographical work by an Ohio hunter and hunting-dog fancier; the book is largely an account of his experiences with his dogs. 5086. Prime, William C. I go a-fishing, by W. C. Prime. New York, Harper, 1873. 365 p. 12-21568 SH441.P95 1873 Prime (1825- 1905) was a meditative New York lawyer and scholar who loved to wander among northeastern hills while fishing or hunting, or just walking. His books include Along New England Roads (New York, Harper, 1892. 200 p.) and Among the Northern Hills (New York, Harper, 1895. 209 p.). 5087. Rutledge, Archibald H. Wild life of the South. New York, Frederick A. Stokes, IQ 35- 253 p. illus. 3&-VP9* QH81.R9783 Archibald Rudedge (b. 1883) comes from a low country area, formerly a rice plantation, in South Carolina; this he usually uses as a setting for his writings. Some of his best work is that of a nature lover and hunter describing his hunting experiences and the woods and swamplands, with much atten- tion given to the animals inhabiting them; these books include Plantation Game Trails (Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1921. 300 p.), Days Off in Dixie (Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, Page, 1924. 298 p.), and Children of Swamp and Wood (Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, Page, 1927. 280 p.). Further aspects of life on his plantation are treated in the short stories of Old Plantation Days (New York, Stokes, 1921. 344 p.) and the somewhat sentimental Peace in the Heart (Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, Doran, 1930. 316 p.). Home by the River (Indianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill, 1941. 167 p.) records Rudedge 's experiences and observations at, as well as some of the historical background of, the family plantation at Hampton, S. C. Rudedge has also written much conservative poetry, a recent volume of selections being Brimming Tide, and Other Poems ([Westwood, N. J.] Revell, 1954. 160 p.). 5088. Rutledge, Archibald H. An American hunter. New York, Stokes, 1937. 461 p. illus. 37-339 16 SK33.R77 5089. Rutledge, Archibald H. Hunter's choice. New York, Barnes, 1946. 210 p. illus. Agr 47-163 SK33.R78 1946 5090. Rutledge, Archibald H. Those were the days. Richmond, Dietz Press, 1955. 462 p. 56-707 SK33.R85 An autobiographical book emphasizing the author's hunting and fishing experiences early in the 20th century. 5091. Sandys, Edwyn. Sporting Sketches. New York, Macmillan, 1905. 389 p. illus. 5-29978 SK31.S3 Sketches of hunting and fishing at the turn of the century; many of the articles first appeared in Out- ing. Another book by Sandys recording much per- sonal experience is Upland Game Birds (New York, Macmillan, 1902. 429 p.); to this T. S. Van Dyke (q. v.) contributed a short concluding section on "The Quail and the Grouse of the Pacific Coast." 5092. Schaldach, William J. Coverts and casts; field sports and angling in words and pic- tures. New York, Barnes, 1943. 138 p. illus. 43-18352 SK33.S35 5093. Schaldach, William J. Currents & eddies; chips from the log of an artist-angler. New York, Barnes, 1944. 138 p. illus. Agr 45-101 SH441.S35 Both books are mainly a presentation of auto- biographical anecdotes about the pleasures of fish- ing. Schaldach, long associated with Field and Stream, was both an artist and a writer, as well as an outdoors sportsman. His work dealt with the hunting and fishing that fascinated him. 5094. Smith, Onnie Warren. Musings of an ang- ler, by O. Warren Smith. New York, Barnes, 1942. xv, 187 p. illus. 42-10914 SH441.S65 Smith (1872-1941) was fishing editor of Out- doors. A conscious follower of Walton and Prime, he did not "merely fish for fish"; his writings were an attempt to present the "aesthetic" rather than the scientific and technical aspects of fishing. 5095. Van Dyke, Henry. Little rivers. A book of essays in profitable idleness. New York, Scribner, 1895. 291 p. illus. 14-1080 PS3117.L5 1895 5096. Van Dyke, Henry. Fisherman's luck and some other uncertain things. New York, Scribner, 1899. 247 p. illus. 99-5146 PS3117.F5 1899 Van Dyke was a clergyman, and later a professor at Princeton University. His many books, which were popular in his own day, included Victorian verse and criticism, travel books, and volumes of 700 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES essays, such as Days Off, and Other Digressions (New York, Scribner, 1907. 322 p.). Because of his interest in Europe and his wide travels, his books are seldom exclusively American in subject matter; but they do reflect the relative commonplace of the much-traveled American of the late 19th and early 20th centuries. The first book entered above views rivers mainly as places for fishing. 5097. Wylie, Philip. Denizens of the deep; true tales of deep-sea fishing. New York, Rine- hart, 1953. 222 p. 53—9238 SH457.W88 Stories of deep-sea fishing and fish by a forceful author who has devoted much of his time to the sport of fishing. He is widely known for his popu- lar novels which are discussed in the Literature sec- tion of this bibliography. XXI Education 4 A. C. D. E. F. G. H. General Worlds Ai. Historical and Descriptive Aii. Philosophical and Theoretical Primary and Secondary Schools Bi. General and Historical Worlds Bii. Preschool and Primary Grades Biii. Secondary Schools Colleges and Universities Ci. General and Historical Worlds Cii. Individual Institutions Education of Special Groups Teachers and Teaching Methods and Techniques Contemporary Problems and Controversies Periodicals and Yearbooks 5098-5 i 14 51 15-5130 5 13 1-5 146 5147-515 1 5 152-5 159 5 1 60-5 1 90 5 19 1-5204 5205-5212 5213-5223 5224-5231 5232-5239 5240-5249 IT HAS been said truly that education is an essential part of the lifeblood of a democracy. Without its benefits citizens cannot participate usefully in the duties and responsibilities that devolve upon them under this form of government; nor can competent leaders of the people be developed without the wisdom and understanding that characterize the properly informed and educated mind. Throughout the course of the country's history the American people have proved their acceptance of such ideas by developing various types of schools, colleges, and universities, as the need for them has been understood. One result of this continuing national interest in education is an enormous body of literature that has been produced at an increasing rate, with the passage of the years and the growth of the population to be educated. Such a mass of material on the subject poses a difficult problem of selection within the proper compass of a guide. The aim, therefore, in assembling the references that follow has been neces- sarily only to illustrate typical categories under which the subject may be studied and to provide general orientation rather than inclusive treatment of any topic. To the student of American civilization who is interested in education only as a facet of the whole culture, Section A is particularly addressed. It should be noted here that a number of tides included in Section Aii, such as nos. 51 16 and 5121, are actually histories of educational philosophy or edu- cational theory, and therefore might, with equal justification, have been placed in Section Ai. Sec- tions B and C are designed to serve as an introduc- tion to the principal types of educational institutions developed in the United States, while Section D indi- cates selected cases in which specialized education is provided either within or without the bounds of the more traditional institutions. The opportunities and experiences of the teacher in American society are briefly touched upon in Section E. A population growing as rapidly as that of the 701 702 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES United States, and also one increasingly aware of the many benefits of education, has contributed to greatly increased enrollments in and demands upon all types of educational institutions. Overcrowding, inadequate financial resources, and the requirements of students drawn from groups lacking homogene- ous experience and training are among the un- fortunate effects of this otherwise desirable influx. In order to meet resulting problems, traditional theories and practices have been reviewed, and, in many cases, principally on the elementary and sec- ondary school levels, revolutionary innovations in methods and techniques have been introduced. An unusual number of textbooks in which these newer concepts are embodied are therefore included in this list, to serve as primary sources for the study of controversial as well as traditional ideas presendy at work. Sections F and G focus attention upon these aspects of the contemporary American scene. Section H provides a brief list of periodicals and yearbooks which may be used for keeping abreast of American education as it develops currently and in the future. Throughout the list entries have been annotated to indicate additional sources of bibliographical guid- ance contained within individual volumes. It is hoped that in this way the serious student may be aided in extending his exploration of the relation of education to the development of American civili- zation. A. General Works Ai. HISTORICAL AND DESCRIPTIVE 5098. Alexander, Carter, and Arvid J. Burke. How to locate educational information and data; an aid to quick utilization of the literature of education. 3d ed., rev. and enl. New York, Bu- reau of Publications, Teachers College, Columbia University, 1950. xix, 441 p. 50-7005 Z711.A37 1950 Includes bibliographies. Manual, which may also be used as a textbook, designed for students desiring to explore the litera- ture of education through the use of library collec- tions and reference books. 5099. Allen, Hollis P. The Federal Government and education. New York, McGraw-Hill, 1950. xvii, 333 p. (McGraw-Hill series in edu- cation) 50-6536 LC89.A6 The original and complete study of education in the United States, on all levels from primary to graduate, made by the task force on public welfare for the Commission on Organization of the Execu- tive Branch of the Government, popularly known as the Hoover Commission, the object being to deter- mine the proper role of government in education. Dawson W. Hales' Federal Control of Public Edu- cation (New York, Bureau of Publications, Teachers College, Columbia University, 1954. 144 p.) re- considers the principle of local control of public education in the light of forces now at work in contemporary American life and culture. 5100. American Council of Learned Societies. Liberal educadon reexamined; its role in a democracy. New York, Harper, 1943. xiv, 134 p. 43-51269 LC189.A512 A preliminary draft was issued in 1940 under tide: Liberal Education and Democracy. Bibliography: p. 121-134. Report of a committee appointed in 1940 by the American Council of Learned Societies to investi- gate recent educational trends in the humanities and to consider the causes responsible for them on all levels of school and university; prepared under the direction of the chairman, Theodore M. Greene, professor of philosophy, at Princeton and later at Yale University. Liberal Education Reconsidered (Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1953. 46 p.) is Professor Greene's Inglis Lecture at Harvard (1952) on desirable goals for liberal education and methods of achieving them. 5101. Burns, James A. The Catholic school sys- tem in the United States; its principles, origin, and establishment. New York, Benziger, 1908. 415 p. 8-18343 LC501.B7 Bibliography: p. [387H99. Covers the history of the Catholic school and col- lege movement from its beginning in colonial times through the year 1840; addressed to all students of education, whether Catholic or non-Catholic. 5102. Burns, James A. The growth and develop- ment of the Catholic school system in the United States. New York, Benziger, 1912. 421 p. 12-22334 LC501.B72 Bibliography: p. 382-390. Continuation of the author's earlier work, with emphasis on improvement and development; written by a former president of the theological school of the Congregation of the Holy Cross, Holy Cross College, Washington, D. C. EDUCATION / 703 5103. Butts, R. Freeman. The American tradition in religion and education. Boston, Beacon Press, 1950. xiv, 230 p. (Beacon Press studies in freedom and power) 50-7586 BR516.B85 Bibliographical references to books and docu- ments included in "Notes": p. 213-224. Supplies a historical perspective on the struggle for the separation of church and state in America. Fundamental principles of secular education are also reviewed and appraised in Vivian T. Thayer's The Attach Upon the American Secular School (Boston, Beacon Press, 1951. 257 p.). Church, State, and Freedom, by Leo Pfeffer (Boston, Beacon Press, 1953. 675 p.), examines the implications and con- sequences of religious freedom for which the Con- stitution of the United States provides, giving much attention to the impact of the doctrine on American education. An encyclopedic work on all aspects of the relation of church and state in America, includ- ing educational aspects of the problems involved, is provided in Anson Phelps Stokes' Church and State in the United States (q. v.). 5 104. Butts, R. Freeman, and Lawrence A. Cremin. A history of education in American culture. New York, Holt, 1953. 628 p. 52-13892 LA205.B88 Deals with the interrelation of American culture, intellectual development, and education during four periods: Colonial, pre-Civil War, post-Civil War, and post-World War I; suggests applications to be made to contemporary educational problems; and documents each chapter by means of bibliographical references at the end. The authors are members of the faculty of Teachers College, Columbia University. Harold O. Rugg's Foundations for American Edu- cation ( Yonkers-on-Hudson, N. Y., World Book Co., 1947. 826 p.) is a strongly individual and personal book that ranges freely over American life, culture, psychological theories, and modern educational movements, progressive as well as traditional. 5105. Douglass, Aubrey A. The American school system. Rev. ed. New York, Farrar & Rinehart, 1940. xviii, 745 p. (Farrar & Rinehart series in education) 40-12406 LA210.D6 1940 Bibliography at end of each chapter. Surveys the system of education that operates in the United States on various levels from kinder- garten to graduate school; additional chapters deal with questions related to adult, rural, and vocational education, the instructional staff, finances, etc. 5106. Educational Policies Commission. Policies for education in American democracy. Washington, Educational Policies Commission, Na- tional Education Association of the United States and the American Association of School Admin- istrators, 1946. 277 p. 46-3664 LA210.E464 The Commission acknowledges indebtedness to Charles A. Beard for preparing the first draft of Book I, The Unique Function of Education in Amer- ican Democracy ( 1937); to Dr. George S. Counts for aid in the preparation of Book II, The Education of Free Men in American Democracy (1941); and to Dr. William G. Carr for contributing to the com- position of Book III, The Purposes of Education in American Democracy (1938). Three publications influential on American educational thinking here reprinted in their essential parts in response to nu- merous requests. Cf. Foreword. The Educational Policies Commission, a commis- sion of the National Education Association of the United States and the American Association of School Administrators, has issued various other pub- lications that treat of education in relation to Amer- ican civilization. These include: Learning the Ways of Democracy (1940. 486 p.); Moral and Spiritual Values in the Public Schools (1951. 100 p.); Edu- cation for All American Youth, rev. ed. (1952. 402 p.); and Public Education and the Future of America (1955. 98 p.). 5107. General education in school and college; a committee report by members of the faculties of Andover, Exeter, Lawrenceville, Harvard, Prince- ton, and Yale. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1952. 142 p. 52-13591 LB2350.G45 "The broad purpose of this study is to integrate the work of the school and college in the area of general education. More precisely, it is to plan the last two years of secondary school and the first two years of college as a continuous process, conceived as a whole." — Chapter 1, "Main Objectives," p. 8. 5108. Knight, Edgar W. Education in the United States. 3d rev. ed. Boston, Ginn, 1951. 753 p. 51-10341 LA205.K6 1951 Covers all periods from the beginning to the mid- dle of the 20th century and provides a general bibliography supplemented by suggested readings listed at the ends of chapters; written by the Kenan Professor of Education at the University of North Carolina, whose various works on American educa- tion include: Readings in American Educational History (New York, Appleton-Century-Crofts, 1951. 781 p.), a documentary source book for all periods, edited jointly with Clifton L. Hall; Fifty Years of American Education (New York, Ronald Press, 1952. 484 p.), a review and appraisal of education from 1900 to 1950; and A Documentary History of Education in the South before i860 (Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina Press, 1949-53. 5 v «)> 704 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES a compilation designed to gather and preserve original sources for definitive studies. 5109. Lee, Gordon C. An introduction to educa- tion in modern America. New York, Holt, IQ 53- .555 P-. 52-11594 LA209.2.L43 Bibliographical references are supplied at the ends of chapters. Textbook on education as a social institution, for students contemplating a career in teaching; designed also as a guide for the layman seeking an introduction to American education in the context of contemporary world conditions; written by an as- sociate professor of education on the faculty of Pomona College, California. 51 10. Monroe, Paul, ed. A cyclopedia of educa- tion. New York, Macmillan, 1911-13. 5 V. illus. 11-1511 LB15.M6 Reprint. New York, Macmillan, 1914-15. 5 v. illus. 39-19604 LB15.M6 1914 Reprint. New York, Macmillan, 1926-28 [v. 1-2, 1928] 5 v. in 3. illus. 30—33076 LB15.M6 1928 Much out of date at the present time but still his- torically important for its bibliographies and for authoritative signed articles by more than 1,000 specialists who contributed to it; world-wide in scope, with special emphasis on American education. 51 1 1. Monroe, Walter S., ed. Encyclopedia of educational research, a project of the Ameri- can Educational Research Association. Rev. ed. New York, Macmillan, 1950. xxvi, 1520 p. 50-5222 LB15.M62 1950 Differs from the typical encyclopedia in that it is composed of reviews, evaluations, and syntheses of the literature of educational research. Includes use- ful signed articles by specialists, fairly extensive se- lective bibliographies, and indications of additional research that should be undertaken. For a current guide to similar research, see the Review of Educa- tional Research, described in Section H below, devoted to Periodicals and Yearbooks. 5112. Patterson's American education, v. 52. Willmette, 111., Educational Directories, 1955. 652, 72 p. 4~ I2 953 L9oi.P3,v.52 Published 1904 through 1953 as Patterson's Amer- ican Educational Directory; guide to the location and composition of schools, colleges, and universities. Highly condensed entries also provide names of administrators, officials of boards of education, li- brarians, and others engaged in educational work in America. Several supplementary lists include names of public libraries, names of educational associations and societies, and a classified directory of institutions according to their fields of specialization. Con- tinued by the publication of an annual volume. 51 13. Slosson, Edwin E. The American spirit in education. New Haven, Yale University Press, 1921. 309 p. (The Chronicles of America series, Allen Johnson, editor, v. 33) 21-14875 LA205.S6 E173.C55, v. 33 "Abraham Lincoln edition." "Bibliographical note": p. 287-290. Compact historical survey of education from the colonial period through World War I; emphasizes early education given in different sections and the continuing influence of statesmen and educators who contributed to the theory and practice of education in America; includes a chapter on colonial colleges and one on the [Morrill] Land Grant Act. 51 14. U. S. Office of Education. Biennial survey of education in the United States, 1916/18 + Washington, U. S. Govt. Print. Off., 1921 + E2 1-504 LA209.A37 Issued first as separate chapters and reissued bi- ennially as a survey. Constitutes a repository of statistics, accompanied by summaries, relating to various phases of state and city school systems, higher education, public secondary day schools, and special education for exceptional children. From 1916/ 18 to 1940 the publication appeared as part of the Bulletin of the United States Office of Education. Aii. PHILOSOPHICAL AND THEORETICAL 51 15. Babbitt, Irving. Literature and the Ameri- can college; essays in defense of the humani- ties. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1908. 262 p. 8-8540 LC1011.B2 Partial Contents. — What is humanism? — The college and the democratic spirit. — Literature and the college. — Literature and the doctor's degree. — The rational study of the classics. — Academic leisure. Document of the movement in American educa- tion familiarly known as the "New Humanism"; written by its leading exponent, who opposed the philological emphasis then current in American literary scholarship and advocated a humanistic ap- proach that brought together for study the great ideas found in the content of philosophical as well as literary works. 5 1 16. Curti, Merle E. The social ideas of Amer- ican educators. New York, Scribner, 1935. EDUCATION / 705 xxii, 613 p. (Report of the Commission on the So- cial Studies, American Historical Association, pt. 10) 35-4578 LA2311.C8 "Bibliographical notes": p. 593-600. Educators whose social ideas are considered in- clude: Horace Mann, Henry Barnard, Booker T. Washington, G. Stanley Hall, William James, Ed- ward L. Thorndike, and John Dewey. The colo- nial and Revolutionary backgrounds, the education of women, the schools and business enterprise, edu- cation in the South, and the education of Negroes are among the topics developed. 51 17. Dewey, John. The school and society. Rev. ed. Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1945. 164 p. 15-18118 LB875.D4 1915 First published in 1899. Lectures delivered to raise money for the Labora- tory School (called also the "Dewey School") con- ducted 1 896-1904 in the Department of Pedagogy of the University of Chicago, for the purpose of providing good elementary education and of adding equipment to facilities for the study of education comparable to those available in laboratories to teachers of the physical sciences; inspired numerous changes and reforms in the teaching of children in widely separated parts of the world. 51 18. Dewey, John. Democracy and education; an introduction to the philosophy of educa- tion. New York, Macmillan, 1929. xii, 434 p. (Textbook series in education) 30-10933 LB875.D35 1929 "Published March 1916. Reprinted . . . Janu- ary 1929." Represents "an endeavor to detect and state the ideas implied in a democratic society and to apply these ideas to the problems of the enterprise of education." — Preface, p. v. 51 19. Dewey, John. Experience and education. New York, Macmillan, 1938. xii, 116 p. (The Kappa Delta Pi lecture series [no. 10] ) 38-8618 LB875.D3943 Written a number of years after the first formu- lation of the author's theories of education, the book may be used to discover differences existing between Dewey's own ideas and the deductions drawn from them by some of those who sought to apply them. 5120. Dewey, John. Education today. Edited and with a foreword by Joseph Ratner. New York, Putnam, 1940. 373 p. 40-31507 LB875.D39 Collection of the author's briefer writings dealing with his philosophy of education during more than 40 years. John Dewey, His Contribution to the American Tradition, edited by Irwin Edman (In- dianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill, 1955. 322 p.), provides another more general collection of selections from the enormous body of Dewey's writings. Melvin C. Baker's Foundations of John Dewey's Educational Theory (New York, King's Crown Press, Columbia University, 1955. 218 p.) not only reviews Dewey's educational thought but also considers misunder- standings of it. 5121. Hansen, Allen O. Liberalism and Ameri- can education in the eighteenth century. With an introd. by Edward H. Reisner. New York, Macmillan, 1926. xxv, 317 p. 26-18069 LA206.H3 Issued also as thesis (Ph. D.) Columbia Univer- sity. Bibliography: p. 265-296. Designed "to be both an exposition of sources and a source book," the work presents analyses of vari- ous plans for education in 18th-century America, including those of Benjamin Rush, Robert Coram, James Sullivan, Nathaniel Chipman, Samuel Knox, Samuel H. Smith, Lafitte du Courteil, Du Pont de Nemours, and Noah Webster; concludes with a summary of elements in the philosophical basis for the education of the period. A contribution to the history of education in the 19th century is made by the author's Early Educational Leadership in the Ohio Valley (Bloomington, 111., Public School Pub. Co., 1923. 120 p.), a study of educational recon- struction through the work of the Western Literary Institute and College of Professional Teachers, 1829- 1841. 5122. Honeywell, Roy J. The educational work of Thomas Jefferson. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 193 1. xvi, 295 p. (Harvard studies in education, v. 16) 31-11362 E332.H77 Authorities and sources: p. 174-197. Bibliography: p. 289-295. Views Jefferson's proposals for primary, second- ary, and higher education as parts of his larger plans for political and social reform; emphasizes their importance because of the wide dissemination of Jefferson's ideas; reproduces the texts of his famous educational documents, among them "A Bill for the More General Diffusion of Knowledge"; "A Bill for Establishing a System of Public Educa- tion"; "Report of the Commissioners Appointed to Fix the Site of the University of Virginia"; and "Or- ganization and Government of the University of Virginia." Charles F. Arrowood's Thomas Jeffer- son and Education in a Republic (New York, Me Graw-Hill, 1930. 184 p.) also reprints a number of Jefferson's writings on education preceded by .1 yo6 I A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES briefer introduction on his services to public educa- tion in Virginia and on his theory of education. 5123. James, William. Talks to teachers on psy- chology. New ed. with an introd. by John Dewey and William H. Kilpatrick. New York, Holt, 1938. xv, 238 p. 39-27497 LB1051.J34 1939 American educational and literary classic, in which James presented to the teachers of his own time, for use in the schools of that day, ideas con- cerning applications of his own psychological theories. First published in 1899. 5124. Kallen, Horace M. The education of free men. New York, Farrar, Straus, 1949. xix, 332 p. 49-49023 LB875.K16 Called by the author "an essay towards a philosophy of education for Americans," the work is based on years of inquiry and is dedicated to the ideal of making American schools effective agencies for developing and preserving the freedoms promised in the Declaration of Independence. 5125. [Mann, Horace. Public education in Mas- sachusetts] In Massachusetts. Board of Education. Report, together with the report of the secretary of the board. ist-i2th. Boston, Dutton & Wentworth, State Printers, 1838-49. [Washington, 1947-52] 12 v. 53-18466 L160.B18 Facsimile edition of Mann's reports while secre- tary of the Massachusetts Board of Education, made possible through a cooperative arrangement between the Horace Mann League and the Hugh Birch- Horace Mann Fund of the National Education Association. Famous documentary source for evaluating Mann's contribution to public education in Amer- ica; may be used to advantage with Burke A. Hins- dale's Horace Mann and the Common School Revival in the United States (New York, Scribner, 1898. 326 p. [Also published in 1937]). Louise Hall Tharp's Until Victory: Horace Mann and Mary Peabody (Boston, Little, Brown, 1953. 367 p.) is a lively narrative of Mann's public and private life, including his presidency of Antioch College. Ed- ward I. F. Williams' Horace Mann, Educational Statesman (New York, Macmillan, 1937. 367 p.) emphasizes, against the social background of Mann's own time, his importance in the development of a democratic America, for the benefit of teachers, ad- ministrators, parents, and the general public. 5126. Mosier, Richard D. Making the American mind; social and moral ideas in the McGuf- fey readers. New York, King's Crown Press, 1947. 207 p. 47-5812 PE1117.M23M6 Bibliography: p. [i79]-204. Studies the basic ideas and values embodied in materials found in the McGuffey readers, the spread of these concepts by means of these textbooks, and the effects on American culture, from 1836 to about 1900, that may be attributable to wide familiarity with the readers. 5127. Shoemaker, Ervin C. Noah Webster, pio- neer of learning. New York, Columbia University Press, 1936. 347 p. 36-22936 PE64.W5S5 1936a Issued also as thesis (Ph. D.) Columbia University. Bibliography: p. [3I7J-33I. Assesses Webster's general connection with Amer- ican education and particularly the great influence exerted on the teaching of reading and the develop- ment of American English by his American Spelling Boo\, first issued in 1783 as part one of his A Gram- matical Institute ( 1783-85). The spelling book was republished in successive editions that resulted, ac- cording to various estimates, in the circulation of between 62 and 80 million copies before 1889. Harry R. Warfel's Noah Webster: Schoolmaster to America (New York, Macmillan, 1936. 460 p.) emphasizes Webster's importance for the study of early national culture. The Letters of Noah Web- ster (New York, Library Publishers, 1953. 562 p.) have been edited with an introduction by Warfel. 5128. Thursfield, Richard E. Henry Barnard's American journal of education. Baltimore, Johns Hopkins Press, 1945. 359 p. (The Johns Hopkins University studies in historical and political science, ser. 63, no. 1 ) A46-2670 H31.J6, ser. 63, no. 1 L11A715 1945a Issued also as thesis (Ph. D.) Columbia Uni- versity. "Bibliographical note": p. 327-329. "The present investigation attempts to portray the tremendous contributions [of the journal pub- lished from 1855 to 1882] ... in the development of a profession, in the transmission of educational ideas from Europe, in expanding and shaping the eclectic structure of American education, in con- tinuing and modifying the American educational tradition, and in effecting social change." — Preface, p. 7. 5129. Whitehead, Alfred N. The aims of educa- tion. New York, Macmillan, 1929. 247 p. 29-10164 LB875.W48 Collected educational essays and addresses of one of the most eminent philosophers and mathemati- cians of recent times; designed as a protest against teaching and learning inert ideas, i. e., those received but not tested or acted upon. Provides also a series EDUCATION / 707 of proposals concerning the use of education to stimulate and guide the student's own self-develop- ment. Discussion is based on English educational practices, but the author considered his general prin- ciples equally applicable in America. A book seri- ously considered by American educators. 5130. Woody, Thomas, ed. Educational views of Benjamin Franklin. New York, McGraw- Hill, 1931. xvi, 270 p. (McGraw-Hill education classics) 31-12966 LB575.F72W6 Discusses the origin and influence of Franklin's ideas on education. Includes reprints of various papers he wrote on the subject, as for example: "idea of the English School"; "Proposals Relating to the Education of Youth in Pennsylvania"; and "Constitution of the Public Academy in the City of Philadelphia." Benjamin Franklin and the Uni- versity of Pennsylvania (Washington, Govt. Print. Off., 1893. 450 p.), edited by Francis N. Thorpe for the United States Bureau of Education, is a study of Franklin's influence on university education. B. Primary and Secondary Schools Bi. GENERAL AND HISTORICAL WORKS 5131. Aikin, Wilford M. The story of the eight- year study, with conclusions and recom- mendations. New York, Harper, 1942. 157 p. ( [Progressive Education Association. Commission on the Relation of School and College] Adventure in American education, v. 1) 42-36126 LB2350.A5 Half-tide: Progressive Education Association. Publications . . • Adventure in American Education (New York, Harper, 1942-43. 5 v.), of which Aikin's work is the summary in volume 1, gives results of an in- vestigation of 30 secondary schools for the purpose of achieving a better integration of training in school and college; undertakes also to determine the rela- tive success in college of students trained in pro- gressive and in traditional schools. The larger work has been called "the most elaborate investigation ever made of transition from school to college," a contribution of the Commission on the Relation of School and College, of the American Education Fellowship, a name once used by the Progressive Education Association. 5132. Beale, Howard K. Are American teachers free? New York, Scribner, 1936. xxiv, 855 p. (Report of the Commission on the social studies, American Historical Association, pt. 12) 36-30655 LA210.B4 Bibliography: p. 793-800. 5133. Beale, Howard K. A history of freedom of teaching in American schools. New York, Scribner, 1941. xviii, 343 p. (Report of the Com- mission on the Social Studies, American Historical Association, pt. 16) 41-5920 LB1775.B4 Bibliography: p. 291-298. The foregoing entries describe two companion studies that deal with academic freedom below the college level. The earlier book resulted from a de- tailed investigation of freedom in teaching after World War I; the later publication traces the de- velopment of freedom for teachers from colonial to contemporary times. In each case obstacles to such freedom also are emphasized. For references con- cerning academic freedom in higher education see entries for a book by Richard Hofstadter and Walter P. Metzger, with its companion volume by Robert M. Maclver, both cited in Section Ci., devoted to Colleges and Universities — General Works. 5134. Conant, James B. Education in a divided world; the function of the public schools in our unique society. Cambridge, Harvard Univer- sity Press, 1948. x, 249 p. 48-8522 LA209.2.C6 Examination of public education in the structure of American society; emphasizes the citizen's obli- gation to know the schools in action and to consider the teacher's potential contribution to the welfare of the nation. Includes three chapters on general education. One of the author's many educational contributions while he was president of Harvard University ( 1933-53 )• A later work, Education and Liberty; the Role of the Schools in a Modern Democracy (Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1953. 168 p.), is focused on education of boys and girls from 12 to 20 years of age through a comparison of such education in the United States with that of several nations in the British Commonwealth; includes a chapter on the American college. 5135. Council of State Governments. The forty- eight State school systems. Chicago, 1949. 245 p. 49-45258 LB2805.C66 Report of a study made at the request of the Gov- 708 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES ernors' Conference; deals with the organization, ad- ministration, and financing of public elementary and secondary education. Similar aspects of higher edu- cation are treated in a report to the Governors' Con- ference entitled Higher Education in the Forty- Eight States (Chicago, 1952. 317 p.). 5136. Counts, George S. Education and Ameri- can civilization. New York, Bureau of Publications, Teachers College, Columbia Univer- sity, 1952. xii, 491 p. 52-9979 LA210.C63 Includes bibliographical footnotes. Based on research initiated by the staff of the Horace Mann-Lincoln Institute School of Experi- mentation, established at Columbia University in 1943; develops fundamental ideas of the American social heritage, the hazards implicit in totalitarian states for democratic societies, and the type of edu- cation that may help to combat tendencies dangerous for a free people; a work which has been called "essentially a study of the social, cultural, and moral foundations of the program and curriculum of our American common schools." — Preface, p. ix. 5137. Cremin, Lawrence A. The American com- mon school. New York, Bureau of Publi- cations, Teachers College, Columbia University, 1951. xi, 248 p. (Teachers College studies in education) 51-10599 LA215.C7 Bibliography: p. 222-241. The origins of American political, social, and educational ideas, their impact on one another, and the developments that resulted in the evolution of the public school are considered from the colonial period to the middle of the 19th century. 5138. Cubberley, Ellwood P. Public education in the United States, a study and interpretation of American educational history. Rev. and enl. ed. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1934. xviii, 782 p. illus. (Riverside textbooks in education) 34-2426 LA205.C8 1934 Bibliographies at end of each chapter. Traces evolution of public education in relation to social, political, and industrial forces that shaped American life through the 19th century and the be- ginning of the 20th. A special feature of the work is the evaluative annotations supplied with numer- ous selected references at the ends of chapters. His Readings in Public Education (Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1934. 534 p.) reprints laws and other documents signficant in American educational history. 5139. Edwards, Newton. The courts and the public schools. Rev. ed. Chicago, Uni- versity of Chicago Press, 1955. xvii, 622 p. 55-5122 Law Views the maintenance and operation of the school system as one of the major public enterprises of the United States; therefore, the legal principles that govern the actions of school boards, superin- tendents of schools, principals, and teachers are discussed and documented by numerous legal refer- ences to specific cases tried in the courts. The book is an outgrowth of a course in the legal and consti- tutional basis of school administration, given for a number of years by the author at the University of Chicago. 5140. Edwards, Newton, and Herman G. Richey. The school in the American social order. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1947. 880 p. 47-435.1 LA205.E3 Education in American schools is related to the civilization of which the schools are a product and a part, in three periods of American social development: the colonial, the national to i860, and the industrial, from i860 to 1945. A selected bibli- ography follows each of the 20 chapters. 5141. Hales, Dawson W. Federal control of pub- lic education; a critical appraisal. New York, Bureau of Publications, Teachers College, Columbia University, 1954. xiii, 144 p. (Teachers College studies in education) 54-7225 LC89.H22 Based on the author's thesis, Columbia University, published in microfilm form under title: The Rise of Federal Control in American Education. Bibliography: p. 125-135. Traces local, state, and federal control of educa- tion in relation to the history of public education in the United States, from 1830 to the present time. 5142. Herrick, Virgil E., and others. The ele- mentary school. Englewood Cliffs, N. J., Prentice-Hall, 1956. 474 p. 56-9212 LB1555.H46 "This book has five major purposes: (1) to help the reader appreciate the historical breadth and con- tinuity of elementary school development in Amer- ica and to perceive pertinent European influences; (2) to present the reader with the concept of the elementary school as a responsible, dynamic agency, educating children in a demanding and complex American society; (3) to reveal the nature and use of the important bases upon which decisions in educa- tion are made; (4) to examine and critically analyze present elementary school practices as they now exist in the different kinds of school programs and in the many important curriculum areas; and (5) to con- sider as honestly and constructively as possible what this analysis means for the future." — Preface. 5143. Monroe, Paul. Founding of the American public school system; a history of education EDUCATION / 709 in the United States, from the early settlements to the close of the Civil War period, v. 1. New York, Macmillan, 1940. xiv, 520 p. illus. 40-27340 LA212.M63 Dr. Monroe, professor of education at Columbia and Barnard and "the dean of American writers in the field of educational history," died in 1947 with- out carrying his story beyond i860. His first chapter describes the European backgrounds of the Ameri- can development, and emphasizes its vocational as well as its religious origins. His narrative docs not attempt a comprehensive social and intellectual synthesis, but limits itself to "the more commonplace idea of education as a school process," relating, how- ever, this development to dominant political and economic forces. For both the colonial and the early national periods, the material is presented under the categories of primary, secondary, and higher educa- tion. The volume is largely based upon a fresh body of primary source material, selections from which, confined to Massachusetts, New York, and Virginia, are contained in a microfilm supplement of Read- ings, reproduced from the author's manuscript and deposited in selected libraries. 5144. Mort, Paul R., and Walter C. Reusser. Pub- lic school finance: its background, structure, and operation. 2d ed. New York, McGraw-Hill, 1951. xxii, 639 p. (McGraw-Hill series in educa- tion) 51-5276 LB2825.M598 1951 Contains bibliographies and technical exercises. Includes three books and four supplements. Rook I emphasizes current fiscal problems "that harass schools and threaten indirectly to bring about un- wanted structural changes"; Book II reflects recent changes on the operational side and deals with budgetary and auditing matters; Book III spells out the pressing problems of state and Federal fiscal policy; part of the contents of the first edition are covered in the four supplements. Cf. Preface to the second edition, p. ix. Much the same ground is covered in Arvid J. Burke's Financing Public Schools in the United States (New York, Harper, 1951. 584 p.). 5145. Page, Walter Hines. The school that built a town; with an introductory chapter by Roy E. Larsen. New York, Harper, 1952. 109 p. 52-8488 F215.P13 1952 Three essays, originally published under the title The Rebuilding of Old Commonwealths, which in- clude: The Forgotten Man (1897) ; The School That Built a Town (1901); and The Rebuilding of Old Commonwealths (1902). Classic statement of the case for public education, particularly in the southern United States, by a no- table journalist and diplomat who received his own education (through undergraduate college) in south- ern institutions. 5146. Warner, William L., Robert J. Havighurst, and Martin B. Loeb. Who shall be edu- cated? The challenge of unequal opportunities. New York, Harper, 1944. xii, 190 p. illus. 44-4389 LA210.W33 Bibliographical references included in footnotes (p. 175-179); Working bibliography: p. 181-186. Two scholars from the University of Chicago and a third from the University of California at Berkeley, representing respectively the fields of anthropology and sociology, education, and child welfare, present the effects of class differences and "caste" systems operating against the use of education in public schools to realize the democratic ideal of equal op- portunity for all members of American society; de- picts conditions before 1945. Bii. PRESCHOOL AND PRIMARY GRADES 5147. Caswell, Hollis L., and A. Wellesley Foshay. Education in the elementary school. 2d ed. New York, American Book Co., 1950. xvii, 406 p. (American education series) 50-13041 LB1555.C35 1950 Presents the elementary school as the central unit in American education from nursery through pro- fessional school; reviews developments that have now culminated after half a century and recognizes contributions made by experimental work in this field. Supplementary readings are suggested after chapters; general references are supplied at the con- clusion of the work, p. 391-392. The first of the two authors is president of Teachers College, Co- lumbia University, and the second is a professor and director of educational research at Ohio State University. 5148. Gans, Roma, Celia Burns Stcndler, and Millie Almy. Teaching young children in nursery school, kindergarten, and the primary grades. Yonkers-on-Hudson, N. Y., World Book Co., 1952. 454 p. (New-World education SCJ 52-1768 LB1140.G26 Covers the education of children between the ages of four and nine; written by three university pro- fessors working in the field, in nontechnical lan- guage for the use of parents, administrative officers of schools, nurses, social workers, and teachers. 5149. Gcsell, Arnold L.. and Frances I.. Dg. Child development, an introduction to the study of human growth. New York, Harper. [949. in 1 (403, 475 p.) illus. 49-50170 1.1-72 1 .( >477 710 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Each volume previously published separately. Includes bibliographies. Contents. — i. Infant and child in the culture of today ( 1943). — 2. The child from five to ten ( 1946). Studies of the understanding, guidance, and psy- chological care of children in a democratic society; used extensively by American parents and teachers. This edition includes the complete text of both earlier volumes, together with an added Foreword by Dr. Gesell, entitled "Child Development and the Science of Man." Dr. Gesell was for many years professor of child hygiene at the Yale School of Medicine. His own researches and those of Dr. Ilg while both were associated in the Clinic of Child Development at Yale provide the basis for much of the two studies. 5150. National Society for the Study of Education. Committee on Early Childhood Education. Early childhood education. Edited by Nelson B. Henry. Chicago, National Society for the Study of Education; distributed by the University of Chicago Press, 1947. xii, 390 p. (National Society for the Study of Education. Yearbook, 46th, pt. 2) 6-16938 LB5.N25, 46th yearbook, pt. 2 Composed of a series of articles by individual specialists or groups of specialists; concerned par- ticularly with the sociological background of pri- mary education, with child development, and with progress and application of knowledge in this branch of education; includes numerous lists of books recommended for reading. 5 15 1. Otto, Henry J. Elementary -school organiza- tion and administration. 3d ed. New York, Appleton-Century-Crofts, 1954. 719 p. 54-5214 LB2805.O76 1954 The author, graduate professor of elementary ad- ministration and curriculum, University of Texas, addresses his book to administrators of and teachers in American elementary schools; a historical and statistical study of fundamental aspects of this seg- ment of education; extensively documented by means of numerous footnotes. not been superseded; written by a former United States Commissioner of Education. 5153. Chisholm, Leslie L. The work of the modern high school. New York, Macmillan, 1953. 542 p. 53~ I 883 LB1607.C47 Written to develop a clear understanding of each part of the modern secondary school in the United States, the work is divided into four parts: (1) the place of education in American life; (2) the content of what should be taught; (3) the program that is in harmony with the needs of youth today; and (4) the plan of action that may be followed in build- ing a good educational program. References to per- tinent publications are provided at the end of each chapter except the last. 5154. Douglass, Harl R. Modern administration of secondary schools; a revision and extension of Organization and administration of secondary schools. Boston, Ginn, 1954. 601 p. 54-9748 LB2822.D6 1954 Designed as a textbook for college and university classes and as a handbook for professional workers in the field of secondary education; written by the director of the College of Education, University of Colorado. 5155. Heely, Allan V. Why the private school? New York, Harper, 195 1. 208 p. 51-3394 LC47.H4 Analysis of the functions proper to the independ- ent, nondenominational private school in American democratic society, its curriculum and methods of teaching, problems of ethical and religious training, and other miscellaneous questions; written by the headmaster of Lawrenceville School, Lawrenceville, New Jersey. Roland J. Mulford's History of the Lawrenceville School, 1810-1935 (Princeton, Prince- ton University Press, 1935. 358 p.) describes the evolution of this preparatory institution for boys during its existence of nearly 150 years, first as a small academy, nonconformist and middle-class in its sympathies, and currendy as a notable private school. Biii. SECONDARY SCHOOLS 5152. Brown, Elmer E. The making of our mid- dle schools; an account of the development of secondary education in the United States. New York, Longmans, Green, 1903. xii, 547 p. 3-1867 LA222.B87 Bibliography: p. [48i]~5i8. Bibliographical notes at end of chapters. Classic expression of educational thought and his- tory at the beginning of the 20th century which has 5156. Keller, Franklin J. The comprehensive high school. New York, Harper, 1955. 302 p. 54-12239 LB1607.K37 Bibliography: p. 287-290. Considers the scope of various high schools and their accomplishments in relation to the definition of a comprehensive high school as one that "com- bines all the best features of an academic high school and a vocational high school, and therefore serves the needs of all youth in the community"; based on a survey involving a study of the literature, inquiries EDUCATION / 7II addressed to 2,220 educators, and field trips to visit some 77 schools. Favorable presentation of the case for vocational education, by the principal (1955) of the Metropolitan Vocational High School of New York City. 5157. Koos, Leonard V. Junior high school trends. New York, Harper, 1955. 171 p. (Explora- tion series in education) 55-6777 LB1623.K63 Review of the history, aims, and development of the junior high school as part of American education during a period of some fifty years; written by an authority on the subject who, after a long profes- sorial career at the Universities of Minnesota and Chicago, in 1946 became director of research for the American Association of Junior Colleges. An an- notated bibliography is supplied (p. 145-165) and documentation by means of bibliographic footnotes is given throughout. 5158. Leonard, John P. Developing the secondary school curriculum. Rev. ed. New York, Rinehart, 1953. 582 p. 52-14016 LB1628.L4 1953 Provides a background of social, political, indus- trial, and agrarian developments that affected chang- ing educational ideas and theories, particularly as these have been reflected in repeated revisions of curriculums; traces recent developments in detail, e. g., core courses and unit instruction; copiously documented by footnotes referring to reports of im- portant committees and commissions as well as to other official and unofficial publications. Other studies that may be compared with this are Funda- mentals of Curriculum Development, by B. Othanel Smith, William O. Stanley, and J. Harlan Shores (Yonkers-on-Hudson, World Book Co., 1950. 780 p.) ; Reorganizing the High-School Curriculum, rev. ed. by Harold B. Alberty (New York, Macmillan, 1953. 560 p.); and Stephen Romines' Building the High School Curriculum (New York, Ronald Press, 1954. 520 p.). Developing a Curriculum for Mod- ern Living, by Florence B. Stratemeyer and others (New York, Teachers College, Columbia Univer- sity, 1947. 558 p.), makes detailed recommenda- tions resulting from a cooperative investigation of the type of curricular development thought suited to modern elementary and secondary schools. 5159. Miller, George F. The academy system of the state of New York. Albany, J. B. Lyon, 1922. 181 p. 23-4874 LA337.M5 Thesis (Ph. D.) — Columbia University, 1916. Bibliography: p. 179-180. The American academy prepared the way for the high school, which finally superseded it. Histori- cally, academies in the United States occupied an important place in the transition from colonial edu- cation to that of the late 19th century. The fore- going study of the system in New York is illustra- tive of its wider use in America for a hundred years following 1787. C. Colleges and Universities Ci. GENERAL AND HISTORICAL WORKS 5160. American Council on Education. Coopera- tive Study of Evaluation in General Educa- tion. General education: explorations in evaluation; the final report. Paul L. Dressel, director; Lewis B. Mayhew, assistant director. Washington, Amer- ican Council on Education, 1954. xxiii, 302 p. 54-11007 LC1011.A6 Nineteen universities and colleges, widely sepa- rated as to type and locality, cooperated in the study, in an effort to determine the status and effectiveness of programs in "general education," offered in the institutions of the United States. The movement in favor of such education has been variously defined, but may be said to represent substantially a reaction against overspecialization, too free an election of unrelated subjects, narrowness in technical and pro- fessional preparation for vocational purposes, and the failure of American education adequately to stress the attainment of learning that should be the common experience of all educated men and women. 5161. American universities and colleges. 7th ed., 1956. Mary Irwin, editor. Washington, American Council on Education, 1956. 1223 p. 28-5598 LA226.A65 1956 Reference work providing information chiefly in the following categories: statement concerning ac- crediting, requirements for admission, degrees granted, administrative and teaching staff, library, finances, brief historical details. 5162. Bogue, Jesse P. The community college. New York, McGraw-Hill, 1950. xxi, 390 p. (McGraw-Hill series in education) 50-8962 LB2329.B6 712 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Bibliographical footnotes. Covers philosophies, functions, history, contribu- tions, organization, and administration of junior colleges designed to provide education suited to in- dividual communities; written by the executive sec- retary of the American Association of Junior Colleges. 5163. Commission on Financing Higher Educa- tion. [Reports and publications] New York, Columbia University Press for the Commis- sion on Financing Higher Education, 1951-53. 12 v. Dramatic increase in enrollment, declining income of private institutions, overcrowding, and increased costs experienced by state and private universities, caused grave anxiety during the past decade. The Association of American Universities therefore re- quested the Carnegie Corporation of New York and the Rockefeller Foundation to underwrite the Commission on Financing Higher Education, to study and report upon all phases of the problems in- volved. The reports and other monographic pub- lications of the Commission are described in the following items. 5164. Allen, Harry K. State public finance and State institutions of higher education in the United States. 1952. 196 p. 52-12300 LB2342.A4 5165. Axt, Richard G. The Federal Government and financing higher education. 1952. 295 p. 5 2 -i4740 LC173.A97 5166. Current operating expenditures and income of higher education in the United States, 1930, 1940, and 1950; a staff technical paper, com- piled by William V. Campbell [and others] 1952. xvii, 97 p. (chiefly tables) 52-14777 LB2342.C66 5167. Government assistance to universities in Great Britain; memoranda submitted by Harold W. Dodds [and others] 1952. x, 133 p. 52-8830 LB2901.C6 5168. Higher education and American business. ^S 2 - 37 P- 53-3 OI 5 LB2336.C6 5169. Hofstadter, Richard, and C. De Witt Hardy. The development and scope of higher educa- tion in the United States. 1952. x, 254 p. 52-14741 LA226.H55 Bibliographical footnotes. 5170. Hollinshead, Byron S., and Robert R. Rodgers. Who should go to college? With a chapter on the role of motivation in attendance at post-high-school educational institutions. 1952. xvi, 190 p. 52-14133 LB2351.H64 Bibliographical references included in "Selections from the Literature" (p. [ 166]— 184). 5 1 71. Millett, John D., ed. An adas of higher education in the United States; the geo- graphical distribution of accredited four-year col- leges, universities, and technical schools in 1950. !952. [57] P- maps- Map 52-909 G1201.E6M5 1952 5172. Millet, John D. Financing higher education in the United States; the staff report of the Commission on Financing Higher Education. 1952. xix, 503 p. diagrs., tables. 52-14622 LB2342.M48. Bibliographical footnotes. 5173. Nature and needs of higher education; the report of the Commission on Financing Higher Education. 1952. xi, 191 p. 52-14642 LB2321.C54 5174. Ostheimer, Richard H. A statistical analysis of the organization of higher education in the United States, 1948-1949. 1951. xviii, 233 p. tables. 51-14360 LA266.O75 5175. Ostheimer, Richard H. Student charges and financing higher education. 1953. xix, 217 p. diagrs., tables. 53-10191 LB2342.O8 Bibliographical footnotes. 5176. Coulter, Ellis M. College life in the Old South. [2d ed.] Athens, University of Georgia Press, 195 1. 320 p. illus. 51-7109 LD1983.C6 1951 Bibliography: p. 299-305. Considering the evolution of the University of Georgia typical in its region, a professor in the his- tory department of that institution has analyzed its history and development from the turn of the 18th century to the immediate aftermath of the Civil War, in order to show the effects of higher education on the privileged class in the South of that day. First issued in 1928 and now reissued with minor changes and corrections. 5177. Earnest, Ernest P. Academic procession; an informal history of the American college, 1636 to 1953. Indianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill, 1953. 368 p. 53-9859 LA229.E17 Briefly examines major forces that have operated in American higher education and the extent to which individual institutions have fitted their stu- EDUCATION / 713 dents to live and work in the society that produced them. Numerous references to literary, historical, and educational sources are supplied in "Notes," p. 341-359. Dr. Earnest is chairman of the depart- ment of English, Temple University. 5178. Five college plans: Columbia [by] Dean Herbert E. Hawkes; Harvard [by] Dean A. Chester Hanford; Swarthmore [by] President Frank Aydelotte; Wabash [by] President Louis B. Hopkins; Chicago [by] Dean Chauncey S. Boucher; with an introd. by John J. Coss. New York, Co- lumbia University Press, 1931. 115 p. 32-1980 LB2341.F5 Lectures describing new educational programs designed to improve curriculums in five representa- tive colleges after World War I; objectives of the changes include providing for individual differ- ences in students and the creation of superior insti- tutions flexible enough to serve the requirements of life in the postwar world. 5179. Flexner, Abraham. Universities, American, English, German. New York, Oxford Uni- versity Press, 1930. 381 p. 30-32829 LA183.F6 The longest part of the book consists of a drastic criticism of American universities on the score of disproportionate emphasis on vocational courses, mass-production methods, and intellectual stand- ards alleged to be far below those of English and German universities. Valuable as a provocation to discussion and review of problems, the book has been considered by various critics to be neither dis- passionate nor the source of balanced evidence con- cerning conditions in many institutions. The author, a distinguished educational figure, was for nine years director of the Institute of Advanced Study, Princeton. 5180. Harvard University. Committee on the Objectives of a General Education in a Free Society. General education in a free society. With an introd. by James Bryant Conant. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1945. xix, 267 p. A45-4180 LA210.H4 1945a Report of an analysis of the curriculum of Har- vard University and an inquiry into the problems and desiderata of general education not only at Har- vard but in American schools and colleges through- out the country; one of the numerous studies made by committees in various institutions with the aim of improving education after World War II. 5 1 81. Hofstadter, Richard, and Walter P. Metzger. The development of academic freedom in the United States. New York, Columbia University Press, 1955. xvi, 527 p. 55 _ 9435 LA205.H55 Prepared for the American Academic Freedom Project at Columbia University, directed by Robert M. Maclver. Bibliographical footnotes. Contents. — The age of the college, by R. Hof- stadter. — The age of the university, by W. P. Metzger.. Historical study primarily of academic freedom of faculty members in American colleges and uni- versities, from the beginning of these institutions to the recent past. Provides the backgrounds of re- ligious, intellectual, and political issues involved; explores also a variety of other related topics, such as academic government, professional organizations of academic men, the rise of Darwinism in Ameri- can thought, and the relation between big business and academic freedom. The authors are members of the faculty of Columbia University. Their book should be read with its companion volume, Robert M. Maclver's Academic Freedom in Our Time (q.v.). 5182. The Idea and practice of general education. Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1950. 333 p. 50-12496 LD906.5.I3 An account of the progress made during nearly twenty years in developing an academic program at the College of the University of Chicago; written by present and former members of the faculty as a contribution to the exchange and communication of ideas concerning new forms of undergraduate edu- cation in America. 5183. Kelly, Robert L. The American colleges and the social order. New York, Macmillan, 1940. 380 p. 4 0_ 335°7 LA225.K4 "References and notes": p. 347-369. Historical study of American higher education and particularly of the liberal arts colleges from colonial to recent times, with special emphasis on the relations of such colleges to the society of which they have been a significant part. 5184. McDowell, Tremaine. American studies. Minneapolis, University of Minnesota Press, 1948. 96 p. 4 8 "99 8 3 LB2321.M33 Contents. — 1. Time and the colleges. — 2. General education. — 3. American studies. — 4. Curriculums in American studies. — 5. American courses. — 6. The Minnesota program. — 7. Region, nation, world. ". . . based chiefly on firsthand observations of procedures in more than thirty colleges and universi- ties"; immediately descriptive of specific programs in American Studies, but ultimately concerned "with the broad pattern of higher education in the United States." — Foreword. 714 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES The author has been chairman of the Program in American Studies at the University of Minnesota since 1945. 5185. Maclver, Robert M. Academic freedom in our time. New York, Columbia University Press, 1955. xiv, 329 p. 55-9094 LB2332.M28 Bibliography: p. [305] -320. Prepared for the American Academic Freedom Project at Columbia University, directed by the author, formerly Lieber Professor of Political Philosophy and Sociology at Columbia University. After defining academic freedom, Maclver devotes the principal sections of his work to the following topics: the recent climate of opinion concerning free- dom in the United States; academic government in relation to academic freedom; freedom required by the student and the teacher; and the university and the social order. The book emphasizes an analysis of the contemporary situation in the United States, problems that are present, and the significance of this type of freedom in the life of the nation. The gen- eral theme of the volume and its companion work, Hofstadter and Metzger's The Development of Academic Freedom in the United States (q. v.) is that of the Bicentennial of Columbia University: "Man's right to knowledge and the free use thereof." 5186. Ross, Charles D. Democracy's college; the land-grant movement in the formative stage. Ames, Iowa State College Press, 1942. 267 p. 42-11686 LA226.R65 Notes and references: p. 183-229. Introductory and selective bibliography: p. 231- 254. Historical study of the meaning of the land-grant college in American educational development after Abraham Lincoln in 1862 signed the Morrill Act appropriating great areas of public land for the es- tablishment in every state of a college for the people "to promote the liberal and practical education of the industrial classes in the several pursuits and profes- sions of life." For current achievement in 1930 see a Survey of Land-Grant Colleges and Universities, directed by Arthur J. Klein for the United States Office of Education (Washington, U. S. Govt. Print. Off., 1930. 2 v.). More recently, the Association of Land-Grant Colleges and Universities has published Some Edu- cational Questions Confronting the Association . . . (Washington, 1948. 52 p.), which is a manual of inquiry into considerations suggested by the report of the President's Commission on Higher Education (q. v. under U. S. below). 5187. Smith, Huston. The purposes of higher education. Foreword by Arthur H. Comp- ton. New York, Harper, 1955. 218 p. 55-6970 LB2321.S57 Presents a moderate position with respect to vari- ous opposing ideas in American higher education. These include freedom versus authority, egoism versus altruism, and the individual versus the state. Considers the aims of liberal education with refer- ence to knowledge, abilities, appreciations, and motivations. Based on deliberations conducted for 18 months by a faculty committee charged with studying the curriculum of Washington University, St. Louis, and with formulating a statement of the objectives of liberal education to be used as a basis for curriculum development. 5188. Thwing, Charles F. A history of higher education in America. New York, Apple- ton, 1906. xiii, 501 p. 6-35963 LA226.T56 Although written half a century ago, this com- parative study of numerous institutions remains a contribution to American cultural and educational history, by virtue of its vigorous portrayal of per- sons, conditions, and events that shaped the found- ing and development of American colleges and universities. 5189. U. S. President's Commission on Higher Ed- ucation. Higher education for American democracy, a report. Washington, U. S. Govt. Print. Off., 1947. 6 v. illus. 48-50042 LA226.A48 George F. Zook, chairman. Contents. — v. 1. Establishing the goals. — v. 2. Equalizing and expanding individual opportu- nity. — v. 3. Organizing higher education. — v. 4. Staffing higher education. — v. 5. Financing higher education. — v. 6. Resource data. Embodies the results of a study made by the com- mission established in July 1946, by President Harry S. Truman, to seek a comprehensive view of higher education in the United States, and to assess present problems and future requirements. Among the latter the commission oudined federal financial assistance on a large scale if the basic aim were to be achieved of providing equal opportunities for higher education to all qualified persons. The character of the debate over the report may be learned from Gail Kennedy's Education for Democracy (Boston, Heath, 1952. 117 p. Problems in American civilization, readings selected by the Department of American Studies, Amherst College. LA226.A485K4). 5190. Veblen,Thorstein. The higher learning in America. Introd. by David Riesman. Stan- EDUCATION / 715 ford, Calif., Academic Reprints, 1954 [ c i9i8] xx, 286 p. (American culture and economics series, no. 3) 54-7096 LA226.V3 1954 First published in 19 18, the work constituted a scathing attack on the conduct of universities by governing boards and officials dominated by the con- cepts of businessmen, to the great detriment of an honest search for knowledge. David Riesman, in- troducing the present edition, comments: "Though the details of the Veblen legend may be in error, he is surely, for those contributions, entitled to his place in the history of intellectual freedom." Cii. INDIVIDUAL INSTITUTIONS 5191. Becker, Carl L. Cornell University; found- ers and the founding. Ithaca, N. Y., Cornell University Press, 1943. 240 p. 44-195 LD1369.B4 Series of lectures tracing the English influence on early classical education in America; the develop- ment of interest in scientific research and in train- ing for agriculture and the mechanic arts as related to the Morrill Land-Grant College Act of 1862; and the founding of institutions such as Cornell. Texts of various documentary sources are provided, p. 139-190; a bibliography is supplied, p. 207-215; and references and notes are listed, p. 219-240. Cornell as part of American social history after the Civil War is portrayed in Walter P. Rogers' Andrew D. White and the Modern University (Ithaca, N. Y., Cornell University Press, 1942. 259 p.). 5192. Cheyney, Edward P. History of the Uni- versity of Pennsylvania, 1740-1940. Phila- delphia, University of Pennsylvania Press, 1940. x, 461 p. 40-32494 LD4528.C45 "The printed and manuscript material used in the preparation of this volume and all other known ref- erences to the history of the University have been listed, and this list will be preserved in the Uni- versity library in accessible form for the use of sub- sequent investigators." — Preface. 5193. Cole, Arthur C. A hundred years of Mount Holyoke College; the evolution of an educa- tional ideal. Published for Mount Holyoke College. New Haven, Yale University Press, 1940. 426 p. 40-27310 LD7093.C58 Reflects "the changing concepts in education and in society throughout a century especially notable for the widening of opportunities for women." — Preface p. [iii]. Includes biographical essays on Mary Lyon (1797-1849) and Mary E. Woolley (1863-1947). 5194. Curti, Merle E., and Vernon R. Carstensen. The University of Wisconsin; a history, 1 848-1925. Madison, University of Wisconsin Press, 1949. 2 v. illus. 48-47638 LD6128.C8 Includes bibliographical footnotes and a bibliogra- phical note, v. 2, p. 597-601. Study of a state university, its origins, aims, growth, financial support, faculty and administra- tion, students, and finally its status in the first quar- ter of the twentieth century; aims to relate the development of this individual institution to the social and intellectual movements of the Middle West and of America as a whole. Published in com- memoration of the hundredth anniversary of the founding of the university. 5195. Flexner, Abraham. Daniel Coit Gilman. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1946. 173 p. 46-7929 LD2626 1876.F55 Bibliographical references included in "Acknowl- edgments" (p. 165-166). Develops the thesis that by the far-reaching in- fluence of Gilman at Johns Hopkins a new type of American institution was created, in which teaching and research were combined and that this example was followed until it became standard in the United States; documented by quotations from Gilman's works, such as University Problems in the United States (New York, Century, 1898. 319 p.) and The Launching of a University and Other Papers (New York, Dodd, Mead, 1906. 386 p.). 5196. Henderson, Algo D., and Dorothy Hall. Antioch College: its design for liberal edu- cation. New York, Harper, 1946. xiv, 280 p. 47-97 LD171.A53H4 Account prepared under the direction of the president of Antioch College, Yellow Springs, Ohio, at the end of 25 years of experimentation with the "Antioch Plan," a curriculum leading to the A. B. and B. S. degrees; programs included in the plan require 5 years for completion and combine 3 em- phases: (1) liberal education; (2) experience as workers off the campus; and (3) the development of democratic group responsibility in college government. 5197. A History of Columbia College on Morning- side. New York, Columbia University Press, 1954. viii, 284 p. illus. (The Bicentennial history of Columbia University) 54-8016 LD1248.H48 Bibliographical footnotes. Contents. — The college: a memoir of forty years, by I. Edman. — The Van Amringe and Keppel eras, by L. Trilling. — Reconstruction in the liberal arts, by J. Buchler. — "Most glad to teach," by C. W. Everett. — After class, by F. W. Boardman, Jr. — The yi6 J A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES lion afield, by J. N. Arbolino. — The men from Morn- ingside, by G. R. Hawes. — A liberal arts college in a metropolitan university, by I. Edman. 5198. Jones, Barbara (Slatter) Bennington Col- lege; the development of an educational idea. New York, Harper, 1946. 239 p. 47-30081 LD725i.B4792y6 Covers the development of the educational pro- gram of a "progressive" college for women during the first 14 years of its life (1932-45) and oudines the main departures from conventional educational practices; originated in a series of research studies subsidized by the Whitney and the Rockefeller Foundations. 5199. Kennedy, Gail, ed. Education at Amherst: the new program. New York, Harper, 1955. 330 p. _ 55-8552 LD153.K4 Documents the curricular revisions and innova- tions undertaken by a traditional four-year liberal arts college to meet the educational problems and opportunities that developed in the United States, particularly after World War II. Two reports com- prise the major part of the book: that of the Faculty Committee on Long Range Policy, from which de- veloped the changes first put into effect in 1946-47; and that of the Review Committee on the New Pro- gram, which provides information on the results of the changes as of 1954. For observations on earlier offerings at Amherst see the following entry. 5200. Le Due, Thomas H. Piety and intellect at Amherst College, 1865-1912. New York, Columbia University Press, 1946. 165 p. (Colum- bia studies in American culture, no. 16) A46-2753 LD153.L4 "An earlier draft . . . was submitted to Yale University ... for the doctoral degree [1943]." — Preface. Bibliography: p. [ 153]— 155. Not designed as a comprehensive factual history of events in the life of Amherst College, but rather as a study of ideas current at the college and ex- pressed in its curriculum and classes during the sec- ond half of the 19th century; also explores the role of a representative undergraduate college of that time in the life of the community of which it was a part, and thus relates it to the cultural history of the United States. For contemporary offerings at the college see the preceding entry under Gail Kennedy. 5201. Michigan. University. The University of Michigan, an encyclopedic survey. Wilfred B. Shaw, editor, v. 1 + Ann Arbor, University of Michigan, 1 941+ 42-36603 LD3278.A24 Presents a factual and historical study of a large state university in its entirety: origin and growth, administration, schools, departments, faculty, in- struction, students, alumni, libraries, and museums; includes frequent bibliographies that emphasize references to official documents of the institution and the state; a publication to be completed in 4 volumes and 9 parts. A comparable study of a large metropolitan uni- versity is The University of Chicago Survey (Chi- cago, University of Chicago Press, 1933. 12 v.). 5202. Minnesota. University. Bureau of Institu- tional Research. A university looks at its program; the report of the University of Minnesota Bureau of Institutional Research, 1942-1952. Ruth E. Eckert and Robert J. Keller, editors. Minneapolis, University of Minnesota Press, 1954. 223 p. (Minnesota studies in higher education) 54-8209 LD3326.5.A47 Enrollment trends, curriculum development, staff activities, and undergraduate and graduate in- struction are among the- matters considered in 23 selected studies representing the university's continu- ing program for studying its own procedures and offerings. 5203. Morison, Samuel Eliot. Three centuries of Harvard, 1636-1936. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1936. 512 p. 36-14160 LD2151.M65 Brief history of Harvard University. More de- tailed treatment of different periods in the life of the institution and of its relation to American culture and education in a wider sense is found in the un- completed Tercentennial History of Harvard College and University, 1636-1936, which includes The Founding of Harvard College ( 1935), Harvard Col- lege in the Seventeenth Century (2 v., 1936), both by Dr. Morison, and The Development of Harvard University Since the Inauguration of President Eliot, 1869-1929 (1930), a cooperative volume edited by him. Dr. Morison at the time of his recent retire- ment was Jonathan Trumbull Professor of History at Harvard University. 5204. Wertenbaker, Thomas J. Princeton, 1746- 1 896. Princeton, Princeton University Press, 1946. 424 p. illus. A47-267 LD4609.W4 Bibliographcial footnotes. Written by a senior professor of American history at Princeton; reviews the institution's history, evalu- ates the contribution of the original founders and their successors, explains educational policies, re- counts past services to the nation, and brings back the student life of the past. Cf. Foreword, p. v. EDUCATION / 717 D. Education of Special Groups 5205. American Association for Gifted Children. The gifted child, edited by Paul Witty. Bos- ton, Heath, 1951. xii, 338 p. 51-2586 LC3965.A6 Annotated bibliography on gifted children by Elise H. Martens: p. [2jy]-^22. Collection of nontechnical essays by specialists; discusses the problems of the gifted child, factors involved in identifying the gifted, the waste of talent and leadership inherent in wrong methods of edu- cation for this valuable segment of the population, etc. A useful brief treatment of the same subject is the Educational Policies Commission's Education of the Gifted (Washington, 1950. 88 p.). A progress report covering ten years of work in this field at the Hunter College Elementary School is provided in Educating Gifted Children, by G. H. Hildreth and others (New York, Harper, 1952. 272 p.). Programs for gifted boys and girls applied in a variety of schools, school systems, and projects are summarized in A Survey of the Education of Gifted Children, by Robert J. Havighurst and others (Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1955. 114 p.), which includes an annotated bibliography, p. 103-113. 5206. Ashmore, Harry S. The Negro and the schools. Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina Press, 1954. 228 p. diagrs., tables. 54-10392 LC2801.A87 List of studies upon which the book is based: p. 216-217; selected reading and research materials: p. 218-220. An objective appraisal of racial segregation and other biracial aspects of the educational system in the United States; written in summary by the di- rector of a research project from data supplied by a staff of 45 scholars, whose work was made pos- sible by the Fund for the Advancement of Educa- tion, with money supplied by the Ford Foundation. The book was published before the United States Supreme Court rendered its decision on May 17, 1954, declaring that segregation is a denial of the equal protection of the laws and therefore is uncon- stitutional. The same data formed the basis for a volume about desegregation in some 24 communi- ties, published as Schools in Transition, edited by Robin M. Williams and Margery W. Ryan (Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina Press, 1954. 272 p.). White and Negro Schools in the South; an Analysis of Biracial Education was edited by Truman M. Pierce, director of the Southern States Cooperative Program in Educational Administra- tion, and four coordinators in the program (Engle- wood Cliffs, N. J., Prentice-Hall, 1955. 338 p.). The historical aspects of Negro education are pre- sented in The Education of the Negro in the Amer- ican Social Order, by Horace M. Bond (New York, Prentice-Hall, 1934. 501 p.). A detailed study of the problems and challenges of higher education in this field is found in the National Survey of the Higher Education of Negroes, by the United States Office of Education (Washington, U. S. Govt. Print. Off., 1942-43. 4 v.). 5207. Baker, Harry J. Introduction to exceptional children. Rev. ed. New York, Macmillan, 1953. 500 p. 53-8275 LC3965.B32 1953 Textbook for college and university students and for the use of clinical and diagnostic agencies con- cerned with children having physical, neurological, mental, and other handicaps; includes brief sections on children who learn rapidly and on the mentally gifted child (p. 273-295); numerous references are provided at the ends of all important parts of the work; written by the director of the Psychological Clinic, Detroit Public Schools. Additional refer- ences for exploring the same and related problems are Educating the Retarded Child, by Samuel A. Kirk and G. Orville Johnson (Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1951. 434 p.); Arch O. Heck's The Educa- tion of Exceptional Children, 2d ed. (New York, McGraw-Hill, 1954. 513 p.); and John E. Wallace Wallin's Education of Mentally Handicapped Chil- dren (New York, Harper, 1955. 485 p.). A com- pendium of essays and bibliographical suggestions concerning many phases of this problem is found in Special Education for the Exceptional (Boston, P. Sargent, 1955. 2 v.), edited by Merle E. Frampton and Elena D. Gall, which includes signed contribu- tions by numerous specialists in work for students suffering from special conditions of health, and other physical or mental handicaps. 5208. Butterworth, Julian E., and Howard A. Daw- son. The modern rural school; with chap- ters by Stanley Warren [and others] New York, McGraw-Hill, 1952. 494 p. (McGraw-Hill series in education) 51-12592 LB1567.B865 Includes bibliographies, and a list of visual aids: p. 47I-47 6 - Presents the social and economic bases of the unique problems in the field of rural education; out- lines a program for meeting the educational needs of rural America and specifies requirements for implementing that program. Dr. Butterworth is 7l8 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES professor emeritus of rural education at Cornell University; Dr. Dawson is director of the Division of Rural Service of the National Education Association. 5209. Handbook of adult education in the United States. [3d ed.] Mary L. Ely, editor. New York, Institute of Adult Education, Teachers College, Columbia University, 1948. 555 p. 34-27011 LC5251.H3 1948 Survey articles by specialists and a composite record of activities that have as their purpose the stimulation of adults to inform and educate them- selves for the better performance of their functions as human beings and as useful members of a demo- cratic society; includes an extensive section on programs carried on by groups and associations or- ganized in the interest of adult education (p. 303- 514); a list of references suggested for supplementary reading is also provided (p. [5i5]~528). Other pertinent and more recent publications are Paul L. Essert's Creative Leadership of Adult Education (New York, Prentice-Hall, 195 1. 333 p.) and Homer Kempfer's Adult Education (New York, McGraw-Hill, 1955. 433 p.). 5210. Kerrison, Irvine L. H. Workers' education at the university level. New Brunswick, N. J., Rutgers University Press, 1951. 177 p. 51-14 170 LC5051.K4 Bibliography: p. 146-155. Report on the efforts, failures, and successes of some fifty universities offering programs in workers' education; provides a point of departure for the development of labor-management education. Education of workers in industry by means of apprenticeship, day trade schools, part-time and evening study, correspondence courses, and training within industry are treated in Arthur B. Mays' Essentials of Industrial Education (New York, Mc- Graw-Hill, 1952. 248 p.). Philip R. V. Curoe's Educational Attitudes and Policies of Organized Labor in the United States (New York, Teachers College, Columbia University, 1926. 202 p.) is a thesis which traces the relation of labor groups to the development of public school education in America from 1840 to 1925. 521 1. Prosser, Charles A., and Thomas H. Quigley. Vocational education in a democracy. Rev. ed. Chicago, American Technical Society, 1949. 575 p. 49-8838 LC1043.P8 1949 First edition by C. A. Prosser and C. R. Allen. Emphasizes the social and economic needs for vocational education of secondary grade, also the schools, teachers, and facilities that will make the programs effective; written by two specialists who have been active for many years in this type of educational work. A second study of the subject, Vocational Education: America's Greatest Resource (Chicago, American Technical Society, 1950. 387 p.), by John A. McCarthy, Assistant Commis- sioner of Education in New Jersey, stresses the relation of the Government of the United States to vocational education and the legislation by which Federal participadon may be implemented. A third evaluation of this type of education, which institutes comparisons with similar programs in other coun- tries, is found in Alfred Kahler and Ernest Ham- burger's Education for an Industrial Age (Ithaca, Published for the Institute of World Affairs by Cornell University Press, 1948. 334 p.). 5212. Woody, Thomas. A history of women's education in the United States. New York, Science Press, 1929. 2 v. illus. (Science and educa- tion, edited by J. McKeen Cattell, v. 4, book 1-2) 30-1557 LC1752.W6 Bibliography: v. 2, p. 481-589. Although written over 25 years ago this work has never been superseded as the standard historical pre- sentation of the subject. Of special value are the documentation by references to abundant contem- porary sources, the emphasis on social and institu- tional changes, and the sections on academies, sem- inaries, colleges, and professional education. In 1924 Dr. Woody became professor of education at the University of Pennsylvania. An analysis of contemporary problems and opportunities con- nected with the education of women is found in Educating Women for a Changing World (Min- neapolis, University of Minnesota Press, 1954. 302 p.), by Kate (Hevner) Mueller, who has had rich experience as a teacher and educational adminis- trator. Teachers and Teaching 5213. Barzun, Jacques. Teacher in America. Bos- ton, Little, Brown, 1945. 321 p. 45-1580 LB2321.B258 Essays, frequently satiric and critical, concerning the academic scene and intellectual life on American campuses as known by the author, a professor at Columbia University, who received his early educa- tion in France. EDUCATION / 719 5214. Chase, Mary Ellen. A goodly fellowship. New York, Macmillan, 1939. 305 p. 39-27971 LA2317.C48A3 "This book is the story of a life spent in teaching ... a complement, perhaps a sequel, to A Goodly Heritage written ten years ago." — Foreword. Miss Chase, a writer on New England and other themes, has been a professor of English literature at Smith College since 1929. 5215. Cronkhite, Bernice (Brown) ed. A hand- book for college teachers, an informal guide. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1950. xi, 272 p. 50-7896 LB2321.C73 Bibliography: p. [26$]-26j. Based on extracurricular lectures and discussions, chiefly by distinguished educators, arranged by the Radcliffe Graduate School for graduate students at Harvard and Radcliffe who plan to become college teachers. The topics developed include: relations between teacher and student; varieties of teaching methods applicable in the humanities, natural sci- ences, and social sciences; visual and other aids to teaching; effective methods of speech; professional relations; research and publications; obtaining a teaching position; and educational developments and trends in relation to American society. 5216. Elsbree, Willard S. The American teacher. New York, American Book Co., c i939. 566 p. 3>9-^ 2 ^ LB1775.E57 Includes suggested readings. Tells of the evolution of the teaching profession in American public schools during the past three centuries. Staff Personnel in the Public Schools (New York, Prentice-Hall, 1954. 438 p.), writ- ten jointly by Elsbree and E. E. Reutter, Jr., deals with selection, certification, and in-service education of teachers, as well as with other administrative mat- ters affecting teachers. 5217. Fuess, Claude M. Creed of a schoolmaster. Boston, Litde, Brown, 1939. 195 p. 39-27185 LB1607.F8 Written after long association with an independ- ent private school, the book indicates the general course that the author considers right for modern secondary education to follow; includes chapters on "The Transition from School to College" and "The Promise of Progressive Education." Dr. Fuess, who was headmaster of Phillips Academy, Andover, Massachusetts, from 1933 to 1947, has published a later book of the same character, Independent Schoolmaster (Boston, Little, Brown, 1952. 371 p.). 5218. Highet, Gilbert. The art of teaching. New York, Knopf, 1950. xviii, 291 p. 50-9306 LB1025.H63 1950 Bibliographical references included in Notes: p. 283-291. Humanistic exposition of the art of teaching, the methods to be used, the practices of great teachers from antiquity to the early 20th century, and the place of teaching in everyday life; written by the Anthon Professor of Latin at Columbia University, who was educated at Glasgow and Oxford Uni- versities, and taught at the latter before coming to this country. 5219. Johnson, Alvin S. Pioneer's progress, an autobiography. New York, Viking Press, 1952. 413 p. 52-12704 H59.J6A3 Economist, editor, encyclopedist, educator, and champion of adult education, Dr. Johnson's experi- ence included appointment at some half-dozen im- portant universities, and the directorship of the New School for Social Research from 1923 to 1945. The story of his life throws light on numerous aspects of American education and culture. 5220. McCuskey, Dorothy. Bronson Alcott, teacher. New York, Macmillan, 1940. 217 p. illus. 40-35143 LB695.A3M3 1936 Study based on manuscript sources, and submitted originally as a doctoral dissertation at Yale Univer- sity; establishes Alcott as a progressive educator in his own or any day, by tracing his work at the Temple School, Boston, as superintendent of the Concord, Massachusetts, Public Schools, and as dean of the Concord School of Philosophy. May be used with George E. Haefner's dissertation, A Critical Estimate of the Educational Theories and Practices of A. Bronson Alcott (New York, 1937. 130 p.). 5221. Perry, Bliss. And gladly teach. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1935. 315 p. 35-16598 PS2545.P4Z52 Intimate insight into education at Williams Col- lege, and at Princeton and Harvard Universities, provided by the autobiography of a distinguished professor who taught in all three institutions between 1 88 1 and 1930 and who was famous for his Harvard courses in American literature. 5222. Peterson, Houston, ed. Great teachers, por- trayed by those who studied under them. New Brunswick [N. J.] Rutgers University Press, 1946. xxi, 351 p. 46-11976 CT105.P44 Partial Contents. — Socratic Yankee: Mark Hop- kins, by L. W. Spring. — Garman of Amherst: Charles Edward Garman, by W. A. Dyer. — Quaker scholar: Francis Barton Gummere, by Christopher Morley. — Princeton schoolmaster: 720 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Woodrow Wilson, by A. P. Dennis. — Columbia galaxy: John Dewey and others, by Irwin Edman. — "I become Agassiz's pupil": Jean Louis Rodolphe Agassiz, by N. S. Shaler. — Beloved psychologist: William James, by D. S. Miller. — Wisconsin his- torian: Frederick Jackson Turner, by C. L. Becker. — "Kitty": George Lyman Kittredge, by S. P. Sherman. — Emerson the lecturer: Ralph Waldo Emerson, by J. R. Lowell. 5223. Smith, Shirley W. James Burrill Angell: an American influence. Ann Arbor, Univer- sity of Michigan Press, 1 954. 380 p. 54-14913 LD3275 1871.S6 Details of Angell's own education, his work as a teacher, and primarily his presidency, in turn, of the University of Vermont and of the University of Michigan, contribute to an understanding of Ameri- can educational history from 1840 to 1909. F. Methods and Techniques 5224. Douglass, Had R., ed. Education for life adjustment, its meaning and implementation, by Maurice R. Ahrens [and others] With a foreword by Raymond W. Gregory. New York, Ronald Press Co., 1950. 491 p. (Douglass series in education) 50-7899 LB1027.5.D6 Bibliography: p. 459-473. The life adjustment movement has been promoted by the National Commission on Life Adjustment for American Youth, a body originated in 1947 by the United States Commissioner of Education. This work comprises a series of essays by specialists and is designed to assist school officials and communities to equip American young people to live democrat- ically and with satisfaction as profitable members of society, in the home, at work, and as citizens; addressed particularly to the requirements of those less well-served by the schools than students going on to higher education or into skilled occupations. The editor's own work, Secondary Education for Life Adjustment of American Youth (New York, Ronald Press, 1952. 630 p.), discusses social changes in America in relation to education suitable for a democratic society. The Commission on Life Ad- justment Education for Youth (1947-1950) issued a report on Vitalizing Secondary Education (Wash- ington, Federal Security Agency, Office of Educa- tion, 1951. 106 p.). 5225. Faunce, Roland C, and Nelson L. Bossing. Developing the core curriculum. New York, Prentice-Hall, 1951. 311 p. 51-5578 LB1555.F3 Offers a definition and an educational basis of the "core curriculum" in a democratic society, together with the methods of implementing the idea in the community, the school, and the classroom. 5226. Flesch, Rudolf F. Why Johnny can't read — and what you can do about it. New York, Harper, 1955. 222 p. _ 55~ 6 577 LB1573.F55 Strongly advocates teaching elementary reading by the phonetic method and castigates methods other than this now used in such teaching; controversial book that has aroused much discussion and exam- ination of the reading abilities of young Americans. A reply to this is The Truth about Your Child's Reading, by Sam Duker and Thomas P. Nally (New York, Crown, 1956. 181 p.). 5227. Grambs, Jean D., and William J. Iverson. Modern methods in secondary education. New York, Sloane, 1952. 562 p. 52-10179 LB1607.G66 References at ends of chapters. Undertakes to set forth the over-all task of the American high school which, along with the elementary school, is the common school of all the people; relates present conditions to the necessary changes in methods of teaching and aims to give beginning teachers the basis of a sympathetic under- standing of contemporary problems. The authors are members of the faculty of the School of Educa- tion of Stanford University. 5228. Hardee, Melvene D., ed. Counseling and guidance in general education. Edited un- der sponsorship of the National Committee on General Education, Association for Higher Educa- tion, National Education Association. Yonkers-on- Hudson, World Book Co., 1955. xix, 444 p. (Pro- fessional books in education) 55-4197 LB2343.H275 Bibliography: p. 427-434. Bibliographical foot- notes. Symposium composed of chapters written by pro- fessors and administrators in American colleges and universities. The high school teacher who is charged with responsibility for taking part in guidance work without special training for the task is served by Leslie L. Chisholm's Guiding Youth in the Second- ary School (New York, American Book Co., 1950. 441 p.). General Clinical Counseling in Educa- EDUCATION / 721 tional Institutions, by Milton E. Hahn and Malcolm S. MacLean (New York, McGraw-Hill, 1950. 375 p.), draws together the theories and ideas of scientific clinical counseling developed by psy- chologists during World War II and applies them to the professional practice of counseling in educa- tional work. Counseling Theory and Practice (New York, Ronald Press, 1954. 307 p.), by Har- old B. and Pauline N. Pepinsky, is addressed to advanced students and professional counselors in- terested in making a contribution as psychologists and also as practitioners; emphasizes the scientific basis of the subject. 5229. Lindquist, Everet F., ed. Educational meas- urement. With chapters by Gordon V. Anderson [and others] Washington, American Council on Education, 1951. xix, 819 p. illus. 51-9853 LB3051.L5 Includes bibliographies. Sponsored by the standing Committee on Meas- urement and Guidance of the American Council on Education and written by 20 specialists, assisted by some 50 additional collaborators, to provide a comprehensive handbook and textbook on the theory, techniques, and functions of educational testing and measurement. An additional reference book on the subject is Oscar K. Buros' The Fourth Mental Measurements Yearbook^ (Highland Park, N. J., Gryphon Press, 1953. 1163 p.). It covers the work of 1948-51, lists 793 tests, 596 reviews of tests, 4,417 references on the construction, validity, use, and limitations of tests, and 429 reviews of books in the field. Harold Gulliksen, professor of psy- chology, Princeton University, in his Theory of Men- tal Tests (New York, Wiley, 1950. 486 p.) brings together in one volume technical developments in test theories during the last 50 years and elaborates those he considers to be of especial interest. Clay C. Ross' Measurement in Today's Schools, 3d ed., revised by Julian C. Stanley (New York, Prentice- Hall, 1954. 485 p. Prentice-Hall psychology series) stresses a functional approach to educational meas- urement in a work that resulted from long experi- ence while teaching college classes in the subject. Frank S. Freeman's Theory and Practice of Psycho- logical Testing, rev. ed. (New York, Henry Holt, 1955. 609 p.), amplifies his earlier discussions of test standardization, tests of specific aptitudes, and the results of recent researches in the field, and describes a number of specific tests. 5230. Siepmann, Charles A. Television and edu- cation in the United States. Paris, UNESCO, 1952. 131 p. (Press, film and radio in the world today) 53-9290 LB1044.7.S5 Provides information concerning television and its use in schools, colleges, and universities, the educa- tional policies of television networks, and the effect of television on audiences; indicates the cautions that are in order when the medium is used educa- tionally. Teaching Through Radio and Television (New York, Rinehart, 1952. 560 p.), by William B. Levenson and Edward Stasheff, has the twofold purpose of improving school broadcasting and en- couraging more effective educational programs. Since 1941 the Association for Education by Radio- Television has provided current news and informa- tion through its periodical, The Journal of the AERT. Beginning with 1930 a group currently entided the Institute for Education by Radio and Television has issued its yearbook under the title, Education on the Air. 5231. Wittich, Walter A., and Charles F. Schuller. Audio-visual materials: their nature and use. New York, Harper, 1953. 564 p. (Exploration series in education) 52-12772 LB1043.W58 Based on nine years' experience in work with teachers on the use in the schools of graphic teach- ing aids, radio, motion-picture film, television, etc. Copious illustrations are supplied, while bibliog- raphies and lists of sources from which audio-visual materials may be obtained are added at the ends of chapters. Briefly discusses the place in contem- porary American education filled by such aids to per- ception and understanding. Edgar Dale's revised edition of his Audio-Visual Methods in Teaching (New York, Dryden Press, 1954. 534 p.) emphasizes the theory of learning underlying the use of these materials in teaching, the various types of materials to be used, and their application in the classroom, from the elementary grades through high school. G. Contemporary Problems and Controversies 5232. Bell, Bernard I. Crisis in education. New York, Whittlesey House, McGraw-Hill, 1949. 237 p. 49-8612 LA209.2.B4 431240—60 — -^7 Written as a challenge to American complacency, the book deplores faults observed in all levels of edu- cation in the United States, particularly with refer- 722 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES ence to persistent adolescence and the lack of intel- lectual and spiritual qualities. Nine steps in refor- mation are proposed in conclusion (p. 200-230). Canon Bell is not only a clergyman of the Epsicopal Church, but also an experienced educator who has served as a college president and as a professor at Columbia University. 5233. Bestor, Arthur E. Educational wastelands; the retreat from learning in our public schools. Urbana, University of Illinois Press, 1953. 226 p. 53-976i LB875.M345 Denunciatory criticism of professional "education- ists" and their educational effects by a professor of history in the University of Illinois. A later work by the same hand, The Restoration of Learning (New York, Knopf, 1955. 459 p.), incorporates material from the earlier book, and in Part Three (p. [2191-393) suggests means of "redeeming the unfulfilled promise of American education." 5234. Bode, Boyd H. Progressive education at the crossroads. New York, Newson, 1938. 128 p. 38-13086 LB875.B518 Reasonable and dispassionate examination of "progressive" education by a critical progressive. Carleton W. Washburn, a past president of the Progressive Education Association, in A Living Philosophy of Education (New York, J. Day, 1940. 585 p.) equates progressivism with efforts to in- corporate in practice scientific discoveries pertinent for education. Lucy Sprague Mitchell's Our Children and Our Schools (New York, Simon and Schuster, 1950. 510 p.) pictures progressive educa- tion at the Bank Street Schools in New York. 5235. Hutchins, Robert M. The conflict in edu- cation in a democratic society. New York, Harper, 1953. 112 p. 53-8539 LB875.H96 Stating his belief that "graduation from an Ameri- can university is no guarantee of literacy," the former president and chancellor of the University of Chicago criticizes the prevalence in America of four contemporary pedagogical doctrines he believes to be detrimental to sound education in any society: the doctrine of adjustment or adaptation to the total environment; the doctrine of immediate needs; the doctrine of social reform; and the doctrine of no doctrine at all. The writer's additional contro- versial and critical writings on American educational themes include The Higher Learning in America (New Haven, Yale University Press, 1936. 119 p.) and No Friendly Voice (Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1936. 196 p.). 5236. Scott, Cecil W., and Clyde M. Hill, eds. Public education under criticism. New York, Prentice-Hall, 1954. 414 p. (Prentice-Hall education series) 54-5871 LA209.2.S35 Extensive anthology of articles gathered from mis- cellaneous journals written for and against second- ary education as provided in American schools; selections are arranged under such headings as Philosophy, Progressive Education, The Funda- mentalists, Teacher Education and Teachers, etc. A second anthology has been edited by Henry Ehlers, under the tide Crucial Issues in Education (New York, Holt, 1955. 277 p.). It includes se- lections culled from publications of the past ten years concerning freedom, learning, religion and public education, separation of church and state, racial segregation in schools, progressive education, and classroom methods and materials. 5237. Smith, Mortimer B. The diminished mind; a study of planned mediocrity in our public schools. Chicago, H. Regnery, 1954. 150 p. 54-11285 LA209.2.S6 A parent who has served on a board of education, the author expresses his vehement opposition to certain theories and practices in contemporary pub- lic education in America, notably those called the "Core Curriculum," "Life Adjustment," and "Social Reconstruction." He aims to present evidence in support of the thesis that learning, in the traditional sense of disciplined knowledge, is fast declining in our public schools. His earlier and more theoretical work, And Madly Teach (Chicago, H. Regnery, 1949. 107 p.), has been called a primer for parents. 5238. Thayer, Vivian T. Public education and its critics. New York, Macmillan, 1954. 170 p. (The Kappa Delta Pi lecture series) 54-9475 LA209.2.T47 Considers dispassionately efforts by pressure groups to restrict freedom of teaching and negate the separation of church and state. 5239. Woodring, Paul. Let's talk sense about our schools. New York, McGraw-Hill, 1953. 215 p. 53-9020 LA209.2.W65 Partial Contents. — The shadow of John Dewey. — What is progressive education? — The teachers college in America. — The American teacher. — Academic and other freedoms. — Free en- terprise and the teacher. — What we know about how we can teach. — The fundamental issue. — Ap- pendix: Related reading, with comments. Review and appraisal by a professor of psychology of the grounds upon which American public schools are currently being criticized as intellectually arid, undisciplined, and blighted by the predominance of methods over content. EDUCATION / 723 H. Periodicals and Yearbooks 5240. American Association of School Adminis- trators. Yearbook. ist + 1923+ Wash- ington. E23-142 L13.A363 Published by the Association, a department of the National Education Association of the United States. Volumes are monographic in character, as indi- cated by their individual tides, of which the follow- ing are examples: 1932, Character Education; 1934, Critical Problems in School Administration; 1935, Social Change and Education; 1936, The Social Studies Curriculum; 1938, Youth Education Today; 1939, Schools in Small Communities; 1941, Educa- tion for Family Life; 1949, American School Build- ings; and 1953, the American School Curriculum. Each volume is produced by a committee of mem- bers selected for the purpose. 5241. The Education index. ist+ 1929/30 + . A cumulative author and subject index. New York, H. W. Wilson. 30-23807 Z5813.E23 Issued monthly (except in June and August) and cumulated periodically within each year. Annual and biennial cumulations are also provided. In- dexes more than 120 journals, proceedings of socie- ties, bulletins, and other educational serials, and adds references to various monographic materials. A special feature of each number and volume is an index of book reviews, entered in a group under the words, "Book reviews." American interests pre- dominate but material on education in other coun- tries is also indexed when found in the serials analyzed. 5242. The Educational forum, v. 1 + Nov. 1936 + Menasha, Wis., George Banta Pub. Co. 37-35898 L11.E29 Published four times a year. Supersedes the Kadelpian Review. Some numbers in two parts, the second part being a supplement including news of Kappa Delta Pi, an honor society in education, of which this journal is the organ. Articles are broad in interest, being concerned not only with all phases of education in the United States, but also to some degree with education throughout the world. Numerous book reviews are written and signed by specialists; currendy (1957) edited by E. I. F. Williams. 5243. John Dewey Society. Yearbook. ist + New York, Harper, 1937 + 37-27225 L101.U6J6 Monographic studies on such varied topics as the place of the teacher in society, freedom of teaching, democracy and the curriculum, workers' education, intercultural education, and the American elemen- tary school. The society, formed to study the inter- action of education, society, and culture in the United States, honors John Dewey's leadership in American thought and education but is not com- mitted to any specific educational doctrine. Cf. Foreword, vol. 1, p. v. 5244. The Journal of higher education, v. 1 + Jan. 1930+ Columbus, Ohio State Uni- versity. E32-99 L11.J78 Issued monthly (except July-Sept.). Currently edited by R. H. Eckelberry. Professional journal addressed to teachers and ad- ministrators; deals with significant investigations of problems of higher education in the United States, whether instructional, curricular, administrative, or concerned with personnel. 5245. NEA journal, v. 1+ Apr. 1913+ [Wash- ington, National Education Association of the United States] 24-4821 L11.N15 The organ of the National Education Association, designed to keep teachers abreast of educational af- fairs in America, important educational news, and publications considered particularly significant. 5246. National Society for the Study of Education. Yearbook. ist~5th [i895]~99; [new ser.] ist+ 1902+ Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1895+ 6-16938 LB5.N25 Official publication of the Society. Yearbooks are published in two parts, each devoted to a special topic developed in a series of sections written by specialists or by a committee of specialists. Em- phasis is placed on recording research, on innova- tions, and on modern developments. Typical sub- jects treated include: changes and experiments in liberal arts education; vocational education; educa- tion of exceptional children; education in rural com- munities; general education; audio-visual materials of instruction; mass media and education; modern philosophies and education; and mental health in modern education. 5247. Review of educational research, v. 1 + Jan. 1 931+ Washington, American Edu- cational Research Association, a department of the National Educational Association of the United States. 33-19994 L11.R35 724 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Published five times a year, beginning with Feb- ruary, each issue of the journal is devoted to aspects of a specific educational topic, e. g., "Educational Organization, Administration, and Finance" (Oct. 1955); "Growth, Development, and Learning" (Dec. 1955); "Educational and Psychological Test- ing" (Feb. 1956). Edited (1956-57) by Tom A. Lamke. Substantial bibliographies are provided with reviews of the literature. May be used cur- rently to supplement W. S. Monroe's Encyclopedia of Educational Research, described in this chapter under General Works: Historical and Descriptive. 5248. School and society, v. 1 + Jan. 2, 1915 + New York, Society for the Advancement of Education. 17-1407 L11.S36 Issued biweekly; edited (1956) by William W. Brickman. In general, provides a leading article in each number that discusses a timely educational topic, followed by briefer papers relating to various types of education in the United States; includes "News and Notes" of persons and events, and brief lists of recent educational and related publications. 5249. The School review; a journal of secondary education, v. 1 + Jan. 1893+ Chicago, University of Chicago Press. 6-14090 L11.S55 Issued monthly (except June, July, and Aug.). Index: v. 1-10, 1893-1902. 1 v. Features educational news and comments; articles on all phases of secondary education; selected, an- notated references on a different topic in each num- ber; signed book reviews, and lists of current publi- cations. Issued under the direction of the Depart- ment of Education, University of Chicago; edited ( 1956) by Maurice L. Hartung. XXII Philosophy and Psychology A. Philosophy: General Wor\s B. Representative Philosophers C. Psychology 5250-5264 I 5265-5387 p 5388-5393 9 THIS CHAPTER seeks to give some idea of the American achievement in the two fields of philosophy and psychology, which were originally one in academic organization and in the public mind, and have now become almost completely divorced. It has been pre- pared with the full realization that both have been international inquiries coterminous with the higher developments of Western civilization. Until the 19th century was well ad- vanced American philosophy was little more than a reflection of contemporary European currents. Transcendentalism, however much it may have derived from weightier German models, cer- tainly developed a tone and temper all its own; while with the pragmatic movement, which grad- ually crystallized during the 1890's, American philosophical thinking took a quite independent line, and began in its turn to make an impression on Europe, although most of the early reactions there were, to put it mildly, negative. American philosophy has gone its own course ever since, with the two-way currents of influence normal between nations of the West, tempered by the fact that Amer- icans usually pay more attention to what is going on in Europe than vice versa. Section A consists of some general histories and historical anthologies of American philosophy, usually intended for classroom use, together with some accounts of individual movements or schools, and symposiums intended either to develop a par- ticular point of view, or to give a cross section of American philosophical thinking at the time of pub- lication. Specifically religious philosophy, as well as theology, will be found in the following chapter. Much additional matter of relevance to American philosophy is contained in Chapters I on Literature and XI on Intellectual History. Section B presents 18 American philosophers from Jonathan Edwards to the present day, some of whom were eminent in their time and representative of historic currents of thought, while a few are think- ers of true originality and power, whose ideas are alive today and seem likely to remain so. Under each philosopher the entries are arranged in con- formity with the pattern adopted in Chapter I on Literature, and more fully explained in its introduc- tion: individual works arranged by the date of the original edition (although the entry here is often a later edition or reprint, preferred as more readily available); collected works; selected works; and biographical or critical studies. Some earlier fig- ures of note, such as Cotton Mather and Benjamin Franklin, who are treated at length elsewhere, and whose specifically philosophical writings are neither numerous nor striking, have not been included here, although they usually receive some attention in his- tories of American philosophy. Two men, James McCosh and A. N. Whitehead, are included not- withstanding the facts that their minds were formed in Britain and they came to America in middle age with important work behind them, for each be- came thoroughly domesticated, and was looked up to by numerous disciples of native birth. American philosophy has tended, especially since the 1890's, to have its being within the universities; of the many professors who have done distinguished work dur- ing the last 70 years we have been able to give indi- vidual treatment only to a handful. Two subjects 725 726 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES which have flourished in the latest period, symbolic logic and general semantics, have been well-nigh ignored here: the first is so bristling with technicali- ties that books suited for the general reader remain to seek, while the second is still far from any defini- tive form or agreed body of doctrine. Psychology, which since William James has in- creasingly allied itself with the natural sciences, is now flourishing inside the universities and out, where a host of "applied" specialists give counsel to diverse enterprises; she quite overshadows her elder sister, who has shared in the general diminish- ment of the humanities in the present technical age. Our entries for this section are nevertheless few, be- cause among a host of textbooks, monographs, and reported experiments, general views of the American contribution to psychology remain scanty. One whole aspect of present-day psychology, that which takes its origin in the diagnosis and treatment of mental disease or disturbance, is treated not here but in Section C (Psychiatry) of Chapter XVIII on Medicine and Public Health. A. Philosophy: General Works 5250. Adams, George P., and William Pepperell Montague, eds. Contemporary American philosophy; personal statements. New York, Mac- millan, 1930. 2 v. (Library of philosophy) 31-15738 B934.C6 1930a "Principal publications" at end of each statement. Thirty-three professors of philosophy, represent- ing colleges and universities from Harvard and Co- lumbia to Michigan and California, present in this work their principal philosophic beliefs and the in- fluences which they suppose to have given rise to them. Some of these "philosophic autobiographies" stress early life experiences, while others are nearly all theory. An exceptionally attractive paper is the introduction by George Herbert Palmer (1842- 1933); writing as "a kind of representative of the philosophic young men of my time," he deals not only with his personal experiences and beliefs, but with the golden age of philosophy at Harvard. Con- tributors to the symposium were selected by a vote of the membership of the American Philosophical Association. 5251. Anderson, Paul Russell, and Max Harold Fisch. Philosophy in America from the Puritans to James, with representative selections. New York, Appleton-Century, 1939. 570 p. (The Century philosophy series) Bibliography: p. [543 ]-$62. 39-13842 B851.A5 In large part this is an anthology of writings by American philosophers. The plan followed called for the inclusion of documents not readily accessible; this has led to a somewhat heavier emphasis on the early periods, with extracts from work by figures such as Samuel Johnson, Cadwallader Colden, Ethan Allen, Thomas Cooper, Benjamin Rush, and Samuel Stanhope Smith, as well as by later and better known philosophers. Introductions to each of the volume's four parts help to provide a general view of the main currents of development of phi- losophy in the United States. 5252. Barrett, Clifford, ed. Contemporary ideal- ism in America. New York, Macmillan, 1932. 326 p. Z^wjo B941.B3 Contents. — In dedication: Josiah Royce, by G. H. Palmer. — Introduction, by Clifford Barrett. — Continuity of the idealist tradition, by C. M. Bake- well. — The ontological argument in Royce and others, by W. E. Hocking. — On the meaning situ- ation, by G. W. Cunningham. — The philosophy of spirit: idealism and the philosophy of value, by W. M. Urban. — The principle of individuality and value, by J. A. Leighton. — The finite self, by E. S. Brightman. — God and cosmic structure, by J. E. Boodin. — The theory of moral value, by R. A. Tsanoff. — The meaning of obligation, by C. W. Hendel, Jr. — The revival of idealism in the United States, by R. F. A. Hoernle. In this book a dozen philosophers take their stand for philosophical idealism, and express their sense of the inadequacy of the dominant realist move- ment. These idealists are basically in the tradition of Josiah Royce (q. v.). 5253. Blau, Joseph L. Men and movements in American philosophy. New York, Prentice- Hall, 1952. 403 p. 52-8596 B851.B52 "Footnotes and suggested reading": p. 357-383. "What is attempted here is an introductory ac- count, stressing the more formal side of our philo- sophic history, to provide a background for the general reader and the beginning student which will enable them to read further both in and about American philosophy." Each of nine periods or movements is first discussed in a general way, and then through three of its representative figures. PHILOSOPHY AND PSYCHOLOGY / 727 5254. Creative intelligence; essays in the prag- matic attitude, by John Dewey [and others]. New York, Holt, 1917. 467 p. 17-6640 B832.C7 Contents. — The need for recovery of philosophy, by J. Dewey. — Reformation of logic, by A. W. Moore. — Intelligence and mathematics, by H. C. Brown. — Scientific method and individual thinker, by G. H. Mead. — Consciousness and psychology, by B. H. Bode. — The phases of the economic inter- est, by H. W. Stuart. — The moral life and the construction of values and standards, by J. H. Tufts. — Value and existence in philosophy, art, and religion, by H. M. Kallen. Pragmatism, indubitably the best known specifi- cally American contribution to philosophy, has not been defined, either by its exponents or its oppo- nents, in such manner as to win general assent, and there is perhaps a wider span of opinion among its adherents than is the case with other major schools of thought. It can be given a narrow logical defini- tion, such as "the doctrine that the whole meaning of a conception expresses itself in practical conse- quences," but it can be more generally regarded as a serious attempt to domicile in philosophy the evolutionary viewpoint and the crucial importance of scientific experiment. The latter views appear in the "Prefatory Note" to the present work, which identifies the authors' attitude with "the ideas of the genuineness of the future, of intelligence as the organ for determining the quality of that future so far as it can come within human control, and of a courageously inventive individual as the bearer of a creatively employed mind." Of the eight con- tributors to this symposium, five taught in the Mid- dle West and two on the Pacific coast; their essays discuss the application of the pragmatic attitude to logic, mathematics, physical science, psychology, ethics, economics, and to esthetics and religion. Three of the major figures identified with pragma- tism, Dewey, James, and Peirce, appear in the fol- lowing section on individual philosophers. An interesting anthology, Pragmatism and American Culture, edited by Gail Kennedy, is entered in Chapter VIII above (no. 3 115). Two expositions dating from the era when the movement was gain- ing self-consciousness and public attention are Henry Heath Bawden's The Principles of Pragmatism, a Philosophical Interpretation of Experience (Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1910. 364 p.) and Addison Web- ster Moore's Pragmatism and Its Critics (Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1910. 283 p.). The criticism that pragmatism sought to operate in a metaphysical void was answered by Sidney Hook in his earliest book, The Metaphysics of Pragma- tism (Chicago, Open Court Pub. Co., 1927. 144 p.). A study of the movement's greatest sphere of prac- tical influence, the primary and secondary schools of the United States, is John L. Child's American Pragmatism and Education, an Interpretation and Criticism (New York, Holt, 1956. 373 p.). The movement has had some foreign affiliations; the English ones are noticed in Emmanuel Leroux's Le Pragmatisme americain et anglais, etude historique et critique (Paris, Alcan, 1923. 429 p.). Its stu- dents have naturally searched for American ante- cedents prior to James and Peirce; a work of this type is Eduard Baumgarten's Der Pragmatismus: R. W. Emerson, W. James, /. Dewey (Frankfurt am Main, Klostermann, 1938. 483 p.). 5255. Essays in critical realism; a co-operative study of the problem of knowledge. London, Mac- millan, 1920. 244 p. 21-11051 B835.E7 Contents. — The approach to critical realism, by D. Drake. — Pragmatism versus the pragmatist, by A. O. Lovejoy. — Critical realism and the possibility of knowledge, by J. B. Pratt. — The problem of error, by A. K. Rogers. — Three proofs of realism, by G. Santayana. — Knowledge and its categories, by R. W. Sellars. — On the nature of the datum, by C. A. Strong. A further symposium in which five American professors of philosophy joined with Charles Augus- tus Strong, an Englishman who had taught at Columbia, and George Santayana (nos. 5365-5377), then resident abroad, to present an epistemological doctrine upon which they were in fairly complete agreement, although they held "somewhat different ontological views." Their principal aim was to con- vict the "new realists" of 19 12 (no. 5260) of a naive view of knowledge, and to replace it with a more sophisticated and complex one, in which the character-complexes or "essences" of perception are distinguished from the sense of their outer exis- tence. There is thus a triple relationship between the mind, the essences of perception, and the exist- ents known, and the validity of any cognitive ex- perience "must be tested by other means than the intuition of the moment." This symposium, to- gether with its predecessor, made epistemological debate the major interest of American philosophy for more than a decade. 5256. Frothingham, Octavius Brooks. Transcen- dentalism in New England; a history. New York, Putnam, 1876. 395 p. 10-28608 B905.F7 The author, some of whose work is discussed in the annotation to his life of George Ripley (no. 2279), was a Unitarian clergyman whose views eventually became too advanced even for the elastic limits of that fold. He says that transcendental- ism actually did not exist outside New England; but he treats of its antecedents in Europe, as well as describing its American beginnings, its practical 728 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES applications (notably Brook Farm), and its out- standing personalities. Sympathetic, uncritical, and written in the formal style of the period, his account is in part based on personal knowledge and remains valuable as a sourcebook. Perry Miller's The Tran- scendentalists (no. 2346) is an anthology of writ- ings by those who took part in this philosophical movement. 5257. Hook, Sidney, ed. American philosophers at work; the philosophic scene in the United States. New York, Criterion Books, 1956. 512 p. 56-11398 B934.H6 This anthology attempts "to meet the natural and almost universal curiosity about what American philosophers are doing, about what lies at the center of their contemporary intellectual concern." The editor states that all important philosophical move- ments are represented, but that practical considera- tions have prevented the inclusion of all important individual thinkers. Most of the contributions are reprints of magazine articles; a smaller number are extracts from books published or to be published; a very few are papers printed for the first time. Nine philosophers contribute to part 1 on "Logic and Scientific Method," ten to part 2 on "Meta- physics and Theory of Knowledge," and ten to part 3 on "Ethics and Social Philosophy." At the end is a section of "Biographical Notes" on contributors (p. 499-507). The editor remarks that American philosophers are independent thinkers, that most of them adhere to no school, and that they rarely agree. 5258. Kallen, Horace M., and Sidney Hook, eds. American philosophy today and tomorrow. New York, Furman, 1935. 518 p. 36-722 B934.K3 Five years after the appearance of Contemporary American Philosophy (no. 5250), a different pair of editors produced a similar volume comprising the views of "twenty-five representative American thinkers." These are described as the younger gen- eration (their birth dates range from 1873 to 1907, as against 1859 to 1885 for the earlier group). Space limitations forced the editors to include only those who had not previously published their philosophic self-portraits. The atmosphere in this volume is less formal than in the earlier work; nearly all are trained philosophers, but not all have become teachers of philosophy, which makes for greater diversity of theme. 5259. Muelder, Walter G., and Laurence Sears, eds. The development of American philosophy; a book of readings. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1940. 533 p. 4 0_ 33 2 73 B851.M8 Contents. — pt. 1. Early philosophical theology and idealism. — pt. 2. The period of the American enlightenment. — pt. 3. Transcendentalism. — pt. 4. Evolution. — pt. 5. Idealism from William T. Harris to James E. Creighton. — pt. 6. Pragmatism and crit- ical empiricism. — pt. 7. Realism and naturalism. — pt. 8. Recent perspectives in American idealism. This anthology puts less stress on the early period than does the one of Anderson and Fisch (no. 5251). It nevertheless covers more ground, for it continues well beyond James to such contemporary philoso- phers as Santayana, Edgar S. Brightman, and Sid- ney Hook. In addition to providing introductions and bibliographies for each part, the editors, with the object of helping the student to develop a sense of philosophical criticism, have wherever feasible included "a critical discussion of a school of thought by an outstanding representative of another point of view"; thus Arthur O. Lovejoy is brought in to reply to the pragmatists, and Irving Babbitt to reply to the naturalists. 5260. The New Realism: cooperative studies in philosophy. New York, Macmillan, 1912. 491 p. 12-18627 BD161.N4 Contents. — Introduction. — The emancipation of metaphysics from epistemology, by W. T. Marvin. — A realistic theory of independence, by R. B. Perry. — A defense of analysis, by E. G. Spaulding. — A real- istic theory of truth and error, by W. P. Monta- gue. — The place of illusory experience in a realistic world, by E. B. Holt. — Some realistic implications of biology, by W. B. Pitkin. Both manifesto and symposium, this was the first in a series of similar volumes which gave to con- temporaries a sense of significant development in American philosophy, and certainly indicated that the long-unchallenged reign of neo-Hegelianism in the universities was at an end. "The Program and First Platform of Six Realists," reprinted here as an appendix, appeared in the Journal of Philosophy, Psychology, and Scientific Method for July 21, 1910; the same six, teachers of philosophy at Columbia, Harvard, Princeton, and Rutgers, elaborated their views in the present volume. The "Introduction" (p. 1-42) is a joint statement upon which all agreed; the six essays which follow are more personal de- velopments of the same general oudook. All six sought an escape from subjectivism, with which they identified the hitherto reigning philosophy, idealism, based upon "the fallacy of argument from the ego-centric predicament." All sought a return "to that primordial common sense which believes in a world that exists independently of the knowing of it," and that can be directly presented in con- sciousness. This did not lead to monism, for the things of thought were as real as the things of sense, logical entities as real as physical ones. PHILOSOPHY AND PSYCHOLOGY / 729 5261. Schneider, Herbert W. A history of Amer- ican philosophy. New York, Columbia Uni- versity Press, 1946. xiv, 646 p. (Columbia studies in American culture, no. 18) A47-737 B851.S4 This survey which relates philosophical ideas to the general development of American society, ranges from the work of John Cotton and Thomas Hooker to that of John Dewey. It includes not only pro- fessional philosophers, but also philosophical bellet- rists, historians, scientists, and economists, and therefore approximates a general intellectual history. Numerous quotations convey the individuality of the several writers. The "Guides to the Literature" at the end of each part point the way for further exploration of the periods covered, and are supple- mented by occasional lists of the most important works of an author or the major publications of a period. So far as contemporaries are concerned, Professor Schneider does not claim comprehensive- ness, asserting that "a decidedly new chapter in American philosophy is being written, the outlines of which we still cannot see." A companion volume is American Philosophic Addresses, ijoo-igoo (New York, Columbia University Press, 1946. 762 p. Columbia studies in American culture, 17), edited by Joseph L. Blau. It aims to provide the student with specimen works of literary value which elaborate the ideas dealt with in Schneider's History. There are presented 27 pieces, all but one of which were prepared for oral delivery, as sermons, ora- tions, lectures, etc. Each is provided with a short introduction which places it in its historical context and supplies a chronology of the writer's life. All these addresses, the editor says, "have one distin- guishing characteristic; all are speculative in nature." Each is "a popularized statement of a philosophic outlook as well as a call to a particular action or belief." 5262. Townsend, Harvey Gates. Philosophical ideas in the United States. New York, American Book Co., 1934. 293 p. 34-18313 B858.T6 "Selected bibliography": p. 267-284. A comparatively brief, simple, and undogmatic introduction to the history of American philosophy. To some degree it is dependent upon the more elaborate research of I. Woodbridge Riley's Ameri- can Philosophy, the Early Schools (New York, Dodd, Mead, 1907. 595 p.), and does not attempt to add to the latter 's account of unpublished ma- terials through the early national period. Professor Townsend aims at a genetic method of presentation, and divides our philosophical history into four well- defined periods: one of almost exclusively British influence, until the Revolution; a brief period of French influence; one dominated by German thought and romantic temper, beginning about 1820 and lasting until after the Civil War; and, finally, one of increasing independence and of conscious, professional philosophy. However, he finds that the dominant note of American philosophy has been idealism, in the sense of the ancient doctrine "that the invisible kingdoms furnish the foundation for the visible." A final chapter on "evolutionary naturalism" discusses the thought of James Mark Baldwin, John Dewey, and George Santayana. 5263. Wells, Ronald Vale. Three Christian tran- scendentalists; James Marsh, Caleb Sprague Henry, Frederic Henry Hedge. New York, Colum- bia University Press, 1943. 230 p. (Columbia studies in American culture, no. 12) Bibliography: p. [2171-224. 43rWSZ B905.W4 This work, which originated in a Columbia Uni- versity dissertation, traces the careers of three lesser figures who were drawn into the transcendentalist movement from an orthodox theological back- ground. Marsh (1794-1842), a Congregational minister, was president and later professor of phi- losophy for many years at the University of Ver- mont. Henry (1 804-1 884), of the same commun- ion, became an Episcopalian and served as rector, editor of The Churchman, and professor of mental and moral philosophy at New York University. Hedge (1805-1890), a Unitarian, was long pro- fessor of ecclesiastical history at Harvard. Each in his separate way made a significant contribution to transcendentalist doctrine. 5264. Wiener, Philip P. Evolution and the founders of pragmatism. Cambridge, Har- vard University Press, 1949. 288 p. 49-10659 B818.W63 Through the informal discussions of a group of philosophical liberals who met at Harvard College in the 1860's and early 1870's, there arose the move- ment known as pragmatism, one of the most im- portant in American thought. The issues dis- cussed in these meetings as a result of the publi- cation of Darwin's Origin of the Species, and the points of view of the members as given in their writings, both published and unpublished, are treated comprehensively in this book, which is ad- dressed to the specialist. Professor Wiener ex- pounds in detail the development of the pragmatic ideas of Chauncey Wright, Charles S. Peirce, and William James; in addition he presents valuable accounts of minor members of the Harvard group: John Fiske, Nicholas St. John Green, and Oliver Wendell Holmes, Jr. 431240—60- ^8 730 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES B. Representative Philosophers 5265. AMOS BRONSON ALCOTT, 1799-1888 Alcott, a New Englander who referred to his own version of the transcendentalist philosophy as "personalism," made a greater impression through the spoken word than through his many published writings. His main work, the journals in 50 manuscript volumes, has never been published in its entirety, but only in extracts (no. 187). His writings are largely vitiated by an artificial style which, his contemporaries testify, was not carried over into his natural and forceful conversation. Consequendy it was as a lecturer, an educator, and a friend of most of the prominent transcendental- ists that he exerted his greatest influence. His friendship with Emerson was particularly close and is studied in Hubert H. Hoeltje's Sheltering Tree; a Story of the Friendship of Ralph Waldo Emerson and Amos Bronson Alcott (Durham, N. C, Duke University Press, 1943. 209 p.). Alcott as a teacher is studied in McCuskey's Bronson Alcott, Teacher (no. 5220). Alcott, who was quite unworldly, undertook a number of ventures which ended in failure. The most conspicuous was his attempt to found a model community, Fruidands, where a few persons might lead an ideal life as a "consociate family." He and his associate, the Englishman Charles Lane, who put up the money, adopted such impractical ideals and devoted so much more time and energy to philosophical discussion than to agri- culture, that their "new Eden" was doomed almost from the start. An account of the experiment com- piled from contemporary sources is Clara E. Sears' Bronson Alcott' s Fruidands (Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1915. 185 p.). 5266. Shepard, Odell. Pedlar's progress; the life of Bronson Alcott. Boston, Little, Brown, 1937. xvi, 546 p. "Bibliographical note": p. 523-528. 37-10152 B908.A54S5 1937a An earlier and more detailed life of Alcott, but without some of the information at Shepard's dis- posal, is A. Bronson Alcott. His Life and Philoso- phy (Boston, Roberts, 1893. 2 v.), by F. B. San- born and William T. Harris (q.v.). 5267. MORRIS RAPHAEL COHEN, 1 880-1 947 Cohen was born in Minsk, Russia, and brought to New York's East Side at the age of 12; the privations of his youth were doubtless responsible for the chronic ill-health which hampered his career and especially the major works he planned but was unable to complete. His first philosophical inspira- tion came from Thomas Davidson, a Scottish neo- Hegelian of wide interests but unsystematic temper; after a few years of teaching in the public schools he was able to attend the Harvard Graduate School in the great days of the Philosophy Department, and obtained his Ph. D. in 1906. After six painfully frustrating years he at last obtained an appointment in philosophy from the College of the City of New York ( 1912), and taught there and at the University of Chicago (from 1938) until the failure of his health in 1942. He did not achieve a complete formulation of his philosophical ideas, of which he gave a pre- liminary expression in Reason and Nature below. Most of his writings offer partial aspects or applica- tions of his philosophy; a number of his books were posthumously assembled, through the editorship of his son, Felix S. Cohen, out of miscellaneous publi- cations and incomplete manuscripts. Cohen com- bined a strong sense of traditional values with a con- viction of the importance of the scientific outlook and the need for a reformed logic. His most finished work is concerned with the philosophy of scientific method: An Introduction to Logic and Scientific Method (New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1934. 467 p.), which he wrote with Ernest Nagel; A Preface to Logic (New York, Holt, 1944. 209 p.); and the posthumously collected Studies in Philosophy and Science (New York, Holt, 1949. 278 p.). Cohen called himself "a stray dog unchained to any meta- physical kennel"; his thought rejects the transcen- dental, but gives a greater role to the active human reason than does other recent naturalism; he rejects ethical absolutism, but finds the formulation of ethi- cal principles a necessity in the ordering of human conduct. Cohen's influence upon his pupils and associates was enormous; he was, without much doubt, a philosopher whose greatness is inadequately expressed in the corpus of his wridngs. His doc- trines and some of the problems which he raised are discussed in Freedom and Reason: Studies in Philos- ophy and Jewish Culture, in Memory of Morris Raphael Cohen (Glencoe, 111., Free Press, 1951. 468 p.), edited by Salo W. Baron, Ernest Nagel, and Koppel S. Pinson. 5268. Reason and nature; an essay on the meaning of scientific method. [2d ed.] Glencoe, 111., Free Press, 1953. xxiv, 470 p. 53,-W* B945.C53R4 1953 Originally published in 193 1, this was the author's first book, and remained the most considerable state- PHILOSOPHY AND PSYCHOLOGY / 73 1 ment of his general philosophical outlook. He de- scribed it as an "effort to formulate a more or less integrated view of life and existence without aban- doning the painfully critical methods and standards of science." He was fully aware that it was an in- complete work, but published it as a stopgap to meet what he considered a grave need for a new philo- sophical approach. As soon as it appeared he began to make notes for the second edition, which incor- porates his considered revisions made over a period of 16 years. 5269. Law and the social order; essays in legal philosophy. New York, Harcourt, Brace, »933- 4°3 P- L^ 33" I 3 I 99 Cohen was long concerned with legal philosophy and its relationship to social problems. Reason and Law; Studies in Juristic Philosophy (Glencoe, 111., Free Press, 1950. 211 p.) reflects this concern. He made an original contribution to the philosophy of history in The Meaning of Human History (La Salle, 111., Open Court Pub. Co., 1947. 304 p.), one of the most distinguished American works in this field. 5270. A Dreamer's journey; . . . autobiography. Boston, Beacon Press, 1949. 318 p. 49-7881 B945.C54A3 1949 "Bibliography of the published writings of Morris R. Cohen": p. 291-303. Cohen did not complete this autobiography, and some of its earlier chapters which appear continuous were but portions or sketches of what he intended to write. Books 7 and 8 are a collection of personal essays and fragments assembled by the author's son. Two of these essays are concerned with Judaism; a larger collection of Cohen's writings on this sub- ject was made in 1950: Reflections of a Wondering Jew (Boston, Beacon Press, 1950. 168 p.). The extraordinary range of Cohen's mind is exhibited in a collection of his articles from periodicals which he published shortly before his death: The Faith of a Liberal (New York, Holt, 1946. 497 p.); the 12 sections into which its 51 items are grouped in- clude "Politico-Economic Issues," "Literature and Literary Criticism," and "Education"; and there are essays on "Why I am not a Communist" and "Base- ball as a National Religion." 5271. JOHN DEWEY, 1859-1952 Since the death of William James, Dewey has been the most influential of American philoso- phers. His emphasis on educational theory and the practical applications of philosophy has resulted in large-scale changes in American education; these are discussed in Chapter XXI on Education (q.v.). His other wide-ranging interests have also given him influence, at minimum as an opponent to be an- swered, in most philosophic fields actively cultivated in the first half of the 20th century. Dewey started as a neo-Hegelian interested in resolving the con- flict between theology and science, especially with respect to the Darwinian theory of evolution. Dur- ing the 1890's he developed into a pragmatist follow- ing the lead of William James, and then went be- yond James to head his own school of philosophy. His philosophy is grounded on his belief in the experimental approach of science and his postulate that experience is the fundamental source of knowl- edge and conduct. This has caused him to be called an experimentalist; he has referred to his own phi- losophy as instrumentalism. It should be noted, however, that despite the "materialistic," "prag- matic," "scientific," and "experiential" aspects of Dewey's philosophy, it has at its core a considerable amount of the idealism which has been inherent in most American philosophy, as seen in its main line of development through such thinkers as Jefferson, Emerson, and James. Nature is regarded as malle- able by mind. In fact, it is this "idealism" that has led a number of Marxists to write strong attacks on Dewey and Deweyism. These constitute but a small part of the many works which have been written about Dewey, as a leading and controversial phi- losopher; such writings are represented here only in part. Dewey himself during a long lifetime was unusually prolific, so that it has been possible to cite here only a part of his writings, selected as repre- sentative of his varied interests. 5272. Psychology. New York, Harper, 1887. 427 p. 10-13718 BF131.D5 This, Dewey's first published book, was intended as a textbook, and is in many ways derivative. It shows his interests and position in his early years, and it has the additional merit of being one of the early attempts to establish psychology as an inde- pendent science separate from philosophy. A third, slightly revised edition appeared in 1891. 5273. Ethics. Rev. ed. By John Dewey and James H. Tufts. New York, Holt, 1938. 528 p. 38-31611 BJ1025.D53 1938 This widely used textbook expounds Dewey's moral position; in large part it deals with the ethical problems of modern economic societies. The vol- ume was first published in briefer form in 1908. Tufts was Dewey's colleague during his 10 years at the University of Chicago (1 894-1 904) and was sole author of a number of works on ethics, as well as translator of Wilhelm Windelband's standard His- tory of Philosophy. 732 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 5274. The Influence of Darwin on philosophy, and other essays in contemporary thought. New York, Holt, 1910. 309 p. 10-10721 B945.D4314 1910 Essays of interest as showing separately some of the pragmatic and idealistic elements which Dewey was later to fuse more fully into a philosophic sys- tem. "The influence of Darwin upon philosophy resides in his having conquered the phenomena of life for the principle of transition, and thereby freed the new logic for application to mind and morals and life." 5275. Essays in experimental logic. Chicago,' University of Chicago Press, 19 16. 444 p. 16-14107 BC50.D42 Dewey made his first generalized philosophical statement about knowledge in Studies in Logical Theory (Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1903. 388 p.). A more fully developed statement appeared in Essays in Experimental Logic, which incorporated and revised part of the material in the earlier work, and added much that was new. This is then, in a sense, his first full statement of his theory of the relation of knowledge to experi- ence and experiment, and thus of his basic philos- ophy of instrumentalism. The ideas were briefly presented with an application to education in How We Thinly (Boston, Heath, 1910. 224 p.). A further elaboration of his general theory of logic may be found in his Logic, the Theory of Inquiry (no. 5283). 5276. Reconstruction in philosophy. Enl. ed. with a new introd. by the author. Boston, Bea- con Press, 1948. xlvii, 224 p. 49-1234 B945.D43R4 1948 This book originated in lectures delivered at the Imperial University of Japan in 1919 and was first published the following year. Dewey sought "to exhibit the general contrasts between older and newer types of philosophic problems" in the changed conceptions of nature provided by science, of experience and reason, and of the ideal and the real, pointing to reconstruction in logic, morals, and social philosophy. In the introduction to the 1948 edition Dewey expressed his "firm belief that the events of the intervening years have created a situation in which the need for reconstruction is vasdy more urgent than when the book was com- posed," and chided recent philosophical tendencies for retreating from the actual. 5277. Human nature and conduct; an introduc- tion to social psychology. With a new introd. New York, Modern Library, 1930. 336 p. (The Modern Library of the world's best books) 30-19598 BF57.D4 1930 In this work, which first appeared in 1922, Dewey treats from the point of view of "the structure and workings of human nature, of psychology when that term is used also in its wider sense," what used to be called morals, including in that term "all the subjects of distincdvely humane import, all of the social disciplines as far as they are in- timately connected with the life of man and as they bear upon the interests of humanity." This is generally regarded as one of Dewey's more im- portant books, and some consider it his first major philosophical work. 5278. Experience and nature. Chicago, Open Court Pub. Co., 1925. 443 p. (Lectures upon the Paul Carus Foundation. 1st ser.) 25-4301 B945.D43E8 Dewey's first large-scale statement of his con- clusions in the crucial borderland where epistemol- ogy and metaphysics meet. Since thinking origi- nates in a problematic situation, the world in which thought operates must have the characters of "genuine hazard, contingency, irregularity, and indeterminateness." The human enterprise is summed up in "the striving to make stability of meaning prevail over the instability of events." A doctoral thesis which studies this aspect of Dewey's philosophy is John J. Batde's The Metaphysical Presuppositions of the Philosophy of John Dewey (Fribourg, 1951. 128 p.). A somewhat similar analysis of the Deweyan premises (tacit and ex- plicit) is William Taft Feldman's The Philosophy of John Dewey, a Critical Analysis (Baltimore, Johns Hopkins Press, 1934. 127 p.). 5279. The Public and its problems, an essay in political inquiry. Chicago, Gateway Books, 1946. 224 p. 46-7355 JC251.D47 1946 In this book, originally published in 1927, Dewey applies his basic idea of problem-solving inquiry to the realm of politics. The public is distinguished from the individual, the state, and the government. Mastery of the arts of inquiry and of communica- tion will permit an organized, articulate public to come into being; the machine age, by perfecting its machinery, will become a means instead of the master of life; and democracy will come into its 5280. The Quest for certainty: a study of the rela- tion of knowledge and acdon. New York, Minton, Balch, 1929. 318 p. (Gifford lectures. 1929) 29-23500 BD161.D4 By the quest for certainty Dewey means the his- tory of philosophy before the "scientific revolution," PHILOSOPHY AND PSYCHOLOGY / 733 and the certainty which it sought to obtain in im- mutable ideas and absolutes is in the nature of things impossible. By its predispositions toward "the uni- versal, invariant, and eternal," the classical tradi- tion in philosophy opened a gulf between theory and practice. Modern science has closed the gulf in the natural realm, with spectacular results, but it still dominates man's thinking in the social and moral realm. The consequent separation of means and ends is most clearly perceptible in the present state of industrial life, brutalized by the failure to regard it "as the means by which social and cultural values are realized." 5281. Philosophy and civilization. New York, Minton, Balch, 193 1. 334 p. 31-28147 B945.D43P5 A collection of 18 philosophical and psychological essays which takes its name from the initial one, and includes Dewey's account of "The Develop- ment of American Pragmatism" (p. 13-35). All its varieties have an essential tenet: "the formation of a faith in intelligence, as the one and indispen- sable belief necessary to moral and social life." 5282. Art as experience. New York, Minton, Balch, 1934. 355 p. 34-27080 N66.D4 A work which, deriving esthetic values from vital ones, forms an integral part of Dewey's philosophy. 5283. Logic, the theory of inquiry. New York, Holt, 1938. 546 p. 38-27918 BC50.D43 This presents a further development of Dewey's theory of logic, which he had earlier presented in Essays in Experimental Logic (q.v.). It seeks to ascertain the common pattern or structure of all in- quiry, whether in common sense or in science, and to trace the genesis of the logical forms which accrue when subject matter is subjected to controlled in- quiry. Of interest in connection with this work is Horace S. Thayer's The Logic of Pragmatism; an Examination of John Dewey's Logic (New York, Humanities Press, 1952. 221 p.). An early histori- cal treatment of Dewey's logical theories may be found in Delton T. Howard's John Dewey's Logical Theory (New York, Longmans, Green, 19 18. 135 p. Cornell studies in philosophy, no. n). 5284. Freedom and culture. New York, Putnam, 1939. 176 p. 39- 2 797 2 JC423.D524 The abandonment of the ideal of freedom in the totalitarian states of Europe induced the octogenar- ian philosopher to restate the interrelations of hu- man nature, culture, and democracy. Democracy, he found, was in real peril, but less from without than from within our own institutions and attitudes. It could be maintained and perfected "only by ex- tending the application of democratic methods, methods of consultation, persuasion, negotiation, communication, co-operative intelligence, in the task of making our own politics, industry, educa- tion, our culture generally, a servant and an evolv- ing manifestation of democratic ideas." Since for Dewey freedom, democracy, and liberalism were all practically identical, his somewhat earlier Page- Barbour lectures at the University of Virginia, Lib' eralism and Social Action (New York, Putnam, 1935. 93 p.), present a similar argument in briefer compass. 5285. Problems of men. New York, Philosophi- cal Library, 1946. 424 p. 46-25157 B945.D43P7 A collection, by the author, of his late essays, orig- inally published as separate articles in various periodicals. 5286. Knowing and the known. By John Dewey and Arthur F. Bendey. Boston, Beacon Press, 1949. 334 p. 49-48030 BD161.D38 In this book Dewey (aet. 90) and Bendey (aet. 79) undertake an investigation comparable to the work of the linguistic and semantic schools of phil- osophic approach that developed in recent decades. This particular work is a "terminological inquiry" resulting from "a startling diagnosis of linguistic disease not only in the general epistemological field, where everyone would anticipate it, but also in the specialized logical field, which ought to be reason- ably immune." The authors accordingly proceed to seek out means for the eventual relative immuni- zation of logic to such linguistic disease. 5287. Intelligence in the modern world; John Dewey's philosophy. Edited, and with an introd. by Joseph Ratner. New York, Modern Library, 1939. xv, 1077 p. (The Modern Library of the world's best books) 39-27121 B945.D41R17 This big volume compiled by one of Dewey's most devoted disciples contains 85 substantial selections, drawn from 19 of Dewey's books as well as from a number of periodical articles, and arranged under 21 headings. It is thus a comprehensive survey of his thought. The "Introduction to John Dewey's Philosophy" (p. 3-241) and the "Editor's Note," on p. 525-566, are themselves the equivalent of a moderate-sized book. 5288. John Dewey: his contribution to the Amer- ican tradition. [Edited by] Irwin Edman. Indianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill, 1955. 322 p. (Makers of the American tradition series) 54-9487 B945.D41E3 734 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES A volume of selections from Dewey's writings, seldom less than a full chapter in length, grouped under seven headings and preceded by a general in- troduction from the pen of the editor, a professor of philosophy at Columbia who died shortly after completing it. In accord with the principles of the series, the selections are made to illustrate "the con- tributions that John Dewey has made to the re- making of American ideas and institutions." This involves outlining his general philosophical posi- tion, but excludes much that is technical. 5289. Essays in honor of John Dewey, on the oc- casion of his seventieth birthday, October 20, 1929. New York, Holt, 1929. 425 p. 29-24486 B29.E8 Contents. — Personality: how to develop it in the family, the school, and society, by Felix Adler. — Religious values and philosophical criticism, by E. S. Ames. — Evolution and time, by A. G. A. Balz. — Art, action, and affective states, by H. C. Brown. — Two basic issues in the problem of meaning and of truth, by Edwin Burtt. — Kant, Aquinas, and the problem of reality, by Cornelius Clifford. — A prag- matic approach to being, by W. F. Cooley. — Conso- lation and control. A note on the interpretation of philosophy, by J. J. Coss. — A philosophy of experi- ence as a philosophy of art, by Irwin Edman. — Dimensions of universality in religion, by H. L. Friess. — A criticism of two of Kant's criteria of the aesthetic, by Kate Gordon. — A pragmatic critique of the historico-genetic method, by Sidney Hook. — Certain conflicting tendencies within the present- day study of education, by W. H. Kilpatrick. — Causality, by S. P. Lamprecht. — Externalism in American life, by M. T. McClure. — The empiricist and experimentalist temper in the middle ages. A prolegomenon to the study of mediaeval science, by Richard McKeon. — The nature of the past, by G. H. Mead. — A functional view of morals, by S. F. MacLennan. — A materialistic theory of emergent evolution, by W. P. Montague. — What is meant by social activity? By E. C. Moore. — The cult of chronology, by Helen H. Parkhurst. — Dualism in metaphysics and practical philosophy, by J. H. Randall, Jr. — Prolegomena to a political ethics, by A. K. Rogers. — Radical empiricism and religion, by H. W. Schneider. — The role of the philosopher, by T. V. Smith. — A methodology of thought, by John Storck. — Individualism and American life, by J. H. Tufts. — Looking to philosophy, by Matilde C. Tufts. — Some implications of Locke's procedure, by F. J. E. Woodbridge. 5290. The Philosopher of the common man; essays in honor of John Dewey to celebrate his eightieth birthday. New York, Putnam, 1940. 228 p. 40-8301 B945.D44P5 Contents. — Ratner, Sidney. Foreword. — Kallen, H. M. Freedom and education. — Murphy, A. E. Dewey's theory of the nature and function of phi- losophy. — Nagel, Ernest. Dewey's reconstruction of logical theory. — Barnes, A. C. Method in aes- thetics. — Randall, J. H., Jr. The religion of shared experience. — Hamilton, Walton. A Deweyesque mosaic. — Patterson, E. W. Pragmatism as a phi- losophy of law. — Hu, Shih. The political philoso- phy of instrumentalism. — Dewey, John. Creative democracy, the task before us. 5291. Hook, Sidney, ed. John Dewey, philoso- pher of science and freedom; a symposium. New York, Dial Press, 1950. 383 p. 50-7272 B945.D44H473 Contents. — John Dewey and the spirit of prag- matism, by H. M. Kallen. — Dewey and art, by I. Edman. — Instrumentalism and the history of philos- ophy, by G. Boas. — Culture and personality, by L. K. Frank. — Social inquiry and social doctrine, by H. L. Friess. — Dewey's theories of legal reasoning and valuation, by E. W. Patterson. — Dewey's con- tribution to historical theory, by S. Ratner. — John Dewey and education, by J. L. Childs. — Dewey's revision of Jefferson, by M. R. Konvitz. — Laity and prelacy in American democracy, by H. W. Schnei- der. — Organized labor and the Dewey philosophy, by M. Starr. — The desirable and emotive in Dewey's ethics, by S. Hook. — John Dewey's theory of in- quiry, by F. Kaufmann. — Dewey's theory of nat- ural science, by E. Nagel. — Concerning a certain Deweyan conception of metaphysics, by A. Hof- stadter. — Dewey's theory of language and meaning, by P. D. Wienpahl. — Language, rules and behavior, by W. Sellars. — The analytic and the synthetic; an untenable dualism, by M. G. White. — John Dewey and Karl Marx, by J. Cork. — Dewey in Mexico, by J. T. Farrell. — A selected bibliography of publica- tions by John Dewey (p. 381-382). — Some publica- tions about John Dewey (p. 383). On reaching his 70th birthday, John Dewey was the unrivaled dean of American philosophers, and was accordingly honored with a Festschrift by his colleagues, pupils, and friends, in which all con- tributors acknowledged "a common stimulus in the leading ideas of a fertile mind," but presented their own thoughts. Mr. Dewey having reached his 80th birthday in remarkably good order, a further sym- posium was produced, the contributors to which aimed to state his key ideas for the general public in unacademic language. On his 90th birthday Mr. Dewey was still alive and a national committee to celebrate it was formed, which sponsored the third symposium, with 20 contributors, largely professors PHILOSOPHY AND PSYCHOLOGY / 735 of philosophy, all concerned with particular aspects of Dewey's thought or influence. 5292. Hook, Sidney. John Dewey, an intellectual portrait. New York, John Day, 1939. 242 p. 39-27986 B945.D44H47 A nontechnical statement of Dewey's leading ideas in a variety of fields, together with a statement of important criticisms and a reply to them, by one of Dewey's best-known followers. 5293. Leander, Folke. The philosophy of John Dewey; a critical study. Goteborg, Elanders Boktryckeri Aktiebolag, 1939. 154 p. (Goteborgs kungl. vetenskaps- och vitterhets- Samhalles hand- lingar. 5. foljden, ser. A, bd. 7, no. 2) A4 1-4 123 AS284.G7, fol. 5, ser. A, bd. 7, no. 2 "The aim of this book is a critical inquiry into the basic postulates of Dewey's philosophy." — In- troduction. 5294. Schilpp, Paul A., ed. The philosophy of John Dewey. [2d ed.] New York, Tudor Pub. Co., 195 1. 718 p. (The Library of living philosophers) 51-6324 B945.D44S35 195 1 Contents. — Biography of John Dewey, edited by Jane M. Dewey. — Descriptive and critical essays on the philosophy of John Dewey. — The philosopher replies. John Dewey: Experience, knowledge and value: a rejoinder. — Bibliography of the writings of John Dewey (p. 611-686). This volume is intended to supplement Dewey's own writings by providing something of a reso- lution of conflicting interpretations. It consists of "a series of expository and critical articles written by the leading exponents and opponents of the phi- losopher's thought," followed by the philosopher's reply. The book first appeared in 1939; the prin- cipal change in the second edition is the bringing up to date of the bibliography. 5295. White, Morton G. The origin of Dewey's instrumentalism. New York, Columbia University Press, 1943. 161 p. (Columbia studies in philosophy, no. 4) 43-1850 B945.D44W45 1943 A documented study of Dewey's progressive "conversion" from idealism to instrumentalism. 5296. Nathanson, Jerome. John Dewey; the re- construction of the democratic life. New York, Scribner, 1951. 127 p. (Twentieth century library) 51-6859 B945.D44N3 A concise presentation of Dewey's ideas in the fields of philosophy, education, and psychology, to- gether with an estimate of his influence. 5297. JONATHAN EDWARDS, 1703-1758 In Puritan New England philosophy was conceived of as the basis for and rationalization of theology. Edwards was the leading exponent of the Congregationalist Calvinism of his day. A well- educated man, he was aware of philosophical move- ments in Europe, and could draw upon them in constructing his notable defenses of orthodoxy, such as The Great Christian Doctrine of Original Sin Defended (Boston, S. Kneeland, 1758. xviii, 386 p.) and his famous Enquiry into the freedom of the will (no. 26). Edwards was also a master of the new expository prose, and thus one of the major figures in colonial literature; his main writings are listed and discussed in Chapter I on Literature (nos. 21- SO- 5298. The Philosophy of Jonathan Edwards from his private notebooks. Edited by Harvey G. Townsend. Eugene, University of Oregon, 1955. xxii, 270 p. (University of Oregon monographs. Studies in philosophy, no. 2) 55-63038 B870.A5 1955 Contents. — Of being. — The mind. — Miscellanies. 5299. Miller, Perry. Jonathan Edwards. [New York] Sloane Associates, 1949. xv, 348 p. (The American men of letters series) 49-50164 BX7260.E3M5 1949 "A note on the sources": p. 331-333. The life of Edwards was eventful only in its intellectual development, and Professor Miller is concerned here with tracing his career as a thinker. More details of his life as a clergyman and pater- familias are given in Ola Elizabeth Winslow's Jonathan Edwards, IJ03-1758 (New York, Mac- millan, 1940. 406 p.). Another study of Edwards' philosophical position is Arthur B. Crabtree's Jonathan Edwards' View of Man; a Study in Eighteenth Century Calvinism (Wallington, Eng., Religious Education Press, 1948. 64 p.). 5300. RALPH WALDO EMERSON, 1803-1882 The leading figure in the transcendental movement, Emerson was considered by Royce to be one of the three outstanding American philosophers. He was not so much a systematic thinker as a poetic philosopher more inclined to trust his intuition than his reason. He was nevertheless a scholar familiar with many of the world's philosophies, and these he in large measure assimilated into his work, which had as its base the Puritan tradition that had been developing for several centuries. Because Emer- son's philosophy was expressed in essays, lectures, and poetry of unusual merit, his works appear in 736 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Chapter I on Literature (nos. 280-306), where he is discussed in greater detail. 5301. Gray, Henry David. Emerson; a statement of New England transcendentalism as ex- pressed in the philosophy of its chief exponent. Stanford University, Calif., The University, 19 17. no p. (Leland Stanford Junior University publi- cations. University series [29]) 17-30128 PS1642.P4G72 Published also as thesis (Ph. D.) Columbia Uni- versity, 1905. Bibliography: p. [io5]-io7. 5302. JOHN FISKE, 1842-1901 Fiske's importance is that of a lucid popu- larizer who introduces a nation to new ways of thought. Influenced principally by the philosophy of Herbert Spencer, Fiske early endorsed Darwin- ian evolutionism. Much of his popularity resulted from his "reconciling" the new scientific doctrines with the theological orthodoxies which he con- tinued to accept. Throughout his mature life he was important not only for his widely read books, but also for the innumerable lectures he delivered. His first important book was Myths and Myth- Makers (Boston, Osgood, 1873. 251 p.), which revealed one of his wide-ranging interests. He then started building up his lectures into books; his pub- lished articles had already established for him a considerable reputation. In the late 1870's he began to devote most of his attention to history, which remained his main field of activity to the time of his death in 190 1. In history too he was not an original investigator, but a re-stater and popularizer from other historians of his day. In both fields he always displayed rare vigor and lucidity of style and a real probity in his presentation of the find- ings of others. These qualities made him one of the outstanding popular educators and intellectual leaders of the last quarter of the 19th century. After his death his work was collected in a set, The Writings of John Fisk^e (Cambridge, Mass., Riverside Press, 1902. 24 v.). A recent interpre- tation of the nature and evolution of Fiske's thought is H. Burnell Pannill's The Religious Faith of John Fis^e (Durham, N. C, Duke University Press, 1957. 263 p.), which views his work as a restate- ment of the "core of the Christian message which the new science of his day had developed." 5303. Outlines of cosmic philosophy; based on the doctrine of evolution, with criticisms on the positive philosophy. With an introd. by Josiah Royce. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1903. 4 v. 4-21706 B945.F43O76 First issued in 1874, this is Fiske's principal con- tribution to philosophy, in which he presents a complete outline of the new cosmology. It long ranked as a major philosophical work and was highly praised by many of the evolutionary move- ment's scientific and philosophic leaders, who were glad to have Fiske as an ally. 5304. The Letters of John Fiske, edited by his daughter, Ethel F. Fisk. New York, Mac- millan, 1940. 706 p. 41-1890 E175.5.F47 Mrs. Fisk's volume presents her father's letters without any index, introduction, or identifying footnotes. Fiske's letters are lively and unstudied; their interest is such as to make a modern biog- raphy to supplement them seem desirable. John Spencer Clark's The Life and Letters of John Fisl{e (Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 19 17. 2 v.) presents its letters mainly in extracts comprising part of a bio- graphical whole. It is a completely admiring work by a friend and engages in frequent discussion of the philosophy and theology of Fiske's day. A brief sketch by a friend is Thomas Sergeant Perry's John FisJ^e (Boston, Small, Maynard, 1906. 105 p.). 5305. WILLIAM TORREY HARRIS, 1835-1909 Harris began his career as a teacher in St. Louis. He early came under the influence of A. Bronson Alcott (q.v.); then, through his reading of Theodore Parker (q.v.), he was led to study Goethe and Kant. In 1858 he met Henry C. Brokmeyer (1828-1906), the Prussian-born philosophic iron- molder. Through him Harris discovered the phi- losophy of Hegel, which proved a decisive and dominant factor in his life and views. Under Brokmeyer 's lead he took a prominent role in the founding and developing of the Hegelian St. Louis school of philosophy. Aspects of this movement and of the roles of Brokmeyer and Harris are dis- cussed in Frances B. Harmon's The Social Phi- losophy of the St. Louis Hegelians (New York, 1943. 112 p.) and in Henry A. Pochmann's New England Transcendentalism and St. Louis Hegehan- ism; Phases in the History of American Idealism (Philadelphia, Carl Schurz Memorial Foundation, 1948. 144 p.), which also gives considerable atten- tion to the influence of Bronson Alcott. In 1867 Harris founded the Journal of Speculative Philos- ophy, the first journal of its kind in America, and a leading organ for new philosophers until its demise in 1893; it also introduced to America much of the work of Hegel and his German followers. Because of poor health, Harris in 1880 resigned his position of superintendent of the St. Louis public PHILOSOPHY AND PSYCHOLOGY / 737 schools and went to Massachusetts to take part in the founding of the Concord School of Philosophy. In 1889 he became United States Commissioner of Education, a position which he held until 1906. In this period he built up a reputation as a great edu- cator, which has proved more lasting than his con- temporary fame as a leading philosopher. While his philosophy of absolute idealism was rather more sophisticated and formally logical than that of the transcendentalists, it was largely derivative, and rep- resented the end of a movement rather than the beginning of one. The fact that the St. Louis school as a whole produced no important literary work has contributed to its posthumous obscurity. Harris himself wrote much, but most of it took the form of articles and pamphlets, and his use of language was ordinarily lifeless. 5306. Hegel's logic. A book on the genesis of the categories of the mind. A critical exposi- tion. Chicago, S. C. Griggs, 1890. xxx, 403 p. 11-16863 B2949.L8H3 This exposition of the logic of Hegel was Harris' most important single book and a focal work for the Hegelian and neo-Hegelian movements in America. It has been said that in it he cleared up some of Hegel's own obscurities. 5307. Psychologic foundations of education; an attempt to show the genesis of the higher faculties of the mind. New York, Appleton, 1898. xxxv, 400 p. (International education series, edited by W. T. Harris, v. 37) 6-30238 LB1051.H3 This is a statement of Harris' philosophy of edu- cation in the light of the faculty psychology, which by 1898 was rapidly dying out. Studies of Harris' role in education and his educational philosophy in- clude John S. Roberts' William T. Harris; a Critical Study of His Educational and Related Philosophi- cal Views (Washington, National Education Asso- ciation of the United States, 1924. 250 p.) and Carl L. Byerly's Contributions of William Torrey Harris to Public School Administration (Chicago, 1946. 219 p.). 5308. Introduction to the study of philosophy. Comprising passages from his writings se- lected and arr. with commentary and illustration, by Marietta Kies. New York, Appleton, 1889. 287 p. 10-28629 BD31.H3 While Harris himself did not succeed in organiz- ing his philosophical system into one work, Mari- etta Kies, in a master's thesis at the University of Michigan, did manage to select passages from his articles and books in such a way as to present a synoptic view of his system. 5309. Leidecker, Kurt E. Yankee teacher; the life of William Torrey Harris. New York, Philosophical Library, 1946. xx, 648 p. A49-9816 LB875.H25L4 This, the only full-scale biography of Harris, leaves much to be desired as to organization and in- dexing, but contains a wealth of detail gleaned from his diaries and personal correspondence. It treats his philosophical activities as fully as his other pur- suits. Other works on Harris and his philosophy include William Torrey Harris, 1835-1935; a Col- lection of Essays, Including Papers and Addresses Presented in Commemoration of Dr. Harris' Cen- tennial at the St. Louis Meeting of the Western Division of the American Philosophical Society (Chicago, Open Court Pub. Co., 1936. 136 p.), edited by Edward L. Schaub, and William Torrey Harris; the Commemoration of the One Hundredth Anniversary of His Birth (Washington, U.S. Govt. Print. Off., 1937. 70 p.), edited for the U. S. Office of Education by Walton C. John. A more special- ized study is Thomas H. Clare's The Sociological Theories of William Torrey Harris (St. Louis, Mo., 1936. 262 p.). 5310. WILLIAM ERNEST HOCKING, 1873- Dr. Hocking was for 30 years a professor of philosophy at Harvard University until his re- tirement in 1943, and was widely in demand for special lectures in other institutions at home and abroad. A philosopher in the idealist tradition, he has given relatively little attention to epistemology or metaphysics, but has concentrated upon working out an idealist view of religion, ethics, and human personality, usually in harmony with orthodox Christianity. His general survey of problems and characteristic solutions, Types of Philosophy, rev. ed. (New York, Scribner, 1939. xix, 520 p.), was originally published in 1929 and has been widely used as a college textbook for nearly three decades. Professor Hocking has also been extensively con- cerned with social and political problems, in books such as Man and the State (New Haven, Yale Uni- versity Press, 1926. 463 p.), The Spirit of World Politics, with Special Studies of the Near East (New York, Macmillan, 1932. 571 p.), Freedom of the Press, a Framework of Principle; A Report from the Commission on Freedom of the Press (Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1947. 2 4 2 P-)> Experi- ment in Education; What We Can Learn from Teaching Germany (Chicago, Regnery, 1954. 303 p.), and The Coming World Civilization (New York, Harper, 1956. 210 p.). Dr. Hocking's first 54 years of publication are itemized in a compilation of Richard C. Gilman, The Bibliography of William Ernest Hocking, from 1898 to 195 1 (Waterville, 73« / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Me., Colby College, 195 1. 63 p.); it lists 207 books (18), pamphlets, addresses, articles, and letters to the press, and includes an index of principal ideas and references. 531 1. The Meaning of God in human experience; a philosophic study of religion. New Haven, Yale University Press, 1912. xxxix, 586 p. 12-14946 BL51.H6 Dr. Hocking's first book, which established his reputation as a thinker of consequence. Written in the light of the religious thought of his "honored masters," Royce and James, it is an attempt to re- instate, on tbe one hand, religion as a valid and essential form of human experience, and, on the other, philosophy as a sound and reasonable inter- preter of religion. Neither idealism nor pragma- tism has presented an adequate view of religion; it is mysticism, conceived as a practice of union with God, which supplies their deficiencies. "There is no creativity in human life without the Absolute as one party thereto." Living Religions and a World Faith (New York, Macmillan, 1940. 291 p.) is "a discussion of the rightful future relationships of the great religions, what attitudes they should hold to one another, and with what justification we might look forward to the prevalence of one of them as a world faith." 5312. Human nature and its remaking. New and rev. ed. New Haven, Yale University Press, 1923. xxvi, 496 p. 24-362 BF711.H6 1923 Dr. Hocking's highly original treatise on ethics, which first appeared in 1918, assumes that original human nature is a group of instincts, which require to be transformed in order to achieve a social order or the supersocial orders of art and religion. The book originated in an effort to challenge a group of tendencies, Nietzscheian, Freudian, and others, which the author lumps together under the name of moral realism. It affirms that only the mind, rather than any instinct or group of instincts, can experience satisfaction, and insists that, over and above the work of society, there must be the work of the individual will, kept in mind of its proper goals by religion, and most adequately by Christianity. 5313. The Self, its body and freedom. New Haven, Yale University Press, 1928. 178 p. (The Terry lectures) 28-8941 BF311.H6 In these lectures delivered at Yale on the D. H. Terry Foundation, the author is concerned "with the old question, How is the self set in the world of nature?" and aims to contribute in "an untech- nical way toward our sense of proportion in psy- chology." The self is called "a system of purposive behavior emerging from a persistent hope"; the body is regarded as an organ of the self as is, to some extent, the whole of nature; while freedom is the essence of selfhood, and every act of a living self a free act. A later inquiry in a related field is The Lasting Elements of Individualism (New Haven, Yale University Press, 1937. 187 p.), which the author describes as "a study in the philosophy of history — looking forward! It is hostile not to prag- matism, but to mere pragmatism: it believes that our experimentalism is destined to transform itself into a version of the 'dialectic method' whereby mere groping takes on a rational direction and destina- tion. Out of the flux, certainty." 5314. What man can make of man. New York, Harper, 1942. 62 p. 42-17192 BD431.H52 A small book which is an epitome of Dr. Hock- ing's views on the crucial issues of the age. A democratic world cannot be based on the biological or the psychological human creature, but only on the human soul devoted to goals of equality and fraternity which lie beyond scientific measurements. 5315. Science and the idea of God. Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina Press, 1944. 124 p. 44-8718 BL240.H715 In these lectures, originally delivered on the J. C. McNair Foundation at the University of North Carolina in 1940, Dr. Hocking reviews the uneasy truce between science and religion; insists that, while science can tolerate an inactive or nominal God, religion requires an active one; and points out the ill consequences of "getting on without God" in psychology, in sociology, and in cosmology. 5316. The Meaning of immortality in human ex- perience, including Thoughts on death and life, rev. New York, Harper, 1957. 263 p. 57-10950 BD421.H62 A volume built up out of lectures at three uni- versities, which incorporates a revised edition of the author's Thoughts on Death and Life (New York, Harper, 1937. 260 p.). Its temper is far from dogmatic, but it emphasizes the crucial nature of death and survival for human thinking, and em- ploys the relativistic doctrine of a plurality of spaces to suggest that the conditions which make for the concrete freedom of the creative self make equally for the possibility of survival. 5317. GEORGE HOLMES HOWISON, 1834- 1917 Among the exponents of idealism was Howison, whose theory of personalistic pluralism resembled PHILOSOPHY AND PSYCHOLOGY / 739 the philosophy of Borden P. Bowne (1847-1910), but was arrived at independendy. While he holds a firm, if minor, position in the history of American philosophy, Howison's most notable contribution was his long service as professor of mental and moral philosophy at the University of California. His principal statement of his own philosophy was The Limits of Evolution and Other Essays, 2d ed., rev. (New York, Macmillan, 1904. 450 p.). 5318. George Holmes Howison, philosopher and teacher. A selection from his writings, with a biographical sketch, by John Wright Buckham and George Malcolm Stratton. Berkeley, University of California Press, 1934. 418 p. 34-17950 B945.H71B8 "A list of Howison's published writings": p. 381— 387; "A partial list of references to Howison in philosophical publications": p. 389-390. 5319. HENRY JAMES, 1811-1882 James early revolted against traditional re- ligion but retained his intense religious inclinations. After studying and criticizing the philosophy of Swedenborg, he formulated his own philosophical system, which has affiliations both with the Christian tradition and with transcendentalism, but is on the whole an extremely original formulation. God is the assumed starting-point, the Creator and the only reality; Nature is the preliminary and imperfect stage of creation; Society, or "aggregate humanity" redeemed by a pure and altruistic love of man for man, is its redeemed and perfected stage, the in- carnation of God. Democracy, completed on a social and moral level instead of merely a political one, is the forerunner of redeemed Society. These views were expressed in such books as Substance and Shadow: or Morality and Religion in Their Relation to Life: an Essay upon the Physics of Creation (Boston, Ticknor & Fields, 1863. 539 p.), Society the Redeemed Form of Man, and the Earnest of God's Omnipotence in Human Nature: Affirmed in Letters to a Friend (Boston, Houghton, Osgood, 1879. 485 p.), and the autobiographical fragment and the book, "Spiritual Life," in his posthumous Literary Remains (Boston, Osgood, 1885. 471 p.), edited by William James. All are individual in style and organization, and far from easy to read or comprehend, which is sufficient to account for James' very limited influence in his day and since. The elder James has to a large extent been overshadowed by his towering sons, Henry James, Jr., the novelist, and William James, the philosopher. This intellec- tually prominent family is presented in Francis O. Matthiessen's The fames Family: Including Selec- tions from the Writings of Henry fames, Senior, William, Henry, & Alice fames (New York, Knopf, 1947. 706 p.), and in Clinton Hartley Grattan's The Three Jameses; a Family of Minds: Henry fames, Sr., William fames, Henry fames (New York, Longmans, Green, 1932. 376 p.). An inde- pendent biography of Henry James, Sr., is Austin Warren's The Elder Henry fames (New York, Macmillan, 1934. 269 p.). He is also discussed at length in the autobiographical works of his son Henry James, Jr., under whom they are entered in Chapter I on Literature. 5320. Young, Frederic Harold. The philosophy of Henry James, Sr. New York, Bookman Associates, 195 1. xiv, 338 p. 51-5328 B921.J24Y6 A study of James' philosophy, which originated as a Columbia University dissertation. Through the use of frequent quotations the author attempts to present all the key passages from James' writings. The bibliography (p. 321-332) is meant to be ex- haustive. 5321. WILLIAM JAMES, 1 842-1910 William James, son of Henry James, Sr. (vide supra) and brother of the novelist Henry James, Jr. (q. v.), is America's best-known philos- opher. Often classed as a pragmatist, he called himself a "radical empiricist" whose method was "pragmatism." He first studied to become a painter, and when he had decided he was not an artist, studied medicine without intending to prac- tice. He began his career as an instructor in physiology at Harvard; when philosophical prob- lems became paramount for him, he transferred to the Department of Philosophy. This crossing of lines was evidenced throughout his work, but es- pecially in his first major publication, Principles of Psychology. In this and subsequent works James revealed himself not only as an eminent thinker, but also as a quite original stylist, whose unex- pected phrasing could illuminate the most technical matters and suggest the widest relationships of his subject. While his stylistic merits have retained for his works a wide general audience, it is the basic substance of his work which has earned for him an international audience and the reputation of being one of America's few truly great thinkers. One of James' most important works, The Varieties of Religious Experience (1902) is entered in the next chapter (no. 5431). 5322. The Principles of psychology. Authorized ed., unabridged. [New York] Dover Pub- lications, 1950, c i9i8. 2 v. in 1. 50-7801 BF121.J2 1950 740 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES This work, which first appeared in 1890, was one of the major books of the period. While it con- tains many philosophical observations and implica- tions, it is notable as a work that led to the estab- lishment of psychology as a separate science rather than a subdivision of philosophy. In it James re- jected the traditional concept of the mind's inde- pendence of the body; both were presented as aspects of a single natural phenomenon. While the book has been superseded in some details, it remains a basic work in the science of psychology as well as a milestone in the history of philosophy. 5323. The Will to believe, and other essays in popular philosophy. London, New York, Longmans, Green, 1937. xvii, 333 p. 3 8 ~3°375 B945.J23W5 1937 Contents. — The will to believe. — Is life worth living? — The sentiment of rationality. — Reflex ac- tion and theism. — The dilemma of determinism. — The moral philosopher and the moral life. — Great men and their environment. — The importance of individuals. — On some Hegelisms. — What psychi- cal research has accomplished. A collection of 10 essays, most of which were originally delivered as lectures before philosophy groups in a number of colleges, first published in 1897. In them James discusses moral and religious problems in the light of his attitude of radical empiricism. Further papers of the same type will be found in Tall{s to Teachers on Psychology; and to Students on Some of Life's Ideals (New York, Holt, 1899. 301 p.). 5324. Pragmatism, a new name for some old way of thinking; popular lectures on philosophy. London, New York, Longmans, Green, 1940. 308 p. 43-44 2 03 B832.J2 1940 5325. The Meaning of truth, a sequel to "Pragma- tism." New York, Longmans, Green, 1909. xxi, 297 p. 9-27102 B832.J4 Contents. — The function of cognition. — The tigers in India. — Humanism and truth. — The rela- tion between knower and known. — The essence of humanism. — A word more about truth. — Professor Piatt on truth. — The pragmatist account of truth and its misunderstanders. — The meaning of the word truth. — The existence of Julius Caesar. — The absolute and the strenuous life. — Professor Hebert on pragmatism. — Abstractionism and "relativis- mus." — Two English critics. — A dialogue. 5326. A Pluralistic universe; Hibbert lectures at Manchester College on the present situation in philosophy. New York, Longmans, Green, 1909. 404 p. 9-9478 B804.J2 Contents. — 1. The types of philosophic think- ing. — 2. Monistic idealism. — 3. Hegel and his method. — 4. Concerning Fechner. — 5. The com- pounding of consciousness. — 6. Bergson and his critique of intellectualism. — 7. The continuity of experience. — 8. Conclusions. Notes. — Appendixes: A. The thing and its relations. B. The experience of activity. C. On the notion of reality as chang- ing. — Index. An aura of frustration hovered over James' last years. He had damaged his heart in 1898 by over- indulgence in mountaineering, and it was progres- sively giving out. A rounded, systematic, and de- finitive statement of his essential philosophy was gready desired, by others and by himself. He was, however, in enormous demand for public lectures, and did not like to refuse, especially since he was convinced of the desirability of converting the larger public to the empirical outlook. He therefore undertook to lecture upon pragmatism at the Lowell Institute, Boston, in the closing months of 1906, and repeated the lectures at Columbia early in 1907, before audiences of a thousand. The lectures were worked into shape for publication by the early sum- mer, and Pragmatism had a popular effect such as few philosophical books have ever achieved. It also involved its author in a tide of acknowledg- ment, explanation, and controversy which absorbed his energies. This led him to collect his papers on the same or related themes, the oldest of which, "The Function of Consciousness," went back to 1885, in The Meaning of Truth. Nor could a further invitation to lecture at Oxford University in May 1908 be declined, for here was an oppor- tunity to take "the scalp of the Absolute" in the very citadel of its defenders. But, as he complained to one of his chief allies, "this job condemns me to publish another book written in picturesque and popular style" — A Pluralistic Universe. His sands ran out, and the "concise, dry, and impersonal" treatise that he had desired to write remained for- ever unwritten. 5327. Essays in radical empiricism. New impres- sion. London, New York, Longmans, Green, 1938. 282 p. 43-15820 B945.J23E7 1938 Editor's preface signed: Ralph Barton Perry. Contents. — Does "consciousness" exist? — A world of pure experience. — The thing and its re- lations. — How two minds can know one thing. — The place of affectional facts in a world of pure ex- perience. — The experience of activity. — The essence of humanism. — La notion de conscience. — Is radical empiricism solipsistic? — Mr. Pitkin's refutation of "radical empiricism." — Humanism and truth once more. — Absolutism and empiricism. These essays, first published posthumously in PHILOSOPHY AND PSYCHOLOGY / 74 1 1912, are interconnected and had been brought to- gether before his death by James, who apparendy intended some such work as a presentation of his essential philosophical position. The work has therefore more unity than most such collections. 5328. Memories and studies. New York, Long- mans, Green, 191 1. 411 p. 11-26966 B945.J23M5 1911 A volume of essays and addresses which James had been planning to bring together, and were post- humously edited by his brother, Henry James. 5329. Collected essays and reviews. New York, Longmans, Green, 1920. 516 p. Preface signed: Ralph Barton Perry. 21-112 B945.J2 1920 A collection of 39 articles and reviews which had not previously appeared in book form. 5330. The Letters of William James, edited by his son, Henry James. Boston, Adantic Monthly Press, 1920. 2 v. illus. 20-23198 B945.J24A3 1920 These letters reveal the pith and charm of James' informal style, as well as reflecting his strong family attachments, wide range of interests, frequent trav- els, and a farflung and unusually interesting body of friends, together with the progress of his career and the development of his thought. 5331. The Philosophy of William James, drawn from his own works; with an introd. by Horace M. Kallen. New York, Modern Library, 1925. 375 p. (The Modern Library of the world's best books) 26-948 B945.J24A5 1925 "The works of William James": p. 371-375. The "selections which make up this book have been chosen with the view of presenting the philos- ophy of William James systematically in his own words and in convenient compass, with some ap- proximation to that rounded wholeness he himself would have given it had he lived to complete his work." Dr. Kallen was a pupil of James, and was chosen by him to edit the uncompleted manuscript of Some Problems of Philosophy (New York, Long- mans, Green, 191 1. 236 p.), which James had in- tended as an introduction to the subject. 5332. Selected papers on philosophy. London, Dent; New York, Dutton, 1929. xvi, 273 p. (Everyman's library [no. 739]) 37"557 2 AC1.E8, no. 739 "First published in this edition 1917." Introduction by C. M. Bakewell. "The principal works of William James": p. xiii-xv. Contents. — On a certain blindness in human be- ings. — The gospel of relaxation. — The energies of men. — Habit. — The will. — Philosophy and its crit- ics. — The will to believe. — The sentiment of ration- ality. — Great men and their environment. — What pragmatism means. — Humanism and truth. — The positive content of religious experience. 5333. Essays in pragmatism. Edited with an introd. by Alburey Castell. New York, Haf- ner Pub. Co., 1948. xvi, 176 p. (The Hafner library of classics, no. 7) 49-1 115 B945.J23E67 Contents. — The sentiment of rationality. — The dilemma of determinism. — The moral philosopher and the moral life. — The will to believe. — Conclu- sions on varieties of religious experience. — What pragmatism means. — Pragmatism's conception of truth. Selections from James' more popular writings in inexpensive editions designed for college students or the general reader. A brief, very untechnical, and entirely admiring summary of James' thought was prepared by Lloyd R. Morris for Scribner's Twentieth century library: William James; the Message of a Modern Mind (New York, 1950. 98 p.). 5334. Perry, Ralph Barton. The thought and char- acter of William James, as revealed in unpub- lished correspondence and notes, together with his published writings. Boston, Little, Brown, 1935. 2 v. Bibliography at end of each volume. 35-25802 B945.J24P4 Contents. — 1. Inheritance and vocation. — 2. Philosophy and psychology. Perry (1 876-1 957) was a pupil and colleague of James who edited two of his posthumous books and prepared an Annotated Bibliography of the Writ- ings of William fames (New York, Longmans, Green, 1920. 69 p.). A quarter-century after James' death he produced this monumental study of the man and his philosophy, which was rewarded with the Pulitzer prize in biography in 1936. He drew upon some 500 additional letters not included in Henry James' edition of 1920. In 1948 he pub- lished a "briefer version" of this work in one volume (Cambridge, Harvard University Press. 402 p.) which gave less attention to James' immature views, but also incorporated some new manuscript mate- rial of importance. An invitation to lecture at In- diana University gave Perry the opportunity to sum up James' thought in a nontechnical way, and to in- dicate the development of his own thinking out of certain of its strands: In the Spirit of William fames (New Haven, Yale University Press, 1938. 211 p.). Perry himself taught philosophy at Harvard for 44 years (1902-46) and excelled in summaries of re- 742 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES cent thought for the student or general reader, such as Present Philosophical Tendencies: a Critical Sur- vey of Naturalism, Idealism, Pragmatism, and Realism (New York, Braziller, 1955. xv, 383 p.), originally published in 1912, and Philosophy of the Recent Past; an Outline of European and American Philosophy since i860 (New York, Scribner, 1926. 230 p.). His chief original contributions lay in the field of value theory: General Theory of Value (Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1950, c i926. xvii, 702 p.) and Realms of Value; a Critique of Human Civilization (Cambridge, Harvard Univer- sity Press, 1954. 497 p.). 5335. In commemoration of William James, 1842- 1942. New York, Columbia University Press, 1942. 234 p. 42-52145 B945.J24I5 Contents.' — pt. 1. Papers presented at the Confer- ence on Methods in Philosophy and the Sciences, New School for Social Research, New York City, November 23, 1941: Remarks on the occasion of the centenary of William James, by Henry James. Remembering William James, by H. M. Kallen. A debt to James, by D. S. Miller. William James as psychologist, by E. B. Holt. William James as empiricist, by John Dewey. Two questions raised by "The moral equivalent of war," by J. S. Bixler. — pt. 2. Papers presented at the annual meeting of the Eastern division, American Philosophical Asso- ciation, Vassar College, Poughkeepsie, New York, December 29, 194 1: If William James were alive today, by R. B. Perry. The psychology of William James in relation to philosophy, by G. S. Brett. William James and the facts of knowledge, by D. C. Williams. William James as a moralist, by H. W. Schneider. — pt. 3. Papers presented at the annual meeting of the Western division, American Philo- sophical Association, University of Wisconsin, Madi- son, Wisconsin, April 24, 1942: Jamesian psychology and the stream of psychological thought, by J. R. Kantor. William James' pluralistic metaphysics of experience, by Victor Lowe. William James today, by Charles Morris. — pt. 4. Papers from other oc- casions: William James, philosopher of faith, by E. W. Lyman. William James and the crisis of philosophy, by Arnold Metzger. The founder of pragmatism, by W. H. Hill. These addresses were assembled by Professors Brand Blanshard and Herbert W. Schneider. 5336. Wisconsin. University. William James, the man and the thinker; addresses delivered at the University of Wisconsin in celebration of the centenary of his birth. Madison, University of Wis- consin Press, 1942. 147 p. 43-52550 B945.j2 4 W 5 Contents. — William James and Wisconsin, by G. C. Sellery. — The distinctive philosophy of Wil- liam James, by M. C. Otto. — William James, man and philosopher, by D. S. Miller. — William James and psychoanalysis, by Norman Cameron. — The William James centenary dinner: Introductory re- marks, by C. A. Dykstra. William James and the world today, by John Dewey, read by Carl Boegholt. William James in the American tradition, by B. H. Bode. — The Sunday service: William James as religious thinker, by J. S. Bixler. 5337. JAMES McCOSH, 1811-1894 McCosh was born and raised in Scotland, where he entered the ministry in 1834; however, he soon found himself siding by conviction with the liberals, and with them left the established Church of Scotland to found the Free Church of Scotland. McCosh was influenced by the then flourishing Scottish school of philosophy, and at the University of Edinburgh came under the influence of William Hamilton. These debts are reflected in The Scottish Philosophy, Biographical, Expository, Critical, from Hutcheson to Hamilton (New York, R. Carter, 1875. 481 p.), written after he came to America. McCosh's early acceptance of Hamilton's position was soon modified, however, as he discovered a closer affinity for the intuitionism of earlier thinkers of the Scottish school. His dissatisfaction with the naturalism implicit in J. S. Mill's System of Logic (1843) led him to write his first book, The Method of Divine Government, Physical and Moral (Edin- burgh, Sutherland & Knox, 1850. 531 p.). This gained him attention in philosophical circles and led to his appointment to a chair at Queen's College, Belfast, Ireland, where he remained for 16 years. His writings at Belfast included two of his most important philosophical works: The Intuitions of the Mind Inductively Investigated (London, J. Murray, i860. 504 p.) and An Examination of Mr. /. S. Mill's Philosophy; being a Defence of Funda- mental Truth (London, Macmillan, 1866; 2d ed., with additions, New York, Carter, 1871. 470 p.). In 1868 he came to America to assume the position of president of the College of New Jersey (Prince- ton), which he filled with distinction for 20 years. Here he continued to write, but it was probably as a lecturer and educator that he had his greatest influence. His introduction of a modified Scottish intuitionism of "fundamental truth," leading to a "common-sense realism," brought a new philosoph- ical mode to this country and was widely influential. McCosh was also a crucial figure in the controversy centering about the Darwinian theory of evolution, for in the 1870's he was one of the few ministers in the United States to defend the theory, which he viewed as adding to the glory of God's creation; PHILOSOPHY AND PSYCHOLOGY / 743 his views were expressed in The Religious Aspect of Evolution (New York, Putnam, 1888. 109 p.). In America he became increasingly interested in psy- chology and produced several widely read books dealing with the subject. Notwithstanding his earlier career in the British Isles, he may be said to have become the most representative American phi- losopher of his day. He was genuinely receptive to new discoveries and ideas without losing his grasp of religious fundamentals, and is likely to remain a figure both interesting and estimable. 5338. Christianity and positivism: a series of lec- tures to the times on natural theology and apologetics. New York, R. Carter, 187 1. 369 p. 30-11323 BL51.M2 Ten lectures delivered the same year at Union Theological Seminary in New York. 5339. The Emotions. New York, Scribner, 1880. 255 p. 10-21236 BF531.M2 An attempt to understand the psychical problems of the emotions. The author does not "overlook their physiological concomitants and effects," but he enters "little into controversy." 5340. Psychology: the cognitive powers. New York, Scribner, 1886. 245 p. 10-19670 BF121.M2 5341. Psychology: the motive powers, emotions, conscience, will. New York, Scribner, 1887. 267 p. 10-19671 BF121.M22 Widely used as textbooks, these works remained in print into the 20th century, when Jamesian and other psychologies in large part superseded Mc- Cosh's work. 5342. Realistic philosophy defended in a philo- sophic series. New York, Scribner, 1887. 2 v. 12-36367 B835.M3 Contents. — 1. Expository. — 2. Historical and critical. The first volume is a collection of McCosh's philo- sophical papers, which in large part had been pub- lished as separate booklets. The second volume is a series of studies of other philosophers. 5343. First and fundamental truths, being a trea- tise on metaphysics. New York, Scribner, 1889. 360 p. n-31414 BD111.M18 A work which sums up the author's final philo- sophical position. In part it is a reconsideration and rewriting of An Examination oj Mr. J. S. Mill's Phi- losophy; being a Defence of Fundamental Truth (1866), mentioned above. 5344. The Life of James McCosh; a record chiefly autobiographical, edited by William Milligan Sloane. New York, Scribner, 1896. 287 p. 4-16947 LD4605.A3 1868 Bibliography, by Joseph H. Dulles: p. [2691-282. Some of McCosh's co-workers and students, dur- ing the last years of his life, wished to preserve a record of his activities. To this end they induced him to set down reminiscences from time to time; these have here been incorporated with other ma- terial to form a composite biography. 5345. CHARLES SANDERS PEIRCE, 1 839-1914 Opinions of Peirce have varied gready; he has even been called the greatest philosopher of the 19th century. Certainly he has had an extensive influence in the development of thought. However, his attempts at precision resulted in a difficult style, which, combined with his assumption of wide phil- osophical knowledge in his readers (he said he was writing for but one in millions), have left him with a considerable reputation among philosophers and virtual anonymity among the laity. Peirce began his career as a scientist, with intensive training in physics and chemistry, and followed this with ex- tensive incursions into other scientific fields, such as geodesy, astronomy, and psychology. Science was thus a major factor in the development of his phi- losophy, for which he coined the word "pragmatic." With the development of a quite different and more popular pragmatism by his friend, William James, Peirce named his system "pragmaticism." While Peirce produced no one systematic work intended to expound his philosophy, he did write numerous papers (many of them unpublished during his life) which were intended to lay a massive foundation for a new philosophy for the modern age. 5346. Collected papers. Edited by Charles Harts- horne and Paul Weiss. Cambridge, Har- vard University Press, 1931-35. 6 v. 31-30898^ B945.P43C6 1931 Since a great part of Peirce's writings were still in manuscript form at the time of his death, much of his work appeared for the first time in the Col- lected Papers. Of this set the editors write in the introduction to volume 1 : "The more important of these manuscripts of Peirce, as well as his published papers, have now been brought together in some ten volumes which will appear in rapid succession. The first volume contains in outline his system, so far as it can be presented, his writings on scientific method and the classification of the sciences, his doctrine of the categories, and his work on ethics. The next volume deals with the theory of signs and meaning, traditional logic, induction, the science of discovery 744 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES and probability; and the third volume reprints his published work on modern logic. The fourth in- cludes his unpublished original contributions to the foundations of mathematics, logic and graphs. The fifth volume contains his papers on pragmatism. The sixth is concerned with metaphysics. It is ex- pected that the remaining volumes will contain his writings on physics and psychology, as well as his reviews, letters and biography." After a 23-year interval, the publication of volumes 7 and 8 under a new editor, Arthur W. Burks, was scheduled by the Harvard University Press for 1958. 5347. Chance, love, and logic; philosophical essays. Edited with an introd. by Morris R. Cohen; with a supplementary essay on the pragmatism of Peirce, by John Dewey. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1923. xxxiii, 318 p. (International library of psychology, philosophy and scientific method) 23-11850 B945.P43C5 Professor Cohen's volume of selections was made in an attempt to present a "developed and coherent" account of Peirce's philosophy, and did much to secure a wider appreciation of his importance. While the selections themselves are not supplied with editorial commentary, the introduction is in- tended to "help the reader concatenate the various lines of thought contained in these essays." The two collections which follow reflect the continuing demand for representative writings of Peirce's among students of philosophy. 5348. The Philosophy of Peirce; selected writings. Edited by Justus Buchler. London, K. Paul, Trench, Trubner, 1940. 386 p. (International library of psychology, philosophy and scientific method) 41-5564 B945.P41B8 Published in the United States by Harcourt, Brace & Co. Republished in 1955 by Dover Pub- lications (New York) under the tide: Philosophical Writings of Peirce. 5349. Essays in the philosophy of science. Edited with an introd. by Vincent Tomas. New York, Liberal Arts Press, 1957. 271 p. (The American heritage series, no. 17) 57-2087 B945.P41T6 5350. Buchler, Justus. Charles Peirce's empiri- cism. With a foreword by Professor Ernest Nagel. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1939. xvii, 275 p. (International library of psychology, philos- ophy and scientific method) 40-4294 B945.P44B8 1939 This Columbia University dissertation is probably the most serviceable of the attempts to extract a coherent doctrine from Peirce's Collected Papers, fragmentary as they are, and presenting a develop- ing rather than a unitary and static outlook. Buch- ler regards Peirce as primarily an empiricist, and thinks that such of his metaphysics as is incon- gruous with his empiricism is of secondary impor- tance. This empiricism he characterizes as public empiricism, supporting a theory of common or cooperative inquiry. Manley H. Thompson's The Pragmatic Philosophy of C. S. Peirce (Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1953. 317 p.) is more critical and narrower in scope, being concerned with the limitations involved in Peirce's approach to philosophy. 5351. Feibleman, James. An introduction to Peirce's philosophy, interpreted as a system. New York, Harper, 1946. xx, 503 p. 46-8096 B945.P44F4 "This book has two aims, the first of which is to offer an introduction to the general philosophy of Charles S. Peirce, who may fairly be described as one of the greatest philosophers America has thus far produced." The second is "to exhibit the system which seems to be inherent in Peirce's philosophy." Mr. Feibleman is himself a professor of philosophy at Tulane University, simultaneously conducting a real estate business. The life of the academic philos- opher in America is to some extent reflected in his autobiographical Philosophers Lead Sheltered Lives (London, Allen & Unwin, 1952. 321 p.). Feible- man's own philosophical works include Christian- ity, Communism, and the Ideal Society; a Philo- sophical Approach to Modern Politics (London, Allen & Unwin, 1937. 419 p.) ; In Praise of Comedy, a Study in Its Theory and Practice (London, Allen & Unwin, 1939. 284 p.); The Revival of Realism; Critical Studies in Contemporary Philosophy (Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina Press, 1946. 333 p.); The Theory of Human Culture (New York, Duell, Sloan & Pearce, 1946. 361 p.); Aesthetics; a Study of the Fine Arts in Theory and Practice (New York, Duell, Sloan & Pearce, 1949. 463 p.); and Ontology (Baltimore, Johns Hopkins Press, 1951. 807 p.), which is probably his major work to date. Feibleman has also written fiction such as The Long Habit (New York, Duell, Sloan & Pearce, 1948. 365 p.), a novel which uses an island near the Mississippi Delta for setting, and poetry, including Death of the God in Mexico (New York, Liveright, 1931. 90 p.), Journey to the Coastal Marsh ([Cummington, Mass.] Cumming- ton Press, 1946. [22] p.), Trembling Prairie ( [Lexington, Ky.,] Hammer Press, 1952. 73 p.), and The Dar\ Bifocals (Lexington, Ky., Hammer Press, 1953. 48 p.). PHILOSOPHY AND PSYCHOLOGY / 745 5352. Gallie, Walter B. Peirce and pragmatism. Harmondsworth, Middlesex, Penguin Books, 1952. 247 p. (Pelican books, A 254) 53-3°33 B 945- P 44 G 3 Professor Gallie, who has since become professor of logic and metaphysics at the Queen's University, Belfast, North Ireland, "tries to make clear, in a form freed from Peirce's more difficult technical terms, the organic unity of three main parts of his thought: his theory of knowledge, his Pragmatism — something very different from the popular Prag- matism of James — and his metaphysics both critical and constructive." It is one of the very few English studies of American philosophy. 5353- Wiener, Philip P., and Frederic H. Young, eds. Studies in the philosophy of Charles Sanders Peirce. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1952. 396 p. 52-5411 B945.P44W5 Twenty-four studies of various aspects of Peirce and his philosophy. This work is part of a design to submit Peirce's philosophy as a whole, or system, to methodical and searching criticism. The authors represented were all engaged in special studies of Peirce and his work. 5354. JOSIAH ROYCE, 1855-1916 With William James and Peirce (qq.v.) Royce is usually considered one of America's "clas- sic" philosophers. He early developed a close friendship with James, who encouraged the younger man in his work; after a time the influence worked both ways. While James was a pragmatist in method, Royce called himself an "absolute prag- matist"; this touches on one of the main points of disagreement between the two; for while Royce accepted pragmatism in some measure, he was pri- marily an idealist who believed in the existence of absolute truth. This idealism was in some measure a development of his early religious training. This is reflected in his first important book, originally published in 1885, The Religious Aspect of Philos- ophy; a Critique of the Bases of Conduct and Faith (New York, Harper, 1958. 484 p.). This was fol- lowed by California from the Conquest in 1846 to the Second Vigilance Committee in San Francisco; a Study of American Character (New York, Knopf, 1948. xxxvii, 394 p.), first published in 1886, which in its history of a decade was "meant to help the reader toward an understanding of two things: namely, the modern American state of California, and our national character as displayed in that land." This work revealed the basic tenets of his philosophy as well as his interest in his native State. This in- terest was further pursued in his one novel, The Feud of Oahjield Cree\ (Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1887. 483 p.). Royce's next book was The Spirit of Modern Philosophy (New York, Braziller, 1955. 519 p.), first published in 1892, and based on lec- tures meant to give "some account of the more sig- nificant spiritual possessions of a few prominent modern thinkers." Written before Royce became a predominantly "technical" philosopher with his own fully developed system, the book is stylistically one of his most successful. A more technical and ab- stract presentation of the basic themes of this book may be found in Lectures on Modern Idealism (New Haven, Yale University Press, 1919. 266 p.), first delivered at Johns Hopkins University in 1906. Royce's continued interest in ethics was evinced in Studies of Good and Evil; a Series of Essays upon Problems of Philosophy and of Life (New York, Appleton, 1898. 384 p.). His maturing philosoph- ical view and his continuing concern with the state of American society (which he hoped to assist to an idealist oudook) is expressed in Race Questions, Provincialism, and Other American Problems (New York, Macmillan, 1908. 287 p.). There followed William James, and Other Essays (New York, Mac- millan, 191 1. 301 p.), a collection meant further to illustrate the philosophy of The World and the In- dividual (vide infra). His more specifically reli- gious interests again came to the fore in his lectures published as The Sources of Religious Insight (New York, Scribner, 1912. 297 p.), which concludes with a restatement of the basic idea of The Philos- ophy of Loyalty (vide infra). A selection of mis- cellaneous, mostly early, essays was posthumously published as Fugitive Essays (Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1920. 429 p.), a work of some importance, since the ideas of Royce's major works were often amplified and most clearly illustrated in lectures and essays. A considerable number of these miscellaneous writings have unfortunately re- mained unpublished. 5355. The World and the individual; Gifford lec- tures delivered before the University of Aber- deen. 1st series: The four historical conceptions of being. New York, Macmillan, 1900. xvi, 588 p. 0-402 B945.R63W7, 1st ser. 5356. The World and the individual; Gifford lec- tures delivered before the University of Ab- erdeen. 2d series: Nature, man, and the moral order. New York, Macmillan, 1901. xx, 480 p. 1-27347 B945.R63W7, 2d ser. These two series of lectures, revised and consid- erably extended for publication, are usually regarded as Royce's most important work in metaphysics. He characterized them, in relation to his earlier 746 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES work, as "a deliberate effort to bring into synthesis, more fully than I have ever done before, the rela- tions of Knowledge and of Will in our conception of God," and as necessarily centering upon "the true meaning and place of the concept of Individuality." The four conceptions of being considered in the ist series are mysticism, realism, and critical rational- ism, which are in turn criticized and rejected, and absolute idealism, which of course survives scrutiny. "You are in God," the reader is assured, "but you are not lost in God." The 2d series is concerned with developing the implications of this view for cosmology, ethics, and religion. 5357. The Philosophy of loyalty. New York, Mac- millan, 1936. 409 p. 3 8 -33 J 54 BJ1533.L8R6 1936 This best known of Royce's books, first published in 1908, presents a doctrine of the need of a basic ethical motivation in man's life. The loyalty pro- pounded is to this general idealism, rather than to the narrow loyalties of particular causes, persons, etc., although it finds expression through these. It is summed up in the conception of "loyalty to loy- alty" as the highest virtue. This takes care of the individual, but the world must sort out and har- monize discrepant or conflicting loyalties. 5358. The Problem of Christianity. Lectures de- livered at the Lowell Institute in Boston, and at Manchester College, Oxford. New York, Mac- millan, 1913. 2 v. 13-10606 BR121.R67 Contents. — 1. The Christian doctrine of life. — 2. The real world and the Christian ideas. This is Royce's final statement of his general po- sition, the outcome of his "philosophical study of certain problems belonging to ethics, to religious experience, and to general philosophy." In it he develops his idea of loyalty as "the practically de- voted love of an individual for a community," and presents Christianity as being "in its essence, the most typical, and, so far in human history, the most highly developed religion of loyalty." Royce side- steps the entanglements of dogmas, controversies, and institutions found in historical Christianity, since he is concerned with the "essence of Chris- tianity" rather than with such particulars. 5359. Logical essays. Edited by Daniel S. Robin- son. Dubuque, Iowa, W. C. Brown, 1951. 447 p. 51-8059 B945.R63L6 5360. The Social philosophy of Josiah Royce. Edited, with an introductory essay, by Stuart Gerry Brown. [Syracuse, N. Y.] Syracuse Uni- versity Press, 1950. 220 p. 50-10512 H35.R87 5361. The Religious philosophy of Josiah Royce. Edited, with an introductory essay, by Stuart Gerry Brown. [Syracuse, N. Y.] Syracuse Uni- versity Press, 1952. 239 p. 52-41521 B945.R61B7 In the first title Dr. Robinson, director of the School of Philosophy of the University of Southern California, has made a valuable collection of prac- tically all of Royce's writings on logic. Royce took up the subject quite late in his career, largely through the stimulation of C. S. Peirce, but subsequent logi- cians have abundandy recognized the quality and the importance of his contributions. Save for one book review of the nineties, all these papers were published between 1901 and 1914, and only one of them has appeared in other collections of Royce's essays. This is an unusual piece of bookmaking: the first 12 pieces are reproduced from typewritten copy, while the remaining 5 are photographically reproduced from the original publications. Mr. Brown, who is professor of citizenship and Ameri- can culture in the Maxwell School of Citizenship of Syracuse University, aims in the last two tides "to make the core of [Royce's] social and religious thought once more available for all students of American philosophy and culture." He contributes a substantial introduction, "From Provincialism to the Great Community," to the earlier one. 5362. Cotton, James Harry. Royce on the human self. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1954. xiv, 347 p. 54-8622 B945.R64C6 Bibliography: p. [303J-3II. Because of Royce's conceptions of the human self as intricately related, and because of this idea's cen- trality to his philosophy, this book deals with nearly all of Royce's work. Considerable reliance has been placed on unpublished material, though only as a source of illustrations, not of new ideas. As an extension of the central theme, one chapter is de- voted to the relations between William James, C. S. Peirce, and Royce. 5363. Marcel, Gabriel. Royce's metaphysics. Translated by Virginia and Gordon Ringer. Chicago, Regnery, 1956. 180 p. 56-11854 B945.R64M33 Originally written in French {La Metaphysique de Royce. [Paris] Aubier, 1945. 224 p.), this is one of the most distinguished and thorough studies of Royce's philosophy, although it limits itself to studying Royce's solution of the problem of meta- physics. A Norwegian dissertation on Royce ap- peared in 1934: Sverre Norborg's Josiah Royce, Puritaner og Idealist (Oslo, Lutherstiftelsens Forlag. 441 p.). PHILOSOPHY AND PSYCHOLOGY / 747 5364. Smith, John Edwin. Royce's social infinite: the community of interpretation. New York, Liberal Arts Press, 1950. 176 p. 50-6708 B945.R64S5 Bibliography: p. 171-173. This Columbia University dissertation studies Royce's fusion of Christianity and his own idealism, as expressed in his idea of a community, created by individual minds linked together by the special kind of knowing he named interpretation, and sus- tained by that loyalty which was the supreme good of life. 5365. GEORGE SANTAYANA, 1863-1952 Santayana taught philosophy at Harvard University for 22 years, but the greater part of his published work was produced after his resignation in 191 1. Many of Santayana's works have been in a predominantly literary vein; these are entered in the Literature section of the bibliography (nos. 1733-1742, of which 1738 and 1739 are of special philosophic interest). This interest in literature has been carried over into his philosophical writings, which are noted for their stylistic qualities. It is also to be traced in his very philosophic conceptions, for his system has been called a poetic naturalism. His pervasive interest is in moral philosophy (out- side traditional theologies), but he is basically a naturalist who starts with the view that all ideas must be explained in the context of the environment wherein they arise. He does not believe that any moral value exists in nature, but he does think that the philosopher may, through the contemplation of all arts and sciences, arrive at a general view of nature and human nature, and then ascribe value to any human enterprise insofar as it realizes the ex- cellences which nature makes possible. Influenced primarily by the earlier Greeks and by Spinoza, Santayana combined two principles seldom joined: "naturalism as to the origin and history of mankind, and fidelity in moral sentiment, to the inspiration of reason." This accounts for the frequent ap- proaches to paradox in his writings, and for those passages, no less startling for their being numerous, in which he cancels with his left, or naturalistic hand, the elaborate constructions of his right, or rationalistic one. He has had many admirers, but few followers among professional philosophers. 5366. The Sense of beauty, being the oudines of aesthetic theory. With a foreword by Philip Blair Rice. New York, Modern Library, 1955. 268 p. (The Modern Library of the world's best books, 292) 55-10656 N66.S23 1955a This book, which first appeared in 1896, was Santayana's first philosophical volume. It remains one of the important works in the field of the philos- ophy of aesthetics. 5367. The Life of reason; or, The phases of human progress. One-volume ed., rev. by the author in collaboration with Daniel Cory. New York, Scribner, 1954. 504 p. 54-477 B945.S23L7 1953 This work, which originally appeared in five volumes in 1905-6, is considered by some critics to be Santayana's major work. It rapidly became one of the leading documents of naturalistic philosophy. It successively studies reason in common sense, society, religion, art, and science. In this edition, which has been somewhat abridged as well as re- vised, the author undertook to clarify obscurities in the original version. 5368. Winds of doctrine, and Platonism and the spiritual life. New York, Harper, 1957. 312 p. (Harper torchbooks, TB 24) 57-10533 B945.S23W7 1957 A paperback reprint of two works, the first of which was originally published in 1913 and the second in 1927. Winds of Doctrine originally bore the subtitle Studies in Contemporary Opinion, and consists of six essays, some of which review the gen- eral trends of the day in philosophy, while two subject the views of Henri Bergson and Bertrand Russell to severe critical scrutiny. This volume also contains the essay which coined a phrase that has been of some importance in American intellectual history: "The Genteel Tradition in American Phi- losophy." Lumping together the older schools under a word that had acquired an aura of absurdity, he gave impetus to the movement for eliminating the lingering influence of Protestantism, and particu- larly the inculcation of moral responsibility, from American higher education. Eighteen years later he detected in the so-called "New Humanism" a possible resurgence of these elements, and returned to the attack in a small volume, The Genteel Tra- dition at Bay (New York, Scribner, 1931. 74 p.)- The second title defines spirit as "an overtone of animal life, a realization, on a hypostatic plane, of certain moving unities in matter," and spiritual life as "disintoxication from the influence of values." 5369. Character and opinion in the United States. New York, Norton, 1934. 233 p. (White oak library) 34-28429 B945.S23C5 1934 Contents. — The moral background. — The aca- demic environment. — William James. — Josiah Royce. — Later speculations. — Materialism and ideal- ism in American life. — English liberty in America. First published in 1920, after having been given as lectures in England, this work attempts to inter- pret the American people and the philosophy of this 748 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES country. The work is written from a very personal point of view, centering in Santayana's experiences at Harvard, his knowledge of the Boston area, and his views on New England. Most examples are chosen from within this area, and a large part of the book is a discussion of philosophers and the Department of Philosophy at Harvard, with some conclusions about the American temper drawn from these. 5370. Scepticism and animal faith; introduction to a system of philosophy. [New York] Dover Publications, 1955. 314 p. 55-14672 B945.S23S3 1955 This new edition presents in unaltered form the text of the first edition of 1923. The work may serve as an introduction to Santayana's philosophy, and as such may be regarded as an epistemological foreword to Realms of Being (vide infra). Every- day common sense realism, or animal faith, is re- garded as a sounder theory of knowledge than the artificial doctrines of philosophic schools, which in concentrating on some facts ignore most of the others. 5371. Realms of being. One-volume ed., with a new introd. by the author. New York, Scribner, 1942. xxxii, 862 p. 42-36200 B945.S23R42 Contents. — The realm of essence. — The realm of matter. — The realm of truth. — The realm of spirit. This work was originally issued as four separate volumes between 1923 and 1940. This is a full statement of Santayana's mature philosophy. Mat- ter is the unknowable but omnipotent basis for the other realms. Essence is "the infinite multitude of distinguishable ideal terms," the set of signals through which alone man knows the realm of matter. Truth is the limited realm of identity be- tween essence and existence, but the truth of human experience is partial and relative. Spirit is the im- aginative reshaping of the realm of matter into orderly and harmonious structure, but it has no significance apart from its physical substratum. 5372. The Idea of Christ in the Gospels; or, God in man, a critical essay. New York, Scrib- ner, 1946. 266 p. 46-25109 BT201.S263 An interpretation of the Gospels in the light of Santayana's special variety of naturalism, which called religions "the great fairy-tales of the con- science." One bemused critic called it "the most devout book ever written by an unbeliever." How- ever, the idea of Christ as expressed in the Gospels is found "to be vivid indeed, but not intellectually clear," and earthly lives modeled upon it "hardly present a satisfactory view of human perfection." 5373. Works. Triton ed. [New York, Scribner] 1936-37. 14 v. 37-6148 B945.S2 1936 5374. The Philosophy of Santayana; selections from all the works of George Santayana. New and greatly enl. ed., edited, with a new pref. and an introductory essay, by Irwin Edman. New York, Scribner, 1953. lxii, 904 p. 53-11902 B945.S21 1953 5375. Buder, Richard. The mind of Santayana. Chicago, Regnery, 1955. 234 p. 55-10827 B945.S24B8 In this study of Santayana's philosophy emphasis is placed on Scepticism and Animal Faith and Realms of Being (qq. v.), with lesser note taken of his other works. Excluded from consideration is The Life of Reason (q. v.), since Santayana told Mr. Butler that he considered it immature, and that even the revised version had been done when he was too weak to undertake it effectively. A dis- sertation which studies The Life of Reason in some detail is Milton Karl Munitz' The Moral Philosophy of Santayana (New York, Columbia University Press, 1939. 116 p.). 5376. Howgate, George W. George Santayana. Philadelphia, University of Pennsylvania Press, 1938. 363 p. 39-7881 B945.S24H6 Aiming at a biography of Santayana's mind, the author presents the facts of his life, his literary pro- ductions, and his philosophic doctrines in a balanced volume which lacks only the last 15 years of a career that remained remarkably productive even in its ninth decade. 5377. Schilpp, Paul A., ed. The philosophy of George Santayana. [2d ed.] New York, Tudor Pub. Co., 1951. 710 p. (The Library of living philosophers) 51-6325 B945.S24S35 1951 In the first part of this book a number of San- tayana's supporters and opponents comment upon his work. In the second part Santayana presents his replies to criticisms made or problems raised in the first part. A notable feature of the book is the extensive bibliography (p. 609-680). 5378. PAUL WEISS, 1901- With the rapidly increasing specialization in all fields of knowledge in the 20th century the relative number of philosophers who take all knowl- PHILOSOPHY AND PSYCHOLOGY / 749 edge for their domain has been steadily declining. Weiss, a professor of philosophy at Yale University, is here included as a leading representative of the diminished younger generation of universal philoso- phers. He was a student of Alfred North White- head, whose influence may be traced in much of his work. However, over the years he has been con- structing a system of obvious originality, although growing out of what has gone before. All his books to date have been written as solid contributions to philosophy, and have not been simplified for lay readers. Professor Weiss' work has so far been pre- dominantly concerned with problems arising from logic, the nature of reality, man's place in nature, and ethics. 5379. Reality. Princeton, Princeton University Press, 1938. 314 p. 39-3540 BD21.W4 5380. Nature and man. New York, Holt, 1947. xxii, 287 p. 47-1847 BD431.W32 5381. Man's freedom. New Haven, Yale Univer- sity Press, 1950. 325 p. 50-7197 BD21.W39 5382. Modes of being. Carbondale, Southern Illinois University Press, 1958. 617 p. 57-11877 B945.W396M6 1958 5383. ALFRED NORTH WHITEHEAD, 1861- r 947 Whitehead was born in England and while teach- ing at Trinity College, Cambridge, and at the Uni- versity of London developed a reputation as a lead- ing mathematician and logician. In 1924 he came to America and taught at Harvard for 12 years. While the general principles of his philosophy had been developed in England, some of his major phil- osophical works were written in America. This philosophy he called a philosophy of "organism," which may be regarded as a philosophical theory of relativity in which everything has an active relation- ship with everything else. This fitted in with the trend to philosophies of schematic progress, as dis- tinct from the "static morphological universe" in- herent in most earlier systems. The accord between Whitehead's philosophy and the state of modern knowledge was such that he became a highly influ- ential philosopher, and the acknowledged leader of a widespread movement in America. For this reason, while he remains basically English (as McCosh in an earlier generation remained basically Scottish), some understanding of his work is neces- sary for anyone who would understand recent de- velopments in American philosophy. 5384. Alfred North Whitehead: an anthology. Selected by F. S. C. Northrop and Mason W. Gross. Introductions and a note on Whitehead's terminology, by Mason W. Gross. New York, Macmillan, 1953. 928 p. 53-12112 B1674.W351N6 5385. Schilpp, Paul A., ed. The philosophy of Alfred North Whitehead. [2d ed.] New York, Tudor Pub. Co., 1951. 797 p. (The Library of living philosophers) 51-6323 B1674.W38S35 1951 This volume contains a number of essays on the philosophy of Whitehead, including a very long one by Victor Lowe on "The Development of White- head's Philosophy." There are also some "Autobio- graphical Notes" and an extensive bibliography. Because of Whitehead's advanced age and illness at the time this work was compiled, he did not write a reply to the commentaries, although the other volumes in the series of which this is a part do have such a feature. Instead, he contributed some hither- to unpublished essays which he considered expres- sive of his final position. 5386. CHAUNCEY WRIGHT, 1 830-1 875 Though he himself did not use the term pragmatism, Wright's philosophy was in many ways a precursor of that movement. He was trained in mathematics and physics, and he developed a strong interest in philosophy. As a result, his philosophy was scientific rather than metaphysical. Because of his close examination of scientific method and his belief in the importance of scientific psychology for the further development of philosophy, he fore- shadowed a number of aspects of modern philosoph- ical movements. 5387. Philosophical discussions. With a biograph- ical sketch of the author by Charles Eliot Norton. New York, Holt, 1877. xxiii, 434 p. 10-29063 B945.W73P5 This volume contains the greater part of the au- thor's published philosophical writings, most of which had appeared as periodical articles. A fur- ther insight into his life and thought may be gleaned from his Letters (Cambridge, John Wilson, 1878. 392 p.). The connecting commentary by James Bradley Thayer enables this to serve as something of a biography. 750 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES C. Psychology 5388. Fay, Jay Wharton. American psychology before William James. New Brunswick, N. J., Rutgers University Press, 1939. 240 p. (Rut- gers University studies in psychology, no. 1 ) 39-13495 BF108.U5F3 "Chronological table of American works and foreign sources": p. 219-226. "Bibliography of primary sources in American psychology before 1890": p. 227-232. The publication of James' Principles of Psychol- ogy (no. 5322) in 1890 was so epoch-making an event as to cast his predecessors in the shade, and led to the impression that the earlier history of the discipline here was a blank — an impression which has assumed the guise of fact in some serious works on psychology. Dr. Fay has no difficulty in showing that psychology was studied here from the begin- nings of American academic thought, on much the same lines as in Europe; that it was a branch of moral philosophy down to about 1776, and a branch of "intellectual philosophy," after Scottish models, down to 1 861; and that during the next 30 years German influences were mixed with English ones in the prevalent "philosophy of the mind." As the author says, if psychology is exclusively a natural science and there was no psychology in America be- fore James (1 842-1910), then equally there was no psychology in Europe before Wilhelm Wundt (1832-1920). 5389. Heidbreder, Edna. Seven psychologies. Student's ed. New York, Century Co., 1933. 450 p. 33" I 339 BF95.H4 1933 Dr. Heidbreder regards systems of psychology as programs of action, without which few facts could be collected; as bases of morale, without which in- quiry would be vague and aimless; "as ways and means of arriving at knowledge, as temporary but necessary stages in the development of a science." After preliminary chapters on systems as such, on prescientific and the beginnings of scientific psy- chology, she oudines seven systems prominent in the American psychology of 1933. They are the structuralism of Edward B. Titchener; the inde- pendent and individual system of William James; the functionalism developed at the University of Chicago under J. R. Angell and Harvey Carr; the behaviorism of J. B. Watson (no. 5393); the dynamic psychology developed at Columbia especially by Robert S. Woodworth (no. 5391); the Gestalt school; and psychoanalysis. The first and the last two are, as she says, "outright importations from Europe," but are treated here as influences in American psychology. She disclaims having treated all important schools or thinkers, or all divergences of opinion within the schools chosen as representa- tive. Psychology, she thinks, "is a science that has not yet made its great discovery," and until it does the diversity of systems is both inevitable and desir- able. 5390. Krech, David, and Richard S. Crutchfield. Elements of psychology. New York, Knopf, 1958. 700 p. 58-5044 BF121.K73 5391. Woodworth, Robert S., and Harold Schlos- berg. Experimental psychology. Rev. ed. New York, Holt, 1954. 948 p. illus. 52-13912 BF181.W6 1954 These two titles are selected from the hundreds available as characteristic of American psychology as it is conceived by the vast majority of its academic practitioners at the present day: an experimental and quantitative natural science, with its most valued results obtained from the use of special apparatus in psychological laboratories. The first is a general textbook written by two members of the Depart- ment of Psychology at the University of California, and very lavishly produced by Mr. Knopf with 2 color plates, 25 tables, 157 figures, and 168 "boxes," of which most contain research evidence for the generalizations in the text, but some "provide the reader with an opportunity to carry out his own demonstration experiments." The four parts of the book are concerned with "Perception," "Motivation and Emotion," "Adaptive Behavior," and "The Individual." The key to the last part, which in- cludes "the apex of psychology," the study of per- sonality, lies in "quantifying individual differences." Each of 24 chapters is furnished with a glossary, defining such terms of art as "synesthesia" and "volume color" in chapter 2, "Bogardus social dis- tance scale" and "cognitive dissonance" in chapter 25. The most representative figure in American laboratory psychology is probably Robert S. Wood- worth (b. 1869), who received his Ph. D. from Columbia University in 1899 and taught psychology there for nearly 40 years, becoming professor emeritus in 1942. His lectures on Dynamic Psy- chology (New York, Columbia University Press, 1918. 210 p.) provided the profession with a new and laboratory-oriented system, while his textbook, PHILOSOPHY AND PSYCHOLOGY / 75 1 Psychology (originally published by Holt in 1921, and still in print in its 5th edition of 1947) was for years the most widely used in introductory college courses. The first edition of Experimental Psy- chology appeared in 1938 and was developed out of mimeographed predecessors which Professor Woodworth had used since 1910 in his Columbia course in the subject. In preparing the substantially altered second edition, from which much purely historical material has been dropped, the octoge- narian experimentalist had the assistance of Professor Schlosberg of Brown University. After an intro- ductory chapter on the principles of experiment, the book expounds methods and results in 25 separate fields, including "Reaction Time," "Association," "Psychophysics," "Conditioning," "Maze Learning," "Memory," and "Problem-Solving: Thinking." One of the 3 chapters on "Emotion" has a section on "Lie Detection." The subject index runs to 39 double-column pages (p. 910-948), while the "Bib- liographic Index of Authors" (p. 851-909) requires a 4-column table of abbreviations. The front end papers contain "Logarithmic and Probability Scales," and the rear ones "Four-place Logarithms." 5392. Roback, Abraham A. History of American psychology. New York, Library Publishers, 1952. xiv, 426 p. illus. 52-11499 BF108.U5R6 The only substantial history of psychology in the United States from its beginnings to the present day, by a psychologist who was trained in the Harvard laboratory under Hugo Miinsterberg. As several reviewers observed, it is a somewhat uneven work, but what it lacks in uniformity and objectivity is compensated for by the author's thorough knowl- edge of the doctrines he describes and his original and outspoken critical approach. Dr. Roback has always been an independent and very much his own man, taking his line from no system or insti- tution. He has always had a strong sense of the limitations of purely experimental and physiolog- ical psychology, and the book bears traces of his old controversies, including the title of the chapter on behaviorism: "Psychology out of Its Mind." Since he is not unduly impressed by current fashions, he renders full justice to neglected figures of the recent past such as G. Stanley Hall, Morton Prince, Wil- liam McDougall, and his own teacher, Miinsterberg, once the most conspicuous psychologist in the country, the eclipse of whose reputation is attributed to his failure to establish any personal bond with his students. There are chapters on Freud's influ- ence in America; on the Gestalt school, which the author characteristically hails as a creation of the Jewish race and which, he says, is dying out only because it is being absorbed into general psychology; on operationism, which he regards as an attempt to apply the rules of the physics laboratory to psy- chology; on "Factorial Analysis and General Seman- tics," including an appreciative treatment of Alfred Korzybski; and on neoscholastic psychology, which is treated with respect. A final chapter on "The Phenomenal Expansion of American Psychology," standing for the companion volume mentioned in the Preface, briefly reviews 14 specialized branches of psychology and some current trends. The United States now has the largest number of psy- chologists, including many of the foremost, an output of books and articles greater than in all other countries, and a leadership which conveys obliga- tions along with authority. 5393. Watson, John B. Behaviorism. [Rev. ed. Chicago] University of Chicago Press, 1958, "1930. 308 p. illus. (Phoenix books, P23) 58-14680 BF199.W3 1958 Behaviorism, an extreme development of func- tionalism, is usually regarded as an original Ameri- can contribution to psychology, which it reduces to a study of the movements of muscle or gland. It is dependent upon physiology, and based upon laboratory experiments, primarily with animal sub- jects, and it rejects both introspective method and the concept of consciousness. Notwithstanding a number of more or less complete anticipations, it is usually regarded as having been founded by John Broadus Watson (b. 1878), who was trained in animal psychology at the University of Chicago, was for some years a professor of psychology at Johns Hopkins, and after 1920 pursued a successful career with large advertising firms. Mr. Watson con- tributed an interesting autobiographical sketch to A History of Psychology in Autobiography, v. 3, edited by Carl A. Murchison (Worcester, Mass., Clark University Press, 1936), p. 271-281. The volume listed above originated in popular lectures at the Cooper Union in New York City; a more technical exposition of the author's principles is given in Psychology from the Standpoint of a Be' haviorist, 3d ed., rev. (Philadelphia, Lippincott, 1929. xvii, 458 p.), originally published in 1919. Behaviorism has not only aroused much contro- versy at home, but has attracted considerable atten- tion abroad, as appears from two French studies: Pierre Naville's La psychologie, science du com- portement; le behaviorisme de Watson, 9. ed. ([Paris] Gallimard [^942] 253 p.), and Andre Tilquin's Le behaviorisme; origine et developpe- ment de la psychologie de reaction en Amerique (Paris, J. Vrin, 1942. 531 p.), which contains a substantial bibliography of behaviorist literature (p. [511H28). XXIII Religion «£ a A. General Wor^s 5394-5404 B. Period Histories 5405-5417 C. Church and State 5418-5422 D. Religious Thought; Theology 5423-5438 E. Religious Bodies 5439—5473 F. Representative Leaders 5474-5483 G. Church and Society 5484-5497 H. The Negro's Church 5498-5502 RELIGIOUS motives were dominant in the founding of Plymouth Colony in 1620 .- and of Massachusetts Bay ten years later; and if the founding of Virginia in 1607 be regarded at all closely, its promoters will be seen to have emphasized religious aims and taken great pains to provide the new plantation with the ministrations of the Church of England. It is probably a safe assertion that until some date quite late in the 19th century, religion remained a greater concern with the majority of Americans than any secular interest. In the middle of the 20th, not- withstanding the multiplication of competing factors and various secularizing influences, it remains a major interest of the average American, and over 100 million persons, or nearly two-thirds of the total population, have become members of churches. Clergymen, however they may complain of crowded schedules, find leisure to write in the 20th century as they did in the 17th, and the literature of Ameri- can religion through four centuries is staggering in its volume. The following hundred-odd titles that have been selected from the mass are of course inadequate to do justice to the great pageant of American religion, and three or four times as many would still leave many corners or aspects uncovered. We have tried, however, to make them as repre- sentative as possible of the extraordinary variety of religious life in this country, and, while avoiding works written from a narrow sectarian viewpoint, have sought to deal objectively and fairly with as many denominations and movements as our space will permit. The churches with the largest mem- berships have necessarily been emphasized, but some lesser ones are included because of their striking originality in belief, practice, or social effect. 752 The eight sections into which the chapter is divided attempt to deal with inseparable but distin- guishable aspects of American religion: its develop- ment in the stream of history from 1607 to the present day; its relationship to government, espe- cially since 1776; its exposition by men of thought; the churches which are its practical vehicles; the men who have been eminent in the churches; the churches as both cause and effect in their social en- vironment; and, finally, the Negro's church. 1 Some works on individuals appear not in Section H, Representative Leaders, but in Section D, Religious Thought (Niebuhr and Tillich, nos. 5432 and 5433) or in Section E, Religious Bodies (no. 5464, Joseph Smith, whose biography is essential to the under- standing of the Mormon Church). A number of other clergymen whose writings are noteworthy are given individual treatment in Chapter I, Literature; and certain philosophers similarly treated in the preceding chapter are much concerned with religion, in particular James McCosh (nos. 5337-5344), "The three titles on Judaism (nos. 5458-5460) should be considered in connection with the larger group on the Jews as a racial minority in Section F of Chapter XIV. RELIGION / 753 Josiah Royce (nos. 5354-5364), and William E. Hocking (nos. 5310-5316). Certain important themes recur in a number of the sections that follow. One is the westward move- ment of the churches which followed or accompanied the movement of the American people; and a related one is the changing position of the churches in an increasingly urbanized America. Another is the practically complete independence of the American churches from governmental support and controls, since the Revolution at any rate; this has not pre- vented a vast influence of the churches upon Govern- ment as upon every other aspect of social life. As early as 1831 de Tocqueville (nos. 4509-4512) found that here the spirit of religion and the spirit of lib- erty, instead of marching in different directions as in France, "were intimately related and that they reigned in common over the same country." An- other theme may be succinctly described in Edmund Burke's phrase, "the dissidence of dissent"; the proc- ess whereby the Puritan Separatists came out of the established church has become a permanent char- acteristic of American life; nearly every group which has constituted itself around some apparently small difference of belief or practice has survived, albeit in small numbers — only the Shakers (no. 5469), who abjured biological reproduction, have died out — and new religious bodies, inside or outside the Christian framework, are still being generated. A counter- tendency has arisen in the movement toward church union or reunion; since it has been more effectual in the sphere of joint social action than in doctrinal or liturgical assimilation, the few titles that deal with the subjects are included in Section I, Church and Society. Yet another theme is the influence on tra- ditional religion of the new scientific views of the universe and of life which were developed in the course of the 19th century, and received a unifying bond in Darwin's doctrine of the evolution of species. A final theme is that of secularization inside reli- gious life as well as outside, which many find oper- ative in recent years, so that America has been called, of all the nations of Western civilization, at once the most religious and the most secular. A. General Works 5394. Hall, Thomas Cuming. The religious back- ground of American culture. Boston, Little, Brown, 1930. xiv, 348 p. 30-18755 BR515.H28 "General bibliography": p. [3151-326; "Chapter bibliographies": p. [327J-337- A Presbyterian clergyman who taught at Union Theological Seminary and at GSttingen here qual- ifies the widely held concept of the dominant part played by Puritanism in American civilization, and focuses his study on the tradition of dissent, which he considers the most striking feature of American religion. Pie traces its beginning to Wyclif and the Lollards in 14th-century England. The individual- istic heresies that rejected the authority of church and priesthood to put reliance on God's word alone were persecuted and pushed underground, but con- tinued to spread among the lower classes for two centuries. Dr. Hall limits the name of Puritans to the small party of Protestants which rose to political importance in Elizabeth's time, and he claims that Puritanism supplied hardly more than leaders to the New England setdement. In Anglican Virginia and Congregational New England alike, the great body of colonists were "of the class from which Dis- sent drew its members." The spread of toleration after 1660 was accompanied by widespread religious indifference, furthered by frontier conditions and punctuated by revivals, "the symptom of Dissent." Established religion collapsed during the Revolution, and the complete separation of church and state in the Constitution recognized the indpendent char- acter of American Christianity. The writer traces the forms of dissent through the later history of American Protestantism, finding throughout Amer- ican culture a strong element of "respectful indif- ference to any pronounced religious faith." 5395. Hudson, Winthrop S. The great tradition of the American churches. New York, Har- per, 1953. 282 p. 53-6417 BR516.H75 The great American tradition of religious free- dom, with churches purely voluntary and complete absence of state control, is examined in this cogendy argued volume by Professor Hudson of the Colgate- Rochester Divinity School. He seeks to show that at the high point of American church development, placed in the 1890's, the voluntary principle was considered to be the secret of the power and influ- ence of religion in American life. He is chiefly con- cerned with the situation in the churches during the 19th century, analyzed in part through indi- vidual preachers, Lyman Beecher, Charles G. Fin- ney, Dwight L. Moody, and others, and in part through the achievements and failures of the churches resulting from acceptance of the voluntary principle. With the spread of the "social gospel," 431240—60- -49 754 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES and the diversion of church activities into many fields apart from religion, there has come, he warns, an oversecularization: "The Church Embraces the World: Protestantism Succumbs to Complacency." He considers that the churches are running the risk of having no distinctive message, and that as a re- sult they may be tempted to become tools of the state in the promotion of national self-interest. He calls for the restoration of voluntary discipline through conversion and a recovery of Christian faith. 5396. Makers of Christianity, [v. 3] From John Cotton to Lyman Abbott, by William War- ren Sweet. New York, Holt, 1937. 351 p. 34-36057 BR145.M23, v. 3 "Selected bibliography": p. 335-343. Biographical sketches of more than 30 individual leaders who have influenced the religious life of America, from the Puritan John Cotton to the late 19th-century apostle of the social gospel, Walter Rauschenbusch, and the teacher of evolutionary philosophy reconciled with Christian faith, Lyman Abbott. The first two volumes of this set, by other hands, recounted great Christian lives from Christ to Charlemagne, and from Alfred the Great to Schleiermacher. Dr. Sweet begins with "The Founding Fathers": Cotton, James Blair of Vir- ginia who founded William and Mary College, the Scotch-Irish Presbyterian Francis Makemie, and the Lutheran Henry M. Muhlenberg. His next chapter presents "Apostles of Religious Liberty": the Lords Baltimore, William Penn, and Roger Wil- liams. He continues through the Great Awakening (Jonathan Edwards and George Whitefield), the Revolutionary and Constitutional period, the trans- Allegheny pioneers, the missionary heroes, the re- vivalists and reformers, and the leaders of modern liberal Christian thought. 5397. Mayer, Frederick E. The religious bodies of America. 2d. ed. Saint Louis, Con- cordia Pub. House, 1956. 591 p. 56-4924 BR516.M37 1956 A comprehensive handbook of the doctrines and practices of the religious bodies of America, com- piled by the author during his 25 years of teaching theology in two Lutheran seminaries. Dr. Mayer died in 1954, the year of the first edition. His own viewpoint is admittedly Lutheran, but he aims at an objective and unbiased interpretation, based on what he calls the "creedal position" taken by each church in its profession of faith. He classes the 256 separate denominations reported in the 1936 census under 12 major families. For each family — Eastern Catholics, Roman Catholics, Lutherans, Reformed bodies, Arminian bodies (Methodists, etc.), "Unionizing" churches, the "Enthusiastic or Inner Light" bodies (Quakers, Mennonites, etc.), the Millennial groups — he outlines the historical background and doctrinal principles before examin- ing the tenets of individual churches in the family. A long chapter on "Interdenominational Trends and Organizations" includes simple and helpful explanations of modernism, fundamentalism, and neo-orthodoxy. In "Anthropocentric and Anti- Trinitarian Bodies" Unitarianism and Sweden- borgianism are included with Judaism. The last two chapters deal with groups which Dr. Mayer considered to be outside Christianity — Christian Science and other healing cults, and "esoteric" sects such as Theosophy. The work is extensively docu- mented in long footnotes and bibliographies at ends of chapters. 5398. Mead, Frank Spencer. Handbook of de- nominations in the United States. Rev. and enl. ed. New York, Abingdon Press, 1956. 255 p. 55-10270 BR516.M38 1956 Bibliography: p. 229-237. A more concise work than Mayer (above), this handbook, originally published in 195 1, contains short accounts and statistics of some two hundred and fifty American church denominations. The arrangement is basically alphabetical, but churches that stem from a common source are grouped under the collective name. Thus the table of contents be- gins with "Adventists," under which come Seventh- Day Adventists, Advent Christian Church, Primi- tive Advent Christian Church, Church of God, Life and Advent Union. Next is a single denomination, The African Orthodox Church. The names within a group are distinguished from succeeding names only by a slight indention, and the reader may find it more convenient to turn at once to the full index. The statements for each church put less emphasis on theological concepts than do those of Mayer. They are factual statements, in simple and readable style, of history, organization, present status, mis- sions, statistical data (not always consistent), and of doctrine in brief outline. Concluding pages give headquarters of denominations, statistics of church membership in 1955, and a glossary of theological and ecclesiastical terms. 5399. Niebuhr, Helmut Richard. The kingdom of God in America. Chicago, Willett, Clark, 1937. xvii, 215 p. 37-28492 BT94.N5 "Notes": p. 199-210. Dr. H. Richard Niebuhr and his brother, Dr. Reinhold Niebuhr, are prominent representatives of the neo-orthodox movement in modern Ameri- can theology. The theme of these historical and interpretative lectures is that the dominant idea of RELIGION / 755 Protestantism in America has always been the king- dom of God, but this has had three successive meanings. In the Puritan theocracy and no less in the other Protestant sects of the colonial setdements, the kingdom of God meant the absolute sovereignty of God. During the Great Awakening and later evangelical revivals, it meant the reign of Christ. In the social gospel of modern religion, it has come to mean the kingdom of God on earth. Dr. Nie- buhr expands this idea in general terms as well as in relation to individual religious leaders. In a final chapter on "Institutionalization and Secular- ization" he suggests that in the "moment of petri- faction," when the liberalism that replaced the old evangelical pattern has itself become institution- alized, the many signs of concern for an aggressive Christianity are "indications of a spiritual unrest which might become the seed plot of new life." A recent book by Reinhold Niebuhr is largely focused on the spiritual unrest of the mid-20th cen- tury. Pious and Secular America (New York, Scribner, 1958. 150 p.) comprises nine essays writ- ten or published in 1956 and 1957 on "journalisdc" themes. The first, which gives its tide to the vol- ume, and the second, "Frustration in Mid-Century," analyze the "paradox" that the United States is "at once the most religious and the most secular of Western nations," and point out the "naive and simple" nature of the current religious revival. Other subjects treated include higher education, the conflict with Russia, the Negro question, the rela- tions of Christians and Jews, and the "universal community." The last essay, "Mystery and Mean- ing," attempts to explain the relation of the mystery of creation to the human problem of sin. 5400. Sperry, Willard L. Religion in America. Appendices compiled by Ralph Lazzaro. Cambridge [Eng.] University Press; New York, Macmillan, 1946. 317 p. (American life and in- stitutions . . . 1) 46-7760 BR515.S67 1946 A widely admired interpretation of the history and the present state of religion in America, pre- sented informally for a British wartime public by the late Dean of the Divinity School of Harvard University. Initial "Presuppositions" point out sa- lient differences between American religious life and that of the Old World. The primary one is dis- establishment: "America is naked of 'the Church' in the historic sense of that word, as Europe has known it and used it. The place of the church is taken by 'denominations.' " Dean Sperry 's three other points of distinction are the individualistic character of American religion, its "immense and indubitable optimism," and the sympathetic inter- est taken in it by non-church-going intellectuals. These four themes reappear throughout his accounts of religion in the Colonies, the causes and conse- quences of separation of church and state, the denominations, parish life, theological thought, and religious education. He devotes admittedly dis- proportionate space to the small independent sects, which he takes to be the most distinctive feature of the American religious scene. The chapter on American Catholicism is adapted from Theodore Maynard's book of 1941 (no. 5445). Mr. Lazzaro's appendixes give various details of church history and statistics. 5401. Sweet, William Warren. The story of reli- gion in America. [2d rev. ed.] New York, Harper, 1950. 492 p. 50-10239 BR515.S82 1950 Bibliography: p. 453-472. Until Dr. Sweet published the first edition of this influential work in 1930, the theme of religion in America had been treated almost exclusively in denominational terms. The professor of the history of American Christianity at the University of Chi- cago sought in one comprehensive and readable volume to trace through the complicated pattern of American religious life the "common thread" of "an individualism in religion such as existed nowhere else." The religious and political radicalism of the first colonial settlements established this tradition, which was carried on, with the westward movement of the frontier, in the multiplication of small sects and independent churches. Revivalism, from the Great Awakening to the end of the 19th century, was the emotionally extravagant way in which reli- gion was brought to the masses. The consequences of slavery included the rise of many separatist Negro churches. In the 20th century the independent sects still increase in number and diversity, although the centralization of American culture has been reflected in the larger units of church life. Dr. Sweet's last two chapters, "World War I: Prosperity and Depres- sion" and "Through a Decade of Storm to the Mid- Century" (the latter added in the 1950 edition), stress the movement of the Protestant churches to- ward union, as well as their secularized aspects and their political ideas. 5402. Sweet, William Warren. Revivalism in America, its origin, growth, and decline. New York, Scribner, 1944. xv, 192 p. 44-6536 BV3773.S8 "Selected bibliography": p. 183-188. 5403. Weisberger, Bernard A. They gathered at the river; the story of the great revivalists and their impact upon religion in America. Boston, Little, Brown, 1958. 345 p. illus. 58-7848 BV3773.W4 756 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES "Bibliographical comment and notes to chapters": P- 275-33 2 - These two historical studies of revivalism differ widely in approach, coverage, and style. Professor Sweet's litde volume consists of essays interpreting, from the viewpoint of the religious historian, the nature of revivalism — "primarily the individualiz- ing of religion." It concentrates on the colonial Great Awakening and the Great Revival of 1800, with its aftermath on the frontier, subjects treated in greater detail by this author in other works (nos. 5410-54 16). Here he briefly outlines the by-prod- ucts of the Western revivals in educational insti- tutions, antislavery movements, and the like, and barely glances in his last chapter, "Revivalism on the Wane," at the city revivals, organized like busi- ness enterprises by D. L. Moody and his successors. The earlier evangelism, when the preacher in highly emotional terms called on each individual to work out his own salvation was, he says, in tune with the independent democratic temper of young America. He attributes a part of the late 19th-century decline in revivalism to the spread of the social gospel, whose advocates, in their enthusiasm to save society tended to overlook the individual sinner. Dr. Weisberger, whose lively style is that of the social historian, writes a more detailed history, interpreting revivals and revivalists in purely secular terms, with empha- sis on the personalities of the evangelists. Com- ments on the colonial and Western revivals provide an introduction for the bulk of his text devoted to the city revivalists. Among the evangelists treated in biographical style are Lyman Beecher and Charles Grandison Finney, great preachers of the 1820's and i83o's in New England and the New West respectively. The central figure is the most successful of all the lay savers of souls, who made revivalism into a professional technique carried out through the force of his personality — "To thousands of his converts, God must have looked uncannily like Dwight L. Moody." In the hands of Moody's successors, the revival campaigns "put on the trap- pings of vaudeville." The last chapters are devoted to the most spectacular evangelist of all, Billy Sunday. Dr. Weisberger ends by speculation on the possibility of a revival suited to the age of mass communication, led by a public figure who could "deck the faith of the fathers in the fashion set by Madison Avenue's 'communicators.' " 5404. Williams, John P. What Americans believe and how they worship. New York, Harper, 1952. 400 p. 52-5477 BR516.W47 A comparative survey of the leading religions of the United States, by the chairman of the Depart- ment of Religion of Mount Holyoke College, which should prove as interesting to the general reader as to the student. His presentation of each faith in- cludes some historical background, a sketch of doc- trine and church government, description of the form of worship, and sometimes a biographical note on a representative leader. The treatment is factual, vivid, and objective, with stress upon social aspects. The subtitles of the chapters are designed to impress on the memory the salient quality of each church or group of churches; thus the first, the Roman Catholic Church, is characterized as "Defender of a Revelation." Protestantism in general is discussed at length, and then follow chapters on the Lutheran Churches, the Protestant Episcopal Church, Pres- byterians, Congregationalists and Unitarians, Bap- tists and Disciples, Quakers, and Methodists. Ju- daism is sympathetically described as "The Mother Institution." Finally there are two group chap- ters, "Recent Religious Innovations," taking in such sects as the Seventh-Day Adventists, Mormons, Christian Scientists, Jehovah's Witnesses, and Unity, and "Nonecclesiastical Spiritual Movements," a sampling of astrology, naturalistic humanism, he- donism, nationalism, etc. B. Period Histories 5405. Garrison, Winfred Ernest. The march of faith; the story of religion in America since 1865. New York, Harper, 1933. 332 p. 33-11236 BR525.G3 "Sources and bibliography": p. 309-316. A swift-paced narrative of American religious history since the Civil War, treated as inseparable from the economic, political, scientific, and cul- tural life of the time. The opening chapters, which sketch the Reconstruction era, the westward move- ment, and the "Gilded Age" of financial specula- tion, are primarily social history, although focused on religious activity. With a chapter on Moody and Sankey and other revivalists Professor Garrison turns more specifically to the history of religion. He recounts with interesting detail of men and events the spread of the new liberalism in religious thought, efforts at church union (he is himself prominent in the world ecumenical movement), the rise of the social gospel, and the increased activity of missions RELIGION / 757 in America's age of overseas expansion. The records of individual denominations are briefly reviewed, a chapter being given to Roman Catholicism and another to the formation of the interdenominational Federal Council of the Churches of Christ. Social history is again to the fore in the chapters on the connection of churches with big business and their role in the First World War and the postwar years of prosperity. Finally the author examines miscel- laneous doctrines, the groups outside the main Prot- estant sects, mystic and non-Christian cults, etc., and concludes with the argument that religion must deal in the matters of political concern, but should do so in a tolerant rather than a crusading spirit. 5406. Humphrey, Edward F. Nationalism and religion in America, 1 774-1 789. Boston, Chipman Law Pub. Co., 1924. 536 p. 24-12770 BR520.H75 Bibliography: p. [5171-532. In the formative years of the American Nation the period covered in this historical monograph, "the pulpit was the most powerful single force in America for the creadon and control of public opinion," and religion, according to the author, was one of the more potent factors in the forging of the United States. Because of the separation of church and state in the new Republic, he points out, most American historians have deliberately omitted the religious element from constitutional history, in spite of its importance, to which both de Tocque- ville and Bryce testified. Dr. Humphrey analyzes in a scholarly manner, with many quotations from contemporary sermons and documents, the contri- butions or the opposition of the various churches to political independence during the Revolution. This forms the first part of his book; the second part treats the independent and national organization of the churches during the Confederadon. It also in- cludes chapters on the separation of church and state, the influerjxx-oi_jhe_clLui£hes in the Conti- nental Congfess and in the making oFthe Constitu- tion, and their welcome of the new National Government. 5407. Johnson, Charles A. The frontier camp meeting; religion's harvest time. Dallas, Southern Methodist University Press, 1955. 325 p. illus. 55-8783 BX8475.J64 Bibliography: p. 303-319. The author, studying evangelical revivalism in the trans-Allegheny West from 1800 to 1840, de- scribes the frontier camp meeting as one of the most important social institutions serving to tame backwoods society. Recreating "Camp Meetin' Time" through historical analysis documented from contemporary accounts, appraisals, sermons, and hymns, he is at pains to correct the caricatures and distortions which, he thinks, have pervaded 19th- century fiction, the biased writings of non-Methodist churchmen, and even secular histories. It was the Methodist itineracy system which chiefly developed the camp meeting technique, and the Methodists were almost alone in using it after 1805, although open-air gatherings were usual during the Great Revival or Second Great Awakening of 1800, and the first planned camp meeting was probably under Presbyterian auspices. To the "most fabulous of all great Revival meetings," at Cane Ridge in Bourbon County, Kentucky, in 1801, there came Baptist and Methodist preachers as well as 18 Presbyterian ministers; the "frenzied worship" con- tinued for six days, with attendance anywhere between ten and twenty-five thousand. The "fall- ing exercise," "the jerks," rolling, dancing, singing, and barking were engaged in by an estimated one to two thousand converts. The writer follows the camp meeting from this primitive form into its maturity under Methodist discipline, which en- deavored to restrain emotional excesses. He tells of individual circuit riders, the evangelical doctrine they preached, camp meeting hymnody, and the social life in the "Tented Grove" — "the most mam- moth picnic possible." He cites contemporary endorsements and criticisms. By the 1840's the institution was dying out, supplanted by permanent auditoriums and cabins invading the old forest camp sites, and by the churches in the rising towns. 5408. Morais, Herbert M. Deism in eighteenth century America. New York, Columbia University Press, 1934. 203 p. (Columbia Uni- versity. Faculty of Political Science. Studies in history, economics and public law, no. 397) 34- 2 3477 H31.C7, no. 397 BL2760.M6 1934a "List of authorities": p. 179-193. A dissertation, exhaustively documented, which studies the "remarkable spread of scepticism" in America during the latter 18th century. The liberal philosophy of the Age of Reason, as it appeared among the educated upper classes in the colonies and during the Revolution, did not for the most part extend to atheism. Jefferson, who sought to do away with clericalism and return to the pure teachings of Jesus, was more typical of American deism than were radicals such as Ethan Allan, whose ponderous book of 1784, Reason the Only Oracle of Man, was the first American text explicitly to reject Christianity. The author examines the European background of deism, its spread in colonial America through the importation of rationalistic books and the introduction of Newtonian science, its leaders and influence during the Revolution, and its mili- 758 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES tant stage in the early national period. Inspired by the French Revolution, Thomas Paine published his Age of Reason in 1794, attacking the principle of Biblical revelation. There arose a vigorous atheistic movement, led by a former Baptist clergy- man, Elihu Palmer, with a widespread establish- ment of deistic societies and freethinking news- papers. Dr. Morais traces the course of deism, and the opposition of the clergy and colleges, through the turn of the century to its collapse following the explosion of evangelical Christianity in the Second Great Awakening. 5409. Schneider, Herbert W. Religion in 20th century America. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1952. 244 p. illus. (The Library of Congress series in American civilization) 52-8219 BR525.S34 This closely written book by a professor of phi- losophy and religion at Columbia convincingly ex- plains the transformation of religious habits, ideas, and institutions that has taken place in America during the last 50 years. The first three chapters survey the secularization and socialization of re- ligious life. Religion is now, Dr. Schneider states, "one of America's biggest businesses," conducted by trained professionals among whom laymen are in- creasingly numerous; religious activities are chiefly directed, not to the salvation of individual souls, but against secular evils and social problems; re- ligion, "like government," pervades all areas of life — education, medicine, politics, business, art: "Anything can be done religiously, and nothing is safe from ecclesiastical concern." The author ex- amines the changes in America's religious con- science, the rapprochement of psychiatry and re- ligion, the far-reaching spread of the social gospel, and its recent more realistic "rethinking." The second half of the text, which is separated from the first three chapters by a set of illustrative "Exhibits," is an analysis of changing trends in theological thought — the various reactions to 19th-century liberalism of fundamentalism, neo-orthodoxy, ex- istentialism, humanism — and of the modern "art of worship." The last chapter discusses the interpre- tation of "Varieties of Religious Experience since William James." A useful compilation supplement- ing this is volume 256, March 1948, of the Annals of the American Academy of Political and Social Science, Organized Religion in the United States, edited by Ray H. Abrams (Philadelphia, 1948. 265 p.). Papers by a variety of experts are arranged in five groups: "Our Contemporary Religious In- stitutions," "Relationship to Other Institutions" (state, class, family), "The Churches and Social Action," "Trends and Future Prospects," and "Sta- tistics and Bibliography." 5410. Sweet, William Warren. Religion in colo- nial America. New York, Scribner, 1942. xiii, 367 p. 42-19309 BR520.S88 "Selected bibliography": p. 341-356. 541 1. Sweet, William Warren. Religion in the development of American culture, 1765— 1840. New York, Scribner, 1952. xiv, 338 p. 52-9960 BR520.S882 Bibliography: p. 315-332. The author of The Story of Religion in America (no. 5401) has spent a lifetime studying the re- ligious history of his country, and writes of it in the style of the urbane scholar addressing a literate lay public. Religion in Colonial America is the first installment of a general history by periods. It relates the transplanting of 17th-century Western European religion to the Colonies, and the adapta- tion of the various faiths to the physical, social, and political conditions of their new setting. The first arrivals, the Anglican Church in Virginia, and the Puritans in New England, founded state churches; after the Restoration (1660) adherents of other faiths — Baptists, Quakers, Roman Catholics, Lutherans, German pietists, Scotch-Irish Presby- terians — increasingly brought diversity, individual- ism, and liberalizing influences to the American religious scene. Dr. Sweet begins with a general chapter on the religious motives in the planting of the Colonies (said Hakluyt, "greatly for the inlarge- ment of the gospill of Christ"), then tells the story of each denomination through the whole period. His last chapters deal with the Great Awakening in New England and the South, and the general advance toward disestablishment and religious liberty. Ten years later there followed Religion in the Development of American Culture, 1765-1840. Here the stress is on the radical factor in American religion, especially on the frontier. The better pioneers, Dr. Sweet says, were nonconformists or heretics, "impatient of the old and open-minded to the new and untried," who found opportunity for self-expression in the new West. "The story of experimentation in organized religion on the fron- tier constitutes one of the most significant and important aspects of the development of the new western civilization and culture." The first three chapters on religion during the Revolution, and the subsequent breaking of Old World ties to form new national organizations are, as in the preceding volume, traced through the separate threads of the individual denominations, and these same threads are followed in the account of the westward move- ment. Then come chapters on general aspects: "Barbarism vs. Revivalism," "Religion and Our Cultural Foundations" (the founding of colleges and seminaries), "The Revolt against Calvinism," RELIGION / 759 missions, and "The Frontier Utopias": Mormons, Shakers, and other religious communities. An epilogue accepts, "with modifications," F. J. Tur- ner's thesis of the frontier as the central theme in American history of this period. The third and fourth volumes of this series, which will bring the story to the present day, are still awaited. 5412. Sweet, William Warren, ed. Religion on the American frontier, 1783- [1850] New York and Chicago, 1931-46. 4 v. 5413. [Vol. 1] The Baptists, 1783-1830, a collec- tion of source material; general introd. by Shirley Jackson Case. New York, Holt, 1931. 652 p. 31-26855 BX6235.S8 Bibliography: p. 629-637. 5414. Vol. 2. The Presbyterians, 1 783-1 840, a col- lection of source materials. New York, Harper, 1936. 939 p. 36-15032 BX8935.S75 Bibliography: p. 888-917. 5415. Vol. 3. The Congregationalists, a collection of source materials. Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1939. 435 p. 39-33291 BX7131.S9 Bibliography: p. [405]~4i8. 5416. Vol. 4. The Methodists, a collection of source materials. Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1946. 800 p. A47-717 BX8235.S92 Bibliography: p. [731] -770. The sources on which Dr. Sweet based this fron- tier study and his history of Methodism (no. 5458) were assembled in a comprehensive search of the manuscript and out-of-print collections of church and seminary libraries in the region. He has made a share of his labors accessible to other scholars in this 4-volume collection of source materials for the Baptist, Presbyterian, Congregationalist, and Meth- odist churches in the trans-Allegheny West. Each volume begins with a general introduction of about a hundred pages explaining the status of the de- nomination at the end of the Revolution, and the stages and various aspects of its westward migra- tion. Then come extracts from letters and reports, church minutes, the memoirs of preachers and mis- sionaries, records of conferences and of church trials, and a sampling of documents of many other varie- ties. Each volume includes a long bibliography. 5417. Winslow, Ola Elizabeth. Meetinghouse Hill, 1630-1783. New York, Macmillan, 1952. 344 p. illus. 52-1 1 102 BR530.W5 A social picture of religion in colonial New Eng- land, with the meetinghouse on the hilltop "in sharp focus." The writer's purpose, carried out with bal- ance and charm, is, "by recalling typical procedures in relation to various aspects of community life, to suggest attitudes which [the meetinghouse] helped to establish and patterns of group action which it helped to make habitual." She has based her interpretation on town and church records, sermons, diaries, letters, and other memorials of the theocratic New England of the 17th and 18th centuries. Her narrative incorporates many well- chosen quotations. Of the five books, the first, "Bound Up Together in a Litde Bundle of Life," describes, mosdy by means of particular instances, the establishment of congregation, meetinghouse, and village. Book 2, "Zion is Not a City of Fools" (Cotton Mather), is on the learning and the ser- mons of the clergy. Book 3, "Noises about the Temple," describes "Where to Set," how to sing, etc. Book 4 deals with the "Rule of the 'Lord Brethren,' " the government and authority of the congregation. Book 5, "Powder in the Meeting- house," illustrates the close association of the New England pulpit with the cause of liberty. C. Church and State 5418. Blau, Joseph L., ed. Cornerstones of re- ligious freedom in America. Boston, Beacon Press, 1949. 250 p. (Beacon Press studies in free- dom and power) 49-10649 BR516.B55 "List of sources": p. 246-247. A compilation of notable documents illustrating the history of American religious liberty. The editor writes a general introduction and an explan- atory headnote for each of the themes under which he has arranged the extracts from writings and speeches. The headings are: "Colonial Stirrings" (Roger Williams and William Penn); "Building the Wall of Separation" (Jefferson and Madison); "The Affirmation of Civil Rights for Religious Minorities" (including a speech on the Maryland "Jew Bill," 1819); "Resistance to Enforced Sabbath Observance" (1830); "On Keeping Religion Out of Politics" (Zclotes Fuller, The Tree of Liberty, 1830); "Resistance to Imposed Religious Forms" (from A Report on Appointing Chaplains to the Legislature 760 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES of New Yor1{, 1832); "On Keeping Religion Out of Public Schools" (Horace Mann, 1848); "On Keep- ing God Out of the Constitution" (1873 an ^ 1876) ; and "The Fight against Released Time" (Justice Felix Frankfurter's concurring opinion in a case regarding religious education during school hours, 1948). 5419. Greene, Evarts B. Religion and the state; the making and testing of an American tra- dition. New York, New York University Press, 1941. 172 p. (Anson G. Phelps lectureship on early American history. New York University. Stokes Foundation) 42-1794 BR516.G67 Six lectures by a distinguished historian, oudin- ing concisely, informally, and interestingly the main themes of church-state relationships in America. Professor Greene begins with the European ante- cedents, in Protestant and Catholic countries alike, of an established church in which ecclesiastical and temporal control were closely associated. Next he examines the transplantation of these ideas to New Spain, New France, New Netherland, Anglican Virginia, and Puritan New England. His third lec- ture introduces the liberalizing factors in the British colonies — the Rhode Island "livelie experiment" in religious freedom, the policy of Lord Baltimore and other proprietary governors of toleration for rent- paying tenants, and William Penn's "first funda- mentall" of freedom of faith and worship. The Act of Toleration (1688), the Great Awakening, the penetration of 18th-century rationalism, all aided dissent, till on the eve of the Revolution church establishment was everywhere losing ground. The religious history of the Revolutionary and Federal eras is discussed in a chapter called "Separation." Chapter V, "After Separation," describes the situa- tion after the last disestablishment act, passed by Massachusetts in 1833, and the persisting church- state relations in exemptions from taxation, in the law of church property, and in politics. The last chapter turns to the difficult question of education, in which more than in any other department the American tradition of disestablishment is tested. (See also nos. 5491 and 5494-) The valuable "Bib- liographical Notes" (p. 147-162) are arranged by chapters. 5420. Stokes, Anson Phelps. Church and state in the United States. New York, Harper, 1950. 3 v. illus. 50-7978 BR516.S85 "Critical and classified selected bibliography": v. 3, p. 769-836. The late author of this classic and encyclopedic work, a noted Episcopalian cleric and educator, pub- lished it after retiring as canon of Washington Cathedral. Professor Gabriel of Yale University, of which Dr. Stokes had been Secretary for over 20 years, speaks in his introductory note of the author as "guided by the historian's ideal of objectivity and the desire to uncover all pertinent material." The subtitle shows the vast terrain covered in the three large volumes: "A Historical Survey, Source Book, and Interpretation of Documents and Events Show- ing the Growth of Religious Freedom under the Friendly Constitutional Separation of Church and State, and the Resulting Influence of Religion in All Major Phases of National Development; also a Study of the Status of Churches Including Syna- gogues and Other Religious Groups under Federal and State Constitutions, Statutes, and Judicial Deci- sions; Authoritative Opinions of Courts, Church Bodies, Statesmen, Religious Leaders, and Publicists on Matters at Issue; and a Discussion of Contempo- rary Problems of Adjustment." Adjectives used by reviewers pay tribute to the monumental character of the work: "spacious, erudite, and magnanimous," "unique," "definitive." Those pressed for time may limit themselves to Part 8, a "Summary and Inter- pretation" (v. 3, p. 629-726) of the preceding seven. Part 9 includes, in addition to the monumental bibliography, a table of dates and six documentary appendixes, the last of which is a compilation of the "Provisions in State Constitutions Regarding Reli- gious Freedom." 5421. Torpey, William G. Judicial doctrines of religious rights in America. Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina Press, 1948. 376 p. 48-8404 Law Bibliography: p. [333 H71. A legal study, beginning with an historical analy- sis of relations of government to religion, and then examining many aspects of religious freedom as interpreted, especially by the State courts. Under the first heading, "Delegated and Police Powers as Limitations upon Religious Freedom," there are dis- cussed such matters as pacifism and conscientious objectors, postal laws prohibiting use of mails to defraud, refusals to salute the flag, Sunday laws, laws against fortunetelling. In many of these cases, which seem to run to oddities, the courts have ruled that religious liberty was not violated. Religious organizations are next considered with respect to their legal status, the finality of their decisions, the right of religious assembly, and the exemption of church property from taxation. Then the author turns to the religious rights of the individual in marriage and divorce, in conflicts over child control, in education, in court trials, and in bequests for religious purposes. Many of these cases likewise turn on what seem eccentricities of faith and con- duct. The text is in easy narrative style, with foot- note references to the many cases cited (tabulated in RELIGION / 761 the bibliography), and each chapter ends with a simple and useful summary. 5422. Zollmann, Carl F. G. American church law. St. Paul, West Pub. Co., 1933. xv, 675 p. 33-44 2 x Law A standard handbook of church law, covering comprehensively statutes in force of the Federal Government and the States relating to religious matters. Published first in 1917 with the title, American Civil Church Law, as volume 77 of the Columbia University Studies in history, economics and public law, it has been revised and expanded to encompass new material. It begins with a "Table of Constitutional Provisions Cited" (U.S., Alabama- Wyoming), and ends with a 40-page table of nearly 2500 cases. Each chapter opens with a list of the numbered sections into which it is divided. The sections state the legal issue under consideration: e.g., Ch. I, Sec. 29, "The Legal Effect of Ante- nuptial Promises in Mixed Marriages." The first two chapters on religious liberty and religious educa- tion include a number of the more unusual claims made on religious grounds, and upheld or rejected by the courts. Most of the laws, however, relate to matters of regular procedure or administration: the forms, natures, and powers of corporations, church constitutions, implied trusts, schisms, church decisions, and such material matters as tax exemp- tion, the rights of clergymen and church officers, the acquisition, protection, and liability of church prop- erty, pew rights, and cemeteries. D. Religious Thought; Theology 5423. Bainton, Roland H. Yale and the ministry; a history of education for the Christian min- istry at Yale from the founding in 1701. Line drawings by the author. New York, Harper, 1957. 297 p. 57-7344 BV4070.Y36B3 5424. Williams, George Huntston, ed. The Har- vard Divinity School: its place in Harvard University and in American culture. Boston, Bea- con Press, 1954. xvi, 366 p. illus. 54-8425 BV4070.H46W5 These histories are rather different in scope, for while the Yale volume takes its departure from the founding of the college in 1701, the Harvard one starts only with the "tentative beginnings" of a separate divinity school in 181 1, leading to its estab- lishment as a separate department in 1819. Yale followed suit and set up a divinity school in 1822, but the first six chapters of Professor Bainton's book are concerned with the training of a learned min- istry during the first 12 decades of the college. After four years spent in earning their bachelor's degrees, candidates would undergo an apprenticeship in the homes of the "graduate faculty," Connecticut pas- tors who were themselves Yale graduates. The au- thor paints an impressive picture of Yale as "the creation, instrument, and leader of an entire com- munity embracing the Connecticut valley as far north as Northampton, and taking in the southern fringe of Massachusetts and Rhode Island." The remaining 14 chapters narrate the history of the di- vinity school, with special attention to the "New Haven theology" which prevailed for some decades after its foundation, movements of moral reform, the acquisition of separate buildings, and distin- guished teachers of several generations. Nor is it a backward-looking book for, in Dr. Bainton's opinion, "the last quarter of a century has been the greatest in the history of the Yale Divinity School," with a rigorously selected student body of the highest quality, ten percent of whom are women. Acting Dean Williams' volume on the Harvard School over which he presides is a cooperative work, with three chronological chapters contributed by Conrad Wright (to 1840), Sydney E. Ahlstrom (to 1880), and Levering Reynolds, Jr. (to the present); while the late Dean Willard L. Sperry has a briefer one on student life during the 19th century. Three supplementary essays, by Deans Sperry and Wil- liams and Ralph Lazzaro, are concerned with "The- ology at Harvard and Its Place in American Cul- ture." Here Dean Sperry has the crucial subject of "Preparation for the Ministry in a Nondenomina- tional School," for the School abandoned its Uni- tarian origins during the mid-igth century, and since 1865 has been "pan-Protestant and ecumenical" in oudook. Excellent portraits of 34 members of the faculty and a chronological chart at the end in- crease the value of the book. 5425. Ferm, Vergilius T. A., ed. Contemporary American theology; theological autobiogra- phies. New York, Round Table Press, 1932-33. 2V ^ 33- 2 54 2 BR525.F4 "Principal publications" at end of each "autobiography." Twenty-three of America's leading theologians contributed to these two volumes, for which they 431240—60- -50 762 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES were asked to set down "in an intimate manner" their personal stories of religious development. The editor's introductions to each volume outline some of the main trends of contemporary Protestantism. Most of the writers are professors of theology in universities or seminaries. In their spiritual expe- rience they reflect the tremendous shifts in religious thinking that have taken place in the 20th century. In general they have revolted against liberalism as lacking in inner values (one writer came to see in liberal religion "merely a comfortable rationaliza- tion of middle-class prosperity"), and have turned toward modernism or conservatism. "Certain agreements and convergences" appear in these con- fessions of faith — the search for indubitable funda- mentals, for social implications, loyalty to organized religious expression, the acceptance of higher criti- cism — but from a viewpoint tempered with imagi- nation and poetic insight, an unconcern for abso- lutes. In theology, as in scientific investigation, says the editor, there is "the spirit of open-minded- ness, a place for possibilities as yet unrealized, for convictions open to correction." "If the loss is great in dogmatic authority, the gain is great in the realm of faith and credibility." 5426. Finkelstein, Louis, ed. American spiritual autobiographies, fifteen self-portraits. New York, Harper, 1948. xvi, 276 p. 48-9493 BL72.F5 Contents . — M. L. Wilson . — George N. Shuster. — Alvin S. Johnson. — Lyman Bryson. — Raphael Isaacs. — Harry J. Carman. — Harry Emer- son Fosdick. — Rufus M. Jones. — Mary K. Simkho- vitch. — William Foxwell Albright. — Mary McLeod Bethune. — Charles S. Johnson. — William G. Con- stable. — Jacob S. Potofsky. — Simon J. Finkelstein. — Biographical sketches. 5427. Finkelstein, Louis, ed. Thirteen Americans: their spiritual autobiographies. New York, Institute for Religious and Social Studies; distributed by Harper, 1953. 296 p. (Religion and civilization series) 53—5437 E176.I5 Contents. — C 1 a r e n c e E. Pickett. — Ordway Tead. — Henry Norris Russell. — Edwin Grant Conklin. — Richard McKeon. — Erwin D. Can- ham. — Elbert D. Thomas. : — Judith Berlin Lieber- man. — Channing H. Tobias. — David de Sola Pool. — Basil O'Connor. — Willard L. Sperry. — Julian Morgenstern. Two collections of autobiographical essays, all of which are "frank self-revelations" and concentrate on "the problems and influence of character and spirit." The 1948 volume arose from original lec- tures at the interdenominational Institute for Reli- gious and Social Studies. Its 15 essays are by as many leaders of varied faiths who have contributed largely to American intellectual and spiritual life. The editor explains that they were selected "for a certain spiritual quality permeating their lives and actions which we may comprehend under the gen- eral term, saintliness, though it varies greatly from person to person." The biographical notes at the end of the book show that the majority represent a variety of professions outside the ministry — the social sciences, philosophy, science, public affairs, medi- cine, etc. The second volume includes 1 1 lectures delivered at the Institute and 2 essays written for the compilation. The editor comments that "the writers of these autobiographies differ from other people only in the extent of their dedication, and in the scope of causes they serve, but not in kind." 5428. Foster, Frank Hugh. A genetic history of the New England theology. Chicago, Uni- versity of Chicago Press, 1907. xv, 568 p. 7-8502 BX7250.F7 A time-honored doctrinal history of the distinc- tive New England school of theology which took its departure from Jonathan Edwards' revivalist preach- ing of predestination in 1734. After a chapter on Puritanism and its decline, the writer concentrates on dogmatics, reviewing Edwards' battle with the anti-Calvinistic Arminians in his treatise on* freedom of the will, and analyzing his other metaphysical concepts. He then examines the deterministic teachings of Edwards' successors, Joseph Bellamy, Samuel Hopkins, Jonathan Edwards the younger, and others. This uncompromising modification of Calvinism was the dominant school of thought in New England Congregationalism and in American Christianity in the latter 18th century. At the open- ing of the 19th century there arose within it two schisms, Unitarianism, which the writer studies in the teaching of W. E. Channing, and Universalism (Hosea Ballou's Treatise on the Atonement, and the essays of Walter Balfour denying the existence of hell). The later trends of the New England theol- ogy, as adapted to a changing environment, are next analyzed through the doctrines of individual lead- ers — Nathanael Emmons, Nathaniel W. Taylor, Horace Bushnell, Charles G. Finney, Edwards A. Park. The last chapter records the sudden collapse of Calvinism in 1880, under the impact of Dar- winism and of Biblical criticism. The theological thought of Congregationalist and other Protestant preachers who succeeded the New England school was expounded by Dr. Foster in a series of lectures at the Andover Newton Theological School in 1934. This work, The Modern Movement in American Theology, published posthumously in 1939 (New York, Revell, 219 p.), had the subtitle: "Sketches in the History of American Protestant Thought from the Civil War to the World War." It analyzes RELIGION / 763 the currents in Protestant thought resulting from Darwinism and the attempt to reconcile science, philosophy, and the modern world with theology, religion, and Christianity. The schools of Horace Bushnell and Henry Ward Beecher, the teaching of George A. Gordon, William N. Clarke, Henry C. King of Oberlin College, and other leaders of liberal and radical thought are described. 5429. Furniss, Norman F. The fundamentalist controversy, 1918-1931. New Haven, Yale University Press, 1954. 199 p. (Yale historical publications. Miscellany, 59) 54-5082 BT78.F82 5430. Cole, Stewart G. The history of fundamen- talism. New York, R. R. Smith, 1931. xiv, 360 p. 31-10666 BT78.C56 Bibliography: p. 341-350. Dr. Furniss' well-documented dissertation begins with a lively account of the sensational Scopes trial at Dayton, Tennessee, in the summer of 1925. At the extravagandy publicized "monkey trial" the complete discomfiture of William Jennings Bryan through the rigorous cross-questioning of the free- thinking defense attorney, Clarence Darrow, spot- lighted the fundamentalist controversy. The author studies in detail the conservatives' battle for the literal acceptance of the Bible as against evolutionary science and modernism in theology, which had be- gun at the turn of the century and was waged with greater fervor after the First World War. In the opening "Analysis of the Fundamentalist Crusade" he outlines the general course of militant fundamen- talism and the characteristics of the movement, among which he alleges violence, ignorance, and egotism. He next examines fundamentalist organi- zations and their attempts to secure laws against the teaching of evolution; the central body, the World's Christian Fundamentals Association (founded at the Moody Bible Institute in Chicago in 1919) within 2 years spread its campaigns into 25 states. The third and longest section analyzes the contro- versy within the separate churches — both the North- ern and Southern branches of Baptists and Presby- terians were sharply divided, Methodists and Epis- copalians slightly troubled, the Disciples of Christ deeply shaken. A postscript comments on the de- cline of the aggressive movement with the death of Bryan and the spread of scientific knowledge into the regions which had furnished its support. Dr. Furniss cites Stewart G. Cole's The History of Fun- damentalism as the most comprehensive history of the conflict over modernism. This work is focused on doctrinal aspects of the conflict within the churches and pays minor attention to the antievolu- tion campaign. 5431. James, William. The varieties of religious experience, a study in human nature; being the GifTord lectures on natural religion delivered at Edinburgh in 1901-1902. New York, Modern Library, 1936. xviii, 526 p. (The Modern Library of the world's best books) 37-27013 BR110.J3 1936 First published in 1902. "The description of man's religious constitutions" is William James' own summation of these famous lectures which formed the starting-point for the modern study of the psychology of religion and are ranked among the most important of American contributions to religious thought. Proceeding from physiological psychology, the founder of philo- sophical pragmatism examined case histories of religious experience in the light of his "radical empiricism." With vivid analysis and felicitous citation he explored religious hallucinations, the "healthy-mindedness" of liberal religion (particu- larly the "mind-cure" movement), the opposite pole of pessimism, the divided self, conversion, saindi- ness, mysticism, and other characteristics of religious experience. "I have loaded the lectures," he said, "with concrete examples, and I have chosen these among the extremer expressions of the religious temperament." In the last chapters he sums up the phenomena in the general terms which he con- siders common to all religious persons: "We have in the fact that the conscious person is continuous with a wider self through which saving experiences come, a positive content of religious experience which, it seems to me, is literally and objectively true as far as it goes." To this he added his "over- belief" that there exist other worlds of consciousness from which higher energies may filter into our lives from communion with the ideal in faith and prayer. 5432. Kegley, Charles W., ed. Reinhold Niebuhr: his religious, social, and political thought, edited by Charles W. Kegley and Robert W. Bretall. New York, Macmillan, 1956. xiv, 486 p. (The Library of living theologv, v. 2) 56-13522 BX4827.N5K4 5433. Kegley, Charles W., ed. The theology of Paul Tillich, edited by Charles W. Kegley & Robert W. Bretall. New York, Macmillan, 1952. xiv, 370 p. (The Library of living theology, v. 1) 52-13200 BX4827.T53K4 Perhaps the most vigorous theological thinking in America during the turbulent present has been that of the two theologians chosen as subjects of the first volumes in a series paralleling the Library of living philosophers edited by Paul A. Schilpp (nos. 5294, 5377, and 5385). The editors follow the same form, each volume including the subject's 764 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES "intellectual autobiography," essays on different aspects of his work by leading scholars, his reply to interpretation and criticism, and a full bibliography of his writings. The third and fourth volumes of the series, as announced, are to go outside America, to treat the Swiss theologians Karl Barth and Emil Brunner, whose "neo-orthodox" or "neo-super- naturalist" doctrines have close relationships with Tillich and Niebuhr. These are works to be read by trained theologians. Reinhold Niebuhr first re- ceived attention as a critic of social conditions, and is known primarily as a Christian ethical and politi- cal thinker. He has been prominent in what Paul Tillich, writing the first essay on Niebuhr, speaks of as "the theological revolution" against liberalism in the United States. His doctrine is labeled "neo- orthodox," although, Dr. Tillich says, there is nothing in the world more unorthodox than "the spiritual volcano Reinhold Niebuhr." Since 1930 he has been professor of applied Christianity at Union Theological Seminary. Tillich left Germany at the beginning of the Hitier era and became Nie- buhr's colleague at the Union Theological Seminary, which he left to go to the Harvard Divinity School in 1954. For the last quarter-century the two have led in the enunciation of dialectical theology. Tillich is currently publishing his Systematic Theology (Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1951-57. 2 v. (300, 187 p.); v. 2 has tide Existence and the Christ), which correlates philosophic questions with existential theological answers stemming from rev- elation. There are interpretative chapters on the theology of Niebuhr and Tillich in David Wesley Soper's Major Voices in American Theology: [v. 1] Six Contemporary Leaders (Philadelphia, Westminster Press, 1953. 217 p.). The author, chairman of the Department of Religion of Beloit College in Wisconsin, has written several other "readable" books on contemporary theology. Be- sides the two above-mentioned men, his study covers the Methodist evangelical theologian Edwin Lewis of Drew University, Nels F. S. Ferre, the "postcritical" professor of philosophical theology at Vanderbilt University, and H. Richard Niebuhr and Robert Calhoun of Yale, the first of whom teaches that man is justified by hope, and the sec- ond, by work. A second volume of Mr. Soper's Major Voices in American Theology, entided Men Who Shape Belief (1955. 224 p.), gives somewhat briefer accounts of 11 additional theologians di- vided into 2 groups. The first, including John Luther Adams, Douglas V. Steere, John A. Mackay, Walter M. Horton, John C. Bennett, Wilhelm Pauck, and Harris Franklin Rail, has the title "A Central Theme: God, the Lord of History." The second part, "Alternative Trends," treats the "Church-centered" theology of W. Norman Pit- tenger, the Biblical literalism of Louis Berkhof, the theology of "exclusive immanence" of Henry N. Wieman, and the "theistic finitism" of Edgar S. Brightman. 5434. Long, Edward Le Roy. Religious beliefs of American scientists. Philadelphia, West- minster Press, 1952. 168 p. 52-9193 BL240.L66 1952 A study, which originated as a Columbia Univer- sity dissertation, of the thought of natural scientists who have been sufficiently concerned with the mean- ing of life to write books expressing their beliefs. In all the writings surveyed the author discovers the search for a basis on which to reconcile science and religion. The men whose published credos are se- lected for discussion are 20th-century Americans, most of whom have written since the controversy over evolution in the twenties. The two parts are "Approaches through Science" and "Approaches through Religion." In the first appear, among many others, the well-known names Alfred Einstein and David Starr Jordan, who equated God with the cosmic order; Arthur H. Compton, who recognizes God as first cause; and Henry Fairfield Osborn, Robert A. Millikan (no. 4755), and Lecomte Du Noiiy, who, like the philosopher Alfred N. White- head (nos. 5383-5385), see God as the ruler of evolu- tion. In part 2 the writer analyzes books by scien- tists who, starting from belief in the Bible as literal truth or as of unique significance, try to fit contem- porary scientific knowledge to Christian faith. 5435. Neumann, Henry. Spokesmen for ethical religion. Boston, Beacon Press, 195 1. xvii, 173 p. 51-11143 BJ1581.N27 The ethical movement is associated particularly with the name of Felix Adler, a Hebrew scholar and agnostic who, having rejected Reform Judaism, in 1876 founded the Ethical Culture Society. This book, written by a longtime leader of the society for its 75th anniversary, expounds at length its prin- ciples — that the essence of religion is not creeds but good deeds, "to treat one another in ways which do most credit to the name human." The first four chapters are devoted to Adler, his formation of the society and of the "Workingman's School," now the Ethical Culture School, in which children of differ- ent faiths are brought together for nonsectarian moral education; his reform efforts on behalf of labor; his religious outlook; and his teaching of ethical living by community and nation. There follow chapters on Adler's chief disciple, John Love- joy Elliott, other American leaders, and spokesmen in England, Germany, and Austria. The last three chapters explain the basic ideas of ethical religion: "Unity in Diversity," "How to Tell Right from RELIGION / 765 Wrong," "Why a Religion?" The latter may be summarized in the statement which for many years appeared on the announcements of the ethical so- cities: "We interpret religion to mean fervent de- votion to the ethical ideal." The educational ideas of the Ethical Culture Society incorporated those of a short-lived earlier movement, the Free Religious Association, which in the last third of the 19th cen- tury asserted that philanthropy and social reform were an integral part of religious faith. This group is the subject of a historical monograph by Prof. Stow Persons of Princeton University: Free Reli- gion, an American Faith (New Haven, Yale Univer- sity Press, 1947. 168 p.). An offshoot of radical Unitarianism, this "spiritual anti-slavery society" was launched by a few young clergymen in New England in 1867. Numerically the association was an insignificant group; its maximum membership during the seventies may have been five hundred; by the mid-eighties it was in decline, many of its members back in the Unitarian fold. Its views, expressed in its organ, The Index, edited by Francis Abbott, and largely written by him and his col- league, William J. Potter, influenced the later hu- manistic theism of the Unitarians, and particularly the emergence of the social gospel. 5436. Smith, Hilrie S. Changing conceptions of original sin; a study in American theology since 1750. New York, Scribner, 1955. 242 p. 55-9682 BT720.S5 An illuminating study of the doctrine of original sin in American religious thought, first presented as lectures at Princeton Theological Seminary by a professor of Duke University Divinity School. Dr. Smith explains the Puritan concept, the "federal" or "covenant" doctrine of inherited corruption through Adam's disobedience, which dominated colonial the- ology — "In Adam's fall, We sinned all." In the 1 8th century Jonathan Edwards and his followers upheld this Calvinistic tenet of native and inherited depravity against the repudiation of infant damna- tion by the English Daniel Whitby and John Taylor and their American disciples, the precursors of the Unitarian revolt. In the 19th century a modified form of the Calvinist position was maintained by Nathaniel W. Taylor at New Haven, and later by Horace Bushnell, and was opposed by the Unitarian Harvard school, led by Andrews Norton. The lib- eralism that followed Darwin rejected the fall of man and argued that sin originated in man's re- fusal to respond to his higher nature. This trend, dominant in late 19th and early 20th century thought, was challenged by Walter Rauschenbush, and in our own day by Niebuhr and Tillich, who have returned to a doctrine of original sin as indis- pensable to an understanding of the human situa- tion and of the Christian doctrine of grace. 5437. Wieman, Henry Nelson, and Bernard Eu- gene Meland. American philosophies of re- ligion. Chicago, Willett, Clark, 1936. 370 p. Bibliography: p. 353-359. 36-15871 BL51.W55 Professor Wieman of the University of Chicago is himself one of the prominent voices in liberal American theology at the present time. He and Professor Meland are both "empirical theists," whose thought is close to that of John Dewey, Shailer Mathews, and others who derive their idea of God from the experience of value in the scientifi- cally apprehended world of events. This book, de- signed for college use, surveys, defines, and labels contemporary types of religious thought as presented by individuals. It opens with a general section of orientation as to the background and traditions of American philosophies of religion. Then four main types are distinguished, "rooted in the traditions," respectively, of supernaturalism, idealism, romanti- cism, and naturalism. Within these are many shadings. Supernaturalists are traditionalist or neo- supernaturalist. The idealists include absolutists, modern mystics, and personalists. Within roman- ticism come ethical intuitionists, and philosophic, theological, or aesthetic naturalists. These last shade off into the "rooted" naturalists, who may be evolu- tionary theists, cosmic theists, religious humanists, or empirical theists. The volume ends with a short symposium, "The Present Oudook in Philosophy of Religion," by representatives of the four main branches, with summaries by the editors. 5438. Williams, Daniel Day. The Andover lib- erals; a study in American theology. New York, King's Crown Press, 1941. 203 p. Bibliography: p. [i93]-i99- 42-480 BV4070.A56W5 1941a The liberal movement in American Protestant thought found its most vigorous early expression at Andover Theological Seminary in Massachusetts during the years 1880 to 1895. This stronghold of Calvinism, founded by the Congregationalists in 1808, had been throughout the century a major battlefield of old and new faiths. Until 1881, when Edwards A. Park (no. 5428) retired, Calvinist or- thodoxy held the fort; in that year a new faculty, trained in the German critical-historical approach and in evolutionary philosophy, began to champion evangelical religious liberalism. Their journal, the Andover Review (1884-93), was tne organ of the new theology. Dr. Williams' study, which orig- inated as a Columbia University dissertation, re- 766 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES views the history of Andover and outlines the new developments in thought and their enunciation by the faculty and by the Review. Toward the close of the century, as strikes and labor troubles increase, the Andover theologians turned more and more to social problems. The movement culminated in "Social Christianity," marked by the establishment of a settlement house, Andover House in South Boston, in 1892. "The House's Head Resident found himself wondering if after all the trade union movement, and not the church, might be God's right arm in the bringing in of His Kingdom." E. Religious Bodies 5439. Braden, Charles S. These also believe; a study of modern American cults & minority religious movements. New York, Macmillan, 1949. xv, 491 p. 49- 8 9 r 7 BR516.B697 The author, a liberal Methodist, is an emeritus professor of the history and literature of religions at Northwestern University. Most writings on the groups here treated, he explains, have aimed "either to exploit the strange, bizarre elements which many of them do undoubtedly contain ... or to expose their weaknesses, refute their claims, laugh at their idiosyncrasies and so to discredit them." His is a careful scholarly study, based, insofar as each group would permit, on its own files of source materials. The lucid analysis of each comprises: essential his- torical facts; an explanation of its major distinctive religious ideas and their divergences, from and rela- tionships to normative Protestant or Catholic faith; the form of organization; significant practices, social or economic as well as religious; the basic motiva- tions to which they appeal; and current trends. The cults or minority religious bodies here examined are: The Peace Mission movement of Father Divine; Psychiana; New Thought; Unity School of Chris- tianity; Christian Science; Theosophy; the I Am Movement; the Liberal Catholic Church; Spiritual- ism; Jehovah's Witnesses; Anglo-Israel; the Oxford Group movement; and Mormonism. Appendix A is a short selected bibliography (p. 453-460), Appen- dix B is a brief dictionary of 18 other modern cults not included in the study. In 1958 Dr. Braden published a full-length objective "case study" of one of these religious bodies: Christian Science Today; Power, Policy, Practice (Dallas, Southern Methodist University Press. 432 p.). As his title indicates, his primary interest is not in the life of Mary Baker Eddy, but in the modifications of her teaching and the development of Christian Science thought and practice during the half-century since her passing, and in the means whereby the Board of Directors of the Mother Church in Boston have maintained their authority over 31 15 congregations throughout the United States and the world. It includes a very useful bibliography (p. 403-417). 5440. Clark, Elmer Talmage. The small sects in America. Rev. ed. New York, Abingdon- Cokesbury Press, 1949. 256 p. 49-10200 BR516.C57 1949 Bibliography: p. 236-240. On the numerous little religious bodies, "for the most part unknown to even well informed persons," this book, first published in 1937, has been the standard and, until recently, the only publication of its kind. The author emphasizes that the de- scriptions are his own rather than those of repre- sentatives of the several groups; the latter would as he has found, entail endless repetition and much obscurity. "A glance at the U.S. Census of Re- ligious Bodies will show the results of that pro- cedure." (In this connection it might be noted that the Census of Religious Bodies has not been taken since 1936, and in the i960 census religious distinctions are to be omitted from vital statistics.) Dr. Clark's attention is focused on the distinctive principles of the sects, and on their points of differ- ence rather than on the agreements, which, he reminds us, "are far more numerous and important than differences. In spite of superficial appear- ances the churches are nearly all alike, and the strife or contention between them has been greatly exaggerated." In a running narrative which in- cludes generalizations on sectarianism he examines about a hundred churches, denominations, and sects, grouping them by "the types of mind to which their leading principles appeal." His seven main categories are the pessimistic or adventists, the per- fectionist or subjectivist, the charismatic or pente- costal, the communistic, the legalistic or objectivist, the egocentric or New Thought, and the esoteric or mystic. The last two groups must be sought in the Appendix. 5441. Drummond, Andrew L. Story of Ameri- can Protestantism. Boston, Beacon Press, 1950. 418 p. 50-12382 BR515.D8 1950 Bibliography: p. 407-413. The writer is a Scottish theologian. His account of the metamorphoses of the Protestant faiths trans- planted from England, Scotland, Holland, and RELIGION / 767 Germany to the New World is in vivid narrative style. Of five books, the first four are historical: "Colonial Genesis," "Unification" (the Great Awakening, the Revolution and post-Revolution- ary "ebb-tide"), "Sectionalism" (the New England theology and growth of sectarianism), and "The Frontier and the Faith." The last part, "Modern American Religion (1865-1940)," is a general examination of the Protestant churches — the seven big denominations rather than the multiple small sects which account for only 3 percent of American church membership. Dr. Drummond is concerned to explain to British readers the vigor of the Ameri- can churches and the strength of the tradition of free Protestantism in the national life. He looks appraisingly at the social gospel, men and methods in evangelism, the liberal theology, eminent preachers, recent tendencies toward a renascence of worship, and interdenominational trends. He has made effective use of secondary sources, and his pages are filled with pertinent detail and telling quotation. 5442. Ferm, Vergilius T. A., ed. The American church of the Protestant heritage. New York, Philosphical Library, 1953. 481 p. 53-7607 BR516.F45 Contents. — The Moravian Church, by J. R. Weinlick. — The Lutheran Church in America, by V. Ferm. — The Mennonites, by J. C. Wenger. — The Presbyterian Church in America, by C. M. Drury. — The Protestant Episcopal Church in the United States of America, by W. H. Stowe. — The Reformed Church in America, by M. }. Hoffman. — Unitarian- ism, by E. T. Buehrer. — The Congregational Chris- dan churches, by M. M. Deems. — Baptist churches in America, by R. G. Torbet. — The United Presby- terian Church in America, by W. E. McCulloch. — The Society of Friends in America (Quakers), by W. E. Berry. — The Evangelical Mission Covenant Church and the free churches of Swedish back- ground, by K. A. Olsson. — The Church of the Brethern, by D. W. Bittinger. — The Evangelical and Reformed Church, by D. Dunn. — Methodism, by E. T. Clark. — The Universalist Church of America, by R. Cummins. — The Evangelical United Brethern Church, -by P. H. Eller. — Seventh-Day Adventists, by L. E. Froom. — Disciples of Christ, by R. E. Osborn. — Churches of Christ, by E. West. — The Church of God (Anderson, Indiana), by C. E. Brown. Twenty-one spokesmen for different Protestant denominations here explain their churches, giving the European background, the historic development in America, characteristic features of doctrine, or- ganization, leadership, and other information. Most of the contributors are professors of religious history, and the chief emphasis is on history. Each article is followed by notes, a bibliography, and a list of serial publications of the church described. 5443. [Baptist] Torbet, Robert G. A history of the Bapdsts. Philadelphia, Judson Press, 1950. 538 p. 50-9198 BX6231.T6 Bibliography: p. 509-526. By a professor of history at the Eastern Baptist Theological Seminary, this is an attempt to tell con- cisely but inclusively the story of the Baptists, who in their several branches constitute the largest single family of American Protestants. The book opens with a brief review of Baptist principles — depend- ence on the Bible as the sole rule for faith and prac- tice, the church composed of baptized believers, the autonomy of the local congregation, religious liberty, and the separation of church and state — and of the heritage of the Anabaptists of the Reformation. Part 2 summarizes the history and present position of British and European Baptists; although found in almost every country they are nowhere numer- ically strong except in America. Well over half the text (p. 215-508) is devoted to the American Bap- tists. From the little band that surrounded Roger Williams, through the great revivals and the mis- sionary expansion, doctrinal dissensions, movements in evangelism and educadon, widespread foreign missions, and the modern social gospel (whose prophet, Walter Rauschenbusch, was a Baptist), the narrative is carried swifty to the present day. The appendixes include a chronological table, 1525-1950, and a table of Baptist bodies in the United States (6 with more than 100,000 members, and nearly 40 with fewer). The American story is told in far greater detail in an older work originally published in 1894, Albert H. Newman's History of the Bap- tist Churches in the United States, 6th ed., rev. and enl. (New York, Scribner, 1915. 545 p.), and its source materials are excerpted in William W. Sweet's collection, Religion on the American Fron- tier (nos. 54 1 2-54 1 6). 5444. [Catholic] Blanshard, Paul. American free- dom and Catholic power. 2d ed., rev. and enl. Boston, Beacon Press, 1958. 402 p. 58-6240 BX1770.B55 1958 Bibliography: p. 361-365. 5445. O'Neill, James M. Catholicism and Ameri- can freedom. New York, Harper, 1952. 287 p. 51-11945 BX1406.O5 Mr. Blanshard's much-debated book on the Catho- lic Church as an organ of political and cultural power was first published in 1949. The 1958 re- vision includes a review of events of the decade since its appearance and an account of the storm 768 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES of controversy it aroused. The author, a lawyer and a liberal in religion, declares in his "Personal Prologue: The Duty to Speak": "There is no doubt that the American Catholic hierarchy has entered the political arena, and that it is becoming more and more aggressive in extending the frontiers of Catholic authority into the fields of medicine, edu- cation, and foreign policy." He describes his study as a review of contemporary facts, and each state- ment is carefully documented, in large part from Catholic sources. Mr. Blanshard first discusses the working of the hierarchy and its relation to the state, then analyzes Catholic teaching and practice in regard to individual issues — education, medicine, birth control, marriage and divorce, censorship, science, political ideologies, etc. In a second book from the same publisher, Communism , Democracy, and Catholic Power (Boston, 1951. 340 p.), he extends his indictment of Catholic authoritarianism to the world scene. Catholic answers to this polemic have been numerous and indignant. The most detailed is by Mr. O'Neill, a teacher of rhetoric and debate, a former chairman of the Committee on Academic Freedom of the American Civil Liberties Union and a Catholic layman. His volume at- tempts to show "that Mr. Blanshard's basic thesis [that the Catholic Church is an enemy of American freedom] is false, and that the discussion of the belief and practice of American Catholics which he presents in support of his thesis is so biased and in- accurate as to be substantially worthless." 5446. The Commonweal. Catholicism in Amer- ica, a series of articles from The Common- weal. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1954. 242 p. 54-5256 BX1406.C53 5447. Putz, Louis J., ed. The Catholic Church, U. S. A. Chicago, Fides Publishers Asso- ciation, 1956. xxiii, 415 p. 56-11629 BX1406.P84 The widely esteemed weekly review The Com- monweal is edited by Catholic laymen. Its attitude is predominantly that described by the Protestant theologian Reinhold Niebuhr in one of the essays in this symposium: "the Church finding a creative place in the moral and political reconstruction of a modern industrial society." The book reprints 17 essays published in the journal during 1953, all, ex- cept Dr. Niebuhr's and Will Herberg's "A Jew Looks at Catholics," by Catholic laymen. The fore- word by President George N. Shuster of Hunter College sets the keynote of seeking to allay tensions still felt in the mid-20th century between Catholics and non-Catholic Americans. The first essay, "Catholicism in America," by William P. Clancy, an editor of Commonweal, outlines and deplores the extreme positions ("Mr. Paul Blanshard on the one side and his Catholic counterparts on the other") in which Catholicism is considered a threat to Ameri- can democracy and, conversely, "the only force left strong enough to combat an increasingly arrogant secularist invasion of culture." The other essays examine, not uncritically, Catholic separatism, and the Catholic position in politics, isolationism, social reform, radicalism, education, science, arts, letters, and the movies. Another recent symposium, ex- pository rather than analytical in treatment, is The Catholic Church, U.S.A. The 23 articles contrib- uted by Catholic scholars, several of them priests, are grouped in three parts: the first is on the history, structure, and organizational workings of the Church. Part 2 is arranged by regions, showing the diversity of the church in New England, the Deep South, the Pacific coast, etc. The last part concerns the life and influence of the church in social and intellectual spheres. The quality of Catholic social thought is exemplified, for instance, in the essay by the Rev. John La Farge, S.J., on "The Cath- olic Church and Racial Segregation." Father La Farge, associate editor of the national Catholic weekly America, has been closely concerned with and written much on race relations. He has also recently published A Report on the American Jesuits, with photographs by Margaret Bourke- White (New York, Farrar, Straus & Cudahy, 1956. 236 p.). Extended from an article for Life, it is a splendidly illustrated outline of the history and cur- rent activities of this indefatigable order. 5448. Ellis, John Tracy. American Catholicism. [Chicago] University of Chicago Press, 1956. 207 p. (The Chicago history of American civilization) 56-11002 BX1406.E4 Bibliographical references included in "Notes": p. 160-180. "Suggested reading": p. 188-197. 5449. Ellis, John Tracy, ed. Documents of Amer- ican Catholic history. Milwaukee, Bruce Pub. Co., 1956. xxiv, 677 p. 56-13199 BX1405.E4 Monsignor Ellis of Catholic University is man- aging editor of the Catholic Historical Review and a noted historian. His first volume embodies four lectures concisely sketching in broad general lines the history of American Catholicism. The divi- sions are chronological, the first lecture covering the colonial period, 1492-1790. The second, "Cath- olics as Citizens," runs from the inauguration of the hierarchy in the United States under Bishop Car- roll in 1790 to 1852, the year of the first national plenary council. "Civil War and Immigration," 1 852-1908, describes the violent anti-Catholic agi- RELIGION / 769 tation of the Know-Nothing Party, and the great increase of Catholic population through the Irish, German, and South European immigrations. The last lecture, "Recent American Catholicism," brings the story up to 1956. The record of the Church in America reveals, according to the author, "the max- imum of loyalty and service to every fundamental ideal and principle upon which the Republic was founded and has endured." He lays much stress on the discrimination against Catholics that has pre- vailed throughout the four-century story. Dr. Ellis had earlier published a larger bibliography than the one in this volume: A Select Bibliography of the History of the Catholic Church in the United States (New York, McMullen, 1947. 96 p.) with 775 entries, most of them books, and with brief annotations for the greater part. The large volume of Documents is likewise in chronological order, selected from the source materials of Catholicism in America. They begin with the Papal Bull of Demarcation in 1493 and end with the Encyclical of 1939, Sertum laetitiae, celebrating the 150th anni- versary of the American Hierarchy. Their great variety includes inspiring records of missionary faith and heroism; expressions of tolerance, patriot- ism, and charity; and contributions to art and letters, social thought and action, and political thought. 5450. Maynard, Theodore. The story of Ameri- can Catholicism. New York, Macmillan, 1941. xv, 694 p. 41-23098 BX1406.M33 Bibliography: p. 649-675. An eminently readable historical narrative by a Catholic scholar, poet, and man of letters. One Protestant reviewer called his book "mythology, anti- Protestant polemic, propaganda, history and criti- cism blended into a literary masterpiece." The chronological narrative ends with the death of Car- dinal Gibbons in 1920. In the penultimate chapter Dr. Maynard reviews the cultural contribution of many Catholic writers, poets, artists, and musicians, and in the last, "The Corporate Vision," he dis- cusses briefly the social action of the church, the li- turgical revival, and other aspects of her estate in the second quarter of the 20th century. He takes issue with those who have claimed that the Catholic Church is inherently incompatible with the culture of the United States. He recognizes, he says, "dan- gers of Catholic disintegration here. But they do not come from American thought or American in- stitutions; they come from the spirit of the times, from which Americanism itself is in danger." A later book by Dr. Maynard, The Catholic Church and the American Idea (New York, Appleton-Cen- tury-Crofts, 1953. 309 p.), is a fuller and equally forceful statement of Catholic participation in and contributions to American civilization. In his most recent work, Great Catholics in American History (Garden City, N.Y., Hanover House, 1957. 261 p.), he briefly relates the life stories of 21 Catholic saints, heroes, and leaders beginning with the Jesuit Fathers and ending with Al Smith. 5451. Shea, John D. Gilmary. A history of the Catholic Church within the limits of the United States, from the first attempted colonization to the present time. New York, J. G. Shea, 1886— 92. 4 v. 35-16425 BX1406.S5 1886 BX4705.C33S4 1888 Shea (1824-1892) abandoned a novitiate in the Society of Jesus in order to write the history of his church in America, and his magnum opus is one of the chief monuments of American Catholic scholarship, representing prolonged research in original source materials. The four volumes cover: 1, the Catholic Church in the colonies, English, French, and Spanish; 2, the life and times of Bishop John Carroll (1763-1815); 3, 1808-1843; 4, 1843- 1866. A projected fifth volume was never com- pleted. All the volumes have many illustrations, "portraits, views, maps, and fac-similes." Prac- tically every page is crowded with footnotes, many of them including comment, additional data, and quotation as well as references. The work, while outmoded in some respects, remains impressive in its scholarship, eloquence, earnestness, and objec- tivity. Shea's voluminous output consisted largely of documentary publications, but his History of the Catholic Missions among the Indian Tribes of the United States, 1 529-1845 (New York, E. Dunigan, 1855. 514 p.) deserves separate mention. 5452. [Christian Science] Beasley, Norman. The cross and the crown; the history of Christian Science. New York, Duell, Sloan & Pearce, 1952. 664 p. 52-9086 BX6931.B4 5453. Beasley, Norman. The continuing spirit. New York, Duell, Sloan & Pearce, 1956. 403 p. 56-5050 BX6931.B38 The first work is a history of the beginnings and widening acceptance of the teachings of Mary Baker Eddy, from her own healing and her discovery of "the Christ Science" in 1866 to her death in 1910. The second book takes up the story of the church at that point, with some backward glances, and carries it to the present day. The author disclaims any connection with the First Church of Christ, Scientist, and in his preface to the second declares that he wrote both works on the basis of his own research, "carried on in sources wholly outside the Archives of the Mother Church." His single purpose, he says has been to present "an independ- 770 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES ent, documented history of what Mary Baker Eddy left to her followers." His treatment of the dis- coverer and founder of Christian Science is uni- formly sympathetic, and her position in the contro- versies which surrounded her is justified at each step of his full narrative of the persecutions, fi- nancial worries, intrigues, conflicts, and apostasies through which she maintained the leadership of a great and powerful religious movement. The crowded detail includes frequent and lengthy ex- tracts from her writings, but contains nothing on the doctrinal sources of her new faith — at least, none since the third century A. D. — and leaves the impression that it was entirely self-contained. In the second book less attention is paid to the doc- trines of Christian Science than to its organization, litigation, publishing, and other activities. 5454. [Congregational] Atkins, Gaius Glenn, and Frederick L. Fagley. History of American Congregationalism. Boston, Pilgrim Press, 1942. 432 p. 42-18901 BX7135.A75 Bibliography: p. [409]-4i6. In the last chapter of this substantial history of the Congregational churches in America, the au- thors appraise the Congregational polity as "An Adventure in Liberty." "The right and duty of the church member to administer his own church business with a direct control; a minimum of ec- clesiastical machinery; willing obedience to major- ity discussions; a disciplined respect for the right of the minority. Congregationalism believes this to be necessary to the liberty of a Christian man, and whatever else is built must be upon this founda- tion." The story of the church which became American Congregationalism begins with its back- ground of separatism on the Continent and in Eng- land, the group of exiles in Holland, and the Pil- grim Fathers in the New World. The Mayflower Compact is one of the covenants, the forms which united the saints into visible churches, reproduced in the Appendix. Among the Puritan churches of New England, the name Congregational "just growed." Landmarks in the story are the "New England Way," the adoption of the Cambridge Platform of Church Discipline (1648), the Great Awakening, the Revolution, the "departure" of the Unitarians, the expansion into the Northwest Ter- ritory, the growth of national consciousness and social concern, and the formation of the National Council and the Benevolent and Mission Boards. The forms of organization at successive periods are carefully noted. 5455. [Disciples of Christ] Garrison, Winfred Ernest, and Alfred T. De Groot. The Disciples of Christ, a history. St. Louis, Christian Board of Publication, 1948. 592 p. 49-7481 BX7315.G333 Bibliography: p. 571-576. A coordinated and well-rounded history of the group of reunionist, congregational, noncreedal churches known as the Disciples of Christ and the Churches of Christ. The authors are both Disciples, and Dr. Garrison is recognized as one of the coun- try's eminent professors of church history (no. 5405). This denomination originated as a direct outgrowth of the Great Western Revival in two separate movements of secession from the Presby- terian Church, the Stone movement in Kentucky in 1803 (Barton W. Stone's parish was Cane Ridge, scene of the most famous camp meeting), and Thomas Campbell's movement in western Penn- sylvania in 1809. Basic ideas of both were a re- union of all Christian churches without sectarian division (resulting, of course, in the creation of new sects), and the Bible as sole authority, without "human" additions of creeds and ecclesiasticism ("anyone who could get an audience could preach"). The name of Disciples was first used by the Camp- bellites during the vigorous evangelism of Walter Scott around 1830. In the next decade the two bodies merged, and the first national convention was held in 1849. In growth through missionary effort along the advancing frontier, in planting churches, in preaching and publishing, and in establishing schools," the story of the Disciples parallels that of the country." Since the census of 1906 the con- servative branch, gradually differentiated by the accumulation of small differences in matters of practice, has been listed separately under the name of Churches of Christ. 5456. [Episcopal] Manross, William W. A his- tory of the American Episcopal Church. [2d ed., rev. and enl.] New York, Morehouse- Gorham, 1950. xiv, 415 p. 50-8326 BX5880.M35 1950 Bibliography: p. 373-386. 5457. Addison, James T. The Episcopal Church in the United States, 1789-193 1. New York, Scribner, 1951. 400 p. 51-10050 BX5880.A33 Bibliography: p. 382-385. The first of these two histories is a standard reference work, calm and dignified in style; it might even be termed prosaic. Dr. Manross covers a host of facts, names, and events. For the colonial be- ginnings he has depended on 19th-century histories, but much of his later text is from primary sources. Almost half the book is taken up with the slow expansion of the church in the colonies, the un- RELIGION / 77I successful efforts to secure an American episcopate, and the serious decline during the Revolution when the Anglican clergy by and large inclined to the Loyalist side. The author feels this decline is often exaggerated; by 1785 the first General Convention met, and after a few years of reorganization and recuperation a vigorous revival and expansion were under way, led by the great Bishops John Henry Hobart and Alexander Viets Griswold, represent- ing respectively High Churchmanship and Evangeli- calism. Equally fact-crowded treatment is given to the establishment of missions in the West and abroad, the effects of the Oxford Movement (Anglo- Catholicism) and of 19th-century liberalism, and to institutional and organizational factors in the present-day church. Dr. Addison's book covers the same story (to 193 1) in very different fashion. His narrative is rapid and colorful, focusing on the social environment and on great individual leaders — among others, the Revolutionary Bishop William White, Bishops Griswold, Hobart, Philander Chase, R. C. Moore, and Alonzo Potter, Dr. W. A. Muhlen- berg, the missionary Bishop William H. Hare, the great preacher Phillips Brooks, and in the 20th century Bishops William Lawrence and Charles H. Brent. The writer offers more exposition of doc- trine than does Dr. Manross and points out some weaknesses and failures of the church as well as its rich contributions to American Christianity. 5458. [Judaism] Glazer, Nathan. American Judaism. [Chicago] University of Chicago Press, 1957. 175 p. (The Chicago history of American civilization) 57—8574 BM205.G5 5459. Levy, Beryl Harold. Reform Judaism in America; a study in religious adaptation. New York, 1933. 143 p. 34-4818 BM205.L45 1933 5460. Sklare, Marshall. Conservative Judaism; an American religious movement. Glencoe, 111., Free Press, 1955. 298 p. 55-7332 BM197.5.S45 1955 Mr. Glazer focuses his concise history on two main tendencies of Jewish religion in an American environment. The tiny communities of dignified, upper-class Orthodox Jewish merchants in early America represented both Judaism, the tradition of the law pervading the whole of life, and "Jewish- ness," the ethnic separateness of the Jewish people. With the large-scale immigration of refugees from the German ghettos (1825-80), there came in in- fluences fostering religious as well as political freedom, and Reform Judaism rose concurrently with an increasing social and economic merging of the well-dispersed Jews into the new land of liberty. But with the flood of East European Jewry — nearly 2 million immigrants between 1880 and 1920, con- centrated in the New York area — "Jewishness" re- vived, bringing on the one hand, militant irreligion, socialistic politics, and Zionism, and on the other, extreme orthodoxy. The process of integration of these newcomers with the Jewish community and the general stream of American life is analyzed from a sociological viewpoint. The author seeks to show that "Jewishness" has virtually disappeared, and that the practices of Judaism have been adjusted to the mores of the American middle class. He ends with a discussion of the revival since 1940, paralleling that in other faiths, of all forms of Judaism, Orthodox, Conservative, and Reform. The following two titles originated in dissertations at Columbia University. Dr. Levy's Reform Juda- ism has long been the standard treatment of this movement for a modernist revision of Jewish religious thought. Reform Judaism stemmed from the enlightenment and the struggles of the German Jews for civil liberties, and in America shaped itself so as to fit the Jews into the prosperous, comfort- able, and liberal society of the late 19th century. The volume is in three parts, "Re-Making the Prayer-Book" (doing away with part of the rigid Mosaic ritual), "Attempts at a Theology" (move- ments toward rationalism and their leaders), and "Practical Issues and Rabbinical Reasoning." Mr. Marshall Sklare's Conservative Judaism is a well- organized study of the school which rose as a halfway house between the tendency of Reform Judaism toward complete assimilation into the larger gentile community, and the ethnic exclusive- ness of Orthodox Judaism. Its doctrinal center is the Jewish Theological Seminary in New York, founded in 1886 to counteract the influence of the Reformist school, the Hebrew Union College in Cincinnati. 5461 [Lutheran] Wentz, Abdel R. A basic history of Lutheranism in America. Philadelphia, Muhlenberg Press, 1955. 430 p. 55-7765 BX8041.W38 5462. Spaude, Paul W. The Lutheran Church under American influence; a historico-phil- osophical interpretation of the church in its relation to various modifying forces in the United States. Burlington, Iowa, Lutheran Literary Board, 1943. 435 p. 43-10142 BX8041.S65 Bibliography: p. [403]~429. The Basic History is a standard text by a cleric and historian prominent in Lutheran circles at home and abroad. His story is framed in the political and social history of America. The great name of the early days is Henry M. Muhlenberg, who in the 772 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES middle 1700's organized the congregations of Ger- man and Swedish Lutherans in Pennsylvania and the neighboring Colonies into the first synods. In the 1820's a large measure of unity was achieved, with a general synod and a seminary at Gettysburg, but separatism increased with national discord and with the immigration of several million Germans and Scandinavians into the Middle West. Although essentially one in the basic tenets of their conserva- tive doctrine (Luther's "Church, conscience, and the Book"), the various bodies have developed a great variety in organization and practice. At one time there were 150 Lutheran groups; there are now fewer than 20. Their divisions as to points of faith and polity, and the trends of the modern age toward union in liturgy, in social action, in welfare and relief work, and in synods, conferences, and councils, at home and abroad, form the chief theme of Dr. Wentz' later chapters. His general bibliographical note (p. 385-388) describes 7 historical works, all but 2 from the 19th century. Mr. Spaude's work is not a chronological narrative but, as its subtitle indi- cates, an interpretation of the development of the Lutheran Church in America. The first 40 pages describe the Lutheran movements in the European homelands. Then American Lutheranism is ana- lyzed with respect to the chief influences it has undergone — democracy, industrial organization, Sunday schools, secret societies, universities, modern financial organizations, the social gospel, "evolu- tion," the other Protestant faiths, rationalism, re- vivalism, and ecumenical trends. 5463. [Methodist] Sweet, William Warren. Meth- odism in American history. Revision of 1953. Nashville, Abingdon Press, 1954. 472 p. illus. 54-5943 BX8235.S9_ 1953 The history of Methodism in America, springing out of the great spiritual urge of John Wesley (1703-1791) and rapidly spread by the colorful means of the revival meeting and the circuit rider, is one that lends itself to the style of its leading his- torian, at once expert scholar and vivid interpreter. Dr. Sweet was ordained in 1906, and served as a Methodist pastor for five years before taking up his life work of religious historian (nos. 5401-5402, 5410-5416). In this narrative persons and events play a larger part than doctrine. Despite the temp- tations offered by the exciting early days, by Wesley, Devereux, Jarratt, Asbury, and by the explosive westward expansion of the church, the author gives equal attention to later phases of Methodism in the history and social development of the Nation. The book was first published in 1933, and ended with a chapter "[Methodism] Faces the Great War and Its Aftermath." For the revision 20 years later a long chapter has been added, "Through Two Decades of Storm and Stress, 1933-1953," in which are re- viewed the concerns of Methodism with the depres- sion, Nazism, neo-orthodoxy (with which Dr. Sweet does not go along), prohibition and its end, pacifism, World War II, peace programs, Protestant-Catholic tension, and the ecumenical movement. An appen- dix outlines the church's organizational structure. This is a complex matter, involving various institu- tions and procedures developed over the years. For a full understanding, reference may be made to a scholarly monograph by Nolan Bailey Harmon: The Organization of the Methodist Church; His- toric Development and Present Worthing Structure, rev. ed. (Nashville, Methodist Pub. House, 1953. 288 p.). A painless introduction to Methodist his- tory is the handsome quarto picture book put to- gether by Elmer Talmage Clark, An Album of Methodist History (New York, Abingdon-Cokes- bury Press, 1952. 336 p.). This contains repro- ductions of contemporary prints and other illustrations of Methodist beginnings. The first section covers the life and times of John and Charles Wesley, their families, associates, and successors in Britain and its colonial possessions; the second and longer section illustrates American Methodism. 5464. [Mormon] Brodie, Fawn (McKay). No man knows my history; the life of Joseph Smith, the Mormon prophet. New York, Knopf, 1945. ix, 476, xix p. illus. 45-9481 BX8695.S6B7 Bibliography: p. 466-476. 5465. West, Ray Benedict. Kingdom of the saints; the story of Brigham Young and the Mormons. New York, Viking Press, 1957. 389 p. illus. 57-6437 BX8611.W4 Mrs. Brodie's biography of Joseph Smith is a work of intensive scholarship, widely praised as the best history of the prophet and seer upon whose revela- tions the Church of Jesus Christ of the Latter-Day Saints was founded. The author has searched out and scrutinized carefully the evidence on all sides of the strange story, and her picture of her subject is impartial and in the main sympathetic. Her account ends with the martyrdom of Joseph Smith in Carthage, Illinois, in 1844. In her first appendix she quotes documents on his early life; in the second she disposes of the Spaulding-Rigdon Theory of the authorship of the Boo\ of Mormon. Appendix C identifies the plural Mesdames Smith. The bibliog- raphy is brief and selective, and does not attempt to list "the legion of secondary source books that fur- nished background for the life and times of Joseph Smith." Mrs. Brodie's title is taken from a speech made by the prophet himself a few months before his death. "I don't blame anyone for not believing RELIGION / 773 my history," he said. "If I had not experienced what I have, I could not believe it myself." His biographer's suggested answer is that he was essen- tially a romantic author whose imagination made his romance more real to him than reality. The author of Kingdom of the Saints, who comes of Mormon stock and grew up as a devout believer, is more ready to accept Smith as a genuine religious mystic whose transcendent experience could not be proved and must be believed. This, Mr. West says, is "the only point of view that can present the Mormon religion for what it is, the basis of a belief which holds the faith of almost a million and a half today." He protests against the usual treatment of the Mor- mon story "as a comic episode in American history." His narrative covers the whole epic but is sketchy regarding Joseph's revelation and the founding of the church. Mr. West's protagonist is rather Brigham Young, the Moses who led the exodus of the saints and established their "foursquare" king- dom, a Zion at once spiritual and material. Essen- tially a religious history, it emphasizes the faith by which the heroic pioneers accomplished their latter- day miracle. Nels Anderson's Desert Saints; the Mormon Frontier in Utah (Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1942. xx, 459 p.) is a remarkably vivid picture of the frontier community created by the Mormon Church in Utah down to about 1877, emphasizing the partial achievement of its ideal: an economic autarchy of religiously dedicated fam- ilies from which both riches and poverty had been eliminated. The many original sources used by the author are listed in his bibliography (p. 447-452). 5466. [Presbyterian] Slosser, Gaius J., ed. They seek a country; the American Presbyterians, some aspects. New York, Macmillan, 1955. xvi, 330 p. _ illus. 55" I 4554 BX8935.S55 Bibliography: p. 322-324. Thirteen lectures delivered at an historical sym- posium are here published to form an overall sketch of the Presbyterian Church in the United States. The arrangement is roughly chronological, the first chapter by the editor being on Old World origins — Calvinism and its manifestations in Northern Ire- land, Scotland, and England. "Beginnings in the North" covers the colonial era, and tells how the great missionary, Francis Makemie, established the first intercolonial Presbytery in the Middle Colonies in 1706, "at least four decades earlier than any other intercolonial body among American churches." "Beginnings in the South" deals particularly with the Scottish settlements of the Carolinas. "The United Presbyterian Church" and "The Reformed Presbyterian Church in America" explains the schisms of the 19th century and the resultant group- ings. "The Founding of Educational Institutions," by W. W. Sweet, is an important chapter in the church's history. The Presbyterian contribution to the Revolution, the Constitution, and the Govern- ment of the United States are examined in "Service in Founding and Preserving the Nation." There are chapters on missionary expansion at home, on the antislavery struggle, and on events and trends in the early and later 19th century. K. S. Latourette contributes a chapter on his specialty, "Service Over- seas." The last is "Today and Tomorrow: the Road Ahead," with three authors. In each chapter four pages reproduce portraits of important leaders, thumbnail biographies of whom are included in a "Who's Who" appendix. The last group (after p. 270) includes six presidents and five other states- men. A recent compilation of documents is The Presbyterian Enterprise; Sources of American Pres- byterian History, edited by Maurice W. Armstrong, Lefferts A. Loetscher, and Charles A. Anderson (Philadelphia, Westminster Press, 1956. 336 p.). The interesting selections are tied together by brief historical notes. 5467. [Quaker] Thomas, Allen C. A history of the Friends in America. 6th ed., rev. and enl. Philadelphia, Winston, 1930. 287 p. (Penns- bury series of modern Quaker books) 30-27832 BX7635.T5 1930 Bibliography: p. 257-280. 5468. Brinton, Howard H. Friends for 300 years; the history and beliefs of the Society of Friends since George Fox started the Quaker move- ment. New York, Harper, 1952. 239 p. 52-5424 BX7631.B7 The older of these titles, first issued in 1894, is a highly condensed history of the Society of Friends, from its beginnings in England with the mystic ex- perience (1646) of the founder, George Fox, and his preaching of the Inner Light. By 1656 members of this "cursed set of heretics" had reached New Eng- land, and in spite of persecution by colonial govern- ments from Massachusetts to Virginia, its spread was rapid. The visit of Fox himself in 1672 made many converts, while the acquisition of Pennsyl- vania as a proprietary colony by William Penn and the British Toleration Act of 1689 gave the congre- gations of Friends a settled status by 1700. In the 1 8th century notable aspects of Quaker history were the excellent relations with the Indians, leadership in opposition to slavery, and the sufferings of pacifist Friends during the Revolution. The early 19th century brought divisions — Orthodox, Hicksite, and Wilburite Friends — confirmation of the antislavery stand, and the first educational foundations. The account of later years summarizes events through the First World War. The revised edition was the 774 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES work of William Brinton Harvey. Dr. Brinton's book is theological rather than historical, concentrat- ing on Quaker faith and practice — "To Wait upon the Lord," "The Light Within as Experienced," "The Light Within as Thought About," etc. He declares Quakerism to be "an explicit and developed manifestation" of a third form of Christianity be- sides Protestantism and Catholicism. There is a short historical chapter: "The Four Periods of Quaker History and Their Relation to the Mystical, the Evangelical, the Rational, and the Social Forms of Religion." The famous work of the Friends' Service Committee, as well as activities among Negroes and Indians, in education, and in interna- tional relations, are described in a chapter on "The Meeting and the World." 5469. [Shaker] Melcher, Marguerite (Fellows) The Shaker adventure. Princeton, Prince- ton University Press, 194 1. 319 p. 41-51750 BX9765.M4 Annotated bibliography: p. 294-301. A warmly sympathetic history of the "moral and industrious, though eccentric, people" called Shakers and their handicraft culture. This interest- ing communitarian sect, now almost extinct, grew up around an Englishwoman, "Mother Ann" Lee, to whom it had been revealed in a vision that she was the female incarnation of Christ in the second coming, and who in 1774 led a band of nine Be- lievers to their adventure in America. The account of the beginnings and early days is written with respect for, if not complete acceptance of, Mother Ann's spiritual gifts. The principles of the Shakers, so called from their extreme bodily manifestations of the spirit in worship, were the confession of sins, community of goods, celibacy (new members were by conversion, children, if any, by adoption), and withdrawal from the world. Guided by fresh rev- elations, advancing under persecution, and spread- ing with the revival of the early 1800's, the Society of the United Believers, commonly called Shakers, in their peak period between 1840 and i860 num- bered some 6,000 members, established in 18 rural communities from Maine to southwest Kentucky. Men and women lived and worked side by side with sex eliminated through religious emotion. Farmers and craftsmen, thorough and practical, they achieved a "hand-minded" society which provided economic security and peace, and has left to machine-age collectors a treasure of craftsmanship. Mrs. Melcher has made extensive use of Shaker records for her detailed story. 5470. [Unitarian] Cooke, George Willis. Uni- tarianism in America; a history of its origin and development. Boston, American Unitarian Association, 1902. 463 p. illus. 3-605 BX9833.C7 5471. Wilbur, Earl Morse. A history of Uni- tarianism. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1945-52. 2 v. A45-3134 BX9831.W49 Contents. — [1] Socinianism and its anteced- ents. — [2] In Transylvania, England, and America. 5472. Wright, Conrad. The beginnings of Uni- tarianism in America. Boston, Starr King Press; distributed by Beacon Press, 1955. 305 p. "Bibliographical appendix": p. [28i]-29i. 55-8138 BX9833.W7 "Bibliographical note": p. [292] -294. The time-honored work by Dr. Cooke is still the one full-scale history of American Unitarianism. In Dr. Wilbur's authoritative modern study only the last four chapters (v. 2, p. 379-487) are devoted to the doctrine in the New World. The movement in America, although preceded in general by the liberal thought of the Reformation (Dr. Wilbur goes back in his first volume to antecedents in the Apostolic Age) and influenced by the writings of English rationalists and deists, was essentially an outgrowth of New England Puritanism. Dr. Wright's inter- esting monograph illuminates the doctrine of free will, usually referred to as Arminian in 18th-century New England, which preluded the Unitarian break with Calvinism. The 18th-century liberals, he says, combined the three tendencies of Arminianism, supernatural rationalism, and anti-Trinitarianism. Their great spokesmen were Charles Chauncy and Jonathan Mayhew; their chief opponent was Jona- than Edwards with his defense of original sin. The new trends of thought, nourished by the revolution- ary social and political climate, spread widely; Dr. Wright in an appendix lists 60 ministers identified as Arminians from their printed sermons and tracts, and over 20 more reputed to be "new divinity" men. His story ends with the open breach of 1805, when the election of the liberal Henry Ware as Hollis Professor of Divinity at Harvard opened the so- called Unitarian Controversy. For half a century Unitarian views were set forth in a torrent of con- troversial books, pamphlets, and magazines, and by such spokesmen as William E. Channing, R. W. Emerson, and Theodore Parker. In 1825 the American Unitarian Association was formed as a missionary and publication agency; in the Conven- tion of 1865 the national body was organized in much its present form. Dr. Cooke's history is detailed as to men, publications, and events. His last chapters are concerned with the growth of de- nominational consciousness, the ministry, social and educational work, and missions and philanthropies. RELIGION / 775 Dr. Wilbur's more concentrated account highlights the controversial path of Unitarianism as a more or less spontaneous development among liberal thinkers in many countries and ages. 5473. [Universalist] Eddy, Richard. Universalism in America, a history. Boston, Universalist Pub. House, 1884-86. 2 v. 43-32304 BX9933.E3 1884 Contents. — 1. 1636-1800. — 2. 1801-1886. Bibliography: p. 485-599. Universalism, the doctrine of the eventual salva- tion of all men through divine grace, has been ad- vanced since early Christian times, and came to America through many channels. This work, which in spite of its age is the only adequate history of the Universalist Church of America, examines at great length and with abundant quotation the evidences of Universalism in various creeds and in the thought of individuals, and the evolution of the church through the 18th and 19th centuries. The first great leader, John Murray, organized the de- nomination in New England in 1785 as the "In- dependent Christian Society, commonly called Universalists." At a convention of the New Eng- land groups in 1803 there was adopted a Profession of Belief and a Plan of Church Government. Hosea Ballou (1771-1852), whose Treatise on the Atone- ment, published in 1805, was one of the normative texts of the movement, strongly influenced the Universalists toward Unitarian views. The later history of the church is here told in detail as to individual spokesmen, publications, and organiza- tional aspects. Volume 2 includes chapters on the spread of the Universalists outside New England and on educational institutions (Tufts College was founded as a Universalist theological school). The concluding large bibliography catalogs "all that has been published in America either for or against the doctrine of Universal Salvation" through the year 1886. Over the years the Universalists have drawn progressively closer in their radial liberalism to the Unitarians, and in the 1950's steps are being taken toward an organic merger of the two bodies. In 1957 the Universalist Historical Society in Boston published a little book, The Universalist Church of America, a Short History, by Clinton Lee Scott (124 p.). It is little more than an outline, preliminary to a definitive history of Universalism which Dr. Scott has been commissioned to write. F. Representative Leaders 5474. [Asbury, Francis] Asbury, Herbert. A Methodist saint; the life of Bishop Asbury. New York, Knopf, 1927. xiv, 355 p. illus. 27-5884 BX8495.A8A8 Bibliography: p. [3371-342. 5475. Duren, William Larkin. Francis Asbury, founder of American Methodism and un- official minister of state. New York, Macmillan, 1928. 270 p. illus. 28-23317 BX8495.A8D8 Francis Asbury (1745-1816), whose "premiership among church founders and religious leaders of the New World is probably one of the most un- challenged facts connected with the history of our country" (Duren), in 1771 was sent by John Wesley as a missionary to the three-hundred-odd adherents of the new movement in America. He began at once the itinerant career which he followed for 45 years. In 1784 he was appointed by Wesley super- intendent of the Methodist work in America, and at a conference of all Methodist ministers was elected and ordained, assuming the title of bishop. Until his death he rode over the country from Georgia to Maine and westward to Kentucky, always tri- umphing over ill health, always preaching, convert- ing, establishing churches (approximately nine hundred), and organizing and directing conferences. His Journal, published in three volumes in 1821 (New York, N. Bangs & T. Mason), is a notable source for the study of American social as well as religious history. The two biographies here listed, published a year apart, are very different in tone. The first, by a collateral descendant, is a popular work, satirical in its characterization, if not of the circuit-rider bishop and saint, at least of his col- leagues and the backwoods society in which they moved. The second, by a Southern Methodist minister, admiringly sets forth the sterling virtues of "the mightiest spiritual beacon that ever blazed on this continent." 5476. [Beecher] Hibben, Baxton. Henry Ward Beecher: an American portrait. New York, Doran, 1927. 390 p. illus. 27-19865 BX7260.B3H5 "Sources cited": p. 357-367. Beecher (1813-1887), the great preacher who for 40 years swayed an audience reaching far beyond the confines of his own Plymouth Congregational Church in Brooklyn, is here the subject of a long Jj6 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES "portrait," painted in the vivid style of the modern psychological biographer. His influential career as crusader against slavery, and for evolution and woman suffrage, is interpreted as giving highly emo- tional expression to the changing standards of American society during his long lifetime. During his boyhood the Calvinistic doctrine of predestina- tion to hell-fire, as preached by his father, Lyman Beecher, had hardly been shaken; in three decades it gave way to the easy liberalism of the Gilded Age — with Beecher playing the part of drum major in the parade, our author says. The earlier biog- raphies of Beecher were all laudatory; Hibben's critical analysis tends toward irony, and finds fitting illustrations in contemporary cartoons. Sensational aspects tend to be uppermost, not only in the account of the cause celebre of 1 875, when Theodore Tilton sued Beecher for adultery, but throughout the entire story of the man who represented God as "loving man in his sins for the sake of helping him out of them." In the middle years of the 19th century, one of the great influences in breaking down the harsh individualism of the Puritan heritage and humanizing the "new theology" was the Congrega- tional minister of Hartford, Conn., Horace Bushnell. "He insisted upon experience in theology, leveled the dividing wall between nature and the super- natural, and set Christ in the middle of the Christian system" (Hopkins in no. 5489). His most recent biographer, Barbara M. Cross, in Horace Bushnell: Minister to a Changing America ([Chicago] Uni- versity of Chicago Press, 1958. 200 p.), finds that his sermons and books, and especially Christian Nurture (1847) "mapped the course by which orthodoxy was moving toward liberal Protestant- ism." Another famous voice of the period, though on the opposite side of the religious platform, was the "professional agnostic," Robert G. Ingersoll. In Royal Bob (Indianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill, 1952. 314 p.) Clarence H. Cramer gives a sympathetic interpretation of the orator who, for many years after his "plumed knight" speech of 1876, was the premier lecturer of the Nation on Science versus Religion, as well as on the Republican Party. The writer gives more space to Ingersoll's political activities than to his religious scepticism. 5477. [Carroll] Guilday, Peter K. The life and times of John Carroll, Archbishop of Balti- more (1735—1815). New York, Encyclopedia Press, 1922. 2 v. illus. 22-10425 BX4705.C33G8 This monumental biography of the first arch- bishop of the Roman Catholic Church in the United States is also considered to be an authoritative ac- count of the Roman Church of the English-speaking New World in his time. Episodes given careful treatment include: the story of the Roman Catholic part in the Revolution, including Carroll's Cana- dian mission for the Continental Congress; Carroll's post-Revolutionary controversy with the apostate priest Charles Wharton; his fight to preserve the church from Protestant attack and French political intrigue; the reconstruction of the church and the establishment of the American hierarchy (1784-90); the development of religious orders and of educa- tion (Georgetown College, founded in 1789). The late author, professor of church history at the Catho- lic University of America, wrote solidly and in great detail, making exhaustive use of archival materials in Europe and America. He concluded with a critical essay on the sources, published and unpub- lished, both for Carroll's life and for the history of the church. Annabelle McConnell Melville's scholarly, but more spirited and readable, biography is confined in its scope to the life, work, and in- fluence of its subject: John Carroll of Baltimore, Founder of the American Catholic Hierarchy (New York, Scribner, 1955. 338 p.). 5478. [Gibbons] Ellis, John Tracy. The life of James Cardinal Gibbons, Archbishop of Baltimore, 1834-1921. Milwaukee, Bruce Pub. Co., 1952. 2 v. illus. 52-14973 BX4705.G5E4 "An essay on the sources": v. 2, p. 651-669. The outstanding figure in recent Catholic history in America was James Gibbons. Born in Baltimore of Irish immigrant parents, he became archbishop in 1877, and the second American cardinal in 1886. A firm believer in democratic institutions, he took a leading and patriotic part in humanitarian, social, and public affairs. His liberal and conciliatory views were influential in Rome and in national policy alike, and made him a powerful force in the accommodation of the Catholic Church and its huge new immigrant community to American life. His winning personality brought him warm friendships with great and small, and he served as adviser to presidents and popes as well as to his flock. This full and authoritative, if somewhat pedestrian, biog- raphy is by the professor of church history at the Catholic University of America, which Gibbons was instrumental in founding. 5479. [Jones] Hinshaw, David. Ruf us Jones, mas- ter Quaker. New York, Putnam, 1951. 306 p. illus. 51-9891 BX7795.J55H5 Bibliography: p. 295-298. Jones (1863-1948), professor of philosophy at Haverford College, chairman for almost 30 years of the American Friends' Service Committee, and the spiritual leader of present-day Quakerism, died in 1948. This biography, by a close friend and asso- ciate of many years, includes his reminiscences in its picture of the growth of a modern saint. It opens RELIGION / 777 with a short appreciation of Dr. Jones, "the inspira- tion and the leader of the effort that had turned the century-long gaze of Quakerism from attempted inward ecclesiastical purity through disciplinary don'ts to the outward effort of perfection through spiritual and humanitarian service." A few chap- ters sketch the history of Quakerism and of the Jones family of South China, Maine. Then Rufus Jones is described in the various phases of his inspir- ing career as teacher, minister, lecturer, author — he wrote over fifty books and is widely known as an outstanding modern interpreter of religious mysti- cism — and as organizer of the great relief service which exemplifies the Quaker way of life to the world. The brief bibliography includes the main sources on Quakerism, but lists only a few of Dr. Jones' many published writings, for which one may turn to the compilation of Nixon Orwin Rush: A Bibliography of the Published Writings of Rufus M. Jones (Waterville, Me., Colby College Library, 1944. 54 P-)- 5480. [Moody, Dwight L.] Moody, William R. D. L. Moody. New York, Macmillan, 1930. 556 p. illus. 30-18035 BV3785.M7M62 Bibliography: p. 543-548. In the latter years of the 19th century, while the new stirrings of evolutionary science were manifest in the sermons of H. W. Beecher and the agnostic oratory of Robert Ingersoll, the dwellers in Amer- ica's growing cities were thronging in their millions to hear the fundamental Word of God brought to them by the lay evangelist, Dwight L. Moody (1837-1899). He did not confine his exhortations to this country: with his organist helper, Ira D. Sankey, he carried out a two-year mission to Eng- land (1873-75), where he was the instrument of the greatest religious revival of the century. He directed his notable business talents and energies to saving souls through lay enterprises as well as revival meetings. Starting from his Chicago North Market Sabbath School (1858), the programs of re- ligious social service to which his organizational genius gave form expanded into the national system of Young Men's Christian Associations, the Sunday School movement, Northfield Seminary for girls and Mount Hermon School for boys, the Chicago Bible Institute, and the Bible Institute Colportage Association. His vigorous work in missions and conferences in the colleges led directly to the Student Volunteer Movement, which stimulated the expan- sion of American foreign missions. This biography by his son is informal in arrangement and lavish in quotation from Moody's letters and speeches. Inter- esting recent biographies of earlier and later evange- lists are George Whitefield, Wayfaring Witness, by Stuart C. Henry (New York, Abingdon Press, 1957. 224 p.), and Billy Sunday Was His Real Name, by William G. McLoughlin ([Chicago] University of Chicago Press, 1955. 324 p.). A largely biograph- ical treatment of the whole course of revivalism in America is Weisberger's They Gathered At the River (no. 5403). 5481. [Parker] Commager, Henry Steele. Theo- dore Parker. [2d ed.] Boston, Beacon Press, 1947. 339 p. illus. A48-9983 MnU Bibliography: p. [3ii]-33i. The great New England radical clergyman and reformer who is brought to life in this interpretative biography never withdrew, and was never expelled, from the Unitarian Church in which he had been ordained in 1837. But most of its pulpits were closed against him and the unsettling Higher Criti- cism that he and his transcendentalist friends im- ported from Germany. His services in Boston were held in what he called the Twenty-eighth Congrega- tional Society, where for 13 exciting years he preached freethinking religion, transcendental phi- losophy, and the abolition of slavery to audiences numbering in the thousands. He wrote his long farewell letter to the society, "Theodore Parker's Experience as a Minister," as he sailed away to die of tuberculosis in Italy: it is here called "not only the best brief account of Parker's public career but also the most satisfactory history of the Boston of the forties and fifties of the last century that has ever been written." The other sources on which Profes- sor Commager has largely based his portrayal of the man who was a part of the flowering of New Eng- land are the writings, letters, and recorded conver- sations of Parker's contemporaries. 5482. [Rauschenbusch] Sharpe, Dores Robinson. Walter Rauschenbusch. New York, Mac- millan, 1942. 463 p. 42-12945 BX6495.R3S48 The great influence of Walter Rauschenbusch (1861-1918), whose name "stands out as a beacon" in the history of the social gospel in America, was principally exercised through his writings. As a young Baptist minister in New York in the late eighties and nineties he had worked much with poor German immigrants; during a year of study abroad he had become interested in Fabian socialism, the Salvation Army, and consumers' cooperatives; and the depression of 1893 confirmed his belief that the Kingdom of God must be realized on this earth. In preaching, in social and organizational activities, and especially in his books, Rauschenbusch drove home this message, and after his publication in 1907 of Christianity and the Social Crisis (New York, Mac- millan. 429 p., he was hailed as prophet and leader. His later books, Prayers of the Social Awakening (Boston, Pilgrim Press, 1910. 126 p.), 77§ / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Christianizing the Social Order (New York, Mac- millan, 19 12. 493 p.), The Social Principles of Jesus (New York, Association Press, 1916. 198 p.), and A Theology for the Social Gospel (New York, Macmillan, 1917. 279 p.), added to his prestige. This admiring and affectionate biography, by a former student and secretary, was written at the request of the Rauschenbusch family and the Colgate-Rochester Divinity School, where Profes- sor Rauschenbusch taught church history from 1902 until his death in 1918. The narrative of his life is combined with interpretations of his writings, in chapters with such titles as "The Prophet's Pen," "The Social Philosopher," and "The Thunder of the Prophet." 5483. Wise, Stephen S. Challenging years; the autobiography of Stephen Wise. New York, Putnam, 1949. xxiv, 323 p. illus. 49-48677 BM755.W53A3 1949 In this autobiography Rabbi Stephen Wise (1874— 1949) emphasizes the causes and beliefs for which he batded rather than personal details. The son and grandson of rabbis, Stephen Wise at the age of 20 was appointed pastor of a Conservative Jewish synagogue in New York. In 1900 he was called to a temple in Pordand, Oregon, where he became known as a vigorous fighter for child labor laws and a liberal in politics, social thought, and religion. He came back to New York in 1906 to found the Free Synagogue, which he served as rabbi for over 40 years, preaching Reform Judaism and working for civic, social, and Jewish causes. In 1897 he had been the moving spirit in founding the Federation of American Zionists, and throughout his life he strove ardendy in the cause of the Jewish homeland. The American Jewish Congress (1917), the Jewish Institute of Religion (the liberal rabbinical semi- nary) (1922), and the World Jewish Congress (1936) were among other organizations he was instrumental in founding and active in serving. A powerful speaker, he was among the first of his faith to preach to Jews and Christians alike, and he played a prominent role in interfaith movements. Challenging Years was written in the last year of his life. The prophet of American Reform Juda- ism in the 19th century was Rabbi Isaac M. Wise (1819-1900), unrelated to Stephen. This inspiring leader, imbued with the ideas of the Enlightenment, came from Bohemia in a wave of political immi- gration in 1846. After a few years of preaching modernization of the ritual in Albany, he setded in Cincinnati and became the acknowledged head of the large Jewish community of that city. He was the founder and president for 25 years of Hebrew Union College, and the founder of the Union of American Hebrew Congregations and the Central Conference of American Rabbis. He was instrumental in the preparation of the revised prayer book, M in hag America (the rite in American style). His life and influence have been recently summarized in a contribution to the valuable Library of American biography, edited by Oscar Handlin: Israel Knox's Rabbi in America; the Story of Isaac M. Wise (Boston, Little, Brown, 1957. G. Church and Society 5484. Cronin, John F. Catholic Social principles; the social teaching of the Catholic Church applied to American economic life. Milwaukee, Bruce Pub. Co., 1955. 803 p. 55-1755 HN37.C3C69 1955 A comprehensive and practical textbook by the assistant director of the Department of Social Action of the National Catholic Welfare Conference. Parts I and II, "The Christian Social Order" and "Social Principles in Economic Life," are universal in scope, each chapter beginning with pertinent passages of the social encyclicals and other papal directives for social action, from the Rerum Novarum of Pope Leo XIII in 1891 to the messages of Pius XII in 1949. The interpretation that follows is focused on American problems. The subjects covered include social justice; the "unsound philosophies" of individualism, socialism, and com- munism; "The Ideal Social Order"; the rights and duties of capital; the social problems of labor; property; the state in economic life; and social re- form. Part III is concerned with "American Catholic Social Thought" and covers such matters as the Catholic approach to big business, to the cooperative movement, to rural life, etc. Annotated reading lists and a correlation of the encyclicals and other authorities with the chapters of the book are given in appendixes. A more elementary text for high schools by Father Cronin, Catholic Social Action (Milwaukee, Bruce Pub. Co., 1948. 247 p.), is on practical social programs in the United States. 5485. Douglass, Harlan Paul. The Protestant church as a social institution, by H. Paul RELIGION / 779 Douglass and Edmund de S. Brunner. New York, Published for the Institute of Social and Religious Research by Harper, 1935. xv, 368 p. diagrs. 35-2275 BR516.D66 Bibliography: p. 356-362. The Institute of Social and Religious Research was organized in 1921 for the investigation by scientific methods of socioreligious phenonmena, with Dr. Douglass as its research director. By the time of its dissolution in October 1934 it had been responsible for 48 research projects relating to rural and urban churches, home and foreign missions, Christian education, the racial aspects of organized religion, and the cooperation and unity of religious forces. (Dr. Douglass was closely concerned with the last theme, and later served as secretary to the Commission to Study Church Unity of the Federal Council of the Churches of Christ.) This solid work is the final report of the institute, quite bal- anced and comprehensive, and a veritable mine of socioreligious information, with its findings statis- tically illustrated in 19 tables and 45 charts. After a general and historical introduction the main text (p. 31-234) is devoted to an account of "Institu- tional Factors and Processes" — church membership, the church in the community, its organization and the ministry, activities in education and social wel- fare, finances, etc. Part 3, "Conditioning Factors," surveys environmental influences, cooperation and integration of the churches, and the intellectual and religious climate. The last part, "Foreshadowings," looks at future prospects and policies, notably re- garding the church unity movement. Reviewers have called the work "a religious Middletown." 5486. Douglass, Harlan Paul. Protestant coopera- tion in American cities. New York, Insti- tute of Social and Religious Research, 1930. xviii, 514 p. diagrs. 3, l -^9l BX8.D67 Bibliography: p. 496. 5487. Douglass, Harlan Paul. Church unity movements in the United States. New York, Institute of Social and Religious Research, 1934. xxxviii, 576 p. 34-21128 BX8.D66 The first tide was one of a series resulting from a statistical survey of urban churches made by the institute. In the 1920's there were in the 50 largest cities of the United States nearly 18,000 churches, of many varieties, involved singly, cooperatively, or competitively in many forms of religious and social activity. To bring the complicated and ponderous machinery of all these into some kind of system was the aim of the federation movement. The author classifies the organizations of federation in five orders: local churches; locally organized denominational agencies; interdenominational agencies; nonecclesiastical extensions and allies; national or regional administrative machinery of the denominations. Of the two parts, the first is a general report on the movement, on the forms and structures of church federations; membership or participation short of membership; cooperative activities; agencies, resources, and methods; and other aspects of cooperation. The second part is a shorter technical report on specific processes — the committee system, the paid staff, religious education, social service, the work of women's departments, and financing and publicity. The second tide, pre- pared in response to the interest shown in the first, was compiled after questionnaires were sent to more than 20,000 persons. The answers, summarized in over 150 tables, provide the basis for a detailed ex- amination of American opinion regarding church union. There are three parts: "Objective Trends and Popular Reactions," "Ecclesiastical Thinking and Proposals," and "Prospects of Church Union," and methodological appendixes. The chief federal body resulting from the American movement of interchurch organization, The National Council of the Churches of Christ in the United States of America (1950), is itself a merger of 12 inter- denominational agencies, the largest of which was the Federal Council of the Churches of Christ in America. It includes also organizations for foreign and home missions, missionary education, women's groups, religious education, the Church World Serv- ice for relief, etc. A description will be found in Mayer's Religious Bodies (no. 5397). A lucid ac- count of the Federal Council was written by John A. Hutchison: We Are Not Divided; a Critical and Historical Study of the Federal Council of the Churches of Christ in America (New York, Round Table Press, 1941. 336 p.). 5488. Herberg, Will. Protestant, Catholic, Jew; an essay in American religious sociology. Garden City, N.Y., Doubleday, 1955. 320 p. 55-7661 BR525.H46 "List of chief works cited": p. [2991-313. A sociological study of the religious situation in mid-20th-century America. The author, who has lectured in Protestant, Jewish, and Catholic institu- tions alike, here interprets the paradox which he finds reflected in every aspect of contemporary re- ligious life: "pervasive secularism and mounting religiosity." His first two chapters deal with the "triple melting-pot" of the land of immigrants, in which, he says, ethnic separateness has almost dis- appeared and the only differentiating element be- tween descendants of the great immigrant groups is religion. He next discusses the contemporary up- swing in religion in American society, explaining lucidly the sociological factors of the shift in Amer- 780 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES ican character-structure from "inner-direction" to "other-direction" (David Riesman's terms from no. 4555), and of the need for security in the age of crisis and spiritual chaos. Next comes a chapter on the place of religion in the American Way of Life, following which the three religious communities of Protestantism, Catholicism, and Judaism are first examined as to general history, philosophy, and pres- ent trends, and then compared and contrasted. Their fundamental unity is disturbed by many and serious "religio-communal tensions," but "the inter- faith idea" is offered as a reasonable and practicable resolution. The last chapter conveys the author's criticism of the secularism of American religion, which he sums up as "so naively, so innocently man-centered." 5489. Hopkins, Charles Howard. The rise of the social gospel in American Protestantism, 1865-1915. New Haven, Yale University Press, 1940. 352 p. (Yale studies in religious education, 14) 41-1101 HN39.U6H6 1940a A general account of the movement in socioreli- gious thought that began with the general stirrings of humanitarian reform in the middle of the 19th century and gained momentum until the First World War reshaped the doctrines of liberal groups in all Protestant sects. "America's most unique contribution to the great ongoing stream of Chris- tianity," Dr. Hopkins calls the social gospel, "the result of the impact of the industrial revolution and its concomitants upon American Protestantism." In distinction to the old orthodoxy with its insistence upon the salvation or damnation of the individual soul, the social gospel applied the teachings of Christ and the message of salvation to society as a whole, its economic life and social institutions, and offered an essentially collectivist ethic for a capitalistic age. Its origins, exponents, expressions, and institu- tions — culminating in the Federal Council of the Churches of Christ in America — were numerous, and Dr. Hopkins has woven together many strands into a well-organized and interesting presentation. His footnotes cite a huge literature, and he speaks of mere than fifteen hundred items utilized in his research. The Urban Impact on American Protes- tantism, 1865-1900, by Aaron I. Abell (Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1943. 275 p. Harvard historical studies, v. 54), describes one phase of social Christianity, the effects of the post-Civil War urbanization on American Protestantism. This im- pact was a double-edged affair: the urban workers looked to religion to win them a better economic order, and the cities called on the churches for social service as well as spiritual aid. The writer traces the channels of organized aid from the beginnings of the Young Men's Christian Associations in the 1850's, and notices a variety of missions, organiza- tions, and associations: the Salvation Army, the "institutional church" movement, various brother- hoods and sisterhoods, and many other forms of social service. 5490. Hopkins, Charles Howard. History of the Y.M.C.A. in North America. New York, Association Press, 1951. 818 p. illus. 51-11674 BV1030.H6 The Young Men's Christian Association was born in London on June 6, 1844, when 12 young dry- goods assistants met under the leadership of George Williams, a Congregationalist Sunday school worker who had been inspired by the revivals of the Amer- ican evangelist Charles G. Finney. In 1851 the as- sociation was introduced into North America, with beginnings simultaneous in Boston and Montreal; within 3 years it had spread to most large cities and many smaller ones and its growth has been con- tinuous. For the Y.M.C.A.'s centenary Dr. Hopkins was commissioned by the Committee on Historical Resources to prepare this definitive history, based on the important collection of records in the Bowne Historical Library maintained by the national coun- cil in New York. The exceedingly detailed narra- tive is divided into chronological sections: 1851- 1865, 1865-1895, 1895-1940, and 1940-1951. In the 1890's, under the impulse of the general missionary expansion, the Y.M.C.A. movement spread abroad. Much attention is given in the later chapters to its world functions. 5491. Institute for Religious and Social Studies, Jewish Theological Seminary of America. American education and religion: the problem of religion in the schools; a series of addresses, edited by Frederick] Ernest Johnson. New York, Insti- tute for Religious and Social Studies; distributed by Harper, 1952. 211 p. (Religion and civilization series) 52-12044 LC111.I58 The problem discussed in these 12 thoughtful essays, based on lectures delivered at the institute in 1950-51, is stated by the editor in the introductory paper: "How can public education, in accord with its function of putting each generation in possession of its full cultural heritage, do justice to the religious phase of that heritage without doing violence to religious liberty as constitutionally safeguarded?" The authors express the viewpoints of agnostic, Jewish, Catholic, and liberal Protestant educators, university and college presidents, spokesmen for privately supported colleges and schools of educa- tion, and for elementary and secondary public schools. In summarizing, Dr. Johnson found a RELIGION / 781 consensus that "the educative process has a unitary quality which makes a dualism of the secular and the religious unrealistic," particularly in higher edu- cation; and also that the Supreme Court decision of 1948 outlawing the released-time plan for religious education (the McCollum case) was "remote from the realities of the educational system." He was able to note that since the delivery of the lectures the Supreme Court had reversed itself on the released- time plan (the Zorach case, 1952), and that two influential educational bodies had recommended substantive religious instruction in the schools. The most vigorous defense of purely secular education in the volume was "An 'Experimentalist' Position," by a former secretary of the Ethical Culture Schools, Dr. Vivian T. Thayer. His ideas were more fully expressed in the same year in one of the Beacon studies in freedom and power: The Attac\ upon the American Secular School (Boston, Beacon Press, 1951. 257 p.). Another notable study on this topic of mid-20th century debate is The American Tradi- tion in Religion and Education, by R. Freeman Butts, entered in the chapter on Education (no. 5103). 5492. May, Henry Farnham. Protestant churches and industrial America. New York, Har- per, 1949. 297 p. 49-8159 HN39.U6M38 Bibliography: p. 267-290. A study of the influence of American religion on the developing social thought of the industrial age (1828-95). The author writes as a historian rather than a theologian in his examination of movements, sermons, and the writings of churchmen and other leaders of opinion. His focus is on attitudes toward labor in the struggle of liberal thought against the laissez-faire theory upheld by traditional Protestant orthodoxy. In his first period (1828-61) he de- scribes "The Conservative Mold" and its support of the social status quo against the anticlerical radi- calism of the Jacksonian era. "The Summit of Complacency" was reached in the years 1861-76, when the great industrialists piled up their millions and poured out bounty for religious and charitable work, while conservative clerics justified "the Di- vinely-regulated and unchangeable social order." The last period (1877-95) is treated in two parts, '"Sources of Change" — the economic facts of strikes, depressions, unemployment, and bankruptcies, ac- companied by mounting waves of liberal and humanitarian, socialist and radical protest — and "Social Christianity." Dr. May attributes a large measure of the success of American progressivism to the moral aid of the social Christian movement. 5493. Miller, Robert Moats. American Protes- tantism and social issues, 1919-1939. Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina Press, 1958, 385 p. 58-1243 HN39.U6M59 Bibliography: p. 351-370. The social attitudes of American Protestantism during the between-war years of prosperity and de- pression are here surveyed with respect to the basic controversial problems of society — "civil liberties, labor, race relations, war, and the contending merits of capitalism, socialism, and communism." The author's concern is with the eight largest Protestant groups and the Federal Council of the Churches of Christ; on some matters he reviews systematically the position taken by each group. After a long general sketch of the churches in the social order a section is devoted to each of the large issues. In the 1920's they were "Corpulent and Contented," although a "Dissenting Report" called for replacing the profit motive with the service motive. "A Foot- note to the 1928 Election" suggests that a vote against Al Smith was not necessarily an effect of bigotry, but might proceed from a sincere support of the 1 8th Amendment. Three chapters record the churches' move to the left during the depression, while a fourth notes the large conservative element that did not move. The writer has attempted to lighten his serious matter with frequent touches of humor and irony, especially through pointed quota- tion. Large amounts of primary and secondary source materials are listed in the extensive bibliog- raphy. 5494. Rian, Edwin H. Christianity and American education. San Antonio, Naylor Co., 1949. 272 p. 49-9753 LC427.R5 Bibliography: p. 241-254. An expansion of a series of lectures delivered at the Princeton Institute of Theology by a Presby- terian college president. In 1936 Dr. Rian was one of the organizers of the Orthodox Presbyterian Church, a body formed in protest against modern- istic tendencies in the Presbyterian Church, which, however, he subsequendy rejoined. His conserva- tive viewpoint is expressed here only in the few pages in which he offers conclusions, and the bulk of the text is factual. He devotes his first and longest section to an account of American public schools, beginning with their history, and then dis- cussing present-day philosophies of education, text- books, and what he considers the disrupting and disintegrating effects of naturalistic education. John Dewey is his bugbear. A second section presents Roman Catholic education, quite objec- tively up to the last three pages, in which the writer explains his reasons for considering the system "erroneous and inadequate." These two parts are offered as perspective for the last, Dr. Rian's real point of concern: "Protestant Schools." Here he 782 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES is outspoken in his criticism. He finds Protestant education in tragic plight, "weak, hesitant, and largely ineffective as an answer to naturalism and as an exposition of Christianity." 5495. Silcox, Clarice Edwin, and Galen M. Fisher. Catholics, Jews and Protestants; a study of relationships in the United States and Canada. New York, Published for the Institute of Social and Religious Research by Harper, 1934. xvi, 369 p. 35-1 151 BL2520.S5 A report based on a series of case studies in 20 large cities of the United States and Canada, under- taken by the institute at the request of the National Conference of Jews and Christians. The purpose was to elucidate problems of interfaith relations through a survey of actual contacts and relation- ships between Catholics, Jews, and Protestants in particular communities, in order to determine the forces dividing them or bringing them together. The material is presented in leisurely, somewhat discursive, but eminendy readable style. The writers begin with a rapid review of the historical backgrounds of the three communions and their tensions and conflicts in America. The divisive aspects of discrimination and social distance are discussed in respect to business, employment, real estate, social and political life, and immigration. Next, relations in social work and education, inter- marriage, and conversion and proselytization are examined for both isolating and cohesive elements. Last, the field of cooperation is oudined in its philosophies and in measures of national or local scope. A short epilogue points out the chief philo- sophical differences in the three faiths which cause organized religion to make for divisiveness rather than integration. Although of great sociological interest, the work has been criticized as based on partial impressions and inadequate statistics. 5496. Spann, John R. ed. The church and social responsibility. Nashville, Abingdon-Cokes- bury Press, 1953. 272 p. 53-8136 HN31.S75 A set of essays interpreting the convictions of American Protestantism about the social order, the general viewpoint being that the Christian church bears responsibility for social conditions and must provide redemptive measures for society. The 15 writers are specialists, most of them professors in university schools of religion or seminaries. "Bio- graphical Notes" on them are supplied (p. 259-264). Their papers, all in plain language addressed to lay- men, are grouped in four parts: "The Social Ministry of the Church," "Basic Human Rights and the Community," "The Church and the Economic Order," and "The Church and the Political Order." The center of attention is American society, al- though one essay, "New Testament Sources of the Social Ministry of the Church," by Donald T. Row- lingson, is straight theology, and two or three others — e.g., "World Economic Problems," by Eddy Asirvatham, and "The Church and World Political Order," by Walter M. Van Kirk, have no local limi- tations. Another symposium of the same year, Christian Faith and Social Action, edited by John A. Hutchison (New York, Scribner, 1953. 246 p.), is in the nature of a Festschrift to Reinhold Niebuhr, whose concluding essay gives its title to the volume. The 13 contributors are all members of the Frontier Fellowship, a group founded under Niebuhr's in- spiration as the Fellowship of Socialist Christians (1930; name changed in 1947). The editor ex- plains in the first paper, "Two Decades of Social Christianity," that the aim of the fellowship is to understand and interpret Christian faith in ways relevant to contemporary society and its problems; their "thinking is inescapably oriented" to Niebuhr, their teacher and associate. Like him they are deeply concerned with the appraisal of Marxist thought and with criticism of the social gospel as "theologically shallow" and "socially unrealistic." They write for theologically trained readers. W. E. Garrison, literary editor of the Christian Century, summarizes the position of the fellowship as "mov- ing to the right theologically and to the left socially." 5497. Wisbey, Herbert A. Soldiers without swords; a history of the Salvation Army in the United States. New York, Macmillan, 1955. 242 p. illus. 55—13783 BX9716.W5 "Sources": p. 229-234. "This book was written to provide a concise, ac- curate, objective history of the Salvation Army in the United States that would be of use both to Salvationists and to students of American social and religious history." Its occasion was the 75th anniversary of the Salvation Army in the United States, which can be precisely reckoned from the "invasion" of New York City on March 10, 1880, when Commissioner G. S. Railton and seven Eng- lish lasses, having made a long and stormy voyage from London, held their first official service on the dock. The parent British body had been founded by William and Catherine Booth in 1865 (the name was not used until 1878); and like it the American army aimed its ministry at the swarming urban poor, the "unreached and unchurched" who felt out of place in middle-class churches, and whose sufferings were regarded as being largely the penalty of their own idleness and vice by too many Protestants. The army immediately fixed public attention by its uniforms, martial music, and gen- erally spectacular methods, but in spite of the "mud, bricks, stones, tomatoes, rotten eggs, dead cats and RELIGION / 783 rats, and buckets of water" with which its early meetings were often pelted, it gained willing work- ers from American young people, and converts of varying degrees of permanence among the dwellers in the slums where it evangelized. The army has never acquired the least snobbery, and the colorful evangelism of the early days has not been aban- doned, but it has been supplemented by a fine variety of social services conducted along approved lines. The least interesting parts of the book are concerned with the various jurisdictional disputes arising out of the effort to keep the American along with the other national groups under unitary leadership; and it is quite weak in statistics. H. The Negro's Church 5498. Fauset, Arthur Huff. Black gods of the metropolis; Negro religious cults of the urban North. Philadelphia, University of Penn- sylvania Press, 1944. 126 p. illus. (Publications of the Philadelphia Anthropological Society, v. 3) 44-3761 BR563.N4F3 1944a The anthropologist who wrote this University of Pennsylvania dissertation is himself partly of the Negro race, and is thus equipped by background, entree, and point of view for the interesting anthro- pological, psychological, and sociological research involved. Beginning with a general statement on Negro cults, he describes in systematic detail five groups currently functioning in Philadelphia: the Mt. Sinai Holy Church of America, Inc., the United House of Prayer of All People ("Daddy Grace" is not, like Father Divine, God, but has taken over while God is on vacation), the Church of God (Black Jews), the Moorish Science Temple of America, and the Father Divine Peace Mission Movement. For each group he starts with a short "testimony," and describes its origin, organization, membership, finance (in the case of Father Divine information was not forthcoming), beliefs, ritual, and other practices. The material and treatment are of feature-story quality. Dr. Fauset then com- pares these cults with evangelical Christian denom- inations, and seeks to ascertain why they attract fol- lowers, and the degree to which they promote eco- nomic, social, and cultural advance. Finally he calls into question the generally accepted idea of the peculiar "religiosity" of the American Negro. His conclusion is that such cults result from "the com- paratively meager participation of Negroes in other institutional forms of American culture" — i.e. from race discrimination. 5499. Loescher, Frank S. The Protestant church and the Negro, a pattern of segregation. New York, Association Press, 1948. 159 p. 48-7076 BR563.N4L6 A foreword by Bishop Scarlett of the Episcopal diocese of Missouri sets the tone for this clear, hard- hitting monograph: "This book will be unpleasant reading for those who love the Church." The au- thor, who wrote the work as a doctoral thesis in sociology, is a member of the Society of Friends and a specialist in race relations. The facts he assembles demonstrate that segregation is the normal practice of the Protestant churches. First he examines the general problem and "What the Churches say"; this is illustrated in appendix I with abstracts of pronouncements by church conventions and inter- church groups, notably the Federal Council of the Churches of Christ, which show an advance in thinking on race relations between 1908 and 1947. Next comes "What the Churches Do," nationally, regionally, and locally, and in denominational schools and colleges; this is illustrated in the statis- tical appendixes II and III. Of the eight million Protestant Negroes, approximately seven and a half million are in separate "Negro" denominations, and the other half million in separate Negro churches in the "white" denominations. Only a tiny minor- ity of local churches accept Negro members, and most of those are in communities where the Negro population is too small to maintain its own church. The last chapter is on policies and programs aiming at racial integration. 5500. Mays, Benjamin Elijah, and Joseph William Nicholson. The Negro's church. New York, Institute of Social and Religious Research, T 933- 3 21 P- 33-6349 BR563.N4M3 The first comprehensive survey, not as yet super- seded, of the Negro church in the United States. Made by the Institute of Social and Religious Re- search at the request of Negro leaders, it is based on a firsthand study of 609 urban and 185 rural churches selected as a representative sample. A sentence in the Preface gains added force a quar- ter-century later: "In view of the recent extensive migrations of Negroes from country to city and from South to North, together with the extension of education and sophistication among the Negro populadon as a whole, it may be considered for- 784 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES tunate that this study was made while the older pat- terns of religious life were still to be found." The analysis, reinforced by statistics, covers the place of organized religion in Negro life, its historical de- velopment, the ministry, church membership, build- ings and programs, worship, fellowship and com- munity activities, and finances, first for urban churches, and then for rural ones. In both areas consideration is given to whether the Negro is "overchurched." The last chapter, "The Genius of the Negro Church," suggests that in spite of the discouraging condition of Negro church life in a number of respects, which are "in part the result of the failure of American Christianity in race re- lations," "the Negro Church has potentialities to become possibly the greatest spiritual force in the United States." Another institute study also ex- amines the Negro's share in organized religion: Divine White Right, by Trevor Bovven (New York, Harper, 1934. 310 p.). The subtitle indicates its scope: "A Study of Race Segregation and Inter- racial Cooperation in Religious Organizations and Institutions in the United States." A separate sec- tion by Ira De A. Reid, "The Church and Educa- tion for Negroes," deals principally with the Negro mission schools and colleges in the South. 5501. Richardson, Harry V. Dark glory, a pic- ture of the church among Negroes in the rural South. New York, Published for Home Mis- sions Council of North America and Phelps-Stokes Fund by Friendship Press, 1947. xiv, 209 p. 47- 2 4753 BR563.N4R5 "A selected reading list": p. 194-197. "The church is still the predominant institution in the rural South. It is the Negro's chief agency of social expression and it enjoys greater freedom than any other community institution. The pastor as leader of the most important institution com- mands a unique authority, in spite of his limita- tions, that no other community leader enjoys." This thesis is maintained through its various aspects by the writer, an influential Southern religious leader formerly at Tuskegee Institute. His first seven chapters cover the historical background, the gen- eral setting and present conditions in four selected counties of Alabama, South Carolina, Arkansas, and Virginia, church buildings, church membership (Negroes are predominandy Baptist and Metho- dist), and programs for adults and young people. The next five chapters are concentrated on the min- isters, their training, their knowledge of rural af- fairs, and their attitudes and influence in general and regarding social problems, race relations, etc. Finally plans for their better training are outlined. In this connection the Program for a Better Trained Rural Ministry sponsored by the Phelps-Stokes Fund, with which the writer was at the time asso- ciated, is emphasized. 5502. Woodson, Carter G. The history of the Negro church. 2d ed. Washington, As- sociated Publishers, 1945. 322 p. illus. 46-279 BR563.N4W6 1945 In these days when churchgoers are kept con- stantly aware of the missionary effort to carry the Gospel to the Africans at home, it is hard to realize that for the first century or more of slavery in the English Colonies of America the conversion of Negroes to Christianity was frowned upon. Al- though royal decrees and special colonial laws had been passed to make it lawful for Christians to be held as slaves, the masters on the plantations gen- erally feared the mental improvement which reli- gious teaching might bring their laborers. The Catholic priests and missionaries in Maryland were the first to preach to all regardless of color. The few attempts at conversion of the Negroes made by clergymen of the Anglican Church and by Quakers in the Southern and Middle Colonies during the 1 8th century are described individually by Dr. Woodson in the first chapter of this detailed history. It was not until the Baptist and Methodist evangel- ical campaigns at the turn of the 19th century that the slaves were Christianized in substantial num- bers; then Negro preachers arose, and separate Negro churches were formed in cities and on the plantations. In the 1830's, after the slave revolt led by the preacher Nat Turner in Virginia, the fright- ened slaveowners put restrictions on Negro preach- ing in the South, and the great development of independent Negro churches did not come until after Emancipation. This book, by a prominent Negro historian (1875-1950), professor at Howard University, traces the history of the Negro church in terms of movements and men, and has been a standard authority since its first publication in 1921. XXIV Folklore, Folk Music, Folk Art A. Legends and Tales: General 55°3~55 I 9 B. Legends and Tales: Local 5520-5548 C. Folksongs and Ballads: General 5549-5564 D. Folksongs and Ballads: Local 5565-5584 E. Games and Dances 5585-5592 F. Fol\ Art and Crafts 5593-5604 ONE OF THE major encyclopedias defines the scope of folklore as "the material as well as the intellectual culture of the peasantry." This raises a primary consideration in approaching American folklore: there is and has been no American peasantry, properly so-called. Cultivators of the American soil have avoided both the name and the conditions which it implies; and American public policy has equally aimed, by and large, to prevent such conditions from arising, or at least from developing into permanent disabilities or status. Of all such policies, the most powerful antidote to the status of peasantry and its con- comitant folk culture is that of universal and free public education, available to children of every race and condition in every area, through secondary school or beyond. This ideal, first grasped by Thomas Jefferson and gradually made a reality during the past century, makes for a maximum of intercommunication between every part of Ameri- can society, and so wars upon that isolation which is recognized to be the natural soil of a folk culture. It seeks to make a child's opportunities to some degree independent of the condition of his parents, so that he need not inherit their status. In large degree, therefore, the American way of life is in- compatible with a folk culture. The past 60 years, however, have witnessed an intense cultivation of American folklore and folk music, and the past 30 of folk art, by the learned and the sophisticated, which they have succeeded in communicating, if not to the largest public, at least to large groups of amateurs, urban and suburban. This seeming paradox is easily resolved. The Jeffersonian ideal, if early proclaimed, was belatedly and gradually embodied, and is not yet perfected. Until the 19th century was well advanced, large sections of the American people remained in rela- tive isolation, with little or no schooling, and in 431240—60 51 greater or lesser degree dependent upon traditional lore, and what they could add to it, for the enrich- ment of their lives. The frontier, which did not disappear until about 1890, pushed on ahead of schools and printing presses, and out of its occupa- tional and other interests usually amplified the tra- ditions brought with it in various characteristic and colorful ways. Areas or classes which did not share in the main tide of American progress, such as the mountainous and other parts of the rural South, and the Negro nearly everywhere, conserved their old lore and modified it very gradually. Furthermore, about 1820 began a real influx of genuine peasantry from the nations and ethnic groups of Europe, each with a different body of traditional notions. These were of course subjected to an Americanization that was sometimes a deliberate policy but far more often an undirected social process, which had a limited effect upon the immigrant generation, but a much more thorough one upon their children and grand- children. Traces of tradition, however, have usually been left. The American Folklore Society, founded in 1888, defined as its first aim "the collection of the fast- vanishing remains of Folk-Lore in America." Their alarm was undue, since successful collecting goes on seven decades later, but they had indelibly ex- 785 786 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES pressed their sense that American folklore was a fringe phenomenon, a perishable residue, and a quite different matter from European folklore. The elaborate and sometimes grotesque theoretical structures that have been reared on the basis of Old-World folklore could never have been educed from the American variety. Yet another difference has been concisely put by Ruth Benedict: in native American folklore "self-expression is at a maximum and historical analogues are almost non-existent." One consequence has been that in recent years American academic folklorists have claimed for their subject matters that would have been dubiously re- garded by the brothers Grimm or E. B. Tylor, and some of their recent compilations have been miscel- lanies that seem to escape any clear and distinct definition. However, the latter-day tendency of Americans to seek refuge from the standardized present in a more colorful past has made all the esthetic kinds of folk culture marketable commodities. The titles which follow fill the distance between two extremes: rigorous academic collections in which the ipshsima verba of elderly rustics are reverendy recorded, col- lated, and annotated; and frankly popular works in which traditional materials are cheerfully re- worked for their value as healthy entertainment. Both kinds must be included if the American folk- lore interest of today is to be faithfully mirrored here. The arrangement of the entries that follow is self-explanatory. One warning needs to be given: the boundaries between the folk arts and their so- phisticated counterparts remain indistinct. There is no clear demarcation between the first two sec- tions here and Chapter I on Literature, where will be found such a folk classic as the Brer Rabbit corpus of Joel Chandler Harris; nor between folk music and the sections on popular music in the next chapter; nor between folk art and the section on Decorative Arts in Chapter XXVI. Folk art is a more recent interest than the other contents of this chapter, going back little more than three decades; but intensive cultivation has produced collections and a literature no less interesting than exist for the older pursuits. A. Legends and Tales: General 5503. Allen, Jules Verne. Cowboy lore; illus- trated by Ralph J. Pereida. [7th ed.] San Antonio, Tex., Nay lor, 1950. xvi, 164 p. 50-2725 F596.A38 1950 M1629.A46 1950 "The songs were taken down and set to music by Mrs. G. Embry Eitt." Billed as "The Original Singing Cowboy," the late Jules Verne Allen was long a favorite enter- tainer in rodeos and open-air exhibitions, and later won a wider popularity through his recordings and radio broadcasts. Nearly forty of Allen's favorite songs, provided with piano accompaniments, make up a large portion of this book, but other aspects of cowboy life and lore are also presented. Part 1 describes the real life and work of cowhands, as opposed to the Hollywood version, and appends to much miscellaneous information a few tall stories. Other parts describe the history and methods of catde brands and earmarks, and define English and Spanish terms from the cowboy's occupational lingo. The frontispiece illustrates the equipment of the cowpoke and his pony, identified in English and Spanish, from the brand, or fierro, to the stirrup, or estrivo. The book was originally published in 1933. 5504. Beckwith, Martha Warren. Folklore in America, its scope and method. Pough- keepsie, N. Y., Vassar College, The Folklore Foun- dation, 1931. 76 p. (Publications of the Folklore Foundation, no. 11) 32-4724 GR105.B4 GR15.V3, no. 11 "Selected references": p. 67-76. The term "folklore" was introduced by the British scholar William Thorns, in 1846, to supplant the vaguer names "popular literature" and "antiqui- ties." The scope and limitations of the discipline have been a matter of some debate since Thorns' day, and Miss Beckwith's careful definition is but one of several possible ones. In her first chapter Miss Beckwith differentiates between "folk knowl- edge" in general and folklore by linking the latter more closely with its German counterpart, Vol\s- \unde or folk art. It is only the artistic part of the folk tradition which the present definition of folk- lore includes. Thus the folklorist is not concerned indiscriminately with all popular tradition, but only with that which transcends utility in being "touched by poetic thought," imagination, and fantasy. The "art" in folklore differs from sophisticated artistic expression in that, though originally the product of an individual's creative imagination, the folk art work takes on the character of a group creation, through generations of repetition and variation. The folk group which is the true custodian of folk- lore is defined as a group of limited sophistication FOLKLORE, FOLK MUSIC, FOLK ART / 787 and restricted contact outside the group itself. The isolation of die folk group can be geographical, linguistic, racial or national, or occupational. The definition is concluded with a brief discussion of the extent to which folklore is allied with literature, on the one hand, and cultural anthropology, on the other. The remaining chapters trace the develop- ment of the scientific study of folklore, first in Europe, with special attention to Germany, Scan- dinavia, and Great Britain; and finally in the United States. The author points out early signs of literary interest in popular lore and literature, but finds the first scientific approach only in the 19th century, with the work of the brothers Grimm. For Amer- ica's part, special emphasis is placed on the New World vestiges of the British ballad, first given prominence in the great contributions of Francis James Child, author of The English and Scottish Popular Ballads (no. 5550 note). 5505. Blair, Walter. Mike Fink, king of Mis- sissippi keelboatmen. By Walter Blair and Franklin J. Meine. New York, Holt, 1933. xiv, 283 p. illus. 33-59 2 4 F353.B62 Bibliography: p. 269-283. The introduction discusses the processes whereby the American folk hero has developed from his- torical personage to romantic demigod recreated by the popular imagination. Kit Carson, Wild Bill Hickok, and Daniel Boone are a few of those in- stanced as real people whose real exploits have been touched by the creative muse of the folk, transcending history and outdistancing fact. One of the most colorful of the frontier heroes, Mike Fink, started looking for new frontiers from the river village of Pittsburgh, where he had been born about 1770. A crackshot Indian fighter whose prac- tical jokes included shooting off an Indian's scalp- lock, a fighting keelboatman on the Ohio and Mississippi whose immortal boast was "I can out- jump, out-run, and out-fight any man on the Massassip'," and at the end a trapper on the Mis- souri, Mike Fink led a legendary life of courage and cruelty, cunning and violence. Tracing the oral and early printed accounts of Mike's adven- tures, the epilogue recounts the birth and growth of the legend. The same authors have recently edited a further work which examines the subject from a more scholarly point of view: Half Horse, Half Alligator; the Growth of the Mi\e Fin\ Legend ([Chicago] University of Chicago Press, 1956. 288 p.). 5506. Blair, Walter. Tall tale America, a legend- ary history of our humorous heroes. Illus- trated by Glen Rounds. New York, Coward- McCann, 1944. 262 p. 44-8461 PS451.B55 "Proof (a bibliographical note)": p. 257-262. With tongue firmly set in cheek, Walter Blair sets out to recount America's history in terms of the legendary heroes who have been important figures in popular tradition. Fact and folklore are mingled freely and seasoned with witty improvements by the author, who "fixed up fact after fact to make it truer than it ever was before." Exploits of Mike Fink, Davy Crockett, Johnny Appleseed, Paul Bun- yan, Pecos Bill, and John Henry are humorously related, together with those of earlier heroes around whom legends have long clustered, beginning with Lief the Lucky, Columbus, and Ponce de Leon. Asserting that "We've Still Got Heroes," the last chapter reminds us of our recent tall tales about "shipyards, gremlins, and marines" and "the be- wildering Pentagon building." There are a num- ber of other books of American folk tales designed for popular reading, all of which cannot be men- tioned here. Two recent ones which present some favorite tales in an attractive format are Burl Ives' Tales of America (Cleveland, World Pub. Co., 1954. 305 p.) and Maria Leach's The Rainbow Boo\ of American Folf{ Tales and Legends (Cleve- land, World Pub. Co., 1958. 318 p.). 5507. Boatright, Mody C, ed. Backwoods to bor- der. Mody C. Boatright [and] Donald Day, editors. Austin, Texas Folklore Society, 1943. xv, 235 p. illus. (Publications of the Texas Folklore Society, no. 18) 43-18054 GR1.T4, no. 18 The 1 8th yearbook of the Texas Folklore Society marked the retirement of J. Frank Dobie as editor, although he remained an active contributor and supporter. The articles range over various stand- ard aspects of folklore in the Southwest, including tales of ghosts, animals, heroes, and heroines, and legends, anecdotes, jargon, and rope-jumping rhymes. More unusual is a description of the cus- tom of grave decoration among the Negroes, Mexi- cans, and Indians of the Southwest, and an account of the cowhands' bulldogging and branding tech- niques at a branding roundup. "The Arkansas Traveler," that widely popular combination of hu- morous dialog and fiddle-playing, is the subject of an especially penetrating study by Catherine Mar- shall Vineyard, who compares versions of the skit and while tracing its history and origin finds some distant cousins. 5508. Boatright, Mody C. Folk laughter on the American frontier. New York, Macmillan, 1949. 182 p. 49-49204 PN6161.B663 The Easterner's idea of frontier life, as being full of crudity, violence, and sloth, seems to have been the starting place for the grandiose exaggerations which characterize much of the frontier's own hu- 788 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES mor. The tall tales and anecdotes which Professor Boatright has assembled in these pages abound in rough-and-tumble fights, ridiculous in the degree of their brutality, and pioneer hardships, impossibly extreme. The subjects of the 13 chapters include "Backwoods Belles," one of whom killed a maraud- ing wolf with her wooden leg, and another who could "eat more wildcat steaks raw than any other living critter in creation." One of the rugged fron- tiersmen encountered in "Manners and Men" is tobacco-chewing Davy Crockett, who "was huge- ously ashamed to spit on that splendiferous carpit," not realizing the function of an elaborately painted cuspidor. In his final chapter Professor Boatright attempts to discover the basis of frontier humor and concludes by taking issue with such writers as Lewis Mumford and Van Wyck Brooks, who thought that the pioneers used humor as "a grim release of frus- trated hopes." Buoyancy, rather than despair, is in Professor Boatright's view the source of American frontier humor. 5509. Boatright, Mody C, ed. Folk travelers: ballads, tales, and talk. Edited by Mody C. Boatright, Wilson M. Hudson [and] Allen Max- well. Austin, Texas Folklore Society; [distributed by] Southern Methodist University Press, Dallas, 1953. 261 p. illus. (Publications of the Texas Folklore Society, no. 25) 53-12578 GR1.T4, no. 25 The migrant nature of folklore is the key to the title of this installment in the Texas Folklore So- ciety's series, and the subject of J. Frank Dobie's lead article, "The Traveling Anecdote." Many tales and tale-motifs have traveled widely, and some, such as the famous story of the Tar Baby, recorded in Uncle Remus, have been around the world many times over thousands of years. For the most part, the volume stays close to the Southwest, with dis- cussions of Spanish cattle brands and tall tales, and of magic and weather lore from the Texas-Mexican border country. 5510. Botkin, Benjamin A., ed. Sidewalks of America; folklore, legends, sagas, traditions, customs, songs, stories, and sayings of city folk. Indianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill, 1954. xxii, 605 p. illus. 54-9485 GR105.B57 In stating his case for collecting urban lore, the editor points out that "wherever you find people you find folklore — that is, a body of traditions, collective symbols and myths, folkways and folk- say, rooted in a place and in ways of living and looking at life." The folk groups reflected in this miscellany are urban groups and ethnic and re- ligious groups within each city. The 16 chapters include American city tales and anecdotes dating from early in the last century to the recent rise of suburbia, but make no attempt to present them in chronological order. Not overlooking city folk music, Dr. Botkin has included ballads such as "The Milwaukee Fire," urban industrial songs such as "The Homestead Strike," and a large assortment of children's rhymes and songs, and of peddlars' street cries. 551 1. Botkin, Benjamin A., ed. A treasury of American folklore; stories, ballads, and tra- ditions of the people. With a foreword by Carl Sandburg. New York, Crown, 1944. xxvii, 932 p. 44-4275 GR105.B58 "A book of American folklore," the compiler thought, "should be as big as this country of ours — as American as Davy Crockett and as universal as Brer Rabbit." In both size and variety, this one- volume introduction to American folk literature embodies much of Dr. Botkin's sense of the breadth and inclusiveness of his subject. Part 1, "Heroes and Boasters," recounts the exploits of classical American folk figures such as Crockett, Pecos Bill, and Stormalong. It brings to our attention some modern ones as well in Joe Magarac the Hunkie Steelman, and Popeye. The "Jesters" in part 3 tell American anecdotes, proverbs, and gags from popular tradition and from the folk-inspired and folk-oriented works of such writers as Carl Sand- burg. Not to be overlooked are the recent urban "Little Moron" jokes and "Knock Knock, Who's There" riddles. The tall tales treated in part 4, "Liars," include some whoppers about remarkable insects and "fearsome critters," and Mark Twain's "Jumping Frog." Washington Irving's "The Devil and Tom Walker" is one of the legends in part 6, although most come direcdy from folk tradition. The songs and rhymes, many of whose melodies are included, range from traditional Anglo-American ballads to modern jingles and rope-skipping chants. Although there is no general bibliography, the footnotes are many and detailed. The songs are indexed by titles and first lines and by the names of their collectors and editors, while the other ma- terial is thoroughly indexed by names and subjects. 5512. Botkin, Benjamin A., ed. A treasury of railroad folklore; the stories, tall tales, tra- ditions, ballads, and songs of the American railroad man. Edited by B. A. Botkin and Alvin F. Har- low. New York, Crown, 1953. xiv, 530 p. illus. 53-9973 GR920.R3B6 The joint product of a railroad historian and an American folklorist, this large anthology examines both historical fact and oral lore connected with the development of railroading in the days of steam. Real and legendary personalities who worked at all FOLKLORE, FOLK MUSIC, FOLK ART / 789 levels of the business are encountered, from John Henry and Casey Jones to Jay Gould and Andrew Carnegie. Jones' disaster is one of several ex- amined at length. Other sections discuss the "Banditti of the Rails," including the first train holdup, and several of the James boys' jobs, and present many "Blues, Ballads, and Work Songs," with tunes and historical notes. 5513. Clough, Benjamin C, ed.. .The American imagination at work; tall tales and folk tales. New York, Knopf, 1947. xix, 707 p. 47-30583 GR105.C55 Bibliography: p. 701-707. This large collection of American folk tales and tall tales draws on material collected from the oral tradition by such folklorists as Richard Dorson, Harold Thompson, Richard Chase, Vance Ran- dolph, and Herbert Halpert. Other items are taken from more purely literary sources, from writers so diverse in period and oudook as Captain John Smith, Cotton Mather, Washington Irving, Mark Twain, Stephen Vincent Benet, and Bennett Cerf. Loosely arranged by type and subject matter, the yarns cover "history, semi-history and pseudo- history," "witchcraft and other satanic mischief," "the animal kingdom," "explorers, pioneers, bene- factors, demigods, supermen, myth-makers, and jokers," and a number of "hardy perennials." 5514. Davidson, Levette J. A guide to American folklore. [Denver] University of Denver Press, 1951. 132 p. 51-10205 GR105.D3 In his first chapter "What is Folklore?" the author gives the discipline a broader definition than does M. W. Beckwith in her Folklore in America (no. 5504). The present study applies the term in general to "the traditional expressions of unsophisti- cated groups of people, expressions that are oral or informal in transmission." Thus Professor David- son, with the more recent folklorists, tends to place less emphasis on artistic standards in folk literature, and more on authentic tradition as a key to better understanding of the cultural group. The author agrees with earlier scholars that folklore thrives best in isolated, homogeneous, and unlettered so- cieties, but finds that it also flourishes in clubs, fraternities, schools, and other such groups in urban society: "We all, more or less, follow folk patterns, enjoy folk creations, and pass along folklore." The remaining 14 chapters of this handbook make brief examinations of the several types of folklore: myths, legends, customs, songs, crafts, etc., defining and commenting upon each, and appending bibliog- raphies and study questions for each. Appendixes trace the development of American folklore scholar- ship; list many of the outstanding experts, with their fields of specialty; and survey the sources available to the student of folklore in America's museums, libraries, and archives. 5515. Federal Writers' Project. Lay my burden down; a folk history of slavery. Edited by B. A. Botkin. Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1945. xxi, 285 p. illus. A45-5576 E444.F26 Edited by Dr. Botkin from the numerous manu- script narratives of former slaves collected during the 1930's by the Federal Writers' Project, Lay My Burden Down constitutes a group autobiography of the Southern Negroes to whom the time of slavery was still a personal, albeit distant, memory. Aiming at the general reader, the editor has maintained a clear and concise narrative style without sacrificing the personal language of the original sources. The book is divided into five general sections: "Mother Wit," "Long Remembrance," "From Can to Can't," "A War among the White Folks," and "All I Know about Freedom." Both factual narrative and folk- lore figure importantly in the reminiscences. Tall tales, anecdotes, ghost stories, and myths — many of them involving Lincoln and other important figures of the day — come from the many informants blessed with "mother wit." Personal recollections of slavery days vary widely, according to the in- formants' individual experiences. Some of the ac- counts are strongly tinged with nostalgia, others with bitterness. One of the former slaves even shows sympathy for the Ku Klux Klan! Neverthe- less, most of the contributors would seem to agree with the one who said, "Freedom is better than slavery, though. I done seed both sides." 5516. Hoffman, Daniel G. Paul Bunyan, last of the frontier demigods. Philadelphia, Uni- versity of Pennsylvania Press for Temple University Publications, 1952. xiv, 213 p. 52-12005 PS461.B8H6 Bibliography: p. 193-201. Although Paul Bunyan is among the most widely known of American folk heroes, his position as a genuine folk character is surprisingly precarious. Considered by some authorities to have been in- vented out of whole cloth by professional writers, the good-natured giant owes at least a large propor- tion of his current popularity and many of his individual exploits to printed sources. That Paul himself originated in the oral tradition, however, is convincingly demonstrated by Professor Hoffman. Paul's first appearance in print was as recent as 191 0, in a newspaper story whose authentic lumberwoods vocabulary suggests a traditional oral source. In scholarly fashion the author analyzes the popular Paul Bunyan literature and the poetic treatments by Robert Frost, Carl Sandburg, and Louis Unter- 790 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES meyer, as well as the surviving fragments of oral literature which probably originated in the last cen- tury. He appends an index to the motifs in the Bunyan tales, both literary and oral. 5517. Johnson, Guy B. John Henry; tracking down a Negro legend. Chapel Hill, Uni- versity of North Carolina Press, 1929. 155 p. (Uni- versity of North Carolina. Social study series) 29-23914 PS461.J6J6 ML3556.J7J7 "Bibliography of John Henry": p. [152J-155. "The songs about John Henry," states Professor Johnson, "are at the heart of the legend which has sprung up around him." By gathering and ana- lyzing the available hammer songs and ballads (some of which are here accompanied by their melodies) about the mighty steel driver, and comparing their widely conflicting patches of evidence with what documentation and individual recollections he could locate, the author, while unable to obtain the com- plete facts, has at least laid the ground for better- informed speculation and set an example for other such studies of the factual bases of American song- legends. An examination of the development of the steam drill and the physical conditions of the Big Bend Tunnel in West Virginia leads him to the conclusion that the famous contest between man and machine could, at least, have taken place, and that, under the right circumstances, such a steel driver as John Henry could well have been the vic- tor. The relationship between John Henry and another ballad hero, the murderer John Hardy, long a thorny matter in American Negro folklore, is found to be only a confusion of two separate Negro steel drivers. Hardy, whose exploit is well documented, appears to have entered the annals of folk legend some time after the John Henry tradi- tion was already well established. Mention should also be made of a similar study, later by a few years, Louis W. Chappell's scholarly Jo fin Henry, a Fol\- Lore Study (Jena, Frommannsche Verlag, 1933. 144 p.), which supports many of Professor John- son's conclusions while it clarifies and corrects others. 5518. Journal of American folklore, v. 1. Apr./ June 1888. Philadelphia, American Folk- lore Society, quarterly. 17-28737 GR1.J8 Published in Boston by Houghton Mifflin, 1888- 1910. Index: Vols. 1-40, 1888-1927. 1 v. (Issued as v. 14 of the Memoirs of the American Folklore So- ciety (GR1.A5, v. 14). The American Folklore Society, the parent or- ganization devoted to the study of folklore in the New World, was founded in 1888, with Professor Alcee Fortier of Tulane University as its first presi- dent. Through its Journal of American Folklore and other publications, including monographs and bibliographies, this active organization has contrib- uted most significantly to the study of British, French, Spanish, and Negro lore in Canada, the United States, and Latin America, as well as the indigenous lore of the American Indian. The vast amount of material in the Journal's first 70 volumes has recently been made more accessible to the re- searcher by Tristram P. Coffin's An Analytical In- dex to the Journal of American Folklore (Philadel- phia, American Folklore Society, 1958.). Among the first regional offspring of the American Folk- lore Society was the Texas Folklore Society, which held its first meeting in 19 n and got out the first of its annual volumes in 19 16, under the editorship of Stith Thompson. Professor Thompson's successor was J. Frank Dobie who, after a brief World War I interim, presided over the Publications of the Texas Folklore Society until 1943, when the editorial work was taken up by Mody C. Boatright and others. This series of yearbooks continues to offer a wide variety of legends, tales, songs, ballads, and other lore from the Indian, Spanish, Negro, and Anglo- Saxon peoples of the American Southwest. A num- ber of the Texas Society's Publications are individ- ually listed elsewhere in this chapter. The number of folklore periodicals devoted to specific areas, States, or subjects is large and growing. The most important include the Southern Folklore Quarterly (founded in 1937), Western Folklore (originally the California Folklore Quarterly, 1942-46), New Yor\ Folklore Quarterly ( 1945), and Midwest Folk- lore (195 1 ). These publications have not rigidly restricted themselves to their particular areas in the range of their contents but, like the Journal of American Folklore, show evidence of a growing in- terest in the general field of folklore, including its international aspects. 5519. Price, Robert. Johnny Appleseed; man and myth. Bloomington, Indiana University Press, 1954. xv, 320 p. illus. 54-7972 S417.C45P7 Bibliography: p. 299-303. In an oral literature replete with vigorous, swash- buckling, swaggering, and sometimes brutal heroes, the folk memory of John Chapman (1 774-1 845) is unique. Legend tells us that, although he ran from Mansfield to Mt. Vernon, Ohio, in 24 hours in order to summon armed help for settlers threatened by an Indian attack, Chapman himself would never use a gun against another man, whether white or Indian. Nor would he permit animals or insects to suffer for his own comfort. Already a popular legend long FOLKLORE, FOLK MUSIC, FOLK ART / 79 1 before his death, the earliest printed account of Chapman appeared in England in 1817, and does not describe Johnny Appleseed, the popular planter of Midwestern orchards, so much as the religious mys- tic and "extraordinary missionary" for the New Church of Swedenborg. As far as is possible, Pro- fessor Price has attempted to separate fact from legend, and proves, among other things, that while the itinerant pioneer, missionary, and nurseryman was not without his eccentricities, the popular notion that he was a pauper is far from correct. In tracing the development of the Appleseed myth, however, the author concludes that, in the final analysis, its worth "no longer lies merely in the dead facts that may have inspired it but in the new, living and creating force that it has become in the present." B. Legends and Tales: Local 5520. Boatright, Mody C. Tall tales from Texas. Illustrated by Elizabeth E. Keefer; foreword by J. Frank Dobie. Dallas, Tex., Southwest Press, 1934. xxiv, 100 p. 34-24636 PZ3.B6304Tal The ideal audience for a frontier tall tale, or "windy," was a credulous greenhorn, who was often treated to exaggeration regarding the potency of poisonous serpents, dreadful aspects of fantastic beasts, and extraordinary feats of strength and speed by heroes of the Southwestern plains. But, as }. Frank Dobie points out in his "Preface on Authen- tic Liars," even when no tenderfoot was about the authentic liar took his art seriously and told his tale with the gravity of "a historian of the Roman Em- pire," expecting "neither credulity nor the establish- ment of truth," but creating his tale as an end in itself. In this book there is a young greenhorn to provide his more experienced cronies with the op- portunity and incentive to summon up a large assort- ment of "windies" on all manner of subjects, culminating in accounts of the genesis, exploits, and exodus of Pecos Bill and his beloved first wife, Sluefoot Sue. 5521. Boatright, Mody C, ed. Texas folk and folklore. Edited by Mody C. Boatright, Wil- son M. Hudson [and] Allen Maxwell. Drawings by Jose Cisneros. Dallas, Southern Methodist Uni- versity Press, 1954. 356 p. (Publications of the Texas Folklore Society, no. 26) 54-11299 GR1.T4, no. 26 The indigenous Indians, the Spanish settlers from Mexico, the Anglo-American setders, and their Negro slaves formed four distinct racial groups and cultural traditions in Texas which maintain, to a great extent, their several identities. All four of these traditions are drawn upon freely in this col- lection, which includes tales of the Kiowa-Apache and the Alabama-Coushatta, together with Mexican, Negro, and Anglo-American tales, jokes, legends, and ghost stories. Another branch of folklore cov- ered is music, with white and Negro ballads and songs, and Mexican corridos. Rounding out the collection are examples of folk-medicine, plant lore, games, and proverbs, and an account of a highly poetic and moving Negro folk sermon. The volume is one of a series which has been issued regularly by the society since 19 16. 5522. Botkin, Benjamin A., ed. New York City folklore: legends, tall tales, anecdotes, stories, sagas, heroes and characters, customs, traditions, and sayings. New York, Random House, 1956. 492 p. illus. 56-8815 F128.B6 Urban popular tradition, previously presented in the editor's Sidewalks of America (no. 5510), is fur- ther exploited in a volume devoted to the largest city of the Nation and the World. "The focus of the book," the editor observes, "is on the quintes- sence of New York," rather than on the many indi- vidual ethnic, linguistic, and occupational groups which exist within the whole. At the same time certain neighborhoods and "cities within the city" are given attention in chapters such as "You Walk around a Corner, and It's a Different World," "Peacocks on Parade," and "Playtown and Play- boys." While the book's organization is informal and follows no strict historical pattern, a wide range of New York City history is covered, from the earliest encounters between the Indians and Dutch to the latter days of Grover Whalen, Jimmy Walker, Casey Stengel, and Toots Shor, all of whom are represented in the editor's selection of New York City folklore. It is unlike Dr. Botkin's other an- thologies in that music does not figure importantly, although a few street cries and chants are included. 5523. Botkin, Benjamin A., ed. A treasury of Mis- sissippi River folklore; stories, ballads, tradi- tions, and folkways of the mid-American river country. New York, Crown, 1955. xx, 620 p. 55-10172 GR109.B58 While cultural homogeneity has often been re- garded as an ideal breeding ground for pure folk- lore, and has been a vitally important factor in the South, New England, and other regions of America, 792 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES the keynote of the mid-American river country is, as Dr. Botkin points out, diversity. "From frigid Lakes and North Woods to semi-tropical Gulf, the river country has . . . been a region of extremes and sharp contrasts and violent changes." Over the length of the Mississippi, there is a greater amalga- mation of ethnic and cultural groups than has been encountered in most of the other areas dealt with in the editor's "Treasury" series. As a result the leg- ends and tales, heroes and outlaws, language and customs, and ballads and blues of the Mississippi country are related to diverse cultural traditions: those of the Anglo-Saxon, the Frenchman, the Negro, the Indian, the German, and the Scandi- navian; and include occupational lore of the trapper, the lumberman, the farmer and plantation laborer, and the industrial worker. 5524. Botkin, Benjamin A., ed. A treasury of New England folklore; stories, ballads, and traditions of the Yankee people. New York, Crown, 1947. xxvi, 934 p. 47-1 1615 GR106.B6 Following the same broad treatment of written and oral lore as the editor's popular Treasury of American Folklore (no. 55 11), this anthology pre- sents a large quantity and variety of legendary and real local New England characters, stories, anec- dotes, customs, and music. In a brief introduction, "New England as a Folklore Country," Dr. Botkin describes the close-knit New England culture as an ideal ground for the preservation of folklore, be- cause of its "strong sense of 'nationality' rooted in 'racial remembrance.' " The book's five sections range over the earlier source literature, Artemus Ward, Josh Billings, and The Farmer's AlmanacI^, as well as the purely oral lore gathered in recent years by the Federal Writers' Project and individual collectors. 5525. Botkin, Benjamin A., ed. A treasury of Southern folklore; stories, ballads, traditions, and folkways of the people of the South. With a foreword by Douglas Southall Freeman. New York, Crown, 1949. xxiv, 776 p. 49-11786 GR108.B6 A further regional installment in Dr. Botkin's series on folk taste and fancy, A Treasury of South- ern Folklore sets forth local loyalties and prejudices, heroes and desperadoes, stories, customs, and music. One type of hero is presented in a particularly interesting chapter, "The Peoples' Choice," which recalls Southern politicians and political commen- tators who have captured the popular imagination, from Patrick Henry and John Calhoun to Huey Long and Will Rogers. Moonshine, mint juleps, hush-puppies, and burgoo are among the "Pleasures of the Palate" described in part 4, "Southern Folk- ways." As is customary in this series, the editor concludes with a large assortment of songs and ballads, with melodies. 5526. Botkin, Benjamin A., ed. A treasury of Western folklore. Foreword by Bernard De Voto. New York, Crown, 1951. 806 p. illus. 51-12013 GR109.B6 "To the New Yorker," one of this anthology's selections avers, "anything west of Hoboken is the West." Most Easterners locate the frontier along the far slope of the Alleghenies, for one's concept of the West changes with one's point of view. However, all commentators, even those who regard the West as being a state of mind, agree that the West, wherever it is, is a place of vastness and diversity. Like the West itself, Mr. Botkin's third regional miscellany of American folklore is expan- sive and varied. The tales, anecdotes, language, customs, and songs, reprinted with connecting edi- torial commentary, offer a panorama of the hard and high living and the fast and frequent dying which all of us associate with the story of westward expansion. As in its two predecessors, the focal point is Anglo-American tradition. Strung upon this thread, however, are the contributory traditions of the Western Indian and the Spanish American. In a loose historical and geographical order, the collection offers folkways, folk-say, and a consider- able amount of straight history of the struggles of the setders against nature, the Indians, and each other. There are tales and songs of sandstorms and earthquakes, of Crazy Horse and Cochise, and of Clay Allison and Billy the Kid. Nor does the editor ignore the 20th century's contributions to Western folklore, with the coming of industry, wealth, and Hopalong Cassidy. Readers desiring a smaller collection may turn to Duncan Emrich's volume in the American customs series: It's an Old Wild West Custom (New York, Vanguard Press, 1949. 313 p.), which has selections in most of the categories offered by Dr. Botkin, as well as an illus- trated study of branding irons and saloon fixtures. 5527. Brewer, John Mason. The Word on the Brazos; Negro preacher tales from the Bra- zos bottoms of Texas. Foreword by J. Frank Dobie; illus. by Ralph White, Jr. Austin, University of Texas Press, 1953. 109 p. 53-10834 GR103.B7 The folk sermon in the religion of the Southern Negro, which has been better preserved in the Brazos bottoms of Texas than in most places, is characterized by its superb poetic imagery, its mu- sical nuance, and its striking use of parables and anecdotes. Many of the stories in this collection originated as exempla from the pulpit, while others were told about preachers and religious matters in FOLKLORE, FOLK MUSIC, FOLK ART / 793 general by members of the flock. Both are known as "preacher tales." All of the tales, which Dr. Brewer relates in an authentic idiom, show a gen- uine gift of wit and humor: The Reverend gendy chides the Sister Rosies who cry out "Ride, salva- tion, ride!" until the collection hat is passed, when they change to a less enthusiastic, "Walk, salvation, walk." The charm and humor of these tales of "Bad Religion," "Good Religion," "Baptizings, Conversions and Church Meetings," "Heaven and Hell," and "Preachers and Little Boys," reflect the happiness which this folk found in their religion, without detracting from the sincerity and humility of their belief. 5528. Carriere, Joseph Medard, ed. Tales from the French folklore of Missouri. Evanston, 111., Northwestern University, 1937. 354 p. (Northwestern University studies in the humanities, no. 1) 38-6249 GR110.M77C3 In the village of Old Mines, in Washington County some 25 miles from the Mississippi River, Dr. Carriere found a small community which re- tained the language and traditions of the French pioneers who settled the area in the 18th century. The 73 tales which he here presents appear in the dialect in which he recorded them, and are arranged into three general categories: "Animal Tales"; "Or- dinary Folk-Tales," which include tales of magic, religion, and of the stupid ogre, and novelle or ro- mantic tales; and finally, assorted "Farces, Anec- dotes, and Cumulative Stories." The dialect, which strongly resembles some Canadian-French dialects but also includes some English influences, is closely analyzed along with the stories. Each tale is pre- ceded by a brief English summary. Additional helps include a glossary, and lists of tale types and motifs, arranged in accordance with the scholarly classification set up by Antti Aarne and Stith Thompson. 5529. Chase, Richard, ed. The Jack tales, told by R. M. Ward and his kindred in the Beech Mountain section of western North Carolina and by other descendants of Council Harmon (1803- 1896) elsewhere in the Southern mountains; with three tales from Wise County, Virginia. Illustrated by Berkeley Williams, Jr. [Boston] Houghton Mifflin, 1943. 201 p. 43-12028 GR110.N8C5 Some Americans may be surprised to learn that the resourceful young man who climbed a beanstalk and slew a giant is also the hero of a large and widely known cycle of tales, brought to the New World from England, and still told in several re- gions, including the Southeastern States where Mr. Chase heard them. In this collection are 18 adven- tures of an Americanized Jack, an easygoing country 431240—60 52 boy far removed from his dashing English cousin, and of his brothers, Will and Tom. The ancient origins still show through in appearances of a Woden-like stranger with magical powers, and a unicorn, described as "just some kind of little old yearlin' bull that didn't have but one horn." Most of the tales come from the tradition of a single family, descendants of "Old Council" Harmon, all in the vicinity of Beech Mountain, North Carolina. Mr. Chase has combined different versions, clarified the dialect, and retold the stories in a manner which will best appeal to his readers, and especially to the children for whom Jack's escapades are a constant source of delight. At the same time he has pre- served the characteristic Southern mountain idiom. Serious students of folklore will not overlook the special appendix prepared by Dr. Herbert Halpert, which makes a brief survey of the folktale in Amer- ica and lists Old World parallels to Mr. Chase's selections, with references to the relevant literature. Five years later Mr. Chase issued a further and more general collection: Grandfather Tales; American- English Vol\ Tales (Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1948. 239 p.). Its 25 traditional tales were taken down by Mr. Chase or others in Virginia, North Carolina, and Kentucky. The tide originated thus: when Mr. Chase explained to one of his informants just the sort of tales he was looking for, the reply was, "Oh, you want the old grandfather tales: 'Jack and Will and Tom,' 'Chunk o' Meat,' 'The Two Lost Babes' — them old impossibilities. Is that what you're after?" As in the earlier collection, the author has reworked his sources for greater reada- bility, and gives references to them in an appendix. Melodies are given in the popular old-shaped nota- tion. This volume, like its predecessor, is illustrated with the pen-and-ink drawings of Berkeley Williams, Jr. 5530. Davidson, Levette J., and Forrester Blake, eds. Rocky Mountain tales. With drawings by Skelly. Norman, University of Oklahoma Press, 1947. xiv, 302 p. 47-3645 GR109.D3 The Rocky Mountains and the plains around them have been the birth-place of many of America's most attractive legends, and the theater of much fact which has acquired legendary status. In the pres- ent collection the compilers have gathered from many printed sources tall tales, historical incidents, and accounts of many of the natural phenomena for which the region is famous. The first chapter intro- duces Jim Bridger, a wild and woolly frontiersman, who is still remembered as one of the greatest spin- ners of fabulous yarns. "Old Jim's" tales of the pet- rified forest and the glass mountain are among those recounted. Another remarkable personality encoun- tered is the "Pikes Peak Prevaricator," Sergeant 794 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES O'Keefe, whose Munchausen-like tales of super- human feats are recorded at length. 5531. Dobie, James Frank. Coronado's children; tales of lost mines and buried treasures of the Southwest. Illustrated by Ben Carlton Mead. Gar- den City, N. Y., Garden City Pub. Co., 1934. xiv, 367 p. _ 34-33497 F786.D633 Professor Dobie asserts that the gold fever which drove the conquistadores in search of the legendary Seven Cities of Cibola, the Gran Quivira, and El Dorado, did not die out with the coming of perma- nent settlers but persists more strongly than ever. In evidence he has printed here (the original edi- tion was in 1930) a large number of tales current in America's Southwest of lost or hidden gold and other treasures. The legends abound in lost mines, rich caches guarded by Indians, pirate treasure bur- ied by Lafitte and guarded by his shade, and many other tales of the endless quest of prospectors and adventurers. Appended are detailed bibliograph- ical notes and a glossary of Mexican and other localisms of the Southwest. 5532. Dobie, James Frank, ed. Tales of old-time Texas; illustrated by Barbara Latham. Bos- ton, Litde, Brown, 1955. 336 p. 55-10755 GR110.T5D63 Adventurous tales of lost mines and hidden treas- ures, not unlike those encountered in the preceding Coronado's Children, are to be found in this new collection, but there is a great deal more. There are tall tales on many subjects, including the Texas weather; pure fantasy; and historically based tales revolving around such heroes as Jim Bowie and Sam Bass, best-known and -liked of the latter-day Robin Hoods of Texas folklore. Intentionally omitted are Roy Bean, whom the author regards as a character unworthy of folk-hero status, and Pecos Bill, de- scribed as a comparatively recent non-folk invention. While the introduction laments that there has been a loss of zest and flavor in the transition from telling to printing, the author's long personal ex- perience with Texas tales and storytellers has en- abled him to preserve much of the original language and style. 5533. Dorson, Richard M. Bloodstoppers & bear- walkers; folk traditions of the Upper Peninsula. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1952. 305 p. 52—5394 GR110.M6D6 Michigan's Upper Peninsula retains a vast amount of traditional lore among each of the varied groups which make up its population. Emphasizing tales, but also including superstitions, customs, cures, food, songs, and other lore, Professor Dorson's study is based on his own collecting in the area. Com- mencing with the region's original inhabitants, the author examines "Indians Stuffed and Live," dis- crediting several of the romantic Indian legends con- trived for the tourist trade, but revealing many vasdy more fascinating tales he found still current among the Indians themselves. Part 2, examining some of Upper Michigan's Old-World traditions, describes the loup-garou and other beliefs and tales of the French -Canadian settlers; the language and customs of the "Cousin Jacks," the Michiganders of Cornish descent; tales and jokes of the Finns; and folk medicine among the Slovenians. Native lore, in- cluding detailed chapters on traditions of the miners, lumberjacks, and lake sailors, occupies part 3. 5534. Dorson, Richard M. Jonathan draws the long bow. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1946. 274 p. A46-4126 GR106.D6 "Note on the printed sources for New England folktales": p. 261-263. In a concise preface, the author defines his sphere of operation as New England folktales "lodged in print." Recognizing printed sources — memoirs, journals, local histories, newspapers, and other ephemera — as important sources and transmitters of popular tradition, Professor Dorson has located and organized a substantial corpus of New England folktale literature without resorting to oral sources. After an introductory chapter on the background of the New England storytelling tradition, the tales themselves are presented, with analytical and his- torical commentary, under the general headings of "Supernatural Stories," "Yankee Yarns," "Tall Tales," and "Local Legends." The last chapter, "Literary Folktales," observes that "a fertile folk- lore eventually infiltrates into and nourishes creative writings." Folkloristic influences and usages in the works of such New England writers as John G. C. Brainard, John Greenleaf Whittier, Daniel P. Thompson, Harriet Beecher Stowe, Robert P. Tris- tram Coffin, and Walter Hard are treated at length. 5535. Dorson, Richard M., ed. Negro folktales in Michigan. Cambridge, Harvard Uni- versity Press, 1956. 245 p. illus. 56-6516 GR103.D6 This book, the first collection and study of Negro folklore in the North, provides the editor with the opportunity to examine in detail the survival of rural Southern Negro traditions in urban areas of the North. Professor Dorson found that his best storytellers tended to be those with more immediate Southern connections, for the faster pace of the new society takes its toll. In the words of one of the storytellers, a hard-working and increasingly sue- FOLKLORE, FOLK MUSIC, FOLK ART / 795 cessful resident of Benton Harbor, Arkansas-born and Missouri-bred: "I haven't told any tales since I left Missouri; no time for it up here." After intro- ductory chapters which describe the towns visited in southern and central Michigan, the informants, and their storytelling art, 165 stories which Professor Dorson collected on paper or on tape recordings are presented. The classifications are: "Animal and Bird Stories"; tales about "Old Marster" and his crafty slave, John; tales about the colored man; "Horrors"; "Hoodoos and Two-Heads"; "Spirits and Hants"; "Witches and Wonders"; "The Lord and the Devil"; "Preachers"; "Liars and Irishmen"; and "Fairy Tales." The informants and the tale types and motifs are indexed, and there are detailed comparative notes. 5536. Duke University, Durham, N. C. Library. Fran\ C. Brown Collection of North Caro- lina Folklore. The Frank C. Brown Collection of North Carolina Folklore; the folklore of North Carolina, collected by Dr. Frank C. Brown during the years 1912 to 1943, in collaboration with the North Carolina Folklore Society. General editor: Newman Ivey White. Wood engravings by Clare Leighton. Durham, N. C, Duke University, 1952- 57. 4 v. illus. (Duke University publications) 52-10967 GR110.N8D8 The immense quantity of folklore materials which the late Frank C. Brown (1870-1943) col- lected in North Carolina during more than thirty years, in collaboration with the North Carolina Folklore Society, is the source for this largest of all publications of American folklore, a memorial to Professor Brown. Under the general editorship of the late Professor White, who died in 1948, and of Paull F. Baum, and with a staff of 9 associate editors who cover the many fields represented, first 5 and then 7 volumes were planned: 1, "Games and Rhymes, Beliefs and Customs, Riddles, Proverbs, Speech, Tales and Legends"; 2, "Folk Ballads"; 3, "Folk Songs"; 4, "The Music of the Ballads"; 5, "The Music of the Folk Songs"; 6 and 7, "Super- stitions." The last three have yet to appear. All of the materials published are given as they were col- lected from the folk tradition, and are accompanied by detailed documentation as to sources and his- tory and by bibliographical references. All of the materials are indexed for reference use. Professor White's "General Introduction" discusses the mean- ing and significance of folklore; describes the sur- prising extent to which ancient custom survives in 20th-century urban society; traces the history of folk- lore scholarship; and goes on to explain the "History, Nature, and Growth" of the Brown collection. Fur- ther introductions by the associate editors open vol- umes 2 and 4, and the six parts of volume 1. 5537. Espinosa, Jose Manuel. Spanish folk-tales from New Mexico. New York, American Folklore Society, Stechert and Co., agents, 1937. xix, 222 p. (Memoirs of the American Folklore Society, v. 30) 38-9815 GR1.A5, v. 30 "Printed in Germany." Bibliography: p. [187]— 188. Despite the change in New Mexico's government and economy when it became a part of the United States, in much of the State the old Spanish culture has remained unchanged. Moreover, the author tells us, many of the traditions of Old-World Spain are better preserved here than in the Spanish-Amer- ican countries to the South, where Indians have exercised a greater influence. The present collec- tion prints an assortment of 114 tales, taken down from the informants word for word, in the language in which the compiler heard them. There has been no attempt to employ phonetic notation, but the author has reproduced the authentic dialect and grammar in standard Spanish orthography. The subject classifications of the tales are: magic tales, religious tales, picaresque tales, romantic tales, short tales and anecdotes, and animal tales. The author's bibliographical notes are accompanied by English summaries of all the tales. This first detailed schol- arly study of the area now has a newer and larger companion in Juan Bautista Rael's Cuentos Es~ panoles de Colorado y Nuevo Mejico (Stanford, Calif., Stanford University Press, 1957. 2 v.). Like his predecessor, Mr. Rael gives his 518 tales in the original language, with introduction, notes, and summaries in English. 5538. Fife, Austin, and Alta (Stephens) Fife. Saints of sage & saddle; folklore among the Mormons. Bloomington, Indiana University Press, 1956. 367 p. illus. 56-11997 BX8611.F5 Isolated from outside influences by geographical and social distance, and bound together by their common faith, the followers of the prophet Joseph Smith were in a position to develop a folklore uniquely their own throughout the past century. Seeking the "authenticity not of history but of folk- lore," the authors reexamine many of the legends, customs, tales, and songs which grew up among the Mormons. Among the early Mormon leaders who assumed the stature of folk hero was the colorful cowboy-preacher, J. Golden Kimball, and a large number of traditional "J. Golden yarns" are in- cluded in the Fifes' chapter on "The Golden Leg- end." Tales, some humorous and some full of pathos and tragedy, are recorded, covering a wide range of subjects: the Saints' early persecution in the East and Middle West, their dealings with In- dians, the establishment of their great city in the desert, and plural wives. The many songs of the 796 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Mormon folk, which sympathetically interpret their theology and history, are dealt with in several chap- ters and at particular length in the epilogue: "Lyre of the Lord's Anointed." Among other aspects of Mormon folklore described are pioneer arts and crafts, illustrated by photographs. 5539. Gardner, Emelyn Elizabeth. Folklore from the Schoharie hills, New York. Ann Arbor, University of Michigan Press, 1937. xv, 351 p. illus. 37-7981 GR110.N7G3 Bibliography: p. 322-331. Only some 40 miles west of Albany, and 150 miles from New York City, in Schoharie County, the author found a region whose isolation from modern life and wealth in ancient folklore were comparable to the remotest parts of the Southern Appalachians or the Ozarks. Beginning in 1912 with the collec- tion of traditional ballads, Miss Gardner went on to discover a varied body of folklore which included, in addition to songs and ballads, legends, witchcraft, ghost stories, folk tales, children's rhymes and games, riddles, and superstitions. The folk-tale tradition was found to be particularly rich, as appears in the hundred pages devoted to it. After a general de- scription of the people and her experiences in getting acquainted with them, the author details at some length the history and topography of the region, the ethnic backgrounds of the inhabitants, and social conditions at the time of her study. 5540. Johnson, Guy Benton. Folk culture on St. Helena Island, South Carolina. Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina Press, 1930. 183 p. ([University of North Carolina. Social study series]) 3°-3 2 i35 E185.93.S7J67 Bibliography: p. 174-179. The Sea Islands, just off the coasts of South Caro- lina and Georgia, have retained a rather distinct Negro culture which has been studied at some length by anthropologists, sociologists, and folklorists. Other important folklore studies and collections are Elsie Clews Parsons' Fol\-Lore of the Sea Islands, South Carolina (Cambridge, Mass., 1923. xxx, 219 p. Memoirs of the American Folk-lore Society, v. 16), Nicholas Ballanta's Saint Helena Island Spiritu- als (New York, Schirmer, 1925. xviii, 93 p.), and Lydia Parrish's Slave Songs of the Georgia Sea Islands (New York, Creative Age Press, 1942. xxxi, 256 p.). The present study is one of a series jointly sponsored by the Institute for Research in Social Science of the University of North Carolina and the Social Science Research Council, which includes Thomas J. Woofter's Blac\ Yeomanry (New York, Holt, 1930. 291 p.) and which deals to a large ex- tent with the customs, folkways, and mores of St. Helena. Dr. Johnson's study takes three other branches of St. Helena folklore and examines them in detail. The first is the dialect of the Negroes of the area, Gullah, that singular English dialect known for its incomprehensibility to English-speaking out- siders. Dr. Johnson traces the cultural background of Gullah and describes its pronunciation and struc- ture. Folk songs, with particular emphasis on spirituals, are dealt with in the second chapter. Here, as in the language, the author finds a greater kinship with the white American tradition than with Africa. Folk tales, riddles, proverbs, toasts, rhymes, games, and beliefs conclude this detailed study. 5541. Kittredge, George Lyman. The old farmer and his almanack; being some observations on life and manners in New England a hundred years ago, suggested by reading the earlier numbers of Mr. Robert B. Thomas's Farmer's Almanac\, together with extracts curious, instructive, and en- tertaining, as well as a variety of miscellaneous matter. Boston, W. Ware, 1904. xiv, 403 p. 4-37 I2 9 F5.K62 Reasoning that nothing, with the possible excep- tion of a newspaper, "is more stricdy contemporary than an almanac," the great American literary scholar and teacher, Professor Kittredge of Harvard ( 1 860-1941), undertook a careful study of the cele- brated Farmer's Almanac\ as a means of gaining a personal, contemporary, and unembellished glimpse of life in New England at the end of the 18th century and through much of the 19th. Established in 1792 by Robert B. Thomas (1766-1846), it was compiled by him at West Boylston in the heart of Massachu- setts, until he died while reading proof for the 1847 issue. While intended primarily as a guide for the planting and harvesting of crops based on astro- nomical calculations, the almanac became much more. The "new, useful, and entertaining matter," which included general news items, proverbs, anec- dotes, and what today's newspapers call "household hints," helped to keep volumes of the Farmer's Almanac\ on coundess New England bookshelves, beside the Bible and Pilgrim's Progress. For the social historian, and even more for the folklorist, it is a treasured source of popular riddles, customs, anecdotes, folk cures, superstitions, plant and animal lore, and tales. Professor Kittredge's work first sketches the life of the Almanacks founder, and then proceeds to describe the Almanack's views on a wealth of subjects, with many extended quotations and facsimiles of the original illustrations. As Kit- tredge says in his introduction, "the temptation to go farther afield has been irresistible," resulting in fascinating historical discourses on witchcraft (a subject further developed in his Witchcraft in Old and New England (Cambridge, Harvard Univer- FOLKLORE, FOLK MUSIC, FOLK ART / 797 shy Press, 1929. 641 p.)), astrology, the calendar, and many specific beliefs and superstitions. 5542. Masterson, James R. Tall tales of Arkan- saw. Boston, Chapman & Grimes, 1943. 443 p. illus. 43-6036 PS266.A8M3 In arriving at a theory of Arkansas humor, Dr. Masterson finds that, like most American frontier humor, it manifests itself in boisterous wit, heavy satire, and tall talk, devoted to the themes of laziness, ignorance, squalor, illiteracy, boasting, drinking, fornicating, and other rough-and-ready pastimes from the half-horse, half-alligator tradition. This analysis, the subject of the present book's last chap- ter, is based on the large collection of tall tales and anecdotes which occupy the preceding 20. The author's study of Arkansas tall talk goes back as far as a pair of 18th-century French captains who sent home some highly imaginative accounts of their experiences among the Akan^as Indians, and the slightly later tales of Arkansas pioneer life recounted by Davy Crockett. The great line of Arkansas humorists goes back to Colonel Charles F. M. No- land and Major Thomas Bangs Thorpe, whose con- tributions to William T. Porter's Spirit of the Times, under the pseudonyms "Pete Whetstone" and "Tom Owen the Bee-Hunter," receive much of Dr. Mas- terson's attention. Other memorable chapters deal with "The Arkansas Traveler," the state's infa- mously slow trains, and a classic political oration in rebuttal of an attempt to change the name of Ar- kansas. The notes (p. 306-395) and bibliography (p. 396-425) are on a monumental scale. 5543- Randolph, Vance. Ozark superstitions. New York, Columbia University Press, 1947. 367 p. 47-3899 GR110.A8R3 Bibliography: p. [3413-351. The author introduces this collection with a re- futation of the city dweller's notion of the "hillbilly" as a "simple child of nature whose inmost thoughts and motivations may be read at a glance." On the contrary, "the hillman is secretive and sensitive" and "his mind moves in a tremendously involved system of signs and omens and esoteric auguries." Mr. Randolph deals with this complex system ac- cording to the various subjects and functions of the superstitions in the rural society, among them, weather signs, witches, cures, courtship and mar- riage, childbirth, ghosts, and death. Largely of British stock and descended from pioneers who came from the Southern Appalachians, the Ozark people are found to retain many of the Anglo- American traditions familiar to students of South- eastern folklore. To these customs have been added a very few from American Indian lore, such as the sprinkling of cornmeal into a coffin before burial. 5544. Randolph, Vance. We always lie to strangers; tall tales from the Ozarks. Illus- trated by Glen Rounds. New York, Columbia Uni- versity Press, 1 95 1. 309 p. 51-10537 PS558.A8R3 Bibliography: p. [2733-294. Confounding an outlander with a string of whoppers is not at all the same thing as lying, in the view of an Ozark taleteller. Mr. Randolph says that the real storytellers, whom he has known as their good friend and neighbor, are a singularly honest and dependable group. Tall tales are something else again, to be regarded as a prize form of enter- tainment, particularly when a credulous "furriner" is about. At such times it becomes a point of honor among the Ozark folk to support the contentions of one's fellows with encouragement, affirmation, and even a little embellishment. Mr. Randolph has heard many tall tales in the Ozarks and has recorded them diligently and accurately, preserving the true regional flavor. The yarns selected for this collec- tion have to do with razorback hogs and other "fabulous monsters," prodigious crops, hunting, supermen, and the weather. The large index in- cludes names and subjects, and the bibliography, also large, is extensively annotated. 5545. Randolph, Vance. Who blowed up the church house? and other Ozark folk tales. New York, Columbia University Press, 1952. 232 p. 52-4469 GR110.M77R3 After completing his book of tall tales, We Always Lie to Strangers (no. 5544) this indefatigable col- lector of Ozark lore set about publishing a series devoted to the longer tales of the Ozarks. The tide entered above was followed by two more from the same publisher: The Devil's Pretty Daughter (1955. 239 p.) and The Talking Turtle (1957. 226 p.). Mr. Randolph's method in gathering his stories has been to establish them carefully, either with the aid of a recording machine, the shorthand transcriptions of an assistant, or his own notes. Pointing to the greater freedom a storyteller takes in his narrative, the collector has not attempted the strictly verbatim repetition desirable in the publica- tion of songs and rhymes. The changes are minor, however, and the idiom is retained in all its fresh- ness. Other changes — literary coloring, the com- position of versions from different sources, and so forth — are not indulged in at all. These books do much to bridge the gap between the needs of the professional folklorist and the layman. The stories themselves, regardless of their careful documenta- tion, are good for plenty of laughs, and it may be mentioned that Mr. Randolph has provided a large amount of authentic material for radio comedians and comic strips. Valuable to students and scholars 798 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES are the detailed comparative notes citing European and American parallels on each of the tales by Dr. Herbert Halpert. All three volumes are illustrated by Glen Rounds. 5546. Roberts, Leonard W., ed. South from Hell- fer-Sartin; Kentucky mountain folk tales. Lexington, University of Kentucky Press, 1955. 287 p. 55-7002 GR110.K4R6 The 105 tales in this collection, many of them with one or more variants, were collected by the author in the hill country of eastern Kentucky. This isolated, strongly Anglo-American folk cul- ture yielded many tales with familiar Old-World analogues. Some have close counterparts in the collections of Grimm, and there are a number of the popular "Jack Tales." Arranged accord- ing to the Aarne-Thompson classification, the book is divided into "Animal Tales," "Ordinary Tales," "Jokes and Anecdotes," and "Myths and Local Legends." Significantly, there is only one animal tale, because of the relative scarcity in the area of Negroes, in whose folklore animals play a more important role. The author collected most of the tales with the aid of a tape recorder, which insured the accuracy of his transcriptions. Appendixes give the sources of each tale and list motif numbers. 5547. Sale, John B. The tree named John. With twenty-two silhouettes by Joseph Cranston Jones. Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina Press, 1929. 151 p. illus. 29-20773 GR103.S3 The tree named John was an elm. Aunt Bet- sey had selected it as the name tree for her mis- tress' newborn grandson because the tall straight sapling was tough, an early budder, and a fast grower — good omens for the child's future. This book tells the story of the child's rearing, in which Aunt Betsey, assisted by the other plantation Ne- groes, played a most important part. In describ- ing his childhood and youth on a Mississippi plan- tation around the turn of the century, the author describes many of the folkways of the Negroes he knew: superstitions, proverbs, religion, and tales — including some of the animal tales popularized in Joel Chandler Harris' Uncle Remus stories. 5548. Thompson, Harold W. Body, boots & britches. Philadelphia, Lippincott, 1940. 530 p. 40-2174 F120.T55 The title is a Dutchess County expression roughly corresponding to "lock, stock and barrel." While Professor Thompson denies that any one volume could sum up the lore and legendry of New York State, "body, boots and britches," his book is a big step in that direction. The legendary figures of New York come from a wide range of ethnic and occupational groups, and include pirates, Indian fighters, outlaws, sailors, whalers, "canawlers," soldiers, and many others. Some of these tales and heroes have found their way into American letters, among the latter Tom Quick, Tim Murphy, Nat Foster, and Nick Stoner, "Injun fighters" all, whose exploits, real and legendary, probably influenced Cooper's "Leatherstocking." David Harum, too, has his traditional New York State counterpart in David Hannum, celebrated "hoss trader" and per- petrator of the still-remembered Cardiff Giant hoax. Ballads, proverbs, place names, tall tales, and other pieces of New York State lore also form a part of the author's panorama. He has not forgotten the interests of scholars and has been careful to list the sources, printed and oral, from which he and his students have drawn. His informal presentation and humorous style make this book unsually attractive to readers. C. Folksongs and Ballads: General 5549. Buchanan, Annabel (Morris), ed. Folk hyms of America. New York, Fischer, 1938. xl, 94 p. 38—39313 M2117.B912F6 Fischer edition, no. 7375. Bibliography: p. xxxv-xl. Except for the efforts of a few scholars like George Pullen Jackson (nos. 5554-5555 and 5577), religious American folksongs have yet to be ac- corded the scholarly and popular attention which their secular counterparts have received. This collection of 50 folk-hymns with piano accompani- ment is well suited to popular use and makes a useful supplement to the more academic collec- tions and studies of Professor Jackson. The hymns themselves are preceded by a sketch of the back- ground of American folk hymnody, and are pro- vided with historical and analytical notes. The old modal tunes, many of them traceable to secu- lar British ballads and songs, are music of great beauty, and the texts, some from the pens of known authors like Charles Wesley and Isaac Watts and some traditional, are an impressive evidence of the religious convictions of our pioneers. The piano arrangements are smooth and polished, but simple FOLKLORE, FOLK MUSIC, FOLK ART / 799 enough (mostly in four-part chorale style) to fit the simple eloquence of the verses and melodies. 5550. Coffin, Tristram P. The British traditional ballad in North America. Philadelphia, American Folklore Society, 1950. xvi, 188 p. (Publications of the American Folklore Society. Bibliographical series, v. 2) 51-1318 ML3553.C6 Bibliography: p. 171-181. An important part of American folk music has its roots in the British Isles, and for some 70 years a major field of scholarly investigation has been the British ballad, or narrative song. A great many books and articles have been devoted to more specific definitions and accounts of the Anglo- American ballad. The great American work on British balladry, around which subsequent studies have oriented themselves, is Francis James Child's The English and Scottish Popular Ballads (Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1883-98. 5 v.), which has re- cently undergone a modern reprinting by pho- tographic process (New York, Folklore Press, 1956. 5 v. in 3.). A one-volume abridgment, edited by Helen Child Sargent and George Lyman Kittredge and first issued in 1904, is also available (Boston, Houghton Mifflin, c i932. xxxi, 729 p.). Since Child's time numerous books and collections have been published which discuss and give evidence of British ballads in all the English-speaking parts of the world. Two recent American collections which compare ballads of the Old and New Worlds are MacEdward Leach's The Ballad Book. (New York, Harper, 1955. 842 p.) and Albert B. Friedman's The Viking Boo\ of Folk Ballads of the English- Speaking World (New York, Viking Press, 1956. xxxv, 473 p.). These books, as has been custom- ary with modern ballad scholarship, include bal- lads of British origin which are not contained in Child's collection, as well as a large number of native American ballads. The present work is primarily a bibliographical key to Child ballad scholarship in America. Its greatest value is, Mr. Coffin points out on his introduction, as a research aid to the ballad scholar, "particularly the student of ballad variation." "A Critical, Bibliographical Study of the Traditional Ballad in America" (p. 29-162), in addition to comprehensive references, provides summaries of the principal "story types," and discussions of pertinent problems and theories arising out of each ballad. An introductory essay describes variation in traditional ballads, both with respect to altered words and phrases, which Mr. Coffin calls "textual variation," and to major ex- tensions, abbreviations, or alterations in the basic plot, which he calls "story change." Also included is the author's index to borrowing in the Child ballads which was previously published in The Journal of American Folklore; it traces the move- ment of lines and stanzas from one ballad to another. 5551. Doerflinger, William Main, comp. Shanty- men and shantyboys; songs of the sailor and lumberman. New York, Macmillan, 1951. xxiii, 374 p. illus. 5!-577 M1977.S2D57 Music editors: Samuel P. Bayard, Hally Wood, and Joseph Wood. Bibliography: p. 363-371. Despite their opposed elements, the shantyman of the sailing vessels and the shantyboy of the lum- ber camps have a great deal in common. Both lived lives of hard physical work and, far from civiliza- tion and its pleasures, both were forced to provide their own entertainment in off hours. Moreover, technological advances have condemned the voca- tions and traditions of both to a progressive extinc- tion which is now virtually complete. By faithfully recording the recollections of the last of the oldtime sailors and lumbermen and adding his own histori- cal commentary, Mr. Doerflinger has compiled a book which is as entertaining as it is authentic. The sea shanty is a functional song used to set and main- tain the pace of group tasks on board ship. The author organizes his chapters on the shanty accord- ing to function, giving many examples of the short- haul, halyard, and capstan shanties. Ballads and other songs sung for entertainment in the forecastle round out the nautical portion of the collection. The shantyboy 's name comes not from a work song but from his log huts or shanties. The songs and ballads used for lumber camp entertainment origi- nated in Maine and the Maritime Provinces of Can- ada, and eventually spread to the Great Lakes, the Northwest coast, and wherever the jacks went to work the big woods. For both groups unaccom- panied tunes and complete texts, often in more than one version, are given in a well-documented and accurate form. The illustrations are plentiful and the detailed plan of a square-rigger is especially helpful. 5552. Greenway, John. American folksongs of protest. Philadelphia, University of Penn- sylvania Press, 1953. 348 p. 53-6929 ML3551.G7 "Musical transcriptions [unacc. melodies] by Ed- mund F. Soule." "Songs of social and economic protest on rec- ords": p. 311-327. Bibliography: p. 329-338. An interesting aspect of American history is re- flected in this study of songs of social and political unrest. The Knights of Labor, the Pullman strike of 1893, Coxey's Army, the I. W. W., the Negro's 800 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES struggles before and after emancipation, and many other social movements and events are represented in the large collection of topical songs which Mr. Greenway has assembled. Topical songs with po- litical and social "messages" have never had a very secure position in the folk repertory. A few songs left over from political campaigns and labor move- ments have caught on and been preserved in the oral tradition, but for the most part such songs rarely live long after the events which produced them. It is probable that many of the songs in this collection were contrived by fairly sophisticated in- tellects, and it is doubtful whether most of these got much closer to the folk than the printed song sheets and books distributed at meetings and ral- lies. Since oral perpetuation is implicit in the usual concept of folk music, some readers will feel that "American Songs of Protest," omitting any invo- cation of the folk tradition, would have been a more appropriate title. In his introduction, Mr. Green- way advances what is probably the best possible ar- gument on behalf of protest songs as folklore. Those who find it unconvincing can still regard these songs and Mr. Greenway's contribution as of genuine importance to the study of American social history. 5553- Ives, Burl, comp. The Burl Ives songbook; American song in historical perspective. Illus. by Lamartine Le Goullon and Robert J. Lee. New York, Ballantine Books, 1953. 303 p. M53-555 M1629.I9B8 "List of Burl Ives recordings": p. 297-300. This handsome collection of songs with piano accompaniments and guitar chords will be popular for years to come among all who enjoy singing for the fun of it. As the subtitle implies, the contents are arranged in a roughly historical order, with chapters for the following epochs: "Colonial Amer- ica, 1620-1775"; "Revolutionary America, 1775- 1790"; "The Growing Country: On the Sea, 1790- 1850"; "Religious, Professional and Folk Singing, 1800-1850"; and "The Frontiers of America, 1800- 1850." Included are many of the most popular Anglo-American ballads and lyric songs — "Barbara Allen," "Edward," "The Golden Vanity," "The Fox," and "Paper of Pins," to name a few — as well as such native products as "Springfield Mountain," "Careless Love," and "The Grey Goose." To round out the historical perspective, there are a few songs not stricdy in the folk tradition, but popular in their time and since. Among them are William Bil- lings' hymn "Chester," Francis Hopkinson's "My Days Have Been So Wondrous Free," and Henry Clay Work's "Grandfather's Clock." The Burl Ives Songboo\ makes no claim to scholarly accuracy or completeness. The commentary is not very useful for study and the texts and melodies have been freely altered to suit the editor's taste. What it does is to present, in a highly singable form, some of the favorite songs of America's most popular ballad singer, as he sings them. The piano arrangements were made by Albert M. Hague. Mr. Ives' Way- faring Stranger (New York, Whittlesey House, 1948. 253 p.), an anecdotal autobiography, de- scribes his Illinois childhood (he was born in 1909) and his struggles as a music student and art-singer before he achieved success with the songs of his own family's traditional heritage. His description of life in a rural Midwestern community is especially entertaining and colorful. 5554. Jackson, George Pullen, ed. Spiritual folk- songs of early America; two hundred and fifty tunes and texts with an introd. and notes. [2d ed.] Locust Valley, N. Y., J. J. Augustin, 1953. 254 p. illus. M53-861 M1629.J147S85 1953 Bibliography: p. [24i]-244. Originally published in 1937, this was the first of three valuable collections of white spirituals prepared by Professor Jackson. The others are Down-East Spirituals and Others, 2d ed. (Locust Valley, N. Y., J. J. Augustin, 1953. 296 p.), the first edition of which appeared in 1943, and Another Sheaf of White Spirituals (Gainesville, University of Florida Press, 1952. 233 p.). The three volumes bring a total of more than 900 religious folksongs and their unaccompanied melodies into print. The material is organized into three types of sacred vocal music: religious ballads, folk-hymns, and revival spiritual songs. The first group is comprised of narrative solo songs, many of which, like "The Cherry Tree Carol" and "Dives and Lazarus," come from ancient British tradition. The folk-hymns are largely con- gregational songs of praise, while the revival spirit- ual songs are what the author describes as "sung-to- pieces hymns," a fragmentary type of congregational song which evolved a simple repetitive form well suited to the revivalist camp meetings on the 19th century frontier. Within each of the three groups, the songs are arranged according to the modal and melodic kinship of their tunes. 5555. Jackson, George Pullen. White and Negro spirituals, their life span and kinship, tracing 200 years of untrammeled song making and singing among our country folk, with 116 songs as sung by both races. New York, J. J. Augustin, 1944. 349 p. illus. 44-39 2 3 M L355 I J I 7 For many years the spiritual has commonly been regarded as an exclusively Negro form of musical expression of purely African lineage. The lifelong studies of the late George Pullen Jackson (1874- 1953) have contributed immeasurably to a reassess- FOLKLORE, FOLK MUSIC, FOLK ART / 8oi ment of this concept. The aim of this work is to demonstrate the Negro's debt to the hymnody of white pioneer America. The book is divided into two large parts, the first of which traces the develop- ment of congregational singing practices among the Methodists, Baptists, Shakers, and the many religious sects, large and small, which appeared on America's frontiers. The second part analyzes the body of Negro religious folksong in relation to the white tradition and describes many textual, melodic, and rhythmic peculiarities of the Negro variants of white spirituals. The most convincing evidence for Pro- fessor Jackson's thesis is massed together in Chapter XV, "The Tune Comparative List," which presents 116 white melodies side by side with their Negro counterparts. 5556. Laws, George Malcolm. Native American balladry; a descriptive study and a biblio- graphical syllabus. Philadelphia, American Folk- lore Society, 1950. 276 p. (Publications of the American Folklore Society. Bibliographical series, v. 1) S 1 '^^ ML3551.L3 Bibliography: p. 267-270. The classic folk-ballads which our early settlers brought from the British Isles have always over- shadowed the narrative songs which originated on this side of the Adantic, in the eyes of collectors and scholars and even of the folk themselves. Mr. Laws' catalog of native American ballads still current in the oral tradition clearly shows that the indigenous product, while secondary, nevertheless constitutes a notable portion of the living folk tradition. His text puts forward a general definition of the ballad as dramatic narrative and continues with chapters on several aspects of American ballads, including the American "ballad makers," about whom much more is known than about their early British counterparts, and some pertinent remarks on the ballad as a record of fact. The classified catalog of American ballads in the appendices makes Mr. Laws' book a valuable reference tool. The first appendix lists the ballads still to be found in oral tradition and gives brief summaries, a stanza or two of text, ex- tensive bibliographical references, and notes on his- tory and distribution. The ballads have been classified, according to topics and functions, in nine categories: "War Ballads," "Ballads of Cowboys and Pioneers," "Ballads of Lumberjacks," "Ballads of Sailors," "Ballads about Criminals and Outlaws," "Murder Ballads," "Ballads of Tragedies and Disasters," "Ballads on Various Topics," and "Bal- lads of the Negro." The second appendix gives a similar treatment to ballads about whose currency the author is doubtful. There follow lists of tradi- tional songs which, for want of strong narrative elements or for other reasons, fail to qualify as bal- lads, and lists of songs of probable Old-World origin. Together with T. P. Coffin's The British Traditional Ballad in North America (no. 5550) and Mr. Laws' American Balladry from British Broadsides (Phila- delphia, American Folklore Society, 1957. 315 p. Publications of the . . . Society. Bibliographical and special series, v. 8), this work completes a gen- eral bibliographical survey of living American bal- ladry undertaken by the American Folklore Society. 5557. Lomax, John A. Adventures of a ballad hunter. Sketches by Ken Chamberlain. New York, Macmillan, 1947. 302 p. 47-30155 ML429.U68A3 John Avery Lomax (1872-1948) began to collect and study the traditional songs of America's frontier in his youth during the closing decades of the last century — long before most Americans regarded their folk music and literature as of any importance. On the advice of one of his professors, the disillusioned young Lomax destroyed his first collection of cow- boy song and ballad texts as worthless. It was not until Lomax went to Harvard and attracted the attention of Barrett Wendell and George Lyman Kittredge that his efforts were recognized. The rest of his life was devoted to gathering songs from Western prairies and saloons, Southern fields and prison camps, and many other areas of America. His extensive collection became the nucleus of the Archive of Folk Song in the Library of Congress. Adventures of a Ballad Hunter is only secondarily an autobiography; primarily it is a record of Lomax's many years' experience as a collector of folk music. Huddie "Leadbelly" Ledbetter, James "Iron Head" Baker, Dock Reed, and Vera Hall are a few of the folk-singing personalities whom Lomax discovered and who appear in its pages. It is written in an in- formal style which makes it attractive to general readers as well as to students who wish to benefit from the author's experience in the field. 5558. Lomax, John A., comp. American ballads and folk songs, collected and compiled by John A. Lomax and Alan Lomax; with a foreword by George Lyman Kittredge. New York, Macmil- lan, 1935. xxxix, 625 p. 38-9495 M1629.L85A52 Bibliography compiled by Harold W. Thompson: p. 613-621. The nearly 300 pieces in this popular collection (originally published in 1934) represent a wide variety of spirituals, white and Negro, as well as a large assortment of ballads; lyric and social songs; songs of the cowboy, lumberman, sailor, and miner; and the Negro's work songs, hollers, and blues. A few venture beyond the English language, being samples of Creole Negro and Spanish-American 802 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES lyrics. The principal source is the oral tradition it- self, from which the Lomaxes made sound record- ings, but a few of the songs are taken from other published collections. For the sake of completeness the editors have made up some of the texts by putting together stanzas from more than one source. The tunes, transcribed by Mary E. Gresham, are presented without instrumental arrangements or harmonizations. An important complementary col- lection by the same authors is Our Singing Country; a Second Volume of American Ballads and Fol\ Songs (New York, Macmillan, 1941. xxxiv, 416 p.). Here the topics are approximately the same as in the earlier volume, with the addition of some un- usual items such as Negro songs from the Bahamas, French songs and ballads from southwestern Louisiana, and instrumental dance tunes. The tunes for the later book were transcribed by Mrs. Ruth Crawford Seeger, who supplies a noteworthy introduction on the principles of authentic transcrip- tion and performance. 5559. Lomax, John A., comp. Best loved Ameri- can folk songs (Folk song: U.S.A.) Col- lected, adapted, and arr. by John A. Lomax & Alan Lomax. Music arrangements by Charles Seeger & Ruth Seeger. [4th ed.] New York, Grosset & Dunlap, 1954, c i947- xvi, 407 p. M54-2021 M1629.L85F6 1954 First published in 1947 under the title Fol\ Song: U. S. A., this collection has since enjoyed a steady popularity. Intended as an album for singing, Best Loved American Fol^ Songs differs from the au- thors' earlier collections by the inclusion of piano accompaniments and a somewhat larger format. John Lomax and his son Alan selected what they considered the 111 best American folksongs. The categories into which they are divided are songs of children and animals, lovers, dancers, soldiers, sail- ors, lumbermen and pioneers, cowboys, farmers, railroadmen, bad men and jailbirds, and spirituals. The emphasis is strongly on native American ma- terials rather than imported British or foreign- language songs. Mr. and Mrs. Seeger have ar- ranged the music for voice and piano, with guitar symbols, in a simple folk-like style. Songs as well as sections are provided with informative introduc- tions. 5560. Lomax, John A., comp. Cowboy songs and other frontier ballads. Rev. and enl. Col- lected by John A. Lomax and Alan Lomax. Edward N. Waters, music editor. New York, Macmillan, 1945. xxxviii, 431 p. 46-1145 PS595.C6L6 1945 M1629.L85C7 1945 The first edition of John Lomax's Cowboy Songs appeared in 19 10. Since then it has undergone a number of printings and, in the present revised form, remains an indispensable source on the songs of the West. "Home on the Range," "The Buffalo Skinners," and "The Dreary Black Hills" are a few of the songs which this historic collection first brought to public attention. The improvements in the present edition are many. There are nearly twice as many songs. The rather haphazard ar- rangement of the first edition has been replaced by a subject-function classification with such headings as "Up the Train," "The Round-Up," "Dodge City, the End of the Trail," and "Campfire and Bunk- house." The former practice of supplying piano accompaniment for the few melodies has been dis- carded by the music editor, Edward N. Waters, in favor of printing the melodies unaccompanied. This accomplishes the twofold purpose of allowing space for more music and freeing the songs from arbitrary harmonic confines. 5561. Odum, Howard W., and Guy B. Johnson. The Negro and his songs; a study of typical Negro songs in the South. Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina Press, 1925. 306 p. 2 5-i3744 ML3556.O3 This study is one of a series on the story of the American Negro, which also includes the same authors' Negro Workaday Songs (1926. 278 p.) and Newbell Niles Puckett's Fol\ Beliefs of the Southern Negro (1926. xiv, 644 p.), both from the same publisher. The Negro and His Songs studies the Negro singer and his religious, social, and work songs. The song texts and the Negro's attitude toward them are analyzed with particular emphasis on their sociological significance. No music is included, but there are texts of more than two hundred songs, and an index to them. 5562. Sandburg, Carl, ed. The American song- bag. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1927. xxiii, 495 p. illus. 28-681 M1629.S213A5 "An American bookshelf of song": p. xii-xiii. In his introduction, Carl Sandburg calls this col- lection "a ragbag of strips, stripes, and streaks of color." This assemblage of "280 songs, ballads, ditties, brought together from all regions of Amer- ica," was for the benefit of everyone who enjoys singing and, even though 30 years and many other similar collections have come and gone since it first appeared, The American Songbag is still foremost in the affections of those who sing for relaxation and delight. All manner of songs are included; there are the ancient "Tarnished Love Tales": "Bar- bara Allen," "Pretty Polly," and "The Maid Freed FOLKLORE, FOLK MUSIC, FOLK ART / 803 from the Gallows"; several musical installments of the saga of "Frankie and Her Man"; the shape-note hymns from The Missouri Harmony; and the "Darned Fool Ditties"; "The Horse Named Bill" and "Abdul, the Bulbul Ameer." Soldiers and sail- ors, lumbermen and railroad men, convicts and hobos, and many more groups have contributed to the making of The American Songbag. The piano arrangements have been made by a number of dif- ferent musicians in varying styles, while a few of the songs are appropriately left unaccompanied. 5563. Seeger, Ruth (Crawford) American folk songs for children in home, school and nurs- ery school; a book for children, parents and teach- ers. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1948. 190 p. 48-9384 M1629.S4A5 Both as a mother and a teacher, the late Ruth Crawford Seeger had a great deal of firsthand ex- perience in using folk music in the development and education of young children. More concerned with such applications than with folklore research, Mrs. Seeger's detailed notes discuss the use of the songs at home and in school, and include suggestions for improvised games and the playing of the piano ac- companiments. The songs come both from pre- viously published collections and direcdy from the oral tradition. They are indexed not only by first line and title, but by subject (birds, food, snow, sunshine, etc.) and rhythmic applications (clapping, running, skipping, etc.). Both this collection and two supplementary ones, Animal Folf{ Songs for Children (Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1950. 80 p.), and American Fo/^ Songs for Christmas (Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1953. 80 p.), are illustrated with woodcuts by Barbara Cooney, and arranged with simple and idiomatic piano accom- paniments by Mrs. Seeger. The three collections have become popular with adults as well as chil- dren. 5564. White, Newman I. American Negro folk- songs. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1928. 501 p. 28-21279 ML3556.W4 Bibliography: p. [469]~48o. The large number of song texts and documentary notes make this one of the most useful works on Afro-American folksong. The first chapter out- lines the history of Negro music in America, with special emphasis on the changing attitudes of the white man, as well as the Negro, toward the music. Although there have been many significant contri- butions to Negro folksong scholarship since 1928, the late Professor White's summary of the several views obtaining up to that time is still a concise and pertinent introduction to the subject. In the controversy over ancestral African versus Christian white influences, the author tends to favor the side of New World assimilation later championed by George Pullen Jackson (no. 5554), and takes issue with the racial views earlier set forth by Henry Edward Krehbiel in his important study, Afro- American Folksongs (New York, Schirmer, 1914. 176 p.). The songs and commentary are arranged according to function ("Religious Songs," "Social Songs," "Work Songs"), and subject matter ("Songs about Women," "Songs about Animals," "Recent Events," "The Seamier Side"), with a few special categories reflecting social trends ("The Re- action from Religion," "Race Consciousness"). White's main concern was with the texts of the songs, and his conclusions are based on the literary rather than the musical aspects of the songs. The appendixes include 15 tunes, however, in addition to some interesting specimens of Negro folksong texts from pre-Civil War sources. D. Folksongs and Ballads: Local 5565. Arnold, Byron, comp. Folksongs of Ala- bama. University, Ala., University of Ala- bama Press, 1950. 193 p. 50-14684 M1629.A77F6 Bibliography: p. 187-188. Mr. Arnold collected the 153 songs in this book from Alabama singers during the summer of 1945. In his introduction and notes the editor describes a relatively current oral song tradition, whose rich- ness is well proved by the songs themselves. Un- like most folksong collections, which group the songs in historical perspective or classify them ac- cording to plot or function, the present work focuses its attention on the singers. Mr. Arnold treats each singer individually, sketching his background and, in many cases, including a photograph. He follows with a selection from the singer's repertory, in the order in which they were sung to him. By this method not only the informants, but the social char- acteristics of this folk-song-producing area, are clearly oudined. The wide diversity in social, eco- nomic, and educational status represented by the singers is noteworthy. The songs, for all of which tunes are provided, represent some of the most wide- 8o 4 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES spread ballads of British and native origin, together with a sampling of standard play-party songs and Negro spirituals. 5566. Barry, Phillips, Fannie Hardy Eckstorm, and Mary Winslow Smyth. British ballads from Maine; the development of popular songs with texts and airs; versions of ballads included in Pro- fessor F. J. Child's collection. New Haven, Yale University Press, 1929. xlvi, 535 p. 29-20553 ML3553.B28 PR1181.B48 Phillips Barry (1 880-1937) was one of the earli- est and most learned pioneers in American folksong scholarship. Although most of his work centered around the British ballad in New England, the many articles he contributed to periodicals such as the Journal of American Folklore, the Bulletin of the Fol\-Song Society of the Northeast (of which he was founder and editor), and the Southern Folk- lore Quarterly, cover a wide range of investigation. He never wrote a general book on American folk music, but some of his articles provided the mate- rial for such a work after his death. Edited by Dr. George Herzog and Herbert Halpert, Barry's Fol\ Music in America (New York, U. S. Works Prog- ress Administration, Federal Theatre Project, 1939. 113 p.) was distributed in mimeographed form and, despite its comparative rarity today, remains a much- used work of scholarly theory and reference. Fifty- six Child ballads, with variants, make up the major portion of British Ballads from Maine, which Barry prepared with collaborators. In addition to these, there are eight ballads which the editors describe as "secondary" — distinct ballads related to or de- rived from Child ballads (see no. 5550 note). "Traces" or vestiges of some ballads in the memory of the region's inhabitants, with "jury texts" sup- plied by the editors, are separated from the more or less complete ballads actually collected, and placed in the final section of the book. The notes, which are both historical and analytical, are informative and detailed. Most of the melodies were tran- scribed by Dr. George Herzog. Barry's introduc- tory essay discusses the music of the ballads, with attention to such stylistic features of ballad melody as mode and structure. 5567. Beck, Earl Clifton. Lore of the lumber camps. [Rev. and enl. ed. Ann Arbor] University of Michigan Press, 1948. 348 p. illus. (University of Michigan studies and publications) 49-7123 M1977.L8B4 1948 Bibliography: p. 343-344. For the greater part of the 19th century, the Michigan woods were the center of America's log- ging industry. In the 1830's, 40's, and 50's, lum- bermen took part in the general Westward mi- gration and brought to the forests around the Great Lakes the songs, legends, and traditions of the New England lumber woods. The present book is a revised enlargement of Dr. Beck's Songs of the Michigan Lumberjacks (1941), but the em- phasis is still on songs and on Michigan. Of the 118 songs and ballads which describe the work, the leisure, the tragedy, and the humor of the lum- berman's life, 23 are provided with music. The final chapter recounts some of the jacks' favorite tall tales, including several redoubtable exploits of Paul Bunyan. The literature on lumberjack songs is small; Franz L. Rickaby's earlier Ballads and Songs of the Shanty boy (Cambridge, Harvard Uni- versity Press, 1926. xli, 244 p.) and Phillips Barry's The Maine Woods Songster (Cambridge, Powell Print. Co., 1939. 102 p.) supplement Dr. Beck's Michigan collection. An introduction on the history of Michigan's lumber industry, concise descriptive headnotes for each song, and a profu- sion of photographs and drawings of log brands add considerably to the book's usefulness. 5568. Belden, Henry Marvin, ed. Ballads and songs collected by the Missouri Folklore Society. [2d ed. Columbia, University of Mis- souri] 1955. xx, 532 p. (University of Missouri studies, v. 15, no. 1) 55-7519 ML3551.B35B26 1955 5569. Randolph, Vance, ed. Ozark folksongs, collected and edited by Vance Randolph; edited for the State Historical Society of Missouri, by Floyd C. Shoemaker [and] Frances G. Ember- son. Columbia, State Historical Society of Mis- souri, 1946-50. 4 v. illus. 47-1554 M1629.R2309 Bibliography: p. xvi-xx. In collaboration with the Missouri Folk-Lore So- ciety, the late Professor Belden (1 865-1954) and his pupils began collecting the material represented in the first title in 1903. The result of many years of field work and transcription is one of the most valuable of the scholarly collections devoted to a specific region. The book was originally published in 1940; the second edition incorporates a few cor- rections and additions which Belden had made in his personal copy. More than 300 songs were found in all parts of Missouri, representing a wide va- riety of traditions. As has become customary, the first part of the collection is devoted to Missouri versions of the Child ballads (see no. 5550 note), and the next to other ballads of British origin. The later journalistic ballads, topical songs, and other indigenous items are treated at length, and chil- FOLKLORE, FOLK MUSIC, FOLK ART / 805 dren's games and play-party songs, religious songs, and a few songs imported into southeastern Mis- souri from France round out the geographical and stylistic representation. Professor Belden was pri- marily concerned with texts, but realized the vital role of music in the ballads and included some tunes which had been transcribed by his students. Vance Randolph's Ozar\ Folksongs complements Belden's volume with an exhaustive collection from the highlands of Missouri and Arkansas. Contain- ing 883 songs in 1644 versions, 828 of which are given with unaccompanied melodies, these four impressive volumes prove to be the largest of all published American folksong collections, regional or general. Concerned with ballads and songs of British origin, the first volume prints the Ozark versions of 41 Child ballads and of 89 later im- portations. The succeeding volumes deal with na- tive songs and ballads of the West, the Civil War, and the Negro, and temperance songs, game and play-party songs, and religious songs. A general introductory chapter in the first volume prescribes effective procedures in the technique and diplo- macy of field collecting, a topic on which the author is a high-ranking expert. Substantial headnotes to the songs supply general background and bibliog- raphy. The last volume concludes with indexes of titles, first lines, towns, and contributors. 5570. Botkin, Benjamin A. The American play- party song, with a collection of Oklahoma texts and tunes. Lincoln, Neb., 1937. 400 p. 38-1348 GV1771.B58 1937 Thesis (Ph. D.)-University of Nebraska, 1931. Published also as the University Studies of the University of Nebraska, vol. 37, no. 1-4. Bibliography: p. 383-389. The play-party is a completely American term designating a peculiarly American institution. In the preface Dr. Botkin points out that although dance-songs are well-nigh universal, there is noth- ing quite like the play-party outside of America. Several factors went into its making. Fiddles, fifes, and other musical instruments were often scarce items on the American frontier, so that dance music had to be provided by the dancers' own voices. True dancing, however, was taboo because of the religious beliefs of many of the pioneers. The sim- ple rhythmic stepping, skipping, running, and jumping patterns of the play-party provided a vig- orous sort of recreation which took the place of dancing. The first half of The American Play- Party Song is a detailed historical and stylistic analysis. Dr. Botkin carefully traces the play- party's connection with game, song, and dance, and points out the improvisatory elements of the texts, which intermingle snatches from traditional ballads and songs with incongruous bits of square-dance calls, spontaneous jingles, and nonsense syllables. Part two is devoted to 128 play-party song texts, 62 of them with tunes. Dr. Botkin gathered his material in Oklahoma, but his findings and ex- amples have nationwide application and signifi- cance. The notes accompanying the songs and their variants give full data on the informants, directions for playing the games, and bibliographi- cal references. Tunes, tides, first lines, subjects, and authorities are meticulously indexed, making this a valuable reference book as well as a defini- tive study of a neglected aspect of American folk recreation. 5571. Brewster, Paul G., ed. Ballads and songs of Indiana. Bloomington, Indiana Univer- sity, 1940. 376 p. (Indiana University publication. Folklore series, 1) 40-28299 PS571.I6B7 ML3551.B83B2 Bibliography: p. 16-21. Although Mr. Brewster observes that "ballad- singing, as an active tradition, is practically non- existent in Indiana," this collection from one of America's less isolated regions indicates that con- siderable vestiges of such a tradition have survived. Of the 100 pieces the first 27 are Child ballads (see no. 5550 note), with numerous variants. The other types included are later ballads and lyric songs, of both British and native origin, game songs, and a carol — "The Twelve Days of Christmas." Most of Mr. Brewster's collecting was done in the southern part of the State, and all of the songs are from white, Anglo-Saxon tradition. There are 37 unaccompanied tunes. 5572. Cox, John Harrington, ed. Folk-songs of the South, collected under the auspices of the West Virginia Folk-Lore Society. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1925. xxxi, 545 p. 25-4180 PS551.C6 ML3561.C8 Although the tide and much of the material in the collection apply to the South in general, this collection is focused upon West Virginia, where Dr. Cox was a professor. The introduction describes the formation of the West Virginia Folk-Lore So- ciety and its collecting activities preparatory to the publication of this book. About 35 of the 185 songs are Child ballads (see no. 5550 note). These figures do not take into account the numerous ver- sions of many songs and ballads which are in- cluded. Miss Lydia I. Hinkel of West Virginia University edited the 29 tunes which are appended to the collection (p. 519-532). Photographs of 8o6 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES many of the informants are included which, to- gether with some introductory remarks about them, allow us to see the ballad-singers of the area as real persons. 5573. Eddy, Mary O., comp. Ballads and songs from Ohio. Introd. by James Holly Han- ford. New York, J. }. Augustin, 1939. xxvii, 330 p. 39-25130 M1629.E24B2 Bibliography: p. xxv-xxvii. For the most part this collection is based on an intensive study of a relatively small area of north- eastern Ohio. The author collected the songs and ballads from oral and manuscript sources in her hometown of Perrysville, Ashland County, and in Canton, Stark County. In the light of the geo- graphical limitation, the collection is remarkably large and varied. The various ethnic groups which settled the area are discussed in the preface, which also briefly outlines the history of the region. The proportion of British ballads is large, including par- ticularly good versions of "Lamkin" (ballad 93 in Child's collection) and "The Bramble Briar." Still more unusual are the early native American topical ballads, "Major Andrew's Execution," about the death of Major John Andre during the American Revolution, and two local ballads recording Indian battles of the 1780's and 90's: "A Song on the Death of Colonel Crafford" and "On the Eighth Day of November." The more recent lyric songs include a good selection of Irish imports. There are 153 songs in the collection, most of them with melodies. Pro- fessor Hanford's introduction discusses folksong in general terms and briefly traces its study from Bishop Percy, in the 18th century, to John A. Lomax and other collectors of our own day. 5574. Flanders, Helen (Hartness), and Marguerite Olney, comps. Ballads migrant in New England. With an introd. by Robert Frost. New York, Farrar, Straus & Young, 1953. xiv, 248 p. M53-552 M1629.F58B3 The rich store of ballads from Vermont and other New England States now preserved in the Helen Hartness Flanders Collection at Middlebury College has provided material for a number of valuable books by Mrs. Flanders and, more recently, for re- cordings as well. Several factors make the present collection distinctive. More than half of the contents are Child ballads (see no. 5550 note), and there are some unusual ones. "Babylon," "The Bonny Earl of Murray," "Adam Gorman," and two Robin Hood ballads have been reported in the United States rarely or never. There are, moreover, local ballads such as "Kingston Jail" which are seldom found elsewhere. Mrs. Flanders describes the arrange- ment of the book as a "vagantes" procedure, with the songs ordered much as the collectors found them instead of according to Child numbers, etc. In this way, the collectors' experience of acquiring the material here and there, with indirection and interruption, is in a measure imparted to the reader. The occasional commentary, with elements of his- torical background and personal association, also helps the reader "to share vicariously the excitement of ballad-hunting." In keeping with a book de- signed for general reading rather than scholarly reference, the documentation and bibliographical notes are minimal. The melodies were transcribed by Miss Olney who shared in the original collecting. A brief introduction by Robert Frost describes in poetic fashion the nature of oral tradition. 5575. Gardner, Emelyn Elizabeth, and Geraldine Jencks Chickering, eds. Ballads and songs of southern Michigan. Ann Arbor, University of Michigan Press, 1939. xviii, 501 p. illus. 39-28434 M1629.G23B18 Bibliography: p. 491-494. The 201 songs and ballads in this collection were culled from 7 Michigan counties over a period of about 25 years. The material is organized accord- ing to subject: "Unhappy Love," "Happy Love," "War," "Occupations" (where the Michigan lum- berjacks figure prominently), "Disasters," "Crimes," "Religion," "Humor," and "The Nursery." Within each category the songs are arranged in a more or less chronological order, with the Child ballads (see no. 5550 note) at the beginning of each section. Melodies are provided for about a fourth of the collection, and the headnotes give historical and collecting data. The tides of other songs which the collectors found in Michigan are appended, with sources (p. 477-483). The volume's general attrac- tiveness is enhanced by line drawings of rural Mid- western scenes. 5576. Hudson, Arthur Palmer. Folksongs of Mississippi and their background. Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina Press, 1936. 321 p. 36-23296 ML3551.H81936 PS571.M7H8 As its tide implies, Professor Hudson's collection devotes much attention to a study of the peoples and backgrounds which have preserved the white folk-music tradition in Mississippi. The first quar- ter of the book, specifically concerned with back- grounds, asserts the predominance of British and Irish groups, a thesis which is borne out by the clear British-Isles lineage of the collected songs. Finding three social and economic levels among the first Mississippi immigrants, Professor Hudson credits both the planter aristocrats and the humble tillers of the poorest soil with a knowledge and love of the FOLKLORE, FOLK MUSIC, FOLK ART / 807 traditional ballads of their common heritage, but reserves for the middle group, the small landholders, the greatest share in the importation and perpetua- tion of the tradition. The songs themselves include imported folksongs, with a rich supply of Child (see no. 5550 note) ballad variants; native American songs, subdivided according to regional origins and subject matter; and a miscellaneous group of comic, nursery, play-party, and game songs. Financial lim- itation prevented the publishers from printing the tunes which Dr. Hudson collected with the song texts, but, with the editorial assistance of Dr. George Herzog and Herbert Halpert, they were later pub- lished in a mimeographed volume, Fol\ Tunes from Mississippi (New York, U. S. Works Progress Ad- ministration, Federal Theatre Project, 1937. 45, xxiil.). 5577. Jackson, George Pullen. White spirituals in the Southern uplands; the story of the fasola folk, their songs, singing, and "buckwheat notes." Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina Press, 1933. xv, 444 p. illus. 33-3792 ML3551.J2 Bibliography: p. 434-436; "List of song books in the four-shape notation": p. [25]; "Important seven- shape song books . . . 1832 . . . [to] 1878": p. 323; "Southern musical periodicals": p. 389. The part-singing movement in colonial New Eng- land gave rise to a tradition of religious song which lasted through the 19th century and which, in a few rural areas, still continues. This, the first of Professor Jackson's many studies of the subject, tells how the singing movement evolved its character- istic "buckwheat" notation system, with differendy shaped noteheads representing different pitches, and ultimately moved from the urban centers to the young Republic's Western frontiers — down the Shenandoah Valley and across the Appalachians. The book gives a large number of song texts and tunes, but differs from Jackson's other white spirit- ual books in that it is primarily a history rather than a collection. Folk tradition though it was, the white spiritual was perpetuated not only by word of mouth, but by the many songbooks, pub- lished in various systems of "buckwheat" notes, which were used by many in the Southern High- lands. Some of the most celebrated and enduring songbooks were "Singin' Billy" Walker's Southern Harmony (1843), an< ^ B. F. White and E. J. King's The Sacred Harp (1844), both in the old "fasola," four-shaped notation; and the Harp of Columbia, which W. H. and M. L. Swan published in 1848, 1 employing the city-influenced seven-shaped system. The numerous books of this sort, and the men who made them, form a significant part of Dr. Jackson's , history. The melodies are analyzed in detail, and classification according to tune, text, and function is discussed. A chapter on the Negro spiritual compares texts and melodies from the white and Negro traditions and oudines the problems which the author was later to treat at length in his White and Negro Spirituals (no. 5555). 5578. Korson, George G., ed. Minstrels of the mine patch; songs and stories of the anthra- cite industry. Philadelphia, University of Penn- sylvania Press, 1938. 322 p. 39-958 PS508.M5K6 M1629.K84M5 Bibliography: p. 321-325. In the introduction to this book, Mr. Korson tells of his first experiences with the traditional song lit- erature of the Pennsylvania anthracite miners, and his surprise at finding that it was an area of folk music which, unlike the songs of lumbermen, cow- boys, and sailors, had gone virtually unnoticed. Songs and Ballads of the Anthracite Miner (New York, F. H. Hitchcock, 1927. xxviii, 196 p.) was his first attempt to rectify this situation. Mr. Kor- son has gone on to publish other books on the songs of the American coalminers and has thereby opened a whole important field of study in American folk- lore. Minstrels of the Mine Patch is a gready en- larged edition of the earlier book of anthracite min- ers' songs. The "mine patch" of the title is the small village of shacks which grew up on the min- ing site, around a "breaker," the building in which anthracite is processed. The earliest miners hav- ing been Irish, Welsh, Scottish, or English immi- grants, Mr. Korson found that a majority of their songs were in the English language, with a par- ticularly strong Irish element in the musical style. He also found effects of the later Slavic immigra- tions. In addition to the songs and ballads, for which a few tunes are included, the author relates many tales, legends, and superstitions of the miners, and describes disasters, strikes, and the notorious ex- ploits of the "Molly Maguires," all of which figure importandy in the miners' songs and lore. The appendixes give biographical sketches of the singers and, many of the ballads having been of known au- thorship, the creators of the miners' songs, together with a glossary of technical terms and jargon. Mr. Korson went on to produce a complementary study: Coal Dust on the Piddle; Songs and Stories of the Bituminous Industry (Philadelphia, University of Pennsylvania Press, 1943. xvi, 460 p.), which is considerably larger in its geographical scope. Whereas the anthracite industry is centralized in a small area of Pennsylvania, Mr. Korson's search for material on the bituminous industry took him to Ohio, Indiana, Illinois, Kentucky, Alabama, Ten- nessee, Virginia, and West Virginia as well as his home State. As in the anthracite study, the author 8o8 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES here combines the songs, tales, and superstitions of the miners with an absorbing account of the history of the bituminous mine-worker in America. Once again the tragic lives of the miners, mine disasters, and labor-management troubles figure importantly in Mr. Korson's account and in the songs. Thir- teen of the songs appear with tunes, as transcribed by Ruth Crawford Seeger. 5579. Korson, George G., ed. Pennsylvania songs and legends. Philadelphia, University of Pennsylvania Press, 1949. 474 p. illus. 49-9849 ML3551.K85 The variety of ethnic and occupational groups comprising Pennsylvania's population make the State something of a microcosm of the United States as a whole, and this book a summing up of many aspects of American folklore. After the initial Eng- lish colonization, the 18th-century immigrants in- cluded peoples from other parts of the British Isles and from Northern and Western Europe, including a large body of Germans — the so-called "Pennsyl- vania Dutch." The editor's introduction describes these early groups and the later immigrants from Southern and Eastern Europe, emphasizing the con- tributions each has made to the Pennsylvania folk tradition. The essays which follow are detailed studies of 13 specialized phases of Pennsylvania folksong and lore, each by a notable authority on the subject. Several ethnic groups are examined, including the area's aboriginal inhabitants, whose descendants still retain their identity and ancient lore. The legends and tales of several groups are presented, as well as their songs. The occupational groups included are the Conestoga wagoners, canal- lers, railroaders, lumberjacks and raftsmen, coal- miners, and oilmen. The industrial songs of Pitts- burgh bring the occupational studies up to the pres- ent time. The chapters dealing with music have numerous song texts and airs. 5580. Linscott, Eloise Hubbard, ed. Folk songs of old New England. New York, Mac- millan, 1939. xxi, 337 p. 40-27042 M1629.L64F7 "References": p. 319-337. Many familiar British and American ballads and lyric songs, as well as some which are less familiar, are given in this large collection of New England songs and tunes, but it is in the area of country dance tunes and game songs that Miss Linscott's book offers the greatest amount of fresh material. The words and music are accompanied by descrip- tions of how the games and dances are executed. Some of these are to be found in other local collec- tions, but many appear to be rare outside of New England. In addition to these a fourth section deals with popular sea shanties and fo 'castle songs. The headnotes for each song or tune detail the author's sources and give some historic background. Nearly 200 tunes are included, most of them arranged with piano accompaniment. The appendixes include biographical data on Miss Linscott's singers, fid- dlers, and dance-callers. 5581. Morris, Alton Chester, ed. Folksongs of Florida. Musical transcriptions by Leon- hard Deutsch. Gainesville, University of Florida Press, 1950. xvi, 464 p. illus. 50-9048 M1629.M858 Bibliography: p. 451-457. Following a procedure similar to A. P. Hudson's in his Folksongs of Mississippi (no. 5576), Profes- sor Morris prefaces this State collection with a valu- able study of the social, cultural, and folkloristic history of the region. The first section, "Songs of the New World," includes a number of unique lo- cal items such as "The West Palm Beach Storm" and the "Miami Hairikin." The cowboy and lum- berjack songs, however, must have traveled long distances before reaching Florida. A large num- ber of English and Scottish ballads, both in and out of the Child canon, are represented in "Songs of the Old World." A special rarity, never previously reported in the United States, is "Lord Derwent- water" (ballad 208 in Child's collection), called by Professor Morris' informant "The King's Love Let- ter." Bahaman versions of British songs, a Negro rowing song, and an American Indian version of a white hymn are a few of the other items of special interest. Condensed from Professor Morris' doc- toral dissertation, Folksongs of Florida is still a large and comprehensive collection, totaling 243 songs plus variants. A number of unaccompanied tunes are included. 5582. Scarborough, Dorothy. A song catcher in Southern mountains; American folk songs of British ancestry. New York, Columbia Univer- sity Press, 1937. xvi, 476 p. illus. 37-4992 M1629.S29S6 On one of Dorothy Scarborough's trips into the Blue Ridge, a young mountain boy recommended a friend as a good source of local ballads: "He's a song catcher, he is." The term applied so well to Miss Scarborough and her quest that she adopted it and employed it in the title of this book. A Song Catcher in Southern Mountains was nearly finished at the time of Miss Scarborough's death in 1935, and was prepared for publication by John H. H. Lyon and Vernon Loggins. The first part describes collecting experiences in the Blue Ridge Mountains, Buchanan County, Virginia, and west- ern North Carolina. These colorful background FOLKLORE, FOLK MUSIC, FOLK ART / 809 chapters form an attractive introduction to the Anglo-American ballads and songs which occupy the major part of the book. Appended to the col- lected ballad texts are unaccompanied tunes and a discussion of the modal aspects of the music. Miss Scarborough's last work does for the people of the Southern Appalachians what her On the Trail of Negro Fol^-Songs (Cambridge, Harvard Univer- sity Press, 1925. 289 p.) had done with the secu- lar songs of Southern Negroes. 5583. Sharp, Cecil J., comp. English folk songs from the Southern Appalachians; compris- ing two hundred and seventy-three songs and bal- lads with nine hundred and sixty-eight tunes, in- cluding thirty-nine tunes contributed by Olive Dame Campbell. Edited by Maud Karpeles. Lon- don, Oxford University Press, H. Milford, 1932. 2 v. 33-3796 M1629.S53E6 1932 Bibliography: v. 1, p. 427-430; v. 2, p. 402-405. At a time when the ballad and other forms of folk music were considered the domain of students of literature, ethnology, and folklore, Cecil Sharp (1859-1924) began a more musically oriented ap- proach to the subject. With careful attention to the transcription of the melodies, Sharp first cov- ered his native England and the rest of the British Isles, and the» followed the British songs across the Atlantic. With the assistance of Miss Maud Karpeles, who took down the words while he no- tated the music, Sharp spent parts of 191 6, 19 17, and 19 1 8 studying the British traditional songs preserved by the mountain people of the South- eastern United States. In addition to the material gathered by Sharp and Karpeles, English Fol\ Songs from the Southern Appalachians prints 39 tunes, with texts, which Olive Dame Campbell had collected in the region between 1907 and 1910. First published as a single volume in 1917, the col- lection was reissued in its present enlarged form after Sharp's death, but still based on his transcrip- tions. It was reprinted in 1952, with an additional prefatory note by Miss Karpeles describing the changes she had observed in the area during a 1951 field trip. The first volume contains ballads, and the second songs, hymns, nursery songs, jigs, and play-party games. Both the editor's preface and Sharp's introduction give special attention to the stylistic characteristics of the melodies, which are printed with the song texts. The introduction also gives a general description of the region and the ethnic background of its inhabitants. 5584. Thomas, Jeannette (Bell). Ballad makin' in the mountains of Kentucky, by Jean Thomas; with music arr. by Walter Kob. New York, Holt, 1939. xviii, 270 p. 39-31805 ML3551.T4B2 Miss Jean Thomas has spent her life among the people of the Kentucky highlands, and has brought much of their music before the public by means of her books and the annual folk festivals held at her rustic cabin near Ashland. Known to her Ken- tucky neighbors as "the traipsin' woman," Miss Thomas traveled throughout the area both as a cir- cuit judge's stenographer and as a ballad collector. Emphasizing the native ballads of recent origin, Ballad Mahjri describes the hill people who still compose ballads and the events which inspired their compositions. The chapters deal with the ballads and their makers according to subject matter: feuds, which the hill people usually call "troubles" or "wars"; chanteys, composed by ballad makers who have never even seen a large river; war, flood and fire; the railroad; "stillin' and drinkin' "; "killin' "; laments and farewells; and "hymn makin'." The ballad makers and ballad subjects are illustrated by photographs and the songs are printed in simple piano arrangements. E. Games and Dances 5585. Brewster, Paul G. American nonsinging games. Norman, University of Oklahoma Press, 1953. 218 p. illus. 53-5476 GV1203.B68 Students of folklore have long collected and studied the traditional games of children as signifi- cant vestiges of ancient beliefs, customs, and rituals. The author points out, however, that most collec- tors have emphasized singing games to the near ex- clusion of those in which music figures slightly or not at all. This large collection of nonsinging games is an important step toward supplying the earlier omissions. In an effort to make his mate- rial useful to teachers and recreation leaders, as well as to folklorists, Mr. Brewster separates his description of each game from his ethnic and his- torical analyses, bibliographical notes, and other scholarly apparatus. The games, which he gath- ered from students and friends, and other non- 8 10 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES literary sources, are presented in 14 general cate- gories, including "Guessing Games," "Forfeit Games," "Hiding Games," "Ball Games," "Paper and Pencil Games," and "Courtship Games." Many variants are included for the rope-jumping, ball-bouncing, and other games, such as hopscotch, nine versions of which are given. 5586. Chase, Richard, comp. Hullabaloo, and other singing folk games. Illus. by Joshua Tolford. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1949. 57 p. 49-8127 GV1771.C5 Mr. Chase's foreword states that the "golden age" for singing games falls between the years of eight and eleven. The games and play-parties in this collection seem to be directed toward children in this group, but teen-agers in some areas continue to find them of recreational value. The games involve simple group steps and dramatic action, taken from the traditional Midwestern play-parties, and employ popular play-party songs which direct the action of the group as it sings them. Many of the games, such as "Goin' to Boston," "Pawpaw Patch," and "Three Dukes," are still popular in some parts of the country, while others, "The Allee Allee O," recently collected in New England, and the ancient British "Roman Soldiers," are seldom heard. Mr. Chase's language and diagrams will be easily understood by youngsters, and the tunes, six of which are given piano settings by Hilton Rufty, are in a simple singing style. 5587. Mayo, Margot. The American square dance. Illus. by Selma Gorlin. [Rev. and enl.] New York, Sentinel Books, 1948. 119 p. 48-8015 GV1763.M3 1948 Bibliography: p. n6-[i2o]. Miss Mayo's American Square Dance Group in New York has for many years been an important factor in the renewed urban interest in American folk dancing. Her handbook is designed to give useful hints to other organizations and individuals wishing to join in an increasingly popular form of recreation. The term "square dance" is used here not to describe a particular form, but is applied to American folk dances in general, including square sets, quadrilles, longway sets, running sets, play-party games, and round dances, each of which is described. After some further hints on the music, calling, and the general planning of a square- dance party, 13 dances are described and their di- rection indicated with the aid of illustrations. Also included are an illustrated glossary of square- dancing terms, 10 tunes in piano arrangements (p. 96-104), and suggestions for "Dancing to Recorded Music" (p. 106-114). 5588. Newell, William Wells. Games and songs of American children. New and enl. ed. New York, Harper, 1903. xv, 282 p. 3-29283 GV1203.N54 M1993.N49 "Collections of children's games": p. [267J-269. "Comparisons and references": p. 270-282. Although the first edition of this collection ap- peared as long ago as 1883, it is still generally recog- nized as the standard source on the immense subject of the folklore of children's games in America. An introductory chapter describes the rhyme and chant formulas which characterize a large part of chil- dren's game lore, compares them with the ballad and the dance, and speculates on their origins, which in many cases are quite ancient, and their diffusion in the Old and New Worlds. The author also took into account the children themselves, contrasting their resourcefulness in invention with their con- servatism in the retention of old traditions: "The formulas of play are as Scripture, of which no jot or title is to be repealed." For these reasons, in the absence of excessive organization by adults, the game traditions of children are of particular interest to students of stricdy orally transmitted custom. Mr. NewelPs 15 basic chapters group the games according to subject, function, and type of activity. Among them are "Love-Games," "Histories," "The Pleasures of Motion," and "Bafl, and Similar Sports." Counting-out rhymes, the chants used to determine who will be "it" at the beginning of a game, are also accorded a generous chapter. In ad- dition to quoting the rhymes, describing the play, and, in many cases, providing the music for 190 games, Dr. NewelPs text makes some comments upon the games' distribution here and abroad, and on their origins. Added to this edition is a final chapter of miscellaneous additional games and var- iants, and a Preface offering further suggestions on the Old- World origins of American games, making particular reference to this book's British counter- part, Lady Alice Gomme's The Traditional Games of England, Scotland, and Ireland (London, D. Nutt, 1894-98. 2 v.). 5589. Putney, Cornelia F. Square dance U. S. A. Musical arrangements by Jessie B. Flood; historical background and descriptive material by Cornelia F. Putney. Dubuque, Iowa, W. C. Brown, 1955. no p. 55-4642 GV1763.P8 The square-dance revival, which continues to grow in many parts of the country, has a continual need for practical books offering new dances and tunes, together with instructions on the fundamen- tals of calling, playing, and execution. Although there are some general historical notes by Prof. Louise Pound and by the author, this book, con- FOLKLORE, FOLK MUSIC, FOLK ART / 8ll veniently published in a spiral binding, is meant for application rather than study. There are hints for the musicians, the callers, and the program plan- ners, followed by a wide selection of dances and tunes, some new and some traditional. Singing calls, which have been popular in some parts of the country for many years, are also included, with their music. All of the music is given in simple piano arrangements. A final section is devoted to accounts of recent developments in the square-dance revival in several parts of the country. 5590. Ryan, Grace L., comp. Dances of our pio- neers. Music arrangement by Robert T. Benford; ill us. by Brooks Emerson. New York, A. S. Barnes, 1939. 196 p. 39-27508 M1629.R95 1939 The characteristic American quadrille whose four-sided formation gives it the name of square dance remains the favorite among the dances of our pioneers, and so bulks gready in this collection as in most others. Nevertheless, there are other group- dance forms, notably the contra and circle dances and, of course, the couple dances, which have long enjoyed great popularity, particularly in the Eastern States. These too play their part in this popular book of instruction, which was originally published in 1926. Among the contra dances are a variety of reels and hornpipes, and the circles include the popular hybrid Sicilian Circle and Paul Jones. Some of the couple dances outlined are schottisches, polkas, and waltzes. The directions are made plain by drawings and diagrams, and an introductory chapter defines the standard terms. There are over two dozen tunes, in piano arrangements, and the directions frequently cite appropriate calls. 5591. Shaw, Lloyd. Cowboy dances, a collection of Western square dances; with a foreword by Sherwood Anderson. Appendix, cowboy dance tunes arr. by Frederick Knorr. Rev. ed. Caldwell, Idaho, Caxton Printers, 1949. 417 p. 49-4858 GV1767.S5 1949 "Phonograph records": p. [395]— 413- Lloyd Shaw has long been an active performer and teacher of American country dancing and a student of its history as well. Both aspects of his experience are evident in this book on the folk dances of the West. As in most recent books on the square dance, practical considerations figure importantly, and many square-dance enthusiasts will benefit from the descriptions of 75 dances, some with several variants, which are included and illus- trated by diagrams and by photographs of Mr. Shaw's popular cowboy-dance troupe. There is also much historical and ethnic analysis. The first chap- ter traces the distinctive Western square dances back through the Kentucky running sets and the New England quadrilles, eventually to European ances- tors. Further notes observe the natural evolution and adaptation which have characterized the unique cowboy-dance forms, just as the Old World names, Polka and Varsovienne, became "Pokey" and "Var- sity Anna." In a companion volume, The Round Dance Boo\ (Caldwell, Idaho, Caxton Printers, 1948. 443 p.), Mr. Shaw has made a similar prac- tical and historical examination of other American folk dances, including polkas, waltzes, schottisches, and circle mixers. 5592. Withers, Carl, comp. A rocket in my pocket, the rhymes and chants of young Americans. Illus. by Susanne Suba. [New York] Holt, 1948. 214 p. illus. 48-4881 PZ8.3.W76R0 This selection of varied rhymes and chants, taken from the folklore of modern American children, is designed primarily for the children themselves, but Mr. Withers points out in his postscript that adults too will find them entertaining and instructive. From the first ("Silence in the courtroom !/The monkey wants to speak") to the last ("If this book should chance to roam,/Box its ears and send it home"), virtually all of this children's lore was col- lected directly from or verified in the oral tradition. The 14 chapters include popular rhymes for ball- bouncing, rope-jumping, and counting-out. Among the mental exercises and tricks in which children find constant delight are tongue twisters, spelling rhymes, riddles, and finger-plays. Although no music is provided, a few are meant to be sung ("The Bear Went Over the Mountain," "The Green Grass Grows All Around"), but most of the items are in the rhyme and chant categories. Mr. Withers has appended a brief note explaining his procedure in gathering the material, suggesting ways in which it might be used, and stressing the value of children's folklore to educators, sociologists, and child psychol- ogists. The contents are indexed, but for children's rather than for scholars' use; there is no bibliogra- phy or list of sources. F. Folk Art and Crafts 5593. Bolton, Ethel (Stanwood), and Eva (John- ston) Coe. American sampler. [Boston] Massachusetts Society of the Colonial Dames of America, 1 92 1. 416 p. 21-18488 NK9112.B6 8l2 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES This monumental treatise was promoted by Mrs. Barrett Wendell and the Massachusetts Society of Colonial Dames in order to record the domestic virtues of our ancestors, and to supply the lack of publications on early American needlework, of which the sampler was "the primary basis and training school." It covers the period from the earliest settlements to 1830, after which year sam- plers declined rapidly in quality and quantity. The examples were obtained primarily from New Eng- land, but other state societies, especially the New Jersey Dames, lent their assistance so that other re- gions could be represented. The earliest mention of a sampler is in an English account book of 1502, and by 1630 it was a well-established form, a longi- tudinal pattern book in cloth in which the housewife worked specimens of such designs as she wished to use in her incessant needlework, "practically the only relaxation of most women." The earliest American samplers that have survived seem to be quite as old as their English counterparts. By the 1 8th century the sampler had become transformed into a square or horizontal display piece with elab- orate design and lettering demonstrating the girl's or young lady's proficiency. Here the general de- scription of each period is followed by a register of existing samplers, listed alphabetically by their makers and with their 1921 owners named. Sep- arate plates illustrate 126 of them, but only the dozen colored plates begin to do justice to their subjects. There are also a 100-page anthology of sampler verse; an enumeration of early girls' schools in which needlework was taught; a much too brief section on "Materials, Designs, Stitches"; and a special treatment of "Embroidered Heraldry," not all specimens of which are genuine samplers. 5594. Christensen, Erwin O. The Index of Amer- ican design. Introd. by Holger Cahill. New York, Macmillan, 1950. xviii, 229 p. 378 illus. (part col.) 50-10215 NK1403.C5 Bibliography: p. 219-221. The complete "Index of American Design," whose more than 15,000 documentary paintings are now housed in the National Gallery of Art, was prepared between 1935 and 1942 by the Federal Art Project. The present volume, drawn from that immense collection, covers a great diversity of in- digenous folk arts and crafts from the first white settlement to the end of the last century. The water-color illustrations, which show a remarkable realism and accuracy in detail, are accompanied by a historical and comparative commentary by Mr. Christensen. The first section, "Our Wide Land," deals with several minority groups which have made significant contributions to American folk art. These include the Pennsylvania Germans, whose objects of daily use are richly decorated with predominant bird and tulip motifs; the Shakers, whose furniture and utensils show an extreme sim- plicity of form and perfection of workmanship, together with great ingenuity; and the peoples of the Southwest, who combined Spanish and Indian traditions in their religious objects, furniture, woven baskets, and saddles, spurs, and stirrups. Some of the other arts illustrated and described are ship figureheads, tavern signs and cigarstore Indians, weather vanes and hitching posts, whitding and wood carving, toys, and carrousel horses, and such gadgets as an apple peeler and a fly catcher. The final section, "The Years Pass," makes chronologi- cal surveys of lights, lamps, and candlesticks; of costume; and, finally, of the "Symbols of a Nation": the American Eagle, personifications of Liberty and Justice, and portraits of American heroes. This enumeration does not begin to exhaust the contents of an extraordinarily rich volume. 5595. Colonial Williamsburg, inc. The Abby Aldrich Rockefeller folk art collection: a de- scriptive catalogue by Nina Fletcher Little. [Wil- liamsburg, Va., Published by] Colonial Williams- burg; distributed by Little, Brown, Boston, 1957. xvi, 402 p. 165 col. illus. 57-6251 N6510.C66 Abby Greene Aldrich (1874-1948), the daugh- ter of Senator Nelson W. Aldrich of Rhode Is- land, married the younger John D. Rockefeller in 1 90 1. In 1929 she was a co founder of the Museum of Modern Art, and subsequendy made many gifts to its collections. In the early 1930's, advised by Edith Gregor Halpert and Holger Cahill, she be- gan to accumulate American folk art, and before long put together the first of the great collections in the field, which was first exhibited as a unit by Colonial Williamsburg in 1935. Most of it was presented to this Rockefeller family foundation in the same year; portions of it which had been given to the Museum of Modern Art and to the Metro- politan Museum were reunited with the main col- lection after Mrs. Rockefeller's death, and a special building has now been erected to house and exhibit it. The total is 424 pieces in all kinds, of which 165 are here reproduced in fine colored plates printed in England, while the remaining 259 are described in some detail in a catalog (p. 349-382) following the illustrations. Both the illustrations and the catalog are arranged under the following six media categories: "Paintings in Oil"; "Paint- ings in Watercolor and Pastel"; "Needlework and Painted Textiles"; "Paintings on Glass"; "Fracturs, Calligraphic Drawings, and Engravings"; and "Sculpture in Wood and Metal." Notes on the FOLKLORE, FOLK MUSIC, FOLK ART / 813 illustrations are on the facing pages, and the 58 artists whose names are known or surmised are indexed on p. 389-390. The volume is a contri- bution to the subject as monumental as it is beau- tiful, and a worthy memorial of the collector. Meanwhile another very remarkable collection, lim- ited to paintings in various media, was put to- gether by Colonel and Mrs. Garbisch. In 1954 a representative group of 300 paintings and 200 mini- atures was presented by them to the National Gal- lery of Art, which has published two installments of American Primitive Paintings from the Collection of Edgar William and Bernice Chrysler Garbisch (Washington, U. S. National Gallery of Art, 1954- 57), each reproducing 100 oil paintings in halftone. 5596. Drepperd, Carl W. Pioneer America, its first three centuries. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1949. 311 p. 49-10623 E161.D74 The author illustrates the social history of Amer- ica, through the 19th century, through its popular arts and crafts. Of particular interest to collectors of antiques, the text oudines the background of pioneer artifacts and tells of their makers. The chapters cover architecture, cooking utensils, fire- arms, tools, jewelry, toys, pottery, tin, pewter, and silverware, and many other gadgets and frills of early America which the collector of today seeks out. In his introductory chapter Mr. Drepperd under- rates his interesting commentary by calling this a picture book, but it is true that the illustrations, mostly black and white drawings, are abundant. Many of the items here described or pictured are properly classified as decorative or industrial rather than folk art, but the latter element is pervasive enough to justify the book's inclusion in this chap- ter. The same consideration applies to Mr. Drep- perd's A Dictionary of American Antiques (Gar- den City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1952. 404 p.), which defines for collectors more than 15,000 terms such as acorn basket, embroidered pictures, persimmon beer, and zephyr moss. Many of the entries are for individual craftsmen or manufacturers, and some, such as those for Chippendale or ironstone, are miniature historical essays. Separate pages are de- voted to small drawings, as many as twenty to a page, and there is a brief entry bibliography (p. 398-404). 5597. Ford, Alice E. Pictorial folk art, New Eng- land to California. New York, Studio Pub- lications, 1949. 172 p. (An American Studio book) 49-48983 ND205.F65 Bibliography: p. 169-170. An introduction to American folk art for the general reader, which emphasizes its variety but is not, as the tide might suggest, geographical in its structure. There is, to be sure, a section on "Re- gional Painting and Drawing," which introduces the Shaker "spirit prickings" of the 1840's and 50's and the santos of Spanish New Mexico as well as more familiar fractur and Indian material; but the others are concerned with types such as portraiture, landscape, religious and allegorical painting, and "scrimshaw" incising on whalebone. There is a brief narrative of the "rediscovery" of this art, which Miss Ford dates from the mid-1920's when Mrs. Isabel Carleton Wilde began her collecting, and a postscript on recent or contemporary "primitives": Joseph Pickett, John Kane, Horace Pippin, Grandma Moses, and Clara Williamson. A concluding "Eval- uation" protests against the recent tendency to mag- nify with the name of "abstractionism" what is in fact only the ineptitude of the untutored. The bulk of the book (p. 51-160) is devoted to halftone re- productions which, unfortunately, are regularly too crowded (sometimes four to a page) and too dark. 5598. Gould, Mary Earle. Early American wooden ware & other kitchen utensils. Fully illustrated by the author. Springfield, Mass., Pond- Ekberg Co., 1942. 230 p. 42-18677 E161.G6 The author's collecting specialty is antique wooden utensils and receptacles, handmade in America's colonial period. Her collecting has cen- tered in New England, but familiarity with the woodworker's craft in other colonies has enabled her to make some observations on regional varieties. The early chapters describe the raw materials with which the pioneers worked and the tools they used to fashion their simple utensils. Also discussed are the means of determining the function, locale, and authenticity of various pieces of antique wooden ware. The succeeding chapters describe the utensils themselves: bowls, mortars and pestles, buckets, baskets, and sieves, and how they were made and used. The book is illustrated by nearly 150 photo- graphs. 5599. Lichten, Frances. Folk art of rural Penn- sylvania. New York, Scribner, 1946. xiv, 276 p. 47~ II 9 2 NK835.P4L5 5600. Stoudt, John J. Pennsylvania folk-art; an interpretation. Allentown, Pa., Schlechter's, 1948. xix, 402 p. 49-855 NK835.P4S7 1948 Bibliography: p. [3975-402. Miss Lichten's volume is a labor of love through- out, and one of the most thorough and sympathetic studies of a folk art that has been made. The art of the Pennsylvania Dutch, she emphasizes, was the flowering of a peasant culture, for the Germans who came to Penn's province exchanged oppression and 814 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES poverty for freedom and, in time, a solid prosperity earned by frugality and hard labor. The first half- century of the province had little to show, but by about 1750 the land had been conquered, the log huts of the settlers had been replaced by substantial stone houses most of which are still standing, and decoration of a naive but distinctively original kind was lavished upon all the objects of craftsmanship. The second half of the 18th century was the great age of this folk art; after 1800 designs became sim- pler and labor less lavish; while after 1850 indus- trialism destroyed it altogether. In 1891-92 Dr. Edwin Atlee Barber made the finest collection of Pennsylvania decorated ceramics for the Philadel- phia Museum, but appreciations of its other achieve- ments had to wait for the antique fever of the 1920's. Miss Lichten, whose authority in the field was de- veloped as supervisor of the Pennsylvania "Index of American Design," arranges her book by the mate- rials upon which the craftsmen worked, beginning with clay, flax, and wool. Of exceptional interest are "The Salvage Arts," which turned textile frag- ments into quilts, and rags into rugs or into illumi- nated paper. The illustrations are excellendy re- produced, and accompanied by unusually satisfac- tory explanatory letterpress. The concluding 30 pages reproduce a variety of original designs in their original colors, always gay and often garish. Mr. Stoudt's volume does not approach Miss Lichten's in the quality of its numerous illustrations, but it provides a valuable supplement by relating the im- ages used in decoration to the symbolism of the German Pietistic sects. "The motifs and designs of the folk-art of Eastern Pennsylvania are non-rep- resentational expressions of traditional Christian im- agery." The rod of Jesse, the rose of Sharon, the dove who is the believer languishing for the Savior, the pelican who is Christ, and the peacock who stands for the Resurrection are among the images identified. 5601. Lipman, Jean (Herzberg). American prim- itive painting. New York, Oxford Univer- sity Press, 1942. 158 p. 42-14277 ND205.L5 "Selected bibliography": p. 139-142. Although American primitive painting is not often regarded by folklorists as a branch of their science, the anonymity of most of the artists and the naivete of their style lead many observers to re- gard their work as folk art. In the introduction the author discusses the meaning of the word "prim- itive" in the history of American art. Antiquity is not an important factor, for the height of the prim- itive school fell in the middle of the last century. Nor is it determined by prevailing features of the society as a whole. Rather the "primitiveness" of such work lay in the artist's experience and atti- tudes, and the effect which these had on his produc- tions. The primitive painters, most of whom are unknown by name, were unschooled in the classical sense and developed independently of European tradition. The result is akin to abstraction, for vis- ual qualities are deemphasized in favor of geometric forms, restricted movement, emphasized contour lines, and heightened color-contrast. A group of plates near the beginning of this book effectively demonstrates the differing values of the academic and primitive schools. Except for some historical and analytical notes, the balance of the work is given over to illustrations, some in color: portraits, land- scapes, and various kinds of decorations, which show the range of the primitive school. Mrs. Lip- man has also published an important volume on our relatively little known folk sculpture: American Fol{ Art in Wood, Metal and Stone (New York, Pantheon, 1948. 193 p.). Its substance lies prin- cipally in its 183 illustrations, a few of which are in color. 5602. New York. Museum of Modern Art. American folk art; the art of the common man in America, 1750-1900. New York, Museum of Modern Art, 1932. 52 p. 32-34218 N6505.N44 Bibliography: p. 47-52. This illustrated catalog, published in connection with an epoch-making exhibit at the Museum of Modern Art, did much to establish the present vogue of folk art among the art public. It covers the useful and decorative arts in America during the latter part of the 18th and all of the 19th centuries. A substantial introduction by Mr. Holger Cahill (p. 3-28) discusses the relative merits of the terms "primitive," "provincial," and "folk" in describing this type of art, and setdes on the last. He suggests that "folk art" best characterizes this kind, made by "the common people," expressing their ideals, and fulfilling their needs. He further describes the his- torical background of the largely unknown and untutored house painters, sign painters, portrait limners, carpenters, cabinetmakers, shipwrights, wood carvers, stonecutters, metalworkers, black- smiths, sailors, and all the other artist-artisans whose work is illustrated from the exhibition. There are 175 items in the catalog (p. 29-46) and 172 fine- screen halftone plates. 5603. Pinckney, Pauline A. American figureheads and their carvers. New York, Norton, 1940. 223 p. 32 plates on 16 1. 41-1172 VM308.P5 Bibliography: p. 204-210. Not only figureheads, but billetheads, stem and FOLKLORE, FOLK MUSIC, FOLK ART / 815 stern decorations, and all products of the ship- carver's art are included in this history of American ship sculpture. The chapters, in historical sequence, trace the ancestry of American figureheads through shipcarvings of Egypt, Phoenicia, Rome, Scandi- navia, and Western Europe, and then tell what has been discovered about the American carvers and their craft. The masters Simeon and John Skillin of Boston, and the Philadelphia craftsman, William Rush, who made an important contribution to the first American Navy, are studied in particular de- tail. The author's fullest sources are Navy records, since the merchant fleet, large as it was, is poorly documented for the 18th and 19th centuries. With the advent of ships of iron and steel, figureheads fell into disuse, although some futile efforts were made to adapt metal figures to the new vessels. At the conclusion of her book, the author introduces the few remaining practitioners of an art which has been virtually extinct since the turn of the century. Some drawings and many photographs illustrate extant figureheads and carvings, some in a fine state of preservation, while others were too much "exposed to the hazards of wind and sea and to the blasts of powder and shot." 5604. Robertson, Elizabeth Wells. American quilts. New York, Studio Publications, 1948. 152 p. 48-28158 NK9112.R6 Bibliography: p. 151-152. "A quilt is anything made of two pieces of ma- terial with padding between and held together with stitches." From this bare definition Miss Robert- son proceeds to develop the esthetic as well as the utilitarian values, the social connotations, the tech- niques, and the folklore of quilts. She begins by sketching in the background of frontier society, its development of the quilting party, and the origin out of necessity of techniques and traditions such as the "crazy quilt." Succeeding parts describe the fabrics such as calico, gingham, and percale; their manufacture, dyeing, and printing or painting; and give instruction in the stitches and patterns for the benefit of modern quiltmakers. Part four gives a particularly complete account of the standard de- signs (birds, flowers, fruits, stars, and many others), their sources, and their nomenclature. Over half the volume (p. 61-150) is given to photographic halftones of specimens the greater part of which are in public museums, with a smaller number drawn from private collections. XXV Music A. General Histories and Reference Wor\s 5605-5614 B. Contemporary Surveys and Special Topics 5615-5625 C. Localities 5626-5630 D. Religious Music 5631-5634 E. Popular Music 5635-5640 F. Jazz 5641-5646 G. Orchestra and Bands 5647-5654 H. Opera 5655-5663 I. Choirs 5664-5667 J. Music Education 5668-5672 K. Individual Musicians 5673-5687 iy '¥ IN 1858, two and a half centuries after the first settlement, when Longfellow published The Courtship of Miles Standish, the elder Holmes published The Autocrat of the Break- fast Table, Lincoln met Douglas on the hustings of seven Illinois towns, and Theodore Roosevelt was born, no one wrote a book on American music, and if anyone had, it could only have been a thin and shamefaced volume. Of all the great Western traditions, the one which had made the transit to America in the most attenuated or mutilated form was the musical heritage. On the eve of the Civil War there were none too lively survivals in folksong and hymnody, a somewhat desultory concert life in the cities of the Northeastern seaboard, and a rousing welcome for any visiting star with news value, but the only really flourishing musical in- stitution was a strange if delightful domestic hybrid, the minstrel show. Indeed, by 1858, the United States had generated its own antimusical tradition, which is still with us: music had somehow come to be regarded as detracting from the manliness of the American male, and the Yankee style of humor took the professional musician for a figure of fun. The past century has seen a complete transforma- tion of this picture, gradually at first and then with much acceleration. Its early manifestations were in large measure the effects of the new concentrations of wealth which followed the Civil War: thus during its first 37 years the Boston Symphony Orchestra was maintained by the bounty of one wealthy man. By whatever means, the cultivation of an active concert life has spread from its early 816 centers to every metropolitan area in the country, and the support of a symphony orchestra has become an article of municipal patriotism. After the Civil War the American composer of large-scale music began to make his appearance, at first usually trained in Germany or on German models; latterly eclectic or resolutely nationalist. There has come about a definite stratification of music, which can be roughly indicated by the labels of highbrow (subscription symphony concerts, string quartets, harpsichord recitals, etc.), middlebrow (pop con- certs, sophisticated musicals, cafe singers, etc.), and lowbrow (the Hit Parade, hill-billy); it is the lower two which are the best remunerated. The extraor- dinary phenomenon of jazz (Section F), which spread out of the Negro quarter of New Orleans in the second decade of this century, and has be- come America's only large musical export, can and does exist at all three levels. Its relation to the old tradition of "serious" or "classical" music remains uncertain and shifting, but there has been and is MUSIC / 817 much cross-fertilization, the most conspicuous ex- ample being the attractive figure of George Gershwin (no. 5678). Doubtless because of the relative recency of these developments, the literature of American music is rather recent and rather scanty; save in the fields of jazz and singers' autobiographies, the following pages list a quite considerable proportion of it. The titles have been chosen to exhibit American music, and especially music in performance, in close rela- tionship with American society, and to give samples of the varieties of musical experience in America. Section B contains a number of surveys or diagnoses of the musical state of the Nation; nearly all evidence a considerable sense of dissatisfaction. In spite of the tremendous increase in musicians, organizations, and audiences, there is a lingering uneasiness that "serious" music is still something of an exotic, arti- ficially and precariously maintained. In the per- spective of a century it is safe to say that difficulties thus reflected spring out of the recent rapid changes in technology, economic life, and society: the musical heritage of the West has been assimilated, coexists in a reasonable relationship with the current of popu- lar musicmaking, and, whatever adaptations of means may prove necessary, is in not the slightest danger of being jettisoned. A. General Histories and Reference Works 5605. Ewen, David, comp. American composers today, a biographical and critical guide. New York, H. W. Wilson, 1949. 265 p. illus. 49-8927 ML390.E82 Mr. Ewen circulated a questionnaire in gathering the information for this dictionary, and most of the entries are ingeniously fitted together from the words supplied by the composers themselves. At the end of each biography is a list of principal works, recordings if any, and one or more references to other literature. The "American" in the title is hemispheric in scope, and includes, along with approximately 130 composers whose careers have largely unfolded in the United States, several Cana- dians, 10 Latin Americans (including the late Manuel de Falla), and well over 40 Europeans whose careers were thoroughly established abroad before they came to this country. Although some of this last group have now returned to their original homes, it cannot be denied that those who remained have contributed to the cosmopolitan product that is American music. Mr. Ewen's definition of "to- day" is similarly broad, since the birthdays of his composers range from 1853 to 1923. This wide stretch has apparentiy resulted from the dividing line between a pair of similar compilations, earlier in date and international in scope: Composers of Today (New York, H. W. Wilson, 1934. 314 p.) and Composers of Yesterday, issued by the same publisher three years later (488 p.). Users of the present work are referred to the latter for the biographies of such men as Charles T. Griflfes and Victor Herbert, even though their music is still very much alive, while a number of lesser talents, dead for as long as 27 years, have been carried over into this newer compilation simply because they 431240 — 60- were alive in 1934. With no second edition of Composers of Yesterday, there was no other place to put them. 5606. Historical Records Survey. District of Co- lumbia. Bio-bibliographical index of musi- cians in the United States of America since colonial times. 2d ed. Washington, Music Section, Pan American Union, 1956. xxiii, 439 p. PA57-4 ML106.U3H6 1956 Bibliography: p. xvii-xxiii. "A list of special studies, biographies, and auto- biographies pertaining to the persons whose names appear in the Index": p. 421-439. In a subject area that has been comparatively as little studied as is unfortunately the case with American music, a volume such as this can be the most useful reference tool available. With only two general histories in the field, too little notice has been taken of the multiplicity of singers, instrumentalists, and even composers who make up the total picture of our musical life. But if there are only two general histories, there are a variety of more restricted studies of special periods, regions, and topics. If in one's reading a name has been picked up, it often becomes a very real problem to find out something more about the person. This union index of a large part of the musical literature earlier than World War I, which was planned by Keyes Porter and completed under the supervision of Dr. Leonard Ellinwood, is often the simplest and quickest solution to that prob- lem. Unpretentious in appearance, it is nonetheless the most sought-after volume by those working in the field, and was particularly hard to come by before the second printing made it more accessible. The Historical Records Survey had quietly slipped away -53 8l8 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES before the volume was completed, and in 1941, when the Pan American Union was persuaded to step in and see that the compilation was not entirely lost, funds were available only for a first edition of 500 copies. 5607. Howard, John Tasker. Our American mu- sic, three hundred years of it. With supple- mentary chapters by James Lyons. 3d ed., rev. and reset. New York, Crowell, 1954 xxii, 841, A77 p. illus. 54-11944 ML200.H8 1954 Bibliography: p. 693-743. 5608. Chase, Gilbert. America's music, from the Pilgrims to the present. New York, Mc- Graw-Hill, 1955. xxiii, 733 p. 54-9707 ML200.C5 Bibliography: p. 679-706. These are the only two books that attempt to cover the whole field of American music. When Mr. Howard published his first edition in 1931, there were numerous studies of special periods or aspects of the subject, but he nevertheless had much original research to carry out in addition to bringing earlier work into focus. He was able to locate the descendants of a number of important early figures, such as Francis Hopkinson, James Hewitt, Oliver Shaw, and Benjamin Carr, as well as closer relatives of Lowell and William Mason, Edward MacDowell, Ethelbert Nevin, and Horatio Parker, and thus could offer much new documentation in his book. Even in this edition revised by James Lyons the basic strength of the earlier editions is apparent, and Mr. Howard's formulation of our musical history still remains very useful. Nevertheless, by the time Gil- bert Chase set out to reformulate that history, the study of sociology and folk music had changed many musicological attitudes. Whereas Mr. Howard was willing to take the amateurs and rather inexpert im- migrant professionals of the early 19th century much on their own terms, Mr. Chase views their efforts and affectations more sceptically. He casts his book into three sections with significant headings: "Prep- aration," "Expansion," and "Fulfillment." Only during the last two or three decades, he feels, has serious American music made any real contribution to the art. Largely because of this strong element of interpretation in the Chase book both volumes can still be profitably used. In devoting his space to the development of the total picture, Mr. Chase slights many details and individuals. Howard's index therefore runs to 97 pages, while Chase's has only 23. However, Mr. Chase's book makes better reading, partly because of his challenging thesis, but also because there are fewer unrelated facts to cope with. 5609. Reis, Claire (Raphael). Composers in America; biographical sketches of contem- porary composers with a record of their works. Rev. and enl. ed. New York, Macmillan, 1947. xvi, 399 p. 47-31210 ML390.R38 1947 Mrs. Reis, by dint of much hard work, social pres- tige, and the financial backing she could thereby obtain, has been one of the best friends the American composer has had. In her semiautobiographical Composers, Conductors, and Critics (no. 5620) she tells of her work as chairman of the League of Composers for 25 years. By bringing together in the present book information on the composers of North America and their works, she puts them further in her debt. In the earlier editions (1930, 1932, and 1938) she limited herself to "significant living composers, American-born or American citi- zens," but in the present edition she redefined its scope to include a rather large number of foreign- born composers who had come here and made a definite contribution to American music. The period covered is very much the same as that in Ewen's American Composers Today (no. 5605), which goes back to Arthur Foote (1853-1937) whereas Mrs. Reis starts with Edgar Stillman Kelley ( 1 857-1 944), but both have as their youngest com- poser Peter Mennin, born in 1923. In between these extremes, the distribution by date of birth is simi- lar, but Mrs. Reis gives a larger number of somewhat shorter biographies. She includes 234 composers who were born in the United States or who were brought here young and untrained; 8 who were born in Canada but have pursued at least part of their careers in the United States; 42 others who were born and trained abroad but were in the United States by the 1920's and showing distinct signs of acclimation; and finally 44 composers who arrived here in the later 1930's and early 1940's largely be- cause of political events abroad. At the end she lists 424 names without individual comment, indicating that neither she nor Mr. Ewen has exhausted the potentialities of the subject. Madeleine B. Goss' Modern Music-Makers, Contemporary American Composers (New York, Dutton, 1952. 499 p.) has essays on 37 composers, some of whom are very little known, and furnishes a good full-page photograph of each. 5610. Sonneck, Oscar George Theodore. A bibli- ography of early secular American music (18th century). Rev. and enl. by William Treat Upton. [Washington] Library of Congress, Music Division, 1945. xvi, 616 p. illus. 45-35717 ML120.U5S6 1945 561 1. Dichter, Harry, and Elliott Shapiro. Early American sheet music, its lure and its lore, MUSIC / 819 1768-1889. Including a directory of early Ameri- can music publishers. New York, Bowker, 194 1. xxvii, 287 p. 4 I_ 7397 ML112.D53 "Famous American musical firsts": p. xxv-xxvii. "Lithographers and artists working on American sheet music before 1870, by Edith A. Wright and Josephine A. McDevitt": p. 249-257. Bibliography: p. 259. Although neither of these books is designed pri- marily for reading, both are valuable introductions to important bodies of primary material and each has much to offer in addition to its list of titles. Most of the entries in both are thoroughly anno- tated, and Sonneck in particular usually provided a historical essay on each of the more important melodies (see, for instance, his discussion of "Wash- ington's March" ) . Mr. Upton's revision of Dr. Sonneck's book, originally published in 1905, covers a briefer period, stopping at the end of 1800, and so is able to offer as comprehensive an alphabetical listing as could be brought together. One or more library locations are given for most of the entries; the others are known only through advertisements or other descriptions. The main bibliography (p. 1-487) is followed by lists of early articles and essays on music, of composers, songsters, first lines, patriotic music, opera librettos, and publishers, printers, and engravers. The Dichter-Shapiro book aims only at reporting important editions of songs celebrated in their own day, many of which are still well known in our day. The titles are presented in chronologically arranged groups, sometimes devoted to editions of a single famous song, and sometimes to songs cf like subject matter — "Skating Items," "Railroad Items," and so forth. The sections usually have an introductory paragraph giving the general setting, and each entry is annotated, sometimes ex- tensively. The illustrations, which include 32 fac- similes, are especially attractive. 5612. Sonneck, Oscar George Theodore. Early concert-life in America (1731-1800). New York, Musurgia, 1949. 338 p. A50-7306 ML200.3.S6 1949 This is a photographic reproduction of the original edition published at Leipzig by Breitkopf and Hartel in 1907; the author headed the Music Divi- sion of the Library of Congress from 1902 to 1917, and was chiefly responsible for the eminence which its collections and services have ever since enjoyed. With the persistence of a German-trained scholar and the enthusiasm of an American, Sonneck (1873- 1928) diligently examined every 18th-century American newspaper, magazine, book, and piece of music he could find. The newspapers proved an especially valuable repository of information on American concert-life, which began in the 1730's, flourished during the decade before the Revolution, and was resumed in the mid-1780's. Sonneck's account is based on program announcements, around which is woven a thorough and perceptive discussion of the details of this growth, the whole giving, as Carl Engel said, "the first methodical and correct picture of musical conditions in America prior to 1800." 5613. Turpie, Mary C, comp. American music for the study of American civilizadon. [v. 1] Formal compositions. Folk and popular songs. Minneapolis, Program in American Studies, University of Minnesota [1955] 90 1. 55-1919 ML120.U5T8 This annotated bibliography was assembled to record materials relevant to the study of Ameri- can cultural history. The first two sections in the volume are devoted to serious music and folksongs; a projected third section will include jazz. An inten- tionally abbreviated list of 130 "formal composi- tions" is arranged by composers, and followed by 158 folksongs, arranged by title. Annotations de- scribe the music and locate it in currendy available song collections and on records, while an index lists the subjects of the songs. The book has no specified audience; those who are commissioned with the task of planning a concert of American music can use it advantageously. College teachers of American civilization will be able to draw from it, as will public school teachers in building "units" around events in American history. The annotations dis- play a resolute antipathy to any evidences of "romanticism." 5614. Upton, William Treat. Art-song in Amer- ica; a study in the development of American music. Boston, Oliver Ditson Co., 1930. 279 p. ill us. 3°~33445 ML2811.U7 A supplement to Art-song in America, 1930-1938. [Boston] Oliver Ditson Co., 1938. 41 p. ML2811.U7 Suppl. In surveying an unexpectedly large field from various viewpoints, Mr. Upton produced a compilation which is more encyclopaedia than narrative. It has probably been most valuable to singers in search of American repertoire, and notes on that repertoire. The main volume covers the period from the Revolutionary Francis Hopkinson to 1930, and the supplement extends through 1938. Most of the composers are American by birth, and the works of a few, such as Stephen Foster, are probably thought of today as popular rather than art songs. Mr. Upton's extensive cover- age of early 20th-century composers is noteworthy; 820 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES these men must be thought of today as backward- looking in comparison with the important European composers of their time. The discussion includes biographical material, but its principal value is for analyses of, and comments on, the musical idiom of these songs. B. Contemporary Surveys and Special Topics 5615. Barzun, Jacques. Music in American life. With a foreword by Edward N. Waters. Garden City, N.Y., Doubleday, 1956. 126 p. 56-7651 ML200.5.B3 Dean Barzun of Columbia University, who in- cludes music in his multifarious interests, analyzes in this essay the state of music in America at the mid- century. He is concerned with economics as well as art, and he is especially interested in the new and unprecedented relation between amateur and profes- sional at a time when "music lovers" are increasing while musicians find the going harder and harder. Popular music, our philosophy of education, gov- ernment subsidies, music criticism, and the anom- alous position of the composer are among the many topics discussed. The author's oudook is moderately optimistic, but he does not attempt to gloss over a number of disquieting factors in the total situation. The book is one of a series initiated and sponsored by the Committee on Musicology of the American Council of Learned Societies. In the same year ap- peared another general view, this time from the in- side, by a widely esteemed American composer, Roger Sessions (b. 1896). His Reflections on the Music Life in the United States (New York, Merlin Press, 1956. 184 p. Merlin music books, v. 6) is unmarked by clarity or grace of writing, but it is the product of genuine reflection and offers many valu- able insights. He points out, for instance, that in the absence of both patronage and subsidies, musical enterprises must be entrusted to managers who are competent businessmen, and that it is the necessity of remaining solvent, not abstract or perverse "com- mercialism," which assimilates such situations to the dynamics of business. He is particularly concerned, of course, with the relation of American composers to the European heritage, deprecates a one-sided striving after nationalism, and welcomes the influ- ence of Arnold Schonberg, "one of the truly great figures of our time," as an enrichment of American resources. 5616. Browne, C. A. The story of our national ballads. Rev. and enl. ed. New York, Crowell, 193 1. 315 p. illus. 31-10497 ML3551.B88 1931 National songs owe their success to popular tradi- tion. In the process they usually acquire an aura of anecdotes and assemble an entourage of inspirers, authors, composers, singers, promoters, and their descendants. A few writers have attempted to make their way to the original sources, often with some- what complex and inconclusive results. Such a study was Oscar G. T. Sonneck's Report on "The Star-Spangled Banner," "Hail Columbia," "Amer- ica," and "Yankee Doodle" (Washington, Govt. Print. Off., 1909. 255 p.). By 1914, additional ma- terial had necessitated a complete new edition of "The Star Spangled Banner" (Washington, Govt. Print. Off., 1914. 115 p.) alone! Browne's book employs the opposite approach, with no particular attempt at critical scholarship, and selects anecdotes usually on the basis of their story-value. Some of these, especially those concerning the earlier songs, were dubious or worse even at the time of the first edition of 1919. The revised edition has individual treatments of 16 songs from "Yankee Doodle" to "America the Beautiful," and concluding chapters on the songs of the Spanish American War and World War I. 5617. Clarke, Eric. Music in everyday life. New York, Norton, 1935. 288 p. 35-6558 ML3795.C59M8 This book was written in response to two queries which the Carnegie Corporation of New York asked Mr. Clarke to answer: "What aspects of music in America to-day seem the most important? How can music best be furthered?" The author describes his work as a panorama of the musical landscape for the eyes of the ordinary citizen, and while it is the landscape of the mid-1930's, a surprisingly large number of his conclusions remain pertinent more than two decades later. The great desideratum, Mr. Clarke believed, was to make the transition from musical activity called into being by the generosity of wealthy patrons to a musical culture based on universal musical literacy springing out of true en- joyment and love. "A nation of music lovers" will place less emphasis on the exceptionally talented individual and on success as the goal of a musical career, and more on the cultivation of music as "a language which everybody is capable of understand- ing if not of speaking," and on amateurs playing together for enjoyment. With such goals in mind the author examined the study of music, perform- ance and reproduction, the musical profession, and helps to music such as libraries, publications, and MUSIC / 821 foundations; and at most points made constructive suggestions marked by realism and good sense. 5618. Gelatt, Roland. The fabulous phonograph, from tin foil to high fidelity. Philadelphia, Lippincott, 1955. 320 p. illus. 55-9154 ML1055.G4 Despite biographies of such inventors as Edison (no. 4780) and Berliner and despite fragmentary studies and technical writings on many of its aspects, the phonograph had to wait some 75 years before it achieved, in this book, a sound and substantial re- counting of its history. The book deals with foreign as well as domestic phases of that history, but inevit- ably the bulk of its pages have to do with the tech- nical, commercial, and artistic development of sound recordings in the United States. Edison's basic invention goes back to the fall of 1877, but the com- mercial recording of music was not begun until 1890. By 1895 various improvements had warranted the large-scale promotion of the original cylinder re- cording, but Emile Berliner was already in the field with his potentially superior disc. The Victor Talk- ing Machine Company joined the disc-users in 1901, and the exploitation of operatic stars and arias on its Red Seal records was the first artistic and business triumph in the field; but the production of cylin- ders was kept up until 1911. Technical improve- ments have since gone hand in hand with the addi- tion of further areas of repertory to the phonograph's resources. 5619. Leiter, Robert David. The musicians and Petrillo. New York, Bookman Associates, 1953. 202 p. illus. 53-2437 ML3795.L35 Bibliography: p. [i96]-i97. The "organized" musician in America, and es- pecially the American Federation of Musicians, is the object of this sympathetic but reasonably objec- tive study. The author deals both with the short history of musicians' unions in this country and with the many present-day problems raised by the various forms of "canned" music (except television, the full impact of which had not been felt at the time this book was written). The drawbacks as well as the advantages of strongly centralized unionism are discussed, and the part played by James Caesar Pe- trillo (b. 1892) and other personalities in shaping the destinies of the organized muscian is narrated. Petrillo, a dance-band musician who turned to union politics when he "lost his lip," became the dictator of the Chicago Federation of Musicians in 1922 and of the American Federation of Musicians, succeeding Joseph N. Weber, in 1940. His rigorous mainte- nance of the economic interests of union members soon made him a national figure. 5620. Reis, Claire (Raphael). Composers, conduc- tors, and critics. New York, Oxford Uni- versity Press, 1955. 264 p. illus. 55-8122 ML423.A2R4 For over 30 years Mrs. Reis has been a leading missionary for contemporary music in the United States; for 25 of those years (1923-48) she was chairman of the League of Composers (now merged into the American Section of the International So- ciety for Contemporary Music), which provided modest financial help to composers in the form of commissions, arranged international exchanges of composers and performers, and in general waged the batde for contemporary music. Her book is largely a report on that battle, pardy narrative and partly anecdotal. Its tone is enthusiastic but not hortatory, and it contains few value judgments on, or qualitative comparisons of, individual composers or their works. 5621. Rothenberg, Stanley. Copyright and public performance of music. The Hague, M. Nijhoff, 1954. xv, 188 p. 56—141 1 Law Bibliography: p. [i77]-i79. An American Fulbright scholar in Holland and a leading Dutch publisher joined forces to produce the most useful book on American copyright law and common law as they apply to music. It discusses not only statutes and legal theory, but also actual cases and the performing rights societies such as ASCAP (The American Society of Composers, Authors, and Publishers) and BMI (Broadcast Music, Inc.). Differences between European and American law with regard to performing rights are pointed out. The style of the book is sufficiently free of legal jargon for it to be readily usable by the interested layman. 5622. Sargeant, Winthrop. Geniuses, goddesses, and people. New York, Dutton, 1949. 317 p. 497i°549 ML423.S3 Written by a well-known music critic and former orchestra musician, this book has been included less for its biographical sketches (some devoted to non- musicians such as Lana Turner and Frank Lloyd Wright) than for its opening section of reminis- cences and anecdotes. These reminiscences give a uniquely perceptive and amusing glimpse into that workaday orchestra world that audiences never see and that those who write of music and its star per- formers seldom touch upon. Among the biographi- cal sketches, first published in Life, is one of Arturo Toscanini (under whose baton the author served for some years) that retains its interest despite later and more pretentious biographies. Another valua- ble illumination of a little-explored area of American 822 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES musical life is contained in the relevant portion (Part 6, p. 433-574) of Arthur Loesser's Men, Women, and Pianos (New York, Simon & Schuster, 1954). Technical developments — to which America contributed its share — and the evolution of the piano industry; concert artists and the music they played; piano rolls, recordings, and broadcasting; the role of the parlor piano in American life: these and other aspects of the piano from colonial times to the pres- ent are described soundly and urbanely by a noted American pianist, teacher, and critic. 5623. Smith, Cecil Michener. Worlds of music. Philadelphia, Lippincott, 1952. 328 p. 52-9538 ML200.5.S53 There are 12 worlds in this cosmography of American musical life as it appeared to one viewer — a leading music critic and journalist — at the mid- point of the 20th century. These worlds are those of individual managers, the Columbia concert man- agement, the organized audience, the performer, New York, the "provinces," the opera, the orchestra, the composer, the dancer, the electrical technician, and the music teacher. The book undertakes to demonstrate, sometimes with resignation and some- times with asperity, how these worlds all revolve around a single sun: the concentration of managerial power in the hands of a few men whose goal is business success rather than artistic excellence. Even if one is inclined to discount this thesis to a greater or lesser degree, the book contains many vivid glimpses of professional music circles from the in- side which most laymen will find unusually revela- tory. A similar charge was brought, more harshly and with somewhat different emphases, in Paul S. Carpenter's Music, an Art and a Business (Norman, University of Oklahoma Press, 1950. 245 p.). 5624. Taubman Hyman Howard. Music as a profession, by Howard Taubman. New York, Scribner, 1939. 320 p. 39-27946 ML3795.T23M9 Mr. Taubman, who has been a music journalist for 30 years and is now music editor of The New YorJ^ Times, is an exceptionally gifted exponent of techni- cal and professional matters for the layman. This book was written just before World War II, when the baritone Nelson Eddy was earning over half a million dollars a year, while thousands of other musicians were drawing a subsistence from the Federal Music Project. It was admirably calcu- lated to achieve its purposes, to "clear away some of the illusions and give a few elementary tips to aspirants for a musical career or to their patents or vocational counselors," and even to discourage "some prospects from trying music as a career and turning them to a field where there is more assurance of a living." The developments of the last two decades both inside and out of the realm of music have been so far-reaching that no one should now resort to the book as a practical guide to details, but it remains a vivid picture of professional life in the interwar period, enlivened by many apt anecdotes. The au- thor's essential thesis, that many feel themselves called but few are chosen by the great Amercan audi- ence, continues to be valid. There are good chapters on "The Prodigy," "First Public Appearances," and especially on "Building a Career," which drives home the point that for success a concert artist needs not only the "break" which brings him to public notice, but the imaginative and intelligent exploitation of his opportunity. 5625. Zanzig, Augustus Delafield. Music in American life, present & future. With a foreword by Daniel Gregory Mason. London, New York, Oxford University Press, 1932. 560 p. illus. 32-4346 ML3795.Z2 Bibliography: p. [547]-552- Despite its misleading title — for it deals hardly at all with the professional music activity that con- stitutes the heart of "music in American life" — this book offers much of both historical and sociological interest to the student of American life. Written at the instance of the National Recreation Associa- tion, it surveys amateur musical activity in this country toward the beginning of the Great Depres- sion — in the home, in school, in church, in industry, in playgrounds, museums, and summer camps, and especially in the "community singing" groups that grew to importance at the time of World War I. Although there are differences in scope and in em- phasis, it may be compared with Mr. Barzun's book of the same title (no. 5615), which surveys essen- tially the same scene one depression, one war, and one generation later. C. Localities 5626. Aldrich, Richard. Concert life in New York, 1902-1923. New York, Putnam, 1941. xvii, 795 p. 41-26614 ML200.8.N5A6 "Harold Johnson of the Library of Congress . . . selected the reviews and articles and compiled the index of concert performances in New York from the scrapbooks of Mr. Aldrich." — p. viii. 5627. Downes, Olin. Olin Downes on music; a selection from his writings during the half- MUSIC / 823 century 1906 to 1955. Edited by Irene Downes, with a pref. by Howard Taubman. New York, Simon & Schuster, 1957. 473 p. illus. 56-9923 ML60.D73 Although the musical culture of the United States seems to have been widely diffused throughout its larger cities during the 19th century, since World War I — or perhaps somewhat before — New York has been the musical capital of the country. Artists feel they must make their debuts there, the concert season is longer and more intense, and most of the business side of music is concentrated there. The music critics of the chief New York newspapers are thus in a particularly strategic position for taking the musical pulse of the country. After gaining experience in other jobs, in 1891 Richard Aldrich ( 1 863-1 937) joined the staff of the New Yort^ Trib- une, where he frequendy assisted its chief music critic, Henry E. Krehbiel (see nos. 5658-5659). When William J. Henderson moved from The New Yor^ Times to The Sun in 1902, Aldrich succeeded him as the Times' chief music critic, and served until the spring of 1923. In the meantime, Olin Downes ( 1886— 1955) had begun his career as a music critic at the age of 20 on the Boston Post, and was a thor- oughly experienced writer when he was chosen to succeed Aldrich on the Times in January 1924. The two books above are made up of selected reviews and "Sunday articles" by the two men. All of Aldrich's reviews come from the Times, whereas in the Downes volume the first 76 pages were drawn from the Boston Post. Between them they cover the high spots in New York's musical life for more than half a century. That life, to be sure, is viewed through the eyes of two individuals who were living very much in the thick of things, and these accounts do not take the place of an objective history. Since the extracts in both books are arranged chronologi- cally, they do give an extremely graphic presentation of changing customs, institutions, and attitudes that form the primary stuff of music history. 5628. Ayars, Christine Merrick. Contributions to the art of music in America by the music in- dustries of Boston, 1640-1936. New York, H. W. Wilson, 1937. xv, 326 p. 37-3847 ML200.8.B7A8 Bibliography: p. 307-314. Every musician is aware, if only subconsciously, of what an important role the music industries play in musical life, not merely in supplying the means of musicmaking but even in determining the course of musical evolution — as when the many technical im- provements in wind instruments during the first half of the 19th century made possible the complex bands of today, not to mention the virtuoso wind playing required by orchestral composers since the time of Wagner. Yet the writers who satisfy the public's curiosity about composers and performers, and who instruct students and listeners alike in everything from "appreciation" to xylophone tech- nique, seldom give a page to the instrument makers, the music engravers or copyists, the publishers, or the musical publicists themselves. The present book, which originated as a master's thesis at Boston University, is a unique study of the music industries in a leading American music center, and its value goes far beyond the information it provides about music in Boston itself. Its three main sections are devoted to music publishing (including music jour- nals), music engraving and printing, and instrument making, and there are extensive appendixes which include lists of makers and descriptions of their extant instruments. Even unmusical historians and sociologists will find much to interest them, such as the discussion of the Revere family's music-engrav- ing and bell-founding activities. 5629. Gerson, Robert A. Music in Philadelphia; a history of Philadelphia music, a summary of its current state, and a comprehensive index dic- tionary. Philadelphia, Theodore Presser, 1940. 422 p. illus. 41-1276 ML200.8.P5G4 Bibliography: p. 418-422. In his University of Pennsylvania doctoral disser- tation, Mr. Gerson has attempted to cover the entire history of Philadelphia music from 1700 to 1939. More than half the volume is concerned with the 20th century and deals not only with all types of music in performance but with the varieties of music education, with church music, music publishers, and the manufacturers of phonographs, records, and radios. A wide variety of secondary works, together with a number of primary sources, have contributed a huge body of data which overflows into an "Index- Dictionary of Philadelphia Music" (p. 365-414). The volume of this factual material has proved too great for the achievement of either a meaningful organization or a provocative interpretation of it; but the resulting compilation does serve as a con- venient concentration of information concerning the cultural history of an important center of American 5630. Swan, Howard. Music in the Southwest, 1 825-1 950. San Marino, Calif., Huntington Library, 1952. 316 p. illus. 52-14504 ML200.7.S74S9 Bibliography: p. 295-300. The rapid economic growth of this region of the United States has been accompanied by a no less remarkable musical growth. Omitting the Indian and Spanish periods in California, which have been 824 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES thoroughly covered elsewhere, this history begins with the Mormon settlers of Utah, who had their own hymnody and "a particular regard for band music." The author traces the evidences of musical activity in the mining camps of Arizona and Nevada (especially Virginia City), in the final phase of the old Spanish institutions of California, and in the "cow counties" of the south of the State, which were filling up with immigrants from the East. The last six chapters narrate the rise of serious music in southern California and particularly in Los Angeles, where a season of eight symphony concerts was presented as early as 1893-94. Mr. Swan's book is not a technical treatise or a musicological study, but a colorful if somewhat miscellaneous portrayal of the development of musical life as an integral part of a region's social and economic development. The verses of several Mormon folk and railroad songs, and an amusing set of "Rules which should be Observed in Dancing Parties [St. George, Utah, 1887]," are among the appendixes. Mrs. Adella Prentiss Hughes' Music Is My Life (Cleveland, World Pub. Co., 1947. 319 p.) is a view of the development of the concert life of Cleveland through the eyes of the woman who managed most of it during half a century. D. Religious Music 5631. Davison, Archibald. Protestant church mu- sic in America. Boston, Schirmer Music Co., 1933. 182 p. 34—53 ML3111.D26P7 "Four brief lists of hymns, anthems, organ selec- tions and junior choir selections": p. 173-175. The eminent professor of music at Harvard (b. 1883) here presented a statement of his lofty con- ception of religious music. The first half of his book is a vigorously written polemic exposing those "Atti- tudes and Conditions" which have depressed Prot- estant standards of sacred music: indifference, com- placency, isolation, deficient music education, individualism, association (bad music loved for the childhood memories it evokes), tradition, prejudice, and disorganization. In the second half, "The The- ory and Practice of Church Music," Dr. Davison develops the more positive aspects of his credo. His ideals are austere, and he is willing to leave many of the best tunes to the devil; but his reasons are always presented logically and convincingly. In "The Uses of Music in Worship," he justifies these ideals with arguments both esthetic and religious, and in a long section on "The Material of Sacred Music (p. 94- 150)," he provides one of the few astute and well- illustrated analyses of its musical idiom. 5632. Ellinwood, Leonard Webster. The history of American church music. New York, Morehouse-Gorham Co., 1953. xiv, 274 p. illus. 53-13402 ML200.E4 "Biographies of American church musicians"; p. 201-242. This history of American church music, while extensive and thorough, does not attempt to be ex- haustive. For instance, if one compares its contents with those of Foote's Three Centuries of American Hymnody (no. 5633), one finds that the two books have very little material in common. Dr. Ellin- wood, an expert on pre-Renaissance church music, a deacon of the Washington Cathedral, and a Library of Congress cataloger of books on religion, has in- vestigated a number of the less-known phases of this history. The book is divided into three chronologi- cal parts, with the breaks at 1820 and 1920, and there are chapters on such subjects as "[Religious Music] in New Spain," "Singing Schools and Early Choirs," "The First Organs and Bells," "The Oxford Movement and Boy Choirs," "Organ Repertory," and "[Contemporary] Matters Liturgical." Ap- pendix B, "Selected Music Lists," is largely devoted to the repertory of the Washington Cathedral for the decade 1941-51, which extended from medieval plainsong to strictly contemporary American, Eng- lish, Canadian, and Russian compositions. The book is well illustrated, and its material is carefully documented and presented in an authoritative and scholarly manner. 5633. Foote, Henry Wilder. Three centuries of American hymnody. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1940. 418 p. 40-34386 ML3111.F6T4 This objective and readable book by a distin- guished Unitarian clergyman remains the most satis- factory general history of American religious music, although it is throughout more concerned with the words, and their quality as poetry and religious thought, than it is with the tunes and their quality as music. The mainstream of this tradition, be- ginning with the Bay Psalm Book of 1640, is traced with little deviation into bypaths, but the author finds space for a surprising number of anecdotes MUSIC / 825 and other details. To Dr. Foote the great age of American hymn-writing fell in the four decades 1845-85, and he discovered, somewhat surprisingly in view of the coldly intellectual atmosphere sup- posed to have prevailed there, "that, throughout the nineteenth century, Harvard produced by far the most notable succession of hymn writers in the English-speaking world coming from any single institution." The only serious omission is the gospel- song tradition, the early history of which must be traced in George Pullen Jackson's White and Negro Spirituals (no. 5555), while its 20th-century history remains to be written. Dr. Foote acknowledges his debt to three more general books which are indis- pensable to the study of American hymnody: Louis F. Benson's The English Hymn (New York, Doran, 1915. 624 p.), Percy A. Scholes' The Puritans and Music in England and New England (London, Ox- ford University Press, 1934. 428 p.), and John Julian's Dictionary of Hymnology, rev. ed. (London, J. Murray, 1907. xviii, 1768 p.). 5634. Metcalf, Frank J. American writers and compilers of sacred music. New York, Abingdon Press, 1925. 373 p. illus. 25-18159 ML106.U3M3 This biographical dictionary covers the 18th and 19th centuries; it includes the better-known men, but its chief value is for brief, factual sketches of lesser-known figures. A pioneer scholar in this field, Metcalf (1865-1945) drew upon a huge and diversified body of source and secondary material. Some of his information has since been corrected or superseded, and much of it appears relatively insig- nificant now. But his scholarship still provides us with a convenient and generally reliable compila- tion of the biographical and bibliographical details of early American religious music. E. Popular Music 5635. Goldberg, Isaac. Tin Pan Alley; a chronicle of the American popular music racket. New York, John Day Co., 1930. 341 p. illus. 30-31878 ML3551.G64T4 Tin Pan Alley did not receive its name until the turn of the century, but it crystallized out of Ameri- can popular musicmaking in the early 1890's, when a cluster of songwriters and publishers setded along 14th Street in lower Manhattan, then the theatrical and amusement center of New York. The name, which Mr. Goldberg attributed to "a minor Ameri- can poet," is elsewhere derived from "the tinny quality of the cheap, over-used pianos in music pub- lishers' offices." The Alley moved uptown in stages as the theaters did, and with the advent of cinema and radio it has become a function of the motion picture and air-wave industries. Mr. Goldberg attributed the Alley's basic idea — "the scheme of building [one's] songs around and into stage pro- ductions" — to Charles K. Harris, who reached the Alley via Milwaukee and Chicago. Goldberg was considerably more interested in the music itself than in the mechanics of song selling, publishing, and plugging, and his impressionistic and rhapsodic writing does not make it easy to come at a fact. He carried his sketch of American popular music back to blackface minstrelsy, and included a somewhat irrelevant chapter on Sousa, de Koven, and Victor Herbert. The book nevertheless has the virtues of a pioneer work, full of enthusiasm for its subject: the Tin Pan Alley song "establishes a vital circuit with 431240—60 54 the life out of which it arises" and expresses "the real philosophy of the multitude — its aims and aspira- tions, its simple notions of hell, purgatory and paradise." 5636. Kahn, Ely J., Jr. The Voice; the story of an American phenomenon. New York, Har- per, 1947. xvii, 125 p. illus. 47-2598 ML420.S656K3 "The Voice" is, of course, Frank Sinatra (b. 1917), who shot from relative obscurity in 1941 to major celebrity in 1943. Most of the material in this slim book appeared originally in the pages of The New Yorker and dates from a relatively early period in Sinatra's career when he was notorious as the idol of teen-age girls but had not yet solidified his repu- tation as a singer or made a new one as a straight actor in motion pictures. Mr. Kahn is therefore less interested in providing a consecutive picture of Sinatra's development, although he discreetly works in a few biographical facts, than in viewing with amazement the extraordinary antics of the teen- agers. Sinatra therefore serves as the focal point of Kahn's story, but it is rather the teen-agers who supply the "American phenomenon" of the title. 5637. Paskman, Dailey, and Sigmund G. Spaeth. "Gentlemen, be seated!" A parade of the old-time minstrels. With a foreword by Daniel Frohman; profusely illustrated from old prints and photographs and with complete music for voice and 826 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES piano. Garden City, N.Y., Doubleday, Doran, 1928. xvii, 247 p. illus. 28-15892 ML3561.P2G3 PN3195.P3 The tradition of blackface, beginning in 1828 with "Daddy" Rice (Thomas Dartmouth Rice, 1808- 1860) and extending into our own day with Al Jol- son (1888-1950) and Eddie Cantor (b. 1892), could hardly fail to make an interesting subject for a book. This one is a miscellany of history (not espe- cially reliable), songs (both texts and music), anec- dotes, biography, and scripts. Its value as a reference source is slight, but as a book to be read for pleasure, it captures much of the carefree disorganization which characterized Negro minstrelsy, the most popular form of stage entertainment in the United States from the 1840's through the 1870's. 5638. Smith, Cecil Michener. Musical comedy in America. New York, Theatre Arts Books, 1950. 374 p. illus. 50-58209 ML200.S6 Light musicodramatic entertainments have reg- ularly been with us in one form or another, at least since the early 18th-century beginnings of opera buffa in Italy and of the ballad opera in England, but Mr. Smith settles on the performance of The Blac\ Croo\ in New York in 1866 as the time when "the popular musical stage in the United States reached major dimensions." From this point down to the presentation of Rodgers and Hammerstein's South Pacific in 1950, Mr. Smith manages to say something about practically every revue, operetta, and musical comedy produced on Broadway. This material is offered in chronological order, save when some composer has risen to particular eminence and a series of his musical comedies may be discussed in sequence. As a whole, however, the book is a tapestry of tides and personalities with little attempt to sort out trends or force the material into patterns, and hence probably offers a truer picture of the chaotic Broadway stage, with its fashions and fads and foreign influences, than would a more formal history. 5639. Spaeth, Sigmund G. A history of popular music in America. New York, Random House, 1948. xv, 729 p. 48-8954 ML2811.S7 "Additional popular music from Colonial times to the present": p. 587-657. Bibliography: p. 658- 662. America's most significant contribution to the world of music, many think, is to be found in its tough and virile popular music, pre-eminendy the improvisatory style of performance deriving from the Negro and known successively as ragtime, jazz, swing, and "bop." This is by no means, however, the only type of popular music created in America that has found wide acceptance in many countries throughout the world, and indeed, since jazz is es- sentially a style of performance, it is more difficult to export than are the products of Tin Pan Alley and Broadway. It is to these latter that Mr. Spaeth de- votes his attention almost exclusively. He does give something over 200 pages to the major songs of our "infancy" and "adolescence," but in this space he only reaches the 1880's, whereas nearly 400 pages are devoted to the next 70 years. Furthermore, Mr. Spaeth's mastery of his subject increases strikingly as he approaches the 20th century and is able to enrich his researches out of personal experience. This should not be surprising, for there seems to be some- thing essentially contemporary about popular music, and few people are interested in it once it has ceased to be popular. Indeed, even with popular music not yet forgotten interest seems concentrated on specific "hit" songs rather than on their com- posers or the general evolution of a style, and hence Mr. Spaeth's book resembles more an annotated chronological bibliography than an ordinary history book. One famous song after another is briefly cited or discussed. The chronological tale is inter- rupted infrequently by a few pages devoted to the careers of such outstanding popular composers as Irving Berlin, Jerome Kern, George Gershwin, Cole Porter, and Richard Rodgers, but for the most part there is a steady progress year by year through the crop of popular songs. Such a diet of details needs an exceptional appetite to make it palatable in any quantity, but Mr. Spaeth's grasp of the popular music of the 20th century makes his book excellent for reference, especially since his facts are generally accurate and his index is unusually full. Julius Mattfeld's Variety Music Cavalcade, 1620-1950 (New York, Prentice-Hall, 1952. 637 p.) is more strictly bibliographical in form, but is essentially not very different from Mr. Spaeth's book. The early years are covered by periods or decades, and finally there are annual lists. Each group is preceded by a paragraph giving nonmusical contemporary events as background, but the songs themselves are simply listed without commentary. Mr. Mattfeld does give their publishers, a type of information deliberately omitted by Spaeth, and he has space for rather more entries. The two books complement each other in several respects, but Mattfeld's is essentially a refer- ence volume and could be read even less comfortably than Spaeth's. 5640. Wittke, Carl F. Tambo and bones; a history of the American minstrel stage. Durham, N.C., Duke University Press, 1930. 269 p. 31-2026 ML2870.W4 PN3195.W5 In the show-business tradition of "comics" and "straight-men," Paskman and Spaeth's book on min- MUSIC / 827 strelsy (no. 5637) could be described as a "comic history," the present volume as a "straight history." The books complement each other insofar as Pask- man and Spaeth recapture the fantasy of these enter- tainments, while Dean Wittke's account is more sober, factual, and objective. The first three chapters trace its history of 100 years, bringing in more details and organizing them better than do Paskman and Spaeth. The great days of the minstrel show, the author points out, were over by 1880, but the form took nearly half a century to die out, its extinction being marked by the sudden and final closing of the Al G. Field Minstrels in the spring of 1928. The last two chapters are concerned with performance techniques, originally standardized by the E. P. Christy Minstrels, and brief biographies of notable minstrels. What Dean Wittke's book lacks in charm and vitality is made up in reliability. F. Jazz 5641. Blesh, Rudi, and Harriet (Grossman) Janis. They all played ragtime, the true story of an American music. New York, Knopf, 1950. xviii, 338, xviii p. illus. 50-12082 ML3561.J3B49 1950 "It has been two generations since ragtime piano came along to give its own first decade in the public eye the name of the 'Gay Nineties.' It was un- mistakably a new idea in music. America took it straightway to its heart — it was love at first sight. And, following America by a matter almost of months, Europe too fell under the syncopated spell." So begins this story of one of the important phases of jazz — a style that lived a flourishing, colorful exist- ence and that still exerts a strong effect on modern jazz. The Chicago World's Fair of 1893 first brought the ragtime players to the notice of a large public, and they held the center of the stage until the jazz craze began in 1917, a year also marked by the death of one of the pioneers, "the king of ragtime composers," Scott Joplin (b. 1868). The other major figure in Mr. Blesh's narrative is John Stilwell Stark (1841-1927), publisher and propagandist of "classic ragtime." Chiefly by means of interviews, both with surviving musicians and with others who knew them, the authors have reconstructed a detailed ac- count of the development of ragtime, with informed observations about the music, which they have ex- amined extensively. Appendixes (p. 273-338) in- clude a "Chronology of Important Ragtime Dates," "Lists of Ragtime and Other Compositions," "A List of Disk Phonograph Records," "A Selected List of Cylinder Phonograph Records Prior to 19 14," and "A List of Player-Piano Rolls." 5642. Feather, Leonard G. The encyclopedia of jazz. Foreword by Duke Ellington. New York, Horizon Press, 1955. 360 p. illus. 55-10774 ML3561.J3F39 The core of this encyclopedia is a group of biogra- phies of 1,065 ) azz musicians (p. 75-332). The sketches are mosdy short, but succincdy written and full of information. Clustered around the biogra- phies are other sections, some of which are equally useful, while others merely add dispensable decora- tion to the cake. Among the former are "A Brief History of Jazz," "What Is Jazz? A Musical Analy- sis," "A Basic Collection of [50 LP] Jazz Records (p. 338-344)," "Glossary of Terms Used by Jazz Musicians" (from the Apple to zoot), "Jazz Or- ganizations," "Record Companies," and a selective bibliography (p. 351-353). The "Hall of Fame" and "Giants of Jazz" are necssarily controversial and so of dubious value in a reference book, and the "Birthdays" can satisfy nothing more urgent than the curiosity of juvenile devotees. The book is profusely illustrated with good photographs, which include many published for the first time, and are usually so perceptively and vividly conceived as to constitute important documents by themselves. 5643. Lomax, Alan. Mister Jelly Roll; the for- tunes of Jelly Roll Morton, New Orleans Creole and "inventor of jazz." Drawings by David Stone Martin. New York, Duell, Sloan & Pearce, 1950. xvii, 318 p. illus. 50-8436 ML410.M82L6 From a recorded autobiography, from numerous interviews with contemporaries, and from a broad acquaintance with the music and the personages of jazz, Alan Lomax has narrated here the extraor- dinary life of one of the most colorful figures of American music, christened Ferdinand Joseph Morton (1885-1941) but universally known as Jelly Roll Morton. His "autobiography" was re- corded during most of a month (May 1938) for the Archive of Folk Song in the Library of Congress by Mr. Lomax, and this source supplies the warp and woof of his skillfully woven fabric. The book reads almost like a fantasy, although Mr. Lomax points out some of Jelly Roll's illusions about him- self, but if it seems extravagant here and there, the atmosphere it recreates is authentic, which is an 828 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES important thing for a man of Morton's genuine creativity. The story is rather a sad one, for Mor- ton, after reaching a peak of fame and prosperity during the 1920's, had difficulty in making a living during the depression, and his health was ruined when, soon after the Library recordings were con- cluded, a roughneck Negro stabbed him in a cheap Washington tavern. On the practical side, the ap- pendixes include some of Jelly Roll's best tunes and arrangements, a chronological list of his copyrighted compositions (p. 292-296), and an extensive dis- cography (p. 297-318). 5644. Ramsey, Frederic, and Charles Edward Smith, eds. Jazzmen. New York, Har- court, Brace, 1939. xv, 360 p. illus. 39-31807 ML3561.R24J2 The editors, aided by contributions from William Russell, Stephen W. Smith, Wilder Hobson, Roger Pryor Dodge, and others, cover the three cities where jazz arose, New Orleans, Chicago, and New York, together with the hot jazz of 1939, in 15 chap- ters. They describe the all-important atmosphere of these locales and give vivid material on the out- standing individuals and groups that took part in creating jazz, including Louis Armstrong, Bix Beiderbecke, King Oliver and his Creole Jazz Band, The Austin High School Gang, The Five Pennies, and others. These people and places have frequently been written about since Jazzmen appeared, but hardly with more skill or devotion. 5645. Sargeant, Winthrop. Jazz: hot and hybrid. New and enl. ed. New York, Dutton, 1946. 287 p. 46-7084 ML3561.J3S3 1946 Bibliography: p. 267-274. The first serious studies of jazz appeared in Europe. Of the American books which followed them, Mr. Sargeant's (first published in 1938) was one of the first to approach jazz music analytically. In both the first and the present edition, the author's purpose is "to define jazz, to analyze its musical anatomy, to trace its origins and influences, to indi- cate the features that distinguish it from other kinds of music and that give it its unique place in the music of the world." Mr. Sargeant's ideas on the origins of jazz are as speculative and open to objec- tions as are those of other writers before and since, but his analyses of scale-structure, rhythm, melody, harmony, form, and instrumentation are so clearly done that they will be long and widely meaningful, even if they leave room for occasional differences of detail. Mr. Sargeant, in conclusion, does not believe that jazz is a fine art. 5646. Stearns, Marshall W. The story of jazz. New York, Oxford University Press, 1956. 367 p. illus. 56-8012 ML3561.J3S8 Dr. Stearns, a professor of English literature at Hunter College who is also president of the Institute of Jazz Studies, is notably thorough in showing con- nections of jazz with other forms of music, and his tracing of the strands that make up the fabric of jazz has been termed panoramic. The multiple genesis from West Africa, Latin America, and early Afro- America; the multitude of components from blues, work songs, spirituals, minstrel shows, and camp meeting music; and the styles indigenous to particular centers of its flourishing life, from New Orleans to 52nd Street, create a complex problem in presentation, solved here with thoroughness and clarity. Jazz harmonies, melody, rhythm, and in- strumentation are dissected in generally clear and perceptive fashion, and many of jazz's hitherto elusive traits are particularized. G. Orchestras and Bands 5647. Grant, Margaret, and Herman S. Hettinger. America's symphony orchestras, and how they are supported. New York, Norton, 1940. 326 p. 40-27266 ML3795.G82A5 This study of the economic problems of American symphony orchestras on the eve of World War II, made in order to find means of improving their financial stability, was financed by the Carnegie Corporation of New York and carried out by the National Orchestral Survey under the chairmanship of J. Frederic Dewhurst. Questionnaires were filled out by 16 major orchestras (with budgets of $100,000 or more) and by approximately 135 secondary ones, professional, semiprofessional, or largely amateur. These documents were supplemented by interviews and by audience studies in three communities. The basic facts are set forth in Chapter 3, "Orchestra Budgets and Sources of Income," but the variation between orchestras of different types was so great as to make brief summary impossible. Chapter 9 contains suggestions for "Increasing the Operating Income," and Chapter 10 for "Meeting the Operat- ing Deficit." The authors saw little likelihood "that in the predictable future symphony orchestras can be made entirely self-supporting," but thought that the best prospects lay in measures "to build the MUSIC / 829 orchestra firmly into the community as an integral cultural force," and especially through "a careful diversification of services," including children's and youth concerts. Appendix A, Mrs. Miles Benham's plan of work and organization for the Women's Committee for the Cincinnati Symphony Orchestra, 1939-40 (p. 285-300), is a formidable document. 5648. Howe, Mark A. De Wolfe. The Boston Symphony Orchestra, 1881-1931. Semicen- tennial ed., rev. and extended in collaboration with John N. Burk. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1931. 272 p. illus. 31-11067 ML200.8.B7B7 1931 5649. Johnson, Harold Earle. Symphony Hall, Boston. Boston, Litde, Brown, 1950. 431 p. illus. 50-9646 ML200.8.B72S95 1950 Henry Lee Higginson (1834-1919) was frustrated in his attempt to become a professional musician, al- though he went to Vienna for the purpose; at the age of 33 he entered the family banking house of Lee, Higginson, and Co., and within 13 years had accu- mulated a fortune sufficient to permit his heart's de- sire — to give Boston a permanent, professional symphony orchestra (1881). For 37 years "The Major" paid the annual deficits of the Boston Sym- phony; only in the last year of his life did he turn its affairs over to a board of trustees, one of whose members was Mr. Howe. Not till its fourth season did the orchestra secure a conductor capable of building a first-class organization; but after five seasons under Wilhelm Gericke, whom Higginson had lured from the Vienna Opera, the Boston Sym- phony was ready for the leadership of Arthur Ni- kisch, the greatest virtuoso conductor of his day. Mr. Howe's concise narrative was originally pub- lished in 1914, when the orchestra was about to enter its years of crisis: its German conductor, Karl Muck, and its predominandy German personnel made it the target of hysterical attack during the war years; Higginson had set his face against unionization of the players; and Higginson's own finances were shaken by the war. Mr. Burk's supplementary nar- rative (p. 130-172) tells how these were all resolved during, and in large part through, the leadership of Pierre Monteux. Mr. Johnson's volume, issued to celebrate the 50th anniversary of the building which has been the orchestra's home since 1900, is able to survey the whole quarter-century ( 1924-49) of Serge Koussevitzky, the Russian whose incandescent lead- ership reconciled Boston to an extraordinarily varied repertory. Its appendixes listing works performed by and soloists appearing with the orchestra (p. 311— 420) supersede those in Howe. Chapter V, "Con- cert Life," reviews the recitalists and musical organ- izations other than the Boston Symphony that have appeared in the Hall. At the end of Chapter VI is a brief and hardly adequate description of the unique and delightful Boston Pops — summer pro- grams of lighter music, with the audience at refreshment tables. 5650. Mueller, John H. The American symphony orchestra; a social history of musical taste. Bloomington, Indiana University Press, 195 1. 437 P- illus. 51-13728 ML200.M8 Mr. Mueller, a professor of sociology at Indiana University, describes his book as "an analysis and survey of the public life of orchestra compositions as performed in American symphony orchestras, with the intention of tracing" and accounting for their fluctuations. It is based on 15 years' study of the programs of 17 leading American orchestras, and has numerous graphs and diagrams. After a brief presentation of the European background and the American beginnings of "the concert system," he gives in Chapter 3 "profiles" of these 17 orchestras in the order of their establishment, which provide a very convenient concentration of widely scattered information. Chapter 4, "Life Spans of Composers in the Repertoire," identifies the six leaders, in the order of their long-term popularity, as Beethoven, Brahms, Wagner, Tchaikovsky, Mozart, and Bach (for the period 1945-50 Richard Strauss was in 5th place and Bach only 10th). The remaining com- posers are divided into those "with low and stable trends" such as Haydn and Handel; those "in the ascending phase" such as Strauss and Sibelius; those "in the descending phase" such as Schumann and Schubert; those "with full life cycles" such as Dvorak and Grieg; and "the forgotten names" such as Spohr and Raff. Chapter 5, "National Sources of the Orchestral Repertoire," reveals that Austro-German music has slipped from a near monopoly of 80 per- cent to a mere huge lead of 50 percent; that Russian music, after running neck and neck with French for three decades, took a secure lead after 1920; and that since about 1905 American music has done better than English, Czech, Scandinavian, or Italian. Contemporary American composers run behind con- temporary foreigners only because of the popularity of Prokofieff and Shostakovitch. Chapter 6 is a miscellany, with sections on "Management and Union" and "The Audience and Its Folkways," especially its listening and applause habits. The concluding chapter is an abstract and inconclusive discussion of the bases of musical taste. 5651. Otis, Philo Adams. The Chicago Symphony Orchestra, its organization, growth and de- velopment, 1891-1924. Chicago, Clayton F. Sum- my Co., 1925. 466 p. illus. 25-9031 ML200.8.C5O84 83O / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 5652. Russell, Charles Edward. The American orchestra and Theodore Thomas. Garden City, N.Y., Doubleday, Page, 1927. xx, 344 p. illus. 27-25803 ML1211.R88 Mr. Otis (1846-1930) became trustee, member of the Executive Committee, and secretary of the Or- chestral Association during its fifth season (1895), and continued to serve until his death. His volume consists of conscientious annals of both the associa- tion and the orchestra which it maintained. Re- ceipts and expenses of each season are regularly given; after the completion of Orchestra Hall in 1904, the rental of its offices frequently enabled the orchestra to conclude a season with a modest profit. The soloists of each season are listed, sample pro- grams incorporated, and memorial performances given particular notice. The Appendix (p. 391- 448) lists the members of the association and the personnel of the orchestra season by season. Mr. Otis was justly proud of his long association with Theodore Thomas, the hero of the second tide, which received the Pulitzer prize for biography in 1928. Thomas (1835-1905), the son of the Stadtpfeifer of Esens in East Friesland, Germany, was brought to America at the age of 10, and made appearances as a violin prodigy. In 1862 he organized an orches- tra of his own, which lasted under varying circum- stances until 1888, and from 1869 he and it engaged in regular and widespread tours, which introduced artfully constructed orchestral programs to com- munities quite unfamiliar with them. The success of hs missionary efforts could be measured by the "Thomas Festivals" of later years, when he and his band joined with local choruses in large concerted works. The great proliferation of "the grand or- chestra" in 20th-century America is here regarded as being largely the result of his work. Certainly Appendix G, "Works Introduced into this Coun- try by Theodore Thomas" (p. 323-335), speaks for itself. Thomas was succeeded as conductor of the Chicago Orchestra by Frederick Stock (1872-1942), a German-born violist recruited for the season of 1895, who had gradually assumed the position of assistant conductor. Mr. Otis' annals cover Mr. Stock's first 19 seasons, but his final 18, and the checkered fortunes of the orchestra since his death, have yet to be chronicled. 5653. Schwartz, Harry Wayne. Bands of Amer- ica. Garden City, N.Y., Doubleday, 1957. 320 p. illus. 57- 66 97 ML1311.S35 A chatty, knowledgeable volume based primarily on hearsay and personal recollections, and chiefly concerned with the so-called "military" bands from Patrick S. Gilmore (1829-1892) through J. P. Sousa — actually touring or town bands that were once as much a part of American show business as vaudeville or blackface minstrelsy. The author is perhaps unduly pessimistic about the passing of this form of entertainment, forgetting the thousands of school bands that are going concerns today — not to mention the "big time" bands of Goldman and the armed services. A no more scholarly but likewise unique treatment of true military bands, those of the armed services, is William Carter White's A History of Military Music in America (New York, Exposition Press, 1945. 272 p.). 5654. Sherman, John K. Music and maestros; the story of the Minneapolis Symphony Orches- tra. Minneapolis, University of Minnesota Press, 1952. 357 p. illus. 52-1 1 107 ML200.8.M52M58 The author, familiar with his subject from his daily activity first as music critic and then as arts editor of the Minneapolis Star and Tribune, was born five years before the inauguration of the Min- neapolis Symphony on November 5, 1903. Minne- apolis itself was a mere 36, having been incorporated in 1867, and has frequently congratulated itself on being the youngest city to form an orchestra of national prominence. This it achieved, further- more, under the direction of a local musician, for Emil Oberhoffer (1867-1933), if Bavarian by birth, had been identified with the musical life of the Twin Cities for about a decade when he undertook the leadership of the new orchestra, with such success that his resignation in 1922, after increasing friction with the orchestra's chief sponsor, was generally regarded as a municipal calamity, and after three decades he was still warmly remembered. He in- augurated the policy of farflung orchestral tours, making the Minneapolis Symphony better known in the country than many older, bigger, and more sedentary orchestras. Mr. Sherman, with a jour- nalist's instinct for the newsworthy and an uncom- mon narrative skill, has woven the various strands and levels of the orchestra's life into what is prob- ably the most readable history of an American, if not of any orchestra. The regimes of each of Ober- hoffer's successors — Henri Verbrugghen (1924-31), Eugene Ormandy (1932-36), Dimitri Mitropoulis (1938-49), and Antal Dorati (since 1949) — are indi- vidually characterized. The excellent "Listings for Reference" (p. 303-340) provided by Carlos Fischer, an orchestra veteran of 1903, include complete per- sonnel and out-of-town engagements, abridged repertoire, and recordings as of September 1952. MUSIC / 831 H. Opera 5655. Graf, Herbert. Opera for the people. Minneapolis, University of Minnesota Press, 1951. 289 p. illus. 51-13790 ML1711.G7 The author's preface states that the aim of his book is to offer "sufficient facts and suggestions to stimu- late further thinking about the production of opera in America . . . and thus to contribute to the prog- ress of opera as an integral part of the life of the American community." Drawing on his wide expe- rience as stage director for some of the world's leading opera companies as well as for opera in films and television, Mr. Graf thoroughly covers the prob- lems confronted in the production of opera, includ- ing adequate English translations, sponsorship, stage direction ("the stepchild of grand opera production in America"), buildings, and the training of the singers. The second section of the book records developments toward a popular American opera, emphasizing the musical theater on Broadway, and opera in communities, schools, motion pictures, and television. In his last section, "Blueprint for the Future," the author suggests ideas for the model opera house, ways to obtain financial support, pat- terns of cooperation with existing musical activities, and other information pertinent to any group inter- ested in establishing a local opera company. 5656. Hipsher, Edward Ellsworth. American opera and its composers. A complete history of serious American opera, with a summary of the lighter forms which led up to its birth. Philadelphia, Theodore Presser Co., 1934. 478 p. illus. 35-2381 ML1711.H4 1934 Bibliography: p. 451-453. The bulk of this book is devoted to short sketches of American composers who have written operas. These are arranged alphabetically and give a brief sketch of the composer and the names of his most important operas, as well as occasional anecdotes, illustrations, and plots. This section is preceded by a brief history of American opera, and followed by a survey of ballet and masque and a conclusion which observes, as of 1925, a flowering of American oper- atic culture. To the author an American opera is one "written in America, by one who is either a native or who has been long enough a resident to have ab- sorbed something of American life. Or, it might be written by an American composer temporarily abroad." Mr. Hipsher is generous toward operas which he considers American, but he does not regard American opera as having reached its zenith. Mean- while he does not decry foreign influences; rather he sees these as contributing to a culture from which will someday be written the "great native American Opera." 5657. Kolodin, Irving. The story of the Metropol- itan Opera, 1883-1950, a candid history. New York, Knopf, 1953. xx, 607, xxxviii p. illus. 52-12212 ML1711.8.N32M45 This is a critical history of the major seat of opera in America. The first two sections cover the social and economic aspects of the Metropolitan. The major part of the book, "Operas and Artists," is chiefly concerned with the repertory, the performers, and the productions from 1883 to 1950. The detailed assessment of the caliber of individual performances reflects extensive research by the author. Of ref- erence value is the "Compilation of Works" at the end (p. 597-607), which lists the operas, ballets, and choral pieces presented from 1883 to 1952, and gives the seasons in which each was produced and the number of performances. There are abundant and well selected illustrations. 5658. Krehbiel, Henry Edward. Chapters of opera; being historical and critical observations and records concerning the lyric drama in New York from its earliest days down to the present time. 3d ed., rev., with an appendix containing tables of the opera seasons, 1 908-191 1, etc. New York, Holt, 191 1. xvii, 460 p. illus. 12-262 ML1711.8.N3K73 5659. Krehbiel, Henry Edward. More chapters of opera; being historical and critical observa- tions and records concerning the lyric drama in New York from 1908 to 1918. With illustrations and tables of performances within the period described. New York, Holt, 1919. xvi, 474 p. 20-217 ML1711.8.N3K74 Among a galaxy of distinguished music critics of early 20th-century New York, Henry Edward Kreh- biel (1854-1923) was the finest scholar. His re- search in the history of New York opera was ac- curate, but limited to highlights; for a more com- plete and detailed picture, Odell's Annals of the New Yor\ Stage (no. 4924) must be consulted. Among local histories of American opera, however, Krehbiel's work remains the finest. A few mono- graphs, less detailed and usually less reliable, cover other cities, but the best accounts are usually to be 832 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES found in the large general histories of local stages, such as Reese D. James' Old Drury of Philadelphia (Philadelphia, University of Pennsylvania Press, 1932. xv, 694 p.) and Arthur Herman Wilson's A History of the Philadelphia Theatre, 1835 to 1855 (Philadelphia, University of Pennsylvania Press, 1935. 724 p.) for early Philadelphia, and Edmond M. Gagey's The San Francisco Stage (no. 4918) for San Francisco. Chapters of Opera summarizes the years before 1825 and then delves into the beginnings of Italian opera in New York, a favorite subject of Krehbiel's. The next few decades are passed over lighdy, but a more detailed narrative resumes with the early impresarios (the memoirs of two of whom are of great interest: Max Maretzek's Crotchets and Quavers (New York, S. French, 1855. 346 p.), and James Henry Mapleson's The Mapleson Memoirs (New York, Bedford, Clarke, 1888. 2 v.)). The establishment of the Metropolitan Opera, the rage for Wagner, and the success of Oscar Hammerstein are discussed, as Krehbiel's narrative begins to in- corporate material from his own experience and his writings as critic for the New Yorl{ Tribune, whose staff he joined in 1880. More Chapters of Opera carries this survey from 1909 through 1918. The musical problems of the times are discussed frankly, with acute critical insight, and in a dignified style. Whereas Chapters of Opera derives much of its worth from historical objectivity, the main value of the sequel is its critical commentary on the con- temporary scene by one of the most capable and respected critics of the day. 5660. Moore, Edward C. Forty years of opera in Chicago. New York, Liveright, 1930. 430 p. illus. 31-26070 ML1711.8.C5M7 To write the history of four decades of opera in a great city is no mean task; to relate this history in an interesting and readable style requires even greater skill. Here is a wealth of information con- cerning the growth of opera in Chicago, but, un- fortunately, it often takes the form of a tedious ac- count of board meetings, correspondence, and fi- nances, interspersed with anecdotes of temperamen- tal singers. The absence of a table of contents and chapter headings lessens the value of the book. Sta- tistics of performances from 1910 to 1929, board members and officers of each season, soloists, and cities visited on tours are listed in the appendix. 5661. Sonneck, Oscar G. T. Early opera in Amer- ica. New York, G. Schirmer, 1915. 230 p. illus. I 5 _ 5°39 ML1711.S73 Contents. — pt. 1. Pre-Revolutionary opera. — pt. 2. Post-Revolutionary opera. Sonneck's histories of 18th-century American music remain definitive. Some details in the his- tory of early opera have been filled in since this book was published, but few of its facts have been corrected, nor has its organization of the material been improved upon. The section on pre-Revolu- tionary opera is concerned with performances by one Tony Aston as early as 1703, and with the more successful founding attempts about 1750, particu- larly those of the company of Hallam and Henry in Philadelphia. During the decade after the war, theatrical performances were forbidden, and Son- neck's next section concerns the circumvention and breakdown of this ban. When performances were again legalized in 1792, a rapid growth took place. With Hallam's "Old American Company," now in New York, the Wignell-Reinagle "New Company" in Philadelphia, and smaller companies in Boston and Charleston, the author is enabled to organize this period by cities, with an "Epilogue" on the French opera companies. Although some of Son- neck's information is taken from George O. Seil- hamer's History of the American Theatre [1749- 97] (no. 4905 note) most of it is drawn from his own research, especially in early newspapers. The details of the text are complemented by large charts of performances. Within the text the de- tails alternate with digressions which reveal the insight of a profound scholar in American music history. 5662. Taubman, Hyman Howard. Opera — front and back, by H. Howard Taubman. New York, Scribner, 1938. 388 p. 38-10497 ML1711.8.N3T22 The opera fan who desires to look at the human side of operatic personalities and obtain a glimpse of backstage (as well as onstage) catastrophes, will find this book to his taste. The author, for many years on the staff of The New YorJ{ Times, and since the death of Olin Downes its chief critic, has collected many fresh tales of personalities, rehearsals, and operatic performances at the Metropolitan. In the course of his barrage of anecdotes Mr. Taubman painlessly communicates a vivid idea of the multiple functions and the immense labor involved in bring- ing about a unified operatic production. A chapter of considerable interest is "What Audiences Pay For," which lists the most popular operas presented at the Met during the ten seasons 1924-34, as well as those most frequently performed during the 27 years of Gatti-Casazza's management. Many ex- cellent photographs of backstage scenes at the Metro- politan are reproduced at the end of the book. 5663. Thompson, Oscar. The American singer; a hundred years of success in opera. With 108 illustrations. New York, Dial Press, 1937. 426 p. 37-4988 ML400.T8A5 Oscar Thompson (1887-1945) was successively music critic of the New York Evening Post and Sun, esteemed for his high standards in criticism of vocal performances. This volume, however, contains a minimum of his astute evaluations and limits itself to brief biographical sketches of important singers associated with the American operatic stage. Mr. Thompson's criteria for inclusion are broad, and many artists are listed only because they were born MUSIC / 833 in this country, or spent their flourishing years here. The well-written sketches include a chronological framework, the singer's most important roles, and frequently anecdotal material and an evaluation of the singer's significance in the development of American opera. The sketches are put in a roughly chronological progression, from Julia Wheatley, who made her singing debut in 1835, to Richard Bonelli, who returned to America in 1925. I. Choirs 5664. Bergmann, Leola M. (Nelson). Music mas- ter of the Middle West, the story of F. Melius Christiansen and the St. Olaf Choir. Min- neapolis, University of Minnesota Press, 1944. 230 p. >; A44-5713 ML410.C543B4 "Sources": p. 202-209. According to the preface this is a threefold story: "of the St. Olaf College as a center of Norwegian Lutheranism in America; the life story of F. Melius Christiansen as it unfolded in that setting; the story of his work in music and how it grew from regional to national significance." The author of this Iowa dissertation, a former member of the St. Olaf Choir, succeeds in catching the personality of this promi- nent choral director and composer. Frederik Melius Christiansen (1 871-1955) was of Norwegian birth, came to America in 1888 and completed his musical education here and in Germany, and became direc- tor of music at St. Olaf's College (Northfield, Minn.) in 1903. The choir was his foundation and its national prestige the work of his skill and devo- tion. Lists of published compositions by Christian- sen (p. 210-216), the St. Olaf Choir series compiled and edited by him, tours of the choir, and programs from 1912 to 1944 appear in the appendix. 5665. Hastings, Thomas. The history of forty choirs. New York, Mason Bros., 1854. 231 p. 6-12632 ML3925.H35 Thomas Hastings (1 784-1 872) ranks with Lowell Mason as the most influential teacher of sacred music in 19th-century America. From his experience he drew this collection of 40 "parables" illustrating the vicissitudes of the typical unpaid church choir of the day. These tales do not purport to recount musical history, of course, but rather are concerned to point a moral; their drift would seem to be that godliness finds a reflection in musical ability, and vice versa. Nevertheless these faded Victorian pages frequently reveal social mores and performance practices of religious music about 1850, such as a more formal treatment would probably miss. 5666. Messiter, Arthur H. A history of the choir and music of Trinity Church, New York, from its organization, to the year 1897. New York, E. S. Gorham, 1906. 324 p. illus. 7-20654 ML200.8.N5T7 Trinity Church was chartered in 1697 an( ^ opened for services the following March; Dr. Messiter ex- amines its first two centuries in order "to sketch the history in this country of that system of Church music which is called Anglican, as distinct from Gregorian, Roman, and Lutheran." The resources of a commercial metropolis enabled Trinity to take the lead in many developments: here, in 1741, was installed the first organ in the Colonies; and here in 1770 the organist, William Tuckey (late of Bristol Cathedral) organized a performance of Handel's Messiah a year before its first presentation in Ger- many. Church and organ were burned during the Revolution, but a new building was consecrated in 1790 and a new organ imported from England. In 1846 another Bristol man, Edward Hodges, Mus. Doc. Cantab., became organist and choirmaster of the again rebuilt church, and inaugurated a choir of 26 voices, men, women, and boys. From that year the author is able to present specimen programs and to describe the musical part of the service in great detail. Dr. Henry S. Cuder of Boston, who took over in 1858, soon eliminated females from the choir, and got it into surplices from October i860, when the Prince of Wales' attendance overawed the oppo- sition. Messiter, a graduate of the Royal Academy of Music, was musical director from 1866 to 1897, and made Trinity a citadel of Victorian taste and practice. 5667. Walters, Raymond. The Bethlehem Bach Choir; an historical and interpretative sketch. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1918. 289 p. illus. 18-26489 ML200.8.B56W2 The rich musical tradition of the early German settlers of Pennsylvania and North Carolina, while still to be fully elucidated, is now increasingly ap- 834 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES predated in consequence of an organization of the archives and special festivals at Winston-Salem, N.C., and Bethlehem, Pa. The silver anniversary of the Bethlehem festivals was celebrated in this volume, compiled by a member of the executive committee who was also dean of Swarthmore Col- lege. Introductory chapters summarize the begin- nings of the Collegium Musicum in 1744, the flour- ishing years through 1825, and the revival of the tradition in 1880. The first 25 festivals, held an- nually after 1900, as well as some special programs, are next described, with summaries of the music performed and quotations from favorable New York reviews. Sketches of the important leaders and performers, and lists of other personnel, com- plete the volume. J. Music Education 5668. Birge, Edward Bailey. History of public school music in the United States. New and augm. ed. Philadelphia, Oliver Ditson Co., 1939. 323 p. illus. 39-25132 ML200.B5 1939 Bibliography: p. 312-314. Out of date and limited in scope though it is, this history provides a useful if pedestrian survey of institutions, trends, and some of the people most active in public school music from 1838 to the 1930's. The author discusses the New England singing schools, the pioneer period in Boston, the beginnings of method and of emphasis on reading music, and the newer, faster developments of the 20th century, such as the formation of nationwide music teachers' associations. Optimistically he concludes: "School music is no longer cloistered. Its spirit is that of co-operation and helpfulness. School and com- munity are rapidly coming together." The his- torian will find the book especially useful for its rosters of organization officers and its many photo- graphs of public school music leaders. The first edition of 296 pages was published in 1928. 5669. Davison, Archibald T. Music education in America, what is wrong with it? What shall we do about it? New York, Harper, 1926. 208 p. 26-11832 MT3.U5D26 Unlike Mr. Birge's book (no. 5668), this is not a historical study, but a stocktaking of what music meant to America in the 1920's and of how Ameri- cans were then teaching it to their children. In the three decades since its appearance we have come a long way from what Mr. Davison (professor of music and choral conductor at Harvard University) then found to be the general attitude. The "aver- age American" liked a bit of popular music, jazzy and sentimental, but considered good music a non- essential frill and was unwilling to support its teaching in the schools. The book is nevertheless still worth reading, apart from its historical signifi- cance, in order to judge exactly how far we have come and how valid the author's suggestions for improvement remain. 5670. Jeffers, Edmund V. Music for the general college student. New York, King's Crown Press, 1944. 213 p. A44-1922 MT18.J4 "Selected bibliography on music for the general college student": p. [i89]-i92; "Bibliography of works cited in text": p. [i93]-2i3- This doctoral dissertation (Teachers College, Co- lumbia University) sketches the development of music teaching in American colleges, with special reference to Harvard, Vassar, and Oberlin. It is useful for its figures (supplementing those in Ran- dall Thompson's College Music; an Investigation for the Association of American Colleges (New York, Macmillan, 1935. xviii, 279 p.)) and its "philosophies of college music," but the fact that it does not consider the music programs of the larger universities restricts its value. 5671. Riker, Charles Cook. The Eastman School of Music; its first quarter century, 1921-1946. Rochester, N. Y., University of Rochester, 1948. 99 p. illus. 49-2415 MT4.R6E247 A history of this outstanding school of music necessarily extends major credit to three men: George Eastman, Rush Rhees, and Howard Hanson. Eastman (1854-1932), whose fortune was accumu- lated by the development of an inexpensive portable camera, also endowed the School of Medicine and Dentistry of the University of Rochester. Rhees (1860-1939) was president of the university during 1900-35, the period of Eastman's donations. Dr. Hanson (b. 1896), a composer and conductor of note, has been director of the school since 1924, and is chiefly responsible for its determined emphasis on American music of past and present. Mr. Riker records the devoted and unselfish contributions of each in the growth of the Eastman School of Music. The history of the school is traced from its begin- nings to the time of publication with an oudine of its departmental structure and of its many and varied activities. The widespread and significant influence that this institution has had on the American musical world is evident in the lists of publications and of recordings, and the roster of musically prominent alumni, which appear in the appendixes. 5672. Spalding, Walter Raymond. Music at Har- vard; a historical review of men and events. New York, Coward-McCann, 1935. xiv, 310 p. illus. 35—20135 ML200.8.C2H3 Mr. Spalding (b. 1865) was a Harvard graduate and a professor of music there from 1903 until his re- tirement; and this book is a labor of love, albeit a prosaic one. Formal instruction in music began in the academic year of 1862-63, when John Knowles Paine (1839-1906) was engaged, at the very foot of the list of college officers, as instructor in music; in 1875 his achievement of the rank of full professor indicated that music had established itself in the liberal arts curriculum. But Professor Spalding's narrative has a much earlier point of departure, for music-making at Harvard long antedates music- teaching, and the students' orchestra, which rejoices MUSIC / 835 in its traditional name of the Pierian Sodality, was organized on March 6, 1808. In 1837 it gave birth to the Harvard Musical Association for graduates, which has done much to further the musical life of Boston. The chapel choir dates from about 18 14 and the glee club from 1833, but their potentialities were realized only with the coming of Archibald T. Davison (b. 1883) in 1910, who made them the means of revitalizing college choral music and Prot- estant church music throughout the United States. The list of distinguished graduates of the depart- ment of music includes such composers as Arthur Foote, Frederick S. Converse, Edward Burlingame Hill, Daniel Gregory Mason, John Alden Carpenter, Roger Sessions, Robert Nathaniel Dett, Randall Thompson, Virgil Thomson, and Walter Piston; as well as Ralph Kirkpatrick, the scholar-harpsichord- ist; Hugo Leichtentritt, the musicologist; and Henry T. Finck, Richard Aldrich, Arthur Elson, and John N. Burk, critics or writers on music. K. Individual Musicians 5673. Anderson, Marian. My Lord, what a morn- ing; an autobiography. New York, Viking Press, 1956. 312 p. illus. 56-10402 ML420.A6A3 A frank and factual autobiography, in which the famous Negro contralto describes her youth in Phila- delphia, where she was born in 1902, her early train- ing and subsequent concert career. There are chap- ters discussing her recordings, concert life, and repertory. The issue of race prejudice is handled with candor, and her musical philosophy is amply expounded. It is pleasantly free from the usual vices of prima donna autobiography. 5674. [Barber] Broder, Nathan. Samuel Barber. New York, Schirmer, 1954. in p. 54-13121 ML410.B23B7 This brief study of Samuel Barber (b. 1910) is divided into two parts; the smaller on "The Man" includes numerous extracts from the composer's letters, and the larger on "The Music" has many musical illustrations. Mr. Barber became a student at the Curtis Institute of Music in Philadelphia when it opened in 1924, and during his nine years there formed his lifelong friendship with the young Italian, Gian-Carlo Menotti. Mr. Broder describes his failure to make a career as a baritone, his fre- quent visits to Europe, and his service in the Army during World War II, when after a period spent transporting pianos he was commissioned to write a symphony for the Army Air Forces. In later years he has been one of the few American writers of serious music "earning enough from his composi- tions, in royalties, performance fees, and commis- sions for new works and awards, to enable him to devote all his time to composing." He is, neverthe- less, a fastidious composer, and his opera from 1927 to 1953 number only 30. In part two Mr. Broder supplies a 13-page essay on "The Style" ("an at- tempt to fuse an essentially lyric spirit with an awakened awareness of the restlessness and discord- ance of our times") and descriptions of individual works in seven categories, from music for single voice to miscellaneous orchestral pieces. The Appen- dix (p. 100-109) includes a chronological list of works, a discography (both 78's and LP's), and a list of eight articles about Barber. There are 16 pages of excellent photographs. 5675. [Copland] Berger, Arthur V. Aaron Cop- land. New York, Oxford University Press, 1953. 120 p. 53—9183 ML410.C756B4 Mr. Copland, whom many regard as the foremost living American composer, was born in Brooklyn (1900), the son of Jewish immigrants from Lithu- ania. On finishing high school he studied harmony and composition with Rubin Goldmark, and in 1921 obtained his desire of going to Paris, where he was for three years the pupil of Nadia Boulanger. In the mid-1930's he abandoned his "esoteric" idiom and tried to say what he "had to say in the simplest 836 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES possible terms"; he was rewarded by a gratifying popular acclaim for his scores written for broad- casting ("Music for Radio," 1937), for schools, films, and ballet, and became a regular recipient of awards and commissions. Arthur Berger (b. 1912), him- self a composer of distinction, began his career as a disciple of Copland's and writes from a large per- sonal knowledge of both the man and his music. He calls attention to Copland's "economy of means, the transparency of his textures, the preciseness of his tonal vocabulary." There is no artificiality in Copland's later manner, for "he has found the means of idealizing American folk tunes in their own terms and in terms of his own native experience." Julia Smith's Aaron Copland (New York, Dutton, 1955. 336 p.) cannot match Mr. Berger's interpre- tative insight, but it is done on a larger scale, adds some recent compositions, has much more bio- graphical information, and, by discussing the music along with this material, makes the interrelation- ship of the two more evident. Both works have appendixes listing Mr. Copland's compositions, recordings, and writings. 5676. Damrosch, Walter J. My musical life. New York, Scribner, 1930. 390 p. illus. 30-23573 ML422.D16 1930 Damrosch (1862-1950) was born in Breslau, Ger- many, where his father Leopold conducted the Philharmonic Orchestra, but was brought to Amer- ica at the age of nine. Responsibility and oppor- tunity were thrust upon him by his father's sudden death in mid-season at the beginning of 1885; his intelligence, honesty, tact, and impressive personality ensured him a great career in spite of his lack of a first-rate musical talent. His autobiography was written in 1922 save for a final chapter, "Music and Modern Magic," added to the present edition of 1930. Since he retired after 23 years' service as the regular conductor of the New York Symphony Or- chestra in 1926, the greater part of his career as an operatic and orchestral conductor is surficiendy cov- ered: his taking up his father's work as conductor of German and especially Wagnerian opera at the Metropolitan; his founding of the Damrosch Opera Company in 1894 when the Met was slighting Wag- ner; his work with the Oratorio Society of New York: his "crusading" tours of the United States with his orchestra; and his experiences during the trying times of World War I. To this point it is a clear picture of American musical life as the dean of American conductors saw it. What the book does not cover is its author's final and most original phase, when his conduct of the NBC Music Appre- ciation Hour from 1929 to 1942 made "Papa Dam- rosch" a familiar and a favorite personality in the homes and schoolrooms of the country. 5677. [Foster] Howard, John Tasker. Stephen Foster, America's troubadour. [Rev. ed.] New York, Crowell, 1954, c 1953. xv, 433 p. illus. 53-1 1 133 ML410.F78H6 1954 "The published works of Stephen Foster": p. 403- "Give me the making of the songs of a nation, and I care not who makes its laws." More than any other man Stephen Foster (1826-1864) made the songs of America; they brought him contemporary celebrity and posthumous veneration, but in life he achieved neither happiness nor dignity. This wayward son of a solid Scotch-Irish merchant of Pittsburgh abandoned commerce when he found he could support himself by selling his songs to pub- lishers such as Firth, Pond and Co. of New York (later he arranged a preliminary sale to E. P. Christy's Minstrels). Even after marriage and the birth of a daughter his royalties should have been adequate to middle-class comfort, but in the course of the 1850's Foster separated from his family and began a solitary life in New York City in which alcohol increasingly took over from music. As late as i860 he could produce a ballad as absolute as "Old Black Joe," but within four years he died in complete squalor. The golden melancholy of Fos- ter's plantation songs is unique, but he could bring off extraordinary successes in quite different veins ("Oh Susanna," "Jeanie with the Light Brown Hair"), and it would be hard to point to another untutored composer of comparable achievement. Mr. Howard's volume, originally published in 1934, incorporates the fragmentary evidence more or less in full and so makes rather heavy going, but is in- dispensable to anyone who wishes to form his own idea of this attractive but elusive songmaker. An early bibliography of the sheet music by Walter Whitdesey and O. G. Sonneck has been completed in James J. Fuld's A Pictorial Bibliography of the First Editions of Stephen C. Foster (Philadelphia, Musical Americana, 1957. 25, [181] p.). 5678. [Gershwin] Ewen, David. A journey to greatness; the life and music of George Gershwin. New York, Holt, 1956. 384 p. illus. 56-6192 ML410.G288E9 Lists of the composer's works: p. 330-355. Dis- cography: p. 356-362. Bibliography: p. 363-368. Gershwin (1 898-1937), whose father was born Morris Gershovitz in St. Petersburg, Russia, began life on New York's East Side, but by no means in poverty or deprivation. Music was his own dis- covery and choice; he had good classical teachers from his 14th year, but followed popular music with intensity, and left high school to become a song plugger in Tin Pan Alley. By 1919 he had pro- duced his first musical comedy score ("La, La MUSIC / 837 Lucille") and his first song hit ("Swanee"); after the ovation which greeted Paul Whiteman's per- formance of his "Rhapsody in Blue" on February 12, 1924, he was an international figure. A suc- cession of Broadway shows and motion picture scores, together with a steady stream of royalties from publications and performances, brought him wealth as well as fame. He made further ventures into symphonic jazz ("Piano Concerto in F," "An American in Paris"), which continue to divide critical opinion and to be very widely performed. His folk opera, "Porgy and Bess," which Mr. Ewen describes as his one completely successful "min- gling of the serious and the popular," has had a greater balance of critical favor. An undiagnosed brain tumor struck Gershwin down in his 38th year and at the height of his powers. Until critical opinion concerning this quite unprecedented talent and career has crystallized, Mr. Ewen's open- mouthed success story will need little revision. In the year after the composer's death Merle Armitage gathered from 36 of Gershwin's friends tributes or reminiscences, which vary greatly in character but are nearly all marked by a sharp sense of personal loss. The roll of contributors to Armitage's George Gershwin (New York, Longmans, Green, 1938. 252 p.) is impressive — including, among others, Paul Whiteman, Walter Damrosch, DuBose Hey- ward, Rouben Mamoulian, Arnold Schonberg, Serge Koussevitzky, Eva Gauthier, and Olin Downes — and it is likely to remain a sourcebook of value. The Gershwin Years, by Edward Jab- lonski and Lawrence D. Stewart (Garden City, N.Y., Doubleday, 1958. 313 p.), also derives some immediacy from a reminiscent introduction by Carl Van Vechten and the active cooperation of Ira Gershwin, George's elder brother. The straight- forward chronicle in which the authors alternate is provided with a wealth of illustrations, many of them from Ira's collection of family photographs. 5679. Gottschalk, Louis Moreau. Notes of a pianist. During his professional tours in the United States, Canada, the Antilles, and South America. Preceded by a short biographical sketch with contemporaneous criticisms. Edited by his sister, Clara Gottschalk. Translated from the French by Robert E. Peterson. Philadelphia, Lip- pincott, 1881. 480 p. 6-37 11 ML410.G68G6 Gottschalk (1 829-1 869), the first native Ameri- can pianoforte virtuoso and composer of note- worthy music for the piano, was born in New Orleans of an English father and a Creole mother. At 13, for the completion of his musical education he was sent to Paris, where he studied with Berlioz. He began the career of a concert pianist in Europe and did not return to America until 1853. His compositions were long despised by the elect, but while many are thick sentimentalism or empty display, others have lately been discovered to in- corporate rhythms regarded as characteristically American. Gottschalk died in Rio de Janeiro, where he had been entertaining the Emperor of Brazil, and his personal property of value was confiscated under a Brazilian droit d'aubaine; his family had great difficulty in retrieving the trunk in which the diaries of his tours were contained. His sister, Clara Gottschalk Peterson, prepared them for publication, and her husband, Dr. Peterson of Philadelphia, translated them from Gottschalk's French. Gottschalk was an alert and observant traveler, and his record of concert life from 1853 to 1868 is well-nigh unique; at Sandusky, Ohio, he was arrested in mid-recital because a $6.00 license fee had not been paid to the town. The brief life by his sister which preceded the diaries may now be supplanted by Vernon Loggins' Where the Word Ends; the Life of Louis Moreau Gottschal\ (Baton Rouge, Louisiana State University Press, 1958. 273 p.), which utilizes the Gottschalk manuscripts in the New York Public Library as well as a num- ber of supplementary printed materials. He de- scribes Gottschalk as "a man of pity — a prey to relatives, friends, and doting women," who wore himself out trying to satisfy the financial demands of his growing string of dependents. A record of American musical life in the next decade is supplied by the master of French operetta, Jacques Offen- bach, who described his American sojourn of 1876 in Offenbach en Amerique (Paris, Calmann Levy, 1877. xxxi, 252 p.). Two American translations appeared the same year; a recent one by Lander MacClintock has the tide Orpheus in America (Bloomington, Indiana University Press, 1957. 200 p.). 5680. [Griffes] Maisel, Edward M. Charles T. Griffes; the life of an American composer. New York, Knopf, 1943. xviii, 347, xi p. 43-6607 ML410.G9134M2 Charles Tomlinson Griffes (1884-1920) is the classic American example of the composer who is cut off by death just as he arrives at the fullness of his powers and wins public acclaim. Mr. Maisel's biography, filled with extracts from Griffes' letters and diaries, makes fascinating reading, but lacks clarity of oudine as well as a list of works, and is a difficult book to use. It probably exaggerates the lugubriousness of Griffes' story, which is that of a delicate boy who became the favorite pupil of Miss Broughton, the English spinster who taught piano in Elmira, N.Y., and who lent the money to give him four years of advanced study in Berlin. On his return (1907) he became music instructor 838 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES at Hackley School in Tarrytown, N.Y., which pre- pared boys for ivy-league colleges. Here Griffes' limited income, slow recognition, fastidious tastes, and homosexual inclinations doubdess provided an element of strain. Mr. Maisel emphasizes over- work, and Grilles did sit up late copying his scores as opportunity at last came his way; but the influ- enza epidemic of 1919 cut down many more robust people than he. His musical development had led him from German to French, Russian, and oriental models, but his later work in this vein is finished and effective, and his long piano sonata (1918), quite individual in style, indicates that he had not exhausted his potentialities. Mr. Maisel analyzes it at length and calls it "the first major utterance in American music." 5681. [Herbert] Waters, Edward N. Victor Her- bert; a life in music. New York, Macmillan, 1955. xvi, 653 p. 55—1675 ML410.H52W3 "Compositions by Victor Herbert": p. 577-592. "Phonograph recordings made by Victor Herbert": P- 593-595- Herbert (1859-1924) was born in Dublin of upper-class Irish parents, but his youth was spent in Stuttgart, Germany, where he received a thor- ough musical education and became a promising cello virtuoso. He came to America in 1886 when Walter Damrosch, recruiting talent for the Metro- politan, engaged the singer Herbert wished to marry, and obligingly included her suitor as a mem- ber of the orchestra. After miscellaneous begin- nings as orchestra and chamber musician, soloist, conductor, and composer of instrumental music, his first large opportunity came when the players of the late Patrick Gilmore's celebrated military band chose him as their leader (1893-1900). The next year he entered the sphere which made him the most conspicuous American musician: for The Bostonians he composed his first operetta, "Prince Ananias" (1894). In the following 30 years he composed no fewer than 43 such works; "The Serenade" (1897), "Babes in Toyland" (1903), "The Red Mill" (1906), "Naughty Marietta" (1910), and several others were the greatest successes in the musical theater of their day. Herbert was also a capable and successful conductor of the Pittsburgh Symphony Orchestra (1898-1904), leaving only because of a widening breach with its manager; he thereupon formed his own orchestra fcr lighter music. He made two attempts at opera seria: "Natoma" ( 191 1), which utilized Indian themes, and "Madeleine" (1914), but neither gave much satisfaction at the time or since. Mr. Waters here tells for the first time the full story of Herbert's successful lawsuit against the blackmailing Musical Courier (1902), his advocacy of the Copyright Act of 1909, and his part in founding the American Society of Com- posers, Authors, and Publishers (ASCAP) in 19 14. Most reviewers have demurred at Mr. Waters' high revaluation of the operetta music, but nearly all agree that this is a masterly piece of research and documented biography, a lifelike portrait of a great musical personality, and an exceptionally solid con- tribution to four decades of American music history. 5682. [Ives] Cowell, Henry, and Sidney (Robert- son) Cowell. Charles Ives and his music. New York, Oxford University Press, 1955. 245 p. illus. 54-10000 ML410.I94C6 Bibliography: p. 235-238. The musical career and fortunes of Charles Ives (1874-1954) are probably the most singular of any considerable composer in music history. The son of the town bandmaster of Danbury, Conn., he ob- tained a diversity of musical training and experience in his youth, and at 14 was "the youngest organist in the State." But his father, wearying of hand- to-mouth finance, entered a bank two years before his death; and on graduating from Yale Ives entered a New York insurance office. In 1907 he set up his own agency, affiliated with Mutual Life of New York; it was extremely successful, and a pamphlet setting forth his own ideas became "the Bible of insurance agents." Meanwhile, and especially from 1910 to 1918, he went on composing great quantides of music, in a great variety of forms; the "Chrono- logical List of Compositions" (p. 211-233) is a long one. A severe illness in 191 8 damaged his heart and brought his production to an almost complete stop; in 1929 he retired from business and spent his remaining quarter-century in valetudinarian comfort. His music was almost completely un- known and unplayed, but from time to time a zealous advocate appeared. After Henry Bella- mann and Nicholas Slonimsky had failed to arouse public interest, in 1939 John Kirkpatrick finally succeeded with his performances of the "Concord Sonata." From the beginning Ives had gone his own way in polyphony (melodic lines set against each other, "each with its own key and perhaps also its own rhythm"), harmony ("at a time when consecutive extreme dissonances were unknown, Ives used them constantly"), melody ("in the exten- sion of his motifs, Ives sometimes employs melodic inversion, retrograde and inverted retrograde"), rhythm ("in some spots and in some ways prob- ably more involved than that to be found in any other written music"), and form (the creation of "an underlying unity out of a large number of diverse elements, used asymmetrically"). After World War I the musical avant-garde began doing many of the things which Ives had been doing 25 years earlier; when his music was at length per- MUSIC / 839 formed, critics found it influenced, among others, by Hindemith — who had not begun to compose until Ives had stopped, and of whose music Ives had never heard a note! 5683. [MacDowell] Gilman, Lawrence. Edward MacDowell; a study. New York, J. Lane, 1909. 190 p. illus. 9-609 ML410.M12G52 MacDowell (1861-1908) was born in New York City, studied music at Paris and Frankfort, and at the age of 19 became head piano teacher at the Darmstadt Conservatory. On returning to America in 1884 he pursued a career as pianist and composer until 1896, when "the assurance of an income freed from precariousness" led him to undertake the or- ganization and direction of the new Department of Music at Columbia University. Eight years of ad- ministration and heavy teaching, combined with continued composition and occasional performances, brought him to the point of nervous exhaustion, and his resignation in 1904 failed to halt a progressive mental collapse: his creation was over and death ahead. His professorship had been offered to him as "the greatest musical genius America has pro- duced," and Gilman considered, 13 years later, that "he gave to the art of creative music in this country its single impressive and vital figure." Seldom has so unrivaled a contemporary reputation been suc- ceeded by such complete neglect; it was Mac- Dowell's misfortune that his disappearance from the scene coincided with a revolutionary change in musical fashions, and his great creative achievement was shortly regarded as old hat. Gilman's memorial volume, which has had no successor, is divided into two parts: "The Man" consists of a brief biog- raphy and a character study; "The Music-Maker" characterizes his style as a refined and sincere romanticism, traces his emergence as "A Matured Impressionist," and has separate treatments of his piano sonatas and songs. A "List of Works" (p. 181-190) is appended. 5684. [Mason] Rich, Arthur Lowndes. Lowell Mason, "the father of singing among the children." Chapel Hill, University of North Caro- lina press, 1946. 224 p. 46-7444 ML410.M398R5 "Lowell Mason's writings": p. 138-172. "Other related sources": p. 172-194. Lowell Mason (1792-1872) made significant con- tributions both to sacred and to public school music in this country. The two careers are interwoven in Mason's activities, so that although, as its subtide indicates, this book is concerned with Mason's teach- ing, it is also important to the study of his sacred music. The story of Mason's life and of the Boston Academy of Music, the school he founded in 1833, is painstakingly related and well documented. His importance is strikingly demonstrated in chapter 9, where parallel texts show how Mason's statements anticipate significant quotations from music edu- cators of today. But while Mason's importance remains unquestioned, other students of American music history credit him with less priority and orig- inality than does Mr. Rich. The extensive bibliog- raphy adds to the value of the work. 5685. [Rodgers] Taylor, Deems. Some enchanted evenings; the story of Rodgers and Hammer- stein. New York, Harper, 1953. 244 p. illus. 53-7750 ML410.R6315T3 Other composers may have written more signifi- cant music for the Broadway stage during the first half of the 20th century, but Richard Rodgers (b. 1902) has indubitably been the most consistently successful. Throughout his long professional career, he has been associated with only two lyrists: Lorenz Hart from 191 8 to 1942 and, after Hart's death, Oscar Hammerstein II (b. 1895). Mr. Taylor casts his book into four parts: the first covers Rodgers' early years, his meeting with Hart, and the musical comedies and motion pictures they wrote together; the second goes back to sketch Hammerstein's earlier theatrical experiences. Part three deals with the Rodgers and Hammerstein collaborations, while in the short part four Mr. Taylor says what little he has to say on a variety of topics, contrasting typ- ical Hart and Hammerstein lyrics, describing a characteristic Rodgers melody with 14 short musi- cal examples, and ending with brief accounts of "Victory at Sea" and "Me and Juliet," which had apparently been produced after the main body of the book had gone to press. Mr. Taylor admits in his introduction that there are difficulties in writing a biography of two personal friends whom he admires inoidinately, and there is here no probing of per- sonalities, no adverse criticism, and no careful weighing of the relative merits of other writers for the contemporary Broadway stage. These limita- tions are offset by Mr. Taylor's deft pen and ready wit, and if the descriptions of so many shows follow a repetitive pattern, the essential facts are all assem- bled for convenient reference. David Ewen has devoted a single volume to Richard Rodgers (New York, Holt, 1957. 378 p.). 5686. Samaroff Stokowski, Olga. An American musician's story. New York, Norton, 1939. 326 p. illus. 39-27277 ML417.S18A2 The author was born Miss Hickenlooper in San Antonio, Texas; was for a few years Mme. Boris Loutzky of Berlin and St. Petersburg; became Olga Samaroff at the outset of her concert career in 1905 (her manager rejected not only her maiden name but all the Anglo-Saxon surnames in her ancestry); 84O / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES added Stokowski when she married the conductor of the Cincinnati Symphony in 191 1 (the year before his transfer to Philadelphia); and retained his name after her separation from Leopold Stokowski in 1923. Madame Samaroff Stokowski (1882-1948) had an exceedingly varied musical career: as a stu- dent at the Paris Conservatoire and in Berlin; as an informal coach to Geraldine Farrar; as a touring pianist in America and Europe; as wife of the con- ductor of a major orchestra; as an early maker of piano records for Victor; as a teacher at the Juilliard Graduate School of Music from its opening in 1925, and at Philadelphia Conservatory; as music critic for the New Yorf^ Evening Post; as founder of the Schubert Memorial, a foundation which enables promising young American musicians to give con- certs; and as a pioneer in the "Layman's Music Courses" intended to create more "active" and re- sponsive musical audiences. All these phases are narrated dispassionately and with some reflective commentary, and the final chapter is an equally thoughtful view of American musical life in general. 5687. [Schuman] Schreiber, Flora Rheta, and Vin- cent Persichetti. William Schuman. New York, G. Schirmer, 1954. 139 p. 54-14322 ML410.S386S3 Miss Schreiber contributes part one, "The Man" (p. 1-48). Mr. Schuman (b. 1910) comes of a middle-class German Jewish family of New York City; for his first two decades his musical interest was limited to participation in a jazz band and the composition of popular songs. The first concert of serious music he ever attended, the New York Philharmonic's on April 4, 1930, brought about what can only be called a conversion; he began the study of music theory, and in 1936 became a pupil of Roy Harris at the Juilliard Graduate School. An outpouring of compositions in a variety of forms resulted, and by 1945 Mr. Schuman was chosen to head the Juilliard School, which he has done ever since, with some diminution but no suspension of his composition. There is an abundance of good photographs. Mr. Persichetti, himself a composer and a member of the Juilliard faculty, writes part two, "The Music." Schuman's style, he says, is marked by "the strong-flavored energy that gen- erates a constant boil of movement," but is always based on singable melodies, and is definable as "structural derivatives of melodic character." Five works are analyzed at length with numerous ex- amples in musical notation. The Appendix (p. 126-134) nas li sts °f works, records, and articles by and about Schuman. XXVI Art and Architecture A. The Arts 5688-5697 B. Architecture: General 5698-5703 C. Architecture: Special 5704-5725 D. Interiors 5726-5732 E. Sculpture 5733-5740 F. Painting 574 I -5759 G. Painting: Individual Artists 5760-5776 H. Prints and Photographs 5777-5783 I. Decorative Arts 5784-5793 J. Museums 5794-5800 K. Art and History 5801-5807 THE WORKS listed in this chapter, which deals with the visual arts and with practi- tioners, collections, and exhibitions thereof, range from the scholarly and the critical to the popular. Although a widespread interest in the arts did not arise in this country until the 19th century, a very considerable literature on American art has accumulated, principally since the logo's, from which we can present only a selection intended to be both represent- ative and stimulating. Certain somewhat arbitrary omissions have been made. For ex- ample, books on the architecture of single states and cities have been almost wholly excluded. Sec- tion C includes only six monographs devoted to individual architects, of whom but one is an ex- ponent of the modern idiom; alternative or addi- tional choices will doubtless occur to the reader. Sculpture, treated in Section E, may appear to have been slighted, but it would seem that American achievements in this field are rather less distin- guished than those in architecture or painting, a conclusion warranted, perhaps, by the scarcity of published material on the subject. In Section G, a mere sampling, only three contemporary artists have received full treatment; many others are briefly presented in three albums of recent paintings listed in the previous section. Some omissions re- flect the nonavailability of material. Thus, if the great post-Civil War exemplar of the mystical strain in American painting, Albert Pinkham Ryder, re- ceives less than his due share of attention, it is be- cause of a lacuna in art scholarship. In Section H, prints and photographs are interpreted as high art, as art for the people, and as records of the Ameri- can scene and event; more material of the last kind is included in Section K. There is, of course, no clear line of demarcation between the decorative arts treated in Section I, such as the metalwork, glassware, pottery, and needlework produced by artisans and craftsmen prior to the industrial revo- lution, and the folk arts and crafts — quilting, figureheads, samplers, kitchenware, and the like — dealt with in Chapter xxiv. In each will be found titles of interest to both the student and the collector. During recent years, the picture book has become an exceedingly popular medium for the portrayal of American history; selections for inclu- sion in Section K, however, have been drawn from those which notice the artistic as well as the docu- mentary elements, and which accompany their pic- tures with a substantial text of some kind. 841 842 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES A. The Arts 5688. Baur, John I. H. Revolution and tradition in modern American art. Cambridge, Har- vard University Press, 1951. 170 p. (The Library of Congress series in American civilization) 51-13174 N6512.B3 Defines and traces the development of the chief movements, particularly those revolutionary in sub- ject or form, such as impressionism and abstract art, in American painting and sculpture of the last 50 years. The author considers the relations of the new schools to each other, their reflections of the Amer- ican scene or their transformation from the Euro- pean to the American idiom, and their effects upon traditional survivals. Three final chapters are con- cerned with the position of the artist in modern civilization, current trends in art and criticism, and the "Americanism" of American art. The 199 illus- trations, averaging two or three to the page, are in black and white. 5689. Cahill, Holger, and Alfred H. Barr, eds. Art in America; a complete survey. New York, Reynal & Hitchcock, 1935. 162 p. 36-1288 N6505.C32 "Lists and bibliographies": p. 153-162. A broad historical review of the American arts by a number of contributors, sponsored by the General Federation of Women's Clubs with the cooperation of several museums and the National Broadcasting Company. Part I deals with painting, sculpture, and architecture from their respective beginnings to the Civil War. Part II continues the annals of these arts from 1865 to 1934, and adds brief essays on stage de- sign, photography, and the motion picture. Both of the main sections are revisions of separate 1934 pub- lications. There are numerous halftones in the text and a group of 17 colored plates following page 62. 5690. Dunlap, William. A history of the rise and progress of the arts of design in the United States. New ed., edited, with additions, by Frank W. Bayley and Charles E. Goodspeed. Boston, Goodspeed, 1918. 3 V. 18-11108 N6505.D9 1918 Bibliography: v. 3, p. 346-377. First published in 1834 by William Dunlap, who "became permanendy a painter" only at the age of 51, this work has since served as a primary source of information for the student of early American art. Dunlap's method was to present a history of paint- ing, and in smaller degree of engraving, architec- ture, and sculpture, through a series of biographical notices of the artists, from John Watson, a portrait painter who came to the colonies in 1715, to Free- man Rawdon, a New York engraver, born in 1804. He gives three chapters of autobiography, some notes on technical developments, accounts of the establish- ment of the early academies, and information upon early collectors and collections. The editors have ventured upon "judicious pruning and corrections of conspicuous errors" in the text as originally printed, and have provided a list of several hundred additional artists working in this country before 1835 (vol. 3, p. 281-343). 5691. Kouwenhoven, John A. Made in America; the arts in modern civilization. Garden City, N.Y., Doubleday, 1948. xv, 303 p. A49-1905 N6505.K6 1948a Thesis — Columbia University. "List of sources and references": p. [271] -290. Develops the theme that the unique factor of a "democratic-technological vernacular" tradition has been overlooked in the interpretation of American arts and culture. "The purest form of this vernac- ular," says the author, "is represented by technolog- ical design." This functional, vernacular design, characterized since the middle of the 19th century by economy, simplicity, and flexibility, has inter- acted with the "tradition of cultivated taste" which emanated from Europe. "It is in their interpene- tration and in their alternate ascendancy in the work of different men and different periods that the his- tory of American art consists." Dr. Kouwenhoven traces the increasing influence and acceptance of vernacular forms and techniques from "Fordism," time and motion studies, and jazz, to literature and the fine arts. 5692. La Follette, Suzanne. Art in America. New York, Harper, 1929. 361 p. 29-29377 N6505.L3 A critical history of the arts in America from the 17th century to 1929, and of the changes in taste evoked by the evolution of its social, cultural, and economic structure. To the author the United States has always been a nation of "cultural pov- erty." "The Puritan sought to suppress the artistic impulse in order that it might not divert him from spiritual interests; his descendants sought to sup- press it in order that it might not divert them from material interests." Early colonial art was utili- tarian, ornament being subordinated to structure. ART AND ARCHITECTURE / 843 In the 18th century, under European influences, ornament became an integral part of structure and eventually even weakened it. In the 19th, under the egalitarian influences of the frontier West and machine industry, the main drift was "toward the dull and the commonplace in art"; the appeal of a picture lay in subject, not artistic merit. Except for skyscraper and factory, architecture during the years 1900-1925 was bound to "archaeology," but modern painting taught the public to seek "significance rather than verisimilitude." The 103 gravure illus- trations average one or two to a page. 5693. Larkin, Oliver W. Art and life in America. New York, Rinehart, 1949. xviii, 547 p. 49-1 1 23 1 N6505.L37 "Bibliographical notes": p. 483-514. Interprets for the informed layman the American arts and the ways in which they have expressed our manner of living, and provides for the general stu- dent of American civilization a very serviceable introduction to American art history. The six major sections together span the years 1600-1945. As the author observes, usefulness was the chief criterion of the colonial arts. The buildings and sculpture of American neoclassicism served as symbols of political independence. The Jacksonian era saw a flourishing "art for the people" in a proliferation of genre paintings which furnished popular sub- jects for the new lithographs, and saw, as well, a persistence of "art by the people" in the richness and variety of the so-called primitives. The last three decades of the 19th century, when size and slickness were the international fashion, were a time of malaise for true artists, but a few continued to seek "palpable truth" in "an age of surfaces"; and there was a whole new departure in architec- ture. The 20th century has seen the rise of urban realism and the development among artists of social consciousness and participation. Closely linked to the text is a brilliant repertory of illustrations. 5694. Lynes, Russell. The tastemakers. New York, Harper, 1954. 362 p. 54-8968. E169.1.L95 A popular and readable survey of popular taste in the visual arts from the advent of Jacksonian democracy, when "taste became everybody's busi- ness and not just the business of the cultured few," to the present day. The "tastemakers" are those who have sought to influence the public's prefer- ence, from Andrew }. Downing and James J. Jarves to Pepsicola and Coming's Glass Center. The au- thor, editor of Harper's Magazine, does not believe that American taste is improving, but thinks that varieties and conflicts in taste are a sign of artistic vitality. 5695. Mumford, Lewis. The brown decades; a study of the arts in America, 865-1895. [2d ed.] New York, Dover, 1955. 266 p. 55-14851 N6510.M8 1955 Includes bibliographies. Originally published in 1931 and based upon lectures delivered by the author in 1929, this book is written in an informal vein for the layman. It emphasizes the positive aspects of American culture in the reckless and extravagant years 1865-95. "Be- neath the crass surface," observes Mr. Mumford, "a new life was stirring in departments of American thought and culture that had hitherto been barren, or entirely colonial and derivative." The creative manifestations of the "brown decades" have been overlooked, he believes, and he points out the ac- complishments of philosophers and men of letters as well as the shift in the whole culture to a concern with the industrial and plastic arts. "The architect, the engineer, the landscape architect, the painter, all rode in together on the rising tide of industrialism." Mr. Mumford considers, among others, the archi- tects Louis Sullivan, H. H. Richardson, and the young F. L. Wright; John A. Roebling, designer of the Brooklyn Bridge; Frederick Law Olmsted, plan- ner of New York's Central Park; the painters, Ryder, Eakins, George Fuller, and Homer; and Alfred Stieglitz, "photographer and interpreter." 5696. New York. Museum of Modern Art. Ab- stract painting and sculpture in America, by Andrew Carnduff Ritchie. New York, 1951. 159 p. 51-10619 ND212.N395 "Catalogue of the exhibition . . . January 23 to March 25, 1951," by Margaret Miller: p. 148-156. Bibliography, by Bernard Karpel: p. 156-159. A picture book and catalog of Mr. Ritchie's selec- tions for an exhibition of abstract art of the years 1912-50 "which seeks to display, at as high a level of quality as possible, enough distinctive examples of abstract painting and sculpture produced by Americans, or foreigners long resident in America, to give the observer and reader a sufficient appre- ciation of the variety and extent of this form of art in this country." "Protest against the established order of traditional perspective, naturalistic space and color, conventional subject matter," in Mr. Ritchie's opinion, forms the factor common to all motivations toward abstract art. Recent work he classifies into the following, admittedly somewhat arbitrary, categories: pure geometric, architectural and mechanical geometric, naturalistic geometric, expressionist geometric, and expressionist biomor- phic. Unfortunately, only a few of the many illus- trations are in color. An earlier sampling assembled by Sidney Janis, Abstract & Surrealist Art in Amer- ica (New York, Reynal & Hitchcock, 1944. 146 p.), 844 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES presents work by 30 20th-century painters classified as abstract, and 30 more classified as surrealist; the layman would find it difficult to say why some pieces are assigned to the one school rather than to the other, and the paucity of color plates certainly does not make for clarification. 5697. Purcell, Ralph. Government and art, a study of American experience. Washing- ton, Public Affairs Press, 1956. 129 p. 56-8543 N6512.P8 Government in America — Federal, State and lo- cal — has done considerably less than in Europe to encourage the fine arts, but its total patronage has been by no means negligible. This volume traces that patronage in all fields save the most important one — the architecture of public buildings. From 1 8 17 to 1933 the Federal Government commissioned a number of murals, acquired some paintings, and engaged a few painters to report Western expedi- tions or wartime scenes. From 1933 to 1939 the Roosevelt administration subsidized several thou- sand artists stranded by the economic collapse, not only through the Federal Art Project of the Works Progress Administration, but also by the embellish- ment of public buildings through the Treasury's Fine Arts Section. Contemporary trends include the wide circulation of exhibitions of American art abroad by the State Department, and a remarkable development of collections and activities at the Na- tional Gallery of Art. The author concludes: "If private patronage of the Arts declines as it seems likely to do, patronage by the government will be- come a necessity if the Arts are to continue." B. Architecture: General 5698. Andrews, Wayne. Architecture, ambition and Americans; a history of American archi- tecture, from the beginning to the present. New York, Harper, 1955. 315 p. 55-8014 NA705.A5 "A selected bibliography": p. 289-303. A report on architectural taste in the Anglo- American main current of United States history, taste being defined as "the record of the ambition which leads the architect to spend more time and energy than is reasonable, and the client, often but not always, to invest more money than common sense would dictate." This, then, is a chronicle mainly of imposing residences, "those that were the last word in their time and place." The steady economic advance of the United States in the 19th century kept generating new fortunes, the masters of which looked for fresh ways to impress their neigh- bors and thereby encouraged professional architects and builders to make stylistic innovations. Mr. Andrews delights in the resultant variety that ranges from the formal, impersonal architecture created for the "symbolic businessman," to the informal, ir- regular styles created in our own day. He has spent 16 years and has visited 39 States in making the splendid photographs which illustrate this lively and catholic record of the mansions of America. 5699. Fitch, James Marston. American building; the forces that shape it. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1948. 382 p. 48-5133 NA705.F5 The "umbilical relationship between men and buildings" forms the chief concern of this thought- provoking, if somewhat doctrinaire, book. Its first third traces the major forces that have shaped Amer- ican architecture from the beginning to the Victorian era and the Columbian exposition of 1893, and even here the point of view is that of the technologist. The latter two-thirds explores the "nature and func- tion of contemporary building equipment ... in relation to the respective environments which they modify": the atmospheric, thermal, luminous, sonic, spatial, and animate elements, in the author's classifi- cation. In order to achieve his ideals of the multiple use and the flexible organization of space, "demo- cratic long-range planning" is necessary. A demo- cratic esthetic can achieve rising standards of quality, he believes, only when an increase in the quantity and continuity of building makes intense creative activity possible. 5700. Hamlin, Talbot Faulkner. The American spirit in architecture. New Haven, Yale University Press, 1926. 353 p. The Pageant of America, v. 13) 26-9196 NA705.H3 Ei 7 8. 5 .P,v.i3 A picture book, presenting an exceptionally large and varied selection of materials, but the 832 half- tones are small and indifferendy executed. The author gives half of his space to developments since 1880 and presents such types as railroad stations, state capitals, county courthouses, museums, banks, public libraries, tombs, monuments, schoolhouses, university buildings, factories, warehouses, apart- ment houses, hotels, and theaters. He points out the representative and the horrible as well as the excel- lent. The text emphasizes environment and local materials, contact with the mother country, particu- larly England, economic conditions, urbanization, and westward expansion as factors of primary im- portance in the development of American architec- ture. 5701. Mumford, Lewis. Sticks and stones; a study of American architecture and civiliza- tion. [2d ed.] New York, Dover, 1955. 238 p. 55-14852 NA705.M8 1955 First published in 1924, this important chrono- logical survey of American architecture demonstrates "how architecture and civilization develop hand in hand." Mr. Mumford traces here the major trends: the "medieval tradition" of the "close village- community" in 17th-century New England; the early 18th-century derivations from the Renaissance; the vernacular work of the craftsmen, and the classical work of the educated gentlemen and professional architects of the early republic, among them Jeffer- son and Latrobe. The "period of disintegration" in the early 19th century was followed by a number of discordant styles and combinations of them. The durable in romanticism was expressed by H. H. Richardson's continuator, Louis Sullivan. McKim, White, Hunt, and Burnham exemplify the magnifi- cence and opulence of the ensuing "imperial age," while a new electicism was pursued by Bertram Goodhue. The subsequent "machine age" and the dilemmas posed by it to the architect and to society form the subjects of Mr. Mumford's final chapters. 5702. Pickering, Ernest. The homes of America, as they have expressed the lives of our people for three centuries. New York, Crowell, 195 1. 284 p. (The Growth of America series) 51-4857 NA7205.P5 "Architectural structures," in Professor Picker- ing's opinion, "form the most permanent and reveal- ing record of a civilization." Domestic architecture ART AND ARCHITECTURE / 845 has yielded to the pressures of climate and geog- raphy, and has "expressed the materials, construc- tion, and social order of the time." About two-thirds of the book is devoted to the colonial, the Georgian and Federal periods, and the Roman and Greek re- vivals. The "era of confusion," after 1865, ar >d the present century are more sketchily presented, since the author is considerably more interested in out- standing examples of early design than in the more recent constructions which constitute the great majority of American homes. Numerous halftones illustrate the text. 5703. Tallmadge, Thomas E. The story of archi- tecture in America. New, enl. and rev. ed. New York, Norton, 1936. 332 p. 36-23858 NA705.T3 1936 First published in 1927. A history of American architecture from the 1630's to 1935, written by an architect primarily for the layman. Stylistic periods are defined as: "The Colonial — 1630-1800," subdivided into Early Ameri- can, 1 630-1 700, and Georgian, 1 700-1 800; "The Post-Colonial — 1 790-1 820"; "The Greek Revival — 1820-1860"; "The Parvenu Period — 1860-1880"; "The Romanesque Revival — 1876-1893"; "Eclecti- cism — 1893-1917"; and since 1917. Separate chap- ters consider Spanish and Creole architecture, the World's Fair of 1893, and Louis Sullivan as the precursor of functionalism. Particular attention is paid to architectural details and the ornamentation of both exteriors and interiors. Although nothing in our architectural history is "more beautiful, more vigorous, more expressive of its times" than Geor- gian of 1750, "the skyscraper is far and away the most important architectural achievement of America, her great gift to the art of building." Along with numerous halftone illustrations are a few typical plans. C. Architecture: Special 5704. Bridenbaugh, Carl. Peter Harrison, first American architect. Chapel Hill, Univer- sity of North Carolina Press, 1949. xvi, 195 p. illus. 49-9109 NA737.H3B7 "Published for the Institute of Early American History and Culture at Williamsburg, Virginia." A "biographical essay" about Peter Harrison (171 6-1 775) who arrived as a colonist at Newport, R.I., in 1739. This English seaman became the master of no fewer than 10 skills, among them ship- building and woodcarving, as well as "America's first important architect." In his design of the Red- wood Library at Newport, 1749, Harrison intro- duced the Palladian style of architecture to this country, and so anticipated Thomas Jefferson in the revival of classical models. Although Harrison was possessor of "the largest and best-selected archi- tectural library of colonial America," the plans for his churches, synagogue, and market at Newport, Boston, and Cambridge, Mass., were those "of the designer, not the copyist." His story is here docu- mented from the fragmentary surviving sources and 846 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES set forth against the background of contemporary colonial history. 5705. Condit, Carl W. The rise of the skyscraper. Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1952. 255 p. 52-6468 NA712.C65 A comprehensive history of the Chicago school of architecture and of the evolution of the commercial skyscraper, from the time of the great fire of 1871 to World War I, and from the first structural innova- tions of the engineers to the functional designs and architectonics of men like Dankmar Adler, Sullivan, Burnham, and William Holabird. The work is based in large part upon contemporary periodicals, the records of engineering and architectural firms, and the files of commercial photographers. Al- though it designed every type of building, the "Chicago school is associated with the invention and mastery of steel framing and with the consequent development of the modern office building, hotel, and apartment block." Their success is attested by "the largest concentration of first-rate commercial architecture in the world. The 108 halftones from photographs have been carefully selected. 5706. Forman, Henry Chandlee. The architec- ture of the Old South: the medieval style, 1585-1850. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1948. 203 p. 48-8948 NA720.F6 Bibliography: p. [1851-191. Based upon the author's wide field experience in archaeology, this book incorporates lectures orig- inally presented at Goucher College. "It is our premise . . . that en bloc American architecture of the Southern Colonies in the sixteenth and seven- teenth centuries belonged to the English medieval period, which, far from terminating with the acces- sion of Elizabeth, continued until close to 1700. Distance did not dilute or corrupt the style in America." An introductory section considers our English late Gothic heritage; Parts II-III, consti- tuting the bulk of the book, deal respectively with Virginia and Maryland architecture; and Part IV devotes brief chapters to the medieval architecture of Bermuda, North Carolina, South Carolina, and Georgia. Professor Forman's many sketches and plans include reconstructions of ruined or vanished edifices and contribute in large measure to the com- parisons made in his text between American build- ings and their English prototypes. 5707. Garvan, Anthony N. B. Architecture and town planning in colonial Connecticut. New Haven, Yale University Press, 1951. xiv, 166 p. (Yale historical publications. History of art, 6) 51-14684 NA7235.C8G3 "Bibliographical note": p. 152-159. "An investigation of the relationship between do- mestic architecture and the demography and national origins of colonial Connecticut." The book, an outgrowth of a dissertation, makes use of aerial pho- tographs, as well as manuscript land surveys and other cartographical materials. "The colony's archi- tecture, town plans, and land division were like its settlers — rural, Protestant, and English." Choosing a site with an eye both to defense and to pasturage, the setders reserved "a few central acres within the village unit for a meetinghouse and for the minister's own house." Beyond the symmetrical center lay an area of "wandering, haphazard lanes" which frustrates 20th-century traffic and is often scrapped by the modern planner. Since conservatism marked Connecticut design, style changes from English models were made chiefly in "small things and subde details." An original "rich variety of architecture" gave way to the predominance of the "clapboard lean-to house, direcdy descended from the yeoman post-enclosure farmhouse of eastern England," which crowded out the other styles and furnished the basis for later developments. Many plates and figures illustrate the text. 5708. Hamlin, Talbot F. Benjamin Henry La- trobe. New York, Oxford University Press, 1955. xxxvi, 633 p. ^ 55-8117 NA737.L34H3 Based upon the "priceless Latrobe papers and sketchbooks" as well as other sources, both primary and secondary, this Pulitzer prize winning book is a detailed biography of Benjamin Henry Latrobe ( 1 764-1 820), the "single-minded creator of the architectural profession in the United States." His designs for the Bank of Pennsylvania and the water system of Philadelphia (1798) established him at once as "the most accomplished and imaginative of the architects and engineers in the United States." Restrained and geometric in much of its composition, his revolutionary work was "naturally classic in de- tail and turned always to Greek precedent for inspiration." He achieved his ambition "to establish architecture as a high and respected profession" through his own works, such as the Baltimore Cathe- dral (1805) and portions of the United States Capitol (1803-17), and through the accomplish- ments of his students, Robert Mills and William Strickland. Numerous plates and figures illustrate die text. 5709. Hamlin, Talbot F. Greek revival architec- ture in America: being an account of important trends in American architecture and American life prior to the War Between the States. New York, Oxford University Press, 1944. xl, 439 p. 44-865 NA707.H32 ART AND ARCHITECTURE / 8 47 "A list of articles on architecture in some Amer- ican periodicals prior to 1850, by Sarah Hull Jenkins Simpson Hamlin": p. [356] -382. Bibliography: p. [383J-409. A broad yet detailed history of Greek revival architecture in the United States during the years 1820-60. Seeking monumental permanence and conceived in terms of function rather than of archae- ology, this architecture was inspired by classical Greek style, using its details, but incorporating them in original building forms. Greek revival architec- ture received a "distinguished start" in the designs of Benjamin Henry Latrobe as early as 1798. The use of Greek style did not become universal, however, until the late 1820's, and then largely through the work of two of Latrobe's pupils, Robert Mills ( 1781— 1855) and William Strickland (1 787-1 854), who brought the movement to its mature structural in- ventiveness, soundness of construction, and excel- lence of execution. It flourished in a culture "learned, founded on classic myth, classic literature, classic art." The "emergence of the millionaire was as fatal to the artistic ideals of the Greek Revival as were the speed, the speculation, and the exploita- tion that produced him." 5710. Hitchcock, Henry Russell. The architecture of H. H. Richardson and his times. New York, Museum of Modern Art, 1936. xxiv, 311 p. 36-3985 NA737.R5H5 A study of the architectural accomplishments of Henry Hobson Richardson (1 838-1 886) in the light of the setting within which he worked. The author has visited almost all of Richardson's extant build- ings and has had access to his sketchbooks. During the 1850's, the intellectuals had succeeded in termi- nating the Greek revival, and with it a certain in- tegrity of constructon. "It is in relation to this almost complete loss of the sense of architecture as sound building that Richardson's achievement after the Civil War is most remarkable." He developed a personal style characterized chiefly by "massive walls, lintel-covered openings, . . . broad arches," and vigorous polychromy; he "was ready to find inspiration in any part of the past that appealed to him. The Romanesque was perhaps most useful." A great individual, he raised American architecture "from the slough of the late sixties." By the 1880's, he had achieved an "excessive popularity, which led to over-production." The text is illustrated by 145 photographic reproductions of drawings, facades, and plans. 571 1. Hitchcock, Henry Russell. In the nature of materials, 1 887-1941; the buildings of Frank Lloyd Wright. New York, Duell, Sloan & Pearce, 1942. xxxv, 143 p. 42-13893 NA737.W7H5 "Chronological list of executed work and projects: 1887-1941": p. 105-130. 5712. Wright, Frank Lloyd. An American archi- tecture. Edited by Edgar Kaufmann. New York, Horizon Press, 1955. 269 p. 55-12271 NA737.W7K3 Professor Hitchcock's book aims "to display as fully as may be the architectural work and projects of Wright, with particular emphasis on the expres- sion of the 'Nature of Materials.' " Subordinated to the section of plates and linked closely to it, the introductory text provides a rapid historical survey of Frank Lloyd Wright's architecture. Parts I — II show the influences exerted upon him, especially by Richardson's followers and by Sullivan, and the steps by which he attained maturity during the late 1880's and the 1890's. Parts III— VI are devoted to Wright's mature work of the years 1901-41. Men- tion is made of such buildings as the Willitts House (1902), a masterpiece among the Prairie houses; Taliesin (191 1-25), his own studio, dwelling, and farm, which "quite literally grows" from the hill- side; and the Imperial Hotel at Tokyo (1915-22), a "building which is from foundation to roof all of new materials and new devices compounded." Also considered are the California houses of the 1920's, illustrating Wright's "capacity to renew again and again his architectural imagination by drawing on the implications of particular uses of materials and the opportunities of very carefully chosen sites," the Kaufmann House, "Falling Water" (1936), and the Johnson Administration Building (1936-39), the two latter "widely recognized as classic masterpieces even before they were finished." The 413 photo- graphs and plans are accompanied by descriptive captions. A special 92-page issue of the Architec- tural Forum (v. 88, Jan. 1948), devoted wholly to the architecture of Frank Lloyd Wright, comple- ments Professor Hitchcock's volume by showing many of the architect's later designs. This issue was "completely designed and written by him; the plans and sketches appear as they were drawn by the 50 young men who now compose the Taliesin Fellowship." A number of his Usonian houses are depicted, as are group housing projects, more ambi- tious dwellings, commercial and industrial estab- lishments, buildings for Florida Southern College, and others. The editor of An American Architecture has skillfully excerpted from various of the author's writings published between 1894 and 1954 in order to present the basic principles upon which his archi- tecture is founded. Flis ideal of "organic architec- ture," conceived as one with its setting and environ- ment, and designed "for human use and comfort," is amply set forth in the 262 illustrations of projects 848 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES and completed works from the period 1 893-1955, some of which have never before been published. 5713. Kimball, Sidney Fiske. Domestic architec- ture of the American colonies and of the early republic, by Fiske Kimball. New York, Scribner, 1922. xx, 314 p. 22-24675 NA707.K45 "Chronological chart": p. [263J-269. "Notes on individual houses": p. [27i]~3oo. In this pioneer work, Dr. Kimball, with the "aid of building contracts and accounts, inscriptions, and original designs, as well as inventories, wills, deeds, and other documents in favorable cases," indicates the dates and original forms of nearly 200 houses erected in the English colonies and American republic between the time of settlement and 1835. The 17th-century colonial style was "still essentially mediaeval," but with the opening of the 18th century the "academic spirit and the academic architectural forms" prevailed. "The triumph of literal classi- cism in 1825, with its ideal formal schemes of temple and rotunda, had been prepared by Jefferson's prophetic insistence on these very types, from the time of the Revolution itself." Many plans and elevations are included among the 219 illustrations and figures. 5714. Morrison, Hugh S. Early American archi- tecture, from the first colonial setdements to the national period. New York, Oxford University Press, 1952. xiv, 619 p. 52-7831 NA707.M63 "Reading suggestions" at end of each chapter. A comprehensive but concise one-volume history of architecture in the North American colonies from St. Augustine in 1565 to San Francisco in 1848. Professor Morrison surveys such edifices as houses, churches, forts, log cabins, markets, mills, and public and institutional buildings. He covers all the styles, English, Dutch, French, Spanish, and, to a lesser extent, Swedish, that were developed from the time of the first setdements: to the American Revolution on the Atlantic seaboard; to 1803 in French Louisi- ana; and to 1848 in the Spanish colonies. The primary emphasis is placed upon the colonial style of the 17th century and the Georgian style of the 1 8th, and the conditions under which they were produced. The author has made use of all of the earlier literature, and has presented the several styles "both in text and illustrations, by a selection of typical . . . examples, by monuments of unusual historical importance, and particularly by buildings that are dated with reasonable certainty." He has further attempted "to bring out the distinctive quality and color of architecture in the many differ- ent regions of the country." Many of the 484 illus- trations were specially drawn for this work. 5715. Morrison, Hugh S. Louis Sullivan, prophet of modern architecture. New York, Museum of Modern Art and W. W. Norton, 1935. 391 p. 36-27013 NA737.S9M6 "A bibliography of the writings of Louis Sul- livan": p. 306-309. "General bibliography": p. 310-317. An enthusiastic evaluation of the achievements of Louis Henry Sullivan (1856-1924) in architecture, of his theories concerning it, and of his position in relation to present-day architectural practice. His Wainwright Building (1890), "the first success- ful solution of the architectural problem of the high [office] building," incorporates Sullivan's "whole conception of architectural design as the symbolic expression of an emotion aroused by practical con- ditions." To him, the thesis that form follows function "was simply natural law." "His work and his thinking have made architecture once more plastic in the hands of the creative artist, and ren- dered possible the development of a true architec- tural style in the present day." The book includes 87 illustrations and 16 figures. John Szarkowski's The Idea of Louis Sullivan (Minneapolis, University of Minnesota Press, 1956. 161 p.) is an album of halftone reproductions of photographs, most of them quite clear, documenting the architect's fundamental concepts as to functional forms, "vertical continuity," and organic systems of ornamentation; accompany- ing them is a "Profile of Louis Sullivan," together with quotations from Sullivan and others germane to the pictures. Just before he died Sullivan com- pleted a lyrically written sketch of his own life, The Autobiography of an Idea (1924; reprint with additional material by Ralph Marlowe Line, New York, Dover Publications, 1956. 333 p.), which seeks to reveal the origin and development of his central conception: "a sane philosophy of a living architecture, good for all time, founded on the only possible foundation — Man and his powers," issuing in a functional, democratic, and indigenously Amer- ican style of both structure and ornament. 5716. Mumford, Lewis, ed. Roots of contempo- rary American architecture; a series of thirty-seven essays dating from the mid-nineteenth century to the present. New York, Reinhold, 1952. 454 p. 52-10519 NA710.M8 A collection of papers, together with an intro- ductory essay and biographical sketches by Mr. Mumford of the 29 writers whose work appears here. The book assembles a "body of thought that helped form modern architecture in the United States during the last century." Later interpretations, mainly the editor's own, fill gaps in the first-hand documents. The writers, among them critics, his- torians, naturalists, and regional planners, as well ART AND ARCHITECTURE / 849 as architects, range from Horatio Greenough (1805-1852) to Matthew Nowicki (1910-1950). The American tradition of architecture Mr. Mum- ford defines as "a mode of thinking and feeling, of planning and organizing and building, that Amer- icans became conscious of only after they had estab- lished their political independence, had thrown off their colonial ways, and had begun to create a new mold for their life, in which past habits were modi- fied by new processes, new activities, new purposes." The point of departure was a break with the concept of an architectural absolute, and it was made in architectural writings long before it was translated into new building forms. 5717. New York. Museum of Modern Art. Built in USA, 1932-1944, edited by Elizabeth Mock. New York, 1944. 127 p. 44-7779 NA712.N45 5718. New York. Museum of Modern Art. Built in USA: post-war architecture, edited by Henry Russell Hitchcock and Arthur Drexler. New York, Distributed by Simon & Schuster [1952] 128 p. 53-568 NA712.N47 Two catalogs designed to accompany exhibitions of outstanding modern American architecture that were assembled by the Museum of Modern Art in 1944 and 1952. Listing 47 edifices chosen by a com- mittee mainly "on the basis of total design," the first volume is perhaps strongest in the field of domestic architecture. This was an area in which the Ameri- can architect had "had the most opportunities and the freest hand." During the years 1932-44, he was interested particularly in the "straightforward use of material," and a more intimate adaptation of structure to climate and topography, as well as in the exploitation of such materials as reinforced con- crete and laminated wood, the strength of which permitted a new freedom of design in both plan and elevation. Choice of the 43 buildings included in the 1952 catalog has been the "final responsibility" of Professor Hitchcock, whose criterion is a double one, "quality and significance of the moment." His introduction notes that "it has been business, inter- ested in the advertising value of striking architec- ture, which has sponsored many of the more luxurious — and not to balk at a word — beautiful buildings of the last few years." Modern design, the author observes, is nationally standardized but not monolithic, and the "international mode" has been thoroughly domesticated. Both catalogs pro- vide a two-page spread for each building dealt with, including a brief description of its salient architec- tural features, a plan, and photographs of exterior and, usually, of interior views. 5719. Newcomb, Rexford. Architecture of the Old Northwest Territory; a study of early architecture in Ohio, Indiana, Illinois, Michigan, Wisconsin, & part of Minnesota. Chicago, Uni- versity of Chicago Press, 1950. xvii, 175 p. 5 0-905 1 NA725 .N4 Bibliography: p. 162-167. "The result of some thirty years of observation and study," this comprehensive synthesis "attempts to set forth, for the first time, a connected story of the career of architectural art in the Old Northwest from the earliest days down through that moving formative period which came to a close with the Civil War." Mr. Newcomb begins with a discussion of French colonial architecture of the early 18th cen- tury, which he reconstructs, so far as possible, from contemporary descriptions and travel reports. He goes on to describe the half-faced camps, forts, and cabins of the American pioneers, and to discriminate Southern and New England influences in the more ambitious structures derived from early American styles. Examples of the Georgian and Federal modes are few, he observes, and "in general, it was the Greek Revival — in its heyday during the developing period of the Northwest," the years 1825-60 — "that followed the cabin when better homes could be built." The text is illustrated by 97 plates and 49 figures. 5720. Place, Charles A. Charles Bulfinch, archi- tect and citizen. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1925. xiv, 294 p. 25-27877 NA737.B8P5 This biography of Charles Bulfinch (1763-1844), the first American architect of native birth, relies upon oral tradition as well as family letters, contem- porary journals, the Boston town records, and other documents. The Hollis Street Church in Boston (1788) was apparently his first executed design, and the State House at Hartford, Connecticut (1796), was the first public building constructed from his plans. His design of a state house for Massachu- setts was adopted in 1795, and he enjoyed a "connec- tion with this structure . . . more personal and intimate than with any other of his designs." He executed a number of residences, churches, and public buildings in the Federal style during the years 1796-1818, among them the Massachusetts General Hospital. The remainder of his career, 1818-30, he devoted to the Capitol at Washington. "Bulfinch's work . . . was to complete the wings partially restored by Latrobe after the destruction by the British troops in 1814, and to construct the central portion for the most part from plans made by Latrobe, making such changes as were necessary." The illustrations consist in large part of photographs of buildings long since demolished. 431240 — 60- -55 85O / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 5721. Pratt, Dorothy, and Richard Pratt. A guide to early American homes. New York, McGraw-Hill, 1956. 2 v. 56-10867 NA7205.P68 Contents. — [1] North. — [2] South. An informal handbook to surviving American houses of the years 1 680-1 850, designed for tourists to use in conjunction with road maps. Geographi- cally arranged, brief histories and descriptions are furnished of more than 900 early homes in the 14 states of the North between the Adantic seaboard and the Mississippi, and of nearly 700 in 16 states of the South including Missouri and Arkansas. Approximately two-thirds are public museums; the remainder are private dwellings, many of which are conditionally open to visitors. General commentary on the architecture of each state is provided, as is specific information regarding locations of the houses, requirements for admission, and ownership. There are numerous rather small black-and-white illustrations, predominantly of facades. 5722. Pratt, Richard. A treasury of early Ameri- can homes. New York, Whittlesey House [1949] vii, 136 p. 49-50069 NA7205.P7 These 22 color-illustrated articles, devoted to fine American homes, many of them manorial in scale, of the period 1 650-1 850, were originally published in the Ladies' Home Journal. With the exception of the ones in Natchez, New Orleans, and Monterey, all of the houses covered lie within the region of the English colonies along the Atlantic seaboard, from Woodstock, Vermont, and Portsmouth, New Hamp- shire, to Charleston. An introduction provides a thumbnail history of American domestic architec- ture. Deliberately subordinated to the illustrative material, the chronologically arranged text is limited to historical summaries, and to descriptions of the major features of the houses and of the interiors and furnishings depicted. Similar in format, The Sec- ond Treasury of Early American Homes, by the author in collaboration with his wife, Dorothy Pratt (New York, Hawthorn Books, 1954. 144 p.), is an "entirely new collection of early American homes in color." "Chosen for their age and their charm together," the 57 houses and more than 140 interiors delineated here are geographically arranged — south from Maine to Georgia, and west to Tennessee. The color is less satisfactory in the sequel, the reds and yellows having an unnatural intensity. 5723. Sanford, Trent Elwood. The architecture of the Southwest; Indian, Spanish, American. New York Norton, 1950. 312 p. 50-10641 NA720.S3 Lists of pueblos and missions: p. 276-299. An architectural history of the American South- west, where Indian, Spanish, and Anglo-American cultures are blended. Part one considers Pueblo Indian architecture which culminated during the years 1050-1300. Comprising the bulk of the book, parts two to five are devoted to Spanish architecture, particularly to the influential 17th-century Spanish- Pueblo style in which Spanish ideas and methods were applied "to an indigenous architecture of local materials put in place by Indian labor," and to the florid 18th-century Spanish baroque. A concluding section is devoted to Anglo-American contributions to the architecture of the Southwest, the most notable, perhaps, being Thomas Oliver Larkin's 19th-century adaptation of the Cape Cod mode to adobe in a two-story house with a hipped roof and a balcony. Numerous halftones illustrate the text. Rexford Newcomb's Spanish-Colonial Architecture in the United States (New York, J. J. Augustin, 1937. 39 p. 130 plates) briefly describes and illustrates, in many halftones and measured plans and drawings, surviving Spanish-Colonial structures, as well as the best modern adaptations of the old styles in the "regional vernaculars" of Florida, Texas, New Mexico, Arizona, and California. 5724. Sloane, Eric. American barns and covered bridges. New York, W. Funk, 1954. 1 12 p. 54-12510 NA8201.S6 This book springs out of its author's enthusiasm for antique American handhewn woodwork, its materials and tools, and its characteristic end products. The importance of wood in early Ameri- can life, the importance of seasoning, and the characteristics of native American woods are de- scribed. Early American tools are described and illustrated in the author's skillful drawings or dia- grams. Barn design altered little in the two cen- turies after 1650; the author admires New England and Pennsylvania patterns and compares them at length, but considers that, in the trans-Allegheny migration, "many of the arts of woodworking and seasoning were lost." Covered bridges were devised at the very end of the 18th century and continued to be built for about 70 years; the covering strength- ened the structure, and kept water out of the joints, and rain and snow off the roadway. There are some 1600 left, but they are disappearing very rapidly. American Yesterday (New York, W. Funk, 1956. 123 p.) pursues the author's nostalgic interest in antique artifacts down a number of curious by- ways, such as foot stoves, hammocks, weathervanes, and shutters, and has the same kind of attractive illustrations. 5725. Waterman, Thomas Tileston. The dwell- ings of colonial America. Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina Press, 1950. 312 p. 50-14735 NA707.W42 ART AND ARCHITECTURE / 85 1 Bibliography: p. 291-293. "Glossary of architectural terms": p. 294-298. "This study of the dwellings of colonial America is confined to the period between the first English settlement and the close of the Revolution, and to the area occupied by the United States in 1783." The four main chapters trace, in considerable detail, the patterns of evolution, and the intricate and varied influences involved in the domestic architecture of the Southern colonies, the Delaware Valley and Pennsylvania, the Hudson Valley and eastern New Jersey, and New England. Each chapter discusses the primitive one-room shelters of the original set- tlers, the vigorous, even "homely" styles of the 17th century, and the mature and sophisticated Georgian mode of the 18th. Numerous photographs of exte- riors, interiors, and details, together with the author's plans, illustrate the text. D. Interiors 5726. Brazer, Esther (Stevens). Early American decoration; a comprehensive treatise reveal- ing the technique involved in the art of early American decoration of furniture, walls, tinware, etc. Memorial [/. e. 2d] ed. Springfield, Mass., Pond-Ekberg, 1947. 265 p. 48-490 NK1403.B7 1947 First published in 1940. A study of 18th- and early 19th-century Amer- ican methods of applying designs in one or more colors to the surfaces of movables and interior walls, based upon the author's observations of the designs themselves, her research in early instruction books, and her own experiments. In the hope that "an- tique furniture and tinware, old-time decorated walls and floors, may be restored with their proper designs and with their own methods of painting," she works out the old principles of design, the first of which is that decorative design must emphasize construction; the materials, tools, and their proper- ties and uses; and the various techniques of design, such as stenciling, brush-stroke painting, striping and banding, freehand bronze painting, gold leaf work, japanning, retouching, restoring, and an- tiquing. A final part offers a "step-by-step pictorial exposition" of the copying of the old decorations. Mrs. Brazer contributes many photographs and drawings, some in excellent color. 5727. Cornelius, Charles Over. Early American furniture. New York, Appleton-Century [1936?] xx, 278 p. 36—13493 NK2406.C6 1936 Bibliography: p. 263-268. First published in 1926. This history of the development of American fur- niture from the 17th century to 1850 shows the "growth in artistic consciousness from a time when utilitarianism predominated over esthetic de- mands ... to the time when a highly organized society expressed itself in sophisticated terms." Ex- ecuted by carpenter-joiners, the earliest furniture preserved the "primitive rectangular character in- herited from medieval times." By the first decade of the 1 8th century, cabinetmaking had achieved a new excellence, and the "baroque forms, based preferably upon the curved rather than the straight line, began to affect the structure"; especially influential were the light and delicate classical proportions of Shera- ton's designs. From 1820 to 1850, when mechanical methods predominated, "interest was less in esthetic values" than in ingenuity. The book is illustrated by 63 photographic plates and 12 figures. 5728. Cornelius, Charles Over. Furniture master- pieces of Duncan Phyfe. Measured detail drawings by Stanley J. Rowland. Garden City, N.Y., Published for the Metropolitan Museum of Art by Doubleday, Page, 1922. 86 p. 22-23282 NK2439.P5C6 An examination of the "sincere craftsmanship and consummate artistry" of Duncan Phyfe (1768- 1854), New York cabinetmaker, in the first quarter of the 19th century. The author sees Phyfe, in his earlier practice, as heir to the age of George Hepple- white and Thomas Sheraton, "able to profit by all the accomplishments of the last great English cabi- net-makers," and to "pick and choose those treat- ments which his native good taste and feeling for his craft told him were legitimate and appropriate for his use." In a second phase, he adopted many motifs of Directoire and Consulate origin, but "com- bined them skillfully with those of his earliest prac- tice, still keeping the delicate scale and fine finish of the latter." Mr. Cornelius analyzes in detail the architectural proportions, lines, and decorative methods and motifs, particularly the acanthus and lyre, of Phyfe 's best-designed chairs and benches, sofas, tables, and other pieces. Five plates of detail drawings supplement the 56 halftone photographs of whole pieces. Duncan Phyfe and the English 852 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Regency, IJ95-1830, by Nancy V. McClelland (New York, W. R. Scott, 1939. 364 p.), stresses the "beauty and suavity" of the tables, chairs, sofas, window seats, and the like, which Phyfe produced before 1825, as well as the "clean, well-defined lines, the accents of light and shade, and the flatness of carving that might actually have been done by a sculptor of stone or marble." 5729. Kettell, Russell Hawes, ed. Early American rooms; a consideration of the changes in style between the arrival of the Mayflower and the Civil War in the regions originally settled by the English and the Dutch. Portland, Me., Southworth- Anthoensen Press, 1936. xvii, 200 p. 37-392 NK2003.K4 "Color schedule": p. xvii. Mr. Kettell and 19 collaborators here present 12 chapters on 12 rooms, "permanendy available for public study," each of which was a center of social activity in its own particular time. Of the rooms, one is from 17th-century and 6 are from 18th-century New England; one each is from 18th-century New York, Philadelphia, and Virginia; one is from early 19th-century New Jersey, and one from Victorian New York. Included are living rooms, dining rooms, and parlors, as well as a drawing room, a barroom, and a ballroom. Each chapter contains a discussion of the history and everyday living of the period; a general exposition of the contemporary styles exemplified by the room under consideration; a document "selected to throw light on the period as a whole or on some particularly colorful aspect of it"; and 2 leaves of a contemporary newspaper in type replica. The drawings in direct orthographic projection show the room completely furnished. One plate for each room reproduces its color scheme. 5730. Litde, Nina Fletcher. American decorative wall painting, 1 700-1 850. Sturbridge, Mass., Old Sturbridge Village, in cooperation with Studio Publications, New York, 1952. xvi, 145 p. 52-10836 ND2606.L58 "Selective bibliography": p. 138-140. A pioneer survey based mainly upon the author's investigations of old buildings, museum materials, and 18th-century newspaper advertisements. Be- cause little of such painting has survived in the South, most of her examples come from New Eng- land houses. Earlier techniques included graining, marbleizing, and japanning of woodwork, painting of wall panels and overmantels in scenic or still life motifs, and decoration of fireboards and floors. By the end of the 18th century, panoramic scenes, sten- ciled patterns, and freehand floral designs were being painted directly on the plaster walls. Decora- tive wall painting gave way to machine-printed paper in the mid-i9th century. There are lists of painters, with biographical sketches, and of impor- tant works in and out of museums (p. 129-138.) A few of the 146 illustrations are in badly blurred color. 5731. Miller, Edgar G. American antique furni- ture, a book for amateurs. New York, M. Barrows [1948, c i937] 2 v. (1106 p.) 48-9713 NK2406.M55 1948 First published in 1937. Designed "not only to show to the amateur collec- tor what is fine, but also to show what is not fine," these elaborately detailed volumes provide a wealth of information about furniture produced, chiefly in America, during the years 1650-1840, as well as 2,115 illustrations of the objects described. The photographs, taken for the most part especially for the work, are of articles in private homes rather than museums. After four introductory chapters dealing with sundry matters such as the danger of encountering fakes, each chapter is devoted to a chronological treatment of a single type of furni- ture, as for example, the sofa, highboy, cupboard, mirror, and clock. The very extensive footnotes consist of documentation, explanation or amplifica- tion, and pithy comment; they are, in the author's opinion, almost as important as the text, "and some- times are more interesting." 5732. Rogers, Meyric R. American interior de- sign; the traditions and development of domestic design from colonial times to the present. New York, Norton, 1947. 309 p. 47-12416 NK2003.R6 Bibliography: p. 297-302. "This book is intended to survey . . . the tradi- tion, evolution and qualities of the American domestic interior," from 1630 to 1947. Four of the five chapters trace the development of design in American household furniture and accessories from colonial times to 1920. The author analyzes suc- cessively the Jacobean style of the 17th century, the Queen Anne and Chippendale styles of the 18th, the Federal and Empire styles of the 19th, and the "battle of the styles" which extended into the first decades of the 20th century. The concluding chap- ter, "The Age of Social Readjustment," takes the story from 1920 to 1947, and discusses the implica- tions of Functionalism for the future. Each chapter summarizes briefly the political, economic, social, and architectural background of its period. A glos- sary and biographical notes, together with 196 illus- trations and 39 plates, a number of them colored, complete the volume. ART AND ARCHITECTURE / 853 E. Sculpture 5733. Brumme, Carl Ludwig. Contemporary American sculpture. New York, Crown, 1948. 156 p. 48-9357 NB212.B75 "Biographical notes": p. 145-149. Bibliography: p. 150-156. 5734. Schnier, Jacques P. Sculpture in modern America. Berkeley, University of California Press, 1948. 224 p. 48-11026 NB205.S35 Bibliography: p. 65-67. The first of these picture books presents, in the words of William Zorach's introducdon, "all direc- tions and schools of thought in sculpture, in this way giving an over-all picture of what is happening to- day." "In this survey," states Mr. Brumme, "em- phasis is, of course, placed on the younger sculptors, for the task of further developing a contemporary esthetic direction is primarily theirs." In their work, a "broadened perspective plus the findings of 20th- century experimenters in pure form have engen- dered the esthetic philosophy of form needed in our age of individual expression." Having virtually eliminated text in order to conserve space, Mr. Brumme has arranged the 130 illustrations alpha- betically by sculptor, from George Aarons to William Zorach. After pointing out the indebtedness of 19th- century American sculptors to European artists, Mr. Schnier turns to a style the development of which, in the years 1909-12, represents "a turning point in the evolution of sculpture in this country." He notes three major trends in the treatment of representa- tional content. In the one "followed by the majority of American sculptors, easily recognizable subject matter is integrated into effective designs, bur with no attempt at realistic interpretation." In that of the pure abstractionists, Alexander Calder, Isamu No- guchi, and, more recently, Claire Falkenstein, "forms have been completely divorced from repre- sentational content, and the entire emphasis is placed on formal arrangement." In that of the surrealists, "recognizable elements are arranged in a completely unreal and bizarre manner or combined with ab- stract forms." The 139 plates are classified under the headings: heads, figures, animals, reliefs, and explorations in form. 5735. Cordssoz, Royal. Augustus Saint-Gaudens. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1907. 85 p. 7-40526 NB237.S2C8 An appreciation of the work of Augustus Saint- Gaudens (1848-1907) by Royal Cortissoz (1869- 1948), who was for many years art editor of the New Yor\ Herald-Tribune. He believes that Saint- Gaudens "was not only our greatest sculptor, but the first to break with the old epoch of insipid ideas and hide-bound academic notions of style, giving the art a new lease of life and fixing a new standard." His own style "was remarkable for its blending of polish with freedom." He executed portrait medal- lions of delicacy, spontaneity, and realism during the 1870's and '8o's. In modeling the single draped figure of the Adams Monument (1887), Saint- Gaudens was "the poet, the dramatist, intermingling with the concrete qualities of plastic art the more elusive qualities of mind and soul." His other great triumphs were portraits in the round and on the scale of the public monument: Admiral Farragut, Abraham Lincoln, and Deacon Chapin in the '8o's; the Robert Gould Shaw Memorial, unveiled in 1897; and the equestrian statue of General Sherman, un- veiled in 1903. The text is illustrated by 24 heliotype plates. 5736. Cresson, Margaret (French). Journey into fame; the life of Daniel Chester French. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1947. xv, 316 p. 47-30328 NB237.F7C7 Bibliography: p. [3151-316. An intimate and anecdotal biography of Daniel Chester French (1 850-1931) by his daughter. She delineates a man of great energy, self-confidence, and tenacity of purpose, a career of ever-increasing artistic significance, and a financial success in the true 19th-century American tradidon. When his first commission, "The Minute Man," a symbol of the youth, vigor, and determinadon of the country, was unveiled at Concord, Mass., in 1875, this New England sculptor "suddenly vaulted into fame." The claim has been made for his greatest work, the colossal seated figure in the Lincoln Memorial dedi- cated at Washington in 1922, that it has "established the image of Lincoln for posterity." Although her- self a sculptor, Mrs. Cresson offers relatively little analysis of her father's style, noting only his efforts to gain "crispness in modeling" and "a kind of native classicism" in him. 5737. Fite, Gilbert C. Mount Rushmore. Nor- man, University of Oklahom Press, 1952. xiv, 272 p. 5 2 -79 1 9 NB237.B6F5 854 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES "Selected bibliography": p. 255-260. Based upon both official and private records, this is mainly a history of the association of Gutzon Borglum (1867-1941) with the controversial Mount Rushmore National Memorial. The sculptor was commissioned in the early 1920's to carve in the Black Hills of South Dakota a "gigantic monument" commemorating some aspects of American history. Impressed by the size and greatness of the United States, he wished to leave behind a "monument which would stand for all time as a record of su- preme achievement — a monument to the nation and to himself." Even on a reduced scale the work was beset by financial difficulties and personal conflicts, and the last of the four enormous figures of Wash- ington, Jefferson, Lincoln, and Theodore Roosevelt was not unveiled until July 2, 1939. Criticism of the colossi has come chiefly from two sources: those who account them a desecration of nature, akin to the incising of initials in the bark of a tree, and others who object to the romantic naturalism of Borglum's style. The 32 photographs document the evolution of the memorial. 5738. Gardner, Albert Ten Eyck. Yankee stone- cutters; the first American school of sculp- ture, 1 800-1 850. New York, Published for the Metropolitan Museum of Art by Columbia Univer- sity Press, 1945. 84 p. 45-8846 NB210.G3 These informal essays attempt to place early 19th- century American "sculptors and their works in rela- tion to the life of the time." George Washington, as a symbol of liberty and national unity, was the "most important single factor in the encouragement of the sculptural arts in the young nation." After 1815, the rebuilt Capitol and other public buildings had "to be redecorated in an appropriate classical manner to satisfy the Greco-Roman republicans of the New World." Most of the artists concerned were "timid, provincial amateurs of art" aiming at faithful copies mechanically produced. William Rimmer (1816-79), however, was a creative artist far above his contemporaries, whose works are pre- sented "unadorned with anecdote, as direct studies in the art of sculpture, and not as petrified dramas." Horatio Greenough (1805-52) also towered over the rest, but as a thinker who grasped the basic prin- ciples of functionalism and organic relationships. The author lists sculptors, stonecutters, carvers, and modelers in America before 1800; sculptors born between 1800 and 1830, for whom brief biographies are supplied; and some born between 1830 and 1850. The illustrations, averaging two to a plate, are clearly reproduced. 5739. Smith, Chetwood, and Mary Smith. Rogers groups, thought & wrought by John Rogers, by Mr. and Mrs. Chetwood Smith. Boston, C. E. Goodspeed, 1934. 145 p. 35-932 NB237.R65S6 A biography of John Rogers (1829-1904), based upon his letters, scrapbooks, and catalogs, together with an illustrated catalogue raisonne of his work. This New England sculptor, who enjoyed a tremen- dous popular vogue in the years 1860-90, illustrated with his statuettes especially the humorous and senti- mental aspects of everyday life. He modeled and patented 80 clay sculptures from which plaster casts were made and sold, in a variety of shades of pearl and slate grays, fawn, snuff, and cinnamon browns. Among the most popular of the "Rogers Groups" were "The Slave Auction" and other frankly abolitionist pieces; "Coming to the Parson," often used as a wedding present; "The Charity Patient"; and "Playing Doctor." "The last two, together with 'Fetching the Doctor' and 'The Foundling', were much used for decorating doctors' offices; in fact, the Medical Record advertised them." It is estimated that there were sold 100,000 of these "real and friendly creatures, made by the man who was jusdy called 'The Laureate of Home.' " 5740. Taft, Lorado. The history of American sculpture. New ed., with a supplementary chapter by Adeline Adams. New York, Macmillan, 1930. 622 p. 30-32611 NB205.T3 1930 "General bibliography": p. 607-618. This history of his predecessors and contempo- raries by the eminent sculptor, Lorado Taft (1860- 1936), first appeared in 1903, and was revised for an edition of 1924. The first artists noticed, men like William Rush and John Frazee, were wood- carvers and stonecutters, who labored without edu- cation and without a tradition. Tutored in the Italian classical style, Horatio Greenough, Hiram Powers, and Thomas Crawford began their real work in the 1830's and soon attained national prom- inence. They chiseled realistic portrait busts and drew inspiration from myth, allegory, and the Bible for their "ideal figures." Between 1850 and 1876, "timidly but hopefully American sculpture began to grow contemporaneous in spirit; the 'actual' crept at last upon the stage, while classic themes gradually receded." With the unveiling of his statue of Admiral Farragut in 1881, Augustus Saint- Gaudens "took his place at the head of American sculpture." "Our sculpture is pledged mainly to the safe and sane," Mrs. Adams observed in her chapter, but "as the passion for novelty increases, the faith in fundamentals declines." There are numerous illustrations in a halftone which did not improve with successive reprintings. ART AND ARCHITECTURE / 855 F. Painting 5741. American painting today. Washington, American Federation of Arts, 1939. 179 p. 40-209 ND212.A57 A picture book containing 249 monochrome and 10 color reproductions of easel paintings in oil, water- color, tempera, and gouache, and of murals in fresco, tempera, and oil, executed mainly during the 1930's. Many of the plates first appeared in the Magazine of Art. "The effort has been to illustrate, on a wide front, by means of a great variety of visual material picked by successive editors, what American painters, known and unknown, young and old, conservative and liberal, have been doing in the past ten years or so." In his introduction, Forbes Watson notes the domination of the art world by the School of Paris and by French dealers during the 1920's, and the subsequent rediscovery of his own country as a source of inspiration and subject matter by the American painter. Thanks to the depression and the artist relief program of the Federal Government, "we are moving away from a period which produced individuals of unquestionable capacity into a period when we are laying the foundations of a great body of art." 5742. Barker, Virgil. American painting, history and interpretation. New York, Macmillan, 1950. xxvii, 717 p. 50-10368 ND205.B29 A comprehensive and carefully organized inter- pretative history of American painting through the colonial and "provincial" periods, which latter is dated from 1790 to 1880. These large periods are further subdivided, and within each lesser era the known painters are minutely classified, principally by their subject matter, but also by their region, function ("Painters working for reproduction") or style ("Poetic figure painting"). Major figures re- ceive one or more chapters to themselves; the lesser ones are grouped as many as 19 to the chapter. At- tention is given to the painters' own ideas of their art, and to the social milieu in which they worked. The "provincial" period actually witnessed a com- plete transformation in the basis and nature of American painting, for as late as 1775 most of the native-born American painters remained at the craft level. "The exceptions were as striking in quality as they were few in number: [Matthew] Pratt [i734-i8o5],with his subtle tasteful ness; [Robert] Feke [c. 1705-c. 1750], with his talent; and Copley, with his genius." Patronage of painting by wealthy merchants permitted its existence as an art, but only after 1820 was there a demand for pictures other than portraits. The post-Civil War trio, Ryder, Homer, and Eakins, "became in their achievements representatively American to a degree which had probably been impossible before their time." There are 100 halftone illustrations; the thorough bibli- ography follows the organization of the book. 5743. Born, Wolfgang. American landscape paint- ing; an interpretation. New Haven, Yale University Press, 1948. 228 p. 48-8092 ND1351.B6 A review of the sequence of styles in American landscape painting which selects for study "signifi- cant examples of the trends determining the evolu- tion." "The roots of the American landscape proper were the topographical drawing, water color, and print," the harbor view being the most popular from mid-i8th century to the beginning of the 19th. The romantic Washington Allston "ushered in the de- velopment of American landscape painting" in 1804 with two scenes of imaginative mood, but the first authentic school of landscape painters, which flour- ished at mid-century, was inspired by the scenic beauty of the Hudson River Valley. The panoramic school of 1840-70 reflected the "mentality of the American expansion" in a weakness for melodrama and show. After the Civil War, however, a break in tradition occurred, and, under French influence, dramatized presentation of subject was superseded by a succession of technical interests. The 142 black- and-white illustrations are disappointingly small and dark. 5744. Born, Wolfgang. Still-life painting in Amer- ica. New York, Oxford University Press, 1947. xiv, 54, [98] p. 47-5146 ND1390.B6 An interpretation of American still-life painting "all but forgotten by art historians until the present century," which distinguishes a succession of styles and schools. The objectivist "botanic-decorative" style, initiated about 1810 at Philadelphia by the remarkable Charles Willson Peale family, launched the American still life as an independent art form. Up to the Civil War, flower and fruit pieces were favorite subjects with amateur and primitive paint- ers. The best still-life painter of the mid-century was John F. Francis (1810-1885), who departed from convention in order to study volumes, textures, and colors. In the 1880's, William M. Harnett (1848-92) scored a tremendous success with his 856 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES "heightened interpretation of reality expressed by the old technique of the trompe I'oeil" only to be quite forgotten after his early death. Charles De- muth (1882-1935) "was the first American painter who undertook to adapt the achievements of French post-impressionism to the American feeling for mechanization." "The quiet labor of American still-life painters" has achieved "the establishment of a consistent American tradition." The 134 gravure illustrations, averaging one or two to a page, are quite clear. In After the Hunt; William Harnett and Other American Still Life Painters, 1870-1900 (Berkeley, University of California Press, 1953. 189 p. 136 illus.) Alfred V. Frankenstein tells the story of a remarkable course of detective work by which he was enabled to establish the canon of Harnett's genuine work (102 extant and 21 lost paintings), and to distinguish it from the work of his skillful admirer and disciple, John Frederick Peto of Philadelphia (1854-1907), most of whose surviving canvases had been given Harnett signa- tures by later forgers. Another unique personality of the American trompe-l'oeil school, John Haberle of New Haven (1856-1933), whose canvases "be- stow fantastic consequence on the inconsequential" and so suggest the surrealists, is given a chapter to himself. 5745. Boston. Museum of Fine Arts. M. and M. Karolik collection of American paintings, 1 8 15 to 1865. Cambridge, Published for Museum of Fine Arts, Boston [by] Harvard University Press, 1949 [i.e., 1951] Ix, 544 p. 51-8136 ND210.B73 An elaborate, alphabetically arranged catalogue raisonne, together with monochrome plates, of the 233 paintings which Mr. and Mrs. Maxim Karolik presented to the Boston Museum of Fine Arts in 1948. Because many of the artists are forgotten or virtually unknown, biographies have been supplied. The collectors had "one purpose only: To show what happened in this country in the art of painting in the period of half a century . . . and to show the beginning and the growth of American landscape and genre painting." In his introductory essay, "Trends in American Painting, 1815 to 1865," John I. H. Baur notes that although realism was a sine qua non of art, the broadly romantic spirit of the age demanded an "image of the Ideal." Painters who failed to conform to the standard of idealized realism tended to be "forgotten." Among the re- cently rediscovered talents represented here are Martin J. Heade and Fitz Hugh Lane, realists in landscape, James G. Clonney and William T. Ran- ney, realists in genre, and John Quidor, a non- realist. 5746. Brown, Milton W. American painting, from the Armory Show to the depression. Princeton, Princeton University Press, 1955. 243 p. 53-10147 ND212.B74 Bibliography: p. 201-237. Based upon contemporary reports and articles, exhibition catalogs, and interviews, this is a survey of a transitional period in American art (1913-29) when modern European concepts of art displaced the older American tradition of conservative realism. The radical tendencies emanated from two sources: the native, socially critical realism of Robert Henri and the "Ash Can School," and the controversial French modernism and estheticism introduced later by Alfred Stieglitz. The artistic revolution was confined to small art groups until the radicalism of the 19 13 exhibition at the New York Armory of modern European and American art shocked the public and many artists. Dr. Brown discusses the reactions of critics and collectors, and traces the emergence of Cubism, Fauvism, and related tend- encies as well as the continuation of the realist strain. Numerous rather dark gravure illustrations are included. 5747. Burroughs, Alan. Limners and likenesses; three centuries of American painting. Cam- bridge, Harvard University Press, 1936. 246 p. (Harvard-Radcliffe fine arts series) 36-10264 ND205.B8 Bibliography: p. [2233-226. An historical critique of the American tradition in painting from its 17th-century beginnings to "American Modernism" of the 1930's, distinguished by its author's encyclopedic knowledge of individual painters and their works, methods of authentication, and artistic techniques. As early as 1670, he be- lieves, an American taste had begun to form. The early qualities of the art of the limner, "static real- ism, self-sufficiency, and friendly charm," recur in American painting "like a theme with variations, scarcely heard at times because of the louder themes of English and European art, yet nevertheless exist- ent." Although the realistic tradition continued through the Federal period, mainly under the dom- inance of English practice, two major waves of French influence, the neoclassical after 1800 and the impressionistic after 1880, came to replace direct realistic feeling with an admiration for technical effects. Yet the author found "groups of American painters" who were "working away from European domination in taste" and who were engaged in a "struggle for nationality," for a "simple, realistic view." The 191 halftone illustrations average two to a page. ART AND ARCHITECTURE / 8 57 5748. Encyclopaedia Britannica. Contemporary American painting; the Encyclopaedia Bri- tannica Collection, edited by Grace Pagano. New York, Duell, Sloan & Pearce, 1945. xxviii, [241] p. 45-35086 N5220.E5 1945a An album of reproductions of the 116 paintings by as many artists that were in the Encyclopaedia Britannica Collection in 1945. Some 40 plates are in color. This frankly experimental and incomplete collection, assembled with the aid of a committee of specialists, is intended to illustrate the "trends, times, and personalities" of about the last 30 years. Emphasis has been placed upon "American painting of still living artists," and particularly the regional- ism of the 1930's. Each full-page reproduction is accompanied by a photograph of the artist, a brief description of his background and the subject matter and method of his work, and, in nearly every in- stance, his own statement of his intention in the painting illustrated. An introduction by Donald Bear traces the inheritance of the 20th-century American artist and discusses such divergent tradi- tions of contemporary American painting as region- alism and the American scene, the painting of man- ners, of message or protest, and of mood or sensi- bility, experimentalism, and abstract art. Peyton Boswell's Modern American Painting (New York, Dodd, Mead, 1939. 200 p.) consists of an album of 86 color illustrations of paintings, chiefly modern, originally reproduced by Life magazine for its "Pageant of America" series, together with a his- torical sketch of the principal movements and trends in American art, brief, alphabetically arranged bi- ographies of the artists, and a catalog of the paint- ings. A very few of the paintings illustrated were commissioned by Life. A second edition with 89 color illustrations and slightly condensed text was published in 1940. In 1942, the latter edition was reissued by Garden City Publishing Company, but with much inferior color printing. 5749. Flexner, James Thomas. America's old masters; first artists of the New World. New York, Viking Press, 1939. 332 p. 39-27903 ND207.F55 Bibliography: p. 317-326. These four popularly written biographical essays constitute a history of the work of the first great native-born American painters, who "enjoyed a greater European acclaim than was to come to any other American artists for at least a century." Ben- jamin West (1738-1820), in 1760 the first American artist to study abroad, was before long regarded "all over the world as the leading exponent of the 'grand style' " of neoclassic art, and went on to become a founder and a president of the Royal Academy, a close friend of George III, and a precursor of the French romanticists. At heart a realist, John Single- ton Copley (1738-1815) produced portraits of great solidity and power in Boston, but when he removed to London, deteriorated artistically under the pres- sure of a sophisticated environment. Charles Will- son Peale (1741-1827), a "craftsman so able that he became a universal genius," was "one of the most charming portrait painters of the early American tradition." "Well-nigh incomparable" in the paint- ing of faces, Gilbert Stuart (1755-1828), "who had never learned to draw, was uncertain in executing full-lengths." The 33 plates are tolerably repro- duced in black and white. 5750. Flexner, James Thomas. First flowers of our wilderness. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1947. xxi, 367 p. (His American painting, 1) 47-12171 ND207.F57 "Bibliography of general sources": p. 323-IJ26]. 5751. Flexner, James Thomas. The light of distant skies, 1760-1835. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1954. 306 p. (His American painting, 2) 54-9727 ND207.F58 "Bibliographies and source references": p. [251]- 283. The first in a projected many-volume social his- tory of American painting, these books attempt "to show the relationships between life in America and the long tradition of American painting." The author reveals how colonial portraiture, progressing from the "provincial version of the illuminators' tradition" common to the primitive 17th-century limners, reached its culmination in the work of John Singleton Copley (1737-1820), "the first man to express American life in art maturely, profoundly, and with beauty." With the exception of John Trumbull (1756-1843), who called his historical paintings "my national work" but "considered it more important to be a gentleman than a painter," these early professional painters were "nurtured in a craftsman's world." The following generation of gendeman painters, on the other hand, men like Washington Allston and Samuel F. B. Morse, who were born to prosperity and political power, boasted of being artists and connoisseurs but were stifled by affectations of taste. When the new equalitarian forces accompanying "that plebeian on horseback, Andrew Jackson," prevailed, these older men were supplanted by popular young landscape and genre painters. Each volume contains a formal catalog of its numerous illustrations. 5752. Gruskin, Alan D. Painting in the U.S.A. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1946. 223 p. 47-791 ND212.G77 Bibliography: p. 213-215. 431240—60- -56 8 5 8 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES An album of 140 reproductions of paintings by American artists who were living in 1946, of which 63 are well processed in color and 77 in halftone; they average one or two to a large page. The selection aims to provide a cross section of modern trends. Several popular periodicals and business organizations have lent color plates to the author, a New York art dealer. Mr. Gruskin's loosely organized sequence cf observations urges the reader "to look and keep looking at pictures" for true esthetic satisfaction, points with pride to the many flourishing museums and commercial galleries and the widely circulated popular magazines that bring painting to the public, proposes collections of mod- ern art and the encouragement of living artists, and furnishes a historical vignette of American art. 5753. Monro, Isabel Stevenson, and Kate M. Monro. Index to reproductions of American paintings; a guide to pictures occurring in more than eight hundred books. New York, Wilson, 1948. 731 p. 48-9663 ND205.M57 An index to reproductions of the paintings of "artists of the United States occurring in 520 books and in more than 300 catalogs of annual exhibitions held by art museums." Each painting is entered in two or three places: under the artist, whose dates are given if obtainable, together with title of the picture, and a brief entry for the book where the reproduc- tion may be found; under tide and alternative tide or titles; and, in some cases, under subject. Preced- ing the main index are a "List of Works Indexed" and a "Key to Symbols Used for Locations of Paint- ings." The compilers have listed attributed works and have entered the large number of portraits under the sitters as well as the artists; they have also noted the locations of paintings in permanent col- lections so far as stated in the books indexed. 5754. New York. Metropolitan Museum of Art. 100 American painters of the 20th century; works selected from the collections of the Metropoli- tan Museum of Art. New York, 1950. xxiii, in p. 50-13015 ND212.N39 A picture book consisting of 100 reproductions, 8 of them in color, of works by as many American painters in the collections of the Metropolitan Museum of Art. Ten of the paintings were executed before 1900, and while canvases of the 1930's and 40's are abundant, there are only 8 pieces from the years 1916-29. In his brief introduction, Robert Beverly Hale asserts that modern American artists, if neither wholly understood nor appreciated, have "caught the essence of our country" and our times. If modern art is violent, dealing "with weird dreams," and "filled with broken shapes," that is because the artist is in part a prophet . . . the shadows that have lately haunted us have for some time been visible upon his canvas." 5755. Richardson, Edgar P. American romantic painting; edited by Robert Freund. New York, E. Weyhe, 1944. 50 p. 168 plates on 84 I. 45-878 ND205.R5 Catalog with biographical notes: p. 23-50. An album of 236 paintings from the first three quarters of the 19th century, held in American pub- lic collections, or in a minority of instances, by private owners, and reproduced in usually clear half- tone, but often on too small a scale. Colonial paint- ing, the introductory text affirms, had been strong but narrow; about the turn of the century there took place a great change in the imagination which en- abled painting to deal with "the whole circle of inner and outer experience," and to become "an art as wide as our national life." The grandiose designs of Allston and his fellows of the first generation ended mostly in disappointment. The second ro- mantic generation of the 1830's, less aspiring, pro- duced smaller canvases appropriate to private houses, and secured a far wider response. Among the third generation of the 1850's, the spreading weakness, sentimentalism, and breakdown in the color sense were resisted by only a few major talents, who soon became isolated figures. After 1876, "romantic art became unfashionable and rapidly disappeared." David Howard Dickason's The Daring Young Men (Bloomington, Indiana University Press, 1953. 304 p.) discusses the American Pre-Raphaelite move- ment of the latter half of the 19th century, which advocated "truth to nature" and served as a "lively, corporate antidote to the materialism and artistic stagnation of 'American Victorianism,' " but pro- duced no artists of outstanding talent. 5756. Richardson, Edgar P. Painting in America; the story of 450 years. New York, Crowell, 1956. 447 p. (The Growth of America series) 56-7793 ND205.R53 Bibliography: p. 417-427. The thesis of this survey of American painting is that painting is both an art and a craft, sharing the "unpredictable nature of the imagination" and the "social character of an organized skill in human society," and that nowhere is the mutual action and reaction of these two elements "more striking, their interplay more curious, than in their creation of a new national tradition of painting in America." Mr. Richardson considers American artists largely within the context of his theory: whether they be- longed to the currents of their day, like West, All- ston, Whistler, and Marin; whether they did not belong to those currents, like Homer, Ryder, and Hopper; or whether the direction of attention was ART AND ARCHITECTURE / 859 opposed to the artist's natural bent and produced a fatal conflict, as with John Vanderlyn. Lesser paint- ers are usually treated in groups, with each receiving a sentence or brief paragraph to himself. The au- thor interprets the century of painting from 1780 to 1876 as successive phases of romanticism and devotes to them three large chapters, considerably more than to any other school or movement. Most of the 172 halftone illustrations are quite unhackneyed; there are also 17 plates in indifferent color. 5757. Turpie, Mary C. A selected list of paintings for the study of American civilization. Minneapolis, Program in American Studies, Univer- sity of Minnesota [1953] 109 1. 54-31893 ND45.T85 "Books and catalogs useful for illustrations": 1. 101-106. "An elementary guide to resources for the study of American civilization through painting"; only murals have been omitted as insufficiendy studied. The 712 paintings selected are not necessarily great, but all "are cultural documents which contribute significantly to an understanding of American life past or present — either as sheer illustration, or as revelation of representative tastes and attitudes, or as the commentary of an artist who interprets — or even rejects — his own milieu in his own terms." Dating from 1666 to 1950, the paintings are arranged alphabetically by artist within three chronological divisions. Dates and present locations of the paint- ings are provided so far as known, together with descriptive and interpretative annotations. Most of the paintings listed are in public collections; for those privately owned, reproductions or slides are available, and references are furnished to these for both classes. Appended are directories of firms and institutions that can supply slides and inexpensive reproductions. 5758. Walker, John, and Macgill James. Great American paintings from Smibert to Bellows, 1729-1924. New York, Oxford University Press, 1943. 36 p., 104 plates on 56 1. 43-18438 ND205.W35 "Catalogue notes": p. 21-26. "Suggestions for further reading": p. 27-31. Reproductions of carefully chosen .paintings, of which the eight in color are quite unsuccessful, while the remainder in monochrome are on the dark side. The great majority are from public collections. The compilers terminate with the work of Bellows be- cause it seems "to close an epoch in American style." The brief text distinguishes two currents in Ameri- can style: a realistic main stream, from the portraits of Copley to the "Ash-can School," which "has usually been on the level [sic] with the best con- temporary painting of its kind done in Europe"; and a secondary one, "imaginative, poetic, at its best visionary," which "has been on the whole more derivative, more inclined to be literary and self- conscious." The latter produced "only one artist of outstanding genius, Albert Ryder" (1846-1917). 5759. Wehle, Harry B. American miniatures, 1 730-1 850; one hundred and seventy-three portraits selected with a descriptive account by Harry B. Wehle ... & a biographical dictionary of the artists by Theodore Bolton. Garden City, N. Y., Garden City Pub. Co., 1937. xxv, 127 p. 48 plates on 27 1. 37~6ic>3 ND1337.U5W4 1937 First published in 1927. "General bibliography of early American minia- ture painting": p. [ii5]-n8. A descriptive history of American portraiture "in little," closely tied to the 48 color and halftone plates which usually reproduce the miniatures full-size. Most miniaturists, the author notes, working with water colors on ivory, learned "to build up their textures and to state their forms by the cautious means of stippling and hatching" in a minute and dexterous fashion. In 18th-century Philadelphia, James Peale (1749-1831) became a "prolific worker," and Henry Benbridge (1744-1812) painted in a style "only a little less masterly than Copley's." Edward Greene Malbone (1 777-1 807) moved from New England to New York, Phila- delphia, and the South, and painted the "finest miniatures in the history of the art in America." During the first two decades of the 19th century, the bustling city of New York attracted ambitious and talented young miniaturists. The advent of photog- raphy about the middle of the century, however, together with the decline of the aristocratic heritage, first corrupted, and then killed, the art of miniature painting. Mr. Bolton's dictionary includes 47 names, a number of which are well known in the larger art forms. G. Painting: Individual Artists 5760. [Allston] Richardson, Edgar Preston. Washington Allston, a study of the romantic artist in America. Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1948. 233 p. 48-8917 ND237.A4R5 "Catalogue of the existing and recorded paintings of Washington Allston [by] Edgar Preston Richard- 860 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES son and Henry Wadsworth Longfellow Dana": p. 183-219. Bibliography: p. 220-228. A critical study of the art of Washington Allston (1779-1843) and a reappraisal of his position as our first full-scale romantic artist, based on the Dana Collection and family tradition. An uneven and by no means prolific painter (183 finished works) he was nevertheless "the pioneer in creating an ideal art upon American soil." He wished, moreover, to explore the whole range of painting: monumental, narrative, portrait, landscape and architectural, and animal and still life. "His work and the influence of his life as an artist were felt throughout the imagi- native being of this country in its first years of independent effort." After its 18th-century appren- ticeship, American painting became "an instrument of the reflective and imaginative life." Allston, chief figure in this enlargement of scope, introduced dramatic and lyric sentiment, quiet reverie, and meditation. The 59 halftone illustrations are printed on 30 leaves. 5761. [Bingham] Christ-Janer, Albert. George Caleb Bingham of Missouri; the story of an artist. New York, Dodd, Mead, 1940. xx, 171 p. 40-7789 ND237.B59C5 "Selected bibliography": p. 146-148. A scholarly biography which aims "to analyze and clarify the genre work of George Caleb Bingham [1811-1879] by presenting some hitherto unpub- lished drawings" and to amplify knowledge of his life and personality from recently discovered letters and other new sources. Although Bingham, like many of his contemporaries, painted portraits for a living, he aspired to genre painting, "to pictures that tell a story." The Missouri painter completed the first canvas in his "river life" series, "Jolly Flatboat- men," early in 1844, and by 1851 was working upon the first in a political series, "County Election" and "Canvassing for a Vote." The subjects and spirit of these series won them a contemporary popu- larity: their painstaking design and drawing, de- rived from prints of Renaissance masters, impress present-day artists and critics. Besides the 56 illus- trations of Bingham's figure drawing on 4 leaves, there are 8 halftone plates and 6 in unsatisfactory color. 5762. [Burchfield] Baur, John I. H. Charles Burchfield. [Research by Rosalind Irvine] New York, Published for the Whitney Museum of American Art by Macmillan, 1956. 86 p. 56-322 ND237.B89B3 "Selected bibliography": p. [82]-85- Based largely upon the artist's journal, "an illumi- nating record of his thoughts, feelings, struggles and artistic aims over nearly half a century," this biog- raphy and critique of Charles Burchfield (b. 1893) grew out of a retrospective exhibition of his water- colors and drawings (his oils are relatively few and unsuccessful), held at the Whitney Museum in Jan- uary and February 1956. From 1917 to 1921 in Salem, Ohio, Burchfield painted fantastic and deco- rative scenes chiefly in calligraphic style, fanciful interpretations of nature, or symbolic representations of moods. In Buffalo, New York, from 1921 to 1943, he depicted the city, alternating "a predomi- nantly esthetic pleasure in the shapes and textures of the industrial scene" with concern for its romantic moods. His realist-industrial phase is his best known and most honored. In 1943, Burchfield abandoned realism, weather-beaten houses, and in- dustry, and has since painted the changing moods and aspects of nature in a fusion of his early fantastic manner with the technical skill and painterly style acquired in the realistic works of his maturity. Five of the 75 variously-sized illustrations are in color. 5763. [Copley] Parker, Barbara Neville, and Anne Boiling Wheeler. John Singleton Copley; American portraits in oil, pastel, and miniature, with biographical sketches. Boston, Museum of Fine Arts, 1938. 284 p. 130 plates on 65 1. 38-4135 ND237.C7P3 This is a massive catalogue raisonne consisting of descriptions of all portraits believed to have been painted by Copley before he left for England in June 1774. Biographical sketches of the sitters, an un- usual feature in such a work, precede the descrip- tions of the portraits; those for portraits belonging to the Boston Museum of Fine Arts are by G. Philip Bauer. For the other biographies, the authors have gone to primary sources when standard authorities have failed. Descriptions of the portraits are limited in most instances to their sizes and colors; when direct evidence is lacking, datings are based "en- tirely on grounds of style." The portraits are listed in three sections: oils; pastels, drawings, and en- gravings; and miniatures; and in each section are arranged alphabetically by sitter. A section on "Attributed Portraits" includes a number that present problems as yet unsolved. A final section lists a group of unlocated portraits known, through references in unquestioned sources, to have been painted by Copley. 5764. [Eakins] Goodrich, Lloyd. Thomas Ea- kins, his life and work. New York, Whitney Museum of American Art, 1933. 225 p. 33-5157 ND237.E15G6 Bibliography: p. [2i7]-220. A biography of Thomas Eakins (1844-1916) and an analysis of his art, together with a chronologically ART AND ARCHITECTURE / 86 1 arranged catalog of his 515 known pieces, and 72 halftone plates. Eakins, whose temperament was remarkable for its blend of artistic and scientific capacities, began his long career as a painter in the early 1870's. The masterpiece of these years was "The Gross Clinic," painted in 1875. "In its truth of characterization, its formal strength and balance of design, it shows a power and completeness of realism that could be matched by no other American painter of the time." The artist executed his most important commission, the similarly conceived but less formally portrayed "Agnew Clinic," in 1889. Like its predecessor, it was rejected by the art critics, "and Eakins fell into obscurity during the 8o's and 90 's. Recognized belatedly in the decade 1900-1910, he painted, during this culminating phase of his career, more portraits than in any corresponding period. In his era, "Eakins stands out as an isolated figure, belonging to no school"; few of his contem- poraries "approached his humanity, understanding of character, penetration into the heart of truth, or formal power." 5765. [Homer] Goodrich, Lloyd. Winslow Homer. New York, Published for the Whitney Museum of American Art by Macmillan, 1944. 241 p. 63 plates on 32 1. 44-7780 ND237.H7G6 Bibliography: p. 234-236. Based upon family tradition, contemporary ac- counts, and the artist's letters, this is a biography and an analysis of the work of Winslow Homer (1836-1910), a self-made Boston painter who began as a magazine illustrator. His earlier oils, of every- day army life in the Civil War, however unsophisti- cated, "were pieces of direct, simple naturalism, showing no trace of any other artist's style." His favorite theme, at first, was country life, with em- phasis upon "pretty girls and fashion," but he exe- cuted a notable series of sympathetic scenes from Negro life in the 1870's. After settling at Prout's Neck, Maine, in 1884, Homer turned for his dom- inant themes to the sea and the wilderness and the men who wrested a living from them. He reached the "climax of his art" during the 1890's with his watercolors of the forests and lakes of the Adiron- dacks: nothing like their "resonant" color harmonies and breadth of treatment had before been seen in American watercolor painting. Homer also pro- duced some of his greatest and most influential sea- scapes in the 1890's. The recognition he then achieved has proved enduring, but to this critic "he was a powerful naturalist rather than a great plastic artist." The 93 illustrations in black and white average two to a page. 5766. [Inness] McCausland, Elizabeth. George Inness, an American landscape painter, 1 825-1 894. New York, American Artists Group, 1946. xvi, 87 p. 46-3370 ND237.I5M3 Catalog of the exhibition, February 25 to March 24, 1946: p. 73-82. Bibliography: p. 84-87. George Walter Vincent Smith, who collected the art of his American contemporaries over a span of 70 years, regarded George Inness as an important ardst, and purchased his canvases from the painter himself. The museum which Mr. Smith founded in Springfield, Mass., and which now bears his name, celebrated its first half-century, therefore, with an exhibition of 44 Inness canvases assembled by the director, Cornelia Sargent Pond; it was subsequently shown in Brooklyn and in Montclair, N. J., where Inness lived and painted during his later and more prosperous years. Miss McCausland presents the artist as one of the most authentic if least appreciated of 19th-century American painters, a master of American landscape who maintained the best ideals of the Hudson River School in a drabber age, and whose quite independent style eschews spurious bigness and cultivates instead a calm and often radiant serenity: "the land will endure, his paintings say, the coming storm will pass, the harvest will ripen." "Those closed-in valleys were the common home and amphitheater of American life." Unfor- tunately the 40 illustrations, mosdy half-page half- tones, quite fail to convey the hazy glow of the paintings themselves. 5767. [Marin] Helm, MacKinley. John Marin. Boston, Pellegrini & Cuhahy in association with the Institute of Contemporary Art, 1948. 255 P- 48-10619 ND237.M24H4 A biography and sympathetic analysis of the works of John Marin (1 870-1 953), who, as early as the 1890's began "inventing his own private sym- bols for the American landscape." In 19 14, having discovered Maine to be his spiritual home, he began "to play deliberate tricks with reality for plastic effect." His range included violent renditions of the Manhattan scene, Maine seacoast pieces with framework and broadly indicated planes, and lyrical landscapes and seascapes. There are 64 halftone and 9 color plates. To ]ohn Marin: Tributes (Berkeley, University of California Press, 1956. [78] p.), Mr. Helm contributes a "Conclusion to a Biography" which is actually a final and equally admiring appraisal. In this collection of tributes and appreciative essays occasioned by the John Marin Memorial Exhibition, organized by the Art Galleries of the University of California, Los Angeles, 1955/56, Duncan Phillips hails Marin as a poet-painter independent of all isms, whose "genius 862 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES for explosions of line and color, especially in the Manhattan street scenes, was dedicated to the theme of energy." Frederick S. Wight, in another eulogis- tic survey, suggests that "Marin's art rose in three waves, his etchings, his water colors and his oils — and it is not certain that the third wave is not the greatest." Marin's own theories are expressed in The Selected Writings of John Marin (New York, Pellegrini & Cudahy, 1949. 241 p.), which consists of revealing and thought-provoking letters written to his friends, particularly Alfred Stieglitz, from 1910 to 1949, expounding his views of art, current events, people, and life in the Maine country. 5768. [Mount] Cowdrey, Mary Bartlett, and Hermann Warner Williams. William Sid- ney Mount, 1 807-1 868, an American painter, by Bartlett Cowdrey and Hermann Warner Williams. New York, Published for the Metropolitan Museum of Art by Columbia University Press, 1944. xiii, 54 p. A44-4242 ND237.M855C7 Bibliography: p. [431-47. A catalog, album, and brief study of the land- scape, flower, and genre paintings of William Sid- ney Mount, the first native-born artist to venture largely outside the profitable field of portraiture. He was a reporter of the American scene in the heyday of nationalism, depicting everyday life in the rural Long Island community in which he had been reared. In the 1830's, he won the public with his individuality, realism, and "good-natured fun," and the critics with his luminous style and sound craftsmanship. The pioneer catalog of 168 paint- ings is a "reasonably complete" listing of Mount's major works exclusive of portraits, but "does not pretend to the rank of a catalogue raisonne." The 78 illustrations in gravure average two or three to a page and are very clear even when rather too small. 5769. [Peale] Sellers, Charles C. Charles Will- son Peale. Philadelphia, 1947. 2 v. (Mem- oirs of the American Philosophical Society, v. 23, pt. 1-2) 47-5562 ND237.P27S43 Q11.P612, v. 23 Volume 1 published in 1939 under title: The Artist of the Revolution; the Early Life of Charles Will son Peale. Bibliography: v. 2. p. 424-440. Based mainly upon his diaries, drafts of letters, and Autobiography, this is a detailed scholarly bi- ography of Charles Willson Peale, inventor, "can- did and direct" portraitist of the revolutionary era, and founder of the first American museum of natural history and of the first American academy of art. Peale, a student of Benjamin West at London in 1767 and 1768, by the 70's and 8o's was painting such notables as Washington, Lafayette, and Steu- ben, among others, in a style distinguished not so much for flair or sophistication as for strength and sincerity. Although his drawing was sometimes poor and his sitters awkwardly posed, "his coloring was delicate and harmonious." The museum, con- ceived in the ideal of pure science and opened in the 1780's, "was this artist's masterpiece, built up through many years of tireless labor." To it, and to Peale's successive ventures into politics, war, science, invention, and hygiene, the author de- votes considerably more space than to his achieve- ment as a painter. 5770. [Remington] McCracken, Harold. Fred- eric Remington, artist of the Old West. Philadelphia, Lippincott, 1947. 157 p. 47-11799 ND237.R36M3 Based upon his own books, articles, manuscript diaries, and notebooks, as well as the recollections of his contemporaries, this is an anecdotal biography of Frederic Remington (1861-1909), foremost por- trayer of the American frontier West. It was still "the land of the riders of the open cattle range and of the war trail," in 1880 when the youthful New Yorker first roamed it, and to record its way of life for permanent preservation became his main pur- pose. In Arizona, Wyoming, the Dakotas, and Montana, this largely self-taught artist found his subjects: cowboys, troopers, Indians, and, in par- ticular, the horses of the West. The drawings for an edition of Longfellow's The Song of Hiawatha in 1890 firmly established Remington's reputation as an illustrator. In 1895, he added sculpture to his media with "Bronco Buster." An arrangement with Collier's Weekly in 1903 permitted him the freedom to paint as he pleased, and he produced "His First Lesson," "Fight for the Water Hole," and the many other fine pictures for which he is best known today. The "Bibliographic Check List of Remingtoniana" (p. 123-155) establishes the first appearance of each of the 2,739 drawings and paint- ings completed by the artist and published in 41 periodicals and 142 books. There are 29 line draw- ings and 48 plates, of which 32 are in color of varying adequacy, 8 are halftones, and 8 reproduce bronzes. 5771. [Sargent] Mount, Charles Merrill. John Singer Sargent, a biography. New York, Norton, 1955. xv, 464 p. 55-13654 ND237.S3M6 "Sargent's works in oil": p. 427-453. This is an artist's sympathetic biography of John Singer Sargent (1856-1925), best known as portrait painter to the English and American haut monde of the Edwardian era. The author has drawn upon many hitherto unavailable materials, ART AND ARCHITECTURE / 86 3 such as diaries and private papers of Sargent's asso- ciates, to fill the lacunae created by the destruction of the artist's own papers. From 1887 to 1909, after which he declined all but a very few commissions from industrial and financial tycoons, Sargent was hailed both in the United States and in England for his portraits revealing fundamental traits of charac- ter, for their smartness, even sumptuousness of style, realistic illusion, fine values, and impressionistic color. The 54 halftone illustrations are reproduced on 12 leaves. Evan Charteris' John Sargent (New York, Scribner, 1927. 308 p.) affectionately cele- brates the life and work of his friend of 30 years' standing, and points out the "splendour" of Sar- gent's personality, "his dynamic energy, his large- ness of outlook, his complete immunity from what was small or unworthy." Sargent's Boston (Boston, Museum of Fine Arts, 1956. 132 p.), by David McKibbin, commemorates the centennial of Sar- gent's birth with an essay that emphasizes both the architectural aspects of his decorations for the Museum and the importance of his portraits as "footnotes for history." A catalog of the centennial exhibition (p. 67-75) and an alphabetically arranged checklist of his portraits (p. 81-132) are included. 5772. [Sheeler] Rourke, Constance M. Charles Sheeler, artist in the American tradition. With 48 halftones of paintings, drawings, and photographs by Charles Sheeler. New York, Har- court, Brace, 1938. 203 p. 38-27601 ND237.S47R6 An "informal biography" of Charles Sheeler (b. 1883), whose work makes a "fresh and original use of the American subject" and reflects "forms which strongly and essentially belong to us." The author has drawn upon Sheeler's own notes and conversa- tions, and has so interwoven halftone reproductions of his paintings and drawings as to show the develop- ment of his art from the early experimental phases to those of maturity. "A pathfinder in the use of American traditions," he has employed "the pro- portionate ratios, the materials, and the final design of the provincial buildings at hand": in Bucks County architecture, the communal architecture at Ephrata, and Shaker architecture and crafts. In the 1920's he discovered "the industrial subject for American art," and in his portrayals of this, "im- mense intricacies of structure have been boldly re- duced to essentials." For many years Sheeler sup- ported himself by photography, painting only on weekends. His photographs are noteworthy for their sense of inherent design and their rendering of textures; a few are included among the illustrations. 5773. [Sloan] Goodrich, Lloyd. John Sloan. New York, Published for the Whitney Mu- seum of American Art by Macmillan, 1952. 80 p. 52-7168 ND237.S57G6 "Selected bibliography": p. 78-80. A brief critique of the work of John Sloan (1871- 1951), who began his career in 1892 as a Philadel- phia newspaper illustrator and who found himself as an artist only after he moved to New York in 1904 and began painting his unique glimpses of the life of lower Manhattan. Thereafter "his art had that quality of being a direct product of the common life, absolutely authentic and unsweetened, that has marked the finest genre art of all times." Applicable to many other canvases is his own statement about his "Sixth Avenue and 30th Street": "it has surely caught the atmosphere of the Tenderloin, drab, shabby, happy, sad, and human." After having depicted the contemporary spectacle for a quarter century, Sloan very largely abandoned it in 1928 for an "intensive study of the nude," in which he ex- perimented with "linework to complete the model- ing," but achieved no such individuality as in his earlier manner. There is no list of the many illus- trations, three of which are in color. Van Wyck Brooks' John Sloan; a Painter's Life (New York, Dutton, 1955. 246 p.) is a sympathetic narrative by a friend of long standing, emphasizing the personal traits and relationships of "this good man, fearless, truthful, innocent and wise." 5774. [Stuart] Whitley, William T. Gilbert Stuart. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1932. xiv, 240 p. 32-13585 ND237.S8W5 A history of the life and particularly the works of Gilbert Stuart (1775-1828), largely based upon con- temporary newspapers, periodicals, and memoirs from which the author quotes very generously. Stuart, a pupil of Benjamin West, first achieved success with "Portrait of a Gentleman Skating," exhibited at the Royal Academy in 1782. A master portraitist, he was greatly admired for the exactitude of his likenesses and characterizations, for originality and power, and in 1787 he was dubbed by the London World "The Vandyck of the Time." Stuart returned to the United States in 1793, achieving his ambition to paint George Washington in 1795. Dissatisfied with the first study, the artist destroyed it after making several copies. In 1796, Stuart painted the full-length figure of Washington, re- nowned as the Lansdowne portrait, of which he made several copies; shortly thereafter, he painted from life the famous head of Washington now at the Boston Athenaeum. "This and the Lansdowne por- trait, whether exact likenesses or not, represent Washington with the distinction he deserves, and give him the appearance of a great man, as the world 864 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES regards him." In 1805, Stuart settled permanently at Boston where, notwithstanding his persistently Bohemian temperament, his success was "immediate and complete," and his authority in matters of art became "unquestioned in America." 5775* Trumbull, John. The autobiography of Colonel John Trumbull, patriot-artist, 1756— 1843; edited by Theodore Sizer. Containing a sup- plement to [the editor's] The Wor\s of Colonel John Trumbull. New Haven, Yale University Press, 1953. xxiii, 404 p. 53-7771 ND237.T8A32 First published in 1841, this is the shrewd and vigorous but defensive and not altogether candid memoir of John Trumbull, aide-de-camp to General Washington, student of Benjamin West in London, portrayer of major events and personages of the American Revolution, and occasional architect, mer- cantile speculator, and minor diplomat. Drawn by the octogenarian from abundant recollections as well as private papers, it has been meticulously edited and provided with copious notes; an appendix (p. 291- 382) supplies much additional information, espe- cially concerning Trumbull's later life, from con- temporary sources. Sixty percent of the book is devoted to the quarter of his life spent in Europe. It is filled with vivid descriptions and estimates of Old Masters, European architecture and landscape, and with vignettes of historical events and such notable persons as Edmund Burke, Talleyrand, and La- fayette. Trumbull records his decision of 1785 to make the events of the Revolution his principal sub- jects, and reports fully the transaction whereby his four large canvases, including the "Declaration of Independence" were commissioned for the United States Capitol in 18 17 and executed by 1824. Pro- fessor Sizer's The Wor\s of Colonel John Trum- bull (New Haven, Yale University Press, 1950. 117 p.) consists mainly of a complete checklist in which portraits are arranged alphabetically by sitter and historical subjects chronologically by event. All types are listed, including mythological, allegorical, literary, and religious subjects, landscapes, figure studies, architectural drawings, and maps. Sketches and studies are listed along with the finished com- positions. Brief sections are devoted to Trumbull's prices and painting techniques. Forty-six halftone illustrations are reproduced on 20 leaves. 5776. [Whisder] Pennell, Elizabeth R., and Joseph Pennell. The life of James McNeill Whistler, by E. R. and J. Pennell. 5th ed., rev. Philadelphia, Lippincott, 191 1. xx, 449 p. A12-142 ND237.W6P4 1911a An authorized biography of Whisder (1834- 1903), the expatriate American painter and dandi- fied wit who was idolized by his followers and abused or misunderstood by most of the Victorian press. Mr. and Mrs. Pennell, noted etcher and writer, respectively, were intimate friends as well as warm admirers of the artist, and present much information in his own words as well as reminis- cences from members of the Whisder coterie. Al- though his etchings were hailed as comparable to those of Rembrandt, Whistler's paintings of 1859 and the early 6o's were neither so well nor so con- sistently received. To both he brought realism and a sense of pattern and design. In 1865, Whistler sent to the Academy "the most complete, the most perfect picture he ever painted, 'The Little White Girl.' " Whistler first exhibited a portrait as an "Arrangement" and an impression of night as a "Nocturne" in 1872; such titles established his name for eccentricity, and for almost 20 years "ridicule was his pordon." In the 1870's, he began great portraits, among them, "Mother," "Carlyle," and "Miss Alexander," but not until the 90's was he "acknowledged as one of the great artists of the century." Numerous halftone plates reproduce oils, etchings, pastels, watercolors, and drawings. H. Prints and Photographs 5777. Jackson, William H. Picture maker of the Old West, William H. Jackson; [text] by Clarence S. Jackson. New York, Scribner, 1947. 308 p. 47-3 48i F591.J3 Assembled by his son from the family collection and supplementary sources, this album reproduces in chronological sequence 393 splendid photographs, sketches, and paintings of the frontier Far West by an artist whose long life span (1843-1942) paralleled the white man's conquest of the region. The views of railroad building, mining towns, Indians, pueblos, the wonders of the Yellowstone and Yosemite Val- leys, mountains, including the Grand Teton, the Mountain of the Holy Cross, and Pike's Peak, and the Mesa Verde and other cliff dwellings are taken with an artist's eye for composition and tonal con- trasts. Based largely upon Jackson's early diaries and notebooks, a running commentary accompanies ART AND ARCHITECTURE / 86 5 the pictures, and treats mainly of his expeditions of 1870-78 as a staff member of the Hay den Geological and Geographical Survey. 5778. Peters, Harry T. Currier & Ives, print- makers to the American people. Garden City, N.Y., Doubleday, Doran, 1929-31. 2 v. 30-1290 NE2415.C7P4 5779. Peters, Harry T. America on stone; the other printmakers to the American people; a chronicle of American lithography other than that of Currier & Ives. [Garden City, N.Y., Doubleday, Doran] 1931. 415 p. 3i~337 2 6 NE2303.P4 These companion works by an enthusiastic collector survey the whole of American lithography from the first experiments made by the painter, Bass Otis, in 1 8 19 to the decline of this popular art in the 1880's. "Chief among these printmakers, because they served over a longer period, seem to have issued more prints, and more good prints, and filled the need most completely, were Currier & Ives, who had predecessors and competitors, but really no rivals." Currier and Ives employed skilled artists and offered for sale at low prices a wide variety of effectively drawn and colored pictures of easily understood American subjects: horses, seascapes, landscapes, especially of New York, political cartoons, portraits, notable events, everyday life, and scenes of romantic, sentimental, moralizing, or humorous intent. From 1840, when Nathaniel Currier scored his first great success with a lithograph of the sinking Lexington, to the 1880's, "his business was a national institu- tion." The total number of prints produced, as distinct from copies, is estimated at "more than 4317." Five other lithographic firms maintained substantial catalogs of prints for general distribu- tion, on a smaller scale than Currier and Ives, but the remaining publishers, approximately 100 in number, relied chiefly upon jobs commissioned for special purposes: commissioned portraits, maps, illustrations for books and periodicals, music sheets, advertisements, architectural plans, phrenological charts, and the like. Although these firms and artists enjoyed far less stability than Currier and Ives, all of the old printmakers "attempted to suc- ceed by making art within the means of all — truly a great endeavor." Volume one of Currier & Ives, Printmakers to the American People contains re- productions of 142 prints and originals and a check- list of all Currier and Ives prints known in 1929; volume two includes reproductions of 177 prints, 24 in color, and 1600 "newly discovered" titles, here completed to 1931. America on Stone includes 18 colored and 136 black-and-white plates, as well as 20 other reproductions inserted in the "prologue." It takes the form of an alphabetical list of all firms, individuals, craftsmen, and artists concerned in the production of lithographs, with information con- cerning their productions. Successive addresses are given for print publishers. 5780. Reese, Albert. American prize prints of the 20th century. New York, American Artists Group, 1949. xix, 257 p. 49-11409 NE508.R4 "A brief description of the principal graphic processes": p. xvii-xix. "Biographical notes": p. 235-257. An alphabetically arranged album reproducing, in clear if occasionally dark halftone, a selection of 216 prize-winning prints, including wood engrav- ings, etchings, lithographs, drypoints, woodcuts, and serigraphs, by Americans still living in 1949, and 14 prints by deceased artists, a number of whom had accomplished their major work before the awarding of prizes became general practice. About two- thirds of the prints were produced in the 1940's, most of the remainder in the 1930's. Each reproduction is accompanied by a paragraph which interprets its subject and, in most instances, quotes the artist as to his intention. Citing the names of Edward Hopper, Reginald Marsh, and Stow Wengenroth, among others, the introductory text asserts that the contemporary American practitioners of this "democratic medium" constitute the "finest school of printmakers in our history." The prints employ the styles of realism, impressionism, "super-realism," or nonobjectivism; their subjects range through the American rural and urban scenes, industry and machinery, manners, customs, and occupations, emotion, and pure decoration. 5781. Taft, Robert. Photography and the Ameri- can scene, a social history, 1 839-1 889. New York, Macmillan, 1938. 546 p. 38-30617 TR23.T3 The first survey of the "effects of photography upon the social history of America, and in turn the effect of social life upon the progress of pho- tography." News of Daguerre's process first reached this country in September 1839. By 1845 Mathew B. Brady was collecting portraits of all the notable persons he could induce to sit. Daguer- rotypy was replaced by collodion (wet plate) pho- tography during the 50's, and in 1857 "the paper photograph assumed a position of commanding im- portance in this country — a position which it has maintained." "Card photographs" of soldiers, the eminent, and the notorious, popular from i860 to 1866, made necessary the family album; and stereo- scopes appeared in most homes during the 1850's, 6o's, and 70's. After the Civil War, William Kurtz and others won success with the "cabinet size" por- 866 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES trait, which required skillful posing, lighting, and handling of background. George Eastman, in the 1880's, made technical advances with a gelatin process dry plate, flexible film, and a roller holder system. In 1889 he introduced the portable and relatively inexpensive Kodak, which opened up the whole world of amateur photography. The numer- ous halftone illustrations are as clear as their small size permits. 5782. Weitenkampf, Frank. American graphic art. New ed., rev. and enl. New York, Macmillan, 1924. 328 p. 24-12503 NE505.W4 1924 Bibliography: p. 291-298. First published in 1912. A topically arranged review of the whole field of American printmaking from the 18th century to about the end of the 19th, when the printing proc- esses became debased through commercial exploita- tion, and photography administered the coup de grace. The book reflects the author's vast experi- ence, but salient personalities and tendencies are often obscured by the dense mass of details. Mr. Weitenkampf surveys the history of etching, engrav- ing, mezzotint, aquatint, wood engraving, and lithography. He discusses the application of their techniques not only to creative art but to such secondary undertakings as the reproduction of paint- ings; illustrations for books, textbooks, periodicals, "tokens," and "keepsakes"; caricatures, cartoons, and social satires for the humorous press; as well as bookplates, business cards, certificates, and other lesser productions. There are numerous illustrations and halftone plates. 5783. Zigrosser, Carl. The artist in America; twenty-four close-ups of contemporary print- makers. New York, Knopf, 1942. xxi, 207 p. 42-25527 NE508.Z45 Character sketches and summations of the achieve- ments of 24 artists, most of them personally known to the author, each of whom "is typical in his or her own way of some one achievement or creative em- phasis." As a group, they constituted in 1942 a "cross-section of the American printmakers now in their prime." The oldest of the artists considered was the photographer, Alfred Stieglitz (1864-1946), the youngest, Federico Castellon, born in 1914. Some are better known for their paintings, like John Marin (1870-1953), George Biddle, Yasuo Kuni- yoshi, and Thomas Hart Benton; others, like John Taylor Arms, Rockwell Kent, Paul Landacre, and Thomas W. Nason, are more exclusively print- makers. "Perhaps the most exciting and important in our art history," their day has seen the transition of American graphic arts "from provincialism to the beginnings of a national school." The "fertilizing influence" of these artists "has been one of the most important factors in the growth of the American school of art all over the country." The illustrations, two to a leaf, are arranged in groups of four, each consisting of a portrait of the artist and three typical works. I. Decorative Arts 5784. Avery, Clara Louise. Early American silver. New York, Century, 1930. xliv, 378 p. (Century library of American antiques) 30-30325 NK7112.A8 "Bibliographical note": p. 361-364. A general survey of early American silver from mid-i7th century to the classic revival of the late 1 8th century. The first part of the book divides into chapters on the seven areas: Massachusetts, Rhode Island, Connecticut, New York, Philadelphia and the Delaware Valley, Virginia and Maryland, and Charleston, South Carolina. Since Boston pro- duced the bulk of the early silver, with a longer and fuller sequence of styles than other localities, the chapter on Massachusetts is elaborated into ten chronological sections. The remainder consists of a chapter on the silversmiths and their methods, another describing the elaborate coats of arms which indicated ownership, and a far longer one (p. 273- 359) tracing the "course of development of charac- teristic objects, such as the beaker, standing cup, tankard, tea-pot." There are 63 halftone plates and 33 line drawings which show characteristic shapes and their dates. 5785. Harbeson, Georgiana (Brown). American needlework; the history of decorative stitch- ery and embroidery from the late 16th to the 20th century. New York, Coward-McCann, 1938. xxxviii, 232 p. 38-29098 NK9212.H3 "An historical oudine of decorative stitches used by American women in various embroidery tech- niques. Examples have been selected from each period in the country's development." If much of the design has come from sources abroad, the sim- plicity of American taste has been expressed in adap- ART AND ARCHITECTURE / 86 7 tations of or departures from the originals, and in 1938 the author found evidence that American work was reverting to the "purely decorative and interpre- tive effects" achieved in the early 17th century. Part one is devoted to the needlework of the American Indian, and includes the use of porcupine quills and beads. Parts two to five are concerned with colonial, early national, Victorian, and 20th-century embroi- deries. Each section describes the materials, meth- ods of working, and designs of its needlework. Among the varieties shown are objects for use, such as chair seats, pillowslips, or altar cloths, and purely decorative work, such as samplers of various eras, needlepoint pictures, or embroidered maps. The numerous halftone illustrations and 5 colored plates indicate the various stitches and the uses to which they were put, but in most instances are rather too small to show much detail. 5786. Hayward, Arthur H. Colonial lighting. New ed., rev. Boston, Little, Brown, 1927. xxiv, 168 p. 27-5863 NK8360.H3 1927 First published in 1923. A record for collectors of American antique lamps, lanterns, and candleholders, of the progress made by artificial lighting from the colonial era to the 1850's, when gas and kerosene superseded lard oil, fish and whale oil, and camphene as illuminants, and rendered obsolete the early lamps and candle- sticks. Mr. Hayward describes the lamps used, from the first crude iron open-wick Betty lamps to the graceful pressed glass lamps manufactured by the Sandwich Company; iron and tin lanterns, many of them intricately pierced; and the numerous types of candlesticks, stands, sconces, moulds, and the like, made of iron, tin, pewter, wood, brass, glass, silver, and earthenware. Most of the 114 illustrations, averaging one or two to a page, are of pieces in private collections, including that of the enthusiastic author, who offers much advice to amateurs. 5787. Kauffman, Henry. Early American copper, tin, and brass. New York, McBride, 1950. 112 p. 50-1 1 133 NK806.K3 Bibliography: p. 112. A brief but pioneer survey of early American copper, tin, and brassware, based upon contemporary wills, vendues, bills of lading, and, especially, news- paper advertisements. The first piece reported is a primitive early 18th-century copper weather vane by Shem Drowne (1683- 1774); the last are brass but- tons, furniture, hardware, andirons, bells, clocks, and the like, cast in the early 19th century just prior to the industrial revolution. The author describes such articles as copper and brass warming pans, ket- des, pans, coffeepots, ladles, and stills; decorated tin boxes, trays, and footwarmers; and plain tin candle boxes, ovens, sconces, and other lighting devices. The author quotes freely from advertisements of prominent craftsmen and includes lists of copper- smiths, braziers, brass founders, and tinsmiths (p. 108-111). Many of the articles reproduced in the 91 gravure illustrations are in the author's collection. 5788. Laughlin, Ledlie Irwin. Pewter in America, its makers and their marks. Boston, Hough- ton Mifflin, 1940. 2 v. 41-1939 NK8412.L3 Bibliography: v. 2, p. [i6i]-[i92J. Based upon contemporary sources, published and unpublished, and addressed to the beginner as well as the experienced collector, this is a history of American pewter (domestic vessels made of an alloy of tin and lead) from the mid-i7th century, when "at least four pewterers were at work in the Massachusetts Bay Colony," to the 1850's after which pewter ware was usually silverplated. The early makers have been grouped in approximately chronological order within 7 regional units: Massa- chusetts Bay, Rhode Island, the Connecticut Valley, New York City, Albany, Pennsylvania, and the South. The craftsmen of the britannia (pressed ware made from thin pewter sheets) period, ca. 1830 to ca. 1855, have been separately and more briefly treated in an alphabetical arrangement. All are included in the alphabetical checklist which forms Appendix I. Among the subjects of other chapters are: pewterers' marks, household pewter, ecclesiastical pewter, fakes, and notes on collecting. Reproduced on 78 gravure plates are small but clear photographs of nearly 700 plates, dishes, and basins, porringers, tankards, pots, and beakers, spoons and ladles, coffee and teapots, pitchers, can- dlesticks, and lamps. 5789. McKearin, George S., and Helen McKearin. American glass. 2000 photographs, 1000 drawings by James L. McCreery. New York, Crown, 1948. xvi, 634 p. 48-2187 NK5112.M26 1948 Glossary: p. xv-xvi. Bibliography: p. 615-617. First published in 194 1. Addressed primarily to the critical collector, this is a detailed history of the development of American glassmaking from the 18th century to the 1890's. Chapters one to four are devoted mainly to 18th- century glass: the South Jersey ware made of bottle glass on Dutch or German peasant lines, the bril- liant and delicately colored flint glass and fine ware produced by the great Pennsylvania house of Henry William Stiegel, and the engraved presentation pieces manufactured by John Frederick Amelung. Chapters five to eight deal with the fine flint, blown and molded, cut and engraved table and decorative 868 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES wares manufactured from 1820 to the 1860's, as well as the pressed glass produced on a large commercial scale from the i82o's to the 1890's, by the New England Glass Company, the Boston and Sandwich Company, and other glassworks. The three con- cluding chapters describe such special forms as paperweights, commercial botdes, and pictorial flasks. The text includes "Blown Three Mold Charts" (p. 285-331), "Bottle Charts" (p. 512- 582), and "Chronological Chart of American Glass Houses" (p. 583-613). 5790. Sonn, Albert H. Early American wrought iron. With three hundred and twenty plates from drawings by the author. New York, Scribner, 1928. 3 v. 28-24035 NK8212.A1S6 Bibliography: v. 3, p. 243-244. An attempt to record, mainly in drawings, such specimens of early American wrought iron "as are still in existence, whether on old buildings, in mu- seums, in private collections, or among the treas- ure-trove of dealers in antiques." A brief initial chapter sketches the development of the iron in- dustry from the establishment of the first successful colonial ironworks at Saugus Center, Massachusetts, 1685, to the advent of machine production about 1850, "which gradually displaced the hand-wrought articles of the earlier period." The remainder of the book describes, and the plates illustrate, various types of: knockers, latches, and locks; bolts, hinges, hasps and handles; and gates, railings, balconies, lanterns, newels, weather vanes, foot scrapers, shutter fasteners, fireplace accessories, candle snuf- fers, and other articles. Mr. Sonn's text is often desultory, but his drawings are attractive and his work inspired by a sincere affection for "the pleasing variety of design, the artistic conception and beauty of workmanship displayed in early American wrought iron." 5791. Spargo, John. Early American pottery and china. Garden City, N.Y., Garden City Pub. Co. [1948, c i926] xvii, 393 p. 48-10842 NK4006.S7 1948 "Bibliographical notes": p. 373-376. "Largely given to historical record" of the major American potteries producing wares up to the Cen- tennial of 1876, this is a handbook designed for the amateur collector wanting "to be aided in identifying and classifying specimens, and to be intelligently informed concerning their history, their contribution to the development of ceramic art in this country, their makers, and so on." The development of pottery (opaque ware) is traced from the simple domestic earthenware jugs, pans, and platters of the mid-i7th century potters to the fine stoneware, Rockingham, flint enamel, and scroddle wares pro- duced at Bennington, Vermont, by Julius Norton and Christopher Webber Fenton 200 years later. The "era of porcelain" (translucent ware) opens with the incorporation of the Jersey Porcelain and Earthenware Company in 1825 and is continued to the designs created for the Centennial Exposition by the sculptor, Karl Miiller. Two chapters are de- voted to "folk-pottery," slip-decorated and sgrafitto ware, produced mainly by the Pennsylvania Ger- mans from the 1730's to the 1860's. The 64 plates are in black and white; keys to the potters' marks are provided in an appendix (p. 358-372). 5792. Stiles, Helen E. Pottery in the United States. New York, Dutton, 1941. 329 p. 41-15157 NK4005.S7 A survey of recent American pottery: china or porcelain, stoneware, Parian, Jasper, fine earthen- ware or semi-porcelain, and common earthenware, which regards it as an art newly matured. The Ohio-West Virginia pottery district in 1941 ranked "first in the number and size of its ceramic indus- tries"; in it were manufactured kitchen, industrial, and art wares, and, especially, domestic tablewares, among them "American Modern," designed by Russel Wright for Steubenville Pottery, and "Man- hattan Shape," created by Viktor Schreckengost for American Limoges China Company. The most important products of New Jersey, the second ranking area, were the dinnerware designed by Frank G. Holmes for Lenox Incorporated, and "sanitary ware" of vitrified china. Ceramic sculp- ture and handmade pottery have been executed by Waylande Gregory, Russell Barnett Aitken, and many other "studio potters." Sections are devoted to the employment of decorative tile and terra cotta in recent architecture. The numerous illustrations are in black and white. 5793. Vanderpoel, Emily (Noyes) American lace & lace-makers. Edited by Elizabeth C. Barney Buel. New Haven, Yale University Press, 1924. xx, 14 p. 24-28973 NK9412.V3 An album of no halftone plates showing samples of lace made in America, chiefly from the colonial era to the early 19th century, and drawn in large part from the collection of the Litchfield (Conn.) Historical Society. Pieces illustrated include trim- ming, handbags, pillowcases, bedspreads, collars and guimps, dress skirts, veils, caps, shawls, kerchiefs, and the like, as well as details, patterns, and lace- making equipment. Plates 1 to 13 exhibit lace made by North and South American Indians. A very brief introduction surveys American lacemaking and describes the types of lace produced: lace made with the needle, or needlepoint lace; and lace made on ART AND ARCHITECTURE / 869 a pillow with bobbins, or pillow lace. Distinction is drawn between the lace industry as introduced by Dean Walker about 1820 at Medway, Massachusetts, and lacemaking as an art pursued especially by young gentlewomen of the 18th and early 19th centuries. J. Museums 5794. Coleman, Laurence Vail. Historic house museums. Washington, American Associa- tion of Museums, 1933. 187 p. 34-27050 NA7205.C6 "Directory": p. 1 13-159. Bibliography: p. 160-165. Chiefly a manual of operations for the manage- ment of historic house museums. These are build- ings which "achieve importance by withstanding the assaults of time," or "by acts of man that create hallowed associations." As far back as 1850, the State of New York acquired Washington's head- quarters at Newburgh, and by 1933 "all but a few of the very youngest states" had begun to preserve their historic houses. The author advocates administra- tion of them by organizations having custody and immediate control, under Government sponsorship and supervision. He offers practical advice about the financing of such museums, their restoration, preservation, and furnishing, supplementary collec- tions and buildings, and attracting and guiding visitors, and outlines the possibilities of "the mu- seum resort." The 66 gravure illustrations av- erage two to a plate. Ralph E. Carpenter's The Fifty Best Historic American Houses, Colonial and Federal, Now Furnished and Open to the Public (New York, Dutton, 1955. 112 p.) is a convenient and well-illustrated little book for the tourist — if everyone is likely to have some alternative "best" — but is limited to the East between New Hampshire and Virginia. John Drury's Historic Midwest Houses (Minneapolis, University of Minnesota Press, 1947. 246 p.) presents brief descriptions and photographs, usually of exteriors, of 87 structures in the 12 states from Ohio to the Dakotas; more than half of these were museums open to visitors. 5795. Howe, Winifred E. A history of the Metro- politan Museum of Art, with a chapter on the early institutions of art in New York. New York [Printed at the Gilliss Press] 1913-46. 2 v. illus. 13-41 1 1 N610.H75 Volume 2 has imprint: New York, Published for the Metropolitan Museum of Art by Columbia University Press. The authorized history of the Metropolitan Mu- seum of Art from its projection by the Art Com- mittee of the Union League Club in 1869 to 1941; for the years 1905 to 1912 the two volumes overlap. By March 1871, Miss Howe records, the Trustees could announce the purchase of 174 paintings, "principally Dutch and Flemish, but including rep- resentative works of the Italian, French, English, and Spanish schools," as a nucleus of its permanent gallery. On April 5, 1871, a committee of the Museum secured the State Legislature's authoriza- tion to construct a suitable building in Central Park. The story thereafter is told in terms of: expansion in space, acquisitions, and services in the Dodworth Building, 1871-73, the Douglas Mansion, 1873-79, and the Metropolitan Museum Building, 1880-1941; the loyalty and generosity of such friends as Henry G. Marquand, J. Pierpont Morgan, Robert W. de Forest, and George Blumenthal; and the develop- ment of a philosophy of Museum purposes and practice. 5796. New York. Metropolitan Museum of Art. American Wing. A handbook of the Amer- ican Wing, by Rfichard] T. H. Halsey and Charles O. Cornelius. 7th ed., rev. by Joseph Downs. New York, 1942. xxxii, 321 p. 43-1249 N611.A6A3 1942 A guide to the 21 original American rooms of the colonial, revolutionary, and early republican periods installed in the American Wing, as well as to its galleries and alcoves. The book is divided into three main sections corresponding to the floor plan of the Wing: third floor, the first period, from the earliest years of permanent setdement in New Eng- land through the first quarter of the 18th century; second floor, from the second quarter of the 18th century to the early republic; and first floor, the third period, from about 1790 to 1825. Besides summarizing the architectural history of its period, each section describes the design, decoration, and materials of its furniture, metal work, textiles, pot- tery, and glass, and describes in some detail the origin, structure, and furnishings of the several rooms. These have been salvaged from old houses from New Hampshire to Virginia. Contemporary advertisements are liberally quoted; the 131 black- and-white illustrations are small but clear. A tribute to Mr. Halsey (1865-1942), the organizer of the American Wing, follows the preface (p. x-xvi). 87O / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 5797. New York. Museum of Modern Art. Paint- ing and sculpture in the Museum of Modern Art, edited by Alfred H. Barr, Jr. New York, Museum of Modern Art, distributed by Simon & Schuster, 1948. 327 p. 48-10843 N620.M9A4 1948 First published in 1942. An album of halftone reproductions of "less than half" of the 660 paintings and 137 pieces of sculp- ture owned by the Museum of Modern Art in 1948, together with an alphabetically arranged catalog (p. [2971-324) of its whole collection. Paintings are grouped in 20 sections, each prefaced by a de- scriptive paragraph; sculpture in 4, of generally similar order. The sequence is very roughly chronological, "not so much by artists and works as by idea, style and movement, action and reac- tion." After the primitives of various dates come the late 19th-century European pioneers of modern- ism, then the early 20th-century traditionalists and expressionists, American and European. Cubism, which spread rapidly through Europe and America just prior to World War I, is followed by abstract art with its dogma of pure form, and by the various countermovements that arose in the 1920's and be- came dominant in the 1930's. Mr. Barr's introduc- tion explains the method of eliminations whereby the collection is to be kept modern. Handsomely commemorating its 25th anniversary is the Muse- um's Masters of Modern Art (New York, distributed by Simon & Schuster, 1954. 239 p.) which repro- duces in excellent color or black and white many of the "best or most characteristic" works of art in the collection. Each piece is identified, described, and evaluated. Demonstrating the "variety, excel- lence of achievement, and vigor" of the visual arts — painting, sculpture, drawing, prints, photographs, motion pictures, and industrial arts — produced in 40 countries during the last 75 years, this lively, unpretentious book is full of pertinent quotations from artists and critics. 5798. Whitney Museum of American Art, New Yor\, Catalogue of the collection. New York, Published by Rudge for the Whitney Museum of American Art, 1931. 238 p. 32-5001 N618.A6 1 93 1 5799. Whitney Museum of American Art, New Yorl{. The Whitney Museum and its col- lection: history, purpose, and activities [and] cata- logue of the collection. New York, 1954. [41] p. 55-1142 N618.A65 1954 First published in 1935. 5800. Whitney Museum of American Art, New Yorf^. Juliana Force and American art; a memorial exhibition, September 24-October 30, 1949. New York [1949 J 75 p. 50-4507 N618.A63 The alphabetically arranged first catalog of the Whitney Museum lists its collection at its opening in 1 93 1 — "for the most part by living artists, of some five hundred paintings in oil and water-color, one hundred fifteen pieces of sculpture, drawings, etch- ings, lithographs and works in other mediums, to the number of seven hundred." The Museum and its predecessors, the Whitney Studio, Whitney Studio Club, and Whitney Studio Galleries, 1914- 30, were organized by Gertrude Vanderbilt Whitney (1876-1942), the sculptor, in the "belief that Amer- ica has an important contribution to make in the arts, that in order to make this contribution effec- tive, a sympathetic environment must be created in which the artist may function to the fullest ex- tent of his power." Preoccupied as it is with contemporary American expression, the Museum owns only a few works of the recent past which are precursors of modern tendencies, but has or- ganized valuable exhibits of the work of early American artists. The illustrations of 172 paintings and prints and 37 pieces of sculpture are in a rather dark halftone. The catalog of 1954, by no means so elaborate, lists 490 paintings, 212 watercolors, gouaches, and pastels, 197 drawings, and 134 pieces of sculpture, a total of 1,033 wor ks; it also reports the Museum's main activities, such as exhibitions, acquisitions for the permanent collection, lending works to other institutions, research, and publica- tions. Juliana Force and American Art offers trib- utes to the Museum's first director (1876-1948) from her friends, including John Sloan, Guy Pene de Bois, and Alexander Brook, celebrates her long connection with the Whitney enterprises (1914-48), and provides a catalog (p. 67-74) of the memorial exhibition held in her honor in 1949. K. Art and History 5801. Davidson, Marshall. Life in America. Bos- ton, Houghton Mifflin, 1951. 2 v. 51-7084 E178.5.D3 "Published in association with the Metropolitan Museum of Art." Bibliography: v. 2, p. 463-472. ART AND ARCHITECTURE / 87 1 "A graphic survey of American history," particu- larly of the social, economic, and cultural scene. Drawn mainly from museum collections and other public sources, the gravure illustrations are repro- duced from paintings, drawings, photographs, prints, and the like, for the most part contemporary with their subjects, which "faithfully, expressively, and completely depict the American past." The closely linked and lively text, based upon both pri- mary and recent published materials, serves as frame- work for the pictures and as connective where they are lacking. Volume one is arranged topically in five chronologically subdivided sections. The sub- jects treated are: colonial America; westward ex- pansion to the Pacific; maritime progress, from packets to clippers and iron steamships; agriculture, from handtools to machinery; and industry, from the handicraft tradition to mass production. Vol- ume two portrays American entertainment and play, the invasion of the city by farmer and immi- grant and the growth of urban centers and services, and the tightening of the Nation through develop- ment of arteries and vehicles of transportation. A final section, "The Democratic Mold," presents the American political system and libertarian way of life. 5802. McCracken, Harold. Portrait of the Old West; with a biographical check list of western artists. New York, McGraw-Hill, 1952. 232 p. 52-9455 ND225.M18 A chronicle of the work and careers of the pioneer artists who were "graphic historians" of the Old West. In the 1820's, the first Western artists pro- duced only static Indian portraits, disappointing both as art and as documentation, but in the 1830's George Cadin (1796-1872) began to create a docu- mentary record of animated and realistic scenes from the life of the Plains Indians, and initiated a "popular interest in painting the Indians and fron- tier life." As the frontier steadily receded, however, from 1849 to 1870, the old Indian and wildlife sub- jects were supplanted by the Indian fighter, the range, and the cowboy. Charles M. Russell was a cowboy-artist in Montana during the 1880's; Charles Schreyvogel depicted the trooper and the infantry- man of the Plains in the 90's; and through both decades Frederic Remington searched for remnants of the Old West and found enough to document it. There are 39 plates in off-key color, and 47 half- tones, besides numerous illustrations in the text. 5803. Murrell, William. A history of American graphic humor. New York, Whitney Mu- seum of American Art, 1933-38. 2 v. 34-4666 NC1420.M8 Volume 2 has imprint: New York, Published for the Whitney Museum of American Art by Mac- millan, 1938. "A partial list of works consulted or referred to": v. 1, p. [>4i]-242; v. 2, p. [2651-267. A panorama of the development of American graphic humor from its 18th-century beginnings to 1938. All three categories, cartoon, caricature, and humorous drawing, utilize economy of line and aim to provoke ridicule, but have as separate sub- jects, respectively, topical political or moral issues, individual physical peculiarities or idiosyncrasies of manner, and ridiculous social situations. Although Benjamn Franklin is credited with attempting "to symbolize a political situation" as early as 1747, not until the Embargo and the War of 1812 did graphic humor become bolder and more frequent. In the years 1817-28, an unbroken production of humorous illustration and social caricature began, which formed a species of graphic reporting, and the Jackson administration (1829-37) provoked a flood of separately published cartoons. A journal- istic medium for sustained attack was lacking, how- ever, until Harper's Weekly began to publish the great political cartoons of Thomas Nast (1840- 1902) in the Johnson administration. Since then, American graphic humorists have presented "a broad visual commentary on the lighter and seamier sides of the principal men, women, and movements of our heterogeneous civilization." A number of the 479 black-and-white illustrations are too small to be wholly effective. 5804. New York. Metropolitan Museum of Art. Life in America; a special loan exhibition of paintings held during the period of the New York World's Fair, April 24 to October 29 [1939] New York [Scribner Press] 1939. xxix, 230 p. 39-27465 ND203.N4 A chronologically arranged annotated catalogue of 290 paintings, together with small halftones of most of them, selected to form an exhibition of life in America during the 300 years from 1616 to 19 15. Of the 145 lenders, 78 were private owners, and 67 were institutions. The lively and informative notes accompanying the reproductions of portraits, landscapes, and genre pictures characterize their subjects and quote freely from pertinent contempo- rary sources. In his introduction to the "picture chronicle," "A Visual Account of Life in America" Harry B. Wehle surveys rapidly both the "taming of the continent" and the artistic recording of the personages and events concerned. The latter must depend for the most part upon obscure painters, although West, Copley, and Homer in their early years, and Morse and Eakins were able reporters. 872 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 5805. St. Louis. City Art Museum. Mississippi panorama, being an exhibition of the life and landscape of the Father of Waters and its great tributary, the Missouri. [St. Louis] 1949. 227 p. 50-13673 N5020.S325 1949 The pardy annotated and illustrated catalog of an exhibition of more than 350 paintings, drawings, prints, and photographs, together with river boat models and pieces of ships' equipment, held at the City Art Museum of St. Louis in 1949. The 7V2 by 348-foot Dickeson and Egan moving panorama (1850), last of its kind devoted to the Mississippi, was the central feature of the display which aimed to show not only the art inspired by the rivers but to review "American social history as it unfolded along the Mississippi and the Missouri in the last century." In a preliminary essay, Perry T. Rath- bone, Director of the Museum, points out that the river painters were first of all explorers and re- corders: poetry and romance were not added by them but inhered in the life they portrayed. Four color plates accompany the numerous halftones. 5806. Taft, Robert. Artists and illustrators of the Old West, 1850-1900. New York, Scribner, 1953. xvii, 400 p. 53—7577 N6510.T27 A very detailed and thoroughly documented ac- count of "the actual experiences of a number of artists and illustrators, most of whom personally witnessed some part of the marvellous transforma- tion of the region beyond the Mississippi — chiefly the Plains and the Rockies — in the half century ex- tending from 1850 until 1900." These men, many of them obscure and untrained amateurs, served as artists with official surveys and expeditions, as artists traveling on assignment for Harper's Weekly or Vran\ Leslie's Illustrated Newspaper, or as inde- pendents on wagon, and later, railroad trains. John M. Stanley and Heinrich Balduin Mollhausen de- picted views and Indians and Indian modes of life. William Jacob Hays was a painter of animals, chiefly buffaloes and prairie dogs. After the Civil War, Theodore R. Davis and Alfred R. Waud of Harper's, and many others recorded the tide of emigration, Indian troubles, and the expanding Western scene. The 90 halftone illustrations are reproduced on 36 leaves. 5807. U. S. Library of Congress. An album of American battle art, 1755-1918. Washing- ton, U. S. Govt. Print. Off., 1947. xvi, 319 p. 48-45628 N8260.U4 An album of 150 full-page reproductions in gra- vure of American prints, drawings, photographs, and pictorial maps, most of which depict batdes, although some are portraits, and others are scenes of military life. Based upon an exhibition held at the Library of Congress in 1944 and drawn in the main from the Library's collections, they are ar- ranged chronologically in 10 sections, each repre- senting a war or group of wars from "The French and Indian War and Its Aftermath, 1755-1765," to "The First World War, 1917-1918." Each has a brief introduction by the editor, Donald H. Mug- ridge, giving a historical framework for the group of plates, and special attention is given to graphic processes and the artists who made use of them or whose work was reproduced by them. Each illus- tration is provided with an annotation which de- scribes it in technical terms and explains its historical significance. Selection of illustrations has been gov- erned to some extent by the ease or effectiveness with which they could be reproduced; scene and artist are usually but not invariably of the same era. Pic- torial Americana, 2d ed. (Washington, Library of Congress, 1955. 68 p.) is a catalog of photographic negatives available in the Library's Prints and Photo- graphs Division, "published for the convenience of those who may wish to obtain positive prints"; the originals, mostly prints and magazine illustrations, reflect American history through 1899, or are views, or are social materials here classified by subject matter. XXVII Land and Agriculture A. Land 5808-5818 B. Agriculture: History 5819-5838 C. Agriculture: Practice 5839-5850 4> D. Agriculture: Government Policies 585 1-586 1 T E. Forests, National Par^s 5862-5866 F. Animal Husbandry 5867-5874 ^ AGRICULTURE is normally thought of as a part of American economic life, which is £\. the subject of the next chapter. It has been given separate and prior treatment, in part for convenience, since the economic chapter is large enough as it is, but also because of a real priority, historical and logical, in its subject matter. Through the first two and a half centuries of our history, America was a land of farmers. Not until after the Civil War — and, some have argued, largely because of it — did the industrial interest come to out- weigh the agricultural, and not until the second selection of the less technical works that will have significance for those of us who are not farmers or are not actively engaged in wresding with the farmer's problems. Just as agriculture is prior to other forms of eco- nomic activity, so the land is historically and logically prior to the forms of its cultivation, and our first section includes titles on land use, soil conservation, public land policies, the public domain, and land speculation and values. Works with a more stricdy geographical approach appear in Chapter VI. The next three sections divide the books on agriculture according to whether they emphasize its history, its current practice, or the Government policies which affect it; but these aspects are by no means mutually exclusive, and tides in one section may have much of interest for one or both of the others. As in simi- lar situations elsewhere, we have not hesitated to select books which take decided views on recent developments, as being the most likely to arouse the lay reader's interest, but of course no endorsement of these views is implied. The concluding sections lump the national parks, which could as well have gone in Section A, with books on our forests and their industries, and bring together all animal enter- prises, whether catching fish, preserving wildlife, or breeding horses. decade of the present century did the urban popula- tion come to outweigh the rural. Urbanized and industrialized man remains quite dependent upon agriculture for his food, and less completely so for his clothing and shelter; its priority in economic process therefore persists, if it is less overwhelming than a century ago. Americans still tend to follow Thomas Jefferson in regarding the agrarian way of life as healthier in several senses than its alterna- tives, and as supporting a democratic order in society and government more effectively than any other. For these and other reasons the state of American agriculture has been a special object of public solicitude for nearly a century. Agricul- tural research and education have been so effectively subsidized that they have led to one of the greatest paradoxes in economic history: as cultivated acreage and agricultural manpower have been shrinking, output has gone on increasing, and regularly pro- duces commodity surpluses beyond effective demand which threaten to send prices tobogganning. This situation has, during the past 25 years, occasioned an exceptional degree of Government subsidization, exceptionally wide Government controls, and a con- tinuing stream of diagnosis, criticism, and com- mentary. A vast literature has grown up over the century, from which the tides that follow are a 873 874 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES A. Land 5808. Bennett, Hugh Hammond. Soil conserva- tion. New York, McGraw-Hill, 1939. xvii, 993 p. illus. (McGraw-Hill series in geography) 40-1134 S623.B36 This volume presents a comprehensive statement of the science and practice of soil and water conserva- tion by the Chief of the Soil Conservation Service, U. S. Department of Agriculture (1935-52), who is known throughout the United States and abroad for his leadership in the soil conservation movement. In part 1 he traces the problem of soil erosion in the United States back to the wasteful exploitation of land by the early settlers; compares it with the prob- lem in other countries, and presents its economic and social effects on the welfare of our people. In part 2 the development of the national plan for soil con- servation, based on acts of Congress and adminis- tered by the Department, is traced, and present-day conditions in the several regions of the United States are described. Dr. Bennett's briefer manual, Ele- ments of Soil Conservation, appeared in a second edition in 1955 (New York, McGraw-Hill. 358 p.). The story of the conservation movement and the man who led it is told in a popular, somewhat jour- nalistic style by Wellington Brink: Big Hugh, the Father of Soil Conservation (New York, Macmillan, 1951. 167P.). 5809. Clawson, Marion. Uncle Sam's acres. New York, Dodd, Mead, 1951. xvi, 414 p. illus. 51-10247 HD216.C55 Bibliography: p. 393-397. The director of the Bureau of Land Management, U. S. Department of the Interior (1948-52), de- scribes the kinds of land, including national parks and national forests, owned by the United States. He tells how they were acquired, and in large part disposed of, and how the fourth of our area that re- mains in Federal ownership is administered. Using "relatively simple terminology and exposition," the author directs his book to those primarily interested in the outdoors and its use, to Federal and State employees in land and resources administration, and to students in both college and high school. The policies and politics that determine the management of the public lands are analyzed in the last chapter, where it is predicted that the public lands and the Federal Government's control over them will ex- pand in an effort to conserve our minerals, timber resources, grazing land, national parks, and water- power as they become increasingly important to the total national economy. 5810. Graham, Edward H. Natural principles of land use. New York, Oxford University Press, 1944. 274 p. Agr44~202 S493.G65 Bibliography [in large part annotated]: p. 233- 261. Associated with the Soil Conservation Service since 1941 as chief biologist, and then as director of the Plant Technology Division, the author has had abundant opportunity to observe the normal proc- esses of the landscape and to study the best methods of plowing, fertilizing, and irrigating the land for the conservation of the soil, forests, and wildlife, and for increasing its potential productivity. He has written this nontechnical book to help the land management biologist as well as the man who operates and lives on the land, by pointing out "something of the relation and importance of nat- ural ecological principles to land management methods." The 32 plates are accompanied by con- cise descriptions and contribute greatly to the read- er's enlightenment. 5811. Hibbard, Benjamin Horace. A history of the public land policies. New York, P. Smith, 1939. xix, 591 p. (Land economics series, edited by R. T. Ely) 39-6945 HD216.H5 1939 Bibliography: p. 573-579. This basic volume was first published in 1924 by the Macmillan Company. While head of the de- partment of agricultural economics, University of Wisconsin (1919-32), the author used the manu- script as the basis of a seminar, and several of the chapters were revised by members of the class. The result is a detailed and somewhat technical history of the acquisition of the public domain, and the various policies that have been followed in its dis- position since 1780. Special attention is given to the origins and the operation of the Homestead Act of 1862. Numerous tables show sales and re- ceipts, bounty land warrants issued, Federal grants for roads, railroads, and education, etc. In the last chapter the Federal land policies are reviewed and criticized. The author points to the reservation of forest land from private entry as "the most com- mendable act on the part of the government during the past half century," and to the great need for a Federal policy concerning grazing land, which, as Dr. Peffer describes (no. 5813), was adopted in 1934. 5812. Hoyt, Homer. One hundred years of land values in Chicago; the relationship of the LAND AND AGRICULTURE / 8 7 = growth of Chicago to the rise in its land values, 1 830-1 933. Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1933. xxxii, 519 p. 34-44 HD268.C4H6 1933a Bibliography: p. [496]~499. Fascinated by the growth of Chicago from a dozen log huts in 1830 to an urban population of 3,376,436 in 1930, with a corresponding rise in the value of the land from a few thousand dollars to five billion, and convinced by his experience in the real estate business that an understanding of the past movement of land prices was indispensable for any rational real estate investment policy, the author undertook this study for his Ph. D. thesis at the University of Chicago. He gathered material from the records of the Chicago Tide and Trust Com- pany, the annual land-value maps, newspaper files, appraisals, and from tax-assessment records. Part 1 traces the history of the city's growth in relation to the rise in land values during four booms: those of the canal and railroad eras, 1830-62; the boom that followed the Civil War and the Great Fire, 1863-77; me boom of the first skyscrapers and the first World's Fair, 1878-98; and the land boom that preceded and followed World War I, 1898-1933. Part 2 analyzes the relation of the growth of Chicago to the rise of its land values, and works out the Chicago real estate cycle and the mechanism of the Chicago land market. "The result," says Prof. H. A. Millis, "is a distinct contribution both to the economic and social history of Chicago and to urban land economics." 5813. Peffer, E. Louise. The closing of the public domain: disposal and reservation policies, 1900-50. Stanford, Stanford University Press, I 95 1, 37 2 P* (Stanford University. Food Re- search Institute. Miscellaneous publications, no. 10) 51-10461 HD216.P44 TX341.S8, no. 10 This scholarly study is organized around the major legislation dealing with the public lands from the passage of the Reclamation Act in 1902 to the creation of the Bureau of Land Management in 1946, which marks the official closing of the old public domain. It details the struggle between the concept of "land held in escrow pending transfer of tide" to individuals, corporations, or States, and the demand of conservationists for reservations "held in per- petuity in the interest of the collective owners, the people of the United States." Out of that struggle grew the Federal management of public lands, with the control of grazing (established by the Taylor Grazing Act of 1934), the development of water- power sites, the classification of certain mineral lands, and the building up of the national forests and parks for economic and recreational use in the public interest. 5814. Robbins, Roy M. Our landed heritage: the public domain, 1776-1936. New York, P. Smith, 1950, °i942. 450 p. maps. 55-21591 HD216.R6 1950 "Selective bibliography of secondary references": P- [427.]-433- Originally published in 1942, "this volume pre- sents perhaps the first attempt to integrate American land history with the other forces that have shaped our civilization." It traces the political, economic, and social effects of the policies underlying the de- velopment and disposition of the land owned by the Federal Government, from the cession of Western lands by the States following the American Revolu- tion to the withdrawal of all public lands from private entry in 1935. Much of its content is derived from the Congressional Globe and Congressional Record, reporting the arguments for and against the several measures which determined Federal land policy. 5815. Sakolski, Aaron M. The great American land bubble; the amazing story of land- grabbing, speculations, and booms from colonial days to the present time. New York, Harper, 1932. 373 P- 3 2 - 2 93 2 4 HD191.S3 From the colonial charters granted by England to individuals and companies to the Florida real estate "boom" of the 1920's, the author presents the most comprehensive study to date of the more important speculative land transactions which have left their imprint on the development of the United States. The Western land ventures of the Ohio Company, the Georgia Yazoo land frauds of the 18th century, the colonization of Texas by the Ausdns, and the "land grabbing" that accompanied the California Gold Rush of 1849, are among the instances de- scribed. Although land speculation generated panics such as that of 1837, it gave impetus to the building of roads, canals, railroads, and towns. 5816. U. S. Dept. of Agriculture. Adas of Ameri- can agriculture. Physical basis including land relief, climate, soils, and natural vegetation of the United States. Prepared under the supervision of O. E. Baker, Bureau of Agricultural Economics. Washington, U. S. Govt. Print. Off. 1936. 6 v in 1. Agr 36-297 S441.A15 1936a This atlas was originally planned in 1916 as a monumental undertaking including sections on crops, livestock, size of farms, rural population, etc., but after some experimental advance sheets had been issued, "it was decided to confine the publication of data in atlas form to the physical conditions, which are more or less permanent." Much of the other material assembled was published in the Yearbook and other publications of the Department. The 876 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Atlas as finally published has, therefore, rather more kinship with the titles entered in our Chapter VI on Geography than with most of the other titles in the present chapter. However, the sections by Joseph B. Kincer on "Temperature, Sunshine, and Wind" and "Precipitation and Humidity," by William Gardner Reed on "Frost and the Growing Season," by Curtis F. Marbut on "Soils of the United States," by Homer L. Shantz on "Grassland and Desert Shrub," and by Raphael Zon on "Forests" are basic to any geographical approach to American agricul- ture. Each section consists of an extensive text, as well as a series of maps, most of which are colored. Farming Is Hard." Another large section on con- servation concludes with "Information on Land from Airphotos," indicating the peacetime uses of a wartime technique, and including 16 pages of airphotos of typical farm regions throughout the United States. Of special interest are the conclud- ing sections, "Our Growing Needs and Problems" and "Planning for a Better Use." In the former, Professor M. Mason Gaffney of the University of Missouri puts the pertinent question, "Urban Ex- pansion — Will It Ever Stop?" There is practically no bibliographical apparatus, but there is a consid- erable index. 5817. U. S. Dept. of Agriculture. Land. Wash- ington, U. S. Govt. Print. Off. [1958] 605 p., 64 p. of plates. (Its Yearbook of agriculture, 1958) "A summary in charts and maps": p. 263-276. Agr 58-321 S21.A35 1958 This latest yearbook of the Department of Agri- culture, edited by Alfred Stefferud, is concerned with the use, management, present trends, and future of public and private lands in the United States. It consists of 67 relatively brief and untech- nical papers arranged under 10 general headings; the majority of the papers are of double, triple, or even quadruple authorship. The section on public lands includes essays on these relatively unfamiliar subjects: "The Management of State Lands," "Get- ting and Using Lands in Time of War," and "The Management of Tribal Lands." A large section deals with "Some Financial Aspects of Land Use"; its final paper tells us that "Getting Started in 5818. Van Dersal, William R. The American land, its history and its uses. London, New York, Oxford University Press, 1943. xvi, 215 p. 43-14146 S441.V3 This book fills the need for a general introduction to the American land, and how it is used for agri- culture, including livestock, for forests and wood- lands, and for wildlife and recreation. In the first two chapters the land as it was in the beginning is contrasted with the land as it is now. The author interprets the change which has taken place as equivalent to the development of European culture into a truly American civilization. In nine chap- ters, comprising over half the book, he traces the origin of certain basic crops and describes their contribution to that development. Concluding chapters describe the menace of erosion to our fer- tile topsoil, and the new methods of farming, such as contour cultivation and terracing, which are re- ducing its destruction. B. Agriculture: History 5819. Barger, Harold, and Hans H. Landsberg. American agriculture, 1899-1939; a study of output, employment and productivity. New York, National Bureau of Economic Research, 1942. xxii, 440 p. (Publications of the National Bureau of Economic Research, no. 42) "Charts: sources and notes": p. [409]~4i3. 43-2979 HD1761.B3 Charts and graphs are extensively used to illus- trate the authors' analysis of the results of a number of studies of agricultural "output" and its constit- uent parts. Part 1 describes agriculture as a seg- ment of the Nation's industry, and defines "output as consisting of those products which are not con- sumed in further processing within agriculture but are available for consumption elsewhere." In part 2 their index to the aggregate product of agriculture is explained, as well as the rise, or in some cases the decline, of individual products, as both are affected by foreign market and domestic demand. The growth of nutrition as a science and the changes in dietary habits which affect consumption are dis- cussed in a chapter on "Agriculture and the Na- tion's Food." The development of agricultural technology, from improvements in machinery to bettered strains of plants and animals, is reviewed in part 3 as a prelude to a comparison of output with changes in the volume of agricultural employ- ment. Output has increased, and may be expected to increase, as the number of workers declines. In part 4, "Summary and Conclusions," the authors point out that long-range factors such as technical progress and changes in population and in demand LAND AND AGRICULTURE / 877 for foodstuffs will continue, as they have in the past, to force agriculture to adjust itself to changing conditions. 5820. Bidwell, Percy Wells, and John I. Falconer. History of agriculture in the northern United States, 1620-1860. Washington, Carnegie Institu- tion of Washington, 1925. 512 p. (Carnegie Insti- tution of Washington. Publication no. 358) 25-13458 S441.B5 HC101.C75, no. 5 This is the fifth in the series of Contributions to American economic history projected in 1904 by the Department of Economics and Sociology of the Carnegie Institution of Washington. Parts 1-3, by Dr. Bidwell, deal with developments in field hus- bandry, livestock, farm labor and equipment, trade in agricultural products, and land tenure, princi- pally in New England and the Middle States during the years 1620 to 1840. Part 4, by Dr. Falconer, covers the two decades 1840 to i860, characterized as "The Period of Transformation," and describes the shifting of crops, dairy farming, and livestock from area to area as it was influenced by climate and soil, labor, transportation, and markets. Chapters are devoted to agricultural machinery, to the diffusion of information, and to each of the major crops, as well as to animal production. An extensive classi- fied and critical bibliography (p. 454-473) adds to the book's value as a reference work for students of American economic history. 5821. Carrier, Lyman. The beginnings of agri- culture in America. New York, McGraw- Hill, 1923. xvii, 323 p. illus. (Agricultural and biological publications; C. V. Piper, consulting editor) 23-5941 S441.C3 Bibliography: p. 308-312. The author aims to bring together "from widely separated and often nearly unavailable sources perti- nent facts and observations on the early history of agriculture, especially in America," and has liber- ally sprinkled his text with extracts from contem- porary writers. Against a background of economic and social conditions in each of the Colonies, aboriginal agriculture and the indigenous plants, as supplemented by the introduction of European crops and cultivated by simple imported farm imple- ments, are described in full. The author demon- strates in detail that Indian agriculture had actually reached a complex stage of development, and that its methods as well as its crops were in large part taken over by the white setdements. The closing chapters discuss the effect of the introduction of slavery, the development of commerce, and the manufacture of alcoholic beverages on colonial agriculture. 5822. Cohn, David L. The life and times of King Cotton. New York, Oxford University Press, 1956. 286 p. 56-10457 HD9076.C56 A socioeconomic history which tells "something of an agriculture that fashioned the life of a great region and profoundly affected the destiny of the whole American people." The first seven chapters trace the story of cotton from Eli Whitney's cotton gin, which brought about profound internal changes in the United States and gave cotton a place of international importance, through the Civil War, which precipitated the breaking-up of plantations into small family farms and the spread of share- cropping. In the last four chapters the author de- scribes the spread of cotton cultivation westward, the movement of the cotton-textile industry from New England to the South, and the increase of competition from foreign countries and man-made fibers, against a background (after 1929) of Gov- ernment measures to bolster farm prices. Mr. Cohn does not conclude on an optimistic note: "While cotton is fighting a losing batde for a diminishing share of the home market, it is fighting a spectac- ularly losing battle in the export market." The latest phase of this historic crop is analyzed by James H. Street in The New Revolution in the Cotton Economy; Mechanization and Its Consequences (Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina Press, 1957. xvi, 294 p.). Harvesting machinery was not introduced on a large scale until the latter years of World War II, but by 1955 nearly one-fourth of the American crop was mechanically harvested, and in the western cotton regions virtually all stages of production had been mechanized. Mr. Street treats these developments as a problem in "the cumulative character of technical progress," and seeks to determine their relation to the decline in the agricultural labor force and in share tenancy in the cotton areas. A comprehensive history of another major Southern crop, if one of less geograph- ical extent than cotton, is Joseph Carlyle Sitterson's Sugar Country; the Cane Sugar Industry in the South, 1753-1950 ([Lexington] University of Ken- tucky Press, 1953. 414 p.). Save for one chapter on sugar in the Florida Everglades since 1880, it concentrates upon southern Louisiana and eastern Texas. The first part, more than half of the whole, is concerned with slavery times; the second narrates the recovery of sugar culture from the dislocations of the Civil War, and from the mosaic disease which nearly extinguished it during the 1920'$. 5823. Gray, Lewis Cecil. History of agriculture in the southern United States to i860, by Lewis Cecil Gray, assisted by Esther Katherine Thompson. Washington, Carnegie Institution of 878 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Washington, 1933. 2 v. (Carnegie Institution of Washington. Publication no. 430) Bibliography: v. 2, p. [943J-ioi6. 33-6309 S445.G8 HC101.C75, no. 7 AS32.A5, no. 430 This companion work to Bidwell and Falconer (no. 5820) rounds out the history of agriculture in the United States prior to the Civil War. The first volume describes the beginnings and development of agriculture during the colonial period, in Vir- ginia, Maryland, the Carolinas, the lower Mississippi Valley, the Gulf coastal plains, Georgia, and Florida. Chapters are devoted to the various agricultural industries of the period with emphasis on the to- bacco industry. A striking contrast is drawn be- tween the Southern plantation with its "capitalistic type of agricultural organization in which a con- siderable number of unfree laborers were employed under unified direction and control in the produc- tion of a staple crop," and the small self-sustaining farms of the North. However, the author points out in greater detail than has been done before that "the great majority of the Southern people lived on small farms and worked with their own hands." The second volume covers the period of transition from colonial to national economy, extending from the American Revolution to the Civil War. It analyzes the development of the national economy, agricultural industries, and methods of husbandry. The statistics, the wealth of footnotes, the extensive bibliography, the many maps, charts, and tables, with the comprehensive index, evidence the years of research (since 1908) and patient organization that went into these volumes. In scholarly fashion, the author has achieved his goal of attempting to interpret "the way of life of a great section of our country, which was almost entirely agricultural, to describe its system of agricultural organization, to discern, if possible, the forces that moulded its socio- economic life, and trace the interrelations of its economy and its institutions." 5824. Hedrick, Ulysses P. A history of horticul- ture in America to i860. New York, Oxford University Press, 1950. 551 p. 50-6898 SB83.H4 Bibliography: p. 515-523. A distinguished horticulturist of New York State undertakes to supply the lack, not only of any gen- eral history, but of any thorough regional or State histories of American horticulture. His book "is primarily concerned with gardening, fruit growing, and viticulture; not with gardens, orchards and vineyards . . . The places described in this text are only those that are significant examples of progress." Part 1 covers the colonial period and, after an initial chapter on "Indian Gardens," proceeds geographi- cally, but here and later the author is careful to dis- criminate the contribution in plants and arts of Spaniards, Dutch, Swedes, and Germans, upon which, in most areas, British Isles horticulture was eventually superimposed. Part 2 covers the years from the Peace of Paris to the Civil War according to a more minute chronological breakdown in the older areas, and to a less minute one in the areas more newly settled. Part 3 has chapters on four topics: botanic explorers and gardens, "The Dawn of Plant Breeding," "Horticultural Literature" from 1700, and "Horticultural Societies" from 1790. 5825. Holt, Rackham. George Washington Car- ver, an American biography. Garden City, Doubleday, Doran, 1943. 342 p. illus. 43-5 1 1 06 S4 1 7.C3H6 George Carver (i864?-i943) did not know when he was born, but it must have been during the last year or two of Negro slavery. Since his education had to be entirely self-financed, he was about 30 before he obtained his degree from one of the land- grant colleges, the Iowa State College of Agriculture and Mechanic Arts. Two years later Booker T. Washington (nos. 4449-4450) called him to the post he was to hold for the rest of his life, in charge of agriculture at Tuskegee Institute. Effective in his teaching, he was a genius in the laboratory which he had created out of odds and ends. Here, in an extraordinary series of experiments in chemical analysis and synthesis, he revealed the potentialities of the peanut and the sweet potato, and opened the way for a badly needed diversification of Southern agriculture. The peanut, not even regarded as a crop in 1896, stood second to cotton as a source of cash for Southern farmers by 1940. Carver's own writings consisted chiefly of leaflets and articles giv- ing practical hints to Negro and other small South- ern farmers; an article of 1915 is typical: "The Fat of the Land — How the Colored Farmer Can Live on It Twenty-one Times Each Week." Mrs. Holt's biography is largely a succession of anecdotes de- rived from Dr. Carver or his friends, but they are cumulatively impressive. Of Carver's many achieve- ments the greatest was certainly this: the contempt and indignities he had had to endure from ignorant whites did not leave a trace of rancor or resentment in him. (This title also appears as no. 2690 in Chapter IV on Biography and Autobiography.) 5826. Hutchinson, William T. Cyrus Hall Mc- Cormick. New York, Century Co., 1930-35. 2 v. illus. 30-30678 HD9486.U4M35 This is a definitive biography of an important inventor, and a history of the influence of the reaper on the agricultural development of the Middle West, and of the building of a great manufacturing dynasty LAND AND AGRICULTURE / 879 in Chicago. Each volume is complete within itself with bibliographical guide and index. The first volume, "Seed-Time, 1 809-1 856," traces the life of Cyrus Hall McCormick (1809-1884) from its begin- nings in the Valley of Virginia, where he worked with his inventive father in the manufacture and sale of farm equipment, and finally invented the reaper. It carries him to the eve of the Civil War, with a manufacturing business established in Chicago that had brought him recognition as an outstanding entrepreneur. The controversy as to whether Cyrus or his father, Robert McCormick, was the real inventor is reviewed in chapter 5 and is adjudged in favor of the son. The second volume, "Harvest, 1 856-1 884," carries the narrative of the harvest-machine industry to the inventor's death in 1884, and also describes McCormick's activities in the church, in politics, and in philanthropy. In the centennial year of the invention, Cyrus McCormick, grandson of the inventor, published The Century of the Reaper (Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1931. 307 p.), which provides a convenient briefer narrative, considerably indebted to Hutchinson's massive re- search. 5827. Neely, Wayne Caldwell. The agricultural fair. New York, Columbia University Press, 1935. 313 p. (Columbia University studies in the history of American agriculture, edited by H. J. Carman and R. G. Tugwell, 2) 35-27113 S555.A7N4 1935a Bibliography: p. [265J-290. Following the English custom, which originated in medieval times, fairs for the sale of agricultural products were held during the colonial period, but owe their crystallization as a distinctive American institution to Elkanah Watson of Pittsfield, Mass., who promoted the first "modern" fair in 181 1. The author presents the development of the agricultural fair, with its economic, educational, recreational, and social aspects, against a background of changing society. A period of decline following 1820 was suc- ceeded by one of expansion after 1840. "The core of the agricultural fair is the exhibition of agricultural products for prizes." The county fair, as it is now usually called, illustrates the pride of a people in improving and displaying the products of their labor for the mutual benefit of all. 5828. Phillips, Ulrich Bonnell. Life and labor in the Old South. Boston, Litde, Brown, 1929. xix, 375 p. 29-11204 F209.P56 As a student of history and a young instructor, the Georgia-born Phillips (1877-1934) was struck with the idea that the interpretation of the South by historians had been distorted. He believed that a study of the Old South "from the inside" was needed, and by the time he wrote this book had already spent years of research among plantation records, diaries, account books, and correspondence, some of which he found in the garrets of Southern houses. In the first chapter he describes the soil and climate that determined the crops and the or- ganization of labor as well as the habits of life and tempers of men — plantation owners, overseers, and slaves. He describes the plantadon as a "home- stead, isolated, permanent and peopled by a social group with a common interest in achieving and maintaining social order," and as a factory, a school, a parish, a pageant, and a variety show. He reviews the Southern scene from the "big house" and relates sympathetically the instances of friction that weak- ened the socioeconomic bonds holding planters and slaves together. Awarded a $2,500 prize offered by Litde, Brown and Company in 1928 for the best manuscript on American history, this book was the first in a projected series of three on the South. The second, The Course of the South to Secession (no. 3404), left incomplete at the time of his death, was sponsored by the American Historical Association with deep appreciation of Phillips' "fruitful labor." 5829. Robert, Joseph C. The story of tobacco in America. New York, Knopf, 1949. xii, 296, xxiv p. illus. 49-8562 SB273.R58 The influence of tobacco on the economic, political, and social history of the United States is traced from the time when smoking by the natives of the New World was observed by the earliest explorers to its present position as a big business, in 1948 yielding $1,300,280,000 in Federal excise taxes. The low price of the staple in Virginia of the 1670's led to Bacon's Rebellion, and in the first decade of the 20th century created conflicts, such as the Kentucky Black Patch War, between the tobacco trusts, the farmers, and certain protective associations. Its use as currency in the era before the American Revolu- tion strained the relations between the colonists and England, led to the famous Parson's Cause, and carried Patrick Henry into prominence as a defender of American rights. The staple helped to create the pattern of the Southern plantation based on slave labor, and of sweatshop conditions among the cigar manufacturers in the New York tenements. The author describes the nicotine habits of Americans in all strata of society — from chewing, sniffing, and dipping to smoking cigars and cigarettes — as well as the numerous anti-tobacco movements that have attempted to dictate social habits. Considered a "divinely-sent remedy for virtually all ailments of the human body" in mid-i6th century, its effect on health in the 20th is the subject of extensive research by the medical laboratory. 88o / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 5830. Rogin, Leo. The introduction of farm ma- chinery in its relation to the productivity of labor in the agriculture of the United States during the nineteenth century. Berkeley, University of California Press, 1931. 260 p. illus. (University of California publications in economics, v. 9) A3 1-750 H31.C2, v. 9 S751.R6 193 1 Issued also as thesis (Ph. D.) Columbia University. "Index of authors cited": p. 244-251. This is a study of the machinery used in the tillage of the soil, and in cultivating, threshing, and harvesting wheat, and the resulting effects upon the manhour requirements for crop production. Part 1 relates the development and utilization of the various types of plows, the harrow, and the field cultivator. In sections 1-3 of part 2, the introduction and use of harvesting machinery, the threshing machine, and seeding machinery are traced. The author has ascertained the man-labor requirements as affected by the various types of machinery, and in the last chapter compares those requirements at the begin- ning with those at the end of the 19th century. For instance, in 1830 it took over 64 hours to put in and secure an acre of winter wheat by hand; in 1895 me same operations could be effected by machinery in little more than two hours! The numerous illustra- tions, statistical tables, extensive footnotes, and bibliography are of special value for the research worker. 5831. Saloutos, Theodore, and John D. Hicks. Agricultural discontent in the Middle West, 1900-1939. Madison, University of Wisconsin Press, 1951. 581 p. 51-4287 HD1773.A3S3 This is an enlargement of Dr. Saloutos' doctoral dissertation, to which his teacher Dr. Hicks has con- tributed chapters 1, 2, and 4. Wisconsin, Illinois, Minnesota, Iowa, Missouri, the Dakotas, Nebraska, and Kansas are described as the center of discontent where movements for agrarian reform flourished. In the early years of the 20th century, the anti- monopolistic philosophy of the Middle Western farmers was voiced in Congress by such leaders as Robert M. LaFollette of Wisconsin, George Norris of Nebraska, and Henrik Shipstead of Minnesota, who sought reforms in railroad regulation, the tariff, taxation, conservation, and other spheres. The authors analyze the economic and political role of the American Society of Equity, the Nonpartisan League, the Farmers Union, and the American Farm Bureau Federation. They describe the efforts of the cooperative movement, the Farm Bloc, third- party ventures, and the New Deal to get higher prices, better credit facilities, surplus-control regu- lations, cooperative methods of marketing and pur- chasing, and other measures to better the farmer's position. During this period the "trust busting" tactics of the agrarians were abandoned in favor of building "restrictive devices patterned to a great degree after those of industry." 5832. Schafer, Joseph. The social history of American agriculture. New York, Macmil- lan, 1936. 302 p. 36-27407 HD191.S4 This book originated in a series of lectures given at the University of London by Dr. Schafer (1867- 1941), superintendent of the State Historical Society of Wisconsin for 20 years. While each chapter was prepared as a rounded treatment of a distinct topic, the whole is "a comprehensive survey of the social history of agriculture." Chapter 1, "Land for Farmers," traces the continuing conflict between squatters and speculators, and the attempts made from time to time to democratize the land laws so as to favor actual settlers. Chapters 2 and 3 contrast the "Primitive Subsistence Farming" which char- acterized the advancing frontier with the "Big Busi- ness Farming" which is as old as the tobacco plan- tation, and prevailed in Middle Western wheat growing and Great Plains ranching. "Improved Farming" describes the movement, which acquired momentum in the older sections of the country about 1830, to halt soil exhaustion, diversify crops, and breed better livestock. "Professional Farming" de- scribes the application of scientific analysis and ex- perimental methods to American agriculture, the decisive step in which was the Morrill Act of 1862 providing for agricultural education in the land- grant colleges. "Social Trends in Rural Life" de- scribes the old landholding aristocracies, the rise of an agricultural democracy of "worker-farmers," and the problem of maintaining it in the face of a large influx of European immigrants of peasant status and mentality. The concluding chapters are "Po- litical Trends in Rural Life" and "The Outlook for Farmers," the latter of which has hardly been borne out by subsequent developments. 5833. Taylor, Carl C. The farmers' movement, 1620-1920. [New York] American Book Co., 1953. 519 p. (American sociology series) 53-95!5 HD1761.T25 Bibliography: p. 501-508. A volume which achieves an exceptionally large perspective by running "a conceptual thread through an elaborate and diverse body of recorded history." Mr. Taylor maintains that a farmers' movement has existed not merely since the 1870's but since early colonial days, for it is as old as commercial agriculture in America. It arose out of and still revolves about the issues of prices, mar- kets, and credits, originated "with the awareness of farmers that they had become a part of the price LAND AND AGRICULTURE / and market economy," and has been "continued by the more or less organized efforts of farmers either to protect themselves against the impact of the evolving commercial-capitalist economy or to catch step with it." The various farmers' revolts, only a few of which have been marked by violence or bloodshed, are the high tides in a movement unified by a continuing body of ideologies and sentiments, and taking the form of a series of recurrent farmer "publics." Although Mr. Taylor calls his book "a sociological analysis," it is primarily a historical characterization of successive forms of protest, from the plant-cutters of Stuart Virginia to the Nonpartisan League and the cooperative marketing movement. In fact only the first 87 pages are con- cerned with developments prior to the Civil War. 5834. Taylor, Henry C, and Anne (Dewees) Tay- lor. The story of agricultural economics in the United States, 1840-1932; men, services, ideas. Farm finance section by Norman }. Wall. Ames, Iowa State College Press, 1952. xxvi, 1121 p. 52-14651 HD 1761.T28 The Taylors present in one large and compre- hensive volume the development of thinking about the business phases of farming. They analyze the contributions of schools, experiment stations, col- leges, and the Federal Government to the various practices that determine success or failure in agrarian industries and play an important part in the national welfare. The taking of the first agricultural census in 1840 marks the beginning of Government infor- mation services to meet the needs of farmers, and 1932 is the "dividing line between two eras." Dr. Taylor (b. 1873) is particularly well qualified to write a book of this scope: he was the first professor of agricultural economics in a land grant institution, the organizer and first chief of the U. S. Bureau of Agricultural Economics, and the author of the first book (1905) to bear "agricultural economics" in its title. The subjects of marketing, rural finance, agricultural labor and wages, transportation, and taxation, which were omitted in his early work but have come to importance since, are adequately cov- ered in the present study. The authors have made "writers of the period tell the story," and afford direct access to the source material which, until now, has been widely scattered. The very thorough index by Adelaide R. Hasse serves also as a bibliography. 5835. Thornton, Harrison John. The history of the Quaker Oats Company. Chicago, Uni- versity of Chicago Press, 1933. 279 p. 33-14986 HD9039.Q3T5 1933 Bibliography: p. 258-267. The Quaker Oats Company, which was incor- porated in 1901 as a New Jersey holding company, 431240—60 57 but one unit of which goes back to 1832, is typical of the many processing enterprises that have grown out of agricultural production. The author of this University of Chicago dissertation had access to company records for his account of the individuals, the technological changes, the financial growth, the expanding markets, and the advertising methods that have consolidated several smaller business units into a great industry. He begins his story with the cultivation of oats as it spread westward from the Eastern seaboard, describes the processes of the early millers, inspired by Ferdinand Schumacher (1822- 1908), the "Oatmeal King," and narrates the expan- sion of the company as manufacturers of rolled oats, "puffed rice" and "puffed wheat," animal feeds, and related products. From the conquest of the Ameri- can breakfast table by cereals hot or cold to the building of world markets, "the story of the Quaker Oats Company is part of the unfolding economy of American life." 5836. True, Alfred Charles. A history of agricul- tural education in the United States, 1785- 1925. Washington, U. S. Govt. Print. Off., 1929. 436 p. illus. (U. S. Dept. of Agriculture. Miscel- laneous publication no. 36) Agr. 29-1377 S533.T837 S21.A46, no. 36 Contribution from Extension Service. Bibliography: p. 397-420. As Director of the Office of Experiment Stations (1893-1915) and of the States Relations Service (1915-23), Dr. True of the U. S. Department of Agriculture was intimately associated, during the period of their greatest expansion, with agencies of agricultural education whose history he wrote in two other works issued as Department of Agriculture Miscellaneous publications, nos. 15 and 251 respec- tively, by the U.S. Government Printing Office: A History of Agricultural Extension Wor\ in the United States, ij8 5-1923 (Washington, 1928. 220 p.), and A History of Agricultural Experimentation and Research in the United States, 1607-1925, In- cluding a History of the United States Department of Agriculture (Washington, 1937. 321 p.). The present history of agricultural education in its rela- tion "to the general development and progress of science and education and to the background of eco- nomic conditions and of organizations of various kinds for the promotion of agriculture and country life," begins with the post-Revolutionary period, when the foundations of the American system were being modeled upon European schools and litera- ture. From 1820 to i860 the growth of agricultural societies and publications, fairs, state boards of agriculture, and of general education evoked a move- 882 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES ment for public support which resulted in the estab- lishment of land grant colleges under the Morrill Act of 1862. The book deals in large part with agricul- tural education since the passage of that act and extends to an analysis of agriculture in the elemen- tary curriculum of the 1920's. 5837. U.S. Dept. of Agriculture. Farmers in a changing world. [Washington] U.S. Govt. Print. Off., 1940. 1215 p. illus. (Its Yearbook of agriculture, 1940) Agr 55-7 S21.A35 1940 A brief chronology of American agricultural his- tory: p. 1 1 84- 1 196. This noteworthy volume of the distinguished series of agricultural yearbooks which has been appearing since 1894 has the largest scope of any. More than 70 authors contribute to an analysis of the economic, social, and technological changes which have been taking place especially since 1920, and of the farmer's reactions to them. The seven parts into which the symposium is divided indicate its scope: "The Farmer's Changing World," "Agri- culture and the National Welfare," "The Farmer's Problems Today and the Efforts to Solve Them" (p. 385-937), "Farm Organizations," "What Some Social Scientists Have to Say," "Democracy and Agricultural Policy," and "Essentials of Agricultural Policy." The contents are summarized in a long preliminary essay by the editor, Gove Hambidge, "Farmers in a Changing World — a Summary" (p. 1-100). The final essay, by the then Chief of the Bureau of Agricultural Economics, Howard R. Tolley, "Some Essentials of a Good Agricultural Policy" (p. 1159-1183), sums up the ideas and the objectives of the farm policies of the New Deal. An idea that recurs throughout the volume is expounded by Louis H. Bean in "The Farmer's Stake in Greater Industrial Production": if the latter could be increased to a point near capacity, "not all farm problems but many of the worst of them would disappear." That increase was on the point of taking place. 5838. Wilcox, Walter W. The farmer in the Second World War. Ames, Iowa State College Press, 1947. 4 10 p. Agr 47-260 HD 1 76 1 .W44 This Government-sponsored study aims to give "an integrated picture of the important economic forces affecting United States farmers during the second World War." It brings together from scat- tered sources, including interviews and correspond- ence with Government officials, the significant facts relating to agricultural production, marketing, manpower, and farm prices and wages. In many instances it makes comparisons with similar factors during World War I. To a great extent it is an interpretation of Government programs as they af- fected agriculture, and of farmer reaction to those programs. World War II brought about a shift from programs created to help the farmer in a depressed period to programs for meeting war- created scarcities. After describing price policies in general and in the several fields of agriculture, the author analyzes the economic implications of such policies for the future, examines Government man- agement of the food supply in relation to winning the war, and describes the technological processes that increased output in spite of reduced manpower. He concludes: "Though substantial progress has been recorded in farm families' standard of living and in the legislation designed to improve and stabilize their income, the basic problems remain unsolved." C. Agriculture: Practice 5839. Black, John Donald. Farm management [by] John D. Black [and others]. New York, Macmillan, 1947. 1073 p. A g r 47-3 T 4 S561.B53 "Further reading" at end of most of the chapters. A massive textbook for advanced courses in agricultural colleges by John D. Black, Marion Clawson, Charles R. Sayre, and Walter W. Wilcox; the advantage of quadruple authorship is that each author is most familiar with the farming of a dif- ferent major region of the United States. The manager of a farm business, who in the United States is usually also a farm laborer, has "to organ- ize it, to plan the work and direct it from day to day, and to plan, and on most farms actually con- duct, the buying and selling and the financing or credit operations." He should analyze his prob- lems in terms of his farm as a whole, and according to the methods of Farm Management, which "is applied Science — not just applied Economics, but also applied Biology, Physics, Chemistry, Geology, Meteorology, Psychology and even Sociology." Part 2, "Systems of Farming," distinguishes be- tween one-crop, specialized livestock, diversified- crop, feed-and-livestock, and crop-and-livestock farming. Part 3, "Principles and Methods of LAND AND AGRICULTURE / 88 3 Analysis," includes a chapter on "Measures of Suc- cess and Factors of Success in Farming." Part 4, "Problems of Management," has chapters on the management of farm equipment, of labor on farms, and of land. Part 5 is on "Management by Types of Farming" determined by the product such as wheat or sheep, but it also has chapters on "Irriga- tion Farming," "The Management of Farm Wood- land," and "Part-Time and Self-Sufficing Farming." The authors emphasize that farm management is essentially the farmer's reaction to external factors, principally weather, prices and costs, and techno- logical advance. 5840. Black, John Donald. The rural economy of New England, a regional study. With the assistance of the Committee on Research in the Social Sciences and the Graduate School of Public Administration of Harvard University. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1950. xxiv, 796 p. diagrs., maps. 50-9844 HD1773.A2B5 This substantial volume is the result of 30 years' intensive study of the rural land-use economy of New England by a Harvard professor of economics, drawing upon successive national censuses and "the whole research effort of the six New England Agri- cultural Experiment Stations since they were founded, and of the federal research agencies coop- erating with them." It is presented as "a case study in regional analysis," showing what can be achieved for other areas by the same kind of detailed study. Dr. Black regards it as particularly significant because New England has undergone the maximum of industrial and urban development, and "the dis- tribution of land uses between rural and urban which one finds in New England — among crops, pasture, woodlot, and forest, among pleasure ground, country home, and suburban home — is likely to characterize, in some future period, almost as large a part of our national domain as is the more largely agricultural distribution" of the Midwest and South. Chapter 14 (p. [25o]-27i) is a sketch of New England agricultural history aiming to show how and when it acquired its present characters: "largely a region of dairy cows and fluid milk, hay and pasture, and poultry and vegetables for local consumption," and "a region mainly of ordinary family-sized farms interspersed freely in many sec- tions with part-time, country-home, and other resi- dential farms." The author concludes that "the great retrogression that set in before the Civil War" in New England agriculture leveled out about 1920, that its forestry should soon "round the turn," and that residential and recreational use should continue to expand. But all these depend upon New England industry and trade maintaining themselves, and all will go better if active policies replace the recent tendency to drift and stagnate. 5841. Davis, John H., and Kenneth Hinshaw. Farmer in a business suit. New York, Simon & Schuster, 1957. 241 p. 57-7308 HD1761.D35 Dr. Davis was Assistant Secretary of Agriculture in President Eisenhower's first administration, and has since been with the Harvard Graduate School of Business Administration; his collaborator handles publications and public relations for Eastern States Farmers' Exchange. Dr. Davis has been engaged in working out a new approach, of which he has given a technical and statistical analysis with another collaborator, Ray A. Goldberg: A Concept of Agri- business (Boston, Division of Research, Graduate School of Business Administration, Harvard Uni- versity, 1957. xiv, 136 p.). With Mr. Hinshaw he aims at a popular presentation of the idea by means of a fictional narrative of three generations of an Oregon family farm, with interlarded commentary. "The Earthbound Era" lasted from about 1880 to 1920. "The Transition," from about 1920 to 1940, saw farmers overwhelmed by problems, because "confronted with the necessity of buying a modern standard of living instead of being able to create it to a considerable degree direcdy from the soil of their farms." In the present "Agribusiness Era" the supply of farms, productive operations on farms, and the preparation of farm products for the market are three inseparable and interdependent stages of a single economic process. The greatest needs are for "versatile, better, and more appealing ways to mar- ket agricultural products," and for more research to find new crops or new uses for present overproduced crops. There is no master plan for agricultural salvation, but "little by little we can win the battle of the farm problem by developing successful agri- business programs for each type of farming or each farm product." 5842. Fetrow, Ward W., and Ralph H. Elsworth. Agricultural cooperation in the United States. Washington [U. S. Govt. Print. Off.] 1948. 214 p. (U. S. Farm Credit Administration. Bulletin 54) Agr 48-486 HG2051.U5A574, no. 54 "This publication is designed to provide infor- mation on some of the more general phases of the cooperative movement among farmers and also a description of the organizations and the methods of operation of associations in the various fields of cooperative endeavor." The introductory matter includes a brief historical sketch, a statement of principles, and a statistical treatment of the extent of cooperative activity. "Cooperation in Farm Pro- duction" (p. 17-28) is a relatively minor aspect, but does include the mutual irrigation companies of 88 4 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES long standing and various product-improvement groups. "Cooperation in Marketing Farm Prod- ucts" (p. 29-135) is much the longest section and describes the area of greatest success. In 1945 there were 7,400 marketing associations, with an estimated membership of 2,895,000 and an estimated annual business of $4,835 millions. "Cooperative Purchas- ing of Farm Supplies" (p. 141-154) became a major development only after 1920. In 1945 it numbered 2,750 groups, 1,610,000 members, and an annual business of $810 millions. "Cooperative Farm Business Services" (p. 155-185) includes financing, insurance, and telephone organizations. Coopera- tion flourishes, but the mortality of cooperative or- ganizations has been and remains high; 15,530 de- funct marketing or purchasing groups are of record. The reasons for this are only very tentatively arrived at. 5843. Haystead, Ladd, and Gilbert C. Fite. The agricultural regions of the United States. Norman, University of Oklahoma Press, 1955. xx, 288 p. 55-9620 S441.H35 "Notes on sources and additional reading": p. 276-280. 5844. Mighell, Ronald L. American agriculture, its structure and place in the economy. For the Social Science Research Council in cooperation with the U. S. Dept. of Agriculture, Agricultural Research Service, and the U. S. Dept. of Commerce, Bureau of the Census. New York, Wiley, 1955. 1 87 p. (Census monograph series ) 55-8179 HD1761.M48 The first tide is a concise economic geography of American agriculture which emphasizes its di- versity and its efficiency. It is intended for all "in- terested in why the greatest industrial nation in the world should also have the largest farm output and be one of the most varied in agricultural produc- tion." The average American farm of 1950 in- cluded 215.3 acres, each worth $64.96 (as against figures of 133.7 an d $19-02 for 1880) but no one could point to a typical American farm. There is, however, a typical American farm product, corn, which "has something over six hundred uses, rang- ing all the way from bourbon whiskey to the sizing that makes the paper in magazines slick." The re- maining 11 chapters survey as many regions, from "New England: Land of Abandonment" to "The Western Slope: Land of Tomorrow." Sketch maps, dot maps, and 89 well-constructed statistical tables permit a very rapid apprehension of essential factors. Dr. Mighell of the Agricultural Research Service of the Department of Agriculture provides a statistical view of American agriculture based upon the 1950 census (for other volumes in the series see no. 4395). He furnishes a number of dot and other maps, but for the most part his tab- ulations of "Agriculture in the Total Economic Process," "Dimensions of the Agricultural Plant," "Structure of Commercial Farms" by scale and type, "Farm Tenure and Debt," and "Social Fea- tures of the Structure of Agriculture" apply to American agriculture as a whole. 5845. Larson, Adlowe L. Agricultural marketing. New York, Prentice-Hall, 1951. xiv, 519 p. 51-3575 HD9006.L28 A simply written textbook by a professor of agri- cultural economics at Oklahoma State University of Agriculture and Applied Science. Marketing is defined as "the performance of business activities that direct the flow of goods and services from pro- ducer to consumer"; it becomes a subject for sep- arate study as the degree of specialization in the economy increases. Part 1 is a general discussion of the market for agricultural products as deter- mined by population, employment, national and family income, consumption, and export outlets, and this market's place in the national economy. Part 2 describes the several types of marketing agencies, local, wholesale, and retail. Part 3 analyzes the operations or marketing functions of these agencies under two categories: monetary handling, which includes buying and selling, risking, and financing; and physical handling, which includes storage, transportation, and standardization. Part 4 de- scribes the marketing process in four major com- modities: grain, cotton, livestock, and dairy prod- ucts. Part 5 introduces the theory of pricing, and assesses the effect of monopolistic tendencies in re- cent price developments. The sixth and last part has chapters on seven "problem areas": marketing costs, information, and research; trade barriers; fu- tures trading; agricultural cooperation; and Federal policies. 5846. McWilliams, Carey. Ill fares the land; mi- grants and migratory labor in the United States. Boston, Little, Brown, 1942. 419 p. 42-5664 HD1525.M35 Bibliography: p. [39i]-4ii. The plight of the migratory workers was little noticed until they began arriving in California by the tens of thousands. Attention was focused on them by John Steinbeck's novel of 1939, Grapes of Wrath (no. 1777), which was followed in quick succession by the investigations of the La Follette and Tolan Committees, the inquiry of the Tem- porary National Economic Committee into techno- logical changes in agriculture, and other forms of publicity. As chief of the Division of Immigration and Housing for the State of California from 1938 LAND AND AGRICULTURE / 88 5 to 1942, the author was directly concerned with problems of migratory labor. He emphasized the people and their plight in this book, but also indi- cated the forces which had produced two types of agricultural migrants — those displaced from their own farms and those who were habitual migratory workers. Book 1 deals with the problems of mi- grants in the highly industrialized agriculture found in California and Arizona. Book 2 is docu- mented from the Congressional investigations which revealed that the California situation was paralleled in many respects by conditions in Colo- rado, Ohio, Indiana, the east coast, and elsewhere. Book 3 describes conditions in the homes from which the California migrants came, and argues that the dust storms of Oklahoma and Texas had been given too much of the blame for a manmade situation. Book 4 is concerned with the agricultural revolution of the 20th century, during which tech- nological advances have brought about a swing from farm ownership and family operation to farm tenancy, and have turned the hired hand into the migrant laborer. It reviews measures taken by State and Federal governments to relieve the situa- tion and considers long-range programs for its solu- tion. Most of this dislocation was resolved by the manpower shortage of World War II, but the bad days described in this indignant book have remained a potent factor in all subsequent measures to main- tain American agriculture. 5847. Malott, Deane W., and Boyce F. Martin. The agricultural industries. New York, McGraw-Hill, 1939. 483 p. 40-1402 HD9005.M3 1939 "Selected bibliography": p. 463-476. The handling and processing of agricultural prod- ucts have grown during the past century from house- hold industries into fully developed elements of our economic structure. This volume "is designed to present the business aspects of purchasing, process- ing, financing, and marketing the chief agricultural raw materials entering into American industry and commerce, and to analyze the business problems peculiar to those industries." The industries that use such raw materials as milk, livestock, cotton, grain, sugar, tobacco, and wool are treated in sepa- rate chapters. In developing their thesis the authors have used not only Government documents and other published data, but also over 150 actual busi- ness problems collected by them from these indus- tries for use in a course on agricultural industries in the Harvard Business School. The authors empha- size that these industries handle the essential food and clothing requirements of the American people, and provide the cash income for our farm popula- tion. Their 9th and last chapters, "Summary and Conclusions," argues the similarity if not identity of interest between farmer and "processor": "Both are concerned with making the farmer's product more attractive to the consumer and encouraging the use of it in greater quantities," so that "it is extremely shortsighted for the farmer to consider the processor and handler of agricultural products as an inevitable antagonist." Government programs which help the farmer only by multiplying difficulties for the proc- essor are neither democratic nor economically sound. 5848. Murray, William G. Agricultural finance; principles and practice of farm credit. 3d ed. Ames, Iowa State College Press, 1953. 419 p. 53-12178 HG2051.U5M88 1953 This third edition of a comprehensive textbook originally published in 1941 is a study of the credit principles which guide or should guide the borrow- ing of funds by farmers, and of the lending organiza- tions which have grown in number and complexity since the Federal Farm Loan Act of 1916 added Federally sponsored agencies to the banks, insurance companies, and individuals already in the field. A new chapter on risk insurance and investment and a second chapter on commercial banks have been added to this third edition. Other changes take account of new legislation, recent statistics, and farm credit changes which have occurred since the second edition ( 1947). Part 1 seeks to consider credit prin- ciples from the vantage points of both borrower and lender, and includes a chapter on "Buying a Farm on Credit." Part 2 now requires 19 chapters to describe the sources and varieties of credit available to the farmer; 12 of them deal with Federal sources as against 5 for other lenders. The Federal Govern- ment's batde against farm tenancy in the United States and its measures taken to turn tenants into owner-operators are summarized in the last chapter. The author concludes that, despite the small success of earlier measures, the recent conservative policy of restricting loans during periods of high prices, "plus a widespread movement on the part of farmers gen- erally to pay debts rather than to increase them," will promote a movement up the ladder from tenancy to ownership. 5849. White, John M. The farmer's handbook. New ed., rev. by N. W. Sellers. Norman, University of Oklahoma Press, 1952. 462 p. 52-14154 S501.W54 1952 Mr. White says in his preface: "I have endeavored to condense and put into this book the results of my own experience of fifty years as a farmer, a county agent, a district agent, and a specialist of the United States Department of Agriculture and the Agricultural and Mechanical College of Okla- homa." The first edition of 1948 went through 886 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES seven printings and rapidly became a standard ref- erence work. The book aims to present in concise form and simple language the most up-to-date in- formation on farm methods gathered from the most reliable sources, and is "intended to be as useful to the farmer as a good cookbook is to the housewife." The material is arranged in topical sections, and alphabetically by subtopics within each section. The first nine sections deal with agriculture, from grain crops to berries, and the next six with stockraising, from beef cattle to poultry and rabbits. Diseases and pests and their antidotes are regularly described. There follow "Feeds and Feeding," "Soil Manage- ment," "Beekeeping," "Fish and Wildlife," "Farm Engineering," and "A Little about a Lot," from agricultural colleges to weights and measures. The text is interspersed with numerous photographs, diagrams, and tables, and there is both a glossary of farm terms (p. 433-441) and a substantial index. The Farmer's Handbook provides a rapid overall view of the best farm practices in the United States. 5850. Wilcox, Walter W., and Willard W. Coch- rane. Economics of American agriculture. New York, Prentice-Hall, 1951. 594 p. 51-6252 HD1761.W435 A textbook for general courses in agricultural economics which seeks to give a comprehensive pic- ture of its subject by first describing each segment or problem area in American agriculture, and then introducing modern economic analysis to further the understanding of each. These analyses, the authors say, have been kept at an elementary level, but the average reader will find them abstruse enough. Part 1, "Developing Efficiency in the Production of Farm Products," presents the nine major type-of-farming areas into which farm man- agement specialists have classified the country, dis- cusses the most profitable level of capital and labor input and of crop production, and finds that "most farms in the United States are smaller than optimum according to economic standards," but that the aver- age size is steadily rising. Part 2, "Problems in Acquiring and Managing Land," discusses the dis- tribution of farm people (owners, tenants, hired workers), the economic classes of farms (large- scale, part-time, etc.), the problems of tenancy and the extent of inheritance, and the economic effects of taxation. Part 3, "Marketing Farm Products in an Interdependent Economy," concludes that, al- though more than half the consumer's farm-product dollar goes for processing and distributing, he is in fact choosing to spend his money for additional services (such as packaging) making for greater convenience. The remaining three parts are "To- ward an Understanding of Farm Prices," "Farmers in the National and World Economy," and "What Government Aid Do Farmers Need?" References for further study occur at the end of each of the 32 chapters. D. Agriculture: Government Policies 5851. Bailey, Joseph Cannon. Seaman A. Knapp, schoolmaster of American agriculture. New York, Columbia University Press, 1945. 307 p. (Columbia University studies in the history of American agriculture, no. 10) A 45-5256 S417.K6B3 1945a "Selected bibliography": p. [28i]-290. Knapp (1833-1911) began life as a schoolmaster, and was vice president of Ripley Female College at Poultney, Vt., in 1866, when an accident in a soft- ball game nearly cost him a leg and drove him to an Iowa farm for the restoration of his health. Here his strength of mind and character led to a brilliant series of achievements, as leader of the Iowa stock- breeders, professor of agriculture and then president of Iowa State College, director of the colonization experiment at Lake Charles, La., and creator of the rice industry of the Southwest. From 1898 he was associated with the U. S. Department of Agriculture, and in the course of introducing oriental crops into the lower South, and combating the boll weevil menace which became acute in 1903, he hit upon the demonstration farm technique, or Terrell [Tex.] plan, whereby a local farmer who volunteered to adopt the recommended methods was guaranteed against financial loss. "The right psychological key which unlocked the door to the farmer's cooperation had been found." During Dr. Knapp's remaining years he spread this method through the South as "the Farmer's Cooperative Demonstration Work" of the Department, and three years after his death Congress established it on a national scale by the Smith-Lever Act (1914). Dr. Bailey's Columbia dissertation is in large part based on original records of the Department of Agriculture and gives a vivid picture of a strong personality and a public-spirited career that deserves to be remembered. 5852. Baker, Gladys. The county agent. Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1939. xxi, 226 p. (Studies in public administration, v. n) 39-21222 S533.B17 1939a LAND AND AGRICULTURE / 88 7 Prepared as a dissertation at the University of Chicago, and in large part based on observation and interviews in the field, especially in Iowa, this is an administrative study of the key man in recent agri- cultural organization, who began about 1906 "as an adult itinerant vocational teacher" and by 1939 brought national agricultural programs to localities "as a promoter, adviser, semiadministrator, and even as an administrator." He simultaneously rep- resented the Federal, State, and county governments, and might also be "closely allied with a semiprivate farm organization which he has in part built up." The first four chapters describe the origins and evolu- tion of the office from the invasion of the Mexican boll weevil through the peacetime measures of the Roosevelt administration. The remaining four de- scribe the divided responsibility of and for the county agent, the financial support which he received from private as well as public funds, the selection, train- ing, and emoluments of agent personnel, and the Negro county agents who in 15 states paralleled among their own people, on a lower technical level and for less pay, the work of the white agents, but were usually dependent upon "the tolerance and at least mild support" of the latter, and were con- fronted by tremendous obstacles. 5853. Benedict, Murray R. Farm policies of the United States, 1790-1950; a study of their origins and development. New York, Twentieth Century Fund, 1953. xv, 548 p. 53-7172 HD1761.B37 5854. Benedict, Murray R. Can we solve the farm problem? An analysis of Federal aid to agriculture. With the report and recommendations of the Committee on Agricultural Policy. New York, Twentieth Century Fund, 1955. xix, 601 p. 55-8796 HD1761.B35 5855. Benedict, Murray R., and Oscar C. Stine. The agricultural commodity programs; two decades of experience. New York, Twentieth Cen- tury Fund, 1956. xliii, 510 p. 56-12417 HD9006.B42 These three volumes incorporate the most detailed analysis and critique of the farm policies of the United States during the last three decades (roughly, since the enactment of the McNary-Haugen Act in 1927) that has been made. In 195 1 the Twentieth Century Fund undertook "to give the general public an impartial, over-all picture of the vast govern- mental operations in the field of agriculture and of their causes and effects," and engaged Dr. Benedict, professor of agricultural economics at the University of California, as research director and Dr. Stine, a former assistant chief of the U. S. Bureau of Agricul- tural Economics, as associate director. Since Dr. Benedict had been at work for some time on a gen- eral history of United States farm policies, he was commissioned to complete it under the fund's auspices. The result is the first and largest volume, which is not, however, so much more retrospective in scope as its title seems to indicate. The first seven chapters (p. 3-137) are a topical survey of develop- ments down to 1913, largely derived from secondary works, and the detailed narrative begins only with the Wilson administration. The thorough-going chronological treatment of agitation, legislation, administration, and production and price statistics that follows is the counterpart of the analytical treat- ment in the two following volumes. Dr. Benedict's part of Can We Solve the Farm Problem? defines the changing nature of the problem since 1920, describes eight different sorts of programs in as many chapters, and concludes with one entitled "Two Decades of Experience: What Conclusions Are Warranted?" It is followed by the "Report of the Committee on Agricultural Policy" (p. 483-530); this committee of 12 appointed by the fund to study the research findings was headed by Jesse W. Tapp, chairman of the board of the Bank of North America, and included representatives of farm organizations, professors of economics, and others. Its report speaks of "the overrigidity of the policies and programs of the past few years," and suggests in several places that price supports and stored sur- pluses have been excessive, and that there has been too litde "reliance on automatic adjustments in the market." The Agricultural Commodity Programs, in which Dr. Stine appears as co-author, opens with a substantial "Introduction and Summary" (p. xvxliii), and proceeds to a detailed analysis of 11 programs from cotton and tobacco to potatoes and fluid milk. August Heckscher, director of the Fund, notes its "particular interest which derives from showing the extremely subtle variations, both of method and effect, which arise in the application of farm policy." 5856. Deering, Ferdie. USD A, manager of Ameri- can agriculture. Norman, University of Oklahoma Press, 1945. xvi, 213 p. illus. Agr 45-370 S21.C9D4 An interesting and well-organized inquisition into the organization and policies of the Department of Agriculture, conducted from the outside by the editor of The Farmer-Stockman of Oklahoma City. "The USDA has failed," the author says, "primarily because its 'solutions' have been based on the theory of providing an artificial foundation for farm prices, and its methods have been to build more and bigger agencies to handle the problems." The author makes concrete suggestions for streamlining the 888 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Department into "a comprehensible and efficient" unit of government with the primary purpose of providing the farmer with know-how and services not otherwise available. It should be noted that this book was published at a time when the Department was in an abnormal situation brought about by World War II. 5857. Harding, Thomas Swann. Two blades of grass, a history of scientific development in the U. S. Department of Agriculture. Norman, University of Oklahoma Press, 1947. xv, 352 p. illus. Agr. 47-159 S21.C9H3 The Department of Agriculture was created in 1862 "to acquire and to diffuse among the people of the United States useful information on subjects connected with agriculture in the most general and comprehensive sense of that word." The author, associated with the research activities of the De- partment since 1910, presents a popular account of the scientific investigations and publications through which the Department has fulfilled its "general designs and duties" since its activities were started in the Patent Office in 1839. Against a background of expanding organization and shifting bureaus, he emphasizes research in the fields of food and drugs, economic entomology, plant sciences, forests, animal diseases, soil analysis, nu- trition, household appliances, and textiles. He also describes, somewhat in detail, the bulletins, circulars, journals, and other publications of the Department on subjects closely allied with daily living and avail- able to the public. 5858. Huffman, Roy E. Irrigation development and public water policy. New York, Ronald Press, 1953. 336 p. 53-10006 HD1735.H8 Bibliography: p. 309-326. The author first summarizes the history of irri- gation and public policy concerning it in the United States, and then proceeds to develop analytically such subjects as the nature and administration of water rights, the relation of irrigation to land policy, the organization and operation of irrigation projects, the development of irrigated farms, the integrated use of irrigated land, and programs of river basin development. The emphasis throughout is on their social as well as their economic aspects. He believes that "as a nation, we should be mature enough to map out a long-range policy regarding land recla- mation which will assure the continued strength of the nation and be acceptable to most of its citizens." He first isolates 14 factors which should be determi- nants for irrigation policy, from national and West- ern population growth to national security and our foreign trade policies, and concludes by suggesting 20 components of a sound irrigation policy for the United States. They are necessarily rather abstract, as may be seen from no. 5: "The family farm should remain as a basic objective in the expenditure of public funds for irrigation development but it should be a concept consistent with modern agriculture." 5859. McConnell, Grant. The decline of agrarian democracy. Berkeley, University of Cali- fornia Press, 1953. 226 p. 53-9387 HD1484.M25 The striking tide conceals a subject considerably more limited in scope: the American Farm Bureau Federation and its influence on recent farm policies. The creation of the county "bureaus" was the work of the county agents originated by Seaman A. Knapp and systematized by the Smith-Lever Act of 19 14 (nos. 5851 and 5852); the name, little appropriate for an organization of farmers, was accidental in origin but was officially adopted in 1916. State federations were formed beginning in 19 15, and the national federation of State federations was organized in 1920. The membership fluctuated until 1934, but steadily increased thereafter, reach- ing 1,452,000 in 1 95 1. Dr. McConnell seeks to demonstrate that an organization which was called into being to further technical instruction by the county agent has become his master and the greatest power structure in rural America, and that it rep- resents the large-scale and prosperous farmers rather than the small-scale and marginal farmers. Its new strength conferred by the New Deal farm policies was employed to destroy the Farm Security Admin- istration, the New Deal's device to assist the small farmer. Its influence is traced in the postwar struggles over the administration of agricultural programs (the federation's favorite agency is nat- urally the Extension Service, which it controls) and in the defeat of the Truman administration's Bran- nan Plan in 1948. The author regrets that "an in- tensified social stratification has occurred within agriculture, the source of much of our equalitarian tradition." 5860. Schickele, Rainer. Agricultural policy: farm programs and national welfare. New York, McGraw-Hill, 1954. 453 p. 53-9004 HD1761.S22 The chairman of the Department of Agricultural Economics at North Dakota Agricultural College has written this book "for the student of rural America, be he farmer, businessman, labor leader, public servant, college student, or instructor." He aims "to explore how agricultural policies can im- prove living conditions for farm families and serve the economic welfare of the community at large." The first two parts discuss the general problem of LAND AND AGRICULTURE / 889 policy-making in a free society and other funda- mentals. Part 3 is concerned with programs in production credit, soil conservation, and other land- use policies. Much the largest is part 4, "Farm Price Policy" (p. 136-307), which justifies Govern- ment support of farm prices on the ground that farmers are peculiarly vulnerable to price fluctua- tions, and "could not apply the price support devices v/hich industry, trade, and labor had developed so effectively through their own private collective ac- tion." Part 5, "Programs for Improving Income Distribution," defines the family farm as the goal of land tenure policy and calls the Farmers Home Administration established in 1937 "a break for the small farmer." The background of Federal price support policies is illuminated by Gilbert C. Fite in his life of a man whose concept of agricultural equality triumphed in 1933 and has remained basic ever since: George N. Fee\ and the Fight for Farm Parity (Norman, University of Oklahoma Press, 1954. 314 p.). 5861. Soth, Lauren. Farm trouble. Princeton, Princeton University Press, 1957. 221 p. diagrs. 57—5459 HD1761.S79 Mr. Soth has taught economics at a land-grant college and been an editor for the Department of Agriculture; he now handles the editorial page of the Des Moines Register and Tribune. His sharply written little volume takes a darker view of the agri- cultural situation and of recent trends and policies than do most commentators. Agriculture, he is con- vinced, remains a sick industry, with per capita farm income running about half of per capita nonfarm income. The lower third of American farmers, on the more isolated, small, and technologically back- ward farms, suffer real poverty and are out of the stream of the 20th-century American life. Acreage controls have not been successful, for the supply of farm products has been growing faster than the rela- tively inelastic demand for them, and seems likely to go on doing so. There are "too many farmers"; in spite of the relative and absolute shrinkage of farm population, too many persons have to share agricul- ture's share of the national income. Acreage control and price supports have been in conflict with a freer foreign trade policy. Soil conservation programs have been carried through, but only with the effect of increasing production; true conservation should take land out of use. Mr. Soth refrains from dogmatism, but suggests that the program of price supports limited to a few basic crops has not been a success, that "a strait-jacket of monopoly controls" has been created, and that direct payments to farmers or a general food subsidy are alternatives more consistent with free enterprise. E. Forests, National Parks 5862. Allen, Shirley W. An introduction to Ameri- can forestry. 2d ed. New York, McGraw- Hill, 1950. 413 p. (American forestry series) 50-4768 SD371.A6 1950 As a professor of forestry and sometime president of the Society of American Foresters, the author has been asked numerous questions about forestry which he here attempts to answer for the benefit of stu- dents, teachers, and practicing foresters. This new edition brings up to date changing techniques and policies, while the background material has been little altered. In general it covers the nature of forest resources; the development of the science, art, business, and public policy of forestry in the United States; and the shares of Federal, State, and local governments in practicing forestry. The chapter on education, with its survey of opportunities, will be of special interest to those who plan to pursue for- estry as a profession. References for further study are given at the end of chapters. 5863. Boerker, Richard H. D. Behold our green mansions; a book about American forests. 431240—60 58 Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina Press, 1945. xv, 313 p. illus. Agr 45-148 SD143.B6 The emphasis throughout this book is on "forest reservation for multiple use, with human welfare as the ultimate object." Following a description of the forest and timber regions of the United States, chap- ters are devoted to the beneficial uses of our forests for recreation, wildlife conservation, and livestock range, for the control of the water supply and soil erosion, and for the sustained supply of lumber and other forest products. The ravages of fire, insect enemies, and tree diseases are reviewed against a background of State and Federal programs for the protection and development of the forests. The peculiarities and potentialities of forests in the Southern States are summed up in a separate chap- ter. In a final plea the author urges that the logging industries and the public cooperate to conserve our forests and "to produce permanent communities of healthy, happy, busy [forestry] workers with all the social, cultural, and recreational benefits they have a right to expect from a great democracy." 89O / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 5864. Horn, Stanley F. This fascinating lumber business. Indianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill, 1951- 313 p. illus. 51-14101 HD9755.H6 1951 The lumber business, based on the "product of the saw and planing mill," is described as the big- gest and most important of the forest-products in- dustries. It is widely scattered in logging camps and sawmills throughout the vast dmber regions of the North, South, East, and West, with outlets in the retail lumber yards of the 48 States. The author, who has been associated with lumbering for 30 years, presents the highlights of the whole industry. Allied forest products, the economics of the industry from transportation to grading and inspection, the importance of lumber in wartime, and recent ad- vances in equipment and techniques are among the subjects discussed. The last chapter, which reviews research projects on the best possible utilization of wood, illustrates the importance of the industry to the national economy. 5865. Shirley, Hardy L. Forestry and its career opportunities. New York, McGraw-Hill, 1952. 492 p. illus. (The American forestry series) 52-6001 SD371.S5 Based on materials used in a course in general forestry for freshmen at the State University of New York, College of Forestry, this book is in- tended to help beginning students to decide if for- estry is to be their work. The author first traces the development of forestry, the lumber industry, the manufacture of wood products, and their im- portance in the national and world economy. He further points out the social benefits derived from forestry — wildlife, soil, and watershed protection, and recreation — which justify the care of the forests and therefore the profession. The chapters that follow describe the employers of foresters, employ- ment opportunities, education and research, and programs in progress which afford worthwhile compensation and opportunities for service. On the 50th anniversary of its founding, the Society of American Foresters published a history of the growth of the profession in America: Fifty Years of Forestry in the U. S. A., edited by Robert K. Winters (Wash- ington, 1950. 385 p.). 5866. Tilden, Freeman. The national parks, what they mean to you and me; introd. by Newton B. Drury, Director of National Park Service, 1940- 51. New York, Knopf, 1951. xviii, 417, xxi p. illus. 51-11226 E160.T5 195 1 The national parks appealed to Alfred Knopf, the publisher of this book, "as an element in our culture and a symbol of the American way of life regarding which the public should be made more aware," and he asked the National Park Service to suggest an author to prepare a definitive work on them. Freeman Tilden, a veteran writer, was selected as the man who "knew the na- tional parks and 'what makes them tick.' " De- scribing the national monuments and parks from Washington to Florida, and from California to Maine — the forests, canyons, caves, deserts, glaciers, and volcanoes — the author points out the spectacular creations of nature which may be found in those recreational areas. He analyzes the structure and operation of the National Park Service in its efforts to conserve wildlife and the forests from commercial exploitation, and "to provide for the enjoyment of the scenery, the natural wonders, and historic ob- jects ... in such manner and by such means as will leave them unimpaired for the enjoyment of future generations." The fourth edition of Devereux Butcher's Exploring Our National Farhj and Mon- uments (Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1954. 288 p.) has a slighter text, but is more copiously illustrated. It appears under the auspices of the National Parks Association, and the first edition was published in 1947. In the fall of 1914 Stephen Tyng Mather (1867-1930), a wealthy Chicago manufacturer of borax, wrote a letter of complaint concerning the national parks, and was invited by his old classmate Franklin K. Lane, Secretary of the Interior, to come to Washington and run them himself. His tenure, first as assistant to the Secretary and then as first Director of the National Park Service (1917-29), saw the establishment of principles for their acqui- sition, maintenance, and administration, and the development of a true service to handle the host of tourists brought by the new automobiles. Robert Shankland's Steve Mather of the National Far\s, 2d ed., rev. and enl. (New York, Knopf, 1954. xii, 346, xxii p.) describes and assesses his achievement, and indicates subsequent progress along the lines he laid down. F. Animal Husbandry 5867. Crowell, Pers. Cavalcade of American horses. New York, McGraw-Hill, 1951. 311 p. illus. 51-12662 SF284.U5C7 Recognizing the companionship between horse and man through the ages, and the usefulness of the horse in opening up the American wilderness to LAND AND AGRICULTURE / 89 1 civilization, the author tells the story of individual breeds against a background of history, anecdote, and legend. He presents the bloodlines, training, and records of great American saddle horses, Ara- bian horses, quarter horses, Morgan horses, standard bred horses, Tennessee walking horses, thorough- bred horses, and Western horses. This procession of racers, trotters, riding horses, carriage teams, show horses, cow ponies, cavalry mounts, and plain utilitarian horses leads to a better understanding of all breeds, and the place which they occupy or have occupied in American life. 5868. Dale, Edward Everett. The range cattle industry. Norman, University of Oklahoma Press, 1930. 216 p. 30-25282 SF196.U5D18 Bibliography: p [197] -208. The author narrates the rapid growth and sudden decline of the ranch industry on the Great Plains from the close of the Civil War to the 1920's. He begins with Texas, the original home of large-scale ranching in the United States. He describes the close relationship that developed between the Great Plains and the corn belt of the East, through the exchange of cattle for breeding and feeding, and through Eastern credit channels. "Whatever may have been the ranchmen's faults," says the author, "they were in many areas advance agents of civiliza- tion, and their contribution toward the upbuilding of the West has been enormous." It is pointed out that careful scientific study should be given to the utilization, conservation, and restoration of ranges, the improvement of water facilities, the optimum size of one-family ranches, and to marketing and financing — much of which has been accomplished through Federal legislation since the publication of this book. 5869. Dowell, Austin Allyn, and Knute Bjoika. Livestock marketing. New York, McGraw- Hill, 1941. 534 p. illus. 41-5423 HD9433.U4D6 This book has been prepared for the use of students, county agricultural agents, marketing agencies, packers, and others concerned with the production and marketing of livestock and the dis- tribution of meats. It analyzes the business activi- ties involved in the flow of animal products from producers to consumers. The various methods of slaughtering and marketing livestock are described as they have been changed by new techniques, eco- nomic forces, and legislation. Chapters deal with grade standards for livestock and meats; prices; the regulation and supervision of the packing industry; cold-storage lockers; and the distribution of meats through wholesale and retail outlets. "Selected Readings" appear at the end of chapters. 5870. Gabrielson, Ira Noel. Wildlife manage- ment. New York, Macmillan, 195 1. 274 p. Agr 51-501 SK361.G13 Out of his experience as Director of the U. S. Fish and Wildlife Service from 1940 to 1946, and as presi- dent of the Wildlife Management Institute since that date, the author has produced a book about a new profession — the wildlife manager, who "as the business manager of a great resource, must first maintain the resource, and second, utilize it to the greatest possible advantage of the nation and its people." The place of research and the education of both the public and the technician in wildlife man- agement are reviewed, as well as the need for regula- tion of the human harvest of the wild population, and of regular inventories. Chapters 6 to 10 deal with wildlife itself — refuges, artificial propagation, population control, and the manipulation of environ- ment. Noting a decline in standards of conduct among sportsmen, the author suggests some rules that should be followed and points out the need for more personnel, law enforcement, and cooperation to preserve the economic and recreational value of the Nation's wildlife. 5871. Hohman, Elmo Paul. The American whaleman; a study of life and labor in the whaling industry. New York, Longmans, Green, 1928. xiv, 355 p. illus. 28-29321 SH381.H6 Bibliography: p. 336-347. A colorful work based on a wide range of original sources — logbooks, consular letters, crew lists and accounts, and other whaling manuscripts. The major section (part 2) is the story of the whaling industry at its height during the years 1833 to i860. Part 1 gives the background with its origins in Eu- rope, and part 3 traces the decline of the industry from a position of economic and industrial impor- tance to New England and the whole Nation until its disappearance in the early years of the 20th cen- tury. The author gives us an insight into the lives of the crews, their working conditions and wages, the dangers encountered, and the discipline de- manded by the rigors of their trade. Whaling is one of those industries which have played their part in the growth of the Nation only to succumb to the ravages of war and weather, and to technical and economic developments resulting in alternative products. The early stages of this picturesque in- dustry are portrayed by Edouard A. Stackpole: The Sea-Hunters; the New England Whalemen during Two Centuries, 1635-18 3 5 (Philadelphia, Lippin- cott, 1953. 510 p.). 5872. McFarland, Raymond. A history of the New England fisheries. [Philadelphia] University of Pennsylvania, 191 1. 457 p. ( j Publica- 892 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES tions of the University of Pennsylvania. Series in political economy and public law]) 11-2088 SH221.M3 Bibliography: p. 338-363. Aside from books on whaling there is little litera- ture, except diffuse government publications, on the history of the fishing industry. This book was written to fill in the story of the cod, mackerel, and inshore (including shellfish) fisheries. It shows the development and importance of the New Eng- land fisheries from early colonial days to the time of publication, with full attention to their role in commerce, legislation, and international affairs. Chapter XVIII, "The Evolution of the Fishing Schooner," goes into the changes in the furnishings of vessels, in the equipment used for fishing, and in the methods of curing the catch. Donald }. White's The New England Fishing Industry (Cam- bridge, Harvard University Press, 1954. 205 p. Wertheim Fellowship publications) is "a study in the interrelations of wages and prices and factor and product markets" limited to the fresh and frozen finny fish sector of the industry in Boston and four other Maine and Massachusetts ports; it nevertheless throws much light on recent developments in the New England fisheries as a whole. 5873. Osgood, Ernest Staples. The day of the catdeman. Minneapolis, University of Minnesota Press, 1929. 283 p. 29-19222 SF196.U5O7 Thesis (Ph. D.) — University of Wisconsin, 1927. Bibliography: p. 259-268. The author of this Wisconsin dissertation used an important collection of manuscript material in the office of the Wyoming Stock Growers' Association at Cheyenne, Wyoming, as well as public docu- ments, newspapers, and other published sources. It studies a great enterprise which grew up on the High Plains between 1845 and the early 1900's. In narrat- ing the rise and fall of the Open Range, it treats of the Indian barrier and its overcoming, the catde boom of the early 1880's, the development of cattle- men's organizations, the catdemen's attempts to monopolize the public domain, and, finally, the climatic and economic disaster of the late eighties. This brought about a transition from the great range outfits to smaller ranches with controlled pasturage and irrigation. The range cattle industry had attracted outside capital to aid in the development of a new area, had stimulated railroad building to carry its products to the Eastern markets, and had done much to lay the economic foundations for the setdement of the West. 5874. Towne, Charles Wayland, and Edward Norris Wentworth. Shepherd's empire. With drawings by Harold D. Bugbee. Norman, University of Oklahoma Press, 1945. 364 p. Agr 45-331 SF376.T6 Bibliography: p. 335-347. < The role of sheep in opening up the Southwest, including California, is traced against a colorful background of history from the days of the Con- quistadors to the mid-20th century. The authors point out that the natural endurance of sheep under harsh physical conditions, their grazing habits, and their flocking instincts have provided nourishment for explorers, soldiers, miners, and emigrants in their penetration of the region. They vividly portray the problems of sheep husbandry — trailing the flocks; lambing and shearing; and protecting the herds from Indian raids, range wars, preying animals, and poisonous plants. The last chapter introduces the "Men behind the Flocks," the pioneer sheepmen responsible for the great ranches and herds and the improvement of breeds. Based on a thorough comb- ing of printed material as well as many unpublished personal contributions, and incorporating many striking anecdotes, it has interest for student and general reader alike. Ten sketch maps, each illus- trating a single topic, facilitate the reader's task. Three years later Mr. Wentworth, who, in his quarter-century of service with Armour and Co., was able to visit all the livestock-producing areas of the country and obtain veteran sheepmen's reminis- cences and personal records, brought out his own massive volume, America's Sheep Trails; History, Personalities (Ames, Iowa State College Press, 1948. xxii, 667 p.). It deals with all parts of the United States from the earliest times, and concludes with a series of topical chapters such as "Financing the Sheep Business," "The Disease Problem," "The Public Lands," and "Cattle-Sheep Wars." There are statistical, biographical, and bibliographical (p. 622-632) appendixes. While it goes consider- ably beyond the needs of the ordinary reader, it contains materials of immense interest, and abun- dantly fulfills its object of recording "the part sheep played in building the United States." XXVIII Economic Life A. General Worlds: Histories 5875-5883 B. Other General Worlds 5884-5900 C. Industry: General 5901-5906 D. Industry: Special 59°7 - 59 I 9 E. Transportation: General 5920-5925 F. Transportation: Special 5926-5943 G. Commerce: General 5944-5950 H. Commerce: Special 5951—5964 I. Finance: General 5965—5975 J. Finance: Special 5976-6002 K. Business: General 5976-6002 L. Business: Special 601 1-6030 M. Labor: General 6031-6042 N. Labor: Special 6043-6058 (TT ur T" i HE BUSINESS of America is business," said Calvin Coolidge, a prophet of much honor X in his own country and era. If we amend his dictum a little and say, "The business of American scholarship is business" — meaning by the last word, of course, the whole economy energized by managerial enterprise — we are merely stating a statistical truism. The output of American books, periodicals, documents, reports, etc., concerned with economics in gen- eral and with the American economy and its constituent parts in particular not only far ex- ceeds that for any other of the arts and sciences, but falls not too far short of equalling their com- bined total. This is therefore the chapter in which we have from the outset realized the complete im- possibility of our task — the hopelessness of repre- senting either the literature or the facts lying beyond it in any selection of volumes which can be con- tained within the framework of this volume. We have therefore been, from necessity not perversity, considerably more arbitrary than usual in choosing and ordering our material. This is clear enough from our section headings, which, once general works have been cleared, simply take six of the largest and most abstract categories and divide the books under them into "general" and "special" works. We shall make no determined defense against those who find that some of our "general" titles should have been "special," or vice versa. We shall do no more against those who find Sections K and L on business holding tides which should have gone elsewhere: in them we have merely sought to bring together a number of books particularly con- cerned with the problems which were once said to confront capitalists or entrepreneurs, and are now said to confront management. The distinction be- tween "general" and "special" does, to be sure, reflect one of our concerns, which has been to represent, not only the larger forms and currents of economic activity, but the concrete units — companies, indi- viduals, and even machines — in which these abstrac- tions have their only being. Thus we have not only The Transportation Industries and Economics of Transportation, but books on General Motors, Com- modore Vanderbilt, and the steam locomotive. Our desire to present sample units in each of the cate- 893 894 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES gories has led us to include a substantial number of "business histories," and so to give what some may regard as undue prominence to the Harvard School of Business Administration, which was one of the earliest and has remained one of the largest produc- ers in the field. That a multitude of types and forms in each of the six categories, each of great statistical, monetary, or human importance, remain unrepre- sented we are only too well and painfully aware, but we could not make another volume out of this chapter. A final word is probably needed in recog- nition of the fact that American economic life is and has always been a battlefield, in books and out. We seek to hold no position and to draw nobody's fire, but we should find it difficult to contradict Mr. Bray Hammond when he says (in no. 6000 below) that business enterprise has been "the most powerful con- tinuing influence in American life ever since Inde- pendence." Recent policies, arising in the economic as well as the political sphere, have not striven to shut off this great primary source of wealth and wel- fare, but rather, in the first place, to keep it from being self-defeating and, in the second, to make it work for the prosperity of as many as possible instead of as few as possible. While such aims are not universally approved, they are very widely so, and to the majority, therefore, economic arguments now turn about matters of degree and of the effi- ciency of means rather than about absolute principles of natural law or abstract ethics. A. General Works: Histories 5875. Cochran, Thomas C, and William Miller. The age of enterprise, a social history of industrial America. New York, Macmillan, 1942. 394 p. 42-22792 HC103.C6 Bibliography: p. 359-368. A dramatic rendition of American history from 1800 to 1930 as propelled by the ventures of free enterprise, which in a century transformed village America into the richest urban and industrial power of the world. The authors describe the expanding frontier and swelling population, the machine-age revolutions in transport and industry, and the exploitation of the country's vast natural resources. They examine broad trends of business and invest- ment and their reflection in social and cultural life. As climax of the age of unlimited free opportunity, they point to the moral justification of the entrepre- neurs and their empires of railroads, oil, and steel, by means of the creed of the survival of the fittest provided by Herbert Spencer, evolutionary apostle of laissez faire. They next trace the downfall of the system in which seeds of decay were already planted: "The machine, an instrument of competi- tion, tended always to become mother to monopoly." In their analysis free enterprise, running a down- ward path through panics, depressions, and labor troubles, before the turn of the century gave way to finance capitalism. This in turn reached its climax of Big Business in the 1920's. By the time the crash came, according to the authors, individual initiative in America had "surrendered" to institutional enterprise, and now survives only as "the language of free competition." 5876. Dorfman, Joseph. The economic mind in American civilization. New York, Viking Press, 1946-49. 3 V. 45-11318 HB119.A2D6 "Bibliographic notes" at end of each volume. Contents. — v. 1-2. 1606-1865. — v. 3. 1865— 1918. A work of basic scholarship, summarizing and synthesizing economic theories expressed by indi- vidual American spokesmen. The first two vol- umes cover "the age of commerce," from Governor Winthrop and the Puritans to the crushing of aris- tocratic agrarianism in the Civil War. In the au- thor's view, the heritage of concepts brought over by the colonists prevailed into the 19th century, with foreign commerce thought of as the chief source of wealth, to be pursued in a society of rigid classes, motivated or justified by "the traditional sanctions and rhetoric of religion and humanitarianism." Writers were both men of affairs and of thought, like Penn, Franklin, Hamilton, Jefferson, Thomas Paine, and Robert Fulton. In the early 19th century the Old World pattern was again followed, as "sys- tematic" economic doctrine emerged among aca- demic writers on political economy, who interpreted the teaching of Ricardo and Malthus in differing Southern and Northern versions of laissez faire. The third volume, published three years later, covers the economic thought of "the age of industry," when, against a background of turbulent and un- restrained individualism, the rise of labor problems, and the growth of monopoly, new currents of re- form — radicalism, liberalism, or "marginalism," — were expressed by the trained professional econo- mists of the new century. Dr. Dorfman closes with the first attempts to integrate sociological thought with orthodox economics, in the "disturbing voice" of Thorstein Veblen and his chief heir, Wesley C. Mitchell, the two masters to whom the study is ECONOMIC LIFE / 895 dedicated. Volumes 4 and 5, covering 1918-33, are announced as this chapter goes to press. 5877. The Economic history o£ the United States. New York, Rinehart, 1945-51. 5 v. 45—7376 HC103.E25 A cooperative history, to which a group of noted scholars are contributing, planned in 1929 as a nine- volume series, and still in process; it was conceived as a full, balanced, and readable survey of American economic history for the general reader and to sup- plement college texts. Each volume has for its con- cluding chapter a full bibliographical essay. Four volumes, 1, Colonial Period to 1775; 2, 1775-1815; 3, Agriculture, 1815-1860; and 6, Industry, 1860- 1897, are still in preparation (in 1959). The first of the self-contained volumes to appear was The Farmer's hast Frontier, Agriculture, 1860-1897 (v. 5, 434 p.), by Professor Fred A. Shannon of the University of Illinois, one of the editors of the series. Two more were published in 1947, George Soule's Prosperity Decade; from War to Depression, 1917- 1929 (v. 8, 365 p.), and Broadus Mitchell's Depres- sion Decade; from New Era through New Deal, 1929-1941 (v. 9, 462 p.). In 1951 there appeared The Transportation Revolution, 1815-1860, by George Rogers Taylor (v. 4, 490 p.), and The De- cline of Laissez Faire, 1897-1917, by Harold U. Faulkner (v. 7, 433 p.). Professor Faulkner of Smith College, whose standard one-volume college text, American Economic History, first published in 1924, is now in its 7th edition (New York, Harper, 1954. 816 p. Harper's historical series), is also one of the board of editors of the Rinehart 5878. Hacker, Louis M. The triumph of Ameri- can capitalism; the development of forces in American history to the end of the nineteenth cen- tury. New York, Columbia University Press, 1946. 460 p. 47~3 IX 3 HC103.H146 1946 "Authorities cited in the text": p. 439-445. For the great triumph in America of the capitalist system, initiated in and inherited from Europe, Professor Hacker offers three fundamental explana- tions: from the earliest setdements the climate of ideas was capitalistic; the state, established by revolt against oppressive authoritarianism, has aided in- stead of restricting private enterprise; and the ideal of equal economic opportunity for all has never been lost from sight. He traces the development of capitalism from the city-states of medieval Italy through the Age of Discovery to its participation in the settlement of the thirteen Colonies. He analyzes in this continent the course of American mercantile capitalism, which long remained in fetters to British mercantilism, but after 1783 "had the whole world, productively and geographically, . . . over which to range." The transition to industrial capitalism did not gain momentum until after the depression of 1837-43, DUt during the Civil War the new capital- ists "succeeded in capturing the state and using it as an instrument to strengthen their economic posi- tion." By 1900 the "grand design" of industrial capitalism in the exploitation of the continent was essentially complete: heavy industry and the urban network were in being, and both producer and con- sumer goods were being turned out in an endless stream. Professor Hacker's success story is written in general terms, with only occasional references to individuals; his protagonist throughout is American capitalism itself, which in one century "created the potentialities of physical abundance and left behind the legacy of political freedom." 5879. Janeway, Eliot. The struggle for survival ; a chronicle of economic mobilization in World War II. [Roosevelt ed.] New Haven, Yale Uni- versity Press, 1951. 382 p. illus. (The Chronicles of America series, v. 53) 52-158 HC1806.4.J.33 1951 "Bibliographical note": p. 362-372. This "chronicle" of the war on the home front is written in administrative rather than economic terms. The author, a business analyst and writer formerly connected with Time and Fortune, is less concerned with the stages and processes of economic mobilization than with the "Batde of Washington." His thesis is that Roosevelt, the inspired polidcian, guided the war effort, and incidentally left behind an unprecedented complexity of governmental organization, "by the techniques of pure democracy — by provoking participation from the people instead of by imposing discipline upon them." It was the momentum of production achieved through the anonymous energies of the people that carried the day, despite rather than because of the expend- able leaders with whom the President experimented in his appointments to the successive agencies. Mr. Janeway's account of these, from the War Produc- tion Board and the suppressed Baruch Plan for Industrial Mobilization to Byrnes' Office of War Mobilization and Reconversion, dwells largely upon the personalities and maneuvers of the leaders, and their manipulation by the President. 5880. Joscphson, Matthew. The robber barons; the great American capitalists, 1861-1901. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1934. 474 p. 34-4665 HG181.J6 Bibliography: p. 455-460. The apt phrase that Mr. Josephson chose for the title of this book on the outstanding industrialists of the latter 19th century is now well fixed in the 896 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES vocabulary of American economic history. The Robber Barons, published in the second year of the New Deal, marked its writer's shift from his earlier preoccupation with such literary crusaders as Rousseau and Zola; his style remains that of the romantic biographer. He acknowledges in the preface the inspiration of Charles and Mary Beard in his attempt to depict these "prime actors in the drama" of the age, and his use of his enormous and lively research material is clearly influenced by his reading of Thorstein Veblen (no. 4538). In his pic- ture the captains of industry — Jay Gould, Andrew Carnegie, Cornelius Vanderbilt, J. Pierpont Morgan, James Fisk, James J. Hill, and the rest — emerge unvarnished as Veblen's "pecuniary man" in his "kinship with the delinquent." The antisocial as- pects of their acquisition and use of power are illustrated on every page, and the building of their empires is chronicled as "the fearful sabotage prac- ticed by capital upon the energy and intelligence of human society." Their positive economic functions receive little notice. 5881. Kirkland, Edward C. A history of Ameri- can economic life. 3d ed. New York, Appleton-Century-Crofts, 195 1. 740 p. maps, diagrs. 51-10989 HC103.K5 1951 Bibliography: p. 683-728. A textbook first issued in 1932, now in its third revision; the author for many years has been pro- fessor of American history at Bowdoin College. It surveys comprehensively the progress of American economic life from the voyages of discovery to the "day before yesterday." Its concern is with human activity rather than with policies or politics, which are subordinated to the lifelike detail of economic fact in accounts of the development of commerce, agriculture, industry, labor, and finance. The original work ended with the First World War, and in 1939 Professor Kirkland added a section called "Technical Change and Government Polity" to the older ones, "The Colonial Age," "The Agricultural Era," and "The Industrial State." Much emphasis is given to the relations of government and business, particularly in the last chapters where, as with most conscientious historians looking at the immediate past, the narrative is speeded up and illustration that might suggest personal judgment held to a mini- mum. All three editions have an excellent critical bibliography, arranged by chapters; that of 1951 has increased only three pages over that of 1932, but is completely reworked to omit outdated material and include the latest scholarship. 5882. Myers, Gustavus. History of the great American fortunes. New York, Modern Library, 1936. 732 p. (The Modern Library of the world's best books) 36-31209 HC103.M8 1936 Previously published in three volumes. This well-known book was brought out originally in 1910, two years after the copyright had been filed, by a Chicago publisher, Charles H. Kerr & Co. The author's previous book, on Tammany Hall, had dealt with political corruption, and in a period of muckraking, none of the established New York publishers would touch his new history. Myers, however, had based his work, a study of capitalism from the Marxist standpoint, on pains- taking and abundant research which, while not al- ways accepted as the whole truth, has influenced and provided documentation for two generations of writers. His aim was to show "that the great for- tunes are the natural, logical outcome of a system based upon factors the inevitable result of which is the utter despoilment of the many for the benefit of a few." In this frame of reference and beginning with colonial dispossessions of the Indians, he tells the stories of the most conspicuous fortunes built up by land speculation, and from railroads, trusts, banks, and industry — J. J. Astor, C. W. Field, Cor- nelius Vanderbilt, Jay Gould, J. P. Morgan, and J. J. Hill, with a host of lesser multimillionaires woven in. The evidence he quotes all goes to sup- port the "inevitable burden" of his work, an un- relieved tale of fraud and plunder. 5883. Wright, Chester W. Economic history of the United States. 2d ed. New York, Mc- Graw-Hill, 1949. xxi, 941 p. maps, diagrs. (Business and economics publications) 49-8742 HC103.W98 1949 Bibliography: p. 911-926. In 1944 the author redred as professor emeritus from the University of Chicago where he had taught economics for 30 years. His book was first pub- lished in 194 1 ; in the present edition an additional chapter brings the narradve down to 1947. His primary purpose is to explain the efforts of the American people to raise their standards of living, and through analysis of causes and results to arrive at precepts for the future. The book is intended for students of economics, and because of its size is probably more suited to reference than to class- room use. It covers the entire course of the Amer- ican economy from that of the Indians, with chief attention to the period since i860. Many statistical tables and graphs are used throughout. These are particularly interesting in the last two chapters, where Professor Wright summarizes and evaluates the achievement of the American people, comparing standards of living in 1770 and 1930. In spite of the attainment in this country of the highest stand- ard for the average man that the world has known, the conclusions drawn for the future are sobering. ECONOMIC LIFE / 897 B. Other General Works 5884. Coyle, David Cushman. Conservation, an American story of conflict and accomplish- ment. New Brunswick, N. J., Rutgers University Press, 1957. 284 p. illus. 57-10962 HC103.7.C68 Serious efforts to conserve the natural resources of America began only toward the close of the 19th century with the first legislation for Federal forest reserves, and the association of "the Prophet," the forester Gifford Pinchot, and President Theodore Roosevelt in the establishment of the U.S. Forestry Service. The first two parts of this book, by a writer known for his forceful popularizations of public economic questions, go deeply into the con- troversy which was stirred up by Pinchot 's idea of public intervention to prevent waste, not only of forests, but also of farm and range lands, ground- water, irrigation, river basins, and waterpower. The "gospel of conservation" enunciated in 1907 made little headway against "reaction, war, and 'normalcy' " until 1933. Under the New Deal the public works program was planned so as to forward many branches of conservation. Mr. Coyle de- scribes the activities of the Civilian Conservation Corps and the Soil Conservation Service, the pro- grams and resultant batdes over irrigation and hydroelectric power projects and policies, rural electrification, and the TVA and subsequent at- tempts at river basin development. In the same terms of accomplishment and opposition he outlines the conservation of fuels, minerals and metals, and wildlife. His last section examines the world sit- uation. Franklin D. Roosevelt and Conservation, 191 1- 1 945, compiled and edited by Edgar B. Nixon (Hyde Park, N. Y., General Services Administra- tion, National Archives and Records Service, Frank- lin D. Roosevelt Library, 1957. 2 v. (1314 p.)), documents Roosevelt's long connection with the conservation program. It is a selection from the mass of papers in the Roosevelt library dealing with conservation of soil and water, forests, wildlife, and scenic areas, with footnotes referring to the whole body of relevant material. The standard textbook for class use in agricultural colleges, Con- servation in the United States, by Axel F. Gustafson and three colleagues at Cornell, is now in its third edition (Ithaca, N. Y., Comstock Pub. Co., 1949. 534 p.). It is a straightforward and well-illustrated exposition of the principles of conservation, the establishment of policies and laws with respect to public and private lands, and the elements involved in the conservation of soil, water, forests, national parks, grazing lands, fish, wildlife, and mineral resources. A truly beautiful book on the historic, literary, and artistic background of conservation is by the curator of research at the Art Institute of Chicago, Hans Huth: Nature and the American: Three Centuries of Changing Attitudes (Berkeley, University of California Press, 1957. 250 p.). The ideas regarding Nature of Puritans, poets and phi- losophers, novelists and travelers, artists and scien- tists are traced, with abundant quotation, from the ruthless days of the pioneers to our own times. The fascinating illustrations include 64 full-page repro- ductions of paintings, drawings, and photographs, and half as many vignettes and woodcuts scattered through the text. 5885. Fainsod, Merle, and Lincoln Gordon. Gov- ernment and the American economy. Rev. ed. New York, Norton, 1948. xvii, 935 p. 4 8 ~447 2 HD3616.U47F3 1948 "Selected readings": p. 893-908. By two Harvard professors, one of government, the other of business administration, this long text is a comprehensive survey of the influence of the American government on the national economy. An introductory section reviews the economic back- ground, the politics of business, labor, agriculture, and pressure groups, and provisions of constitutional law relevant to the economy. The authors then re- hearse the policy and action of the Government as promoter of business, agriculture, labor, and con- sumer interests. Their central and longest section explains government regulation of private enterprise in general historical perspective and in application to special fields — railroads, public utilities, investment and securities, trusts and monopolies, fair trade, and others. The last group of chapters treats of the Government itself in business, through public cor- porations, measures for conservation of natural and human resources, and the planning and control of the war economy. Final consideration goes to the problems of the "mixed" economy of government enterprise, partially government-regulated private enterprise, and relatively uncontrolled free enter- prise which characterizes the postwar period. Throughout, emphasis is laid on the evolution of government activities in harmony with the public interest. 898 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 5886. Galbraith, John Kenneth. The affluent so- ciety. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1958. 368 p. 58-8512 HB171.G14 A challenge to the usual demand for ever-increas- ing production as the solution of most economic ills is here eloquendy and controversially voiced. In his usual provocative style Professor Galbraith argues that the "greater production" concept is a myth established in days of scarcity and no longer valid in the contemporary American society of abundance. He traces its background as "conventional wisdom" from Ricardo down to present-day thinkers. Then he examines the ancient preoccupations of econo- mists: productivity, inequality, insecurity. Today, he says, production has come to be regarded as the indispensable remedy, and equality and security are identified with it. But production has now reached the point where it must first create the consumers' wants it seeks to satisfy — the "Dependence Effect" he calls this — and the urgency of the wants can no longer be used to defend the urgency of the produc- tion. He makes unorthodox comments on such "illusions" as national security, consumer credit, etc., and suggests that the pressure for more producdon leads to inflation, price instability, and higher unem- ployment without helping our social imbalance. "The line which divides our area of wealth from our area of poverty is roughly that which divides pri- vately produced and marketed goods and services from publicly rendered services." Among the solu- tions he offers are: increasing unemployment com- pensation in times of rising unemployment; raising money through sales taxes; placing greater emphasis on spending for public purposes. 5887. Galbraith, John Kenneth. American capi- talism; the concept of countervailing power. Rev. ed. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1956. 208 p. 56-4515 HB501.G3 1956 This brilliant essay on modern economic theory is written in an epigrammatic style uncommon to the profession, and may be read with pleasure as well as profit by the layman. Professor Galbraith's fellow economists have accused him of oversimplification, but since the first publication of the Harvard econo- mist's book in 1952 it has received much attention from them. He joins other postwar thinkers (Berle, not in itself undesirable in an "opulent" economy. Drucker, Lilienthal) in defending big business as His thesis is that the American capitalist economy is no longer regulated by free competition, regarded as indispensable in the tradition of the classical econo- mists. According to orthodox theory, the present American system of oligopoly, in which the chief industries are controlled by a few large units that dictate prices to any smaller competitors, is bound to work out in disaster. The fact that it has not, Pro- fessor Galbraith attributes to the replacement of competition by what he calls "countervailing power." The competitors may regulate policy by agreement among themselves, but their power is balanced by power on the opposite side of the market: by the big trade unions, and by govern- ment regulation. Because of countervailing power and the use of the Keynesian formula against de- pression, the author is confident that in time of peace, if not in case of war, American capitalism will not break down. 5888. Gruchy, Allan G. Modern economic thought; the American contribution. New York, Prendce-Hall, 1947. 670 p. 47-4709 HB 1 1 9. A2G7 Bibliography: p. 631-655. The contribudons to modern economic thought of six 20th-century economists form the subject matter of this close analysis. Professor Gruchy writes six interrelated essays on the "institutional economics" of Thorstein Veblen, the "collective economics" of John R. Commons, the "quantitative economics" of Wesley C. Mitchell, the "social economics" of John M. Clark, the "experimental economics" of Rexford G. Tugwell, and the "admin- istrative economics" of Gardiner C. Means. In introductory and concluding chapters he defines their common orientation, for which he borrows from the South African philosopher-statesman, Jan Christiaan Smuts, the adjective "holistic." He describes this as constituting a new school of eco- nomic theory for which orthodox economics, based on the concept of every economic system as "a simple and stable mechanism" in which fixed laws for the separate parts can be deduced, gives place to the view of economic order as a dynamic process of evolution. In the approach of the new theorists the findings of cultural anthropology, sociology, and social psychology are utilized. The writer's digests of the six economists are less controversial than his claim that their interrelated theories constitute a unitary school of American economic thought. 5889. Harris, Seymour E. The economics of mo- bilization and inflation. New York, Nor- ton, 1951. 308 p. 51-13080 HC106.5.H318 Bibliography: p. 288-291. Professor Harris, who has taught economics at Harvard since the twenties, is well known to his profession. To a wider public his name is familiar as an adviser on financial matters to the Federal Government in many capacities since 1942, when he joined the Policy Committee of the Board of Economic Warfare. This book, written in the second year of the Korean War, and addressed to a specialist audience, is his tenth work — and, he ECONOMIC LIFE / 899 hopes, his last — relating to mobilization and war. To the problem of balancing the increase of output, the primary end of mobilization, by the stabiliza- tion of prices, his answer is a vigorous fiscal policy embodied in sharply increased taxation, with a min- imum of price and other direct controls. He ex- amines in this context questions of resources, ma- terial and human, public finance, the effectiveness of controls, and the inevitably uneven and unfair incidence of inflation. He suggests that the mis- takes of 1950-51 might have been avoided by a more thorough study of the well-documented les- sons of World War II. 5890. Harris, Seymour E. The economics of New England; case study of an older area. Cam- bridge, Harvard University Press, 1952. xvii, 317 p. maps. 52-5031 HC107.A11H3 Among the many official committees on which Professor Harris has served was the Committee on the New England Economy of the U.S. Council of Economic Advisers, appointed in 1950 to study the causes of the severe business recession of the pre- vious year in New England, and to recommend measures for long-range improvement of the re- gional economy, particularly as to job opportunities. The Committee submitted a report, The New Eng- land Economy; a Report to the President ([Wash- ington] 1951. xxxvi, 205 p.), in July 1951, shordy before Harris' book went to press. The two cover much the same ground, analyzing the general decline of this old economic region, its loss of industries and population to more newly devel- oped areas, its resistance to technological change and to Federal aid, its shortages of raw materials, its high costs of transportation and power, its unfavor- able tax structure, and many related factors. Pro- fessor Harris' book presents somewhat greater detail on certain points, such as the desirability of the St. Lawrence seaway, and has a different arrangement and emphasis from the official report. Although there are many difficulties, he is hopeful that an absolute decline in New England may be averted, and that he may be able to tell his students, as he has not during the last few decades, that "there is no strong economic reason for migrating to the South or West." Another and still more compre- hensive report on The Economic State of New Eng- land was brought out in 1954 by the National Plan- ning Association's Committee of New England (New Haven, Yale University Press, 1954. 738 p.). Five economists worked with two successive direc- tors of research to produce the 18 chapters of the survey. The authors look to "upgrading" — increas- ing the value of output per man-hour — as a means of expanding personal and regional income, and view the future with confidence. 5891. Hoover, Calvin B., and Benjamin U. Ratch- ford. Economic resources and policies of the South. New York, Macmillan, 1951. xxvii, 464 p. diagrs. 51-2037 HC107.A13H64 Bibliography: p. 441-453. This comprehensive assessment of Southern eco- nomic resources and policies was authorized by the National Planning Association's Committee of the South in 1946, and carried out by the Committee's Director of Research and a fellow economist of Duke University. A general statistical review of land, population, and retarding factors is followed by an analysis of the change in living standards between 1929 and 1948 in the region often referred to as "the Nation's Number One Economic Prob- lem." During these years the per capita income rose from 47 percent to 65 percent of the non-Southern average (in 1956 it was above 70 percent), a decline in agricultural income, due largely to the fall in cotton, having been balanced by an increase in manu- facturing wages and salaries, and a notable boost from Federal payrolls, military and civilian. Spe- cific developments and trends in the various sectors of the economy are next examined: if cotton is down, tobacco and other crops are up. The text is illus- trated by a hundred-odd statistical tables and charts; in most of those relating to human beings there is no analysis by race. 5892. Lilienthal, David E. TVA; democracy on the march. 20th anniversary ed. New York, Harper, 1953. xxiv, 294 p. illus. 53-7202 TK1425.M8L53 1953 When the Tennessee Valley Authority was cre- ated by Act of Congress on May 18, 1933, Mr. Lilien- thal was named one of its directors. In 1941 he became chairman, and after the first decade of TVA he expounded it in a book, first published in 1944, which appeared in American and British pocket book editions and was translated into 10 or more languages before this "twentieth anniversary edi- tion." It is not a full account of the development of TVA, but an eloquent statement of the writer's faith in the principles, procedures, and success of this plan for unified development of natural resources and raising living standards, under public control but with the cooperation of local bodies. TVA before and since its creation has been a subject of contro- versy in the United States, defended or attacked in the long-continuing struggle over the public versus the private ownership of power — a favorite phrase of its enemies is "creeping socialism." But after 10 years it had attracted worldwide interest and had become a symbol of what man can do to change his physical environment. In the 1953 edition Mr. Lilienthal added a chapter on "The TVA Idea Abroad," and, besides the completely revised bibli- 900 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES ography, two appendixes, one of which is a digest and bibliography of TVA-type developments in many countries. The writer, who served for four years as chairman of the Atomic Energy Commis- sion and is now chairman of the Development and Research Corporation of New York, published in the same year a book advocating new concepts: Big Business: a New Era (New York, Harper, 1953. 209 p.). Here his argument is that, with govern- ment's expanded role in economic affairs as safe- guard, the actual benefits of Big Business to social and economic advancement should now be recog- nized, without the "prejudice created by abuses long since corrected ... an antiquarian's portrait of an- other America." 5893. National Industrial Conference Board. National income in the United States, 1799— 1938, by Robert F. Martin, director Economic Re- search Division, the Conference Board. New York City, National Industrial Conference Board, 1939. xv, 146 p. (Its Studies, no. 241) 39-27201 HB601.N35 "This study offers the most complete estimates of national income in the United States that are available for the 140-year period beginning in 1799 . . . Though in the nature of such estimates they are not comprehensive and perfect, they are the best approximations possible in the present state of our information in this field, and they present in the most compact form a composite pic- ture of America's economic development such as no other series of statistics can." These estimates occupy 46 tables and 11 charts, arranged in a briefer explanatory text whose chapters include "The National Income Totals," "Kinds of Private Production Income," "Industrial Sources" of such income, and "Government as a Source of Income." The "total realized national income," in dollar figures adjusted by the general price level, rose from 1,092 millions in 1799 to 69,130 millions in 1938. During the same period the per capita realized income, again in adjusted figures, rose from $211 to $531, but the latter figure was regu- larly exceeded, sometimes by as much as $100, dur- ing the years 1910-1931. A long appendix (p. 105- 146) explains the sources and the methods used in constructing the estimates. The text is simply and clearly written, and adapted, as the studies of the Conference Board usually are, for wide use by businessmen. 5894. Slichter, Sumner H. The American econ- omy, its problems and prospects. New York, Knopf, 1948. vii, 214, ix p. 48-8583 HC106.5.S47 A revision and expansion of five lectures given at a Stanford University business conference the previous summer by the Lamont Professor of Economics at Harvard, well known as an adviser to government and private organizations on eco- nomic trends and business prospects. In a glance at the basic characteristics of our system he stresses the change of recent years to what he calls "a laboristic economy," with wealth and power in- creasingly in the hands of the employee class. The first problem he examines is that of labor relations, for many years the field of his chief study (see no. 6038), and of measures needed to keep the rapid rise of modern trade unionism from bringing about conflict in industry. He considers economic sta- bility, expressing approval of credit and fiscal con- trols, and international economic policy, speaking for greatly increased imports and reduced tariffs. He analyzes our prospects from both a pessimistic and an optimistic outlook, and finally attempts to answer the question, "How Good Is the American Economy?" The answer is: "far better than most people realize." A further group of lectures by Professor Slichter at Stanford in July 1950 was pub- lished as What's Ahead for American Business (Boston, Litde, Brown, 1951. 216 p.). As in the earlier talks, he set forth in clear outline, some- times with figures, his views of problems, causes, effects, and prospects. A chapter was added on the implications of defense economy resulting from the Korean War. He was still optimistic, ready to accept the idea of more government regulation without fear of socialism. He also contemplated without worry a period of rising prices and a certain degree of inflation, an attitude which he retains a decade later. 5895. Taylor, Horace, and others. The American economy in operation. New York, Har- court, Brace, 1949. xiv, 846 p. diagrs. 49-8736 HC106.T46 A composite work by members of the depart- ment of economics of Columbia University, revised almost yearly between 1932 and 1941, replacing earlier texts for a course in contemporary civiliza- tion. Essentially a study in political economy, its account of the purely economic aspects is interwoven with the political elements involved. There are nine sections, each with several chapters and many subheadings within chapters. The basic facts of national economic resources and national product, organization and control of production, manage- ment-labor and other intergroup relations, money and credit, public finance, and international rela- tions are set forth, with regular attention to current trends. Special emphasis is laid on factors making for stability and on patterns of control. The con- cluding section examines the values of a mixed economy of private enterprise and government par- ticipation, especially with regard to economic plan- ning and full employment. The long time-lag be- tween the predecessor work and this new volume was deliberate, so as to permit an adequate per- spective on problems and policies arising in the postwar world. 5896. Twentieth Century Fund. America's needs and resources, a Twentieth Century Fund survey which includes estimates for 1950 and i960. By J. Frederic Dewhurst and associates. New York, 1947. xxviii, 812 p. tables, diagrs. 47-3562 HC106.5.T9 5897. Twentieth Century Fund. America's needs and resources: a new survey, by J. Frederic Dewhurst and associates. New York, 1955. xxix, 1 148 p. illus., maps, tables. 55-6987 HC106.5.T9 1955 The Twentieth Century Fund's comprehensive source book of measurements of the American economy in all its fields is described by the director in his foreword as "a moving picture of accomplish- ments and probabilities," one from which we will "begin to realize America's vast economic and social potential." Dr. Dewhurst, an authority in the field of economic statistics, was aided in the huge research project by 26 economists, and most of the chapters are cooperative rather than indi- vidual efforts. The six sections cover in lucid sta- tistical analysis, with supporting tables, "Basic Trends," "Consumer Requirements," "Capital Re- quirements," "Government Costs and Foreign Transactions," "Resources and Capacities," and, as a final summary, "Needs vs. Resources." There are 225 tables in the text, over 40 graphic "figures," and 32 appendixes of additional data. The 22-page index reveals the all-embracing scope of the inquiry. After eight years the Twentieth Century Fund, of which Dr. Dewhurst is now executive director, brought out a revision: America's Needs and Re- sources: a New Survey. Whereas the first survey had been centered on the changes from the depres- sion economy to that of the full war effort, and the reflection of consumer shortages on the postwar scene, the later volume "finds its major focus in the phenomenal postwar boom, in the long-range up- surge of the economy which this latest boom ac- centuated, and in the significance of our expanding economy for the future well-being of our nation." The chief change in arrangement is the addition, in the section on "Resources and Capacities," of two new chapters: "Technology: Primary Re- source," and "Productivity: Key to Welfare." The tables have increased to 352, and the figures to 105. ECONOMIC LIFE / OX)I 5898. U. S. National Resources Committee. The structure of the American economy. Wash- ington, U. S. Govt. Print. Off., 1939-40. 2 v. maps, tables, diagrs. 39 _2 9 I 55 HC106.3.A5 1940 Part 2 issued by the National Resources Planning Board. Contents. — 1. Basic characteristics. A report prepared by the Industrial Section under the direc- tion of G. C. Means. — 2. Toward full use of re- sources. A symposium by G. C. Means, D. E. Montgomery, J. M. Clark, A. H. Hansen, [and] Mordecai Ezekiel. One of the best known publications of the Na- tional Resources Committee, which in 1935 suc- ceeded earlier committees that formed part of the planning apparatus of the New Deal. In mid-1939 the Committee was in turn succeeded, under the Reorganization Plan of that year, by the National Resources Planning Board, the change occurring between issuance of the first and second volumes of this report. The document was presented by Secre- tary of the Interior Ickes to the President as "the first major attempt to show the inter-relation of the economic forces which determine the use of our natural resources." Director of the project was Dr. Gardiner C. Means, known as joint author with Adolf A. Berle of The Modern Corporation and Pri- vate Property (no. 601 1). Part 1 has 400 pages, of which fewer than half are text analyzing through statistics the structure of wants and resources; of production in geographical, functional, and finan- cial aspects; and of organization, price, and con- trols. There follow over 200 pages of appendixes giving detailed statistics. The much shorter part 2 (48 p.) contains five essays by Dr. Means and other economists, offering suggestions for the more effec- tive use of resources. A more recent look is taken by the National Planning Association in a concen- trated survey by Gerhard Colm and Theodore Geiger, with the assistance of Manuel Helzner: The Economy of the American People; Progress, Prob- lems, Prospects (Washington, National Planning Association, 1958. 167 p. Planning pamphlet no. 102). Their informative analysis of the high pro- ductivity and consumption achieved by the Ameri- can economic system includes the factors of national resources, labor, business management, capital, values, and institutions. Problems weighed are the balance in economic growth, the residue of poverty still with us, concentration of power in industry, and the role of the United States in the world eco- nomic picture. Summing up, the authors consider whether the new American economic system with its large-scale organization in business and govern- ment can offer the greatest possible freedom of choice and opportunity to the individual. Their 902 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES conclusion is that, while the American system can- not be defined as capitalistic or socialistic in the traditional sense of these terms, it serves the national interests of the American people. 5899. Ward, Alfred Dudley, ed. Goals of eco- nomic life. New York, Harper, 1953. 47° P- ( [The Ethics and economics of society] ) 52-12049 HB72.W3 This symposium introduced a series undertaken by a study group of the Federal Council (later the National Council) of the Churches of Christ in the United States of America, investigating modern economic life in relation to spiritual and moral values. Fifteen essays, by as many distinguished authors, are focused on problems in achieving a less materialistic society. These are arranged in three groups; the first, by leading economists, is on "The Role of Values in Our Economy." The second group is by political scientists who examine "Our Economy in Democratic Perspective" — in its de- pendence upon government, and its relation to law and to principles of freedom and justice. The third group, "Our Economy in Other Perspectives," studies economic man from the viewpoints of biol- ogy, anthropology, psychology, philosophy, and the Christian faith. The five other volumes in this Harper series consider particular aspects of the economy in relation to ethics. These are: Kenneth E. Boulding, The Organizational Revolution (1953. 286 p.); Howard Bowen, Social Responsibilities of the Businessman (1953. 276 p.); American Income and Its Use, by Elizabeth E. Hoyt and others ( 1954. 362 p.); Christian Values and Economic Life, by John C. Bennett and others ( 1954. 272 p.) ; and one based on extensive polling, The American Econ- omy — Attitudes and Opinions, by Alfred Dudley Ward (1955. 199 p.). Not included in the series, but prepared in connection with it, in part as a summarization, is Ethics in a Business Society, by Marquis W. Childs and Douglass Cater (Harper, 1954. 191 p.). The series is being continued with a slight change in title (Series on ethics and eco- nomic life), three new volumes having been brought out by Harper in 1956-57: Walter W. Wilcox, Social Responsibility in Farm Leadership (1956. 194 p.); John A. Fitch, Social Responsibilities of Organized Labor (1957. 237 p.); and Wilbur L. Schramm, Responsibility in Mass Communication (1957. 39i P-)- 5900. Whitaker, Joe Russell, and Edward A. Ackerman. American resources, their man- agement and conservation. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 195 1. 497 p. illus., maps. 51-2124 HC106.W56 Intended for wider educational use than in col- lege courses, American Resources, by two geogra- phers, offers the general public a readable account of American problems and accomplishments in the field of conservation. The approach, they show, was for long negative: "Many of the countries setded by Europeans rank with the United States in intensity of resource destruction, but none reaches the range and magnitude of the destruction found in this country . . . [which] stands among the foremost examples in the damage done to its natural-resource base during the comparatively short span of three centuries." Now, and particularly because of the studies and plans of the 1930's, "recognition of the need for conservational resource management has led to remedial programs on local, regional and national levels." The authors examine five major groups of resources: cultivable lands, grassland and forests, water resources, mineral resources, fish and wildlife, and other recreational resources. The last chapter is written as a guide to action by the indi- vidual citizen, urging his cooperation through per- sonal effort against waste, through support of official programs, and through social pressures. C. Industry: General 5901. Adams, Walter, ed. The structure of Ameri- can industry; some case studies. Rev. ed. New York, Macmillan, 1954, 590 p. illus. 54-10831 HC106.A34 1954 "Suggested readings" at end of chapters. Fourteen economists here analyze individual major industries that present varying degrees of free competition, monopoly and oligopoly, govern- ment price support programs or controls, and gov- ernment regulation. Thirteen case studies follow a systematic outline, each in three sections: 1, histori- cal background and present institutional patterns, including modifications in the war and postwar periods; 2, marketing structure and price policy; 3, public policy and government programs or recom- mendations. The first industry treated is the highly competitive one of agriculture. Then follow: the chronically "sick" industries of cotton textiles and bituminous coal; residential construction, which, although the nation's second largest industry, is so diversified that it "deserves the tide 'industry' as a matter of courtesy only"; the monopolistic indus- ECONOMIC LIFE / 903 tries of steel, chemicals, petroleum, automobiles, cigarettes, motion pictures, tin cans; the regulated air transportation industry; and last, the newspaper industry, symbol of free enterprise and a free press, but whose market structure now "exhibits the familiar patterns of local monopoly, monopolistic competition, oligopsony, and oligopoly." (These terms both imply control of market price of a par- ticular commodity by a few big units acting more or less in concert: oligopoly by the sellers, oligopsony by the buyers.) In the last two chapters an attempt is made to formulate patterns of public policy and labor union activity consonant with a free-enterprise economy. 5902. Alderfer, Evan B., and Herman E. Michl. Economics of American industry. 2d ed. New York, McGraw-Hill, 1950. 716 p. illus., maps. 50-1 13 14 HC106.4.A58 1950 Bibliography: p. 691-707. A textbook on American manufacturing, based on material used in courses on industrial manage- ment and economic theory at the Wharton School of Finance and Commerce, University of Pennsyl- vania, and first published in 1942. The second edi- tion includes an appraisal of trends of the wartime and postwar expansion of the entire economy. The writers take the individual industry approach, glancing first at the field of manufacturing as a whole, in which over a quarter of American wage- earners are engaged, and concluding with a study of changing industrial patterns. The competitive factors which govern variations in stability are a chief point of their analysis of each separate form of enterprise. They also discuss the relation of each to the economic order in general, and its in- stitutional structure, technical processes (described in simple language), and historical evolution. Eight major groupings are distinguished, and within these sections are chapters on individual industries: e.g., the part on chemical process industries is di- vided between the chemical industry (including a brief reference to atomic energy), the petroleum industry, the paper industry, and the rubber industry. 5903. Allen, Edward L. Economics of American manufacturing. New York, Holt, 1952. 566 p. illus. 52-7011 HD9725.A65 A textbook by a professor at American Univer- sity in Washington who is concerned with the present-day industrial plant of the nation and makes little use of historical perspective. Out of the 450- odd general types reported in the 1947 Census of Manufactures he has chosen 19 individual indus- tries for discussion. His treatment is systematic, with several subdivisions within chapters; for each industry, with slight variations, he examines its relative size and importance, use patterns, export- import relations, relations with the Federal Gov- ernment, corporate ownership and control, location and capacity, technology, input and cost factors, financial factors, private investment, profits, and future oudooks. Illustrations, in part of technical processes and in part graphic charts, assist in keeping the presentation clear and factual. Besides the selected bibliography (p. 542-555), there is a useful final chapter rehearsing sources of data from gov- ernment statistics and reports, trade association re- leases, trades publications, and financial services. 5904. Clark, Victor S. History of manufactures in the United States. New York, Published for the Carnegie Institution of Washington by McGraw-Hill, 1929. 3 v. illus. 29-10065 HD9725.C52 Bibliography: v. 3, p. 400-442. This full-scale general history is one of the dis- tinguished series sponsored by the Carnegie Insti- tution of Washington, Contributions to American economic history (see also Commons, no. 6033; Johnson, no. 5948; and Meyer, no. 5923). The first volume, covering 1607-1860, was published in 1916, and had become standard by the time it was reprinted to accompany the two concluding volumes. Dr. Clark, an economic analyst whose basic area studies of Australia, the Far East, and Latin America had been prepared for the Bureau of Labor Statistics before the First World War, used for this work a quantity of original source material, identified in extensive footnotes. The presentation, on classic lines, paints a broad picture of the development, or- ganization, and economic interactions of manufac- turing as a whole and of its more important branches. The second volume, 1 860-1 893, has three chrono- logical divisions: the Civil War, Reconstruction, and "Big Industry in the Making"; volume 3, 1893-1928, is called "The Industrial State." In the last two volumes special attention is given to the iron and steel industry, "by which the progress, prosperity, and developmental tendencies of manufacturing in general were determined and illustrated." 5905. Fabricant, Solomon. The output of manu- facturing industries, 1899-1937, by Solomon Fabricant, with the assistance of Julius Shiskin. New York, National Bureau of Economic Research, 1940. xxiii, 685 p. tables, diagrs. (Publications of the National Bureau of Economic Research, no. 39) 41-4080 HD9724.F:; Text and statistical tables analyze total American manufactured product during three decades of great expansion and one of depression. The writer is an authority in this field, having been with the research 9O4 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES staff of the National Bureau of Economic Research since 1930, and its director since 1953. The statis- tics are focused on long-term changes in volume and composition of the output of manufacturing indus- tries. The beginning date was chosen as the first year for which "reasonably adequate" data were col- lected by the United States Census of Manufactures. The first chapters are on manufacturing in general and give first a summary of output, next an explana- tion of the statistical methods and materials used for the computation of relative numbers, and then a review of changes and trends in output of major and other industries. Part 2 examines the output of in- dividual manufacturing industries. There are 66 tables and 24 charts in the text, and appendixes con- cerned largely with index numbers. A second vol- ume in the series, by Dr. Fabricant alone, is Publi- cation no. 41 of the Bureau: Employment in Manu- facturing, 1899- 1 939, an Analysis of Its Relation to the Volume of Production (New York, 1942. 362 p.). This analyzes the statistics of factory employ- ment and of labor per unit (interchangeably the number of men used in production of a unit of goods, or the volume of production per man em- ployed) in relation to the growth of output. A later study by Dr. Fabrican measures The Trend of Government Activities in the United States since 1900 (no. 6136). 5906. Glover, John George, and William Bouck Cornell, eds. The development of American industries, their economic significance. 3d ed. New York, Prentice-Hall, 1951. xxvii, 1121 p. illus., maps. 51-2589 HC103.G5 1951 A survey of American industrial life, assembled and edited by New York University specialists in industrial management, now in its third edition within 20 years and well established as a reference work. It consists of encyclopedic articles on some 40 leading industries, contributed by representative agencies in each field. The first chapter, by the American Federation of Labor, with the name of President William Green attached, is on "Labor's Contribution to Industry." The articles follow a general pattern, each devoting some space to his- torical development and presenting facts on the present position, including such aspects as raw materials, processes and technological advances, location, marketing, competition, legislation, financ- ing, and chief centers or in some cases names of leading firms. Many statistical tables are used. The following industries, some of which are not manufactures, are treated: agriculture, meat pack- ing, fishing, lumber, textiles, leather, petroleum, coal, iron and steel, copper, zinc, aluminum, mag- nesium, lead, chemicals, pharmaceutical products, sugar, pulp and paper, rubber, glass, paint, varnish and lacquer, machine tools, electricity, power, ship- building and shipping, railroads, automobiles, aero- nautics, telegraph, telephone, motion pictures, radio and television, newspapers, book publishing, retail- ing, banking, and travel. D. Industry: Special 5907. Barger, Harold, and Sam H. Schurr. The mining industries, 1 899-1 939, a study of out- put, employment and productivity. New York, National Bureau of Economic Research, 1944. xxii, 452 p. diagrs. (Publications of the National Bu- reau of Economic Research, no. 43) 44-3218 HD9506.U62B3 This statistical study of a single sector of industry forms part of this Bureau's series dealing with trends of productivity in American industry (like no. 5905 in the preceding section). The authors attempt to assess in total output and manhours of labor the results of technological change, new methods of production, shorter workdays, and other factors affecting productivity. The analysis is in three parts: "Output and Employment," "Technological Change," and "Technological Change and Produc- tion in Individual Industries" (coal, petroleum, iron, copper, stone quarrying). Part 4, a resume, con- cludes that "mining, alone among types of economic endeavor, must reckon with depletion of its re- sources," and that the level of productivity will inevitably deteriorate unless continually buttressed by technological advances. The appendixes include statistical tables, technical questions of measurement, and a glossary of minerals and mining terms. 5908. Carr, Charles C. Alcoa, an American enter- prise. New York, Rinehart, 1952. 292 p. illus. 51-14776 HD9539.A7U53 The story of the Aluminum Company of America, commonly known as Alcoa, began with the "electro- lytic fusion of aluminum oxide by twenty-two-year- old Charles Martin Hall, in an Ohio woodshed in 1886." This experiment "touched off an industrial chain reaction which . . has been a classic example of American enterprise at work." The narrator of this case history of a major industry was a news- ECONOMIC LIFE / 905 paperman and for 15 years director of public rela- tions for Alcoa; he has used the Company's records as sources. In 1888 a small group of young Pitts- burgh businessmen founded the Pittsburgh Reduc- tion Company, with patents giving a legal monopoly of the Hall process and a capital of $20,000. In 1907, with the Mellon family as bankers and large stock- holders, the name was changed to the present form. Alcoa's first taste of trouble with the Federal govern- ment came with the Wickersham wave of trustbust- ing in 1912. In 1922 the Federal Trade Commission began an exhaustive probe into the Company's affairs, which ended to Alcoa's satisfaction in 1930. Lawsuits were brought by competitors; in 1937 the Department of Justice filed 140 charges of monopo- listic practices, and the antitrust case went on till 1950. "The Company came out of it as a law- abiding concern and as an asset to the life we know as the American Way.' " Mr. Carr ends his 62- year history of Alcoa with an appendix detailing labor negotiations from 1935 to 1950; its labor rela- tions, he says, had "a better-than-average rating." 5909. Chapman, Herman H. The iron and steel industries of the South, by H. H. Chapman with the collaboration of W. M. Adamson [and others] University, Ala., University of Alabama Press, 1953. 427 p. maps, diagrs. (Alabama University. Bureau of Business Research. Printed series, no. 17) 53-62620 HD9517.A2C45 Bibliography: p. [4i8]~423. A report occasioned by the approaching exhaus- tion of the high-grade Lake Superior ores, carried out with the collaboration of the Tennessee Valley Authority by a staff of geologists and economic statisticians. A general introduction reviews the iron and steel industry of the United States, includ- ing such aspects as ownership concentration, the effects of government policy, and the location of raw materials and producing centers. Part 2 examines the natural resources of the South, particularly the Southeast, and part 3 surveys the iron and steel in- dustries of the region, their history, recent trends, ownership, mining and operating problems, etc. Part 4 deals with the market for the Southern iron and steel processing and fabricating industries. Part 5 considers possibilities and offers very tentative con- clusions concerning the future of the industry in the South. 5910. Cole, Arthur Harrison. The American wool manufacture. Cambridge, Harvard Univer- sity Press, 1926. 2 v. illus. 26-5173 HD9895.C6 Bibliography: v. 2, p. 303-314. This remains the standard work tracing the growth of the wool industry from its colonial in- fancy to the mass production of the large-scale modern factory. The author gives a full account of processes, technological advances, changing in- dustrial form, markets, foreign competition, the labor force, and the influence of the tariff upon development. His sources are cited, with frequent elaboration of detail, in long footnotes. The first volume covers the household industry of the colonies, with handicraft fullers, carders, or weavers playing a minor part; the first factories with the newly invented power-driven machinery introduced from England in the 1790's; the period of transition down to 1830, with Americans making technical advances in power looms, and especially in the "carde ameri- caine," the condensing apparatus for wool-carding invented by John Goulding in the 1820's; and the development of distributing agencies stimulated by expanding communications and the Western market. Between 1840 and 1870 the industry increased be- tween 12- and 15-fold, in spite of a heavy increase in importation of wool and worsted. The period of industrial maturity, after 1870, to which Dr. Cole's second volume is devoted, is concerned largely with the protection by tariff of the American indus- try from foreign competition and innovation. Dur- ing this half-century new processes as a rule were introduced from abroad, the American innovations residing in the standardization of the fabric and in mass-production techniques, which have permitted high-quality production on a large scale. 591 1. Davis, Pearce. The development of the American glass industry. Cambridge, Har- vard University Press, 1949. xiv, 316 p. (Harvard economic studies, v. 86) 49-9758 HD9623.U45D3 Bibliography: p. [2951-305. An academic study by a professor in the depart- ment of business and economics at the Illinois Insti- tute of Technology, reviewing approximately 300 years of American glassmaking. The introductory chapter of general history begins with Pliny, the second chapter with a glass-making venture in Vir- ginia in 1608 or 1609. A chronological account of development to the time of the Civil War is followed by an outline and evaluation of tariff policy from 1820 to i860. In the succeeding period the author is concerned largely with improved processes, labor problems, and tariff policy, and gives separate chap- ters to individual branches: the window glass indus- try, the glass container industry, pressed and blown glass, and plate glass. The writing is for a profes- sional audience. 5912. Dutton, William Sherman. Du Pont; one hundred and forty years. [3d ed.] New York, Scribner, 195 1. 408 p. illus. 52-648 HD9651.9.D8D8 1 95 1 Qo6 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES The brilliant record of the Du Pont Company of Wilmington, Del., founded by the French emigre Eleuthere Irenee du Pont in 1802 for the manufac- ture of gunpowder, and now holding world leader- ship in production based on chemical research, is in no way dimmed by the writer of this "business biography." He states forthrightly that his account is an "inside" view, "the Du Pont Company as seen by Du Pont men." From romantic scenes of family history in Revolutionary France to the end of the First World War, the narrative reads like a novel through whose pages move the lofty and dramatic figures of four generations of Du Ponts. Powder- masters and patriots, they followed, at least until the 1870's, "a road of work, sweat, and grimy hands." With the development of industrial dynamite and the formation in 1872 of the Powder Trust, and guided by the organizing genius of General Henry A. Du Pont and the inventor's vision of Lammot Du Pont, the road turned into a network leading to new regions, the hands to the cleaner work of sign- ing checks that bought up patents and competitors. The tremendous contribution of Du Pont to Allied victory in the First World War is here emphasized with statistics that controvert any hint of "war profits." From 191 9 on, the story becomes a dra- matic description of the new fields opened in Du Pont's great research laboratories: dyes, plastics, cellulose, rayon, nylon, cellophane — altogether more than 10,000 separate items, "a bewildering array of chemical progeny contributed to the welfare and security of the United States in peace, and also to its great might in war." 5913. History of Standard Oil Company (New Jersey) [New York] Harper, 1955-56. 2 v. illus. 55~8°55 HD2769.O4H5 "A study by the Business History Foundation, Inc." Contents. — [1] Pioneering in big business, 1882-1911, by R. W. Hidy and M. E. Hidy.— 2. The resurgent years, 1911-1927, by G. S. Gibb and E. H. Knowlton. In 1947 the Standard Oil Company of New Jersey granted unrestricted access to the company's records and complete freedom of publication to the Business History Foundation, as well as a substantial gift of money. The volume by the Hidys is the first in a series of thoroughly documented histories and studies, and narrates the general history of the Company from its organization in 1882, through the period when it became the holding company and operating unit for the complex of enterprises popularly known as Standard Oil, to the trustbust- ing decision of the U.S. Supreme Court in 191 1 which lopped off 33 affiliates. The corporation's confidence is justified, for what emerges is no dia- bolical conspiracy, but a group of able administrators clearheadedly pursuing the logic of capitalistic en- terprise, and reducing costs through the economies of large-scale operations, while keeping profits high through differentiation of products, and the devel- opment of new producing areas, new machinery, and new processes. Naturally, men of their generation were slow to learn "that dominance in power brought the responsibility of applying that power with restraint." The second volume of this series, The Resurgent Years, iyii-igij, appeared in 1956. In it much attention is given to labor policy, new processes, and the search for sources of oil abroad. The list of companies through which the Standard Oil Company (New Jersey) operated in the United States and abroad in these 17 years fills an appendix (p. 631-664). They fall into 3 groups: 60 closely affiliated, whose earnings were consolidated with those of New Jersey Standard; 58 non-consolidated, in which New Jersey held stock; and 124 affiliates of the "consolidated" companies, over which the New Jersey company exercised remote control. 5914. McLean, John G., and Robert W. Haigh. The growth of intergrated oil companies. Boston, Division of Research, Graduate School of Business Administration, Harvard University, 1954. xxiv, 728 p. illus. 54-6417 HD9565.M282 A survey of the oil industry with regard to its predominant structural form, vertical integration. This is defined as "the process of increasing the number of distribution and processing steps in an industry's cycle of activities which are under the ownership, management, or control of a single company." To such a structure the oil industry, with its comparatively simple steps from natural resource to consumer — production of crude oil, trans- portation, refining, marketing — is especially adapted. The authors offer this contribution to the technical study of consolidation in industry as a case history, establishing the underlying facts through a detailed examination of integration decisions with extensive statistical exhibits. Part 1 describes the situation in 1950, while the later parts are concerned with how it got that way. In parts 2 and 3 the industry is considered first as a whole and then through the particular cases of seven large integrated companies, four of them former components of the Standard Oil Trust. The last section, before a final summary, studies the decline of the small refining companies, which in 30 or 40 years sank from 28 to 15 percent of the total output. The writers avoid expression of "moral and economic judgment on the performance of the large integrated companies," but their facts suggest that the managements have been less con- cerned with maximum profits than with assurance of raw materials and markets. ECONOMIC LIFE / 9°7 5915. Nevins, Allan. John D. Rockefeller; the heroic age of American enterprise. New York, Scribner, 1940. 2 v. (683, 747 p.) illus. 41-649 CT275.R75N4 5916. Nevins, Allan. Study in power: John D. Rockefeller, industrialist and philanthropist. New York, Scribner, 1953. 2 v. (441, 501 p.) illus. 53-9394 CT275.R75N42 Bibliographical references included in "Notes" (v. 1, p. 403-441; v. 2, p. 437-466). "Bibliography of official documents": v. 2, p. 483-484. Two versions of the author's highly praised biography, in his long study for which he enjoyed full access to the Rockefeller family papers, as well as to those of some of Rockefeller's chief oppo- nents. The new version has been substantially shortened, especially in the part relating to Rocke- feller's early years, while new material is added on the benefactions; it is still, "emphatically," a biogra- phy, not a business history. From the author's objective viewpoint, and with the perspective of almost half a century since Ida M. Tarbell wrote her History of the Standard Oil Company (New York, McClure, Phillips, 1904. 2 v.), the destructive and exploitative aspects of the swift transformation of the American economy from 1865 to 1900 are far outweighed by the importance of the final construc- tive gains. "Had our pace been slower and our achievement weaker . . . the free world might have lost the First World War and most certainly would have lost the Second." The two parts of Rocke- feller's career, the organization of a colossal industry and the distribution of an enormous fortune (his gifts in organized undertakings which have set models for philanthropy ran to 550 million dollars), Professor Nevins sees as "dominated by logic and plan." "Innovator, thinker, planner, bold entrepre- neur, [Rockefeller] was above all an organizer — one of the master organizers of the era ... By vir- tue of this organizing power, backed by keenness of mind, tenacity of purpose, and firmness of character, he looms up as one of the most impressive figures of the century which his lifetime spanned." 5917. Rickard, Thomas Arthur. A history of American mining, by T. A. Rickard. New York, McGraw-Hill, 1932. 419 p. illus. (A. I. M. E. series) 32-20628 TN23.R45 A general history, published under the auspices of the American Institute of Mining and Metallurgical Engineers, and adapted to a student audience. The author had been editor of several mining journals, and his style combines feature-story writing, suited to tales of discovery and exploits of pioneers, with the reportage of economic facts. The treatment is neither chronological nor systematic, and gives evi- dence of being a reworking of separate articles. Gold, silver, copper, and lead are the metals on which attention is focused. The chapters are for the most part on regions; California, Alaska, Arizona, the Comstock Lode of Nevada, Lake Superior, the Great Salt Lake, the Black Hills of South Dakota, Butte, and other mountain areas are glanced at in relation to prospecting and their celebrated mining enterprises. One chapter tells of "The Great Dia- mond Hoax," when in 1872 two prospectors "salted" a mysterious region vaguely located in Arizona, Colorado, or Wyoming, and realized large sums from excited investors in the East. 5918. Schroeder, Gertrude G. The growth of major steel companies, 1900-1950. Bald- more, Johns Hopkins Press, 1953. 244 p. illus. (The Johns Hopkins University studies in historical and political science, ser. 70, no. 2) 53-i 1 175 HD9515.S35 H31.J6, ser. 70, no. 2 Bibliography: p. 237-239. The author of this doctoral thesis has devised techniques of statistical analysis through which she studies 12 major firms in the iron and steel industry that together control over 80 percent of the coun- try's total steel capacity. She approaches them in two groups: first the "Big Three" which account for over half the total, U. S. Steel, Bethlehem Steel, and Republic Steel, all formed through major mergers near the turn of the century; and then nine smaller independent firms. For each she gives a brief narra- tive history and then discusses factors of external expansion through consolidation and acquisition, internal expansion through additions to plant and equipment, and the direction, purposes, and financ- ing of the expansion. She analyzes the income of each firm and its distribution, with illustrative tables cf gross and fixed assets, long-term investment, and distribution through taxes, reinvestment and divi- dends. Her summary points out similarities and dissimilarities between the firms and attempts to establish objective patterns of growth. The techno- logical processes of iron and steel production, rather than the economic aspects, form the subject matter of a series of articles written for the trade journal Steel, and arranged in book form by an associate editor of that publication, Dan Reebel: ABC of Iron and Steel, 6th ed. (Cleveland, Penton Pub. Co., 1950. xv, 423 p.). The 27 separate papers are by as many experts — executives, technical directors, or research consultants of large firms. The first two explain the mining, reserves, transportation, and handling of iron ore. Other chapters describe operations involved in the production of scrap iron, 908 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES pig iron, open-hearth steel, Bessemer steel, etc., and in the construction of various finished products, from bars to high-alloy steel castings. There is a subject index. 5919. Tryon, Rolla Milton. Household manufac- tures in the United States, 1640-1860; a study in industrial history. Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1917. 413 p. tables. 17-13932 HC105.T7 Bibliography: p. 377-397. An economico-political study of clothing and other textile products, house furnishings and ne- cessities, and utensils and tools for home and farm, as made in the households of America before the triumph of mechanization. Throughout the Colo- nial period, except for a few expensive imported luxuries, almost everything was made at home. This condition persisted on the frontier well into the mid-i9th century, although in the towns the replacement of homemade articles by goods made by workers in shops or by machines in factories was well under way by 18 10 and generally com- plete by i860. Professor Tryon analyzes the po- litical and economic factors affecting home indus- tries during the Colonial period, and traces the gradual but steady changes occurring from the Revolution to the first census of manufactures in 1810 (when, according to a table reproduced from "notably fallible census figures," the total value of textiles made in the home was as twelve to one against those made elsewhere). The household products are viewed, with some description of the techniques and ingenious contraptions used by our ancestors. Finally the stages of the transition to commercial production are studied, with statistics that reveal the final passing of home industry as a factor in the economic life of the country. E. Transportation: General 5920. Barger, Harold. The transportation indus- tries, 1889-1946; a study of output, employ- ment, and productivity. New York, National Bureau of Economic Research, 1951. xvi, 288 p. diagrs. (Publications of the National Bureau of Economic Research, no. 51) 51-2346 HE203.B3 A statistical analysis of changes in commercial transportation over nearly 60 years, including the Second World War period. The author, an expert of the National Bureau of Economic Research, uses tables and charts to show comparative amounts of traffic carried, the roles of the various agencies of transportation, the number of employees, their in- dividual output, and the trends of technological progress which account for the greatly expanded productivity. From 1889 to 1939 the combined passenger and freight traffic of all commercial carriers increased fivefold, and from 1939 to 1946 it almost doubled again. Output per worker in 1946 was four times the 1889 level, and productivity from 1889 to 1939 increased at an average annual rate of 2.2 percent, most strongly in the newer in- dustries of airlines and pipelines. The first part of the text surveys the whole field of transportation for hire; the second separately treats five industries: steam railroads, electric railroads, pipelines, water- ways, and airlines. Basic statistical tables for the five industries are given in appendixes, as are the techniques of measurement used. The work is a companion volume to Hultgren's below. 5921. Dearing, Charles L., and Wilfred Owen. National transportation policy. Washing- ton, Brookings Institution, 1949. xiv, 459 p. 49-11772 HE206.D4 A critical study of the role of the Federal Govern- ment in relation to transportation, undertaken at the request of the Hoover Commission on govern- mental reorganization. The authors first examine Federal promotion of transportation facilities and services, such as control of airways, maintenance of airports, air-mail payments, comparable aid to trans- port on waterways and highways, and special needs for national defense. They then turn to the ques- tion of government regulatory action, centering at- tention on railroads. In conclusion they summarize what they regard as the defects of national trans- portation policy and make detailed recommenda- tions for reorganizing the Federal agencies involved. They consider that in neither the executive nor legis- lative branches of government is any overall view taken of transportation policy; that promotional activities are confused with regulatory measures; that the railroads are discriminated against by con- tinuing patterns of rate regulation set up to prevent monopoly in the days before the rise of heavy com- petition from highways and air transport. They recommend the establishment of a department of transportation, under which all Federal promotional, operating, and programing activities would be co- ordinated, and of a regulatory commission which would administer a revised program applicable to all forms of transportation. 5922. Hultgren, Thor. American transportation in prosperity and depression. [New York] National Bureau of Economic Research, 1948. xxxiii, 397 p. diagrs. (National Bureau of Eco- nomic Research. Studies in business cycles, no. 3) 49-643 HE2751.H84 "Note on sources": p. 383-386. The Bureau's contributions on business cycles were initiated in the 1920's by its director, Wesley C. Mitchell, the chief exponent of business cycle theory. In this study railroads receive major atten- tion, as the chief agency of transportation for which statistics are available to illustrate cyclical changes over a large number of years. Of the 12 chapters, 10 relate to aspects of the railroad industry, 1 to all "Other than Steam Railroad Transportation," and 1 to future prospects for booms or depressions. Over 150 tables and many graphs give statistics of freight carried, passenger-miles, traffic units, number of workers, man-hours, revenue, etc. Data begin with 1882, when a record of tonnage handled by all rail- roads was initiated, and for the most part end with 1938; "the trough in that year was followed by one of the longest of all business cycles, swollen in am- plitude and extended in time by a great war." The writer considers it unduly optimistic to expect un- broken full employment and prosperity through the next few decades. 5923. Meyer, Balthasar Henry, ed. History of transportation in the United States before i860; prepared under the direction of Balthasar Henry Meyer, by Caroline E. MacGill and a staff of collaborators. Washington, Carnegie Institution of Washington, 1917. xi, 678 p. 5 maps. (Car- negie Institution of Washington. Publication no. 215 C) 17-17412 HE203.M4 HC101.C75, no. 3 Bibliography: p. 609-649. Number 3 in the large-scale series of Contributions to American economic history prepared by the Department of Economics and Sociology of the Carnegie Institution (see also Clark, no. 5904). Dr. Meyer, an authority on railroad legislation and a member of the Interstate Commerce Commission, acted as editor, the text being put together by Miss MacGill of the University of Wisconsin from spe- cial studies, published or in manuscript, furnished by over 20 contributors. All their material, much of which is regional in scope, was used; it is rich in details of local records, descriptions of construc- tion, tables of costs and of goods carried, and the like; but the volume as a whole lacks the unity of a closely-studied work from a single hand. It is ECONOMIC LIFE / 909 heavily documented, with long footnotes and chapter bibliographies drawing extensively on regional sources. The first half of the text is on land routes and waterways before the coming of the railroads: roads, trails, and highways; rivers and canals. The second half is mostly railroad history, again in large part by regions: New England, New York, the Middle Adantic States, the South and "the West." The latter is, of course, the Middle West, for the book ends with railways to the Pacific still in the project stage. 5924. Van Metre, Thurman W. Transportation in the United States. 2d ed. Brooklyn, Foun- dation Press, 1950. 401 p. maps. (University business-economics series) 50-14639 HE203.V3 1950 Includes reading lists. A textbook by the professor (now emeritus) of transportation in the Graduate School of Business of Columbia University, for use in general transpor- tation courses, covering the entire field of domestic transportation, with the greatest space devoted to railroads. The initial chapters are historical, glanc- ing at early highways and canals, and going more deeply into railroads: their beginnings, development, present system, consolidation, and mechanical ad- vances. "Other agencies" are lumped: motor vehicles, airplanes, shipping, and pipe lines. The business of transportation is explained, again with chief emphasis on railroads; here are covered organi- zation; the carriage of freight, passengers, express packages, and mail; and, cursorily, their financial aspects. The third part treats shippers and carriers, and rates and theories of ratemaking. In the last part the history of Federal regulation is reviewed, with the stress once more on railroads. Professor Van Metre sees litde hope for a speedy achievement of coordination and cooperation in the transporta- tion business. He finds one important reason for this in "the profound distrust with which railroad interests and the 'government' usually regard each other"; he views darkly the possible solution of government ownership. 5925. Westmeyer, Russell E. Economics of trans- portation. New York, Prentice-Hall, 1952. 741 p. 52-9966 HE203.W4 In 1950 the railroads of America were still carry- ing about 60 percent of the nation's freight, although passenger traffic had shifted heavily (over 84 per- cent) to the private automobile. Professor West- meyer concludes his introductory chapter with two statistical tables published annually since 1937 by the Interstate Commerce Commission, showing the volume of intercity traffic handled by various agen- cies — railroads, motor carriers, inland waterways, 910 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES pipelines, airlines, and private autos. His book, a text for advanced study, interprets the significance of these figures chiefly in terms of economic and public utility aspects of the transportation field. As in all general studies of this subject, railroads have pride of place, because of their longer history and greater area of controversy as between public and private interests, as well as their continuing pre- dominance as carriers; furthermore, the patterns developed for their regulation have formed the basis for regulating the newer agencies of transport. In a concluding analysis of the basic transportation problems of the United States, and canvassing of possible solutions, the writer emphasizes the "crying need" for a comprehensive national policy, in which railroads, airlines, motor carriers, and the rest would be coordinated as parts of a national transportation system. F. Transportation: Special 5926. Bruce, Alfred W. The steam locomotive in America; its development in the twentieth century. New York, Norton, 1952. 443 p. illus. 52-14477 TJ605.B78 A technological history, "with special reference to improvements in basic elements of the steam loco- motive, different forms of power transmission from steam cylinder to rails, and the development of individual locomotive types in both main-line and special services." Except for a chapter on early his- tory and two chapters outlining the development of steam locomotives and of power transmission from 1901 to 1950, the arrangement is functional rather than chronological. A chapter on the steam locomo- tive industry reviews the larger commercial building firms, and information on companies and output as well as technical matters is given in tables and charts. The illustrations are photographs of locomotive types and sketches of their basic elements, such as fireboxes, cylinders, and mainrods. In the last chap- ter the author, himself a steam locomotive builder, explains today's competitors, among them the diesel- electric engine which is now forcing the steam loco- motive into retirement. A popular account of the engineering aspects of railroads is presented by Robert Selph Henry, vice-president of the Associa- tion of American Railroads, in This Fascinating Railroad Business, 3d ed., rev. (Indianapolis, Bobbs- Merrill, 1946. 521 p.). The first chapters describe the rails and the business of laying them out, the construction of bridges and tunnels, systems of rail control, etc. Next the steam engines in their various phases are explained, and the types of cars. There are chapters on railroad shops and their work, stations, supplies, the freight service and its growth, and the principles of ratemaking. Organization and management are described in general terms. An "Anatomy" of American railroads lists the Class I lines and their intercorporate relationships, with brief statements of ownership and miles of track. Statistics are of 1943. 5927. Cochran, Thomas C. Railroad leaders, 1845-1890; the business mind in action. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1953. 564 p. maps. (Studies in entrepreneurial history) 52-9383 HE2752.C6 The author and his wife have searched special collections and the archives of several major rail- roads, and analyzed the letter files of 61 managing executives of the chief railroads of the country be- tween 1845 and 1890. The opinions expressed on business concepts are offered as "a cross section of the ethics or 'spirit' of developing capitalism," as well as new material for railroad history. ("Irre- sponsible" operators are excluded.) Sixteen chap- ters are devoted to separate aspects of the analysis, such as "Ownership and Control," "Innovation," and "Some Social Attitudes." These account for less than half the text. The rest consists of samples of correspondence of the 61 executives, from William R. Ackerman of the Illinois Central to George Henry Watrous of the New York, New Haven, and Hart- ford. Brief biographical data head each selection. In 1950 there were published two special histories of individual railroad systems. Main Line of Mid- America; the Story of the Illinois Central, by Carl- ton J. Corliss (New York, Creative Age Press. 490 p.) is written to commemorate the centennial of the company's charter, obtained in 185 1. It is a full and well-rounded account of the conception, build- ing, organization, and operation of the Illinois Central. Interest beyond that of railroad specialists is supplied by the inclusion of many personal stories, from a Lincoln anecdote to the "Saga of Casey Jones." The other work is John Debo Galloway's The First Transcontinental Railroad; Central Pa- cific, Union Pacific (New York, Simmons-Board- man. 319 p.). The author was a railroad engineer, and his book concentrates on engineering aspects: the background, projects and surveys, and location and construction of the two great lines during "a decade of heartbreaking effort." In 1863 the Central Pacific was begun in Sacramento, the Union Pacific in Omaha, and the two met in 1869 at Promontory, Utah, linking East with West. 5928. Harlow, Alvin F. Old towpaths; the story of the American canal era. New York, Appleton, 1926. 403 p. illus. 26-22668 TC623.H3 Bibliography: p. 391-403. A history of the now almost completely aban- doned artificial waterways which before the railroad age carried a heavy proportion of the nation's freight and played a crucial part in the opening of the interior. Most famous was the Erie Canal, "Clinton's Ditch," 364 miles long, built in 1817-25 under Governor DeWitt Clinton of New York. "It directed the movement of populations, fixed the destinies of cities, States and whole sections of America and left traces, still visible, of its handiwork upon the nation." The peak of canal-building en- thusiasm came in the 1820's, when over 800 miles of canals were opened to navigation in New York, Pennsylvania, Delaware, and Maryland, with 1300 miles more nearing completion in 1830; by mid- century the system was already passing. Mr. Har- low chronicles, with detail of local and human in- terest, the state-by-state construction of canals, their operation, and their gradual replacement by rail- roads. "Life on the Canal" and "Traveling by Canal" are fascinating chapters of social history. When the book was written, "the last of their race," a two-boat "fleet" drawn by three horses on the tow- path, still moved on the Delaware and Raritan Canal from New Brunswick to Trenton. The ride is described: "Probably nowhere else in all the neu- rotic whirl of our present-day business and social life may we find so real a motion picture of America as it was a century ago." Most of the delightful illustrations are contemporary prints. 5929. Hunter, Louis C. Steamboats on the West- ern rivers; an economic and technological history, by Louis C. Hunter with the assistance of Beatrice Jones Hunter. Cambridge, Harvard Uni- versity Press, 1949. xiii, 684 p. illus. (Studies in economic history) 50—5138 HE627.H8 A monumental survey of steam navigation on the Ohio, the Mississippi, the Missouri, the Arkansas, and their tributaries, footnoted exhaustively from a wide variety of documents and reports, journals and newspapers, histories and travel memoirs. The first steamboat, the New Orleans, commanded by Nicho- las Roosevelt, made the voyage from Pittsburgh to New Orleans in 1811-12, and by 1817 traffic by steam was well established on the Western rivers. Dr. Hunter presents its rise, flowering, and decline on a topical rather than a chronological basis. His ECONOMIC LIFE / 911 work has three parts: "The Steamboat as an Economic Instrument," which includes the intro- duction, structural evolution, and mechanical de- velopment of the boats and the tezhniques of their operation, the improvement of rivers, and the gory chapter of accidents; "The Steamboat as a Business Institution" including organization and finances, the experiences of passengers in cabins and on deck, and crews and officers; and finally, "Peak and De- cline," carrying developments through the Civil War and the fatal postwar competition from the railroads. 5930. Hutchins, John G. The American maritime industries and public policy, 1789-1914; an economic history. Cambridge, Mass., Harvard University Press, 1941. xxi, 627 p. (Harvard eco- nomic studies, v. 71) A 41-3915 VM23.H85 Bibliography: p. [583]-6o6. A substandal history of shipbuilding and the shipping industries in America, with special empha- sis on national maritime policy. The first part is on the general question of public regulation of mari- time industries, with two chapters respecdvely on policy and techniques. Part 2, chapters 3-1 1, study comprehensively the era of wooden ships and small- scale enterprise, covering timber resources, methods of shipbuilding, the industry in Colonial days and from 1789-1830, the great shipbuilding boom of 1830-56, and the international position of our mer- chant marine from 1830 to the Civil War. The third part is on metal ships and large-scale enterprise, 1 863-19 14. Here attention is paid to international competition, the organization of the big shipbuild- ing industries and shipping lines, and government controls, contracts, and subsidies. The long bibliog- raphy includes sections on official documents, Fed- eral, state, and foreign, and on general works by subject. 5931. Jordan, Philip D. The National Road. Indianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill, 1948. 442 p. illus. (The American trails series) 48-6393 HE356.C8J6 "Bibliographical note": p. 415-431. A narrative history of the great Cumberland Road, the first turnpike constructed by the Federal Govern- ment. The trail followed by the young surveyor, Major Washington, and by Braddock's army was projected by Act of Congress of 1806 as a national highway, to run from Cumberland, Md., to the fast-opening Old Northwest. Built as far as Wheel- ing by 1818, it was pushed on to incorporate in Ohio the pioneer road known as Zane's Trace. Political opposidon in the East to the "mismanagement" of Federal funds held up construction of the western half; in Jackson's time maintenance and repairs 912 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES were taken over by the States, and the building and ownership of the western part were later assumed by Indiana and Illinois. By the time its broken-stone surfacing had been laid to Vandalia, 111., canals and railroads had already cut into its importance as chief route of travel to the Mississippi. In the 1920's this importance was revived in U.S. Route 40. Mr. Jordan's account was written before that, too, had waned, overshadowed by the Pennsylvania Turn- pike. The sources for his spirited if none too clearly arranged study include many personal jour- nals and local records, and he enlivens his economic and political account of the building and use of the road with colorful anecdotes of frontier days. Not pioneer roads but the means of travel over them form the subject of another lively contribution to transportation history, Six Horses, by Captain Wil- liam Banning and George Hugh Banning (New York, Century, 1930. 410 p.). The first-named author had himself been a stagecoach driver for Western Union. The stories assembled in this volume are mostly of individual heroes of the days of overland travel to the Pacific by stagecoach. The first illustration is a modern photograph of "The Old Typical," familiar from a thousand "Westerns," the Concord Coach, drawn by six horses along a prairie road. 5932. Kennan, George. E. H. Harriman, a biogra- phy. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1922. 2 v. illus. 22-9508 HE2754.H2K36 The most detailed biography of Edward Henry Harriman (1 848-1909), who directed the policies of the Union Pacific from 1898 until his death, and extended its control over other lines so as to create an imposing railroad empire. The author, a journalist who had earlier written on several con- troversial phases of Harriman's career, here vig- orously defends "certain transactions which, during Mr. Harriman's life, were widely misrepresented or misunderstood." Much of these volumes is devoted to rebutting accusations against the finan- cier growing out of the stock market crisis of 1901, the New York State investigation of the Equitable Life Assurance Society, of which Harriman had been a director, and the Interstate Commerce Commis- sion's investigation of his purchases of railroad stock in 1906-7. Kennan of course shared in the general appreciation of Harriman's extraordinary mastery of railroad management and finance, which had been applied to smaller New York State lines and to the Illinois Central for two decades before he assumed command of the Union Pacific. Besides railroad matters, the book tells of the boys' club which Har- riman founded and maintained, his scientific ex- pedition to Alaska in 1899, and his bequest of wild lands along the Hudson River to the State of New York. Two concluding chapters eulogize the ty- coon's character and business methods, and quote tributes from friends and colleagues. 5933. Kirkland, Edward Chase. Men, cities and transportation, a study in New England his- tory, 1820-1900. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1948. 2 v. illus., maps. (Studies in economic history) 48-7564 HE207.K5 "Published in cooperation with the Committee on Research in Economic History, Social Science Research Council." "The story of eight decades, wherein New Eng- land shifted from a network of waterways and roads to one of steel rails and railroad consolidation" is here told by a professor of history at Bowdoin Col- lege. His scheme of reference is comprehensive, taking in turnpikes, coastal shipping, waterways and canals, and the rise of the steamboat, as well as "the new world of the railroad." Professor Kirkland's research into local and institutional records has been deep, and the flavor of New England history permeates his broad survey. He examines many as- pects of railroad history: the "railroad scheme" which began indoctrination in the new mode of transport, the first railroads of Vermont, New Hampshire, and Maine, the routes to New York, regulation, crises, failures, monopoly, and the final consolidation of 1900 into three main systems: the Boston and Albany, Boston and Maine, and New York, New Haven, and Hartford. There are chap- ters on railroad commissions, financing, rates and services, labor, and leaders. Illustrations are from contemporary portraits or records. The result is the most thorough and illuminating regional study of transportation history that has been made. 5934. Labatut, Jean, and Wheaton J. Lane, eds. Highways in our national life; a symposium. Princeton, Princeton University Press, 1950. xvi, 506 p. illus., maps. 50-7728 HE355.L3 "Under the editorial sponsorship of the Bureau of Urban Research, Princeton University." Bibliography: p. 476-493. Forty-five specialists, including historians, so- ciologists, economists, engineers, landscape archi- tects, city planners, and of course officials, contribute these essays covering practically all phases of the highways of our "nation on wheels." The first nine are historical, following die road as a fundamental institution of mankind from the prehistoric trails of early man to the age of the automobile. The rest of the papers are analytical, beginning with a socio- logical group which examine the effects of spatial mobility on American urban, suburban, and rural society, as well as on relations across national bor- ders. There follow papers on economic and legal ECONOMIC LIFE / 913 aspects, and on the problems of highway engineering and highway operation. Mr. Labatut in his final summation calls for a better sense of proportion re- garding highways — "more horse sense brought up to the HP level." 5935. Lane, Wheaton J. Commodore Vanderbilt; an epic of the steam age. New York, Knopf, 1942. xiv, 357, xii, p. illus. 42-36093 CT275.V23L3 "Bibliographical note": p. [326]~357. In 1810 young Cornelius Van Derbilt (1794- 1877), son of a Dutch farmer on Staten Island, bor- rowed from his mother $100 for a small boat and started a ferry service to Manhattan. Using his tiny earnings as venture capital in coast-wise ship- ping, "a field notorious for ruthless competition and crude trickery," he built up fleets which controlled the Eastern coast and by the Nicaraguan transit linked New York with the Pacific. In 1853 the "Commodore," now one of America's richest men, took a pleasure cruise in European waters on his yacht, the North Star, was feted extensively, and was eulogized in the London press: "It is time that the millionaire should cease to be ashamed of having made his fortune. It is time that parvenu should be looked upon as a word of honor." By the sixties the septuagenarian Vanderbilt's interests had shifted from ships to railways, and from his epic battles in the stock market with Daniel Drew, Jim Fisk, Jay Gould, and the other giant speculators of his day, he emerged in control of the New York Central and Hudson River, as well as lines to Chicago. This biography of the self-made builder of steamship and railroad empires is focused on the business aspects of a spectacular career. By a Princeton specialist in transportation history, and based on such primary sources as exist, supplemented by a "judicious" use of secondary works, it is full, readable, and without marked sensationalism. 5936. Morison, Samuel Eliot. The maritime his- tory of Massachusetts, 1783-1860. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 194 1. 420 p. 41-27782 H3161.M4M6 1 94 1 Bibliography: p. 399-[4io]. 5937. Albion, Robert Greenhalgh. Square-riggers on schedule; the New York sailing packets to England, France, and the cotton ports. Princeton, Princeton University Press, 1938. 371 p. illus. 38-16737 FIE767.N5A7 Bibliography: p. [345]~353- Professor (since 195 r, Rear Admiral, Ret.) Mori- son's history of Massachusetts ships and seamen, merchants and shipowners, shipbuilders, and the towns that lived by the East-India and China trade, the "sacred codfish," or whaling, really deserves a place on the shelves of seafaring adventure rather than among ponderous and often technical works on "transportation." To be sure, it is solid and well- rounded history of an important era and mode of commerce, with appendix of statistics and bibliog- raphy, but his material is of the stuff of romance, and his writing — as he said in his 1921 preface — "for your enjoyment." The 1941 edition has a supple- ment of letters received from readers, of "correction and supplement"; the "supplement" is largely anecdotal, childhood memories or family seafaring tradition, and the "corrections" are the technicali- ties of the devotees of sail. The author himself is sailorman and prose poet as well as historian. In his final word picture he evokes nostalgically the vision "vouchsafed our fathers, when a California clipper ship made port after a voyage around the world." With the passing of the clipper came to an end the maritime history of Massachusetts, as distinct from that of America. "It was a glorious ending! Never, in these United States, has the brain of man con- ceived, or the hand of man fashioned, so perfect a thing as the clipper ship." Another noted American maritime historian, Professor Albion of Princeton University, undertook an intensive survey of the history of the port of New York (no. 5951). Square- Riggers on Schedule is a detailed expansion of part of the material covered in the larger work. It is an exhaustive research study of the earliest packet lines, combining narrative with well-documented facts and figures, and enlivened by picturesque and romantic anecdote. Illustrations are well-chosen contempo- rary maritime prints and portraits. 5938. Morris, Lloyd R., and Kendall Smith. Ceil- ing unlimited, the story of American aviation from Kitty Hawk to supersonics. New York, Mac- millan, 1953. 417 p. illus. 53-11423 TL521.M58 The writers produced this book to coincide with the 50th anniversary of powered flight. It is a popular history of inventors, plane designs, flyers, and the achievements of aviation in peace and war. The business aspects of the aeronautics industry re- ceive slight attention. Part 1, "Dawn of the Aerial Age," is almost entirely devoted to the Wright Brothers, and begins at Kitty Hawk with the first plane raised by its own power for a 59-second flight in 1903. Part 2, "Men Try Their Wings," con- tinues with the Wrights, Curtiss, and other experi- menters, and with patents and early flights. The airplane was ready for the First World War, its part in which is chronicled in part 3, "War in the Skies," ending with a chapter on the "dishonored prophet," General Billy Mitchell. The interwar years were "The Era of Expansion," and here gov- ernment policy, the organization of aircraft firms 431240—60- -59 914 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES and airlines, and questions of compedtion versus monopoly share the interest with the record-making flights of many pilots, "Lindbergh and His Contem- poraries." The last part of the story, "The Second World War and After," pictures America in the age of air travel when the "spaceship" is no longer sci- ence fantasy but an experimental problem. The many excellent photographs are grouped in sections following the five parts. 5939. Nevins, Allan. Ford. By Allan Nevins with the collaboration of Frank Ernest Hill. New York, Scribner, 1954-57. 2 v> * uus - 54-6305 CT275.F68N37 Bibliography: v. 1, p. 653-664. Contents. — 1. The times, the man, the com- pany. — 2. Expansion and challenge, 1915-1933. The Ford Archives at Dearborn contain the larg- est collection of Fordiana, as well as of Company records, in existence. All has been opened to the two distinguished authors for the unlimited research needed for this monumental work, which is at once full biography of the eccentric genius Ford and detailed history of the Ford Motor Company — in essence, through the Company's affiliations and ri- valries, a history of the automotive industry, and of "mass production [which] has changed the linea- ments of our economic and social life more pro- foundly than any other single element in the recent history of civilization." Ford: the Times, the Man, the Company covers the years through 1915, de- scribing Ford's childhood and early life; the epoch of pioneering in horseless carriages; Ford's first ex- periments with racing cars; the founding of the Company with Malcomson, Couzens, the Dodge Brothers, and others; and the Model A in 1903. The battle to bring the automobile within the reach of the common man was won in 1908 with the Model T, the epochmaking "ungraceful, bouncing, noisy, tough-looking, and endlessly useful new Ford." Then came victory over monopoly in the Selden patent suit, removal of the plant to High- land Park, and the revolutionary technology of the moving assembly line. The trinity of mass produc- tion, low prices (in 1914, $440), and high wages was consummated in 19 14 with the five-dollar day. The Sociological Department was established to inves- tigate the workers, mostly recent immigrants, as to their economic, social, and moral qualifications for the minimum wage. Up to that point the book is entirely factual, with documentation for almost every paragraph; it ends with analysis of Ford's character and the dangers implicit in his pater- nalistic control. Ford: Expansion and Challenge continues the work through the First World War and the twenties, "the crowded years of war, boom, and incipient depression." As before, the story of Ford, his associates, and the industry is told in fully rounded and absorbing detail as to techno- logical, social, political, and personal aspects. In his fervent faith in mass production, lower prices, and high wages as moulders of a better age, in his appearance and personality around which clustered anecdote and legend, in his place at the center of the "epochal controversy" between capitalism and so- cialism, Ford became a worldwide symbol of the second industrial revolution. His dictatorial sway as one of the last great despots of the industrial world made inevitable the comparison often drawn with Mussolini. "Happily, the Ford Motor Com- pany was far greater than its chief author. That complex and powerful corporation represented a pooling of the energies and brains of coundess men." Late in the same year as the first volume, which rep- resented "the best documentation and . . . the most complete work on the subject thus far attempted," there was published Roger Burlingame's Henry Ford, a Great Life in Brief (New York, Knopf, 1955 [i.e. 1954] 194 p.). A paperback edition was issued as a Signet key book by the New American Library in 1956 ([New York] 1943 p.). As con- cise as the Nevins and Hill volumes are detailed, the writer in his pointed pages has highlighted the essentials of the Ford epic and brilliantly interpreted the man who had called history bunk, and "never once allowed the impossibilides of the past to limit the possibilities of the future." 5940. Pound, Arthur. The turning wheel; the story of General Motors through twenty-five years, 1908-1933. Garden City, N.Y., Doubleday, Doran, 1934. xvi, 517 p. 34-6016 HD9710.U52P6 Bibliography: p. 491-499. The frontispiece of this anniversary volume is a medal by Norman Bel Geddes commemoradng the 25th birthday of the General Motors Corporation. The author, working from company records, has written a popular history of the firm and its prod- ucts — Oldsmobile, Buick, Oakland and Pontiac, and Cadillac; their consolidation in General Motors; the rise of Chevrolet and its merger with General Motors in 1918; and subsequent developments. He begins with two preliminary chapters on the prede- cessors of the automobile, given added interest by the amusing drawings by William Heyer with which the book is illustrated. He includes chapters on research and construction ("Body by Fisher"), on stockholder interest, marketing, financing and insurance for buyers, employee benefits, and public relations. The first appendix is a chronology of sig- nificant dates in the evolution of self-propelled vehicles and of General Motors; other appendixes are lists of officers and directors and notes on sub- sidiaries and affiliates. 5941. Smith, Henry Ladd. Airways abroad, the story of American world air routes. [Madi- son] University of Wisconsin Press, 1950. 355 p. illus. 50-14738 TL521.S52 The establishment of America's share of today's world-covering network of commercial airlines be- gan with government monopoly. Its first 10 years are the history of Pan American Airways, which was organized by Juan Trippe in 1927, and granted exclusive overseas airmail contracts. This "chosen instrument" policy permitted the line's great ex- pansion, its trans-Pacific service initiated in 1935, a trans- Adantic one in 1939, and a magnificent con- tribution during the war. Competition was called for in the Civil Aeronautics Act of 1938, and from then on the story of international airways becomes one of involved conflict, bilateral and multilateral, between rival lines, executive agencies, Congress, foreign airlines and the United States and foreign governments. The postwar industry has emerged from international conferences and Federal action as one of regulated competition at home and abroad, supervised by American authorities and the Inter- national Civil Aviation Organization. The present vivid account is focused on enterprises and policy- making; if not always crystal clear, the fault is the subject's rather than the author's. Each chapter is followed by references and a useful note on sources, a large proportion of which are Civil Aeronautics Board, Congressional, and ICAO documents. The writer had published an earlier history, similarly concerned with competition, financial intrigue, and government regulation: Airways; the History of Commercial Aviation in the United States (New York, Knopf, 1942. 430 p.). 5942. Taff, Charles A. Commercial motor trans- portation. Rev. ed. Homewood, 111., R. D. Irwin, 1955. 673 p. 55-9353 HE5623.T3_ 1955 A textbook on the industry of transportation by truck and bus, by a professor of transportation at the University of Maryland. The mushroom growth of the motor carrier during the last 30 years, the extension of hard-surfaced highways, and the methods of financing highways are outlined, with striking graphic illustration, in part 1. The bulk of the text is devoted to "property-carrying aspects," with chapters on the various types of trucks, their management and operations, classifica- tion, financing, rates and ratemaking, regulation and control by Federal and state governments, and ECONOMIC LIFE / 915 policies of the Interstate Commerce Commission, under whose authority trucks were brought by the Motor Carrier Act of 1935. Part 3 is on buses, with two chapters explaining the elements of intercity passenger operations, and one on urban bus transit. At the end is an 8-page bibliography. 5943. Wilson, George Lloyd, and Leslie A. Bryan. Air transportation. New York, Prentice- Hall, 1949. ix, 665 p. illus., maps. 49-49212 TL552.W48 A general treatment of the subject for students of the economic aspects of air transportation. The historical background and modern development of aviation, types of aircraft, airports and civil airways are outlined in the first part. The longer second part explains the system of commercial air trans- portation, domestic and international, carrying mail, passengers, and freight. Among the aspects dis- cussed are organization, services, rates and charges, coordination, safety, insurance, and employee and public relations. There is a short survey of the principal airlines of Europe, Asia, Africa, Austra- lasia, and the Western Hemisphere. The last chap- ters discuss government aid and regulation on the municipal, State, Federal, and international levels. The appendix is a digest of the "charter" of Ameri- can aviation, the Civil Aeronautics Act of 1938. The same field of business aspects is covered in Commer- cial Air Transportation, by Professor John H. Fred- erick of the University of Maryland, now in its fourth edition (Homewood, 111., R. D. Irwin, 1955. 547 p.). Less attention is paid to historical develop- ment and to international air transportation, and rather more to policies of the Civil Aeronautics Board and to the practical details of financing air- lines, handling passengers and cargo, etc. A bibli- ography follows the text, and the appendixes give the Act of 1938 and changes proposed in the Senate Bill of 1954. Last may be mentioned a specialized study of air transportation in relation to a single but important sector of fiscal policy: Richard W. Lind- holm's Public Finance of Air Transportation, a Study of Taxation and Public Expenditures in Re- lation to a Developing Industry (Columbus, Bureau of Business Research, College of Commerce and Administration, Ohio State University, 1948. 178 p.). This is a technical and statistical analysis of the effects of specific taxes and tax rates, which still amount to a substantial subsidy of air transport. The taxes are of four sorts: gasoline taxes, property taxes, taxes on corporate net income and capital stock, and social security taxes. The author offers a number of findings and recommendations, some of a general nature, some specific to the airlines. Ql6 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES G. Commerce: General 5944. Barger, Harold. Distribution's place in the American economy since 1869. Princeton, Princeton University Press, 1955. xviii, 222 p. diagrs. (National Bureau of Economic Research. General series, no. 58) 55-10677 HF3021.B3 Bibliography: p. 152-215. It has not infrequendy been noticed that today more people are needed to get food, clothes, and other commodities from the farmer or manufacturer to the customer than in the days of our grandfathers. This fact has been statistically demonstrated in im- pressive detail by Professor Barger and his staff, from sources whose enumeration requires over 60 pages. For the past three decades, they demonstrate, there has been little change in the merchant's share of the retail sales dollar. A sharp increase in the percentage of salesmen in the total labor force and a corresponding decline in the percentage of farm- ers, miners, factory workers, etc., have been balanced by a very much larger rise in output per manhour among the latter than among workers in the whole- sale and retail trades. Reliable figures were avail- able for these decades, but for the years before World War I the Bureau has had to piece together scraps of information. What emerges is the con- clusion that ever since the Civil War the role of the distributor has been rising in proportionate impor- tance and that of the producer falling, while the output of the latter has increased, just as in the last 30 years; and the buyer's dollar between 1869 and 1919 turned definitely, though slowly, in the direc- tion of the salesman. The Bureau presents these conclusions through tables, charts, and text ad- dressed to a professional audience. 5945. Converse, Paul D., and Harvey W. Huegy. The elements of marketing, by Paul D. Con- verse and Harry W. Huegy, with the collaboration of Robert V. Mitchell. 5th ed. New York, Pren- tice-Hall, 1952. 968 p. 52-8794 HF5415.C55 1952 In accordance with the great increase of workers in distribution recorded by Professor Barger (above), marketing has become increasingly a subject of study in American universities and business schools. This textbook, first published in 1921, has as au- thors and collaborator two full professors and an assistant professor of marketing of the University of Illinois. They begin with a definition of market- ing: it is often called distribution; it "makes goods and services more valuable by getting them where they are wanted" (place utilities), "when they are wanted" (time utilities), "and transferred to those people who want them" (possession utilities); a simplified definition says "marketing is the business of buying and selling." The various elements of the marketing process are then expounded in detail. Over 100 pages at the end set problems related to individual chapters, written in the concrete style of case histories: e. g., how the Orangeburg Com- pany pays its salesmen. Short bibliographies follow the chapters. That on "General Marketing" lists 30-odd works, of much the same character, a num- ber of them similarly going through periodic re- vision for class use. Typical are two, both revised since the present work appeared: Harold H. May- nard, Theodore N. Beckman, and William R. Davidson, Principles of Marketing, 6th ed. (New York, Ronald Press, 1957. 798 p.); and Charles F. Phillips and Delbert J. Duncan, Marketing; Prin- ciples and Methods, 3d ed. (Homewood, 111., R. D. Irwin, 1956. 789 p.). 5946. Heck, Harold J. Foreign commerce. New York, McGraw-Hill, 1953. 512 p. 52-11511 HF3031.H4 Four of the five parts into which this volume is divided deal with foreign commerce as an aspect of the economy of the United States, while the last part reviews intergovernmental organizations — the International Monetary Fund, International Bank, etc. — and international trade agreements. The transactions carried on abroad by American mer- chants, the services that facilitate them, and the con- ditions that restrict them are the focus of the study. First the significance of foreign commerce is exam- ined, wih a statistical analysis of the patterns of world trade. Export and import businesses are explained, and the parts played in connection with them by banks, brokers, transportation, insurance, postal services, government, and other agencies described. Financial considerations discussed in- clude balances of payments, foreign exchange, and foreign investments. The fourth part is on cus- toms, tariffs, restrictions on exports, and govern- ment promotion of foreign trade. The book is de- signed for college courses, with section headings within chapters and a 9-page bibliography. 5947. Humphrey, Don D. American imports. New York, Twentieth Century Fund, 1955. xviii, 546 p. diagrs. 55-8798 HF3031.H86 ECONOMIC LIFE / 917 This analysis of the "import deficit" of the United States was authorized in 1950 by the Twentieth Century Fund and the National Planning Associa- tion; as the statistical data in general reflect the scene of 1949, its importance is now largely his- torical. The American export surplus and the resulting worldwide dollar shortage are shown to result from the great expansion of domestic industry rather than from restrictions on products from abroad. The tariff, trade agreements, and other barriers to importation are historically reviewed, and a chapter contributed by Professor Calvin B. Hoover, a colleague of the author's at Duke Uni- versity, gives the viewpoint of the European exporter. Individual imports that might be increased are statistically studied — such raw materials as hides and skins, wool, fats, and oils; various agricultural items; minerals and petroleum; and "luxuries," tourism, and shipping. Domestic industries that might suffer thereby are shown to be "relatively stagnant, low-wage industries,'" such as fur felt hats, blue-mold cheese, handmade glass, and watches. The summing up ends with a policy statement by the NPA's Committee on International Policy. Its recommendations for a substantial reduction of the tariff and more liberal trade agreements are aimed at improvement of the economic health of the free world. A more recent and less technical study is by Samuel Lubell: The Revolution in World Trade and American Economic Policy (New York, Har- per, 1955. 143 p.). In an attempt to disprove the widespread "illusion" that lowering United States tariffs and removing international trade restrictions would go far to solve the world's economic prob- lems, the author analyzes the world picture. Asia's dollar crisis is caused by its greatly increased need for imports, he finds; the British troubles come from concentration on the sterling bloc; Western Eur- opean efforts are aimed at integrating the resources and markets of the overseas areas with the home countries; the trade policy of the Soviets is aimed above all at splitting the free world. He outlines certain desirable objectives and offers some sug- gestions for their attainment. 5948. Johnson, Emory R., and others. History of domestic and foreign commerce of the United States, by Emory R. Johnson, T[hurman] W. Van Metre, G[rover] G. Huebner, and D[avid] S. Hanchett. Washington, Carnegie Institution of Washington, 1915; reprinted 1922. 2 v. (363, 398 p.) maps. ([Carnegie Institution of Wash- ington. Publication no. 2 15 A]) 30-23704 HF3021.J6 1922 This valuable reference work is one of the notable series of Contributions to American economic his- tory sponsored by the Carnegie Institution's Depart- ment of Economics and Sociology (see also Clark, no. 5904; Meyer, no. 5923; Commons, no. 6033). The late Professor Johnson of the University of Pennsylvania, an expert on transportation, was editor, and contributed most of the first part, a history of commerce in the Colonial era and through the Revolution. Two chapters on fisheries and the coastwise trade in this period were by Dr. Van Metre, who was responsible also for the second and third parts, which complete volume 1: "Internal Commerce of die United States," and "The Coast- wise Trade," both extending from 1789 to the early 20th century. The second volume contains "The Foreign Trade of the United States since 1789," by Professor Huebner, with a preliminary chapter by Professor Johnson; "American Fisheries," by Dr. Van Metre; and "Government Aid and Commercial Policy," by Dr. Hanchett, with a chapter on tariff provisions by Dr. Huebner. The contributors were all on the faculty of the University of Pennsylvania. A number of unpublished monographs by other collaborators were used in preparing the final text. The work is heavily documented, with footnotes, a formal classified bibliography (v. 2, p. 363-386), and a bibliographical essay on sources (p. 352-362). 5949. Richert, Gottlieb Henry. Retailing, prin- ciples and practices. 3d ed. New York, Gregg Pub. Division, McGraw-Hill, 1954. 498 p. illus. 53-12060 HF5429.R52 1954 The writer is identified as a specialist in distrib- utive education of the U. S. Office of Education. In his preface explaining the need for teaching this subject he speaks of the retail store as "a romantic enterprise," as well as a complex business. The textbook is for the young person who intends to go to work in a store, and it is all the more concrete for that. It includes an account of the "Merchants of America — Hall of Fame" opposite the Chicago Merchandise Mart, and scattered throughout it are pictures and brief biographical sketches of Ameri- ca's most successful retail merchants. The chap- ters cover all aspects of the retail business, even to illustrations of "proper wrapping methods." An appendix lists trade associations. A comparable textbook addressed to college students is Retailing; Basic Principles, by Pearce C. Kelley and Norris B. Brisco, 3d ed. (Englewood Cliffs, N. J., Prentice- Hall, 1957. 620 p.). The authors are respectively a professor of marketing at the University of Okla- homa and the general operating manager of a large department store. A long bibliography (p. 585- 609), referring largely to periodical material, is arranged to follow the individual chapters, on such subjects as "Inventory and Stock Control," "Ef- fective Retail Personnel," and "That All-Important Person [the customer]." The standard textbook 918 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES on wholesaling is by Professor Theodore N. Beck- man of Ohio State University and Nathanael H. Engle, formerly assistant director of the U. S. Bureau of Foreign and Domestic Commerce: Whole- saling, Principles and Practice, rev. ed. (New York, Ronald Press, 1951. 746 p.). It has four parts: "The Nature and Evolution of Wholesaling," "Modern Wholesaling in the United States and Abroad," "Operation and Management of a Whole- sale Business," and "Economic and Governmental Aspects of Wholesaling." 5950. Rosenthal, Morris S. Techniques of inter- national trade. New York, McGraw-Hill, 1950. xv, 554 p. 50-8041 HF1007.R6 1950 This volume of basic information about the tech- niques of importing and exporting, written by the president of the National Council of American Im- porters, rehearses and explains the practical matters involved in international trade. The author dis- cusses the significance and form of the written con- tract, methods and instruments of shipment, cus- toms procedure and tariffs in the United States and abroad, marine insurance, packing, financing through consignment and open account, drafts and letters of credit, foreign monetary systems, air freight, and communications. Many examples of individual transactions and facsimiles of typical doc- uments are included. The appendixes include a number of international agreements, and the "Re- vised American Foreign Trade Definitions" of 1941 issued by the National Foreign Trade Council. The work is a revision of Technical Procedure in Ex- porting and Importing published in 1922. H. Commerce: Special 5951. Albion, Robert Greenhalgh. The rise of New York port (1815-1860) by Robert Greenhalgh Albion, with the collaboration of Jen- nie Barnes Pope. New York, Scribner, 1939. xiv, 458 p. 39-27172 HE554.N7A6 Bibliography: p. [423]~47o. The whole history of the port of New York, says Dr. Albion, is too complex for compression into one volume. In this work he surveys "the significant middle period when New York definitely drew ahead of its rivals and established itself as the chief American seaport and metropolis." The author had already published Square-Riggers on Schedule (no. 5937), which expands a portion of the material here covered; his plans for histories of New York as a port before 1815 and after i860 were interrupted by the war, and his later contributions have been in naval history. The present volume is broad in its scope, describing the operations of trade in New York itself, in domestic and foreign markets and in ports of call; the activities of the waterfront; the ships, their routes and mariners; the personalities of "merchant princes"; and travelers' impressions. For the general reader there are provided "ship- wrecks, slavers, and pirates"; for the scholarly, analysis of the growth of commerce and statistical data, much of the latter being tabulated in appen- dixes. The book is profusely illustrated with re- productions of contemporary prints and portraits. 5952. Baer, Julius B., and Olin Glenn Saxon. Commodity exchanges and futures trading; principles and operating methods. [New York] Harper, 1949. 324 p. 49-7144 HG6046.B3 1949 Revision of 1929 publication with the title Com- modity Exchanges, by Julius B. Baer and George P. Woodruff. Commodity exchanges such as the New York Cotton Exchange, the Chicago Board of Trade (wheat and corn), the Rubber Exchange, the Silk Exchange, the Cocoa Exchange, and the National Metal Exchange, are associations of traders organ- ized for buying and selling their particular com- modities, chiefly through futures contracts. These are contracts for "to arrive" deliveries drawn up according to the rules of the organization as to unit of amount (e. g., a standard bale of cotton), quality, and time of delivery. This involves a form of in- surance for producer, dealer, and processor, which takes the form of "hedging." Hedging is the device whereby the purchaser who has contracted to de- liver a processed commodity — e. g., a miller promis- ing a quantity of wheat flour — and is buying a quantity of wheat at today's price, contracts to sell i like quantity of unprocessed wheat at the going market price on the date when he delivers his flour. He will thus be protected against loss if the market has fallen, and if the market has risen, his profits on the first purchase will be offset by the price he will have to pay for the future purchase of wheat. This technical study, by two specialists in business law, describes the mechanics of futures trading on the American exchanges with emphasis on their legal aspects. Litde attention is given to international markets. The role of the speculator is defended as of social value. 5953* Brown, William Adams. The United States and the restoration of world trade; an analy- sis and appraisal of the ITO charter and the General agreement on tariffs and trade. Washington, Brook- ings Institution, 1950. 572 p. 50-7703 HF55.B7 A study of the primary instruments of interna- tional commerce proposed under United Nations auspices. The late author, an economist at the Brookings Institution, had served in the State De- partment and acted as an observer at conferences for a proposed International Trade Organization. After a glance at our fundamental foreign trade poli- cies and at the background of international efforts toward multilateral agreement on commercial rela- tions, he reviews the history of ITO and the General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade (GATT). The UN Economic and Social Council (ECOSOC) in 1946 set up a Preparatory Committee on Trade and Employment which met at London and Geneva and drew up a draft charter, which was presented to ECOSOC at a conference in Havana in November 1947. Here the so-called Havana Charter for an International Trade Organization was promulgated, to be submitted for ratification to member states. As a means of immediate partial implementation, GATT was signed by 23 countries at the Geneva meeting of the preparatory committee, and has sub- sequently received several amendments. Dr. Brown explains the content and implications of the two instruments, and then appraises them in terms of United States policy. In the last chapter he reviews the unsatisfactory alternatives of action if the United States should reject the Charter. Its text is analyzed provision by provision in the appendix. [The United States has not been willing to accept the pro- visions of ITO, and as of 1959 it is a dead letter. GATT is in force as an informal agreement on cer- tain limitations of restrictions; it has no administra- tive apparatus beyond an annual meeting of the sig- natories. In 1955 an Organization for Trade Cooperation (OTC) was agreed upon to serve as an administrative body for GATT; it has not yet been ratified by all member states.] 5954. Campbell, Persia C. The consumer interelt: a study in consumer economics. New York, Harper, 1949. 660 p. 49-2885 HB801.C3 An evaluation from the consumer's viewpoint of America's "total economic activity in terms of the end results in consumer goods, and the satisfactions derived from their use by the different families and individuals in the community" — in other words, "What comes from all our getting and spending? And do we want what we get, or get what we want? " First, the standard of living is defined in material and subjective ways, for instance, in terms of pur- chasing power, social status, and personal satisfac- ECONOMIC LIFE / 919 tion. The writer discusses "Consumers at Market," indicating patterns of choice in expenditure, with many interesting details and statistics. Shopping for price advantage is set against shopping for quality, and the advantages and disadvantages of buying on credit are analyzed. The last section, "Factors in Supply," appraises the relation to the consumer of the retail store, farm production, and industry, with special regard to the part played by government in regulation and control. In a final chapter Miss Campbell surveys the "consumer movement" for educating the buyer and forming an enlightened public opinion in the field. 5955. Carson, Gerald. The old country store. New York, Oxford University Press, 1954. 33° P- 54-5 2 9° HF5429.C296 The past tense prevails in this engaging account of the typical institution which tied together the rural community of 19th-century America and pro- vided its full-time social center. For his material the writer has drawn on such sources as old ledgers and journals, newspapers, diaries, "drummers' " cards, local history, folksay, and personal reminis- cence. The narrative is studded with anecdotes and verses, illustrated with facsimiles and gay pen draw- ings. Chronologically, Mr. Carson divides his account into two halves at the Civil War. The chapters have pleasant titles: "How to Live with- out Money" (your cordwood in trade for cigars), "The Thrivingest People in the World" (peddlers), "A Man of Many Parts" (The storekeeper, hero of local legend). "The Drummers of Pearl Street" describes the country merchant's buying trip to New York, before the day of the traveling salesman. The latter, "The Man Who Brought the News," arrived about the middle of the century. "From Cradle to Coffin" is the country-store inventory; "Satin' Round the Old Store Stove" is the lore of the cracker-barrel colloquium. Patent medicines are looked at in "One for a Man, Two for a Llorse." The story ends with the coming of the dissolvents: the mail-order catalog and the Model T. "With the departure of the country store — counter, stove, and settle — there is no longer any point of assembly. The congress has adjourned, sine die." 5956. Emmet, Boris, and John E. Jeuck. Cata- logues and counters; a history of Sears, Roebuck and Company. [Chicago] University of Chicago Press, 1950. xix, 788 p. illus. 50-7387 HF5467.S4E5 Bibliography: p. [753]~773- Sears, Roebuck and Company, according to its former retail merchandise manager, Dr. Emmet, is "perhaps the outstanding example of mass merchan- dizing"; in 1948, $2,296,000,000 worth of goods were 920 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES sold through its 632 retail stores, n mail-order plants, and 341 order offices. The authors present here a full business history, with special attention to the policies and methods by which the firm has cut the high cost of distribution to the benefit of the American consumer. The Sears, Roebuck story falls into three chronological stages. The first ex- tends from 1886, when Richard W. Sears (1863- 1914) started a little business in Chicago advertising the sale of watches by mail, to his resignation as president of the $50 million company in 1908. A. C. Roebuck, watchmaker and cofounder, had sold out early, and his place had been filled by Julius Rosenwald, who succeeded Sears as president. The middle period of maturity in selling by catalog lasted from 1908 to 1025; hard hit by the business crisis of 1921, the Company had been saved only by Rosen- wald's "grand gesture" of advancing $20 million of his own fortune, and had undergone an extensive reorientation in sales methods and operation. The third period, from 1925 to 1948, saw the develop- ment of retail stores, a great expansion of over-the- counter sales, and the many other changes that have come with the growth of the American economy in general, and of Sears, Roebuck in particular. 5957. Gibbons, Herbert Adams. John Wana- maker. New York, Harper, 1926. 2 v. illus. 26-1831 1 E664.W24G4 Bibliography: v. 2, p. 469-481. John Wanamaker's long and eventful life, from 1838 to 1922, is one of the brilliant success stories of America's age of enterprise. To this biographer, friendly though not eulogistic, it was "the spirit of radiant adventure" that animated the great mer- chant in his many activities in business, religion, and politics. Dr. Gibbons gives equal attention to all sides of Wanamaker's career: in religious endeavor, the Y. M. C. A., the Bethany Chapel, the Moody and Sankey and other revivals; in State, municipal, and national politics (he was rewarded by Benjamin Harrison for his zeal in the campaign of 1888 with the Postmaster Generalship); and in business, with the establishment of one of America's first great de- partment stores. The modest shop for men's cloth- ing, Oak Hall, which he and his brother-in-law began in 1861, became in 10 years the biggest retail store of its kind in the country, largely through Wanamaker's genius for publicity. In 1876, taking advantage of the many visitors to Philadelphia for the Centennial Exhibition, Wanamaker converted the old Pennsylvania Railroad freight depot into the Grand Depot, a combination of drygoods and clothing store. In 1877 it became "a new kind of store," with departments for drygoods, notions, and "all things for the ready-dress needs of the people." Its rise to the huge establishment in Philadelphia and New York was not, the writer emphasizes, auto- matic growth, but the result of Wanamaker's com- bination of bold venture, foresight, and faith. 5958. Hower, Ralph M. The history of an ad- vertising agency: N. W. Ayer & Son at work, 1 869-1949. Rev. ed. Cambridge, Harvard Uni- versity Press, 1949. xliii, 647 p. illus. (Harvard studies in business history, 5) 49-10653 HF6181.A8H6 1949 First edition, 1939. A case study in the history of advertising, based on "inside materials" — the firm's records, interviews with employees and clients — by an independent re- searcher, a professor at the Harvard Graduate School of Business. The record of N. W. Ayer & Son, Inc., of Philadelphia, one of the oldest adver- tising agencies in America, is presented as illustrative of "the creative work of the business man," its suc- cess "a synthesis of the ideal and the useful, of the right and the profitable." The book is in two distinct parts, the first 200 pages tracing the general history of the agency from its small beginning in 1869 with a list of 11 religious newspapers for which to procure advertisements, to the big organization of the present day. The second part is an objective analysis of particular aspects of the Ayer develop- ment as typical of the rise of professional advertis- ing, with stress on their social significance. To the library profession, the company is most familiar as publishers of the famous guide, now called N. W. Ayer & Son's Directory, Newspapers and Periodi- cals, which has come out annually since 1880. 5959. Hower, Ralph M. History of Macy's of New York, 1 858-1 9 19; chapters in the evolution of the department store. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1943. xxvii, 500 p. diagrs. (Harvard studies in business history, 7) A 43-1889 HF5465.U6M27 The first 60 years of America's largest single re- tail store comprise its founding and early develop- ment by Rowland H. Macy and his first partners (1858-87), and its expansion under the direction of two generations of Strauses (1888-1919). A second volume to cover later years was projected but has not been published. In this history of the great "cheap store," the author's second con- tribution to this Harvard series in business history, the style is semipopular, and the pages lightened with personal names and stories, quota- tions of sprightly advertising in verse and prose, and portraits of store personalities. Emphasis is on the functions of retailing, and Dr. Hower offers evidence to prove that Macy's was "among the two or three stores in both Europe and America which first completed the transition from specialized stores ECONOMIC LIFE / 92 1 to modern department stores," with an ever-increas- ing variety of goods for sale in quantity at the lowest unit price. An interesting central chapter describes the composition and working conditions of the sales force of the eighties. In the era of direction by Isidor and Nathan Straus and their sons, the au- thor's attention is focused on the evolution of store facilities and of policies of expansion, advertising, competitive pricing, and employee relations. 5960. Jones, Fred Mitchell. Middlemen in the domestic trade of the United States, 1800- 1860. Urbana, University of Illinois, 1937. 81 p. (Illinois studies in the social sciences, v. 21, no. 3) 37-27875 HF3027.3.J62 H31.I4, v. 21, no. 3 University of Illinois Bulletin, v. 34, May 25, 1937. Bibliography: p. 72-77. A historical monograph describing the opera- tions of middlemen — wholesalers, jobbers, commis- sion merchants, selling agents, brokers, auctioneers, retailers, public markets, and peddlers — in the com- merce of the United States before the Civil War. It gives special attention to regulation of their op- erations by Federal, State, and local authorities. There is much interesting detail, which incidentally shows that few modern devices are new; even the chain store had its prototype in the three or more stores owned in different parts of Tennessee by Andrew Jackson. Where available, statistics have been gathered. In the appendix are tables of auc- tion sales over a period of years, and of retail stores (57,565 in all) in the United States in 1839. 5961. Lebhar, Godfrey M. Chain stores in America, 1 859-1950. New York, Chain Store Pub. Corp., 1952. 362 p. diagrs. 52-7108 HF5468.L332 A history of the chain store system by the editor of the trade journal, Chain Store Age. Mr. Lebhar chronicles the birth of the chain stores (the date chosen is 1859, the year of the founding of the Great Adantic and Pacific Tea Company) and their rise through the years to the strength shown in the census of 1948; its figures indicate that of 1,770,000 stores in the United States, only 105,000 or 6 percent are chain stores, but they account for 23 percent of the total retail volume. The struggle against the opposition of the independent stores in regard to price cutting is reviewed, with citation of many legal cases and decisions, anti-chain-store tax bills, acts of the Federal Trade Commission, etc. The crusade against the chains began in the 1920's and rose in intensity until the passage of the Robinson-Patman Act in 1936, after the American Retail Federation had been investigated as a "superlobby." The tide 431240—60 60 turned when the Patman bill of 1938, which at- tempted to impose a punitive tax on chains, was killed in 1940, the hearings contributing importantly to a public understanding of the economic and social value of the chain-store system of distribution. In his last chapters the author discusses this value in relation to the community, the farmer, and the em- ployees of the chain store, and the chain stores' prospects for the future. 5962. Sandage, Charles H., and Vernon Fryburger. Advertising: theory and practice. 5th ed. Homewood, 111., R. D. Irwin, 1958. 690 p. 58-9767 HF5823.S25 1958 This college textbook examines advertising, "a dynamic force in our economy," in all its facets. The first part, "Basic Value Functions," oudines the history of advertising and discusses its social and economic aspects, among them the factor of truth, the role of advertising as a buyer's guide, and the advertising of ideas rather than products (including "advertorials"). Next its practical aspects are treated: the background of fact gathering, con- sumer research, product and market analysis, the stages in preparing and reproducing the advertise- ment, and the advertising media. The methods of testing the effectiveness of advertising provide in- teresting chapters which range from the compara- tively simple technique of submitting samples to a consumer jury to such complicated mental feats as "unaided-recall" and "psychological scoring." Finally, the organization and functions of the mod- ern advertising agency are analyzed. As might be expected, the illustrations are spirited and of great variety. 5963. Seligman, Edwin R. The economics of in- stalment selling; a study in consumers' credit, with special reference to the automobile. New York, Harper, 1927. 2 v. tables, diagrs. 27-24759 HF5568.S4 Bibliography: v. 1, p. 339-346. A thorough historical and theoretical study by a well-known Columbia University economist, which remains the most authoritative examination of the nature and operations of instalment selling in America. This form of consumer's credit began in 1807 with "high-grade business," instalment sales of furniture, sewing machines, pianos, and books; but a period of "low-grade selling," carried on par- ticularly in New York City by unscrupulous ped- dlers, brought the system into disrepute. It was revivified by the largest and most significant applica- tion, to automobiles, after which there developed the special instruments of the finance company and the Morris Plan banks. Professor Seligman explains methods of instalment credit, estimates the extent of 922 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES instalment selling, and analyzes instalment sales as to their nature and characteristics. He examines the question of luxuries and necessities in connection with the automobile, and the effects of instalment credit on the consumer, on business conditions, and on the credit structure. In each case the institution is defended as one that, when abuses and improper practices are cleared away, will be reckoned as con- stituting "a signal and valuable contribution to the modern economy." The large second volume, pre- pared by the author's associates, contains a group of specialized statistical studies, several of them con- cerned with instalment sales of automobiles. A more recent work, The Economics of Instalment Buying, by Reavis Cox (New York, Ronald Press, 1948. 526 p.), is a comprehensive reference guide to the structure, organization, and management of instalment buying (or selling), its economic func- tions and consequences, and its future outlook. The author, professor of marketing at the University of Pennsylvania, was director of research for the Retail Credit Institute of America, by which the volume was sponsored. 5964. Warbasse, James P. Co-operative democracy through voluntary association of the people as consumers; a discussion of the co-operative move- ment, its philosophy, methods, accomplishments, and possibilities, and its relation to the state, to sci- ence, art, and commerce, and to other systems of economic organization. 5th ed. New York, Har- per, 1947. 324 p. 47-11741 HD2965.W3 1947 Bibliography: p. 316-319. The most considerable American contribution to cooperation literature is this book by one of its leading exponents. The late Dr. Warbasse was founder and for many years (1916-41) president of the Cooperative League of the U. S. A.; on the title page of this fifth edition of the work he appears as president emeritus. He presents cooperation as a world development. After consideration of its meaning and methods, and a short chapter on the Rochdale pioneers, he reviews in summary form the status of cooperative societies in about 60 countries. Then he considers the forms of expression of co- operation, its relationship with government, and its significance in regard to politics, profit business, the labor movement, etc., using world experience for illustration. The book has been translated into nine languages. Dr. Warbasse had himself lectured and given courses on cooperation in a hundred uni- versities in eight countries. The purely American aspects of cooperation are recorded with extensive detail in a recent book by a government specialist on cooperatives, Florence E. Parker: The First 125 Years; a History of Distributive and Service Cooperation in the United States, 1829-1954 ([Chi- cago, Cooperative League of the U. S. A.] 1956. 462 p.). Less fully, but with notable clarity, the subject of cooperation and its particular manifesta- tions in America are set forth in a guide for public school teachers by Charles Maurice Wieting: The Progress of Cooperatives, with Aids for Teachers (New York, Harper, 1952. 210 p.). I. Finance: General 5965. Blough, Roy. The Federal taxing process. New York, Prentice-Hall, 1952. 506 p. (Prentice-Hall economics series) 52-8597 HJ2381.B55 Bibliography: p. 481-494. Professor Blough, a tax expert long connected with the U. S. Treasury Department and congressional tax committees, prepared this book while teaching at the University of Chicago in 1946-50. He is now principal director of the Department of Economic Affairs of the United Nations. In this closely writ- ten study of the making of tax policy he is particu- larly concerned to show how policy is formulated amid the fundamental and clashing disagreements of its framers about the public interest it is to serve. He examines tax programs and pressure groups, the passage and application of the tax laws, and the ad- ministration of taxation by the Bureau of Internal Revenue. "Considerations Relating to the Level of Taxation" include the controversy over deficit spending and a balanced budget; "Considerations Relating to the Distribution of Taxes" include national prosperity, the problem of fairness, regula- tory taxation (e. g., on alcoholic liquors), and Federal-State tax relations. The last chapter exam- ines the bearing of the Federal taxing process on the carrying out of national policies. 5966. Dewey, Davis Rich. Financial history of the United States. 12th ed. New York, Long- mans, Green, 1934. xxxviii, 600 p. diagrs. (Ameri- can citizens series) 34-36570 HJ241.D4 1934 A standard work since 1903, in its final edition covering in highly compressed form the whole course of public finance from Colonial days to the depres- sion of the 1930's. The author, elder brother of ECONOMIC LIFE / 923 John Dewey, was professor of economics and statis- tics at the Massachusetts Institute of Technology from 1893 to 1933, and, among other distinguished posts, editor for many years of the American Eco- nomic Review. His text is preceded by a 20-page bibliography divided into subject sections, and short lists of references are put at the heads of chapters. The themes followed chronologically in his history are taxation and internal revenue, coinage and paper money, the banks, the tariff, the silver question, and the administration of the Treasury. The volume is of lasting interest; Professors Studenski and Krooss in their new Financial History of the United States (no. 5973) acknowledge their debt to it and declare it "will continue to be a classic in the field." 5967. Guthmann, Harry G., and Herbert E. Dou- gall. Corporate financial policy. 3d ed. New York, Prentice-Hall, 1955. 766 p. illus. 55-5754 HG4011.G85 1955 Two professors of finance begin by defining and charting the field of corporation finance. Their ex- position covers lucidly and in detail legal forms of business organization other than corporations, the formation and control of the corporation, its stock and bonds, factors determining the pattern of long- term financing, and the financial aspects of promo- tion. Next various branches of corporation finance are examined: public utilities, railroads, investment banking, security exchanges, the subscription sale of securities, and employee and executive stock own- ership. Techniques of budgeting and short-term financing are explained. Then the writers proceed to the advanced stages of the corporation's career: expansion and consolidation, mergers, holding com- panies, refinancing and recapitalization, failure, re- ceivership, reorganization, and so on to corporate dissolution and liquidation. That note is too sad on which to end, even in a text for advanced study, so the final chapter becomes a soothing and hopeful review of the social aspects of corporate financing. The long bibliography (p. 724-766) is arranged in the form of chapter references. 5968. Hansen, Alvin H. Fiscal policy and business cycles. New York, Norton, 1941. 462 p. 41-7728 HB3711.H315 In his introduction to this book on fiscal policy as an instrument for regulating the national income and its distribution, the author gives emphatic voice to the conviction that for a decade has dictated his vigorous advocacy of the Keynesian doctrine. "The twin scourges that afflict the modern world — De- pression and War — are not altogether unrelated. Bad as the Treaty of Versailles was, a steady im- provement in international political relations could have been expected had we had the vision and cour- age to stop the Great Depression dead in its tracks and move forward to higher levels of real income and employment. . . . The ultimate causes of the failure to achieve a world order in the political sphere must be sought in the facts of economic frustration." Professor Hansen, who held the Lit- tauer Chair of Political Economy at Harvard from 1937 until his retirement, has been the leader of the American theorists who believe in a dual economy of Federal spending and private investment, and in increasing the public debt as a way of combating depression. He here develops these views in an examination of the economic situation of the 1930's; the changing role of fiscal policy and its application to the full use of resources through "compensatory" spending and taxation; incentives to investment; and wartime financing. Like other economists at home and abroad, he predicted a postwar slump. 5969. Kendrick, Myron Slade. Public finance; principles and problems. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1951. 708 p. illus. 51-9072 HJ257.K4 A text for advanced study by a professor at Cornell University, who attempts to balance the older views of the orthodox laissez-faire economists and those of the enthusiastic followers of J. M. Keynes who advo- cate heavy government spending in order to main- tain a high level of employment and national income. The main exposition is in three parts, "Public Ex- penditures" (their increase, the causes thereof, and how to control them), "Public Revenues," and "Fiscal Policy." The second is by far the longest, with 21 chapters covering the historic development and present status of State, local, and Federal taxa- tion, the taxation of property, estate and inheritance taxes, the taxation of motor vehicle transportation (called "taxes as price equivalents"), the taxation of business, income tax, and the general problems of tax administration and (with charts) the incidence of taxes. The last chapter warns of dangers in a policy of expansion spending: "Only after the possibilities of correcting the known defects of the economy have been explored has the policy of spending for its general effect any claim to con- sideration." Another useful textbook, Public Finance, by Alfred G. Buehler, is now in its third edition (New York, McGraw-Hill, 1948. 740 p.). In straightforward expository chapters the author defines public finance and describes the range of Federal, local, and State expenditures and grants, fiscal organization, budgetary procedure, govern- ment accounting, and the tax system in its many phases. The volume ends with a consideration of Federal methods of borrowing and the economic significance of the public debt. 924 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 5970. Paul, Randolph E. Taxation in the United States. Boston, Litde, Brown, 1954. 830 p. 54-6282 HJ2362.P35 The late writer, a tax lawyer who had served as advisor to the President and the Treasury Depart- ment in New Deal days and who during the war was Assistant to the Secretary of the Treasury in charge of foreign funds control, was influential in the formation of recent tax policy in America, on which he wrote extensively during three decades. This book is addressed to the informed general reader, as well as to economic historians and tax experts, in an urbane style as little difficult as possible con- sidering the subject matter. Although the main themes are die income tax and estate and gift taxes, other aspects of the Federal tax system are not neglected in the comprehensive historical analysis of the basic issues involved in tax and fiscal policy. Except for a rapid 100-page review of tax history before World War I, the treatment is full, with a detailed account of the economic climate and of the political and legal struggles accompanying the introduction of each new tax. The final chapters are a theoretical study of the judicial process in relation to taxes, and an appraisal of the existing system, including Mr. Paul's views on progressive (i. e., graduated) taxation. Taxation is naturally a primary interest of American thinkers on financial problems, and notable studies of the whole subject or of special aspects are numerous. Sidney Ratner's American Taxation, Its History as a Social Force in Democracy (New York, Norton, 1942. 561 p.) is a comprehensive historical survey from 1789, in which the cumulative developments in tax reform are shown in relation to general social conditions. The emphasis is on "the endeavor of the American people ... to forge taxes which should be not only sources of revenue but also instruments of economic justice and social welfare." A standard historical work with chapters grouped around indi- vidual revenue acts from 1909 to 1939 is Roy G. and Gladys C. Blakey's The Federal Income Tax (New York, Longmans, Green, 1940. 640 p.). A useful analysis of tax problems at the end of the war, published as a research study of the Committee for Economic Development, is Postwar Taxation and Economic Progress, by Harold M. Groves (New York, McGraw-Hill, 1946. 432 p.). The publica- tions of the U. S. Congress Joint Committee on the Economic Report are important for the genesis of tax legislation. A particularly valuable com- pendium representing the views of many leading spokesmen is Federal Tax Policy for Economic Growth and Stability; Papers Submitted by Panelists Appearing before the Subcommittee on Tax Policy (Washington, U. S. Govt. Print. Off., 1955. 930 p. 84th Cong., 1st sess. Joint Committee Print). 5971. Poole, Kenyon E., ed. Fiscal policies and the American economy. New York, Pren- tice-Hall, 1 95 1. 468 p. illus. (Prentice-Hall economics series) 51-9449 HJ263.P6 A group of essays interpreting modern theory in regard to fiscal policy, which reflect the changing thought of the years of depression and wartime inflation. The first paper, by the editor of the symposium, is a brief historical treatment, "Back- ground and Scope of American Fiscal Policies." There follow: "Monetary Aspects of Fiscal Policy," by Roland I. Robinson; "Fiscal Policy, Employment, and the Price Level," by Henry M. Oliver; "Debt Management," by Henry C. Murphy; "Government Expenditures and Their Significance for the Econ- omy," by John F. Due; "Financial Institutions as a Factor in Fiscal Policy," by Harry C. Guthmann; "Repercussions of the Tax System on Business," by E. Gordon Keith; "The Fiscal System, the Distribu- tion of Income, and Public Welfare," by John H. Adler, with an appendix, "The Statistical Allocation of Taxes and Expenditures in 1938/39 and 1946/47," by Eugene R. Schlesinger; and "Interna- tional Aspects of Fiscal Policy," by Frank W. Fetter. Each essay is followed by a short list of references. The editor of the symposium, a professor of eco- nomics at Northwestern University, published in 1956 a treatise on this subject: Public Finance and Economic Welfare (New York, Rinehart. 640 p.). The complex field of government finance and fiscal policy is fully covered, with special stress on the cyclical and long-term effects of fiscal policy upon economic stability and social security. 5972. Prochnow, Herbert V., ed. American finan- cial institutions. New York, Prentice-Hall, 1951. 799 p. 51-11568 HG181.P73 This collective work covering the entire American financial structure is designed as an integrated text in the fields of finance, money, banking, etc. Seven- teen of the 25 contributors are connected with uni- versities and schools of business administration, while the other 8 are executives of banks or other financial institutions. Among the subjects treated, with special attention to their interrelations and their bearing on the national economy, are commercial banks, the Federal Reserve system, savings and loan associations and mutual savings banks, real estate and agricultural financing institutions, commodity exchanges, stockbrokerage and stock exchanges, investment banking, trust companies, international banks, the United States Treasury, insurance com- panies, institutions for consumer credit, personal finance, and government regulation. The last chap- ter reviews the leading trade associations in the financial field. The treatment in all is expositionsl, with clarity the first objective. ECONOMIC LIFE / 925 5973. Studenski, Paul, and Herman E. Krooss. Financial history of the United States: fiscal, monetary, banking, and tariff, including financial administration and state and local finance. New York, McGraw-Hill, 1952. 528 p. 51-12649 HG181.S83 The first general history of American finance published since the Second World War, this textbook by two professors at New York University deals with government policies and the administration of taxation, money and banking, and the tariff, stressing the political and economic issues involved. The chapters are in mainly chronological sequence, grouped in three periods: from Colonial times to the Civil War; from 1861 to 1916; from World War I to 1950. Nonfederal finance receives attention throughout, and in each section a chapter is devoted to state and local government finance. Almost half the text is given to the third section, which lucidly sets forth the financial aspects of the New Deal, World War II, and the first postwar years. The many statistical tables are exceptionally easy of com- prehension by the nonspecialist reader, to whom, as well as to students, the work is directed. 5974. Westerfield, Ray Bert. Money, credit and banking. Rev. ed. New York, Ronald Press Co., 1947. 1096 p. maps, diagrs. 47-11360 HG153.W42 5975. Chandler, Lester V. The economics of money and banking. Rev. ed. New York, Harper, 1953. 742 p. illus. 53-5076 HG221.C448 1953 Dr. Westerfield, now emeritus professor of politi- cal economy at Yale where he held a chair for 30 years, is also a practicing banker. This treatise has been a standard text and reference work for several decades. In accord with the author's interests, it covers comprehensively both financial theory and practice, philosophy and institutions. Its three themes, money, credit, and banking, are developed simultaneously in his argument as they are in the world of finance. The nature of money and mone- tary systems, the history of national coinage and paper money, the instruments of credit, the func- tions, management, and operations of banks, the history of banking, the Federal Reserve System, and foreign exchange are among the many aspects treated at length. In the same general field but more definitely focused on the relationship of the mone- tary and banking system to the present-day function- ing of the American economy is The Economics of Money and Banking by Professor Chandler o£ Princeton. This text is designed as a general intro- duction to monetary studies for college undergradu- ates, and lays much emphasis on elementary prin- ciples. After 21 chapters explaining the functions and kinds of money, monetary standards, banking, the Federal Reserve System, and other financial institutions, the author devotes 7 chapters to a dis- cussion of monetary theory, using equations and symbols. The most formidable in appearance are those of national income analysis, GN'P (gross na- tional product) and other concepts, to measure which there are constructed mathematical functions, schedules, or curves. The last few chapters explain postwar international transactions and reladonships involving money. }. Finance: Special 5976. Abbott, Charles C. The Federal debt, struc- ture and impact. With policy recommenda- tions of the Committee on the Federal Debt. New York, Twentieth Century Fund, 1953. xvii, 278 p. 53-5982 HJ8119.A58 5977. Murphy, Henry C. The national debt in war and transition. New York, McGraw- Hill, 1950. 295 p. 50-6930 HJ8 n 9.M8 From the national debt of about a billion dollars that remained stable through the period from 1895 to 1916, the United States through two major wars, a depression, and the cold war, has increased the figure of what it owes to about $260 billion, or "close to $1,700 for every man, woman and child in the country." These statisdcs are reported in 1953 in a survey started by the Twendeth Century Fund in 1948 but postponed because of the tax increase brought about by the Korean War and rearmament. The study, directed by Dr. Abbott of the Harvard Business School, involved an examination of the post-World War II situation, the impact of the debt on the Treasury and the Federal Reserve, and the effect of Korea, and then an analysis of the debt problem and conclusions. The last section, as in most Fund studies, is a report by a committee which reviewed the research findings, summarizing and offering recommendations as to Federal debt man- agement for steady economic growth. The story of war finance is told by Mr. Murphy, former assistant 926 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES director of research and statistics of the Treasury Department. Although the viewpoint is that of the government, the author reasserts that "the govern- ment represents the whole people," and that officials of the Treasury and the Federal Reserve System make a conscientious effort to hear and adapt them- selves to the points of view expressed by representa- tives of all segments of the economy. After giving a brief review of the depression, he discusses "Setting the Pattern of War Finance," against the realization that taxation is preferable to borrowing, but insuffi- cient to finance a major war. He then explains the techniques of borrowing through war loans, savings bond programs, etc. His final appraisal is that, though the job could have been done better — "What job couldn't?" — there is no doubt that the war borrowing program was a success. 5978. Allen, Frederick L. The great Pierpont Morgan. New York, Harper, 1949. 306 p. port. 49-8274 CT275.M6A6 "Sources and obligations": p. 283-297. A biography which is less economic history than personal interpretation of the preeminent banker (1837-1913) who, it was widely believed, controlled American finance in the early 1900's. The late editor of Harper's Magazine speaks of his book as an attempt at a middle course between earlier ex- tremes of "one-sidedly laudatory and one-sidedly derogatory" accounts. He begins with Pierpont Morgan's appearance, a few months prior to his death, before the Pujo congressional committee which in 1912 was investigating the "money trust." The famous statement of the financier, that commer- cial credit is based primarily on character — "a man I do not trust could not get money from me for all the bonds in Christendom" — is the author's point of departure to which he returns in his conclusion. On the way he has followed Morgan from his youth through his natural entrance into the banking world via his father's firm; his partnerships first with C. H. Dabney and then with Anthony J. Drexel; the establishment of J. P. Morgan and Company in 1895; his victories over competitors; his great role in government financing; his reorganization of rail- roads; and his consolidation of the U. S. Steel Cor- poration. The great monetary dealings are outlined against a sympathetically drawn background of Morgan's personal life, tastes, princely travels, and activities as a prodigious collector of art and litera- ture. All these matters are related in much greater detail — often of high interest — and with much less reflective commentary, by his admiring son-in-law, Herbert L. Satterlee, in /. Pierpont Morgan; an Intimate Portrait (New York, Macmillan, 1939. xvi >595P-)- 5979. Brown, John Crosby. A hundred years of merchant banking, a history of Brown Brothers and Company, Brown, Shipley & Company and the allied firms, Alexander Brown and Sons, Baltimore; William and James Brown and Com- pany, Liverpool; John A. Brown and Company, Browns and Bowen, Brown Brothers and Company, Philadelphia; Brown Brothers and Company, Bos- ton. New York, Priv. print, 1909. xxxiii, 374 p. plates. 9-27455 HG2613.B24B7 5980. Hidy, Ralph W. The House of Baring in American trade and finance; English mer- chant bankers at work, 1 763-1 861. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1949. xxiv, 631 p. illus. (Harvard studies in business history, 14) 49-11255 HG4910.H5 "Notes and references": p. [4 83] -6 16. The frontispiece of Brown's classic history of the growth of a private banking firm in foreign busi- ness shows four old gentlemen, with white hair and spectacles, grouped about a table beneath the por- trait of a fifth— Alexander Brown and his four sons. The father came from Ireland and in 1800 began a small business in Baltimore importing Irish linens, and rapidly expanded to other goods. He had to pay in sterling, and accepted payment in sterling bills, drawn against shipments of tobacco, etc., from Baltimore to England; he became a free buyer of commercial sterling, and built up "a goodly share of the Sterling Exchange business in this country." His four sons, who compensated with business acumen for their weak sight, were taken into part- nership and established in branches or allied firms. The oldest son opened a firm in Liverpool in 1810, and Brown acquired ships, and issued credits on the Liverpool house for other American merchants. The Philadelphia branch, under the third son, was established in 18 18, and in 1825 the New York branch was opened under the youngest son. This book, which combines the charm of well-written family history with a revealing account of the methods of private banking and the transition from mercantile to industrial capitalism, is by the son of the New York Brown, who had himself been a partner in the firm for almost half a century. Dr. Hidy studies in detail the operations of a famous London house of merchant bankers which for about 25 years specialized in financing American trade and marketing American securities. Flis principal source was the Baring papers in the Public Archives of Canada, selected materials dealing primarily with the business of the house in the United States and Canada. Notwithstanding the dates in Dr. Hidy's tide, his narrative is detailed only after the Peace of Ghent (1815). America was the major interest of Baring Brothers and Company only from 1828 to ECONOMIC LIFE / 927 1842, after which year the repudiation of their finan- cial obligations by so many American States led the house to reduce its dealings, and to curtail them drastically in 1853. "The London firm felt that it assumed responsibility to both buyer and seller when it publicly marketed the securities of any govern- ment or corporation," and the boom-and-bust character of the American economy, and the wild- cat oudook of so many American promoters, led the Barings to give preference to Canadian, European, and Latin American bond issues after 1853. 5981. Dice, Charles Amos, and Wilford John Eite- man. The stock market. 3d ed. New York, McGraw-Hill, 1952. 460 p. illus. 51-12601 HG4551.D5 1952 5982. Leffler, George L. The stock market. 2d ed. New York, Ronald Press Co., 1957. 629 p. illus. 57-6811 HG4551.L35 1957 The first of these two expository works on the stock market is addressed to investors, students of the market, and the general public. The various kinds of securities offered, the relations of brokers with customers, the operations of the New York Stock Exchange, the various types of stock pur- chasing (on margin, short sale, stop-loss order and hedge, averaging and pyramiding, calls, puts, spread, straddle, etc.), and all other aspects of the stockbroker's trade are explained in as simple terminology as the subject allows. The second volume is of the same general type, although more stricdy in textbook presentation. First published in 1951, it has been revised to reflect "substantial changes" in the stock market during the intervening years. 5983. Goldenweiser, Emanuel A. American mone- tary policy. New York, McGraw-Hill, 1951. xvi, 391 p. diagrs. (Committee for Economic De- velopment. Research study) 51-5868 HG538.G64 A study of the policymaking of the Federal Re- serve System, by the late former director of the division of research and statistics for the Board of Governors of FRS (1926-45). The examination of Federal Reserve instruments of monetary manage- ment, of policy decisions through four defined periods ( 1917-32, 1933-39, World War II, postwar), and of institutional operations and relationships of the Federal Reserve is set in a theoretical frame- work. Dr. Goldenweiser discusses the role of money in the economy, the objectives of monetary policy, and the evolution of FRS ideas before he begins his chronological account. He follows this with a review of principles of monetary policy in which he sets down "certain simple and unequivocal rules" in line with FRS practice, the last of which involves the general aim of "contributing to eco- nomic stability." The appendix contains tables of statistics. A note is added on the research program of the Committee for Economic Development, list- ing and describing the studies published in the series of which this volume forms a part. In 1948 Professor George Leland Bach of Carnegie Insti- tute of Technology in Pittsburgh, a former staff economist serving the Board of Governors of FRS, conducted a study of the System for the Hoover Commission (Commission on the Reorgani- zation of the Executive Branch of the Government). His monograph, Federal Reserve Policy-Making (New York, Knopf, 1950. 282 p.), is a report on that study. It is in four parts, of which the first is a historical outline of "Federal Reserve Organization and the Policy Responsibilities." Parts 2 and 3 are discussions of "Internal Policy Formation" and "Ex- ternal Relations in Policy-Making." Part 4 is an analysis of "The Lessons of Monetary Experience." The writer is particularly concerned to show that official policymaking is not carried out in accord with the clear theories formulated by professional economists in the agencies, but is influenced by the pressures of other officials and of special interest groups, and the de facto policy of the administra- tion. An interpretation of the workings of the Federal Reserve through the case history of an indi- vidual bank during the first 20 years of the System was prepared as a doctoral thesis at Columbia Uni- versity by Lawrence E. Clark: Central Banking under the Federal Reserve System, with Special Consideration of the Federal Reserve Ban\ of New Yor{ (New York, Macmillan, 1935. 437 p.). His analysis stresses the function of the bank as a public service. 5984. Gras, Norman S. B. The Massachusetts First National Bank of Boston, 1784-1934. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1937. xxiv, 768 p. plates. (Harvard studies in business history, 4) 38-1639 HG2613.B74F54 The late author of this scholarly history of the second bank established in the United States was professor of business history at Harvard from 1927 to 1950, and editor of the series in which his book appeared. The study, based on unpublished records in the Baker Library and in possession of various New England banks, is in three parts. The first is a general introduction, which in just over 200 pages gives a running account of the Bank's history, prefaced by an 8-page chronology. Part 2 presents documents illustrating that history from its origins to 1865, when the Bank entered a period of si. tion: the letter and petition that launched it in the original charter and its modifications in 1792 928 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES and 1 8 12, extracts from the "Stockholders' Minute Book" and the "Directors' Records" (p. 221-529), and lists of officers. Part 3 gives tabulated statistics for the same period, including comparative figures for other Massachusetts banks. The venerable Bank was rejuvenated after 1903; Dr. Gras thus diagnoses its long period of decline: "The Bank responded to the opportunities for gain from sea traffic and from purely local trade, but it failed in the early part of the nineteenth century to participate in the develop- ment of New England as a whole and it failed in helping Boston secure the financial dominance in New England that its commercial position justified." 5985. James, Frank Cyril. The growth of Chicago banks. New York, Harper, 1938. 2 v. (1468 p.) ports. 38-33677 HG2613.C4J3 Bibliography: v. 2, p. 1127-1157. A history of the country's second largest money market, treated under the broad aspects of Chicago finance in its interrelations with the political and economic development of the community from a frontier outpost to a great metropolis. The narrative is divided chronologically, the two volumes being The Formative Years, 1816-1896, and The Modern Age, 1897-1938. The Chicago banks, growing with the region, were deeply involved in Illinois politics; by 1 87 1 they had made the city the financial center of the West. In the later period the banks tended to lose their regional character and to become "so inti- mately woven into the structure of the national money market that the financial independence of Chicago tended to decline," even as the city became one of the financial capitals of the world. This study was sponsored by the First National Bank of Chicago. Written by a distinguished financial his- torian, it is designed for the enjoyment of a specialist audience; the typeface is luxurious, there are color reproductions of portraits of individual bankers, and exhaustive documentation is given in notes following the chapters. Among the appendixes is a 250-page "Summary of Historical Data Regarding the Crea- tion, Growth and Dissolution of Banks and Finan- cial Houses Operating in Cook County from 1863 to 1938." A heavily statistical study of Chicago as a financial center is The Chicago Credit Market, Organization and Institutional Structure, by Melchior Palyi (Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1937. 448 p.). It was published as no. 33 of the Social science studies directed by the Social Science Research Committee of the University of Chicago. The text deals strictly with the organiza- tional aspects of the leading Midwestern credit market and shows the interrelation of savings insti- tutions, security exchanges, call-loan and commercial paper markets, and unit and branch banks. The many tables in the appendix go far beyond analysis of market structure, and present data relating the Chicago market to the economic growth of the area and to the country as a whole. 5986. Kemmerer, Edwin Walter, and Donald L. Kemmerer. The ABC of the Federal Re- serve System. 12th ed. New York, Harper, 1950. 229 p. 50-6526 HG2563.K4 1950 Bibliography: p. 215-220. Professor Edwin W. Kemmerer of Princeton University published the first edition of this famous work in 191 8. The 12th edition, revised by his son, keeps the same character of a guide in nontechnical language, making as plain as possible to the lay reader the complexities of the Federal Reserve Sys- tem. It begins with a short explanation of banking systems and their main defects, most serious of which in 19th-century America was decentralization. Then there is outlined the framework of the Federal Reserve System, which was superimposed in 1914 on many thousands of independent banks. There follows an examination of the methods and history of the Federal Reserve Banks, through the Act of 1913 and its subsequent amendments, in the First World War, the "open market" of the 1920's, the period of bank failures and the Great Depression, the New Deal and its reforms in banking, and the Second World War. In the last chapter suggestions are given "the intelligent citizen" as to what writings to consult and what to look for in them in order to understand trends of the national economy. An- other and briefer simplified story of the Federal Reserve System and its influence on the flow of credit and money is presented in an official pamphlet well illustrated with charts: The Federal Reserve System, Its Purposes and Functions, by the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System, 2d ed. (Washington, 1947. 125 p.). The last chapter summarizes: "Experience over four decades shows that reserve banking is of vital importance to the national economy. Provision of bank reserves has come to be the major Federal Reserve function." 5987. Lamont, Thomas W. Henry P. Davison; the record of a useful life. New York, Harper, 1933. xxii, 373 p. ports. 33-15632 HG2463.D3L3 This biography of "Harry" Davison (1 867-1922), written by "his friend and partner," devotes fully as much attention to the subject's character, personal affairs, and distinguished public services as to his brilliant banking career. From the bottom step in a village bank he rose in 10 years to the presidency of a New York bank. Founder of the Bankers' Trust Company, a director of the First National Bank, influential in curbing the money panic of 1907, a designer of the Federal Reserve System, a Morgan partner, and chairman in 19 10 of the Six- ECONOMIC LIFE / 929 Power Chinese Loan Conference (Chinese Con- sortium) in Paris, he became one of America's most powerful figures in national and international finance. His outstanding public service was as chairman of the Red Cross War Council during the First World War, when in two annual drives he raised first $115 million, and then $170 million for the Red Cross war chest. Mr. Lamont's admiring, intimate, affectionate, and readable story has for its last appendix the citation accompanying the award of the Distinguished Service Medal to Davison. 5988. Larson, Henrietta M. Jay Cooke, private banker. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1936. xvii, 512 p. illus. (Harvard studies in business history, 2) 36-36152 HG2463.C6L3 Jay Cooke's private banking partnership, formed in Philadelphia in 1861, sprang into rapid prom- inence through the sale of Civil War bonds. He sold Treasury notes in Pennsylvania in 1861, and in October 1862 was appointed by Secretary of the Treasury Chase as special agent for the "five- twenties," a 6 percent loan callable in 5 years and maturing in 20. His high-pressure salesmanship, reaching the small investor through advertising and agents, marked "a notable achievement in the his- tory of American finance." In 1864, after the Treasury had failed in its own attempt to float a large loan, Cooke was again called upon to act as government subscription agent, and his campaign for the victory loan resulted in an unprecedented over-subscription. After the war he turned to financing business undertakings, and in 1869 be- came heavily involved in active promotion of the Northern Pacific Railroad. Through overexten- sion and other errors, his firm failed in 1873, pre- cipitating the panic and depression which ended the postwar boom. In this business biography, exten- sively documented from Cooke's voluminous manu- scripts and other contemporary sources, Dr. Larson ranks the "Tycoon," as his partners called him, as an outstanding leader in the history of American business. "He was the first in America to stand out dramatically and efficiendy as an active investment banker operating on a large scale . . . Though he himself failed, those who later followed his gen- eral strategy succeeded." 5989. Lewis, Cleona. The United States and foreign investment problems. Washington, Brookings Institution, 1948. xviii, 359 p. maps. 48-4989 HG4538.L45 This investigation of the outlook for American private investment abroad was written by a Brook- ings Institution specialist in 1948, the year that saw the inception of the Marshall Plan, and published just as the Truman Plan (Point Four Program) was announced. Dr. Lewis' standard work, America's Staf^e in International Investments (Washington, Brookings Institution, 1938. 710 p. The Institute of Economics of the Brookings Institution. Publi- cation no. 75), is brought up to date in the present volume, with statistical data and other information showing the post-World War II position of the United States as the world's principal creditor nation. The first part explains the nature of foreign investments and reviews America's capacity for foreign investment, and the respective positions of debtor and creditor countries in 1938 and in 1947. Part 2 is on opportunities for developmental capital abroad, obstacles to future investors from the policies of foreign countries, and the responsibility of the private investor. Part 3 explains the United States Government's part in foreign investment — the war an dpostwar lending agencies, culminating in the European Recovery (Marshall) Plan. In her sum- mary and conclusions Dr. Lewis states that, al- though the government encourages export of Ameri- can capital, private investment cannot compete with government loans and grants. Since the pub- lication of this work official policy has turned in- creasingly toward the stimulation of private invest- ment abroad, particularly in the underdeveloped areas. A series of useful handbooks of "basic in- formation for United States businessmen" has been in course of publication by the U. S. Bureau of Foreign Commerce since 1953, of which the 17th is Investment in Nigeria (Washington, 1957. 182 p.). 5990. Mowbray, Albert H., and Ralph H. Blan- chard. Insurance, its theory and practice in the United States. 4th ed. New York, McGraw- Hill, 1955. 569 p. illus. (McGraw-Hill insurance series) 54-12254 HG8051.M75 1955 5991. Stalson, J. Owen. Marketing life insurance; its history in America. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1942. xl, 911 p. illus. (Harvard studies in business history, 6) A42-939 HG8876.S73 "Notes and references": p. [6491-714. 5992. James, Marquis. The Metropolitan Life, a study in business growth. New York, Viking Press, 1947. 480 p. illus. 47-30046 HG8963.M52J3 Bibliography: p. 457-464. These three books represent three distinct ap- proaches to the subject of insurance. The first has been a standard college text since 1930, and is now revised after the death of Professor Mowbray by the editor of the McGraw-Hill insurance scries. It covers all branches of insurance, beginning with a discussion of the theory of risk, insurance, and 930 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES prevention, and explaining in detail the various types of insurance contracts, the kinds of insurance companies, their market, premium rates, and other financial and organizational arrangements, together with the elements of governmental supervision and the question of risk management. Dr. Stalson's thick volume is a scholarly history of the life insur- ance business in America, in detail from the "revolu- tion of 1843" which introduced mutuality (the policyholders are the shareholders) and led to a vastly expanded volume of business. It emphasizes the roles of the soliciting agents and the general agents (wholesalers), and their evolving relation- ships to the home offices. Like the rest of this Harvard business history series, it includes impor- tant appendixes of statistical and other tabulated data. The third book, by a Pulitzer prize-winning biographer recently deceased, is more lively writing, geared to a general audience. It sketches briefly the origins of the insurance business, reaching after two chapters the foundation of the Metropolitan Life Insurance Company in 1868. The rest of the narra- tive tells of the rise, development, and organization of the great company, its relations with other insur- ance firms and with government investigators and legislation, its trusteeship methods, and its influence on the economic and social welfare of the country. 5993. The New York money market. New York, Columbia University Press, 1931-32. 4 v. illus. 31-32268 HG184.N5N4 Bibliography at end of each volume. A series of studies produced under the auspices of the Columbia University Council for Research in the Social Sciences. The scope is broad, the term money market being defined to include "all the funds available for productive, commercial, or specu- lative purposes, as well as the mechanism by which these funds are gathered together from holders not immediately requiring their use, and redistributed in answer to the needs of various classes of bor- rowers." It comprises the call loan market (the salient feature), the commercial paper market, the investment market, and relationships with the banks and the Treasury. The first volume, prepared as a thesis, is by Margaret G. Myers: Origins and De' velopment. This is a historical study divided into two distinct periods, from before 1800 to the Na- tional Bank Act of 1863, and from 1863 to the passage of the Federal Reserve Act of 1913. Within these periods the treatment is topical: e. g., "The Origin of the Investment Market," "The Govern- ment and the Money Market before 1863," "The Commercial Credit System from 1863 to 1913." The three other volumes deal with aspects of the money market from 1913 to 1932. Volume 2, Sources and Movements of Funds, contains a dis- cussion of "The Basis of Money Market Funds," by Benjamin Haggott Beckhart, and one of "The Ebb and Flow of Money Market Funds," by James G. Smith. Volume 3, by Mr. Beckhart, is Uses of Funds, covering bankers' loans, the commercial paper market, and the acceptance market. The last volume, External and Internal Relations, contains contributions by Mr. Beckhart on "Federal Reserve Policy and the Money Market, 1923-1931," by William Adams Brown, Jr., on "The Government and the Money Market," and by James G. Smith on "Money Market Periodicities and Interrelationships." Although obviously meant for a specialized audi- ence, this thoroughly documented work is notably clear and readable. 5994. Pickett, Ralph R., and Marshall D. Ketchum. Investment principles and policy. New York, Harper, 1954. 820 p. 53-11678 HG4521.P5 This textbook, focused on the problems of the individual investor, is not for the beginner in the financial field; the authors assume that "the student has knowledge of the basic principles of economics, accounting, and corporation finance." There are three parts; the first, "The Background of Invest- ment," includes a discussion of the management of savings, a review of the chief aspects of corporate financing, and general considerations on the selec- tion and analysis of investments. Part 2 describes fully the individual "Instruments of Finance" — life and other types of insurance, securities of Fed- eral, local, and foreign governments, real estate in- vestments, and common-stock investment in the securities of various kinds of enterprise: manufac- turing, merchandising, mines, railroads, public utilities, etc. The last part, "Investment Policy," explains the mechanics of investing, the regulation of securities, and factors to be considered such as political risks, taxation, and general business condi- tions. The final chapter is direct advice to the in- vestor concerning his over-all program. Each chapter is followed by a short list of selected readings. 5995. Smith, Darrell Hevenor. The General Ac- counting Office, its history, activities and organization. Baltimore, Johns Hopkins Press, 1927. 215 p. (Institute for Government Research. Service monographs of the United States Govern- ment, no. 46) 27-23158 HJ9802.S6 Bibliography: p. 196-205. 5996. Mansfield, Harvey C. The Comptroller General; a study in the law and practice of financial administration. New Haven, Yale Uni- versity Press, 1939. 302 p. 39-8570 HJ9802.M3 ECONOMIC LIFE / 93 1 5997. U. S. Congress. House. Committee on Gov- ernment Operations. The General Account- ing Office; a study of its organization and adminis- tration with recommendations for increasing its effectiveness; seventeenth intermediate report. Washington, U. S. Govt. Print. Off., 1956. 133 p. diagrs. (84th Cong., 2d sess. House report no. 2264) 56-61520 HJ9802.A522 1956 "The General Accounting Office, according to the Budget and Accounting Act of 1921, is an inde- pendent establishment of the United States Govern- ment with auditing, quasi-judicial, investigating, and other duties." So begins Mr. Smith's history and description of the activities and organization of this Federal service. The General Accounting Of- fice comes under the legislative branch, and reports to Congress its findings as to financial conditions of government agencies. The Comptroller General is appointed for a term of 15 years, probably in agree- ment with the dictum of Fisher Ames in the debate upon the Treasury Department Act of 1789: "The science of accounts is at best but an abstruse and dry study; it is scarcely to be understood but by an un- wearied assiduity for a long time." Mr. Mansfield quotes this sentence as a motto for his analysis and appraisal of the General Accounting Office. His book was written shortly after the term of the first Comptroller General had ended (in 1936, when the retiring official shook the dust of the place from his feet, emitting to the press blasts against New Deal fiscal policy). The author is highly critical of the administration of the office, suggesting that the Comptroller General has functioned, not as the independent critic of and useful check on the exec- utive use of public funds that he was intended to be, but as a "petty tyrant." During the depression and World War II the use of government corporations for many types of enterprise was greatly expanded, most of them operating on budgets and programs not subject to congressional approval and with ex- penditures which were not audited by the General Accounting Office. In 1945 two pieces of legisla- tion, the George Act and the Government Corpora- tion Control Act, brought the corporations under uniform controls, which included provision for auditing and reports by the General Accounting Office. Legislation in 1946, 1949, and 1950 has further affected the development of the Office. Its present status is succincdy explained in die 1956 Report of the House Committee on Government Operations, The General Accounting Office. 5998. Smith, James G. The development of trust companies in the United States. New York, Holt, 1928. xxi, 613 p. (American business series) 28-5049 HG4352.S6 1928 The corporate fiduciary or trust company in America had its phenomenal development in the wake of the huge fortunes accumulated in the age of enterprise, as an instrument for the conservation of that wealth. In the 50 years before 1928, the num- ber of such companies in the United States had in- creased from 39 to 2,731. The present monograph, prepared as a doctoral thesis at Princeton, is a sub- stantial study analyzing the nature and functions of trust companies, reviewing the origins of trusteeship and the history of corporate fiduciaries in the United States from 18 18, when "the embryo of the modern corporate fiduciary emerged as a collateral feature of a [Boston] life insurance company," and explain- ing the problems of trust companies in America in the late 1920's. To arrive at current practice and problems, the author in 1925 sent an n-point ques- tionnaire to 2,500 banks and trust companies, and received 255 useful replies, upon which his analysis is based. The author appends a long bibliography (p. 487-563) in two parts, first a general list, and then a list of periodical articles arranged by topics. 5999. Smith, Walter B. Economic aspects of the Second Bank of the United States. Cam- bridge, Harvard University Press, 1953. 314 p. (Studies in economic history) 52-5408 HG2525.S6 Bibliographical references included in "Notes" (p. [2651-307). 6000. Hammond, Bray. Banks and politics in America, from the Revolution to the Civil War. Princeton, Princeton University Press, 1957- 771 p. 57-8667 HG247J.II3 Bibliography: p. 747-760. "The Second Bank of the United States was founded in 18 16 under a charter from the United States Government and functioned under this charter until March 3, 1836. The Treasury needed such an institution as a depository for the revenue and as an agency for the transfer and disbursement of its funds." It was favored by business groups and financiers, and opposed by agrarian interests. After early troubles, it operated smoothly through 1829. "The years between 1830 and 1836 were dominated by the struggle to prolong its life by a renewal of its Federal charter. Failing to secure this authorization from Washington, the Bank did business under a charter from the state of Pennsylvania from 1836 to 1841. During these last five years its career was spectacular, and it ultimately failed early in 1841." Dr. Smith's scholarly study relates the history of the Second Bank to its place in the broad economic history of the United States, subordinating the politi- cal aspects of the spectacular contest between Nicho- las Biddle, its leader and president, and its enemy, President Jackson, and his followers, to the siatistic.il analysis of American financial development through- 932 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES out the period. The Bank War of the 1830's is also central to Mr. Hammond's impressive synthesis of banking history with general history, for it was the desire to interpret that war properly that embarked him upon his protracted researches. He formulates the essence of his book thus: "It reflects the political and cultural force of business enterprise, which seems to me to have been the most powerful con- tinuing influence in American life ever since Inde- pendence. The rival force in the early 19th century was agrarianism, formerly dominant but no longer so. These two fought about banks, because banks provide credit, and credit is indispensable to enter- prise." Notwithstanding this broad oudook, Mr. Hammond is well aware that his book's value is strictly dependent upon his mastery of all the tech- nical aspects of early banking, and this it abundantly displays. He brings multiple and cumulative evi- dence for his conclusion that "the Jacksonian revo- lution" was in fact the conquest of the economy by a group of self-made men born on farms, whose "skill in propaganda, in cant, and in demagogy" employed the agrarian ideology to accomplish aims the opposite of agrarian. "From possession of what was generally considered the best monetary system in the world, the country fell back into one of the most disordered." It was rich and expansive enough to bear the consequences. 6001. Smithies, Arthur. The budgetary process in the United States. New York, McGraw- Hill, 1955. xxi, 486 p. (Committee for Economic Development. Research study) 54-11767 HJ2051.S58 In 1929 Federal expenditures were slightly less than $3 billion, but in the fiscal year 1954 the United States Government spent $68 billion. The budgetary techniques, however, had evolved from earlier pro- cedures with little change to fit the transformed economy. The present work prepared for the Com- mittee for Economic Development is a comprehen- sive survey of the budgetary process with specific proposals for its improvement. The author, now a professor at Harvard, served as chief of the economic branch of the Bureau of the Budget from 1943 to 1948. His basic presupposition, he says, is "that government decision-making can be improved by the clear formulation of alternatives — regardless of the extent to which the final decisions are influenced by bargains between the President and the Congress, the influence of organized groups, or the pressure of local and regional interests." He examines the proc- ess in detail, reviewing its historical development (including the reforms recommended by the Hoover Commission in 1949-50) and the budget in opera- tion, as prepared by the President, considered by Congress, and executed and reviewed by both the legislative and executive branches. He then sets forth general proposals for reform. The second half of the study deals with specific areas of the budget, defense and nondefense programs, and the signifi- cance for the national economy of balancing or fail- ing to balance. Speaking of the present process, he considers it "not far short of miraculous that lit! works as well as it does." 6002. Stern, Siegfried. The United States in inter- national banking. New York, Columbia University Press, 1951. 447 p. 51-14805 HF3031.S8 Bibliography: p. [4271-431. During and after the First World War American banking houses began to take over from England "the world's purse strings," and by the end of the Second World War the United States was securely established as the predominant power in world finance. The operations of international banking are carried out mainly in a few large institutions. The author for many years headed the foreign departments of various New York banks, and his work is aimed at specialists in finance. It includes a rapid historical review of United States international banking from 1914 to 1945; discussion of the prob- lems of foreign credit, foreign exchange, foreign fund control, etc., in wartime; description of govern- ment corporations in this field (the Export-Import Bank and such war agencies as the Defense Supplies Corporation); and a review of silver policy during the 1930's. The longest part, which accounts for over half the text, is a country-by-country analysis of the relations of American banks with the rest of the world. Finally, the organizational aspects are explained, and a short chapter speculates on the oudook for the future. K. Business: General 6003. Bright, James R. Automation and manage- ment. Boston, Division of Research, Gradu- ate School of Business Administration, Harvard University, 1958. 270 p. illus. 58-5968 HD45.B67 Professor Bright has been engaged since 1954 in research on the implications for management of the new technological developments called automation, insofar as they relate to factory productivity. The first part of his book explains the nature of auto- ECONOMIC LIFE / 933 made manufacturing, how it is coming about, and where: it can be done profitably with electric lamps but not with shoes. Part 2 covers the data of re- search into the programs of 13 plants that have adopted automation systems. Part 3 is the author's analysis of the critical areas of automation as affect- ing management, based essentially on the study of these 13 plants. Here are chapters on how most economically to manage "downtime," when the interdependent machines for any reason stop; on what happens to the productivity and skilled status of the automated work force; on personnel problems; on sales — holding up to the light in each case satis- factory and unsatisfactory factors. Finally the author offers a mainly optimistic "Interpretadon of Automation, Its Effect on the Factory and Its Impact on Management." A typical warning is that auto- madon newly installed always needs "debugging"; the system invariably begins by breaking down. 6004. Clark, John M. Social control of business. 2d ed. New York, Whittlesey House, Mc- Graw-Hill, 1939. xvi, 537 p. (Business and eco- nomics publications) 39-27584 HD45.C5 1939 "References for further reading" at end of each chapter. In the first half of this philosophic study of the control exercised by society on the individual busi- nessman or corporadon, Professor Clark analyzes into their fundamentals the conceptions, growth, and purposes of social control, and the legal aspects of formal and informal institutions that serve as agencies of control. The entire second half of the first edition (1926) dealt with the particular major field of public utilities and trusts. Eventful years passed before the present edidon, to which the author added a section examining the policies of the "new era" of depression, of New Deal experimenta- tion in state control, and of the full development of totalitarianism abroad. His goal for the American people is "democratic efficiency," and his preferred method one of "democratic gradualism," in which the social order and the individualistic man may move together toward cooperation. "By developing cooperative features and organizadons within our system, we may develop cooperative impulses, habits, and customs, and these may enable us to develop more cooperative institutions, and so on, as far as our inherent capacities will carry us. First steps must be tried without waiting for human nature to be fully ready for them, but complete revolutions on this principle are precarious." 6005. Cochran, Thomas C. The American busi- ness system; a historical perspecdve, 1900- 1955. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1957. 227 p. (The Library of Congress series in American civilization) 57-12964 HC106.C638 Professor Cochran's concentrated historical per- spective of the 20th century falls naturally into two eras, divided by the spectacular collapse of 1929- 30. His theme is the relation of business to so- ciety; his treatment of it is in general terms. In 1900 American businessmen, he says, were an elite group who believed in a self-reguladng economy in which they could take care of themselves with- out responsibility for the welfare of others. Tech- nological change, especially in mass production and transportation, has been the chief cause of a shift in industrial management from owner to profes- sional executive, whose broader oudook involves social accountability. The collapse of the age of industrial control by giant corporations and of fi- nancial control by big investment houses was fol- lowed by the fundamental revisions of the 1930's. "Political and social innovations, fathered by depres- sion, were passed on to a period of war and pros- perity where they took on new meanings and gave a new form to American society." The spread of bureaucracy in both government and business has proceeded hand in hand with managerial enter- prise; public relations have become a primary con- cern; it is accepted that governmental controls must stabilize the economy. With an ever-rising stand- ard of living the social prestige of great wealth has declined, and the big businessman is hardly dis- tinguishable from the average American. 6006. Dimock, Marshall E. Business and govern- ment. 3d ed. New York, Holt, 1957. 559 p. illus. 57-5696 HD3616.U47D5 1957 Professor Dimock, who has held a variety of Federal administrative positions of consequence, now heads the graduate department of government at New York University. His widely used text- book, originally issued in 1949, has followed an opposite course to that normally taken by the suc- cessful college manual in our day: successive edi- tions have become smaller instead of larger. In this third edition he has made a special effort "to convey an insight into the inner workings of govern- ment because students of economics and business administration have little time in their formal edu- cation to acquire this kind of knowledge, and yet it stands them in good stead once they graduate into the world of practical economic affairs." This edi- tion stresses public policy formation, institutions, and pressure groups more than did its predecessors, but the policy areas dealt with remain the same: "pressure groups and big government; the inde- pendent enterprise system and concentrated eco- nomic power; organized labor and industrial dis- putes; agricultural policy, which also includes the 934 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES cooperative movement and the conservation of nat- ural resources; the cold war, tariff policy, technical assistance, and the international and domestic as- pects of atomic energy; public-utility regulation and public ownership and operation; the public control of banking, investment, and insurance; general methods of coping with depressions," etc. 6007. Gras, Norman S. B., and Henrietta M. Lar- son. Casebook in American business his- tory. New York, Crofts, 1939. 765 p. 39-31004 HF1118.G7 In his courses at the Harvard Graduate School of Business Administration Professor Gras regu- larly used the case method for instruction. This volume illustrates American business history through 38 cases of individual businessmen or com- panies, presented in analytical narrative and in ex- cerpts from letters, records, and other primary sources. The cases are American, with only five exceptions; these include the first, Sir Thomas Smythe (i558(?)-i625) and the Virginia Company, and the last, the Hugo Stinnes Konzern which was liquidated in Germany in 1925-26. In between are some of the most famous names of men, firms, banking houses, speculations, etc., in the American economic scene from early Colonial days to 1938. Each case is developed at considerable length, with additional pieces of information crammed into long footnotes. The cases are put in three groups, dis- tinguished as mercantile capitalism (ending with J. J. Astor in 1848), industrial capitalism, and fi- nance capitalism and combination in business. The last hundred pages analyze business trends, with chronological periods as "cases," showing the rise of specialization and the tendency toward combina- tion in periods of varying price movements. A varying number of references are appended to each case. 6008. Owens, Richard N. Business organization and combination. 4th ed. New York, Prentice-Hall, 195 1. 562 p. 51-5302 HD2741.O85 1951 An exposition of the various forms of noncor- porate and corporate business enterprise. The for- mer include the single proprietorship, the partner- ship, the joint-stock company, and the business trust, which are described in clear and easily under- standable terms. Regarding corporations, Profes- sor Owens gives their historical background and then discusses the theory of legal entity, the char- ter, the kinds and uses of stocks and bonds, the legal regulation of issue and sale of securities, the role of directors, and procedures in corporate dissolu- tion and reorganization. A special section explains the investment company, which may be a joint-stock company, a business trust, or a corporation. A long part on industrial combinations considers trade as- sociations, gendemen's agreements, pools, cartels, consolidated companies and holding companies, leased companies, cooperatives, and the general eco- nomic significance of combination. A final part is on government regulation, with some background from the common law preceding a review of state and federal antitrust legislation. There are short reading lists at the end of chapters. A somewhat different approach to his subject matter is used by Professor Owens in a more recent book, Introduction to Business Policy (Homewood, 111., R. D. Irwin, 1954. 474 p.). He is concerned here with theo- retical and practical aspects of business policies and objectives — their meaning and significance, their formulation and administration, the organizational roles of stockholders and directors, and policies gov- erning production, sales, public relations, and finance. 6009. Petersen, Elmore, and Edward Grosvenor Plowman. Business organization and man- agement. 3d ed. Homewood, 111., R. D. Irwin, 1953. 634 p. illus. 53-2866 HF5351.P48 1953 "A definitive treatment of the principles of or- ganization and management that are the energiz- ing elements of all types of business, large or small, and wherever managerial leadership is required." The authors, who both write from long experience as business executives, explain management as con- sisting essentially of directives and controls, with its various levels of authority — directors' level, ex- ecutive level, supervisory level — being determined by the factor of efficiency in control. Departmen- tation and functionalization, to which chapters are devoted, are not such formidable concepts as the terms suggest; they lead direcdy to organization charts, with which the text is well provided. Man- agerial responsibilities are scrutinized in the realms of centralization, decentralization, communication, efficiency, and incentive. The last chapter is direct advice to the student preparing for a career in man- agement. 6010. Sutton, Francis X., and others. The Amer- ican business creed, [by] Francis X. Sutton, Seymour E. Harris, Carl Kaysen, [and] James Tobin. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1956. 414 p. 56-8553 HC106.S88 In this study a sociologist, Mr. Sutton, has collab- orated with three economists to examine the ide- ology of American business as expressed by its spokesmen. The content of the "creed" is ex- pounded in the first 12 chapters according to its chief themes — the American system of business en- terprise, the functions of ownership, the relations of businessmen with labor and with customers, the relations of government with business, the value of competition, business cycles, money, and the values of a good society. The illustrations are quo- tations or digests of public statements of business leaders in speeches, writings, and testimony before congressional committees, and examples from ad- vertising and the literature of business associations. In comparison with the normal tenets of modern social science, the creed is revealed as essentially conservative, individualistic, and moralistic. In the last six chapters the authors seek to show that this ECONOMIC LIFE / 935 business ideology is determined largely by "deep- lying motivational forces." They suggest that it is less real belief than symbolical expression, in- tended to resolve the strains inherent in American business institutions and the tensions of the business executive, in conflict with other demands of society. But, they point out, "the rigidity of the business creed should not be exaggerated. American busi- ness now gives at least de jacto acceptance to a mul- titude of laws and practices which it earlier opposed as dangerous to the commonwealth or morally re- pugnant." L. Business: Special 601 1. Berle, Adolf A. The modern corporation and private property, by Adolf A. Berle, Jr., and Gardiner C. Means. New York, Macmillan, 1937. 396 p. diagrs. 38-1 1 139 HD2795.B53 1937 In 1932, at the darkest point of the Great Depres- sion, this epoch-making book appeared. Its authors, both to become prominent in the "Brain Trust" of the New Deal, were respectively a finance lawyer and professor of corporation law at Columbia Law School, and a practicing and research economist. Based on a series of technical and statistical studies of corporation development and finance, the book presented their conclusions concerning the "unrec- ognized" but "far advanced" "corporate revolu- tion" through which, the writers believed, America was passing. Their first table lists, with their gross assets, the 200 largest nonbanking corpora- tions in the United States, which "form the very framework of American industry." "The transla- tion of perhaps two-thirds of the industrial wealth of the country from individual ownership to owner- ship by the large, publicly financed corporations vitally changes the lives of property owners, the lives of workers, and the methods of property tenure. The divorce of ownership from control consequent on the process almost necessarily involves a new form cf economic organization of society." The evolution and legal position of the corporate system in which economic power is now concentrated .ire studied, and the virtues and dangers of the system examined. The dangers, in the authors' view, lay in the corporations' lack of legal responsibility, which permitted them to turn aside all efforts at Federal regulation, and even to attempt to dominate the national government. The influence of this study was evident in the Temporary National Eco- nomic Committee's hearings during 1938-40, and in the antitrust actions of Thurman Arnold, Assist- ant Attorney General during 1938-43; and its views have entered into the substance of practically all later discussions in its field. 6012. Berle, Adolf A. The 20th century capitalist revolution. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1954. 192 p. 54-11327 HD2731.B4 In 1954 Professor Berle expanded a lecture series on the corporation as a quasi-political institution into this thought-provoking book. He joins several other recent appraisers (for instance, Galbraith, no. 5886, and Lilienthal, no. 5892) in suggesting that the modern corporation is beneficial to society. The old checks of free competition and "the judgment of the market place" (the influence of investors) have been replaced by the force of public opinion and by the competition among the giants of the "oligopoly" to give the best service to their "constituency," a pub- lic which must be kept satisfied. Otherwise, na- tionalization! "The real guarantee of nonstatist in- dustrial organization in America is a substantially satisfied public." The writer compares the unwrit- ten but developing laws of the corporation for the protection of individual rights (as in cases of se- curity hearings) to the medieval institution cf the Curia regis, the King's Court, through which the kinjr redressed grievances according to his con- science. He shows the corporation to be a powerful instrument in international affairs, where hope may be brighter for economic than for political agree- ment. In conclusion he describes the social role of the corporation, which through huge planned ex- penditures for public welfare, education, and com- munity development, may be shaping the "City of God" of the future. One of the first economics, after World War II, to voice the idea that big busi- ness was not a force for evil in social and politic.il 93^ / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES life was Peter F. Drucker, whose much-quoted Concept of the Corporation (New York, John Day, 1946. 297 p.) was written after 18 months' experi- ence as an outside consultant on management to General Motors. 6013. Bonbright, James C, and Gardiner C. Means. The holding company, its public significance and its regulation. New York, Mc- Graw-Hill, 1932. 398 p. diagrs. 32-8783 HD2795.B65 A study of a special aspect of the problem of com- bination in business, which appeared a few months before Mr. Means' more far-reaching work in collab- oration with Professor Berle (no. 601 1). Particu- larly during the 1920's, the public utility enterprises of the nation had been largely centralized through a few great holding company systems — for in- stance, in gas and electricity, the United Corpora- tion Group, the Electric Bond and Share Group, and the Insull Utility Group — which were power- ful enough to evade or disregard laws for their con- trol by public service commissions. The authors examined the theory of the holding company and its status as an alternative to other forms of com- bination. Then they scrutinized the record of the public utility holding companies, the railroad hold- ing companies (the Van Sweringen system was at that time particularly in the public eye), and the bank holding companies. In their final evaluation they suggested that the holding company system is popular with business promoters, first, in that it is the most facile of all the possible legal devices for combining independent enterprises, and second, that it is the least subject to social control. The latter aspect they considered a danger justifying "grave public concern and criticism." 6014. Davis, Joseph StanclifTe. Essays in the earlier history of American corporations. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1917. 2 v. diagrs. (Harvard economic studies, v. 16) 17-12885 HD2785.D3 6015. Evans, George Heberton. Business incor- porations in the United States, 1 800-1 943. [New York] National Bureau of Economic Re- search, 1948. 184 p. illus. (Publications of the National Bureau of Economic Research, no. 49) 48-10514 HD2785.E85 Dr. Davis' four long historical essays on corpora- dons in 18th-century America have attained the rank of a classic in business history. Three are in the first volume: "Corporations in the American Colonies," "William Duer, Entrepreneur," and "The 'S. U. M.': the First New Jersey Business Cor- poration." All are interesting narratives, with his- torical fact interpreted in its legal, economic, and social significance. The writer first describes the several types of public and private corporations char- tered either by the British government or, the great majority, by the Colonial governments: they were boroughs, towns, local administrative boards, col- leges, churches, library companies, marine societies, etc. The essay on William Duer (1742-1799), the New York patriot, financier, and land speculator, who was prime mover in the abortive Scioto land enterprise and whose failure and arrest for debt initiated the panic of 1792, studies "a typical bull operator in a boom period," one besides of doubtful morality whose career ended in deserved disaster. The S. U. M. was the Society for Establishing Use- ful Manufactures, incorporated by the New Jersey Legislature in 1791, promoted by Alexander Hamil- ton, raison d'etre of the town of Paterson, and still in existence at the time of writing. In volume 2 the fourth and longest essay, "Eighteenth Century Business Corporations in the United States," de- scribes banking companies, corporations for improv- ing communications, for insurance, water supply, manufacturing, and other matters. The list of charters is given in an appendix. The published and unpublished sources for the four essays fill a 50-page bibliography. A very different approach to the subject is made in Professor Evans' study. Nine chapters of running analysis are accompanied by 44 tables and 26 charts compiled by the National Bureau of Economic Research. The first chapters explain the nature of the study, of particular inter- est for its implications as to business cycles, and the significance of an incorporadon. During the first three quarters of the 19th century most incorpora- tions were effected by special charter; they have a chapter to themselves. Next trends in business in- corporations from 1875 to 1943 are examined, fol- lowed by statistical tabulations: the number of in- corporations and their authorized capital stock; large, medium, and small business corporations; and an industrial classification. The last two chap- ters examine the fields of corporate enterprise and the relationship of the number of incorporations to business cycles. Further statistics of incorporations by separate States, periods, etc., are set forth in 90 pages of appendixes. 6016. East, Robert A. Business enterprise in the American revolutionary era. New York, Columbia University Press, 1938. 387 p. (Colum- bia University. Faculty of Political Science. Studies in history, economics and public law, no. 439) 39-2808 HC105.E24 1938a H3i.C7,no.439 Bibliography: p. 330-356. A history of business undertakings in America ECONOMIC LIFE / 937 from 1775 to 1792, in the preparation of which the author used an overwhelming array of material, published and unpublished — public records, family papers, business papers, letters, diaries, memoirs, travels, biographies, local histories, and specialized historical studies. His special interest lies in the transition from the individual mercantile enterprise of the late Colonial period to the beginnings of industrial capitalism. The change was evidenced most clearly in new mechanisms and opportunities for investment: joint-stock companies, factory proj- ects for textile manufactures, companies for land speculation, communication projects, the new com- mercial banks of the 1780's, and the like, which were superseding the earlier partnerships or per- sonally supervised investments. Much of the study concentrates upon the individual promoters who grasped the opportunities offered by the new eco- nomic forces of the Revolution, and prepared the way for a more developed capitalist system. Note- worthy among the many whose transactions the author records are the Connecticut trader and Com- missary General of the Continental forces, Jere- miah Wadsworth, and the Philadelphia merchant and financier, Robert Morris. 6017. Haynes, Benjamin R., and Harry P. Jack- son. A history of business education in the United States. Cincinnati, Southwestern Pub. Co., IQ 35- 159 P- 35- 2 923 HF1131.H3 On cover: Monograph 25. A clearly written and organized outline which draws upon a considerable number of monographs, articles, and other secondary works for its facts. The private business school or "commercial col- lege" sprang up in our Eastern cities during the second quarter of the 19th century; it is "peculiarly American; nothing exactly like it is known in other countries." It enjoyed a practical monopoly of business education for decades, but from about 1890, after some 15 years of tentative beginnings, the public high schools moved into the field in a vigo- rous manner, and were soon offering a wide variety of courses designed to train young people for a business career. Several cities established high schools of commerce, with their whole curriculum focused upon efficient business training: the first was opened at Washington, D. C, in 1890, and enrolled 160 boys and 150 girls for its first year. The first venture at the college level was the Wharton School of Finance and Commerce at the University of Pennsylvania, founded in 1881; it had no imitators until 1898. The authors follow the spread of com- mercial training in junior high schools, corre- spondence schools, denominational schools, and other variedes, in a regularly concise and instruc- tive manner. 6018. Holden, Paul E., Lounsbury S. Fish, and Hubert L. Smith. Top management or- ganization and control. Stanford University, Calif., Stanford University Press, 194 1. xvii, 239 p. diagrs. ([Stanford business series]) 41-5421 HD31.H6 6019. National Institute for Commercial and Trade Organization Executives. Trade as- sociation management; textbook for trade associa- tion management curriculum. Editor: Delbert J. Duncan; assistant editors: Paul H. Sullivan [and] Minita Westcott. Rev. ed. [Chicago] 1948. 190 p. 48-4488 HD2421.N25 1948 The subtitle of the first work explains its nature: "a research study of the management policies and practices of thirty-one leading industrial corpora- tions, conducted under the auspices of the Gradu- ate School of Business, Stanford University." The arrangement reverses the work of research; the last section is provided by the data sheet used in the field interviews on which the study was based, while the book begins with a succinct summary and con- clusions regarding the findings. These have been collated in a general treatment without reference to individual companies. The long central sections explain organization practices concerning top man- agement, operations, staff, and committees; all phases of control practices; and the functions, com- position, organization and procedure of the board of directors. A textbook for executives in a more specialized field is Trade Association Management. This ready reference guide has 7 parts, the first 4 giving the history, objectives, and policies of trade associations and analyzing their membership and (in the longest section of 14 chapters) their activities and services. The last 3 parts contain advice for management concerning operadng problems, finan- cial budgeting and control, and the qualifications of the executive. The 21 chapters are by as many "leading association executives." 6020. Kaplan, Abraham D. H. Big enterprise in a competitive system. Washington, Brook- ings Institution, 1954. 269 p. 54-4577 HC106.5.K36 6021. Kaplan, Abraham D. H. Small business: its place and problems. New York, Mc- Graw-Hill, 1948. xiv, 281 p. diagrs. (Commit- tee for Economic Development. Research study) 48-10456 HC106.K27 The first entry grew out of an investigation con- ducted by Brookings Institution with the aim of clarifying the role of big business in the American system and helping to establish a rational basis for public policy in this area. Big business is supported 93§ / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES in practice by the public, but at the same time excites constant suspicion lest it may bring about a break- down of the competitive system. Dr. Kaplan re- views lucidly the development of public opinion and policy in this regard, and the factors underlying the concept of competitive enterprise. He sums up sta- tistical evidence as to concentration of industry in production, markets, and financial power, taking a particular look at the performance of the hundred largest industrial corporations. Then he analyzes the performance of the big corporations in relation to competition. In his summary and conclusions he states forthrightly that "the business of the Amer- ican industrial giant is still primarily that of a competitor producing and distributing for the mar- ket," and that, rather than stifling competition, big business has contributed to the "scope, vitality, and effectiveness" of the system. The same writer had a few years earlier prepared a thorough report for CED on Small Business. Although the statistical data need revision, it remains useful as a reference work for definitions, and on the patterns of small business, its management, financing, and comped- tive techniques. The last topics considered are edu- cation and public policy in relation to small business. 6022. Maurer, Herrymon. Great enterprise; growth and behavior of the big corporation. New York, Macmillan, 1955. 303 p. 55-13880 HD2785.M37 A popular "general perspective" of the large cor- poration, based on an examination of the behavior of 50 large companies. The extensive checking of the life histories of these companies was performed by the research staff of Fortune, in which parts of the book appeared as articles. The 50 firms are listed on pages 18-19, w ^ tn statistics for the year 1953: total assets almost $82% billion; total earn- ings almost $4 billion; close to 4 million employees. Mr. Maurer describes "The Look of the Large Cor- poration," traces the history of early enterprise, ex- amines the activities of the "corporate center," and explains corporate organizadon and management. He concludes with a chapter on the relation of the corporation to society, emphasizing the basic need of the big business enterprise to understand and explain itself "in such a way that the public under- stands that [its] social responsibilities and economic activities . . . are so inextricably intermingled as to amount to the same thing." 6023. Miller, William, ed. Men in business; es- says in the history of entrepreneurship. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1952. 350 p. 52-5037 HF3023.A2M5 A set of readable and well-documented essays, published under the auspices of the Research Center in Entrepreneurial History at Harvard University. The 1 1 writers are young economists and historians whose work reflects recent theories of psychology and sociology as well as of the Schumpeter school of economics. The first three are on entrepreneur- ship abroad. The others, in roughly chronological order, study selected American promoters and fam- ily or elite groups engaged in new forms of business enterprise from the time of the Revolution. The emphasis throughout is on the personality and social standing of individuals, and their impact upon the political, social, and economic affairs of their day. Among those treated are the Lowell-Higginson- Cabot, Brown, and other family groupings that dominated the beginnings of Massachusetts indus- try; John Stevens of Hoboken and of the first steam- boats; Henry Noble Day, the militant Christian rail- road promoter of the new Middle West; Frank Julian Sprague, the "father of electric traction"; and Henry Varnum Poor, "philosopher of manage- ment," whose railroad manuals introduced an in- formation service for investment. In the last essay Mr. Miller looks at the 20th-century change from "individualistic, innovative, venturesome" entre- preneurship to an orderly and restrained "Business Elite in Business Bureaucracies." 6024. Porter, Kenneth Wiggins. John Jacob Astor, business man. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1931. 2 v. illus. (Harvard studies in business history, 1) 31-28561 CT275.A85P6 "Bibliographical note": v. 2, p. [i299J-i305. John Jacob Astor (1 763-1 848), whose career ex- emplifies the double transidon from petty trader to mercantile capitalist to industrial entrepreneur, has long served as archetype of the self-made man of business in America, the land of boundless oppor- tunity. He arrived by steerage from Germany via England in 1784, with a stock in trade of seven flutes. A shipboard acquaintance led him into the fur trade; he soon established himself as a leading fur merchant trading to Europe, and by constant new ventures, hard work, and hard bargaining built up a huge fortune. In 1800 he ventured a cargo to China, and as the China trade prospered used his capital to organize the American Fur Company and the Pacific Fur Company, intended to monopolize the fur trade of the Far West. The latter and its central depot of Astoria on the Columbia River were casualties of the War of 1812, but the war brought other opportunities of large profit. His fortune of at least $20 million, the greatest of his era in the United States, came in large part from his real estate investments in New York City. Dr. Porter's rounded narrative of Astor's life is a solidly based business biography, for which he had access to voluminous collections of primary sources. Each volume includes an extended section of "Docu- ments," reproducing letters, agreements, contracts, and other business papers. Further light on Astor's Pacific venture is afforded by Washington Irving's Astoria (no. 391). 6025. Silberling, Norman J. The dynamics of business; an analysis of trends, cycles, and time relationships in American economic activity since 1700 and their bearing upon governmental and business policy. New York, McGraw-Hill, I 943- 759 P- diagrs. 43-6816 HB3711.S48 This work, posthumously published, was by a professor of business research who had also headed his own research corporation. It is a study in measurement, analyzing long-term trends of the American economy through quantitative data, mostly as represented in index numbers. With mathematical formulae and graphic charts, in a style difficult for nonspecialist readers, the writer has studied trends of population growth, production and trade, price levels, national and farm income, building and real estate, transportation, banking, international monetary policy, interest rates and stocks, corporate earnings and capital investment, consumer income, wage income, and business fore- casting. In a final chapter on "The Future of Pro- duction and Capital" he expresses anti-Keynesian views, declaring that programs of public works, etc., express a "philosophy of stagnation" with a "corol- lary of bureaucratic capitalism." 6026. Stocking, George W., and Myron W. Wat- kins. Monopoly and free enterprise. With the report and recommendations of the Committee on Cartels and Monopoly. New York, Twentieth Century Fund, 195 1. xv, 596 p. 51-9279 HD2731.S765 The final product of a major investigation of the problems of international cartels and domestic mo- nopoly undertaken by the Twentieth Century Fund in 1944. The research was directed by Professors Stocking and Watkins, both specialists in industrial economics. Two volumes of the same authorship and publisher preceded this, Cartels in Action (1946. 533 P-)» a case history of international cartels in eight important fields, and Cartels or Competition? (1948. 516 p.), which appraised the international cartel movement in terms of its effect on the eco- nomic life of the United States. The present work embodies a well-organized review of the theory, his- tory, and experience of industrial concentration in America, of oligopolistic competition in practice, of antitrust legislation, of government regulation of trade, and of the policies of big business. For this it makes use of many scholarly studies of the two ECONOMIC LIFE / 939 previous decades as well as of the findings of TXEC and other congressional investigating committees, and of Supreme Court decisions. Its argument is a notable assertion of the doctrine that the economic goal of a democratic society is a competitive private enterprise system, genuinely free alike from bureau- cratic and from monopolistic control. The appended program of the Fund Committee calls for vigorous enforcement of the antitrust laws. 6027. Taussig, Frank W., and Carl S. Joslyn. American business leaders; a study in social origins and social stratification. New York, Mac- millan, 1932. xiv, 319 p. 32-25438 HF5353.T3 6028. Newcomer, Mabel. The big business execu- tive; the factors that made him, 1900-1950. New York, Columbia University Press, 1955. 164 P- ihus. 55-10287 HF5500.N37 6029. Warner, William Lloyd, and James C. Abeg- glen. Big business leaders in America. New York, Harper, 1955. 243 p. illus. 55-8545 HF5500.W25 In the first-named, long-standard work a noted Flarvard economist collaborated with a colleague in the department of sociology. Their data were assembled from over 7,000 answers to a question- naire returned by individual business leaders se- lected from Poor's Register of Directors for 1928. The respondents are classified as to business status, geographic distribution, type of business, size of business, and age and time factors. Their occupa- tional origins for two generations back are examined in comparison with studies of social mobility made by Professor Pitirim Sorokin and others. Environ- mental conditions are analyzed with regard to in- fluential connections, financial aid, general school- ing, and special business education. (A high percentage is shown to have had college training, but over 70 percent had no formal business train- ing.) These two sets of factors are correlated with business achievement. The authors conclude that, although 70 percent of the business leaders come from the business and professional classes repre- senting only 10 percent of the American popula- tion, the sons of laborers are handicapped by lack of innate ability rather than of opportunity. Among the appendixes is an interesting selection of "re- marks" made by respondents. A later study in this field is that of Professor Newcomer of Vassar College. Her sample is drawn from the controlling groups of three generations (1900, 1925, 1950) in over 400 of the largest railroad, public utility, and industrial corporations. The introduction explains the purpose, scope, method, and sources of the work, 940 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES and two chapters treat the nature and functions of the board of directors of a big company. Next the origins of the leaders are statistically analyzed as to nationality, religion, politics, income, fathers' oc- cupations, and family income. The education of executives is discussed in a long chapter, and then their early business careers and executive service are surveyed. The last three chapters bring for- ward evidence on incentives, on qualifications of the executives, and on trends in the education of busi- ness administrators. In giving reasons why leader- ship has become professionalized, the author places first the greater degree of education now required for executives. Her conclusion for the future is that standards will increasingly be set by the grad- uate schools of business administration. In the same year a comparable book was addressed to a general audience by two sociologists of the Uni- versity of Chicago, Professors Warner and Abeg- glen. In this the statistical analysis is limited to a few charts, and the emphasis is on personal quali- ties. The leaders are characterized as a "birth and mobile class," their "Royal Road: Higher Educa- tion." Factors in successful careers, such as per- sonalities, wives, and public activities, are examined, and getting ahead is regarded as a calculated, cold- blooded and dog-eat-dog process. 6030. [Thorp, Willard L., and Walter F. Crowder] The structure of industry. Washington, U. S. Govt. Print. Off., 1941. xv, 759 p. ([U. S.] Temporary National Economic Com- mittee. Investigation of concentration of economic power. Monograph no. 27) 41-50311 FIC106.3.A5127, no. 27 At head of tide: 76th Congress, 3d session. Sen- ate committee print. Running title: Concentration of economic power. This is one of the most substantial of the 40-odd monographs prepared by economists to assist the investigations of the TNEC into industrial concen- tration. Dr. Thorp, Mr. Crowder, and their assist- ants studied American industry from 1890 to 1937 with the aim of segregating trends that lead to monopoly. In the first part general trends in the size and scale of operations of manufacturing in- dustries are examined. Part 2 analyzes the struc- ture and functions of integrated manufacturing op- erations. A short chapter summarizes the progress of the merger movement with graphic representa- tion. Brief notes are given on the history of concen- tration in seven selected industries. Part 5 is on "The Concentration of Production in Manufactur- ing," indicating the extent and areas of concentra- tion, leading producers, the relation of concentration to various product characteristics, and changes in concentration. Part 6 analyzes the product struc- ture of the 50 largest manufacturing companies. Each of the two last sections have long appendixes of statistics. The presentation of the whole is quite objective, and based on scientific techniques of eco- nomic measurement. M. Labor: General 6031. Barbash, Jack. The practice of unionism. New York, Harper, 1956. 465 p. 56-9325 HD6508.B353 References, comments, and suggested readings: p. 411-446. 6032. Hardman, Jacob B. S., and Maurice F. Neu- feld, eds. The house of labor; internal oper- ations of American unions. New York, Prentice- Hall, 1951. xviii, 555 p. (Prentice-Hall industrial relations and personnel series) 51-2599 HD6508.H27 The Practice of Unionism is a survey of the prin- ciples and working rules of the modern trade union. General concepts are illustrated with cases of union practice since 1933 and particularly since passage of the Labor-Management Relations (Taft-Hardey) Act in 1947. The incentives for joining and organ- izing labor unions are Mr. Barbash's first considera- tion. There follow expositions of the organization, administration, and structure of unions; an exami- nation of the terms and procedures in the union's central business of collective bargaining under the Taft-Hartley provisions; and an account of its uti- lization of the weapons of strikes, picket lines, and boycotts. Union efforts to influence government and politics are explained as following a public pol- icy of which the welfare state is "a shorthand de- scription." The author writes severly of racketeer- ing and communism in unions, calling them "labor pathology." In describing the functions and serv- ices of the group of "union technicians" to which he himself belongs, he emphasizes that the labor spe- cialist does not make policy. Another work by the professional branch of the labor movement is The House of Labor, prepared under the auspices of the Inter-Union Institute, as the result of a cooperative study by leading staff members of a number of na- tional unions. Mr. Hardman was chairman of the Institute, and Professor Neufeld is with the New York State School of Industrial and Labor Relations at Cornell University, where many of the "labor technicians" receive their training. The 45 chap- ters, to which almost 50 specialists have contributed, are in 8 groups. First is a general appraisal of the current state of the unions, their leaders and mem- bership, and the labor movement as a whole. The succeeding parts cover political activities at home and abroad, union publicity and public relations, research and industrial engineering, welfare, health and community services, union administration, edu- cational activities, and the functions and aims of the union staff. 6033. Commons, John R., and others. History of labour in the United States. New York, Macmillan, 1918-35. 4 v. 18-9293 HD8066.C7 HC101.C75, no. 4 Bibliography: v. 2, p. [5391-587; v. 3, p. 701- 741; v. 4, p. 639-661. Contents. — v. 1. Introduction, by J. R. Com- mons. Colonial and Federal beginnings (to 1827) by D. J. Saposs. Citizenship (1827-1833) by Helen L. Sumner. Trade unionism (1833-1839) by E. B. Mittelman. Humanitarianism (1 840-1 860) by H. E. Hoagland. — v. 2. Nationalisation (1860-1877) by J. B. Andrews. Upheaval and reorganisation (since 1876) by Selig Perlman. — v. 3. Introduction to volumes 3 and 4, by J. R. Commons. Working conditions, by D. D. Lescohier. Labor legislation, by Elizabeth Brandeis. — v. 4. Labor movements, by Selig Perlman and Philip Taft. The first two volumes of this classic work consti- tuted the fourth study in the Carnegie Institution series of Contributions to American economic his- tory (see Clark, no. 5904; Johnson, no. 5948; Meyer, no. 5923) and appeared in 1918 (reprinted last in 1935). Like the rest of the series, it was preceded by the preparation and publication of various mono- graphs and documents. Most notable was A Docu- mentary History of American Industrial Society, edited by Dr. Commons and associates under the auspices of the American Bureau of Industrial Re- search (Cleveland, A. H. Clark, 1910-11. n v.). This compilation of records has provided basic source material not only for the present work but for all subsequent studies in American labor his- tory. Volumes 3 and 4 of the History of Labour continued the original study from 1896 to 1932, and were prepared by colleagues and former students of Professor Commons at the University of Wisconsin. In his introduction this distinguished student of industrial relations gives his own witness to changes in labor organization: "In the course of twenty- ECONOMIC LIFE / 94 1 five years I saw an industry evolve not only from merchant capitalism to employer capitalism, but also from struggles for 'proletarian dictatorship' to the concerted regulations of constitutional government." 6034. Dulles, Foster Rhea. Labor in America, a history. New York, Crowell, 1955. 421 p. (The Growth of America series) 55-11009 HD8066.D8 1955 The voluminous studies of Professor Commons and his associates have been drawn on heavily by Professor Dulles in his history for the general reader. In 21 fast-moving chapters he narrates the whole story of American labor from the indentured servant system of Colonial days to the merger of the A. F. of L. and the C. I. O. in 1955. He traces the growth of the national organization of labor — the precur- sors, the National Labor Union, the Knights of La- bor, the American Federation of Labor, the Con- gress of Industrial Organizations — in perspective against national socioeconomic and political develop- ment. Before turning to the teaching of history Mr. Dulles had been a newspaperman, and his training is reflected in his objective and balanced selections from the inexhaustible source material of the modern labor unions. An introduction to trade- union history designed for a wide audience includ- ing school and workers' education groups is Labor in America, by Harold U. Faulkner and Mark Starr, new rev. ed. (New York, Oxford Book Co., 1957. 330 p.). Most of it is a simple retelling of the story of labor from the medieval guilds to the great unions of World War II and the postwar passage of the Taft-Hartley Act. A chapter explains in simplest terms the structure and functions of unions. The last two chapters, on current union activities and on trends and prospects of 1949-56, take into ac- count the AFL-CIO merger. 6035. Peterson, Florence. American labor un- ions, what they are and how they work. Rev. ed. New York, Harper, 1952. 270 p. illus. 51-11948 HD6508.P42 1952 6036. Dankert, Clyde E. Contemporary unionism in the United States. New York, Prentice- Hall, 1948. xv, 521 p. diagrs. (The Prentice 1 !.i!l industrial reladons and personnel series) 48-10478 HD65o8.D^ By a former chief of the industrial relations di- vision of the U. S. Bureau of Labor Statistics, American Labor Unions is a handbook of note- worthy conciseness and clarity. The historic growth of the labor movement is outlined i" less than 50 pages. The structure and internal govern ment of federated organizations (A. F. of I .., C. 1. O., 942 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES and the railroad brotherhoods) and of national and local unions are next explained, with precise details as to membership rules, finances, and dues. Benefit programs, public relations, and educational activi- ties are given a separate section. The relations of unions and management are discussed as regards collective bargaining, disputes, strikes, and settle- ments under the National Labor Relations Act, the Taft-Hartley Act, and the mediation of Federal agencies. The last part examines the international relations of American trade unions. At the end are a glossary of labor terms and a directory of un- ions in 195 1. The same general field is covered in greater detail in the earlier work by Professor Dan- kert, addressed to a college or professional audi- ence. This objective analysis includes a review of American trade union history, and separate treat- ments of the structure, government, principles, and activities of the A. F. of L. and the C. I. O. The la- bor legislation of the New Deal and the wartime and postwar position of labor are taken into account. The text was largely completed before the passage of the Taft-Hartley Act in 1947, and although the writer describes its major features, experience had not yet revealed its full significance. 6037. Reynolds, Lloyd G. Labor economics and labor relations. 2d ed., with revisions. En- glewood Cliffs, N. J., Prentice-Hall, 1956. 722 p. illus. 56-44059 HD4901.R47 1956 This serviceable text by a Yale professor of eco- nomics has two distinct parts. The first is a thor- ough discussion of trade unions, their history, growth, and philosophy, and of the processes of col- lective bargaining, the public control of labor re- lations, and the role of labor in politics. The new edition covers conditions and events of 1955. The second part is a study of "The Economics of the Labor Market." Here the author leaves the field of organized labor to examine the broader questions of labor supply and the labor market, of employ- ment and unemployment, of wages and wage de- termination, and of minimum standards of real in- come. Throughout he stresses public policy in these fields. A short epilogue aims to sum up the entire labor problem, arriving at a "balance-sheet" of trade-unionism. It is, Dr. Reynolds decides, "a conservative social force and becoming increasingly so as it grows older." He is inclined to consider that, despite many deficiencies, trade-unionism tips the scale on the side of social usefulness. Refer- ence may be made here to a still more recent study of the role of trade unions in the welfare state: John A. Fitch's Social Responsibilities of Organized Labor (1957), mentioned above as one of Harper's Series on ethics and economic life (no. 5899). 6038. Slichter, Sumner H. The challenge of in- dustrial relations; trade unions, management, and the public interest. Ithaca, N. Y., Cornell University Press, 1947. 196 p. (The Messenger lectures on die evolution of civilization, 1946) 47-3448 HD8072.S6165 One reviewer said that this little book, embodying six lectures given by Professor Slichter at Cornell University, "may be regarded, by all odds, as the best single volume on modern industrial relations." The author's writing on labor questions goes back to his thesis at the University of Chicago in 191 8, The Turnover of Factory Labor, with foreword by John R. Commons (New York, Appleton, 19 19. 460 p). A major work, Union Policies and Indus- trial Management (Washington, Brookings Institu- tion, 194 1. 597 p. The Institute of Economics of the Brookings Institution. Publication no. 85), is a well-rounded examination of collective bargain- ing. In the present lectures he looks at the labor movement in general, the effect of unions on man- agement, union wage policies, the government of unions, the problem of industrial peace, and the control of unions in the public interest. Central to his discussion is his view that trade unions con- stitute the greatest private economic power in the community, and that their policies are a major deter- minant of national prosperity and industrial democ- racy. 6039. Taft, Philip. The structure and government of labor unions. Cambridge, Harvard Uni- versity Press, 1954. xix, 312 p. tables. (Wer- theim Fellowship publications in industrial rela- tions) 54-8633 HD6508.T27 A close study of the internal aspects of unions, which begins with a survey of radicalism in Ameri- can labor. Professor Taft takes a cross-section of union history to show that the membership of the unions, in spite of vigorous attempts by Communist leaders, has always rejected radical philosophy. He examines on the same pattern elections and com- petition for office, dues, initiation fees, and salaries of officers, and "does not shy away from investigat- ing the most intimate aspect of union life, namely, how and for what reasons unions discipline their members" ("Foreword" by S. H. Slichter). Three chapters are case histories of particular unions. "The Unlicensed Seafaring Unions" have been im- portant targets for Communist agitation and the scene of incessant intra- and interunion battles. The two largest unions of C. I. O., the Automobile Workers' Union and the Steel Workers' Union, are compared in detail. An individual case study is made of the expanding and aggressive Teamsters' Union (three years too early for comment on its disciplinary expulsion from AFL-CIO). The au- thor returns to the theme of democratic theory in a last look at the present state of the unions: "Far from perfect, unions fundamentally reflect the will of their members. They not only fulfill a vital need for the workers' representation and protection in industry, but they are the most effective guarantee against Communist infiltration into American labor." 6040. Twentieth Century Fund. Employment and wages in the United States, by Wladimir S. Woytinsky and associates. New York, 1953. xxxii, 777 p. 53-7170 HD8072.T8 This extensive survey presents a tremendous ar- ray of data on American labor and its remuneration, past and present (from before 1870 to and including 1950), which is set down statistically in tables (242 in the text, 118 in the appendix) and 86 graphs and maps. These are embodied in a full expository text, documented in footnotes. The whole is designed to provide reliable source material for future studies. The coverage is indicated in the foreword: "The working people of the United States and their con- ditions of labor: the size, make-up and distribution of the labor force; the various occupations repre- sented and the numbers of workers employed in each; the ebb and flow of employment and unem- ployment; the wages that American workers are paid and how their wages are determined; their hours of labor and other working conditions and the regulations and controls that government has imposed upon them; labor unions and the role they play in the vast drama of wages and employment; the underpinnings of insurance which have been set up to make the worker's life more secure; and finally, the relation of all these basic facts to the operation of the economy as a whole." 6041. Ulman, Lloyd. The rise of the national trade union; the development and signifi- cance of its structure, governing institutions, and economic policies. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1955. xix, 639 p. diagrs., tables. (Wertheim publications in industrial relations) 56-5175 HD6508.U4 In the first five parts of this long and scholarly monograph the writer analyzes the historical devel- opment of the trade union movement in the late 19th and early 20th century. By the turn of the century, he finds, the nationally organized union had achieved maturity as to its governing institutions, its relationships with local unions and other labor bodies, its strike and wage policies, and its work rules. Among causes for nationalization he em- phasizes the important factor of geographical mo- ECONOMIC LIFE / 943 bility — the "traveling member" who moved to new ground for a job — and the financial and other a> ordinated assistance which the national organiza- tion could provide to support local strikes. His special research sources were the constitutions, pro- ceedings, and journals of five national unions, the Bricklayers', Carpenters', Printers', Molders', and Bottle Blowers'. In his sixth part he examines the wage and strike policies of these and other national unions and compares them with employers' pol- icies. In the seventh he proceeds to the theory of labor unions, criticizing the older views of J. R. Commons and Selig Perlman, and offering his own hypothesis based on a profit motivation of labor matching the individualism of American enterprise; it is this which has produced a dynamic "business unionism" concentrated upon collective bargaining. 6042. Yoder, Dale. Manpower economics and labor problems. 3d ed. New York, Mc- Craw-Hill, 1950. 661 p. illus. 50-8119 HD8072.Y6 1950 Previous editions published under title: Labor Economics and Labor Problems. A comprehensive work on manpower as "the most versatile, valuable, and complicated resource of modern societies," and on the problems arising out of the use of this resource in our society. The first four chapters are devoted to theoretical and historical examination of the general theme. Then particular aspects are studied as to practice and policy: wages; employment and unemployment; the labor of such special groups as women, children, the aged, and the handicapped; and questions of status in industry. It is only in the last third of the book that Professor Yoder focuses his attention on or- ganized labor. He examines American trade unions (in 1949 amounting to approximately one- fourth of the total labor force) in respect to the practices, policy, and economic implications of col- lective bargaining. Last he looks at industrial re- lations, reviewing such devices for "maximized co- operation" as profit sharing, employee stock owner- ship, employee representation, and union-manage- ment collaboration, but suggesting that the "simple virtues" of honesty, sincerity, and integrity are more important in establishing mutual confidence. The author is director of the Industrial Relations Ccnur at the University of Minnesota and a frequent con- sultant to government agencies on manpower prob- lems. His big textbook, Personnel Management and Industrial Relations, 4th ed. (Englcwood ClilTs, N. J., Prentice-Hall, 1956. 941 p.), has been a standard work in its field since its first appearance in 1938. 944 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES N. Labor: Special 6043. Anderson, Hobson Dewey, and Percy E. Davidson. Occupational trends in the United States. Stanford University, Calif., Stan- ford University Press, 1940. 618 p. tables, diagrs. HB2595.A6 Recent occupational trends in American labor; a supplement. Stanford University, Calif., Stanford University Press, 1945. vii, 133 p. incl. tables. 40—35443 HB2595.A6 Suppl. This useful study brings together and interprets statistics from the decennial Census of Occupations; the original volume and the supplement together cover Bureau of the Census records from 1870 through 1940. After a 70-page introduction sum- marizing general occupational trends and causal factors, the arrangement is by major occupational groups: agriculture, fishing and forestry, extraction of minerals, manufacturing and mechanical indus- tries (with 14 subgroups), transportation and com- munications, trade, public service, professional serv- ice, domestic and personal service, and clerical occu- pations. The tables and charts reveal a great va- riety of facts regarding the distribution of American manpower over 70 years. The supplement draws upon the Sixteenth Census of the United States: 1940. Population, v. 3. The Labor Force (Wash- ington, U. S. Govt. Print. Off., 1943. 5 pts.), and also upon an important statistical monograph of the Bureau of the Census prepared by Dr. Alba M. Edwards: Sixteenth Census of the United States: 1940. Population. Comparative Occupation Sta- tistics of the United States, 18 jo to 1940 (Washing- ton, U. S. Govt. Print. Off., 1943. 206 p.). 6044. Bridenbaugh, Carl. The Colonial crafts- man. New York, New York University Press, 1950. 214 p. (New York University. Stokes Foundation. Anson G. Phelps lectureship on early American history) 50-7479 HD2346U5B7 Although the author declares in his preface that he writes because everything else on Colonial crafts is from the antiquarian viewpoint, still this little work for "the casual reader" stands out in a selec- tion of writings on American labor as a rare example of antiquarian charm. The focus of interest, it is true, is the skilled workman and his economic progress, but plenty of detail about his product finds its way into the pages. Part of the antiquarian flavor may be attributed to the illustrations, all reproduc- tions of engravings in the French Encyclopedic of 1762-76 showing the work of the several crafts. The several lectures are on the craftsman of the rural South and of the rural North, the urban craftsman (two lectures), the craftsman at work, and the crafts- man as a citizen. At the outset the author warns against "surrounding the artisan with the haze of romance," and reminds us that only the best 18th- century craftvvork has been preserved in modern collections, and that many articles were distincdy in- ferior in quality. 6045. Brissenden, Paul F. The I. W. W.; a study of American syndicalism. [2d ed.] New York, Russell & Russell, 1957. xx "> 43^ P« 57-6911 HD8055.I5B55 1957 Bibliography: p. 387-428. The Industrial Workers of the World held its 27th convention in 1955, 50 years after its launching in 1905. The outstanding example of the anarch- osyndicalist union in America, it was a direct suc- cessor of the militandy radical Western Federa- tion of Miners, and was promptly joined by the extremer element of the American Federation of Labor. Its membership was drawn largely from unskilled labor of alien origin, and it openly avowed Marxist doctrine and favored the use of violence and sabotage. Its founders included its best-known leaders, Eugene V. Debs, "Big Bill" Haywood, Daniel DeLeon, and Vincent St. John. The "Wobblies" or the "Bummery" (their "red book" song, "Hallelujah, I'm a Bum," is familiar at least to the older generation today) conducted innumerable strikes, the most famous of which was at Lawrence, Mass., in 1912. They opposed World War I, and were violently suppressed after Con- gress passed the Anti-Espionage Act in 1917. Their influence and membership have since considerably declined. In his new preface to a history standard since 1919 Professor Brissenden comments that one of the most remarkable things about the I. W. W. is its survival. He denies that it is a Communist organization. 6046. Chamberlain, Neil W. Collective bargain- ing. New York, McGraw-Hill, 1951. 534 p. illus. 51-2201 HD6483.C48 6047. Chamberlain, Neil W., and Jane Metzger Schilling. The impact of strikes, their social ECONOMIC LIFE / 945 and economic costs. New York, Harper, 1954. 257 p. (Yale Labor and Management Center series) 53-11958 HD5324.C42 Dr. Chamberlain, well known as a writer in the labor field, is assistant director of the Labor and Man- agement Center at Yale University. His textbook, Collective Bargaining, was the first to be devoted exclusively to the subject. In it, he says, he has consciously stressed "the developmental character of collective bargaining, its change over time," and he finds a surprisingly modern instance among the printers of New York City as early as 1809. The source material incorporated includes a verbatim report of a bargaining conference in chapter 3, and sample agreements on grievance procedure and on collective bargaining (both between General Motors and the United Automobile Workers, 1950) in the appendixes. Two chapters discuss the bargaining unit, which is by no means necessarily coextensive with company or union, and another the factors which enter into the "tricky" concept of bargaining power. The politics of bargaining are viewed both from the union and the management side; and its economics are investigated with respect to the prob- lem of relative wage rates, the effect on national income levels, and the degree to which the bargain- ing process raises the specter of monopoly. In a final chapter on "The Role of Collective Bargaining in American Society," the functions and values of competition and cooperation are appraised, with the conclusion that a healthy economy requires "a proper admixture of the two." In The Impact of Strides Dr. Chamberlain collaborated with a research as- sistant who had worked with him on a book in the same series published the year before: Social Re- sponsibility and Strides (New York, Harper, 1953. 2 93 P-)- Both books are concerned with the social and economic effects of strikes on union members, management, and the public. In the earlier study a method was devised for rating the impact of strikes on consumers, industrial users, suppliers, and public opinion. In the later one the same procedure is again described, and used to analyze strikes in coal mines, railroad service, and the steel industry. Con- clusions are based upon the overall cost of strikes and whether their effect on the public is so damag- ing as to warrant government intervention. The writers offer their strike-rating procedure as an ex- ample of the kind of analysis that will aid the ex- ecutive branch in making decisions of public policy. 6048. Douglas, Paul H. Real wages in the United States, 1 890-1926. Boston, Houghton Mif- flin, 1930. xxviii, 682 p. diagrs. (Publications of the Pollak Foundation for Economic Research, no. 9) 30-12884 HD4975.D6 "Bibliographical note": p. [655]— 667. The author has been a professor of industrial re- lations at the University of Chicago since 1920; his career as United States Senator began in 1948. This authoritative 35-year study of rising living standards is introduced by a thorough discussion of the prob- lem of ascertaining real wages as determined by purchasing power, through measurement of money wages and living costs. Professor Douglas then analyzed statistically the movement of living costs from 1890 to 1926, and, for the same period, the movement of wage-rates and hours of work, the movement of actual money and real earnings of em- ployed workers, and of unemployment and the real earnings of the wage -earning class as a whole. A concluding chapter summarizes findings. 6049. Goldberg, Arthur J. AFL-CIO: labor united. New York, McGraw-Hill, 1956. 319 p. (McGraw-Hill labor management series) 56-11047 HD8055.A5G66 In 1935 the issue of craft versus industrial unions, which had been a main jurisdictional problem of the A. F. of L. from its earliest days, came to a head. The labor policies of the New Deal, protecting the right of workers to organize and bargain collec- tively, had opened the way for unionization of the great number of unskilled workers in the mass-pro- duction industries. After the 1935 A. F. of L. con- vention, which refused to grant unrestricted indus- trial union charters, the Committee for Industrial Organization was formed, headed by John L. Lewis, Charles P. Howard, Sidney Hillman, David Dubin- sky, and other leaders of industry-wide unions. Al- though repudiated by the A. F. of L. Executive Council, the C. I. O. launched successful organiza- tional drives and by 1938 could transform itself into the federated Congress of Industrial Organizations, with Lewis as first president. Raiding, fussing, and feuding with the A. F. of L. ensued, but with the coming of war rivalry diminished and the poli- cies of the two movements drew closer. Prelimi- nary negotiations for unity began in 1953 with a no- raiding agreement, and in 1955 the merger was ac- complished. This study is by the former general counsel of the United Steelworkers, now special counsel of AFL-CIO. He begins with a succinct historical review of these developments. He then analyzes the new joint constitution and its implica- tions, devoting chapters to the labor monopoly ques- tion, communism and corruption, racial discrimina- tion, public policy, and the future role of labor. Appendixes give texts of the new constitution, the merger agreement, and other documents. 6050. Gompers, Samuel. Seventy years of life and labor; an autobiography. New York, Dut- ton, 1925. 2 v. ports. 25-5990 HD8073.G6A3 4:; I -J40— G0- -01 946 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Appendix: His last year, an epilogue, by Flor- ence Calvert Thorne: v. 2, p. [5275-557. New one-volume ed. 1943. 557, 629 p. 44-638 HD8073.G6A3 1943 As a small boy in East-side London, Samuel Gompers (1850-1924) heard the tramp of the un- employed silk weavers of his neighborhood, whose jobs had been swept away by new machinery. Their cry, "My wife, my kids want bread and I've no work to do," taught him "the worldwide feeling that has ever bound the oppressed together in a struggle against those who hold control over the lives and opportunities of those who work for wages. That feeling became a subconscious guiding impulse that in later years developed into the dominating in- fluence in shaping my life." Much of the history of the A. F. of L. is revealed in this autobiography of the great labor pioneer. As one of its creators and its president, save for the one year of Socialist domination, 1895, from 1886 to his death in 1924, he was chief architect of its growth, and its charac- ter and policies were largely determined by his con- victions. The posthumously published work in- cluded a biographical appendix by Miss Thorne, who had been his assistant in the research needed to check and supplement his recollections. In 1957 Miss Thorne published Samuel Gompers, American Statesman (New York, Philosophical Library. 175 p.), principally concerned with setting forth, in large part in his own words, Gompers' philosophy of the labor movement. 6051. Lombardi, John. Labor's voice in the Cab- inet; a history of the Department of Labor, from its origin to 1921. New York, Columbia Uni- versity Press, 1942. 370 p. (Columbia University. Faculty of Political Science. Studies in history, eco- nomics and public law, no. 496) 43-461 HD4835.U4L6 1942 H3LC7, no. 496 Bibliography: p. 359-366. In his first 70 pages Dr. Lombardi summarizes the precursors and origins of the Department of Labor. The new Department charged with repre- senting the interests of the workers was established in 19 13, crowning over a half-century's efforts on the part of organized labor. William B. Wilson of Pennsylvania, a former labor leader and Congress- man, was named the first Secretary of Labor. The Department absorbed the Bureau of Labor Statistics, created in 1884 in the Department of the Interior, and from the former Department of Commerce and Labor (1903) took over the Bureaus of Immigration and Naturalization, now consolidated, and the Di- vision of Information of the Immigration branch, now reorganized as the U. S. Employment Service. Finally it took from the same Department the Chil- dren's Bureau, which had been set up, after a hard legislative batde, only the year before. Dr. Lom- bardi gives fuller treatment to his chapters on the organization of the Department, and to the succeed- ing part on "War Activities." In 1917 the Depart- ment was put on a war footing, and the Secretary of Labor appointed War Labor Administrator in charge of an independent war agency. After the armistice came the "return to normalcy," which the author calls "Reaction." His study ends in 192 1 with the retirement of Secretary Wilson, whose final report to the President spoke of the workers' dream fulfilled. 6052. Lorwin, Lewis L. The American Federa- tion of Labor; history, policies, and prospects, by Lewis L. Lorwin, with the assistance of Jean Atherton Flexner. Washington, Brookings Insti- tution, 1933. xix, 573 p. (The Institute of Eco- nomics of the Brookings Institution. Publication no. 50) 33-16879 HD8055.A5L6 "References for further reading": p. 548-555. The late Dr. Lorwin was an internationally known expert on labor economics, who served as advisor to the International Labor Office as well as to the American Government in the 1930's and '40's. His standard history of the evolution of the A. F. of L. was written in the dark days of unemployment just before the passage of the National Industrial Re- covery Act, while the author was on the staff of the Brookings Institution. He views the A. F. of L. as "shaping and molding many human relations which are the very essence of our individual and social life." The first four parts are chronological: "Foundations, 1864-98" (the Federation was not organized until 1886, but Dr. Lorwin carried his ac- count of its precursors back to an abortive Inter- national Industrial Assembly of North America projected in 1864); "National Expansion, 1899- 1914"; "World War and Industrial Democracy, 1914-24"; and "Prosperity and Depression, 1925- 33." The last part is an analysis of policies, prob- lems, and prospects at the outset of the New Deal. The appendixes include groups of tabulated sta- tistics from 1850 to 1932 and a summary of trade union organization and status in the various in- dustries. 6053. Millis, Harry A., and Emily Clark Brown. From the Wagner Act to Taft-Hartley; a study of national labor policy and labor relations. [Chicago] University of Ghicago Press, 1950. 723 p. 50-7091 HD7834.M55 Bibliography: p. 679-687. This study of labor legislation and government policy is in three parts and an epilogue. First there is a careful analysis of the Wagner Act and of 12 years' experience of collective bargaining under its provisions. This section was written en- tirely by Dr. Brown, who had begun the study while working as an analyst for the National Labor Relations Board in 1942-43. Part 2 tells "How the Taft-Hardey Act Came About," and part 3 analyzes critically the Labor-Management Relations Act of 1947, to give it its formal tide. These two parts were planned and in part written by Dr. Millis, who redred as Chairman of NLRB in 1945, but died in 1948 before the text was completed. His rich experience in the administration of the Wagner Act and as arbitrator in many industrial disputes formed part of the source material for the book. The epilogue, "What Industrial Relations Road for the United States?" had been drafted as his last chapter by Dr. Millis and was made up without expansion from his notes. He speaks of the Wag- ner Act as the Magna Carta of American Labor. He sees in collective bargaining the hope not only for better wages, hours, and working conditions, but for increased stability and regular progress in democratic society. 6054. Powderly, Terence V. The path I trod; the autobiography of Terence V. Powderly, edited by Harry J. Carman, Henry David, and Paul N. Guthrie. New York, Columbia University Press, 1940. xiv, 460 p. illus. (Columbia studies in American culture, no. 6) 40-9071 HD8073.P69A3 An outstanding figure of American labor in the i88o's and Grand Master Workman of the order of the Knights of Labor, Powderly (1 849-1924) experienced (say his editors) "fame, notoriety, adoration, and detestation" unequalled by any other labor leader of the period. The order, founded in 1869 as a secret society, was the first attempt at a national union of workers in general, not organized by trades. Powderly worked in a Scranton, Pa., locomotive yard, was fired for his activities in the Machinists' and Blacksmiths' Union after the panic of 1873, and joined the Knights of Labor in 1874. He was acdve in polidcs as well as in union affairs, and was mayor of Scranton from 1878 to 1884. As leader of the Knights from 1883 to 1893 he followed a conciliatory policy in labor disputes, and resigned when the extremists, who had come increasingly into the order during the labor troubles of the late 1880's, gained control of the executive board. He had become a lawyer, and his campaign work for McKinley led to his appointment as Commissioner- General of Immigration in 1897. With only one 4-year break, he held a succession of Federal offices concerned with immigration or labor until the ill- ness that preceded his death. The Path I Trod ECONOMIC LIFE / 947 was written in his later years, and is concerned al- most endrely with the Knights of Labor experience. The standard history of the Knights of Labor for three decades has been Norman J. Ware's The La- bor Movement in the United States, 1860-1895; a Study in Democracy (New York, Appleton, 1929. 409 p.). 6055. Purcell, Theodore V. The worker speaks his mind on company and union. Cam- bridge, Harvard University Press, 1953. xix, 344 p. illus. (Wertheim Fellowship publications) 53-9040 HD9419.S72P8 A unique study of the human problems of indus- try as revealed in interviews with workers at the Chicago stockyards plant of Swift & Company. This ultramechanized plant for mass production is the center of an important local union of the CIO United Packinghouse Workers; its working com- munity comprises 6,000 men and women, Negroes and whites, native and foreign-born. The author, a Jesuit priest, shared the life of the community for a year and a half, and by arrangement with both the UPWA and the Swift Company management interviewed a carefully selected sample of 300 pro- duction workers. His questions centered on the allegiance felt toward the two organizations to which they belonged, the company plant and the local union, and the answers showed that nearly everyone was pulled in both directions. Organized along vertical lines in the UPWA, the local had been dominated for a time from the outside by the Communist Party, but in less than four years the members had won back control for themselves. Father Purcell's quesdons brought out the thoughts and feelings of workers about their work, hopes, fears, ambitions, satisfactions, and needs, and the part played by company and union in all these. The responses are extensively quoted, and have usually been found more interesting than the con- clusions drawn. Another recent work of interest for human reladons in industry, also based on inter- views, is by Charles R. Walker and Robert H. Guest: The Man on the Assembly Line (Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1952. 180 p.). The authors were attached to the Institute of Human Reladons of Yale University, and their research entailed talks with 180 workers on an automobile assembly line. The talks were conducted in the men's homes, with the aim to bring out their atti- tudes and opinions about their jobs, their relations to fellow workers and supervisors, their working conditions, pay, promotions, and reladons to the union. The focus of interest was the effect of assembly-line work, paced and repetitive, on the satisfactions derived from labor. 94 8 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 6056. Smith, Abbot Emerson. Colonists in bond- age; white servitude and convict labor in America, 1607-1776. Chapel Hill, Published for the Institute of Early American History and Culture at Williamsburg, Va., by the University of North Carolina Press, 1947. 435 p. 48-5154 HD4875.U5S5 "Bibliographical note": p. 397-417. 6057. Morris, Richard B. Government and labor in early America. New York, Columbia University Press, 1946. xvi, 557 p. A46-961 HD8068.M65 Mr. Smith's account of white indentured servants, redemptioners, political prisoners, and convicts in the American colonies is constructed from contem- porary records which he studied at length in li- braries and archives of the British Isles, the United States, and the West Indies. From the interesting evidence assembled he concludes that more than half, and perhaps two-thirds, of all persons who came to the colonies south of New England were originally servants; that the notorious "spirits" who lured emigrants away from England and Ireland by de- ceits ranging from lies to kidnapping were winked at by the merchant-traders and the law; that the emigrants included a large proportion of scoundrels for whom the colonies were the last refuge; that, though the servants were often badly treated, there were many reasonable laws for their protection. Whereas modern writers have magnified the virtues of the indentured servants, all contemporaries de- nounced them as practically worthless. Of the servants, hardly one in ten, the author estimates, established himself as a solid and useful citizen after his term of service ended. "The fundamental human problem in colonization was simply that of adaptation, and the white servants did not come from the most adaptable levels of society." The re- demptioners, who often brought families, were more responsible. The laws relating to bond labor are also set forth in the second part of Government and Labor in Early America. The longer first part, after a general glance at the labor population and labor conditions before and during the Revolution, is concerned with free labor. The relationship be- tween government and the artisan and laboring classes is examined as to the regulation of wages; concerted action, political or otherwise, among workers; terms and conditions of employment; and laws regarding maritime labor and the military serv- ice. Most of the book deals with the Colonial period, but one chapter is given to the regulation of wages by the States and Congress during the Revolution. The action of politically minded combinations of mechanics and laborers, masters and journeymen — for instance, the merchant-led Sons of Liberty — dur- ing and immediately after the Revolution is dis- cussed, and the chapter on military service includes a section on artificers and laborers in the Continental and British armies. 6058. Updegraff, Clarence M., and Whitley P. Mc- Coy. Arbitration of labor disputes. New York, Commerce Clearing House, 1946. 291 p. 46-4335 HD5504.A3U6 In this useful book the authors had the double purpose of providing lawyers with a reference work on the law of arbitration as applied to labor disputes, and of offering a practical guide for the layman who might be called on to arbitrate. They oblig- ingly point out in the foreword the chapters which will be useful for the general reader, and the heavier chapters to be read by the lawyers, with which they group most of the appendixes containing specimen legal forms and a table of cases. The more easily understood chapters include a general introduction discussing the historic background, scope, and types (whether voluntary or compulsory) of arbitration, and the advantages of arbitration or conciliation over litigation in various types of labor controversies; an examination of the selection of arbitrators, with re- gard to their qualifications, jurisdiction, and com- pensation; patterns of agreements to arbitrate and of submissions; standard procedure in hearings; and types of cases commonly arbitrated. XXIX Constitution and Government A. Political Thought 6059-6072 B. Constitutional History 6073-6089 C. Constitutional Law 6090-6105 D. Civil Liberties and Rights 6106-6130 E. Government: General 6131-6139 F. The Presidency 6140-6149 G. Congress 6150-6169 H. Administration: General 6170-6180 I. Administration: Special 6181-6194 J. State Government 6195-6206 K. Local Government 6207-6218 THIS and the following two chapters aim to offer a representative sample of the litera- ture dealing with the political institutions and practices of the United States. The judi- ciary, the third semi-independent branch of the government of the United States and of the state governments, and the laws which it interprets and applies, are put off to Chapter XXX. However, most of the general treatises on American government in Section E below, and some of the general works on state government in Section J, have sections on the national or state judiciaries. The personnel and policies of American government are determined principally by the process we call politics, which depends upon elections held according to fixed rules at regular in- tervals, and is dominated by political parties or- ganized for the purpose of winning the elections. These and related matters are reserved for Chapter XXXI, but again the general works of Section E below have usually a section concerned with what it is fashionable to call the dynamics of government. The present chapter is concerned with the litera- ture of American government in general, on the national, state, and local levels. It is also concerned with the political thought which has accompanied our practical development, with the constitutions upon which our national and state governments are based, and with the executive and legislative branches of the Federal Government. Historical works in these sections usually begin no earlier than the Federal Convention of 1787, but some go back to 1775, and some, especially in Section A on politi- cal thought, to the 17th century. For the most part, however, works on American governments during the Colonial and Revolutionary periods will be found in Sections D and E of Chapter VIII on Gen- eral History: We may particularly note, from the first, numbers 3182, 3192, 3195, 3220, and 3221, and from the second, numbers 3242, 3245, 3253, 3256, and 3259. Section A on political thought represents a sub- ject which was very little studied before 1920, but which has proved increasingly rewarding as it has been more intensively cultivated. The literature has now grown to a point where can be included several examples of general surveys, books of readings, period histories, and treatments of par- ticular topics and tendencies. Constitutional his- tory, the subject of Section B, was of far earlier cul- tivation, although most of the earlier specimens seem today excessively abstract and formal. It de- rives its peculiar character from the fact that, be- 949 950 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES ginning in 1776, state and nation committed their constitutional rules to paper for all to read, and made alterations in them more difficult and more solemn than an ordinary act of the legislature. This did not, however, eliminate the necessity for appli- cation and interpretation, in which the last word is spoken by die courts and particularly by the Su- preme Court of the United States. Thus has devel- oped the elaborate field of constitutional law, the subject of Section C; in it, however, many land- marks of long standing have been swept away by developments since the famous Supreme Court crisis of 1937. Works on particular clauses of the Constitution, however historical in approach, have been entered here rather than in Section B. Most of the civil liberties and rights enjoyed by Americans are based upon the particular wordings of their con- stitutions, and are therefore made the subject of Sec- tion D. Most of the works there entered have arisen out of the conflict between traditional rights and new security measures since the end of the last war, and there has seemed to be little point in trying to minimize their inevitably controversial tone. The general works on American government in Section E will be found to be mostly designed for college courses, and this points to an undesirable but unde- niable situation: there are comparatively few books on our government designed for the general reader, and even fewer good ones. Most of the works on the Presidency in Section F emphasize the increas- ingly crucial nature of the office, and the well-nigh impossible demands it makes upon the man who has to fill it. The books in Section G on the Congress are remarkably varied in character, but they do not begin to exhaust its aspects, historical or contem- porary. Sections G and H present another major study of our day which hardly predates the 1920's: the systematic study of public administration, both in its general principles and its Federal manifesta- tions. The literature is already copious, and can only be sampled here; but is doubtless only a frac- tion of what it is destined to become. Concerning the works on State and local governments in the last two sections, we shall say only that we have had to rely on too large a proportion of tides pub- lished before America's entry into World War II. Since 1941 the study of grassroots government has been overshadowed by national and international affairs. A. Political Thought 6059. Carpenter, Jesse T. The South as a con- scious minority, 1789-1861; a study in politi- cal thought. New York, New York University Press, 1930. 315 p. 30-30930 F213.C29 "A selection of materials consulted": p. [261]- 297- This Harvard dissertation studies the political thinking of the ante-bellum South which, the author believes, consciously sought protection within the Union from the political power of the Northern majority. Dr. Carpenter conceives of his subject as democracy's greatest and most challenging prob- lem — the relation of numerical majority rule to effective minority protection. He takes the posi- tion that the Southern States, united by economic and social bonds, considered themselves a distinct nationality, a separate and different people. He re- gards the South as having borne an excessive por- tion of the burdens of the Federal government, while the North was receiving a disproportionate share of the benefits, and as evolving in self-protec- tion a political philosophy of effective minority de- fense in government. He finds that four major sources of minority protection were in turn relied upon: the principle of local self-government, ad- vanced and defended from the establishment of the Federal government in 1789 to the adoption of the Missouri Compromise in 1820; the principle of the "concurrent voice," relied upon chiefly during the 1820's 1830's, and 1840's; the principle of constitu- tional guarantees, depended upon from the admis- sion of California in 1850 to the election of Abra- ham Lincoln in i860; and, finally, the principle of Southern independence, resorted to after Lincoln's election. 6060. Coker, Francis W., ed. Democracy, liberty, and property; readings in the American political tradition. New York, Macmillan, 1942. xv, 881 p. 42-14710 JK11 1942a The purpose of this collection is to indicate the main contours of the American political tradition by means of excerpts from a variety of sources — es- says, addresses, public documents, revolutionary pronouncements, and formal treatises. The selec- tions have been chosen to represent the classic Amer- ican discussions concerning the problem of locating political control, the lines to be drawn between gov- ernmental authority and individual liberty, the na- ture and limits of property rights, and the problem of political change. The time span covered is more than 300 years (1630-1941). Professor Coker points out that the major steps toward a liberal democracy were not taken until after the close of the Colonial period. The principal trend has been toward a more general acceptance of the ideal values of democratic government — freedom of opinion, equality before the courts, and freedom of economic enterprise. The editor notes divergences of opinion about these ideals, as well as some downright repudiations of them. 6061. Ekirch, Arthur A. The decline of Ameri- can liberalism. New York, Longmans, Green, 1955. 401 p. 55-11447 E183.E4 A history of American liberalism which identifies it with the classical philosophical values of the 18th- century Enlightenment, and especially with indi- vidual liberty and decentralized government. Pro- fessor Ekirch equates the decline of these concepts with the trend, since the American Revolution, to- ward ever greater political, economic, and social centralization and concentration of control. He views the rise and fall of the liberal tradition in the United States as a succession of crises and an over- all decline. The rising Colonial and Revolutionary liberalism was tempered by a conservative reaction after the war. Exemplified pardy by Jeffersonian and Jacksonian democrary, a reviving liberalism was smothered by the Civil War and reconstruction. Although the author finds evidence of a liberal re- covery early in the 20th century, he consider pro- gressivism in the United States to have been delu- sive, the reaction after World War I disastrous, and the liberal retreat since World War II nothing less than a rout. He offers no smallest comfort to lib- erals in this somber book; he sees, rather, the fur- ther decline of liberalism "clearly outlined against the future's darkening horizon," and the end of an era of individual and social freedom. A less rigid definition of liberalism, permitting a more hopeful view of the future, could be conceived. 6062. Grimes, Alan P. American political thought. New York, Holt, 1955. 500 p. 55-6047 JA84.U5G7 A history which sets forth the thesis that, in the main, American political thought draws upon ideas that are neither American in origin nor even ex- plicidy political in concept, and to a great extent consists of articulations and modifications by Ameri- cans of European political thought. Thus Puritan political thinking derived mainly from Calvinism. American thought of the Revolutionary period stemmed primarily from John Locke. In the au- thor's opinion, late 19th-century liberalism was an offshoot of the theories of John Stuart Mill and the classical economists. Social Darwinism obviously came from England and, for a time, conditioned CONSTITUTION AND GOVERNMENT / 95 1 political thinking here. More recently, the thought of John Maynard Keynes has inspired American economic and political theory and practices. As Mr. Grimes points out, however, American politi- cal thought has always employed prevailing theories relevant and applicable to American conditions. Jefferson, for example, used Locke but in respect to a particular situation which imparted to Jeffer- sonian thinking a quality of its own. Similarly, John Adams reinterpreted Blackstone in the light of his own views of the past and of the American environment. Where American political thinking has been most original, as in the controversies over slavery and the nature of the Union, it has still been relevant to situations peculiar to America. 6063. Hartz, Louis. The liberal tradition in America; an interpretation of American po- litical thought since the Revolution. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1955. 329 p. 55-5242 E175.9.H37 A learned if somewhat impressionistic interpreta- tion of the American world conceived as "a liberal society, lacking feudalism and therefore socialism and governed by an irrational Lockianism." That society, in the author's view, has been a triumph for the liberal idea, an ideological victory helped forward by the magnificent material setting of the New World, in which the laborer has not felt tied to his situation for life. America, "born free," did not have a feudal structure to destroy, and so developed not a self-conscious proletariat but a victorious mid- dle class. In Dr. Hartz's estimation, this circum- stance shattered would-be elites such as the Virginia aristocrats of 1785, the Federalist party, and the reactionaries of the Old South. The Whigs of 1840 transformed the egalitarian thunder of the Demo- crats, retaining Hamilton's grandiose capitalist dream but combining with it the Jeffersonian con- cept of equal opportunity. Thus arose a dynamic and competitive social outlook which united the two great traditions of the American liberal community. Even the capitalistic collapse of 1929-33 gave rise, not to a new birth of Marxism, but to a movement within the liberal framework, "which sought to ex- tend the sphere of the State and at the same time retain the basic principles of Locke and Bentham." The uniqueness of the American experience proves, however, a serious disability for the exercise of world leadership, since we cannot understand the neces- sities of societies which were not born free, and con- tinue to find the alien unduly alarming. 6064. Lewis, Edward R. A history of American political thought from the Civil War to the World War. New York, Macmillan, 1937. S^i p. 37-4045 JA84.U5L4 952 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES "References" at end of each chapter. "Table of cases": p. 537-541. A survey of the period between the end of the Civil War and America's entry into World War I, which aims at "a consideration of the entire stream of our political thought and not merely the classical and somewhat technical subjects of the theory of the state and of sovereignty." Since this stream "did not flow from the contributions of a few great leaders of thought, but has been made by the con- tributions of many persons and influences," the au- thor has drawn upon the utterances of public men, judicial decisions, and party platforms as well as the writings of reformers and academic theorists. Among the subjects separately treated are the Civil War Amendments, "The Power of the Courts over Legislation" and the development of opposition to this power, "The Nature and Source of Law," "The Theory of Political Action," "Conservatism," "So- cialistic Thought," "The Struggle for Political Con- trol," and "The Tests of Political Action." Mr. Lewis expounds his authorities with great objectiv- ity, but from time to time states his own moderate and balanced opinions, carefully labeling them as such. He does not, for example, concede that the Progressive movement was a failure because it did not anticipate the problems of a later age. It was able "to achieve an equilibrium for the moment, to adjust the conflict of interest and desires of the time, so that there [was] no explosion," which is all that any program can do. 6065. Mason, Alpheus Thomas, ed. Free govern- ment in the making; readings in American political thought. 2d ed. New York, Oxford Uni- versity Press, 1956. 896 p. 56-5765 JK11 1956.M35 First published in 1949. In order to portray the meaning and significance of the American political tradition, this book samples the ideas and words of the men who helped form it. The 22 chapters, arranged in chronological or- der, are drawn largely from primary sources, be- ginning with the writings of such 17th-century English and American political thinkers as John Locke and Roger Williams, continuing with 18th- and 19th-century leaders like Benjamin Franklin, Alexander Hamilton, Thomas Jefferson, Andrew Jackson, and Salmon P. Chase, and concluding with recent utterances by such persons as Franklin D. Roosevelt, Herbert Hoover, and Adlai E. Steven- son. Earlier portions of the book are concerned with the Revolutionary ferment, the establishment of national power, and the extension of the base of popular power. Nineteenth- and twentieth-century individualism, romanticism, liberalism, and dissent are represented by the works of such writers as Emerson, Whitman, Finley Peter Dunne, Edward Bellamy, Brooks Adams, and Russell Davenport. Introductory essays provide historical background for the readings, which "exhibit our best minds in action — opposing, discussing, deliberating, compro- mising, deciding, building institutions of govern- ment." The volume attempts to display divergent views, the issues at stake, and the weight, form, and flavor of the argument. 6066. Merriam, Charles Edward. American po- litical ideas; studies in the development of American political thought, 1865-19 17. New York, Macmillan, 1929. 481 p. 30-31103 JA84.U5M5 1929 First published in 1920. A pioneer study of some of the chief tendencies of American political ideas since the Civil War, which shows them in their relation to each other and to the social and economic conditions out of which they grew. The late Professor Merriam of the University of Chicago looked for the theories as best expressed, whether in political institutions, laws, judicial decisions, administration, or customs; in the utterances of statesmen, publicists, or the leaders of causes; or in the formal statements of systematic philosophers. He regarded them all as parts of the progressive adaptation of democratic ideas to new social and economic conditions. Among the most significant tendencies of the pe- riod, he concluded, were the steady concentration of political and economic institutions, and the so- cialization of the state. The nation gained in power and prestige as the states sank toward the position of subordinate agencies, and the devotion to local self-government declined. The federal execudve emerged with increased prestige, as the legislative suffered from popular confidence in its integrity or competence, and the courts from lack of confi- dence in their impartiality. Another feature of the period was the abandonment of the doctrine of weak government as a necessary defense of liberty. But it proved far from easy to make the transition to the later doctrine of strong and aggressive gov- ernment, and meanwhile a mushrooming capitalism was able to escape effective control. "Democratic faith was stronger than democratic works." 6067. Rossiter, Clinton L. Conservatism in America. New York, Knopf, 1955. 326 p. 55-5614 JK31.R58 Bibliography: p. [309H327]. Professor Rossiter calls his book "a study of the political theory of American conservatism — of the principles that have governed our conservatives in the past, that appear to govern them in the present, and that ought to govern them in the future." He distingiushes temperamental, possessive, and prac- tical conservatism from "the last and highest kind," philosophical conservatism; and his spectrum of po- litical attitudes reads thus: revolutionary radicalism, radicalism, liberalism, conservatism, standpattism, reaction, and revolutionary reaction. His historical survey proceeds from the Puritan oligarchy to the contemporary "middle group" represented by the late Senator Taft and Presidents Eisenhower and Hoover, and the "conservative intellectuals" such as Peter Viereck and Russell Kirk. The book is essen- tially an attempt to arrive at a formulation of con- servatism viable for intelligent and humane Amer- icans conscious of their heritage. Chapter 6 takes "A Hard Look at American Conservatism," and castigates it for its anti-intellectualism, materialism, and indifference to all social values save the freedom of economic enterprise. Chapter 7 asserts the ne- cessity of "A Conservative Theory for American Democracy," which will build "democratic freedom on the solid foundations of co-operative individual- ism and balanced pluralism." The final chapter, "A Conservative Program for American Democ- racy," calls for the creation of a new tradition of public service, a sincere defense of civil liberties at every level, and a concerted effort to redeem the three grievous failures of American democracy: in peaceful world leadership, in justice to the Negro, and in the creation of an authentic popular culture. 6068. Rossiter, Clinton L. Seedtime of the Re- public; the origin of the American tradition of political liberty. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1953. xiv, 558 p. 53-5647 _ JK31.R6 "This book is a study of the political ideas that sustained the rise of liberty in Colonial and Revo- lutionary America." The leaders of the Revolution, Dr. Rossiter maintains, held, not a doctrine hastily improvised to justify resistance, but rather a noble philosophy that was the product of generations of colonial experience. Part 1 describes the total en- vironment — government, religion, economy, social structure, and intellectual life — of the thirteen Colonies as one favorable to the rise of liberty, and the "factors of freedom" most influential in creating such an environment. Part 2, the core of the book, presents the lives and philosophies of six repre- sentative political thinkers of the Colonial period: Thomas Hooker, Roger Williams, John Wise, Jonathan Mayhew, Richard Bland, and Benjamin Franklin. Part 3 analyzes the political thinking of the pre-Revolutionary decade on the rights of man and the pattern of government, which produced no masterwork but was remarkably consistent. In con- clusion, the author sums up the guiding faith of the Revolutionists in 11 major tenets. "The political theory of the American Revolution — a theory of 431240—60 62 CONSTITUTION AND GOVERNMENT / 953 ethical, ordered liberty — remains the political tradi- tion of the American people." 6069. Spitz, David. Patterns of anti-democratic thought; an analysis and a criticism, with special reference to the American political mind in recent times. New York, Macmillan, 1949. 304 p. 49-8944 JC481.S65 This Columbia University dissertation is an in- quiry into the nature and validity of the arguments leveled against democracy. It posits that the dem- ocratic state contains at least two central ingredients which set it apart from all other forms of the state: the free play of conflicting opinions and the consti- tutional responsibility of the rulers to the ruled. Majority rule, moreover, always fluctuating, tem- porary, and never fixed, is a necessity of the dem- ocratic state, together with free and unhampered minorities. Conversely, the doctrines of antidemo- cratic thought are viewed here as simply those ideas which deny the possibility or challenge the desirabil- ity of democracy. Typical, in recent American thought, of the former are James Burnham's theory of the ruling class as organizational necessity and Lawrence Dennis' theory of the ruling class as a conspiracy of power. Among the doctrines which reject the democratic state as undesirable in its op- erations and consequences, Dr. Spitz places Ralph Adams Cram's theory of the irrationality and in- competence of the average man, Madison Grant's theory of Nordic racial aristocracy, Edward M. Sait's concept of biological aristocracy, George Santayana's theory of natural aristocracy, and the restrictive authoritarianism of Irving Babbitt. The author re- futes each in detail and finds democracy, with its conjunction of order and freedom, alone wholly commendable. 6070. Wilson, Francis Graham. The American political mind; a textbook in political theory. New York, McGraw-Hill, 1949. 506 p. (Mc- Graw-Hill series in political science) 49-8235 JA84.U5W5. A history of American political ideas from the first English settlements to the atomic era, which emphasizes their close dependence upon the general current of national history. What is fundamental and persistent "in this evolving, fragmentary, con- flicting, and changing body of political philosophy that makes up the American mind," and what is superficial and ephemeral, depends upon the inter- preter's conception of destiny, his sense of "a pre- dominance in history." Professor Wilson from time to time emphasizes that the conservative case has been as important in the making of the Amer- ican tradition as its opposite. American liberalism, he believes, took form as a conflict between the 954 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Southern agrarians and the Hamiltonian capitalists, and its maturity "was the clarification of this con- flict." Without the debate over slavery, "it is hardly possible that the sense of national unity, of the mis- sion of American democracy to the rest of the world, could have been shaped." A chapter on "The Emergence of Modern Conservatism" views it as the counterpart of the industrial revolution which followed the Civil War and created a "new economic aristocracy." Two final chapters, on World War II and its aftermath, indicate that all shades of Amer- ican opinion are committed to the maintenance of democracy, and that "part of the old and traditional will inevitably remain in the changing democracy of tomorrow." Each chapter is followed by a very useful "Selected Bibliography." 6071. Wiltse, Charles Maurice. The Jeffersonian tradition in American democracy. Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina Press, 1935. 273 p. 3 6 - 2 7502 JC176.J45W48 A study of the political ideas of Thomas Jefferson which assumes that they form a fairly complete and coherent system. Dr. Wiltse has attempted a logical reconstruction of Jefferson's "most mature position" about the fundamental problems of government, basing it upon the mass of Jefferson's writings and public utterances. In the author's opinion, although the Jeffersonian state has passed into history, Jeffer- son's influence has been one of the most enduring in our national life because, as leader of a school of political thought, he stood for liberalism, for human- itarianism, for freedom, for the welfare of "abstract man," all of which concepts have been transmitted through him into the democratic tradition. Dr. Wiltse views him as preeminentiy a practical thinker, whose theory of the state was centered in practical solutions to concrete problems, yet who nevertheless drew upon a conscious intellectual heritage. Jeffer- son's political philosophy is seen to rest upon two basic ethical assumptions — that the end of life is individual happiness and that the purpose of the state is to secure and increase such happiness. It has therefore left to American democracy a dual tradi- tion, on the one hand of democratic individualism, as exemplified by John Taylor, Calhoun, Jackson, and Lincoln. On the other hand, it has given rise to a tradition of social democracy, exemplified by Henry George, the Populists, the Progressives, and the New Deal. "The times may stress now one and now the other, but in historical perspective the two have advanced and will advance together." 6072. Wright, Benjamin Fletcher. American in- terpretations of natural law; a study in the history of political thought. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1931. 360 p. (Harvard political studies) 31-30867 JA84.U5W67 Professor Wright analyzes briefly the various meanings attached to the concept of natural law, evaluates its place in political theory, discusses the writings of certain of the makers of American consti- tutional law, and surveys illustrative judicial opin- ions. He traces the few 17th-century American in- terpretations of natural law directly to the theologico- political conceptions of medieval times and of the Reformation. In the century preceding the Civil War, when political speculation was most active in America, the idea of natural law was used in defense of the most diverse causes, and played a part of some importance in most of the controversial and systematic political theories; it was of scarcely less importance in the development of written constitu- tions. The individual rights phase of natural law received its classic expression in the Declaration of Independence. In the slavery controversy, natural law was the principal theoretical weapon of both sides — the antislavery forces discoursing of the rights of men, the proslavery of the natural laws which or- dain inequality. Both a speculative concept and a controversial weapon, the idea of natural law was generally discarded after the Civil War even when not explicidy repudiated. B. Constitutional History 6073. Boyd, Julian P. The Declaration of Inde- pendence; the evolution of the text as shown in facsimiles of various drafts by its author, Thomas Jefferson. Princeton, Princeton University Press, 1945. 46 p. A 45-1832 JK128.B66 Revised edition of the author's contribution to a brochure issued in 1943 by the Library of Congress as a part of the bicentennial celebration of the birth of Thomas Jefferson. A 46-page textual analysis of the various drafts of the Declaration of Independence showing the genesis and evolution of this state paper, together with 32 pages cf facsimiles. These latter, not altogether legible, reproduce all of the known drafts of the Declaration in Jefferson's hand, as well as other doc- uments closely related to the official printed version, which appears here as it was first inserted in the "Rough Journal" of Congress. As Dr. Boyd points CONSTITUTION AND GOVERNMENT / 955 out, Jefferson was almost sole author in the sense of phraseology, the contributor of clear and felicitous prose, but this "great apologia of the American Revo- lution" was formed from many sources, and was, in- deed, as Jefferson himself termed it, "an expression of the American mind." What Dr. Boyd finds new in the Declaration is that "here, for the first time, a political society formally declared the purpose of the state, enumerated some of man's natural rights, and affirmed the right of revolution." As prepared by Jefferson and adopted by Congress, the Declaration was a philosophical justification of independence; its author acted as his country's advocate before the tribunal of world opinion. 6074. Dumbauld, Edward. The Declaration of Independence and what it means today. Norman, University of Oklahoma Press, 1950. 194 p. illus. Bibliography: p. 171-189. 50-9691 JK128.D8 An analysis of the Declaration of Independence, passage by passage, providing a commentary upon the political philosophy propounded in it and upon the historical background of ideas and events against which it was written. An introduction discusses briefly the drafting, revising, and adoption of the Declaration, as well as the three official texts of the document. The commentary supplies precedents for the theoretical portions of the Declaration; for instance, it traces the famous phrase, "all Men are created equal," to Euripides, Ulpian, Milton, Locke, Pufendorf, and Vattel, and notes that "more disposed to suffer" is actually a verbal echo of Locke's Treatises of Government. It is particularly useful in explaining the 28 charges against King George III which form so large a part of the document and are the least self-explanatory to modern readers. Thus the charge, "He has made Judges dependent on his Will alone, for the Tenure of their Offices," is illuminated by the attempts of six colonies during the 1750's and 1760's to give their judges tenure during good behavior, all defeated by the royal dis- allowance or other prerogative acts. Differing from critics of the Declaration such as Rufus Choate, who in 1856 spoke of its "glittering and sounding gener- alities," and George Santayana, who in 1945 called it "a salad of illusions," Dr. Dumbauld emphasizes the permanent value of its philosophy of govern- ment as a man-made device for promoting human welfare — the servant, not the master, of the people. 6075. The Federalist. The Federalist; a commen- tary on the Constitution of the United States, being a collection of essays written in support of the Constitution agreed upon September 17, 1787, by the Federal Convention, from the original text of Alexander Hamilton, John Jay [and] James Madison, with an introd. by Edward Mead Earle. New York, Modern Library, 1941. xlv, 618 p. (The Modern Library of the world's best books [139]) 4 I ~5 I 534 JK-154 1941 Written to advocate the adoption of the Consti- tution, these 85 newspaper essays, which first ap- peared in book form in 1788, are generally con- sidered the most important American contribution to the literature of political science. Together, they form an exposition of the ideas dominant in the political philosophy of the 18th-century Whigs on the means of securing both civil liberty and efficient government, on the principles of federal government, and on the balance of power in such a government among the executive, legislative, and judicial branches, and between the Federal and State governments. This series of essays, set- ting forth the political needs of the country as well as the principles of the new Constitution, was planned by Hamilton in an effort to persuade the citizenry of New York, a crucial but doubtful State in the matter of ratification. For this pur- pose he enlisted the aid of Madison and Jay. Hamil- ton interpreted the needs of the country, the powers of the executive, and the functions of the judiciary. Madison explained the legislative branch of the pro- posed government, and Jay the conduct of foreign relations. The authorship of a number of the essays is still uncertain, as between Hamilton and Madison. In the forefront of those concerned with the initiation, formulation, and adoption of the Constitution, both were superbly endowed to eluci- date it. 6076. Holcombe, Arthur N. Our more perfect union; from eighteenth-century principles to twentieth-century practice. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1950. 460 p. 50-9371 JK31.H7 An intensive historical analysis of the American experiment in self-government. Professor Hol- combe first examines the principles of the framers of the Constitution, and then interprets and evalu- ates those principles in terms of contemporary poli- tics and the conditions of the modern world. He affirms his belief that the postulates of 1787, as they have come to be applied in American politics, are sound, and are valid not only for Americans, but for peoples everywhere who feel the need for better political order in the world. In the author's opin- ion, however, the Constitution is still an unfinished experiment, the principles of which require fur- ther extension if the United States is to maintain a satisfactory position in international affairs. The creators of the American republic, he concludes, were aware of the proneness of the holders of power to its abuse. To protect the governed, the framers of the Constitution adopted a system of checks and 956 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES balances that has worked remarkably well. Two instrumentalities, the separation of powers among the three coordinate branches of government, and the division of power between Federal and State agencies, they incorporated in the Constitution. The third, unforeseen by the founders, the normal operation of a bipartisan system in politics, has made for moderation. 6077. Kelly, Alfred H., and Winfred A. Harbi- son. The American Constitution, its origins and development. Rev. ed. New York, Norton, 1955- I0 37 P- 55-M 22 JK31.K4 1955 "Selected readings": p. 949-978. A massive constitutional history designed for the "average undergraduate student or general reader," orginally published in 1948. The narrative begins with the period 1 607-1 789, covering the whole Colonial era, the Revolution, and achievement of national unity under the Articles of Confederation and the Constitution, when the principal institu- tions and ideas of the American constitutional sys- tem were developed. It continues through the second period, 1789-1865, when the Federal gov- ernment was established under the Constitution, and the Confederacy's attempt to destroy the Union was defeated. Finally, the authors survey the third great epoch in American history, the years from 1865 to the present. Most of its constitutional problems have arisen, they indicate, from successive attempts to adjust the constitutional system to the requirements of modern urban industrial society. Professors Kelly and Harbison find one great theme running through all three centuries of American history: the government of laws, not men. 6078. McLaughlin, Andrew C. A constitutional history of the United States. New York, Appleton-Century, 1936. 833 p. 37-35 2 9 JK31.M25 1936a First published in 1935. A history of the development of American con- stitutional principles beginning in 1754 with the Albany Plan of union, which marked the beginning of an effort to single out what should be turned over to a central government or agency of cen- tral administration. In the discussion of the years 1754-87, the purpose has been to dwell upon the emergence of the constitutional system, but some attention has been paid to the transformation of the Colonies into self-governing commonwealths and to the principles upon which State constitu- tions were established. Professor McLaughlin at- tributes two major creative achievements to this Revolutionary era: the establishment of limited government and the founding of the Federal state. Yet, he finds, the nature of the union, the position of the States, and the authority of the Supreme Court were still matters of dispute in the 1820's. By the 1830's, however, the Court under the leader- ship of John Marshall had attained a position of judicial authority, and Jackson as national leader of the people had established a "new presidency." The controversy over the constitutional structure of the union was, of course, only resolved by civil war. The last subject treated in detail is the interpretation of the 14th Amendment; the continuation from 1876 to the 1930's is only a sketch (p. 760-794). Ameri- can history, the author believes, "is the history of a people entering upon the great adventure of popu- lar government and marching forward with a con- siderable degree of achievement." Professor Mc- Laughlin (1861-1946), who taught at the Univer- sity of Chicago from 1906 to 1929 and served for many years as an editor of The American Historical Review, produced other works of distinction in this and related fields. Among them are: Lewis Cats (Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1891. 363 p. Ameri- can statesmen [v. 24]); The Courts, the Constitution and Parties (Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1912. 299 p.); and Steps in the Development of American Democracy (New York, Abingdon Press, 1920. 210 p.). 6079. McLaughlin, Andrew C. The foundations of American constitutionalism. New York, New York University Press, 1932. 176 p. (New York University. Stokes Foundation. Anson G. Phelps lectureship on early American history) 33-3303 JK268.M25 A collection of six lectures, which aim to trace briefly the historical origins of some of the basic principles of the American constitutional system. Professor McLaughlin has deliberately emphasized here the influence of New England religious and economic practices and doctrines in the background of the Federal Convention of 1787. These he finds rooted in the creed enunciated by the Puritan Sepa- ratists in the late 16th and early 17th centuries: the doctrine of individual liberty and the theory and fact of compact and covenant. This creed, he believes, the Pilgrim Fathers not only asserted but, in simple fashion, rendered concrete He stresses the further fact that the Pilgrims were forced to act coopera- tively, and at first entirely as a community, because of their joint-stock arrangement with London mer- chants. They thus combined business and religion, the church and the corporation, the covenant and the joint-stock agreement. In this duality Professor McLaughlin discovers the "essence of the theory of democracy, as a system of government, and the center of free constitutionalism." CONSTITUTION AND GOVERNMENT / 957 6080. New York {State) Constitutional Conven- tion Committee. Constitutions of the states and United States. [Albany, J. B. Lyon Co.] 1938. 1845 p. (Its [Reports, v. 3]) 38-28224 JK3425 1938.A32 A compilation of the complete texts of the con- stitutions of the 48 States and of the United States, prepared under the direction of Charles Poletd, chairman of the New York State Constitutional Con- vention Committee, for use by members of the New York State Constitutional Convention of 1938. As published here, the constitutions contain all pro- visions in force on January 1, 1938. All clauses of the original documents and all amendments are given in full unless they have been repealed. Edi- torial insertions are indicated by brackets. In his introduction, Mr. Poletd observes that the wealth of constitutional experience presented in this volume may suggest desirable provisions, but may also indi- cate the dangers inherent in certain clauses. Par- ticularly, he warns against the inclusion of certain types of detailed provision in the basic law, pointing to the regular amendment and reamendment of such clauses, and the danger of turning what should be a fundamental law into a welter of conflicting and overlapping provisions and of breaking down the distinction between a constitution and statute law. Comparison between the average State constitution and that of the United States, he notes, reveals the superior judgment of those who drafted the basic law of the Nation. 6081. Randall, James G. Constitutional problems under Lincoln. Rev. ed. Urbana, Univer- sity of Illinois Press, 1951. xxxiii, 596 p. 51-1577 JK201.R3 1951 Bibliography: p. 531-563. A study of the constitutional problems which the Civil War thrust upon the Lincoln administration. Professor Randall regards secession as an extracon- stitutional matter. To him, the most practical and serious question of 1860-61 was not the constitution- ality of secession but the wisdom and desirability of it. He discusses such problems as the consistency of war powers, both presidential and congressional, with the Constitution, as well as the validity of numerous war measures — the Emancipation Proc- lamation, the creation of special war courts, the con- fiscation of property, the creation of special war crimes — and congressional approval of many execu- tive acts which bordered on legislation, notably, of course, Lincoln's suspension of the privilege of habeas corpus. He notes the double nature of the conflict, as both war and rebellion, the existence of the Confederate States as a de facto government with belligerent standing, and, under Lincoln's moderat- ing influence, the reluctance of the Federal govern- ment to prosecute for treason. In Professor Ran- dall's opinion, Lincoln went farther than any other President in assuming executive power independent- ly of Congress; the judiciary played a passive rather than an active part in the emergency; but the Con- stitution, "while stretched, was not subverted." 6082. Read, Conyers, ed. The Constitudon recon- sidered. New York, Columbia University Press, 1938. xviii, 424 p. 38-39088 JK271.R33 A collection of 27 papers read before a meeting of the American Historical Association at Philadelphia in 1937 to mark the sesquicentennial of the United States Constitudon. Organized in three groups, the essays consider the background of political, eco- nomic, and social ideas which determined the think- ing of the Constitutional Convention and found ex- pression in its work; analyze some portions of the Constitution itself; and study its influence both upon American and upon foreign political thought and action. The consensus is that the Constitution has been successfully adjusted to later times, new prob- lems, and fresh currents of opinion; it has provided a framework for living usages, and a flexible pattern for an economic order, a political state, and a nas- cent culture. The Constitudon is seen as a delib- erate and rational effort to shape the world of social relations to humane ends by devising a mechanism of government able to guarantee life, liberty, and the pursuit of happiness. Among the writers in- cluded are Charles A. Beard, Henry Steele Com- mager, Robert M. Mclver, and Herbert W. Schneider. 6083. Sanders, Jennings B. Evolution of execudve departments of the Continental Congress, 1774-1789. Chapel Hill, University of North Caro- lina Press, 1935. 213 p 35-3939 JK411.S32 Bibliography: p. [1931-203. A study of how the executive agencies of the Con- tinental Congress developed, how they functioned separately and in cooperation, and how they and the choice of their personnel were affected by congres- sional politics. Part 1 deals with the period to 1781, during which Congress gradually abandoned the attempt to exercise executive functions exclusively through its own members. Action by the whole body or by special committee was soon supplanted by a system of standing committees for permanent concerns such as war or treasury administration. But this overburdened the abler members and left legislation to the less gifted. The expedient of boards, partly of members of Congress and pardy of nonmembers, or of nonmembers subject to a com- mittee of members, was resorted to, without much improvement. Part 2 describes the general reorgan- ization of 1 78 1 whereby three major departments, 958 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES for finance, war, and foreign affairs, were set up under individual nonmember administrators. When Robert Morris resigned under fire in 1784 he was replaced by a board of three nonmember Treasury commissioners. Chapters concerning the Post Office, 1775-89, and the Secretary of Congress, 1774-89, appear in this part because both were oper- ations headed by individual nonmembers from the beginning. Much of the procedure and personnel of these departments was carried over into the depart- ments set up under the Constitution. Dr. Sanders' book is drier than need be, but indispensable as the only detailed treatment of a very important subject. He had previously described The Presidency of the Continental Congress, 1774-89, 2d printing, rev. (Chicago, 1930. 76 p.); it was chiefly of formal and ceremonial importance and had next to nothing in common with the executive presidency after 1789, with which it has sometimes been mistakenly linked. 6084. Swisher, Carl Brent, American constitu- tional development. 2d ed. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1954. 1 145 p. 54-2606 JK31.S9 1954 First published in 1943. A history which takes the position that the Con- stitution of the 1950's is much further from the Con- stitution of the 1870's than was the latter from the Constitution as originally applied. The author therefore devotes approximately half of this volume to an account of American constitutional develop- ment in the 20th century. He attempts to show not merely the nature and scope of the Constitution dur- ing particular periods, but also the causes of changes and the manner in which they were accomplished. The judiciary, Congress, and the executive branch of the Government, the author believes, have all played important parts, both positively and nega- tively, in these developments. Accordingly, he has made ample use of congressional debate and maneuver, and of Supreme Court decisions, which often mark "the periphery of permitted constitu- tional expansion." Among the Presidents who played negative parts or who sought to restrain con- temporary constitutional expansion he lists Van Buren, Buchanan, Benjamin Harrison, and Cool- idge. Jefferson, Jackson, Lincoln, Wilson, and Franklin D. Roosevelt, who enlarged the powers of their office, he regards as "makers of the Constitu- tion" in a very real sense. 6085. Swisher, Carl Brent. The growth of con- stitutional power in the United States. Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1946. 261 p. ([Chicago. University. Charles R. Walgreen Foundation for the Study of American Institutions. Lectures!) A 46-543 JK34.S93 An examination of the American constitutional system which devotes particular scrutiny to the changes induced by war, depression, and the devel- opment of mass-production industrialism. Although Professor Swisher is interested primarily in fairly recent events and in the current status of our constitutional system, he makes some use of early history when conditions and climates of opinion differed greatly from those of the present, and demonstrates the shift in ideology from the theories of Edmund Burke and Adam Smith, Alexander Hamilton and Thomas Jefferson, to those of Herbert Hoover and Wendell Willkie, Henry Wallace and Franklin D. Roosevelt. He believes that the Con- stitution, besides establishing areas of immunity from government control, embodies the spirit of "rightness" — the judges have always interpreted it not only as requiring right procedure but as in- corporating the basic moral principles of the period — and has been kept righteous by the infusion of new concepts of rightness as they have matured in the national community. Professor Swisher considers more sweeping operation cf government controls inevitable under mass-production industralism, but remains untroubled about the increasing centraliza- tion of power in the Federal government, since he finds a variety of checks still standing as barriers to the misuse of power. 6086. Thorpe, Francis Newton, comp. The Fed- eral and state constitutions, colonial charters, and other organic laws of the states, territories, and colonies now or heretofore forming the United States of America. Compiled and edited under the Act of Congress of June 30, 1906. Washington, Govt. Print. Off., 1909. 7 V. (59th Cong., 2d sess. House. Document 357) 9-3537 1 JK18 1909 List of authorities: v. 1, p. xv-xxxv. Save for an initial group of Federal documents and commissions, charters, and plans of union, 1492- 1754, the materials of this indispensable official com- pilation are arranged alphabetically by state or ter- ritory. Arrangement under the alphabetical head- ings is chronological. Cetrain acts of Congress and treaties with other nations governing territories acquired by annexation, cession, or conquest are also printed in full. Explanatory footnotes are provided, and an index to the whole appears in volume 7. Here, as in no other work, is contained the whole American experiment with government limited by fundamental law, and the extraordinary variety of means that have been employed to achieve essentially identical ends. 6087. U. S. Constitutional Convention, 1787. The records of the Federal Convention of 1787; edited by Max Farrand. Rev. ed. New Haven, Yale University Press, 1937. 4 v. 37-253 2 4 JK141 i937a A collection of all available records — previously unpublished, scattered through various printed vol- umes, or issued in unsatisfactory form, before the first edition of this work (1911) — of the convention which framed the American Constitution at Phila- delphia in 1787. The editor's primary aim was to establish and to present his material "in the most trustworthy form possible." All records of each day's session are gathered together, affording maxi- mum convenience for their collation. Cross- references to the more important subjects and an exhaustive general index (v. 4: p. 127-230) take the place of subject headings. A special index (v. 4: p. 107-123) provides, in addition, references en- abling one to trace the origin and evolution of every clause adopted. Although the journal of the Con- vention, kept in the form of minutes by William Jackson, and Madison's notes of the debates are the most important documents published here, other notes and memoranda are included such as those of Robert Yates of New York, Rufus King of Massachusetts, James McHenry of Maryland, Wil- liam Pierce of Georgia, William Paterson of New Jersey, and Alexander Hamilton. Volumes 1 and 2 contain the proceedings of the Convention. In volume 3 are printed the texts of supplementary rec- ords, the Virginia, Pinckney, New Jersey, and Hamilton Plans, and all significant references to the Convention in the letters and other writings of the 55 delegates, of whatever date. In the 1937 revision the three volumes of the original edition are re- printed with only minor corrections, while the addi- tional volume 4 contains "Further Additions and Corrections" (p. 11-89) an ^ the two indexes, greatly improved over those in the original volume 3. The only considerable source that has turned up since 1937 is the notebook of John Lansing, edited by Joseph Reese Strayer under the title The Dele- gate from New Yorl^ (Princeton,, Princeton Uni- versity Press, 1939. 125 p.). It differs little from the well-known notes of Lansing's colleague Robert Yates. 6088. Van Doren, Carl C. The great rehearsal; the story of the making and ratifying of the Constitution of the United States. New York, Viking Press, 1948. 336 p. illus. 48-657 JK146.V3 1948a "Sources and acknowledgments": p. 321-322. A history of the framing and ratification of the Constitution of the United States during 1787 and 1788, based mainly upon the original records of the CONSTITUTION AND GOVERNMENT / 959 Federal Convention in 1787, and of the State con- ventions which ratified or rejected the Constitution. Dr. Van Doren has also made expert use of the contemporary press, and of the diaries, letters, and other memorabilia of the principal figures. His method of letdng them speak in their own words, of presendng the argument in action, brings alive the great personalities and the complex issues of a crucial moment in American history, when a league of jealous and sovereign States was boldly converted into the Federal government. Both Washington and Franklin, as well as many lesser men, came to the Convention persuaded that the American ex- periment in self-government could not survive with- out major changes in its structure. The decisive step in the Convention was "The Federal Compro- mise" agreed to on July 3: the stalemate between the large and the small States was broken by the solution, anticipated by Roger Sherman but moved by Franklin, of representing States in the lower house in proportion to their population, and giving them equal votes in the Senate. The title and the preface suggest the analogy between the States of the Confederation in 1787 and the sovereign states of the United Nations in 1948, but it is not pursued in the text. 6089. Warren, Charles. Congress, the Constitu- tion, and the Supreme Court. New rev. and enl. ed. Boston, Little, Brown, 1935. 346 p. 35-24270 JK31.W3 1935 First published in 1925 A history which deals with the United States Supreme Court in its relation to acts of Congress, specifically, with the Court's authority to determine when Congress has overstepped the bounds set for it by the Constitution, and to curb attempts by Con- gress to alter or amend the Constitution. Mr. War- ren also presents the views of early Congresses upon the principle of judicial review, a brief description of each case in which the Court had, by 1935, held an act of Congress unconstitutional, and a review of the Court's cases particularly affecting labor, whether or not they were decided on constitutional grounds. Arguing that there had been slight need for changes in these powers of the Court, the author attacks various proposals made to abolish or impair them. The Court, he affirms, in its decisions declaring acts of Congress invalid, has dealt with statutes whose constitutional defects were later remedied by prop- erly drawn legislation or by constitutional amend- ment, or with cases that involved rights of citizens, States, or other components of the Federal govern- ment — rights of extreme importance to maintain, and which would have been abrogated had Congress had the power to set aside the Constitution. 9 6 ° / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES C. Constitutional Law 6090. Association of American Law Schools. Se- lected essays on constitutional law, compiled and edited by a committee of the Association of American Law Schools. Chicago, Foundation Press, 1938. 5 v. in 4. 38-29140 JK268.A75 A collection of approximately 300 papers by more than 170 professors of law, judges, practicing law- yers, and political scientists reprinted from law re- views and other legal periodicals, bar association reports, political science journals, and, in a few in- stances, from books out of print or not readily accessible. In selecting the essays, the editorial group headed by Douglas B. Maggs, assisted by several hundred scholars and lawyers, considered the needs especially of judges and practicing lawyers, students and teachers in law schools, and students and teachers in political science departments. The articles and notes published here collect and collate decisions, trace the development of doctrine, and examine critically both decisions and doctrines; many project what their authors believed to be tendencies and trends. Material was sought on all Federal constitutional questions litigable in the courts. Constitutional questions not litigable, con- stitutional questions in the field of international law, and problems of State constitutional law were disre- garded. Book 1, "The Nature of the Judicial Proc- ess in Constitutional Cases," includes historical studies deemed of permanent importance and broad treatments of basic ideas. Book 2, "Limitations of Governmental Power," deals with restrictions held to result from the constitutional guarantees of per- sonal and property rights. Book 3, "The Nation and the States," "weighs the constitutional questions which grow out of the federal nature of our gov- ernmental system." Books 4 and 5 examine, respec- tively, the constitutional aspects of "Administration" and "Taxation." Each book carries its own table of contents, its own table of cases, and a subject index, while Book 1 has in addition some bibliographical aids. Caveat: Book 5 is in volume 1; otherwise book and volume numbers coincide. 6091. Cooley, Thomas M. A treatise on the con- stitutional limitations which rest upon the legislative power of the states of the American union. 8th ed., with large additions, considera- tions of amendments, and giving the results of the recent cases, by Walter Carrington. Boston, Little, Brown, 1927. 2 v. (cciii, 1565 p.) 27-9874 JK241.C77 1927 "List of cases cited": p. xxiii-cxcv. Characterized by lucidity of style and organization, this classic work, first published in 1868, is still valuable to the student of constitudonal problems. Its purpose was to present such an explication of constitutional principles as should serve, together with its references to judicial decisions, legal treatises, and historical events, as a guide to the study of the powers denied to the States under the Constitudon. Although the volume was thus based upon au- thority and precedent, and its stated aim was to demonstrate the law rather than the views of the author, it was not without a philosophy of juris- prudence or of the social order. Admittedly, Judge Cooley of the Michigan Supreme Court wrote in full sympathy with the restraints imposed upon the exercise of the powers of government, and with faith both in the checks and balances of the republi- can system and in public opinion. His chapters on the protection of personal liberty and property were exceptionally strong and have been highly influential. In the eighth edition, cognizance was taken of the vast industrial and social changes which had occurred since publication of the seventh in 1903, and some new text was added. Reports of important and pertinent cases were brought for- ward to June 1, 1926. 6092. Corwin, Edward S. The Constitution and what it means today. [ 12th ed.] Princeton, Princeton University Press, 1958. 344 p. 58-34767 Law "Table of cases": p. 311-337. This edition of a standard work first published in This edition of a standard work first published in 1920 brings decisions of the Supreme Court, which constitute its principal substance, forward approxi- mately to 1958. Explanations of currently prevail- ing doctrine and pracdce are accompanied by brief summaries of their historical development. Among the important matters considered are judicial re- view, the commerce clause, the executive power, the war power, national supremacy, and freedom of speech, the press, and religion. The book shows how powerful and pervasive the doctrine of na- tional supremacy has become since the "Constitu- tional Revolution" of 1937, when the Court returned to Chief Justice Marshall's concepts. The con- stantly augmented flow of discretionary power to the President in an era of crisis is noted with the comment that "a vacuum is all that Judicial Review CONSTITUTION AND GOVERNMENT / 96 1 has to offer in such a situation." Judicial review is, nevertheless, regarded here as taking on increasingly "the character of a species of arbitration between competing social interests rather than of adjudica- tion in the strict sense of the term, namely, the determination of the rights of adverse parties under a setded, statable rule of law." The author offers crisp comments upon the "censorship of quite in- definite scope" exercised by the Court, and upon such recent topics as the desegregation cases, the tactics of the Governor of Arkansas, Presidential dis- ability, and the Vice President's status and duty in this event. 6093. Corwin, Edward S. A constitution of pow- ers in a secular state; three lectures on the William H. White Foundation at the University of Virginia, April 1950, and an additional chapter. Charlottesville, Va., Michie, 195 1. 126 p. 51-62174 JK303.C65 An analysis of the judicial translation of the power requirements of national crisis — two world wars, the Great Depression, and a fundamentally altered out- look upon the purpose of government — into the vocabulary of constitutional law. "In general terms," says Professor Corwin, "our system has lost resiliency and what was once vaunted as a Con- stitution of Rights, both State and private, has been replaced by a Constitution of Powers. More speci- fically, the Federal System has shifted base in the direction of a consolidated national power, while within the National Government itself an increased flow of power in the direction of the President has ensued." This consolidation has been registered in our constitutional law, he believes, through the changed attitude of the Supreme Court, which has in recent years asserted canons favorable to a strongly centralized government of indefinite rather than enumerated powers. "Presidential autocracy" has become the dominant element in our constitutional system. As remedies, Professor Corwin suggests basing public policy on the related ideas of con- sensus, compromise, and moderation, keeping leg- islation a still available procedure of government in the meeting of crisis conditions, and reconstructing the Cabinet chiefly from the membership of Congress. 6094. Corwin, Edward S. Liberty against gov- ernment; the rise, flowering and decline of a famous juridical concept. Baton Rouge, Louisiana State University Press, 1 948. 2 1 o p. 48-8664 JC599.U5C66 Constitutional liberty exists if government itself operates under constitutional restraints when it seeks to impose restraints upon the people, and juridical liberty is the kind of constitutional lib- erty which results from the specialized type of checks and balances known as judicial review. Chapter 2 deals with the Roman and English precedents for this American development, and particularly with the ideas of John Locke, who transmuted the law of nature into the rights of men, and these into the rights of ownership. These were developed by the early American bench and bar into the doctrine of vested rights, which maintained that existing property rights were superior to reform legislation, and reached the apogee in the 1830's. Since the Civil War the history of juridical liberty has been bound up with the due process clause of the 14th Amendment. The Supreme Court was long in realizing its potentialities, but finally in the 1890's it followed the leaders of the American Bar in reading it as an endorsement of economic laissez-faire, "trimmed down to the doctrine of freedom of con- tract in the field of industrial relations." By this time, as an endorsement of "the prerogative of great corporations in dealing with unorganized working- men," it had become an anachronism, and fell an easy victim to the constitutional revolution of the 1930's. The author makes clear his regret that "liberty" and "equality" have come to appear as opposed values, and that so great a tradition has had so unworthy an end. 6095. Fenn, Percy Thomas. The development of the Constitution. New York, Appleton- Century, 1948 xix, 733 p. 48-1 113 JK268.F4 A casebook for undergraduate students, composed of the doctrines and dicta of the judges of the Su- preme Court, excerpted from their decisions or dis- senting opinions. It emphasizes the nature of the judicial power, the policy-making functions of high courts in general and of the Supreme Court in partic- ular, and the evolution of constitutional jurispru- dence. Parts 1 and 2 isolate and examine the con- trolling principles of constitutional law. Emphasis is here placed upon the establishment by the Court of the power to invalidate legislative enactments and upon the due process clause of the 14th Amendment. Parts 3 and 4 analyze two great governmental pow- ers: the taxing power and the power to regulate commerce. "The former implements the whole federal system; the latter provides the basis for the national power." Part 5 abandons the topical order so as to deal unitarily with the great cases of the New Deal, but includes some earlier ones in which the Court reviewed federal protection of the general welfare. Professor Fenn places the essentials of the working constitutional system of the country in the fields of due process, taxation, and commerce. "On the exercise of the judicial power in these fields," says he, "the Court bases its supervision of the policies of government." Introductions precede 962 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES most of the chapters and more or less elaborate notes follow a number of the cases. Unfortunately the only index furnished is a listing of the cases selected. 6096. Frankfurter, Felix. The commerce clause under Marshall, Taney and Waite. Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina Press, 1937. 114 p. (The Weil lectures on American citizen- ship [1936]) 37-888 HF1455.F7 Three short essays, originally delivered as lectures at the University of North Carolina in 1936, which analyze the direction given to the law of the com- merce clause of the Constitution by Chief Justices Marshall, Taney, and Waite, who held office, save for an 11-year break, from 1801 to 1888. He traces the ideas "which they drew out of the commerce clause as the means for limiting state powers in their inroads upon national policy, whether found in the commerce clause itself or expressed in Congressional legislation." All three Chief Justices were preoc- cupied with the restrictive rather than the affirma- tive use of the clause empowering Congress "To reg- ulate Commerce with foreign Nations and among the several States, and with the Indian Tribes." The doctrine, first oudined by Marshall, that the commerce clause, by its own force and without national legislation, authorizes the Court to place limits upon state jurisdiction, attained equilibrium in Waite's period. Thereafter the issues concerned application rather than the doctrine itself. Justice Frankfurter places Taney second only to Marshall in our constitutional history, and Waite, though "not of their flight," in the great tradition. 6097. Mott, Rodney Loomer. Due process of law; a historical and analytical treatise of the principles and methods followed by the courts in the application of the concept of the "law of the land." Indianapolis, Bobbs-Merriil, 1926. lxxxi, 702 p. 26-13490 Law This elaborately theoretical book, which originated as a University of Wisconsin dissertation, traces "the origin and development, as well as the application, of those principles which the courts have developed as part of the concept of due process of law." It occurs in the Constitution, as the requirement that no person shall be deprived of "life, liberty, or prop- erty without due process of law," in the 5th and 14th Amendments. The study first reviews the background literature of the Anglo-American tradi- don of resistance to the exercise of arbitrary power, beginning with "the law of the land" (lex terrae) in the 39th section of Magna Carta, and including the declarations of rights drawn up by the States in their constitudons of the Revolutionary period. Dr. Mott points out that "the simplest and most far- reaching of constitutional phrases" first appeared in the 5th Amendment (1791), which applies only to Federal action. This limitation, together with a desire to protect the loyal citizens and freedmen of the South after Appomattox, led Congress to pro- pose the 14th Amendment (1868), which applies only to the States. Although the courts have gready broadened the scope of due process and applied it with increasing frequency, they have steadily upheld the concept of the balance of convenience between private rights and public welfare. At the heart of the decisions, rendered chiefly in the spheres of taxation and the police power, have been the prin- ciples of "administrative convenience, balance of convenience, or public purpose." 6098. Orfield, Lester Bernhardt. The amending of the Federal Constitution. Ann Arbor, University of Michigan Press, 1942. xxvii, 242 p. (Michigan legal studies) 4 2-36735 JK168.O7 Bibliography: p. [223J-233. A collection of articles, reprinted for the most part from law journals, which survey from various angles the process of constitutional amendment as devel- oped during the first 150 years of the nation's ex- istence, and which quote many judicial and other official opinions concerning Article Five of the Con- stitution, which provides for amendments. The book enters the field of constitutional law in its analysis of the genesis, justiciability, and scope of the amending power, and the procedure of amend- ment. From jurisprudence is drawn the discussion of the relation of the amending power to the concept of sovereignty. The reform of the amending process itself is investigated from the standpoint of political science and legislation. Professor Orfield comments upon the frequently repeated doctrine of the Su- preme Court that the people are sovereign, that they adopted the Constitution and may alter it. Before they can correctly be called sovereign, he be- lieves, the Constitution must be amended "so as to permit a majority of the electorate of the entire country to amend the Constitution." The federal principle could be preserved by requiring a majority of the voters in each State, or at least in each of a majority of States. The present arrangement, whereby "the people do not participate in a single stage of the amending process," he regards as an anachronistic survival of the 18th-century distrust of democracy. 6099. Rottschaefer, Henry. The Constitudon and socio-economic change; five lectures delivered at the University of Michigan, March 24, 25, 26, 27, and 28, 1947. Ann Arbor, University of Michigan CONSTITUTION AND GOVERNMENT / 963 Law School, 1948 [i.e. 1949] xvi, 253 p. (Michigan. University. Law School. The Thomas M. Cooley lectures, 1st ser.) 49-2548 Law The chief purpose of this book is "not only to describe and analyze die process by which constitu- tional adaptation occurred during the crisis induced by the most severe economic depression of modern times, but also to develop the implications of the constitutional theories and doctrines that constitute the constitutional law of today." Although these lectures trace the prior evolution of the constitu- tional principles invoked by the Supreme Court in support of its decisions affecting depression legislation, for the most part they survey actions taken during the years 1933-48. In this period the Court so construed the Constitution as to sustain a great expansion of Federal power, the relaxation of important limitations on State powers, more extensive and intensive regulation of business, and an increased protection of personal liberty in areas other than business. The real question, in the opinion of the author (1948), was not whether there would be a general retreat from these posi- tions, but how much further the trends were likely to be carried. "The dogma," he wrote, "that gov- ernment should assume an important and perma- nent role in achieving economic stability and a more just social order is not likely to be discarded." 6100. Story, Joseph. Commentaries on the Con- stitution of the United States: with a pre- liminary review of the constitutional history of the colonies and states before the adoption of the Con- stitution. 5th ed., by Melville M. Bigelow. Bos- ton, Litde, Brown, 1891. 2 v. 2-7028 JK211.S7 1891 "Cases cited": p. [xxi]-xxxiv. A legal classic of continuing importance and reputation first published in 1833 by Joseph Story (1779-1845), Associate Justice of the United States Supreme Court from 181 1. Most of the materials were drawn from the discussions of the Constitu- tion in The Federalist (no. 6074), and Chief Jus- tice Marshall's judgments on constitutional issues. The author disclaimed any ambition to interpret the theory of the Constitution himself, but rather sought to set forth "the true view of its powers, maintained by its founders and friends, and con- firmed and illustrated by the actual practice of the government." As originally conceived by Story, his Commentaries had three large divisions. The first sketched the charters, constitutional history, and ante-Revolutionary jurisprudence of the colo- nies, the principles common to all, and the diversi- ties among them. The second reviewed the con- stitutional history of the Revolutionary states, and the rise, progress, and decline of the Confederation. The third narrated the origins and adoption of the Constitution and explained all of its provisions, the principles on which they were founded, and the objections with which they had been assailed. Editors of subsequent editions have added references to amendments and adjudications down to January 1891, including a number of decisions from the lower Federal courts and from State courts as well as the Supreme Court, together with some other public papers. 6101. Twiss, Benjamin R. Lawyers and the Con- stitution; how laissez faire came to the Supreme Court. Princeton, Princeton University Press, 1942. 271 p. 42-19388 JK271.T9 The author's dissertation (Princeton University, 1938), the origin of the present work, was being enlarged and revised at the time of his regrettably early death. The manuscript was prepared for publication by Professor Edward S. Corwin. Its controversial purpose was to "analyze the vital func- tion of the bar as liaison between businessmen and judges, and to show how protests against govern- ment interference with private enterprise were translated into formal constitutional limitations." Dr. Twiss aimed to show that the development of American constitutional law during the period 1875— 1935 was primarily the work of a relatively small group of lawyers whose clients were great financial and business concerns. These members of the bar sought to insulate the judges from any theories or facts save those consistent with their own doctrines of individualism, laissez faire, and limited govern- ment power. The lawyers and the judges brought together the "American political philosophy of government limited by absolute fundamental rights, the theory of non-interference with self-regulating economic laws, and the legal and constitutional de- vices of property, contract, states rights, and judicial review to form the American constitutional doctrine of freedom of private enterprise. That doctrine flourished in the Supreme Court until the Revolu- tion of 1937." The author found in the law schools and the law-school journals, however, an awakening skepticism toward this judicial doctrine. And in upholding the National Labor Relations Act, he believed, the Supreme Court had "finally recognized that there can be a danger to liberty from private sources as well as from government." 6102. U. S. Constitution. The Constitution of the United States of America. Analysis and interpretation; annotations of cases decided by the Supreme Court of the United States to June 30, 1952. Prepared by the Legislative Reference Service, Library of Congress, Edward S. Corwin, editor. Washington, U. S. Govt. Print. Off., 1953. xwiv. 964 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 1361 p. (82c! Cong., 2d sess. Senate. Document no. 170) 53-63530 Law A revised edition of a publication produced under the same auspices in 1938 and more simply tided The Constitution of the United States {Annotated). It is a large-scale commentary on the Constitution as interpreted and applied by the Supreme Court, and it proceeds through the document and its first 21 Amendments in the most minute manner, section by section, and, for the more complex sections, clause by clause. Thus Article I, Section 1, requires just two and a half lines of print, but it is followed by 15 pages of commentary, organized under 3 main headings and 21 subordinate ones. For all provisions of the Constitution it gives "the currendy operative meaning," but for the most important ones it also traces "the course of decision and pracdce whereby their meaning was arrived at by the Court's official interpreters." Supreme Court decisions are the major source for the commentary, but they are supplemented by acts of Congress, executive orders and regulations, the proceedings of the 1787 Conven- tion, dissenting opinions, and legal or historical treatises. In Dr. Corwin's view, the Constitution's capacity for growth has resided far more in the Supreme Court's power of judicial review than in the process of amendment. He therefore gives spe- cial attention to certain broader doctrines, especially of the nature of the Federal system and the relation of governmental power to private rights, which have influenced the Court and concerning which it has on occasion changed its mind. His "Introduction" (p. ix-xxxi) is particularly concerned with such doc- trines. The commentary is followed by a list of the 73 acts of Congress which the Court has held uncon- stitutional in whole or part (p. 1241-1253), a mas- sive alphabetical "Table of Cases" (p. 1257-1333), and an "Index" (p. 1337-1361), which is less de- tailed because of the elaborate tables of contents that, in the commentary, precede each Article and each Amendment. 6103. Weaver, Samuel P. Constitutional law and its administration. Chicago, Callaghan, 1946. xxxvii, 684 p. 46-6268 JK268.W4 A i-volume textbook intended for colleges, uni- versities, and law schools which do not use the case- book system of education, or as a supplement to the many casebooks available, and as a handbook for lawyers and others who desire a better understand- ing of the Constitution and its application to mod- ern conditions. Briefly considered are: the funda- mental law of 1787; the 21 Amendments in force in 1946; statutes implementing this law; decisions of the courts interpreting and construing it; and the established customs and usages of the Federal gov- ernment, as well as certain inherent powers. The book traces the evolution of the fundamental law of 1787 into an "Enlarged Constitution," and the development of a new federalism. Emphasis is placed upon the recent recognition of new powers supported by new doctrines. This process of change has included "the overruling of precedents upon the subject of taxation, and precedents defining many of the limitations and guarantees of individual rights; the expansion of the war powers of the President; the increase of the powers of the Chief Executive; the enlargement of the economic pow- ers of the Federal Government"; the creation of many new administrative boards and commissions; and the recently evolved doctrine of inherent powers of the Federal Government in external and foreign affairs. A final part analyzes the three major pow- ers remaining to the States: the police power, the power of taxation, and eminent domain. The au- thor provides many quotations from opinions and statutes, but considers that casebook method in the field has become too unwieldy. 6104. Willoughby, Westel Woodbury. The con- stitutional law of the United States. 2d ed. New York, Baker, Voorhis, 1929. 3 v. ( lxvii, 2002 p.) 29-13658 JK268.W6 1929 First published in 1910. "Table of cases" prepared by Leon Sachs: v. 1, p. xix-lxvii. A systematically arranged and, as of 1929, complete exposition of the constitutional law of the United States, whose purpose is "to ascertain and to discuss critically the broad principles upon which have been founded the decisions rendered by the Supreme Court of the United States in the lead- ing cases, and thus to present, as a systematic whole, a statement of the underlying doctrines by which our complex system of constitudonal jurisprudence is governed." This work sets forth the processes of judicial reasoning by which they have been estab- lished, suggests corollaries that may be drawn from them, and indicates the relations which they bear to each other and to the more general doctrines of American public law. Extensive quotation is made from the language of the Supreme Court. By an examination of the statutes of Congress, Professor Willoughby has attempted to show the increase of Federal regulation and the manner in which the Federal government exercises the constitudonal pow- ers vested in it. Among the principal subjects dealt with are: the division of powers between the United States and the states, Federal supremacy and its maintenance, citizenship and naturalization, Fed- eral powers of taxation, the powers of Congress, reguladon of commerce, the Federal judiciary, the powers and duties of the President, the separadon of powers, and due process of law. CONSTITUTION AND GOVERNMENT / 965 6105. Wright, Benjamin Fletcher. The contract 39-4050 JK371.C6W7 clause of the Constitution. Cambridge, Har- vard University Press, 1938. xvii, 287 p. "Cases cited": p. [2611-277. A study of the nature and the significance for American constitutional and economic history of Ardcle I, Section 10, Clause 1, of the Constitution, which forbids the States to pass laws impairing the obligation of contracts. The author accepts Dr. Corwin's view that the doctrine of vested property rights has, from the beginning, been the basic doc- trine of American constitutional law, and adds that, so far as the Supreme Court was concerned, during the 19th century this doctrine was identified with the contract clause. His book is based upon all of the contract clause cases (about 500) brought before the Court, and while the leading decisions are emphasized, the lesser ones are treated in bulk for their economic significance. He considers that the limited, relatively specific meaning which the clause bore in 1787 was developed by judicial expan- sion into one far more inclusive and of much greater economic significance by 1835 or 1864, but he thinks that this expansion fitted in remarkably well with the democratic sentiment of the times. The impor- tant interpretations — that the clause includes con- tracts to which a State is a party, that a corporate charter is a contract, that it protects a contract for tax exemption, and that it prohibits retrospective bankruptcy or stay laws — were laid down while the Court was headed by Marshall and Taney (1801- 64). After 1890 the contract clause was overshad- owed by the due process of law clauses in the Court's mediation between property rights and public requirements. D. Civil Liberties and Rights 6106. American Academy of Political and Social Science, Philadelphia. Civil rights in Amer- ica, edited by Robert K. Carr. Philadelphia, 1951. 238 p. (Its Annals, v. 275) 58-4188 Hi.A4,v.275 JC599.U5A323 These 19 articles provide a summation of the mid- 20th-century status of American civil liberties. The conscious and deliberate attempt to give practical meaning to the specific guaranties of the Bill of Rights has found expression chiefly in Supreme Court decisions handed down since 1920. These decisions, especially those concerning freedom of speech and press, have placed the States under Federal judicial discipline in areas within which the States have been the main offenders. The Supreme Court has also defined and protected re- ligious liberty. The Civil Rights Division of the Department of Justice, set up as a section in 1939, has devoted itself to enforcement of the peonage laws, the laws protecting citizens in their right to vote for Federal officers, and laws punishing such crimes as police brutality or official partici- pation in lynchings. Beginning with New York in 1945, some States have enacted antidiscrim- inatory legislation — fair employment practice laws, fair educational practice laws, prohibitions of dis- crimination in places of public accommodation. A number of private organizations operate pri- marily in the field of civil liberties and rights, among them the American Civil Liberties Union, the National Association for the Advancement of Colored People, and the American Jewish Congress. This is all taken here as evidence of progress in "social engineering." On the debit side, however, are listed private discrimination against the Amer- ican Negro and odier minority groups, rigid local censorship of books, magazines, and motion pictures, and, most serious, the threats posed to civil liberty by unwisely chosen and operated policies and pro- cedures for combating communism. 6107. Brown, Ralph Sharp. Loyalty and security; employment tests in the United States. New Haven, Yale University Press, 1958. xvii, 524 p. (Yale Law School studies, 3) 58-6536 HF5549.5.R44B7 "The purpose of this book is first to explore and synthesize our disorderly growth of loyalty and se- curity measures, and then to suggest ways of cor- recting or eliminating their apparent excesses." It surveys the standards, procedures, and effects of nearly every kind of employment test used as an internal security technique in the United States. Among them are the administrative arrangements of of the Federal government for dealing with its em- ployees, with military personnel, and with defense contractors' employees, the various State and local test oaths and administrative programs, and testa administered by private employers and labor unions. These tests are actually "concerned with disloyalty, and essentially with one form of disloyalty: a prefer- ence for communism," or, put another way, "a treasonable state of mind that may lead to a treason- 966 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES able act." Professor Brown examines the justifica- tion for loyalty and security tests and makes recom- mendations for restricting them to "the limited circumstances in which political employment tests are necessary and defensible." Loyalty and security tests have been practiced, he believes, with too much rigor and too little humanity, and have needlessly impaired the freedoms of belief, speech, and asso- ciation protected by the First Amendment. 6108. Chafee, Zechariah. The blessings of liberty. Philadelphia, Lippincott, 1956. 350 p. 56-6563 JC599.U5C48 The late Professor Chafee (1 885-1957) taught at the Harvard Law School for 40 years, and was esteemed as one of the most disinterested defenders of American civil liberties. In the present volume he collected his addresses and articles of 1944-56 on the subject. The third paper reviews freedom of speech and of the press since 1917, postulating a period of struggle and criminal prosecutions, 1917— 20; a period of growth, 1920-30; a period of achieve- ment, 1930-45; and a recent period of renewed struggle and subtle suppressions. The first essay, "Watchman, What of the Night?", lists 11 encroach- ments upon liberty which have taken place since 1945; asserts that the present trends, if continued into an indefinite future, will produce "more indirect and subtle suppressions of liberty"; but expresses confidence that the American people will bring about a major reversal in the near future. Other papers discuss the McCarran Act (the Subversive Activities Control Act of 1950) in relation to the Bill of Rights; the proposed loyalty oath of the American Bar Association; "The Right not to Speak" under the Fifth Amendment; and the diverse forms of attack upon academic freedom. Professor Chafee's last thought was: "The blessings of liberty, though weakened, are ours if we want them, to hold and make strong. The flag still flies, and the city is not yet fallen." 6109. Chafee, Zechariah. Free speech in the United States. Cambridge, Harvard Uni- versity Press, 1946. xviii, 634 p. 48-3488 JC591.C52 1946 "Bibliographical note": p. [569]~57i. A synthesis of all of Professor Chafee's ideas on freedom of speech, and a discussion of the major court decisions upon it, mainly from 1920 to March 31, 1 94 1. A number of the chapters are reprinted, some revised and some not, from other publications. "This book is an inquiry into the proper limitations upon freedom of speech," states the author, "and is in no way an argument that any one should be allowed to say whatever he wants anywhere and at any time." More specifically, he examines the nature and scope of the First Amendment to the Constitution. Its framers, he believes, sought to preserve the earlier victory abolishing censorship, and to win a new one by abolishing prosecutions for sedition. "The true boundary line of the First Amendment," he writes, "can be fixed only when Congress and the courts realize that the principle on which speech is classified as lawful or unlawful involves the balancing against each other of two very important social interests, in public safety and in the search for truth." In his opinion, every reasonable attempt should be made to maintain both interests unimpaired. The great pub- lic interest in free speech should be sacrificed to cen- sorship or punishment only when it really im- perils the public safety by direct and dangerous interference. 61 10. Cornell University. Cornell studies in civil liberties. Robert E. Cushman, advisory editor. Ithaca, Cornell University Press, 1946-57. 15 v. A group of 15 studies (nos. 6111-6125) concern- ing civil liberty and security made under the general direction of Professor Robert E. Cushman of Cornell University and supported chiefly by a grant from the Rockefeller Foundation. Beginning in 1948 a num- ber of scholars, working independently under Pro- fessor Cushman, began investigation of the impact upon our civil liberties of current government pro- grams designed to ensure internal security and to expose and control disloyal or subversive conduct. The seven reports issuing from this particular research, one edited and one written by Walter Gell- horn, and one each by Edward L. Barrett, Jr., Vern Countryman, Lawrence H. Chamberlain, Robert K. Carr, and Eleanor Bontecou, cover the work of Fed- eral and State un-American activities committees and the operation of Federal, State, and local loyalty and security programs. Stimulus for these inquiries was presumably furnished by President Truman's Loyalty Order of 1947, which forms the hard core of the program to assure the loyalty of Federal employees, although it was preceded by less far- reaching measures and has since been supplemented in important ways. 61 1 1. Barrett, Edward L. The Tenney Commit- tee; legislative investigation of subversive activities in California. Ithaca, 1951. 400 p. 51-11118 HX91.C3A5 19493c Covers the work of the "Little Dies Committee" of the California State Senate, which employed the doctrine of association to identify Communists and their sympathizers, and sought to punish them by publicity and other means during the period 1941-49. 6ii2. Bontecou, Eleanor. The Federal loyalty- security program. Ithaca, 1953. 377 p. 53-10749 JK734.B6 Appendixes (p. 272-366): 1. Executive orders. — 2. Statutes and regulations relating to the employ- ment, dismissal, and investigation of employees of the executive branch of the Federal government. — 3. Extracts from exhibits accompanying report of the President's Temporary Commission on Em- ployee Loyalty. — 4. The training of investigators. — 5. Sample rules and regulations. — 6. The At- torney General's list. — 7. Listing of subversive organizations. An objective study, copiously documented, which relates the development of the loyalty-security pro- gram to the work of the Dies Committee in the late 1930's, and to subsequent piecemeal efforts to deal with suspected subversives in Federal employ- ment through the Civil Service Commission and the Federal Bureau of Investigation. The mechanics of adjudicating charges of disloyalty and security risk under the full formal program initiated in 1947 are dealt with, as are problems arising from the investigative process, and the techniques and stand- ards of judgment involved. 61 13. Carr, Robert K. Federal protection of civil rights; quest for a sword. Ithaca, 1947. 284 p. 4 8 ~5 II 7. J C 599-U5C35 An analysis of the work of the Civil Rights Sec- tion (now Division) of the United States Depart- ment of Justice, which was established in 1939 to pursue a course of "aggressive protection of funda- mental rights inherent in a free people." Chapter 1 notes that although the function of the Constitu- tion in protecting civil rights against interference by government is in general that of a shield, some provisions can serve as a sword. In some instances, the Federal government can take positive measures to safeguard civil liberties by prosecuting State and local officials, or private individuals who infringe them. Chapters 1-4 deal with the Civil Rights Sec- tion's early efforts to discover, clarify, use, and develop the existing Federal law of civil liberty, both constitutional and statutory, most of which was vague, inadequate, and dating from the Reconstruc- tion period. Chapters 5-6 oudine the development of administrative techniques and legal strategy by the Section and classify the kinds of cases handled by it, such as police brutality, election irregularities, peonage, freedom of communications, and conflicts between labor and management. A final chapter discusses as of 1947 "The Sword and the Future." 61 14. Carr, Robert K. The House Committee on Un-American Activities, 1945-1950. Ithaca, 1952. 489 p. 5 2 -!44 2 3 E 743-5 C 3 CONSTITUTION AND GOVERNMENT / 967 "List of publications of the House Committee on Un-American Activities": p. 464-469. A history of the first six years of the Committee's existence after its establishment as a permanent agency of Congress by "one of the most remarkable procedural coups in Congressional history.' Two of its more celebrated episodes were the hearings on the Hollywood writers and the Hiss-Chambers controversy. Sober and reflecdve in its review of the Committee's acdviues, this inquiry concludes with the comment: "On balance the good things the . . . Committee has done are outweighed by the bad," and the suggestion that its work be han- dled by other standing committees of Congress. 61 15. Chamberlain, Lawrence H. Loyalty and legislative action; a survey of activity by the Xew York State Legislature, 19 19-1949. Ithaca, 195 1. 254 p. 5 I ~ I 449° JC599.U52N52 A detailed and carefully documented examination of the Lusk, McNaboe, and Rapp-Coudert investi- gadons of disloyalty, and of associated events and consequences, including dismissals of teachers by the Board of Higher Education of New York City. 6116. Countryman, Vern. Un-American activities in the State of Washington; the work of die Canwell Committee. Ithaca, 1951. 405 p. 51-14732 HX91.W3C6 An appraisal as well as a thoroughly documented report of the work during 1947-50 of the Joint Leg- islative Fact-Finding Committee on Un-American Activities in the State of Washington and of the Uni- versity of Washington's Committee on Tenure and Academic Freedom. Both groups attempted to determine whether certain "radical" professors were academically incompetent, or were guilty of deliber- ately seeking to undermine the foundations of the republic and therefore of the abuse of academic freedom. 61 17. Cushman, Robert E. Civil liberties in the United States; a guide to current problems and experience. Ithaca, 1956. 248 p. 56-13957 JC599.U5C82 "Selected readings" at end of chapters. A comprehensive outline of the practice which obtained in the whole field of civil liberdes during the decade following World War II. Professor Cushman, an authority on the subject and advisory editor of the series, has sought to do three things: to indicate the status of each civil liberty at the close of the war; to summarize the principal developments which occurred regarding each in the perioJ cov- ered; and to point out the unsolved problems, together with some of the more important proposals for dealing with them. Venturing neither opinion 968 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES nor solution but admitting to a bias in favor of the protection of civil liberty, he presents his material under nine headings: "Freedom of Speech, Press, Assembly, and Petition"; "Academic Freedom"; "Freedom of Religion: Separation of Church and State"; "The Right to Security and Freedom of the Person"; "Military Power and Civil Liberty"; "The Civil Liberties of Persons Accused of Crime"; "Civil Liberties and National Security"; "Civil Liberties of Aliens"; and "Racial Discrimination." 6118. Gellhorn, Walter. Security, loyalty, and sci- ence. Ithaca, 1950. 300 p. 50-14649 UB270.G42 An examination of Federal government and uni- versity actions regarding security of technical infor- mation and the loyalty of scientists, which concludes that national policies on secrecy in scientific matters were, as of 1950, intelligentiy formulated but too rigidly applied, and were hindering the advance of scientific knowledge. 61 19. Gellhorn, Walter ed. The states and sub- version. Ithaca, 1952. 454 p. 52-10508 Law Condensed reports by seven contributors on legis- lation and other official actions of States and munici- palities to control subversion, which indicates that by 1952 the States had departed from the idea of guilt as personal to the accused. There was a widespread admission of the doctrine of guilt by association in both legislation and investigations. The reports on California, New York, and Washington receive book -length treatment elsewhere in the series (nos. 6111, 6115-6116). 6120. Konvitz, Milton R. The alien and the Asi- atic in American law. Ithaca, 1946. xiv, 299 p. 47-30101 JX4265.K65 Bibliography: p. 280-283. Although it draws substance from the decisions of other Federal courts and from State and national law, this is a study primarily "of how the United States Supreme Court has reacted to problems relat- ing to the alien and to the American citizen of Asiatic descent. It is also a study of the past and present legal status of these groups, and an attempt to make a contribution to the field of legal and polit- ical sociology." Among the subjects considered are: the right of citizenship, the retention of it, the right of land ownership, work laws, segregation, mis- cegenation, and the World War II relocation of per- sons of Japanese extraction, including American citizens. The author is severely critical of the dis- criminations found in American law. 61 2 1. Konvitz, Milton R. Bill of Rights reader; leading constitutional cases. Ithaca, 1954. xix, 591 p. 54-12758 Law Partial contents. — 2. The rule of law. — 3. Freedom of religion. — 4. Freedom of assembly and petition. — 5. Freedom of speech and press: some basic principles. — 6. Freedom of speech and press: the clear and present danger doctrine. — 7. Freedom of speech and press: the problem of loyalty. — 8. Freedom of speech and press: censorship and con- tempt by publicadon. — 9. Personal security. — 10. Freedom from race discrimination. — 11. Freedom of labor. Intended for "the average, educated American who is interested in the great issues and the great debates of his day." Of the nearly 80 cases included, all but a few were decided by the Supreme Court. They deal with all provisions incorporating civil and political liberties in the original Constitution and the Civil War Amendments, as well as in the Bill of Rights proper (Amendments 1-10). In order to show some decisions in their context of disagreement and conflict, Professor Konvitz has included concurring and dissenting opinions. 6122. Konvitz, Milton R. Civil rights in immi- gration. Ithaca, 1953. 216 p. 53-12660 Law A cridque of American immigration policy, more particularly of discrimination enacted into, and hard- ships and inequities arising under, legislation re- lating to the admission, exclusion, deportation, and naturalization of immigrants. Dr. Konvitz con- siders the problems of whom to admit, making special reference to the system of quotas by national origin; of whom to send back to the country of origin, paying special attention to the questions of fair hearings and proper grounds for deportation; and of whom to make cidzens. 6123. Konvitz, Milton R. Fundamental liberties of a free people: religion, speech, press, as- sembly. Ithaca, 1957. 420 p. 51- 1 1W JC599.U5K6 A topical history of the First Amendment free- doms which argues that they stand in intimate reladon to each other, "that freedom of conscience and religion implies freedom of thought and free- dom of teaching, and that freedom of speech and press is indispensable to religious beliefs which may be laden with unpopular judgments about the con- duct of polidcal and economic affairs in the city of man." Besides these, such others are considered as the freedom not to speak and not to listen, and the right to privacy. In discussing literary free- dom, Professor Konvitz disdnguishes works of artistic purpose from "dirt for dirt's sake," and pleads for the right of the former to the protection of the First Amendment. He urges public support of the press in its claims to freedom of information. He argues against invasion of the First Amend- ment freedoms by coercive or restrictive legislation because he regards them as indispensable means to the effective and intelligent operation of the demo- cratic process, essential to the foundations and the security of the republic. 6124. Sibley, Mulford Q., and Philip E. Jacob. Conscription of conscience; the American state and the conscientious objector, 1940-1947. Ithaca, 1952. 580 p. 52-12673 UB342.U5S52 "Selected and annotated bibliography": p. 549- 566. An inquiry into the treatment accorded conscien- tious objectors in the United States during World War II. It investigates such matters as the classifi- cation of objectors, the church-operated Civilian Public Service camps, and the objectors' work in for- estry, agriculture, medical research, and hospitals for the insane. It finds little but problems unsolved and failures: the disappointments in religious, edu- cational, and self-government programs; the erosion of morale; economic hardships; and an uneasy part- nership between the "Historic Peace Churches" and the Selective Service. Conditions were particularly bad in the government camps, operated primarily for "troublemakers"; here rebellious objectors engaged in slowdowns and other forms of obstruction, and were naturally met by increased repression. Sub- stantial classes of conscientious objectors, such as nonreligious objectors, remained outside the limits of official tolerance, and were given terms in Federal prisons. The authors remark that the "c. o.'s" nei- ther had nor developed any unity of outlook or pro- gram, that the measures of restraint adopted proved futile and pernicious, and that "the conflict between conscience and the state" was far from being resolved during World War II. 6125. Smith, James Morton. Freedom's fetters; the Alien and Sedition laws and American civil liberties. Ithaca, 1956. 464 p. 56-2434 E327.S59 See no. 3308. 6126. Emerson, Thomas I., and David Haber, eds. Political and civil rights in the United States; a collection of legal and related materials. Fore- word by Robert M. Hutchins. Buffalo, Dennis, 1952. xx, 1209 p. (United States case book scries) 52-4386 Law A comprehensive collection of cases and other materials taken from nearly all areas in which the CONSTITUTION AND GOVERNMENT / 969 freedom of American individuals and private groups is of juridical concern. The editors are concerned with the following rights: security of the person from bodily harm, involuntary servitude, and the fear of physical restraint; procedural safeguards for individuals who come into conflict with the law; the right to exercise the franchise; the right of full free- dom of political organization and political expres- sion; freedom of all other forms of expression; aca- demic freedom; freedom of religion and the separa- tion of church and state; and, finally, equality of legal status and opportunity for all persons. Pro- fessors Emerson and Haber find that a steady expan- sion and refinement of political and civil rights took place between 1787 and the close of World War II, reaching a peak during the late 1930's and early 1940's, but that between 1945 and 1952 the trend was reversed. This retreat from the practices of democratic freedom the editors attribute to a variety of factors, both internal and external, particularly to the increasing complexity of our industrial society and to the turbulence of world conditions. The retrogression may be temporary, they observe with restrained optimism, since the legal tools for main- taining these rights are significantly improved over those of any past period. 6127. Ernst, Morris L. The first freedom. New York, Macmillan, 1946. xiv, 316 p. 46-1639 JC599.U5E7 "Partial bibliography": p. 272-278. The "first freedom" is that of communication and thought guaranteed by the Bill of Rights. Al- though Mr. Ernst believes this country to be re- markably free from that political censorship of the press, radio, and motion pictures which char- acterizes so many nations under dictatorship, he finds real danger in the rise of "monopolies of the mind." In only 117 cities of America, for ex- ample, did competing daily newspapers exist as of 1946; one-third of all regular radio networks were interlocked with newspapers. Thus there had been concentration of control in these "separate" indus- tries, and the firm interlacing of what should be competitive media of communication. The market place of free competition for motion pictures was destroyed through interaction between a combina- tion of the five major companies and the Hays office. The author finds the causes of the concen tration economic, the dangers essentially spiritual, menacing "our greatest contribution to the history of mankind." He offers a number of practical sug- gestions for the restoration of "competition of thought" in the United States. As the greatest proponents of the first freedom, says Mr. Ernst, we '"must get our own house in order before we can rightfully assume that place of leadership in the 970 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES family of nations which our rich tradition warrants." Another New York lawyer, who specialized in rights cases and was for many years national direc- tor of the American Civil Liberties Union, was Arthur Garfield Hays (1881-1954). In Let Free- dom Ring (New York, Liveright Pub. Corp., 1937. 475 p.), originally published in 1928 and enlarged nine years later, he gave witty but earnest accounts of cases in which he had been concerned as counsel for the Union over a 15-year period. 6128. Kelly, Alfred H., ed. Foundations of free- dom in the American Constitution. New York, Harper, 1958. xviii, 299 p. 58-7976 Law Bibliography: p. 251-257. Partial contents. — Introduction, by J. B. Oakes. — What liberty means to free men, T. V. Smith. — Where constitutional liberty came from, by A. H. Kelly. — The great liberty: freedom of speech and press, by Z. Chafee. — Constitutional liberty and the communist problem, by J. W. Peltason. — Consti- tutional liberty and congressional investigations, by R. K. Carr. — Constitutional liberty and loyalty pro- grams, by A. F. Westin. Six essays on constitutional liberty, prepared originally as pamphlets for the Freedom Agenda program of the Carrie Chapman Catt Memorial Fund in 1954-56. This program was designed to combat the nationwide sense of fear, suspicion, and hostility aroused by the tensions and frustrations of the world situation and by sensational charges of widespread communist infiltration into government and the professions. Affirmatively, the plan was de- signed to promote a greater awareness of the mean- ing of the Bill of Rights and all our constitutional guaranties, a greater relaxation in our attitude to- ward nonconformity, and a greater appreciation of the basic values of liberty, freedom, and individual liberty. The last three papers have been extensively rewritten, and demonstrate the great improvement in the state of American civil liberty which has been brought about since 1954 by the healthy cor- rectives of politics, law, public opinion, and, es- pecially, the decisions rendered by the Supreme Court. The reaction described in these essays forms strong testimony to the continued vitality of the ideal of constitutional liberty in the United States. 6129. Konvitz, Milton R. The Constitution and civil rights. New York, Columbia Univer- sity Press, 1947. 254 p. A 47-1 1 16 JK1726.K6 A discussion of the legal aspects of Federal and State legislation for the protection of the civil rights of minorities in the United States. Civil rights in their limited and technical sense refer "to the rights of persons to employment, and to accommodations in hotels, restaurants, common carriers, and other places of public accommodation and resort," as enumerated in the Federal Civil Rights Act of 1875 and in various acts against discrimination on the statute books of 18 States. The author noted that in 30 American States, as of 1946, no civil rights legis- lation had been enacted, and that, as the Constitu- tion and statutes had been construed by the Supreme Court, the scope of the Federal civil rights acts was extremely narrow. He analyzed significant Su- preme Court decisions on racial discrimination from the Civil Rights Cases of 1S83 to the Screws Case of 1945. He discussed the extent of Federal authority in cases of lynching and of discrimination in em- ployment. The final chapter glanced hastily at the large body of laws which, in 20 States, imposed dis- crimination or segregation, and at the even larger body of local custom behind it. Appendixes give samples of proposed Federal laws and of existing State ones. The book is now chiefly useful as a background for the debates and sweeping changes of the past decade. 6130. Stouffer, Samuel A. Communism, con- formity, and civil liberties; a cross-section of the nation speaks its mind. Garden City, N.Y., Doubleday, 1955. 278 p. illus. 55-7160 JC599.U5S82 "Notes on materials from other surveys as related to the findings in this volume": p. 274-278. An analysis and interpretation of American atti- tudes toward "the communist conspiracy" both inside and outside the country, and toward those "who in thwarting the conspiracy would sacrifice some of the very liberties which the enemy would destroy." The study is based upon field work done in 1954 among more than 6,000 men and women from all walks of life by interviewers from the American Institute of Public Opinion and the National Opinion Research Center. The general conclusion reached is that great social, economic, and technological forces are slowly, even impercep- tibly, spreading tolerance and respect "for others whose ideas are different." Professor Stouffer warns of the necessity of vigilance as the price of liberty, however, and of the difficulties faced by its special guardians — the press, radio, television, and national and local political leaders — in distinguish- ing between the evils of communism and a danger- ous disregard for civil liberties. Harold D. Lass- well's National Security and Individual Freedom (New York, McGraw-Hill, 1950. 259 p.) provides a rather elaborate theoretical framework for this dilemma, intended to supply criteria whereby any particular safeguard may be judged for its effects upon liberty, whether in the sphere of government, of social institutions, or of the individual. Civil Lib- CONSTITUTION AND GOVERNMENT / 97 1 erties under Attac\ (Philadelphia, University of Pennsylvania Press, 195 1. 155 p.) consists of six lectures delivered at Swarthmore College. Henry Steele Commager, Robert K. Carr, Zechariah Cha- fee, Walter Gellhorn, Curtis Bok, and James P. Baxter divide between them the subjects of civil rights, measures aimed at radicalism or subversion, and menaces to science, the arts, and education. E. Government: General 613 1. Anderson, William. The units of govern- ment in the United States, an enumeration and analysis. New ed., completely rev. Chicago, Public Administration Service, 1945. 48 p. illus. ([Public Administration Service, Chicago] Publica- tion no. 83) 45-35 10 JS345 1945.A57 "First published, 1934 . . . New edition, com- pletely revised, 1942; reprinted, with appendix, 1945." A statistical study of all the units of government operating in this county as of January 1, 194 1. Pro- fessor Anderson attempted to learn how many distinct units were functioning, their principal classes and characteristics, and the areas and populations served by them. He discusses trends with respect to increases and decreases in die number of local units, the question whether too few or too many such units exist, and the optimum size for urban and rural units. He is interested chiefly in administrative efficiency and fiscal economy. In urban as in rural areas it is desirable, he believes, to have only a single important administrative unit in each defined area. He finds per capita expenditures in cities of from 30,000 to 300,000 about the same with only a slight upward tendency as sizes increases, although above the latter figure increase appears to be more pro- nounced. The ordinary county expenditures per capita, including overhead, decrease very noticeably when population reaches 30,000 to 35,000, but there- after decline less rapidly. The author would re- duce the number of local units for the average State from 3,500 to approximately 370. 6132. Binkley, Wilfred E., and Malcolm C. Moos. A grammar of American politics; the na- tional government. 3d ed., rev. New York, Knopf, 1958. 806 p. 58-5009 JK274.B57 1958 6133. Binkley, Wilfred E., and Malcolm C. Moos. A grammar of American politics; the na- tional, state, and local governments. 2d ed., rev. andenl. New York, Knopf, 1952. 1059 p. (Borzoi books in political science) 51-11102 JK274.B57 1952 "Supplementary reading": p. 747-771, 1051-1059. A large-scale textbook, originally published in 1949, by a veteran professor at Ohio Northern Uni- versity and Professor Moos of Johns Hopkins, who in 1958 joined the White House staff as a speech- drafting aide to the President. For their treatment of State and local governments one must consult the fuller edition of 1952 (p. [787]-i059), but the larger portion concerned with the national govern- ment has received a further revision, the preface of which is dated September 1957. The new book is 20 pages longer than the corresponding portion of the 1952 edition; the introductory chapter is re- titled "Social Forces in American Politics," instead of "The Dynamics of American Government," and partially rewritten; and three chapters contributed by economic specialists have been replaced by four written by the authors (although one of these, "Agri- culture and Conservation," proves to be in fact Dr. Walter W. Wilcox's original contribution with very minor revisions). The organization remains the same: besides two sections on the executive branch and one each on the legislative and judicial, four others deal with the constitutional foundations, citi- zenship, "Institutions of Popular Control," and "Major Federal Functions." 6134. Burns, James MacGregor, and Jack Walter Peltason. Government by the people; the dynamics of American national, state, and local gov- ernment. 3d ed. Englewood Cliffs, N. J., Pren- tice-Hall, 1957. 990 p. illus. 57-8221 JK274.B855 1957a Bibliography: p. 919-956. A large-scale textbook by Professor Burns of Wil- liams College and Professor Peltason of the Uni- versity of Illinois, first issued in 1952. Like its predecessors, the third edition is available in the full form entered above, or in a shorter one dealing with the national government only, or in a paperbound reprint of seven chapters entitled The Dynamics of Ameiican State and Local Government; and there is a teaching manual for the edition prepared by Walter S. Wilmot, Jr. The authors state that they have tried to make their book effective for training in critical thinking, citizenship, and liberal educa- tion by organizing it around five basic problems: keeping popular government stable and yet progres- 972 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES sive; achieving a balance between liberty and order; achieving the best representation of the people in a democratic manner; securing the optimum degree of popular control of our leaders; and answering the challenge of Communists and other antidemocrats. The book differs from older textbooks on the subject in that it precedes its descriptions of the actual insti- tutions and operations of government with lengthy treatments of the essentials of democratic govern- ment; the Constitution, particularly as creating a system of federalism; civil liberties and their safe- guards; and especially part 4, "The People in Poli- tics." Here the subdivisions are "The Dynamic Role of Interest Groups," "Public Opinion: the Voices of the People," "Political Behavior," "Party Politics and Party Problems," and "Appeal to the Voters." Another element unlikely to be found in early textbooks is chapter 19, "The Bureaucrats," which takes the line that "government officials are people"; if they do not reach ideal standards of per- formance, this is in large part because of specific hindrances which the people have it in their power to eliminate. 6135. Chatters, Carl H., and Margorie Leonard Hoover. An inventory of governmental ac- tivities in the United States. Chicago, Municipal Finance Officers Association of the United States and Canada, 1947. 15 p. 47-4357 JK421.C3 A pamphlet which lists the major services or ac- tivities performed by governments in the United States, and indicates what levels of government — Federal, State, county, or city — administer them. About 400 specific activities of government are tabulated here under 15 major headings such as "Protection to Persons and Property," "Develop- ment and Conservation of Natural Resources," "Health," and "Public Assistance and Social Serv- ices." The level or levels of each activity are indi- cated. Federal activities include the traditionally central operations which the Federal government administers directly — national defense, regulation of money, the post office — regulatory functions; and research, promotional, and supervisory activities that make special use of the grant-in-aid device. While any governmental activity not constitutionally granted to the Federal government is reserved to the States, in practice the States have delegated respon- sibility for the direct administration of most activi- ties, other than regulatory services, to their local units, the county governments. Municipal govern- ment functions are as varied as is necessary to meet local needs, and special districts deal with exclusively local problems. 6136. Fabricant, Solomon. The trend of govern- ment activity in the United States since 1900. New York, National Bureau of Economic Research, 1952. xix, 267 p. illus. (National Bureau of Economic Research. Publications, no. 56) 52-7402 JK421.F18 The tide is not self-explanatory: Dr. Fabricant means government activity direcdy affecting the economy and capable of statistical measurement. His chief aim is to contrast the economy of 1950 with that of 1900, when "on the whole people still thought in terms of 'the less government, the better,' " and to determine the character and the pace of the increases in government activity which are so apparent. But even in 1900 government was not a negligible fac- tor: it held about 7 percent of the nation's capital assets and employed about 4 percent of the labor force. By 1950 these percentages had become re- spectively 20 and 12.4, and of the consolidated net sales of business 5 percent was made to government. After presenting detailed tables and graphs for the increasing "absorption" of these resources by gov- ernment, Dr. Fabricant considers the relative shares of the Federal government and of state and local governments in these developments. While the in- crease in the Federal share is great, the lesser units still bulk large: if in 1900 they employed 73.2 per- cent of all government workers, in 1949 they still employed 49.1 percent of the total. There follow chapters on the "Functional Classification of Govern- ment Activity" and "Productivity in Government and the Output of Government Services." "Inter- state Differences in Government Activity," even on a per capita basis, are surprisingly wide. The appen- dixes contain detailed tables of government employ- ment, capital goods, and expenditures. 6137. Ogg, Frederic A. Ogg and Ray's Introduc- tion to American government, by William H. Young. nth ed. New York, Appleton- Century-Crofts, 1956. 953 p. illus. (The Century political science series) 56-5483 JK421.O5 1956 A standard textbook on American government since 1922, now revised and somewhat changed in emphasis by Professor Young of the University of Wisconsin, who has largely rewritten the chapters dealing with the democratic process in part 1, and those concerned with the units and functions of the Federal government in part 2. He has replaced the historical introduction by a chapter on the American people and society. Taking advantage of recent studies of political behavior and group politics, he has put a stress upon the democratic method and upon the American people, for whom and by whom our governmental system is operated, at least equal to, if not greater than, that put upon the Constitu- tion by the original authors in previous editions. He has made far fewer emendations in part 3, which discusses the structure, powers, functions, financing, CONSTITUTION AND GOVERNMENT / 973 and problems of the state governments. Part 4, devoted to local government — county, city, town, township, village, and district — has also been left virtually unaltered. In 1932 Messrs. Ogg and Ray launched a briefer text, Essentials of American Gov- ernment, which reached a 7th edition in 1952 (New York, Appleton-Century-Crofts. 774 p.). 6138. Schmeckebier, Laurence. Government pub- lications and their use. 2d rev. ed. Wash- ington, Brookings Institution, 1939. xv, 479 p. (Brookings Institution, Washington, D. C. In- stitute for Government Research. Studies in ad- ministration, no. 33) 39-22433 Z1223.Z7S3 1939 First published in 1936. "Catalogs and indexes": p. 5-61; "Bibliogra- phies": p. 62-75. A descriptive guide to the indexes, bibliographies, catalogs, and other important sources of information concerning government publications, chiefly Fed- eral, but with some attention to those of the States. The purpose is "to indicate the limitations and uses of the indexes, to explain the systems of numbering and methods of tiding, to call attention to some out- standing compilations or series of publications in several fields, and to indicate how the publications may be obtained." Although it specifically cites many publications by tide, this volume is not a catalog, bibliography, or checklist. Chapters 1-4 and 16 contain general information applicable to nearly all classes of publications. The other n de- scribe publications dealing with laws and legisla- tive proceedings, court decisions, administrative regulations, Presidential papers, foreign affairs, re- ports on operations, organization and personnel, and maps. An introduction to the study of government publications for library school students, Anne Morris Boyd's United States Government Publications, 3d ed. rev. by Rea Elizabeth Rips (New York, Wilson, 1949 [i.e. 1952] xx, 627 p.), provides a checklist. arranged principally by the organization of the gov- ernment — the Federal courts, the Executive Office of the President, the departments, independent establishments, and emergency agencies. 6139. Zink, Harold. Government and politics in the United States. 3d ed. New York, Mac- millan, 1951. 1008 p. 51-3675 JK274.Z44 1951 First published in 1942. "Selected bibliography" at end of each chapter. The initial chapter of this large college text out- lines the different kinds of government, including the democratic forms. A separate section, "Founda- tions of the Commonwealth," includes such chapters as "Pressure Groups and Pressure Politics," "The Role of Public Opinion," and "The Obligations and Responsibilities of Citizenship." Succeeding chap- ters examine in detail the operations, agencies, in- stitutions, powers and duties, financing, and policy of the Federal government, as well as its relations with business, agriculture, and labor. The book pro- vides briefer surveys of the functions, administra- tion, and services of State, territorial, and local gov- ernments. The author discusses the operational methods of the various branches and divisions of the several governments, as well as projects of re- form and reorganization. There are noteworthy chapters on "Public Personnel Administration," "Social Security and Public Housing," and "Public Planning and Conservation." Throughout, he gives careful attention to the American type of democracy, to its special characteristics, to its accom- plishments, and to its shortcomings. Professor Zink's large text has had no recent revision, but there is a 1958 edition of his briefer course: Amer- ican Government and Politics: National, State, and Local, by Harold Zink, Howard R. Penniman, and Guy B. Hathorn (Princeton, N. J., Van Nostrand. 446 p.). F. The Presidency 6140. Binkley, Wilfred E. President and Con- gress. New York, Knopf, 1947. 312 p. 47-1135 JK516.B5 1947 First published in 1937 as The Powers of the President, by Doubleday, Doran & Co. "This edi- tion completely rewritten, expanded, and reset." Bibliography: p. 301-312. A study of the historical relationship between the American Presidency and Congress and of efforts made to find a workable adjustment within it. In Professor Binkley's opinion, the problem of inte- grating the executive and legislative branches of the government has not yet been permanendy solved. The Presidency, as originally established by the Federalists under the Constitution, was assigned a position of leadership and the executive departments were to constitute a ministry, but the agrarians, headed by Jefferson, launched a drive against the executive, particularly Hamilton in the Treasury Department. The author believes that John Adams contributed to the decline of the executive, and that under Madison government leadership passed 974 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES definitely to Congress. Nevertheless the election of Andrew Jackson in 1828 marked the emergence of the concept of the President as "the tribune of the people." Ever since, Professor Binkley believes, powerful interests have always been uneasy when a popular, aggressive leader has even threatened to reach the Presidency. The author views the func- tion of the President as the discovery and promotion of the public welfare. Less sanguine about Con- gress, he sees it as most successful when it brings about an equilibrium among conflicting interests. 6141. Brownlow, Louis. The President and the Presidency. Chicago, Public Administration Service, 1949. 137 p. (Chicago. University. Charles R. Walgreen Foundation [for the Study of American Institutions] Lectures) 49-6223 JK516.B74 An informal analysis of the Presidency based upon six lectures delivered at the University of Chicago in 1947. Regarding the Presidency as a unique and peculiarly American institution created both by law and by custom, Mr. Brownlow examines the attri- butes of the office and shows how the men who fill it are chosen, how they are equipped for the task, what is expected of them, and what help they need in meeting the expectations. The institutional aspects of the Presidency are considered principally as they have been since 1900 when, in the author's opinion, the Presidency emerged in its modern phase with the succession of Theodore Roosevelt. Because Mr. Brownlow regards the man as insepara- ble from the institution, he takes the two together, showing how the Presidents have influenced the Presidency, changing it from dme to time by weight of their personalities, and how the Presidency has influenced the Presidents, sometimes reshaping them into different individuals. The author has relied upon his own observadons and reflecdons, including a personal knowledge of eight Presidents, rather than upon documentary research. 6142. Chamberlain, Lawrence H. The President, Congress and legislation. New York, Co- lumbia University Press, 1946. 478 p. (Columbia University. Faculty of Political Science. Studies in history, economics and public law, no. 523) A 46-4849 H31.C7, no. 523 JK585.C5 1946a Bibliography: p. 465-473. A survey of the relative contributions of the Presi- dent and Congress to legislation enacted during the years 1 882-1 940, which considers in detail the legis- lative histories of 90 selected statutes in 10 cate- gories: agriculture, banking and currency, business, government credit, immigration, labor, national de- fense, natural resources, railroads, and tariff. As- signing credit for these on a tabular basis, and noting areas in which the President or the Congress has been especially conspicuous, the book shows the joint character of the American legislative process. It does not reveal any tendency toward increasing Presidential domination of that process. Theodore Roosevelt was the first President of the United States, the author asserts, to pursue a policy of execu- tive dominance in legislation. Woodrow Wilson's particular contribution was a more deliberate and effective party leadership. Franklin D. Roosevelt, with his multidimensional leadership, did much to reduce Congress to a secondary function in legis- lation. As Dr. Chamberlain points out, all three were forceful men who came to office when the social and economic development of the nadon had rendered the need for progressive legislation acute. 6143. Corwin, Edward S. The President, office and powers, 1787-1948; history and analysis of practice and opinion. [3d ed., rev.] New York, New York University Press, 1948. xvii, 552 p. (New York University. Stokes Foundation. James Stokes lectureship on politics) 48-7474 JK516.C63 1948 A pardy historical, partly analytical and critical, study in American public law, originally published in 1940. The central inquiry concerns the develop- ment and contemporary status of Presidential power and of the Presidential office under the Constitution. Its political aspects are also considered, since in only a few instances have previous practice or agreed doctrine foreclosed all choice between alternative theories of the Constitution. Personal traits of indi- vidual Presidents are duly commented upon if they have materially affected the development of the office and its powers. In the author's view, the Con- stitution was sufficiently vague to initiate a struggle between two concepts of executive power: the theory that it should always be subordinate to the supreme legisladve power, and the theory that it should be, within generous limits, autonomous and self-direct- ing. Generally speaking, the history of the Presi- dency has been one of aggrandizement. Professor Corwin considers that Presidential power today not only is enormously increased by the delegation from Congress of sub-legislation called "administrative regulations," but also is "dangerously personalized." He suggests as a remedy a new type of Cabinet con- structed from a joint legislative council to be created by the two houses of Congress and to contain its leading members. 6144. Hobbs, Edward H. Behind the President; a study of Executive Office agencies. Wash- ington, Public Affairs Press, 1954. 248 p. 53-5789 JK518.H6 A history and critical analysis of the expanding group of staff agencies which, beginning with the creation of the Bureau of the Budget in 1921, have provided administrative management for the Presi- dency. When Congress gave him the authority in a Reorganization Act, President Franklin Roose- velt by executive order combined them into the Executive Office of the President in 1939, at which time they comprised the White House Office, the Bureau of the Budget, the National Resources Plan- ning Board, the Liaison Office for Personnel Man- agement, and the Office of Government Reports. Provision was then made for "such office for emer- gency management as the President shall determine in the event of a national emergency or the threat of one." A chapter each is devoted to the first three agencies mentioned above, and one each to the Council of Economic Advisers, the National Secu- rity Council, the National Security Resources Board, the emergency agencies, and staff machinery under President Eisenhower. The Executive Office was planned to keep the President systematically in- formed of matters of top-level importance, to assist him in preparing for future programs, to protect him from the nuisance of subordinate affairs that could dissipate his time and energies, to place prior- ity matters before him promptly, and to aid him in securing compliance from subordinates. Mr. Hobbs thinks that these objectives have been achieved "to a modest degree." 6145. Learned, Henry Barrett. The President's Cabinet; studies in the origin, formation and structure of an American institution. New Haven, Yale University Press, 1912. 471 p. 12-1466 JK611.L5 "List of authorities": p. 404-427. A pioneer historical analysis of the President's Cabinet which explains the formation of the advi- sory council as well as the establishment of the struc- tural offices which provide its members, but which is limited to the anatomy rather than the functions of the Cabinet. Professor Learned considered the President's council not so much a conscious deriva- tion from any body in existence when it was created as the expression of a need as old as government — the need of a corps of closely associated assistants qualified to aid a vigorous and effective chief magis- trate. Shortly after Congress enacted laws in 1789 for the establishment of the three secretaryships of State, War, and Treasury and of the Office of Attor- ney General, Washington brought these four officers together as an advisory council, which by 1793 was popularly termed the Cabinet. By 19 12 five other department heads had been added to the President's council: Secretary of the Navy, 1798; Postmaster General, 1829 (an instance of an office of long stand- CONSTITUTION AND GOVERNMENT / 975 ing being raised to Cabinet rank); Secretary of the Interior, 1849; Secretary of Agriculture, 1889; and Secretary of Commerce and Labor, 1903. As the author emphasizes, the law created the principal officers or members of the Cabinet, but the Cabinet itself was the creation of President Washington. His practice became custom, and the Cabinet has remained a customary and not a statutory body. 6146. Milton, George Fort. The use of presiden- tial power, 1789-1943. Boston, Little, Brown, 1944. 349 p. 44-3756 JK516.M5 "Bibliographical note": p. 323-327. An historical examination of the office and pow- ers of the American President from George Wash- ington to Franklin D. Roosevelt. Mr. Milton sees a continuing, if not orderly, increase in the power of the Presidency that is in line with the general readjustment of executive and legislative importance in the modern world of accelerated change. In his opinion, the Constitution, crisis, and custom have combined to vest great power in the President: as chief of state, he embodies the peo- ple's elective will; as chief of foreign relations, he has, from the beginning, functioned as sole organ of this country in its external relations; as Com- mander-in-Chief of the Army and Navy, he has enormous power in time of war, rebellion, or other high crisis; and, as chief of government, he bears direct responsibility for the huge executive branch of the government. Inseparable from the person of the President, also, are his position as chief of his party, as leader of public opinion, and as spokesman for the nation. The author focuses attention upon those whom he considers the strongest Presidents — Washington, Jefferson, Jackson, Lincoln, Cleve- land, Theodore Roosevelt, Wilson, and Franklin D. Roosevelt — in order to discover how they used their power, the emergencies they confronted, their discoveries of authority for action, and the conse- quences for the Presidential office. 6147. Patterson, Caleb Perry. Presidential gov- ernment in the United States; the unwritten constitution. Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina Press, 1947. 301 p. 47-30530 JK516.P3 Bibliography: p. [28i]-296. Professor Patterson contends that the United States has substituted a political for a constitutional democracy, that Congress and the Supreme Court are becoming the agents of the President, and that we have gone entirely too far toward an executive type of government, which is subject to almost no legal checks, and is responsible only to the ballot box. The chief check on the national government therefore becomes the two-party system. With this in mind, the author proposes a readjustment in the 976 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES relation between the President and Congress. The President, he believes, should be made to act through ministers chosen from and responsible to Congress. Forming a Cabinet, these ministers would super- vise operations of the Federal agencies and repre- sent them in debate upon the floors of Congress. The prime minister would be selected by a caucus of the majority party in Congress. He, in turn, would select the other ministers with the approval of the caucus. The author suggests 24 ways in which his proposal would aid in adapting our con- stitutional system to a more practical and respon- sible scheme of control. The adoption of some mod- ification of the British system of a responsible Cabi- net has frequently been urged, but has never received any significant degree of public support. 6148. Smith, A. Merriman. A President is many men. New York, Harper, 1948. 269 p. 48-6989 JK516.S65 An informal and anecdotal report on the intricate operations of the 20th-century Presidency by a White House correspondent. Mr. Smith says that "the Presidency, despite the high honors that go with it, has become a four-year sentence to hard labor." A modern President, the author believes, is as powerful as his ability to influence public opinion; his power has grown in direct ratio to the develop- ment of mass media of communication. He needs the qualities of an excellent actor, a capable financier, an able administrator, and a good student of mili- tary science, geography, farming, and internadonal affairs. Under constant siege from those who want something, the President is advised by his 10- member Cabinet and his inner circle of intimates; he has on his staff a team of idea-men and speech- writers, a large secretariat, and a group of public relations experts. Mr. Smith describes the organiza- tion of this staff as well as that of the White House domestic entourage, and such matters as entertain- ment, ceremonial visits, Presidential travel, and the persons with whom the President regularly has to deal, among them politicians, reporters and photog- raphers, and the writing and present-making public. 6149. Stanwood, Edward. A history of the Presi- dency. New ed., rev. by Charles Knowles Bolton. Boston, Houghton Mifflin [ 193-? ] 2 v. 37-31629 JK511.S7 1930 Contents. — [v. 1] From 1788 to 1897. — [v. 2] From 1897 to 19 16, with additions and revisions to 1928. Stanwood (1841-1923) was a staunch Maine Republican who served briefly as secretary to James G. Blaine (no. 3442) and became editor of the Boston Advertiser and of the Youth's Companion. In 1884 he published his History of Presidential Elections, which went through four editions by 1896, and received its present and less appropriate title in 1898. A second volume was added in 1912, and the author's last revision of it was made before the election of 1916. In the final printing C. K. Bolton of the Boston Athenaeum, who was Stanwood's son- in-law, corrected some errors and added appendixes of platforms and tables for the elections from 19 16 through 1928, but did not expand the narrative. Stanwood devoted a chapter to each presidential elec- tion from 1788 to 19 1 2, treating concisely and con- cretely the state of the electoral machinery, the political parties in the field, the major issues, the platforms adopted (usually in full), the selection and qualifications of the candidates, and significant incidents of the campaign. Tables are given for votes in the party conventions, when repeated ballot- ing was necessary to reach a result, and for the popu- lar and electoral votes of all significant candidates. A final chapter discussed "The Evolution of the Presidency" from the viewpoint of 1916. Eugene H. Roseboom's A History of Presidential Elections (New York, Macmillan, 1957. 568 p.) is a livelier narrative covering the elections through 1956, and more up-to-date in its historical points of view, but by no means rivals Stanwood as a convenient source of essential information. G. Congress 6150. Alexander, De Alva Stanwood. History and procedure of the House of Representa- tives. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1916. xv, 435 p. 16-11176 JK1316.A3 A documented history of the organization and procedures of the United States House of Repre- sentatives from 1789 to 191 1, when Representative Alexander of Buffalo concluded seven successive terms. It shows how such Speakers as Henry Clay, Samuel J. Randall, Thomas B. Reed, and Joseph G. Cannon set precedents and shared in establishing customs. Mr. Alexander considered deciding ques- tions of order the most difficult of the Speaker's functions, and exercising his right of recognition the most embarrassing, although the latter had be- come materially restricted by the use of privileged motions, measures, and reports, and privileged busi- ness on fixed days of the week. In fact, by the close of the 6 1 st Congress in 191 1, the Speaker was vir- tually shorn of power save for the appointment of committees, and the right of recognition for motions to suspend the rules. The author disapproved of the change made at the first session of the 6ad Con- gress, by which all standing committees were elected instead of appointed by the Speaker, because, to him, that officer embodied public and concentrated responsibility, and because no one else held so great an interest in the success of his party and its admin- istrations. Among other subjects treated at less length are: the remaining officers of the House and their duties and privileges; methods of voting; rules; the order of business; and committees. It is regret- table that no subsequent Member of the House has continued Alexander's very useful work. 615 1. Bates, Ernest Sutherland. The story of Congress, 1789-1935. New York, Harper, 1936. xvii, 468 p. 36-9206 JK1021.B3 "A modest record of the doings of Congress for the information of the general reader," organized in nine chapters: "The Federalist Foundation," 1789— 1801; "Jeffersonian Democracy," 1801-29; "J ac k- sonian Democracy," 1829-45; "Compromise with Slavocracy," 1845-61; "Overthrow of Slavocracy," 1861-77; "Industrial Capitalism," 1877-1901; "Era of Reforms," 1901-21; "Finance Capitalism," 1921- 33; and "The New Deal," 1933-35. These are sub- divided by Presidential administrations, and further subdivided by Congresses, 74 in all. Mr. Bates supplies a lively and useful panorama, from which can conveniently be learned the major issues, figures, and incidents of any Congress; but he takes sides rather emphatically and rigidly. In his opinion, the fundamental issue which has confronted Ameri- can democracy from the beginning is whether the United States "in the last analysis should be ruled by the judiciary or the legislature, by the immediate representatives of the plutocracy or by the distant representatives of the people." However inade- quately, he believes, Congress and the President have more nearly represented the masses of the people than has the Supreme Court, which has tended to give priority to the rights of property. 6152. Burns, James MacGregor. Congress on trial; the legislative process and the adminis- trative state. New York, Harper, 1949. xiv, 224 p. 49-4901 JK1061.B8 An inquiry into the low prestige which, the author thinks, Congress enjoys with the general public, the basic reason for which he finds in the national legis- lature's excessive localism and consequent failure to promote the general welfare. The average Con- gressman, Professor Burns argues, adequately represents any interests of his district that are united 431240—60 63 CONSTITUTION AND GOVERNMENT / 977 and vocal, but when local opinion on national issues is divided he is likely to straddle. Some Congress- men, he writes, are so completely absorbed by organized local interests that they are themselves pressure politicians, "lobbyists in disguise." Defects in congressional organization, he believes, allow unfair districting, unrepresentative committees, the monopoly of policy-making chairmanships by per- sons qualified only by length of tenure, and obstruc- tion through filibusters, all of which lessen or destroy the effectiveness of Congress, and weaken it as an instrument of majority rule. The national legisla- ture in his opinion thus tends to dissolve into an aggregate of blocs and of individuals unwilling or unable to withstand their pressures; and, lacking machinery for control or discipline in the legislature, the majority party cannot hold its members to the program which it has pledged to the voters. Profes- sor Burns particularly dreads the paralysis which selfish obstructionism could produce in some future economic crisis. He offers six concrete suggestions intended to bring about "the wholesale reconstruc- tion of our obsolete and ramshackle party system," one corollary of which is that the disloyal, those who use the party to gain election and then ignore its program, must be "purged" — read out of the party. 6153. Chamberlain, Joseph P. Legislative proc- esses, national and state. New York, Apple- ton-Century, 1936. 369. ([The Century political science series]) 36-10198 JK1061.C45 Bibliography : p. 3557357 ;> A textbook "organized," in the words of the preface, "for the use of a class in legislation, in which an endeavor was made to give the students a work- ing notion of the way in which laws are placed on the statute books in the United States Congress and the state legislatures, rather than a mere description of the functioning parts of the legislatures. It is based on experience in preparing and handling bills, and even more on the aid of men who have them- selves been members of Congress or state legisla- tures, or who have served those bodies." Legisla- tures, the author remarks, "are law-declaring rather than lawmaking bodies." Changing social condi- tions require gradual modification of the rules gov- erning society, and such modification is today being sought through legislation more often than through the slower and sometimes clumsier method of court action. As administration expands, the scope of legislative activity broadens, since only through legis- lation can new government organizations be estab- lished or existing ones be adjusted to greater loads. The need for changes in existing machinery is fre- quently first noticed by the executive officers in charge of operations. Through them come requests for improvements which only the legislature cm 978 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES make. The author considers in detail the organiza- tion which has evolved in Congress and the legisla- tures for the accurate drafting of bills and the enact- ment of them into law. 6154. Dimock, Marshall Edward. Congressional investigating committees. Baltimore, Johns Hopkins Press, 1929. 182 p. (Johns Hopkins Uni- versity. Studies in historical and political science, ser. 47, no. 1) 29-906 JK1123.A2D5 1929 H31.J6, ser47, no. 1 Bibliography: p. 177-178. A study of all congressional investigations con- ducted in this country between 1789 and 1929. Comparing the functions of the investigative com- mittee in the United States to those of like agencies in other modern constitutional governments, the author traces the English origin of the congressional committee of inquiry, and points out that the power of investigation, as a procedure both of Parliament and of Congress, is an implied one, based upon custom rather than constitution or statutes. This prerogative consists of three functions: investiga- tions of the qualifications and conduct of the legis- lative membership; investigations in pursuance of the lawmaking functions, such as provide for future or emergency legislation or establish administrative commissions; and investigations of the executive departments for determining their needs, for super- vision, for discipline, or for control of public funds. Of the total number of investigations, about 190 were authorized by the House, and 125 by the Senate, while 15 were the work of joint committees. By far the largest number of investigations occurred during the Presidencies of Grant and Harding. Dr. Dimock saw the Senate emerging as the prime in- quisitor, "the vitriolic critic and persistent regulator of the government." Although he recognized the dangers to personal rights and immunities that could arise from the system, the author considered investigations valuable. 6155. Galloway, George B. The legislative process in Congress. New York, Crowell, 1953. 689 p. 53-11621 JK1061.G32 "In a sense ... a successor to, rather than a re- vision of," the author's Congress at the Crossroads (1946). A documented and well-organized descriptive an- alysis of the organization and operation of Congress. It points out that, although the power and prestige of the executive branch of the Government increased enormously during the first half of the 20th cen- tury, Congress not only changed little, continuing to function with old machinery and methods, old facilities and services, but actually declined as an original source of legislation in comparison with the administration. Moreover, since 1887, Congress has delegated to more and more commissions the power to issue rules and regulations under the gen- eral principles of established law. However, with the great growth of administrative activity, super- vision and control of administration through appro- priation, investigation, amendment of existing laws, the requirement of reports, the approval or removal of personnel, and the review of foreign relations have become some of the most important congres- sional functions. Dr. Galloway objects to the "cen- trifugal forces" of the committee system, which have become dominant in congressional policy-making, and suggests a number of reforms needed in con- gressional machinery, procedures, and political out- look. 6156. Harlow, Ralph Volney. The history of legislative methods in the period before 1825. New Haven, Yale University Press, 1917. 269 p. (Yale historical publications. Miscellany, 5) 17-30135 JK1029.H3 Based upon the author's doctoral dissertation, this is a history of the growth of committee systems in the lawmaking bodies of the colonies and states from 1750 to 1790, and in the House of Representatives from July 24, 1789, when a Committee of Ways and Means was appointed, to 1825, when the caucus, the standing committee system, and the speakership had become firmly established in the House. As early as 1797, Dr. Harlow notes, party affiliation was be- coming an important factor in the selection of com- mittees, and by 1813 standing committees were admittedly made up in the interest of the dominant party. The development of the powerful speaker- ship and of the committee system from 181 1 to 1825 accompanied the casting off of the executive domi- nance which had marked Jefferson's administra- tions, although neither institution made the House independent of an active executive. As the author indicates, President, Cabinet, congressional leaders of the party organization, or the Speaker might and did have the whiphand at various times. The bal- ance of power was generally in the House, but mem- bers of the Cabinet were influential in legislative affairs, and the organization of the House did and does permit the application of powerful pressure by the executive. To Dr. Harlow, such application is all to the good: "The wheels of the government have never run more smoothly than when the president has been in a position to drive Congress." 6157. Harris, Joseph P. The advice and consent of the Senate; a study of the confirmation of appointments by the United States Senate. Berke- ley, University of California Press, 1953. 457 p. 53-11239 JK1274.H3 CONSTITUTION AND GOVERNMENT / 979 A history of the Senate's confirmation or rejec- tion of Presidentially appointed officers of the United States, from 1787 to the present, together with an analysis of the operation and the effects of the prac- tice. Because constitutional issues have been raised in controversies over the respective functions of the President and the Senate in appointments, special attention is given to the debates about the appoint- ing power in the Constitutional Convention of 1787. The problem of which officers should be appointed by the President and confirmed by the Senate, and which should be otherwise appointed, is central to the discussion. In Professor Harris' opinion, the requirement of senatorial confirmation of appoint- ments has worked fairly well for certain classes of officers, and has provided, as the framers of the Constitution intended, a safeguard against unfit appointees; for others it has worked badly, resulting in empty formalities of little significance, or perpetu- ating partisan and patronage appointments in posi- tions which properly belong in the career civil service. The extension of the requirement of sena- torial confirmation from Justices of the Supreme Court and diplomatic representatives to thousands of minor positions is contrary, the author believes, to the spirit if not to the provisions of the Constitu- tion. He would restrict the President's appoint- ments to the top political and policy-making positions. 6158. Haynes, George H. The Senate of the United States, its history and practice. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1938. 2 v. (11 18 p.) illus. ' 38-38772 JK1161.H28 "References" at end of most of the chapters. A large-scale history of the United States Senate and of the development of its practices, legislative, executive, judicial, and investigative, based on original sources throughout. Chapter 1 describes the planning of the Senate in the Federal Conven- tion of 1787 as the upper branch of a bicameral legislature, based upon equal representation of the states. Chapter 2 deals with the important work of the First Congress in setting precedents in such matters as titles for government officials, confirma- tion of Presidential appointees, ratification of treaties, cooperation between the two branches of Congress, initiation of important measures, and amendment of many bills which it could not, under the Con- stitution, originate. Subsequent chapters deal with such topics as the election of Senators, Senate of- ficers and organization, rules and procedure, debate, Senate influence in financial legislation, investiga- tions, treaty-making and foreign relations, "advice and consent," and the relationship between the Senate and the President as well as between the Senate and the House. As Professor Haynes ob- serves, almost every phase in the Constitution which pertains to the Senate reflects compromise. "The re- sult was a legislative body unique in its basis of representation, in its relation to the Executive and to the other branch of Congress, in its procedure, and in its weighty non-legislative powers." The Senate was designed to serve as somewhat of an executive coun- cil to the President, as a check on the House, as guardian of the small States, as protector of all against encroachment by the new centralized power, and as the people's defender against "the turbulency of democracy." Its original basis has been changed, but it still retains its old prestige, and a special con- stitutional value which resides in its independence of judgment. 6159. Kammerer, Gladys M. The staffing of the committees of Congress. [Lexington] Bu- reau of Government Research, University of Ken- tucky, 1949. 45 p. 49-47303 JK1067.K3 Based on interviews, this is a very brief survey of the qualifications and methods of selection of the staff members, professional and clerical, appointed by the committees of both houses of Congress under the Legislative Reorganization Act of 1946. Exam- ination is made of the staffing of the 15 standing committees permitted the Senate and the 19 per- mitted the House of Representatives. "Fifteen committees are parallel in each house," observes the author, "and furnish pointed contrasts as well as similarities. Four committees are found only on the House side; those on House Administration, Mer- chant Marine and Fisheries, Un-American Activities, and Veterans' Affairs." The 15 parallel committees have to do with agriculture, appropriations, the armed services, banking and currency, the District of Columbia, expenditures in executive departments, foreign affairs, interstate and foreign commerce, judiciary, labor, the post office and civil service, pub- lic lands, public works, rules, and taxation. The author finds a marked superiority in the quality of the Senate committee staffs. She considers the makeup of a few of the special committees and con- cludes that there is need for improvement in the recruitment and selection process, and that less emphasis should be placed on the employment of lawyers. 6160. McGeary, Martin Nelson. The develop- ments of congressional investigative power. New York, Columbia University Press, 1940. 172 p. (Columbia University. Faculty of Political Science. Studies in history, economics and public law, no. 465) 40-5782 JK1123.A2M3 1940a H31.C7, no. 465 Bibliography: p. 161-165. An analysis of the congressional investigation, 980 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES particularly as it operated between 1929 and 1940. The author credits investigations with illuminating many dark problems and even carefully hidden skeletons, but declares that they have also obfuscated issues and nullified worthwhile accomplishments. Furthermore, they have varied widely in purpose and procedure as well as results. The Senate has functioned as the more important investigator, both as to quantity and significance, especially since 1933, when the emphasis shifted from checking the administration to collaborating with it. As Dr. McGeary observes, in both the Senate and the House more investigations are killed than are accepted, but the importance of even the threat of investigation should not be overlooked. He classifies congres- sional investigations as those which assist Congress in drafting laws, determining the desirability of legislation, or molding public opinion, and those which assist Congress in its supervision of adminis- trative officers. These last comprise about a third of recent inquiries. Investigations of congressional membership form only a fraction of the total. 6161. Pepper, George Wharton. In the Senate. Philadelphia, University of Pennsylvania Press, 1930. 148 p. 30-28947 JK1161.P6 An anecdotal and sprightly, yet in the main de- tached, account by Mr. Pepper (b. 1867) of his com- pletion of the deceased Boies Penrose's term as United States Senator from Pennsylvania during the years 1922-27. At the time of his appointment Mr. Pepper was without political experience and ap- peared to the Republican stalwarts, particularly to the Philadelphia machine controlled by William S. Vare, as "an outsider, a novice, an untrained bene- ficiary" of a reward he had not earned. The ma- chine defeated him in the following election. Offer- ing pungent characterizations of the more notable of his colleagues, he argues that although Senators differ in ability, they possess, on the whole, a high average. In Mr. Pepper's opinion, the most effective Senators are those who at once understand their subjects and refrain from wounding the sensibilities of their colleagues. He describes procedures and rules of the Senate, the committee system, the seniority principle, pressures, conferences, the fili- buster, and special services and information required by constituents. He sees the Senate's function as essentially regulatory, a check upon the Executive and upon legislative action initiated by the House. 6162. Riddick, Floyd M. The United States Con- gress; organization and procedure. Manas- sas, Va., National Capitol Publishers, 1949. 459 p. 49-1982 JK1096.R54 First published in 194 1. A useful but technical and minutely detailed handbook on House and Senate legislative machin- ery and political and parliamentary procedures. The author, who is assistant parliamentarian of the Senate and editor of the "Daily Digest" of the Con- gressional Record, points out the great difference in the methods of the houses for transacting busi- ness. Of the two, the Senate, with only 96 mem- bers, has a less rigidly fixed set of rules, and much looser, less specifically defined, and less regulatory parliamentary law. The House, on the other hand, with 435 members, proceeds under rigidly limited debate, with individual consideration giving way to the will of the whole membership in any test case, so as to permit of dispatch in its business. The two chambers also call up business in differing ways, the Senate's system being far the simpler. Dr. Rid- dick underscores the ability of the standing commit- tees and their chairmen to shape legislation in both chambers, as well as their influence in the enact- ment or the blocking of a given law. 6163. Schmeckebier, Laurence F. Congressional apportionment. Washington, Brookings In- stitution, 1941. 233 p. ([Brookings Institution, Washington, D. C. Institute for Government Re- search. Studies in administration, no. 40]) 41-3146 JK1331.S35 A detailed description of the "five modern work- able methods" of apportionment to each state of Congressmen in the House of Representatives and votes in the electoral college, which, according to the Constitution, should follow each decennial cen- sus. These methods, all mathematically consistent, are: the method of major fractions, the method of equal proportions, the method of harmonic mean, the method of smallest divisors, and the method of greatest divisors. The apportionment ratio is ob- tained by dividing the population of the entire coun- try by the number of representatives, which, since 1910, has been 435. Difficulty arises from the fact that seldom if ever does any apportionment ratio divide exacdy into the population of any State. Always there is a remainder which may vary from a small to a large fraction of the ratio. Controversy has arisen at every reapportionment since the adop- tion of the Constitution over selection of the States to receive additional members for their fractional population above the ratio. A major purpose of apportionment is to equalize the average population of congressional districts. The author demonstrates that the difference between average populations is always least if the method of equal proportions is used. This method provides the most equitable distribution among States regardless of size and is therefore to be preferred. CONSTITUTION AND GOVERNMENT / 98 1 6164. Taylor, Telford. Grand inquest: the story of congressional investigations. New York, Simon & Schuster, 1955. 358 p. 54-9803. JK.1123.A2T3 An expansion of various addresses and lectures concerning the powers of legislative investigative committees delivered during 1953. Mr. Taylor, a distinguished lawyer and former associate counsel to a Senate committee, was deeply concerned at the time of writing over "the internal crisis of confi- dence" in the United States, which he attributed direcdy to congressional investigations. He here sets forth and tellingly analyzes 162 years of such investigations, beginning with "The Ordeal of Major General Arthur St. Clair," first Governor of the Northwest Territory in 1792, and touching upon all important probes down to and including the "dull, dramatic, farcical, enlightening, and frighten- ing" McCarthy-Army hearings of 1954. The author finds that there has been a recent distortion of the historic mission of legislative inquiries to expose administrative corruption or inefficiency, and to discover the facts and circumstances with which the law-making process is concerned; he finds, too, the approach of a situation in which political sentiments are scrutinized by roving inquisitions which punish dissent by a kind of outiawry. He sees in this last a "native-American" challenge to "middle-class liberalism." Although he himself attempts to dispel "the illusion of investigative omnipotence" by citing constitutional limitations on the investigations of Congress and the doctrine of judicial review, he observes that it has not been extinguished. 6165. Voorhis, Horace Jeremiah. Confessions of a Congressman. By Jerry Voorhis. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1947. 365 p. 47""4 I2 j E743.V6 An informal memoir of the author's 10-year service (1937-47) as a Democratic Congressman from California, written shortly after his defeat for reelection. He offers frank and reflective comments upon such matters as his reasons for entering politics, campaigning, the relations between Congressmen and pressure groups, the seniority rule, the operation of the committee system, and the Congressman's job as it is and as it should be. Calling himself a "pro- gressive," Mr. Voorhis also discusses legislation and a number of important issues with which Congress was confronted during his terms of office, among them the Supreme Court packing plan, the Fair Labor Standards Act, the Flannagan school lunch program, the McMahon Atomic Energy Control Act, the Dies committee, and postwar planning. He approves of nearly all New Deal legislation and credits Franklin D. Roosevelt with two great con- tributions to American political thought: establish- ment of the principle that mass unemployment is a national problem for which the Federal government is responsible, and the broadening of the concept of America's world position to include world leader- ship. Enlightened, critical, and self-critical, this is a very unusual sort of book. 6166. Walker, Harvey. The legislative process; lawmaking in the United States. New York, Ronald Press, 1948. 482 p. (Series in political science) 48-10898 Law Bibliography: p. 459-467. An introductory text and handbook which "de- scribes the machinery set up in the United States for determining and declaring the will of the people. It attempts to evaluate objectively the defects in this machinery and the impediments which have been allowed to accumulate in the path of its smooth operation. And, finally, it suggests a direction for future progress." The nature of law is first briefly considered, since, in the author's opinion, any sys- tematic study of the legislative process must be con- cerned with law as an end-product as well as with the devices by which it is brought into being. Next treated are the making and development of consti- tutions at both the national and State levels. There follow a number of chapters devoted to statute law- making. The provinces, at all levels of govern- ment, of the "political inventor," the professional politician, the party member, the pressure-group member, and the legislator are thoroughly exam- ined. Also dealt with in detail here are legislative procedure, including the organization of the legisla- tive body; rules and order of business; the introduc- tion, reference, consideration, and enactment of bills; and such special matters as legislative research and drafting. The functions of the Executive and of the courts in relation to the legislative process receive due attention, and the work concludes with chapters on executive, judicial, and popular law- making. 6167. Willoughby, William F. Principles of leg- islative organization and administration. Washington, Brookings Institution, 1934. xiv, 657 p. ([Brookings Institution, Washington, D. C] Institute for Government Research. Principles of administration [7]) 34-41225 JK1061.W7 "Bibliographic note": p. 627-648. An analysis of the several factors involved in organizing the legislative branch of government and in providing for its practical operation, together with a statement of the alternative choices in the handling of each of these factors, and an indication of the ways in which they have actually been man- aged by modern governments, especially by the national and State governments of the United States. 9 82 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Parts i and 2 present a broad picture of the place of the legislative branch in the government of any modern state; its relations to the electorate, the executive, administration, and the judiciary; the nature of its functions; and its general structure. Part 3, constituting just over half of the volume, is devoted to a more intensive study of the technical problems faced by any legislative body in devising a workable system of internal organization and methods of procedure that will enable it most effi- ciendy to perform its duties. Professor Willoughby found legislative organization and procedure of supreme importance in determining the character of government, the question of legislative leadership, and the extent to which party government should be actually as well as nominally a dominant feature of our political system. Progress toward responsible party government must be sought, he believed, in the acceptance and strengthening of the caucus sys- tem. The State legislative situation he considered "unsatisfactory in the extreme." 6168. Wilmerding, Lucius. The spending power; a history of the efforts of Congress to con- trol expenditures. New Haven, Yale University Press, 1943. 317 p. A 44-126 HJ2013.U5W5 The main purpose of this book is to demonstrate that although Congress has the exclusive right of granting supplies of money to the Executive and of appropriating them to the several branches of the public service, it has not nor ever has had any prac- tical means of ascertaining after the event whether its financial authority has been either respected or infringed. The first chapter shows by a collection of instances that circumstances repeatedly occur which make it a duty in officers of high public trust to assume authority beyond the appropriation laws, and that when they do, the unwritten laws of neces- sity and of the public safety have been deemed, by liberals and conservatives alike, to supersede the written laws of appropriation. As the subsequent eight chapters indicate, the doctrine of specific appro- priations was early established in theory but not in practice. The efforts of Congress to compel obedience to the appropriation laws by itemizing appropriations and other devices have been largely "self-defeating." The last four chapters analyze efforts of Congress to maintain retrospective control over departmental appropriations through financial reports, congressional investigations, and the Gen- eral Accounting Office. These attempts, "while not self-defeating, have been ineffective." The author does not attempt to show how Congress can make its right to control the public expenditures real as well as nominal. 6169. Young, Roland. The American Congress. New York, Harper, 1958. 333 p. 58-5081 JK1061.Y59 Mr. Young sees Congress' primary function as "that of establishing a basic legal pattern of order for society. This in turn leads to the additional re- quirements for creating an autonomous legislative organization to make policy and for establishing continuing relations with the government bureauc- racy and with the society which is governed." Although the various functions of Congress may be performed with varying degrees of effectiveness, no one of them may be permitted to lapse completely for any length of time, the author believes, without destroying the legislative system and its complex interrelationships with other government institu- tions. He analyzes in some detail the electoral sys- tem of recruitment and the composition of Congress, as well as the operation of the legislative process, the powers inherent in it, and the influences to which it is subject, and concludes with a few generalizations on the proper sphere and activities of Congress as an instrument of government. H. Administration: General 6170. Caldwell, Lynton K. The administrative theories of Hamilton & Jefferson; their con- tribution to thought on public administration. Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1944. 244 p. ([Studies in public administration]) A 44-y47°3 JK171.A1C3 A study of the crucial period in American history "when the theory and practice of administradon in the new general government were in process of formation." Both the administrative and the politi- cal systems of the United States, Mr. Caldwell argues, were founded upon the divergent theories and practices of Hamilton and Jefferson. Each de- veloped a coherent, well-considered plan of adminis- tration based upon the type of society toward which he hoped America would grow. Hamilton tri- umphed for a brief period of splendid construction (1789-95) with the establishment of the Treasury Department, the Mint, and the first Bank of the United States, but Jefferson ruled in spirit over the following century. In the author's opinion, neither ideal has triumphed over the other, and their recon- ciliation remains an unsolved problem. The funda- mental difference in the administrative ideas of Hamilton and Jefferson appears to lie in their atti- tudes toward the control of political power. Hamil- ton stood for responsible and Jefferson for limited government; Hamilton admired the British system of centralized ministerial responsibility, while Jeffer- son preferred the accepted American notions of the separation of powers and local home rule. 6171. Graves, William Brooke. Public adminis- tration in a democratic society. Boston, Heath, 1950. xvi, 759 p. illus. 50-5971 JK421.G74 "Selected references" at end of chapters. A textbook, based upon the author's 25 years of study and experience in the field of state, local, and Federal administration. It proceeds from the basic concept of administration "as concerned with the transaction of all of the public business, whether legislative, executive, or judicial; whether interna- tional, national, state, or local." Regarding the in- dividual department or agency as the core of the administrative system, Dr. Graves gives special at- tention to the problems of coordinating organiza- tion, personnel, and fiscal operations in the actual processes of internal management. He has sharply differentiated such internal control — policy formu- lation, organization for production, production it- self, and administration — from external relations, or the execution of policy. The latter concerns the relations of the entire agency with persons and groups outside it, and, generally, with that portion of the public that is benefiting by its services or subject to its regulations. In establishing these regulations, the administrative agencies make exten- sive use of quasi-legislative and quasi-judicial pow- ers. Dr. Graves discerns two "indisputable" trends in modern government: "a definite shift from legis- lation to administration as the vital element in the process of governing," and a correspondingly more modest view of its own function taken by the Supreme Court. 6172. Hyneman, Charles S. Bureaucracy in a democracy. New York, Harper, 1950. xiv, 586 p. 50-6789 JK421.H8 "Bibliographic note" at end of chapters. "The primary concern of this book is to consider what can be done to make our federal bureaucracy function as the faithful servant of the American peo- ple." The descriptions of the structural organiza- tion of the administrative branch of the national government, its activities, and the way it goes about them are kept to a minimum and are incidental to CONSTITUTION AND GOVERNMENT / 983 an analysis of how the bureaucracy is or may be given direction and may be kept answerable to the people. Four basic assumptions underlie the argu- ment: that bureaucracy must be judged by its use of power, not by its size or cost; that all administra- tors should exercise their power within limits ac- ceptable to the American people as a whole; that the great power of modern bureaucracy can be turned toward ends unacceptable to the people, and may be so turned unless proper direction and control are provided for our administrative establishments; and finally, that elective officials must be the primary reliance for directing and controlling the bureauc- racy. There is democratic government, Professor Hyneman believes, only when vigorous competition for popular approval exists among men who desire to hold public office and to exercise the authority of government. These men must make public affairs their business, know their business, inform the public, and put programs into practical opera- tion. 6173. Short, Lloyd Milton. The development of national administrative organization in the United States. Baltimore, Johns Hopkins Press, 1923. xviii, 514 p. ([Brookings Institution, Washington, D. C.] Institute for Government Re- search. Studies in administration [no. 10]) 24-986 JK411.S5 Bibliography: p. 483-490. This University of Illinois dissertation remains the only comprehensive view of the development of ad- ministrative agencies and functions in the Federal government from its beginnings in 1775 through the second decade of the 20th century. After introduc- tory chapters on the function and the constitutional basis of administration, administrative beginnings under the Continental Congress, and the reorganiza- tion of government under the Constitution, Dr. Short deals with each department in turn. He records within each the emergence of important officials; the creation of boards, bureaus, offices, corps, or other subordinate organizations or institu- tions; the addition or loss of functions by statute or administrative order; and all important measures of reorganization. He breaks off in i860 and supplies an "Outline of Administrative Organization" for that year; it fills just 2 pages, and may be compared with the 8-page outline of the situation at the date of publication. For the earlier period a single chapter is sufficient to deal with "The Post Office, the Attor- ney General's Office, and the Detached Services." With i860 Dr. Short starts over and goes through the departments again, bringing them down to 1 "The Departments of Commerce and Labor" could still share a chapter, but the "Permanent Detached Agencies" and the "Administrative War Agencies" 984 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES of 19 1 7 required separate ones. The volume is in- evitably formal, external, and tolerable only in small dosages; but it remains an enormously useful digest of essential information. 6174. Van Riper, Paul P. History of the United States civil service. Evanston, 111., Row, Peterson, 1958. 588 p. 58-5927 JK681.V3 Bibliographical notes at end of chapters. "Presidents and Congresses may decree, but clerks carry out." This detailed history of the civil service of the executive branch of the Federal government reflects the author's sense of "power in a massive and continuous sense" arising out of "the cumula- tive impact of a vast quantity of earthy, day-by-day decisions and actions." The book was completed on the 75th anniversary of the Pendleton Act of 1883, which established the Civil Service Commis- sion and began the process of introducing the merit system, implemented by competitive examination, relative security of tenure, and political neutrality, into the federal service. The earlier periods, of "gentlemanly" tenure and of a triumphant spoils system, are treated with relative brevity (p. 11-95). Convinced of the increasing importance of public administration in modern society, Dr. Van Riper devotes as much space to the 25 years since 1933 as to the 50 preceding it. He pays particular attention to the effects of the party overturns of 1932 and 1952, the crisis of World War II, and the sudden death of President Roosevelt upon the civil service in general and the merit system in particular. He does not neglect technicalities such as recruitment, position- classification, and pay schedules, but he achieves much of his aim of relating civil service history to its political, economic, and religious background, and makes plausible his conclusion that ours "has been a civil service more completely democratic than any yet devised," "based upon the idea of a classless society." Seventeen years earlier the U. S. Civil Service Commission had issued a History of the Federal Civil Service, iy8g to the Present (Wash- ington, U. S. Govt. Print. Off., 1941. 162 p.) which is considerably briefer and more formal, but also emphasizes the fortunes of the merit system as the essence of the story. 6175. White, Leonard D. The Federalists. New York, Macmillan, 1948. 538 p. 48-7016 JK171.A1W4 6176. White, Leonard D. The Jeffersonians, 1801-1829. New York, Macmillan, 1951. xiv, 572 p. 51-12490 JK180.W5 6177. White, Leonard D. The Jacksonians, 1829- 1861. New York, Macmillan, 1954. 593 p. 54-12436 JK201.W45 6178. White, Leonard D. The Republican era, 1869-1901. New York, Macmillan, 1958. 406 p. 58-6209 JK231.W5 The subtitle of each of these volumes, "A Study in Administrative History," is inadequately descriptive of their scope. Not only does this work collectively span more than a century, 1789-1901, in the history of the organization and practical operation of the United States Government, but also, by means of vignettes of the participants, and of apposite quota- tions from their public reports, office memoranda, and private letters, it re-creates their ideas, ideals, and their philosophy of management, and reflects the flow of contemporary events. In the first period, from 1789 to 1801, when precedents were being made, the Federalists dominated the political scene, and their views about administration generally pre- vailed, but the Jeffersonian Republicans, or Demo- crats, forced them to give ground at some important points. The late Professor White, although appre- ciative of Washington's moral caliber, offers highest praise to Hamilton's "superlative" administrative ability and to his creation, the Treasury Department. The author finds that the Jeffersonian era of admin- istration (1801-29) was in fact a projection of the Federalist tradition of a strong Executive and of the gentleman in political life. During these years the system of administration did not have to accommo- date itself to new tasks or unaccustomed duties, since the time was one of consolidation and growth rather than innovation. The four Democratic-Republican Chief Executives — Jefferson, Madison, Monroe, and John Quincy Adams — sought to maintain executive leadership, with widely varying degrees of success, but recognized the responsibility of the executive branch and administrative system to Congress. The Jacksonian era Professor White describes as a period full of constitutional debate, party strife, and sec- tional conflict, creating tensions which overshadowed normal operation of the government. In his opin- ion, the most important influences upon the admin- istrative system during the years from Jackson to Lincoln were: the wide enfranchisement of adult male citizens, their organization into a national party system, the consequent surge of democratic sentiment, and increased participation of these ordi- nary citizens in office. The author not altogether convincingly defends Jackson's introduction of the principle of rotation in office, but admits that "the public service from 1829 to 1861 was engaged in a ceaseless struggle to protect its old standards against heavy odds and a tireless army of miners and sap- pers." The years 1869 to 1901, from Grant to McKinley, marked the culmination of Jacksonian theory and practice, although Federalist doctrine again made itself felt in a new partnership with democratic ideas. Professor White points to two major administrative problems of the age — the rela- tion of Congress to the President and of both to the administrative system, and the reform of the civil service system. He notes the gradual restoration to the Presidency of the authority which had been vir- tually destroyed during Johnson's administration, but remarks, also, upon the remaining power of the Senate. Without an administrative staff, the Presi- dent was barred from an active part in management and was oriented to Congress rather than to the executive departments. Only with enactment of the Pendleton Act in 1883 did there begin a steady improvement in the civil service and die partial formation of a government-wide administrative system. Although the Act, in Professor White's opinion, marked a fundamental turning point in the history of the Federal administration, it was no miracle worker, and brought about no trans- formation in the relations between Congress and the Executive. 6179. White, Leonard D. Introduction to the study of public administration. 4th ed. New York, Macmillan, 1955. 531 p. 55-1669 JK421.W45 1955 The author's last revision of a well-known and widely used textbook which, on its original publica- tion in 1926, was practically alone in the field. It is a methodical analysis and critique of American public administration which stresses the larger issues of policy rather than details. Public administration is here defined as "all those operations having for their purpose the fulfillment or enforcement of pub- lic policy." The management of public business is assumed to be a single process, substantially uniform in its essential characteristics wherever observed, and there is no separate treatment of local, State, and Federal administration, although the relations be- tween them are analyzed, and the majority of illus- trations are taken from the Federal sphere. Among the subjects of the 34 chapters are "The Servicewide Management Agencies," "Headquarters-Field Rela- tionships," "The Line Function," "Rise of Public Personnel Management," "Government Career Service," "Position Classification," and "Power and Responsibility." Professor White notes the pre- CONSTITUTION AND GOVERNMENT / 985 occupation of Federal administration with interna- tional affairs, defense, and atomic energy, with the task of keeping the national economy on a fairly even keel, with the progressive development of decent standards of living for the whole people, and with fiscal policy. One foundation for future American democracy, he concludes, is a sound ad- ministrative system able to discharge its tasks with competence and integrity. In his opinion, "we have gained, but whether we have gained relatively to the work to be done is an open question." 6180. Willoughby, William F. Principles of pub- lic administration, with special reference to the national and state governments of the United States. Baltimore, Johns Hopkins Press, 1927. xxii, 720 p. ( [ Brookings Institution, Washington, D. C] Institute for Government Research. Prin- ciples of administration [5]) 28-574 JK421.W48 Bibliography: p. 657-716. This pioneer work is a systematic analysis of the organization and operation of the administrative branch, mainly of the national government and secondarily of the State governments, through which the popular will is put into execution. Directed to students of political science and officials having to do with general legislation, it starts from the prem- ise "that, as regards our national government at least, the great political problem now confronting us is that of securing economy and efficiency in the actual administration of governmental affairs. This problem . . . has to do with the work of Congress as the board of directors of the government corpora- tion as well as with the organization and procedure of the executive departments and other administra- tive services. It also requires an especially careful consideration of the duties of the President as head of the administration." The author advocated that the office of the Chief Executive be expanded and strengthened into that of a general manager, with the line of administrative authority running from the several operating services, through the depart- ments to which they belong, to the Chief Executive and from the latter to the legislature. Under this principle of administrative organization, the admin- istrative branch, both in organization and in prac- tical operations, would be a single, integrated, and harmonious whole. This consideration of "General Administration and Organization" occupies part 1; the three remaining parts analyze the principles of personnel and financial administration in great detail, and the administration of materiel more briefly. 4.!1240— 60- -64 986 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES I. Administration: Special 6181. Cushman, Robert E. The independent regu- latory commissions. New York, Oxford University Press, 1941. xiv, 780 p. 41-17004 JK901.C8 "Produced . . . under the auspices of the Insti- tute of Public Administration [New York]." — Preface. A comprehensive survey of the legislative history of the regulatory commission movement, beginning with the establishment of the Interstate Commerce Commission in 1887, forms the first group of chap- ters in this massive volume. A second records the more important facts about and analyzes the legal status of those commissions, boards, or authorities which, in 194 1, lay entirely outside the 10 regular executive departments of the Federal government, were subject to no direct control by any Cabinet member or the President, and had for their major tasks the exercise of some form of restrictive or dis- ciplinary control over private conduct or private property. A third division of the work deals with British agencies set up to do work analogous to that performed by the American commissions. Here Professor Cushman makes a pioneering effort to focus the methods and results of British experience upon the American regulatory problem. The four final chapters offer a critical examination of certain basic problems connected with the independent reg- ulatory commissions. These questions grow out of the independence and divided responsibility of the commissions, the merger in them of powers — quasi- judicial, quasi-legislative, administrative, executive, and investigative — which many critics and students believe incompatible, their relation to the important task of policy planning in the regulatory field, and their structure and personnel. 6182. Douglas, Paul H. Economy in the national government. Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1952. 277 p. illus. 52-1737 HJ257.D67 A pithy argument in favor of economies in the Federal expenditures, based on lectures which the Senator from Illinois delivered in 195 1 on the Wal- green Foundation at the University of Chicago. Part 1 presents facts concerning the size, growth, and major areas of the Federal budget, points out the crying need for economy, and describes budget- ary procedure and the appropriation process. Part 2 discusses waste and nonessential expenditures in both military and civilian programs, and suggests savings in personnel, the elimination of logrolling, the reduction of public works to essential projects, and economies in the financing of the armed serv- ices. Part 3, very brief and less adequate, deals with possible increases in revenues by closing tax loop- holes, and the practical political problems of achiev- ing a balanced budget. Appendixes consider the economics of compensatory budgets. 6183. Fish, Carl Russell. The civil service and the patronage. New York, Longmans, Green, 1905. 280 p. (Harvard historical studies, v. 11) 5-7370 JK731.F5 "List of authorities": p. 252-266. The standard history of policy and practice in the United States government from 1789 to 1905 in regard to appointments to public office. The earliest plans before the Federal Convention, the author notes, proposed to transfer the appointing power from Congress to the Executive. Its solu- tion — that the President appoint the highest officers "by and with the advice and consent of the Sen- ate" — has withstood the test of time. From his own sense of the proper and practical, Washington estab- lished certain basic principles for the filling of offices, among them fitness for the post as a sine qua non, apportionment among the States, a previously suc- cessful career (especially for the judiciary), promo- tion from state to national office, and political orthodoxy. Minor appointments were left to mem- bers of the Cabinet. Fish assigned to Jefferson the introduction of the spoils system into the national service, since his administration was the first to make party service a reason for appointment and opposition a cause for removal. Jackson is credited with completing the spoils system by adding the principle of rotation in office and by disregarding fitness for the duties of it. "Not until 1829 did the genuine spoils system come into existence; and since that date it has flourished without break, though with some recent [1905] diminution." 6184. Gervasi, Frank H. Big government; the meaning and purpose of the Hoover Com- mission report. New York, Whittlesey House, 1949. 366 p. diagrs. 49-10899 JK643.C47A587 A journalist's review of the work of the Commis- sion on Organization of the Executive Branch of the Government (1947-49), headed by ex-President Herbert Hoover. His purpose is "to scrutinize the report of the Hoover Commission, assess its merits and demerits, and to present in brief and compact form what American taxpayers paid $2,000,000 to find out." The recommendations of the Commis- sion are found to be no mere dusting off of previous proposals, but rather "an exploration of the outer- most boundaries of government functions in the light of their cost, their usefulness, their limitations, and their curtailment or elimination." The Presi- dency itself is discussed, as well as the "transacdon of the public business in the departments, bureaus, agencies, boards, commissions, offices, independent establishments, and instrumentalities of the execu- tive branch." Although Mr. Gervasi is not wholly uncritical of the aims and recommendations of the Commission, he approves in general of the reforms suggested because he believes they will "ensure bet- ter government at a price the people can afford." He is convinced that modernization of the executive branch of the United States government is impera- tive, both for the proper performance of its duties to its own people and for the discharge of its inter- nadonal responsibilities. 6185. Graves, William Brooke, com p. Reorgani- zation of the executive branch of the Gov- ernment of the United States; a compilation of basic information and significant documents, 1912-1948. Washington, 1949. xiv, 425 p. ([U. S.] Library of Congress. Legislative Reference Service. Pub- lic affairs bulletin no. 66) 49-45834 JK1108.A35, no. 66 "Originally prepared for the Commission on Organization of the Executive Branch of the Gov- ernment, the Hon. Herbert Hoover, chairman." A compilation of materials pertaining to executive reorganization in the Federal government prior to the work of the Hoover Commission. Of its five sections, the first is a chronological listing of all important legislative and executive acdons taken; in it are included not only reprints of acts of Congress and executive orders, but also mention of bills intro- duced, hearings held, resolutions offered, reports issued, and the like. The second section shows that, in the majority of instances, important surveys of administrative organization have been authorized by the Congress rather than the Executive. Secdon 3, the core of the work, presents a documentary his- tory of the significant efforts at reorganization ini- tiated by authorized survey commissions from 1912 to 1948. Support of one or more plans for the re- organization of the administrative machinery, it appears, was given by Presidents Taft, Harding, Hoover, Franklin D. Roosevelt, and Truman. Sec- tion 4 reports proposals for reorganization of the execudve departments emanating in whole or in part from private sources, and section 5 contains state- ments on the subject by Presidents. 6186. Kammerer, Gladys M. Impact of war on Federal personnel administration, 1939-1945. CONSTITUTION AND GOVERNMENT / 987 Lexington, University of Kentucky Press, 195 1. 37 2 P- t 51-10526 JK691.K3 A study of "the greatest test public administradon has faced in this country." Changes of a funda- mental character were wrought in personnel admin- istration by the sudden expansion of the Federal service under the impact of total war. The principal changes considered are: the centralization of respon- sibility for recruitment in the Civil Service Commis- sion; the adoption of an aggressive new approach to recruitment; a deterioradon in standards of qualifi- cation for employment; fresh emphasis on loyalty in the absence of other standards; the development of training programs; increased mobility within the service; intensified pressures for higher pay; con- trols over the volume of Federal employment; the evolution of employee-relations programs; and the reorganization of the Civil Service Commission for improved personnel management. In the author's opinion, wartime personnel administration made several permanent contributions to the improvement of the Federal service. These included the preserva- don of merit system principles, success in recruit- ment for expanded government service, progress in the building of training programs, a realizadon of the importance of employee relations in the public service, and a new appreciadon of personnel admin- istration itself. 6187. Macmahon, Arthur W., and John D. Millett. Federal administrators; a biographical ap- proach to the problem of departmental management. New York, Columbia University Press, 1939. xiv, 524 p. 39-M37 1 JK73 r -M23 This very unusual book on "the apex of the pyramid" of governmental personnel is in three parts. The first and most theoretical considers the requirements of management in the Federal depart- ments, and how these requirements were met at the time of writing. Departmental leadership, it is argued, must be both administrative and political; the administrative requirement calls for "a focal personality who will direct the flow of command and integrate the work of a flexible group of super- visors"; the political requirement calls for advisory aides free from routine responsibility who will assist the Secretary in "the formulation of policy and its popularization." Part 2 is a "biographical" history of the under secretaries and assistant secretaries in the 10 departments since these offices were instituted (the earliest Assistant Secretary, in the Treasury Department, goes back to 1849, but there was an Assistant Postmaster General as early as 1789, and two more by 1836. The first Under Secretary, in the State Department, dates from 1909). The au- thors find that "haphazard political considerations have been the outstanding factors in the selection of 988 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Assistant Secretaries," too many of whom have been "idling cogs in the national machine." Part 3 deals with the chiefs of the relatively autonomous bureaus, but arranges the material according to the mode of tenure and recruitment of these offices. The chap- ters proceed from classified chiefships filled by pro- motion to the "Survivals of Political Recruitment," of which six clear cases were found as of 1938. "It is time," the authors conclude, "to bring all bureau chiefs within the merit system." 6188. Mosher, William E., J. Donald Kingsley, and O. Glenn Stahl. Public personnel ad- ministration. 3d ed. New York, Harper, 1950. 652 p. 50-12401 JK765.M6 1950 First published in 1936. Bibliography: p. 611-632. The emphasis of this book is upon the develop- ment of policy and the techniques of administration which contribute to the selection, retention, and productivity of the best available talent for the public service. It takes less account of the need for basic reform or elimination of the spoils system, although it is recognized that much remains to be accom- plished in these matters, particularly at the state and local levels. More space is devoted to the problems of selection and the development of personnel within a public jurisdiction, and the human relations con- nected with modern management, than is given to the details of recruitment and examination, or to the central personnel agency. Good morale, the au- thors conclude, is the most valuable asset of any large-scale organization: "its consequences are measured in terms of personal satisfactions in the constant development of new ideas leading to im- provements in methods, and, finally, in more and better output." To build up morale, leadership is required as well as sound placement procedures, fair wage policies, assurance of income in periods of illness and old age, good working conditions, opportunities for participation and growth, recogni- tion of work well done, justice, and fairness. The authors propose a number of remedies for what they consider the inadequacy of the typical civil service commission. 6189. Reynolds, Mary (Trackett). Interdepart- mental committees in the national adminis- tration. New York, .Columbia University Press, J 939- I 77 P- (Columbia University. Faculty of Political Science. Studies in history, economics and public law, no. 450) 39-15177 JK421.R48 1939a Bibliography: p. 165-169. A study of administrative relationships exhibited in the interdepartmental committees which func- tioned actively between 1933 and 1937. A number of them were appointed before Franklin D. Roose- velt took office as President; some of them had been abolished by the time of writing. Mrs. Reynolds holds that interdepartmental relationships are a necessary, proper, and permanent part of adminis- tration in the Federal government, that the syste- matic and intelligent conduct of them is a major problem of administration, and that among the use- ful techniques for the conduct of interdepartmental affairs is the interdepartmental committee. She distinguishes three types: the exploratory or research committee, the functional coordinating committee, and the institutional coordinating committee. These have been effective, she believes, in five kinds of administrative action: the exploration, drafting, and integration of legislative proposals; research and general investigation; facilitation of administrative programs for which single agencies are responsible but which have certain interdepartmental aspects; the conduct of administrative programs by the com- mittees themselves; and, finally, exchange and clear- ing of information concerning common problems. 6190. Smith, Darrell Hevenor. The United States Civil Service Commission; its history, activi- ties and organization. Baltimore, Johns Hopkins Press, 1928. 153 p. ( [Brookings Institution, Wash- ington, D. C] Institute for Government Research. Service monographs of the United States govern- ment, no. 49) 28-18298 JK681.S6 Bibliography: p. 140-149. A monograph designed for the use of legislators and public administrators, which details the history and development of the United States Civil Service Commission from the passage of the Pendleton Act — "an act to regulate and improve the civil serv- ice of the United States" — which established it in 1883 through the Retirement Act of 1920 and the Classification Act of 1923. The following functions of the Commission are described: recruiting, exami- nation, certification, recording, and "post-appoint- ment activities." Also treated in detail are the organization and staff which, as of 1927, handled these matters. The Commission proper consisted of three Commissioners, appointed by the President and responsible direcdy and solely to him; not more than two of them might be adherents of the same political party. They were assisted by administra- tive, technical, and field services which are here particularized down to the last clerk and laborer. Appendixes give the laws and regulations governing operations of the Commission, appropriations, re- ceipts, expenditures, and other data. 6191. Smith, Harold D. The management of your government. New York, Whitdesey House, McGraw-Hill, 1945. 179 p. 45-10439 JK411.S6 CONSTITUTION AND GOVERNMENT / 989 A series of 13 papers concerning management of the public business, and especially fiscal planning and policy, prepared for various audiences. The author, Director of the Bureau of the Budget from 1939 to 1946, aimed at a clearer understanding by the public of the process of management. He argued that all management, however complex, begins with planning. Although a distinction exists between the planning of basic goals through the legislative process and the planning by administrators to reach those goals, the two types are neither separate nor segregated. The interchange of information be- tween Congress and the Executive must be continu- ous so that each may keep in mind its relationship to the other. This relationship between the legislative branch, with its determination of broad policy pro- grams, and the administration, with its duty of executive management, "largely determines the suc- cess or failure of democratic government." The hopes, fears, and aspirations of the people find ex- pression in the enactments of the legislature, which are, in turn, modified by the findings, experience, and ideas of the administration. The budget, as the most important instrument of legislative control and of administrative management, is at the core of democratic government. 6192. Spero, Sterling D. Government as employer. New York, Remsen Press, 1948. 497 p. 48-10699 HD8008.S65 A study of employment relations in the public service at the Federal, state and municipal levels. Dr. Spero takes exception to the theory of govern- ment as "sovereign employer" against which strikes or other militant actions are attacks tantamount to treason. He maintains that "it is a primary obliga- tion of those in authority in a free society to guard the rights of citizens including the freedom of asso- ciation of those citizens employed by the govern- ment. Limitation of this freedom is justifiable only when it interferes with the right of government to make and administer public policy." He analyzes the antistrike and other legislation which restricts civil servants in their capacity as workers, and the laws and regulations which affect their capacity as citizens. He describes the rise of the trade union movement as it has affected employee organizations, and the labor policies of the Federal, state, and municipal governments. "Despite the valiant work of the civil service reform movement," the author concludes, "the merit concept is not yet accepted either by the politicians or the general public." 6193. Torpey, William G. Public personnel man- agement. New York, Van Nostrand, 1953. 431 p. illus. (Van Nostrand political science series) 53-5462 JK765.T6 An analysis of each aspect of personnel manage- ment: organization, functions, objectives, processes, procedures, and the problems of administration. In seeking solutions to such problems, the author attempts to combine the practical approach of the practitioner with the academic approach of the educator. He deals with the executive branches of all levels of American government, Federal, state, and local. Upon the effective administration of personnel, he believes, depends the success or failure of every undertaking of management. "Adminis- trative goals, policies, and plans fail of accomplish- ment when inadequate consideration is afforded the human aspects of organization." Although public personnel management is but one part of public administration, its importance becomes a matter of growing concern to the responsible chief executive of a jurisdiction and to his department heads as the scope and complexity of government functions in- crease. Mr. Torpey discusses in great detail the tools of personnel management, among them posi- tion-classification plans, pay plans, rules for recruit- ment and examination, training programs, rules for promotions, transfers and separations, grievance procedures, and retirement programs. 6194. Wooddy, Carroll H. The growth of the Federal government, 1915-1932. New York, McGraw-Hill, 1934. 577 p. (Recent social trends monographs) 34-7178 JK421.W6 A supplement to Recent Social Trends in the United States, a report issued by the President's Research Committee on Social Trends named by President Hoover in 1929. The aim was, in part, to make available the materials upon which that report based its conclusions about trends in the functions and expenditures of the Federal government. Re- stricted in scope to the civil functions of the govern- ment, the present study analyzed in some detail the development of each Federal agency during the years 1915-32, furnishing a brief sketch of the origin and history of the agency; lists of the activities of 1915 and of those subsequently added; tables of ex- penditures for each year or selected years of the period; an analysis of the causes and extent of growth, supported by such tables as could be sup- plied; and such evidence as was available in 1934 concerning probable changes which might affect the future development of each agency. Although this volume was concerned primarily with civil activities in the period ending with fiscal 1932, the discussion was expanded to include the sweeping changes made and proposed up to January 1934 because of President Roosevelt's emergency program of 1933. 990 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES J. State Government 6195. Allen, Robert S., ed. Our sovereign state. New York, Vanguard Press, 1949. xxxviii, ^-^P- 49-11566 JK2413.A4 Contents. — Introduction: the shame of the states, by R. S. Allen. — Massachusetts: prisoner of the past, by W. V. Shannon. — New York: backslider, by R. G. Spivack. — Pennsylvania: bossed cornucopia, by H. A. Lowe. — Georgia: paradise of oligarchy, by T. Collier. — Ohio: oxcart government, by R. L. Maher. — Illinois: the "new look," by D. E. Cham- berlain. — Wisconsin: a state that glories in its past, by W. T. Evjue. — Louisiana: beak too big for its belly, by R. S. O'Leary. — Nebraska: Norris: in vic- tory and defeat, by J. E. Lawrence. — Texas: owned by oil and interlocking directorates, by H. Stilwell. — Utah: contrary state, by E. Linford. — California: the first hundred years, by R. V. Hyer. A vigorous indictment, in the muckraking tradi- tion, of American State government, with 12 States singled out for individual treatment by the contribu- tors, most of whom are journalists. In his introduc- tion, Mr. Allen accuses State government of "all the worst evils of misrule in the country. Venality, open domination and manipulation by vested inter- ests, unspeakable callousness in the care of the sick, aged, and unfortunate, criminal negligence in law enforcement, crass deprivation of primary constitu- tional rights, obfuscation, obsolescence, obstruction- ism, incompetence, and even outright dictatorship are widespread characteristics." These ills are rooted in the State constitutions, which discriminate against the cities and are full of inequalities profit- able for the great business, utility, and press interests. The antilabor, antispending, antiliberal rural-domi- nated legislatures the editor calls "the most sordid, obstructive, and anti-democratic, law-making agen- cies in the country." He attributes the situation, which is everywhere much the same, to absurdly low pay and to crippling limitations upon the length of sessions, which render the legislators susceptible to pressure and manipulation. There is no index. 6196. Anderson, William, and Edward W. Weid- ner. State and local government in the United States. New York, Holt, 195 1. xx, 744 p. illus. "For further reading" at end of chapters. 51-11513 JK2408.A7 A college textbook on State and local government. Where the two are interrelated, as in constitutional status, politics and election activities, personnel and financial problems, and numerous public services, State and local aspects of the subject are discussed together. The State, rural, and urban governmental structures are, however, considered separately so as to enable the student to grasp the organization of each. It is emphasized that the division of public functions under the Constitution of the United States is between the Federal government and the States. Local governments exist within a State in a legal sense because the State created them and empowered them to perform its functions in the several localities. Although the courts concede to cities, villages, and boroughs certain "proprietary," "local," or "munici- pal" functions, even these exist only because the State has authorized them. All courts authorized by the State are considered State courts, though they may be called "county" or "municipal" courts. Close interdependence, even integration, between State and locality has become discernible in almost all fields, among them education, health and social welfare, highways, agricultural and labor laws, law enforcement, and, particularly, finance. 6197. The Book of the states, v. 12; 1958-1959. Chicago, Council of State Governments, 1958. 538 p. 35-"433 JK2403.B6, v. 12 A biennial publication of the Council of State Governments containing current material in text and tables concerning the organization, finance, and major services of the State governments. Their ex- ecutive, legislative, and judicial branches are dealt with, as are interstate relations, of which the Coun- cil is only one instance. A concluding section, "The State Pages," devotes a page of names, facts, and figures to each State and territory. Emphasis is given to developments of the two years preceding publication of each volume, which is issued at the beginning of even-numbered years. This permits presentation of important data about the legislative sessions of the immediately preceding odd-numbered year, during which most of the legislatures hold their regular sessions. The 1958-59 edition of this authoritative work and its supplements differ some- what in content and timing from their predecessors. The set has heretofore consisted of two volumes in a biennium — a major reference book and one sup- plement; it will include three volumes for 1958-59 — the present major book and two supplements. The first of these, to be published at the beginning of 1959, will list elective administrative officials and legislators of all the States. Replacing rosters pre- viously included in the major work, a new supple- ment will appear in mid-1959, providing compre- hensive lists of State administradve officials, whether appointed or elected. 6198. Carey, Jane (Clark). The rise of a new fed- eralism; federal-state cooperation in the United States, by Jane Perry Clark. New York, Columbia University Press, 1938. xviii, 347 p. 38-27585 JK325.C34 "Selected bibliography": p. [32i]~340. "This volume is intended to favor neither 'federal centralization' nor 'states' rights'; it aims, rather, to indicate and describe some of the ways in which the federal and state governments have cooperated and how effective their joint activity has been," par- ticularly in dealing with certain economic and social problems through legisladon and administration. Cooperation between the judicial branches of the Federal and State governments is not considered. Although such cooperative efforts as grants-in-aid, tax credits, joint control of commerce, and joint activity of Federal and state administrative agencies have survived judicial review, the author considers them unwieldly and relatively ineffectual, an in- evitable result of the haphazard and unplanned ways by which they have grown. The fact that the States use Federal machinery to carry out State laws is not without its great importance, she believes, but it is the use by the Federal government of State organizations and personnel to carry out Federal laws — the combination of Federal control and de- centralized State administradon — that "appears des- tined to play an increasingly important part in the development of the American federal system. " 6199. Council of State Governments. Federal- state relations. Report of the Commission on Organization of the Executive Branch of the Government pursuant to Public law 162, 80th Con- gress. Washington, U. S. Govt. Print. Off., 1949. 297 p. (81st Cong., 1st sess, 1949. Senate. Docu- ment no. 81) 49-46374 JK325.C63 This history and analysis of Federal-State rela- tions distinguishes two basic planes upon which the national government and the State governments have lived together from the beginning to the pres- ent — commitment to a common existence in the face of common cares, and the practical division of pow- ers between the units concerned in the Federal sys- tem. Four phases of development are distinguished: the period before adoption of the Constitution when most of the major problems were posed but few answers were found; the Federalist period, 1787- t8oo, when the meaning of the Constitutional pro- visions was first explored, and a large measure of cooperation between the national government and CONSTITUTION AND GOVERNMENT / 99I the States was developed; the third period, 1800- 1913, one of crosscurrents dominated at first by the great national-regional conflict which culminated in the Civil War and later by the unification of the country, when conflicting trends pushed at once toward separation of the national government from the States and toward their close collaboration; and, finally, the period 1913-48, when forces long con- ducive to the solidarity of national and State policy came to the fore. The report calls for cooperation and teamwork between Federal and State govern- ments, with understanding and support from the people. State responsibilities as well as rights must be accepted and exercised; overcentralization of con- trol and power in the national government must be avoided. 6200. Council of State Governments. Committee on State-Local Relations. State-local rela- tions; report. [Chicago] 1946. 228 p. 47-3168 JK2445.C62 1946 A description of State-local relations as they ex- isted in 1946, together with the Committee's conclu- sions in regard to them. The Committee offers no panacea for this complex problem. "Rather, it has set forth a series of propositions designed to stimu- late thinking and study about state-local problems, to encourage the cooperation of state and local officials in the solution of their common difficulties, and to indicate possible solutions to some of the most pressing problems." Two principal objectives are suggested for any program in the field : the strength- ening of local units of government so that they may meet their day-to-day administrative tasks promptly and efficiendy and attain meaningful local democ- racy; and the improvement of State supervision of local affairs so that activities of State-wide concern will be carried out at a uniformly high level of per- formance. These objectives may best be achieved, it is asserted, if States, which bear the primary re- sponsibility for a well-ordered system of State-local relations, will grant larger power to local units, subject those powers to flexible administrative su- pervision rather than to detailed legislation, aid localities in securing stable and adequate revenues, and promote the enlargement and consolidation of local governments. 6201. Fesler, James W. The independence of state regulatory agencies. Chicago, Public Ad- ministration Service, 1942. 72 p. ([Public Admin- istration Service, Chicago] Publication no. 85) 42-51444 JK2445.F4 A study of the independence of State agencies en- gaged in the regulation of utilities, labor conditions, the sale of alcoholic beverages, banking and insur- ance, and the practice of the professions. Institutions 992 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES of 12 States divided among the principal regions were selected for investigation as being representative of all such agencies. These agencies are found to have certain features in common: they all operate in areas of special interests and pressure groups; and the regulatory processes with which they are con- cerned combine legislative, judicial, and adminis- trative elements. Mr. Fesler attempts to discover how, under the circumstances, the public interest may best be served. He finds objectionable features in complete independence of the agencies, and in integration of them under the governor, or under the legislature. He believes that because of the sus- ceptibility of these agencies to pressure groups, and the varying degrees to which the interests of such groups coincide with the public interest, each type of regulatory agency deserves distinctive treatment in the establishment of its intergovernmental rela- tionships, and its own degree of independence. All such agencies, in his opinion, should answer to both governor and legislature. 6202. Graves, William Brooke. American state government. [4th ed.] Boston, Heath, 1953. 946 p. 53,-^^ JK2408.G7 1953 First published in 1936. "Selected references" at end of chapters. A textbook which reports and analyzes "signifi- cant developments in the forward movement of the states in the period since World War II." Dr. Graves emphasizes the importance of State govern- ment in the American tradition. Various factors contribute to the growing importance of the States, he believes, among them such general ones as ex- panding services, increased costs, and the close re- lationship between the State and the individual. He finds other factors peculiar to the States — the train- ing they provide for future Federal officials; their function as laboratories for experimentation with political machinery, social policies, and adminis- trative techniques; their position as the key units in the American system of government to which the Federal government on the one hand and local units on the other "owe their origins, powers, and continued existence." Recent and unprecedented demands made upon the States for housing, educa- tion, highways, the construction and modernization of mental and other institutions, and unemployment insurance, among other fields, suggest a new era of the service or welfare state. Such a tremendous growth of services imposes heavy administrative problems upon the States. Overlapping and dupli- cation of effort must be eliminated through a ra- tional division of functions. 6203. Lipson, Leslie. The American governor from figurehead to leader. Chicago, Uni- versity of Chicago Press, 1939. xxi, 282 p. (Studies in public administration, v. 9) 39-27456 JK2447.L5 1939 Bibliography: p. 269-275. This University of Chicago dissertation analyzes the proper relationship between the legislative and executive branches of State governments, and es- pecially the problem of enhancing executive au- thority while safeguarding popular participation and control through the legislature. Leadership is regarded as not merely compatible with democracy but essential to its successful functioning, and the leadership of the governor in the executive and legis- lative branches forms the chief interest of this book. Four States have been selected for special emphasis: New York, because its government is on a larger scale than any other; Massachusetts, because it rep- resents the political habits and traditions of New England and was called upon to rectify defects of organization at an earlier date than most others; Virginia, because it represents the South, where the normal dominance of one party simplifies some of the administratice problems; and Illinois, in the Middle West, because it exemplifies the difficulty of establishing honest administration in a milieu of spoils-system politics. Starting as "a mere creature of the legislature," the author observes, the governor won real power during the first decade of the 20th century, and became a leader by supplanting the party boss. The short ballot, the executive budget, and administrative consolidation were generally achieved in the following decade. 6204. Porter, Kirk H. State administration. New York, Crofts, 1938. 450 p. 38-3289 JK2443.P6 Bibliography: p. 434-440. An outline of the numerous activities regularly engaged in by each of the 48 States as of 1938, to- gether with proposals for organizing agencies suit- able for the proper administration of these activities. Professor Porter furnishes an oudine of the adminis- trative agencies — offices, departments, boards, com- missions, and bureaus — which he considers appro- priate, with some modifications, for any one of the States. He discusses the work to be done, suggests methods of organizing administrative units, and offers various recommendations, but warns that seldom is there one correct solution to any problem of the kind. He presents a synopsis of the typical State administrative structure, with the governor at the top. In descending order will be the principal administrative officers, popularly elected and pro- vided for in the State constitution; heads of depart- ments, popularly elected but provided for by statute; administrative officers appointed by the governor; and finally, plural agencies of every type. Professor CONSTITUTION AND GOVERNMENT / 993 Porter advocates "sound principles of integration," and the concentration of power and responsibility in the chief executive. "One of the principal theses of this book," he writes, "has been that the governor should have full and direct power over a few im- portant staff agencies through which he would be able to exercise all the authority and influence that he ought to have." 6205. Wilcox, Jerome K., ed. Manual on the use of state publications. Sponsored by the Com- mittee on Public Documents of the American Li- brary Association. Chicago, American Library Association, 1940. 342 p. 40-27368 Z1223.5.A1W66 Each chapter of this comprehensive guide to state publications has been contributed by a spe- cialist. The preface outlines the work: "Part I, Importance, Character and Use, presents in five chapters critical analyses of present state reporting and uses made by various groups of state publica- tions. Part II, Bibliographical Aids, brings together in four chapters state government organizations and bibliographies of individual state lists of pub- lications and of all important articles concerning state publications. Part III, Basic State Publica- tions, in nine chapters treats each important group of state documents bibliographically and critically. The final chapter in Part III, compiled by Mrs. [Carolyn L.] Hale, is an attempt to bring together all important recent information on state functions, by functions, each in three categories as far as pos- sible: (1) list of directories; (2) digests of laws and studies of the state functions; and (3) bibliographies of publications. Part IV is a directory of national associations of state officers with indications of their chief publications. Part V is a digest of informa- tion on state printing plants and state printing laws and a digest of the laws in each state concerning the exchange and distribution of state publications." There is a subject index. 6206. Zimmermann, Frederick L., and Mitchell Wendell. The interstate compact since 1925. Chicago, Council of State Governments, 1951. *3 2 P- 51-62583 Law Designed for the use of officials, lawyers, and students of government, this is a study of the back- ground, scope, nature, and some potential uses of the compact as an instrument of interstate and na- tional state coordination. The compact clause, the authors note, is the only provision of the Constitu- tion that furnishes a means of positive cooperation among the states of the Union. Enforceable by the Supreme Court and by Congress, the compact is a flexible legal instrument which affords a mech- anism for administration and for regulation upon a multistate as well as a regional basis. Until the 1920's the need for interstate cooperation was "rudi- mentary," and the compact was used mainly in settling disputed boundary lines, but in recent times, and especially since World War II, it has been increasingly utilized to deal with such matters as the interstate control of crime, cooperative protection of oil and gas resources, water allocation, pollution control, fisheries, forest protection, education, and metropolitan area development. The authors clas- sify compacts as boundary-jurisdictional, boundary- administrative, regional-administrative, administra- tive-exploratory-recommendatory, and administra- tive-regulatory. In the order mentioned, these roughly chart chronological progress in the use of the device. The compact has further potentiality, in the authors' opinion, "as a means of securing both vertical and horizontal coordination in our federal system — of uniting the powers of the national gov- ernment with those of a group of states through a single legal mechanism." K. Local Government 6207. Allen, Robert S., ed. Our fair city. New York, Vanguard Press, 1947. 387 p. 47-30142 JS 323.A6 Contents. — Boston: study in inertia, by L. M. Lyons. — New York: "greatest city in the world," by Paul Crowell and A. H. Raskin. — Philadelphia: where patience is a vice, by T. P. O'Neil. — Miami: heaven or honky-tonk? By Henning Heldt. — Birmingham: steel giant with a glass jaw, by Irving Beiman. — Cleveland: study in political paradoxes, by R. L. Maher. — Detroit: city of conflict, by Leo Donovan. — Chicago: unfinished anomaly, by W. H. Pierce. — Milwaukee: Old Lady Thrift, by R. S. Davis. — Memphis: satrapy of a benevolent despot, by G. M. Capers. — St. Louis: boundary-bound, by C. F. Hurd. — Kansas City: gateway to what? By W. G. Clugston — Denver: civic schizophrenic, by Roscoe Fleming. — Butte: city with a "kick" in it, by J. K. Howard. — Seattle: slave and master, by R. L. Neuberger. — San Francisco: the bedlam dozes, by Charles Raudebaugh. — Los Angeles: rainbow's end, by Maury Maverick and R. E. G. Harris. 994 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES All but two of these reports on the governments of 17 cities are by veteran newspapermen writing on their home towns. As Mr. Allen observes in his introduction, each American community has a per- sonality, derived from its origin, locale, and history, yet all are plagued by certain universal municipal maladies. These chapters tell "the same old story of boodling bosses and businessmen, of horrendous slums, of dirt and filth, disease and vice, of gross and shameless waste, of mismanagement and mis- rule, of crass disregard of public health and human dignity." "There is not a city in the country, large or small," the editor asserts, "where business is not the primary stultifying, corrupting, and antidemo- cratic influence." But, he adds, "there is not a city whose sins of omission and commission are not due directly to the apathy, irresponsibility, and cow- ardice of its citizens." Among the evils noted by his contributors are parasitic suburbs and satellite communities, the dominance of outside capital, crippling State interference in municipal affairs, conflicting urban authorities, the indifference of the press, and, most important, the lack of a deep- rooted tradition of honest, intelligent, and com- petent municipal management. These are very much the same evils discovered 40 years earlier by Lincoln Steffens, and set forth in his famous muck- raking work, The Shame of the Cities (New York, McClure, Phillips, 1904. 306 p.). His purpose was to "burn through our civic shamelessness and set fire to American pride." 6208. Chicago. Home Rule Commission. Modern- izing a city government; report. [Chicago] University of Chicago Press, 1954. xiv, 422 p. 54-I339I JS708.A53 The Commission deals with problems relating to the improvement and modernization of the struc- ture of the city's government and to added home- rule powers. Introductory in character, part 1 describes the organization and procedures of the Commission, presents its view of its assignment and responsibility, indicates the economic factors under- lying the vast growth of Chicago, and explains the structure of city government that obtained in 1954. Part 2 is concerned with modernization, particu- larly of the city council, which the Commission would reduce in size; of the budget, which it would alter to the executive, performance type; and of the mayor's office, to which it would attach an administrative officer and a small professional staff. Part 3 analyzes home rule and offers recommenda- tions to increase it. The Commission examines the adequacy of Chicago's powers of local government in four major areas: the structure, and form of gov- ernment; services; police powers; and revenue pow- ers. Finding Chicago's powers of local government inadequate in the first of these areas, the Commis- sion proposes that the state legislature authorize changes. It concludes that, with legislative grants readily securable in the other areas, Chicago enjoys substantially as much power as do the constitutional home-rule cities. 6209. Gill, Norman N. Municipal research bu- reaus, a study of the nation's leading citizen- supported agencies. Washington, American Coun- cil on Public Affairs, 1944. 178 p. 44-6805 JS302.G5 A history and analysis of the municipal research movement, which deals with 20 citizen-supported research bureaus. The programs of nearly all of these quasi-public but inadequately supported mu- nicipal organizations have stressed efficiency first and economy second in local government. Advocating improved methods of levying and collecting taxes, budget and accounting procedure, independent au- dits and centralized purchasing, and the recruiting and training of municipal personnel, these bureaus have also sought to formulate long-range policy and better service in such matters as public health, police and fire protection, education, traffic control, trans- portation, street lighting and cleaning, and refuse collection, as well as to promote efficiency and stand- ardization in the construction of streets, sewers, and school and other public buildings. The author notes the social welfare aspects of the bureaus' work for relief, housing, higher standards of living, and con- structive planning. He suggests several further areas of study by the bureaus, among them inter- governmental, social, and economic problems. And finally he urges broad representation of the citizenry, especially of young civic leaders, upon bureau boards; progressive policies; more use of modern methods of public relations; and greater profession- alization of bureau staffs. 6210. Hodges, Henry G. City management; theory and practice of municipal administra- tion. New York, Crofts, 1939. xx, 759 p. illus. 39-18457 JS331.H6 A textbook on municipal government, amply provided with organization charts, which presents the practice as well as the theory of city manage- ment. It pleads for a professional personnel trained in public administration, to whom public service is a career; the effective direction of workers; and skillful financial planning. Centralized control of properly grouped functions is viewed as the direct- ing principle, and integrated responsibility the chief weapon of democratic control in city management. The greatest strides in city management have been made, the author believes, through the gradual ac- ceptance of the city-manager plan of government. CONSTITUTION AND GOVERNMENT / 995 It remains essential that the citizen understand the government of his city, its functions and services, since democracy will be preserved only to the ex- tent that the lag between public opinion and tech- nical administrative advances is shortened. Polit- ical education of the masses must bring about the public's willingness to employ scientific administra- tive techniques and make impossible government by a "contractor-controlled political party." The author oudines six generally accepted standards for the efficient conduct of urban government. 621 1. Jones, Victor. Metropolitan government. Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1942. xxiv, 364 p. (Chicago. University. Studies in so- cial science, no. 39 [i.e. 40] ) 42-12520 JS331.J6 1942a "List of bibliographies": p. 343-344. A general examination of some of the problems of integrating local government in the larger met- ropolitan areas of the United States. Dr. Jones re- gards the government of metropolitan areas as part of the larger question of the economic, social, and political organization of the nation, which calls for the periodic realignment of boundaries and the reallocation of functions among all levels of gov- ernment. He considers the present government of metropolitan communities ineffective in the face of existing and emerging problems of urban life. This ineffectiveness he attributes to the formulation and administration of policies for these areas by "scores or hundreds of contiguous but independent, under- nourished, and jealous units of local governments." Popular control and coordination of policy and budgeting are difficult if not impossible, the author argues, when power and responsibility are chopped up and the segments distributed among a large number of boards, commissions, or authorities within the same area. Politics are the primary ob- stacle in the way of organized efforts to integrate the multitude of units that govern metropolitan areas in the United States. Although statutes or charters can readily be drafted and given effect by technicians, legislative or electoral approval must first be secured. This situation, in Dr. Jones' opinion, calls for an active program of propaganda. 6212. Lancaster, Lane W. Government in rural America. 2d ed. New York, Van Nos- trand, 1952. 375 p. illus. (Van Nostrand political science series) 52-9252 JS425.L3 1952 A textbook, originally published in 1937, about the operation of government in the towns, town- ships, counties, and school districts of American rural areas. It points out that the differences be- tween political organizations in such units and those in populous areas are principally in scale rather than in the types of problems met; in their actions, most of the same processes are involved, although legal and constitutional differences do exist. "Gov- ernment everywhere involves the translation of public wishes into rules binding upon citizens, the purchase and use of materials, the employment and management of personnel, and the enforcement of rules of action and conduct upon all within the jurisdiction of the authorities." The fundamental problem of local government in the 20th century, as Professor Lancaster views it, is the inadequacy for their work of its traditional units, which were laid out when economic and social conditions were very different. With respect to area, population, taxable resources, and internal organization, they are far removed from the economic realities of today. The author calls for the consolidation of areas, internal reorganization, and a reallocation of functions. 6213. The Municipal year book. [25th year]; 1958. Chicago, International City Manag- ers' Association. 598 p. 34-27121 JS344.C5A24, 25th The chief purpose of this yearbook, which has appeared since 1934, "is to provide municipal offi- cials with information on the current problems of cities throughout the country, with facts and statistics on individual city activities, and with analy- ses of trends by population groups." Many of its sections are brought up to date and repeated year after year; these include forms of city government, methods of selecting the mayor and council, utilities owned and operated, salaries of chief municipal officers, personnel organization, city financial data, fire and police departments, municipal parking lots, directories of city managers and other officials, and model municipal ordinances. Some new material is included in each annual, beginning with an intro- ductory article on the "municipal highlights" of the year. Other new sections in the 1958 volume are "City Planning Data" ($6 billion to be spent in the next five years), "Municipal Debt for Cities over 10,000 [bond issues of 1957 by 550 cities]," "Hous- ing Demolition Data," "Municipal Cemeteries," "Municipal Airport Data," and "Regulation of Curb Loading Zones." Sources of information are listed at the end of most sections and, for the obstinately bewildered, there are five pages on "How to Use the Vear Book." 6214. Rankin, Rebecca B. Guide to the municipal government of the city of New York. 7th ed. New York, Record Press, 1952. 209 p. 52-1927 JS1228.R3 1952 First published in 1936. A guide to the more than 100 separate units of administration of the government of New York 996 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES City as they were operating on January 1, 1952. The purpose of the manual is to describe simply and concisely the governmental organization and ad- ministration of the city, the functions of its many boards, departments, bureaus, divisions, commis- sions, courts, and committees, and their relation- ships to one another under the revised charter of 1938. Arrangement is in sections classified by the main functions of the departments, so that allied units may be treated together. A short index is de- signed to bring out other and less known functions of the city agencies. As Miss Rankin observes, New York operates under the "Strong Mayor- Council form" of government, which places most responsibility upon the mayor who appoints his de- partment heads, prepares the budget, and sees that the government is properly administered. The consent of the council, elected by districts, is neces- sary to validate most actions of the mayor; it also shares in the making of policy. Many administra- tive departments are empowered by the charter and administrative code to make regulations in order to carry out their departmental functions. Printed once a year, these regulations have the force of law. 6215. Schmeckebier, Laurence F. The District of Columbia, its government and adminis- tration. Baltimore, Johns Hopkins Press, 1928. xx, 943 p. maps. ([Brookings Institution, Wash- ington, D. C] Institute for Government Research. Studies in administration) 28-14676 JK2725 1928.S4 Bibliography: p. 863-923. A survey of the unique government of the District of Columbia, which suffers complete denial of direct representation, performs the functions of both a State, or territorial, and a municipal organization, and is treated in many respects by Congress as a minor subdivision of the Federal government. Al- though Mr. Schmeckebier admitted that "the in- terests of the United States and the residents of the District frequently clash," he refrained from criticism of the defects in organization, operation, and municipal and civil law resulting from the unfortunate conditions under which the District government operated in the 1920's, and of Con- gress' inability or unwillingness to work out a con- sistent policy in its treatment of the District. His purpose was rather to describe all of the govern- mental activities of the District essentially local in character, and to indicate the agencies which were responsible for performance of the work. He set forth in elaborate detail the functions, and, in most instances, the organization, finances, and personnel of the Commissioners of the District of Columbia, the several boards, commissions, or units dealing with District affairs only, the Federal agencies which held plenary power in their fields, the Federal agencies which had merely contractual relations with the District government, and the judiciary, as of about June 30, 1926. A more up-to-date but less detailed view is the Government of the District of Columbia; Manual of Organization ([Washing- ton] Management Office, Dept. of General Admin- istration [1954] 1 v. (various pagings)). It contains brief descriptions of the Board of Commissioners, the Office of the Secretary, and the Citizens' Ad- visory Council, as well as of 22 agencies subject to the full control of the Commissioners, and of 10 special advisory groups. 6216. Stone, Harold A., Don K. Price, and Kath- ryn H. Stone. City manager government in the United States; a review after twenty-five years. Chicago, Published for the Committee on Public Administration of the Social Science Research Coun- cil by Public Administration Service, 1940. xv, 279 p. (Social Science Research Council. Com- mittee on Public Administration. Studies in admin- istration, v. 7) 40-10323 JS344.C5S76 A summary of the principal results of the city- manager plan of government in 48 cities that were operating under it in 1938, and in two cities that had abandoned it. Although these constituted only about one-tenth of all cides having city-manager government, they included nearly half of the mana- ger cities with a population of 50,000 or more and a third of those with more than 25,000 inhabitants. Every section of the United States was represented, as was every State important to the city-manager movement. The selected cities had every kind of municipal history and background. The city- manager plan is here considered to involve two fundamental principles: unificadon of powers in a city council and concentration of administrative au- thority in a city manager appointed by and responsi- ble to the council. In order to appraise the results of this new form of government, which was first introduced in 1908, the authors compared politics and administration, and especially administradve methods, as practiced in each of the selected cities before and after adoption of the plan. They report general governmental improvements and abundant evidence that "graft and waste were reduced, that municipal personnel and methods were made more efficient, and that, therefore, unit costs necessarily were reduced." 6217. Wager, Paul W., ed. County government across the Nation. Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina Press, 1950. 817 p. illus. Bibliography: p. [809J-816. 50-10780 JS411.W3 A volume of case studies of sample counties, one CONSTITUTION AND GOVERNMENT / 997 in each of the 48 States. In the selection of counties for analysis, extremes such as metropolitan counties and sparsely settled desert counties have been ex- cluded. The studies, 10 of which were written by the editor and most of the others by his colleagues or former students, are presented in four regional groupings — New England, Eastern and North- Central, Southern, and Western States — each pre- ceded by an introduction. These papers describe the structure of the county government, its func- tions, and the relationships between local and State officials, and tabulate the county revenues and expenditures. Each New England study consists principally of an analysis of a town in the sample county. A general introduction by the editor sets forth some facts, trends, and analyses concerning the primarily administrative, fiscal, and supervisory powers of the county. Professor Wager finds that the creation of collateral boards for the supervision of roads, welfare, elections, libraries, hospitals, and other matters is sapping the powers of the central governing body of the county. He recommends that the counties receive more legislative power, a sub- stantial grant of police power, the grant of zoning authority, and the provision for each of a county executive or chief administrator. 6218. Zink, Harold. United States, millan, 1948. 637 p, Government of cities in the Rev. ed. New York, Mac- 49-7040 JS331.Z5 1948 "Selected bibliography" at end of chapters. This textbook, originally published in 1939, em- phasizes a number of factors in American munici- pal government which came to the fore during the 1930's, among them the enlarged role of the Fed- eral government in city affairs, the problem of large-scale public relief, a notable expansion of su- pervised recreation, changed goals in city planning, improvement in public personnel practices, prog- ress in police administration, and increased concern for public housing. On the negative side are stressed the difficulties of obtaining adequate mu- nicipal revenues, the influence of pressure groups upon city government, and the very vigorous part played in it by political organizations and machines. Also discussed are the services rendered to their inhabitants by the cities, the elaborate and varied structures devised for the performance of these services, and the legal, administrative, and finan- cial status of the cities in relation to the states and to the nation. In a concluding section Professor Zink considers the problems of improving the city through housing programs, zoning and other land- use controls, studies of trends in population and industry, and plans for thoroughfares, parks, recre- ation facilities, public buildings, sewage disposal, water supply, and public works programs. He con- siders, too, the problem of creating popular demand for better city government. XXX Law and Justice A. History: General 6219-6236 B. History: The Supreme Court 6237-6260 C. General Views 6261-6270 D. Digests of American Law 6271-6279 E. Courts and fudges 6280-6293 F. The Judicial Process 6294-6309 G. Administrative Law 63 10-63 16 H. Lawyers and the Legal Profession 6317-6332 ft THE PREVIOUS CHAPTER contains sections on constitutional law, on the civil liber- ties and rights which in America largely depend on constitutional guarantees, and on Congress, the national legislature. Various aspects of crime, police administration, and cor- rection are included in the final section of Chapter XV on Society. The other major aspects of law and justice are dealt with here. Section B on the history of the Supreme Court is awk- wardly separated from the previous chapter's Section C, on the constitutional law of which the Court is the supreme exponent, but it would be quite as awkwardly separated from Section E here, which is concerned with all the other American courts, of whose system the Supreme Court forms the apex. Law is a discipline and a profession. The com- mon law and the bar have descended in an unbroken line from medieval England, gradually adapting themselves to the changes of a society that keeps accelerating its rate of change. Lawyers have re- tained a strong sense of fraternity and a predomi- nately conservative outlook. Legal education has settled into a vocational pattern, with the great object of getting the aspirant over the hurdle of the bar examinations. Legal literature is, for the most part, produced for the practical use of the profes- sion and issued by specialized publishers. The more philosophical thinkers and writers of the legal profession have been conscious of the relative isola- tion of their sphere from the main stream of Ameri- can thought, and have made valiant efforts to lessen it. A number of the works listed below deplore the ignorance and the distrust which even well-edu- cated Americans may display concerning the sub- 998 stance and procedures of the law. The movement of legal reform, which has some noteworthy achieve- ments to its credit but remains an unfinished task, has chiefly aimed at simpler, more lucid, and more easily discoverable laws, streamlined and human- ized procedures, and greater social responsibility throughout the legal profession. There are few realms in which the interdisciplinary approach char- acteristic of American Studies has more to offer, to insiders and outsiders alike. The lay American needs to have a better knowledge of the history, the forms, and the processes of the law, and the Ameri- can lawyer needs to relate his specialty to the adja- cent fields of life and learning, to the mutual benefit of both. American legal history offers peculiar difficulties because of the Federal structure of our government; each of the sovereign states has its own system of courts and body of statute law, with peculiarities developed at various times and for various reasons, and in Louisiana and the Southwest there are ele- ments quite outside the common law tradition. It is the more regrettable that neither schools of law LAW AND JUSTICE / 999 nor graduate schools of history have taken up the writing of American legal history in any systematic or intensive manner. The lack of large-scale and definitive work, as well as of the many local studies upon which it must be based, is often deplored, but some smaller studies of real value have been done; a substantial sample occupies Section A. The his- tory of the Supreme Court has been best advanced on the biographical side; the larger narratives of Warren and Haines (nos. 6260, 6240) will eventu- ally be overshadowed by the multivolumed work now in preparation through the Oliver Wendell Holmes Devise. The remaining six sections are largely attempts to select from the literature writ- ten by and for the profession those volumes which will be most intelligible and most rewarding to the general reader. A few, to be sure, have been writ- ten by lawyers for the general public; and another few are by laymen of various descriptions, auda- ciously invading the legal preserve with results pe- culiarly favorable to the lay reader — such is Cover- ing the Courts (no. 6288), by a professor of journal- ism. The digests in Section D represent an older form of legal textbook, which in most classes has been replaced by the ubiquitous casebook, of value only to the trainee. These expositions aim at a logi- cal arrangement of concepts and principles, and while they are abstract and difficult enough, a selec- tion has been included in order to direct lay inquir- ers to statements of American substantive law in sev- eral important fields. This, in general, is the law, with variations from State to State. It goes with- out saying that they will not enable anyone to set up as his own attorney. Sections E and F are not mutually exclusive, and both include critical, diag- nostic, and reformative titles as well as descriptive ones. The judges' own stories in E (nos. 6284, 6291), like the lawyers' in Section H (nos. 6322, 6324), are a rare but rewarding form of literature. G on administrative law deals with one of the newest fields, brought into being by the develop- ment of the regulatory commissions since 1887; their relationship to the courts of law remains its crucial question, about which there continues a wide range of opinion. The training, organization, practice, and obligations of lawyers, often discussed in a critical spirit, are the subjects of the final section. A. History: General 6219. Aumann, Francis R. The changing Ameri- can system: some selected phases. Colum- bus [Ohio State University Press] 1940. 281 p. ([Ohio. State University. Contributions in his- tory and political science, no. 16]) 40-34949 Law Bibliography: p. [237] -269. Professor Aumann's survey of "the main-trav- elled roads" is not intended for specialists in Ameri- can legal history, but for "members of the bar, students of political science, and members of the general public who are interested in the American legal system in a more general way." The preface thus summarizes its contents: "The plan of pro- cedure followed involves a brief consideration of some of the problems of colonial justice, including the several views as to the nature and extent of com- mon law reception in the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries; the effect of the War of Revolution and reconstruction upon the legal system; the interest in the civil law and its influence in the post-war period; the upthrust of the common law system in the formative period of American life and its expan- sion into the newly formed commonwealths of the nation, including a supplementary survey of early court organizations and procedures; the role of legal education, etc. Also involved is a brief analysis of the course of American legal development in the period of industrial growth which intervened be- tween the Civil War and the turn of the century, including a consideration of some of the changing concepts and contents of American law brought about by the conversion of a simple, agricultural society into a complicated industrial order. Fol- lowing this excursion into the period of legal ma- turity, attention is turned to the changing patterns that appear in the legal order during the first third of the twentieth century." 6220. Gard, Wayne. Frontier justice. Norman, University of Oklahoma Press, 1949. 324 p. illus. 49-1051 1 F591.G215 Bibliography: p. 291-308. "This book is an informal study of the rise of order and law west of the Mississippi, where order often came before law. With abundant use of illus- trative incidents and a minimum of abstract dis- cussion, it traces the progress made from the chaotic, almost anarchic relations between many pioneers and the Indians to a state of peaceful settlement." Most of the episodes covered fall within the three decades following the Civil War, but some inci- dents go back to the 1830's, and the sheep raids of Colorado went on as late as 192 1. The presenta- tion is neither chronological nor geographical, but 1000 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES loosely topical, with sections entitled "Vengeance" (feuding in Texas, Arizona, and elsewhere) "War on the Ranges," "Vigilantes" (in Montana and several prairie communities as well as in Califor- nia), and "Arms of the Law" (frontier marshals, sheriffs, and judges — notably Judge Isaac C. Parker of Indian Territory, who sentenced 172 malefactors to be hanged, as 88 of them actually were). 6221. Goebel, Julius, Jr., and Thomas Raymond Naughton. Law enforcement in Colonial New York; a study in criminal procedure (1664- 1776). New York, Commonwealth Fund, 1944. xxxix, 867 p. (Publications of the Foundation for Research in Legal History, Columbia University School of Law) 44-5295 Law "Sources": p. [76^-jjo. Colonial legal history on a new and grand scale, based on the dispersed and incomplete records of the provincial courts general and local, as well as upon personal papers and all relevant printed sources. The authors are concerned to emphasize the early reception of English law in the conquered Dutch province, and divide it into two stages: the first, 1664-83, when "the Duke of York's lieuten- ants with great skill promoted as the provincial law the little they knew of English local administra- tion"; and the second, 1684-1776, at the outset of which "the practices and forms of the English cen- tral courts came into use." Thereafter the process became one of "selective reproduction of English legal institutions at large." Following the intro- duction the massive text is in two parts, the first (to p. 324) concerned with "Jurisdiction," the sec- ond with "Practice." The chapters of the latter are on "Prosecution," "Process," "Recognizances," "Trial" (two), and "Final Proceedings" such as punishments, fees, and pardon. Appendixes print typical commissions, bills of costs, and briefs. In concluding the authors reaffirm their rejection of the notion that "our American law begins in 1783." 6222. Holmes, Oliver Wendell. The common law. 32d printing. Boston, Little, Brown, 1938. xvi, 422 p. 39 _I 9 I 39 Law 6223. The National law library, v. 1. The his- tory and system of the common law, by Ros- coe Pound. New York, P. F. Collier, 1939. 347 p. 39-8999 Law Bibliography: p. 309-316. Nearly 60 years separate these two expositions of the Anglo-American common law by two of the most eminent jurists that America has produced. Justice Holmes' classic originated in a series of lec- tures which he was invited to deliver at the Lowell Institute in Boston, and first appeared in 1881. His point of departure was the dual nature of the law at any given time; some of it, especially its form and machinery, is an inheritance from the past, while the rest, especially the substance, depends upon cur- rent theories of legislation and corresponds with what is understood to be convenient. On this basis the author considered early forms of liability, the criminal law, torts, the bailee, possession and owner- ship, contract, and successions. Here we may re- gret that the author omitted from the book his 12th lecture, which summarized the foregoing n. Dean Pound's volume is wider in scope and more severely logical in outline. He points out how unfortunate it has been, in America where law and polity are in- extricably joined, that Blackstone and Kent have had no successors in expounding the law for the citizen. His governing concept is that "law is ex- perience developed by reason and reason tested by experience." He begins by discussing fundamental legal conceptions, and by sketching the history of the common law and of the institutions by which it lived. The source and forms of law are described, as are the reception and forms of the common law in America. A chapter on the organizadon and jurisdiction of courts is followed by descriptions of the common-law actions, and of procedure at law and in equity. Substantive law is digested under the headings of right, persons, acts, obligations, and property. "What is characteristic of the common- law system and gives it continuity in time and unity in space, is a taught tradition of ideas and doctrines and technique . . . Above all, it is a tradition shaped in its beginnings as a quest for reconciling authority with reason, imposed rule with customs of human conduct, and so the abstract universal with the concrete particular." 6224. Horton, John Theodore. James Kent, a study in conservatism, 1 763-1 847. New York, Appleton-Century, 1939. 354 p. 39-13988 Law At head of tide: The American Historical As- sociation. Bibliography: p. 327-341. There were able lawyers in America before Kent, but he was the first whose distinction and career de- rived from the superiority of his learning in the law. On graduating from Yale, he read law in the office of Egbert Benson, attorney general of New York, and practiced at Poughkeepsie and later in New York City, at first with indifferent success. But in 1793 he became the first professor of law at Columbia College, and the quality of his lectures led to his appointment to the Supreme Court of New York in 1798. He dominated the court even before his promotion to Chief Justice in 1804 and converted it to the practice of written opinions en- LAW AND JUSTICE / 1001 abling proper reporting. In 1814 he became the highest judicial officer of the State, the chancellor, and at once "the fabric of American equity began to rise" on the basis of a greater respect for prec- edents and written decisions properly reported. A State law required the retirement of judges (with- out pension) at the age of 60; and the Democratic Party in the State was glad to see its most eminent jurist step down in the fullness of his powers. The indignity turned into a public and private benefit: Kent became a lawyer's lawyer and resumed his lectures at Columbia, published as the famous Com- mentaries on American Law (no. 6277), from which he derived $5,000 every year until his death. Kent, "laying aside the robe of a local judge, became doc- tor of laws to the whole republic." 6225. Hurst, Willard. The growth of American law: the law makers. Boston, Little, Brown, 1950. 502 p. 50-6788 Law "Bibliographical notes": p. [45i]~472. An introduction to the legal history of the United States whose form arises from the author's convic- tion that our legal institutions have been relatively tough and stable, while substantive law has been rather the creature of events, changing with rapid social and economic change. Mr. Hurst therefore discusses, with emphasis on their functions, five agencies of lawmaking in the order in which they emerged into leadership in successive periods of our history: the legislature, the courts, the constitution makers (in which the author includes legislative proposals and the initiative as well as constitutional conventions), the bar, and the executive. The bur- den of Mr. Hurst's clearly written essays is that our legal agencies have lost prestige to the degree that they have failed to keep the public interest in the forefront of their objectives. Urban courts have made dilatory and insufficient provision for the small claimant and the poor debtor, and for "the kind of mass social regulation that the traffic law exemplified." The bar, which gets the bulk of its business from the wealthiest 13 percent of the popu- lation, has since 1870 largely abdicated its independ- ence and its leadership. In an economy wherein special interests behave like billiard balls on a table, only the chief executive, in state and nation, is looked to for his independence and representation of the general interest. 6226. Langeluttig, Albert G. The Department of Justice of the United States. Baltimore, Johns Hopkins Press, 1927. xvi, 318 p. ([Brookings Institution] Institute for Government Research. Studies in administration, [no. 15]) 27-11623 JK873.L3 1927; Law Bibliography: p. 262-276. 6227. Cummings, Homer S., and Carl McFarland. Federal justice; chapters in the history of justice and the Federal executive. New York, Mac- millan, 1937. 576 p. illus. 37~364 JK873.C8 "Bibliographical note": p. 551-558. Dr. Langeluttig's dissertation traces the rise and development of the Department of Justice, the cen- tral agency belatedly created by the national gov- ernment for the enforcement of the law for which it is responsible. One section of his study discusses the problems of the administration of the Federal law, and special attention is given to the very im- portant matter of the Department's relations to the other law enforcement agencies of the Federal Gov- ernment. Of broader scope is Cummings' (Attor- ney General, 1933-39) and McFarland's review of the administration of justice by the Federal Govern- ment. The development of the office of Attorney General as a policymaking, advisory, and super- visory governmental post is traced from its incep- tion in 1789. In 1870, when the Department of Justice was finally established, these functions were greatly expanded, and this expansion to meet ex- isting problems engendered new ones. Separate chapters of this work are devoted to the Depart- ment's role in various fields of activity, such as labor relations and the conduct of business, in which the Federal Government has exerted its regulatory ca- pacity. 6228. Levy, Leonard W. The law of the Com- monwealth and Chief Justice Shaw. Cam- bridge, Harvard University Press, 1957. 383 p. 57-6350 Law Bibliography: p. [343 j-357. A critical study of the work of Lemuel Shaw (1781-1861), chief justice of the Supreme Judicial Court of Massachusetts from 1830 to i860. The author estimates that no other State judge through his opinions alone had so great an influence on the course of American law, and he believes that Shaw's chief contribution was his domestication of the English common law. Shaw preserved its conti- nuity with what was worthwhile in the past, and at the same time accommodated it to the ideals and necessities of 19th-century American life. Using some of Shaw's opinions, which numbered approxi- mately 2,200, as points of departure and focus, the author has produced a series of chapters on Ameri- can legal history. Some of these are concerned with the response of the law to great social issues, others with the accommodations in the law necessitated by changes in American industrial life, and still others with the growth of important doctrines of American law. 1002 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 6229. Morris, Richard B. Fair trial; fourteen who stood accused, from Anne Hutchinson to Alger Hiss. New York, Knopf, 1952. xv, 494 p. 52-6423 Law "Bibliographical notes": p. 479-494. A review of 14 notable American criminal trials which assesses their fairness. By later Anglo-Ameri- can standards of fair trial, the author thinks, the ac- cused in the Colonial cases, Anne Hutchinson, Peter Zenger, and Captain William Kidd, were not afforded fair trials; but trials conducted since 1789 have, in form if not in substance, conformed more closely to present notions of fair trial procedure. The three 20th-century cases included (the Triangle Fire Case, the Hall-Mills Case, and the Hiss Case) expose, Professor Morris believes, glaring deficien- cies in the conduct and procedure of American crim- inal trials, which persist despite the safeguards writ- ten into the Federal and State constitutions and the codes of criminal procedure. Among the deficien- cies listed are: the character of spordng events or circus performances that trials too often assume; the failure of juries to be free from prejudice and possessed of the emotional and intellectual discipline essential for a critical examination of evidence; the perpetuation of archaic rules of evidence; the char- acter of the bench itself; and the deterioration of the criminal bar. 6230. Morris, Richard B. Studies in the history of American law, with special reference to the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries. New York, Columbia University Press, 1930. 285 p. (Colum- bia University. Faculty of Political Science. Stud- ies in history, economics and public law, no. 316) 30-14173 H31.C7, no. 316; Law "Bibliographical essay": p. 259-273. In his first chapter Professor Morris undertakes "to synthesize and interpret the main characteristics of the development of American law in the seven- teenth and eighteenth centuries." Fie notes the sev- eral influences which led during the 17th century to widespread innovations, in particular procedural reforms making legal redress easier, faster, and less expensive; and the conservative reaction of the 18th which brought in many common-law practices and made for the increasing importance of the profes- sional lawyer. The three remaining chapters dis- cuss "representative legal quesdons which are di- rectly associated with early American social, eco- nomic, and intellectual conditions." "Colonial Laws Governing the Distribution and Alienation of Land" discusses, in part, the aristocratic practices of primogeniture and entailed estates as transplanted to America. "Women's Rights in Early American Law" shows that many of the common-law disa- bilities of married women were sloughed off in the Colonies. "Responsibility for Tortious Acts" shows many small divergences from common-law doc- trines emerging in American agrarian society, lead- ing Dr. Morris to speak of "the refreshing originality which characterized our legal engineering," and to affirm that a later day's "ignorance of the trail which had been blazed by the seventeenth-century pioneers hampered the progress of American law." 623 1 . Pound, Roscoe. The formative era of Ameri- can law. New York, P. Smith, 1950, c 1938. 188 p. 50-50803 Law "Four lectures . . . delivered at the Law School of Tulane University on die occasion of the centen- nial of the death of Edward Livingston, October 2 7-3°> IQ 3 6 -" Dean Pound's formative era extended from inde- pendence to the Civil War, and since most of the spade work in local legal history remained to be done (as indeed it still does) he aimed only "to trace the working of the juristic theory which was chiefly operative, and to outline the development and achievements of the chief agencies of legal develop- ments in that era." The task of this era, in the face of difficulties caused by the hostility to English law, a tendency to deprofessionalize the lawyer, and "a veritable cult of local law," he thus defined: "to work out from our inherited legal materials a gen- eral body of law for what was to be a politically and economically unified land." Within the era, he says, fell the work of six of the ten foremost judges in American judicial history: Marshall, Kent, Story, J. B. Gibson of Pennsylvania, Shaw, and Thomas Ruffin of North Carolina. Traditionalists or in- novators, the lawyers, judges, and teachers of this era "found their creating and organizing idea in the theory of natural law." The succeeding three lectures trace the operation of this idea in legisla- tion, in judicial decision, and in doctrinal writing. A taught tradition became established, and "the common-law technique of finding the grounds of decision in reported judicial experience became the decisive agency of law making." In the latter part of each lecture Dean Pound applied the ideas he had just discussed to the legal problems of his own day. 6232. Russell, Elmer Beecher. The review of American Colonial legislation by the King in Council. New York, Columbia University, 1915. 227 p. (Columbia University. Faculty of Polit- ical Science. Studies in history, economics and public law, v. 64, no. 2; whole no. 155) 15-15118 JK57.P7R8 H31.C7, v. 64, no. 2 "The power exercised by the English Privy Coun- cil, of annulling the enactments of the royal colonies, afforded the home government an important instru- LAW AND JUSTICE / IOO3 ment of administrative control. It constituted a necessary check upon the only branch of the colonial governments which was responsive to popular senti- ment, and gave the English executive a final word in regard to the minutest details of local adminis- tration in the dominions." The present dissertation, written under the guidance of Herbert L. Osgood (nos. 3220 and 3221), is confined to the 13 mainland Colonies, and largely to the period from 1696 to the Revolution, when the Board of Trade was charged with the examination of Colonial acts and made recommendations to the Privy Council. The author devotes one chapter to the period from 1660 to 1696, when the Council's power of review was rather sporadically exercised; two to the details of the procedure employed after 1696; and four to the policies pursued in review, such as insistence upon conformity to English law and the repulse of en- croachments upon the prerogative. From 1691 the royal and proprietary Colonies submitted some 8,563 acts, of which 469, or 5.5 percent, were dis- allowed by the Privy Council. The process was unpopular with the colonists, but Dr. Russell ob- serves that it "constituted at once a precedent and a preparation for the power of judicial annulment upon constitutional grounds now exercised by the state and federal courts in the United States." 6233. Sayre, Paul L. The life of Roscoe Pound. Iowa City, College of Law Committee, State University of Iowa, 1948. 412 p. illus. 48-1287 Law Botanist, practicing lawyer, judge, teacher, legal historian, and legal philosopher: Roscoe Pound is or has been all of these. The author, who was one of Dean Pound's graduate students, presents an admiring account of his life and work from his birth at Lincoln, Nebraska, in 1870 until his de- parture for Nanking, China, in 1947 to serve as adviser to the Ministry of Justice there. Particular attention is given to Dr. Pound's service to his native State, his life in Chicago, his service as dean of the Harvard Law School for 20 years, his work for the legal profession through the American Bar Associa- tion, his furtherance of particular projects of law reform, and his philosophy of the law. 6234. Smith, Joseph H. Appeals to the Privy Council from the American plantations. With an introductory essay by Julius Goebel, Jr. New York, Columbia University Press, 1950. lxi, 770 p. (A publication of the Foundation for Re- search in Legal History, Columbia University Law School) 50-7240 Law "Sources": p. [687]— 696. "Table of cases": p. [6991-709. A massive study which aims "to integrate the various records in the archives on this side of the Adantic with the Privy Council records in London" in order "to describe and evaluate at length the Privy Council of England as a judicial body ex- ercising appellate jurisdiction over the courts of the various American plantations" from 1679, when the Lords Committee of Trade and Plantations undertook "a somewhat uneven regulation of the appellate process," to the Peace of Paris in 1783. From 1696, when the appeals were entered in the Council Register, 795 appeals from the American plantations were heard; of these 157 were affirmed, 336 reversed or substantially altered, and 68 dis- missed for nonprosecution. The cases of the West India Colonies are considered equally with those of the mainland Colonies, as their contemporary im- portance warrants. The origin of the Council's appellate jurisdiction is traced back to the Channel Islands of Guernsey and Jersey, and the precedents which they provide are treated at some length. The author finds it necessary to "employ technical lan- guage, much of it concerned with problems of pro- cedural, rather than substantive, law." There are chapters on "The Setding of Jurisdiction," "The Regulation of Appeals," "Procedure at the Council Board," and "The Scope of Appellate Review." Dr. Smith goes into the elements of judicial and legisla- tive review involved, but finds that the whole matter remained clouded and vague, since no clear doctrine was ever asserted or evolved concerning "the basic factors — the crown's powers of control over colonial legislation, and the status of this legislation in rela- tion to the English law." 6235. Warren, Charles. Bankruptcy in United States history. Cambridge, Harvard Uni- versity Press, 1935. 195 p. 36-424 HG3766.W35 This book, which originated in lectures delivered on the Julius Rosenthal Foundation at the Law School of Northwestern University, discusses the legislative attempts to adjust the relation between debtor and creditor, which have been increasingly characteristic of the great economic depressions un- dergone by the United States. Congressional de- bates on bankruptcy are used by the author as the basis of his study of the expanding interpretation of the bankruptcy clause of the Constitution. Three chronological periods are distinguished: a period of the creditor, 1 789-1 827, during which time relief was demanded only in the interest of the creditors; a period of the debter, 1827-61, in which relief was demanded only in the interest of the debtors; and a period of national interest, 1861-1935, when bank- ruptcy laws came to be regarded as matters to be determined by the public interest and the restora- tion of national economic health. 1004 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 6236. Warren, Charles. A history of the American bar. Boston, Little, Brown, 191 1. 586 p. 1 1-29086 Law Contains bibliographies. A general survey of law and lawyers down to i860, part one of which is concerned with legal conditions in each of the American Colonies dur- ing the 17th and 18th centuries. Among the as- pects covered are the status of the common law as applied by the courts, methods of appointment and the composition of the courts, the leading lawyers, legislation regarding the legal profession, prob- lems of legal education, and contemporaneous legal conditions in the mother country. The sec- ond part describes the growth of the American bar from the establishment of the U.S. Supreme Court to the opening of the Civil War. Following on dis- cussions of the Court itself and of the legal pro- fession, three chapters are concerned with what the author terms "the four great factors in the develop- ment of the Bar": the rise of corporation and of railroad law between 1830 and i860; the expansion of the common law to meet changing economic and social conditions between 18 15 and i860; and the powerful movement for codification between 1820 and i860. B. History: The Supreme Court 6237. Beveridge, Albert J. The life of John Mar- shall. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1919. 4 v. illus. 33-29106 E302.6.M4B582; Law "Works" cited at end of each volume. Contents. — 1. Frontiersman, soldier, lawmaker, 1 755-1 788. — 2. Politician, diplomatist, statesman, 1789-1801. — 3. Conflict and construction, 1800- 1815. — 4. The building of the nation, 1815-1835. 6238. Jones, William Melville, ed. Chief Justice John Marshall; a reappraisal. Ithaca, N.Y., Published for College of William and Mary [by] Cornell University Press, 1956. xviii, 195 p. 56-3619 Law Beveridge's Marshall is a detailed study of the world and life of the most noted of the early Chief Justices of the Supreme Court, who assumed that post in 1 80 1 and held it until his death 34 years later. Perhaps the greatest contribution made by Marshall (1755-1835) to the constitutional develop- ment of the United States was the consolidation of an independent judiciary through an active use of the principle of judicial review, but this was only one of the many contributions which are here ana- lyzed in great detail. It is with Marshall's work as Chief Justice that the author is chiefly concerned, but to contribute to the understanding of Mar- shall's greatest opinions much space has been al- located to discussions of the subject's experience as an inhabitant of frontier Virginia, soldier, legislator, lawyer, politician, diplomat, and statesman, and to the history of his period, the actions and opinions of those about him, the state of the nation, the condition of the people, and the tendency of the popular thought of the era. The partisanship of Senator Beveridge is self-evident: Marshall is glori- fied while others, such as Thomas Jefferson, are relegated to the ranks of the sinners. Chief Justice John Marshall; a Reappraisal is largely composed of papers presented by various scholars at a con- ference held at the College of William and Mary (Williamsburg, Va.) in 1955 as one of the events of the Marshall Bicentennial Program. A foreword by Chief Justice Earl Warren and an introduction by Professor Carl B. Swisher are followed by dis- cussions of Marshall in relation to the political and professional life of his times, the significance of his thought as measured by present-day standards, and his contributions to judicial review and to American law in general. 6239. Ewing, Cortez A. M. The Judges of the Supreme Court, 1789-1937; a study of their qualifications. Minneapolis, University of Minne- sota Press, 1938. 124 p. 38-28601 Law A statistical treatment of information concern- ing the 75 men who sat on the Supreme Court dur- ing the period covered. Graphs and statistical ta- bles are used to aid in this analysis of the appoint- ments, the geographical ties, the age at appoint- ment, and the qualifications of education and prior public service of the Justices. Along with many interesting single facts, a few tendencies emerge. The average age of the Justices at appointment rose by a full 10 years over the whole period. Once many Justices served without benefit of college degrees; all recent appointees have them. The per- centage of Justices from the South has steadily de- creased since 1789. 6240. Haines, Charles G. The role of the Su- preme Court in American government and politics. Berkeley, University of California Press, 1944-57. 2 v. 57-10498 Law Volume 2 by Charles Grove Haines and Foster H. Sherwood. LAW AND JUSTICE / IOO5 Contents. — [1] 1789-1835. — [2] 1835-1864. Professor Haines of the University of California at Los Angeles died in 1948, leaving only three chapters of his second volume in completed form. It was finished by one who had been his student, research assistant, and colleague, but it only reaches 1864 instead of 1885, as Haines had intended. Haines embarked on a new history of the Court because he thought that the extent to which it and its Judges "have participated in and have influenced the political and partisan activities of the time" was insufficiently explored; and because the conserva- tive and nationalist viewpoints had been too fre- quendy adopted, to be neglect of "the liberal and democratic approach," and the views of critics of the Court. The Court had been the object of per- sistent attacks for more than a decade when Jack- son's election seemed to herald a new day. "But it was not until the end of his second administra- tion that Jackson was able to appoint justices who could change the current of federal judicial deci- sions. And the change then inaugurated was far from as significant and far-reaching as Democratic leaders anticipated." Volume 2, in fact, is largely a demonstration of continuity between the Marshall Court and the Taney Court. On the whole, "the federal judicial power was more firmly established and far broader in extent at the end of the Taney period than at the beginning." 6241. Howe, Mark De Wolfe. Justice Oliver Wendell Holmes, v. 1. The shaping years, 1841-1870. Cambridge, Belknap Press of Harvard University Press, 1957. 330 p. illus. 57-6348 Law 6242. Holmes, Oliver Wendell. The mind and faith of Justice Holmes; his speeches, essays, letters and judicial opinions, selected and edited with introduction and commentary by Max Lerner. Boston, Little, Brown, 1943. l, 474 p. 43-6772 Law "Note on the Holmes literature": [452]-46o. Following a decade and a half of writing, prac- ticing, and teaching, Oliver Wendell Holmes (1841-1935), son of a Bostonian poet, essayist, and physician of the same name, was appointed a jus- tice of the Supreme Court of Massachusetts in 1882; 20 years later he went to the Supreme Court of the United States, from which he did not retire until 1932. During his 50 years on the State and Federal benches, Holmes was noted for writing opinions in a forceful and epigrammatic style. He was called a legal technician, a humanistic thinker, and a great human figure. All of these he was. Professor Howe's volume is the first of several in a projected biography. The years 1841-70 were, in the author's opinion, the prologue to Holmes' life of achievement; in them he underwent the influ- ences which molded his character and oudook whether found in the circle of his family and friends, on the batdefield of Antietam, or at mid- century Harvard. With Holmes opening his own law office, assuming the coeditorship of the Amer- ican Law Review, becoming university lecturer on constitutional law in Harvard College, and begin- ning work on his edition of Kent's Commentaries (no. 6277), this volume ends. The Mind and Faith of Justice Holmes is an attempt, in the edi- tor's words, "to give a rounded portrait of the mind and faith of one who was perhaps the most complete personality in the history of American thought." Each group of selections is prefaced by a note presenting background information. 6243. Hughes, Charles Evans. The Supreme Court of the United States, its foundation, methods and achievements; an interpretation. Gar- den City, N.Y., Garden City Pub. Co., 1936. 269 p. (Columbia University lectures. George Blu- menthal Foundation) 37-1208 JK1561.H8 1936 Hughes' six lectures were delivered in 1927, n years after his resignation as Associate Justice and 3 years before his return to the Court as Chief Jus- tice. They have, ever since their original publica- tion by the Columbia University Press in 1928, been regarded as an admirable concise treatment of their subject. The eminent jurist disclaimed any intention of competing with Warren's history of the Court or with treatises on constitutional law; he aimed only "to assist those, who are not aiming to become legal scholars, to understand something of its origin, of the principles that govern it, of its methods and of the important results of its works." In an outstanding chapter on "The Court at Work," he says that the Judges bear "the heaviest burden of severe and continuous intellectual work that our country knows." "Liberty, Property and Social Justice" is the title borne by the two concluding lectures; at the end he finds the Court to be the in- dispensable guardian of all three. "The ends of so- cial justice are achieved through a process by which every step is examined in the light of the principles which are our inheritance as a free people." 6244. King, Willard L. Melville Weston Fuller, Chief Justice of the United States, 1888- 1910. New York, Macmillan, 1950. 394 p. illus. 50-8032 Law Bibliography: p. 343-347. Born in Augusta, Maine, Fuller (1833-19 10) re- moved to Chicago in 1856, a year after being ad- mitted to the Maine bar. The years preceding his appointment to the Chief Justiceship of the United I006 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES States were occupied by his very active and general law practice, and by his conspicuous role in the affairs of the Democratic Party. Possessed of quiet humor, courage, a sense of nonpartisanship, and a wide range of scholarship, together with kindliness, human sympathy, and modesty, Fuller's most remarkable abilities lay in managing the busi- ness of the Supreme Court. The author of this finely drawn portrait concludes that it was Fuller's character rather than his intellect which captured for him the respect and confidence of the legal profession and of the public. He was an embodi- ment of the dignity of the Supreme Court. 6245. Klinkhamer, Marie Carolyn, Sister. Ed- ward Douglas White, Chief Justice of the United States. Washington, Catholic University of America Press, 1943. 308 p. A 44-427 Law Bibliography: p. 296-306. The second Southern Roman Catholic appointed to preside over the Supreme Court, and the first Associate Justice to be elevated to the Chief Jus- ticeship, White ( 1 845-1921) was early active on the bench and in the politics of his native Louisiana. (His middle name is usually spelled Douglass.) In 1891 he took his seat in the United States Senate, and three years later was appointed to the Supreme Court by President Cleveland. He remained upon that bench for 27 years, after 16 of which he was raised to the Chief Justiceship by President Taft, in 1910. The author declares that White's great- est contributions while on the High Court were made in the field of administrative law, but his opinions in the fields of procedure, contracts, in- terstate commerce, taxation, and due process are also subjected to analysis. The study of his deci- sions is preceded by a biographical essay. The appendixes contain tables of cases in the Louisiana and United States reports in which White's opin- ions are recorded; also given are the names of the Justices who concurred with him or dissented. 6246. Mason, Alpheus Thomas. Brandeis, a free man's life. New York, Viking Press, 1946. 713 p. illus. 46-25268 JK1519.B7M3 Law 6247. Brandeis, Louis Dembitz. The social and economic views of Mr. Justice Brandeis, col- lected with introductory notes by Alfred Lief. With a foreword by Charles A. Beard. New York, Vanguard Press, 1930. xxi, 419 p. 30-30043 Law 6248. Brandeis, Louis Dembitz. The unpublished opinions of Mr. Justice Brandeis; the Su- preme Court at work, by Alexander M. Bickel. With an introd. by Paul A. Freund. Cambridge, Belknap Press of Harvard University Press, 1957. xxi, 278 p. illus. 57-9069 Law Brandeis (1856-1941), the son of Bohemian Jew- ish parents who came to the United States in the ranks of the "Forty-eighters," studied with dis- tinction at Harvard Law School, and was soon en- gaged in a varied and lucrative law practice in Boston. His legal interests were as wide in scope as his extra-legal ones. Labor, trusts, railroads, in- surance, finance, and even conservation all occupied him in his role as counsel and investigator. He achieved fame as a reformer bent on ameliorating the evils and injustices which had developed with industrial capitalism. President Wilson's nomina- tion of Brandeis for the Supreme Court in 19 16 precipitated a long and bitter wrangle, but even- tually, with no little aid from Wilson himself, the Senate's confirmation was forthcoming. From then until his retirement in 1939 Brandeis' opinions reg- ularly expressed his belief in the value of free in- stitutions and democratic processes, which provided the best means of enhancing the dignity and poten- tialities of the individual. The greater portion of Mr. Mason's biography is concerned with Brandeis' pre-Court career and portrays a great advocate en- gaged in argument on behalf of what he conceived to be the basic principles of human freedom. The Social and Economic Views of Mr. Justice Brandeis is a collection of his opinions, together with a few of his briefs, speeches, and articles, arranged under the categories of labor problems, regulation of busi- ness, public utility economics, guarantees of free- dom, prohibition and taxation, and State and na- tion. Derived from Brandeis' private papers relating to his service on the Supreme Court, The Unpublished Opinions of Mr. Justice Brandeis, n in all, comprise, with Mr. Bickel's essays constructed from information found in the papers, an exposi- tion of the working of Brandeis' mind, and of the processes by which judicial judgments are arrived at. 6249. Mason, Alpheus Thomas. Harlan Fiske Stone: pillar of the law. New York, Viking Press, 1956. 914 p. illus. 56-10404 Law "Note on Stone's legal writings": p. 888-891. 6250. Konefsky, Samuel Joseph. Chief Justice Stone and the Supreme Court. With a pref- atory note by Charles A. Beard. New York, Mac- millan, 1945. xxvi, 290 p. A 46-501 JK1519.S8K6 1945; Law Professor Mason's book is a detailed and schol- arly account of the life and character of the only man who occupied consecutively every seat on the bench of the U. S. Supreme Court. Appointed to the Court in 1925, Stone (1872-1946) was pro- LAW AND JUSTICE / IOO7 moted to Chief Justice in 1941. Emphasis is placed upon Stone's career on the Court, and upon the in- ner workings of that tribunal. Born in the New Hampshire hills, the late Chief Justice throughout his life took each task as it came to him, whether as teacher, attorney, government official, or judge, and performed it thoroughly and capably. This quality, together with his balance and dignity, brought him advancement despite his lack of a spectacular personality. "Respect for facts, unre- mitting intellectual effort in the face of social per- plexities, gave him an understanding that on oc- casion led to what observers identified as the liberal position. The accolade was unwanted and not wholly deserved ... By tempering predilection with restraint and craftsmanship, he made the per- sonal preference for social policy but one factor in his quest for judgment . . . He became the states- man without ceasing to be the lawyer." Dr. Ko- nefsky's Columbia University dissertation concen- trates upon Stone's contributions to constitutional doctrine and his conception of the judicial function, against a background of the larger trends of con- stitutional development and the conditions which gave rise to the controversies brought before the Supreme Court from 1925 to 1943. Not having, as did Mason, Stone's papers as a source, the author relied principally upon judicial opinions as a basis for his discussion. Characterized as "a leader of that liberal jurisprudence of which Holmes and Brandeis were the trail-blazers," Stone is judged in the concluding chapter to have been a great ad- vocate of "an enlightened view of the judicial function." 6251. Pollard, Joseph P. Mr. Justice Cardozo; a liberal mind in action. With a foreword by Roscoe Pound. New York, Yorktown Press, 1935. 327 p. 35-6010 Law An admiring discussion on a lay level of the opin- ions of Benjamin Nathan Cardozo (1 870-1938), who for 18 years served on the New York Court of Appeals (1914-1932) and for 6 on the U. S. Su- preme Court (1932-1938). In no sense a biog- raphy, it studies a mind as revealed in judicial ac- tion in fields of litigation such as personal injury, crime, social welfare, labor, libel, and censorship, to name a few. It dwells for the most part on Car- dozo's longer service on the State court, and con- cludes with a brief account of his first two years on the High Court during the launching of the New Deal. 6252. Pritchett, Charles H. Civil liberties and the Vinson Court. [Chicago] University of Chicago Press, 1954. 296 p. 54-8459 Law A sequel to the author's The Roosevelt Court be- low, which concentrates on the problem of civil liberties as encountered by the Supreme Court un- der the leadership of Chief Justice Fred M. Vinson (1890-1953; appointed in 1946) in such fields as free speech, denizenship, racial segregation, and criminal prosecution. It explores the motivations of the individual Justices in their opinions upon cases within these fields. The author concludes with a searching analysis of what the Court ought to do to improve its relationship to the free society of which it is the constitutional guardian. 6253. Pritchett, Charles H. The Roosevelt Court; a study in judicial politics and values, 1937-1947. New York, Macmillan, 1948. xvi, 314 p. 48-4203 JK1561.P7 The primary purpose of this work is to relate significant constitutional developments of the pe- riod to the ideological preference of the members of the Court. It is essentially a study of the politics and values of the Justices named to the Supreme Court by President Roosevelt. The author, a pro- fessor of political science at the University of Chi- cago, compiles 25 statistical tables in order to bolster his contention that in differences of opinion on questions of policy, given the same or similar con- ditions, there is a constant in the alignment of the members of the Court, derivable from their char- acters and backgrounds. 6254. Pusey, Merlo J. Charles Evans Hughes. New York, Macmillan, 195 1. 2 v. (xvi, 829 p.) illus. 51-7851 Law This authorized biography by a staff writer of the Washington Post is a narration and an in- terpretation of a career of service to State, nation, and mankind. Lawyer, investigator, teacher, gov- ernor, Presidential candidate, Secretary of State, As- sociated Justice and Chief Justice of the United States: Hughes (1862-1948) was all of these as well as a devoted husband, father, and grandfather. He was the only man to resign from the Court (in 191 6, after six years' service as Associate Justice) in or- der to campaign for the Presidency, and then to be reappointed, as Chief Justice, 14 years later. Fol- lowing his retirement from the bench in 1941 until his death seven years later, his counsel was sought by those who remained in office, but Hughes by no means sought the role of a professional elder states- man. In his evaluation of Hughes' 11-year per- formance as Chief Justice, the author notes at least four aspects of his work as outstanding: his en- hancement of efficiency within the whole Federal court system; his mastery in presiding over the Court and the conferences of its Justices; his posi- tive contributions to the law, notably the firm establishment of the four freedoms of the First 1008 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Amendment as guarantees to the citizen against State actions; and last, but not least in importance, his stalwart and unemotional defense of the Court against efforts at executive domination. A much briefer, but exceedingly lucid and judicious ap- preciation of his great services in several realms, and especially on the Court, is Dexter Perkins' volume in The Library of American biography: Charles Evans Hughes and American Democratic Statesmanship (Boston, Little, Brown, 1956. xxiv, 200 p.). 6255. Ragan, Allen E. Chief Justice Taft. Co- lumbus, Ohio, Ohio State Archaeological and Historical Society, 1938. 139 p. ([Ohio State Archaeological and Historical Society] Ohio historical collections, v. 8) 38-28150 E762.R25 F486.O526, v. 8; Law "Index of cases": p. 129-130. Bibliography: p. 123-128. This monograph, which originated as a disserta- tion at Ohio State University, attempts "to deter- mine what contribution Chief Justice William Howard Taft made to the constitutional history of the country" from 1921 to 1930. Some background for his Supreme Court decisions has been provided from his earlier judicial and administrative career. Separate chapters are concerned with Taft's judg- ments in cases involving labor, the Federal power over commerce, the limits of State power, restraint of trade, and the 18th Amendment. The author concludes that despite Taft's industry, legal learn- ing, and impartiality, his decisions lacked color, and "he failed to establish any new lines of constitu- tional interpretation" which could make his term outstanding. Apart from maintaining the inviola- bility of property rights against labor, his decisions were sufficiently nationalistic and liberal. Even though his success, under the circumstances, could only be partial, "his prolonged interest in and his tireless labors for judicial reform were his crowning achievements." 6256. Rodell, Fred. Nine men; a political history of the Supreme Court from 1790 to 1955. New York, Random House, 1955. 338 p. 55-8154 Law The author is a professor of law at Yale Univer- sity who practices journalism on the side, and his book, which, he says, is not written down to law- yers, is robustly journalistic in manner. Professor Rodell says that he is a liberal and admires liberals, but that his "almost fanatical devotion to that kind of personal integrity that combines intellectual honesty with courage" is more important. The title is meant to imply that the Supreme Court is indis- tinguishable from the nine men who at any one time are its Justices, that they bring their characters and careers onto the bench with them, and that the Court is therefore "powerful, irresponsible, and human." The book is a vigorous summary of the Court's history from an advanced liberal point of view, in personal terms, and with most space given to the recent past. The Vinson Court is castigated as inimical to human dignity and democratic decency. Well-informed, never dull, obscure, or difficult, and transparent in its partisanship, Nine Men is well suited to those who dread the techni- calities of the subject. 6257. Schwartz, Bernard. The Supreme Court, constitutional revolution in retrospect. New York, Ronald Press Co., 1957. 429 p. 57-9302 Law In 1937 the President proposed to vitiate the in- dependence of the judiciary by his Court-packing plan, Justices Roberts and Hughes ceased their ob- jections to Federal intervention aimed at resuscitat- ing a prostrated economy, and the Supreme Court handed down a whole group of decisions constitut- ing a decisive break with its previous jurisprudence grounded on laissez-faire. This was the constitu- tional revolution; Professor Schwartz of the New York University School of Law attempts to trace its consequences through the ensuing 20 years, during which, he thinks, "despite aberrations, notably by certain Justices, the Court's decisions have followed logical patterns, consistent with the bases" of 1937. As the Federal Government entered a whole new sphere of positive economic activity, the Supreme Court adopted an entirely new attitude toward statutes, refusing to void them so long as rational legislators could have regarded them as reasonable methods of promoting the public welfare. There- fore in 20 years "the Court's authority vis-a-vis the Congress has all but atrophied," and a drastic shift in the balance of governmental powers has taken place. Professor Schwartz reviews in turn the con- sequences in the Court's relation to Congress, the President, the administrative agencies, the inferior courts, the States, and the individual. He also discusses the manner in which the Court's work has been affected by war and cold war. A concluding chapter, "Anatomy and Pathology of the Court," says that while during the first 10 years the Court overruled too many precedents, it has since let stare decisis provide an essential element of continuity in the law; that the prestige of Justice Holmes has led too many of his successors to deliver dissenting opinions; and that judicial review is basically an undemocratic institution, which in a democratic system should be exercised with rigorous self- restraint. LAW AND JUSTICE / IOO9 6258. Swisher, Carl Brent. Roger B. Taney. New York, Macmillan, 1935. 608 p. illus. 35-19101 E340.T2S9;Law Bibliography: p. 591-598. Taney (1777-1864) is best remembered for his role in Andrew Jackson's struggle against the Bank of the United States and for his decision, as Chief Justice of the United States, in the Dred Scott Case. Born into the Roman Catholic gentry of Calvert County, Maryland, Taney had a long and dis- tinguished career which included service as a Maryland legislator and attorney general, Attorney General and Secretary of the Treasury in President Jackson's Cabinet, and Chief Justice of the United States for almost three decades (1836-64). Taney led the judicial forces seeking a modification of the assumption underlying so many decisions of the Marshall Court: that unchecked and centralized Federal power together with judicial benevolence toward private economic interests would invariably work for the good of the country. Although he re- ceived an exceptional amount of denigration or abuse from his contemporaries and from writers of the next two generations, the author feels that Taney well earned the accolade of Charles Evans Hughes: "he was a great Chief Justice." 6259. Trimble, Bruce R. Chief Justice Waite, de- fender of the public interest. Princeton, Princeton University Press, 1938. 320 p. illus. 38-3414 Law "Table of cases": p. [307J-3I0. Bibliography: p. [30i]~3o6. Waite (1816-88) was an Ohio lawyer of special- ized practice and excellent political connections, but had no judicial experience when President Grant put him at the head of the Supreme Court. He was Chief Justice of the United States for 14 years (1874-88) and through careful planning and pains- taking toil became, this biographer believes, a great administrator and a judge of recognized ability. Drawn largely from information found in Waite's letters, public papers, and judicial utterances, this study aims at showing something of Waite's influ- ence in the solution of the constitutional problems which came to the fore during the Reconstruction period. The opinions which he rendered covered a multitude of those problems: radical Reconstruc- tion legislation, the war amendments, western de- velopment, transcontinental railroads, agrarian movements, the control of public utilities and rates, and the relation of the States to the liquor traffic. In all these matters Waite made substantial con- tributions, the greatest of which, in Mr. Trimble's estimation, was probably his interpretation of the contract clause of the Constitution, in which he enunciated his doctrine of the "public interest." 6260. Warren, Charles. The Supreme Court in United States history. Rev. ed. Boston, Little, Brown, 1937. 2 v. (814, 812 p.) 38-33016 JK1561.W3 1937 First published in 1922. Contents. — v. 1. 1789-1835. — v. 2. 1836-1918. A leisurely history of the first century of the Supreme Court, to the death of Chief Justice Waite in 1888; the succeeding 30 years, to the end of World War I, are more briefly summarized in two final chapters (v. 2, p. 690-756). The large-scale portion aims to narrate "a section of our National history connected with the Supreme Court" for laymen and lawyers alike, and "to revivify the im- portant cases decided by the Court and to picture the Court from year to year in its contemporary setting." The background of social, political, and economic controversy out of which the Court's most famous cases arose is carefully described. Each appointment of a Chief or Associate Justice, includ- ing those which were declined, withdrawn, or disapproved by the Senate, is investigated and con- temporary reactions sampled at some length. A chronological list of all such appointments appears at the close of volume 2 (p. 757-763). Warren also drew upon the papers of important contemporaries, legal and lay, and the newspaper and magazine press for the reception of important decisions; this is one of the most valuable features of his book. The serv- ice of the three first Chief Justices (John Rudedge took his seat and presided over one whole term of the Court before the Senate rejected him) is cov- ered in the first 168 pages, and the remainder of volume 1 is concerned with John Marshall's 35 epoch-making years. Useful material not easily found elsewhere is contained in Chapter 10, "The Judges and the Court-Rooms." The illustrations include photographs of the Court's first two (quite small) rooms in the Capitol, and group photographs of the Justices taken in 1865, 1882, and 1899. C. General Views 6261. Cahn, Edmond N. The moral decision; right and wrong in the light of American 431240—60 65 law. Bloomington, Indiana University Press, 1955. 342 p. 55" 8 739 Law IOIO / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Acting on the suggestion of a distinguished United States circuit judge and acknowledging the inspiration of Jerome Frank, Professor Cahn has written this book "to draw upon the supply of moral insight and experience that American courts have gradually developed and accumulated," and so answer the question, "What moral guides can be found in American law?" After a theoretical sec- tion which considers the extent to which morals is a legal order and law is a moral order, the author considers a series of "prismatic" cases which bring moral issues into sharp focus and encourage the reader to judge for himself. These are arranged in six chapters intended to sample human concerns in a natural progression from birth to death, of which only three ("Sexual Relationships," "The Conduct of Business," and "Business with Govern- ment") are homogeneous and self-explanatory. Further "prismatic" cases are used in the concluding chapters, which consider various moral aspects of trial, compromise, and judicial decision. This deeply felt and thought and warmly written work places American law in a more attractive light than it frequendy enjoys. 6262. Cardozo, Benjamin Nathan. Selected writ- ings. Edited by Margaret E. Hall. New York, Fallon Publications, 1947. xxiv, 456 p. 47-11282 Law A collection of Cardozo's extrajudicial utterances: addresses, lectures, essays, and the texts of his bril- liant works on jurisprudence: Nature of the judicial Process (1921), Growth of the Law (1924), Para- doxes of Legal Science (1928), and Law and Litera- ture (1931). Most of these reflect his contributions to the literature and philosophy of American law: his insight and eloquence in defining and stating the moral values of the law; his craftmanship in bending, or not bending, a rule to meet the de- mands of ethical principle, or to uphold a legal or political value; and his aesthetic convictions ex- pressed in his fondness for beauty of literary style and his belief in the close relationship of beauty and morals. Except for some works of his student days at Columbia which are included, these writings are by-products and reflections of Cardozo's work as a judge of the Supreme Court of New York (1914- 32), before his appointment to the United States Supreme Court. 6263. Frank, Jerome. Law and the modern mind. New York, Coward-McCann, 1949. xxxi, 368 p. 49-2082 Law An influential study in the theory of law by a well-known American jurist, which went through six printings between 1930 and 1949; to the last the author adds a lengthy preface (p. vi-xxviii) out- lining the interim progress of his opinions. Recent logic, philosophy of science, and especially psy- chology are drawn upon to scotch "the basic legal myth," "the notion that law either is or can be made approximately and certain." The acceptance of this myth by lawyers, who should know better, as well as by the public is blamed by Frank for the wide- spread cynical disdain of lawyers as tricksters and quibblers. The trouble is that "the desire persists in grown men to recapture, through a rediscovery of a father, a childish, completely controllable uni- verse, and that desire seeks satisfaction in a partial, unconscious, anthropomorphizing of Law, in ascrib- ing to the Law some of the characteristics of the child's Father-Judge." Until we have followed the way pointed out by Justice O. W. Holmes, "the completely adult jurist," and put away this childish image and the childish emotions attached to it, "we shall not reach that first step in the civilized admin- istration of justice, the recognition that man is not made for the law, but that law is made by and for men." 6264. Hand, Learned. The spirit of liberty; papers and addresses, collected, and with an introd. and notes, by Irving Dilliard. New York, Knopf, 1952. xxx, 262 p. 51-13215 Law In 1951 Learned Hand (b. 1872) retired from active service as Chief Justice of the U.S. Court of Appeals for the Second Circuit, thus completing a judicial career of more than four decades. Long before his retirement Hand had become a legend, first to the members of his profession and later to the general public. The vagaries of the American political system deprived him of a place on the U.S. Supreme Court, but he has been called its "tenth justice," and with some reason, for the High Court has been influenced by Hand's lower court decisions, and has on occasion given Hand's very words a place in its own. In 1939, when Harvard bestowed the degree of Doctor of Laws upon this distin- guished son, the citation called him: "A judge worthy of his name, judicial in his temper, pro- found in his knowledge, a philosopher whose decisions affect a nation." Irving Dilliard's appre- ciative essay prefaces this collection of Hand's non- judicial pieces, which commences with his Harvard Class Day oration (1893) and concludes with an address he delivered at a celebration of his 80th birthday. Many of the judge's words in praise of others are included: of Holmes, Brandeis, and Car- dozo, to name but three. He is one of the same breed, and must be praised in ideas and language of the same stamp. 6265. Jackson, Percival E. Look at the law; the law is what the layman makes it. Foreword LAW AND JUSTICE / IOII by Arthur Garfield Hays. New York, Dutton, 1940. 377 p. 40-27271 Law A rapid review of the chronic lay complaints that there is too much law; that the law is uncertain, rigid, technical, hypocritical, slow, and expensive; and that lawyers are dishonest, judges corrupt, and witnesses liars. The author, formerly counsel of the United States Senate Committee for the Inves- tigation of the Administration of Justice in the United States Courts (1936) provides an abundance of illustration in his efforts to arouse public opinion to the point of doing something about a legal sys- tem as fallible as the society which it is meant to serve. Once the complaint is made, the bar should, the author asserts, suggest remedies from which lay- men may choose the one they desire and insist on its application. The author's recommendations, aside from the need for stimulating the public to action and obtaining leadership, call for reduction of bulk and technicalities in the law, for a continu- ous digest of judge-made law by a public agency, for a court administration more conducive to the ends of justice; and for a general raising of standards for all actively concerned in the practice and admin- istration of the law. There is no index. 6266. Konefsky, Samuel J. The legacy of Holmes and Brandeis; a study in the influence of ideas. New York, Macmillan, 1956. 316 p. 56-11835 Law Drawing upon the writings of Justices Holmes and Brandeis (nos. 6241-6242, 6246-6248) and upon the recollections of the law clerks who served them, the author presents a comparative study of the constitutional and legal philosophy of these two men, who so often found themselves companions in dissent. Each of them, in his own way, "has come to symbolize the never-ending struggle to infuse law and balance into the processes by which the people of the United States are governed. They differed greatly in intellectual taste, social percep- tion, political ideals, and juristic method. Yet they were able to achieve almost complete accord in their exposition of the Constitution. The harmony be- tween Justices Holmes and Brandeis is as illuminat- ing a commentary upon the essentially flexible nature of America's fundamental charter as one can expect to find in the whole field of judicial biography." 6267. Mortenson, Ernest. You be the judge. Illustrations by Alain. New York, Long- mans, Green, 1940. 451 p. 40-6720 Law "Collaborator, Miss Sarah Paulding Ray." — p. x. "Suggestions for further reading": p. 441-445. A New York lawyer seeks to make the law and its processes intelligible and reasonable to those without legal training, to which end he purposely omits qualifying phrases and legal terminology. Throughout he employs actual cases, simplifying them considerably by the omission of technicalities but supplying the fundamental legal principles which are usually presupposed in the judges' opin- ions. After two introductory chapters on the nature of legal actions and judicial processes, the author devotes successive chapters to the most com- mon fields of substantive law: torts, property, crime, international law, domestic relations, equity, con- tracts (including bills and notes and insurance), wills, and Federal cases. Chapter 12, "Problems of Proof," discusses cross-examination as well as the varieties and values of evidence. The concluding chapter presents issues in the philosophy of the law and in its reform. Mr. Mortenson's cases are usually quite interesting in themselves, and his ex- positions uncommonly clear and crisp; the whole may be termed an attractive layman's casebook. He warns, of course, that it does not qualify the reader to conduct his own litigation. 6268. My philosophy of law; credos of sixteen American scholars, published under the di- rection of the Julius Rosenthal Foundation, North- western University. Boston, Boston Law Book Co., 1941. 321 p. illus. 41-19742 Law A symposium of American legal philosophy con- tributed by such legal scholars as John Dickinson, Roscoe Pound, Max Radin, and John H. Wigmore, and by two scholars not primarily of the law: John Dewey and Morris R. Cohen. The remaining 10 were all professors in the law schools of major uni- versities; 3 of them, naturally enough, were of the faculty of Northwestern University, A photograph of each precedes his essay. The essays are untitled, since the subject of each is understood to be "My Credo about the Law": "the editorial committee feared that if the author were left free to select his own subject, the symposium would turn out to be a mere collection of papers lacking in definite unity." Since the print is large and the margins generous, these 15- to 20-page statements are even briefer than might be supposed. The views ex- pressed by the contributors as to the ultimate ideas of the origin, nature, and ends of the law are varied in approach and conclusion, although nearly every one of the essays stresses the inadequacy of viewing the law as merely a body of precedents and rules. 6269. Shartel, Burke. Our legal system and how it operates; five lectures, delivered at the University of Michigan, February 23, 24, 25, 26, and 27, 1948, on the Thomas M. Cooley lectureship, enlarged and revised. Ann Arbor, University of 1012 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Michigan Law School, 1951. 629 p. (Michigan legal studies) 51-61902 Law Professor Shartel of the University of Michigan Law School has written for beginning law students, upper-level undergraduates, and general readers curious about the legal system an introductory book intended to supply the place once held by Sir Wil- liam Blackstone's Commentaries on the Laws of England, now completely obsolete for general teach- ing purposes. He begins on a semantic note, with a discussion of the use of language in relation to law, and goes on to analyze the legal system in terms of two basic ideas: acts of individuals and officials, and standards intended to control these acts. Hav- ing spelled out his distinctions in these spheres, the author can proceed to chapters on "Legislation," the "Interpretation of Legislation," "The Common Law," and "Legal Policies and Policy Making," policies being defined as the ends for which stand- ards are framed by lawmakers. However useful as a preliminary to more specialized law courses, it is unlikely to enjoy the long repute of Blackstone, for if most of it is plain enough, some of it is obvious, and all is quite prosaic. 6270. Vanderbilt, Arthur T. Men and measures in the law; five lectures delivered ... at the University of Michigan, Apr. 1948. New York, Knopf, 1949. xxi, 156, x p. (William W. Cook Foundation lectures, v. 4) 49-8738 Law The late and greatly regretted A. T. Vanderbilt, who taught at the New York University Law School for over 30 years until his appointment as chief justice of the Supreme Court of New Jersey in 1947, was an indefatigable leader in the cause of legal reform. In these lectures he took a critical look at the entire field of American law in the light of a time of world crisis. "Law in the Books," he found, was crushing in its volume and too little accessible; the great need was "for critical research apparatus to make it more available to us." The legal profession suffered from the lack of a sense of individual responsibility; its members turned away from politics and public office. The law schools spent far too much of their time on commer- cial law and the law of property; they were never- theless the best hope of the future. In every jurisdiction substantive law cried out for continuous revision and continuous codification, as well as for public agencies charged with searching it for pro- visions deserving repeal. However, "the stum- bling-block," in which improvements "come with far greater difficulty than progress in the substantive law," was procedure, for here both bench and bar had a vested interest in technicalities where they are at home and everyone else quite at sea. Vander- bilt concisely outlined the movements for proce- dural reform, the concrete gains that had been achieved, and the wide field for improvement that remained — including arrogance and bad temper on the bench. Here again the best hope was the law schools, as the best means "to mobilize, co-ordinate and direct the activities of the many bar associations, the judicial councils, and other organizations de- voted to the improvement of the administration of justice." D. Digests of American Law 6271. Brown, Ray A. The law of personal prop- erty. 2d ed. Chicago, Callaghan, 1955. 853 p. (National textbook series) 55~ I 4547 Law First published in 1936 under title: A Treatise on the Law of Personal Property. Table of cases: p. xv-xcvii. Professor Brown of the University of Wisconsin Law School has drawn upon his own experience as teacher and practitioner, and has cited over 5500 cases in this comprehensive treatise on the Ameri- can law of chattel property. An introductory chapter informs us that ownership is "not a single indivisible concept but a collection or bundle of rights, of legally protected interests," and that cer- tain limited rights in land are regarded as chattels. Chapters 2-9 consider various ways of acquiring and transferring rights in personal property: original acquisition; finding lost articles; adverse possession; judgment and satisfaction of judgment; accession and confusion ("such an intermixture of goods owned by different persons, that the property of each can no longer be distinguished"); gifts of chattels and of "choses in action" (claims by one person against another for the performance of val- uable acts, such as bonds or shares of stock); and sales. Six longer chapters deal with bailments ("the rightful possession of goods by one who is not the owner"), liens, and pledges, all situations wherein one person has a limited interest in the personal property of another. The two concluding chapters deal with fixtures and crops, both in the borderland between personal and real property. 6272. Clark, George Luther. Summary of Ameri- can law. With introd. by Roscoe Pound. Rochester, N.Y., Lawyers Co-operative Pub. Co., 1947. xxxv, 691 p. 47-8287 Law 6273. Griffith, Virgil A. Outlines of the law, a comprehensive summary of the major sub- jects of American law. Indianapolis, Bobbs- Merrill, 1950. 752 p. 50-3721 Law 6274. Gavit, Bernard C. Introduction to the study of law. Brooklyn, Foundation Press, 195 1. xvi, 388 p. (University textbook series) 51-4853 Law Mr. Clark's Summary of American Law, cover- ing practically the entire legal field, is designed, through its summations of 30 legal subjects, to aid the law student, armed with the appropriate case books, to obtain an effective general view of the law. Of its four sections, the first is concerned with the rudimentary aspects of the law, such as forms of action, torts, contracts, agency, and property; the second with equity and the law of commerce; and the third with public law, encompassing public utilities, municipal corporations, taxation, and con- stitutional, administrative and labor law. The con- cluding section is devoted to the principles of procedure in common law and code pleading, and in the presentation of evidence. Another survey of the law is Mr. Griffith's; of a more general nature with a minimum of case citations, and without the discussion of procedure included in Clark's Sum- mary, this outline of major legal subjects is directed not only to those of, or about to be of, the legal profession, but also to others seeking a compre- hensive statement of the principles of American law. Mr. Gavit's contribution to this group of summary and introductory manuals "is not a law book; it is a book about the law." The most ele- mentary of the three, it is intended for pre-law and law students as well as for the layman who desires to become acquainted with such fundamentals of the American legal system as legal education, the sources and forms of the law, the judicial process, legal ethics, procedure, the common law forms, and equity. The definition and explanation of basic concepts has resulted in an exposition extremely general in nature, but this should increase the work's usefulness to those for whom it is designed. 6275. Clark, William L. Handbook of the law of contracts. 4th ed., by Archibald H. Throckmorton and Alvin C. Brightman. St. Louis, West Pub. Co., 1931. xv, 858 p. (Horn- book series) 31-15710 Law Clark (1863-1918) won "the distinction of being one of the most prolific of American law writers, LAW AND JUSTICE / IOI3 and it is probably true that during the past genera- tion law students have used his books more exten- sively than those of any other author," say the editors of this volume. Clark's original edition appeared in 1894, an d it and its successors had the widest circulation of all his works. The original analysis followed that of standard English works on contracts by Sir William Anson and S. M. Leake. In chapter 1 a contract is defined as "an agreement enforceable at law, made between two or more persons, by which rights are acquired by one or more to acts or forbearances on the part of the other or others." Successive chapters deal with "Offer and Acceptance," "Classification of Contracts [con- tracts of record, contracts under seal, and simple or parol contracts]," "Contracts Required to be in Writing," "Consideration ['A valuable considera- tion is essential to the validity of every simple con- tract']," "Capacity of Parties," "Reality of Consent," "Legality of Object [an agreement with an illegal object is no contract]," "Operation," "Interpreta- tion," and "Discharge of Contract," and "Quasi Contract [obligations clothed by the law with the semblance of contract for the purpose of remedy]." 6276. Clark, William L., and William L. Marshall. A treatise on the law of crimes. 6th ed., rev. by Melvin F. Wingersky. Chicago, Callaghan, 1958. xix, 959 p. (National textbook series) 58-3192 Law A standard digest of American criminal law since 1895, into the latest edition of which a quantity of sociological matter has been written. Part 1 on "Legal Concepts of Crime" has chapters on the sources and characteristics of criminal law and on "Jurisdiction and Locality." Part 2 is labelled "Criteria of Accountability, Responsibility, Exemp- tion, and Vindication"; it includes a chapter of 104 pages on "The Mental Element." Part 3 classifies punishable behavior in six chapters: "Proscribed Coalitions," "Offenses against the Persons of Indi- viduals," "Offenses Involving Sexual Behavior, Morality, and Family Relations," "Offenses against Property," "Burglary and Arson," and "Offenses against Government." Many persons will prefer the considerably simpler and more straightforward 5th edition, prepared by James J. Kearney in 1952 (794 P-)- 6277. Kent, James. Commentaries on American law. 12th ed., edited by O. W. Holmes, Jr. Boston, Little, Brown, 1873,° 1901. 4 v. 1-277 1 1 Law A landmark in American legal literature, Chan- cellor Kent's Commentaries, the great American in- stitutional legal treatise intended to instruct students of American jurisprudence in the fundamentals of IOI4 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES that system, and based on Kent's lectures given at Columbia College in 1823 and 1824, was first pub- lished between 1826 and 1830. As early as 1832 a second edition was printed to meet the enthusiastic response to the work. Its six sections are devoted respectively to the law of nations, to the government and constitutional jurisprudence of the United States, to the sources of the municipal law of the several States, to the rights of persons, to personal property, and to real property. No separate treat- ment is given to the law of crimes or to equity. Justice Holmes' edition of the Commentaries, pub- lished a quarter of a century after Kent's death, not only brought the work up to date by means of Holmes' supplementary essays, but also sought to restore something of Kent himself by eliminating almost entirely the notes by other hands that had been added to previous editions later than the sixth (1848), which contained Kent's last corrections. 6278. Tiffany, Herbert Thorndike. A treatise on the modern law of real property and other interests in land. New abridged ed., by Carl Zoll- mann. Chicago, Callaghan, 1940. xxxvi, 12 19 p. 40-14787 Law References: p. v-vi. Tiffany's original edition was published in 1903; after its plates were worn out, two successive photo- static reproductions were used as teaching manuals in many law schools. It aimed "to present, in mod- erate compass, the principles which govern the various branches of the law of the land, adopting for the purpose a method of analysis and order calculated to make plain the relations of these vari- ous branches to one another and to the whole." Mr. Zollmann retained the original framework, but checked 14 casebooks to add new cases, expanded some of the sections, and added some new ones. Part 1 contains "Preliminary Considerations" on the nature of real property, tenure and seisin, and the theory of estates. Laymen will be surprised to learn that the all-important legal distinction between real and personal property is no older than the middle of the 17th century, when it arose out of the differing forms of action used to recover rights in land as against rights in chattels. Part 2 on "The Ownership of Land" is much the longest; it has chapters on "The Quantum of Estates," "Equitable Ownership," "Future Estates and Interests," "Con- current Ownership," "Estates and Interests Arising from Marriage," and "Rights of Enjoyment Incident to Ownership." The four remaining parts are "Rights to Dispose of Land Not Based on Owner- ship," "Rights as to the Use and Profits of Another's Land," "The Transfer of Rights in Land," and "Liens." 6279. Walsh, William F. A treatise on equity. Chicago, Callaghan, 1930. xli, 603 p. (National textbook series) 30-25486 Law "We think of equity as that system of remedial law administered by Chancery in England and by courts in the United States which exercised like powers and administered a like system of law"; its content and nature can be further understood only by studying its principles and practices. The basic sense, of course, is that the judicial power may do justice in cases where the letter of the law would work a clear injustice or hardship upon one of the parties. Modern codes and statutes have effected a merger of law and equity, and "modern equity has emerged as a coordinated part of the single system of law under which we live." A major purpose of Professor Walsh's book is to restate the rules and principles of equity from the point of view of this merger. The four parts deal with the "History, Nature, and Characteristics of Equity," "Equitable Relief in Tort Cases," "Equitable Relief in Contract Cases," and "Equitable Relief against Fraud and Mistake and in Miscellaneous Cases." E. Courts and Judges 6280. American Law Institute. A study of the business of the Federal courts. Philadel- phia, Executive Office, American Law Institute, 1934. 2 v. tables, diagrs. 35-8524 Law Contents. — 1. Criminal cases. — 2. Civil cases. Inaugurated by President Hoover's National Commission on Law Observance and Enforcement, and carried out by a committee aided by several law schools and the Rockefeller Foundation, this study of cases, criminal and civil, made in 13 judicial districts has resulted in a detailed statistical account of the operation of the Federal courts — an opera- tion found by this study to be in the main quite efficient. On the criminal side, this analysis pointed to the need for emphasis upon questions of substantive policy in Federal law administration as distinguished from attempts to refurbish proce- dure; a case in point cited was the need for the regulation, not the abolition, of the technique of pleading guilty. The interpreters of the statistics gathered from the study of the civil cases felt it desirable that devices be created for rapidly and efficiently sorting the cases and allotting each to the procedure best adapted to it. As a pilot project in the employment of statistical methods in studying courts of law, these reports, aside from the purely mechanical experience gained, are of value in that, admittedly, they point to the necessity of trained observation to supplement statistical tables. 6281. Bunn, Charles Wilson. A brief survey of the jurisdiction and practice of the courts of the United States. 5th ed., by Charles Bunn. St. Paul, West Pub. Co., 1949. 408 p. 49-3344 Law A short study dealing primarily with the jurisdic- tion of the Federal courts and only incidentally with practice before them. Three groups of cases con- front a lawyer considering the problem of jurisdic- tion: cases in which only the State courts possess competence, those in which Federal jurisdiction is exclusive, and a third group in which Federal and State jurisdictions are concurrent, and where he and his opponent have a choice of forum depending upon such factors as the condition of trial calendars, the competence of judges, or the attitudes of juries. While these latter considerations are of importance, it is not the purpose of the author to treat them; what he does do is to set forth the areas of com- pelled selection and of choice in their main aspects and indicate the place to go for further information. Of value to law students, this work is complemented by an appendix containing the principal provisions of the Constitution, statutes, and rules bearing on the jurisdiction of the Federal courts. 6282. Callender, Clarence N. American courts; their organization and procedure. New York, McGraw-Hill, 1927. 284 p. 27-3682. Law "References" at end of most of the chapters. A description of the State and Federal courts together with an explanation of the procedures employed in handling various types of litigation. Intended for the general student, this work is con- cerned not with minutiae, but with the broader aspects of the administration of justice in the courts. In discussing the relationship between attorney and client, the State and Federal court systems, justices of the peace, pleadings and forms of action, the phases of trial procedure, courts of equity, probate and criminal courts, commercial arbitration, and the problem of improving legal procedure, the author has employed language comprehensible to the layman. A useful list of the jurisdictions of the several courts in each State concludes the book. While much of the book's information is now out of date, no survey of the same scope and on the same level has appeared to replace it. LAW AND JUSTICE / IOI5 6283. Carpenter, William S. Judicial tenure in the United States, with especial reference to the tenure of Federal judges. New Haven, Yale University Press, 1918. 234 p. 18-12485 JK1533.C3; Law In the United States judges, Federal and State alike, have a double function: they not only admin- ister justice but act as the guardians of the Consti- tution, and can declare and enforce the nullity of any legislation conflicting with its provisions (state judges, of course, guard the constitution of each State). The independence of the judiciary is essen- tial to both functions, but it is only the second, the funcdon of judicial review, that has brought such independence under political attack, invariably directed at the security of tenure of the judicial office. This concise volume reviews the history of such assaults since 1789, and finds that the courts have usually been able to withstand them, "and in the end popular sentiment has usually supported the courts." The courts must be free, it argues, not only from executive and legislative control, but "from the political vagaries of the people them- selves." It does not find that appointment neces- sarily produces a better bench than election; the local state of public opinion is a more important determinant. It stands out for impeachment as the only sound mode of removing incompetent or corrupt judges, conceding only that its procedural simplification is desirable. Four decades of addi- tional experience have, for the most part, confirmed the solidity and soundness of Professor Carpenter's exposition. 6284. Chesnut, William C. A Federal judge sums up. [Baltimore] 1947. 274 p. ilius. 47-5573 Law An account of the conditions under which law- yers practiced in Baltimore at the close of the last and the beginning of the present century is pre- sented in the first half-dozen chapters of this volume. Discussions and reminiscences of legal education, Baltimore judges and lawyers in the 1890's, the Maryland Court of Appeals and the Baltimore State's Attorney's Office at the turn of the century, and general law practice from 1889 to 1931 fill these pages. In 193 1 the author (b. 1873) was appointed United States District Judge for Maryland, and the latter half of his book is devoted almost wholly to a treatment of the day-to-day work of a Federal trial court. Directed to both laymen and tin torneys who do not practice in the Federal courts, these untechnical, easily digested chapters also in- clude comments on the jury system and on improve- ments in judicial functions, while the final portion of the book sets forth a program of collateral reading for younger members of the legal profession so 10 1 6 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES a larger perspective of the law and its practice. Very few American judges have thus summarized their personal experience for the benefit of a larger public. 6285. Frank, Jerome. Courts on trial; myth and reality in American justice. Princeton, Princeton University Press, 1949. 441 p. 49-1 1391 Law A provocative book by a member of the Federal bench and self-confessed reformer which seeks to explode before the lay public the myth of judicial infallibility. Trials, trial courts, and judicial fact- finding are the concern of the author, whose theme is that the process of factfinding by the trial courts is inadequately accomplished, and, as a consequence, the outcome of litigation is uncertain and injustice is too easily done. It is in the factfinding function that reform is held to be most needed. The reforms suggested to alleviate the situation are drastic, ex- tending from a complete revamping of the system of legal education to the discarding of the judicial robe. Judges, juries (when employed at all), wit- nesses, and trial procedure itself would cease to con- tribute to the uncertainty with beclouds the judicial scene. The courts of law would become stages upon which would be enacted the drama of the ascertainment of truth; no longer would they be the arenas in which adversaries lock themselves in judicial combat. The arguments of the late Judge Frank (1889-1957) won much praise from laymen, but have hitherto had small effect upon the judicial process. 6286. Frankfurter, Felix, and James M. Landis. The business of the Supreme Court; a study in the Federal judicial system. New York, Mac- millan, 1927. 349 p. 27-24024 Law The title of this book, which first appeared serially in the Harvard Law Review, is far from self-explanatory. Its authors, whose distinguished careers were only begun when it was published, meant that the Supreme Court was the apex of the Federal court system, and that the work which de- volved upon it was "largely predetermined by the jurisdictional ambit of the lower courts," which has been determined, in its turn, by successive acts of Congress. "It will be our purpose, therefore, to sketch rapidly the system of 'inferior courts' which Congress from time to time established, the authority which was vested in them, and the scope of review over them and the State courts by which Congress conferred 'appellate jurisdiction' upon the Supreme Court." It is largely a story of the in- creasing pressure of business arising from the growth of the country in size, population, and eco- nomic complexity, of the measures sought to relieve the higher courts from congestion, and the "lively issues of politics and policy" which entered into the ensuing legislation. The volume retains its value as an outline history of the structure of the Federal judicial system during its first 135 years; as a prac- tical commentary on the Judiciary Act of 1925 it is of course quite obsolete. The authors divide their narrative into three broad periods, the di- viding points of which are the Civil War and the establishment of intermediate courts of appeals in 1891. 6287. Lummus, Henry T. The trial judge; being a series of three lectures provided by the Julius Rosenthal Foundation for General Law, and delivered at the Law School of Northwestern Uni- versity at Chicago in March 1937. Chicago, Foundation Press, 1937. 148 p. 37-9340 Law A veteran of three decades on the Massachusetts bench when he delivered these lectures, Judge Lummus set forth in them canons of judicial con- duct which should keep the bench beyond reproach. He points out that the lower courts are the keystone of the judicial system, for they are the most fa- miliar to the multitude, and by them the whole system is judged. There are discussions of sub- stance upon the qualities and duties of trial judges, judicial administration, and the trial judge in crimi- nal cases. The weight of the lectures is to be found, however, in the concluding sections dealing with the appointment and tenure of judges in relation to the independence of the judiciary. Of the elec- tive and appointive methods of selecting judges, the author prefers the latter and views the former as the natural enemy of judicial independence. In fact, he would prefer the appointive power within each State to be vested in some sort of a minister of justice, who would be elected and advised by a council. This would compensate for what is termed the "outstanding blunder" and the "most tragic failure" of American democracy: the usual method of selecting judges and of regulating their tenure. 6288. MacDougall, Curtis D. Covering the courts. New York, Prentice-Hall, 1946. xvi, 713 p. (Prentice-Hall journalism series) 47-1042 Law Written by a professor of journalism at North- western University, this handbook represents an attempt to aid newsmen in the writing of intelli- gent interpretive news accounts involving the ad- ministration of justice. Employing examples of legal forms and excerpts from pertinent news stories, the author presents summaries and explanations of legal history, theory, and procedure, civil and criminal, as well as expositions of the mechanics of appellate law, including a brief resume of the history and functioning of the United States Su- preme Court. With a warning that legal termi- nology may vary from jurisdiction to jurisdiction, Professor MacDougall points out certain differences between Federal and State laws, and between the practices of the States. An attempt to mediate be- tween the disciplines of journalism and the law, the book is exceptionally well adapted to inform the general reader. 6289. Mayers, Lewis. The American legal sys- tem, the administration of justice in the United States by judicial, administrative, military, and arbitral tribunals. New York, Harper, 1955. 589 p. 54-8972 Law Bibliography: p. 559-566. A textbook developed in Professor Mayers' classes at the City College of New York to supply the lack of a single systematic account of American legal institutions — as distinguished from American law — in all their varied aspects. The chief institu- tions are traced to their historical roots, and current proposals for reform, including some made by the author, are indicated. Over two-thirds of the text is concerned with the courts; discussions of the Federal judicial power and that of the States pre- cede a description of the court structure, State and Federal. Criminal proceedings are divided into investigation and prosecution, with a briefer dis- cussion of "Summary Proceedings of a Criminal Nature," such as those against youthful offenders. Civil proceedings are discussed under objectives and procedure. The courts are considered as a check on the executive and on legislation, and as molders of the law. Their personnel is reviewed; after discussing judges and lawyers, Mr. Mayers notes the increasing difficulty of obtaining jurors of intelligence and probity and, in the criminal realm, the immense powers for good or evil wielded by prosecutors. Part 2 on "Administrative Tri- bunals and Their Supervision by the Courts" is primarily concerned with enforcement proceedings. Part 3, "Military Tribunals and Their Control by the Courts," includes those which we have main- tained in occupied territory. Part 4 on "Voluntary Arbitration Tribunals" is much the briefest (p. 543- 557). Any layman in search of understanding can profit from this survey, well organized, lucid, and never more technical than the subject matter demands. 6290. Pound, Roscoe. Organization of courts. Boston, Litde, Brown, 1940. 322 p. (The Judicial administration series, published under the auspices of the National Conference of Judicial Councils) 40-10936 Law 431240—60 66 LAW AND JUSTICE / 10 V] Bibliography: p. [2951-304. A comprehensive treatment of the growth of the courts in various American jurisdictions from the 17th century to the present era. Dean Pound em- phasizes the common elements present in this growth, which have led to an American type of judicial organization despite diversities among the various components of the American judicial ma- chinery. The book was written not as a part of a general history of American law, but in preparation for a reorganization of the American courts, which the author felt to be inevitable. The study points up the need for a thorough reorganization of the courts based upon the principles of unification, con- servation of judicial energy, and responsibility. Stressed is the necessity of abolishing legislative reg- ulation of the administrative details of the courts, and of establishing within the various jurisdictions an administrative hierarchy with a responsible head and responsible subordinates. "Only by some such centralized system," Dean Pound declares, "can the courts handle with a maximum of efficiency and expedition, and minimum of expense to litigants and public, the volume of litigation that comes to them under the social and economic order of today." 6291. Ulman, Joseph N. A judge takes the stand. New York, Knopf, 1936. 289 p. 39-33779 Law "Suggestions for further reading": p. 287-289. "For the last eight years I have been one of the eleven judges comprising the court of first resort for all but minor cases in a city of eight hundred thousand people," says Judge Ulman of the supreme bench of Baltimore city. In this time he accumu- lated 22 notebooks, each of 500 closely written pages, covering the cases heard before him. He draws upon them for a series of topical chapters, in which comments and reflections arise out of selected facts, intended to let the average citizen know "what actually happens when cases are tried in court." He notes that juries, merely by the amount of damages they assess, have remade the law of contributory negligence as laid down by a judge in 1809, and he reflects at length on the relationship of judge and jury, concluding that the judge is in danger of using his powers of interference more than the situation warrants. In a chapter entitled "I Object," he dis- cusses the courtroom relationship of judge and law- yers, with respect to the rules of evidence and the treatment of witnesses. "It Is Unconstitutional" contains some unusual and most interesting com- ments on a decision of his which was reversed by the Maryland Court of Appeals but reaffirmed by the United State Supreme Court. "Murder" goes into the case of Herman Duker; Judge Ulman sen- tenced him to hang, but Governor Ritchie com- I0l8 / A. GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES muted the sentence to life imprisonment. The book is instructive enough, but one wishes that its wise and humane author had the literary skill which could have made it quite outstanding. 6292. Warner, Sam Bass, and Henry B. Cabot. Judges and law reform. Cambridge, Har- vard University Press, 1936. 246 p. diagr. (Survey of crime and criminal justice in Boston, conducted by the Harvard Law School, v. 4) 36-15542 HV6795.B7S8, v. 4; Law Of particular interest to students of the criminal law, this study, centered on the Boston and Massa- chusetts courts, is concerned with the administration of criminal justice in the courts, and with its im- provement. The authors point out that it is to the judges that we should look for leadership in such reform, for if judges would assume such respon- sibility, reforms in legal procedure, they hope, would be brought about much more skillfully and expeditiously than if entrusted to a legislature; judges would take greater pains to see that justice is administered; and judgeships would be made more attractive to the highest caliber of lawyer. Not only are the organization of the courts and the mechanics of dispensing justice scrutinized but such tribula- tions of the public as discourteous attorneys, lack of proper courtroom facilities for visitors, and cum- brous procedure, and delays in the conduct of trials are also given deserved space here. It is not only on the bench and at the bar, but also in the attitude of the public toward the judicial function that a change must be wrought, if continuous reform of legal procedure is to become a reality. 6293. Wendell, Mitchell. Relations between the Federal and State courts. New York, Co- lumbia University Press, 1949. 298 p. (Columbia University. Faculty of Political Science. Studies in history, economics and public law, no. 555) 49-11705 H3i.C7,no.555 "Selected bibliography": p. 291-292. If the primary contribution of the judiciary to the Federal structure of the United States has been made by the Supreme Court through its inter- pretation of the Constitution, the lower Federal courts and the State courts have nevertheless made significant contributions to the operation of the Federal system. These courts are responsible for the daily adjustment of the judicial relationship be- tween the Federal and State governments. With this in mind, the author launches his discussion of the division of jurisdiction between the Federal and State courts. The first section of the book traces the development of the power of the Federal judiciary and is followed by an examination of the circum- stances under which a litigant may be heard in a Federal court; this involves the knotty problem of diversity of citizenship. Thereafter much of this study is concerned with the background and after- math of the cases Swift v. Tyson (1842) and Eire Railroad Co. v. Tompkins (1938). In the latter, the Supreme Court after 96 years reversed its doc- trine in the former, that the Federal courts were free to disregard State precedents and apply their own interpretation of State law. The work closes with a brief survey of the problems of concurrent jurisdiction and with the author's conclusions in favor of continuing the dual judiciary, because of the need for efficient judicial administration and for State courts which have authority to make final determinations in matters of local law. The opera- tions of the Federal judiciary, he thinks, should be restricted to areas of general national concern. F. The Judicial Process 6294. Borchard, Edwin M. Convicting the inno- cent; errors of criminal justice. With the collaboration of E. Russell Lutz. New Haven, Yale University Press, 1932. xxix, 421 p. (A publication of the Institute of Human Relations) 3 2 ~ I 3534 Law Bibliography at end of each case. A Massachusetts district attorney having declared that "innocent men are never convicted," Professor Borchard of Yale University made this now famous collection of 65 cases, 50 of which are narrated at some length. They are drawn from 26 States of the Union, the District of Columbia, and England; 29 of them had to do with murder, 23 with robbery or swindling, 5 with forgery, and 4 with criminal assault. In each the innocence of the convicted person was subsequently established beyond reason- able doubt: in six cases the person supposed to have been murdered turned up alive, while in others the real culprit was caught and convicted, or new and exculpating evidence was discovered. In several instances the convicted person escaped execution by a hair's breadth, and in many the exculpating evi- dence came to light by sheer luck. The main causes of the erroneous convictions are found to be mistaken identification, erroneous inferences from circumstantial evidence, perjury, or several of these in combination; and Professor Borchard notes faults on the part of the police, the prosecution, and the state of community opinion. He offers, in an introductory chapter, some needed reforms in crim- inal procedure, and in a final one, a draft statute for indemnifying wrongfully convicted and arrested persons, based on a survey of European legislation for the purpose. He observes that, while there are nine cases of unjust acquittal for one of unjust con- viction, this does not lessen the obligation to remedy the latter. And he makes the further observation: "In the majority of these cases the accused were poor persons, and in many of the cases their defense was for that reason inadequate." 6295. Brewster, Stanley F. Twelve men in a box. Chicago, Callaghan, 1934. 175 p. 35-222 Law Written primarily for the citizen who may some- day be called for jury duty, this manual intends to familiarize him with the duties and functioning of both the grand and petit juries. The machinery of the jury system itself, as well as something of the background of trial by jury as an institution, and the organization of the courts are touched upon. However, the greatest emphasis is given to proce- dure in trials civil and criminal, and the role of the juror from the time of his selection to the rendering of the verdict. The author tells what every juror ought to know about the opening addresses; wit- nesses, including experts, and their examination and cross-examination; the weighing of evidence and the detection of perjury; the seven most im- portant rules of evidence; summations, their purpose and importance; the judge's charge to the jury; and what goes on in the jury room while a verdict is being agreed on or disagreed about. This instruc- tive little volume concludes by describing the dif- ferent considerations that apply to juries in criminal cases, the principal one of course being that while civil juries may be satisfied with the preponderance of evidence, criminal juries must agree that the evi- dence establishes the guilt of the accused beyond any reasonable doubt. 6296. Busch, Francis X. Law and tactics in jury trials; the art of jury persuasion, tested court procedures. Indianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill, 1949. xxvii, 1 147 p. 49-4312 Law This well-documented treatise, employing throughout specimens of trial proceedings, sets forth for attorneys and law students the general require- ments of trial procedure, and is, in fact, a handbook on the art of advocacy. Its aim is "to present all of the contacts which the trial lawyer has with the jury in the course of a contested trial, and to indi- cate how every such contact may be utilized to induce the desired persuasion." Opening with brief LAW AND JUSTICE / IOI9 statements concerning the origin and development of the jury and the constitutional bases of the right to trial by jury in the Federal and State courts, the author proceeds step by step, with occasional di- gressions on the respective functions of the court and the jury and on the methods of case preparation, through all of the considerations a trial lawyer must take into account during the course of a litigation. Volume 1 of a new "encyclopedic edition" to be complete in 4 volumes, and containing additional chapters as well as elaborate references to cases, appeared at the beginning of 1959. 6297. Cockrell, Ewing. Successful justice. Char- lottesville, Va., Michie Co., 1939. xxxix, 1305 p. 39-14441 Law "For twelve years I was an ignorant judge," says the author in opening his big book, explaining that the best legal education is usually a defective guide to practice and that most other judges were and are as ignorant as himself. Nearly all the troubles of the law come from its administration, but there are great successes in every part of the law, behind which lie definite practices grounded on facts and principles. "The science of successful justice is easily learned." Mr. Cockrell then proceeds through the whole panorama of the law in action offering concrete instances of contrasted "ignor- ance" and "success." Ignorant policemen are set against successful policemen, and so for prosecutors, criminal trial judges, children's judges, probation officers, jailers, parole officers, civil trial judges, juries, legislators, court experts, newspapers, etc., etc. When the author comes to declare "the prin- ciples and practices of successful justice," he offers only four: "General law of keeping agreements," "General law of punishment for law violations," "Practice of providing a reserve of punishment," and "Practice of adequate investigation." He has in the meanwhile produced an immense scrapbook on better and worse methods of the administration of justice in the United States. 6298. Frank, Jerome, and Barbara Frank. Not guilty, by Jerome Frank and Barbara Frank in association with Harold M. Floffman. Garden City, N.Y., Doubleday, 1957. 261 p. 57-8299 Law Sources: p. [253]-26i. Judge Frank died of a heart attack less than two days after completing the manuscript of this book, written in collaboration with his daughter. It is made up of resumes of 35 criminal cases which re- sulted in wrongful convictions, 17 of them narrated at some length and 18 concisely. The cases are all later in date than Professor Borchard's volume (no. 6294) and show that the hazard has continued for a 1020 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES quarter of a century since he demonstrated its exist- ence. The cases are followed by a concluding chap- ter of commentary (p. 199-249) in which the authors illustrate the fallibility of witnesses, and criticize the concept of a trial as a duel between lawyers who use their knowledge of technicalities and their psychological insight as weapons; the vic- timizing of witnesses, too often treated as public enemies in the courtroom; and the concentration of prosecutors upon winning their cases rather than doing justice to the accused. By and large our sys- tem achieves fair results, but, the authors conclude, it will require major reforms in the administration of justice to make innocent men safe from imprison- ment or execution. One which they urge is the extension to criminal cases of "discovery" procedure, by which either side before the trial is enabled to scrutinize the evidence in possession of the other, and so to avoid tactical surprises in the conduct of the trial. 6299. Kellor, Frances A. Arbitration in action; a code for civil, commercial and industrial arbitrations. New York, Harper, 1941. 412 p. 41-23598 Law The purpose of voluntary arbitration is "to deter- mine a difference or dispute amicably, privately and finally and, in so doing, to exclude a court of law from such determination." The then executive vice president of the American Arbitration Association wrote this book on the basis of its records of 25,000 satisfactorily determined arbitrations, and in re- sponse to a mass of inquiries "by men, organiza- tions, companies and unions who want to know how, when and where to arbitrate disputes." Essen- tially a practical guide to the technique, facilities, and equipment essential to end disputes, it takes account of legal principles and literature only so far as germane to this purpose, and refers the reader to Wesley A. Sturges' A Treatise on Commercial Arbitrations and Awards (Kansas City, Mo., Ver- non Law Book Co., 1930. 1082 p.) for a more stricdy legal treatment. The largest section describes "General Procedure" and includes chapters on the arbitrator, arbitration agreements, the submission, the proceeding, evidence, the award, costs, and con- testing an award. Part 2 describes three particular systems of arbitration: that set up under the author- ity of the Seventh International Conference of Amer- ican States (Montevideo, 1933) to handle inter- American commercial disputes; the Accident Claims Tribunal established in New York City by the American Arbitration Association in 1933; and the motion picture arbitration system set up by the industry, under pressure from the U. S. Department of Justice, in 1940. The lengthly annexes (p. 217- 396) summarize existing statutes and print the rules of procedure administered by the American Arbitration Association and by the three systems just mentioned. 6300. Millar, Robert W. Civil procedure of the trial court in historical perspective. [New York] Published by the Law Center of New York University for the National Conference of Judicial Councils, 1952. 534 p. (The Judicial administra- tion series) 52-11758 Law A compact but detailed survey of "the major pro- cedural rules employed in the courts of the first instance in the United States and England, viewed especially from the standpoint of their historical progression." Implicit in this, of course, is its fol- lowing of the course of contemporary procedural reform. The introductory section of this study is devoted to a general account of the problems of procedural evolution and reform within the Anglo- American system. The second section, comprising the main body of the work, opens by considering the conjunctive administration of law and equity, and goes on to discuss specific phases of civil pro- cedure arranged in practical order, from the com- mencement of a suit to the execution of a judgment. Because of its content and the language employed, Professor Millar's book will appeal most readily to those of the legal and political science professions. 6301. Orfield, Lester Bernhardt. Criminal pro- cedure from arrest to appeal. New York, New York University Press, 1947. xxxi, 614 p. (Judicial administration series, 6) 47-30727 Law 6302. Orfield, Lester Bernhardt. Criminal appeals in America. With an introd. by Roscoe Pound. Boston, Little, Brown, 1939. 321 p. (The Judicial administration series, published under the National Conference of Judicial Councils) 39-31420 Law "Bibliography on appeal statistics": p. [2i2]-2i4. 6303. Puttkammer, Ernest W. Administration of criminal law. [Chicago] University of Chicago Press, 1953. 249 p. 53-8736 Law In Criminal Procedure from Arrest to Appeal each stage of a criminal proceeding is analyzed from the standpoints of its historical development, its current use, and the need, if any, for its reform. Admittedly, some topics such as evidence, jurisdiction, habeas corpus, and coroner's inquests are not considered because of limitations of time and space; their pecu- liarity to other branches of the law, their obsoles- cence, or the fact that they are well expounded elsewhere justifies this. Throughout, American procedure is compared with that of English courts, and occasionally with criminal procedure employed LAW AND JUSTICE / 1 02 1 on the Continent. In his critiques of suggested re- forms, the author endeavors to present fairly the ideas of both major groups who advocate the over- hauling of criminal procedure: those, thinking of the professional criminal, who speak in terms of ex- pediting a more rigorous prosecution, and those, concerned with innocent parties and the casual criminal, who talk of the preservation and strength- ening of civil liberties. Criminal Appeals in America commences with a short history of crimi- nal appeals in England, and then Professor Orfield, surveying the literature of his subject, synthesizes what has been written, thought, and enacted in America; reports on the functioning of criminal ap- pellate procedure and on proposals for its reforma- tion; and makes some suggestions of his own. These two works together comprise a guide to the task of improving the administration of criminal justice. A brief nontechnical description of the op- eration of the legal machinery in the realm of the criminal law is found in Professor Puttkammer's book. Written primarily for the law student and the layman seeking general information on the sub- ject, it deals only with the conventional areas of criminal prosecution and avoids detailed discussions of controversial points. While the lack of ponder- ous footnotes should be welcome to the reader, the lack of a more extensive bibliography than the ref- erences included in the notes may not be so. 6304. Pound, Roscoe. Appellate procedure in civil cases. Boston, Little, Brown, 1941. 431 p. (The Judicial administration series, published under the auspices of the National Conference of Judicial Councils) 42-1081 Law Bibliography: p. [395]-4ii. An historically grounded exposition of the devel- opment of civil appellate procedure. After a short statement of the scope and purpose of review in civil cases, there follows a historical survey of such re- view, which is traced here from the Roman law to the 17th century, and of civil appellate procedures in 18th-century England, in the American Colonies, and in the United States to the end of the 19th cen- tury. Finally the condition of such proceedings in the present century, with special note of improve- ments made, is considered. The final chapter, "Toward an Effective System of Review," for which all before seems prologue, is an essay in which the way is pointed, and a program for the revision of the review of civil cases in the United States is marked out. 6305. Pound, Roscoe. Criminal justice in Amer- ica. New York, Holt, 1930. xiv, 226 p. ([Brown University. The Colver lectures, 1924]) 30-22093 Law In this series of five lectures Dean Pound analyzes the problems and difficulties of criminal justice and explores the English and American backgrounds of its 20th-century administration. He discusses at some length the machinery of criminal justice, the obstacles to and agencies of its improvement, and asserts that the ultimate aim of any program for its reform must be a body of laws adequate to secure social interests, and capable of a high average of observance and enforcement. "The juristic think- ing of today," he writes, "must transcend both nineteenth-century individualism and nineteenth- century socialism . . . Instead of valuing all things in terms of politically organized society, we are valuing them in terms of civilization, of raising human powers to their highest possible unfold- ing — toward which spontaneous free individual ac- tion and collective organized effort both contribute. As this mode of thinking becomes general, the paths of criminal justice will be made straight." In 1945 Criminal Justice in America was republished, with the same pagination, by the Harvard Univer- sity Press. 6306. Train, Arthur C. From the district attor- ney 's office; a popular account of criminal justice. New York, Scribner, 1939. xiv, 431 p. illus. 39-27830 HV9468T7; Law Arthur Train ( 1875- 1945), best known as a writer of popular fiction and creator of Ephraim Tutt, "the best known of American lawyers," served two terms as assistant district attorney of New York County. This is a revision of his The Prisoner at the Bar, first published in 1906, containing new material and including much of the relevant contents of three of his other books: On the Trail of the Bad Men (1925), Courts, Criminals and the Camorra (1912), and True Stories of Crime (1908). It is a descrip- tion of the operation of metropolitan criminal jus- tice done in an entertaining manner and laced with illustrations and anecdotes. Observations concern- ing the nature of crime, the rights of citizens charged with law violations, and the character of the police, prosecutors, and judges, together with numerous suggestions for the betterment of the administration of criminal justice, are to be found here. All would seem to point to the idea expressed in the final sentence: "We do not need new laws so much as better citizens." Any improvement in the laws themselves and in procedures will only come about. Train thought, when more persons have acquired a firsthand knowledge of the operational conditions of those agencies charged with the responsibility of seeing justice done. 6307. Vanderbilt, Arthur T., ed. Minimum stand- ards of judicial administration; a survey of 1022 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES the extent to which the standards of the American Bar Association for improving the administration of justice have been accepted throughout the coun- try. [New York] Published by the Law Center of New York Unversity for the National Conference of Judicial Councils, 1949. xxxii, 752 p. (The Judi- cial administration series) 50-1655 Law A study, the text of which is supplemented by 62 maps, making clear to lawyers and laymen the ex- tent to which each state was measuring up to the minimum practical standards of judicial administra- tion formulated during the years 1938-40 by the American Bar Association. The reasoning behind those recommendations is to be found in the various reports comprising the appendixes to this volume, while the main portion of it confines itself to the presentation of facts and leads to a detailed knowl- edge of what should be done in each state to give it a reasonably effective system of legal procedure. Not purporting to be all-inclusive, the recommenda- tions of the Bar Association were meant to correct the fundamental problems, such as those arising in the selection of judges and juries, in rulemaking, in pretrial and trial practices, and in the state ad- ministrative agencies and tribunals, in the belief that once these were overcome other desirable ad- vances would follow. 6308. Waite, John Barker. Criminal law in action. New York, Holston House, Sears Pub. Co., 1934. 321 p. 34-15268 Law An inquiry into the functioning of criminal jus- tice in the United States. The law is viewed as a thing inert and its effectiveness as depending upon the activity of its agents. These agents — policemen, lawyers, commissioners, clerks, jurors, and judges as well as the public, newspapers, and the Federal government in its role as an enforcer of the law — are the subject of this book. Some of the spectacular failures and the less glaring inefficiencies of the criminal law in action are recounted to bolster the author's contentions. In summing up he asserts that the public must shed the illusion that tinkering with the criminal law will improve its administra- tion, and must turn its energies to improving the attitude of the law's administrators. But this, the author says, will only be brought about when the general attitude toward criminals is transformed into one which does not consider them as subjects for punishment or retribution, but as menaces to society who must be dealt with by isolation, seg- regation, rehabilitation, or even death. 6309. Willoughby, William F. Principles of ju- dicial administration. Washington, Brook- ings Institution, 1929. xxii, 662 p. ([Brookings Institution] Institute for Government Research. Principles of administration [6] ) 29-13834 JK1521.W5; Law Bibliography: p. 607-652. Intended for students of political science as well as for members of the legal profession, this inclu- sive survey seeks to determine the organizational and procedural principles to be followed if efficiency in the administration of justice is to be attained. Considered in a systematic manner is the entire subject of the organization and conduct of the judicial branch of government: the prevention of crime; the enforcement of the law; judicial organi- zation, personnel, and procedure; and legal aid. Applying to the judicial branch of government the same criteria by which the efficiency of other governmental departments is evaluated, the author's method of attack is to resolve the great problem of judicial administration into its constituent ele- ments; to determine the fundamental principles that should govern in handling the conditions to be met; to describe the action which has been taken; to point out wherein this action has failed to con- form to the principles that should be observed and therefore has given unsatisfactory results; and, finally, to indicate the steps that should be taken to correct these mistakes, and the extent to which they have been taken in various jurisdictions. G. Administrative Law 6310. Cooper, Frank E. Administrative agencies and the courts. Ann Arbor, University of Michigan Law School, 195 1. xxv, 470 p. (Michi- gan legal studies) 51-62547 Law Bibliography: p. 409-416. A systematic description of the standards which the courts impose upon administrative agencies, controlling and limiting their actions. Leading cases illustrating principles governing frequently- litigated questions in contests between agencies and those with whom they deal are brought together, and the techniques of administrative adjudication are discussed. In examining the relationship be- tween administrative agencies and the courts, par- ticular attention is given to judicial doctrines concerning constitutional limitations on the dele- gation of powers to administrative agencies, pro- cedural requirements in cases where agencies LAW AND JUSTICE / 1027, exercise judicial powers, procedural and substantive requirements imposed in connection with the rule- making activities of agencies, and methods and scope of judicial review. 63 1 1. Heady, Ferrel. Administrative procedure legislation in the States. Ann Arbor, Uni- versity of Michigan Press, 1952. 137 p. (Michi- gan. University. Michigan governmental studies, no. 24) 52-62288 Law An evaluation of the actual working of general administrative procedural laws in representative States: North Dakota, Wisconsin, California, and Missouri, all of which had had such statutes for at least five years, long enough to provide an accumu- lation of experience. Attention also is given to Michigan, which possesses such a law, but of limited scope, and to Oklahoma, which at the time of writ- ing had not enacted any general procedural legis- lation. The object of this report is to determine whether such laws have improved the procedural practices of State regulatory agencies. Dr. Heady concludes that the general statutes reviewed "have had in the balance a beneficial effect in each state," and have not sabotaged the administrative process. But he issues a warning that there is pressure for more drastic regulation, which "threatens unless re- sisted to over judicialize the procedures of State regulative agencies." 6312. Landis, James M. The administrative proc- ess. New Haven, Yale University Press, 1938. 160 p. (Storrs lectures on jurisprudence, Yale School of Law, 1938) 38-29177 JK42i.L33;Law At the time Dean Landis delivered these lectures the administrative agencies had been the target of alarmist critics, who painted them as an incipient tyranny on the way to depriving the citizen of his inherited liberties and privileges under the rule of law. Such views are effectively contested here, by one who believed that the administrative process had come to stay, and was in fact "our generation's answer to the inadequacy of the judicial and the legislative processes." Agencies have been entrusted with rulemaking, enforcement, and the disposition of competing claims because the triadic com- partmentalization of government breaks down in dealing with modern problems. They have come into being whenever government assumes "respon- sibility not merely to maintain ethical levels in the economic relations of the members of society, but to provide for the efficient functioning of the eco- nomic processes of the state." They represent an advance in the application of expertness to govern- ment, and the more agencies the greater efficiency of regulation — provided that the relationships of the agencies to each other and to the other branches of government are properly solved. The greater part of the lectures is devoted to these right relation- ships. Judicial review of the agencies' results re- mains desirable, but only if the judges will respect their expertness, and decline to review findings of fact made by "men bred to the facts." 6313. Parker, Reginald. Administrative law, a text. Indianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill, 1952. 344 P- ;> 5 2 -95i Law "List of books and articles used": p. 313-322. Professor Parker of the University of Arkansas presents administrative law as a part of modern public law, which protects the government as well as its citizens, and ensures that the executive branch will function, in an adequate fashion, on behalf of the people and through law. He does not attempt to enter into the law pertaining to particular agen- cies, since each important subdivision would require a separate volume, but confines his treatise to gen- eral administrative law. Part 1 discusses the foun- dations of administrative law in the historic separa- tion of powers and in the constitutional guarantee of due process, and analyzes the Administrative Procedure Act of 1946, the text of which is given as Appendix 1. Part 2 is concerned with the estab- lishment of agencies, the hierarchy within the exec- utive branch, the internal organization of agencies, and the nature of administrative jurisdiction, which is not, as a rule, geographically limited. Part 3 describes "Administrative Functions and Processes," with emphasis on regulations, interpretations, and administrative decisions. Part 4 deals with "Judicial Remedies," the sphere of which has been contracting in recent years, and for which there is no uniform procedure. The concluding parts discuss "Execu- tion of Administrative Decisions" and "Damage Claims for Wrongful Administrative Acts," and the second appendix reprints most of the Federal Tort Claims Act of 1948. 6314. Pennock, James Roland. Administration and the rule of law. New York, Farrar & Rinehart, 1941. 259 p. (American government in action) "Selected bibliography"; p. 250-254. 41-11629 JK421.P35; Law This volume describes for the general reader "the fundamental safeguards which have developed around administrative action to insure the preserva- tion of private rights and interests." They fall into two great classes. The author declares that many of the most effective checks against abuses of ad- ministrative rulemaking are themselves administra- tive, internal checks as against the external check of judicial review. The formulation and publica- 1024 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES tion of its policies by each administrative tribunal, adequate notice, full hearing, reasoned and written decisions, and provision for administrative review are all essential safeguards of the internal kind. Beyond them, and ultimately indispensable if the rule of law is to be maintained, lies the power of the courts to review administrative acts and deci- sions. The four chapters on the courts discuss their attempts to set limits to the legislature's delegation of lawmaking powers — an important but at best a crude safeguard; the methods by which judicial control is effected notwithstanding the state's gen- eral immunity from suit; the courts' own views of the basis and extent of their powers of reviewing administrative decisions; review of actions under the general police power, which is more extensive; and review of agencies' decisions, which is less so. As of 1 94 1, the author thought that the continuous struggle to keep administrative power in the service of the general interest had been reasonably success- ful, but warned that overrapid growth or the triumph of special pressures might make necessary "at least temporary retrenchment, until the forces of constitutionalism can catch up with the growth of power which has outdistanced them." 6315. Swenson, Rinehart J. Federal administrative law; a study of the growth, nature, and con- trol of administrative action. New York, Ronald Press, 1952. 376 p. 52-9466 Law This study is intended not only for administrators, judges, and lawyers, but also for those concerned with the present-day functions of the Federal gov- ernment. It rests on the thesis that administrative action must continue to be developed into a coherent body of law, supervised by special courts of limited jurisdiction presided over by judges of such training and knowledge that they can cope with the highly technical points which are often involved in griev- ances resulting from such action. Dr. Swenson "traces the evolution of American thinking and prac- tice in a changing economy and society from a philosophy of 'rugged individualism' to that of the modern 'service state' with its 'big government' and bureaucracy. The forms of administrative action and the means of their enforcement are examined. The relations of the constitutional separation of powers and of the Anglo-American rule of law to the development of administrative law in the United States are explored at some length, and a detailed and extensive consideration is given to the review of administrative action by the regular courts. Finally, attention is called to the role of the Congress in supervising administration." Dr. Swenson thinks that we have not set up a satisfactory system for the control of administration, for control by the judicial courts is "a not-too-happy solution." 6316. U. S. Attorney General's Committee on Administrative Procedure. Administrative procedure in government agencies. Report of the Committee on Administrative Procedure, appointed by the Attorney General, at the request of the Presi- dent, to investigate the need for procedural reform in various administrative tribunals and to suggest improvements therein. Washington, U.S. Govt. Print. Off., 1 94 1. 474 p. (77th Cong., 1st sess. Senate. Document 8) 41-50129 JK416.A5 i94i;Law Homer S. Cummings suggested it, Frank Murphy in 1939 appointed the Attorney General's Commit- tee on Administrative Procedure, and Robert H. Jackson transmitted its final report. Dean Acheson was its chairman, Walter Gellhorn its director, and Francis Biddle, Lloyd K. Garrison, D. Lawrence Groner, Henry M. Hart, Jr., Carl McFarland, and Arthur T. Vanderbilt among the distinguished jur- ists who served upon it. The Committee assigned a staff of lawyer-investigators to study rulemaking and adjudicating procedures in 9 departments and 19 independent commissions or boards. The final report opens with a general view of the administra- tive process, and then surveys administrative in- formation, informal and formal methods of adjudi- cation, judicial review of such adjudication, and procedure in rulemaking. Four members of the Committee presented additional views and recom- mendations, and there are over 200 pages of ap- pendixes. The Committee recommended the estab- lishment of an office of Federal administrative procedure, and detailed changes in many of the agencies and departmental offices. It drafted a bill for the general control of Federal administrative procedure which, delayed by the war, revised after congressional hearings, and amended in the process of enactment, finally became the Administrative Procedure Act of 1946. H. Lawyers and the Legal Profession 6317. Brown, Esther Lucile. Lawyers and the promotion of justice. New York, Russell Sage Foundation, 1938. 302 p. 38-39583 Law The fifth in a series of monographs sponsored by the Russell Sage Foundation and concerned with various established or emerging professions in the LAW AND JUSTICE / IO25 United States, this study considers the legal pro- fession primarily from the standpoint of its effective- ness in meeting public needs. The author finds that the bench and bar have fallen short of accept- ing certain social responsibilities, but notes trends that indicate a growing desire within the profession to promote justice more effectively. Among these particular attention is directed to improvements in the laws themselves, developments in the courts and in new tribunals, legal service both to the poor and to those of moderate means, and the movement to institute an integrated bar. Preceding this discus- sion are chapters dealing with the evolution of the legal profession in the United States, legal educa- tion, rules and procedures governing admission to the bar, the more important national professional associations, and the number of, demand for, and income of lawyers. The following weaknesses in the administration of justice are diagnosed; delay and uncertainty in the courts, excessive expense of litigation, unprofessional conduct of attorneys some- times resulting in their disbarment, lack of interest in the promotion of justice, and the failure of the profession to accept social responsibilities. 6318. Brown, Esther Lucile. Lawyers, law schools and the public service. New York, Russell Sage Foundation, 1948. 258 p. 48-1216 Law Since 1933 the United States has been transformed into "a highly centralized, bureaucratic state of behemoth proportions," in which the men who make and carry out decisions are and will continue to be lawyers. Therefore, says Professor George E. Os- borne, "it seems obvious that one basic function of any law school in the future must be the conscious and systematic training of leaders in policy-making and policy-administration for the achievement of those values" sought in a free society. During 1939-41 the author visited 23 law schools in all parts of the country in order to find out "to what degree and with what efficiency legal education was preparing men and women to serve the interests of government." The first two parts of her report are comparatively brief. Part 1 estimates the number of Federal attorneys and describes their recruitment. Part 2 describes the nature of their work, and espe- cially their participation in policymaking through drafting, interpretation, review, litigation, and counseling — in consequence of which they readily move on into administration. Part 3, from page 93, is on the "Implications for Legal Education"; it discusses the use of social science materials, the introduction of new courses and teaching materials, and the reorientation of selected portions of the curriculum. The author feared that her report would seem a very pessimistic one; in spite of intro- ductory efforts, "the wrench from traditionalism" was a slow and hazardous undertaking, and more money, larger staffs, and careful plans were needed for further progress. 6319. Drinker, Henry S. Legal ethics. New York, Columbia University Press, 1953. xxii, 448 p. (Legal studies of the William Nelson Cromwell Foundation) 53-11928 Law Index of works cited: p. [367]~436. 6320. Phillips, Orie L., and Philbrick McCoy. Conduct of judges and lawyers; a study of professional ethics, discipline, and disbarment. Los Angeles, Published for the Survey of the Legal Profession by Parker, 1952, i.e. 1953. xiii, 247, xiv p. 53—834 Law Bibliography: p. v-xiv at end. Brief accounts of the origins and history of the bars of England and the United States, of the bar associations, and the development of standards of professional conduct and the disciplinary proceed- ings used to enforce them constitute part one of Legal Ethics, by the long-term chairman of the American Bar Association's Standing Committee on Professional Ethics and Grievances. The aim of his study is to make available a summary of the decisions interpreting the canons of ethics made in the past three decades by the ethics committees of the various bar associations, as well as a few of the pertinent statutory provisions and court decisions. In essence, this is a handbook for the use of those seeking to ascertain the duties and obligations of lawyers. These duties and obligations of lawyers to the public, the courts, clients and professional colleagues, and the question of advertising and solici- tation of professional employment are discussed at length in the second portion of this study. The final chapter is a summation of the canons of judicial ethics, supplemented by appendixes including deci- sions by the American Bar Association's Ethics Com- mittee, a digest of representative court decisions specifying grounds for disbarment, suspension, or censure, the canons of professional and judicial ethics, and other useful materials. The report by Messrs. Phillips and McCoy resulted from the Sur- vey of the Legal Profession under the auspices of the American Bar Association. Following a short treatment of the history of the codes of professional and judicial ethics, such matters are examined as the inculcation of professional standards and their observance, the determination of character require- ments for admission to the bar, disciplinary proce- dures, the selection and conduct of judges, the views held by laymen, and the perennial problem of "trial by newspaper." While fundamental con- cepts of honesty and integrity must be adhered to by lawyers, the authors conclude, standards of con- 1026 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES duct must be reviewed constandy with regard to the impact of the activities of the legal profession upon the welfare of society as a whole. These fundamental concepts and standards must be in- culcated in students at the outset of their law school careers, they must be made familiar to the public, and adherence to them must be demanded of those to whom the community has given the privilege of practicing law. 6321. Harno, Albert J. Legal education in the United States; a report prepared for the sur- vey of the Legal Profession. San Francisco, Ban- croft-Whitney, 1953. 211 p. 53~9°63 Law As an introduction to a critical appraisal of his subject, Dean Harno traces the evolution of Ameri- can legal education from its English heritage in the institution of the Inns of Court and the person of William Blackstone, through its formative and laissez faire periods, and into the present era opened by Christopher Langdell's introduction of the case method of instruction in the latter half of the 19th century. A discussion of the impact of professional groups, principally the American Bar Association and the Association of American Law Schools, upon legal education finds that they have been and are powerful forces for the advancement of legal in- struction. Criticisms of modern legal education are surveyed and evaluated, and in his concluding chap- ter the author declares that its worst features have resulted from too little thinking about the objectives of legal education on the part of law school faculties. While the virtues implicit in the good lawyer are qualitative, admission standards for the law schools and the bar are quantitative. The lack of a quality criterion, inadequate financing of the schools, large classes, the lack of concern for prelegal education, overcrowded curricula, the excessive reliance upon the case method, and the serious cultural lag indi- cated by the great overemphasis on private law in the curriculum at the expense of public law are among the important topics surveyed. However, it is pointed out that there is now a ferment in the law schools which should produce changes for the better. 6322. Hays, Arthur Garfield. City lawyer; the autobiography of a law practice. New York, Simon & Schuster, 1942. xvi, 482 p. illus. 42-17237 Law Hays (1881-1954) was a graduate of Columbia University Law School who began practice in New York City, with such successful and lucrative re- sults that he was able to devote much of his time to the causes near his heart: the defense of civil liberdes and the support of progressive politics. In his chapter on "Getting Started" he modestly de- clares that "sheer, downright luck" is essential for success at the bar: "Assuming that you know your business and are reasonably diligent, the gods of luck will make or break you." He became a fa- vorite attorney with people in show business, and narrates his services to Billy Rose, Sigmund Rom- berg, and other members of the Song Writers Pro- tective Association. His first law partnership had offices on Wall Street, and one chapter describes his business on behalf of brokerage firms; he thinks that their honesdy was unjustly impugned, and that the Securities and Exchange Commission instituted a reign of terror on Wall Street. Another chapter generalizes from his practice in marriage and di- vorce cases; in them, he says, it is almost always im- possible to fix the blame on either party. One chap- ter is devoted to his work for the American Civil Liberties Union, which he narrated at greater length elsewhere (no. 6127). In part 4 he describes at length several well-publicized trials in which he participated, including those of the Wendell will and heirs (1931) and the Reichstag Fire (in which he served on an international commission of in- quiry which had no legal authority). 6323. Miller, Claude R. Practice of Law. Chi- cago, Callaghan, 1946. xvi, 300 p. 46-6524 Law The legal profession, says Attorney Miller of Chi- cago, is usually about 90 percent practice to 10 percent law — in spite of which "most legal libraries have thousands of books on law for every one on practice." He therefore aims to set out, with much condensation and generalization, "a comprehensive picture of the kind of professional life that lawyers lead," with some suggestions, warnings, and advice. There are chapters on "The Study of Law," "Choos- ing a Place to Practice," "Starting Out in the Practice," "Securing Business," "Trying Cases" (in- cluding a section on "The Art of Losing" without incurring insomnia, indigestion, or alcoholism)," "Appellate Procedure," "General Office Practice," "Administrative Practice," "Corporation Practice," "Office Management," etc. In conclusion Mr. Miller sets before every new lawyer the desirability of doing his part to improve the profession, and sug- gests that politeness in the courtroom, even toward witnesses and spectators, would do much to advance the law's repute. 6324. Partridge, Bellamy. Country lawyer. Illus- trated by Stephen J. Voorhies. New York, Whittlesey House, McGraw-Hill, 1939. 317 p. 40-1 181 Law An engaging portrait of lawyer Samuel Selden Partridge, his practice, and his family, written by his son. The locale is an upstate New York village (Phelps, in Ontario County) and the period is that extending from Appomattox to Sarajevo, the golden age of the country town and the country lawyer, in which a more isolated and slow-paced and less regimented life than that of today existed. Then the local lawyer was often father confessor to the community in which he lived. Not intended to be merely regional, this account is held by the author to be typical of the legal practices carried on in small towns across the country during that era. 6325. Pound, Roscoe. The lawyer from antiquity to modern times, with particular reference to the development of bar associations in the United States. A study prepared for and published by the Survey of the Legal Profession under the auspices of American Bar Association. St. Paul, West Pub. Co., 1953. xxxii, 404 p. 53-1859 Law Bibliography: p. 363-379. Basically a history of bar organization in the United States with an emphasis upon state and local groups, this is also a biography of a profession. Dean Pound, following an introductory discussion of the characteristics of a profession and a bar asso- ciation, begins his narrative with an account of the earliest lawyers in ancient Greece, and brings it down through the medieval period, in which he finds the English origins of the legal profession of the English-speaking world. It was from the mother country that the Colonial lawyers brought to America that fraternalism characteristic of the English bar and which has remained a trademark of American lawyers. Most of this work is devoted to developments in the United States. It traces the histories of bar organization and the legal profes- sion during the Colonial period, and during the middle years of the 19th century when the law, under the stress of a movement for deprofession- alization, suffered from a breakdown of organiza- tion and education. Both were revived with the commencement of the era of modern bar associations in 1870. From there the development of various state and local legal groups is traced, and in an epilogue the author enters a plea for an integrated bar as a means of preserving the profession from disintegrating tendencies. 6326. Reed, Alfred Zantzinger. Training for the public profession of the law; historical de- velopment and principal contemporary problems of legal education in the United States, with some account of conditions in England and Canada. New York, 192 1. xviii, 498 p. (The Carnegie Founda- tion for the Advancement of Teaching. Bulletin no. 15) 21-16382 LC1141.R4 LB2334.C4, no. 15; Law Bibliography: p. 460-469. LAW AND JUSTICE / IO27 6327. Reed, Alfred Zantzinger. Present-day law schools in the United States and Canada. New York, 1928. xv, 598 p. (The Carnegie Foundation for the Advancement of Teaching. Bulletin no. 21) 28-22195 LC1141.R3 LB2334.C4, no. 21 ; Law "Bibliography and acknowledgments of assistance rendered": p. 561-573. These two titles comprise a scholarly study of the development of American legal education and of the relationship between the law schools and the practice of the law. Education for the bar in the United States, the author points out, has been com- plicated by the intimate connection between politics and the legal profession; it is this connection upon which the American system of legal education rests. The major portion of Training for the Public Pro- fession of the Law is concerned with the history of American legal education before 1890, with a brief resume of it from that year to the outbreak of World War I; with the relationship of the bar and bar examinations to legal education; and with the his- torical ties between a trained and educated bar and the administration of justice. The concluding sec- tion discusses briefly and affirmatively the premise that lawyers and law schools cannot be made to con- form to a single standardized type; this involves a consideration of the various types of law schools and a plea for the strengthening of the legitimate schools if legal education and its products are to render adequate public service. Mr. Reed's second work deals with the function and work of the law schools in the United States and Canada at the time of writing, in the light of their curricula, conditions of administration, and methods of teaching, and of the relationship between the schools and the pro- fessional practitioners. The movement toward standardization of legal education is discussed at length, and the author calls for the maintenance of diversity among law schools and a graded bar, in order that the schools may not produce legal jacks of all trades. 6328. Roalfe, William R. The libraries of the legal profession; a study prepared for the Survey of the Legal Profession under the auspices of American Bar Association. St. Paul, West Pub. Co., 1953. xviii, 471 p. 53-12556 Law "Survey of the Legal Profession; bibliography of 150 reports, by Reginald Heber Smith": p. 429-443. The collections, personnel, and physical plants of law libraries of nearly all types — office, association, court, state and Federal — are treated in this com- prehensive survey. Cooperation among libraries and library groups and through professional asso- ciations is also discussed. Law school libraries are not extensively examined, as they have been pre- 1028 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES viously considered in a survey of legal education. The task of advancing law librarianship, it is felt, rests not solely upon the shoulders of the librarians, but also upon those of the practitioners, who may reasonably be expected to have a general under- standing and appreciation of the place of the law library in the profession's functioning, to make library staff appointments with care, and to assume a greater responsibility for the financial support of service rendered to them by the law libraries. It is maintained that this support, together with intelli- gent leadership among the librarians, can do much to raise the effectiveness of law library service. 6329. Smith, Reginald Heber. Justice and the poor, a study of the present denial of justice to the poor and of the agencies making more equal their position before the law, with particular ref- erence to legal aid work in the United States. New York, Published for the Carnegie Foundation for the Advancement of Teaching by Scribner, 1919. xiv, 271 p. 45-32508 HV682.A5S56 1919; Law 6330. Brownell, Emery A. Legal aid in the United States; a study of the availability of lawyers' services for persons unable to pay fees. Rochester, N. Y., Lawyers Co-operative Pub. Co., 1951. xxiv, 333 p. diagr. 51-8125 Law Justice and the Poor is a study of the unavail- ability of justice to those unable to pay for legal counsel, and of the agencies endeavoring to give them assistance in the handling of their cases. Such remedial agencies as courts of small claims, conciliation, and domestic relations and administra- tive tribunals and their officials, as well as the work of assigned counsels and public defenders are con- sidered. Lastly and most exhaustively, the develop- ment and operation of the legal aid societies since their origin in 1876 is discussed. Legal Aid in the United States is an authoritative compilation of facts concerning the subject, surveying its past and pres- ent and hopefully prognosticating its future. Be- tween 1876 and 1948 the number of cases in which legal aid was given, as reported by the organiza- tions concerned, steadily rose from 212 to 344,616 with a total of 8,043,990 cases for the 73-year period. These operations rose in cost from $1,060 to $1,519,076, with a total of $19,855,024 for the period. Sixty percent of the financial burden of le- gal aid was being borne by the community chests, and the next largest share came from private phil- anthropy. As a cause, it has gained little popularity with the man in the street but civic leaders have readily perceived that it is essential to democratic equality before the law. The volume was produced for the Survey of the Legal Profession conducted under the auspices of the American Bar Associa- tion. Both of these studies contain appendixes of illustrative statistics, and Mr. Brownell adds 10 pages of legal aid offices operating in 1950. 6331. Sunderland, Edson R. History of the Amer- ican Bar Association and its work. With a concluding chapter on the Committee on Scope and Correlation of Work and its program by William J. Jameson. [Ann Arbor?] 1953. 251 p. 53-4°35 Law 6332. Rutherford, Mary Louise (Schuman). The influence of the American Bar Association on public opinion and legislation. Philadelphia, x 937- 393 P- . . 37-22332 Law Thesis (Ph. D.) — University of Pennsylvania, 1936. Bibliography: p. 381-383. With the objects of providing opportunities for social intercourse among lawyers, improving Amer- ican jurisprudence, raising professional standards, and improving the administration of justice, the American Bar Association was formed in 1878. Three eras in the history and development of the Association are defined by the author: the Saratoga era (1878-1902) during which, in a conservative and leisurely manner, the Association was establish- ing itself as a national organization, accumulating distinguished and influential members, and formu- lating policies looking toward the assumption of leadership in the American legal profession; the era of national expansion (1902-1936) in which the membership and variety of activities of the Associa- tion grew tremendously; and the era of federation, which began in 1936 when the Association ceased to be an organization of individuals and assumed, in the name of authority, efficiency, and professional solidarity and responsibility, the character of a fed- eration of the organized units of the American bar. Mrs. Rutherford's is a specialized and penetrating study of the significance, possibilities, and effective- ness of the policies of the American Bar Association; she calls it suggestive rather than exhaustive. It classifies and organizes evidence of the organized bar's influence as reflected in the activities of certain sections and committees of the Association. Within the scope of this survey are analyses of the Associa- tion's structure, its influence on its own members, its public relations policies, and its influence on public opinion in regard to the Constitution, im- proving judicial procedure, controlling administra- tive agencies, and standardizing legislation. She concludes that the Association has done its best work in the field of judicial procedure, where it LAW AND JUSTICE / IO29 has put through some noteworthy reforms, and has aid, but on the whole it has pointed the way for rendered a distinct service in the drafting of legisla- voluntary organizations of experts to come to the tion. It has done far too little in determining the aid of "a democracy enfeebled because of the pau- curriculum of schools of law and in promoting legal city of trained leaders and workers in its service." XXXI Politics, Parties, Elections A. Politics: General 6333- 6 34 B. Politics: Special 6341-6346 C. Political Parties 6347-6373 D. Local studies 6374-6383 E. Machines and Bosses 6384-639 x F. Pressures 6392-6399 G. Elections: Machinery 6400-64 1 1 H. Elections: Results 6412-6423 I. Reform 6424-6434 CHAPTER XXIX deals with American government in theory, in constitutional frame- work, and in concrete operation. The present chapter deals with the political processes which determine who shall be the governors and by what policies they shall be guided. Elections by the enfranchised portion of the people have been a feature of American life since 1619, when the "first-born child of the Mother of Parliaments," as F. W. Maitland happily termed it, met at Jamestown; but neither then nor in 1776 or 1787 were the pro- portion of the electors to the whole population, or the offices thought proper to be filled by their ballots, the same as today. The tendency throughout has been toward an expansion of the franchise, with only one serious setback when the Southern Negro was disfranchised after 1877. There has also been an increase in the number of offices filled by election, but here there has been in the recent past a con- siderable reaction, evident in such cases as judges and city managers. However, in America the per- sons who fill appointive offices are chosen by persons who have themselves been elected to office. The national elections held every other year, and the State and local ones held at varying times, have never been left to the determination of an unguided, uninfluenced electorate. Party divisions began to emerge within a few years of the establishment of government under the Constitution in 1789, and clearly determined the outcome of the third Pres- idential election, in 1796. Although parties were organized in response to the national situation, they lost no time in taking State and local offices into their scope, with the result that each major party 1030 normally offers a candidate for every office that is to be filled. Parties have regularly come into being in order to give effect to a particular policy or to ward off a particular menace, but those that survive have changed policies often and taken ambiguous lines even more often. Parties developed their characteristic organ, the national nominating con- vention, as early as the 1830's, and the national committee, which maintains the organization be- tween elections, not much later. Along with the urban metropolis, there appeared about i860 the new phenomenon of the party ma- chine, usually dominated by an individual of ex- ceptional qualities, the boss. These machines drew their power from the masses of the laboringmen and the foreign-born, to whom their precinct agents served as a kind of special providence in time of need or disaster. They drew their money by de- livering the vote in favor of candidates who could and would act or enact to favor the men of enter- prise who were supplying the city with gas mains, trolley lines, or whatever. The only persons un- benefited were the middling sort, who found them- selves overtaxed and overcharged for inferior services, and turned mugwumps or progressives or reformers of various kinds. It is only in our own day that various factors, such as the increasing im- portance of mass communications, have caused a perceptible waning of the machine's importance. Long before this development, businessmen as well as other groups desiring political services had found another method of seeking them, by laying siege to legislators. The greatest pressure exerted by pres- sure groups is simply their refusal to take no for an answer: they have a single objective and their agents unlimited time to give to it, while the legislator has dozens of subjects and persons claim- ing his attention. Pressures, unlike machines, have been growing, and their regulation is still new and tentative. Political scientists made some admirable studies in both realms in the 1930's, most of which appear in Sections E and F. The progressive move- ment early in the present century believed that political abuses could be eliminated by ingenious improvements in the machinery of elections. These have practically all been adopted or at least tried POLITICS, PARTIES, ELECTIONS / IO3I for a time, but seldom if ever produced the antici- pated reformation. This need not imply that the changes were not desirable in themselves. These and related matters are treated in Section G. Recent students of elections have sought to predict future results from existing vote statistics or samples of opinion gathered by interviewers. The electorate continues to surprise them from time to time. Per- haps the most interesting tides in Section H are those which seek to trace, by repeated interviews in the course of a campaign, the formation and change of voting intention; this comes very near to the heart of democracy itself. A variety of things are grouped together in Section I, their common denominator being the aim of raising the political process onto a higher plane. Much of what seems failure might look very different if we could know what things would be like if the effort had never been made. Few but politicians express or have expressed any glowing satisfaction with American politics, but no one can deny that it keeps the future open, or that the voters can have what they want if they will keep their minds on it. A. Politics: General 6333. Kent, Frank R. The great game of politics; an effort to present the elementary human facts about politics, politicians and political ma- chines, candidates and their ways, for the benefit of the average citizen. Garden City, N.Y., Double- day, Doran, 1935. xiv, 354 p. 35-8662 JK2276.K4 1935 First published in 1923. "A plain reporter's story of the political game," by an editor and political commentator of the Baltimore Sunpapers. The author has endeavored to show both the practical and the human side of the political machine, "the good as well as the bad in it, to tell who the men are, how they work, what they get out of it, whence it comes and how much," how political power is acquired, and how and why it is held. Mr. Kent emphasizes the "overwhelming proportion of insincerity, buncombe, and fakery that characterizes almost every campaign and nearly all candidates" and, in the latter chapters, sets forth his views of political issues, finances, and the formulation of newspaper political policies. In the author's opinion, the country was [as of 1935] really run by the political machines, and the bosses had become the most influential members of their communities because of the voters' inertia and ig- norance. Voters would not participate in the pri- maries, yet "99 per cent of all candidates for all of- fices are nominated as a result of primaries," and control of them means control of the political situa- tion in a given community. Mr. Kent offers neither panacea nor preachment, but pleads for "regular, intelligent, and informed voting by all those quali- fied to vote." 6334. Kent, Frank R. Political behavior; the here- tofore unwritten laws, customs and principles of politics as practiced in the United States. New York, Morrow, 1928. 342 p. 28-20042 JK1726.K4 A disillusioned analysis of political processes and the behavior of politicians and voters in the United States by the redoubtable liberal Democrat. Mr. Kent sought to formulate the ground rules for political success and to clarify the facts of political life. He found "a legion of seasoned, tested axioms and a few broad general laws, a real study and understanding of which are just as necessary to the successful practicing politican as a thorough knowledge of legal procedure to a successful lawyer or biology to a doctor." The candidate who, con- sciously or unconsciously, applies the proved political IO32 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES rules and obeys the laws of politics has a tremen- dous advantage over the candidate who fails to do so, regardless of character and intelligence. Mr. Kent terms party regularity and organization sup- port the two great essentials, and explains how to achieve the latter. He then takes up the more complex and flexible rules whereby candidates for elective office make successful appeals to the voters. Among the things to avoid are unnecessary antag- onisms, controversial issues, overestimation of voter intelligence, showing up the opponent, high-hatting the voters, appearing ridiculous, and fixed princi- ples. The candidate must be sure to put on a good show, and to have adequate finances and ample publicity. 6335. Key, Valdimer O. Politics, parties, and pressure groups. 3d ed. New York, Crowell, 1952. xvi, 799 p. 52-7851 JF2051.K4 1952 First published in 1942. A college textbook on politics which makes the central question "the relation of those with power to those who respond to, resist, or acquiesce in its exercise." Power is considered here as an indis- pensable means to the other ends which find ex- pression in public policy, especially in legislation. In a democracy the mass of citizens choose from among competing inner circles of leaders, but initia- tive and leadership rest with the chosen leaders rather than with the mass. A leader in American politics, however, must make his decisions not only on the merits of the case but on their probable effects upon his supporters, and he may attempt to control by persuasion rather than by imposing his will. The problem of the politician or statesman in a democracy, Professor Key believes, is to maintain a balance among the demands of competing interests or values; it is not necessarily to express the "popular will," although every regime seeks to attract popular support. On these principles he analyzes the com- position, objectives, and techniques of the competing interests, and the changes, maladjustments, and readjustments that have occurred in the American political equilibrium. 6336. Logan, Edward B., ed. The American po- litical scene. Rev. ed. New York, Harper, 1938. 311 p. 38-31039 JK1726.L6 1938 First published in 1936. Contents. — Present-day characteristics of Amer- ican political parties, by A. N. Holcombe. — Party organization in the United States, by E. B. Logan. — The politician and the voter, by J. T. Salter. — Presidential campaigns, by H. R. Bruce. — The use of money in elections, by }. K. Pollock. — Pressure groups and propaganda, by H. L. Childs. — Nomina- tions, by Louise Overacker. — Appendix 1. The changing outlook for a realignment of parties, by A. N. Holcombe. — Appendix 2. The platforms of the two major parties. Analyses by seven political scientists of the most important determinants in American politics. The authors attempt to explain some of the influences and controls which operate in the selection of our public officials and govern their activities after they have been selected. These writers find among the forces to be reckoned with: the relatively even division of the bulk of the voters between the Democratic and Republican Parties; a growing volatility of the electorate; the power of the political party over public policy and officials; the politician's practice of the art of politics; the management and techniques of caucuses, conventions, nominations, and campaigns; the necessity of party and candidate financial expenditure; and the influence of pressure groups, especially from business, labor, and agriculture. 6337. McKean, Dayton D. Party and pressure politics. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1949. 712 p. 49-101 10 JK2265.M27 A college textbook on practical politics and the relationship of propaganda to party and pressure politics. Professor McKean believes in the work- ability of the two-party system and in its value to popular democratic government. Representative government on a large scale, he thinks, can function only through parties. However, many of its diffi- culties arise from the inadequacies of parties, their inability to muster effective majorities, their lack of general and authoritative party voices and councils, and their indifference at the local and State level to national issues and public policy. Beset by these difficulties, by sectional differences, and by diverse interests, the major parties find the formulation and execution of broad policies difficult or impossible; but the organized minorities, not responsible to the electorate, know what they want and concentrate upon policy. The pressure groups can and do dis- cipline legislatures and executives, engage in prop- aganda for or against them, get out the vote, and, in some instances, nominate officials. The problem, in Professor McKean's opinion, is to strengthen the national or Presidential party as against the pressure groups and local bosses. He considers several means of improving the national leadership and party responsibility. He shows less concern for the bosses since he considers them nowhere indispensable. 6338. Odegard, Peter H., and Elva Allen Helms. American politics; a study in political dy- namics. 2d ed. New York, Harper, 1947. 896 p. illus. 47-31189 E183.O32 1947 POLITICS, PARTIES, ELECTIONS / IO33 First published in 1938. A college textbook "combining structural descrip- tion with functional analysis" of the American political system. Politics is defined as "the quest for power," involving "a struggle for the right to man- age public affairs in a manner favorable to those who succeed in the quest and those whom they represent." This quest is pursued within the frame of the Constitution by persons organized in political parties or pressure groups or in both. The authors endeavor to show the operations of parties, pressure groups, bosses, and machines, as well as the effect of civil rights, election laws, and corrupt practices acts. American political history is discussed in terms not only of party leaders and organizations but also of fundamental economic and social cleav- ages. Since both major parties represent a cross section of the total political, economic, and social interests, "differences within the parties are greater than differences between them, and in the determi- nation of policy pressure politics are usually more important than party politics!' They cautiously suggest "some form of proportional or functional representation," supplementary to the existing sys- tem, in order to remedy the helplessness of legisla- tures before the organized pressure groups and their lobbyists. 6339. Stimpson, George W. A book about Amer- ican politics. New York, Harper, 1952. 554 p. 52-5472 E178.25.S86 A collection of "the odd, the unusual and the interesting" facts about American political life arranged in question and answer form. The au- thor's purpose has been to put together "the greatest number of answers to questions that are most often asked in this field." The answers consist of com- pact short articles "based on careful and prolonged research." Mr. Stimpson, an experienced Wash- ington newspaper correspondent, deals with such matters as campaigns, committees, conventions, legislation, parties, platforms, politicians, and slo- gans. He traces the origin of many political terms, catchwords, phrases, and nicknames; notices splinter parties; and throws light on obscure or curious events, movements, and individuals. Unfortunately he does not refer to the sources of his information. A fairly full index compensates somewhat for the lack of any discernible organization in the book. 6340. Tourtellot, Arthur B. An anatomy of American politics; innovation versus con- servatism. Indianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill, 1950. 349 p. 50-6590 JK34.T6 A general interpretation of American politics by a journalist who has endeavored to rethink the whole subject for himself, with results well suited to attract and inform the general reader. The first part, on political institutions, considers the evolu- tion and relative positions of the Presidency, Con- gress, and the Supreme Court. There is no object more important to the voter than to secure a strong President capable of using for the public good the enormous power now attached to the office. Part 2 defines "The Basic Conflict" in American political experience as "conservatism versus progressivism, caution versus experimentalism." It has been ex- pressed though the political parties, which have kept the continuity of their labels despite "a total absence of any continuity in party principles" — at times which party has been on the progressive side and which on the conservative has been completely con- fusing. Since the major parties are inclusive and tolerant and not exclusive or given to purges, third- party movements have lost impetus and nothing constructive is to be expected from them. Part 3, on political methods, discusses conventions, cam- paigns, and elections. The author dwells on the necessity, if the present system is to continue, for the party out of power to deal in live issues rather than ancient fears and compulsions, so as to present an effective challenge and alternative to the in- cumbents. The bibliographical essay (p. 319-336) is designed "for those who want to go deeper." B. Politics: Special 6341. Carlson, Oliver, and Aldrich Blake. How to get into politics; the art of winning elec- tions. New York, Duell, Sloan & Pearce, 1946. 210 p. 46-8047 JF2051.C3 Mr. Carlson describes himself as a "public and industrial relations counsellor," and Mr. Blake him- self as a "political research and organization ad- visor"; they have joined forces in order to inform the ordinary American citizen who may find him- self catapulted into the political arena what it will involve and what he must and must not do. The task of winning and holding an electorate is one of the most complex, difficult, and problematic in human affairs. The ambitious politician, they note, must join a party, faithfully preach its gospel, and attend its precinct caucus. At this point, however, 1034 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES he must come to terms with "powerful and grasping factions." "With few exceptions, he simply gives way to that combination of special group interests which he believes has the money and the power to re-elect him, seeking some compromise where possible but submitting to the terms of uncondi- tional surrender when necessary to his own self preservation." The authors offer much concrete and practical advice to the budding politician con- cerning the public relations of politics, notably, the campaign budget, the party workshop which lies behind campaign headquarters, precinct work, pub- licity and propaganda, and platforms and speech- making. 6342. Douglas, Paul H. Ethics in government. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1952. 114 p. (The Godkin lectures at Harvard Univer- sity, 1 951) 52-9386 JK468.E7D68 In these four lectures Senator Douglas argues that although government ethics in the United States have generally improved during the last century, they are by no means good enough and re- quire further melioration. He locates the areas wherein ethical difficulties and failures are most likely to occur, pointing out that in most instances the pressure comes from private sources which are seeking to obtain favors from government. Senator Douglas suggests rules and criteria for the regula- tion of economic controls, loans, and subsidies, warns against indirect influences, such as the ac- ceptance of favors or gifts and the sale of govern- ment prestige or experience, and offers a code of ethical behavior for public officials. In a discussion of the ethical problems of legislators, he considers how far legislators and administrators may properly influence each other, and urges improvement in the procedures and attitudes of investigating com- mittees. Some of the moral indignation aroused over the delinquencies of government officials should, in his opinion, properly be applied to the interests that entice and corrupt them. 6343. Garrigues, Charles Harris. You're paying for it! A guide to graft. New York, Funk & Wagnalls, 1936. 254 p. 36-27398 JK.1994.G3 A cynical report on American politics by a dis- illusioned California crusader. The author holds that "graft is not a parasite sapping the tree of democracy, but the very fruit of the tree itself." Competition among special interests compels each to seek "special privileges" and to pay the representa- tives of government for such privileges; the system "compels every man to be as corrupt as his most corrupt competitor." The government official who refused a bribe would have neither campaign funds nor votes and would be replaced by one more com- pliant. The law is ineffectual, and the occasional grafter who goes to jail is either very stupid, very greedy, or the victim of a feud between politicians. The bosses the author regards as merely the "man- agers of the marketplace to which officials and special interests can come to buy or sell their com- modities — special privilege." In mock earnest, he spells out the various means whereby the young politician may enjoy the fruits of graft, and very convincingly describes typical circumstances of the bribe, the fix, and the graft investigation. 6344. Graham, George A. Morality in American politics. New York, Random House, 1952. 337 P- 52-7142 JK468.E7G7 A study of the problem of morality in American politics which maintains that the profession of politics, although differing importantly from the other professions, must be subject to at least equiv- alent standards of integrity and competence. Moral problems, moral standards, moral failures, and moral achievements are involved in the structure of political institutions: the legislature, the execu- tive, the courts, public administration, parties, pressure groups, and even the public. Professor Graham explores certain public characteristics and attitudes: "complaisance over early and substantial American success in securing human rights and promoting individual welfare; subconscious con- fidence in the automatic qualities of the economic and political order; legalism"; philosophical naivete; and a pattern of life dominated by specialization, organization, loyalties, and pressures. In his opin- ion, if this typical pluralistic organization of Amer- ican life is to be preserved, it behooves each organization to avoid jurisdictional expansion and to strive constandy for moderation in its demands upon its members and society. A legalistic balance of rights and duties is not enough, however, nor is the mere avoidance of corruption. Leaders must keep their loyalties in balance, their special zeals in check, and they must recognize a public responsi- bility. The author appeals for renewed idealism in all Americans. 6345. Kelley, Stanley, Jr. Professional public re- lations and political power. Baltimore, Johns Hopkins Press, 1956. 247 p. 56-8492 JF2112.P8K4 The first serious study of a new technique of politics which has already come near to revolution- izing the whole field, and is far from having dis- closed all its possibilities. The author, who originated the study at Johns Hopkins and com- pleted it at the Brookings Institution, has used "highly fugitive" materials — letters, interviews, and documents from private files — to supplement POLITICS, PARTIES, ELECTIONS / IO35 periodical articles and a few books of relevance. "The public relations man, more assiduously than others, has studied the problems of using the re- sources that a complex modern communication system offers for organizing and directing public opinion." First employed by business organizations, he has now become a permanent staff employee of State and national party organizations. Dr. Kelley seeks to determine his importance for democratic processes by means of "the description and analysis of the actions of particular public relations men at work in particular campaigns." He successively deals with "Campaigns, Inc." the California public relations firm otherwise known as Whitaker and Baxter, which has been operating since 1933; the American Medical Association's campaign of 1948-52 against President Truman's proposal of national health insurance, which included inter- ventions in local elections intended to defeat legis- lators in favor of the plan; the part played by Jon M. Jonkel of Chicago in the Maryland campaign of 1950, whereby J. M. Buder displaced Millard Tydings as U. S. Senator; and the public relations activities, on a new and enlarged scale, in the 1952 campaign for the Presidency, when Robert Humphreys, heading the public relations division of the Republican National Committee, employed the Kudner and the Batten, Barton, Durstine and Osborn agencies. The chapter of conclusions notes that the decline of the boss is one reason for the rise of the public relations man, and that the latter is now called upon to take part in the planning sessions where the selection of issues takes place. 6346. Lubell, Samuel. The future of American politics. New York, Harper, 1952. 285 p. 52-5462 E743.L85 A comprehensive analysis of American political trends as observed by an eminent journalist in 1951. Mr. Lubell finds that eight primary forces are re- making the politics of our time: the simultaneous coming of age of our various urban minorities, which has transformed machine politics and thrown political bosses on the defensive; the rise of a new middle class, conservative yet with political attitudes "rooted in memories of discrimination, poverty and the Great Depiession"; the Negro, restless because of migration and discrimination; the economic revolution in the South which threatens to destroy Southern sectionalism; the upheaval in the inter- national power situation; the fundamental change in the farmer's relation to the city; the advance of organized labor to unprecedented financial and membership strength and the recession of its polit- ical vitality; and, finally, the impact of the cold war upon the so-called welfare state. In the author's opinion, these revolutionary forces have produced a larger political revolution — the transformation of the United States from a nation with a traditional Republican majority to one with a normal Demo- cratic majority, although, in 1951, he found a gov- ernmental deadlock rather than an effective majority. C. Political Parties 6347. Binkley, Wilfred E. American political parties, their natural history. 3d ed., rev. and enl. New York, Knopf, 1958. 470 p. 58-2201 JK2261.B5 1958 Professor Binkley 's book is a very readable history of parties and elections from the adoption of the Constitution to the reelection of Eisenhower; the "natural history" of the title is somewhat puzzling, but is evidently related to his conviction that all American parties have been made up of groups of varying economic interest or ideological persuasion, which are combined by national political leaders adept at group diplomacy and able to discover the formulas and focal points upon which all may agree. The pattern of party leadership was set by Thomas Jefferson, who was able to unite all the elements disadvantaged by the Hamiltonian policies. The Federalists did not want to be a party, but had to become one in sheer self-defense. American party leaders, however, can lead the people only where they are willing to follow, and must be astute opportunists governed by expediency and free from petrified ideas. Dr. Binkley concentrates upon the major parties and gives small attention to the minor ones. His chapters, which are not rigidly chrono- logical, include treatments of "One-Party Govern- ment," 1816-28, and of "The Breakup of the Major Parties" during the 1850's. The Democratic Party in i860 entered upon a period of confusion which culminated in 1872; its revival began in 1876. The Republican Party, born in 1856, was reborn in 1868 when the forces of economic exploitation lined up behind Ulysses S. Grant. The book was originally published in 1943; the new edition adds an account of the 1948 election and a chapter on "The Recovery of the Republican Party." There is a supplementary index, but the bibliography contains no titles later than 1 94 1. IO36 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 6348. Black, Theodore Milton. Democratic Party publicity in the 1940 campaign. New York, Plymouth Pub. Co., 1941. 169 p. 42-8075 JK2317.1940.B5 An analysis of Democratic political propaganda during the bitterly contested Presidential campaign of 1940. Here is the "story of men in an organiza- tion; it describes their efforts to convince the Amer- ican people that Franklin D. Roosevelt should be elected for a third term." The author writes from firsthand information, having been employed by the publicity division of the Democratic National Com- mittee during part of the campaign. He illustrates the "techniques of political propaganda, in their modern setting, and the structure of a present-day political publicity bureau in its most active form." In his opinion, Charles Michelson and the publicity division's corps of veteran journalists, all skilled in the art of political warfare, were significant factors in the third-term success. Their chief tactics, as here reported, were to attack Willkie and the Re- publicans, to pin the tags of Big Business, Appease- ment, and Inexperience upon them, and to caricature the Republican candidate. Blaming the frenzy and "personalization" of the campaign upon a lack of really controversial issues, the author acquits both sides of using "smear" strategy. 6349. Bone, Hugh A. "Smear" politics; an anal- ysis of 1940 campaign literature. Wash- ington, American Council on Public Affairs, 1941. 49 p. ( [Studies in political science] ) 42-4561 JK2281.B65 A study based largely upon unpublished data assembled by the Special Senate Committee to In- vestigate Campaign Expenditures in 1940. It aims to make available exhibits of the literature used in the 1940 campaign; to indicate the major psycho- logical appeals employed; to call attention to some of the problems of determining responsibility for the issuance of campaign propaganda, and to those raised by anonymous political journalism; and "to offer suggestions for reducing the scope and volume of that campaign literature which does violence to the spirit and process of democracy." The examples of campaign literature included here were selected to display a fair cross section as to form, substance, and distribution; comment has been kept to a min- imum. In the 1940 campaign "literature ostensi- bly printed and authorized by non-party groups greatly exceeded that of political parties," and pro- Willkie materials greatly exceeded those supporting Roosevelt. The majority of "smear" leaflets came from other than party sources. Not only did scurrilous personal attacks upon nominees and their families appear in these, but objectionable appeals were made to religion, race, and nationality. The author thought that legislation should require the name and address of the sponsor to appear on all campaign literature, and that the parties should maintain a much tighter control over their local agents in matters of publicity. 6350. Bryan, William Jennings. A tale of two conventions. New York, Funk & Wagnalls, 1912. xviii, 307 p. 12-22646 JK2263 1912.B7 This rare example of political journalism by a leading politician is a collection of daily reports made by Bryan, acting as a special newspaper cor- respondent, at the Republican and Democratic National Conventions of 19 12 in Chicago and Baltimore, respectively, together with a summary of the events and other matter bearing on the Progressive Party Convention in Chicago. It re- prints the three platforms, selected contemporary cartoons, and the speeches of such notables as Theo- dore Roosevelt, Byran himself, Elihu Root, and Alton B. Parker. Bryan found that two evils stood out prominently at the Republican Convention: "the organization of a new convention by an old, out- grown committee"; and "the employment, for the purpose of overriding a majority of committeemen, of delegations representing mythical constituencies in the South." Of the 75 contested seats there, all were given to the Taft rather than the Roosevelt delegates, he notes, and with them went control of the convention. Bryan praised the constructive Democratic platform, and claimed that the respon- siveness of the convention to the more than one hundred thousand telegrams sent to them by "the Democrats at home" showed the power of public opinion and the soundness of the party. Bryan's reports have immediacy and pace; his style is marked by rhetorical flourishes and pious apothegms; and he understood well what was going on. 635 1. Carroll, Eber Malcolm. Origins of the Whig Party. Durham, N. C, Duke University Press, 1925. 260 p. 25-23123 JK2331.C3 1922 Thesis (Ph. D.) — University of Michigan, 1922. Bibliography: p. [228J-238. A review of the complex origins and the history to 1840 of the Whig Party, which was united only in a general conservatism and in opposition to Jacksonian Democracy. Its difficulties, the author believes, inhered in its necessities as an opposition, requiring the aid of all dissidents, and in the failure of the National Republican Party to which it was heir. Its weaknesses Dr. Carroll attributes partly to John Quincy Adams' lack of skill as a politician and partly to the rising tide of frontier democracy in favor of Jackson. Adams' crushing defeat for reelection to the Presidency in 1828 eliminated him as leader of the National Republican Party, and POLITICS, PARTIES, ELECTIONS / IO37 Clay's thorough defeat in 1832 discredited the party itself. The Whig Party was organized in 1834, but, the author notes, recognized leaders who could sap Democratic strength only after it had lost the election of 1836. By nominating William Henry Harrison in 1840, the Whigs demonstrated their conviction "that the Democrats should be fought with their own weapons." "The reward was a brief tenure of power in 1841; the penalty was the disruption of the party when, under Tyler, dissen- sion became active again." 6352. Croly, Herbert D. Marcus Alonzo Hanna; his life and work. New York, Macmillan, 1912. 495 p. illus. 12-9163 E664.H24C9 A sympathetic biography of the great Republican organizer based not only upon Hanna's very scanty papers but also upon statements solicited from his business and political associates. Although he does not underemphasize the difficulties of giving a fair account of Hanna's career or of passing objective judgments upon a man who was involved in bitter contention, Croly begs the "unprejudiced attention" of his readers. Mark Hanna (1837-1904), he maintains, was formed under the same influences as hundreds of other Middle Westerners who com- bined a business with a political career, but he lived "more energetically, more sincerely, and more suc- cessfully" than the others. His pioneering and prosperous coal and iron business and other enter- prises at Cleveland were begun after the Civil War, when economic opportunities were abundant, and continued until 1894. As early as 1888, Croly asserts, this industrial pioneer "had made up his mind to nominate, if possible, a political leader from Ohio as the Republican candidate for the presidency." William McKinley became both the intimate friend with a bright political future and the available candidate. The author concludes that the interdependence of business and politics, in the era of McKinley and protectionism, gave to a man like Hanna, who embodied the alliance, an oppor- tunity for effective influence. 6353. Davenport, Walter. Power and glory, the life of Boies Penrose. New York, Putnam, 1931. 240 p. illus. 31-31210 E664.P41D3 A lively and anecdotal biography of Boies Penrose ( 1 860-1921), one of the last and greatest of the political bosses, based mainly upon a series of articles published under the same title in Collier's Weekly. Of no political party in his youth, Penrose "was to become a Republican of Republicans." He came of Republican stock and tradition, and was "bap- tised in its most conservative pool — Philadelphia — and dedicated to its tightest fundamentals." Pen- rose is characterized here as an intellectual by inheritance and equipment, with no tolerance for the less gifted. He was drafted and elected in 1884 by the powerful Philadelphia Republican machine to the Pennsylvania legislature, where he represented a constituency composed of his city's highest and lowest social strata. After one term in the lower house, he was advanced to the State senate, serving there continuously from 1887 to 1897. In 1897, with the support of Matthew S. Quay, Republican State boss, he was elected to the United States Senate and served until his death. Once there, Penrose fought to stay; "his commitments, his pride, his love of power held him to that." He succeeded to control of the State party machinery upon Quay's death in 1904. In Mr. Davenport's opinion, it is highly probable that some of the Penrose victories were purchased, and certain that he jumped to do the bidding of the Pittsburgh steel magnate, Henry C. Frick. 6354. Farley, James A. Behind the ballots; the personal history of a politician. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1938. 392 p. 38-28947 E748.F24F3 A candid political memoir by James A. Farley (b. 1888), a Democrat who began his political career at the age of 22 by winning the town clerkship of Stony Point, N. Y., a normally Republican commu- nity. After touching lightly upon his own earlier years, the author presents a behind-the-scenes account of the aggressive campaign for Franklin D. Roosevelt which he and Louis McHenry Howe conducted dur- ing the year and a half preceding the 1932 national convention. Mr. Farley, a strong believer in or- ganization politics and in the mastery of detail, re- ports with particularity the grass-roots organizing, trial balloons, political drumming, and delegate- pledging which helped him "sell a presidential candidate to the nation." His description of the bargaining done at the 1932 Democratic National Convention is both amiable and forthright. In Mr. Farley's opinion, the successful cultivation of the women's vote was a large factor in the Presidential election. The 1936 landslide had deep significance, he believes, because it occurred in the face of stren- uous opposition from the big business interests. The author tends to discuss the New Deal and his own part in it in terms of men rather than issues, inasmuch as his forte was political management and backstage strategy rather than administration or legislation. 6355. Farley, James A. Jim Farley's story; the Roosevelt years. New York, Whittlesey House, 1948. 388 p. illus. 48-946 E806.F255 The continuation of Mr. Farley's political memoir is devoted mainly to a detailed history of the "slow, IO38 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES almost imperceptible drifting apart on political prin- ciples" of himself and President Roosevelt. Mr. Farley, placing the start of the estrangement at the 1936 campaign, believes that the President was jeal- ous of possible successors, and never forgave him "for putting party welfare above the personal alle- giance he considered his due." Mr. Farley may have regarded Roosevelt's suggestion that he run in New York either for Governor or for Senator as an attempt to sidetrack him from the election of 1940. The attempted purge of 1938, which violated the author's creed of party regularity, caused him to lose faith in the President. "The attempt to estab- lish a personal party," Mr. Farley observes sorrow- fully, "the neglect of party leaders, the assumption of control over the judiciary and Congress, and the gratification of personal ambition in the third and fourth terms — all were the evil fruit of his breaking the rules of the game." He does not consider that absorption in a course of policy may render personal ambition and playing a game equally irrelevant. Mr. Farley quotes many revealing conversations and anecdotes. 6356. Fine, Nathan. Labor and farmer parties in the United States, 1828-1928. New York City, Rand School of Social Science, 1928. 445 p. 28-24182 HD8076.F5 The author, who was an associate of the Rand School of Social Science, was concerned to trace the attempts of "the American workers," on the land or in industry, to advance their interests through political organization. The earliest labor party was launched by the Mechanics' Union of Trade Asso- ciations of Philadelphia in 1828, and was promptly imitated in New York; neither group survived the presidential election of 1832. After noting other early and sporadic movements, the author devotes a chapter to the united front of 1886, when Henry George ran for mayor of New York, and one to the Grangers, Greenbackers, and Populists. He then enters upon the history of the Socialist Labor Party, and pursues the fortunes of the socialist movement through the next eight chapters, the bulk of the book (p. 88-362). Concluding this with the Com- munist-Socialist split, he takes the measure of the former: "No matter how decent, progressive or militant a trade union leader or rank and filer is, the communist will try to destroy him if he does not take orders — whatever they are at the moment — from the Workers' Party leadership in America and Moscow." The concluding chapters deal with the Nonpartisan League, the Farmer-Labor Party, and the Conference for Progressive Political Action. While his story could be regarded, he said, as one failure after another, "the most striking fact about the labor and farmer parties in America over the past century was that they never stopped springing up." 6357. Herring, Edward Pendleton. The politics of democracy; American parties in action [by] Pendleton Herring. New York, Norton, 1940. xx, 468 p. illus. 40-27328 JK2265.H47 An attempt to show the nature of the American party system and its relations to other social proc- esses through an analysis of the politics of democ- racy. The author examines such factors as machine control, pressure politics, propaganda, monied inter- ests, patronage, and bureaucracy. These Dr. Her- ring considers merely the reverse sides of elements integral to the democratic process. This American political process, he believes, through its toleration of various attitudes and programs, provides the milieu within which a science of society may be developed and intelligence may be applied to our common problems. He maintains that we cannot greatly change the nature of American politics so long as the democratic order prevails, but that with patience and skill we should be able to achieve the desirable life. In his view, adjustment is the essence of the politics of democracy, in that political parties hold power only through popular support and in that the political machinery is able to keep power re- sponsive to change and experimentation. The func- tion of the American party system should be to keep the majority and minority viewpoints from diverg- ing to the point where they can no longer be recon- ciled under constitutional procedure. Compromise and tolerance must be maintained. 6358. Hicks, John D. The Populist revolt; a his- tory of the Farmers' Alliance and the Peo- ple's Party. Minneapolis, University of Minnesota Press, 1 93 1. 473 p. illus. 31-30954 JK2372.H5 Bibliography: p. [445]— 464. A scholarly history of the Populist movement, the conditions that produced it, the supporters of the cause, and its contributions to political and economic reform. Professor Hicks thinks that, beginning in the late 1870's, the American West was peopled too rapidly, and that the successive agrarian movements, particularly the Farmers' Alliance and the Populist Party, were merely the "inevitable attempts of a be- wildered people to find relief from a state of eco- nomic distress made certain by the unprecedented size and suddenness of their assault upon the West and by the finality with which they had conquered it." Among the farmers' grievances were drought conditions in the decade 1887-97, high shipping costs, the political influence of the railroads, the dis- appearance of free land, price-fixing by the trusts, the protective tariff, and especially a growing burden of debt. Among their demands were cheap money, POLITICS, PARTIES, ELECTIONS / IO39 free land, honest transportation, and the abolition of foreclosure. By 1890 it had become clear, the author notes, that neither the Northwestern formula of establishing state political parties nor the South- ern formula of working through the Democratic Party was adequate for reform. Demand shifted "from free land to legislation, from the ideal of individualism to the ideal of social control through regulation by law." Most of the demands first for- mulated by the Populists were given effect by other parties in later decades. 6359. Kent, Frank R. The Democratic Party, a history. New York, Century, 1928. 568 p. illus. 28-8482 JK2316.K4 A chronicle of the Democratic Party from its birth in 1792 to early 1928. The author's purpose was to tell the truth about his party rather than to glorify it. Mr. Kent admired the "genuine and indis- putable greatness of the basic Democratic princi- ples," but deplored the "almost incredible record of stupidity and failure, the frequency and violence with which its performances have clashed with its professions; the wreck it has time and again made of its own prospects." The story of the Democratic Party is, in the author's opinion, the story of five men outstanding in its history who gave the party its principles, shaped its policies and destiny, led it in the critical conflicts, were responsible alike for its greatest achievements and its monumental failures, and lent it color, character, and vitality. The first was Thomas Jefferson, enunciator of the basic democratic doctrine of government for and by the people. He was followed by Andrew Jackson, who originated the spoils system and modern party meth- ods, Grover Cleveland, who acted upon the precept that "public office is a public trust," William Jen- nings Bryan, the financial heretic who changed the party principles, and Woodrow Wilson, whose rec- ord of domestic reforms was in 1928 unparalleled. 6360. Kipnis, Ira. The American socialist move- ment, 1897-19 1 2. New York, Columbia University Press, 1952. 496 p. 52-13945 JK2391.S6K5 A history of the American socialist movement which centers in its years of peak activity, 1897-1912. The first six chapters deal with the background of the movement from the introduction of Marxian socialism into the United States by German immi- grants of the 1850's down to the formation of the Socialist Party in 190 1 by American Marxists con- vinced that capitalism was destroying the nation's economic equality and corrupting its democratic heritage. The remainder of the book studies the Socialist Party both as a political organization and a social movement. Dr. Kipnis points out the im- pressive if ephemeral achievements of the party to 1 912: its growth from less than 10,000 to 150,000 members, the increase of its voting strength from 95,000 to 900,000, the election of more than 1,000 members to public office, the passage of hundreds of reform bills, the winning of position and influence in the American Federation of Labor, and its in- strumentality in organizing the Industrial Workers of the World. The shortcomings of the revolu- tionary left-wing Socialists were serious enough, the author believes, but major responsibility for the decline of the movement rests upon members of the right wing who controlled the party and determined its policy and activities. Elated by electoral success, they turned the party into "an opportunist political organization devoted to winning public office for its leaders." 6361. Kleeberg, Gordon S. P. The formation of the Republican Party as a national political organization. New York, Moods Pub. Co., 191 1. 244 p. 11-29805 JK2356.K6 Bibliography: p. 235-244. This Columbia University dissertation traces the formation and the development to 191 1 of the na- Party. The Kansas-Nebraska Act of 1854 demon- strated that the West could be preserved as free territory only by a powerful political party com- mitted to keeping slavery out, and those opposed to the extension of slave territory began to draw to- gether in local political organizations. In parts of the West, New England, and the Middle States, Republican groups had reached a high degree of local organization by the Presidential year 1856, and were ready to be built into a national machine. The national organization was substantially com- plete by adjournment of the second Republican Na- tional Convention in i860, and the precedents it established were still operating more than half a century later — the national committee's call for the national convention, the convention itself, its temporary and permanent officers, its rules of procedure, the four great committees, the plat- form and nominations, the principle of majority nomination, the fixed number of delegates, and the national committee with its officers and powers. Dr. Kleeberg traces in detail the minor changes in the composition and procedure of the national conven- tions, and in the development of the Republican National Committee, during these 50 years. 6362. MacKay, Kenneth Campbell. The Pro- gressive movement of 1924. New York, Columbia University Press, 1947. 298 p. illus. (Columbia University. Faculty of Political Science. IO4O / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Studies in history, economics and public law, no. 527) 47-3 8 55 E795.M3 1947 H31.C7, no. 527 Bibliography: p. 279-291. An evaluation of the Progressive Party of 1924 in relation to the whole American progressive movement of the 20th century, together with a detailed analysis of the campaign problems of the Progressives of 1924. Dr. MacKay sees in the 1924 movement a bond of common purpose with other progressive movements, reaching back to the poli- cies of such early insurgents as the Greenbackers of 1876, and extending forward to many of the reforms and experiments of the New Deal. In his opinion, three tendencies are common to American pro- gressive movements: insistence upon the removal of exploitation and corruption, desire to change the structure of the government and to place control of it in the hands of the many, and belief in the necessity of extending government functions to re- lieve economic distress. The 1924 movement had its own distinctive features, however: it polled more votes than had any other minor party, it repre- sented the first formal alliance of American or- ganized labor with Socialists, farmers, and intel- lectuals, and it aimed to unite its diverse elements into a permanent party dedicated to political reform and economic democracy. The movement was doomed, the author believes, because it was ham- pered by state election laws, had too little campaign money, and lacked cohesiveness and organization. 6363. Merriam, Charles Edward, and Harold Foote Gosnell. The American party sys- tem; an introduction to the study of political parties in the United States. 4th ed. New York, Mac- millan, 1949. 530 p. 49-3967 JK2265.M4 1949 First published in 1922. An analysis of the American two-party political system. Professors Merriam and Gosnell discuss such general considerations as the relation of de- mocracy to the party system, theories of suffrage, the functioning of parties in the formulation of social, economic, and political policy, and the motives — economic, sectional, racial, or religious — which gov- ern political action. Among the other factors in American political life considered here are party leaders, bosses, and reformers; party organization; spoils politics; nominations and election machinery; modern techniques of winning elections; statistical sampling devices and their uses; election laws; and proposed methods of putting the party system upon a higher intellectual and administrative level. The party process is slowly being changed, the authors conclude, and party activities are being funda- mentally modified. The decline of patronage as a principal element in the party, through the gradual substitution of the merit system for the spoils sys- tem in public administration, has weakened the machine and led to a professionally and technically based public service. Responsible government in turn tends to give broader scope to the party leader and less to the party boss. Professors Merriam and Gosnell detect a developing sense of civic responsi- bility in the United States, but regard many of the problems of democratic society as remaining to be solved. 6364. Michelson, Charles. The ghost talks. New York, Putnam, 1944. xvi, 245 p. illus. 44-3334 E806.M54 Chatty reminiscences and knowing political commentary by a former Washington newspaper correspondent who served as publicity director of the Democratic National Committee from 1929 to 1940. Mr. Michelson offers no startling new reve- lations but does clarify the record at certain points. Although Franklin D. Roosevelt listened to his advisers, the author believes, he pursued his own plans. The President dictated his own final ver- sions of his speeches, generally culling the best ideas submitted in drafts. He was, in Mr. Michel- son's opinion, "a better phrase maker than anybody he ever had around him." Denying the existence of a "smear Hoover" conspiracy in the 1930 or 1932 campaign, the author asserts blundy: "There was no occasion for billingsgate, no necessity for mis- representation, no excuse for slander. A man sat in the President's chair who did not fit." He dis- cusses the members of President Roosevelt's entour- age, their contributions to his success, their relative independence, their influence, and their rivalries. He describes the methods, issues, and financing of three Presidential campaigns. Prior to the Euro- pean crisis, the author states positively, nothing was further from Roosevelt's mind than a third-term candidacy. 6365. Myers, William Starr. The Republican Party, a history. Rev. ed. New York, Century, 193 1. 517 p. illus. 32-1529 JK2356.M85 193 1 First published in 1928. 6366. Moos, Malcolm C. The Republicans; a history of their party. New York, Random House, 1956. 564 p. 56-5195 JK2356.M6 Professor Myers' long-standard history of the Republican Party from its inception in the "Anti- Nebraska Conventions" of 1854 through the elec- tions of 1930, was written in "the conviction that parties are the natural and necessary organs of government and administration." In his opinion, the Republican platform of i860 forecast much of POLITICS, PARTIES, ELECTIONS / IO4I the Republican policy of succeeding years, even to 1930, furnishing unity of purpose during the whole period of the party's domination of the Federal government. The first principle dealt with the tariff, and began the process of uniting in Repub- lican ranks "the business and industrial interests without which, as not only American history but that of other self-governing countries shows, it is impossible to continue political domination." Built not merely for the year's campaign but looking toward a well-established and permanent national political party, the platform as a whole prepared an economic basis for the cooperation of the agrarian, commercial, and industrial interests of the country. The author credits the Lincoln administration with laying firmly the foundations upon which the later successes of the Republican Party were erected, Hayes with rehabilitating the party after the Grant administrations, McKinley and Theodore Roosevelt with reorganizing and activating it into an aggres- sive party, and Coolidge for saving it after Harding's errors. Dr. Moos' The Republicans has the obvious advantages of carrying the story through six fur- ther elections, of using some results of recent his- torical scholarship, and of employing up-to-date techniques of analyzing election returns. He pro- vides a crowded narrative, filled with colorful and lively incidents, and accompanied by pungent comments, his own as well as those made by con- temporaries. He is able to draw upon his own thorough knowledge of recent politics to illuminate situations in the remoter past. He narrates the party's origins and developments through the dis- puted election of 1876 in considerable detail, then rather skimps the four succeeding "fifty-fifty" elec- tions, but amplifies his narrative from 1896 on until he requires two whole chapters to chronicle the great Republican comeback of 1952. His attitude is that of a moderate critic, to whom the "liberal capitalism" advocated by the party founders and by its "amateur" wing in our day is a valid doctrine. He does not like the "monopoly capitalism" which in 1868 captured and exploited for its own purposes a party that had become "hallowed in consequence of its fight to free the slaves and save the Union." The party so oriented would have succumbed to the revolts of the 1890's save for the timely emergence of the organizing genius of Mark Hanna, one of the few businessmen who have had a profound instinct for politics. 6367. Porter, Kirk H., and Donald Bruce Johnson, comps. National party platforms, 1840- 1956. Urbana, University of Illinois Press, 1956. 573 p. 56-10916 JK2255.P6 1956 First published in 1924. Unabridged texts of the national platforms of all 431240 — 60 67 the major and of the principal minor parties drawn from official proceedings of the conventions or from campaign literature, beginning with the campaign of 1840 and the Democratic platform of that year, and extending through the campaign of 1956, with the platforms of the Democratic, Prohibition, Re- publican, Socialist, Socialist Labor, and Socialist Workers Parties. The compilers have taken some account of the size of the group which professed to be a national party, the relative permanence of the organization, and its historical importance. Platforms of defecting segments of major parties have been included if of significance. An explana- tory paragraph or two prefaces the chapter devoted to each campaign. The compilers consider plat- forms to be the primary statements of party prin- ciples and policies, and, as evidence of what party leaders believe to be the important current issues, reflections of major political trends. As such, they often foreshadow new economic, social, and political developments. 6368. Quint, Howard H. The forging of Ameri- can socialism; origins of the modern move- ment. Columbia, University of South Carolina Press, 1953. 409 p. 53-9397 HX83.Q5 "Bibliographical essay": p. 389-394. A study of the formative and hopeful phase of American socialism. An introductory chapter, "Marxism Comes to America," sets forth concisely the events of the earlier years, 1870-86. The re- mainder of the book deals with the evolution of formal socialism and the development of socialist parties in the United States between 1886 and 1901. Indicating both the European influences and the distinctively American elements, Professor Quint shows that the upsurge of American socialism was only partly inspired by classical Marxist doctrine, and came primarily as a protest against the social inequities resulting from rapid industrialization and economic concentration. He explores the many and various ideas and movements which were with difficulty united in 1901 to form the Socialist Party of America, among them Bellamy- inspired Nationalism, Christian Socialism, DeLeon- ism, Non-Partisan Socialism, and Fabianism. It was Edward Bellamy's Looking Backward, pub- lished in 1887, that first won a hearing for socialist ideas outside the laboring class and made socialism respectable. The emergence of the Populist wave in the early 1890's posed a problem to all socialist groups, and evoked every response from hostility to cooperation. After its collapse, Eugene V. Debs' adherence to the Social Democracy gave Utopian socialism a brief revival, but the schism of 1898 left the way clear for a party on lines already worked out in Germany and Britain. IO42 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 6369. Ross, Earle Dudley. The Liberal Republi- can movement. New York, Holt, 19 19. 267 p. 19-12223 JK2356.R5 E671.R82 Bibliography: p. 240-254. This Cornell University dissertation is a history of the group which split from the main Republican body as a new national party in 1872. The author calls Senator Carl Schurz of Missouri its spearhead, and gives as its motives dissatisfaction with the corruption, blunders, and partisanship of Grant's administration, and belief in the necessity for re- form measures. Dr. Ross is concerned particularly with the influence of the movement upon the re- organization of national parties. He notes the discredited condition of the Democrats, their in- ability to profit from the mistakes and dissensions of the Republicans, and their failure to show any real change of heart in 1868. He indicates, also, their attempts in 1871 to rid themselves of the odium of disloyalty, and their willingness to enter into coalitions with the Liberal Republicans. He shows that many liberal Democrats were willing to merge with the new reform organization in order to defeat Grant. Greeley's nomination at the 1872 convention he terms a triumph of expe- rienced political intriguers over inexperienced and over-confident reformers. The impossibility of reconciling large numbers of Democratic voters to Greeley as a candidate was, he believes, the principal reason for the overwhelming defeat of the coalition by Grant and the Republicans. 6370. Schattschneider, Elmer E. Party govern- ment. New York, Farrar & Rinehart, 1942. xv, 219 p. (American government in action series) 42-2229 JK2265.S35 "Selected bibliography": p. 211-214. An analysis of the American political party sys- tem which posits that the political parties created democracy, that modern democracy is unthinkable save in terms of them, and that they are not mere appendages of modern government but are in the center of it and play a determinative and original part in it. The Democratic and Republican Parties are here commended not only for their long dura- tion and the stability of their "partnership" but for their accomplishments. Among these are the transformation of the American Constitution, the virtual abolition of the electoral college, the creation of a "plebiscitary presidency" and powerful contri- butions to the extraconstitutional growth of that office, and, most important, the remaking of the government of the United States from a small ex- periment in republicanism into the world's most powerful regime, vasdy more liberal and demo- cratic than it was in 1789. Professor Schattschnei- der sees the Presidency as the focus and rallying point of the great public interests of the nation and, as such, an office of expanding influence. He views Congress as the no man's land of American politics where the national parties, local party bosses, and pressure groups are engaged in a war for supremacy, and where, he hopes, for the public interest the national parties will emerge triumphant. 6371. Shannon, David A. The Socialist Party of America; a history. New York, Macmillan, 1955. 320 p. 55-13545 JK2391.S6S5 1955 "Bibliographical essay": p. 269-273. A history of the Socialist Party of America from its formation in 190 1 to its disintegration in the late 1930's. Professor Shannon traces the party origins to revolt in the 1890's against the social and economic conditions created by the mushrooming industrialism of America, and its components to the membership of such protest movements as the Bellamy Nationalist clubs, the Populist Party, Eugene V. Debs' Social Democratic Party, and dis- sidents from the Socialist Labor Party. During nearly two decades of growth and promise, the author points out, the Socialist Party was a broad political organization representing all shades of leftist conviction and all regions except the eastern and central South. The party's decline is the story of its transformation from a widely based political party into a monolithic sect of a few thousand members. The author discusses the regional or- ganizations of the party and their variety of social philosophies, as well as the membership in it of recent immigrants and Mayflower descendants, tenement dwellers and prairie farmers, intellectuals and sharecroppers, ministers and agnostics, syndi- calists and trade unionists, and revolutionaries and gradualists. He attributes the decline of "the big tent of American radicalism" in the 1920's, and its insignificance thereafter, to a variety of causes. Some of these, such as its failure to develop strong local organizations, were internal; the more im- portant ones, such as the high degree of class mo- bility in America, were external. 6372. Stedman, Murray S., Jr., and Susan W. Stedman. Discontent at the polls; a study of farmer and labor parties, 1827-1948. New York, Columbia University Press, 1950. 190 p. 49-50349 JK2261.S84 An analysis of the functions performed by the American farmer and labor parties which have com- peted seriously for control of state and nation. The authors examine the extent of such parties' success at the polls, the degree to which measures formu- lated by protest parties have become law, the factors making for farmer-labor success and failure, the relation of the protest vote to general economic con- ditions, the regional characteristics of this vote, the political strategy and tactics employed by the parties, and the legal and psychological barriers encountered by them. Farmer-labor parties act as vehicles for discontent, but have been most successful, the authors believe, as popularizers of ideas and issues neglected by the major parties. They have excited local and national interest in important problems and reform measures, but tend to die as soon as their principal issues are adopted by a major party. Their recurrent challenge to the major parties, how- ever, strengthens the democratic process. 6373. Thomas, Harrison Cook. The return of the Democratic Party to power in 1884. New York, Columbia University, 1919. 261 p. (Columbia University. Faculty of Political Science. Studies in history, economics and public law, v. 89, no. 2; whole no. 203) 19-26013 E695.T452 H31.C7, v. 89, no. 2 A study of the election of 1884, in which the chief issues were civil service and tariff reform. After POLITICS, PARTIES, ELECTIONS / IO43 four preliminary chapters, the book takes up its proper subjects: the Republican nomination of James G. Blaine (1830-1893), the Democratic nom- ination of Grover Cleveland, the campaign, the election, and the achievements of the Democratic administration. The Democrats were returned to power, the author believes, because of the lack of major issues between them and the Republicans, and because the characters of the candidates thereby became of determining importance. Blaine was an unsatisfactory candidate to the Independent Repub- licans; their defection and the defeat of the party ensued. He had always been a spoilsman and no civil service reformer; he had associated himself with many politicians of the lowest type; his pop- ularity was based upon appeals to the emotions and not upon his identification with policies; and, per- haps most important, he had never convinced a large enough number of voters of his complete honesty. Although Dr. Thomas credits Cleveland with progress in reform and with forward-looking legislation, he thinks that the reestablishment of the Democratic Party in real rivalry of the Repub- licans was the main result of their victory. D. Local Studies 6374. Fox, Dixon Ryan. The decline of aristoc- racy in the politics of New York. New York, Columbia University, 1919. 460 p. (Co- lumbia University. Faculty of Political Science. Studies in history, economics and public law, v. 86; whole no. 198) 19-18663 F123.F792 H3i.C7,v.86 This is a history of the decline of the Federalists in the State of New York, from the defeat in 1800 of the Federalist gubernatorial candidate, Stephen Van Rensselaer, to the 1840's. Starting with a tra- dition of government by an aristocracy of birth and station, the Federalists were ultimately trans- formed into Whigs, with a doctrine of government by capital and business enterprise. The story is told largely in terms of the programs and ideas of the opposing parties, Federalist and Democratic, and the careers and influences of such party leaders as DeWitt Clinton and Martin Van Buren. Dr. Fox contrasts the Federalists, led mainly by distin- guished lawyers and supported chiefly by the landed gentry, wealthy merchants, bankers, and the Epis- copal Church, with the Democrats, made up for the most part of farmers, workers, and immigrants. As the author observes, the bitter strife between the organizations had certain elements of a class war — but one in which the outcome was foredoomed. He narrates at some length the debates and pro- ceedings in the decisive state constitutional conven- tion of 1821, which adopted manhood suffrage and largely abolished property qualifications for office. But no sooner had political equality triumphed than manufacturing acquired a new importance and prestige, and its interests were sedulously culti- vated by the organizing genius of the new Whig Party, Thurlow Weed. 6375. Gosnell, Harold F. Negro politicians; the rise of Negro politics in Chicago. Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1935. xxxi, 404 p. (Social science studies, directed by the Social Science Research Committee of the University of Chicago, no. 32) 35" I 5 2 58 F548.9.N3G67 "Select bibliography": p. 380-387. A description of the struggle of a minority group to advance its status by political methods, inter preted to include voting, campaigning, bargaining for jobs and special favors, and office-holding. Much of the information presented has been col- lected by direct observation, interviews, and casual conversations. Republican, Democratic, and Com- munist meetings in Chicago's Black Belt have been 1044 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES observed, as have the work of party headquarters and the conduct of elections, legislative bodies, courts, and churches. In searching for economic opportunity, in trying to learn business practices, in seeking to run for city-wide elective offices, and in attempting to secure key positions in the party or- ganizations, Negroes have met the obstacle of preju- dice. In retaliation they have developed the doc- trine and practice of race solidarity. The author mentions County Commissioner Edward Wright, a lawyer, and Congressman Oscar DePriest, a suc- cessful contractor and real estate dealer, among the new, aggressive leaders. Ministers as well as leaders of the colored underworld are powerful in- fluences, and patronage is an important cementing agent. However inadequate the benefits secured by Chicago Negroes from their government as of 1935, the author believed their gains to be greater than those of unorganized minorities. 6376. Heard, Alexander. A two-party South? Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina Press, 1952. xviii, 334 p. illus. 52-8501 F215.H43 An analysis of Southern politics based upon a research project carried out with the aid of the Rockefeller Foundation, the Bureau of Public Ad- ministration of the University of Alabama, and the Institute for Research in Social Science of the Uni- versity of North Carolina, in which the author was the principal associate of Professor V. O. Key, Jr. The project resulted in the preparation of Dr. Key's book, Southern Politics in State and Nation (no. 6378), of which this volume is, in a sense, an exten- sion. Much of the information derives from 538 interviews conducted between November 1946 and February 1948 with politicians, public officials, and observers of politics in 1 1 Southern States. Professor Heard regards the Negro as the key factor in South- ern politics and finds that two sets of influences are affecting Southerners — the forces of change that encourage the growth of a second party, and the forces of stability that retard it. In his opinion, however, much of the South, a changing section in a changing nation, is moving closer to competitive politics. 6377. Kane, Harnett T. Louisiana hayride; the American rehearsal for dictatorship, 1928- 1940. New York, Morrow, 1941. 471 p. illus. 4i;7 I 43 F375.K16 A New Orleans newspaperman's vividly written report of the Huey Long regime in Louisiana, "the most complete despotism in the nation's history." Mr. Kane places the beginning in a poor-white up- surge, carefully nurtured by Long with his pleas for free books, good roads, free bridges, and lower utility rates, and his damaging charges against the administration, which put him in the governor's chair in 1928. Although Long (1893-1935), in the author's opinion, did not plan the full extent of his autocracy in advance, he dearly loved power. He differed from other Southern demagogues and spokesmen for the have-nots in his daring, his skills in manipulation, and his ability to snatch what he wanted regardless of the cost. After his impeach- ment and acquittal, Long began grooming himself for a national audience as a kind of Southern Will Rogers, the author observes, and in 193 1, after being elected United States Senator, he ventured upon his first national program, the "drop a crop" plan, which was less extravagant than his later "share the wealth" program, guaranteed to make every man a king. Over half the book is devoted to the regime of the Kingfish's political heirs, who were able to hold onto his powers and his opportunities for plunder for four and a half years after his assassination, and were dislodged only after an investigation by the U.S. Department of Justice had disclosed where the tax money was going. 6378. Key, Valdimer O. Southern politics in state and nation [by] V. O. Key, Jr., with the assistance of Alexander Heard. New York, Knopf, 1949. xxvi, 675, xiv p. illus. 49-10825 F215.K45 1949 An elaborate study of the electoral process in the South, based not only upon election statistics, stat- utes and constitutions, party rules, court decisions, newspapers, and other standard sources, but also upon interviews with 538 Southerners active in public life, including Congressmen, governors and other state officials, state legislators, Democratic and Republican Party officials, campaign managers, pre- cinct leaders, and persons charged with administra- tion of the poll tax, registration, and elections. Many other participants in or observers of the politi- cal scene were consulted, among them publishers, editors, and reporters; labor, industrial, and farm organization leaders; plantation owners; small farmers; prominent Negroes; reform leaders; and students of government and politics. The first 12 chapters describe the factional competitions within the Democratic Party in each State. The remainder of the book consists of topical analyses of the one- party system in operation, the size and composition of the electorate, and the restrictions on voting. Professor Key attributes Southern political region- alism and the special character of Southern political institutions to the Negro, and more particularly to the high-density black belts. The predominant consideration in Southern politics has been to assure POLITICS, PARTIES, ELECTIONS / IO45 a local subordination of the Negro population, and to block threatened interferences with the local arrangements from the outside. 6379. Lewinson, Paul. Race, class, & party, a history of Negro suffrage and white politics in the South. London, New York, Oxford Uni- versity Press, 1932. 302 p. 32-10400 JK1929.A2L4 Bibliography: p. 283-292. An explanation of the interaction between the racial question on the one hand, and the white class and party struggle on the other, in the South. The author notes the impossibility of telling the story of Negro suffrage in the South without taking account of the political division among the whites into the Bourbons — once planters, later industrial- ists, financiers, and landlords — and into a class of small farmers and city workingmen; he notes the equal impossibility of understanding white cleav- ages and issues without reference to the Negro as the common enemy, causing the formation of a solid white front. Part 1 shows the South as late as 1849 bipartisan in local politics, which were nor- mal in outline but embittered by the social and economic divisions arising from slavery; in i860, effectively united to uphold the status quo; from 1867 to 1876, again bipartisan; from 1876 to the 1890's, discordant because of the agrarian revolt, with the Negro holding a balance of power between factions; and by 1900, reunited once more in a white man's party, with the Negro thrust outside the pale of political activity. Part 2 describes the working of Negro disfranchisement from 1900 to 1930, either by provisions of the state constitution, by the "white primary" rules of the local Demo- cratic parties, or by complicated technical require- ments for registration, enforced only against Negroes. 6380. Merriam, Charles Edward. Chicago; a more intimate view of urban politics. New York, Macmillan, 1929. 305 p. 29-12608 F548.5.M56 An optimistic description, in part reminiscence, of some of the more important aspects of the political life of a great metropolitan community, by a Uni- versity of Chicago professor who served as alder- man for six years, and made a good race for mayor in 191 1. The author noted the presence of many interests in the political behavior of the city: those of the great agricultural clearing house, the rail and waterways, manufacturers, bankers, and the Chi- cago Federation of Labor. Also important to an understanding of Chicago's political attitudes and dispositions, he believed, were its three structural phases: the destruction by fire in 1871 and the "magic rebuilding"; the expansion of the city and creation of the World's Fair in 1893; and the era ushered in by the City Plan of 1907. He pointed out certain forces, notably the reluctance of Illinois to grant Chicago sufficient power to deal with its kaleidoscopic local situation, which made difficult the problem of government organization and stand- ards, and he stressed the importance of the three successive waves of immigration which gave Chi- cago its ethnological composition. The battle for home rule and the struggle for honesty and com- petence as against graft and spoils characterized the political history of Chicago to 1929. The author analyzed "The Big Fix" — the inner organi- zation designed to control the political situation and to be able to give immunity from the law — and illustrated the operation of actual government by the City Council. 6381. Peel, Roy V. The political clubs of New York City. New York, Putnam, 1935. 360 p. illus. 35-24274 JK2295.N74P4 Bibliography: p. 336-347. An analysis, which leans heavily on the vocabu- lary and methods of sociology, of the organization and activities of the political clubs of New York. Its thesis is that the club is the fundamental unit of political organization, provided for neither by state law nor by party rule, nevertheless universally acknowledged as the unit-cell of the major political parties. Clubs are formed, the author maintains, for the purpose of recruiting a stable personnel in the interests of the party organization, but the de- termination and satisfaction of those interests are left to the party leaders. The clubs and bosses of the metropolitan area have attempted without success to dictate to the state legislature, but in 1935 they did dominate city administration and the local bench. The clubs serve as political forums, stages for po- litical talents, and headquarters for campaigns; they are the "spokes for the wheels of patronage, perquisites and graft"; and, as Professor Peel shows, they have civic, social, charitable, educational, and individual objectives as well, which, so far as the ordinary member is concerned, frequently outweigh the political ones. The author thinks that such clubs, in their present state, are of limited and sometimes dubious value; but that they reflect a true need of men in society and could become the basis of a new territorial reorganization of govern- ment. 6382. Riordon, William L. Plunkitt of Tammany Hall; a series of very plain talks on very practical politics, delivered by ex-Senator George Washington Plunkitt, the Tammany philosopher, from his rostrum, the New York County Court- IO46 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES House bootblack stand, and recorded by William L. Riordon. Introd. by Roy V. Peel. New York, Knopf, 1948. Ivi, 131 p. 48-8750 JK2319.N57R5 1948 The political ideals, attitudes, and mores of George Washington Plunkitt (1842-1924), a Tam- many ward boss, as recorded by William L. Rior- don and originally published in 1905. Plunkitt's techniques are here regarded as eminently practical and his political philosophy is considered typical of the thinking of the machine boss. He secured a few followers who would vote as directed, ex- changed their votes with the regular leader in re- turn for influence, specifically jobs and favors, saw that his successes were advertised and drew addi- tional loyal adherents, repeating the process until he was the strongest man in the district. Careful to follow the organizational line, he managed to move quietly to the side of each successive Tam- many boss: Tweed, Kelly, Croker, and Murphy. Soon after he entered politics, Plunkitt became well- to-do by using his official position and political con- tacts to buy land which he could sell at a large profit, to buy surplus public property for a song, and to accept gifts and other tokens of gratitude. A distruster of thinkers, orators, and the merit sys- tem in the civil service, he believed firmly in per- sonal loyalty, patronage, human corruptibility, and the philosophy of "every man looking out for himself." 6383. Wooddy, Carroll Hill. The case of Frank L. Smith; a study in representative govern- ment. Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 193 1. 393 p. illus. 31-9949 F546.W91 A case history of an Illinois election leading to a major scandal, based upon interviews and corre- spondence with persons affected, as well as pub- lished sources and newspaper reports. The author finds "something impressive in the triumph and tragedy" of the career of Frank L. Smith (1867- 1950), who in 1926 was chairman of the Republican State Committee of Illinois and chairman of the Illinois Commerce Commission. Had circum- stances decreed that Smith contest for his real am- bition, the governorship, rather than for Federal office, or had his senatorial ambitions fallen into a year other than 1926, Dr. Wooddy believes, his case might never have come to light. Because of the scandalous Vare-Pepper-Pinchot primary in Penn- sylvania, however, the attention of a Senate investi- gating committee had been drawn to primary elec- tion expenses. Smith's fund was discovered to be not merely excessive (he spent $253,500), but to have been contributed mainly by the very utility interests over which he held official jurisdiction, and especially by the electric power tycoon, Samuel Insull, who put $125,000 in Smith's fund. The Smith case the author views as "merely a reflection of a maladjustment which has resulted from the perpetuation of the mechanisms of frontier democ- racy in a highly complicated industrialized and urbanized civilization," but he notes that the elec- torate reacted energetically as soon as information was put before it. E. Machines and Bosses 6384. Flynn, Edward J. You're the boss. [Auto- biography] New York, Viking Press, 1947. 244 p. 47-30772 F128.5.F6 An analysis and defense of machine politics, as well as a report of his own career, by "a reluctant politician" who argues that the "good" machine is both modern and indispensable to American polit- ical life. Boss Flynn of the Bronx (1891-1953) described in illuminating detail the organization and operation of the political machine, as well as his rise in public office as a machine stalwart, and in the Democratic Party itself. He served as an assemblyman from Bronx County, N.Y., 1918-21; as sheriff of Bronx County, 1922-25; chamberlain of New York City, 1926-28; and as secretary of state of New York, 1929-39. These public offices were clearly minor phases of his career. Mr. Flynn took far greater pleasure and wielded far more power in his positions as leader of the Bronx County Democratic Committee, 1922-53; national commit- teeman from the state of New York, 1930-53; and as chairman, Democratic National Committee, 1940-42. The book is a sincere justification of or- ganization politics, marked by a calm acceptance of the use of patronage to obtain and maintain party fealty, of the absolute power of the county boss, the spoils system, rigidity of organization, and severely disciplined party regularity. To the author, the primary purpose of the party is to win elections; he therefore tends to equate party success with good government. It is hardly necessary to say that Flynn was an unusual sort of boss. 6385. Gosnell, Harold F. Boss Piatt and his New York machine; a study of the political leadership of Thomas C. Piatt, Theodore Roosevelt, and others. Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1924. xxiv, 370 p. illus. 24-2633 F124.G68 A description of the social, economic, and politi- cal background, the personal qualities, training, achievements, and techniques of Thomas Collier Piatt (1833-1910), a typical State political boss who reached a position of leadership in the New York Republican Party in 1889, and gained control of it in the middle 1890's when Theodore Roosevelt was coming into national attention. Professor Gos- nell sho ws how Piatt lost control of important ele- ments of the organization step by step from 1901 to 1904, and retired, a broken old man, from the United States Senate in 1909, the year Roosevelt also ended his official career. In the author's opinion, Piatt was primarily the keeper and guard- ian of a set of political traditions and devices to which he had fallen heir and which he had seen tested and exploited, whereas Roosevelt, with whom he maintained political relations for more than 20 years, was the popularizer of a new order. By 1900, Piatt, who "had had his difficulties with Gov- ernor Roosevelt," imagined him safely shelved in the Vice Presidency, but the latter, as Professor Gosnell shows, set out to capture the organization and suc- ceeded when he became President. Until he did so, however, "the Easy Boss was able to cling to his place as an agent of the propertied classes, a retailer of franchises, government contracts, and special legislation." 6386. Gosnell, Harold F. Machine politics: Chicago model. Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1937. xx, 229 p. illus. (Social science studies, directed by the Social Science Re- search Committee of the University of Chicago, no. 33 [i.e. 34]) 37- 20 974 JS708.G6 Bibliography: p. 214-219. A study of political behavior patterns in Chicago, particularly as exemplified in the workings of the party machines, the characteristics of party workers, voting behavior, and the political effectiveness of newspapers. It is based upon personal interviews, files of Chicago newspapers, observation of political meetings and election-day activities, participation in court trials, and upon the author's experience as an active party worker. The book aims to find the reasons why Chicago politics underwent so few fundamental changes during the profound economic crisis and changes of the years 1928-36. As Dr. Gosnell points out, at the beginning of 1928 the two major parties were fairly evenly, if delicately, balanced, with the Republicans in possession of the city hall, yet by 1936 the Democrats were in com- plete control of all government agencies elected or represented in the Chicago area. The national policies of the Democratic Party made its local POLITICS, PARTIES, ELECTIONS / IO47 leaders supreme in Chicago, but did not effect any great change of individuals, or disturb their con- centration upon jobs and spoils to the exclusion of genuine municipal issues. The author attributes the persistence of boss rule to a variety of factors including an unfavorable press situation, a dearth of civic leadership, and the impartial beneficences of Samuel Insull to both parties. 6387. Lynch, Denis Tilden. "Boss" Tweed; the story of a grim generation. New York, Boni & Liveright, 1927. 433 p. illus. 27-20559 F128.47.T96 Bibliography: p. 419-423. A breezy history of the political life and times of William Marcy Tweed (1823-1878), the "monu- mental" rogue who became boss of Tammany Hall, and master of the entire machinery of the New York state government — executive, legislative, and judicial — and who, in the author's opinion, "wanted to control the Nation as he did the State." Know- ing the corruption of contemporary politics and determined to succeed, he entered it in 1852 as a Tammany alderman on the Common Council of New York City which was later known as "The Forty Thieves." Mr. Lynch describes Tweed's success, in this and other offices, at manipulating city purchases and sales, offering and accepting bribes, and making himself powerful by placing his friends in key positions. He shows Tweed's meth- ods of operation, from the use of strong-arm thugs, repeaters, and newly naturalized immigrants at the polls to the employment of Republican leaders upon his own or the city's payrolls. The Tweed Ring proper did not begin its operations until Jan. 1, 1869, and lasted less than three years, but during this time it helped itself to some $45 million, and cost the city of New York as much as $200 million. Mr. Lynch credits the unbought part of the metro- politan press, and especially the New Yorl^ Times under the editorship of George Jones, with arousing the public against the Ring, and so destroying it in 1871. 6388. McKean, Dayton David. The Boss; the Hague machine in action. Boston, Hough- ton Mifflin, 1940. xvii, 284 p. 40-32284 F144.J5H3 An effort to explain how "a ruthless, two-fisted, unscrupulous, unlettered Irishman," Frank Hague (1876-1956), mayor of Jersey City, N.J., 1917-47. and his associates came to power in their munici- pality and Hudson County, and how their machine operated. Elected constable in 1897, and commis- sioner and director of public safety in 1913, Hague "made his way upward through the armed forces of his community," especially through manipulating 1048 A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES the Police Department. In Professor McKean's opinion, no other American political machine has approached the Hague organization in the com- pleteness of its control over its territory. This Democratic organization controlled newspapers, taming an opposition journal by advertising boy- cotts and increased property assessments, and bought off or intimidated opposition leaders. Alone among American city machines, it "system- atically and successfully utilized the methods of terrorism, the infiltration of groups and associations, the suppression of criticism, and the hierarchical principle of leadership that have characterized the fascist regimes in Europe." The author charges the machine with wiretapping, tampering with the mails, spying, false arrests, and beatings. The Hague regime survived the publication of Professor McKean's book, by seven years in the city, and by nine in the state. 6389. Salter, John T. Boss rule; portraits in city politics. New York, Whittlesey House, McGraw-Hill, 1935. 270 p. 35-8152 JS1268.S3 A survey of the workings of the Republican or- ganization of Philadelphia drawn from the oral narratives of the ward leaders themselves. The author has attempted a scientific study of the politi- cian, first in general terms, then through a group of nine individual sketches from life, selected as being typical of widely differing kinds of division or precinct leaders. The defeat of the party in the election of November 7, 1933, is described, and the book concludes with predictions about the probable future of the Republican organization in Philadelphia as of 1935, together with suggestions of devices for better government. Professor Salter says that, however diverse in training, character, and ability urban politicians may be, they have in common the one function of service to their neigh- bors. To this personal service powerful metro- politan party organizations owe much of their strength. This strength is greatest where needs are most compelling, where there is most poverty, most unemployment, most conflict with the law, in dis- tricts more often than not inhabited by a majority of the foreign-born or of Negroes. The work of the party organization centers in the simplest crea- ture wants — jobs, food, justice (or mercy or favor- itism), and taxes — and in it, as in elections, the most vital factor is the division leader, who acts as "the personal sales agent of the party." Another study of the same machine, David Harold Kurtzman's Methods of Controlling Votes in Philadelphia (Philadelphia, 1935. 173 p.), originated as a Uni- versity of Pennsylvania dissertation. It surveys the methods whereby the Philadelphia Republican or- ganization has controlled votes, among them use of the public payrolls, magistrates' courts, and police; the personal contacts of the division leader; favors extended through real estate assessment, mercantile appraisal, and inspection of weights and measures; and control of the election mechanism. 6390. Van Devander, Charles W. The big bosses. [New York] Howell, Soskin, 1944. 318 p. 44-3308 JK2249.V3 A journalist's candid report on the operations of the major American political machines and their leaders, down to 1944. In some detail, Mr. Van Devander discusses the workings of: New York's Democratic Tammany Hall, the Republican state machine, and the O'Connell ring which preserved Albany and Albany County for the Democrats; the Democratic Hague machine of Jersey City, which, in 25 years "had become a way of life"; the highly organized Massachusetts Republican ma- chine; the Republican Grundy machine of Pennsyl- vania; the Democratic Kelly-Nash machine of Chicago; and the Democratic organizations of the South — the absolute and arbitrary Crump machine of Tennessee, the Long dictatorship of Louisiana, the Lister Hill organization of Alabama, the Pen- dergast machine of Missouri. The record is full of patronage, favors, graft, deals, exposure and counterexposure, padded registrations and stuffed ballot boxes, manipulations of tax assessments, frameups, and salary assessments. Connections are found to such profitable sidelines as numbers lot- teries, gambling rackets, and racing syndicates. The author notes the absence of machine politics in California, and comments upon the relation be- tween the organizations and the realistic Franklin D. Roosevelt, who exchanged mutual aid with the machines that supported him and fought those that opposed. 6391. Zink, Harold. City bosses in the United States; a study of twenty municipal bosses. Durham, N.C., Duke University Press, 1930. 371 p. illus. 30-31996 JS309.Z5 An analysis of the characteristics and careers of twenty municipal bosses of the 19th and 20th cen- turies, selected on a basis of geographical distribu- tion and party affiliation. Included are Democratic and Republican bosses, the boss who veers from party to party, the boss who begins as a reformer or who becomes one, the "political hermaphrodite," the lone boss, and the boss who heads a long-estab- lished, efficient machine, together with a few who, though influential, have never entirely controlled a city. Although Professor Zink has made some use of books and documents, he has drawn most of his information from newspapers and from in- terviews with "relatives, associates, and enemies." POLITICS, PARTIES, ELECTIONS / IO49 An introductory section considers the personal characteristics of city bosses, their domestic, social, business, and political relations, as well as their several methods of reaching the top. The remain- der of the book is devoted to vignettes of the se- lected bosses, among them "Czar" Martin Lomasney of Boston, "Big Tim" Sullivan of the Bowery, Mar- tin Behrman of New Orleans, "The Genial Doctor" Albert A. Ames of Minneapolis, and Abraham Ruef of San Francisco. Professor Zink finds no typical boss but does observe a frequent occurrence of cer- tain circumstances and traits, such as early residence in the city dominated, American birth of foreign- born parents, a poverty-stricken urban background, generosity to the poor, loyalty to faithful henchmen, persistence, and courage. F. Pressures 6392. Chase, Stuart. Democracy under pressure; special interests vs the public welfare; guide lines to America's future as reported to the Twen- tieth Century Fund. New York, Twentieth Cen- tury Fund, 1945. 142 p. (His When the war ends [4]) 45-9 22 JK1118.C4 A brief and lucid popular analysis of the pressures exerted upon Congress in 1944 by the lobbyists of big business, big agriculture, and big labor. Mr. Chase locates the heart of these big business pressures in the National Association of Manufac- turers, the heart of small business pressures in the U.S. Chamber of Commerce, and of particular in- dustries in their own organizations such as the American Iron and Steel Institute. He finds these business pressure groups oblivious to the interest of the public, their own consumers, and their own workers. Corporate financial interest has been their major concern, leading them to seek monopo- listic advantages, subsidies, or both. Mr. Chase does not find much greater concern for the public interest among the best organized labor unions or "the farm bloc folks." He fears for free enterprise and free markets, but believes that the fundamental trouble with monopoly is neither greed nor arbitrary power but restriction of output. In his opinion, if output needs to be restricted, the state is the legiti- mate agent rather than big business, big union, or the Farm Bureau Federation. Considering the great changes of the postwar period, it is remarkable how much of Mr. Chase's analysis is still pertinent. 6393. Crawford, Kenneth G. The pressure boys; the inside story of lobbying in America. New York, Messner, 1939. 308 p. 39-27853 JK1118.C7 A Washington newspaperman's prewar view of lobbyists, "who may be peddlers of personal influ- ence, paid propagandists or amateurs promoting causes in which they sincerely believe," and who, collectively, "constitute a sort of phantom fourth branch of the government." Employed by private property interests, the majority devote "enormous energies and considerable talents" primarily to the protection of property, "sometimes by fair means and sometimes not." Private property is overpro- tected by the lobbies, the author contends; it has not hesitated to corrupt government in order to preserve or extend its advantages; and it exercises more in- fluence upon Congress than its voting strength justifies in a representative democracy. Although Mr. Crawford does not attribute all of the ills of democracy to the property lobby, particularly busi- ness interests, he accuses it of swinging congres- sional votes in return for campaign contributions, promises, or threats; of possessing an influential system of propaganda, organized deceit, and skillful perversion of democratic processes; and of ruthlessly exercising economic power to achieve political ends. The property lobby's singleness of purpose — the protection or advancement of profits — and its un- complicated selfishness give it enormous drive. The author provides illustrative case histories, but, un- fortunately, no index. 6394. Gaer, Joseph. The first round; the story of the CIO Political Action Committee. New York, Duell, Sloan & Pearce, 1944. xv, 478 p. illus. 44-51287 E812.G3 Intended to preserve the credos and early propa- ganda tools of the CIO Political Action Committee, this is a reprinting of most of the pamphlets and manuals issued by the committee during its first year. Joseph Gaer, who has been a staff member, sets forth the events leading to the formation of the PAC at the beginning of 1944, the motivations of its activities, and the sources of its strength. Sidney Hillman is credited here with being the moving force, and Philip Murray with being the founder and establisher of basic policy. The organization was created "to protect the political rights of the working man, as well as the rights of the returning soldier, the farmer, the small business man, and the so-called 'common man'." Planning for full 431240 — 60- -68 IO5O / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES postwar employment at fair wages became the com- mittee's primary policy. Full participation in the 1944 elections was regarded as the first step toward this objective, and the PAC set as its primary task getting out the vote for its approved candidates throughout the nation. The pamphlets consist of campaign literature, illustrated largely with picto- graphs. The guides for its own workers include such titles as: "The Radio Handbook," "The Speakers Manual," and "A Woman's Guide to Political Action." A record registration was in fact achieved. 6395. McKean, Dayton David. Pressures on the Legislature of New Jersey. New York, Columbia University Press, 1938. 251 p. (Colum- bia University. Faculty of Political Science. Studies in history, economics and public law, no. 440) 38-23938 JK2498.N5M2 1938a H31.C7, no. 440 A realistic study of New Jersey politics and the force that makes the State government function — the lobby. The author, a former New Jersey as- semblyman, views a State legislature as a kind of battleground for the various interests of the State. The first three chapters show what these interests are: business — especially the Public Service Corpo- ration of New Jersey and its gadfly, the Utility Users' Protective League of New Jersey — labor, agriculture, professional groups, religious groups, public employees, veterans, women's organizations, motorists, public education groups, and reform groups. Next analyzed in some detail are the in- ternal affairs, membership, structure, financing, and goals of seven important and representative organ- izations, such as the New Jersey State Federation of Labor. The author then examines pressures from other branches of the State government, and group and party politics as they were fought out on the sales tax of 1935. Later chapters explore the meth- ods and effectiveness of pressure groups which seek the nomination of friendly candidates and endeavor to have them bound by platform planks, personal pledges, and campaign contributions. The groups attempt to draw out the vote for men of approved pledges or records, and to influence legislation by providing information, drafting and guiding bills, and communicating arguments, promises, and threats to the legislators. Dr. McKean thinks that 90 percent of the legislature's acts are accounted for by pressures, but finds no way of measuring their effectiveness. 6396. Schattschneider, Elmer E. Politics, pres- sures, and the tariff; a study of free private enterprise in pressure politics, as shown in the 1 929-1930 revision of the tariff. New York, Pren- tice-Hall, 1935. 301 p. (Prentice-Hall political science series) 35-29634 HF1756.S38 1935 Thesis (Ph. D.) — Columbia University, 1935. A study of the political behavior of economic groups in making the Smoot-Hawley protective tariff of 1929-30, based upon the nearly 20,000 pages of testimony taken by the Senate Committee on Finance and the House Committee on Ways and Means. So as to observe the relation between eco- nomic interest and political activity on a broad scale, Dr. Schattschneider has analyzed the elementary and immediate interests affected by a large number of individual duties established in the law. He attempts to characterize the activity of pressure groups in the case of one major public policy, and to measure its strength, its direction, and variability, as well as to note the manner in which it is deflected and controlled. He finds that immediate active interests bring an intense pressure to obtain a pro- tective duty; the indirect adverse interests remain inert and sluggish, and make no effective opposi- tion. A few can exert great influence on the process of government because they are organized, are alert, have access to information, and know what they want; the mass remains apathetic. The pro- tective tariff was made high by combining a mul- titude of interests in an omnibus piece of legislation. 6397. Schriftgiesser, Karl. The lobbyists; the art and business of influencing lawmakers. Boston, Little, Brown, 1951. xiv, 297 p. 51-12266 JK1118.S4 Bibliography: p. [273]-28i. A history of lobbying as it has developed from the days of the Boston Tea Party and even simpler forms of persuasion down to 1951. Mr. Schrift- giesser, who considers that lobbying may be either good or evil, attempts to show how it has become an integral part of the democratic legislative process. Much of his story is concerned with the Regulation of Lobbying Act, passed by Congress as part of the Legislative Reorganization Act in 1946. He goes into the passage of this act, the subsequent adher- ence to or evasion of its principles, and what can be learned from the information filed with Congress by those who come under its provisions. His ob- ject is to show the extent of lobbying both in Wash- ington and elsewhere in the country, and to bring together the detailed information gathered by the House Select Committee on Lobbying Activities in 1950. His summary of the latter is probably his chief contribution. The danger remains that a quite small interest group may, by sheer vociferous- ness and persistence, have an effect on legislation far in excess of its own importance. Mr. Schrift- giesser believes in the unhindered right of petition, but believes also that anyone who petitions the gov- ernment for redress of grievance "should stand up and say who he is, and what he wants, why he wants it, and who paid his way." 6398. Turner, Julius. Party and constituency: pressures on Congress. Baltimore, Johns Hopkins Press, 1951 [i. e. 1952] 190 p. (The Johns Hopkins University studies in historical and political science, ser. 69, no. 1) 52-839 JK2265T87 H31.J6, ser. 69, no. 1 An attempt to measure, by quantitative methods, the effectiveness of pressures upon Congressmen from their political parties and constituencies. Dr. Turner has chosen four sessions for roll call analysis: 1921, when the Republicans held a strong majority in the House and had captured the Presidency after eight years of Democratic rule; 1930-31, when the Republicans held a slight majority and were "falter- ing under President Hoover"; 1937, when the Democrats held three-quarters of the House after the Roosevelt landslide but were beginning to divide on the New Deal; and 1944, when the Democrats organized Congress but were so closely followed by the Republicans that the number of absentees determined the majority at any given time. In his opinion, the roll call record is "an accurate summa- tion of the effectiveness of the pressure of various groups on each congressman, on those issues which are important enough or controversial enough so that a part of the membership wants a record kept of the vote for an ensuing election campaign." The great majority of Representatives, he concludes, yield to the pressures from their constituencies and especially to party pressures in casting their votes. Those who do not, especially if they are Republi- cans, are unlikely to achieve longevity in office. POLITICS, PARTIES, ELECTIONS / IO5I "The American Congress is ... a mirror of polit- ical pressure." 6399. Zeller, Belle. Pressure politics in New York; a study of group representation before the legislature. New York, Prentice-Hall, 1937. 310 p. (Prentice-Hall political science series) 37-11266 JK2498.N7Z4 1937 Thesis (Ph. D.) — Columbia University, 1937. An analysis of the activities of the more important statewide pressure groups in New York and of their influence upon legislative policy, together with suggestions for solutions to some of the more press- ing problems thereby created. Group pressures stem from three major sources, Miss Zeller found — labor, business, and agriculture — as well as from a host of minor sources. The most vigorous pres- sure exerted at Albany was on behalf of labor legislation, particularly by the New York State Federation of Labor, the Women's Trade Union League of New York, and the Consumers' League of New York. Also engaged in a continuing batde for legislative influence were a score or more lobby groups representing money interests, industry, and agriculture, notably the Real Estate Association of the State of New York, the New York State Bankers Association, the Association of Life Insurance Presi- dents, Associated Industries, Inc., the Empire State Gas and Electric Association, and the New York State Conference Board of Farm Organizations. Labor groups have always secured greater assistance from Democratic administrations, industrial groups from Republican. To Miss Zeller, the outstanding feature of pressure-group technique is the use of mass propaganda channels for building support both within and outside the interest group itself long before the direct attack on the legislature begins. G. Elections: Machinery 6400. Albright, Spencer D. The American ballot. Washington, American Council on Public Affairs, 1942. 153 p. 42-25091 JK.2215.A6 Bibliography: p. 146-148. A minute analysis and comparison of ballot forms which were in use in the United States, particu- larly during the 1930's, both in general and in pri- mary elections. As Dr. Albright points out, by the middle of the 19th century ballot papers had be- come subject to legislation as to color, number, size, uniformity, and methods of marking and depositing. The majority of American states had, by the turn of the century, adopted the Australian ballot system in a modified form. Under the new system, here regarded as a fundamental advance, voting was elaborately regulated by the State. The ballots were printed and distributed by designated authorities, marked and deposited on election day within a polling place under the supervision of the proper officials, and canvassed according to law. In the 20th century, almost continuous amendment of the ballot laws has been the rule, in many instances for the better. The author thinks that a general im- provement has resulted from the voting-machine laws of the decade 1930-40; the machines arc re- liable and meet the needs of all elections including IO52 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES primaries. The voting public, he believed in 1942, was becoming aware of the advantages of the machine: the ease and speed with which the vote is recorded, as well as the economies made possible by the reduction in printing costs, personnel, sup- plies, and rental of polling places (through con- solidation of precincts), and the elimination of recounts. 6401. Bishop, Cortlandt F. History of elections in the American Colonies. New York, Co- lumbia College, 1893. 297 p. (Columbia Uni- versity. Faculty of Political Science. Studies in history, economics and public law, v. 3, no. 1) 4-1841 JK97.A3B61 H 3 i.C 7 ,v. 3 "Authorities quoted": p. [289]-295. This pioneer study, based upon a thorough ex- amination of the statutes of the Thirteen Colonies, was so solidly done that it has been relied upon ever since. Dr. Bishop dealt first with general elections, and noted that they were in use in every colony, at least for constituting a legislative assem- bly, beginning with Virginia's choice of a House of Burgesses in 1619. New York had to wait the longest, for neither the Dutch West India Com- pany nor the Duke of York (the future King James II) cared for popular elections, and notwith- standing several anticipations there was no regular assembly until 1691. Dr. Bishop next analyzed the qualifications for the suffrage in use throughout the period, noting the moral and religious ones which did not survive the Revolution. The chapter on "The Management of Elections" is full of concrete detail on such matters as the publication of the election writ, the hours of election, the method of taking the vote, and provisions against fraud; there is no such convenient accumulation of precise in- formation for post-colonial elections. A briefer section deals with town, parish, and municipal elections, and the suffrage and management regula- tions which governed them. Appendixes print specimen writs, returns, and oaths, and some un- published election statutes turned up in the author's researches. 6402. De Grazia, Alfred. Public and republic; political representation in America. New York, Knopf, 1951. xiii, 262, ix p. 51-9540 JK1846.D4 1951 Bibliography: p. 259-262. A description and a closely reasoned analysis of the major currents of political belief and practice during the last three centuries, each with its own interpretation of man and society and each with its own scheme of political representation. Dr. De Grazia cites the majority principle, universal suffrage, a real-property qualification for holding office, instruction of representatives by constituents, and proportional representation as among proposed means of obtaining a government to fulfill men's desires and to realize their values. He attempts to show how and why rich and poor, religious and political sects, and urban and rural populations have held differing views of representation. He isolates clusters of ideas about representation, traces their ancestry and history, and points out where some weakened and others grew strong, where some ele- ments were incorporated into other groups, and where some died out. Beginning with English ideas of representation in the two centuries after Elizabeth I, the author traces the development of the American representative principle through three main forms: the ideas of direct representation, en- lightened individualism, and pluralism, with power-clusters in a corporation-dominated society. 6403. Harris, Joseph P. Registration of voters in the United States. Washington, Brookings Institution, 1929. xviii, 390 p. ([Brookings Insti- tution, Washington, D. C] Institute for Govern- ment Research. Studies in administration [no. 23]) 29-17775 JK2164.A2H3 "Select bibliography": p. 383-385. 6404. Harris, Joseph P. Election administration in the United States. Washington, Brook- ings Institution, 1934. 453 p. ([Brookings Insti- tution, Washington, D. C.] Institute for Govern- ment Research. Studies in administration, no. 27) 34-5509 JK1976.H3 Registration of Voters in the United States is an analytical survey of American registration systems, based upon a 15-month field study of the legal pro- visions governing the several registration systems of the States and the practical workings of those sys- tems, which included interviews with persons both in and outside registration offices who were ac- quainted with local political situations, organiza- tions, and methods. Effort was made to secure information not only upon all phases of adminis- tration but also upon the general problems of reg- istration. The author found no system absolutely satisfactory, nor did he expect to, since he consid- ered no single system ideal for every State. He commended California for the most satisfactory system of records, Milwaukee and Minneapolis for the best transfer system, Omaha for the best canvass system, Boston for the best census of adults, and Detroit and St. Louis for the best method of se- lecting precinct officers. Dr. Harris regarded voter registration as essential to prevent frauds and there- fore "the very foundation upon which an honest election system must rest." If properly adminis- POLITICS, PARTIES, ELECTIONS / IO53 tered, it may be an economical operation of no in- convenience to the mass of voters. He recom- mended permanent registration, whereby the voter remains registered so long as he remains at the same address, with the provision of certain safeguards. Based on a field study undertaken during 1929 and 1930, Election Administration in the United States continues Professor Harris' survey of the electoral process and describes the system then in operation in America for the casting and counting of ballots, and the canvassing and declaration of the result. Emphasis is placed upon the practical operation of election laws rather than upon the provisions of the statutes, although the latter were studied. Inter- views were held with chief election officers and with politically informed persons outside the election office. The author undertook the study because in his opinion no other phase of public administration in the United States had been so badly managed as the conduct of elections, in which have regularly occurred "glaring irregularities, errors, misconduct on the part of precinct officers, disregard of election laws and instructions, slipshod practices, and down- right frauds." Yet democratic government is com- pletely dependent upon honestly and efficiently con- ducted elections. Dr. Harris called for a general revision of State election laws, a reorganization of election machinery, and improvements in election management — especially in the practice of the party machines in staffing election boards with their hacks. He offered "a model election administra- tion code" (p. 77-94). Voting machines are ex- pensive but desirable "if properly used, and the limitations of the machines recognized." 6405. McGovney, Dudley O. The American suf- frage medley; the need for a national uni- form suffrage. Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1949. 201 p. 49-9160 JK1853.M25 McGovney, a California professor of law, died in 1947 leaving the manuscript of this plea for the establishment of a uniform national suffrage. The control of suffrage requirements by the states, he believed, was a survival from the Colonial period, when the British settlers were "accustomed to the idea of restricting the suffrage to the upper eco- nomic levels" and to a medley of voting qualifica- tions in electing members of the House of Com- mons. Since the framers of the Constitution made no alteration here, the adoption of universal suf- frage has been piecemeal and incomplete. At the time of wridng 5 States had rudiments of the old property qualifications; 7 had a poll-tax require- ment; 18 had educational requirements of a great variety, adopted for a variety of reasons; and 36 imposed a permanent disfranchisement upon per- sons sentenced to prison. Politicians, McGovney thought, have been able to use these survivals so as to interfere seriously with the democratic process. He proposed a constitutional amendment limiting suffrage requirements, for primaries as well as final elections, to adulthood, citizenship, and residence in a State for six months and in the precinct for three; and disfranchising only for insanity and for the duration of imprisonment. 6406. Merriam, Charles Edward, and Louise Overacker. Primary elections. Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1928. 448 p. 28-1491 1 JK2074.M5 1928 First published in 1908. "Bibliography and Sources of statistical material for primary and general election returns": p. 405- 427. The development of legal regulation of the nom- inating process in the United States forms the subject of this history and analysis. The authors trace the expansion of regulation from the establish- ment of the representative party system, the general adoption of the delegate convention system, and the victory of universal male suffrage in the 1830's to the introduction of the mandatory, legally protected, direct primary during the first two decades of the 20th century, with a noticeable reaction against it in the 1920's. Inquiring into the attitude of the judiciary toward primary legislation, the authors find a recognition of the right of the legislature to regulate in some detail the method of voting, and an unwillingness to sustain the claims of the party, as a voluntary political organization, to regulate its own internal affairs. They consider the direct pri- mary a weapon for the voter, a means to challenge or overthrow a corrupt or unrepresentative organi- zation, and of especial significance to the one-party States where nominations are tantamount to elec- tions. Among the improvements in nominating methods suggested by the authors are a reduction in the number of elecdve officers (why elect a cor- oner or a surveyor?), and limiting the popular choice to major executive officers concerned with the formulation of public policies. A long appendix (p. 359-404) summarizes the primary laws of each State (as of 1928). 6407. Overacker, Louise. Money in elections. Largely from material collected by Victor J. West. New York, Macmillan, 1932. 476 p. ([Parties and practical politics series 1) 32-29858 JK1991.O7 "Selected bibliography": p. 419-459. "The present study is primarily concerned with the use of money in elections in the United States, the attempts to regulate such use, the operation of these regulations, and the possibility of more effec- 1054 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES tive control." Professor Overacker, who took over the research materials left by Professor V. J. West of Stanford University at his death in 1927, defines elections to include primaries as well as general elections, and defines money to include the things money will buy and actual bribes. She is concerned with the raising, spending, and regulat- ing of the money which influences voters in casting their ballots for or against certain candidates. Among expenditures, she lists general overhead of die headquarters offices, salaries and transportation for field activities, funds for publicity, and grants to subsidiary organizations by the national com- mittees. Election-day expenditures, she observes, can smack unpleasantly of bribery. These she would eliminate by legal prohibitions or have them shouldered by the State or by nonparty groups. Since she finds a correlation between votes received and even "legitimate" funds spent, she would limit the size as well as the purpose of the latter, and throw pre-election publicity upon the amount and character of expenditures by all candidates, parties, and organizations involved. As of 1932, attempts to limit contributions and expenditures had been "nothing short of farcical." 6408. Overacker, Louise. The Presidential pri- mary. New York, Macmillan, 1926. 308 p. ([Parties and practical politics series]) 26-6444 JK522.O8 Bibliography: p. 277-294. An analysis, a comparison, and an evaluation of the 26 [as of 1926] State laws enacted to provide direct popular control of Presidential nominations through the election of delegates to national con- ventions, or a preference vote for President, or both. The functionings of the various types of Presiden- tial primary were compared, and the author at- tempted to determine whether the combined effect of these laws upon the Presidential nominating process weakened or strengthened it. Although emphasis was placed upon the operation of existing State laws, consideration was given to various pro- posals for a national primary law, and suggestions were made for drafting an effective one. The author regarded the Presidential primary as part of the general movement for more democratic con- trol of the American government and, in its con- crete aspect, as an attempt to give the people some say in the election of their President, and to secure party responsibility. She found the effectiveness of the Presidential primary laws limited by faulty con- struction, lack of uniformity, and especially by the fact that they existed in so few States. She sug- gested extension of the system to all or most States, either through State or national action. Since 1926 the system has declined, however, until at present only 14 States have mandatory Presidential pri- maries, and in only a minority of these are the dele- gates pledged by the result. 6409. Porter, Kirk H. A history of suffrage in the United States. Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1918. 260 p. 18-22279 JK1846.P8 Issued also as thesis (Ph. D.) University of Chicago. A history of the right to vote since 1776, empha- sizing the expansion of the suffrage by the gradual inclusion of groups to whom it was originally de- nied, presenting the general picture and the moti- vating ideals rather than the technicalities and local variations, and based primarily upon the debates in state constitutional conventions. For all its proc- lamation of natural rights, the American Revolu- tion did not greatly alter the franchise restrictions prevailing in the later Colonial period, and when the Constitution was adopted voting was still con- fined to a small group of property owners and tax- payers. Dr. Porter traces the weakening and prac- tically complete elimination of property tests; North Carolina did not abandon hers until 1856, while two states, at the time of writing, had never given up a small taxpaying requirement. After the enfran- chisement of the unpropertied, controversy in the realm became concerned with votes for free Ne- groes and eventually for all Negroes, for aliens, and for women. While the general movement has been, however jerkily, in the direction of universal suffrage, the years from 1877 to 1904 saw a complete disfranchisement of Negroes in all the Southern states. Dr. Porter wrote shortly before the adoption of the 19th Amendment, when only 12 states had enacted full woman suffrage, and he anticipated a much longer and harder struggle for its passage than was about to take place. 6410. Sikes, Earl R. State and Federal corrupt- practices legislation. Durham, N.C., Duke University Press, 1928. 321 p. 28-16725 JK1994.S6 Bibliography: p. 292-314. This Cornell University dissertation is a survey of the corrupt-practices legislation enacted in the United States to 1928 by both State and Federal governments, and an examination of the construc- tion placed upon the statutes by judicial interpre- tation. Chapters 1-3 consider statutory prohibi- tions against corrupt inducements to voters, against their intimidation, and against fraudulent practices by voters on the one hand and by election officials on the other. Chapter 4 deals with State regula- tion of various forms of campaign literature. Chap- ter 5 reports on State legislation requiring publicity for campaign contributions and expenditures, pro- hibiting or restricting certain types of contributions, and regulating expenditures in campaigns. Chap- ters 6 and 7 are concerned with the regulation of elections by the Federal Government; 6 defines the division of power between the Federal and State governments over the control of elections, and 7 surveys Federal corrupt-practices legislation. De- spite the stringent legislation enacted against abuses of the elective franchise from the 1890's, the worst evils did not appear, in 1928, to have been corrected. In the author's opinion, the increasing complexity of the electoral machinery, the rapid industrial and commercial development of the country, and the indifference of the public all contributed to domi- nation by great political machines. 641 1. Wilmerding, Lucius. The electoral college. New Brunswick, N. J., Rutgers University Press, 1958. 224 p. 58-6290 JK529.W64 An explanation of proposals for reform as well as an historical oudine and a critique of the system provided by the Constitution for electing the Pres- ident through the agency of intermediate electors, or, in certain contingencies, through the votes of POLITICS, PARTIES, ELECTIONS / IO55 the House of Representatives. Dr. Wilmerding regards the former process as an "artificial and de- lusive system," because each candidate is given the unanimous and undivided electoral vote of every State where he has a plurality of the popular votes, receiving nothing from the remaining States. In each State, therefore, "a large minority of the people is made precisely equal to no minority at all and a bare plurality is made equal to the whole." An election by the House of Representatives he consid- ers still further removed from an election by the people at large, since the representation of each State, regardless of its size, is given one vote which it casts according to the sense of its own majority. Yet the purpose of the Constitution, he believes, is "to elevate to the executive chair the man who is the choice of the majority of the people in the nation as a whole"; that intention having been de- feated, the Presidency has been put on a federative rather than a national basis. The author, in argu- ing for electoral reform, expresses his preference for a system which would put the Presidential elec- tion upon a sound popular basis and a practical footing. H. Elections: Results 6412. Bean, Louis H. Ballot behavior; a study of presidendal elections. Washington, Amer- ican Council on Public Affairs, 1940. 102 p. illus. 40-34491 JK1967.B4 6413. Bean, Louis H. How to predict elections. New York, Knopf, 1948. 196 p. illus. 48-3171 JK2007.B4 Ballot Behavior is a survey of 40 years (1896- 1936) of Presidential election history for each of the 48 States, based upon political statistics from States, counties, and cities. Among the author's results are: the discovery of a number of States which go as the nation goes; a method of measuring political trends; the effect of business conditions on these trends; and a schedule of relationship between the national popular vote and the state electoral votes, by which national polls may be translated into a probable electoral lineup of the 48 States. Mr. Bean presents not a method of forecasting elections but basic facts so organized as to serve as a founda- tion for judgment. He offers analyses and data, leaving the reader to judge for himself. He does discern a fairly systematic pattern of behavior in the United States. A given national political shift has its reflection, he believes, to varying degrees, in each of the States and in a great many coundes. Upon this theory, the behavior of one State may be translated into the corresponding behavior of the nation as a whole and then into the corresponding behavior of the other 47 States. Mr. Bean offers many tables and diagrams to indicate political pat- terns and tides. A companion volume, How to Predict Elections, reports the results of further re- search into voting statistics. Although less atten- tion is given to theory and procedure, the method of analysis remains the same, and the findings and forecasts are again offered with reserve. The author continues to believe that "voting behavior, portrayed statistically, offers valuable keys to an explanation of the marked swings in American politics and helps to form a basis for judging political trends in the immediate future." Political tides over a period of years are represented here by the changing per- centage of the Presidential vote cast in successive elections by the Democratic Party, or the proportion of the House or Senate seats won by either party. Most of the factors which have dominated elections from 1928 to 1946, years of "the New Deal tide," are treated separately, first historically, and later in reladon to the 1946 and future elections. IO56 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 6414. Berelson, Bernard R., Paul F. Lazarsfeld, and William N. McPhee. Voting; a study of opinion formation in a Presidential campaign. [Chicago] University of Chicago Press, 1954. xix, 395 p. illus. 54-11205 JK526 1948.B4 An intensive study of the voting behavior of an American town, Elmira, N.Y., in the Presidential contest of 1948 between President Truman and Governor Dewey. The authors employed the so- called panel method of interviewing a representa- tive sample of respondents before the political cam- paign began, during it, and after it. The main purpose was to analyze a developing process through repeated interviews with the respondents — in this case, approximately 1,000. Both the social and the political aspects of the process are empha- sized, the formation of preferences on the one hand, and, on the other, the relation between democratic theory and democratic practice. By statistical analysis, the authors have attempted to discover how, why, and by how much opinions and atti- tudes changed during the period under examina- tion. Vote intentions supported by one's social en- vironment, they find, are more predictably ad- hered to than are "deviant" intentions. Under the stress of a campaign, people develop an increased tendency toward conformity. Voters do have some of the classically required virtues of the citizen but not in the elaborate or comprehensive form demanded by political philosophers. In the au- thors' opinion, the political theory of democracy, formulated in the 18th century, stands in need of revision, but not replacement, through empirical sociology. 6415. Ewing, Cortz A. M. Congressional elec- tions, 1896-1944; the sectional basis of polit- ical democracy in the House of Representatives. Norman, University of Oklahoma Press, 1947. no p. illus. 47-31040 JK1316.E9 6416. Ewing, Cortez A. M. Presidential elections from Abraham Lincoln to Franklin D. Roosevelt. Norman, University of Oklahoma Press, 1940. 226 p. illus. 4 0_ 33395 JK524.E94 The first of these works is a statistical analysis of elections to the House of Representatives, limited, because of the lack of detailed official figures for earlier ones, to those of 1 896-1 944. Professor Ewing's evaluation of the last 50 years convinced him that success in the Presidential election will go to the party already in control of the House. He points out that the Republicans must win a ma- jority of seats in the East, Middle West, and West to secure a majority in the House. If the border section goes Republican, that majority becomes overwhelming. The Democrats, sure of the South and at an advantage in the border, need add only 88 seats outside these sections to have a majority in the House. Professor Ewing expressed some doubt as to whether the sectional pattern normal in 1944 would continue, calling particular atten- tion to the division in the Democratic Party be- tween Southern conservatives and liberals in the other sections. In Presidential Elections the author applied the same kind of analysis to the presidential elections of the years 1864-1936. He divided them into four major voting periods: 1864—1876, when the Republicans won four straight triumphs; 1880- 1892, when the Democrats fought back to split the four elections equally; 1896-1916, when landslides began to occur and the Republicans won all but the 1912 and 1916 elections, and lost those because of their own disunity; and 1920-36, when the Republi- cans won the first three, and the Democrats the last two elections. He thought that before World War I there was crystallization of party allegiance, and after it a decline of party regularity, a failure of tradition as a determinant of political behavior, and the emergence of economic security as a domi- nant motivation. He discussed, among other mat- ters, sectional interests, minority parties, the elec- toral college, and the respective influences of these on the outcome of national elections. 6417. Gallup, George H. A guide to public opin- ion polls. [2d ed.] Princeton, Princeton University Press, 1948. xxiv, 117 p. 48-3517 HM261.G27 1948 First published in 1944. An elucidation of the "science of opinion meas- urement" set forth in question and answer form. The author attempted to furnish readers with a better conception of the methods employed in public opinion research and a fuller understanding of its value. Public opinion polls had been thoroughly tested since 1935, he contended, and the reliability of the methods practiced had been "demonstrated time and again." Although Dr. Gallup did not claim perfection for his system, he noted its "many contributions to our democratic process," especially through its accurate and prompt reports of public opinion and its focus of attention upon major na- tional issues. Answers are provided here to all the questions most frequendy put to polling organiza- tions. Among the subjects covered are the func- tions of the poll, the size of sample necessary to reliability, the types of sampling, the selection of the interviewers, election predictions, and the in- terpretation and reporting of results. "Just as it can be said with certainty that polls will be highly accurate in the vast majority of elections, so with the same certainty it can be said that on occasion they will go wrong." Notwithstanding which dis- claimer, Dr. Gallup's poll lost heavily in prestige by picking Dewey rather than Truman in 1948. 6418. Gosnell, Harold F. Grass roots politics; national voting behavior of typical States. Washington, American Council on Public Affairs, 1942. 195 p. illus. 42-25395 JK1967.G6 A quantitative analysis of political behavior chiefly of the 1920's and 1930's in six States — Pennsylvania, Wisconsin, Iowa, California, Illinois, and Louisiana — which aims to trace from this sam- ple the main outlines of the pattern of national politics. Developments in Pennsylvania, the au- thor believes, clearly demonstrate the extent of the national political upheaval of the 1930's, when the Democratic Party attracted to its ranks not only dis- satisfied Republicans but a host of new voters. The depression worked toward a political realignment of socioeconomic groups both in California and in Wisconsin, where the New Deal gained strength among poor, foreign-born, and progressive farmers as well as among skilled and unskilled laborers of the cities. Dr. Gosnell finds that Herbert Hoover was made a scapegoat for the personal insecurity of many Iowa farmers. He considers that the even spread of the revolt against the Republican Party was a remarkable aspect of Illinois politics of the 1930's, and that the emergence of Louisiana's Huey Long indicates the precarious foundation of American de- mocracy and the two-party system. 6419. Lazarsfeld, Paul F., Bernard Berelson, and Hazel Gaudet. The people's choice; how the voter makes up his mind in a presidential cam- paign. [2d ed.] New York, Columbia Univer- sity Press, 1948. xxxiii, 178 p. illus. 48-8605 JK524.L38 1948 First published in 1944. An analysis of the voting behavior of Erie County, Ohio, in the Presidential election of 1940 (President F. D. Roosevelt versus Wendell Will- kie), based on interviews obtained from a panel of 600 respondents who were questioned once a month from May to November 1940. Interest cen- tered in persons whose political opinions were changed in the interval, whether by a shift in party allegiance, by indecision until the end of the cam- paign, or by abstention after declaration of a defi- nite vote intention, because in them the processes of attitude formation and change could be observed. They were compared with those who did not change political opinions; their personal character- istics, their contacts with other people, and their exposure to mass communications were examined. The opinions successively held by the shifters were also compared, and a 13 percent turnover, stimu- lated chiefly by face-to-face contacts, was found to POLITICS, PARTIES, ELECTIONS / IO57 have occurred within the few weeks before the election. The authors state that they have found only preliminary answers to the questions of who changes opinion, in what direction, and in response to what influences. 6420. Litchfield, Edward H. Voting behavior in a metropolitan area. Ann Arbor, Univer- sity of Michigan Press, 1941. 93 p. illus. (Michi- gan. University. Michigan governmental studies, no. 7) 41-52812 JS847.A3L55 Covering five elections held during the years 1930-38, this dissertation studies the voting be- havior of the principal social groups in Detroit, based upon assessment and census data in various city offices. There were three behavior indexes — electoral participation, third-party voting, and major party affiliation — for which material could be gath- ered. The participation data revealed a direct re- lationship between income and amount of partici- pation: the higher the income, the greater degree of participation. The Polish middle class was the most Democratic in a predominandy Democratic city; the wealthy native white group was the most Republican. These two groups, Dr. Litchfield re- ports, were also the two most active participants. In general, "Democratic party affiliation in the period after 1930 has varied inversely with economic status." His analysis of third-party voting habits shows that middle-class Russians were most at- tracted to third parties and the wealthy native whites were the least so. Important group con- cerns do exist, the author concludes, but group opinion remains flexible and classes are not highly self-conscious. Detroit as of 1938 was still con- cerned with the general interest. 6421. Mencken, Henry L. A carnival of bun- combe. Edited by Malcolm Moos. Balti- more, Johns Hopkins Press, 1956. xviii, 370 p. 56-11658 E742.M4 A selection of 69 articles written during the 1920's and 1930's for Mencken's weekly political column in The Evening Sun, Baltimore. The book's five sections — "Normalcy"; "Calvinism"; "Onward, Christian Soldiers: Hoover & Al"; "Roosevelt Minor"; and "The Burden of Omnipotence — Roosevelt & Alf" — are each introduced by appropri- ate commentary from the editor, who notices that Mencken's predictions were sometimes dead wrong. Couched in Mencken's characteristic irreverent and jocund style, these pieces offer acerb portrayals and interpretations of the behavior and motivations of politicians and public-office holders. The author, who starts from the premises that American gov- ernment "must be a great deal more competent than it looks" and that honor has no place in poli- io 5 8 A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES tics, writes of such matters as prohibition, the solid South, political fraud and corruption, convention and campaign tactics, and the depression. Par- ticularly noteworthy was his article of July 14, 1924, on the disastrous Democratic National Convention of that year. In Mencken's very candidly expressed opinions, Harding was, intellectually, "a benign blank," Coolidge an "obscure and unimportant man," Alfred E. Smith "as provincial as a Kansas farmer" although honest and worthy, Hoover "care- ful and cautious," an adept politician if an incom- petent President, and Franklin D. Roosevelt a dealer in "quackery." 6422. Moos, Malcolm C. Politics, presidents, and coattails. Baltimore, Johns Hopkins Press, 1952. xxi, 237 p. illus. 52-13613 JK1976.M6 An analysis of the relationships between voting behavior in congressional and presidential elections. The primary concern of the inquiry is with con- gressional elections, but, in the author's opinion, "the selection of a congressman is often not unaf- fected by the choice of a President." After sketch- ing briefly the so-called coattail theory — the belief that in years of presidential elections Congressmen are often elected or defeated according to the po- litical appeal of their party's Presidential candidate (and so are said to ride upon his coattails) — Profes- sor Moos compares Presidential and congressional voting records for the period 1896-1950 as to their relative influence upon electoral victory, and then attempts to evaluate the discovered relationships. He concludes that, although the coattail influence is of minor significance, successful Presidential can- didates normally run ahead of their congressional tickets. The steady rise of the Presidency in public policy and party leadership is one of the manifest political truths of the 20th century, has occurred as an adaptation in response to a national need, and is a by-product of our haphazard and clumsy party system. 6423. Rogers, Lindsay. The pollsters; public opinion, politics, and democratic leadership. New York, Knopf, 1949. 239 p. 49-7842 HM263.R57 An admittedly indignant denunciation of the commercial polling agencies, particularly the Roper, Gallup, and Time polls, and their claims of scien- tific accuracy in the measurement of public opinion. Professor Rogers demonstrates that a mere counting of yeas and noes, without considering the knowl- edge on which the opinion is based, the intensity with which it is held, and the willingness to act upon it, is of small consequence. He scouts the pollsters' assumption "that what they claim they have discovered public opinion to be should rule," and finds them guilty of two great sins of omission: they have never attempted to define what they are measuring, nor have they outlined the nature of the political society in which public opinion should be the ruler. The United States is not, and ought not to be, a town meeting. The author believes, more- over, that public opinion is not a measurable con- cept, and that polling is not a scientific method. Documented by examples from polls of wrong premises about our political society, imperfect sam- plings, ambiguous framing of questions, inter- viewer bias, and exaggerated claims based upon the results, his examination of sources of error in poll- ing points to serious limitations in the method. I. Reform 6424. Aaron, Daniel. Men of good hope; a story of American progressives. New York, Ox- ford University Press, 1951. xiv, 329 p. 51-1402 E176.A2 Contents. — Emerson and the progressive tradi- tion. — Theodore Parker: 'the batde of the nine- teenth century.' — Henry George: the great para- dox. — Edward Bellamy: village Utopian. — Henry Demarest Lloyd: the middle-class conscience. — Wil- liam Dean Howells: the gentleman from Al- truria. — Thorstein Veblen: moralist and rhetori- cian. — Theodore Roosevelt and Brooks Adams: pseudo-progressives. — In retrospect: 1912-1950. — Notes on sources (p. 309-321). A study of the American progressive tradition, beginning with the social philosophy of Ralph Waldo Emerson (1 803-1 882), its prophet, whose simultaneous acceptance and rejection of American civilization was shared by the progressives who fol- lowed him. In the author's opinion, progressivism was conceived when a moral-minded minority be- gan to observe the social effects of the industrial age, and to protest against what they considered the betrayal of the republican ideal. Although they ranged from moderate to radical in attitudes and policies, the progressives agreed that whatever be the form of society, the proper concern of govern- ment is "the care and culture of men." The 19th- century reformers here discussed appealed effec- tively to those of their contemporaries who sensed the inadequacies of American life and desired a serene and humane society based upon virtue and justice. Professor Aaron regards their 20th-century successors as more efficient, more impersonal, and less eloquent. He believes that the old progressive vision provides a humanist philosophy, indispu- tably idealistic and ethical, which is essential to any truly liberal movement. 6425. Childs, Richard S. Civic victories; the story of an unfinished revolution. New York, Harper, 1952. xvii, 350 p. illus. 52-12041 JK2408.C55 A study of and a program for State and local government election procedures by the originator of the short-form ballot and the council-manager plan of municipal administration. Mr. Childs is concerned with organizing elections to public office on lines that will best assure a practical working of the democratic process. Particularly is he anxious to eliminate the possibility of oligarchy and permit the people to put into public office the men they really want there. To prevent oligarchy, he con- tends, the ballot must be short enough and the num- ber of offices to be filled small enough to permit individual candidates to receive the fullest and most public scrutiny. He would separate from the elec- tive list all offices not high enough, or which deter- mine no policies large enough, to stir the people to take sides, and so remove a cause of "blind voting." He would hold the constituency to a size feasible for canvass by the ordinary independent candidate, and he would integrate the powers of government so as to make popular control effective. In addi- tion to the argument for his program, Mr. Childs provides a history of the crusade he undertook for it in 1909, together with a report of progress made. 6426. Greer, Thomas H. American social reform movements; their pattern since 1865. New York, Prentice-Hall, 1949. 313 p. (Prentice-Hall sociology series) 49-1202 HN57.G7 Bibliography: p. 293-299. The purpose of this book is to determine, through analysis of the basic elements — demand, organiza- tion, objectives, techniques, and accomplishments — the pattern of the major American reform move- ments initiated by labor, farmers, progressives, and radicals in the years 1 865-1949. Economic dis- tress, the author concludes, has given rise to most of the reform movements, which have gradually shifted from humanitarian purposes and Utopian thinking to the more restricted, practical, and selfish aims of a group or class. Professor Greer finds this change reflected in the leadership of the movements. Idealists have given way to realistic advocates of self-interest in the fields of labor and agriculture, POLITICS, PARTIES, ELECTIONS / IO59 and radical extremists have been succeeded by more practical and respectable men. Although earlier reform movements sought to embrace many diverse forces, later groups have followed a trend toward limited and integrated membership, an exception being such a radical group as the Marxists whose numerical weakness forces them to accept a diverse membership in order to have any following. In the author's opinion, reform movements tend to be short-lived because the public loses its zeal, because the goals set are out of reach, or because one of the major parties has borrowed the reform programs; he credits them, however, with substantial achievements. 6427. Haynes, Frederick E. Third party move- ments since the Civil War, with special reference to Iowa; a study in social politics. Iowa City, State Historical Society of Iowa, 19 16. 564 p. 16-6948 JK2261.H35 A study of the Liberal Republican, Farmers', Greenback, Populist, and Progressive movements, which regards all of them as growing out of the economic and social conditions arising from the settlement of the West. In Dr. Haynes' opinion, these successive third-party movements have, from the 1870's to the second decade of the 20th century, impelled the major political parties to take action against economic and social ills. These third parties he sees as means of agitation and education, and as expressions of objection to contemporary economic conditions. The Farmers', Greenback, and Popu- list movements, for example, represented repeated efforts of the democratic and enterprising citizens of the West to assert themselves against the op- pressive predominance of industrial wealth which prevailed from the 1870's to the 1890's. The 1912 platform of the Progressive Party the author con- siders to have been the culmination of the service performed by these parties in the conversion of American politics from almost exclusive concern with constitutional and governmental matters to recognition of the vital needs of the people. 6428. Howe, Frederic C. The confessions of a reformer. New York, Scribner, 1925. 352 p. 25-23619 H59.H6A3 At the outset of his autobiography, Frederic Clemson Howe (1867-1940) remarks that his life really began not in the 1860's but in the early 1890's at Johns Hopkins University where he came under the influence of Richard T. Ely, Woodrow Wilson, Albert Shaw, and James Bryce, and acquired a pressing sense of responsibility to the world as well as the ideal of the scholar in politics. He writes candidly of these and many other personages, among them Tom L. Johnson — with whom he was I060 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES associated in a ten-year (1901-10) struggle to make Cleveland a free, orderly, and beautiful city — Mark Hanna, Lincoln Steffens, Brand Whidock, Max Eastman, and Inez Milholland. He tells of his disillusioning experiences on the Cleveland city council, 1901-03, and in the Ohio State Senate, 1906-09, and of his humanitarian efforts as director of the People's Institute, New York, 1911-14, and as United States Commissioner of Immigration at the port of New York, 19 14-19. Freely he offers opinions, and indicates the processes whereby he reached them, upon such matters as political sov- ereignty, the single tax, the tariff, land speculation, special privileges, women's suffrage, World War I, and the League of Nations. Perhaps the most re- warding chapters are the several devoted to Tom Johnson and Woodrow Wilson. 6429. Johnson, Tom L. My story. Edited by Elizabeth J. Hauser. New York, B. W. Huebsch, 191 1. xli, 326 p. illus. 1 1-35975 F496.J69 The posthumously published memoir of Tom Loftin Johnson (1854-1911), who was an office boy in 1869, a successful industrialist by 1879, and a convert to the teachings of Henry George by 1883. Although Mr. Johnson writes very candidly and fully of his original determination to make money, he devotes most of his book to a history of his poli- tical career which began in 1888 with his unsuccess- ful Democratic candidacy for Congress, continued with his election as Representative from Ohio in 1890 and 1892, and reached its climax with his election as mayor of Cleveland in 190 1 and his re-election for three successive terms. His chroni- cle of his years as a fighting reform mayor forms the heart of this volume. The reader is told of Johnson's famous tent-meeting campaigns, of his battle for home rule, for a three-cent street railway fare, and for just taxation, and of his continuous education of the electorate concerning local political questions and the rights of the people as opposed to the special privileges of corporations. Johnson expresses his conviction that involuntary poverty is the result of law-made privilege whereby some men get more than they earn while most earn more than they get. Finally, he shows how he fought to end such privilege; in doing so he not only transformed the city but also, although he does not say so, be- came the outstanding municipal administrator of his time. 6430. Regier, Cornelius C. The era of the muck- rakers. Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina Press, 1932. 254 p. illus. 32-30647 E741.R34 Thesis (Ph. D.) — University of Iowa, 1922. Bibliography: p. [2 17] -241. An analysis of the crusade against corruption in American politics that was initiated by the popular magazines during the first decade of the 20th cen- tury, and that got its name from Theodore Roose- velt talking like a party stalwart. The author places the beginning of the muckraking era at the publication of the October 1902 issue of McClure's Magazine, which printed an article by Claude H. Wetmore and Lincoln Steffens, "Tweed Days in St. Louis," and announced the serial publication of Ida M. Tarbell's "History of the Standard Oil Company." S. S. McClure stumbled upon his highly successful policy of muckraking without pre- meditation, Dr. Regier believes, but the public re- sponse to the articles demonstrated that the Ameri- can people were less indifferent to the illegalities and abuses attendant upon the industrialization of the country and upon government favors to busi- ness than had been supposed. After 1902, he notes, McClure's Magazine took first rank among the journals of exposure and reform. In 1903 muck- raking became aggressive; by 1904 it had become sensational, and continued profitable and popular for nearly a decade. Among the matters investi- gated by the muckraking journalists were munici- pal, State, and national corruptions and the great corporations behind them, conservation, and labor problems. The author attaches a good deal of credit to the efforts of the muckrakers for the re- form legislation of the years 1904-15. 6431. Schlesinger, Arthur M. The American as reformer. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1950. 127 p. ([John Randolph Haynes and Dora Haynes Foundation, Los Angeles. Contem- porary American problems, 1950]) 50-14677 HN57.S35 Three lectures delivered at Pomona College, in which Professor Schlesinger seeks to interpret one aspect of the American spirit. The United States has stood in the forefront of such social innovations as manhood suffrage, freedom of the press, the separation of church and state, public education, and prison reform, he believes, because of two condi- tions: the lack of tradition to be torn down, and the nature of the original setders and their suc- cessors, rebels against privilege and oppression in their homelands, who carried their rebellion to the point of departure for a strange and distant land. Such folk quickened the tempo of change and re- form in America, the author contends, but because they wished to protect their new liberties, includ- ing those of speech and print, they quickly de- veloped "a middle-class attitude toward reform," and threw their weight on the side of the pragmatic approach and piecemeal progress. This attitude has continued to dominate the American mind. In his opinion, the reform impulse itself has been sus- stained and refreshed by two basic sets of ideals, the one stemming from the Christian religion, the other from the Declaration of Independence. 6432. Steffens, Joseph Lincoln. The autobiogra- phy of Lincoln Steffens. New York, Har- court, Brace, 1931. 884 p. illus. 31-28251 PN4874.S68A3 193^ The vivid and candid life story of Lincoln Stef- fens (1866-1936), eminent journalist, first and fore- most of the muckrakers, student of ethics and politics. The author tells most engagingly of his boyhood when he enjoyed open country in Cal- ifornia, his horses, dogs, and the sort of people who could share a child's dream world; this part of the book has been separately published. Steffens describes in generous detail his reportorial methods and his unorthodox principles of journalism. He provides vignettes of such notable or notorious figures as Richard Croker, the Tammany boss; Ray Stannard Baker and S. S. McClure, journalists; Joseph W. Folk, Seth Low, Robert M. La Follette, and other reformers; Theodore Roosevelt; and Woodrow Wilson. The core of the book, however, is its account of Steffens' discovery of the systematic corruption of city and state governments, through bribery of officials by certain businessmen, and of his conviction that bribery is not a mere felony but a treasonable and revolutionary process which trans- forms the ostensibly democratic representative gov- ernment of State and city into a plutocratic system that serves only the seekers of privilege. "You cannot build or operate a railroad," says Mr. Stef- fens, "or a street railway, gas, water, or power company, develop and operate a mine, or get forests and cut timber on a large scale, or run any privi- leged business, without corrupting or joining in the corruption of the government." This theme was more fully developed in his once famous book, The Shame of the Cities (New York, P. Smith, 1948 [°i904] 306 p.), first published as a series of articles in McClure s Magazine. A number of the author's conclusions, particularly those upon in- ternational affairs and world problems, have little cogency for today. 6433. Thomas, Norman M. A socialist's faith. New York, Norton, 195 1. 326 p. 51-9725 HX86.T377 A re-examination of the nature and status of socialism, as well as an analysis of recent world affairs, by the longtime leader of the American Socialist Party, who still found in 1951 "abundant POLITICS, PARTIES, ELECTIONS / Io6l reason for faith in democratic socialism as the best basis for ordering the good society." "Fortunately for me," writes Mr. Thomas, "socialism and Marx- ism are not identical." In a very fair survey and analysis he discusses, among other matters, the course pursued and the program evolved by social- ism since 1900, the function of religion in the social order, the development of the state and statism, the rise of equalitarianism, the problems of democracy, the chances for peace, and his own attitude toward the wars of his active lifetime. He seeks, "on the basis of simple affirmations of fraternity," to unite the social behavior of men of varying beliefs through the common denominator of a conviction that by cooperation they can win plenty, peace, and freedom. Democratic socialism, the author has come to believe, cannot today present itself as a complete, universal philosophy; rather it must be experimental; it must find a way to transform con- flict and mass destruction into fellowship and the destruction of poverty. 6434. Whitlock, Brand. Forty years of it. New York, Appleton, 1914. 373 p. 14-4523 HN57.W5 The warmly written and anecdotal autobiography of Brand Whitlock (1869-1934), who was elected reform mayor of Toledo in 1905, 1907, 1909, and 191 1, is also a history of democracy's progress in the Middle West during the period 1879-1914. Mr. Whidock's thesis was that the city has, in all ages, been the outpost of civilization, and that if the problem of democracy is to be solved at all, it must first be solved there. Finding in the city only one issue, the conflict between the democratic and the plutocratic spirit, he thought that the people had lost their voice in their own affairs. Representative government had disappeared, he believed, and had been replaced by machine rule operating for the benefit of public utility corporations through laws enacted precisely in their interests by state legis- latures. He advocated such remedial measures as nonpartisan city elections, municipal ownership, home rule for cities, and the initiative, referendum, and recall. He recommended the selection of pub- lic officers for their honesty and efficiency rather than for their party affiliation; he urged the people to be more active in selecting their officials and in preventing mere office-seekers from bringing about their own nominations. Finally, he stressed the need for regulation and control of public service corporations. When this book was published, Whidock had already begun his distinguished serv- ice as our envoy to Belgium (1913-22). XXXII Books and Libraries ji A. Printing and Publishing: General 6435-6448 B. Individual Publishers 6449-6453 C. Boof^Production: Technology and Art 6454-6459 D. Boo\ Selling and Collecting 6460-6465 E. Libraries 6466-6475 F. Librarianship and Library Use 6476-6487 THIS CHAPTER represents, first of all, a selection of books depicting the introduction, production, and diffusion of books in America. Because in these matters individual publishing firms have played a large part, some studies of prominent firms have been included. Since technical matters have been important in bringing about the large volume of books produced, several works on the technical aspects of production have been selected; some reflect increasing concern to produce books of distinctive format as well as content. Another phase of American culture centering about the book is provided by libraries of all types: public, private, school, college, university, regional, private research, town, city, State, and Federal. The existence of such a variety of institutions de- voted to the accumulation, preservation, organiza- tion, and mobilization of books for use in the United States has led to the creation of a large descriptive and expository literature. From this wealth of material, the present chapter brings together only a few representative books that identify some of the many book collectors who have served to enrich the intellectual life of the Nation, that illustrate the social role of libraries, and that set forth the philosophy and practice of librarianship in this coun- try. In this field, as perhaps in most fields today, a large part not only of recent fact and theory, but also of history, is to be found in periodicals. Among those published for librarians are Library Trends, College and Research Libraries, Library Journal, Special Libraries, and The Library Quarterly. While these are professional and techni- cal journals not addressed to the layman, they nevertheless provide the serious student with in- formation not otherwise obtainable. For the humanistic and literary interests in which many 1062 great libraries abound, the reader is referred to proceedings of societies, such as The Papers of the Bibliographical Society of America, and the publica- tions of libraries rich in rare books, of which the Henry E. Huntington Library, and the libraries of Harvard, Princeton, and Yale Universities are ex- amples. A dominant note of all the stories of books and book-collecting is the Horatio Alger-like rise from poverty to riches, as America moved from its colonial situation, when books were a highly prized rarity, to its present-day position. Books now abound, the country boasts a number of the most distinguished libraries in the world, and the rise of the paperback book has meant not only wide distribution of many titles to a mass audience but also that books are no longer luxury items but are well within the purchasing power of the great majority of citizens. Other chapters of this bibliography are, of course, closely related to subjects of the present one. The influence of the ideas presented by the books, and often giving the books their excuse for being, may be traced through Chapter XI, Intellectual History. The closely allied fields of newspapers and maga- zines are discussed in Chapter V, Periodicals and Journalism. Other pertinent works, including histories and discussions of various categories of BOOKS AND LIBRARIES I063 books, may be found in Chapter III, Literary History and Criticism. A. Printing and Publishing: General 6435. Bovvker lectures on book publishing. [Col- lected ed.] New York, Bowker, 1957. 389 p. 57-13988 Z2 7 8.B 7 8 _ 1957 The Bowker lectures commemorate Richard Rogers Bowker (1 848-1933). This brings together the first 17, delivered between 1935 and 1956. The sponsors of the lectures wished them to be "an aid and stimulus to the study of book publishing in the United States and the mutual problems of authors, publishers, librarians, readers, all makers and users of books." The lectures cover such topics as text- books, subscription books, the economics of author- ship, mapmaking, children's books, book clubs, copyright, and paperbound books. Upon their de- livery the lectures were published by the New York Public Library in its Bulletin and as separates; some have also appeared in whole or part in other period- icals; and the first 12 have been reprinted by the Typophiles in their Chapbooks series. Brought to- gether here, the lectures are made available to the general public, and constitute a valuable survey of many of the problems and methods affecting the writing, producing, and distributing of books in America today. 6436. Boynton, Henry Walcott. Annals of Ameri- can bookselling, 1 638-1 850. New York, Wiley, 1932. 209 p. illus. 32-34820 Z473.B79 "Source books": p. 196-198. This book opens with a brief sketch of the English background of book writing, publishing, and dis- tribution. It goes on to show parallels in the American scene, and to trace the developing book- selling system of America, first in Boston, and later in Philadelphia, New York, and other centers. Since bookselling was seldom an independent voca- tion before 1850, the author of necessity devotes much space to the printing and publishing of the period. The book is written for the general reader, and therefore has limited scholarly apparatus or de- tail, and does not present the results of original re- search. However, in brief compass it does present a fairly clear picture of the bookselling business as it developed in the thirteen colonies and the new re- public. Bookselling developed first and most ex- tensively in the Boston area, where it long remained largely on a printer-publisher-bookseller basis. This development is studied at length in George E. Little- field's Early Boston Booksellers, 1642-iju (Boston, Club of Odd Volumes, 1900. 256 p.), which gives a separate chapter to each individual included. 6437. Grannis, Chandler B., ed. What happens in book publishing. New York, Columbia University Press, 1957. 414 p. 56-12739 Z471.G7 6438. Schick, Frank L., ed. Trends in American book publishing. [Urbana, University of Illinois Library School] 1958. 233 p. (Library trends, v. 7, July 1958) 54-62638 Z671.L6173, v. 7 Mr. Grannis' preface states that this book "is in- tended to give ... a broad picture of what happens in publishing a book, particularly a book for trade (general retail) sale .... It is an outline of the procedures, a broad sketch to provide a context for the details; it is not a 'how-to' book." Part 1 de- scribes the structure of the publishing industry. Part 2, "Steps in Trade Book Publishing," contains nine chapters which progress from securing and editing a manuscript, through manufacture, to ad- vertising and selling the book. Part 3, "Some Underlying Problems," has four chapters on such topics as subsidiary rights, the business and legal aspects of publishing, and the foreign distribution of American books. Part 4 is made up of seven chapters on "Other Areas of Publishing"; they cover such aspects of nongeneral trade publishing as juve- niles, textbooks, religious books, university press books, paperbacks, and book clubs. The volume concludes with an appendix, "Some Statistics Fre- quendy Quoted," and an index. Each chapter of the book is by some individual with considerable experience in the field he discusses. There are brief lists for additional reading at the end of each chapter. Mr. Schick's symposium, which fills an issue of Library Trends, consists of 20 papers in ad- dition to his introduction. Only two of them are concerned with generalities — the economic develop- ment of publishing and the physical development of bookmaking in the last decade — and trade-book publishing is disposed of in a 9-page statement by Mr. Grannis. Mr. Schick's main object is to "probe into the complexities of the heterogeneous topic of American book publishing," and the issue is partic- 1064 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES ularly valuable for its papers on a variety of special- ties concerning which information is not easily found elsewhere. Besides treatments of most of the specialties dealt with in Mr. Grannis' volume, there are papers on private presses and collectors' editions; vanity press (its houses now refer to them- selves as "subsidy" or "cooperative" publishers), foundation, and association publishing; and the pub- lishing of hardcover reprints, reference and subscrip- tion books, art and architecture books, music books, law books, and medical books. 6439. Kerr, Chester. A report on American uni- versity presses. [Washington] Association of American University Presses, 1949. 302 p. 49-4375 Z231.5.U6K4 "Based on a survey sponsored by the American Council of Learned Societies with a grant from the Rockefeller Foundation." Bibliography: p. 297-302. American university presses, generally speaking, had a slow start in the 19th century. In recent years they have developed rapidly, and they now hold an important position in American publishing. While some of this progress has occurred since Mr. Kerr's report was prepared, his study does show the emergence of the presses into public prominence. It is limited to the one Canadian and 34 American presses which at that time were members of the Association of American University Presses. The survey presents in some detail the organization, operational procedures, general policies, staffing, distribution, financing, selection policies, edition sizes, and other aspects of this branch of American publishing. 6440. Lehmann-Haupt, Hellmut. The book in America; a history of the making and selling of books in the United States, by Hellmut Lehmann- Haupt in collaboration with Lawrence C. Wroth and Rollo G. Silver. 2d [rev. and enl. American] ed. New York, Bowker, 1951. xiv, 493 p. 51-11308 Z473.L522 1951 Contents. — Book production and distribution from the beginning to the American Revolution, by L. C. Wroth. — Book production and distribution from the American Revolution to the War between the States, by L. C. Wroth and R. G. Silver. — Book production and distribution from i860 to the present day, by H. Lehmann-Haupt. — Bibliography (p. 422-466). This historical study of book production and com- mercial distribution in America first appeared as Das Ameri\anische Buchwesen, Buchdruc\ und Buchhandel, Bibliophile und Bibliothehjwesen in den Vereinigten Staaten von den Anjdngen bis zur Gegenwart (Leipzig, Hiersemann, 1937. 385 p.). The subsequent revised and enlarged edition ap- peared in English as The Boo\ in America; a History of the Maying, the Selling, and the Col- lecting of Boo\s in the United States (New York, Bowker, 1939. 453 p.). Both of these editions contained a section by Ruth Granniss on book col- lecting and the development of public libraries in the United States; unfortunately, the increased size of the 195 1 edition required the omission of this material. The work as it presently stands is a comprehensive, concise survey of the field of book production and distribution. The authors trace the spread of printing, technological innovations, style changes, and other technical matters, and discuss the nature and range of the books published. Sub- sidiary problems such as book clubs, copyright, and private press work are also gone into. The ex- tensive, though now slighdy dated, bibliography is divided into subject categories. 6441. Miller, William. The book industry, a re- port of the Public Library Inquiry. New York, Columbia University Press, 1949. xvi, 156 p. 49-10422 Z471.M65 1949 "A note on method and sources": p. [i33]-i40. Mr. Miller's work concentrates on "trade" books, new books published for general sale through retail bookstores. It does not extensively investigate re- prints, book club editions, textbooks, university press books, government publications, or other nontrade publications. However, these aspects are touched upon at various points in the book, usually in their effect upon trade books. After a general survey of trade publishing, Mr. Miller devotes a chapter to the effect of various factors (popular taste, movies, book clubs, etc.) on the editorial decisions of pub- lishers. Chapter 3 is on the nontechnical aspects of book manufacture and the costs incurred by the publication of a work. Chapter 4 surveys "The Book Markets"; in its course attention is directed to the effects of book clubs and advertising on the general markets book sales. The concluding chapter discusses the relationship between "Trade Publishing and the Public Libraries," concluding that libraries have but small effect on the publishers, though the latter are of major influence on the li- braries. An appendix presents in tabular form "Some Book Industry Statistics." An earlier and more extensive study in the same field is Orion H. Cheney's Economic Survey of the Boo\ Industry, 1930-1931, as Prepared for the National Association of Boo\ Publishers, with 194J-10.48 Statistical Re- port [of the American Boo\ Publishers Council] (New York, Bowker, 1949. c 1931. 368 p.). The 1947-48 report is little more than a brief statistical survey, and the volume is now of largely historical interest. Neither Cheney nor Miller covers the publishing "revolution" effected by paperbacks dur- ing the past decade. 6442. Oswald, John Clyde. Printing in the Americas. New York, Gregg Pub. Co., 1937. xii, 565, xvii-xli p. illus. 37-15130 Z205.O86 This history of printing in the Americas supple- ments but does not quite supplant Thomas' History of Printing in America (no. 6447). It opens with descriptions of the kinds of literature most com- monly or strikingly produced by the printers of the Thirteen Colonies: newspapers (the product of nearly every pioneer printshop), Bibles (Eliot's Indian Bible of 1663 and Sower's German Bible of 1743 preceded Aitken's English Bible of 1782), al- manacs, pamphlet sermons, broadside ballads, etc. After describing the equipment of colonial print- shops the author embarks upon a chronologico- geographical survey in the manner of Thomas. Each colony or State is introduced according to the priority of its printing, and for some of the older States there are chapters on individual printers, such as Matthew Day, the teen-ager who inaugurated American printing at Cambridge, Mass., in 1638, or on printing families, such as the Greens, the Franklins, and the Sowers. After concluding with Wyoming (1867), Alaska, and Hawaii, the author devotes four topical chapters to "Fine Bookmaking," "Typography," "Machines and Methods," and "Printing Organizations." He then gives brief sur- veys of printing origins and history for the provinces of British North America, for Greenland, for the West Indies, and for the nations of Latin America. The book lacks a bibliography, but it has a 25- page index and numerous facsimiles (some in black and red) of early imprints. 6443. Rosenberg, Bernard, and David Manning White, eds. Mass culture; the popular arts in America. Glencoe, 111., Free Press, 1957. 561 p. 57-6749 E169.1.R7755 As its title indicates, this "reader" is by no means concerned exclusively with books; however, it does devote considerable space to popular books (paper- backs, bestsellers, commercial fiction, etc.) and allied fields such as magazines and comic books, as well as the more distandy allied "literature" of radio, television, motion pictures, popular songs, and ad- vertising. The 49 essays presented attempt to probe the relationships between cultural works produced for mass consumption, and the society that consumes them. An attempt also has been made to achieve a balance in the distribution of the contributors be- tween those who look with favor upon the phenomenon covered, and those who view it with alarm. A few of the essays are here published for BOOKS AND LIBRARIES / 1065 the first time; others are extracted from books; but the greater number are reprinted from learned jour- nals or reviews. "Further Reading" is suggested at the end of each of the book's sections. Popular books are also covered at some length in other titles elsewhere in this bibliography, most notably under Literary History and Criticism; other aspects of mass culture are treated in other sections: Period- icals and Journalism, Music, Sports and Recreation, Entertainment, etc. 6444. Schick, Frank L. The paperbound book in America; the history of paperbacks and their European background. New York, Bowker, 1958. xviii, 262 p. illus. 58-10097 Z1033.P3S35 While this book devotes several chapters to the development of paperbound book publishing, it is mainly concerned with the mass market aspects that emerged with the appearance of Pocket Books in 1939 and have now revolutionized American pub- lishing. The author traces the development of this mass market, the formats used, prices, distribution systems, and quantities. Little or no attention is given to literary evaluation. Individual sections sketch the history and present status of many of the leading present-day paperback publishers. The selective bibliography (p. 245-250) directs the reader to many other studies and articles on the subject. 6445. Sheehan, Donald H. This was publishing; a chronicle of the book trade in the Gilded Age. Bloomington, Indiana University Press, 1952. 288 p. 52-14582 Z473.S47 In this study of the book industry from the end of the Civil War to the outbreak of World War I the author draws much of his information from the private records of Henry Holt and Co., Harper and Brothers, Dodd, Mead and Co., and Charles Scrib- ners' Sons, as well as from the chronicling of the trade in Publishers' Weekly. Although the em- phasis on four firms, because their records were the ones available, does place some limits on the study, the fact that these four were leaders in the field makes them reasonably representative of the whole. In this period the book industry grew, through many uncertainties and constantly recurring crises, into the giant of the present, evolving special meth- ods which have continued in use. These the author traces in their manifold aspects of publishing pol- icies, author-publisher relationships, contractual re- lationships, wholesaling, copyright problems, trade regulation, advertising, etc. The book is written in a lively manner for the layman, yet it includes a fairly extensive index and a bibliography (p. 273- 2 7 8 )- 1066 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 6446. Stern, Madeleine B. Imprints on history, book publishers and American frontiers. Bloomington, Indiana University Press, 1956. 492 p. 56-11995 Z473.S857 This book presents for the general reader a large part of the story of printing and publishing in 19th- century America regarded as an expansion into frontiers of space and frontiers of the mind. The approach is biographical, with each chapter present- ing the story of an individual who pioneered in some aspect of this field. Typical figures studied in- clude James Bemis, who brought printing to the frontier communities of upstate New York; William Hilliard, printer and bookseller, who supplied many of the needs of Harvard University, assembled the core collection of the newly established University of Virginia, and otherwise "helped to expand the awakening intellectual forces of the East"; Robert Fergus, pioneer printer of mushrooming Chicago; Jacob W. Cruger of Houston, Texas; Ernst Steiger, German-American publisher of New York City who played a significant role in the Americanization of the German immigrants; and John W. Lovell, who published outspoken works on social problems and did much to advance labor and woman's rights. The book concludes with a long supplement (p. 329-338), arranged alphabetically, of short notes on the 191 publishing firms which were founded before 1900 and are still operating; it concludes with a chronological list, 1 769-1 899. The biographical sketches obviously do not cover more than a frac- tion of the field; nevertheless they give representa- tive specimens of the kinds of innovation and change in printing and publishing that were going on throughout the century. Though not scholarly in tone, the book is thoroughly researched, with ex- tensive notes (p. 389-464) indicating the sources, and an index. 6447. Thomas, Isaiah. The history of printing in America, with a biography of printers, and an account of newspapers. 2d ed. Published under the supervision of a special committee of the American Antiquarian Society. Albany, N.Y., Munsell, 1874. 2 v. (Archaeologia americana. Transactions and collections of the American Anti- quarian Society, v. 5-6) 2-6034 Z208.E451 Committee of publication: Samuel F. Haven, Nathaniel Paine, and Joel Munsell. Contents. — 1. Preface. Memoir of Isaiah Thomas by his grandson Benjamin Franklin Thomas. History of printing in America. Ap- pendix A: History of printing in [Spanish] Amer- ica. Communicated by John R. Bartlett [with lists of books printed in Mexico and Peru before 1600]. — 2. History of printing (cont.): History of news- papers. Booksellers in the Colonies, from the first settlement of the country to the commencement of the Revolutionary War, in 1775. Catalogue of publications in what is now the United States, prior to the Revolution of 1775-6 [compiled by Samuel F. Haven, Jr.]. Index. Isaiah Thomas (1 749-1 831) first published this work himself in two volumes in 18 10. He made numerous manuscript notes for corrections and ad- ditions; these were incorporated in the second edi- tion, but his lengthy survey of the origin of print- ing in Europe was omitted. Despite its age, this history remains a standard survey of colonial American printing. Some additional notes to the text were supplied by the editors, and bear their initials. In the later years covered by the book, Isaiah Thomas himself was a leading figure. He was probably the foremost American printer and publisher of his day, and he issued more tides than any of his contemporaries or predecessors. His in- teresting career is studied in Annie Russell Marble's From 'Prentice to Patron (New York, Appleton- Century, 1935. 326 p.). A shorter study, Clifford Kenyon Shipton's Isaiah Thomas, Printer, Patriot, and Philanthropist, iy 49-18 31 (Rochester, N.Y., Leo Hart, 1948. 94 p.), is aimed at a more special- ized audience of bibliophiles and typophiles, and in- cludes more information on Thomas' activities in founding and promoting the American Antiquarian Society (1812). In our own day Clarence S. Brigham (b. 1877) has remade the Society's library at Worcester, Mass., into the greatest collection in the world of early American imprints of every descrip- tion. His modest account of this achievement, in- cluding concise characterizations of the collections and their importance, is Fifty Years of Collecting Americana for the Library of the American Anti- quarian Society, 1908-1958 (Worcester, Mass., 1958. 185 p.). 6448. Wroth, Lawrence C. The colonial printer. [2d ed., rev. & enl.] Portland, Me., South- worth-Anthoensen Press, 1938. xxiv, 368 p. illus. 38-14676 Z208.W95 1938 "Works referred to in notes": p. [33i]~347. This book is a study not primarily of the books and other printed materials produced in America during the colonial period, but rather of the practi- cal problems involved in their production. Atten- tion is therefore focused on such matters as the nature of colonial presses, the typefaces used, the nature and production methods of ink and paper, working conditions, and bookbinding. A some- what more bibliophilic study of the field for one colony was produced by Dr. Wroth in his A History of Printing in Colonial Maryland, 1686-1776 (Baltimore, Typothetae of Baltimore, 1922. 275 p.); this work was continued by Joseph Towne Wheeler in The Maryland Press, ijjj-ijyo (Balti- more, Maryland Historical Society, 1938. 226 p.). A broader study is Douglas C. McMurtrie's A History of Printing in the United States; the Story of the Introduction of the Press and of Its History and Influence During the Pioneer Period in Each State of the Union, of which only the second volume, Middle & South Atlantic States (New York, Bowker, 1936. 462 p.), was completed at the time of the author's death; however, publication of ad- ditional material from his papers has been promised. A study of an area more influential in printing matters in its period is George E. Littlefield's The Early Massachusetts Press, 1638-ijn (Boston, Club of Odd Volumes, 1907. 2 v.). A largely bibli- BOOKS AND LIBRARIES / 1067 ophilic study of the first printing press in English America is Robert F. Roden's The Cambridge Press, 1638-1692 (New York, Dodd, Mead, 1905. 193 p.), considerable of which is made up of "A Bibli- ographical List of the Issues of the Press"; the text traces the press' history as much in terms of publi- cations as in terms of changing ownership, methods, and working conditions. George Parker Winship's The Cambridge Press, 1638-1692 (Philadelphia, University of Pennsylvania Press, 1945. 385 p.) does not attempt to redo the systematic part of Roden's book, but brings a quantity of fresh 17th- century evidence to bear upon the circumstances in which the Bay Psalm Book, the Eliot Indian Bible, and many other issues of this press were produced. B. Individual Publishers 6449. Burlingame, Roger. Of making many books; a hundred years of reading, writing and publishing. New York, Scribner, 1946. 347 p. 46-8389 Z473.B9 This volume was prepared to mark the centenary of Charles Scribner 's Sons, which was founded in 1846 and grew to be one of America's largest general publishers. The book is not a formal history of the firm, but each chapter pursues, in generally chronological form, some aspect of the firm's history. These are developed mainly through extensive quotations from the communications of the pub- lishers and their authors. This lends the book much variety, but its anecdotal manner does not permit the presentation of many statistics, facts of chronology, or other details of the organization's structural history. The book does convey an im- pression of author-publisher relations over a cen- tury, and of some publishing problems. The topics treated include bestsellers, plagiarism, acceptances, rejections, war, poetry, editing, and printing. Con- siderable space is also devoted to the magazines which the firm has issued. In preparing the book Mr. Burlingame had access to Scribner 's complete files. "Since this was to be a picture of the past, it was agreed that the use of letters should be limited to those of authors who were no longer living." A few exceptions to this were made in order to com- plete certain stories, and no such restrictions were imposed upon the writings of the publishers and editors. Mr. Burlingame is also the author of a newly published history of the McGraw-Hill Book Company entitled Endless Frontiers (New York, McGraw-Hill, 1959. 506 p.). 6450. Harper, Joseph Henry. The house of Harper; a century of publishing in Franklin Square, by J. Henry Harper. New York, Harper, 1912. 689 p. illus. 12-3620 Z473.H29H 1912 The house of Harper and Brothers was founded in 1 8 17 as a printing establishment, which over the years was built up by the original four brothers and their descendants into one of the major Ameri- can publishing firms of the 19th and 20th centuries. In this study one of the descendants presents an anecdotal history of the varied activities of the firm, including an extensive recounting of their ventures in the field of periodical publishing. This long book owes much of its length to its extensive quota- tions from the company's correspondence files. It affords considerable insight into the work and prin- ciples of 19th-century publishing, especially in the second half of the century. This is pardy because of the author's tendency to use personal reminiscence as framework and subject. A later volume of reminiscences by the author, with less emphasis on the activities of the firm, is his / Remember (New York, Harper, 1934. 281 p.). It is written in a more discursive manner, and is largely made up of incidents concerning persons he had known in his long career as a publisher. It does, however, throw some further light upon the firm's activities, and it does something to bring the 19 12 volume up to date. 6451. Kaser, David. Messrs. Carey & Lea of Philadelphia; a study in the history of the booktrade. Philadelphia, University of Pennsyl- vania Press, 1957. 182 p. 57-1 1771 Z473.L45K3 1957 1068 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Carey & Lea was for some years probably the largest and best-known publishing firm in America. This history, which originated in a University of Michigan dissertation, traces the house from its inception in 1822 until the retirement of Henry Carey in 1838, after which it rapidly declined. Since the firm was in its period a trade leader, the book offers much insight into the conditions prevalent throughout the trade during much of the 19th century. The first part of the book is a general history of Carey & Lea, while the second part, larger than the first, consists of chapters analyzing the several types of its publications (literary, scien- tific, reprints, American originals, etc.), with a concluding chapter on the firm's relationship with the rest of the trade. The present-day publishing house descended from Carey & Lea is Lea & Febiger, dealing predominandy in scientific and medical works; a brief history of it and its anteced- ents is presented in its booklet, One Hundred and Fifty Years of Publishing, ij8 5-/ 93 5 (Philadelphia, Lea & Febiger, 1935. 42 p.). 6452. Merritt, LeRoy Charles. The United States Government as publisher. Chicago, Uni- versity of Chicago Press, 1943. 179 p. inch tables, diagrs. (The University of Chicago studies in library science) A 43-1562 Z1223.Z7M35 Bibliography: p. 175-176. The United States Government has often been called the nation's leading publisher. Its annual production includes many thousands of titles total- ing many million of copies. The numerous books, pamphlets, serials, and other materials reflect the extensive and highly complex activities of the Gov- ernment itself. They include reports on the activ- ities of the many branches of the Government, publications intended to facilitate administration, in- formational works for the benefit of specialists or the general public, etc. Mr. Merritt's study an- alyzes these publications with respect to issuing office, function, and subject, and discusses their dis- tribution and general development in the 20th cen- tury. He noted, as of 1939, that the sale of Federal publications was increasing, and their free distribu- tion diminishing. Some of the background of Gov- ernment publishing may be obtained from Laurence F. Schmeckebier's The Government Printing Of- fice; Its History, Activities and Organization (Baltimore, Johns Hopkins Press, 1925. 143 p. Institute for Government Research of the Brookings Institution. Service monographs of the United States Government, no. 36), a study of the agency which designs, prints, and distributes most of the publications of the Government. While the Fed- eral Government may be the most prolific American publisher, much publishing is also done by State and local governments and by the United Nations Organization, whose headquarters is in New York City; the scope, quantity, and general problems of these are outlined in James L. McCamy's Govern- ment Publications for the Citizen; a Report of the Public Library Inquiry (New York, Columbia Uni- versity Press, 1949. 139 p.), written with the as- sistance of Julia B. McCamy. It is chiefly concerned with library problems in the acquisition, cataloging, and use of such materials. The guides to Federal publications by Schmeckebier and Boyd are entered in Chapter XXIX (no. 6138). William Philip Leidy's A Popular Guide to Government Publica- tions (New York, Columbia University Press, 1953. xxii, 296 p.) lists, with brief annotations in most cases, some 2,500 items selected for their potential interest to the average citizen, and classified under nearly a hundred headings from "Agriculture" to "World War II." 6453. Wiley (John) and Sons, inc. The first one hundred and fifty years; a history of John Wiley and Sons, incorporated, 1 807-1 957. New York, 1957. 242 p. illus. 57-7626 Z473.W63 This publishing house goes back to 1807, when Charles Wiley opened in New York a printing shop and bookstore, two things which usually went to- gether at that time. The firm published many distinguished literary works in its early decades. By the latter part of the 19th century it had given up general publishing for specialization in scientific and technical books. This later period receives the greatest attention here, partly because of its im- portance, but also because few of the old records have been preserved. The result is that after three opening chapters on the early period and the firm's literary books, there follow 25 chapters on its scien- tific and technical publications. Each of these chapters is devoted to books in a particular category, such as agriculture, metallurgy, geography, statis- tics, civil engineering, industrial engineering, archi- tecture, chemical engineering, and psychology. In each some of the more important works are men- tioned and related to both the development of the firm and of knowledge in the field. The treatment also gives some idea of the general development of scientific and technical publishing in America. A book of related interest is Edward M. Crane's A Century ofBoo\ Publishing, 1848-1948 (New York, Van Nostrand, 1948. 73 p.). It traces the history of the D. Van Nostrand Company, another leading publisher of scientific works, which in its early days also cultivated naval and military history. Mr. Crane's arrangement is mainly chronological, em- phasizing the development of the company rather than the subject matter of books published. BOOKS AND LIBRARIES / I069 C. Book Production: Technology and Art 6454. Asheim, Lester, ed. The future of the book; implications of the newer develop- ments in communication. Chicago, University of Chicago, Graduate Library School, 1955. 105 p. (Papers presented before the Twentieth Annual Conference of the Graduate Library School of the University of Chicago, June 20-24, T 955) 56-582 Z674.C4 20th "Published originally in the Library quarterly, October 1955." Society has traditionally relied primarily upon books for the transmission of knowledge and cul- ture. This has been challenged in modern times by the advent of mass communications (radio, tele- vision, etc.), nonprinted records (microfilms, mo- tion pictures, phonorecords, etc.), and other tech- nological innovations. At the same time the flood of materials has been such as to lead to the devising of mechanical controls through codification (via "mechanical brains," etc.), and large-scale problems in the storage as well as use of such materials. Further, some have feared that the demise of the book is imminent as a result both of the ascendancy of audiovisual mass media and of increasing costs of book production, rendering difficult the distribu- tion in printed form of all but such works as have a presumable mass market. These problems are dis- cussed in this symposium, which probably reveals less about the future of the book than about present- day trends and the problems and potentialities be- fore us in the field of books and other records of man's experience. 6455. Baker, Elizabeth (Faulkner). Printers and technology; a history of the International Printing Pressmen and Assistants' Union. New York, Columbia University Press, 1957. 545 p. 57-11448 Z120.B16 Bibliography: p. [523J-528. A history of the union from its founding in 1889 through the activities of 1956; it is international in name, but most of its locals are in the United States. Such problems as technological changes over the years are treated from the point of view not of their effect on the design and distribution of printed matter, but of their effect on employment, pay, job skills, and like matters. In her introduction Mrs. Baker writes: "This book is more than a case study of the International Printing Pressmen and Assist- ants' Union, however, although it presents many expressed feelings of members and their leaders in an attempt to reveal the motives which led to their official action. In the process of tracing the course of policies and acts, we follow two closely allied issues: effect of technology upon printing and print- ing trades unionism, and the changing role of fore- men and of union-management relations." A so- ciological study of the structure and leadership of another union in the printers' trade is Union De- mocracy; the Internal Politics of the International Typographical Union (Glencoe, 111., Free Press, 1956. xxviii, 455 p.), by Seymour Martin Lipset, Martin A. Trow, and James S. Coleman. 6456. Gress, Edmund G. Fashions in American typography, 1780 to 1930, with brief illus- trated stories of the life and environment of the American people in seven periods, and demonstra- tions of E. G. G.'s fresh note American period typography. New York, Harper, 1931. xxviii, 201 p. 3 I ~3453 I Z250.G83 Much of this book is devoted to the author's own ideas of how the types of seven periods of American history could be modernized (or "fresh noted") so as to be useful in modern press work designed to reflect a given period. The book mainly discusses the leading American type designs of the past. Most of its space is occupied by illustrations and facsimile reproductions, making clear the changes in typo- graphical styles since the Republic was founded. As part of his attempt to convey the atmosphere of suc- cessive periods, the author has included a number of pictures illustrating the life of each period, and has briefly mentioned them in the text. An impor- tant book for modern type design is A Half-Century of Type Design and Typography, 1895-1945 (New York, The Typophiles, 1946. 2 v.), a major work by one of this country's leading type designers, Frederic William Goudy (1865-1947). 6457. Hunter, Dard. Papermaking in pioneer America. Philadelphia, University of Penn- sylvania Press, 1952. xiv, 178 p. illus. 52-12473 TS1095.U6H8 1952 6458. Weeks, Lyman Horace. A history of paper- manufacturing in the United States, 1690- 1916. New York, Lockwood Trade Journal Co., 1916. xv, 352 p. illus. 17-12277 TS1095.U6W4 Mr. Dard Hunter (b. 1883) of Chillicothe, Ohio, has had his own private press since 19 15 and has made his own paper by hand since 1929; as early as 1070 A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES 1915 and 1917 he produced what are thought to be the first books in the history of printing in which every element was the handiwork of a single man! Incidentally to the practice of his crafts he has be- come a world authority on the history and tech- niques of papermaking, and has established the Dard Hunter Paper Museum at the Massachusetts Institute of Technology. Papermaking in Pioneer America, printed on paper made by hand especially for the purpose at his small Connecticut mill, is based on lectures he delivered in 1948 when appointed to the University of Pennsylvania Rosenbach Fellow- ship in Bibliography. The art of papermaking, in- vented in China in 105 A. D., reached America in 1575, at Culhuacan, Mexico, and the Thirteen Colonies about 1690, when William Rittenhouse (born Rittinghuysen) and his son Nicholas set up a small water-powered papermill at Roxborough, near Germantown, Pennsylvania. Mr. Hunter describes "The Equipment and the Operation of the Early Mills," and then traces the pioneer mill of each colony and State from New Jersey (1726) to Ten- nessee (181 1 ). A final chapter describes the career of Nathan Sellers (1751-1830), whose skill at wire- work enabled him to become the first American maker of paper moulds on a commercial scale, supplying hundreds of American papermakers. There is also much of American interest in Mr. Hunter's magisterial Papermaking; the History and Technique of an Ancient Craft, 2d ed. rev. and enl. (New York, Knopf, 1947. xxiv, 611, xxxvii p.), which, with its 317 illustrations, describes materials, processes, and machines in every land from the most primitive to the most technologically advanced, and pays special attention to watermarks. Weeks' His- tory contains much information for the earlier period that is not in Mr. Hunter's specialized lec- tures, and then describes a further hundred years of a constantly expanding industry, transformed in 18 1 7 by Thomas Gilpin, who introduced in his mill near Wilmington, Del., a power-driven "revolving cylinder making paper continuous and endless in length instead of in single sheets." Chapter 11 de- scribes the search for new and cheaper raw mate- rials, a great economic success gained at the expense of the quality and the permanence of the product. Present-day methods of mass production are suc- cincdy described for the layman in Edwin Suter- meister's The Story of Papermaking (Boston, S. D. Warren Co., 1954. 209 p.). 6459. Winship, George Parker. Daniel Berkeley Updike and the Merrymount Press of Boston, Massachusetts, i860, 1894, 1941. Rochester, N.Y., Leo Hart, 1947. 141 p. facsims. (The Printers' Valhalla) 48-1487 Z232.M57W5 Updike (1860-1941) has been regarded by many as the greatest craftsman of fine printing that America has produced. In 1893 he set up his own business, the Merrymount Press, at Boston. His early work was florid in the manner of William Morris, the English prime mover of the "printing renaissance." Updike, however, soon moved to a greater simplicity and originality of book design. Throughout his career he endeavored to match the world's best printing designs with the particular work to be printed, so as to produce a work of clar- ity and beauty. He designed some books for other large presses, but most of his work was in the field of limited editions of works of limited interest. His work had a wide influence on the work of others, and was in itself a major factor in the modern inter- est in the typographical design of trade books. Winship 's book traces Updike's career but gives most of its space to discussing and illustrating the work of the Merrymount Press. Updike himself wrote about his press and its aims in his Notes on the Merrymount Press &■ Its Wor\ (Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1934. 279 p.), most of which (p. 59-268) consists of a bibliography of the productions of the press. Updike: American Printer and His Merrymount Press (New York, American Institute of Graphic Arts, 1947. 156, [44] p.) is a group of nine essays issued in memory of Updike, whose own "Notes on the Press and Its Work," is reprinted at the beginning of the volume. Updike published three papers on fine typography as In the Day's Wor\ (Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1924. 69 p.). His major work was Printing Types; Their History, Forms, and Use; a Study in Sur- vivals, 2d ed. (Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1937. 2 v.), which discussed and illustrated at length the major typographical advances of the Western world; while its main use is as a history of typography in the West, it also reveals Updike's own views on type design and printing. D. Book Selling and Collecting 6460. Adams, Randolph G. Three Americanists: Henry Harrisse, bibliographer; George Brin- ley, book collector; Thomas Jefferson, librarian. Philadelphia, University of Pennsylvania Press, 1939. 101 p. 39-6767 Z1206.A2A2 Three essays which originated as lectures at the University of Pennsylvania in 1938. Here they ap- pear with footnotes and an index. The first is on Henry Harrisse (1829-1910), a Franco-American bibliographer who specialized in the earliest Ameri- cana. Probably his best-known work is the Biblio- theca Americana Vetustissima (New York, G. P. Philes, 1866. 519 p.) and its supplementary volume subtitled Additions (Paris, Tross, 1872. 199 p.), the two combined being "A Description of Works Relating to America, Published between the Years 1492 and 1 55 1," as the first volume was subtided. Harrisse wrote other works on the period, and was also a book collector of considerable note. The sec- ond essay is on George Brinley (1817-1875), in the opinion of some the foremost collector of Americana as well as the first Americanist bibliophile of im- portance. The third essay describes Thomas Jef- ferson's book collecting activities. Jefferson appears at numerous other points in this Guide; here he is discussed in his relatively little known role as book collector, as "father" of the Library of Congress, whose collections were rebuilt about the nucleus of Jefferson's library, and as a figure of the first impor- tance in the library classification of books. Since Jefferson probably had the foremost private library in America in 1815, it would deserve considerable attention even without its subsequent history. Much about the collection itself, about Jefferson's other books, and about book collecting in America in his day will be found in the Catalogue of the Library of Thomas Jefferson (Washington, Library of Con- gress, 1952-59. 5 v.), compiled with annotations by E. Millicent Sowerby. In the foreword to volume 1 the compiler says that she undertook a study "which would reveal not only what volumes Mr. Jefferson had acquired but, when possible, where and why he had acquired them and, most important, how he had made use of them." 6461. Cannon, Carl L. American book collectors and collecting from Colonial times to the present. New York, Wilson, 194 1. 391 p. 41-51592 Z987.C3 This study traces the main oudines of private book collecting in America from colonial times to about 1930. About half the book consists of chapters on individual collectors, and the rest of the chapters on the subjects and fields of collection. However, the subject chapters are usually sub- divided into sections on individual collectors. The author attempts to show the motivations behind the collecting of rare and valuable books. He also indi- cates what later happened to each collection, and thereby reveals the great extent to which these col- lections became parts of larger libraries, or were themselves established as libraries available to BOOKS AND LIBRARIES / I07I scholars and the public. These collectors, the author points out, have added much to America's cultural resources. 6462. Goodspeed, Charles E. Yankee bookseller; being the reminiscences of Charles E. Good- speed. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1937. 325 p. illus. 37-28796 Z473.G57 Private book collecting on any considerable scale necessitates access to rare and other noncurrent books and related materials. For this purpose the mainstay of the private collector is the rare- and used-book dealer. One of the outstanding 20th- century businessmen in this field was Charles Eliot Goodspeed (1 867-1 950), who established his Boston store in 1898. His reminiscences, which are largely anecdotal in nature, do not present a concisely de- tailed or chronological account of his business, but they are almost exclusively concerned with it in one way or another. They illustrate many features of rare-book and used-book selling, as well as of private book collecting, in this country during the first three decades of this century. Goodspeed also narrates incidents concerning the closely allied fields of print and autograph selling, as well as forgeries of both printed and manuscript items. 6463. Lee, Charles. The hidden public; the story of the Book-of-the-Month Club. Garden City, N.Y., Doubleday, 1958. 236 p. 58-13908 Z549.B69L4 Book clubs sprang up in Germany immediately after World War I; the first American one, the Book-of-the-Month Club, was inaugurated by Harry Scherman in April 1926, and its immense success has led to numerous imitations. Mr. Scherman (b. 1887), founder, president, and chairman of the board, is still the guiding spirit of the enterprise. The essential idea is the guaranteed market pro- vided by the members, who have contracted to take what will be chosen for them by a panel of superior literary intelligences, and can therefore buy for significandy less than the established retail prices (their benefits accrue only partially in reduced prices, for they receive "dividend" or "bonus" books as well). National advertising and the parcel post take the place of the local bookstore, which has in recent years been a declining institution. An orig- inal BOMC membership of 4,750 grew to 889,305 in 1946, and during 1947-50 the Club paid an an- nual dividend of over a million dollars to its share- holders. Since 1948 the membership has remained at approximately half a million. The Club's literary record may be studied in Mr. Lee's "List of Selec- tions, Dividends, and Alternates, 1926-57" (p. 161— 194). Mr. Lee has collected judgments from a num- [072 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES ber of critics, which vary over a wide range of ap- proval or disapproval. Max Lerner makes the shrewd comment that "the effect of the book club on American reading taste has been to make the almost-good much more popular than it would have been, and every now and then to get an audience for the really good." 6464. Lewis, Wilmarth S. Collector's progress. New York, Knopf, 1951. 253 p. illus. 51-11290 Z989.L5 Mr. Lewis urbanely discusses the history of his famous Horace Walpole collection. He opens with a brief account of his early collecting efforts, rapidly passes over his period as an amateur book collec- tor, and then concentrates for the bulk of the volume on his activities as one of America's foremost private collectors, specializing in an individual whose life and letters mirror so much of 18th-century culture. Indirectly the book reveals much about book collect- ing in 20th-century America, and the rare-book dealers involved in projects such as that of Mr. Lewis. He is also the principal editor of the multi- volume edition of Walpole's correspondence being published by the Yale University Press. A book which discusses the goals, means, and problems of book collectors is A Primer of Boo\-Collecting, rev. and enl. ed. (New York, Greenberg, 1946. 226 p.), by John T. Winterich in collaboration with David A. Randall, who was mainly responsible for the revision. Mr. Winterich is also the author of a very pleasant survey of Early American Boofys & Printing (Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1935. 256 p.), written primarily from the collector's point of view and offering information likely to be serviceable to him. 6465. Stevens, Henry. Recollections of James Lenox and the formation of his library; re- vised and elucidated by Victor Hugo Paltsits. New York, New York Public Library, 1951. xxxvi, 187 p. illus. 51-12041 Z989.L45S8 1951 One of the prime sources of rare and expensive books, as well as of important general and special- ized collections, that public and college libraries rely on because of their frequent financial constriction, is the donation of the accumulations of private col- lectors. The collectors thereby insure that what they have put together with enthusiasm, skill, and loving care will not be broken up by indifferent heirs. One of the notable examples of a private library that be- came a public collection, and one of the earliest, is the Lenox Library. James Lenox (1800-1880) was a New York bibliophile with inherited financial re- sources to back his expensive tastes. His large library, which had overflowed his house, was in- corporated in 1870, and in 1895 it was merged into the New York Public Library. The study of Lenox by Henry Stevens (1819-1886) reveals much of Lenox's bibliophilic activities, but it also reveals at least as much about Stevens, an American anti- quarian and rare-book dealer established in London, whose major customer was Lenox. The work was first edited into book form by the author's son, Henry N. Stevens, and published under the same title (London, Stevens, 1886. 211 p.). The present edition is especially notable for the late Dr. Paltsits' many "Elucidations" appended to each chapter. E. Libraries 6466. Clemons, Harry. The University of Vir- ginia Library, 1825-1950; story of a Jeffer- sonian foundation. Foreword by Dumas Malone. Charlottesville, University of Virginia Library, 1954. 229 p. illus. 54-10702 Z733.V66C6 Bibliography: p. 21 1-2 13. The University of Virginia was chartered in 18 16, and began instruction in 1825. The library, like the rest of the University, received its main conception and impetus from Thomas Jefferson. His last visit was made in 1826, but his concept of the library lingered long after, and has some effect today, as Mr. Clemons, librarian there from 1927 to 1950, is at some pains to show in his story of the library's development. The book opens with an account of the founding of the library (1816-1826), and goes on to trace its history to the time of the Civil War. Chapter 3 carries the story to 1895, when a fire destroyed the library building and most of the col- lection. Chapter 4 traces the library's resurgence after the fire to the year 1925, when the centennial of its founding was observed. Chapter 5 is a series of biographical sketches of the nine librarians who preceded Mr. Clemons in the office. The sixth and final chapter carries the story of the library from 1925 to mid-century. The book itself is one of the few relatively thorough studies of the development of a major university research library, and as such is representative of the development of libraries as instruments of American education. 6467. Compton, Charles H. Twenty-five crucial years of the St. Louis Public Library, 1927- 1952. With a supplement, The Library's readers, by Charles H. Compton [and others] St. Louis, 1953. 204 p. 53-11009 Z733.S141C6 St. Louis, eighth in population among American cities in 1950, has one of the outstanding city public libraries. This study tells the story of its modern growth and the expansion of its role in society. Mr. Compton, who has served as assistant librarian, librarian, and librarian emeritus for almost 40 years, writes in his foreword: "It shall be the endeavor of the writer to interpret the St. Louis Public Library as a living, pulsating, changing, and growing reality in the community and to indicate its importance in a free society." His report indicates not only the role of the library and the nature of its collections, but also the financial and administrative problems that have had to be faced. The library was founded in 1865, and some account of its history through 1926 may be found in Compton's earlier Fifty Years of Progress of the St. Louis Public Library, 1876- 1926 (St. Louis, St. Louis Public Library, 1926. 84 p.), which was also issued as a supplement to the Annual Report of the Library for 1925-26. This sketch passes rapidly over the early years, and be- comes detailed only with the founding of the American Library Association in 1876. It was not meant to be a full history of the institution, but rather "an attempt to trace some of the ideas which have gone into the making of the library and to indicate significant and outstanding points in its development," and "to create in the reader's mind the atmosphere of the library in its earlier years in order that the library of today may be seen to be a natural growth from its infancy and youth." 6468. Keep, Austin Baxter. History of the New York Society Library, with an introductory chapter on libraries in Colonial New York, 1698- 1776. New York, Printed for the Trustees by the De Vinne Press, 1908. xvi, 607 p. illus. 8-34672 Z733.N74K In the early years of this country attempts to create a general library service usually took the form of a group of individuals agreeing to pool their resources for the establishment of a library, so that each might have access to more. Most of these were "society libraries," normally limited to the use of subscribers, with occasional courtesy extension of privileges to relatives and distinguished friends. As free public libraries grew in numbers and strength, the society libraries declined in importance, and often went out of existence or were incorporated into the public library. New York City had one of the larger so- ciety libraries, and generous endowments have en- abled it to continue, albeit with a limited clientele, to the present day. Mr. Keep's history opens with 431240—60 69 BOOKS AND LIBRARIES / IO73 an account of early New York libraries, and goes on to present a roughly chronological study of the Society Library from its founding in 1754 through its 150th anniversary in 1904. The work not only shows in detail the evolution, problems, and serv- ices of such a library, but also reveals much about the reading of New York's social and intellectual leaders throughout the period. The story is brought up to date in Mrs. Marion M. King's less formal Boo\s and People; Five Decades of New York's Oldest Library (New York, Macmillan, 1954. 372 p.). Mrs. King joined the staff in 1907, and her book not only describes the 20th-century activities of the library, but in its year-by-year approach to its subject matter it gives a good picture of the more popular aspects of reading throughout the first half of the century. The anecdotal nature of much of the book also gives it value as a picture of life inside a library. 6469. Mearns, David C. The story up to now; the Library of Congress, 1800- 1946. Wash- ington, U.S. Govt. Print. Off., 1947. 226 p. 48-45515 Z733.U6M45 "Reprinted from the Annual report of the Li- brarian of Congress for the fiscal year ending June 30, 1946, with the addition of illustrations and a slight revision of text." The Library of Congress was founded in 1800. It was subsequently destroyed when the British burned the Capitol during the War of 1 812. In 1815 the Library made a fresh start when Congress purchased the library of Thomas Jefferson (see Adams, no. 6460). Since then the Library has steadily grown, save for a second setback by fire in 1 85 1, until it is probably the world's largest, with a collection of more than 11,700,000 books and pamphlets, over 16,100,000 manuscripts, 2,000,000 items of music, 2,400,000 maps and views, etc., for a total collection of more than 38,100,000 items in 1959. It serves not only Congress, but also, through many services, other government agencies, libraries throughout the world, and the general public. Since the Library is not only the largest in the coun- try, but also the center of a number of the nation's library activities, an understanding of the Library of Congress is essential to an understanding of the role of libraries in the 20th century. Mr. Mearns' history narrates the development of the Library's collections and services from the first proposals for a Government library up to 1946. It emphasizes the work of two great Librarians of Congress, Ains- worth R. Spofford (1825-1908) and Herbert Put- nam (1861-1955), whose nearly successive terms ran from 1864 to 1939, in making theirs a truly national library. The early part of the story is 1074 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES related at greater length and without much art in the first and only volume published of William Dawson Johnston's History of the Library of Con- fess (Washington, Govt. Print. Off., 1904. 535 p.); it reaches 1864. A brief and up-to-date ac- count of the Library is Paul M. Angle's The Library of Congress: an Account, Historical and Descrip- tive (Kingsport, Tenn., Kingsport Press, 1958. 77 p.); it is based on The Story Up to Now and the subsequent annual reports of the Librarian. 6470. Potter, Alfred Claghorn. The library of Harvard University; descriptive and his- torical notes. 4th ed. Cambridge, Harvard Uni- versity Press, 1934. 186 p. (Library of Harvard University. Special publications, 6) 34-20604 Z733.H34P 1934 The Harvard Library is both the oldest and the largest university library in this country. The col- lection numbers over six million volumes, and is exceeded in size in America only by the Library of Congress and the New York Public Library. This publication, the first edition of which appeared as early as 1903, therefore provides not only a his- tory and analysis of a leading academic and research library, but also an example of the aims and prob- lems of such libraries. A study of the problems cur- rendy faced in maintaining and furthering such a li- brary, as well as in making it function to best advan- tage, is Keyes D. Metcalf's Report on the Harvard University Library; a Study of Present and Prospec- tive Problems (Cambridge, Harvard University Li- brary, 1955. 131 p.); this not only gives a fairly clear picture of the Library's present scope and func- tions, but devotes considerable attention to the place of the Library, along with other leading research libraries, in the "American library" that is develop- ing as a result of cooperation among libraries through interlibrary loan, microfilming, division of labor in collecting, accessibility to visiting scholars, etc. Second to the Harvard Library in size and age is the Yale University Library. Its main building is described in detail in a well-illustrated article, "The Sterling Memorial Library," which appeared on pages 57-123 of volume 5 (April 193 1) of The Yale University Library Gazette. This is a thorough presentation of the physical plant of a leading re- search library. An interesting series of articles de- rived from various aspects of the library's collec- tions, especially unusual items and special collections, is Papers in Honor of Andrew Keogh, Librarian of Yale University (New Haven, Priv. Print., 1938. 492 p.). They give an idea not only of some of the more esoteric material that may be found in a general research library, but also of the potential scholarly use and significance of such uncommon items and collections. 6471. Schenk, Gretchen (Knief). County and regional library development. Chicago, American Library Association, 1954. 263 p. 53-7488 Z675.C8S4 Bibliography: p. [258] -260. Since most early public libraries were established on a city or other local basis, many thinly populated areas found themselves without any public library service, while many small towns struggled to sup- port inferior libraries on inadequate taxes. In recent years improved transportation and communication have made possible an alternative to this in the form of county and regional libraries. These usu- ally involve plans for a shared budget and book- stock over a large area, and by raising the total bookstock, make more books available in each com- munity. At the same time, pooled budgets have in some areas produced better services, such as refer- ence and readers' advisory work, at a comparatively low cost. However, initial costs delayed many such projects. Mrs. Schenk's book was written in antici- pation of Federal aid to libraries. Such aid was enacted soon afterwards, giving a great impetus to county and regional libraries. The author does not give a history of the movement, nor does she examine existing libraries in detail. She has rather attempted to synthesize procedures and programs as a guide to what is done for and by such libraries. 6472. Shera, Jesse H. Foundations of the public library; the origins of the public library movement in New England, 1 629-1 855. Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1949. xv, 308 p. illus. (The University of Chicago studies in library science) 49-8133 Z731.S55 "Selected bibliography": p. 291-295. Dr. Shera writes in his introduction: "We are here concerned with those elements in American life which contributed direcdy or indirectly to the growth of the public library as a social agency and the character of the environment from which it emerged. Though attention is restricted to but one section of the United States, much of what is said here with reference to New England is equally ap- plicable elsewhere as economic and social conditions began to approximate those of the northeastern Atlantic seaboard. But New England, because it is the cradle of American librarianship and because its cultural records have been so assiduously pre- served, was the logical, if indeed not inevitable, place to begin." Much the same period and subject matter is covered by Charles Seymour Thompson's somewhat shorter Evolution of the American Public Library, 1653-18J6 (Washington, Scarecrow Press, 1952. 287 p.). Sidney Ditzion's Arsenals of a Democratic Culture; a Social History of the Ameri- can Public Library Movement in New England and BOOKS AND LIBRARIES / IO75 the Middle States from 1850 to 1900 (Chicago, American Library Association, 1947. 263 p.) brings the story to a later date. Samuel Swett Green's The Public Library Movement in the United States 1 8 53-1 893 (Boston, Boston Book Co., 19 13. 336 p.) actually is mainly concerned with the period after 1876, and in large part consists of the author's reminiscences of his participation in the free library movement. Librarian of the Worcester Public Library from 1871 to 1909, he also served, from 1890, on the Massachusetts Free Public Library Commission. 6473. Spencer, Gwladys. The Chicago Public Library; origins and backgrounds. Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1943. xvii, 473 p. illus. (The University of Chicago studies in library science) A 43-1583 Z733.C531S6 Bibliography: p. 423-435. The author sums up the scope and purpose of this book in her introduction: "This study endeavors first ... to present with as high a degree of ac- curacy and clarity as is permitted by records often incomplete the scenes of library history in Chicago from the beginning through 1872 and, in addition, but more briefly, those in the surrounding state of Illinois as they formed unfolding backgrounds for the establishment in a great metropolitan center of its free public library of today. . . . Secondly, the study attempts to analyze such available data with the purpose of discovering the chief factors that contributed to the inception of this library. Lasdy, the study suggests what may be the significance of the factors found to be influential in the origin of the Chicago Public Library as a representative insti- tution in its relation to the history of the American library movement as a whole." The importance of this as a representative work is underscored by the author's thesis "that certain great decisive forces that had previously been and were still at work in Chicago, in the state at large, and even throughout the entire country bore a share of major importance as fundamental cofactors in the creation of the new institution." This investigation of other than im- mediate and obvious causes has been neglected in most library histories. 6474. U. S. Office of Education. Public libraries in the United States of America; their his- tory, condition, and management. Special report, Department of the Interior, Bureau of Education. Part I. Washington, Govt. Print. Off., 1876. xxxv, 1187P. illus. 1-9328 Z731.U57 Part II consists of Cutter's Rules for a Printed Dictionary Catalogue, 1876 (2d edition, 1889; 3d edition, 1891). This landmark in the writing of library history is probably the most thorough work of the kind that has yet been published. Despite its age, it remains of value for its impressive detail on the library situa- tion in America about 1875. It opens with a study of "Public Libraries a Hundred Years Ago." There follow chapters on the many types of public li- braries, such as school, law, government, theoretical, historical society, medical, and scientific libraries. A number of chapters are also devoted to various aspects of free town libraries, and town organization libraries. The more technical aspects of librarian- ship are discussed in the later chapters, concerned with matters such as library buildings, catalogs, cata- loging and classification, indexing, binding, reports and statistics, etc. The final chapter (p. 1010-1174) consists of tables of general library statistics and a listing of librarians. 6475. Whitehill, Walter Muir. Boston Public Library; a centennial history. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1956. 274 p. 56-6528 Z733.B752W5 In 1848 the Massachusetts legislature authorized the city of Boston "to establish and maintain a public library," thereby making the Boston Public Library the first tax-supported city library to be authorized by statute. The book collection grew rapidly, al- though the formal opening of the library was de- layed for a few years. Mr. Whitehill's history pre- sents in chronological form the story of the initial struggles to establish a public library; the early very rapid growth by which the library soon became one of the largest in the nation; the decline that set in during the late 1870's and continued for nearly a decade; the subsequent resurgence; a second decline resulting from financial stringency; and a new im- provement brought about by the bettered financial situation after World War II. Because of its pri- ority, the history of the Boston Public Library re- flects much of the public library movement from its inception. Mr. Whitehill gives much detail on the books supplied to the community which was for many years the nation's cultural center. The story of the society library which supplied much of Bos- ton's reading matter before the founding of die public library, and which itself came close to func- tioning as a public library, may be found in Josiah Quincy's detailed work, The History of the Boston Athenaeum (Cambridge, Metcalf, 1851. 263, 104 p.), which has also been distinguished as the "first formal history of an American library." The story is carried forward in the society's own publication, The Athenaeum Centenary: the Influence and His- tory of the Boston Athenaeum from 180J to 190J IO76 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES (Boston, Boston Athenaeum, 1907. 236 p.), the greater part of which is, unfortunately for the gen- eral reader, devoted to "a record of its officers and benefactors and a complete list of proprietors." F. Librarianship and Library Use 6476. American library pioneers. [v.] 1-8. Chicago, American Library Association, 1924-1953. 8 v. 1. Lydenberg, Harry Miller. John Shaw Bil- lings, creator of the National Medical Library and its catalogue, first director of the New York Public Library. 1924. 94 p. 24-20388 Z720.B6L9 2. Shaw, Robert Kendall. Samuel Swett Green. 1926. 92 p. 26-10763 Z720.G8S5 3. Cutter, William Parker. Charles Ammi Cut- ter. 1 93 1. 66 p. 31-28434 Z720.C99C9 4. Eastman, Linda A. Portrait of a librarian, William Howard Brett. 1940. 104 p. 40-27318 Z720.B85E2 5. Hadley, Chalmers. John Cotton Dana. 1943. 105 p. 43-II446 Z720.D2H2 6. Rider, Fremont. Melvil Dewey. 1944. 151 p. 44-4322 Z720.D5R5 7. Borome, Joseph Alfred. Charles Coffin Jew- ett. 1951. 188 p. 51-10999 Z720.J59B6 8. Pioneering leaders in librarianship. First series. Edited by Emily Miller Danton. 1953. 202 p. 53-10258 Z720.A4U47 The slender volumes in this series have appeared at widely spaced intervals. They describe the lives, with heavy emphasis on their professional librarian and bibliographical aspects, of persons who have at- tained prominence in American librarianship. As a group they afford considerable insight into ad- vances in librarianship, particularly during the late 19th and early 20th centuries. These studies have been written largely by librarians for librarians, and as a result suffer somewhat from a limited out- look. They all present very favorable portraits, but few of their subjects emerge as recognizable human beings. This results in part from the emphasis on the professional aspects of their lives; but this same emphasis enables one to obtain a clear idea of their professional advancements. Volume 8, which treats "a wide assortment of distinguished persons who played a strong role in developing American li- braries," is the first of a new "omnibus" subseries. Mrs. Danton, who edited the latest volume, took over editorship of the series after the death of Dr. Arthur E. Bostwick in 1942. 6477. Berelson, Bernard. The library's public; a report of the Public Library Inquiry. With the assistance of Lester Asheim. New York, Colum- bia University Press, 1949. xx, 174 p. 49-10661 Z731.B4 1949 This report is actually a synthesis of two originally separate reports: one based on the results of a per- sonal interview survey conducted in the autumn of 1947, and one based on an analysis of reports pub- lished since 1930 on library book use and users. It opens with a discussion of the position of library usage in the context of public usage of the mass media such as newspapers, films, and magazines. Chapter 2 analyzes the various groups who use public libraries and the intensity of their usage. Chapters 3 and 4 take up the questions of why and when people use public library facilities. Chapter 5 discusses the concentration of usage among a rela- tively small group. The concluding chapters con- sider what further research is needed to shed more light on this subject, and implications the studies already made have for library policy. The report concludes that the library actually has a number of publics with diverse purposes and fields, and that "it must decide what things it will be to whom." It suggests, without actually concluding, that the library should do less competing with the mass me- dia in the field of entertainment, and more in books and services for "serious-minded people con- cerned with serious-minded materials." 6478. Brough, Kenneth J. Scholar's workshop; evolving conceptions of library service. Ur- bana, University of Illinois Press, 1953. xv, 197 p. (Illinois contributions to librarianship, no. 5) 52-10462 Z675.U5B85 Bibliography: p. 178-187. Mr. Brough 's study is "ostensibly limited to de- velopments in the university libraries of Chicago, Columbia, Harvard, and Yale," but, he says, "the story would have varied little if the four institutions selected for investigation had been, say, California, Michigan, Pennsylvania, and Princeton." The author takes 1876 as the starting point for modern librarianship, and from that date he traces such prob- lems of research libraries as services to readers, the nature of the collections, and their accessibility. Throughout the work he compares evolving policy to earlier practices. In the early years of this coun- try the concept governing college libraries had been one of service to advanced scholars. Gradually stu- dents were allowed a limited use of the collections, and in time there arose the idea of actually trying to provide specifically for the needs even of under- graduates, as a result of which the libraries became increasingly an essential factor in the teaching pro- gram. The story of the early years of these libraries is told in considerable detail in Louis Shores' Origins of the American College Library, 1638-1800 (New York, Barnes & Noble, 1935. 290 p.). A volume edited by Herman H. Fussier, which discusses many of the areas in which the modern college library is concerned, from library architecture and student programing through personal policies and acquisi- tioning, is The Function of the Library in the Mod- ern College (Chicago, University of Chicago, Grad- uate Library School, 1954. 117 p.); it consists of "Papers presented before the nineteenth annual conference of the Graduate Library School of the University of Chicago." A parallel work, more concerned with technical problems such as catalog- ing, cost of maintenance, specialization, etc., is Problems and Prospects of the Research Library (New Brunswick, N.J., Scarecrow Press, 1955. 181 p.), edited by Edwin E. Williams for the Association of Research Libraries; it consists of a group of pa- pers presented at the Monticello [Illinois] Confer- ence of the Association in 1954. 6479. Bryan, Alice I. The public librarian; a re- port of the Public Library Inquiry, by Alice I. Bryan, with a section on the education of librar- ians by Robert D. Leigh. New York, Columbia University Press, 1952. xxvii, 474 p. diagrs. 52-8829 Z682.B7 This report concerns itself with the people who work in public libraries, with an emphasis on those on the professional level, secondary interest in those on a subprofessional level, and no attention at all to those on a nonprofessional level. Nearly two thirds of the volume is devoted to a study, based on questionnaires and tests, of the public librarians. The author attempts to determine factors such as personal characteristics (distribution by sex, marital status, recreational activities, personality, etc.), edu- cational status, economic status (salaries, savings, insurance, etc.), and library career activities and attitudes. Also analyzed are the several aspects of personnel administration: management, employee selection, in-service training, promotion and pay systems, labor relations, unions, associations, morale, etc. About a third of the book is occupied by Mr. Leigh's section, "The Education of Librarians." The first chapter of this section gives a brief survey of the "Evolution of Library Schools"; the second studies library school programs; the fourth analyzes the student body (sex, geographical distribution, BOOKS AND LIBRARIES / IO77 admission requirements, etc.), and the final chapter surveys "The Faculty and Instructional Resources." 6480. Leigh, Robert D. The public library in the United States; the general report of the Public Library Inquiry. New York, Columbia Uni- versity Press, 1950. 272 p. 50-9138 Z731.L45 "Methods and sources": p. [247J-263. Dr. Leigh was the director of the Public Library- Inquiry, a project proposed by the American Library Association, carried out by the Social Science Re- search Council, and financed by the Carnegie Foundation of New York. His general report opens with an account of the purpose, nature, and limita- tions of the inquiry. There follow chapters which summarize findings and discuss prospective devel- opments in various fields; their scope is indicated by their tides: "The Library Faith and Library Ob- jectives," "The Business of Communication," "Li- brary Units and Structure," "Library Materials," "Library Services," "Library Government and Politics," "Library Financial Support," "Library Operations," "Library Personnel and Training," and "The Direction of Development." Dr. Leigh's re- port is a balanced presentation of the position and problems of the public library in present-day Amer- ica. Greater detail on special aspects of the subject is contained in other reports of the Public Library Inquiry by Miller (no. 6441), McCamy (no. 6452 note), Berelson (no. 6477), and Bryan (no. 6479). These studies are all limited by the definition of a public library as a free, tax-supported library avail- able to the community in general, thus excluding, most notably, the free school libraries. However, related aspects of other types of libraries are con- sidered throughout the series of reports. Dr. Leigh, who later became dean of the Columbia School of Library Service, also contributed the first paper, "Changing Concepts of the Public Library's Role," to New Directions in Public Library Development (Chicago, University of Chicago, Graduate Library School, 1957. 104 p.). These eight papers pre- sented before the 22d Annual Conference of the Graduate Library School (1957) were edited by Lester Asheim, and include discussions of the Federal Library Services Act and of community de- velopments. In 1954 the Public Libraries Division of the American Library Association appointed a Coordinating Committee on Revision of Public Li- brary Standards, which, after two conferences and the circulation of a first draft, was able to formulate a new statement of standards for public libraries, revised from the earlier codes of 1933 and 1943: Public Library Service; a Guide to Evaluation, with Minimum Standards (Chicago, American Library Association, 1956. xxi, 74 p.). This offers a num- bered series of concise formulations in the realms IO78 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES of structure and government, service, books and nonbook materials, organization and control of materials, and physical facilities. For example, no. 73: "Films, recordings, and pictures should be avail- able for use off the premises." 6481. Marshall, John David, comp. Books, li- braries, librarians; contributions to library literature, selected by John David Marshall, Wayne Shirley [and] Louis Shores. Hamden, Conn., Shoe String Press, 1955. xv, 432 p. 55-3034 Z665.M66 Includes bibliographies. Mr. Marshall opens his introduction thus: "Much of the literature of librarianship cannot be described truthfully as particularly enjoyable reading, for it lacks that intangible and elusive quality known as readability." The literature of librarianship is not the only field that has been plagued by this stylistic problem, and it might be contended that some other fields have a larger percentage of unreadable writ- ings than does librarianship. At any rate, this vol- ume is an attempt to present a selection of interesting and readable contributions from the profession's literature. The volume is therefore not only more readable than many others on libraries and librar- ianship, but it is also highly informative in its presentation of many aspects of the library world and its problems. The articles are presented in four sections: "Books and Reading," "Libraries," "Li- brarians and Librarianship," and "Notable State- ments of the Librarian's Profession." The topics range widely from children's libraries to research libraries, and from library acquisition policies to the problem of theft of library books. 6482. Phinney, Eleanor. Library adult education in action; five case studies. Chicago, Ameri- can Library Association, 1956. 182 p. 56-9496 Z711.2.P5 A modern development in the activities of public libraries is that of adult education — education be- yond that of having a book stock available for loan. Eleanor Phinney 's study is mainly a report on what five libraries of moderate resources have been doing. She selected ones in Mount Vernon, N.Y., St. Mary's County, Md., Carrollton, Ga. (the West Georgia Regional Library), La Crosse, Wis., and Andover, Mass. The kinds of educational activity engaged in included displays and exhibits, reader-interest files and notification service, local radio programs, educational film programs, discussion groups, etc. A chapter on common elements in the programs has been included, emphasizing the importance of a zeal for adult education on the part of the chief librarian, the staff, and the board. The conclusions of a sur- vey of the subject will be found in Helen Lyman Smith's Adult Education Activities in Public Li- braries; a Report of the ALA Survey of Adult Education Activities in Public Libraries and State Library Extension Agencies of the United States (Chicago, American Library Association, 1954. 96 p.). 6483. Rothstein, Samuel. The development of reference services through academic tradi- tions, public library practice, and special librarian- ship. Chicago, Association of College and Reference Libraries, 1955. 124 p. (ACRL monographs, no. 14) 55-993 8 Z674.A75, no. 14 Issued also in microfilm form, as thesis, University of Illinois, under title: The Development of Refer- ence Services in American Research Libraries. Bibliography: p. 111-124. The author begins his final chapter thus: "To trace the development of reference services in American research libraries is to record the trans- formation of occasional and casual courtesy into a complex and highly specialized service of steadily increasing scope and importance. In most institu- tions, it is now taken for granted that one of the Library's primary functions is to make available per- sonal assistance for readers seeking information." The development of this function, central to much of modern librarianship, is presented as "the result of a collocation of particular historical factors dis- tinctive to the American library scene." The story is traced in some detail from 1850, from which year the author dates "The Rise of Research and Research Libraries" (chapter 1). He then studies the growth of reference services in libraries, the development of special libraries, the problems of legislative and mu- nicipal reference work, and the recent development of reference service in industrial libraries for pro- fessional researchers. After carrying the story to the beginning of World War II, Dr. Rothstein con- cludes with a chapter on general trends. A detailed picture of reference service as librarians conceive and practice it is presented in a volume edited by the late Pierce Butler: The Reference Function of the Library (Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1943. 366 p.), consisting of papers read at the Library Institute of the University of Chicago in 1942. The topics dealt with include personnel and training for reference work, its administrative prob- lems, book selection and supplementary reference materials, and reference service in special fields such as art, music, and rare books. 6484. Tauber, Maurice F., ed. Technical services in libraries: acquisitions, cataloging, classi- fication, binding, photographic reproduction, and circulation operations. New York, Columbia Uni- versity Press, 1954. xvi, 487 p. diagrs. (Columbia University studies in library service, no. 7) 54-10328 Z665.T28 1954 This volume, the work of Mr. Tauber and seven associates, is a study, aimed primarily at library school students, of the more or less technical opera- tions that take place in a library, with a special em- phasis on the point of view of a general research library. Since most of this activity goes on behind the scenes in most libraries, it is an aspect of library work that is largely unknown to the general public. While this volume is not aimed at that public, it will enable the layman to gain a just idea of many little-known problems that face the librar- ian, as well as a conception of the complexities involved in maintaining a modern research, college, or large public library. To a less extent it also re- flects the tribulations of smaller public and school libraries. The final chapter concisely discusses the possibilities of applying cost analysis and manage- ment analysis to library operations, and of intro- ducing various types of machines as savers of labor and time. A group of lectures which sum up a number of the problems and possibilities of modern librarianship is Challenges to Librarianship (Talla- hassee, Florida State University, 1953. 156 p. Florida State University studies, no. 12), edited by Louis Shores; the lectures were originally delivered by distinguished visitors to the university, and cover such topics as censorship, microphotography, the sciences, audio-visual material, and international understanding. 6485. Trautman, Ray. A history of the School of Library Service, Columbia University. New York, Columbia University Press, 1954. 85 p. illus. (The Bicentennial history of Columbia University) 54-5197 Z669.T7 The 19th century witnessed a tremendous growth in the number of American libraries and in the total number of volumes held by most of them. This led to unanticipated complexities in the acquiring, cataloging, and servicing of books. Added difficulties arose out of rapidly expanding conceptions of desirable services to readers. The result was that the idea of professional librarianship began to emerge as an attempt to obtain competent librarians with more complex and skilled functions than merely guarding relatively small book collec- tions. This situation led Melvil Dewey to estab- lish a library school at Columbia University in 1883. A few years later the school moved to Albany, and did not return to Columbia until 1926. Thus, not- withstanding its long residence elsewhere, the Columbia University School of Library Service may claim to be the oldest as well as an outstanding li- BOOKS AND LIBRARIES / IO79 brary school. Mr. Trautman's book traces the complicated history of the school, and also offers insight into the evolving concepts of librarianship. Difficulties currently being faced in developing cur- ricula in library schools are brought together in a volume edited by Robert D. Leigh: Major Problems in the Education of Librarians (New York, Colum- bia University Press, 1954. 116 p.), which resulted from a seminar on education for librarianship held in the Columbia School of Library Service in 1952- 53. A work of somewhat wider range is Education for Librarianship (Chicago, American Library As- sociation, 1949. 307 p.), edited by Bernard Berelson and consisting of papers presented at a library con- ference held at the University of Chicago in August 1948. It covers not only current professional prob- lems, but also a history of the library school move- ment and a survey of the problems involved in the training of nonprofessional or subprofessional li- brary employees. 6486. Udey, George Burwell. The librarians' conference of 1853, a chapter in American library history; edited by Gilbert H. Doane. Chi- cago, American Library Association, 1951. 189 p. 51-11154 Z673.A49U7 "Proceedings of the Librarians' Convention, held in New York City, September 15, 16, and 17, 1853. (Reprinted . . . from Norton's Literary and edu- cational register, for 1854)": p. [i29J-i76. The librarians' conference of September 15-17, 1853, in New York City was the first general con- ference of American librarians, and its participants may be regarded as the forefathers of the modern library movement in general and of the American Library Association in particular. To this first con- ference came leading librarians throughout the nation, although the Northeast, where most libraries of any size were then located, was naturally the most strongly represented. The conference had relatively litde direct influence of importance, but indirectly it set off a significant train of events. It initiated greater cooperation among libraries, and in turn this led to a greater attention to and understanding of library problems. It also established a precedent for the 1876 conference, when the American Library Association was founded and modern professional librarianism was firmly set on its way. The pro- ceedings of the meeting are reprinted in offset at the end of this volume (p. 129-176). The final draft of Mr. Udey's book was nearly finished at the time of his death in 1946; the work of comple- tion and editing was carried out by his nephew. 6487. Wilson, Louis Round, and Maurice F. Tauber. The university library; the organ- ization, administration, and functions of academic I080 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES libraries. 2d ed. New York, Columbia University Press, 1956. 641 p. diagrs. (Columbia University studies in library service, no. 8) 55-1 1 1 84 Z675.U5W745 1956 Bibliographies at end of chapters. The first edition of this work was published by the University of Chicago Press in 1945. The au- thors state that their purpose "is to review the changes which have taken place in the university library in response to the demands made upon it by university growth; to consider systematically the principles and methods of university and library administration; and to formulate generalizations concerning the organization, administration, and functions of the university library to the end that it may serve its clientele more adequately and effi- ciendy than it has in the past." Though much of it sounds like a statement of what should be done, most of it is a statement, frequendy in abstract form, of what has been done. Relatively little theory is advanced. This, combined with the emphasis of the study on the research collections and their administration, means that the volume actually offers a fairly thorough prospect of the nature, organization, and administration of large research libraries at the present day. There is rela- tively litde historical material, although some is in- cluded in order to illustrate the development and changes in the problems that university librarians have had to face. The whole field is thoroughly covered in College and Research Libraries, the organ of the Association of College and Reference Librar- ies, a division of the American Library Association. This quarterly, which began publication in Decem- ber 1939, is currently published at Fulton, Mo., by the American Library Association. An important recent development of great interest to research libraries was the establishment in 1956 of The Council of Library Resources, Inc., which has as its principal objective "to aid in the solution of library problems; to conduct research in, develop and demonstrate new techniques and methods and to disseminate through any means the results thereof." The Council was established at the in- stance of the Ford Foundation, which has made it a grant of $5 million to be expended over a five-year period. The Council's endeavors are outlined in its Annual Report, 1956/57- (Washington, 1957-). Appendix: Selected Readings in American Studies AS EXPLAINED in the Introduction, in June 1954 the Council of the American Studies Association recommended that this Guide should include a separate section containing those titles which have a synthetic approach, bridge the various academic and scholarly disciplines, and are therefore of special significance to teachers or students pursuing courses in American studies. A tentative selection of 100 such titles was submitted to the Council and other prominent members in October of the same year, together with a request for specific suggestions. In consequence of the replies some tides were prompdy deleted, and considerably more added. Since then further deletions have been made for various reasons, and a much larger number of additional tides ac- cumulated, many but by no means all of which are publications later than 1954. The result, a list of 190 tides, is below. The 190 may be thus briefly accounted for: 83 are from the original list; 35 were recommended by A.S.A. members in 1954; and 72 are subsequent additions. Of the last 72, nine do not appear in the main Guide; published since work upon the pertinent chapters was concluded, they have been thought too important to omit here. To facilitate rapid finding, the 190 titles appear in a single alphabetical order. Most entries are limited to author, title, imprint, and pagination, plus a bracketed serial number which directs one to the fuller entry in the main body of the Guide, where the annotation will normally supply a justifi- cation for the work's inclusion here. Under authors, tides are also alphabetically ordered save in the case of sequels, which are placed direcdy after the pri- mary work. For the nine recent works not in the Guide proper, the Library of Congress call and card numbers, and series note when there is one, have been added. In a very few cases the edition entered here is a later one than that in the body of the Guide; in this case also call and card numbers have been included. Finally, it should be stated that this Appendix does not attempt to incorporate the classics of Ameri- can thought and expression, of the stamp of Emer- son, Thoreau, Whitman, or William James; and that anthologies, save in a very few instances with special reasons for each, have been excluded. It must, of course, be regarded as suggestive rather than exhaustive; anyone can readily make his own amplifications from the chapters that precede it. Important guides to the present state of American studies, which appeared too late to be included in the main body of this book, are Sigmund Skard's American Studies in Europe; Their History and Present Organization (Philadelphia, University of Pennsylvania Press, 1958. 2 v.) and Robert H. Walker's American Studies in the United States, a Survey of College Programs (Baton Rouge, Louisiana State University Press, 1958. 210 p.). Aaron, Daniel. Men of good hope; a story of American progressives. New York, Oxford Uni- versity Press, 1951. xiv, 329 p. [6424] Aaron, Daniel, ed. America in crisis; fourteen crucial episodes in American history. New York, Knopf, 1952. 363 p. [3070] Allen, Frederick Lewis. The big change: America transforms itself, 1900-1950. New York, Harper, 1952. 308 p. [45H] Allen, Frederick Lewis. Only yesterday; an infor- mal history of the nineteen-twenties. New York, Harper, 1931. 370 p. [3477] Almond, Gabriel A. The American people and foreign policy. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1950. 269 p. [3609] Andrews, Wayne. Architecture, ambition and Americans; a history of American architecture, from the beginning to the present. New York, Harper, 1955. 315 p. [5698] I08l 431240—60- -70 I082 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Barker, Virgil. American painting, history and interpretation. New York, Macmillan, 1950. xxvii, 717 p. [5742] Barzun, Jacques. Music in American life. Garden City, N.Y., Doubleday, 1956. 126 p. [5615] Basler, Roy P. The Lincoln legend; a study in changing conceptions. Boston, Houghton Mif- flin, 1935. 335 p. [3395] Bates, Ralph Samuel. Scientific societies in the United States. 2d ed. New York, Columbia University Press, 1958. 297 p. 57-10143 Q11.A1B3 1958 [4713] Beard, Charles A., and Mary R. Beard. The rise of American civilization. New York, Macmillan, 1927-42. 4 v. Contents. — v. 1. The agricultural era. — v. 2. The industrial era. — v. 3. America in midpas- sage. — v. 4. The American spirit, a study of the idea of civilization in the United States. [3°73> 3479. 375°] Berelson, Bernard R., Paul F. Lazarsfeld, and William N. McPhee. Voting; a study of opinion formation in a presidential campaign. [Chicago] University of Chicago Press, 1954. xix, 395 p. [6414] Billington, Ray Allen. The Protestant Crusade, 1800-1860; a study of the origins of American nativism. New York, Rinehart, 1952, c i938. 5M P- [45 I 5l Billington, Ray Allen. Westward expansion, a history of the American frontier, by Ray Allen Billington with the collaboration of James Blaine Hedges. New York, Macmillan, 1949. 873 p. [3074] Blegen, Theodore C. Norwegian migration to America. Northfield, Minn., Norwegian-Ameri- can Historical Association, 1931-40. 2 v. [4484] Boas, George, ed. Romanticism in America; papers contributed to a symposium held at the Baltimore Museum of Art, May 13, 14, 15, 1940. Baltimore, Johns Hopkins Press, 1940. 202 p. [375 1 ] Bowers, David F., ed. Foreign influences in Ameri- can life; essays and critical bibliographies. Edited for the Princeton Program of Study in American Civilization. Princeton, Princeton University Press, 1944. 254 p. [3768] Brebner, John B. North Adantic triangle; the in- terplay of Canada, the United States and Great Britain. New Haven, Yale University Press for the Carnegie Endowment for International Peace, Division of Economics and History, 1945. xxii, 385 P- [3552] Bridenbaugh, Carl. Cities in the wilderness; the first century of urban life in America, 1625- 1742. [2d ed.] New York, Knopf, 1955. 500 p. [4601] Bridenbaugh, Carl. Cities in revolt; urban life in America, 1743-1776. New York, Knopf, 1955. xiii, 433, xxi p. [4602] Brooks, Van Wyck. Makers and finders; a history of the writer in America, 1800-1915. New York, Dutton, 1936-52 [v. 1, 1944] 5 v. [2381] Brown, Ralph H. Historical geography of the United States. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1948. 596 p. [2969] Bryce, James Bryce, viscount. The American com- monwealth. London and New York, Macmillan, 1888. 2 v. [4499] Burlingame, Roger. March of the iron men, a so- cial history of union through invention. New York, Scribner, 1938. xvi, 500 p. [4783] Burlingame, Roger. Engines of democracy; inven- tions and society in mature America. New York, Scribner, 1940. xviii, 606 p. 40-27637 T21.B77 [4783n] Burns, Edward McNall. The American idea of mission; concepts of national purpose and destiny. New Brunswick, N.J., Rutgers Uni- versity Press, 1957. 385 p. 57-10961 E169.1.B943 Burns, James MacGregor, and Jack Walter Peltason. Government by the people; the dynamics of American national, state, and local government. 3d ed. Englewood Cliffs, N.J., Prentice-Hall, 1957. 990 p. [6134] Butts, R. Freeman, and Lawrence A. Cremin. A history of education in American culture. New York, Holt, 1953. 628 p. [5 I0 4] Cady, Edwin H. The gendeman in America; a literary study in American culture. Syracuse, N.Y., Syracuse University Press, 1949. 232 p. [2392] APPENDIX: SELECTED READINGS IN AMERICAN STUDIES / 1083 Cahn, Edmond N. The moral decision; right and wrong in the light of American law. Blooming- ton, Indiana University Press, 1955. 342 p. [6261] Cash, Wilbur J. The mind of the South. New York, Knopf, 1941. 429 p. [4066] Chase, Gilbert. America's music, from the Pilgrims to the present. New York, McGraw-Hill, 1955. xxiii, 733 p. [5 6 ° 8 ] Cochran, Thomas C. The American business sys- tem; a historical perspective, 1900-1955. Cam- bridge, Harvard University Press, 1957. 22 7 P- [6005] Cochran, Thomas C, and William Miller. The age of enterprise, a social history of industrial Amer- ica. New York, Macmillan, 1942. 394 p. [5875] Cohen, Morris R. American thought; a critical sketch. Edited and with a foreword by Felix S. Cohen. Glencoe, 111., Free Press, 1954. 360 p. [37^] Coleman, Laurence Vail. The museum in Amer- ica; a critical study. Washington, American Association of Museums, 1939. 3 v. [3049] Commager, Henry Steele. The American mind; an interpretation of American thought and char- acter since the 1880's. New Haven, Yale Uni- versity Press, 1950. 476 p. [3738] Commager, Henry Steele, ed. America in perspec- tive; the United States through foreign eyes. New York, Random House, 1947. xxiv, 389 p. [4 2 3i] Couch, William T., ed. Culture in the South. Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina Press, 1934. 711 p. [4068] Craven, Wesley Frank. The legend of the Founding Fathers. New York, New York University Press, 1956. 191 p. [3051] Crevecoeur, Michel Guillaume St. Jean de, called Saint John de Crevecoeur. Letters from an American farmer. London, T. Davies, 1782. 318 p. [45°°] A paperback reprint is currendy available: Dutton Everyman Paperbacks, D8. Croly, Herbert D. The promise of American life. New York, Macmillan, 1909. 468 p. [45 02 ] Curti, Merle E. The growth of American thought. 2d ed. New York, Harper, 195 1. xviii, 910 p. [3729] Curti, Merle E. The roots of American loyalty. New York, Columbia University Press, 1946. 267 p. [4526] Curd, Merle E. The social ideas of American edu- cators. New York, Scribner, 1935. xxii, 613 p. [5116] Curti, Merle E., ed. American scholarship in the twentieth century. Cambridge, Harvard Uni- versity Press, 1953. 252 p. [3739] Cushman, Robert E. Civil liberties in the United States; a guide to current problems and experi- ence. Ithaca, N.Y., Cornell University Press, 1956. 248 p. [61 17] Davidson, Donald. The attack on leviathan; re- gionalism and nationalism in the United States. Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina Press, 1938. 368 p. [3781] Davidson, Marshall. Life in America. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1951. 2 v. [5801] Degler, Carl N. Out of our past; the forces that shaped modern America. New York, Harper, 1959. 484 p. 58-8824 E178.D37 De Grazia, Alfred. Public and republic; political representation in America. New York, Knopf, 195 1. xiii, 262, ix p. [6402] Denny, Margaret, and William H. Gilman, eds. The American writer and the European tradition. Minneapolis, Published for the University of Rochester by the University of Minnesota Press, 1950. 192 p. [2412] De Voto, Bernard A. The course of empire; with maps by Erwin Raisz. Boston, Houghton Mif- flin, 1952. xvii, 647 p. [3*61] De Voto, Bernard A. The year of decision, 1846. Boston, Little, Brown, 1943. xv, 538 p. [3331 ] Dorfman, Joseph. The economic mind in Ameri- can civilization. New York, Viking Press, 1946- 49. 3 v - [587 6 ] Contents. — v. 1-2. 1 606-1 865. — v. 3. 1865- 1918. I084 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Dupree, A. Hunter. Science in the Federal Gov- ernment, a history of policies and activities to 1940. Cambridge, Belknap Press of Harvard University Press, 1957. 460 p. 57-5484 Q127.U6D78 Edwards, Newton, and Herman G. Richey. The school in the American social order. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1947. 880 p. [5*4°] Egbert, Donald Drew, and Stow Persons, eds. So- cialism and American life. Princeton, Princeton University Press, 1952. 2 v. [3753] Ekirch, Arthur A. The idea of progress in America, 1815-1860. New York, Columbia Uni- versity Press, 1944. 305 p. [3754] Fainsod, Merle, Lincoln Gordon, and Joseph C. Palamountain. Government and the American economy. 3d ed. New York, Norton, 1959. 996 p. 59-6084 HD3616.U47F3 1959 [5885] Fortune. U.S.A., the permanent revolution, by the editors of Fortune in collaboration with Russell W. Davenport. New York, Prentice-Hall, 195 1. xvii, 267 p. [45 3] Frank, Jerome. Courts on trial; myth and reality in American justice. Princeton, Princeton Uni- versity Press, 1949. 441 p. [6285] Frazier, Edward Franklin. The Negro in the United States. Rev. ed. New York, Macmillan, 1957. xxxiii, 769 p. [444 2 ] Gabriel, Ralph Henry. The course of American democratic thought. 2d ed. New York, Ronald Press, 1956. xiv, 508 p. [374 1 ] Glazer, Nathan. American Judaism. [Chicago] University of Chicago Press, 1957. 175 p. [5458] Goldman, Eric F. Rendezvous with destiny; a history of modern American reform. New York, Knopf, 1952. xiii, 503, xxxvii p. [3455] Greer, Thomas H. American social reform move- ments; their pattern since 1865. New York, Prentice-Hall, 1949. 313 p. [6426] Hacker, Louis M. The triumph of American capi- talism; the development of forces in American history to the end of the nineteenth century. New York, Columbia University Press, 1946. 460 p. [5878] Hall, Thomas Cuming. The religious background of American culture. Boston, Little, Brown, 1930. xiv, 348 p. [5394] Hammond, Bray. Banks and politics in America, from the Revolution to the Civil War. Princeton, Princeton University Press, 1957. 771 p. [6000] Handlin, Oscar. The uprooted; the epic story of the great migrations that made the American people. Boston, Little, Brown, 1951. 310 p. [44"] Hansen, Marcus Lee. The immigrant in American history; edited with a foreword by Arthur M. Schlesinger. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1940. 230 p. [4413] Hays, Samuel P. The response to industrialism, 1885-1914. [Chicago] University of Chicago Press, 1957. 210 p. 57-6981 HC105.H35 Herberg, Will. Protestant, Catholic, Jew; an essay in American religious sociology. Garden City, N.Y., Doubleday, 1955. 320 p. [5488] Higham, John. Strangers in the land; patterns of American nativism, 1860-1925. New Brunswick, N.J., Rutgers University Press, 1955. xiv, 431 p. [4422] A History of American life, edited by Arthur M. Schlesinger and Dixon Ryan Fox. New York, Macmillan, 1927-48. 13 v. [3085] Hofstadter, Richard. The American political tra- dition and the men who made it. New York, Knopf, 1948. xi, 378, xviii p. [3°99] Hofstadter, Richard. Social Darwinism in Ameri- can thought, 1860-1915. Philadelphia, Univer- sity of Pennsylvania Press, 1944. 191 p. [3755] Hopkins, Charles Howard. The rise of the social gospel in American Protestantism, 1865-1915. New Haven, Yale University Press, 1940. 352 p. [5489] Hubbell, Jay Broadus. The South in American literature, 1 607-1900. [Durham, N.C.] Duke University Press, 1954. xix, 987 p. [2442] Huth, Hans. Nature and the American; three cen- turies of changing attitudes. Berkeley, Uni- versity of California Press, 1957. xvii, 250 p. 57-12393 QH77.U6H8 [5884n] APPENDIX: SELECTED READINGS IN AMERICAN STUDIES / 1085 Kazin, Alfred. On native grounds, an interpreta- tion of modern American prose literature. New York, Reynal & Hitchcock, 1942. 541 p. [2449] Key, Valdimer O. Politics, parties, and pressure groups. 4th ed. New York, Crowell, 1958. 783 p. 58-6098 JF2051.K4 1958 [6335] Knight, Grant C. The critical period in American literature. Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina Press, 195 1. 208 p. [ 2 45°] Knight, Grant C. The strenuous age in American literature. Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina Press, 1954. 270 p. [2451] Koht, Halvdan. The American spirit in Europe, a survey of transadantic influences. Philadelphia, University of Pennsylvania Press, 1949. 289 p. [37 6 9] Kouwenhoven, John A. Made in America; the arts in modern civilization. Garden City, N.Y., Doubleday, 1948. xv, 303 p. [5691] Kraus, Michael. The Atlantic civilization: eight- eenth-century origins. Ithaca, N.Y., Cornell University Press, 1949. 334 p. [377°] Landis, James M. The administrative process. New Haven, Yale University Press, 1938. 160 p. [6312] Larkin, Oliver W. Art and life in America. New York, Rinehart, 1949. xviii, 547 p. [5693] Lehmann-Haupt, Hellmut. The book in America; a history of the making and selling of books in the United States, by Hellmut Lehmann-Haupt in collaboration with Lawrence C. Wroth and Rollo G. Silver. 2d [rev. and enl. American] ed. New York, Bowker, 1951. xiv, 493 p. [6440] Leigh, Robert D. The public library in the United States; the general report of the Public Library Inquiry. New York, Columbia University Press, 1950. 272 p. [6480] Lerner, Max. America as a civilization; life and thought in the United States today. New York, Simon & Schuster, 1957. 1036 p. 57-10979 E169.1.L532 Leuchtenburg, William E. The perils of prosperity, 1914-32. [Chicago] University of Chicago Press, 1958. 313 p. 58-5680 HC106.3.L3957 Literary history of die United States. Editors: Robert E. Spiller, Willard Thorp, Thomas H. Johnson [and] Henry Seidel Canby; associates: Howard Mumford Jones, Dixon Wecter [and] Stanley T. Williams. New York, Macmillan, i94 8 - 3 v - [2460] Lynd, Robert S., and Helen Merrell Lynd. Middle- town, a study in contemporary American culture. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1929. 550 p. [459 2 ] Lynd, Robert S., and Helen Merrell Lynd. Middle- town in transition; a study in cultural conflicts. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1937. xviii, 604 p. [4593] Lynes, Russell. The tastemakers. New York, Harper, 1954. 362 p. [5694] Macleod, William Christie. The American Indian frontier. New York, Knopf, 1928. xxiii, 598 p. [3030] Mann, Arthur. Yankee reformers in the urban age. Cambridge, Belknap Press of Harvard University Press, 1954. 314 p. [4530] Matthiessen, Francis O. American renaissance; art and expression in the age of Emerson and Whit- man. New York, Oxford University Press, 194 1. xxiv, 678 p. [2476] Maurer, Herrymon. Great enterprise; growth and behavior of the big corporation. New York, Macmillan, 1955. 303 p. [6022] May, Henry Farnham. Protestant churches and industrial America. New York, Harper, 1949. 297 p. [5492] Mencken, Henry L. The American language; an inquiry into the development of English in the United States. 4th ed., cor., enl., and rewritten. New York, Knopf, 1936. xi, 769, xxix p. Supplement I— II. New York, Knopf, 1945-48. 2 v. [ 22 48] Miller, Perry. The New England mind; the seven- teenth century. New York, Macmillan, 1939. 528 p. [3742] Miller, Perry. The New England mind: from colony to province. Cambridge, Harvard Univer- sity Press, 1953. 513 p. [3743] I086 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Miller, William. The book industry, a report of the Public Library Inquiry. New York, Columbia University Press, 1949. xvi, 156 p. [6441] Mills, Charles Wright. White collar; the American middle classes. New York, Oxford University Press, 1951. xx, 378 p. [4553] Milton, George Fort. The use of presidential power, 1789-1943. Boston, Litde, Brown, 1944. 349 p. [6146] Morison, Samuel Eliot. The intellectual life of colonial New England. [2d ed.] New York, New York University Press, 1956. 288 p. [3745] Morison, Samuel Eliot, and Henry Steele Com- mager. The growth of the American Republic. [4th ed., rev. and enl.] New York, Oxford Uni- versity Press, 1950. 2 v. [3 I0 3] Morris, Lloyd R. Not so long ago. New York, Random House, 1949. xviii, 504 p. [45 19] Morris, Lloyd R. Postscript to yesterday; America: the last fifty years. New York, Random House, 1947. xxvi, 475 p. [3746] Mott, Frank Luther. American journalism; a his- tory of newspapers in the United States through 260 years: 1690 to 1950. Rev. ed. New York, Macmillan, 1950. xiv, 835 p. [2847] Mott, Frank Luther. A history of American maga- zines. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1938-57. 4 v. [2915] Mumford, Lewis. The brown decades; a study of the arts in America, 1865— 1895. [2d ed.] New York, Dover, 1955. 266 p. [5695] Mumford, Lewis. The golden day; a study in American literature and culture. New York, Norton [1934?] 283 p. [3731] Mumford, Lewis. Sticks and stones; a study of American architecture and civilization. [2d ed.] New York, Dover, 1955. 238 p. [57 01 ] Murrell, William. A history of American graphic humor. New York, Whitney Museum of Ameri- can Art, 1933-38. 2 v. [5803] Nef, John U. The United States and civilization. Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1942. xviii, 421 p. [45 4] Nevins, Allan, ed. America through British eyes. [New ed. rev. and enl.] New York, Oxford Uni- versity Press, 1948. 530 p. [4 2 34] Oliver, John W. History of American technology. New York, Ronald Press, 1956. 676 p. [4727] Parkes, Henry Bamford. The United States of America, a history. 2d ed., rev. New York, Knopf, 1959. xviii, 783, xxiv p. 59-6118 E178.P25 1959 [3104] Parrington, Vernon Louis. Main currents in Amer- ican thought; an interpretation of American lit- erature from the beginnings to 1920. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1927-30. 3 v. [2485] Pearce, Roy Harvey. The savages of America, a study of the Indian and the idea of civilization. Baltimore, Johns Hopkins Press, 1953. xv, 252 p. [3°3 J ] Perry, Ralph Barton. Puritanism and democracy. New York, Vanguard Press, 1944. xvi, 688 p. [3733] Persons, Stow. American minds; a history of ideas. New York, Holt, 1958. 467 p. 58-6318 B851.P4 Persons, Stow, ed. Evolutionary thought in America. [Edited for the special Program in American Civilization at Princeton University] New Haven, Yale University Press, 1950. 462 p. [3758] Pickering, Ernest. The homes of America, as they have expressed the lives of our people for three centuries. New York, Crowell, 195 1. 284 p. [57 02 1 Pochmann, Henry A. German culture in America; philosophical and literary influences, 1600-1900. With the assistance of Arthur R. Schultz and others. Madison, University of Wisconsin Press, 1957. xv, 865 p. 55-6791 E169.1.P596 Potter, David M. People of plenty; economic abundance and the American character. [Chi- cago] University of Chicago Press, 1954. xxvii, 219 P- [3734] Pressly, Thomas J. Americans interpret their Civil War. Princeton, Princeton University Press, 1954. xvi, 347 p. [3407] APPENDIX: SELECTED READINGS IN AMERICAN STUDIES / 1087 Purcell, Theodore V. The worker speaks his mind on company and union. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1953. xix, 344 p. [6055] Read, Conyers, ed. The Constitution reconsidered. New York, Columbia University Press, 1938. xviii, 424 p. [6082] Riesman, David. The lonely crowd; a study of the changing American character, by David Riesman in collaboration with Reuel Denney and Nathan Glazer. New Haven, Yale University Press, 1950. xvii, 386 p. [4555] Riesman, David. Faces in the crowd; individual studies in character and politics, by David Ries- man in collaboration with Nathan Glazer. New Haven, Yale University Press, 1952. 751 p. [4556] Robert, Joseph C. The story of tobacco in America. New York, Knopf, 1949. xii, 296, xxiv p. [5829] Rosenberg, Bernard, and David Manning White, eds. Mass culture; the popular arts in America. Glencoe, 111., Free Press, 1957. 561 p. [6443] Rossiter, Clinton L. Conservatism in America. New York, Knopf, 1955. 326 p. [6067] Rossiter, Clinton L. Seedtime of the Republic; the origin of the American tradition of political liberty. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1953. xiv, 558 p. [6068] Rourke, Constance M. American humor; a study of the national character. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1931. 324 p. [2501] Rourke, Constance M. The roots of American cul- ture and other essays. Edited, with a preface, by Van Wyck Brooks. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1942. 305 p. [3736] Rural life in the United States, by Carl C. Taylor [and others] New York, Knopf, 1949. xviii, 549, xii p. [4583] Santayana, George. Character & opinion in the United States. New York, Scribner, 1920. 233 p. 20-26993 B945.S3C5 [5369] A paperback reprint is currendy available: Doubleday, Anchor Books, A73. Savelle, Max. Seeds of liberty; the genesis of the American mind. New York, Knopf, 1948. xix, 587, xxxi p. [3747] Schafer, Joseph. The social history of American agriculture. New York, Macmillan, 1936. 302 p. [5832] Schlesinger, Arthur M. Paths to the present. New York, Macmillan, 1949. 317 p. [3 X 4°] Schlesinger, Arthur M., Jr. The age of Jackson. Boston, Litde, Brown, 1945. xiv, 577 p. [3352] Schneider, Herbert W. A history of American philosophy. New York, Columbia University Press, 1946. xiv, 646 p. [5261] Schneider, Herbert W. Religion in 20th century America. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1952. 244 p. [5409] Seldes, Gilbert V. The great audience. New York, Viking Press, 1950. 299 p. [4895] Siegfried, Andre. America comes of age, a French analysis. Translated from the French by Henry H. Hemming and Doris Hemming. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1927. 358 p. [45°6] Siegfried, Andre. America at mid-century. Trans- lated by Margaret Ledesert. New York, Har- court, Brace, 1955. 357 p. [45 8] Siepmann, Charles A. Radio, television and society. New York, Oxford University Press, 1950. 410 P- [47 3] Sirjamaki, John. The American family in the twentieth century. Cambridge, Harvard Uni- versity Press, 1953. 227 p. [457 1 ] Smith, Cecil Michener. Worlds of music. Phila- delphia, Lippincott, 1952. 328 p. [5623] Smith, Henry Nash. Virgin land; the American West as symbol and myth. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1950. xiv, 305 p. [3759] Stewart, George R. American ways of life. Garden City, N.Y., Doubleday, 1954. 310 p. [452i] Struik, Dirk Jan. Yankee science in the making. Boston, Little, Brown, 1948. 430 p. [4730] Sutton, Francis X., and others. The American business creed. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1956. 414 p. [6010] Sweet, William Warren. Religion in the develop- ment of American culture, 1765-1840. New York, Scribner, 1952. xiv, 338 p. [54"] 1088 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Taeuber, Conrad, and Irene B. Taeuber. The changing population of the United States. For the Social Science Research Council in cooperation with the U.S. Dept. of Commerce, Bureau of the Census. New York, Wiley, 1958. 357 p. (Cen- sus monograph series) 57-13451 HB3505.T3 Taft, Robert. Photography and the American scene, a social history, 1839-1889. New York, Macmillan, 1938. 546 p. [5781] Tannenbaum, Frank. Crime and the community. Boston, Ginn, 1938. xiv, 487 p. [4656] Thisdethwaite, Frank. The great experiment; an introduction to the history of the American people. Cambridge [Eng.] University Press, 1955- 335 P- [3M6] Tocqueville, Alexis C. H. M. C. de. Democracy in America. The Henry Reeve text as rev. by Francis Bowen, now further corr. and edited, with introd., editorial notes, and bibliographies, by Phillips Bradley. New York, Knopf, 1945. 2 v. [45i 2 ] Tunnard, Christopher, and Henry Hope Reed. American skyline; the growth and form of our cities and towns. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1955. 302 p. [4609] Turner, Frederick Jackson. The frontier in Ameri- can history. New York, Holt, 1950, c i947. 375 P- [3M7] Turpie, Mary C. A selected list of paintings for the study of American civilization. Minneapolis, Program in American Studies, University of Minnesota, 1953. 109 1. [5757] Turpie, Mary C, comp. American music for the study of American civilization, [v. 1] Formal compositions. Folk and popular songs. Minne- apolis, Program in American Studies, University of Minnesota, 1955. 90 1. [5613] Tyler, Alice (Felt). Freedom's ferment; phases of American social history to i860. Minneapolis, University of Minnesota Press, 1944. 608 p. [4522] Ulman, Lloyd. The rise of the national trade union; the development and significance of its structure, governing institutions, and economic policies. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1955. xix, 639 p. [6041] Vanderbilt, Arthur T. Men and measures in the law; five lectures delivered at the University of Michigan, Apr. 1948. New York, Knopf, 1949. xxi, 156, xp. [6270] Ward, Alfred Dudley, ed. Goals of economic life. New York, Harper, 1953. 470 p. [5899] Webb, Walter Prescott. The Great Plains. [Bos- ton] Ginn, 1931. xv, 525 p. [4*64] Wecter, Dixon. The hero in America, a chronicle of hero-worship. New York, Scribner, 194 1. 530 p. [4533] Wecter, Dixon. The saga of American society; a record of social aspiration, 1607-1937. New York, Scribner, 1937. 504 p. [4534] Welker, Robert Henry. Birds and men; American birds in science, art, literature, and conservation, 1800-1900. Cambridge, Belknap Press of Har- vard University Press, 1955. 230 p. [474 1 ] White, Edward A. Science and religion in Ameri- can thought; the impact of naturalism. Stanford, Stanford University Press, 1952. 117 p. [3761] White, Morton G. Social thought in America, the revolt against formalism. New York, Viking Press, 1949. 260 p. [4545] Wiener, Philip P. Evolution and the founders of pragmatism. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1949. xiv, 288 p. [5264] Williams, Robin M. American society; a sociologi- cal interpretation. New York, Knopf, 1 95 1. xiii, 545 P- [4558] Wilson, Francis Graham. The American political mind; a textbook in political theory. New York, McGraw-Hill, 1949. 506 p. [6070] Wisconsin. University. Regionalism in America. Edited by Merrill Jensen. Madison, University of Wisconsin Press, 1951. xvi, 425 p. [3785] Wish, Harvey. Society and thought in America. New York, Longmans, Green, 1950-52. 2 v. [3150] Wittke, Carl F. The Irish in America. Baton Rouge, Louisiana State University Press, 1956. 319 p. [4498] APPENDIX! SELECTED READINGS IN AMERICAN STUDIES / I089 Wood, James Playsted. Magazines in the United States. 2d ed. New York, Ronald Press, 1956. 390 p. [2919] Wright, Louis B. The first gendemen of Virginia; intellectual qualities of the early colonial ruling class. San Marino, Calif., Huntington Library, i94°- 373 P- [3749] Wright, Thomas Goddard. Literary culture in early New England, 1620-1730. Edited by his wife. New Haven, Yale University Press, 1920. 322 p. [2549] Years of the modern; an American appraisal. John W. Chase, ed. New York, Longmans, Green, 1949- 354 P- [4513] Index AEF. See American Expeditionary Force AFL. See American Federation of Labor AFL-CIO. See American Federation of Labor and Congress of Industrial Organizations ASCAP. See American Society of Com- posers, Authors, and Publishers A I'abri, 675 Aandahl, Fredrick, ed., 3292 Aaron, Daniel, 6424 ed., 3070 ^ Abbot, Charles Greely, about, 4722, 4775 Abbot, Waldo, 4682 Abbott, Charles C, 5976 Abbott, Edith, 4404-5, 4632 Abbott, Francis, ed., 5435 Abbott, George, 2332-33 Abbott, Lyman, about, 5396 Abdy, Edward Strutt, 4311 about, 4310 Abe Lincoln in Illinois, 1752, 2334 Abegglen, James C, 6029 Abel, John Jacob, about, 4722 Abell, A. S., about, 2876 Abell, Aaron I., 5489 Aberdeen, S. Dak., 3897 Abernathy, Cecil, 1046 Abernethy, Thomas Perkins, 3237, 3273, 4072,4103 Abilene, Kans., 4157-58 Abolitionism, 56, 178, 216, 239-40, 449, 562, 662, 2279, 3305, 3366, 3370, 3375. 3380-81, 3401, 3404, 3413, 3431 See also Antislavery movement; Slavery Abrams, Charles, 4600 Abrams, Ray H., ed., 5409 Absalom, Absalom!, 1388 Academic freedom. See Teachers and teaching — academic freedom Academies (schools), 5155, 5212 New York (State), 5159 Philadelphia, 5130 Acadians fiction, 745 poetry, 429 See also Cajuns Accent, 2551 Accident Claims Tribunal, 6299 Acculturation, 3041, 4410-11, 4435, 4447. 4456, 4463 Acheson, Dean, 3543, 6316 Acheson, Sam Hanna, 2866 Ackerman, Edward A., 5900 Across Spoon River, 1599 Across the Board on Tomorrow Morn- ing, 21 13 Across the Continent, 2301 Across the River and into the Trees, 1499 Across the Wide Missouri, 3330 Act of Darkness, 1 225 Actfive, and Other Poems, 1586 Actors and actresses, 1214, 1221, 2475, 4927-39 biog. (collected), 4931, 4933-34, 4938 motion picture, 4946 Negro, 4921 Adam & Eve & the City, 1 871 Adamic, Louis, 2578-79 about, 2579 Adams, Abigail, 96-100, 3277 about, 99, 2615 Adams, Adeline, ed., 5740 Adams, Agatha B., 1479, 1895 Adams, Andy, 683-87 about, 687 Adams, Brooks, 2601 about, 2601, 6424 Adams, Charles Francis (1 807-1 886), 2580 ed., 97-99 about, 688, 2581 Adams, Charles Francis (1835-1915), 52, 2580-82, 3276-77, 4036 ed., 3279, 3312 about, 2582 Adams, Ephraim Douglass, 3550 Adams, Franklin P., 865 Adams, George P., ed., 5250 Adams, Henry, 688-700, 2580, 3274- 75.33" about, 688, 941, 1231, 2407, 2480, 2544, 261 6, 3055, 3058 Adams, Herbert B., 3044 about, 4540 Adams, James Truslow, 698, 3088 ed., 2967, 3071 Adams, John, 96, 99, 3276-77, 3279 about, 2608, 3276, 3278-79, 3285, 4034 Adams, John Luther, about, 5433 Adams, John Quincy, 3312 about, 3313,3360, 3529 Adams, Leonic, 1153-54 Adams, Marian, about, 1231 Adams, Nehemiah, ed., 63-64 Adams, Ramon F., 2253 Adams, Randolph G., 6460 Adams, Samuel Hopkins, 1155-60, 2688, 3475 Adams, W. B., 4295 Adams, Walter, ed., 5901 Adams family, 2503 Adamson, W. M., 5909 Addams, Jane, 4614 The Adding Machine, 1689, 2348 Addison, Agnes, 3751 Addison, James T., 5457 Addison, Joseph, about, 381 Addresses. See Lectures and lecturing Ade, George, 701-5 Adirondack Mountains, 3966, 5064, . 5765 Adirondack State Park, 3966 Adkins, Nelson F., 134 ed., 160 Adler, Felix, 5289 about, 5435 Adler, John H., 5971 Administrative courts, 6316 Administrative law, 6090, 6181, 6201, 6310-16 Administrative procedure, 6311-12, 6316 Administrative reform, 6316 Admiral of the Ocean Sea, 3 164 Adolescents. See Youth Adult education, 5105, 5209, 5219, 6482 Adventurers, outlaws, etc., 51, 66, 5523, 5525.5531.5556,5559.5562 Adventures of a Novelist, 721 Adventures of a Young Man, 1332 The Adventures of Augie March, 1921- 22 The Adventures of Huckleberry Finn, 782-83,787-93,811 The Adventures of Tom Sawyer, 778- 83,811 The Adventures of Wesley ]ac\son, 21 19 Advertising, 5962 fiction, 2188 hist., 5958 radio, 4696 television, 4696 Advice to the Privileged Orders, 103 Aeronautics, 4721 flights, 2714-15, 2977, 4788 hist., 5938 IO91 IO92 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Aeronautics, commercial, 5943 finance, 5943 govt, regulation, 5941 hist., 5941 Aeronautics, military, 3643a, 3647, 3676,3711,3717,3727 Aesthetic Papers, 586 The Affluent Society, 5886 Africa descr., 2282 fiction, 1927, 2096 technical assistance to, 3641 travel & travelers, 2282 After Holbein , 1855 After igoj — What?, 1218 After the Genteel Tradition, 2406 After the Lost Generation, 2371 Agard, Walter R., 3739 Agassiz, Elizabeth (Cary), 4742 Agassiz, Louis, 4742, 4744 about, 4721, 4724, 4742, 5222 The Age of Innocence, 1852, 1855 The Age of Reason, 155 Age of Thunder, 2093 Agee, James, 1907-8 Ager, Trygve M., tr., 1723 Agrarian policy, 3285 Agrarianism, 2421, 3420-21, 5833, 5859, 6358, 6372, 6426-27 Middle West, 3446 Southern States, 3286, 3361, 3451 The West, 3361, 3427 The Agrarians (literary movement), 1464, 1809, 2559 Agribusiness. See Agriculture — econ. aspects Agricultural colleges, 2790 Agricultural credit, 5848 Agricultural economics. See Agricul- ture — econ. aspects Agricultural education, 5191, 5836 Agricultural extension work, 5836, 5851 Agricultural fairs, 5827 Agricultural labor, 5846 Agricultural machinery, 5830 Agricultural organizations, 3421 Agricultural products, 5818-19, 5847 hist., 5820 marketing, 5845 Middle Atlantic States, 4329 New England, 4329 New York (State), 4237-38 Northwest, Old, 4329 Ohio, 41 19 Pa., 4237-38 Southern States, 4239 Agricultural research, 2790, 5836, 5857 Agriculture, 2943, 2947, 2951-53, 5819-61 cooperatives, 5842 dictionary, 5849 econ. aspects, 4579, 4581-82, 5819, 5832-34, 5838, 5841, 5843-44, 5847, 5850, 5861, 5877, 6358 govt, regulation, 5831, 5838, 5853- 56, 5860 handbooks, manuals, etc., 5849 hist., 5819-38 Colonial period, 5821 to i860, 5820, 5823 Agriculture— Continued price supports, 5855, 5860 soc. aspects, 5899 stat., 4329 yearbooks, 2947, 2951 Calif., 4372 Fla., 4248-50 Ga., 4248-50 Great Plains, 4164 Ky., 4276 Middle West, 5831 Mo., 4108 New England, 4031, 4266, 5840 N.J., 4053 New York (State), 4242-46, 4266 N.C., 4090, 4248-50, 4276 N. Dak., 4165 Northwest, Pacific, 4214 Northwestern States, 4147, 4212 Ohio, 4276 Pa., 4054, 4242-46, 4266 S.C., 4248-50, 4276 Southern States, 4079, 4083, 4266 Tenn., 4276 Tex., 4194 The West, 4156, 4160 Agriculture and state, 5831, 5833-34, 5837-38, 5851-61 Agwani, Mohammed Shafi, 3588 Ah, Wilderness!, 1648, 2327 Ahlstrom, Sydney E., 5424 Ahnebrink, Lars, 2365 Ahrens, Maurice R., 5224 Aiken, Conrad Potter, 844, 1 161-66, 1364 ed., 2344 about, 1 1 65 Aiken, George L., 2347 Aikin, Wilford M., 5131 Aikman, Duncan, 4176 The Air-Conditioned Nightmare, 161 3 Air Force, about, 3643a Air Materiel Command, about, 3643a Air Transport Command, hist., 1551 Air University, about, 3643a Airlines, 5920, 5941, 5943 Akers, Dwight, 5054 Al Aaraaf, Tamerlane, and Minor Po- ems, 523-27 Al Que Quiere! , 1881 Alabama, 3953, 4079, 4099 editorial, sketches, etc., 194-97, 379 - 80, 1907 fiction, 1792-95, 1836-38 folksongs & ballads, 5565 guidebook, 3848 hist., 4099, 4104 Alabama claims, 3444 Alaska, 2719-20, 2751, 3554, 3968, 4218-19 climate, 2953 fiction, 2162 guidebook, 3940 hist., 3968, 4219 Indian art, 3016 place names, bibl., 2976 purchase, 3429 short stories, 1048-52, 1058 Albany, N.Y., 3807 Albemarle County, Va., guidebook, 3828 Albertson, Frederick W., 2966 Alberty, Harold B., 5158 Albion, Robert Greenhalgh, 5937, 5951 Albree, John, ed., 672 Albright, Spencer D., 6400 Albright, William Foxwell, 5426 about, 5426 Albro, John A., 59, 65 Albuquerque, N. Mex., 4176, 4187 Alcoa, about, 5908 Alcott, Amos Bronson, 186-87 about, 186, 2280, 5220, 5265-66, 5305 Alcott, Louisa May, 188-89 about, 188, 2615 Alden, John Richard, 3238, 4072 ed., 3683 Alderfer, Evan B., 5902 Alderfer, Harold F., 3475 Alderman, S. S., 3562 Aldrich, Richard, 5626 Aldrich, Thomas Bailey, 706-15 about, 2277, 2922 Aldridge, Alfred Owen, 3187 Aldridge, John W., 2371, 2373 ed., 2372 Aleck. Maury, 1466 Alexander, Carter, 5098 Alexander, De Alva Stanwood, 6150 Alexander, Hartley Burr, 3015 Alexander's Bridge, 1 277 Alexandria, Va., guidebook, 3829 Alfred Venison's Poems, 1666 Alfriend, Edward M., 2305 The Algerian Captive, 168 The Alhambra, 381 Alias Simon Suggs, 379 Alice Adams, 1802, 1805 Alien and Sedition Acts, 3308 Aliens, 4404-5, 4468, 61 17, 6120, 6122 All God's Chillun Got Wings, 1648 All My Sons, 2043, 2046, 2335-36 All the King's Men, 2197 All the Young Men, 1553 The Allegash and East Branch, 594 Allegheny, Pa., hist., 3817 Allegheny County, Pa., 4591 Allegheny Mountains, travel & travelers, 4350 Allegheny River, 3992 Allegiance, 3129, 4526, 4773, 6107, 6115, 61 18 See also Loyalty oaths Allen, Arthur A., 2962 Allen, C. R., 5211 Allen, Charles, 2914 Allen, Edward L., 5903 Allen, Elizabeth L., 4443 Allen, Ethan, 5251, 5408 fiction, 580-82 Allen, Francis H., comp., 599 Allen, Fred, 4964 about, 4964 Allen, Frederick Lewis, 3476-78, 3782, 4514,5978 Allen, Gardner W., 3678, 3685-86 Allen, Gay Wilson, 620, 647, 660 ed., 645, 648, 2349 Allen, Harry C, 3551 Allen, Harry K., 5164 INDEX / IO93 Allen, Hervey, 1167-71, 1512 ed., 3969, 3977. 3996-4017 Allen, Hollis P., 5099 Allen, James Lane, 716-20, 2296 about, 716 Allen, Jerry, 813 Allen, John Edward, 2900 Allen, Jules Verne, 5503 Allen, Paul, 109 Allen, Raymond B., 4855 Allen, Robert S., 6195 ed., 6195, 6207 Allen, Shirley W., 5862 Allen County, Ohio, guidebook, 3869 Allred, B. W., 2966 Allston, Washington, about, 5760 Almanacs, 122, 131-32, 2493 Almond, Gabriel A., 3609 Almy, Millie, 5148 Alnwick. Castle, 324-25 Along This Way, 1539 Alsberg, Henry G., ed., 3822, 3924-25 The Altar of the Dead, 1 o 1 2 Alterton, Margaret, 534 Altgeld, John Peter about, 3446 fiction, 1978 Altitudes, 2970 Aluminum Company of America, about, 5908 Alvord, Clarence Walworth, 41 28 ed., 4126-32 about, 3058 Always the Land, 1969 Always the Young Strangers, 1732 Amacher, Richard E., ed., 130 Amaranth, 1714 Amargosa Desert, 3947 The Ambassadors, 998-99 about, 1009 Amberg, George, 4967 Ambler, Charles Henry, 3271, 4089 Amdur, Leon H., 4780 America (song), about, 5616 America in literature European, 3771-72 French, 3773 bibl., 3773 America Was Promises, 1586 The American, 987-88 The American, a Middle Western Legend, 1978 American Academy of Pediatrics. Committee for the Study of Child Health Services, 4841 American Academy of Political and Social Science, Philadelphia, 6106 The American Adam, 2459 American Antiquarian Society, Wor- cester, Mass., about, 6447 American Anti-Slavery Society, about, 336o, 3370 American Arbitration Association, about, 6299 American Association for Gifted Chil- dren, 5205 American Association of School Ad- ministrators, 5106, 5240 American Automobile Association, 2952 about, 5005 American Bar Association, about, 6307, 6331-32 American Chemical Society, about, 4731 American Child, 1972 American Civil Liberties Union, about, 6106, 6127, 6322 American Colonization Society, about, 3370.3375. 43™ The American Commonwealth, 4499 American Council of Learned Societies, 5100 American Council of Learned Societies. Committee on Linguistic and Na- tional Stocks in the Population of the United States, 4390 American Council on Education. Co- operative Study of Evaluation in General Education, 5160 The American Crisis, 155 The American Democrat, 265-67 American Dialect Society, 2254-62 American Education Fellowship, 513 1 American Educational Research Asso- ciation, 5247 American English, 2237, 2243, 2245, 5127 See also Language American Estimates, 2396 American Expeditionary Force, about, 3710 American Expeditionary Force. Divi- sion of Urology, about, 4832 American Farm Bureau Federation, about, 5831, 5859 American Federation of Labor, 5906 about, 6034-36, 6050, 6052, 6360 American Federation of Labor and Congress of Industrial Organiza- tions, about, 6034, 6049 American Federation of Musicians, about, 5619 American Folklore Society, 5518 about, 5518 American Foundation for Political Edu- cation, 3617 American Foundation for the Blind, about, 4636 American Fur Company, about, 4148, 6024 American Geographical Society of New York, hist., 2941 American Guide Series, 3786-3941 American Harvest, 2354 American Heritage, 2339 American Historical Association, 3050, 6224 American Historical Association. Com- mission on the Social Studies, 51 16 An American Hunter, 1724 American Ideas for English Readers, 461 An American in Paris (music), 5678 American Indians. See Indians, Amer- ican American Institute of Chemical Engi- neers, 4793 American Issues, 2355 American Jewish Congress, about, 6106 American Law Institute, 6280 American Legion, about, 3645 American Library Association, 6482 about, 6486 American Library Association. Coor- dinating Committee on Revision of Public Library Standards, 6480 American Life in Literature, 2340 American Literature and the Dream, 2400 American Medical Association, about, 4806-7,4882,4885 American Men of Letters [1st ser.], 2277-82 about, 1 136 American Men of Letters [2d. ser.], 2283-89 The American Mercury, 1602 The American Mind, 2491 American Newspaper Publishers Asso- ciation, about, 2855 The American 'Notebooks, 349 The American of the Future, 2469 American Outpost, 1757 American Party, about, 4515 American Philosophical Society, Phila- delphia, 4059 about, 4718 American Psychiatric Association, 4833 about, 4837 hist., 4833, 4863 American Quarterly, 2553 American Railway Express Company, about, 4667 American Renaissance, 585, 2476 American Revolution, 3089, 3139, 3157. 3237-72, 3678-84, 4038 campaigns & battles, 3238-39, 3680, 3682-83, 4251 sources, 3239 causes, 3128, 3176, 3188, 3231, 3237- 38, 3241, 3243, 3246, 3255, 3257- 58, 3261-62, 3265, 3272, 3304 commerce, 5948 diplomatic hist., 3519, 35 2 8, 3569 econ. aspects, 6016 European opinion, 3769 foreign participation, 3238, 3248-50, 3269, 3773 for. rel., 3187, 3239, 3272 hist., 2608, 2673, 3179, 3189-90, 3266, 3277, 3279 sources, 3183-84, 3260, 3277 in art, 5775 labor condit., 6057 military hist., 3238-39, 3255, 3261, 3269, 3271-72 sources, 3239 mutinies, 3264 naval operations, 3678 personal narratives, 3244, 4251 politics, 2740 religious aspects, 5406, 541 1, 5477 treason, 3264 American Revolution in literature drama, 105, 1477 fiction, 239, 252-57, 405, 409-11, 546-47, 552-53. 579-82, 766-67, 1222, 1239-40, 1355, 1442, 1695, 1707-11, 1730, 1916, 1974, 1976- 77 letters, 96-100 1094 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES American Revolution in literature — Continued pamphleteering works, 138, 147, 154-60 poetry, 134-39, 146, 148, 165, 167, 323 satire, 147, 165, 167 The American Rhythm, 1 196 The American Scene, 1002-3 The American Scholar, 283 about, 230 American Society of Composers, Au- thors, and Publishers (ASCAP), about, 5621, 5681 American Society of Equity, about, 5831 American Song, 1968 The American Spirit in Letters, 2532 The American Spirit in Literature, 2491 American studies programs, 2553, 5184 American Telephone and Telegraph Company, about, 4673, 4710 American Theatre Wing War Service, Inc., about, 4919 The American Tradition in Literature, 2324 An American Tragedy, 1338 American Unitarian Association, about, 5472 The American Way, 1548 The American Way of Poetry, 2530 The American Weekly Mercury, about, 2854,2880 The American Writer and the European Tradition, 2412 American Writers Series, 2290—96 Americanisms (language), 2236-41, 2243-48, 2250, 2252, 2269, 2272, 2466, 5127 See also Language Americans in Great Britain (Colonial period), 3227 America's Coming-of-Age, 2380 America's Lost Plays, 2297-2317 Ames, E. S., 5289 Amherst, Mass., in literature, 984 Amherst College, 2674 curriculum, 5199 hist., 5200 Amish in Pennsylvania, 4058, 4480 Ammen, Daniel, 3700 Amnesty (1861-98), 3388 Among the Corn-Rows, 893 Among the Hills, 669 Amory, Cleveland, 4035 Ampere, Jean Jacques Antoine, 4358-59 about, 4358 Amphibious warfare, 3668 The Anatomy of Nonsense, 2544 Ancestors' Brocades, 851 &, 1313 And Gladly Teach, 2491 And in the Human Heart, 1 1 66 And Still the Waters Run, 3025 Anderson, Charles A., ed., 5466 Anderson, Charles R., ed., 1046 Anderson, Gordon V., 5229 Anderson, Hobson Dewey, 6043 Anderson, John, 4905 Anderson, Lee, 2350 Anderson, Marian, 5673 about, 5673 Anderson, Mary, 2584 about, 2584 Anderson, Maxwell, 1 171-77, 2332-33, 2335-37, 2348 Anderson, Nels, 5465 Anderson, Odin W., 4886 Anderson, Oscar E., 4794 Anderson, Paul Russell, 5251 Anderson, Sherwood, 832, 1178-87 about, 959, 1182, 1186, 1188-89, 2372, 2406, 2419, 2429 Anderson, William, 6131, 6196 Andersonville, 1544 Andover House, Boston, about, 5438 Andover Review, 5438 Andover Theological Seminary, about, 5438 Andre, 2337, 2347 Andrews, Charles M., 3176-77, 3202 about, 3046 Andrews, E. A., 4724 Andrews, Frank Emerson, 4615-16, 4623 Andrews, J. B., 6033 Andrews, J. Cutler, 2851 Andrews, Kenneth R., 814 Andrews, Wayne, 5698 Andria, 1864 Anesthesia, hist., 4816 The Angel that Troubled the Waters. 1864 Angell, J. R., about, 5389 Angell, James Burrill, about, 5223 Angels and Earthly Creatures, 1903 Anghiera, Pietro Martire d', 3153 Angle, Paul M., 3395, 6469 ed., 3143,3391 Anglo-American folklore Ky., 5529, 5546 Mississippi River, 5523 N.C., 5529 Ozark Mountains, 5543 Southwestern States, 5518 Tex., 5518 Va., 5529 The West, 5526 Anglo-American folksongs and ballads, 5504, 555°, 5566 bibl., 5550 hist., 5566 theories, methods, etc., 5550, 5566 Appalachian Mountains, 5583 Blue Ridge Mountains, 5582 Buchanan County, Va., 5582 Ind., 5571 Maine, 5566 N.C., 5582 Southern States, 5583 Tex., 5521 Anglo-American legends Southwestern States, 5518 Tex., 5518, 5521 Anglo-French War. See French and Indian War (1755-63) Anglo-Israel movement, 5439 Angoff, Charles, 4458 The Animal Kingdom, 1201, 2333 Animal lore and mythology, 5513 Ga., 910-16, 922, 924-25 Ky., 5546 Mich., 5535 Animal lore and mythology — Continued Mo., 5528 N. Mex., 5537 Ozark Mountains, 5544 Animal, Vegetable, Mineral, 2413 Animals, 2954-56, 2960 domestic, 4276 editorials, sketches, etc., 1724-25 hist., 2955 in art, 5806 in folksongs, 5559, 5563-64 prairies, 4188 short stories, 1786, 1790 Death Valley, Calif., 4205 New World, 3155 New York (Colony), 4237-38, 4241 Pa., 4237-38, 4241 S.C., 5087 Ann Viewers, 1565 Anna Christie, 1648 Annand, George, maps, 4001, 4017 Annapolis, Md., 3825 Anne Boleyn, 207-8 Anne of the Thousand Days, 2335 Anni Mirabiles, 1235 Annie Allen, 1938 Anniversary, 1579 Another Animal, 2350 Another Part of the Forest, 1990 Antarctic expeditions, 2977-78 Antheil, George, 4968 Anthony Adverse, 11 69 Anthropology, 2986-87, 2989, 2993, 2998, 3006, 3010, 4192, 4722, 5351 See also Ethnology Antin, Mary, about, 2585 Antioch College, 5125, 5196 The Antioch Review, 2554 Antipathies, 517 Antiques collectors & collecting, 5596, 5598 dictionary, 5596 Antiquities. See Archaeology and pre- history Anti-Semitism, 4457, 4462 Antislavery movement, 2689, 3360, 3370, 3375 . See also Abolitionism; American Anu- Slavery Society; Slavery Anti-Slavery Papers, 463 Ander (Omaha) Reservation, 3042 Apache Indians, 3004, 3010, 3035 Apartment in Athens, 1839 Aphorisms, 3152 Apologetics, 5338 The Apostle, 1190 Appalachian Mountain region, 2933, 3958,3963 folksongs & ballads, 5583 Appellate procedure, 6302, 6304 Appellate review, 6234 The Apple of the Eye, 1 839 Apples by Ocean, 1296 Appleseed, Johnny. See Chapman, John Appleton, LeRoy H., 2967 Appointment in Samarra, 2070 Appomattox Court House, 2580 Apportionment (election law), 6163 Apprenticeship, 5210 April Twilights, 1277 INDEX / IO95 Aptitude tests, 5229 Arab States, relations with, 3588 Arapaho Indians, 3041, 4160 Arber, Edward, ed., 71 Arbitration, industrial, 6058, 6299 Arbitration and award (law), 6282, 6289, 6299 Arbolino, J. N., 5197 Archaeology and prehistory, 2989-97 mounds & moundbuilders, 2996, 4323 Calif., 3002 The East, 2990 Southwestern States, 2992 Archer, Gleason L., 4683 Architecture, 3969, 3751, 3758, 5698- 5725 bibl., 5709 Colonial, 3747-48, 5706, 5713-14, 5721-23, 5725, 5796 Creole, 5703 domestic, 5698, 5702, 5707, 571 1- 13. 57i7-i8, 5721-22, 5725, 5732, 5794- 5796 exhibitions, 5717-18 Georgian, 5714 Greek, 5708-9, 5719 hist., 5689, 5695, 5698, 5703, 5710, 57M Indian, 5723 library, 6474, 6478 modern, 5705, 5711-12, 5717-18 Spanish, 5703, 5723 Conn., 5707 Nashville, 3765 Northwest, Old, 5719 Ohio, 4 1 21 Southern States, 5706 Southwest, New, 5723 Archives, 3066-67 management & functions, 3063 Arciniegas, Germin, 3172 Arctic expeditions, 2979-8 1 Ardennes, Battle of the, 3720 Argentina, relations with, 3514 Aria da Capo, 1608, 2332 Ariel Poems, 1359 Aristocracy. See Upper class Arizona, 2737, 4199 archaeology, 2992 architecture, Spanish, 5723 descr., 5073 deserts, 3947 guidebooks, 3925-26 hist., 3956, 3961, 4189, 4199 Indians, 3023 Navajo Indians, 3013 music, 5630 short stories, 1762 travel & travelers, 4378 writers & writings, 4199 Arkansas, 3960, 4079, 4102 econ. condit., 4102 folklore, 5542 folksongs & ballads, 5569 frontier life, 4097-98 guidebooks, 3853-54 hist., 4102 poetry, 1434 Arkansas River and valley, 3984 The Arkansas Traveler, about, 5507, 5542 Armaments, 3525, 3674 Armed Forces. See specific branches, e.g., Navy Armed Neutrality, 3528 The Armed Vision, 2443 Armenians, 4435 Arminians, 5472 Armistice (1918), 3470 Armitage, Merle, ed., 4968, 5678 Arms, George W., 969, 976, 2374 Arms, John Taylor, about, 5783 Armstrong, Henry, about, 5025 Armstrong, Maurice W., ed., 5466 Army, 3643, 3653-65. 37°9 hist., 2710-n, 3648, 3651-52, 3657, 3659, 3661-64, 4040 American Revolution, 2673, 3681 Civil War, 3693, 3697, 3702, 3705 World War I, 3709-10 World War II, 3726 mobilizations, 3661 organization, 3648, 3681 recruiting, enlistment, etc., 3661, 3665,3702,3709 Army. American Expeditionary Force, about, 3710 Army. Armored Force, about, 3658 Army. Cavalry, hist., 3659 Army. General Staff Corps, about, 3653,3712 Army. Information and Education Di- vision. Research Branch, about, 3724 Army. Medical Dept., hist., 4809 Army Air Forces, about, 3717, 3727 Army Ground Forces, about, 3726 Army Life in a Black. Regiment, 2280 Army of Northern Virginia, 3695 Army of the Potomac, 3690-92, 3701, 3706 Army Service Forces, about, 3726 Army technical services, 3726 Arnold, Benedict, about, 2617, 2804, 3149,3264 Arnold, Byron, comp., 5565 Arnold, Henry H., 3717 Arnold, Matthew, about, 2545 Arnold, Willard B., 1812 Arny, William F. N., about, 3035 Arp. Bill, pseud. See Smith, Charles Henry An Arrant Knave c? Other Plays, 2308 Arrowood, Charles F., 5122 Arrowsmith, 1562 Arsenic and Old Lace, 2334 Art, 4741, 4743, 5351, 5688-97, 5726- 32, 5807 foreign influences, 3768, 3774 hist., 5689-93, 5695 Indian, 2991, 3016-17, 5785 Navajo, 3013 Northwest coast, 2998 Penobscot, 301 1 Plains, 3006, 3018 industries. See Arts and crafts Italian, 4497 museums. See Museums. Pennsylvania German, 4480 philosophy of. See Esthetics Charleston, S.C., 3763 Art — Continued Newport, R.I., 4040 Ohio, 4121 Philadelphia, 3764 See also Artists; Cartoons; Comic strips; Decorative arts; History and art; Painting; Prints; Sculpture Art and state, 5697, 6130 The Art of Fiction, 986, 1010, 1014 The Art of the Novel, 1004 The Art of Worldly Wisdom, 2098 Arthur, Chester A., about, 3437 Arthur, Timothy Shay, 190-91 Arthur Mervyn, 116-17 Arthur's Home Magazine, 190 Articles of Confederation, 3253, 3302, 6077 Articles on American Literature, 2457, 2552 Articulation (education), 5107, 5131, . 5217 Artisans, Colonial, 6044 Artists, 3757, 4198, 5690, 5695, 5760- 76, 5779-8o, 5783, 5797, 5802. 5806-7 See also Painters; Sculptors Arts and crafts, 3748, 3969, 5593-5604, 5787, 5919, 6044 design, 5594, 5600 hist., 5594, 5602-3 Indian, 2993 Pennsylvania German, 5594, 5599- 5600 Shakers, 5594 themes, motives, 5594, 5600 Mo., 4108 Southern States, 4083 See also Decorative arts Arundel, 1708 Arvin, Newton, 443, 481, 2284, 2406 ed., 348, 700 As I Lay Dying, 1384 As 1 Remember It, 1269 As If, 1953 Asbury, Francis, 5475 about, 2586, 5463, 5474-75 Asbury, Herbert, 2586-88, 4523, 5474 about, 2587 Asch, Shalom, 1190-94 about, 1 1 95 Asgis, Alfred J., 4842 Ash Wednesday, 1357, 1359 about, 1367 Ashburn, Percy M., 4809 Asheim, Lester, 6477 ed., 6454, 6480 Asheville, N.C., fiction, 1887-88 Ashley, William H., about, 4175 Ashmore, Harry S., 5206 Ashton, Wendell J., 2867 Ashworth, Mary Wells, 3271 Asia fiction, 2088, 2097 relations with, 3591, 3596 technical assistance to, 3641 travel & travelers, 2282 Asia Minor fiction, 1979 travel & travelers, 677-78 The Asiatics, 2088 Asirvatham, Eddy, 5496 IO96 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Askov, Minn., 4406 Aspects of Fiction and Other Ventures in Criticism, 2466 The Aspern Papers, 1007, 1014 Asseff, Emmett, 4100 Assembly-line methods, 6055 Associated Press, about, 2860 Association for Education by Radio- Television, 5230 Association for Higher Education, 5228 Association of American Law Schools, 6090 Association of American Universities, 5163 Association of American University Presses, about, 6439 Association of Land-Grant Colleges, 5186 The Assyrian, 21 1 8 Aston, Tony, about, 5661 Astor, John Jacob, about, 5882, 6024 Astoria, Oreg., 391, 4148, 6024 Astrology, 5541 Astrophysics, 4722 Aswell, E. C., 1892 Asylums, 19th cent., 4310 At Heaven's Gate, 2195 At Home and Abroad, 414 Athearn, Robert G., 4223 Atherton, Gertrude Franklin (Horn), 721-25, 3943 about, 721 Atherton, Lewis Eldon, 4109 Athletics, 4989 college, 4993, 4999 high school, 5000 Atkins, Gaius Glenn, 5454 Atkins, John A., 1 501 Atkinson, Brooks, 1548, 4907 ed., 300, 591 Atlanta, Ga., 3838, 4704 Atlantic cable, 4677 Atlantic coastal plain, 2933 The Atlantic Monthly, 368, 449, 706, 964,2555,2922 Atlantic seaboard. See Eastern sea- board Atlases and maps, 3786, 4486 climate, 2952 historical geography, 2967, 2972, 2974 language, 2268-69 Atomic energy hist., 4747 in literature, 1992, 2682 Atomic physics, 4722 Atomic warfare, 3621, 3629 The Attack on Leviathan, 3781 Attitudes Toward History, 2387 Attorney General's Committee on Ad- ministrative Procedure, 6316 Atwood, E. Bagby, 2263 Atwood, Wallace W., 2933, 4172 Auchincloss, Louis, 1909-13 Auden, W. H., 2512 ed., 537, 1003 about, 2378, 2426 Audiences motion picture, 4895, 4959 radio, 4700-3, 4895 television, 4699, 4702-4, 4895 Audio-visual methods in education, 5231,5246 Audubon, John James, 4743-44 about, 2210, 2624, 4724, 4734, 4741, 4743 Augur, Helen, 3154 August, John, pseud. See De Voto, Bernard A. Augusta, Ga., 3839 Augusta, Maine, 3793-94 Augustana College, Rock Island, 111., about, 4483 Aumann, Francis R., 6219 Aurora, 141 Aurora Dawn, 2229 The Auroras of Autumn, 1784 Austin, Mary (Hunter), 1196-98 about, 1 196 Austin, Moses, 3314 about, 3314 Austin, Samuel, ed., 28 Austin, Stephen Fuller, 3314 about, 3314 Australia, relations with, 3556 Australian ballot, 6400 Austria in literature, 1245 Austrians, 4414 Ausiibel, Nathan, tr., 1191 The Author of Beltraffio, 1007 Author-publisher relations, 6449-50 Authors and authorship, 2371, 2373, 2391, 2405, 3746, 3757 biog. (collected), 2433, 2454-55, 2526 dictionaries, 2433, 2454-55 radio & television, 4697 Calif., 2536 Southwest, 2525 Authors as journalists (1764-1819), 109, 134, 141, 154-60 (1820-70), 190, 192, 209, 216, 280, 313, 319. 365, 422. 445. 449. 463. 520, 546, 556, 558-59, 585, 612, 619, 655, 657, 662, 674, 677, 2278-79, 2294 (1871-1914), 701, 704, 732, 768, 836, 862, 878-80, 887, 910, 926, 942, 959, 964, 1048, 1 107, 1 126, 1136,2479,2923 (1915-39), 1214, 1409, 1602-5, 1809, 1859, 2398, 2503 (1940-55), 1992, 2017, 2029, 2057, 2133, 2139, 2149 Authors Today and Yesterday, 2455 Authorship in the South before the War, 1 103-4 Autobiography. See Biography and autobiography; Biography, col- lected The Autobiography of Alice B. Tobias, 1771 The Autobiography of an Idea, 5715 The Autocrat of the Br eahjast -Table, 371-74 Automation, 6003 Automobile industry, 4138, 5940 finance, 5963 workers, 6055 Automobile motoring, 5002, 5005 Automobile racing, 5001, 5003-7 Automobile Workers' Union, about, 6039 Automobiles, 4519, 5005 Automotive transportation, 5942 AutresTemps, 1851, 1855 Autumn, 1635 The Autumn Garden, 1991, 2335 Averill, Gerald, 2590 about, 2590 Avery, Clara Louise, 5784 Aviation. See Aeronautics Avon's Harvest, 1714 Awake and Sing!, 2064, 2348 Award (law). See Arbitration and award (law) Axel's Castle, 2535 Axt, Richard G., 5165 Ayars, Christine Merrick, 5628 Aydelotte, Frank, 5178 Ayer (N. W.) & Son, Inc., about, 5958 Ayers, Lucille, 2258 Ayres, C. E., 2407 Azalia, 920 Aztec culture, 2997 B The B. O. W. S., 4919 B.P.O.E. See Elks, Benevolent and Protective Order of Babbitt, Irving, 2375, 241 1, 2425, 51 15, 5259 about, 2375, 2479 Babbitt, 1 561 Babcock, Kendric Charles, 4482 Babes in Toyland (operetta), about, 5681 Baby Doll, 2220 Bach, George Leland, 5983 Bach Choir, Bethlehem, Pa., about, 2667 Bachman, George W., 4862 Back Home, 2736 Back-trailers from the Middle Border, 898-99 Background to Glory, 3239 Background in Tennessee, 1743 Backgrounds of American Literary Thought, 2441 Backlund, Jonah Oscar, 2895 A Backward Glance O'er Travel'd Roads, 626-27 Backwoods to Border, 5507 Bacon, Eugene H, 3643 Bacon's Rebellion, fiction, 226 Bacteriology, 4722, 4831 Bad Lands, 2683 The Bad Seed, 1177 Bade, William F., ed., 1079, 1081-82 Badger, Kingsbury M., 2319 Baehr, Harry W., 2868 Baer, Julius B., 5952 Bagby, Ellen M., ed., 193 Bagby, George Williams, 192-93 Bailey, James O., 2377 Bailey, Joseph Cannon, 5851 Bailey, Liberty Hyde, about, 2790 Bailey, Robeson, ed., 5071 Bailey, Thomas A., 3471, 3517, 3560 Bainbridge, John, 2920, 4952 Bainton, Roland H, 5423 INDEX / IO97 Baird, Lucy Hunter, 4744 Baird, Spencer Fullerton, about, 4724, 4744, 4775 Bakeless, John E., 3155, 3239-40, 3299 Baker, Carlos H., 1502 ed., 2355 Baker, Elizabeth (Faulkner), 6455 Baker, Franklin T., ed., 373 Baker, George Pierce, about, 4940 Baker, Gladys, 5852 Baker, Harry J., 5207 Baker, Melvin C., 5120 Baker, Newton D., about, 3713 Baker, Oliver E., 4579, 5816 Baker, Ray Stannard, 2591-96, 3470- 71 ed., 3469 about, 2592-96, 6432 Baker, Richard Terrill, 2910 Bakewell, C. M., 5252, 5332 Balboa, Vasco Nunez de, about, 3167 Balboa Park (San Diego, Calif.), guide- book, 3932 Balcony Stories , 1034-35 Bald, Frederick Clever, 4137 Balderston, J. L., 2332 Baldwin, Hanson W., 3615, 3618, 3646 Baldwin, James, 1914-15 Baldwin, James Mark, about, 5262 Baldwin, Joseph Glover, 194-97, 2296 Baldwin, Leland D., 3103, 3280, 4061, 4110 Balfour, Walter, 5428 Balkans, relations with, 3516 The Ballad of the Sad Cafe, 2024 Ballads. See Folksongs and ballads; Songs Ballads for Sale, 1584 Ballads of Square-Toed Americans, 1 295 Ballanta, Nicholas, 5540 Ballantine, Joseph W., 3589 Ballet, 4967, 4969-71, 5656-57 Ballot, 6400 Ballou, Hosea, 5428, 5473 about, 5473 Baltimore, Lord, about, 5396, 5419 Baltimore editorials, sketches, etc., 1602 hist., 4062 law, 6284, 6291 public health, 4867 soc. life & cust., 4062, 4263 Balz, A. G. A., 5289 Bamberger, B. J., 4458 Bancroft, Frederic, 3359 Bancroft, George, about, 2462, 3057- 58, 3060, 3776 Bancroft, Hubert Howe, about, 3048 Band of Angels, 2201 Bandler, Bernard, II, 2425 Bands (music), 5653 Bank of the U.S. first, 4059, 6000 second, 3126, 5999-6000 Bank Street Schools, New York (City), 5234 The Banker's Daughter, 2307 Bankhead, Tallulah, 4928 about, 4928 The Bankrupt, 2300 Banks and banking, 5972, 5974-75, 5983, 5986, 6002 hist., 5979, 5988, 6000 Boston, 5984 Chicago, 5985 New York (City), 5993 Banner by the Wayside, 1 158 Banners, 2413 Banning, George Hugh, 5931 Banning, William, 5931 Banta, Richard E., 4003 Baptists, 5404, 5442 hist., 5413, 5443 Bar associations, hist., 6325 Barba, Preston A., 2266 The Barbary Coast, 2586 Barbary Shore, 2027 Barbary States, relations with, 3686 Barbash, Jack, 4672, 6031 Barbella, Rocco. See Graziano, Rocky Barber, Hollis W., 3619 Barber, Rowland, 5028 Barber, Samuel, about, 5674 Barck, Oscar Theodore, 3452 Bardeche, Maurice, 4944 Barefoot in Athens, 1176 Barger, Harold, 5819. 5907, 5920, 5944 Barghoorn, Frederick Charles, 3561 Baring Brothers and Company, hist., 5980 Barker, Charles A., 4535 Barker, Eugene C, 3314 ed., 3314 Barker, Howard F., 4390 Barker, James Nelson, 66, 198-200, 2337. 2347 about, 198 Barker, Shirley Frances, 1916-20 Barker, Virgil, 5742 Barkley, Alben W., 2597-98, 2892 about, 2598 Barlow, Joel, 10 1-4 about, 10 1 The Barly Fields, 1637 Barnard, Charles, 2314 Barnard, Ellsworth, 1717 Barnard, Harry, 3418-19 Barnard, Henry, about, 51 16, 5128 Barnes, A. C, 5290 Barnes, Al G., about. 4982 Barnes, Eric W., 4927 Barnes, Gilbert Hobbs, 3360 Barnes, Harry Elmer, 4540, 4617, 4639 Barnes, Walter, ed., 765 Barnett, James H., 4546 Barnouw, Erik, 4684 Barns, 5724 Barnum, Phineas T., 4977 about, 2617, 2797, 4977 Baron, Salo W., ed., 5267 Baron Rudolph, 2307 Barr, Alfred H., ed., 5689, 5797 Barrell, Joseph, 4715 Barren Ground, 1460-61 Barrett, Clifford, 5252 ed., 5252 Barrett, Edward L., Jr., 61 10-1 1 Barrett, J.Lee, 5016 Barrett, James Wyman, 2889 The Barretts of Wimpole Street, 4919 Barrow, Edward G., 5008 about, 5008 Barrow, Joseph Louis. See Louis, Joe Barrus, Clara, 2624 Barry, David W., 4702 Barry, Philip, 1199-1203, 2332-34, 2337. 2348 Barry, Phillips, 5566-67 Barrymore, Ethel, 4929 about, 4929 Barrymore, John, about, 4933 Barrymore, Lionel, 4933 about, 4933 Barrymore-Drew family, about, 4929 Barth, A., 4513 Bartlert, Arthur C, 5009 Bartlett, John R., 6447 ed., 89 Bartlett, Ruhl J., ed., 3518 Barton, R. O, 2364 Barton, William, 4758 Bartram, John, 4237-38 about, 4236, 4247, 4745 Bartram, William, 4247-50 about, 4247, 4745 Barzun, Jacques, 5213, 5615 Baseball, 4987, 4990, 4993, 5008-15 short stories, 1554-55 Basler, Roy P., 3395 ed., 420, 3390, 3395 . Bassert, John Spencer, 3057, 3315, 33 1 8 ed., 14, 3318 Bassett, T. D. Seymour, 3753 Basso, Hamilton, 2406 Bataan in literature, 1992 Bateman, Mrs. Sidney F., 2347 Bates, Ernest Sutherland, 2884, 6151 Bates, Ralph S., 4713 Bates, Sanford, 4640 Bathe, Dorothy, 4795 Bathe, Greville, 4795 Battistini, Lawrence H., 3590-91 Battle, John J., 5278 The Battle Ground, 1461 The Battle of Bunker-Hill, 105, 2347 The Battle of Stillwater, 231 1 Battle of the Bulge, 3720 The Battle of the Kegs, 148 Battle-Pieces and Aspects of the War, 488 Battles. See Campaigns and battles under names of wars, e.g., Ameri- can Revolution — campaigns and battles; Civil War — campaigns and battles Battles in art, 5807 Baudelaire, Charles, about, 520 Bauer, G. Philip, 5763 Bauer, Louis Hopewell, 4882 Baum, P. F., ed., 1046 Baumgarten, Eduard, 5254 Baumhoff, Richard G., 4145 Baur, John I. H., 5688, 5745, 5762 Bawden, Henry Heath, 5254 Baxter, James Phinncy, 4761, 6130 Bay Psalm Book, 6448 Bayley, Frank W., ed., 5690 Bayou Folk, 760 Bayou V Ombre, 1033 Beach, Joseph Warren, 988, 1016, 2376 Beach, Lewis, 2332 IO98 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Beach, Moses S., about, 2874 Beach, William D., 3651 Beachheads in Space, 1959 Beacon of Freedom, 3778 Beadle and Adams (firm), 2444 Beale, Howard K., 3065, 3361, 3527, 5132-33 ed., 3046 Beall, Otho T., 40, 4826 Bean, Louis H., 5837, 6412-13 Bear, Donald, 5748 Beard, Charles A., 3046, 3065, 3073, 3479. 3750, 4499. 5106, 6082, 6247, 6250 about, 2407, 3046, 4545 Beard, Mary R., 3073, 3479, 3750 Beasley, Norman, 5452-53 The Beast in the Jungle, 1007, 1012, 1014 The Beast in View, 2106 Beatty, E. C. O., 3058 Beatty, Richmond Croom, ed., 2320, 2324 Beauchamp murder case, 365, 550 Beaufort, S.C., 3835 Beaumont, William, about, 4818, 4822 Beaumont, Tex., 3918 Beaumont de La Bonniniere, Gustave Auguste de, about, 4512 Beauregard, P. G. T., about, 2613 The Beautiful and Damned, 1427 The Beautiful Changes, 2216 The Beautiful People, 21 13 Beaver, Joseph, 649 Beavers, 2961 Beck, Earl Clifton, 5567 Becker, Carl L., 4540, 5191, 5222 Beckhart, Benjamin Haggott, 5993 Beckman, Theodore N., 5945, 5949 Beckwith, Martha Warren, 5504 Becky Sharp, 23 1 3 A Bed of Boughs, 741 Bedford Springs, Pa., 4312 Beebe, Lucius M., 4153 Beech Mountain, N.C., folklore, 5529 See also North Carolina — folklore Beecher, Henry Ward, 1137 about, 2797, 3413, 5428, 5476 Beecher, Lyman, about, 2797, 5395, 5403 Beer, George Louis, about, 3058 Beers, Clifford Whittingham, 4834 about, 4834 Beers, Henry A., 682 Before Barbed Wire, 4152-53 Before Breakjast, 1648 Before the Gringo Came, 725 Beggar on Horseback, 2332 The Beginning of a Mortal, 2748 The Beginning of Wisdom, 1222 Behaviorism, 4545, 5389, 5393 Behold Our Green Mansions, 5863 Behrman, Samuel Nathaniel, 1204-13. 2327, 2332-33, 2348 about, 1 2 13 Beiman, Irving, 6207 Being a Boy, 1 139-41 Beirne, Francis F., 3687, 4062 Belasco, David, 2314-15, 2337, 2347- 48 about, 4943 Belden, Henry Marvin, ed., 5568 Belfrage, Gustaf Wilhelm, about, 4734 Belgium, travel & travelers, 426 Belief and doubt (philosophy), 5323, 5370 Belknap, Jeremy, about, 3057 Bell, Alexander Graham, about, 4675, 4678-79 Bell, Bernard I., 5232 Bell, Herbert C. F., 3470 Bell, Whitfield J., 4714 Bell, Book,, and Candle, 2335 A Bell for Adano, 1994 Bell-founding, 5628 Bell Telephone System, 4673 Bellamy, Edward, 726-31 about, 726, 2517, 6424 Bellamy, Gladys C, 815 Bellamy, Joseph, about, 5428 La Belle Russe, 2315 La Belle Sauvage, 199 Belles Demoiselles Plantation, 748 Bellevue, Nebr., 3902 Bellevue Hospital Medical College, New York, about, 4831 Bellow, Saul, 1921-22 The Beloved Adventure, 1858 Bemis, James, about, 6446 Bemis, Samuel Flagg, 3313, 3520-21, 3528-29,3574 ed., 3519 Benchley, Nathaniel, 1221 Benchley, Robert Charles, 1214-20 about, 1 22 1 Benedict, Clare, ed., 1 152 Benedict, Murray R., 5853-55 Benet, Rosemary Carr, ed., 1222 Benet, Stephen Vincent, 1222-24, 1904 ed., 3969, 3975, 3978-95 about, 1908 Benet, William Rose, 1904 ed., 1903, 2321 Benford, Robert T., music arr. by, 5590 Benham, Mrs. Miles, 5647 Benians, E. A., ed., 3179 Benjamin, Florence O., 4057 Benjamin, Judah P., about, 2613, 3396 Benjamin, Marcus, 4049, 4724 Benjamin, Park, 2295 Bennett, Clarence, 2305 Bennett, Hugh H, 2947, 5808 Bennett, James Gordon (1795-1872), 2848 about, 2877 Bennett, James Gordon (1841-1918), about, 2848, 2872, 2877 Bennett, John C, 5899 about, 5433 Bennett, Mildred R., 1279 Bennington College, hist., 5198 Benson, Adolph B., 4246, 4357, 4483 Benson, Egbert, about, 6224 Benson, Louis F., 5633 Benson, Mary Sumner, 4524 Bent, Newell, 5058 The Bent Twig, 141 2 Bentley, Arthur F., 5286 Bentley, Eric R., 4908 Bentley, Harold W., 2264, 4999 Bentley, William, 2599-2600 about, 2600 Benton, Elbert J., 3530 Benton, Thomas Hart, 3322 about, 2793, 3321-22, 5783 Berding, Andrew H., 3546 Berelson, Bernard, 6414, 6419, 6477 ed., 6485 Berger, Arthur V., 5675 Berger, Josef, 3801 Berger, Max, 4224 Berger, Meyer, 2869 Bergmann, Leola M. (Nelson), 5664 Bergson, Henri, about, 5326, 5368 Beringause, Arthur F., 2601 Berkeley Square, 2332 Berkshire Hills, Mass., 3799 Beowulf, translation, 1556 Berenice, 2101 Berkhof, Louis, about, 5433 Berkson, I. B., 4457 Berlandier, Jean Louis, about, 4734 Berle, Adolf A., 6011-12 Berle, AlfK., 4781 Berlin, Irving, about, 5639 Bernard, Francis, about, 3257 Bernard, Jessie, 4536 Bernard, Luther L., 4536 Bernard, William B., 518 Bernard, William S., ed., 4418 Bernard Clare, 1376 Bernardo, C. Joseph, 3643 Bernhard Karl, duke of Saxe-Weimar- Eisenach, 4297-99 about, 4297 Bernstein, Mel, illus., 3081 Berrey, Lester V., 2272 Berry, Robert Elton, 4746 Berry, W. E., 5442 Berryman, John, 821, 1923-24, 2285 Berson, Robert C, 4861 BerthofT, Rowland Tappan, 4488 Bertsch, Carl W., illus., 3170 Best, Harry, 4628-29 Best, Katharine, 5059 The Best of Two Worlds, 2453 Beston, Henry, 3979 Bestor, Arthur E., 4525, 5233 Bestsellers, 2402, 2482, 6443, 6449 See also Popular books Bethlehem, Pa., Bach Choir, 5667 Bethlehem Steel, 5918 Bethune, Mary McLeod, 5426 about, 5426 The Betrothal, 207-8 Bettmann, Otto, 4986 Between the Thunder and the Sun, 2807 Between Two Worlds, 1758 Beulah Land, 13 14 Beveridge, Albert J., 6237 about, 3058, 3453 Beverley-Giddings, Arthur R., ed., 5079 Beyond Dark, Hills, 2166 Beyond Life, 1 262 Beyond the Horizon, 1648, 2337 Beyond the Hundredth Meridian, 2161 Beyond the Mountains, 2098-210 1 Bianca Visconti, 2337 Bianchi, Martha (Dickinson), ed., 842 Bible (English) fiction, 1 1 90 influence on literature, 118, 505, 619 INDEX / IO99 Bibliography, 3773, 6447, 6460 See also Books — and reading; Rare books; and also under specific subjects, e.g., Education — bibl. Bickel, Alexander M., 6248 The Bicycle Rider in Beverly Hills, 21 21 Biddle, George, about, 5783 Biddle, Nicholas, about, 3126 Bidwell, Percy Wells, 5820 Bierce, Ambrose (Gwinnett), 732-39 about, 520, 732, 738, 926, 2380 Bierring, Walter L., 4807 The Big Bear of Arkansas, 613 The Big Bonanza, 23 1 7 Big Bone Lick, 4336 Big Boy Leaves Home, 2234 The Big Cage, 2014 Big Fiddle, 1246 The Big Knife, 2067 The Big Money, 1325, 1328 The Big Rock. Candy Mountain, 2162 The Big Sea, 1 522 The Big Sky, 1489 Bigelow, John, ed., 125, 132 Bigelow, Melville M., ed., 6100 Biggar, Henry P., 3169 ed.,3156 Biggs, Hermann M., about, 4868 The Biglow Papers, 456-57 Bikle, Lucy Leffingwell (Cable), 747, 751 Bilingualism, 2267 Bill Arp: From the Uncivil War to Date, 556 Bill Arp, So Called, 557 Bill of Rights, 6106, 6108, 6121, 6127 Billings, John Shaw, about, 4403, 4819, 4845, 6476 Billings, Josh, pseud. See Shaw, Henry Wheeler Billington, Ray Allen, 3074, 4146, 4515 Billy Budd, 487, 496, 2335 Billy the Kid, 2305 Bingham, George Caleb, about, 5761 Bingham, Millicent (Todd), 851-53 ed.,843 Binkley, Wilfred E., 6132-33, 6140, 6347 Binns, Archie, 4930 Biography, a Comedy, 1205 Biography (collected), 2682, 2774, 3072, 3080, 3099, 3145, 3198 bibl., 3080, 3101-2 dictionaries, 3080, 4049 See also under particular subjects, e.g., Civil War — biog. (collected) Biography and autobiography, 2578- 2844 Biracial education, 5206 Bird, George L., ed., 2927 Bird, Robert Montgomery, 201-5, 2 3°9. 2337 about, 205 Birds, 2956, 2960, 2962, 4247, 4741, 4743 game, 5077, 5091 in literature, 4741, 5535 protection, 4741 Birge, Edward Bailey, 5668 Birmingham, Ala., politics, 6207 Birney, James Gillespie, 3360 about, 3375, 3413 Birth, 1454 Birth of a World, 1445 Birthright, 1792 Bishop, Cortlandt F., 6401 Bishop, Elizabeth, 1925-26 about, 2426 Bishop, Farnham, 4796 Bishop, John Peale, 1225-27, 2406 ed., 2354 about, 1227 Bishop, Joseph Bucklin, 4796 Bishop, Morris, 3156 The Bishop's Wife, 1 637 Bisland, Elizabeth. See Wetmore, Elizabeth (Bisland) Bison, 2799 Bissell, Richard P., 4019 Bitter Creek, 1239 Bittinger, D. W., 5442 Bixler, J. S., 5335~36 Bixler, Paul, ed., 2554 Bjorka, Knute, 5869 Black, C. E., 3562 Black, John Donald, 5839-40 Black, Theodore Milton, 6348 Black April, 1654 Black Armour, 1903 Black Boy, 2232 The Black Cat, 529 Black Hawk (Sauk chief), about, 2645 Black Hills, S.D. Custer State Park, 3898 Mount Rushmore National Memorial, 5737 Black I s My Truelove's Hair, 1705 Black Jews, 5498 The Black Man, 2303 The Black Panther, 1858 The Black Riders, 835 The Black Rock, 1433 Black Spring, 161 1 Blackfeet Indians, tales, 3000 Blackford, Launcelot Minor, 2602-3 Blackford, Mary, about, 2603 Blackmur, Richard Palmer, 1001, 1004, 1228-35, 2443, 3768 Blackwell, Elizabeth, about, 4820 Blaine, James Gillespie, about, 2616, 3442, 6373 Blair, Francis Preston, about, 3410 Blair, Frank P., about, 3410 Blair, James, about, 5396 Blair, Montgomery, about, 3382, 3410 Blair, Walter, 5505-6 ed., 2323 Blair family, 3410 Blake, Aldrich, 6341 Blake, Florence G., about, 4854 Blake, Forrester, ed., 5530 Blake, Harrison G. O., ed., 599 Blake, Nelson Manfred, 3452, 4797 Blake, William, about, 2128 Blakeslee, G. H., 3562 Blakey, Roy G., 5970 Blanchard, Dorothy C. A., 4038 Blanchard, Ralph H., 5990 Blanchard, Thomas, about, 4786 Bland, Richard, about, 6068 Blanshard, Brand, ed., 5335 Blanshard, Paul, 5444 Blau, Joseph L., 5253 ed., 3319, 5261, 5418 Bledsoe, Thomas A., ed., 895 Blegen, Theodore C, 4141-42, 4484 ed., 4143, 4485 Blesh, Rudi, 5641 Blind education of, 4628 law & legislation, 4628 libraries for, 4636 rehabilitation, etc., 4628, 4636 Blind, 1656 The Blind Bow-Boy, 1 829 The Blithedale Romance, 333 Bloch, Bernard, ed., 2268 Bloch, Julia, 2268 Blodgett, Harold W., 648 ed., 644, 2276 Blondel de Nesle, about, 2186 Blood Lines, 5066 Bloodstoppers & Bcarwalkers, 5533 The Bloody Tenent Yet More Bloody, 89 Bloom, Leonard, 4469 The Bloudy Tenent, of Persecution, for Cause of Conscience, 20, 86, 89 The Bloudy Tenent Washed and Made White in the Blond of the Lambe, 20,86 Blough, Roy, 5965 Blue books (society), 4534 The Blue-Grass Region of Kentucky, 717 The Blue Hotel, 824 Blue Ridge Mountains descr., 3963 folksongs 8c ballads, 5582 Blue Voyage, 1 1 62 Blum, Daniel C, 4899, 4931, 4946 ed., 4906 Blum, John Morton, 3466 ed., 3465 The Boarding Schools, 2302 Boardman, F. W., Jr., 5197 Boas, Franz, ed., 3042 about, 2407 Boas, George, 5291 ed., 3751 Boas, Louise S., 3178 Boas, Ralph P., 3178, 3751 Boatmen, French-Canadian, 3170 Boatright, Mody C, 5520 ed., 5507-9. 55i8, 5521 Boats and boating, 4110, 5016-22 Bode, Boyd H., 5234, 5254, 5336 Bode, Carl, ed., 598, 607, 2339 Bodmer, Charles paintings by, 3330 about, 4307 Body, Boots &■ Britches, 5548 The Body of Liberties, 75, 78 Body of This Death, 1237 Boerker, Richard H. D., 5863 Bogan, Louise, 1236-38, 2357 Bogart, Ernest Ludlow, 4131-32 Bogart, Leo, 4699 Bogue, Donald J., 4393 Bogue, Jesse P., 5162 1 100 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Bohemianism hist., 3757 in literature, 732, 1828 Bok, Curtis, 6130 Bok, Edward William, 2604-5 about, 2605 Boker, George Henry, 206-8, 2300, _ 2337, 2347 Bolivar, Simon, about, 1445 Boll, Jacob, about, 4734 Bolton, Charles Knowles, 3679 ed., 6149 Bolton, Ethel (Stanwood), 5593 Bolton, Herbert E., 3075, 3157-58 ed., 3203, 4202 Bolton, Isabel, pseud. See Miller, Mary Britton Bolton, Theodore, 5759 Bolts of Melody, 843, 846 The Bomb that Fell on America, 2682 The Bombardment of Algiers, 2310 The Bonanza Trail, 4177 Bonaparte, Napoleon. See Napoleon I Bonaventure, 745 Bonbright, James C, 6013 Bond, Beverly W., Jr., 41 n, 41 21 Bond, Horace M., 4443, 5206 Bond, Thomas, about, 4850 Bone, Hugh A., 6349 Bonfils, Frederick Gilmer, about, 2878 Bonifacius, 45 Bonner, S., 2296 The Bonney Family, 1798 Bontecou, Eleanor, 61 10, 61 12 Boodin, J. E., 5252 Book, F., 2364 Boo\ of Moments, 2387 Book^ of Mormon, 5465 Book-of-the-Month Club, 6463 Boo\ of Uncles, 1294 Book reviews (literary). See Criti- cism, literary — essays; Literature — periodicals Books and reading, 14, 40, 171, 177, 2407, 2418, 2482, 2549, 3751, 6443, 6454, 6477, 6481-82 teaching methods, 5127, 5226 Ariz., 4199 Boston, 6475 Charleston, 3763 New York (City), 6468 Southwest, New, 4190 banned, 1932 clubs, 6435, 6437-38, 6440-41, 6463 collectors & collecting, 6440, 6460- 62, 6464-65 illustration, 2391 industries & trade, 6435-36, 6441, 6445, 6448 popular. See Popular books Boolis That Changed Our Minds, 2407 Booksellers and bookselling, 2391, 6435-38, 6440-41, 6444, 6447, 6462-64 New England, 3745 Boom towns, 772-74 Boon Island, 1 7 1 2 Boone, Daniel, about, 310, 1873, 3240 Booth, Bradford Allen, ed., 4377 Booth, Catherine, about, 5497 Booth, Edwin, about, 4938 Booth, William ("General") about, 5497 poetry, 1581 Booth family, 4938 Boothe, Clare, 2327, 2333 Borchard, Edwin M., 6294 Borglum, Gutzon, about, 5737 Boring, E. G., 3758 Born, Wolfgang, 5743-44 Born Yesterday, 2334 Borome, Joseph Alfred, 6476 Borsodi, Ralph, 4579 The Boss, 2337 Bossard, James H. S., 4559 Bossing, Nelson L., 5225 Boston booksellers, Colonial, 6436 concerts, 5649 culture, 4518 descr., 1437, 4258, 4315, 4334 econ. condit., Colonial period, 4602 essays, 979, 1002-3 fiction, 726, 967-70, 982, 992-95, 1004, 1008 foreign population, 4410 govt., 6207 guidebook, 3800 harbor, 3800 hist., 3800, 4036, 5481 law, 6292 libraries, 6475 music, 5648-49, 5672 industries, 5628 photographs, 1437 siege (1775-76), 3245 soc. condit. (1880-1900), 4530 soc. life & cust., 4035, 4239, 4261, 4602 Boston, First National Bank, hist., 5984 Boston. Museum of Fine Arts, 5745 Boston. Public Library, hist., 6475 Boston Academy of Music, about, 5684 Boston Adventure, 2157 Boston Athenaeum, 6475 about, 6475 Boston Psychopathic Hospital, about, Boston Symphony Orchestra, hist., 5648-49 The Boston Transcript, about, 2870 The Eostonians, 992-95 Bostwick, Arthur E., ed., 6476 Boswell, Peyton, 5748 Botany, 2788, 2957, 4219, 4236, 4715, 4760 Both Your Houses, 1 1 72 Botkin, Benjamin A., 4068, 5570, ed., 5510-12, 5515, 5522-26 , Boucher, Chauncey S., 5178 Boucicault, Dion, 2298, 2337 Boulding, Kenneth E., 5899 Bound East for Cardiff, 1648 Boundaries, 2970, 2974, 3351, 3540, 3553-55.3569 Bourget, Paul Charles Joseph, 4387-89 about, 4387 Bourjaily, Vance, about, 2371 Bourke-White, Margaret, photographs, 5447 Bourne, Edward Gaylord, ed., 3215 Bourne, Randolph about, 2380 fiction, 2413 Bowditch, Nathaniel, about, 4746 Bowen, Catherine (Drinker), 2606-8 Bowen, Francis, tr., 4511-12 Bowen, Howard, 5899 Bowen, Trevor, 5500 Bowers, Claude G., 3281, 3320, 3362 Bovvers, David F., ed., 3768 The Bowery in literature, 1002—3 Bowes, Frederick P., 3763 Bowker, Richard Rogers, 6435 Bowles, Ella (Shannon), 4032 Bowles, Paul Frederic, 1927-31 about, 2371 Bowles, Samuel, 4384 about, 2614, 2879, 4383 Bowman, Isaiah, 2934 about, 2941 Boxing, 4987, 5023-33 biog. (collected), 5025 heavyweight, 4991, 5026 Negroes, 5025 television, 5033 Boy Meets Girl, 2327, 2333 Boyd, Anne Morris, 6138 Boyd, Ernest, 241 1 Boyd, James, 1239-41 Boyd, Julian P., 6073 ed., 3292 Boyle, Kay, 1242-51 Boynton, Henry Walcott, 6436 Boynton, Percy, 780 The Boys in the Bac\ Room, 2536 A Boy's Town, 982 A Boy's Will, 1452 Bracebridge Hall, 388-89 Bracke, William B., 3944 Brackenridge, Henry Marie, 2609-10 Brackenridge, Hugh Henry, 105-8, 2347 Bradbrook, M. C, 1367 Bradbury, Ray, 1932-36 Braddy, Haldeen, 539 Braden, Charles S., 5439 Bradfield, H. J. S., tr. & ed., 4296 Bradford, Andrew, about, 2880 Bradford, Cornelia, about, 2880 Bradford, Gamaliel, 261 1-19 Bradford, Thomas Gamaliel, tr., 4314 Bradford, William, 1-6, 3204 Bradley, A. G., ed., 71 Bradley, Francis W., 2258, 2260 Bradley, Omar N, 3718 Bradley, Phillips, ed., 4512 Bradley, Sculley, 630 ed., 206, 628, 2324 Bradstreet, Anne (Dudley), 7-1 1 about, 79, 368, 3198 Brady, Mathew B. illus., 829 about, 821 Brain surgery, 4821 Branch, Edgar M., 816 Branch, Edward Douglas, 4516 Brandeis, Elizabeth, 6033 Brandeis, Louis Dembitz, 6247-48 about, 6246-48, 6266 INDEX / IIOI Branden, Paul Maerker, 4891 Brandt, Lilian, 4623 Brandwein, Peter, ed., 4984 Brandywine Creek, 2394, 3981 Brant, Irving, 3282 Brasillach, Robert, 4944 Brassware, antique, 5787 Braun, F. X., 4481 Brave Men, 2745 A Bravery of Earth, 1351 Brawley, Benjamin, ed., 860 Brazer, Esther (Stevens), 5726 Brazil, relations with, 3582 Brazos River, Tex., folklore, 5527 Bread out of Stone, 1531 The Bread-Winners, 941 Break, the Heart's Anger, 1968 Breakers and Granite, 1433 Breathe upon These Slain, 1743 Brebner, John B., 3159, 3552, 4473 Bredemeier, Harry C, 4550 Bremer, Fredrika, 4355-57 about, 4354 Brent, Charles H., about, 5457 Bretall, Robert W., ed., 5432-33 Bretnor, Reginald, ed., 2377 Brett, G. S., 5335 Brett, William Howard, about, 6476 Bretz, Rudy, 4697 Brevoort, Henry, about, 392 Brewer, Daniel Chauncey, 4026 Brewer, John Mason, 5527 Brewsie and Willie, 1770 Brewster, Paul G., 5585 ed., 5571 Brewster, Stanley F., 6295 Brickell, Herschel, ed., 2351 Brickman, William W., ed., 5248 The Bride Comes to yellow Sky, 835 The Bride of the Innisfallen, 2209 The Bridegroom Cometh, 1448 The Bridegroom's Body, 1246 Bridenbaugh, Carl, 3764, 4517, 4601-2, 5704, 6044 ed., 4240 Bridenbaugh, Jessica, 3764 The Bridge (Crane), 1303-4 The Bridge (Poole), 1656 The Bridge of San Luis Rey, 1 867 The Bridge of Years, 2123 Bridger, Jim, about, 2831 Briggs, Arthur E., 650 Briggs, Harold E., 4147 Brigham, Clarence S., 2852, 6447 Bright, James R., 6003 Bright and Morning Star, 2234 Bright Center of Heaven, 2030 The Bright Doom, 1858 Bright fotirney, 1962 Brightman, Alvin C, ed., 6275 Brightman, Edgar S., 5252 about, 5259, 5433 The Brimming Cup, 141 4-1 5 Brimming Tide, 1724, 5087 Brink, Wellington, 5808 Brinley, George, about, 6460 Brinton, Clarence Crane, 3502 Brinton, Howard H., 5468 Brisco, Norris B., 5949 Brissenden, Paul F., 6045 Brissot de Warville, Jacques Pierre, 4258-60 about, 4258 British ballads. See Anglo-American folksongs and ballads British English, 2237, 2243, 2245 British immigrants, 4046, 4488 British relations with Illinois, 4133 Britishisms (language), 2272 Britt, George, 2913 Britten, Benjamin, 487 A Brittle Heaven, 2413 Broadax and Bayonet, 3663 Broadcasting. See Radio broadcasting; Television broadcasting Brockunier, Samuel Hugh, 3197 Brodbeck, May, 2358 Broder, Nathan, 5674 Broderick, Edwin B., 4688 Brodie, Fawn (McKay), 5464 The Broken Span, 1878 The Broker of Bogota, 205, 2337 Brokmeyer, Henry C, about, 5305 Bromfield, Louis, 3782, 4594 Bronx County, N. Y., Democratic Com- mittee, 6384 Brook, Alexander, 5800 Brook Farm, 280, 585, 2278-79, 2881, 5256 Brookings, Robert S., about, 2685 Brookings Institution, Washington, D.C., 3634 Brookings Institution, Washington, D.C. Institute for Government Re- search, 3038, 4762 Brookings Institution, Washington, D.C. International Studies Group, 3598 Brooklyn, 2703-4 foreign population, 4046 hist., 4046 soc. life & cust., 4263 Brooklyn Bridge, 4801 Brooklyn College, 632 Brooks, Charles F., 2953 Brooks, Cleanth, 1367, 2378-79 about, 1809 Brooks, Gwendolyn, 1937-39 Brooks, John Graham, 4225 Brooks, Phillips, about, 5457 Brooks, Robert C, 4499 Brooks, Stella B., 910 Brooks, Van Wyck, 1016, 2380-82, 241 1. 5773 ed., 2618-19, 3736 about, 2394, 2406, 2417, 2443, 5508 Brooks, William Keith, about, 4724 Broom, Leonard, 4469 Brophy, Arnold, 3643a Brother to Dragons, 2200 Brough, Kenneth J., 6478 Brougham, John, 2311 Broun, Heywood, 729 Broussard, James F., 2265 Brown, C. E., 5442 Brown, Charles Brockden, 109-117 about, 109, ii7j 2294, 2465, 2509 Brown, Charles H., 2901 ed., 657 Brown, Clarence A., comp., 2383 Brown, David Paul, 2347 Brown, Dee, 4158 Brown, Edward Killoran, 1280 Brown, Elmer E., 5152 Brown, Emily Clark, 6053 Brown, Ernest Francis, 2869 Brown, Esther L., 4800, 6317-18 Brown, Francis J., ed., 4426 Brown, George Rothwell, 4063 Brown, Gerald S., 3555 Brown, H., 4513 Brown, H. C, 5254, 5289 Brown, Herbert R., 2384 ed., 2352 Brown, J. Hammond, ed., 5065 Brown, John, about, 2617, 3149, 3414 poetry, 1222, 1224 Brown, John Crosby, 5979 Brown, John Mason, 4909 Brown, Josephine Chapin, 4630 Brown, Mark H., 4151-52 Brown, Milton W., 5746 Brown, Ralph H., 2968-69 Brown, Ralph Sharp, 6107 Brown, Ray A., 6271 Brown, Richard Lindley, 2425 Brown, Robert Eldon, 3046, 3241 Brown, Spenser, 2350 Brown, Stuart Gerry, ed., 5360-61 Brown, William Adams, 3636, 5953, 5993 Brown, William Norman, 3503 Brown Brothers and Company, 5979 The Brown Decades, 5695 Browne, Charles Albert, 4731, 4753, 5616 Browne, Charles Farrar, 209-15, 5524 about, 212, 557, 862, 2857 Browne, Sir Thomas, about, 2481 Brownell, Baker, ed., 4579 Brownell, Emery A., 6330 Brownell, Gertrude Hall, 2386 Brownell, William Crary, 2385-86, 241 1 about, 2513, 2504 Browning, Robert, about, 2545 Brownlow, Louis, 61 41 Brownstone Eclogues, 1 166 Bruce, Alfred W., 5926 Bruce. B. G., 5078 Bruce, H. R., 6336 Bruce, S. D., 5078 Bruce, William Cabell, 2620-21, 3187 Brucker, Herbert, 2928 Brumme, Carl Ludwig, 5733 Brunner, Edmund de S., 4406, 4581, 5485 Bruno, Frank J., 4618 Brutus, 2347 Bryan, Alice I., 6479 Bryan, George S., 4782 ed., 4977 Bryan, James E., 4817 Bryan, Leslie A., 5943 Bryan, Mina R., ed., 3292 Bryan, Patrick W., 2939 Bryan, Wilhelmus Bogart, 4064 Bryan, William A., 4835 Bryan, William Jennings, 6350 about, 3135, 3446-47. 3457. 543°. 6359 Bryan, Ohio, 3863 1 102 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Bryant, Billy, 4978 about, 4978 Bryant, William Cullen, 216-25, 2858 about, 223-24, 323, 2277, 2290, 2295, 2374, 2422, 2486, 2513, 2534, 2873 bibl., 224 Bryce, James Bryce, viscount, 3554, 4499 about, 4225 Bryson, Lyman, 5426 about, 5426 Buccaneers, 3168 Buchanan, Annabel (Morris), ed., 5549 Buchanan, James, about, 3399 Buchanan, Lamont, 5034 Buchanan County, Va., folksongs, 5582 Buchler, J., 5197, 5350 ed., 5348 Buck, Elizabeth Hawthorn, 4054 Buck, Paul Herman, 3083, 3363 Buck, Pearl (Sydenstricker), 1252-60 about, 1260 Buck, Solon J., 3420-21, 4054, 4127, 4132 The Buck, in the Snow, 1609 Bucke, Richard M., ed., 627, 637 Buckham, John Wright, ed., 5318 Buckingham, James Silk, 4329-33 Buckingham, Nash, 5066-69 The Bucktails, 517, 2337 Budget, Federal. See Government — appropriations & expenditure* Buechner, Frederick, about, 2371 Buehler, Alfred G., 5969 Buehrer, E. T., 5442 Buel, Elizabeth C. Barney, ed., 5793 Buffalo, N.Y., in art, 5762 Buffalo Bill's Wild West Show, 4979 Buffaloes, 2965, 4147, 4151, 4153 Buffington, A. G., 4479 Buffington, Albert F., 2266 Bugbee, Harold D., drawings. 4195, 5874 TheBmld-Vp, 1874,1882 Building materials, 5700, 5711-12, 5718 Buley, Roscoe Carlyle, 41 12, 4810 Bulfinch, Charles, about, 5720 Bull Run, 1st Battle (1861), 4378-81 The Bulwar\, 1343 Bunce, Oliver Bell, 2347 A Bunch of Keys, 2306 Bunche, Ralph J., 4446 Bundy, McGeorge, 3547 ed., 3543 Bunker-Hill, Battle of, drama, 105 Bunn, Charles, ed., 6281 Bunn, Charles Wilson, 6281 Bunner, H. C, 2467 Bunner Sisters, 1851, 1855 Buntline, Ned, pseud. See Judson, Edward Zane Carroll Bunyan, Paul, about, 5506, 5516, 5567 Burchfield, Charles, about, 5762 Burchfield, Laverne, 4580 Bureau of Chemistry and Soils, about, 4772 Bureau of Indian Affairs, about, 3038- 39 Bureau of Plant Industry, Soils, and Agricultural Engineering, about. 2947 Bureau of Soils, about, 2943, 2947 Bureau of the Budget, 3725 about, 6144 Bureau of the Census, 4400 Burgess, Ernest W., ed., 4441 Burgess, John William, about, 4540 Burgoyne's invasion (1777), 3682 fiction, 1709 A Buried Treasure, 1702 Burk, John N, 5648 Burke, Arvid J., 5098, 5144 Burke, Charles, 2347 Burke, Kenneth, 656, 2387-90 about, 2443 Burke, William J., 2391 Burke, Idaho, 4176 Burks, Arthur W., ed., 5346 Burlesque, 4976 Burlingame, Roger, 4783, 5939, 6449 Burlington, Iowa, guidebook, 3890 Burma, John H., 4470 Burma, World War II, 3726 Burnett, Edmund Cody, 3242 ed., 3242 Burnham, James, 3620 Burning City, 1224 The Burning Mountain, 1435 The Burning of Fairfield, 121 Burns, Edward McNall, 2622-23, 3283 Burns, Eveline M., 4631 Burns, James A., 5101-2 Burns, James MacGregor, 3496, 6134, 6152 Burns, John Home, 1940-43 about, 2371 Burns, Robert, about, 216, 662 Buros, Oscar K., 5229 Burr, Aaron, about, 1873, 2617, 2771, 3M9.3273 Burr, George Lincoln, ed., 41, 3205 Burr, William H, ed., 82 Burr Conspiracy (1805-7), 3273 Burr Oaks, 1351 Burrage, Henry S., ed., 3206 Burrage, Walter L., 4804 Burrell, John Angus, ed., 2325 Burroughs, Alan, 5747 Burroughs, John, 740-44, 2624-28 about, 2422, 2492, 2624, 2628 Burroughs, Julian, 744, 2628 Burstein, Abraham, tr., n 95 Burt, Alfred L., 3553 Burt, Maxwell Struthers, 3971 Burt, Struthers, 1 148 Burtis, Mary Elizabeth, 2646 Burton, Hal, 4603 Burtt, Edwin, 5289 Bury the Dead, 2145, 2333 Bus lines, 5942 Bus Stop, 1998 Busch, Francis X., 6296 Bush, Vannevar, 4778 about, 4803 Bushnell, Horace, about, 5428, 5436, .5476 Business, 3094, 6003-30 control, 6004 govt, regulation, 5885, 6006, 6099 Business — Continued hist., 6005, 6007, 6016 small, 6021 statistics, 6025 New York (City), 4047 Ohio, 41 21 Southern States, 4083 Tex., 4194 Business and education, 5116, 5168, 5181, 5190 Business cycles, 5922, 5968, 6015, 6025 Business education, 6017 Business ethics. See Social and busi- ness ethics Business management, 6009 Business research, 4777 Businessmen, 4387, 6010, 6023, 6027- 29 See also Capitalists and financiers But Gently Day, 1635 But Look, the Morn, 1543 But Not Forgotten, 4920 Butcher, Devereux, 5866 Butler, Benjamin Franklin, about, 2617 Butler, George D., 4997 Butler, Nicholas Murray, 2629-30, 3554 Butler, Pierce, 6483 Butler, Richard, 5375 Butler, Samuel, about, 165, 2480, 2504 Butler County, Pa., 3819 Butte, Mont. hist., 4176 politics, 6207 Butterfield, Lyman H., ed., 3292, 3313, 4830 Butterfield 8, 2074 Butterworth, Julian E., 5208 Butts, R. Freeman, 5103-4 By These Words, 3143 Byerly, Carl L., 5307 Byrd, Richard Evelyn, 2977-78 about, 2980 Byrd, William, 12-16, 2296 about, 16 Byrnes, James Francis, 3544 Byron, George Gordon Noel Byron, 6th baron, about, 216, 323, 458, 520, 2545 CIO. See Congress of Industrial Or- ganizations The Cabala, 1864 Cabbages and Kings, 1 1 1 2-1 3 Cabell, James Branch, 1261-69, 3980 about, 1268-69, 2406 Cabeza de Vaca, about, 3158 Cabinet officers, 3382-84, 6145, 6148 See also specific offices, e.g., Secre- taries of State; also names of in- cumbents, e.g., Dulles, John Foster Cable, George Washington, 745-52. 2296 about, 748, 751-52, 2366 Cabot, Henry B., 6292 Cabot, John, about, 3174, 3215 Cabot, Richard Clarke, about, 4805 Cabot, Sebastian, about, 3174 INDEX / I IO3 Cady, Edwin Harrison, 2392 ed., 2326 Caesar, Julius about, 5325 fiction, 1869 Caesars of the Wilderness, 3170 Cafe des Exiles, 748 Cahalane, Victor H., 2954 Cahill, Holger, 5594, 5602 ed., 5689 Cahn, Edmond N., 6261 Cain, James Mallahan, about, 2427, 2536 The Caine Mutiny, 2230 Cairo, 111., guidebook, 3876 Cajuns fiction, 745 language (dialects, etc.), 759-61 New Orleans, 410 1 short stories, 759-61 Calamity Jane, 4147 Calavar, 202 Calaynos, 207-8 Caldwell, Erskine, 1271-75, 2333, 2376, 2427 ed., 3942-68 about, 2508 Caldwell, June, 4176 Caldwell, Lynton K., 6170 Caldwell, S. L., ed., 89 A Calendar of Sin, 1746 Calhoun, Arthur W., 4560 Calhoun, John Caldwell, 2296, 3328 about, 3327-28 Calhoun, Robert, about, 5433 California, 3955, 3957, 4200-11 architecture, 5723 descr., 1073-74, 1077, 5082 drama, 21 10 fiction, 985, 1089-93, 1196, 1775, 1777, 2110, 2213 fishing, 5083 folklore, 5518 frontier & pioneer life, 3641, 3737 gold discoveries, 2659, 4201-2, 4351 govt., 6195 guidebooks, 3927-34 hist., 2658-59, 3943, 3959, 3974, 3998, 4189, 4200-4, 5354 Indians, 985, 3002, 3022-23 language (dialects, etc.), 2260 literature, 4202, 4204 music, 5630 natural hist., 1073-74, I0 77 Orientals, 4468 pictorial works, 4202 poetry, 1064, 1066-67, 1532 short stories, 725, 733-34, 739, 926, 2110 theater, hist., 4923 travel & travelers, 1073, 2753, 4345, 4351. 4372, 4378 California. Senate. Fact-Finding Com- mittee on Un-American Activities in California, 61 11 California Folklore Quarterly, 5518 California Youth Authority, 4644 The Call of the Wild, 1051-52 Callahan, Jennie (Waugh), 4685 Callahan, North, 3945 Callender, Clarence N., 6282 Calvinism, 5299, 5411, 5428 in literature, 17, 26, 40, 562 essays, 230—31 fiction, 333 poetry, 79-83 sermons, 24, 32, 59 Cambridge, Mass. in literature, 979 printing, Colonial, 6448 Cameron, Norman, 5336 Camino Real, 2226 Camp, Charles L., 4202 Camp, William Martin, 4208 Camp-meetings, 5407 Campaigns, political. See Political Cam- paigns Campaigns and battles. See under names of wars, e.g., American Revolution — campaigns & battles Campbell, Bartley, 2316 Campbell, Harry M., 1397 Campbell, John O, comp., 3634 Campbell, John W., Jr., 2377 Campbell, Killis, 526 ed., 527 Campbell, Laurence R., 2912 Campbell, Marjorie E., 4004 Campbell, Olive Dame, music by, 5583 Campbell, Persia C, 5954 Campbell, Roy, 1366 Campbell, Thomas (clergyman), about, 5455 Campbell, Thomas (poet), about, 323 Campbell, Walter Stanley. See Vestal, Stanley, pseud. Campbell, William Edward March, "77 Campbell, William V., comp., 5166 Camping on My Trail, 1553 Can Grande's Castle, 1584 Can Such Things Be?, 733-34, 739 Canada econ. relations with, 3638, 4052 fiction, 2162 relations with, 3272, 3552-55, 4473- 74 Canal Town, 1157 Canal Zone, 4218 Canals, 4312, 5928 See also Waterways, inland Canals, interoceanic, 4221 See also Panama Canal Canary, Martha Jane, about, 4147 Canby, Henry Seidel, 444, 817, 1017, 2394-98, 3981 ed., 605, 2398, 2460-61, 2557 Cancer research, 4722 The Candle in the Cabin, 1581 Canfield, Dorothy. See Fisher, Doro- thea Frances (Canfield) Canfield, William M., maps, 4053 Canham, Erwin D., 4513, 5427 about, 5427 Cannery Row, 1780 Cannon, Carl L., 6461 Cannon, Ida M., 4805 Canton Island, 4218 The Cantos, 1665 about, 1672, 1674 Cantwell, Robert, 2406 Canvassing for a Vote (painting), 5761 Canwcll Committee. See Washington (State) Legislature. Joint Fact- Finding Committee on Un-Ameri- can Activities Canzoni, 1666 Cape Cod fiction, 1640 fishing, 5083 Cape Cod, 596-97, 606 Cape Cod Pilot, 3801 Capers, Gerald M., Jr., 4105, 6207 Capital, U.S. at Philadelphia, 4059 See also Washington, D.C. Capital punishment, 239 Capitalism, 5882, 5887, 6007, 6357 fiction, 1334-37 hist., 3443, 3476, 5878 Capitalism and labor, 3439, 6094 Capitalism and state, 3352, 3361, 3421, 3424-25, 3438-39. 3446, 6066, 6101, 6195, 6207, 6352, 6366, 6374. 6430. 6434 Capitalists and financiers, 5880, 5882, 6023, 6027 Capitol Building, Washington, D.C architecture, 5708, 5720 paintings, 5775 Caplow, Theodore, 4547 Capote, Truman, 1944-47 about, 2371 Captain Abby and Captain John, 1290 Captain Caution, 1708-9 Captain Craig, 171 4 Cardozo, Benjamin Nathan, 6262 about, 6251 Cardwell, Guy A., 745 A Careful and Strict Enquiry into the Modern Prevailing Notions of . . . Freedom of Will, 26 Carey, Jane (Clark), 6198 Carey, Mathew, 171, 177 Carey & Lea (firm), about, 6451 Cargill, Oscar, 629, 2399 ed., 608, 1898,2276 Caribbean region, relations with, 3509, 3577,3584. 3587 Caricatures. See Cartoons Caridorf, 2309 Carlborg, Edith M. L., tr., 4246 Carleton, Will, 753-55 Carlson, Oliver, 2877, 2884, 6341 Carlyle, Thomas, about, 280, 633 Carman, Harry J., 3103, 5426 ed., 5426, 5827, 6054 Carmel, Calif., 3930 Carmer, Carl, 3972, 4020, 4047 ed., 3969, 3975. 3978-95. 4002-25 Carnegie, Andrew, 3434 about, 2503, 3434, 5880 Carnegie, Mrs. Andrew, about, 3434 Carnegie Corporation of New York, about, 5163 Carnegie Institution of Washington. Geophysical Laboratory, 4715 Camera, Primo, about, 4987 Carnes, Cecil, 2908 A Carnival of Buncombe, 6421 Carnivals, 4980 Carolina, hist., 3216, 4073 Carolina Chansons, 1168, 151 2 1 104 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Caroline Islands, 4218 Carpenter, Frederic Ives, 302, 2400 cd., 299 Carpenter, Jesse T., 6059 Carpenter, Niles, 4395 Carpenter, Paul S., 5623 Carpenter, Ralph E„ 5794 Carpenter, William S., 6283 Carr, Charles C, 5908 Carr, Harry, 4207 Carr, Harvey, about, 5389 Carr, Lowell Juilliard, 4586 Carr, Malcolm Wallace, 4842 Carr, Robert K., 6110, 6113-14, 6128, 6130 ed., 6106 Carr, William G., 5106 Carrier, Lyman, 5821 Carriere, Joseph Medard, ed., 5528 Carrington, Walter, 6091 Carroll, Eber Malcolm, 6351 Carroll, John, Abp., about, 5449, 545L5477 Carroll, John Alexander, 3271 Carroll, William, about, 4103 Carruth, Gorton, ed., 3076 Carry Me Back,, 2842 Carson, Gerald, 5955 Carson, Joseph, 4856 Carson, Kit, about, 2831 Carson, William G., 4913 Carstensen, Vernon R., 5194 Cartels. See Trusts, industrial Carter, Clarence E., 3047 Carter, Everett, 977 Carter, Hodding, 2631-32, 3488, 3946, 3982 about, 2632 Carter, William G. Harding, 3653-54 about, 3653 Cartmell, Van H., 1124 ed., 2327 Cartoons motion picture, 4957 politics, 2859, 2917, 5803 Cartwright, Peter, 2633-34 about, 2633-34 Caruthers, William Alexander, 226-29 about, 226 Carver, George Washington, about, 2690, 5825 Cary, Edward, 2278 Case, Robert Ormond, 4893 Case, Shirley Jackson, 5413 Case, Victoria, 4893 The Case of Mr. Crump, 1 573 Cash, Wilbur J., 4066 Cass, Lewis, about, 3358, 6078 Cass Timberlane, 1568 Cassidy, Frederic G., 2251 Cast a Cold Eye, 2020 Castaigne, A., illus., 1101 Castaneda, Pedro de, 3217 Caste. See Class distinction Castell, Alburey, ed., 5333 Castellon, Federico, about, 5783 Castilian Days, 941 Castle Hayne, N. C, 4406 Castle 'Nowhere, 1 150 Casualty, 2012 Caswell, Hollis L., 5147 Cat on a Hot Tin Roof, 2228, 2336 Catalogues and Counters, 5956 The Catcher in the Rye, 2108 Cate, James Lea, ed., 3727 Cate, Wirt Armistead, 3364 Cater, Douglass, 5899 Cathay, 1666 Cather, Willa Sibert, 832, 1029, 1031, 1276-78 about, 821, 1279-83, 2406, 2429 The Catherine Wheel, 2159 Catholic Church, 5404-5, 5444-47 bibl., 5449 doctrine, 2034, 2036, 2038, 2040-42 hist., 5448, 5450-51,5477 schools, 5101-2 soc. thought, 5484, 5488 sources, 5449 Catholic (Uniate) Church, Ukrainian, 4492 Catholics, 3040, 4428, 4515, 5450, 5495 Catlin, George paintings by, 3330 about, 5802 Catlin, Russ, 5001 Caton, John Dean, about, 4680 Cats in literature folklore & hist., 1828 poetry, 1359 Catskill Mountains, 5064 in literature, 740 Cattell, J. McKeen, ed., 5212 Cattell, Jacques, ed., 4712 Cattle and cattle trade, 4153-54, 4157- 58, 4163, 4165, 4190, 4196, 4214, 5868-69, 5873 brands & branding, 687, 5503, 5507, 5509, 5526 fiction, 1686-87 ranges, 4153, 5858, 5873 Cattle trails fiction, 684-86 short stories, 687 Catton, Bruce, 3690-92, 3696 Catullus, translation, 1482 Caughey, John W., 3048, 4200-1 ed., 4202 Causality (philosophy), 5289 Cauthen, Charles Edward, ed., 2635 The Cavaliers of Virginia, 227 Cavalry, hist., 3659 Cavan, Ruth (Shonle), 4561 Cavanaugh, John, Father, 5041 Cavender's House, 171 4 Caves, 2946 Cavins, Harold M., 4863 Cawdor, 1534 Cawley, Elizabeth Hoon, ed., 4321 Cay ton, Horace R., 4439 Cedar Mountain to Chancellorsville , 3695 Cedar Rapids, Iowa, guidebook, 3891 Ceiling Unlimited, 5938 Cenci family, fiction, 2087 Censorship, 6106 in 1917, 3462 motion pictures, 4947 Census, 2972, 4390, 4400, 4403 See also Population Central Medical Group of Brooklyn, Central Pacific Railroad, about, 5927 Century Magazine, 992, 2923 Century of Conflict, 3226 A Century of Dishonor, 985 Ceramic industries, 5792 Ceremony, 2217 Cerf, Bennett A., ed., 1124, 2325, 2327, 2370 The Certain Hour, 1262 Chadwick, French Ensor, 3569, 3707 Chafee, Zechariah, 6108-9, 6128, 6130 Chaffee, Adna R. (1842-1914), about, 3654 Chaffee, Adna R. (1884-1941), about, 3658 Chagres River and valley, 4014 Chaikin, Joseph, 2898 Chaim Lederer's Return, 1192 Chain stores, 5961 The Chainhearer, 268-69 XA1PE (Chaire), 13 13 The Chambered Nautilus, 368 Chamberlain, D. E., 6195 Chamberlain, John, 2406-7 Chamberlain, Joseph P., 6153 Chamberlain, Lawrence H., 61 10, 61 15, 6142 Chamberlain, Neil W., 6046-47 Chamberlin, Joseph Edgar, 2870 Chambers, Whittaker, about, 61 14 Chambers, William Nisbet, 3321 Champaign County, Ohio, 3871 Champlain, Samuel de, 3156, 3207 about, 1873, 3156, 3171 Chance, Love, and Logic, 5347 Chandler, Lester V., 5975 Channel Islands, Calif., 3957 Channing, Edward, 3083 about, 3058 Channing, William Ellery, 230-38, 5428, 5472 ed., 594, 596 about, 230 Channing, William Henry, about, 2279 Chanute, Octave, 4788 Chapelle, Howard I., 3666 Chapin, Francis Stuart, 4548 Chapin, Howard M., 85 Chaplin, Charlie, about, 4953 Chapman, Arthur, 4661 Chapman, Herman H., 5909 Chapman, John, about, 4533, 5506, 5519 Chapman, John A., ed., 4897 Chapman, John Jay, 2697 about, 2539, 2697 Chapman, Robert, 487, 2335 Chappell, Louis W., 5517 Chappell, Matthew N., 4700 Character (psychology), 4556 Charavay, Etienne, 3250 The Chariot of Fire, 2415 Charities, 4615-16, 4618, 4621, 4626, 4628-30, 4634, 6209 Jewish, 4461 Allegheny County, Pa., 4591 New England, 4341 Pittsburgh, 4591 See also Medicine — charities The Charity Ball, 2314 The Charity Patient (sculpture), 5739 INDEX / 1 105 Charlemont, 550 Charles River, Mass., 3991 Charles the Second, 2337 Charleston, S.C. descr., 1002-3, 4093 econ. condit. (Colonial period), 4602 fiction, 1145, 1512-13 hist., 4093 intellectual life (Colonial period), 3763 soc. life & cust., 4602, 4288 Charlotte, N.C., guidebook, 3832 Charlotte; a Tale of Truth, 162 Charlotte Temple; a Tale of Truth, 16 j Charlottesville, Va., guidebook, 3828 A Charmed Life, 2022 Charteris, Evan, 5771 Charters, Colonial, 6086, 6100 Charvat, William, 2331 ed., 2294 Chase, Gilbert, 5608 Chase, Harold B., 5002 about, 5002 Chase, John W., ed., 4513 Chase, Mary Ellen, 1284-89, 3782, 5214 Chase, Philander, about, 5457 Chase, Richard comp., 5586 ed., 925, 5529 Chase, Richard V., 494, 497, 651, 656, 854 Chase, Salmon Portland, about, 3382 Chase, Stanley P., 2425 Chase, Stuart, 6392 Chastellux, Francois Jean, marquis de, 4252-54 about, 4251, 4254, 4258 Chattanooga, hist., 4104 Chatters, Carl H., 6135 Chauncy, Charles, about, 5472 Chautauquas, 4893 Cheever, Daniel S., 3610 Chelsea Rooming House, 1483 Chemical engineering, 4793 Chemical industry, 4735 Chemistry, 4715, 473 1. 474° Chemistry, physiological, 4732 Chemists, 4735, 474° Cheney, Orion H., 6441 Cheney, Sheldon, ed., 4972 Cheng, Te-ch'ao, 4463 Cherokee Indians, 4104, 4233, 4248-50 See also Five Civilized Tribes Chesney, Alan M., 4845 Chesnut, Mary Boykin (Miller), 2636- 37 Chesnutt, William C, 6284 Chesnutt, Charles Waddel, 756-58 about, 756 Chesnutt, Helen M., 756 Chester, Giraud, 4686 Chesterfield, Philip Stanhope, Earl of, about, 2481 Chesterton, G. K., 4343 Chesuncoo\, 594 Chevalier, Michel, 4313-14 about, 4312 The Chevalier of Pensieri-Vani, 887 Cheyenne, Wyo., 4176 431240—60 71 Cheyenne Indians, 2799, 2999-3000, 4160 soc. life & cust., 2999-3000 Cheyney, Edward P., 5192 Chicago banks & banking, 5985 descr., 4134, 4136 econ. condit., 3425 fiction, 887-89, 956-58, 1094-95, 1333-34, 1337. 1339. 1372-74. 1376, 1921-22, 1939, 2054, 2232- 33. 2235 frontier life, 4136 govt., 6208 hist., 3987, 4135-36 land values, 5812 libraries, 6473 music, 5644, 5651-52, 5660 Negroes, 4439, 4451 poetry, 1727, 1731, 1937-38 politics, 6207, 6375, 6380, 6386 public health, 4864 soc. condit., 2836, 4599, 4614, 4658, 6380 soc. life & cust., 4134 Swedes, 4486 underworld, 2586 Chicago. Home Rule Commission, 6208 Chicago. Public Library, about, 6473 Chicago. University, 5201 Chicago. University. College, 5182 Chicago. University. Dept. of Edu- cation, 5249 Chicago. University. Laboratory School, 51 17 Chicago Bears, 5040 Chicago-Cook County Health Survey, 4864 Chicago fire (1871), 4136 Chicago Poems, 1 731 The Chicago Renaissance in American Letters, 2419 Chicago Review, 2556 Chicago River, 3987 "Chicago school" of architecture, 5705 "Chicago school" of criticism, 2410 Chicago strike (1894). See Pullman strike Chicago Symphony Orchestra, 5651-52 Chicago Tribune, about, 2862 Chickasaw Indians, 3027 Chickering, Geraldine Jencks, ed., 5575 Chidsey, Donald Barr, 5027 Child, Francis James, 5550 Child, John L., 5254, 5291 Child, Lydia Maria (Francis), 239-44 about, 239, 244, 2280 Child, Robert, about, 3198 Child study, 5149 Childhood and youth in literature drama, 2023 fiction, 188, 778-83, 787-93. 811, 878-80, 1126-27, 1132, 1184, 1372-74, 1376, 1412, 1415-17, 1635, 1683, 1802-4, 1839, 1888, 1944-45, 1964, 2023, 2032, 2107- 8, 2213, 2229 personal narratives, 706-10, 906-7, 1078, 1204, 1213, 1284, 1292, 1543,2394 Childhood and youth in literature — Continued poetry, 878, 11 26 short stories, 1786, 1790 Children, 4315, 4559 behavior, 4559 books, 17, 188-89, 239. 580-82, 906-7, 984, 1132, 2500, 4190 development, 5149-50, 5247 education, 5105, 5148-50 employment, 4569 exceptional, 51 14, 5205, 5207, 5246 folklore, 5588, 5592 guidance, 5149 institutional care, 4644 periodicals, 190, 239 protection, 4618 songs, 5510, 5559, 5563, 5588 Children and Older People, 1 796 Children Are Bored on Sunday, 2160 Children of God, 1424 Children of Swamp and Wood, 1724, 5087 The Chddren of the Night, 1714 The Children's Hour (drama), 1989, 2333 The Children's Hour (periodical), 190 Childs, H. L., 6336 Childs, James Rives, 3599 Childs, Marquis W., 5899 Childs, Richard S., 6425 Chile, relations with, 3580 Chillicothe, Ohio, 3864 Chills and Fever, 1 676 A Chilmar\ Miscellany, 2380 China econ. relations with, 3638 fiction, 1252-56, 1259 influences on literature, 1583 relations with, 3506, 3589, 3591-96, 3619 World War II, 3726 Chinard, Gilbert, 3278 Chinaware, 5791-92 Chinese, 3437, 4463-64, 4467-68 The Chinese Nightingale, 1581 Chinese poetry, translations, 1664, 1667 Chipman, Nathaniel, about, 51 21 Chiricahua Apache Indians, 3010 Chiropractic, 481 1 Chisholm, Jesse, about, 4158 Chisholm, Leslie L., 5153, 5228 Chisholm Trail, 4157 Chita, 946-48, 951-52, 955 Chittenden, Hiram Martin, 4148, 4182 ed., 2663 Chittenden, Russell H, 4732 Chittick, Victor L. O., 709 Chitwood, Oliver Perry, 3323 Chivalry, 1262 Chivcrs, Thomas Holley, 540 Choate, Julian Ernest, 4162-63 Choate, Rufus, about, 2676 Choctaw Indians, hist., 3024-25, 3027, 4233, 4248-50 The Choice, 1851 Choirs (music), 5632, 5664-67, 5672 Chopin, Kate (O'Flaherty), 759-761 about, 759 Chorus for Survival, 1 483 Chosen Country, 1331 II06 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES ChotzinofT, Samuel, 2638-39 about, 2639 Chouart, Medard, sieur des Groseilliers, about, 3170 Christ-Janer, Albert, 5761 Christchurch, 1295 Christensen, Erwin O., 5594 The Christian Disciple, 231 The Christian Examiner, 230-31 The Christian Philosopher, 46 Christian Science, 5404, 5439 hist., 5452-53 Christianity, 5338, 5351, 5358, 5899 Christiansen, F. Melius, about, 5664 Christmas hist., 4546 songs, 5563 Christmas-Night in the Quarters, 1 135 The Christmas Tree, 1616 Chronicler of the Cavaliers, 226 Chu, Pao Hsun, 4662 Chugerman, Samuel, 4537 Chujoy, Anatole, 4969 Church and education, 5419, 5491, 5494 Church and society, 5482, 5484-97 Catholic Church, 5484, 5488 Judaism, 5488 Protestant churches, 5485-86, 5488- 89 Church and state, 4550, 5395, 5400, 5406, 5409, 5418-22, 5444-45, 6117 educational aspects, 5103, 5236, 5238 in literature, 17, 19, 84, 92-95 Mass., Colonial period, 3178, 3182, 3199,3235 New England, Colonial period, 3197, 3743. Church history, 5394-96, 5399-5401, 5405-6, 5409, 541 1, 5441-42 Colonial period, 43, 5408, 5410, 5417 Church music hist., 5632-34 Mormons, 5630 Protestants, 5631 New England, 5633 Philadelphia, 5629 Church of Christ, Scientist. See Christian Science Church of God, Anderson, Ind., 5442 Church of Jesus Christ of Latter Day Saints. See Mormons and Mor- monism Church of the Brethren, 5442 Churches of Christ, 5442 hist., 5455 The Churches Quarrel Espoused, 93, 95 Churchill, Henry S., 4604 Churchill, Winston (1871-1947), 762- 67 Ciardi, John, 1948-53 Cimarron, 1406 Cincinnati descr., 4303, 4310, 4312 guidebook, 3865 intellectual life, 3767 soc. life & cust., 4122, 4303 Cincinnati Symphony Orchestra, 5647 The Circuit Rider, 872-73 Circus, 4894, 4977, 4982 The Circus in the Attic, 2198 Cistercians, 2040 Cities and towns, 3095, 4360, 4576, 4587, 4594-95. 4598, 4601-2, 5510, 6207, 6213, 6218 climate, 2952 frontier, 4 151, 4153 growth, 4601-2, 4609 guidebooks, 3786 hist., 4609 in art, 5801 place-names, 2976 planning, 4575, 4587, 4603-7, 4612- 13. 5707 population, 4393 recreation, 4997-98 soc. condit., 4395 water supply, 4797 Colo., 3913 Conn., 4041 Eastern seaboard, 4358 Middle Atlantic States, 4263 Middle West, 4109 Mo., 4108, 4281 Nev., 3955, 4184 New England, 3965, 4239, 4261, 4279 N.J., 4053 N.Y., 4239 Northwest, Old, 4358 Rocky Mountains, 4176 Southern States, 4083, 4288, 4595 Southwest, New, 4187 Southwest, Old, 4098 Va., 4086 The West, 4150, 4176-77 See also Communities, urban Cities and towns in literature drama, 1688-89, 2049, 2063, 2145 editorials, sketches, etc., 701-5 essays, 1791, 1859 fiction, 887-89, 956-58, 1090-95, 1 190, 1300, 1327, 1332, 1372-74, 1561, 1656-58, 1828-29, 1831, 1845, 1908, 1911-12, 1914-15, 1921-22, 1939, 1940, 1943, 1966- 67, 2054, 2069, 2074, 2182, 2184, 2229, 2415, 2431 poetry, 1727, 1731, 1870, 1937-38, 2060, 2133 short stories, mi, n 14-19, 15 10, 1851, 1855, 1910, 1913, 2057, 2071-75,2145 Citizen Tom Paine, 1977 Citizenship, 4424, 6122, 6133, 6139 Negroes, 4443 Orientals, 6120 The City and the Pillar, 2180, 2183 City Ballads, 753 The City Boy, 2229 City government. See Local govern- ment The City in the Dawn, 1171 City-manager plan, 6210, 6213, 6216, 6425 City of Discontent, 1582 The City of Trembling Leaves, 1956 Civil Aeronautics Act (1938), 5943 Civil arbitration, 6299 Civil cases (law), 6280 Civil control of the military, 3646, 3650 Civil disobedience, 585-86, 593, 604-5, 607-8 Civil liberties and rights, 3308, 3401, 6075, 6106-30, 6134, 6338 hist., 61 17 minorities, 6129 Negroes, 4445 Calif., 61 1 1 N.Y. (State), 51 1 5 Civil procedure (law), 6289, 6295, 6300, 6304 Civil service, 6172, 6178-81, 6183, 6186,6188,6192-93 hist., 6174 Civil Service Commission, 6174 about, 6174, 6186, 6190 Civil service reform, 3422-23, 3431, 3437, 6174, 6178, 6186-87, 6363, 6373,6382 Civil War, 2580, 2710-11, 2757, 3073, 3092, 3141, 3373, 3387-88, 3554, 3690-3706, 4481 art, 5765 biog. (collected), 2613-14. 3695 campaigns & battles, 2828-30, 3450, 3690-93, 3695-99, 3701, 3703, 3706, 4378 bibl., 3365 causes, 3065, 3122, 3366, 3370, 3398, 3400,3409 foreign opinion, 3536, 3550, 3769 foreign rel., 3359 hist., 1729, 3374, 3382, 3393, 3408, 3416, 3450, 4076, 6081 sources, 2416, 3395 interpretations of, 3073, 3106, 3407 naval operations, 3700 personal narratives, 277, 2280, 2637, 2823, 2828-30, 3693, 3696, 3704- 5,4378-81 bibl., 3365.3378 photographs, 829 regimental histories, 3690-92, 3695 bibl., 3365 reporters & reporting, 2851 songs & music, 5569 sources, 3697, 3700 Civil War in literature editorials, sketches, etc., 556-57, 633, 1099, 1 103-4, 1 106 fiction, 188-89, 245, 247-50, 278- 79. 745. 763-65, 821, 825-29, 836, 1241, 1382, 1389, 1449, 1468, 1541-42, 1544, 1618-19, 1730, 1745, 2201, 4912 poetry, 206, 456-57, 459, 486, 488, 614, 616-17, 623, 666, 1222, 1224, 1811, 1824 propaganda, 422 short stories, 556-57, 733-37, 739, 1099-1102, 1106, 1225, 1790 Civilian Conservation Corps, 5884 Civilian Public Service Camps, 3649 Clancy, William P., 5447 Clapesattle, Helen B., 4827 Clapp, Margaret, 4047 Clappe, Louise Amelia Knapp (Smith), 2640-41 Clare, Thomas H., 5309 Clark, Dan Elbert, 3078 Clark, David L., 109, 115 Clark, E. H., 2240 Clark, Elmer Talmage, 5440, 5442, 5463 Clark, George Luther, 6272 Clark, George Rogers, 3239 about, 3239 Clark, Harry Hayden, 970, 2424-25, 2515 ed., 139, 142, 158, 468, 2290, 2330, 2337,2401 Clark, Jane Perry. See Carey, Jane (Clark) Clark, John Maurice, 3454, 5898, 6004 about, 5888 Clark, John Spencer, 5304 Clark, Lawrence E., 5983 Clark, Leadie M., 652 Clark, Lewis Gaylord, 2295 Clark, Thomas D., 2853, 3983, 4097, 4106 Clark, Victor S., 5904 Clark, Walter Van Tilburg, i954-'>8, 4176 Clark, William, 3298 about, 3167, 3299 Clark, William L., 6275-76 Clark, William Smith, II, ed., 469 Clark County, Ohio, 3870 Clarke, Eric, 5617 Clarke, James F., ed., 313 Clarke, William N., about, 5428 Clara's Field, 958 Clash by Night, 2066 Class distinction, 4524, 4534, 4542, 4547. 4549-51. 4556-58, 4561, 4564, 4566, 4585, 5146 Classic Americans, 2397 Classical influences on authors, 201, 205, 611, 1532, 1556, 1864, 2098, 2101, 2479. 2493 Classics and Commercials, 2540 Clavers, Mary, pseud. See Kirkland, Caroline Matilda (Stansbury) Claviere, Etienne, 4259 Clawson, Marion, 5809, 5839 Clay, Henry, 3344 about, 3342-44 Clay, Lucius D., 3570 Clayton-Bulwer Treaty, 3559 The Clear Sun-Shine of the Gospel Breaking Forth upon the Indians in New England, 62 Clearing in the Sky, 2171 Cleaveland, Moses, about, 41 1 8 Cleaves, Freeman, 3325 Clegg, Charles, 4153 Cleland, Robert Glass, 4186, 4203-4, 4353 Clemens, Olivia (Langdon), 801 Clemens, Samuel Langhorne. See Twain, Mark Clemmer, Donald, 4641 Clemons, Harry, 6466 The Clergyman's Advice to the Vil- lagers, 121 Cleveland, Grover, 3422 about, 2616, 3423, 6359, 6373 Cleveland, Ohio concerts, 5630 politics, 6207, 6428-29 The Cliff-Dwellers, 888 Clifford, Cornelius, 5289 Climate, 2937, 2951-53, 2959, 2966, 5816 maps, 2951-52 Nev., 4184 New York (State), 4237-38 Pa., 4237-38 Southern States, 4084 Southwest, Far, 4189 Utah, 4183 The Climate of Eden, 1493 Clinch, C.B., 231 1 Cline, Howard F., 3504 Clinical medicine, 4827, 4829, 4831, Clinical Sonnets, 1625 Clipper ships, 5937 The Clod, 2332 The Clouds, Aigeltinger, Russia, Src, 1878 Clough, Benjamin C, ed., 5513 Clubs, social, 4574, 4578 Clugston, W. G., 6207 Clurman, Harold, 4914 Clymer, Joseph Floyd, 5003 Coad, Oral Sumner, 4899 Coalfields, 4336 Coan, Otis W., 2402 Coast and Geodetic Survey, about, 47.66 Coastwise navigation, 3787 Coats, Robert H., 4474 Cobb, Irvin Shrewsbury, 2642-43 about, 2643 Cobbett, William, 2647 Cobden, Richard, 4321 about, 4320 Coblentz, Edmond D., comp., 2884 Coblenz, Constance G., 3630 Cochise, about, 3004 Cochran, Negley D., 2890 Cochran, Thomas C, 3103, 4047, 5875, 5927, 6005 Cochrane, Alexander, about, 4735 Cochrane, Willard W., 5850 Cockerell, Theodore D. A., about, 4734 Cockrell, Ewing, 6297 Cocks Must Crow, 1684 The Cocktail Party, 1359 Coe, Eva (Johnston), 5593 Coe, Wesley R., 4715 Coeur d'Alene Valley, 4176 Coeur de Lion, Richard, about, 2186 Coffin, Charles Carleton, about, 2851 Coffin, Robert Peter Tristram, 1290- 97. 3973 about, 1292 Coffin, Tristram P., 5518, 5550, 5556 Coffman, Stanley K., 2403 Cogswell, Joseph Green, about, 2462, 3776 Cohane, Tim, 5035 Cohen, Elliot E., ed., 4452 Cohen, Felix S., ed., 3728, 5267 Cohen, Haskell, 5030 Cohen, I. Bernard, 4719 ed., 122, 4750 Cohen, Morris R., 3728, 5267-70, 6268 ed., 5347 about, 5267 INDEX / 1 107 Cohn, Alfred E., 4865 Cohn, David L., 3782, 5822 Cohn, Sarah W., 4407 Cohon, S. S., 4458 Coit, Margaret L., 3327-28 Coker, Francis W., ed., 6060 Colby, Merle, 3940 Colby, Vineta, ed., 2455 Cold Morning Sky, 1 905-6 A Cold Spring, 1926 Colden, Cadwallader, 3194, 5251 about, 3194 Cole, Arthur Charles, 3092, 4130, 5193 Cole, Arthur Harrison, 5910 Cole, Cyrenus, 2644-45, 4144 Cole, Fay-Cooper, about, 2990 Cole, Stewart G., 5430 Cole, Thomas, about, 3751 Colean, Miles L., 4605, 4610 Coleman, James S., 6455 Coleman, Laurence Vail, 3049, 4716, 5794 Coleman, Roy V., ed., 2967, 3071 Coleman, William, 2858 Coleridge, Samuel Taylor, about, 520 Colfax, Schuyler, about, 4383-84 Collect, 633, 638 Collective bargaining, 3132, 6038, 6046, 6053 The College Widow, 701 Colleges and universities, 31 13, 4719, 5160, 5204 administration, 5135, 5194, 5201. 5244 criticisms, 5179, 5190, 5232, 5235 curricula, 5100, 5178, 5180, 5182, 5184, 5187, 5196, 5199 development and innovations, 5169, 5178, 5180, 5182, 5184, 5187. 5195799.5215,5246 directories, 51 12, 5 161 England, 5167, 5179 enrollment, 3786, 5163, 5170 faculties, 51 81, 5201 fiction, 2001, 2021 finances, 5135, 5163-68, 5172, 5175, 5189,5194 geographical distribution, 5171 govt, relations, 5094, 5165, 5167 graduate instruction, 5099, 5105, 5195 hist., 5101-2, 5113, 5122, 5125, 5134, 5143, 5169, 5176-77. 5'83, 5186, 5188, 5191-5204 libraries, 5201, 6478, 6487 museums, 3049, 5201 needs & objectives, 5173, 5178, 5180, 5182, 5187, 5189, 5194 organization, 5135, 5174, 5189 periodicals, 5244 personal narrative, 2394 poetry, 165-67 religious foundations, 5411 scientific education, 4723, 4725 soc. aspects, 5177, 5183, 5191, 5193— 94 stat., 51 1 4, 5174 students, 5170, 5175, 5194 surveys, 5114, 5186, 5201-2, 5206 Germany, 5179 Gt. Brit., 5167, 5179 II08 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Colleges and universities — Continued Southern States, 4723, 5176 See also Agricultural colleges; Ath- letics — college; Catholic colleges; Community colleges; Dental schools; Football — college; Junior colleges; Land-grant colleges; Mu- sic — education; State colleges and universities; and names of indi- vidual colleges and universities, e.g., Bennington College. Collier, Donald, 2993 Collier, John, 4428 Collier, T., 6195 Collinge, Patricia, 4919 Collins, Carvel, ed., 1092 The Colloquy of Monos and Una, 529 Colm, Gerhard, 5898 Colombia, relations with, 3585 Colombo, Cristoforo. See Columbus, Christopher Colonial life in literature, 1-6, 12-16, 43-44. 66-71 diaries, journals, etc., 15—16, 36—39, 49. 53-58. 90-91 fiction, 226, 239, 251-52, 258, 333, 405, 511, 546, 548-49. 665, 1439, 1441, 1707, 1916-18, 1920 legal documents, 32, 78 poetry, 7-1 1, 72-73. 79-83, 427, 433. 1222 religious writings, 17-35, 40, 43-48, 59-62, 84, 86-89, 9°, 92-95 satire, 51-52, 75-76 See also Social life and customs Colonial Williamsburg, Inc., 5595 Colorado, 3964, 3967, 4180-82 descr., 4 1 74 fiction, 1249 guidebooks, 3912-13 hist., 3913, 3956, 3961, 4147, 4174, 4180, 4189 poetry, 1409-10 theater, hist., 4925 travel & travelers, 4378 Ute Indians, 3041 Colorado Desert, 3947 Colorado River, 4017, 4757 Colorado Springs, hist., 4150 Colton, Calvin, ed., 3344 Columbia, 118 Columbia Plateau, Nez Perce Indians, 3001 Columbia River, 4022 Columbia River Valley, fiction, 1314 Columbia University, about, 5136, 5181, 5185 Columbia University. Bureau of Ap> plied Social Research, 4701 Columbia University. Columbia Col' lege, hist., 5197 Columbia University. Graduate School of Journalism, 2889, 2910 Columbia University. New York State Hospital Study, 4846 Columbia University. School of Library Service, hist., 6485 The Columbiad , 104 Columbus, Christopher, 3163-64 about, 381, 1873, 3163-65 poetry, 104 Columnists, 732, 878, 2017 Coman, Katharine, 4149 Comanche Indians, 3014, 4160 Come Back., Little Sheba, 1996, 2335 Come into My Parlor, 2836 Comedy farcical, 701 frontier & pioneer, 518 lyrical, 1647 marital, 151 8 musical, 701, 705 periods (1764-1819), 168-70 (1820-70), 198, 517-18, 676 (i87i-i9i4),7oi,705 (I9I5-39). 1199-1212, i 49 i- 93, 1518, 1545-50. 1647-48, 1749 romantic, 676 satiric, 517, 1491-93, 1545-50, 1749 social, 168-70, 1 1 99-1 2 1 2, 13 17 theory, 5351 See also Drama Comfort, William Wistar, 3222 Comic strips, 2865 The Coming Forth by Day of Osiris Jones, 1 1 66 Coming Home, 1851 Coming to the Parson (sculpture), 5739 Commager, Henry Steele, 982, 3058, 3103, 3274, 3348, 3738, 4513, 5481, 6082, 6130 ed., 3079, 4231 Command Decision, 2337 Commentary, 4452-53 Commerce, 4069, 5944-64 foreign, 5946-48, 5950, 5953, 6002 govt, regulation, 5946-48, 5950 cases, 6095, 6104 hist., 5944, 5948, 5955, 5960, 6016 maritime, 3524 reporting, 2869, 2902, 2918, 2924 New England, 4266 New York (City), 5951 New York (State), 4242-46, 4266 Pacific Northwest, 4212, 4214 Pa., 4242-46, 4266 Southern States, 4266 The Thirteen Colonies, 3193, 3243, 3262, 3289 See also Trade Commercial arbitration, 6299 Commercial policy, 3285, 3340, 3638- 39. 5953 See also General Agreements on Tariffs and Trade; Tariff Commins, Saxe, ed., 400, 3268, 3271 Commission on Financing Higher Edu- cation, 5163-75 Commission on Freedom of the Press, 4687, 4947 Commission on Graduate Medical Edu- cation, 4857 Commission on Hospital Care, 4847 Commission on Life Adjustment Edu- cation for Youth, 5224 Commission on Medical Education, 4858 Commission on Organization of the Executive Branch of the Govern- ment, 4671, 5099, 6184, 6199 Committee for Economic Development, about, 5983 Committee for the Study of Recnt Im- migration from Europe, 4407 Committee on American History in Schools and Colleges, 3050 Committee on Public Information, 3462 Committee on the Costs of Medical Care, 4883-84 Commodity exchanges, 5952 The Common Glory, 1477 Common law, 6222-23, 6230-31, 6236 Common Sense, 155, 160 Commons, John R., 6033, 6038 about, 5888 The Commonweal, 5446 Communication Workers of America, about, 4672 Communications, 3724, 4661-471 1, 4787, 5246, 5899, 6454, 6480 See also individual means of com- munication, e.g., Books and read- ing; Language; Newspapers Communism, 3620, 5351, 5445, 6128, 6130, 6134, 6356 guilt by association, 61 n, 61 17 Calif., 61 1 1, 61 14 Washington (State), 61 16 Communists and the Communist Party, 3149,3490 Communitarian experiments. See Utopias (settlements) Communities, 4551, 4656 Jewish, 4454, 4457-58 Negro, 4442, 4446 Norwegian, 2267 Calif., 2641 Communities, rural, 2764, 4109, 4576 bibl., 4580 econ. condit., 4585 See also Farm and rural life Communities, urban, 4548, 4550, 4561, 4576, 4609 See also Cities and towns Community centers, Jewish, 4454 Community colleges, 5162 Community life, Japanese, 4466 Community music, 5625 Community organization, 4575 Compacts, New England (Colonial period), 6079 The Company She Keeps, 2018 Compensation, 285 Compensation for judicial error, 6294 Composers, 146, 1927, 5605, 5609-11, 5614, 5620, 5639, 5656, 5672 See also Musicians Composition, literary. See Literary composition Comprehensive high schools, 5156 Compromise of 1850,3118, 3344 Compton, Arthur H., 4722, 4747, 5187, 5434 about, 4747 Compton, Charles H., 6467 Compton, Frances Snow, pseud. See Adams, Henry Compton, Karl T., 4693 Comptroller General, 5996 INDEX / I IO9 Comstock Lode, Nev., 4185 fiction, 1420 Comte, Auguste, about, 4536 Conant, James Bryant, 5134, 5180 Conceived in Liberty, 1974 Concerning the Jews, 798-99 Concerts hist., 5612, 5679 Boston, 5649 Calif., 5630 Cleveland, 5630 New York (City), 5626-27 Concord, Mass. essays, 1002-3 hist., 4037 Concord Circle, 186, 230, 280, 333, 585, 619, 2278 Concord School of Philosophy, 5220 Concord Sonata, 5682 Condit, Carl W., 5705 The Conduct of Life, 292-93 Conductors (orchestra), 5620 Confederate States, 2637, 2828-30, 3694-95. 3698 biog. (collected), 2613, 3384, 3695 for. rel., 3539 govt., 6081 hist., 3373, 3383-84, 3396, 3698, 4076 bibl., 3365, 3378 sources, 3697, 3700 origins, 3404 soc. condit., 3373 Confederate States Army, 3369 cavalry, 3703 military life, 3704-5 sources, 3697 Confederate States Navy, sources, 3700 The Confederation (1781-89), 3190, 3245. 3256, 3301-2 Conference for Progressive Political Action, 6356 Confessions of a Congressman, 6165 The Confessions of a Reformer, 6428 Confessions of an Actor, 4933 The Confidence-Man, 485, 491 The Confident Years, 2381 The Confidential Cler\, 1360 Conformity, 6130 The Congo, 15 81 Congregational-Christian Churches, 5442 Congregational churches, Colonial, 17, 19, 32, 40, 43-44, 59, 92-95 Congregational ists, 5404 hist., 5415, 5454 Congress, 6084, 6089, 6150-69, 6340 committees, 6159 foreign affairs, 3604, 3610-11, 3615- 16 functions, 6151-52, 6154-55, 6167, 6169, 6191 hist., 3450, 6140, 6142, 6150-51 investigating committees, 6154, 6160, 6164 organization, 6150, 6152, 6155, 6162, 6167, 6169 rules & practice, 6150, 6162, 6167, 6169 See also Legislative branch Congress. House, 6150, 6163, 6165, 6415 committees, 6156 election districts, 6163 rules & practice, 6150, 6165 Congress. House. Committee Investi- gating Un-American Activities, 61 12 Congress. House. Committee on In- terior and Insular Affairs, 3039 Congress. House. Committee on Un- American Activities, hist., 61 14 Congress. House. Select Committee on Lobbying Activities, 6397 Congress. Joint Committee on the Eco- nomic Report, 5970 Congress. Senate functions, 6158, 61 61 hist., 6158 rules & practice, 6157-58, 6161 Congress. Senate. Committee on the Judiciary, 4424 Congress of Industrial Organizations, 6034-36 Congress of Industrial Organiztaions. Political Action Committee, 6394 Congressional elections. See Elections Congressional investigations, 6128, 6154, 6160, 6164 The Conjure Woman, 757 The Conjurer's Revenge, 757 Conkle, E. P., 2332 Conklin, Edwin Grant, 5427 about, 5427 Connecticut, 3965, 4041-42 architecture, Colonial, 5707 early settlers, 32 guidebook, 3805 hist., 4041 pol. & govt., 2652 Connecticut Courant (Hartford), 2875 Connecticut Fundamental Orders of 1639.32 Connecticut in literature, 32, 34, 118, 562 essays, 165 fiction, 1299, 1301 poetry, 121, 1782 Connecticut River and valley, hist., 4009 Connecticut Wits, ioi, 118, 165, 2465 A Connecticut Yankee in King Arthur's Court, 794-97, 811 Connelly, Marc, 1545-46, 2327, 2332- 33.2348 Conner, Frederick W., 2404 Connor, A. J., 2953 Conover, Merrill B., 4621 Conover, Milton, 4768 Conquering the Wilderness, 4044 The Conqueror, 723-24 The Conquest of Canaan (novel), 1802 The Conquest of Canaan (poem), 119 The Conquest of Mexico, History of, 2294 The Conquest of Peru, History of, 2294 Conquistador, 1585 Conrad, Robert T., 2347 Conscientious objectors Civil War, 3702 World War II, 3649, 6124 Conservation of natural resources, 1072, I0 75-76, 2790, 2956, 2960, 4099, 5810, 5884, 5900 Conservatism, 3139, 6340 hist., 6067, 6070 Colonial period, 3195, 3255, 3262 American Revolution, 3253, 3267 19th cent., 3303,3336 Conservatism Revisited, 2189 Conservative Judaism, 5460 Considine, Robert B., 5012 The Conspiracy of Kings, 103 The Conspiracy of Pontiac, 3 1 7 1 The Conspirators, 2092 Constable, William G., 5426 about, 5426 Constitution, 3046, 3 116, 3304, 4266, 4334, 6075-78, 6080-82, 6084-89, 6091-93, 6100, 6121, 6129, 6133- 34. 6137, 6143, 6157, 6199, 6411 amendments, 6098, 6102-3 Civil War, 6064, 6121 1st, 6107, 6109, 6123 5th, 6097,6108 14th, 6078, 6094-95, 6097 article 5, 6098 commerce clause, 6096 compact clause, 6206 contract clause, 6105 econ. aspects, 3139 See also Bill of Rights The Constitution of the United States (Annotated), 6102 Constitutional Convention (1787), 6082, 6087-88 Constitutional history, 3141, 3195, 3253-54. 3256, 3282, 6059, 6073- 89, 6094, 6100 Constitutional law, 6072, 6085, 6090- 6105, 6166, 6255, 6257, 6259, 6266, 6277 cases, 6084, 6089-92, 6095, 6099- 6100, 6102-5, 6121, 6127, 6129 Civil War, 6081 Constitutions, state, 6080, 6086, 6195 Construction industry, 4600, 4610 Consular service. See Diplomatic and consular service Consumption (economics), 5954 Contemplations, 7 Contemporaries, 2280 Contemporary Trends, 2276 Continental Army Medical Dept., 4830 Continental Congress, 3242 church influence in, 5406 1st (1774). 3262 2d (1775-89). 3304 Executive branch, 6083 Presidency (1774-89). See Presi- dency— C ontinental Congress (1774—89) See also The Confederation (1781- 89) The Continuing Spirit, 5453 Contracts, 6101, 6105 cases, 6279 laws, 6275 The Contrast, 168-70, 2337, 2347 Convention of 181 8 with Gt. Brit., 3542 IIIO / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Conventions, political. See Political conventions Conversation at Midnight, 1609 Conversations, 313 Converse, Paul D., 5945 Conway, H. J., 23 11 Conway, Moncure, 2646-48, 4049 ed., 155 about, 2646, 2648 Cook, Beatrice G., 5070 Cook, Elizabeth Christine, 2854 Cook, Frederick A., about, 2979 Cook, George A., 92 Cook, Reginald L., 609 Cook, Sherburne F., 3002, 3022 Cooke, Bob, ed., 4984 Cooke, George Willis, 5470 ed., 2328 Cooke, Jay, about, 5988 Cooke, John Esten, 66, 245-51, 2296 Cooley, Charles Horton, about, 4542 Cooley, Thomas W., 6091 Cooley, W. F., 5289 Coolidge, Archibald C, ed., 924 Coolidge, Calvin, 3481 about, 3480-81 Coolidge, Dane, 3013 Coolidge, Mary Elizabeth Burroughs (Roberts) Smith, 3013, 4464 Cooper, Frank E., 6310 Cooper, James Fenlmore, (1789-1851), 252-73, 2290, 2295 about, 252, 546, 579, 674, 2277, 2286, 2364, 2385, 2397, 2456, 2471, 2509, 2544 Cooper, James Fenimore (b. 1858), ed., 270 Cooper, Peter, about, 3443 Cooper, Thomas, 5251 about, 3303, 4721 Cooperative societies, 5842, 5964, 6008 Cope, Alfred Haines, ed., 3108 Cope, Edward Drinker, about, 4724, 4748 Copland, Aaron, about, 5675 Copley, Frank Barkley, 4798 Copley, John Singleton, about, 5749, 5763 Coppee, Francois, about, 2466 Copper, antique, 5787 "Copperheads," 901 Copyright law, music, 5621, 5681 Cora, Anna. See Mowntt, Anna Cora Coral Gables, Fla., 3846 Coram, Robert, about, 5 1 21 Cordier, Ralph W., 4057 The Cords of Vanity, 1262 Core courses in schools, 5158, 5225, 5237 Coriolanus and His Mother, 2134 Cork, J., 5291 Corle, Edwin, 3947, 4005 Corliss, Carlton J., 5927 Corn, 3948 Corn (Engle), 1968 Corn (Lanier), 1038 Corn Country, 3948 Cornelius, Charles Over, 5727-28. 5796 Cornell, William Bouck, ed., 5906 Cornell University, 61 10-25 hist., 5191 Cornhus\ers, 1731 Corning, Howard McKinley, 3937, 3939 Cornish folklore, Mich., 5533 Coronado, Francisco Vasquez de, about, 3158,3217 Corporation law, 6008, 601 1, 6236 Corporations, 4616, 6011-12, 6018, 6020, 6022 finance, 4616, 5967 hist., 6014-15 Corpus Christi, Tex., 3919, 4476 Corrupt practices acts, 6338 Corruption (in politics), 6195, 6207, 6333, 6342-44, 6377, 6380, 6383, 6385, 6387-93, 6404, 6407, 6410, 6425, 6430, 6432, 6434 See also Spoils system Cortesi, Arnaldo, 3615 Cortissoz, Royal, 5735 Corwin, Edward H., 4848, 4851 Corwin, Edward S., 3758, 6092-94, 6143 ed., 6102 Cory, Daniel, 5367 ed., 1 74 1 Cosby, William, about, 2931 Cosgrave, John O'Hara, II, illus., 748, 3974,4012,4019 Cosmic Optimism, 2404 Cosmogony of the Universe, 531 Cosmology, 5252, 5303 Coss, John J., 5178, 5289 Cost and standard of living, 4567, 4593, 4595, 5883, 6048 Cotes, Peter, 4953 Cotterill, Robert S., 4067 The Cotter's Saturday Night, 662 Cotton, James Harry, 5362 Cotton, John, 17-20, 89 about, 5396 Cotton and cotton production, 3539, 4084, 4367-68, 4476, 4789, 5822 editorials, sketches, etc., 1907 fiction, 1 1 59, 1786 Couch, William T., ed., 4068 Coughlan, Robert, 1398 Coulson, Thomas, 4752 Coulter, Edith M., 4202 Coulter, Ellis Merton, 3365, 4076-77, 4094, 5176 ed., 3404, 4072 Coulter, John Merle, 4724 about, 2789 Council-manager plan. See City- manager plan Council of Economic Advisers, 6144 Council of State Governments, 5135, 6197,6199 Council of State Governments. Com- mittee on State-Local Relations, 6200 Council on Foreign Relations, 3634, 3637 Council on Library Resources, Inc., 6487 about, 6487 Counseling in education, 5228 CounseUor-at-haw , 1689 Counter-Statement, 2387 Country Cured, 2654 The Country Girl, 2068 Country Growth, 1963 Country life. See Farm and rural life The Country of the Pointed Firs, 1027- 29, 1 03 1 Country People, 1796 Country stores, 4086, 5955 Country theater, 4902 Countryman, Vern, 61 10, 61 16 Counts, George S., 5106, 5136 County agricultural agent, 5852 County fairs, 5827 County government. See Local govern- ment County libraries, 6471 Courier (Louisville, Ky.), about, 2892 The Course of Empire, 3 161, 3299 The Court of Fancy, 1 44 Courtney, Marguerite (Taylor), 4932 Courts, 6078, 6097, 6280-93, 6306 6309-10 decisions & opinions, 3756, 6090-91 6100, 6103, 6126 hist., 6290 reform, 6307 Mass., 6292 Mo., 4108 See also Supreme Court Courts, administrative (state), 631 1 Courts, federal, 6280-82, 6286, 6293 Courts, military, 6289 Courts, state, 6281-82, 6293 Courts, traffic, 6307 Courts, trial, 6285 Courts-martial and courts of inquiry, 6289 Courtship, 4572 The Courtship of Miles Standish, 433 Cousins, N., 4513 Covarrubias, Miguel, 3016 illus., 474, 566 The Covenant of Grace Opened, 35 Covenants, New England (Colonial period), 6079 Covered bridges, 5724 Covey, Cyclone, 3747 Cowboys, 2657, 2700, 4152-54, 4158, 4161-63 bibl., 4190 dances, 5591 fiction, 683-86, 1145-48, 1484-86, 1686-87 folklore, 5503 in art, 5770, 5802 in literature, 4162-63 language (dialects, etc.), 2253, 5503 short stories, 687, 1145, 1686-87 songs & music, 5503, 5556, 5558-60 Cowdrey, Mary Bartlett, 5768 Cowell, Henry, 5682 Cowell, Sidney (Robertson), 5682 Cowie, Alexander, 2405 ed., 549 The Cowled hover, 2309 Cowley, Malcolm, 642, 955, 2406, 2408-9, 3758 ed., 357, 2406-7 Cox, John Harrington, ed., 5572 Cox, Reavis, 5963 Cox, William, 2295 Coxe, Louis O., 487, 2335 Coxey, Jacob S., about, 3440 INDEX / IIII Coyle, David Cushman, 5884 Cozens, Frederick W., 4983 Cozzens, James Gould, 1298-1302 Crabtree, Arthur B., 5299 Crabtree, Lotta, about, 2798 "Cracker" dialect in literature, 556, 1038 Craddock, Charles Egbert, pseud. See Murfree, Mary Noailles Crafts. See Arts and crafts Craig, Gordon, 4972 Craig, Hardin, 534 Craigie, Sir William A., ed., 2236 Craig's Wife, 2332 Cram, Ralph Adams, 694 Cramer, Clarence H., 5476 Cranch, Mary (Smith), 100 Crane, Edward M., 6453 Crane, Hart, 1303-6, 2544 about, 520, 1306, 1480, 2497, 2499, 2527 Crane, Milton, ed., 3494 Crane, Ronald S., ed., 2410 Crane, Stephen, 821-37 about, 821, 1278, 1923, 2285, 2365, 2372, 2430 Crane, Verner W., 122, 3180, 3186-87 ed., 3184 Crapy Cornelia, 1008 Craven, Avery O., 3058, 3366-67, 4075 comp., 3079 ed-, 3357. 3784 Craven, Wesley Frank, 3051, 4073 ed., 3727 Crawford, Bartholow V., 604 Crawford, Kenneth G., 6393 Crayon, Geoffrey, gent., pseud. See Irving, Washington The Crayon Miscellany, 381 Crazy Horse (Oglala Sioux chief), about, 2801, 3036 The Crazy Hunter, 1246 The Cream of the Jest, 1261-62 Creative Intelligence, 5254 Credit, 5963, 5974 agricultural, 5848 public, 3289, 3291 Chicago, 5985 Creech, Margaret, 4632 Creeds, comparative studies, 5397 Creek Indians, 4233, 4248-50 See also Five Civilized Tribes Creel, George, about, 3462 Creighton, James E., about, 5259 Cremin, Lawrence A., 5104, 5137 Creole dialect, 2265 in literature, 745, 759-61, 1032 Creole Sketches, 951-52, 954 Creoles in literature, 759-61, 946-52, 954-55 fiction, 745-50 Cress, Eleanor Chittenden, 4182 Cress Delahanty, 2213 Cresson, Margaret (French), 5736 Cresson, William P., 3284 The Cretan Woman, 1532, 1536 Crevecoeur, Michel Guillaume St. Jean de, 4232, 4500-1 about, 2456 Cricket, 5063 Crime and criminals, 2888, 4405, 4617, 4619, 4639, 4641, 4645-48, 4655- 56, 4659, 6306, 6308 biog. (collected), 4652 Colonial period, 6056 identification, 6294 labor, 6056 language (dialects, etc.), 2274 rehabilitation, etc., 4639-40, 4643, 4648, 4652 The West, 6220 See also Women — delinquents Crime prevention, 6309 Crimea Conference, Yalta, Russia, 3109, 3544>3567 Criminal cases, 6280 Criminal justice, 6294, 6303, 6306 Criminal law, 4645, 6292, 6308 administration, 6303 digests, 6276 Criminal procedure (law), 4645, 6282, 6289, 6294-95, 6298, 6301-3, 6305-6, 6308 Mass., 6292 New York (Colony), 6221 Criminal psychology, 2716-17, 4641 Criminal trials, hist., 6229 Criminology, 4639 Cripple Creek, Colo., 4174 hist., 4181 The Crisis, 763-65 The Crisis of the Old Order, 3500 Crissey, M. H., ed., 3357 A Critical Table, 1584 The Critical Period in American Lit- erature, 2450 Critical realism, 5255 Critical Woodcuts, 2505 Criticism, literary and art, 5688 anthologies, 2372, 2383, 2410-11, 2531,2538 bibl., 2550 Chicago school, 2410 drama, 2466, 2468 essays, 2425, 2472, 2477, 2479-81, 2498, 2503-5, 251 1, 2519-20, 2535-48, 2550 fiction, 2373, 2466, 2491, 2495 hist., 2507, 2510, 2515 Marxist, 2439 methods, 2443, 2550 "New Criticism," 2378, 2421, 2559 periodicals, 2492, 2551-77 periods when written (1764-1819), 109 (1820-70), 230, 313, 345, 449, 458, 465-67, 520, 533, 536, 538,551,614,618 (1871-1914), 896-97, 964, 977, 979, 986, 1004, 1010, 1016, 1022, IO44, U36 (1915-39), 1225-26, 1228-29, 1231, 1233-36, 1238, 1278- 83, 1304, 1306, 1312, 1347- 49, 1357-58, I36l, I363-7I, 1375,1377, 1397-1402, I50I- 5, 1622, 1675, 1678-79, 1809, 1823, 2423 Criticism, literary — Continued periods when written — Continued (1940-55), 1923, 1999-2000, 2125, 2128, 2356-63, 2373, 2388-90 poetry, 520, 614, 1044, 2378-79, 2452, 2491 principles, 2494 short stories, 2495 techniques, 2494 theory, 2421, 2512 Criticism and art, 5688 Criticism and Fiction, 977 The Crock, of Gold, 23 1 1 "Crocker poems," about, 323 Crockett, David, 2296, 2649-50 about, 2649-50, 2796, 3353, 5506 drama, 2301 Crofut, Florence S. M., 4041 Croker, Richard, about, 6432 Croly, Herbert D., 3424, 4502, 6352 Cronin, John F., 5484 Cronkhite, Bernice (Brown), ed., 5215 Cronon, Edmund David, 3046 The Crooked Mile, 241 5 Cross, Barbara M., 5476 Cross, Wilbur Lucius, 2651-52 about, 2652 The Cross and the Crown, 5452 Cross Creek., 1685 The Crossing, 766-67 Crotchets and Quavers, 5659 Crothers, Rachel, 2337, 2348 Crouse, Nellis M., 3160, 3170 Crouse, Russel, 1317, 2327, 2334-35 Croushore, James H., ed., 3693 Crow Indians, 3005 Crowder, Walter F., 6030 Crowell, Paul, 6207 Crowell, Pers, 5867 Crowl, Philip A., 3668 Croy, Homer, 2653-57, 3948 about, 2654-55 The Crucial Decade, 3484 The Crucible, 2048 Cruger, Jacob W., about, 6446 The Cruise of the Cow, 2746 Crum, Mason, 4436 Crumbling Idols, 896-97 Crusade in Europe, 3719 Crutchfield, Richard S., 5390 A Cry of Children, 1940, 1943 Cuba, 3569 fiction, 1500 independence, 3575 relations with, 3581 Cubberley, Ellwood P., 5138 Cuber, John F., 4549, 4619 Cullen, Countee, 1307-8 Cults, 5397-98, 5404-5, 5439-40, 5498 Culture, 31 1 5, 3736, 3738, 3741, 3750, 377L 3779, 3786, 4502-4, 4546, 4586,5351 and education, 5099, 5104, 5126-27, 5136,5200,5203,5243 European criticism & interpretation, 3771-72, 3779, 4223, 4225, 4230, 4234, 4271, 4300, 4303, 4336, 4506 1 1 12 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Culture — Continued foreign influence, 3146, 3227, 3474, 3737, 3740, 3758, 3768-70, 3774, 4187, 4189, 4197-98 bibl., 3768 hist., 3737 Colonial period, 3740, 3747-48 19th cent., 3399, 3436, 3744, 3754, 4293,4312 20th cent., 3474, 3479, 3746 urban, 4530, 4590 See also Indians, American — culture; Intellectual life; Jews — culture; also under place names, e.g., Massachu- setts — culture Culture, 292 Cumberland Mountains, short stories, 1084 Cumberland Road, 5931 Cumming, William K., 4688 Cummings, Edward Estlin, 1309-13 about, 1310, 13 1 2, 2426 Cummings, Homer S., 6227 Cummins, R., 5442 Cunningham, G. W., 5252 Cunningham, John T., 4053 Cunz, Dieter, 4480 A Cure of Flesh, 1299 Curme, George O., 2242-43 Curoe, Philip R. V., 5210 Currency question. See Monetary policy Current, Richard N., 3336, 3368, 3395 Currier, Thomas F., comp., 377 Currier & Ives about, 5778-79 bibl., 5778-79 A Curtain of Green, 2203 Curti, Merle E., 3065, 3103, 3729, 3785, 4526,5116,5194 ed., 2355, 3739 Curtis, George William, 2278 about, 2278 Cushing, Caleb, about, 2675 Cushing, Harvey W., 4829 about, 4821 Cushing, Marshall H., 4663 Cushman, Harvey B., drawings, 41 10 Cushman, Robert E., 61 1 7, 6 1 8 1 ed., 6110-25 Custer, George Armstrong, about, 3036 Custer State Park, S. Dak., guidebook, 3898 Custis, George Washington Parke, 2337 The Custom of the Country, 1850 Cutter, Charles Ammi, about, 6476 Cutter, William Parker, 6476 The Cynic's Word Book, 732 D D., H. See Doolittle, Hilda D. A. R. 5 4259-60, 6075 American Revolution, 3187, 3239, 3272,3519,3528,3569 bibl., 3519, 3521, 4229 Civil War, 2757, 3359, 3536, 3539, 3550 Diplomatic history — Continued See also Foreign relations Diplomatic and consular service, 3598— 3600, 3602, 3606 Diplomatic privileges and immunities, 3606 Dirks, Rudolph, about, 2865 Disabled, rehabilitation, etc., 4628-29, 4636-37 Disarmament, 3525 Disciples of Christ, 5442 hist., 5455 Discordant Encounters, 2535 Discovery and exploration, 4736, 4749, 4757 Minn., 4142 Utah, 4183 Washington (State), 4215 The West, 2971, 3335, 4149 See also under New France; The New World; Spanish North America Discovery of Europe, 2498 Diseases, 4870 control, 4867, 4874, 4877, 4881 etiology, 4829-30, 4867, 4881 stat., 4864, 4867 The Disenchanted, 1425 The Disinherited of Art, 2421 Dismal Swamp, 4336 Disney, Walt, about, 4957 Disobedience, civil. See Civil dis- obedience The Dispossessed, 1924 Disston, Hamilton, about, 4096 Distribution (economics). See Market- ing District of Columbia. See Washington, D.C. District of Columbia, 1332 Ditzion, Sidney, 6472 . Divine, Robert A., 4419 The Divine Comedy of Dante Alighieri, translation, 437 The Divine Pilgrim, 1 1 66 The Divinity School Address, 284 Divinity schools. See Theology — study & teaching Divorce, 3022, 4561 Divorce, 2317 Dix, Dorothea, about, 4834, 4837, 4839 Dixon, George, about, 5025 Dixon, Roland B., 3002 Do I Wake or Sleep, 161 5 Doane, Gilbert H, ed., 6486 Dobert, E. W., 4481 Dobie, James Frank, 687, 4190, 5509, 5520, 5527, 5531 ed., 5507,5518,5532 Dobzhansky, T., 3758 Dr. Bergen's Belief, 2134 Dr. Heidenhoff's Process, 727 Dr. Sevier, 745 Doctors. See Physicians and surgeons The Doctor's Son, 2071 Documentary films, 4958 Dodd, William E., 3286, 3369, 4069 ed., 3469 about, 3057 Dodd, Mead and Co., about, 6445 Dodds, Harold W., 5167 Dodge, Roger Pryor, 5644 INDEX / 1 1 15 Dodsworth, 1564 Doerflinger, William Main, comp., 5551 Dog on the Sun, 1 478 Dogs in fiction, 1051, 1541, 1635 Doherty, Robert Ernest, about, 4803 Dollar, Melvin L., 4886 A Dome of Many-Coloured Glass, 1584 Domesday Book, 1601 Domestic animals, 4276 A Domestic Dilemma, 2024 Dominations and Powers, 1739 Dominican Republic, relations with, 3575.3584.3587 Domnei, 1262 Don, the Story of a Lion Dog, i486 Donahey, William, 783 Donnan, Elizabeth, ed., 3045 Donne, John, about, 1902 Donner party, 3331 fiction, 1420 Donovan, Leo, 6207 Donovan, Robert J., 3482 Don't Go Away Mad, 21 17 Dooley, Mr., pseud. See Dunne, Finley Peter Doolittle, Hilda, 1319-24 The Doomed City, 526 Dorati, Antal, about, 5654 Dorfman, Joseph, 4538, 5876 Dorr, Thomas W., about, 3149 Dorris, Jonathan Truman, 3388 Dorson, Richard M., 5533-34 ed., 2345, 3244, 5535 Dos Passos, John, 1325-32 about, 2371, 2376, 2406, 2427-28, 2508-9 Dot, 2298 The Double Agent, 1228-29 Dougall, Herbert E., 5967 Douglas, Dorothy (Wolff), 4569 Douglas, Edward M., 2970 Douglas, Frederic H., 3017 Douglas, Marjory (Stoneman), 4007 Douglas, Paul H., 6048, 6182, 6342 Douglas, Stephen A., about, 3397, 3399 Douglas, William Orville, 2664-65 about, 2665 Douglass, Aubrey A., 5105 Douglass, Elisha P., 3241 Douglass, Harl R., 5154, 5224 ed., 5224 Douglass, Harlan Paul, 5485-87 Doull, James A., 4877 Dow, George Francis, 31 81 Dow, Lorenzo, about, 2805 Dow, Peggy, 2805 Dowell, Austin Allyn, 5869 Down an Unknown Jungle River, i486 Down by the Riverside, 2234 Down in the Holler, 2270 Downer, Alan S., 2359 Downes, Irene, ed., 5627 Downes, Olin, 5627, 5678 Downing, Major Jack, pseud. See Smith, Seba Downs, Joseph, 5796 Doyle, John A., 3 The Dragon and the Unicorn, 2102 Dragon Harvest, 1758 Dragon Seed, 1259 Dragon's Teeth, 1754, 1758 Drake, Daniel, 2666-67 about, 2667, 4822 Drake, Durant, 5255 Drake, Sir Francis, about, 3173 Drake, Francis S., 4036 Drake, Joseph Rodman, 328, 2295 about, 323 Drake, St. Clair, 4439 Drake, Samuel G., comp., 41 Drama anthologies, 2327, 2332-37, 2347-48, 4892-98, 4924 classical themes, 201, 205, 1532, 1535-36, 1556, 2101 collections, 2297-2317 experimental, 1357, 1359-60, 1647— 48, 1864, 2226 folk. See Folk drama historical themes, 198, 200, 206-8, 365, 1477, 1491, 1520, 1752, 2048 hist. & crit., 1175, 1571, 2378, 2466, 2468-70, 2472-73, 2475, 2506, 4900, 4904-5. 4907. 4924 bibl., 4905 Negro themes, 1821 periods (1764-1819), 105, 144-45, 168— 70, 2297-2317 (1820-70), 198-201, 205-8, 365, 511, 517-18, 674, 676, 2297-2317 (1871-1914), 701, 705, 1013, 1069^70, 2297-2317 (1915-39). 1172-74. 1176-77. 1199-1212, 1271, 1317, 1357, i359-6o, 1403, 1473. 1475, 1477, M9I-93. 1518-20, 1532, 1536, 1545-50, 1556, 1587, 1608, 1688-90, 1740, 1749-53, 1762, 1821, 1864- 65,1868, 1877 (1940-55), 1988-91, 1995-98, 2023, 2043, 2046-49, 2063- 68, 2098, 2101, 2110, 2112- 14, 2117, 2133-35, 2145. 2218-21, 2223, 2225-26, 2228 psychological, 2218, 2221, 2223, 2228 radio, 4966 realistic, 1518-20, 1647-48, 1688, 1995-98, 2023, 2043, 2046-47, 2049, 2063 regional, 1475, 1477, 49 2 6 social themes, 1069-70, 1 199-1204, 1271, 1519-20, 1647-48, 1688- 91, 1996-98, 2045-47, 2049, 2063, 2145 symbolism in, 2218-19, 2226 verse. See Verse drama See also Comedy; Theater Draper, John W., about, 3761 Draper, Lyman Copeland, about, 3053 Drayton, John, 4262 about, 4261 Dream Girl, 1689, 2334 A Dream of Love, 1 877 The Dream of Success, 2464 A Dreamer's Journey, 5270 The Dreamy Kid, 1648 Dred Scott case, 6258 Dreiser, Helen (Patges), 1346 Dreiser, Theodore, 1334-45 about, 821, 887, 957, 1089, 1344, 1346-49, 2372, 2406, 2430, 2464, 2476, 2509 Drepperd, Carl W., 5596 Dressel, Paul L., 5160 Dressier, David, 4643 Drew, Elizabeth A., 1361 Drexler, Arthur, ed., 5718 Drifting Apart, 2304 Drinker, Henry S., 6319 Driver, Carl S., 3287 Drucker, Peter F., 6012 Drucker, Philip, 2998 Drude, Oscar, cd., 2957 Drug traffic, vocabulary, 2274 Drum-Taps, 623-24 Drummond, Andrew L., 5441 Drummond, Thomas, about, 4734 Drums, 1240-41 Drums along the Mohawk., 1355 Drury, Betty, 4407 Drury, C. M., 5442 Drury, John, 5794 Drury, Newton B., 421 1, 5866 Dubinsky, David, about, 6049 Du Bois, Guy Pene, 5800 Dubuque, Iowa, guidebook, 3892 Ducange, Victor, 2299 Du Courteil, Lafitte, about, 5121 Due, John F., 5971 Due process of law, 6094-95, 6097, 6106 Duer, William, about, 6014 Duffey, Bernard I., 2419 Duffy, John, 4877 Duke University, 643 Duker, A. G., 4457-58 Duker, Sam, 5226 The Duk.es Motto, 231 1 Dulany, Daniel, about, 3257 Dulcy, 2348 Dulles, Foster Rhea, 3428, 3532-33, 3563. 3592, 4620, 4985, 6034 Dulles, John Foster, 3622 Dulles, Joseph H., 5344 Dumbauld, Edward, 6074 Dumond, Dwight Lowell, 3370-71 Dunaway, Wayland F., 4055, 4490 Dunbar, Paul Laurence, 856-61 about, 859 Dunbar, Seymour, 4226 Duncan, Dclbcrt J., 5945 ed., 6019 Duncan, Harry, 2350 Duncan, Isadora, 4972 about, 4972 Duncan, Otis Dudley, 4395 Dunellen, N. J., 3812 Duniway, Clyde Augustus, 2929 Dunkards, 4480 Dunlap, Leslie W., 3052 Dunlap, Lloyd A., cd., 3390 Dunlap, William, 109, 2299, 2337, 2347. 4905. 5690 about, 5690 Dunn, D., 5442 Dunn, Esther C, 4917 Dunn, Frederick Roger, comp., 3079 Dunn. Waldo 1 Mary, 3271 IIl6 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Dunne, Finley Peter, 862-66 about, 558 Dunning, Philip, 2332 Dunning, Wilbald, about, 4540 Dunning, William Archibald, 3372, 3554 Du Noiiy, Lecomte, about, 5434 Dunster, Henry, about, 3198 Dupee, Frederick W., 1018-19 ed., 1015 Du Pont, Eleuthere Irenee, 5912 Du Pont, Henry A., about, 5912 Du Pont, Lammot, about, 5912 Du Pont Company, about, 5912 Du Pont de Nemours, Pierre Samuel, about, 5 1 21 Dupuy, Richard Ernest, 3644a Dupuy, Trevor N., 3644a Durand, John D., 4392 Durant, John, 4986, 5024 Duren, William Larkin, 5475 Durham, Frank, 1514 Duron, Jacques, 1742 D'Usseau, Arnaud, 2334 Dust and Light, 1858 Dust Bowl, fiction, 1775, 1777 Dutch in Brooklyn, 4046 in New York fiction, 511, 514-15 humor, 382-83 in the Middle West, 4493 Dutch, Pennsylvania. See Pennsyl- vania Germans The Dutchman's Fireside, 514-15 Dutton, William Sherman, 5912 Duveen, Joseph Duveen, baron, about, 1204 The Dwelling Place of Light, 762 Dwight, Sereno E., ed., 29, 31 Dwight, Timothy, 118-21,4271-72 about, 4271 Dwight, Timothy, Jr., 4271 Dwight, William T., 4271 Dyer, Brainerd, 3332-33 Dyer, Frank L., 4782 Dyer, W. A., 5222 Dykeman, Wilma, 4021 Dykstra, C. A., 5336 Dynamo, 1648 Eagle in the Egg, 1551 The Eagle, the jaguar, and the Serpent, 3016 Eagles, 2958 The Eagle's Shadow, 1262 Eakins, Thomas, about, 5764 Eardley, Armand J., 2942 Earle, Alice (Morse), 4227 Earle, Edward Mead, 6075 Early Americana, 1692 An Early Martyr, 1881 The Early Worm, 121 4 Earnest, Ernest P., 4745, 4828, 5177 Earth Horizon, 1196 Earth Song, 4202 The Easiest Way, 2347 East, Robert A., 6016 The East (general) archaeology, 2990 geology, 2936 guidebooks, 3788, 3790 historic houses, 5722, 5794 language (dialects, etc.), 2263, 2269 physiography, 2936 travel & travelers, 4235-36. 4251, 4262 trees, 2963 See also Eastern seaboard; Middle At- lantic States; New England East Church, Salem, Mass , 2600 East of Eden, 1779 East River, a Novel, 1 193 East Wind, 1584 Eastern seaboard geography, 2968-69 in literature, 2459 language (dialects, etc.), 2263 travel & travelers, 171, 1002, 4239, 4273, 4279, 4334, 4336, 4358 Eastern shore, Md., 3999 Eastern Star, Order of the, about, 4574 Eastman, George, about, 5671 Eastman, Joseph B., about, 2678 Eastman, Linda A., 6476 Eastman School of Music, Rochester, N.Y., University, about, 5671 The Easy Chair, 2415 Eaton, Amos, about, 4737 Eaton, Clement, 3344, 3373, 3766, 4070 Eaton, Margaret L. (O'Neale) Timber- lake, 2668-69 about, 2668-69 Eaves, T. C. Duncan, ed., 554 Ebaugh, Franklin G., 4859 Eberhart, Richard, 1350-52 Eberman, Edwin, 2908 Ebersole, Luke E., 4551 Eby, Edwin H., 653 The Ecclesiastical History of New Eng- land, 43-44 Ecclesiastical law, 5420-22 Eckelberry, R. H., ed., 5244 Eckenrode, Hamilton J., 3419 Eckert, Ruth E., ed., 5202 Eckman, Jeannette, 3822 Eckstorm, Fannie Hardy, 5566 Ecological Society of America, 2956 Ecology, 3022, 5810 Economic assistance to foreign nations, 3598, 3636-37, 3639-40 Economic conditions, 3440, 3734, 3786, 4505-8, 4550, 4567, 4634, 4777, 4783, 5883, 5894-99, 6005, 6136, 6372 atlases, 2972, 2974 hist., 3073. 3085-98, 5877, 5881, 5883, 6016 Civil War, 3374, 3539 19th cent., 3352, 3399, 3421, 3436, 3447, 4315-17. 5875 20th cent., 3436, 3474, 3478-79» 3500,5875 rural communities, 4585 See also Geography — economic; also subdivisions History and Economic conditions under names of places and regions, e.g., Montana — hist.; Southern States — econ. condit. Economic Cooperation Administration, about, 3640 Economic influences on literature, 2485 Economic themes in literature editorials, sketches, etc., 1907 fiction, 726, 728-31, 775-77, 887-89, 941, 956-58, 973-76, 978, 1090- 95, 1107-10, 1270-75, 1333-37. 1339. 1372-74. 1376, 1754-56, 1758, 1775. 1777- 1792. 1887, 2079, 2088, 2194, 2229, 2517 poetry, 1038, 1061-63, 1069, 1664, 2079 short stories, 887 tracts, 1754 Economics, 4513, 5254, 5875-6058 hist., 3106, 3139, 3497, 3500, 3747, 3758, 4538, 5876, 5886, 6082 social & ethical aspects, 5899 sources, 3319 See also Commercial policy; Foreign economic relations Economists, 5888 Ecumenical movement, 5401, 5405, 5487 Eddy, Mary Baker, about, 5439, 5453 Eddy, Mary O., comp., 5573 Eddy, Richard, 5473 Edel, Leon, 1020, 1280 ed., 990, 1006, 1012-14 about, 1 016 Edelman, Jacob M., 4706 Edgar Huntley, 11 4-1 5, 117 Edge, Mary E., comp., 398 Edgell, David P., 230 Edgewater People, 885 Edidin, Ben M., 4454 Edison, Thomas Alva, about, 4782 Editing, 2901, 2906-7, 3047, 6438, 6449 See also Journalism Editorials, sketches, etc. (1764-18 1 9), 140-43 (1820-70), 192, 194-97. 332, 379- 80, 422-26, 445-48, 463, 546, 556, 558-61, 612-13, 674 (1871-1914), 701-5, 732, 739, 862- 66, 923, 1064-65, 1068, 1099, 1 103-4, 1 106 (1915-39), 1214-20, 1238, 1263, 1267-69, 1294, 1312, 1317-18, J 375> 1378, 1409, 1602, 1622, J 659, 1724-26, 1815-20, 1859-63 (1940-55), 1907, 2149-52, 2155, 2189, 2191 See also Essays; Journalism; Short stories Edman, Irwin, 287, 5197, 5222, 5289, 5291 ed., 5120, 5288, 5374 Edmunds, Walter Dumaux, 1353-56 Education, 3469, 3740, 4387, 4513, 4550-51, 5098-5249. 5254. 5285, 5289-91 administration, 5139, 5247 articulation, 5107, 5131, 5217 associations & societies, 5106, 51 12, 5116, 5131, 5150, 5157, 5162-63, 5181, 5186, 5205, 5228, 5230, 5242-43, 5246-47 INDEX / i"7 Education — Continued bibl., 5108, 5110-11, 5241, 5244, 5247-49 developments & innovations, 5117-20, 5134. 5137. 5157-58, 5224-25. 5227, 5230-31, 5237, 5246-47 direct., 51 12 editorials, sketches, etc., 655, 2425 fiction, 583-84, 1417, 1792 finances, 5105, 5135, 5141. 5247 foreign countries, 5242 foreign population, 4421, 4483, 4493 German immigrant influence, 4477 hist., 5101-2, 5104-5, 5108-10, 5113, 5116, 5121-22, 5125, 5127- 28, 5130 index, 5241 Jews, 4457-58, 4461 library manual, 5098 methods & techniques, 2767, 5224-31 Negroes, 4443, 4450, 5116, 5206 periodicals, 5128, 5230, 5242, 5244- 45, 5247-49 philosophy, 5115-30, 5236, 5246, 5307 poetry, 165-67 problems & controversies, 5226, 5232- 39 reference books, 5098, 51 10-12, 5161 research, 5098, 511 1, 5246-47 rural, 5105, 5208, 5246 sectional, 51 13 secular, 5103 segregated, 5206, 5236 soc. aspects, 5109, 5116-18, 5126, 5128, 5134, 5136-38, 5M0, 5M2, 5146, 5150, 5155, 5158, 5177, 5183, 5206, 5208-9, 5211, 5215, 5224, 5240 sources, 5108, 5121-22, 5125, 5127- 28, 5130, 5138, 5143, 5191-92, 5201, 5212, 5240—49 stat., 51 14 surveys, 51 14, 5186, 5201, 5205-6 theories, 460, 5115-30, 5220, 5237 women, 165, 167, 5116, 5193, 5198 bibl., 5212 yearbooks, 5240, 5243, 5246 Ala., 4099 British Commonwealth, 5134 Charleston, S. C, 3763 England, 5129 Germany, 5310 Ky., 4107 Mass., 5125 Nashville, 3765 New England, 3745, 4261, 4271 N.C., 4090 Northwest, Old, 41 12 Ohio Valley, 5 121 Pa., 4055 Philadelphia, 3764 S.C., 4091 Southern States, 4083, 5108, 51 16, 5145,5206 Tex., 4194 Va., hist., 5122 W. Va., 4089 See also Television in education; also types of education, e.g., Adult edu- cation; under school subjects, e.g., Education — Continued Music — education; and subdivision Study and teaching under special subjects, e.g., Law — study & teaching Education and business, 51 16, 5168, 5181, 5190 Education and church, 5419, 5491, 5494 Education and civilization, 5136, 5140, 5153 Education and political ideas, 5138 Education and state, 5099, 5 141, 5164- 65. 5167, 5189, 5211, 6135 The Education Index, 5241 The Education of an American, 2891 The Education of Henry Adams, 695- 98 about, 2407 Educational law and legislation, 5139 Educational measurements and testing, 5229, 5247 Educational plans (early), 5121-23 Educational Policies Commission, 5106, 5205 Educational psychology, 5307 Educational reform, 165-67, 186-87, 51 17 Educational research, 5098, 5112, 5247 Educational trends, 5100, 5104 Edwards, Alba M., 6043 Edwards, Everett E., comp., 3147 Edwards, Herbert W., 2441 Edwards, John H., 1669 Edwards, Jonathan, 21-31, 2290, 5297- 98 about, 21, 29-30, 2288, 2480-81, 5297, 5299, 5396, 5428, 5436, 5472 Edwards, Newton, 5139-40 Egan, John, about, 3439 Egbert, Donald Drew, 3758, 3768 ed., 3753 Eggan, Fred R., 2990 Eggleston, Edward, 867-77, 3740 about, 3058 The Ego and the Centaur, 1982 Ehlers, Henry, ed., 5236 Eidesheim, Julie, ed., 1171 Eight-year study (education), 5131 Eimi, 131 1 Einstein, Alfred, about, 5434 Einstein, Lewis, 3267 Einstein, 1586 Eire Railroad Co. v. Tompkins case (1938), 6293 Eisenhart, Luther P., about, 4059 Eisenhower, Dwight D., 3633, 3637, 37i9 about, 3482 Eisenstadt, Abraham S., 3046 Eisner, Simon, 4606 Eitel, Edmund H., ed., 1 128 Eiteman, Wilford John, 5981 Eitt, Mrs. G. Embry, 5503 Ekirch, Arthur A., 3754, 6061 Ekstrom, Kjell, 2366 Ekwall, E., 2364 El Paso, Tex., 4176, 4187 Elder, George W., 5017 Eldorado, 2282 Eldorado, or, Adventures in the Path of Empire, 4352-53 Election law, 6338, 6400, 6403, 6406-8, 6410 Elections, 6149, 6336, 6340, 6404, 6407-8, 6411-12, 6416, 6418, 6422 hist., 6347, 6401 of 1824, 3313 of 1840, 3326 of 1866, 3361 of 1876, 3417-18, 3430, 3432 of 1884, 6373 of 1896,3135 of 1912,3473 of 1924, 6362 of 1940, 6419 of 1948, 6414 stat., 6413-15 Detroit, 6420 III, 6383 Wis., 4139 Electoral college, 64 1 1 Electricity, 4750 Elementary education, 5243 administration, 5135, 5 151 curricula, 5142, 5158, 5226 developments & innovations, 5147 European influences, 5142 finances, 5135 hist., 5142, 5147, 5151 methods, 5142 organization, 5135, 5151 philosophy, 51 17 soc. aspects, 5142 See also Primary education Elements of Critical Theory, 2421 Elfenbein, Julien, 2902 Elfving, Fredrik, ed., 4243-44 Elias, Robert H., 1347 Eliot, Charles William, 2670-71 about, 4034, 5203 Eliot, John, about, 3198 Eliot, Thomas Stearns, 1357-60, 241 1, 2425 ed., 1668 about, 1225, 1361-71, 2426, 2443, 2476, 2497, 2499, 2527, 2535, 2544 bibl., 1362, 1367 Eliot Indian Bible, 6448 Elizabeth the Queen, 11 72, 1 174 Elkin, Henry, 3041 Elks, Benevolent and Protective Order of, about, 4574 Eller, P. H., 5442 Ellingston, John R., 4644 Ellington, Duke, 5642 Ellinwood, Leonard Webster, 5606, 5632 Elliott, Charles Winslow, 3655 Elliott, George R., 2375, 2425 Elliott, John Lovejoy, about, 5435 Elliott, Maud (Howe), 4040 Elliott, William Y., 3608, 3642 Ellis, Elmer, ed., 865 Ellis, George C, 4036 Ellis, George E., 3182 Ellis, Harold Milton, ed., 2330 Ellis, Howard S., 3637 Ellis, John Howard, ed., 9-10 IIl8 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Ellis, John Tracy, 5448, 5478 ed., 5449 Ellis, Lewis Ethan, 3058, 3100, 3517 Ellison, Ralph, 1966-67 Ellison, William Henry, 4202 Elmer Gantry, 1563 Elmtown's Youth, 4564 Elovson, H., 2364 Elsbree, WillardS., 5216 Elsie Venncr, 375 Elsworth, Ralph H., 5842 Ely, Mary L., ed., 5209 Ely, R. T., ed., 581 1 Emberson, Frances G., ed., 5569 Embroidery, 5593, 5785 The Emergence of Modern America, 3093 Emerson, Edward Waldo, 297 ed., 294 Emerson, Ralph Waldo, 280-301, 2290, 2544 ed., 313 about, 21, 186, 230, 302-6, 470, 585, 606, 610, 621, 633, 740, 1010, 2277, 2280, 2375, 2380, 2385, 2397. 2404. 2422-23, 2476, 2479- 80, 2492, 2502-3, 2513, 2545, 5222, 5254, 5265, 5300-1, 5472, 6424 Emerson, Thomas I., ed., 6126 Emery, Edwin, 2845, 2855 Emigres. See Refugees, political Emmet, Boris, 5956 Emmet County, Iowa, guidebook, 3893 Emmons, Nathanael, about, 5428 The Emotional Discovery of America, 2503 Emotions, 5339 Empedocles. Fragments, translation, 1556 The Emperor Jones, 1648, 2348 Emrich, Duncan, 5526 The Encantadas, 484 Encounter in April, 2123 Encyclopaedia Britannica, 5748 End of Summer, 1208, 2333 Enderbury Island, 4218 Endocrinology, 4722 T he Enemy , 1684 The Enemy Gods, 1551 Engel, Edwin A., 1650 Engineers and engineering, 4793-4803 England, travel & travelers, 96-98, 249, 252, 263-64, 280, 333, 350, 426, 449, 460-61, 489, 674, 677-78, 688, 986, 1357, 1968 Englander, R., 2364 Engle, Paul Hamilton, 1968-72 Engler, Adolf, ed., 2957 English, Van H, maps, 3255 English Bards and Scotch Reviewers, 458 English influences culture, 3227, 3737, 3740 education, 5191 literature drama, 168-70, 206-8, 517 poetry, 7, 72-74, 1 18-19, 144- 45. 323. 614-17, 1303, 1902, 2098, 2530 English influences — Continued literature — Continued prose, 12, 43-44, 75-77. 122, 165,333.350,585. 2854 Southern colonies, 4073 English language. See Language English national characteristics, 96, 263, 280, 291, 350 The English Notebooks, 350 English Traits, 291, 298 Engravings, 5595, 5763, 5780, 5782 See also Prints The Enlightenment, 2412, 2503 The Enormous Room, 13 10 Entertainment, 2808, 4098, 4121, 4162-63, 4281, 4497, 4520, 4550, 4577. 4593, 4892-4982, 5801 See also specific types, e.g., Opera; Sports Entomology, 4722 Entrepreneurship, 6023 Epic poetry. See Poetry — epic & ex- tended narrative Epics, translations, 1556 Epidemics, 4874 Colonial period, 4809, 4830, 4877 hist., 4877 See also Smallpox— epidemic (1721); Yellow fever — epidemic, Phila- delphia (1793) Episcopal Church, 5404, 5442 hist., 5456-57 Epistle to Prometheus, 2413 Epitaphs, collections, 4527 Epstein, Lenore A., 4448 Equality, 728 Equality before the law, 6060, 6063, 6094, 6106, 6126, 6374 Equitable remedies, 6279 Equity, 6279, 6282, 6300 Erickson, Charlotte, 4408 Ericsson, John, about, 4786 Erie, guidebook, 3818 Erie, Lake, 3868 Erie Canal, fiction, 1 155, 1157-58, 1 160, 1353-54,1356 Erie County, Pa., guidebook, 3818 Erie Water, 1356 Ernst, James E., 3197 Ernst, Morris L., 6127 Ernst, Robert, 4409 Erosion, 5808, 5818 Erskine, John, ed., 2393 Ervenberg, Louis Cachand, about, 4734 Esarey, Logan, 4123 Escapade, 1743 Eskimos, Alaskan, 2719-20 Espey, John J., 1670 Espinosa, Jose Manuel, 5537 The Esquimau Maiden's Romance, 798- 99 Essay on Rime, 2142 An Essay on the Use and Advantages of the Fine Arts, 1 65-66 Essays (1764-1819), 146-48, 179, 184-85 (1820-70), 230, 280-83, 285-87, 291-93, 298-301, 381, 465, 467, 469, 520, 533, 618 Essays — Continued (1871-1914), 701, 705, 740-44, 896- 97, 900, 945, 951-52, 955, 964, 977, 979, 1038, 1046, 1096 (1915-39), 1226, 1229, 1233-34, 1267, 1357-58, 1378, 1445, 1585, 1602, 1664, 1668, 1673, 1735, 1738-39, 1783, 1791, 1810, 1828, 1873, 1884 (1940-55), 2017 (20th cent.), 2372, 2375-80, 2383, 2388, 2394-98, 2401, 2406-7, 2410-12, 2415, 2421, 2424-25, 2435, 2449, 2466-72, 2474-75, 2477, 2479-81, 2492, 2497-98, 2503, 2505, 2511-13, 2515, 2519- 20, 2530-31, 2535-42, 2544-48, 2550 See also Editorials, sketches, etc. Essays, familiar (1820-70), 192, 368, 406-8, 414, 449, 465, 467, 506-10, 674, 1 136- 38 (1915-39), 1317, 1859-63 Essays To Do Good, 45 Essert, Paul L., 5209 Estavan, Lawrence, ed., 4918 Esther, 691-92 Esther Wynn's Love-Letters , 984 Estherville, Iowa, guidebook, 3893 Esthetics, 5254, 5282, 5289-91, 5351, 5366, 5694 literary, 2387, 2453, 2512, 2529 Ethan Frome, 1848 Ethical Culture movement, 5435 Ethics, 3758, 5252, 5254, 5257, 5273, 5289, 5291, 5312, 5319, 5323, 5346, 5354. 5357-58, 5375 legal, 6319-20 political, 3760, 6342-44 See also Social and business ethics Ethics and law, 6261-62 The Ethics of Living fim Crow, 2234 Ethnology, 2982-83, 2985, 3004, 3007, 3010, 3012, 3030 See also Anthropology; Archaeology and prehistory Ethridge, M., 3562 Etiquette, 4532 Eureka, 531.533 Euripides. Medea, translation and adaption, 1535 Europe economic relations, 3539, 3619, 3637, 3639 relations with, 3138, 3528, 3536, 3617, 3769-71 travel & travelers (1764-1819), 96-98, 101, 122 (1820-70), 222, 252, 263-64, 280, 313, 323, 381, 414, 426- 27. 449. 489. 506, 674, 677- 78, 2282, 2462 (1871-1914), 713, 768-71, 887, 941, 964, 984, 986, 1136 (1915-39), 1242, 1432, 1659, 1766, 1839,1845, 1887,1889- 90 anthologies, 2498 fictional, 986-91, 996-1001, 1004, 1007, 1845, 2091, 2187 INDEX / 1 1 19 Europe — Con tinued World War I, 3541 World War II, 3718-19, 3722, 3726- Europe in literature descr., 2282 diaries, journals, etc., 350, 414, 489, 1079 editorials, sketches, etc., 313, 426, 674,677-78,941,964,984 essays, 414, 506 fiction, 333, 971-72, 987-91, 996- 1001, 1004, 1008, 1242-45, 1247, 1251, 1396, 1495, 1656, 1887, 1889-90, 2091-93, 2123, 2146 hist., 693-94 letters, 96 poetry, 323 satire, 769-71 short stories, 1004, 1007, 1242, 1250, 1659 soc. life & cust., 96, 252, 263-64, 426 Europe without Baedeker, 2535 European immigrants, 4407-8, 4412- 14, 4419, 4422, 4460 European influences culture, 3146, 3474, 3758, 3769-70 education, 5128, 5142-43 literature, 2365, 2399 Colonial, 17 (1764-1819), 104-8, 118, 120 (1820-70), 201, 205-8, 323, 333. 381, 393. 427. 43°. 449, 506, 674, 676-78 (1871-1914), 887, 941, 964, 986, 1048, 1089 (I9I5-39). 1303. Mil (1940-55), 2123 essays, 2412, 2424 hist. & crit., 2534 poetry, 2530 European literature, hist. & crit., 1235 European Recovery Program, 3638, 3640 European War, 1914-18. See World War I The Europeans, 1008 Eustis, William, about, 3660 Eutaw, 552 Eva Gay, 1747 Evangelical and Reformed Church, about, 5442 Evangelical Mission Covenant Church, about, 5442 Evangelical United Brethren Church, about, 5442 Evangeline, 429 about, 745 Evangelists, 5403, 5480 Evans, George Heberton, 6015 Evans, Henry Clay, 3580 Evans, Herbert McLean, about, 4721 Evans, Nathaniel, 145 Evans, Oliver, about, 4795 Evans, Walker, photographs by, 1907 Evening in Spring, 1964 The Evening Post (New York), 2873 about, 2882 The Evening Sun (Baltimore), about, 2876 Everett, C. W., 5197 Everett, Edward, about, 2462, 3776 Everglades, Fla., 4007 Everleigh sisters, 2836 Every Man His Own Boswcll, 371-74 Every Soul Is a Circus, 1581 Everyday Is Saturday, 1 860 Evjue, W. T., 6195 Evolution, 4537 and philosophy, 3758, 5259, 5274, 5289,5303,5317 and pragmatism, 5264 and religion, 3758, 5337, 5428-30 See also Darwinism Evolution (theories) in literature, 695- 98, 716, 2404, 2480 Ewan, Joseph A., 4734 Ewbank, Henry L., 4691 Ewen, David, 5678, 5685 comp., 5605 Ewers, John Canfield, 3018 Ewin, Cortez A. M., 6239, 6415-16 Excavations: A Book, of Advocacies, 1828 Executive branch, 6075, 6084, 6133, 6140, 6146, 6184, 6191, 6193, 6310, 6312-13 Continental Congress, 6083 functions, 3725, 6137, 6172-73, 6178, 6180-81, 6311-12, 6316 hist., 6194 interdepartmental committees, 6189 laws. See Administrative law local. See Local executive branch organization, 6173-74, 6178, 6180- 81, 6185, 6187 See also States — executive branch Executive-legislative relations, 3610-11, 6140, 6142-43, 6156-57, 6178, 6191, 6342 Executive Office of the President, about, 6144 Executive power, 6093, 6140, 6142-43, 6146-48, 6178, 6180-81, 6340, 6355. 6370, 6422 Civil War, 6081, 6191 The Exile, 1257-58 Exile's Return, 2408 Exotics and Retrospectives, 951-52 Expansionism, 3154, 3167, 3180, 3306, 3312, 3322, 3335, 3428, 3448-49' 3533, 3586-87, 3760 in literature, 2441 See also Territorial expansion Expatriate authors, 986, 1242, 1357, 1432, 1494, 1611, 1766, 1839, 2087, 2408, 3768 Expatriated Americans, 986 fiction, 989-91, 1004, 1611, 2376 The Expense of Greatness, 1 231 Experience and Art, 2453 Experimental writing. See Literature- experimental writing Experimentalism, 5271 Experiments of Spiritual Life and Health, 87 Exploration. See Discovery and ex- ploration; Polar exploration Explorers, 4114, 421 1, 4213 See also Names of individual explor- ers, e.g., Columbus, Christopher Expression in America, 1571 Exultations, 1666 Ezekiel, Mordecai, 5898 A Fable, 1379, 1396 A Fable for Critics, 402, 458 Fables in Slang, 702 Fabricant, Solomon, 5905, 6136 The Face of Time, 1374 Faces in the Crowd, 4556 Faculty psychology, 5307 Fadiman, Clifton, 739, 1 1 1 8 comp., 3152 ed., ion Fagin, Nathan B., 541 Fagley, Frederick L., 5454 Fahrenheit 451 , 1932 Fahrney, R. R., 3058 Fainsod, Merle, 5885 Faint Clews & Indirections, 643 Faint Perfume, 1456 Fairbank, John King, 3506 Fairchild, Henry Pratt, 4427 Fairchild, Herman Le Roy, 4717, 4733 Fairfax, 23 1 6 Fairs, 4100, 4124, 5827 Fairyland, 526 The Faith Healer, 1069-70, 2337 Faith healing, 481 1 Faithful Are the Wounds, 2127 A Faithful Narrative of the Surprising Wor\ of God, 22-23 Falconer, John I., 5820 Falk, Isidore S., 4883 Falk, Robert, 2401 Falkner, William. See Faulkner, William The Fall of British Tyranny, 2347 The Fall of the City, 2333 The Fall of the House of Usher, 529 False Dawn {The 'Forties), 1845 False Shame and Thirty Years, 2299 Family, 4441, 4466, 4469, 4550-51, 4558, 4560-62, 4567, 4571-72. 5070 A Family Matter, 1553 The Family Reunion, 1359 The Famous Mrs. Fair, 2348 Faner, Robert D., 654 Fantastic Fables, 739 Fantastics and Other Fancies, 951-52 Far East policy, 3594. 3596 question, 3568 relations with, 3426, 3591, 3596, 3617,3632 World War II. 3723 The Far Side of Paradise, 1431 Farber, Norma, 2350 A Farewell to Arms, 1 496 Fargo, Lucile F., 4217 Faris, R. E. L., 3758 Farley, James A., 6354-55 about, 6354-5S Farm and rural life, 2891, 4395. 4397. 4466, 4500-1. 4561, 4579, 4581- 85.4594.5832 art, 5765 bibl., 4580 drama, 1475 1 120 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Farm and rural life — Continued editorials, sketches, etc., 556, 558-61, 1724, 1907 essays, 506, 509, 1137-38, 1859, 2591 fiction, 402, 716, 718, 1290, 1299, 1301, 1355, 1379. 1388, 1403-4. 1420-22, 1474, 1476, 1541, 1653, 1681-83, 1698, 1702, 1704, 1720- 2 3> !775> x 777> 1786, 1792, 1796, 1839, 2005-6, 2030, 2052, 2161, 2166, 2210, 2212-13, 2282 poetry, 662, 753-55, 1126-31, 1290, 1295, 1451-52. 1727. 1731. 1823, 1968, 2166, 2172 short stories, 563, 612-13, 881-86, 890-95, 1023-31, 1379, 1476, 1724, 1796-97, 2166-68, 2170-71 Conn., 4041 Middle West, 2655 Vt., 2742 See also Communities, rural; Farmers; Plantation life The Farm and the Fireside, 556 Farm Ballads, 754-55 Farm Legends, 753 Farm management, 5839 Farm mechanization, 5822, 5830 Farm produce. See Agricultural products Farmer-Labor Party, about 6356 Farmers, 5837 editorials, sketches, etc., 1907 fiction, 1474, 1775, 1777 folklore, 5523 German, 4479 immigrant, 4406 Irish, 4498 songs & music, 5559, 5576 Rocky Mountains, 4172 Southern States, 4081 The West, 4149 See also Farm and rural life; Soci- ology, rural The Farmer's Advice to the Villagers, 121 Farmers' Alliance, about, 6358 The Farmer's Almanack., 5524, 5541 about, 5524, 5541 The Farmers Hotel, 2077 Farmers' movement. See Agrarianism Farmers Union, about, 5831 Farming. See Agriculture Farquhar, Francis P., ed., 4210 Farra, Kathryn, 4624 Farragut, David (sculpture), 5740 Farrand, Max, ed., 126, 3357, 3784, 6087 Farrar, Victor J., 3429 Farrell, James Thomas, 1132, 1372-73, 5291 about, 2372, 2376, 2427, 2509 Fascism, 3149 Fashion, 2337, 2347 Fashionable Follies, 2347 Fashions in Literature, 1136 Fast, Howard Melvin, 1973-80 ed., 159, 1345 Fatal Interview, 1 609 Fate, 292 Father and Son, 1374 Father Divine, about, 5439, 5498 Fatout, Paul, 732 Faulkner, Harold U., 3081, 3096, 5877, 6034 Faulkner, William, 1379-96, 2406 about, 1397-1402, 1809, 2372, 2376, 2427-28, 2508 Fauna. See Animals Faunce, Roland C, 5225 Fauset, Arthur Huff, 5498 Faust, Albert Bernhardt, 4477 Faust, Clarence H., 2401 ed., 30 Faust, translation, 2282 Fay, Albert H., 4177 Fay, Bernard, 3773 Fay, Jay Wharton, 5388 Fay, Theodore Sedgwick, 2295 Faye, Harold, maps, 4057 The Feast of Ortolans, 1 174 Feather, Leonard G., 5642 Fechner, Gustav Theodor, about, 5326 Fechter, Charles, 2313 Federal Communications Commission, 4710 Federal Council of the Churches of Christ, 5487 about, 5405 Federal courts, 6280 Federal Emergency Relief Administra- tion, about, 4630 Federal government. See Government Federal Housing Administration, about, 4600 Federal Library Services Act, 6480 Federal-local relations, 6218 The Federal Radio Commission, about, 4706 Federal Reserve Bank of New York, about, 5983 Federal Reserve System, about, 5983, 5986, 5993 Federal Reserve System. Board of Governors, 5986 Federal-state relations, 6076, 6078, 6090, 6096, 6099, 6103, 6198-99, 6206, 6293 Federal Theater Project, hist., 4915 Federal Writers' Project, 3786, 5515 Federal Writers' Project. New York (City), 4497 Federalism Colonial period, 3245 18th cent., 3141, 3245-46 New England, 3275 The Federalist, 2291, 6075 Federalist newspapers, 2873, 2875 Federalist Party, 3279-81, 3285, 3305, 3308, 6374 The Federalists, 6175 Feibleman, James, 5351 about, 5351 Feidelson, Charles N., 2420 Feild, Robert D., 4957 Feinberg, Charles E., 659 Feis, Herbert, 3483, 3593 Feldman, William Taft, 5278 Feller, John Henry, 4975 Felton, William R., 4151-53 The Feminine Fifties, 2489 Fenn, Percy Thomas, 6095 Fenneman, Nevin M., 2935-36 Fenno, Richard F., ed., 3109 Fenton, Charles A., 1503 Ferber, Edna, 1403-8, 1545, 1547, 2 333 about, 1403 Ferdinand and Isabella, History of, 2294 Fergus, Robert, about, 6446 Ferguson, Charles W., 4574 Fergusson, Erna, 4176, 4187, 4198 Ferm, Vergilius T. A., ed., 31, 5425, 5442 Fernandina, Fla., guidebook, 3844 Fernow, Bernhard Eduard, about, 2791 Fernow, Berthold, 4049 Ferre, Nels F. S., about, 5433 Ferril, Thomas Hornsby, 1409-10 Fertility, 4396, 4402 Fesler, James W., 6201 The Festival of the Dead, 1033 Festivals music, 5667 La., 4100 Fetching the Doctor (sculpture), 5739 Fetrow, Ward W., 5842 Fetter, Frank W., 5971 The Feud of Oakfield Creek., 5354 A Few Figs from Thistles, 1609 Fiction bibl., 2402 detective. See Detective fiction dictionaries, handbooks, etc., 2526, 2528 didactic, 161-64, 190-91, 239 economic, 726, 728-31, 775-77, 956— 58, 964, 973-76, 978, 1089-98, 1 107-10, 1270-75, 1333-37, 1372- 74, 1376, 1664, 1754-56, 1758, 1775, 1777, 1907, 2079, 2194, 2229 ethical themes, 986, 1907-8, 1914, 1940, 1944, 2156 experimental, 1242-47, 1249, 1251, 1379, 1450, 1842, 2082 historical. See Historical themes in literature — fiction hist. & crit., 345, 896-97, 977, 986, 1004, 1010, 2365, 2371-73, 2376, 2378, 2384, 2402, 2405, 2418, 2425, 2427-31, 2458, 2508-9, 2517, 2523, 2526, 2528, 2530, 2536 humanitarian, 2084 humorous, 768, 775-83, 787-97, 1802, 2149, 2202 in periodicals, 2864, 2874, 2913, 2916, 2926 See also Literary periodicals industrial, 941, 1159, 1178, 1183, , 1507, 1754-56 "international," 971-72, 986-91, 996-1001, 1004, 1007, 1014, 1242- 47, 1249, 1251, 1754, 1758, 1839, 2187 naturalistic, 821-29, 835-37, 1048, 1051-52, 1054-57, 1059, 1089- 98, 1333-39, 1372, 1621, 1743, 1775 picaresque, 105-8, 1169, 1921, 2052 political, 277, 422, 689-90, 722, 762, 775-77> 1 1 °7, "55-56, 1566, 1792, 2025, 2027, 2148, 2197 INDEX / 1 121 Fiction — Continued popular, 2384 See also Bestsellers production, 2418 psychological, 368, 375, 727, 986- 1001, 1004, 1149, 1163, 1379, 1470, 1927, 1944-45. 1954. 2017- 18, 2021, 2023, 2052, 2107-8, 2156, 2174-75, 2178, 2184, 2224 realistic, 277-79, 562, 721, 821-29, 835-37, 867-77, 887-89, 956-76, 978, 980, 982-1004, 1007-8, 1014, 1089, 1 107-10, 1333-39, 1343, 1372, 1379, M45-50, 1453, 1460- 62, 1494, 1559, 1571, 1611, 1680, 1720-23, 1743-48, 1754-56, 1758, 1775, 1792, 1796, 1932, 1940, 1954, 1992-94, 2003-4, 201 1, 2025-28, 2045, 2052-56, 2069- 70, 2074, 2076-78, 2128, 2210, 2229-31 romantic, 201-4, 226-29, 245-60, 268-69, 3ii, 333, 341-47, 356, 405, 471-78, 546-50, 552-53, 555, 716, 745, 749-50, 762-67, 1048, 1054, 1089-95, 1099, 1 105-6, 1145-48 satiric, 105-8, 689-90, 775-77, 794- 97, 1261, 1381, 1508, 1559, 1589, 1635, 1643, 1688, 1792, 1842, 1845, 2001, 2017, 2053, 2082, 2154, 2180, 2229 science. See Science fiction sentimental, 161-64, 239, 241, 716, 867, 2384 social questions, 689-92, 616, 718- 20, 726, 728-31, 756, 821-24, 835-37, 887-89, 956-70, 973-76, 978, 980, 982, 986-88, 992-95, 1008, 1048, 1055, 1089-95, 1107- 10, 1 136, 1142-43, 1155-56, 1190, 1270-75, 1333-39, 1372-74, 1376, 1414, 1417, M45-50, 1453, 1460- 62, 1467, 1559, 1571, 1589, 1656- 57, 1754-56, 1758, 1775- 1777. 1907, 1932, 2045, 2050-51, 2059, 2079, 2081, 2084, 2090, 2148, 2180, 2182-84 stream of consciousness writing, 1 161-62, 1183, 1379, 1579, 1887, 2055, 2174-75 surrealistic, 1987, 2079, 2081, 2084 symbolism in, 333, 470, 481-83, 491, 1379, 1494, 1500, 1947, 1954, 1992, 2023, 2081, 2212 techniques, 2372 theories, 333, 345, 867, 896, 964, 977, 986, 1004, 1010, 1014, 1096, 1136 Utopian, 726, 728-31, 956, 978 Fiction, periods (1764-1819), 105-17, 161-64, 168 (1820-70), 188-91, 201-4, 226-29, 239, 241, 245-60, 268-69, 277- 79, 312, 333-47, 356, 365, 368, 375, 402-13, 415-18, 422, 470- 83, 485, 487, 491, 511, 514-16, 546-53, 555, 562-76, 578-84, 674 Fiction, periods — Continued (1871-1914), 683-86, 689-92, 706- 10, 716-20, 722-24, 726-31, 745, 749-50, 756, 762-68, 775-83, 787- 97, 821-30, 835-37, 856, 867-77, 887-90, 900, 941, 945-52, 955- 76, 978, 980, 982, 984-1001, 1004, 1007-8, 1014, 1032, 1048, 1051, 1053-57, I0 59, 1089-99, 1105-10, 1136, 1142-43, 1145-48 (I9I5-39), 1155-59, 1161-63, 1168- 69, 1171, 1177-78, 1180, 1183, 1190-94, 1222-25, I2 39-47, 1249, 1251-57, 1259, 1261-62, 1264- 66, 1270-74, 1276-77, 1284-90, 1298-1302, 1314-18, 1325-28, I33I-39, 1343, 1353-56, 1372-74, 1376, 1379-92, 1395-96, 1403-7, 1412, 1414-17, 1420-29, 1437- 50, 1453-62, 1465-72, 1474, 1489- 90, 1493, 1495-1500, 1511-13, 1515, 1527-29, 1541-42, 1544, 1551-52, 1559-69, 1571, 1573-74, 1576-79, 1589-97, 1611-12, 1614- J 9> 1635—44, 1646, 1653-58, 1661, 1680-83, 1686-88, 1691, 1693- 1702, 1704-5, 1707-12, 1720-23, 1727, 1730, 1733, 1736, 1743-48, 1754-56, 1758-60, 1762-63, 1771, !775, I 777~8i, 1786-89, 1796, 1798-1800, 1802-6, 1823, 1828- 33, 1836-40, 1842-50, 1852-54, 1864, 1866-67, 1872, 1874-75, 1882, 1887-91, 1902, 1904, 2371 (1940-55), 1907, 1909, 1911-12, 1914-18, 1921-22, 1927-28, 1930- 32, 1934, 1940-45, 1947, 1954-57, 1959-62, 1964, 1966-67, 1973-80, 1984-85, 1987, 2001, 2003-6, 201 1-14, 2017-19, 2021-23, 2025- 28, 2045, 2050-56, 2059, 2069-70, 2074, 2076-78, 2081-82, 2084-85, 2087-94, 2096-97, 2107-8, 21 10- 11, 21 1 5, 2119-20, 2122-23, 2125, 2127-30, 2132, 2146, 2148-49, 2153-59, 2161-64, 2166, 2169, 2173-75, 2180-88, 2193-95, 2197, 2199, 2201-2, 2204, 2206, 2208, 2210, 2212-13, 2224, 2229-31, 2371,2373 The Fiddler in Barly, 1637 Fiedler, Leslie, 656 Field, Cyrus W., about, 4677, 5882 Field, Eugene, 878-80 Field, Joseph M., 23 1 1 Field, RoswellM., 1880 Field and Stream, 5071 The Field God, 1475, 2337 The Field of the Grounded Arms, 323 Field sports, 2665, 2794, 5065-97 Fielding, Henry, about, 2651 Fields, Annie, ed., 577 Fields, Harry H., 4701 Fields, James Thomas, about, 2922 Fields, W. C, about, 4956 The Fields, I 694 The Fields Were Green, 2374 Fife, Alta (Stephens), 5538 Fife, Austin, 5538 The Fifth Column, 1498 The Fifty-Minute Hour, 2718 Figh, Margaret Gillis, 2257 Fighting Angel, 1258 "Fighting Furies," 5025 Figureheads, 5603 Figures for an Apocalypse, 2037 Figures of Earth, 1262 Files on Parade, 2072 Filipinos, 4470 Fill 'Er Up, 5005 Filler, Louis, ed., 866 Finance, 5965-6002 agricultural, 5848 bibl., 5966 hist., 3476, 5966, 5973, 5999-6000 municipal, 5973 public, 3126. 3289, 3291, 3310, 3322, 3431, 3448, 5969, 5971, 5983 state, 5973 Chicago, 5985 The Financier, 1336-37 Financiers. See Capitalists and finan- ciers Find Me in Fire, 2013 Findlay, Ohio, 3866 Fine, Nathan, 6356 Fine Clothing to the few, 1521 Fink, Arthur E., 4621 Fink, Mike, about, 5506 Finkelstein, Louis, ed., 5426-27 Finkelstein, Simon J., 5426 about, 5426 Finletter, Thomas K., 3623 Finney, Charles Grandison, about, 3360, 5395, 5403, 5428, 5490 Finnish folklore, Mich., 5533 Finnish-language newspaper, 2896 Fir-Flower Tablets, 1584 Fire, Chicago (1871), 4136 Fire and Cloud, 2234 Fire and the Hammer, 1 9 1 6 The Fire-Bringer, 1069 Fire for the Night, 24 1 3 Firecrackers, 1831 Fireside Travels , 467 Firman, Sidney G., ed., 1068 First Flowers of Our Wilderness, 5750 The First Gentlemen of Virginia, 16, 3749 The First Man, 1648 The First Morning, 2192 The First Thousand Days, 3498 First Will &■ Testament, 2080 Firth, Margaret A., ed., 4729 Fiscal policy. See Finance — public Fisch, Max Harold, 5251 Fischer, Carlos, 5654 Fischer, John, 3624 Fish, Carl Russell, 3091, 6183 Fish, Hamilton, about, 3444 Fish, John Charles Lounsbury, 4800 Fish, Lounsbury S., 6018 Fishbein, Morris, 4806-7 Fisher, Anne (Benson), 3998 Fisher, Dorothea Frances (Canfiilil). 1412-19, 4033 Fisher, Galen M., 5495 Fisher, Vardis Alvero, 1420-24 Fisheries, 4744, 5948 New England, 5872 Fishing. See Hunting and fishing Fishman, Solomon, 2421 1122 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Fisk, Ethel F., ed., 5304 Fisk, James, about, 5880 Fiske, John, 5302-4 ed., 3080 about, 3058, 3761, 5264, 5302, 5304 Fiske, Minnie Davey, about, 4930 Fitch, Clyde, 2337, 2347-48 Fitch, James Marston, 5699 Fitch, John, about, 4784 Fitch, John A., 5899, 6037 Fite, Emerson David, 3374 Fite, Gilbert C., 5737, 5843, 5860 Fithian, Philip Vickers, 2672-73 Fitzgerald, F. Scott, 1425-29 about, 821, 1222, 1425, 1430-31, 2371-72, 2429 Fitzgibbon, Russell H., 3581 Fitzpatrick, John C., ed., 3271 The Five Book.s of Youth, 15 16 Five Civilized Tribes, 3025-27 Five Generations, 1152 Fladeland, Betty L., 3375 Flagg, Edmund, 4322-23 about, 4322 Flagler, Henry M., about, 4096 Flaherty, Robert, about, 4958 Flame and Shadow, 1814 Flanagan, Hallie. See Davis, Hallie (Ferguson) F. Flanders, Helen (Hartness), comp., 5574 Flanders, Ralph Edwards, about, 4803 Flanner, Hildegarde, 2406 Flaubert, Gustave, about, 2504 Fleischer, Nathaniel S., 5025-27, 5031, 5060 Fleming, Allan J., ed., 4873 Fleming, Denna Frank, 3534 Fleming, Donald H., 4831 Fleming, Roscoe, 6207 Fleming, Walter L., 3377 ed., 3376 about, 3057 Flesch, Rudolf F., 5226 Fletcher, John Gould, 1432-35, 4102 about, 1432, 1436, 1809 Flexner, Abraham, 5179, 5195 Flexner, Atherton, 6052 Flexner, James T., 4784, 4822, 4831, 574975 1 Flexner, Simon, 4831 Flick, Alexander Clarence, 3430 ed., 4044 Flint, Emily, ed., 2922 Flint, Timothy, 307-12 about, 307 The Floating World and Other Poems, 2350 Flood, Jessie B., musical arr. by, 5589 Floods and flood control, 2949, 2951, 4147 Flora, Snowden D., 2948 Flora. See Plants Florey, Robert, 4944 Florida, 3953, 4007, 4079, 4096 architecture (Spanish-Colonial), 5723 descr., 1685 essays, 1002-3 fiction, 1222, 1302, 1526-29, 1680- 83,2051 fishing, 5083 Florida — Continued folksongs & ballads, 5581 guidebooks, 3843-47 hist., 3158, 3980, 4096 language (dialects, etc.), 2258 short stories, 1680, 1684 travel & travelers, 4248-50, 4256- 57,4293 Flour milling, Minn., 4141-42 The Flourishing Village, 121 Flower, Milton Embick, 2776 Flowering Judas, 1660 The Flowering of New England, 2381 The Flowering of the Rod, 1324 Flowers in art, 5768 Floyd, Theodora A., about, 4854 Flush of Gold, 1058 The Flush Times of Alabama and Mis- sissippi, 195-97 Flying Scud, 2298 Flynn, Edward J., 6384 about, 6384 Focus, 2045 Foerster, Norman, 2422-24, 2512 ed., 468, 2331, 2424-25 Fogdall, Soren J. M. P., 3571 Fogle, Richard H, 361 The Folded Leaf, 2032 Foley, Martha, ed., 2322 Folk, Joseph W., about, 6432 Folk art and crafts. See Arts and crafts Folk dances, 5587, 5589-90 analysis, 5591 hist., 5591 Appalachian Mountains, 5583 New England, 5580 Southern States, 5583 The West, 5591 Folk drama, 1473, 1475 Folk heroes, 2649, 3353, 4533, 5505- 06, 5511-13, 5516-17, 5519-20, 5522-25, 5529-30, 5532, 5538, 5544,5548 Folk humor. See Humor — frontier Folk literature. See Folklore; Legends and tales; Tales, folk; Tall tales Folk magic, 5509, 5528-29, 5537 Fok medicine, Mich., 5533 Folk pottery, 5791 Folk religion. See Religion, folk Folk rhyme. See Rhyme, folk Folk sermons, Negro. See Preacher tales Folk singers, 5557, 5561, 5565, 5572, 5578,5580 Folk speech (Colonial period), 3740 Folk tales, See Tales, folk Folke, Leander, 5293 Folklore, 3740, 3969 analysis, 5528-29, 5534, 5536, 5579 bibl., 5536-37, 5542, 5544 cowboy, 4162-63 Creole, 2265 definitions, 5504, 5514 hist., 5534, 5536, 5581 Indian, 3021 literary influence, 5534, 5548 migration, 5509 Negro. See Negroes — folklore railroad, 5512 Folklore — Continued rural, 4579 sources, 5514, 5524, 5529, 5534, 5536, 5546, 5548 themes, motives, etc., 5509, 5528, 5535, 5545-46 theory, methods, etc., 5504, 5514 urban. See Urban folklore Northwestern States, 4147 Southwest, New, bibl., 4190 See also Folkways Folklore in literature drama, 1473 fiction, 1526 poetry, 1532, 1580 Calif., 1532 Fla., 1526 Ky., 2166 N.H., 1222 Va., 1267 The Folios, 1 799 Folks from Dixie, 860 Folksongs and ballads, 79-83, 146, 148, 427-28, 753-55, 910, 922, 933-34, 941-44, 1126-31, 1222, 1224, 1295, 1580, 4025, 5509-12, 5517,5549-84 analysis, 5555-57, 5559, 5561, 5564, 5570,5577.5579 bibl., 5556, 5569, 5613 definitions, 5556 hist., 5556, 5564, 5570, 5577, 5580 influence on poetry, 1697 sources, 5504, 5555, 5580 themes, motives, etc., 5555-56, 5560, 5564,5576-77,5581 theories, methods, etc., 5569-70 Ala., 5565 Ark., 5569 Fla., 5581 Ky., 5584 Maine, 5567 Mich., 5567, 5575 Miss., 5576 Mississippi River, 5523 Mo., 5568-69 New England, 5524, 5554, 5574, 558o New York (State), 5548 N.C., 5536 Ohio, 5573 Okla., 5570 Ozark Mountains, 5569 Pa., 5578-79 St. Helena Island, S.C., 5540 Schoharie County, N.Y., 5539 Southern States, 5525, 5561, 5572, 5577 Tex., 5518 Vt., 5574 The West, 5518, 5526, 5560, 5569 W. Va., 5572 See also Anglo-American folksongs and ballads; Cowboys — songs & music; Religious folksongs Folkways, 2407, 5504, 5506, 551 1, 55I3-I4, 55i6, 5538, 5553, 5555- 56,5558,5585,5588 Ala., 5565 Ark., 5542 Beech Mountain, N.C., 5529 INDEX / 1 123 Folkways — Continued Kans., 4168 Mich., 5533, 5535 Miss., 5547, 5576 Mississippi River, 5505, 5523 Missouri River, 5505 New England, 5524, 5534, 5574 N. Mex., 5537 N.C., 5536 Ohio River, 5505 Ozark Mountains, 5543 Pa., 4480, 5579 St. Helena Island, S.C., 5540 Southern States, 4079, 5525, 5577 Tex., 5521 Vt.,5574 The West, 5526 See also Folklore Follett, Wilson, ed., 832-33 Folmer, Henry, 3162 Folwell, William Watts, 4142 Fombombo, 1792 Foner, Philip S., ed., 156 The Fool of Five For^s, 930 Football, 4990, 4993, 5034-45 Foote, Harry W., 4715 Foote, Henry Wilder, 5633 Footner, Hulbert, 3999 For the Sak.e of Shadows, 2752 For Whom the Bell Tolls, 1497 The Forayers, 552-53 Forays and Rebuttals, 2415 Forbes, Esther, 1437-44 Forbes, James, 2348 Forbes, Waldo Emerson, ed., 294 Forbidden Fruit, 2298 Force, Juliana, about, 5800 Force, Peter, about, 3057 Ford, Alice E., 5597 Ford, Edward, 4758 Ford, Guy Stanton, 3064 Ford, Henry, about, 5939 Ford, Henry Jones, 4489 Ford, Paul Leicester, comp., 123, 125, 177 ed., 152, 3293 Ford, William E., 4715 Ford, Worthington Chauncey, 2580 ed., 5, 699, 3313 Ford Foundation, about, 5206 Ford Motor Company, about, 5939 Foreign correspondents, 2872 Foreign economic relations, 3546, 3636-42 Foreign exchange, 6002 Foreign influences on culture, 3146, 3227, 3474, 3737, 3740, 3758, 3768-70, 3774, 4096 bibl., 3768 Foreign language periodicals, 2895-99 Foreign population, 2897, 2899, 4297, 439°. 4395. 4406-7, 4411-17, 4421-22, 4426, 4515 education, 4421, 4483, 4493 in literature fiction, 1 190, 1720-22, 1796, 2578 reporting, 21 61 suffrage, 6409 Brooklyn, 4046 Milwaukee, 4140 Foreign population — Continued New England, 4026, 4435 New Haven, 4042 Sunderland, Minn., 4406 Wis., 4139 See also Refugees; and names of national groups, e.g., Chinese; Norwegians Foreign relations (since 1945), 3482, 3501, 3523, 3526, 3529, 3570, 3598-3642,4503 See also Diplomatic history; and names of countries, e.g., France, relations with Foreign reputation of authors (1764-1819), 109 (1820-70), 209, 230, 252, 280, 313, 381, 427, 449, 520, 562, 585, 619, 674 19th cent., 2412, 2432 (1871-1914), 768, 964, 1048, 1061 (1915-39), 1252, 1357, 1379, 1445, 1484, 1494, 1559, 1754, 1759, 2412, 2508 Foreign service. See Diplomatic and consular service Foreign trade. See Commerce — for- eign Forensic psychiatry. See Psychiatry, forensic The Forest and the Fort, 1171 Forest Life, 418 The Forest of the South, 1471 Forester, Frank, pseud. See Herbert, Henry William Forestry as a profession, 5865 Forests and forestry, 1072, 1079, 2791, 5816,5862-63,5865 fossil, 4182 soils, 2934, 2944 Mass., 3803 S.C., 5087 Southern States, 4084 Va., 4085 The Forge, 1793 Forced Lightning, 1548 Form, William H., 4552 Forman, Henry Chandlee, 5706 Forman, Jonathan, 4594 Forman, Sidney, 3656 Formosan policy, 3589 Forrest, Edwin, about, 201, 4937 Forrest, Nathan, fiction, 1468 Forster, John, 4341 Forstcr, John Reinhold, tr., 4245-46 Fort Laramie, Wyo., 4179 Fort Worth, Tex., 4187 The Fortunate Mistress, about, 1278 Fortune, 4503 XLl Poems, 1313 42nd Parallel, 1325, 1328 Forty-eighters, 4481 Foscue, Edwin J., 2940 Fosdick, Harry Emerson, 5426 about, 5426 Fosdick, Raymond B., 4622 Foshay, A. Wellesley, 5147 Foster, Sir Augustus John, bart., 4280 about, 4279 Foster, Charles H., 562 Foster, Elizabeth S., ed., 491 Foster, Frank Hugh, 5428 Foster, Frank K., about, 4530 Foster, Maximilian, 1120 Foster, Ruel E., 1397 Foster, Stephen, about, 5677 bibl., 5677 Fothergill, John, about, 4247 The Foundling (sculpture), 5739 The Fountain, 1648 A Fountain in Kentucky, 2062 Four Faces West, 1686 The Four Million, 1 1 1 4-1 5 Four Quartets, 1359 about, 1366-67 Four Saints in Three Acts, 1 77 1 Four-Square, 141 8 Foust, Clement E., 205 Fowler, Dorothy (Ganfield), 4664 Fowler, Gene, 2878, 4933 about, 2878 Fowler, Lorenzo, about, 3752 Fowler, Orson, about, 3752 Fox, Dixon Ryan, 3090, 3221, 3730, 4027, 6374 ed., 3085-98, 3200 Fox, George, about, 5468 Fox Indians, 3041 The Fox of Pcapac\, 1 859 Foxeman, Grant, 3026-27 Frampton, Merle E., ed., 5207 France, Anatole, about, 2471 France economic relations with, 4259-60 fiction, 1242-44, 1247, 1251, 141 1, 1416, 1495, 1578, 1611, 2093 personal narratives, 13 10, 1766, 1769-71 relations (general) with, 3508, 3528, 3531,3685-86,3773-75 American Revolution, 3187, 3250,3307 bibl., 4229 Civil War, 3536 World War I, 3710 short stories, 1242, 1413 soc. life & cust., 96, 264 travel & travelers, 96, 130, 264, 426, 1411, 1766, 1839 fiction, 987, 998, 2376 France and Great Britain in the New World, 3171, 3188-89, 3191, 3226 France and Illinois, 4133 France and Spain in the New World, 3162,3171 France and Texas, 3577 Francesco da Rimini, 206-8, 2337, 2347 Francis, John F., about, 5744 Francis Berrian, 3 1 1 Frank, Barbara, 6298 Frank, Jerome, 6263, 6285, 6298 Frank, L. K., 5291 I rank, Ruth, photographs by, 4187 Frank, Waldo David, 1 445-50 ed., 1304 about, 1743 Frankenbcrg, Lloyd, 2426 Frankenstein, Alfred V., 5744 Frankfort, K ■■■., guidebook, 3857 Frankfurter, Felix, 3785, 5418, 6096, 6286 Fianking, Mac, 1659 1 124 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Franklin, Benjamin, 122-33, 2290, 3183-84,4750 about, 36, 45-46, 122, 171, 1873, 2277, 2412, 2456, 2465, 2503, 2523, 2620, 2773, 3123, 3183, 3185-87, 4533, 4721, 4750, 4850, 5130, 5803, 6068 bibl., 123 Franklin, John Hope, 4440 Franklin, William Temple, ed., 124, 126 Frantz, Joe B., 4162-63 Fraser, Chelsea C, 4799 Fraser River, 4013 Fraud and mistake cases, 6279 Frazier, Edward Franklin, 4441-42 Frederick, John H., 5943 Frederick, John T., ed., 2329 Free, 1341 Free enterprise, 3424, 4538, 5875, 5877, 5885, 5901, 6026, 6060, 6063, 6067, 6094, 6101, 6392 Free Joe, 920-21 The Free Man, 1695 Free Religions Association, Boston, about, 5435 Free soil controversy, 3141, 3339 Free verse, 619, 821, 1583, 1599, 1727, 1731,1813 See also Experimental writing Free will, 5297, 5472 Freedman, Florence B., ed., 655 Freedom. See also Liberty Freedom and education, 5103, 5124, 5132-33.5181,5187,5236 Freedom and Fate, 306 Freedom of accommodation, 6106, 6129 Freedom of assembly, 61 17, 6121, 6123 Freedom of association, 6107 Freedom of belief, 6107 Freedom of labor, 6106, 6121, 6126, 6129 Freedom of opinion, 6060, 6065, 6108, 6164 Freedom of petition, 61 17, 6121 Freedom of religion, 4069, 5395, 5418- 21, 6106, 6117, 6123, 6126 Freedom of speech, 3462, 3766, 6106- 09, 6117, 6121, 6123, 6126, 6128 Freedom of teaching. See Teachers — academic freedom Freedom of the franchise, 6106, 6126 Freedom of the person, 611 7, 6121, 6126 Freedom of the press, 2846, 2867, 2880, 2889, 2906, 2928-29, 2931-32, 3462, 5307, 6106, 6108, 61 17, 6121, 6123, 6127-28 Freedom of the seas, 3558, 3571 Freedom of the will, 26 Freedom of thought, 3766 Freehof, S.B., 4458 Freeman, Douglas Southall, 3269, 3378, 3694-95, 5525 Freeman, Frank S., 5229 Freeman, Frederic Barron, ed., 487 Freeman, Mary E. (Wilkins), 881-86 about, 2486 Freeman, Otis W., ed., 4212 Freemasons. See Masons (Freemasons) Freidel, Frank B., 3495 Fremont, Jessie Benton, about, 2818 Fremont, John Charles, 3334, 3535 about, 3335, 3345, 4734 Fremont, Ohio, 3867 French, Daniel Chester, about, 5736 French and Indian War (1755-63), 3I7L327I French Broad River Valley, 4021 French Canadians, 4413, 4435 folklore, Mich., 5533 French influences culture, 3774 folklore, 5523, 5528 in literature, 1032-35 language, 2265 Philadelphia, 4263 French population, New Orleans, 4101 Freneau, Philip Morin, 134-43 about, 134, 2465, 2486 Freud, Sigmund, about, 2407, 5392 Freudian concepts in literature, 11 61, 2441 drama, 1647-48, 2506 fiction, 1571 hist., 2440 Freund, Paul A., 6248 Freund, Robert, ed., 5755 Friden, George, 2364 Friederici, Georg, 3169 Friedman, Albert B., 5550 Friedman, Lillian, 2258 Friedman, Philip, 4459 Friedman, Theodore, ed., 4458 Friedrich, C. J., 4481 The Friend of My Youth, 71 1 The Friendly Persuasion, 22 1 1 Friendly societies, 4574 Friends, Society of, about, 5404, 5442, 5467-68, 5479 See also Quakers The Friends of the Friends, 1012 Friendship, 285 Friendship Village, 1453 Fries, Charles C, 2244 Fries, John, about, 3149 Friess, H. L., 5289, 5291 Fritz, Percy Stanley, 4180 Frohman, Daniel, 5637 Frohock, Wilbur M., 2427 From a Bench in Our Square, 1 155 From Bed to Worse, 121 4 From Here to Eternity, 2004 From ford an s Delight, 1230 From Main Street to Stockholm, 1570 From Milo to Londos, 5060 From Fonkapog to Pesth, 713 From Rags to Riches, 2305 From the Easy Chair, 2278 From the Hidden Way, 1262 From the "London Times" of 1904, 798-99 From Time to Time, 1952 The Front Page, 2327, 2332 Frontenac, Louis de Buade, comte de, about, 3 171 Frontier and pioneer life, 2407, 2802, 3074, 3078, 3082, 3105, 3147, 3151,3188,3737,4372,5508 arts & crafts, 5596, 5604 dances, 5590 Frontier and pioneer life — Continued folklore, 5505, 5513, 5516, 5519-20, 5526,5542 folksongs & ballads, 5526, 5549, 5553-56, 5559-6o, 5570 Indians, 2988-89, 3030, 3032, 3035 law, 6220 legends, 3353, 5505, 5507, 5519, 5530 religion, 5411-16 Ariz., 4199 Dakota, 2683 Fla., 4293 111., 4129, 4136 Ind., 3995, 4123 Middle West, 4097-98, 4136, 4810 Minn., 4143 Mississippi River Valley, 3975, 5505 Missouri River and valley, 4147, 5505 Nebr., 2799-2800 New York (State), 4269 Northwest, Old, 41 12, 4307 Northwest, Pacific, 4213-14 Northwestern States, 3663, 4147 Ohio, 41 21 Ohio River and valley, 2610, 5505 Pa., 3280, 4269 S.C., 3180 Southern Plains, 4160 Southern States, 3180, 4097 Southwest, Old, 4098 Tenn., 3287, 3353 Tex., 3353,4365, 4734 Va., 4251, 4269 The West, 3331, 3348, 4097, 4146, 4151-56, 4158, 4160-63, 4175, 4177. 4223, 4235, 4281, 4320, 4661, 4667 Wis., 4347 Wyo., 3971 Frontier and pioneer life in literature bibl., 2502 comedy, 518 descr., 307-10, 365-67, 381, 399, 772-74, 784-86, 890, 898-99, 1078 drama, 1556 editorials, sketches, etc., 194-97, 379" 80, 1064-65, 1068, 2424 fiction, 105-8, 114-15, 117, 201-4, 252, 258-60, 312, 415-18, 511, 514-16, 546, 550, 555, 579-84, 684-86, 766-67, 778-83, 787-93, 980, 1145-48, 1171, 1239, 1314- 15, 1420, 1422, 1441, 1488-90, 1644, 1646, 1694, 1696, 1701, 1707, 1720-21, 1786, 1840, 1960- 62, 1969, 2129, 2415-16 hist. & crit., 2437, 2502 humor, 2501 poetry, 933-34, 941-44, 1064, 1066- 67, 1132, 1644-45, !825 short stories, 319, 322, 330-32, 612- 13, 687, 733-34, 739, 926-32, 935- 40, 1 145 Ala., 194-97 Alaska, 1048-52, 1058 Calif., 733-34, 739, 926-40, 1064- 68 Ga., 445-48 Idaho, 1420, 1422 INDEX / 1 125 Frontier and pioneer life in literature — Continued Ky., 366, 516, 766-67, 1469, 1701 Maine, 1707 Mich., 415-18 Middle West, 1644-46 Miss., 194-97 Mississippi River and valley, 307, 319-22, 768, 778-83, 787-93 Mo., 366 New England, 1441 Northwest, Old, 366 Ohio, 980, 1694 Ohio River Valley, 319-21 Okla., 1403, 1406 Oreg., 391, 1314-15 Pacific Coast, 1064-68 Pa., 105-8, 366, 1694 Rocky Mountains, 312 S. Dak., 1720-21 Southern States, 194-97, 379-80, 612-13, 1786 Tenn., 330-32, 366 Utah, 1420, 1424 Vt., 579-84 Va., 12-16, 366 The West, 683-87, 772-74, 941-44, 1064-68, 1420, 1488-90, 1644-46 Wis., 1078, 1556, 1960-62, 2129 Wyo., 1145-48 Frontier humor. See Humor — frontier Frontier hypothesis, 3074, 3105, 3127, 3137.3147,3357 Frontier in art. See The West — fron- tier — pictorial works Froom, L. E., 5442 Frooman, Jack, 3046 Frost, Arthur B., illus., 912-13, 922, 924-25, 1101 Frost, Robert, 1451-52, 5574 about, 1515, 2378, 2527 Frothingham, Octavius Brooks, 2279, 5256 Frothingham, Richard, 3245 Frothingham, Thomas G., 3680 Fruitlands, 5265 Fryburger, Vernon, 5962 Frye, Richard N., 3513 Fuchs, Lawrence H., 4458 Fulop-Miller, Rene, 4905 Fuess, Claude Moore, 2674-78, 3336, 3431,3480,5217 The Fugitive, 1809 Fuld, James J., 5677 Full Cargo, 1765 Fuller, Arthur B., ed., 316 Fuller, George W., 4213 Fuller, Henry Blake, 887-89 about, 2419 Fuller, Melville Weston, about, 6244 Fuller, Muriel, ed., 2351 Fuller, Richard C, about, 4619 Fuller, (Sarah) Margaret (Marchesa d'Ossoli), 313-18 ed., 280 about, 313, 2280, 2615 Fuller, Zelotes, 5418 Fulton, John F., 4759, 4821 Fulton, Maurice G., 11 35 Fulton, Robert, about, 4784, 4786 Functional psychology, 5389 Fund for the Advancement of Educa- tion, about, 5206 Fundamentalism, 3761, 5429-30 Funeral rites and ceremonies, 4527, 5507 Funk & Wagnalls New "Standard" Dictionary, 2236 Fur trade fiction, 312, 1962 Northwest, Pacific, 4213 Oregon, 391 Utah, 4183 The West, 3330, 4148-49, 4175, 4186 Furie, W. B., 4458 Furnas, Joseph C, 4562 The Furnished Room, 1 14-15 Furniss, Edgar S., 3605 Furniss, Norman F., 5429 Furniture, 5727-28, 5731-32, 5796 decoration, 5726 A Further Range, 1452 Fusfeld, Daniel R., 3497 Fussell, Edwin S., 171 8 Fussier, Herman H., ed., 6478 Futures, 5952 Fyles, Franklin, 2315 GATT. See General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade Gabriel, Ralph Henry, 3082, 3741, 5420 Gabrielson, Ira Noel, 5870 Gaer, Joseph, 6394 Gaffney, M. Mason, 5817 Gagey, Edmond M., 4900, 4918, 5659 Gagliardo, Domenico, 4633 Gal Young Un, 1684 Galbraith, John Kenneth, 4513, 5886— 87 Gale, Zona, 1453-59 Galena, 111., guidebook, 3877 Galinsky, Hans, 2245 Gall, Elena D., ed., 5207 Gallantry, 1261 Gallatin, Albert, about, 3310-n The Gallery, 1940-41 The Galley Slave, 23 1 6 Gallico, Paul, 4987 Gallie, Walter B., 5352 Gallion, Arthur B., 4606 Galloway, George B., 6155 Galloway, John Debo, 5927 Gallup, Donald C, 1362 Gallup, George H., 6417 Gallup, N.Mex., 4187 Galveston News, about, 2866 Gama, Vasco da, about, 3169 Gambling, 2586, 4639, 5059 Gambrill, John Montgomery, ed., 31 51 Games and dances, 5563, 5585-92 Ind., 5571 Mo., 5569 N.C., 5536 Okla., 5570 Schoharie County, N.Y., 5539 See also Dancing; Recreation; Sing- ing games Gamio, Manuel, 4471 comp., 4472 Gangs, 4598, 4658 Gannett, Henry, 2970 Ganoe, William Addleman, 3657 Gans, Joe, about, 5025 Gans, Roma, 5148 Gantenbein, James W., ed., 3575 Garbo, Greta, about, 4952 Gard, Robert E., 4926 Gard, Wayne, 4157, 6220 The Garden of Adonis, 1467 Gardening, 2790, 5824 Gardiner, Frederic M., 5018 Gardner, Albert Ten Eyck, 5738 Gardner, Burleigh B., 4438 Gardner, Emelyn Elizabeth, 5539 ed., 5575 Gardner, Gilson, 2890 Gardner, Helen L., 1363, 1367 Gardner, Mary R., 4438 Garfield, James Abram, about, 3450 Garis, Roy L., 4420 Garland, Constance, illus., 894 Garland, Hamlin, 890-99 about, 2365, 2419, 2517 Garland, John H., ed., 41 13 Garman, Charles Edward, about, 5222 Garnsey, Morris E., 4173 Garrets and Pretenders, 3757 Garrigue, Jean, 1981-83 Garrigues, Charles Harris, 6343 Garrison, Fielding H., 4819 Garrison, Francis Jackson, 3379 Garrison, Garnet R., 4686 Garrison, George Pierce, 3337 Garrison, W. E., 5496 Garrison, Wendell Phillips, 3379 Garrison, William Lloyd, about, 2280, 3379-80 Garrison, Winfred Ernest, 5405, 5455 Garvan, Anthony N. B., 5707 Gary, Elbert H., about, 2825 Gass, Sherlock B., 2425 Gassner, John, ed., 2332-35 Gates, Frederick T., 4622 The Gates of the Compass, 1516 Gateway to a Nation, 4043 Gaudet, Hazel, 6419 The Gauntlet, 1789 Gaus, John M., 3785 Gauthier, Eva, 5678 Gaver, Jack, 2327 ed., 2336 Gavit, Bernard C, 6274 Geare, R. I., 4726 Geddes, Virgil, 4665 Gehrig, Henry L. ("Lou"), about, 4987, 5010 Geiger, George R., 4535 Geiger, R., ed., 2953 Geiger, Theodore, 5898 Geiser, Samuel W., 4734 Geismar, Maxwell D., 2428-30 ed., 646 Gelatt, Roland, 5618 Gelfant, Blanche H., 2431 Gellhorn, Walter, 4773, 61 10, 61 18, 6130, 6316 ed., 6110, 6119 1 126 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES General Accounting Office, about, 5995-97 General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade (GATT), about, 5953 General education, 5107, 5134, 5160, 5180, 5182, 5184, 5228, 5246 See also Liberal education General Motors Corporation, about, 5940 General stores, 4086, 5955 General William Booth Enters into Heaven, 1581 The Generall Historie of Virginia, New-England, and the Summer Isles, 70 Generals, Civil War, 3690-92, 3695, 3706 The General's Lady, 1442 Genesis, 2136 Genetics, 4722 The "Genius," 1339 The Genius of America, 2503 The Genteel Tradition at Bay, 1735, 5368 "Genteel tradition" in literature, 2278, 2385-86, 2513 poetry, 2513,2545 revolt, 926, 1089, 1333, 2406, 2507 The Gentle Lena, 1767 The Gentleman from Indiana, 1802 The Gentleman in America, 2392 A Gentleman of Bayou Teche, 760 Gentleman's Progress, 4240 Gentlemen, I Address You Privately, 1242 Gentles, Ruth G., ed., i486 The Geographical Review, 2937 Geography, 2933-81 atlases & maps, 2967, 2972, 2974 economic, 2939-40 historical, 2939, 2943, 2967-76, 3139 physical, 1079, 2933-36, 2970, 2973, 2975,5816 regional, 2933-37, 2939-40, 41 13 Great Plains, 4159 Middle West, 41 13 Missouri Valley, 4145 N. Dak., 4165 Okla., 4170-71 Southern States, 4084 territories, 4218 Tex., 4192 The West, 4148 See also Language — atlases & maps Geography and Plays, 1771 Geological Society of America, about, 4733 Geological Survey, about, 4763 Geologists, 4737 Geology, 2935-36, 2942, 2945-46, 2957. 2973. 4336-38 bibl, 4736 hist., 4715, 4733, 4737 maps, 2942 Nev., 4184 Rocky Mountains, 4172 Tex., 4192 Yellowstone National Park, 4182 Geophysical Laboratory, Washington, D.C. See Carnegie Institution of Washington, Geophysical Labora- tory George, Henry, about, 4535, 6424 George Fox Digg'd Out of His Bur- rowes, 89 George Washington Slept Here, 1548 George's Mother, 824, 836-37 Georgia, 3953, 4079, 4094-95 architecture, 5706 editorials, sketches, etc., 445-48, 556 fiction, 546, 1270-74, 1380, 1544, 1618-19 govt., 6195 guidebooks, 3837-42 hist., 4094, 4104 journalism, 2856 language (dialects, etc.), 2271 newspapers, 2856 poetry, 1038-43, 1046-47 resources, 4095 short stories, 556, 910-22, 924-25, 1270, 1275 travel & travelers, 4248-50 Georgia. University, hist., 5176 Georgia Press Association, about, 2856 Georgia Scenes, 446-48 Gerber, John C, 344 Gericke, Wilhelm, about, 5649 German-American newspapers, 2899 Germans, 4046, 4062, 4360, 4414, 4471-81 folklore, 5523 immigrant influences, 4477 See also Pennsylvania Germans Germantown, Pa., 4477 Germany economic relations with, 3638 fiction, 1250, 1890-91 relations with, 3570, 3776 travel & travelers, 426, 1890, 2462 Geronimo, about, 3004 Gerontion, about, 1367 Gershwin, George, 1512 about, 5639, 5678 Gershwin, Ira, 5678 Gerson, Robert A., 5629 Gervasi, Frank H., 6184 Gesell, Arnold L., 5149 Gestalt psychology, 5389, 5392 Gethsemani Monastery, about, 2041 Gettysburg, Battle of, 2613 fiction, 1542 Ghent, William J., 3338 Ghent, Treaty of, 3329, 3542 Ghost and Flesh, 1986 Ghost stories, 5515 Mich., 5535 Schoharie County, N. Y., 5539 Tex., 5521 The Ghost Talks, 6364 The Ghostly Rental, 1012 Ghostly Tales, 10 12 Giants and ogres in folklore, 5528-29, 5546 Giants in the Earth, 1721 Gibb, G. S., 5913 Gibbons, Herbert Adams, 5957 Gibbs, Josiah Willard, about, 2105, 4721,4724,4751 Gibbs, Oliver Walcott, about, 4740 Gibson, John M., 4823 Gibson, Joseph Bannister, about, 6231 Gibson, William M., 972 ed., 835 Giddings, Franklin Henry, about, 4540, 4542 Giddings, J. R., 3360 Gideon Planish, 1567 Gideonse, Harry D., 3608 Gifford, E. W., 3002 Gift-books (annuals, etc.), 2518 The Gift of the Magi, 1 1 1 4-1 5 Gila River and valley, 4005 Gilbert, Douglas, 4974 Gilbert, Edmund W, 2971 Gilbert, Sir Humphrey, about, 3223 Gilbert, Josiah, about, 850 The Gilded Age, 775-77, 1 136 Gilder, Rosamond, ed., 4896 Gilgamesh, translation, 1556 Gill, Herbert A., 4744 Gill, Norman N., 6209 Gillette, William, 2337 Gilley, John, about, 2671 Gillie, Mildred H, 3658 Gillin, John Lewis, 4540, 4634 Gillmore, Margalo, 4919 Gilman, Daniel Coit, 4724, 4749, 5195 about, 5195 Gilman, Lawrence, 5683 Gilman, Richard C, 5310 Gilman, Roger, 3751 Gilman, William H, 498 ed., 2412 Ginsburg, Jekuthiel, 4739 Gipson, Lawrence H, 3188, 3246 The Girl I Left behind Me, 2315 The Girl of the Golden West, 2348 The Girl with the Green Eyes, 2337 Gissing, George, about, 2481 Gist, Noel P., ed., 4108 Gittler, Joseph B., ed., 4428 Give Your Heart to the Hawks, 1534 The Gladiator, 205, 2337 Glasgow, Ellen, 1460-63 about, 1267, 1463, 2430 Glaspell, Susan, 2332 Glass industry, 5911 The Glass Menagerie, 2219, 2334, 2336 Glass Mountain, 2376 Glassware and glassmaking, 5789, 5796 Glaucus, 2300 Glazer, Nathan, 4555-56, 5458 Glazer, Sidney, 4137 Gleanings in Europe, 263-64 Gleason, Sarell Everett, 3537-38 Glenmary, N.Y., 674 Glenn, Bess, 3967 Glenn, John M., 4623 Click, Carl, 4901 Glicksberg, Charles I., 2383 Glimpses of Life in Colonial Virginia, 1 103-4 Glimpses of Unfamiliar Japan, 951-52 Globe (Atchison, Kans.), about, 2885 Glorious Incense, 539 Glory Never Guesses, 2079 The Glory of the Nightingales, 1714 Glory Road, 3691 Glover, John George, ed., 5906 INDEX / 1 1 27 Glueck, Eleanor T., 4646-51 Glueck, Sheldon, 4645-51 Go Down Moses, 1379 Go Tell It on the Mountain, 19 15 Goblins and Pagodas, 1 433 God and My Country, 1541 God and My Father, 1 3 1 8 The Goddess Was Mortal, 1553 Godfrey, Thomas, 144-45, 2337, 2347 Godkin, Edwin Lawrence, 2858, 2882 about, 2882, 2921 The Gods Atrive, 1 854 God's Controversy with New-England, 79 God's Little Acre, 1272 Gods of the Lightning, 1 173, 2332 God's Promise to His Plantation, 18 God's Trombones, 1538 Godwin, Parke, ed., 223 Goebel, Dorothy Burne, 3326 Goebel, Julius, Jr., 6221, 6234 Goethals, George Washington, about, 4221,4796 Goethe, Johann Wolfgang von, about, 2282 Gogh, Vincent van, about, 2815 Gohdes, Clarence, 2412, 2432, 2496 ed., 643, 1046, 2338 Going, Charles Buxton, 3339 Going to Pieces, 491 1 Going-to-the-Stars , 1581 Going-to-the-Sun, 1581 Gold, 1648 The Gold-Bug, 529 Gold mines and mining Calif., 2641, 2659, 4201-2 Cripple Creek, Colo., 41 81 Rocky Mountains, 4172 Gold rushes Alaska, 2719-20 Calif., 926, 941, 3737, 4201-2, 4351 Rocky Mountains, 4174 Goldberg, Arthur J., 6049 Goldberg, Isaac, 5635 Goldberg, Ray A., 5841 Golden Apples (Rawlings). 1682 The Golden Apples (Welty), 2207 The Golden Apples of the Sun, 1936 The Golden Bowl, 1000-1 about, 998 Golden Boy, 2064, 2333 The Golden Darkness, 1871 Golden Falcon, 1295 The Golden House, 1 142 The Golden Mirror, 1906 Golden Multitudes , 2482 The Golden Vase, 1577 Goldenweiser, Emanuel A., 5983 Goldfield, Nev., 4184 Goldin, Hyman E., ed., 2274 Goldman, Eric F., 3046, 3455, 3484, 375i ed., 3058 Goldman, Irving, 3041 Goldmann, Franz, 4886 Goldsen, Rose Kohn, 4470 Goldsmith, Alfred F., comp., 633 Goldthwait, James W., 2937 Goldwin, Robert A., ed., 3617 Golf, 4987, 4990, 5048, 5051, 5053 Gomme, Alice, Lady, 5588 Gompers, Samuel, 6050 about, 6050 Gone Tomorrow, 1592 Gone With the Wind, 1 619 Good and evil, 5354 The Good Anna, 1767 Good-Bye, My Fancy, 626, 638 Good-Bye Wisconsin, 1841 The Good Earth, 1253 Good Intentions, 1 63 1 Good Men and True, 1687 Good Morning America, 1 73 1 Good neighbor policy, 3491, 3574, 3576,3578 Good News of Death, 2350 Good Night, Sweet Prince, 4933 The Good Spirit of Laurel Ridge, 2173 Goodale, George L., 4715 Goode, George Brown, 4726 about, 4724, 4726 Goodloe, Daniel R., 4363 A Goodly Fellowship, 1284, 5214 A Goodly Heritage, 1284, 5214 Goodman, Henry, ed., 955 Goodman, Nathan G., 4830 ed., 132 Goodrich, Annie M., about, 4854 Goodrich, Hubert B., 4725 Goodrich, Lloyd, 5764-65, 5773 Goodspeed, Charles Eliot, 5072, 6462 ed., 5690 Goodwyn, Frank, 4192 Goodyear, Charles, about, 4786 The Goophered Grapevine, 757 Gordis, Robert, ed., 4458 Gordon, Albert I., 4456 Gordon, Caroline, 1464-72 Gordon, George A., about, 5428 Gordon, John E., 4877 Gordon, Kate, 5289 Gordon, Lincoln, 5885 Gorgas, William Crawford, about, 4221, 4823 The Gorgeous Hussy, 2668 Gorlin, Selma, illus., 5587 Gosnell, Harold Foote, 63C3, 6375, 6385-86,6418 Goss, Madeleine B., 5609 Gottmann, Jean, 4085 Gottschalk, Clara. See Peterson, Clara Gottschalk Gottschalk, Louis Moreau, 5679 Gottschalk, Louis R., 3247-50 about, 5679 Goubaux, Prosper, 2299 Goudy, Frederic William, 6456 Gould, George M., 2513 Gould, Jay, about, 5880, 5882 Gould, Laurence M., 2977 Gould, Mary Earle, 5598 Govan, Gilbert E., 4104 Government, 2970, 3106, 4065, 4499, 4551, 6059-60, 6077-78, 6131- 39, 6147, 6167, 6170-71, 6179, 6202, 6312 appropriations & expenditures, 6001, 6136, 6139, 6168, 6180, 6182, 6191 centralization, 6061, 6066, 6085, 6093 expansion, 6093, 6099, 6103-4 functions, 2905, 6133, 6139, 6178, 6315 Government — Continued history I7th-i8th cent., 3195, 3221, 3245, 6068, 6232 18th cent., 3187, 3192, 6075 American Revolution, 3242, 6083 Confederation, 3190 19th cent., 3320, 3324, 3329, 3333»335i,3357.34i9.4288, 4512, 6373 20th cent., 3416, 3455, 3485-87, 3491. 3498,350ob sources, 3349, 3422, 6065 labor policy, 6192 limitations, 6090, 6101 organization, 6173-74, 6178 regulations. See under special sub- jects, e.g., Commerce — govt, regu- lations World War II program, 3725 See also Executive branch; Indians, American — govt, relations; Judicial branch; Legislative branch; Sepa- ration of powers Government, democratic. See Democ- racy Government, local. See Local govern- ment Government, state. See State govern- ment Government and art. See Art and state Government and education, 5099, 5165, 5189 See also State and education Government and science. See Science and state Government and the press, 2861, 2927- 28, 2932 Government officials and employees, 4065, 6421 appointment, qualifications, etc., 6083, 6112, 6136, 6157, 6159, 6183,6186,6188,6193 biog. (collected), 6187 Government ownership, 5885 Government Printing Office, about, 6452 Government publications, 6452 bibl., 6138, 6452 Governors, powers and duties, 6203 Governors' Conference, about, 5135 Gow, James, 2334 Gowan, Olina, Sister, about, 4854 Goyen, William, 1984-87 Grady, Henry W., about, 2856, 3445 Graebner, Norman A., 3340, 3613 Graeff, Arthur D., 3230, 4479 Graf, Herbert, 5655 Graham, C. A., 4176 Graham, Edward H., 5810 Graham, Frank, 5010 Graham, George A., 6344 Graham, Gerald S., 3189 Graham, Ian Charles Cargill, 4491 Graham, J., pseud. See Phillips, David Graham Graham, Lloyd, 3950 Graham, Martha, 4968 about, 4968 1 128 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Graham, Philip, 4978 ed., 1046 Grambs, Jean D., 5227 A Grammar of Motives, 2389 Grammars. See Language — grammars Grand Army of the Republic, about, 3644 Grand Canyon, 4182 The Grand Design, 1332 Grand Inquest, 6164 La Grande demoiselle, 1035 Grandfather Stories, 11 60 The Grandissimes, 749-50 Grandmamma, 1035 The Grandmothers, 1840 Grandmother' s Grandmother, 1035 Grandsons, 2578 Grange, Harold E. ("Red"), 5037 about, 5037 Granger movement, 3420-21, 6356 Grannis, Chandler B., ed., 6437 Granniss, Ruth, 6440 Grant, Bruce, 2253 Grant, Helen Hardie, 2633 Grant, Margaret, 5647 Grant, Ulysses S., 3696 about, 2280, 3435, 3444, 3696, 3706 Grant, William L., ed., 3156, 3207 Grapes of Wrath, 1775, 1777 Gras, Norman S. B., 5984, 6007 The Grass Harp, 1947 Grasselli, Eugene R., about, 4735 Grattan, C. Hartley, ed., 309, 2375 Grattan, Thomas Colley, 4334-35 about, 4334 Graves, William Brooke, 6171, 6202 comp., 6185 Gray, Asa, 4036, 4760 about, 4724, 4760 Gray, Henry David, 5301 Gray, J. W., about, 2857 Gray, James, 2358, 3986 Gray, Lewis Cecil, 5823 Gray, Wood, 3058 The Gray Wolfs Ha'nt, 757 Grayson, David, pseud. See Baker, Ray Stannard The Graysons, 876—77 Graziano, "Rocky", 5028 about, 5028 The Great American Fraud, 1 155 The Great Awakening, 22-23, 54 01-2 , 5411,5419 Great Awakening, 5402 Great Basin, 2971 Great Britain Colonial policy, 3176-77, 3179, 3188— 89, 3191-92, 3i95. 3221, 3225, 3241,3243 commerce, 3193 economic relations with, 3638 relations with, 3187-88, 3221, 3243, 3246, 3307, 3340, 3426, 3444, 3502, 3531, 3551-54, 3557-59. 3777-78 Civil War, 3536, 3550 War of 1812, 3542 Great Britain. Privy Council, about, 6232, 6234 Great Britain and France in the New World, 3171, 3188-89, 3191, 3226 Great Britain and Massachusetts, 3241 Great Britain and Pennsylvania, 3225 Great Britain and Texas, 3554, 3577 Great Circle, 11 63 Great Depression (1929). See Depres- sion (1929) The Great Diamond Robbery, 2305 Great Dismal Swamp, 4336 The Great Divide, 1069-70 The Great Gatsby, 1428-29 about, 1425 The Great God Brown, 1648, 2337 The Great God Pan, 4953 The Great God Success, 1 108 The Great Good Place, 1012 Great Lakes, 2803, 3170, 41 13-14, 4140,4315,4329, 4349 short stories, 1149-50 travels & travelers, 314 See also Waterways, inland The Great Lawsuit, 315 The Great Meadow, 1701 Great Plains, 2933, 4151-71 geography, 2969 grasslands, 2966 guidebooks, 3895-3909 hist., 3784, 3964 Indians. See Plains Indians Great Revival, 5402 Great Smoky Mountains, short stories, 1084, 1087-88 The Great Tradition, 2439 The Great Valley, 1601 Greece, fiction, 1839 Greeks Anthology, 1599, 2481 Greeks, 4435 Greeley, Horace, 2883, 4373 about, 313, 2770, 2797, 2848, 2858, 2868,2883,4372 Greely, Adolphus W., 2981 about, 2980-81 Green, Abel, 4892 Green, Constance McLaughlin, 4789 Green, James A., 3326 Green, Nicholas St. John, about, 5264 Green, Paul, 1473-78, 2332-33, 2337 about, 1479 Green, Samuel Swett, 6472 about, 6476 Green, William, 5906 Green Bay Packers, about, 5045 A Green Bough, 1379 Green Centuries, 1469 Green Fruit, 1227 The Green Leaf, 1635 The Green Mountain Boys, 580-82 Green Mountains, Vermont, 2742 The Green Pastures, 2327, 2333, 2348 Green River, 217 The Green Town, 2350 The Green Wave, 2106 Greenbackers, 3421, 6356, 6362, 6427 Greenberg, Samuel Bernard, 1480-81 about, 1 48 1 Greenblatt, Milton, 4838 Greene, Bertram, drawings, 3164 Greene, Edward L., about, 4734 Greene, Evarts Boutell, 3089, 3190-92, 5419 Greene, Theodore M., 5100 Greene, Theodore P., ed., 31 10-1 1 Greener Fields, 2725 Greenfield, Kent Roberts, ed., 3726 Greenfield Hill, 121 Greenough, Horatio, about, 5738 Greenslet, Ferris, 951, 2679-81 about, 2680 Greenway, John, 5552 Greenwich Village Bohemianism, 3757 theater, 4916 Greer, Thomas H., 6426 Greever, Garland, ed., 1046 Gregg, Josiah, 4188 about, 4188 Gregory, Herbert E., 4715 Gregory, Horace Victor, 1132, 1482- 83, 1905 ed., 1 1 85 Gregory, Mrs. Horace Victor. See Zaturenska, Marya Gregory, Raymond W., 5224 Gregory, Winifred, 2915 Gress, Edmund G., 6456 Grew, Joseph C, 3545, 3599 Grey, Hugh, ed., 5071 Grey, Zane, 1484-86, 5073-74 about, 1486-87, 5073 Greyslaer, 365, 550 Grieve, George, tr., 4253 GrifTes, Charles T., about, 5605, 5680 Griffin, Grace Gardner, 3521 Griffin, James B., ed., 2990 Griffin, Marcus, 5061 Griffis, William Elliot, 2851 Griffith, Louis Turner, 2856 Griffith, Richard, 4958 Griffith, Virgil A., 6273 Grimes, Alan Pendleton, 2921, 6062 Grimm brothers, about, 5504 Grinnell, George Bird, 2999-3000, 4724 Grinnell expeditions, 2980 Griswold, Alexander Viets, Bp., about, 5457 Griswold, Alfred Whitney, 3594 Grodzins, Morton, 4469 Grogan, John M., 4695 Groost, Gerard, about, 3765 Gross, A. H., tr., 11 93 Gross, Ben, 4965 about, 4965 Gross, Gerald C, 4707 Gross, Mason W., ed., 5384 Gross, Samuel D., 4824 about, 4824 The Gross Clinic (painting), 5764 Grossman, James, 252, 2286 Grosvenor, Gilbert, ed., 2962 Grosz, George, illus., 11 18 The Ground We Stand On, 1329 The Group, 2347 Group dances, 5590 Group theatre, 4914 Grover, Leonard, 2301 Groves, Ernest R., 4563 Groves, Harold M., 5970 The Groves of Academe, 2021 Growth, 1806 Gruchy, Allan G., 5888 Grunder, Garel A., 3595 Gruskin, Alan D., 5752 Guard of Honor, 1302 INDEX / 1 1 29 The Guardian Angel, 375 Guerrant, Edward O., 3576 Guest, Robert H., 6055 Guidance in education, 5149, 5228 Guidebooks. See under names of places and regions, e.g., Alaska — guidebook Guild, R. A., ed., 89 Guilday, Peter K., 5477 Gulf coastal plain, 2933 Gulf States, 3946 Gullah dialect, 2271, 4436, 5540 Gulliksen, Harold, 5229 Gummere, Amelia Mott, ed., 185 Gummere, Francis Barton, about, 5222 Gun Factory, Naval, hist., 3670 Gunderson, Robert Gray, 3326 Gunn, Selskar M., 4863 Gunther, John, 3499 Gustafson, Axel F., 5884 Guthe, Carl E., 2990 Gutheim, Frederick A., 4008 Guthmann, Harry G., 5967, 5971 Guthrie, Alfred Bertram, 1488-90 Guthrie, Paul N., ed., 6054 Guthrie, Ramon, tr., 3773 Gymnasiums, 4990 H H. M. Pulham, Esquire, 1592 Haas, Theodore H., 4428 Haas, William H., 4218 Habenstein, Robert W., 4527 Haber, David, ed., 6126 Haberle, John, about, 5744 Hacienda, 1660 Hacker, Louis M., 5878 Hackett, Alice Payne, 2482 Hackett, James H., about, 518 Hackett, Walter, 2348 Hadley, Chalmers, 6476 Haefner, George E., 5220 Hafen, Le Roy R., 4179, 4666 Hagedorn, Hermann, 2682-86 Hague, Frank, about, 6388 Hague. Permanent Court of Inter- national Justice, about, 3534 Hahn, Milton E., 5228 Haigh, Robert W., 5914 Haight, Gordon S., 279 Hail Columbia (song), about, 5616 Haiman, Miecislaus, 3250 Haines, Charles G., 6240 Haines, Francis, 3001 Haines, George, IV, 3065 Haines, William Wister, 2337 The Hairy Ape, 1647-48, 2332 Haiti, relations with, 3575, 3584, 3587 Hakluyt, Richard, about, 3198 The Halcyon in Canada, 741 Hale, Bryant, 4946 Hale, Carolyn L., comp., 6205 Hale, Edward Everett, 880, 900-9, 4036 Hale, George Ellery, about, 4722 Hale, Robert Beverly, 5754 Hale, William Harlan, 2883 Hales, Dawson W., 5099, 5141 Haley, James Evetts, 4153, 4196 Halford, Francis John, 2687-88 Halich, Wasyl, 4492 Halkin, A. S., 4457 Hall, Basil, 4300-2 Hall, Clayton Colman, ed., 3209 Hall, Clifton L., ed., 5108 Hall, Dorothy, 5196 Hall, Francis, 4286-87 about, 4285 Hall, G. Stanley, about, 51 16, 5392 Hall, Gertrude, about, 1278 Hall, James, 319-22 Hall, Margaret E., ed., 6262 Hall, Margaret Hunter, 4300 Hall, Thomas Cuming, 5394 Halleck, Fitz-Greene, 323-29, 2295 about, 329 Hall-marks, pewterers', 5788 Hallenbeck, Wilbur C, 4587 Halline, Allan G., ed., 170, 200, 208, 2337 Hallowed Years, 5066 Hallowell, Maine, guidebook, 3793 Halpert, Herbert, 5545 ed., 5566, 5576 Halsey, Francis W., 163 Halsey, Richard T. H, 5796 Halsted, William S., about, 4821, 4845 The Halt in the Garden, 151 6 Hambridge, Gove, ed., 5837 Hamburger, Ernest, 521 1 Hamburger, Philip P., 1598 Hamer, Philip M., 3068 Hamilton, Alexander, 2291, 3288-89, 4240, 6075 about, 723-24, 2873, 3125, 3281, 3288-91, 4239, 6015, 6170 Hamilton, Allan McLane, 3291 Hamilton, Andrew, about, 2931 Hamilton, Charles, ed., 4652 Hamilton, Holman, 3333 Hamilton, R. S., about, 4536 Hamilton, Walton, 4513, 5290 Hamilton, William Baskerville, ed., 2571 Hamilton, William J., 2955 The Hamlet, 1391 The Hamlet of A. MacLeish, 1586 Hamlin, Sarah H. (Simpson), 5709 Hamlin, Talbot Faulkner, 5700, 5708-9 Hammarstrand, Nils, tr., 4486 Hammerstein, Oscar, 2337, 5659, 5685 Hammond, Bray, 6000 Hammond, Charles, about, 2857 Hampson, Alfred Leete, ed., 842 Hampton, Wade, 2635 Hampton, S. C, plantation life, 5087 Hampton Institute, about, 2982 Hanau, Stella, 4916 Hanchett, David S., 5948 Hancock County, Ohio, 3866 Hand, Learned, 6264 Handel, Leo A., 4950 Handicrafts. See Arts and crafts Handkerchiefs from Paul, 2483 Handlin, Mary F., 3083 Handlin, Oscar, 3083, 4410-11, 4428- 30, 4455,4481 ed., 3079, 4323, 5483 Hands Off, 3577 Hanford, A. Chester, 5178 Hanford, James Holly, 5573 Hanley, Louise, ed., 2240 Hanley, Miles L., 2268 Hanna, Alfred J., 3980, 4293 Hanna, KathrynT. (Abbey), 4096 Hanna, Marcus Alonzo ("Mark"), about, 3424, 6352 Hannah Thurston, 2282 Hansen, Allen O., 5 1 2 1 Hansen, Alvin H., 5898, 5968 Hansen, Harry, 387, 1122, 3488, 3987 ed., 1 125, 2351 Hansen, Marcus L., 2268, 4390, 4412- 13.4473 Hanson, Earl Parker, 4222 Hanson, Howard, about, 5671 Happiness, pursuit of (law), 3756 Happy Days, 1604 The Happy Marriage, 1 586 Happy New Year, Kameradesl, 2016 Haraszti, Zoltan, 3279 Harbeson, Georgiana (Brown), 5785 Harbison, Winfred A., 6077 The Harbor, 1657 Harbor of the Sun, 2746 Harbord, James G., 3710 Hard, Walter R., 4009 Hard Candy, 2227 Hard Winter, 1553 Hardee, Melvene D., ed., 5228 Harding, Thomas Swann, 5857 Harding, Walter R. comp., 589 ed., 610 Harding, Warren Gamaliel about, 3475 fiction, 1756 Hardman, Jacob B. S., ed., 6032 Hardy, C. De Witt, 5169 Hardy, John, about, 5517 Hare, James H., about, 2908 Hare, Robert, about, 4740 Hare, William H, Bp., about, 5457 Hargrave, Roy, 4968 Harlem (N.Y.) fiction, 1832, 1914-15 short stories, 1521, 1523-25 Harlow, Alvin F., 4122, 4667, 4675, 5928 ed., 5512 Harlow, Ralph Volney, 2689, 6156 Haiman, R. Joyce, 4693 Harmon, Frances B., 5305 Harmon, George Dewey, 3028 Harmon, Nolan Bailey, 5463 Harmon, "Old Council," about, 5529 Harmonium, 1782, 1784 Harmony Society, hist., 3819 Harned, Thomas B., ed., 627, 637 Harnett, William M., about, 5744 Harno, Albert J., 6321 Harnoncourt, Rene d', 3017 Harp of Columbia, 5577 1 larpcr, Joseph Henry, 6450 H.irper, Lawrence A., 3193 Harper, Robert A., 4619 1 larpcr, Wilhclmina, comp., 937 Harper and Brothers, about, 6445, 6450 Harper's Magazine, 2557 The Harpe's Head, 322 Harrigan, Edward, about, 4935 Harriman, Edward Henry, about, 5932 1 130 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Harriman, Margaret Case, 4931 Harrington, Fred Harvey, 3103 Harriot, Thomas, about, 4721 Harris, Charles K., about, 5635 Harris, George Washington, 330-32 Harris, J. S., 3041 Harris, Joel Chandler, 880, 910-25, 1134-35. 2296 about, 910, 2261 Harris, Joseph P., 6157, 6403-4 Harris, Julia C, ed., 923 Harris, Mark, 1582 Harris, R. E. G., 6207 Harris, Seymour E., 5889-90, 6010 ed., 3638 Harris, Thaddeus W., about, 2280 Harris, William Torrey, 5266, 5306-8 about, 5259, 5305, 5307, 5309 Harrison, James A., ed., 533, 538 Harrison, Joseph B., ed., 938 Harrison, Peter, about, 5704 Harrison, Shelby Millard, 4588 Harrison, William Henry, 2996 about, 3325-26 Harrisse, Henry, 6460 about, 6460 Harrod, James, about, 2726-27 Harshberger, John W., 2957 Hart, Albert Bushnell, 3079, 3083, 3381 ed., 3177. 3301, 3337. 3356. 4034 Hart, Clyde, 4701 Hart, James D., 2433-34, 2482 ed., 2338 Hart, Lorenz, about, 5685 Hart, Moss, 1491-93, 1545, 1548, 2327, 2333-34 Hart, Tony, about, 4935 Harte, Francis Bret, 926-40, 2290 about, 732, 941, 1 149, 2534 Hartford, Conn., 32 Hartford Convention, 3305 Hartford Courant, about, 2875 Hartford Wits. See Connecticut Wits Hartmann, Edward George, 4421 Hartshorne, Charles, ed., 5346 Hartshorne, Richard, 2937 Hartung, Maurice L., ed., 5249 Hartz, Louis, 6063 Harvard Anniversary Address, 460 Harvard College, 3745 Harvard Guide to American History, 3083 Harvard University about, 2767, 5221, 5670, 5672 curriculum, 5180 hist., 5203 Harvard University. Committee on the Objectives of a General Education in a Free Society, 5 1 80 Harvard University. Divinity School, about, 5424 Harvard University. Library, about, 6470 Harvard University. Philosophy Dept., about, 5369 Harvesting machinery, 5826 Harvey, Alexander, 975 Harvey, Fred, about, 4187 Harvey, William Brinton, 5468 Harwell, Richard B., ed., 2830 Hasse, Adelaide R., 4819, 5834 Hasslacher, Jacob, about, 4735 Hastings, George E., 146 Hastings, Thomas, 5665 The Hasty Heart, 2334 Hasty Pudding, 102 Hatch, Louis Clinton, 3681 The Hatch, 2350 Hatcher, Harlan H., 41 14, 41 18 Hathorn, Guy B., 6139 Haugen, Einar, 2267 Haunted Ground, 1553 The Haunted Mirror, 1703 Hauser, Elizabeth J., ed., 6429 Haven. Samuel F., 6447 Havighurst, Robert J., 4589, 5146, 5205 Havighurst, Walter, 3975, 4979 Haviland, Henry Field, 3610 Having Wonderful Time, 2327 Hawaii, 2688, 3449, 4218, 4220, 4470 fiction, 2003-4 Hawes, G. R., 5197 Hawgood, John A., 4478 Hawkes, Herbert E., 5178 Hawley, Amos H, 4393 Haworth, Paul Leland, 3432 Hawthorne, Nathaniel, 333-59, 2290. 2406 about, 21, 280, 360-64, 381, 470, 487, 538, 2368, 2385, 2397, 2420, 2456, 2476, 2479, 2503, 2545 Hawthorne, Sophia (Peabody), 349-50 Hay, Clarence L., 944 Hay, John, 94i~44> 3395, 3426 ed., 421 about, 689, 1 126, 3426 Hay-Pauncefote Treaty, 3559 Hayakawa, S. I., 378 Haycraft, Howard, 2436 ed., 2435, 2454-55 Hayes, Carlton J. H., 3572 Hayes, E. C, 4540 Hayes, Rutherford B., about, 3418-19 Haymarket Riot, 3425 Hayne, Paul H. ed., 616 about, 614 Flayner, Norman S., 4590 Haynes, Benjamin R., 6017 Haynes, Frederick Emory, 3433, 6427 Haynes, George H, 6158 Haynes, Williams, 4735 Hays, Arthur Garfield, 6127, 6265, 6322 Hays, William Jacob, about, 5806 Haystead, Ladd, 4594, 5843 Hayward, Arthur H., 5786 Haywood, William Dudley ("Big Bill"), about, 6045 Hazard, J. N., 3562 Hazard, Lucy Lockwood, 2437 A Hazard of New Fortunes, 973-76 Hazel Kir\e, 2337 Hazelton, George C, 2313 Hazlitt, Henry, 824 He and She, 2337 He Hanged Them High, 2656 He Sent Forth a Raven, 1 704 He Went Away for a While, 2749 Head o' W -Hollow, 2167 Heady, Ferrel, 63 11 Health education, 4863 insurance, 4635, 4808, 4882, 4885-90 resorts, etc., 2278 services, 4805, 4814, 4864, 4866, 4868, 4870-71, 4874, 4876, 4878, 4880-81,4885 hist., 4875, 4877 pediatric, 4841 rural, 4869-70, 4874 Mass., 4879 Heard, Alexander, 6376, 6378 Hearn, Lafcadio, 748, 945-55 about, 953, 955, 2481 Hearst, William Randolph, 2884 about, 2848, 2884 The Heart Is a Lonely Hunter, 2024 The Heart of Happy Hollow, 860 Heart of Man, 2546 The Heart of Maryland, 2315 The Heathen, 1052 The Heathen Chinee, 933 Heathen Days, 1 604 Heavens and Earth, 1224 Heaven's My Destination, 1866 Heavy machinery, 4140 Hebert, Marcel, about, 5325 Hechler, Kenneth W., 3456 Hecht, Ben, 2327, 2332 Heck, Arch O., 5207 Heck, Harold J., 5946 Heckscher, August, 5855 Hedge, Frederic Henry, about, 5263 Hedges, James Blaine, 3074 Hedin, Naboth, 4483 Hedrick, Ulysses P., 5824 The Heel of Elohim, 2527 Heely, Allan V., 5155 Heerwagen, Arnold, 2966 HefTelfinger, W. W. ("Pudge"), 5038 Heffen, Thomas, 2335 HefTner, Richard D., 3079 Hegel, Georg W. F., about, 3768, 5305- 6, 5326 Heidbreder, Edna, 5389 Heilman, Robert B., 2378 Heilner, Van Campen, 5075 Heindel, Richard Heathcote, 3777 Heinzen, Karl, about, 4481 Heiser, M. F., 2401 Heizer, Robert F., ed., 3002 Heldt, Henning, 6207 Helen of Troy, 18 14 Heliodora, 1320 Hellbox, 2075 Heller (Robert) and Associates, 4671 Heilman, George S., ed., 392-93 Heilman, Lillian, 1988-91, 2327, 2333- 36 Helm, MacKinley, 5767 Helms, Elva Allen, 6338 Helzner, Manuel, 5898 Hemingway, Ernest, 1 494-1 500, 2406 about, 821, 1501-5, 2371-72, 2376, 2406, 2427-28, 2508-9, 2537, 2542 Hemmen i den Nya Verlden, 4355 Hemming, Doris, tr., 4506 Hemming, Henry H., tr., 4506 Hendel, C. W., Jr., 5252 Henderson, Algo D., 5196 Henderson, Archibald, ed., 145 INDEX / "31 Henderson, Daniel M., 3434 Henderson, George F., 3697 Henderson, Ky., guidebook, 3858 Hendrick, Burton J., 3251, 3382-84, 3434,3716 Hennessey, Joseph, comp., 491 1 The Henrietta, i^yj Henry, Andrew, about, 4175 Henry, Caleb Sprague, about, 5263 Henry, John, about, 5506, 5517 Henry, Joseph, about, 4721, 4724, 4752, 4775 Henry, Merton G., 3661 Henry, Nelson B., ed., 5150 Henry, O., pseud. See Porter, William Sydney Henry, Patrick,, about, 3263 Henry, Ralph Chester, 3951 Henry, Robert Selph, 3385, 3689, 3698, 5926 Henry, Stuart C, 5480 Henry of "Navarre, 2281 Herald (Paris), about, 2872 Heraldic eagle, 2958 Heralds of American Literature, 2465 Herberg, Will, 5447, 5488 Herbert, F. Hugh, 2335 Herbert, Henry William, 5076-80 about, 5076-77, 5080 Herbert, Victor, about, 5605, 5681 Here Is New York., 1859 Here Lies, 165 1 Hereditary organizations, 3644, 4574 Here's O'Hara, 2074 Hergesheimer, Joseph, 1506-11 Hering, Doris, ed., 4971 The Heritage of Hatcher Ide, 1802 Herlihy, Elizabeth M., ed., 4036 Hermaios, 21 01 The Hermit Place, 2130 Heme, James A., 2304, 2337 Heroes, legendary. See Folk heroes Heroism, 285 Herr, John K., 3659 Herrick, Francis Hobart, 2958 about, 4743 Herrick, Robert, 956-58 about, 2419, 2464 Herrick, Virgil E., 5142 Herring, Edward Pendleton, 6357 Herring, James M., 4707 Herron, Ima Honaker, 2438 Hersey, John Richard, 1992-94 Herskovits, Melville J., 4446 Hertzler, Arthur E., 4825 about, 4825 Hervey, John, 5055 Herzberg, Joseph G., 2903 Herzog, George, ed., 5566, 5576 Hesperides, 1821 Hesperothen, 4382 Hesseltine, William B., 3053, 3435, 3785,4071 Hettinger, Herman S., 5647 Hewitt, Abram S., about 3443 Heyer, William, drawings, 5940 Heyward, Dorothy, 2332 Heyward, Du Bose, 1168, 1512-13, 2332, 5678 about, 1 51 4 Hiawatha, The Song of, 432 Hibbard, Benjamin Horace, 581 1 Hibben, Paxton, 3457, 5476 Hickerson, Harold, 2332 Hicks, Granville, 2439 Hicks, John D., 3084, 3436, 5831, 6358 Hicks, Wilson, 2908 The Hidden Public, 6463 Hidy, M. E., 5913 Hidy, Ralph W., 5913, 5980 Higby, Chester Penn, ed., 2293 Higginson, Francis, 3102 Higginson, Henry Lee, about, 5649 Higginson, Thomas Wentworth, 2280, 4036 ed., 839-40 High Border Country, 3951 High Calling, 1789 High Falcon, 11 54 High Passage, 1410 The High Place, 1262 High Plains, 4159, 4164 High schools. See Secondary education High Tor, 1174, 2333, 2336 Higham, John, 4422 Highet, Gilbert, 5218 Highwater Mark,, 937 Highwaymen, Colonial, 4227 Highways, 3786, 3788, 4085, 5934 La., 4100 Wyo., 391 1 Hiking, 5064 Hildeburn, Charles R., 4049 Hildreth, G. H., 5205 Hildreth, Richard, about, 3058 Hill, Charles E., 3522 Hill, Clyde M., ed., 5236 Hill, Frank Ernest, 5939 Hill, Helen, 3254 Hill, James J., about, 5880, 5882 Hill, Lawrence F., 3582 Hill, Ralph Nading, 4010 Hill, W. H., 5335 Hilliard, William, about, 6446 Hillman, Arthur, 4575 Hillman, Sidney, about, 6049, 6394 The Hills Beyond, 1 892 The Hills Give Promise, 1516 Hillsboro, 111., guidebook, 3878 Hillstrom, Joseph, about, 2164 Hillway, Tyrus, ed., 499 Hillyer, Katharine, 5059 Hillyer, Robert, 151 5-17 Hilsman, Roger, 3603 Hindle, Brooke, 4718 Hindus, Milton, ed., 656 Hinkel, Lydia I., cd., 5572 Hinsdale, Burke A., 5125 Hinshaw, David, 3485, 5479 Hinshaw, Kenneth, 5841 Hippolytus, 2313 Hipsher, Edward Ellsworth, 5656 The Hired Man on Horseback., 1686 Hiroshima, 1992 Hirschfeld, Charles, 3058 His Family, 1658 His Human Majesty, 1249 Hiscock, Ira V., 4866 Hislop, Codman, 4011 Hiss, Alger, about, 61 14, 6229 Historic houses, 5702, 5713, 5721-22, 5794 guidebook, 3786 Charleston, S.C., 4093 Conn., 3805, 4041 Mount Vernon, Va., 3271 Ohio, 41 19 Philadelphia, 4059 Washington, D.C., 4063 Historical Atlas of the United States, 2972 Historical Records Survey. District of Columbia, 5606 Historical research methods, 3054, 3061 Historical societies, 3052 Historical themes in literature annals, journals, etc., 1-6, 12-16, 36-39. 43-44. 49. 53-58, 66-71, 90-91 drama, 198, 200, 206-8, 365, 1477, 1491, 1520, 2048 essays, 11 03-4, 1267, 1873 fiction, 164, 201-4, 226-29, 239, 241, 245-60, 268-69, 277-79, 3°7> 311- 12, 405-13, 511, 514-16, 546-50, 552-53. 555. 579-82, 665, 721, 723-24, 745, 762-67, 821, 825- 29, 835, 1 105, 1222-24, 1239-41, 1325-28, 1331-32, 1353-56, 1379. 1382, 1388-89, 1403, 1406, 1420, 1424, 1437-39, 1441-44. 1468-69, 1488-90, 1506, 1508, 1511, 1541- 42, 1544, 1578, 1618-19, 1644, 1646, 1656, 1691, 1693-96, 1701, 1707-12, 1727, 1730, 1786, 1842, 1916-18, 1920, 1959-62, 1973- 80, 2005-6, 2194, 2199, 2201, 2799 hist. & crit., 2458 poetry, i34~39> 323. 368-69, 427- 29, 432-34, 486, 488, 614, 616-17, 623, 662, 664, 666, 1069, 1222, 1224, 1585, 1644-45, 1824-25, 2200 short stories, 725, 1 100-2, 1222, 1224, 1379. 1389. 1510 Historiography, 3044-69, 3730 bibl., 3064, 3066-67, 3074 local hist., 3061 sources, 3083 theories, methods, etc., 3054-55, 3057, 3062, 3065, 3075, 3083, 3174, 3407 World War II, 3726 Southern States, 3057 History, general American, 2601, 3044- 3500b, 3740, 3746, 3754, 3779. 3784 bibl., 3083 chronology, 3072, 3076-77, 3083. .3465 dictionaries, 3071-72 humor, caricatures, etc., 5803 in music, bibl., 5613 philosophy, 693-98, 3628, 3632, 3735.5269,5313 pictorial works, 3081-82, 5801, 5804 bibl., 5757. 5775. 5807 popular works, 1222 sources, 3068, 3079, 3100, 3106-36, 3143. 3I5Ii 3183-84. 3195. 3201- 19,3617 1 132 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES History, general American — Continued study & teaching, 3050, 3055, 3059, 3083 History, local, 2943, 3061, 3781-4222 See also History under names of places and regions, e.g., Califor- nia — hist. History and art, 5801-7 See also History, general American — pictorial works History of Plymouth Plantation, 2-6, 3204 Hit the Line Hard, 1687 Hitchcock, Henry Russell, 5710-n ed., 5718 The Hive of "The Bee-Hunter," 613 Hoagland, H. E., 6033 Hobart, John Henry, Bp., about, 5457 Hobbs, Edward H., 6144 Hobbs, William Herbert, 2979 Hobomo\, a Tale of Early Times, 241 Hobson, Wilder, 5644 Hockett, Homer C, 3054 Hocking, William Ernest, 5252, 5310- 16 about, 5310 Hodder, Jessie S., Mrs., about, 4649 Hodge, Frederick W., ed., 2982, 3217 Hodges, Henry G., 6210 Hoebel, Edward Adamson, 3014 Hoeltje, Hubert H., 5265 Hoernle, R. F. A., 5252 Hoffman, Charles Fenno, 365-67, 550, 2295 Hoffman, Daniel G., 5516 Hoffman, Edward Fenno, ed., 365 Hoffman, Frederick John, 2914, 2360, 2440 ed., 1399,2326,2330 Hoffman, Harold M., 6298 Hoffman, M. J., 5442 Hofstadter, A., 5291 Hofstadter, Richard, 3099, 3458, 3755, 5169, 5181 Hogan, William Ransom, 4193 Hohman, Elmo Paul, 5871 / Holbrook, Stewart H, 4022, 4028, 4394 Holcombe, Arthur N., 6076, 6336 Holden, Harold, ed., 1481 Holden, Paul E., 6018 Holder, Charles Frederick, 4724, 5081- 84 Holding companies, 6008, 6013 Holiday, a Comedy in Three Acts, 1200, 2348 Holism in economics, 5888 Holland, Elizabeth Luna (Chapin), 850 Holland, Josiah Gilbert, 850 Holland, Maurice, 4785 Holland. See Netherlands Holley, Irving B., 371 1 Holliman, Jennie, 4992 Hollingshead, August de B., 4564 Hollinshead, Byron S., 5170 The Hollow Men, 1359 Holloway, Emory, 871 ed., 627, 639 Hollywood, Calif., 2752, 4204, 4948 fiction, 1425, 1833, 1842, 2025, 2028, 2069, 2074, 2154 Holm, John Cecil, 2333 Holmer, N. M., 2364 Holmes, G. F., about, 4536 Holmes, John, about, 2280 Holmes, Oliver Wendell, Sr., 368-78, 2290 about, 375, 377, 449, 2277, 2374, 2513,2693 bibl., 377 Holmes, Oliver Wendell, Jr., 2607, 6222, 6242, 6277 about, 2542, 2607, 4545, 5264, 6241- 42, 6266 Holmes, Thomas J., ed., 48 Holmes, William H, 2991 Hoist, Hermann Eduard von, about, 3058 Holt, E. B., 5260, 5335 Holt, Henry, 689 Holt (Henry) and Co., about, 6445 Holt, Rackham, 2690, 5825 Holt, W. Stull, 3739 ed., 3044 about, 3058 Holy Land, travel and travelers, 769-71 Homage to Sextus Propertius, 1666 Homan, P. T., 4540 Home by the River, 1726, 5087 Home Country, 2745 Home Fires in France, 1413 Home manufactures, 5919 Home of the Brave, 2334 The Home Place, 2052 Home rule, Chicago, 6208, 6380 Homer, Winslow, about, 5765 Homestead Act (1862), 5811 Homeward to America, 1949 Hone, Philip, 2691-92 Honest John Vane, 277 Honey in the Horn, 1315 Honey out of the Rock., 2413 Honeywell, Roy J., 5122 An Honorable Titan, 2869 Hook, Sidney, 3065, 5254, 5289, 5291- 92 ed., 5257-58, 5291 about, 5259 Hooker, Joseph, about, 2614 Hooker, Nancy Harvison, 3545 Hooker, Thomas, 32-35 about, 6068 Hoole, William S., 379 Hooper, Claude E., 4700 Hooper, Johnson Jones, 379-80 about, 379 Hooper, Osman Castle, 2857 A Hoosier Holiday, 1340 The Hoosier Schoolmaster, 868-71 Hoover, Calvin B., 5891, 5947 Hoover, Herbert Clark, 3485 about, 3485-87 Hoover, Margorie Leonard, 6135 Hoover, Theodore Jesse, 4800 Hoover Commission. See Commission on Organization of the Executive Branch of the Government Hope of Heaven, 2074 Hopkins, Charles Howard, 5489-90 Hopkins, Frank E., ed., 1 1 Hopkins, Harry Lloyd, about, 1749, 3499 Hopkins, James F., ed., 3344 Hopkins, Johns, about 4845 Hopkins, Louis B., 5178 Hopkins, Mark, about, 5222 Hopkins, Samuel, about, 5428 Hopkins, Vivian C, 303 The Hopkins Review, 2442 Hopkinson, Francis, 146-48 about, 144, 146, 2465 Hopper, Ida T., comp., 3292 Horace, 2281 Horace Mann-Lincoln Institute. School of Experimentation, 5136 Horgan, Paul, 3782, 4197 Horine, Emmet Field, ed., 2667 Horizon, 2337 Horn, Stanley F., 3386, 5864 Horn, Ted, about, 5001 Horn, Tom, about, 2758 Hornberger, Theodore, 2412, 4719 ed., 2323 Home, A. R., 2266 Horner, Harlan H., 4843 The Horse and Buggy Doctor, 4825 Horse-racing, 5054-57 dictionary, 2259 Ky., 5057 Horse-Shoe Robinson, 409-11, 2347 Horse-Shoe Trail, Pa., 3820 Horsemanship, 5078 Horses, 2984, 5058, 5078, 5867 in art, 5770 Horticulture, 2790, 5824 Horton, John Theodore, 6224 Horton, Rod W., 2441 Horton, Walter M., about, 5433 Horwill, Herbert W., 2237 Hosmer, James K., ed., 91, 3219 Hospitals, 4310, 4808-9, 4839, 4841, 4862, 4870, 4885 administration, 4847, 4849 finance, 4847-49 services, 4847-49 New York (City), 4851, 4857 New York (State), 4846 See also Psychiatric hospitals Hot-Foot Hannibal, 757 The Hot Iron, 1475 Hotel Universe, 1199 Hotels, taverns, etc., 4590 Colonial period, 4227, 4251 furniture, equipment, etc., 5526 Va., 4086 Yosemite, 42 11 Houghton, Norris, 4901, 4920 The Hour, 2415 Housatonic River and valley, 4000 The House behind the Cedars, J56 House decoration, 5726, 5729-30, 5732, 5796 A House Divided, 1256 The House of Beadle and Adams, 2444 The House of Breath, 1985 The House of Connelly, 1475 The House of Mirth, 1847 The House of Sun-Goes-Down, 2415 The House of the Seven Gables, 345-47 A House Too Old, 2129 Housing, 4395, 4600, 4608, 4610-12, 4617 finance, 461 1 INDEX / "33 Housing — Continued Negroes, 4448 Willow Run, Mich., 4586 Houston, Sam, about, 3341 Houston, Tex., guidebook, 3921 The Hovering Fly, 1810 Hovland, C. I., 3724 How Santa Claus Came to Simpson's Bar, 930, 937, 939 How To Tell a Story, 798-99 How To Write Short Stories, 1 554 Howard, Bronson Crocker, 2307, 2337, 2347 about, 2307, 2471 Howard, Charles P., about, 6049 Howard, Delton T., 5283 Howard, John Tasker, 5607, 5677 Howard, Joseph Kinsey, 4176, 4178, 6207 ed., 4178 Howard, Leland O., about, 4722 Howard, Leon, 449, 482, 500, 2401, 2412 ed., 2339 Howard, Sidney Coe, 1518-20, 2327, 2332>2337.2348 Howard, William Travis, 4867 Howe, Edgar W., 959-63, 2885 about, 959, 2885 Howe, Elias, about, 4786 Howe, Frederic C, 6428 about, 6428 Howe, George Frederick, 3437 Howe, Henry F., 4012 Howe, Irving, 995, 11 88, 1400 Howe, Julia Ward, 2313 about, 4040 Howe, Mark Antony De Wolfe, 2693- 98, 2922, 5648, 6241 ed., 462, 2607 about, 2698 Howe, Will D., 2391 Howe, Winifred E., 5795 Howells, Mildred, ed., 981 Howells, William Dean, 214, 857, 859, 861, 893, 961, 964-83, 2290 about, 277, 279, 706, 887, 890, 971, 977> 983, 986, 1089, 2517, 2520, 2534, 2922, 6424 Hower, Ralph M., 5958-59 Howes, Cecil, 4168 Howes, Charles G., 4168 Howgate, George W., 5376 Howison, George Holmes, 5317-18 about, 5317-18 Howitt, Mary, tr., 4356 Hoyt, Charles H., 2306, 2348 Hoyt, Charles Sherman, 5019 Hoyt, Elizabeth E., 5899 Hoyt, Harlowe R., 4902 Hoyt, Homer, 5812 Hoyt, William G., 2949 Hrdlicka, Ales, about, 4722 Hu, Shih, 5290 Hubbart, Henry Clyde, 4115 Hubbell, Alvin A., 4844 Hubbell, Jay B., 4068 ed., 408, 2340, 2424, 2442 Hubble, Edwin Powell, about, 4721 Huckleberry Finn, The Adventures of, 782-83,787-93,811 Hudgins, Bert, 2940 Hudson, Arthur Palmer, 5576 Hudson, Wilson M., ed., 5509, 5521 Hudson, Winthrop S. ( 5395 ed., 88 The Hudson Review, 1664, 2558 Hudson River and valley, hist., 3972 Hudson River Bracketed, 1854 Hudson River, essays, 1002-3 Huebner, Grover G., 5948 Huegy, Harvey W., 5945 Huff, Theodore, 4953 Huffman, Laton A., about, 4151-53 Huffman, Roy E., 5858 The Huge Season, 2056 Hugh Selwyn Mauberley, 1666 about, 1670 Hughes, Adella Prentiss, 5630 Hughes, Charles Evans, 6243 about, 6254 Hughes, Glenn, 4905 Hughes, Henry Stuart, 3507 Hughes, John, about, 3257 Hughes, Langston, 567, 1521-25, 4440 about, 1 522 Hulbert, Archer Butler, 2943 Hulbert, James Root, 2239 ed., 2236 Hull, Cordell, 3546 about, 3549 Hull, John, about, 3198 Hull, William I., 3222 Hull House, Chicago, 4614 Hultgren, Thor, 5922 The Human Comedy, 2115 The Human Fantasy, 1858 Humanism, New, 1735, 2375, 2385-86, 2422, 2425, 2479, 2503, 2511, 5ii5 , Humanitarianism, 6071 essays, 2479 fiction, 2084 poetry, 1061, 1069, 1872, 2079 Humanities, 2375, 2422, 3739, 5100, 5ii5 A Humble Romance, 882 Humboldt River, Nev., 3985 Hume, Robert A., 688 Humidity, 5816 See also Climate Humor, 192, 368, 456-57, 542-43, 768, 862-66, 878, 1629-34, 1651-52, 1815-20, 1859-63, 2597-98, 2642- 43, 2657, 2735-36, 2796, 2808, 3732, 3735, 4097, 4964, 4991, 4995,5506-7,5511,5513 anthologies, 2370 essays, 1214-20, 1317-18, 2469 frontier, 194-97, 379~8o, 445-48, 612-13, 941, 2501, 3353, 4097, 5508, 5542 hist. & crit., 2501 periods Colonial, 52-53 (1764-1819), 122, 128, 130, 132 (1820-70), 192-97, 209-15, 330-32, 368, 379-81, 422-26, 445-48, 456-58, 5", 542- 46, 556-61, 612-13 Humor — Continued periods — Continued (1871-1914), 701-5, 768-812, 856-66, 878-80, 910-16, 922, 924-25, 941, 1 126-31, 2469 (1915-39), 1214-20, 1317-18, 1523, 1525, 1554-55, 1629- 35, 1651-52, 1802, 1815-20, 1828, 1833, 1842, 1859-63 (1940-55), 2052, 2149-55, 2202 Ark., 5542 Ga., 445-48, 556-57 Ky., 5546 Mich., 5533, 5575 Middle West, 701-5, 1126-31 Mo., 5528 Ozark Mountains, 5544-45 Southwest, New, 4 190 Tex., 5521,5527 See also Cartoons; Comic strips; Tall tales Humphrey, Don D., 5947 Humphrey, Edward F., 5406 Hungarians, 4360 Hungerfield, and Other Poems, 1536 Hungry Gulliver, 1896 Hunt, Gaillard, 3283, 3601 ed., 3283 Hunt, George T., 3009 Hunter, Beatrice Jones, 5929 Hunter, Dard, 6457 Hunter, Louis C, 5929 Hunter, Milton R., 4183 Hunter College Elementary School, about, 5205 Hunting and fishing, 2665, 2794, 4990, 5065-97 essays, sketches, etc., 1724 fiction, 1466, 1500, 1681, 1954, 1957 Huntington, Archer M., about, 2941 Huntsman, What Quarry?, 1609 Hurd, C. F., 6207 Hurlbut, Jesse Lyman, 4893 Hurricanes, 2307 Hurst, Willard, 6225 Hurston, Zora Ncale, 1526-29 Hurt, Huber William, 5041 Hutchins, John G., 5930 Hutchins, Robert M., 5235, 6126 Hutchinson, Anne, about, 6229 Hutchinson, Edward P., 4395 Hutchinson, Thomas, about, 3257 Hutchinson, Thomas H., 4692 . Hutchinson, William T., 3058, 5826 ed., 3058 I lutchison, Bruce, 4013 Hutchison, John A., 5487 ed., 5496 Huth, Hans, 5884 Hutson, Charles W., ed., 3292 Hutter, Elizabeth L., ed., 3292 Hutton, David Graham, 41 16, 4234 Hutton, Joseph, 2347 Huxley, Thomas Henry, about, 2481 Hyde, Arthur Mastick, 3487 Hyde, George E., 3003 Hydroelectric power projects, 4214 Hydrographic Office, about, 4771 Hydrography, 4721 Hydrotherapy, 4840 Hyer, R. V., 6195 1 134 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Hyman, Harold Melvin, 3387-88 Hyman, Stanley Edgar, 2443 Hymen, 1320 Hymn to the Rising Sun, 1475 Hymns, 662, 5633 See also Church music; Religious folksongs Hyneman, Charles S., 3535, 6172 Hyslop, Francis E., ed. & tr., 520 Hyslop, Lois, ed. & tr., 520 I ITO, about, 5953 I.W.W., about 6045, 6360 / Am a Camera, 2336 / Am a Man, 2645 I Am movement, 5439 / Came out of the Eighteenth Century, 2783 / Cover the Waterfront, 2747 I De Dage, 1721 / Hate Thursday, 1409 / Remember, 6450 / Remember Mamma, 2334 /; Six Nonleclures, 13 12 / Thought of Daisy, 2535 / Wonder Why?, 4989 Ibsen, Henrik, about, 896-97 Icebound, 2337 The Iceman Cometh, 1647-48, 2335 Ichihashi, Yamato, 4465 Ickes, Harold L., 3498 Ida, 1 77 1 Idaho, 3961 guidebooks, 3935-36 fiction, 1420-22 hist., 3959, 3961,4147 natural resources, 4212 Idealism, 3732, 3769, 5252, 5259, 5262, 5305. 5317.5334. 5354-55 Ideas of Order, 1784 The Ides of March, 1869 Idiot's Delight, 1751, 2333 The Idols of the Cave, 2094 The Idyl of Red Gulch, 930 lie, 1648, 2332 lies, George, 4786 Ilg, Frances L., 5149 /// Fares the Land, 5846 Illegitimate Sonnets, 1626 Illinois, 3948, 4126-36 architecture, 5719 descr., 3988 econ. statistics, 4132 fiction, 867, 876-77, 1978, 2029, 2033 frontier life, 4097-98 Germans, 4478 govt., 6195 guidebooks, 3875-81 hist., 2757, 3663, 3875, 3986, 411 1, 4115,4126-33 libraries, 6473 Norwegians, 4487 personal narratives, 2251 poetry, 1825 politics, 6383 rural communities, 4109 travel & travelers, 4322 Illinois. Centennial Commission, 4126- 32 Illinois Central Railroad, about, 4320, 5927 Illinois High School Association, about, 5000 Illinois River and valley hist., 3986 travel & travelers, 4322 Illusions, 292 The Illustrated Man, 1935 Illustration of books, 5782 Illustrators, 5806 I'm a Stranger Here Myself, 1630 I'm Sure We've Met Before, 2746 Image and Idea, 2498 Images or Shadows of Divine Things, 21 Imagism, 1319, 1432, 1583-84, 1813, 1872, 2403 Immigrants. See Foreign population Immigrant's Return, 2777, 4494 Immigration, 3136, 3139, 4147, 4404- 17,4424,4551,4617 Chinese, 3437, 4464 English, 4488 Filipinos, 4470 Japanese, 4465 Jews, 4460 Mexicans, 4470-72 Norwegians, 4484-85 Orientals, 4468 policy, 4418-25, 6122 Puerto Ricans, 4470 Scotch, 4488-4491 Welsh, 4488 The Immortal Storm, 2377 Immortal Wife, 2818 Immunology, 4722 Impeachment, Presidential (1868), 3362,3412 Imperial City, 1688 Imperialism, 1069, 31 10, 3428 Implements, utensils, etc., 5596, 5598, 5787-88 The Importance and Means of a Na- tional Literature, 230 Imports, 5947 Impressionism, 896-97 In a Farther Country, 1987 In a yellow Wood, 2182 In Abraham's Bosom, 1473, 1475 In Defense of Reason, 2544 In Ghostly Japan, 951-52 In Mizzoura, 2347 In My Father's House, 1788 In Old Plantation Days, 860 In Ole Virginia, 1 100-2 In Reckless Ecstasy, 173 1 In Search of Heresy, 2373 In Spite of All, 2308 In Such a Night, 2413 In the American Grain, 1873 In the American Jungle, 1445 In the Days of Youth, 1614 In the Day's Work., 6459 In the Midst of Life, 735-37, 739 In the Money, 1874-75, t882 In the Tennessee Mountains, 1085-86 In the Zone, 1648 In This Our Life, 1462 In Tragic Life, 1 423 In War Time, 666 In What Hour, 2098 Income, 4395, 4448, 5899 national, 5893 tax, 5970 Incredible Era, 3475 Indentured servants, 6056 Independence Hall, Philadelphia, 4059 Independent Christian Society, about, 5423 Independent Treasury Act (1846), 3351 Index Medicus, 4819 The Index of American Design, 5594 India relations with, 3503 World War II, 3726 Indian agency, Red Cloud, Nebr., 3003 Indian agents, 3023, 3035 Indian place names, 2364 The Indian Princess, 66, 199, 2347 Indian Reorganization Act (1934), 3039 Indian Summer, 971 Indian themes in opera, 5681 Indiana, 3948, 4123-25 architecture, 5719 fiction, 867, 1802, 1808, 2005-6, 2210-12 folksongs & ballads, 5571 frontier life, 4097-98 guidebook, 3874 hist., 3995, 4111,4115, 4123-25 sources, 4125 poetry, 1 1 26 rural communities, 4109 travel & travelers, 1340 writers & writings, 4124 Indiana State Teachers' Association. Historical Section, 4125 Indiana University. Institute for Sex Research, 4566 Indianapolis Journal, 1 126 Indianapolis Speedway Race, 5003-4 Indians, American, 66-71, 319, 2663, 2802, 2982-3043, 4038, 4099, 4160, 4169, 4171, 4179, 4188, 4308, 4428 agriculture, 5821, 5824 and white civilization. See White civilization — and the American Indians art. See Art — Indians captives of, 53-55, 3032, 4233 commerce, 3180 culture, 2319, 2983, 2986, 2988-89, 2998, 3002, 3041-42, 3348, 4054, 4197 econ. condit., 3039-40, 3043 education, 2982, 3023, 3040 folklore, 3021, 5518, 5523, 5526 govt, relations, 2986, 3023, 3025-29, 3034-35. 3038-39. 3043. 3663 in art, 5770, 5802, 5806 language, 85, 2982, 2987, 2989, 3012, 4198, 4308 legends & tales, 3000, 3005, 3021, 4273,5518,5533 missions, 62, 3022, 3030, 3040, 4233, 5451 poetry, 11 96 religion, 3019-20, 3040 INDEX / "35 Indian, American — Continued reservations, 1613, 2986, 2989, 3040, 3043,4154 rites & ceremonies, 3015 soc. life & cust., 66, 68, 70, 85, 2722- 25, 2753, 2982, 2989, 2998, 3002, 3006, 3025, 3040, 3042-43, 4172, 4236, 4248-50, 4307 tribes & tribal groups, 2982, 2985- 86, 2989, 2998-3014, 3021, 3023, 3025-27, 3039-41, 4148, 4213 wars & warfare, 2645, 2710-11, 3307, 3644a, 3660, 4151, 4153, 4179. 5505 See also names of tribes, e.g., Chey- enne Indians Indians, American, in literature annals, journals, etc., 1-6, 53-55 drama, 198-99, 4926 editorials, sketches, etc., 62, 149, 1065 fiction, 114, 164, 201-4, 239, 241, 251-52, 258-60, 546, 549, 985, 1196, 1551-52, 1644, 1646, 1696, 1701, 1710, 1786, i960, 1975, 3000 hist. & crit., 3031-32 poetry, 323, 427, 432, 1644-45 short stories, 1553, 3000 The Indifferent Children, 1909 The Indigo Bunting, 1610 Indiscretions, 1666 Individualism, 3732-33, 6065, 6071, 6101 Industrial arbitration, 6058, 6299 Industrial arts. See Arts and crafts; Decorative arts Industrial chemistry, hist., 4793 Industrial education, 5210-11 See also Workers' education Industrial management, 4798, 6003, 6010, 6018, 6038 Industrial medicine, 4873, 4887 Industrial relations, 4552, 5894, 6037- 38, 6042, 6053, 6055 Industrial Relations Research Associa- tion, 4635 Industrial research, 4720, 4777, 4785 Industrial revolution, 6070 Industrial themes in literature essays, 1445 fiction, 726, 728-31, 762, 887, 941, 956-58, 973-78, 1053- 1055. "07. 1159, 1178, 1183, 1507, 1754-56, 1758 philosophical writings, 695-98 poetry, 1727, 1731 Industrial trusts, 3 121 Industrial Workers of the World, about, 6045, 6360 Industrialization, 3073, 3440, 4586, 5695 opposition to, 1 809 Industry, 2824, 2826, 3969, 4095, 4320, 4345, 5901-6, 6030 agricultural, 5847 govt, regulation, 5885, 6006 hist., 4531, 5878, 5904, 5906 in art, 5762, 5772, 5801 labor, 4408, 4488 museums, 3049, 4716 organization, 6004 Industry — Continued soc. aspects, 5899 Ariz., 4199 Fernandina, Fla., 3844 111., 4131 Mitchell, S. Dak., 3899 N.C., 4090 N. Dak., 4165 Pacific Northwest, 4212, 4214 Southern States, 4079, 4083-84 Tex., 4194 Tulsa, Okla., 41 71 W.Va., 4089 Industry and state, 5885, 6006 Inflation (finance), 5889 Information service, overseas, 3607 Inge, William, 1995-98, 2335-36 An Ingenue of the Sierras, 937 Ingersoll, Jared, about, 3257 Ingersoll, Robert G., about, 5476 Inglis, Ruth A., 4947 The Injustice Collectors, 1910 The Inmost Leaf, 2449 Inner Landscape, 2123 Inness, George, about, 5766 The Innocent Eve, 1642 The Innocents Abroad, 769-71 Inns. See Hotels, taverns, etc. Inoculation (smallpox), 4826 Inquiries and Opinions, 2468 Inscription for the Entrance into a Wood, 217-19 The Inside of the Cup, 762 Installment plan, 5963 Instinct vs Reason — a Black, Cat, 538 Institute for Education by Radio and Television, about, 5230 Institute for Religious and Social Stud- ies, Jewish Theological Seminary of America, 5491 Instrumentalism, 5271, 5275, 5290, 5291, 5295 Insular possessions. See Overseas pos- sessions Insurance, 5990, 5992 Intellect, 285 Intellectual America, 2399 Intellectual freedom, 5181, 5190 Intellectual life, 695-98, 6443 bibl., 3729 Colonial, 2549 colleges & universities, 5190, 5213 foreign influence, 3737, 374°, 3758, 3768-80, 4536 hist., 2445, 2459, 2491, 2601, 3073, 3085-98, 3150, 3236, 3297, 3303, 3313, 3352, 3728-80, 4518, 4520, 5104, 5261, 6443, 6446 refugees, 4414 See also Culture; also subdivisions Intellectual life and History under names of places and regions, e.g., New England — intellectual life; Pennsylvania — hist. Intelligence in the Modern World, 5287 Intelligence service, 3603 The Intent of the Critic, 2512 Inter-American commercial arbitration, about, 6299 International City Managers' Associa- tion, 6213 An International Episode, 1007 International law, 3526, 3530, 6277 International News Service, about, 2860 International organizations, 3548, 3631, 5946 International Printing Pressmen and As- sistants' Union, about, 6455 International relations. See Foreign re- lations International themes in literature fiction, 971-72, 986-91, 996-1001, 1004, 1007, 1014, 1242-47, 1249, 1251, 1754, 1758, 1839, 2187 poetry, 1585 short stories, 986, 1004, ion, 1242, 1248, 1250 speeches, addresses, etc., 1585 International Trade Organization (pro- posed), 5953 International Typographical Union, about, 6455 The Interpretation of Dreams, 2407 Interstate Commerce Commission, about, 2678, 5942 Interstate compacts, 6206 Into the Main Stream, 4443 Into the Valley, 1 993 Intonation (language), 2275 Intruder in the Dust, 1392 Inventions, 4780-92 hist., 4783, 4787, 4792 protection & management, 4780-81 Inventors, 4783, 4785-87, 4792 Investments, 3639, 3641, 5993-94 in foreign countries, 5989, 6002 Investments, British, in U.S., 5980 Invisible Empire, 3386 Invisible Man, 1967 Involuntary Witness, 2376 Iowa, 2644, 3948, 4144 Fox Indians, 3041 guidebooks, 3889-94 hist., 3663, 4144 Norwegians, 4487 politics, 6427 rural communities, 4109 Iowa in literature fiction, 1796, 1 798-1 800, 1830, 1969, 2161 personal narrative, 1543 poetry, 1968 short stories, 1796-97. 1801 Iowa Interiors, 1 797 Iphigenia, 2101 Iran, relations with, 3513 Irene, 526 Iris, Fedcrico Scharmel, 1530-31 Irish, 4435, 4498 in Boston, 4410 in Brooklyn, 4046 in New England, 4413 Irish dialect in literature, 862 Iron, 4061, 4113, 4141-42, 5909, 5918 The Iron Chain, 2057 The Iron Heel, 1055 The Iron Pastoral, 2061 Ironwork, 5790 The Irony of Joy, 2350 1 136 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Iroquois Indians hist., 3008, 3230, 4236 language, 2364 wars, 3009 Irradiations, Sand and Spray, 1433 Irrigation, 4214, 4383, 5858 Irvine, Rosalind, 5762 Irving, Washington, 381, 2290, 2295, 2337 ed., 219 about, 405, 511, 674, 1136, 2277, 2397. 2532, 2534 Irving, William, 511 Irwin, Mary, ed., 5161 Irwin, Ray W., 3686 Irwin, Robert B., 4636 Irwin, William H., 4963 Is 5,1313. 7/ He Living or Is He Dead?, 798-99 Is It Going to Rain?, 741 Is Sex Necessary? , 1816 Isaacs, Edith (Rich), 4921, 4968 ed., 4910 Isaacs, Raphael, 5426 about, 5426 Isely, Jeter A., 3668 Island in the Atlantic, 1449 The Island of Barrataria, 23 1 2 The Island of the Innocent, 1420 The Island Within, 1574 Isolationism, 3534, 3537, 3613 Israel, fiction, 1979 Israfel, 526, 11 67 It Beats Wording, 4991 It Can't Happen Here, 1566 It Pays to Advertise, 2348 Italian-American literature, 4497 The Italian Bride, 2303 The Italian Notebook?, 350 Italians, 4046, 4435, 4494, 4496-97, 4598 Italy fiction, 333, 971-72, 1000, 1496, 1499, 1940-41, 2087 relations with, 3507 travel & travelers, 333, 887, 964, 971- 72,1149 It's an Old Wild West Custom, 5526 Iverson, William J., 5227 Ives, Burl, 5506 comp., 5553 about, 5553 Ives, Charles, about, 5682 Ives, James Merritt. See Currier & Ives Ives, Sumner, 2261 The Ivory Tower, 1004, 1008 Ivy, Andrew C, 4818 I Jablonski, Edward, 5678 Jack, P. M., 2406 Jack Cade, 2347 Jack tales, 5529, 5546 Jackson, Andrew, about, 2772, 2820, 3126, 3315-18. 3320, 3352, 4533, 6177, 6258, 6359 Jackson, C. D., 3615 Jackson, C. S., about, 2863 Jackson, Clarence S., 5777 Jackson, George Pullen, 5555, 5577 ed., 5554 Jackson, Harry P., 6017 Jackson, Helen Maria (Fiske) Hunt, 984-85 Jackson, Joseph Henry, 1780, 3782 Jackson, Percival E., 6265 Jackson, Rachel, fiction, 2820 Jackson, Thomas Jonathan ("Stone- wall"), about, 245, 1809, 3697 Jackson, William, 6087 Jackson, William H., 5777 about, 5777 Jacksonian democracy, 3139, 3318-19, 3322,3351-52,6177,6351 See also Democracy Jacob, Philip E., 3649, 6124 Jacobs, Helen Hull, 5047 about, 5047 Jacobs, James Ripley, 3660 Jacobs, Lewis, 4944 Jacobs, Philip P., 4868 Jacobs, Robert D., ed., 2442 Jacob's Ladder, 1684 Jaffe, Bernard, 4721-22 James, Alice, 5319 about, 2476, 5319 James, Bartlett Burleigh, ed., 3208 James, Edwin, about, 4734 James, Frank Cyril, 5985 James, Henry (1811-1882), 2476, 5319 about, 2529, 5319-20 James, Henry (1843-1916), 986-1015, 1 152, 2290, 5319 ed., 5328 about, 817, 1015-22, 1149, 2376, 2385, 2405, 2476, 2498, 2539, 2616, 5319 bibl., 5328 James, Henry (1879-1947), 5335 ed., 5330 James, James Alton, ed., 3239 James, Macgill, 5758 James, Marquis, 3316-18, 3341, 5992 James, Preston E., ed., 2938 James, Reese D., 5659 James, Will, 2699-2700 about, 2700 James, William, 5123, 5319, 5321-33, 5362, 5431 ed., 5319 about, 2476, 3733, 3761, 5116, 5222, 5254, 5264, 5319, 5321, 5333-35. 5354. 5369, 5389 James, Sir William M., 3678 James family, 2476, 5319 James River, Va., hist., 3977 James Shore's Daughter, 1223 Jameson, John Franklin, 3045, 3057, 3064,3208 ed., 3201, 3210-1 1, 3252 about, 2974 Jameson, William J., 6331 Jamestown, Va., poetry, 1222 Jandy, Edward C, 4539 Jane, Lionel Cecil, ed., 3163 Jane, 121 2 Jane Talbot, 117 Janeway, Eliot, 5879 Janis, Harriet (Grossman), 5641 Janis, Sidney, 5696 Janowsky, Oscar I., ed., 4457 Japan economic relations with, 3638 in literature, 945, 951-53, 955 relations with, 3483, 3510, 3538, 3545. 3590-91. 3594. 3619. 378o Japanese, 2811-12, 4204, 4428, 4465- 66, 4468-69, 6120 Jarratt, Devereux, about, 5463 Jarrell, Randall, 1999-2002, 2363 about, 2497 Java Head, 1508 Jay, John, 6075 about, 3304, 3519 Jay, John C., 5062 Jay's Treaty, 3304 Jazz music, 5641-46 analysis, 5645 bibl., 5641 discography, 5641-42 influence on art, 5691 See also Popular music and songs Jean Huguenot, 1222 Jean-ah Poquelin, 748 Jeanie with the Light Brown Hair (song), 5677 Jeffers, Edmund V., 5670 Jeffers, Robinson, 1532-36, 2335 about, 2406, 2527 Jefferson, Joseph, 4934 about, 2616, 4934 Jefferson, Thomas, 149-53, 2291, 2296, 2337.3292-94.5418,6073 about, 46, 2775, 2996, 3281, 3294- 97, 4533. 4753. 5122, 5291. 54o8, 5418, 6170, 6359, 6460, 6466, 6469 drama, 1477 sculpture, 5737 Jeffersonian democracy, 6071, 6176 See also Democracy Jeffords, Thomas J., about, 3035 Jehovah's Witnesses, about, 5404, 5439 Jenkins, William Sumner, 3389 Jennie Gerhardt, 1335 Jennifer Lorn, 1904 Jensen, Merrill, 3253, 3302 ed., 3785 Jersey City, politics, 6388 Jessop, G., 2301 Jessup, Philip C, 3459 Jesuits, 3075, 3158, 3171, 5447 Jeuck, John E., 5956 The Jewel Merchants, 1 262 Jewett, Charles Coffin, about, 6476 Jewett, Clarence F., 4036 Jewett, Sarah Orne, 1023-31 about, 881, 1278, 2476 bibl., 1023 Jewish-American literature, 4457-58 Jews, 1445, 2585, 4407, 4428, 4435, 4452-62, 5270, 5459, 5495 biog. (collected), 4453 culture, 4452-53, 4456-59 econ. condit., 4457, 4459 fiction, 1 190, 1571, 1574, 1578, 1635, 1921-22, 1979, 1992, 2045, 2231 Polish, 1992 Baltimore, 4062 Brooklyn, 4046 Jim Bludso, 942-44 INDEX / 1 137 Jingling in the Wind, 1 700 Joan of Arc drama, 1172 fiction, 768 foan of Lorraine, 1 1 72 fob and His Children, 23 1 1 The Jockey, 2024 foe, 1035 Joerg, Wolfgang L. G., 2937 Joffe, Natalie F., 3041 Johannsen, Albert, 2444 John, Walton C, ed., 5309 John Brown's Body, 1222, 1224 fohn Dawn, 1290 John Deth, a Metaphysical Legend, 1166 John Dewey Society, 5243 John Godfrey's Fortunes, 2282 John Marr and Other Sailors, 488 John of the Mountains, 1080 Johnny Appleseed. See Chapman, John Johnny Johnson, 1475, 2333 Johns, Ethel, 4845 Johns Hopkins Hospital, about, 4819, 4829, 4831, 4845 Johns Hopkins University, about, 4831, 4845.5195 Johns Hopkins University. School of Medicine, about, 4819, 4821, 4829, 4831,4845 Johns Hopkins University. School of Nursing, hist., 4845 Johnson, Allen, ed., 3080, 3158, 4792, 5ii3 Johnson, Alvin S., 2701-2, 4513, 5219, 5426 about, 2702, 5426 Johnson, Andrew, 3376 about, 3361-62, 3411-12, 3447, 4103 Johnson, Burges, 11 15 Johnson, Charles A., 5407 Johnson, Charles S., 443-44, 5426 about, 5426 Johnson, Clifton, 214, 2627 Johnson, Donald Bruce, comp., 6367 Johnson, Edward, 321 1 ed., 73-74 Johnson, Emory R., 5948 Johnson, Frederick Ernest, ed., 5491 Johnson, G. Orville, 5207 Johnson, Gerald W., 2869, 2876, 3782 Johnson, Guy Benton, 5517, 5540, 5561 Johnson, H. B., 4481 Johnson, Harold Earle, 5649 ed., 5626 Johnson, Icie F., 2887 Johnson, Jack, about, 5025 Johnson, James Weldon, 1537-40 about, 1539 Johnson, Joseph E., ed., 3562 Johnson, Mary Louise, 5021 Johnson, Orlin, about, 5016 Johnson, Pamela H., 1896 Johnson, Robert, 3031 Johnson, Robert Underwood, 2923 about, 2923 Johnson, Samuel, 5251 Johnson, Thomas Cary, 4723 Johnson, Thomas H., 855 ed., 30, 846, 2345, 2460-61 431240—60 73 Johnson, Tom L., 6429 about, 6428-29 Johnson, Walter, 2893 comp., 3079 ed., 3545. 3567 Johnston, Alexander, 5029 Johnston, Henry Phelps, 4049 Johnston, James, about, 2856 Johnston, Joseph E., about, 2613 Johnston, William Dawson, 6469 Johnswood, 1436 Joint-stock companies, 6008 The Jolly Corner, 1008, 1012, 1014 Jolly Flatboatmen (painting), 5761 Jonah's Gourd Vine, 1527 Jonas, Klaus W., 1834 Jonathan Draws the Long Bow, 5534 Jonathan Gentry, 1824 Jones, Barbara (Slatter), 5198 Jones, Bobby, about, 5048 Jones, Clarence F., 2975 ed., 2938 Jones, E. E. Duncan, 1367 Jones, Fred Mitchell, 5960 Jones, George, about, 2869 Jones, Howard Mumford, 2424, 2445- 47,2521,3756,3774 ed., 378, 1187, 2341, 2460-61 Jones, James, 2003-4 Jones, John Paul, about, 1873 Jones, Joseph Cranston, silhouettes by, 5547 Jones, Joseph Stevens, 2347 Jones, Llewellyn Rodwell, 2939 Jones, Marcus E., about, 4734 Jones, Richard Seelye, 3645 Jones, Robert C, tr., 4472 Jones, Robert W., 2846 Jones, Rufus M., 5426 about, 5426, 5479 Jones, Victor, 621 1 Jones, William Melville, ed., 6238 Joplin, Scott, about, 5641 Jordan, David Starr, ed., 4724 about, 2623, 3761, 5434 Jordan, Donaldson, 3536 Jordan, Philip D., 4121, 5931 ed., 4143 Jordy, William H., 3055 Jorgenson, Chester E., ed., 131 Joseph, Samuel, 4460 Joseph and His Brethren, 2312 Joseph and His Friend, 2282 Josephson, Bertha E., ed., 3061 Josephson, Matthew, 3438, 3460, 5880 Josh Billing's Farmer's Allminax, 542 Joslyn, Carl S., 6027 Journal-Courier (Louisville, Ky.), about, 2892 Journal for Josephine, 1640 Journal of a Visit to Europe and the Levant, 489 Journal of a Visit to London and the Continent, 489 The Journal of Albion Moonlight, 2081 Journal of American Folklore, 5518 Journal of Experimental Medicine, 4831 The Journal of Higher Education, 5244 The Journal of Madam Knight, 38-39 The Journal of Medical Education, 4855 Journal of Speculative Philosophy, 5305 The Journal of the AERT, 5230 A Journal of the Transactions and Oc- currences in the Settlement of Massachusetts, 91 Journal up the Straits, 489 Journalism, 4479, 6432 bibl., 2850 business, 2902 education, 2910 hist., 2845-48, 2857, 2930 legal reporting, 6288 photography, 2908 policies & practices, 2900-12 schools, 2889, 2910 Ga., 2856 Ohio, 2857 Oreg., 2863 See also Magazines; Newspapers Journalists. See Authors as journalists; Newspapermen; Reporters and re- porting; and names of individual journalists The Journey, 1761 A Journey in the Back. Country, 4366 A Journey in the Seaboard Slave States, 4364 Journey into Fame, 5736 Journey of Tapiola, 1635 A Journey to Greatness, 5678 Journey to Love, 1885 Journey to the Coastal Marsh, 5351 A Journey to the Land of Eden, 13 Joyce, James, about, 1887 Judaism, 4457-58, 5267, 5404, 5458 Conservative, 5460 Reform, 5459 social thought, 5488 Judd, Sylvester, 402-4 Judge Not , 1 1 92 Judges, 6101, 6224, 6231, 6237-39, 6241-60, 6264, 6280-93, 6320 See also Lawyers Judgment Day (Farrell), 1373 Judgment Day (Rice), 1689 The Judgment of Paris, 2187 The Judgment of Solomon, 2312 Judicial administration, 6287, 6309 Judicial branch, 6075, 6084, 6133, 6137 Judicial decisions. See subdivision De- cisions and opinions under Courts and under Supreme Court Judicial error, cases, 6294, 6298 Judicial-legislative relations, 6089 Judicial power, 6257 Judicial review, 6089, 6092, 6094-95, 6101-2, 6164, 6238 Judicial statistics, 6280 Judiciary, state, 6293 Judson, Edward Zane Carroll, about, 2759 Judson, Isabella Field, ed., 4677 Julia Bride, 1008 Julian, John, 5633 Juneau, Solomon, about, 4140 The Jungle, 1754-55 Junior colleges, 5162 Junior high schools, 5157 Junius Redivivus, pseud., 4295 furgen, 1261-62 Juries, 6295-96 Jurisdiction, 6281, 6290, 6293 1 138 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Jurisprudence, Colonial period, 6100 Jurists. See Judges; Lawyers The Just and the Unjust, 1 301 Justice, 6219-6332 administration of, 4645, 4656, 6265, 6280, 6289-92, 6297-98, 6300, 6305-9 See also Law Justice and Expediency, 663 Justices of the peace, 6282, 6307 Juvenile delinquency, 4639, 4650, 5028 case studies, 4651 causes, 4657 control, 4644, 4651, 4657 hist., 4657 Juvenile literature. See Children — books K Kabakoff, Jacob, 4458 Kadelpian Review, 5242 Kahler, Alfred, 521 1 Kaempffert, Waldemar B., ed., 4787 Kahn, Ely J., Jr., 4935, 5636 Kahn, James M., 5008 Kalbfleish, Martin, about, 4735 Kalijarvi, Thorsten V., ed., 3635 Kallen, Horace M., 4457, 5124, 5254, 5290-91,5331,5335 ed., 5258, 5331 Kallir, Otto, ed., 2763 Kalm, Pehr, 4241-46 about, 4241 Kalorama, 101 Kammerer, Gladys M., 6159, 6186 Kamphoefner, H. H., 4594 Kane, Elisha Kent, 2980 about, 2980 Kane, Harnett T., 3952, 6377 Kane, Henry B., illus., 1083 Kanin, Garson, 2334 Kansas, 2730, 3944, 3948, 3964, 4167-68 frontier life, 4156 guidebooks, 3904-7 hist., 3990, 4167-68, 4189 in literature, 1997 rural communities, 4109 soc. life & cust., 4168 Kansas City culture, 2887 politics, 6207 Kansas City Star, about, 2887 Kansas-Nebraska Act (1854), 3397 Kansas River, 3990 Kant, Immanuel, about, 5289 Kantor, J. R., 5335 Kantor, Mackinlay, 1541-44 Kaplan, Abraham D. H., 6020-21 Kaplan, Morton A., 3630 Kappa Delta Pi, about, 5242 Karolik, Mr. & Mrs. Maxim, 5745 Karpel, Bernard, 5696 Karpeles, Maud, ed., 5583 Karr, Jean, 1487 Kaser, David, 6451 Katharine Walton, 547 Kauflman, Henry, 5787 Kaufman, George Simon, 1403, 1491, I545-50. 2327. 2332-34. 2348 Kaufman, Paul, 2424 Kaufmann, Edgar, ed., 5712 Kaufmann, F., 5291 Kavanagh, 430 Kaw River, 3990 Kaysen, Carl, 6010 Kayser, S. S., 4458 Kazeck, Melvin E., 4165 Kazin, Alfred, 6io, 2412, 2448-49, 2703-4 ed., 1348, 1430 about, 2704 Kearney, James J., ed., 6276 Keefer, Elizabeth E., illus., 5520 Keefer, Lubov, 3751 Keelboats, 41 10, 4281 Keeler, Oscar B., 5048 Keeley, James, 2862 Keenleyside, Hugh Llewellyn, 3555 Keep, Austin Baxter, 6468 Kegley, Charles W., ed., 5432 Keim, Sarah, about, 4818 Keith, E. Gordon, 5971 Keller, Franklin J., 5156 Keller, Helen Adams, 2705-9 about, 2706-8 Keller, Robert J., ed., 5202 Kelley, Pearce C, 5949 Kelley, Robert F., 5020 Kelley, Stanley, Jr., 6345 Kellog, Ansel Nash, about, 2864 Kellogg, Charles E., 2944 Kellogg, Louise Phelps, ed., 3212 Kellogg, Remington, 2955 Kellogg, Idaho, 4176 Kellor, Frances A., 6299 Kelly, Alfred H, 3058, 6077, 6128 ed.,6i28 Kelly, Clyde, 4668 Kelly, Fanny, about, 3032 Kelly, Fred C, 4788 ed., 705 Kelly, George, 2332, 2348 Kelly, Howard A., 4872 Kelly, Melville Clyde, 4668 Kelly, Robert L., 5183 Kemler, Edgar, 1606 Kemmerer, Donald L., 5986 Kemmerer, Edwin Walter, 5986 Kempfer, Homer, 5209 Kendall, George Wilkins, about, 2871 Kendall, John S., 4922 Kendall, Patricia L., 4701 Kendrick, Myron Slade, 5969 Kcnkel, William F., 4549, 4619 Kennan, George, 3625, 5932 Kennebec River and valley, 1290, 3793, 3973 Kennedy, Albert J., 4624 Kennedy, Gail, 5189 ed., 3112-15,5199 Kennedy, John Pendleton, 405-14, 2296 Kennedy, Richard, ed., 3145 Kennedy, Stetson, 3953 Kenner, Hugh, 1671 Kent, Donald Peterson, 4414 Kent, Frank R., 2876, 6333-34, 6359 Kent, James, 6277 about, 6223, 6231 Kent, Rockwell, 5021 about, 5783 Kent, Sherman, 3603 The Kentuckjan, 518 The Kentuckjan in New York],, 226 Kentucky, 3963, 4079, 4106-7 caves, 2946 culture, 3737 folklore, 5529, 5546 folksongs & ballads, 5584 frontier & pioneer life, 2667, 2726- 27, 4098 guidebooks, 3856-60 hist., 3240, 3983, 4106-7 language (dialects, etc.), 1697, 2257 legends, 5529, 5546 soc. life & cust., 5584 travel & travelers, 366, 4276, 4283, 4310,4322 Kentucky Derby, 5057 Kentucky in literature editorials, sketches, etc., 716-17 fiction, 202-4, 322, 516, 546, 550, 716, 718, 766-67, 1464-65, 1468- 69, 151 1, 1697-99, 1701, 1705, 2166, 2169, 2173, 2193-94, 2199, 2201 personal narratives, 2166 poetry, 2166, 2172, 2193, 2196, 2200 short stories, 716, 1697, 1703, 1706, 2166-68, 2170-71 Kentucky River, 3983 Kentucky Tragedy (1825) drama, 365 fiction, 365, 550, 2199 Kenyon, John Samuel, 2273 ed., 2238 The Kenyon Critics, 2559 The Kenyon Review, 2559 Keogh, Andrew, about, 6470 Kepler, Thomas S., ed., 183 Keppel, Frederick Paul, about, 5197 Kerf 01,1851 Kern, Alexander, 2401 Kern, Jerome, about, 5639 Kerr, Chester, 6439 Kerrison, Irvine L. H, 5210 Kertzer, M. N., 4458 Kerwin, Jerome G., ed., 3646 Kesselring, Joseph, 2334 Kessler, Henry H, 4637 Ketchum, Marshall D., 5994 Kettell, Russell Hawes, ed., 5729 Key, Valdimer O., 6335, 6378 A Key into the Language of America, 85,89 Key Largo, 1 1 74 Key West, guidebook, 3845 Key West, 1304 Keyes, Erasmus Darwin, 2710-11 about, 271 1 Keys, Alice Mapelsden, 3194 The Keys of the Kingdom of Heaven, 19 The Kid, 1 1 66 Kidd, William, Captain, about, 6229 Kienitz, John F., 3785 Kieran, John, 4988 Kies, Marietta, ed., 5308 Kiewiet, Cornells W. de, 4428 Kikuchi, C, 4469 INDEX / 1 139 Kilpatrick, William H., 5123, 5289 Kimball, Fiske, 5713 Kimball, J. Golden, about, 5538 Kimball, Sidney Fiske, 5713 Kimble, George H. T., 2950 Kimbrough, Emily, 2809 Kimmel, Stanley P., 4938 Kin, David, pseud., 3152 Kincer, Joseph B., 5816 Kindergartens, 5105, 5148 King, Clarence, 4210 King, E. J., 5577 King, Grace Elizabeth, 1032-37, 2296 about, 1 136 King, Henry C., about, 5428 King, Mrs. Marion M., 6468 King, Willard L., 6244 King Cotton Diplomacy, 3539 King George's War (1744-48), 3171 King Jasper, 17 14 King of the Delawares, 2835 King of the Fur Traders, 2831 King Philip's War (1675-76), 3213 fiction, 1441 King William's War (1689-97), 3171, 3213 The Kingdom of God in America, 5399 Kingdom of the Saints, 5465 The King's Henchman, 1608 Kingsblood Royal , 1569 Kingsley, J. Donald, 6188 Kingsley, Sidney, 2327, 2333-36 Kinne, Wisner Payne, 4940 Kinneman, John A., 4576 Kinney, Jay P., 3029 Kino, Eusebio Francisco, about, 3158 Kinsey, Alfred C., 4565-66 Kintner, William R., 3629 Kiowa Indians, 3007, 3035, 4160 Kiplinger, Willard M., 4065 Kipnis, Ira, 6360 Kirby, Gustavus T., 4989 about, 4989 Kirk, Clara M., ed., 983 Kirk, Grayson L., 3614, 4045 Kirk, Rudolf, ed., 983 Kirk, Russell, 2621 Kirk, Samuel A., 5207 Kirkland, Caroline Matilda (Stansbury), 415-18 Kirkland, Edward C, 5881, 5933 Kirkland, Jack, 1271, 2333 Kirkland, Joseph, about, 2419 Kirkpatrick, Frederick A., 3165 Kirkpatrick, Sidney D., ed., 4793 Kirstein, Lincoln, 4968 Kiser, Clyde V., 4396 Kitsuse, John I., 4469 Kittredge, George Lyman, 5541, 5558 about, 5222 Kleeberg, Gordon S. P., 6361 Klees, Frederic, 4480 Klein, Arthur J., 5186 Klein, David, 5021 Klein, Philip, 4591 Klem, Margaret C, 4887 Klineberg, Otto, ed., 4446 Klinkhamer, Marie Carolyn, Sister, 6245 Klipstein, August, about 4735 Klipstein, Ernest C, about, 4735 Klondike, short stories, 1048-52, 1058 Klondike gold rush, 2719-20 Kluckhohn, Clyde, 3015 Knapp, Robert H., 4725 Knapp, Seaman A., about, 5851, 5859 Knave and Queen, 2307 Knickerbocker, Diedrich, pseud. See Irving, Washington Knickerbocker Group, 2295 The Knife of the Times, 1 872 Knight, Edgar W., 5108 Knight, Grant C, 716, 2450-51 Knight, Henry Cogswell, 4284 about, 4283 Knight, Sarah (Kemble), 36-39 A Knight-Errant of the Foothills, 937 Knight's Gambit, 1393 Knights of Labor, about, 6034, 6054 Knights of Pythias, 4574 The Knights of the Horseshoe, 228-29 Knorr, Frederick, tunes arr. by, 5591 Knott, Thomas Albert, ed., 2238 Know-Nothings, 4515 Knowing and the Known, 5286 Knowlton, E. H., 5913 Knox, Dudley W., 3667 Knox, Israel, 5483 Knox, Samuel, about, 5 121 Kob, Walter, music arr. by, 5584 Kober, Arthur, 2327 Koch, Adrienne, ed., 3279 Koch, Robert, about, 4868 Koch, Vivienne, 1886 Kocher, Alfred Lawrence, 4086 Koenig, Samuel, 4407 Koppcn, N., ed., 2953 Koht, Halvdan, 3769 Kolb, John H., 4581 Kolehmainen, John I., 2896 Kollmorgen, N. M., 4479 Kolodin, Irving, 5657 Komarovsky, Mirra, 4577 Konefsky, Samuel Joseph, 6250, 6266 Konvitz, Milton R., 5291, 6120-23, 6129 Kooken, Olive, 4930 Koos, Leonard V., 5157 Koppman, Lionel, 4461 Kora in Hell, 1881 Korean War, 2746, 3597, 3738 Korn, Bertram Wallace, 4461 Korson, George G., ed., 5578-79 Korzybski, Alfred, about, 5392 Kosciuszko, T., about, 3250 Kossuth, Louis, about, 4360-61 Kotto, 951-52 Kotzebue, August von, 2299 Koury, Phil A., 4961 Koussevitzky, Serge, 5678 about, 5648-49 Kouwenhoven, John Atlee, 4045, 5691 Kraenzel, Carl Frederick, 4159 Kramer, Dale, 4963 ed., 2565 Krapp, George P., 2246 Krauch, Elsa, tr., 1 191-92 Kraus, Michael, 3056-57, 3770, 4518 ed., 2294 Krech, David, 5390 Krehbiel, Henry Edward, 5564, 5658- 59 Kreidberg, Marvin A., 3661 Kreymborg, Alfred, ed., 2342 Krieger, Murray, 2452 Kriesberg, Martin, 3615 Krinsky, Fred, ed., 3108 Kroeber, Alfred L., 2983, 3002 Kronenberger, Louis, 2406-7 ed., 4897 Krooss, Herman E., 5973 Krout, John Allen, 3090, 4528, 4990 ed., 4047 Krutch, Joseph Wood, 590, 2287, 2348, 2453, 4900 Ktaadn, 594 Ku Klux Klan, hist., 3386 Kull, Irving S., 3077 Kull, Nell M., 3077 Kunitz, Stanley J., ed., 2454-55 Kuniyoshi, Yasuo, about, 5783 Kurath, Hans, 2243, 2269 ed., 2268 Kurtz, Stephen, 3279 Kurtzman, David Harold, 6389 Kuykendall, Ralph S., 4220 Kwaidan, 951-52, 955 Kyrk, Hazel, 4567 La, La Lucille (music), 5678 Labaree, Leonard Woods, 3195 Labatut, Jean, ed., 5934 Labor and capitalism, 3439, 6094 Labor and laboring classes, 3440, 4408, 5905, 6031-58 addresses, essays, lectures, etc., 235, 239 agriculture, 5846 British immigrants, 4488 Colonial period, 3740 education, 5210, 5243 See also Vocational education fiction, 941, 973-76, 1656-57, 1754- 56, 1775. 1777. 2 578 folklore, 5523 hist., 3425, 6033-34, 6057 Irish immigrants, 4498 laws & legislation, 6033, 6053 Mexican immigrants, 4476 poetry, 1061-63 radicalism, 6039 Cripple Creek, Colo., 4174 Nueces County, Tex., 4476 The West, 4149 Labor disputes, 6058 See also Industrial relations; Strikes Labor-management education, 5210 Labor-Management Relations Act (1947), 6053 Labor movement, 3425, 3427, 3439. 3446, 4216, 4458-59. 6356, 6372, 6426 Labor relations. See Industrial rela- tions Labor supply, 4392, 4401, 6037, 6040 Labor turnover, 6038 Laboratories, directory, 4720 Lace and lacemakers, 5793 Ladies and Gentlemen, 1263 Lady Baltimore, 1 145 1 140 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Lady Barberina, 1 007 Lady Franklin Bay expedition, 2981 The Lady Is Cold, 1859 The Lady of Fashion, 4927 The Lady's Maid's Bell, 1855 Laemmar, Jack W., 4696 LaFarge, John, 4428, 5447 La Farge, Oliver, 1551-53, 3039 Lafayette, Marquis de, about, 3247-50 portrait, 5769 La Follette, Belle (Case), 3461 La Follette, Fola, 3461 La Follette, Robert M., about, 3446, 3461,6432 La Follette, Suzanne, 5692 La Fontaine, Jean de. Fables, trans- lation (Creole), 2265 La Guard, Theodore de, pseud. See Ward, Nathaniel La Jolla, Calif., 2746 Laissez-faire. See Free enterprise Lamar, Lucius Q. C, about, 3364 Lamb, Charles, about, 381 Lambert, B., tr., 4278 Lamberton, Bernice (Grieves), 239 Lamers, William M., 4527 Lamke, Tom A., ed., 5247 Lamont, Thomas W., 5987 The Lamp and the Bell, 1608 Lamprecht, S. P., 5289 Lamps, 5786 Lancaster, Lane W., 6212 Lancaster County, Pa., 4058 Lancelot, 171 4 Land, 5808-18 Colonial period, 3740 law. See Land tenure monopoly, 4535 utilization, 5810, 5817-18 Calif., 4202 Chicago, 5812 New England, 5840 Texas, 4193 The West, 4149 A Land and a People, 1 9 1 9 Land-Grant College Act, 51 13, 5186, 5191 Land-grant colleges, 5186, 5191 The Land Lies Open, 4142 The Land of Little Rain, 1 197 The Land of Silence, 2126 Land of Their Choice, 4485 Land of U nlikeness , 2008 Land tenure, 4266, 581 1, 6120, 6230, 6278 Indian, 3029, 3043 New York (Colony), 3200 The West, 3237 Land Where Time Stands Still, 2753 Landis, James M., 6286, 6312 Landis, Kenesaw Mountain, about, 5015 Landis, Paul H., 4568 Landon, Melville D., 212 Landor, Walter S., about, 2545 Landsberg, Hans H, 5819 Landscape West of Eden, 1 1 66 Lane, Wheaton J., 5935 ed., 5934 Laney, Al, 2872 Langbein, Walter B., 2949 Langdon, William Chauncy, 4529 Langeluttig, Albert G., 6226 Langer, William L., 3537-38 Langford, Sam, about, 5025 Langland, John, 2350 Langley, Samuel Pierpont, 4726 about, 4721, 4775 Langner, Lawrence, 4941 Language, 2236-75, 2466, 3737, 3740, 5291 atlases & maps, 2268-69 dialects & regionalisms, 2240-41, 2244-46, 2248, 2253-71, 4093, 4098, 4198, 4271, 4436, 5516, 5526, 5531, 5533, 5536, 5540 See also Dialects in literature dictionaries, 2236-41, 2246, 2253, 2259, 2264, 2266, 2272, 2274, 5127 essays & studies, 2364-68, 2466 grammars, 2242-44, 2249, 2265-66 slang, 2248, 2253, 2272, 2274, 5503, 5507.5578 Language As Gesture, 1228, 1233 Lanham, C. T., 4513 Lanier, Henry W., ed., 886 Lanier, Mary (Day), ed., 1040-43 Lanier, Sidney, 1038-47, 2296 about, 2277, 2280, 2422, 2616 bibl., 1046 Lanny Budd Series, 1758 Lansing, John, 6087 Lanterns on the Levee, 2779 Lapham, Jesse E., 2947 Lapham, Macy H, 2947 Lardner, John, 4991 Lardner, Ring, 1545, 1554-55 about, 2428 Larkin, Oliver W., 4676, 5693 Lar\s in the Popcorn, 21 52 Larned, Kans., guidebook, 3905 La Rochefoucauld -Liancourt, Francois Alexandre Frederic due de, 4267- 68 about, 4266 Larsen, Roy E., 5145 Larson, Adlowe L., 5845 Larson, Cedric, 3462 Larson, Henrietta M., 5988, 6007 Las Vegas, Nev., 4184, 5059 Laserson, Max M., 3564 Lasker, Bruno, 4470 Laski, Harold J., 2542, 4512 Lasswell, Harold D., 6130 The Last Adam, 1299 Last Chapter, 2745 The Last Circle, \iii The Last Duel in Spain, 2303 The Last Frontier, 1975 The Last Look^, 1827 The Last Man, 2310 Last of the Bad Men, 2758 The Last of the Mohicans, 258 The Last of the Provincials , 2429 The Last of the Valerii, 10 12 The Last Puritan, 1736 The Last Tre/( of the Indians, 3027 The Lasting Elements of Individualism, 5313 Late City Edition, 2903 The Late George Apley, 1549, 1590 Latham, Earl, ed., 3107-36 Lathrop, George P., 351 ed., 340 Latin America documents, 3575 economic relations with, 3546, 3638 in literature fiction, 2185 short stories, 1 1 1 1-13 independence, 3569 relations with, 3442, 3515, 3549, 3554, 3574> 3676, 3578-80, 3617, 3619,3632,3635 technical assistance to, 3641 travel & travelers, 1445 Latourette, Kenneth S., 3596, 5466 Latrobe, Benjamin Henry, about, 5708 Laughing Boy, 1551-52 Laughing in the Jungle, 2579 The Laughing Matter, 2122 Laughing to Keep from Crying, 1524 Laughlin, James, ed., 2560 Laughlin, Ledlie Irwin, 5788 The Launching of a University and Other Papers, 5195 Laurents, Arthur, 2334 Laurie, Joseph, 4892, 4974 Lavender, David, 4174 La Verendrye, Sieur de, about, 3170 La Violette, Forrest E., 4466 Law, 6219-6332 anecdotes, facetiae, satire, etc., 194-97. 556-57 codification, 6236 Colonial period, 75, 78, 6230, 6232, 6234 digests, 6271-79 hist., 6166, 6219, 6225, 6230-31, 6236 Baltimore, 6284, 6291 Boston, 6292 La., 6245 Md., 6284 Mass., 6228, 6242, 6292 Nebr., 6233 New York (Colony), 6221 The West, 6220 philosophy, 3728, 5269, 5290, 5291 study & teaching, 6270, 6289, 6317-18, 6321, 6326-27 theory, 6263 Law, administrative, 6090, 6181, 6201, 6310-16 Law, constitutional. See Constitutional law Law, corporation, 6008, 601 1, 6236 Law, criminal. See Criminal law Law, ecclesiastical, 5420-22 Law, election, 6338, 6400, 6403, 6406-8, 6410 Law, immigration, 4404-5, 4420, 4425, 4468 Law, international, 3526, 3530, 6277 Law, land. See Land tenure Law, libel, 2906, 2931-32 Law, municipal. See Municipal law Law, public health, 4876 Law and ethics, 6261-62 Law enforcement, 6309 A Law for the Lion, 191 2 Law libraries, 6328 INDEX / II4I The Law of Civilization and Decay, 2601 Law reform, 6285, 6302-3 Mass., 6292 Lawrence, David Herbert, 2456 Lawrence, Ernest Orlando, about, 4721 Lawrence, J. E., 6195 Lawrence, William, Bp., about, 5457 Lawrenceville School, about, 5155 Laws, George Malcolm, 5556 Lawton, Sherman P., 4691 Lawyers, 3746, 6101, 6224-25, 6231, 6236, 6311-32 See also Judges Lay My Burden Down, 5515 Lazarsfeld, Paul F., 4701, 6414, 6419 ed., 3724 Lazarus Laughed , 1647-48 Lazzaro, Ralph, 5424 comp., 5400 Lea, M. Carey, about, 4740 Lea and Febiger, about, 6451 Leach, H. S., ed., 3469 Leach, MacEdward, 5550 Leach, Maria, 5506 Leacock, John, 2347 Leader of the Revolution, 3269 The League of Frightened Philistines, 1375 League of Nations, 3534, 3541, 3632 Leander, Folke, 2375 The Leaning Tower, 1662 Lear, Walter J., 4887 Learned, Henry Barrett, 3519, 6145 Learning and scholarship, 3739, 4458-59 Leary, Lewis G., 2457, 2552 ed., 1672 Leather stocking Tales, 258 The Leatherwood God, 980 Leavenworth, Kans., guidebook, 3906 Leaves from the Diary of an Impres- sionist, 951-52 Leaves of Grass, 619-30, 636-37, 639, 642 about, 656 concordance, 653 Leaves of Grass One Hundred Years After, 656 Lebhar, Godfrey M., 5961 Leckie, George G., 3837 Le Clair, Robert C, 1021 Lecture at Amory Hall, 286 Lectures and lecturing (1820-70), 186, 192, 209, 230, 233-35. 280, 283-84, 286, 313, 531,538,542 (1871-1914), 745, 768, 900, 1126 (I9I5-39), 1235, 1445, 1585, 1783, 1823 Lectures on Modern Idealism, 5354 Ledesert, Margaret, tr., 4508 Le Due, Thomas H., 5200 Ledyard, John, about, 3154 Lee, Alfred McClung, 2847 Lee, Charles, 6463 Lee, Charles, General, about, 3149 Lee, Gordon C, 5109 Lee, "Mother Ann," about, 5469 Lee, Richard, about, 3251 Lee, Robert E., about, 245, 1099, 1267, 2580, 2612, 3388, 3694-95, 4533 Lee family, about, 3251 Lee's Lieutenants, 3695 Leffler, George L., 5982 Lefler, Hugh Talmage, 4090 Legal aid, 6309, 6317, 6329-30 Legal education. See Law — study & teaching Legal ethics, 63 1 9-20 Legal institutions, 6289 Legal philosophy, 5269, 5290-91, 6266, 6268 Legal profession, 6317-32 Le Gallienne, Eva, 4936 about, 4936 Legare, H. S., 2296 The Legend of Sleepy Hollow, 381 Legends and tales, 5503-5548 See also Folk heroes; and under re- gions, ethnic groups, etc., e.g., Indians, American — legends & tales Legends of the Old Plantation, 911 Legends of the West, 322 Leggett, William, 2295 Legislation, 6142, 6153, 6165-67, 6198 Legislative branch, 6075, 6133, 6140 functions, 6137 Legislative investigating committees, 6342 Legislatures, 6153, 6195, 6203, 6338, 6434 Colonial period, 6401 committees, 6156 functions, 6166-67 organization, 6166-67 rules & practice, 6166-67 Le Goullon, Lamartine, illus., 5553 Lehmann-Haupt, Hellmut, 6440 Leidecker, Kurt E., 5309 Leidy, William Philip, 6452 Leigh, Robert D., 6479-80 ed., 6485 Leighton, Isabel, ed., 3488 Leighton, J. A., 5252 Leisure. See Recreation Leisure class. See Upper class Leisy, Ernest E., 2424, 2458 ed., 411, 2341 Leiter, Robert David, 5619 Leites, Nathan, 4951 Lenin, Nikolai, about, 2407 Lenox, James, about, 6465 Leonard, John P., 5158 Leonard, William Ellery Channing, 1556-58 Leone, Lucile Petry, about, 4854 Leong, Gor Yun, 4467 Leonor de Guzman, 207-8 Leopold, Richard William, 2712-13 ed., 3100 Lerner, Max, 2407 ed., 6242 Leroux, Emmanuel, 5254 Lerwill, Leonard L., 3665 Lescohier, D. D., 6033 Lester, John A., ed., 5063 Lestschinsky, Jacob, 4459 Le Sueur, Meridel, 3954 Let Freedom Ring, 6127 Let It Come Down, 1930 Let Me Lie, 1267 Let Us Now Praise Famous Men, 1907 Let Your Mind Alone!, 1817 A Letter Addressed to the People of Piedmont, 103 A Letter on White-Washing, 148 A Letter to His Countrymen, 262 A Letter to Robert Frost and Others, 1515 A Letter to the National Convention of France, 1 03 Letters Colonial period, 14, 58, 89-91 (1764-1819), 96-101, 109, 122, 129, 132-33, 171, 177 (1820-70), 244, 270, 296, 329, 377, 392, 438, 449, 462, 466-67, 469, 502, 532-33, 554, 577, 599-601, 639, 643, 672 (1871-1914), 699-700, 738, 745, 751, 800-2, 847-50, 951-53, 981, 1005-6, 1046, 1152 (1915-39), 1 187, 1305, 1570, 1608, 1664, 1713, 1715-16, 1741, 1893- 94 Letters and Leadership, 2380 Letters from an American Farmer, 4500-1 Letters from the West, 320 Letters from under a Bridge, 675 Letters of a Traveller, 222 Leuchs, Fritz A. H., ed., 608 Levant in literature, 489 Le Veillard, Louis Guillaume, tr., 126 LeVene, Clara Mae, 4754 Levenson, Jacob C, 3055 Levenson, William B., 5230 Levi, Werner, 3556 Levin, Harry, 2412 Levine, Isaac Don, 3647 Levinger, Lee J., 4461 Levy, Beryl Harold, 5459 Levy, Leonard W., 6228 Levy, Marion J., Jr., 4550 Lewinson, Paul, 6379 Lewis, Benjamin M., 2915 Lewis, Cleona, 5989 Lewis, Edith, 1282 Lewis, Edward R., 6064 Lewis, Edwin, about, 5433 Lewis, George T., about, 4735 Lewis, Harold MacLean, 4607 Lewis, John L., about, 6049 Lewis, Lloyd, 3696, 3699, 4135 Lewis, Meriwether, 3298 about, 3167, 3299 Lewis, Nelson P., 4607 Lewis, Orlando F., 4653 Lewis, Oscar, 3955 Lewis, Richard W. B., 2459 Lewis, Sinclair, 1559-70 about, 2406, 2429, 2504 Lewis, Theodore H., ed., 3217 Lewis, Wilmarth S., 6464 Lewis and Clark Expedition, 3298 Lewisohn, Ludwig, 1571-79, 45 01 Lexington, Ky. guidebook, 3859 intellectual life, 3767 Leyda, Jay, ed., 493, 495, 5°' 1 142 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Leys, Wayne A. R., 4428 Libel law, 2906, 2931-32 Liberal Catholic Church, about, 5439 Liberal education, 5100, 5187, 5190, 5196-97, 5199, 5246 See also General education The Liberal Imagination, 2519 Liberal Republican Party (1872), 6369, 6427 The Liberal Tradition in America, 6063 Liberalism, 3766, 4530, 5270, 5284, 5425, 6061, 6063, 6065, 6070-71, 6164 Liberator, about, 3380 The Liberties of the Massachusetts Collonie in New England, 78 Liberty, 1329, 3143, 3250, 3256, 3279, 3308, 3313, 338i, 3747. 4258. 4370-71, 4502-3, 4513, 4543. 6060-61, 6063, 6068, 6071, 6079, 6094, 6099, 6108, 6127-28, 6130, 6134 See also Democracy; Politics Liberty against Government, 6094 Liberty of the press. See Freedom of the press Librarians, 6466, 6474, 6476, 6479, 6481, 6485 The Librarians' Conference of 1853, 6486 Libraries, 6452, 6466-75, 6477-84, 6486-87 Colonial, 14, 40, 73 reference dept., 6483 stat., 6474 Ariz., 4199 Charleston, S.C., 3763 Chicago, 6473 111., 6473 Middle States, 6472 Mo., 4108 Nashville, 3765 New England, 2549, 3745, 6472 New York (City), 4049 New York (State), 6468 See also special types of library, e.g., Law libraries; Public libraries Library of Congress, 5807 about, 6460 hist., 6469 Library of Congress. Aeronautics Di- vision, 4788 Library of Congress. Jefferson Collec- tion, 6460 Library of Congress. Legislative Ref- erence Service, 6102 Library of Congress. Prints and Photo- graphs Division, 5807 Library of Congress. Reference Dept., 659-60 Library of the World's Best Literature, 1136 Library schools, 6479, 6485 Library science, 6452, 6454, 6460, 6474, 6478,6481,6484 research, 6487 study & teaching, 6479, 6485 Library surveys, 6477, 6480, 6482 Lichten, Frances, 5599 Liddell Hart, Basil H., 3699 Lidice, Czechoslovakia, poetry, 1608 Lie Down in Darkness, 2175 Lieb, Frederick G., 5014 Lieberman, Herman, 11 95 Lieberman, Judith Berlin, 5427 about, 5427 Liebling, Abbott J., 2904 Lief, Alfred, ed., 6247 Life adjustment education, 5224, 5235, 5237. 5240 Life along the Passaic River, 1 872 Life among the Modocs, 1065 Life and Death of an Oilman, 2731 Life and Gabriella, 1461 Life and Liberty in America, 4370-71 The Life and Times of King Cotton, 5822 Life Doubles in Brass, 4973 Life in a Putty Knife Factory, 2150 Life in America, 5801, 5804 Life insurance, 5991-92 Life Is My Song, 1432 Life (magazine), about, 2908 The Life of Billy Yank., 3705 The Life of fohnny Reb, 3704-5 The Life of Poetry, 2105 The Life of Reason, 5367, 5375 Life on the Mississippi, 784-86, 811 Life on the Texas Range, 4153 Life with Father, 1317-18, 2327, 2334 Life with Mother, 1 3 1 8 Light in August, 1386 The Light in the Forest, 1 696 The Light of Distant Skies, 575 1 Light up the Sky, 1492 The Lightning-Rod Man, 484 Lighting, Colonial, 5786 Lilienthal, David E., 5892 Liljeblad, S., 2364 Liljegren, Sten B., 2364, 2367 Lillard, Richard G., 2402, 3101, 4184 Lillibridge, George D., 3778 Lima, Ohio, guidebook, 3869 The Limestone Tree, 1 5 1 1 The Limits of Evolution, 5317 Limners and Likenesses, 5747 Lin McLean, 11 45 Linblad, K. E., 2364 Lincecum, Gideon, about, 4734 Lincoln, Abraham, 419-21, 3390, 3395 about, 557, 941, 1727-29, 1873, 2542, 2757, 2824, 3382, 3391-95. 34i6, 3426, 3706, 4533, 5186, 6081 bibl., 2757, 3395 drama, 1752 fiction, 332, 763-65, 876-77, 2821 poetry, 206, 459, 623, 1061 sculpture, 5736-37 Lincoln, Charles H., ed., 55, 3213 Lincoln, Mary Todd, fiction, 2821 Lincoln, Nebr., guidebook, 3903 Lincoln Finds a General, 3706 Lincoln Memorial (Washington, D.C.), 5736 Lind, John, 4143 Linda Condon, 1509 Lindbergh, Charles Augustus, 2714-15 about, 2715, 4533, 5938 Lindeman, Eduard C, ed., 301 Lindheimer, Ferdinand Jakob, about, 4734 Lindholm, Richard W., 5943 Lindley, Harlow, 4121 Lindner, Robert Mitchell, 2716-18 Lindquist, Everet F., ed., 5229 Lindquist, Gustavus E. E., 3040 Lindsay, Howard, 1317, 2327, 2334-35 Lindsay, Nicholas Vachel, 1580-81 about, 1582, 2419 Lindsey, Almont, 3439 Lindsley, Philip, about, 3765 Line, Ralph Marlowe, 5715 The Line of Love, 1262 The Lineage of Lichfield, 1 262 Linford.Dee, 4176 Linford, E., 6195 Lingelbach, William E., about, 4059 Lingg, Claire, 4865 Linguistic Atlas of New England, 2268 Link, Arthur S., 3472-73, 3489 ed., 3100 Link, Eugene Perry, 3300 Linscott, Eloise Hubbard, ed., 5580 Linscott, Robert N., ed., 940 Linton, Ralph, ed., 3041 The Lion and the Honeycomb, 1234 The Lion and the Rose, 2124 The Lion of the West, 518 Lionizing, 529 Lipman, Jean (Herzberg), 5601 Lippmann, Walter, comp., 3634 Lipset, Seymour Martin, 6455 Lipsius, Morris, ed., 2274 Lipson, Leslie, 6203 Lisbon, Portugal, fiction, 2092 The Listening Landscape, 1906 Litchfield, Edward H, 6420 Literary annuals, 2518 The Literary Apprenticeship of Mar\ Twain, 816 Literary Centres, 896-97 Literary composition, theories, 40, 47- 48,618 Literary Culture in Early New England, 2549 Literary Encounters, 1277 The Literary Fallacy, 2417 Literary form, 2388 Literary Friends and Acquaintances, 979 The Literary History of the American Revolution, 2522 Literary History of the United States, 601, 670, 2460-61 Literary Importations, 134 The Literary Life in America, 2380 Literary Opinion in America, 2550 Literary Pioneers, 2462, 3776 Literary Prophecy, 896-97 The Literary Record, 2355 Literary research, essays & studies, 2364- 68 Literary Review, 689 The Literary Situation, 2409 Literary Values, 740 The Literati, 520, 533 The Literati of New York. City, 415 Literature, 1-2235 and land, 6262 anthologies, collections, & series, 2276-2370, 2383, 2551, 2554, 2557. 2559-60, 2563, 2565-66, 2569,2571,3142 INDEX / 1 143 Literature — Continued bibl., 2393, 2402, 2448, 2460, 2552- 53,6467 biographical series, 2276-89 dictionaries, handbooks, etc., 2433, 2441,2447,2454-55 esthetics, 2387, 2512, 2529 experimental writing drama, 1357, 1359-60, 1647-48, 1864, 2226 fiction, 1242-47, 1249, 1 25 1, 1379, 1450, 1771, 1842 periodicals, 2560 personal narratives, 1768—70 poetry, 1303-4. I3°6, 1309. 1313. 1357, 1359. 1432. 1583-84. 1620-21, 1766, 1782, 1784, 1872, 2034, 2079, 2098, 2134 short stories, 1242, 1771 hist. & crit., 1235, 1571, 2356-2550, 373i-3 2 .3747-48,375i bibl., 2457 influence on art, 5691 periodicals, 2551-77, 2854, 2895, 2914, 2922, 2925 philosophy, 2453, 2529 popular, 2384, 2402, 2434, 6443 See also Bestsellers post World War II, 2373 techniques, 1664 theory, 1664, 2423, 2529 See also Folklore; Legends and tales; also forms of literature, e.g., Fic- tion; and names of individual authors Literature and Morality, 1377 Literature and science, 21, 40, 46, 2493 essays, 2425 poetry, 649, 2412 Literature and the American College, 2375 Literature & Theology in Colonial New England, 2483 Lithic industries (Indian), 2991 Lithographers, 561 1, 5778-79 Little, Nina Fletcher, 5730 Little, Shelby (Melton), 3270 Little Big Horn Battle, 3036 A Little Book, of Profitable Tales, 878 A Little Book, of Western Verse, 878 Little Breeches, 942-44 Little Compton, 920 The Little Convent Girl, 1035 Little Dies Committee. See California Senate. Fact-Finding Committee on Un-American Activities in California The Little Fellow, 4953 The Little Foxes, 1989, 2327 Little Friend, Little Friend, 1999 A Little Journey in the World, 1142-43 "Little magazines," 2563, 2914, 2925 bibl., 2914 Little Or phant Annie, 11 26 A Little Rebellion, 3309 Little Rivers, 5095 Little theaters. See Theater — little theater movement The Little White Girl (painting), 5776 Little Women, 189 Littlefield, George E., 6436, 6448 Littleton, Mark, pseud. See Kennedy, John Pendleton Live Another Day, 1 95 1 Lively, Charles E., 4397 Livestock, Southern States, 4084 Livezey, William E., 3595 Living Authors, 2455 Livingood, James W., 4104 Livingston, Burton E., 2959 Livingston, Robert R., about, 3519 Livingston, N. J., hist., 3813 Llano Estacado, Tex., 4196 Lloyd, Elizabeth, 672 Lloyd, Hannibal Evans, tr., 4309 Lloyd, Henry Demarest, about, 6424 Lloyd, Margaret, 4968 Lo, the Former Egyptian!, 2151 Loans, 5848, 5993 Lobbying, 6338, 6392-93, 6395-97, 6399 Lobrano, Gustav S., 3430 Local civil service, 6192 Local Color in Art, 896-97 Local color in literature. See Regional- ism and local color in literature Local government, 3195, 3221, 3224, 3229-30, 3443, 6131, 6133-35, 6137, 6139, 6207-18, 6391, 6425, 6432 budget, 5973, 6195, 6208-10, 6212- 15, 6217-18 executive branch, 6193 functions, 2905, 6195, 6211-15, 6217 labor policy, 6192 officials & employees, 6209-10, 6212- 15,6218 organization, 6195, 6208, 6213-15, 6217 publications, 6452 See also subdivisions Government and History under names of places and regions, e.g., New York (City)— govt. Local history, 2943, 3061, 3781-4222 See also History under names of places and regions, e.g., Cali- fornia — hist. The Local Novel, 896-97 Locke, David Ross (Petroleum V. Nasby), 422-26, 2857 Locke, John, about, 5289 Locke Amsden, 583-84 Lockridge, Ross Franklin, 2005-6 Lockwood, Francis Cummins, 3004, 4199 The Locomotive-God, 1557 Locomotives, 5926 Locust and Wild Honey, 741-42 Lodge, Henry Cabot, 2582, 4036 ed., 696 Loeb, Martin B., 5146 Loeher, Rodney, 3061 Loescher, Frank S., 5499 Loesser, Arthur, 5622 Loetscher, LefTerts A., ed., 5466 The Log of a Cowboy, 684-85 Logan, Edward B., 6336 ed., 6336 Logan, James, about, 3229 Logan, Joshua, 2335, 2337 Logan, Rayford W., 4440, 4445 Loggins, Vernon, 5582, 5679 Logic, 5254, 5257, 5267, 5275, 5283, 5286, 5290, 5306, 5346, 5359 Lomax, Alan, 5643 comp., 5558-60 Lomax, John A., 5557 comp., 5558-60 about, 5557 Lombardi, John, 6051 Lomen, Carl J., 2719-20 London, Jack, 1048-60, 5021 about, 2430, 2464, 2486, 2815 Lone Cowboy, 2700 The Lonely Crowd, 4555 Long, Crawford W., about, 4822 Long, David F., 3103 Long, E. B., ed., 3696 Long, E. Hudson, 1 1 11 ed., 2324 Long, Edward Le Roy, 5434 Long, Haniel, 3956, 4176 Long, Huey, about, 3488, 6377 Long, John Davis, 4036 Long, John Luther, 2337 Long, Orie William, 2462, 3776 Long Black Son, 2234 Long Branch, N.J., hist., 3814 A Long Fourth, 2177 The Long Habit, 5351 Long Hunt, 1239 Long Island fiction, 1425 in art, 5768 travel & travelers, 4279 Long Remember, 1542 The Long Run, 185 1 The Long Stay Cut Short, 2220 The Long Valley, 1776 The Long Voyage Home, 1648 Longfellow, Ernest W., illus., 439 Longfellow, Henry Wadsworth, 427-44, 2290 tr., 437 about, 427, 438, 441, 449, 633, 706, 745. 979. 2277, 2280, 2374, 2462, 2486,2513,2534,3776 Longfellow, Samuel, ed., 438 Longstreet, Augustus Baldwin, 445-48, 2296 Longstreet, James, about, 2613 Longstreth, Thomas Morris, 5064 Longworth, Nicholas, about, 4369 Lonn, E., 4481 Look at the U.S.A., 3782 Look Homeward, Angel, 1888-89 Look (magazine), 2161, 3782 about, 2908 Looking Backward, 728-31 about, 726 Loomis, Alfred F., 5022 Lopez, M., 200 Lord, Clifford L., 2972, 3676 Lord, Elizabeth H., 2972 Lord, Otis Phillips, about, 852 Lord Chumley, 2314 Lord Weary s Castle, 2007, 2009 The Lords of Creation, 3476 Lorimcr, George Horace, about, 292s Lorwin, Lewis L., 6052 1 144 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Los Angeles descr., 4207 guidebooks, 3929 hist., 4150, 4206-7 music, 5630 politics, 6207 Los Angeles County, Calif., 3957 Loshe, Lillie Deming, 2463 Losses, 1999 Lossing, Benson J., 3687 The Lost Colony, 1475 Lost Face, 1058 "Lost generation," 2371, 2406, 2408, 2417 Lost in the Horse Latitudes, 21 50 A Lost Lady, 1 276-77 Lost Springtime, 2658 Lotus Eating, 2278 Louis XI, 2298 Louis, Joe, 5030 about, 5025, 5030 Louisiana, 3952, 4079, 4100-1 fiction, 745, 749-50, 1032, 1945 govt., 6195 guidebooks, 3851-52 hist., 4100-1 language (dialects, etc.), 2265 law, 6245 politics, 6245, 6377 short stories, 746-48, 759-61, 1032-35 Louisiana. Legislative Council, 4100 Louisiana Hay ride, 6377 Louisiana Purchase, 3531, 3660 Louisville, Ky., guidebook, 3860 Lounsbury, Thomas R., ed., 1 144 Louttit, William Easton, Jr., 3426 Love, 285 Love and Liberation , 1858 Love Charm, 1553 Love Conquers All, 1214 Love, Death, and the Ladies' Drill Team, 2214 Love in '76, 2347 Love Is Eternal, 2821 The Love Nest, 1554 Lovejoy, Arthur O., 5255, 5259 Lovell, John W., about, 6446 Love's Old Sweet Song, 21 12 Lovett, Robert Morss, 2406 ed., 1071 Lovingood, Sut, pseud. See Harris, George Washington Low, Samuel, 2347 Low, Seth, about, 6432 Low Man on a Totem Pole, 2150, 2155 Lowe, H. A., 6195 Lowe, Victor, 5335, 5385 Lowell, Amy, 832, 1583-84 about, 2681 Lowell, James Russell, 449-69, 610, 2290, 5222 about, 402, 449, 466, 585, 2277, 2374, 2385, 2422-23, 2492, 2513, 2 534> 2545, 2681, 2922 Lowell, Robert, 2007-10, 2363 about, 2426 Lowell family, 2681 The Lowering Clouds, 3498 Lowes, John Livingston, 4250 Lowie, Robert H., 3005-6 Lowman, Guy S., Jr., 2268 Lowry, Robert, 20 11 -16 Loyalty oaths, 3387-88, 6107-8, 61 10 See also Allegiance Loyalty-Security Program (1947), 6107, 6110, 6112 Loyola, Ignatius, 2281 Lozier, Herbert, 5004 Lubbock, Percy, ed., 1004-5 Lubell, Samuel, 5947, 6346 Lucas, Henry S., 4493 Luce, Clare (Boothe), 2327, 2333 Lucifer with a Book., 1940, 1942 The Luck, of Roaring Camp, 927-32, 937. 939 Luckman, Sid, 5039 about, 5039 Lucky Sam McCarver, 2348 Lucretius. De Rerum Natura, trans- lation, 1556 Lucy Church Amiably, 1771 Lucy Gay heart, 1277 Luden, Heinrich, ed., 4298 Ludwig, Richard M., ed., 2341 Lueders, Edward G., 1835 Lull, Richard Swann, 4715 Lumber industry, 5864 Minn., 4141-42 Mississippi Valley, 3975 Lumbermen folklore, 5523, 5533 language (slang, etc.), 5516 songs & music, 5551, 5556, 5558-59, 5562,5567,5575 Lummus, Henry T., 6287 Lumpkin, Katharine Du Pre, 2721, 4569 about, 2721 Lumsdaine, A. A., 3724 Lundberg, Ferdinand, 2884 Lundberg, George A., 4577 Lundblad, Jane, 2368 The Lure of the Frontier, 3082 Lustra, 1666 Lutherans, 3231, 4479-80, 5404, 5442, 5461-62 Lutz, E. Russell, 6294 Luxon, Norval Neil, 2924 Lydenberg, Harry Miller, 6476 Lyell, Sir Charles, 4337-40 about, 4336 Lyman, George D., 4185 Lyman, E. W., 5335 Lynch, Denis Tilden, 6387 Lynchburg, Va., 2842 Lynd, Helen Merrell, 4592-93 Lynd, Robert S., 4592-93 Lynes, Russell, 5694 Lynn, Kenneth S., 2464 Lyon, John H. H, 5582 Lyon, Mary, 5193 about, 2615 Lyons, Eugene, 3490 Lyons, James, 5607 Lyons, L. M., 6207 Lyric America, 2342 Lyrics of a Lad, 1530 Lyrics of Lowly Life, 857, 859, 861 Lyrics of the Hearthside, 858-59, 861 Lytle, John Horace, 5085 about, 5085 M M; One Thousand Autobiographical Sonnets, 1624 Mabbott, Thomas O., 522, 524 ed., 538 Mabee, Carleton, 4676 MacArthur, Charles, 2327, 2332 MacArthur, Douglas, about, 1992 McCabe, Charles R., ed., 2890 McCaffery, John K. M., ed., 1504 McCain, William D., 3583 McCallum, John, 5038 McCamy, James L., 3604, 6452 McCamy, Julia B., 6452 McCann, Franklin T., 3166 McCarran, Patrick, 4424 McCarran Act (1950). See Subversive Activities Control Act McCarthy, John A., 521 1 McCarthy, Joseph R., about, 3482 McCarthy, Mary, 2017-22 McCarty, John L., 4195 McCausland, Elizabeth, 5766 McCleery, Albert, 4901 McClellan, George Brinton, about, 2614, 3382 McClelland, Nancy V., 5728 MacClintock, Lander, 5679 McCloskey, J. J., 2301 McClure, M. T., 5289 McClure, S. S., about, 6432 McCluskey, Ross, ed., 5071 McCollum, Elmer V., about, 4722 McConahey, S. C, 4594 McConnell, Grant, 5859 McCormac, Eugene Irving, 3350-51 McCormick, Cyrus, 5826 McCormick, Cyrus Hall, about, 4786, 5826 McCormick, Medill, about, 2862 McCormick, Robert, about, 5826 McCormick, Robert Rutherford, about, 2862 McCormick family, 2862 McCosh, James, 5337-44 about, 5337, 5344 McCoy, Joseph G., about, 4158 McCoy, Philbrick, 6320 McCoy, Whitley P., 6058 McCracken, Harold, 5770, 5802 McCullers, Carson, 2023-24, 2335-36 McCulloch, Margaret, 4443 McCulloch, W. E., 5442 McCuskey, Dorothy, 5220 McDevitt, Josephine A., 561 1 McDonagh, Edward C, 4431 McDonald, Philip B., 4677 MacDonald, William, comp., 3079 Macdougall, A. R., 4972 MacDougall, Curtis D., 2905, 6288 McDougall, William, about, 5392 MacDowell, Edward, about, 2364, 5683 McDowell, Ephraim, about, 4822 McDowell, Tremaine, 255, 300, 5184 ed.,383, 2276, 2343 McFarland, Carl, 6227 McFarland, Marvin W., ed., 4788 McFarland, Raymond, 5872 M'Fingal, 165, 167 McGeary, Martin Nelson, 6160 INDEX / 1 145 McGibony, John R., 4849 MacGill, Caroline E., 5923 McGillicuddy, Cornelius, 501 1 about, 501 1 McGovern, John T., 4999 McGovney, Dudley O., 6405 Macgowan, Kenneth, 4901 McGraw-Hill Book Company, about, 6449 McGregor, John C, 2992 McGregor, Iowa, guidebook, 3894 McGuffey readers, 5126 Machinal, 2332 Machine politics, 3437-38, 6218, 6333, 6338, 6346, 6353, 6357, 6363, 6382, 6384-91, 6410, 6434 Mclnerny, Mary Alice, 4577 Maclver, Robert M., 5181, 5185, 6082 Mack, Connie. See McGillicuddy, Cor- nelius Mack, Gerstle, 4221 Mackay, Alexander, 4344-46 about, 4344 Mackay, Charles, 4370-71 about, 4369 McKay, Donald C, 3508 ed., 3501, 3516 Mackay, John A., about, 5433 MacKay, Kenneth Campbell, 6362 MacKaye, Percy, 2337, 2348 MacKaye, Steele, 2308, 2337, 2347 McKean, Dayton D., 6337, 6388, 6395 McKearin, George S., 5789 McKearin, Helen, 5789 McKee, Samuel, Jr., ed., 3289, 3291 McKelvey, Blake, 4050-52, 4654 McKelway, St. Clair, 2894 Mackenzie, Alexander, about, 3167 Mackenzie, Catherine D., 4678 Mackenzie River, 4015 McKeon, Richard, 5289, 5427 about, 5427 Mackey, David R., 4966 McKibbin, David, 5771 McKiever, Margaret F., 4887 McKinley, William, about, 3424, 3447-48 McLaughlin, Andrew Cunningham, 3301,3349.6078-79 McLaughlin, George D., about, 4785 Maclaurin, William Rupert, 4693 McLean, John G., 5914 MacLean, Malcolm S., 5228 McLean, Murdoch C, 4474 MacLeish, Archibald, 1585-88, 1908. 2333 about, 2378, 2499, 2527 MacLennan, S. F., 5289 Macleod, William Christie, 3030 McLoughlin, William G., 5480 Maclure, William, about, 4737 Macmahon, Arthur W., 6187 McManis, Jack, ed., 1481 McMaster, John Bach, 3046 about, 3046, 3058 Macmillan's Magazine, 989 MacMinn, George R., 4923 McMurry, Donald L., 3440 McMurtrie, Douglas C, 6448 MacNeil, Neil, 2906 MacNutt, Francis Augustus, tr., 3153 Macon, Nathaniel, about, 3286 Macon, Ga., guidebook, 3840 McPharlin, Paul, 4981 comp., 128 McPhee, William N., 6414 McRae, Milton A., 2886 about, 2886, 2890 McReynolds, Edwin C, 4169, 4171 McSorley's Wonderful Saloon, 2755 McTeague, 1090-92 McWilliams, Carey, 3957, 4176, 4462, 4475. 5846 Macy, Anne Sullivan, 2706 about, 2705 Macy, John Albert, ed., 2706 Macy (Rowland H.) and Co., about, 5959 Madame Butterfly, 2337 Madame Celestin's Divorce, 760 Madame Delicieuse , 748 Madame Delphine, 747-48 Madame de Mauves, 1007 Madame De Traymes, 1855 Madame Zilensky and the King of Fin- land, 2024 Made in America, 5691 Madeleine (opera), 5681 Mademoiselle Olympe Zabrisk', 711 Madison, James, 3283, 5418, 6075, 6087 about, 2622, 3282-83 Madmen All, 517 Madrilene, 1033 Madsen, Borge, tr., 4485 Magazines, 2913-26 bibl., 2914-15, 2919 directory, 5958 folklore, 5518 hist., 2914-16, 2918-19 medical, 4809 photography, 2908 publishing, 6449-50 Maggie, a Girl of the Streets, 822-24, 835-37 Maggs, Douglas B., ed., 6090 Magic, folk, 5509, 5528-29, 5537 The Magic Curtain, 4941 Magnalia Christi Americana, 43-44 The Magnificent Ambersons, 1 802, 1 806 Magnificent Missourian, 3322 The Magpie and the Maid, 2302 Magriel, Paul D., ed., 4971-72 Mahan, Alfred Thayer, 3672, 3688, 3700 about, 3058, 3672 Maher, R. L., 6195, 6207 Mailer, Norman, 2025-28 about, 2371 Main Currents in American Thought, 2485 about, 2407 The Main Line, 23 1 4 Main Line of Mid-America, 5927 The Main Stream, 2503 Main Street, 1560 Main Street on the Middle Border, 4109 Main-Travelled Roads, 891-95 Maine, 2590 econ. condit., 4031 folksongs & ballads, 5566-67 guidebooks, 3792-95 hist., 3473 Maine — Continued in art, 5767 language (dialects, etc.), 2256 Penobscot Indians, 301 1 soc. condit., 4031 Maine, U.S.S., 3530 Maine in literature essays, 594-95, 606, 1859 fiction, 402-4, 562, 570-71, 1284-85, 1288, 1290, 1707 poetry, 1290, 1295, 1713-14 short stories, 1023-31 Maisel, Edward M., 5680 Major, R. H., 3163 Make Bright the Arrows, 1 609 Make Light of It, 1 879 Makemie, Francis, about, 5396, 5466 Makers and Finders, 2381 Makers of Literature, 2545 The Maying of Americans, 1768 The Maying of a Southerner, 272 1 The Making of an American, 2785 Making the American Mind, 5126 The Male Animal, 2334 Mall, Franklin B., about, 4845 Mallery, Richard D., 2250 Mallinckrodt, Edward, about, 4735 Malmin, Gunnar J., tr. & ed., 4348 Malone, Dumas, 3295, 3303 ed., 3080 Malone, Kemp, ed., 1046 Malott, Deane W., 5847 Mamba's Daughters, 1512 Mammonart, 1754 Mammoth Cave, Ky., 2946 Mamoulian, Rouben, 5678 Man, prehistoric, 2995-96, 4202 The Man against the Sky, 171 4 A Man against Time, 1556 Man and Boy, 2053 Man and Shadow, 2342 Man and Wife, 2317 The Man Coming toward You, 1871 The Man in the Crowd, 529 A Man in the Divided Sea, 2035 A Man Must Fight, 5031 The Man That Corrupted Hadleyburg, 798-99 The Man Who Came to Dinner, 1491, 1548,2327, 2334 The Man Who Died at Twelve O'clock,, 1475 The Man Who Died Twice, 1714 The Man Who Was There, 2052 Man With a Bull-Tongue Plow, 2166 The Man with the Blue Guitar, 1784 The Man with the Hoe, 1062 The Man without a Country, 901-5, 909 The Managed Casualty, 4469 Manassas to Malvern Hill, 3695 Manchester, Frederick, ed., 2375 Manchester, Herbert, 4992 Manchester, William R., 1607 Manhattan art, 5767, 5773 fiction, 1449 See also New York (City) Manhattan Project, 4747 Manhattan Transfer, 1327 Manifest Destiny, 3306, 3340, 3398, 3760 1 146 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Mankowitz, Wolf, 1367 Manly, John M., 1070 Mann, Arthur, 4530 Mann, Horace, 5125, 5418 about, 51 16, 5125 Manners, 286 Manning, Thomas G., cd., 3106 Mannix, Daniel P., 4980 Manpower. See Labor supply Manross, William W., 5456 Mansfield, Harvey C., 5996 Mansfield, Katherine, about, 1278 Mansfield, Luther S., ed., 491, 499 Mansfield, Richard, about, 4939 Mantle, Robert Burns, ed., 4897 Manuductio ad Ministerium, 47-48 Manufactures, 3291, 5902-6, 6030 hist., 5904, 5906 Ohio, 41 19 Many Are Called, 2058 Many Long Years Ago, 1632 Many Mansions, 1617 Many Minds, 2523 Many Thousands Gone, 1225-26 A Map of Virginia, 68 Mapes, James Jay, about, 4735 Mapleson, James Henry, 5659 Maps. See Atlases and maps Marberry, M. Marion, 1064 Marble, Alice, 5049 about, 5049 Marble, Annie (Russell), 2465, 6447 ed., 595,597 The Marble Faun (Faulkner), 1379 The Marble Faun (Hawthorne), 333 Marbut, Curtis F., 2947, 5816 about, 2947 Marcel, Gabriel, 5363 March, Peyton C., 3712 March, Richard, ed., 1364 March, William. See Campbell, Wil- liam Edward March Marchand, Ernest, ed., 1 13 Marches Now the War Is Over, 624 Marching On, 1241 Marco Bozzaris, 323 Marco Millions, 1648 Marcosson, Isaac F., 2892 Marcou, Jules, 4742 Marcus Aurelius, 2281 Marden, Charles F., 4432, 4578 Mardi, 478 Maretzek, Max, 5659 Margaret, 402-4 Margaret Fleming, 2337 Marginalia, 533 Maria, the Potter of San lldefonso, 2723 Marianas Islands, 4218 Marietta, Ohio, 3767, 4030 Marin, John, 5767 about, 5767, 5783 Marine Corps, hist., 3668 Marion, Francis, 171 Maritime commerce, 3524 Maritime rights. See Freedom of the seas Marjorie Daw, 71 1-12 Marjorie Morningstar, 223 1 Markel, Lester, 3615 1549. Marketing, 5944-45 See also Agricultural products — marketing; Retail trade; Whole- sale trade Markham, Edwin, 1061-63 Marland, Ernest Whitworth, about, 2731 The Marmot Drive, 1992 Marquand, John Phillips, 1589-97 about, 1598, 2376 Marquesas Islands, fiction, 471-75 Marriage, 4550, 4561, 4571-72, 4617 counseling, 4570 Indian, 3022, 3043 The Marriage of Venus, 1740 The Married Loo\, 1641 Marriott, Alice Lee, 2722-25, 3007 The Marrow of Tradition, 756 Marryat, Frederick, 4324-28 about, 4324 Mars feems's Nightmare, 757 Marse Chan, 11 00-2 Marse Covington, 705 "Marse Henry," 2892 Marsh, James, about, 5263 Marsh, Othniel Charles, about, 4721, 4724, 4754 Marsh, Philip M., ed., 143 Marshall, Helen E., 4839 Marshall, John, about, 6096, 6231, 6237-38, 6240, 6258, 6260 Marshall, John David, comp., 6481 Marshall, Thomas F., comp., 2552 Marshall, Thomas M., 3157 Marshall, William L., 6276 Marshall, Okla., 4171 Marshall Islands, 4218 Marshall Mission to China, 3593 Marshall Plan, 3637, 3639-40 The Marshes of Glynn, 1038 Marston, William Moulton, 4975 Martens, Elise H., 5205 The Martian Chronicles, 1934 Martin, Alexander C, 2960 Martin, Asa Earl, ed., 4056 Martin, Boyce F., 5847 Martin, Clyde E., 4565 Martin, Edwin T., 4753 Martin, Eveline C, 3179 Martin, Harry B., 5053 Martin, Howard H., ed., 4212 Martin, John, 4968, 4972 Martin, John Bartlow, 4124 Martin, Paul S., 2993 Martin, Robert F., 5893 Martin, Thomas C, 4782 Martin Eden, 1056-57 Martineau, Harriet, 4315-19 Martinez, Maria Montoya, about, 2723 Marvel, Ik, pseud., 506-10 Marvin, W. T., 5260 Marx, Herbert L., Jr., ed., 4703 Marx, Karl, about, 1743, 5291 Marxist influence in literature, 1048, 1754, 2421. 2441, 2507, 2539 Marxist interpretation of literature, 2439 Mary, 1190 Mary of Scotland, 1 1 72, 1 1 74 Mary Peters, 1285 Mary Stuart, Queen of Scotland, drama, 1172, 1174 Maryland architecture, 5706 culture, 3233 fiction, 405, 412-13 Germans, 4480 guidebooks, 3824-25 hist., 3209, 3233, 4073 legal hist., 6284 plantation life, 4517 printing, Colonial, 6448 rivers, 3999 The Maryland Gazette, about, 2854 A Mask^ for Privilege, 4462 Mas/^ of Silenus, 2413 Mason, Alpheus Thomas, 6246, 6249 ed., 6065 Mason, Daniel Gregory, 5625 Mason, George, about, 3254 Mason, Kathryn Harrod, 2726-27 Mason, Lowell, about, 5684 Masons (Freemasons), 4574 The Masque of Judgment, 1069 The Masque of Kings, 1 174, 2348 A Masque of Mercy, 1 452 The Masque of Pandora, 435 A Masque of Reason, 1452 The Masque of the Gods, 2282 Mass Communications. See Commu- nications Mass Culture, 6443 Massachusettensis de conditoribus, 3198 Massachusetts, 3965, 4034-38 courts, 6292 culture, 3178, 3199, 3235, 3241 early settlers, 7, 17-18, 32 education, 5125 govt., 6195 guidebooks, 3798-3803 hist., 2580, 3991, 4012, 4034 Colonial period, 90-91, 3178, 3181-82, 3198-99, 3211, 3235, .3241 in literature, 40-44, 49-58, 62-64, 75^77. 276. 587-93. 596-97. 606 fiction, 562, 665, 1438-39, 1443, 1589,2293 poetry, 7— II, 79-83, 662 sermons, 18, 33 short stories, 881-86 legal hist., 6228, 6242, 6292 maritime hist., 5936 printing, Colonial, 6448 relations with Gt. Brit., 3241 rivers, 3991, 4012 Massachusetts General Hospital, Bos- ton, hist., 4853 Massachusetts General Hospital, Boston. Social Service Dept., hist., 4805 Massachusetts Historical Society, 696 Massachusetts Medical Society, hist., 4804 Massachusetts Reformatory, Concord, about, 4648 Massachusetts Reformatory for Women, Framingham, about, 4649 Massachusetts State Board of Health, hist., 4879 Master Plan U.S.A., 3624 INDEX / 1 147 Masters, Edgar Lee, 1 599-1 601, 3988 about, 1599, 2419 Masterson, James R., 5542 Materialism, 3134, 6067 Maternal and infant welfare, 4870 New York (City), 4851 Mathematics, 5254 foundations, 5346 hist., 4739 Mather, Cotton, 40-50, 82, 3178, 3199 about, 40, 92, 1873, 2493, 3178, 4034,4826,5417 Mather, Frank Jewett, Jr., 2425 Mather, Increase, about, 92, 2483, 3199 Mather, Stephen Tyng, about, 5866 Mathews, John A., about, 4785 Mathews, John Joseph, 2728-31 Mathews, John Mabry, 4132 Mathews, Lois Kimball. See Rosen- berry, Lois (Kimball) Mathews Matschat, Cecile (Hulse), 3976 Matter (philosophy), 5371 Mattfeld, Julius, 5639 Matthews, Basil J., 4450 Matthews, Brander, 770, 791, 2466-75 about, 2504 Matthews, Cornelius, 2295 Matthews, William, 3662 comp., 3102 Matt/iias at the Door, 1714 Matthiessen, Francis O., 1349, 2476- 77.5319 ed., 1008-9, 2344 about, 2127 Mauberley (Hugh Selwyn), about, 1670 Maud-Evelyn, 1012 Maud Martha, 1939 Maudslay, Robert, 2732-33 Maugham, W. Somerset, 1652 Mauk, James F., comp., 4720 Mauldin, William Henry, 2734-38 about, 2737 Maule's Curse, 2544 Maurer, David W., 2259, 2262 Maurer, Herrymon, 6022 Maury, Matthew Fontaine, about, 4721 Maverick, Maury, 6207 Maverick. Town, 4195 Maxims. See Quotations Maxwell, Allen, ed., 5509, 5521 Maxwell, Desmond E. S., 1365 Maxwell, William, 2029-33 May, Henry Farnham, 5492 May-Day, 289 The May-Pole of Merrymount, 5 1 Maya culture, 2994 Mayer, Arthur, 4959 about, 4959 Mayer, Frederick E., 5397 Mayers, Lewis, 6289 The May field Deer, 1825 Mayhew, Jonathan, about, 5472, 6068 Mayhew, Lewis B., 5160 Maynard, Harold Bright, about, 4803 Maynard, Harold H., 5945 Maynard, Theodore, 5400, 5450 Mayo, Bernard, 3342, 3344 ed., 3294, 3297 Mayo, Margot, 5587 Mayo, Morrow, 4206—7 Mayo, William W., about, 4827 Mayo Clinic, Rochester, Minn., about, 4827 Mayorga, M., ed., 4898 Mays, Arthur B., 5210 Mays, Benjamin Elijah, 5500 Mays, David John, 2739-40 Mazeppa, 2302 Me and Juliet (music), about, 5685 Mead, Ben Carlton, illus., 5531 Mead, Edwin D., 907 Mead, Frank Spencer, 5398 Mead, G. H., 5254, 5289 Mead, Margaret, 3042 Meade, George Gordon, about, 2614 Meade, Robert Douthat, 3263, 3396 Meadows, John C, 4095 Meadows, Paul, 4757 Meaning, theories of, 5289, 5291, 5346 Means, Gardiner C, 5898, 601 1, 6013 about, 5888 Means, James H., 4888 Meany, Edmond S., 4215 Mearns, David C, 3395, 6469 Mears, Eliot Grinnell, 4468 The Measure of Man, 2453 Measurement (education), 5229 Measurement and Prediction, 3724 Meat industry, 5869 fiction, 1754-55 Meat out of the Eater, 79 Mecanique celeste, 4746 Mechanic arts, study & teaching, 5 191 Mecom, Jane (Franklin), 129 Medea, translation and adaptation, 1535.2335 Medical missionaries, Hawaii, 2688 Medical societies, 4812 Middle West (to 1850), 4810 Medical Society of the State of Penn- sylvania, hist., 4804 Medicine, 2844, 4721, 4804-91 care & treatment, 4808, 4825, 4885, case studies, 4815 cost, 4808, 4870, 4882-91 charities, 4820, 4842, 4862-64, 4866, education, 4813, 4825, 4831, 4855- 61 post-graduate, 4857-59, 4861, 4873. premedical, 4861 ethics, 4812, 4817 group practice, 4862, 4886, 4888-89 hist., 4049, 4809, 4814 Colonial period, 4826 i8th-i9th cent., 4812 19th cent., 3765, 41 12 20th cent., 4805, 4862 in literature Colonial, 40 fiction, 375 See also Physicians and surgeons laws & legislation, 4809-10, 4882 personnel, 4809, 4835-36, 4838, 4862, 4870, 4885 practice, 4091, 4809, 4811, 4813-15, 4817, 4825, 4827, 4829-30, 4841, 4891 research, 4779, 4819, 4841, 4870 hist., 4813, 4831 Medicine — Continued schools, 4809-10, 4812, 4831, 4860- 61 social work, 4835, 4839 hist., 4805 stat., 4815, 4865 See also Clinical medicine; Industrial medicine; Magazines — medical; Preventive medicine; Quacks and quackery Medill, Joseph, about, 2862 Medill family, 2862 Medina, Jose Toribio, 3174 Mediterranean area, relations with, 3573 Meek, Joe, about, 2833 Meetinghouse Hill, 1630-1783, 5417 Megrue, Roi Cooper, 2348 Meh Lady, 1 100-2 Meine, Franklin J., 5505 ed., 704 Meisel, Max, 4736 Melanclha, 1767 Meland, Bernard Eugene, 5437 Melcher, Marguerite (Fellows), 5469 Meliboeus-Hipponax, 456-57 Mellichampe, 547 Meltzer, Milton, 4440 Melville, Annabelle McConnell, 5477 Melville, Herman, 470-96, 2290 about, 21, 274, 333, 478, 481, 497- 505, 1231, 2284, 2380-81, 2397, 2420, 2456, 2476, 2478, 2544 Melville Goodwin, USA, 1595 Melville Society, 499 The Member of the Wedding, 2023-24, 2335-36 The Memoirs of a Shy Pornographer, 2082 The Memoirs of an American Citizen, 957 Memoirs of an Epicurean, 2281 Memoirs of Carwin the Biloquist, 1 1 1 Memoranda, 638 A Memory of Two Mondays, 2049 Memphis, Tenn. hist., 4105 politics, 6207 Men and Brethren, 1300 Men and Women, 2314 Men at Work., 1548 Men of the Mountains, 21 68 Men on Bataan, 1992 Men, Women, and Ghosts, 1583-84 Men, Women, and Pianos, 5622 Mencken, Henry L., 832, 1602-5, 2248, 2411, 2876, 6421 ed., 266-67 about, 1606-7, 2406, 2429, 2486, 2503 Meneely, Alexander Howard, 3702 Menes, Abraham, 4458-59 Menjou, Adolphe, 4954 about, 4954 Menkc, Frank G., 5057 Mennonites, 4058, 4480, 5442 Mental hygiene, 4619, 4833-36, 5246 Mentally ill, 4617 care & treatment, 4828, 4830, 4833- 34, 4836-40 1 148 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Mercantilism, Colonial period, 3193, 3242, 3262, 5878 Mercer, Morgan. See Dana, Julian Merchant marine, 5930 Mercier, Louis J. A., 2375 Mercy Dodd, 2298 Mercy Philbricl(s Choice, 984 Merely Colossal, 4959 Mereness, Newton D., ed., 4233 Mergenthaler, Ottmar, about, 4786 Meriam, Lewis, 3038 Merit system. See Civil service reform Merk, Frederick, 3083 Merlin, 171 4 Merriam, Charles Edward, 3646, 4540, 6066, 6363, 6380, 6406 Merriam, George S., 2879 Merriam, Robert E., 3720 Merrick, Elliott Tucker, 2741-42 Merrill, Francis E., 4572, 4625 Merrill, George P., 4737 Merrily We Roll Along, 1548 Merritt, LeRoy Charles, 6452 Merry Mount, 5 1 Merry-Mount: A Romance of the Mas- sachusetts Colony, 2293 The Merry Partners, 4935 Merrymount Press, Boston, about, 6459 bib!., 6459 Merton, Robert K., ed., 3724 Merton, Thomas, 2034-42 Merton of the Movies, 1 546 Merwin, Frederic E., ed., 2927 Mesick, Jane Louise, 4224, 4228 Mesmeric Revelation, 529 Messiah, 2188 Messiter, Arthur H., 5666 Metalwork, 5596 Met amor a, 23 11 The Metamorphic Tradition in Modern Poetry, 2497 The Metaphysical Passion, 2499 Metaphysics, 5257, 5260, 5278, 5289, 5291, 5310, 5343, 5346, 5352, 5355-56, 5363 The Metaphysics of Pragmatism, 5254 Metcalf, Clyde H., 3668 Metcalf, Eleanor M., ed., 489, 502 Metcalf, Frank J., 5634 Metcalf, Keyes D., 6470 Meteor, 1206 Meteorology, 2950-51, 4722 The Method of Divine Government, 5337 A Methodist Saint, 2586, 5474 Methodists, 2586-87, 5404, 5442 hist., 5416, 5463 Willamette valley, 4213 Metropolitan government. See Local government Metropolitan Life Insurance Company, about, 5992 Metropolitan State Hospital, Waltham, Mass., about, 4838 The Mettle of the Pasture, 719-20 Metzdorf, Robert F., ed., 276 Metzger, Arnold, 5335 Metzger, Walter P., 2358, 5181 Mexican War. See War with Mexico Mexicans, 4197, 4204, 4470-72, 4475- 76 Mexico cession of the Southwest, 3355 fiction, 311 hist., 2294 poetry, 1585 relations with, 3504, 3575, 3586 short stories, 1659 travel & travelers, 1659, 4352-53 Meyer, Adolf, about, 4722 Meyer, Balthasar Henry, ed., 5923 Meyers, Marvin, 3319 Miami, Fla. descr., 3846 politics, 6207 Mich, Daniel D., 2908 Michaux, Francois Andre, 4277-78 about, 4276 Michelson, Albert Abraham, about, 4721 Michelson, Charles, 6364 Michigan, 4137-38 architecture, 5719 Dutch, 4493 folklore, 5533, 5535 folksongs & ballads, 5567, 5575 guidebook, 3882 historical geography, 2969 hist., 4111, 4137 Norwegians, 4487 rural communities, 4109 short stories, 415-18, 1149-50 soc. life & cust., 2661 Michigan. University, 5201 Michigan State Medical Society, 4818 Michl, Herman E., 5902 Microbe Hunters, 1520 Mid-Century, 4453 Mid-Century American Poets, 1948 Mid-Channel, 1572, 1575 The Middle-Aged Man on the Flying Trapeze, 1817 Middle Atlantic States, 4043-65 guidebooks, 3806-26 hist., 3783-84, 4043 printing, Colonial, 6448 public libraries (1 850-1 900), 6472 travel & travelers, 4256-57, 4263, 4329 Middle Border in literature, 898-99 Middle classes, 2893, 3774, 4516, 4542, 4553. 6063, 6346 Middle East, World War II, 3726 The Middle of the Journey, 2519 Middle West agriculture, 5831 descr., 4113, 41 16 Dutch, 4493 econ. condit., 4109, 41 15 folklore, 5518 geography, 41 13 historic houses, etc., 5794 hist., 3053, 3147, 3427, 3446, 3784, 41 15 hunting, 2794 newspapers, 2862, 2887, 2893 Norwegians, 4487 pictorial guide, 3782 play-party songs, 5586 politics, 41 15, 6434 rural communities, 2655 singing games, 5586 soc. hist., 4810, 4827, 4860, 5194 Middle West — Continued soc. life & cust., 2893, 4097-98, 4109, 4115-16, 4136, 4564 Middle West in literature bibl., 2502 fiction, 867-77, 959-63, 1 178, 1 183, 1412, 1416, 1541, 1543, 1559-61, 1564, 1568, 1644, 1646, 1786, 1789, 1802, 1840, 1845, 2052 hist. & crit., 2502 poetry, 753-55, 11 26-31, 1580, 1644- 45, 1727, 1731 short stories, 701-5, 890-95 travels & travelers, 314 The Middle Years, 1015 Middlemen, commercial, 5960 Middleton, George, 2743-44 about, 2744 Middletown, 4592 Middletown in Transition, 4593 A Midnight Bell, 2306 Midstream, 2708 Midway Island, 4218 Midwest at Noon, 41 16 Miggles, 930, 937 Mighell, Ronald L., 5844 Migrant labor, 1775, 5846 Migration, internal, 2943, 4028, 4030, 4098, 4226, 4394, 4397, 4561 Mormons, 4183 Negroes, 4446 The West, 4149 Mikesell, Raymond F., 3562, 3639 Miles, Laban J., 2729 Miles City, Mont., pictorial hist., 4151, 4153 Military Academy, West Point, about, 3656 Military Air Transport Service, about, 3643a Military assistance to foreign nations, 3598,3636 Military courts, 6289 Military history, 2580, 3141, 3643, 3644a, 3650 American Revolution, 3238-39, 3255, 3261, 3269, 3271-72 French and Indian War (1755-63), 3271 Civil War, 3408 World War I, 3715 World War II, 3499 See also specific branches of the Armed Forces, e.g., Army — hist. Military life civil relations, 3646, 3650 Civil War, 3704-5 in art, 5765, 5807 Revolutionary War, 3679 World War II, 3724 Military life in literature drama, 1491, 2145-46 fiction, 821, 825-29, 835-36, 1240- 41, 1249, 1326, 1380, 1396, 1496- 99, i54i, 1544. 1708-11, 1745, 1940-41, 1992-94, 2003-4, 2011, 2023, 2025-26, 2181, 2229-30 historical writings, 1551 personal narratives, 277, 11 70, 13 10 poetry, 1599-1601, 1948, 1999, 2139, 2141 INDEX / 1 149 Military life in literature — Continued reporting, 1170, 1769-70, 1992-4, 2044 short stories, 732-37, 2011, 2057 Military music, 5653 Military policy, 3623, 3629, 3634, 3643, 3651 Military psychiatry. See Psychiatry, military Milk, for Babes, 1 7 A Milk. White Flag, 2306 Mill, J. S., 5337 about, 5337 Millar, Robert W., 6300 Millay, Edna St. Vincent, 1608-9, 2332 about, 1 610, 2406 Miller, Alfred Jacob, paintings by, 3330 Miller, Arthur, 2043-49, 2335-36 Miller, Claude R., 6323 Miller, D. S., 5222, 5335-36 Miller, Delbert C, 4552 Miller, Edgar G., 5731 Miller, George F., 5159 Miller, George J., 2940 Miller, Gerrit S., 2955 Miller, Helen Day (Hill), 3254 Miller, Henry, ed., 4418 Miller, Henry (b. 1891), 610, 1611-13 about, 2498 Miller, Herman P., 4395 Miller, James M., 3767 Miller, Joaquin, 1064-68, 2337 about, 1064, 1068, 2503 Miller, John C, 3255 Miller, Joseph, 3924-25 Miller, Lee Graham, 2745 Miller, Margaret, 5696 Miller, Mary Britton ("Isabel Bolton"), 1614-17 Miller, Max Carlton, 2746-54 about, 2746-54 Miller, Merle, about, 2371 Miller, Paul W., ed., 3838 Miller, Perry, 84, 2288, 2478, 3196, 3742-43. 4513. 5299 ed., 21, 2345-46, 3744 Miller, R. C, 3058 Miller, Robert Moats, 5493 Miller, William, 5875, 6441 ed., 6023 Miller, William H., about, 4785 Miller, William J., 2945 The Miller of Old Church, 1461 Millet, Jean Francois, about, 1061 Millett, Fred B., 991 Millett, John D., 5171, 6187 ed., 5172 Millikan, Robert A., 4755 about, 4722, 4755, 5434 A Million and One Nights, 4944 Millis, Harry A., 6053 Mills, Charles Wright, 4470, 4553 The Mills of the Kavananghs, 2010 Milne, Gordon, 2278 Milton, George Fort, 3397, 4068, 6146 Milton, John, about, 231 Milwaukee, Wis., 3885, 4140, 6207 Mimi's Marriage, 1035 Mims, Edwin, Jr., 4899 Mims, Stewart L., 4265 ed., 4264 Mind and Spirit, 4044 The Mind of Pritnitive Man, about, 2407 The Mind of the South, 4066 A Mind That Found Itself, 4834 Mine Eyes Have Seen the Glory, 2603 Mine the Harvest, 1 609 Miner, Ward L., 1401, 2508 Mineral resources. See Mines and min- eral resources Mineralogical Society of America, about, 4733 Mineralogy, 4715 Miners folklore, 5533, 5578 folksongs & ballads, 5558, 5578 language (dialects, etc.), 5578 Mines and mineral resources, 4174, 5907,5917 folklore, 5531-32 Calif., 4372 Colo., 3913 Middle Atlantic States, 4255, 4336 Middle West, 41 13 Mo., 4108 Nev., 4184-85 N. Mex., 4188 Southern States, 4255, 4336 The West, 4177, 4383 Mingo, 917-19 M in hag America, 5483 The Minister's Wooing, 568-69 Mink and Red Herring, 2904 Minkoff, N. B., 4458 Minneapolis Jews, 4456 music, 5654 Swedes, 4486 Minnesota, 3663, 3948, 3954, 4141-43 architecture, 5719 fiction, 1560, 1568 guidebooks, 3886-88 historical geography, 2969 Norwegians, 4487 rural communities, 4109 Swedes, 4486 Minnesota. University, about, 5184, 5202 Minnesota. University. Bureau of Institutional Research, 5202 Minnesota. University. Program of American Studies, 2553 The Minnesota Arrowhead Country, 3887 Minnie Field, 2332 Minorcan dialect, 2258 Minorities, 4426-35, 4551 bibl., 4426 civil liberties & rights, 6129 magazines, 2918 Great Plains, 4159 Washington, D.C., 4065 Minority Report, 2415 Minstrels, 2472, 4894, 5637, 5640 Minstrels of the Mine Patch, 5578 Minter, John Easter, 4014 The Minute Man (sculpture), 5736 The Minute Men of 1774-1775, 2304 Minute Particulars, 1227 The Miracle Chapel, 1035 Mirror for Gotham, 4048 A Mirror for the Sky, 2210 A Mirror for Witches, 1439 Mirsky, Jeanette, 2980, 3167, 4789 Miscally, Mildred Lois, 2856 Miss Lonely hearts, 1843 Miss Lulu Bett, 1 455 Miss Marvel, 1440 Miss Mehetabel's Son, 711 Miss Ravenel's Conversion from Seces- sion to Loyalty, 278-79 Missionaries in China, fiction, 1252 Missions, 541 1, 5489, 5723 Baptist, 5443 Catholic, 5451 Jesuit, 3075, 3158, 3171 Negro, 5500 overseas, 5405 Hawaii, 2688 Missions, Indian. See Indians, Amer- ican — missions Mississippi, 4079 folklore, 5547 folksongs & ballads, 5576 guidebooks, 3849-50 hist., 3850, 4024 Mississippi in literature drama, 2218, 2223, 2225, 2228 editorials, essays, etc., 194-97 fiction, 546-1379, 1786, 2202, 2204, 2206, 2208 short stories, 1379, 2202-3 2207, 2209 2205, 3982, Mississippi River, 2803, 3975, 4110 descr., 784-86 folklore, 5523 in art, 5805 legends, 5523 showboats, 4978 travel & travelers, 3170, 4281, 4300, 4324, 4336, 4344, 4369 Mississippi River Delta, 2779, 3952 Mississippi Valley, 3954, 3960, 3975 fiction, 778-83, 787-93, 1403, 1405 geography, 41 13 hist., 3147, 3531, 3982, 4164 short stories, 891-95 travel & travelers, 307, 319-21 Mississippi Valley Historical Associa- tion, 3050 Missouri, 2764, 3346, 3948, 3960, 4108 caves, 2946 fiction, 763-65 folklore, 5528 folksongs & ballads, 5568-69 frontier life, 4097-98 Germans, 4478 guidebook, 3861 resources, 4108 rural communities, 4109 travel & travelers, 366, 4322 Missouri Compromise, 3346 Missouri Fur Co., 4148 Missouri River and valley, 4001, 4145, 4M7 fur trade, 4148 geography, 41 13 in art, 5805 travel & travelers, 4307 Mr. Dooley at His Best, 865 Mr. Dooley in Peace and War, 863 431240—60- -74 1 150 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Mr. Dooley in the Hearts of His Coun- trymen, 864 Mr. Dooley: Now and Forever, 866 Mr. Dooley Says, 866 Mr. Dooley's Opinions, 866 Mr. Dooley's Philosophy, 866 Mr. Hodge and Mr. Hazard, 1904 Mr. Pope, 181 1 Mister Roberts, 2335 Mister Zip, 2154 Mrs. Bumpstead-Leigh, 2348 Mistress Nell, 2313 Mrs. Ripley's Trip, 893 Mitchell, Broadus, 3291, 4068, 5877 Mitchell, Donald Grant, 506-10 Mitchell, Donald W., 3669 Mitchell, Edward Page, about, 2874 Mitchell, John M., 5007 Mitchell, Langdon, 2313, 2337, 2347 Mitchell, Lucy Sprague, 5234 Mitchell, Margaret, 161 8-1 9 Mitchell, Robert V., 5945 Mitchell, Silas Weir, about, 4828 Mitchell, Stewart, 3441 ed., 100 Mitchell, Wesley C., about, 5888 Mitchell, William, general, 2981 about, 3647, 5938 Mitchell, S. Dak., guidebook, 3899 Mitropoulos, Dimitri, about, 5654 Mittelholzer, Edgar, 1493 Mittelman, E. B., 6033 Mixed Company, 2147 Mizener, Arthur, 1431 Mliss, 930, 937, 939 Mobilizations, military, 3661 Moby-Dick., 333, 481-83, 491 Mock, Elizabeth, ed., 5717 Mock, James R., 3462 A Model of Christian Charity, 90 Modern Chivalry, 106-8 A Modern Instance, 965-66, 982 Modern Language Association of America, 2457, 2552 Modern Poetry and the Tradition, 2378 Modern Rhetoric, 2378 The Modern Temper, 2453 Modernist-fundamentalist controversy, 5429-30 Modes of Being, 5382 Modoc Indians, editorials, sketches, etc., 1065 Moeller, Philip, 2337 Moffett, Harold Y., 765 Mohawk River and valley, 40 n fiction, 1355 Mohr, Charles E., ed., 2946 Mohtin, 249-50 Mojave Desert, 3947 Moliere, Jean Baptiste Pocquelin, about, 2466, 2474 Mollhausen, Heinrich Balduin, about, 5806 Molloy, Robert, 4093 Monaghan, Frank, 3304, 4229 Monaghan, James (Jay), 2757-59, 3345 Monday Night, 1 242 Monetary policy. See Finance — public Money, 5974-75. 59^3. 5993 Money Writes, 1754 The Monk, and the Hangman's Daugh- ter, 739 Monongahela River, 4019 Monopolies, 6026, 6030, 6392 radio, 4709 telephone, 4673, 4710 See also Oligopoly Monro, Isabel Stevenson, 5753 Monro, Kate M., 5753 Monroe, Harriet, 2760-61 ed., 2567 about, 2760-61 Monroe, James, about, 3284 Monroe, Paul, 5143 ed., 51 10 Monroe, Walter S., 5247 ed., 51 1 1 Monroe County, N.Y., 3810 Monroe Doctrine, 3138, 3284, 3575, 3577.3579. Monroe Township, N.J., 3815 The Monster, 835 Mont Saint Michel and Chartres, 693- 94 Montague, Ludwell Lee, 3584 Montague, William Pepperell, 5260, 5289 ed., 5250 Montaigne, Michel Eyquem de, about, 280 Montana, 3951, 4147, 4178 guidebook, 3910 in literature, 4179 resources, 4212 Montcalm, Louis Joseph de, about, 3171 Monte Cristo and Other Plays, 2313 Monteleone, Vincent J., 2274 Monterey, Calif., soc. life & cust., 4352- 53 Monterey peninsula, Calif., 3930 Monteux, Pierre, about, 5649 Montez, Lola, about, 4923 Montgomery, D. E., 5898 Montgomery, Richard, drama, 105 Montlezun, baron de, 4289 about, 4288 The Monument Rose, 1983 Monuments, public, 4049, 5735 See also specific monuments, e.g., Lincoln Memorial; Mount Rush- more National Memorial Moody, Dwight L., about, 5395, 5403, 5405,5480 Moody, Helen Wills, about, 4987 Moody, William R., 5480 Moody, William Vaughn, 1069-71, 2337 Moon, Bucklin, 2050-51 A Moon for the Misbegotten, 1649 The Moon Is Blue, 2335 The Moon Is Down, 1780 The Moon of the Caribbees, 1648 Moore, Addison Webster, 5254 Moore, Albert Burton, 4099 Moore, Douglas, 1222 Moore, Edward O, 5660 Moore, Ernest O, 5289 Moore, Glover, 3346 Moore, Harry Estill, 3783 Moore, Marianne, 1620-22 about, 2426 Moore, Merrill, 1623-27 about, 1628, 1809 Moore, R. O, about, 5457 Moorhead, Max L., ed., 4188 Moorish Science Temple of America, about, 5498 Moos, Malcolm C, 6132-33, 6366, 6422 ed., 6421 Morais, Herbert M., 5408 The Moral Argument Against Calvin- ism, 231 The Moral Decision, 6261 Moral philosophy. See Ethics Morals, 4315, 4519, 4566 Moravian Church, 4480, 5442 More, Louis Trenchard, 2425 More, Paul Elmer, 2425, 2479-81 about, 2375, 2479, 2503, 2593 More Clinical Sonnets, 1627 More Fables, 703 More Fish to Fry, 5070 More Stories in the Modern Manner, 2566 Moreau de Saint-Mery, Mederic Louis Elie, 4263-65 about, 4263 Morehouse, Ward, 4900 Morgan, Arthur Ernest, about, 4803 Morgan, Barbara B., 4968 Morgan, Bayard Quincy, 4481 Morgan, Dale L., 3989, 4176 Morgan, Edmund S., 3100, 3256-57 Morgan, Helen M., 3257 Morgan, Hugh Gerthon, 4589 Morgan, J. Pierpont, about, 5880, 5882, 5978 Morgan, John, about, 4822, 4856 Morgan, Lewis H., 2961, 3008 about, 3009 Morgan, Murray C, 4216 Morgan, Robert J., 3324 Morgan, Thomas Hunt, about, 4721-22 Morgenstern, Julian, 5427 about, 5427 Morgenthau, Hans J., 3626 Morison, Elting E., ed., 3465 Morison, Samuel Eliot, 3083, 3103, 3164, 3198, 3271, 3305, 3536, 3721,3745.5203, 5936 ed., 6, 3171, 5203 Morley, Christopher, 5222 Morley, Sylvanus Griswold, 2994 about, 2994 Morley of Blackburn, John Morley, viscount, about, 2480-81 Mormons and Mormonism, 2867, 3879, 3961, 4183, 5404. 54". 5439 fiction, 1424 folklore, 5538 folksongs & ballads, 5538 hist., 2161, 4384, 5464-65, 5538 legends, 5538 music, 5630 The Morning after the First Night, 4906 The Morning Watch, 1907 Morrill, Justin Smith, about, 2768 Morrill Act, 51 13, 5186, 5191 Morris, Alton Chester, ed., 5581 Morris, Charles, 5335 Morris, George Pope, 2295 INDEX / II5I Morris, Joe Alex, 2860 ed., 3548 Morris, Lloyd R., 3746, 4048, 4519, 4903.5333.5938 Morris, Richard B., 6057, 6229-30 ed., 3072, 3288 Morris, Robert, about, 6016 Morris, Wright, 2052-56 Morris, 111., soc. condit., 4557 Morrison, Alfred J., tr. & ed., 4257 Morrison, Hugh S., 5714-15 Morrow, D wight W., about, 3586 Morse, John T., Jr., 377, 3416, 4036 ed.,3263 Morse, Samuel F. B., about, 4675-76, 4680, 4752, 4786 Mort, Paul R., 5144 A Mortal Antipathy, 375 Mortal Slimmer, 1 826 Mortenson, Ernest, 6267 Mortimer, Lillian, 2305 Morton, Ferdinand Joseph ("Jelly Roll"), about, 5643 Morton, Ira, 5037 Morton, Thomas, 51-52 about, 1873, 3198 Morton, Thomas G., 4850 Morton, William T. G., about, 4721, 4822 Morton's Hope, 2293 Mosely, P. E., 3562 Moses, Anna Mary R. ("Grandma"), 2762-63 about, 2763 Moses, Montrose J., 4937 ed., 145,199,2347-48 Mosher, William E., 6188 Mosier, Richard D., 5126 Moskowitz, Sam, 2377 Mosquitoes, 138 1 Mosses from an Old Manse, 338-40 The Moth and the Flame, 2347 The Mother (Asch), 1191 The Mother (Buck), 1255 A Mother in Mannville, 1684 The Mother's Recompense, 1853 Motion pictures, 4905, 4944-63 actors & actresses, 4946 arbitration, 6299 audiences, 4895, 4950 censorship, 4947 essays, 1226 hist., 4519, 4944-46, 4954-55. 4959. 4962-63, 5689 in education, 5231 psychological aspects, 4951 satire, 1688 Motley, John Lothrop, 2293 about, 2462, 3376 Motorboat racing, 5016 Mott, Frank Luther, 1052, 2482 ed., 131, 2329, 2847, 2 9°7> 2 9t5 Mott, Frederick D., 4869 Mott, Rodney Loomer, 6097 Mounds and mound-builders, 2996, 4323 Mount, Charles Merrill, 5771 Mount, William Sidney, about, 5768 Mount Holyoke College, hist., 5193 Mount Hood, guidebook, 3938 Mount Rushmore National Memorial, 5737 Mount Savage, 2302 Mount Shasta, 4210 Mt. Sinai Holy Church of America, Inc., about, 5498 Mount Tyndall, 4210 Mount Vernon, Va. (George Wash- ington's residence), 3271 Mount Whitney, 4210 Mountain Interval, 1452 Mountain life, 4174, 5064 short stories, 910, 917-21, 1084-88 The Mountain Lion, 2158 Mountain men, 3330 fiction, 312 The Mountain on the Desert, 1 69 1 Mountain States, 3784 Mountain Time, 2415 Mountaineering, 2665, 3938, 4174, 4210-11 Mourning Becomes Electra, 1647-48 The Moving Finger, 1855 Mowatt, Anna Cora, 2337, 2347, 4927 about, 4927 Mowbray, Albert H., 5990 Mowrer, Edgar A., 3627 Mowry, George E., 3084, 3467, 4202 Muck, Karl, about, 5649 Muckrakers, 1107, 1155, 1754, 6430, 6432 See also Reform and reform move- ments Mudd, Emily (Hartshorne), 4570 Muelder, Hermann R., 2973 Muelder, Walter G., ed., 5259 Mueller, John H., 5650 Mueller, Kate (Hevner), 5212 Miinsterberg, Hugo, about, 4225, 5392 Muhlenberg, Frederick Augustus, about, 3231 Muhlenberg, Henry Melchior, about, 3231,5396,5462 Muhlenberg, William A., about, 5457 Muhlenberg family, 3231 Muir, John, 1072-83 about, 1081-82, 2422 Muldoon, William, about, 5032 Mulford, Roland J., 5155 Muller, Herbert J., 1897 Mullet, Charles F., 3258 Mumford, Lewis, 2407, 3731, 5695, 5701 ed., 5716 about, 5508 Muncie, Ind., soc. condit., 4593 Municipal government. See Local gov- ernment Municipal law, 6277 radio & television, 4708 The Municipal Year Book., 6213 Munitions problem, 3669 Munitz, Milton Karl, 5375 Munsell, Joel, 6447 Munsey, Frank A., about, 2913 Munsey's Magazine, about, 2913 Munson, Gorham B., 2425 Murat, Prince Achille, 4293-96 Murchison, Carl A., ed., 5393 Mmdcr for Pleasure, 2436 Murder in the Cathedral, 1359 The Murder of Lidice, 1608 The Murders in the Rue Morgue, 529 Murdock, Frank, 2301 Murdock, Kenneth B., 2424, 2483, 2496,3199 ed., 48, 50, 83, 1009 Murfree, Mary Noailles, 1084-88, 2296 Murphy, Arthur E., 3739, 5290 Murphy, Henry C, 5971, 5977 tr., 3208 Murphy, Robert Cushman, 2962 Murray, Henry A., ed., 441 Murray, John, about, 5473 Murray, Philip, about, 6394 Murray, William G., 5848 Murrell, William, 5803 Murry, J. Middleton, 656 Museums, 3049, 4726, 5721, 5794-5800 directory, 4716 industrial, 4716 Ohio, 41 19 Music, 3736, 3747-48, 3751, 4025, 5605-87 and poetry, 1038, 1044-46, 1580 and the State, 56^7 bibl., 5606, 5610-1 1 criticism, 1828 discography, 5613 econ. aspects, 5615, 5623 education, 5617, 5625, 5629, 5668— 72, 5684 hist., 5607-8, 5612-14, 5628, 5635, 5638-39, 5650 Jewish, 4458 Bethlehem, Pa., 5667 Boston, 5628, 5648-49, 5672 Calif., 5630 Chicago, 5651-52 Cleveland, 5630 Minneapolis, 5654 Nashville, 3765 New England, 5633 New York (City), 4049, 5626-27 Philadelphia, 5629 Southwest, 5630 Toledo, 4894 See also Opera The Music from behind the Moon, 1262 Musical comedy, 4935, 5638 Musical Courier, about, 5681 Musical instrument makers, 5628 Musicians, 146, 2638, 5644, 5673-87 bibl., 5606 biog. (collected), 5622, 5632, 5634, 5642 unions, 5619 See also Composers Muskingum, Ohio, 3873 Musselman, G. P., 4479 Musselman, Morris M., 4954 Musser, Paul H., 198 Mussey, June Barrows, ed., 4029 Mutiny in January, 3264 Muzzcy, David Saville, 3442 My Antonia, 1276-77 My Boyhood Dreams, 798-99 My Chinese Marriage, 1659 My Days of Anger, 1374 My Debut as a Literary Person, 798-99 My Dim y North and South, 4379-81 1 152 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES My Ears Are Bent, 2756 My Farm of Edgewood, 509 My Father's Business, 2350 My First Lie, 798-99 My Glorious Brothers, 1979 My Heart and My Flesh, 1699 My Heart for Hostage, 1 5 1 5 My Heart's in the Highlands, 2110, 2112 My Lady Pocahontas, 66, 251 My Life among the Indians, 1065 My Life and Hard Times, 18 17 My Lord, What a Morning, 5673 My Mortal Enemy, 1 277 My Name Is Aram, 21 1 1 My Partner, 23 1 6 My Several Worlds, 1260 My Study Windows, 467 My Summer in a Garden, 1 137-38 My Ten Years in a Quandary, 121 7 My Uncle Dudley, 2052 Myer, Jesse S., comp., 4818 Myers, Albert Cook, ed., 3214 Myers, Gustavus, 5882 Myers, Louis M., 2249 Myers, Margaret G., 5993 Myers, William Starr, 3486, 6385 Myrdal, Gunnar, 4446 Mystery novels. See Detective and mystery fiction The Mystery of Marie Roget, 529 Mysticism, 5355 Mythology, Indian, 3013, 3021 Myths. See Legends and tales Myths and Legends of the Old Planta- tion, 914 Myths and Myth-Makers, 5302 Myths and Realities, 4517 N NEA Journal, 5245 Nagel, Ernest, 5267, 5290, 5291, 5350 ed., 5267 Nagel, Hildegard, tr., 4814 The Nak^ed and the Dead, 2026 Nally, Thomas P., 5226 Names, 2238, 2246, 2248, 2264, 4390 See also Place-names Names on the Land, 2976 The Nancy Flyer, a Stagecoach Epic, 1656 Nantucket, Mass., 4038 Napoleon I, about, 231 Narrative of the Captivity and Restora- tion of Mrs. Mary Rowlandson, 55 Narrative poetry. See Poetry — epic and extended narrative Narratives of Early Virginia, 71 Narratives of the Indian Wars, 55 Narratives of the Witchcraft Cases, 41 The Narrow House, 1744 Nasby, Petroleum V., pseud. See Locke, David Ross Nash, Ogden, 1629-34 about, 2426 Nashville, intellectual life, 3765 Nason, Arthur H., ed., 167 Nason, Thomas W., about, 5783 Nast, Thomas, 5803 illus., 424-25. 544 about, 422, 2917 Nathan, George Jean, 4906 Nathan, Robert Gruntal, 1635-43 Nathan, W. L., 3751 Nathanson, Jerome, 5296 Nation, Carry, about, 2588 The Nation, 2503, 2882, 2921 National Academy of Sciences, Wash- ington, D.C., 4774 about, 4774 National Archives, 3066-67 about, 3066-67 National Association for the Advance- ment of Colored People, about, 6106 National Association of Nurse Anes- thetists, hist., 4816 National Avenue, 1806 National banks, 5993, 5999 National Bureau of Standards, about, 4769 National characteristics, 2380, 2464, 2469, 2501, 3123, 3140, 3146-47, 3609, 3732-35, 3738, 3762, 41 19, 4223-24, 4229, 4234, 4513-M. . 4555-56 National Commission on Life Adjust- ment for American Youth, about, 5224 National Committee on General Educa- tion, 5228 National Conference of Social Work, 4618 National Council for the Social Studies, 3050,3059 National Council of the Churches of Christ in the United States of America, about, 5487 National defense, 4761, 4773 econ. aspects, 5879, 5889 National Education Association, 5106, 5228, 5240, 5245, 5247 National Funeral Directors Association of the United States, 4527 National Gallery of Art, 5594 National Geographic Society, Washing- ton, D.C., 2962 National Health Assembly, Washington, D.C., 4870 National Historical Publications Com- mission, 3068 National Industrial Conference Board, . 5 g 93 National Institute for Commercial and Trade Organization Executives, 6019 National Labor Union, about, 6034 The National Law Library, 6223 National Medical Library, about, 6476 National Museum, about, 4726, 4744 National Orchestral Survey, 5647 National parks and reserves, 1072, 1075-77, 2956, 5813, 5866 National Planning Association. Com- mittee of New England, 5890 National Research Council, 4777 about, 4774 National Resources Board. Land Plan- ning Committee, 3043 National Resources Committee, 5898 National Resources Committee. Science Committee, 4777 National Resources Planning Board, 5898 about, 6144 National Resources Planning Board. Science Committee, 4777 National Science Foundation, about, 4776, 4778 National Security Council, about, 6144 National Security Resources Board, about, 6144 National Society for the Study of Edu- cation, 5246 National Society for the Study of Edu- cation. Committee on Early Child- hood Education, 5150 National songs, hist., 5616 National Tuberculosis Association, 4868 hist., 4863 National university, proposed, 101 Nationalism 18th cent., 3246, 3282, 3328, 5406 i8th-i9th cent., 3106, 4526 19th cent., 3305, 3313, 3328, 3347, 3363-64, 3397, 3399, 3412. 3-H9- 343i,3445.378i Nationalism in literature essays, 2421 (1764-1819), 101, 105, 109-17, 134, 146-48, 165-70, 2412, 2530 (1820-70), 198, 230, 252, 280, 283, 317. 323. 368, 381, 427. 430. 487. 511, 546, 769-71. 2295, 2478 (1871-1914), 890, 1136 Nationality, 4417, 4427. 443° See also Foreign population Native Son, 2233 Nativism, 4515, 6164 Natoma (opera), 5681 Natural history, 2956, 4726, 4738 bibl., 4736 S.C., 5087 Tex., 4734 See also Animals; Plants Natural history societies. See Scientific societies Natural law, 3258, 6072, 6094 Natural resources, 2940, 5810, 5884, 5898, 5900 Ga., 4095 Middle West, 41 13 Mo., 4108 N. Dak., 4165 Northwest, Pacific, 4212 Ohio, 41 19 Southern States, 4079, 4084 Vt., 4033 Va., 4085 See also Conservation of natural resources Naturalism in literature, 3758 fiction, 768, 821, 959, 1048, 1089. 1333. 1743. 1775. 2365, 2498 See also Realism in literature Naturalists, 4307 bibl., 4736 biog. (collected), 4734 See also names of individual natural- ists INDEX / 1 1 53 Naturalization, 4424 Nature, 281-82, 286, 293 Nature and Man, 5380 Nature in art, 5762 Nature in literature anthologies, 2453 editorials, sketches, etc., 280-2, 286, 293. 506, 509-10, 633, 716-17, 740-44, 1136-38, 1 144, 1724-26, 2453 fiction, 716 hist. & crit., 2422 poetry, 7-1 1, 134, 138, 216-21, 223- 25, 455, 614-17, 619-30, 636-37, 639, 642, 662, 667-71, 673, 838— 46, 1126-31, 1823 prose, 21, 36, 46, 585, 587-97, 599- 602, 605-6, 608-9, 633-35, 638, 1072-83 short stories, 612-13, 7 l &> 1724 Naturopathy, 481 1 Naughton, Thomas Raymond, 6221 Naughty Anthony, 2315 Naughty Marietta (operetta), 5681 Nauvoo, 111., guidebook, 3879 Navajo Indians, 3013 fiction, 1551-52 Naval Academy, Annapolis, Md., about, 3825 Naval Gun Factory, Washington, D.C., hist., 3670 Naval Observatory, about, 4770 Naval policy, 3643, 3666, 3674 Naval Research Laboratory, about, 3675 Naval warfare, law of, 3524 Navigation, 3164, 41 10, 4 114, 4746 Navigation Acts (1649-96), 3193, 3243 Naville, Pierre, 5393 Navy, 3666-77 biog. (collected), 3825 hist., 252, 3666-69, 3671-74, 3676, 4040 American Revolution, 3678 War with France (1798-1800), 3685-86 War of 1812,3688 War with Mexico, 3689 Civil War, 3416, 3700 Spanish-American War, 3708 in literature, 2746 personnel policies, 3669 Navy Dept., 3700 scientific research, 3675 Navy Yard, Washington, D.C., hist., 3670 The Nazarene, 11 90 Near East, relations with, 3512, 3588 travel & travelers, 2278 Nebraska, 3944, 3948, 4166 fiction, 1276, 2052 frontier life, 2799-2800, 4156 govt., 6195 guidebooks, 3901-3 hist., 3901, 4166 law, 6233 rural communities, 4109 The Necessary Angel, 1783 Ned Myers, 271 Needles and Pins, 2317 Needlework, 5593, 5595, 5604, 5785 Neely, Wayne Caldwell, 5827 Nef, John U., 4504 Neff, Emery Edward, 1719, 2289 Negligible Tales, 739 Negroes, 2690, 2839-40, 4310, 4428, 4435-51 actors, 4921 biog. (collected), 5515 boxers, 5025 colonization, Africa, 4258 econ. condit., 4446, 4448, 6375 education, 4443, 4450, 5116, 5206 folklore, 5515, 5517-18, 5523, 5527, 5535. 5547 in literature, 910-16, 922, 924- 25 in art, 5765 language (dialect, etc.), 2271 in literature, 192-93, 756-59, 856-60, 910-16, 922, 924-25, 1032, 1038, 1099-1102, 1106, 1133-35, 1526, 1653 legends, 5517-18, 5521 musicians, 5644 politics & suffrage, 3106, 6375, 6378- 79, 6409 religion, 5401, 5498-5502, 5527, 5547 soldiers (Civil War), 2280 songs, 5517-18, 5521, 5540, 5556, 5564, 5569, 5582 spirituals, 5540, 5555, 5558-59 Baltimore, 4062 Brooklyn, 4046 Chicago, 4439, 4451, 6375 Northern States, 4310, 4451 Philadelphia, 4258 Southern States, 4083, 4438, 4443 6376, 6378-79 See also Slavery Negroes in literature editorials, essays, sketches, etc., 192- 93, 1099, 1 103-4, 1 106, 2364 drama, 1821 fiction, 562-67, 722, 756, 949-52, 1099, 1 106, 1390, 1392, 1512-13, 1526-29, 1569, 1653-55, 1759-60, 1832, 1914-15, 1937, 1939, 1966- 67, 201 1, 2050-51, 2232-33, 2235, 2631 humor, 2501 poetry, 856-59, 861, 1133-35, 1521, 1537-38, 1540, 1937-38 reporting, 1653 short stories, 192-93, 756-61, 856, 859-60, 910-16, 920-22, 924-25, 1032, 1099-1102, 1106, 1523-25, 2234 Neighborhood houses, New York (City), 4624 Neihardt, John Gneisenau, 1644-46 Nelson, Arnold L., 2960 Nelson, Bruce C, 4147 Nelson, Helge, 4486 Nelson, John H., ed., 2276 Nelson, Joseph, 2764 Nelson, Lowry, 4582 Nelson, William Rockhill, about, 2887 Nerber, John, ed., 417 Netherlandcrs. See Dutch Netherlands, 2293 relations with, 3528 Nets to Catch the Wind, 1 903 Neuberger, R. L., 6207 Neufeld, Maurice F., ed., 6032 Ncuman, H., tr., 4268 Neumann, Henry, 5435 Neumeyer, Esther S., 4998 Neumeyer, Martin H., 4998 Neurology, 4828 study & teaching, 4840 Neurosurgery, 4821 Neutrality, 3535, 3582 World War I, 3470, 3541 World War II, 3537-38 Nevada, 4184-85 descr., 4184 fiction, 1420, 1954 guidebook, 3916 hist., 3959, 3961, 3989, 4184, 4189 Indians, 3019, 3023, 3041 music, 5630 Nevertheless, 1621 Nevins, Allan, 421, 2858-59, 2873, ^/3093, 3259, 3335, 3398-99, 3423, 3443-44, 3534, 4033, 4676, 4789, 5915-16,5939 ed., 2691, 2823, 3313, 3334, 3351, 3422, 4047, 4234 Nevius, Blake, 1856 The New Apologists for Poetry, 2452 New Castle, Del., 3823 "New Criticism," 2378, 2421, 2559 New Deal, 3119, 3458, 3491-92, 3497, 5877,6095,6354-55,6364 New Directions in Prose & Poetry, 2560 New England, 4026-42, 4423 agriculture, 5820, 5840 biog. (collected), 2693, 4029, 4271 church hist., 5417 descr., 5086 econ. condit., 4031, 5890 fisheries, 5872 folklore, 5524, 5534, 5541 folksongs & ballads, 5554, 5574, 5580 foreign population, 4026, 4413 govt., Colonial period, 6079 guidebooks, 3782, 3791-3805 hist., 2268, 2681, 3279, 3281, 3783- 84, 3965, 4030 Colonial period, 3131, 3181, 3213,3219,3743 intellectual life, 2549, 3742-43, 3745 language (dialects, etc.), 2268 in literature, 209, 558, 881-86 music, 5633 postal service, 4665 public libraries, 6472 schools, 2674 science & technology, 4730 soc. condit., 4031 soc. life & cust., 2600, 2651-52, 4029 theology, 2483, 5428 transportation, 5933 travel & travelers, 36-39, 69-71, 3069, 4227, 4261, 4266, 4271, 4279, 4324, 4329 A New England Boyhood , 906-7 The New England Courant, about, 2854 1 154 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES A New England Group and Others, 2480 New England in literature, 2459 diaries, journals, etc., 36-39, 49, 53, 58, 90-91, 187, 294-95, 600-1, 603, 706-10, 900, 906-7 drama, 168-70, 198, 200, 1647-48 essays, 286-87, 291-93, 298-301, 368, 371-74. 465-67. 469. 979. 1002-3, 2486 fiction, 188, 333-47, 356, 402-4, 470, 481-83, 491, 562, 568-73, 576, 579-84, 665, 706-10, 1284, 1286, 1437-44, 1589, 1619, 1736, 1845, 1916, 1992, 2156 hist. & crit., 1-6, 43-44, 69-71, 91, 2381,2483,2549 humor, 209, 558-61 poetry, 7-11, 72-74, 79-83, 288-90, 368-70, 455-59, 662, 667-71, 673, 1451-52, 1583-84, 1713-14, 2007, 2374 prose, 585, 587-97, 599-606 satire, 51-52, 75-77 short stories, 51, 333-40, 356, 359, 562, 574-75, 706, 711-12, 881- 86, 1023-31, 1762, 2160 theology, 17, 19-22, 33~35> 4°. 43- 44, 59-62, 65, 86-89, 93-95, 2483 New England: Indian Summer, 2381 A New England Nun, 883-84 The New England Quarterly, 2561 New England Reformers, 286 The New England Weekly Journal, about, 2854 A New England Winter, 1008 New Englander and Yale Review, 2577 New Englanders, 3965, 4027-30, 4394, 4423 drama, 4926 Northwest, Old, 41 17-18 See also Yankees New English Canaan, 52 New Found Land , 1586 New France, 3156, 3171, 3175, 3207, 3226 New Hampshire, 4032 fiction, 706-10, 1656, 1916, 1918, 2163 folklore, 1222 guidebook, 3796 hist., 4031 poetry, 1451-52, 1916 short stories, 1222 New Haven, Conn., 4042, 4261 A New Home—Who'll Follow?, 416- 17 New Hope, 1800 New Humanism. See Humanism, New New Jersey culture, 3232 govt., 3470 guidebooks, 3811-15 hist., 3214, 3232, 381 1, 3994, 4053 politics, 6395 New Jersey in literature fiction, 1872, 1916 poetry, 1872, 1876 short stories, 1879 New Jersey Legislature, about, 6395 The New Laokpon, 2375 New Mexico, 2737 archaeology, 2992 architecture, 5723 descr., 4198 fiction, 1 196, 1686-87 folklore, 5537 guidebook, 3924 hist., 3956, 3961, 4174, 4189, 4198 Indians, 2723-24, 3013, 3023, 3041 language (dialects, etc.), 4198 resources, 4188 The New Mexico Quarterly Review, 2562 The New Nation, 726 New Netherland. See New York (Colony) New Orleans, 2586, 2871 guidebook, 3852 hist., 1036, 4101 jazz music, 5644 soc. life & cust., 4101, 4283, 4288 theater, 4922 New Orleans in literature drama, 2221 fiction, 745, 749-50, 945, 1032, 1381, 1390 short stories, 746-48, 945, 951-52, 954-55, 1032-35 The New Partisan Reader, 2566 New Plymouth Colony. See Plymouth Colony The New Realism, 5260 The New Republic, 1821 New School for Social Research, about, 5219 The New South, 1038 The New Spoon River, 1601 New Thought, 5439 The New World, 3153-75 colonization, 3086, 3156-58, 3162, 3169, 3171, 3173, 3175, 3223 disc. & explor., 3153-62, 3164-69, 3171-75. 3203, 3206-7, 3212, 3215,3217,3223,4230 sources, 3163 geography, 3155, 3161, 3174 hist., 3075, 3086, 3153, 3157, 3165, 3189, 3223 sources, 3223 New World Writing, 2563 New Year's Day (The 'Seventies), 1845 New York (City) art collections, 5795-5800 Bohemianism, 3757 Chinese, 4467 commerce, 5951 concerts, 5626-27 culture, Colonial period, 4518 econ. condit., 4602, 4638 folklore, 5522 foreign population, 4409 geography, 2939 govt., 6214 guidebooks, 3808-9 harbor, 5951 hist., 2478, 3443, 4045-49 hospitals, 4851, 4857 Italians, 4497 music, 5626-27, 5644 New York (City) — Continued Negroes, 4447 pictorial works, 3782, 4045 politics, 4535, 6207, 6381-82 press, 2904 Puerto Ricans, 4470 soc. condit., 4597, 4624, 4638 soc. life & cust., 2586, 2691-92, 2755, 2822-23, 4048, 4261, 4263, 4290, 4602, 5522 theater, 2017, 4897, 4907-9, 4916, 4924, 4926, 4935, 4942-43. 5638, 5657-59. 5662 Yiddish press, 2898 See also Brooklyn; Harlem (N.Y.); Manhattan New York (City) in literature descr., 242-43, 1859 drama, 168-70, 1688-89, 2063, 2535 editorials, sketches, etc., 2466, 4048 essays, 979, 1002-3, 1 859, 2017 fiction, 691-92, 1 190, 1 193, 1300, 1327, 1333-35. 1339. 1372, 1376, 1446-47, 1449, 1612, 1614, 1636, 1642, 1656-58, 1680, 1688, 1828- 29, 1831, 1842, 1845, 1889-90, 1909, 1911-12, 1914-15, 1966-67, 2025, 2027, 2069, 2074, 2094, 2107-8, 21 10, 2132, 2229, 2231, 2278 humor, 2152 personal narratives, 2473 poetry, 1857-58, 2133 short stories, mi, 1114-20, 1155, 1851, 1855, 1910, 1913, 2057, 21 10, 2145 New York (City) Health Dept., about, 4881 New York (City) Metropolitan Mu- seum of Art, 5754, 5804 American Wing, 5796 hist., 5795 New York (City) Metropolitan Opera, about, 5657, 5659, 5662 New York (City) Museum of Modern Art, 5602, 5697, 5717-18, 5797 New York (City) Public Library, about, 4819, 6465, 6476 New York (Colony) govt., 3224 hist., 3194, 3200, 3210, 3224, 3232 law, 6221 travel & travelers, 3208 New York (State), 4044-52 biog. (collected), 4271 boundaries, 4027 culture, 3224, 3232, 4027 folklore, 5518, 5548 govt., 6195 guidebooks, 3806—10 hist., 3304, 3441, 3966, 4027, 4043- 44. 4049 hospitals, 4846 libraries, 6468 politics, 6374, 6384-85, 6387, 6399 prisons, 4653 travel & travelers, 3069, 4241, 4261, 4266, 4269, 4271, 4285 INDEX / 1 155 New York (State) in literature essays, 675, 740 fiction, 268-69, 511, 514-15, 1155, 1158, 1160, 1338, 1353-56, 2132, 2282 humor, 382-83 short stories, 384-87, 1 160 New York (State) Constitutional Con- vention (1821), about, 6374 New York (State) Constitutional Con- vention Committee, 6080 New York (State) Legislature, about, 6115 New York (State) Republican Party, about, 6385 New York Academy of Medicine. Committee on Medicine and the Changing Order, 4808 New York Academy of Medicine. Committee on Public Health Re- lations, 4851 New York Academy of Sciences, about, 4717 New York City Ballet, about, 4969 New York Committee on the Study of Hospital Internships and Resi- dencies, 4857 New York Daily News, about, 2862 The New York Evening Post, about, 2858, 2873 New York Folklore Quarterly, 5518 The New York Gazette, about, 2854 New York. Herald, about, 2851, 2868, 2877 New York. Herald-Tribune, about, 2868 2903, 4984 European ed., about, 2872 New York Hospital, about, 4838 The New York Idea, 2337, 2347 New York Society Library, about, 6468 New York State Historical Association, 4044 New York Stock Exchange, about, 5982 New York stock market, 3477-78 The New York Times, 2564, 4984 The New York Times Book Review, 2564 The New York Weekly Journal, about, 2854, 2931 New York Tribune, about, 2851, 2868, 2883 The New Yorker, 2565, 2567, 2919 Newcomb, Rexford, 5719, 5723 Newcomb, Simon, 4724, 4756 about, 4724, 4756 Newcomer, Mabel, 6028 Newell, William Wells, 5588 Newfoundland fisheries controversy, 3542, 3554-55 Newhouse, Edward, 2057-59 Newlin, Claude M., ed., 108 Newman, Albert H., 5443 Newport, R.I. econ. condit., 4602 essays, 1002-3 soc. life & cust., 4040, 4387, 4602 News agencies, 2860, 2864, 2890 News of the Night, 2309 Newsome, Albert Ray, 4090 Newspaper court reporting, 6288 Newspaper Days (Dreiser), 1344 Newspaper Days (Mencken), 1604 Newspaper Enterprise Association, about, 2890 Newspapermen, 2847, 2849, 2853, 2857, 2877-94 bibl., 2850 biog. (collected), 2848 See also Reporters and reporting; and names of individuals Newspapers, 2845-76, 2924, 2927 bibl., 2852 chain ownership, 2848, 2866, 2886, 2890, 2927 Civil War, 2851 Colonial, 2854, 2880 directory, 5958 foreign language, 2895-99 hist., 2846-48, 2852, 6447 policies & practices, 2846, 2851, 2900-9, 291 1 Ariz., 4199 Ga., 2856 New York (City), 2904, 4049 Northwest, Pacific, 4214 Ohio, 2857 Oreg., 2863 Southern States, 2853 Washington, D.C., 4063 See also Newspapermen; Syndication (newspaper) Newton, Arthur P., 3168 ed., 3169, 3179 Newton, Earle W, 4033 Newton, Walter H., 3486 The Next Voice You Hear (motion picture), about, 4949 Nez Perce Indians, 3001 Niagara essays, 1003 hist., 3950 travel 8c travelers, 4336 Nicaragua, relations with, 3575 Nicaraguan Canal, 3437, 4221 Nice People, 2348 Nichols, Alice, 4167 Nichols, Dudley, ed., 2332 Nichols, Roy Franklin, 3347, 3400 Nicholson, Joseph William, 5500 Nick of the Woods, 201-4 Nickerson, Hoffman, 3682 Nicodemus, 1714 Nicolay, John G., 421, 941, 3395, 3426 Niebuhr, Helmut Richard, 5399 about, 5433 Niebuhr, Reinhold, 5399, 5447, 5496 about, 5432-33. 5436 Niger, Samuel, 4459 Nigeria, 5989 Nigger Heaven, 1832 A Night in Acadie, 761 Night Music, 2065 Night of the Poor, 2090 Night over Taos, 1174 Night Rider, 2194 Nightingale, Florence, about, 4852, 4854 The Nightmare Has Triplets, 1 264-66 Nights with Uncle Remus, 914-16 Nikisch, Arthur, about, 5649 Niklaus, Thelma, 4953 Niles, Blair, 3977 Niles, Hezekiah, about, 2924, 3260 Niles, Samuel V., 3260 Niles' Weekly Register, 2924, 3260 Nims, John Frederick, 2060-62 Nine Days to Mukalla, 2097 79/9, 1325, 1328 Nisei, 2812, 4466 Nishimoto, Richard S., 4469 Nissenson, Samuel G., 3200 Nixon, Edgar B., ed., 5884 Nixon, Herman Clarence, 3958, 4068, 4594 Nixon, Phyllis J., 2255-56 Nixon, Raymond B., 3445 The No 'Count Boy, 1475 No Friendly Voice, 5235 "No Haid Pawn," 1 100-2 No Man Is an Island, 2042 No Man Knows My History, 5464 No Matter What Happens, 2754 No More Bohemia, 1553 No More War, 2342 No Mother to Guide Her, 2305 No People Like Show People, 4931 No Poems; or Around the World Back- wards and Sideways, 1 2 1 6 No Retreat, 1483 No Star Is Lost, 1374 No Thanks, 13 13 No Time for Comedy, 1209 No Villain Need Be, 1423 No, Yong-Park, 4232 Noah, Mordecai Manuel, 2347 Noble, Peter, 4960 The Noble Exile, 517 Noble savage, 239, 241 Nock, Albert Jay, 3297, 4535 ed., 215 Noel, Mary, 2916 Noetzel, Gregor, maps, 3082 Nolan, Jeannette (Covert), 1132 Noland, Charles F. M., 5542 Nominalist and Realist, 286 Nomini Hall, Va., 2673 Nona Vincent, 10 12 None Shall Look Back, 1468 Nonpartisan League, about, 5831, 6356 Nook Farm, 814 Noon Wine, 1661 Norborg, Sverre, 5363 Nordstjernan, about, 2895 Norfolk, Va., 4088, 4263 Norris, Benjamin Franklin, 1089-98 about, 2365, 2430, 2464, 2517 Norris, George W., about, 3446, 6195 North American Review, 2294 North & South, 1925-26 North Carolina, 3833, 3945, 3963, 4023, 4079, 4090 architecture, 5706 counties, 4090 culture, 3233 drama, 1473, 1475 fiction, 405, 1473-74, 1887-88 folklore, 5529, 5536 folksongs & ballads, 5582 governors, 4090 guidebooks, 3831-33 hist., 3216, 3223, 3233, 4021, 4023, 4090, 4104 1 156 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES North Carolina — Continued language (dialects, etc.), 2256 legends, 5536 short stories, 1239, 1476 travel & travelers, 4248-50, 4277-78 North Dakota, 3951, 4165 econ. geography, 4165 frontier life, 4156 guidebook, 3895 hist., 4147 rural communities, 4109 North Is Black., 1553 North Little Rock, Ark., guidebook, 3854 North of Boston, 1452 North Pole expeditions. See Arctic expeditions North Star Country, 3954 Northern Plains, frontier life, 4155-56 The Northern Shoshoni Indians, 2364 Northrop, F.S.C., 3758 ed., 5384 Northwest, Old, 4109-44 architecture, 5719 culture, 3737,4117 descr. & trav., 2803 econ. condit., 4 1 1 1 guidebooks, 3862-94 historical geography, 2969 hist., 3239, 4109-44, 5931 Indian fighting, 3660 soc. life & cust., 4111, 4115 travel & travelers, 366, 4307, 4322, 4324, 4329, 4349, 4358, 4374 writers & writings, 41 12 Northwest, Pacific econ. condit., 4212 fiction, 21 61 governors, 4213 guidebooks, 3935-39 hist., 4213-14, 4022 Russian claims, 3560 travel & travelers, 391 Northwest Passage, 1710, 3160, 3167, 3169 Northwestern States, 3951 boundaries, 3951 descr. & trav., 2663 hist., 3663, 3783, 4147 Indians, 2998 pictorial guidebook, 3782 Northwestern University, Evanston, 111., about, 4993 Norton, Andrews, about, 5436 Norton, Charles Eliot, 5387 ed., n, 462, 465-67 about, 2480 Norwegians fiction, 1720-23 immigration, 2267, 4482, 4484-85, 4487 language (dialects, etc.), 2267 Wis., 4347 Norwood, William Frederick, 4860 Noss, Murray, 2350 Not by Strange Gods, 1706 Not Guilty, 6298 Not Heaven, 1450 Not So Deep as a Well, 1651 Not So Long Ago, 4519 Notes of a Son and Brother, 1015 Notes on the State of Virginia, 4753 Notions of the Americans, 261 Notre Dame, Ind. University, about, 5041, 5044 Nourse, Henry S., ed., 55 Nova Britannia, 3031 The Novel of Violence in America, 2427 Novels. See Fiction November Boughs, 617, 638 Now the Sky, 1827 Now with His Love, 1227 Nowell, Elizabeth, ed., 1894 Nueces County, Tex., 4476 Nugent, Elliott, 2334 Nullification (1820-1839), 33°3> 33 2 8 Number One, 1332 Nunez Cabeca de Vaca, Alvar, 3217 Nursery Schools, 5148 Nurses and nursing, 4808, 4816, 4820, 4835, 4864 biog. (collected), 4854 hist., 4852 Nute, Grace L., 3170 Nutrition, 4722, 5819 Nutting, M. Adelaide, about, 4854 Nye, Edgar Wilson ("Bill"), about, 1 1 26 Nye, Russel B., 3060, 3380, 3401, 3446 O Captain! My Captain!, 623 Genteel Lady!, 1438 Pioneers!, 1276-77 Shepherd, Speak!, 1758 Oakes, J. B., 6128 Oakley, Annie, about, 4979 The Oasis, 2019 Oats, 5835 Oberfirst, Robert, ed., 2318 Oberhoffer, Emil, about, 5654 Oberholtzer, Ellis Paxson, 3447 Oberlin College, about, 5670 Oberndorf, Clarence P., 375 O'Brien, E. J., ed., 2322 O'Brien, Frank M., 2874 O'Brien, Robert, 4209 Obscure Destinies, 1 277 Observations by Mr. Dooley, 866 Occupational therapy, 4840 Occupations, 6043 immigrants, 4395 Italians, 4497 Jews, 4459 Negroes, 4439 Nisei, 4466 Ocean City, N.J., 4596 The Ocean Highway, 3788 Ochs, Adolf S., about, 2869 Ocmulgee National Monument, 3840 O'Connor, Basil, 5427 about, 5427 O'Connor, Richard, 3701 O'Connor, William Van, 1402, 1785, 2361,2484,3376 The Octopus, 1093 The Octoroon, 2337 Ocular surgery, 4844 O'Daniel, W. Lee, about, 4192 An Ode in Time of Hesitation, 1069 Ode Recited at the Commemoration of the Living and Dead Soldiers of Harvard University, 459 Ode to the Confederate Dead, 1 8 1 1 Odegard, Peter H., 4554, 6338 Odell, Alfred T., ed., 554 Odell, George C. D., 4924 Odets, Clifford, 2063-68, 2327, 2333, 2348 O'Donnell, James, about, 4536 Odum, Howard W., 3783, 3785, 4079, 4541,5561 ed., 4540 Oehser, Paul H., 4775 Of All Things, 121 4 Of Making Many Books, 6449 Of Men and Mountains, 2665 Of Mice and Men, 1780, 2333, 2336 Of the Earth Earthy, 4531 Of Time and the River, 1889-90 Off Broadway, 1 1 75 Offenbach, Jacques, 5679 Office of Air Force History, 3727 Office of Education, 5206, 6474 Office of Experiment Stations, about, 4768 Office of Indian Affairs, 3043 Office of Naval Records and Library, 3686 Office of Scientific Research and Devel- opment, 4778 about, 4761 Office of the Comptroller of the Navy, 3677 Office of War Information, about, 3607 Official Records of the Rebellion, 3378, 3697 Ogden, Rollo, 2858 ed., 2882 Ogg, Frederic A., 6137 Oglala Sioux Indians, 2801 hist., 3003 Ogres and giants in folklore, 5528-29, 5546 Oh, Promised Land, 1787 Oh Susanna (song), 5677 O'Hara, John, 1429, 2069-78 about, 2536 Ohio, 3948, 4118-22 architecture, 5719 folksongs & ballads, 5573 frontier life, 4097-98, 4121 govt., 6195 guidebooks, 3862-73 hist., 4030, 4109, 4111, 4115, 4120- 21 journalism, 2857 politics, 6428-29 rural communities, 4109 travel fk travelers, 4277-78 Western Reserve, 4030, 41 18 Ohio in literature editorials, sketches, etc., 422-26 fiction, 867, 980, 1 178, 1691, 1694 personal narratives, 964, 982 poetry, 2788 short stories, 1149-50, 1179, 169 1 Ohio River and valley descr., 2610 geography, 41 13 INDEX / 1 1 57 Ohio River and valley — Continued hist., 3147, 41 10 intellectual life, 3767 mounds, 2996 travel & travelers, 319, 321, 4276, 4281,4300,4324,4336,4344 Ohio State Senate, about, 6428 Oil! A Novel, 1756 Oil industry. See Petroleum resources and industry "Okie" minorities in Calif., 4204 Oklahoma, 3960, 3964, 4169-71 cities & towns, 41 71 Delaware Indians, 3020 descr., 4170 fiction, 1403, 1406 Five Civilized Tribes, 3025-27 folksongs & ballads, 5570 guidebooks, 3908-9 hist., 4169, 4171, 4189 Olcott, Charles S., 3448 Old age employment, 4635 insurance, 4633 Old Black. Joe (song), 5677 Old Bullion Benton, 3321 Old Cambridge, 2280 Old Creole Days, 746-48 The Old English Dramatists, 465, 467 The Old Farm and the New Farm, 147 The Old House in the Country, 2780 Old Ironsides , 368 Old Jules, 2800 The Old Lady's Restoration , 1035 Old Lore Letters, 2307 The Old Maid, 1845, 1855 Old Man, 1390 The Old Man and Jim, 1 1 26 The Old Man and the Sea, 1 500 Old Mr. Flood, 2755 Old Morality, 1661 An Old New England School, 2674 Old New York., 1845 Old Pines, 1239 Old Plantation Days, 1724, 5087 Old Possum's Book °f Practical Cats, 1359 The Old South, 1 103-4 The Old Swimmin' -Hole and 'Leven More Poems, 1 1 26 The Old Virginia Gentleman, 193 The Old Virginia Lawyer, 1 103-4 The Old World and the New, 3771 Older, Fremont, 2888 about, 2888 Older, Mrs. Fremont, 2884 Oldtown Folks, 5T2-~Ti Ole Miss', 5066 Ole 'S traded, 1 100-2 O'Leary, Frank, ed., 2274 O'Leary, R. S., 6195 Oligopoly, 5887 Oliphant, Mary C. Simms, ed., 554 Oliver, Egbert S., ed., 491 Oliver, Henry M., 5971 Oliver, John W., 4727 Oliver, Robert T., 3597 Oliver Wi swell, 1711 Olmsted, Frederick Law, 4363-68 Olney, Marguerite, comp., 5574 Olson, James C, 4166 Olson, Julius E., ed., 3215 Olsson, K. A., 5442 Omaha Indian reservation, 3042 O'Meara, Carroll, 4694 Omoo, 476-77 On a Soldier Fallen in the Philippines, 1069 On Being Creative, 2375 On Native Grounds, 2448 On the Limits of Poetry, 1 810 On These I Stand, 1308 On Trial, 1689 On Witchcraft, 42 Once in a Lifetime, 1548 One Arm, 2222 One Basket, 1408 One Clear Call, 1758 One Man's Meat, 1862 One More Spring, 1636 One Nation, 2161 One of Our Girls, 2307 One of Ours, 1277 "One of Us," 1035 One Part Love, 2413 One-Smoke Stories, 1 1 98 1 x 1, 1313 O'Neil.T. P., 6207 O'Neill, Edward H., 536 O'Neill, Eugene, 1647-49, 2 3 2 7> 2 33 2 > 2 335> 2 337. 2 348 about, 1650, 2406 O'Neill, James, 2313 O'Neill, James M., 5445 Only Yesterday, 3477 The Opeii Boat, 830 The Open Heart, 2838 The Open Sea, 1601 Opera, 487, 654, 1222, 1512, 1771, 2210, 2472, 5655-63 comic, 701, 705 hist., 5656, 5661, 5663 Chicago, 5660 New York (City), 4924, 5657-59, 5962 See also Theater Operationism (psychology), 5392 Ophthalmology, hist., 4844 Opie, Rcdvers, 3636 Opinions of Oliver Allston, 2380 Opler, Marvin K., 3041 Opler, Morris Edward, 3010 The Opposing Self, 2520 Optimism in literature, 280, 619 Options, 1 1 19-20 Oralloossa, 205 Orange County, Calif., 3957 Orators, 420 Orchestras jazz, 5644 students, 5672 symphony, 5647, 5650, 5652 See also Bands (music) The Orchid, 1637 The Ordeal, 3495 Ordeal by Hunger, 3331 The Ordeal of Mark Twain, 2380 Oregon boundaries, 3351 fiction, 1314-15 Oregon — Continued guidebooks, 3937-38 hist., 3959, 4 2 M newspapers, 2863 Orientals, 4468 resources, 4212 short stories, 13 16 travel & travelers, 391 Oregon Trail, 3789 disc. & explor., 3335, 3338, 3345 travel & travelers, 3348 O'Reilly, John Boyle, about, 4530 Orfield, Lester Bernhardt, 6098, 6301-2 The Organizational Revolution , 5899 Orians, George H., 2401 ed., 2352, 2369 O'Rielly, Henry, about, 4675, 4680 Orient in literature, 280 travel & travelers, 1136 Orientals, 2811-12, 4416, 4420, 4463- 69 citizenship, 6120 econ. condit., 4468 The Origin of the Feast of Puiim, 2312 Original Narrative of Early American History, 3201-19 Ormandy, Eugene, about, 5654 Ormond, 1 12-13, "7 Ornithological Biography, 4743 The Orphan Angel, 1904 Orphanages, 4310 Orpheus in America, 5679 Osage Indians, 2729 Osborn, F., 3562 Osborn, Henry Fairfield, 4748 about, 5434 Osborn, R. E., 5442 Osborne, Estelle Massey, about, 4854 Osgood, Ernest Staples, 5873 Osgood, Herbert L., 3220-21 about, 3058, 3221 Osgood, Robert Endicott, 3628 Osier, Sir William, 4818 about, 4821, 4829, 4845 Ossian, about, 2364 Ossoli, Sarah Margaret (Fuller) mar- chesa d'. See Fuller, Sarah Margaret (Marchesa d'Ossoli) Osteopathy, 481 1 Osterweis, Rollin G., 4042, 4080 Ostheimcr, Richard H., 5174-75 Ostrom, John W., ed., 532 Oswald, John Clyde, 6442 Other Skies, 1 950 The Other Two, 1855 Other Voices, Other Rooms, 1945 Otis, Harrison Gray, about, 3305 Otis, Philo Adams, 5651 Ottawa Indian war, 3033 Otto, Henry J., 5 151 Otto, M. C, 5336 Our America, 1445 Our American Weather, 2950 Our Boarding House, 2301 Our Fair City, 6207 Our Hearts Were Young and Gay, 2809 Our Heroic Themes, 206 Our Landed Heritage, 5814 1 158 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Our More Perfect Union, 6076 Our New Home in the West, 416-17 Our Rising Empire, 3531 Our Singing Strength, 2342 Our Soldiers Speak., 3662 Our Times, 3468 Our Town, 1865, 2327 Out of the Red, 4995 Out of the South, 1475 The Outcasts of Poker Flat, 930, 937, 939 Outcault, Richard Felton, about, 2865 Outlaws. See Adventurers, outlaws, etc. The Outlet, 686 Outlines of Cosmic Philosophy, 5303 Outre mer, 4388-89 The Outsider, ?.2T,i, 2235 The Over-Soul, 280, 285 Over the Alleghenies and Across the Prairies, 4350 Over the Hills to the Poor House, 753 Overacker, Louise, 6336, 6406—8 Overland in a Covered Wagon, 1066, 1068 Overland journeys to the Pacific, 391, 1068,3338,3345,3348, 4373 Overland mail and stagecoaches, 4666 Overland Monthly, 757, 933 Overland Trail. See Oregon Trail Overseas possessions, 2970, 4218-22 econ. condit., 4218 guidebooks, 3940-41 Owen, Robert Dale, about, 2713, 4525 Owen, Wilfred, 5921 Owen Win grave, 1012 Owens, Hamilton, 2876 Owens, Richard N., 6008 The Owl in the Attic, 181 7 Owsley, Frank Lawrence, 3539, 4081 The Ox-Bow Incident, 1955 The Oxford Anthology of American literature, 2321 The Oxford Book, of American Verse, 2344 The Oxford Companion to American Literature, 2433 Oxford Group movement, 5439 The Oxford History of the United States, 3103 Ozark Mountain region, 3960 folklore, 5543-45 folksongs & ballads, 5569 geography, 41 13 language (dialects, etc.), 2270 population, 4102 rural community, 2764 PMLA, 2457 Pacific Coast States, 3137 editorials, sketches, etc., 1068 1064-65, hist., 3048, 3340, 3784 historical geography, 2969 hunting & fishing, 5084, 5091 Orientals, 4468-69 poetry, 933-34, 1064, 1066-67 short stories, 926-32, 937 Pacific Coast States— Continued travel & travelers, 391, 1068, 4384, 4386 Pacific Fur Company, about, 391, 6024 Pacific Grove, Calif., 3930 Pacific Islands (Trust Territory), 4218 Pacific Northwest. See Northwest, Pacific Pacific Ocean region relations with, 3591 World War II, 3668, 3722, 3726-27 Pacific railroads, hist., 4150 Pack, Robert, 2350 Packard, Francis R., 4809 Packet boats, 4283, 5937 A Paean, 526 Pagano, Grace, ed., 5748 Page, Charles Hunt, 4542 Page, Leigh, 4715 Page, Thomas Nelson, 1 099-1 106, 2296 about, 910 Page, Walter Hines, 2296, 5145 about, 2922 Pageant of America, 3082 Paige, D. C, ed., 1664 Paine, Albert Bigelow, 771, 2917 ed., 800, 808 Paine, Gregory, 2424 ed., 2296 Paine, Nathaniel, 6447 Paine, Thomas, 154-60, 2290 about, 2617, 2647, 5408 fiction, 1977 Painters, 612, 1226, 5742, 5744, 5753- 54,5756 biog. (collected), 5730, 5745, 5748- 49. 5759 See also Artists Painting, 3751, 5595, 5597, 5601, 5741-76, 5797 abstract, 5696 Colonial period, 3747 exhibitions, 5696, 5771, 5804-5 hist., 5689, 5742, 5745, 5747, 5750-51,5755-56,5758 indexes, 5753, 5757 landscape, 5743, 5745, 5766, 5768, 5804 miniature, 5759, 5763 Plains Indians, 3018 still-life, 5744 surrealist, 5696 Paiute Indians, religion, 3019 Pakistan, relations with, 3503 Pal Joey, 2074 Pale Horse, Pale Rider, 1 661 Paleontological Society, about, 4733 Paleontology, 4721 hist., 4715, 4748 Calif., 4202 Paley, William S., about, 4683 Palmer, Alice Freeman, about, 2766 Palmer, Charles, 4949 Palmer, Elihu, about, 5408 Palmer, Frederick, 3713-14 Palmer, George Herbert, 2765-67, 5250, 5252 about, 2767 Palmer, John McAuley, 3648 Palmer, William J., about, 4150 Palmer, Winthrop B., 4971 Palmetto Country, 3953 Palmyra, N.Y., fiction, 11 57 Paltsits, Victor Hugo, ed., 6465 Palyi, Melchior, 5985 Pamphleteers, 75, 134, 138, 147, 154- 60, 662, 727, 1048, 1053 Pan American Airways, about, 5941 Pan American conferences, 3575 Panama, relations with, 3583 Panama Canal, 3559, 3575, 3577, 4014, 4218, 4221, 4796 Pancoast, Harry S., 1 09 1 Pandora, 1008 Pannill, H. Burnell, 5302 Papa La Fleur, 1459 Paperbound books, 6435, 6438, 6443- 44 Papermaking and trade, hist., 6448, 6457-58 Paquita, the Indian Heroine, 1065 The Parable of the Ten Virgins, 59 Paradise, 144 1 Paradise Lost, 2064 Pardon (1861-98), 3388 The Pardon, 1684 Parentator, 3199 The Parenticide Club, 739 Paris. Peace Conference (1919), 3111, . 3471 Paris, Americans in, 2872 Paris Bound, 2332, 2337 Paris Embassy, about, 3600, 3606 Park, Edwards A., about, 5428 Park, Robert E., 2897 Park, Willard Z., 3019 Park-Street Papers, 2491 Parker, Barbara Neville, 5763 Parker, Donald Dean, 3061 Parker, Dorothy (Rothschild), 1651-52 comp., 1429 Parker, Everett C, 4702 Parker, Florence E., 5964 Parker, Isaac Charles, about, 2656, 6220 Parker, Reginald, 6313 Parker, Theodore, about, 2279-80, 5472, 5481, 6424 Parker, William Belmont, 2768-69 ed., 463, 2769 Parkes, Henry Bamford, 3104 Parkhurst, Helen H., 5289 Parkins, Almon E., 2940 Parkman, Francis, 2281, 2290, 3069, 3171,3348 about, 2281, 3058, 3069, 3175 Parks, E. Taylor, 3585 Parks, Edd Winfield, ed., 618, 2292, 4068 Parks Mass., 3803 Rocky Mountains, 4172 S.C.,3836 See also National parks and reserves; and names of parks, e.g., Adiron- dack State Park Parmer, Charles B., 5056 Parole, 4643 Mass., 4648-49 INDEX / 1 159 Parran, Thomas, 4869 about, 4864 Parrington, Vernon Louis, 2424, 2485 about, 2407, 3058 Parrish, Lydia, 5540 Parry, Albert, 3757 Parry, Charles C, about, 4734 Parsons, Edward, ed., 27 Parsons, Elsie Clews, 5540 Parsons, Frank, about, 4530 Parsons, Geoffrey, 2903 Parsons, Robert P., 4809 Part of a Man's Life, 2280 Parties, 1828 The Partisan, 547 The Partisan Review, 2017, 2133, 2498, 2566 Parton, James, 2770-76, 2883 about, 2776 Partridge, Bellamy, 5005, 6324 Partridge, Eric, 2272, 2274 Partridge, Samuel Selden, about, 6324 Parts of a World, 1784 Paskman, Dailey, 5637 Paso por Aqui, 1686-87 A Passage in the Night, 1 194 Passage to Glory, 3154 Passage to W aid en, 609 Passaic River, 3994 The Passing of Marcus O'Brien, 1058 The Passing of the Frontier, 41 21 The Passion of Sacco and Vanzetti, 1980 Passions Spin the Plot, 1423 Pastor, A., 3169 The Pastoral Bees, 741 Pastoral manuals, 47-48 Pastures, 2780 Patchen, Kenneth, 2079-86 Patent laws and legislation, 4780-81 Patent medicines, 5955 Patent Office, about, 4767 Patents, 4780-81 Paterson, Isabel, 1904 Paterson, N.J., poetry, 1876 The Path I Trod, 6054 The Pathfinder, 258 Pathological psychiatry, 4833 Pathology, 4831 Paths to the Present, 3140 The Patient's Dilemma, 4891 Patrician and Plebeian in Virginia, 3234 Patrick, John, 2334, 2336 Patrick, Rembert W., 3384 Patriot and President, 3269 Patriotic societies, 3644 Patriotism, 4526 Patriotism in literature, 511-12, 2465 fiction, 579-82, 1730 poetry, 134-39, 146-48, 206, 368-70 short stories, 901-5, 909 Patriots (American Revolution), 3244, 3282, 3304 The Patriots, 2334, 2336 Patronage. See Spoils system Patrons of Husbandry, 3421 Patroon system, 3200 Pattee, Fred Lewis, 810, 884, 2424, 2486-90 ed., in, 138 Pattern of a Day, 1 5 1 5 The Pattern of Responsibility, 3543 Patterns of Anti-Democratic Thought, 6069 Patterson, Caleb Perry, 6147 Patterson, E. W., 5290-91 Patterson, Eleanor ("Cissy"), about, 2862 Patterson, Harry N., about, 4734 Patterson, Joseph, about, 2862 Patterson, Robert L., 230 Patterson, Robert W., 2862 Patterson family, 2862 Pauck, Wilhelm, about, 5433 Paul, Randolph E., 5970 Paul, Rodman W., 774 Paul, Sherman, 304, 483 Paul Kauvar; or Anarchy, 2347 Paulding, James Kirke, 511-19, 2295, 2337 Paulding, William Irving, 517 Paulison, Walter M., 4993 Paullin, Charles O., 2974, 3678 The Pavilion, 4912 Paviotso shamanism, 3019 Pawnee Indian tales, 3000 Paxson, Frederic L., 3105, 3463 Paxton, Harry, 4996 Payne, John Howard, 2295, 2302-3, 2337.2347 Payne, Pierre S. R., 4953 Peabody, Elizabeth P., ed., 586 Peabody, Josephine Preston, 2348 Peace in the Heart, 1724, 5087 Peace Mission movement, 5439, 5489 Peace, My Daughters, 191 7 Peach, Arthur W., ed., 157 Peake, Ora B., 3028 Peale, Charles Willson, about, 2804, 5749. 5769 Peale (Charles Willson) family, 5744 Peanuts, 2690 Pearce, Roy Harvey, 3031, 3102 ed., 2326 Peare, Catherine O., 3222 The Pearl, 1780 Pearl Harbor, 3130 The Pearl of Orr's Island, 570-71 Pearson, Norman Holmes, 276, 593, 2412 ed., 350, 356, 2321 Pearson, T. Gilbert, 2962 Peary, Robert E., 2979 about, 2979-80 Pease, Theodore Calvin, 4129, 4133 Pease, Mrs. Theodore Calvin, 4133 Peattie, Donald Culross, 1130, 2963-64 Peattie, Roderick, ed., 4172 Peck, Taylor, 3670 Peckham, Howard H., 3032-33 Pecos Bill, about, 5506 The Peculiar Institution, 3403 A Peculiar Treasure, 1403 Peden, William, ed., 153, 3279 Peder Victorious, 1722 Pediatrics, 4841 Pedlar's Progress, 186, 5266 Peek, George A., ed., 3279 Peek, George N., about, 5860 Peel, Roy V., 6381-82 Peffer, E. Louise, 5813 Peirce, Charles Sanders, 5346-49 about, 5264, 5345, 5350-53 Pellegrini, Angelo M., 2777, 4494 about, 2777 Pelopidas, 205 Peltason, J. W., 6128, 6134 Pelton, Walter J., ed., 4871 Penal colonies, Colonial period, 6056 Penard, Eugene, about, 4734 Pencillings by the Way, 677-78 Pendleton, Edmund, about, 2740 Penhally, 1465 Penn, William, 5418 about, 171, 3222, 5396, 5419 drama, 2310 Penn State Yankee, 2490 Pennell, Elizabeth (Robins), 4060, 5776 Pennell, Joseph, 4060, 5776 Penniman, Howard R., 6139 Pennock, James Roland, 6314 Pennsylvania, 4054-61 bibl., 4054 culture, 3229, 3231-32, 4054 farm life, 2891 fiction, 105-8, 1239, 1507, 1691, 1694-95, 1916, 2055, 2069, 2076- 78, 2282 folklore, 5579 folksongs & ballads, 5578-79 geography, 4057 govt., 3229-30, 4057, 6195 guidebooks, 3816-21 hist., 3280, 3962, 3993, 4043, 4054- 57 . Colonial period, 2880, 3214, 3222, 3225, 3229-32, 4490 legends, 5579 relations with Gt. Brit., 3225 Scotch-Irish, 4490 travel & travelers, 366, 4241, 4255, 4266, 4269, 4279, 4285 Pennsylvania. University, hist., 5130, 5192 Pennsylvania. University. Dept. of Medicine, hist., 4856 Pennsylvania Dutch. See Pennsylvania Germans. The Pennsylvania Gazette, about, 2854 Pennsylvania Germans, 4479-80 arts & crafts, 5594, 5599-5600 culture, 3230-31 language (dialects, etc.), 2266, 4479 literature, 2266, 4479 religion, 3230-31 Pennsylvania Hospital, Philadelphia, hist., 4850 Pennsylvania- Virginia frontier, 2673 Penobscot Indians, 301 1 Penology, 4639, 4654, 5028 Pernod, 1803 Penrod and Sam, 1802 Penrose, Boies, about, 6353 Penrose, E. F., 3562 Penson, Lilian M., 3179 Peonage laws. See Freedom of labor People Behave hike Ballads, 1295 People of Plenty, 3734 The People of the Abyss, 1053 The People, Yes, 1 73 1 The People's Choice, 6419 Il6o / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES The People's Lawyer, 2347 Pcpinsky, Harold B., 5228 Pepinsky, Pauline N., 5228 Pepper, George Wharton, 6161 Percival, Milton O., 481 Percy, William Alexander, 2778-79 about, 2779 Fere Antoine's Date-Palm, 71 1 Pere Raphael, 748 Pereida, Ralph J., illus., 5503 Performing rights (music), 5621 Periodicals. See Literature — period- icals; Magazines; Newspapers Perkin, Robert, 4176 Perkins, Dexter, 3491, 3509, 3523, 3577, 6254 Perkins, Eli, pseud., 212 Perkins, Frances, 3498 Perlman, Philip B., 4425 Perlman, Selig, 6033 Permanence and Change, 2387 The Permanent Horizon, 1 57 1 Permit Me Voyage, 1908 Perry, Bliss, 2491-92, 3732, 5221 ed., 295 about, 2922, 5221 Perry, Ralph Barton, 3733, 5260, 5334- 35 ed., 5327, 5329, 5334 Perry, Thomas Sergeant, 5304 Pershing, John J., 3715 about, 3714 Pershing Expedition (in Mexico), 3586 Persichetti, Vincent, 5687 Person, Place and Thing, 2140 Personae, 1666 Personal property law, 6271 Personalism, 631, 5265, 5317 Personality, 4568, 4572, 5289, 5291 Personnel administration, library, 6478- 80, 6483 Personnel management in industry, 6038, 6042 Persons, Stow, 5435 ed-, 3753. 3758 Persons and Places, 1737 Peru, History of the Conquest of, 2294 Pessimism in literature, 695-98, 732- 39, 768, 798-99, 1532, 1927 Peter Martyr, 3 1 53 Peter Whiffle, 1828 Peterkin, Julia Mood, 1653-55 Peters, Aimee M., comp., 937 Peters, Harry T., 5778-79 Petersburg, Va., 4406 Petersen, Elmore, 6009 Peterson, Clara Gottschalk, ed., 5679 Peterson, Elmer T., ed., 4594 Peterson, Florence, 6035 Peterson, Houston, ed., 5222 Peterson, Marcelene, 4946 Peterson, Robert E., tr., 5679 Peterson, Theodore, 2918, 2932 Peto, John Frederick, about, 5744 The Petrified Forest, 1749-50, 2327, 2348 Petrillo, James Caesar, about, 5619 Petroleum resources and industry, 2586,2731, 2746,5914 Petrology, hist., 4715 Petrullo, Vincenzo, 3020 Petry, Howard K., ed., 4804 Pewter, 5788 Peyotism, 3020 Peyton, Green, pseud. See Werten- baker, Green Peyton Peyton, John Lewis, 4350 about, 4349 Pfefrer, Leo, 5103 PfefTerkorn, Blanche, 4845 Phaedra, 21 01 Phelps, N. Y., in literature, 6324 Philadelphia Chinese, 4463 culture, 4518 drama, 198, 1202 econ. condit., 4602 epidemic (1793), 4872 essays, 1002-3 fiction, 116-17, 1333, 1336, 1345 guidebooks, 3821 historic houses, etc., 4059 hist., 3764 music & music industries, 5629 Negro religious cults, 5498 politics, 6207, 6353, 6389 soc. life & customs, 3764, 4059-60, 4251, 4258, 4263, 4283, 4602 theater, 5659 The Philadelphia Story, 1202, 2334 Philanthropy, 2689 fiction, 1568 See also Charities Philip II of Spain, 2294 Philippine Islands, annexation, 3594 Japanese conquest, 1992 relations with, 3595, 4218 Phillips, Cabell, 3615 Phillips, Charles F., 5945 Phillips, David C, 4695 Phillips, David Graham, 1 107-10 about, 2464 Phillips, Duncan, 5767 Phillips, Merton Ogden, 2940 Phillips, Orie L., 6320 Phillips, Ulrich Bonnell, 3402-5, 5828 about, 3057-58 Phillips, Wendell, 244 about, 2280, 2546, 3099 Phillips, William, ed., 2566 Phillips Academy, Andover, Mass., about, 2674 Philo, an Evangeliad, 402 The Philosopher of the Common Man, 5290 Philosophers, 3746, 5250, 5253, 5257- 58, 5265-5387 Philosophers at Court, 1 740 Philosophers Lead Sheltered Lives, 5351 Philosophy, 3728, 3747, 3751, 3758, 5250-5387 and religion, 5259, 5289, 5311, 5319, 5338, 5354, 5358, 5361, 543i, 5437 as literature, 21, 186, 280, 585, 1733 European influences, 5262 hist., 3741, 5261-62, 5334 Indian, American, 3015 Philosophy — Continued Scottish, 5337 study & teaching, 2767 The Philosophy of Composition, 520, . 538 Phinney, Eleanor, 6482 Phipps, Henry, about, 4834 Phoenix, Ariz., 4187 The Phoenix and the Tortoise, 2099 Phonographs and records, 5618, 5629 Photography hist., 5689, 5781 journalistic, 2908 Phrenology, 3752, 4516 Phyfe, Duncan, about, 5728 Physicians and surgeons, 4817-32 biog. (collected), 4804, 4807, 4822, 4844, 4856 drama, 1520 fiction, 1299, 1562, 1872 Physics, 4721 hist., 4715 Physiological chemistry, 4732 Physiology, 4818 Piano industry, 5622 The Piazza Tales, 484, 491, 493 Pickard, Karl, 4889 Pickard, Madge E., 4810 Pickard, Samuel T., 672 Pickering, Ernest, 5702 Pickett, Clarence E., 5427 about, 5427 Pickett, Ralph R., 5994 Pickford, Mary, 4955 about, 4955 Pickpockets, language (slang, etc.), 2262 Picnic, 1997, 2336 Pico, Rafael, 4222 Pictorial Americana (catalog), 5807 Pictures from an Institution, 2001 Pictures of the Floating World, 1584 A Piece of Land, 917 A Piece of My Mind, 2543 Pierce, Bessie Louise, 4136 Pierce, Edward L., 3406 Pierce, Franklin, about, 3347 Pierce, Truman M., ed., 5206 Pierce, W. H., 6207 Piercy, Josephine K., 2493 Pierre, S. D., guidebook, 3900 Pierson, George W., 4512 Pike, Kenneth L., 2275 Pike County Ballads, 942-43, 3426 Pike dialect in literature, 933, 937, 941-44, 1126 Pike's Peak theater, 4925 The Pilgrim Hawk, 1839 The Pilgrims hist., 1-6, 3204 satire, 51-52 Pilgrims through Space and Time, 2377 The Pilot, 256-57 Pinckney, Josephine, 4068 Pinckney, Pauline A., 5603 Pinckney, Mich., in literature, 415 The Pin\ Church, 1878 Piiion Country, 3956 Pinson, Koppel S., ed., 5267 Pioneer America, 5596 INDEX / Il6l Pioneers, 4186, 4199, 4211, 4213 architecture, 5719 See also Frontier and pioneer life The Pioneers, 258-60 Pioneer's Mission, 3053 Pioneer's Progress, an Autobiography , 2702, 5219 Pious and Secular America, 5399 Pipe lines (industry), 5920 Pipe Night, 2073 Piper, C. V., ed., 5821 The Piper, 2348 Pique, 2317 The Pirate, 121 1 Pirsson, Louis V., 4715 ThePisan Cantos, 1665 The Pit, 1094-95 Pitkin, W. B., 5260 about, 5327 Pittenger, W. Norman, about, 5433 Pittsburgh, 4312 econ. condit., 4591 hist., 3962, 4061 intellectual life, 3767 soc. condit., 4591 Place, Charles A., 5720 Place names, 2967 bibl., 2976 Indian, American, 2364 New York (State), 5548 Place of Hawks, 1959 Plagued by the Nightingale, 1243 Plain Folk, of the Old South, 4081 Plain Language from Truthful fames, , 933. 937 Plain People, 959, 2885 "Plain" style, Puritan, 18, 33, 45, 75 Plains. See Great Plains; High Plains; Northern Plains Plains Indians, 2799, 3006, 4164 painting, 3018 Plainville, U.S.A., 4585 Plant, Henry B., about, 4096 Plant lore, Ozark Mountains, 5544 Plant pathology, 2792 Plantation life, 4242-46, 4436, 4442 songs & music, 5677 Fla., 4293 Md., 4517 Miss., 5576 S.C., 4517, 5087 Southern States, 3402-3, 4283, 4363 Va., 3271, 4086, 3279, 4517 See also Farm and rural life Plantation life in literature descr., 1724 editorials, sketches, etc., 192-93, 1099, 1103-4, 1106 essays, familiar, 406-8 fiction, 245, 405-8, 1099, 1 105-6, 1467, 1618-19, 1653 poetry, 856-59, 86l, 1 133-3 5 short stories, 192-93, 856, 859-60, 911-16, 922, 1032-35, 1099-1102, 1 106, 1724 Ga., 911-16, 922 La., 1032 Va., 15-16, 192-93, 245, 405-8, 1099-1106 See also Farm and rural life Plantation Proverbs, 911 Planter and Patriot, 3269 Plants, 2956-57, 2959-60, 2966, 2969, 4241, 4247, 4276 prairies, 4188 Fla., 4247 Ga., 4247 Ky., 4276 New York (State), 4237-38, 4241 New World, 3155 N.C., 4247, 4276 Ohio, 4276 Pa., 4237-38, 4241 S.C., 4247, 4276 Tenn., 4276 Plaskitt, Harold, 3146 Platonism, 280, 5368 Piatt, Philip S., 4863 Piatt (Thomas C.) political machine, 6385 Play-party songs Appalachian Mountains, 5583 Middle West, 5586 Oklahoma, 5570 Ozark Mountains, 5569 Southern States, 5583 Playing Doctor (sculpture), 5739 Playing the Mischief, 277 Pleading, legal, 6282 Pleasure Dome: On Reading Modern Poetry, 2426 Plotkin, David George, ed., 3152 Plowman, Edward Grosvenor, 6009 Pluck, and Luck, 1214 The Plum Tree (Chase), 1289 The Plum Tree (Phillips), 1107 A Plumb Clare Conscience, 1684 Plunder, 1155 Plunkitt, George Washington, about, 6382 A Pluralistic Universe, 5326 Plymouth, Mass., poetry, 1222 Plymouth Colony hist., 1-6, 3204 satire, 51-52 Po' Sandy, 757 Poage, George Rawlings, 3344 Pocahontas, 2337 Pocahontas legend, 4273 See also Indians, American — legends & tales Pocahontas legend in literature, 66, 70 drama, 198-99 fiction, 251 Pochmann, Henry A., 5305 ed., 399, 2349 Poe, Edgar Allan, 520-38, 2290 about, 216, 333, 365, 381, 405, 415, 520, 533, 539-41. 614, 633, 732, 856, 1016, 1167, 1303, 1873, 2277, 2385, 2397, 2420, 2423, 2436, 2453. 2456, 2468, 2471, 2478-79, 2486,2513,2545 Poems about God, 1 675 Poems for a Son with Wings, 1295 Poems for Music, 1 5 1 6 Poems Here at Home, 1 1 27 Poems of the War, 206 Poet of the People, 1132 The Poetic Principle, 216, 520, 538 Poetry and science, 2412 anthologies, 1870, 1948, 2292, 2328, 2331. 2342, 2344, 2350, 2363, 2483,2513 elegiac, 623 epic & extended narrative, 101, 104, 118-21, 165, 167, 427, 429, 432- 33, 1222, 1224, 1434, 1532-34, 1585, 1644-45, I 7 I 3 _I 4> 1824-25, 1876, 2134, 2200 ethical themes in, 1872, 2007, 2189 experimental, 1303-4, 1306, 1309, 1313. 1357. 1359. M32, 1583-84. 1620-21, 1664-66, 1766, 1782, 1784, 1872, 2034, 2079, 2098 hist. & crit., 2544 "genteel tradition," 2513, 2545 hist. & crit., 520, 614, 1044, 1226, 1236, 1238, 1304, 1306, 1482, 1668, 1670-75, 1678-79, 1717-19, 1809-10, 1905, 2105, 2128, 2191, 2357. 2374, 2378-79, 2403-4, 2413-14, 2426, 2452, 2484, 2491, 2513, 2527, 2533 humanitarian, 1061, 1069, 1872, 2079 humorous, 368, 456-58, 680, 878- 80, 933, 941-44, 1126-32, 1629- 34. 1651-52 See also Verse, light; Verse, ver- nacular metaphysical, 2497, 2499 music in relation to, 1038, 1044-46, 1580 neo-classical, 2215, 2544 pastoral, 1451-52 periodicals, 2567 periods Colonial, 7— 11, 72-74, 79-83, 2483 (1764-1819), 101-4, 118-21, 134- 43, 146-48, 165-67 (1820-70), 206-8, 216-21, 223- 25, 280, 288-90, 323-29, 365, 368-70, 427-29. 431-44. 449- 59, 464-67, 469, 486, 488, 491, 494. 520-27, 530, 533, 536-38, 546, 585. 598, 614-17, 619-30, 636-37, 639-42, 644-46, 662, 664, 666-71, 673, 675, 679-81 (1871-1914), 706, 714, 821, 831, 833, 835-36, 838-46, 852, 856- 59, 861, 878-80, 926, 933-34, 941-44, 984, 1038-43, 1946-47. 1061-64, 1066-67, 1069, 1071, 1126-35 (1915-39), 1153-54, n6i, 1166, 1 196, 1222, 1224, 1227, 1230, 1232, 1236-37, 1290, 1295-97, 1303-4, 1306-9, 1313-14. 1319- 24, 1350-52, 1357. 1359. 1379. 1409-10, 1432-35. 1451-52, 1480-83, 1512, 1515-17, 1521, 1530-38, 1540, 1556, 1558, 1580-86, 1588, 1599-1601, 1608-9, 1614, 1620-21, 1623- 27, 1629-35, 1644-45, 1651- 52, 1664-66, 1675-77, 1679, 1697, 1699, 1713-14, 1724, 1727. i73i. 1733-34. 1740, Il62 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Poetry — Continued periods — Continued ( '9I5 _ 39) — Continued 1766, 1782, 1784, 1809, 1811, 1813-14, 1821-27, 18507-59, 1863, 1870-72, 1876, 1878, 1881, 1883, 1885, 1902-3, 1905-6 (1940-55), 1907-8, 1916, 1919, 1923-26, 1948-53. 1959. 1968, 1970-72, 1981-83, 1999, 2002, 2007-10, 2034-35, 2037, 2039, 2060-62, 2095, 2098-2100, 2102-6, 2123-24, 2126, 2133- 34, 2138-44, 2166, 2172, 2189- 93, 2196, 2200, 2215-17 political verse, 134-39, 456-57, 662, 664, 1069 psychological, 1357 realistic, 612, 1290, 1295-97, 1727, 1731 religious, 72-73, 79-83, 662, 680, 1357, 1359, 1369. 1537-38 1540, 2034-35, 2037, 2039 satiric, 120, 134-38, 148, 165, 167, 323,456-57,2189 essays, 2465, 2467 sentimental, 1 126-31 sonnets, 206, 427, 1608, 1623-27, 1972 structure, 2379 surrealist, 2034 theories, 216, 280, 520, 538, 614, 618, 620, 1038, 1044-46, 1196, 1783, 2142, 2476, 2484 vernacular, 753-55. 933~34> 941-44. 1 1 26-3 1 See also Ballads; Folk ballads; Verse drama Poetry: a Magazine of Verse, 2139, 2760 Poetry and the Age, 2000 Poetry in Our Time, 2414 Poetry in the Theater, 1 1 75 A Poet's Life, 2761 The Poet's Testament, 1740 Poganuc People, 576 Pohl, Frederick J., 3172 Point four program. See Technical as- sistance Point of No Return, 1596 The Point of View, 1008 Points of View, 2504 Poland, fiction, 1992 Polar exploration, 2977-81, 3669 Poles (Polanders), 4435, 4495 Poletti, Charles, 6080 Police, 3644a, 4498, 4642, 4655, 4659- 60 Political bosses, 3438, 6207, 6333, 6337- 38, 6346, 6382, 6384-91 Political campaigns, 6149, 6333, 6336, 6340-41, 6362 (1884), 6373 (1932-40), 6364 (1948), 6414 funds, 6341, 6407, 6410 literature, 6348-49, 6394, 6410 Political candidates, 6333-34 Political clubs, 3300 New York (City), 6381 Political conventions, 3400, 6149, 6340, 6361 Political economy. See Economics Political ethics, 3760, 6342-44 Political influences on literature, 2485 Political leaders and leadership, 3416, 3460, 3494, 3496 Political machines. See Machine poli- tics Political parties, 3139, 3320, 4499, 6078, 6134, 6147, 6335-38, 6340, 6347- 73. 6398, 6416, 6419, 6427 discipline, 6341, 6354-55, 6381-82, 6384,6389 hist., 6076, 6149, 6347 platforms, 6341, 6366-67 New York (State), 4044 Southern states, 6376 Political psychology, 6345, 6349, 6354 Political science, 5279 hist., 3760 Political themes in literature drama, 11 72, 11 76 editorials, sketches, etc., 422, 465, 467, 512, 546, 663, 862, 1048, 1103-4, 1107, 1739, 1859, 2278 fiction, 277, 422, 689-90, 722, 762, 775-77, 1 107, 1155-56, 1566, 1792, 2025, 2027, 2148, 2197, 2278 periods Colonial, 75-78, 84, 92-95 (1764-1819), 101, 103-4, I54 - 60 (1820-70), 252, 261-62, 265- 67, 585-86, 593, 604-5, 607-8, 619, 631 poetry, 134-39, 456-57. 662, 664, 1069 satire, 147-48, 422-25, 558, 862, 1792 Political thought, 3073, 3099, 3758, 4556, 6059-72, 6074, 6170, 6382, 6402 hist., 6062, 6070 Colonial period, 3182, 3199, 3747 1 8th cent., 3187, 3256-59, 3261, 3279, 3283, 3300, 6075, 6085 19th cent., 3319, 6064, 6066, 6101 20th cent., 3487, 3492, 3499- 3500, 6101 Southern States, 6059 The Politician Out-Witted, 2347 The Politicos, 3438 Politics, 3616, 4499, 4502, 6133-34, 6137, 6139, 6333-46, 6357, 6389- 92, 6396, 6418, 6421, 6426 Corruption. See Corruption (in pol- itics) Dutch, 4493 hist., 2677 American Revolution, 3187, 3252,3277, 3279 Civil War, 3382, 3400, 3416, 3435.3441 Colonial period, 3187, 3194, 3256, 3261 Politics — Continued hist. — Continued 18th cent., 3141, 3279, 3281, 3285-86, 3303 19th cent., 3141, 3275, 3286, 3303. 3313. 3319. 3322- 26, 3333, 3337. 3339, 3352- 53, 3356-58, 3397. 3408-10, 3412,3417,3421,3423,3431, 3436, 3438, 3442, 3444, 3447, 3450, 4312, 4315-17, 4334. 4515,4664 20th cent., 3453, 3456, 3458, 3460, 3463, 3465-67, 2469- 70, 3472-75. 3478-79. 3496, 3498, 3500a, 3548, 3613, 4405-8, 4515, 6076, 6165 public relations. See Public rela- tions — politics See also subdivisions History and Politics under names of places and regions, e.g., Illinois — hist.; Maine — politics Politics and the press, 2846, 2884, 2888, 2919, 2924, 2931 cartoons, 2859, 2917 Baltimore, Md., 2876 Hartford, Conn., 2875 New York (City), 2868-69, 2921 Ohio, 2857 Oreg., 2863 Tex., 2866 See also Presidents and the press Polk, Alma Forrest, 4443 Polk, James Knox, 3349, 3351 about, 3350-51, 3540 Pollack, Queena, 2668 Pollak, Gustav, 2921 Pollard, James E., 2911, 2930 Pollard, John A., 662 Pollard, Joseph P., 6251 Pollock, Sir Frederick, 2607 Pollock, J. K., 6336 Pollock, Thomas C, ed., 1898 Polls. See Public opinion- — research Polly, 1 1 00-2 Polo, 5058 Polynesian life, fiction, 470-78 "Polyphonic prose," 1432, 1583 Pomeroy, Wardell B., 4565 Ponce de Leon, about, 3158 Pond, Frederick E., ed., 5077 The Ponder Heart, 2208 Pont each, 2347 Pontiac (Ottawa chief), about, 3030, 3033,3171 Pony Express, 4661 Pool, David de Sola, 4457, 5427 about, 5427 Poole, Ernest, 1656-58 Poole, Kenyon E., ed., 5971 Poor Aubrey, 2332 Poor laws, R.I., 4632 Poor Richard Improved, 131 Poor Richard's Almanack^, 122, 131 Poor White, 1 1 80 Poor whites (South) in literature fiction, 1180, 1270, 1391, 1775, 1777, 2090 short stories, 910, 917-21, 1270, 1275 INDEX / 1 1 63 Poorhouses, 4310 Pope, Bertha, ed., 738 Pope, Jennie Barnes, 5951 Pope, Liston, 4702 Pope-Hennessy, Una, ed., 4300 Popular books, 2384, 2434, 2482, 5126 See also Bestsellers Popular music and songs, 4935, 4973> 5635-40, 6443 bibl., 5613, 5639 hist., 5635, 5639 Population, 4390-4403, 4551, 4617 cities & towns, 4393 Colonial period, 4398 Indian, 2985, 3012, 3022, 3043 maps, 2937, 2972, 2974, 2985 stat., 3786, 4403 Ga., 4095 Milwaukee, 4140 Mo., 4108 Ohio, 41 19 S.C., 4092 Wis., 4139 See also Foreign population; Migra- tion, internal Populism, 3421, 3427, 3458, 6356, 6358,6368,6427 Populist Party, about, 6358 Porgy, 1512-13,2332 Porgy and Bess (opera), 1512, 5678 Port Arthur, Tex., 3922 Portage, Wis., 3884 fiction, 1453 Portals of Tomorrow, 1959 Porter, Cole, about, 5639 Porter, Katherine Anne, 1659-63, 2372 about, 1663 Porter, Kenneth Wiggins, 6024 Porter, Keyes, 5606 Porter, Kirk H., 6204, 6409 comp., 6367 Porter, Mae Reed, 3330 Porter, Thomas C, about, 4734 Porter, William Sydney (O. Henry), 1111-25, 2296 about, 926, 11 11, 2486 Porter, William T., 5542 ed., 4097 Portland, Maine, guidebook, 3795 Portland, Or eg., 4150 Portrait for Posterity, 3395 Portrait of a Gentleman Seating (paint- ing)- 5774 The Portrait of a Lady, 989-91 Portrait of an American, 1291 Portrait of Jennie, 1639 Portraits, 5735, 5759, 5763, 5769, 5771, 5774-76, 5804 Portraits of Places, 1093 Portsmouth, N.H., 4261 Portsmouth, Va., 4263 "Posson Jone," 748 Post Office Dept. and postal service, 4661-71 Postal, Bernard, 4461 Postscript to Yesterday, 3746 The Pot of Earth, 1586 Potiphar Papers, 2278 Potofsky, Jacob S., 5426 about, 5426 Potomac River, 4008 Potsdam Conference, 3544 Potter, Alfred Claghorn, 6470 Potter, Alonzo, about, 5457 Potter, David M., 3734 ed., 3106 Potter, Elmer B., ed., 3671 Potter, William J., 5435 Potter's Field, 1475 Pottery, 5596, 5791-92, 5796 Indian, 2723 Pound, Arthur, 4138, 5940 Pound, Ezra, 1664-68 about, 1670-74, 2426, 2497 bibl., 1669 Pound, Louise, ed., 635, 2330 Pound, Roscoe, 4649, 6223, 6231, 6233, 6251, 6268, 6272, 6290, 6302, 6304-5, 6325 Pounds, Norman J. G., 2939 Poverty, 4617, 4626, 4630 prevention, 4634 relief, 4634 New York (City), 4638 R.I., 4632 Powder River, 3971 Powderly, Terence V., 6054 about, 6054 Powdermaker, Hortense, 4948 Powell, John H., 4872 Powell, John Wesley, 4757 about, 2161, 4757 Power, Richard Lyle, 41 17 Power and Glory, 6353 Power and Policy, 3623 Powers, Alfred, 3959 Pragmaticism, 5345 Pragmatism, 31 15, 4545, 5254~55. 5259, 5291, 5324-25, 5327, 5332- 34. 5345-50. 5352 and evolution, 5264 and science, 5254 hist., 5254, 5281 Prahl, A. J., 4481 The Prairie, 258 Prairie City, 4171 The Prairie Schooner, about, 2925 The Prairie Years, 1728, 3395 Prairies travel & travelers, 4350 111., 4322 Southwest, 4188 The Praise of Folly, and Other Papers, 2492 Pratt, Dorothy, 5721-22 Pratt, Edwin J., 3536 Pratt, Fletcher, 3722 ed., 4381 Pratt, J.B., 5255 about, 5325 Pratt, Julius W., 3058, 3306, 3449, 4218 Pratt, Marion Dolores, ed., 3390 Pratt, Richard, 5721-22 Pratt, Richard N., about, 3035 Prayers of the Social Awakening, 5482 The Preacher and the Slave, 2164 Preacher tales Brazos River, Tex., 5527 Mich., 5535 Precipitation (meteorology), 5816 Predilections, 1622 Preface to Life, 1457 A Preface to Logic, 5267 Prehistoric man, 2995-96, 4202 Prehistory. See Archaeology and pre- history Preludes and Symphonies, 1433 Preludes for Memnon, 1 166 Premedical education, 4861 Presbyterians, 5404, 5442 biog. (collected), 5466 hist., 5414, 5466 Preschool education, 5148 See also Kindergartens Prescott, Frederick G., ed., 2291 Prescott, Samuel C, about, 4785 Prescott, William Hickling, 2294, 2534 about, 2277 Prescription for Rebellion, 271 6 Presidency, 3399, 6140-49, 6184, 6340, 6370, 6422 and the press, 2861, 2930 candidates for, 2817, 2819 Continental Congress (1774-89), 6083 foreign affairs, 3604, 3610-11 functions, 6140-41, 6151 powers of, 3472 See also Executive branch The President Makers, 3460 Presidential Agent, 1758 Presidential elections. See Elections Presidential Mission, 1758 Presidential primaries, 6408 Presidents, U.S. See names of Presi- dents, e.g., Adams, John Quincy President's Advisory Committee on Government Housing Policies and Programs, 461 1 The President's Cabinet, 6145 President's Commission on Higher Ed- ucation, 3113, 5189 President's Commission on Immigration and Naturalization, 4425 President's Commission on the Health Needs of the Nation, 4862 President's Communications Policy Board, 471 1 The President's Lady, 2820 President's Research Committee on So- cial Trends, 6194 President's Scientific Research Board, 4779 Press, 2847, 2858, 2904-5, 2907 associations, 2849, 2860, 2864, 2890 bibl., 2931 business, 2902 Dutch, 4493 foreign language, 2895-99 law, 2932 Ukrainian, 4492 Southern States, 2853 Washington, D.C., 2861, 4065 See also Freedom of the press; Gov- ernment and the press; Magazines; Newspapers; Politics and the press; Society and the press Presses, printing. See Printing Pressly, Thomas J., 3407 1 164 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Pressure groups, 6139, 6201, 6218, 6335-38, 6343, 6357, 6392-99 Prestage, E., 3 1 69 Preston, Captain, about, 3279 A Pretty Story, 147 Preventive medicine, 4815, 4826, 4864, 4873-74 Price, Don K., 4776, 6216 Price, Harry Bayard, 3640 Price, Robert, 5519 Priest, Loring Benson, 3034 Priestley, Herbert Ingram, 3086 Primaries, 6406 presidential, 6408 Primary education, 5148, 5150 See also Elementary education Prime, William C, 5086 Primer for America, 1295 Primer f 01 Combat, 1247 Primitivism and Decadence, 2544 Primitivism in art, 5595, 5597, 5601 Prince, Morton, about, 5392 Prince Ananias (operetta), 5681 Prince Deucalion, 2282 A Prince in Their Midst, 4293 The Prince of Parthia, 144-45, 2337, 2347 Prince of Players, 4938 The Princess Bob and Her Friends, 930 Princeton, 111., guidebook, 3880 Princeton College, 2673 Princeton University, about, 3470, 3472, 5204, 5221 The Principles of Literary Criticism, about, 2407 The Principles of Psychology, 5322 Pringle, Henry F., 3464, 3467, 4785 Printers biog. (collected), 6446-47 early, 122, 130, 6442 Printing, 6446, 6448, 6455, 6459 hist., 6436, 6440, 6442, 6447, 6456, 6459, 6464 public, 6452 trade unions, 6455 university presses, 6437-39 New England, 3745 Philadelphia, 3764 Prints, 5778-80, 5782-83 See also Engravings Prisons, 4310, 4639-41, 4652 hist., 4653-54 Mass., 4648 New York, 4653 Prisons (military) fiction, 1544 personal narratives, 1310 Pritchard, John Paul, 2494 Pritchett, Charles H, 6252-53 Pritchett, Henry S., 4999 The Private Dining Room, 1634 Private enterprise. See Free enterprise The Private Life, 1012 Private schools, 5155,5217 fiction, 1940, 1944 See also Academies (schools); Sem- inaries (schools) Probability, theory of, 5346 Probation. See Parole Prochazka, Anne, about, 4854 Prochnow, Herbert V., ed., 5972 Proctor, Frederick Freeman, about, 4975 The Professor's House, 1 277 about, 1278 The Professor's Story, 375 Profiles from the New Yorker, 2565 The Profits of Religion, 1754 Progress, idea of, 3754 Progress and Poverty, 4535 The Progress of Dullness, 165, 167 A Progress to the Mines, 13 Progressive education, 5104, 5131, 5198, 5217,5234,5236,5239 Progressive Education Association. Commission on the Relation of School and College, 51 3 1 Progressive Party, 6350, 6362, 6427 Progressivism and the Progressive movement, 1048, 3433, 3446, 3453, 3458, 3467, 3473, 3489. 4202, 6340, 6362, 6424, 6426-27 Prohibition, 4523 Prohibition Party, platforms, 6367 Prokosch, Frederic, 2087-97 The Promised Land, 2585 Pronunciation, 2238, 2246, 2273, 2364 Propaganda, 3462, 3561, 3607, 6336- 37, 6341, 6348-49, 6357, 6393- 94 Property rights, 601 1, 6060, 6094, 6101, 6105 The Prophet (Asch), 1190 The Prophet (Taylor), 2282 Prophet in the Wilderness, 2682 The Prophet of the Great Smoky Moun- tains, 1087-88 Proportional representation, 6059, 6134, 6402 Prospect of the Future Happiness of America, 121 Prosperity, economic, 4502 Prosser, Charles A., 5211 Prostitution Chicago, 2836 New York (City), 4597 Protective tariff. See Tariff Protestant churches, 5404-5, 5441-42 hist., 5492-93 music, 5631 segregation, 5499 soc. problems, 5485-89, 5492-93 Protestant Episcopal Church. See Epis- copal Church Protestants and Protestantism, 3040, 4515, 5394, 5404, 5425, 5438, 5441, 5495 Proud Riders, 13 14 Prout, Henry G., 4790 Provencal poetry, translations, 1664, 1667 Proverbs, 551 1 Miss., 5547 New York (State), 5548 N.C., 5536 Providence, R.I., soc. life & cust., 1 8th cent., 4261 Provincetown Playhouse, 1647, 1762, 4916 Provincialism, 896-97 Provo, Utah, 3915 Prucha, Francis Paul, 3663 Prue and I, 2278 Prufrock,, 1359 Psychiana, 5439 Psychiatric hospitals, 4833-38 Psychiatry, 4722, 5409 forensic, 4840 military, 4833 nursing, 4835 research, 4833, 4835-36, 4838 study & teaching, 4835-36, 4838, 4840, 4859 Psychical research, 5323 Psychoanalysis, 2716-18, 5389 Psychological influences and themes in literature drama, 1519, 1647-48 hist. & crit., 2506 fiction, 365, 375, 727, 986-1001, 1004, 1149, 1163, 1379, 1470, 1927, 1944-45, 1954, 2017-18, 2021, 2023, 2052, 2107-8, 2128, 2130, 2156, 2174-76, 2178, 2184, 2224, 2415 personal narrative, 1557 poetry, 1357, 1623-27 short stories, 1929, 1944, 1946, 2128, 2176-77, 2179 Psychology, 5272, 5322-23, 5340-41, 5388-93 and pragmatism, 5254 educational, 5123, 5229, 5307 experimental, 5391 faculty, 5307 functional, 5389 Gestalt, 5389, 5392 hist., 5388, 5392-93 pathological, 4833 physiological, 5391 political. See Political psychology religious, 25 social, 3724 testing, 5229, 5247 therapy, 4840 Public administration, 6134-35, 6139, 6170-72, 6174, 6178, 6179-81, 6184,6188,6198,6204 Public assistance, Negroes, 4448 Public debts. See Debts, public Public defenders, 6329-30 Public domain. See Public lands Public education, 4095, 5106 administration, 5135, 5i39> 5 2 4°, 5307 buildings, 5240 criticism, 5226, 5232-33, 5235-39 curricula, 5136, 5158, 5224-25, 5235>5237.5240 directory, 5 112 experiments & innovations, 5158, 5224, 5235, 5237, 5240 finances, 5135, 5144 function, 5134 govt, relations, 51 41, 5144 hist., 5122, 5125, 5137-38, 5140, 5143 laws & legislation, 5143, 6138-39 local control, 5099, 5141 methods, 5236 objectives, 5124, 5136, 5146 INDEX / 1 165 Public education — Continued organization, 5135 problems, 5240 programs, 5136 school buildings, 5240 soc. aspects, 5136-38, 5140, 5146 sources, 5125, 5138-39 state control, 5141 stat., 51 14 surveys, 51 14 teachers, 5105, 5132-34, 5216 theories, 5237 Concord, Mass., 5220 Mass., 5125 Va., 5122 Public finance. See Finance, public Public health, 4617, 4808, 4823, 4829, 4831, 4841-42, 4858, 4862-81 Indians, 3023 laws, 4876 stat., 4862 Ala., 4099 Baltimore, 4867 Chicago, 4864 Ga., 4095 See also Health services; Medicine — charities Public Health Service, 4847, 4864, 4878 about, 4765, 4880 The Public Is Never Wrong, 4963 Public lands, 2970, 3237, 5809, 581 1, 5813-14,5817 Public libraries, 6440-41, 6472, 6474, 6480, 6482-83 hist., 6474 personnel, 6479 Public Library Inquiry, 6441, 6452, 6477, 6479-80 Public opinion, 3462, 3609, 3615, 4405, 4499, 4550, 4554 and the press, 2858, 2868, 2884, 2927 research, 4700, 6417, 6423 France, 3775 Russia, 3561 Public opinion polls. See Public opin- ion — research Public records, 3079 bib!., 3067 preservation & management, 3063 Public relations, politics, 6341, 6345, 6348 Public Speech, 1586 Public utilities, 6004, 6013 Public welfare, 4618, 4621, 4630-31, 4634 services, 4095 R.I., 4632 Publishers and publishing, 2391, 6435- 38, 6440-41, 6444-46, 6449-53 Colonial, 122 directory (before 1889), 5611 music, 5635 periodicals, 2852, 2855, 2915 See also Newspapers — policies & practices Boston, 5628 Nashville, 3765 Philadelphia, 5629 Publishers' Weekly, about, 6445 431240—60 75 Puckett, Newbell Niles, 5561 Pueblo Indians architecture, 5723 govt, relations, 3035 Puerto Ricans, 4428, 4470 in Brooklyn, 4046 Puerto Rico, 4222 guidebook, 3941 Puerto Rico Reconstruction Adminis- tration, 3941 Puleston, William D., 3672 Pulitzer, Joseph, about, 2848, 2889 Pulitzer prizes, 2869, 2889 Pullman strike (1894), 3133, 3439 Pulszky, Ferencz Aurelius, 4360-62 about, 4360 Pulszky, Terezia (Walder), 4360-62 about, 4360 Punch, 209 Punch: The Immortal Liar, 11 66 Pu passe, 1035 The Pupil, 1007, 1014 Pupin, Michael I., 4791 about, 4791 The Puppet Master, 1635 Puppets and puppeteers, 2472, 4981 Purcell, Ralph, 5697 Purcell, Theodore V., 6055 A Puritan in Babylon, 3481 The Puritan Pronaos, 3745 Puritan Sage, 31 The Puritan Way of Life, 2345 Puritans and Puritanism, 43, 2345, 3131. 3733. 3742-43. 3745. 5394. 5428 music, 5633 Mass., 3178, 3182, 3197, 3235 Puritans and Puritanism in literature, 7-1 1. 17-35. 40-50, 53-55. 59-65, 72-95, 2441 anthologies, 2345 controversial writings, 17, 20, 86, 89 drama, 198, 200, 1069-70 essays, 2401, 2424, 2486, 2503 fiction, 333, 562, 1730, 2293 poetry, 7-11, 72-74, 79-83, 2483 sermons, 18, 21, 24, 33, 35, 59-62, 65 short stories, 333, 562 See also The Pilgrims; Separatists The Puritans as Literary Artists, 2345 The Purloined Letter, 529 Pusey, Merlo J., 6254 Putnam, Carleton, 3467 Putnam, George Palmer, 4205 Putnam, Herbert, about, 6469 Putney, Cornelia F., 5589 Puttkammer, Ernst W., 6303 Putz, Louis J., ed., 5447 Puyallup Indians, 3041 Pyle, Ernie, 2745 about, 2745 Pyles, Thomas, 2250 Pylon, 1387 Quacks and quackery, 1155, 4806, 4810-1 1, 4860 Quadrille (dance), 5587, 5590 Quaife, Milo Milton, 4137 ed., 3349 Quaker Oats Co., about, 5835 Quakers and Quakerism, 3222, 4038, 4258 in literature, 178-85, 662, 1343, 221 1 See also Friends, Society of Qualey, Carlton C, 4487 Quare Medicine, 1475 Quarries and quarrying, 2991 Quarterly Review of Literature, 2568 Queen, Ellery, pseud., 2436 Queen Anne's War (1702-13), 3171 Queeny, John F., about, 4735 Queries, of Highest Consideration, 89 The Quest for Certainty, 5280 Quia Pauper Amavi, 1666 Quiet Cities, 1510 Quiet, Please, 1268 Quiett, Glenn Chesney, 4150 Quigley, Thomas H., 521 1 Quillian, W.F., Jr., 3758 Quilts, 5604 Quimby, George I., 2993 Quincy, Josiah, 6475 Quinn, Arthur Hobson, 2337, 2495-96, 3735, 4904-5 ed., 145, 170, 200, 205, 208, 536, 1070, 1855, 2496 Quinn, Bernetta, 2497 Quinn, David B., 3223 ed., 3223 Quinn, Kerker, ed., 2551 Quint, Howard H., 6368 Quite So, 711 Quo Vadimus, 1861 The Quorndon Hounds, 5080 Quotations, 3152 R Rabbi in America, 5483 Rabbis, 4458 Rabble in Arms, 1708-9 Race question, 2811-12, 2839-40, 3399, 3404, 4426-27, 4430-34, 4443, 4447, 4550, 4617, 4619, 6106, 6117, 6121, 6129, 6379 Race question in literature, 1 653 essays & studies, 1103-4, 2364 fiction, 722, 756, 789-93, 1099, 1 105, 1569, 1653, 1759-60, 1914- x 5> x 939> 201 1, 2045, 2050-51 personal narratives, 1522, 1539 poetry, 856-58, 1133-35, 1537-38, 1540 short stories, 756—58, 856, 910, 1099- 1102, 1523-25 See also Slavery in literature Racing. See Automobile racing; Horse- racing; Motorboat racing; Yacht racing Racketeering, 2274, 4652 Rackman, Emanuel, 4458 The Racquet Game, 5046 Radar, 3675 Radiation, 4722 Radical empiricism, 5327 Radical Republicans, 3361, 3377, 3412 Il66 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Radicalism, 3139, 3253, 3255, 3262, 3303. 3425. 3427. 6039, 6130, 6426 Radin, Max, 6268 Radin, Paul, 2407 Radio and radio broadcasting, 4682, 4684, 4686, 4691, 4695, 4697-98, 4700-1,4703.4965 advertising, 4696 audiences, 4700-1, 4703, 4895 drama, 4966 hist., 4519, 4690, 4693 in education, 5230-31 in religion, 4702 industry, 4683, 4687 journalists, 2848 law & regulations, 4706-9 Radisson, Pierre Esprit, about, 2831, 317c Raeder, Ole Munch, 4348 about, 4347 Rael, Juan Bautista, 5537 Raesly, Ellis Lawrence, 3224 Rafinesque, Constantine Samuel, about, 4721 Ragan, Allen E., 6255 Rage for Order, 2529 Rage of the Soul, 2806 A Rage to Live, 2076 Ragusin, Anthony, 3946 Rahab, 1446 Rahv, Philip, 994, 2498 ed., 1007, 2566 Railroadmen, songs & music, 5512, 5559,5562 Railroads, 2580, 2937, 4312, 5920, 5922, 5924-27 biog. (collected), 5927 fiction, 1093 folklore, 5512 frontier, 4156 hist., 5923, 5927 law, 6236 mountain, 4174 New England, 5933 Northwest, Pacific, 4214 The West, 4139 Wis., 4139 Railton, G. S., about, 5497 Rain from Heaven, 1207 Rainbow on the Road, 1444 Raintree County, 2006 Raisz, Erwin, 4172 maps, 3161, 3164, 3298 Raivaaia Publishing Company, about, 2896 Raiziss, Sona, 2499 Rajan, Balachandra, ed., 1367 Raleigh, Walter, Sir, about, 3"23 Raleigh, N.C., 3833 Rail, Harris Franklin, about, 5433 Ralston, William Chapman, about, 2660 Ramona, 985 The Rampaging Frontier, 4097 Ramsaye, Terry, 4944 Ramsdell, Charles W., 4068 Ramsey, Frederic, ed., 5644 Ranch life, 2794, 4152-54, 4161-63, 4174.4196,5503 Randall, David A., 6464 Randall, James G., 6081 Randall, Henry S., 3296-97 Randall, J. H., Jr., 3065, 5289-90 Randall, James G., 3388, 3394~95. 3408 Randolph, John, about, 2617, 2621 Randolph, Vance, 2270, 5543 - 45 ed., 5569 Raney, William Francis, 4139 Rankin, Daniel S., 759 Rankin, Hugh F., 3244 Rankin, Rebecca B., 6214 Ransom, John Crowe, 1675-79,2512 about, 2499, 2544, 2559 Rare books, 6462, 6464 Raritan River, 3994 Raskin, A. H, 6207 Ratchford, Benjamin U., 5891 Rathbone, Perry T., 5805 The Rational Study of the Classics, 5"5 The Rationale of Verse, 520 Ratner, Joseph, ed., 5120, 5287 Ratner, Sidney, 5290-91, 5970 Rats, Lice and History, 2843 Rauch, Basil, 3492 ed., 3494 Raudebaugh, Charles, 6207 Rauschenbusch, Walter, 5482 about, 5396, 5436, 5443, 5482 The Raven and Other Poems, 530 The Raven and the Whale, 2478 Raw Material, 1551 Rawlings, Marjorie (Kinnan), 1680-85 about, 1685 Rawson, Marion (Nicholl), 4531 Ray, Sarah Paulding, 6267 Rayburn, Otto Ernest, 3960 Raymond, Henry Jarvis, about, 2848, 2869 Razzle Dazzle, 2114 Reactionary Essays on Poetry and Ideas, 1810 Read, Conyers, ed., 6082 The Reader's Digest, about, 2919-20 Reading Modern Poetry, 1968 Reading the Spirit, 1351 Real estate business, 5812, 5815 Real property law, 6278 The Real Right Thing, 10 12 Realism in literature drama, 1518, 1647, 1688, 1995, 2043, 2063 fiction, 277, 821, 867, 887, 956, 959, 964, 986, 1372, 1379, 1445, 1453, 1460, 1494, 1559, 1571, 1611, 1647, 1720, 1743, 1754, 1775, 1792, 1940, 1954, 1992, 2003, 2011, 2025, 2069, 2128, 2229 hist. & crit., 2276, 2364, 2401, 2424, 2485 poetry, 1290, 1727 short stories, 821, 881, 890, 986, 1 149, 1379, 1453, 1494, 1796, 2011, 2071-73, 2128, 2210 theories, 890, 964, 977 See also Naturalism in literature — fiction Reality, 5379 Realms of Being, 5371 about, 5375 Realms of Value, 5334 Reason and Law, 5269 Reason and Nature, 5268 Reason in Madness, 1810 Reason the Only Oracle of Man, 5408 Rebel withotit a Cause, 2717 Rebels and Ancestors, 2430 Rebels and Democrats 3241 Rebels and Gentlemen, 3764 Rebels and Redcoats, 3244 The Rebuilding of Old Commonwealths, 5M5 Recamier, Marie, 2281 Recollections and Impressions, 2279 Recollections of Europe, 263 Recollections of the Last Ten Years, 308-9 Reconstruction, 3093, 3120, 3141, 3361— 63. 3372, 3377, 3385. 3387-88, 3408,3412,3416-17,4077 editorials, sketches, etc., 556 fiction, 1105, 1382, 1618-19 reminiscences, 277, 2828-30 short stories, 11 51, 1389 sources, 3376 Reconstruction in Philosophy, 5276 Recreation, 4983-5097 areas, 3786 See also Parks community, 4997-98 Plains Indians, 3006 si icial aspects, 4998 Mass., 3803 Mitchell, S. Dak., 3899 Northwest, Pacific, 4214 San Diego, Calif., 3932 See also Games and dances Recreations of an Anthologist, 2467 The Red Badge of Courage (motion pic- ture), about, 4949 The Red Badge of Courage (novel), 821. 825-29, 835-36 Red Bird, 1556 Red, Black, Blond, and Olive, 2535 Red Cloud (Sioux chief), about, 3003 Red Cross, American, hist., 4620 The Red Decade, 3490 Red Jacket, 323 The Red Mill (operetta), 5681 Red: Papers on Musical Subjects, 1828 The Red Pony, 1780 Red River valley, 3954 Red Rock, II0 5 Red Roses for Bronze, 132 1 Red Sand, 1792 Red Sky in the Morning, 1290 Red Wine & Yellow Hair, 2086 Redburn, about, 498 Redfield, Robert, 4472 The Re-discovery of America, 1445 The Redskins, 268 Redwood, 3959 Reebel, Dan, 5918 Reed, Alfred Zantzinger, 6326-27 Reed, David W., 2260 Reed, Henry Hope, 4609 Reed, Louis S., 4811 Reed, Mark, 2333 INDEX / 1 167 Reed, Walter about, 4872 drama, 1520 Reed, William Gardner, 5816 The Reef, 1849 Reese, Albert, 5780 Reese, Lizette Woodworth, 2780-81 about, 2781 Reese, M. Lisle, 3896 Reeve, Henry, tr., 4510-12 Reeves, Jesse S., 3540 Reflections at fifty, 1378 Reflections in a Golden Eye, 2023-24 Reform and reform movements, 4614, 6424-34 19th cent., 3430-31, 3446, 3769, 4522, 4530, 4535, 4537, 6360 20th cent., 3446, 3455, 3458, 6360, 6362 See also Muckrakers Reform Judaism, 5459 Reformatories. See Prisons The Reformed Church, about, 5442 The Reformed Presbyterian Church, about, 5466 Refrigerators and refrigerating ma- chinery, 4794 Refugees, political, 4263, 4289, 4481 since 1933, 4407, 4414, 4419 Regier, Cornelius C, 6430 Regional characteristics, 4230, 4283 See also Culture Regional libraries, 6471 Regionalism, 1809, 3781, 3783, 3785, 3942, 4079 in art, 5748 Regionalism and local color in litera- ture editorials, sketches, etc., 192-93, 445- 48, 542-45, 556-61, 612-13, 701- 5, 716-17, 1064-65, 1068, 1072, 1090, 1 103-4, i7 2 4-26, 1791 fiction, 402-4, 562, 683-86, 716, 718-20, 745, 749-50, 768, 867- 73, 945-52, 955, 959-63, 980, 1032, 1099, 1 105, 1 145-8, 1270- 74, 1276-77, I3M-I5, 1379, 1453, 1460-62, 1653-55, 1680-83, 1686- 87, 1691, 1693-4, 1696, 1697-99, 1701, 1705, 1786-89, 1792-96, 1798-1800, 1836-40, 1845, 1959- 62, 1964-65, 2023-24, 2166, 2193- 94,2197,2199 poetry, 662, 753~55, 926, 933-34, 941-44, 1038-43, 1046-47, 1064, 1066-67, 1 126-31, 1133-35, 1290, !295-97, I3M, 1809, 1959, 2166, 2172, 2193, 2196, 2202 short stories, 556-62, 574-75, 612- 13, 687, 701, 704-5, 716, 745-48, 759-60, 881-86, 890-95, 910-22, 924-32, 935-40, 945, 951-52, 954- 55, 1032-35, 1084-88, 1099-1102, 1149-51, 1270, 1275, 1379, 1453, 1680, 1684, 1686-87, '697, 1724, 1796, 1839, 1841, 1845, 2110, 2166-68, 2170-71, 2202, 22 . 2207, 2209 anthologies, 2322, 2369 Regionalism and local color in litera- ture — Continued See also names of regions, states, and places in literature, e.g., New Eng- land in literature Regionalisms (language). See Lan- guage — dialects & regionalisms Regulation of Lobbying Act, 6397 Regulatory agencies. See Executive branch Rehabilitation centers, 4637 Reich, Nathan, 4457 Reichard, H. H., 4479 Reid, Ira De A., 4428, 4447, 5500 Reid, Ogden Mills, about, 2868 Reid, Whitelaw, about, 2868 The Reign of Law, 718 The Reign of Philip the Second, History of, 2294 Rein, David M., 4828 Reindeer industry, Alaska, 2719-20 Reinemann, John Otto, 4657 Reinhardt, George C, 3629 Reinhart, C. S., illus., 1101 The Reinterpretation of American Lit- erature, 2424 Reis, Claire (Raphael), 5609, 5620 Reischauer, Edwin O., 3510 Reisner, Edward H., 5 121 Reiss, Albert J., Jr., 4395 Reissman, Norman, 5039 Reitzel, William, 3573, 3630 Reizenstein, Elmer. See Rice, Elmer L. Religion, 3469, 3969, 4551, 5254, 531 1, 5394-5502 biog. (collected), 5396, 5426-27 Colonial period, 3747, 3763 Dutch communities, 4493 frontier & pioneer, 5411-16 hist., 4224, 4315, 5394-5417 Jews, 4458 law & legislation, 5420-22 Negroes, 5498-5502, 5527, 5547 Pennsylvania Germans, 4480 Baltimore, 4062 Mass., 4034 Nashville, 3765 New England, 5417 N.C., 4090 Northwest, Old, 41 12 Ohio, 4121 Pa., 4054-55 S.C., 4091 Southern States, 3766, 4069, 4083 See also Indians — religion; Radio in religion; Sects; Cults; Television in religion; and names of individual religious bodies Religion, folk Brazos River, Tex., 5527 Mo., 5528 N. Mex., 5537 Religion and public education, 5103, 51 81, 5236, 5419,5491, 5494 Religion and science, 3114, 3761, 5315, 5337, 5434 Religious folksongs, 5549, 5553 _ 54, 5564 hist., 5549 Appalachian Mountains, 5583 Ky., 5584 Religious folksongs — Continued Mich., 5575 Ozark Mountains, 5569 Southern States, 5583 Religious institutions, Jewish, 4461 Religious leaders, 5474-83 Religious life Italians, 4497 Swedish, 4483 Religious literature, Colonial period, 3742-43, 3745 Religious movements, 4522, 4525 Jewish, 4459 Religious music. See Choirs (music); Church music Religious themes in literature Christian life, 17, 45, 90 church govt., 19, 34, 93-95 church hist., 43-44 controversial writings, 17, 20, 86, 89 conversion, 60-61 devotional books, 45, 87-89 diaries, journals, etc., 178-85 doctrinal, 26, 230-31 essays, 230-31, 2479 fiction, 402-4, 716, 762, 1252, 1343, 1396, 1446, 1563, 1578, 2415 hist. & crit., 2483, 2493 manual for pastors, 47-48 meditations, 2034, 2038, 2041-42 missions, 62 natural theology, 46 personal narratives, 2024, 2036 poetry, 7-1 1, 72-73, 79-83, 662, 670- 71, 680, 1357, 1359, 1369, 1537- 38, 1540, 2034-35, 2037, 2039 prose, 2279 psychological, 25 revivals, 22-23 sermons, 17-18, 24, 33, 35, 230, 900 See also Theology — in literature Religious thought. See Theology: Re- ligion; Philosophy; etc. Relocation centers, Japanese, 4469 Remedial law, 6279 Remember to Remember, 161 5 Remembered Yesterdays, 2923 Remembering Laughter, 2 161 Remembrance Rock,, 1727, 1730 Remington, Frederic drawings, 5034 illus., 1147 about, 5770, 5802 bibl., 5770 Removal and Return, 4469 Remsen, Ira, 4724 Renascence, 1609 Rendezvous with Destiny, 3455 Renegade, 1578 Reno, Nev., 2746, 4176, 4184 in literature, 1954, 2746 Repent in Haste, 1594 Reporters and reporting, 2903, 2905-7, 2928 Civil War, 2851 Oreg., 2863 Washington, D.C., 2861, 2930 See also Newspapermen Representative American Dramas, 2348 Representative American Plays, 145, 170, 200, 205, 208, 1070, 2337 Il68 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Representative Men, 298 Representative Plays by American Dramatists, 145, 170, 199, 2347 Republic Steel, 5918 The Republican Era, 1869-1901, 6178 Republican newspapers, 2851, 2862-63, 2868-70, 2875 Republican Party, 3424, 6347-48, 6352- 53, 6361, 6365-66, 6370 hist., 2879, 3438, 3442, 3456, 3466, 3500a, 6361, 6365-66 National Committee, 6361 National Convention (1912), 6350 platforms, 6367 Philadelphia, 6353, 6389 Republican Party (Jeffersonian), 3141, 3286,3310-11,6347 Republicanism, 3144, 3308 Requiem for a Nun, 1395 Research. See specific subjects, e.g., Business research Research libraries, 6470, 6478, 6483, 6487 Reserves, national. See Forests and for- estry; National parks and reserves Resorts. See Health — resorts, etc.; Ski- ing and ski resorts The Responsibilities of the Critic, 2477 The Responsibilities of the Norelist, 1096 Restless Is the River, 1961 Reston, James, 3615 The Restoration of Learning, 5233 The Resurgent Years, 5913 Retail trade, 5949 The Return of a Private, 893 The Return of Lanny Budd, 1758 The Return of Peter Grimm, 2347 Return to the Fountains, 2494 Reuben and Rachel, 164 Reunion and Reaction, 3417 Reunion in Vienna, 1749 Reusser, Walter C, 5144 Reutter, E. E., Jr., 5216 Revelry, 11 56 Reverchon, Julien, about, 4734 Revere, Paul, about, 1437 The Reverend Griffith Davenport, 2304 Reveries of a Bachelor, 507-8 Revett, Marion S., 4894 The Revival of Realism, 5351 Revivals and revivalism, 22-23, 5401-3, 5407,5411,5480 See also Great Awakening; Great Re- vival Revolution, right of, 6073 Revolution and Other Essays, 1048 The Revolutionary Generation, 3089 Revolutionary War. See American Revolution Revolutionists. See Patriots (American Revolution) Rexroth, Kenneth, 2098-2102 Reynolds, Levering, Jr., 5424 Reynolds, Lloyd G., 6037 Reynolds, Mary (Trackert), 6189 Rhapsody in Blue (music), 5678 Rhees, Rush, about, 5671 A Rhetoric of Motives, 2390 Rhode Island, 3965, 4039-40 econ. condit., 4632 Rhode Island — Continued founding, 84 guidebooks, 3804 hist., 3197, 4039 soc. condit., 4632 Rhodes, Charles D., 3651 Rhodes, Eugene Manlove, 1686-87 about, 1686 Rhodes, Frederick Leland, 4679 Rhodes, James Ford, about, 2695, 3058 Rhodes, May Davison, 1686 Rhyme, folk, 5510-11, 5592 N.C., 5536 Schoharie County, N.Y., 5539 Southwest, 5507 Rhymes of Childhood, 1127 Rhymes to Be Traded for Bread, 1581 Rhyne, Charles S., 4708 Rhyne, J. J., 4594 Rhys, Ernest, ed., 4343 Rian, Edwin H., 5494 Ribalow, Harold U., ed., 4453 Ribalow, Menachem, 4453 Rice, Charles S., 4058 Rice, Edward, 5024 Rice, Elmer L., 1688-90, 2332, 2334, 2348 Rice, Grantland, 4994, 5048 about, 4994 Rice, John Andrew, 2782-83 about, 2783 Rice, Philip Blair, 5366 Rice, William North, 4724 Rich, Arthur Lowndes, 5684 Rich, Wesley E., 4669 Richard Edney, 402 Richards, Eugene S., 4431 Richards, Ivor Armstrong, about, 2407 Richards, Laura E., 4040 Richardson, Alfred Talbot, ed., 2663 Richardson, Edgar P., 5755-56, 5760 Richardson, Harry V., 5501 Richardson, Henry Hobson, about, 5710 Richardson, Lyon N., 2915 ed., 2352 Richardson, Rupert Norval, 4189, 4194 Richert, Gottlieb Henry, 5949 Richey, Herman G., 5140 Richman, Irving Berdine, 4039 Richmond, Va., essays, 1002-3 Richter, Conrad Michael, 1691-96 Rickaby, Franz L., 5567 Rickard, Tex, about, 4987 Rickard, Thomas Arthur, 5917 Riddick, Floyd M,. 6162 Riddles, 551 1 N.C., 5536 Schoharie County, N.Y., 5539 Rideout, Walter B., ed., n 87 Rider, Fremont, 6476 Rider, Richard L., 4682 Riders of the Purple Sage, 1485 Ridge Runner, 2590 Ridler, Anne, 1367 Riegel, Robert E., 3103, 3137, 4520 Riegger, Wallingford, 4968 Riemer, Ruth, 4469 Riesman, David, 4452, 4513, 4555-56, 5190 Riggs, Robert L., 5050 about, 5050 Right of revolution, 6073 Right of search, 3554, 3558 Right to vote. See Freedom of the franchise Rights of man, 6068, 6071-73, 6085, 6094 The Rights of Man, 1 55 Riis, Jacob August, 2784-85, 4638 about, 2785 Riker, Charles Cook, 5671 Riker, Dorothy, comp., 4125 Riley, I. Woodbridge, 5262 Riley, James Whitcomb, 1 126-31 about, 941, 1 132, 4124 Rimmer, William, about, 5738 Rinehart, Mary (Roberts), 2786-87 about, 2787 Ring, Martha D., 4883 Ringer, Gordon, tr., 5363 Ringer, Virginia, tr., 5363 The Ringer, i486 Ringwalt, Ralph Curtis, ed., 4464 Rio Grande River and valley, 4197, 5083 Riordon, William L., 6382 Rip Van Winkle autobiography of Joseph Jefferson, 4934 play by Charles Burke, 2347 play by Joseph Jefferson, 2337 short story by Washington Irving, 381,384-87 Rip Van Winkle Goes to the Play, 2475 Ripley, George, about, 2279 Ripley, Sarah Alden, about, 2615 Ripostes, 1666 Rippy, James Fred, 3138, 3586 Rips, Rea Elizabeth, 6138 The Rise of a New Federalism, 6198 The Rise of American Civilization, 3073.3479.3750 The Rise of Realism, 2276 The Rise of Silas Lapham, 967-70, 982 The Rise of the Common Man, 3091 The Rise of the Dutch Republic, 2293 Rise of the New West, 3356-57 Rister, Carl Coke, 4160, 4189 Ritchie, Andrew Carnduff, 5696 Ritchie, Anna Cora (Ogden) Mowatt. See Mowatt, Anna Cora Ritchie, Thomas, about, 1267 Rittenhouse, David, about, 4758 River boat life Mississippi River, 784-86, 4281, 5505 Ohio River, 5505 A River Goes with Heaven, 1837 River navigation, 5929 River travel. See Travel and travelers — river River head, 1515 A Rivermouth Romance, 711 Rivers, 3969-4025 Canada, 4237-38 Fla., 4247 Ga., 4247 111., 4322 Ind., 4282 Ky., 4282, 4322 La., 4282 Md., 3999 Mass., 4012 INDEX / 1 169 Rivers — Continued Miss., 4282 Mo., 4322 New York (State), 4237-38, 4282 Ohio, 4282 Pa., 4237-38, 4282 Southern States, 4083 Tenn., 4282 Va., 4282 See also Waterways, inland; and also specific rivers, e.g., Hudson River Rivers Parting, 1918 Rivers to the Sea, 1 8 1 4 The Riverside Bookshelf, 685 Riverside County, Calif., 3957 Rives, William Cabell, 3283 The Rivet in Grandfather's Neck, 1262 The Road Between, 1376 Road of Ages, 1635 The Road to Disappearance, 3025 The Road to Rome, 1749, 2332 Roads, 5934 guides, 3786, 3805 See also Highways Roalfe, William R., 6328 Roan Stallion, 1534 Rob of the Bowl, 412-13 Roback, Abraham A., 5392 Robacker, Earl F., 2266 The Robber Barons, 5880 The Robber Bridegroom, 2204 Robbins, Ira S., 4612 Robbins, Rossell H., 1368 Robbins, Roy M., 5814 Robbins, Thomas, 44 Robert, Joseph C, 5829 Robert Emmet, 2298 Roberts, Anna M., tr. & ed., 4265 Roberts, Elizabeth Madox, 1 697-1 706 Roberts, Henry L., 3557 Roberts, Howard, 5040 Roberts, John S., 5307 Roberts, Kenneth, 1707-12 tr. & ed., 4265 Roberts, Leonard W., ed., 5546 Roberts, Leslie, 4015 Roberts, Mary M., 4852 Roberts, Morris, 1010 Robertson, Elizabeth Wells, 5604 Robertson, Stuart, 2251 Robertson, William, 3031 Robeson, Dave, 4982 Robinson, Blackwell P., ed., 3831 Robinson, Daniel S., ed., 5359 Robinson, Edwin Arlington, 1 713-16 about, 1717-19, 2289, 2404, 2527, 2544, 2682 Robinson, George O., 4747 Robinson, James Harvey, about, 4540, 4545 Robinson, John, about, 3257 Robinson, Roland I., 5971 Robinson, Thomas Porter, 4709 Robinson, William W., 4202 Robson, Eric, 3261 Rochester, N.Y. guidebook, 3810 hist., 3810, 4050-52 Rockefeller, Abby (Aldrich), Folk Art Collection, 5595 Rockefeller, John D., about 31 17, 5915-16 Rockefeller, John D., Jr., about, 4622 Rockefeller Foundation, 4622 about, 5163, 5198 A Rocket in My Pocket, 5592 Rocket to the Moon, 2064 Rockford, 111., 3881 Rockne, Bonnie Skiles, ed., 5041 Rockne, Knute, 5041 about, 5041, 5044 Rocks before the Mansion, 2788 Rocky Mountain Fur Co., 4148 Rocky Mountain Herald, 1409 Rocky Mountain region, 2933, 3967, 4172-85 cities & towns, 4176-77 fiction, 312, 1239 folklore, 5530 frontier life, 4155-56 fur trade, 4148 geology, 4172 guidebooks, 3910-16 travel & travelers, 391, 4384 Rocky Mountain Review, 2576 Rodabaugh, James H., ed. & illus., 4120 Rodall, Marie F., 2436 Rodell, Fred, 6256 Roden, Robert F., 6448 Rodgers, Andrew Denny, 2788-92, 4760 Rodgers, Richard, about, 5639, 5685 Rodgers, Robert R., 5170 Rodman the Keeper, 1 1 51 Roe, Frank G., 2965, 2984 Roebling, John August, about, 4801 Roebling, Washington Augustus, about, 4801 Roebuck, A. D., about, 5956 R0lvaag, Ole Edvart, 1720-23 Roemer, Ferdinand, about, 4734 Roemer, Milton I., 4869 Roethke, Theodore, 2103-4 Rogers, A. K., 5255, 5289 Rogers, Bruce, illus., 4123 Rogers, John, about, 5739 Rogers, Lindsay, 6423 Rogers, Meyric R., 5732 Rogers, Richard, 2337 Rogers, Robert, 2347 about, 1710 Rogers, Samuel, about, 219 Rogers, Walter P., 5191 Rogers, Will, about, 556, 558, 862, 2657 Rogers, William Garland, 1773 Rogers groups, 5739 Rogers' Rangers, fiction, 1710 Rogin, Leo, 5830 Rogue's Legacy, 2413 Roll, Jordan, Roil, 1653 Roll River, 1239 Rollins, Philip Ashton, 4161, 4163 Roman Bartholow , 171 4 Roman Catholic Church. See Catholic Church Roman Fever, 1855 The Roman Spring of Mrs. Stone, 2224 Romance of a Plain Man, 1461 The Romance of Certain Old Clothes, 1012 The Romance of Madrono Hollow, 930 The Romantic Comedians, 1460-61 The Romantic Egoists, 1913 The Romantic Triumph, 2276 Romanticism, 3751, 4080, 6065 Romanticism in literature, 2364, 2367, 2375, 2401, 2424, 2485, 2507, 2510 anthology, 2276 editorials, sketches, etc., 192, 674, 716 essays, 280 fiction, 201, 226, 245, 252, 333, 345, 405, 471-78, 546, 716, 762, 768, 1048, 1089, 1099, 1145 poetry, 134, 216, 323, 427, 520, 586, 614, 619, 662, 941 short stories, 381, 520, 716, 745, 1099 Romberg, Sigmund, 6322 Rome Haul, 1354 Romines, Stephen, 5158 Romulus, the Shepherd King, 2302 Roosevelt, Eleanor, 3493 Roosevelt, Elliott, ed., 3493 Roosevelt, Franklin D., 3493-94 about, 1749, 3108, 3130, 3489, 3491, 3494-3500, 3567, 5884, 6354- 55, 6364 Roosevelt, Theodore, 2793-95, 3307, 3465 about, 2474, 2503, 2542, 2625, 2682- 83, 2686, 2795, 3058, 3121, 3466-67, 3489, 3527, 4533, 6385, 6424, 6432 sculpture, 5737 Root, Elihu, about, 2712, 3459, 3653 Root, Winfred Trexler, 3225 The Roots of American Culture, 3736 The Roots of National Culture, 2276 The Rope, 1648 Roper, Daniel C, 4670 Rorem, C. Rufus, 4883 Rose, Arnold M., 4433, 4446 ed., 4434 Rose, Billy, about, 6322 Rose, Caroline, 4433 Rose, J. Holland, ed., 3179 Rose Bowl football game, 5042 Rose Michel, 2308 The Rose Tattoo, 2225 Roseboom, Eugene H., 4120-21, 6149 Rosed ale, 2301 Rosen, Carl George Arthur, about, 4803 Rosen, George, 4844 Rosenau, James N., ed., 3494 Rosenbach, Abraham S., 2500 Rosenberg, Bernard, ed., 6443 Rosenberry, Edward H., 503 Rosenberry, Lois (Kimball) Mathews, 4028, 4030 Rosenfield, Harry N., 4425 Rosengarten, George D., about, 4735 Rosenman, Samuel I., 3499 Rosenthal, Herbert, 3081 Rosenthal, Morris S., 5950 Rosenwald, Julius, about, 5956 Rosewater, Victor, 2860 Ross, Charles D., 5186 Ross, Clay C, 5229 Ross, Earle Dudley, 6369 1 170 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Ross, Edward ALworth, 4543 about, 4542 Ross, Harold W., about, 2565 Ross, Ishbel, 4820 Ross, Leonard Q., 2861 Ross, Lillian, 4949 Ross and the New Yorker, 2565 Ross County, Ohio, 3864 Rossetti, Christina Georgina, about, 1905, 2481 Rossiter, Clinton, L., 6067-68 Rossiter, William S., 4400 Rosskam, Edwin, ed., 3039 Rosten, Leo C, 2861, 4948 Rotary International, about, 4578 Rotha, Paul, 4944 Rothberg, Abraham, ed., 2322 Rothenberg, Robert E., 4889 Rothenberg, Stanley, 5621 Rothery, Agnes Edwards, 4087 Rothstein, Arthur, 2908 Rothstein, Samuel, 6483 Rottschaefer, Henry, 6099 Roucek, Joseph S., ed., 4426 Rough-Hewn, 141 5 Roughing It, 772-74 Round by Round, 5023 Round dances, 5587 A Round of Visits, 1008 Round-Shot to Rockets, 3670 Rourke, Constance M., 2443, 2501, 2796-98, 3736, 5772 Rousseau and Romanticism, 2375 Rovere, Richard H., 3482 Rowing, 4990, 5020 Rowland, Henry Augustus, about, 4724 Rowland, Stanley J., drawings, 5728 Rowlandson, Mary (White), 53-55, about, 3032 Rowlingson, Donald T., 5496 Rowson, Susanna (Haswell), 161-64 about, 161 Roxy, 874-75 Royal Government in America, 3195 A Royal Slave, 2305 Royce, Josiah, 5303, 5354-61 about, 5252, 5354, 5362-64, 5369 Rozwenc, Edwin C, ed., 3118-22 Rubin, Joseph J., ed., 657 Rubin, Louis D., 1899 ed., 2442 Rucker, Frank W., 2909 Ruffin, Edmund, about, 3367 ed., 13 Ruffin, Thomas, about, 6231 Rugg, Harold O., 5104 Ruggles, Eleanor, 4938 Rukeyser, Muriel, 2105-6 Rumford, Count. See Thompson, Ben- jamin Rumsey, James, about, 4784 Runaway Star, 688 The Rungless Ladder, 562 The Running of the Tide, 1443 Rural communities. See Country life Rural folklore, 4579 Rural government. See Local govern- ment Rural life. See Communities, rural; Farm and rural life Rural press, Southern, 2853 Rush, Benjamin, 5251 about, 4822, 4830, 4872, 5121 Rush, Nixon Orwin, 5479 Rusk, Howard A., 4637 Rusk, Ralph Leslie, 2502 ed., 295, 305 Rusling, James Fowler, 4386 about, 4385 Russell, Bertrand, about, 5368 Russell, Carl Parcher, 421 1 Russell, Charles Edward, 5652 Russell, Charles M., about, 5802 Russell, Elmer Beecher, 6232 Russell, Henry Norris, 5427 about, 5427 Russell, Irwin, 1133-35 about, 1 135 Russell, Peter, ed., 1673 Russell, William, 5644 Russell, William Henry, about, 4661 Russell, Sir William Howard, 4379-82, about, 4378 Russell, William L., 4838 Russell Sage Foundation, 4623 Russia econ. relations with, 3619, 3638 fiction, 1 1 90 relations with, 3505, 3523, 3557, 3563-64,3619 19th cent., 3429 20th cent., 3546, 3560-65, 3567- 68, 3570, 3620, 3622, 3624-25, 3627, 3629-30 reporting, 2535 travel & travelers, 131 1 Russian Revolution, fiction, 1656 Russo, Dorothy Ritter, 1807 Ruth, George H. ("Babe"), 4987, 5012 about, 5012 Rutherford, Mary Louise (Schuman), 6332 Rutherfurd, Livingston, 2931 Rutledge, Archibald, 1724-26, 5087-90, about, 5087-90 Rutledge, John, about, 6260 Rutledge, Joseph L., 3226 Ryan, Earl H., 4695 Ryan, Grace L., comp., 5590 Ryan, Margery W., ed., 5206 Rymer, Charles A., 4859 Rynning, Ole, 4485 Ryskind, Morris, 1545 S.U.M., about, 6015 Sac Prairie Saga, i960 Sacco, Nicola drama, 1 173 fiction, 1980 Sachs, Leon, 6104 Sachse, William L., 3227 Sacramento River, 3974 Sacred and Profane Memories, 1828 Sacred Books of the East, 280 The Sacred Harp, 5577 The Saga of the Roaring Road, 5007 Sagamore Hill, 2686 Sage, Margaret Olivia, about, 4623 Sahagun, Bernardino de, 2997 Sailing, 5017, 5019, 5021 Sailor on Horseback, 2815 Sailors folklore, 5533 songs, 5551, 5553, 5556, 5558-59. 5562,5580 St. Augustine, Fla. guidebook, 3847 language (dialects, etc.), 2258 St. Cloud, Minn., guidebook, 3888 Saint Elizabeths Hospital, Washington, D.C., about, 4840 Saint-Gaudens, Augustus, about, 5735 St. Helena Island, S. C, Negro folk- lore, 5540 St. Jolin, J. Hector. See Crevecoeur, Michel Guillaume St. Jean de St. John, Vincent, about, 6045 St. John's River, Fla., 3980 St. Lawrence River, 3979 St. Louis, Mo. drama, 2219 fiction, 763-65 Hegelians, 5305 politics, 6207 theater, 4913 St. Louis. City Art Museum, 5805 St. Louis. Public Library, 6467 St. Martin, Alexis, about, 4818, 4822 St. Olaf College, Northfield, Minn. Choir, 5664 St. Paul, Minn., Swedes in, 4486 Saint Peter Relates an Incident, 1540 Saints of Sage & Saddle, 5538 Sakoda, J., 4469 Sakolski, Aaron M., 5815 Sale, John B., 5547 Salem, Mass., 2600 drama, 198, 200, 2048 essays, 1002-3 fiction, 1439, 1443, 1508, 1917 witchcraft trials, 41-42, 56, 198, 200, 2048 See also Witchcraft Salesmen, 5955 Salina, Kans., guidebook, 3907 Salinas River, Calif., 3998 Salinger, Jerome David, 2107-9 Salley, Alexander S., 554 ed., 3216 Salmagundi, 511 Saloons. See Hotels, taverns, etc. Saloutos, Theodore, 5831 Salt Lake City, 4176 Salter, J. T., 6336, 6389 Saltwater Farm, 1295 The Salvage, 4469 Salvation Army, about, 5497 poetry, 1581 Salvation on a String, 1476 Sam Ego's House, 21 17 Sam Law son's Old town Fireside Stories, 574-75 Samaroff Stokowski, Olga, 5686 about, 5686 Sam' I of Posen, 2301 Samoa, American, 4218 Samplers (needlework), 5593 Sampling (radio program rating), 4700 Sampson, Martin W., 999 Samuelsen, Rube, 5042 Samurai and Serpent Poems, 2350 INDEX / "71 San Antonio, 4187 guidebook, 3923 San Bernardino County, Calif., 3957 San Diego, Calif., 2746-47, 2750, 4150 guidebooks, 3931-32 San Diego County, Calif., 3957 San Francisco Bohemianism, 3757 fiction, 1090-92 guidebook, 3933 hist., 2560, 3943, 4150, 4208-9 politics, 2888, 6207 port, 4208-9 soc. life & cust., 4352-53 theater, 4918, 4943 underworld, 2586 San Francisco Bay, 3933, 4208 San Francisco Federal Theatre, Research Dept., 4918 San Ildefonso Indians, 3041 San Xavier del Bac (Ariz.) mission, guidebook, 3926 Sanborn, Franklin B., 5266 ed., 599-601 Sanctuary, 1385, 1395 Sand, George about, 2504 drama, 2337 Sandage, Charles H., 5962 Sandburg, Carl, 1727-32, 3393, 3395, 4483, 5511 ed., 5562 about, 2406, 2419, 2503 Sanders, Jennings B., 3058, 6083 Sanders, Rufus, pseud., 2257 Sando at Seventy, 626 Sandoz, Jules Ami, about, 2800 Sandoz, Mari Susette, 2799-2801 Sands, Robert Charles, 2295 Sandusky Bay (Ohio) region, guide- book, 3868 Sandusky County, Ohio, 3867 Sandys, Edwyn, 5091 Sanford, Charles L., ed., 3123 Sanford, Trent Elwood, 5723 Sangamon River, 3988 Sanger, Joseph P., ed., 3651 Sanitary engineering, 4823, 4831, 4864, 4874. 4878 Mass., 4879 Sankey, Ira D., about, 5405, 5480 Santa Barbara, Calif., guidebook, 3934 Santa Barbara County, Calif., 3957 Santa Fe, 4148, 4176, 4187 Santa Fe Trail, 4188 Santayana, George, 1733-41, 5255, 5366-74 about, 1678, 1742, 5259, 5262, 5365, 5375-77 Santee River, 4023 Saposs, D. J., 6033 Sapphira and the Slave Girl, 1 277 Sappington, Clarence O., 4873 Saratoga, N.Y. essays, 1003 fiction, 1407 Saratoga campaign, 3682 poetry, 323 Saratoga Trunk., 1407 Sarazen, Gene, 5051 about, 5051 Sargeant, Winthrop, 5622, 5645 Sargent, John Singer illus., 439 about, 5771 Sarnoff, David, about, 4683 Saroyan, William, 2110-22, 2327, 2334, 2336 about, 21 19, 21 21, 2536 Sarton, May, 2123-27 Sartoris, 1382 Saskatchewan River, 4004 Satanstoe, 268-69 Satire, 3732 drama, 1317, 1548-49 editorials, sketches, etc., 209-15, 381- 83, 422-26, 542-45' 556-6l, 732, 862-66, 121 4, 1815-20 essays, 147-48, 165, 13 17-18, 1602, 1604-5 fiction, 105-8, 689-90, 775-77, 794- 97, 1261-62, 1267, 1381, 1559- 64, 1567, 1589-90, 1635, 1643, 1682, 1792, 1842-45, 2001, 2017- 19, 2021-22, 2053, 2154, 2180, 2229 periods Colonial, 51-52, 75-77, 92-93, 2 493 (1764-1819), 105-8, 118, 120, J 34-39. 147-48, 165-68 (1820-70), 209-15, 323, 381-83, 422-26, 456-58, 542-45, 556-61 (1871-1914), 689-90, 732, 775- 77, 794-97, 862-66 (1915-39), 1261-62, 1267, 1317- 18, 1381, 1545, 1548-49, 1589- 90, 1635, 1643, 1651-52, 1688, 1792, 1815-20, 1842-44, 1845 (1940-55), 2017-22, 2053, 2082, 2154, 2180, 2189-92, 2229 poetry, 120, 134-39, M8, 165, 167, 323, 456-58, 1651-52, 2189-92, 2467 short stories, 1651-52 Satires & Bagatelles, 128 Satterlee, Herbert L., 5978 The Saturday Evening Post, about, 2919, 2926 Saturday Night, 1475 The Saturday Review of Literature, 2398, 2415, 2569 Saturday's Children, 2332 Savage, Carlton, 3524 Savage, Henry, 4023 Savage, Howard J., 4599 Savage, James, ed., 91 Savannah, Ga., guidebook, 3841 Savannah River, 4016 Savelle, Max, 3747 Saveth, Edward N., ed., 3062 Saxe Holm's Stories, 984 Saxon, Olin Glenn, 5952 Say, Thomas, about, 4721 Sayre, Charles R., 5839 Sayre, Paul L., 6233 Scandinavia, relations with, 351 1 Scandinavians, 4482-87 in Brooklyn, 4046 in the Mississippi Valley, 3975 folklore, 5523 Scarborough, Dorothy, 5582 The Scarecrow, 2337, 2348 The Scarlet Letter, 341-44 Scarlet Sister Mary, 1655 Scarlett, William, Bp., 5499 Scenes and Portraits, 2380 Scepticism and Animal Faith, 5370 about, 5375 Schachner, Nathan, 3290-91 Schafer, Joseph, 5832 Schaldach, William J., 5092-93 Schantz, B. T., ed., 2293 Schary, Dore, 4949 Schattschneider, Elmer E., 6370, 6396 Schaub, Edward L., ed., 5309 Schauman, Georg, ed., 4243-44 Scheer, George F., 3244 Scheie de Vere, Maximilian, 2252 Schellenberg, Theodore R., 3063 Schenk, Gretchen (Knief), 6471 Scherman, Harry, about, 6463 Schevill, James Erwin, 11 89 Schick, Frank L., 6444 ed., 6438 Schickele, Rainer, 5860 Schilling, Jane Metzger, 6047 Schilpp, Paul A., ed., 5294, 5377, 5385 Schlesinger, Arthur Meier, Jr., 3083, 3352,3500 Schlesinger, Arthur Meier, Sr., 2424, 3083, 3095, 3139-40, 3262, 4532, 6431 ed., 3085-98, 4368, 4412-13 Schlesinger, Eugene R., 5971 Schlosberg, Harold, 5391 Schmeckebier, Laurence F., 4706, 4765, 6138, 6163, 6215, 6452 Schmitt, Martin F., 4158 Schneider, Herbert W., 5261, 5289, 5291. 5335,5409, 6082 ed., 5335 Schnier, Jacques P., 5734 Schoberlin, Melvin, 4925 Schonberg, Arnold, 5678 Schopf, Johann David, 4256-57 about, 4255 Schoharie County, N.Y., 5539 Scholar's Workshop, 6478 Scholarship and learning, 3739, 4458— 59 Scholes, Percy A., 5633 The School for Scandal, 1 68 The School Review, 5249 The School that Built a Town, 5145 Schoolcraft, Henry Rowe, 2802-3 about, 2802 Schools art, 5690 frontier, 4214 in fiction, 583-84 Indian, 3040 Jewish, 4454 music, 5668 public, 4320 Cincinnati, 4310 Ga., 4095 Ky., 4310 Pennsylvania Germans, 4479 New England, 2674 Va., 4310 1 172 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Schools — Continued See also Education; and specific types of schools, e.g., Journalism — schools Schools and business enterprise, 51 16 Schools in Transition, 5206 Schorcr, Mark, 2128-32 Schouler, James, 3 141 about, 3058 Schramm, Wilbur L., 2932, 5899 Schreibcr, Flora Rheta, 5687 Schreyvogel, Charles, about, 5802 Schriftgiesser, Karl, 3500a, 6397 Schroeder, Gertrude G., 5918 Schuchert, Charles, 4715, 4754 Schulberg, Budd, 1425 Schuller, Charles F., 5231 Schultz, Christian, 4282 about, 4281 Schulweis, II. M., 4458 Schuman, William, about, 5687 Schurr, Sam H., 5907 Schurz, Carl, 2858 about, 2677, 2882, 3431, 4481 Schwantes, Robert S., 3780 Schwartz, Bernard, 6257 Schwartz, Delmore, 2133-38 Schwartz, Edward, 1663 Schwartz, Harry Wayne, 5653 Schwartz, Morris S., 4838 Schwartz, Sulamith, 4457 Schweitzer, Albert, about, 2682 Science, 4513, 4537 awards, 4729 bibl., 4714, 6453 Colonial period Charleston, S.C., 3763 New England, 3745, 3747-48 Philadelphia, 3764 hist., 4714-15, 4718-19, 4721-24, 4726, 4730, 4753, 4761, 5289 museums, 3049 periodicals, 4715, 4736 philosophy of, 5267-68, 5280, 5291, 5349 study & teaching, 4719 New York (City), 4049 Northwest, Old, 41 12 Southern States, 4723 Science, 4678 Science and pragmatism. See Prag- matism — and science Science and religion. See Religion and science Science and state, 4761-4779, 6118, 6130 Science and the Idea of God, 5315 Science as a profession, 4725 Science fiction, 520, 1932, 1934, 1959 anthologies, 1959 essays & studies, 2377 Scientific apparatus and instruments, 47I9-472I Scientific management, 4798 Scientific method, 5254, 5257, 5267-68, 5289, 5346 Scientific personnel, 4725, 4779 Scientific research, 3675, 4777-79 hist., 4722 wartime, 4761 Scientific societies directory, 4728 hist., 4713, 4726 Scientists, 4725, 4742-60, 4765, 4773, .5434 bibl., 4729 biog. (collected), 4712, 4717, 4721, 4724, 4730, 4774, 4785 directory, 4712 Scientists against Time, 4761 Scoon, R., 3758 Scopes trial, 5429 Scotch immigrants, 4488, 4491 Scotch-Irish, 4489-90 Scott, A. P., 3058 Scott, Arthur L., ed., 819 Scott, Cecil W., ed., 5236 Scott, Clinton Lee, about, 5473 Scott, Evelyn, 1743-48 Scott, Franklin D., 351 1 ed., 3064 Scott, Harvey Whitefield, about, 2863 Scott, Hugh L., about, 3025 Scott, James Brown, 3519 Scott, Marian, 4893 Scott, Robert L., Jr., 3643a Scott, Sir Walter, bart. (1771-1832), about, 216, 252, 323 Scott, Walter (1796-1861), about, 5455 Scott, Wilbur S., ed., 2353 Scott, Winfield, 3655 about, 2710, 3655 Scribner's (Charles) Sons, about, 6445, 6449 Scripps, Edward W., 2890 about, 2857, 2890 Scripps, George, about, 2890 Scripps, James, about, 2890 Scripps-McRae League, 2886 Scroggs, William O., comp., 3634 The Scrolls from the Dead Sea, 2535 Scudder, Horace E., 466, 599, 4036 ed., 370, 441,453,671, 2922 Scudder, Townsend, 4037 Scudder, Vida D., 181 about, 4530 Sculptors, 5734, 5738, 5740 Sculpture, 5595, 5601, 5733-40 abstract, 5696 collection, 5797 exhibition, 5696 hist., 5689, 5696, 5733-34. 5738, 5740,5797 Sea Garden, 1320 The Sea-Hunters, 5871 Sea in art, 5765, 5767 Sea Islands, S.C., 3835 folklore, 5540 Negroes, 4436 The Sea of Grass, 1 693 The Sea-Wolf, 1054 Seafaring life diaries, journals, etc., 274-75 drama, 1647-48 fiction, 252, 256-57, 470, 479-83, 487, 562, 1054 The Seagtdl on the Step, 1251 Sealock, Richard B., 2976 Seamen, cruelty to, 274-75 fiction, 479-80 Seapower, 3671, 3673-74, Search, right of, 3554, 3558 A Search for the King, 2186 Sears, Clara E., 5265 Sears, Laurence, ed., 5259 Sears, Louis M., 3058 Sears, P. B., 4594 Sears, Richard W., about, 5956 Sears, Roebuck and Company, about, 5956 The Seaside and the Fireside, 431 The Season of Comfort, 2184 Seasoned Timber, 1417 Seattle, 4150, 4216, 6207 Seaver, Edwin, 2370 Secession movement, 3328, 3364, 3367, 3370-71. 3404. 5828 Second April, 1609 The Second Generation, 1 109-10 Second Growth, 2163 The Second House from the Corner, 2750 The Second Man, 1206, 2332, 2348 Second Overture, 1174 Second Threshold, 1203 The Second Tree from the Corner, 1863 The Second World, 1232 Secondary education, 5131 administration, 5135, 5154 athletics, 5000 comprehensive high schools, 5156 criticism, 5236 curricula, 5100, 5153, 5158, 5224 finances, 5135 hist., 5152 junior high schools, 5157 methods & techniques, 5227 objectives, 5217 organization, 5135 periodical, 5249 private, 515s sources, 5158 vocational, 5156 See also Academies (schools); Catho- lic schools; Public education; Sem- inaries (schools) Secret History of the American Revolu- tion, 3264 Secret Service, 2337 Secret societies, 4574 Secretaries of state, 3519 See also Diplomatic history; names of individual Secretaries, e.g., Hull, Cordell Sectionalism, 3106, 3305, 3323, 3328, 3337, 3354. 3356-57. 3363, 3781, 3784,4067,4074-75 economic causes, 3346 political aspects, 3346, 3361, 3397, 3399-3401, 3409, 3451 See also Regionalism; Secession movement Sects, 5397-98, 5400-1, 5404-5, 5409, 5439-41, 5495 Secularism, 5395, 5399, 5401, 5409, 5488 Securities and Exchange Commission, about, 6322 Security investigations and programs, 3M9 Security risks, 6112, 6117-18, 6130 INDEX / "73 Security tests, 6107, 61 10 See also Loyalty-Security Program Sedgwick, Ellery, about, 2922 Sedgwick, Henry Dwight, 2281 about, 2281 See You in the Morning, 2085 Seeds of Contemplation, 2038, 2042 Seeds of Liberty, 3747 Seedtime of the Republic, 6068 Seeger, Charles, music arr. by, 5559 Seegcr, Ruth (Crawford), 5563 music arr. by, 5559 Seehafer, Eugene F., 4696 Seeing More Things, 4909 Seeing Things, 4909 Seely, Pauline A., 2976 Segregation, 4437, 4444, 4451, 5447, 5499-5500, 6120 in education, 5206, 5236 See also Minorities; Race question Seilhamer, George O., 4905 Seilliere, Ernest, about, 2375 Seitz, Don C, 2877 Selden, Elizabeth S., 4971 Seldes, Gilbert, 4895, 4945 ed., 1555 Selective Service Acts of 1917, 3709 Self, 2347 Self-Culture, 233 The Self, Its Body and Freedom, 5313 The Self-Made Man in America, 3762 Self -Reliance, 285 Seligman, Edwin R., 5963 Sellards, Elias H., 2995 Sellars, R. W., 5255 Sellars, Wilfrid, 5291 Sellers, Charles Coleman, 2804-5, 57°9 Sellers, Charles Grier, 3351 Sellers, N. W., 5849 Sellers, Nathan, about, 6457-58 Sellery, G. C, 5336 The Selling of foseph, 56-57 Semantics, 3756 in literature, 2388-90 Seminaries (schools), 5212 Seminole Indians, 3025-27 Semiotic, 5346 Semmes, Raphael, about, 2613 Semple, Ellen Churchill, 2975 Senate, U.S. See Congress. Senate Senator North, 722 Seneca, 111., 4589 Senior, Clarence, 4428, 4470 Sense and Sensibility in Modern Poetry, 2484 The Sense of Beauty, 5366 The Sense of the Past, 1004 about, 1009 The Sentimental Novel in America, 2384 The Sentimental Years, 4516 The Sentinels, 2310 Separation of powers, 3608, 3610, 6075-76, 6199, 6257, 6312, 6315 Separatists, 1, 84 The Sequel of Appomattox, 3377 Sequoya (Cherokee Indian), about, 3027 Seraph on the Suwanee, 1529 Serbein, Oscar N., 4890 Serena Blandish, 1206 The Serenade (operetta), 5681 Serenade to the Big Bird, 2814 The Serene Cincinnatians , 4122 Sergeant, Elizabeth Shepley, 1283 Sermons Colonial, 17-18, 21, 24, 32-33, 35, 59-61 hist. & crit., 2493 in verse, 1537-38 See also Preacher tales Sertorius, 2347 Servants, indentured, 6056 Sessions, Archibald, 1 1 1 7 Sessions, Roger, 5615 Settlement houses, New York (City), 4624 Seven Decisions that Shaped History, 3549 The Seven-League Crutches, 1999 7P.A/., 1827 The Seven Sleepers, 1827 The Seven Storey Mountain, 2034, 2036 The Seven Who Fled, 2089 Seven Years' Harvest, 2398 Seven Years' War in America. See French and Indian War (1755-63) Seventeen, 1804 Seventh-Day Adventists, 5404, 5442 The Seventh Hill, 1516 Seventy Years of It, 4543 Seventy Years of Life and Labor, 6050 Severinghaus, Aura E., 4861 Sevier, John, about 3287 Sewall, Harriot Winslow, ed., 244 Sewall, Samuel, 56—58 about, 2493 The Sewanee Review, 1809, 2570 Seward, William Henry, about, 2614, 3359,3382,34i6 Sexual behavior (human), 4560—61, 4565-66 Seybold, Ethel, 611 Seymour, Charles, 3541 Seymour, Flora Warren (Smith), 3035 Seymour, Horatio, about, 3441 Shackford, James Atkins, 2649, 3353 Shackford, John B., ed., 3353 Shadow of a Man, 2123 Shadow of Night, 1959 The Shadow of the Hawk., 1748 Shadows in Silver, 4086 Shadows Move Among Them, 1493 Shadows on the Rock., 1277-78 Shafer, Henry Burnell, 4812 Shafer, Robert, 2425, 2479 Shakers, 3736, 54,11, 5469, 5594 Shakespeare, William, about, 280, 4917 Shakspeare in Love, 2310 Shalcr, Nathaniel S., 4036, 5222 Shamanism, 3010, 3019 Shame and Glory of the Intellectuals, 2189 The Shame of the Cities, 6207, 6432 The Shame of the Slates, 4837 Shankland, Robert, 5866 Shannon, David A., 6371 Shannon, Fred Albert, 3702, 4164, 5877 Shannon, W. V., 6195 Shantymen and Shantyboys, 5551 Shantz, Homer L., 5816 The Shapers of American Fiction, 2509 The Shaping Spirit, 1785 Shapiro, Charles, ed., 1348 Shapiro, Elliott, 561 1 Shapiro, Karl, 2139-44 ed., 2363 Shapiro, Theresa R., 4712 Sharp, Cecil J., comp., 5583 Sharp Eyes, 74 1 Sharpe, Dores Robinson, 5482 Sharps and Flats, 878 Shartel, Burke, 6269 Shattuck, Charles, ed., 2551 Shattuck, Lemuel, about, 4403, 4879 Shaw, Henry Wheeler, 542-45 about, 5524 Shaw, Irwin, 2145-48, 2333 about, 2371 Shaw, Lemuel, about, 6228, 6231 Shaw, Lloyd, 5591 Shaw, Robert Kendall, 6476 Shaw, Wilbur, 5006 about, 5006 Shaw, Wilfred B., ed., 5201 Shawnee Indians, 3037 Shay's Rebellion, 3309 She Would Be a Soldier, 2347 Shea, John D. Gilmary, 5451 Sheean, Vincent, 1610, 2806-7 Sheehan, Donald H., 6445 ed., 3062 Sheeler, Charles, 5772 about, 5772 Sheep industry, 5874 Tex., 2733 Sheffield, F. D., 3724 Shelburne Essays, 2479-81 Sheldon, Edward, 2337 Shelford, Victor E., ed., 2956 Shelley, Percy Bysshe, about, 520, 2481, 2545 The Sheltered Life, 1461 The Sheltering Sky, 1 928 Sheltering Tree, 5265 Shenandoah (Howard), 2337, 2347 Shenandoah (Schwartz), 2135 Shenandoah River and valley, 3997 fiction, 226, 228-29 Shenk, Hiram Herr, ed., 4056 Shepard, Odell, 186, 442, 4041, 5266 ed., 187, 588, 603, 2375 Shepard, Thomas, 59-65 about, 63, 65, 3198 Shepardson, Whitney H., 3634 Shepherd, W. R., 4540 Shepherd's Empire, 5874 Shepperson, Wilbur S., 4488 Shera, Jesse H., 6472 Sheridan, Philip H., about, 3701 Sheridan, Richard, 168 Sherman, C. B., 4458 Sherman, John K., 5654 Sherman, Stuart Pratt, 2503-5, 5222 ed., 1067, 2393 Sherman, William Tecumseh, about, 2614,3699 Sherwood, Elizabeth J., comp., 3292 Sherwood, Foster H., 6240 Sherwood, Garrison P., cd., 4897 Sherwood, Robert Emmet, 1203, 1749- 53, 2327, 2332-34, 2348, 3499 Shetrone, Henry Clyde, 2996 431240—60- -76 1 174 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Shilling, Ned, 4395 Shipbuilding, 5930 Shipper), William, about, 4856 Shipping industry, 5930 Mass., 5936 New York (City), 5937 Ships in art, 5801 See also Warships Shipton, Clifford Kenyon, 6447 Shipwrecks, fiction, 1712 Shirley, Dame, pseud. See Clappe, Louise Amelia Knapp (Smith) Shirley, Hardy L., 5865 Shirley, Wayne, 6481 Shiskin, Julius, 5905 The Shock of Recognition, 2538 Shoemaker, Ervin C, 5127 Shoemaker, Floyd Calvin, 3346 ed., 5569 Sholes, Christopher Latham, about, 4786 De Shootinest Gent'man, 5066 Shores, J. Harlan, 5158 Shores, Louis, 6478, 6481 ed., 6484 The Shores of Light, 2541 Shorewood, Wis., 3885 Short, Lloyd Milton, 6173 Short, Raymond W., ed., 2353 Short ballot, 6203, 6425 Short Grass Country, 3964 Short stories anthologies, 2318, 2322, 2325, 2351, 2369 experimental writing, 1242, 1379, 1766-67, 1 77 1 hist. & crit., 2362, 2487, 2489, 2495 periodicals, 2916, 2922, 2925 See also Fiction in periodicals periods (1820-70), 319, 322, 330-40, 356, 359. 381. 384-90. 405-8, 484, 491, 493-94. 496, 520, 528-29, 533, 536, 556-62, 574-75.612-13,674 (1871-1914), 683, 687, 701, 704-6, 711-12, 716, 725, 732- 37. 739. 745-48, 756-61, 798-99, 821, 830, 834, 836- 37, 856, 859-60, 878, 881- 87, 890-95, 900-5, 909-22, 924-32, 935-40, 945. 951-52. 954-55. 984, 986, 1004, IOO7-8, I0II-I2, 1014, IO23- 35, 1048-52, 1058-60, 1084- 88, 1099-1102, 1106, 1 1 1 1— 25, 1145, 1149-52 (1915-39). 1155. 11C0-61, 1164, 1178-79, 1181, 1 1 85, 1197-98, 1222, 1224, 1239, 1242, 1248, 1250, 1270, 1275, 1277, 1316, 1341-42, 1345, 1372, 1379, 1389, 1393-94, 1403, 1408, 1411, 1413, 1418, 1429, 1453. 1464. 1471. 1476, 1478, 1494, 1498, 1510, 1523- 25. 1541, 1553-55. 1651-52, 1659-60, 1662, 1680, 1684, 1686-87, 1691-92, 1697, 1703, 1706, 1724, 1762, Short stories — Continued periods — Continued (191 5-39 ) — Continued 1764-67, 1 77 1, 1776, 1786, 1790, 1796-97, 1801, 1839, 1841, 1851, 1855, 1872, 1879, 1892 (1940-55), 1910, 1913, 1927, 1929, 1932-33. 1935-36, 1944, 1946, 1958-59. 1963. 1986, 2011, 2015-16, 2020, 2024, 2057-58, 2071-75, 2109-10, 2116, 2118, 2128, 2131, 2133-34, 2137, 2145, 2147, 2160-61, 2165-68, 2170-71, 2176-77, 2179, 2198, 2202-3, 2205, 2207, 2209-11, 2214, 2222, 2227, 2234 techniques, 520, 538, mi The Shoshonee Valley, 312 Shoshoni Indians, 2364, 3041 Shouts and Murmurs, 491 1 Show Biz, from Vaude to Video, 4892 The Show Must Go On,i 688 The Show-Off, 2348 Showboats, 4978 fiction, 1405 A Shower of Summer Days, 2125 Shrevc, Forrest, 2959 Shryock, Richard H., 40, 3061, 3103, 4479. 4813.4826, 4845 Shumaker, Wayne, 2421 Shurter, Robert L., 731 Shuster, George N., 4457, 5426, 5447 about, 5426 Sibley. Mulford Q., 3649, 6124 Sicily, fiction, 1994 Sidelights on American Literature, 2486 Sidewalks of America, 5510 Siebert, Frederick Seaton, 2932 Siege, 1 155 The Siege of London, 1007 Siegfried, Andre, 4505-8 Siepmann, Charles A., 4685, 4703, 5230 Sierra Nevada, 3955, 4210-1 1 disc. & explor.. 2971 Sierras, Songs of the, 1066 'Sieur George, 748 Sievers, Wieder David, 2506 Sigerist, Henry E., 4814 Sights and Spectacles, 201 7 The Sign of Jonas, 204 1 The Signature of All Things, 2100 Den Signede Dag, 1723 The Significance of the Frontier in American History, 2437 about, 2407 Sign or Marc, 231 1 Signs, Theory of (philosophy), 5346 Sikes, Earl R., 6410 Silas Crockett, 1286 Silas Timberman, 1973 Silberling, Norman J., 6025 Silcox, Clarice Edwin, 5495 Sill, Edward Rowland, 2769 about, 2769 Silliman, Benjamin, about, 4724, 4740, 4759 Silver, Rollo G., 6440 ed., 643 Silver and silversmithing, 5784 The Silver Cord, 15 19, 2337 Silver rushes, 772-74 The Silver Stallion, 1262 Simkhovitch, Mary K., 5426 about, 5426 Simkins, Francis Butler, 4082 Simmons, E. J., 3562 Simms, Henry H, 3409 Simms, William Gilmore, 546-55, 2296 about, 554, 2277 Simon, Charlie May (Hogue), 1436 Simon Suggs' Adventures, 380 The Simple Cohler of Aggawam, 76 Simple Speaks His Mind, 1 523 Simple Ta/{es a Wife, 1525 Simplification (doctrine), 585 Simpson, Louis, 2350 Sims, William Sowden, 3716 Sinai, Nathan, 4886 Sinatra, Frank, about, 5636 Since Yesterday, 3478 The Sincere Convert, 60 Sincerely, Willis Wayde, 1597 Sinclair, Upton, 1754-58 about, 2380, 2406 Singers, operatic, 5662 biog. (collected), 5663 Singing games, 5588 Middle West, 5586 New England, 5580 The Single Hound, 2123 Single tax doctrine, 4535 Singleton, Arthur, pseud. See Knight, Henry Cogswell Singstad, Ole, about, 4803 Sinners in the Hands of an Angry God, 24 Sioux Indians, 2831, 3003 fiction, 1646 Sir Dominick. F errand, 10 12 Sir Edmund Orme, 1012 Sir Henry, 1643 Sirjamaki, John, 4571 Sirmay, Albert, 4025 Sis' Becky's Pickaninny, 757 Sister Carrie, 1334 about, 1089 Sitterson, Joseph Carlyle, 5822 Sitting Bull, about, 2832, 3036 Situation Normal, 2044 Six Horses, 5931 Six Nations. See Iroquois Indians Sizer, Theodore, ed., 5775 Skandinaven, about, 2895 Skeel, Emily E. F., ed., 177 The Sketch Book, 384-87 Sketches. See Editorials, sketches, etc. Sketches in Criticism, 2380 Skid Road, 4216 The Skies of Europe, 2091 Skiing and ski resorts, 5062 Rocky Mountains, 4174 The Skin of Our Teeth, 1 868 Skinner, Constance Lindsay, ed., 3969-77 Skinner, Cornelia Otis, 2808-10 about, 2810 Sklare, Marshall, 5460 Skyscrapers, 5703, 5705 INDEX / 1 175 Slabs of the Sunburnt West, 1731 Slang in literature, 619, 701-5, 878-80, mi, 1554-55 See also Language — slang The Slate Auction (sculpture), 5739 Slave patrol, 3554, 3558 Slave trade, 3558, 4224, 4258, 4293, 4333- 4336, 434L4440 Slavery, 2603, 3122, 3398-99, 3414, 3766, 4258, 4364, 4367-68, 4440, 4442, 5828 defense, 3286, 3303, 3366, 3370, 3381,3389,3404 econ. aspects, 3234, 3371, 3381, 3389, 3402-3, 3409 extension to the territories, 3339, 3346,3371,3397 folklore, 5515, 5521 political aspects, 3370-71, 3389, 3409 public opinion, 3346, 3409 social aspects, 3371, 3381, 3389 See also Abolitionism Slavery in literature, 149, 192, 216, 239, 449,511,556, 1099 antislavery pamphlets, tracts, etc., 56, 178-85, 232, 240, 463, 662-63, 2493 fiction, 562-67, 749-50, 949-52, 1277, 2201 poetry, 456-57, 664, 856-59, 861, 1222, 1224, 2200 short stories, 757-58, 856, 859-60, 1 1 00-2 See also Civil War in literature; Plantation life in literature; and Race question in literature Sleepers Awa\e, 2084 The Sleeping Fury, 1 237 Slender, Robert, pseud. See Freneau, Philip Morin Slichter, Sumner H., 5894, 6038-39 Sloan, John, 5800 about, 2380, 5773 Sloane, Eric, 5724 Sloane, Howard N., ed., 2946 Sloane, William Milligan, ed., 5344 Slocum, Joshua, 5021 Slogans, 3152 Slogum House, 2799 Slosser, Gaius J., ed., 5466 Slosson, Edwin E., 4724, 51 13 Slosson, Preston William, 3097 Slovenian folklore, Mich., 5533 Slums, 2784, 4598, 4612 New York (City), 4638 Sluyter, Peter, 3208 Slye, Maud, about, 4722 Small, Albion Woodbury, about, 4540, 4542 A Small Boy and Others, 1015 Small business, 6021 The Small Town in American Litera- ture, 2438 Smalley, Donald, ed., 4377 Smallpox epidemic (1721), 4826 treatment, 40, 2493 Smallwood, Mabel Sarah Coon, 4738 Smallwood, William Martin, 4738 The Smart Set, 1 602 Smet, Pierre Jean de, 2663 about, 2662-63 Smidt, Kristian, 1369 Smiley, Dean F., 4999 ed., 4855 Smillie, Wilson G., 4874-75, 4877 Smire; an Acceptance in the Third Person, 1266 Smirt; an Urbane Nightmare, 1264 Smith, A. Merriman, 6148 Smith, Abbot Emerson, 6056 Smith, Al, about, 5450, 5493 Smith, Albert E., 4961 about, 4961 Smith, B. Othanel, 5158 Smith, Bernard, 2406-7 ed., 2407, 3142 Smith, Bradford, 66 Smith, Bruce, 4655 Smith, Cecil Michener, 5623, 5638 Smith, Chard Powers, 4000 Smith, Charles Alphonso, ed., n 23 Smith, Charles Edward, ed., 5644 Smith, Charles Henry, 556-57, 2257 Smith, Chetwood, 5739 Smith, Chris, about, 5016 Smith, Darrell Hevenor, 5995, 6190 Smith, David Eugene, 4739 Smith, Edgar F., 4740 Smith, Elbert B., 3322 Smith, Erwin E., photographs by, 4153 about, 4153 Smith, Erwin Frink, about, 2792 Smith, Frank E., 4024 Smith, Frank L., about, 6383 Smith, George Otis, 4715 Smith, Gerrit, about, 2279, 2689 Smith, Guy-Harold, ed., 41 19 Smith, H. Allen, 2149-55, 2370, 5013 Smith, Harold D., 6191 Smith, Harry de Forest, about, 1716 Smith, Harry James, 2348 Smith, Harry Worcester, 5080 Smith, Helen Lyman, 6482 Smith, Henry Justin, 4135 Smith, Henry Ladd, 2845, 5941 Smith, Henry Nash, 2412, 3759 Smith, Hilrie S., 5436 Smith, Hubert L., 6018 Smith, Huston, 5187 Smith, Ira L., 5013 Smith, J. Lawrence, about, 4740 Smith, J. P., 3058 Smith, James Eugene, 2875 Smith, James G., 5993, 5998 Smith, James Morton, 3308, 6125 Smith, Jay, about, 5016 Smith, John, captain, 66-71 about, 66, 3198 Smith, John Edwin, 5364 Smith, Johnston, pseud. See Crane, Stephen Smith, Joseph, about, 4183, 5464-65 Smith, Joseph H., 6234 Smith, Joseph Russell, 2940 Smith, Julia, 5675 Smith, Justin H., 3354, 3689 Smith, Kendall, 5938 Smith, Lillian, 1759-61 Smith, Louis, 3650 Smith, Marian W., 3041 Smith, Mary, 5739 Smith, Mortimer B., 5237 Smith, Onnie Warren, 5094 Smith, R. L., 4594 Smith, "Red." See Smith, Walter W. Smith, Reginald Heber, 6328-29 Smith, Richard Penn, 2310, 2650 Smith, Robert Miller, 5014 Smith, Samuel H., about, 5121 Smith, Samuel Stanhope, 5251 Smith, Seba, 558-61 Smith, Shirley W., 5223 Smith, Stephen W., 5644 Smith, T. V., 3646, 5289, 6128 Smith, Thelma M., 2508 ed., 464 Smith, Theodore Clarke, 3144, 3450 Smith, Thomas Lynn, 4584 Smith, Thomas P., 4740 Smith, Walter Bedell, 3565 Smith, Walter Buckingham, 5999 Smith, Walter W., 4995 Smith, William, 145 Smith, William Carlson, 4415 Smith, William Ernest, 3410 Smith, a Sylvan Interlude, 1265 Smithies, Arthur, 6001 Smith's London Journal, 2155 Smithson, James, about, 4775 Smithsonian Institution about, 4775 See also names of administrative di- visions, e.g., National Museum Smok.e and Steel, 1731 The Smoking Mountain, 1250 Smoky Mountains, 3945 Smvth, Albert H., 2282 ed.,3183 Smyth, Mary Winslow, 5566 Smythe, Dallas W., 4702 Snell, George D., 2509 Snow-Bound, 662, 667 Snyder, Richard C, 3605 So-Big, 1404 So Little Time, 1593 So Red the Rose, 4912 Sobel, Bernard, 4942, 4976 Social and business ethics, 5273, 5899, 6010 Social clubs, 4574, 4578 Social conditions, 2824, 4225, 4415, 455L 4554. 4557-58. 4562, 4581, 4595, 4617. 4619. 4627, 4634, 5405, 6346, 6426, 6431 cities, 4395 country life, 4395 hist., 3073, 3085-98, 3150, 45M- 4534, 456o, 4654, 5875, 6005, 6082 American Revolution, 3252-53 Civil War, 3374 Colonial period, 3141, 3747 19th cent., 3091, 3275, 3281, 3313, 3421, 3425, 3447, 3754, 4313- 4345, 4499, 578i 20th cent., 3096, 3474, 3477-78, 3494, 3746, 4505-8, 4514, 4571-72, 4625 maps, 2972 Negroes, 4437, 4439, 4441-42, 4446, 4448 Ilj6 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Social conditions — Continued Orientals, 4468 Poles, 4495 See also Church and society; also subdivisions History and Social conditions under names of places and regions, e.g., Chicago — soc. condit; Southern States — hist. Social influences on literature hist. & crit., 2448, 2450-51, 2485, 2489, 2507 Social insurance. See Social security Social life and customs, 4232, 4234, 4531-32. 4534. 4562, 5510, 5596, 5598,6456 bibl., 4229 hist., 4235, 4519-21. 4529. 5729 Colonial period, 3748, 4227, 4263,4518 1 8th cent., 4228, 4500-1 19th cent., 4224, 4228, 4303-5, 4314-17, 4354-57. 4370-71. 4516,4927,4937 See also subdivisions History and Social life and customs under names of places and regions, e.g., Indiana — hist.; Virginia — soc. life & cust. Social life and customs in literature, 319-22,512 diaries, journals, etc., 36-39, 56-57 drama, 168-70, 198, 1199-1204 essays, 1002, 2469 fiction, 161-64, 689-92, 964-76, 978, 980, 982, 986-88, 992-95, 1007-8, 1014, 1589, 1828-29, 1831-33, 1845, 1874, 1909, 1911-12, 2078, 2149, 2278 letters, 96-100 satire, 381 short stories, 415-18, 986, 1004, 1008, 101 1, 1014 Social medicine (plans), 4882, 4888 Social psychology, 3724, 4539, 4556, 4561, 4635, 5277 Social questions in literature anthology, 2355 drama, 1199-1204, 1518-20, 1647- 48, 1688-90, 1988-91, 2043-49, 2063-68, 2145, 2218-21, 2223, 2228 essays & studies, 546, 695-98, 732, 862-66, 1 155, 1357-58, 1372, 1375, 1445, 1602, 1907, 2189, 2278, 2412, 2519, 2532 fiction, 689-92, 716, 718-20, 722, 726, 728-31, 756, 821-24, 835-37, 867-75, 887-89, 941, 956-70, 973- 76, 978, 982, 986-1001, 1004, 1048, 1056, 1089-95, 1 107-10, 1136, 1142-43, 1155-56, 1178, 1 180, 1 183, 1190-94, 1270-74, 1333-39. 1343. 1372-74. 1376, 1379-84, 1386, 1388, 1390-92, 1414, 1417, 1425-29, 1445-50, J 453-59. 1460-62, 1467, 1472, 1474, 1494-97, 1499-1500, 1559- 69. 1571, 1573-74. 1576", 1579. 1589-97. 1656-58, 1743-44. 1746-48, 1754-56, 1758-60, 1775, i777-8i, 1792-95. 1845-50, 1852- Social questions in literature: — Continued fiction — Continued 55, 1887-91, 1907, 1914-15, 1932, 1940-43, 2045, 2050-51, 2059, 2079, 2081, 2084, 2090, 2145-46, 2156-59, 2180, 2182-84, 2229, 2231,2235 poetry, 1038-43, 1046, 1061-63, 1069-70, 1225, 1227, 1357, 1585- 86, 1588, 1599-1600, 1608-9, '7 2 7, 1731, 1872, 1878, 1881, 1885, 1907, 1968, 2079, 2105-6 tracts & propaganda, 178, 184-85, 235. 239, 313, 726, 862, 1048, 1053, 1 107, 1559, 1571, 1754, 1759. 1775. 1907. 1932, 1973. 2180, 2183 The Social Record, 2355 Social Register (Boston), 4035 Social Science Research Council, 4777 Social Science Research Council. Com- mittee on Historiography, 3065 Social Science Research Council Public Library Inquiry. See Public Li- brary Inquiry Social sciences, 3739, 4536, 4544-45 biog. (collected), 4540, 4712 research, 4777 study & teaching, 4540 Social security, 4621, 4631, 4633, 4635 Tex., 4194 Social Security Act, 4631 Social settlements, New York (City), 4624 Social status, 4549, 4557 children, 4559 occupation, 4547 women, 3073, 4524, 4563 Social work, 4618, 4621, 4624 medical. See Medicine — social work Socialism, 3753, 6356 bibl., 3753 fiction, 726, 728-31, 964, 973-76, 978, 1048, 1055, 1656, 1754-56, 1758 hist., 3753, 6360, 6368, 6433 propaganda, 2896 Socialist Party about, 6356, 6360, 6367, 6371, 6433 platforms, 6367 A Socialist's Faith, 6433 Society and the press, 2845, 2847, 2912, 2915, 2919-20, 2927-32 Society and Thought in America, 3150 Society for Establishing Useful Manu- factures (SUM), about, 6015 Society for the Advancement of Edu- cation, 5248 Society in America, 4315-17 Society in Transition, 4617 Society Islands, fiction, 476-77 Society, Manners and Politics in the United States, 4314 Society of Economic Geologists, about, 4733 Society of the Cincinnati, about, 3644 Society of the United Believers, about, 5469 Society; the Redeemed Form of Man, 5319 Socinianism, 5471 Sociology, 2717-18, 3758, 4536-37. 4541-43, 4547-48, 455L 4558-59. 4599.5351 Christian, 5484-97 hist., 3755. 4539 industrial, 4552 motion picture industry, 4948, 4951 rural, 4581, 4583-84, 5832 bibl., 4580 urban, 4587 Nev., 4184 Socrates drama, 1 176 fiction, 2413 The Sod-House Frontier, 4156 Soil conservation, 5808 Soil Conservation Service, about, 5884 Soil Survey, about, 2947 Soils, 2934, 2943-44, 2947, 5816 bibl., 2947 maps, 2943-44, 2947 Fla., 4248-50 Ga., 4248-50 Middle West, 41 13 New York (State), 4237-38 N.C., 4248-50 Pa., 4237-38 S.C., 4248-50 Southern States, 4084 The Sojourner, 1680, 2024 The Soldier, 11 66 Soldier in the White House, 3333 Soldier of Democracy , 3482 Soldier of the Republic, 3333 Soldiers, 3652, 3662, 3679, 3690-92, 3704-5. 3724 Pennsylvania German, 4479 songs, 5556, 5559, 5562 World War II, 2734 Soldiers' Pay, 1380 A Soldier's Story, 3718 Soldiers without Swords, 5497 Soley, James Russell, 3700 The Solid Gold Cadillac, 1550 The Solitary Singer, 647 A Solo in Tom-Toms, 2878 Solomon, Barbara Miller, 4423 Solstice, 1534 Sokes, Mordecai, 2898 Solum, Nora O., tr., 1722 Some Chinese Ghosts, 951-52, 955 Some Creole Melodies, 951-52 Some Enchanted Evenings, 5685 Some Laggards Yet, 638 Some Old Puritan Love Letters, 90 Some Others and Myself, 1 801 Somebody up There Likes Me, 5028 Something about Eve, 1261-62 Sometimes, 956 A Son of Earth, 1558 A Son of the Middle Border, 898-99 The Son of the Wolf, 1049-50 Sone, Monica (Itoi), 281 1-12 about, 2812 Song and Idea, 1 35 1 A Song Catcher in Southern Mountains, 5582 Song in the Meadow, 1697 The Song of Hiawatha, 432 The Song of Hugh Glass, 1645 Song of the Chattahoochee, 1038 INDEX / 1 1 77 The Song of the Indian Wars, 1645 The Song of the Larl^, 1 276-77 The Song of the Messiah, 1645 The Song of Three Friends, 1 645 Song Writers Protective Association, about, 6322 Songs, 4025, 5614, 5677 bibl., 561 1 in literature, 91 1-13. 9 22 Mexican, 4472 national, 5616 See also Folksongs and ballads; Play-party songs; Popular music and songs; Work songs Songs and Satires. 1601 Songs before Parting, 623 Songs for Eve, 1588 Songs of Italy and Others, 1066 Songs of Parting, 624 Songs of the American Seas, 1066 Songs of the Sierras, 1 066 about, 1064 Songs of the Sunlands, 1066 Sonn, Albert H., 5790 Sonneck, Oscar George Theodore, 5610, 5612, 5616, 5661, 5677 Sonnets to Duse, 181 4 Sonnichsen, Charles L., 4163 Sons, 1254 Sons and Soldiers, 2145 Sons of Science, 4775 Soper, David Wesley, 5433 Sophocles. Women of Trachis, trans- lation, 1664 Sorokin, Pitirim A., 3566 A Sort of a Saga, 2737 Sosman, R. B., 4715 Soth, Lauren, 5861 The Soul of America, 3735 Soule, George, 2407, 5877 The Soules Preparation for Christ, 33 Soulsby, Hugh G., 3558 The Sound and the Fury, 1383 The Sound Believer, 61 The Sound Wagon, 1792 Sour Grapes, 1881 The Sources of Religious Insight, 5354 The South. See Southern states South America. See Latin America The South as a Conscious Minority, 6059 The South Atlantic Quarterly, 2571 South Carolina, 3963, 4023, 4079, 4091-93 architecture, 5706 counties, 4092 culture, 3233 governors, 4092 guidebooks, 3834-36 Gullah dialect, 2271 hist., 3180, 3216, 3233, 4023, 4091-93 language (dialects, etc.), 2258, 2260 natural hist., 5087 parks, 3836 plantation life, 4517, 5087 population, 4092 soc. life & cust., 4091, 4517 travel & travelers, 4248-50, 4277-78 The South Carolina Gazette, about, 2854 South Carolina in literature descr., 1724-26 fiction, 405, 546-49. 552-53. 1512- 13, 1653, 1720-23 poetry, 614-17, 1168, 1512 short stories, 1 149, 1762 South Dakota, 3948, 3951 frontier life, 4156 guidebooks, 3896-3900 hist., 4147 rural communities, 4109 South from Hell-fer-Sartin, 5546 South Moon Under, 1681 South Pacific, 2337 South Pacific Islands in literature, 470-78 South Pole expeditions. See Antarctic expeditions South Star, 1434 South Today, 1759 Southeast Asia, relations with, 3591 Southern Folklore Quarterly, 5518 Southern Renaissance, 2442 Southern Review, 1809, 2572 Southern States, 2635, 3958, 4066-96 agriculture, 5823 architecture, 5706 culture, 4067-70, 4083-84 econ. condit., 3402-3, 4067-68, 4079, 4084, 4401, 4438, 5828, 5891 folklore, 5518, 5525 folksongs & ballads, 5572, 5582-83 guidebooks, 3827-47 historiography, 3057 hist., 3286, 3361, 3367, 3404, 3415, 3417. 3445. 345L 3754. 4067, 4070-72, 4074, 4077-78, 4080-82, 5828, 6059 industry, 4084, 5909 intellectual life, 3766, 4723 KuKluxKlan, 3386 nationalism, 4067, 4075, 4080 Negro songs, 5561, 5582 Negroes, 4443 pictorial guide, 3782 pol. & govt., 4067, 4075, 6376, 6378-79 rural press, 2853 science, 4723 soc. condit., 2721, 4066-68, 4078-79, 4084, 4438 soc. life & cust., 4081, 4097 travel & travelers, 3365, 4233, 4235, 4256-57, 4266, 4285, 4297, 4329, 4336, 4344, 4367, 4387 white spirituals, 5577 See also Confederate States Southern States in literature, 1036-37, 1724-26, 1761, 1791, 1907, 2296 anthologies, 2292, 2296, 2320 drama, 1473, 1 475-77, 2218-21, 2223, 2225, 2228 editorials, sketches, etc., 192-97, 330-32, 379-8o, 405-8. 445-48. 556-57, 612-13, 1809 essays, 618, 945. 951-52, 954~55. 1 103-4, 1679, 1791, 1809-10, 2442, 2466 Southern States in literature — Continued fiction, 226-29, 245-51, 277-79, 409-13, 546-50, 552-53. 555. 745. 749-50, 756, 946-52. 955. 1032, 1099, 1105-6, 1239-41, 1270-7, 1379-95, 1460-62, 1464- 70, 1472-74, 1512-13, 1526-29, 1618-19, '653-55. 1680-83, 1697- 1702, 1704-5, 1759-60, 1786-89, 1792-95, 1836-38, 1887-91, 1944- 45, 2023-24, 2050-51, 2090, 2174- 76, 2178, 2193, 2199, 2201-2, 2204, 2206, 2208, 2232 folklore, 910-16, 922-25 hist., 12-16, 66-68, 70-71, 149-53, 2442 humor, 192-97, 379-80, 445-48, 556-57, 856-61, 910-16, 922, 924-25 poetry, 520-30, 533, 536, 614-17, 856-58, 861, 1038-43, 1046, 1133-35. 1512, 1623-24, 1675-79, 1809, 1811, 2172, 2193, 2196, 2200, 2292 short stories, 612-13, 745-48, 756- 61, 856, 859-60, 910-22, 924-25, 951-52, 954-55. 1032-35. 1099- 1102, 1106, 1149, 1151, 1225, 1240, 1275, 1379, 1389, 1393-94, 1471, 1476, 1478, 1684, 1703, 1790, 1892, 1944, 1946, 2024, 2176-77, 2179, 2202-3, 2205, 2207, 2209, 2222, 2227 travel & travelers, 12-14, 66-68, 70- 71, 612-13 Southwest archaeology, 2992 architecture, 5723 biog. (collected), 4190 cession by Mexico, 3355 colonization, 3158 culture, 4 1 91 disc. & explor., 3158 folklore, 5503, 5507, 5509, 5518, 5520, 5531 guidebooks, 3917-26 hist., 3158, 3783-84. 3947. 3956, 4005, 4017, 4186-99, 5874 Indians, 3023, 3027 Apache, 3004 Comanche, 3014 customs, 2722 Navajo, 3013 shaminism, 3019 language (dialects, etc.), 2264 legends, 5531 Mexicans, 4475 music, 5630 Southwest, Old, 4097-4108 descr. & trav., 41 91 guidebooks, 3848-61 hist., 3287, 4098 soc. life & cust., 4098 See also Southern States Southwest in literature bibl., 2525 fiction, 1276, 1551-52, 1691 periodicals, 2562, 2572 poetry, 1984 1 178 A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Southwest in literature — Continued short stories, 1196-98, 1553, 1659, 1 691, 1762 writers &: writings, 4187 Southwest Review, 2572 The Soveraignty &■ Goodness of God, 54 Soviet Union. See Russia Sow the Golden Seed, 2896 Sowerby, Emily Millicent, comp., 6460 Spaeth, Sigmund G., 5637, 5639 Spain Civil War, 3536 culture, 1445 fiction, 1495, 1497 hist., 2294 legends & sketches, 381 relations with, 3307, 3444, 3449, 3528, 3530-31. 3569. 3572, 3707 travel ic travelers, 381, 449 Spain in the New World, 3162, 31 71 Spalding, Albert G., about, 5009 Spalding. Walter Raymond, 5672 Spanish-American War, 3448. 3554, 3707-8 diplomatic hist., 3530 fiction, 2682 naval operations, 3708 songs, 5616 Spanish Bayonet, 1222, 1224 The Spanish Borderlands, 3158 The Spanish Husband, 2302 Spanish influence arts & crafts, 5594 culture, 985, 4187, 4189. 4197-98 folklore, 5518, 5526, 5537 folksongs & ballads, 5521 language (dialects, etc.), 2264, 4198 legends, 5518, 5521 on literature, 201, 205, 2534 Spanish missions. See Missions, Indian Spanish North America colonization, 3075, 3156-58 disc. & explor., 3153, 3157-58, 3165, 3203,3217 hist., 3075, 3158, 3165 Spann, John R., ed., 5496 Spargo, John, 5791 The Spark (The 'Sixties), 1845 Sparks, Jared, about, 3057 Sparrow, Stanwood Willston, about, 4803 Spaude, Paul W., 5462 Spaulding, E. G., 5260 Spaulding, Oliver Lyman, 3664 Speak, to the Earth, 2746 Speaking Frankly, 3544 Specimen Days, 633-35 Speck, Frank G., 3009, 301 1 Speckled Trout, 741 Speculation (stocks), 5952, 5981, 5993 Speeches, addresses, etc., 230-31, 233, 276, 420-21, 460-61, 465, 467, 900 See also Lectures and Lecturing Speiser, Ephraim A., 3512 Spelling, simplified, 2469 Spelling books, 5127 Spencer, Eleanor P., 3751 Spencer, Gwladys, 6473 Spencer, Samuel R., 4450 Spengler, J. J., 3758 Spengler, Oswald, about, 2407 Sper, Felix, 4926 Spero, Sterling D.. 6192 Sperry, Willard L., 5400, 5424. 5427 about. 5427 Spewack, Bella, 2327, 2333 Spewack, Samuel, 2327, 2333 Spider Boy, 1 833 The Spider's House, 1 93 1 Spiller, Robert E., 230, 252, 267, 301, 692, 897, 2412, 2510 ed., 264, 269, 273, 2276. 2460-61 Spingarn, Joel Elias, 241 1. 251 1 Spink, J. G. T.iy!or, 5015 Spires of Form, 303 The Spirit and the Flesh, 1258 The Spirit of St. Louis, 271 5 Spirit of the Times, 379, 613, 4097, 5542 Spiritual Laws, 285 Spiritualism, 4516, 5439 Spirituals. See Negroes — spirituals: White spirituals Spitz. David. 6069 Spivack, R. G., 6195 The Splendid Idle Forties, 725 Splendid Poseur, 1064 Spoerri. William T., 3771 Spofford. Ainsworth R., about, 6469 Spohn, George Weida, ed., 2330 The Spoilage, 4469 Spoils system, 3424-25, 3437-38, 4664, 6183, 6357, 6363, 6382, 6384, 6386, 6389-90 See also Corruption (in politics) Spokane, Wash., 4150, 4217 Spoon River Anthology, 1 599-1 601 The Sport of Gods, 856 Sporting goods business, 5009 Sports, 2794, 4387, 4983-84, 4986-88, 4990-92, 4994-96, 5065-97 fiction, 5080 hist., 4990 soc. aspects, 4983 Baltimore, 4062 Berkshire Hills, Mass., 3799 Rocky Mountains, 4174 Southern States, 4083 See also Athletics; Recreation; and particular sports, e.g.. Baseball Spotswood, Alexander, fiction, 226, 228-29 Sprague, Marshall, 4181 Spring, Leverett Wilson, 4168, 5222 Spring and All, 1881 Spring Birth, 1827 Spring Thunder, 1827 Springfield. 111., 1582, 4588 Springfield, Mass., guidebook, 3802 Springfield [Mass.] Republican, about, 2879 Springfield, Ohio, guidebook, 3870 Sprout, Harold H., 3673-74 Sprout, Margaret, 3673-74 The Spy, 253-55,2311 Square dances, 4160, 5587, 5589-91 Srole, Leo, 4435 Stackpole, Edouard A., 5871 Stafford, Jean, 2156-60 Stage. See Theater Stage-Coach and Tavern Days, 4227 Stagecoaches, 4666, 5931 drivers, 4227 See also Travel and travelers — stage- coach Stage Door, 1547, 2333 Stagg, Amos Alonzo, 5043 about, 5043 Stah!, O.Glenn, 6188 Stahlberg, John, 4176 Stalin, Joseph, 3622 Stallings, Laurence, 2332 Stallman, Robert W., 828, 2383 ed., 836-37 Stalson, J. Owen, 5991 Stamp Act, 3257 Stampp, Kenneth M., 3403 Standard of living. See Cost and standard of living Standard Oil Company, about, 2824, 5913,5916 Stanley, John M.. about, 5806 Stanley, Julian C. 5229 Stanley, William O., 5158 Stanton, Alfred H., 4838 Stanton, Edwin McMasters, about. 2614 Stanwood, Edward, 6149 The Star Spangled Banner (song), 5616 about, 5616 Stark. John Stilwell, about, 5641 Starke. Aubrey H., ed., 1046 Starkey, Marion L., 3228, 3309 Starr, Harris E., 4544 ed.. 3080 Starr, Mark, 5291, 6034 Stars To-Xight, 181 4 Starved Rock, 1601 Stasheff, Edward, 4697, 5230 The State, 5279, 5310, 6073 See also specific subjects "and state," e.g., Church and state; Industry and state The State of Mind, 213 1 State of the Nation, 1330 State of the Union, 2335 State rights, 3139, 3303, 3367, 3369. 3397,6101 States and local relations, 6200, 6217-18 civil service, 6192 colleges & universities, 5163-68. 5176, 5194,5201-2 constitutions, 6080, 6086, 6195 courts. 6281-82, 6293 executive branch, 6193, 6197, 6201, 6203-4, 63 1 1 executive-legislative relations, 6203 finance, 5973 govt., 4266, 6133-35, 6137, 6167, 6195-6206, 6425, 6432 functions, 6139, 6180, 6196-97 hist., 3259 labor policy, 6192, 6195 organization, 6137, 6180, 6196- 97 govt, officials & employees, 6196-97 govt, publications, 6452 bibl., 6205 judicial branch, 6197 legislative branch, 6197 INDEX / I I 79 States — Continued legislative power, 6098, 6154-56, 6158, 6160, 6164, 6168, 6178, 6191, cases, 6091 library extension agencies, 6482 See also names of individual states, e.g., Alabama Statesmen of the Lost Cause, 3383 Statistics, 2970 See also specific subjects, e.g., Agri- culture — stat.; Census; Vital sta- tistics Statues. See Monuments The Statues, 2137 Stauffer, Donald A., ed., 2512 Steamships and steamboats hist., 4784, 5929 in literature, 784-86 Stearns, Marshall W., 5646 Stearns, Myron M., 5023 Stebbins, Richard P., 3634 Stedman, Edmund Clarence, 2513 Stedman, Laura, 2513 Stedman, Murray S., Jr., 6372 Stedman, Susan W., 6372 Steeg, Clarence Ver, 4072 Steel industry, 2825, 4061, 5909, 5918 Steel Workers' Union, about, 6039 Steele, Sir Richard, about, 381 Steele, S.S., 23 11 Steele, Wilbur Daniel, 1762-65 Steelman, John R., 4779 Steeple Bush, 1452 Steere, Douglas V., about, 5433 Steffens, Joseph Lincoln, 6207, 6432 about, 6430, 6432 StefTerud, Alfred, ed., 5817 Stegner, Wallace, 2161-65, 3782, 3961, . 4757 Steiger, Ernst, about, 6446 Stein, Gertrude, 1766-72 about, 1773-74. 2504, 2535 Stein, William B., 362 Steinbeck, John, 1775-81, 2333, 2336 about, 2376, 2427-28, 2508, 2536 Steinberg, Milton, 4457 Steinman, David B., 4801 Steinmetz, Rollin C, 4058 Stendler, Celia B., 5148 Step Right Up!, 4980 Stephen Escott, 1 576 Stephens, Alexander H., about, 2613, 3415 Stephens, John L., 2994 Stephenson, George M., 4416 Stephenson, Nathaniel Wright, 3271, 3355 Stephenson, Wendell Holmes, 3057 ed., 4072 Sterling, George, 737-38 Sterling Memorial Library, 6470 Stermer, James Edson, 4586 Stern, Bernhard J., 3009, 4815 Stern, Madeleine B., 188, 6446 Stern, Philip Van D., ed., 421, 535 Stern, Siegfried, 6002 Sterner, Richard, 4446, 4448 Stettinius, Edward R., 3567 Stevens, Henry, 6465 about, 6465 Stevens, Henry N., ed., 6465 Stevens, John, about, 4786, 4802 Stevens, John Austin, 4049 Stevens, Robert Livingston, about, 4786 Stevens, Sylvester K., 4057 Stevens, Thaddeus, about, 3362, 3368 Stevens, Wallace, 1782-84 about, 1785, 1923, 2426, 2497, 2544 Stevenson, Adlai, 3646 Stevenson, Elizabeth, 688, 1022 Stevenson, Robert Louis, 610 about, 520 Steward, Julian H., ed., 4222 Stewart, Edgar I., 3036 Stewart, George B., Jr., ed., 931 Stewart, George R., 2976, 3331, 4521 Stewart, Irvin, 4761 Stewart, Isabel M., about, 4854 Stewart, Kenneth, 2848 Stewart, Lawrence D., 5678 Stewart, Lowell O., 4800 Stewart, Paul R., 2925 Stewart, Randall, ed., 349-50, 2320, 2323 Stewart, Raymond F., 4704 Stewart, Watt, 3058 Stewart, William Drummond, about, 3330 Sticks and Stones, 5701 Stieglitz, Alfred, about, 5783 Stiles, Bert, 2813-14 about, 2814 Stiles, Helen E., 5792 Still, Bayrd, 4048, 4140 Still Seeing Things, 4909 A Stillness at Appomattox, 3692 Stilwell, H., 6195 Stilwell, Joseph W., 3723 Stimpson, George W., 6339 Stimson, Henry L., about, 3547, 3595 Stine, C. S., 4479 Stine, Oscar C, 5855 Stirring Them in Austria, 798-99 Stock, Frederick, about, 5652 Stock, Leo F., ed., 3045 Stock companies, 6008 Stocking, George W., 6026 Stocks and stock-exchange, 5981-82 Stoddard, Richard Henry, 224 The Stoic, 1337 Stokes, Anson Phelps, 5103, 5420 Stokes, Thomas L., 4016 Stokowski, Evangeline, 4968 Stone, Barton W., about, 5455 Stone, Candace, 2881 Stone, Geoffrey, 504 Stone, Harlan Fiske, about, 6249-50 Stone, Harold A., 6216 Stone, Henry, 461 Stone, Irving, 2815-21 ed., 3145 Stone, John Augustus, 518, 231 1 Stone, Kathryn H., 6216 Stone, Shepard, 3615 Stone, William L., 4049 Stone, Witmer, 4724 Stone quarrying and mining, 2991 Stone Walls and Men, 2716 Stonecutters, 5738 Storck, John. 5289 The Store, 1794 Stores. See Department stores; Chain stores; etc. Storey, Moorfield, 2696 about, 2696 Stories in the Modern Manner, 2566 Stories of the Streets and of the Town, 704 Stories on Stone, 4527 Storm, Hans Otto, about, 2536 Storm and Echo, 2096 Story, Isabelle F., 4182 Story, Joseph, 6100 about, 6231 The Story of a Bad Boy, 707-ro about, 706 The Story of a Country Town, 960-63 The Story of a Day, 1 035 The Story of a Poller Steer, 687 The Story of a Year, 1008 The Story of Bras-Coupe, 749-50 The Story of Kennett, 2282 A Story of the War, 91 1 The Story of Toby, 475 A Story Teller's Story, 1 182 The Story up to Now, 6469 Stoudt, John J., 5600 Stouffer, S. A., 3724, 6130 Stourzh, Gerald, 3187 Stout, Wesley Winans, 5043 Stovall, Floyd, 640, 2401, 2514 ed., 2515 Stowe, Harriet (Beecher), 562-^78 about, 562, 577-78, 881, 1023, 2615. 2797.3413 Stowe, W. H., 5442 The Strange Career of Jim Crow, 4444 The Strange Children, 1472 Strange Fruit, 1759-60 Strange Holiness, 1 290 Strange Interlude, 1647-48 Strange Ports of Call, 1959 Strange Victory, 1814 A Stranger Came to Port, 2746 Strangers in the Land, 4422 The Stranglers of Paris, 2315 Strategic Air Command, about, 3643a Stratemeyer, Florence B., 5158 Stratton, George Malcolm, ed., 5318 Stratton, Winficld Scott, about, 41 81 Straumann, Heinrich, 2516 Straus, Isidor, about, 5959 Straus, Nathan, 4608, 5959 Straus, Oscar S., about, 2504 The Straw, 1648 Strawberries, 741 Straws and Prayer-Bookf, 1 262 Stray Leaves from Strange Literature, 951-52 Strayer, Joseph Reese, ed., 6087 Stream of consciousness writing, fic- tion, 1161-62, 1183, 1379, 1579, 1887, 2055, 2174-75 Street, James, Jr., ed., 1791 Street, James Howell, 1786-91, 5822 Street Corner Society, 4598 A Street in Bronzeville , 1937 Street Scene, 1688-89, 2332 A Streetcar Named Desire, 2221, 2335-36 Streeter, Floyd Benjamin, 3990 Streets in the Moon, 1586 Il8o / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES The Strength of Gideon, 860 The Strength of the Strong, 1052 The Strenuous Age in American Litera- ture, 2451 The Strenuous Life, 2793 Strevey, T. E., 3058 Stribling, Thomas Sigismund, 1792-95 Strickland. W. P., ed., 2634 Strictly Dishonorable, 2332 Strike through the Mask. 1 ., 2191 Strikes, 3439, 4147, 4181, 4310, 6047 Strode, Hudson, 3369 Strong, Charles Augustus, 5255 Strong, George Templeton, 2822-23 about, 2823 Strong Cigars and Lovely Women, 4991 Structural geology, 2942 Structural psychology, 5389 A Struggle for Life, 711 The Struggle for Survival, 5879 Struggles and Triumphs, 4977 The Struggles (Social, Financial and Political) of Petroleum V . Nashy, 425 Struik, Dirk Jan, 4730 Strunsky, Simeon, 2858 Stryker, Lloyd Paul, 3411-12 Stuart, Charles, about, 3360 Stuart, Gilbert, about, 5749, 5774 Stuart, H. W., 5254 Stuart, J. E. B., about, 2613, 3703 Stuart, Jesse, 2166-73 Stuart, Lylc, 2894 Studenski, Paul, 5973 Studies in Classic American Literature, 2456 Studies in Literary Types, 2493 Studies in Logical Theory, about, 2407 Studies of a Litterateur, 2547 Studies of Good and Evil, 5354 Studs Lonigan, 1373 Stumpf, Florence Scovil, 4983 Sturges, Henry C, 224 Sturges, Preston, 2332 Sturges, Wesley A., 6299 Styron, William, 2174-75 Substance and Shadow, 53 19 The Suburb by the Sea, 1517 Subversive Activities Control Act, 6108 Subversives and subversive activities, 4424, 6112, 6119, 6130 New York (State), 61 15 Success, 3762, 6029 as a theme in literature, 2464 Such Counsels You Gave to Me, 1534 Sucker's Progress, 2586 Suckow, Ruth, 1 796-1 801 about, 1809 Suffolk County, Mass., 4036 Suffrage, 6401-2, 6405, 6409 Southern States, 6378-79 Sugar industry, 5822 Suggs, Simon, pseud. See Hooper, Johnson Jones Sullivan. Anne Mansfield, 2706 See also Macy, Anne Sullivan Sullivan, E. C, about, 4785 Sullivan, James, about, 5121 Sullivan, John Florence. See Allen, Fred Sullivan, John Lawrence, about, 5027 Sullivan, Louis Henry, 5715 about, 5703, 5715 Sullivan, Mark, 2891, 3468 about, 2891 Sullivan, Paul H., ed., 6019 Sullivan, Thelma L., 1807 Sullivant, William Starling, about, 4760 The Sultan of Sulu, 701, 705 Sulzberger, Arthur Hays, about, 2869 Suman, John Robert, about, 4803 Summer and Smoke, 2223, 2335 Summer on the Lak.es, in 1843, 314 Summer Resort, 4596 Summers, Robert E., ed., 3631 Sumner, Charles, 425, 3406 about, 2280, 2614, 3406 Sumner, Helen L., 6033 Sumner, William Graham, about, 2407, 4542,4544 The Sun (Baltimore), about, 1602, 2876 The Sun (New York), about, 2874, 2881 The Sun also Rises, 1495 Sun-Up, 2337 Sunday, Billy, about, 5403, 5480 Sunderland, Edson R., 6331 Sunrise to Sunset, 1 1 59 Sunshine and Shadow, 4955 Supernatural stories Mich., 5535 New England, 5534 See also Ghost stories Supernaturalism, Indian, 3006, 3019 Superstition Mich., 5533 Miss., 5547 New England, 5541 N.C., 5536 Ozark Mountains, 5543 Pa., 5578 Schoharie County, N.Y., 5539 Superstition, 200, 2337 Supper for the Dead, 1475 Supreme Court, 3108, 3304, 6078, 6093-94, 6096, 6098, 6101, 6120, 6147, 6151, 6236-60, 6286, 6340 decisions & opinions, 6084, 6089, 6092, 6095, 6099-6100, 6102, 6104-6, 6121, 6128-29 influence in pol. & govt., 6240 Surgeon General's Library, Washington, D.C., about, 4819 Surgeons. See Physicians and surgeons Surgery, 4821, 4824, 4827, 4831 Surgery of the eye. See Ocular surgery Surgery of the nervous system. See Neurosurgery Surrealism in literature drama, 2226 fiction, 1987, 2079, 2081, 2084 poetry, 2034 Surry of Eagle's Nest, 247-48 A Survey of the Summe of Church Discipline, 34 Susan Lennox, 11 07 Susquehanna River and valley, 4020 in literature, 675 Sut Lovingood , 331-32 Sutcliffe, Denham, ed., 171 6 Sutermeister, Edwin, 6458 Sutherland, Donald, 1774 Sutherland, Stella H., 4398 Sutter, John, about, 2659 Sutton, Albert Alton, 2910 Sutton, Francis X., 6010 Suwannee River, 3976 Svenska Amerikanaren Tribunen, about, 2895 Swallow Barn, 405-8 Swan, Howard, 5630 Swan, M. L., 5577 Swan, W. H., 5577 Swanee (song), 5678 Swanton, John R., 2985, 3012 Swedes, 4482, 4483, 4486 Swedish-American journalism, 2895 Sweeney, James Johnson, 4968 Sweeney in the Trees, 21 13 Sweet, William Warren, 5396, 5401-2, 5410-16, 5466 ed., 5412-16, 5463 Sweet Thursday, 1781 Swenson, May, 2350 Swenson, Rinehart J., 6315 Swetnam, George, 3962 Swift, Jonathan, about, 165 Swift & Co., about, 6055 Swift v. Tyson case, 6293 'Swingin Round the Cirkle' , 424 Swinnerton, James, about, 2865 Swisher, Carl Brent, 6084-85, 6238, 6258 Switzerland, travel & travelers, 426 Sword Blades and Poppy Seed, 1583-84 Sybil, 1 9 1 1 Sydnor, Charles S., 4074 A Symbolic of Motives, 2390 Symbolism in literature drama, 1069-70, 2218-19, 2226 essays, 2388, 2535 fiction, 333, 470, 478, 481-83, 491, 1281, 1379, 1388, 1494, 1500, '947> !954> I99 2 > 2023, 2081, 2212 hist. & crit., 2420 poetry, 1823, 1948 crit., 2378 The Symphony, 1038 Symphony Hall (Boston), 5649 Synagogues, 4454, 4457 Syndicalism, 6045 Syndication (newspaper), 2864, 2881, 2890, 2894 Syntax, 2243 Syrett, Harold C, 3103, 3318 Syrkin, Marie, 4457 System of Logic, 5337 Systematic Theology, 5433 Szarkowski, John, 5715 TVA. See Tennessee Valley Authority Tableau des Etats-Unis, 4507 Tacoma, Wash., 4150 Taeuber, Conrad, 4397 Taff, Charles A., 5942 Taft, Kendall B., ed., 2295 Taft, Lorado, 5740 INDEX / Il8l Taft, Philip, 6033, 6039 Taft, Robert, 5781, 5806 Taft, William Howard, about, 3464, 6255 Taft-Hartley Act, 6053 Take Them, Stranger, 2413 Tak.e Them Up Tenderly, 4931 Taking the Census, 380 A Tale for Midnight, 2087 A Tale of Two Conventions, 6350 Tales. See Legends & tales; Short stories; Tales, folk; Tall tales Tales, folk, 910-16, 922-25, 5506, 5508, 55io-i3» 55i6 Mormon, 5538 Beech Mountain, N.C., 5529 Brazos River, Tex., 5527 Ky., 5529. 5546 Mich., 5533,5535 Middle West, 5519 Miss., 5547 Mississippi River, 5523 Mo., 5528 New England, 5524, 5534 N. Mex., 5537 New York (City), 5522 New York (State), 5548 N.C., 5529, 5536 Ozark Mountains, 5545 Pa., 5578-79 Rocky Mountains, 5530 Schoharie County, N.Y., 5539 Southern States, 5525 Southwest, 5507, 5509, 5518, 5520, 5531 Tex., 5518, 5520-21, 5532 Va., 5529 West, 5526 Wise County, Va., 5529 Tales before Midnight, 1224 Tales from the Plum Grove Hills, 2170 Tales of a Time and Place, 1033 Tales of a Wayside Inn, 434 Tales of Fishes, 1 486 Tales of Lonely Trails, 5073 Tales of Soldiers and Civilians, 735 Tales of the Grotesque and Arabesque , 528 Tahfer, 171 4 Talking books, 4636 Talking to the Moon, 2730 The Talking Turtle, 5545 Tall tales, 330-32, 379-80, 511, 5506, 5508,5511-13 Ark., 5542 Mich., 5535 New England, 5534 New York (City), 5522 New York (State), 5548 Ozark Mountains, 5544 Rocky Mountains, 5530 Southern States, 5515 Southwest, 5503, 5509, 5520 Tenn., 330-32 Tex., 5520, 5532 Tallant, Robert, 3852 The T alley Method, 1210 Tallmadge, Thomas E., 5703 Talmadge, John Erwin, 2856 Tamar and Other Poems, 1534 Tambimuttu, M. J., ed., 1364 Tambo and Bones, 5640 Tamerlane, 521-27 Tammany Hall, 6382, 6387, 6390 Tammen, Harry Heye, about, 2878 Tancred, King of Sicily, 231 1 Taney, Roger B., about, 6096, 6240, 6258 Tanks (military science), 3658 Tannenbaum, Frank, 3632, 4656 Tannenbaum, Samuel A., 4891 Tansill, Charles Callen, 3587 Taos, N. Mex., 4187, 4198 drama, 1174 Tapp, Jesse W., 5855 Tappan, Arthur, about, 3360 Tappan, Lewis, 3360 Taps for Private Tussle, 2 1 69 Tar, a Midwest Childhood, 1 1 84 Tarbell, Ida M., 2824-27, 3094, 5916, 6430 about, 2827 Tariff, 3124, 3303, 3351, 3422-23, 3448, 3638, 5947, 6352, 6366, 6373,6396 See also General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade Tarkington, Booth, 968, 1802-6 about, 1808, 2504, 4124 bibl., 1807 Tascosa, Tex., hist., 4195 The Tastemakers, 5694 Tate, Allen, 1481, 1809-11, 2008 ed., 1227, 1809, 2354 about, 1812, 2499 Tate, Mrs. Allen. See Gordon, Caroline Tate, Merze, 3525 Tattered Coat, 5068 The Tattooed Countess, 1830 Tatum, Laurie, about, 3035 Tauber, Maurice F., 6487 ed., 6484 Taubman, Hyman Howard, 5624, 5627, 5662 Taussig, Frank W., 6027 Taverns. See Hotels, taverns, etc. Taxation, 5965, 5970-71, 5973, 6090, 6095, 6105 cases, 6090, 6095 gift deductions, 4615 radio & television, 4708 Tayleure, Clifton W., 2347 Taylor, Albert H., 3675 Taylor, Anne (Dewees), 5834 Taylor, Bayard, 2282, 4351-53 tr., 2282 about, 2282, 2513, 4351 Taylor, Carl C, 4583, 5833 Taylor, Charles A., 2305 Taylor, Deems, 1608, 4946, 5685 Taylor, E. G. R., 3169 Taylor, Edward, 72-74 about, 73-74 Taylor, Eugene J., 4637 Taylor, Frederick W., about, 4798 Taylor, George Rogers, ed., 3107-36, 5877 Taylor, Henry C, 5834 Taylor, Horace, 5895 Taylor, John, 2296 Taylor, Laurette, about, 4932 Taylor, Nathaniel W., about, 5428, 5436 Taylor, Paul Schuster, 4476 Taylor, Peter Hillsman, 2176-79 Taylor, Richard, 2828-30 Taylor, Robert J., 3079 Taylor, Robert Lewis, 4956 Taylor, Rosser H., 4091 Taylor, Telford, 6164 Taylor, Walter Fuller, 2517 Taylor, Zachary, about, 3332-33 Teachers and teaching, 118, 2767, 5105, 5213-23,5239,5243 academic freedom, 5132-33, 5181, 5185, 5238-39, 5243. 6115-17, 6123, 6126 colleges & universities, 5213-15, 5219, 5221-23 education & training, 5233, 5236, 5239 hist., 3050, 3055, 3059, 3083 laws & legislation, 5139 methods & techniques, 5218, 5225- 27. 5239 private schools, 5217 profession, 5128, 5216 public schools, 5134, 5216, 5239 Tead, Ordway, 5427 about, 5427 The Teahouse of the August Moon, 2336 Teale, Edwin W., ed., 1083 Team Bells Woke Me, 13 16 Teamsters' Union, about, 6039 Teapot Dome scandal, fiction, 1756 Tears and Smiles, 198 The Tears of the Blind Lions, 2039 Teasdale, Sara, 1 813-14 Tebbel, John, 2848, 2862, 2884, 2926 ed., 3171 Technical assistance, 3624, 3636, 3641 Technical societies, directory, 4728 Technology, 6440, 6454—55, 6458 awards, 4729 bibl., 4729, 6453 development, 3670-71, 371 1, 3722, 4079 hist., 4312, 4320, 4727 Tecumseh (Shawnee chief), about, 3030,3037 Teedyuscung (Delaware chief), about, 2835 Teeters, Negley K., 4639, 4657 Teichmann, Howard, 1550 Teigler, Elaine, ed., 3064 Telecommunication, 471 1 hist., 4675 laws & regulations, 4707 Telegraph, 4675, 4680-81, 4707 unions, 4681 Telephone, 4674 hist., 4675, 4679 industry, 4672, 4710 Television, 4692 advertising, 4696 audiences, 4699, 4703-4, 4895 boxing, 5033 broadcasting, 4682, 4686, 4691-92, 4694-95, 4697, 4699, 4703-5. 4965 in education, 4685, 4688, 4705, 5230-31 in religion, 4702 Il82 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Television — Continued journalists, 2848, 2894 laws & regulations, 4708 Teller, James D., 4742 Temperance movement, 4516, 4528 fiction, 190-91 A Temperance Town, 2306 The Tempers, 1881 Temple School, Boston, about, 5220 The Temptation of Roger Heriott, 2059 The Ten Grandmothers, 3007 Ten Nights in a Bar-Room, 191 Ten North Frederick, 2078 Ten Years in Japan, 3545 Tender Buttons, 1771 Tender Is the Night, 1 429 Tenement life, 2703-4 New York (City), 4638 Tennessee, 3945, 3963, 4079, 4103-5 caves, 2946 frontier life, 4097 guidebook, 3855 hist., 3287, 3353, 4021, 4103 pol. & govt., 4103 travel & travelers. 366, 4277-78 Tennessee in literature fiction, 1464, 1468, 1470, 1472, 1792 humor, 330-32 language (dialects, etc.), 330-32 short stories, 1684-88 Tennessee River and valley. 4006 Tennessee Valley Authority, 4006, 4794, 5892 Tennessee's Partner, 930, 937. 939 Tenney Committee. See California. Senate. Fact-Finding Committee on Un-American Activities in California Tennis, 4987, 4993, 5046-47, 5049-50, 5052 The Tent on the Beach, 668 The Tenth Muse Lately Sprung tip in America, 8 Terence. Andria, about, 1864 Terrible Woman, 1762 Territorial expansion overseas, 3428, 3527, 3531, 3540 The West, 3075, 3138, 3161, 3307, 3314, 3330, 3337, 3340, 3354, 3663, 3760, 4146, 4218 Terror and Decorum, 2190 Terry. John Skally, 1893 The Testament of Man, 1420 Texas, 3964, 4188, 4192-97 architecture, 5723 bibl., 4190 boundaries, 3355 descr. & trav., 3949 econ. condit., 4193 fiction, 1985, 1987 folklore, 5507, 5509, 5518, 5520-21, 5532 frontier life, 2733 German immigrants, 4478 govt., 6195 governors, 4194 guidebooks, 3917-23 hist., 2650, 2866, 3314, 3353-55, 3949, 3956, 4189. 4193-94, 4196 Mexican labor, 4476 naturalists, 4734 Texas — Continued pictorial work, 4153 relations with France, 3577 relations with Gr. Brit., 3554, 3577 short stories, 1659 soc. condit., 4193 travel & travelers, 4365 U.S. Senators, 4194 Texas Folklore Society, about, 5518 Texas Sheepman, 2733 The Texas Review, 2572 A Texas Steer, 2348 Textile arts, 5595, 5600, 5604 Thacher, Thomas, 2493 Thanatopsis, 217 Thane, Eric. See Henry, Ralph Chester Tharp, Louise Hall, 5125 That Fortune, 1 1 42 That Girl from Memphis, 1763 That Reminds Me, 2598 That Spot, 1058 Thatcher , Virginia S., 4816 That's All that Matters, 1871 Thayer, Frank, 291 1 Thayer, Horace S., 5283 Thayer, James Bradley, 5387 Thayer, John E., ed., 55 Thayer, Sylvanus, about, 3656 Thayer, Vivian T., 5103, 5238, 5491 Thayer, William R., 689 Theater, 2743, 4897-4943, 4929, 4932, 4981 anthology, 4896 Colonial period, 3748 criticism, 4906—12 design, 5689 experimental plays, 2535 fiction, 1688 hist., 4899-4900, 4902-3, 4905, 4909, 4912, 4929-30, 4932, 4941 little theater movement, 1647, 1762, 4901 yearbooks, 4897, 4906 Calif., 2798, 4923 Colo., 4925 Nashville, 3765 New Orleans, 4922 New York (City), 2017, 4907-9, 4916, 4924, 4935, 4942-43 Ohio, 4121 Philadelphia, 5659 St. Louis, 4913 San Francisco, 4918, 4943 Toledo. Ohio, 4894 See also Drama; Musical comedy; Opera Theatre Arts, 4896 Theatre Guild, about, 4941 Theatrical dancing, 2472, 4971 Theatricals, 3736 Their Eyes Were Watching God, 1528 Their Fathers' God, 1723 Theologians, 5425-27, 5433 Theology, 3758, 5409, 5433 hist., 5436, 5438, 5489 in literature, 17, 21, 26, 32, 40, 59, 84, 230, 2483 See also Religious themes in lit- erature Theology — Continued natural, 5338 study i; teaching, 5423-24 New England, 5428 See also Philosophy — and religion A Theology for the Social Gospel, 5482 The Theory of American Literature, 2446 The Theory of Business Enterprise, about, 2407 Theory of Flight, 2106 The Theory of Human Culture, 5351 Theory of Literature, 2529 The Theory of the Leisure Class, 4538 Theosophy, 5439 There Is Another Heaven, 1637 There Shall Be No Night, 1753 There Will Be Bread and Lore, 1295 These Also Believe, 5439 These Bars of Flesh, 1792 These Many Years, 2473 These Things Are Mine, 2744 These 13, 1379 They Also Ran, 2817 They Built the West, 4150 They Came Like Swallows, 203 1 They Gathered at the River, 5403 They Knew What They Wanted, 15 1 8, 2327, 2332 They Seek. 1 Country, 5466 They Stooped to Folly, 1 46 1 They Took to the Sea, 5021 Thies, Frieda C, comp., 1046 Third party movements. See Political parties The Third Person, 1012 Thirteen Americans, 542J The Thirteen Colonies census, 4398, 4400 commerce, 3193, 3243, 3262 culture, 3088, 3236 elections, 6401 German immigrants, 4477 govt., 3195, 3221, 6088 hist., 3087-88, 3141, 3!57, 3J7 1 , 3176-77, 3179, 3188, 3190, 3202, 3221,3236 Scotch immigrants, 4491 Scotch-Irish immigrants, 4490 trade, 4398 Thirteen O'clock, 1224 _j 5,000 Days in Texas, 2866 This Body the Earth, 1474 This Green Thicket World, 1838 This House against This House, 2807 This Life I've Led, 4996 This Modern Poetry, 2413 This Music Crept by Me upon the Waters, 1587 This Reckless Breed of Men, 4186 This Side of Paradise, 1426 This Simian World, 13 17-18 This Was Normalcy, 3500a Thistlethwaite, Frank, 3146 Thomas, Allen C, 5467 Thomas, Augustus, 2337, 2347-48 Thomas, Benjamin Franklin, 6447 Thomas, Benjamin P., 3392, 3395, 3413 Thomas, Dorothy S., 4428, 4446, 4469 Thomas, Elbert D., 5427 about, 5427 INDEX / 1 183 Thomas, George Henry, about, 2614 Thomas, Harrison Cook, 6373 Thomas, Isaiah, 6447 about, 6447 Thomas, Jeannette (Bell), 3963, 5584 Thomas, Lewis V., 3513 Thomas, Milton Halsey, ed., 2823 Thomas, Norman M., 6433 Thomas, Robert B., 5541 Thomas, Theodore, about, 5652 Thomas, William I., 4495 Thomas Aquinas, about, 5289 T homas-T homas-Ancil-T homas , 1 293 Thomason, John W., 3703 Thompson, Alan Reynolds, 2425 Thompson, Benjamin, about, 4721, 4724 Thompson, Charles Manfred, 41 31 Thompson, Charles Seymour, 6472 Thompson, Daniel G. Brinton, 4043 Thompson, Daniel Pierce, 579-84 Thompson, Esther Katherine, 5823 Thompson, Harold W., 5548 Thompson, Holland, 4792 Thompson, John Eric S., 2994, 2997 Thompson, L. S., 4481 Thompson, Manley H., 5350 Thompson, Oscar, 5663 Thompson, Ralph, 2518 Thompson, Randall, 5670 Thompson, Robert L., 4680 Thompson, Ronald, 3065 Thompson, Stith, ed., 3021, 5518 Thompson, Warren S., 4399, 4594 Thompson, William Boyce, about, 2682 Thomson, Charles A. H., 3607 Thomson, Elizabeth H., 4759, 4821 Thomson, Virgil, 1771 Thoreau, Henry David, 585-608, 2290 about, 186, 280, 470, 606, 609-11, 619, 740, 2277, 2287, 2364, 2394, 2397, 2422, 2453, 2476, 2479, 2481 bib!., 589, 599 Thoreau, Sophia, ed., 594, 596 Thornbrough, Gayle, comp., 4125 Thorndike, Edward L., 4595 about, 51 16 Thorne, Florence Calvert, 6050 Thornthwaite, Charles Warren, 2937 Thornton, Harrison John, 3058, 5835 Thornton, Richard H., 2240 about, 2240 Thorp, Margaret (Farrand), 4950 Thorp, Willard, 2412 ed., 481, 492, 2355, 2460-61, 4083 Thorp, Willard Long, 6030 Thorpe, Francis Newton comp., 6086 ed., 5130 Thorpe, Thomas Bangs, 612-13, 554 2 Those Not Elect, 1 1 54 Those Were the Days, 5090 Thoughts on Death and Life, 5316 Thoughts without Words, 13 18 A Thousand-Mile Walk, to the Gulf, 1079 Thrasher, Frederic M., 4658 The Thread That Runs So True, 2166 The Three Black. Penny s, 1 507 Three Cities, 1 1 90 "The Three Colored Aces," 5025 Three Essays on America, 2380 Three Lives, 1 767 Three Men on a Horse, 2333 Three Men on Third, 5013 3 Smiths in the Wind, 2150 Three Soldiers, 1326 The Three Taverns, 171 4 Three Worlds, 2523 Threshold and Hearth, 1906 Throckmorton, Archibald H„ ed., 6275 Through the Brazilian Wilderness, 2794 Through the Eye of the Needle, 978 Thurber, James Grover, 1815-20, 2334 drawings, 181 5 Thursfield, Richard E., 5128 ed., 3059 Thurso's Landing, 1534 Thwaites, Reuben Gold, ed., 3299 Thwing, Charles F., 5188 Ticknor, George, about, 2462, 2534, 3776 Ticonderoga, Fort, fiction, 580-82 Tidwell, James Nathan, 2257 ed., 518 Tiffany, Herbert Thorndike, 6278 Tiger in the House, 1 828 Tiger Joy, 1224 Tiger-Lilies, 1046 Tilden, Freeman, 5866 Tilden, Samuel Jones, about, 3430 Tilden, William T., 5052 about, 5052 Tilghman, Benjamin Chew, about, 4786 Till Fish Us Do Part, 5070 Till the Day I Die, 2064 Tillich, Paul, about, 5433, 5436 Tilquin, Andre, 5393 Tilton, Eleanor M., ed., 377 Tilton, Theodore, about, 5476 Timber Line, 2878 Timberlake, Craig, 4943 Timberland Times, 2661 Time in the Rock., 1 1 66 The Time of Man, 1698 The Time of Your Life, 2110, 211 2, 2327, 2334, 2336 A Time to Act, 1585 Time to Come, 1959 Time Will Darken It, 2033 Times-Herald (Washington, D.C.), about, 2862 The Times-Picayune (New Orleans), about, 2871 Timoleon, 488 Timrod, Henry, 614-18 Tindall, George, 4072 Tinker, Edward Larocque, 748, 4101 Tinling, Marion, ed., 15 tr., 16 Tinware, 5726, 5787 The Titan, 1337 Titchener, Edward B., about, 5389 'Tite Poulette, 748 To a Waterfowl, 217 To Build a Eire, 1052, 1058 To Helen, 526 To the Finland Station, 2535 Tobacco industry, 5823, 5829 fiction, 2194 Tobacco Road, 1271, 2333 Tobey, James A., 4876 Tobias, Channing H., 5427 about, 5427 Tobin, James, 6010 Tocqueville, Alexis de, 4509-12 about, 4512 The Tocsin of Revolt, 2474 Todd, Charles B., 101 Todd, Mable (Loomis), ed., 839-41, 843, 847-49 Together, 956 Toilers of the Hills, 1421 Toledo, Ohio entertainment, 4894 politics, 6434 Tolles, Frederick B., 3229 Tolley, Howard R., 5837 Tolman, Richard C, about, 4722 Tom Owen the Bee-Hunter, pseud. See Thorpe, Thomas Bangs Tom Sawyer, The Adventures of, 778- 83,811 Tomas, Vincent, ed., 5349 Tomorrow the New Moon, 1920 Tomorrow the World, 2334 Tompkins, Pauline, 3568 Toombs, Robert, about, 2613, 3405 Top, Franklin H., ed., 4877 Topical songs, 5552, 5556, 5564, 5575, 5584 Torbet, R. G., 5442-43 Tories, 3262, 3267, 3272, 4044 Tornadoes, 2948 Torpey, William G., 5421, 6193 Torrence, Frederic Ridgely, 1821-22 Torrey, Bradford, ed., 600 Torrey, John, about, 4760 Torrielli, Andrew J., 3779 Tort Claims Act of 1948 (Federal), 6313 Tortesa, the Usurer, 676, 2337, 2347 Tortilla Flat, 1780 Torts, 6230, 6279 Toscanini, Arturo, about, 2638, 5622 A Tour of the Prairies, 381 Tourtellot, Arthur Bernon, 3991, 6340 Toward a Better Life, 2387 Toward the Flame, 1 170 Toward the Gulf, 1 60 1 The Town, 1694 The Town down the River, 171 4 Town Hall Tonight, 4902 Town Meeting Country, 3965 The Town with the Funny Name, 2746 Towne, Charles Wayland, 5874 Towns. See Cities and towns Towns and villages in literature drama, 1865, 2223 editorials, sketches, etc., 701 essays, 418 fiction, 562, 572-73, 576, 959-63, 1178, 1225, 1299, 1301, 1453, 1560, 1568, 1694, 1705, 1786, 1789, 1830, 1964, 1997, 2005. 2033, 2070, 2129, 2163, 2208 hist. & crit., 2438 personal narrative, 1543 poetry, 1 599-1 601, 1727, 1731 short stories, 415-17, 562, 574-75, 1023-31, 1178-79, 1476, 1797 1 184 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Townsend, Harvey Gates, 5262 ed., 5298 Townsend of Lichfield, 1 262 Trachtenberg, Joshua, 4459 The Track of the Cat, 1957 Tracy's Tiger, 2120 Trade Colonial period, 4069, 4398 Indian, 2993, 3009 Santa Fe, 4148 See also Commerce Trade associations, 6008, 6019 Trade book publishing, 6437-38, 6441 Trade-marks, 4781 Trade regulation. See Commerce — govt, regulation Trade schools, 5210 Trade unions, 5899, 6032-42, 6049, 6054, 6192 See also names of individual organi- zations, e.g., National Telegraph Union Trading posts, Indian, 3028 Traffic courts, 6307 Traffic regulation, 4655, 4659-60 Tragedy. See Drama The Tragedy of "Superstition," 200 The Tragic Era, 3362 Tragic Ground, 1274 Trail Driving Days, 4158 The Trail -Maimers of the Middle Border, 898 Train, Arthur C, 6306 The Traitor, 2229 The Trampling Herd, 4158 Transatlantic Migration, 2508 Transcendentalism, 186-87, 230, 239, 280-82, 313, 585, 2279-80, 3134, 5256, 5259, 5263, 5301, 5305 anthology, 2346 essay, 2401 fiction, 333, 402-4 poetry, 619 anthology, 2328 Transcontinental routes, 2971 Transitions in American Literary His- tory, 2401 Transport to Summer, 1784 Transportation, 41 13, 4221, 5920-43 automotive, 5942 govt, regulation, 5921, 5924 hist., 4227, 4281, 5877, 5920, 5923-24 in art, 5801 inventions, 4787 Mississippi Valley, 41 10 New England, 5933 N.C., 4090 Northwest, Old, 41 12 Northwest, Pacific, 4214 Ohio, 41 19 Rocky Mountains, 4174 Tex., 4194 The West, 4349 See also Travel & travelers Trappers, folklore, 5523 Trappists, 2034 Traubel, Horace L., 658 ed., 627, 637 Traumatic surgery, 4873 Trautman, Ray, 6485 Travel and travelers, 4223-4389 bibl., 4229 fiction, 1656 horseback, 36-39 river, 4247, 4281 See also names of individual rivers stagecoach, 4227 See also subdivisions Guidebooks and Travel & travelers under names of places and regions, e.g., New Eng- land — Guidebooks; Indiana — travel & travelers A Traveler from Altruria, 978 The Traveling Anecdote, 5509 Travelling with a Reformer, 798-99 Travels in Two Democracies, 2535 Treadmill to Oblivion, 4964 Treadwell, Sophie, 2332 Treason, 3148, 3273 American Revolution, 3264 Treasure-trove, folklore, 5531-32 The Treasurer's Report, and Other As- pects of Community Singing, 1214 Treaties, 3522, 3526, 3540, 3612 Treatise on the Atonement, 5428, 5473 Treaty-making power, 3612 Treaty of Ghent, 3329, 3542 A Tree, a Rock,, a Cloud, 2024 A Tree Is a Tree, 4962 The Tree Named John, 5547 The Tree of Life, 1433 A Tree of Night, 1946 Trees, 2960, 2963-64 The Trees, 1 694 Trembling Prairie, 5351 Trent, William Peterfield, 393, 2393, 4501 ed., 2345, 2393, 4724,4786 Trent Collection, Duke University, 643 Trente ans, ou La vie d'un joueur, 2299 Trial by Time, 1410 Trial courts, 6285 See also Courts Trial of a Poet, 2143 Trial practice, 6295-96 Trial procedure, 6282 Trial without fury, 2302 Trials, 6292, 6298, 6322 criminal, 6229 Triangle Fire case, 6229 Tribute to the Angels, 1323 Trifles, 2332 Trigg, Oscar L., 620 comp., 637 Trilling, Lionel, 792, 2406, 2412, 2519-20, 5197 A Trilogy of Desire, 1337 Trimble, Bruce R., 6259 Trinity Church, New York (City) Choir, about, 5666 A Trip to Chinatown, 2306 The Triple Thinkers, 2539 Trippe, Juan, about, 5941 Tristram, 171 4 The Triumph, 3495 Triumph of Freedom, 3255 The Triumph of Infidelity, 120 The Triumph of Night, 1 851 The Triumph of the Egg, 1181 Triumphant Democracy, 3434 Trivial Breath, 1903 Trollope, Anthony, 4375-76 about, 4374 Trollope, Frances (Milton), 4304-06 about, 4303 Tropic of Cancer, 161 1 Tropic of Capricorn, 161 2 Trouble in July, 1273 Trouble on Lost Mountain, 920 The Trouble with Cops, 4642 The Troubled Air, 2158 Troupers of the Gold Coast, 2798 Trow, Martin A., 6455 Troy, N.Y., fiction, 11 59 Trucking industry, 5942 Trudeau, Livingston, about, 4868 True, Alfred Charles, 5836 True, Frederick W., ed., 4774 True Account of America for the In- formation and Help of Peasant and Commoner, 4485 Truesdell, Leon E., 4474 Truman, Harry S., 3500b, 5189 about, 3489 Truman, Stanley R., 4817 Trumbull, J. H.', ed., 89 Trumbull, John (1750-1831), 165-67 about, 167, 2365 Trumbull, John (1756-1843), 5775 about, 5775 Trumbull County, Ohio, 3872 Trumpets of Jubilee, 2797 Trumps, 2278 Trust, 1058 Trust companies, 5998, 6006 Trusts, industrial, 3121, 6008, 6026 govt, control, 6004 The Trusty Knaves, 1 687 Truxal, Andrew G., 4572 Tryon, Rolla Milton, 5919 Tryon, Warren S., ed., 4235 Tsanoff, R. A., 5252 Tuberculosis, control, 4868, 4881 Tucker, Glenn, 3037 Tucker, Samuel M., ed., 909 Tuckerman, Bayard, ed., 2691 Tuckerman, Henry T., 4230 Tucson, Ariz., 4176, 4187 Tufts, James H., 5254, 5273, 5289 Tufts, MatildeC, 5289 Tugwell, Rexford Guy, 2407, 3498 ed., 5827 about, 5888 Tulips and Chimneys, 1309, 1313 Tulloch, Avis, sculptures, 2994 Tulsa, Okla. guidebook, 3909 hist., 41 71 The Tumult and the Shouting, 4994 Tuna industry, fiction, 2746 Tunnard, Christopher, 4609 Tunney, Gene, 3488, 5031 about, 4987, 5031 Turbulent Era, 3545 Turkey, relations with, 3513, 3545 The Turmoil, 1806 The Turn of the Screw, 1007, 1012 Turn West, Turn East, 817, 1017 Turnbull, Archibald D., 3676, 4802 Turnbull, George S., 2863 Turner, Arlin, 752 INDEX 1 185 Turner, Frederick Jackson, 3083, 3147, 3356-57. 3784 about, 2407, 3058, 3137, 3147, 4540, 5222 Turner, Julius, 6398 Turner, Lorenzo Dow, 2271 Turner, Nat, about, 5502 Turner, Scott, about, 4803 The Turning Wheel, 5940 A Turning Wind, 2106 Turns and Movies, 1 1 66 Turpie, Mary C, 5757 comp., 5613 Tuskegee Institute, Tuskegee, Ala., 4450 Tutt, Ephraim, about, 6306 Twain, Mark, 768-812, 2290, 2367 about, 445, 542, 745, 813-20, 926, 982, 1017, 1126, 2380, 2416-17, 2468, 2474, 2517, 2616 'Twas All for the Best, 2309 Tweed (William Marcy) Ring, 6387 Twelve Men, 1342 Twelve Men in a Box, 6295 The Twenties, 2440 Twentieth Century Authors, 2455 Twentieth Century Fund. Committee on Cartels and Monopoly, 6026 Twentieth Century Fund. Housing Committee, 4610, 5896-97, 6040 Twentieth-Century Literature in Amer- ica, 2356-62 XXIV Elegies, 1433 27 Wagons Full of Cotton, 2220 20,000 Leagues under the Sea; or, David Copperfield, 1215 Twice-Told Tales, 334-37 about, 333, 538 Twichell, Joseph H., ed., 90 The Twin Adventures, 2119 Twins of Genius, 745 Twiss, Benjamin R., 6101 Two Blades of Grass, 5857 Two Gentlemen in Bonds, 1677 Two Lives, 1556 Two Minutes Till Midnight, 3621 Two Old Colonial Places, 1 103-4 Two on an Island, 1689 Two on the Aisle, 4909 Two Reels and a Cranky, 4961 Two Slatterns and a King, 1608 The Two Sons-in-Law, 2302 Two-thirds of a Nation, 4608 Two Years before the Mast, 275, 479 Tyler, Alice (Felt), 4522 Tyler, John, about, 3323-24, 3540 Tyler, Lyon Gardiner, ed., 71, 3218 Tyler, Moses Coit, 2521-22, 3263 about, 2521 Tyler, Royall, 168-70, 2312, 2337, 2347 Type and type-founding, 6442, 6448, 6456, 6459 Typee, 471-75 Types of Philosophy, 53 10 Typhus, 2843 The Tyranny of Sex, 1 573 U.S.A., 1325, 1328 U.S.A., the Permanent Revolution, 4503 U.S. 1, 2106 U.S. One, Maine to Florida, 3790 U.S.S.R. See Russia Ukrainians, 4492 Ullman, Edward L., 2937 Ulman, Joseph N., 6291 Ulman, Lloyd, 6041 Ulrich, Carolyn F., 2914 Ulriksson, Vidkunn, 4681 Umbra, 1666 Unc' Edinburg's Drowndin', 1 100-2 Uncle Ethan Ripley, 893 Uncle Moses, 1 192 Uncle Remus. See Harris, Joel Chandler Uncle Sam's Acres, 5809 Uncle Sam's Stepchildren, 3034 Uncle Sam's Uncle Josh, 545 Uncle Tom's Cabin, 563-67, 749-50, about, 562 2347 Uncle Tom's Children, 2234 The Undeclared War, 3538 Under Duk,e and King, 4044 Under the Bridge, 2680 Under the Lion's Paw, 893 Undercliff, 1352 Underground River, 2123 Underhill, Ruth Murray, 2986, 3013 Understanding the American past, 3062 Undertakers and undertaking, 4527 Underworld, 2586, 4652 language (slang, etc.), 2274 Unemployment, 3440, 6048 Unemployment insurance. See Social security Unfinished Cathedral, 1 795 Unger, Leonard, ed., 1370 Union List of Serials, 2915 A Union Officer in the Reconstruction, 277 Union Pacific Railroad, about, 5927, 5932 Union Portraits, 261 4 Union reporters, 2851 Unions, labor. See Trade unions Unit instruction in education, 5158 Unitarianism, 230, 239, 280, 402, 900, 2279, 5404, 5428, 5442, 5470 hist., 5435, 5471-72 Salem, Mass., 2600 United Brethren, 4480 United House of Prayer of All People, about, 5498 United Nations, 3557, 3635 special agencies, 3633 U.S. particiaption, 3619, 3633 The United Netherlands, History of, 2293 United Packinghouse Workers of Amer- ica, about, 6055 United Presbyterian Church, 5442, 5466 United Press, about, 2860, 2890 United Service Organizations for Na- tional Defense, theater production, 4919 United States. For official agencies of the U.S. government, see the name of the agency, e.g., Congress; Dept. of State United States Commission on Organi- zation of the Executive Branch of the Government, 5099 United States Exploring Expedition (1838-42), about, 4749 United States Steel, 5918 Unity School of Christianity, 5439 Universalism, 5428 bibl., 5473 Universalist Church of America, 5442, Universities. See Colleges and uni- versities The University of Kansas City Review, 2573 University Players, 4920 University presses. See Printing — uni- ersity presses Unknown Soldier (World War I), about, 4533 Unpartisan Review, 689 Untermeyer, Louis, 1584 ed., 221, 290, 443, 673, 845, 2363 Unto Such Glory, 1 475 Untriangulated Stars, 1 7 1 6 The Untried Years, 1020 The Unvanquished (Fast), 1976 The Unvanquished (Faulkner), 1389 Up from Methodism, 2587 Up from Slavery, 4449 Up Front, 2735 UpStream, 1572, 1575 Up the Coolly, 893 Updegraff, Clarence M., 6058 Updike, Daniel Berkeley, about, 6459 Updyke, Frank A., 3542 Upper class, 3139, 3434, 4524, 4538, 6063, 6070 New England, 3279 New York (State), 6374 Southern States, 3766 The Thirteen Colonies, 3236 Va., 3234, 3749 Uppsala. Universitet. Amerikanska Seminariet, 2364-68 The Uprooted, 441 1 Upstage, 4909 Upton, Emory, 3651 Upton, William Treat, 5614 ed., 5610 Urban, W.M., 5252 Urban blight, redevelopment, etc. See Cities and towns — planning; Housing Urban communities. See Cities and towns; Communities, urban Urban folklore, 5510-11, 5514 New York (City), 5522 Urban government. See Local govern- ment Urban Land Institute. Central Busi- ness District Council, 4603 Urbana, Ohio, 3871 Urology, 4832 Useful arts. See Decorative arts; Arts and crafts Ushant, 1 1 65 The Usurper, 23 1 1 Utah, 4183 fiction, 1420, 1424 govt., 6195 Il86 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Utah — Continued .guidebooks, 3914-15 hist., 2161, 3956, 3961, 4174, 4183, 4189 Indians, 3023 Mormons, 5465 Utah Humanities Review, 2575 Ute Indians, 3041, 4174 Utlcy, George Burwell, 6486 Utopian themes, fiction, 726, 728-31, 956, 978, 2019 Utopias (settlements), 4525 See also Brook Farm; Fruitlands; Harmony Society Utter, William T., 3058, 4121 V -Letter, 2 141 Vail,R. W. G., 161 Vaillant, George C., 2997 Valente. John, 632 Valien, Bonita, 4441 Vallandigham, Clement, 3149 The Valley Below, 2724 Valley Forge, drama, 1 1 74 The Valley Nis, 526 The Valley of Decision, 1846 Value, theory of, 5252, 5334 Van Amringe, John Howard, about, 5197 Vance, Rupert B., 3785, 4068, 4084, 4401 Van den Bark, Melvin, 2272 Vandenberg, Arthur H., 3548 Vanderbilt, Arthur T., 6270 ed., 6307 Vanderbilt, Cornelius, about, 5054, 5880,5882,5935 Vanderpoel, Emily (Noyes), 5793 Van Dersal, William R., 5818 Van Deusen, Glyndon G., 2883, 3343- 44 Van Devander, Charles W., 6390 Van Doren, Carl, 127, 133, 480, 796, 827, 834, 905, 1904, 2523-24, 3185, 3187, 3264, 6088 ed., 129, 2393 Van Doren, Charles, comp., 3152 Van Doren, Mark, 363, 641, 660, 849, 1823-27 ed., 13, 57, 176, 358, 4249-50 Van Druten, John, 2334-36 Van Dyke. Henry, 5095-96 Van Dyke, T. S., 5091 Van Every, Edward, 5032 Van Gogh. See Gogh, Vincent van Vanguards of the Frontier, 4155-56 The Vanishing Virginian, 8241 Van Kirk, Walter M., 5496 Van Metre, Thurman W., 5924, 5948 Van Nostrand (D.) Company, about, 6453 Van Nostrand, Jeanne Skinner, 4202 Van Riper, Paul P., 6174 Van Santvoord, George, ed., 924 Van Tyne, Claude H., 3265-67 about, 3058 Van Vechten, Carl, 1828-33, 1904, 4972, 5678 Van Vechten, Carl — Continued ed., 1771 about, 1835 bibl., 1834 Vanzetti, Bartolomeo drama, 1173 fiction, 1980 The Varieties of Religious Experience, 5431 Varmints, 1684 Vassar College, about, 5670 Vaudeville, 4892, 4973-76 hist., 4974 Vaudeville for a Princess, 2138 Vaughan, Floyd L., 4781 Veblen, Thorstcin, 5190 about, 2407, 4538, 4540, 4545, 5888, 6424 Vegetation, 2956-57, 2959, 2966, 2969, 5816 Vein of Iron, 1460-61 The Venetian Glass Nephew, 1904 Venezuela, fiction, 1792 Ventura County, Calif., 3957 A Venture in Remembrance, 2698 Verbrugghen, Henri, about, 5654 Veritism, 890 Vermilion, Ohio, 2958 Vermont, 4010, 4033 boundary, 4027 econ. condit., 4031 farm life, 2742 fiction, 579-84, 141 1, 1414-15, 1417, 1635 folksongs & ballads, 5574 guidebook, 3797 hist., 1419, 4033 poetry, 1451-52 soc. life & cust., 4031 travel & travelers, 4290 Vermont. University, 5223 Versailles Treaty, 31 11, 3471, 3541 Verse, light, 368, 878-80, 1629-34, 1651-52, 1859, 1863 Verse, vernacular, 753-55, 856-59, 861, 878-80, 933, 941-44, 1038, 1126- 31, 1133-35 See also Poetry — humorous Verse drama, 144-45, 198, 200-1, 205, 1069-70, 1172, 1174, 1357, 1359- 60, 1535, 1585, 1587, 1608, 1664, 2098, 2101, 2134-35 criticism, 1 175 Versification, theory, 216, 520, 538, 614, 618, 1038, 1044-46 Versus, 1633 Very, Jones, 280, 2544 Vespucci, Amerigo, about, 3172 Vestal, Stanley, pseud., 2525, 2831-33, 3964, 4001, 4175, 4190 Veterans, 3652 organizations, 3644-45 World War II, 2736 Vicissitudes Exemplified , 2805 Vickery, Olga W., ed., 1399 Victor Talking Machine Company, about, 5618 Victorian Knight-Errant , 449 A Victorian Village, 2781 The Victory at Sea, 3J16 Victory at Sea (music), about, 5685 Vidal, Gore, 2180-88 about, 2371 Vidor, King W., 4962 about, 4962 Viereck, Peter, 2189-92, 2363 A View from the Bridge, 2049 Vigilance Committees, 6220 Vignettes of Manhattan, 2466 Village Daybook^, 1965 Village Year, 1959 Villages immigrant, 4406 Middle West, 4109, 4197 Villains Galore, 2916 Villard, Oswald Garrison, 2849, 3414 Villon, Francois, fiction, 2413 Vincent, Howard P., 481 ed., 491 Vincent, J. M., 4540 Vinde, Victor, 4232 A Vindication of the Government of New England Churches, 94-95 Vines, Howell Hubert, 1836-38 Vineyard, Catherine Marshall, 5507 Viniculture, Calif., 4494 Vinson, Fred M., about, 6262, 6256 Vinton, Stallo, 4148 The Violent Wedding, 201 1 Virgin Islands, 4218 Virgin Land, 3759 Virgin Spain, 1445 Virginia, 3963, 4079, 4085-88 architecture, 5706 biog. (collected), 3749 caves, 2946 culture, 3233-34 descr., 149-53 econ. condit., 4085 education, 5122 folklore, 5529 guidebooks, 3827-29 hist., 12-16, 66-68, 70-71, 149-53, 245, 3218, 3233-34, 3271, 3295, 3977. 4073 pictorial works, 4086 in literature drama, 1477 editorials, sketches, etc., 192-93, 1099, 1103-4, 1106, 1267 fiction, 226-29, 245-51, 405-8, 516, 1099, 1105-6, 1261, 1460-62, 1466, 1469 short stories, 405-8, 1099-1102, 1 106 intellectual life, 3749 language (dialects, etc.), 2255-56 mounds, 2996 plantation life, 4517 politics, 2740 soc. life & cust., 2603, 2841, 3749, 4086-87, 4517 travel & travelers, 12-13, 66-68, 70- 71, 366, 4269, 4279, 4283, 4310 Virginia University, 5122, 6466 Virginia City, Nev., 4184-85, 5630 The Virginia Comedians, 246 The Virginia Gazette, about, 2854 The Virginia Quarterly Renew, 2574 The Virginian, 1145-48, 2316 The Virginians, 405 Visher, Stephen S., 2952, 4725 INDEX / 1 187 The Vision, 121 The Vision of Columbus, 104 The Vision of Sir Launfal, 455 Visson, Andre, 3772 Vistas of New York., 2466 Vitagraph, 4961 Vital statistics, 4402 See also Census Vocational education, 5105, 521 1, 5246 colleges & universities, 5179 Federal participation, 521 1 foreign countries, 521 1 secondary, 5156, 521 1 Vogt, P. L., 4594 Voice in the West, 2867 The Voice of Bugle Ann, 1 54 1 The Voice of the City, 1 1 16-1 8 The Voice of the Desert, 2453 The Voice of the People, 1 461 The Voice of the Street, 1656 The Voice of the Turtle, 2334 Voices of Freedom, 664 Vollmer, August, 4659 Vollmer, Lula, 2337 Voltaire, about, 2770 A Volunteer's Adventures, 277, 3693 Von Abele, Rudolph R., 3415 Von Stroheim, Erich, about, 4960 Voorhies, Stephen J., illus., 6324 Voorhis, Horace Jeremiah ("Jerry"), 6165 Vosburgh, Walter S., 5055 Voss, Joseph Ellis, 4596 Voters and voting, 6334, 6336, 6414, 6418-20, 6422 registration, 6403—4 Voting maps, congressional, 2974 A Voyage to Pagany, 1 872 A Voyage to Purilia, 1688 Voyages, small-boat, 5021 Voyageurs. See Boatmen, French- Canadian W W,i 3 i 3 Wabash River and valley, 3995 Wade, John Donald, 4068 Wade, Mason, 3069 Wadsworth, Jeremiah, about, 6016 Wagenknecht, Edward Charles, 427, 2526 Wager, Paul W., ed., 6217 Wages, 4310, 6040, 6048 Waggoner, Hyatt H., 359, 364, 2527 Wagner, Fred J., 5007 Wagner Act, 6053 The Wagnerian Romances, about, 1278 Wah 'kon-tah, i"]i<) Wahlke, John C, ed., 3128-29 Waite, John Barker, 6308 Waite, Morrison R., about, 6096, 6259 Waiting for Lefty, 2064, 2327 Wake Island, 4218 Wake Island (poetry), 2106 Wa\e Up the Echoes, 4984 The Waging, 2103-4 Walcott, Charles Doolittle, about, 4775 Walcott, Joe, about, 5025 Wald, Lillian D., 4614 about, 4854 Walden, 589-93, 606 WaldenPond, 585 Walker, Charles R., 6055 Walker, Franklin D., 4202 Walker, Harvey, 6166 Walker, John, 5758 Walker, Mabel L., 4612 Walker, "Singin' Billy," 5577 A Walter in the City, 2704 Wall, Joseph Frazier, 2892 Wall, Norman J., 5834 The Wall, 1992 Wall decoration, 5726, 5730 Wall Smacker, 5006 Wallace, Anthony F. C, 2834-35 Wallace, Bigfoot, about, 283 1 Wallace, David Duncan, 4092 Wallace, DeWitt, about, 2920 Wallace, Edward S., 3659 Wallace, Ernest, 3014 Wallace, Francis, 5044 Wallace, Paul A. W., 3230-31 Wallace, Willard M., 3683 Wallace, Idaho, 4176 Wallack, Lester, 2301 Waller, George M., ed., 3130-31 Waller, Judith C, 4698 The Wallet of Time, 4931 Wallin, John E. Wallace, 5207 Wallis, Charles L., 1063, 4527 The Walls Do Not Fall, 1322 Walpole, Horace, 6464 Walser, Richard G., ed., 1479, 1900 Walsh, William F., 6279 Walter, Eugene, 2347 Walters, Raymond, 3310, 5667 Wanamaker, John, about, 5957 Wann, Louis, ed., 2276 Wansey, Henry, 4234 The Want of a History of the Southern People, 1 1 03-4 War, 3140, 3524 econ. aspects, 5879, 5889 in art, 5807 moral aspects, 234 satire, 1608 See also Indians, American — wars; Military history; and specific wars, e.g., Civil War War correspondents. See Reporters and reporting War Dept., 3697 about, 3376, 3702, 3726 War Dept. General Staff, about, 3653 War Is Kind, $31,835 War of 1812,3687-88, 4038 causes, 3306, 3553 diplomatic hist., 3189, 3306, 3542 naval operations, 3688 public opinion, 3305-6 War of the Classes, 1048 The War of the Rebellion: A Compila- tion of the Official Records, 3697 War with France (1798-1800), 3685- 86 War with Mexico, 3331, 3333, 3340, .3351.3355. 3554>3689 diplomatic hist., 3586 War with Mexico — Continued personal narratives, 3696 sources, 3349 The War Years, 3393, 3395 Warbasse, James P., 5964 Ward, Alfred Dudley, 5899 ed., 5899 Ward, Archie, 5045 Ward, Artemus, pseud. See Browne, Charles Farrar Ward, Christopher, 3683 Ward, Lester F., about, 4537, 4540, 4542 Ward, Nathaniel, 75-78 about, 3198 Ward, R. M., 5529 Ward, Robert DeCourcy, 2953 Ward, Theodora (Van Wagenen), ed., 850 A Ward of Colonel Starbottle's, 937 Ware, Henry, about, 5472 Ware, Norman J., 6054 Warfel, Harry R., 2528, 5127 ed., 2369 Warne, Colston Estey, ed., 3132-33 Warner, Charles Dudley, 775-77, 1 136— 44 ed., 2277 about, 2466 Warner, Lucien C, about, 4735 Warner, Sam Bass, 6292 Warner, William Lloyd, 4435, 4438, 4557,5146,6029 Warpath, 2831 Warren, Austin, 342, 355, 2529, 5319 Warren, Charles, 6089, 6235-36, 6260 Warren, Earl, 6238 Warren, Helen Ann, 4748 Warren, Joseph, about, 3245 Warren, Mercy (Otis), 2347 Warren, Robert Penn, 2193-2201, 2372, 2378 about, 1809, 2499 Warren, Sidney, 4214 Warren, Stanley, 5208 Warren, Ohio, 3872 The Warrens of Virginia, 2313 Wars I Have Seen, 1769 The Wars of Love, 2132 Warships, 3666, 3708, 3716 The Warwick. Woodlands, 5076, 5080 Washburn, Carleton W., 5234 Washburn, Charles, 2836 Washburn, Frank S., about, 4735 Washburn, Frederic A., 4853 Washington, Booker T., 4449 about, 4449-50, 51 16 Washington, Chester L., 5030 Washington, George, 3268, 3271, 4254 about, 171-76, 381, 1873, 3269-71, 3680,4533 fiction, 1976 port.. 5769 sculpture, 5737 Washington (State), 4215-17 descr., 5070 guidebook, 3939 officials (State), 4215 Orientals, 4468 Puyallup Indians, 3041 resources, 4212 Il88 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Washington (State) Legislature. Joint Fact-Finding Committee on Un- American Activities, about, 6116 Washington (State) University. Com- mittee on Tenure and Academic Freedom, about, 61 16 Washington, D.C., 4063-65, 6215 essays, 1002-3 fiction, 689-90, 722, 1156, 1332, 2278 guidebook, 3826 historic houses, etc., 4063 hist., 3826, 4063-64, 4344 pol. &govt., 4065, 6215 public life, 2861 reporters & reporting, 2861, 2930 soc. life & cust., 2668-69, 33 20 > 33^2, 3395,4065,4279,4283 Washington, D.C., Navy Yard, hist., 3670 Washington, Ga., 3842 The Washington Correspondents, 2861 Washington Herald, about, 2862 Washington Post, about, 2862 Washington Square, 1008, 1014 Washington Times-Herald, about, 2862 Washington University (St. Louis), 5187 The Waste Land, 1357, 1359 about, 1367 The Watch Diggers, 2212 Watch on the Rhine, 1989, 2334, 2336 Water conservation, 5808, 5858 Water power, Rochester, N.Y., 4050, 4052 Water resources Great Plains, 4164 Middle West, 41 13 Mo., 4108 N. Mex., 4198 Water-supply problem (city), 4797 Waterman, Thomas Tileston, 5725 Waterman, Willoughby Cyrus, 4597 Waters, Edward N., 5615, 5681 ed., 5560 Waters, Frank, 4017 The Waters of Siloe, 2040 Waterways, inland, 3786, 4312, 5018, 5920, 5923 See also Canals; Great Lakes; Rivers Watkins, Floyd C, 1901 ed., 2320 Watkins, Myron W., 6026 Watson, Elmo Scott, 2864 Watson, Forbes, 5741 Watson, Frank Dekker, 4626 Watson, John Broadus, 5393 about, 5389 Watson, Thomas E., about, 3451 Wattenberg, William W., 4573 Watterson, Henry, 2892 about, 2892 Watts, Harold H., 1674 Waud, Alfred R., about, 5806 Waugh, Coulton, 2865 The Wave, 1745 Waverly, Md., 2781 Way, Frederick, 3992 Way Down East, 561 The Way of the Churches of Christ in New England, 19 The Way of the South, 4079 The Way West, 1490 Wayfaring Stranger, 5553 Wayne, Anthony, about, 3684 The Wayward Bus, 1778 The Wayward Press, 2904 The Wayward Pressman, 2904 We Accept with Pleasure, 2415 We Always Lie to Strangers, 5544 We Are Betrayed, 1423 We Are Not Divided, 5487 We Called It Culture, 4893 We Speak, for Ourselves, 3145 We Went T hataway , 2153 We Were New England, 4029 We Who Built America, 4417 Wealth, 292 Wealth and Commonwealth, 4044 Weapons, 3664, 371 1 The Weary Blues, 1521 Weather, 2950 See also Climate Weather Bureau, 2953 about, 2951-52, 4764 Weather lore Ozark Mountains, 5544 Southwest, 5509 Weaver, James Baird, about, 3433 Weaver, John E., 2966 Weaver, Raymond M., 474, 566 ed., 487, 489 Weaver, Robert C, 4451 Weaver, Samuel P., 6103 Weaver, William Wallace, 4627 The Web and the Rock, 1890-91 Webb, Walter Prescott, 4164 Weber, Brom, 1306 ed., 332, 1305 Weber, Carl J., comp., 1023 Weber, Clara C, comp., 1023 Weber, Gustavus A., 4764, 4766-67, 4769-72 Webster, Clarence M., 3965 Webster, Daniel, 3336 about, 2674, 3336, 4034 fiction, 1222 Webster, Noah, 2236, 5127 about, 2277, 2364, 5121, 5127 Webster's New International Dic- tionary of the English Language, 2236, 2238 Wecter, Dixon, 786, 791, 820, 3098, 3652, 3662, 4533-34 ed., 801-2, 2460-61 The Wedge, 1878 A Week on the Concord and Merri- mack Rivers, 587-88, 606 Weeks, Edward A., 2837-38 about, 2838, 2922 Weeks, Lyman Horace, 6458 Weeks, Mary Elvira, 4731 Weems, Mason Locke, 171-77 bibl., 177 Wehle, Harry B., 5759, 5804 Weidner, Edward W., 6196 Weinberg, Albert K., 3760 Weiner, Edward, 2894 Weingarten, Joseph A., 2272 Weinlick, J. R., 5442 Weinstein, J. J., 4457 Weisberger, Bernard A., 2851, 5403 Weisenburger, Francis P., 4120-21 Weiser, Conrad, about, 3230 Weisgall, H. D., 4458 Weiss, Paul, 5379-82 ed., 5346 about, 5378 Weitenkampf, Frank, 2859, 5782 Weitling, Wilhelm, about, 4481 Welch, William Henry, about, 4722, 4813, 4821, 4823, 4829, 4831, 4834, 4845 Weld, Isaac, 4269-70 about, 4269 Weld, Ralph Foster, 4046 Weld, Theodore Dwight, 3360 about, 3360, 3413 1^/^^,1648 Welker, Robert Henry, 4741 The Well Wrought Urn, 2379 Wellek, Rene, 2529, 3739 Welles, Edgar T., ed., 3416 Welles, Gideon, 3416 about, 3416 Welles, Sumner, 3549, 4513 ed., 3501 Wellesley College, 2766 Wellman, Paul I., 4158 Wells, Benjamin W., ed., 2345 Wells, Carolyn, comp., 633 Wells, Frederic L., comp., 4838 Wells, H. G., about, 4225 Wells, Henry W., 1628, 2530 Wells, Horace L., 4715 Wells, Ronald Vale, 5263 Welty, Eudora, 2202-9 about, 1809, 2372 Wendell, Barrett, about, 2694 Wendell, Mitchell, 6206, 6293 Wenger, J. C, 5442 Went, Stanley, ed., 3040 Wentworth, Edward Norris, 5874 Wentworth, Harold, 2241 Wentz, Abdel R., 5461 Werner, Morris R., 4977 Wertenbaker, Green Peyton, 4191 Wertenbaker, Thomas Jefferson, 3087, 3232-35, 3748, 4088, 5204 Wescott, Glenway, 1839-41 Wesley, Charles, about, 5463 Wesley, Edgar B., 3050, 4142 Wesley, John, about, 5463 West, Benjamin, 144 about, 5749 West, E., 5442 West, James, pseud. See Withers, Carl West, Jessamyn, 2210-14 West, Nathanael, 1842-44 West, Ray Benedict, 2362, 5465 ed., 2531, 4176 West, RichardS., Jr., 3416 West, Victor J., 6407 The West, 2610, 3759, 3783, 3948, 3964, 4145-50, 4860 biog. (collected), 4175 descr. & trav., 4148 disc. & explor., 2971, 3335, 3345 econ. condit., 4149 folklore, 5518, 5526, 5591 folksongs & ballads, 5560, 5569 geology, 2935 INDEX / 1 189 The West — Continued guidebook, 3789 hist., 2867, 3048, 3074, 3078, 3105, 3137. 3M7. 3151. 3964* 3967, 4001, 4017, 4146, 4148-58, 4160, 4164, 4174, 4176-77. 4179, 4186 pictorial works, 4151-53, 4158, 5770, 5777, 5802, 5806 18th cent., 3170, 3237, 3271, 3307 19th cent., 3331, 3342-44. 3356 language (dialects, etc.), 2253 law, 6220 physiography, 2935 soc. life & cust., 4097 theater, 4943 travel & travelers 18th cent., 3170, 4235 19th cent., 365-67, 391, 984, 3069, 3298, 3348, 4223, 4235, 4277-78, 4281, 4315, 4320, 4344, 4372, 4382-83, 4386- 87 The West in literature, 768, 772-74, 1064-65, 1068, 2831, 3759 descr., 365-67, 1072-77, 1079-83, 2153 drama, 1069-70 fiction, 312, 683-86, 984-85, 1145- 48, 1239, 1420-24, 1484-90, 1644, 1646, 1763, 1954-57, 2161-62, 2415 poetry, 926, 933-34, 941-44, 1064, 1066-67, 1644-45 short stories, 687, 926-32, 937, 939- 40,1145 West Indies, 3168 in literature, 945-52 The West in American History, 3078 West of Midnight, 1970 West Point, 3656 West-Running Brook., 1452 West Virginia, 4089 fiction, 1225 folksongs & ballads, 5572 guidebook, 3830 hist., 4089 legislators, 4089 Westchester County, N.Y., soc. condit., 4577 Westcott, Minita, ed., 6019 Westerfield, Bradford, 3616 Westerfield, Ray Bert, 5974 Westering, 14 10 Western dialect in literature, 683-87, 933-34. 941744 Western Federation of Miners, about, 6045 The Western Humanities Review, 2575 Western Lands and the American Revo- lution, 3237 Western Literary Institute and College of Professional Teachers, about, 5121 Western Reserve, hist., 4030, 41 18 The Western Review, 2576 Western Star, 1222 Westerns (novels), 1314, 1484-86, 1686-87 Westin.A. F., 6128 Westinghouse, George, about, 4790 Westmeyer, Russell E., 5925 The Westover Manuscripts, 1 3 Westward Ho!, 516 Wetmore, Alexander ed., 2962 about, 4775 Wetmore, Claude H., 6430 Wetmore, Elizabeth (Bisland), 951-53 Weyl, Nathaniel, 3148-49 Whaling, 5871 fiction, 470, 481-83, 491 Wharton, Charles, about, 5477 Wharton, Edith, 1845-55 about, 1856, 2537 Wharton School of Finance and Com- merce, about, 6017 What Are Years, 1 62 1 What Dooley Says, 866 What Is American Literature? , 2523 What Is Humanism? , 51 15 What Man Can Make of Man, 5314 What Price Glory?, 2332 What's O'clock, 1583-84 Wheat, Carl I., 2641 Wheat, 3944, 4141-42, 4165, 5830 fiction, 1093-95 Wheeler, A. C, 2305 Wheeler, Anne Boiling, 5763 Wheeler, Harold Alden, about, 4803 Wheeler, Joseph Towne, 6448 Wheeler, Lynde Phelps, 4751 Wheelock, John Hall, 1857-58 ed., 2350 Wheelwright, Philip, 1367 Whelpton, Pascal K., 4399, 4402 When Johnny Comes Marching Home, 3652 When Lilacs Last in the Door-Yard Bloom' d, 623 When the Frost Is on the Punkin , 11 26 When the Tree Flowered, 1 646 When the War Ends, 6392 When the Whippoorwill, 1684 When This You See Remember Me, 1773 Where Main Street Meets the River, 2632 Where the Cross Is Made, 1648 Where the Word Ends, 5679 Whetstone, Pete, 5542 Whicher, George F., 592, 2496 ed., 3107-36 Whicher, Stephen E., 306 A Whig Embattled, 3324 Whig Party, 3141, 3255, 3324, 3326, 3333. 3344, 6075, 6351 New York (State), 2691, 6374 Whigs (Revolution), 2691 poetry, 165, 167 New York (State), 4044 Whipple, George Chandler, 4879 Whipple, Mary Anne, ed., 3002 Whiskey rebellion (1794), 3280 Whistler, James McNeill, about, 2616, 5776 Whitaker, Arthur P., 3514-15, 3579 Whitaker, Joe Russell, 5900 White, Andred D., about, 5 191 White, Andrew S., about, 3761 White, B. F., 5577 White, Charles Langdon, 2940 White, David Manning, ed., 6443 White, Donald J., 5872 White, Edward A., 3761 White, Edward Douglas, about, 6245 White. Elizabeth Brett, 3775 White, Elwyn Brooks, 1816, 1859-63 ed., 2370 White, Frederic R., 730 White, John, about, 3198 White, John M., 5849 White, Katherine S., ed., 2370 White, Leonard D., 6175-79 White, Llewellyn, 4687 White, Morton G., 4545, 5291, 5295 White, Newman I., 5564 White, Theodore H., ed., 3723 White, Walter Francis, 2839—40 about, 2840 White, William, Bp., 5457 White, William Alanson, 4840 about, 4840 White, William Allen, 2887, 2893, 3481 about, 2893 White, William Carter, 5653 White, William Chapman, 3966 White April, 2780 White Buildings, 1304 White Bull (Sioux chief), about, 2831 White civilization and Negroes in literature, 2631 and the American Indians, 2729, 2835, 3082, 3156, 3161, 3171, 3180, 3229-30 White Collar, 4553 White Dresses, 1475, 2332 The White Gate, 1284 White Hopes and Other Tigers, 4991 White House Office, about, 6144 White-Jacket, 274, 479-80 White Knife Shoshoni Indians, 3041 White Mule, 1874-75, 1882 The White Oxen, 2387 The White Slave & Other Plays, 2316 White spirituals, 5554-55, 5558 Southern States, 5577 White-field, George, about, 5396, 5480 Whitehead, Alfred N., 5129, 5384 about, 5378, 5383, 5385 Whitehall, Walter Muir, 6475 Whiteman, Paul, 5678 Whiting, B. J., 2256 Whitley, William T., 5774 Whitlock, Brand, 6434 about, 6434 Whitman, Walt, 619-46, 2290, 2363, 2406 about, 280, 470, 647-52, 654-61, 740, 1303, 1727, 2277, 2280, 2394, 2397, 2413, 2420, 2422- 23, 2456, 2476, 2491, 2503, 2513, 2624 bibl., 633, 637 catalog, 659 concordance, 653 Whitman, William, 3041 Whitney, Eli, about, 4786, 4789 Whitney, Gertrude Vanderbilt, about, 5800 Whitney, Janet, ed., 182 Whitney, Willis R., about, 4785 Whitney Foundation, 5198 1 190 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES Whitney Museum of American Art, New York, 5798-5800 about, 5798-5800 Whittall, Gertrude Clarke. Gertrude Clarke Whittall Poetry and Litera- ture Fund, 660 Whitten, Charles W., 5000 Whittier, John Greenleaf, 179, 181, 244, 662-73, 4036 about, 662, 672 Whittlesey, Walter, 5677 Whiz Mob, 2262 Who Blowed Up the Church House?, 5545 Wholesale trade, 5949 Whom We Shall Welcome, 4425 Why Johnny Can't Read, 5226 Whyte, William F., 4598 Wickjord Point, 1591 Wide Is the Gate, 1758 The Wide Net, 2205 Wider Horizons of American History, 3075 The Widow's Marriage, 207-8 The Widows of Thornton, 2179 Wied-Neuwied, Maximilian Alexander Philipp, Prinz von, 4308-09 about, 4307 Wieland, 1 1 0-1 1 , 117 Wieman, Henry Nelson, 5437 about, 5433 Wiener, Philip P., 5264 ed., 5353 Wienpahl, P. D., 5291 Wieting, Charles Maurice, 5964 The Wife, 2314 A Wife at a Venture, 2310 The Wife of His Youth, 758 Wiggins, Lida Keck, 859 Wigglesworth, Michael, 79-83 Wight, Frederick S., 5767 Wigmorc, John H., 6268 Wigwam and Bouwerie, 4044 Wilbur, Earl Morse, 5471 Wilbur, Homer A. M., pseud. See Lowell, James Russell Wilbur, James H, Father, about, 3035 Wilbur, Ray Lyman, 3487, 4840, 4884 Wilbur, Richard, 2215-17 ed., 2363 Wilcox, Francis O., ed., 3635 Wilcox, Jerome K., ed., 6205 Wilcox, Walter W., 5838-39, 5850, 5899,6133 The Wild Flag, 1859 Wild Horse Mesa, i486 Wild Life of the South, 1725 The Wild Palms, 1390 Wild Scenes in the Forest and Prairie, 367 Wildcats (football team), about, 4993 Wilder, Burt G., 4724 Wilder, Thornton, 1864-69, 2327 The Wilderness Hunter, 2794 Wildes, Harry Emerson, 3684, 3993-94 Wildlife birds, 2960, 2962 conservation, 5870 Yellowstone National Park, 4182 Wildwood, Will, pseud. See Pond, Frederick E. Wiley, Bell Irvin, 3704-5 Wiley, Farida A., ed., 744 Wiley (John) and Sons, about, 6453 Wiley, Lulu R., 109 Wilkes County, Ga., 3842 Wilkins, J. H., 2311 VVilkins, Mary E. See Freeman, Mary E. (Wilkins) Wilkinson, James, about, 3273, 3660 The Will to Believe, 5323 Willard, Charles B., 661 Willard, Frances Elizabeth, about, 2615 Willcox, Walter F., 4390, 4403 Williams, Albert N., 3967 Williams, B. C, ed., 2351 Williams, Ben Ames, ed., 2637 Williams, Cecil B., ed., 204 Williams, D. C, 5335 Williams, Daniel Day, 5438 Williams, Edward, ed., 27 Williams, Edward I. F., 5125 ed., 5242 Williams, Edwin E., ed., 6478 Williams, George, about, 5490 Williams, George Huntston, ed., 5424 Williams, Gluyas, illus., 1214 Williams, Herbert Lee, 2909 Williams. Hermann Warner, 5768 Williams, John P., 5404 Williams, Joseph P., 5033 Williams, Kenneth P., 3706 Williams, Leewin B., 2370 Williams, Mary Wilhelmine, 3559 Williams, Oscar, 1870-71 ed., 2344 Williams, Phyllis H., 4496 Williams, Ralph C, 4880 Williams, Rebecca (Yancey), 2841-42 about, 2842 Williams, Robin M., 4558 ed., 5206 Williams, Roger, 20, 84-89, 5418 about, 84, 89, 3196-97, 5396, 5443, 6068 Williams, Stanley T., 383, 398, 793, 2412,2532-34,3693 ed., 393, 401, 2460-61 Williams, Tennessee, 2218-28, 2334-36 Williams, William Appleman, ed., 3518 Williams, William Carlos, 656, 1872-85 about, 1880, 1886, 2426, 2497-98 Williams College, 5221 Williams County, Ohio, 3863 Williamson, George, 1371 Williamson, James A., 3169, 3173-74 Williamson, Thames R., 3968 Willis, Edgar E., 4682 Willis, Nathaniel Parker, 674-82, 2295, 2337. 2347 about, 2277 Williwaw, 21 8 1 Willoughby, Westel Woodbury, 6104 Willoughby, William F., 6167, 6180, 6309 Willow Run, Mich., 4586 Wilmer, James Jones, 123 Wilmerding, Lucius, 61 68, 641 1 Wilmot, David, about, 3339 Wilmot, Walter S., Jr., 6134 Wilmot Proviso, 3339 Wilson, Alexander, 4741 about, 4724, 4741 Wilson, Arthur Herman, 5659 Wilson, C. R., 3058 Wilson, Edmund, 2512, 2535-37, 2539- 43 ed., 1226, 2538 about, 1016, 2443 Wilson, Everett E., 4621 Wilson, Francis Graham, 6070 Wilson, George Lloyd, 5943 Wilson, George P., 2270 Wilson, Harold Fisher, 4031 Wilson, Harry Leon, 1546 Wilson, Herbert W., 3708 Wilson, James Grant, 329 ed., 328, 3080, 4049 Wilson, James Harrison, 2881 Wilson, John, 3020 Wilson, Louis Round, 6487 Wilson, Milburn L., 4579, 5426 about, 5426 Wilson, Orlando W., 4660 Wilson, Paul A., 3557 Wilson, Robert Renbert, 3526 Wilson, William B., about, 6051 Wilson, William E., 3995 Wilson, Woodrow, 2296, 3469 about, 2492, 2591, 3058, 3111, 3121, 3470-73. 3489. 354L 5222, 6359, 6428, 6432 Wilstach, Paul, 3271 Wiltse, Charles M., 3328, 6071 Winchell, Walter, about, 2894 Wind, Herbert Warren, 5051, 5053 Wind over Wisconsin, i960 Windless Cabins, 1823 Winds of Doctrine, 5368 The Winds of Fear, 263 1 Winds of Morning, 1 3 1 4 Windswept, 1288 Wine from These Grapes, 1609 Winesburg, Ohio, 1179 Winged Victory, 1491 Wingersky, Melvin F., ed., 6276 The Wingless Victory, 11 74 The Wings of the Dove, 996-97 about, 998 Winkler, John K., 2884 Winn, Matt J., 5057 about, 5057 The Winner, 1690 Winnick, Louis, 4395 The Winning of the West, 3307 Winooski River, 4010 Winship, George Parker, 38, 6448, 6459 Winslow, Charles E. A., 4877, 4881 Winslow, Mary N., 2584 Winslow, Ola Elizabeth, 3197, 3751, 5299,5417 Winsor, Justin, ed., 4036 Winston, Ellen, 4448 Winston, Robert W., 3412 Winter, Jefferson, 4943 Winter, William, 4931, 4934, 4938-39 A Winter Diary , 1827 Winter in April, 1638 A Winter in the West, 366 The Winter Sea, 181 1 Winterich, John T., 6464 ed., 829 INDEX / II9I Winters, Robert K., ed., 5865 Winters, Yvor, 2544 about, 1 23 1, 2443 Winterset, 1171-74, 2 55i> 2336—37 Winther, Oscar Osburn, 4214 Winthrop, John, Jr., about, 3198, 4735 Winthrop, John, Sr., 90-91, 3219 about, 90, 3198, 4034 Winthrop, Margaret (Tyndal), 90 Winthrop, Robert C, 4036 Wirt, W., 2296 Wirth, Louis, 3739 Wisan, Jacob M., ed., 4871 Wisbey, Herbert A., 5497 Wischnitzer, Mark, 4459 Wisconsin, 3948, 4139-40 architecture, 5719 Germans, 4478 govt., 6195 governors, 4139 guidebooks, 3883-85 historical geography, 2969 hist., 3663, 4139 Norwegians, 4487 towns, 4109 travel & travelers, 4324, 4347 Wisconsin. University, 5194 Wisconsin Earth, 1959 Wisconsin in literature drama, 1556 fiction, 1453-59, 1839-40, 1959-62, 1964, 2030, 2129 personal narrative, 1078, 1959, 1965 poetry, 1959 short stories, 1453, 1839, 1 84 1 , 1963 Wisconsin River, 3985 Wise, Isaac M., about, 5483 Wise, John, 92-95 about, 92, 6068 Wise, Stephen S., 5483 about, 5483 Wise County, Va., 5529 See also Virginia — folklore Wish, Harvey, 3150, 3474 Wissler, Clark, 2987-89, 4592 Wister, Owen, 1145-48 Wiszniewski, Wladek, about, 4495 The Wit of Porportuk., 1058 The Witch Diggers, 2212 Witchcraft, 3205, 5513 Mich., 5535 New England, 5541 Salem, Mass., drama, 198, 200, 2048 fiction, 1439, 1917 trials, 40-42, 56 Schoharie County, N.Y., 5539 The Witching Hour, 2337, 2348 With a Quiet Heart, 4936 With Lust for Life, 2815 With the Procession, 889 With Various Voices, 4143 With Western Eyes, 1656 Withers, Carl, 4585 comp., 5592 Within an Inch of His Life, 2304 Without Fear or Favor, 2906 Without Magnolias, 2051 A Witness Tree, 1452 Wittich, Walter A., 5231 Wittke, Carl F., 2899, 4417, 4498, 5640 ed., 4089, 4106, 4120-21, 4139, 4180, 4194 Witty, Paul, ed., 5205 Wobblies. See Industrial Workers of the World Woestemeyer, Ina Faye, ed., 3 151 The Wolf, 1094 The Wolf That Fed Us, 2015 Wolfe, James, about, 3171 Wolfe, Julia Elizabeth, 1893 Wolfe, Linnie Marsh, ed., 1080 Wolfe, Thomas, 1887-94 about, 1892, 1895-1901, 2372, 2376, 2406, 2427-28 Wolfenstein, Martha, 4951 Wolff, Robert L., 3516 Wolle, Muriel V. (Sibell), 4177 Wolseley, Roland E., 2850, 2912, 2919 Wolseley, Garnet J., viscount, 3697 Womack, Bob, about, 4 181 Woman in the Nineteenth Century, 315 The Woman of Andros, 1864 A Woman of Means, 2178 The Woman Within, 1463 Woman's Revenge, 2303 Women, 4315, 4387, 5212 biog. (collected), 2615 delinquents, 4649 education, 165, 167, 5116, 5193, 5198 bibl., 5212 employment, 4312, 4341 fertility, 4402 in history, 3139,4563 in industry, 2583 in literature, 4524 in society, 2583 Indian, 3042 legal status, 2588, 4290, 4516, 6409 physicians & surgeons, 4820, 4860 publishers, 2588 status. See Social status — women S.C., 4091 New York (City), 4047 Washington, D.C., 4065 The West, 4098 The Women, 2327, 2333 The Women at Point Stir, 1533 Women at Yellow Wells, 1553 Women of Trachis, 1664 The Women on the Porch, 1470 The Women on the Wall, 2165 Women's rights in literature, 313, 315-6 fiction, 992-95, 1008, 1565 Won at Last, 2308 Wonder-Wording Providence, 1628- 1651 , 3211 Wonderful Neighbor, 2655 The Wonders of the Invisible World, 41-42 Wood, Gar, about, 5016 Wood,H. J., 3169 Wood, Helen, 4712 Wood, James Playsted, 2919 Wood, Leonard, about, 2684, 3595 Wood, Ralph, ed., 4479 Wood-carving, 5603 Woodard, Clement M., 2256 Woodberry, George E., 241 1, 2545-48 about, 2385, 2513 Woodbridge, F. J. E., 5289 Woodbridge, Homer, 2503 Woodburn, James A., 3368 Woodbury, Coleman, ed., 4613 The Woodcutter's House, 1637 Wooddy, Carroll H., 6194, 6383 Woodfin, Maude H., ed., 16 Woodford, Frank B., 3358 Woodling, George V., 4780 Woodress, James L., 971, 1808 Woodring, Paul, 5239 Woodrow Wilson Foundation, 3642 Woodrow Wilson Foundation. Study Group, 1950-51, 3608 Woodruff, George P., 5952 Woods, Henry F., 3152 Woods, Walter, 2305 Woods and woodworking, 5598, 5724 Woodson, Carter G., 5502 Woodward, Comer Vann, 3417, 3451, 4078, 4444 Wood worth, Robert S., 5391 about, 5389, 5391 Woodworth, Samuel, 2295 Woody, Thomas, 5212 ed., 5130 Woofter, Thomas J., 5540 Wool industry, 5910 Woollcott, Alexander, 491 1 Woolley, Mary E., 5193 Woolman, John, 178-85 Woolson, Constance Fenimore, 1149- 52 about, 1 1 52 Worcester, Mass. Jews, 1 213 Swedes, 4486 The Worcester Account, 1213 The Word of Love, 1971 A Word of Remembrance and Caution to the Rich, 180 Words That Won the War, 3462 Work, Hubert, 3038 Work songs, 5510, 5517, 5558, 5561, 5564 See also Cowboys — songs & music; Railroadmen Workers. See Labor and laboring classes The Worlds of Love, 2054 Works Projects Administration, 3786, 4630 The World (New York), about, 2889 The World a Mask., 2300 The World and the Individual, 5355-56 World Court, 3534 World Enough and Time, 2199 The World I Live In, 2707 A World I Never Made, 1374 The World in a Man-of-War, 479 The World in the Attic, 2052 The World Is a Wedding, 2137 The World of Fiction, 2418 The World of Washington Irving, 2381 World politics, 3557, 3618, 3621-22, 3625, 3629, 3634, 5310 World power, U.S. as a, 3520, 3527, 3532, 3769 See also Foreign relations The World, the Flesh, and H. Allen Smith, 2155 1 1 92 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES A World to Win, 1758 World War I, 3097, 3462-63, 3468-71, 3473»370?-i6 aerial operations, 371 1 costs, 3454 diplomatic hist., 3541 in foreign-language newspapers, 2897 military operations, 3715 naval operations, 3716 songs, 5616 sources, 3524 World War 1 in literature diaries, journals, etc., 1167, 1310 fiction, 1326, 1380, 1396, 1496 reporting, 11 70 short stories, 1413 World War II, 3482-83, 3499, 3500b, 3668, 3717-27 aerial operations, 2813-14, 3717, 3727 agriculture, 5838 campaigns, 3718-20, 3722 causes, 3130, 3563,3590 conscientious objectors. See Con- scientious objectors diplomatic hist., 3537-38, 3544, 3546-47, 3549, 3562, 3576, 3591 econ. aspects, 4586, 4589, 5879, 5977 evacuation of Japanese, 2811-12, 4469, 6120 historiography, 3726 naval operations, 3721 personal narratives, 2813-14, 3718- 19, 3723 pictorial works, 3726 relations with Spain, 3572 science, 4761, 4778 social aspects, 4625 Mediterranean Sea, 3573 World War II in literature, 2746, 2807 drama, 1491, 2046 fiction, 1247, 1249, 1302, 1499, 1640, 1839, 1940-41, 1992-94, 2003-4, 201 1, 2025-26, 2053, 2092-94, 2146, 2169, 2181, 2229-30 personal narratives, 1769-70 poetry, 1608, 1948, 1999, 2139, 2141 reporting, 1992, 2011, 2044 short stories, 2057 The World's Body, 1678 World's Christian Fundamentals Asso- ciation, about, 5430 World's End, 1758 World's Fair (1893), Chicago, 4134-36 The World's Rim, 3015 Worn Earth, 1968 Worship, 292 Wouk, Herman, 2229-31 The Wound and the Bow, 2537 Wounds in the Rain and Other Im- pressions of War, about, 1278 Woytinsky, Wladimir S., 6040 Wrensch, Frank A., 5054 Wrestling, 5060-61 Wright, Alfred J., 2940 Wright, Benjamin Fletcher, 6072, 6105 Wright, Charles, about, 4734 Wright, Chauncey, 5386-87 about, 5264, 5386-87 Wright, Chester W., 5883 Wright, Conrad, 5424, 5472 Wright, Edith A., 561 1 Wright, Fanny. See D'Arusmont, Francis (Wright) Wright, Frank Lloyd, 5712 about, 571 1-12 Wright, Henry, 4612 Wright, John K., 2941 ed., 2938, 2974 Wright, Louis B., 2412, 3236, 3737, 3749 ed., 15-16, 2339 Wright, Nathalia, 505 Wright, Orville, about, 4788, 5938 Wright, Richard, 2232-35, 4439 Wright, Robert Joseph, about, 4536 Wright, Thomas Goddard, 2549 Wright, Wilbur, about, 4788, 5938 Wriston, Henry M., 3600 The Writer in America, 2382 Writers in Crisis, 2428 Writers' Program, 3786 The Writing of American History, 3057 Wrong, George M., 3175, 3272 Wroth, Lawrence C, 6440, 6448 ed., 77 Wunderlfind, 2024 Wylie, Elinor (Hoyt), 1902-4 about, 1904, 2499 Wylie, Max, 4697, 5705 Wylie, Philip, 5097 Wyllie, Irvin G., 3762 Wyman, Jeffries, about, 4724 Wyoming, 3951, 3967, 3971, 4179 Arapaho Indians, 3041 fiction, 1145-48 hist., 3911,3961,4147,4174 XIT Ranch, Tex., 4196 Xingu, 1851, 1855 Yachting, 4990, 5019, 5022 Yakima Indians, 3035 Yale Review , 2577 Yale University, 2652 about, 5035 Yale University. Divinity School, about, 5423 Yale University. Library, about, 6470 Yalta Conference, 3109, 3544, 3567 Yank.ee Coast, 1290 Yankee Doodle (song), about, 5616 The Yank.ee Exodus, 4028, 4394 Yankee from Olympus, 2607 Yankee in London, 168 Yankee Life by Those Who Lived It, 4029 Yankee Reformers in the Urban Age, 4530 Yankee Science in the Making, 4730 Yankee Stargazer, 4746 Yankee Stonecutters, 5738 Yankee Teacher, 5309 Yankees, 4435 drama, 168-70 humor, 456-57, 558-61, 2501 Yankees — Continued language (dialects, etc.), 456-57, 558 See also New Englanders Yankees and Yorkers, 4027 Yarmolinsky, Avrahm, tr., 2413 Yates, Brock W., 5003 Yates, Robert, 6087 Yazoo River, 4024 Year before Last, 1 244 The Year of Decision, 3331 Year of Decisions, 3500b Yearbook of Agriculture, 2947, 2951, 5817,5837 The Yearling, 1683 Years of Adventure, 3485 The Years of Preparation, 3465 Years of the Modern, 4513 Years of This Land, 2973 Years of Trial and Hope, 3500b Yeats, William Butler, about, 1225, 2497 Yellow fever, 4105, 4221, 4823 control, 4872 drama, 1520 epidemic, Philadelphia ( 1 793 ) , 4872 fiction, 116— 17 etiology, 5872 Yellow Gentians and Blue, 1458 Yellow Jack, 1520 The Yellow Violet, 217 Yellowstone National Park, 2625, 4182 The Yemassee, 548-49 Yes, My Darling Daughter, 2333 Yet Other Waters, 1376 Yiddish culture, 4459 Yiddish newspapers, 2898 Yoder, Dale, 6042 The Yoke of Thunder, 1295 Yoscmite National Park, 1077, 421 1 Yost, Edna, 4803, 4854 You and I, 2337 You Be the fudge, 6267 You Can't Go Home Again, 1891 You Can't Take It With You, 1491, 1548,2333 Youma, 949-52 Young, Brigham, about, 4183, 5465 Young, Eugene ("Scrapiron"), 5041 about, 5041 Young, Francis Marion, 4179 Young, Frederic Harold, 5320 ed- 5353 Young, Hugh H., 4832 about, 4832 Young, Owen D., about, 2826 Young, Philip, 1505 Young, Roland, 6169 Young, Stark, 1047, 4912, 4968 about, 4912 Young, Thomas Daniel, ed., 2320 Young, William H, 6137 Young Adventure, 1224 Young America, 4520 A Young Desperado, 7 1 1 The Young Lions, 2146 Young Lonigan, 1373 Young Men's Christian Associations, 5490 Young People's Pride, 1222 Your City, 4595 INDEX / 1 1 93 you're Paying for It, 6343 You're the Boss, 6384 Youth, 4564, 4568, 4573, 4619 See also Children and youth literature Youth and the Bright Medusa, 1 277 Zabel, Morton D., ed., 2550 Zaharias, Mildred (Didrikson), "Babe," 4996 about, 4996 Zanesville, Ohio, 3873 Zanzig, Augustus Delafield, 5625 Zaturenska, Marya, 1482, 1905-6 Zeitlin, Jacob, 2503 Zeleny, Carolyn, ed., 4418 Zeller, Belle, 6399 Zenger, John Peter, 2931 about, 2931, 6229 bibl., 2931 Ziegler, Benjamin Munn, ed., 3136 Zigrosser, Carl, 5783 Zilboorg, Gregory, 4833 Zim, Herbert S., 2960 Zimmermann, Frederick L., 6206 Zink, Harold, 6139, 6218, 6391 Zinsser, Hans, 2843-44 Zionism, 4457—59 Znaniecki, Florian, 4495 Zola, Emile, about, 1089 Zollinger, James, 2659 Zollmann, Carl F. G., 5422 ed., 6278 Zolotow, Maurice, 4931 Zon, Raphael, 5816 Zook, George F., 5189 Zoology, 4715 Zorach, William, 5734 Zorbaugh, Harvey Warren, 4599 Zucker, Adolf E., ed., 4481 Zukor, Adolph, 4963 about, 4963 o UNIVERSITY OF ILLINOIS-URBANA 016.9173UN31G C004 A GUIDE TO THE STUDY OF THE UNITED STATE 3 0112 025268738